Visma Net ERP /visma-net-erp section This is the home for Visma Net ERP documentation, where you can find guides, setup steps, and feature-specific help. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Visma Net ERP This is the home for Visma Net ERP documentation, where you can find guides, setup steps, and feature-specific help. Visma Net ERP is a cloud ERP solution for medium and large enterprises that want to scale with better control and less manual work. It brings finance and logistics processes into one system, with automation for areas such as invoicing, payments, purchasing, and inventory. Read more: Getting started /visma-net-erp/getting-started section Start here for basic navigation, common actions, and initial setup. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Getting started Start here for basic navigation, common actions, and initial setup. Personalise the presentation of data /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Personalise the presentation of data About personal settings of the appearance /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/about-personal-settings-of-the-appearance page In the appearance of Visma Net, you can organise the appearance to better correspond to your work responsibilities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About personal settings of the appearance In the appearance of Visma Net, you can organise the appearance to better correspond to your work responsibilities. In the appearance of Visma Net, you can organise the appearance to better correspond to your work responsibilities. In this topic, you will read about the ways the appearance can be personalised. ## Organise the workspace list in the main menu In the appearance, the links to windows and reports are organised in workspaces, each of which corresponds to a functional area in the system. The main menu displays menu items corresponding to these workspaces, such as **Finance** or **Banking**. You can adjust the list of workspaces displayed on the main menu panel by pinning and unpinning workspaces. Pin to the panel only the workspaces that you use frequently. Other workspaces you can access that are unpinned from the panel are hidden under **More items**. You can pin and unpin the main menu items any time you need to. ## Organise the quick menu of a workspace When you click a menu item in the main menu, the system opens the quick menu of the workspace that corresponds to the menu item. You can use this menu to quickly access the windows and reports that you use. You can adjust the list of windows and reports in the quick menu for each workspace. It is recommended that you display on the quick menu only windows and reports that you use frequently. If you click the workspace header, you can toggle between displaying all items and the quick menu. About creating temporary or reusable filters /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/about-creating-temporary-or-reusable-filters page In Visma Net, you can use simple filters to quickly filter data in table columns, and advanced filters with complicated logical expressions to view only the data you need. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About creating temporary or reusable filters In Visma Net, you can use simple filters to quickly filter data in table columns, and advanced filters with complicated logical expressions to view only the data you need. In Visma Net, you can use simple filters to quickly filter data in table columns, and advanced filters with complicated logical expressions to view only the data you need. You can create two types of advanced filters: + Temporary: A temporary filter is a filter for short-term use (the current session) that you can set up in a report window to fine-tune the basic report parameters. + Reusable: A reusable filter is a filter you can set up on a processing or inquiry window to filter the data for future uses of the window. This topic describes the design of temporary and reusable filters. ## The Filter settings table For both temporary and reusable filters, you use the Filter settings table to add, edit, delete, and manage advanced filters. With reusable filters, the table is a part of the **Filter settings** dialog box (for details, see [Reusable filter settings dialog box](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/reusable-filter-settings-dialog-box/)). With temporary filters, you can find the Filter settings table on the **Additional sort and Filters** tab of the report window; the table has the **Additional filtering conditions** heading. ## Filter clauses A filter clause is a part of a filter represented by a table row in the **Filter settings** table. Any advanced filter consists of either one filter clause or multiple filter clauses. For each clause, you specify the following settings in the table row: Property : The entity type associated with the particular table or report that the filter will be applied to. You select a property from the list of available entity types. Condition : The logical operation that applies to the value of the selected property. You select a condition from the list of available conditions. Value : The value for the logical condition used to filter the data. Depending on the selected property and condition, you enter a value (and sometimes a second value as well, depending on the condition). Each value must conform with the data type of the selected property. Generally, there are a series of fixed values are fixed for the property, such as the **Completed** value for the **Status** property. The filtering process is not case-sensitive; that is, the system doesn't differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters in values. To define a clause, you specify the property, the condition, and the applicable values in the table row. For example: In the Task (EP404000) window, you can search for completed tasks by specifying a filter that has **Status** specified as the property, **Equals** specified as the condition, and **Completed** specified as the value. You use **And** and **Or** operators and parentheses to group clauses into logical expressions. You use the **And** operator to find the records that meet the criteria in both the selected clause and the next clause. You use the **Or** operator to find the records that meet the criteria in either the selected clause or the next clause. You can use parentheses to combine clauses into units as parentheses are used in logical statements to define the order of operations. The **And** and **Or** operators work on a unit in parentheses as if the unit was a single clause. If you try to filter the data by using a string that contains an underscore, the result will also contain the values with the same string with any symbol instead of the underscore. For example: If you try to filter the data by a customer name that contains the **Customer_name** string, the system will return all the customers whose name contains any of the following strings: **Customer_name**, **Customer-name**, and **Customer name**. The reason that all of these strings will be returned is that the underscore is used as a wild card character. ## User-relative filter clauses To simplify the process of filtering data by owner or by work group, three predefined user-relative parameters are available in the system. By using these parameters, you can configure **user-relative clauses**. When you use these parameters, you do not need to create multiple rows with specific values—for example, to specify each work group in which you are a member for the **Workgroup** property. Instead, you can use only one parameter, such as **@MyGroups**, to filter the all records of work groups you are a member of. You can find the full list of user-relative parameters below: + `@Me`: The current user. This parameter can be used only for the user-related properties (such as **Owner** or **Custodian** ) that have **Equal** and **Does not equal** conditions. + `@MyGroups`: The work groups in which the current user is a member, excluding the work groups that are the subordinates of these work groups. You can use this parameter for the **Workgroup** property, which has the **Is in** and **Is not in** conditions. + `@MyWorktree`: The work groups in which the current user is a member, including the groups that are subordinates of these groups according to the company tree structure. You can use this parameter for the **Workgroup** property, which has the **Is In** and **Is Not In** conditions. For the user-relative clauses, the system will filter data by the user currently signed in (by using the **@Me** parameter), or by the work group or work groups the signed-in user is a member of (by using the **@MyGroups** or **@MyWorktree** parameter). ## Date-relative filter clauses To make date clauses in reusable filters more flexible, you can use date-relative parameters—parameters that are relative to the current date. + Date-relative parameters cannot be used in temporary filters on report windows. + For the date-relative parameters, the system uses as the current date the date (in coordinated universal time, or **UTC** ) of the server used to run the Visma Net instance. Changing the business date (in the upper-right corner of the screen) does not affect the filter results. Below you can find the full list of date-relative parameters: + `@Today`: The current date as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting days. + `@WeekStart`: The start of the current week as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting weeks. The start and end of the week are determined according to the default system locale or the locale you selected when you signed in to Visma Net. The system locales are specified and configured in the [System locales](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550/) (SM200550) window. + `@WeekEnd`: The end of the current week as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting weeks. The start and end of the week are determined according to the default system locale or the locale you selected when you signed in to Visma Net. The system locales are specified and configured in the [System locales](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550/) (SM200550) window. + `@MonthStart`: The start of the current month as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting months. + `@MonthEnd`: The end of the current month as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting months. + `@QuarterStart`: The start of the current quarter as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting quarters. + `@QuarterEnd`: The end of the current quarter as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting quarters. + `@PeriodStart`: The start of the current financial period. The financial periods are defined in the [Financial year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) (GL101000) window, and the current date is specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting financial periods. + `@PeriodEnd`: The end of the current financial period. The financial periods are defined in the [Financial year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) (GL101000) window, and the current date is specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting financial periods. + `@YearStart`: The start of the current calendar year as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting years. + `@YearEnd`: The end of the current calendar year as specified on the server used to run your Visma Net instance. You can modify this parameter by adding or subtracting months. To add a filter clause with a date-relative parameter, you select the parameter from the list. You can modify the parameters by adding or subtracting integers. The date is calculated according to the measurement of the parameter. The system cannot find any records if the modified date is out of range, and will return an error. Add a reusable filter /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/add-a-reusable-filter section You create a reusable filter in the window where you want to use it, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a reusable filter You create a reusable filter in the window where you want to use it, as described in this topic. You create a reusable filter in the window where you want to use it, as described in this topic. For more information, see: [Reusable filter settings dialog box - reference information](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/reusable-filter-settings-dialog-box/)). 1. Open the window you want to add a filter to. 1. Click ![Filter settings](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-filter.png) to open the **Filter settings** dialog box. 1. If there is an existing filter, click **New** to empty the **Filter settings** dialog box. 1. Specify the filter clauses as follows: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new clause. 1. Specify the property, condition, and applicable value or values of the new clause. For more information about filter clauses, see [About creating temporary or reusable filters](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/about-creating-temporary-or-reusable-filters/). 1. Repeat the two previous sub steps for each clause you want to add. 1. If required, add brackets and use operators to join the clauses. 1. If you want to use this filter as the default filter for the current window, select the **Default** check box. 1. If you want to share this filter with other users, select the **Shared** check box. You cannot edit a shared filter in the **Filter settings** dialog box of the window to which the filter applies. 1. If you want to save the filter for future use, do the following: 1. Click **Save**. 1. In the **Enter the filter name here** dialog box, which opens, type the name of the new filter. 1. Click **OK** to close the **Enter the filter name here** dialog box and return to the **Filter settings** dialog box, where the filter name you typed is filled in. 1. Click **OK** to close the dialog box and apply the filter. Modify a reusable filter /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/modify-a-reusable-filter section You can modify a reusable filter in the window this filter is applied to, as described in this topic, if the filter is not shared. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Modify a reusable filter You can modify a reusable filter in the window this filter is applied to, as described in this topic, if the filter is not shared. You can modify a reusable filter in the window this filter is applied to, as described in this topic, if the filter is not shared. 1. Open the window whose filter you want to edit. 1. On the table toolbar, click **![Filter settings](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-filter.png)**. 1. In the **Filter settings** dialog box, click the unlabelled **Filter name** field and select the filter. 1. Do any of the following to modify the filter: + Select or clear the empty check box in a table row to change which clauses are active. + Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)**, and then specify the new clause; repeat this step as many times as you need. + Edit any of the existing clauses. 1. Do one of the following to save your changes: + If the filter is one that you created, click **Save**. + If the filter is a shared filter, you cannot save changes to this particular filter, and the **Save** button is unavailable. If you want to save the filter under another name, click **Save as** and specify the new filter name to save this modified of the shared filter. 1. Click **OK** to close the dialog box. Display or hide table columns /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/display-or-hide-table-columns section You can hide or display table columns according to your preferences. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Display or hide table columns You can hide or display table columns according to your preferences. When displaying or hiding table columns, three tips apply during the process: + Select multiple column headers It is possible to select multiple columns by holding the **Ctrl** key and selecting the columns you want to display. + Select multiple and successive column headers It is possible to select successive columns by holding the shift key and selecting the first and last column you want to display. + Search for column headers it is possible to search for column headers by typing the header name in the search field. ## Display hidden table columns 1. In the table, click ![icon-adjust-table](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-adjust-table.png) to open the ****Columns configuration**** dialog box. 1. Select the columns you want to display in the **Available columns** list. 1. Click the arrow pointing right. 1. Click **OK**. ## Hide table columns 1. In the table, click ![icon-adjust-table](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-adjust-table.png) to open the ****Columns configuration**** dialog box. 1. Select the columns you want to hide in the **Selected columns** list. 1. Click the arrow pointing left. 1. Click **OK**. ## Restore the default table layout 1. In the table, click ![icon-adjust-table](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-adjust-table.png) to open the ****Columns configuration**** dialog box. 1. In the bottom left of the ****Columns configuration**** dialog box, click **Reset to default**. 1. Click **OK**. Configure a temporary filter on a report window /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/configure-a-temporary-filter-on-a-report-window section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a temporary filter on a report window ## Configure a temporary filter 1. Open the report window, and then click the **Additional sort and filter** tab. 1. In the **Additional filtering conditions** table, click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to create a filter clause. (A temporary filter may consist of one filter clause, represented by one row, or multiple filter clauses, represented by multiple rows.) 1. In the **Property** column, select the entity type associated with the report from the list. 1. In the **Condition** column, select the logical operation that will be applied to the value of the selected property. 1. In the **Value** column, type the value for the logical condition used to filter the data. 1. If the logical operation you selected in the **Condition** column requires the second value, type it in the **Second value** column. 1. Repeat Steps 2-6 for each filter clause in this temporary filter. 1. If you want to join any of the filter clauses, do the following: + In the leftmost **Brackets** column of the first clause that should be joined, select the opening bracket or brackets. (The number of opening brackets in the first clause depends on the number of nested clauses.) + In the **Operator** column of the same clause, select the logical operator that will be used to join the clauses. + In the rightmost **Brackets** column of the last clause that should be joint, select the closing bracket or brackets. (The number of closing brackets in the first clause depends on the number of nested clauses and should be equal to the number of opening brackets in the first clause that is joint.) 1. To apply the filter, be sure the other settings in the report window have the values you need, and click **Run report**. ## Modify a filter in a report window After you have run a report for which you configured an ad hoc filter, you can modify the filter before you send or print the report: 1. If you are viewing the report, on the report toolbar of the report, click **Parameters**. The system opens the report window, and the **Parameters** button on the toolbar is highlighted. 1. In the **Additional filtering conditions** table of the **Additional sort and filters** tab, modify the filter conditions. [Configure a temporary filter in a report window](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/configure-a-temporary-filter-on-a-report-window/). For more information, see: 1. Click **Run report**. Create, remove and schedule a report template /visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/create-remove-and-schedule-a-report-template page You can save the parameters you have specified as a template, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create, remove and schedule a report template You can save the parameters you have specified as a template, as described in this topic. You can save the parameters you have specified as a template, as described in this topic. By using this template, you can immediately populate the report window with your preferred parameters, so you can run reports more quickly. This topic also describes how to remove a report template and how to schedule a report processing. ## Create a report template 1. Open a report window. 1. Specify the report parameters and run the report to check the report settings. 1. In the report toolbar, click **Parameters** to view the parameters in the report window. You can click **Parameters** to toggle between the report window and the report without losing the changes made in the report window. 1. To use this template as your default template for the current report (so that when you bring up this report window, the settings of the template are specified), select the **Default** check box. 1. To share this template with other users, select the **Shared** check box. You cannot select a shared template as the default. If you select the **Shared** check box, the **Default** check box becomes cleared and unavailable for editing. 1. Click **Save template**. 1. In the **Enter template name** dialog box, which opens, type the name of the new template. 1. Click **OK**. If you have saved the template as the default, when you open the report window, the template is already selected and the system automatically fills in the selections of the template. If you have not saved the template as the default, you can select it in the **Template** field and the system fills in the selections of the template. ## Remove a report template 1. Open a report window. 1. In the **Template** field, select the report template that you want to remove. 1. On the report window toolbar, click **Remove template**. After removing a template, it disappears from the **Template** field. ## Schedule a report processing 1. Open a report window. 1. In the **Template** field, select the report template that you want to schedule. 1. In the report window toolbar, click **Schedule template**. 1. In the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which opens, click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) (SM205020) window. 1. In the [Automation schedules](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) (SM205020) window, add a new schedule for the report, as described in [Schedule processing](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/procedures/schedule-processing/). After you have added a schedule for the report processing, the system will send the report with the parameters specified in the template according to the schedule settings. Use system-wide actions /visma-net-erp/getting-started/use-system-wide-actions section Visma Net provides you with a number of actions that you can use in many places in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use system-wide actions Visma Net provides you with a number of actions that you can use in many places in the system. Visma Net provides you with a number of actions that you can use in many places in the system. For example: If you forgot where the window you need to use is situated in the site map, you can search for it by its name. Also, if you usually make financial analysis in Microsoft Excel spreadsheets, you can export data from Visma Net to an Excel file. Another thing that you may need is to add files to records (for example, scanned images, pictures, or instructions for employees). Visma Net supports attachments of various types to records. Import data from a local file to a table /visma-net-erp/getting-started/use-system-wide-actions/import-data-from-a-local-file-to-a-table section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import data from a local file to a table You can import data from an Excel spreadsheet or a CSV file to a Visma Net table when you see ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) (the Load records from file button) on the table toolbar. Visma Net uses the spreadsheet format introduced in Microsoft Office 2007, so if you use an earlier version of Microsoft Office, you should install the appropriate plug-in. 1. Open the appropriate window, and select the record to which you want to import data or add a new record. 1. On the table toolbar, click **![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png)**. 1. In the **File upload** dialog box, click **Choose file** and select the file you want to import. 1. Click **Upload** to upload the file to the system. After the file is uploaded, the **Common settings** dialog box is opened. 1. To import an Excel spreadsheet, do the following in the **Common settings** dialog box: 1. If an atypical null value is used in the uploaded file, specify the value in the **Null value** field. 1. In the **Culture** field, select the region whose measurement settings have been used in the uploaded file. 1. In the **Mode** field, select the option that determines which data will be imported into the table: + **Update existing**: To update the rows that are already present in the table and add new rows that are not present in the table. + **Bypass existing**: To import only new rows that were not present in the table. The existing rows will not be updated. + **Insert all records**: To add all rows from the file to the table. If you select this option, you may get duplicated rows because the system won't check for duplicates when importing rows from the file. 1. Click **OK**. 1. To import a CSV file, do the following in the **Common settings** dialog box: 1. If an atypical separator character is used in the uploaded file, specify it in the **Separator chars** field. 1. If an atypical null value is used in the uploaded file, specify the value in the **Null value** field. 1. Select the encoding of the uploaded file in the **Encoding** field. 1. In the **Culture** field, select the region whose measurement settings have been used in the uploaded file. 1. In the **Mode** field, select the option that determines which data will be imported into the table: + **Update existing**: To update the rows that are already present in the table and add new rows that are not present in the table. + **Bypass existing**: To import only new rows that were not present in the table. The existing rows will not be updated. + **Insert all records**: To add all rows from the file to the table. With a CSV file, the uploaded file must contain only rows that have not already been imported. If the system encounters a row that already exists in the table, the import process will be terminated. To resolve the situation, click ![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png), and try to import data in another mode. 1. Click **OK**. 1. In the **Columns** dialog box, match the columns of the imported file (displayed in the **Column name** column) to the columns in the Visma Net table to which you want to import data (displayed in the **Property name** column). 1. Click **OK** to import data to the table. 1. After the data is successfully imported, click **Save** in the window toolbar. After the data is imported and the document is saved, you can continue processing the document according to your organisation's work flow. Attach a file to a record /visma-net-erp/getting-started/use-system-wide-actions/attach-a-file-to-a-record section You can attach a file, such as a scanned document with a signature, to a record, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Attach a file to a record You can attach a file, such as a scanned document with a signature, to a record, as described in this topic. To attach a file to a record, use one of the following methods: + Drag the file: 1. Go to the window where you want to attach a file to a record. If you are in the PL edition of the window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to leave the list view. 1. Select the record you want to attach the file to. 1. Open your file explorer and go to the folder or library where the file is located. 1. Drag and drop the file to the top part of the window. In the top right corner of the window, you will see that the number of files attached to the selected record increases, like this **Files (2)**. + Use the **File upload** dialog box 1. Open the window, and select the record you want to attach the file to. 1. In the window title bar, click **![icon-attach](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-attach.png)**. 1. Select the file you want to attach, click **Open**. You now see the name of the file you have selected in the field to the left of the **Browse** button in the **Files dialog box**. 1. Click **Upload**. The file name is now displayed in the **File name** column. Repeat step 3 to 5 if you want to attach more than one file. 1. Close the dialog box. The system attaches the file to the record and you can see the number of files attached to the selected record, like this **Files (2)**, in the top right corner of the window. Attach a file to a record detail /visma-net-erp/getting-started/use-system-wide-actions/attach-a-file-to-a-record-detail section You can attach a file in any format to a record or record detail, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Attach a file to a record detail You can attach a file in any format to a record or record detail, as described in this topic. 1. Open the window, and select the record you want to attach the file to. 1. On the line where you want to attach a file, click ![icon-attach](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-attach.png). The **Files** dialog box is displayed. 1. Click **Browse**. 1. Select the file you want to attach, click **Open**. You now see the name of the file you have selected in the field to the left of the **Browse** button in the **Files** dialog box. 1. Click **Upload**. The file name is now displayed in the **File name** column. Repeat step 3 to 5 if you want to attach more than one file. 1. Close the dialog box. 1. Verify that the ![icon-attach](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-attach.png) button has changed to the attachment icon: ![icon-attachment](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-attachment.png). Attach a note to a record /visma-net-erp/getting-started/use-system-wide-actions/attach-a-note-to-a-record section You can attach any text to records, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Attach a note to a record You can attach any text to records, as described in this topic. For example, you can add important information for your colleagues who work with this record. 1. Go to the window where you want to attach a note to a record. If you are in the PL edition of the window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to leave the list view. 1. Select the record you want to attach a note to. 1. In the window title bar, click ![icon-notes-inactive](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-notes-inactive.jpg) (Notes). 1. In the **Enter record note** dialog box, type the text of the note. 1. Click **OK**. 1. In the window title bar, verify that the icon to the left of the Notes button has changed to **![icon-notes-active](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-notes-active.jpg)**. To read the note, click ![icon-notes-active](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-notes-active.jpg) in the window title bar. Attach a note to a record detail /visma-net-erp/getting-started/use-system-wide-actions/attach-a-note-to-a-record-detail section You can attach a note to a record detail, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Attach a note to a record detail You can attach a note to a record detail, as described in this topic. For example, you can leave a comment for your colleagues who will process the document later. 1. Go to the window where you want to attach a note to a record. If you are in the PL edition of the window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to leave the list view. 1. In the table, at the beginning of the detail row, click ![icon-notes-inactive](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-notes-inactive.jpg) Note. 1. In the **Enter record note** dialog box, type the text of the note. 1. Click **OK**. 1. In the window toolbar, click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. 1. On the row where you attached the note, verify that the Notes icon has changed to **![icon-notes-active](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-notes-active.jpg)**. To read the note, click the Note icon in the row where you attached it. Configure your email account /visma-net-erp/getting-started/use-system-wide-actions/configure-your-email-account section You personal email address is specified on the General settings tab, in the User settings (SM203010) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure your email account You personal email address is specified on the General settings tab, in the User settings (SM203010) window. For more information: [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/). If you need to send emails from Visma Net, you can configure your signature, which will be automatically added to each email. You can create your signature by using the **Email settings** tab of this window. On the same tab, you can select the system email account that will be used as the default email account when you send emails through Visma Net. The system will automatically sort incoming emails and replies to mass emails and route them to your personal email account. This topic describes how to configure your email account. 1. Go to the [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/) window. 1. Click the **Email settings** tab. 1. In the **Default email account** field, select the system email address that will be used by the system for sending emails on your behalf. 1. If you want to make your calendar visible to other users, select the **Is public calendar** check box. 1. If you want to enter a signature for emails, in the **User email signature** section, do the following: 1. Select the **Include in new emails** check box if you want to insert the signature in each new email that you send by using Visma Net. 1. Select the **Include in replies and forwarded emails** check box, if you want to insert the signature when you reply to or forward emails. 1. In the text editor area, enter your signature for emails. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Using reports /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports section In addition to offering a comprehensive collection of reports for each workspace, Visma Net gives you a high degree of control over each report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Using reports In addition to offering a comprehensive collection of reports for each workspace, Visma Net gives you a high degree of control over each report. A typical report form lets you adjust the report settings to meet your specific informational needs. You can specify sorting and filtering options and select the data by using report-specific settings, such as financial period, ledger, and account, and configure additional processing settings for each report. The settings can be saved as a report template for later use. After you run a report, the prepared report appears on your screen. You can print the report, export the report to a file, or send the report by email. Run a report /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports/run-a-report section Visma Net reports display the information you want to see in easy-to comprehend formats. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run a report Visma Net reports display the information you want to see in easy-to comprehend formats. Visma Net reports display the information you want to see in easy-to comprehend formats. This topic describes how you run a typical report. ## Run a report 1. Open the report window. 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, select the report parameters. 1. Optional: On the **Additional sort and filters** tab, in the **Additional sorting conditions** table, set up the sorting. Do the following: 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Property** column, select the property on which you want to sort. 1. In the **Condition** column, select **Ascending** to perform an ascending sort (that is, A to Z for text, lower to higher for numbers, or newest to oldest for dates), or select **Descending** to perform a descending sort (that is, Z to A for text, higher to lower for numbers, or oldest to newest for dates). 1. Repeat the three previous substeps for each column you want to sort by. 1. Optional: On the **Additional sort and filters** tab, in the **Additional filtering conditions** tab, set up a filter to get only the data you want to see. 1. Optional: In the **Print settings** section of the **Print and email settings** tab, specify the settings for printing the report. 1. Optional: In the **Email settings** section of the **Print and email settings** tab, specify the settings for sending the report by email. 1. Click **Run report**. This generates and displays the report. Now you can print the report or save it to your computer in one of the available formats. ## Change the parameters of a prepared report You can modify report parameters after you've prepared a report. To change the report parameters, do the following: 1. On the toolbar of the report, click **Parameters**. This returns you to the report form, and the **Parameters** button is highlighted, denoting that you are currently viewing the parameters. 1. Change the report parameters. You can click **Parameters** to toggle between the report window and the report without losing the changes made on the report window. 1. Click **Run report** to view the report with the new parameters applied. Create a report with filters /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports/create-a-report-with-filters section In Visma Net you can create a report with additional sorting, regardless of which modules or report you are working with. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a report with filters In Visma Net you can create a report with additional sorting, regardless of which modules or report you are working with. ## How to create a report with additional sorting 1. Open the report for which you want to create a report with additional sorting. For example: Go to the [Transactions for period (GL63300S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-period-gl633000/) window. 1. Go to the **Report parameters** tab. 1. In the **Ledger ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select General ledger. 1. In the **Period** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select which period you want to see. 1. In the **From account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the account you want to make a report of. 1. In the **To account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the same account as you did in step 5 - in order to see only one account. 1. Go to the **Additional sort and filters** tab. 1. Underneath the **Additional sorting conditions** section, under the **Property** column, click one of these default sortings. 1. A little arrow is displayed to the right in the same cell. Click the arrow and select the sorting properties you want. 1. Click in the cell to the right, under the **Condition** column. 1. A little arrow is displayed to the right in the same cell. Click the arrow and select how you want your report to be sorted. By default the system shows **Ascending**. 1. Click the **Run report**. You have made a report where you will see all transactions done on the account and in the period that you selected. If you click ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) in the report, you can change the sorting and run the report again.

Related pages

Windows

 Configure a filter in a report window /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports/configure-a-filter-in-a-report-window section When you generate a report, you can configare an ad hoc filter for the report data. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a filter in a report window When you generate a report, you can configare an ad hoc filter for the report data. 1. Open the report form, and then click the **Additional sort and filter** tab. 1. In the **Additional filtering conditions** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to create a filter clause. (An ad hoc filter may consist of one filter clause, represented by one row, or multiple filter clauses, represented by multiple rows.) 1. In the **Property** column, select the entity type associated with the report from the list. 1. In the **Condition** column, select the logical operation that will be applied to the value of the selected property. 1. In the **Value** column, type the value for the logical condition used to filter the data. 1. If the logical operation you selected in the **Condition** column requires the second value, type it in the **Second value** column. 1. Repeat Steps 2-6 for each filter clause in this ad hoc filter. 1. If you want to join any of the filter clauses, do the following: + In the leftmost **Brackets** column of the first clause that should be joined, select the opening bracket or brackets. (The number of opening brackets in the first clause depends on the number of nested clauses.) + In the **Operator** column of the same clause, select the logical operator that will be used to join the clauses. + In the rightmost **Brackets** column of the last clause that should be joint, select the closing bracket or brackets. (The number of closing brackets in the first clause depends on the number of nested clauses and should be equal to the number of opening brackets in the first clause that is joint.) 1. To apply the filter, be sure the other settings on the report form have the values you need, and click **Run report**. Use additional sort and filters on reports /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports/use-additional-sort-and-filters-on-reports section When you are printing a report and you have a lot of data, you can add additional sorting and filter conditions on the Additional sort and filters tab in the report parameters view. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use additional sort and filters on reports When you are printing a report and you have a lot of data, you can add additional sorting and filter conditions on the Additional sort and filters tab in the report parameters view. ## How to add other sort and filter conditions 1. In the **Additional sorting conditions** area, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Property** column, select your extra sorting conditions. Depending on the report you are printing, the available sorting conditions can, for example be: + general ledger account + stock item description + payment type or + username, 1. Use the **Additional filtering conditions** in the same manner. 1. Click **Run report**.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Use report templates /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports/use-report-templates page If you make the same selections for a report regularly, you can save the selection as a template, to easily pick it up the next time you need to get current data for that particular selection. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use report templates If you make the same selections for a report regularly, you can save the selection as a template, to easily pick it up the next time you need to get current data for that particular selection. This applies to several reports in Financials. ## How to create and save a template 1. As an example, go to the [Balance by customer (AR632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/) window. 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, make your selection. 1. Click **Save template**. The **Enter template name** dialog box is displayed. 1. Enter a name and click **OK**. Your template is displayed in the **Template** field. You can make several templates with different criteria.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a report template /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports/create-a-report-template section You can save the report parameters you have specified as a template. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a report template You can save the report parameters you have specified as a template. You can save the report parameters you have specified as a template. By using this template, you can immediately populate the report window with your preferred parameters to run reports more quickly. ## Create a report template 1. Open a report window. 1. Specify the report parameters and run the report to check the report settings. 1. On the report toolbar, click **Parameters** to view the parameters on the report window. You can click **Parameters** to toggle between the report window and the report without losing the changes made on the report window. 1. To use this template as your default template for the current report (so that when you bring up this report window, the settings of the template are specified), select the **Default** check box. 1. To share this template with other users, select the **Shared** check box. You cannot select a shared template as the default. If you select the **Shared** check box, the **Default** check box becomes cleared and unavailable for editing. 1. Click **Save template**. 1. In the **Enter template name** dialog box, which opens, type the name of the new template. 1. Click **OK**. If you have saved the template as the default, when you open the report window, the template is already selected and the system automatically fills in the selections of the template. If you have not saved the template as the default, you can select it in the **Template** field and the system fills in the selections of the template. ## Remove a report template 1. Open a report window. 1. In the **Template** field, select the report template that you want to remove. 1. On the report window toolbar, click **Remove template**. After removing a template, it disappears from the **Template** field. ## Schedule a report processing 1. Open a report window. 1. In the **Template** field, select the report template that you want to schedule. 1. On the report window toolbar, click **Schedule template**. 1. In the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which opens, click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules overview](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) (SM205020) window. 1. In the Automation schedules overview window, in the **Description** field, enter a description of the new schedule. 1. In the **Window ID** field, make sure the [Send reports](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) (SM205060) window is specified. 1. On the **Details** tab, specify the additional settings of the schedule: 1. Optional: In the **Starts on** field of the **Details** tab, select the start date. By default, the schedule execution starts on the current business date. 1. Optional: If you need to specify an expiration date for the schedule, clear the **No expiration date** check box, and specify the expiration date in the **Expires on** field. 1. Do one of the following: + If you want to limit the number of executions, in the **Execution limit** field, specify the number of times the schedule should be executed. + If you do not need to limit the number of executions, select the **No execution limit** check box. 1. Optional: In the **Process with branch** field, select the branch under which the schedule should be processed. For example: If documents are created by this schedule, the system creates these documents and specifies the selected branch for each document. 1. Optional: Change the time zone in which the schedule will operate. 1. On the **Schedule** tab, configure the execution dates and time as follows: 1. Specify how often the schedule execution should be performed: + To execute the schedule daily or every **x** days, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x day(s)** field, type the number of days between successive executions of the schedule. + To execute the schedule weekly or every **x** weeks, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Weekly**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x week(s)** field, type the number of weeks between successive executions of the schedule. 1. Select the appropriate check boxes for the day or days of the week on which the schedule should be executed. + To execute the schedule monthly or every **x** months, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Monthly**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x month(s)** field, type the number of months between successive executions of the schedule. 1. Select when the schedule should be executed: the day of the month, or the week in the month and the day of the week (such as the third Friday of the month). + To execute the schedule once per financial period or every **x** financial periods, perform the following steps: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **By financial period**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x period(s)** field, type the number of financial periods between successive executions of the schedule. 1. Select the appropriate option button to indicate when the schedules should be executed: at the end of the period, at the start of the period, or on a fixed day of the period (which you should specify if you select this option button). 1. In the **Execution time** section, specify the particular time of the day to start and stop the processing as follows: 1. In the **Starts on** field, select the hour and minute when the first execution of the schedule should start. 1. If you want the processing to be stopped at specific time or you want the processing to be repeated multiple times a day, in the **Stops on** field, select the hour and minute when the first execution of the schedule should stop. 1. If execution of the schedule should be repeated multiple times a day, in the **Every** field, select the interval between successive executions of the schedule. 1. In the **Next execution time** field, make sure the next execution time is correct. 1. If you want the system to execute the schedule at exactly the time specified in the **Next execution time** field, select the **Exact time** check box. If the check box is cleared, the system may shift the next execution time of the schedule by multiple minutes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) on the window toolbar to create the schedule. When you save a newly created schedule, the system gives it an identifier in accordance with the built-in numbering sequence intended for automation schedules. After you have added a schedule for the report processing, the system will send the report with the parameters specified in the template according to the schedule settings. Change report font /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-reports/change-report-font page In Visma Net you can change the font in a report, regardless which modules or report you are working with. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change report font In Visma Net you can change the font in a report, regardless which modules or report you are working with. ## How to change the font in a specific area of a report 1. Open the report you want to edit. For example; Go to the **Aged past due** window. 1. Click the **Edit Report** button in the toolbar. **The Visma BI | Report Designer** opens as a new tab in your browser. 1. Go to the **Design** tab where you will see your report template. 1. Click in the field that you want to edit. The selected field will be displayed with a highlighted blue frame. 1. In the top toolbar you can choose which font, size and style you prefer to have in the specific field. You can also do your changes in the **Properties** section located under the sub menu **Font**. 1. Click the **Preview** tab to see your changes. 1. Click **Publish** when you have completed your changes. 1. A message is displayed to inform you that the new version of your report has been deployed. Click the **Open Report** link to open the report in Visma Net. 1. Here you click the **Run report** button. The font has now been changed in your report.

Related pages

Windows

 Using tables /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Using tables Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About the table toolbar /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/about-the-table-toolbar section Each table in an Visma Net window, tab, or dialog box has a table toolbar, which contains the buttons you can use to work with the details or objects of the table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the table toolbar Each table in an Visma Net window, tab, or dialog box has a table toolbar, which contains the buttons you can use to work with the details or objects of the table. Each table in an Visma Net window, tab, or dialog box has a table toolbar, which contains the buttons you can use to work with the details or objects of the table. A toolbar includes buttons that are specific to the table, standard buttons that most table toolbars have, and the search field (for some tables; for others, the search field is displayed in the filtering area). ## Standard table toolbar buttons The following table describes the standard table toolbar buttons. A table toolbar may include some or all of those buttons. If a table toolbar includes table-specific buttons, they are described in the window reference help topic. |Button|Icon|Description| |---|---|---| |**Refresh**|![Icons_Refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Refresh.png)|Refreshes the data in the table.| |**Switch between grid and window**|![Icons_Form_Grid_Views](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Form_Grid_Views.png)|Controls how the elements are displayed in the window: in a table (grid) with rows and columns; or as separately arranged elements for one table row in a window, with navigation tools you use to move between row data.| |### New record|![Icons_Add_row](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Add_row.png)|Direct you, for example, to the Purchase order or the Customers window to create a new purchase order or customer.| |**Delete row**|![Icons_Clear_Filter](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Clear_Filter.png)|Deletes the selected row.| |**Fit to screen**|![Icons_Fit_to_screen](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Fit_to_screen.png)|Adjusts the table to the screen width and makes the column width proportional.| |**Export to Excel**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Excel](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Excel.png)|Exports the data in the table to an Excel file.| |**Filter settings**|![Icons_Add_Filter](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Add_Filter.png)|Opens the **Filter settings** dialog box, which you can use to define a new advanced filter. After you create and save the filter, the corresponding tab appears on the table.| |**Load records from file**|![Icons_Upload_File](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Upload_File.png)|Opens the **Filter settings** dialog box, described in detail below, so you can locate and upload a local file for import. You can use this option to import data from an Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx ) or.csv file.| |**Search**|![Icons_Search](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Search.png)|A field in which you can type a word, part of a word, or multiple words. As you type, the system filters the contents of the table to display only rows that contain the string you have typed in any column.| ## File upload dialog box With the **File upload** dialog box, you select a file of one of the supported formats ( **.csv** or **.xlsx** ) to import data from the file.
Element Description
File path

The path to the file you want to upload.

To select the file, click Browse, and then find and select the file you want to upload.
Upload (button) Closes the dialog box and opens the Common settings dialog box, where you specify the import settings.
## Common settings dialog box In the **Common settings** dialog box, which opens if you click **Upload** in the **File upload** dialog box, you specify the import settings for a file that you has selected in the **File upload** dialog box.
Element Description
Separator chars

The character that is used as the separator in the imported file.

By default, the comma is used as the separator. You specify the separator character if the imported file uses any other separator.

This field appears only if you import data from a. csv file.
Null value

Optional.

The value that is used to mark an empty column in the imported file.

You specify the null value if the value in the imported file differs from the empty string.
Encoding

The encoding that is used in the imported file.

This field appears only if you import data from a .csv file.
Culture The regional format that has been used to display the time, currency, and other measurements in the imported file.
Mode

The mode defining which rows of the uploaded file will be imported into the table. The following options are available:

Update existing
The rows already present in the table will be updated, and the rows not present in the table will be added.
Bypass existing
Only the new rows that are not present in the table will be imported. The rows that are already present in the table will not be updated.
Insert all records
All the rows from the file will be imported into the table. If you select this option, you may get duplicated rows because the system won’t check for duplicates when importing rows from the file.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and opens the Columns dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without importing the data from the file.
## Columns dialog box In the Columns dialog box, which opens if you click **OK** in the **Common settings** dialog box, you match the columns in the imported file that you have selected in the **File upload** dialog box to the columns in the Visma Net table to which you are importing data.
Element Description
Column name The name of the column in the uploaded file.
Property name The name of the corresponding column in the table in Visma Net.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and imports the selected file.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without importing the data from the file.
About the adjusting table layout /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/about-the-adjusting-table-layout section As you work, you may need to adjust layouts of tables to suit your needs; typical operations are discussed below. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the adjusting table layout As you work, you may need to adjust layouts of tables to suit your needs; typical operations are discussed below. ## Switching between window view and grid view On data entry forms, tables can be presented in the following views: Grid view : This is a standard tabular view, with all details arranged in a table and each row representing one detail or document row. Window view : With the window view, you see a set of elements intended for only one detail or document row, and you use the navigation buttons (in the lower left corner of the window) to move from one row of the table to another. To switch between these two views, do the following: + Click ![Icons_Form_Grid_Views](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Form_Grid_Views.png) ( **Switch between grid and window** ) on the table toolbar. ## Changing the table layout You can adjust any table to meet your information needs. Adjustments that you make to a table affect only your user account and are not visible to other users. You can fine-tune the table in the following ways: + Hide or display columns, as described in: [Hide or display table columns](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/hide-or-display-table-columns/) + Adjust the column width, as described in: [Adjust column widths](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/adjust-column-widths/) + Change the order of columns, as described in: [Change the order of columns](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/change-the-order-of-columns/) When you make any of these changes, the table will display them immediately, and the system will save them automatically. If your user account is assigned the **Administrator** role you can set default column configuration for all users of the system and configure table layouts for particular users. Hide or display table columns /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/hide-or-display-table-columns section You can hide or display table columns according to your needs for information, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Hide or display table columns You can hide or display table columns according to your needs for information, as described in this topic. ## Display hidden table columns 1. In the table, click ![Icons_Column_Configuration](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Column_Configuration.png), the leftmost icon among the column headers, to open the **Column configuration dialog box**. 1. To display a hidden column (or multiple hidden columns) in the table, do the following: 1. In the **Available columns** list, select the column or columns to be added as follows: + If you want to display just one hidden column and you see it in the list, click the column. + If you know the name of the column you want to add but don't see it, start typing the column name in the **Available columns** search field, and the system will display a list of columns that include the string you have typed. Click the column you want to display. + To select multiple individual columns, press and hold the **Ctrl** key, and then click each column that you want to display. + To select multiple columns that are adjacent to one another, press and hold the Shift key, and then click the first and the last column of the block. 1. Click ![Columns_Configuration_Move_Right](/media/visma-net-erp/Columns_Configuration_Move_Right.png) - the **Add column to the selected columns list** button. 1. Click one of the following to apply the changes: + **Save** to save the layout changes for the current session and future sessions. + **OK** to change the layout for only the current session. ## Hide table columns 1. In the table, click ![Icons_Column_Configuration](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Column_Configuration.png), the leftmost icon among the column headers, to open the **Column configuration** dialog box. 1. To hide a column (or to hide multiple columns) from the table, do the following: 1. In the **Selected columns** list, select the column or columns you want to hide as follows: + If you want to hide just one hidden column and you see it in the list, click the column. + If you know the name of the column you want to hide but don't see it, start typing the column name in the **Selected columns** search field, and the system will display a list of columns that include the string you have typed. Click the column you want to hide. + To select multiple individual columns, press and hold the **Ctrl** key, and then click each column that you want to select. + To select multiple columns that are near each other, press and hold the Shift key, and then click the first and the last column of the block. 1. Click ![Columns_Configuration_Move_Left](/media/visma-net-erp/Columns_Configuration_Move_Left.png) (the **Remove column from the selected columns list** button). 1. Click one of the following to apply the changes: + **Save** to save the layout changes for the current session and future sessions. + **OK** to change the layout for only the current session. ## Restore the default table layout 1. Click ![Icons_Column_Configuration](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Column_Configuration.png). 1. In the bottom left of the **Column configuration** dialog box, click **Reset to default**. All the changes that you have previously made to the table layout will be reset. Adjust column widths /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/adjust-column-widths section If not all columns fit in the window and you must scroll to the right to view some of them, you can adjust the column widths so that you can view all columns in the window without scrolling. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Adjust column widths If not all columns fit in the window and you must scroll to the right to view some of them, you can adjust the column widths so that you can view all columns in the window without scrolling. If not all columns fit in the window and you must scroll to the right to view some of them, you can adjust the column widths so that you can view all columns in the window without scrolling. You can adjust column widths automatically and manually, and you can restore default widths, as described in this topic. ## Adjust the column width automatically 1. On the table toolbar, click ![Icons_Fit_to_screen](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Fit_to_screen.png) - the **Fit to screen** button. The column widths will be reduced proportionally so that the whole table fits the screen. This change is saved automatically by the system. ## Adjust the column width manually 1. Move the pointer over the column split line (the line dividing two columns). When the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow, drag the pointer left or right to move the line. 1. Repeat Step 1 for each column split line you want to move. These changes are saved automatically by the system. ## Restore the default table layout 1. Click ![Icons_Column_Configuration](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Column_Configuration.png) - the **Column configuration** button. 1. In the bottom left of the **Column configuration** dialog box, click **Reset to default**. NOTE! All the changes that you have previously made to the table layout will be reset. Change the order of columns /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/change-the-order-of-columns section As you work, you might want to change the order of columns so that the information is grouped to better fit your work and preferences. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the order of columns As you work, you might want to change the order of columns so that the information is grouped to better fit your work and preferences. As you work, you might want to change the order of columns so that the information is grouped to better fit your work and preferences. For example: You might want to make particular columns adjacent or move to the left the columns you consider the most important. To rearrange the layout of columns in a table, you can use one of the following ways: + In the window, drag a column to a new position + Use the **Column configuration** dialog box ## Move columns on the window 1. Drag the column header to the desired position. Note the red arrows, which indicate the exact position where you can drop the column between two other columns. 1. Repeat this step for each column you want to move. These changes are saved automatically by the system, that is, when you open the table in the future you will see this change. ## Move columns by using the Column configuration dialog box 1. In the table, click ![Icons_Column_Configuration](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Column_Configuration.png) to open the **Column configuration** dialog box. 1. To shift a column to the left in the table, do the following: 1. In the **Selected columns** list, click the column you want to move. 1. Click ![Columns_Configuration_Move_Up](/media/visma-net-erp/Columns_Configuration_Move_Up.png) to move the column one position to the left. 1. Repeat the previous sub-step until the column is in the appropriate place. 1. To shift a column to the right in the table, do the following: 1. In the **Selected columns** list, select the column you want to move. 1. Click ![Columns_Configuration_Move_Down](/media/visma-net-erp/Columns_Configuration_Move_Down.png) to move the column one position to the right. 1. Repeat the previous sub-step until the column is in the appropriate place. 1. Click **OK** to save the layout changes. ## Restore the default table layout 1. Click ![Icons_Column_Configuration](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Column_Configuration.png). 1. In the bottom left of the **Column configuration** dialog box, click **Reset to default**. Note: All the changes that you have previously made to the table layout will be reset. Filter the data in a table /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/filter-the-data-in-a-table section You can quickly filter the data of any table in the system by using simple filters or by selecting the appropriate options in the menu that appear when you click the header of the column to which you want apply the filter. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Filter the data in a table You can quickly filter the data of any table in the system by using simple filters or by selecting the appropriate options in the menu that appear when you click the header of the column to which you want apply the filter. You can quickly filter the data of any table in the system by using simple filters or by selecting the appropriate options in the menu that appear when you click the header of the column to which you want apply the filter. Simple filters cannot include complex filtering conditions (with multiple clauses connected with **Or** operators and combined with parenthesis). ## Set up a filter on table columns 1. Open the window with the table for which you want to set up a filter on table columns. 1. In the table, click the header of the column whose values you want to filter. 1. If you want to filter data in a column with a fixed set of options (such as **Status** ), select the required values in the dialog box. 1. If you want to filter data in a column by a value which has unlimited options (such as **Supplier** ), do the following: + In the dialog box, select the filter condition from the list of available conditions. The available conditions (such as **Contains**, **Equals**, or **Is null** ) depend on the data type of the column. + In the field at the bottom of the dialog box, type the filter value (if needed). 1. Click **OK** to apply the filter. Now the table displays only the rows that satisfy the terms of the filter. The column header is highlighted and displays the filter icon (![filter_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/filter_icon.png)). You can set up filters for any number of table columns. If you set up filters for multiple columns, the system displays only the rows that satisfy the terms of all filters. ## Filter data by a selected cell value You can filter the data in a table on an inquiry or processing form by a value of any cell that you select as follows: 1. Open the window with the table for which you want to set up filtering by a cell value. 1. In the table, right-click the cell that contains the value by which you want to filter the data, and click **Filter by this cell value**. As a result, the table displays only the rows for which this column contains this value. The column header is highlighted and displays the filter icon (![filter_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/filter_icon.png)). You can also apply this filter by clicking the required cell and pressing SHIFT+F. ## Clear a filter In the window with the table for which you want to clear a simple, do the following: + In the table, click the header of the column for which you want to clear the filter, and do one of the following: + If you filtered data in a column with fixed set of options, click **Select all** and then click **OK**. + If you filtered data in a column with unlimited number of values, click **Clear filter**. ## Turn on column sorting 1. Open the form with the table for which you want to set up column sorting. 1. In the table, click the header of the column whose values you want to sort. 1. In the dialog box, select the sorting order: ascending (that is, A to Z for text, lowest to highest for numbers, or newest to latest for dates) or descending (that is, Z to A for text, highest to lowest for numbers, or latest to newest for dates). The column header displays the ascending ( ![filter_icon_ascending](/media/visma-net-erp/filter_icon_ascending.png) ) or descending ( ![filter_icon_descending](/media/visma-net-erp/filter_icon_descending.png) ) sorting icon. You can turn on sorting for only one column in a table at a time. ## Turn off column sorting In the window with the table for which you want to clear column sorting, do the following: 1. In the table, click the header of the column for which you want to clear sorting. 1. Click the sorting option you have previously clicked. The column sorting is now turned off. Import data from a local file to a table /visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/import-data-from-a-local-file-to-a-table section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import data from a local file to a table You can import data from an Excel spreadsheet or a CSV file to an Visma Net table when you see ![Icons_Upload_File](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Upload_File.png) (the **Load records from file** button) on the table toolbar. 1. Open the appropriate window, and select the record to which you want to import data or add a new record. 1. On the table toolbar, click ![Icons_Upload_File](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Upload_File.png) (the **Load records from file** button). 1. In the **File upload** dialog box, click **Choose file**. 1. Select the file you want to import. 1. Click **Upload** to upload the file to the system. After the file is uploaded, the **Common settings** dialog box is opened. 1. To import an Excel spreadsheet, do the following in the **Common settings** dialog box: 1. If an atypical null value is used in the uploaded file, specify the value in the **Null value** field. 1. In the **Culture** field, select the region whose measurement settings have been used in the uploaded file. 1. In the **Mode** field, select the option that determines which data will be imported into the table: + **Update existing**: To update the rows that are already present in the table and add new rows that are not present in the table. + **Bypass existing**: To import only new rows that were not present in the table. The existing rows will not be updated. + **Insert all records**: To add all rows from the file to the table. If you select this option, you may get duplicated rows because the system won't check for duplicates when importing rows from the file. 1. Click **OK**. 1. To import a CSV file, do the following in the **Common settings** dialog box: 1. If an atypical separator character is used in the uploaded file, specify it in the **Separator chars** field. 1. If an atypical null value is used in the uploaded file, specify the value in the **Null value** field. 1. Select the encoding of the uploaded file in the **Encoding** field. 1. In the **Culture** field, select the region whose measurement settings have been used in the uploaded file. 1. In the **Mode** field, select the option that determines which data will be imported into the table: + **Update existing**: To update the rows that are already present in the table and add new rows that are not present in the table. + **Bypass existing**: To import only new rows that were not present in the table. The existing rows will not be updated. + **Insert all records**: To add all rows from the file to the table. With a CSV file, the uploaded file must contain only rows that have not already been imported. If the system encounters a row that already exists in the table, the import process will be terminated. To resolve the situation, click **Cancel** on the window toolbar, and then try to import data in another mode. 1. Click **OK**. 1. In the **Columns** dialog box, match the columns of the imported file (shown in the **Column name** column) to the columns in the Visma Net table to which you want to import data (shown in the **Property name** column). 1. Click **OK** to import data to the table. 1. After the data is successfully imported, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After the data is imported and the document is saved, you can continue processing the document according to your organisation's workflow. Widget dialog boxes /visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Widget dialog boxes Add widget dialog box for chart widgets /visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/add-widget-dialog-box-for-chart-widgets page You use the Add widget dialog box to add a widget to a dashboard and to modify an existing widget. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add widget dialog box for chart widgets You use the Add widget dialog box to add a widget to a dashboard and to modify an existing widget. You use the **Add widget** dialog box to add a widget to a dashboard and to modify an existing widget. The settings that you need to specify depend on the widget type. When you add a new widget by using this dialog box, you perform two steps. 1. Select the type of the widget that you want to add to the dashboard; the system brings up the version of the **Add widget dialog box** that is specific to the widget type. 1. Specify the properties that are specific for the selected widget type. When you modify an existing widget, you perform only the second step. (In this case, the system immediately brings up the appropriate version of the dialog box.) ## Add widget dialog box: Step 1 When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the **Add widget** dialog box. The elements of the dialog box are described in the table below.
Element Description
Widget type

The widget type to be added to the dashboard, which can be one of the following:

Chart
A graphical representation of data from an Visma Net window. You can use charts of various types, such as bar charts and line charts.
Data table
Data from an Visma Net window arranged into rows and columns.
Embedded page
A document or image that is stored on an external resource, such as cloud storage, and should be displayed on the dashboard.
Power BI tiles
Charts, scorecards, and other analytical information that is represented on Power BI dashboards designed by your organisation.
Scorecard KPI
A parameter that is important for the business processes of your organisation and that should be monitored on a daily basis.
Trend card KPI
A parameter whose dynamic change is important to the business processes of your organisation.
Cancel (button) Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
Next (button) Goes to the next step of the Add widget dialog box for the selected widget type.
## Add widget dialog box: Step 2 After you select the **Chart** widget type in the **Add widget** dialog box, or when you click **Edit** in the widget toolbar, the **Widget properties**dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you need to specify the properties that are specific to chart widgets. Select the inquiry window to provide source data for the widget, a shared filter to be applied to the data (optional), and the type of the chart; you then configure the chart widget. For more information about chart widgets, see:. For the detailed procedure that describes adding the needed type of chart widget to a dashboard, see one of the following topics: + [Add a doughnut chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-doughnut-chart/) + [Add a line chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-line-chart/) + [Add a column chart](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/dasboardswidgets/dw-add-column-char-task/) + [Add a stacked column chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-column-chart/) + [Add a bar chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-bar-chart/) + [Add a stacked bar chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-bar-chart/) + [Add a funnel chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-funnel-chart/) Widget properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify the properties that are specific to chart widgets.
Element Description
Inquiry screen Required. The name of the inquiry window that provides data for the widget.
Inquiry parameters A button that you click to open the Inquiry parameters dialog box so you can specify the parameters for the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Shared filter to apply The shared filter that is applied to the data in the widget. You can apply a shared filter or leave the field blank to display all the data from the inquiry.
Configure

A button that you click to open the Chart settings dialog box.

You need to open this dialog box when you want to specify properties that are specific to the chart type.
Caption The name of the widget on the dashboard.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
Previous (button)

Returns to the previous step of the dialog box without saving your changes.

The button appears only when you are adding a widget.
Finish (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box.
## Other dialog boxes This section describes dialog boxes that you can open from the **Widget properties** dialog box. Inquiry parameters. You can use this dialog box to specify the parameters of the inquiry selected in the **Inquiry screen** field.
Element Description
Parameter The name of the parameter of the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Value The value of the inquiry parameter.
Use default value

A check box that indicates (if selected) that a default value should be used for the inquiry parameter.

You can specify the default value in the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
OK (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box.
Chart settings dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify properties that are specific to the chart type.
Element Description
Chart type

Required. The type of chart widget you want to add. The following options are available:

Doughnut
A doughnut chart widget
Line
A line chart widget
Column
A column chart widget
Stacked column
A stacked column chart widget
Bar
A bar chart widget
Stacked bar
A stacked bar chart widget
Funnel
A funnel chart widget
Legend position

The location of the legend on the widget.

The field is displayed for only doughnut and funnel chart types. The following options are available:

None
The legend is not displayed on the widget.
Left
The legend is located to the left of the chart.
Right
The legend is located to the right of the chart.
Top
The legend is located above the chart.
Bottom
The legend is located below the chart.
Pop-up
The user can open the legend as a pop-up field by clicking the icon in the bottom left corner of the widget. This is the default value.
### The Categories section of the dialog box includes the following elements Chart settings dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify properties that are specific to the chart type.
Element Description
Legend

Required.

The column from the source window whose values are used for categories.

The values of the selected column are displayed on the chart as follows, depending on the chart type:

Doughnut
The column values are displayed as individual sectors on the doughnut. The size of each sector is determined by the aggregated column value selected in the Value field. For example, a category might be a customer number, a financial period, or a cash account.
Line
The column values are displayed on the horizontal axis.
Column
The column values are displayed on the horizontal axis.
Stacked column
The column values are displayed on the horizontal axis.
Bar
The column values are displayed on the vertical axis.
Stacked bar
The column values are displayed on the vertical axis.
Funnel
The column values are displayed as individual slices in the funnel. The height of each slice is determined by an aggregated column value selected in the Value field. For example: A column might be a customer number.
Sort by

The sort order for the legend data. The left field defines the sequence to be sorted as follows:

Legend
The legend data is sorted by the values in the column you selected in the Legend field.
Legend values
The legend data is sorted by value you selected in the Value field.

The right field defines the sort order. The way the values are sorted depends on the chart type as well as this selection. The following options are available:

  • Ascending:

    • Doughnut: The smallest sector is displayed in the upper part of the doughnut, and larger sectors are displayed clockwise in ascending order.
    • Line, Column, and Stacked column: The lowest value (the first alphabetic value for text data) appears in the left part of the horizontal axis, and higher values are shown to the right in ascending order. The function ignores null values.
    • Bar and Stacked bar: The lowest value (the first alphabetic value for text data) appears in the upper part of the vertical axis, and higher values are arranged downward along the vertical axis in ascending order. The function ignores null values.
    • Funnel: The lowest value (the first alphabetic value for text data) appears on the top of the funnel, and higher values are arranged downward in ascending order. The function ignores null values.

  • Descending:

    • Doughnut: The largest sector is displayed in the upper part of the doughnut, and smaller sectors are displayed clockwise in descending order.
    • Line, Column and Stacked column: The highest value (the last alphabetic value for text data) appears in the left part of the horizontal axis, and lower values are shown to the right in descending order. The function ignores null values.
    • Bar and Stacked bar: The highest value (the last alphabetic value for text data) appears in the upper part of the vertical axis, and lower values are arranged downward along the vertical axis in descending order. The function ignores null values.
    • Funnel: The highest value (the last alphabetic value for text data) appears on the top of the funnel, and lower values are arranged downward in descending order. The function ignores null values.

The default values in these boxes depend on the type of the field that you selected in the Legend field, as described below:
Maximum number of values shown

The maximum number of values to be individually shown on the chart.

The system always selects the values starting from the largest ones. If you want the system to individually display all values, set the value of this field to 0.

The default value of this field is 10.
Show sum of other entries

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the values that are not among the largest values (whose number is specified in the Maximum number of values shown field) are summed and shown on the chart as a single element, with the element type depending on the chart type.

For example: For a doughnut chart, the element is a separate sector, and for a line chart, it is a separate point.

By default, this check box is cleared.
Date rounding

The part of the date field that is displayed on the chart widget. You can use on the chart either the full date or a particular part of it (for example, a month or a year).

This property is available only for fields of the date type.

Select one of the following values:

  • None: The full date is used in the chart.
  • Minutes: Only minutes from the selected date field are used in the chart.
  • Hours: Only hours from the selected date field are used in the chart.
  • Days: Only days of month from the selected date field are used in the chart.
  • Months: Only months from the selected date field are used in the chart.
  • Quarters: Only quarters are used in the chart.
  • The system calculates the quarter based on the date in the selected date field.
  • Years: Only years from the selected date field are used in the chart.
Format

The format of the field value that is selected in the Legend field.

This field is displayed only for fields of numeric and date types. You can select one of the predefined formats from the list.

By default, the field is empty, which means that the field is not formatted.
### The Series section of the dialog box includes the elements listed below This section is available for the following chart types: + **Line** + **Column** + **Stacked column** + **Bar** + **Stacked bar**. Chart settings dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify properties that are specific to the chart type.
Element Description
Legend

The source column for the chart content. The values of the selected column are displayed on the chart as follows, depending on the chart type.

Line
The column values are displayed as separate lines in the data area of the chart.
Column
The column values are displayed as separate columns for each category.
Stacked column
The column values are displayed as sections of the chart column for each category.
Bar
The column values are displayed as separate bars for each category.
Stacked bar
The column values are displayed as sections of a bar for each category.
Sort by

The sort order for the legend data. The left field defines the sequence to be sorted as follows:

Legend
The legend data is sorted by the values in the column you selected in the Legend field.
Legend values
The legend data is sorted by value you selected in the Value field.

The way the values are sorted depends on the chart type as well as this selection. The following options are available:

  • Ascending:

    • Line, Stacked column, and Bar: The lowest value (the first alphabetic value for text data) appears in the upper part of the vertical axis, and higher values are arranged downward along the vertical axis in ascending order. The function ignores null values.
    • Column and Stacked bar: The lowest value (the first alphabetic value for text data) appears in the left part of the horizontal axis, and higher values are shown to the right in ascending order. The function ignores null values.

  • Descending:

    • Line, Stacked column, and Bar: The highest value (the last alphabetic value for text data) appears in the upper part of the vertical axis, and lower values are arranged downward along the vertical axis in descending order. The function ignores null values.
    • Column and Stacked bar: The highest value (the last alphabetic value for text data) appears in the left part of the horizontal axis and lower values are shown to the right in descending order. The function ignores null values.

The default values in these fields depend on the type of the field that you selected in the Legend field, as described below:
Maximum number of values shown

The maximum number of values to be individually shown on the chart. The system always selects the values starting from the largest ones. If you want the system to individually display all values, set the value of this field to 0.

The default value of this field is 10.
Show sum of other entries

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the values that are not among the largest values (whose number is specified in the Maximum number of values shown field) are summed and shown on the chart as a single element, with the element type depending on the chart type.

For example: For a doughnut chart, the element is a separate sector, and for a line chart, it is a separate point.

By default, this check box is cleared.
Date rounding

The part of the date field that is displayed on the chart widget.

You can use on the chart either the full date or a particular part of it (for example, a month or a year).

This property is available only for fields of the date type.

Select one of the following values:

None
The full date is used in the chart.
Minutes
Only minutes from the selected date field are used in the chart.
Hours
Only hours from the selected date field are used in the chart.
Days
Only days of month from the selected date field are used in the chart.
Months
Only months from the selected date field are used in the chart.
Quarters
Only quarters are used in the chart. The system calculates the quarter based on the date in the selected date field.
Years
Only years from the selected date field are used in the chart.
Format

The format of the field value that is selected in the Legend field.

This field is displayed only for fields of numeric and date types.

You can select one of the predefined formats from the list.

By default, the field is empty, which means that the field is not formatted.
Colour

The custom colours of chart elements for the values defined in the Series section.

The colours should be specified by using expressions.

You can open the Expression editor dialog box by clicking the magnifier icon.
### The Values section of the dialog box includes the following elements Chart settings dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify properties that are specific to the chart type.
Element Description
Value

A column from the source window. The values of the selected column are displayed on the chart as follows, depending on the chart type:

Doughnut
The aggregated column values determine the size of the chart sectors. For example, a value might be an invoiced sales amount.
Line
The column values are displayed on the vertical axis and are used as a source for the data area.
Column
The column values are displayed on the vertical axis and are used as a source for the data area.
Stacked column
The column values are displayed on the vertical axis and determine the height of each section on a chart column.
Bar
The column values are displayed on the horizontal axis and are used as a source for the data area.
Stacked bar
The column values are displayed on the horizontal axis and determine the length of each section on a bar.
Funnel
The column values determine the height of each slice. For example: A value might be an invoices sales amount.
Aggregation function

The aggregate function used to perform a calculation on the column of data selected in the Value field and return a single value, such as the total of the values or the number of selected rows in the column.

The following aggregate functions are available:

Average
Calculates the average value in the column.
Count
Determines the number of items in the column.
Max
Determines the item with the highest value in the column. (For text data, the highest value is the last alphabetic value.) This function ignores null values.
Min
Determines the item with the lowest value in the column. (For text data, the lowest value is the first alphabetic value.) This function ignores null values.
Sum
Calculates the sum of the items in the column. This is the default value.
Format

The format of the field value that is selected in the Value field.

You can specify any of the standard formats defined for the format function in.Net.

By default, the field is empty, which means that the field is not formatted.
OK (button) Saves your changes to the widget properties, and closes the dialog box.
Add widget dialog box for data table widgets /visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/add-widget-dialog-box-for-data-table-widgets page When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add widget dialog box for data table widgets When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use the **Add widget** dialog box to add a widget to a dashboard and to modify an existing widget. The settings that you need to specify depend on the widget type. When you add a new widget by using this dialog box, you perform two steps. In the first step, you select the type of the widget that you want to add to the dashboard; the system brings up the version of the **Add widget** dialog box that is specific to the widget type. In the second step, you specify the properties that are specific for the selected widget type. When you modify an existing widget, you perform only the second step. (In this case, the system immediately brings up the appropriate version of the dialog box.) ## Add widget dialog box: Step 1 When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the **Add widget** dialog box. The elements of the dialog box are described in the table below.
Element Description
Widget type

The widget type to be added to the dashboard, which can be one of the following:

Chart
A graphical representation of data from an Visma Net window. You can use charts of various types, such as bar charts and line charts.
Data table
Data from an Visma Net window arranged into rows and columns.
Embedded page
A document or image that is stored on an external resource, such as cloud storage, and should be displayed on the dashboard.
Power BI tiles
Charts, scorecards, and other analytical information that is represented on Power BI dashboards designed by your organisation.
Scorecard KPI
A parameter that is important for the business processes of your organisation and that should be monitored on a daily basis.
Trend card KPI
A parameter whose dynamic change is important to the business processes of your organisation.
Cancel (button) Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
Next (button) Goes to the next step of the Add widget dialog box for the selected widget type.
## Add widget dialog box: Step 2 After you select the **Data table** widget type in the **Add widget** dialog box, or when you click **Edit** in the widget toolbar, the**Widget properties** dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you need to specify the properties that are specific to data table widgets. For more information about data table widgets, see:. For the detailed procedure that describes adding a data table widget to a dashboard, see: [Add a data table widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-data-table-widget/). Widget properties dialog box. You use this dialog box to specify the properties that are specific to data table widgets.
Element Description
Inquiry screen

Required.

The name of the inquiry window that provides data for the widget.
Inquiry parameters A button that you click to open the Inquiry parameters dialog box where you can specify the parameters for the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Shared filter to apply The shared filter that is applied to the data in the table widget. You can apply a shared filter or leave the field blank to display all the data from the inquiry.
Automatically adjust height

A check box that indicates (if selected) that height of the widget is adjusted automatically according to the number of records specified in the Records limit field. (With this check box selected, you cannot adjust the widget height manually).

If this check box is cleared, you can adjust the widget height manually, and the number of displayed records is automatically limited by the widget height.

By default, this check box is cleared.
Record limit

The number of records that is displayed on the table widget. This field is available only if the Automatically adjust height check box is selected.

By default, the value of this field is 30.
Column settings The button that you click to open the Column configuration dialog box.
Caption The name of the widget on the dashboard.
Finish (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box. If you are configuring a new widget, it is created on the dashboard after you click this button.
Previous (button) Returns to the previous step of the dialog box without saving your changes. The button appears only when you are adding a widget.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
## Other dialog boxes This section describes dialog boxes that you can open from the **Widget properties** dialog box. Inquiry parameters. You can use this dialog box to specify the parameters of the inquiry selected in the **Inquiry screen** field.
Element Description
Parameter The name of the parameter of the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Value The value of the inquiry parameter.
Use default value A check box that indicates (if selected) that a default value should be used for the inquiry parameter. You can specify the default value in the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
OK (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box.
Add widget dialog box for Power BI tile widgets /visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/add-widget-dialog-box-for-power-bi-tile-widgets page When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add widget dialog box for Power BI tile widgets When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use the **Add widget** dialog box to add a widget to a dashboard and to modify an existing widget. The settings that you need to specify depend on the widget type. When you add a new widget by using this dialog box, you perform two steps. In the first step, you select the type of the widget that you want to add to the dashboard; the system brings up the version of the **Add widget** dialog box that is specific to the widget type. In the second step, you specify the properties that are specific for the selected widget type. When you modify an existing widget, you perform only the second step. (In this case, the system immediately brings up the appropriate version of the dialog box.) ## Add widget dialog box: Step 1 When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the **Add widget** dialog box. The elements of the dialog box are described in the table below.
Element Description
Widget type

The widget type to be added to the dashboard, which can be one of the following:

Chart
A graphical representation of data from an Visma Net window. You can use charts of various types, such as bar charts and line charts.
Data table
Data from an Visma Net window arranged into rows and columns.
Embedded page
A document or image that is stored on an external resource, such as cloud storage, and should be displayed on the dashboard.
Power BI tiles
Charts, scorecards, and other analytical information that is represented on Power BI dashboards designed by your organisation.
Scorecard KPI
A parameter that is important for the business processes of your organisation and that should be monitored on a daily basis.
Trend card KPI
A parameter whose dynamic change is important to the business processes of your organisation.
Cancel (button) Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
Next (button) Goes to the next step of the Add widget dialog box for the selected widget type.
## Add widget dialog box: Step 2 After you select the **Power BI tile** widget type in the **Add widget**dialog box, or when you click Edit on the widget toolbar, the **Widget properties** dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you need to specify the properties that are specific to the Power BI tile widget. For more information about Power BI tile widgets, see:. For the detailed procedure that describes adding an embedded page widget to a dashboard, see: [Add a Power BI tile widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-power-bi-tile-widget/). Widget properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify the properties that are specific to Power BI tile widgets.
Element Description
Client ID The client ID that your system administrator obtained while registering your instance of Visma Net on Microsoft Azure.
Client secret The client secret that your system administrator obtained while registering your instance of Visma Net on Microsoft Azure.
Dashboard

The Power BI dashboard that provides a tile for the Visma Net dashboard.

This field appears after the system connects to Power BI by using the client ID and client secret that you specified in the corresponding fields.

In this field, you can select any available Power BI dashboard.
Tile

A Power BI tile that is displayed on the Visma Net dashboard.

This field appears after the system connects to Power BI by using the client ID and client secret that you specified in the corresponding fields.

In this field, you can select any available Power BI tile from the dashboard that you selected in the

Dashboard field.
Sign In

A button that you click to cause the system to open the sign-in page to Power BI by using the client ID and the client secret that you specified in the corresponding fields.

On this page, you need to enter your credentials to be able to load the list of Power BI dashboards and tiles in Visma Net.

After entering your credentials, you will be redirected to Visma Net automatically.

You need to click this button when you add a Power BI tile widget on the Visma Net dashboard.
Caption The name of the widget on the dashboard.
Finish (button) Saves the changes and closes the dialog box.
Previous (button)

Returns to the previous step of the dialog box without saving your changes.

The button appears only when you are adding a widget.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
Add widget dialog box for scorecard KPI widgets /visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/add-widget-dialog-box-for-scorecard-kpi-widgets page When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add widget dialog box for scorecard KPI widgets When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use the **Add widget** dialog box to add a widget to a dashboard and to modify an existing widget. The settings that you need to specify depend on the widget type. When you add a new widget by using this dialog box, you perform two steps. In the first step, you select the type of the widget that you want to add to the dashboard; the system brings up the version of the **Add widget** dialog box that is specific to the widget type. In the second step, you specify the properties that are specific for the selected widget type. When you modify an existing widget, you perform only the second step. (In this case, the system immediately brings up the appropriate version of the dialog box.) ## Add widget dialog box: Step 1 When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the **Add widget** dialog box. The elements of the dialog box are described in the table below.
Element Description
Widget type

The widget type to be added to the dashboard, which can be one of the following:

Chart
A graphical representation of data from an Visma Net window. You can use charts of various types, such as bar charts and line charts.
Data table
Data from an Visma Net window arranged into rows and columns.
Embedded page
A document or image that is stored on an external resource, such as cloud storage, and should be displayed on the dashboard.
Power BI tiles
Charts, scorecards, and other analytical information that is represented on Power BI dashboards designed by your organisation.
Scorecard KPI
A parameter that is important for the business processes of your organisation and that should be monitored on a daily basis.
Trend card KPI
A parameter whose dynamic change is important to the business processes of your organisation.
Cancel (button) Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
Next (button) Goes to the next step of the Add widget dialog box for the selected widget type.
## Add widget dialog box: Step 2 After you select the **Scorecard KPI** widget type in the **Add widget dialog box**, or when you click **Edit** in the widget toolbar, the **Widget properties dialog box** opens. In this dialog box, you need to specify the properties that are specific to the scorecard KPI widget. For more information about scorecard KPI widgets, see:. For the detailed procedure that describes adding a scorecard KPI widget to a dashboard, see: [Add a scorecard KPI widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-scorecard-kpi-widget/). Widget properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify the widget properties that are specific to scorecard KPI widgets.
Element Description
Inquiry screen

Required.

The name of the inquiry window that provides data for the widget.
Inquiry parameters A button that you click to open the Inquiry parameters dialog box where you can specify the parameters for the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Shared filter to apply

The shared filter that is applied to the data in the widget.

You can apply a shared filter or leave the field blank to display all the data from the inquiry.
Scorecard title The name of the scorecard parameter that is displayed in the scorecard area.
Field to aggregate Required. The field from the selected inquiry that is displayed on the widget.
Aggregate function

The function that is used to aggregate the values of the selected inquiry field.

Possible values in this field are the following.

Average
Calculates the average value in the column.
Count
(default value) Determines the number of items in the column.
Max
Determines the item with the highest value in the column. (For text data, the highest value is the last alphabetical value.) This function ignores null values.
Min
Determines the item with the lowest value in the column. (For text data, the lowest value is the first alphabetical value.) This function ignores null values.
Sum
Calculates the sum of the items in the column.
Normal level

The normal threshold of an aggregated field value.

If the aggregated field value is less than or equal to this threshold, the colour that is selected in the Normal colour field is used as the widget background colour.

The default value of this field is 0.00.
Alarm level

The alarm threshold of an aggregated field value.

If the aggregated field value is between the normal and the alarm level, the colour that is selected in the Warning colour field is used as the widget background colour.

If the aggregated field value is equal to or greater than the alarm level, the colour that is selected in the Alarm colour field is used as the widget background colour.

The default value of this field is 0.00.
Normal colour

The colour of the widget background that is used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the Field to aggregate field is less than or equal to the value specified in the Normal level field.

The default value of this field is Visma green.
Warning colour

The colour of the widget background that is used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the Field to Aggregate field is between the values specified in the Normal level and Alarm level fields.

The default value of this field is Visma yellow.
Alarm colour

The colour of the widget background that is used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the Field to aggregate field is equal to or greater than the value specified in the Alarm level field.

The default value of this field is Visma red.
Automatically adjust font size

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the size of the font used in the widget is adjusted automatically, depending on the widget size.

By default, this check box is selected.
Font size

The size of the font that is used in the widget.

You can select the font size from the list. This field is available only if the Automatically adjust font size check box is cleared.
Caption The name of the widget on the dashboard.
Finish (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box.
Previous (button)

Returns to the previous step of the dialog box without saving your changes.

The button appears only when you are adding a widget.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
## Other dialog boxes This section describes dialog boxes that you can open from the **Widget properties** dialog box. Inquiry parameters. You can use this dialog box to specify the parameters of the inquiry selected in the **Inquiry screen** field.
Element Description
Parameter The name of the parameter of the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Value The value of the inquiry parameter.
Use default value A check box that indicates (if selected) that a default value should be used for the inquiry parameter. You can specify the default value in the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
OK (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box.
Add widget dialog box for trend card KPI widgets /visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/add-widget-dialog-box-for-trend-card-kpi-widgets page When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add widget dialog box for trend card KPI widgets When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the Add widget dialog box. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use the **Add widget** dialog box to add a widget to a dashboard and to modify an existing widget. The settings that you need to specify depend on the widget type. When you add a new widget by using this dialog box, you perform two steps. In the first step, you select the type of the widget that you want to add to the dashboard; the system brings up the version of the **Add widget** dialog box that is specific to the widget type. In the second step, you specify the properties that are specific for the selected widget type. When you modify an existing widget, you perform only the second step. (In this case, the system immediately brings up the appropriate version of the dialog box.) ## Add widget dialog box: Step 1 When you want to add a new widget to a dashboard, you first need to select the type of the widget in the **Add widget** dialog box. The elements of the dialog box are described in the table below.
Element Description
Widget type

The widget type to be added to the dashboard, which can be one of the following:

Chart
A graphical representation of data from an Visma Net window. You can use charts of various types, such as bar charts and line charts.
Data table
Data from an Visma Net window arranged into rows and columns.
Embedded page
A document or image that is stored on an external resource, such as cloud storage, and should be displayed on the dashboard.
Power BI tiles
Charts, scorecards, and other analytical information that is represented on Power BI dashboards designed by your organisation.
Scorecard KPI
A parameter that is important for the business processes of your organisation and that should be monitored on a daily basis.
Trend card KPI
A parameter whose dynamic change is important to the business processes of your organisation.
Cancel (button) Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
Next (button) Goes to the next step of the Add widget dialog box for the selected widget type.
## Add widget dialog box: Step 2 After you select the **Trend card KPI** widget type in the **Add widget** dialog box, or when you click Edit on the widget toolbar, the **Widget properties** dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you need to specify the properties that are specific to the trend card KPI widget. For more information about trend card KPI widgets, see:. For the detailed procedure that describes adding a trend card KPI widget to a dashboard, see: [Add a trend card KPI widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-trend-card-kpi-widget/). Widget properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify the properties that are specific to trend card KPI widgets.
Element Description
Inquiry screen

Required.

The name of the inquiry window that provides data for the widget.
Inquiry parameters A button that you click to open the Inquiry parameters dialog box so you can specify the parameters for the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Shared filter to apply The shared filter that is applied to the data in the widget. You can apply a shared filter or leave the field blank to display all the data from the inquiry.
Trend card title The name of the trend card that is displayed in the scorecard area.
Field to aggregate

Required.

The field from the selected inquiry that is displayed in the widget.
Aggregate function

The function that is used to aggregate the values of the selected generic inquiry field. Possible values in this box are the following.

Average
Calculates the average value in the column.
Count
(default value) Determines the number of items in the column.
Max
Determines the item with the highest value in the column. (For text data, the highest value is the last alphabetical value.) This function ignores null values.
Min
Determines the item with the lowest value in the column. (For text data, the lowest value is the first alphabetical value.) This function ignores null values.
Sum
Calculates the sum of the items in the column.
Timeline field The field of the date type from the selected inquiry, which is used for calculating trends.
Period

The period upon which a comparison of the field selected in the Field to aggregate field is performed. The following values are available in the box:

Yesterday
The day that is before the current business date.
Last week
The calendar week that is immediately before the current business date. The day that starts a week depends on the Visma Net locale.
Last month
The calendar month that is immediately before the current business date.
Last quarter
The calendar quarter that is immediately before the current business date.
Last year
The calendar year that is immediately before the current business date.
Rising trend colour

The colour of the widget background that is used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the Field to aggregate field is rising in comparison to the period selected in the Period field.

The default value of this box is Visma blue.
Flat trend colour

The colour of the widget background that is used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the Field to aggregate field stays the same in comparison to the period selected in the Period field.

The default value of this box is Visma yellow.
Falling Trend colour

The colour of the widget background that is used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the Field to aggregate box is falling in comparison to the period selected in the Period field.

The default value of this box is Visma red.
Automatically adjust font size

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the size of the font used in the widget is adjusted automatically, depending on the widget size.

By default, this check box is selected.
Font size

The size of the font that is used in the widget. You can select the font size from the list.

This field is available only if the Automatically adjust font size check box is cleared.
Caption The name of the widget on the dashboard.
Finish (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box.
Previous (button)

Returns to the previous step of the dialog box without saving your changes.

The button appears only when you are adding a widget.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
## Other dialog boxes This section describes dialog boxes that you can open from the **Widget properties** dialog box. Inquiry parameters. You can use this dialog box to specify the parameters of the inquiry selected in the **Inquiry screen** field.
Element Description
Parameter The name of the parameter of the inquiry selected in the Inquiry screen field.
Value The value of the inquiry parameter.
Use default value A check box that indicates (if selected) that a default value should be used for the inquiry parameter. You can specify the default value on the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
OK (button) Saves your changes and closes the dialog box.
Reusable filter settings dialog box /visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/reusable-filter-settings-dialog-box page You can use the Filters settings dialog box, which opens after you click the Filter settings button in the window toolbar, to create, delete, and manage your reusable filters for a particular window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reusable filter settings dialog box You can use the Filters settings dialog box, which opens after you click the Filter settings button in the window toolbar, to create, delete, and manage your reusable filters for a particular window. ## The Filter settings dialog box
Element Description
Filter name field An unlabelled field that contains a drop-down list of the names of the filters that can be applied to the currently selected window. You can select a filter name to see the details of the filter.
Default A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is the default filter for the selected window.
Shared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the filter will be shared with other users, no matter who created it. Shared filters can be edited only by using the Filters (CS209010) window.
Filter settings table A table that contains the clauses that make up the filter, with each row defining one clause of the filter.
New (button) Clears all filter settings currently displayed in the dialog box so that you can specify new filter settings. If the settings in the dialog box have not been saved before you click New, they will be lost.
Save (button) Gives you the ability to enter a name for the new filter and save it, or saves the existing filter after you have modified it.
Save As (button) Saves an existing filter under a new name.
Remove (button) Deletes the filter from the system.
OK (button) Applies the filter and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without filtering the data.
## The Filter settings table For a filter, the **Filter settings** table contains clauses that make up the filter, with each row defining one clause of the filter. A filter may contain just one clause, or it may contain multiple simple clauses that you combine into one logical expression by using brackets and logical operators. The columns of the table are described below.
Column Description
Active

A check box that you select for filter clauses that you want to be active.

(This check box is not, however, available for ad hoc filters on reports.)

As you enter a clause, it becomes active, with the Active check box automatically selected. To quickly modify the filter, you can clear the Active check boxes for some of the clauses to exclude them from the filter.
Brackets A set of opening brackets that can be used to group clauses. You can use brackets to make a filter that spans multiple rows.
Property

Required.

The property to be used for filtering, which you select from a list that includes the properties associated with the particular table or report the filter will be applied to.
Condition

Required.

The logical operation to be applied to the value of the selected property. The available conditions depend on the selected property. Select the condition from the list, which may include the following options:

Equals
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is equal to the value in the Value field.
Does not equal
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is not equal to the value in the Value field.
Is greater than
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is greater than the value in the Value field.
Is greater than or equal to
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is greater than or equal to the value in the Value field.
Is less than
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is less than the value in the Value field.
Is less than or equal to
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is less than or equal to the value in the Value field.
Is between
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is between the values in the Value and Value2 fields.
Contains
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property (if it is a string) contains the value in the Value field.
Does not contain
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property (if it is a string) does not contain the value in the Value field.
Ends with
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property ends with the same character or string as the value in the Value field.
Starts with
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property contains at the beginning the value in the Value field.
Is null
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is null.
Is not null
Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is not null.
Is in
(for properties of the User type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property (a user) is included in the work group selected in the Value field. You can select this option for the @MyGroups and @MyWorktree clauses.
Is not in
(for properties of the User type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property (a user) is not included in the work group selected in the Value field. You can select this option for the @MyGroups and @MyWorktree clauses.

The following conditions are obsolete and have been preserved for compatibility with previous versions of Visma Net. It is recommended to use date-relative clauses instead of these conditions (for details, see: About creating temporary or reusable filters):

Today
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is equal to the current business date.
Overdue
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is overdue in comparison to the current business date.
Today+overdue
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is equal to the current business date or overdue in comparison to the current business date. (This is a combination of the Today and Overdue conditions).
Tomorrow
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is equal to the day after the current business date.
This week
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is within the current week. The start and end of the week are determined according to the default system locale or the locale you selected when you signed in to Visma Net. The system locales are specified and configured in the System locales (SM200550) window.
Next week
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is within the week after the current week. The start and end of the week are determined according to the default system locale or the locale you selected when you signed in to Visma Net. The system locales are specified and configured in the System locales (SM200550) window.
This month
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is within the current month. (The current month contains the current business date.)
Next month
(for values of the date type): Displays the records for which the value of the specified property is within the month after the current month. (The current month contains the current business date.)
Value The value for the logical condition used to filter the data, if the selected condition requires a value. The value you enter must conform with the data type of the selected property.
Value2 The second value for the logical condition, if the selected logical condition requires a second value (as, for example, the Is between condition does). The value you enter must conform with the data type of the selected property.
Brackets A set of closing brackets to group clauses. You use brackets for filters with multiple clauses.
Operator

The logical operator ( And or Or ) to be used between clauses or groups of clauses.

You select this operator to join the current clause with the next one. Use the And operator to find the records that meet the criteria in both the selected clause and the next clause. Use the Or operator to find the records that meet the criteria in either the selected clause or the next clause. ou can apply these operators to single clauses or groups of clauses.
Assisted setup /visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup section Use the links below to choose a topic you want to learn more about. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Assisted setup Use the links below to choose a topic you want to learn more about. After that you can use the breadcrumbs in the upper left corner to navigate back and forward within the Getting started sections. Assisted setup /visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup/assisted-setup section The Assisted setup consists of several wizards, which help you to get started with the use of the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Assisted setup The Assisted setup consists of several wizards, which help you to get started with the use of the system. The wizards contain settings from different windows throughout the system. You need to have an administrator role to run the wizards. > [!NOTE] > Some settings that you define via Assisted setup must be set before you start using the system, as these settings cannot be modified later. Other settings may be changed any time. Please read the information for each wizard for more information. The following Assisted setup wizards are available:
box-assisted-setup-subaccounts Create subaccounts and choose the default subaccount to use throughout the system.
box-assisted-setup-forms Add a logo and choose the fields to appear on all invoices, dunning letters, and customer statements.
box-assisted-setup-email Set up your email account to send invoices and reports from the system to your contacts.
box-assisted-setup-data-imports Import customers, suppliers, non-stock items, and stock items to the system.
Data imports /visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup/data-imports page In Assisted setup for Data imports (SM20603S) you can import your customers, suppliers, stock items, and non-stock items to Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Data imports In Assisted setup for Data imports (SM20603S) you can import your customers, suppliers, stock items, and non-stock items to Visma Net. ## Assisted setup You import your data using templates. There are four templates: one for each data type (suppliers, customers, stock items, and non-stock items). Each data type contains one or more classes (see [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/), [Create a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class/) ). When you enter data into a template, make sure you enter the correct ID for the customer, supplier, item, or posting class on each line. Importing data with incorrect class IDs can result in errors during invoicing, VAT reporting, and other accounting operations in Visma Net. You can import every type of data more than once. When you do this, new entries will be added and existing entries can be updated, for example, if you use different settings in step 2 and / or make changes in the upload template. ## Step 1: Decide what to import Decide what to import: customers, suppliers, stock items, or non-stock items. Click **Next**. ## Step 2: Classes Use classes to define several settings at once for customers, suppliers, or items. Visma Net uses the settings you select here when the data is imported, and link them to the customer, supplier, or items. When you use classes, you make sure that the imported data is handled according to the correct principles for accounting and to the rules for invoicing and VAT reporting for example. Each class has different settings. Use the drop-down list to select the correct class. By default, Visma Net should contain the correct accounts and settings for your country, but you can make changes to them in this step. If you do, remember to click **Save**. Classes are predefined, but you can change them in Visma Net later: To change customer classes, go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. To change supplier classes, go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/). To change posting classes for stock items and non-stock items, select [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/). Click **Next**. ## Step 3: Download, fill in and upload template Download the template for the data type you want to import, enter your data and upload it again. If you are importing customers or suppliers, check the last number used in the number series, so that you can start entering data in your template on the next consecutive number. To check the number series, go to the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window. All columns in the template marked with \* are mandatory. You must fill them in. Some of the columns contain comments with information on how to fill them in correctly. When you have entered data in our template, click **Upload template** and then **Next**. ## Step 4: Import Confirm that you want to do the import. When you click **Import**, your data is imported and displayed in a table. Check the table data for errors. If you find any, you can either edit the information directly in the table, or go back to the previous step and edit the template before you upload it again. Click **Next**. ## Step 5: Summary The summary window gives an overview of the number of rows that have been imported. If you have finished importing data, click **Close**. If you want to continue importing data, click **Import more data**. Email /visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup/email page With Assisted setup for email, you can setup your email so that you can send invoices and reports from the system to your contacts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email With Assisted setup for email, you can setup your email so that you can send invoices and reports from the system to your contacts. ## Assisted setup The default account name and email address are generated by the system and you cannot change them. To be able to send invoices and reports, you only need to add a reply address. If a customer replies to an email sent via the system, their reply will be sent to the email address you enter here. Click **Save**. If you want to use a different email account to send emails from the system, go to the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window. You can view and change the body text used in emails that are sent from the system in the [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

 Forms /visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup/forms page In Assisted setup for Forms, you can add a logo and choose the fields that are displayed on all invoices, dunning letters and customer statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Forms In Assisted setup for Forms, you can add a logo and choose the fields that are displayed on all invoices, dunning letters and customer statements. ## Assisted setup ## Select logo In this window you can upload an image file with your logo. This logo will be used on all external customer forms. The logo needs to be in either.jpg,.gif, or.png format. For optimal appearance of the logo on all forms, it should have a proportion of 4:1 (width:height). 1. Click the link **Click here to upload image...**. 1. In the **Upload file** dialog box, click **Choose file** and go to the folder on you computer where you have the image file you want to upload. 1. Click **Upload**. 1. You see the uploaded image. If you have uploaded several images, you can browse through them via **Prev** and **Next**. 1. Click **Select** when you see the image you want to use. 1. In the bottom part of the window, click **Next** to go to the next step. ## Choose form and fields You can define which fields to display on the different forms. You can adapt one form at the time. If you want to change several forms, you need to repeat the steps below. If you have already created invoices, dunning letters and customer statements, the system displays a preview in step 5 below. 1. Choose the **Form category**. 1. Choose the **Form type**. 1. Click to select the fields you want to use on the form. By default, all the fields are selected. 1. In the bottom part of the window, click **Apply**. 1. Depending on whether you have created the form before (for example, if you have released an invoice), you will see a preview or get a confirmation message. 1. Preview: Click **Done** or **Edit next form**, depending on what you want to do next. 1. No preview: Click **Next** or **Finish**, depending on what you want to do next. You can edit the report forms any time by opening the report you want to edit and by clicking **Edit report**. It opens the report form in the **Report Designer** where you can add, delete, move, and resize the report columns, change the report font, and preview the edited report. Subaccounts /visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup/subaccounts section In Assisted setup of Subaccounts you can define the subaccounts you want to use throughout the system and set the default subaccount for your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Subaccounts In Assisted setup of Subaccounts you can define the subaccounts you want to use throughout the system and set the default subaccount for your company. ## Subaccounts To use subaccounts in your system, go to the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and enable the **Subaccounts** functionality. Before creating the list of required subaccounts, take the time to think through the whole system of accounts and subaccounts. Changing the structure or length of the subaccount segments after you have started to use Visma Net is difficult and may have unpredictable consequences. Note that if you have not decided to use subaccounts when you set up the system, it will be more difficult to start using them later. ## About subaccounts Subaccounts are used to break down large accounts for better tracking of various company earnings and expenses, or for budget allocation. For example, your company might set up a subaccount for each department to track its revenue and costs. If you enable subaccounts in your system and you specify a regular account, you always need to specify the corresponding subaccount. ## About segments [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) are categories for which you analyse the financial activities, such as a unit, department, or project. Each segment has a number of segment values. For example, the segment Department may have values for R&D, Marketing, Support, and Sales. The combination of segment values determines the subaccount. You can define the number of segments, the length of each segment and whether the segment should contain letters, numbers, or both. The maximum length of a subaccount is 30 characters. ## Step 1: Create segment In step one, you create the segments for your subaccount. You also need to decide whether you want to use the **on-the-fly entry**. This option allows you to create subaccounts in the workspaces by entering combinations of existing segment values, without having to predefine all combinations in the **Create subaccounts** step. One segment is available by default. You can either overwrite the description, length, and edit mask of this segment. 1. Select **Allow adding new values on the fly** if you want to be able to create subaccounts directly in the workspaces. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a segment. 1. Enter the **description**, **length**, and **edit mask** (character type). 1. Repeat this process for all segments. 1. Save the changes and click **Next**. ## Step 2: Create segment value In step two you set the values for each segment. Each value represents a specific element within a category. For example, if the segment you created in step one was department, you can not set the value for each department, such as R&D and Marketing. Note that a default value is set for each segment. You can change the description of this default value if you want to use it, if not, delete it. 1. Choose the **segment ID** you want to set the values for. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a segment value. 1. Enter the **value** and the **description**. 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all values for this segment. 1. Repeat this process for all segments. 1. Save the changes and click **Next**. ## Step 3: Set default subaccount In step three you set the default subaccount. The default subaccount replaces the default system subaccount, which is 0. If you have added a new segment to an existing default subaccount, this step will be displayed, and you can define the default value of the new segment. You can only choose the values you have created in step 2 of the wizard. To set the default subaccount, choose the default segment value for the segment in the drop-down lists. Save your changes and click **Next**. ## Step 4: Create subaccounts In step four, you enter a combination of the segment values to form subaccounts that you can use throughout the system. If you have selected **Allow adding new values on the fly** in step 1, you do not need to predefine all subaccounts, and this step is skipped. The **Allow adding new values on the fly** allows you to create subaccounts directly in the workspaces. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a subaccount. 1. Enter the values of the **subaccount**. 1. Optionally, enter a **description**. 1. Repeat this process for all subaccounts. 1. Save your changes and click **Finish**. 1. If you have created more than one subaccount, you will be asked if you want to set the default subaccount, if you have not already done that. ## Step 5: Summary The summary gives an overview of all created elements per step. Check the information and click **Close**. Help /visma-net-erp/help section Setup, workflows, and module guidance for Visma Net ERP. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Help Setup, workflows, and module guidance for Visma Net ERP. Access management /visma-net-erp/help/access-management section In the Access management section, you'll find essential information for securing your company's data by managing user access and permissions effectively. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Access management In the Access management section, you'll find essential information for securing your company's data by managing user access and permissions effectively. After completing the initial setup of the Visma Net, the next step is to create users and assign them roles. These roles, which come as standardised, define each user's level of access to the system. When users log in, their assigned roles determine which system resources they can access. ## Restricting access to information When users successfully log in to Visma Net, they should see only the system resources they need for their daily work. Read more in the **User security** section listed below. In addition to limiting access to system entities by using roles, the Visma Net provides **restriction groups**, which give you the ability to control the visibility of records or entities of multiple types, such as General Ledger accounts, subaccounts, subaccount segment values, budgets, and supplier and customer accounts. Membership in a restriction group controls the visibility of only the entities included in the group; meanwhile, the role may allow access to all the entities of a particular type. Read more in the **Row-level security** section listed below. User security /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security section In the Access management section, you can easily view user accounts that have been created for your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User security In the Access management section, you can easily view user accounts that have been created for your company. Additionally, you have the ability to create and manage customised roles, along with the access rights associated with these roles. You are then able to give access rights to users by assigning them one or more roles, based on their job tasks. About role-based access /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-role-based-access page Visma Net employs a role-based system to regulate access to the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About role-based access Visma Net employs a role-based system to regulate access to the system. Visma Net employs a role-based system to regulate access to the system. Instead of assigning access rights individually, users are assigned one or more roles, which are predefined sets of access rights. These roles align with their specific job responsibility and determine the levels of access granted to workspaces, windows, records, and record operations. This allows for easy and efficient management of access to system objects, as changing the access rights of a role affects all users assigned to that role. Users without any assigned roles have no access to system resources. ## Efficient user role setup for Visma Net After Visma Net is installed, you give users access to the system objects according to their responsibilities by assigning them roles. This is done in Admin which is Visma's administration panel where you manage your companies and users. Before you start managing user access within your company, be sure to create an administrative user role with full system access. This role will serve as a cornerstone for assigning additional user roles. This way you can avoid the potential risk of inadvertently locking users out of the system. ## Default roles Admin provides predefined roles to simplify role definition and administration. These roles are license roles and define the maximum number of users per company. They are initially managed and assigned in Admin, then automatically transferred to Visma Net. In the roles registry of Visma Net, they are marked as 'Default' and come with preconfigured access rights that cannot be altered or removed. In Admin you can, for instance, assign users the **Financials Administrator** or **Financials User** roles. Visma Net also includes built-in roles that are stored directly in the system. These roles are always provided and cannot be removed. Some of these roles grant users access to special functionality, while others are used by the system and should not be manually assigned to users. The following built-in roles are available in the system: Administrator : This is an internal role used by the system, for instance to run system processes. Anonymous : This role is reserved for system use. DashboardDesigner : The system automatically designates this role as a dashboard owner role for dashboards that were created in previous versions of Visma Net. We recommend that you create specific roles for users who should own particular dashboards. For details, see: [About dashboard pages](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-dashboard-pages/). BI : A user with this role can access the **BI Views** —that is, the pre-configured generic inquiries that are exposed through the OData protocol, such as **BI-opportunities**. Customiser : A user with this role can customise Visma Net applications. Field-level audit : A user with this role can view the audit trail directly from an audited window. Guest : Not used. Internal user : A user with this role can change personal settings, and view Help. It is automatically assigned to all user accounts linked with the **Employee** user type. Portal admin : Not used. Portal user : Not used. ReportDesigner : A user with this role can publish reports in Visma Net. Any user can create reports in Report designer, but for publishing reports in Visma Net, the user needs to be granted this role. ## Customized roles In addition to predefined roles, you are able to create new roles using the [User roles (SM201005)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/user-roles-sm201005/) window, and assign it to as many user accounts as needed. These roles are specific to your company and can be used to remove access granted by the license roles. We recommend that you configure the roles so that a user with a role only has the access rights necessary to perform typical tasks. It is better to give a user multiple roles than to create complicated roles that overlap with existing ones. ### Example Suppose that the Accounting manager role has broader access rights than the Accountant role. Instead of giving the Account manager role the same privileges the Accountant role has, give a user in a managerial position the Accountant role along with the Accounting manager role. ## Managing User access and Roles If you need to change access rights for all users assigned to a role, you change the settings of the role instead of editing each user's permissions. When new users are hired in your organisation, you assign a role to a new user. When existing users change their position in the company, you simply change set of roles according to their new responsibilities. About access rights for roles /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-access-rights-for-roles section In Visma Net, you can control a role's access to system entities, which is the broadest, down to the window element level, which is the most specific. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About access rights for roles In Visma Net, you can control a role's access to system entities, which is the broadest, down to the window element level, which is the most specific. The available levels of access depend on the system entity type. By default, each user role has the access level specified as **Not set** to all workspaces and windows. Initially, this means that all users can view and use all system objects. > [!IMPORTANT] > The **Not set** access level indicates that all roles have access to the workspace until **Revoked** or **Granted** access rights are set to the workspace for at least one role. All roles with the **Not set** level are then denied access to the workspace. ## Roles and access rights Consider an example of some roles a business might set, as shown in the illustration below, with full **Delete** access rights shown in blue and **View Only** access rights shown in purple. ![User roles examples](/media/visma-net-erp/User%20roles%20examples.png) Note that some users have only one role assigned, while other users have multiple roles, in accordance with their responsibilities. A user's access to an entity is defined by the most permissive level of access among the roles assigned to this user. With the roles shown here, User 6 (with both the **Accounting manager** and **Supplier ledger administrator** roles assigned) has full access to budgets from the **Accounting manager** role, rather than view-only access from the **Supplier ledger administrator** role. For more information see [About levels of access rights](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-levels-of-access-rights/). ## Setting up access rights in Visma Net The following table shows two methods to set up access rights for roles in two different windows in Visma Net: |||| |---|---|---| |**Window used**|[Access rights by role (SM201025)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025/)|[Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-window-sm201020/)| |**Type of access managed**|Access rights for a particular role to multiple system objects.|Access rights to a particular system object (a workspace, a window, or a window element) for multiple roles.| |**Appropriate scenario**|When you have created a new role and want to set up access to all necessary windows for it.|When you want to configure access rights workspace by workspace, or window by window.| |**Read more**|[Configure access rights for a selected user role](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/configure-access-rights-for-a-selected-user-role/)|[Configure access rights to system objects](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/configure-access-rights-to-system-objects/)| ### Access Rights Depending on Object Type The specific levels of access rights to system objects you select for roles depend on the object type (workspace, window, or window element) for which you are specifying access rights. For some objects, you can only permit or deny access, but for others, you can set up partial access (for example, view-only access). ## Ability to track access rights You can track access rights to different objects by using the following windows: + [Access rights by window (SM65170S)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-window-sm65170s/) Gives you the ability to build a report to view access rights by each system object (a workspace, and a window). + [Access rights by role (SM65150S)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-role-sm65150s/) Gives you the ability to view access rights by each user role.

Related pages

Windows

 About levels of access rights /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-levels-of-access-rights page With Visma Net, you can control access to system objects at broad and granular levels, down to the control of window elements, such as buttons, text boxes, and check boxes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About levels of access rights With Visma Net, you can control access to system objects at broad and granular levels, down to the control of window elements, such as buttons, text boxes, and check boxes. With Visma Net, you can control access to system objects at broad and granular levels, down to the control of window elements, such as buttons, text boxes, and check boxes. Users are assigned to roles, and you give these roles the appropriate levels of access rights (or access levels) to workspaces, windows, and window elements. You have to be very careful when you assign multiple roles to a user account because these roles may have different levels of access rights to system objects. ## Access rights tier structure When configuring user roles, there are three levels of access rights to consider:
Level Description
Workspace level Access at an overall level, such as an entire workspace. Access on this level will also impact windows and entities.
Window-level Access based on windows. For instance, access to a specific window, but not to the window settings. You can configure whether a role can view or edit the window information.
Entity level Access based on functionality. For example, the ability to access and edit sales invoices, while excluding changes to currency.
## Access rights at the workspace levels The following table summarises the levels of access rights that roles can have to the **workspaces** of Visma Net.
Level Description
Not set Allows all roles to have access to the workspace until Revoked or Granted access level is set to the workspace for at least one role. After that, a role with this level is denied access to the workspace.
Revoked

Denies the role access to the workspace and its windows. Users with this role will not be able to see the workspace or its contents.

However, users with this access level may still have access to the functionality of the windows within the workspace. They can only access these windows from other windows with commands to open them, and they cannot view the windows on the navigation pane.
Granted

Allows the role access to the workspace.

You can, however, limit or revoke access to particular windows within the workspace. Only a user with a role with an access level to a window higher than Revoked can access it by clicking the workspace on the main menu and then clicking the window on the navigation pane.
View only

Allows the role access to the workspace.

You can, however, limit or revoke access to particular windows within the workspace. Only a user with a role with an access level to a window higher than Revoked can access it by clicking the workspace on the main menu and then clicking the window on the navigation pane.
You can set up access rights to individual windows in the **Hidden** node (which cannot be accessed from the main menu) on the site map, but not to the node itself. ### Effects of changing access levels from Not set If you change a role's access level to a workspace from **Not set** to **Granted** or **Revoked**, and apply this access level to all nested objects, the role's access rights to workspaces and windows with the **Not set** access level are changed as follows:
If you set the access level for the workspace to Then
Granted

the access level to the workspaces is changed to Granted,

and the access level to windows are changed to Delete(which allows full access to the window and its functionality).
Revoked the access levels to the windows are changed to Revoked.
Access configuration works similarly for a workspace with the **Not set** access level and the windows within it. The capability to set up an access level to a workspace and to all objects within it at once is helpful if the role's access level to most objects within the workspace is **Delete** or **Revoked**. ### Resetting a role’s access level You can reset a role's access level to a workspace to **Not set** any time you want. While resetting access levels, you have the option to update the access level to **Not set** either for all the workspaces and windows or for only the selected workspace. Similar options are available when you set access level for a workspace to **Not set**. For a procedure that describes how to reset access rights, see: [Reset access rights to a suite or a module](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/reset-access-rights-to-a-suite-or-a-module/). ## Access rights at the window level Within each workspace, you can set the access rights that roles have to Visma Net windows, which affects what users with those roles can access. By default, a new role has the **Not set** access level. ### Inherited access If you change access rights for a user role to a window or a window element, your changes affect only this window or window element. The level of access rights to the window is inherited by the entities and records that can be created by using the window. To make the window available in the navigation pane to a user with this role, set the access level for the window to the **View only** level or more permissive and set the access level for the workspace where the window is located to **Granted**. You can set any of the following levels of access rights to **windows**.
Level Description
Not set

When assigned to all roles, allows all roles to have access to the window until access rights are set to any other level for at least one role.

After at least one role has been assigned another level of access rights, access to the window is denied for a role with this access level.
Revoked Denies the role access to the window and its functionality.
View only

Gives the role restricted access to the window and its functionality.

This level allows users with the role to view the window and any records associated with the window (in drop-down lists on other windows).

This level forbids users with the role to edit details about any record, create new records or entities of the type, and delete records.
Edit

Gives the role restricted access to the window and its functionality.

This level allows users with the role to view the window, select records, and edit details about any record. This level forbids users with the role to create new records or entities of the type, and to delete records.

The Clipboard button is available on the window toolbar for users with the role.
Insert

Gives the role restricted access to the window and its functionality.

This level allows users with the role to view the window, select records, edit details about any record, and create new records or entities of the type.

This level forbids users with the role to delete records.

The Clipboard and Insert buttons are available on the window toolbar for users with the role.
Delete

Gives the role complete access to the window and its functionality.

This level encompasses the capabilities of the View only, Edit, and Insert levels, while also giving users with the role the ability to delete records.

For users with the role, the Clipboard, Insert, and Delete buttons are available on the window toolbar.
## Access rights to containers of window elements Each window includes containers of elements, such as nested windows, tabs, and grids. Each container includes multiple elements and actions. You can restrict access to any of these containers in the window. ### Inherited access The level of access rights a role has to the container is inherited by the entities and records created by using the container, if applicable. For instance, if you permit access for a user role to a grid, a user with this role can access all records in this grid. By default, containers inherit access level from the window to which they belong. You can set any of the following levels of access rights to the **containers**.
Level Description
Inherited Indicates that the role’s access to the container is inherited from its access level to the window.
Revoked Denies the role access to the container and hides it from the window for users with the role. These users will not see the container in the window.
View only

Gives the role restricted access to the container and its functionality. This level allows users with the role to view the container and any records associated with the container (in drop-down lists on other windows), if applicable.

The level forbids users with the role to edit details about any record, create new records or entities of the type, and delete records, if applicable.
Edit

Gives users with the role restricted access to the container and its functionality. This level allows users with the role to view the container, select records, and edit details about any record, if applicable.

The level forbids users with the role to create new records or entities of the type, and delete records, if applicable.
Insert

Gives the role restricted access to the container and its functionality. This level allows users with the role to view the container, select records, edit details about any record, and create new records or entities of the type, if applicable.

This level forbids users with the role to delete records, if applicable.
Delete Gives the role complete access to the container and its functionality. This level encompasses the capabilities of the View only, Edit, and Insert levels, while also giving users with the role the ability to delete records, if applicable.
## Access rights to window elements By default, a role's access rights to the window elements and actions are inherited from the role's access level to the container of window elements. This includes the elements and actions to which they belong. Therefore, it is recommended to set the role's access level to the container of window elements before setting an access level to an individual element or action. Once this is done, you can then set access rights to the window elements and actions. You can set up the following levels of access rights to **window elements**.
Level Description
Inherited Indicates that the role’s access level to the element is inherited from its access level to the container of window elements.
Revoked Denies the role access to the element and hides the element. A user with the role will not see the element in the window.
View only Makes the element read-only for users with the role. A user with the role will see the element in the window but will not be able to use it.
Edit Allows the use of the element for users with the role.
If a particular window toolbar contains window-specific buttons, you can deny access for the role to these buttons, by setting **Revoked** for the buttons. You can revoke access to some of the elements to hide their contents from users with **View only** access level. Configuring a role's access rights at the window control level requires in-depth knowledge of Visma Net functionality.

Related pages

Concepts

 Access rights level for user accounts with multiple roles /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/access-rights-level-for-user-accounts-with-multiple-roles page The level of access rights a user account has to a system object is defined by the user roles assigned to the user. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Access rights level for user accounts with multiple roles The level of access rights a user account has to a system object is defined by the user roles assigned to the user. ## General rule in Visma Net If a user has multiple roles assigned and the roles have different access levels to the system object, Visma Net applies the most permissive access level among the roles. The following table illustrates this with an example. |When|And|Then| |---|---|---| |A user is assigned both the **Employee** and **Sales manager** roles|The **Employee** role has the **Revoked** access level to the Inventory module, and the **Sales manager** role has the **Granted** access level to this module|the user has the **Granted** access level to the Inventory module, that is, the most permissive level.| ## Roles with inherited and defined granular levels The method of calculating access rights differs from the general rule described in the previous paragraph for a user who has been assigned multiple roles. This happens when some or all of these roles have the **Inherited** access level, which is applied to window element containers and window elements by default. For this user, the following two rules are used to calculate access rights to a window element container or window element: ### RULE 1 |IF|THEN| |---|---| |all roles have the **Inherited** access level to the particular window element container or window elements|the resulting access level is the most permissive access level of the system object at the next highest access level.| In practice, this means that a window element container will have the same access level as the window that is closest in the access hierarchy. Similarly, a window element will have the access level of the nearest element container up in the hierarchy. See example 1 below. ### RULE 2 |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you have explicitly specified an access level to the particular window element container or window element for at least one role. Let’s say you have chosen the “View only” access level to a Release button, while the other roles have the **Inherited** access level to it.|this gives you the access right that is the most permissive access level among those roles with explicitly defined access levels, that is the "View only" level. See example 3 below.| In these cases the system ignores the roles with the Inherited level of access rights, which is something to consider when making changes at the detail level. This algorithm is used to optimise the speed of loading the window. ## Access level examples: Scenarios with multiple roles The following are additional examples that illustrate the system behaviour described in this section. ### Example 1 Suppose that a user is assigned the **Employee** and the **Accountant** user roles. The **Employee** role has the **Revoked** access level to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and the **Accountant** role has the **Edit** access level to this window. The default access level both roles have to the window elements is **Inherited**. The user with these roles, then, has the **Edit** access level to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and its elements. ### Example 2 Suppose that a user is assigned the **Employee** and **Accountant** user roles. Both roles have the **Insert** access level to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. You have decided to forbid users with the **Accountant** role to release invoices. For the **Accountant** role, you specify the **Revoked** access level for the **Release** button in this window. The **Employee** role has the **Inherited** access level to the **Release** button. With the settings you have specified, the user has the **Revoked** access level to the **Release** button. ### Example 3 Suppose that a user is assigned the **Employee**, **Warehouse Worker**, and **Sales assistant** user roles. All these roles have the **Insert** access level to the [Receipts (IN301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/receipts-in301000/) window. The **Employee** role has the **Inherited** access level to the **Release** button on this window, the **Warehouse worker** role has the **Revoked** access level to this button, and the **Sales assistant** role has the **View only** access level to this button. As a result, the user has the **View only** access level (the most permissive level of the two explicitly defined levels) to this button.

Related pages

Concepts

 Configure access rights for a selected user role /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/configure-access-rights-for-a-selected-user-role section You use the Access rights by role (SM201025) window to set up access rights to multiple system objects (such as workspaces, windows, and window elements) for a customized role in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure access rights for a selected user role You use the Access rights by role (SM201025) window to set up access rights to multiple system objects (such as workspaces, windows, and window elements) for a customized role in Visma Net. For more information: [Access rights by role (SM201025)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025/). You use the [Access rights by role (SM201025)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025/) window to set up access rights to multiple system objects (such as workspaces, windows, and window elements) for a customized role in Visma Net. The following procedure describes the steps to set up access rights for a single user role, that you have customized in Visma Net. Predefined roles are managed from Admin. 1. Go to the [Access rights by role (SM201025)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025/) window. 1. Select a user role in the **Role name** field. 1. In the System tree, click the system object to which you need to set up access rights as follows: + Click the **Company name** node. + Click the name of a necessary workspace. + **For a window**: Expand the node of a necessary workspace to the window level, and click the name of the workspace. + **For a window element**: Expand the node of the necessary workspace to the window element level, and click one of the following: + The window name, if you are setting up access rights to a container of window elements (that is, a sub-form, a tab, or a grid). + The name of the container of window elements, if you are setting up access rights for a window element (that is, a text field or an action). 1. In the right pane, for the row with the required system object, select the level of access rights from the drop-down list. For details, see: [About levels of access rights](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-levels-of-access-rights/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat steps 2–5 for each system object to which you need to set up access rights for the selected role.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Configure access rights to system objects /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/configure-access-rights-to-system-objects section You use the Access rights by window (SM201020) to set up access rights to system objects, such as workspaces, windows, and form elements, for multiple user roles in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure access rights to system objects You use the Access rights by window (SM201020) to set up access rights to system objects, such as workspaces, windows, and form elements, for multiple user roles in Visma Net. For more information: [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-window-sm65170s/). You use the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-window-sm65170s/) to set up access rights to system objects, such as workspaces, windows, and form elements, for multiple user roles in Visma Net. The following procedure describes the steps to set up access rights to system objects for multiple user roles that you have customized in Visma Net. Predefined roles are managed from Admin. 1. Go to the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-window-sm65170s/) window. 1. In the System tree, expand nodes to the necessary level and click the name of the system object to which you want to set up access rights. **For example**: For a window, you expand the module node to workspace level and then the window level, and click the name of the necessary window. 1. In the right pane, select a required access rights level for all necessary user roles. For details, see: [About levels of access rights](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-levels-of-access-rights/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat steps 1–3 for each system object for which you want to configure access rights.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Configure access rights for Excel export /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/configure-access-rights-for-excel-export section You can configure access rights to the Export to Excel action of only those generic inquiries that are directly added to the sitemap or that replace entry windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure access rights for Excel export You can configure access rights to the Export to Excel action of only those generic inquiries that are directly added to the sitemap or that replace entry windows. You can configure access rights to the **Export to Excel** action of only those generic inquiries that are directly added to the sitemap or that replace entry windows. Depending on how a generic inquiry has been added to the sitemap, you should follow one of the set of instructions below. ## Generic inquiry added as a separate screen 1. Go to the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-window-sm65170s/) window. 1. In the System tree, expand nodes to the necessary level to find the generic inquiry to which you want to set up access rights. 1. Expand the generic inquiry. 1. Expand the **Generic inquiry result** container. 1. Click the **Export** action. 1. In the right pane, select a required access rights level for all necessary user roles. For details, see: [About levels of access rights](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-levels-of-access-rights/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Generic inquiry configured to replace an entry screen 1. Go to the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-window-sm65170s/) window. 1. In the System tree, expand nodes to the necessary level to find the entry form that is replaced with the generic inquiry to which you want to set up access rights. 1. Expand the entry form. 1. Expand the container of the entry form. 1. Click the **Export** action. 1. In the right pane, select a required access rights level for all necessary user roles. For details, see: [About levels of access rights](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-levels-of-access-rights/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Reset access rights to a suite or a module /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/reset-access-rights-to-a-suite-or-a-module section This procedure describes how you reset access rights to a module in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reset access rights to a suite or a module This procedure describes how you reset access rights to a module in Visma Net. 1. Go to the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-window-sm201020/) window. 1. In the System tree, select a name of the module. 1. In the right pane, select the **Not set** access level for each role to which you need to reset access rights. 1. In the right pane, select the **Applies to children** check box for each role to which you need to reset access rights. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat steps 2–5 for all workspaces to which you want to reset access rights. User security windows /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows section On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User security windows On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. Access history (SM201045) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-history-sm201045 page In this window, you can view the log of activities that users have taken in the system, such as signing in, signing out, accessing specific forms, and publishing customisations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Access history (SM201045) In this window, you can view the log of activities that users have taken in the system, such as signing in, signing out, accessing specific forms, and publishing customisations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part In this area, you can select a particular user, operation, and date range to view the system log for this user in this date range.
Element Description
Username

The username of the person for whom you want to view the system log.

Leave this field blank to view data for all system users.
From

The date and time that starts the range for which you want to view data.

Leave this field blank if you do not want to limit the starting date and time of data.
To

The date and time that ends the range for which you want to view data.

Leave this field blank if you don’t want to limit the ending date and time of data.
Operation

The operation for which you want to view data.

The following operations are available:

Login
The user signed in to the system.
Logout
The user signed out of the system.
Session expired
The user session expired.
Login failed
The user tried to access the system but failed to sign in.
Access screen
The user accessed a window. The ID and title of the window are displayed in the Screen ID and Title columns, respectively. The event is logged only once for each window during a user session (when the user first opens the window).
Email sent
The user successfully sent an email.
Error sending email
The user’s attempt to send an email resulted in an error.
Customisation published
The user published a customization on a window. The ID and title of the window are displayed in the Window ID and Title columns, respectively. For more information, see the Visma Net Customisation guide.
License exceeded
The number of concurrent users exceeded the license limit. The login of the user who is forcibly signed out is displayed in the Username column.
## The table This table contains the log of user activities that meet the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Date The date and time of the activity.
User name The name of the user who performed the activity.
Operation The operation performed by the user. (See the list of operations in the previous section.)
IP address The IP address from which the user signed in to the system.
Window ID The screen ID of the window that was accessed by the user.
Title The name of the window that was accessed by the user.
Comment The automatically generated comment.
Access rights by role (SM201025) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025 page In this window, you can fine-tune the access rights each role has to system workspaces, windows, and even specific window elements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Access rights by role (SM201025) In this window, you can fine-tune the access rights each role has to system workspaces, windows, and even specific window elements. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can fine-tune the access rights each role has to system workspaces, windows, and even specific window elements. Also, you can create a role directly on this window and configure its access to system entities. You use this window when you want to give a particular user role access rights to multiple Visma Net system objects. For example: You might use this window to give the custom user role **Chief accountant** access to all windows of the General ledger, Cash management, and Supplier ledger workspaces. You can also set multiple roles' access rights to modules, workspaces, windows, and window elements in the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-window-sm201020/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Configure access rights for a selected user role](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/configure-access-rights-for-a-selected-user-role/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Copy role

Copies the set of access rights of the selected role to the new role.

To create and populate a new role, type the new role name in the New role name field in the New role dialog box, which appears when you click this button, and click Copy.
### The New role dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Copy role** button. By using this dialog box, you can copy the current role's set of access rights to a new role.
Element Description
New role name The name of the new role to which access rights will be copied.
Copy (button) Creates a new role and copies the access rights of the current role to the new role.
## The top part You use this area to specify the name and description of a new role or to select an existing role.
Element Description
Role name The role name. Select a name from the list of roles or, if you’re adding a new role, type the role name.
Role description The description of the role.
## The left pane In this pane, system workspaces are represented as first-level nodes. The top node represents the home page dashboard. Click the node icon to the left of any module to expand it and view the workspaces within it. Click the node icon to the left of any workspace to expand the node and view the hierarchical structure of the workspace. Some workspaces have a single-level list of windows, while other workspaces have more levels, which correspond to the organisation of these windows on the user interface. Click the node icon to the left of any window to expand the node and view the list of window elements, such as tabs and grids. The **Hidden** node contains system objects, such as windows and reports, that are not displayed in the site map but can be accessed through other windows. When you click any node, the right pane displays the list of its objects with the level of access rights the role has to each object. You can restrict access to these objects as well. ## The right pane In this pane, you can view and edit the access rights of the selected role for the objects of the selected node. To change a level of access rights, in the row with the appropriate object, select the needed option in the **Access rights** column.
Column Description
Description The name of the object.
Access rights

The access rights of the selected role for the object.

For more information, see: About levels of access rights.
Applies to children A check box that indicates (if selected) that the access rights level to a system object specified for the selected role is the same for all nested objects (children) within the object. You can change the access rights level for any nested object manually. The system clears this check box automatically when the access rights levels of the system object and its children become different.

Related pages

Concepts

 Access rights by window (SM201020) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-window-sm201020 page In this window, you can view and modify the access rights of roles to system modules, workspaces, windows, and window elements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Access rights by window (SM201020) In this window, you can view and modify the access rights of roles to system modules, workspaces, windows, and window elements. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view and modify the access rights of roles to system modules, workspaces, windows, and window elements. You use this window to assign access rights for multiple user roles to a particular workspace, Visma Net window, or window element. For example: You might use this window to provide access to the Configuration workspace for the **Administrator** role and to prohibit access for all other roles. You can also use the [Access rights by role (SM201025)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025/) window to select a particular role and set its access to modules, workspaces, windows, and window elements. ## What to do from this window + [Configure access rights to system objects](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/configure-access-rights-to-system-objects/) + [Reset access rights to a suite or a module](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/reset-access-rights-to-a-suite-or-a-module/) ## The left pane In this pane, system modules are represented as first-level nodes. The top node represents the home page dashboard. You can click the node icon to the left of any module to expand it and view the workspaces within it. Also, you can click the node icon to the left of any workspace to expand the node and view the hierarchical structure of the workspace. Some workspaces have a one-level list of windows, while other workspaces have more levels, which correspond to the organisation of these windows on the user interface. You can click the node icon to the left of any window to expand the node and view the list of window elements, such as tabs, grids, fields, and actions. The **Hidden** node contains system objects, such as windows and reports, that are not displayed in the site map but can be accessed through other windows. When you click any node, the right pane display roles defined in the system and the details for each, including its level of access rights. ## The right pane In this pane, you can view and edit the access rights of the roles for the selected node. To change a level of access rights, in the row with the appropriate role, select the needed option in the **Access rights** column.
Element Description
Role The name of the role.
Guest role

A check box that, if selected, indicates that the role is marked as a guest role.

For details, see: About role-based access.
Description A description of the role.
Access rights

The access rights of the role for the selected object.

For more information, see: About levels of access rights.
Applies to children A check box that indicates (if selected) that the access rights level for the role specified to the selected system object is the same for all nested objects (children) within the object. You can change the access rights level for any nested object manually. The system clears this check box automatically when the access rights levels of the system object and its children become different.

Related pages

Concepts

 User roles (SM201005) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/user-roles-sm201005 page A role is a set of access rights to specific modules or other system entities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User roles (SM201005) A role is a set of access rights to specific modules or other system entities. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. A **role** is a set of access rights to specific modules or other system entities. Some users are assigned only one role, while others are assigned multiple roles in accordance with different sets of employee responsibilities. For more information about roles, see: [About role-based access](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-role-based-access/). Make sure you create an administrative role with full access to the system before you start managing user access within your company. This way, you ensure a smooth process for everyone and minimise the risk of accidentally locking users out of the system. ## The top part This area contains the summary elements of the role you are creating or viewing.
Element Description
Role name The unique identifier of the role. Type the name of the new role, or select a role from the list of available roles.
Role description A detailed description of the role.
## The Membership tab On this tab, you can view the list of users to whom the role selected in the top part is assigned. For a customised role you have created in Visma Net you can update the users in the list.
Column Description
Username The login name of the user to whom this role is assigned.
Display name The combination of the First name and Last name in the Users (SM201010) window of the user selected in the User name column.
Comment Any comment that was provided for the selected user in the Users (SM201010) window.
User types (EP202500) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/user-types-ep202500 page You use this window to define user types, which are used to provide default settings for creating new users. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User types (EP202500) You use this window to define user types, which are used to provide default settings for creating new users. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define user types, which are used to provide default settings for creating new users. The window is also used to define the set of roles that are available for a user of the given type and the default roles to be assigned when a user of this type is created. You can add new user types, view existing user types and modify their settings, and delete unused types from the system. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings for a new user type, or select an existing type to view or modify its settings.
Element Description
User type The unique identifier of the user type. Enter the ID of the new type, or select a user type from the list.
Linked entity

The entity associated with this user type. The following options are available:

Contact
You can assign this user type to external users, such as partners or contacts of customer or supplier organisations.
Employee
You can assign this user type to employees of your company and possibly to consultants that you consider part of your company.
Description A description of the user type.
## The Allowed roles tab You use this tab to view and update the list of roles that can be assigned to users of this type.
Button Description
Apply to users Applies the default roles to all users of the selected user type. You can click this button if you have added a default role to the list of allowed roles and want to assign this role all users of the selected user type. If you instead want to assign a role for a particular user, you can use the Users (SM201010) window.
Column Description
Default A check box that you select to assign the role to a user of this type by default. The role or roles with this check box selected will be assigned to any new user of the type. (If you change value of this field after creating users of the selected type, their user role assignment will remain unchanged.)
Role name The role that can be assigned to the user of the type.
Role description Read-only. The detailed description of the role.
## The Users tab You use this tab to view the list of users that are assigned to the selected user type. You can add users in this list by using the [Users (SM201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/users-sm201010/) window. ## The Login creation rules On this tab, you specify the default rules that apply when a new user of this type is added.
Element Description
Use email as login

A check box that you select to use the email address of a contact as the username of the contact for new users of this type.

This policy applies only when you add a user account to a contact account by using the Contacts (CR302000) window.
Reset password on first login A check box that you select to require new users of this type to change their password at the first login.
Require login activation A check box that you select to require activation of a new user account. If you select this check box, new users of this type will receive an email with information on how to enable their user account.
Users (SM201010) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/users-sm201010 page This window presents all user information imported from Admin including all existing users who have been granted access and their corresponding predefined roles set in Admin. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Users (SM201010) This window presents all user information imported from Admin including all existing users who have been granted access and their corresponding predefined roles set in Admin. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can assign custom roles from Visma Net. Please note that all user management, including user creation and updates to email addresses and passwords, is performed exclusively within Admin. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Membership

Opens the Restriction groups by user window, where you can view or configure the user’s membership in groups.

This button appears only when you are viewing an existing user.
## The top part You use this area to see user information that has been collected from Admin.
Element Description
Login

Required.

The unique login name to authorise this user to log in to the system. Select a user name to view information about the user.
Guest account A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is associated with a contact-related user type. For a new user, the system selects or clears this check box automatically when you select the user type. Not used.
User type

The user type of this user, which defines the set of roles available to the user, the default roles assigned to the user, and the user types for which the user can create, manage, and add users. If you are creating a user account for a contact, you must select a contact-related user type for the user or add a new user type.

To add a new user type, click Edit to the right of the field to open the User types (EP202500) window in a pop-up window and add the type.

This field is not available when you select a domain user.
Linked entity

An employee or contact account that is associated with the user.

If the user you are creating is already defined in the system as an employee or contact account, you can select the appropriate employee or contact name in this field. This will cause relevant elements to be filled in.

The user type you have selected determines whether this field can be left blank and what type of account you can select.

If you have selected an employee-related user type in the User type field or left it blank, you can select an employee account or leave the Linked entity field blank.

If you have selected a contact-related user type in the User type field, you must select a contact account here or add a new contact. To add a new contact account, click Edit to the right of the field to open the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window and add the contact account. When you save the added contact account, it will automatically be inserted in this field.
First name The first name of the user.
Last name The last name of the user.
Email The email address of the user, which is used to send information to the user, such as a link to password reset.
Comment Any additional user-related information that you want to add to the record.
## The Roles tab You can add and remove any customised role that was created in Visma Net and assigned to the selected user. Roles that have been transferred from Admin are labelled as "Default" and are read-only, with their management handled entirely in Admin.
Column Description
Selected A check box that you select to assign this role to the selected user.
Role name Read-only. The name that identifies the role. Roles that have been transferred from Admin are labelled as “Default”.
Role description Read-only. The description of the role.
## The Statistics tab On this tab, you can see the account usage information.
Element Description
Account creation date Read-only. The date and time when the account was created.
Last login date

Read-only.

The date and time of the last login.
Last lockout date Read-only. The most recent date when the account was temporarily locked out.
Last password change date Read-only. Not in use. The date and time of the most recent password change.
Number of unsuccessful attempts to enter password Read-only. Not in use. The number of unsuccessful attempts the user made to sign into the account. It is reset according to a value of the Reset lockout counter after x minutes field in the Security preferences (SM201060) window.
Number of unsuccessful attempts to enter recovery answer Read-only. Not in use. The number of unsuccessful attempts the user made to enter the user recovery response.
## The IP filter tab This tab is not in use. ## Personal settings tab On this tab, you can specify a variety of default settings to be used in Visma Net for the selected user. For example, you can select one of the available certificates as the user's personal certificate for signing portable document format (PDF) files. Users can change these settings themselves in the User settings (SM203010) window.
PDF signing certificate The certificate that the system will use for signing PDF files this user generates in Visma Net.
Time zone The user’s time zone, which will be used to display the timestamps for documents. If a time zone is specified for the user, these timestamps will be converted to the user’s specified time zone. If no time zone is specified, documents will be time-stamped using the time settings on the server computer.
Default branch The branch to which the selected user will be signed in by default if the user has access to multiple branches.
Home page The dashboard to be displayed for the user on the home page of Visma Net instance.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 User security reports /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports section The reports provide information that can be useful for employees who manage users, roles, and access rights to the system objects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User security reports The reports provide information that can be useful for employees who manage users, roles, and access rights to the system objects. The reports provide information that can be useful for employees who manage users, roles, and access rights to the system objects. You can use these reports, for example, for analysing, optimising, and restructuring user accounts, user roles, and access rights. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## User security reports There are the following reports, which contain information about users, roles, and access rights: + [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-window-sm201020/): Lists all system forms with the user roles for which access rights to the form have been set up explicitly at the window or module level. For each role, its level of access rights to the form is displayed. + [Access rights by role (SM201025)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025/): Lists the roles available in the system and their access rights to system forms. Only those forms for which access rights were set up explicitly at the form, module, or workspace level are displayed in the report. + [Role list (SM65100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/role-list-sm65100s/): Lists the roles available in the system and shows the list of user accounts assigned to each role. + [User list (SM65050S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/sm650500-ref/): Displays the existing user accounts and the properties of the accounts in summary or detailed format. Access rights by role (SM65150S) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-role-sm65150s section This report lists the roles available in the system and their access rights to system windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Access rights by role (SM65150S) This report lists the roles available in the system and their access rights to system windows. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Only those windows for which access rights were set up explicitly at the window or workspace level are displayed in the report. The report has no report-specific elements. ## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Access rights by window (SM65170S) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/access-rights-by-window-sm65170s section This report lists all system windows with the user roles for which access rights to the window have been set up explicitly at the window or workspace level. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Access rights by window (SM65170S) This report lists all system windows with the user roles for which access rights to the window have been set up explicitly at the window or workspace level. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Each role's level of access rights to the window is displayed. The report has no report-specific elements. ## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Audit inquiry (SM20503S) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/audit-inquiry-sm20503s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Audit inquiry (SM20503S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
User name The name of the user who has created the log. If you do not select any users, the logs of all users will be displayed.
Log date The beginning of the log date range of the logs to be displayed.
To The end of the log date range of the logs to be displayed.
Posted date The beginning of the posting date range of the logs to be displayed.
To The end of the posting date range of the logs to be displayed.
Account ID Logs related to the account selected here will be displayed.
Module The origin of the logs.
Transaction type The type of the transactions to be displayed.
Show only financial years When this is selected, only logs related to financial years will be displayed.
Show only financial periods When this is selected, only logs related to financial periods will be displayed.
Show only SIE imports When this is selected, only logs related to SIE imports will be displayed.
## The table
Column Description
Log date The date when the logged activity was performed.
User name The name of the user who has created the log.
Activity The logged activity.
Ref. no. The reference number connected with the logged transaction.
Batch no. The batch number connected with the logged transaction.
Module The origin of the logs.
Doc. source The source of the document: SIEImport,Importscenario.
Account The account connected with the transaction in the log.
Amount The amount of the transaction in the log.
Role list (SM65100S) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/role-list-sm65100s section This report lists the roles available in the system and shows the user accounts assigned to each role. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Role list (SM65100S) This report lists the roles available in the system and shows the user accounts assigned to each role. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report can be created in summary or detailed format. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
Displays the list of roles with the description of each role and the total number of users with the role assigned. For each role, lists the users with the role assigned and the basic information, including email address, for each user.
Summary
Displays the list of roles with the description of each role and the total number of users who have the role assigned.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} User list (SM65050S) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-reports/user-list-sm65050s section This report displays the existing user accounts and their key properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User list (SM65050S) This report displays the existing user accounts and their key properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report can be created in a summary or detailed format. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
Displays the complete list of user accounts with key account properties (such as first and last name and password security options). For each account, the report lists the roles assigned to the account.
Summary
Displays the complete list of user accounts with key account properties (such as first and last name and password security options).
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} About user access rights /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-user-access-rights page To access Visma Net, users must pass authentication to confirm their identity (see: About user accounts in Visma Net ). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About user access rights To access Visma Net, users must pass authentication to confirm their identity (see: About user accounts in Visma Net ). To access Visma Net, users must pass authentication to confirm their identity (see: About user accounts in Visma Net). Then users pass authorisation to determine their access rights to the system resources, such as workspaces and windows. Users can access only the resources they are allowed to use and perform only the actions they are authorised to based on their access rights. In this topic, user access rights in Visma Net are described. ## Configuration of user access rights You need to perform the following steps to set up access rights to system resources for users in Visma Net: 1. You create user roles in the User roles (SM201005) window according to the responsibilities of your organisation' employees who will work with Visma Net. For details, see: About role-based access. 1. You set up access rights for user roles to Visma Net resources, depending on the tasks performed by users with these user roles. For details, see: About access rights for roles. 1. You assign user roles with user accounts to provide users of your Visma Net instance with access rights to system resources. You can do this in two ways: + To assign multiple users a selected role, use the User roles (SM201005) window. For example: You use this way when you have created a new role and want to assign it to existing users. + To assign multiple roles to a selected user, use the Users (SM201010) window. For example: You use this way when you have created a new user account and want to assign it existing roles. User account configuration is described in About user accounts in Visma.net Fiancials. 1. Optional: You use user types to simplify the assignment of user roles to users. ### Ability to track access rights You can track access rights to different objects by using the following windows: + Access rights by window (SM65170S) Gives you the ability to build a report to view access rights by each system object (a workspace, and a window). + Access rights by role (SM65150S) Gives you the ability to view access rights by each user role. + Access rights by user (SM201060) Gives you the ability to view the access rights of each user to every system object. Row-level security /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security section To give your organisation additional flexibility to the configuration of access rights for workspaces and windows, Visma Net provides restriction groups, which you can administer in the Row-level security workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Row-level security To give your organisation additional flexibility to the configuration of access rights for workspaces and windows, Visma Net provides restriction groups, which you can administer in the Row-level security workspace. You can use restriction groups when users should have access to a window, but in this window they are allowed to see one set of entities and are not allowed to see another set of entities. In these topics you will read about ways of using restriction groups, types of restriction groups, operations that you can perform with the groups, and specific information about particular entities whose visibility you can control. About restriction groups in Visma.net ERP /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp section Visma Net provides you with restriction groups, which are flexible tools for limiting the visibility and use of entities, such as General ledger accounts, items, and customer and supplier accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About restriction groups in Visma.net ERP Visma Net provides you with restriction groups, which are flexible tools for limiting the visibility and use of entities, such as General ledger accounts, items, and customer and supplier accounts. In this topic, you can find information about situations where restriction groups are useful and types of entities that you can include in restriction groups. ## Restriction groups in Visma Net You can use restriction groups to do the following: + Control the visibility of sensitive data for employees of your organisation. + Relate entities to one another so that they are used only together in Visma Net windows (or so that they cannot be used together). In Visma Net, you can use specific windows to create restriction groups, view the entities included in a group, and manage the list of entities of a particular type in a restriction group. For details on the typical operations you can perform with restriction groups, see: About operations with restriction groups. ## Restriction groups with users To understand how restriction groups with users are used, consider a typical case with restriction groups that include users and general ledger accounts. ### Example Suppose that a role allows all its users to access all general ledger accounts, but for two groups of accounts, you want to provide visibility to only particular users. Restriction groups for general ledger accounts and users: ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction (1)](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction%20%281%29.png) The diagram above shows how restriction groups can address these security needs. + You define Group 1 as a restriction group that includes only appropriate accountants (User C and User D) and accounts (1, 2, and 3). + You create Group 2, which includes User Y and User Z, as well as the accounts they should work with (4, 5, and 6). ### Final visibility Among all users in the system: + Only User C and User D will see the first group of sensitive accounts (1, 2, and 3). + Only User Y and User Z will see the second group of sensitive accounts (4, 5, and 6). + Users who are not assigned to any restriction group will not see the accounts associated with either group. ## Combinations of restriction groups with users You can create restriction groups that include users in the following way: + **Users and general ledger accounts**: With these restriction groups, if your organisation has sensitive general ledger accounts, you can make these accounts visible to a limited number of employees. For details, see: [About account and subaccount security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-account-and-subaccount-security/). + **Users and subaccounts**: As with groups that include users and general ledger accounts, you can limit the visibility of sensitive subaccounts to employees. For performance reasons, visibility restrictions by user for subaccounts do not affect analytical (ARM) and window-based reports or general inquiries. This means that users who can view the reports and general inquiries that include subaccounts will see the full list of subaccounts. + **Users and supplier accounts**: You can define these restriction groups to make particular suppliers visible in the system to only employees who work with these suppliers. For details, see: [About supplier security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-supplier-security/). + **Users and customer accounts**: With these restriction groups, you can make particular customers visible to only employees who work with these customers. For details, see: [About customer security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-customer-security/). + **Users and general ledger budget articles**: With these restriction groups, you can limit the visibility of sensitive budget articles so that only particular users can see and work with these articles. [About security of general ledger budget articles](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-general-ledger-budget-articles/). For more information, see: + **Users and warehouses**: You can create restriction groups to display a particular warehouse (or set of warehouses) for only employees who work with this warehouse (or this set of warehouses). For details, see: [About warehouse security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-warehouse-security/). + **Users and items**: You can define these restriction groups to reduce the number of items in the lists with items, depending on the particular employee logged in to the system. [About item security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-item-security/). For more information, see: + **Users and projects**: You can define these restriction groups to configure the visibility of particular projects only to a responsible project team. + **Branches, general ledger accounts, and users**: With these restriction groups, you can allow users to work with only branch-specific accounts. + **Branches, subaccounts, and users**: You can set up these restriction groups so that the system displays to users only the branch-specific subaccounts. [About account and subaccount security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-account-and-subaccount-security/). ## Restriction groups without users If a restriction group does not include users, all users may view the entities that are members of the group (if their roles provide access to windows with these entities), but entities included in the group become related in a way that limits their use. ### Example Suppose that you create two groups with general ledger accounts and subaccounts as follows: + Group 1 includes Account 1, Subaccount K, Subaccount L, and Subaccount M. + Group 2 includes Account 2, Subaccount P, Subaccount Q, and Subaccount R. For simplicity, suppose that there are no other accounts and subaccounts in the system. ### Final visibility The result of these settings is the following: + A user that selects Account 1 on an entry form, will only be able to select Subaccount K, Subaccount L, or Subaccount M in a field with subaccounts. The subaccounts included in Group 2 will be hidden from the list. + A user that selects Account 2, will see Subaccount P, Subaccount Q, and Subaccount R in the field with subaccounts. The user will not see Subaccount K, Subaccount L, and Subaccount M. If you are using restriction groups to control the accounts and subaccounts that can be used together, you must create at least two groups and include all subaccounts in either of the groups. ## Combinations of restriction groups without users With the most common scenarios, you can create restriction groups that include the following system entities: + **Branches and cash accounts**: If there are multiple branches in your organisation, with these restriction groups, you can allow users in each branch to work with only branch-specific cash accounts. For details, see: [About security of cash accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-cash-accounts/). + **General ledger accounts and subaccounts**: If you have subaccounts that employees must use only with particular general ledger accounts, by defining these restriction groups, you can set up lists of available subaccounts for each general ledger account. [About account and subaccount security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-account-and-subaccount-security/). For more information, see:

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About types of restriction groups /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-types-of-restriction-groups section In this topic, you will find descriptions of the different types of restriction groups in Visma Net, the differences between these types, and usage examples. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of restriction groups In this topic, you will find descriptions of the different types of restriction groups in Visma Net, the differences between these types, and usage examples. ## Types of restriction groups Visma Net provides two basic types of restriction groups, A and B. Restriction groups of both types can limit the visibility of system entities in a direct way (types **A** and **B**) and an inverse way (types **A inverse** and **B inverse**). The differences between **A** and **B** and between **A inverse** and **B inverse** are in how these groups work if the same entity is added to multiple groups. ## Descriptions of Types of Restriction Groups The following table summarises the types of restriction groups and describes how the visibility of entities is affected if a particular entity belongs to multiple groups of the type. |Group type|Restriction|Description| |---|---|---| |**A**|Direct|Makes entities included in the group visible to users who are also included in the group. Other users cannot view these entities. When a particular entity belongs to multiple groups of type **A**, if you want a user to see this entity in the system, you add the user to at least one of these groups.| |**A inverse**|Inverse|Hides the entities included in the group from users who are also included in the group. Users who are not assigned to this group can view and use the entities. When a particular entity belongs to multiple groups of type **A inverse**, if you don't want a user to see this entity, you must include this user in each of these groups. If you include the user in only one of the groups, he or she will see the entity in the system.| |**B**|Direct|Makes entities included in the group visible to users who are also included in the group. Other users cannot view these entities. When a particular entity belongs to multiple groups of type **B**, if you want a user to see this entity in the system, you need to include this user in each of these groups.| |**B inverse**|Inverse|Hides the entities included in the group from users who are also included in the group. Users who are not assigned to this group can view and use the entities. When a particular entity belongs to multiple groups of type **B inverse**, if you don't want a user to see this entity in the system, you include the user in at least one of these groups.| ## Using group A or B direct You use groups of types **A** or **B** or groups with direct restriction when you need to make entities visible to users within the group. (For groups with only entities, the direct restriction group includes entities that must be used together.) The following diagram shows how groups with direct restriction work. In the diagram, you can see four users (for example, accountants) and six entities (for example, general ledger accounts). Initially, all users can see all accounts. + Group 1 is defined to include Users С and D and Accounts 1, 2, and 3. These accounts are visible to Users С and D and hidden from Users Y and Z. + Group 2 is defined to include Accounts 4, 5, and 6 and Users Y and Z. Users Y and Z can see Accounts 4, 5, and 6, and Users С and D cannot see these accounts. ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction (1)](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction%20%281%29.png) ## Using group A or B inverse You use groups of types **A inverse** or **B inverse** or groups with inverse restriction when you need to hide entities from a small number of users. (For groups without users, an inverse restriction group includes entities that may not be used together.) See the following diagram, which illustrates how groups with an inverse restriction work. + Group 1 is defined to include Users С and D and Accounts 1, 2, and 3. Accounts 1, 2, and 3 become invisible to Users С and D and remain visible to users Y and Z. + Group 2 is defined to include Accounts 4, 5, and 6 and Users Y and Z. This hides Accounts 4, 5, and 6 from Users Y and Z, but Users С and D still can see these accounts. The final visibility for groups with inverse restriction is the opposite of the final visibility for groups with direct restriction. ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Inverse_Restriction](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Inverse_Restriction.png) ## Recommendations for selecting the restriction group type As you decide which type of restriction group best meets your security needs, consider the following recommendations: + When you create multiple groups with entities of the same combination of types, use groups of the same basic type (either A or B). For example if you have two restriction groups that include users and customers. Otherwise, if you were to add the same entity to multiple groups of different types, the result may not be what you expect. + To configure the required visibility of entities, you can combine direct and inverse restriction groups of the same basic type (either A or B). For an example of this, please see **Usage example 2** in About types of restriction groups. Thus, you can combine groups of types **A** and **A inverse**, and groups of types **B** and **B inverse**. + If you want to hide particular entities from the majority of users, include the entities and the users who should see the entities in a group with direct restriction (type **A** or **B** ). + If you want to hide particular entities from a small number of users, add the entities and the users who shouldn't see the entities to a group with inverse restriction (type **A inverse** or **B inverse** ).

Related pages

Tasks

 About practical scenarios with Restriction groups /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-practical-scenarios-with-restriction-groups section In this topic, you will find practical situations where restriction groups can be used, each presenting a distinct problem, along with effective solutions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About practical scenarios with Restriction groups In this topic, you will find practical situations where restriction groups can be used, each presenting a distinct problem, along with effective solutions. These examples explore the complexities of establishing user visibility in a business. The restriction groups in the examples contain users and entities, but the same principles apply to groups that contain only entities. ## Usage example 1 ### Problem statement Suppose that as a system administrator, you have to configure the visibility of accounts to the appropriate users considering the following: + There are four accountants in your organisation: User C, User D, User Y, and User Z. + User M is the accounting manager who controls work of the accounting department. + There are six accounts in the general ledger: Account 1, Account 2, Account 3, Account 4, Account 5, and Account 6. + Only users C and D are allowed to see Accounts 1, 2, and 3. + Only users Y and Z are allowed to see Accounts 4, 5, and 6. + User M is allowed to see all accounts. You can use either of two solutions (described below) to configure the visibility of accounts to users. #### Solution 1 You can create three restriction groups of type **A**: + Group 1: In this group, you include Accounts 1, 2, and 3 and Users C and D. + Group 2: In this group, you include Accounts 4, 5, and 6 and Users Y and Z. + Group 3: In this group, you include User M and all six accounts. #### Solution with type B If you were to use groups of type **B** instead of type **A**, all accounts would be hidden from the users included in Groups 1, 2, and 3. To make this approach work with groups of type **B**, you would need to include User M in Groups 1, 2, and 3. See **Final visibility (Group type B)** in the diagram below. ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction_Intersecting_Entities](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction_Intersecting_Entities.png) #### Solution 2 You can create two restriction groups of type **A** or **B**: + Group 1: In this group, you include Accounts 1, 2, and 3 and Users C and D. + Group 2: In this group, you include Accounts 4, 5, and 6 and Users Y and Z. + You include User M in both groups. ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction_No_Intersecting_Entities](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction_No_Intersecting_Entities.png) ## Usage example 2 ### Problem statement Suppose that as a system administrator, you have to configure the visibility of accounts to the appropriate users considering the following: + There are four accountants: User C, User D, User Y, and User Z. + There are six accounts in the general ledger: Account 1, Account 2, Account 3, Account 4, Account 5, and Account 6. + User Y works with only one sensitive account, Account 1. + User Y is not allowed to see Account 2, Account 3, Account 4, Account 5, and Account 6. + The other accountants work with all accounts except Account 1. + Only accountants have access to the Finance module. (Thus, there is no need to hide accounts from other system users.) #### Solution You can create two restriction groups, Group 1 of type **A** or **B**, and Group 2 of type **A inverse** or **B inverse**. |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you select type **A** for Group 1|you should select type **A inverse** for Group 2.| |you select type **B** for Group 1|you should select type **B inverse** for Group 2.| These groups are defined as follows: + Group 1: In this group, you include User Y and Account 1. (Other users will not see Account 1.) + Group 2: In this group, you include User Y and Accounts 2 to 6. (User Y will not see these accounts.) The following diagram illustrates the proposed solution. ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Combined_Direct_and_Inverse_Restriction](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Combined_Direct_and_Inverse_Restriction.png) ## Usage example 3 ### Problem statement Suppose that as a system administrator, you have to configure the visibility of accounts to the appropriate users considering the following: + There are four accountants in your organisation: User C, User D, User Y, and User Z. + There are six accounts in the general ledger of your organisation: Account 1, Account 2, Account 3, Account 4, Account 5, and Account 6. + Users С and D should work with all six accounts. + User Y should work with Accounts 1, 2, and 3 but is not allowed to see Accounts 4, 5, and 6. + User Z is a junior accountant, so this user is not allowed to see the accounts. You can use either of two solutions (described below) to configure the visibility of accounts to users. #### Solution 1 You can create two groups of type **B inverse** —Group 1 and Group 2 (see **Final visibility (Group type B inverse)** ): + Group 1: In this group, you include User Y and Accounts 4, 5, and 6. + Group 2: In this group, you add User Z and Accounts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. #### Solution with type A inverse If you were to use groups of type **A inverse** instead of **B inverse** in this example, Accounts 4, 5, and 6 would be visible to all users because they are added in two restriction groups (see **Final visibility (Group type A inverse** ) in the following diagram). ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction_Intersecting_Entities](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Direct_Restriction_Intersecting_Entities.png) #### Solution 2 You can create two groups of the **A inverse** or **B inverse**: + Group 1: In this group, you include User Z and Accounts 1, 2, and 3. + Group 2: In this group, you include Users Y and Z and Accounts 4, 5, and 6. The following diagram illustrates Solution 2. ![Images_RestrictionGroups_Inverse_Restriction_No_Intersecting_Entities](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_RestrictionGroups_Inverse_Restriction_No_Intersecting_Entities.png) Manage visibility with restriction groups /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups section In Visma Net, you can use restriction groups in addition to role-based access rights to configure the security of information within the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage visibility with restriction groups In Visma Net, you can use restriction groups in addition to role-based access rights to configure the security of information within the system. In Visma Net, you can use restriction groups in addition to role-based access rights to configure the security of information within the system. In these topics you will read about different ways of using restriction groups and specific information about particular entities whose visibility you can control. About account and subaccount security /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-account-and-subaccount-security page In Visma Net, you can control which users will use particular general ledger accounts and subaccounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About account and subaccount security In Visma Net, you can control which users will use particular general ledger accounts and subaccounts. To configure the security of general ledger accounts and subaccounts, you can use a combination of user roles and restriction groups. By using user roles, you can configure the access of users to branches and to all branch-specific accounts and subaccounts. With restriction groups, you can set up the visibility of particular accounts and subaccounts within branches and for certain users, and you can limit the use of subaccounts with particular accounts. ## Most common scenarios with accounts and subaccounts In this topic, you will read about using restriction groups and branch-specific roles to configure and manage the security of accounts and subaccounts. The sections below describe in detail the most common scenarios of managing the security of accounts and subaccounts. These are: + Managing the visibility by branch + Managing the visibility by user + Managing the visibility of subaccounts by account + Adding the needed objects to one restriction group to control visibility by multiple factors ## Managing the visibility by branch When your organisation consists of multiple branches (and you have created multiple branches in Visma Net ), you can configure the system so that it narrows the lists of accounts and subaccounts by branch on data entry forms. You can configure and use the restriction groups that include branches only if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ### SCENARIO Suppose that your organisation has two branches, the Headquarters office ( **HQ** in the system) and the Regional sales office ( **RS** ). The accounting department processes documents for both branches. The following table explains how to configure the visibility restrictions of accounts and subaccounts by branch.
STEP ACTION
1 Configure user roles for each branch (for example, Branch HQ and Branch RS ).
2

Assign both roles to the user accounts of the accountants.

Result: The accountants will see information for both branches in Visma Net.
3

In the General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040) window:

  • create two restriction groups of type A with direct restriction: the HQ Accounts group for the Headquarters office and the RS Accounts group for the Regional sales office.
  • In the HQ Accounts group, include the Headquarters branch ( HQ ) and the accounts that should be visible within the HQ branch.
  • In the RS Accounts group, include the Regional sales branch ( RS ) and the accounts specific to the RS branch.
4

In the Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060) window:

  • create two restriction groups of type A with direct restriction: the HQ subaccounts group for the Headquarters office and the RS subaccounts group for the Regional sales office.
  • In the HQ subaccounts group, include the HQ branch and the subaccounts that should be visible within this branch.
  • In the RS subaccounts group, include the RS branch and the subaccounts specific to this branch.
5 Result: The system will narrow the lists of accounts or the list of subaccounts in data entry windows after a user selects a branch.
### Resulting visibility Suppose that an accountant is adding an invoice in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window and selects the **HQ** branch in the **Branch** column of the **Document details** tab. The accountant will only see accounts added to the **HQ accounts** restriction group. ## Managing the visibility by user If your organisation has sensitive general ledger accounts and subaccounts, you can provide the visibility of these objects to only a limited set of users. For performance reasons, visibility restrictions by user for subaccounts do not affect analytical (ARM) and window-based reports or general inquiries. This means that users who can view the reports and general inquiries that include subaccounts will see the full list of subaccounts. ### SCENARIO 1 Suppose that only a chief accountant of your organisation can work with the tax payable account. The following table explains how to make this account visible only to the chief accountant.
STEP ACTION
1 Go to the General ledger account access (GL104000) window.
2 Create a restriction group (for example, Access to VAT payable account ) with direct restriction.
3 Add the user account of the chief accountant to the group.
4 Add the tax account to the group.
### SCENARIO 2 Suppose that the subaccount for the financial department can be used only by accountants (and not by other users). The following table explains how to make this subaccount visible only to accountants. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Go to the [General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/) window.| |2|Create a restriction group (for example, **Access to financial subaccount** ) with direct restriction.| |3|Add the user accounts of the accountants to the group.| |4|Add the subaccount for the financial department to the group.| ## Managing the visibility of subaccounts by account You can specify which subaccounts can be used with only a particular account in windows in Visma Net. This means that only the specified subaccounts will appear for selection if that account is selected. This limitation will help users to avoid errors when they select accounts and subaccounts in windows. If you are using restriction groups to control the accounts and subaccounts that can be used together, you must create at least two groups and include all subaccounts in either of the groups. ### SCENARIO Suppose that you need to restrict visibility of subaccounts for only one account. The following table explains how to solve this task. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Create two restriction groups.| |2|In the first group with **direct** restriction, include a general ledger account and the list of subaccounts that should be related to this account.| |3|In the second group with **inverse** restriction, include the same account and subaccounts that should not be displayed after users select this account.| |4|**Result**: When users select the account in a window, they will see only one of the subaccounts included in the first group.| ### PRACTICAL EXAMPLE Suppose that the ELE-000 subaccount, which is used for electronics and computers, should be visible only after a user has selected the 12100 warehouse account, and the NSS-000 subaccount should be related to the 12200 warehouse account. The following table explains how to restrict the visibility of the subaccounts by account in this particular case. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Go to the [General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/) window.| |2|Create the restriction group Stock item subaccounts and include the **12100** warehouse account and the **ELE-000** subaccount.| |3|Create the restriction group Non-stock item subaccounts and include the **12200** warehouse account and the **NSS-000** subaccount.| ## Visibility of accounts, subaccounts, and users If you need to limit the users who use sensitive accounts, and only particular subaccounts must be used with these sensitive accounts, you can configure restriction groups to address this task. To implement this functionality, you need to add users, accounts, and subaccounts (or subaccount segments) to the same group. ### SCENARIO Suppose that the ELE-000 (electronics and computers) and FUR-000 (furniture) subaccounts should be visible only if a user has selected the 12100 warehouse account, and that only the warehouse workers User Y and User Z should work with these accounts and subaccounts. The following table explains how to restrict the visibility in this case.
STEP ACTION
1 Go to the General ledger account access (GL104000) window.
2 Create a restriction group, for example Restriction of warehouse accounts.
3 Add the 12100 warehouse account to the group.
4 Add the ELE-000 and FUR-000 subaccounts to the group.
5 Add User Y and User Z to the group.
6 Result: User Y and User Z will only be able to select subaccounts ELE-000 and FUR-000 in combination with warehouse account 12100 when processing a document.
## Subaccount segment values If the **By segment: all avail. segment values** lookup mode is selected in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key (that is, if the users of your Visma Net instance enter subaccounts by segments in windows), you manage the security of subaccount segments instead of entire subaccounts. In this case, you need to add all subaccount segments, that form a subaccount whose visibility should be restricted, to a restriction group. ## Cash account security Cash accounts are one type of sensitive accounts that you may need to secure in the system. The ways of managing the security of cash accounts differ from the ways of managing the security of general ledger accounts. For more information, see: [About the security of cash accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-the-security-of-cash-accounts/). ## Windows for account and subaccount security In the following table, you can find the list of windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with accounts, subaccounts, and subaccount segments, and tasks that you can resolve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of accounts and subaccounts (or subaccount segments) to users.|[General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/)| |To initially configure the visibility of accounts by branches.|[General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-accounts-by-branch-access-gl103040/)| |To initially configure the visibility of subaccounts (or subaccount segments) by branches.|[Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/subaccounts-by-branch-access-gl103060/)| |To change the visibility of an account in multiple restriction groups.|[Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-general-ledger-account-gl104020/)| |To change the visibility of a subaccount in multiple restriction groups.|[Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-subaccount-gl104030/)| |To change the visibility of a subaccount segment in multiple restriction groups.|[Restriction groups by sub segment (GL104040)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-sub-segment-gl104040/)| |To change the visibility of system objects by a user in multiple restriction groups.|[Restriction groups by user (SM201035)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035/)| |To change the visibility of system objects by a branch in multiple restriction groups.|[Restriction groups by branch (GL103020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-branch-gl103020/)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/).

Related pages

Concepts

 About security of cash accounts /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-cash-accounts page Cash is a company's most liquid asset, which is why an organisation must have adequate controls to secure it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About security of cash accounts Cash is a company's most liquid asset, which is why an organisation must have adequate controls to secure it. In Visma Net, you can control which users can view which particular cash accounts. In this topic the following scenarios of managing the security of cash accounts are described: + Managing the visibility by branch. + Managing the visibility by user. ## Multiple branches vs. single branch organisations If your organisation consists of multiple branches, you can allow users in each branch to work with only branch-specific cash accounts. You can only configure multiple branches if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is disabled, all cash accounts belong to a single branch and are visible to all users who are allowed to view the accounts, based on their membership in restriction groups. ## Visibility of cash accounts by branch The visibility of a cash account can be restricted based on the branch the account belongs to. Consider a user who is allowed to view multiple branches due to this user's assigned branch roles. On the data entry forms, this user can view the cash accounts of all the branches this user is allowed to view, based on the branch selected in the **Branch** field of the data entry form. This field is filled by default with the branch to which the user is currently signed in. The following steps describe how to restrict the visibility of a cash account by the branch.
STEP ACTION
1 Go to the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
2

Enable the Inter-branch transactions functionality, which gives you the ability to configure the automatic generation of inter-branch transactions for each document that involves multiple branches.

Result: The Restrict visibility with branch check box appears in the Cash accounts (CA202000) window.
3 Go to the Cash accounts (CA202000) window.
4 Select a cash account.
5 Select the Restrict visibility with branch check box.
6 Save your changes.
Repeat steps 4-6 for each cash account whose visibility you want to control. ### Resulting visibility The table below explains how cash account access varies based on the selection of the checkbox **Restrict visibility with branch** in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. |SCENARIO|VISIBILITY OF CASH ACCOUNT| |---|---| |Check box selected for a cash account|Visible to users selecting the specified branch in the "Branch" field on data entry forms.| |Check box cleared for a cash account|Visible regardless of the selected branch.| |When the Branch field is absent on a data entry form|Visibility determined by the user's currently signed-in branch.| ## Restricting access with user roles If you want, you can restrict access to cash accounts by using branch roles in the same way as for general ledger accounts. For more information, see [About account and subaccount security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-account-and-subaccount-security/). ## Visibility of cash accounts by user You can control the visibility of a specific cash account to users with the help of restriction groups. Suppose that there is only one accountant in your organisation and only this person should work with a cash account in the system. The following steps describe how to restrict the visibility of the cash account by user. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Go to the [General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/) window.| |2|Create a restriction group with direct restriction, for example **Access to cash account**.| |3|Add the user account of the accountant to the group.| |4|Add the general ledger account the cash account is linked to.| ### RECOMMENDATION We recommend that you carefully design and configure restriction groups containing accounts, so that a user can view the accounts he or she needs for work. Otherwise, a user may encounter problems with processing transactions of the linked cash accounts. ## Windows for security of cash accounts In the following table, you can find the list of the windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with cash accounts and the tasks that you can solve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of a general ledger account to which a cash account is linked to users.|[General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/)| |To change the visibility of a general ledger account a cash account is linked to.|[Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-general-ledger-account-gl104020/)| |To change the visibility of a general ledger account to which a cash account is linked by a user in multiple restriction groups.|[Restriction groups by user (SM201035)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035/)| |To change the visibility of a general ledger account to which a cash account is linked by a branch in multiple restriction groups.|[Restriction groups by branch (GL103020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-branch-gl103020/)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/).

Related pages

Concepts

 About security of general ledger budget articles /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-general-ledger-budget-articles page In Visma Net, organisations implement general access restrictions by assigning roles to users of the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About security of general ledger budget articles In Visma Net, organisations implement general access restrictions by assigning roles to users of the system. In this topic, you will read about configuring restriction groups for managing the security of sensitive general ledger budget articles. ## Restricting view with roles vs. restriction groups If a role allows a user to view or edit General ledger budget articles, the user can view all the articles, including those that might be sensitive. By using restriction groups, you can limit the visibility of sensitive budget articles so that only particular users can see and work with these articles. ## Managing the visibility of general ledger budget articles by user You can configure restriction groups that will limit the visibility of General ledger budget articles (leaf articles or nodes at any level) for users. As a result, the users not included in the group will not be able to see the budget articles (and these articles' subarticles, if there are any). Suppose that the **Wages** budget article should be available to only the chief financial officer of your organisation. The following table describes how to configure the visibility of this budget article in the [General ledger budget access (GL105030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/budget-access-gl105030/) window. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Create a restriction group (for example, **Group for wages budget article** ) with direct restriction.| |2|Add the user account of the chief financial officer to the group.| |3|Add the **Wages** budget article to the group.| For more details about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma.net ERP](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## Windows for security of general ledger budget articles In the following table, you can find the list of windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with general ledger budget articles and tasks that you can resolve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of a general ledger budget article to users|[General ledger budget access (GL105030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/budget-access-gl105030/)| |To change the visibility of a general ledger budget article in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by budget article (GL105020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-budget-article-gl105020/)| |To change the visibility of a general ledger budget article by user in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by user (SM201035)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035/)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). About warehouse security /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-warehouse-security page An organisation can have multiple warehouses in Visma Net, and different groups of employees can work with these warehouses in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About warehouse security An organisation can have multiple warehouses in Visma Net, and different groups of employees can work with these warehouses in the system. An organisation can have multiple warehouses in Visma Net, and different groups of employees can work with these warehouses in the system. In this topic, you can find information about configuring the security of warehouses in Visma Net. ## Managing multiple warehouses You can create and manage multiple warehouses in Visma Net only if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Restricting access to warehouses To limit the set of employees who work with a particular warehouse, you can create restriction groups to display a warehouse only for employees who are responsible for tasks that involve this warehouse. If the employees who work with the same warehouse perform only specific tasks (such as accepting goods and creating purchase orders), you can provide access to only those windows that these employees should use. The most common scenarios of managing the security of warehouses are the following: + Managing access to windows based on functional role + Managing the visibility of particular warehouses by user ## Access to windows based on roles By using the User security windows, you can use user roles in Visma Net to give employees access to windows related to working with warehouses. A role can correspond to an area of responsibility for an employee who performs warehouse-related tasks, such as creating purchase orders, accepting goods, and preparing replenishment. If needed, you can assign multiple roles to an employee. For more information about user roles, see: [About role-based access](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-role-based-access/). ### Examples of roles Consider the following examples of roles for employees who work with the Inventory module. Through the [Access rights by role (SM201025)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-role-sm201025/) window, you can administer the access you want for each of these roles. Supervisor : A role for an employee who configures the Inventory workspace and manages work with the workspace. Through the above mentioned window, this role should have access to the windows in the **Manage** and **Explore** nodes of the **Work area** tab, and to the **Configuration** tab of the Inventory workspace. Data entry clerk : A role for an employee who creates documents on data entry forms. Through the above mentioned window, you should provide access to windows in the **Enter** node of the **Work area** tab of the Inventory workspace for this role. Purchasing manager : A role for an employee who is responsible for replenishment. For this role, you should provide access to the **Replenishment** node of the **Processes** tab of the Inventory workspace, through the above mentioned window. ## Visibility of warehouses by user By default, all employees who have access to windows of the Inventory module can see all warehouses created in the system. ### Configuring restriction groups By using the windows of the Row-level security workspace, you can configure the system so that each warehouse is displayed only to users who work with this warehouse. You can use restriction groups to set up visibility of warehouses to employees. For details on restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ### Practical example Suppose that your system has the **Wholesale** and **Retail** warehouses defined, and you need to configure visibility of these warehouses to users as follows: + User S is a supervisor and should configure and manage both warehouses. + User C1 is a clerk who enters documents for the **Wholesale** warehouse. + User C2 is a clerk who enters documents for the **Retail** warehouse. The following table describes how to configure visibility of warehouses according to this example.
STEP ACTION
1 Go to the Warehouse access (IN102000) window.
2

Create two restriction groups of type A (with direct restriction):

Group 1
for the Wholesale warehouse, and
Group 2
for the Retail warehouse.
3 In Group 1, include User S, User C1, and the Wholesale warehouse.
4 In Group 2, include User S, User C2, and the Retail warehouse.
### Final visibility The resulting visibility of warehouses will be the following: + User S can see both the **Wholesale** and **Retail** warehouses. + User C1 can see only the **Wholesale** warehouse. + User C2 can see only the **Retail** warehouse. ## Windows for warehouse security In the following table, you can find the list of windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with warehouses and tasks that you can solve by using each window. |Tasks|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of a warehouse to users|[Warehouse access (IN102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/warehouse-access-in102000/)| |To change the visibility of a warehouse in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by warehouse (IN102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-warehouse-in102010/)| |To change the visibility of warehouses to a user in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by user (SM201035)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035/)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). ## Restricting visibility of stock items In addition to managing the visibility of warehouses in whole, you can restrict the visibility of particular stock items. For details, see: [About item security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-item-security/). About item security /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-item-security page An organisation that distributes goods may have many items in stock. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About item security An organisation that distributes goods may have many items in stock. An organisation that distributes goods may have many items in stock. In this case, users who work with items in the system may have specific tasks and work with only particular item classes. When users create a sales order, they need to enter an item ID for each product. You can define restriction groups to decrease the lists of items a particular user sees. In this topic, you will read about managing the visibility of items to users in the system. ## Visibility of items to users The list of items from which employees should select an item for the product can be very long, which increases the probability of an entry error. By using restriction groups, you can reduce the list of items that users see on windows. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ### Example Suppose that your organisation sells furniture. Each sales manager works with furniture for a particular room, such as kitchen, living room, and bedroom. When managers create a sales order, they should select items only from the list of furniture they sell to avoid entry mistakes. Suppose that: + User K sells kitchen furniture, + User L sells living room furniture, and + User M sells bedroom furniture. The following table describes how to restrict the visibility of items to appropriate users in the system. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Go to the [Item access (IN103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/item-access-in103000/) window.| |2|Create restriction groups K, L and M with direct restriction.| |3|In group K, include User K and all item IDs for kitchen furniture items.| |4|In group L, add User L and all item IDs for items of the living room furniture.| |5|In group M, include User M and all item IDs for the bedroom furniture items.| ### Final visibility As a result, the visibility of the items in sales orders will be restricted in the system as follows: + User K can view and select only items for the kitchen furniture. + User L can work with only items for the living room furniture. + User M can see and select only items for the bedroom furniture. + All other users cannot see the items added to the three restriction groups in the system. ## Types of restriction groups In Visma Net, you can configure groups with direct and inverse restriction. In this topic, groups with direct restriction are used in examples for simplicity. You can use inverse restriction groups in the same way as you use direct restriction groups. For details on the types of restriction groups, see: [About types of restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-types-of-restriction-groups/). ## Windows for item security In the following table, you can find the list of the windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with items and the tasks that you can solve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of an item to users|[Item access (IN103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/item-access-in103000/)| |To change the visibility of an item in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by item (IN103020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-item-in103020/)| |To change the visibility of items to a user in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by user (SM201035)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035/)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). About security of organisation branches /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-organisation-branches page If your organisation has multiple branches defined in Visma Net, you may need to control which employees get access to which branches. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About security of organisation branches If your organisation has multiple branches defined in Visma Net, you may need to control which employees get access to which branches. In this topic, you will read about ways to manage the security of a branch. ## Managing multiple branches You can create and maintain multiple branches in your Visma Net instance only if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window (for details, see: [About multi-branch support](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-multi-branch-support/) ). ## Restricting access to branches Because branches share some data, you may also need to control access to the shared data. Visma Net provides user access roles, which you can use to control users' access to branches, and restriction groups to limit the visibility of shared data. The most common scenarios of managing the security of company branches are the following: + Managing user access to branches + Managing the visibility of data shared between branches ## User access to branches The following table explains how to provide access to branches for users who will work in the system. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Go to the [User roles (SM201005)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/user-roles-sm201005/) window.| |2|Create branch-specific user roles (one role per branch).| |3|Assign these roles to user accounts. For details on user roles, see: About role-based access.| |4|Go to the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window.| |5|Assign the roles to branches. That is, for each branch, in the Access role field, you select the user role created for this branch.| ### After assigning the first role Once a role is assigned to one of the branches, other branches must also have roles assigned. A branch with no role assigned will be inaccessible to any user. To allow a user to access multiple branches, assign the roles for the branches to which the user should have access. ### Access to branch data in windows If a user, based on his or her role, has access to a data entry form where this user enters a document and specifies the branch of origin, only the branches to which the user has access are available on the drop-down list. The users who have access to multiple branches can select the specific branch from the **Branches** menu in the window's title toolbar and create documents on behalf of the selected branch. ## Full branch access No matter which branch users have access to, users who have access to the following windows, based on their roles, will see and work with all branches (because users configure system objects by using these windows): + [Inter-branch account mapping - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) + [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) + [Buildings (CS205010)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/buildings-cs205010/) + [Company tree (EP204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/company-tree-ep204060/) + [Restriction groups by branch (GL103020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-branch-gl103020/) + [General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-accounts-by-branch-access-gl103040/) + [Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/subaccounts-by-branch-access-gl103060/) ## Visibility of data within a branch Branches have some data shared between branches and some data kept as branch-specific (for details, see: [About multi-branch support](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-multi-branch-support/)). You may need to restrict the visibility of data that is shared but may contain sensitive information, such as general ledger accounts and subaccounts. Visma Net provides restriction groups so you can control which accounts and subaccounts are used with which branch. For details on configuring restriction groups for accounts and subaccounts, see: [About account and subaccount security](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-account-and-subaccount-security/). ## Windows for branch security In the following table, you can find the list of the windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with branches and the tasks that you can resolve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of accounts by branches|[General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-accounts-by-branch-access-gl103040/)| |To initially configure the visibility of subaccounts (or subaccount segments) by branches|[Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/subaccounts-by-branch-access-gl103060/)| |To change the visibility of system objects by a branch in multiple groups|[Restriction groups by branch (GL103020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-branch-gl103020/)| ## Types of restriction groups In Visma Net, you can configure groups with direct and inverse restriction. In this topic, groups with direct restriction are used in examples for simplicity. You can use inverse restriction groups in the same way as you use direct restriction groups. For details on the types of restriction groups, see: [About types of restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-types-of-restriction-groups/). For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). About customer security /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-customer-security page If your organisation sells goods and provides services to customers, you may have a great deal of customer-related information stored in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer security If your organisation sells goods and provides services to customers, you may have a great deal of customer-related information stored in Visma Net. When the employees of your organisation create documents for customers, they have to select the required customer from the full list of customers. If certain employees work with only very important customers, and other employees are not allowed to see these customers in the system for security reasons, you can create restriction groups to manage the visibility of your customers to users of Visma Net, as described in this topic. ## Visibility of customers by user By using restriction groups, you can show or hide particular customers on Visma Net windows, depending on the user who is logged in to the system. For instance, if some customers are very important to your organisation, dedicated employees might be assigned to process documents that contain information about these customers in the system. ### Example Suppose that your organisation provides cleaning services and Megabank is a very important customer of your organisation. Manager M is responsible for all operations in the systems related to Megabank, and other managers should not see Megabank in any windows of the system. The following table explains the steps to configure the visibility of this customer in the system. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Go to the [Customer access (AR102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/customer-access-ar102000/) window.| |2|Create a restriction group (for example, Group for Megabank) with direct restriction.| |3|Add the user account of the Manager M to the group.| |4|Add the Megabank customer to the group.| ## Default restriction groups If you use customer classes and want to include each new customer of a particular class in a restriction group automatically, you can specify a default restriction group for this class, as described in [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). ## Windows for customer security In the following table, you can find the list of the windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with customers and the tasks that you can resolve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of a customer to users|[Customer access](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/customer-access-ar102000/)| |To change the visibility of a customer in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by customer (AR102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-customer-ar102010/)| |To change the visibility of customers to a user in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by user](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035/)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). ## Types of restriction groups In Visma Net, you can configure groups with direct and inverse restriction. In this topic, groups with direct restriction are used in examples for simplicity. You can use inverse restriction groups in the same way as you use direct restriction groups. For details on the types of restriction groups, see: [About types of restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-types-of-restriction-groups/). About supplier security /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-supplier-security page If your organisation buys goods and services from external organisations, your accountants manage suppliers' information and process documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier security If your organisation buys goods and services from external organisations, your accountants manage suppliers' information and process documents. If your organisation works with more than 10 suppliers, accountants may work with particular suppliers only. In this case, the accountants who do not work with these suppliers should not see them in the system for security reasons and to avoid entry errors. You can use restriction groups to configure and manage the visibility of suppliers to users in the system, as described in this topic. ## Visibility of suppliers by user By using restriction groups you can configure and manage the visibility of suppliers to users in the system. This way you can make suppliers visible only to accountants who work with these suppliers in the system. If each accountant in your organisation works with specific suppliers, you can hide these suppliers from other users. For details about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma.net ERP](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ### Example Suppose that ABComputers is your supplier of computers and office equipment, and only the senior accountant is allowed to process documents from this supplier. The following table explains the steps to configure the visibility of this supplier. |STEP|ACTION| |---|---| |1|Go to the the [Supplier access (AP102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-access-ap102000/) window.| |2|Create a restriction group with direct restriction (for example: Group for ABComputers).| |3|Add the user account of the senior accountant to the group.| |4|Add the ABComputers supplier to the group.| ## Default restriction groups If you have configured supplier classes, you can specify a default restriction group for a supplier class. With this setting, all new suppliers of the class will be automatically added to the restriction group. For details, see: Setting up default restriction groups for supplier and customer classes in [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). ## Windows for supplier security In the following table, you can find the list of the windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with suppliers and the tasks that you can resolve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of a supplier to users|[Supplier access (AP102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-access-ap102000/)| |To change the visibility of a supplier in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-supplier-ap102010/)| |To change the visibility of suppliers to a user in multiple restriction groups|[Restriction groups by user (SM201035)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035/)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: [About operations with restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups/). ## Types of restriction groups In Visma Net, you can configure groups with direct and inverse restriction. In this topic, groups with direct restriction are used in examples for simplicity. You can use inverse restriction groups in the same way as you use direct restriction groups. For details on the types of restriction groups, see: [About types of restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-types-of-restriction-groups/). Configure restriction groups /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups section Restriction groups provide the capability to limit the visibility of system entities for users. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure restriction groups Restriction groups provide the capability to limit the visibility of system entities for users. Restriction groups provide the capability to limit the visibility of system entities for users. To start using restriction groups, you need to plan how to use these and configure them, as described in these topics. About preparation for configuration /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-preparation-for-configuration page Before you start configuring restriction groups, you need to gather the information that will help you to plan your restriction groups. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About preparation for configuration Before you start configuring restriction groups, you need to gather the information that will help you to plan your restriction groups. Before you create and configure restriction groups, you need to follow the three steps explained in this topic, for each visibility-related task you want to resolve. ## STEP 1 - Determine whether or not to include users The following table explains when to include users in your restriction group or not. |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you need to limit the visibility of entities (for example: customers) for users,|the restriction group consists of users and entities.| |you need to restrict the visibility of entities (for example: subaccounts) when they are used with particular entities of a different type (for example: general ledger accounts),|the restriction group consists of only entities.| For details, see: [About restriction groups in Visma.net ERP](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## STEP 2 - Select the restriction group type The following tables explain the type of restriction group to use with and without users respectively. ### For a group with users |IF|THEN| |---|---| |a smaller number of users **should** see the entities,|you select a group with direct restriction.| |a smaller number of users **should not** see the entities,|you select a group with inverse restriction.| ### For a group with entities (no users) For example entities of Type 1 and Type 2 in the table below (for example subaccounts and accounts). |IF|THEN| |---|---| |the number of subaccounts that **should** be visible when an account is selected, is smaller than the number of subaccounts that shouldn't be visible,|you select a group with direct restriction.| |if the number of subaccounts **shouldn’t** be visible when an account is selected, is smaller than the number of subaccounts that should be visible,|you select a group with inverse restriction.| ## STEP 3 - Estimate the number of restriction groups You determine how many groups you need to create by using the following guidelines: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |a particular user or a set of users should (or shouldn't) see entities of different types (such as customers or general ledger accounts),|you need to create a separate restriction group for each entity type.| |multiple sets of users should (or shouldn't) see different values of entities of the same type (such as warehouses),|you need to create a separate group for each entity value or set of entity values.| |you need to control the accounts and subaccounts that can be used together,|you must create at least two groups and include all subaccounts in either of the groups.| |you want include particular combinations of entities in one group with users,|see [About restriction groups in Visma.net ERP](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/) for supported combinations of entities.| For examples of using restriction groups, see: [About practical scenarios with Restriction groups](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-practical-scenarios-with-restriction-groups/). About operations with restriction groups /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/configure-restriction-groups/about-operations-with-restriction-groups page The operations that you can perform with restriction groups (such as creating the groups, adding entities to a group, deleting entities from a group, and viewing group details) depend on the window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About operations with restriction groups The operations that you can perform with restriction groups (such as creating the groups, adding entities to a group, deleting entities from a group, and viewing group details) depend on the window. This topic describes the operations that you can perform with restriction groups. ## Creating a restriction group The following table explains how to create a restriction group to restrict the visibility of some system entities.
STEP ACTION
1

Open one of the windows in the Row-level security workspace, which you can use to create restriction groups with the particular system entities you want to add.

For examples of combination of restriction groups, see: About restriction groups in Visma.net ERP.
2 Enter a group name that reflects what the group limits visibility to.
3 Select the group type. For information about the types of restriction groups, see: About types of restriction groups.
4 If the group includes users, select the users that will be included in the group on the Users tab.
5

Select the values of the entity that should be included in the group on the tab with the list of entities.

For example: If the entity is warehouses, you select the particular warehouses you want to include in the group.
6 Repeat this step for each entity type that you want to include in the group.
7 Save your changes.
## Deactivating a restriction group If you do not want to apply the restrictions of a group to the entities included in the group, you do the following.
STEP ACTION
1 Open the Restriction groups (SM201030) window.
2 In the Selection area, select the restriction group you want to edit.
3 Clear the Active check box.
4 Save your changes.
5 Result: Restrictions configured in the group are no longer applied to the entities.
## Setting up default restriction groups for supplier and customer classes To simplify the process of adding new supplier and customers to restriction groups, you can specify a default restriction group for a supplier or customer class. This means that suppliers and customers of the selected class will be included in the restriction group automatically. The following table explains the steps to specify a default restriction group for a supplier class.
STEP ACTION
1 Go to the Supplier classes (AP201000) window.
1 In the Class ID field, select the supplier class for which you want to specify the default restriction group.
2 Go to the General settings tab, and in the Default restriction group field of the Default general settings, select the default restriction group that will be used for the selected supplier class.
3 Click Apply restriction settings to all suppliers in the window toolbar, to include all entities of the class in the default restriction group.
4 Save your changes.
You perform similar steps in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window when you want to specify a default restriction group for a customer class. ## Removing class entities from a default restriction group The following table explains how to remove all class entities from a default restriction group to cancel the visibility restriction for entities of a supplier class.
STEP ACTION
1 Open the Supplier classes (AP201000) window.
2 Go to the General settings tab, and in the Default general settings section, clear the value in the Default restriction group field.
3 Click Apply restriction settings to all suppliers in the window toolbar.
4 Save your changes.
In the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, you can perform similar steps to remove customers of a class from the default restriction group. ## Adding entities to an existing restriction group While addressing your everyday tasks, you may need to add users and entities to restriction groups that you have created and configured previously. Suppose that a new employee of your organisation should use accounts with limited visibility, or that new stock items have been added to the system and should be in a particular restriction group. Follow these steps to add an entity to an existing group.
STEP ACTION
1 Go to the Row-level security workspace.
2

Open the window that displays restriction groups for the entity you want to add to the restriction group.

For example: For a user, you open the Restriction groups by user (SM201035) window.
3

In the top part, select the entity that you want to add to a restriction group.

For example: In the Login field, you select Todd Bloom.
4 In the table with the list of restriction groups, select the unlabelled Included check box for each group in which you want to include the selected entity.
5 Save your changes.
After you have included the entity in the restriction groups, the system applies the visibility limitations to the entity. Similarly, you can remove entities from a restriction group by clearing the **Included** check box for this group. Row-level security windows /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows section On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Row-level security windows On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Row-level security module. Customer access (AR102000) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/customer-access-ar102000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of customer accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or customer accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer access (AR102000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of customer accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or customer accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > You can also use the [Restriction groups by customer (AR102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-customer-ar102010/) window to manage the visibility of customer accounts to users, but you cannot create restriction groups on this window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Element Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Customers tab On this tab, you can view the list of customer accounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Element Description
Customer no. The number of the customer. You can click the customer number to open the Customers (AR303000) window with information about this customer.
Status The status of the customer account, which is either Active or Inactive.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Email account access (SM201050) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/email-account-access-sm201050 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of system email accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or system email accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email account access (SM201050) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of system email accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or system email accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of system email accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or system email accounts. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Email accounts tab By using this tab, you can view the list of system email accounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Email address The email address that corresponds to this system email account.
User name The login that was specified in the system email account settings.
Password The password that was specified in the system email account settings. The password is displayed in an encrypted window.
Included A check box that indicates (if selected) that a system email account is included in the restriction group.
General ledger account access (GL104000) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of accounts and subaccounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users, accounts, or subaccounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger account access (GL104000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of accounts and subaccounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users, accounts, or subaccounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also use the [Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-general-ledger-account-gl104020/) and [Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-subaccount-gl104030/) windows to manage the visibility of accounts and subaccounts to users, but you cannot create restriction groups on these windows. > [!CAUTION] > By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, > and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to > the restricted entities. > It is recommended that you carefully configure restriction groups > that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in > different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash > accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Accounts tab On this tab, you can view the list of general ledger accounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Account Read-only. The account that can be included in the restriction group.
Type Read-only. The account type, which can be Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Account class Read-only. The account class to which this account belongs.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the account.
Currency Read-only. The account currency, for a currency-denominated account.
## The Subaccounts tab By using this tab, you can view the list of subaccounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group. This tab is displayed on the window when the **By segmented key** mode is selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key.
Column Description
Subaccount The subaccount to be included in the restriction group. You can click the subaccount to open the Subaccounts - reference information window.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the subaccount.
## The Subaccount segments tab By using this tab, you can view the list of subaccount segment values by the segment ID defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group. This tab is displayed on the window when the **By segment: All avail. segment values** mode is selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key.
Element Description
Segment ID The ID of the subaccount segment. When you select a value in this field, in the Segment values table, the system displays the list of the segment values that correspond to this ID.
Column Description
Segment value The value of the subaccount segment to be included in the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount segment is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the subaccount segment.

Related pages

Concepts

 General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-accounts-by-branch-access-gl103040 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of general ledger accounts to branches, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing branches or accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of general ledger accounts to branches, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing branches or accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of general ledger accounts to branches, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing branches or accounts. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). > [!CAUTION] > By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, > and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to > the restricted entities. > We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups > that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in > different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash > accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Branches tab On this tab, you can view the list of the branches defined in the system and select the branches to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Branch The ID of the branch. Branches are defined in the Branches (CS102000) window.
Branch name The name of the branch.
Posting ledger The default posting ledger for the branch, which is specified in the Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010) window.
## The Accounts tab On this tab, you can view the list of General ledger accounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Account Read-only. The account that can be included in the restriction group.
Type Read-only. The account type, which can be Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Account class Read-only. The account class to which this account belongs.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the account.
Currency Read-only. The account currency, for a currency-denominated account.
Budget access (GL105030) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/budget-access-gl105030 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of budget articles to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or budget articles. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Budget access (GL105030) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of budget articles to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or budget articles. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also use the [Restriction groups by budget article (GL105020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-budget-article-gl105020/) window to manage the visibility of budget articles to users, but you cannot create restriction groups on this window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/) ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Budget tree tab By using this tab, you can view the list of budget articles defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Description Read-only. The description of the node or the budget article.
Account Read-only. The account of the budget article. The account is displayed only for budget articles that are not nodes.
Subaccount Read-only. The subaccount of the budget article. The subaccount is displayed only for budget articles that are not nodes.
Account mask Read-only. The account mask for the budget article. The account mask is displayed only for budget articles that are nodes.
Subaccount mask Read-only. The subaccount mask for the budget article. The subaccount mask is displayed only for budget articles that are nodes.
Node Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that this budget article is a node.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Item access (IN103000) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/item-access-in103000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of item classes and stock items to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users, item classes, or stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item access (IN103000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of item classes and stock items to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users, item classes, or stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > You can also use the [Restriction groups by item class (IN103010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-item-class-in103010/) and [Restriction groups by item (IN103020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-item-in103020/) windows to manage the visibility of item classes and items to users, but you cannot create restriction groups in these windows. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this box is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full Name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Item classes tab By using this tab, you can view the list of item classes defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Class ID Read-only. The ID of the item class that can be included in the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the item class.
## The Items tab By using this tab, you can view the list of items defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the item that can be included in the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the item.

Related pages

Windows

 Project access (PM102000) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/project-access-pm102000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of projects to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project access (PM102000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of projects to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also use the [Restriction groups by project (PM102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-project-pm102010/) window to manage the visibility of projects to users, but you cannot create restriction groups in this window. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that (if selected) indicates that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Projects tab By using this tab, you can view the list of projects defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Project ID Read-only. The identifier of the project.
Description Read-only. The description of the project.
Customer Read-only. The customer associated with the project, if this project is external. For an internal project, no customer is specified.
Template Read-only. The template used for creating this project, if applicable.
Status Read-only. The status of the project.
Restricted entities (SM201040) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restricted-entities-sm201040 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular system entity, such as an stock item, a general ledger account, or a user, and change the visibility of the entity in the system by including the system entity in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restricted entities (SM201040) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular system entity, such as an stock item, a general ledger account, or a user, and change the visibility of the entity in the system by including the system entity in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. If a group includes particular users, only those users can view the group entities. If a group doesn't include users, the entities of different types included in the group can be used only with group members. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of a system entity by using the [Restriction groups (SM201030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-sm201030/) window or the window intended for entities of this type in the **Manage** section of the Row-level security workspace. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). CAUTION: By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to the restricted entities. We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can select the system entity type and the specific entity for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups.
Element Description
Entity type The type of system entity.
Entity The particular entity of the type you have selected.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the **Included** column is selected for each group that contains the selected entity. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the system entity in restriction groups.
Column Description
Included A check box that indicates (if selected) that the entity is included in the restriction group.
Group name The name of the restriction group.
Description The description of the restriction group.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce the restrictions of an inactive group.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups (SM201030) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-sm201030 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of system entities, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing system entities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups (SM201030) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of system entities, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing system entities. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of system entities, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing system entities. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). For simplicity, we recommend that you create restriction groups for use in specific workspaces by using the appropriate windows in the **Manage** section of the Row-level security workspace. ## The top part In this area, you can define a new restriction group or select an existing one for editing.
Element Description
Group name The unique group identifier. If you are defining a new group, type the name here. If you are modifying an existing group, select the group name.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Description The description of the group.
Entity type

Required.

The type of system entity that is included in the group.
Specific type

Optional.

The system entity that is used by the system for filtering restriction groups on the Restriction groups tab of the entity window. The entity type selected in this field does not affect visibility of entities included in the restriction group.
Specific module

Optional.

The two-letter code of the workspace where the group is displayed, if the group should be viewed in only a specific workspace.

The workspace selected in this field does not affect visibility of entities included in the restriction group.
## The table You can use this table to view the list of system entities of the selected type and include any of them to the selected restriction group.
Column Description
Included A check box that you select to include the entity in the restriction group.
Entity Read-only. A field that contains the ID of the particular entity and additional information about the entity; pieces of information are separated by commas.
Restriction groups by branch (GL103020) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-branch-gl103020 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular branch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by branch (GL103020) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular branch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also change the visibility of the branch in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of branches and general ledger accounts by using the [General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-accounts-by-branch-access-gl103040/) window, and for managing the visibility of branches and subaccounts by using the [Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/subaccounts-by-branch-access-gl103060/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). > [!CAUTION] > By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, > and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to > the restricted entities. > We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups > that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in > different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash > accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can select the branch for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view the posting ledger of the selected branch.
Element Description
Branch The branch of your organisation whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Posting ledger Read-only. The default posting ledger for the selected branch. The system fills in this field automatically once you select a branch, based on the settings established in the Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010) window.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the branch. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the branch in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by budget article (GL105020) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-budget-article-gl105020 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular budget article. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by budget article (GL105020) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular budget article. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular budget article. You can also change the visibility of the budget article in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. If the selected budget article is a node or if it contains subarticles, the same visibility restrictions will be applied to the subarticles. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of budget articles by using the [Budget access (GL105030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/budget-access-gl105030/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the budget article for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected budget article.
Element Description
Budget article The budget article whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Account Read-only. The account of the selected budget article if the article is not a node.
Subaccount Read-only. The subaccount of the selected budget article if the article is not a node.
Node Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected budget article is a node.
Account mask Read-only. The account mask used for the selected budget article if the article is a node.
Subaccount mask Read-only. The subaccount mask used for the selected budget article if the article is a node.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the budget article. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the budget article in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by customer (AR102010) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-customer-ar102010 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by customer (AR102010) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular customer account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular customer account. You can also change the visibility of the customer account in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. > [!NOTE] > You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of customer accounts by using the [Customer access (AR102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/customer-access-ar102000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the customer account for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected customer account.
Element Description
Customer no. The customer account, by its number whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Status Read-only. The status of the selected customer account: Active or Inactive.
Customer name Read-only. The name of the selected customer, which is specified in the Customers (AR303000) window.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the customer account. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the customer account in restriction groups.
Element Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-general-ledger-account-gl104020 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular General ledger account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular General ledger account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular General ledger account. You can also change the visibility of the account in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of General ledger accounts by using the [General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). CAUTION: By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to the restricted entities. We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can select the general ledger account for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected general ledger account.
Element Description
Account The general ledger account whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Type

Read-only. The type of the selected account.

For more information, see: About account types and classes.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected account.
Account class

Read-only. The class of the selected account.

For more information, see: About account types and classes
Currency Read-only. The specific currency if the selected general ledger account is a currency-denominated account. (If this field is blank, the base currency is used for the account.)
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the account. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the general ledger account in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by item (IN103020) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-item-in103020 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by item (IN103020) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular item. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular item. You can also change the visibility of the item in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. > [!NOTE] > You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of items by using the [Item access (IN103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/item-access-in103000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the item for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected item.
Element Description
Item ID The identifier of the item whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected item.
Item class Read-only. The item class of the selected item.
Item status Read-only. The status of the selected item.
Stock item Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected item is a stock item.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the item. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the item in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.

Related pages

Windows

 Restriction groups by item class (IN103010) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-item-class-in103010 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular item class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by item class (IN103010) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular item class. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular item class. You can also change the visibility of the item class in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. > [!NOTE] > You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of item classes by using the [Item access (IN103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/item-access-in103000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the item class for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view the description of the selected item class.
Element Description
Class ID The item class (by its identifier) whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected class.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with basic information about each groups. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the item class. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the item class in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.

Related pages

Windows

 Restriction groups by project (PM102010) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-project-pm102010 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular project. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by project (PM102010) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular project. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular project. You can also change the visibility of the project in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from restriction groups that currently contain it. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of projects by using the [Project access (PM102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/project-access-pm102000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/) ## The top part In this area, you can select the project for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected project.
Element Description
Project ID The project for which you want to view (and possibly edit) related restriction groups.
Status Read-only. The status of the selected project.
Customer Read-only. The customer for the selected project, if the project is external. For an internal project, this field is empty.
Template Read-only. The template used for creating the selected project, if applicable.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected project.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabeled **Included** column is selected for each group that contains the selected project. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the project in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups
Restriction groups by sub segment (GL104040) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-sub-segment-gl104040 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount segment value. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by sub segment (GL104040) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount segment value. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount segment value. You can also change the visibility of the subaccount segment value in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the subaccount segment value for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected subaccount segment value.
Element Description
Segment ID The subaccount segment (by its identifier) for which you want to select a value.
Segment value The segment value for the selected subaccount segment. In this field, you can select the subaccount segment value for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected subaccount segment value.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected subaccount segment value is active.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the subaccount segment value. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the subaccount segment value in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-subaccount-gl104030 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount. You can also change the visibility of the subaccount in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of subaccounts by using the [General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). CAUTION: By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to the restricted entities. We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can select the subaccount for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view the description of the selected subaccount.
Element Description
Subaccount The subaccount whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected subaccount.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the subaccount. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the subaccount in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by user (SM201035) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-user-sm201035 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular user. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by user (SM201035) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular user. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular user. You can also change the visibility of the user in the system by including the user in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the user for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected user.
Element Description
Login The name of the user whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
First name Read-only. The selected user’s first name.
Last name Read-only. The selected user’s last name.
Comment Read-only. The comment provided for the selected user account.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the user. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the user in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by warehouse (IN102010) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-warehouse-in102010 page in this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by warehouse (IN102010) in this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular warehouse. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. in this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular warehouse. You can also change the visibility of the warehouse in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. > [!NOTE] > You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of warehouses by using the [Warehouse access (IN102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/warehouse-access-in102000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the warehouse for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view the description of the selected warehouse.
Element Description
Warehouse ID The warehouse (by its identifier) whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected warehouse.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the warehouse. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the warehouse in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.

Related pages

Windows

 Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/subaccounts-by-branch-access-gl103060 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of subaccounts to branches, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing branches or subaccounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of subaccounts to branches, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing branches or subaccounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of subaccounts to branches, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing branches or subaccounts. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). CAUTION: By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to the restricted entities. We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Branches tab On this tab, you can view the list of the branches defined in the system and select the branches to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Included A check box that indicates (if selected) that the branch is included in the restriction group.
Branch The ID of the branch. Branches are defined in the Branches (CS102000) window.
Branch name The name of the branch.
Posting ledger The default posting ledger for the branch, which is specified in the Financial year (GL101000) window.
## The Subaccounts tab On this tab, you can view the list of subaccounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group. This tab is displayed on the window when the **By segmented key** mode is selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key.
Column Description
Subaccount The subaccount that can be included in the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the subaccount.
## The Subaccount segments tab On this tab, you can view the list of subaccount segment values by the segment ID defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group. This tab is displayed on the window when the **By segment: All avail. segment values** mode is selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key.
Element Description
Segment ID The ID of the subaccount segment. When you select a value in this field, in the Segment values table, the system displays the list of the segment values that correspond to this ID.
Column Description
Segment value The value of the subaccount segment to be included in the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount segment is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the subaccount segment.
Warehouse access (IN102000) /visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/warehouse-access-in102000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of warehouses to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Warehouse access (IN102000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of warehouses to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also use the [Restriction groups by warehouse (IN102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-warehouse-in102010/) window to manage the visibility of warehouses to users, but you cannot create restriction groups on this window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Warehouses tab By using this tab, you can view the list of warehouses defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Warehouse ID Read-only. The identifier of the warehouse.
Description Read-only. The description of the warehouse.

Related pages

Windows

 Work processes /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes section With the help of work processes, you can carry out chains of processes in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Work processes With the help of work processes, you can carry out chains of processes in the system. For example, you start by creating a purchase invoice, approve and pay it, and finally you update the General ledger. Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. > [!NOTE] > When using Financials, be aware that the **Description** field and other free text fields in our system are not to be used for any personal data, like for example social security number, unless specifically asked for. Only use the free text fields according to the intent; description, company name, phone numbers connected to the transaction etc. AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # AutoPay Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Get started with AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/get-started-with-autopay section If you have an AutoPay Administrator role, you can follow the instructions below to get your company started with AutoPay in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Get started with AutoPay If you have an AutoPay Administrator role, you can follow the instructions below to get your company started with AutoPay in Visma Net.
workflow-1-new Grant a user access and roles to a Visma Net service
workflow-2-new

Optional: Secure the pay

ment process
workflow-3-new Create bank agreement
workflow-4-new Decide which payment process to use: Use the Basic payment processing for AutoPay or Use Advanced payment processing for AutoPay
workflow-5-new Optional: Add an account to the chart of accounts
workflow-6-new Configure import settings for statements and incoming payments
workflow-7-new Set payment methods for AutoPay
The basic incoming payment process for AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-incoming-payment-process-for-autopay section Before you start, prepare your system for AutoPay: Get started with AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The basic incoming payment process for AutoPay Before you start, prepare your system for AutoPay: Get started with AutoPay. For more information: [Get started with AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/get-started-with-autopay/).
workflow-1-new Set up import settings for statements and incoming payments
workflow-2-new View statuses and process payments
workflow-3-new

Match incoming payments

Do this step only if you have selected the Import from AutoPay setting.
workflow-4-new Process matched payments
workflow-5-new Validate manually payments and statements with errors
workflow-6-new Handle errors in AutoPay payments
The basic outgoing payment process for AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-outgoing-payment-process-for-autopay section This page describes the steps to handle outgoing payments in the basic payment process for AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The basic outgoing payment process for AutoPay This page describes the steps to handle outgoing payments in the basic payment process for AutoPay. See also: [Use the Basic payment processing for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/use-the-basic-payment-processing-for-autopay/). When you have finished a step, you will be guided directly to the next step in the process, in the What is next? section at the end.
workflow-1-new Create outgoing payments
workflow-2-new Send outgoing payments to AutoPay
workflow-3-new Approve payments in AutoPay
workflow-4-new Process outgoing payments manually via the AutoPay inbox
workflow-5-new Get payment info from AutoPay
The basic account statements process for AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-account-statements-process-for-autopay section This page describes the steps in the basic payment process for AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The basic account statements process for AutoPay This page describes the steps in the basic payment process for AutoPay. See also: [Use the Basic payment processing for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/use-the-basic-payment-processing-for-autopay/).
workflow-1-new Configure import settings for statements and incoming payments
workflow-2-new Process statements manually via the AutoPay inbox
workflow-3-new

Match account statements

Do this step only if you have selected the Import from AutoPay setting.
workflow-4-new Process unmatched account statements
workflow-5-new Process matched account statements
workflow-6-new Validate manually incoming payments and statements with error
workflow-7-new Get payment info from AutoPay
The advanced outgoing payment process for AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-advanced-outgoing-payment-process-for-autopay section This page describes the steps to handle outgoing payments in the advanced payment process for AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The advanced outgoing payment process for AutoPay This page describes the steps to handle outgoing payments in the advanced payment process for AutoPay. See also: [Use Advanced payment processing for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/use-advanced-payment-processing-for-autopay/). When you have finished a step, you will be guided directly to the next step in the process, in the What is next? section at the end.
workflow-1-new Create outgoing payments
workflow-2-new Create batch payments
workflow-3-new Send outgoing payments to AutoPay
workflow-4-new Export batch payments
workflow-5-new Approve payments in AutoPay
workflow-6-new Process outgoing payments manually via the AutoPay inbox
workflow-7-new Get payment info from AutoPay
Use the Basic payment processing for AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/use-the-basic-payment-processing-for-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use the Basic payment processing for AutoPay ## Before you start All users will have the basic payment processing as a default in Visma Net, which consists of these windows: + [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) + [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) + [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) The basic payment process is handling outgoing payments, incoming payments, and account statements. 1. Go to the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. 1. Select the **Branch ID**. If you have only one branch, go to step 3. 1. Click the **Payment settings** tab. 1. Under **Payment process settings**, select the **Use basic payment process** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Use Advanced payment processing for AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/use-advanced-payment-processing-for-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use Advanced payment processing for AutoPay ## Before you start The advanced payment processing consists of these windows: + [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) + [Create batch payments (AP505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000/) + [Export batch payments (AP50560S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/export-batch-payments-ap50560s/) + [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) + [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/). The advantage of using the advanced payment processing is when you have different users with different roles working on different tasks in your company, and you want to keep control of who has the right to approve payments. The advanced process is only suitable for handling outgoing payments. 1. Go to the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. 1. Select the **Branch ID**. If you have only one branch, go to step 3. 1. Click the **Payment settings** tab. 1. Under **Payment process settings**, deselect the **Use basic payment process** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Add a creditor identifier to a branch /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/add-a-creditor-identifier-to-a-branch section You can add a Creditor identifier to allow debtors and debtor banks to identify the creditor on direct debit mandates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a creditor identifier to a branch You can add a Creditor identifier to allow debtors and debtor banks to identify the creditor on direct debit mandates. The credit identifier is unique and refers to one creditor only. 1. Go to the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. 1. Go to the **Payment settings** tab. 1. In the **Creditor identifier** field, enter the reference number for the creditor. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Get payment info from AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/get-payment-info-from-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Get payment info from AutoPay 1. Go to the [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to choose the cash account you want to view the status of. This field will be empty unless you have set a default cash account to display. Once set, the tables will automatically update with the default cash account information. To view the status of cash accounts other than the default one, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and choose the desired account. Learn more in: [Set default cash account for payments and transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/set-default-cash-account-for-payments-and-transactions/). 1. In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to search for a specific batch. Even though a batch of payments has been exported, each payment within the batch is displayed individually in this window, along with the batch reference number. 1. You will now see the status of the selected cash accounts and batches.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Handle errors in AutoPay payments /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/handle-errors-in-autopay-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Handle errors in AutoPay payments ## Before you start When errors occur in processing of AutoPay payments, the ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) icon is displayed next to the payments with an error. You need to solve them before you can process them. If an error message about an inactive AutoPay agreement is displayed, follow the steps in: [Make a non-active AutoPay agreement active](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/make-a-non-active-autopay-agreement-active/) 1. Go to the table in lower part of the [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) window. 1. Select the payment with the ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) icon. 1. In the **Rejection message** column, read the reason why the payment was rejected or cancelled. This will tell you what action to take. 1. Click the link on the payment. A dialog box is displayed, showing the purchase document. 1. Make the necessary changes based on the rejection message in the [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) and close the pop-up window. 1. In the [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) window, click ![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) in the lower table. 1. In the **Handle** column, select the check box for the payments with the ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) icon, to remove them for this table. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Handle error messages for outgoing payments via the AutoPay inbox /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/handle-error-messages-for-outgoing-payments-via-the-autopay-inbox page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Handle error messages for outgoing payments via the AutoPay inbox 1. Go to the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window. 1. In the **Message type** field, select **Outgoing payment status** in the drop-down list. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, select **Error** in the drop-drown list. 1. In the **Status reason** column, view the error message for the payments you want to validate, and see if there are any actions that are required. 1. In the table, select the check boxes next to the payments that are ready for validation. 1. Click the **Validate manually** button. ## What is next? If you want to check the status of your payment, see [Get payment info from AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/get-payment-info-from-autopay/). Here you will not only see batches, but you will also see the **Batch ref. no** for each individual payment. Process incoming payments in the AutoPay inbox /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/process-incoming-payments-in-the-autopay-inbox section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process incoming payments in the AutoPay inbox ## Before you start You can create schedules for automatic processing of your payments and statements: [Set up automatic processing of payments for the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/set-up-automatic-processing-of-autopay-messages-from-the-autopay-inbox/) Also note that if your supplier or customer has required CID on their incoming payments, the bank will reject payments without CID. 1. Go to the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window. 1. In the **Message type** field, select **Incoming payments** in the drop-down list. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, select **New** in the drop-drown list. 1. Optional: You can view one specific cash account: In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the cash account. 1. In the table, select the check boxes for the incoming payments you will process. If you want to process all the lines in one go, click the **Process all** button without selecting the check boxes. 1. Click the **Process** button. In the **Status** column, the status changes to **Validated** and ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed. The incoming payment is updated in the general ledger. 1. Optional: When the process is done you can view the details of an incoming payment: 1. In the table, select the incoming payment you want to view. 1. Click the **View document** button. 1. In the [AutoPay inbox details (CA40300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-details-ca40300s/) window, view your incoming payment. 1. Click the **Back** button to go back to the inbox. Process outgoing payments manually via the AutoPay inbox /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/process-outgoing-payments-manually-via-the-autopay-inbox section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process outgoing payments manually via the AutoPay inbox ## Before you start We suggest that you create schedules for automatic processes of your payments and statements from this window: [Set up automatic processing of payments for the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/set-up-automatic-processing-of-autopay-messages-from-the-autopay-inbox/) 1. Go to the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window. 1. In the **Message type** field, select **Outgoing payment status** in the drop-down list. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, select **New** in the drop-drown list. 1. Optional: If you want to view one specific cash account, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), next to the **Cash account** field. 1. Optional: If you want to view details of payment, do this: 1. In the table, select the payment you want to view. 1. Click the **View document** button. 1. In the [AutoPay inbox details (CA40300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-details-ca40300s/) window, view your payments. 1. Click the **Back** button to go back to the inbox. 1. In the table, select the payments you want to process. 1. Click the **Process** button to process the selected payments. If you click the **Process all** button, all payments will be processed. In the **Status** column, the status has changed to **Validated** and the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon is now visible, and the payments are updated in the General ledger. > [!NOTE] > If the status for the outgoing payment is rejected or cancelled, after processing this line in the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window, you can make corrections on the purchase invoice, and send the payment again to the bank. ## What is next? If you have error messages on some of your outgoing payments, see [Handle error messages for outgoing payments via the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/handle-error-messages-for-outgoing-payments-via-the-autopay-inbox/). If you want to check the status of your payment, see [Get payment info from AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/get-payment-info-from-autopay/). Here you will not only see the batches, but you will also see the **Batch ref. no** for each individual payment. Process statements manually via the AutoPay inbox /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/process-statements-manually-via-the-autopay-inbox section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process statements manually via the AutoPay inbox ## Before you start You can create schedules for automatic processes of your statements: [Set up automatic processing of payments for the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/set-up-automatic-processing-of-autopay-messages-from-the-autopay-inbox/) 1. Go to the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window. 1. In the **Message type** field, select **Account statements** in the drop-down list. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, select **New** in the drop-drown. 1. Optional: You can view one specific cash account: In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the cash account. 1. In the table, select the check boxes next to the transactions you want to process. 1. Click the **Process** button. If you want to process all the lines at once, click **Process all**, without selecting any check boxes. In the **Status** column, the status changes to **Validated** and the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon is now visible. 1. Optional: When the process is done it is possible to view the details of an account statement: 1. In the table, select the account statement you want to view. 1. Click the **View document** button. 1. In the [AutoPay inbox details (CA40300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-details-ca40300s/) window, view your statement. 1. Click the **Back** button to go back to the inbox.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Set up automatic processing of AutoPay messages from the AutoPay inbox /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/set-up-automatic-processing-of-autopay-messages-from-the-autopay-inbox section The steps below will show you how to set up a schedule. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up automatic processing of AutoPay messages from the AutoPay inbox The steps below will show you how to set up a schedule. It will also show you how to view new statuses for statements, incoming and outgoing payments. > [!NOTE] > You can set up your own schedule according to your work routines. 1. Go to the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window. 1. In the **Message type** field, select **View all**. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, select **New**. 1. Click the ![icon-scheduler](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-scheduler.png) icon and select **Add** in the drop-down list. 1. In the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) popup window, enter a **description**. 1. On the **Details** tab, in the **Starts on** field, enter the first day on which you want your schedule to be run. 1. In the **Schedule type** field, select a **schedule type**. 1. In the **Execution time** section, use the two **Run between** drop-downs to select at what time your schedule should run. 1. In the **Every** drop-down, select every hours your schedule should run. The value of this field determines how often the schedule is run. 1. Go to the **Filter values** tab. 1. Check that the **Message type** is **View all**. If it is not correct, double-click the incorrect cell and select the correct value from the drop-down list. 1. Check that the **Inbox status** is **New**. If it is not correct, double-click the incorrect cell and select the correct value from the drop-down list. 1. Click **Save and close**. Validate manually incoming payments and statements with error /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/validate-manually-incoming-payments-and-statements-with-error section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate manually incoming payments and statements with error 1. Go to the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window. 1. In the **Message type** field, select **Account statements** or **Incoming payments** in the drop-down list. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, select **Error** in the drop-drown. 1. Optional: In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the cash account to view one specific account.. 1. In the table, select the check boxes next to the incoming payments or statement transactions you want to validate. 1. Click **Validate manually**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the **Status** column, the status changes from **Error** to **Manually validated** and the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon is now visible.

Related pages

Windows

 Upload bank statements (AP50550S) /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/upload-bank-statements-ap50550s section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Upload bank statements (AP50550S) 1. Go to the table in lower part of the [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select the cash account for which you want to upload files to AutoPay. 1. Click **Upload status file**. If this button is not activated for this cash account, you have to select a certain setting as described in [Activate the function Upload files manually](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/manually-import-bank-transactions/). 1. In the **Upload status file** dialog box, click **Choose file**. The **Open** dialog box is displayed. 1. Select the file you want to upload, then click **Open**. Only.xml,.txt, and.dat files can be uploaded. The **Open** dialog box is disappears. 1. In the **Upload status file** pop-up window, click **Upload**. The file is uploaded to AutoPay, where all the transactions in this file will be updated. Soon the newly updated transactions will be displayed in the tables of the [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) window. B2C /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # B2C Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Activate and use B2C AutoInvoice service /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/activate-and-use-b2c-autoinvoice-service section This overview presents the main steps for the B2C AutoInvoice process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate and use B2C AutoInvoice service This overview presents the main steps for the B2C AutoInvoice process. The AutoInvoice B2C (business to consumer in Norway) service sends e-invoices directly to the consumer's online bank. Instead of sending a paper invoice to the consumer, the suppliers send and present their invoices electronically in the consumer's online bank. This workflow describes the steps in the activation and use of the B2C AutoInvoice service. Click the links to perform all necessary procedures.
workflow-1-new Settings in AutoInvoice settings
workflow-2-new Settings in Customer ledger preferences
workflow-3-new Settings in Customers
workflow-4-new Check agreements
workflow-5-new Send invoice to AutoInvoice
workflow-6-new Poll the invoice status
Settings in AutoInvoice settings /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/settings-in-autoinvoice-settings page In the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window, you can manage all settings related to how you use AutoInvoice, for example: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Settings in AutoInvoice settings In the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window, you can manage all settings related to how you use AutoInvoice, for example: For more information: [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/). > + Decide how to print, scan, receive and send invoices. > + Select what service to use to send consumer e-invoices to the bank. > + Select what AutoInvoice endpoint to use. > + Select an invoice import scenario. > + Set your preferred VAT settings for imported invoices. > + Set the VAT setting for the Invoice inbox. > + See the activation status of the service. 1. Go to the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window. 1. Under **B2C service for sending consumer e-invoice to bank**, click **Activate**. This will open a pop-up window. 1. In the pop-up window, fill in the name and e-mail address of a person entitled to enter into service agreements on behalf of the company. 1. Optional: If you have an OCR agreement with your bank, you can activate [Agreement capture](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/agreement-capture/) for the respective bank account, by selecting the **Use agreement capture (with OCR)** check box. 1. Click **OK**. An email will be sent to the address you provided, with a link to accept the terms of service. > [!NOTE] > Please note that after accepting the terms of service, it takes up to one working day for the AutoInvoice B2C service to become active. Once the service is activated with Nets and the bank's network, the button you used for activation will become disabled and will state that the service is active. Settings in Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/settings-in-customer-ledger-preferences page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Settings in Customer ledger preferences ## Before you start In order to send banking e-invoices to a customer, the customer must first enter into an agreement with your company. The agreement can be initiated in different ways, either by your company, or directly by the customer, from their online bank account. The process can be initiated by your company, in which case the customer will receive a request by sms or e-mail to accept the e-invoicing agreement. Invoices can only be delivered to the customer’s online bank account after the agreement has been accepted. There are a number of configurable settings which influence the sending of agreement requests and banking e-invoices to customers. 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Click the **AutoInvoice settings** tab. 1. The check box **Use the service "AutoInvoice - consumer route" anyway** allows you to specify how the system should handle customer invoices, in case a customer has the option **Send invoices as banking e-invoices** activated, but there is no active agreement in place for the respective customer: + Select - This means that the invoice will still be sent to AutoInvoice as a banking e-invoice and it will go to the customer's online bank account, provided that the customer accepts the e-invoicing agreement request within 3 days. If the customer doesn't accept the agreement. After the expiration of the 3 days, AutoInvoice will redirect the invoice to the customer by e-mail, if available, or via the regular post as a paper print. + Deselect - This means that the invoice will be sent to AutoInvoice as a standard invoice, and the AutoInvoice service will then deliver the invoice straight away by e-mail, or via the regular post as a paper print. + The check box is by default deselected. + For each invoice, you will be able to see the sending method that will be used, on the **Invoice address** tab, under **Print and email options**, in the field **Sending method**. 1. Optional: You can select, or deselect, the check box **Display warning message**. This option creates a yellow icon in the Sales invoices window, near the **Invoice address** tab. The check box is by default selected. When you click this yellow icon, the warning message reads: **The e-invoice agreement status for [CustomerName] is [Status] - last updated: [LastUpdatedDateTime]**. 1. When you are using a multi-branch company, there is an additional check box, **Send the consumer-supplier agreement for current branch only**, which you can either: + Select - If you only want to send the agreement request for the current branch. + Deselect - If you want to send the agreement request for all of the branches with an active B2C service. Settings in Customers /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/settings-in-customers section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Settings in Customers ## Before you start In order to start sending banking e-invoices to a customer, you must enable this option for the respective customer, in the Customers window. The minimum required information for the customer is: + Customer number (when creating a new customer, you must save the record before you can select the banking e-invoice option). + Postcode and city. + Country – it must be Norway, as the service is only available for Norwegian customers. + E-mail address or mobile phone number. The phone number is retrieved from the field specified in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, on the tab **AutoInvoice settings**. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select a Norwegian customer. 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. In the **Address** field, make sure the address is a Norwegian address. 1. Select option **Send to AutoInvoice**. 1. Under **Invoice contact**, enter either an e-mail address, or a phone number. 1. Select the check box **Send invoice to AutoInvoice as e-Invoice (Norway)**. 1. Click **Save**. The agreement request is now sent by sms if the mobile number is provided, otherwise by e-mail. In a multi-branch company, the agreement request is sent only for the current branch, or for all the branches with the B2C service activated, according to your settings in Step 2. Check agreements /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/check-agreements page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check agreements 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Select the **customer number** of the customer whose agreements you want to check. 1. Go to the tab **Other invoice settings**. 1. Check the status of the existing agreement of the customer. 1. Repeat these steps for every customer. Send invoice to AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/send-invoice-to-autoinvoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoice to AutoInvoice 1. [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/). 1. Click **Release**. The status changes to **Open** and. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed 1. Click **Actions** and select **Send to AutoInvoice**. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed, and the invoice is sent to AutoInvoice. > [!NOTE] > To send several invoices to AutoInvoice at once, see [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/). > > You can follow the status of your sent invoice on the **Invoice address** tab. See also: [Check sent email status for AutoInvoice.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice/) Agreement capture /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/agreement-capture page If you have an OCR agreement with your bank, you can activate agreement capture for the respective bank account on the AutoInvoice tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Agreement capture If you have an OCR agreement with your bank, you can activate agreement capture for the respective bank account on the AutoInvoice tab. Agreement capture means that every time someone uses online banking to make a payment to your bank account, they will be informed that your company can send invoices directly to their online banking and will be invited to accept an agreement with your company for receiving invoices in this way. Agreement capture is supported for one bank account only, and you need to have an OCR agreement with the bank for that account. Currently, if you activate the AutoInvoice B2C service without agreement capture, you cannot activate agreement capture automatically at a later stage, and you must contact Visma Support to have agreement capture activated. You must specify the bank account number (BBAN – 11 digits number), the length of the CID code used on customer invoices, and the position of the eInvoice reference number within the CID code. Visma Net relies on using the customer number as the eInvoice reference, so you must indicate the position of the customer number within the CID code. If you use the default payment methods configuration from Visma Net, the CID code has 12 digits (including the check digit) and the position of the customer number / e-invoice reference is 1-5. Enter contact information for RF-1301 /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/enter-contact-information-for-rf-1301 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter contact information for RF-1301 1. Go to the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. 1. Click the **Altinn settings** tab. 1. In the RF-1301 section, enter your contact information. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Claim ROT and RUT deduction /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/claim-rot-and-rut-deduction section In the Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000) window, service providers can prepare claims for tax deductions from the Swedish Tax Agency for ROT and RUT work. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Claim ROT and RUT deduction In the Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000) window, service providers can prepare claims for tax deductions from the Swedish Tax Agency for ROT and RUT work. For more information: [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/). ## Before you start The service provider registers an invoice with both the non-deductible amount and the tax deduction amount. After the customer has paid the non-deductible amount, the service provider can claim the remaining tax deduction amount from the Swedish Tax Agency. You can only claim tax deductions for labour, not for material costs or travel expenses. For more information on the concept of ROT and RUT deductions, go to [Skatteverket](https://skatteverket.se/foretagochorganisationer/skatter/rotochrut.4.2ef18e6a125660db8b080002674.html). ![global-css-new-window-16](/media/visma-net-erp/global-css-new-window-16.png) > [!NOTE] > The work process to claim tax deductions from the authorities for ROT and RUT work, includes several steps. The two first steps are only necessary if this is the first time you register a ROT or RUT invoice in Visma Net.
workflow-1-new Enable or disable ROT and RUT deduction
workflow-2-new Activate or deactivate the ROT and RUT deduction functionality
workflow-3-new Register deductible items for ROT and RUT deduction
workflow-4-new Register an invoice for ROT and RUT work
workflow-5-new Release and pay an invoice for ROT and RUT work
workflow-6-new Optional: Reverse an invoice with ROT or RUT
workflow-7-new Send a claim for ROT or RUT deduction
Configure and apply overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/configure-and-apply-overdue-charges section You must decide how many payment reminders your company wants to send to the customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure and apply overdue charges You must decide how many payment reminders your company wants to send to the customer. ## Before you start > [!NOTE] > To create payment reminders, you must configure the system correctly. If not, you cannot create reminders, send dunning letters or calculate overdue charges, write-offs and interests.
workflow-1-new Enable or disable overdue charges
workflow-2-new Create an account
workflow-3-new Add a text for dunning letters and reminders
workflow-4-new Configure an overdue charge code
workflow-5-new Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences
## Processing options [Make customer-specific changes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/make-customer-specific-changes/) [Create a purchase credit note for an existing purchase invoice (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-credit-note-for-an-existing-purchase-invoice/) [Prepare dunning letters by document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-document/) [Prepare dunning letters by customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-customer/) Customer discounts /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/customer-discounts section This overview presents the main steps in the customer discount process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer discounts This overview presents the main steps in the customer discount process.
Information about supplier discounts and examples of how you can use them Enable or disable customer discounts
workflow-2-new Define customer discount codes
Set up discount types and conditions Create discount series
Customer refunds via AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/customer-refunds-via-autopay section Follow these steps to make customer refunds via AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer refunds via AutoPay Follow these steps to make customer refunds via AutoPay.
workflow-1-new Enable batch payments
workflow-2-new Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer
workflow-3-new Add a payment message prefix
workflow-4-new Process a customer refund
workflow-5-new Send outgoing refunds to AutoPay
Direct debit /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Direct debit Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Get started with direct debit /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/get-started-with-direct-debit section This work process describes the steps to get started with direct debit payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Get started with direct debit This work process describes the steps to get started with direct debit payments. Thiswork process describes the steps to get started with direct debit payments. The links below will guide you through the work process. Each link represents a separate task, from which you can navigate to the next step in this process. You can always choose to go back to this page by clicking ![icon-navigate-back-helpcentre](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-navigate-back-helpcentre.png), or use the link under the Related work process overview.
workflow-1-new Add a creditor identifier to a branch
workflow-2-new Optional: Create a clearing account for direct debit
workflow-3-new Configure a cash account for direct debit
Direct debit payment process /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/direct-debit-payment-process section This work process describes the steps for collecting your customer payments using direct debit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Direct debit payment process This work process describes the steps for collecting your customer payments using direct debit. The links below will guide you through the work process. Each link represents a separate task, from which you can navigate to the next step in this process. You can always choose to go back to this page by clicking ![icon-navigate-back-helpcentre](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-navigate-back-helpcentre.png), or use the link under the Related work process overview. ## Before you start If you want to pay your invoices with direct debit, you must add the correct settings: [Get started with direct debit](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/get-started-with-direct-debit/)
workflow-1-new Set direct debit preferences for a customer
workflow-2-new Create and release an invoice
workflow-3-new Send deduction information
workflow-4-new Send direct debit invoices
workflow-5-new

Import bank transactions for direct debit

Note

If your bank has a direct connection with AutoPay: Process statements manually via the AutoPay inbox
workflow-6-new Optional: View a cash deposit for direct debit
workflow-7-new Process bank transactions for direct debit
workflow-8-new Optional: Process rejected direct debit payments
workflow-9-new Check status of a direct debit invoice
workflow-10-new Optional: Resend direct debit payments to AutoPay
Send direct debit invoices (AR50850S) /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/send-direct-debit-invoices-ar50850s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send direct debit invoices (AR50850S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this button to process the selected documents.
Process all Click this button to process all documents in the list.
Inquiries Direct debit batches: Opens the Bank deposits window in a pop up window.
## The top part
Element Description
Payment method The payment method to be used.
Cash account The system suggests the default cash account used for customers, based on the selected payment method.
Clearing account The clearing account is automatically selected when there is a clearing account connected to the cash account.
Customer class Select a customer class to display invoices connected to this customer class.
Customer Select a customer to display invoices for only this customer.
Up to due date Filters the documents up to the selected due date.
No. of documents selected Shows the number of documents you have selected from the list.
Total balance The total balance of the selected invoices.
## The table
Element Description
Type The document type.
Invoice no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the selected document.
Date The date when the document was created.
Post period The financial period of the document.
Customer The customer (by ID) referred to on this document.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Invoice text The user-provided description for the document.
Mandate ID The unique ID for the direct debit mandate.
Mandate description The description of the direct debit mandate.
Due date The due date of the invoice.
Balance The balance of the document.
Amount The amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.

Related pages

Tasks

 Send direct debit invoices /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/send-direct-debit-invoices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send direct debit invoices ## Before you start Create, release and print an invoice. See [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/). 1. Go to the [Send direct debit invoices (AR50850S)](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/send-direct-debit-invoices-ar50850s/) window. 1. In the **Payment method** field, select a payment method. 1. In the **Cash account** field, the system suggests the default cash account used for customers, based on the selected payment method from the previous step. 1. The **Clearing account** field is automatically selected when there is a clearing account connected to the **Cash account** selected in the previous step. One ore more invoices will list below. 1. In the **Up to due date** field, select a date. 1. Select the invoices you want to send. 1. Click **Process**. You can also click **Process all** to send out all the listed invoices at once. when the direct debit invoices are sent. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed > [!NOTE] > When the payment method is set to use a clearing account: > > + sending of direct debit invoices creates a cash deposit with status **Balanced** > + all corresponding payments for the sent direct debit invoices are linked to the cash deposit with status **Closed** > > If the payment method is not using a clearing account: > > + the payments for the direct debit invoices have status **Balanced** > + no cash deposit is created If you find a text file in the bottom-left corner of the window, it means that your bank does not have direct connection with AutoPay and you must do these additional steps: [Send a text file to your bank](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/send-a-text-file-to-your-bank/) ## What is next? [Process direct debit payments](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-bank-transactions-for-direct-debit/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Send a text file to your bank /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/send-a-text-file-to-your-bank page If your bank has not a direct connection with AutoPay, you need to send off a text file to your bank after you have processed the direct debit invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send a text file to your bank If your bank has not a direct connection with AutoPay, you need to send off a text file to your bank after you have processed the direct debit invoices. ## Before you start [Send direct debit invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/send-direct-debit-invoices/) 1. In the bottom-left corner of the window, click the text file. 1. Save the text file locally on your PC. 1. Upload the text file you just saved to your internet bank.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Get started with dunning letters /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/get-started-with-dunning-letters section You must decide how many dunning letters your company wants to send before you forward the invoice to a debt collector. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Get started with dunning letters You must decide how many dunning letters your company wants to send before you forward the invoice to a debt collector. To create dunning letters, you must also make several other decisions and do some settings in Visma Net. If you do not configure the system correctly, you will not be able to create dunning letters or calculate overdue charges, write-offs and interests.
workflow-1-new Add a text for dunning letters and reminders
workflow-2-new Make settings in the Customer classes window
workflow-3-new Configure an overdue charge code
workflow-4-new Choose a statement cycle for overdue charges
workflow-5-new Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences
workflow-6-new Optional: Make customer-specific changes
Order to cash /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/order-to-cash section This overview presents the main steps in the invoice to cash process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order to cash This overview presents the main steps in the invoice to cash process. When you click links in the topics you read, a new topic will pop up in a separate window. To go back to the main process, click outside the window.
icon-i2c-create-customer Create a customer
flow-arrow-down-new
icon-i2c-create-sales-documents Create and release sales documents
flow-arrow-down-new
icon-i2c-send-sales-documents Send sales documents
flow-arrow-down-new
icon-i2c-receive-payment

Receive payments

Upload bank statements
flow-arrow-down-new
icon-i2c-dunning-process Dunning process
Prepare for invoice emailing /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/prepare-for-invoice-emailing section In Visma Net you can email invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare for invoice emailing In Visma Net you can email invoices. To be able to send emails, you need to prepare the system and define some settings. When you set up for emailing invoices to your customer via [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/), you do not have to make this selection on each of your customers. Just update your customer classes and multiple customers will have it selected.
workflow-1-new Set up invoice mailing in the Customer ledger preferences
workflow-2-new Set up the reply email address
workflow-3-new Send invoices by email
Purchase to Pay /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/purchase-to-pay section This overview presents the main steps in the purchase to pay process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase to Pay This overview presents the main steps in the purchase to pay process. When you click links in the topics you read, a new topic will pop up in a separate window. To go back to the main process, click outside the window.
icon-p2p-create_supplier-new Create suppliers
flow-arrow-down-new
icon-p2p-purchase-document-new Create a purchase invoice
flow-arrow-down-new
icon-p2p-approve-new Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval Approve with Approval
flow-arrow-down-new
icon-p2p-pay-purchase-document-new Pay purchase documents
Approve purchase documents /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/purchase-to-pay/approve-purchase-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve purchase documents ## The purchase to pay work process To go back to the main process, click outside this pop-up window. Pay purchase documents /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/purchase-to-pay/pay-purchase-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pay purchase documents To go back to the main process, click outside this pop-up window. || |---| |## [Pay with AutoPay (basic process)](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-outgoing-payment-process-for-autopay/)| ## Processing options > [The advanced outgoing payment process for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-advanced-outgoing-payment-process-for-autopay/) > > [The basic account statements process for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-account-statements-process-for-autopay/) > > [Pay purchase documents without AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-one-payment/) Create a purchase invoice /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/purchase-to-pay/create-a-purchase-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase invoice To go back to the main process, click outside this pop-up window. || |---| |## [Create a purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-outgoing-payment-process-for-autopay/)| ## Processing options [Enter an invoice in the base currency](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-in-the-base-currency/) [Enter an invoice based on purchase receipts or purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-based-on-purchase-receipts-or-purchase-orders/) [Enter a foreign currency invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-a-foreign-currency-invoice/) Reconcile general ledger /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/reconcile-general-ledger section This work process describes the steps in reconciliation of the differences between the general ledger and certain other workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile general ledger This work process describes the steps in reconciliation of the differences between the general ledger and certain other workspaces. Click the number icons below to perform all necessary procedures.
workflow-1-new Reconcile cash management and general ledger
workflow-2-new Reconcile customer ledger and general ledger
workflow-3-new Reconcile fixed assets and general ledger
workflow-4-new Reconcile supplier ledger and general ledger
workflow-5-new Reconcile VAT and the general ledger
Reconcile statements /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/reconcile-statements section This work process describes the steps to reconciliation of statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile statements This work process describes the steps to reconciliation of statements. Click the number icons below to perform all necessary procedures.
workflow-1-new Import bank transactions
workflow-2-new Create a reconciliation statement
workflow-3-new Reconcile a reconciliation statement
workflow-4-new Release a reconciliation statement
workflow-5-new Void a reconciliation statement
Supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/supplier-discounts section This overview presents the main steps in the supplier discount process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discounts This overview presents the main steps in the supplier discount process. The links below will guide you through the work process. Each link represents a separate task, from which you can navigate to the next step in this process. You can always choose to go back to this page by clicking ![icon-navigate-back-helpcentre](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-navigate-back-helpcentre.png), or use the link under the Related work process overview. Learn more about the [About supplier discounts in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-in-visma-net/) and see examples on how to use the discount functionality.
workflow-1-new Enable or disable supplier discounts
workflow-2-new Define supplier discount codes
workflow-3-new Create discount series (AP205000)
Prepare and release an RF-1301 report /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/prepare-and-release-an-rf-1301-report section This work process describes the steps to prepare and release an RF-1301 report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare and release an RF-1301 report This work process describes the steps to prepare and release an RF-1301 report. Click the links below to perform all necessary procedures.
workflow-1-new Enter your contact information
workflow-2-new Activate reporting and enter date filters
workflow-3-new Prepare the report
workflow-4-new Important: If you have cross-year purchase credit notes
workflow-5-new Release the report
The year-end process /visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/the-year-end-process section This overview presents the main steps for the year end work process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The year-end process This overview presents the main steps for the year end work process. A financial year is closed automatically when you close the last period of this financial year. Thus, you should close the last period of a particular financial year only when the company is ready to close the financial year. The links below will guide you through the work process. Each link represents a separate task, from which you can navigate to the next step in this process. You can always choose to go back to this page by clicking ![icon-navigate-back-helpcentre](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-navigate-back-helpcentre.png), or use the link under the Related work process overview.
workflow-1-new Create a new financial year
workflow-2-new Close the last VAT period
workflow-3-new Close the last financial period
Common settings /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings section In common settings you configure settings that are used across other workspaces, such as number series, ID segments, and attributes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Common settings In common settings you configure settings that are used across other workspaces, such as number series, ID segments, and attributes. In common settings you configure settings that are used across other workspaces, such as number series, ID segments, and attributes. You also can set input masks or regular expressions to validate input in certain elements in windows. Visma Net provides a centralised point for managing activation of the system components. You can activate specific modules, workspaces, or functionalities of Visma Net in accordance with the purchased license. If required, you can also cancel the activation of specific components. Overview of the functionalities /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/overview-of-the-functionalities page Visma Net provides a scalable core system functionality and includes a range of add-on functionalities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overview of the functionalities Visma Net provides a scalable core system functionality and includes a range of add-on functionalities. Before you start implementing Visma Net,you may find it helpful to become familiar with the functionality of the workspaces to be implemented and the add-on functionalities your organisation has included in the license. ## Core functionality Visma Net includes the following modules and workspaces, whose core functionality is briefly described in the table below.
Module Overview
Organisation
Communication Provides users with access to such means of communication as email, notifications, announcements, activities, and tasks. The workspace also includes a special functionality—a preconfigured Communications dashboard.
Time and expenses Supports the processing of expense claims.
Organisation structure Supports the configuration of the company, employee accounts, company tree, departments, positions, work groups, and assignment maps, all of which are used across other workspaces.
Finance
General ledger Supports the chart of accounts shared by all the branches (if any), as well as ledgers, budgets, analytical reports, recurring transactions, document batches, and various configurations of the financial year and periods, including custom financial year and periods.
Cash management Provides support for cash accounts, payment methods, reconciliation statements, bank deposits, funds transfers, cash flow forecasts, and credit card processing.
Supplier ledger Provides support for supplier accounts (including those for VAT agencies), payment terms, documents of multiple types, configurable approval of documents for payment and recurring transactions.
Customer ledger Provides support for customer accounts, documents of multiple types, recurring transactions, credit card processing, tracking of card expiration dates, configurable rules of payment auto-application, aging of credits, statements, credit management, and write-offs.
VAT Gives you the ability to create and maintain VAT (of multiple types), VAT zones, and VAT categories; supports automatic VAT calculation and VAT reporting.
Configuration
Common settings

Enables the use of segmented keys (for GL accounts, subaccounts, and stock items, and for customer, supplier, and employee accounts) and the creation of number series, which are used for automatic generation of reference numbers for batches and for documents of various types.

Also, this workspace supports attributes—optional and required UI elements to be used in many workspaces for entering and storing additional properties of various objects.
User security Supports roles, which control user access to modules, workspaces, windows, UI elements, and records. Also, this workspace provides the means for managing local user accounts, password policies for local users, security audit options, and encryption certificates.
Document management Supports internal wikis and synchronisation with external files. Also, this workspace supports storing files internally and externally and routing imported files between the storage locations.
Email Supports configuration and management of the system email accounts for incoming and outgoing emails. This workspace also supports built-in incoming mail processing, which can be adjusted for the business needs of your company.
System
Management Supports snapshots, locales, and the management of application updates.
Integration Enables the import and export of data in accordance with user-defined scenarios.
Customisation Provides a means for application customisation and management of the sitemap.
## Functionalities for the Finance module The features available for the Finance module are briefly described below. |Functionality|Related functionality|Overview| |---|---|---| |**Standard financials**||This group of functionalities is available in all editions of Visma Net. You can enable any of the functionalities in this group—they are included in any license.| ||**Multi-branch support**|Provides support for multiple branches. Branches can be configured for points of sale(locations) as well as for separate legal entities within your organisation, to ensure better visibility into various layers of financial operations.| ||**Business account locations**|Supports multiple locations for supplier and customer accounts.| ||**Multi-currency accounting**|Adds the Currency management workspace and support of the following: multiple currencies across the workspaces; automatic calculation of the realised gains and losses and rounding amounts on foreign currency transactions; revaluation of foreign currency accounts; and translation of the base currency accounts into any foreign currency for reporting.| ||**Volume pricing**|Gives you the ability to define price tiers for item quantities.| ||**Expense reclassification**|Supports the two-stage release of Supplier ledger documents: **pre-release**, when a data entry clerk enters an invoice or a quick check; and **release**, when an authorised accountant reviews a pre-released document, specifies the correct expense accounts (and subaccounts), and releases the document.| ||**VAT entry from the General ledger workspace**|Gives users the ability to specify VAT for documents entered in the General ledger workspace.| ||**VAT reporting**|Enables accounting and reporting for any value-added tax (VAT) in the system: in theVAT workspace, enables the **VAT** option; and in the Supplier ledger andCustomer ledger workspaces, adds UI elements that can be used for automatic calculation of VAT amounts and for VAT reporting.| ||**Invoice rounding**|Provides automatic rounding of invoice amounts in the Supplier ledger workspace and invoice amounts in the Customer ledger workspace. For details, see: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/).| ||**ROT and RUT deduction**|Adds a window and multiple UI elements in the Customer ledger workspace that you can useto create and process documents eligible for ROT and RUT deductions.| |**Advanced financials**||This group of functionalities is not available in the standard edition of Visma Net. You can enable any of the functionalities in this group if the group of functionalities is available in your system.| ||**Subaccounts**|Gives you the ability to use subaccounts in addition to accounts. The subaccounts are used to detail account balances, for more granular financial analysis. For details, see: [Example of a subaccount definition](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/example-of-a-subaccount-definition/).| ||**General ledger allocation templates**|Enables the creation and maintenance of allocation templates (which define how the allocations are to be performed) and the automatic application of allocations according to your definitions.| ||**Inter-branch transactions**|Makes possible the automatic generation of inter-branch transactions.| ||**General ledger consolidation**|Provides consolidating data from specific branches of subsidiaries (or consolidation units) into specific branch of the parent company. You can configure which data should be consolidated and how exactly the data should be consolidated. After that, you can consolidate the data as often as you need within each financial period.| ||**Translation of financial statements**|Gives you the ability to translate amounts from the base currency to another currency at the account balance level. Translation can be used for reporting purposes in any foreign currency. For details, see: [About translations](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-translations/about-translations/).| ||**Customer and supplier discounts**|Gives you the ability to maintain customer and supplier discounts in your system: import them or enter them manually, and update them. The system automatically applies the supplier discounts to purchase orders (or invoices if the **Logistics** functionality is not enabled)and customer discounts to sales orders (or invoices if the Inventoryfunctionality is not enabled) when a user saves the document. When the functionality is disabled, you can enter the discount percent or amount for any line on data entry windows, but the discount amounts cannot be posted separately to a discount account. For more information, see: [Maintain supplier discounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/) [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/).| ||**Commissions**|Makes it possible to configure commission calculations that support your company's policies.| ||**Overdue charges**|Gives you the ability to configure additional charges to be applied to the outstanding balances of customers who are consistently paying too late or not paying in full.| ||**Dunning letter management**|Provides you with the ability to generate dunning letters to notify customers about their overdue documents. You can select how you want to manage a level of dunning letter: by customer or by overdue document.| ||**Deferred revenue management**|Adds the Deferred revenue workspace and integrates it with the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces, so that the users can assign various documents to deferral schedules for recognising portions of the deferred amounts.| ||**Parent-child customer relationship**|Makes it possible to configure parent-child relationships between business accounts of the **Customer** and **Customer and supplier** types. A parent-child relationship includes the ability for the parent account to pay invoices of the child account, to generate consolidated statements and reports, and to view a consolidated balance for a parent account that includes the balances of its child accounts. The relationship can be removed at any time.| |**Contract management**||This functionality provides the support of contracts, including case processing and contract invoicing. It adds windows related to contract processing to the Customer ledger workspace and enables integration of the Customer ledger and the Time and expenses workspaces.| |**Fixed asset management**||This functionality adds the Fixed assets workspace, which can be used to create and manage fixed assets through their useful life, from acquisition to disposal. The Fixed assets workspace integrates with the Requisitions and Purchases workspaces (in the Inventory module) to facilitate converting purchases into fixed assets without the need to re-enter data.| ||**Multiple work shifts**|Can be selected only if the **Payroll** functionality is selected. Enables shift codes that can be used by users to report time they spent on activities when working on a particular shift.| ## Monitoring and automation group of functionalities The features in this group enable the monitoring of user activities and the automation of workflows.This group of features is not available in the standard edition of Acumatica ERP.
Functionality Overview
Time reporting on activity Extends the functionality of the Time and expenses workspace by making it possible to track the time your organisation’s employees spend on activities that can be included int ime cards.
Row-level security Adds the Row-level security workspace, which enables the management and administration of user access (through restriction groups) to particular system records and objects to which users have access by their roles. For details, see: About restriction groups in Visma Net.
Scheduled processing Makes it possible for you to configure automatic processing of documents that require significant time and system resources. You can define a schedule for such automatic processing—for instance, at times when there are no employees at work, such as weekends or nights. For more information, see:About scheduled processing.
Change notifications Gives you the ability to configure notifications about specific changes in documents so that users of the system can sign up to receive emails sent by the system when specific changes are made to particular documents. For more information, see:About change notifications on data entry windows.
Workflow automation Provides the ability to customise workflows by means of automation steps, and gives you the ability to back up and store automation definitions that include all the automation steps defined in the application.
## Functionalities for the Inventory module The Distribution suite, once enabled, includes the following modules with the basic functionality described below: Inventory : Stock items with the ability to use attributes to store additionalproperties; physical counts; valuation methods; multiple global and item-specific units ofmeasure and conversions; and configurable on-screen availability data. Sales Orders : Predefined order types, including blanket and drop ship orders,flexible order processing workflow (which includes sending orders by email or printing themand sending them by postal mail), generation of pick lists, and shipment processing. Purchase Orders : Purchase orders of multiple types, vendor catalogs, defaultprices that are updated from current documents, landed cost tracking, and barcode support. Also, for the Distribution suite, the following two groups of features are available:Standard Distribution and Advanced Distribution.The features of these groups are brieflydescribed below. |Functionality|Related functionality|Overview| |---|---|---| |**Standard logistics**||This group of functionalities includes the functionalities associated with the standard functionality of the Inventory module. You can enable any of the functionalities in this group and disable the functionalities that will not be used in your implementation if this group is included in your license.| ||**Multiple units of measure**|Gives you the ability to define for each stock item multiple units of measure (UoMs) and the rules for conversion between them. With this functionality not enabled, for each stock item,you can define only the base unit of measure that is used for purchasing the item, selling it, and calculating the available quantity of it. For more information, see:[About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/).| ||**Blanket and standard purchase orders**|Makes possible the processing of blanket purchase orders—orders that can be fulfilled through multiple normal orders. Also, adds the standard purchase orders—orders that include the products purchased regularly in the same quantities and that can be processed repeatedly.| ||**Drop shipments**|Gives you the ability to create and track orders for goods that should be delivered directly to a customer location.| |**Advanced logistics**||This group of functionalities includes those that are associated with the advanced functionality of the Inventory module. You can enable any of the functionalities in this group if the group of functionalities is included in your license.| ||**Lot and serial tracking**|Enables you to track stock items by lot or serial numbers and by expiration dates.Visma Net provides flexible numbering schemes for lot and serial numbers and the ability to track different products differently. For more information, see: [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/).| ||**Multiple warehouses**|Adds the ability to configure multiple warehouses. For more information, see: [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/).| ||**Multiple warehouse locations**|Supports multiple locations for each warehouse. Some of these locations can be reserved for specific inventory transactions, such as receipts, issues, and returns. For more information, see: [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/).| ||**Inventory replenishment**|Automates the generation of purchase and transfer orders for replenishment of stock items for your warehouse or warehouses. This functionality can be enabled only if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled. For more information, see: [About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/).| ||**Automatic Packaging**|Makes it possible for the system to calculate the optimal set of fields for each sales order or a consolidated shipment. The system selects the fields based on the list of carrier fields, the item packaging options, and the item quantities on the document. For more information, see: [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/).| ||**Kit assembly**|Makes possible the creation of kit specifications and kit assembly and disassembly according to specifications. For more information on kits, see: [About accounting for kits](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-accounting-for-kits/).| ||**Advanced stock taking count**|Supports physical counts by item IDs, item classes, user-defined cycles, movement classes, or ABC codes. For information, see: [About overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/).| ||**Sales order to purchase order link**|Supports sales order fulfilment by back ordering. For details, see: [About sales orders with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations/).| ||**Custom order types**|Enables the creation of custom types of sales orders. For more information, see:[About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/).| ||**Purchase requisitions**|Adds the Purchase requisitions workspace to the Inventory module. This workspace can be used to create requisition requests and requisitions, perform bidding to find the best prices, and control budget compliance.| ## Other functionalities These features are available as add-on features. |Functionality||Overview| |---|---|---| |**Project management**||This functionality adds the Projects module, which can be integrated with certain basic workspaces(General ledger, Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, Cash management, and Time and expenses) and add-on workspaces (Customer management, Purchases, Inventory, and Inventory). The Projects module includes project costing and project invoicing.|

Related pages

Windows

 About multiple numbering series /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-multiple-numbering-series page Visma Net uses number series to automatically generate IDs for new objects of a certain type when they are created, whether manually by users or automatically by the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About multiple numbering series Visma Net uses number series to automatically generate IDs for new objects of a certain type when they are created, whether manually by users or automatically by the system. Numbering sequences are used, for example, for customer invoices, supplier invoices, inventory receipts and issues, Supplier ledger and Customer ledger payments, batches, schedules, and allocations. You can use the predefined number series without changes, or you can modify them to suit your organisation's needs. Also, you can create new sequences. If your organisation has branches, number series for documents associated with branches can be split into subsequences that have different prefixes or specify different ranges of numbers. ## Number series parameters Each number series is defined by parameters set on the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window. The system uses the following parameters to calculate the numbers it assigns to new objects: Start number : The number to be used first in this number series. Last number : The number most recently assigned to an object in this number series. Each time the system assigns a number to a new object, it updates this value. Numbering step : The increment used in the number series to generate the next number; for each new number, this increment is added to the rightmost numerical portion of the last number used. End number : The number to be used last in this number series. You can set other parameters on the window, too, such as the following: Start date : The date when this sequence will take effect. For sequences that include subsequences, you can specify the date when each subsequence first becomes effective. New number symbol : An alphanumeric string (of up to 15 characters) used to indicate that a new number for an object will be assigned. Warning number : The minimum number that generates a warning that available numbers will be used up soon. When this number (and each number that exceeds it) is assigned, the system displays a warning. If the end number is near or has been reached for a number series, you should create a new sequence in the appropriate workspace and assign it to this object type. ## Format of IDs Visma Net generates numbers or object IDs for a number series as alphanumeric strings. The precise format of the numbers is defined by the number series parameters, such as the start number and the end number, set on the Number series window. The same number of characters must be used for all parameters in a number series; the system issues a warning if the format of any parameter differs. A number series may have numbers that start with a **prefix**, an alphanumeric string that ends in an alphabetic character. The system automatically detects a prefix in the start number when alphabetic characters are used. If a prefix is used, auto-numbering is applied to only the rightmost numeric positions. The same prefix must be used for the start, warning, and end numbers. Suppose, for example, that you want to create sequences to automatically assign meaningful IDs to sales orders of different types. For different order types, different two-letter abbreviations are used. For general sales orders (the **SO** type), you might set the start number as **S0000001**, the warning number as **S0995000**, and the end number as **S0999999**. For cash sales orders, you might set the start number, warning number, and end number as **CS000001**, **CS997000**, and **CS999999**, respectively. Note that all these numbers use the same prefix followed by six digits. ## Subsequences A number series may consist of any number of sequences or subsequences, each intended for a different branch or starting on a specific date. Subsequences can be helpful when, for example, an organisation uses different invoice numbers in each season of the year. If the organisation has branches, it is convenient when document reference numbers indicate a specific branch of origin by a branch-specific prefix or range of numbers. Each subsequence is defined by a branch, start date, start number, end number, numbering step, and start date. Numbers are assigned as follows: 1. The first new object is assigned the start number depending on the branch and the start date. (The start number is also assigned to the last used number.) 1. The rightmost numerical portion of the second number and subsequent numbers for the same branch is equal to that of the last number plus the numbering step. The last number value is updated. 1. When the start date specified for any subsequence occurs, the system switches to using that subsequence. The numbers available in one subsequence cannot be used in another subsequence of the same sequence. ## Usage tips Follow these tips when you define number series: + Objects get numbers in the order in which they are created. Thus, if you use the same number series to identify objects of different types, successive numbers can be assigned to objects of different types. The disadvantage of this approach is that objects' IDs won't help you distinguish between their types. + If you use similar number series for different document or objects that might be listed on the same window, duplicate numbers may occur, which could confuse users. It is better to define a number series so that the start number of one sequence exceeds the end number of the previous one, or to use different prefixes for each number series. These approaches ensure that duplicate numbers will not occur.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About input validation options /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-input-validation-options page You can create input masks to help users enter data in a specific format for such elements as phone numbers, postcodes, and VAT ID numbers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About input validation options You can create input masks to help users enter data in a specific format for such elements as phone numbers, postcodes, and VAT ID numbers. You can create input masks to help users enter data in a specific format for such elements as phone numbers, postcodes, and VAT ID numbers. Also, you can use regular expressions to validate that the values the user enters not only comply with the input format but also meet specific requirements. You create input masks by using the following symbols: C : Designates any character A : Designates any letter or digit L : Designates a letter only \# : Designates a digit only ? : Designates an optional letter 9 : Designates an optional digit You can also use the following control symbols (which are not place-holders) to affect the characters that follow them: > : Requires that all letters that follow this symbol are an upper case letter. If a lower case letter is typed, the system will automatically convert it to upper case. Subsequent > symbols will actually toggle the upper case. For example: The mask >LL>LL>LL will cause the upper case to be turned off for the second LL characters, but then turned back on for the third LL characters. < : Requires that all letters that follow this symbol are a lower case letter. If an upper case letter is typed, the system converts it to lower case. Subsequent < characters will actually toggle the lower case functionality. For example: The mask <LL<LL<LL will cause the lower case to be turned off for the second LL characters, but then turned back on the third LL characters. \ : Makes the next character be displayed literally, as it is. "" : Makes characters within the quotation marks be displayed literally. ## Examples of masks and regular expressions The following sections provide examples of masks and regular expressions you might use.
Object Description
United States phone numbers

The input mask (###) ###-#### will force users to enter the three-digit area code in parentheses, with other seven digits separated by a hyphen ( - ) in two groups: one with three digits and the other with four digits.

If certain input values will always have the same characters, just type the characters within the mask, as is done with the parentheses and hyphen in the previous example.
United States postcodes If you want users to enter a five-digit ZIP code followed by a mandatory four-digit extension, use the mask #####-####. If, however, you want to make the four-digit extension optional, use a regular expression, such as /^\d{5}([\-]\d)?$/;
Canadian postcodes

The mask >L#L #L# ensures that the postcode will be entered as two three-character groups separated by a space:

  • The first group contains an upper case letter and a digit, and an upper case letter.
  • The second group contains a digit, an upper case letter, and a digit.

Only the following letters are actually allowed: A, B, C, E, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, S, T, V, X, and Y.

The regular expression below ensures that the postcode will comply with this rule too:

/^\s*[a-ceghj-npr-tvxy]\d[a-z](\s)?\d[a-z]\d\s*$/i;
United Kingdom postcodes

The format of U.K. postcodes may be represented by a set of masks:

  • L# #LL
  • L## #LL
  • L## #LL
  • LL# #LL
  • LL## #LL
  • LL#L #LL

Some letters (CIKMOV) are not allowed in these codes.

Because only one mask is allowed, you can create a regular expression such as the following for UK postcodes: [[A-Z]{1,2}[0-9R][0-9A-Z]? [0-9][A-Z-[CIKMOV]]{2};.
## Password masks and regular expressions In some cases, you may need to set a regular expression to enforce the company's password policies. For example: A-regular expression could define valid and invalid characters, specific formats (for example, the password must begin with a letter), or minimum and maximum password lengths. Below are some examples of regular expressions and their explanations: + `^(?=.*\d).$ /-` The password must be four to eight characters long and include at least one numeric digit. + `^[a-zA-Z]\w{3,9}$` The password must be four to ten characters long, the first character must be a letter, and no character is permitted except letters, numbers, and underscores.

Related pages

Windows

 About input masks /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-input-masks page Input masks may be created to help users enter data in the required format. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About input masks Input masks may be created to help users enter data in the required format. Input masks may be created to help users enter data in the required format. Masks are used, for example, for phone numbers, postcodes, and VAT registrations. Moreover, regular expressions can be created to validate the entered values, because the values for some elements must meet not only input format requirements but also specific rules. For more details on the format of masks, see: [About input validation options](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-input-validation-options/). ## Postcodes Input masks for postcodes are set in the [Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s/) window. They are used for input validation in the following windows: + [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) + [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) + [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) ## VAT registrations Input masks for tax registrations are set in the [Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s/) window. They are used for input validation in the following windows: + [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) + [VAT categories (TX205500)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-categories-tx205500/) + [VAT zones (TX206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-zones-tx206000/) + [Buildings (CS205010)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/buildings-cs205010/) + [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) + [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) + [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) About attributes /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-attributes page In Visma Net, you can define attributes for flexible, meaningful classification of customers and items in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About attributes In Visma Net, you can define attributes for flexible, meaningful classification of customers and items in your company. In Visma Net, you can define attributes for flexible, meaningful classification of customers and items in your company. An attribute is a property (such as age or industry) that enables you to specify additional information for objects in the system. Attributes are defined in the context of a class, which is a grouping of the business accounts, projects, and stock and non-stock items by one or more of their properties. For each class, you can define a list of attributes to gather class-specific information about members of the class. For example: Attributes may carry the information about product brand, manufacturer, lead age, gender, or industry. You can use attributes in the following Visma Net workspaces: Inventory : In the Inventory workspace, attributes store additional properties of stock and non-stock items. Projects : In the Projects workspace, you use attributes to define additional elements to gather and store information about projects, tasks, and account groups. ## Attributes in classes A class contains a set of attributes that must be available in any instance of the class. For example: Any lead of a given class must contain all the attributes defined for the lead class. For each attribute in a given class, you can specify whether the attribute is required. When creating an instance of the class, you must define the values for all the required attributes. You specify the attributes for a class by selecting the attributes from the attributes available in the system. If you need an attribute that is not available in the system, you can use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window to create the attribute, as well as any other attributes you may need. Then you will be able to select the new attribute in any class. ## Attribute types For each attribute created by using the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window, you can specify its type: Text : A field into which the user can type text Combo : A field users can use to type or select options Multi select combo : A field where users can select multiple options Check box : A check box users can select or clear Date time : An element for selecting date and time For a **Text** attribute, you can specify an input validation rule based on an input mask or a regular expression. Input validation ensures that the entered data is valid and usable. For details, see: [About input validation options](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-input-validation-options/). For a **Combo** and **Multi select combo** attribute, you can create a list of possible values, so that the user can select (respectively) one value or multiple values from the drop-down list. You can also specify the order of the values listed. About ID segmentation /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-id-segmentation page General ledger accounts (and subaccounts, if applicable), as well as other objects in the system, have IDs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About ID segmentation General ledger accounts (and subaccounts, if applicable), as well as other objects in the system, have IDs. General ledger accounts (and subaccounts, if applicable), as well as other objects in the system, have IDs. An **ID** is a unique alphanumeric string assigned to an object for its identification. IDs are typically **segmented**: composed of segments whose values help users remember the meanings of IDs. For example: General ledger subaccount IDs could contain the following segments: a two-character regional branch code, a one-digit department number, and a three-character product type. Thus, the subaccount ID **CA-1-T32** would denote a subaccount of the California branch (**CA**), department **1**, related to the product **T32**. In Visma Net, a **segmented key** is a system entity that holds the definition of the structure of IDs for a certain type of objects and serves as a template when a user creates an ID for a new object of the type. ## Built-in segmented keys Visma Net provides the following built-in segmented keys, which can be used only for the intended types of accounts or objects: ACCOUNT : Used for General ledger accounts ACCGROUP : Used for account groups for project management BIZACCT : Used for business accounts in the system; serves as the parent key for customer, supplier, and employee account IDs CASHACCOUNT : Used for branch-specific cash accounts based on a GL account. CONTRACT : Used for contract reference numbers; inherits its structure from the **PROJECT** key CONTRACTITEM : Used for contract items CUSTOMER : Used for customer numbers; inherits its structure from the **BIZACCT** key EMPLOYEE : Used for company employees; inherits the structure from the BIZACCT key INVENTORY : Used for stock items INSUBITEM : Used for subitems of stock items INSITE : Used for warehouses INLOCATION : Used for warehouse locations LOCATION : Used for customer and supplier locations MLISTCD : Used for mail lists PROJECT : Used for projects PROTASK : Used for project tasks SALESPER : Used for salesperson accounts SUBACCOUNT : Used for General ledger subaccounts TMCONTRACT : Used for contract templates SUPPLIER : Used for supplier numbers; inherits its structure from the **BIZACCT** key If your organisation requires new types of objects in a specific Visma Net workspace, you can create new segmented keys. ## Segmentation options To configure segmented keys, use the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. During initial system setup, you must define the following for each segmented key: + How many segments the key has + What is the length of each segment + What is the type of each segment + Whether the segment should be validated on input Consider the following factors as you decide how to configure each key: + You may define as many segments as you want as long as the total length of all segments does not exceed the maximum length. The maximum ID length differs for different segmented keys. The total does not include the user-defined character (such as a hyphen) used to separate the segments when the object IDs are displayed. + An ID may be non-segmented; that is, it may consist of only one segment. + One segment per key can be defined as **auto-numbered**, which means that a number series is assigned to it. + If you add a segment to or remove one from a segmented key after IDs have been created, you have to update the objects associated with this segmented key. Otherwise these actions may have unpredictable results. Once you have configured the segmented key for a type of objects, use the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window to populate the list of values for segments that will not be auto-numbered. When you add new values for a segment on the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window, the system automatically converts the value (if such an option was selected) and checks whether the value meets the input mask requirements. ## Inheritance in relation to keys In some windows, users can select objects of different types from the same lookup list. For example: When preparing time cards, employees can specify either a project or a contract on which they spent their work hours. For this, IDs of such objects should have similar structures. To enforce similar structures of IDs for two or more types of objects, inheritance of segmented keys (on which IDs are based) is used. One segmented key (a **child** key) inherits its structure from another segmented key (a **parent** key) means that the child key has the same number of segments as the parent key, and all its segments have the same lengths as the respective segments of the parent key. By default, the child key will have the same structure as the parent key, and the segment values specified for the parent key will be available for IDs based on the child key. However, you can make IDs based on a child key distinguishable at a glance from IDs based on the parent key in the following ways: + For an alphanumeric segment, you can enter different sets of values for the parent and child key segments. + For an auto-numbered segment, you can assign number series with different properties—for example, with different prefixes. In the above example, the **CONTRACT** segmented key inherits its structure from the **PROJECT** segmented key. ## Object creation After the segmented key is configured and its segments are populated, a user can create an object of the type, entering its ID by selecting values for each of its segments. For example, General ledger accounts are created in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window, subaccounts are created in the [Subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/) window, and warehouses are created in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. When a user creates an account, subaccount, or other object, the user will see the input mask (for example, ––/–/–––, with the slash used as a separator) that shows the number of segments and the length of each. ## Segment validation for creating accounts and subaccounts You can configure input validation options, described below, to reduce some input errors that may occur when IDs are composed of segment values. Although validation can be used for any segmented key, this section describes how validation options work for General ledger accounts and subaccounts. For segments with the **Validate** option selected in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, users select from the predefined segment values. With this option selected, when a user creates a new account or subaccount, the user does the following: 1. Sees the input mask with the character specified as a separator for the key (such as ––/–/–––) 1. Double-clicks the segment to open the list of possible values, or points at any segment and presses F3 1. Selects the value for the segment from the list If the **Validate** option is not selected for a segment, users can enter new values while they create accounts or subaccounts. The new values will be validated only in accordance with the segment definition: the type of string and its length. When users enter a string in a segment of the ID, the string will not be added to the list of segment values. If the General ledger account has a one-segment ID, segment validation cannot be turned off and users can create accounts only by selecting them from the list of segment values. ## Validation of accounts and subaccounts on data entry windows Once created, accounts and subaccounts can be used on various documents in the General ledger, Supplier ledger, and Customer ledger workspaces, and can be selected on inquiry and processing windows. Visma Net also provides a validation option for using subaccounts. The **On-the-fly entry** check box (in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window) controls how the user specifies subaccounts: + If the check box is not selected, the user can specify subaccounts only by selecting them from the list of available subaccounts. Thus, before subaccounts can be used on data entry windows, they must be created on the [Subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/) window. + If the check box is selected, subaccounts on data entry windows can be entered segment by segment; the user selects each segment value from the appropriate list of predefined segment values. New segment values cannot be created during data entry. New subaccounts created on the fly are not added to the list of subaccounts. Selecting the **On-the-fly entry** check box is helpful when the number of segments and the number of values in each segment could produce so many combinations that it would be labour-intensive to enter all subaccounts in advance. The **On-the-fly entry** option is also used for subitems defined by the **INSUBITEM** key.

Related pages

Windows

 ig-window-toolbar-con /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/ig-window-toolbar-con section The window toolbar, available on most windows, is located near the top of the window, under the window title bar. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # ig-window-toolbar-con The window toolbar, available on most windows, is located near the top of the window, under the window title bar. ## About the window toolbar The window toolbar, available on most windows, is located near the top of the window, under the window title bar. It may include standard and window-specific buttons. You use the standard buttons on the window toolbar to navigate through objects and entities that were created by using the current window, insert or delete an object or entity, use the clipboard, save the data you have entered, or cancel your work on the window. In addition to standard buttons, a window toolbar on a particular window may include window-specific buttons. These buttons usually provide navigation to other windows, take specific actions, and perform modifications or processing related to the functionality of the window. ### Standard window toolbar buttons The following table lists the standard buttons of the window toolbar. A window toolbar may include some or all of these buttons: |Button|Icon|Description| |---|---|---| |**Save**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Save](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Save.png)|Saves the changes made to the object or entity.| |**Cancel**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Cancel](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Cancel.png)|Depending on the context, does one of the following: + Discards any unsaved changes you have made to objects or entities and retrieves the last saved version. + Clears all changes and restores the default settings.| |**Add record**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Add_record](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Add_record.png)|Clears any values you have specified on the window, restores any default values, and initiates the creation of a new object or entity.| |**Clipboard**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Clipboard](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Clipboard.png)|Provides menu commands to do the following: + **Copy**: Copy the selected object or entity to the clipboard. + **Paste**: Paste an object, entity, or template from the clipboard. + **Save as template**: Create a template based on the selected object or entity. + **Reset to default**: Discard all changes that have been made to the settings of the predefined generic inquiry and reset the settings of the generic inquiry to the default settings (which are stored in the System tenant). + **Import from XML**: Import an object, entity, or template from an.xml file. + **Export to XML**: Export the selected object or entity to an.xml file.| |**Delete**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Delete](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Delete.png)|Deletes the currently selected object or entity, clears any values you've specified on the window, and restores default values. You can delete a document that is not linked with another document.| |**Go to first record**|![form_toolbar_buttons_First](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_First.png)|Displays the first object or entity (in the list of objects or entities of the specific type) and its details.| |**Go to previous record**|![form_toolbar_buttons_previous](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_previous.png)|Displays the previous object or entity and its details.| |**Go to next record**|![form_toolbar_buttons_next](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_next.png)|Displays the next object or entity and its details.| |**Go to last record**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Last](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Last.png)|Displays the last object or entity (in the list of objects or entities of the specific type) and its details.| |**Schedules**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Schedule](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Schedule.png)|Gives you the ability to schedule the processing.| ### Inquiry window toolbar buttons Visma Net inquiry windows present the data in a tabular format. These windows can be designed by a user with the appropriate access rights by using the Generic inquiry tool. User guide), or can be initially configured in your system. A toolbar of an inquiry window contains both the standard window toolbar buttons (described in the table above) and additional buttons described below. |Button|Icon|Description| |---|---|---| |**Fit to screen**|![Icons_Fit_to_screen](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Fit_to_screen.png)|Expands the window to fit on the screen and adjusts the column widths proportionally.| |**Export to Excel**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Excel](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Excel.png)|Exports the data to an Excel file. For more information, see: n the Visma Net User guide.| |**Filter settings**|![Icons_Add_Filter](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Add_Filter.png)|Opens the **Filter settings dialog box**, which you can use to define a new filter. After the filter has been created and saved, the corresponding tab appears on the table.| Enable or disable functionalites /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable functionalites About enabling functionalities /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/about-enabling-functionalities page After you install a new blank instance of Visma Net, most of the product functionalities are disabled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About enabling functionalities After you install a new blank instance of Visma Net, most of the product functionalities are disabled. After you install a new blank instance of Visma Net, most of the product functionalities are disabled. When you sign in to a new Visma Net instance, the only window you can access is the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, which you use to enable the functionalities in accordance with the license you have bought. You can start implementing and using a functionality only after it has been enabled. Only after you enable the functionality do all functionality-related workspaces, windows, and individual elements appear on the interface. You can also use the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window to disable individual functionalities in Visma Net. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you **not** disable any functionality after it has been enabled and used in the live system; this may cause unexpected results, including data loss. ## Enable or disable functionalities 1. Go to the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. On the window toolbar, click **Modify**. 1. Select the functionalities that you want to enable or disable by selecting or clearing the corresponding check boxes in the list of functionalities. 1. On the toolbar, click **Enable**. For more information about specific functionalities you can enable in Visma Net, see: [Overview of the functionalities](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/overview-of-the-functionalities/).

Related pages

Windows

 Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000 page You can use this window to enable functionalities of the current instance of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) You can use this window to enable functionalities of the current instance of Visma Net. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The options you see in this window depend on the workspaces and functionalities licensed for your company. ## What to do from this window + [Activate pre-booking of invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/activate-pre-booking-of-invoices/) + [Enable or disable customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-customer-discounts/) + [Enable or disable supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts/) + [Enable or disable overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-overdue-charges/) + [Enable or disable dunning letter management](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-dunning-letter-management/) + [Enable or disable ROT and RUT deduction](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-rot-and-rut-deduction/) + [Enable or disable manual VAT entry mode](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-manual-vat-entry-mode/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Change Gives you the ability to change the set of the selected functionalities by selecting or clearing the check boxes of functionalities as needed.
Enable Saves your changes and enables the currently selected functionalities.
## Elements
Element Description
Status

The status of the currently selected functionality set. The following statuses are possible:

Pending activation
You have modified the functionality set but have not enabled the functionalities. In this state, the window settings do not reflect the actual set of functionalities available in Visma Net.
Validated
All the functionalities selected in the window are enabled. In this state, the window settings reflect the actual set of functionalities available in your instance of Visma Net.
## The Functionality list You can modify the list of functionalities enabled for your company in Visma Net. To modify the list, click **Modify** in the window toolbar and use the check boxes to the left of each functionality to select the functionalities. To enable the selected functionalities, click **Enable** in the window toolbar.
Column Description
Finance An informational check box that is used to group the functionalities for the Finance module. The Finance module includes the standard and advanced functionalities and various add-on functionalities. The Finance module includes the core financial workspaces, including General ledger, Cash management, Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, and VAT.
Standard Financials

An informational check box that is used to group the functionalities associated with the standard functionality of the Finance module. You can enable only the functionalities that your organisation will use.

Note

This group of functionalities is available in all editions of Visma Net.
Multi-branch support A check box that you use to enable the Multi-branch support functionality. With this functionality enabled, you can create and maintain multiple branches in your instance of Visma Net.
Business account locations

A check box that you use to enable the Business account locations functionality. This functionality supports multiple locations for supplier and customer accounts.

For more information, see: Sales invoices (AR301000)
Multi-currency accounting

A check box that you use to enable the Multi-currency accounting functionality.

This functionality enables the Currency management workspace, which you can use to define multiple currencies other than the base currency. This functionality also enables the automatic calculation of gains and losses on foreign currency transactions and gives you the ability to revalue the foreign currency accounts.
Volume pricing A check box that you use to enable the Volume pricing functionality. By enabling this functionality, you can define price tiers based on item quantities.
Expense reclassification

A check box that you use to enable the Expense reclassification functionality.

If your company’s expense processing procedure uses multiple steps, you can enable this functionality to have the invoices released in two stages: pre-release, when a data entry clerk enters an invoice and release, when an authorised accountant reviews a pre-released document and specifies the correct expense accounts and subaccounts and releases the document.

For more information, see: About support for expense reclassification
VAT entry from general ledger A check box that you use to enable the VAT entry from general ledger functionality. By enabling this feature, you can create the VAT-related transactions directly in the general ledger. The VAT amount and taxable amount will be calculated automatically by the system for the corresponding journal entries.
VAT reporting

A check box that you use to enable the VAT reporting functionality.

Once you enable this functionality, you will get access to all VAT reports necessary for VAT filing. You should enable this functionality only if you need to maintain VAT accounting.
Net/gross entry mode

A check box that you use to enable the Net/gross entry mode functionality.

Once you enable this functionality, you will be able to specify the VAT calculation mode, which the system will use for computing a VAT amount in a document, when you enter a document in the system manually. Depending on the specified mode, you can enter either VAT-inclusive amounts in document detail lines or VAT-exclusive amounts in document detail lines.

You will also be able to activate the tax amount validation functionality in a document that you enter.
Manual VAT entry mode A check box that you use to enable the manual VAT entry mode functionality. To use it, you also have to create a VAT zone for manual VAT and assign it to a supplier.
Invoice rounding

A check box that you use to enable the Invoice rounding functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can configure the rules for rounding invoice amounts in the Supplier ledger workspace and invoice amounts in Customer ledger workspace. By using this functionality, you can also configure the precision for rounding the amounts of invoices and invoices in those workspaces.

For more information, see: About rounding of document amounts
ROT and RUT deduction

A check box that you use to enable the ROT and RUT deduction functionality.

Enabling this functionality adds the Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000) window and multiple UI elements in the Customer ledger workspace that you can use to create and process documents eligible for ROT and RUT deductions.
General ledger workbooks A check box that you use to activate general ledger workbooks.
Expense integration A check box that you use to activate expense integration.
Manual approval of purchase invoices A check box that you use to activate manual approval of purchase invoices.
B2C service AutoInvoice A check box that you use to activate the B2C service for AutoInvoice.
Journal voucher A check box that you use to activate journal vouchers in the general ledger.
VAT adjustment for import / integration A check box that you use to enable the VAT adjustment for import / integration functionality. You can apply it on sales invoices.
Four eyes principle bank details When this check box is selected, all changes on bank details or creation of a supplier with bank details must be validated by another user.
External invoice inbox

Enabling this will hide all the existing screens/fields/columns/actions related to the existing approval and invoice inbox workflows.

For the time being, this is only used in limited Swedish companies.
Advanced Financials

A check box that you select to enable selection of the functionalities in the Advanced Financials group of functionalities. Also, this check box enables the functionality of time cards.

Note: This group of functionalities is not available in the standard edition of Visma Net.
Subaccounts

A check box that you use to enable the Subaccounts functionality.

When you enable this functionality, you will be able to create and maintain a list of subaccounts for your company. Subaccounts are used for grouping accounts to perform financial analysis.

For more information, see: Example of a subaccount definition
General ledger allocation templates

A check box that you use to enable the General ledger allocation templates functionality.

If this functionality is enabled, you can create and maintain allocation templates (which define how the allocations are to be performed) and perform allocations automatically according to your definitions.
Inter-branch transactions

A check box that you use to enable the Inter-branch transactions functionality.

This functionality gives you the ability to configure automatic generation of inter-branch transactions for each document that involves multiple branches.
General ledger consolidation

A check box that you use to enable the General ledger consolidation functionality.

By using this functionality, you can consolidate data from specific branches of subsidiaries (or consolidation units) into a specific branch of the parent company. You can configure which data should be consolidated and how exactly the data should be consolidated.

After that, you can consolidate the data as often as you need within each financial period.
Translation of financial statements

A check box that you use to enable the Translation of financial statements functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can translate amounts from the base currency to another currency at the account balance level. Translation can be used for reporting purposes in any foreign currency.
Customer and supplier discounts

A check box that you use to enable the Customer and supplier discounts functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can maintain customer and supplier discounts in your system: import them or enter them manually, and update them. The system automatically applies the supplier discounts to purchase orders (or to invoices if the Logistics functionality is not enabled) and customer discounts to sales orders (or invoices if the Logistics functionality is not enabled) when the documents are saved by users.

For more information, see: Maintain supplier discounts - overview and Manage discounts
Commissions

A check box that you use to enable the Commissions functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can configure commission calculations that support your company’s policies.

For more information, see: Manage commissions - overview
Overdue charges

A check box that you use to enable the Overdue charges functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can configure additional charges to be applied to outstanding balances of customers who are consistently paying too late or not paying in full.

For more information, see: About overdue charges
Dunning letter management

A check box that you use to enable the Dunning letter management functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can generate dunning letters to notify customers about their overdue documents. You can select how you want to manage a level of a dunning letter; by customer or by overdue document.

For more information, see: Manage dunning letters - overview
Deferred revenue management

A check box that you use to enable the Deferred revenue management functionality.

This functionality adds the Deferred revenue workspace and integrates it with the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces. With this functionality enabled, you can configure deferral codes and schedules and use them in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces for recognising portions of deferred expenses and revenues according to these schedules. Also, the Deferred revenue workspace provides a wide variety of reports.
Parent-child customer relationship

A check box that you use to enable the Parent-child customer relationship functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can configure parent-child relationships between business accounts of the Customer and Customer and supplier types. A parent-child relationship includes the ability for the parent account to pay invoices of the child account, to generate consolidated statements and reports, and to view a consolidated balance for a parent account that includes the balances of its child accounts. The relationship can be removed at any time.

For more information, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview
Retainage support

A check box that you use to enable the Retainage support functionality.

With this feature enabled, you can create and process invoices in the supplier ledger with retained amounts that will be paid later than the principal amount of documents. Multiple documents are created in the system to process a retainage: the original document (which has retainage withheld) and the retainage document or documents (which reflect the retainage amount to be paid).
Contract management

A check box that you use to enable the Contract management functionality.

This functionality provides support for contracts, including case processing and contract invoicing.

For more information, see: Manage contracts - overview
Fixed asset management

A check box that you use to enable the Fixed asset management functionality.

This functionality adds the Fixed assets workspace. By using the Fixed assets workspace, you can create and manage fixed assets through their useful life, from acquisition to disposal. If the Advanced Logistics functionality is selected, the Fixed assets workspace is fully integrated with your Purchases workspace to facilitate converting purchases into fixed assets without re-entering data.
Logistics

A check box that you use to enable the functionalities in the Logistics group of functionalities.

Enabling this group of functionalities enables the workspaces that are part of the Inventory module: Inventory, Inventory, and Purchases. Also, this group includes the standard and advanced functionalities.
Standard logistics An informational check box that is used to group the functionalities associated with the standard functionality of the Inventory module.
Inventory functionalities A check box that you use to enable the Inventory feature. This feature gives you the ability to maintain stock items in the Inventory workspace and use the Inventory and Purchases of the Inventory and Order management functionality for creating and processing documents that include stock items. If this feature is not included in your license, you can use the workspaces of the Inventory and Order management functionality only for creating and processing documents that include non-stock items and services.
Multiple units of measure

A check box that you use to enable the Multiple units of measure functionality.

By enabling this functionality, you can define for each stock item multiple units of measure (UoMs) that can be used as purchase units, sales units, and the base unit for calculating the item’s available quantity. Also, you can define the rules for conversion between these units. Without this functionality, for each stock item, you can define only the base unit of measure.

For more information, see: About units of measure and conversions
Blanket and standard purchase orders

A check box that you use to enable the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality.

This functionality gives you the ability to process blanket purchase orders (orders that can be fulfilled through multiple normal orders) and standard purchase orders (orders that include the products purchased regularly in the same quantities and that can be processed repeatedly).

For more information, see: About types of purchase orders
Drop shipments

A check box that you use to enable the Drop shipments functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can create and track orders for goods that should be delivered directly to a customer location.

For more information, see: Create a drop-ship order flow
Advanced logistics

A check box that you select to enable selection of the functionalities in the Advanced Logistics group of functionalities. These functionalities provide the advanced functionality for the Inventory module.

Note

This group of functionalities is not available in the standard edition of Visma Net.
Lot and serial tracking

A check box that you use to enable the Lot and serial tracking functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can track stock items by lot or serial numbers and by expiration dates. Visma Net provides flexible numbering schemes for lot and serial numbers and the ability to track different products differently.

For more information, see: About lot and serial number tracking
Multiple warehouses

A check box that you use to enable the Multiple warehouses functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can create a distributed structure of warehouses. Without this functionality, only one warehouse is created by default.

For more information, see: About warehouses and warehouse locations
Multiple warehouse locations

A check box that you use to enable the Multiple warehouse locations functionality.

This functionality, when enabled, supports multiple locations for each warehouse. Some of these locations can be reserved for specific inventory transactions, such as receipts, issues, and returns.

For more information, see: About warehouses and warehouse locations
Inventory replenishment

A check box that you use to enable the Inventory replenishment functionality. his functionality can be enabled only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled.

This functionality enables you to automate replenishment of stock items for your warehouse or warehouses.

For more information, see: About automated replenishment
Automatic packaging

A check box that you use to enable the Automatic packaging functionality.

For more information, see: About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers
Kit assembly

A check box that you use to enable the Kit assembly functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can create kit specifications and perform kit assembly and disassembly according to specifications.

For more information, see: About accounting for kits
Advanced stocktaking

A check box that you use to enable the Advanced stocktaking functionality.

This functionality, when enabled, supports counts by item ID, item classes, user-defined cycles, movement classes, or ABC codes.

For more information, see: About overview of stocktaking options
Sales order to purchase order link

A check box that you use to enable the Sales order to purchase order link functionality.

With this link enabled, you will be able to back order items and to automatically generate purchase and transfer orders to fulfil sales orders.
Excise duty

A check box that you use to enable the Excise duty functionality.

Note

Excise duty is supported for all order types, except orders of the TR type.
Custom order types

A check box that you use to enable the Custom order types functionality.

With this functionality enabled, you can define new types of sales orders.

For more information, see: About custom order types
Project accounting

A check box that you use to enable the Project management functionality.

After you enable the functionality, the system adds the Projects module, which you can integrate with the Time and expenses, Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, Cash management, General ledger, Purchases, Inventory, and Inventory workspaces. The Projects module includes such functionalities as project accounting, project costing, and project invoicing.
Change orders

A check box that you use to enable the Change orders functionality.

Visma Net provides the change order functionality, which you can use to control changes to a project’s budgeted and committed values and control the profitability of every change initiated by a customer. A change order is a document for profitability analysis and an audit trial of changes to the project revenue budget, commitments, and budgeted costs.

Change orders do not alter the original figures of a project directly; they are tracked separately from the original figures for analysis.
Activate pre-booking of invoices /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/activate-pre-booking-of-invoices page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate pre-booking of invoices 1. Go to the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Click **Change**. 1. Find **Finance** - **Standard Financials**. 1. Select the **Expense reclassification** check box. 1. Click **Enable**. > [!NOTE] > To disable this functionality, you perform expense reclassification for all pre-released documents and release them.

Related pages

Tasks

 Enable or disable customer discounts /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-customer-discounts page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable customer discounts 1. Click the **Change** button to activate the list of check boxes in this window. 1. In the **Finance** section, under **Advanced Financials**, locate the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box. 1. Depending on whether you want to enable or disable this function, select or deselect the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box. 1. Click the **Enable** button to save your changes.

Related pages

Tasks

 Enable or disable supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable supplier discounts 1. Go to the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Click the **Change** button to activate the list of check boxes in this window. 1. In the **Finance** section, under **Advanced Financials**, locate the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box. 1. Depending on whether you want to enable or disable this function, select or deselect the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box. 1. Click the **Enable** button to save your changes. Enable or disable manual VAT entry mode /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-manual-vat-entry-mode page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable manual VAT entry mode 1. Go to window [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). 1. Click the **Change** button to activate the list of check boxes in this window. 1. In the **Finance** section, find the **VAT reporting** check box. 1. Below the **Net/gross entry mode** check box, you see the **Manual VAT entry mode** check box. 1. Depending on whether you want to enable or disable this function, select or deselect the **Manual VAT entry mode** check box. 1. Click the **Enable** button to save your changes. Enable or disable dunning letter management /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-dunning-letter-management page Window ID: CS100000 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable dunning letter management Window ID: CS100000 1. Click the **Change** button to activate the list of check boxes in this window. 1. In the **Finance** section, under **Advanced Financials**, find the **Dunning letter management** check box. 1. Depending on whether you want to enable or disable this function, select or deselect the **Dunning letter management** check box. 1. Click the **Enable** button to save your changes. Enable or disable overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-overdue-charges page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable overdue charges 1. Click the **Change** button to activate the list of check boxes in this window. 1. In the **Finance** section, under **Advanced Financials**, find the **Overdue charges** check box. 1. Depending on whether you want to enable or disable this function, select or deselect the **Overdue charges** check box. 1. Click the **Enable** button to save your changes.

Related pages

Tasks

 Countries/counties/postcodes /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/countries-counties-postcodes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Countries/counties/postcodes Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/countries-counties-postcodes/about-countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s page You use this window to store information about countries and counties where your organisation has operations, customers, or suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) You use this window to store information about countries and counties where your organisation has operations, customers, or suppliers. The information you provide here is used to define branches of your company and to create customer and supplier accounts. You identify countries by a two-letter country code in accordance with the ISO 3166 standard. Country information includes the phone code for the country, input masks for postcodes and VAT registration IDs (if required), and information about country administrative units (counties or provinces). You can also track whether VAT registration is required in the country. If you set up input masks and regular expressions for postcodes, users can avoid occasional input errors. This window is also where you set the customer validation settings for AutoInvoice on the **Customer validation** tab. Define an EU country as an Intrastat country /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/countries-counties-postcodes/define-an-eu-country-as-an-intrastat-country section All countries in the European Union have automatically been set as Intrastat countries in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define an EU country as an Intrastat country All countries in the European Union have automatically been set as Intrastat countries in Visma Net. All countries in the European Union have automatically been set as Intrastat countries in Visma Net. If new countries are admitted to the EU, you must to check that the country you are buying from or selling to has been set as an Intrastat country. ## How to set a country as an Intrastat country 1. Go to the [Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s/) window. 1. In the **Country ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the EU country that you are trading with. 1. Select the check box **Intrastat country**. 1. In the **Intrastat reporting country** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the country you are reporting to. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/payment-terms section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Configure multiple-instalment payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/payment-terms/configure-multiple-instalment-payment-terms section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure multiple-instalment payment terms ## Before you start You use the **Payment terms** window to define a particular set of payment terms. For a set of payment terms, you can specify the payment as multiple instalments. To configure payment terms as a single instalment, see [Configure single-instalment payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/payment-terms/configure-single-instalment-payment-terms/). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. In the **Terms ID** field, type the identifier of the payment terms. The ID can have up to six characters. 1. In the **Description** field, type the description of the terms. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select an option for the visibility of these payment terms, that is, whether they are listed as available, so that you can select them: + **All**: You can assign the terms to both suppliers and customers. + **Suppliers**: You can only assign the terms to suppliers. + **Customers**: You can only assign the terms to customers. + **Disabled**: The terms are not available for either suppliers or customers. 1. Go to the **Instalment settings** section. In the **Instalment type** field, select **Multiple**. 1. In the **Instalment method** field, select the instalment method. It determines how the system calculates the instalment amounts. 1. Specify the instalment settings. Do one of the following: + If you selected the Equal parts or VAT in first instalment method: 1. In the **Number of instalments** field, type the number of instalments. 1. In the **Instalment frequency** field, select the instalment frequency. + If you selected the Split by percent in table method, do the following for each instalment: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Days** column, type the number of days from the due date on which this instalment is due. 1. In the **Percent** column, type the percent of the instalment. 1. Go to the **Due day settings** section. In the **Due date type** field, select the due date type. 1. Depending on the due date type you selected, specify the available values. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure single-instalment payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/payment-terms/configure-single-instalment-payment-terms section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure single-instalment payment terms ## Before you start You use the **Payment terms** window to define a particular set of payment terms. For a set of payment terms, you can specify the payment as a single instalment. To configure payment terms as multiple instalments, see [Configure multiple-instalment payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/payment-terms/configure-multiple-instalment-payment-terms/). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. 1. In the **Terms ID** field, type the identifier of the payment terms. The ID can have up to six characters. 1. In the **Description** field, type the description of the terms. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select the visibility of these payment terms, that is, whether they are listed as available, so that you can select them: + **All**: You can assign the terms to both suppliers and customers. + **Suppliers**: You can only assign the terms to suppliers. + **Customers**: You can only assign the terms to customers. + **Disabled**: The terms are not available for either suppliers or customers. 1. Go to the **Instalment settings** section. In the **Instalment type** field, select **Single**. 1. Go to the **Due date settings** section. In the **Due date type** field, select the due date type. 1. Depending on the due date type you selected, specify the available values (if any). 1. Optional: In the **Cash discount settings** section, select a setting for any discount for early payment: 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contacts /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contacts Create a new contact /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/create-a-new-contact section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new contact 1. Go to [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/). If the fields in this window are empty, enter the **Last name** on the **Details** tab. If the fields are not empty, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to renew the fields, then enter the **Last name** on the **Details** tab. 1. **Optional:** Enter the remaining general information in the top part of the window. Visma Net automatically adds the **Contact ID** when you save. 1. On the tabs, add the information you think is necessary. Start with the **Details** tab, and then continue with the remaining tabs. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Change a contact /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/change-a-contact section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change a contact 1. Go to [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/). 1. In the **Contact ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the contact you want to make changes to. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Connect a contact to a company /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/connect-a-contact-to-a-company section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Connect a contact to a company 1. Go to [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/). 1. In the **Contact ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select your contact. 1. In the **Parent account** field on the **Details** tab, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select your parent account. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Copy one contact to several customers or suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/copy-one-contact-to-several-customers-or-suppliers section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Copy one contact to several customers or suppliers 1. Go to the [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) window. 1. Next to the **Contact ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) next to select the contact you want to copy to several customers or suppliers. 1. Click the arrow ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list, select **Copy**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Click the arrow ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list, select **Paste**. 1. In the **Customer/supplier no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer or supplier you want to connect to the contact. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If you want to add more customers or suppliers to the same contact, repeat the procedure.

Related pages

Tasks

 Delete customer contact /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/delete-customer-contact section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete customer contact 1. Go to [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/). 1. In the **Contact ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the contact you want to delete. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to delete the current contact.

Related pages

Tasks

 Common settings windows /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Common settings windows Common settings windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/common-settings-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Common settings windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) [Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s/) [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) Attributes (CS205000) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000 page You use this window to create new attributes or to view the details of existing attributes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Attributes (CS205000) You use this window to create new attributes or to view the details of existing attributes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create new attributes or to view the details of existing attributes. An attribute is a quality or characteristic of the stock item, project, case, lead, or other entity that gives your company more information. For example: Some attributes might be product brand, manufacturer, lead age, gender, and industry. For each attribute, you can specify what type of control should be used for it. ## The top part You can use the elements in this area to create a new attribute, or to select an existing attribute and view its details.
Element Description
Attribute ID The identifier of the attribute. The Attribute ID will be displayed when preparing inquiries and reports, if applicable. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description

The description of the attribute. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Control type

The type of control (element) to be used for the attribute. The following options are available:

Text
The control will be a field in which the user can type text. For this type, you can specify an input validation option: an input mask or a regular expression.
Combo
The control will be a combo field, which is a text field with a list field attached, so users can type or select the attribute value. For this type, you can enter a list of possible values.
Multi select combo
The control will be a list field with a check box against each attribute value so users can select multiple options. For this type, you can enter a list of possible values.
Check box
The control will be a check box that can be selected or cleared to turn the option on or off.
Date/time
The control will be used to enter a date.
Entry mask

An entry mask for input validation. This field is available only if the Control type is Text.

For more information, see: on, see: About input validation options.
Reg. exp. A regular expression to be used to validate input. This expression is used if the Control type is Text. For more information, see: on, see: About input validation options.
## The table This table is available for input only for the combo type attributes (that is, when the value in the **Control type** field is **Combo** )+.
Column Description
Value ID The value of the attribute. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description

The description of the value. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Sort order The number representing the order of the value in the resulting list of attribute values.
Disabled

A check box that you select to make the value unavailable in any new documents that use the selected attribute.

If a disabled value has been used previously in any records, it will still be available in those records, but you will not be able to use the value in any new records.
**Parent topic:** [Common settings windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/common-settings-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s page You use this window to store information about countries and states in which your organisation has operations, customers, or suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) You use this window to store information about countries and states in which your organisation has operations, customers, or suppliers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Information provided here is used for defining branches of your organisation and creating customer and supplier accounts. Countries are identified by a two-letter country code in accordance with ISO 3166. Country information includes the phone code for the country, input masks for postal codes and VAT registration IDs (if VAT registration is required), and information about country administrative units (states or provinces). You can also track whether VAT registration is required in the country. If you set up input masks and regular expressions for postal codes, users can avoid occasional input errors. For more information, see [About input masks](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-input-masks/) and [About input validation options](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-input-validation-options/). ## What to do from this window + [Define an EU country as an Intrastat country](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/countries-counties-postcodes/define-an-eu-country-as-an-intrastat-country/) ## The top part You use this area to select a country and to view or edit its information.
Element Description
Country ID The unique two-letter country ID. The list of countries contains the two-letter country codes in accordance with international standard ISO 3166.
Country

The complete name of the country.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Input mask Optional. A mask that will be used to validate postcodes on input.
Validation regular expression Optional. A regular expression that will be used to validate postcodes on input.
IBAN length The number of characters in the IBAN number.
Validate IBAN A validation of the IBAN number.
Use postcode register

A check box to initiate the use of the country’s postcode register if available. Not all companies has a postcode register installed.

You may also build up your own post code register in the Postcodes tab.
Instrastat country This check box indicates if the selected country is obliged to the Intrastat reporting system (EU member states). Note! You will get a warning in Intrastat reporting country when you select this check box and you have to save before you can select this country in the Intrastat reporting country.
Intrastat reporting country This field indicates which country are to receive the statical information required by the Intrastat agreement. This applies to countries that are autonomous constituent countries as for example the Azores which will report to Portugal. Note! The lookup only displays countries that have the Intrastat country checked.
## The Counties tab This table in this tab holds the states or counties of the country where your organisation has operations, suppliers, or customers. You can also view or edit this information.
Column Description
County ID The unique ID of the administrative unit of the county. The maximum string length is 50 characters. Use the abbreviations commonly used in the specific country.
County name The complete name of the administrative unit, which is a string of up to 30 characters.
## The Postcodes tab
Column Description
Postcode ID The unique ID of the city. The maximum string length is 20 characters.
City The complete name of the city, which is a string of up to 50 characters.
## The Customer validation tab In this tab you select which fields are to be filled in when entering information for customers. It will be possible to save the customer without filling in the fields, but that will produce documents with insufficient information.
Column Description
Address 1 A check box that will validate if the customer’s first line of address is filled in when saving a new customers.
Postcode A check box that will validate if the customer’s postcode is filled in when saving a new customers.
City A check box that will validate if the customer’s city is filled in when saving a new customers.
Email A check box that will validate if the customer’s email is filled in when saving a new customers.
Finvoice intermediator ID(Finland) A check box that will validate if the customer’s Finvoice intermediator ID is filled in when saving a new customers.
Finvoice contract ID(Finland) A check box that will validate if the customer’s Finvoice contract ID is filled in when saving a new customers.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Industry codes (CS20100S) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/industry-codes-cs20100s page You use industry codes to classify industries into categories and to group companies of similar nature together. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Industry codes (CS20100S) You use industry codes to classify industries into categories and to group companies of similar nature together. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table
Column Description
Code ID The ID of the industry code, max. 10 characters.
Description The description of the industry code.
Number series (CS201010) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010 page You use this window to view, create, edit, or delete number series, which the system uses to automatically generate a new number or ID each time a user creates an object of the particular type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Number series (CS201010) You use this window to view, create, edit, or delete number series, which the system uses to automatically generate a new number or ID each time a user creates an object of the particular type. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Number series are used for General ledger batches, invoices, payments of various types, transfers, allocations, schedules, and other objects in the system. Also, you may use number series for generating segment values for one segment in a segmented key. You can edit and use the predefined sequences or define new number series. For more details on number series, see: [About multiple numbering series](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-multiple-numbering-series/). ## The top part You can use this part to create a new series or to select an existing numbering series and view its information.
Element Description
Numbering ID The unique ID of the number series, which is an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description

The description of the number series. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Manual numbering

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will not generate numbers for the series and users will need to specify document numbers manually.

Series with manual numbering can be used in the Inventory workspace for custom sales orders that do not require shipping.
Allow manual numbering on imports A check box that indicates (if selected) that also when importing documents, the numbering will have to be specified manually.
New number symbol

An alphanumeric string (of up to 15 characters) used to indicate that a new number will be assigned for an object.

Suppose you create a number series for batches and enter NEW here. Each time a user creates a new batch, the user will see NEW in the Batch number field, which indicates that when the new batch is saved, it will automatically get the next number available for batches.
## The table In the table, you can view or edit the details of the selected number series. A number series may consist of just one subseries or multiple subseries. Each subseries is defined in a separate row in this table and includes the specific branch and the date it takes effect. Numbers assigned to one subsequence cannot be used in another subsequence of the same series. Subseries created for branches can have different prefixes or specify different ranges of numbers. The **Start number**, **End number**, and **Warning number** settings, which are described below: + Are processed by the system as alphanumeric strings. + Have the same length (the maximum is 15) for each series. + Use the same prefix if the series uses a prefix. A prefix is an alphanumeric beginning string that ends in a letter.
Column Description
Branch The specific branch to use the subsequence. This information is optional and is used only if the series consists of subsequences that are intended for branches.
Start number The number to be used first in this number series or subsequence.
End number The number to be used at the end of this series. The end number cannot be less than the start number.
Start date The date when this series will first be used.
Last number The most recent number used for an object in this series.
Warning number The minimum number that triggers a warning that available numbers will be used up soon. When the system generates this number (and each number that exceeds it), it displays this warning. This number cannot be less than the start number.
Numbering step The increment this series uses to generate the next number. Each time a new number is assigned, the system calculates the rightmost numerical portion by adding this value to the rightmost numerical portion of the last number used.
Next allocated number The actual next number that will be picked when assigning a new number.
Last allocated number The last number that was picked when assigning a new number.

Related pages

Concepts

 Payment terms (CS206500) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500 page You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms (CS206500) You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Payment terms include the instalment option (one payment or multiple instalments), the payment schedule, and the terms for a cash discount (for only the single instalment option). Also, payment terms can be used as a schedule for overdue charges. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General information section You use the elements in this area to define a new set of payment terms and its settings, or to select an existing set of terms and view its settings.
Element Description
Terms ID The unique identifier for these payment terms. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 10 characters.
Description A detailed description of the payment terms. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Visible to

The target audience for which the terms are visible, which can be one of the following:

All
The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers.
Suppliers
The terms can be assigned to suppliers only.
Customers
The terms can be assigned to customers only.
Disabled
The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers.
## The Due day settings section
Element Description
Due date type

The method of due date calculation. The following options are available:

Fixed number of days
The payment is due a fixed number of days after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Day of next month
The payment is due on a particular day of the next month; you should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
End of the month
The payment is due at the end of the current month.
End of next month
The payment is due at the end of the next month.
Day of the month
The payment is due on a particular day of the current month. You should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
Fixed number of days starting next month
The payment is due a fixed number of days starting the next month after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Custom
With this option, you specify two due days that could be used; which due day is to be used depends on the time interval set for the document’s date. For example: You may specify one due day for documents issued in the first part of the month, and the second due day for documents issued in the second part of the month. You use the remaining elements in the Due date settings section to set the due days and their respective date ranges.
Move due date if on the weekend If the due date on the invoice falls onto a weekend (Saturday or Sunday), use the options in the drop-down to calculate it to the Friday before the due date or the Monday after it. With the option Keep the exact date the due date remains unchanged.
Due day 1 The first due day, which is used with certain Due date type options. Specify the number of days if the Fixed number of days option is selected, the day of the month if the Day of next month or Day of the month option is selected, and the first due day if the Custom option is selected.
Day from 1 The start day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 1 The end day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Due day 2 The second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day from 2 The start day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 2 The end day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
## The Cash discount settings section In this section, you provide the details of the cash discount included with this set of payment terms. You can specify a cash discount only if the **Single** instalment type is selected in the **Instalments settings** section.
Element Description
Discount type

The method of calculating the cash discount period, which can be one of the following options:

Fixed number of days
If this option is selected, the discount is available a set number of days after the document date. In the Discount day field, you should also specify the number of days.
Day of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available until a particular day in the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the next month.
End of month
When you select this option, the discount is available through the end of the month (that is, the month of the document date).
End of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available through the end of the next month (that is, the month after the document date).
Day of the month
If this option is selected, the discount is available until the particular day of the month when the document was issued. In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the month.
Fixed number of days starting next month
When you select this option, the discount is available a set number of days starting the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the number of days.
Discount day The number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the Discount type; this field is unavailable for some options.
Discount (%) The percent of the discount.
Delay days With the amount of days defined here, the cash discount will be considered when registering the payment on the invoice. For example, the cash discount date is set to the 1st of the month, the Delay days field has value 2. You register the payment on the 3rd of the month, and cash discount amount will be used.
## The Instalment settings section By using these elements, you can define how documents should be paid: in a single payment or in multiple instalments. If the amount is due in multiple instalments, you can also specify a percentage and a due date for each instalment; the due date for the first instalment is specified in the **Due day settings** section. Discounts are not available for multiple-instalment payment terms.
Element Description
Instalment type

The type of instalment, which can be one of the following options:

Single
If you select this option, other elements in this section become unavailable. You should also select the due date and other options for the single payment.
Multiple
If you select this option, payment is due in multiple instalments. You should also specify the method, frequency, and schedule of the instalments.
Number of instalments The specific number of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method.
Instalment frequency

The frequency of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method. The following options are available:

Weekly
The second instalment will be a week after the first one, and so on.
Monthly
The second instalment will be a month after the first one, and so on.
Semi-monthly
The second instalment will be a half of a month after the first one, and so on.
Instalment method

The method by which the amounts of instalments are calculated. Select one of the following options:

Equal parts
The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. The schedule of payments is defined by the due date, instalment frequency, and number of instalments specified.
VAT in the first instalment
The amount of the document (its total before taxes) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. The schedule of payments is defined by the instalment frequency and number of instalments specified.
Split by percent in table
The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages specified for each instalment in the Instalments schedule table below this section.
## The Instalments schedule table
Column Description
Days The number of days from the due date on which a particular instalment is due. You must use an integer between 0 (due date) and 31.
Percent The percent of a document total. As you add a new instalment, the percent is automatically adjusted to make all instalments total 100 percent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Postcodes (CS20401S) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/postcodes-cs20401s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Postcodes (CS20401S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table
Column Description
Country The ID of the country where the postcode is applicable.
Postcode The postcode. The number of characters depend on the country.
County ID The ID of the county to which the postcode belongs, where applicable.
City The city that is connected to the postcode.
Publish customised reports and inquiries (CS10301S) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/publish-customised-reports-and-inquiries-cs10301s page This window is used to publish customised reports and inquiries and make them available for other organisations in your organisations table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Publish customised reports and inquiries (CS10301S) This window is used to publish customised reports and inquiries and make them available for other organisations in your organisations table. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Reports/inquiries customised for one organisation, will be available for other organisations. To view your published reports/inquiries, go to window Import customised report and inquiries, CS10302S. You must first select the report/inquiry and then select the organisation. You may select for several reports/inquiries and organisations at the same time. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Publish A button to start the publishing of all your selected reports/inquiries for selected organisations.
## The Reports table
Column Description
Window The window ID of the reports/inquiry window.
Type

The type of report/inquiry. There are three alternatives:

  • Report designer
  • Generic inquiry
  • Dasboard
  • Pivot table
  • ARM report
  • Workspace
  • List entry point
  • Atrributes
  • Filter
Workspace The workspace in Visma Net where the window resides.
Created on Date and time for the creation of the report/inquiry.
Last edited on Date and time for the last edit of the report/inquiry.
Name The title/window name of the report/inquiry.
Description A text retrieved from the report/inquiry window.
Created by user The name of the user that created the report/inquiry.
Version The version of the report/inquiry.
Note A free text field with notes regarding the report/inquiry.
## The Organisations table
Column Description
Selection check box Select organisation the report/inquiry is to be published for.
Published A check box indicating if the report/inquiry is published. This check mark will be displayed after the report/inquiry is published.
Accepted A check box indicated the status Accepted. This check mark will be displayed when the report/inquiry is imported in Import customised report and inquiries, window CS10302S.
Company name The organisation the report/inquiry is published for.
Published date The date and time when the report/inquiry was last published.
Import updates from templates (CS10302S) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/import-updates-from-templates-cs10302s page This window is used to import customised reports and inquiries from other organisations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import updates from templates (CS10302S) This window is used to import customised reports and inquiries from other organisations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Reports/inquiries are prepared in the Publish customised report and inquiries (CS10301S) window and made available in this window. ## The top part
Element Description
Workspace The workspace in Visma Net where the window resides.
Type The type of information this window contains.
Source company The company from where the report/inquiry is generated.
## The Available reports and inquiries tab
Button Description
Import selected Use the check box in the table below and select reports/inquiries you want to import. Click this button to import your selected reports/inquiries.
Import all Click this button to import all reports/inquiries from the table below.
Column Description
Window The window ID the report/inquiry is made from.
Type The type of information this window contains.
Module The workspace in Visma Net where the window resides.
Version The version of the report/inquiry.
Source company The company for which the report/inquiry is made.
Last edited on Date and time for the last edit of the report/inquiry.
Name The name of the window containing the information presented in the report/inquiry.
Description A text retrieved from the report/inquiry window.
Note A free text field with notes regarding the report/inquiry.
## The Import history tab
Column Description
Import on The date when the report/inquiry was imported.
Window The window ID the report/inquiry is made from.
Type

The type of report/inquiry. There are three alternatives:

  • ARM report
  • Generic inquiry
  • Report editor
Module The workspace in Visma Net where the window resides.
Version The version of the report/inquiry.
Source company The company the report/inquiry is made for.
Last edited on Date and time for the last edit of the report/inquiry.
Name he name of the window containing the information presented in the report/inquiry.
Description A text retrieved from the report/inquiry window.
Note A free text field with notes regarding the report/inquiry.
Segment values (CS203000) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000 page By using this window, you can populate the lists of segment values for segmented keys defined in the system and view and edit these lists. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Segment values (CS203000) By using this window, you can populate the lists of segment values for segmented keys defined in the system and view and edit these lists. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Segments are components of the segmented key, which was defined on the [Segment keys](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, and segment values can be used to create different IDs. For each segment with the **Validate** option selected on the [Segment keys](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, you should populate the list of possible values before users start to create new objects by specifying their IDs. You can add new values to the list of segment values at any time. Some values in the list may be marked as inactive (by clearing the **Active** check box for them). Inactive values will not be used for creating new objects, but they can appear in old objects. ## The top part Here you select the segment for viewing or editing its values.
Element Description
Segmented key ID The ID of the segmented key that contains segments.
Segment ID The number representing the order of the segment in the segmented key.
Description The user-defined description of the selected segment.
## The table This table contains the list of possible values for the selected segment. You can add new values to the segment or edit or delete existing values.
Button Description
Load records from file Gives you the ability to upload a file that contains the values for the segment.
Column Description
Value The string that is the value of the selected segment. Its type and length are defined in the Segment keys window.
Description The description of the value.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the value is active.

Inactive values cannot be used for newly created objects, although they still may be present in the IDs of existing objects.
Aggregation A check box that indicates (if selected) that the value is used as an aggregating value for the segment.
Mapped Value

The value used for consolidation in a subsidiary company (that is, a consolidation unit) for mapping the subaccounts against the subaccounts of the parent company.

For details, see General ledger consolidation - overview. This column is available for segments of the SUBACCOUNT segmented key only.

This column is available only if the General ledger consolidation functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Segment keys (CS202000) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000 page You use this window to configure the segmented keys that Visma Net reserves for specific system objects created by users, such as General ledger accounts and subaccounts, customer and supplier accounts, warehouses, and locations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Segment keys (CS202000) You use this window to configure the segmented keys that Visma Net reserves for specific system objects created by users, such as General ledger accounts and subaccounts, customer and supplier accounts, warehouses, and locations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. A **segmented key** is a system entity that you use to define the structure of IDs for a certain type of objects. The segmented key then serves as a template when a user creates an ID for a new object of the type. During initial system setup, for each segmented key, you define: + The number of segments the key has + The length of each segment + The type of each segment + The list of values for each segment Users then create object IDs by selecting values for each segment of the segmented key. Also, users can create new segmented keys for use in a specific workspace. ## The top part In this area, you can select a segmented key and view or edit its settings.
Element Description
Segmented key ID

The ID of the segmented key. Select the key from the list of available keys, which can include the following:

ACCGROUP
Used for IDs of account groups in project management
ACCOUNT
Used for general ledger accounts
BIZACCT
Associated with the account used for your company’s branches in the system; the parent key for the SUPPLIER, CUSTOMER, and EMPLOYEE segmented keys
CASHACCOUNT
Used for branch-specific cash accounts based on general ledger accounts
CONTRACT
Used for numbers of contracts; inherits its structure from the PROJECT segmented key
CONTRACTITEM
Used for contract items
CUSTOMER
Used for customer numbers; inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key
EMPLOYEE
Used for numbers of company employees; inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key
INLOCATION
Used for IDs of warehouse locations
INSITE
Used for IDs of warehouses
INVENTORY
Used for stock IDs of stock and non-stock items
LOCATION
Used for IDs of customer and supplier locations
MLISTCD
Used for mail lists
PROJECT
Used for IDs of projects and project templates
PROTASK
Used for IDs of project tasks
SALESPER
Used for salesperson IDs
SUBACCOUNT
Used for general ledger subaccounts
TMCONTRACT
Used for contract templates
VENDOR
Used for supplier numbers; inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key

The list of available segmented keys depends on the functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Parent The key that determines the Parent account values displayed for customers (in the Customers window) and for suppliers (in the Suppliers window).
Lookup mode

To help the system narrow the search and improve the speed on search, select the lookup mode that fits your search. The options are:

  • By segment: All avail. segment values
  • By segment key
Allow adding new values on the fly

This option affects only the INLOCATION and SUBACCOUNT keys.

A check box that (if cleared) forces the users to specify objects on data entry windows only by selecting existing object IDs from the list. The list of subaccounts is created in the Subaccounts window. The list of warehouse locations is created in the Warehouses window.

Select the check box to give the users the ability to enter object IDs on data entry windows as combinations of available segment values—there will be no need to create all the allowed IDs on the dedicated windows before they can be used on data entry windows.
Specific workspace The workspace, by its abbreviation, where the user-defined segmented key will be used.
Numbering ID An optional number series that is used for the segment that has the auto-numbering option selected. The segment length should be equal to the number of characters used in the selected number series.
Description A detailed description of the segmented key.
Max length The maximum total length of the key. This field appears after you select a key.
Length The total length of the key. The length is automatically calculated as the sum of the lengths of all segments.
Segments The number of segments defined for the key. The system automatically updates this value once you add a segment.
## The table You can use the table to configure segments for the selected key. Segments can be numeric, alphabetic, or alphanumeric, and they can have different lengths. For each segment (table line), you can create a list of possible values, or for one segment in the key, you can select an auto-numbering option. For auto-numbering, a number series must be specified. For information on configuring segmented keys that inherit their structure from parent keys, see: [About ID segmentation](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-id-segmentation/). Segment values are used when a user creates IDs for new objects. If the segment validation option (**Validate**) is turned on for the segment, the user must select one of the predefined values for the segment. For a one-segment key, segment validation cannot be turned off. If the validation option is turned off, the system validates only the number of characters ( **Length** ) and the type of the string ( **Edit mask** ) for a segment; hence, IDs of new objects may contain segment values that are not on the list of possible segment values.
Custom action Description
View segment Opens the Segment values window for the selected segment.
Column Description
Segment ID The system-generated number representing the order of the segment in the segmented key.
Description The user-defined segment description.
Override

Read-only.

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the segment value overrides the value inherited from the parent. This column is available only for the segmented keys that have a parent (such as CONTRACT, CUSTOMER, and EMPLOYEE).
Length

The maximum length of the segment.

Make sure that the total length of all segments does not exceed the maximum length, which is specified in the Max length field in the top part.
Align The segment value alignment in the segment; select one of the following options: Left or Right.
Edit mask

The type of characters allowed for the segment values. The following types may be used:

  • Alpha: Allows the input of only Latin letters, such as A and z
  • Numeric: Allows the input of only digits
  • Alphanumeric: Allows the input of Latin letters and digits
  • Unicode: Allows the input of any symbols, including any language symbols and special characters (such as % or _ ).

The underscore symbol( _ ) is one of the SQL wild-card characters. If you search for an entity by its ID that contain this symbol, the system considers underscore as the wild-card character (a substitute for any single character)and returns corresponding results.
Case conversion An option that reflects whether the case of alphabetic characters will remain as it was typed by the user ( No Change ), be automatically converted to upper case ( Upper case ), or be automatically converted to lower case ( Lower case ).
Validate

A check box that indicates (if selected) that validation of segment values is turned on.

It means that you can add a value to each particular segment only by selecting the value from the list of available ones. You open the list of segment values by pointing to the required segment and pressing F3.

This validation works only in windows that can be used to create objects (data entry windows), where objects are selected by their IDs.

Only segment values of the segments requiring validation can be included into a restriction group.

For the consolidation process, we recommend that you select this check box if the length of the subaccount segment in the consolidating company (shown in the Number of characters column) differs from the length of the subaccount segment to be mapped (shown in the Length field).
Auto number

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the number series selected in the Number series ID field will be used to generate values for this segment in IDs.

If the Auto number option is selected on for the segment, select the Unicode option in the Edit mask column.

The auto-numbering option can be applied to only one segment in a key. It is recommended that if you need to use auto-numbering for specific IDs, you configure the appropriate segmented key as a single-segmented key.

If the auto-numbering option is selected for the single segment of the segmented key, the number series assigned to the segment may be defined with Start number and End number that have less characters than the segment length.
Separator

The character that will be used as the segment separator when the object ID is displayed.

This separator doesn’t affect the ID length.

The character specified here must be different from the one specified in Prompt character for the segment.
Prompt character

The character that will used for displaying this segment at input prompts.

You can use different symbols for each segment, but it must be different from the value used as separator for each segment. The default column value is _ (underscore) and the column is hidden by default.

If you want to use the underscore symbol as the segment separator, change the default value of this field to another symbol.

We do not recommend changing a prompt character after you have started entering IDs. If you change the prompt character to a character that has been used in some of the existing IDs, you are not be able to view, edit or find entities whose IDs contain the new prompt character.
Consol. order

The number that represents the order of this string among other strings in the parent company’s subaccount; this column is displayed for only the SUBACCOUNT key.

For more details, see: General ledger consolidation - overview.

This column is available only if the General ledger consolidation functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Number of characters

The length (in characters) of the string in the parent’s subaccount to which the segment value is mapped; this column is displayed for only the SUBACCOUNT key.

This setting is used only if the company is a consolidation unit for the parent company.

This column is available only if the General ledger consolidation functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

If the number of characters is set to 0, then this segment will be skipped during import of the consolidation data.

Related pages

Concepts

 Units of measure (CS203100) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100 page This window displays the reference table of unit conversions for the units of measure (UoMs) used in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Units of measure (CS203100) This window displays the reference table of unit conversions for the units of measure (UoMs) used in Visma Net. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window displays the reference table of unit conversions for the units of measure (UoMs) used in Visma Net. You can add new units of measure by specifying how they can be converted to other units of measure available in the system. For more information about units of measure, see: [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/). ## What to do from this window + [Define weight UoMs](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/define-weight-uoms/) ## The table This table displays the relationships among the units of measure defined in the system. Each line in the table defines a rule used to perform a conversion from one unit of measure to another. When you add a new unit, specify its conversion first to itself and then to other units. Units from this table will appear on the list of UoMs used to define item classes.
Column Description
From unit The unit to be converted.
To unit The unit to which the unit specified in the From unit will be converted with the use of the specified operation and specified conversion factor.
Multiply/divide The operation to be performed for conversion of the From unit to the To unit. You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform conversions between those units of measure.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion with the specified operation.
Supplementary unit measure The supplementary unit measure to which you want to make the conversion.
UNECE

UNECE is a Unit of Measure standard from the United Nations focused on improving economic cooperation and integration among its member countries in the European region.

In our document format (PEPPOL BIS 3.0) sent to AutoInvoice, the format in the UNECE field is used as a unit of measure.

This unit code will be validated before the document can be sent.

A list of the codes can be found here: https://docs.peppol.eu/poacc/billing/3.0/2023-Q4/codelist/UNECERec20/

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Activity (CR306010) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/activity-cr306010 page By using this window, you can create a new activity, view the details of an existing activity, and create an email and send it to a contact. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activity (CR306010) By using this window, you can create a new activity, view the details of an existing activity, and create an email and send it to a contact. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
Save and close Saves the activity you enter and closes the pop-up window. You can see the activity on the Activities tab, and the status will be Completed.
Complete Completes the activity and sets the status to Completed.
## The Details tab You use this tab to enter or view details about the activity. The editor area, located at the bottom of the tab, lets you add comments about the activity.
Element Description
Summary A description of the activity, which can be used as its ID.
Type The type of the activity.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the activity is hidden from external users.
Date

The start date and time of the activity.

The time information is available only if the Track time check box is selected.
Work group The work group to which the activity is assigned.
Owner The username of the employee responsible for this activity.
Related entity description

The entity that this activity is associated with. For example, if you are creating an activity that is associated with a lead, this lead will be specified in the box by default.

To adjust the value, click the magnifier icon; as a result, the Select entity dialog box opens.
Task The parent task or event for the current activity.
Project

The project associated with this activity (or the non-project code, which indicates that this activity is not associated with any project defined in the system).

The field is available only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Track time check box is selected.
Project task

The project task with which this activity is associated. You can select only a project task that relates to the project selected in the Project field.

The field is available only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Track time check box is selected.
Track time

A check box that you select to make available elements that you can use to enter the time-related information.

The check box is available only if the Time reporting on a ctivity functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Status

The status of the activity, which is one of the following options: Open, Cancelled, or Complete.

The field is available only if the Track t time check box is selected.
Approver

Read-only. The person that is responsible for approving the activity.

The field is available only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Track time check box is selected.
Earning Type

The earning type for the activity, which determines how labour is costed. The options are defined in the Type of hours (EP102000) window.

The field is available only if the Track time check box is selected.
Time spent

The time (in hours and minutes) spent on the activity.

The field is available only if the Track time check box is selected.
Invoiceable

A check box that you select if the time spent on the activity is invoice able.

The check box is available only if the Track t ime check box is selected.
Released

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the activity has been released.

The check box is available only if the Track time check box is selected.
Invoiceable time

The time that can be invoiced (in hours and minutes) spent on the activity. This time cannot be equal to zero or exceed the time specified in the Time spent field.

The field is available only if the Track time and Invoiceable check boxes are selected.
Reference no.

A reference to the invoice that has been generated when the released activity has been invoiced.

The field is available only if the Track time and Invoiceable check boxes are selected.
### The Select entity dialog box By using this dialog box, you can specify which entity relates to the activity whose data you are adjusting.
Element Description
Type The type of the related entity.
Entity The related entity of the type.
OK A button that accepts your changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel A button that closes the dialog box and cancels the selection.
Related reference [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) Contacts (CR302000) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000 page In this window, you can create new contacts or records about individuals associated with business accounts and view the details of existing contacts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contacts (CR302000) In this window, you can create new contacts or records about individuals associated with business accounts and view the details of existing contacts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. A business account can have multiple contacts associated with it. You can open this window directly or from the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Create a new contact](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/create-a-new-contact/) + [Connect a contact to a company](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/connect-a-contact-to-a-company/) + [Delete customer contact](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/delete-customer-contact/) + [Change a contact](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/change-a-contact/) + [Copy one contact to several customers or suppliers](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/contacts/copy-one-contact-to-several-customers-or-suppliers/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Copy from company
Copies the address and contact information from the associated business account.
## The top part In this area, you can create a new contact or select an existing contact for editing.
Element Description
Contact ID

The unique identifier of the contact, which the system generates automatically.

When you add a new contact, leave this box blank.
First name The contact’s courtesy title (which is one of the following options: Dr., Miss, Mr., Mrs., Ms., or Prof. ) and first name.
*Last name The last name of the contact.
Type The type of the contact.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact is active.
Owner

The owner of the contact.

If you specified a work group, you can select the owner from only its members. If you didn’t specify a work group, you can select any user. Selecting a work group clears the owner selection if the owner is not a member of the group.
Work group

The work group for the contact.

If you select a group, you can select an owner only from the members of the group.
Job title The contact’s job title or position.
## The Details tab This tab contains various information about the contact, with elements grouped into sections to make details easier to find.
Element Description
Company name The business name of the contact’s company.The value is inherited from the business account description (if specified).
Parent account The parent business account or the business account of the parent company, if applicable.
### The Personal data section
Element Description
Language/locale

The language in which the contact prefers to communicate. By default, the system fills in the field with the locale specified for the contact’s country. The value is to be used to fill in the Language/locale field for a business account to be created from the contact by using the Create business account action.

This field appears on the window only if there are multiple active locales are defined in the System locales (SM200550) window.
Date of birth The birth date of the contact.
Gender The gender of the contact: Male or Female.
Marital status The marital status of the contact. The following options are available: Single, Married, Divorced, and Widowed.
Spouse/partner name The name of the contact’s spouse or partner.
Last incoming activity The date of the latest incoming activity that is associated with the contact.
Last outgoing activity The date of the latest outgoing activity that is associated with the contact.
### The Address section
Element Description
Same as in account A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact’s address is the same as the address of the business account.
Address line 1 The first line of the contact’s address.
Address line 2 The second line of the contact’s address.
City The city of the contact’s address.
Postcode The postcode. An input validation mask can be set for the country postal codes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
Country The country of the contact’s address.
County The county of the contact’s address.
View on map A button that opens the map viewer.
### The Contact section
Element Description
Email The email address of the contact.
Web The website of the contact, if any.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the contact. Select the type from the drop down.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the contact. Select the type from the drop down.
Phone 3 Another phone number of the contact. Select the type from the drop down.
Fax The fax number of the contact.
## The Additional info tab This tab contains additional information about the contact, generally the information about the lead converted to this contact. ### The Lead history section
Element Description
Source The source of the lead.
Source campaign The identifier of the campaign as a result of which the lead has been generated.
Status The status of the lead.
Reason The reason the status of the lead has been changed.
Converted by The name of the employee who qualified the original lead.
Qualification date The date when the original lead was qualified and converted to the contact.
### The Image section
Element Description
Browse Opens the file selection window, where you can select an image to upload.
Upload Uploads the selected image to the system.
### The Upload file dialog box By using this dialog box, you can upload a photo of the contact to be displayed on the **Additional info** tab. The dialog box has the following elements.
Element Description
Upload file

An option button that, if selected, causes the system to display the Choose file and Comment elements on the dialog box.

Select this option if you want a local file to be uploaded on the website.
Link to existing file

An option button that, if selected, causes the system to display the Existing file and Comment elements on the dialog box.

Select this option if you want a file from the website to be uploaded on the window.
Choose file

The path to the local file.

Locate the file; once you select it, the path will be filled in here.
Browse… A button that you can use to locate the file.
Existing file The path to the file located on a website.
Comment

Any comments relevant to the file.

You can view the comments in the Search in files (SM202520) window.
Upload (button) Uploads the file to the website.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box and cancels the upload.
## The Activities tab This tab has a table with the list of activities associated with the contact. On this tab, you can associate particular tasks, events, and other activities with the contact. ### The columns The table includes, in addition to the columns described below, columns (labelled with icons) you can use to attach notes and files to the activity, see if it is completed, and check its priority level.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Work group The work group the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The username of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Project The project to which the activity is connected.
Project task The project task to which the activity is connected.
Released When this check box is selected, the activity is released.
In addition to the table, the tab has the Activity description area, at the bottom of the tab, which displays the full description provided for the activity (if any). To edit the description, click within the **Summary** column of the activity. This brings up the appropriate window. ## The Notifications tab This tab has a table that contains mailings the contact is subscribed to. On this tab, you can remove a mailing from the list or make it inactive if necessary. To subscribe a customer contact to mailings defined for the customer, use the **Recipients** area on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace where mailing settings are defined. This workspace is the source of emails for the mailing.
Source The entity, Supplier or Customer, that is the source of the emails for the contact.
Mailing ID The unique identifier of the mailing.
Class ID The identifier of the contact class that the contact belongs to (if any).
Description The business account that the customer belongs to and the company name (if any).
Report The report to be used as the email’s body for this mailing, if the mailing uses a report rather than an email template.
Notification ID

The notification template that is used to generate emails for the mailing.

For each mailing, either a report or a template may be specified.
Format The format in which the document based on the report will be send to the contact (if the mailing uses a report rather than a template). The following options are available: PDF, Text, HTML, or Excel.
BCC A check box that indicates, if selected, that the recipient will receive a blind carbon copy (BCC) of the email for this mailing.
Active A check box that indicates, if selected, that this mailing is active. Only active mailings are used to generate emails.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Send (CR306015) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/send-cr306015 page By using this window, you can create and send an email to a lead or contact, or view the details of an existing email. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send (CR306015) By using this window, you can create and send an email to a lead or contact, or view the details of an existing email. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create and send an email to a lead or contact, or view the details of an existing email. When creating a new email, you can select an email template, an article from the knowledge base, or an activity with all its history of email exchange. Note: If a default email template has been created for email activities, this window will open with the template preloaded. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Send Sends the email.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Reply all: Initiates a reply to the sender of the email and all its recipients.
  • Forward: Initiates the sending of a copy of the email to new recipients.
  • Select source: Opens the Select source dialog box, which you can use to specify which information you want to include into the email.
  • Process: Processes the email according to the rules in the ) System email accounts (SM204002) window.
  • Cancel sending: Cancels the email.
  • Download.eml file: Saves a copy of the email in eml format.

This action is available only for incoming emails.

  • Archive: Stores the email activity in archival storage. Only emails that have the Processed status can be archived. The archived email is moved to the System email accounts (SM204002) window, and its status changes to Archived.
  • Restore from archive: Restores the email from the archive. When it has been restored, the email is once again listed in the Incoming -tab on All emails (CO409070) or Sent emails (CO409080) window, depending on whether it’s an incoming or outgoing email, and its status changes to Processed.
  • Restore deleted: Restores the email if it has the Deleted status.
The Select source dialog box
Element Description
Source type

The desired option for creating a new email:

  • Notification template: To insert an email template from the list of available email templates.

This option is available only if a related activity is associated with the email.

  • Activity: To insert the activity with the related conversation.

This option is available only if a related activity is associated with the email.

  • KB article: To insert an article from the knowledge base (KB).
Template

The template to be used for this email, which you can select from the list of available templates.

This field is available only if the Notification template option is selected in the Source type field.
Activity

The particular activity to include in the email.

This field is available only if the Activity option is selected in the Source type field.
Article ID

The particular article from the knowledge base to include in the email.

This field is available only if the KB article option is selected in the Source type field.
Append A check box that you select if you want to append the information from the selected source to the text that is already in the message field.
Select (button) A button you click to insert information from the selected source and close the dialog box.
Cancel (button) A button you click to close the dialog box without any changes being made to the email.
## The top part In this area, you can specify information about the recipients and the subject of the email.
Element Description
From The email address of the sender. When you create a new email, the email address specified in the Default email account field in the Email preferences (SM204001) window is selected by default.
To The email address of the recipient. If you are sending the email to multiple recipients, use commas or semicolons as separators.
Cc The email address to receive a copy of the email. If you are copying the email to multiple recipients, use commas or semicolons as separators.
Bcc The email address to receive a copy of the email; any address entered here will be hidden from other recipients. If you are blind-copying the email to multiple recipients, use commas or semicolons as separators.
Subject The subject of the email message.
Source Information An area in the upper right part of the window field that contains a variety of read-only elements. The specific elements depend on the type of related entity (the lead, contact, or customer, depending in the window you were using when you opened the current window).
## The Message tab By using this tab, you can enter and edit the email, attach files to it, and insert images. This tab includes a formatting toolbar and a message field. The formatting toolbar provides buttons you can use to edit text (including cut, copy, and paste), change the typographical treatment of text (including using boldface, italics, superscript, subscript, colour, and highlighting), and format text (changing its alignment, indenting, or creating lists). You can also add files and insert images. The message field contains the body of the email. You type the email here and edit it using the formatting toolbar. ## The Details tab You use this tab to enter or view details of the email activity.
Element Description
Date The start date and time of the email activity.
Incoming A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is an incoming email.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the email activity is hidden from external users.
Work group The work group associated with the email activity.
Owner The username of the employee responsible for this activity.
Related entity description

The entity that this activity is associated with. For example, if you are creating an activity that is associated with a lead, this lead will be specified in the field by default.

To adjust the value, click the magnifier icon; as a result, the Select entity dialog box opens.
Parent The parent task or event for this email activity.
Project The project associated with this activity (or the non-project code, which indicates that this activity is not associated with any project defined to the system). This field appears if the Projects workspace is activated and the Track time check box (see below) is selected.
Project task The particular project task with which this activity is associated; appears if the Projects workspace is activated and the Track time check box (see below) is selected. You can select only a project task of the project selected as the Project.
Time card week The week to reflect this email activity on the employee time card.
Mail status The status of the email, which can be one of the following options: Draft, Pre-process, In process, Processed, Cancelled, Failed, Archived, or Deleted.
Track time A check box you select to make available elements that you can use to enter the time-related information.
Status The status of the email activity, which can be one of the following options: Draft, Open, In process, Complete, Approved, Rejected, Cancelled, Pending approval, or Released.
Approver The person who is responsible for approving the email activity.
Earning type The earning type for the email activity, for the purpose of determining how labour is costed.
Time spent The number of hours spent on the email activity.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time spent on the email activity can be invoiced.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the activity has been released.
Invoiceable time The number of hours that can be invoiced, spent on the email activity.
### The Select entity dialog box By using this dialog box, you can specify which entity relates to the activity whose data you are adjusting.
Element Description
Type The type of the related entity.
Entity The related entity of the type.
OK A button that causes your changes to be accepted and closes the dialog box.
Cancel A button that closes the dialog box and cancels the selection.

Related pages

Concepts

 Task (CR306020) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/task-cr306020 page By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Task (CR306020) By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Complete Changes the status of the task to Completed. This action is available only to the task owner.
Complete and follow-up Changes the task status to Completed and creates an task that has the same details as the current one but the Not started status. This action is available only to the task owner.
Cancel Cancels the task, changing its status to Cancelled. This action is available only to the user who created the task.
## The Details tab By using this tab, you can create a new task and view or edit the details of an existing task.
Element Description
Summary The task summary description, which can be used as its ID.
Start date The start date and time of the task.
Internal A check box that, if selected, indicates that the task is hidden from external users.
Due date The date and time when the task should be completed.
Completion (%) The estimation of the task completion, expressed as a percent.
Work group The workgroup the task is assigned to.
Owner The user the task is assigned to. By default, it shows the employee ID of the task creator.
Reminder This check box is not in use.
Remind at (date) This field is not in use.
Related entity description

The entity that this activity is associated with. For example: If you are creating an activity that is associated with a lead, this lead will be specified in the field by default.

To adjust the value, click the magnifier icon; as a result, the Select entity dialog box opens.
Parent A read-only field displaying the parent task this task is related to via the Related tasks tab of the parent task, if applicable.
Project The project associated with this task (or the non-project code indicating that this task is not associated with any project defined to the system); appears if the Projects module is activated.
Project task The particular project task with which this task is associated; appears if the Projects module has been activated. You can select only a project task of the selected project.
Priority The priority level of the task: Low, Normal, or High. These levels are used for informational purposes only; no specific functionality is associated with them.
Status

The status of the task. Select one of the following options:

Open
The task has been assigned to an owner.
Draft
The task has not been assigned yet.
In process
The task owner has started processing the task.
Cancelled
The user who created the task has cancelled it.
Completed
The task owner has finished processing the task.
Category The category of the task.
Completed at The date and time of task completion.
Time spent The time in days, hours, and minutes from task creation to completion.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable time The number of invoiceable hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable overtime The number of billable overtime hours spent on the task.
You can use the editor area, found at the bottom of the tab, to add comments about the task. You can edit the text by using the buttons in the formatting toolbar, which give you the ability to edit text (including cut, copy, and paste), change its typographical treatment (including using boldface, italics, superscript, subscript, colour and highlighting), and format it (changing its alignment, indenting, or creating lists). ### The Select entity dialog box By using this dialog box, you can specify which entity relates to the activity whose data you are adjusting.
Element Description
Type The type of the related entity.
Entity The related entity of the type.
OK A button that causes your changes to be accepted and closes the dialog box.
Cancel A button that closes the dialog box and cancels the selection.
## The Related activities tab This tab displays a table that shows activities related to the task.
Button Description
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window, from which you can send an email.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the activity types. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity. With an email, it matches the content of the email subject field.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Category The category of the task.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time spent on the activity can be invoiced.
Time spent The number of hours spent to complete the activity.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours spent to complete the activity.
Invoiceable time The number of hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Invoiceable overtime The number of overtime hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Work group The work group that the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The name of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the activity has been released.
## The Related tasks tab This tab lists the tasks that are related to this task. This task will be set as the **Parent** for the tasks added here.
Button Description
Add related task Opens the Task (CR306020) window in a pop-up window.
Column Description
Subject The description of the task and a link to it.
Status The status of the task.
Start date The start date of the task.
Due date The due date of the task.
Completed at The date and time when the task was actually completed.
Event (CR306030) /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/event-cr306030 page You use this window to create a new event or view the details of an existing event. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Event (CR306030) You use this window to create a new event or view the details of an existing event. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Note: To make sure the event will be displayed at the proper time on any user calendar even if users work from different time zones, make sure your time zone is specified in the [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/) window. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
Complete

Changes the status of the event to Completed.

This action is available only to the event owner.
Cancel

Changes the status of the event to Cancelled.

This action is available only to the user who created the event.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Export
Exports calendar data to a file in the iCalendar format. Files in this format can be imported into Microsoft Outlook or similar applications.
Send card
Sends emails with calendar data to the specified potential attendees.
## The Details tab This tab contains general event-related information. You can use the editor area, found at the bottom of the tab, to add comments about the event. You can edit the text by using the buttons on the formatting toolbar, which give you the ability to edit text (including cut, copy, and paste), change its typographical treatment (including using boldface, italics, superscript, subscript, colour and highlighting), and format it (changing its alignment, indenting, or creating lists).
Element Description
Subject A brief description of the event, which can serve as its ID.
Location The location of the event.
Start time The start date and time of the event.
All day A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is an all-day event.
End time The end date and time of the event.
Category The category of the event.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the event is hidden from external users.
Show as The event status to be displayed on your schedule if it is public.
Reminder This check box is not in use.
Remind at This field is not in use.
Related entity description

The entity that this activity is associated with. For example, if you are creating an activity that is associated with a lead, this lead will be specified in the field by default.

To adjust the value, click the magnifier icon; as a result, the Select entity dialog box opens.
Priority The priority of the event, which is one of the following values: Low, Normal, or High.
Status The status of the event: Open, Draft, Processing, Cancelled, or Completed.
Time spent The number of hours spent on the event.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours spent on the event.
Invoiceable time The number of hours spent on the event that can be invoiced.
Invoiceable overtime The number of overtime hours spent on the event that can be invoiced.
### The Select entity dialog box By using this dialog box, you can specify which entity relates to the activity whose data you are adjusting.
Element Description
Type The type of the related entity.
Entity The related entity of the type.
OK A button that causes the system to accept your changes and close the dialog box.
Cancel A button that causes the system to close the dialog box and cancel the selection.
## The Related activities tab This tab has a table that shows activities related to the event.
Button Description
Add Email Opens the Send (CR306015) window so you can send an email.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the activity types in the system. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time spent on the activity is invoiceable.
Summary The summary description of the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date of the activity.
Time spent The number of hours spent to complete the activity.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours spent to complete the activity.
Invoiceable time The number of hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Invoiceable overtime The number of overtime hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
## The Attendees tab By using this tab, you can select potential attendees for a new event. (For a new event, your name appears on the list automatically.) For an existing event, you can view those invited and see whether they accepted the invitation.
Button Description
Invite Sends emails inviting the selected attendees.
Invite all Sends emails inviting all attendees.
Column Description
Name The name of the potential attendee to the event.
Email The email address of the potential attendee.
Comment Any comments relevant to why the attendee was invited, why the attendee has rejected the invitation, or why the attendee has accepted it.
Invitation The status of the invitation, which is one of the following options: Accepted, Cancelled, or Rejected. The system updates the value automatically if the invitation is accepted or rejected by the potential attendee, or cancelled by its creator.
Shortcut keys in Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/shortcut-keys-in-visma-net page Here is a list of the different keyboard shortcuts you can use in Visma Net: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shortcut keys in Visma Net Here is a list of the different keyboard shortcuts you can use in Visma Net: ## Window toolbar shortcuts The following table displays the keyboard shortcuts you can use to execute window toolbar commands.
Key Description
Esc Cancel
Ctrl+Insert Add new record
Ctrl+Delete Delete
Ctrl+S Save
F3 Open search dialogue
Alt+arrow down Open drop down box
Ctrl+W Close window or tab
Alt+P Opens and closes the service selector top left
Alt+M Opens and closes the menu
Alt+S Focuses the search field
Alt+F1 Opens the Visma Help Centre
Alt+K Opens and closes the context selector
Page up Go to previous record
Page down Go to next record
## Top part shortcuts The following table displays the keyboard shortcuts of the top part or selection area of any window. |Press this key|To do this| |---|---| |Tab|Move the cursor to the next element.| |Shift+Tab|Move the cursor to the previous element.| |Ctrl+Left arrow|Move the cursor to the beginning of the next segment of the element if the element has multiple segments. For example: When you enter a subaccount).| |Ctrl+Right arrow|Move the cursor to the beginning of the previous segment of the element if the element has multiple segments. For example: When you enter a subaccount).| |Ctrl+Shift+L|Invokes the **Translations** field for fields with multi-language support if multilingual user input is enabled.| ## Table navigation shortcuts The following table displays the keyboard shortcuts you can use to navigate tables in any windows. |Press this key|To do this| |---|---| |Arrow keys|Move one cell up, down, left, or right in a table.| |Home|Go to the first column in the current row.| |End|Go to the last column in the current row.| |Ctrl+Home|Go to the first row in the same column.| |Ctrl+End|Go to the last row in the same column.| |Shift+F|Filter the data in the table.| |F5|Refresh the data (if the cursor is set in a table cell).| |F6|Sort the lines by the values in the selected column.| |Double-click under the last row|Append a new row.| |Enter or F2|Switch to editing mode.| |F4|Switch between grid and form modes.| ## Calendar navigation shortcuts When you click the arrow of a date field in an Visma Net window, the **Calendar dialog box** is brought up. You can use the **Calendar dialog box** to select a new date, which will appear in the date field. The following table displays the keyboard shortcuts you can use to navigate the **Calendar dialog box** in any window. |Press this key|To do this| |---|---| |Left arrow|Move the cursor to the previous day.| |Right arrow|Move the cursor to the next day.| |Up arrow|Move the cursor one week earlier.| |Down arrow|Move the cursor one week later.| |Enter|Fill in the date field with the selected date and close the dialog box.| ## Date box shortcuts Any date consists of the date components—that is, month, day, and year—that you enter to define a calendar date in a date field. The following table displays the keyboard shortcuts you can use to change the selected date once you have clicked in the date field in any window.
Press this key To do this

Up arrow

+

  • on the numeric keypad
 Increase the selected component of the date by 1.

Up arrow

-

  • on the numeric keypad
 Decrease the selected component of the date by 1.

.

/

. on the numeric keypad

/ on the numeric keypad

Right arrow

 Move the cursor to the next component of the date.

Shift +.

Shift + /

Shift + / on the numeric keypad

Left arrow

 Move the cursor to the previous component of the date.
## Keyboard shortcuts specifically for Sales orders (SO30100S) The following table gives an overview of the keyboard shortcuts in the **Order lines** tab of the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window.
Key Description
Arrow down Moves focus one cell down until the last row. Scrolls table and lists one row down if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow left Moves focus one cell left until the first column. Scrolls table and lists one column left if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow right Moves focus one cell right until the last column. Scrolls table and lists one column right if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow up Moves focus one cell up until the first row. Scrolls table and lists one row up if next cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow down Moves focus to the bottommost cell in the current column, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow left Moves focus to the leftmost cell in the current row, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow right Moves focus to the rightmost cell in the current row, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow up Moves focus to the topmost cell in the current column, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
End Moves focus to the last (right- and bottommost) cell, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Enter

Switches to editing mode for the first input inside the currently focused cell. When you are already in editing mode, it saves the value and returns focus on the cell.

When you are focused on a link inside a cell, it redirects to the linked window.
Esc

When you are in editing mode, it discards any changes to the value and returns focus on the cell.

When you are focused on a link inside a cell, it returns focus on the cell.
Home Moves focus to the first (left- and topmost) cell, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Page down

Scrolls lists down by one page (number of visible rows) or to the bottom row.

Moves focus on the bottommost cell in the current table column.
Page up

Scrolls lists up by one page (number of visible rows) or to the top row.

Moves focus on the topmost cell in the current table column.
Shift + Tab Saves value of current input, if any, and moves focus to previous input or focusable table cell or element outside of the table. Enables table cell edit mode if applicable. Skips cells that are not editable or focusable.
Space Selects or deselects the check box, when editing mode is enabled for a check box inside a cell.
Tab Saves value of current input, if any, and moves focus to next input or focusable table cell or element outside of the table. Enables table cell edit mode if applicable. Skips cells that are not editable or focusable.
Administration and customisation of appearance /visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance section In Visma Net, you can flexibly customise the appearance (in particular, main menu items and workspace links) all users will see, to adjust it to the business processes of your organisation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Administration and customisation of appearance In Visma Net, you can flexibly customise the appearance (in particular, main menu items and workspace links) all users will see, to adjust it to the business processes of your organisation. In Visma Net, you can flexibly customise the appearance (in particular, main menu items and workspace links) all users will see, to adjust it to the business processes of your organisation. Your customisation of the appearance will make it easier for users to find and begin working with required windows and reports, speeding document processing in the system. To be able to customise the appearance you must have the system administrator role. Here you will find information about the customisation of the appearance that can be performed by users with the Administrator user role. About customising the appearance /visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/about-customising-the-appearance page The appearance of Visma Net provides predefined appearance elements, such as workspaces and workspace tiles and links, which you can configure to adjust the appearance to the business processes of your organisation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customising the appearance The appearance of Visma Net provides predefined appearance elements, such as workspaces and workspace tiles and links, which you can configure to adjust the appearance to the business processes of your organisation. Because the employees of your organisation can locate the windows they use most right away, they can perform their working tasks related to Visma Net more easily. In this topic, you will read about the capabilities in the system for customising the appearance. ## Customising the appearance You can customise the appearance as follows: + Adjust the list of workspaces that are items on the main menu: You can keep in the appearance only the workspaces that correspond to the business processes of your organisation. To perform this task, you can add new workspaces and populate them with items (tiles and links that provide access to windows and reports), delete existing menu items for workspaces that do not comply with your business processes, and rename existing workspaces. + Change the items of a workspace: You can customise a workspace so that only the items that your employees use in their work are displayed there. You can change the list of windows, reports, and dashboards in a workspace, regroup the links to windows and reports in a workspace, reorder the links to windows and reports in a category, remove unnecessary tiles and links to windows, reports, and dashboards from a workspace, and reorder tiles in a workspace. By using edit mode, you can customise the appearance in a variety of ways. To switch to this mode, click **Edit menu**. The **Edit menu** item is available for only users with the **Administrator** role. If you customise the appearance in this mode and then decide to return the initial state of the main menu and all workspaces, you can reset the menu settings to default. Changes in the following menu elements will be reset: + The list of workspaces that are items on the main menu and the **More items** menu + Items in each workspace, including categories, tiles, and links to windows, reports, and dashboards + Items in quick menu of each workspace for all users of the system + Workspaces pinned to the main menu and unpinned from the main menu for all users of the system For details, see:. ## Managing the workspaces listed on the main menu The main menu is the primary navigation tool that you and the employees of your organisation use when you start working in Visma Net. The system provides you with predefined workspaces list that is displayed in the main menu. The list of workspaces that a user sees by default is determined by the functionalities enabled based on your Visma Net license and the access rights of the user roles assigned to the particular user account. You must configure access rights for users to each window and report that belongs to a workspace. For details, see: About user access rights. If the default list of workspaces (that is, the items on the main menu) does not correspond to the business processes of your organisation, you can configure the list as follows: Delete existing workspaces : If a predefined workspace does not fit the business processes of your organisation and will not be needed by system users, you can completely delete it from the system. When you delete a workspace, the system completely deletes tiles that belonged to the workspace, but windows, reports, and dashboards that belonged to the workspace remain in the system; you can add to other workspaces links to these windows, reports, and dashboards. Add new workspaces : If your organisation has a specific business process that requires windows, reports, and dashboards from different functional areas to be gathered on one menu for employees' convenience, you can create a custom workspace and pin it to the main menu panel. For details, see: [Create and configure a workspace](/visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/add-and-configure-a-workspace/). ## Management of workspace tiles and links Workspaces are used in the system to organise links to windows, reports, and dashboards in a way that is convenient to users. By default, each workspace contains tiles (buttons that provide users with quick access to frequently used windows) and links to windows, reports, and dashboards grouped by categories (such as **Profiles**, **Reports**, and **Preferences**). Each organisation has its own business processes and uses sets of Visma Netwindows, reports, and dashboards based on these processes. To make a workspace convenient for the employees of your organisation, you can do the following: + **Change the default list of links to windows, reports, and dashboards displayed in a workspace** If you need different windows, reports, and dashboards to be displayed in a workspace, you can change the default list by showing the items that are hidden by default and hiding the items that are displayed by default. + **Add new links to windows, reports, and dashboards to a workspace** If a link to a window, report, and dashboard is not on a workspace by default but the employees of your organisation want to have it in this workspace, you can add the required link to any Visma Net window, report, or dashboard to the workspace. [Add a link to a workspace](/visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/add-a-link-to-a-workspace/). If a link to a window or report is not added to any of workspaces you cannot find this window or report by using the **Search** field on the top pane of the Visma Net window. For more information, see: + **Regroup links to windows, reports, and dashboards in a workspace** If the default grouping of links to windows, reports, and dashboards in a workspace is inconvenient for the employees of your organisation, you can move these links to other existing categories, or create a category that fits the terminology used by your employees. Changes to grouping settings affect only the workspace in which they are changed. For details, see: [Regroup windows and reports in a workspace](/visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/regroup-windows-and-reports-in-a-workspace/). If you need to move a link to an existing category, which is displayed in a workspace, in the edit mode, you can simply drag the link to the category. + **Reorder links to windows, reports, and dashboards in a category** In the edit mode, you can reorder links to windows, reports, and dashboards in a category by dragging each link to a necessary position. + **Remove links to windows, reports, and dashboards from a workspace** If you are sure that users will not need a particular link to a window, report, or dashboard in a workspace, you can remove this link from the workspace. (The window, report, or dashboard will remain in the system.) + **Delete preconfigured tiles** If the employees of your organisation do not use functions preconfigured in tiles, you can delete the tiles from a workspace to have more space in the workspace. CAUTION: After you delete a tile, you will be able to restore it only when restoring menu settings to default. + **Reorder tiles in a workspace** In the edit mode, you can reorder tiles in a workspace by dragging each tile to a necessary position. Add and configure a workspace /visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/add-and-configure-a-workspace section If the predefined workspaces do not include a particular business process of your organisation, you can create a workspace and configure it to fit employees' work related to this process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add and configure a workspace If the predefined workspaces do not include a particular business process of your organisation, you can create a workspace and configure it to fit employees' work related to this process. ## Create and configure a workspace In this topic, you will read about how to create and configure a workspace. ### Create a workspace 1. On the main menu, click **Edit menu** to switch to the edit mode. 1. On the top toolbar (top left), click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) ( **Add workspace** ). 1. In the **Workspace parameters dialog box**, specify the following settings: 1. In the **Icon** field, select the icon that will be associated with the workspace. 1. In the **Area** field, select the general functional area by which the workspace will be displayed in the **More items** menu. 1. In the **Title** field, type the unique title you want to be used for the workspace. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes. ### Configure a new workspace 1. On the main menu, click **Edit menu** to switch to the edit mode. 1. On the main menu, click the title of the workspace you want to configure. 1. On the top toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) ( **Add menu item**. 1. In the **Select windows** dialog window, select the check boxes to the left of all windows and reports you want to add to the workspace. You can use the **Search** field in the top of the dialog field to narrow the range of windows and reports displayed. Only windows and reports with the search string in their name or ID are displayed. 1. Click **Add and close** to save your changes and close the dialog window. 1. If you want to group windows and reports by categories, do the following: 1. If a category with the required title does not exist, you first create the category as follows: 1. In the top right corner (on the top toolbar), click **Menu settings**. 1. On the toolbar of the **Workspace categories** menu, click **Add category**. 1. In the **Category parameters dialog box**, type the category title and click **OK**. 1. Click **Menu settings** to close the menu. 1. Point to the title of a window or report that you want to group by a category and on the pop-up toolbar, click ![Form_Popup_Menu_Edit](/media/visma-net-erp/Form_Popup_Menu_Edit.png) (Edit) to open the **Window parameters dialog box**. 1. In the **Category** field, select the category to which you want to add the window or report, and click **OK**. 1. Repeat steps b and c for each window or report that you need to place under a particular category. 1. On the workspace title bar, click ![Images_Workspace_Title_Bar_Edit_Mode_Pin](/media/visma-net-erp/Images_Workspace_Title_Bar_Edit_Mode_Pin.png) (Pin) to display the new workspace on the main menu. 1. In the bottom left corner of the screen, click **Exit edit menu** to save your changes and exit the edit mode. Add a link to a workspace /visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/add-a-link-to-a-workspace section You can add a link to a window or report to a workspace even if it is not in the menu by default, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a link to a workspace You can add a link to a window or report to a workspace even if it is not in the menu by default, as described in this topic. 1. On the main menu, click **Edit menu** to switch to the edit mode. 1. On the main menu, click the title of a workspace whose menu items you want to change. 1. On the top toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) ( **Add menu item** ). 1. In the **Select windows dialog box**, do the following: 1. Optional: In the **Search** field, type the title or ID of the window or report you want to add to the workspace. 1. Select the check box on the left of the window title. 1. Repeat the previous two sub steps for all windows or reports you want to add to the workspace. 1. Click **Add and close**. 1. Optional: Select the check box to the left of the items you want to add to the quick menu. 1. In the bottom left corner of the screen, click **Exit edit menu** to save your changes and exit the edit mode. Add and customise a tile /visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/add-and-customise-a-tile page To adapt Visma Net to your company's specific needs, you can add tiles in workspaces and configure them with specific parameters, so that you can easily access operations you use a lot. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add and customise a tile To adapt Visma Net to your company's specific needs, you can add tiles in workspaces and configure them with specific parameters, so that you can easily access operations you use a lot. To add and customise tiles, you need menu editing rights in the system. Make sure that the correct rights have been set for you in the Users (SM201010) window, before you start this procedure. 1. Go to the workspace where you want to add a tile. 1. In the bottom left corner, click **Edit menu**.You see that you enter into edit mode, with the black ribbon at the top of your workspace. 1. In the top ribbon, click **Add tile**. The **Tile parameters** box is displayed. 1. In the **Icon** field, select the icon you want to use on your tile. 1. In the **Title** field, name your tile. 1. In the **Form** field, select the window that you want to use. 1. Click OK. 1. Click on the tile you just created and the change the parameters in the window. 1. In the **Web address** field, notice the parameters that begin with "&" and copy them. 1. Go to the tile and choose **Edit**. 1. Paste them into the **Parameters** field and save. The tile will now behave according to the parameters you have set. Regroup windows and reports in a workspace /visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/regroup-windows-and-reports-in-a-workspace section For each window or report listed in a workspace, you can change the category under which it is displayed, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Regroup windows and reports in a workspace For each window or report listed in a workspace, you can change the category under which it is displayed, as described in this topic. For each window or report listed in a workspace, you can change the category under which it is displayed, as described in this topic. These changes affect both views of the workspace items, the quick menu and all items. 1. On the main menu, click **Edit menu** to switch to the edit mode. 1. On the main menu, click the title of the workspace whose menu items you want to regroup. 1. If you add a new category for windows and reports to be placed under, do the following: 1. On the toolbar, click **Menu settings**. 1. On the menu title bar, click **Add category**. 1. In the **Title** field of the **Category parameters dialog box**, type the title of the new category. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes. 1. Point to the window or report that you want to place in a different category to open the pop-up toolbar. 1. On the pop-up toolbar of the window or report, click ![Form_Popup_Menu_Edit](/media/visma-net-erp/Form_Popup_Menu_Edit.png) (Edit). 1. In the **Category** field of the **Window parameters dialog box**, select the category under which you want to place the window or report. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes. 1. Repeat the previous four steps for each window you want to place under a different category. 1. In the bottom left corner of the screen, click **Exit edit menu** to save your changes and exit the edit mode. Remove a window or report from a workspace /visma-net-erp/help/administration-and-customisation-of-appearance/remove-a-window-or-report-from-a-workspace section When you know that the employees of your organisation will not open a window or report from a particular workspace, you can remove the link to this window or report from the workspace, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Remove a window or report from a workspace When you know that the employees of your organisation will not open a window or report from a particular workspace, you can remove the link to this window or report from the workspace, as described in this topic. These changes affect both views of the workspace items, the quick menu and all items. 1. On the main menu, click **Edit menu** to switch to the edit mode. 1. On the main menu, click the title of a workspace whose menu items you want to remove. 1. Point to the window or report that you want to remove from the workspace to open the pop-up toolbar. 1. On the pop-up toolbar of the window or report, click ![Form_Popup_Menu_Delete](/media/visma-net-erp/Form_Popup_Menu_Delete.png) (Delete ). 1. In the warning message, click **OK**. 1. In the bottom left corner of the screen, click **Exit edit menu** to save your changes and exit the edit mode. Automation /visma-net-erp/help/automation section By using the Automation module, you can change the existing business logic associated with particular windows to fit your business processes and requirements and to set up document processing to be performed automatically. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Automation By using the Automation module, you can change the existing business logic associated with particular windows to fit your business processes and requirements and to set up document processing to be performed automatically. By using the Automation module, you can change the existing business logic associated with particular windows to fit your business processes and requirements and to set up document processing to be performed automatically. To help users minimise input errors and save time when creating similar records or entering recurring or similar documents, Visma Net provides document templates and copy-and-paste options for most windows used for data entry. This topic covers the primary functionalities and options of the Automation module, which are described in their own topics as well. ## Managing data entry notifications For effective work, employees need real-time information on changes in documents. In Visma Net, you can configure custom notifications on any data entry window, so that employees can sign up for the notifications they are interested in. Emails will then be sent to employees to inform them that specific documents have been modified or have a changed status. For details, see: [About change notifications on data entry windows.](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-change-notifications-on-data-entry-windows/) ## Scheduled processing In any ERP system, the processing of documents or the validation of accounts requires significant time and system resources. As such, this processing or validation should be performed at times when there are no employees at work, such as weekends or nights. Other processing, such as releasing or posting documents, takes less time but also should be performed regularly, at a frequency that meets your business needs. In Visma Net, you can set up automated processing for most processing windows instead of initiating the processing manually. For details, see: [About scheduled processing.](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-scheduled-processing/) Automation - overview /visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-overview page By using the Automation module, you can change the existing business logic associated with particular windows to fit your business processes and requirements and to set up document processing to be performed automatically. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Automation - overview By using the Automation module, you can change the existing business logic associated with particular windows to fit your business processes and requirements and to set up document processing to be performed automatically. By using the Automation module, you can change the existing business logic associated with particular windows to fit your business processes and requirements and to set up document processing to be performed automatically. To help users minimise input errors and save time when creating similar records or entering recurring or similar documents, Visma Net provides document templates and copy-and-paste options for most windows used for data entry. This topic covers the primary functionalities and options of the Automation module, which are described in their own topics as well. This is an overview of screens used in automating processes. [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) [Send notifications (SM205050)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-notifications-sm205050/) [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) [Automation schedules overview (SM205030)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-overview-sm205030/) ## Managing data entry notifications For effective work, employees need real-time information on changes in documents. In Visma Net, you can configure custom notifications on any data entry window, so that employees can sign up for the notifications they are interested in. Emails will then be sent to employees to inform them that specific documents have been modified or have a changed status. For details, see: [About change notifications on data entry windows](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-change-notifications-on-data-entry-windows/). ## Scheduled processing In any ERP system, the processing of documents or the validation of accounts requires significant time and system resources. As such, this processing or validation should be performed at times when there are no employees at work, such as weekends or nights. Other processing, such as releasing or posting documents, takes less time but also should be performed regularly, at a frequency that meets your business needs. In Visma Net, you can set up automated processing for most processing windows instead of initiating the processing manually. For details, see:[About scheduled processing](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-scheduled-processing/). ## Business process monitoring In Visma Net, you execute various business processes, which may require you to monitor different activities and events in the system. To eliminate the need for users to monitor the business processes, you can configure the system to monitor the company data and to perform an action or multiple actions in the system (such as sending a email notification) by the specified schedule or if the data has been changed in the system. To configure the system to monitor a business process, you define a **business event**, which is a set of conditions checked for on a schedule or a data change that the system should use to determine when to perform an action or actions. As compared to the data entry notifications, described in [About change notifications on data entry windows](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-change-notifications-on-data-entry-windows/), business process monitoring provides wider opportunities to select the data to monitor. The system can monitor almost any data in the system without it being related to a data entry Visma Net window. Business process monitoring also gives you more flexible ways to define how the data should be monitored (continuously or by schedule) and what should be done based on the results of monitoring.

Related pages

Concepts

 About scheduled processing /visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-scheduled-processing page In any ERP system, such tasks as the processing of documents or the validation of accounts require significant time and system resources. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About scheduled processing In any ERP system, such tasks as the processing of documents or the validation of accounts require significant time and system resources. In any ERP system, such tasks as the processing of documents or the validation of accounts require significant time and system resources. As such, they should be processed at times when there are no employees at work, such as weekends or nights. Other processing, such as releasing or posting documents, takes less time but also should be performed regularly, with a frequency determined by your business needs. + From the target processing window: Here you configure the appropriate processing. You then invoke the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window as a pop-up to create a new schedule for this processing. + By using the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window: In this window, you can set up both operations by using different tabs. Generally, both ways deliver the same result, although the first way is a bit easier if you use predefined filters to display appropriate documents (or other entities) on the processing window. For details, see: [Schedule processing](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/procedures/schedule-processing/). The system uses the **admin** user account to run scheduled processes. This account uses the first available system locale, which is specified in the [System Locales (SM200550)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550/) window for the company with the schedule. The sections below describe the two ways you can configure automatic processing. When you set up an automatic processing, you'll have to create separate schedules for each set of documents you generally process (or for the most time-consuming ones) and manually process the rest of the documents. ## Configure processing through a specific processing window Generally, the scheduling of processing includes two operations: 1. The configuration of processing: Selecting documents by their date, total amount, customer or supplier, currency, or any other relevant property 1. The scheduling itself: Specifying how often processing should be performed, at what time, and with or without a limit on the number of executions On many of the processing windows, you can sort documents by specific criteria, such as posting period, document type, or processing type. When you perform the processing manually, you open the appropriate window and use the elements in the top part to select the documents or other objects for processing. You can create a filter or use an existing filter for the window to select documents by their properties, such as amounts in a specific range. To select the appropriate documents for automatic processing by using the processing window, you do the following: + Use the top part of the processing window to specify criteria. + Optionally, apply a filter to select documents or objects by their properties. + On the **Schedule** menu of the window toolbar, select **Add**. This brings up the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window as a pop-up window; the values specified in the top part and the settings of the applied filter appear on the **Conditions** and **Filter values** tabs of the window. + Specify a name for the schedule, as well as its description, frequency, expiration information, and time of the day. Save the schedule. ## Configuring processing using the automation schedules window By using the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window, you can configure scheduled processing for any processing window. To select documents for automatic processing by using this window, you do the following: 1. Select the processing window by its screen ID. 1. Specify a name for the schedule, as well as its description, frequency, expiration information, and time of the day. 1. Specify the dates and the particular time to start processing. You can specify a start and end time for a processing session if you want the processing to be performed in sessions. Then the system, after stopping the processing at the end time, suspends it during the specified interval and resumes processing when a new session starts. 1. On the **Conditions** tab, specify the values that you would otherwise specify in the Selection area of the processing window. 1. On the **Filter values** tab, specify the filtering conditions based on the document or object properties. If a field on the processing window is automatically filled in with a default value—for example, the **Allocation date** field in the [Run allocations - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/run-allocations-gl504500/) window, which by default has the current business date value—the system filters the entities that should be processed by this value. To reset the filter that uses the field's default value, on the **Filter values** tab, you need to add a new filter for this field and leave the value empty. 1. Save the schedule. ## Viewing the history of schedules Once you have assigned the processing to the schedule, processing of the window will be performed automatically, in accordance with the assigned schedule. To view when and how it was performed, on the original processing window, use the **Schedule** menu (on the window toolbar): Select the **History** option, which allows you to view the history of schedule execution in a specified date range. For details, see: [Schedule processing](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/procedures/schedule-processing/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About change notifications on data entry windows /visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-change-notifications-on-data-entry-windows section In Visma Net, you can configure record change notifications if the Change notifications functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About change notifications on data entry windows In Visma Net, you can configure record change notifications if the Change notifications functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). Record change notifications are emails the system generates and sends when specific changes are made to particular documents. ## Uses of record change notifications Notifications can help your employees and selected external contacts track key developments that occur within the organisation. Some examples include the following: + A sales manager may want the system to notify a customer contact when a sales order has been shipped to the customer. + Your company might want to tell customers about changes in their blanket purchase orders. + A manager may want to know when a specific purchase order has received all the required approvals. + A credit manager may want to know when a sales order is created for a particular customer that is approaching its credit limit. + A customer service manager may want to be informed when a new employee is assigned a case of a specific type, to give the employee assistance with this type of case. ## Public and private notifications You can configure private notifications to be received by only particular recipients and public notifications for which users can sign up. For private notifications, you can specify very precise conditions for sending the notification email, and choose only appropriate individuals to receive it. You can configure public notifications about typical changes in documents of a specific type that employees and external contacts may want to know about. These public notifications are visible to all users who have access to the respective data entry windows. When a user is viewing a document of the specific type on the window, the user can sign up for the notification to receive emails about changes made to the particular document. ## Access to notification configuration To create a new notification, a user should have access to the [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) window at the **Insert** level of access or higher. If you want multiple users to be able to create new notifications, configure a **Notification administrator** role with an **Insert** or **Delete** level of access to the [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) window. Users with this role can then create private and public notifications for other users of the organisation. A user doesn't need access to the [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) window, however, to sign up for an existing public notification. If a user has access to a data entry window for which public notifications have been configured, the user can sign up for notifications associated with the window, to monitor changes in specific records or documents. ## Creation of a new public notification To begin creating a new public notification about changes in documents of a specific type or certain records, do one of the following: + Open the window where specific documents are created, click **Notifications** (upper right of the window), and then click **Create new**. This opens the [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) window as a pop-up window so that you can create a new notification. + Open the [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) window directly, and select the data entry window of interest in the **Screen ID** field. Now that you are on the [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) window with the appropriate screen selected, perform the following steps: 1. Provide a description for the notification. After you save the notification, the description will serve as the notification ID. 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected. 1. Provide a subject for emails to be sent for this notification. 1. Optional: In the **Data source** field, select one of the following options: + **Report**: To send an electronic version of the document with the notification email, either as an attachment or as the email body. If you select this option, specify the **Report ID** and the **Report format**. To send the document in the email body, select the **Embedded** check box; in this case, you cannot specify other text for the email message. + **Action**: To execute a specific action once a notification email is generated. For example: If you configure notification emails as emails based on an email template, by using this option, you can specify whether to print the document, release it, or void it. + **None**: To not perform any additional actions. 1. Select the **Public** check box. 1. Click the **Message** tab. If you have selected the **Embedded** check box, the document generated based on the specified report will be used as email body; otherwise, type the text of the notification email, or paste the notification template that you previously created in the Notifications. To make emails personalised, use placeholders in double parentheses, such as **((EmployeeFirstName))**. 1. Do the following to specify the conditions that the system will check when the document is saved and send notification emails if the conditions are met: + On the **Conditions** tab, specify the conditions for the document field values. + On the **Fields** tab, select the fields whose changes should be monitored. 1. On the **Addresses** tab, specify the list of recipients. For each recipient, specify the following information: + In the **Source** field, select one of the following options as the source of the recipient's address: **Document** (to select recipients among the contacts associated with the document, such as customer or supplier contacts) or **User** (to select recipients among all users defined in the system). + In the **Email** field, select the email address of the recipient. + Make sure the **Active** check box is selected. + In the **Type** field, select the type of this recipient: **To**, **CC**, or **BCC**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Signing up for a public notification Public notifications created for a particular data entry window are visible to all users who have access to the window. To sign up for a public notification, a user should do the following: 1. Open the data entry window, and select the appropriate document. 1. Click **Notifications** (upper right of the title bar). From the drop-down list of options, click the particular notification, which opens the [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) window (a version of the window intended only for signing up) as a pop-up window. 1. On the **Addresses** tab, add the user's own email address to the list of recipients. On the **Conditions** tab of the pop-up window, a new line with the document reference number will be added automatically. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After the user has completed these steps, if the values in the monitored elements are changed, the user will receive a notification email.

Related pages

Windows

 Procedures /visma-net-erp/help/automation/procedures section This topic contains instructions that will help you perform tasks involving automation functionality. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Procedures This topic contains instructions that will help you perform tasks involving automation functionality. Schedule processing /visma-net-erp/help/automation/procedures/schedule-processing section In Visma Net, you can schedule processing on any needed processing windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule processing In Visma Net, you can schedule processing on any needed processing windows. In Visma Net, you can schedule processing on any needed processing windows. The processing will be performed automatically according to the schedule, which you assign in the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window. At any time, you can view the history of this automated processing. ## Schedule processing through the processing window 1. Navigate to the processing window you want to schedule. 1. In the processing window, do the following: 1. Optional: In the top part, specify the criteria for selecting the documents for processing. View the list of documents that match the selected criteria, and make sure all the documents you want to process are displayed (that is, that you have selected the criteria correctly). 1. On the window toolbar, click **Schedules** > **Add**. This opens the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window as a pop-up. 1. In the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window, in the **Description** field, enter a description of the new schedule. 1. Make sure the processing window you want to schedule is selected in the **Window ID** field. 1. In the **Action name** field, select the action that should be performed by the schedule. 1. On the **Details** tab, specify the additional settings of the schedule: 1. Optional: In the **Starts on** field of the **Details** tab, select the start date. By default, the schedule execution starts on the current business date. 1. Optional: If you need to specify an expiration date for the schedule, clear the **No expiration date** check box, and specify the expiration date in the **Expires on** window. 1. Do one of the following: + If you want to limit the number of executions, in the **Execution limit** field, specify the number of times the schedule should be executed. + If you do not need to limit the number of executions, select the **No execution limit** check box. 1. Optional: In the **Process with branch** field, select the branch under which the schedule should be processed. For example: If documents are created by this schedule, the system creates these documents and specifies the selected branch for each document. 1. Optional: Change the time zone in which the schedule will operate. By default, the time zone specified in the [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/) window for the currently signed-in user is selected. 1. On the **Schedule** tab, configure the execution dates and time as follows: 1. Specify how often the schedule execution should be performed: + To execute the schedule daily or every **x** days, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x day(s)** field, type the number of days between successive executions of the schedule. + To execute the schedule weekly or every **x** weeks, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Weekly**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x week(s)** field, type the number of weeks between successive executions of the schedule. 1. Select the appropriate check boxes for the day or days of the week on which the schedule should be executed. + To execute the schedule monthly or every **x** months, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Monthly**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x month(s)** field, type the number of months between successive executions of the schedule. 1. Select when the schedule should be executed: the day of the month, or the week in the month and the day of the week (such as the third Friday of the month). + To execute the schedule once per financial period or every **x** financial periods, perform the following steps: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **By financial period**. 1. Optional: In the **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the date when the schedule should be executed next. 1. In the **Every x period(s)** field, type the number of financial periods between successive executions of the schedule. 1. Select the appropriate option button to indicate when the schedules should be executed: at the end of the period, at the start of the period, or on a fixed day of the period (which you should specify if you select this option button). 1. In the **Execution time** section, specify the particular time of the day to start and stop the processing as follows: 1. In the **Starts on** field, select the hour and minute when the first execution of the schedule should start. 1. If you want the processing to be stopped at specific time or you want the processing to be repeated multiple times a day, in the **Stops on** field, select the hour and minute when the first execution of the schedule should stop. 1. If execution of the schedule should be repeated multiple times a day, in the **Every** field, select the interval between successive executions of the schedule. 1. In the **Next execution time** field, make sure the next execution time is correct. 1. If you want the system to execute the schedule at exactly the time specified in the **Next execution time** field, select the **Exact time** check box. If the check box is cleared, the system may shift the next execution time of the schedule by multiple minutes. 1. Optional: On the **Conditions** tab, specify conditions to select the documents or objects by and for which there are no corresponding elements in the top part of the original processing window as follows: 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected. 1. In the **Field name** column, select the field to which you want to apply the filter. 1. In the **Condition** column, select the condition on the field. 1. If the field selected in the **Field name** column for this row is a date field and you want the date field to be relative with respect to the current business date, select the **Relative** check box. 1. Select the filtering value in the **Value** column and, if **Is between** is selected in the **Condition** column, in the **Value 2** column. 1. Optional: On the **Filter values** tab, review the list of elements with the values. Notice that all the listed elements have the values you have selected in the top part on the original processing window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) in the window toolbar to create the schedule. When you save a newly created schedule, the system gives it an ID in accordance with the built-in numbering sequence intended for automation schedules. ## View or edit the schedules for the window 1. Open the processing window for which a schedule has been created (or multiple schedules have been created). 1. On the window toolbar, click **Schedules** > **View**. 1. On the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window, which is opened, in the **Schedule ID** field, select the schedule. 1. View or edit the schedule. ## View the history of schedule executions 1. Open the processing window for which a schedule has been created (or multiple schedules have been created). 1. On the window toolbar, click **Schedules** > **History**. 1. In the dialog box that opens, select the schedule whose history you want to view, and specify the date range for which you want to view the history. 1. Click **History** in the dialog box to view the history of schedule execution.

Related pages

Windows

 Automation windows /visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows section This is an overview of screens used in automating processes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Automation windows This is an overview of screens used in automating processes. [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) [Send notifications (SM205050)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-notifications-sm205050/) [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) [Automation schedules overview (SM205030)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-overview-sm205030/) Automation notifications (SM205040) /visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040 page You can use this window to configure private and public notifications about record changes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Automation notifications (SM205040) You can use this window to configure private and public notifications about record changes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to configure private and public notifications about record changes. You configure private notifications to be received by only particular recipients. You configure public notifications about typical changes that might occur in documents of a specific type, and users can sign up to receive notification emails about these changes in particular documents. You can create and use email templates with special variables—that is, place-holders where the system will insert the recipient's personalised data when the system generates the email. Alternatively, an electronic version of the changed document can be sent as an attachment or as the email body if an appropriate report (to be used as a template for generating the electronic document) is specified. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View window Opens (as a pop-up window) the window for which the notification is configured.
## The Change notification area You can use this area to create a new notification or to select an existing notification and view its details. For a new notification, you select the Visma Net window on which the document is created or changed. You also specify whether the notification email should contain the document (generated in accordance with its template, which is defined by the report you specify) or a predefined message with the document used as an attachment.
Element Description
Window ID The ID of the Visma Net window (screen). Click the selector icon to display the tree, and select the window by its name from the tree.
Notification ID The unique identifier, which the system automatically assigns (by using the Description value) when you save the notification for the first time. You can select existing notifications by their IDs and view notification details.
Description A description of the notification, which will serve as its identifier. This value can be an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this notification is active.
Public A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) that this notification is public, which means that other users can sign up to receive notification emails.
Subject The subject to be used for notification emails.
Data source

The data source of the notification email. Select one of the following options:

Report
To send an electronic version of the document with the notification email. The system generates the document by using the specified report as a template. The document can be sent as an attachment or as the email body. Select the particular report in the Report ID field and the format in the Report format field. To send the document in the email body, select the Embedded check box; in this case, no other text can be specified for the email message.
Action
To also execute a specific action once a notification email is generated. If you select this option, specify the action in Action name.
None
To not perform any additional actions.
Report ID The report that is a template for generating documents if Report is selected as the data source. The document based on the specified report can be sent as an email attachment or as the email body.
Report format The format to be used for the document if Report is selected as the data source.
Embedded A check box that you select t to indicate to the system that the report-based document should be used as the email body. This check box is available only if Report is the selected data source.
Action name

The action to be executed once the notification email is generated. If you select an action that is actually a menu, you can select a particular action in the Menu text field.

The Action name field is available only if you have selected Action as the data source.
Menu text The action from the menu selected in the Action name field to be executed once the notification email is generated. Menu text is available only if you have selected Action as the data source and have selected an action that is a menu.
## The Message tab On this tab, you can create a message by using a WYSIWYG text editor with a text field and toolbar. The toolbar of the text editor has formatting tools similar to the ones used by many popular text editors. You can insert place-holders—system variables enclosed in double parentheses, such as **((CustomerFullName))**—to use recipient data to personalise notification emails when they're sent. This tab doesn't appear if you select the **HTML** report format and you select the **Embedded** check box. By using the editor, you can perform the following actions: + Type the text of the email + Insert place-holders (special links to recipient data) into email text and the **To** and **Subject** elements + Change a font and size for selected text + Copy, cut, and paste selected text + Create a numbered or bullet list + Attach a file to the email by clicking the Attach file icon on the editor toolbar + Insert an image by clicking the Insert image icon on the editor toolbar ## The Conditions tab On the **Conditions** tab, you can specify the conditions that the system checks each time the document is saved. The system generates a notification email only if the conditions are met.
Column Description
Active A check box that you select t if the condition specified in this row is active and should be used for the notification.
Brackets The opening bracket for a logical expression. Brackets are used to designate the order of operations.
Field name The field in the window whose value is used in the condition.
Condition

The logical operation to apply to the value of the chosen data field.

The following options are available: Equals, Does not equal, Is greater than, Is greater than or equal to, Is less than, Is less than or equal to, Contains, Starts with, Ends with, Does not contain, Is between, Is null, and Is not null.
Is relative A check box that you select t if the field value is relative to the current business date. This option is used only for date fields.
Value The first value of the condition to be compared with the chosen data field value. Most of the conditions require only one value, while Is between requires two values.
Value 2 The second value of the condition, if required by the chosen condition.
Brackets The brackets for enclosing a logical expression. Brackets are used to designate the order of operations.
Operator The logical operator, And or Or, to be used to join logical expressions on different lines.
## The Addresses tab On this time, you can select email addresses to which the notification emails are be sent.
Column Description
Active A check box that you select t if this address is active and should be used for the notification.
Source

The source of the recipient addresses. The option you select determines the email addresses you can select from in the Email field. Select one of the following options:

User
The users of the website, generally the employees
Document
The contacts associated with the document
Email The email address of the user or contact.
Type

The way this type of the email address should be used. You can select from the following options:

To
As an email recipient address
CC
As the email address of a person to receive a copy
BCC
As the email address of a person to receive a hidden copy
Reply
As the email address of a person to receive a reply to the notification
## The Fields tab On the **Fields** tab, you specify the window fields any changes in which for the document should be monitored by the system. When a user clicks **Save**, if the system detects that the field values have been changed since the last notification, a new notification email will be generated.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that you intend to monitor the field (specified as the Field name ) for changes.
Field name The field to be monitored for changes. Recipients will be notified each time the value of the field changes.
Automation schedules (SM205020) /visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020 page In this window, you can select a processing window and schedule the automatic execution of a specific operation for documents that match certain conditions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Automation schedules (SM205020) In this window, you can select a processing window and schedule the automatic execution of a specific operation for documents that match certain conditions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can select a processing window and schedule the automatic execution of a specific operation for documents that match certain conditions. Also, you can view other schedules that have been defined for the same window or other windows and modify them as needed. For details on using automation schedules, see: [About scheduled processing](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/about-scheduled-processing/). The window is available only if the **Scheduled processing** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View window Navigates to the window that is the object of automation.
Run schedule Clicking this button test executes the selected schedule.
## The top part In the top part, you select an existing automation schedule for viewing or editing its settings or specify the settings of a new schedule.
Element Description
Schedule ID The identifier of the automation schedule. When you are saving a newly created schedule, the system generates the identifier automatically based on the value in Description.
Description Required. A description of the automation schedule.
Window ID Required. The name of the Visma Net processing or inquiry window, that is the object of automation. You click the Magnifier icon in the field to display the site tree and select a window by its name from the site tree.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the automation schedule is active and can be used for automation.
Action name

The name of the action that is to be performed by the schedule.

You must select a Schedule ID to see the Action name.

When a processing window is selected in the Screen ID, you can select one of the actions available on toolbar of the processing window.
## The Details tab Use this tab to enter, view, and edit additional settings of the automation schedule..
Element Description
Starts on

The date when the schedule starts.

By default, the field contains the current business date.
Expires on The date when the schedule expires.
No expiration date A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule never expires.
Execution limit The number of times the schedule should be executed.
No execution limit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule can be executed an unlimited number of times.
Language

The language to be used in the notifications coming from scheduler. Select between:

  • Dansk (Danish)
  • English (UK)
  • English (US)
  • Nederlands (Dutch)
  • Norsk (Norwegian)
  • Suomi (Finnish)
  • Svenska (Swedish)
Executed A read-only field that displays the number of times the schedule has been executed.
Last executed The date when the schedule was executed last.
Next execution The date when the schedule will be executed next.
Time zone

The time zone in which the schedule operates.

The default value is the time zone of the currently signed-in user.
## The Schedule tab Schedule type and Schedule details sections presented in coordination
Element Description
Daily

Select to configure the schedule to be executed daily.
Next execution date

Required. The date when the schedule will be executed next.

The system fills in the value in this field automatically based on the value specified in Starts on on the Details tab and the values of other elements specified in this section. You can adjust the value in this field manually.
Every x day(s) An integer that represents the interval during a week for action execution.
Weekly

Select to configure the schedule to be executed weekly.
Every x week(s) An integer that represents the interval during a week for action execution.
Sunday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Sunday.
Monday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Monday.
Tuesday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Tuesday.
Wednesday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Wednesday.
Thursday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Thursday.
Friday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Friday.
Saturday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Saturday.
Monthly

Select to configure the schedule to be executed monthly.
Every x month(s) An integer that represents the time interval (in months) for action execution, with the options below indicating the day of the month when the action should be executed. You can select one of the options below. For example: A 3 in this field represents action execution every three months.
On Day x An option that configures the action to be executed on the specified day of the month.
On the Nth day of the week An option that configures the action to be executed on the specified day of the week, such as 2nd Thursday. In the left field, you specify the ordinal number that represents the week in the month. In the right field, you specify the day of the week.
By financial period

Select to configure the schedule to be executed monthly.
Every x Period(s) An integer that represents the time interval between schedule executions, measured in financial periods, with the options below indicating the date when the action should be executed. All the transactions will be dated on this date. You can select one of the options below.
End of the period An option that sets the end date of the financial period as the day when the action should be executed.
Start of the period An option that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when the action should be executed.
Fixed day of the period An option that defines a particular day of the financial period when the action should be executed.
### The execution time section
Element Description
Run between

One field indicating the start time: The hour/half hour when the first session of the schedule should start.

One field indicating the end time: The hour/half hour when the first session of the schedule should stop. When the specified time comes, the system finishes processing of the current document (if the processing is in mid-document at the stop time) and proceeds with the next documents at the next execution time.
Every The interval in hours and minutes between successive sessions of execution if the schedule must be executed multiple times a day. If you specify a value in this box, you must specify the value in the Run between box.
### The Schedule details section, the Daily radio button
Element Description
Every x day(s)

An integer that represents the time interval (in days) for action execution.

For example: 1 means every day and 2 means every other day, starting on the date specified in Starts on on the Details tab.
### The Schedule details section, the Weekly radio button
Element Description
Every x week(s)

An integer that represents the time interval (in weeks) for action execution, with the fields below indicating the day of the week when the action should be executed.

You can select any of the check boxes below.
Sunday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Sunday.
Monday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Monday.
Tuesday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Tuesday.
Wednesday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Wednesday.
Thursday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Thursday.
Friday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Friday.
Saturday A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should execute the action on Saturday.
### The Schedule details section, the By financial period radio button
Element Description
Every x Period(s) An integer that represents the time interval between schedule executions, measured in financial periods, with the options below indicating the date when the action should be executed. All the transactions will be dated on this date. You can select one of the options below.
End of the period An option that sets the end date of the financial period as the day when the action should be executed.
Start of the period An option that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when the action should be executed.
Fixed day of the period An option that defines a particular day of the financial period when the action should be executed.
## The Conditions tab On the **Conditions** tab, you define the conditions for the schedule to be executed. If documents or records in the Visma Net window specified in the **Window ID** field match the conditions specified here, the action specified in the **Action name** field of the top part will be executed for this document.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the condition is active.
Start bracket The opening bracket for a logical expression. Brackets are used to designate the order of operations.
Field name The field in the selected window. You can set up conditions on the field value.
Condition The logical operation to apply to the value of the selected data field. The following options are available: Equals, Does not equal, Is greater than, Is greater than or equal to, Is less than, Is less than or equal to, Contains, Starts with, Ends with, Does not contain, Is between, Is null, and Is not null.
Relative A check box that indicates (if selected) that the value of the date field is relative with respect to the current business date. This option is used only if the field selected in the Field name column for this row is a date field.
Value The first value of the condition to be compared with the value of the data field selected in this row.
Value 2 The second value of the condition, if required by the condition selected in this row. Most of the conditions require only one value to be specified, while Is between requires two values.
End bracket The bracket for enclosing a logical expression. Brackets are used to designate the order of operations.
Operator The logical operator, And or Or, to be used to join logical expressions on different lines.
## The Filter values tab If the scheduled window (the window selected in the **Window ID** field of the top part) is a processing window that has a top part, on this tab, you can assign values to any of the elements in the top part of the window that has been selected for processing. If the scheduled window is a generic inquiry window with parameters, on this tab, you can assign values to any of the parameters of the generic inquiry. This tab appears only if the window you want to schedule has parameters.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the condition is active and will be used during schedule execution.
Field name The field in the top part whose value you want to set or the parameter of the generic inquiry.
Relative

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the field value is relative to the current business date. This option is used only for date and period fields.

For example, if you create an automation schedule for calculating depreciation from period ‘10-2019’ and the Relative check box is selected, you do not have to change the ‘To Period’ each month for your schedule. With this check box selected the system will do it for you when running the schedule in the Calculate depreciation (FA502000) window.
Value The value to be assigned to the field selected in the Field name column for this row.
Ignore error A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should ignore any errors occurred during processing with the specified field value or execution of the generic inquiry with the specified parameter value.

Related pages

Tasks

 Automation schedules overview (SM205030) /visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-overview-sm205030 page In this window, you can view all active automation schedules available in the system, with information about their execution dates and start and end times. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Automation schedules overview (SM205030) In this window, you can view all active automation schedules available in the system, with information about their execution dates and start and end times. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table The table displays all the schedules that are active in the system.
Button Description
View screen Opens (as a pop-up window) the window that is the object of automation.
Initialise scheduler

Activates schedulers after you have uploaded a database backup from another site on your Visma Net site. When you back up a database on one site and upload it to another site, all schedulers are automatically deactivated on the site where you upload the backup. Therefore, you need to activate them by clicking this button.

This button appears only if your Visma Net database has been restored from a backup taken on another site.
Column Description
Status The status of the execution of the automation schedule.
Window ID The screen ID of the window that has an automation schedule assigned.
Description The description of the schedule.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule is active.
Starts on The start date of the schedule.
Expires on The date when the schedule expires.
Time zone The time zone in which the schedule operates.
Last executed on The most recent date when the schedule has been executed.
Last execution result The message describing the result of the execution.
Next execution date The date of the next execution of the schedule.

Related pages

Tasks

 Send notifications (SM205050) /visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-notifications-sm205050 page You can use this window to process notifications that are awaiting processing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send notifications (SM205050) You can use this window to process notifications that are awaiting processing. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing of the selected notifications.
Process all Initiates processing of all the listed notifications.
## The top part In the top part, you can choose the date when notifications are to be sent (or the date when they have been sent, to view already-sent notifications).
Element Description
Status

The status of notifications to be shown, which can be any of the following:

Pending
The notifications for which processing is pending
Sent
The notifications that have been sent
Failed
The notifications for which processing has failed
Execution date The date when the processing is to be performed.
Date sent The date when the notifications have been sent.
## The Notifications table The Notifications table contains the complete list of notifications that have the status you have selected.
Button Description
View notification Navigates to the Automation notifications (SM205040) window so you can view the details of the selected notification.
View message Opens the message that is selected in the table.
View report Opens the report that is attached to the message selected in the table. The button is available only if the message contains a report.
Column Description
Notification ID The identifier of the notification.
Execution date The date when the notification was processed.
Status The status of the notification.
Date sent The date when the notifications have been sent.
To The recipient of the notification.
Subject The subject of the notification email.
Report ID The report ID if the notification includes the report.
Error message A message displayed indicating that an error occurred during the relevant process.
Send reports (SM205060) /visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060 page With this window, you can send reports to users specified in the report templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send reports (SM205060) With this window, you can send reports to users specified in the report templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With this window, you can send reports to users specified in the report templates. Report templates, which can be configured for each report, include the typical settings for selecting, filtering, and sorting the data on the reports you and other users would otherwise specify manually before running the report. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of sending the selected reports.
Process all Initiates the process of sending all the listed reports.
## The top part In the top part, you can select a report by its screen ID and send it to all users signed up for the report or to a particular user.
Element Description
Report ID The ID of the report for which a template is configured.
User The user to receive the report. Make no selection to view reports to be sent to all users. View your username in the field if you select the Me check box to the right.
## The table The table displays the report templates according to which the report should be sent to its recipient on the selected date or earlier. You can merge several reports to one net report.
Column Description
Selected A check box that indicates (if selected) that this template should be processed.
Template The template configured for the report.
Report ID The report to be sent.
Title The title of the report.
User The user who is a recipient of the report.
Default A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that this template is the default template for the report.
Shared A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that this template is shared with other users.
Merge reports

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this report will be merged with the other reports with Merge reports check box selected to one net report when processed.

Merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report.
Merging order The number of the report in the net report.

Related pages

Tasks

 Cash management /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management section The Cash management workspace of Visma Net helps you manage cash flows and forecast your cash position at any time and in multiple currencies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash management The Cash management workspace of Visma Net helps you manage cash flows and forecast your cash position at any time and in multiple currencies. By using the Cash management workspace, you can track a wide range of cash transactions and perform bank reconciliations quickly and easily. A single window, [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/), gives you instant access to cash account balances and helps you streamline the processing of cash transactions that originate in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces. ## Support for cash accounts Each branch in a multi-branch organisation maintains its own cash accounts. To be able to maintain a unified chart of account for all branches, cash accounts are defined separately and linked to specific accounts (of the **Asset** type) on the chart of accounts. Thus, a multi-branch company can have a unified chart of accounts; all the accounts on the chart are multi-branch accounts, and each branch can have its own cash accounts, access to which is allowed only for the users who have access to the branch. Visma Net supports different types of cash accounts, including bank accounts, clearing accounts for each bank account, and unknown payment accounts. ## Multi-currency support If multi-currency support is activated in your system, you can maintain cash accounts in different currencies, enter transactions in foreign currencies, and transfer funds from one cash account to another by using a special multi-currency cash-in-transit account. In any window, you can view amounts in the currency of denomination or in the base currency. ## Multiple entry types User-defined entry types are used for correct processing and tracking of many different types of cash transactions entered in the Cash management workspace. These transactions include cash deposits, cash withdrawals, adjustments, interest earnings and charges, bank fees, transfer service charges, and processing centre charges. For more information about entry types usage, see the following topics: + [About entry types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-entry-types/) + [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/) ## Flexible payment methods A payment method defines how incoming money is actually transferred from customers to your company and how outgoing money is moved from your company's cash accounts to the suppliers. You can configure specific payment methods for use in the Supplier ledger workspace or the Customer ledger workspace, while other methods may be used in both workspaces. For payment methods, you can configure custom elements to store details of the method used by a particular customer or supplier. Information about particular methods in the system is stored encrypted. Also, you can set up masks to ensure that sensitive data, such as card numbers, is not displayed. ## Cash transaction approvals To implement effective control over cash flows, you can require approval of cash transactions before they can be released. With approvals configured in your system, when a user attempts to release a cash transaction, the system changes the transaction status to **Pending approval** and assigns it to another user who is authorised to approve transactions. ## Petty cash management You can use the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window to effectively manage petty cash and monitor account balances. You can view the transaction history for a specific date range and switch between detailed views and daily summary views. Visma Net tracks both the balance by the books and the cleared balance and gives you the ability to reconcile the balances and add cash-related transactions directly from the window. ## Cash forecasting In Visma Net, you can view the 30-day cash flow forecasts calculated with the selected level of detail for a single cash account or for all cash accounts available in your system. By analysing cash flow forecasts, you can avoid unexpected shortages in cash and properly plan your payments. ## Import of bank statements and reconciliation of accounts Visma Net provides functionality that you can use to easily perform reconciliation of bank and cash accounts. To facilitate reconciliation with bank statements, you can import multiple statements from Excel files or files in OFX format, and match transactions manually or automatically by using adjustable criteria. Also, while performing reconciliation, you can apply payments to the documents available in the system. To make cash forecasts more accurate even in the middle of financial period, you can clear cash transactions with the bank by using any available information. For more information, see the following topics: + [Manage bank statements - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/managing-bank-statements-overview/) + [Reconcile cash accounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconcile-cash-accounts/reconcile-cash-accounts-overview/) ## Bank deposits In Visma Net, you can configure daily deposits if your company deposits customer payments to a bank regularly. With this functionality, you can create deposit slips for collected customer payments and easily add appropriate bank charges; this makes it possible to match lines on bank statements to cash account transactions. ## Reclassification of payments Some of the transactions that appear on a bank statement cannot be entered into the system as regular payments because the customer or supplier is unknown or other details are unknown or unrecognisable. Such "unknown" payments are temporarily recorded as cash transactions of special entry types to a special-use cash account (an unknown payments account). Later, when details become known, these transactions can be reclassified as payments with appropriate transactions between the accounts involved (bank account, customer ledger account, and unknown payments account) generated automatically ## Account security To limit access to confidential bank account information to only a group of authorised users, you can use restriction groups. ## Other functionalities and options In addition, by using the workspace’s extensive drill-down capabilities, you can quickly and conveniently access any transaction details. You also can use the Cash management workspace to complete the following tasks: + Maintain an unlimited number of cash accounts, including bank accounts. + Maintain any number of banks as suppliers. You can create a business account and locations for every bank involved and define entry types for bank charges to create adjustments quickly. + Enter miscellaneous cash transactions on the fly while you perform funds transfer or reconcile bank statements, or before you release a daily deposit. + Attach scanned images or electronic versions of any supporting documents to cash transactions or to specific lines of transactions. + Select whether users may release supplier ledger and customer ledger transactions from the Cash management workspace or only from their workspace of origin. + Drill down to each document and view its details, no matter where the document has been created: in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, or Cash management workspace. Configure cash accounts /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure cash accounts Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Configure cash accounts - overview /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/configure-cash-accounts-overview page In Visma Net, you can maintain as many cash accounts as you need to get a clear picture of your cash flow. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure cash accounts - overview In Visma Net, you can maintain as many cash accounts as you need to get a clear picture of your cash flow. In Visma Net, you can maintain as many cash accounts as you need to get a clear picture of your cash flow. To keep your chart of accounts simple, Visma Net defines cash accounts separately rather than including them in the chart of accounts. You link cash accounts to accounts from the chart of accounts to track your cash transactions in the General ledger workspace. These topics will help you understand what types of cash accounts you need for your business. It describes the configuration process of a cash account and the other entities that can be involved in recording cash transactions. Also, you will read about methods of restricting access to and visibility of cash accounts. ## Topics + [About cash account configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-cash-account-configuration/) + [About cash account types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-cash-account-types/) + [About the security of cash accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-the-security-of-cash-accounts/) + [About entry types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-entry-types/) + [Create a cash account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/create-a-cash-account/) + [Run validation of a cash account balance](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/run-validation-of-a-cash-account-balance/) About cash account configuration /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-cash-account-configuration page In the Cash management workspace, you work with cash accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash account configuration In the Cash management workspace, you work with cash accounts. In the Cash management workspace, you work with cash accounts. Cash accounts are used to keep records of the outgoing and incoming payments and cash. To distinguish cash accounts maintained in the Cash management workspace from accounts that are in the chart of accounts, we call the latter **general ledger accounts**, where **General ledger** represents the General ledger workspace. In this topic, you will read about the configuration process of cash accounts and the details of implementation, which may vary depending on your company's organisation and financial operations. ## Configuration of cash accounts You can create cash accounts that represent bank accounts, amounts of cash on hand, or amounts of cash in transit. The details of configuration depend on the type of cash account you need. For more information about the types of cash accounts, see: [About cash account types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-cash-account-types/) To track the transactions you record in the Cash management workspace in the General ledger workspace, you link each cash account to a general ledger account allocated for this purpose. Once a document that is related to a cash account is released, the system automatically generates transactions to be posted to the respective general ledger accounts in the General ledger workspace. In general, the configuration process of a cash account involves the following steps: 1. You decide which existing General ledger account you will record your cash transactions to, or you create a designated account for this purpose. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in your system (in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window), the currency of a cash account is taken from a GL account to be used for cash transactions, which must be denominated. If the functionality is disabled, the currency of a cash account is taken from the branch it belongs to. 1. You create a cash account in the Cash management workspace and link it to a general ledger account that you have allocated for this purpose. If you use branches and subaccounts in your system, you can link cash accounts from different branches or with different subaccounts to one general ledger account. Only one cash account can be created for the combination of a branch, a subaccount, and a general ledger account. [Create a cash account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/create-a-cash-account/) For more information, see: 1. You run validation of the cash account balance in the Cash management workspace, in case transactions were posted to the general ledger account before you created the cash account and linked it. After the validation is completed, all transactions posted to the general ledger account are tracked in the Cash management workspace. Now you can record transactions in both the General ledger and Cash management workspaces, and the system automatically synchronises the history of the cash account with the transactions in the general ledger account. This configuration is enough for you to start making funds transfers between your cash accounts. To be able to record transactions other than funds transfers (cash entry transactions and incoming and outgoing payments), you also need to perform the following steps: 1. You configure the following entities: + **Entry types**: You use entry types to classify cash transactions for correct processing. You can consider an entry type a transaction template; it defines the transaction type, the offset general ledger account and subaccount, and the processing details. Entry type settings are to be used as default settings for a transaction. With entry types configured to affect the balances of general ledger accounts only (that is, those for which the entry type parameter is set to **Cash management** ), you can create transactions of the **Cash entry** type to record bank interest earned, a bank service fee, or some office expenses. [About entry types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-entry-types/) For more information, see: + **Payment methods**: You use payment methods to define the way the money is transferred into and out of the organisation. To be able to record money received from customers or paid to suppliers, you need to specify payment methods for each customer and supplier individually and create entry types to be used in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces. 1. You associate entry types and payment methods with the appropriate cash accounts. If you want to reconcile a cash account balance, the additional configuration is required. ## Identifiers of cash accounts Identifiers for GL accounts are defined by the **ACCOUNT** segmented key, while identifiers for cash accounts are defined by the **CASHACCOUNT** segmented key. You can use the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window to define the structure of the **CASHACCOUNT** segmented key. The **CASHACCOUNT** segmented key is not related to the **ACCOUNT** key, and you can define identifiers for cash accounts differently than identifiers of general ledger accounts. For example, you can define the **CASHACCOUNT** key as having an additional segment (with respect to the **ACCOUNT** key) to designate the branch that is the owner of the cash account. Then for the general ledger account 10101, you can have a cash account **10101-MN** in the Main branch and **10101-NR** in the North branch, both of which are linked to the 10101 account. Alternatively, you can define cash account identifiers to be like the identifiers of the GL accounts. ## Currency of cash accounts Each cash account is denominated in a particular currency. If the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is disabled in your system in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the currency of a cash account is taken from the branch it belongs to. If the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled, you can maintain cash accounts for each currency used, because the currency is taken from a general ledger account used for cash transactions, which must be denominated. The balances of foreign currency cash accounts are maintained in the currency of denomination as well as in the base currency and should be periodically revalued in the base currency for the balance sheet. ## Balance of cash accounts In Visma Net, the balance of a cash account can be presented in different ways. You can view the balance of the general ledger account linked to the cash account. This balance, called the **General ledger balance** on the system interface, is calculated as the sum of all posted transactions for the selected financial period. Additionally, you can view the available balance of a cash account. This balance, called the **Available balance** on the system interface, is calculated as the sum of all released and cleared receipts and disbursements, regardless of the selected date or financial period. The available balance is the amount of money you can spend right now. You can control how the system calculates the available balance of cash accounts, by using the settings in the **Receipts to add to available balances** and **Disbursements to deduct from available balances** sections of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. Both sections have the same set of settings. These settings, listed below, control which receipts and disbursements will be included in the calculation of the available balance, in addition to the released and cleared receipts and disbursements: Unreleased uncleared : You select this check box if you want the system to include receipts or disbursements with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status and with the **Cleared** check box is not selected. Unreleased cleared : You select this check box if you want the system to include receipts or disbursements with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status and with the **Cleared** check box is selected. Released uncleared : You select this check box if you want the system to include receipts or disbursements with the **Released** status and with the **Cleared** check box is not selected. ## Reconciliation of cash accounts Reconciliation of a cash account is a useful procedure in controlling cash transactions. You can keep records about cash transactions both in Visma Net and in a third-party system (for instance, a bank where you have accounts) or in the window of cash register receipts. To reconcile the cash account, at the end of each financial period, you compare the system records with a bank statement or other documents confirming the transactions to find discrepancies between the account balances tracked by different means. In Visma Net, you mark cash accounts that require reconciliation by selecting the **Requires reconciliation** check box and specifying the number series for the reconciliation statements in the **Reconciliation number series** field in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. When this check box is selected for a cash account, the system behaviour changes as follows: + For each transaction recorded to this cash account, the system makes the **Cleared** check box available for modification. + When you select the **Cleared** check box for a transaction, the system fills in the **Clear date** field (of the transaction) with the current business date. + The system displays the cash account in the list of available cash accounts in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window and uses the specified number series to generate reference numbers for the statements. ## Maintenance of cash accounts in a multi-branch company If the organisation has branches, each branch maintains its cash accounts separately from the cash accounts of other branches. To be able to maintain a unified chart of account for all branches, you define cash accounts separately and link them to specific general ledger accounts in the chart of accounts (you can link multiple cash accounts from different branches to one general ledger account). Thus, a multi-branch company can have a unified chart of accounts; all the accounts on the chart can be used by all branches, and each branch can have its own cash accounts, access to which is allowed for only the users who have access to the branch. Once cash accounts have been configured, cash documents in each branch are created for a cash account that belongs to the branch, but the transactions generated by these documents are posted to the general ledger account. Although the cash accounts are separated by branches, the GL account provides the consolidated balance over all linked cash accounts. ## Usage of subaccounts with cash accounts If you use subaccounts in your organisation, you can also use these subaccounts with cash accounts for further analysis. You define the list of available subaccounts in the General ledger workspace.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About cash account types /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-cash-account-types page In Visma Net, you can configure cash accounts of different types that suit your company policy. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash account types In Visma Net, you can configure cash accounts of different types that suit your company policy. In Visma Net, you can configure cash accounts of different types that suit your company policy. The type of a cash account depends on the purpose you want to use this account for, for example, to record petty cash flow, or to temporarily store payments for future clearing or reclassification. Generally, cash accounts can be divided as follows: + General-purpose cash accounts + Bank cash accounts + Clearing cash accounts + Cash accounts for unknown payments + Cash account for a corporate card See the following sections for details about each type of a cash account, including its purpose, configuration, and maintenance. ## General-purpose cash accounts A general-purpose cash account, sometimes referred to as a **cash-on-hand account**, is one that you use to record transactions performed with cash you hold in a till. You record outgoing payments to suppliers and incoming payments received from customers. You link a general-purpose cash account to a general ledger account of the **Asset** type to track transactions in the General ledger workspace. To be able to record incoming and outgoing payments, you need to associate this cash account with payment methods and entry types that are configured for usage in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces. For example, you may need entry types for cash advances, cash receipts, or customer payments. If needed, you can create a separate general-purpose cash account to record coins and cash that the company keeps on hand for small purchases (sometimes referred to as a **petty cash account** ). Periodically, petty cash is replenished and should be reconciled with the receipts (that is, with any paper trail that is kept). ## Bank cash accounts A bank cash account is a cash account you use to record the financial transactions between your organisation and the bank. You create a separate cash account for each bank account. For example: You may have a regular checking account and a savings account. You link a bank cash account to a general ledger account of the **Asset** type to trace transactions in the General ledger workspace. To be able to record incoming and outgoing payments, you need to associate this cash account with the payment methods and entry types that are configured for use in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces. For example: You can use an entry type to record interest income to your savings account and an entry type used to record bank charges to your regular checking account. Also, you can associate a bank (created as a supplier) with each bank cash account, for informational purposes. If you plan to make deposits into this bank account, you need to associate it with a clearing cash account that is configured to temporarily hold the money before it is deposited. (Clearing cash accounts are described in the next section.) Because each bank account is maintained by the bank, the bank's records over time may differ with those of your organisation, so periodic reconciliations are required. ## Clearing cash account A clearing cash account is a cash account that you use to temporarily store payments and cash that will be eventually deposited to the bank (and, hence, transferred from these clearing accounts to the appropriate bank accounts). Clearing accounts should not be used for payments to suppliers. You associate a clearing cash account with a general ledger account of the **Asset** type to track transactions in the General ledger workspace. To be able to record incoming payments, you need to associate this cash account with payment methods that are based on the **Cash** means of payment, used in the Customer ledger workspace, and involved in creating batch deposits. Clearing accounts should be set as the default cash accounts for associated payment methods. To be able to transfer deposits from clearing accounts to a specific cash account that represents a bank account, you need to assign these clearing accounts to the respective bank cash accounts. For clearing accounts, no entry types are specified, and reconciliation is not performed. ## Cash account for unknown payments You use a cash account for unknown payments to temporarily hold payments that cannot be entered as valid because the customer or supplier is unknown. We recommend that you associate such a cash account with a general ledger account of the **Liability** type to track transactions in the General ledger workspace. To be able to record such payments, you need to associate this cash account with payment methods used in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspace. Note, that an entry type that has an unknown payment account specified as the reclassification account should be associated with a bank cash account, to which you may receive such payments. Since accounts that temporarily store unknown payments are cash accounts denominated in specific currencies, special entry types should be created for each currency involved.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About the security of cash accounts /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-the-security-of-cash-accounts page Cash is a company's most liquid asset, which is why an organisation must have adequate controls to secure it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the security of cash accounts Cash is a company's most liquid asset, which is why an organisation must have adequate controls to secure it. Cash is a company's most liquid asset, which is why an organisation must have adequate controls to secure it. In Visma Net, you can set up user access to cash accounts at multiple levels and control which users can view which particular cash accounts. ## Managing access by branch roles If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in your system in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can create and maintain multiple branches in your instance of Visma Net. You can configure user access to the branch-specific data, including access to cash accounts (that is, the ability to perform operations on the cash accounts) on a per-branch basis by using branch roles. You can achieve more granular access control with user roles, which grant or deny access to system objects (modules, workspaces, records, window fields, and operations). ## Managing visibility by restriction groups You can control the visibility of a specific cash account to users (that is, which users can view the account) with the help of restriction groups. To restrict the visibility of the cash account, you include the general ledger account the cash account is linked to in a restriction group by using the [Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-general-ledger-account-gl104020/) window. > [!CAUTION] > We recommend that you carefully design and configure restriction groups containing accounts, subaccounts, and branches, so that a user can view all these entities. Otherwise, a user may encounter problems with processing transactions of the linked cash accounts. ## Managing visibility by branch The visibility of a cash account can also be restricted by the branch the account belongs to, in addition to the branch roles and restriction groups (described above). Consider a user who is allowed to view multiple branches due to assigned branch roles and is a member of restriction groups of General ledger accounts, subaccounts, and branches. Such a user can view (on the data entry forms) the cash accounts of all the branches this user is allowed to view, based on the user's membership in restriction groups and the branch selected on the data entry window (in the **Branch** field, which is filled by default with the branch to which the user is currently signed in). If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is disabled, all cash accounts belong to a single branch and are visible to all users who are allowed to view the accounts, based on their membership in restriction groups. To restrict the visibility of a cash account by the branch, you should enable the **Inter-branch transactions** add-on functionality, which gives you the ability to configure the automatic generation of inter-branch transactions for each document that involves multiple branches. With this functionality enabled, the **Restrict visibility by branch** check box appears in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. You select the **Restrict visibility by branch** check box for each cash account. In this case, the cash account is visible to only users who can select the branch (specified for the cash account) in the **Branch** field on the data entry windows. If the **Restrict visibility by branch** check box is cleared for a cash account, this cash account will be visible regardless of the selected branch. If the **Branch** field is absent on a data entry window, then the visibility of the cash account is defined by the branch to which the user is currently signed in.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About entry types /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-entry-types page You use entry types to classify cash transactions for correct processing and to provide default values for transaction settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About entry types You use entry types to classify cash transactions for correct processing and to provide default values for transaction settings. You use entry types to classify cash transactions for correct processing and to provide default values for transaction settings. An entry type, such as a service charge or bank fee, functions like a transaction template, providing default values for a transaction and indicating how the transaction should be processed in the system. You need to configure separate entry types for each operation listed below: + Recording cash entries in the Cash management workspace that affect the balances of general ledger accounts. + Recording transactions in the Cash management workspace that result in the creation of documents in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces and affect the balances of customers and suppliers. + Recording financial charges for processing funds transfers, bank deposits, customer payments, and voids in the Cash management, Customer ledger, and Supplier ledger workspaces. + Reclassifying payments in the Cash management workspace. + Creating adjustments during the reconciliation of bank statements in the Cash management workspace. ## Configuration of entry types In general, the configuration of entry types consists of the following steps: 1. You determine which types of cash transactions you usually generate. 1. You create the required entry types by using the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window, specifying at least the entry type ID and description. + The type of transactions: **Receipt** to record money coming in, or **Disbursement** to record money going out. + The way the balances of general ledger accounts, customer accounts, and supplier accounts are affected with a transaction based on this entry type or, one of the following options for the workspace setting: Cash management (a transaction affects the balances of general ledger accounts only), Supplier ledger (a transaction affects the balances of general ledger accounts and a supplier account), or Customer ledger (a transaction affects the balances of general ledger accounts and a customer account). 1. You associate the entry types you have created with the cash accounts that are involved in the respective cash transactions. After configuration is done, you can proceed with recording cash transactions. ## Entry types for recording cash entries You use the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window to record transactions that affect the balances of general ledger accounts. These transactions have the **Cash entry** type. You can record customer payments, payments to suppliers, bank charges, or interest earned. To configure an entry type for recording cash entries, you specify the following settings: + The entry type ID and description + The type of transaction or whether it is a **Receipt** (money in) or **Disbursement** (money out) + The **Cash management** workspace + Optional: The default offset account and subaccount (if any subaccounts are defined in the system) After you have created the entry type for recording cash entries, you need to associate it with the cash accounts that are involved in the respective cash transactions. ## Entry types for recording transactions You use the **Create transaction** button in the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window to record a transaction for the cash account you select. In this window, you can record transactions that affect the balances of customers or suppliers, as well as cash entry transactions. To configure an entry type for recording transactions that affect balances of suppliers, you specify the following: + The entry type ID and description + The type of transaction or a **Receipt** (refund from a supplier) or **Disbursement** (payment to a supplier) + The **Supplier ledger** workspace + Optionally, a supplier account (if you frequently record transactions that involve a particular supplier) You don't need to specify a default offset account or subaccount, because the general ledger accounts of the supplier (specified in a transaction) are used by default. To configure an entry type for recording transactions that affect balances of customers, you specify the following: + The entry type ID and description + The type of transaction or a **Receipt** (payment from a customer) or **Disbursement** (refund to a customer) + The **Customer ledger** workspace + Optionally, a customer account (if you frequently record transactions that involve a particular customer) Here, too, there is no need to specify a default offset account or subaccount, because the general ledger accounts of the customer specified in the transaction are used by default. After you have created the entry type for recording transactions, you need to associate it with the cash accounts that are involved in the respective cash transactions. ## Entry types for recording finance charges To configure an entry type for recording finance charges, you specify the following: + The entry type ID and a description that lets users easily identify the charge when they're applying it to payments + The type of transaction **Disbursement** + The **Cash management** workspace + The default offset general ledger account of the expense type and the appropriate subaccount (if subaccounts are used in your system) + The indication to the system of whether the bank typically deducts the amount of this charge from the payment amount or does not deduct it or the **Deduct from payment amount** check box should be selected or cleared, respectively. > [!NOTE] > The finance charges recorded in the Supplier ledger and Cash management workspaces are always recorded as separate transactions. After you have created the entry type for recording finance charges, you need to associate it with the cash accounts that are involved in the respective cash transactions. ## Entry types for recording unknown payments You use the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window to record unknown payments. Such transactions have the **Cash entry** type. To configure an entry type for recording unknown payments, you specify the following: + The entry type ID and description + The type of transaction + The **Cash management** workspace + The **Use for payments reclassification** check box selected + The reclassification account (a cash account used to temporary store unknown payments). After you have created the entry type for recording unknown payments, associate it with the cash accounts that are involved in the respective cash transactions.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Select and edit an entry type /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/select-and-edit-an-entry-type section On the Entry types tab, you can select a valid entry type for the selected cash account, which you can then customise. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Select and edit an entry type On the Entry types tab, you can select a valid entry type for the selected cash account, which you can then customise. ## Before you start To create entry types, go to: [Create an entry type for disbursements or receipts](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/create-an-entry-type-for-disbursements-or-receipts/). 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Select a **Cash account**. 1. On the **Entry types** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). A new row is added in the table. 1. Under **Entry type ID**, select the entry type you want to use. 1. Under **Offset account override**, select an account. 1. Under **VAT zone**, select a VAT zone. 1. Under **VAT calculation mode**, choose between the tax settings **Gross** or **Net**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a cash account /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/create-a-cash-account section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a cash account ## Before you proceed Do the following to make sure that all prerequisites are met before you create a cash account: + Determine which type of cash account you want to create. + Check the internal agreements your organisation has about identifiers used for general ledger accounts and cash accounts. + Review the structure of subaccounts and the meanings of their segment values in your organisation, and choose the subaccounts to be used for the cash accounts to be created. + By using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window, verify the existence of the general ledger account to which you will link new cash accounts, or create a designated general ledger account for this purpose. The general ledger account type depends on the type of cash account you have decided to create. + If this cash account is to be denominated to a foreign currency, review the types of exchange rates to be used for currency conversions and create a new rate if needed. + Consider how you want to restrict the access to the cash account. You can perform the following operations before or after creating a cash account: + By using the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window, create the entry types to be used for recording cash transactions to the cash account. [About entry types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-entry-types/) For more information, see: + In the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window, create the payment methods to be used with the cash account. + If you are creating a bank cash account and plan to make deposits, create clearing cash accounts to associate with the bank cash account. If you create the entry types, payment methods, and clearing cash accounts after you have created the cash account, you need to associate them with the cash account by using the table toolbars of the **Entry types**, **Payment methods**, and **Clearing accounts** tabs in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Add new record**. 1. In the **Cash account** field, type the identifier for the new cash account. If cash account identifiers in your system have multiple segments, type the segment values or select them from the list of allowed values. 1. In the **Account** field, select the general ledger account from the list of accounts available in the chart of accounts. Note that the system automatically fills in the **Currency** field with the appropriate value. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, select the subaccount to be used with this cash account. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch that will use this cash account. 1. If this cash account is denominated to a foreign currency, in the **Currency rate type** field, select the type of exchange rate to be used for currency conversions. 1. In the **Description** field, type a description for the cash account. 1. Optional: Select the **Clearing account** check box to indicate that the cash account is used to record undeposited payments. 1. Optional: Select the **Requires reconciliation** check box to indicate that reconciliations are required for this account, and select a numbering series for these reconciliations in the **Reconciliation number series** field. 1. Optional: Select the **Restrict visibility with branch** check box to make this cash account visible to only a user signed in to the branch that is associated with this cash account. 1. Optional: Select the **Match bank transactions to batch payments** check box to indicate that during the processing of the imported bank transactions, the system should search for a match among supplier ledger batch payments (which group documents for further processing by a money transfer operator). 1. Optional: If you are creating a bank account and have configured a supplier to represent a bank your company works with, in the **Bank ID** field, specify the supplier identifier for informational purposes. 1. Optional: If you have configured the payment methods to be used to record transactions to this cash account, on the **Payment methods** tab, add the payment methods and specify the appropriate settings in the row for each payment you add. 1. Optional: If you are creating a bank account and have configured the clearing accounts to hold non-deposited payments, on the **Clearing accounts** tab, add these accounts to the table. 1. Optional: If you have configured the entry types to be used to record transactions to this cash account, on the **Entry types** tab, add them to the table. 1. Optional: On the **Remittance settings** tab, which appears if at least one of the payment methods specified for the cash account requires remittance information, in the **Value** column for each row, provide the required information. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. Make sure that the read-only **Cash account** check box is selected for the general ledger account to which you linked the cash account you created. This check box indicates that the new cash account has been successfully linked to the general ledger account and that all transactions of the general ledger account will be traced in the Cash management workspace. After a cash account is configured and linked to the selected general ledger account, you need to run validation of the cash account balance in the Cash management workspace, in case transactions were posted to the general ledger account before you created the cash account and linked it.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Set default cash account for payments and transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/set-default-cash-account-for-payments-and-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set default cash account for payments and transactions 1. Go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. On the **General information** tab, go to the **Default cash account settings** section. 1. In the **Default cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select the default cash account for payments and bank transactions. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## The Default cash account settings are used in the following windows + + [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) + [Bank transactions history (CA402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transactions-history-ca402000/) + [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) + [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) + [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) + [Import incoming payments (AR305500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/import-incoming-payments-ar305500/) + [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) + [Incoming payments history (AR407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/incoming-payments-history-ar407000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set default actions for incoming AutoPay payments and bank statements /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/set-default-actions-for-incoming-autopay-payments-and-bank-statements section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set default actions for incoming AutoPay payments and bank statements 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and choose the cash account you want to set up. 1. In the **Default action bank statements** field, choose what you want the system to do with imported bank statements. + **Import from AutoPay** Choose this action if most of your incoming payments have no CID or invoice number. + **Import from AutoPay and match** Choose this action if some of your incoming payments have no CID or invoice number. > [!NOTE] > When you do this, a warning is displayed when an incoming payment has no CID or invoice numbers. The payments will not end up in the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/). Instead, you have to check the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window for payments with errors. These payments must be matched manually. + **Import from AutoPay and process** Choose this action if your bank agreement requires a CID for all incoming payments, or if you have very few incoming payments without a CID or an invoice number. > [!NOTE] > When you do this, you will receive no warning for incoming payments without a CID and an invoice numbers. These payments will be sent to [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/). You have to check the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window for any payments that you have to match manually. Afterwards, go back to [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/), select the payments, and validate them manually to remove them from the list. 1. In the **Default action incoming payments** field, choose what you want the system to do with incoming AutoPay payments. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). These actions are used in the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Configure import settings for statements and incoming payments /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/configure-import-settings-for-statements-and-incoming-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure import settings for statements and incoming payments 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the account for which you want to set up automatic import of payments. 1. In the **IBAN** field, enter the IBAN for this cash account. The use of the AutoPay functionality requires that the account has a valid bank agreement for AutoPay. 1. In the **Default action bank statements** field, choose what you want the system to do with the imported bank statements, with or without bank transaction rules (see: [Create bank transaction rules](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-bank-transaction-rules/) ). The options are: + **Import from AutoPay** Choose this action if most of your imported bank statements have no bank transaction rules set. + **Import from AutoPay and process** Choose this action if you have set up bank transaction rules for all types of transactions. 1. In the **Default action incoming payments** field, choose what you want the system to do with incoming AutoPay payments. + **Import from AutoPay** Choose this action if most of your incoming payments have no CID or invoice number. + **Import from AutoPay and match** Choose this action if some of your incoming payments have no CID or invoice number. + **Import from AutoPay and process** Choose this action if your bank agreement requires a CID for all incoming payments, or if you have very few incoming payments without a CID or an invoice number. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Repeat the procedure for all accounts you want to set up.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Edit remittance information /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/edit-remittance-information section In this tab, you can view and edit the account remittance information (if it is required by the payment methods associated with this account). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit remittance information In this tab, you can view and edit the account remittance information (if it is required by the payment methods associated with this account). ## Before you start If this tab is not displayed, go to the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window, and make sure the **Require remittance information for cash account** check box is selected. 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Go to the **Payment methods** tab, and select a payment method. 1. Go to the **Remittance settings** tab, and edit (if necessary) the details in the **Remittance details** table. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Manually import bank transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/manually-import-bank-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manually import bank transactions 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Select the account from which you want to upload bank statements to AutoPay. 1. Select the **Upload files manually** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). When you select this account in the [Import incoming payments (AR305500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/import-incoming-payments-ar305500/) [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) and the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) windows, the **Upload file** button will be active. This setting is only relevant for companies in Sweden and the Netherlands, or for Finnish or Norwegian companies that have subsidiaries in these countries. To import bank transactions manually, you also have to select a manual file format in the **Manual file format** drop-down.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Disable the automatic creation of supplier prepayments during auto-matching /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/disable-the-automatic-creation-of-supplier-prepayments-during-auto-matching section You can stop the system from automatically creating supplier prepayments during auto-matching. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disable the automatic creation of supplier prepayments during auto-matching You can stop the system from automatically creating supplier prepayments during auto-matching. 1. Go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. Click on the **Bank statement settings** tab. 1. In the **Process bank transactions** section, select the **Do not create supplier prepayments** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You will get the warning **Remaining balance available** on the supplier transactions, and the **Ready to process** check box will not be checked in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Disable the automatic creation of customer payments when bank payment amount is not fully applied /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/disable-the-automatic-creation-of-customer-payments-when-bank-payment-amount-is-not-fully-applied section You can stop the system from automatically creating customer payments if bank payment amount is higher than the invoice amount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disable the automatic creation of customer payments when bank payment amount is not fully applied You can stop the system from automatically creating customer payments if bank payment amount is higher than the invoice amount. 1. Go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. Click on the **Bank statement settings** tab. 1. In the **Process bank transactions** section, select the **Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > You will get the warning **Remaining balance available** if bank payment is higher than invoice amount or invoice is closed. In the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) and [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) windows, the **Ready to process** check box will not be checked before manual action is taken.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Enable customer and supplier recognition for bank transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/enable-customer-and-supplier-recognition-for-bank-transactions section To avoid a match on a different bank account when you click the Match automatically button in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window, you can enable the customer and the supplier recognition for bank transaction by the same bank account number. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable customer and supplier recognition for bank transactions To avoid a match on a different bank account when you click the Match automatically button in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window, you can enable the customer and the supplier recognition for bank transaction by the same bank account number. For more information: [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/). 1. Go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. Click on the **Bank statement settings** tab. 1. In the **Process bank transactions** section, select the **Match only documents with the same bank account number** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Activate automatic post and release for purchase documents /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/activate-automatic-post-and-release-for-purchase-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate automatic post and release for purchase documents 1. Go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. Find the **Posting and release** section. 1. Deselect the **Do not automatically release supplier payments** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 View webhook notification for cash accounts /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/view-webhook-notification-for-cash-accounts page You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your cash accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View webhook notification for cash accounts You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your cash accounts. ## Before you start In order for you to view the wehhook notifications, you need to set up the system for it. See: [Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications-on-a-chart-of-accounts/) 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Create a new cash account, or disable an existing cash account. 1. To view the notification, go to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Run validation of a cash account balance /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/run-validation-of-a-cash-account-balance page You use the Validate account balances (CA503000) window to run validation of the balances of a cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run validation of a cash account balance You use the Validate account balances (CA503000) window to run validation of the balances of a cash account. For more information: [Validate account balances (CA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/validate-account-balances-ca503000/). You use the [Validate account balances (CA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/validate-account-balances-ca503000/) window to run validation of the balances of a cash account. You perform this process in case you have linked a newly created cash account to a general ledger account that already had transactions recorded to it. 1. Go to the [Validate account balances (CA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/validate-account-balances-ca503000/) window. 1. Do one of the following: + To run the validation process for all listed cash accounts, click **Process all**. + To run the validation process for only selected cash accounts, select the unlabelled check boxes for the needed cash accounts, and click **Process**. If the balances of the cash accounts were validated successfully, the system marks them with green check marks. After the validation of cash account balances is completed successfully, all transactions posted to the general ledger account are tracked in the General ledger workspace. The system automatically synchronises the history of the cash account with the transactions in the general ledger account.

Related pages

Windows

 Manage cash transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage cash transactions Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Managing cash transactions - overview /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/managing-cash-transactions-overview page In the Cash management workspace, you can easily record transactions that affect cash but cannot be recorded in other Visma Net workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Managing cash transactions - overview In the Cash management workspace, you can easily record transactions that affect cash but cannot be recorded in other Visma Net workspaces. In the Cash management workspace, you can easily record transactions that affect cash but cannot be recorded in other Visma Net workspaces. These transactions are cash entries, funds transfers, and transfer-related expenses. Such transactions do not involve customers or suppliers and affect balances of the general ledger accounts only. Also, in the Cash management workspace, you can keep a cash register. In addition to cash entries and funds transfers you can record cash transactions that affect balances of customers or suppliers (a prepayment to a supplier, a cash payment from a customers, or refunds). About cash transaction processing /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/about-cash-transaction-processing page In the Cash account details (CA303000) window, you can quickly add transactions that record customer payments, refunds received from suppliers, bank charges and fees, cash withdrawals, and various adjustments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash transaction processing In the Cash account details (CA303000) window, you can quickly add transactions that record customer payments, refunds received from suppliers, bank charges and fees, cash withdrawals, and various adjustments. For more information: [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/). Also, you can use this window to monitor cash accounts and effectively manage cash transactions. In this topic, you will read about how to quickly record cash transactions of any type and how the system processes them further. ## Understanding cash transaction types Depending on the purpose of the transaction, in the Cash management workspace, you can record and process cash transactions of the following types: + **Cash entry**: You create a transaction of this type to record an operation made in cash, such as a bank charge, interest income, a customer payment, a payments to a supplier, or an unknown payments. Transactions of this type affect general ledger accounts only. + **Transfer in**: A transaction of this type is created when you record a funds transfer between cash accounts; it corresponds to the received funds to the destination account. + **Transfer out**: A transaction of this type is created when you record a funds transfer between cash accounts; it corresponds to the sent funds from the source account. > [!NOTE] > For one funds transfer, there is always one transaction of the **Transfer in** type and one transaction of the **Transfer out** type. Transactions of these types affect general ledger accounts. These transactions appear as transactions of the **Transfer** type in the [Release cash transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/) window. + **Expense entry**: If a funds transfer results in any financial charges being incurred, you can record a cash transaction of this type when you create the funds transfer. Transactions of this type affect general ledger accounts. + **Prepayment**: You create a transaction of this type to record an advance payment or down payment to a supplier if the payment was made in cash. Transactions of this type affect general ledger accounts and supplier accounts in the Supplier ledger workspace. + **Supplier refund**: You create a transaction of this type to record a refund for a prepayment or debit adjustment if the refund was made in cash. Transactions of this type affect general ledger accounts and supplier accounts in the Supplier ledger workspace. + **Payment**: You create a transaction of this type to record an incoming customer payment that was made in cash. Transactions of this type affect general ledger accounts and customer accounts in the Customer ledger workspace. + **Customer refund**: You create a transaction of this type to record a cash refund for a payment, prepayment, or credit note to a customer. Transactions of this type affect general ledger accounts and customer accounts in the Customer ledger workspace. + **Cash deposit**: You create a transaction of this type if you want to deposit customer payments or supplier refunds into a cash account. Transactions of this type affect general ledger accounts. + **Cash void deposit**: You create a transaction of this type if you want to void a released deposit. Transactions of this type affect the general ledger accounts that were involved in the related deposit. In the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, you can quickly record transactions of the **Cash entry**, **Prepayment**, **Supplier refund**, **Payment**, and **Customer refund** types for a particular account, and track transactions of any type. In Visma Net, separate windows are specifically designed for recording **Cash entry** transactions, funds transfer transactions. and deposit transactions. ## Recording cash transactions Before you start recording cash transactions, make sure entry types, which serve as the templates of the transactions, are defined in your system. You can record a cash transaction by selecting a cash account for the transaction and clicking the **Create transaction** button in the table toolbar of the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window. This invokes the **Quick transaction** dialog box, where you can quickly add cash transactions that affect the balances of customers or suppliers as well as of general ledger accounts. In the **Entry type** field of the dialog box, you specify the entry type of the cash transaction in accordance with the following: + To create a cash transaction that affects the balances of supplier accounts, you specify an entry type set to **SL** in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. Once the transaction is saved, it appears in the Cash management workspace in the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window with the **Supplier refund** type if it is a receipt, and with the **Prepayment** type if it is a disbursement with the **On hold** status. In the Supplier ledger workspace, the system creates a corresponding document with the **Supplier refund** or **Prepayment** type. You can further process the cash transaction in the Cash management workspace and process the corresponding document in the Cash management workspace. + To create a cash transaction that affects the balances of customer accounts, you specify an entry type set to **CL** the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. Once the transaction is saved, it appears in the Cash management workspace in the Cash account details window with the **Payment** type if it is a receipt, and with the **Customer refund** type if it is a disbursement with the **On hold** status. In the Customer ledger workspace, the system creates a corresponding document with the **Payment** or **Customer refund** type. You can further process the cash transaction from the Cash management workspace and process the corresponding document in the Customer ledger workspace. + To create a cash transaction that affects the balances of general ledger accounts only, you specify an entry type set to **CA** in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. Once the transaction is saved, it appears in the Cash management workspace with the **Cash entry** type, regardless of whether it is a receipt or a disbursement. he transaction has the **Balanced** status by default; balanced transactions can be edited, saved, put on hold, or released. > [!NOTE] > You can select the **Hold transactions on entry** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window to create cash transactions with the **On hold** status by default to prevent it from releasing and being posted to General ledger. If this check box is selected, you can release from hold a cash transaction of **Cash entry** type by clearing the **Hold** check box in the dialog box. ## Processing Supplier ledger documents After you save a cash transaction related to a supplier refunds, you have to apply the appropriate documents, such as prepayments or debit adjustments, to the supplier refund in the Supplier ledger workspace. The **Release customer ledger documents from the Cash management workspace** option, which is located in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, controls the processing of transactions that correspond to documents in the Supplier ledger workspace. If this option is selected, the documents are released from the Cash management workspace; if this option is not selected, the documents can be released only in the Supplier ledger workspace. Supplier ledger transactions may be posted when they are released if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, you need to post transactions manually by using the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. The system assigns reference numbers to the batches that implement the transactions in accordance with the number series used for supplier ledger transactions specified in the **Batch number series** field in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. The system updates the account balances with the following transactions, based on whether the cash transaction is a receipt or a disbursement. ### The Receipt cash transaction table (Supplier ledger) |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Amount|0.00| |Supplier ledger account|0.00|Amount| ### The Disbursement cash transaction table (Supplier ledger) |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|0.00|Amount| |Supplier ledger account|Amount|0.00| When a supplier ledger transaction is released, all the further processing of it is performed in the Supplier ledger workspace. Released supplier prepayments get the **Open** status and can be applied to a document, unapplied, or voided in this workspace. Released refunds get the **Closed** status; they can be voided later if necessary. ## Processing Customer ledger documents After you save cash transactions related to customer refunds, you have to apply the appropriate documents, such as payments or credit notes, to the customer refund in the Customer ledger workspace. The **Release customer ledger documents from the Cash management** option, which is located in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, controls the processing of transactions that correspond to documents in the Customer ledger workspace. If this option is selected, the documents are released from the Cash management workspace; if this option is not selected, the documents can be released only in the Customer ledger workspace. Customer ledger transactions may be posted when they are released if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window; otherwise, you need to post transactions manually by using the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. The system assigns reference numbers to the batches that implement the transactions in accordance with the number series used for customer ledger documents specified in the **Batch number series** field in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. The system updates the account balances with the following transactions, based on whether the cash transaction is a receipt or a disbursement. ### The Receipt cash transaction table (Customer ledger) |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Amount|0.00| |Customer ledger account|0.00|Amount| ### The Disbursement cash transaction table (Customer ledger) |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|0.00|Amount| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.00| When a customer ledger account transaction is released, all further processing of it is performed in the Customer ledger workspace. Released customer payments get the **Open** status and can be applied to a document, unapplied, or voided. Released refunds get the **Closed**; they can be voided later if necessary. ## Recording and processing transactions during bank reconciliation You can quickly add cash-related transactions during the process of bank statement reconciliation by clicking **Create adjustment** in the table toolbar of the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window and adding cash transaction details in the **Quick transaction entry** dialog box. ## Viewing transaction details In the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, you can view all cash transactions for any cash account during the date range you specify. You can view the details of the generated documents by clicking the link corresponding to the transaction in the **Orig. doc. number** column. You can also view the details of the batch associated with a transaction by clicking the batch number in the **Batch number** column. Also, you can find and view supplier ledger and customer ledger documents directly in these workspaces by selecting the transaction reference numbers in the **Reference no.** fields in the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) and [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) windows, respectively.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About cash entry processing /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/about-cash-entry-processing page You can record cash entries or cash transactions of the cash entry type by creating a document in the Transactions (CA304000) window, or quickly record them by using the Cash account details (CA303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash entry processing You can record cash entries or cash transactions of the cash entry type by creating a document in the Transactions (CA304000) window, or quickly record them by using the Cash account details (CA303000) window. For more information: [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/), [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/). Before you start recording cash entries, you need to create entry types, which serve as the templates of the transactions, and associate them with cash accounts. For more information, see: [About entry types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-entry-types/) In this topic, you will read about how a cash entry is recorded and then processed by the system. ## Recording a cash entry You create a cash entry by using the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window. You select a cash account and an entry type, and change the transaction date and financial period, if needed. Then you add the transaction details. For each transaction detail, you can change the offset account if any default values are provided by the selected entry type, or select an offset account from the list of accounts if no default values are provided. When you save the cash entry, the system assigns it a reference number in accordance with the numbering series assigned to transactions in the **Transactions number series** field in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. The system creates cash entries with the **Balanced** status by default. (That is, by default, the **Hold transactions on entry** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window is cleared, so new cash entries are not put on hold.) Balanced transactions can be edited, saved, put on hold, or released. ## Quickly recording a cash entry You can quickly record a cash entry by selecting a cash account for the transaction, clicking the **Create transaction** button on the table toolbar of the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window and entering the transaction details in the **Quick transaction** dialog box. Also, you can quickly add a cash entry during the process of bank statement reconciliation by clicking **Create adjustment** in the table toolbar of the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. This invokes the **Quick transaction** dialog box. For more information about quickly recording cash transactions, see: [Quickly record a cash transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/quickly-record-cash-entry-task/) ## Placing a cash entry on hold You can place a balanced cash entry on hold by selecting the **Hold** check box in the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window, to prevent it from being released and being posted to the General ledger. With the check box selected, the status of the cash entry is **On hold**. A cash entry with this status can be edited, saved, or released from hold. You can select the **Hold transactions on entry** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window to create cash entries with the **On hold** status by default. ## Adding VAT In the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window, VAT is applied to the cash entry based on the VAT category of the items on the **Transaction details** tab and the VAT zone on the **Financial details** tab. You can specify the default VAT zone for a particular entry type in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window, and the default VAT categories can be specified for non-stock items used for cash transactions. These default settings can be overridden for a particular cash entry. You can view and edit the applied VAT on the **VAT details** tab. For more information, see:[VAT categories (TX205500)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-categories-tx205500/) ## Releasing a cash entry You can release a balanced cash entry by using the following windows: + [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/): You release the cash entry you are viewing by clicking **Release** in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar. + [Release cash transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/): You use this window to release a particular cash transaction or multiple cash transactions. [Release multiple cash transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/release-multiple-cash-transactions/) For more information, see: + [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/): You can also use this window to release a particular cash transaction or multiple cash transactions. When you release a cash entry, its status changes to **Released**, the system generates a batch, and the system posts it to the General ledger if the **Automatically post to General ledger on release** check box is selected in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. If this option is not selected, you can post it manually by using the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. The system assigns reference numbers to the batches that implement the transactions in accordance with the numbering sequences used for cash management transactions and updates the involved accounts with the transactions shown in the following tables, based on whether the cash transaction is a receipt or a disbursement and whether taxes were applied to the transaction. Receipt cash transaction without VAT |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Amount|0.00| |Offset account|0.00|Amount| Disbursement cash transaction without VAT |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|0.00|Amount| |Offset account|Amount|0.00| Receipt cash transaction with VAT |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Amount + VAT amount|0.00| |VAT account|0.00|VAT amount| |Offset account|0.00|Amount| Disbursement cash transaction with VAT |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|0.00|Amount + VAT amount| |VAT account|VAT amount|0.00| |Offset account|Amount|0.00| Transactions recorded in the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window do not affect the balances of customer or supplier accounts in the Customer ledger or Supplier ledger workspaces. ## Viewing cash entry details You can view cash entry details by using the following windows: + [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/): You can view cash entry details on this window, as described above, and you can view the associated General ledger batch (if the transaction has been released) by clicking the batch number on the **Financial details** tab. + [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/): In this window, you can view all activity on any cash account during the date range you specify, including the applicable cash entries. You can also view the details of the associated General ledger batch by clicking the batch number in the **Batch number** column. ## Reversing a cash entry If you have added an incorrect cash entry and have released it, you can reverse the changes by generating a reversing cash entry from the incorrect one. When you create the reversing cash entry, the system generates a transaction with negative amounts to offset the original cash transaction. For more information, see:[Correct a cash entry](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/correct-a-cash-entry/) About funds transfer processing /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/about-funds-transfer-processing page In Visma Net, you can record cash transfers between bank accounts with the same currency or different currencies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About funds transfer processing In Visma Net, you can record cash transfers between bank accounts with the same currency or different currencies. In Visma Net, you can record cash transfers between bank accounts with the same currency or different currencies. In a funds transfer document, you can record transferred amounts and any transfer expenses. You do not need to set up entry types before you can record funds transfers. In this topic, you will read about how a funds transfer is recorded and then processed in the system. ## Recording a funds transfer You create a funds transfer document by using the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window. You specify the source cash account, the document reference number, the transferred amount, and the destination cash account. When you save the funds transfer, the system assigns it a reference number accordance with the number series assigned to transfers in the **Transfer number series** field in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. The system creates the funds transfer with the **Balanced** status by default. (That is, by default, the **Hold transactions on entry** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window is cleared, so new funds transfers are not put on hold.) Balanced transfers can be edited, saved, put on hold, or released. If you transfer funds between accounts denominated in different currencies, the system performs currency conversion by using the base currency and the cash-in-transit account and subaccount (if the **Subaccount** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window) that are specified in the **Cash-in-transit account** and **Cash-in-transit subaccount** fields in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. For transfers maintained in different currencies, you can change the exchange rate for a particular transfer, and you can change the amount received to the destination account if the exchange rate of the system differs from the exchange rate of the bank. If you change the received amount, the system calculates the realised gain or loss (RGOL) for the transfer. Transactions of the following types are generated when you save the funds transfer document: + **Transfer in**: This transaction has the same number as the transfer, and its entries update the destination account and cash-in-transit account, if one is used. + **Transfer out**: This transaction also has the same number as the transfer, and its entries update the source account and the cash-in-transit account, if one is used. > [!NOTE] > These transactions both appear as transactions of the **Transfer** type in the [Release cash transactions (CA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/) window. + **Expense entry**: Every expense you record generates a separate transaction. Journal entries of transfer expenses update the accounts associated with the entry type selected for the transfer expense. Transactions of this type are numbered automatically in accordance with the number series assigned to cash transactions in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. Placing a funds transfer on hold You can place a balanced funds transfer on hold by selecting the **Hold** check box in the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window to prevent a funds transfer from being released and transactions from being posted to general ledger before all transfer expenses are entered. With the check box selected, the status of the transfer is **On hold**. A funds transfer with this status can be edited, saved, or released from hold. You can select the **Hold transactions on entry** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window to create funds transfers with the **On hold** status by default. ## Adding expenses You can record transfer expenses and charges in a funds transfer document by clicking **Add expense** in the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window and entering the expense-related information in the **Quick transaction** dialog box. Before you record charges, you need to configure an entry type that provides the default details for the transaction. ## Releasing a funds transfer You can release a balanced funds transfer by using the following windows: + [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/): You release the funds transfer you are viewing and its transactions by clicking **Release** in the window toolbar. + [Release cash transactions (CA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/): You use this window to release a particular funds transfer or multiple funds transfers. This window includes transactions of **Transfer** type, and transactions that correspond to one transfer have the same transaction number. To release all transactions of the funds transfer, you need to select only one transaction and release it; the system releases the other transactions automatically. + [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/): You can also use this window to release a particular funds transfer or multiple funds transfers. In this window, you first select a cash account, which can be the source or destination account for your funds transfer, and then the system displays a list of transactions that includes the funds transfer transaction of the **Transfer out** or **Transfer in** type, depending on whether the account you selected is a source or destination account. In this window, too, to release all transactions of the funds transfer, you need to select only one transaction and release it; the system releases the other transactions automatically. After you release a funds transfer, the system changes its status to **Released** and records batches with transactions to the general ledger. If you transfer the funds between bank accounts with the base currency, the system generates a general ledger batch with following transaction. ### The Transactions for the base currency transfer table |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Source account|0.00|Transfer amount| |Destination account|Transfer amount|0.00| The system also can generate separate transfer-in and transfer-out general ledger batches for funds transfer maintained in base currency. For example: If the post period of the transfer-out and transfer-in are different, the funds are moved first to the cash-in-transit account, and then from this account to the destination account. The system always generates separate general ledger batches for a multi-currency transfer. The following tables show the transactions recorded to the general ledger for the source and destination accounts. ### The Transactions for the source account: Multi-currency transfer table |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Source account|0.00|Transfer amount| |Cash-in-transit account|Transfer amount|0.00| ### The Transactions for the destination account: Multi-currency transfer table |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Destination account|Transfer amount|0.00| |Cash-in-transit account|0.00|Transfer amount| If the gain or loss is produced by a multi-currency transfer, the transactions shown in the following tables are recorded to the general ledger for the destination account, depending on whether a gain or loss is produced by the transfer (that is, whether the RGOL is positive or negative). ### The Transactions for the destination account: Multi-currency transfer producing a gain table |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Destination account|Transfer amount|0.00| |Cash-in-transit account|0.00|Transfer amount| |Realised gain/loss account|0.00|RGOL amount| |Cash-in-transit account|RGOL amount|0.00| ### The Transactions for the destination account: Multi-currency transfer producing a loss table |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Destination account|Transfer amount|0.00| |Cash-in-transit account|0.00|Transfer amount| |Realised gain/loss account|RGOL amount|0.00| |Cash-in-transit account|0.00|RGOL amount| If you have added expenses for the funds transfer, the system generates a separate cash transaction when the funds transfer is released, and the following transactions are recorded to the general ledger. ### The Transactions for expenses table |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|0.00|Expense amount| |Bank charges account|Expense amount|0.00| If the **Automatically post to general ledger on release** check box is selected in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, the system automatically posts batches to the general ledger; otherwise, you need to post the batch manually by using the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. ## Viewing transaction details You can view transaction details by using the following windows: + [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/): You can view the funds transfer details in this window, as described above, and you can view the associated general ledger batches (if the funds transfer has been released) by clicking the batch numbers in the **Source account** and **Destination account** sections. + [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/): In this window, you can view all activity on any cash account during the date range you specify, including any transactions of funds transfers generated for the selected cash account. You can also view the details of the associated general ledger batch by clicking the batch number in the **Batch number** column. ## Correcting a released funds transfer If you have released an incorrect transfer and want to correct the transactions, you can first create and release a reversing transfer and then make the correct transfer.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Transfer funds /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/transfer-funds page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transfer funds 1. Go to the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window. 1. The **Transfer number** field displays **NEW** by default, but you can use this field to select and look at previous transfers. 1. Optional: If the transaction is a draft only and you want to release it later, select the **Hold** check box. 1. In the **Account** field, select the account you want to transfer the funds from. 1. Optional: In the **Transfer date** field, change the transfer date. 1. In the **Document ref.** field, enter the source document's reference number. 1. In the **Amount** field, enter the amount to transfer. 1. In the **Account** field in the **Destination account** area, select the account for the funds transfer. 1. Optional: In the **Receipt date** field, change the receipt date. 1. In the **Document ref.** field, enter the destination document's reference number. 1. Click **Release**. > [!NOTE] > Before you release the funds transfer transaction, you can add expenses to it. To do that, press **Add expense** in the table area. It opens the **Quick transactions** dialog box, which you can use to enter a cash adjustment that contains the details of transfer-related expenses or charges.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Record a cash entry /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/record-a-cash-entry section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Record a cash entry ## Before you proceed Before you start recording a cash entry, make sure that all the necessary entry types are created in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window and associated with cash accounts in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Go to the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Transaction date** field, check the date of the cash transaction, and change it if necessary. By default, the current business date is selected in the field, but you can select another date. The **Financial period** field is filled in automatically based on transaction date. After you have selected the transaction date, you can change the financial period of the transaction if needed. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the cash account for the transaction. 1. In the **Entry type** field, select the entry type from the list of entry types defined for the selected cash account. 1. Optional: In the **Document ref.** field, enter the document reference number that meets your company requirements. > [!NOTE] > If document reference numbers are required in your company, you can make them mandatory in the system by selecting the **Require document ref. no. on entry** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a brief description of the transaction. 1. On the **Transaction details** tab, add cash transaction details, doing the following for each transaction: 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add row**. 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, select the ID of the non-stock item used as the transaction subject. > [!NOTE] > If you specify an item ID, by default, the system inserts the UoM, price VAT category and offset account and subaccount of the non-stock item into the transaction detail if they are specified for the non-stock item. 1. Optional: In the **Quantity** column, enter the quantity of the item associated with the transaction. 1. Optional: Check the **UoM** column, change or enter the unit of measure of the item if necessary. 1. Optional: Check the **Price** column, change or enter the price for the item if necessary. 1. In the **Amount** column, check the total amount for all units or items, and change it if necessary. If the quantity and price are specified for the item, the amount is calculated automatically when you save the cash entry. 1. Check the **Offset account** column, change or enter it if necessary. > [!NOTE] > If the item ID is not specified for the transaction, the system fills in the columns with the offset account and subaccount specified for the selected entry type, you can change it if necessary. 1. Optional: Check the **VAT category** column, and change or specify the VAT category that applies to the transaction if necessary. 1. Optional: On the **Financial details** tab, check the **VAT zone** field, and change it if necessary. > [!NOTE] > To apply taxes to the cash transactions, VAT categories and VAT zones must be created in the system. You can set the default VAT zone for particular entry type in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Optional: On the **VAT details** tab, review and correct the taxes applied to the transaction if necessary. 1. Prepare the cash transaction for further processing as follows: + If you want to save the cash transaction with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + If you want to save the cash transaction with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After you saved a cash entry, in the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window, you can edit the created transaction, or release it if it is balanced. Also, you can release multiple balanced cash entries in the [Release cash transactions (CA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/) and the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) windows.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Quickly record cash entry task /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/quickly-record-cash-entry-task section To quickly record a cash transaction, you use the Quick transaction dialog box. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Quickly record cash entry task To quickly record a cash transaction, you use the Quick transaction dialog box. You can invoke the dialog box in one of the following ways: + By clicking the **Create transaction** button in the table toolbar of the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window. + By clicking the **Add expense** button in the table toolbar of the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window when you are recording a funds transfer. + By clicking the **Create adjustment** button in the table toolbar of the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window when you are performing the bank reconciliation of the cash account. ## Before you proceed Before you start recording a cash transaction, make sure all the necessary entry types are created in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window and associated with cash accounts in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Invoke the **Quick transaction dialog box**. 1. In the **Entry type** field, select the entry type from the list of entry types defined for the cash account selected in the window from which you invoked the dialog box. 1. In the **Document date** field, check the date of the cash transaction, and change it if necessary. By default, the current date is selected in the field, but you can select another date. The **Financial period** field is filled in automatically based on the transaction date. After you have selected the transaction date, you can change the financial period of the transaction, if needed. 1. In the **Document ref.** field, enter the document reference number that meets your internal requirements. This step is optional if the **Require document ref. no. on entry** check box is cleared in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. If you have selected an entry type set to **Cash management**, do the following: 1. Check the **Offset account** column; by default, the system fills in the column with the offset account specified for the selected entry type, but you can change the default account if necessary. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and subaccounts are configured in the system, the **Offset subaccount** column is available, and it is filled automatically based on the offset subaccount specified for the selected entry type. 1. Prepare the cash transaction for further processing as follows: + To save the cash transaction with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the cash transaction with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. If you have selected an entry type set to **Supplier ledger** or **Customer ledger**, do the following: 1. In the **Business account** field, select the account of the supplier or the customer used for the transaction. 1. In the **Location** field, check the supplier or customer location, and change it if necessary. 1. In the **Payment method** field, check the method of payment. You can change it if multiple payment methods can be accepted. > [!NOTE] > Payment methods have to be created in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window to process cash transactions of the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces. 1. In the **Amount** column, enter the total amount for all units or items. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a brief description of the transaction. 1. If this transaction has been cleared, select the **Cleared** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), and close the **Quick transaction dialog box**. After you have saved a cash transaction, you can edit the created transaction, or release it if it is balanced, in the workspace specified for the entry type you selected. Also, you can release a particular or multiple balanced cash transactions in the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window. Create transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/create-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create transactions ## Before you start When you create a new transaction, you have to define at least the entry type of the transaction to create a new cash or expense entry. Required fields depend on the preferences you have configured in [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/). 1. Go to the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window. 1. By default, the **Reference no.** field, displays **NEW**. 1. The **Trans. date** field displays the current date. You can change it. 1. The **Period** field displays the current period. You can change it. 1. **Optional:** In the **Description** field, describe what this transaction concerns. 1. On the **Transaction details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new transaction detail row. Enter the relevant details. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If you want to add more rows, repeat step 5 and then save when you have entered the last row. 1. In the **Amount** area in the top right corner of the window, you can see the total of the sums entered in the rows. 1. When you have entered all required information, click **Release** to release the cash transaction. The **VAT details** tab displays the automatically calculated taxes for the transaction and their details. Here, you can also add rows, in the same way as described above.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Edit transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/edit-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit transactions 1. Go to the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the unreleased transaction that you want to edit. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create an entry type for disbursements or receipts /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/create-an-entry-type-for-disbursements-or-receipts section Entry types can be receipts or disbursements, and you can define and use them to provide more details about the transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an entry type for disbursements or receipts Entry types can be receipts or disbursements, and you can define and use them to provide more details about the transactions. 1. Go to the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png), to add a new record. 1. In the **Entry type ID** field, enter the next available number. 1. In the **Disb./receipt** field, click to select one of these: 1. **Receipt** - records money going in. 1. **Disbursement** - records money going out. 1. In the **Entry type description** field, enter a description for your new entry type. 1. In the **Workspace** field, select Cash management. 1. In the **Default offset subaccount** field, select the preferred subaccount. 1. Optional: Enter additional information in the remaining fields. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? You can assign cash accounts to entry types: [Select and edit an entry type](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/select-and-edit-an-entry-type/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Release multiple cash transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/release-multiple-cash-transactions page You can release multiple cash transactions in the following windows, as described in detail in the following sections: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release multiple cash transactions You can release multiple cash transactions in the following windows, as described in detail in the following sections: + The [Release cash transactions (CA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/) window: For only for cash transactions that affect general ledger accounts or cash transactions of the **Cash entry**, **Transfer**, **Expense entry**, **Cash deposit**, and **Cash void deposit** transaction types. + The [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window: For all cash transactions. ## Release cash transactions by using the Release cash transactions (CA502000) window 1. Go to the [Release cash transactions (CA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/) window. 1. Do one of the following: + To release all listed documents, click **Release all** in the window toolbar. + To release only selected documents, select each document you want to release by selecting the appropriate unlabelled check box, and in the window toolbar, click **Release**. ## Release cash transactions by using the Cash account details (CA303000) window 1. Go to the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field of the top part, select the cash account whose transactions you want to view. 1. In the **Start date** and **End date** fields, specify the date range for which you want to view transactions. By default, the start date and the end date are the first day and the last day of the current month, week, or financial period, depending on the option specified as the **Default date range** in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. Select the documents you want to release by selecting the appropriate unlabelled check boxes, and in the window toolbar, click **Release**. > [!NOTE] > To release transactions related to the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces in the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, make sure the **Release supplier ledger documents from the Cash management workspace** and **Release customer ledger documents from the Cash management workspace** check boxes are selected in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Correct a cash entry /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/correct-a-cash-entry page To correct an incorrect transaction of the Cash entry type, you create a reversing cash transaction, release it, and then create and release the correct transaction. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct a cash entry To correct an incorrect transaction of the Cash entry type, you create a reversing cash transaction, release it, and then create and release the correct transaction. To correct an incorrect transaction of the **Cash entry** type, you create a reversing cash transaction, release it, and then create and release the correct transaction. You perform these actions in the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window, as described in the procedure below. Alternatively, to reverse an incorrect cash entry transaction, you can find the incorrect transaction in the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, click the reference number of the transaction in the **Orig. doc. number** column to navigate to the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window, and then perform steps 3–5 of the procedure below. ## Reverse a cash entry transaction 1. Go to the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window. 1. Find the incorrect cash transaction by clicking the navigation buttons in the window toolbar until you see it. Alternatively, click the lookup icon in the **Reference no.** field, find the cash transaction in one of the following ways, and double-click the row to open the transaction: + Type a reference number in the search field in the upper-right corner. As you type, the system filters the listed transactions to display only those that contain the text in the **Reference no.** column. + Click the column heading of a column you want to search, type a string in the search field, and press **Enter**. The system displays the items that contain the text in the column. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Actions** - **Reverse**. The system creates and displays a reversing cash transaction with negative amounts, the same details as the original cash transaction, and a status of **Balanced** by default (the **Hold transactions on entry** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window is cleared). 1. Make sure all the settings of the newly created transaction are correct, change them if necessary. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a description of the reversing cash transaction. 1. Click **Release** to release the reversing cash transaction. Now that you have created and released the reversing cash transaction, you can create and release the corrected cash transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create anticipated cash transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/create-anticipated-cash-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create anticipated cash transactions 1. Go to the [Anticipated cash transactions (CA305500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/anticipated-cash-transactions-ca305500/) window. 1. Select a **Cash account** and a **Start date** to view only the transactions with later dates. 1. To enter a new expected cash transaction, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Cash account** column, enter or select the cash account connected with the cash transaction. 1. In the **Trans. date** column, select the date of the cash transaction. 1. Click the **Disb./receipt** column heading to select the transaction type: **Disbursement** or **Receipt**. 1. In the **Description** column, enter your description for the transaction. 1. In the **Currency** column, select the currency of the cash account. 1. In the **Amount** column, enter the amount of the cash transaction 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Record a funds transfer /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/record-a-funds-transfer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Record a funds transfer 1. Go to the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Source account** section, add source account details by doing the following: 1. In the **Account** field, select the cash account from which the funds are transferred. 1. In the **Transfer date** field, check the date of the funds transfer, and change it if necessary. 1. In the **Document ref.** field, enter the document reference number of the transfer in the bank. 1. In the **Amount** field, enter the amount that is being transferred. 1. If the transaction has been cleared, select the **Cleared** check box and specify the clear date in the **Clear date** field. 1. In the **Destination account** section, add the details of the destination account as follows: 1. In the **Account** field, select the cash account to which the funds are transferred. 1. In the **Receipt date** field, check the date of the funds transfer receipt, and change it if necessary. 1. Check the **Document ref.** setting, and change it if necessary. 1. If the transaction has been cleared, select the **Cleared** check box and specify the clear date in the **Clear date** field. 1. Optional: If the funds transfer is maintained in different currencies, in the account section with the foreign currency, check the **Exchange rate** field, and override the currency rate for this particular document if necessary. > [!NOTE] > To perform a multi-currency funds transfer, you need to enable the multi-currency support functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and predefine exchange rates. For a multi-currency funds transfer, you should also make sure that the cash-in-transit account and subaccount are specified in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. Optional: If the funds transfer is maintained in different currencies, in the **Destination account** section, check the **Amount** field and change it to the amount received by the bank if it differs from the amount calculated by the system. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a brief description of the funds transfer. 1. Optional: If you want to add expenses related to the funds transfer, in the table toolbar, click the **Add expense** button, and create a quick cash transaction. 1. Optional: In the list of added expenses, check the details of the created transactions, and change them if necessary. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About cash transaction monitoring /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/about-cash-transaction-monitoring page By using the Cash account details (CA303000) window, authorised users can monitor cash accounts and effectively manage cash transactions originating in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, and Cash management workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash transaction monitoring By using the Cash account details (CA303000) window, authorised users can monitor cash accounts and effectively manage cash transactions originating in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, and Cash management workspaces. For more information: [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/). This functionality provides instant access to the up-to-date balance of each cash account. The balance of each cash account is updated as each supplier ledger or customer ledger document is released, cleared, or reconciled. You can get a per-day summary of a bank account or the complete list of documents and transactions created during the specified period. You also can drill down to individual supplier ledger, customer ledger, or cash management documents to view their details, and cash transactions can be added quickly from the window. With immediate access to all cash transactions and an accurate big picture view of each cash account, you and your authorised personnel can save time, manage the cash flow more effectively, and make informed business decisions. ## Selecting the view You can use the selection area of the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window to customise the transactions that will be shown in the table area. You can view a summary or detailed view of transaction information, so that you get the precise level of detail you need at the moment. To view the summary of activities on the chosen cash account, select the **Show summary** option in the selection area of the window. The transactions in the list will be grouped by receipts and disbursements and by day of the week in the specified date range. (Dates without transactions will not be listed.) The summary view shows only the document date, the day of the week, the total amount of receipts and disbursements, and the ending balance for the day. The detailed view, which you get when the check box for the **Show summary** option is cleared, is the default view. This view displays all activity on the cash account during the specified period. With the detailed view, you can see the most thorough information about each transaction. This information includes the transaction's detailed description, its type, its status, and information about the supplier or customer associated with the document (if it's an supplier ledger or customer ledger document). ## Selecting transactions to be displayed The transactions displayed in the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window correspond to the date range specified in the selection area. By default, the start and end dates are based on the default date range set for the Cash management workspace in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. The default start date is the first date of the current month, week, or financial period, depending on which of these is the default date range, and the default end date is the last date of the current date range. The user can, of course, override these default settings to view any time interval. In addition, the **Include unreleased** check box in the Selection area of the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window controls whether transactions with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status will be included in the displayed transactions: + For the summary view, if this check box is selected, transactions with these statuses will be added to the totals of receipts and disbursements per day. If the check box is cleared, totals of receipts and disbursements are calculated only on the released transactions. + For the detailed view, if this check box is selected, all documents associated with the cash account will be listed. If it is cleared, only released documents will be listed. ## Entering transactions quickly In the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window (in both the detailed and summary views), you can access the **Quick transaction entry** dialog box by clicking the **Create transaction** button in the table toolbar. You use this dialog box to quickly add supplier ledger, customer ledger, or cash management transactions.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About cash flow forecasting /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/about-cash-flow-forecasting page By analysing cash flow forecasts, you can avoid unexpected shortages in cash and properly plan your payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash flow forecasting By analysing cash flow forecasts, you can avoid unexpected shortages in cash and properly plan your payments. By analysing cash flow forecasts, you can avoid unexpected shortages in cash and properly plan your payments. Cash flow forecasting is typically performed for a month or 30 days and can be done in any currency. In Visma Net, you can calculate a 30-day cash flow forecast by using the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. To view a forecast for a single cash account, select it as the **Cash account**. To view a forecast for all available cash accounts, leave the field blank. + Projected balance of the cash account in the **Cash summary** section of the report. + Total amount of customer payments to be received this day in the **Cash receipts** section of the report. + Total amount of outgoing payments to be sent this day in the **Cash paid out** section of the report. In Visma Net, you can control the level of detail to be used for cash flow forecasting. Also, to improve the quality of forecasts, you can manually enter expected cash transactions that are not yet confirmed by available documents. ## Types of documents to be included in the forecast You can choose the level of detail to be used for forecast calculation by using the elements in the top part of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. By default, released documents of the following types are included in calculation: + Purchase invoices and adjustments + Sales invoices and notes (only the unapplied amounts) + Customer ledger payments (only the application amounts) + Supplier prepayments + Customer prepayments You can also include in calculation the following documents with other statuses: + Unreleased purchase invoices, adjustments, sales invoices, and notes + Recurring documents scheduled for the dates within the forecast's 30-day period + Unapplied payments ## Processing of documents with no cash account specified Some sales and purchase invoices may be entered into the system with no cash accounts specified. To include such documents into a forecast, in the **Cash account selection** area of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, select the **Include customer ledger and supplier documents with no cash account specified** check box. Before calculating the forecast, the system attempts to assign a cash account to each document without a cash account specified, based on supplier or customer default settings; after this, some documents will still have no cash account assigned. The system processes the documents with unassigned default cash accounts a bit differently, depending on whether you run cash flow forecasting for a single selected cash account or for all cash accounts: + Forecasting for a selected cash account: The system includes only the documents with the assigned cash account that matches the cash account. If the system fails to assign a cash account using the default settings, it assigns the cash account selected for forecasting provided the branch of the document matches the branch of the cash account. + Forecasting for all available cash accounts: The system adds the documents with the assigned cash accounts to the balances of respective cash accounts. If the system fails to assign a cash account to a document, it adds the document to the balance of the cash account specified in the **Default cash account** field (which is available if you select the **Include customer ledger and supplier documents with no cash account specified** check box). No branch matching is performed. ## Anticipated cash transactions + Forecasts based only on the entered documents are not especially correct. To improve forecasts, you can manually enter information about expected cash flows received from external sources and not yet supported by available documents. + Using the [Anticipated cash transactions (CA305500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/anticipated-cash-transactions-ca305500/) window, you can select a cash account and enter the cash amounts you expect to collect or to pay out and the dates of such cash transactions. + These transactions will be used only in the forecast calculations. ## Conversion to the specified currency You can perform forecasts in any of the currencies defined in the system. In the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, select the target currency and the exchange rate.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Track cash payments /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track cash payments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Track cash payments - overview /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/track-cash-payments-overview page In Visma Net, you can easily manage and track cash payments to ease the reconciliation of cash accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track cash payments - overview In Visma Net, you can easily manage and track cash payments to ease the reconciliation of cash accounts. Financial institutions may record finance charges or deposits in different ways. For instance, a bank may record a finance charge applied to an incoming payment as a separate transaction, or the bank may simply deduct the charge amount from a payment. When a bank deducts the charge amount from a payment, it can be difficult to match a bank transaction to a document in the system because the transaction amount and the payment amount will differ by the amount of the applied charge. With deposits, a bank may record multiple deposited payments as one transaction, and it can be hard to find all the payments in the system that were included in the deposit. You can configure processing of cash payments in Visma Net according to your business processes to ease the process of tracking cash and reconciling accounts. These topics will help you to understand how to configure and further process unknown payments, finance charges, and bank deposits. ## Topics + [About the reclassification of unknown payments](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-reclassification-of-unknown-payments/) + [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/) + [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/) About the reclassification of unknown payments /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-reclassification-of-unknown-payments page During a financial period, you can receive or download a list of the recent bank transactions, which helps you to clear documents in the system regularly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the reclassification of unknown payments During a financial period, you can receive or download a list of the recent bank transactions, which helps you to clear documents in the system regularly. During a financial period, you can receive or download a list of the recent bank transactions, which helps you to clear documents in the system regularly. Regular reviews of such a list make visible to your company any transactions that you did not previously know about. These transactions include interest earned, bank charges, and payments made automatically by the bank for standing orders. While you can easily identify some of these transactions, such as interest or bank charges, identification of others may take some time. Visma Net provides functionality that you can use to record payments without details when they arrive (or appear on the bank statement) to special accounts and reclassify them later by adding the details that have become known. ## Configuring processing of unknown payments To enable this functionality, you configure the processing of unknown payments. Because accounts that temporarily store unknown payments and bank accounts to which you will later reclassify these payments are cash accounts denominated to specific currencies, the processing of unknown payments must be configured separately for each currency involved. For each currency, complete the following steps to configure processing of unknown payments: 1. To temporarily hold unknown payments in the specific currency, create at least one general ledger account by using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/). We recommend that this be an account of the **Liability** type with a name that reflects its intended use; for example, the name may include **Unknown payments** or **Unrecognised payments**. 1. Create a cash account by using the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window linked to the general ledger account created in Step 1. 1. In the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window, create separate entry types for the incoming and outgoing unknown payments made in this currency. 1. By using the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window, bring up each bank account (to which you will later reclassify unknown payments) denominated to the specific currency and (on the **Entry types** tab) add the entry type created in Step 2 to the list of entry types allowed for the bank account. Finally, in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, in the **Unrecognised receipts type** field, specify the entry type to be used by default for unknown payments; this default entry type (of the **Receipt** or **Disbursement** type) can be the one associated with the currency used most often by your customers. Once the configuration is finished, you may proceed with the recording and further reclassification of the unknown payments. ## Processing unknown payments When you detect an unknown payment on the bank statement, you process it as follows: 1. In the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) or [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, create a cash transaction and use the appropriate entry type for an unknown payment that appears on this bank account. The transaction records the unknown payment as if it is made from the unknown payment account (the offset account for the entry) to the bank cash account. 1. Once the details of the payment become known, in the [Reclassify payments (CA506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reclassify-payments-ca506500/) window, specify the appropriate selection criteria to locate the payment. Once you locate the payment, specify its details, which at minimum should include the workspace of origin, the actual payer or recipient (that is, customer or supplier), the customer or supplier location, and the applicable payment method and release it. Upon release of the payment, the payment amount will be moved from the unknown payment account to the appropriate supplier ledger or customer ledger account. You can view the resulting document by clicking the **View resulting document** button in the window toolbar. > [!NOTE] > The system assigns to the resulting document the payment reference number specified in the **Document ref.** field of the initial unknown payment. After reclassification, you have the correct transaction between the cash account and the supplier ledger or customer ledger account, which can be reconciled with the bank statement and traced in the customer or supplier documents, and the amount on the temporary account is reversed. ## Searching for unknown payments You use the [Reclassify payments (CA506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reclassify-payments-ca506500/) window to view the released unrecognised payments (reclassified or not). As you record the unknown payments by using the dedicated entry type, you start your search by selecting the corresponding entry type in the **Entry type** field of the window. Then you can further narrow the results by specifying a cash account and date range. The system displays only released unknown payments that require reclassification and have been recorded by using the selected entry type to the specified account. If you want to view payments that have been reclassified, you additionally select the **Show reclassified** check box. The system displays the list of reclassified payments. You can view the resulting document by highlighting the needed record and clicking **View resulting document** in the window toolbar. If you want to view recorded unknown payments that have not been released yet, you can use the following windows: + [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/): You search for the payment by its reference number. You may specify the document reference number and the cash account as the filter criteria in the reference number selection window. + [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/): You search for the payment by selecting the cash account to which you have recorded it and the possible date range, and selecting the **Include unreleased** check box. You may further narrow the results by filtering the table records by the value of the **Document ref.** column. + [Release cash transactions (CA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000/): You search for the payment by filtering the table records by cash account and transaction description. You can release a balanced unknown payment by using all of the windows listed above.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reclassification results /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/reclassification-results page You can view the results of your actions during each stage of the processing of unknown payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reclassification results You can view the results of your actions during each stage of the processing of unknown payments. In this topic, you will read about the journal transactions and the documents the system generates when you record and reclassify the unknown payments. ## Reclassifying incoming unknown payments In the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, you select the bank cash account to which you have recorded the unknown payment. In the table, you locate the record, and by clicking the batch number link, you can view the following journal transactions, which are generated when the incoming payment is initially created. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Unknown payments account|0.0|Amount| |(Bank) cash account|Amount|0.0| When you reclassify the incoming payment as a customer ledger document, the system generates a customer payment with the **On hold** status that you can view and edit in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. When you release the payment, the system updates the balances of the involved customer, of the corresponding Customer ledger account (which is specified for the customer on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window), and of the unknown payments account. You can view the resulting journal transactions by clicking the batch number link on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Unknown payments account|Amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Amount| When you reclassify the incoming payment as a supplier ledger document, the system generates a supplier refund with the **On hold** status that you can view and edit in the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. To process the supplier refund in the system, you need to apply it against an open debit adjustment or prepayment, depending on the reason of the refund. (You have to create and process the appropriate document in the system, if such a document has not been recorded yet.) When you release the refund and its applications, the system updates the balances of the involved supplier, of the corresponding supplier ledger account (which is specified for the supplier on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window) and of the unknown payments account. You can view the resulting journal transactions by clicking the batch number link on the **Financial details** tab of the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Unknown payments account|Amount|0.0| |Supplier ledger account|0.0|Amount| ## Reclassifying outgoing unknown payments In the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, you select the bank cash account to which you have recorded the unknown payment. In the table, you locate the record, and by clicking the batch number link, you can view the following journal transactions, which are generated when the outgoing payment is initially created. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Unknown payments account|Amount|0.0| |(Bank) cash account|0.0|Amount| When you reclassify the outgoing payment as a customer ledger document, the system generates a customer refund with the **On hold** status that you can view and edit in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. To process the customer refund in the system, you need to apply it against an open credit note, payment, or prepayment, depending on the reason of the refund. (You have to create and process the appropriate document in the system, if such a document has not been recorded yet.) When you release the refund and its applications, the system updates the balances of the involved customer, of the corresponding customer ledger account (which is specified for the customer on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window), and of the unknown payments account. You can view the resulting journal transactions by clicking the batch number link on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Unknown payments account|0.0|Amount| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| When you reclassify the outgoing unknown payment as a supplier ledger document, the system generates a prepayment with the **On hold** status that you can view and edit in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. When you release the prepayment, the system updates the prepayment balance of the involved supplier and the balances of the corresponding supplier ledger account (which is specified for the supplier on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window ) and of the unknown payments account. You can view the resulting journal transactions by clicking the batch number link on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Unknown payments account|0.0|Amount| |Supplier ledger account|Amount|0.0| About the registration of finance charges /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges page Whenever you send payments to your suppliers or receive these payments from your customers, the payments are processed by banks or other financial institutions, which generally apply processing fees and charges to each payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the registration of finance charges Whenever you send payments to your suppliers or receive these payments from your customers, the payments are processed by banks or other financial institutions, which generally apply processing fees and charges to each payment. Whenever you send payments to your suppliers or receive these payments from your customers, the payments are processed by banks or other financial institutions, which generally apply processing fees and charges to each payment. Generally, the sending financial institution transfers the outgoing payments in full and charges the bank account of the payer for any applicable fees. The receiving financial institution deducts the charges and processing fees from the incoming payment amount. To facilitate accounting for these charges, in Visma Net you can configure the finance charges that apply to payments in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces, and to funds transfers in the Cash management workspace. In Visma Net, you can configure the application of the bank charges depending on how the bank your company works with presents the charges on its statements to facilitate reconciliation with the bank statement. In this topic you will read about how to configure the collection of finance charges and to record collected charges. ## Configuration of finance charges To facilitate accounting for the charges applied by each bank for payment processing, you perform the following steps: 1. Review the bank charges applied to your payments by different banks. To define the bank charges in the system, you use entry types that function like transaction templates. Determine whether you will use the same entry types for all banks or you need separate entry types for each bank. Consider creating a naming convention for the entry types. 1. By using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window, create or designate general ledger accounts of the expense type to be used to track bank charges. You will specify these accounts as offset accounts when you create entry types. Depending on your company's policies, you can use one account and multiple specific subaccounts for tracking the charges from all banks, or you can use multiple accounts and subaccounts. 1. Create the needed entry types by using the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. [Add an entry type to a charge](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/add-an-entry-type-to-a-charge/) For more information, see: 1. Make sure that for each bank that charges your company for payment processing, cash accounts have been configured in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Associate the created entry types with the bank accounts by using the **Entry types** tab of the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. [Create a cash account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/create-a-cash-account/) For more information, see: After the configuration is completed, you can use the created entry types to record bank charges for payments made by using the payment methods allowed for bank accounts. (Allowed payment methods are listed on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window.) ## Collection of finance charges Once the finance charges are configured, their amounts can be recorded on each payment that passes through the financial institution. In the Supplier ledger workspace, you can add bank charges to payments by using the **Finance charges** tab in the following windows: + [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/): To add charges to supplier ledger payments Finance charges cannot be specified for refunds and debit adjustments. To add finance charges to a prepayment, specify them on the payment that pays the prepayment request. For each payment in the Supplier ledger workspace, in the top part of the respective window, you can view the original amount of the document and the total amount of finance charges. In the Customer ledger workspace, you can add charges to customer payments by using the **Finance charges** tab of the following windows: + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/): To add charges to customer payments and prepayments + [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/): To add charges to cash sales For each payment in the Customer ledger workspace (in the respective window), you can view the original amount of the document, the total amount of finance charges, and the total amount of charges that the financial institution deducted from or applied to the payment amount. Even if the specific finance charges were deducted from the customer payment, in either window, the original payment amount is shown, so that you can apply it to customer documents. In the Cash management workspace, you can add charges to fund transfers and deposits in the following windows: + [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/): To add expenses to fund transfers by using the **Add expense** button in the table toolbar of the window + [Bank deposits (CA305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000/): To add charges to bank deposits by using the **Charges** tab of the window For each bank deposit, in the top part of the respective window, you can view the deposit original amount, the total amount of finance charges, and the total amount of the deposit. For the funds transfers, you can view the transfer amount (in the top part) and the list of finance charges to be applied in the table of the respective window. ## Generation of finance charge transactions On the release of each document with charges, the system generates a batch of transactions. You can view the batch for a document by clicking the batch reference number, which is displayed on the **Financial details** tab of the window that was used to create the document. (These windows are described in the previous section.) The reference number of the batch generated for a funds transfer is displayed in the top part of the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Finance charge transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/finance-charge-transactions page On the release of each document with charges, the system generates a batch of transactions that update the cash account, the customer receivables account or supplier payable account, and the general ledger expense accounts selected to accrue charges of the respective entry types (specified as an offset accounts). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Finance charge transactions On the release of each document with charges, the system generates a batch of transactions that update the cash account, the customer receivables account or supplier payable account, and the general ledger expense accounts selected to accrue charges of the respective entry types (specified as an offset accounts). On the release of each document with charges, the system generates a batch of transactions that update the cash account, the customer receivables account or supplier payable account, and the general ledger expense accounts selected to accrue charges of the respective entry types (specified as an offset accounts). The system behaviour differs depending on the workspace you use to record finance charges or the document for which you add charges. ## Generation of finance charge transactions for supplier ledger documents When you release a document with charges in Supplier ledger workspace, the system generates a batch of transactions that update the cash account, the supplier payable account, and the general ledger expense accounts specified as an offset accounts. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |(Bank) cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |Supplier ledger account|0.0|Payment amount| |(Bank) cash account|0.0|Charge amount| |Bank charges and fees (expense account)|Charge amount|0.0| ## Generation of finance charge transactions for customer ledger payments You can define how the system should record finance charges for the payments made in Customer ledger based on whether you select the **Deduct from payment** check box for the particular entry type in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window, as described below. If the bank deducts the amount of charges from the payment amounts and displays only the resulting amounts on the statements, select the check box for the entry type. For example: When you release a Customer ledger payment, the system generates the following transactions (this example displays only the basic transactions; for the complete list of possible transactions for a Customer ledger payment, see: [About release of payments and prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments/) ). |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |(Bank) cash account|Payment amount– Charge amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount| |Bank charges and fees (expense account)|Charge amount|0.0| If the financial institution presents the charges as separate transactions on its statements, you clear the **Deduct from payment** check box for the appropriate entry types. The sample batch transactions for a customer ledger payment are shown in the following table. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |(Bank) cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |(Bank) cash account|0.0|Charge amount| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount| |Bank charges and fees (expense account)|Charge amount|0.0| ## Generation of finance charge transactions for funds transfers For funds transfers, the system generates a batch of transactions that update the source cash account, the destination cash account, and the genera ledger expense account; the batch generates separate genera ledger transactions for each registered expense. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Source cash account|0.0|Transfer amount| |Destination cash account|Transfer amount|0.0| |Cash account (specified for registering expense)|0.0|Expense amount| |Bank charges and fees (expense account)|Expense amount|0.0| ## Generation of finance charge transactions for bank deposits Once the deposit is released, the system generates a batch of deposit-associated transactions to transfer the payment amounts from clearing accounts to the bank account, and to post the bank charges incurred for the deposit as expenses. The total amount of the bank charges will be deducted from the deposit amount. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |(Bank) cash account|Deposit amount– Charge amount|0.0| |Clearing account|0.0|Payment 1 amount| |Clearing account|0.0|Payment_2 amount| |Clearing account|0.0|Payment_N amount| |Bank charges and fees (expense account)|Charge amount|0.0| To indicate to the system that bank charges should be posted as separate transactions in the batch, before you release the deposit, select the **Separate charges** check box on the **Financial details** tab of the [Bank deposits (CA305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000/) window. In this case, accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |(Bank) cash account|Deposit amount|0.0| |(Bank) cash account|0.0|Charge amount| |Clearing account|0.0|Payment_1 amount| |Clearing account|0.0|Payment_2 amount| |Clearing account|0.0|Payment_N amount| |Bank charges and fees (expense account)|Charge amount|0.0| Add an entry type to a charge /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/add-an-entry-type-to-a-charge section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add an entry type to a charge 1. Go to the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Entry type ID** column of the new row, type an identifier for the new entry type. 1. In the **Disb./receipt** column, select **Disbursement**. 1. In the **Entry type description** column, provide a description that will let users easily identify the entry type. 1. In the **Workspace** column, select **Cash management** to specify that a transaction based on this entry type will affect the balances of general ledger accounts only. 1. In the **Default offset account** column, select the general ledger account of the expense type to keep records of the bank charges of this specific type. 1. In the **Offset subaccount** column, select the subaccount for recording charges of this specific type. 1. If the bank will deduct finance charges of this entry type from the customer ledger payment amount, select the **Deduct from payment** check box. Once bank charges have been configured, you can apply them to payments by using the following windows: + [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/): To add charges to checks, prepayments, adjustments, and refunds + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/): To add charges to payments, prepayments, and returns + [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/): To add charges to cash sales + [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/): To add expenses to funds transfers + [Bank deposits (CA305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000/): To add charges to bank deposits You can also use the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window to configure entry types that you will use to register finance charges.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About the preparation of deposits /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits page When a business receives customer payments, employees often record them to a specific bank account as cash. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the preparation of deposits When a business receives customer payments, employees often record them to a specific bank account as cash. When a business receives customer payments, employees often record them to a specific bank account as cash. However, the payments appear in the bank account later, when they are physically deposited. As a rule, businesses deposit customer checks and cash to the bank in bulk. Thus, during reconciliation of cash accounts with bank statements, employees often have trouble matching up the individual payments going into a cash account with the summary amounts of the deposits on a bank statement, which have the dates of the deposits at the bank. These conditions create difficulties in accurately tracking cash on hand and reconciling the balances of cash accounts. In Visma Net, you use bank deposits to track customer payments that you deposit to the bank in bulk. When you enter into the system payments intended for such deposits, the payments are temporarily recorded to special **clearing** cash accounts. These accounts hold payments drawn from customers' customer ledger accounts. Before you make a physical deposit to the bank, you create a deposit in Visma Net and list within it all the payments and cash that make up the physical deposit. After you have made the deposit to the bank, you release the deposit in Visma Net. As a result, the system generates a batch of transactions to move the payment amounts from clearing accounts to the bank account and to record the charges incurred as expenses. In this topic, you will read about how to configure the processing of bank deposits, record a deposit in the system, and make any needed corrections. ## Configuring deposit processing You configure the bank deposit processing by performing the following steps: 1. Create entry types for all applicable bank charges on deposits by using the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/) For more information, see: 1. By using the **Entry types** tab of the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window, associate the created entry types with the bank cash account you use to deposit payments. 1. By using the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window, create at least one clearing cash account to temporarily store the records of customer checks and cash you are going to deposit. The clearing account should be linked to a general ledger account of the **Asset** type denominated in a specific currency. You should create separate clearing cash accounts to store payments in different currencies. [About cash account types](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-cash-account-types/) and [Create a cash account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/create-a-cash-account/) For more information, see: 1. On the **Clearing accounts** tab of the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window, associate the created clearing cash accounts with the bank cash account you use to deposit payments in a specific currency. While associating these accounts, you should specify the entry types to be used to record bank charges and bank charge rates. Optionally, for each charge rate, you can specify a payment method used to record a deposited payment. The system will apply such a charge rate to only deposited payments recorded with this payment method. If a payment method is not specified, a charge rate is applied to deposited payments regardless of their payment method. [Specify a charge rate for a clearing account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/specify-a-charge-rate-for-a-clearing-account/) For more information, see: 1. By using the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window, configure payment methods for customers with **Cash** as the means of payment. On the **Allowed cash accounts** tab of the window, assign a clearing account in the customer's currency as the cash account allowed for each method. If you are going to use this payment method mostly for recording payments to be deposited, mark it as the default by selecting the **Customer ledger default** check box. [About payment methods for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/about-payment-methods-for-customers/) For more information, see: > [!NOTE] > In most cases, these payment method for customers are already present in the system by default and you only need to associate a clearing account with the payment method. 1. Make sure that the payment methods described in the previous step are available to customers that will pay by cash. That is, make sure that the payment method is listed for each of these customers on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. You can adjust the precise configuration or the number of clearing accounts for the same bank account, and the number of payment methods with the same clearing account to best fit your business and its customer base. ## Processing deposits Once bank deposit processing has been configured, you can use this functionality as follows: 1. **Collecting customer payments on clearing accounts**: When a customer payment is received, you enter it into the system in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window and specify the payment method. Because the payment method is associated with a clearing account, you can select it in the **Cash account** field to record the payment to this clearing account. (If the clearing cash account is marked as the default account for the selected payment method, the system will use it automatically.) When the clearing cash account is selected, the system displays the **Deposit after** field in the window, where you should specify the starting date when the payment can be added to a deposit. Also, once a cash sale is completed, you can record it to an appropriate clearing cash account. 1. **Composing a deposit**: When a deposit is being prepared for a particular bank, by using the [Bank deposits (CA305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000/) window, you can create a new deposit in the system. To the deposit, you add payments from the clearing account associated with the bank account. A deposit can include a consolidated cash amount to be deposited along with customer checks. You specify the cash account from which you want to deposit cash in the **Cash drop account** field and the amount of cash to be deposited in the **Cash drop amount** field. 1. **Printing the deposit slip**: If needed, you can run and print the [Deposit slip (CA656500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/deposit-slip-ca656500/) report, which lists all the payments and the total amount of cash to be deposited. Also, the slip contains such information as the deposit total with all bank charges deducted, the bank information (name, address, and account number), and the company name and address. 1. **Releasing the deposit**: Once the payments listed on the deposit slip are physically deposited to the bank, you can make changes to the deposit by using the [Bank deposits (CA305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000/) window to match the list of payments accepted by the bank and to reflect all the charges applied by the bank; you can then release the deposit. The system by default calculates and adds the applicable bank charges associated with the clearing account. The user can change the rate of the applicable charges for the deposit, remove any of the charges, and add other charges. If the charges should not be deducted from the deposit amount, on the **Financial details** tab, select the **Separate charges** check box before you release the deposit. Once the deposit is released, the system generates a batch of deposit-related transactions to transfer the payment amounts from clearing accounts to the bank account and to post the bank charges incurred for the deposit as expenses. The bank charges will be specified as a separate transaction in the batch if the **Separate charges** option (for the deposit) has been selected; otherwise, their total amount will be deducted from the deposit amount. ## Voiding deposits If necessary, you can void a deposit by using the **Void** button in the window toolbar of the [Bank deposits (CA305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000/) window. The system creates a voided deposit with the same list of payments included and the same accounts and subaccounts involved. You may need to void a payment included in a deposit. The system doesn't allow you to void payments included in unreleased deposits, so you should either delete them from the deposit and void them separately or release the deposit and then void the payment. You can use the **Void on clearing account** check box on the **Settings for customer ledger** tab of the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window as follows to control how exactly the payment from the released deposit will be voided: + If the **Void on clearing account** check box is cleared, for a payment you void, the system creates the transactions between the customer ledger account and the bank account to reflect the voided payment. You can use this option for payment methods based on payments if the bank handles voided payments by adjusting the deposit amounts. + If the **Void on clearing account** check box is selected, for a payment you void, the system creates the transactions between the customer ledger account and the clearing account to reflect the voided payment. Also, you can use this option for payment methods based on payments if the bank handles voided checks by creating separate transactions that do not affect the deposits. ## Handling payments recorded by mistake To ease the creation of deposits, you should assign to a clearing account only those payment methods whose payments should be deposited to the respective bank account. If unrelated payments are recorded to the clearing account, users will spend extra time selecting the proper payments for the deposit from a list of related and unrelated payments. If over time you detect that unrelated payments have been recorded to the clearing account by mistake (and thus cannot be included in any deposit), remove the payments from the clearing account by voiding them and creating new ones with the proper cash accounts specified. If you realise that the payments (cash sales) to be deposited were recorded to a cash account that is not a clearing account, you should void them and create new ones with the proper cash accounts specified. Specify a charge rate for a clearing account /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/specify-a-charge-rate-for-a-clearing-account section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify a charge rate for a clearing account 1. Go to the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the bank account to which you will record deposits. 1. On the **Clearing accounts** tab, add each clearing account that will be used with the bank account as follows: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Clearing account** column, select the clearing account. 1. Optional: In the **Payment method** column, select the payment method to be used to record the payments to be deposited. If a payment method is specified, the charge rate is applied only to payments recorded with this payment method. If you do not specify a method for this clearing account, the charge rate is applied to deposited payments regardless of their payment method. 1. In the **Charge type** column, select the entry type to be used to record the charge. 1. In the **Charge rate** column, type the rate of the charge, expressed as a percentage of the deposit amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Manage bank statements /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage bank statements Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Managing bank statements - overview /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/managing-bank-statements-overview page If you are reconciling your cash accounts, you need quick and accurate tools to track third-party records and ensure that they match the transactions recorded in your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Managing bank statements - overview If you are reconciling your cash accounts, you need quick and accurate tools to track third-party records and ensure that they match the transactions recorded in your system. If you are reconciling your cash accounts, you need quick and accurate tools to track third-party records and ensure that they match the transactions recorded in your system. Visma Net offers you capabilities that ease the processes of importing, tracking, and matching the transactions tracked by other means. If you are reconciling a bank account, you use a bank statement for the comparison. Because financial institutions offer a variety of online banking services, you do not need to wait for a monthly bank statement to track your banking transactions. You can instead download a list of recent banking transactions in a suitable format when you need them. Frequent importing and matching of bank transactions makes the reconciliation process much easier. If you are reconciling a cash accounts other than a bank account (for instance, a petty cash account), you can upload the list of amounts confirmed with the cash register receipts or point-of-sale reports and similar reports. These topics will help you to understand how to import into the system transactions in various formats tracked by other means, and how to process the transactions further to ease the reconciliation process. ## Topics + [About processing imported transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/about-processing-imported-transactions/) + [Import a bank statement in OFX, QBO, and QFX formats](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-a-bank-statement-in-ofx-qbo-and-qfx-formats/) + [Import a bank statement in Excel](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-a-bank-statement-in-excel/) + [Batch payment matching](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/about-batch-payment-matching/) + [About processing imported transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/about-processing-imported-transactions/) + [Set up transaction matching settings](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/set-up-transaction-matching-settings/) + [Match transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-transactions/) About importing transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/about-importing-transactions page With Visma Net, you can quickly import the list of recent bank transactions or amounts confirmed by other documents, and the periodic statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About importing transactions With Visma Net, you can quickly import the list of recent bank transactions or amounts confirmed by other documents, and the periodic statements. For each cash account, for which transactions are imported, the system creates a bank statement (even if you upload just the list of amounts) that lists the uploaded transactions. The system assigns a reference number to this bank statement in accordance with the number series assigned to bank statements in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. In this topic, you will read about the windows used to import transactions, the supported formats of the files to be uploaded, the setup of the import procedure for other file formats, and the manual entry of needed transactions. ## Supported formats In Visma Net, you can upload transactions in files in the following formats: + **OFX (Open Financial Exchange), QBO (QuickBooks Online), and QFX (Quicken File eXchange)**: Visma Net includes the **PX.Objects.CA.OFXStatementReader** import service, which parses uploaded files in these three supported formats to create bank statements. For more information about uploading files in these formats, see: [Import a bank statement in OFX, QBO, and QFX formats](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-a-bank-statement-in-ofx-qbo-and-qfx-formats/) + **Excel**: For more information about uploading files in this format, see: [Import a bank statement in Excel](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-a-bank-statement-in-excel/) > [!NOTE] > The file format you use defines the preliminary steps you should take and the details of the import procedure. ## The first import of transactions When you import transactions for the first time, the system creates the first bank statement. If you import a file in OFX, QBO, or QFX format, the values for **Statement date**, **Start balance date**, **End balance date**, and **Ending balance** fields in the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window are imported from the file. You have to specify the beginning balance of the first statement manually. If you import transactions from Excel or enter them manually, you have to enter all these values manually. If a bank statement that you are going to import does not include transaction reference numbers, make sure that the **Require document ref. no. on entry** check box is cleared in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. ## Subsequent imports of transactions You can import files that contain transactions for multiple cash accounts or for one cash account. When you upload transactions, for each involved cash account, the system creates a bank statement that lists the uploaded transactions and assigns the reference number to this bank statement. In Visma Net, you can use the following windows to upload transactions: + [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/): You use this window to upload and view transactions for each bank statement that the system has created. When you use the window to upload a file with transactions for one cash account, the system displays the created statement in the window right away. When you use the window to upload a file with transactions for multiple cash accounts, the system does not display any of the created statements. To view one of the statements, you need to select the needed cash account and the reference number of the statement (the last uploaded statement will have the highest reference number). Here, too, if you import a file in OFX, QBO, or QFX format, the system imports the values of the **Statement date**, **Start balance date**, **End balance date**, and **Ending balance** fields from the file. The system validates the value of **start balance date** which should be equal to the end balance date of the previously imported statement. These formats (OFX, QBO, and QFX) do not provide the beginning balance in bank statements. The system uses as the value of **beginning balance** the ending balance of the previous bank statement. Also, the system checks whether the beginning balance plus the total imported receipts minus the total imported disbursements agrees with the imported ending balance of the bank statement. If you import bank transactions in Excel format, you need to manually enter the statement date, end balance date, and ending balance. The system uses as the beginning balance the ending balance of the previous bank statement. Similarly, as the start balance, it uses the end balance date of the previous bank statement. After upload, you can manually edit bank transaction details before continuing to process the transactions in the system (matching and clearing them). + [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/): You use this window primarily to process transactions from all the created statements for the selected cash account, but you can upload statements on this window as well. When you upload a file, the system does not display the transactions, regardless of the number of cash accounts in the file. To view the uploaded transactions, you need to select a cash account; the system then displays all the transactions uploaded for this cash account that have not been processed (matched and cleared) yet. ## Setup of import for other formats Your company may receive statements for cash accounts in formats that are both supported and not supported by Visma Net formats. If your company has an import service to parse files in formats that are not supported, the service can be added to the list of import services in Visma Net. For details, please consult Visma Net support. In such a case, you can define to the system an import service that is specific to a particular cash account. To do this, you need to select the **Import bank statements to single cash account** check box on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. This causes the **Statement import service** field to be displayed in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window, where you can specify the particular import service for the cash account. Also, if the check box is selected, a user can upload a file only after selecting a cash account in the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) or the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window (to make the **Upload file** button available in the toolbar of the window). ## Foolproof import procedure If your company always receives separate files (in supported formats), each of which contains transactions for a single cash account, you can make the upload procedure more strict. In this case, by selecting the **Import bank statements to single cash account** check box on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, you can force the user to select a cash account before uploading a file. If the check box is selected, a user can upload a file only after selecting a cash account in the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) and the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) windows. In this case, for each cash account for which you import transactions, in the **Statement import service** field in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window, you also need to specify the **PX.Objects.CA.OFXStatementReader** import service. ## Manual entry of transactions You can manually enter transactions for a specific account directly in the table in the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window and save the list as a bank statement with a reference number.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Import bank transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-bank-transactions section If your bank sends you electronic versions of your bank statements, you can import these statements to Visma Net to make it easier to reconcile the statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import bank transactions If your bank sends you electronic versions of your bank statements, you can import these statements to Visma Net to make it easier to reconcile the statements. ## Before you start [Manually import bank transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/manually-import-bank-transactions/) 1. Go to the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the bank account for which you want to import the statement. If the statement create method of the cash account is other than **Enter manually**, go to step 9. > [!NOTE] > You can use the manual import, when the **Upload files manually** check box is activated for the account in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, enter the reference number of the bank statement, as specified by the bank. 1. In the **Statement date** field, either leave the current business date or select another date. 1. In the **Start balance date** field, select the earliest date among the unreconciled document dates. 1. In the **End balance date** field, select the latest date among the dates of the documents listed on the bank statement. 1. In the **Beginning balance** field, specify the balance of the account on the start date. 1. In the **Ending balance** field, specify the balance of the account on the end date. You are not required to fill in the fields in points 2-7. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) in the toolbar. It opens the **File upload** dialog box. If the statement create method of the cash account is **Import from AutoPay**, click the **Get statements** button that is displayed. 1. In the dialog box, select the file with the statement in the **File path** field. 1. Click **Upload** to upload the file and close the dialog box. The transactions of the selected bank statement are updated to the table in the lower part of the window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create bank transaction rules /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-bank-transaction-rules section You create bank transactions rules mainly for transactions that are not related to any incoming or outgoing payments, for example, fees and interest rates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create bank transaction rules You create bank transactions rules mainly for transactions that are not related to any incoming or outgoing payments, for example, fees and interest rates. 1. Go to the [Bank transaction rules (CA204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transaction-rules-ca204500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new record. 1. In the **Rule** field, enter a unique identifier for the new bank transaction rule. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the rule. 1. Select the **Active** check box to make the rule available in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. 1. In the **Debit/Credit** field, select **Disbursement** or **Receipt**. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the cash account that corresponds to the account in the bank. The system fills in the **Currency** field, depending on the chosen cash account. 1. In the **Trans. code** field, enter the transaction code on the account statement. If the **Trans. code** is used, you can see it in the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) and [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) windows. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the description of the transaction. > [!NOTE] > You can use wildcard characters (\* or?) in the description, if you select the **Use wildcards** check box. 1. Optional: Select the **Match case** check box if you want the font case of the transaction to match the font case in the **Description** field. 1. Optional: Select the **Use name of bank** check box if you want the name of the bank for the transaction to match in the **Description** field. 1. Enter the **Bank account number** (IBAN/BBAN) to be used on the bank transaction rule. 1. In the **Amount matching mode** drop-down list, select one of the following: 1. **None**: The amount criterion is not used. 1. **Equal**: The transaction amount must be equal to the number specified in the **Amount** box. 1. **Between**: The transaction amount must be in the range of the numbers specified in the **Amount** and **Max. Amount** fields. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select one of the following: 1. **Create document**: The system creates a new document to match the imported bank transaction that has no match. 1. **Hide selected**: The system hides the imported bank transaction from the list and marks it as processed. 1. In the **Resulting entry type** field, select an [entry type](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/select-and-edit-an-entry-type/) to be used as a template. This template is used to create a cash transaction for unmatched imported bank transaction. 1. Change or specify the **VAT Zone** or **VAT category** that applies to the transaction if necessary. The **VAT calculation mode** is set to **Gross** by the system, and the **VAT category** field is updated with the default value when the **VAT zone** is selected. 1. If the company has several branches, you can select the branch for which the rule applies in the **Branch** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Windows

 Match transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match transactions In the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, you can match the transactions imported from a bank statement to transactions recorded to the bank account maintained in your system. ## Before you proceed To make automatic matching of all transactions more efficient, you may need to review the settings on the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. For more information, see: [Transaction matching settings.](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/transaction-matching-settings/) Also, you can configure the rules for document creation in the [Bank transaction rules (CA204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transaction-rules-ca204500/) window, which the system will apply to the transactions for which a match was not found. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the bank account. The **Bank transactions to match** table displays all the not-yet-processed bank transactions that have been uploaded to the selected cash account. 1. Click **Match automatically** in the window toolbar. The system performs matching by calculating the relevance factor for pairs of transactions. For each transaction in the table, if the system finds a transaction for which the relevance factor exceeds the built-in threshold, this transaction will have the **Matched** check box selected and will be displayed on either the **Match to invoices** tab or the **Match to payments** tab. If the system finds multiple transactions with large relevance factors but none with a relevance factor greater than the threshold, these transactions will be displayed as possible matches. The system may find no matching transactions. If you have configured rules for document creation in the [Bank transaction rules (CA204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transaction-rules-ca204500/) window, the system will apply all the active rules to the transactions for which a match was not found during the matching process. 1. Review the transactions for which the system has selected the check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column of the **Bank transactions to match** table. If you are not satisfied with the results, you can clear the match for the selected transaction by clicking the **Unmatch** button in the table toolbar. 1. For each transaction in the **Bank transactions to match** table for which the check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column has not been selected (or cleared), do one of the following: + If there are matching documents in the table of the **Match to payments** tab, try to find a match for this bank transaction from the suggested payments. Compare the payee name on the transaction, which you can find in the **Payee name** column (which is hidden by default), because the names of the same customer may be recorded differently in the bank statement and in your system. he transaction code, which you can find in the **Trans. code** column (which is also hidden by default) may reveal the payment method. Also, the transaction date may be outside the date range allowed for payment delay due to unexpected factors. Select the **Matched** check box for the payment that is the closest match. + If there are matching transactions in the table of the **Match to invoices** tab, try to find a match for this bank transaction from the suggested invoices. Use the matching hints described for matching to payments. Select the **Matched** check box of the document row that you consider to be the best match. You specify the settings to create the payment for the invoice in the system on the **Match to invoice** tab. > [!NOTE] > When you process the imported transaction, the system will create the payment based on the specified settings and immediately apply it to the matched invoice. + If there are no matching transactions, consider creating a document or multiple documents to match to the transaction in the bank statement, see: [Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-a-new-payment-or-document/). Also, you can specify open invoices which this payment should be applied to. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > You can perform matching in as many sessions as you need. You can save your work at any time and continue later. 1. If you have finished matching transactions, review the results and click **Process** in the window toolbar to initiate the processing of matched transactions and transactions for which details of a new document were specified that result in clearing of the documents. After you have processed the bank transactions for the selected cash account, you may proceed to reconciliation. > [!NOTE] > If your invoices have been registered after import of bank payments or you have updated your prefixes under cash account, it is possible to run recognition by clicking **Extract invoice numbers** in the window toolbar. For more information, see: [Extract invoice numbers](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/extract-invoice-numbers/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a new payment or document /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-a-new-payment-or-document section For bank transactions and incoming payments with no match, you can create a new document or payment to match manually. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new payment or document For bank transactions and incoming payments with no match, you can create a new document or payment to match manually. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) or [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Select a cash account in the top part. 1. In the left pane table, select the line that you want to match. 1. In the **Create payment** tab (in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window) or **Create document** tab (in the [[Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window), select the **Create** check box. > [!NOTE] > If the details of an imported bank transaction or incoming payment include an invoice number in the **Invoice no.** field, the system searches for an open invoice that has the same reference number after you have selected the **Create** check box. If an invoice is found, the system fills in fields on the tab automatically with the data from the invoice and applies the amount to the invoice, and the line is ready for processing. Note that the bank transaction or incoming payment amount may differ from the invoice total. 1. Optional: In [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/), you can attach a file to the new document or the transaction. Drag the file to the **Create payment** tab area or click **Attach file** and select **Add file...** on the tab to open the **Upload file dialog box**. 1. In the **Workspace** field, select the workspace where the document originated. 1. If you in Step 6 selected **Cash management**: 1. Specify the **Entry type ID**. > [!NOTE] > Make sure that all needed entry types are listed under the **Entry types** tab of the selected cash account in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Optional: in the **VAT Zone** field, change or specify the **VAT Zone** that applies to the transaction. 1. Optional: in the **Tran. descr.** field, you can change the transaction description for the new document. 1. Add a row in the table and specify the required fields. 1. If you in Step 6 selected **Supplier ledger** or **Customer ledger**: 1. Select the **Customer/Supplier no.**, **Location** and **Payment method**. 1. Optional: in the **Tran. descr.** field, you can change the transaction description for the new document. 1. You can select documents to be added to the table via the **Select documents** button, load documents to the table via the **Load documents** button, or add a row in the table and specify the required fields. 1. Optional: you can change the cross rate by adding the **Cross rate** column to the table and edit it, if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000).](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system selects the **Ready to process** check box in the left pane table. 1. You can now continue processing the lines.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents section In the Process bank transactions (CA306000) and Process incoming payments (AR305000) windows, you can split a bank transaction or incoming payment line in the left table into different lines to process them against corresponding, multiple documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents In the Process bank transactions (CA306000) and Process incoming payments (AR305000) windows, you can split a bank transaction or incoming payment line in the left table into different lines to process them against corresponding, multiple documents. For more information: [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/), [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/). You can match a bank transaction or incoming payment against multiple, different documents, for example, documents from different workspaces. > [!NOTE] > You can activate automatic splitting of payments on bank statements and/or incoming payments import by selecting the **Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer** check box on the **Bank statements settings** and/or **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. You then only need to process them in the respective windows. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) or [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Select a cash account in the top part. 1. In the left pane table, select the line that you want to match. 1. In the **Create payment** tab (in the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window) or **Create document** tab (in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window), fill in the required information and select the first document to match. If an amount is remaining, the **Split** button will appear. 1. Click **Split** and a new line will appear below the original line in the left table, marked with an arrow. > [!NOTE] > The original line will be adjusted with a new amount and the **Ready to process** check box will be selected. The new line will have the unapplied amount in the **Receipt** or **Disbursement** field, depending on whether the unapplied amount is positive or negative. 1. Select the new line and perform the same procedure as in Step 4 to match it against a different document. > [!NOTE] > You can continue splitting as long as the line has an unapplied amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system selects the **Ready to process** check box in the left pane table. 1. You can now continue processing the lines.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Match account statements /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-account-statements page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match account statements ## Before you start After the [statements are processed](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/process-statements-manually-via-the-autopay-inbox/) in the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window, you need to match them automatically from the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. If you have [defined a default cash account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/configure-import-settings-for-statements-and-incoming-payments/) for this window, you will see all the statements that have been imported from AutoPay. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. 1. If you have not yet defined a default account, or if you want to match statements from a different account: select the desired account in the **Cash account** field. > [!NOTE] > By default, the system displays all imported transactions for the account in the **Bank transactions to match** table. In the filter drop-down list on the table toolbar, you can also choose to view the matched or unmatched transactions. 1. Click **Match automatically**. The system now tries to match the imported statements with the different transactions. The matching is based on payment references and invoice numbers, or [bank transaction rules](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-bank-transaction-rules/). For statements that the system has matched automatically, you see that the **Ready to process** check box is selected. ## What is next? [Process matched account statements](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-matched-account-statements/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process matched account statements /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-matched-account-statements section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process matched account statements 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window and select a **Cash account**. 1. Click **Process**. The system now reconciles all matching transactions. After processing, in the first column, a ![Success](/media/visma-net-erp/Success.png) or ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) is displayed for each processed line to indicate if the processing was successful or not. 1. Optional: hover over the ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) icon on each line to read why the specific line could not be processed. Resolve the error and repeat Step 1 and 2. 1. Optional: go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window again and select the same **Cash account** as you did in Step 1. All matched transactions have now disappeared from the table, leaving only the ones that were not successfully processed and had no match. 1. Optional: click **Settings for matching** to match more of the remaining transactions. In the **Settings for matching** dialog box, you can **temporarily** change the settings for matching, for example date settings or the weight settings for the relevance calculation. Click **Process** again. > [!NOTE] > The settings you make in the **Settings for matching** dialog box are reset to default when you leave the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. > [!NOTE] > To set new, permanent settings for matching, go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window and click the **Bank statement settings** tab. Here, you can enter common settings for the matching of payments in the customer ledger and the supplier ledger.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process unmatched account statements /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-unmatched-account-statements section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process unmatched account statements ## Before you start After you have run the automatic matching, or when you select option **Unmatched** in the drop-down list on the table toolbar, the unmatched transactions are displayed in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. The transactions that are not automatically matched will have to be matched manually. Follow the steps below to create a new document or transaction for a bank transaction with no match. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. 1. On the **Create payment** tab, select the **Create** check box. 1. In the **Module** field, select the workspace you want to edit. 1. If you have selected **Customer ledger** or **Supplier ledger**, select a **Business account**. The rest of the information will be filled in automatically. 1. If you have selected **Cash management**, select an **entry type ID**. The rest of the information will be filled in automatically. > [!NOTE] > If no entry type is displayed, you have to create one: [Create an entry type for disbursements or receipts](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/create-an-entry-type-for-disbursements-or-receipts/). 1. Optional:Split the transaction amount into multiple documents by adding lines in the table, and by specifying different offset accounts and subaccounts for each line. 1. Optional:Create supplier ledger or customer ledger documents to match the bank transactions to the documents available in the system. 1. When you have specified the information about the new payment and selected the documents to apply, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Process matched lines** in the toolbar. The payment or cash transactions will now be created and applied.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process unmatched bank transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-unmatched-bank-transactions page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process unmatched bank transactions 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the cash account with the [imported bank transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-bank-transactions/) you want to process. > [!NOTE] > The system displays all imported transactions for the account in the Bank transactions to match table by default. In the filter drop-down list on the table toolbar, you can also choose to view the matched or unmatched transactions. 1. Click **Match automatically** to match the transactions. Matching is based on date ranges, and the weighted relevance of the reference number, document date, and payee. > [!NOTE] > During import of banks statements, Visma Net bases its matching on the invoice number. If there is no invoice number, invoices are matched according to the matching settings mentioned below. > [!NOTE] > In the matching the system uses the settings you have specified in the dialog box that opens when you click **Settings for matching**. If you have not specified these settings here, the system applies the default settings specified in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window on the tab **Bank statement settings**. 1. The system may find no matching transactions. The transactions that are not automatically matched you have to match manually to an invoice, a payment, or a payment you create. 1. Mark the line of the chosen cash account you want to process. 1. The **Match to invoices** or the **Match to payments** tab show you the possible matches to the transactions. If one of the payments on the list matches with the transaction selected in the table on the left, you select the **Matched** check box. Repeat this for all lines you want to match. Click **Process matched lines** to match them and to post them to the general ledger. 1. For a bank transaction without a match you can also [create a new document or transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-unmatched-account-statements/). 1. Click **Process** to process the matched transactions.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process rejected payments /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-rejected-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process rejected payments ## Before you start If you have paid the same invoice twice, and you need to undo one of the payments, you must first make a registered payment void. See: [Create a voided payment](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-voided-payment/). 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select a cash account for direct debit. 1. Click **Process rejected**. when the system has reconciled all matching payments. The matched payments will disappear from the table. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed > [!NOTE] > The invoices and payments in the [Bank deposits (CA305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000/) windows are now closed. See: [View a cash deposit for direct debit](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/accounting-modules/ca/ca305000-view-cash-deposit-direct-debit-task/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Import a bank statement in OFX, QBO, and QFX formats /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-a-bank-statement-in-ofx-qbo-and-qfx-formats section If you have bank transactions in a file in OFX, QBO, or QFX format, you can import these transactions by clicking the Upload file button on the window toolbar of the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import a bank statement in OFX, QBO, and QFX formats If you have bank transactions in a file in OFX, QBO, or QFX format, you can import these transactions by clicking the Upload file button on the window toolbar of the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window. For more information: [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/). During file uploading, the system creates a statement for each bank account listed in the file. You can also perform this procedure by clicking the **Upload file** button in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. This procedure describes how to import bank transactions from an OFX, QBO, or QFX file. ## Before you proceed Make sure that the **PX.Objects.CA.OFXStatementReader** import service is specified in the **Statement import service** field; the location of this field depends on whether the **Import bank statements to single cash account** check box, located in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, is selected: + Selected: The import service is specified in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window for each cash account for which you will import statements in one of these formats. + Cleared: The import service is specified on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. Also, make sure that the bank account ID specified in the file is associated with the appropriate cash accounts in the system. That is, for the cash account for which you want to upload transactions, specify the bank account ID in the **External ref. number** field in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. For instance: You can find the bank account identifier in the OFX file under the <ACCID> tag. If you forget to specify the bank account ID in the cash account settings and try to upload transactions, the system gives you a warning. The warning contains the bank account ID from the file, which you can copy and paste to the settings for the cash account. You can then try to upload the file again. ## Import the bank statement 1. Go to the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. 1. Click **Upload file** in the window toolbar. The **Statement file upload** dialog box is displayed. 1. In the dialog box, make sure that the **Upload file** option is selected. 1. By using the **Choose file** field, select the file with the statement. Click **Upload** to upload the file and close the dialog box. 1. Review statement details in the top part of the window and the list of imported transactions in the table. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system generates a reference number for the list of uploaded transactions in accordance with the numbering series assigned to bank statements in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. The procedure is similar if you use the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window to import the bank statement. You can review the list of imported transactions and manually edit transaction details. You can then process the imported transactions by using the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Import a bank statement in Excel /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/import-a-bank-statement-in-excel section If you have an Excel file with a single statement, in the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window, you can import the bank transactions for this statement by clicking the Load records from file standard button on the table toolbar. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import a bank statement in Excel If you have an Excel file with a single statement, in the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window, you can import the bank transactions for this statement by clicking the Load records from file standard button on the table toolbar. For more information: [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/). This procedure describes how to import a single bank statement from a Microsoft Excel file directly into the table of this window. If you have an Excel file that holds multiple statements, you can import these statements by using a scenario based on the built-in data provider for Excel files. To create this scenario, you use the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. You can adjust the sample scenario for importing bank statements, which is available with the demo data supplied with Visma Net. 1. Go to the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the bank account for which you want to import the statement. 1. In the **Statement date** field, either leave the current business date or select another date. 1. In the **Start balance date** field, select the earliest date among the dates of the unreconciled documents. 1. In the **End balance date** field, select the latest date among the dates of the documents listed on the bank statement. 1. In the **Beginning balance** field, specify the balance of the account on the start date. 1. In the **Ending balance** field, specify the balance of the account on the end date. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system creates a blank statement and generates a reference number for it in accordance with the number series assigned to bank statements in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Load records from file**. The **File upload dialog box** is displayed. 1. In the dialog box, by using the **File path** field, select the file with the statement. Click **Upload** to upload the file and close the dialog box. 1. In the dialog boxes that the system brings up sequentially, proceed as follows: 1. In the **Common settings dialog box**, in the **Null value** field, type the character that is used as the null value in the source file. 1. In the **Culture** field, select the locale in which the data is presented in the source file. Click **OK** in the dialog box. 1. In the **Columns** dialog box that appears, perform mapping of the columns of the source file (the left column) to the columns available in the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. Click **OK** to close the dialog box and complete the import. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the table, you can review the list of imported transactions and manually edit transaction details. You can then process the imported transactions by using the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Write off amounts during a bank transaction processing /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/write-off-amounts-during-a-bank-transaction-processing page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write off amounts during a bank transaction processing ## Preparation + Select the check box for write off in the customer settings: Enable write-offs for customer. + Import bank transactions. Write-offs during bank transactions are only possible for underpaid sales invoices. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the account. 1. In the table, select the **Ready for process** check box for the underpaid invoice you want to write off. 1. Go to the **Create payment** tab. 1. Select the **Create** check box. Additional fields are added. 1. In the **Balance write-off** column, enter the write off amount. 1. In the **Write-off reason code** column, select the reason code for write-offs. > [!NOTE] > If no reason code is available: Create reason codes for write-offs. 1. Click **Process matched lines**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About processing imported transactions /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/about-processing-imported-transactions section During each financial period, you periodically import transactions and process the imported transactions or match them with the documents in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing imported transactions During each financial period, you periodically import transactions and process the imported transactions or match them with the documents in the system. During each financial period, you periodically import transactions and process the imported transactions or match them with the documents in the system. This process eliminates discrepancies between transactions in the system and in the company's bank account or some other source (if the cash account reflects operations recorded in a third-party system, other than a bank). Processing of the imported transactions is the preliminary step before the reconciliation is performed in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. If the matched document for the transaction is found, the transaction is linked to the document, which is then marked as cleared, thus ready to be reconciled. Also, users can mark documents (cash entries, payments to suppliers, incoming payments from customers, and cash sales) as cleared as they receive confirmation documents from a bank or third-party system by selecting the **Cleared** check box for each document in the window that was used to create the document: [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/), [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/), or [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/). You can select and clear the check box at any time. Users can even manually clear and reconcile transactions in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window skipping matching bank transactions in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. Despite being marked as cleared or reconciled, these documents do not have a link to an imported transaction and are also included in the matching process. When a document is matched to an imported transaction, the **Cleared** check box for this document is selected and becomes read-only. If you imported a bank statement with transactions that had been already cleared or reconciled in the system and you do not want to process them in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, you can hide these transactions by using the **Hide transaction** button in the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. In this topic, you will read about the steps for matching transactions, the creation of missed documents, and the details of application. ## Steps for matching transactions In the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, you can match the imported transactions to the documents in the system. The goal of the matching process is to find a document in the system: a payment that is matched to an imported transaction, or an invoice for which a payment will be created to match to the transaction. When matches are found, the system processes matched transactions: it creates a link between the document and the imported transaction, and marks the document as cleared. To make the matching easier and less time-consuming, we recommend that you perform the following steps: 1. On the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window, specify the parameters the system will use for calculating the relevance rate (a measure of how closely a document matches the selected imported transaction) and for searching for matching documents. Alternatively, you can specify these parameters in the **Settings for matching** dialog box, which opens when in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, you select a cash account and click **Settings for matching** in the window toolbar. [Transaction matching settings](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/transaction-matching-settings/) For more information, see: 1. Optional: In the [Bank transaction rules (CA204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transaction-rules-ca204500/) window, specify the rules that the system will use to automatically create documents to match those imported transactions for which documents are not found in the system. You can create such rules on the fly when performing manual matching in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window and use the rules for the next imported transactions. 1. Run the automatic matching tool, which performs matching based on the available transaction information, such as amount, payee name, and date. The system uses the transaction information and matching settings that you have specified to calculate the match relevance rate first for each payment in the system that has the **Cleared** check box available for editing, and then for open invoices. If you have configured rules for document creation, the system tries to apply these rules to the transactions for which a match was not found. 1. Validate and save the results of the automatic matching. 1. Perform manual matching for the remaining transactions (if any). If a match was not found in payments and invoices, you can specify the details of a document that should be created to match the transaction on the bank statement. Review and save the results. 1. Validate and confirm the results of the matching. The system allows automatic and manual matching of a transaction to a payment that is not released yet (a payment with the **Balanced** or **On hold** status). If a transaction is matched to such a payment (manually or automatically), the system performs a check for the payment amount discrepancy before processing this document. For example: The system displays an error if a user first matches the transaction to an unreleased document, then changes the amount on that document, and then tries to process this line. You can perform transaction matching in as many sessions as you need. You can save the result at any time to continue to work with it later. In the following sections, you will read about the steps of the matching process in detail. ## Automatic matching We recommend that you always start matching with running the automatic matching process, to save time. Select the cash account for which you want to perform matching and click **Match automatically** in the window toolbar to run the process for the imported transactions. When you run the process, the system searches for possible matching payments, and for documents to which the payment could apply. If no possible matching payments or documents to apply are found in the system, the system suggests that you create a payment. The process uses the following marks to differentiate the current transaction matching status: + The check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column is selected: A candidate with high relevance has been found and matched automatically or the **Create** check box is selected and the details of the new payment are filled in automatically (according to the rules configured) on the **Create payment** tab. + The check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column is cleared: A list of possible matches has been found, and the transaction is pending your review and decision. + The transaction is marked by an exclamation point: No matches have been found and the system suggests that you create the payment, so the **Create** check box has been automatically selected on the **Create payment** tab. For each imported transaction, the system finds the matching document as follows: 1. To find the matching payments for an imported transaction, the system filters the cash account transactions by the specified matching settings and calculates the match relevance for the possible candidates. The relevance shows how similar the imported transaction is to a cash account transaction (or multiple transactions) in the system. The transactions are compared by three factors: the reference number, the transaction date (document date), and the payee name (if any). The candidates with high relevance are recognised as the best candidates and are matched automatically. If there is no best candidate found, the system displays a list of possible matches with the lower match relevance rate on the **Match to payment** tab of the right pane. In this case, you need to review possible matches and decide whether to match an imported transaction to one of these matches or create a new document by using the **Create payment** tab on the right pane. 1. To find a document to which the payments could apply, the system compares the payment amount with the amount of any outstanding documents with the same transaction sign (receipt or disbursement). The system never matches payments to invoices automatically (on the **Match to invoice** tab). Therefore, after the system has found the invoice, the check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column for the imported transaction remains cleared, which means it hasn't been matched to any document yet and is pending your review and decision. For imported transactions that have no matches, the system suggests that you create the payment, so the **Create** check box has been automatically selected on the **Create payment** tab of the right pane and the transaction is marked by an exclamation point. After the automatic matching process is done, the matched imported transactions become excluded from the next run of the automatic matching process. To run the process for these transactions again, click **Unmatch** for a certain transaction or click **Unmatch all** to clear matches for all transactions at once. ## Manual matching After you have run the automatic matching process, the transactions pending your review and decision may be left. See [Match transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-transactions/) on how to proceed. If a match was not found in payments and invoices, you can create a document to match the transaction on the **Create payment** tab, see also: [Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-a-new-payment-or-document/). ## Payment creation and application See [Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-a-new-payment-or-document/) and [Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents/) on how to use this tab. ## Creation of transaction rules For new payments that originate in the Cash management workspace, you can create a rule the system will use to automatically create new payments if the details of an imported transaction meet the conditions of the rule. You can define such rules before you perform the matching process by using the [Bank transaction rules (CA204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transaction-rules-ca204500/) window, or you can define the rules on the fly when you manually match transactions. When you click **Create rule** in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, the system navigates to the [Bank transaction rules (CA204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transaction-rules-ca204500/) window. The system automatically fills boxes in the **Matching criteria** section with the transaction details, and you need to specify output details only. You can clear or modify values in the **Matching criteria** section if some of the transaction details cannot be used as criteria. For example: You can modify the transaction description by using wild card characters (\* or?) and the **Use wild cards** check box, or clear the **Description** field. For example: Suppose that you know that the bank charge transactions usually are not greater than €100 per transaction and appear with the **SRVCHG** transaction code in the bank statement. Therefore, you can define a rule to create **BANKCHARGE** cash entries in the system from the disbursement bank transactions that comply with these conditions. ## Confirmation of results When you have finished matching imported transactions, for transactions that are matched to a payment or an invoice, the check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column is selected. Also, for transactions with no match, details of the new payment are specified and the exclamation point is no longer displayed. To confirm the matching results, click the **Process** button on the window toolbar. During the processing, the system does the following: + Sets the read-only **Cleared** check box for the matched payments in the system. + Creates and applies payments for the matched invoices, releases the created payments and the applications, and sets the read-only **Cleared** check box for every processed document. + Creates the documents based on the imported transactions for which a match was not found, releases the created documents and the applications (if any), and sets the read-only **Cleared** check box for every processed document. + Sets the read-only check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column for those imported transactions that are matched to payments or invoices. + Sets the read-only check box in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) column and removes the exclamation point for those imported transactions for which new document details were specified. Payments that the system creates during processing of the matched transactions are not subject for approval, even if the process of approval is set up. Once processed, the imported transactions are excluded from future processing of matched lines and displayed in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window marked as cleared and ready to be reconciled. Press **ESC** to refresh the information in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, and the processed transactions no longer appear in the window. ## Review of processing results You can review the processing result for the transaction in the corresponding bank statement by using the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. You select a cash account and a reference number of an imported bank statement, the system displays the corresponding list of bank transactions. You can see whether a transaction was processed and its details of processing. For the matched transactions you can click the **View matched document** button on the table toolbar to view details of the matched document or batch. You can also review processed bank transactions by using the [Bank transactions history (CA402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transactions-history-ca402000/) window. You select a cash account and a date range for which you want to review processed bank transactions, the system displays the list of corresponding bank transactions. You can view whether a transaction was matched to an existing document in the system or a new document was created to match this transaction. A reference number of the matched document can be found in the **Reference no.** column, by clicking this number you navigate to the respective window where you can view document details. ## Reversion of processing results You can revert the result of processing a transaction by using the **Unmatch** button on the table toolbar of the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. You select a cash account and a reference number of an imported bank statement, and the system displays the corresponding list of bank transactions. You then select a processed bank transaction and click **Unmatch**. The system does the following for the selected bank transaction: clears the check boxes in the ![check_mark_icon](/media/visma-net-erp/check_mark_icon.png) and **Processed** columns, and removes the link to a matched document. The selected bank transaction becomes available for further processing in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. Also, the system clears the following for the matched document: the **Cleared** check box and the **Clear date** field on the **Financial details** tab of the document in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. If a document was created to match the transaction, you should handle this document manually (for instance, voiding or matching the document). About batch payment matching /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/about-batch-payment-matching page Batch payment processing is a widely used practice, and Visma Net provides this feature for both Supplier ledger and Customer ledger payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About batch payment matching Batch payment processing is a widely used practice, and Visma Net provides this feature for both Supplier ledger and Customer ledger payments. You can group your supplier payments into a batch and export it for further processing by a money transfer operator. For more information, see [About payment methods for suppliers](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/about-payment-methods-for-suppliers/) and [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/). Financial institutions may report a payment batch as a single line on the bank statement or provide a detailed list of the payments included in a batch. Some banks give their customers the option to choose between detailed reporting or not, while others always report in one of the two ways, which may vary for Customer ledger and Supplier ledger. This topic covers the clearing and reconciliation of batch payments in Visma Net. ## Accounts payable batch payment matching If your bank delivers a statement in which a Supplier ledger batch payment is reported as a single transaction, you should indicate to the system that during processing of the imported bank transactions in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, the system should search for a match among released Supplier ledger batch payments, as well as among individual payments. To do this, you select the **Match bank transactions to batch payments** check box in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window for the cash account that represents your bank account. Additionally, you may indicate to the system to search for a match also among the Supplier ledger batches that are not released yet, by selecting the **Allow matching to unreleased batch payments** check box on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. If your bank reports a batch payment as a list of individual payments, make sure that the **Match bank transactions to batch payments** check box is cleared for the cash account that represents your bank account. With the **Match bank transactions to batch payments** check box selected, when you process imported transactions in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window and match (manually or automatically) a bank transaction to a Supplier ledger batch, the system clears the batch and all payments from this batch. If you cannot find the particular Supplier ledger batch in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window to match a bank transaction, check whether payments from this batch have been matched already to some other bank transactions. If at least one payment from a Supplier ledger batch has been matched, the system does not display this batch in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. You can clear the **Matched** check box for such a payment and perform the matching process once again. Then when you prepare a reconciliation statement in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window, the system displays this Supplier ledger batch in the list of transactions instead of the individual payments from this batch. When you save the reconciliation statement for the first time and the system assigns a reference number to it, the value of the **Match bank transactions to batch payments** check box at this moment is preserved by the system for this particular statement. If you change the value of the check box after the reconciliation statement was first saved, the system will display the **Bank transactions are matched to batch payments** check box in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. This check box will reflect the value of **match bank transactions to batch payments** at the moment when the statement was first saved. The system will handle Supplier ledger batch payments based on the original setting before you first saved the reconciliation statement. ## Bank deposit matching If your bank reports a deposit as a list of included payments, you should also record the individual payments in the system, so they can be easily reconciled with the lines in the bank statement. If your bank reports deposits as a single line, we recommend that you use the bank deposit processing offered by Visma Net. After you match (manually or automatically) a bank transaction to a deposit registered in the system and process matched bank transactions in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, the system clears the deposit and all payments it includes. Then when you prepare a reconciliation statement in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, the system displays the deposit in the list of transactions instead of the individual payments it includes.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Transaction matching settings /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/transaction-matching-settings page In Visma Net, you can tailor the settings of the automatic matching process to suit your company's needs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transaction matching settings In Visma Net, you can tailor the settings of the automatic matching process to suit your company's needs. The automatic matching process uses the available information about imported transactions for searching matching documents and for calculating the relevance rate, which is a measure of how closely a document matches the selected transaction. As you are working in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, you can specify the matching parameters that apply to the current user session in the **Settings for matching** dialog box (which opens when you select a cash account and click **Settings for matching** in the window toolbar). You can modify matching settings in this dialog box and experiment with the settings to find the best values for relevance calculation in your organisation. After that, you can specify the most appropriate values as the default ones on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. During the matching process, the system uses the first two sections of the matching settings,**Disbursement date matching** and **Receipt date matching**, to filter documents in the system by date. The documents whose dates fall into the specified range are considered candidates for calculating the match relevance rate. Then the system uses the next two sections of the matching settings, **Weights for relevance calculation** and **Date range for relevance calculation**, to calculate the match relevance date for the documents filtered by date. For each matching document, the system displays the calculated rate in the **Match relevance** column on the **Match to payments** or **Match to invoices** tab of the right pane. The match relevance rate is between 0 and 1. The best match is the cash transaction with the highest rate or a significantly high rate (see the details in Best match selection rules below). The cash transactions with a rate of 0 do not appear on the tabs. In this topic, you will read about how the system calculates the match relevance rate and how it searches for the best match. ## Match relevance rate calculation The match relevance rate is calculated based on the match settings. In the match settings, you specify the relative weight of the three factors from which the likelihood is calculated: + Reference number + Date of the document or transaction + Payee information In the match settings, for each of these factors, you specify the percent or weight of the factor in the match relevance rate. Before the system calculates the rate, it applies to the document date factor an additional weighting, which you can specify as follows: + In the **Payment clearing average delay** field, you specify the number of days after the document date in the system that the payment is usually delayed before it appears in the bank statement. + In the **Estimated deviation (days)** field, you specify the deviation, which defines the date range that includes almost all (99.73%) possible dates during which the transaction in the system that could match the transaction in the bank statement. A date that is outside of the range is very unlikely to be the date of the bank transaction. For example, suppose that you use the following match settings: Ref. no. weight : 70.00 Doc. date weight : 20.00 Doc. payee weight : 10.00 Payment clearing average delay : 0.00 Estimated deviation (days) : 5.00 You have imported the bank transaction with the reference number 1231, the receipt amount 9000€, and the date 1/1/2020. After you have run the automatic matching process, a possible match has been found by the reference number and transaction date. The reference number of the possible match in the system exactly equals the reference number of the bank transaction. The date of the possible match in the system is 12/31/2019, and this date falls within the date range of 99.73% probable dates of the bank transaction. The probable date range is 12/31/2019 through 1/5/2020, where the end date of the range is calculated as 12/31/2019 + 5 days = 1/5/2020. The bank transaction date is one day past the transaction date in the system. Because the date is shifted, the additional weighting function for the date is equal to 0.98, which is the normalised value of the Gaussian distribution with the mean of 0 (**Payment clearing average delay**) and the standard deviation of 5 (**Estimated deviation**). As the result, the **Match relevance** rate for the found transaction is 0.7 \* 1 + 0.2 \* 0.98 \* 1 + 0.1 \* 0 = 0.896, where the factors are the reference number, document date, and payee, respectively. ## Best match selection rules Based on the calculated match relevance, the system selects the best match according to the following rules: 1. The best match is the transaction with the highest **Match relevance** rate that is greater than 0.75. 1. If there are no transactions with a **Match relevance** rate that is greater than 0.75, the best match is the transaction that is more relevant than the other found transactions for 0.2 or more of the **Match relevance** rate. For example: If two transactions were found, one with relevance of 0.25 and another with relevance of 0.5, the transaction with relevance 0.5 will be matched. 1. If only one transaction is found, it is the best match if its **Match relevance** rate is 0.2 or greater. 1. Otherwise, there is no best match for the transaction in the bank statement. > [!NOTE] > If you want to change the match settings and run the automatic matching process again, you need to first clear the results of the previous matching. To do this, in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, click **Unmatch all** in the table toolbar, and then click **Match automatically** to re-run the process of automatic matching.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up transaction matching settings /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/set-up-transaction-matching-settings section By using the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, you specify the default matching settings to be used by the automatic matching process in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window, as described below. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up transaction matching settings By using the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, you specify the default matching settings to be used by the automatic matching process in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window, as described below. For more information: [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/), [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/). Also, to apply matching settings to only the current user session, you can specify them in the **Settings for matching** dialog box, which opens when you select a cash account and click **Settings for matching** in the window toolbar of the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. ## Set up matching settings 1. Go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. 1. On the **Bank statement settings** tab, review the settings and change them if needed as follows: 1. For **disbursements**, specify the number of days before or after the bank transaction date (or both) allowed for transactions to be considered matching. 1. For **receipts**, specify the number of days before or after the bank transaction date (or both) allowed for transactions to be considered matching. 1. Specify relative weights for matching payee names, document dates, and reference numbers. Depending on how the payments received from different customers vary, base the weights on the importance of the respective factor in identifying the documents. 1. Specify the average delay for payments and the estimated deviation to be used for relevance calculation. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reconcile cash accounts /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconcile-cash-accounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile cash accounts Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Reconcile cash accounts - overview /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconcile-cash-accounts/reconcile-cash-accounts-overview page One way to maintain internal control over the company cash is by performing regular account reconciliations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile cash accounts - overview One way to maintain internal control over the company cash is by performing regular account reconciliations. One way to maintain internal control over the company cash is by performing regular account reconciliations. Generally, the goal of reconciliation is to find discrepancies between account balances tracked by different means (in your company and by a third party), locate any errors, and make needed corrections or adjustments. Reconciliation is performed primarily for cash accounts that represent bank accounts. Also, the balances of petty cash accounts can be reconciled with available documents, cash register receipts, or point-of-sale reports. Sometimes a balance of accounts receivables can be reconciled with the records kept in a particular customer's system. Reconciliation is usually done at the end of each period or more frequently. Regular reconciliations can reduce the number of errors on accounts and make it easier to find overlooked transactions, such as missing sales invoices that have been lost in transit. Visma Net offers you capabilities that help you evaluate more precisely the available balances of cash accounts between reconciliations and perform reconciliations of cash accounts more quickly and effectively. This chapter will guide you through the reconciliation process facilitated by Visma Net for cash accounts. ## Topics + [About the reconciliation process](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconcile-cash-accounts/about-the-reconciliation-process/) + [Perform reconciliation](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconcile-cash-accounts/perform-reconciliation/) About the reconciliation process /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconcile-cash-accounts/about-the-reconciliation-process page Reconciliation is the process of comparing the cash transactions recorded in the system to records of the same transactions tracked by other means or third parties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the reconciliation process Reconciliation is the process of comparing the cash transactions recorded in the system to records of the same transactions tracked by other means or third parties. Reconciliation is the process of comparing the cash transactions recorded in the system to records of the same transactions tracked by other means or third parties. For instance, if you reconcile a bank account, you use the bank statements for comparison. To reconcile a petty cash account, you might use the cash register receipts or point-of-sale reports for reference. In Visma Net, you mark cash accounts that require reconciliation, by selecting the **Requires reconciliation** check box in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. For more information, see: [Configure cash accounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/configure-cash-accounts-overview/) In this topic, you will read about the steps you perform to reconcile a cash account balance and additional information that will help you perform the reconciliation. ## Steps of the reconciliation process In general, you perform the following steps when you reconcile a cash account: 1. **Preparing for the reconciliation**: Optionally, during each financial period, you clear transactions (cash transactions, payments to suppliers, incoming payments window customers, and cash sales) as you receive information that the transactions have passed through. [Manage bank statements - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/managing-bank-statements-overview/) For more information, see: 1. **Verifying the cash account beginning balance**: At the end of the period, you verify the beginning balance for each cash account. In the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window, you verify that the beginning balance of the cash account in the system (per your books) matches the beginning balance on the bank statement (or your record of the petty cash account); if they do not match, void the earlier statement and fix all errors. Also, you can review the older transactions for the account that had not yet been reconciled and see which of them were preliminarily cleared. > [!NOTE] > If a transaction has been matched to one on a bank statement in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, the transaction has the **Cleared** check box selected in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. Also, a transaction is cleared if a user has selected the **Cleared** check box for it on the window where the transaction was entered. For more information, see: [About processing imported transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/about-processing-imported-transactions/) 1. **Creating the reconciliation statement**: You create a new reconciliation statement for the cash account in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window and enter the statement balance, for instance, the ending balance from the bank statement, or the sum of the cash register receipt amounts and the cash account beginning balance. 1. **Clearing the transactions**: If you have used the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window to clear bank transactions, you click the **Reconcile processed** button in the table toolbar, the system selects the **Reconciled** check boxes in the table for all released documents that were processed in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. If you have been manually clearing transactions during the financial period for which you have created the reconciliation statement and are sure that the clearing is valid, you select the **Reconciled** check box (to the left of the **Cleared** check box) for each cleared transaction. If there are no cleared transactions, you can use a bank statement or other paper documents confirming transactions; compare the transactions to lines of the bank statement by using transaction identifiers, dates, and amounts; and select the **Reconciled** check box in the first column for the confirmed transactions. > [!NOTE] > You can perform reconciliation in as many sessions as you need. You can save the reconciliation statement (with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status) at any time to continue to work with it later. 1. **Adjusting the cash account balance**: As you progress through the list, you can view the updated value of the difference between the reconciled balance of the cash account and the balance of the statement you have entered. You can create cash adjustments for transactions (such as bank interest or service charges) that occurred but were not recorded to the account. The reconciliation is finished when the difference between the reconciled balance of the cash account and the balance of the statement is zero. 1. **Confirming the reconciliation results**: When you have finished comparing the cash account transactions to a bank statement or other paper documents confirming transactions and the difference between the reconciled balance of the cash account and the balance of the statement is zero, you save and release the reconciliation statement. Thus, you have confirmed that the cash account balance is reconciled for the selected period. In the following sections you can find additional information about the details of the reconciliation process, which you perform with the help of Visma Net. ## Creation of the first reconciliation statement If you have never performed reconciliation for a particular account and then, starting on a specific date, decide to start reconciling the account (for example, when you are converting a cash account into a bank account), consider creating a first reconciliation statement that includes all the transactions that had been recorded to this account before this specific date and that were not recorded to another source. To start the first reconciliation, you need to know the balance of your first reconciliation statement. In the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window, select the cash account and date range for which the transactions are displayed (from the date of the first transaction to the date that immediately precedes the date of conversion). Make sure that all transactions, which you are going to reconcile, are posted to the General ledger. Then write down the value of the **Ending balance** field (in the top part); this will be your first reconciliation statement balance, which you enter in the **Statement balance** field in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. You can use the [Cash account summary (CA633000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-account-summary-ca633000/) to find out the ending balance of a cash account. When you know the balance of your first reconciliation statement, you create the reconciliation statement and mark the transactions as reconciled. When the reconciled balance and the statement balance are equal, you save and release the reconciliation statement. When you are reconciling the account for the second time, if you detect transactions that should belong to the first statement, you void the first statement, add these transactions, and release the statement again. ## Adjustment of a cash account balance If you are reconciling a bank account, you compare the cash account transactions to the bank account records (usually found in a bank statement). Theoretically, the balance of the bank account should reconcile with the balance of the associated cash account as shown in your system. However, a transaction may be recorded on your books sooner or later than the bank actually reflects that change to the corresponding account. Also, the bank may invoke service charges of amounts that are not known in advance. If you have been regularly tracking bank transactions during a financial period or have processed a bank statement just before the reconciliation, you probably do not need to adjust the balance of the cash account during the reconciliation because your records are up to date. If you do not use automatic processing of the bank transactions (or of the other records that confirm the cash account transactions), you may encounter a transaction that is in a bank statement, but is not recorded to the system. In Visma Net, you can create cash adjustments for transactions (such as bank interest or service charges) that occurred but were not recorded to the account. To do this, you click the **Create adjustment** button in the table toolbar of the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. ## Handling of voided transactions You can indicate to the system how you want to handle voided transactions by using the **Skip voided transactions** check box in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. If the check box is cleared, the system includes in the list of transactions both the original transaction and the voided transaction. If the check box is selected, the system skips these transactions and does not include them in the reconciliation. If a payment is released and reconciled at the end of a financial period and then the payment is voided in the next financial period, the system does not change the released reconciliation statement and does not skip the voided payment during reconciliation. When you save a reconciliation statement for the first time and the system assigns the reference number to it, the value of the **Skip voided transactions** check box at this moment is preserved by the system for this particular statement. If you change the value of the check box after saving the statement for the first time, the system will display the **Voided transactions are skipped** check box in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. This check box will reflect the value of **Skip voided transactions** at the moment when the statement was first saved. The system will handle voided transactions as this setting indicates. If you want the system to handle the voided transactions the other way (that is, with the check box selected if it was cleared or cleared if it was selected), you need to delete the saved reconciliation statement, adjust the value of the **Skip voided transactions** check box, and create a new reconciliation statement. ## Release of a reconciliation statement You can release a balanced statement by clicking **Release** in the window toolbar of the [Reconciliation statement history (CA302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statement-history-ca302010/) or the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. The released statement includes only documents that were marked as reconciled (see the **Reconciled** check box in the table in the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window). When you release the reconciliation statement, the system assigns a date and a reconciliation statement reference number to all transactions marked as reconciled; these transactions will not appear on any future reconciliation statement. If transactions were not marked as reconciled but were marked as cleared, they will keep the **Cleared** status and will appear on any subsequent statement until they are reconciled. The amounts of unreleased transactions with the **Cleared** status affect an available balance of a cash account balance, only if the **Unreleased cleared** check box is selected in the **Receipts to add to available balances** and **Disbursements to deduct from available balances** sections of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. For more information, see: [About cash account configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/about-cash-account-configuration/) ## Voiding of a reconciliation statement Only one open statement is allowed for each cash account. If you find an error in an earlier statement for a cash account, delete the open statement (which is not released), locate the last released statement, and void it. Voiding the statement removes the reconciliation marks from the documents and makes the documents available again for proper reconciliation. Notice that voiding does not change the status of the documents that were created during the reconciliation process.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Perform reconciliation /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconcile-cash-accounts/perform-reconciliation section By performing periodic reconciliation for a cash account, you make sure that the transactions recorded to the account are correct and that the list of transactions is complete. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Perform reconciliation By performing periodic reconciliation for a cash account, you make sure that the transactions recorded to the account are correct and that the list of transactions is complete. By performing periodic reconciliation for a cash account, you make sure that the transactions recorded to the account are correct and that the list of transactions is complete. You can perform reconciliation in as many sessions as you need. You can save the reconciliation statement at any time to continue to work with it later. ## Perform reconciliation 1. Go to the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the cash account to be reconciled. 1. In the **Statement balance** field, enter the reconciliation statement balance. If you are reconciling a bank account, this is the ending balance shown in the bank statement you are using for reference. In other cases, this is the sum of the beginning balance of the cash account and the amounts of the documents that confirm transactions (for instance, cash register receipts). 1. In the **Load documents up to** field, select the latest date to upload the documents. > [!NOTE] > If you perform reconciliation for the bank account, after you have processed a bank statement in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, all transactions that were matched on the bank statement appear in this table as cleared (that is, they have the **Cleared** check box selected). 1. For each transaction with the **Cleared** check box selected, select the **Reconciled** check box (in the unlabelled column to the left of the **Cleared** column) if the transaction is confirmed with the reconciliation source. > [!NOTE] > If you are performing reconciliation for a bank account, after you have processed a bank statement in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, you can click the **Reconcile processed** button in the table toolbar to mark all processed transactions as reconciled at once. 1. For each transaction with the **Cleared** check box not selected, try to match this transaction to one of the transactions in the source by the amount and the possible date range. Compare the payee names on the transactions; names of the same customer can be recorded differently in the source and in your system. Once the transaction is confirmed with the source, select the **Reconciled** check box for it. > [!NOTE] > If you mark as reconciled a transaction with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, the system displays an error icon (a red circle with an **X** ), because unreleased transactions cannot be reconciled. For such a document, click the **Orig. doc. number**, which is the link to this document. This brings up the appropriate data entry window in a pop-up window with the document open. Click **Release** in the window toolbar and return to the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. 1. For each transaction for which there are no matching transactions in the source, consider creating the missing document as follows: 1. In the table toolbar, click **Create adjustment**, which brings up the **Quick transaction dialog box**. 1. In the dialog box, enter all the required information for the new document: Select the entry type, type the amount, specify the external reference number, and provide a description. 1. Select the **Reconciled** check box and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. When the difference between the reconciled balance and the statement balance is zero, clear the **Hold** check box. 1. Save the statement. 1. Click **Release** in the window toolbar. Only reconciled transactions are included in the released statement.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reconciliation statements /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconciliation-statements section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconciliation statements Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Create a reconciliation statement /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconciliation-statements/create-a-reconciliation-statement section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a reconciliation statement 1. Go to the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select the cash account for which you want to create a reconciliation statement. You can select among the cash accounts that have the option **Requires reconciliation** selected in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. In the **Reconciliation date** field, enter the date in question. 1. In the **Load documents up to** field, enter the latest transaction date you want to include.. 1. In the **Statement balance** field, enter the balance from the bank statement. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reconcile a reconciliation statement /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconciliation-statements/reconcile-a-reconciliation-statement section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile a reconciliation statement ## Before you start At the end of each period, you create a new reconciliation statement and review the transactions for the selected account that were not yet reconciled. 1. Go to the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. 1. Select the **Reconciled** check box for each cleared transaction. 1. If you have a bank statement or some other paper transaction confirmations on hand, compare the transactions to the lines of the bank statement by using transaction identifiers, dates, and the amount. 1. Select the **Reconciled** check box in the first column for the confirmed transactions. > [!NOTE] > As you go through the list, you can view the updated value of the cash account balance and the totals of confirmed receipts and disbursements. It is possible create cash adjustments for transactions (such as bank interest or service charges) that took place, but were not recorded to the account. 1. In the **Statement balance** field, enter the reconciliation statement balance. 1. Verify that the beginning balance in the system matches the beginning balance on the bank statement. If not: void the earlier statement and fix the errors. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can perform a reconciliation in multiple stages, and to save it with the **On Hold** or **Balanced** status in between

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release a reconciliation statement /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconciliation-statements/release-a-reconciliation-statement section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release a reconciliation statement 1. Go to the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select the cash account for which you want to release a balanced reconciliation statement. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the reference number of the statement you want to release. 1. In the toolbar at the top of the window, click **Release**. The released statement only includes documents that were marked as reconciled with the **Reconciled** check box in the table in the **Reconciliation statements** window. When you release the reconciliation statement, the system will assign a date and a reconciliation statement reference number to all transactions marked as reconciled. These transactions is not displayed on any future reconciliation statements.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Void a reconciliation statement /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/reconciliation-statements/void-a-reconciliation-statement section Voiding the statement removes the reconciliation marks from the documents and makes the documents available again for proper reconciliation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a reconciliation statement Voiding the statement removes the reconciliation marks from the documents and makes the documents available again for proper reconciliation. 1. Go to the [Reconciliation statements (CA302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the cash account for which you want to void a released reconciliation statement. > [!NOTE] > If the statement you want to void is not released, you delete it instead of voiding. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the reference number of the statement you want to void. 1. In the toolbar at the top of the window, click **Void**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage payment methods /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage payment methods Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Managing payment methods - overview /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/managing-payment-methods-overview page With Visma Net, you can configure the payment methods that your organisation uses to pay its suppliers, as well as the payment methods that are used by customers to pay your organisation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Managing payment methods - overview With Visma Net, you can configure the payment methods that your organisation uses to pay its suppliers, as well as the payment methods that are used by customers to pay your organisation. You configure these payment methods in the Cash management workspace, and then you use the payment methods for suppliers in the Supplier ledger workspace and the payment methods for customers in the Customer ledger workspace. The settings of a payment method to be used in the Supplier ledger workspace describe the way outgoing money is actually transferred from your organisation to the supplier destination, such as by check, wire transfer, credit or debit card, cash, or invoice of exchange. The settings of a payment method to be used in the Customer ledger workspace describe the way incoming money is actually transferred to your company. You set up these payment methods, which in some cases (such as with cash and check) can be used for customer payments without more specific information being specified in the system. For other types of payment methods, the payment method you define in the Cash management workspace serves as a template that you use to easily define the customer payment methods that contain customer-specific information. You can enter this specific information when you set up the customer account or any time afterwards. These topics will help you to understand what payment methods are, how they are used in Visma Net, and how to configure payment methods. ## Topics + [About payment methods for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/about-payment-methods-for-customers/) + [About payment methods for suppliers](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/about-payment-methods-for-suppliers/) About payment methods for customers /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/about-payment-methods-for-customers page In Visma Net, you can configure payment methods for customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment methods for customers In Visma Net, you can configure payment methods for customers. In Visma Net, you can configure payment methods for customers. The settings of these payment methods describe how the particular payment is done and provide the default cash account to be used to record payments. ## General payment method setup You use the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window to configure payment methods. You perform the following general steps to set up a payment method: 1. Specify the required settings, such as the identifier, means of payment, and description. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you use the **Cash** means of payment for all payment methods that are used to describe how customers pay your organisation. 1. Specify how you want to use the payment method: For customer payments, select the **Use in customer ledger** check box. > [!NOTE] > The same payment method can be used to record incoming and outgoing payments; that is, you can select both the **Use in customer ledger** and the **Use in supplier ledger** check boxes (or just one of the check boxes). 1. On the **Allowed cash accounts** tab, add the cash accounts to be used with this payment method. Additionally, you can select the **Customer ledger default** check box to define the cash account that is used by default for incoming payments. > [!NOTE] > You do not need to enable auto-numbering of payments (by using the **Customer ledger - Suggest next number** and the **Last reference number** columns), because incoming payments usually have their own numbers, which you enter in the **Payment ref.** field in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. Activate the payment method or select the **Active** check box. 1. Save the new payment method. Follow these steps for all payment methods that are used to describe how customers pay your organisation. ## Examples of payment methods Goods and services can be paid for in a variety of ways, including cash and wire transfers. You can configure the following types of payment methods to record payments from customers: + Cash: To record incoming payments made with actual cash, you configure a payment method, which you base on the **Cash** means of payment. You should associate the payment method with general cash accounts and petty cash accounts. + Wire transfer: To record incoming payments made by wire transfer, you develop a payment method and base it on the **Cash** means of payment. You associate the payment method with bank cash accounts. ## Payment methods for customers and customer payment methods You configure payment methods for customers in the Cash management workspace of Visma Net, but you use them in the Customer ledger workspace to record payments from the customers. To start using payment methods, first associate a payment method with a particular customer. The system automatically associates with all customer accounts each payment method that is configured as follows: + The payment method is active or the **Active** check box is selected. + The payment method is based on the **Cash** means of payment. + The payment method is marked for use in Customer ledger or the **Use in Customer ledger** check box is selected. + The payment method does not require an account number or the **Require account number** check box is cleared on the **Settings for Customer ledger** tab. All payment methods for customers configured in this way will automatically appear on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and can be used to record payments without additional configuration. You can modify a payment method that has been associated with a particular customer automatically (due to being configured as described earlier). Then the system creates an instance of the payment method that is called a **customer payment method**. Customer payment methods are also displayed on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window with the **Override** check box selected to distinguish them from non-modified payment methods for customers.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About payment methods for suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/about-payment-methods-for-suppliers page You can configure payment methods that are used to pay suppliers of your organisation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment methods for suppliers You can configure payment methods that are used to pay suppliers of your organisation. You can configure payment methods that are used to pay suppliers of your organisation. The settings of a payment method describe how a particular payment was done and provide the default cash account to be used to record payments. The system does not initiate the actual movement of money; it just holds the information about the payment. In this topic, you will read about the general steps of setting up a payment method. You will also see examples of payment methods that can be used to record payments to suppliers. ## General payment method setup You use the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window to configure payment methods. You perform the following general steps to set up a payment method: 1. In this window, you specify the required settings, such as the identifier, means of payment, and description. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you use the **Cash** means of payment for all payment methods that are used to describe how your organisation pays suppliers. 1. You specify how you want to use the payment method: For payments to suppliers, select the **Use in supplier ledger** check box. > [!NOTE] > The same payment method can be used to record incoming and outgoing payments; that is, you can select both the **Use in customer ledger** and the **Use in supplier ledger** check boxes (or just one of the check boxes). 1. On the **Allowed cash accounts** tab, you add the cash accounts to be used with this payment method. Additionally, you can select the **Supplier ledger default** check box to define the cash account that is used by default for outgoing payments. 1. Optionally, you can do any of the following for the payment method: + Enable automatic numbering of printed checks or other documents that confirm payment, by using the **Supplier ledger - Suggest next number** and the **Supplier ledger last reference number** columns on the **Allowed cash accounts** tab. + Disable the requirement that each payment reference number must be unique, by clearing the **Require unique ref.** check box, which is selected by default and appears if the **Not required** option is selected in the **Additional processing** section on the **Settings for supplier ledger** tab. + Configure printing of payments or other documents that confirm payment, by selecting the **Print payments** option in the **Additional processing** section on the **Settings for supplier ledger** tab and specifying additional parameters in the **Check printing settings** section (which appears on the right side of the tab). + Configure grouping of multiple payments into a batch that you will send to a money transfer operator, by selecting the **Create batch payments** option in the **Additional processing** section on the **Settings for supplier ledger** tab and specifying additional parameter in the **Export settings** section (which appears on the right side of the tab). 1. You activate the payment method or select the **Active** check box. 1. You save the new payment method. All of these payment methods, which are configured to describe how your organisation pays suppliers, are available for use at once with any supplier account. ## Cash To record outgoing payments made with cash, you develop a payment method and base it on the **Cash** means of payment. You associate the payment method with general cash accounts and petty cash accounts. You can enable automatic numbering of outgoing payments for this payment method and configure the printing of documents that confirm payment if you provide any. ## Wire transfer To record outgoing payments made by wire transfer, you develop a payment method and base it on the **Cash** means of payment. You associate the payment method with bank cash accounts, which provide funds for outgoing payments. You can configure automatic numbering of the payments according to the numbering series used by the money transfer operator, and you can configure printing of documents that confirm payment. If the money transfer operator does not provide a reference number for the payments, you can clear the **Require unique payment ref.** check box on the **Settings for supplier ledger** tab (the check box is displayed if the **Not required** option is selected in the **Additional processing** section) and create payments without reference numbers. ## Batch payments You can configure a payment method that you can use to group multiple payments into a batch and send this batch to a money transfer operator. ## Payment reference numbers and their automatic generation Usually documents that confirm payments are assigned unique payment reference numbers. In Visma Net, you can specify whether specifying a unique payment reference number for outgoing payments is required by using the **Require unique payment ref.** check box that is displayed if the **Not required** option is selected in the **Additional processing** section on the **Settings for supplier ledger** tab (in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window). If you select this check box for a payment method, you will have to specify a unique payment reference number for each payment made with this payment method. Selecting the **Print payments** or the **Create batch payments** options in the **Additional processing** section makes the **Require unique payment ref.** check box selected by default and unavailable. You can enable automatic generation of a payment reference number for documents recorded to a particular cash account with any payment method used in the Supplier ledger workspace. You enable automatic numbering and specify the numbering rule for each cash account by using the **Supplier ledger - Suggest next number** and the **Supplier ledger last reference number** columns on the **Allowed cash accounts** tab of the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. The generated number automatically appears in the **Payment ref.** field in the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window when a user creates a new document and selects the cash account and the payment method for which the automatic numbering is configured. Regardless of whether you enable automatic numbering, the user can manually specify a payment reference number. If you have configured the payment method so that documents must be printed, the system will require the user to enter a unique payment reference number in the **Next payment number** field in the [Create batch payments (AP505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000/) window before printing the document. If printing is not required for documents that confirm payment, the user can manually specify the payment reference number in the **Payment ref.** field in the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. In this case, the system requires and validates the uniqueness of each payment reference number only if the **Require unique payment ref.** check box is selected for the payment method used. ## Documents that confirm payment and their printing With Visma Net, you can configure the payment method to require the printing of documents that confirm payment. If you want to require the printing of payments, in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window, you select the **Print payments** option button in the **Additional processing** section on the **Settings for supplier ledger** tab and specify the appropriate settings in the **Printing settings** section of the tab, which appears as soon as you click **Print payments**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create payment methods /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/create-payment-methods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create payment methods 1. Go to the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. 1. In the **Payment method ID** field, enter the ID of the payment method. The maximum length is 10 characters. 1. Select a **means of payment** from the drop-down list. 1. Write a **description** for the method. 1. Use the check boxes to select the workspaces in which the method will be available, and if remittance information is required for the cash account. > [!NOTE] > If remittance information is required, define the relevant settings on the **Remittance settings** tab. 1. On the **Allowed cash accounts** tab in the lower toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add cash accounts to be used with this payment method. Use the other fields on the line to decide in which workspace(s) this cash account can be used and if it should be the default in that workspace. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > For payment methods to be used with AutoPay, select the check box **Create batch payment** on the **Settings for supplier ledger** tab. Set payment methods for AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/set-payment-methods-for-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set payment methods for AutoPay 1. Go to the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. 1. In the **Payment method ID** field, select the payment method you want to use with AutoPay. 1. Go to the **Settings for Supplier ledger** tab. 1. Select the **Create batch payments** radio button. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Enable batch payments /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/enable-batch-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable batch payments 1. Go to the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. 1. Go to the tab **Settings for Customer ledger**. 1. In the **Common settings** section, select the check box **Create batch payment (customer and supplier ledgers)**. 1. In the **Payment method details** section, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Fill in the ID, select the banking detail type that is used by the customer, and enter a description. > [!NOTE] > You can fill in the columns **Entry mask** and **Validation reg. exp.**, but this is not required. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Add a payment method and a bank account](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer/). Activate next payment number for outgoing payments /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/activate-next-payment-number-for-outgoing-payments section Visma Net ha s as default setting that the system will suggest the next available payment number for outgoing payments when you create batch payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate next payment number for outgoing payments Visma Net ha s as default setting that the system will suggest the next available payment number for outgoing payments when you create batch payments. 1. Go to the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. 1. In the **Payment method ID** field, select the payment method. 1. Go to the **Allowed cash accounts** tab. 1. Under the **Suggest next supplier no.** column, there is a check box for each cash account. When this is check box is selected, the system will create a new payment number for your outgoing payments. 1. If you do not want this functionality, deselect the check box(es). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Cash management windows /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows section The Cash management workspace of Visma Net helps you manage cash flows and forecast your cash position at any time and in multiple currencies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash management windows The Cash management workspace of Visma Net helps you manage cash flows and forecast your cash position at any time and in multiple currencies. Anticipated cash transactions (CA305500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/anticipated-cash-transactions-ca305500 page You can use this window to enter information about cash transactions that you expect in the near future. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Anticipated cash transactions (CA305500) You can use this window to enter information about cash transactions that you expect in the near future. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to enter information about cash transactions that you expect in the near future. This information is used only to improve cash flow forecasts that otherwise would be based on documents available in the system. For more information, see: [About cash flow forecasting](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/about-cash-flow-forecasting/) ## The top part In this area, select a cash account and a start date to view only the transactions with later dates in the **Cash transactions** section.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account for which you want to view available transactions or enter new ones.
Currency The currency that is used for the cash account.
Start date The earliest date for the transactions to be shown in the list.
## The table In this table, you can view the cash transactions entered with dates later than the specified start date and enter new expected cash transactions.
Column Description
Trans. date The date of the cash transaction.
Disb./receipt The type of the transaction: Disbursement or Receipt.
Description The description provided for the cash transaction.
Amount The amount of the cash transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 AutoPay inbox (CA50400S) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s section This window displays the Incoming payments, Account statements and Outgoing payment status, with all statuses: New, Validated, Manually validated, Error and Import in Progress. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # AutoPay inbox (CA50400S) This window displays the Incoming payments, Account statements and Outgoing payment status, with all statuses: New, Validated, Manually validated, Error and Import in Progress. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The **Ignored** statuses are only visible when the **Inbox status** field is empty. ## What to do from this window + [Set up automatic processing of AutoPay messages from the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/set-up-automatic-processing-of-autopay-messages-from-the-autopay-inbox/) + [Process incoming payments in the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/process-incoming-payments-in-the-autopay-inbox/) + [Process outgoing payments manually via the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/process-outgoing-payments-manually-via-the-autopay-inbox/) + [Process statements manually via the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/process-statements-manually-via-the-autopay-inbox/) + [Handle error messages for outgoing payments via the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/handle-error-messages-for-outgoing-payments-via-the-autopay-inbox/) + [Validate manually incoming payments and statements with error](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/validate-manually-incoming-payments-and-statements-with-error/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Validate manually When you click this button, in the Status column, the status changes to Manually validated and the icon-confirmation icon is now visible.
View document

In the table, select the incoming payment you want to view.

Click the View document button.

In the AutoPay inbox details (CA40300S) window that opens, view your incoming payment.
Process

In the table, select the check boxes for the incoming payments you will process.

Click the Process button. In the Status column, the status changes to Validated and icon-confirmation is displayed. The incoming payment is updated in the general ledger.
Process all If you want to process all the lines in one go, click the Process all button without selecting the check boxes.
Inquiries
  • Get payment info AutoPay
  • Incoming payments process
  • Bank transactions process
Schedules

In the drop-down list you have the following options:

  • Add Once a schedule is added to this window, the following options are also available:

This opens the Automation schedules (SM205020) window as a pop-up. Here you can create and add automation schedules. For more information, see: Schedule processing.

  • History
  • Delete
  • Delete all
  • View
## The top part By using the elements in this area, described in the following table, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display in the documents table.
Element Description
Message type

In the Message type field, select one of the following options in the drop-down list:

  • View all
  • Outgoing payment status
  • Incoming payments
  • Account statements
Inbox status

In the Inbox status field, select one of the following options in the drop-down list:

  • New
  • Validated
  • Manually validated
  • Error
  • Import in progress
  • Ready for processing
Cash account In the Cash account field, click icon-select to select the cash account.
Up to date Select the date until which you want to include documents.
## The table This table contains the list of documents that have associated landed cost codes and for which generation of the adjustments failed.
Column Description
Message type The type of the message.
Action

The following options are available:

Import from AutoPay
the transactions are imported.
Import from AutoPay and match
the transactions are imported and matched when a match is found.
Import from AutoPay and process
the transactions are imported and the payments are processed when a match is found.
Exclude from AutoPay
the transactions are not imported.
Note

If you have selected the check box Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer and choose the action Import from AutoPay, the system will not create a customer payment and match the invoices that are paid. These must be matched manually. Use the column Invoice list under Process incoming payments to get information about which invoices that are paid. If you have selected the check box Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer and choose the actions Import from AutoPay and match or Import from AutoPay and process, the system will create a customer payment and match the invoices that are paid for that customer.
Status

The status of the payment:

  • New
  • Validated
  • Manually validated
  • Error
  • Ignored
  • Import in progress
Account The payment account of the transactions in the payment message.
Cash account The cash account of the transactions in the payment message.
Reference number The reference number of the payment.
File ID The unique reference number for Account Statement and Incoming Payment, which is displayed and named Ref in AutoPay.
Split no

A number indicating part of file.

A payment file can be split into several files to ensure faster handling of automatic scheduling. Each file will have the same File ID and a sequential Split no added to it.

To initiate this feature, go to window Cash management preferences (CA101000).
Number of transactions The number of transactions included in the payment message.
Processed transactions The number of processed transactions included in the payment message.
Bank date The date when the payment was handled in the bank.
Debit amount The debit amount of the payment.
Credit amount The credit amount of the payment.
Process date The processing date of the payment message.
Processed by user The user who has processed the payment message.
Status reason

The reason why the processed message ends up with an error status. Some of the possible status reasons are:

No cash account was found with this IBAN, check cash accounts against AutoPay agreements.
the messages cannot be processed due to the fact that the bank account number could not be found as bank account set on the existing cash accounts.
The file is either missing data or containing incorrect data, and cannot be read. Contact Visma for more support.
the file format can contain an error, please contact support for further investigation.
The file {fileID} was already downloaded on {lastDownloadedOn}
the message was already imported to this window, please check based on the file ID.
Received status

The received status of the message:

  • Approved
  • Sending to bank
  • Error sending to bank
  • Completed
  • Received by bank
  • Cancelled
Created date The date when the payment message was created.
AutoPay inbox details (CA40300S) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-details-ca40300s section This window displays the Incoming payments, Account statements and Outgoing payment status, with all statuses: New, Validated, Manually validated, Error and Import in Progress. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # AutoPay inbox details (CA40300S) This window displays the Incoming payments, Account statements and Outgoing payment status, with all statuses: New, Validated, Manually validated, Error and Import in Progress. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The **Ignored** statuses are only visible when the **Inbox status** filed is empty. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Back Navigates you back to the AutoPay inbox (CA50400S) window.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, described in the following table, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display in the documents table.
Element Description
Batch status

Select one of the following options in the drop-down list:

  • View all
  • Exported
  • Not exported
  • Export error
  • Pending signing
  • New
  • Cancelled
  • Approved
  • Sending to bank
  • Error sending to bank
  • Sent to bank
  • Received by bank
  • Pending in bank
  • Accepted by bank
  • Cancelled in bank
  • Rejected in bank
  • Paid
  • Completed
  • Error
  • Unknown response
  • Handled manually
  • Manually created
Payment status

Select one of the following options in the drop-down list:

  • View all
  • Exported
  • Not exported
  • Export error
  • Pending signing
  • New
  • Cancelled
  • Approved
  • Sending to bank
  • Error sending to bank
  • Sent to bank
  • Received by bank
  • Pending in bank
  • Accepted by bank
  • Cancelled in bank
  • Rejected in bank
  • Paid
  • Completed
  • Error
  • Unknown response
  • Handled manually
  • Manually created
Cash account In the Cash account field, click icon-select to select the cash account.
Date Select the date until which you want to include documents.
Bank date The date when the payment was handled in the bank.
Message type

In the Message type field, select one of the following options in the drop-down list:

  • View all
  • Outgoing payment status
  • Incoming payments
  • Account statements
## The table This table contains the list of documents that have associated landed cost codes and for which generation of the adjustments failed.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace in which the document has been created.
Batch ref. no. The reference number of the payment batch.
Batch status

The status of the batch, selected in the top part:

  • View all
  • Exported
  • Not exported
  • Export error
  • Pending signing
  • New
  • Cancelled
  • Approved
  • Sending to bank
  • Error sending to bank
  • Sent to bank
  • Received by bank
  • Pending in bank
  • Accepted by bank
  • Cancelled in bank
  • Rejected in bank
  • Paid
  • Completed
  • Error
  • Unknown response
  • Handled manually
  • Manually created
Cash account The cash account of the transactions in the payment message.
Base currency The base currency of the transactions in the payment message.
Payment reference number The reference number of the payment.
Payment status

The status of the payment, selected in the top part:

  • View all
  • Exported
  • Not exported
  • Export error
  • Pending signing
  • New
  • Cancelled
  • Approved
  • Sending to bank
  • Error sending to bank
  • Sent to bank
  • Received by bank
  • Pending in bank
  • Accepted by bank
  • Cancelled in bank
  • Rejected in bank
  • Paid
  • Completed
  • Error
  • Unknown response
  • Handled manually
  • Manually created
Paid amount The amount paid on the document.
Charged fee amount The charged amount of fees on the payment.
Paid date The date when the document amount has been paid.
Payee name The payee to whom the payment was made.
Message The message connected with the payment.
Created date The date when the document was created.
Document due date The due date of the document.
Document ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the payment.
Last modified date The date when the payment was last modified.
Bank deposits (CA305000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-deposits-ca305000 page You use this window to create and void deposits, and to select existing deposits and view or edit their information. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Bank deposits (CA305000) You use this window to create and void deposits, and to select existing deposits and view or edit their information. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and void deposits, and to select existing deposits and view or edit their information. Only payments recorded to clearing accounts associated with a bank account can be included in a deposit. You can add information about bank charges that apply to a deposit by using the **Charges** tab. Multiple charges to the same deposit can be shown as a separate transactions in a batch if the **Separate charges** check box (on the **Financial details** tab of this window) is selected for the deposit. If the check box is cleared, the charge amount is deducted from the batch amount. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the selected deposit.
Void Navigates to the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, where you can view the details of the batch.
Reports

Includes the following menu command, which you can click for quick access to the report:

Print deposit slip: Navigates to the Deposit slip (CA656500) report.
## The top part This area holds summary information about the deposit. The elements of this area are described in the following table.
Element Description
Trans. type The type of deposit. The available types are Deposit and Void deposit.
Ref. no. The unique identifier assigned to the deposit in accordance with the number series, which is specified in the ( Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
Status The status of the deposit, which is automatically assigned by the system. The available values are On hold, Balanced, and Released.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the deposit is on hold, which means it may be edited but cannot be released. You can clear the Hold check box for a balanced deposit only.
Deposit date The date of the deposit.
Period The financial period to which the deposit should be posted.
Cash account The cash account (usually a bank account) to which the deposit will be posted.
Currency The currency of the deposit.
Document ref. The external reference number of the deposit.
Cash drop account The cash account (usually a Cash on hand account) from which you want to also deposit some amount on the bank account.
Cash drop amount The total amount of cash to be deposited through this deposit.
Description A detailed description of the deposit.
Deposit total The line total amount of the deposit.
Charge total The total amount of any charges that apply to the deposit.
Total amount The total amount of the deposit, including the cash amount minus the charge total amount.
Control total The control total of the deposit, which should be equal to the Total amount.
## Payments tab This tab contains the list of payments that have been included in the deposit. To include a payment in the deposit, use the **Add payment** button.
Column Description
Doc. module The workspace of origin, Customer ledger or Supplier ledger, for the payment.
Type The type of the payment included in the deposit.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier, by its ID, whose payment is included in the deposit.
Account name The name of the customer or supplier whose payment is included in the deposit.
Location The location of the customer associated with the payment.
Account A clearing cash account associated with the bank account.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Deposit amount The amount of the payment to be deposited.
Payment method The payment method used to record the payment.
Status The status of the payment, which is one of the following options: On hold, Balanced, or Released.
Payment ref. The external reference number of the payment.
Payment date The date of the payment.
Charge type The entry type of the charges that apply to the payment included in the deposit. An entry type is a type of entered cash transaction that your site uses to classify the transactions for appropriate processing.
Original amount The original amount of the payment.
### The Add payment button
Element Description
Clearing account The clearing cash account where unknown payments were recorded.
Payment method The payment method used for recording unknown payments.
Start date The start date of the time period for which you want to view payments.
End date The end date of the time period for which you want to view payments.
The table has the following elements
Doc. workspace The workspace of origin, Customer ledger or Supplier ledger, for the payment.
Type The type of the payment, which is one of the following options: Payment, Credit note, Prepayment, or Customer refund.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment as assigned by the system.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier, by its ID, specified on the payment document.
Account name The name of the customer or supplier specified on the payment document.
Location The location of the customer associated with the payment.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment as specified by the customer.
Payment date The date of the payment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Payment amount The amount of the payment.
Cash account The cash account to hold the payment.
Description The description of the cash account.
Payment method The payment method used by the customer for the payment.
Charge amount The amount of the charges.
Gross payment amount The gross amount of the payment.
Add and close (buttons) Adds the selected payments to the deposit and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (buttons) Discards the selections made on the dialog box and closes the dialog box.
## Charges tab This tab contains the list (in a tabular format) of charges that apply to the deposit.
Column Description
Charge The entry type of the bank charges that apply to the deposit. The entry types can be configured in the Entry types (CA203000) window.
Payment method The payment method of the deposited payment to which this charge rate should be applied. If the field is empty, the charge rate is applied to deposited payments, regardless of their payment method.
Charge rate The rate of the bank charges.
Chargeable amount The amount to be used as a base for the charges.
Charge amount The amount of the charges.
Account The expense account to which the charges are recorded.
Clearing subaccount The subaccount to be used with the expense account.
## Financial details tab This tab contains the reference to the batch that posts the transactions associated with the deposit, the deposit's owner and work group, and the information about whether the deposit was cleared with the bank statement.
Element Description
Batch number The number of the batch generated to implement the cash transaction. By clicking the number, you can navigate to the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, where you can view batch details.
Work group The work group to which the deposit is assigned for processing. Select a work group from the company tree.
Owner The owner of the deposit, which is the employee who controls the processing. Select an owner from the list of employees.
Clear date The date when the deposit has been cleared with the bank reconciliation statement.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the deposit was cleared with the bank.
Separate charges A check box that indicates (if selected) that the charges for the deposit will be specified by a separate transaction. If the check box is not selected, charges will be deducted from the deposit amount.

Related pages

Concepts

 Bank transaction rules (CA204500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transaction-rules-ca204500 page You can use this window to define and view the rules that are used to create new payments for imported bank transactions for which matching documents were not found in the system in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Bank transaction rules (CA204500) You can use this window to define and view the rules that are used to create new payments for imported bank transactions for which matching documents were not found in the system in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window. For more information: [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can define rules to create documents originating in the Cash management workspace only. The system navigates you to this window when you click **Create rule** in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) and [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) windows. In this case, fields in the **Matching criteria** section are filled with the transaction details automatically and you need to specify output details only. You can clear or modify values in the **Matching criteria** section if some of the transaction details cannot be used as a criterion. For example: You can modify the transaction description by using wildcard characters (\* or?) and the **Use wildcards** check box or clear the **Description** field. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You can use the elements in this area to define a new rule and its settings. Or, to select an existing rule and view its settings.
Element Description
Rule A unique identifier for the rule. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Description A detailed description of the rule. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 256 characters.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the rule is available for use in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
## The Matching criteria section In this section, you specify multiple criteria that should be met by a bank transaction for the rule to be applied.
Element Description
Debit/Credit The type of transaction: Disbursement or Receipt.
Cash account The identifier of the cash account, which corresponds to the account in the bank.
Currency The currency of a transaction. The field is disabled and displays the currency of the selected cash account (if any).
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Description

The description of the transaction. The application of this criterion depends on the value of the Use wild cards check box:

Cleared
The criterion is met if the description of a transaction contains a string you have typed in the Description field.
Selected
The criterion is met if the description of a transaction equals a string you have typed in the Description field.

The field is filled with a transaction description when you have been navigated here from the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window. If you do not want to use a description as the criterion, make sure the field is cleared.
Match case A check box that indicates (if selected) that the font case of a transaction description should match to the font case in the Description field.
Use wild cards A check box that indicates that you can use wild card characters (* or?) in the Description field. This is selected by default.
Use name from bank A check box that indicates (when selected) that the name from the bank can be used in the Description field.
Bank account number The IBAN/BBAN number to be used on the rule. The IBAN/BBAN will be updated from the bank transaction when creating a rule. The bank transaction rules will be picked in alphabetical order, so when there are several hits, the first matching rule will be used.
Amount matching mode

The mode of the transaction amount matching. The following options are available:

None
The amount criterion is not used. This is the default.
Equal
The transaction amount must be equal to the number specified in the Amount field.
Between
The transaction amount must be in the range of the numbers specified in the Amount and the Max. amount fields.
Amount

The number used to compare a transaction amount.

Note: This field is only available if you have selected the options Between or Equal in the Amount matching mode field.
Max. amount

The maximum number used to compare a transaction amount.

Note: This field is only available if you have selected the option Between in the Amount matching mode field.
## The Output section In this section, you provide the details of the rule application result.
Element Description
Action

The action that is performed by the system when the rule is appslied. The following options are available:

  • Create document: The system creates a new document to match the imported bank transaction (that meets the specified criteria) for which a match was not found in the system (by using the entry type specified in the Resulting entry type field).

  • Hide: The system hides the imported bank transaction (that meets the specified criteria) from the list and marks it as processed.

    Note

    You can then clear the Processed and Hidden check boxes for the transaction by clicking the Unhide transaction button in the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window to be able to view and process the transaction again.
Resulting entry type

The identifier of the entry type that the system will use as a template to create a cash transaction to match the imported bank transaction (that meets the specified criteria) for which a match was not found in the system.

You can create entry types by using the Entry types (CA203000) window. The field is displayed if the Create document option is selected in the Action field.
Default offset account

The account that is used as the offset account for transactions being created.

The account is copied from the selected entry type. You can override this account on the bank transaction rule.

The bank transaction being made will inherit the account from the rule. If no account is set on the rule, the transaction will inherit the account from the entry type.
Default offset subaccount

The corresponding subaccount.

The subaccount is copied from the selected entry type. You can override this subaccount on the bank transaction rule.

The bank transaction being made will inherit the subaccount from the rule. If no subaccount is set on the rule, the transaction will inherit the subaccount from the entry type.
VAT zone The VAT zone that applies to the transaction.
VAT calculation mode

This field has a read-only value that always shows Gross.

Gross: The amount in the document detail line includes a tax or taxes.
VAT category A list of taxes associated with a product or a service when it is purchased or sold.
Branch The branch that applies to the transaction.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Bank transactions history (CA402000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/bank-transactions-history-ca402000 page You can use this window to view the history of imported bank transactions being processed in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Bank transactions history (CA402000) You can use this window to view the history of imported bank transactions being processed in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view the history of imported bank transactions being processed in the system. You can filter the list of transactions by cash account, date range, or statement number. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select the cash account and, if needed, the particular statement number and the date range for which you want to view the history.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account for which you want to view transactions.
From date The start date of the date range for which you want to display transactions.
To date The end date of the date range.
Statement no. The reference number of the imported bank statement for which you want to view transactions.
## The table In this table, you can view the bank transactions that match the criteria you have specified. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons [.](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/using-tables/about-the-table-toolbar/)
Column Description
Statement no. The reference number of the bank statement from which the transaction was imported. Click the link to view the details of the bank statement.
Ext. ref. no. The external reference number of the transaction.
Match type

The status of the bank transaction, which can be one of the following:

Matched
The bank transaction was matched to a payment that exists in the system.
Matched to invoice
The bank transaction was matched to an invoice or, a payment was automatically created and applied to the matching invoice.
Created
A new document was created to match the bank transaction.
Hidden
A user hid the bank transaction by using the Hide button in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Trans. date The date of the bank transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the bank transaction.
Receipt The amount of the receipt.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Invoice no. The number of the invoice to which the bank transaction was applied.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the transaction.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Entry type ID The identifier of the entry type that was used to create a document to match the bank transaction.
Applied rule The identifier of the rule that was applied to the bank transaction. You can view the list of available rules in the Bank transaction rules (CA204500) window.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Type The type of the document.
Reference no. The reference number of the matched document. Click the link to view document details.
Customer/supplier no. The business account (customer or supplier) referred to in the selected document.
Customer/supplier name The name of the business account (customer or supplier).
Payee name The name of the person/company to which the payment has been made.
Payment method The method used in payment of the transaction.
Trans. ID The transaction ID of the transaction.
Location The payment location of the transaction.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.

Related pages

Windows

 Cash accounts (CA202000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000 page You can use this window to create a new cash account and to view the details of an existing cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash accounts (CA202000) You can use this window to create a new cash account and to view the details of an existing cash account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can associate the cash account with the payment methods and entry types to be used with this cash account. For more information, see: [Configure cash accounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/configure-cash-accounts-overview/) ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the Change ID menu command, which gives you the ability to change the ID of the currently selected cash account.

When you invoke this menu command, the Specify new ID dialogue box opens, where you specify the new cash account identifier in the Cash account field and click OK.
## The top part You use the elements of this area to provide general settings for a new cash account or view and edit the settings of an existing cash account. ### The General information section
Element Description
Cash account

The cash account identifier.

To create a new cash account, type its code in accordance with the Segment keys (CS202000) window.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is active.
Account The account on the chart of accounts to which this cash account is linked to trace transactions in the General ledger. You can select an account of the needed type from the list of accounts available on the chart of accounts.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used with the account on the chart of accounts to which this cash account is linked.
Branch

The branch to which this cash account belongs.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency

The currency used for the selected account.

The field is filled automatically by the system as follows:

  • If the Multi-currency accounting is disabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the system uses the base currency.
  • If the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled, the system uses the currency of the account on the chart of accounts to which the cash account is linked.
Currency rate type The currency rate type to be used for the cash account. If the field is empty, the system will use a value specified in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.
IBAN The IBAN number of the bank account that is associated with this cash account.
BIC The BIC number of the bank account that is associated with this cash account.
### The Settings section
Element Description
Clearing account The clearing account to be used for the cash account.
Restrict visibility with branch

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this cash account is visible only to a user signed in to the branch that is associated with this cash account.

Note

that if visibility of the account is restricted, the documents connected to this account will not be payable in the Process payments (AP50301S) window.

This field is available only if the Inter-branch transactions check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Payment message length The length of the payment message that is associated with this cash account.
Bank ID

The supplier number of the bank associated with this cash account.

Note: In Visma Net, banks are defined as suppliers.
Upload files manually

Click this to upload files manually.

When you select this account in the Import incoming payments (AR305500), Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S) and the Import bank transactions (CA306500) windows, the Upload file button will be active.
### The Settings for reconciliation section
Element Description
Requires reconciliation A check box that indicates (if selected) that reconciliations are required for this cash account.
Reconciliation number series The number series to be used to generate reference numbers for reconciliations performed for the cash account.
Match bank transactions to batch payments A check box that indicates (if selected) that during the processing of the imported bank transactions, the system should search for a match among supplier ledger
### The Settings for AutoPay integration section
Element Description
Default action bank statements

For AutoPay inbox (CA50400S), you can choose an action for import of bank statements. You can set the default action here.

Import from AutoPay
the transactions are imported.
Import from AutoPay and match
the transactions are imported and matched when a match is found.
Import from AutoPay and process
the transactions are imported and the payments are processed when a match is found.
Exclude from AutoPay
the transactions are not imported.
Default action incoming payments

For AutoPay inbox (CA50400S), you can choose an action for import of incoming payments. You can set the default action here.

Import from AutoPay
the transactions are imported.
Import from AutoPay and match
the transactions are imported and matched when a match is found.
Import from AutoPay and process
the transactions are imported and the payments are processed when a match is found.
Exclude from AutoPay
the transactions are not imported.
Note

If you have selected the check box Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer and choose the action Import from AutoPay, the system will not create a customer payment and match the invoices that are paid. These must be matched manually. Use the column Invoice list under Process incoming payments to get information about which invoices that are paid. If you have selected the check box Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer and choose the actions Import from AutoPay and match or Import from AutoPay and process, the system will create a customer payment and match the invoices that are paid for that customer.
Process incoming payment transaction date

The date from the AutoPay that will be the transaction date for the imported transactions.

In the AutoPay file there are two dates:

  • Booking date (default)
  • Value date

Here you can choose which date should be the transaction date, determining the general ledger period.
Manual file format To import bank transactions manually, you have to select a manual file format here.
## The Payment methods tab This tab contains the list of payment methods defined for this cash account; see the following table for descriptions of the columns of the tab. This cash account can be the default account for use with any number of payment methods in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces, as defined in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. For each payment method used with this account, you can define how the payment reference numbers will be generated in Supplier ledger and Customer ledger. If the cash account is associated with a payment method that requires specific details for the account, the **Remittance settings** tab appears.
Column Description
Payment method The payment method associated with this cash account.
Use for suppliers A check box that you select to indicate that this method can be used in the Supplier ledger workspace.
Default account A check box that you select to indicate that this is the default payment method for use in Supplier ledger for this branch.
Suggest next supplier ledger no

A check box that means (if selected) that the system automatically generates the next number (as the last number incremented by 1) in the Payment ref. field in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window when a user creates a new payment of this payment method using this cash account.

If this option is not selected, the user can enter the next reference number manually; the system will not allow the user to save the payment if the entered reference number has been used before.
Last reference number suppliers The most recently used reference number for the payment of the method when the method is used for this cash account in this branch. Initially, this number incremented by 1 will be used for the first payment made by this method from this cash account in this branch if the Suggest next supplier ledger number check box is selected.
Last reference number batches The most recently used reference number for batch payments.
Use for customers A check box that indicates (if selected) that this method is used in Customer ledger.
Default A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is the default payment method in Customer ledger for this branch.
Default for refund A check box that indicates (if selected) that this payment method is used as the default one for returns made for this cash account in this branch.
Suggest next customer ledger no.

A check box that means (if selected) that the system automatically assigns the next number (as the last number incremented by 1) in the Payment ref. field in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window when a user enters a new payment of this payment method using this cash account.

If this option is not selected,you can enter the next reference number manually; the system will not allow the user to save the payment if the entered reference number has been used before.
Last reference number customers The most recently used reference number for the payment made by this method for this cash account when the method is used in this branch. Initially, this number incremented by 1 will be used for the first payment associated with this cash account if the Suggest next customer ledger no check box is selected.
## The Clearing accounts tab This tab, which is used for only bank cash accounts, provides information about the clearing accounts used to accumulate customer payments and cash before they are actually deposited to the bank account.
Column Description
Clearing account The cash account used to record customer payments that will later be deposited to the bank.
Payment method

The payment method of the deposited payment to which this charge rate should be applied.

If the field is empty, the charge rate is applied to deposited payments, regardless of their payment method.
Charges type The entry type of bank charges that apply to the deposit.
Charge rate The rate of the specified charges (expressed as a percent of the deposit total).
## The Entry types tab This tab contains a table showing the valid entry types for this cash account.
Column Description
Entry type ID The entry type, selected by its identifier.
Disb./receipt The basic type of cash transaction designated by this entry type: Receipt or Disbursement.
Workspace

The way the entry type is used in the system.

For entry types used as charges for outgoing and incoming payments, select CA.
Default offset account branch

The branch to which the default offset account belongs.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default offset account The account that is used by default as the offset account for this entry type.
Default offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Reclassification account

The cash account that is used to temporary hold payments that came to the bank account but cannot be entered as valid payments because the customer or supplier is unknown.

The parameter is used together with the Use for payments reclassification check box.
Business account The supplier account, if the entry type is used to record transactions that involve a particular supplier, or the customer account, if the entry type is used to record transactions that involve a particular customer.
Entry type description A detailed description of the entry type that is used as a transaction description by default.
Use for payments reclassification A check box that you select if this entry type is used to record unknown payments that need to be reclassified later.
Reclassification account override The account that should be used instead of the reclassification account specified as the default one in the Entry types (CA203000) window.
Override offset account branch

The branch to which the overriding offset account belongs.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Offset account branch override

The account that should be used as the offset account for this entry type with this cash account instead of the default offset account specified in the Entry types (CA203000) window.

We recommend that for the Disbursement type of transaction, you specify an expense account. For the Receipt type of transaction, specify an asset account.
Offset subaccount override The subaccount for this entry type to be used with this cash account instead of the default offset subaccount specified in the Entry types (CA203000) window.
VAT zone The VAT zone to be used by default with this entry type.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode to be used by default with this entry type: Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes a tax or taxes.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include taxes.
## The Remittance settings tab By using this tab, you can specify or view the account remittance information if required by payment methods linked with this account. This tab appears if at least one of the linked payment methods has the **Require remittance information for cash account** check box selected in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. The **Remittance details** table contains the remittance details of the cash account that can be used for the payment method. ### The Payment method section
Column Description
Payment method

A payment method that is linked to the cash account and has the Require remittance information for cash account check box selected in the of the Payment methods (CA204000) window.

Select a payment method to update remittance information for it.
### The Remittance details section
Column Description
Description The element name for the remittance information.
Value The value of the element for the remittance information.
ID The system-generated identifier of the element.
Payment method The payment method linked with the Remittance information.
## The Signature tab
Element Description
Name Enter a name for the signature.
Signature

The file name of the selected image to be uploaded.

The file name only appears after you have browsed for the file.
Browse Select a cash account in the Cash account field to activate this button. By clicking this button, the Open pop up window appears. Here you browse for the image to upload, select the image file and then click the Open button.
Upload By clicking this button you upload the image to the system.
Drag and drop the image here to upload it Drag and drop your image.

Related pages

Tasks

 Cash account details (CA303000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000 page By using this window, you can view all activity on any cash account during the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash account details (CA303000) By using this window, you can view all activity on any cash account during the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view all activity on any cash account during the date range you specify. You can view summary information or the complete list of cash-related transactions performed on the account during this period. Also, you can quickly add a new cash transaction and release or clear selected cash transactions. The options that allow the release of Customer ledger and Supplier ledger cash transactions from the Cash management workspace are located in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. Cash transactions originating in the General ledger workspace appear in the list; they can be cleared but not released from the Cash management workspace. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the selected transactions or those for which you have selected the unlabelled check box in the table.
Clear

Marks selected transactions in the table as cleared.

If you click this button, in the table below, the Cleared check box will be selected and the Clear date field will be filled with the current date. You can clear a transaction regardless of its status.

The clearing step is optional in cash transaction processing, and whether you use it depends on your company policy.
## The top part In this area, you can make selections that affect which transactions will be shown below.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account for which activity is displayed.
Start date

The start date of the date range for which you want to view information.

By default, the start date is the first date of the current month, week, or financial period, depending on the option specified as the Default date range in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window. You can select any date that is earlier than the End date.
End date

The end date of the date range for Default date range which you want to view information.

By default, it’s the last date of the current week, month, or financial period, also depending in the in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
Show summary

A check box that you select if you want the system to group transactions in the list as receipts and disbursements as well as by day.

If it is not selected, you will see the detailed view of the transactions listed.
Include unreleased A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unreleased transactions will also be displayed on the list.
Currency The currency of the selected cash account.
### The All transactions / Cleared only sections This part displays the totals on cash transactions that match the specified selection criteria. The elements are organised in two columns: All transactions : contains the values for all listed transactions. Cleared only : contains the values for cleared transactions only.
Element Description
Beginning balance The cash account balance at the start of the specified period for the applicable transactions.
Total debit The total amount of receipts calculated for the applicable transactions.
Total credit The total amount of disbursements calculated for the applicable transactions.
Ending balance The cash account balance at the end of the specified period for the applicable transactions.
## The table This table contains the list of cash transactions that meet the specified criteria. They are displayed in the summary or detailed view, depending on whether you have selected the **Show summary** option in the top part.
Button Description
Create transaction

Opens the Quick transaction dialog box. Here you can create a supplier ledger, customer ledger, or cash management transaction, depending on the selected entry type.

The transaction gets its ID in accordance with the number series used in the appropriate workspace for documents.
### The Quick transaction dialog box This dialog box opens when you click one of the following: Add expense : in the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window Create adjustment : in the [Reconciliation statements](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) window Create transaction : in the Cash account details (CA303000) window By using the dialog box, you can quickly add cash transactions of any entry type. Note: In the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window, you can add cash transactions with only an entry type that has **Workspace** set to **CA** .
Element Description
Cash account The cash account to be updated by this transaction.
Entry type The user-defined type of cash transaction.
Doc. date The date of the transaction.
Period The financial period to which the transaction is posted.
Currency A read-only column that shows the currency of the cash account.
View base / View currency

For the documents with amounts in foreign currency, the Currency toggle button switches the currency of the amounts between the base currency and the selected foreign currency.

The label on the Currency toggle button depends on the currently selected currency of the amount:

View Base
The amount is displayed in the foreign currency; click the button to view the amount in the base currency.
View Currency
The amount is displayed in the base currency; click the button to view the amount in the foreign currency.

The Currency toggle button does not affect the documents with amounts in the base currency only.
Document ref. The reference number of the corresponding external document.
Amount The amount of the transaction in the specified currency.
Description

A detailed description of the transaction.

The field is filled by default with the description of the selected entry type.
Status The status of the transaction.
Cleared A check box that you select to indicate that this transaction has been cleared.
Offset account

The general ledger account that is used by default as the offset account for transactions.

The field is visible if the Entry type ID is set to Cash management on the Create payment tab in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Offset subaccount

The offset subaccount used with the account selected.

The field is visible if the Entry type ID is set to Cash management on the Create payment tab in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Save (button) Creates a transaction with the specified details and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Clears the dialog box elements and closes it without saving the transaction.
### The table columns (summary view) In the summary view (available when the **Show summary** check box is selected), the transactions in the list are grouped by the day (of the specified period) and by the basic transaction types: receipt and disbursement.
Column Description
Doc. date The document date.
Day of week The day of the week that corresponds to the date.
Receipt The total amount of receipts entered for the specified date.
Disbursement The total amount of disbursements entered for the specified date.
Ending balance The cash account balance at the end of the day.
### The table columns (detailed view) In the detailed view (available when the **Show summary** check box is deselected), you see detailed information about the transactions in the list.
Column Description
Doc. date The date of a transaction or a document.
Post period The posting period of the transaction.
Workspace The workspace where the transaction was entered.
Orig. doc. number The identifier of the document. Click the link to navigate to the appropriate window so you can view the details of the transaction.
Document ref. The reference to an external document, if one exists.
Trans. type

The cash-related document type, which can be any of the following:

From the Supplier ledger workspace
Supplier refunds, prepayments, and checks
From the Customer ledger workspace
Payments and memos
From the Cash management workspace
Cash adjustments, transfers, and transfer expenses
Batch no.

The reference number of the batch (generated for the transaction).

Click the link to navigate to the Journal transactions (GL301000) ../../accounting/gl301000-ref.html window so you can view batch details.
Status The status of the document. The status depends on the processing workflow defined for the particular document ( Trans. type ).
Receipt The document amount if it is of the Receipt type.
Disbursement The document amount if it is of the Disbursement type.
Ending balance The cash account balance, as updated by this transaction.
Deposit no. The number of the deposit that includes this transaction.
Description A detailed description of the transaction.
Customer/Supplier no. The supplier or customer associated with the document if it is a supplier ledger or customer ledger document.
Account name The name of the customer or supplier.
Day of week The day of the week when the transaction was created.
Clear date The date of the clearing.
Cleared

Marks selected transactions in the table as cleared.

If you click this button, the Cleared check box will be selected and the Clear date box will be filled with the current date.

You can clear a transaction regardless of its status. The clearing step is optional in cash transaction processing, and whether you use it depends on your company policy.
Reconciled A check box that you select to indicate that this transaction has been reconciled.
Reconciled number The identification number of the reconciliation statement.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Cash flow forecast (CA401000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-flow-forecast-ca401000 page You can use this window to view the 30-day cash flow forecasts for all existing cash accounts or for only the cash account you have selected. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash flow forecast (CA401000) You can use this window to view the 30-day cash flow forecasts for all existing cash accounts or for only the cash account you have selected. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View as a report Opens the Cash flow forecast (CA658000) report, which is generated for the selected data.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select a cash account and a start date for the cash flow forecast. Also, you can select whether to include unreleased, unapplied, and scheduled documents. You can select whether to view the resulting forecast with all the available details or only the summary information.
Element Description
Start date The start date for the 30-day forecast.
Cash account The cash account for which you want to view the cash flow forecast.
Include supplier and customer documents without cash account

A check box that you select to include in the forecast calculation the documents with no cash account specified.

The system attempts to assign a cash account to each such document based on supplier or customer default settings, and for the specified cash account, the system shows the document only if the assigned default account matches the selected account.

If no account was assigned, the document is shown on the selected cash account. If you have selected no cash account, specify the Default cash account to include all the documents with no cash account specified.
Default cash account The cash account for which you want to view the forecast.
Convert to currency The currency to which you want to convert the forecast.
Convert currency rate type The exchange rate to be used for conversion.
Include unreleased documents A check box that you select to include unreleased documents in the forecast calculation.
Include unapplied payments A check box that you select to include unapplied payments in the forecast calculation.
Include scheduled documents A check box that you select to include the recurring documents that should be generated during the 30-day period of the forecast.
Show summary only A check box that you select to view only the beginning and ending balances for the 30-day period and the 30-day totals, where applicable.
## The table In this table, you can view the details of the forecast. There are three types of rows for each of the included cash accounts: + A row of the **Cash on hand** type that shows the beginning and ending balances of the cash account and the balances of this account on each of the 30 days + A row of the **Cash paid out** type that shows the total amount to be paid out to a specific supplier (or customer) from the cash account or from all cash accounts on each day of the 30-day period + A row of the **Cash receipts** type that shows the total amount to be collected as customer payments to the cash account on each day of the 30-day period
Column Description
Type

The type of cash forecast detail shown in the row.

Select one of the following options:

Cash on hand
For the start date, shows the beginning balance of a specific cash account, and for other days of the 30-day forecast, shows the anticipated balance of the account.
Cash paid out
Shows the total amount to be paid out for the cash account to a specific supplier on each day of the 30-day period.
Cash receipts
Shows the total amount to be received to the cash account from a specific customer as payments on each day of the 30-day period.
Cash paid not applied
Shows the total paid amount which is not applied to any document.
Unapplied receipts
Shows the total receipt amount which is not applied to any document.
Cash account The cash account for which the forecast details are calculated.
Description The user-provided description of the cash account.
Customer/supplier The business account of the customer or supplier associated with the cash forecast detail.
Account name The name of the customer or supplier associated with the detail.
Forecast transactions The amount of the anticipated cash transactions that were manually entered for the cash account.
Summary amount The summary amount. The type of amount shown depends on the row type.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Cash management preferences (CA101000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000 page You use this window to specify the settings for the Cash management workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash management preferences (CA101000) You use this window to specify the settings for the Cash management workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to specify the settings for the Cash management workspace. ## The General information tab ### The Number series section
Element Description
Batch number series The number series to be used for the IDs of batches originating in the Cash management workspace.
Transactions number series The number series to be used for the IDs of cash adjustments or direct cash transactions.
Transfer number series The number series to be used for the IDs of transfers.
Payment batch number series The number series to be used for the IDs of batches of payments.
Bank statement number series The number series to be used for the IDs of bank statements.
Payments import number series The number series used during import of payment transactions.
### The Reconciliation settings section
Element Description
Unrecognised receipts type

The entry type (configured for processing unrecognised payments and for payment reclassification) to be used by default in the Reclassify payments (CA506500) window.

For more information on processing unrecognised cash transactions, see About the reclassification of unknown payments
Cash-in-transit account The special multi-currency asset account used (when necessary) as an intermediate account for currency conversions performed during funds transfers.
Cash -in-transit subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Reopen bank transactions when voiding payment

The options are implemented for the Customer payments (AR302000), Supplier payments (AP302000), and Transactions (CA304000) windows.

In the drop-down field you can select between the following options:

Disabled
Nothing is changed when reversing a cash transaction, it works as before.
Copy original or create new bank transaction
When reversing a cash transaction, you will be redirected to the Process bank transactions (CA306000), the Process incoming payments (AR305000), or the Transactions (CA304000) window, depending on where the original line was created, and the original cash transaction is reversed. A new row is created in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window with date, amount and description.
Unmatch original or create new bank transaction
When reversing a cash transaction, you will be redirected to the Process bank transactions (CA306000), Process incoming payments (AR305000) or Transactions (CA304000) window, depending on where the original line was created, and the original cash transaction is reversed. A new row is created in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or Process incoming payments (AR305000) window with date, amount, and description, if the transaction was created manually. Or unmatched, if the cash transaction was created from the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window.
Copy only original bank transaction
You will be redirected to the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or Process incoming payments (AR305000), depending on where the original line was created, and the original cash transaction is reversed. A new row is created in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or Process incoming payments (AR305000) with date, amount and description. If the payment is created manually, it will not create a new row in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or Process incoming payments (AR305000) window.
Unmatch only original bank transaction
You will be redirected to the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or Process incoming payments (AR305000) window, depending on where the original line was created, the original cash transaction is reversed and the original bank transaction is unmatched. If the payment is created manually, it will not create a new row in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) or Process incoming payments (AR305000).

When a new row is created, the new line will get a prefix Re-opened or Unmatched + Ref. no + Original description, depending on the setting.

Now, you can match this to another customer, supplier, or cash transaction.

Note! We recommend you to use the Copy original or create new bank transaction option, else you will lose the connection to the voided payment in the Import bank transactions (CA306500) and Import incoming payments (AR305500) windows.

If a payment is created by the Direct debit function, it will not create any new, or unmatch existing bank transaction at all.
Skip voided transactions

A check box that you select to make the system skip voided transactions during the reconciliation process if both the original and the voided transactions are registered in the same financial period.

For more information, see: About the reconciliation process
Skip reconciled transactions A check box that you select to make the system skip reconciled transactions during the reconciliation process if both the original and the reconciled transactions are registered in the same financial period.
### The Receipts to add to available balances section The options in this section control how the system uses receipts when calculating the available balances of cash accounts.
Element Description
Unreleased uncleared A check box that you select to include unreleased and uncleared receipts in calculations.
Unreleased cleared A check box that you select to include unreleased and cleared receipts in calculations.
Released - uncleared A check box that you select to include released and uncleared receipts in calculations.
### The Disbursements to deduct from available balances section The options in this section control how the system uses disbursements when it calculates the available balances of the cash accounts.
Element Description
Unreleased uncleared A check box that you select to include unreleased and uncleared disbursements in calculations.
Unreleased cleared A check box that you select to include unreleased and cleared disbursements in calculations.
Released - uncleared A check box that you select to include released and uncleared disbursements in calculations.
### The Default cash account settings section
Element Description
Default payment method for process payments

By default, this field is empty.

The Payment method field is empty in windows in the Cash management, Supplier ledger, and Customer ledger, and you must manually select which cash account you want to view or use.

If you select a payment method in this field, this will be the default payment method for payments and bank transactions.
Default cash account

By default, this field is empty.

If you do not select a default cash account, the Cash account field in other windows will be empty. This means all your cash accounts will be shown in the table of that window, unless you manually select a default account.

If you select a cash account in this field, this will be the default cash account for the incoming payments and bank transactions.

The Cash account field is used in the following windows:
Override payment method for bank processing By using this option, you override the payment method when creating payments in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
### The Posting and release settings section
Element Description
Do not automatically release supplier payments If you select this check box, you indicate that payments from suppliers should not be automatically released.
Automatically post to general ledger on release If you select this check box, you indicate that cash transactions are automatically posted to the general ledger on release.
### The Update of incoming payments section
Element Description
Release supplier ledger documents from cash management If you select this check box, you indicate that supplier documents can be released from the Cash management workspace. If this option is not selected, supplier documents can be released only from the Supplier ledger workspace.
Release customer ledger documents from cash management If you select this check box, you indicate that customer documents can be released from the Cash management workspace. If this option is not selected, customer documents can be released only from the Customer ledger workspace.
### The Data entry section
Element Description
Hold transactions on entry A check box that indicates (if selected) that newly entered transactions will by default get the On hold status on entry.
Validate control totals on entry A check box that (if selected) adds the Control total field to the top part of the Transactions (CA304000) window, so you can enter the transaction amount manually. This amount will be validated when you enter transactions.
Validate VAT totals on entry A check box that (if selected) adds the VAT amount field to the top part of the Transactions (CA304000) window, so you can enter the VAT amount manually in the transaction.
Require document ref. no on entry A check box that indicates (if selected) that you must fill in the Document ref. field for new cash transactions and deposits.
Default date range The range (starting with the current business date) to be used by default on Cash management reports: Day, Week, Month, or Financial period.
### The Cash transaction approval settings section This section is available only if the **Approval workflow** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Require approval A check box that indicates (if selected) that cash transactions should be approved before they can be released.
Pending approval notification The notification template that will be used for email notifications. You can create new templates or edit existing ones by using the Notification templates (SM204003) window.
## The Bank statement settings tab The system uses the settings on this tab as the default settings in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window for finding relevant cash transactions for manual matching or auto-matching. Some settings apply to the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window as well. ### The Disbursement matching section The system uses these settings as the default settings for the manual matching of transactions.
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of a cash transaction (disbursement) and the selected transaction on the bank statement.
Days after bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a disbursement.
Allow matching to credit note A check box that (if selected) indicates that the system will automatically match receipt bank transactions to credit notes by the reference number prior to matching them to purchase invoices. If the check box is cleared (the default value), receipt bank transactions are always matched to purchase invoices.
### The Receipt matching section Here you specify the default settings for manual matching of transactions.
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of a cash transaction (receipt) and the selected transaction on the bank statement.
Days after bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.
### The Weights for relevance calculation section The system uses these settings as the default settings in relevance calculation for auto-matching of transactions and for validation of manual matching.
Element Description
Ref. no. weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the reference numbers of the bank transaction and the cash transaction.
Consider empty ref. no. as matching A check box that (if selected) specifies that a bank transaction with an empty reference number is automatically matched to a cash transaction with an empty reference number. If this check box is cleared (the default value), the transactions with empty reference numbers are not considered as matching.
Doc. date weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the dates of the bank transaction and the cash transaction.
Doc. payee weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the names of the customer (or supplier) on the bank transaction and the cash transaction.
### The Date range for relevance calculation section The system uses these settings as the default settings in relevance calculation for auto-matching of transactions and for validating manual matching.
Element Description
Average delay payment clearing The average number of days for a payment to be cleared with the bank.
Estimated deviation (days) The number of days before and after the average delay date during which 50% of payments are generally cleared.
### The Import settings section
Element Description
Ignore currency check on bank statement import

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system ignores the currency check when you import bank statements.

Select the check box, if you want to import statements that use a currency ID or code that does not match the currency ID associated with the cash account for which you perform import.
Allow empty FITID A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system ignores the empty FITID value (the value, which is uploaded to the Ext. trans. ID column in the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window when you import the bank statement file.
Import bank statement to single cash account

A check box that indicates (if selected) that importing a bank statement from a file should be performed to only a specific cash account.

You can import the data only after you have selected the cash account in the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window.
Allow matching to unreleased batch payments

A check box that indicates (if selected) that unreleased batch payments are available for matching to bank transactions in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.

When you initiate processing of the matched transactions (by clicking Process on the mentioned above window), the system releases matched batches.

For more information, see: Batch payment matching
Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer

A check box that (if selected) handles the splitting of a batch payment from several customers into payments per customer.

When selected, the system will create the payment with all multiple invoices applied before processing the payment (clicking the Process button). When clicking the Process button, the application will be done.

Note

If the check box is not selected, invoices must be applied manually and splitting of payment, creation of payment and application of invoices will only take place when clicking the Process button.
Statement import service

The service to be used for importing bank statements if the Import bank statements to single cash account check box is cleared.

The available option is PX.Objects.CA.OFXStatementReader.

The service supports importing bank statements in the following formats: OFX (Open Financial Exchange), QBO (QuickBooks Online), and QFX (Quicken File eXchange).
### The Process bank transactions section
Element Description
Match against bank accounts after invoice matching If you select this check box, you enable customer/supplier recognition for bank transaction by the bank account number. For example, when you click the Match automatically button in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Match only documents with the same bank account number If you select this check box, you enable customer and supplier recognition for bank transaction by the same bank account number. For example, when you the Match automatically button in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Update bank account on customer/supplier from Process bank transactions When this check box is selected and the payment line contains a bank account from the bank and you select a customer/supplier, a lookup against the default IBAN/BBAN will be done in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window. If the customer’s/supplier’s bank account is empty or different, the button Update bank account will appear in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window. Clicking the button will update the customer/supplier with the account from the bank.
Do not create supplier prepayments When you select this check box, auto-matching will not create supplier prepayments automatically. The purpose is to avoid processing a bank transaction that is not fully applied since that would lead to an inbalance between bank and account payable. You will get the warning Remaining balance available on the supplier transactions, and the Ready to process check box will not be checked in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied When you select this check box, no payment will be automatically created if bank payment amount is higher than invoice amount. The purpose is to avoid processing a bank transaction that is not fully applied since that would lead to an inbalance between bank and account receivable/general ledger. You will get the warning Remaining balance available if bank payment is higher than invoice amount or invoice is closed. In the Process bank transactions (CA306000) and Process incoming payments (AR305000) windows, the Ready to process check box will not be checked before manual action is taken.
Auto load documents

Select how or if documents will be automatically loaded in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window for matching:

  • First exact doc. amount, then all documents: First loads the documents with the exact document amount for the customer/supplier with credit notes first, then all other invoices until the payment amount is used. This is the default.
  • Documents with exact amount: The system searches the documents that have the exact matching amount with the transactions and loads only them.
  • Disabled: Automatic loading is not in use.
### The Lookup button for Process bank transactions for: section
Element Description
Suppliers Select the window that will be opened for supplier document details.
Customers Select the window that will be opened for customer document details.
Cash management Select the window that will be opened for cash account details.
## The Incoming payments settings tab The system uses the settings on this tab as the default settings in the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window for finding relevant cash transactions for manual matching or auto-matching. ### The Disbursement matching section The system uses these settings as the default settings for the manual matching of transactions.
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of a cash transaction (disbursement) and the selected transaction on the bank statement.
Days after bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a disbursement.
Allow matching to credit note A check box that (if selected) indicates that the system will automatically match receipt bank transactions to credit notes by the reference number prior to matching them to purchase invoices. If the check box is cleared (the default value), the receipt bank transactions are always matched to the purchase invoices.
### The Receipt matching section Here you specify the default settings for manual matching of transactions.
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of a cash transaction (receipt) and the selected transaction on the bank statement.
Days after bank transaction date For the system to categorise a cash transaction as matching, the maximum number of days between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.
### The Weights for relevance calculation section The system uses these settings as the default settings in relevance calculation for auto-matching of transactions and for validation of manual matching.
Element Description
Ref. no. weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the reference numbers of the bank transaction and the cash transaction.
Consider empty ref. no. as matching

A check box that (if selected) specifies that a bank transaction with an empty reference number is automatically matched to a cash transaction with an empty reference number.

If this check box is cleared (the default value), the transactions with empty reference numbers are not considered as matching.
Doc. date weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the dates of the bank transaction and the cash transaction.
Doc. payee weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the names of the customer (or supplier) on the bank transaction and the cash transaction.
### The Date range for relevance calculation section The system uses these settings as the default settings in relevance calculation for auto-matching of transactions and for validating manual matching.
Element Description
Average delay payment clearing The average number of days for a payment to be cleared with the bank.
Estimated deviation (days) The number of days before and after the average delay date during which 50% of payments are generally cleared.
### The Import settings section
Element Description
Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer

A check box that (if selected) handles the splitting of a batch payment from several customers into payments per customer.

When selected, the system will create the payment with all multiple invoices applied before processing the payment (clicking the Process button). When clicking the Process button, the application will be done.

Note

If the check box is not selected, invoices must be applied manually and splitting of payment, creation of payment and application of invoices will only take place when clicking the Process button.
Split incoming payment files from AutoPay (inbox) into smaller files for faster processing

A check box that (if selected) splits the payment XML file from AutoPay into a set of smaller files for faster handling of automatic scheduling.

When selected, the system will split, import and display the XML file into separate files in the window AutoPay inbox (CA50400S). The File ID will be the same for each split file and each file will have a Split no displayed in a separate column numbered sequentially.

Example: A payment file with File ID 4021 and with 6000 payments will be split into 3 files with 2000 payments each. The files will have the same File ID and the Split no will show 1 to 3.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Cash transactions (basic) (CA30400S) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-transactions-basic-ca30400s page A simplified window layout with less tabs and fields, which makes it much faster and easier to enter your cash transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash transactions (basic) (CA30400S) A simplified window layout with less tabs and fields, which makes it much faster and easier to enter your cash transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Reverse Releases the selected transaction and creates a batch.
Reversing cash entries Redirects you to a report that shows the details of cash entries which are created by reversing a cash entry.
## The top part This area contains general information about the cash transaction.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique identifier assigned to the cash transaction in accordance with the number series.
Trans. date The date of the transaction.
Period The financial period to which the transaction should be posted.
Document ref. The external document reference number.
Description A detailed description of the transaction.
Cash account The cash account that is a source account for the transaction.
Currency The currency of the cash account.
Exchange rate

The amount corresponding to the Currency field, and the name of the field is only visible if you hover over the field.

By clicking the field, the Rate selection dialog box opens. See description below.
View base (button)

When you click View base the following happens:

  • In the Balance (original currency) column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency.
  • In the Currency column, the text will be displayed as your base currency.

Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Entry type

The user-defined transaction type.

Select the appropriate type from the list of entry types defined for the selected cash account.
Disb./receipt

The basic type of the transaction:

  • Receipt
  • Disbursement
Amount The amount of the transaction.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT.

The VAT taxable amount will be displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable tax in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total

The total amount of tax paid in the document.

If a used VAT has been applied to the document, the used VAT amount is not included in the VAT total amount. You can view the used VAT details on the VAT details tab of the current window.
### The Rate selection dialog box
Element Description
Currency rate type ID The currency rate type specified for the selected currency pair.
Effective date The date on which the currency rate in this row becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents View the currency conversion.

OK

(button)

 Closes the dialog box.
## The Transaction details tab This tab contains the list of transaction details in a tabular format.
Column Description
Branch The branch that created the transaction.
Item ID The ID of the non-stock item specified as the transaction subject.
Description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The quantity of the item.
UoM The unit of measure of the item.
Price The unit price for the item.
Amount The total amount for all units or items.
Offset account

The account to be updated by the transaction.

By default, it is an offset account defined with the entry type selected for the cash account, but you can change this account.
Account description A description of the account.
Offset cash account

The account to be updated by the transaction.

By default, it is an offset account defined with the entry type selected for the cash account, but you can change this account.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for the transaction.
Project

The project with which this transaction is associated, or the code indicating that this transaction is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) ) window.

This column appears only if the Projects workspace has been enabled in your system and integrated with the Cash management workspace.
Line no. The functionality is not available to the customers.
Project

The project with which the item is associated. Or, the non-project code, if the item is not intended for any project. The non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) ) window.

This column is available only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this transaction is associated.

This column is available only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Non-invoiceable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this transaction is non-invoiceable in the project.

This column is available only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT category A list of taxes associated with a product or a service when it is purchased or sold.
## The VAT details tab This tab contains a table showing the automatically calculated taxes for the transaction and their details.
Column Description
VAT ID The VAT that applies to the cash transaction.
VAT rate The rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount of the transaction.
VAT amount The VAT amount calculated for the transaction.
Deductible VAT rate

The percent of deduction that applies to the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expense amount

The percentage that is deducted from the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Pending VAT

A Pending VAT (sometimes called a suspended VAT) is applied to those documents whose VAT amounts should be recognised later than the document has been released.

Once a document to the pending VAT is released, the system records its VAT amount to an intermediate account (such as the Pending VAT payable account or the Pending VAT claimable subaccount, where the VAT amount is kept until you initiate the process of recognising the VAT).

Suspended VAT information is not added to the VAT report until the taxes are recognised.
Include in VAT exempt total

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this value-added VAT has a zero rate, and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.

The calculated amount will be displayed in the VAT exempt total field in the documents (such as invoices).

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Statistical VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the VAT on documents will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Reverse VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.

A reverse VAT is a type of VAT used in some countries of the European Union (EU).

When this type of VAT is applied to a company that supplies goods or services to other EU countries, the liability of the reporting VAT is reversed and goes to the customer rather than to the supplier.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
VAT type

The types of VAT:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Financial details tab This tab contains two sections, and a possible third, with the elements described below. After the transaction is released, the settings on this tab become read-only. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no.

The number of the batch generated to implement the cash transaction. It appears automatically after the transaction is released.

Click the number to view the batch details.
### The VAT settings section
Element Description
VAT zone The VAT zone that applies to the transaction.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document.

One of the following options can be selected:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

Related pages

Windows

 Close financial periods (CA506000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/close-financial-periods-ca506000 page You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Cash management workspace as a required stage of closing a period in the General ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (CA506000) You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Cash management workspace as a required stage of closing a period in the General ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Cash management workspace as a required stage of closing a period in the General ledger workspace. The financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it is closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Inventory, and Cash management workspaces. When you close a given financial period in the Cash management workspace, all preceding active periods will be closed as well if they have not already been closed. Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. In order to post to closed periods, you should select the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods Initiates the process of closing the financial periods you have selected (by using the check boxes in the unlabelled column).
Unreleased documents Opens the Unreleased cash management documents report so you can view and print the open documents for the selected financial period.
## The table The table contains the list of all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. Select the period or periods you want to close, and click **Close periods**. A period can be closed only if there are no documents with the **On hold**, **Balanced**, and **Released** statuses to be posted to this period.
Column Description
Period An ID of the financial period.
Description A description of the financial period.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is active.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Entry types (CA203000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000 page You use this window to define entry types, which are user-defined types of transactions originating in the Cash management, Supplier ledger, or Customer ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Entry types (CA203000) You use this window to define entry types, which are user-defined types of transactions originating in the Cash management, Supplier ledger, or Customer ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Entry types, which can be receipts or disbursements, provide more details about transactions. For example: You can set entry types for customer ledger payments, outstanding supplier ledger payments, service charges, and outstanding deposits. You can assign entry types to cash accounts by using the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Add an entry type to a charge](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/add-an-entry-type-to-a-charge/) + [Create an entry type for disbursements or receipts](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/create-an-entry-type-for-disbursements-or-receipts/) ## The top part
Column Description
Entry type ID The unique ID for the entry type. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Disb./receipt The type of a transaction this entry type is based on: Receipt (money in) or Disbursement (money out).
Entry type description The detailed description for the entry type. The description is used as default description of a transaction. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.
Workspace

The workspace, which defines whether the system creates a document that affects the balance of a customer or a supplier as a result of the transaction or whether balances of general ledger accounts affected only:

Cash management
The entry type is used for creating cash entry transactions (receipts and disbursements) in the Cash management workspace or recording bank service charges in the Cash management, Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces. Such transactions affect the balances of general ledger accounts only.
Supplier ledger
The entry type is used for creating transactions in the Cash management workspace that result in prepayments (if the transaction is a disbursement) or supplier refunds (if the transaction is a receipt) in the Supplier ledger workspace. Supplier ledger entry types are used only in the Cash management workspace.
Customer ledger
The entry type is used for creating transactions in the Cash management workspace that result in payments (if the transaction is a receipt) or customer refunds (if the transaction is a disbursement) in the Customer ledger workspace. Customer ledger entry types are used only in the Cash management workspace.

For the charges that a bank may apply to outgoing and incoming payments, select Cash management.
Business account

The supplier account ID, if the entry type is used to record transactions that affect balances of suppliers (Supplier ledger), or the customer account ID, if the entry type is used to record transactions that affect balances of customers (Customer ledger).

The value is used by default when you create a transaction on the fly.
Default offset account

The general ledger account that is used by default as the offset account for transactions of this entry type. If this entry type is based on the Disbursement type of transaction, specify an Expense account. If this type is based on the Receipt type of transaction, select an Asset account.

You need to specify default offset account for entry types that affect balances of general ledger accounts ( workspace set to Cash management ) only. You can override this account when you enter a transaction in the Cash management workspace.

Do not specify the offset account or subaccount if you use this entry type for recording unknown payments.
Default offset subaccount The subaccount to be used by default for transactions of this entry type.
Reclassification account

The cash account that is used to temporary hold payments that came to the bank account but cannot be entered as valid payments because the customer or supplier is unknown.

The parameter is used together with the Use for payments reclassification check box.
Use for payments reclassification A check box that indicates (if selected) that the entry type is used for recording unknown payments and involved in the payments reclassification process.
Deduct from payment

The check box that indicates (if selected) that the entry type is to be used as bank charges whose amounts are deducted from customer payments on the cash account (and on the bank statements). Clear this check box if the bank records charges as separate transactions on its bank statements.

For details on using entry types as bank charges, see: About the registration of finance charges.
## The table In this table, you can add the cash accounts that are valid with the overridden values.
Button Description
Add all cash accounts Click this to add all active cash accounts to the table.
Column Description
Cash account The number of the cash account connected with the entry type.
Description The description of the cash account
Reclassification account override The reclassification account override on the cash account.
Offset account override The offset account override suggested from the cash account.
Offset subaccount override The offset subaccount override suggested from the cash account.
VAT zone The VAT zone mode connected with the account.
VAT calculation mode The VAT calculation mode connected with the account.

Related pages

Tasks

 Funds transfers (CA301000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000 page You use this window to transfer funds from one cash account to another, with related service charges applied, and to view the details of the recorded funds transfers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Funds transfers (CA301000) You use this window to transfer funds from one cash account to another, with related service charges applied, and to view the details of the recorded funds transfers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Funds can be transferred between accounts denominated to different foreign currencies. The system performs currency conversion by using the base currency and the cash-in-transit account; no cross-rates are used. As a result of the transfer, the following transactions are generated: Transfer in : For the transfer of funds from the source account to the cash-in-transit account. Transfer out : For transfer of funds from the cash-in-transit account to the destination account. Expense entry : For additional charges associated with each transfer. If you enter related service charges on this window, they will be recorded as an **Expense entry**. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the selected transaction.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify all the parameters of a funds transfer, including source and destination accounts, currencies, and dates.
Element Description
Transfer number

The transfer number, as assigned by a numbering series.

The numbering series for transfers is defined in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
Status

The status of the transfer, which is one of the following options:

On hold
The transfer is a draft only; the actual transfer of goods has not been initiated.
Balanced
The transfer is balanced and can be released.
Released
The transfer has been released.
Hold A check box that, if selected, indicates that the transfer is on hold. You can clear the Hold check box only for balanced transfers.
Description A detailed description for the transfer transaction. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters may be used.
RGOL A read-only field that displays the difference between the amount in the base currency specified for the source account and the amount in the base currency resulting for the destination account, for cases when the source and destination currencies are different.
### The Source account section
Element Description
Account The account from which the funds are transferred.
Transfer date The date of the transaction.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that this transaction has been cleared.
Currency The currency of denomination for the source cash account.
Document ref. The reference number of the transfer in the bank.
Amount The amount of the transaction in the specified currency.
Batch number The identification number of the batch that updates the source and cash-in-transit accounts.
Clear date The date when the transaction was cleared in the process of reconciliation.
General ledger balance A read-only field displaying the balance of the source account recorded in the General ledger for the financial period that includes the transfer date.
Available balance A read-only field displaying the balance of the cash account calculated in accordance with the options selected in the Receipts to add to available balances and Disbursements to deduct from available balances sections in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
Base currency amount The amount of the transfer in the base currency. If the source account is denominated to a foreign currency, the default exchange rate associated with the account is used. You can specify another rate by using the currency controls.
### The Destination account section
Element Description
Account The account to which the funds are transferred.
Receipt date The date of the transfer receipt.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that this transaction is cleared.
Currency The currency of denomination for the destination account.
Document ref. The reference number of the transfer in the bank or other financial entity.
Amount The amount of the transaction in the currency of the destination account.
Batch number The identification number of the batch that creates related journal entries to update the cash-in-transit and destination accounts.
Clear date The date when the transaction was cleared in the process of reconciliation.
General ledger Balance The balance of the target account, as recorded in the General ledger.
Available balance The actual balance of the target account.
Base currency amount The amount of the transaction in the base currency. You can specify another exchange rate by using the currency controls.
## The table The table displays the list of cash adjustments that contain the transfer-related charges and expenses. To add an additional charge, click **Add expense**. You can edit the charges as cash transactions of the **Cash entry** type in the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window. Upon release of the adjustment, a separate batch will be created for each line added to the table.
Column Description
Cash account The cash account to be updated by this transaction.
Document ref. A reference to an external document related to the transfer, the charges, or both. By clicking this reference number, the document details window opens.
Doc. date The transaction date.
Description A detailed description of the charge or expense.
Entry type The entry type of this charge or expense.
Offset account The general ledger expense account that will be updated by this charge or expense.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Amount The amount of the charge or expense.
Currency The currency of the charge or expense.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that this transaction has been cleared.
### The Quick transaction dialog box This dialog box opens when you click one of the following: Add expense : in the Funds transfers (CA301000) window Create adjustment : in the [Reconciliation statements](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000/) (CA302000) window Create transaction : in the [Cash account details](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) (CA303000) window By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can quickly add cash transactions of any entry type. Note: In the Funds transfers window, you can add cash transactions with only an entry type that has **Module** set to **CA**.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account to be updated by this transaction.
Entry type The user-defined type of cash transaction.
Doc. date The date of the transaction.
Fin. period The financial period to which the transaction is posted.
Currency A read-only column that shows the currency of the cash account.
Document ref. The reference number of the corresponding external document.
Amount The amount of the transaction in the specified currency.
Description

A detailed description of the transaction.

The field is filled by default with the description of selected entry type.
Status The status of the transaction.
Cleared A check box that you select to indicate that this transaction has been cleared.
Offset account

The general ledger account that is used by default as the offset account for transactions.

The field is displayed if the entry type is set to Cash management.
Offset subaccount The offset subaccount used with the account selected.
Save (button) Creates a transaction with the specified details and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Clears the dialog box elements and closes it without saving the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Import bank transactions (CA306500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500 section By using this window, you can import bank statements or enter statement transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import bank transactions (CA306500) By using this window, you can import bank statements or enter statement transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can import bank statements or enter statement transactions. You can then manually edit transaction details if needed. If you have processed at least one transaction from the imported statement in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window, you cannot edit all transactions from this statement. You can clear processing for the transactions in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window to enable the editing of transaction details on this (Import bank transactions) window. You can restrict the uploading of bank statements for multiple cash accounts in a file by selecting the **Import bank statement to single cash account** check box on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. In this case, the user should specify the particular cash account for which the upload of bank transactions from the file would be performed. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You can use this area to select an imported statement for a particular cash account and view its data.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account specified on the bank statement for which you want to upload bank transactions.
Ref. no. The reference number of the imported bank statement, which the system generates automatically in accordance with the numbering series assigned to statements in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
Statement date The date of the bank statement specified in the file.
Start balance date The start date, as indicated in the bank statement file (if any).
End balance date The end date, as indicated in the bank statement file (if any).
Beginning balance The balance of the cash account at the start of the date range the bank statement spans, if specified in the file.
Ending balance The balance of the cash account at the end of the date range of the bank statement, if specified in the file.
Calculated balance The balance of the uploaded bank statement, which is calculated as the sum of its lines. Verify that the calculated balance for the statement is equal to the ending balance of the account displayed in the Ending balance field.
## The table This table contains the transactions imported from the bank statement. If you have an Excel file with a single statement, you can import the bank transactions for this particular statement directly to the table, by using the **Load records from file** standard button on the table toolbar. If you have an Excel file with multiple statements, you can import these statements by using a scenario based on the built-in data provider for Excel files. To create this scenario, use the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window.
Button Description
Unhide transaction Clears the Processed and Hidden check boxes for the selected transaction. The transaction becomes available for processing in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Unmatch

Does the following for the selected bank transaction: Clears the check boxes in the check_mark_icon and Processed columns, and removes the link to a matched document. The selected bank transaction becomes available for further processing in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.

Clears the following for the matched document: The Cleared check box and the Clear date field on the Financial details tab in the Customer payments (AR302000) window for the document.

If a document was created to match the transaction, this document should be handled (for instance, voided or matched) manually.
View matched document

Navigates to the respective window where you can view details of the matched document or batch for the selected transaction.

The button is available only for the matched transactions (for which a check box is selected in the check_mark_icon column).
Column Description
Processed A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) that either this bank transaction has been matched to a document in the system, or a document was created in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window to record the transaction in the system.
Hidden

A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) that this bank transaction has been hidden from the statement on the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.

To make the transaction available for further processing, click Unhide transaction.
Trans. ID The external identifier of the transaction.
Ext. ref. no. The external reference number of the transaction.
Trans. code The bank transaction codes are used to define which types of transactions are reported in the bank statement.
Trans. date The transaction date.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Receipt The amount of the receipt.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Applied rule The rule applied to clear a transaction in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Invoice no. The reference number of the document (invoice) generated to match a bank transaction in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the transaction in the archive.
Business account The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account identifier.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Entry type ID

The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.

This field is displayed if you in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window click Create and then select Cash management in the Module field.
Location

The location of the supplier or customer.

This field is displayed if you in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window click Create and then select Supplier ledger or Customer ledger in the Module field.
Additional info Additional information, in free text form, to complement the structured remittance information.
Mandate ID The ID number for the direct debit agreement with a customer and the customer’s bank.
Workspace The workspace the transaction was created in.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the transaction.
Rejection message If the import of the transaction is rejected, you can write a message connected with the rejection in this column.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment ref. no The reference number of the payment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Payment methods (CA204000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000 page You can use this window to define and view payment methods and their details. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment methods (CA204000) You can use this window to define and view payment methods and their details. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to define and view payment methods and their details. Payment methods are linked to cash accounts, and you can select one cash account in each branch as the default one for the payment method used in Supplier ledger and in Customer ledger. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to define or edit a payment method that uses a specific means of payment.
Element Description
Payment method ID The unique identifier of the payment method. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Active A check box that indicates whether the payment method is active in the system.
Means of payment

One of the system’s built-in payment templates. The following options are available:

  • Credit card (not yet implemented and not used)
  • Cash
  • Direct deposit (not yet implemented and not used)
Bank account type

The selection for setting the type of payment method, that will determine if the sender’s (the company sending the e-invoice) bank account should be collected from the Payment method details table on the Settings for Customer ledger tab.

If this field is empty, it will collect the bank accounts from the Payment settings tab in the Organisations (CS101500) window.

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

Factoring payment method
With this selection the fields under the sections Payment settings and Factoring settings on the Settings for Customer ledger tab are available.
Accounts from payment method
With this selection the fields under the Payment settings section on the Settings for Customer ledger tab are available.
Payment type code A list of supported Danish payment types is displayed, the value selected is used for the identification of payment type.
Description

A description of the payment method. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Use for suppliers A check box that indicates whether the payment method will be used in Supplier ledger. If you select this check box, the Settings for supplier ledger tab appears in this window.
Use for customers A check box that indicates whether this payment method will be used in Customer ledger. If you select this check box, the Settings for customer ledger tab appears in this window.
Require remittance information for cash account

A check box that indicates to the system whether the cash account requires remittance information for the payment method.

Note: When the Payment method ID and this check box are selected and linked to a cash account, the Remittance settings tab appears in the Cash accounts (CA202000) window.
## The Allowed cash accounts tab You use this tab to define and view the list of cash accounts linked to the payment method. The list may include regular cash accounts as well as clearing accounts. For a particular payment made by the payment method, if one of the allowed clearing accounts is selected, the payment can be included in a deposit intended for a bank account associated with the clearing account.
Column Description
Cash account The cash account linked to the payment method.
Description The description of the cash account.
Branch

The branch to which the cash account belongs.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Use for supplier A check box that indicates whether the payment method is used in the Supplier ledger workspace for this branch.
Default account A check box that indicates whether this is the default cash account for this method when it is used in Supplier ledger. If there are multiple branches, one default account can be defined per branch for this payment method.
Suggest next supplier no. A check box that means (if selected) that the system automatically generates the next number (as the last number incremented by 1) in the Payment ref. field in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window when a user creates a new payment of this payment method by using this cash account. If this option is not selected, the user can enter the next reference number manually; the system will not allow the user to save the payment if the entered reference number has been used before.
Last reference number suppliers

The number used for the last payment associated with this cash account in Supplier ledger.

Initially, this number incremented by 1 will be used for the first payment associated with this cash account if the Supplier ledger - Suggest next number check box is selected.
Last reference number batches

The number used for the last batch of payments generated for this method in Supplier ledger.

Initially, this number incremented by 1 will be used for the first batch generated for a payment made by this method in Supplier ledger. This value is used only for batch payments in Supplier ledger.
Use for customers A check box that indicates whether the cash account will be used with the selected payment method in the Customer ledger workspace for payments from customers.
Default A check box indicating whether this is the default cash account for this method when it is used in Customer ledger. If there are multiple branches, one default account can be defined per branch for this method.
Default for refund A check box that you select to use this cash account as the default one for returns made for this payment method in the branch associated with the payment method.
Suggest next customer ledger no.

A check box that, if selected, means that the system automatically assigns the next number (as the last number incremented by 1) in the Payment ref. field in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window when a user enters a new payment of this payment method using this cash account.

If this option is not selected, the user can enter the next reference number manually; the system will not allow the user to save the payment if the entered reference number has been used before.
Last reference number customers

The number used for the last payment associated with this cash account in Customer ledger.

Initially, this number incremented by 1 will be used for the first payment made by the method associated with this cash account if the Suggest next customer no. check box is selected.
## The Settings for Customer ledger tab For the payment method, you can select processing options in the upper area of this tab. The selected **Means of payment** template determines the specific elements that will hold the details of the method. The elements configured here will appear in the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window to allow the user to enter method-specific parameters for each customer that uses the payment method. ### The Common settings section
Element Description
Integrated processing

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method requires processing through a processing centre.

If this check box is selected for the method, the Processing centres tab appears.
Requires account number

A check box that indicates, if selected, that this payment method requires a card number or other unique identifier each time the method is used.

Such methods as cash or checks do not require any identifiers, while a credit card method requires card numbers as identifiers and a wire transfer method requires bank account numbers.
Void on clearing account

A check box that indicates, if selected, that a payment voided after the appropriate deposit (the one that contains the payment) has been released should be voided on the respective clearing account instead of on the bank account.

For more information about using the options, see: About the preparation of deposits
Has invoice information

A check box that indicates, if selected, that customer remittance information is required for this payment method.

If this check box is selected, the Invoicing information tab will appear in the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window.
Default void date to document date

A check box that indicates, if selected, that the date of document voiding is to be set to the origin document date by default. Otherwise, the date of document voiding is set to the current business date if the business date is later than the document date.

If the current business date or the date that you specify in the Application date field (that is, the date when the document is supposed to be voided) is earlier than the date of the origin document, then the system uses the origin document date as the date of document voiding.
Create batch payment (common for customer and supplier ledgers) A check box that indicates, if selected, that the system creates a batch payment from the selected payments.
### The Direct debit settings section
Element Description
Direct debit Select this check box if the payment method can be used for direct debit payments. This will activate the Execution days first/one-off and Execution days recurrent fields.
Business to business The direct debit is paid from one company to another.
Combine the first and the following direct debits Both FIRST and RCUR mandates will be created in the same payment batch.
Execution days first/one-off The number of execution days for a first or one-off payment.
Execution days recurrent The number of execution days for a recurrent payment.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
IBAN The bank’s IBAN number.
Bank account no. The main bank account number for the bank.
Bank account no. 2 The second bank account number for the bank.
Bank account no. 3 The third bank account number for the bank.
BIC (SWIFT) The BIC or SWIFT code of the bank.
### The Factoring settings section
Element Description
Factoring company name The name of the factoring company
Assignment note Assignment note used for factoring
Column Description
ID The system-generated identifier of the payment method element.
Banking detail type The structure of the bank account.
Description The name for the payment method element. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Required A check box you select if the user must specify a value for this payment method element.
Encrypted A check box that you select if the values of the element should be stored encrypted.
CVV code The credit card or the debit card’s security code (Card Verification Value).
Sort order The integer that defines the order of this element in the list of elements. The element (row) with the smallest number will appear at the top of the list.
Entry mask The ASCII string to be used as an input mask for the element.
Validation reg. exp. The regular expression to be used for element input validation.
## The Settings for Supplier ledger tab On this tab, for the payment method, you can select processing options based on the selected means of payment, define the elements, and set input validation masks, regular expressions, or both. These elements will appear in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window to hold supplier-specific details of the payment method. ### The Payment settings section The element in this group is used for the payment method to define whether specifying unique payment reference number for outgoing payments is required. The section is displayed if the **Not required** option is selected in the **Additional processing** section.
Element Description
Require unique payment ref. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unique payment reference number is required for each payment document created with this payment method.
### The Additional processing section
Element Description
Print payments

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this method involves printing payments.

The system requires and validates the uniqueness of each payment reference number entered (manually or automatically) for printed documents.
Create batch payment (common for customer and supplier ledgers)

An option that indicates (if selected) that this method involves creating batch payments.

The system requires and validates the uniqueness of each batch reference number.
Not required

An option that, if selected, indicates that payment documents created with this payment method does not require additional processing.

With this option selected, you can additionally specify whether the system must require and validate the uniqueness of each payment reference number, by selecting or clearing the Require unique payment ref. check box in the Payment settings section.
### The Export settings section The element in this group is used for the payment method if it involves creating batch payments to multiple suppliers. The section is displayed if the **Create batch payments** option is selected in the **Additional processing** section.
Element Description
Export scenario Select this check box if the scenario can be used for foreign currency payments.
Upload payment files manually (the Netherlands only) Select this check box to upload payment files manually.
Express payment Select this check box if the payment is an express payment.
### The Payment method details table
Column Description
ID The identifier of the payment method element.
Banking detail type The banking detail for the payment method.
Description The user-defined name for the payment method element. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Required A check box that you select to indicate that a value must be specified for this payment method element.
Sort order The integer that defines the order of this payment method element in the list of elements. The element (row) with the smallest number will appear at the top of the list.
Entry mask The ASCII string to be used as an input mask for the payment method element.
Validation reg. exp. The regular expression to be used for element input validation.
## The Remittance settings tab You use this tab to configure the elements that hold remittance information if it is required by this payment method for the cash accounts involved. The tab appears if the **Require remittance information for the cash account** check box is selected in the top area. If the elements for remittance information are configured on the tab, remittance information will be required for the cash accounts linked to the method.
Column Description
ID The system-generated identifier of the element.
Banking detail type The banking detail for the payment method.
Description The user-defined name for the element. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Required A check box that you select if the user must specify a value for this payment method element.
Encrypted A check box that you select to indicate that the values of the element should be stored encrypted.
Sort order The integer that defines the order of the element in the list of elements. The element (row) with the smallest number will appear at the top of the list.
Entry mask The ASCII string to be used as an input mask for the element.
Validation reg. exp. The regular expression to be used for input validation.
## The Reporting codes tab
Column Description
Heading The heading of the reporting code.
Code The code of the reporting code.
Description The description of the reporting code.
Default Select this check box if the code will be used as the default code for the payment method.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Process bank transactions (CA306000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000 section By using this window, you can import transactions from multiple bank statements for a particular cash account, which corresponds to the account in a bank. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process bank transactions (CA306000) By using this window, you can import transactions from multiple bank statements for a particular cash account, which corresponds to the account in a bank. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can import transactions from multiple bank statements for a particular cash account, which corresponds to the account in a bank. Transactions imported from multiple statements are displayed in the table as one list. To view transactions for each imported statement, use the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window, where you can select a cash account and the reference number of the imported statement. You can then manually match or perform auto-matching of the transactions listed on the window to documents in the system over the same date range, resulting in the clearing of documents. You clear documents as a preliminary step before the actual reconciliation. You can also specify the details of a payment that the system should create to match a transaction for which a match was not found. Payments that the system creates during the processing of the matched transactions are not subject for approval, even if the process of approval is set up. ## What to do from this window + [Match transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-transactions/) + [Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-a-new-payment-or-document/) + [Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents/) + [Match account statements](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/match-account-statements/) + [Make temporary settings for unmatched transactions](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/cash-management/manage-cash-transactions/make-temporary-settings-for-unmatched-transactions/) + [Process matched account statements](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-matched-account-statements/) + [Extract invoice numbers](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/extract-invoice-numbers/) + [Process bank transactions for direct debit](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-bank-transactions-for-direct-debit/) + [Process a deposit for direct debit manually](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-a-deposit-for-direct-debit-manually/) + [Process rejected direct debit payments](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-rejected-direct-debit-payments/) + [Process rejected payments](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-rejected-payments/) + [Process unmatched account statements](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-unmatched-account-statements/) + [Process unmatched bank transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/process-unmatched-bank-transactions/) + [Write off amounts during a bank transaction processing](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/write-off-amounts-during-a-bank-transaction-processing/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Match automatically

Initiates the process of matching transactions from the bank statement to Cash management transactions by using settings you have specified in the Settings for matching dialog box (which opens when you click Settings for matching on the window toolbar).

If you have not opened this dialog box and specified settings, the system applies the default settings specified on the Bank statement settings tab of the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.

If you have configured rules for document creation in the Bank transaction rules (CA204500) window, the process will try to apply all the active rules to the transactions for which a match was not found.

The process ignores any filters set on the table columns.

To avoid a match on a different bank account to happen, go to the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window and select the Match only documents with the same bank account number check box on the Bank statement settings tab. You enable the customer and supplier recognition for bank transaction by the same bank account number.
Process

Initiates the processing of transactions with the Ready to process check box selected. The processing takes place on all lines that are ready for processing, regardless of any filters set on the table.

After processing, in the first column, a Success or icon-error is displayed for each processed line to indicate if the processing was successful or not. You can hover over the icon to read the line-specific message. Successfully processed lines do not show up again for the selected cash account.
Settings for matching Opens the Settings for matching dialog box.
Extract invoice numbers

Initiates the re-processing of the invoice and payment recognition (with prefix) on all open transactions that are not yet matched.

For more information, see: Extract invoice numbers
Process rejected

Initiates the processing of rejected direct debit payments.

The processing takes place on all lines, despite any filters set on the table.
### The Settings for matching dialog box In this dialog box, you can specify preferences for matching and relevance calculation. By default, the system uses the values specified on the **Bank statement settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. These values remain effective during your session unless you specify new values. #### The Disbursement date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of a cash management transaction (disbursement) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
Allow matching to credit note

A check box that (if selected) indicates that the system will automatically match the receipt bank transactions to credit notes by the reference number prior to matching them to the purchase invoices.

If the check box is cleared (the default value), the receipt bank transactions are always matched to the purchase invoices.
#### The Receipt date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of cash management transaction (receipt) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
#### The Weights for relevance calculation section
Ref. no. weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the reference numbers of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Consider empty ref. no. as matching

A check box that (if selected) specifies that a bank transaction with an empty reference number is considered as matching to a cash transaction with an empty reference number.

If this check box is cleared (the default value), transactions with empty reference numbers are not considered as matching.
Doc. date weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the dates of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Doc. payee weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the names of the customer (or supplier) on the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
#### The Date range for relevance calculation section
Element Description
Average delay payment clearing The average number of days for a payment to be cleared with the bank.
Estimated deviation (days) The number of days before and after the average delay date during which 50% of payments are generally cleared.
Skip voided transactions during matching A check box that you select to make the system skip voided transactions during the reconciliation process.
Save and close (button) By clicking this button it saves the settings during your working session and closes the dialog box.
## The top part You use this part to select a particular cash account to match imported transactions to transactions available in the system.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account specified on the bank statement.
Branch The name of the branch associated with the cash account.
Status description The status description contains explanations of the five error types that can be displayed in the Status field in the table.
## Left pane: Bank transactions to match table This table contains the transactions that have been imported from multiple bank statements by using this window and the [Import bank transactions (CA306500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/import-bank-transactions-ca306500/) window. You can select a transaction here and view matching transactions or specify the details of a new document in the tabs of the right pane. On the bottom of the table, you can see a brief description of the status of the selected transaction. The system sorts transactions (possible matches) by the match relevance value calculated for available transactions (on the **Match to payment** and the **Match to invoice** tabs) by using the criteria you have specified in the **Settings for matching** dialog box on the current window or the default criteria on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. For transactions with no match, you can create a new document of the type, which is determined by the workspace of origin and the type of transaction (receipt or disbursement) on the **Create payment** tab. To create a new document or a transaction for a bank transaction with no match, select the **Create** check box and specify the required information. For transactions originating in the Cash management workspace, you can create a document with an unrecognised payment type.
Button Description
Unmatch Clears all of the following: the check box in the check_mark_icon column for the selected row, any selected matches on the Match to payments and Match to invoices tabs, and the Create check box (if selected) on the Create payment tab.
Unmatch all Clears all of the following: all check boxes in the check_mark_icon column, any selected matches on the Match to payments and Match to invoices tabs, and the Create check box (if selected) on the Create payment tab. This process ignores any filters set on the table columns.
Hide selected

Rolls back all changes to the selected bank transaction, hides it from the list, and marks it as processed (to confirm the action, click Save on the window toolbar).

To be able to hide multiple transactions, you should first add the Hide column to your column view by clicking the icon_usersettingstable icon. Then you select the respective transactions in the Hide column and click the Hide selected button.

You can then clear the Processed and Hidden check boxes for the transaction by clicking Unhide transaction in the Import bank transactions (CA306500) window to be able to view and process the transaction again.
Undo split

Click this to undo the splitting of the selected split line.

If you have processed one or more of the split lines, you will not be able to undo the split on the not processed lines.
### The table
Column Description
Ext. ref. no. The external reference number of the transaction.
Ready to process A check box that, if selected, indicates to the system that this bank transaction is ready to be processed. Namely, the transaction has been matched to the transaction in the system or details of a new document (to match this transaction) were specified.
Name from bank The customer/supplier of the transaction.
Trans. date The transaction date.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Status

Shows the error code for the select bank transaction.

There are 5 type of errors codes displayed:

NDS
No documents applied to the selected transaction.
RB
Remaining balance available from the total transaction amount.
NB
No business account (Customer or Supplier) selected.
NE
No entry type selected.
NL
No location selected.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Receipt The amount of the receipt.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the document in the archive.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Customer/Supplier name

The name of the customer or the supplier associated with the document.

The name is created in the Customers (AR303000) or the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Entry type ID The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction. The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid. The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.
Location The location of the supplier or customer. This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Mandate ID The ID number for the Direct debit agreement with a customer and the customer’s bank.
Match type

The available match types are:

  • Matched to payment
  • Matched to invoice
  • Created
  • Hidden
Orig. disbursement The amount of the original disbursement.
Orig. receipt The amount of the original receipt.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Rejection message The message describing the reason for the rejection of the payment.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction,
Trans. entry date The entry date of the transaction.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Hide A check box which you can select for each transaction you want to hide. After you have made your selection, click the Hide selected button.
## Right pane: Match to payment tab The tab provides a list of payments that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular bank transaction in the table, you will see the payments that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Bank statement settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. For the matching document you choose among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected on the bank statement.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction on the bank statement and this document.
Orig. doc. number The ID of the document, as assigned by the corresponding numbering series.
Doc. date The date of the transaction or document.
Document ref. The number of the corresponding external document, if one exists.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Trans. type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Description A detailed description of the document.
Post period The post period of the payment.
Amount The document amount or transaction amount if it is a receipt. A negative value indicates that the amount is a disbursement.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Customer/Supplier name

The name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.

The name is created in the Customers (AR303000) or the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
## Right pane: The Match to invoice tab The tab provides a list of invoices that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular bank transaction in the table, you will see the invoices that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Bank statement settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. If you choose a matching document among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Element Description
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Location The business account location associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method associated with the document.
Account no. The account to which the payment has been made.
Update bank account

You can update the IBAN/BBAN from the imported bank payment line.

In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window under Bank statement settings, select the check box Update bank account on customer/supplier from Process bank transactions. When the payment line contains a bank account from the bank and you select a customer/supplier, a lookup against the default IBAN/BBAN will be done.

If the customer’s/supplier’s bank account is empty or different, the button Update bank account will appear. If you click the button the customer/supplier is updated with the account from the bank.
### The table
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected on the bank statement.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction on the bank statement and this document.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Ext. ref. no The supplier’s reference number.
Doc. date The date of the document.
Amount The document amount.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Customer/Supplier name

The name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.

The name is created in the Customers (AR303000) or the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Description A detailed description of the document.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## Right pane: The Create payment tab By using this tab, for transactions with no match, you can create a new document of the type, which is determined by the workspace of origin and the type of transaction (receipt or disbursement). See also:[Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-bank-statements/create-a-new-payment-or-document/). ### The payment creation section
Element Description
Create Select this check box to initiate creating a new payment for the selected transaction. Clear the check box to delete any information you have specified for the new document.
Clear rule A button that clears the applied rule and the settings the system has configured by using the applied rule.
Create rule

By clicking the button it navigates to the Create rule dialog box, where you enter the ID of the new rule.

Click Create to navigate to the Bank transaction rules (CA204500) window, where you can view and modify the details of the rule and save it for future use.
Cash account details/ Customer details/ Supplier details

Click this button to open the cash account, supplier ledger or customer ledger window as a pop-up to see the details of the selected document.

The name of the button changes depending on the selected workspace. In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window you can define which window will be opened for the different workspaces.

If no window has been selected, the following windows will be opened:

  • Cash management opens the Cash account details (CA303000) window with the active cash account selected.
  • Supplier ledger opens the Supplier details (AP402000) window with the selected supplier selected. If the supplier number is empty, the window opens without a supplier selected.
  • Customer ledger opens the Customer details (AR402000) window with the selected customer selected. If the customer number is empty, the window opens without a customer selected.
Workspace

The workspace where the document originated.

Select one of the following workspaces:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Cash management
Entry type ID

The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.

The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Module field.

To create a new entry type, click the Edit button next to the field to open the Entry types (CA203000) window.
VAT zone

Change or specify the VAT Zone or VAT category that applies to the transaction if necessary.

The VAT calculation mode is set to Gross by the system, and the VAT category field is updated with the default value when the VAT zone is selected.
VAT calculation mode This field has a read-only value that always shows Gross.
Tran. descr. The description of the selected transaction that can be modified. These changes affect the transaction description in the new document only; the description of the imported bank transaction remains unchanged (in the Bank transactions to match table).
Customer/Supplier

The name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document. The name is created in the Customers (AR303000) or the Suppliers (AP303000) window.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Location

The location of the supplier or customer.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Payment method

The payment method used by a customer or supplier for the document.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Invoice no.

The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.

The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Total amount

The total amount of the document.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Amount used

The amount of the transaction for which the documents (to match the bank transaction) are added.

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.
Remaining balance

The balance of the transaction for which you can add the documents.

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.
Application amount

The amount of the application for this payment.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Unapplied balance

The unapplied balance of the document.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Write-off amount

The total amount of write-offs specified for documents to be applied.

This field is displayed if the Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Split

(button)

Click this button to split the selected line in the left table into different lines. The button only appears when there is a remaining amount to match. To read more about this functionality, go to Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents.

If the Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer check box is selected, on the Bank statements settings tab in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, payments will be automatically split on bank statements import.
Allow unapplied balance Select this check box to process payments in situations where you need to overrule the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied. This check box is available only if the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied is marked in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window and the unapplied balance is different from 0.
Update bank account

You can update the IBAN/BBAN from the imported bank payment line.

In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window on the Bank statement settings tab, select the check box Update bank account on customer/supplier from Process bank transactions window.

When the payment line contains a bank account from the bank and you select a customer/supplier, a lookup against the default IBAN/BBAN will be done. If the customer’s/supplier’s bank account is empty or different, the Update bank account button will appear. Clicking the button will update the customer/supplier with the account from the bank.
### The table for documents that originated in the Cash management workspace In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to split the transaction amount. You cannot add documents that originated in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces.
Column Description
Branch

The branch that created the document.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Description The description of the document. By default, this is the description in the Trans. descr. field in the top part of this tab, and you can edit it.
Quantity The quantity of the item.
Price The price for the item.
Amount The total amount for all items.
Offset cash account

The cash account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset cash account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.

The field is displayed if the selected entry type is used for payments reclassification.
Offset account

The account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.
Description A description of the account.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for the document.
Item ID The ID of the non-stock item used as a transaction subject.
VAT category The default value is based upon what you selected in the VAT zone field.
Non-invoiceable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document line is non-invoiceable in the project.

This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the non-project code indicating that this document is not associated with any project.

The Non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.

The column is available if the Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.
### The table for documents that originated in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to apply the new payment. You cannot add documents that originated in the Cash management workspace.
Button Description
Select documents

By clicking the button, the Select documents pop-up window appears. Here you can select multiple documents using the date and branch filters on the top and the Select all documents option.

You need to select a Customer/Supplier no. in the top part of this tab for documents to be displayed in this pop-up window.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.
Load documents

By clicking the button, the customer or the supplier documents will load in the table, until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part, starting with the oldest documents.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.
#### The Select documents pop-up window This pop-up window appears when you have clicked the **Select documents** button. Here you select Supplier ledger or Customer ledger documents that you want to apply to the respective bank transaction. ##### The top part
Element Description
Up to due date The last due date up to which you want to filter the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.
Currency The cash account’s currency.
Total amount The total amount of the transaction selected in the main window.
Application amount

The total value of the selected documents.

This amount is always less than or equal to the Total amount.
Unapplied balance The difference between Total amount and Application amount.
Trans. descr. The transaction description of the transaction selected in the main window.
##### The table
Button Description
Select all documents Click this to select all documents until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part.
Column Description
Select document Check box for selecting the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.
Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
Due date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document is due to be paid.
Amount in cash account currency The document amount converted in the cash account’s currency.
Balance in cash account currency The document balance converted in the cash account’s currency.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier number from the customer/supplier document.
Description The description from the supplier or customer documents.
Amount The document amount paid in the original currency.
Balance The document balance amount in the original currency.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order/supplier ref. The document’s original customer order/supplier reference as assigned by the customer/supplier (for informational purposes).
External reference/buyer’s order no. The external reference number/buyer’s order number of the transaction.
Customer name/supplier name The customer name/supplier name associated with the document.
Location The customer or supplier location.
#### The table
Column Description
Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Customer order The original reference number or ID assigned by the customer to the customer document (for informational purposes).
Customer name The customer name associated with the document.
Customer

The parent or child customer associated with the document, by its customer number.

The Parent-child customer relationship can be enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window

For more information about parent-child relationship, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview
Invoice text The text from the customer documents.
External ref. The external reference number of the transaction.
Amount paid The amount paid for this document.
Balance The amount of the document after the specified amount was paid.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Balance write-off The amount to be written off.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of the available discount, if any.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment.
Cross rate

A cross rate that you can optionally modify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.

The column is hidden by default and available if the Multi-currency accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if withholding taxes are applicable).
With. tax balance The difference between the amount of the tax to be withheld and the actual withheld amount (if any withholding taxes are applicable).
Write-off reason code A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off balances. You must select a reason code if the balance write-off amount is non-zero.
Description The description from the supplier documents.
Supplier ref. The document’s original reference number as assigned by the supplier (for informational purposes).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reclassify payments (CA506500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reclassify-payments-ca506500 page You use this form to view and edit payments that were entered previously as unknown (lacking details). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reclassify payments (CA506500) You use this form to view and edit payments that were entered previously as unknown (lacking details). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this form to view and edit payments that were entered previously as unknown (lacking details). For more information, see: [About the reclassification of unknown payments](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-reclassification-of-unknown-payments/) In this window, you can add details that have become known. These payments can be any of the following: + Interest or bank charges that appear on the bank statement + Incoming wire transfers + Payments made automatically by the bank for standing orders ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the listed payments that you have selected.
Process all Processes all payments on the list.
View resulting document Navigates to the applicable form (which depends on the type of the document) so you can view the details of the selected payment.
## The top part You use these elements to select unknown payments that match specific criteria. You can specify the cash account and date range. Also, you can view the list of payments that were already reclassified during the specified date range.
Element Description
Entry type Required. The entry type that is reserved for unknown payments.
Cash account The cash account used for unknown payments.
Start date The date starting the range for which you want to view transactions.
End date The date ending the range for which you want to view transactions.
Show reclassified A check box that you select to display only payments reclassified during the specified date range.
## The table In this table, you can enter details for the payments that were previously considered unknown. You can specify a supplier or customer for the transactions and process them by clicking **Process** or **Process all** on the window toolbar. Processing moves the funds from the account used for unknown payments to the respective Supplier ledger or Customer ledger accounts.
Column Description
Cash account The cash account to which the payment was initially recorded.
Document ref. The reference number of an external document, if applicable.
Trans. date The payment document date.
Ref. no. The identification number of the payment, as assigned by the system when the payment was saved.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Reclassify cash account The offset cash account to which the unknown payment was recorded.
Offset account The offset account for the payment.
Offset subaccount The offset subaccount for the payment.
Amount The amount of the payment in the specified currency.
Trans. amount The amount of the transaction.
Module The workspace of origin, Supplier ledger or Customer ledger, for the payment.
Customer/supplier no. The customer or supplier associated with the payment document.
Account name The name of the customer or supplier.
Location ID The location of the customer or supplier associated with the payment.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Account no. The identifier of the payment method, if required by the type of payment method.
Description A detailed description of the payment document.
Cleared The cleared date of the payment entry.
Disb./receipt The type of the payment.
Period The period of the payment entry.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Reconciliation statement history (CA302010) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statement-history-ca302010 page You can use this window to view the history of reconciliations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconciliation statement history (CA302010) You can use this window to view the history of reconciliations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view the history of reconciliations. You can also create a new statement with the **On hold** status for the cash account you select. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create reconciliation Creates a new reconciliation statement (that is, a list of documents that have not been reconciled with a bank statement).
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select a cash account and, if needed, a date range for which you want to view the history of reconciliations.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account for which you want to view reconciliation statements.
Start date The start date of the date range for which you want to display statements.
End date The end date of the date range.
## The table In this table, you can view the reconciliation statements that match the criteria you have specified.
Column Description
Status The status of the reconciliation statement.
Cash account The cash account for which the reconciliation was performed.
Description A description of the cash account.
Ref. number The reference number of the reconciliation statement, which is displayed as a link. You can click this link to view this statement in the Reconciliation statements (CA302000) window.
Reconciliation date The date of the reconciliation statement.
Last reconciliation date The date of the most recent reconciliation statement.
Beginning balance The balance of the cash account before the reconciliation.
Reconciled receipts The total amount on the receipts marked as reconciled.
Reconciled disb. The total amount on the disbursements marked as reconciled.
Statement balance The balance of the cash account, according to the bank statement.
Receipt count The number of receipts included in the reconciliation statement.
Disb. count The number of disbursements included in the reconciliation statement.
Currency The currency of the cash account.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Reconciliation statements (CA302000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/reconciliation-statements-ca302000 page You can use this window to create and edit reconciliation statements or to view the details of closed statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconciliation statements (CA302000) You can use this window to create and edit reconciliation statements or to view the details of closed statements. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create and edit reconciliation statements or to view the details of closed statements. As you review the current statement, you can add cash transactions on the fly. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release

Releases the reconciliation statement you are viewing.

The status of the reconciliation statement changes to Closed. The documents with the Reconciled check box selected are included in the reconciliation statement.
Void Voids the reconciliation statement, changing the status to Voided and clearing the Reconciled check boxes for all documents. If a document had the Cleared check box selected, it will still be selected.
## The top part In this part, you can select a reconciliation statement. To create a new statement, select a cash account, select the reconciliation date, specify the latest date for the transactions to be loaded, and enter the balance from the bank statement as the **Statement balance**.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account under reconciliation.
Currency The currency of the cash account.
Ref. number The identification number of the reconciliation statement, which the system assigns when you save the statement.
Status

The current status of the statement, which the system sets to one of the following values:

On hold
Indicates that you can edit the statement but cannot release it. Clear the Hold check box when you finish editing, and the document status changes to Balanced.
Balanced
Indicates that the balance of the statement is equal to the reconciled balance and it can be released or saved. To change the status of the document to Balanced, clear the Hold check box.
Closed
Indicates that the statement is released and closed.
Voided
Indicates that the statement is voided.
Hold A check box that you can clear to indicate that the reconciliation statement is no longer On hold (that is, you are done editing it) and can be released.
Last reconciliation date The date of the most recent reconciliation for this cash account, if one exists.
Reconciliation date The date when the reconciliation statement was released and closed. You can change the date up to the release.
Load documents up to The latest date for documents to be loaded to the list. It allows you to temporary limit the number of displayed documents.
### The Totals section The elements in this section are arranged in two columns: The first displays the balances or total amounts of the specified types, and the second (**Document count**) shows the number of documents of each type. Also there are check boxes that are displayed when the system settings used to prepare currently selected statement differ from the current system settings. These check boxes are not available for editing.
Element Description
Beginning balance The balance of the previous reconciliation statement. The system uses the reconciled balance of the previous statement to populate this field.
Reconciled receipts The first column: The total amount of reconciled receipts on the statement. The second column: The number of cleared receipts.
Reconciled disb. First column: The total amount of reconciled disbursements. Second column: The number of cleared disbursements.
Reconciled balance The beginning balance of the statement plus the cleared receipts minus the cleared disbursements.
Statement balance The balance of the current bank statement, which you enter manually for the current reconciliation statement.
Difference The difference between the reconciled balance and the statement balance.
Voided transactions are skipped

A check box that indicates the value of the Skip voided transactions check box in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window at the moment when a user saved this reconciliation statement for the first time.

The element is displayed only if the value of the setting has been changed since the reconciliation statement was first saved.
Bank transactions are matched to batch payments

A check box that indicates the value of the Match bank transactions to batch payments check box of the cash account (in the Cash accounts (CA202000) window) at the moment when a user saved this reconciliation statement for the first time.

The check box is displayed if the value of the setting has been changed since the reconciliation statement was first saved.
Document count The number of receipts and disbursements included in the statement.
## The table If a previously closed reconciliation is selected in the top part, you can view the transactions that were included in the reconciliation statement. If you are preparing a new reconciliation statement or editing a statement with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, you can view all transactions recorded to the account, including those with the **On hold** and **Balanced** statuses. Some transactions may be marked as **Cleared** if preliminary information was received from the reconciliation source prior to the date of reconciliation. If this is a bank account, and you recently imported the bank statement for this account and processed the imported transactions, such transactions will have the **Cleared** check boxes selected. You can select the **Reconciled** check box for transactions with the **Posted** status that you confirm with the source. If needed, you can add new transactions on the fly if they are present in either the source or the list (but not both). ### The table buttons
Button Description
Toggle reconciled

Toggles the value of the Reconciled check box for all displayed records in the table.

If the records are filtered, the check box value is toggled for only displayed records.

The process takes the check box value from the first displayed row, inverts it, and changes the check box value to the new one for all displayed records.
Toggle cleared

Toggles the value of the Cleared check box for all records displayed in the table that have the Cleared check box available for editing.

If the records are filtered, the check box value is toggled for only displayed records. The process takes the check box value from the first displayed row, inverts it, and changes the check box value to the new one for all displayed records.
Reconcile processed Selects the Reconciled check boxes in the table for all released documents that were processed in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window.
Create adjustment Opens the Quick transaction dialog box so you can add an adjustment on the fly.
### The table columns
Column Description
Reconciled A check box that you select to indicate that the document is included in the reconciliation statement as a reconciled one.
Cleared

A check box that you select to indicate that the document was cleared with the reconciliation source, generally based on preliminary information.

If you perform reconciliation of the bank account, a selected check box may indicate that the document was matched to the transaction on the imported bank statement.
Clear date The date when the document was cleared.
Incoming payment The amount of the document, if it is an incoming payment.
Disbursement The amount of the document, if it is a disbursement.
Document ref. The reference number of the corresponding external document.
Workspace The workspace where the transaction or the document originated.
Trans. type The type of transaction or document, or the entry type of the transaction.
Orig. doc. number The ID of the document in the system. By clicking this number, you can navigate to the appropriate window (which depends on the type of the document) so you can view the details of the selected document.
Status The status of the document in the system.
Doc. date The date of the transaction or document.
Business account The ID of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer.
Description A detailed description of the document.
### The Quick transaction dialog box This dialog box opens when you click one of the following: Add expense : in the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window Create adjustment : in the Reconciliation statements (CA302000) window Create transaction : in the [Cash account details](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) (CA303000) window By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can quickly add cash transactions of any entry type. Note: In the [Funds transfers (CA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/funds-transfers-ca301000/) window, you can add cash transactions with only an entry type that has **Module** set to **CA**.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account to be updated by this transaction.
Entry type The user-defined type of cash transaction.
Doc. date The date of the transaction.
Fin. period The financial period to which the transaction is posted.
Currency A read-only column that shows the currency of the cash account.
Document ref. The reference number of the corresponding external document.
Amount The amount of the transaction in the specified currency.
Description A detailed description of the transaction. The field is filled by default with the description of selected entry type.
Status The status of the transaction.
Cleared A check box that you select to indicate that this transaction has been cleared.
Offset account The general ledger account that is used by default as the offset account for transactions. The field is displayed if the entry type is set to Cash management.
Offset subaccount The offset subaccount used with the account selected.
Save (button) Creates a transaction with the specified details and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Clears the dialog box elements and closes it without saving the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release cash transactions (CA502000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/release-cash-transactions-ca502000 page In this window, you can view the list of cash transactions and release all of them or only those you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release cash transactions (CA502000) In this window, you can view the list of cash transactions and release all of them or only those you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the transactions you have selected in the table.
Release all Releases all of the listed transactions.
## The table You can review the cash transactions on this list (in tabular format) and select any of them for release.
Button Description
View document Navigates to either the Funds transfers (CA301000) window or the Transactions (CA304000) window, depending on the type of the transaction.
Column Description
Transaction type The type of the cash transaction, which is one of the following: Cash entry, Transfer in, Transfer out, or Expense entry.
Transaction number The ID of the transaction, which the system assigns in accordance with the transaction numbering sequence.
Cash account The cash account the transaction is associated with.
Currency The currency of the transaction.
Amount The amount of the transaction.
Description A detailed description of the transaction.
Doc. date The date when the transaction was performed.
Period The financial period of the transaction.
VAT total The total amount of tax paid in the document.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Transactions (CA304000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000 page You can use this window to directly enter cash transactions and to view or edit the details of existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions (CA304000) You can use this window to directly enter cash transactions and to view or edit the details of existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the selected transaction and creates a batch.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

  • Release: Releases the selected transaction and creates a batch.

  • Reverse: Generates a reversing transaction for the currently open transaction and displays its details in the window.

    Note

    Transactions of the Cash entry type only can be reversed.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu command, which you can click for quick access to a pop-up window:

Activities
Opens the Activities maintenance pop-up window
### The Activities maintenance popup window
Button Description
Add task Clicking this option will open the Task (CR306020) window where you can add and view the tasks connected with the selected transaction.
Add event Clicking this option will open the Event (CR306030) window where you can add and view the events connected with the selected transaction.
Add email

Clicking this option will open the Send (CR306015)

window where you can add and view the emails connected with the selected transaction.
Add activity Clicking any of the options in this drop-down will open the Activity (CR306010) window where you can add and view the different types of activities connected with the selected transaction.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The summary (description) of the activity.
Status

The status of the activity. The options are:

  • Open
  • Draft
  • Processing
  • Cancelled
  • Completed
Start date The date when the activity was started.
Work group The work group to which the activity belongs.
Time spent The time spent on the activity.
Owner The owner of the activity.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Released Indicates if the activity has been released.
## The top part This area contains general information about the cash transaction.
Element Description
Trans. type The type of cash transaction. You can create transactions of the Cash entry type.
Ref. no. The unique identifier assigned to the cash transaction in accordance with the numbering series
Status

The status of the transaction, which is automatically assigned by the system:

On hold
The transaction is on hold and can be edited. Deselect the Hold check box when you finish editing, and the transaction status changes to Balanced.
Balanced
The transaction is balanced and ready to be released. To change the status of a transaction to Balanced, deselect the Hold check box when you finish editing it.
Released
The transaction has been released and the respective batch has been created. Note: The Automatically post to the general ledger on release check box in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window determines whether the batch will automatically be posted to the general ledger.
Hold

A check box that, if selected, indicates that the transaction is on hold, which means it may be edited but cannot be released. You can deselect the Hold check box if the transaction is balanced.

If this check box is deselected, the transaction status changes to Balanced.
Trans. date The date of the transaction.
Period The financial period to which the transaction should be posted.
Description A detailed description of the transaction.
Cash account The cash account that is a source account for the transaction.
Currency The currency of the cash account.
Exchange rate

The amount corresponding to the Currency field, and the name of the field is only visible if you hover over the field.

By clicking the field, the Rate selection dialog box opens. See description below.
View base (button)

When you click View base the following happens:

  • In the Balance (original currency) column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency.
  • In the Currency column, the text will be displayed as your base currency.

Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Entry type

The user-defined transaction type.

Select the appropriate type from the list of entry types defined for the selected cash account.
Disb./receipt

The basic type of the transaction:

  • Receipt
  • Disbursement
Document ref. The external document reference number.
Owner The user who created the cash transaction.
Reversing cash entries

The number of cash entries which are created by reversing the current cash entry.

This field is visible when the cash transaction is reversed on the original entry.
Original cash entry

The field shows the ID of the cash entry that was reversed by the current cash entry.

This field is visible when the cash transaction is reversed on the reversed entry.
Amount The amount of the transaction.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT.

The VAT taxable amount will be displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable tax in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is deselected, this field will be empty.

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT.

This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total

The total amount of VAT paid in the document.

If a used VAT has been applied to the document, the used VAT amount is not included in the VAT total amount.

You can view the used VAT details on the VAT details tab of the current window.
Control total

The control total of the transaction.

A user enters this amount manually.

This amount should be equal to the sum of amounts of all detail lines of the transaction.

This field is available only if the Validate control totals on entry check box is selected in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
VAT amount

The VAT amount to be paid for the document. A user enters this amount manually.

This field is available only if the Validate VAT totals on entry check box is selected in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.

To use the validation function, you must have the Net/gross entry mode check box selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Rate selection dialog box
Element Description
Currency rate type ID The currency rate type specified for the selected currency pair.
Effective date The date on which the currency rate in this row becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents View the currency conversion.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Transaction details tab This tab contains the list of transaction details in a tabular format.
Column Description
Branch The branch that created the transaction.
Item ID The ID of the non-stock item specified as the transaction subject.
Description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The quantity of the item.
UoM The unit of measure of the item.
Price The unit price for the item.
Amount The total amount for all units or items.
Offset account The account to be updated by the transaction. By default, it is an offset account defined with the entry type selected for the cash account, but you can change this account.
Account description A description of the account.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for the transaction.
Line no. Used to count the number of lines in a cash transaction.
Project

The project with which the item is associated. Or, the non-project code, if the item is not intended for any project. The non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) ) window.

This column is available only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this transaction is associated.

This column is available only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Non-invoicable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this transaction is non-invoiceable in the project.

This column is available only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT category A list of taxes associated with a product or a service when it is purchased or sold.
## The VAT details tab This tab contains a table showing the automatically calculated taxes for the transaction and their details.
Column Description
VAT ID The VAT that applies to the cash transaction.
VAT rate The rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount of the transaction.
VAT amount The VAT amount calculated for the transaction.
Deductible VAT rate

The percent of deduction that applies to the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expense amount

The percentage that is deducted from the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Pending VAT

A Pending VAT (sometimes called a suspended VAT) is applied to those documents whose VAT amounts should be recognized later than the document has been released.

Once a document to the pending VAT is released, the system records its VAT amount to an intermediate account (such as the Pending VAT payable account or the Pending VAT claimable subaccount, where the VAT amount is kept until you initiate the process of recognizing the VAT).

Suspended VAT information is not added to the VAT report until the taxes are recognised.
Include in VAT exempt total

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this value-added VAT has a zero rate, and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.

The calculated amount will be displayed in the VAT exempt total field in the documents (such as invoices).

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Statistical VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the VAT on documents will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Reverse VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.

A reverse VAT is a type of VAT used in some countries of the European Union (EU).

When this type of VAT is applied to a company that supplies goods or services to other EU countries, the liability of the reporting VAT is reversed and goes to the customer rather than to the supplier.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
VAT type

The types of VAT:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Financial details tab This tab contains two sections, and a possible third, with the elements described below. After the transaction is released, the settings on this tab become read-only. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no.

The number of the batch generated to implement the cash transaction.

The number appears automatically after the transaction is released.

Click the number to view the batch details.
Branch The branch that initiated the transaction.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction was cleared.
Clear date The date when the transaction was cleared.
### The VAT settings section
Element Description
VAT zone The VAT zone that applies to the transaction.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document.

One of the following options can be selected:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Validate account balances (CA503000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/validate-account-balances-ca503000 page By using this window, you can validate the balances of cash accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate account balances (CA503000) By using this window, you can validate the balances of cash accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can validate the balances of cash accounts. The system performs validation by recalculating the balances, based on the history records, and matching them to the account balances stored in the database. We recommend that you validate the balances of cash accounts in any of the following cases: 1. After you have modified the options in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window that control how the available balances of cash accounts are calculated. 1. After you have converted an asset account used for other purposes to a cash account. In this case, the system will replace the General ledger transactions on the account with appropriate cash transactions and rebuild the account history. 1. If you have detected a discrepancy between the balance of a particular account and its total credits and debits by using the [Cash account details (CA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-account-details-ca303000/) window. To validate the balances of all cash accounts, click **Validate all** on the window toolbar. To validate the balances of only particular cash accounts, select the check boxes next to the accounts in the table and click **Validate** on the window toolbar. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Validate Recalculates the balances for the accounts that you have selected.
Validate all Recalculates the balances for all listed accounts.
## The table The table contains the list of all the cash accounts defined in the system.
Column Description
Selected A check box that you select to include the cash account for validation if you click Validate.
Cash account The cash account.
Description The description provided for the cash account.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Cash management reports /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash management reports Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Cash management reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-management-reports-overview page With the wide variety of reports for the Cash management workspace, you can make periodic or daily cash flow projections, view the current balances of cash accounts, monitor results of consolidations, and produce period-end audit reports. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash management reports - overview With the wide variety of reports for the Cash management workspace, you can make periodic or daily cash flow projections, view the current balances of cash accounts, monitor results of consolidations, and produce period-end audit reports. The Cash management workspace is tightly integrated with the General ledger, Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, and Currency management workspaces. With this integration, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. Because the Cash management reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## Cash management reports The Cash management workspace includes the following reports: ### Balance + [Cash account summary (CA633000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-account-summary-ca633000/): Gives summary information about cash account balances during the specified time interval. + [Cash account details (CA633500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-account-details-ca633500/): Shows all activities on the selected cash account during the specified time interval. Cash transactions (receipts and disbursements) are listed by the transaction date. + [Reconciliation statement (CA627000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/reconciliation-statement-ca627000/): Provides the list of cash accounts with information about reconciliations performed for the accounts. + [Bank statement (CA60650S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/bank-statement-ca60650s/): Shows details of the bank statements for the selected cash account and the specified date and reference number range. ### Window + [Deposit slip (CA656500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/deposit-slip-ca656500/): Displays details of the selected deposit along with complete information about the destination bank. ### Audit + [Unreleased transactions (CA612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/unreleased-transactions-ca612000/): Shows all unreleased cash documents, entered up to the current business date, affecting cash accounts. + [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (CA612500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ca612500/): Shows the details of all unreleased cash documents, entered up to the current business date, affecting cash accounts. + [Cash flow forecast (CA401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-flow-forecast-ca401000/): Provides the details of a 30-day cash flow forecast. The system opens this window when you click the **View as a report** button in the window toolbar of the Cash flow forecast window. + [Cash management register (CA625000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-management-register-ca625000/): Displays the list of all cash documents released in the system for the specified financial period. + [Cash management register (detailed) (CA624500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-management-register-detailed-ca624500/): Provides the details of cash documents of all types released in the system for the specified financial period. + [Reconciliation register (CA623500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/reconciliation-register-ca623500/): Summarises reconciliations for all cash accounts or for the selected one. + [Reconciliation register details (CA624000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/reconciliation-register-details-ca624000/): Displays details of reconciliations performed for the selected cash account during the specified period of time. + [Batch register (CA620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/batch-register-ca620500/): Displays the list of all batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. + [Batch register (detailed) (CA621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/batch-register-detailed-ca621000/): Provides the details of all batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. + [Non-deposited payments (CA657000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/non-deposited-payments-ca657000/): Provides the list of payments that have not been deposited until the specified date. Bank statement (CA60650S) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/bank-statement-ca60650s section This report shows details of the bank statements for the selected cash account and the specified date and reference number range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Bank statement (CA60650S) This report shows details of the bank statements for the selected cash account and the specified date and reference number range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows details of the bank statements for the selected cash account and the specified date and reference number range. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Cash account The cash account for which bank statements will be listed.
Start date The start date of the date range. By default, the current business date is selected.
End date The end date of the date range. By default, the current business date is selected.
From ref. no. The first reference number of the reference number range. You can leave this field blank to view a broader range of data.
To ref. no. The last reference number of the reference number range. You can leave this field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Batch register (CA620500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/batch-register-ca620500 section This report displays all the batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register (CA620500) This report displays all the batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays all the batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. Batches are listed by their dates and are shown with their control totals. The list also shows the users who created and edited the batches. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company the report will cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report will cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches.
Ledger The ledger for which you want to display data. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. You must select a period. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. You must select a period. By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include unposted transactions A check box that you select to include information about unposted transactions in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Batch register (detailed) (CA621000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/batch-register-detailed-ca621000 section This report displays the details of all batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register (detailed) (CA621000) This report displays the details of all batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the details of all batches released in the Cash management workspace for the specified financial period. Batches are listed by their dates and are shown with all their details, including the users who created and edited the batches. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company the report will cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report will cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches.
Ledger The ledger for which you want to display data. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. You must select a period. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. You must select a period. By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include unposted transactions A check box that you select to include information about unposted transactions in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Cash account details (CA633500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-account-details-ca633500 section This report shows all the activities on the selected cash account during the specified date range, which need not coincide with financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash account details (CA633500) This report shows all the activities on the selected cash account during the specified date range, which need not coincide with financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows all the activities on the selected cash account during the specified date range, which need not coincide with financial periods. Cash transactions (receipts and disbursements) are listed by transaction date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From date The start date of the date range the report will cover; a start date must be specified. By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date The end date of the date range; an end date must be specified. By default, the current business date is selected.
Cash account The cash account whose activities will be included in the report. Select an account to see its details.
Include not cleared A check box you select to include transactions not cleared by the reconciliation.
Include not released A check box you select to include transactions that were not released during the specified date range.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Cash account summary (CA633000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-account-summary-ca633000 section This report displays summary information about cash account balances during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash account summary (CA633000) This report displays summary information about cash account balances during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary information about cash account balances during the specified date range. (The date range you specify does not need to coincide with financial periods.) Information can be detailed up to the cash transactions incurred during the specified date range. Accounts are listed in the order of their account numbers or IDs. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company the report will cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report will cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches.
From date The start date of the date range for which you want to obtain information. By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date The end date of the date range. By default, the current business date is selected.
Cash account

The cash account for which the report will display information.

Leave the field empty to obtain information on all cash accounts.
Include not cleared A check box you select to include transactions not cleared by the reconciliation.
Include not released A check box you select to include transactions that were not released during the specified date range.
Hide details A check box you select to display only summary lines for cash accounts and hide the details of the cash transactions.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Cash flow forecast (CA658000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-flow-forecast-ca658000 section You can use this report to run the 30-day cash flow forecasts for all existing cash accounts or for only the cash account you have selected. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash flow forecast (CA658000) You can use this report to run the 30-day cash flow forecasts for all existing cash accounts or for only the cash account you have selected. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The forecast shows the following information for each day of a 30-day period for each of the accounts: + The projected balance of the cash account in the **Cash summary** section + The total amount of customer payments to be received this day in the **Cash receipts** section + The total amount of outgoing payments to be sent this day in the **Cash paid out** section The **Cash summary** section provides the following information: Cash on hand : The cash position at the beginning of the day; namely a forecast balance carried forward from the previous day Cash available : The sum of the projected receipts and cash position at the beginning of the day (Cash on hand + total of cash receipts) Cash position : The cash position at the end of the day; namely the difference between the available cash and the total amount of the projected outgoing payments (Cash available – total of cash paid out) ## Report parameters The report has no specific parameters. ## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Cash management register (CA625000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-management-register-ca625000 section This report displays all cash documents released in the system during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash management register (CA625000) This report displays all cash documents released in the system during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays all cash documents released in the system during the specified financial period. Documents, which are listed by their dates, are shown with amounts in the document currency and the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The financial period the report will cover. The list of available periods contains all periods, including closed ones, and a period must be specified. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Cash management register (detailed) (CA624500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/cash-management-register-detailed-ca624500 section This report displays the details of the cash documents of all types released in the system for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash management register (detailed) (CA624500) This report displays the details of the cash documents of all types released in the system for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the details of the cash documents of all types released in the system for the specified financial period. Documents are listed by their dates and are shown with all the details and the amounts in the document currency and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type

The document type, which can be Transfer out, Transfer in, Expense entry, Cash entry, or Deposit.

Select a type, or leave the box blank to display documents of all types.
Ref. no.

The reference number of the specific document.

Leave the field blank to display all the documents of the specified type (or of all types).
Period

The financial period the report will cover.

All periods, including closed ones, are available for selection, and a period must be specified. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deposit slip (CA656500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/deposit-slip-ca656500 section By using this report, you can select a particular deposit, view its information, and print the document as the list of customer payments to be actually deposited to a specific bank. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deposit slip (CA656500) By using this report, you can select a particular deposit, view its information, and print the document as the list of customer payments to be actually deposited to a specific bank. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can select a particular deposit, view its information, and print the document as the list of customer payments to be actually deposited to a specific bank. The document provides information about destination bank and information about customer payments included in the deposit. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type

The type of deposit you want to view.

Select Cash deposit or Voided cash deposit.
Reference no. The reference number of the deposit.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Non-deposited payments (CA657000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/non-deposited-payments-ca657000 section This report displays the details of all non-deposited (through the specified date) payment documents recorded to clearing accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Non-deposited payments (CA657000) This report displays the details of all non-deposited (through the specified date) payment documents recorded to clearing accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the details of all non-deposited (through the specified date) payment documents recorded to clearing accounts. The report lists documents by clearing accounts. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Deposit date Select any date to view payments that were not deposited as of the date. By default, the current business date is selected.
Payment method Select a payment method to view undeposited payments made by this payment method. Leave the field blank to view non-deposited payments made by all payment methods.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Reversing cash entries (CA690010) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/reversing-cash-entries-ca690010 section The report shows the details of cash entries which are created by reversing a cash entry. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reversing cash entries (CA690010) The report shows the details of cash entries which are created by reversing a cash entry. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Original reference no. The number of a cash entry for which you want to view reversed cash entry. You must select a cash entry.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Reconciliation register (CA623500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/reconciliation-register-ca623500 section This report shows the summary of reconciliations for all cash accounts or for a selected account during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconciliation register (CA623500) This report shows the summary of reconciliations for all cash accounts or for a selected account during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the summary of reconciliations for all cash accounts or for a selected account during the specified date range. For each cash account or the selected one, all reconciliations performed during the specified date range are listed with cleared transaction totals. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From date The start date of the date range. By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date The end date of the date range. By default, the current business date is selected.
Cash account The cash account for which reconciliations will be listed. Select a cash account, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Reconciliation register details (CA624000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/reconciliation-register-details-ca624000 section This report shows details of reconciliations performed for the selected cash account (or for all accounts) during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconciliation register details (CA624000) This report shows details of reconciliations performed for the selected cash account (or for all accounts) during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows details of reconciliations performed for the selected cash account (or for all accounts) during the specified date range. For each cash account, reconciliations performed during the specified date range are listed detailed to cash transaction amounts. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From date The start date of the date range. By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date The end date of the date range. By default, the current business date is selected.
Cash account The cash account for which reconciliations will be listed. Select a cash account, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Reference number The reference number assigned to the reconciliation. You can leave this field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Reconciliation statement (CA627000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/reconciliation-statement-ca627000 section This report displays the list of cash accounts, with information about reconciliations performed for the accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconciliation statement (CA627000) This report displays the list of cash accounts, with information about reconciliations performed for the accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The financial period the report will cover. The list of available periods contains all periods, including closed ones, and a period must be specified. By default, the current financial period is used.
Cash account The cash account for which the report will display information. Leave the field blank to obtain information on all cash accounts.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased cash documents (CA656000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/unreleased-cash-documents-ca656000 section This report shows all the unreleased cash documents dated up to the current business date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased cash documents (CA656000) This report shows all the unreleased cash documents dated up to the current business date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows all the unreleased cash documents dated up to the current business date. The report can display documents affecting all cash accounts. Cash documents (receipts and disbursements) are listed by document date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased transactions (CA612000) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/unreleased-transactions-ca612000 section This report shows all the unreleased cash documents dated up to the current business date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (CA612000) This report shows all the unreleased cash documents dated up to the current business date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows all the unreleased cash documents dated up to the current business date. The report can display documents affecting a particular cash account or all cash accounts. Cash documents (receipts and disbursements) are listed by document date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Cash account The cash account whose documents will be included in the report. Leave the field blank to request information on all cash accounts.
Include transactions on hold A check box you select to include transactions with the On hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased transactions (detailed) (CA612500) /visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ca612500 section This report shows the details of all unreleased cash documents, dated up to the current business date, affecting cash accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (detailed) (CA612500) This report shows the details of all unreleased cash documents, dated up to the current business date, affecting cash accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the details of all unreleased cash documents, dated up to the current business date, affecting cash accounts. Cash documents (receipts and disbursements) are listed by document date and are shown with all details. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Cash account The cash account whose documents will be included in the report. Leave the field blank to request information on all cash accounts.
Include transactions on hold A check box you select to include transactions with the On hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Currency management /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management section In the Currency management, you can manage currency rates as well as revalue, customer, supplier and general ledger accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency management In the Currency management, you can manage currency rates as well as revalue, customer, supplier and general ledger accounts. Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Currency management - overview /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-overview page Visma Net offers a variety of functionalities to help organisations manage currency by using the Currency management workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency management - overview Visma Net offers a variety of functionalities to help organisations manage currency by using the Currency management workspace. Visma Net offers a variety of functionalities to help organisations manage currency by using the Currency management workspace. ## Single-currency or multi-currency mode Visma Net can function in either single-currency or multi-currency mode: + In single-currency mode, only the base currency (the currency of the primary economic environment in which the company generates and expends cash) is used for all transactions, and all currency-related controls are hidden. The base currency is specified in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. + In multi-currency mode, the Currency management workspace provides the functionality necessary to enter transactions in many currencies and maintains transaction history in both the base currency and the currency of transactions. Activate multi-currency support in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Multiple currency rates The Currency management workspace supports an unlimited number of foreign currencies and rate types. You can assign different rate types to suppliers and customers that use the same foreign currency. You can update exchange rates as frequently as you need, and historical currency rates are stored in the database for all previous financial years. For more information, see the following topics: + [About currency rate entry](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/about-currency-rate-entry/) + [About historical currency rates](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/about-historical-currency-rates/) ## On-screen currency conversion Use the selector button to select a currency from the list of available currencies. There are two additional controls, for advanced functionality: + A **Currency toggle** button: As you are viewing Supplier ledger or Customer ledger documents or General ledger batches, click the **Currency toggle** button to switch between the base currency and the foreign currency. + An **Exchange rate** button: To view the rate details for a document or transaction, click this icon. The system automatically retrieves the exchange rate that was effective on the transaction date and allows you to view the amounts in the foreign currency or base currency. In data entry windows, you can use the **Exchange rate** button to override the default currency and rate for the document (if the appropriate option is enabled). ## Main functionalities
Functionality Description
Currency rounding rules Visma Net records any differences between the exact and the rounded amounts for the base and foreign currencies and accumulates them on appropriate rounding gain or loss accounts. For more information, see: About currency rounding rules.
Realised gain and loss calculation rules Visma Net can automatically calculate the realised gains and losses when payments made in a foreign currency are applied. Exchange rates for individual documents can be overridden if settings in the appropriate workspaces allow this. For more information, see: About currency setup parameters.
Supplier ledger and Customer ledger revaluations

You can maintain the operations with selected suppliers and customers in foreign currencies.

At the end of each financial period, you have to revalue all open Supplier ledger and Customer ledger documents in the base currency. The revaluation gains and losses are calculated automatically, and the appropriate adjusting and reversing batches are generated.

For more details, see: About supplier and customer revaluations.
Translations If your company reports its financials in a currency other than the base currency, use the Currency management workspace to configure translation to accurately reflect your business operations in another currency. For more information, see: Overview of translations.
General ledger revaluations

You can maintain the selected General ledger accounts in foreign currencies. At the end of each financial period, you have to revalue in the base currency the balances of General ledger accounts which are denominated to foreign currencies. The revaluation gains and losses are calculated automatically with the appropriate adjustments posted to revaluation gain and loss accounts specified for each foreign currency.

For more details, see: About general ledger revaluations.
## Other functionalities and options The Currency management workspace also offers the following functionalities: + Ability to maintain exchange rates as frequently as needed + Capability to post transactions in different currencies to the same account + Application of payments in currency that may differ from the currency of open documents + Assignment of default rates to particular suppliers and customers to reduce the input error rate + Automatic calculation of realised gains and losses for documents being paid + Flexible translations to any of the defined currencies + Warnings if the predefined rate variance range is exceeded Configure currency /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency section In Visma Net, you can add new currencies to the system that will be used for accounting and reporting in operations with different suppliers and customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure currency In Visma Net, you can add new currencies to the system that will be used for accounting and reporting in operations with different suppliers and customers. In Visma Net, you can add new currencies to the system that will be used for accounting and reporting in operations with different suppliers and customers. You can set up as many currencies as you need. While configuring a currency, you specify the general information, such as the currency ID and the currency symbol. You also specify the General ledger accounts to be used for any realised gains and losses that result from fluctuations in foreign currency rates and the General ledger accounts that should be used to record the gains and losses resulting from translation to the currency. About currency setup parameters /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency/about-currency-setup-parameters page You configure a new currency or edit the settings of the existing currency by using the Currencies (CM202000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About currency setup parameters You configure a new currency or edit the settings of the existing currency by using the Currencies (CM202000) window. For more information: [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/). You configure a new currency or edit the settings of the existing currency by using the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. In this window, you specify the general parameters of a particular currency, such as the currency ID, currency symbol and the description, and define the specific General ledger accounts that should be used in operations, in which this currency is involved. ## Realised gains and realised losses In the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window, you should specify the General ledger accounts that should be used to record the realised gains or losses. A realised gains or losses can be calculated for the following documents: + A Supplier ledger document: When payment in a foreign currency is issued. + A Customer ledger document: When payment in a foreign currency is received. When a payment is issued for a purchase invoice or received for an Customer ledger document, the exchange rate of the document is compared to the exchange rate on the date of settlement or the exchange rate of the payment (if currency rate overriding is allowed). The realised gain or loss is then posted to either the realised gain account or the realised loss account. The following calculation rules are applied: + If a payment is issued in the same currency as the currency of the document, the realised gain or loss is calculated in the base currency as the difference in exchange rates multiplied by the document amount. + If a payment is issued in the currency other than the currency of the document, the realised gain or loss is calculated as the amount of the payment in the base currency (calculated using the exchange rate specified for the payment) minus the original amount of the document in the base currency. In Visma Net, direct rates between foreign currencies and the base currency rates with respect to foreign currencies are used only for translations. ## Unrealised gains and unrealised losses If your company has the partners that use foreign currencies, you may need to maintain the Supplier ledger accounts of some suppliers and the Customer ledger accounts of some customers in foreign currencies. In Visma Net, balances for foreign-currency accounts are maintained in both the foreign and the base currencies. Every transaction posted to such an account updates its balance in both currencies, and the amount in the base currency is calculated using the current exchange rate of the specified type associated with the supplier or customer. The system automatically calculates the revaluation's unrealised gains and losses and adds appropriate adjusting entries to the revaluation batch. The resulting unrealised gains and losses are recorded to the following General ledger accounts that you specify in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window for each foreign currency: + **Unrealised gain account** (and **Unrealised gain subaccount** ) or **Unrealised loss account** (and **Unrealised loss subaccount** ). The subaccounts that will be actually used for recording unrealised gains and losses are generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine gain/loss sub. from** field in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window. If needed, you can select specific gain and loss accounts (and subaccounts) to be used for customers of a particular customer class in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window and for suppliers of a particular class in the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. + **Supplier ledger provisioning account** (and **Supplier ledger provisioning subaccount** ) or, for Customer ledger revaluation, **Customer ledger provisioning account** (and **Customer ledger provisioning subaccount** ). If such accounts are not specified for the currency, the gains and losses are posted to the Supplier ledger accounts of respective suppliers or to Customer ledger accounts of customers. About currency rounding rules /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency/about-currency-rounding-rules page If multi-currency support is activated the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, rounding rules are applied during currency conversion operations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About currency rounding rules If multi-currency support is activated the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, rounding rules are applied during currency conversion operations. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). Visma Net uses the following basic rules for rounding: + The exchange rates should be specified with six significant figures. The exchange rates themselves are not rounded or truncated. + The exchange rates are used for conversions between the base currency and any foreign currency. + All currencies are used with the precision of their subunits, and the amounts resulting from currency conversion operations should be rounded up to the nearest currency subunit if the digit in the next decimal place is 5 or greater. ## Rounding gain and loss accounts Any differences between the exact and the rounded amounts are accumulated on the **Rounding gain account** and **Rounding loss account**, which you specify for the currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. The rounding differences for the base currency may occur, if on converting journal entries made in a foreign currency the debit amounts differ from the credit amounts of the batch. You can specify the accounts for posting gains and losses from rounding transaction in the base currency in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. Configure a currency /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency/configure-a-currency section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a currency ## Configure a new currency from scratch 1. Go to the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **General settings** area, specify the following parameters: 1. In the **Currency ID** field, specify the ID for a new currency. 1. Optional: In the **Currency symbol** field, specify a symbol for a new currency. 1. Optional: In the **Decimal precision** field, specify the number of digits following the decimal point to be used in operations with the currency that you configure. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter the description of the currency. 1. Select the **Use for accounting** check box to use the currency for financial transactions. Once this check box is selected, the **General ledger account** fields become available for editing. 1. Specify the required General ledger accounts (and subaccounts, if any) in the appropriate fields. For details, see: + [About currency setup parameters](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency/about-currency-setup-parameters/), + [About general ledger revaluations](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-revaluations/about-general-ledger-revaluations/), + [Overview of translations](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-translations/about-translations/), + [About currency rounding rules](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency/about-currency-rounding-rules/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure a new currency by copying and pasting the parameters of an existing currency 1. Go to the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. 1. In the **General settings** area, in the **Currency ID** field, select a currency which settings (the list of General ledger accounts) you want to copy and use for a new currency. 1. Click **![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png)**, and select **Copy**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **General settings** area, specify the following parameters: 1. In the **Currency ID** field, specify the ID for a new currency. 1. Select the **Use for accounting** check box. Once you have selected this check box, the area of the window, on which general ledger accounts should be specified becomes available for editing. 1. On the window toolbar, click **Clipboard**, and click **Paste**. The general ledger accounts fields have been filled in automatically. 1. In the **General settings** area, specify the remaining parameters: 1. Optional: In the **Currency symbol** field, specify a symbol for a new currency. 1. Optional: In the **Decimal precision** field, specify the number of digits following the decimal point to be used in operations with the currency that you configure. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter the description of the currency. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Manage currency rates /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates section In Visma Net, you can maintain the exchange rates of foreign currencies with respect to the base currency or any other foreign currency as frequently as needed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage currency rates In Visma Net, you can maintain the exchange rates of foreign currencies with respect to the base currency or any other foreign currency as frequently as needed. + You can configure any required currency in the system, and enter effective rates for the currencies on any selected date. + You can then view the rates that were effective on a specific date as well as review the rate history for any required currency pair. + You can also configure different parameters for the same currency pair that can be used in operations with different suppliers or customers. + To do this, you create a rate type, and the rate type provides all currencies configured in the system with the particular parameters you specify. + The system allows you to create any number of rate types. + You can also turn on the automatic import of currency rates that is available from AutoPay Create a rate type /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/create-a-rate-type section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a rate type 1. Go to the [Currency rate types (CM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rate-types-cm201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Rate type ID** field, enter the unique ID you want to use for the rate type being created. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a detailed description of the rate type that will help you to identify this type later. 1. Optional: In the **Days effective** field, specify the number of days during which the rate is considered current for currencies of the type starting from the **Currency effective date** specified in the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). About currency rate entry /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/about-currency-rate-entry page In Visma Net, you can add multiple currencies and specify multiple exchange rates for each particular currency pair. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About currency rate entry In Visma Net, you can add multiple currencies and specify multiple exchange rates for each particular currency pair. In Visma Net, you can add multiple currencies and specify multiple exchange rates for each particular currency pair. You enter an exchange rate by adding a new record manually in the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. ## Adding the currency exchange rate + You record the currencies' exchange rates in the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. + You specify rates for the currencies of each rate type with respect to the currency selected in the **To currency** field. + To set up different exchange rates for the same currency pair, you need to create different rate types in the [Currency rate types (CM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rate-types-cm201000/) window, and assign each of them to the same currency pair. The rate values are recorded to the database with at least six significant digits. + You need to decide which operation ( **Multiply** or **Divide** ) should be used for the conversion of each particular currency pair and select an appropriate option in the **Mult/div** column. + Each record in the table contains the rate and the date when the rate becomes effective. The system uses the rate for currency conversions for all documents with later dates until a new rate is recorded. + When the next record for the same rate type is entered, the rate value becomes a historical rate and can be used as an effective rate for operations that took place between the two dates. Historical rates are stored in the database for all financial years defined in the system. For details, see: [About historical currency rates.](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/about-historical-currency-rates/) + Rates specified with respect to any currency other than the base currency are used only for translations. + Exchange rates can be recorded as often as is needed for a particular foreign currency. All previous values are kept in the database. Add a currency rate /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/add-a-currency-rate section You use the Currency rates (CM301000) window to add a currency rate in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a currency rate You use the Currency rates (CM301000) window to add a currency rate in Visma Net. For more information: [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/). ## Before you proceed Before adding a currency rate, make sure of the following: + The required currencies have been configured in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. + An appropriate rate type to be assigned to the currency rate has been created in the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. 1. Go to the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. 1. In the top part, in the **To currency** field, select the currency (by its ID) with respect to which the currency rate will be added. 1. In the **Effective date** field, specify the date when the exchange rate becomes effective. 1. On the **Currency rate entry** tab, on the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **From currency** field, select the currency (by its ID) whose exchange rate will be shown with respect to the **To currency**. 1. In the **Currency rate type** field, select the rate type to which the currency rate being created will be assigned. 1. In the **Currency effective date** field, specify the date when this currency rate becomes effective. By default, the current business date is specified. 1. In the **Currency rate** field, specify the rate value. 1. Define whether the entered rate should be multiplied or divided in the field **Mult/Div**. The **rate reciprocal** will now be automatically calculated and shown in the respective field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The currency rate is now added to the system and it is ready to use.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About historical currency rates /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/about-historical-currency-rates page You can record currency exchange rates any time for a particular currency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About historical currency rates You can record currency exchange rates any time for a particular currency. You can record currency exchange rates any time for a particular currency. Each record contains the date when the rate becomes effective. When the next record for the same rate type is entered, the rate value becomes a **historical rate** and can be used as the effective rate for operations that take place between the two dates. It is not recommended to change the value of the exchange rate if any transactions were based on the historical rate. ## Viewing the historical currency rates You can view historical rates by using the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. Select the target currency (**To currency**) and the required date (**Effective date**). The list of historical rates that were effective on the selected date will appear in the table on the **Currency rate entry** tab. The list will include the rates for all the currencies with respect to the target currency and the currency rate types. ## Using the historical currency rates You can use the historical rates for entering back-dated transactions and for calculating realised and unrealised gains and losses. Manage translations /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-translations section In Visma Net, amounts can be translated from the base currency to another currency at the account balance level. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage translations In Visma Net, amounts can be translated from the base currency to another currency at the account balance level. In Visma Net, amounts can be translated from the base currency to another currency at the account balance level. Translation may be needed, for example, for reporting purposes if the company is a subsidiary of a larger entity and its financial statements are included in the consolidated statements of the larger entity that are prepared in a different currency. This functionality is available only if the **Translation of financial statements** functionality is enabled the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. About translations /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-translations/about-translations page To use the translation functionality in Visma Net, you need to configure an appropriate translation definition (or multiple definitions) that defines the source and destination currencies, the source and destination ledgers, the branch and involved General ledger accounts used for the translation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About translations To use the translation functionality in Visma Net, you need to configure an appropriate translation definition (or multiple definitions) that defines the source and destination currencies, the source and destination ledgers, the branch and involved General ledger accounts used for the translation. To use the translation functionality in Visma Net, you need to configure an appropriate translation definition (or multiple definitions) that defines the source and destination currencies, the source and destination ledgers, the branch and involved General ledger accounts used for the translation. By using the [Translation definition (CM203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translation-definition-cm203000/) window, you can define as many translation definitions as needed, each having a unique ID. If one translation type is run more often than others, you can set it as the default translation in the **Default translation ID** field in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window. You can create a translation for a particular financial period by using the [Prepare translation (CM501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/prepare-translation-cm501000/) window. The result of this translation preparation is a translation worksheet that may be manually edited in the [Translation worksheets (CM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translation-worksheets-cm304000/) window. For a defined type, subsequent translations for the same financial period are incremental: The current translation adjusts the result of the previous released translation to match the current one. When the translation is released, an appropriate batch of adjusting transactions is created. ## Translation batch On release of the translation, the system automatically generates a translation batch that contains a journal entry for each account–subaccount pair involved in the translation. The translated amounts are posted to the destination ledger under the appropriate account and subaccount. Since translation uses different exchange rates for different types of accounts, there will be a difference between total of the assets and total of the liabilities. This difference will be posted to the **Translation gain** account and **Translation loss** account specified for the reporting currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. The similar accounts for the base currency are specified in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window. The gain or loss of each subsequent translation is calculated with respect to the previous translation performed for the same period. About creating translation definitions /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-translations/about-creating-translation-definitions page For each translation definition, create a reporting ledger to hold translation results, and specify the reporting currency as the ledger's currency in the Ledgers (GL201500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About creating translation definitions For each translation definition, create a reporting ledger to hold translation results, and specify the reporting currency as the ledger's currency in the Ledgers (GL201500) window. For more information: [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/). For each translation definition, create a reporting ledger to hold translation results, and specify the reporting currency as the ledger's currency in the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. The parent company can later use this ledger (in a subsidiary) as a source ledger for consolidation of balances. You use the [Translation definition (CM203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translation-definition-cm203000/) window to define rules for the translation. Also, you should specify the ranges of accounts and subaccounts to be translated and the translation methods. You can specify different translation methods for different ranges of account–subaccount pairs. These ranges should not intersect or contain the same pairs. ## Translation methods Visma Net provides the following translation methods, which can be used for different types of accounts: Year to date balance : Balances of the specified accounts (generally assets and liabilities) are translated using the exchange rate (of the type specific for this method) effective at the translation date. If there is a difference between the translated balance and the account balance stored in the translation ledger for the previous period, then the transaction will be generated to adjust the balance. The balance of the year to date net income account is not translated even if the account is included in one of the ranges. Period to date balance : Balances of the selected accounts are translated using the exchange rate of the type specific for this method effective at the translation date. If the period to date balance of the account is not zero, then the transaction will be generated to update the account balance by the translated period to date balance. All subsequent translations for the same period will adjust the account balance if it is changed. ## Translations in foreign currencies In case you translate the account balances from one foreign currency to another, you should maintain direct exchange rates between those foreign currencies in the currency exchange rate database. You can create the types of rates for translations by using the [Currency rate types (CM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rate-types-cm201000/) window and enter the current rates by using the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. The rates used for translations may be specified as the base currency rates with respect to the reporting currency. The regulations of a particular country dictate the method of choosing the appropriate exchange rates for the translation. In most countries, the method used to translate the financial statements from the base currency to the reporting currency depends on whether the base currency (the currency of the foreign operation) is the currency of a hyper-inflationary economy: + If the base currency is not hyper-inflationary, revenues and expenses are translated at the exchange rates effective on the dates of transactions or by using an appropriately weighted average exchange rate for the period. Assets and liabilities are translated at the period-end rate. + If the base currency is hyper-inflationary, all the balance sheet and income statement items are translated at the rate effective on the period-end. ## Translation editing You can view the result of translation on a translation worksheet in the [Translation worksheets (CM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translation-worksheets-cm304000/) window. If needed, you can manually edit the worksheet. As you adjust the values, both the credit total and debit total in this window change synchronously to reflect the changes, because one of them contains the translation gain or loss. When you are done editing, enter a new **Control total** value before you save the modified worksheet. Manage revaluations /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-revaluations section If your company has trade partners that use foreign currencies, you may want to maintain the supplier ledger accounts of some suppliers and the customer ledger accounts of some customers in foreign currencies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage revaluations If your company has trade partners that use foreign currencies, you may want to maintain the supplier ledger accounts of some suppliers and the customer ledger accounts of some customers in foreign currencies. If your company has trade partners that use foreign currencies, you may want to maintain the supplier ledger accounts of some suppliers and the customer ledger accounts of some customers in foreign currencies. In Visma Net, balances for foreign-currency accounts are maintained in both the foreign and the base currencies. Every transaction posted to such an account updates its balance in both currencies, and the amount in the base currency is calculated using the current exchange rate of the specified type associated with the supplier or customer. If you have such accounts in your system, at the end of each period, you have to revalue the balances of those accounts in the base currency, so that all relevant data is in the same currency and can be used for reporting. Revaluations reflect the changes in exchange rates between the dates when the documents were created (the dates of the sales or purchases) and the date of revaluation. About general ledger revaluations /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-revaluations/about-general-ledger-revaluations page For each of the denominated accounts, you can specify a rate type in the Revaluation rate type column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window, so that, the system will use the rate of the currency of the specified type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About general ledger revaluations For each of the denominated accounts, you can specify a rate type in the Revaluation rate type column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window, so that, the system will use the rate of the currency of the specified type. For more information: [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/). + If you do not specify any specific rate type for an account, the system will use the rate type specified in the **General ledger revaluation rate type** field in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window. + You can revalue the general ledger accounts by using the [Revalue general ledger accounts (CM506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/revalue-general-ledger-accounts-cm506000/) window. Revaluations are performed by currency and by financial period, and you can select particular accounts whose balances you want to revalue. + As a result of revaluation, the system calculates the difference between the revalued balance and the original balance and generates a batch that posts this difference to the denominated general ledger account and to the **Revaluation gain** account or to the **Revaluation loss** account, depending on the sign of the difference. + For each foreign currency, you can select accounts to post gains and losses from revaluations in the **Revaluation gains and losses accounts** section in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. + You can run general ledger revaluation at the end of the period as many times as you need to. Each time, the balance of the denominated account in the base currency will be updated by the difference, and the gain or loss amount will be posted either to the revaluation gain account or to the revaluation loss account. + Gains and losses calculated for general ledger revaluations are generally included in the net income for the period. About supplier and customer revaluations /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-revaluations/about-supplier-and-customer-revaluations page You perform revaluation by using the Revalue supplier accounts (CM504000) window or the Revalue customer accounts (CM505000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier and customer revaluations You perform revaluation by using the Revalue supplier accounts (CM504000) window or the Revalue customer accounts (CM505000) window. For more information: [Revalue supplier accounts (CM504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/revalue-supplier-accounts-cm504000/), [Revalue customer accounts (CM505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/revalue-customer-accounts-cm505000/). The default rate types for supplier and customer revaluations can be specified in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window. If they are not specified, the system will use the effective rates of the types associated with particular suppliers or customers. During revaluation, document amounts are revalued using the rates effective at the date of revaluation. ## Revaluation batches Generally, revaluations are performed for reporting purposes only; therefore, all the journal entries generated as a result of a revaluation, should be reversed in the following period. + Each revaluation batch generated as a result of a customer or supplier revaluation is an auto-reversing batch; the system will automatically generate a reversing batch with the date set on the first day of the next period. + If needed, you can perform revaluation of supplier ledger and customer ledger accounts more than once for the same period. + Subsequent revaluations in the same period adjust the previous amounts up or down to the current revalued amounts, and each revaluation generates an auto-reversing batch. + Revaluation gains and losses are included in the net income on the period-end reports. Currency management windows /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency management windows Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Currencies (CM202000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000 page By using this window, you can add new currencies to the system and view information related to existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currencies (CM202000) By using this window, you can add new currencies to the system and view information related to existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > It is recommended that you follow established norms when assigning IDs to the currencies; refer to the ISO 4217 code list. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General information area This area has multiple sections that hold currency-related information. In this section, you can enter general information about a new currency, or select and view a currency that is already available in the system.
Element Description
Currency ID The unique identifier for the currency.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the currency is available for use in Visma Net.
Currency symbol

The currency symbol to be used in reports.

To comply with international standards, refer to ISO 4217.
Decimal precision The number of digits following the decimal point that are used in operations with the currency.
Description

A description of the currency.

This alphanumeric string can be up to 30 characters.
Use for accounting

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the currency can be used for financial transactions.

When this check box is deselected, all account fields are disabled for the currency, and the currency can be used only for registration of expense receipts in the Expense receipts (EP301010) window.
Exclude from exchange rate import When this check box is selected, the exchange rate will not be included in exchange rate imports.
## The General ledger accounts tab ### The Realised gain and loss accounts section
Element Description
Realised gain account

The account to accumulate the realised gains.

Its balance is updated on every payment document entered in the system that shows a gain in the base currency.

A gain is recorded if the exchange rate on the date of payment is greater than that on the date of the document.
Realised gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for the realised gains.
Realised loss account

The account to accumulate the realised losses.

Its balance is updated on every payment document entered in the system that shows a loss in the base currency.

A loss is recorded if the exchange rate on the date of payment is less than that on the date of the document.
Realised loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such losses.
### The Unrealised gain and loss accounts section
Element Description
Unrealised gain account The account to which the unrealised gains from supplier ledger and customer ledger revaluations will be posted.
Unrealised gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for the unrealised gains for this currency.
Unrealised loss account The account to which the unrealised losses from supplier ledger and customer ledger revaluations will be posted.
Unrealised loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for the unrealised losses for this currency.
### The Unrealised gain and loss provisioning accounts section These accounts are used to record gains and losses on revaluations performed in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces. If these accounts are not specified, the gains and losses will update the supplier ledger accounts and customer ledger accounts, respectively.
Element Description
Provisioning account suppliers

The account to accumulate gains or losses from supplier ledger revaluations.

If no account is selected, the revaluation gains or losses are recorded to the supplier ledger account.
Provisioning subaccount suppliers The subaccount to be used for supplier ledger revaluation gains or losses.
Provisioning account customers

The account to accumulate period-to-date customer ledger revaluation gains or losses.

If no account is specified, the revaluation gains or losses update the balances of the customer ledger accounts of customers.
Provisioning subaccount customers The subaccount to be used for customer ledger revaluation gains or losses.
### The Revaluation gain and loss accounts section The accounts and subaccounts specified here are used for posting gains and losses resulting from revaluations of general ledger accounts denominated to foreign currencies performed at the period end or on period closing. Revaluation is performed with respect to the base currency.
Element Description
Revaluation gain account The account to which gains that result from general ledger revaluation will be posted.
Revaluation gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such gains.
Revaluation loss account The account to which losses resulting from general ledger revaluation will be posted.
Revaluation loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such losses.
### The Translation gain and loss accounts section The accounts and subaccounts specified in this section are used to record the gains and losses as results of translation to the currency. The subaccounts that will be actually used for recording translation gains and losses are generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine gain/loss sub. from** field in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window.
Element Description
Translation gain account The account to which gains resulting from translation will be posted.
Translation gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such gains.
Translation loss account The account to which losses resulting from translation will be posted.
Translation loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such losses.
### The Rounding gain and loss accounts section The accounts and subaccounts specified in this section accumulate the results of rounding in operations with the currency. The subaccounts that will be actually used for recording rounding gains and losses are generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine gain/loss sub. from** field in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window.
Element Description
Rounding gain account The account to which gains resulting from rounding will be posted.
Rounding gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such gains.
Rounding loss account The account to which losses that result from rounding will be posted.
Rounding loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such losses.
## The Rounding settings tab The **Rounding settings** tab appears in the Currencies (CM202000) window only when the **Invoice rounding** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Rounding rules for invoices In the drop-down list, select the rounding rule you want to use.
Rounding precision If the selected rounding rule is other than Use currency precision, you can select the rounding precision from the drop-down list here.
Use customer ledger preferences settings

When this is selected, the system uses the rounding rules specified in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window for the base currency.

You cannot override these rules.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Currency management preferences (CM101000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000 section You use this window to define the allowed rate variance used during data entry. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency management preferences (CM101000) You use this window to define the allowed rate variance used during data entry. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define the allowed rate variance used during data entry. Also, you can specify default rate types to be used for transactions in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, and Cash management workspaces and rounding gain and loss accounts for the base currency. For translations, you can assign the number series, the default translation, and the number of periods for which the system will keep the records. For more information on using multiple currencies, see: [About currency rate entry](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-currency-rates/about-currency-rate-entry/). ## The General settings area This area covers all the settings pertinent to the Currency management workspace, organised into multiple sections. ### The Setup and numbering settings section
Element Description
Batch number series The number series assigned to batches of transactions originating in the Currency management workspace. You can select the value from the list of number series available in the system.
Translation number series

The number series that is used for translations. You can select the value from the list of number series available in the system.

This field is available only if the Translation of financial statements functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Batch ref. number series The number series used for revaluation transactions of supplier and customer ledger accounts. You can select the value can be selected from the list of number series available in the system.
Combine gain/loss sub. from

The adjustable subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing subaccounts for recording realised and unrealised gains and losses and gains and losses resulting from rounding and translations.

Note

This rule is used for all currencies available in the system. For each segment, point to a segment and press F3 to open the list of options. The following options (defining the source of the segment value) are available:

C
From a subaccount associated with the branch (defined in the Branches (CS102000) ../../shared-files/cs102000-ref.html window)
N
From a subaccount associated with the currency

Note that the letter designating the option is repeated as many times as there are characters in the respective segment.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically post to general ledger on release A check box that indicates (if selected) that the batches originating in the Currency management workspace will be automatically posted to the general ledger on their release.
### The Data entry settings section
Element Description
Warn about rate variance A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should issue a warning when the rate specified for a transaction exceeds the default rate by a value greater than the Rate variance allowed.
Rate variance allowed (%)

The maximum rate variance allowed on transactions, expressed as a percent.

Along with the Warn about rate variance option, this setting helps protect against occasional input errors.
Default translation ID

The default type of translations performed in the system. You can select it from the list of previously defined translations. Transactions are defined on the Translation definition (CM203000) window. Initially, you can save the window without specifying a default translation.

This field is available only if the Translation of financial statements functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Default rate types section
Element Description
General ledger rate type

The default rate type to be used in General ledger and for translations.

Select a currency rate type from the list.
General ledger revaluation rate type The default rate type for revaluations performed for currency denominated accounts.
Cash management rate type

The default rate type to be used in Cash management.

Select a currency rate type from the list.
Rate type customers

The default rate type to be used in Customer ledger.

Select a currency rate type from the list.
Revaluation rate type customers

The default rate type to be used for revaluation of the customer ledger.

Select a currency rate type from the list.
Rate type suppliers

The default rate type to be used in Supplier ledger.

Select a currency rate type from the list.
Revaluation rate type suppliers

The default rate type to be used for revaluation of the supplier ledger.

Select a currency rate type from the list.
### The Realised gain and loss settings section The accounts and subaccounts specified in this section are used only for the base currency. Realised gains and losses are calculated when payments in the base currency are applied to the documents in foreign currencies. > [!NOTE] > The subaccounts that will be actually used for recording realised gains and losses are generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine gain/loss sub. from** field.
Element Description
Realised gain account The account to accumulate the realised gains.
Realised gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for the realised gains.
Realised loss account The account to accumulate the realised losses.
Realised loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such losses.
### The Translation gain and loss settings section The accounts and subaccounts specified in this section are used only for the base currency. > [!NOTE] > The subaccounts that will be actually used for recording translation gains and losses are generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine gain/loss sub. from** field.
Element Description
Translation gain account The account to which gains resulting from translation into the base currency will be posted.
Translation gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such gains.
Translation loss account The account to which losses resulting from translation into the base currency will be posted.
Translation loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such losses.
### The Import exchange rates section These fields are available if AutoPay is activated in the company. |Element|Description|||||| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |**Automatically import exchange rates**|When this is selected, it activates a predefined schedule that imports the exchange rates automatically as defined below in the **Import frequency** field. The following currencies get their exchange rates from the European Central Bank: \|\|\|\|\|\|\|\| \|---\|---\|---\|---\|---\|---\|---\| \|AED\|CNH\|GBP\|ISK\|MYR\|RUB\|USD\| \|AUD\|CNY\|HKD\|JPY\|NOK\|SAR\|ZAR\| \|BGN\|CZK\|HUF\|KRW\|NZD\|SEK\|\| \|BRL\|DKK\|IDR\|KWD\|PHP\|SGD\|\| \|CAD\|EGP\|ILS\|KZT\|PLN\|THB\|\| \|CHF\|EUR\|INR\|MXN\|RON\|TRY\|\| Other currencies have their rates collected from the Danske Bank, Finland.|||||| |AED|CNH|GBP|ISK|MYR|RUB|USD| |AUD|CNY|HKD|JPY|NOK|SAR|ZAR| |BGN|CZK|HUF|KRW|NZD|SEK|| |BRL|DKK|IDR|KWD|PHP|SGD|| |CAD|EGP|ILS|KZT|PLN|THB|| |CHF|EUR|INR|MXN|RON|TRY|| |**Import exchange rate to Rate type**|Click the ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the rate type that will be updated to the **Rate type** field as the result of the import. If you click the ![icon-grid](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-grid.png) icon, the **Currency rate types** window pops up where you can maintain the currency rate types.|||||| |**Import frequency**|Select how often the automatic import will be run: **Daily**, **Weekly**, or **Monthly**.|||||| |**Last import date**|The date when the exchange rates were last imported.||||||

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Currency rate types (CM201000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rate-types-cm201000 page In this window, you can view and configure rate types. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency rate types (CM201000) In this window, you can view and configure rate types. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view and configure rate types. Using rate types is convenient when, for example, different rates for the same currency pair should be used in transactions with different suppliers or customers. Also, you can create separate rate types for revaluation and translation purposes when different exchange rates should be used. For a rate type, you specify its settings, which will be applied to the exchange rates of the currency pairs to which the type is assigned. ## The table Here you can create rate types or view the existing list of rate types. Any rate types that have been used to record transactions cannot be deleted.
Column Description
Rate type ID The unique name that identifies the rate type. You can use up to six characters - letters, numbers, and special characters.
Description The detailed description of the rate type. The description may contain up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Days effective The number of days starting with the currency effective date (the Currency effective date column in the Currency rates (CM301000) window), during which the rate is considered current for rates of the type.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Currency rates (CM301000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000 page In this window, you can maintain and view rates that were effective on a specific date and enter new effective rates for multiple currencies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency rates (CM301000) In this window, you can maintain and view rates that were effective on a specific date and enter new effective rates for multiple currencies. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can maintain and view rates that were effective on a specific date and enter new effective rates for multiple currencies. The rates defined with respect to currencies other than the base currency are used for translations only. ## The top part In the top part, you can select a currency and a date to view the exchange rates of other currencies on that date with respect to the selected currency, and enter new rates.
Element Description
To currency

The currency (listed by its ID) that the exchange rates of other currencies are listed with respect to in the Rate details table (in the Currency rate entry tab).

By default, this currency is the base currency. You can add currencies in the Currencies (CM202000) window.
Effective date

The particular date for which you can view the exchange rates (with respect to the selected currency). Also, this is the effective date for any new rates you enter.

The value that you specify in this field is used differently on the Currency rate entry and Effective currency rates tabs in this window.

  • On the Currency rate entry tab, this value works as the default date, which the system inserts in the Currency effective date field when you add a row and enter rate details in the table.
  • On the Effective currency rates tab, the system displays the list of currency pairs with the rates that are effective on the specified date.
## The Currency rate entry tab The table on this tab lists the effective exchange rates on the selected date (if any). On this tab, you can enter an exchange rate for a required currency pair.
Column Description
From currency The ID of the currency whose exchange rate is shown with respect to the To currency.
Currency rate type The rate type specified for the selected currency pair.
Currency effective date A certain date on which the currency rate becomes effective.
Currency rate

The currency exchange rate.

For currency conversion, this rate is used along with the operation specified in Mult./div. The value normally indicates the number of currency units per one unit of the other currency.
Mult./div. The operation required for currency conversion: Divide or Multiply.
Rate reciprocal

The value that is inverse to the specified exchange rate.

This automatically calculated value is listed primarily for informational purposes but can be used for some inverse transactions.
## The Effective currency rates tab The table on this tab lists the exchange rates that are effective on the selected date.
Column Description
From currency The currency whose exchange rate is shown with respect to the currency selected as the To currency.
Currency rate type The rate type specified for the selected currency pair.
Currency effective date A certain date on which the currency rate becomes effective.
Currency rate

The currency exchange rate.

For currency conversion, it is used along with the operation specified in Mult./div. The value normally indicates the number of currency units per one unit of the other currency.
Mult./div. The operation required for currency conversion: Divide or Multiply.
Rate reciprocal

The value that is inverse to the specified exchange rate.

This automatically calculated value is listed primarily for informational purposes but can be used for some inverse transactions.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare translation (CM501000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/prepare-translation-cm501000 page Use this window to generate a translation in accordance with the selected translation definition or to view the details of other translations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare translation (CM501000) Use this window to generate a translation in accordance with the selected translation definition or to view the details of other translations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to generate a translation in accordance with the selected translation definition or to view the details of other translations. You can modify translation settings if necessary. As a result of processing, a translation worksheet is created. For details, see:[Overview of translations](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/manage-translations/about-translations/). This window is available only if the **Translation of financial statements** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create translation Generates the translation worksheet for the selected financial period with the currency rates effective on the selected date.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select a translation definition and to modify its settings if needed.
Element Description
Period The period for which the translation will be performed.
Last fin. period The period when the previous translation of this type was performed.
Translation ID The ID of a type of translation that has been defined in the Translation definition (CM203000) window.
Currency effective date The effective date for the exchange rate. The default value is the current business date, but it can be changed.
Description A detailed description of the translation type.
Branch The branch of the company.
Source ledger

A read-only field that specifies a ledger that holds the records to be translated. If the ledger is of the Actual type, translation is performed from the base currency.

If the ledger is of the Reporting type, translation will be performed from one foreign currency to another.
Destination ledger A read-only field that displays the destination ledger (of the Reporting type) to store the results of translation.
Source currency The currency from which the translation will be performed.
Destination currency

The currency of the destination ledger.

This is the currency to which all the amounts should be translated.
## The table This table displays the list of exchange rates that will be used for the translation being prepared.
Column Description
Currency rate type The rate type used for the translation.
Description The description of the rate type.
From currency The currency from which the translation is performed.
To currency The currency to which the translation is performed.
Currency effective date The date on which the rate used became effective.
Currency rate The exchange rate used for the translation.
Mult./div. The arithmetic operation to be used with the rate for currency conversion.
Rate reciprocal The rate used for reverse conversion.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Release translations (CM502000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/release-translations-cm502000 page Use this window to release multiple translations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release translations (CM502000) Use this window to release multiple translations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to release multiple translations. You can edit translation worksheets manually in the [Translation worksheets (CM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translation-worksheets-cm304000/) window. This window is available only if the **Translation of financial statements** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the translations you have selected.
## The table This table contains the worksheets that have been prepared but not yet released and all previously released translations.
Column Description
Translation number The translation number, which was assigned automatically in accordance with the numbering series.
Description The user-defined description of the translation.
Translation ID The identifier of the type of translation that has been defined in the Translation definition (CM203000) window.
Branch The branch of the company.
Destination ledger ID The ID of the ledger where the results of translation will be recorded.
Translation date The date of the translation.
Period The financial period for which translation is being performed, which is based on the specified date.
Status The status of the translation. Only Balanced and Released translations are shown.
Revalue supplier accounts (CM504000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/revalue-supplier-accounts-cm504000 page You can use this window to revalue Supplier ledger accounts that are maintained in a foreign currency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Revalue supplier accounts (CM504000) You can use this window to revalue Supplier ledger accounts that are maintained in a foreign currency. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to revalue Supplier ledger accounts that are maintained in a foreign currency. You select a foreign currency to display all accounts maintained in this currency, select the specific accounts to be revalued, and provide a description for the Supplier ledger revaluation. You can revalue the Supplier ledger accounts at the end of each period as often as needed to accurately reflect your cash position. The accounts used for the gain/loss and Supplier ledger accounts are set for each currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Revalue

Initiates the revaluation of the selected account-subaccount pairs or those for which you selected the unlabelled check boxes in the table.

As a result, a Currency management batch is released and posted.

If there is an error in the Period or the Currency effective date field, the button is disabled.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, described in the following table, you can specify a revaluation.
Element Description
Period

The financial period for which revaluation is performed.

  • If the On period closing option is selected in the Generate reversing entries field in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window, you cannot run the revaluation. An error message to change the setting will be displayed.
  • If the selected period or the next period is inactive, you will get an error message. To be able to process, go the Financial periods (GL201000) window and activate the period(s).
  • If the period is closed and the Allow posting in closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000 window is clear, you will get an error message. To be able to process, select the Allow posting in closed periods check box.
  • If the period is closed and you allow posting in closed periods (the Allow posting in closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) is selected), you will get a warning message.
Currency effective date

The effective date for the currency exchange rate to be used for the revaluation.

By default, it is the last day of the current period.

If you enter a date outside the selected period, you will get an error message and cannot process the transactions.
Currency The foreign currency used by the suppliers.
Description

A detailed description for the revaluation. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used.

The system uses this description as the description of the batch (and each journal entry of this batch) generated by the revaluation process.

For example: It is added to the Transaction description column in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window for each journal entry of the Currency management batch, and to the Description column in the Account details (GL404000) window for each Currency management batch.
Revaluation total The total amount of the revaluation. The value is calculated in the base currency.
## The table This table contains the list of accounts with balances in the original currency and the base currency before and after revaluation.
Column Description
Branch The branch that uses this account.
Account An account that has records in the selected currency.
Description The description of the account.
Subaccount

The subaccount used with the account.

This column is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier A supplier whose balance is maintained in the selected currency on the account shown in the Account column.
Supplier name The supplier name as it appears in the system.
Currency rate type

The rate type to be used for the revaluation.

It is specified in the Revaluation rate type suppliers field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window. The rate type can also be specified for a supplier individually in the Currency rate type field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Currency rate The currency rate effective on the date of revaluation.
Foreign currency balance The balance in the selected foreign currency.
Original balance The account balance in the base currency as it is maintained historically.
Gain or loss PTD The period-to-date (PTD) revaluation gains or losses accrued on the Supplier ledger provisioning account if such an account was specified for the selected foreign currency.
Revalued balance The balance of the account recalculated by using the efficient currency rate.
Difference The difference (in the base currency) between the original (historical) and the revalued balances.
Last revaluation period The period when revaluation was performed last.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Revalue customer accounts (CM505000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/revalue-customer-accounts-cm505000 page You use this window to revalue Customer ledger accounts maintained in a foreign currency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Revalue customer accounts (CM505000) You use this window to revalue Customer ledger accounts maintained in a foreign currency. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to revalue Customer ledger accounts maintained in a foreign currency. Select a foreign currency to display all customer accounts maintained in this currency, and then select the accounts and provide a description for the Customer ledger revaluation. You can revalue the Customer ledger accounts at the end of each period as often as needed to accurately reflect your cash position. The accounts used for the gain/loss and Customer ledger accounts are set for each currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Revalue Initiates the revaluation of customers’ selected accounts. As a result, the batch is released and posted.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, which the following table describes, you can specify a revaluation.
Element Description
Period

The period for which the revaluation is performed.

  • If the On period closing option is selected in the Generate reversing entries field in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window, you cannot run the revaluation. An error message to change the setting will be displayed.
  • If the selected period or the next period is inactive, you will get an error message. To be able to process, go the Financial periods (GL201000) window and activate the period(s).
  • If the period is closed and the Allow posting in closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000 window is clear, you will get an error message. To be able to process, select the If there is an error in the Period or the Currency effective date field, the button is disabled.
  • If the period is closed and you allow posting in closed periods (the Allow posting in closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) is selected), you will get a warning message.
Currency effective date

The effective date for the currency exchange rate to be used for the revaluation.

By default, it is the last date of the current period.

If you enter a date outside the selected period, you will get an error message and cannot process the transactions.
Currency The foreign currency used by the customers.
Description

A detailed description of the revaluation. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

The system uses this description as the description of the batch (and each journal entry of this batch) generated by the revaluation process.

For example: It is added to the Transaction description column in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window for each journal entry of the Currency management batch, and to the Description column in the Account details (GL404000) window for each Currency management batch.
Revaluation total The total amount of the revaluation. The value is calculated in the base currency.
## The table This table contains the list of accounts with the balances in the original currency and in the base currency before and after revaluation.
Column Description
Branch The branch that uses this account.
Account An account that has records in the selected currency.
Description The description of the account.
Subaccount

The subaccount used with the account.

This column is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer A customer whose balance is maintained in the selected currency on the account shown in the Account column.
Customer name The customer name as it appears in the system.
Currency rate type

The rate type to be used for the revaluation.

It is specified in the Revaluation rate type customers field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.

The rate type can also be specified for a supplier individually in the Currency rate type field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Currency rate The currency rate effective on the date of revaluation.
Foreign currency balance The balance in the selected foreign currency.
Original balance The account balance in the base currency as it is maintained historically.
Gain or loss PTD The period-to-date (PTD) gains or losses accrued on the Customer ledger provisioning account if such an account was specified for the selected foreign currency.
Revalued balance The balance of the account recalculated by using the efficient currency rate.
Difference The difference (in the base currency) between the original (historical) and the revalued balances.
Last revaluation period The period when revaluation was last performed.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Revalue general ledger accounts (CM506000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/revalue-general-ledger-accounts-cm506000 page Use this window to revalue General ledger accounts denominated to foreign currencies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Revalue general ledger accounts (CM506000) Use this window to revalue General ledger accounts denominated to foreign currencies. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to revalue General ledger accounts denominated to foreign currencies. Select a currency of denomination to display all General ledger accounts maintained in this currency, and then select accounts and provide a description for the revaluation. You can revalue the General ledger accounts denominated in foreign currencies as often as needed to accurately reflect your cash position. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Revalue

Initiates the revaluation of the General ledger accounts you have selected. As a result, a batch of Currency management transactions is released and posted.

If there is an error in the Period or the Currency effective date field, the button is disabled.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify a revaluation.
Element Description
Period

The period for which revaluation is performed.

  • If the period is inactive, you will get an error message. To be able to process, go the Financial periods (GL201000) window and activate the period.
  • If the period is closed and the Allow posting in closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000 window is clear, you will get an error message. To be able to process, select the Allow posting in closed periods check box.
  • If the period is closed and you allow posting in closed periods (the Allow posting in closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) is selected), you will get a warning message.
Currency effective date The effective date for the currency exchange rate. By default, the last day of the current period is shown.
Currency The currency of denomination.
Description

A detailed description of the revaluation. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

The system uses this description as the description of the batch (and each journal entry of this batch) generated by the revaluation process.

For example: It is added to the Transaction description column in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window for each journal entry of the Currency management batch, and to the Description column in the Account details (GL404000) window for each Currency management batch.
Revaluation total The total amount of the revaluation.
## The table This table contains the list of accounts with the balances in the original currency and in the base currency before and after revaluation.
Column Description
Branch The branch that uses this account.
Account An account that has records in the selected foreign currency.
Description The description of the account.
Subaccount

The subaccount used with the account.

This column is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency rate type

The rate type to be used for the revaluation.

It is specified in the General ledger revaluation rate type field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.

It can also be specified for a General ledger account individually in the Revaluation rate type field in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.
Currency rate The currency rate effective on the date of revaluation.
Foreign currency balance The balance in the selected foreign currency.
Original balance The account balance in the base currency as it is maintained historically.
Revalued balance The balance of the account recalculated by using the efficient currency rate.
Difference The difference (in the base currency) between the original (historical) and the revalued balances.
Last revaluation period The period when revaluation was last performed.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Translation definition (CM203000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translation-definition-cm203000 page In this window, you can define translation types, which may be required for reporting purposes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Translation definition (CM203000) In this window, you can define translation types, which may be required for reporting purposes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define translation types, which may be required for reporting purposes. One of the types can be set (by its ID) as the default translation in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window. The settings of the default translation will appear in the [Prepare translation (CM501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/prepare-translation-cm501000/) window when it is opened. This window is available only if the **Translation of financial statements** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part You can use the elements in this area, which are described in the following table, to create a new translation type or to select an existing one to review its settings.
Element Description
Translation ID

The ID of the type of translation.

Each type might involve a particular language or range of accounts. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Source ledger ID

A ledger that holds the records to be translated.

If a ledger with the Actual type is specified, the translation is performed from the base currency. If a ledger of the Reporting type is selected, the translation will be performed from one foreign currency to another. For such translations, direct exchange rates for the specified pair of foreign currencies should be maintained.
Destination ledger ID The destination ledger (of the Reporting type) to store the results of the translation.
Branch The branch of the company.
Description

A detailed description of the translation type or definition.

You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this translation type is active.

A translation type cannot be deleted if any translations were created according to the type.

Clear the check box to make the definition inactive; inactive definitions cannot be used to create translations.
Source currency

Read-only.

The currency of the source ledger. This is the currency from which the translation is performed.

If it is not the base currency, re-translation (that is, a translation from one foreign currency to another one) is supposed.
Destination currency

Read-only.

The currency of the destination ledger. This is the currency to which all the amounts should be translated.
## The table In this table, you can specify multiple ranges of accounts and subaccounts. For each range, you can specify a translation method and a rate type.
Column Description
Account from The account that starts the range of accounts for which balances should be translated into the target currency.
Description The description provided for the account.
Subaccount from The subaccount that starts the range of subaccounts for which account balances should be translated into the target currency.
Account to The account that ends the range of accounts for which balances should be translated into the target currency.
Description The description provided for the account.
Subaccount to The subaccount that ends the range of subaccounts for which account balances should be translated into the target currency.
Translation method The translation method, which is one of the following: YTD balance or PTD balance.
Rate type The default rate type for the method, which appears once the method is selected. The value can be changed.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Translation worksheets (CM304000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translation-worksheets-cm304000 page In this window, you can view the details of existing translations and to edit translation details. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Translation worksheets (CM304000) In this window, you can view the details of existing translations and to edit translation details. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the details of existing translations and to edit translation details. When a translation is created, the debit total is equal to the credit total, because one of the values contains the translation gain or loss calculated as the difference between the credit total and the debit total. However, after you finish editing the translation worksheet, the totals may differ. If they do, enter a new translation control total before you save the worksheet. When you save it, a new gain or loss will be calculated to compensate for the difference, and the translation will become balanced again. This window is available only if the **Translation of financial statements** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the translation and initiates the creation of the appropriate batch.
Reports Provides the Translation details menu command, which you can click for quick access to the Translation details (CM651500) report for the translation.
## The top part In this area, you can select a translation that has been prepared in the [Prepare translation (CM501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/prepare-translation-cm501000/) window and view the settings of the translation.
Element Description
Translation number The unique number assigned to the translation in accordance with the numbering series.
Status The status of the translation, which can be Balanced, Unposted (the status of a released translation), or Posted.
Translation date The date when the translation was generated.
Currency effective date The date for the destination currency rate change.
Period The period for which the translation is performed.
Description The detailed description of the translation type.
Translation ID The ID of the type of translation, which was defined in the Translation definition (CM203000) window.
Branch The branch of the company.
Destination ledger ID The destination ledger (which should have a reporting type) where the results of the translation will be stored.
Destination currency The currency of the destination ledger. This is the currency to which all the amounts should be translated.
Translation batch number The number of the batch that implements the translation transactions upon release. You can click the batch number to view details of the batch.
Debit total The debit total for the translation. The translation gain or loss amount is added to balance the credit and debit totals.
Credit total The credit total for the translation.
Control total

The translation control total.

When the translation worksheet is saved, the system checks whether the debit total is equal to the credit total and whether they both are equal to the control total.

If there is any difference resulting from manual editing, you must enter a new control total.
## The table This table displays the list of account balances translated to the specified currency in accordance with the translation settings.
Column Description
Account The particular account for which the balance for the specified subaccount was converted into the destination currency.
Description The description of the account.
Subaccount The subaccount for the account.
Translation method The translation method used for the account.
Source amount The period-to-date (PTD) or year-to-date (YTD) balance of the account in the base currency.
Translated amount The PTD or YTD balance of the account in the reporting currency.
Orig. translated amount

The account balance in the reporting currency after the previous translation.

For the first translation, all account-subaccount pairs involved have zero balances. For the first translation in the period, all account-subaccount pairs for which the PTD method is used have zero amounts in the column.
Rate type The rate type used for translation of the balance.
Currency rate The effective exchange rate for the destination currency.
Transaction debit amount

The debit amount of an adjusting transaction for the account-subaccount pair, which is calculated as the currently translated amount minus the result of the previous translation.

If the difference is positive, it is recorded as the debit amount, and if the difference is negative, the debit amount is set to zero.
Transaction credit amount

The credit amount of an adjusting transaction for the account-subaccount pair, which is calculated as the currently translated amount minus the result of the previous translation.

If the difference is negative, it is recorded as the credit amount; if the difference is positive, the credit amount is set to zero.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Translations history (CM401000) /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/translations-history-cm401000 page You can use this window for quick inquiries about translations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Translations history (CM401000) You can use this window for quick inquiries about translations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In the top part, you select a translation type, status, and financial period, and in the table, you view the list of translations performed for the financial period. This window is available only if the **Translation of financial statements** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part In the top part, you can select the translation type, financial period, and translation status of transactions to be displayed. You can select one check box, **Unreleased** or **Released**, or both check boxes.
Element Description
Translation ID The ID of a type of translation that has been defined in the Translation definition (CM203000) window.
Period

The financial period for which the translation was calculated.

Leave the field blank to view all the translations.
Unreleased A check box that you select to view the summary and details of unreleased, just-created translations, which may be edited.
Released

A check box that you select to view the summary and details of released translations.

These translations may not be edited.
## The table This table contains the list of translations that meet the selection criteria you have specified.
Column Description
Translation number The unique ID number of a translation.
Status The status of the translation.
Description The user-defined description of the translation.
Translation date The date when the translation was created.
Translation ID The identifier of the type of translation, which has been defined in the Translation definition (CM203000) window.
Destination ledger ID The ID of the destination ledger.
Period The financial period for which translation was performed.
Currency effective date The date when the currency exchange rate of the specified type was last changed.
Translation batch number The translation batch number.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Currency management reports /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-reports section With the reports for the Currency management workspace, you gain better visibility into your financials. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency management reports With the reports for the Currency management workspace, you gain better visibility into your financials. With the reports for the Currency management workspace, you gain better visibility into your financials. You can view the history of foreign currency rates, evaluate unrealised currency gains and losses by revaluing Supplier ledger and Customer ledger accounts, view translation details, and track the history of batch modifications. Because the Currency management workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, such as Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, and General ledger, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a report to any supporting details. > [!NOTE] > Because the Currency management reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. Some reports generated as PDFs require digital signature. Batch register currency management (CM620500) report /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-reports/batch-register-currency-management-cm620500-report section This report displays all the batches released in the Currency management workspace for the specified financial period and branch, and posted to the selected ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register currency management (CM620500) report This report displays all the batches released in the Currency management workspace for the specified financial period and branch, and posted to the selected ledger. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays all the batches released in the Currency management workspace for the specified financial period and branch, and posted to the selected ledger. Batches are listed by their date and shown with their control totals. The list also shows the users who created and edited the batches. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company the report will cover. By default, the current company is selected. Leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch the report will cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information for all branches.
Ledger The ledger to be reported on. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. Select a period from the list. By default, the period of the system business date is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. Select a period from the list. By default, the period of the system business date is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Batch register currency management (detailed) (CM621000) report /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-reports/batch-register-currency-management-detailed-cm621000-report section This report displays the details of all batches released in the Currency management workspace for the specified financial period and branch, and posted to the selected ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register currency management (detailed) (CM621000) report This report displays the details of all batches released in the Currency management workspace for the specified financial period and branch, and posted to the selected ledger. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the details of all batches released in the Currency management workspace for the specified financial period and branch, and posted to the selected ledger. Batches are listed by their date and are shown with their control totals. The list also shows the users who created and edited the batches. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company the report will cover. By default, the current company is selected. Leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch the report will cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information for all branches.
Ledger The ledger to be reported on. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the period of the system business date is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the period of the system business date is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Currency rate history by date (CM651000) report /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-reports/currency-rate-history-by-date-cm651000-report section This report shows the fluctuations of the selected currency exchange rate, as recorded in the database during the date range you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency rate history by date (CM651000) report This report shows the fluctuations of the selected currency exchange rate, as recorded in the database during the date range you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the fluctuations of the selected currency exchange rate, as recorded in the database during the date range you select. Exchange rates are listed by the date and the rate type. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From date The start date of the date range to be used for the report; by default, the first date of the current period is used.
To date The end date of the date range; by default, the current business date is used.
Currency The currency to be reported on, by its ID.
Rate type The rate type to be used for the report. Select a rate type, or leave this field blank to view information on all rate types.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Currency rate history by ID (CM650500) report /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-reports/currency-rate-history-by-id-cm650500-report section This report shows the fluctuations of the selected currency exchange rate, as recorded in the database during the date range you choose. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Currency rate history by ID (CM650500) report This report shows the fluctuations of the selected currency exchange rate, as recorded in the database during the date range you choose. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the fluctuations of the selected currency exchange rate, as recorded in the database during the date range you choose. Exchange rates are listed by rate type and by the date of the record. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From date The start date of the date range to be used for the report; by default, the first date of the current period is used.
To date The end date of the date range; by default, the current business date is used.
Currency The currency to be reported on, by its ID.
Rate type The rate type to be used for the report. Select a rate type, or leave this field blank to view information on all rate types.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Translation details (CM651500) report /visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-reports/translation-details-cm651500-report section This report shows the details of the selected translation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Translation details (CM651500) report This report shows the details of the selected translation. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window is available only if the **Translation of financial statements** check box is selected and enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The particular financial period.
Translation number

The translation for which you want to see details.

Select the translation by its ID and financial period; if you do not select a translation, translation details for the selected period will be shown.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Customer ledger /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger Customer ledger - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-overview page By using the Customer ledger workspace, you can maintain complete and structured information about customers and salespersons, and track all sales, commissions, and incoming payments from customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger - overview By using the Customer ledger workspace, you can maintain complete and structured information about customers and salespersons, and track all sales, commissions, and incoming payments from customers. With a variety of time-saving automation functionalities and reporting options, the Customer ledger workspace of Visma Net streamlines your entire receivable process and gives you the ability to reduce input error rates. The primary functionalities of the Customer ledger workspace are described briefly below and extensively in other topics in this section. ## Customer ledger multi-currency options Each customer account has a default currency assigned to it. Invoices will be generated in this customer's default currency unless currency overriding is allowed. The system automatically computes realised gains or losses when payments are received from foreign customers. Users can revalue outstanding foreign currency invoices in the base currency as often as needed by using the Currency management workspace. ## Customer defaults and overrides During Visma Net implementation, you can establish customer classes, which provide suitable default values to ease data entry. If you set up a default customer class that holds data common to most customers, users can add new customers more quickly. Also, when users enter documents, they specify a customer and most of the elements will be automatically filled in with the default values of the customer. This makes input of documents much easier and saves time. ## Multiple document and payment types With the Customer ledger workspace, your company's personnel can create manually or generate sales invoices for sold goods and services provided. You can correct invoices by using credit notes and purchase debit notes. Users can account for goods and services paid by cash and returned for cash with **cash sale** and **cash return** documents, respectively. Payments of various types made by different methods and prepayments can be entered and posted as they are received. For more information, see the following topics: + [About types of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/) ## Payment application When entering a customer payment, you can apply it to open invoices and notes of the customer including credit notes. To reduce the time required to match payments to invoices,Visma Net gives you the ability to automatically apply customer payments and prepayments to the oldest outstanding invoices, notes, or overdue charges. If a payment was applied incorrectly, you can void the application of the payment or the entire payment. For more information, see [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/). ## Rounding of invoice totals If the functionality of rounding of the document amounts is activated in your system, you can set up the rules and the precision to be used to automatically round the amounts of invoices. Notice that the rounding rules and the rounding precision that you specify for invoices are the same for all currencies. For more information, see the following topics: + [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/) + [Set up document amount rounding](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/set-up-document-amount-rounding/) ## Workflow options In Visma Net, you can configure the document processing workflow to match the policies established in your organisation. You can use multiple options that control processing and multiple processing forms. Newly entered documents can be released immediately or placed on hold and then reviewed by an authorised user before being released. Also, you can configure the workflow in such way that the documents are automatically posted on release, or that posting can be performed only by authorised users. ## Sending documents electronically With Visma Net, you can set up sending released documents, such as invoices or notes, electronically to customers who want to receive documents by email. Also, you can configure sending such emails to employees who work with specific customers. For customers who do not want to receive documents electronically, you can continue to print documents for sending them via postal services. For more information, see [Manage mailings - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview/). ## Recurring invoices Schedules can be used to create and maintain recurring invoices, such as invoices for regular jobs or services your company provides for customers. After a recurring invoice is entered and assigned to a schedule, you will not need to re-enter the entire invoice each time it needs to be generated. For more information, see [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/). ## Payment terms You can define payment terms, which can be associated with specific customers. The payment terms, which are applied to incoming payments, define the due dates and the cash discounts available in case invoices are paid ahead of due dates. For details, see [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). ## Debt collection Whenever customer payments are not immediately bound to the delivery of goods and services, businesses need complete and continuous tracking of outstanding debts. In Visma Net, it is easy to configure statement cycles and print statements, so customers have a detailed record of their balances with a specific branch or the entire organisation. Credit verification rules can be defined for each customer class and for each individual customer. Overdue charges can be applied if payments are late. A sequence of dunning letters can be configured to remind customers about unpaid invoices, and a credit hold can be applied to customers once the last letter has been generated. To learn more, see [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). ## Write-offs After a certain period of time, a credit on your books should be written off and considered income. You can write off customer credits and balances that are less than the tolerance limits you have defined for the customers. For more details, see [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). ## Salespersons and commissions In Visma Net, you can create accounts for each salesperson and assign default commission percentages. Sales commissions are calculated automatically, based on total sales or payments minus total returns during the sales commission period. See [Manage commissions - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/manage-commissions-overview/) for additional details. ## Contracts Many businesses use contracts if they provide goods and services to the customers during the specified period of time. For example: To maintain and repair a product during the manufacturer’s warranty period or after it has expired. In Visma Net, you can configure contract templates to provide typical settings for contracts. Contract settings are used for contract renewals (if they're permitted) and for recurring invoicing in accordance with the contract's invoicing schedule. For more information, see [Manage contracts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/manage-contracts-overview/). ## Customer ledger security options To restrict users' access to some customer accounts, you can include the customer accounts and the users authorised to work with them in restriction groups. This functionality can be used to properly organise the work of salespeople. ## Audit trail Invoices have unique IDs that have been generated in accordance with the assigned number series, along with the customers' document reference numbers. These functionalities provide an easy-to-follow audit trail while preventing duplicate entries and payments. ## Other functionalities and options In addition to the functionalities already discussed, you can use the following capabilities to organise the collection process in the most convenient and effective way for your business: + Create and maintain an unlimited number of customer accounts. + Attach scanned images or electronic versions of customer original documents to payments, notes, and prepayments or to lines of the documents + Organise and store comprehensive customer information, including multiple invoicing and shipping addresses and associated general ledger accounts. + Run multiple reports displaying customer balances, ageing periods, statements, and transaction registration information. + Use inquiries, which display current customer information in a variety of ways: + Outstanding balances for a customer or customers by period and by currency. + Documents that are past due for a specific customer and overdue charge amounts owed by the customers. + Commissions payable to salespersons and their details, including sales amounts, return amounts, and total commissions. Migrate documents to Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/migrate-documents-to-visma-net section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Migrate documents to Visma Net Migrate documents to Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/migrate-documents-to-visma-net/migrate-documents-to-visma-net page If you need to move historical data to Visma Net, you can enter fully or partially settled documents into the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Migrate documents to Visma Net If you need to move historical data to Visma Net, you can enter fully or partially settled documents into the system. If you need to move historical data to Visma Net, you can enter fully or partially settled documents into the system. To load documents without affecting the General ledger, you have to first activate migration mode. You activate this mode in the Customer ledger workspace or in the Supplier ledger workspace (or both), depending on the documents to be migrated. ## Activating migration mode in the Customer ledger workspace To turn on migration mode in the Customer ledger workspace, you use the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. In this window, in the **Posting settings** section of the **General settings** tab, you select the **Activate migration mode** check box; you then click **Save** in the window toolbar. You can select or clear this check box at any time. ## Activating migration mode in the Supplier ledger workspace To turn on migration mode in the Supplier ledger workspace, you use the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. In this window, in the **Posting settings** section of the **General settings** tab, you select the **Activate migration mode** check box; you then click **Save** on the form toolbar. You can select or clear this check box at any time. When entering a document to the system in migration mode, you need to specify the open balance of the document, its original amount, and the document date. When these documents are released, migrated documents update customer or supplier balances but do not update the General ledger.

Related pages

Concepts

 About processing documents in migration mode /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/migrate-documents-to-visma-net/about-processing-documents-in-migration-mode page Before you start the migration process in Visma Net, you need to prepare the list of all Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that you want to migrate to the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing documents in migration mode Before you start the migration process in Visma Net, you need to prepare the list of all Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that you want to migrate to the system. Before you start the migration process in Visma Net, you need to prepare the list of all Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that you want to migrate to the system. This list can contain all outstanding documents, including the closed ones (if needed). For each document, you need to specify its original amount, document date, currency, exchange rate, and balance open on the migration date. > [!NOTE] > The documents added when migration mode is activated do not update the General ledger. ## Types of Customer ledger and Supplier ledger documents that can be migrated The following types of Customer ledger documents can be entered in the migration mode: Invoice : , **Debit note**, and **Credit note**: You add these documents by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Payment : , **Prepayment**, and **Customer refund**: You add these documents by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Cash sale : and **Cash return**: You add these documents by using the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. The following types of Supplier ledger documents can be entered in the migration mode: Invoice : , **Purchase credit note**, and **Credit adjustment**: You add these types of documents by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Check : , **Prepayment**, and **Supplier refund**: You add these types of documents by using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) In migration mode, you add the needed documents with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status. These documents can be edited and released only when migration mode is activated. ## Entry of a document's open balance When you are adding an Customer ledger or Supplier ledger document, you specify the open balance of a migrated document on the document entry window as follows: + In the **Balance** field, which is available for editing in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) and [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) windows + In the **Available balance** field in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window + In the **Unapplied balance** field in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window When you save a document, the system validates that the open balance does not exceed the document's original amount; if it does, the system displays an error. An open balance that you specify in a document in migration mode will be displayed in the **Migrated balance** field on the **Financial details** tab on the document entry window once you save a document. This field is available for migrated documents only. ## Release of migrated documents The release of migrated Customer ledger documents causes customer balances to be updated; similarly, the Supplier ledger documents update supplier balances. These released documents do not produce batches in the General ledger. Thus, on the **Financial details** tab of the corresponding document entry windows, instead of the link to the General ledger batch, the **Migrated** word will be displayed for a migrated document in the **Batch no.** field (note that the name of the field varies depending in the window). > [!NOTE] > Migrated documents cannot be edited and released when migration mode is deactivated, and regular documents cannot be edited and released when migration mode is activated.

Related pages

Concepts

 Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger preferences Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/about-customer-ledger-preferences page In the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window you can customise the Customer ledger workspace to your company's requirements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Customer ledger preferences In the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window you can customise the Customer ledger workspace to your company's requirements. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). The settings information for the customer ledger is organised in five tabs. ## General settings On the **General settings** tab, you can set or change your company's settings for + number series + posting and retention + data entry + data processing + commission settings for salespersons + default write-off reason codes + VAT recalculations ## Price/discount settings On the **Price/discount settings** tab, you can set or change your company's settings for + default rate types + price retention + discount application ## Dunning settings To start producing dunning letters, on the **Dunning settings** tab you define the process settings that are appropriate for your company. Then you run the process when needed. As a result of the process, you have prepared dunning letters that you can email or print and send by postal mail to your customers. ### Dunning process settings You can select how the system will prepare dunning letters through grouping overdue documents by: + Customer account (the **By customer** option). This is the default. + Customer account and the dunning level of a document (the **By document** option). ### Dunning fee settings When dunning letters are sent, they have a cost. You can specify the amount of this dunning fee for each level. In the **Dunning fee item** field you specify a dedicated non-stock item that provides an account and a subaccount to register the collected fee. When a dunning letter of a particular level is released, the system generates an invoice for the customer with the fee amount specified for that level. This invoice is created with the **Balanced** status. You can adjust the fee amount, if needed, and then release the invoice in the **Invoices** window. If you want the dunning fee documents to be automatically released, select the check box **Automatically release dunning fee documents**. The documents will never be printed, emailed, or sent to AutoInvoice since the fees are charged on the dunning letter itself. If the dunning fee amount is set to zero, no invoice is generated. The dunning fee amount is specified on the **Dunning letter** report. You can send a dunning letter to a customer that contains invoices which do not have the same dunning level. The invoices are grouped by dunning level, but the dunning fee is the one of the highest dunning invoice and not the sum of the dunning fees for each level. ### Include other unpaid documents Select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box if you want the system to automatically include documents that are not yet overdue in the list of due documents in a dunning letter. The option is selected by default. ### Exclusion from the dunning process You can exclude a customer from the dunning process, regardless of which dunning process you have selected. To do this for a customer, deselect both the **Send dunning letters by email** and **Print dunning letters** check boxes on the **Invoicing settings** tab in the **Customers** window. If you prepare dunning letters by document, you can exclude a particular document from the dunning process by selecting the check box **Exclude from the dunning process** in the **Dunning info** section of the document in the **Invoices** window. ### Dunning letter levels Visma Net assigns to each document the dunning letter level that is equal to the level of the last dunning letter that included this document. If the document has not been included in a dunning letter yet, the system sets the dunning level for that document to 0. You can send to a customer a dunning letter that contains invoices which do not have the same dunning level. The invoices are grouped by dunning level. ## Mailing settings On the **Mailing settings** tab, you can set or change your company's settings for the format of dunning letters, invoices, expiry notes, and statements, as well as for default recipients. ## Payment settings On the **Payment settings** tab, you can set or change your company’s CID definition. It is possible to set up one definition for domestic payments and one for international payments.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Add a payment message prefix /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/add-a-payment-message-prefix section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a payment message prefix ## Before you start [Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer/). 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Customer refund settings** section, fill in the **Payment message prefix** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? Make sure you have created and released the credit note(s), payment(s) and/or prepayment(s) to be refunded. For step-by-step instructions on how to create a credit note, see [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/). For step-by-step instructions on how to create a payment or prepayment, see [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). For step-by-step instructions on how to release these documents, see [Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/). To create a customer refund for a document and send it for payment via AutoPay, go to [Process a customer refund](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar50300s-process-customer-refund-task/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up invoice mailing in the Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/set-up-invoice-mailing-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoice mailing in the Customer ledger preferences 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Default sources** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **INVOICE** on the new row. 1. In the **Default email account** column, select the email account from which the invoices will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the invoice, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **InvoiceNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Default recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. The person who is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can also configure dunning letter mailing for: One customer, see: [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/). Customer classes, see: [Set up invoice mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a new payment configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/create-a-new-payment-configuration section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new payment configuration 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Payment settings** tab. 1. Click Insert. 1. Optional: If you have multiple branches, you can add different settings for each branch. 1. In the **Payment method** field, you can select the payment method to which you want your configuration to apply. 1. In the **Description** field, add a name for your new configuration. 1. In the **Reference modulus** drop-down list, select a modulus for your new configuration. 1. In the table below, under **Element**, you choose which elements will make up your new configuration. 1. You can add new elements by clicking ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Under **Number of positions**, fill in the number of digits the element should have. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences ## Before you start [Configure an overdue charge code](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/configure-an-overdue-charge-code/) ## Activate processing settings for overdue charges 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. [Select processing options for overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/select-processing-options-for-overdue-charges/). 1. Click the **Dunning settings** tab. 1. In the **Dunning process** field, select one of these options: + **By customer** - The system prepares reminders by grouping overdue documents by customer account. If you select this option, the system selects the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box, and sets it to read-only. See: [Prepare dunning letters by customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-customer/). + **By document** - The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer and by document dunning level. See: [Prepare dunning letters by document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-document/). > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you keep the default option, which is **By document**. You can switch from **By customer** to **By document**, but the other way around is not recommend. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new line in the table. The system adds a new dunning letter level and suggests a value to use for days past due and days to settle. You can change these values. 1. In the **Days past due** field, select how many days after the payment is due that you want to send out the first dunning letter. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a free text to describe what kind of reminder this is. 1. In the **Dunning fee** field, enter the fee for this dunning letter level. 1. In the **Report text code** field, select one oft he available values. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Select mailing settings 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Default sources** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **DUNNINGLETTER** on the new row. 1. In the **Default email account** column, select the email account from which the letters will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. > [!NOTE] > If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Default recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. > [!NOTE] > The person that is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Calculate overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/calculate-overdue-charges/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up dunning letter mailing in the Customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up dunning letter mailing in the Customer ledger preferences 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Default sources** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. Select **DUNNINGLETTER**. 1. In the **Default email account** column, select the email account you want to use as your sender address. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report you want to use to generate the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be the template for the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format you specify here is different from a contact's format preferences, the system will use the contact's preferences. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Default recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, you can see the name of the dunning letter recipient in the **Attention** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can also configure dunning letter mailing for: One customer, see: [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer/). Customer classes, see: [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Select processing options for overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/select-processing-options-for-overdue-charges section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Select processing options for overdue charges 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Data processing settings** section, select one or more of the following options: + **Apply payments to overdue charges first**: If you select this check box, the system applies payments first to the overdue charge documents and then to the invoices and notes. + **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle**: This check box defines whether the overdue charge code is provided by the **statement cycle** or the **customer class**. If you select this check box, the system will use the overdue charge code assigned to the statement cycle. If you do not select it, the system will use the overdue charge code assigned to the customer class. + **Calculate on overdue charges documents**: If you select this check box, the system configures all overdue charges to be compound charges (charges calculated on charges). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Apply line discount to Item price or Extended item price /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/apply-line-discount-to-item-price-or-extended-item-price section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply line discount to Item price or Extended item price 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **Price/discount settings** tab. 1. In the **Apply line discount to** drop-down list, select **Item price** or **Extended item price**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Change the setting for automatic posting on release /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/change-the-setting-for-automatic-posting-on-release section If you do not want the payments, invoices, and credit notes to be posted and closed automatically in the general ledger after you have released them in the customer ledger, you can change the default setting in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the setting for automatic posting on release If you do not want the payments, invoices, and credit notes to be posted and closed automatically in the general ledger after you have released them in the customer ledger, you can change the default setting in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Posting and retention** area, deselect the **Automatically post on release** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). To be able to post released documents after you have deselected this option, go to the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window in the general ledger and post them manually.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Round invoice amount to the nearest whole number /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/round-invoice-amount-to-the-nearest-whole-number page In the customer ledger preferences you have the option of rounding the sales invoice amount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Round invoice amount to the nearest whole number In the customer ledger preferences you have the option of rounding the sales invoice amount. Follow the steps below to round the amount to the nearest whole number. 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. On the **General settings** tab, find the section **Data entry settings**. 1. In the **Rounding rule for invoices** drop-down list, select the option **Nearest**. The **Use currency precision** option means that the invoice amount is rounded to the precision supported for the currency used on the invoice. 1. In the **Rounding precision** drop-down menu, select the option **1.00**. Customer classes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer classes Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Create a customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter the next free **Class ID**. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. > [!NOTE] > If you are unsure of the next free number, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Class ID** window. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the name or description of your new customer class. 1. Add the rest of the information for this specific customer class. First on the **General information** tab, and then continue with the other tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a customer class template /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class-template section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer class template 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to use as a template. 1. Make any changes to the settings, to fit your new template. 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Save as template...**. 1. If a separate window does not open, go to the [Document templates (SM209020)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/document-templates-sm209020/) window. 1. In the [Document templates (SM209020)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/document-templates-sm209020/) window, enter a name for the template you have created, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Use a template to create a new customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/use-a-template-to-create-a-new-customer-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use a template to create a new customer class 1. Go to the [Document templates (SM209020)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/document-templates-sm209020/) window. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class template you want to use. 1. Click **Save to clipboard**. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Paste from** [name of template]. > [!NOTE] > You may have to click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to empty the fields before you can paste the template into the fields. 1. Enter the next free **Class ID**. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. > [!NOTE] > If you are unsure of the next free number, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Class ID** window. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the name of your customer class. 1. Change the settings to fit your new customer class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Copy one customer class to a new one /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/copy-one-customer-class-to-a-new-one section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Copy one customer class to a new one 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Next to the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to use as a basis to create a new customer class. 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Copy**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Click ![icon-clipboard-with-arrow](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-clipboard-with-arrow.png) and from the drop-down list select **Paste**. 1. Change any settings to fit the new customer class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Edit or delete customer classes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/edit-or-delete-customer-classes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit or delete customer classes ## Edit a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to make changes to. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Delete a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to delete. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set a customer class as default /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-a-customer-class-as-default section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set a customer class as default 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. You are here: The **General information** tab. 1. Find the area Data entry. 1. In the **Default customer class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class you want to use as default. 1. If you need to make changes to the default customer class, click ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png). 1. In the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, make your changes and click **Save and close**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set customer class print and email preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-customer-class-print-and-email-preferences section You can send documents to your customers in different ways, and set-up these options for each customer class individually. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set customer class print and email preferences You can send documents to your customers in different ways, and set-up these options for each customer class individually. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class for which you want to configure the settings. 1. On **General information** tab, in the **Default print and email settings** section, select the option that suits the customer class the best: 1. **Print invoices** - to be printed, and then posted as a letter. 1. **Send invoices by email** - to be attached and sent in an email. 1. **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** - if you want invoices for this customer class to be sent directly to AutoInvoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can also set the print and email preferences individually for each customer: see [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Send invoices by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/send-invoices-by-email section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoices by email 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer class for which invoices should be sent by email. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. Under **Default print and email settings**, select **Send invoices by email**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up invoice mailing for a customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class section If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for one customer, you can consider to do this in the Customers (AR303000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoice mailing for a customer class If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for one customer, you can consider to do this in the Customers (AR303000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer. For more information: [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/), [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/). ## Before you start If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for one customer, you can consider to do this in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, see [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/). 1. Go to the **[Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/)** **[Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/)** window. 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **INVOICE** on the new row. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the email account from which the invoices will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the invoices, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **InvoiceNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. > [!NOTE] > If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. > [!NOTE] > The person that is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class section You can also configure dunning letter mailing for one customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class You can also configure dunning letter mailing for one customer. 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new role. 1. Select **DUNNINGLETTER**. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the e-mail account you want to use as your sender address. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report you want to use to generate the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be the template for the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format you specify here is different from a contact's format preferences, the system will use the contact's preferences. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, you can see the name of the dunning letter recipient in the **Attention** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). See: [Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Make settings in the Customer classes window /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/make-settings-in-the-customer-classes-window section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make settings in the Customer classes window ## Before you start [Add a text for dunning letters and reminders](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/add-a-text-for-dunning-letters-and-reminders/) ## Activate overdue charges and write offs for a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Select a **Class ID**. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Default financial and payment settings** section, select the **Apply overdue charges** check box. 1. Select the **Enable write-offs** check box. 1. In the **Write-off limit** field, enter the amount limit. 1. Go to **General ledger accounts** tab. 1. Enter the accounts and the subaccounts for write-offs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Select dunning letter/reminder texts 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Select a **Class ID**. 1. Click the **Report text settings** tab. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the **Report text settings**. 1. In the **Notification ID** column, select **Dunning letter**. 1. If this is the first line you are adding, the **Level** column displays the number 1 automatically. 1. In the Report text code column, select the reminder text that you created in the previous process step. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: Repeat the procedure to add more than one reminder/dunning letter level. In step 5, remember to change the number 1 to the next unused number for dunning letters. > [!NOTE] > If you have decided to have two or three reminders before you send the invoices to debt collection, inform the customer in the last letter that the invoice will be sent to the debt collector if you have not received their payment by the due date. ## What is next? [Configure an overdue charge code](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/configure-an-overdue-charge-code/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Validate customer data in the Customer list /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/validate-customer-data-in-the-customer-list section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate customer data in the Customer list You can make settings in the [Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s/) and [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) windows, so that the system validates the data that comes in via AutoInvoice to the [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/). Fields that are missing information will be marked with ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png). 1. Go to the [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/) window. 1. Select a **Customer class**. 1. Select a **Country**. 1. Select the correct check box for **AutoInvoice validation**. 1. The system validates the list of customers and the ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png) is displayed where information is missing for customers that have the option **Send to AutoInvoice** set. > [!NOTE] > You can select a customer in the table and click **View customer** to go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and look at the details for a specific customer.

Related pages

Windows

 About export types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/about-export-types page Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About export types Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. You can set an **Export type** in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) and [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) windows. ## Export type on customer location When you have a customer with a location in a different country than the main location, requiring a different VAT calculation and sales account, you can give the location the appropriate export type. The system reads the **Export type** value from the customer location first, and if not set, from the customer class. ## Export type determines sales account and VAT category Export types determine the: + sales account on sales documents + VAT category on sales documents for lines with item IDs Generally, each **Export type** corresponds to one sales account and VAT category , according to the following table: |Export type|Sales account|VAT category| |---|---|---| |**Domestic**|**Sales account**|**Sales VAT category**| |**Domestic exempt VAT**|**Sales - non-taxable account**|**Exempt VAT sales VAT category**| |**EU**|**Sales - EU account**|**Sales EU VAT category**| |**Export**|**Sales - export account**|**Export VAT category**| There are situations where the above table does not apply. For more information, see: [Suggested sales account](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-sales-accounts/) and [Suggested VAT category](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage customers /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage customers About customer account setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-customer-account-setup section Here are the high-level steps for creating a customer account: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer account setup Here are the high-level steps for creating a customer account: After you have done preliminary configuration, creating a customer account is a matter of investing the time needed to type the customer's contact information and make any needed adjustments in the settings for this customer. In this topic, you will read about how to set up a customer account and how to further adjust the settings of each customer. ## Setting up the customer account Here are the high-level steps for creating a customer account: 1. You open the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and in the window toolbar, you click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). The default customer class is initially assigned to the new customer account, so the elements have the values that were specified for the default customer class. If you want the settings for this customer to be based on a different (more specific) customer class, select that class, and the elements will be populated with the values specified for the selected class. 1. You adjust the settings for this customer as needed and fill in information (such as details about payment methods and addresses) that was not defined in the selected customer class. One example is the payment method: If the customer class does not define a default payment method, you should specify one. Also, a default payment method may require you to provide customer-specific information, such as the card number. You can override any value, making it specific to the customer. 1. When you have finished changing and adding customer details, make sure that all required settings have been filled in and save the new customer account. You can use the copy-and paste functionality in Visma Net to create similar customer accounts. But if you have to override many values similarly for multiple customers, consider creating a new customer class. ## Using and maintaining customer information When you have finished with the initial setup of a customer account, the account contains all the information the system needs to process the customer's documents. When you enter customer documents in the Customer ledger workspace, you should first select the customer. Once you do, the system fills in appropriate elements in the window with the settings specified for the customer's account. Over time, customers may change their addresses, payment methods, and preferred carriers. You can update customer accounts quickly as you learn about these changes.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About customer locations /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-customer-locations page If the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can specify more than one location for a customer account, and each location can have specific settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer locations If the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can specify more than one location for a customer account, and each location can have specific settings. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). If the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can specify more than one location for a customer account, and each location can have specific settings. Locations, which are maintained in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window, provide appropriate customer default information for sales orders and invoices. In this topic, you will read about the main location and the default location, as well as the values provided by locations for sales orders and invoices. ## Main and default locations When you create a customer account in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the system creates the main location for the customer automatically by using all the settings you have specified on the **Delivery settings** tab. (This is the case whether or not the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled.) The main location has **MAIN** as its ID, which cannot be modified. You can specify that the identifier of the branch the user is currently signed in is used by default as the identifier of the customer’s main location instead of the **MAIN** location. To do this for all customers of a class, you select the **Default location ID from branch** check box in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. Once you create the main location, it is automatically marked as the default location on the **Locations** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. If additional locations have been added to the customer account, you can make another location the default location by selecting the location and clicking **Set as default** in the table toolbar. When you create a new location, the address and contact information of the main location are used by default, and the general ledger accounts and location settings (the settings grouped under the **Location settings** section) of the default location are used by default. You can replace any of these settings for the new location. The settings of the default location are used when you create new customer documents, as described in the next section. ## Location and customer documents When you enter a customer document (that is, an invoice, payment, cash sale, or sales order), you should first select the customer. When you do, certain elements in the window are filled in with the settings associated with the customer's default location. If you select a location other than the default one, the values will change to those associated with the selected location. The selected location provides default values for the customer's documents: the VAT zone, the shipping instructions, and the sales account and corresponding subaccount. Also, for sales orders, the location provides the shipping address and contact information. You can override any of the default values. For new invoices and sales orders entered into the system, tax settings are by default those in both the VAT zone of the customer location and the product category associated with the items specified as the document details. The system creates the resulting list of applicable taxes automatically and shows it on the **VAT details** tab of [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). ## Location and discounts Each customer's location can be also associated with a customer price class, which is used as a condition to be met for discount application. You can specify different customer price classes for different locations to make your pricing policy more flexible.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About export types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-export-types page Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About export types Export types determine the automatically suggested sales account and VAT category on sales or customer invoice lines and sales order lines. You can set an **Export type** in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) and [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) windows. ## Export type on customer location When you have a customer with a location in a different country than the main location, requiring a different VAT calculation and sales account, you can give the location the appropriate export type. The system reads the **Export type** value from the customer location first, and if not set, from the customer class. ## Export type determines sales account and VAT category Export types determine the: + sales account on sales documents + VAT category on sales documents for lines with item IDs Generally, each **Export type** corresponds to one sales account and VAT category , according to the following table: |Export type|Sales account|VAT category| |---|---|---| |**Domestic**|**Sales account**|**Sales VAT category**| |**Domestic exempt VAT**|**Sales - non-taxable account**|**Exempt VAT sales VAT category**| |**EU**|**Sales - EU account**|**Sales EU VAT category**| |**Export**|**Sales - export account**|**Export VAT category**| There are situations where the above table does not apply. For more information, see: [Suggested sales account](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-sales-accounts/) and [Suggested VAT category](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer ## Before you start To make it easier to create customers, you can first create customer classes and select one as your default. This way the customers you create afterwards will already have some default information filled in. See [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/). > [!NOTE] > If you do not want to use the default customer class for the customer you are creating, you can select a different one on the **General settings** tab, in the section **Financial settings**. Visma Net immediately changes the related information. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to create a new customer, and enter the **Customer name**. The next available **customer number** is automatically added to the new customer when you save. The default **Status** for the new customer is **Active**. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) on the **General information** tab. 1. Add information on the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Add information on the **Delivery settings** tab. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, check or select the customer ledger accounts/subaccounts you want to use for the general ledger transactions for the customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The system automatically adds the **customer number** when you save.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Delete customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/delete-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Contact ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to delete. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to delete the current customer.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Make customer-specific changes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/make-customer-specific-changes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make customer-specific changes ## Before you start To make it easier to create customers, you can [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/) and set one as default. Customer classes have a number of default settings, so many fields will automatically be filled in. However, you can still edit some of the automatically filled-in fields in order to set individual preferences. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to make changes to. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add general information for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add general information for a customer ## Before you start [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the customer you are creating. 1. You are here: On the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Main address** section, add the address information. 1. In the **Main contact** section, fill in the **Attention**, **Email** and **Phone** fields. 1. In the **Financial settings** section, select the **Customer class**. 1. Select the **Terms** for the customer class. 1. Select the **Currency ID** and the other currency settings. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Connect contact to customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/connect-contact-to-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Connect contact to customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to add a contact to. 1. In the **Contacts** tab, click **Add contact**. 1. In the **Contacts** window, either 1. click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Contact ID** field, to select an existing contact. or 1. enter the **Last name** of a new contact. 1. Then enter as much information as possible on the remaining tabs. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) or **Save and close**

Related pages

Tasks

 Add delivery settings for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-delivery-settings-for-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add delivery settings for a customer ## Before you start [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) [Add invoicing settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-invoicing-settings-for-a-customer/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the customer you are creating. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Click on the **Delivery settings** tab. 1. Optional: In the **Shipping address** section, you can add an address that differs from the main address - for delivery. If the address is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. Optional: In the **Shipping contact** section, you can add a contact that differs from the main contact - for delivery. If the contact is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. In the **Default location settings** section, enter a **Corporate ID** and/or a **VAT registration ID**. 1. Optional: If yo have enabled the Warehouses functionality in your system, select the **Warehouse** and other shipping information in the **Shipping instructions** section. 1. Fill in any other fields you think is relevant for this customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add invoicing settings for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-invoicing-settings-for-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add invoicing settings for a customer ## Before you start [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the customer you are creating. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Click on the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Optional: In the **Invoice address** section, you can add an address that differs from the main address - for invoicing. If the address is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. Optional: In the **Invoice contact** section, you can add a contact that differs from the main contact - for invoicing. If the contact is the same, select the **Same as main** check box. 1. Optional:In the **Parent account** field, you can select a bank account to be the parent account of the currently selected customer account. > [!NOTE] > This field and a list of accounts are only available if the **Consolidate balance** and **Consolidate statements** check boxes are selected for the selected customer account. 1. In the **Print and e-mail settings** section, it is important to decide how you want to send different customer documents. For example, you should not select both **Print invoices** and **Send invoices by e-mail** for the same customer. Print and email settings: 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Add delivery settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-delivery-settings-for-a-customer/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare to use electronic invoices for customers /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-electronic-invoices-for-customers page When you enter the organisation number and the VAT registration number for the customer, and if this number exists in the AutoInvoice portal, Visma Net sets up the customer automatically so that you can send electronic invoices to this customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare to use electronic invoices for customers When you enter the organisation number and the VAT registration number for the customer, and if this number exists in the AutoInvoice portal, Visma Net sets up the customer automatically so that you can send electronic invoices to this customer. If the organisation number and the VAT registration number does not exist in the AutoInvoice portal, you have to select the **Send to AutoInvoice** check box manually in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The setting in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window is set dependent on the customer setting, so that all invoices you send to your customer will automatically be sent as electronic invoices via AutoInvoice if this check box is selected. If you for some reason cannot send one particular invoice electronically to a customer, you can send it either by email or regular mail; you go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window on the **Invoice address** tab, and deselect the **Send to AutoInvoice** option. The following procedures describe how you set up AutoInvoice for a new or for an existing customer. [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-a-new-customer/) [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer ## Before you start For the previous step, see: [Enable batch payments](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/enable-batch-payments/). 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, select the customer you want to refund. 1. On the **Payment methods** tab, click **Add payment method**. 1. In the **Payment method** column, select the method of payment. 1. In the **Cash account** column, select the cash account. 1. In the **Value** column, fill in the bank account to want to refund to. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), or **Save and close**. The payment method is now linked to the customer. > [!NOTE] > If you go to the **Invoicing settings** tab, the selected payment method is displayed in the **Default payment method** section. ## What is next? [Add a payment message prefix](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/add-a-payment-message-prefix/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up invoice mailing for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer section If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for a number of customers, you can consider to do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoice mailing for a customer If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for a number of customers, you can consider to do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window, see Set up invoice mailing for a customer class. For more information: [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/), [Set up invoice mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class/). ## Before you start If you are setting up invoice mailings settings for a number of customers, you can consider to do this in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, see [Set up invoice mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer-class/). 1. Go to the **[Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/)** **[Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/)** window. 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select **INVOICE** on the new row. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the email account from which the invoices will be sent. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the invoices, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **InvoiceNotification** template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. > [!NOTE] > If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. > [!NOTE] > The person that is displayed in the **Attention** field, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, will be the recipient for the dunning letters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer section If you want to make settings for dunning letter mailing for more than one customer, you can do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer If you want to make settings for dunning letter mailing for more than one customer, you can do this in the Customer classes (AR201000) window. For more information: [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/). ## Before you start If you want to make settings for dunning letter mailing for more than one customer, you can do this in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. See: [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class/). 1. In the **Customer number** **Class ID** field, select the customer for which you want to configure the mailing. 1. Go to the **Mailing settings** tab. 1. In the **Mailings** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new role. 1. Select **DUNNINGLETTER**. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the e-mail account you want to use as your sender address. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report you want to use to generate the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** template, which will be the template for the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format you specify here is different from a contact's format preferences, the system will use the contact's preferences. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Contact type** column, select **Invoicing**. In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window on the **Invoicing settings** tab, you can see the name of the dunning letter recipient in the **Attention** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up e-mail invoices for one customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up e-mail invoices for one customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, select the customer. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. Under **Main contact**, enter the customer's email address. 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Under **Print and email settings**, select **Send invoices by email**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set customer print and email preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set customer print and email preferences ## Before you start You send invoices and credit notes to your customers in different ways, and you can set the option the customer prefers, for each customer. You can also set preferences for print and emailing for a customer class. For more information, see [Set customer class print and e-mail preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-customer-class-print-and-email-preferences/). 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab, and look for the **Print and email settings** section. 1. Select one of the available options: + **Print invoices** - print out and send the invoice by letter. + **Send invoice to AutoInvoice** - send the invoice electronically with AutoInvoice. + **Send invoices by email** - attach the invoice to an email. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Enable write-offs for customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/enable-write-offs-for-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable write-offs for customer ## Before you start To make it easier to create customers, you can [Create a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/create-a-customer-class/) and set one as default. Customer classes have a number of default settings, so many fields will automatically be filled in. However, you can still edit some of the automatically filled-in fields in order to set individual preferences. 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. Under **Financial settings**, select the **Enable write-offs** check box. 1. Fill in the **Write-off limit** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you do not enter a limit, Visma Net is not able to perform write-offs.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-a-new-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer 1. [Create a new customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/). 1. Go to the **Delivery settings** tab. 1. Under **Default location settings**, enter the **Corporate ID** and the **VAT registration ID**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Check that the **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** check box has been selected. If it is not selected, you can select it manually and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under the **AutoInvoice** section, check if the **Send to AutoInvoice** check box has been selected. If it is not selected, you can select it manually and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to send electronic invoices to. 1. Go to the **Invoicing settings** tab. 1. Under **Print and email settings**, select the **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Preliminary configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preliminary configuration About preliminary configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-preliminary-configuration page You need to perform the following steps before you start setting up customer accounts: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About preliminary configuration You need to perform the following steps before you start setting up customer accounts: Visma Net provides multiple tools that you can use to successfully interact with your customers and to maintain accurate and up-to-date information about these customers. Before you begin entering customer accounts, you need to perform certain planning and configuration tasks. In this topic, you will read about the steps you should perform before you start setting up customer accounts. ## Overview of the preliminary configuration process 1. You plan customer accounts and the supporting entities. During this step, you will not yet act upon your plans; you are gathering information and making decisions that will affect configuration. 1. You set up the entities you need for successful management of customer accounts. 1. You set up the customer classes that will make it easier for users to set up accounts. 1. You adjust the settings of the Customer ledger workspace to ease the entry and maintenance of customer accounts. After you have finished the preliminary configuration, setting up customer accounts is a quick and easy process.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Visma Net entities needed for customer account setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/visma-net-entities-needed-for-customer-account-setup page Before you start setting up customer accounts in Visma Net, you need to configure the entities that will ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Visma Net entities needed for customer account setup Before you start setting up customer accounts in Visma Net, you need to configure the entities that will ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. Before you start setting up customer accounts in Visma Net, you need to configure the entities that will ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. As you configure these entities, you should use the information that you gathered when you planned customer accounts. In this topic, you will find the list of Visma Net entities you need to configure to ease the processes of customer account creation and maintenance. Some of these entities are required, while others are optional, as indicated in the list. ## Needed Visma Net entities The needed entities in Visma Net may include the following: + Customer identifiers (optional): You should make sure that the segmented key used as a template for identifiers of customer accounts suits your needs, and adjust the **BIZACCT** segmented key (or the **CUSTOMER** key) if needed. + General ledger accounts (required): You need to create the general ledger accounts and subaccounts (if applicable) to be used to record sales and cash discounts, unless you plan to use accounts and subaccounts that already exist. You will need to select these already-defined accounts when you create customer accounts. For details, see: [Add an account to the chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/add-an-account-to-the-chart-of-accounts/). + Statement cycle (required): You need to set up at least one statement cycle that will be assigned to a customer class (and therefore to all customers that are assigned to this class). For details, see: [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). + Payment methods (required): You need to define at least one payment method to be used for customer payments. For details, see: [Manage payment methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/managing-payment-methods-overview/). + Payment terms (optional): You should set up each needed set of payment terms that will define the due dates of documents. When you set up customer classes, you can assign the appropriate payment terms to classes, which in turn will cause the payment terms to be assigned by default to all new customers of this class. For details, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). + Overdue charges (optional): You can set up overdue charges, which define additional charges that customers will incur for open documents that are past due and assign the charges to a customer class (which causes them to be assigned by default to all new customers of this class). For details, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). + Mailings (optional): You can set up multiple mailings to notify customers about their balances, invoices, sales orders, and other information you want to send to customers on a regular basis. For details, see: [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/). ## Next steps in preliminary configuration When you have finished creating the entities mentioned above, you should proceed with setting up customer classes, which are a key entity in Visma Net. Customer classes are used to provide default values, thus speeding the creation of customer accounts and other customer classes. See [About customer classes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes/) for details about how to determine which classes you want to create, how to create these classes, and what default values they provide.

Related pages

Concepts

 About customer classes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes page A customer class groups customers that have similar characteristics. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer classes A customer class groups customers that have similar characteristics. A customer class groups customers that have similar characteristics. You can divide customers into classes based on the types of goods or services the customers buy or on other properties, such as the customers' currency and payment methods. You specify a customer class when you create a customer account, which causes the system to fill in the values of the class for the customer. Any of these default values can be overridden. Generally, the first customer class you define is the default customer class. When you create a customer class, the values of the default customer class are automatically filled in, but any of them can be overridden. The default customer class is initially specified as the customer class for a new customer account, but you can change it to any other class. In this topic, you will read about the default customer class, customer classes in general, and the default values provided by customer classes. Separate sections describe the currency and printing settings that are provided by the customer class. ## Default customer class When you set up customer classes, we recommend that you first create the default customer class: the customer class that has values that are shared by most customer classes and customers. You define the default customer class (and all other classes) in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, and then specify the class as your default customer class in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. When you create a new customer class, the elements of this class will be automatically populated with the values specified for the default customer class, which speeds data entry. You can override these values as needed. ## Other customer classes You also create non-default customer classes by using the Customer classes window. As mentioned above, when you create a customer class, it is initially populated with the values of the default customer class, any of which can be overridden. In addition to using the default customer class, you can create a new customer class based on an existing customer class by using commands from the **Edit** menu in the Customer classes window. You can copy the settings of a particular customer class and paste them to create another class, or you can create a template for multiple similar customer classes. ## Default values provided by the customer class Customer classes provide default values for individual customer accounts, so users can create customer accounts more easily. When you create a customer class, you must specify the class ID and description, and you can decide which additional elements to specify for the class, including the following: + General settings: The country of customers, the taxation settings (including the VAT zone for the class), and the salesperson responsible for dealing with customers of the class + Delivery elements: The carrier whose services will be used, and the shipping terms + Credit verification settings: The credit verification rules and the credit limit + Financial settings: The Payment info from AutoPay payment terms, the statement cycle, the payment method, the overdue charges, and the currency + Print and email details: The statement type; whether customers' documents should be sent electronically or by postal mail + General ledger accounts: The accounts from the chart of accounts and the subaccounts (if any) to be used to record your operations with the customers of the class + Mailings: The list of mailings to which you want to subscribe customers of the class When you create a new customer account by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, by default, the elements of this window have the values that were specified for the default customer class. If the new customer should be assigned to a more specific class, select the class, which changes the default values to those that were specified for the selected class. You can override any value provided by the class. With customers, as with classes, you can use the copy-and-paste functionality to create similar customer accounts. If you have to override many values of the customer account similarly for multiple customers, consider creating a new customer class with those values specified. ## Default currency settings A customer class can hold the default currency and the default currency rate to be used for customer accounts. We recommend that you select a foreign currency for a customer class only if most customers of the class use this currency. By default, users may not override the currency on customer documents, to reduce the chance of input errors related to currency choice. If some customers may use a non-default currency and non-default rate type on individual documents, you can allow currency and rate overriding for those customers by selecting the **Enable currency override** and **Enable rate override** check boxes in the Customers window. If want to allow override of the currency and the rate by default for all customers of the class, select these check boxes in the Customer classes window for the customer class. ## Default printing and emailing settings A customer class can provide the default settings that permit or deny mass-printing and emailing of invoices, notes, and statements. Settings that control printing and emailing preferences of customers are located under the **Print and email settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the Customer classes window. For instance, if you want to be able to print at once the invoices for all customers of a customer class by using the Send invoices window, you must select the **Print invoices** check box for the customer class. This makes the documents of these customers available for mass-printing. You can override this setting for individual customers of the class, if needed. ## Preferred locale setting You can group the customers who prefer the same language to one customer class. For this class, you specify a locale that is associated with the language in the **Locale** field of the Customer classes window. > [!NOTE] > The system will assign the locale to the new customer accounts automatically when you select the customer class for the account in the Customers window. For existing customers, you need to manually select the preferred locale for each account. Assigning a locale to a customer account allows you to print documents for the customer in preferred language. ## Next steps in preliminary configuration Once you have defined the default customer class and all other customer classes that will be used to ease the entry of new customer accounts, you have defined all the Visma Net entities that you need to set up before you begin creating customer accounts. Next, you need to consider Customer ledger settings as they relate to customer management and make any needed adjustments, as described in [About adjusting customer ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-adjusting-customer-ledger-preferences/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About adjusting customer ledger preferences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-adjusting-customer-ledger-preferences page Initial configuration of the Customer ledger workspace was performed during implementation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About adjusting customer ledger preferences Initial configuration of the Customer ledger workspace was performed during implementation. Initial configuration of the Customer ledger workspace was performed during implementation. This topic describes settings in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window that you should reconsider because they control customer settings and your interactions with customers. You should review these settings, which are described below, and change them as needed before you begin setting up customer accounts. ## Speeding data entry To help make data entry easier and more error-proof, you can use the following settings in the Customer ledger preferences window: Default customer class ID : Here you specify the customer class whose values are shared by most customer classes and customers. Then when you create a new customer class or a new customer account, the corresponding elements in the window will be populated with the values of the default customer class automatically, thus speeding data entry. (You should have already specified the default customer class, as described in Customer classes, and used it to ease the creation of other customer classes.) Combine sales sub. from : In this field, you can specify the rule to create the default sales subaccount (if subaccounts are used in your system) for use on customer ledger documents. This default subaccount can have its values for different segments taken from different subaccounts related to the document. For each segment of the resulting sales subaccount, you can specify from which subaccount, such as the company's branch, customer location, stock item, or employee account, the segment value should be copied. For details, see: [About combined subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/about-combined-subaccounts/). Balance write-off reason : and **Credit write-off reason code**: In these fields, you specify the reason codes to be used by default for writing off credits and balances. The system will fill in the reason codes specified here in the **Reason code** field in the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window when you select the type of write-off operation, as well as in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For details on write-off functionality, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). ## Managing credit policy To configure the options related to implementing your company's credit policy for all customers, you can specify the following settings: Hold document on failed credit check : You select this check box if you want new invoices and notes to be placed on hold for customers that have failed the credit check. If the check box is not selected, new documents can be saved and processed regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns the user about the customers that have failed their credit check. For details on credit verification, see [About credit verification](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification/). Age credits : You select this check box if you want the balances of credit notes and open payments to be taken into account when a customer statement is generated. For details, see [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). Set default overdue charges by statement cycle : You select this check box to use the overdue charges specified for the statement cycle assigned to a customer account instead of the overdue charges specified for the customer class that is also assigned to the customer account. Calculate on overdue charges documents : You select this check box if you want overdue charges to be calculated on overdue charge documents as well as on invoices. Apply payments to overdue charges first : You select this check box if you have enabled automatic payment application for a customer account or you have selected the **Auto-apply payments** check box in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and want new payments to be applied first to overdue charges and then to outstanding invoices. For details on the processing of overdue charges, see [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). ## Printing and emailing documents To make the printing and emailing of invoices and notes a required step before these documents are released, you should select the following check boxes: **Require invoice/note printing before release** and **Require invoice/note emailing before release**. When you create an invoice for a customer that prefers to receive a printed copy of the documents or the **Print invoices** check box is selected for the customer in the Customers window, the invoice is created with the **Pending print** status. After you have printed the invoice, its status is changed to **Balanced** and you can release it. To print customer ledger documents, use the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. ## Preparing consolidating statements and dunning letters Depending on the policies established in your company, you can prepare a single consolidated statement for each customer or prepare multiple statements for each branch of your company. To prepare consolidated statements for all customers, select the **Consolidate statements for all branches** check box, and in the **Statement from branch** field, select the branch that will be specified as the sender. You can prepare consolidated dunning letters as well. To prepare consolidated dunning letters for all customers, select the **Consolidate dunning letters for all branches** check box, and in the **Dunning letter from branch** field, select the branch that will be specified as the sender. ## Managing mailings To inform your customers of past-due invoices, purchase debit notes, and overdue charges, you can configure the sequence of dunning letters on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can specify the sending criteria for each letter in the sequence. Also, you can define the number of days you offer a customer to settle the due document before the next letter is sent. If a customer account has at least one due document that meets the specified criteria, you can prepare and send a dunning letter. Note that you need to configure a corresponding mailing to be able to prepare and send dunning letters. For details, see [Manage dunning letters - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). To inform your customers of new invoices, their balance, and the expiration of a credit card, you can configure multiple mailings. The list of predefined mailings is available on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. On this tab, you can modify the list of mailings as it to be copied to a new customer class and configure the basic settings of each mailing. Also, if the Inventory workspace is activated, the mailings listed on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window are also copied to a new customer class. For details on configuring mailings, see [Manage mailings - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview/). ## Proceeding with customer account setup Now that you have finished with the preliminary configuration steps, you can easily and efficiently create customer accounts, as described in [About customer account setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-customer-account-setup/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Add customer locations /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/add-customer-locations section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add customer locations 1. Go to the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to add a location for. The main location defined in the **Customers** window is displayed in the window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new location for this customer. 1. In the **Location ID** field, enter an ID for the new location. You can use both letters and numbers. 1. On the **General information** tab, deselect the **Same as main** check boxes if you want to enter new information in the **Location contact** and the **Location address** sections. 1. Fill in the other optional fields that you want to use for this specific location. 1. Go to the **General ledger accounts** tab and specify the general ledger accounts if necessary. Deselect the **Same as default location** check box to change the accounts. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage parent-child relationship /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage parent-child relationship Manage parent-child relationships - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/manage-parent-child-relationships-overview page If your company deals with companies with franchises or multiple branches, you might want to configure parent-child relationships in Visma Net between the customer accounts that represent these companies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage parent-child relationships - overview If your company deals with companies with franchises or multiple branches, you might want to configure parent-child relationships in Visma Net between the customer accounts that represent these companies. You can use this functionality if **Parent-child customer relationship** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In the following topics, you will read about how to set up and maintain parent-child relationships between customer accounts. ## Topics + [About setting up parent-child relationships](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-setting-up-parent-child-relationships/) + [About balance consolidation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-balance-consolidation/) + [About credit policy application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-credit-policy-application/) + [About removing relationships](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-removing-relationships/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About setting up parent-child relationships /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-setting-up-parent-child-relationships page In this topic, you will read about how to set up a parent-child relationship between customer accounts when you create these accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About setting up parent-child relationships In this topic, you will read about how to set up a parent-child relationship between customer accounts when you create these accounts. You can use this functionality if **Parent-child customer relationship** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Set up the parent-child relationship Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and perform the following steps in order to configure parent-child relations between customer accounts that you are defining: 1. Set up a customer account that represents the parent company (which the organisation might refer to as the head office or main branch). In the **Parent info** section on the **Invoice settings** tab, you specify whether you need the companies to have a consolidated balance, consolidated statements, and a shared credit policy by selecting or clearing the **Consolidate balance**, **Consolidate statements**, and **Share credit policy** check boxes. The values of these check boxes will provide the default values for the corresponding check boxes of the child customer accounts. 1. Set up customer accounts that represent child companies, which are generally subsidiaries that are controlled by the parent company. During setup, for each child company, you specify the parent account in the **Parent account** field. In the **Parent info** section of the **Invoice settings** tab, you adjust the values of the **Consolidate balance**, **Consolidate statements**, and **Share credit policy** check boxes, if needed. Additionally, you can select **Consolidate invoices** if you want invoices to be sent to the parent. > [!NOTE] > Only a two-level hierarchy is supported. With the exception of the details described above, the setup of parent and child customer accounts does not differ from the setup of independent customer accounts. Also, you can set up a parent-child relationship between existing customer accounts. For each parent account, you can view the list of its child accounts on the **Child accounts** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About balance consolidation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-balance-consolidation page The balances of child customer accounts can be included in the balance of the parent customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About balance consolidation The balances of child customer accounts can be included in the balance of the parent customer account. The balances of child customer accounts can be included in the balance of the parent customer account. To set this up, for the child accounts whose open documents can be paid with the payments of their parent, you select the **Consolidate balance** check box in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section of the **Invoicing settings** tab). With this check box selected, the system includes the balances of child accounts in the parent balance; you can view this consolidated balance in the **Consolidated balance** box in the top part of the corresponding parent account. In this topic, you will read about how payment application is handled for the parent and child customer accounts and what reports you can use to analyse financial data. ## Payment application With the parent-child relationship between customer accounts set up and the **Consolidate balance** check box selected for child accounts, when you create a payment or a prepayment for the parent account in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, you can apply this payment to the open documents of both the child accounts and the parent account. On the **Documents to apply** tab of the window, you can add rows with the open documents of a child account or click the **Load documents** button on the table toolbar. When you click the button, the **Load options** dialog box opens; in the **Include child documents** field, you can select the types of documents to be loaded. If the **Auto-apply payments** check box is selected for the parent account on the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and no documents for application are specified for the payment on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, the system will automatically apply the payment to the oldest open documents (if any) of the parent account only. If you want the system to include open documents of child accounts in the process of automatic payment application, you can use the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass-processing window. In this window, in the **Include child documents** field, you can select the types of open documents of child accounts that should be included in the process of automatic payment application. The system will process first the open documents of the child accounts and then the open documents of the parent account. Also, you can apply open payments, prepayments, and credit memos of the parent account while you are creating an invoice or debit memo for the child account on the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. If you plan to clear the **Consolidate balance** check box for a child account for which it has been selected, first make sure that all applications of a parent payment to a child document are released or reversed (if needed). You cannot save changes in the parent-child relationship if any applications of this type are not released. However, you can reverse the application of a parent payment to child invoice or memo after the relationship was changed or removed. ## Generation of consolidated reports With the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can generate reports that group child accounts (or their documents) under the parent account and show individual account balances along with the consolidated balance of the group. > [!NOTE] > Only child accounts that have the **Consolidate balance** check box selected are grouped under their parent account, and their balances are consolidated with the parent balance. The following Visma Net reports have a check box (either **Group by parent account** or **Consolidate data by parent account** ) that you select to generate reports regarding parent-child relations: + [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/) + [Balance by customer (AR632500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/) + [Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000/) + [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) + [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/) + [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/) + [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/) + [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About credit policy application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-credit-policy-application page You can decide whether to apply the credit policy of the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit policy application You can decide whether to apply the credit policy of the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. You can decide whether to apply the credit policy of the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. The credit policy is a combination of the credit management tools configured for a customer account in Visma Net. For details, see: [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). In this topic, you will read about managing credit policy for the parent and child customer accounts. ## Credit policy application For a child customer account, if you have selected the **Consolidate balance** check box on the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section of the **Invoicing settings** tab), the **Share credit policy** check box becomes available for selection on this window. If you select the **Share credit policy** check box for the child account, the credit policy configured for its parent account will be applied to the new sales orders and invoices of the child accounts. With the **Share credit policy** check box selected for a child account, the settings under the **Credit verification rules** section on the **General information** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window are unavailable and are filled with the corresponding values configured for the parent account. If you change the credit policy configuration for the parent account, the system will reflect these changed settings in its child accounts that share the credit policy. > [!NOTE] > If you clear the **Share credit policy** check box for a child account, the settings under the **Credit verification rules** section of this window become available but retain their values, except for **Credit limit**, which is set to zero. ## Credit hold application With the **Share credit policy** check box selected for a child account, you cannot put the child account on credit hold individually. If you change the status of the parent account to **Credit hold**, the system will put on credit hold all child accounts that share a credit policy with the parent account. > [!NOTE] > If a child account has had the **Hold** or **Inactive** status, its status remains unchanged when you put on credit hold its parent account. Releasing related accounts from credit hold works similarly to putting these accounts on credit hold. If you release a parent account from credit hold, its child accounts that have the **Share credit policy** check box selected are released from the credit hold as well. If you use the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window to put an account on credit hold, the list of accounts on this window will not include child accounts with the **Share credit policy** check box selected. ## Generation of consolidated statements Customers that have a multi-branch hierarchy may want to receive consolidated statements. To arrange that, for child accounts, you select the **Consolidate statements** check box in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab). For the child accounts, the settings related to sending the statements (under the **Print and e-mail settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window) are unavailable and are filled with the corresponding values configured for the parent account. > [!NOTE] > If you clear the **Consolidate statements** check box for a child account, the settings related to sending the statements become available but retain their values. With this configuration, only the parent account is available for statement generation in the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. The system uses the statement cycle assigned to the parent account. When you are preparing statements for the parent account, the system includes all documents of child accounts in the statement. The documents in the statement are grouped by customer account. If the type of the statement is **Open items**, the system will also print the corresponding subtotal balances for each account involved. ## Generation of consolidated dunning letters If the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system consolidates the overdue documents of a parent account and its child accounts that have the **Share credit policy** check box selected. The system sends the dunning letters to the parent account contact. For the child accounts, the settings related to sending the dunning letters (under the **Print and e-mail settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window) are unavailable and are filled with the corresponding values configured for the parent account. > [!NOTE] > If you clear the **Share credit policy** check box for a child account, the settings related to sending the dunning letters become available but retain their values. With this configuration, only the parent account is available for dunning letter generation in the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window. The system uses the parent-child group data to generate dunning letters. The documents in the dunning letter are grouped by customer account. > [!NOTE] > The calculation of overdue charges (if configured) is performed for each customer account individually, regardless of the configuration of parent and child accounts. Separate overdue charge documents are issued to customer accounts.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About removing relationships /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/about-removing-relationships page The structure of companies may change over the time, and such changes need to be reflected in the customer accounts in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About removing relationships The structure of companies may change over the time, and such changes need to be reflected in the customer accounts in the system. In this topic, you will read about how to remove parent-child relationships and how this will affect the accounts and documents of the involved customers. ## Delete the relationship You can delete the parent-child relationship between customer accounts at any time. For the child customer account for which you want to sever this relationship, you delete the account selected in the **Parent account** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window (in the **Parent info** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab) and save your changes; this removes the relationship. > [!NOTE] > Before you delete the relationship, make sure that all payment applications of a parent payment to a child document are released or reversed (if needed). You cannot save changes in the parent-child relationship if any applications of this type are not released. However, you can reverse the application of a parent payment to child invoice or memo after the relationship was changed or removed. ## Impact on the accounts involved The deletion of the relationship affects the following aspects of the customer accounts involved: Balance : The balance of the former child account remains equal to the total of its open documents. The consolidated balance of the parent account is decreased by the amount of the balance of the former child account. Status : The status of child accounts is not changed. For example: If the parent account was placed on credit hold, all its child accounts that shared a credit policy were on credit hold as well. After the deletion of the relationship, you should make any needed adjustments to the status of each customer account. Credit policy : If the credit policy was shared, the settings under the **Credit verification rules** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window become available for the child accounts but retain their values, except for **Credit limit**, which is set to zero. Statements : The statements are prepared for each account individually according to the statement cycle set for an account. Dunning letters : The dunning level of the child documents is set to zero and when preparing dunning letters, the system treats the child accounts as accounts that have never been processed before. The dunning level of the parent documents is not changed. Documents for which the **Revoked** check box has been selected (both of parent and child accounts) remain marked as revoked. Sending of documents : The settings under the **Print and email settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window become available for the child accounts but retain their values. Invoice information : If you had selected that the child customer's invoices should be sent to the parent account, the invoice contact, address, payment terms and method will now be retrieved from the child account instead.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage credit policy /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage credit policy Manage credit policy - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview page Businesses do not always pay their suppliers immediately for received goods or services. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage credit policy - overview Businesses do not always pay their suppliers immediately for received goods or services. Businesses do not always pay their suppliers immediately for received goods or services. To avoid running out of cash, your company may need to set up proper management of customer credit. Credit management tools may include tools for managing customer credits, tracking customers' outstanding balances, and treating bad debts. With Visma Net, you can use the following credit management tools: + **Payment terms** You configure payment terms to define documents' due dates. Payment terms may be used for giving a customer discount for early payment. For details on configuring and applying payment terms, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). + **Credit verification** You can enable a credit check process for each customer that automatically puts overdue invoices on hold and forbids the issuing of new invoices for a customer that has failed a credit check. For details on configuring and applying credit verification rules, see: [About credit verification](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification/). + **Customer credit hold** You can manually put a customer on hold any time you consider it necessary. For more information, see: [About customer credit hold](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-customer-credit-hold/). + **Overdue charges** You can configure additional charges to be applied to outstanding balances of customers who are consistently paying too late or not paying in full. For details on configuring and applying overdue charges, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). + **Statement cycles** You can configure customer statement cycles to provide customers with information about their balances with your organisation. For details, see: [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). + **Dunning letters** You can configure a series of dunning letters to remind customers about overdue invoices. For details on configuring customer notifications, see: [Manage dunning letters - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). + **Direct write-off method** You can use the direct write-off method to handle expenses that are required to run the business or that have been incurred in the operation of the business. For details on configuring and using direct write-offs, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend that you use the direct write-off method for handling bad debts as it often violates the matching principle of accounting because it recognises bad debt expense that is partly related to a previous accounting period. + **Allowance method** You can handle bad debts by using the allowance method. The allowance method is a better alternative to the direct write-off method because it follows the matching principle of accounting. For details on configuring and using allowance method, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). The following topics will help you to configure and use the credit management tools of your choice. ## Topics + [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/) + [About credit verification](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification/) + [About customer credit hold](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-customer-credit-hold/) + [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/) + [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/) + [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About customer credit hold /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-customer-credit-hold page You may encounter an unfortunate situation when a customer has not paid for a long time and has not responded to any inquiries or requests for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer credit hold You may encounter an unfortunate situation when a customer has not paid for a long time and has not responded to any inquiries or requests for payment. You might have notified the customer about due invoices with a series of dunning letters or in some other way. You can put a hold on the customer's credit until the issue is resolved. An employee who is authorised to manage customer credit can apply credit holds to the customers involved by using the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window. Once a credit hold has been applied to a customer account, no new sales orders or invoices can be created for this customer. An authorised user can manually release a customer from credit hold by changing the customer status from **Credit hold** to **Active**. To do this, the authorised user's role should have access to the **Status** field of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms About payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms page Payment terms define the specific details of the seller's payment requirements that the buyer should meet in order to purchase goods on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment terms Payment terms define the specific details of the seller's payment requirements that the buyer should meet in order to purchase goods on credit. Payment terms define the specific details of the seller's payment requirements that the buyer should meet in order to purchase goods on credit. These details include the date when a payment should be made, the conditions for cash discounts when any outstanding balance is paid early, and the setting that determines whether an outstanding balance is to be paid as a single instalment or in multiple instalments. In this topic, you will read about how to set up payment terms and assign them to business accounts (customers and suppliers), and how to configure instalment buying and cash discount offering. Also, the topic explains the details of calculating the payment periods and cash discount periods. ## Plan payment terms You need to plan the payment terms your company offers to customers, as well as outline the details of the payment terms offered to your company by suppliers, which are already defined, in preparation for entering them into the system. We recommend that you decide on the following points when you plan each set of payment terms: + The length of the payment period and the ways its due date is calculated. + The cash discount conditions and the way they are affected by the length of the payment period. + The number of instalments and the instalment payment schedule (if the company offers instalment buying). > [!NOTE] > You can configure a cash discount for only a single-instalment payment. If your company has been operating for some time, you already have established payment terms. We recommend that you compare the payment terms your company offers to customers and the payment terms offered to your company by suppliers, because in Visma Net, you can use the same payment terms for both customer payments and payments to suppliers, if needed. ## Set up payment terms These are the general steps you need to perform to create a set of payment terms by using the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window: 1. You specify a descriptive ID for the payment terms you want to configure. The length of an ID can be up to 10 Unicode symbols. > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend using any special symbols in the IDs of entities. 1. You define the scope of the payment terms: whether they apply to only customer documents, only supplier documents, or both types of documents. 1. You configure how a due date is calculated for a document. 1. Optional: You configure the cash discount conditions. 1. Optional: If needed, you change the default instalment type of payment terms, which is **Single**, to **Multiple** and define the number of instalments and their payment schedule. ## Configure the assignment of payment terms By using the payment terms that have been manually or automatically assigned to a document, the system calculates the due date of the document. If a cash discount is applied, the system also calculates the end date of the cash discount period and the cash discount amount for the document. In Visma Net, you can assign payment terms to the following types of documents: + Customer ledger: Invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges + Supplier ledger: Purchase invoices and credit adjustments To make the system automatically assign payment terms to customer documents, you assign the payment terms to customer classes, and by default, a customer is assigned the payment terms specified for the customer class it belongs to. You can manually specify the payment terms for each customer (or override the class setting) by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. When you create a document and select a customer, the system automatically associates with the document the payment terms specified for the customer. (The payment terms for the document can also be overridden.) Automatic assignment of payment terms to supplier documents is configured similarly to automatic assignment of payment terms to customer documents, with terms being assigned to supplier classes. You also can manually specify or change the payment terms for each supplier by using the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. ## Set up due date calculation Certain settings specified for the payment terms in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window determine the payment period: the time interval that starts when a customer purchases a product or a service (on the document date) and ends when the customer's payment is due. In Visma Net, you do not specify the length of the payment period; you instead specify the way the document due date will be calculated based on the date of the document's creation. By specifying the appropriate **Due date type** setting in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window, you can calculate the due date based on one of the following factors: + **A day in a month** (the **Day of next Month**, **End of month**, **End of next month**, and **Day of the month** options): You can specify a day of the month (in the **Due day 1** field) to be the due date for all documents issued before this day, or the end of the current or next month can be the due date. + **A fixed number of days** (the **Fixed number of days** and **Fixed number of days starting next month** options): You can specify the period of time (in the **Due day 1** field) that is used to calculate the due date, based on the document date or the first day of the next month. (To determine the due date of the document, the system adds the specified number of days to either the document date or the first day of the next month.) + **Multiple custom dates** (the **Custom** option): With this option selected, you can set two time intervals for the document dates and specify a due date for each interval. The parameters for configuring the first interval are **Due day 1**, **Day from 1**, and **Day to 1**, and the parameters for configuring the second interval are **Due day 2**, **Day from 2**, and **Day to 2**. The following rules are applied to each set of days: + The end day should be greater than the start day. + If the value of the **Due day N** parameter is greater than (or equal to) the value of the **Day to N** parameter, the due date will be in the current month. + If the value of the **Due day N** parameter is less than the value of the **Day to N** parameter, the due date will be in the next month. > [!NOTE] > **Attention**: > If a document date doesn't match either interval, the due date > won't be calculated. > For example: If a document is dated 1/31/2018 and the intervals > are 1–15 and 16–30, then the due date won't be calculated for the > document. For more examples of the ways a payment period is calculated, see: [Examples of credit and cash discount periods.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/examples-of-credit-and-cash-discount-periods/) ## Configure instalment payments Outstanding balances can be paid in a single instalment or multiple instalments. To configure instalment payments, select the **Multiple** option in the **Instalment type** list. By default, the instalment type for new payment terms is **Single**. You then specify the number of instalments, the frequency or schedule, and the instalment method. You can configure either an instalment frequency or an instalment schedule. To configure a frequency, in the **Instalment frequency** field, you can select the interval between instalments. The following payment frequency options are available: Weekly : Instalments will be one week apart. Monthly : Instalments will be one month apart. Semi-monthly : Instalments will be a half a month apart. To determine how the amounts of instalments are calculated for the selected frequency, select one of these options in the **Instalment method** list: Equal parts : The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. VAT in first instalment : The amount of the document (the total before VAT) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. To configure an instalment schedule, you leave the **Instalment frequency** field blank and select the **Split by percent in table** instalment method. The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages that you specify for each instalment in the **Instalments schedule** table. For each instalment, you can specify the number of days from the due date and the percent of the total document amount. The first instalment (which is due on the due date) should have **0** in the **Day** column, and other instalments' dates are specified with the respect to the due date. ## Configure a cash discount You can configure a cash discount for only single-instalment payment terms. The cash discount is available for a time interval (that is, the cash discount period) that starts on the document date and ends in the number of days specified in the **Cash discount settings** section. The cash discount period falls within the payment period. If custom due dates are set, discount settings are applied to both intervals. The length of the cash discount period is defined by the following parameters: Discount type : This parameter defines the method of calculating the end date of the discount period (which is similar to the method of calculating the due date). The option you select in the **Due date type** field determines the options available for selection in the **Discount type** field. If the **End of month** option is selected in the **Due date type** field, configuration of a cash discount is not available. Discount day : This parameter determines the number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the method selected in the **Discount type** field. For examples of the ways a cash discount period is calculated, see [Examples of credit and cash discount periods.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/examples-of-credit-and-cash-discount-periods/) A cash discount is an amount that is calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Discount %** field to the total amount of the document. When you enter a payment for the document during the cash discount period, the system deducts the calculated discount amount from the total amount of the document and generates the payment for the amount or the result of the deduction. If a cash discount is applied to a document, it may or may not affect how the system calculates the taxable amount of a document. You may indicate to the system how to calculate the taxable amount for a VAT application in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. For details about how the system calculates a taxable amount of a document if a cash discount should be applied to the document, see: [About VAT settings.](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/about-vat-settings/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Examples of credit and cash discount periods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/examples-of-credit-and-cash-discount-periods section In this topic, you can find examples that demonstrate how the credit period and cash discount period are calculated based on the calculation method of the applicable payment terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Examples of credit and cash discount periods In this topic, you can find examples that demonstrate how the credit period and cash discount period are calculated based on the calculation method of the applicable payment terms. ## Structure of these examples Each section describes a particular method of calculating the length of credit period and discount period defined by the payment terms. You select the calculation method in the **Due date type** field in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. In each section, the first column of the table lists the options that you can select in the **Discount type** field, based on the method selected for due date calculation. The second column contains sample settings for each option that you could use to configure the payment terms in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window, as well as the document date from the Visma Net window used to create the document. The third column displays the resulting payment period and cash discount period for the document date specified in the sample settings. This column includes a diagram that shows the resulting credit period and cash discount period. The legend of the diagram is as follows: + ![AR_CrT_StartEnd](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_StartEnd.png): Starting and ending dates of the credit period + ![AR_CrT_CreditPeriodDay](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_CreditPeriodDay.png): Days of the credit period + ![AR_CrT_DiscountPeriodDay](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DiscountPeriodDay.png): Days of the cash discount period ## Due date type: Fixed number of days With the **Fixed number of days** calculation method, the payment is due a fixed number of days after the sale or purchase. You specify the number of days in **Due day 1**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Fixed number of days**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_FixedNDays](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_FixedNDays.png)| ## Due date type: Day of next month With the **Day of next month** calculation method, the payment is due on a particular day of the next calendar month after the month of the document date. You specify the day in **Due day 1**. In this example, the value of the **Due day 1** parameter is greater than the number of days in the next month (February); therefore, the system uses the last date in the next month for the calculation of the credit period. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Day of next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1.png)| |**End of month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_EOM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_EOM.png)| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_DoM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_DoM.png)| ## Due date type: End of next month With the **End of next month** calculation method, the payment is due at the end of the next calendar month after the month of the document date. For this calculation method, note that the credit and cash discount periods are equal if the **End of next month** option is selected in the **Discount type** field. |Discount type|Sample settings|Results| |---|---|---| |**Day of next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **7** in the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DayNextMonth_1.png)| |**End of month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_EOM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_EOM.png)| |**End of next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 ![AR_CrT_ENM_ENM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_ENM_ENM.png)| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **N/A** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/29/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DNM_DoM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DNM_DoM.png)| ## Due date type: Day of the month With the **Day of the month** calculation method, the payment is due on a particular day of the current calendar month, if the invoice is issued before this day. If the invoice is issued after this Day of the current calendar month, then the payment is due on the day of the next calendar month. You specify the day in **Due day 1**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–1/30/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_DOM_DOM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_DOM_DOM.png)| ## Due date type: Fixed number of days starting next month With the **Fixed number of days starting next month** calculation method, the payment is due a fixed number of days starting the first day of the next calendar month after a sale or purchase. You specify the number of days in **Due day 1**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Result| |---|---|---| |**Fixed number of days starting next month**|In the Payment terms window: + **Due day 1**: **30** + **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document date**: **1/1/2021**|Credit period: 1/1/2021–3/2/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_FNDNM_FNDNM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_FNDNM_FNDNM.png)| ## Due date type: Custom With the **Custom** calculation method, you set two time intervals for the document dates and specify a due date for each interval. The parameters for configuring the first interval are **Due day 1**, **Day from 1**, and **Day to 1**, and the parameters for configuring the second interval are **Due day 2**, **Day from 2**, and **Day to 2**. The sample settings here define the following intervals: 1–15 and 16–31. The due date for the first interval is the 10th of the next month for documents issued between day 1 and day 15 of the current month. The due date for the second interval is the 25th of the next month for documents issued between day 16 and day 31 of the current month. For this calculation method, note that the system shortens the cash discount period to be equal to the credit period if the **End of next month** option is selected as the **Discount type**. |Discount type|Sample settings|Results| |---|---|---| |**Day of next month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DNM](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DNM.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2.png)| |**Fixed number of days**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FND_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FND_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–1/23/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FND_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FND_2.png)| |**End of month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–1/31/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_EOM_2.png)| |**End of next month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **N/A** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_ENM_2.png)| |**Day of the month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–1/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DOM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DOM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/7/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_DNM_2.png)| |**Fixed number of days starting next month**|In the Payment terms window: Interval 1: + **Due day 1**: **10** + **Day from 1**: **1** + **Day to 1**: **15** Interval 2: + **Due day 2**: **25** + **Day from 2**: **16** + **Day to 2**: **31** **Discount day**: **7** In the document creation window: + **Document 1 date**: **1/1/2021** + **Document 2 date**: **1/16/2021**|### Document 1 Credit period: 1/1/2021–2/10/2021 Cash discount period: 1/1/2021–2/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FNODSNM_1](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FNODSNM_1.png) ### Document 2 Credit period: 1/16/2021–2/25/2021 Cash discount period: 1/16/2021–2/8/2021 ![AR_CrT_Custom_FNDSNM_2](/media/visma-net-erp/AR_CrT_Custom_FNDSNM_2.png)|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure single-instalment payment terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-single-instalment-payment-terms section You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, including due dates and conditions for cash discounts when an outstanding balance is paid early. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure single-instalment payment terms You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, including due dates and conditions for cash discounts when an outstanding balance is paid early. For more information: [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/). You use the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window to define each set of payment terms, including due dates and conditions for cash discounts when an outstanding balance is paid early. For a set of payment terms, you can specify the payment as a single instalment (described in this topic) or as multiple instalments (described in [Configure multiple-instalment payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-multiple-instalment-credit-terms/)). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. 1. In the **General information** section, in the **Terms ID** field, type the ID of the payment terms. The ID may contain up to ten characters. > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend using any special symbols in the IDs of entities. 1. In the **Description** field, type the description of the terms. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select the visibility of these payment terms (that is, under what circumstances they are listed and available for selection). The following options are available: + **All**: The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers. + **Suppliers**: The terms can be assigned to suppliers only. + **Customers**: The terms can be assigned to customers only. + **Disabled**: The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers. 1. In the **Instalment type** field of the **Instalments settings** section, select **Single**. 1. In the **Due date type** field of the **Due day settings** section, select the due date type. For detailed descriptions of the options, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). 1. Depending on the due date type, specify the values of the other available elements (if any) in the **Due day settings** section. 1. Optional: In the **Cash discount settings** section, enter the settings that affect the discount for an early payment: 1. In the **Discount type** field, select the discount date type. The availability of options depends on the option selected as the **Due date type**. 1. In the **Discount day** field, specify the number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the option selected in the **Discount type** field. (This field is unavailable for some **Discount type** options.) 1. In the **Discount %** field, specify the percent to be applied to the document total amount to calculate the discount percentage. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Configure multiple-instalment credit terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-multiple-instalment-credit-terms section You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure multiple-instalment credit terms You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms. For more information: [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/). You use the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window to define each set of payment terms. For a set of payment terms, you can specify payment as a single instalment (described in [Configure single-instalment payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/configure-single-instalment-payment-terms/)) or as multiple instalments (described in this topic). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. 1. In the **General information** section, in the **Terms ID** field, type the ID of the payment terms. The ID may contain up to ten characters. > [!NOTE] > We do not recommend using any special symbols in the IDs of entities. 1. In the **Description** field, type the description of the terms. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select the visibility of these payment terms (that is, under what circumstances they are listed and available for selection). The following options are available: + **All**: The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers. + **Suppliers**: The terms can be assigned to suppliers only. + **Customers**: The terms can be assigned to customers only. + **Disabled**: The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers. 1. In the **Instalment type** field of the **Instalments settings** section, select **Multiple**. 1. In the **Instalment method** field, select the instalment method, which determines how the system calculates the instalment amounts. 1. If you selected the **Equal parts** or **VAT in first instalment** instalment method, do the following: 1. In the **Number of instalments** field, type the number of instalments. 1. In the **Instalment frequency** field, select the instalment frequency. 1. If you selected the **Split by percent in table** method, do the following for each instalment: 1. In the **Instalments schedule** table toolbar, click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)**. 1. In the **Days** column, type the number of days from the due date on which this particular instalment is due. 1. In the **Percent** column, type the percent of the instalment. 1. In the **Due date type** field of the **Due day settings** section, select the due date type. For detailed descriptions of the options, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). 1. Depending on the due date type, specify the values of the other available elements (if any) in the **Due day settings** section. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Disable credit terms /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/disable-credit-terms section You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, as well as to change the target audience for which the terms are visible or disable a particular set of payment terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disable credit terms You use the Payment terms (CS206500) window to define each set of payment terms, as well as to change the target audience for which the terms are visible or disable a particular set of payment terms. For more information: [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/). 1. Go to the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window. 1. In the **General information** section, in the **Terms ID** field, select the ID of the payment terms that you want to disable. 1. In the **Visible to** field, select the **Disabled** option. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About credit verification /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/about-credit-verification page Although accurate evaluation of customers' credit worthiness is required, employees may perform it outside of the system by gathering data on the financial health of potential customers, including their current credit score. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit verification Although accurate evaluation of customers' credit worthiness is required, employees may perform it outside of the system by gathering data on the financial health of potential customers, including their current credit score. In Visma Net, you can configure credit verification rules to prevent risky customers (such as those who pay too late) from accruing debts that cannot be paid. ## Credit verification application in the Customer ledger Credit verification is invoked each time a user creates an invoice for a customer in Customer ledger. When you create an invoice and the customer fails the credit check, the system checks the value of the **Hold documents on failed credit check** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, which defines what happens to new invoices if the credit check fails: + If the check box is selected, you may save the document (invoice or debit note) with the **On hold** status, but the document cannot be released until the credit violation is resolved. + If the check box is cleared, you can save new documents with the **Balanced** status and process them regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns users about customers that have failed their credit check. ## Credit verification application in sales If the Sales workspace is enabled, credit verification is invoked each time you create an invoice that originates in the Sales workspace. When you create an invoice by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window and the customer fails the credit check, the system checks the value of the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. This check box defines what happens to new invoices if the credit check fails: + If the check box is selected, the invoice gets the **Credit hold** status and can be saved with only the **Credit hold** or **On hold** status. For invoices with the **Credit hold** status, in the [Process sales invoices (SO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000/) window, you can perform the **Release from credit hold** action. When the action is completed, the system saves the invoice with the **Balanced** status and you can process it further. + If the check box is cleared, you can save new documents with the **Balanced** status and process them regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns users about customers that have failed their credit check. Credit verification is invoked for orders that are based on an order type that has the **Hold document on failed credit check** check box selected in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. For an order of such a type, when you create a sales order and try to change the status of the sales order to **Open**, the system performs a credit check of the customer, and if the customer fails the credit check, the document gets the **Credit hold** status (and can be saved with only the **Credit hold** or **On hold** status). For orders with these statuses, in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window, you can perform the **Release from credit hold** action. This initiates credit checks for each order selected, and if the credit check is successful, the order receives a status of **Open**. ## Credit verification rule setup You can set credit verification rules for individual customers and for groups of customers. To provide default credit verification settings for groups of similar customers, you can specify credit rules by customer class in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. If needed, you can disable or redefine the default rules for individual customers by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. In the **Credit verification** field in these windows, you can select one of the following options: Credit limit : If the customer's total outstanding balance is greater than the amount specified in the **Credit limit** field, the system generates a warning. If the value in the **Over-limit amount** field is also exceeded, the system puts new invoices on hold or issues a warning, depending on the **Hold documents on failed credit check** setting and (if the Sales workspace is used) the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** setting. Days past due : Payment terms are defined and due dates are calculated based on the customer's terms. If the customer has a document that is past due by more days than the number of days past due specified in the **Credit days past due** field, the system puts new invoices on hold or issues a warning, depending on the **Hold documents on failed credit check** setting and (if the Sales workspace is used) the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** setting. Limit and days past due : Both types of rules are applied: The customer's debt should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than the specified number of days past due. If either rule is violated (or both rules are), the system puts new invoices on hold or issues a warning, depending on the **Hold documents on failed credit check** setting and (if the Sales workspace is used) the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** setting. Disabled : No credit rules are to be applied. You can view the unused credit limit of a customer in the **Remaining credit limit** field on the **General settings** tab of the Customers window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charges About overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges page In Visma Net, you can set up the functionality that makes the system to calculate overdue charges and show them on customer statements to inform customers of additional charges they have incurred for documents that are past due. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About overdue charges In Visma Net, you can set up the functionality that makes the system to calculate overdue charges and show them on customer statements to inform customers of additional charges they have incurred for documents that are past due. You can define multiple overdue charge codes (particular overdue charge IDs) with their own rates and other settings that affect when and how overdue charges are applied. Thus, you can adjust Visma Net to fit your existing policies and any policies you want to implement in the future. The system calculates overdue charges for all customer accounts for which overdue charges are assigned, except for accounts with the **Inactive** or **On hold** status in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. This functionality is available only if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Set up the overdue charge collection process You perform the following steps to configure the collection and processing of overdue charges: 1. In the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, you configure at least one overdue charge code, which defines the calculation method and the criteria for collecting charges. For details, see [About overdue charge code definition](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition/). 1. In the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, you do the following for each customer class whose customers you want to be subject to overdue charge collection: 1. Select the **Apply overdue charges** check box. 1. Associate the overdue charge code you created with the customer class by specifying the code in the **Overdue charge ID** field. When a new customer account is created in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and a customer class is selected, the customer class supplies the default value of the **Apply overdue charges** check box (on the **General info** tab). You can change this default value for any customer account. If the customer account is subject to overdue charge collection (that is, if this check box is selected for the customer), for all of the customer's debit documents, the system displays the **Apply overdue charge** check box on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. By default, the check box is selected, but you can clear the check box for a particular document. The following options, located in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, affect all customers that are subject to overdue charges and can be set to fit your company's policies: Apply payments to overdue charges first : If this check box is selected, payments will be applied first to overdue charges and only then to outstanding invoices, starting with those having the earliest dates. Payment can be applied to a particular invoice only if the **Apply payments automatically** check box is selected for a customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Calculate on overdue charges documents : If this check box is selected, overdue charges will be calculated on overdue charge documents as well as on invoices; thus, the amount of overdue charges compounds. After configuration is done, you use the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window to process the overdue documents of customer accounts that are associated with the statement cycle you select in this window. For details, see [Calculate overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/calculate-overdue-charges/). ## Set up the calculation of overdue charges by statement cycle By default, the system uses the overdue charge code specified in the applicable customer class to calculate overdue charges. Alternatively, you can indicate to the system that the code should be taken from the applicable statement cycle to calculate charges. Customer accounts are initially assigned the statement cycle, if any, specified for their customer class. But specifying a statement cycle in a customer class is not mandatory, as it is for a customer account. Additionally, for each customer, you may override the statement cycle that was assigned by default. Therefore, customer accounts within the same customer class may have different statement cycles. You perform the following steps to set up overdue charge calculation by using the code specified in the statement cycle: 1. In the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window, you specify an overdue charge code for each statement cycle used in the system. You may associate different codes with different statement cycles or use the same code for all statement cycles. 1. In the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, you select the **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle** check box, to indicate to the system that the source of the overdue charge code is the statement cycle of the customer account. After you have performed these configuration steps, the system will use the overdue charge code assigned to the applicable statement cycle to calculate overdue charges for customers and documents included in the charge collection process. ## Process overdue documents You process the calculation of the overdue charges for the overdue documents (that is, invoices and debit notes) in the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window. In this window, once you specify the criteria in the selection area, the system displays the documents that comply with the following requirements: + The customer of the document is subject to overdue charges or the **Apply overdue charges** check box is selected for the customer account in the **General info** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. + The document is subject to overdue charges or the **Apply overdue charge** check box is selected for the document on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. To run the calculation process, you click **Calculate** on the window toolbar. If the **Calculate on overdue charges documents** check box is cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system calculates simple charges by doing the following: + Checking whether an invoice or a debit note is past due by using the associated credit terms + Calculating the charges for the days past due (if there are no previous overdue charges for the document) + Calculating the charges since the date of the last overdue charges (if overdue charges have been recorded for the document) After the calculation is done, the system displays the list of overdue documents with the relevant details for each document, including the amounts of calculated overdue charges. You review the calculation results and process either the overdue documents you select (by using the unlabelled check boxes) or all of the documents by clicking either **Process** or **Process all** in the window toolbar. The result of processing is a customer ledger document of the **Overdue charge** type with the **Balanced** status (or the **On hold** status if **Hold documents on entry** is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window). If the system finds multiple overdue documents for the same customer account, it creates for this customer one document of the **Overdue charge** type that lists the charge amounts for each invoice. You further process this document of the **Overdue charge** type by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. If the **Calculate on overdue charges documents** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system searches for documents of the **Overdue charge** type as well and calculates charge amounts the same way as it does for the invoices and debit notes. ## Release documents of the Overdue charge type You release a document of the **Overdue charge** type by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. When you release an overdue document, the system generates a batch with the general ledger transactions. One transaction debits the customer ledger account referred to in the original document (which is usually the default customer ledger account for the customer), and the other transaction credits the Overdue charges account specified in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window for that charge, as shown in the following table. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| |Overdue charges account|0.0|Amount| If the system finds an unreleased overdue charge document for an overdue document (among other overdue documents of the particular customer), this document is marked with an error and no new overdue charge document is created for overdue documents of this customer account. You can select this document and click **View last charge** to view and release the existing overdue charge document. Then you can calculate and process overdue charges for overdue documents of this customer account again. Overdue charges may be numbered differently from invoices or notes. VAT are not calculated on overdue charges, and discounts are not applicable to overdue charges. ## Exclude a customer or a document from the charge collection process To exclude a customer account from the charge collection process, you clear the **Apply overdue charges** check box for the customer account on the **General info** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. To exclude a particular document from the process, you clear the **Apply overdue charge** check box for the document on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Note: This check box is displayed for the document only if the customer of the document is included in the charge collection process. About overdue charge code definition /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition section By using the Overdue charges (AR204500) window, you can create an unlimited number of overdue charge codes or particular overdue charge entities with their own rates and settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About overdue charge code definition By using the Overdue charges (AR204500) window, you can create an unlimited number of overdue charge codes or particular overdue charge entities with their own rates and settings. For more information: [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/). By using the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, you can create an unlimited number of overdue charge codes or particular overdue charge entities with their own rates and settings. Overdue charges are applied in either the base currency or the currency of the overdue document. ## Preliminary configuration steps Before you start setting up overdue charge codes, you need to perform the following steps: 1. You create the following entities (or determine which existing entities you will use), which you need for collecting and recording the overdue charges: + A general ledger account of the **income** type and a corresponding subaccount (if applicable in your system) to record each overdue charge and each overdue fee, if you plan to charge one. You can use the same account for recording all overdue charges and overdue fees or create separate accounts for each overdue charge and each overdue fee. For details, see: [Add an account to the chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/add-an-account-to-the-chart-of-accounts/). + Payment terms that provide a schedule for paying overdue charge documents. The payment terms used for overdue charges should be created without discounts. You can create just one set of payment terms for overdue charge documents or multiple sets. For details, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). 1. You plan the overdue charge code or codes needed to suit your company's credit policy. The planning includes the following for each overdue charge code: + Selecting the calculation method to be used with the code + Deciding on the amount of the overdue charge + Deciding on the amount of the overdue fee, if you plan to charge one + Defining the criteria for creation of a document of the **Overdue charge** type for this code The following sections provide detailed information about the settings of the overdue charge codes. ## Calculation methods The system provides three calculation methods you can use to define the amount that is subject to overdue charges based on the number of days after the due date. The charges can be calculated either for open documents (those that are not fully paid) or for closed documents (those that are fully paid). The base all the methods use for calculation is the open balance of the overdue document. The figure below and the examples show how interest is calculated when you use the different calculation methods. Note that the examples are in US dollars. ![Click to zoom in](/media/visma-net-erp/ovedue-charges-calculation-methods.png) For each overdue charge code, you select one of the following options in the **Calculation method** field in the Overdue charges window: Interest on open entries : : The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance as of the date of calculation. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges. The system calculates overdue charges as follows (the blue lines in the related figure): 1. On the first calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $500 open entries for 10 days overdue. 1. On the second calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $100 open entries for 30 days overdue. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system does not apply charges because the document is fully paid. Interest on open, partially paid and paid entries : : The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges. The system calculates overdue charges as follows (see the green lines in the figure): 1. On the first calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $500 for 10 days overdue. 1. On the second calculation of charges, the system applies the sum of charges to the $500 for 12 days overdue, to the $200 for 7 days overdue, and to the $100 for 11 days overdue. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system applies charges to the $100 for 16 days overdue. Interest on paid entries : : The overdue document becomes subject to charges the moment it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days. 1. The system calculates overdue charges when the document is fully paid (the point when the charges are calculated for the third time in the figure). 1. The charges are the sum of charges applied to the $500 open balance for 22 days overdue, to the $200 open balance for 7 days overdue, and to the $100 open balance for 27 days overdue (the pink lines in the figure). The calculation method is used along with the charging method, described in the next section of this topic, to determine how overdue documents are charged for a particular overdue charge code. ## Charging methods A charging method defines how the system charges an overdue document. An overdue charge can be defined either as a fixed amount or as a percentage (annual rate) on an open balance for the number of days late. If the overdue charge is a percentage, the following formula is used to calculate overdue charges, based on the number of days past due. ``` Charge amount = (Percent rate) \* (Number of days past due) \* Open balance / (365 \* 100) ``` A percentage can be configured with a fixed minimum amount or a threshold amount. If you configure a percentage with a fixed minimum amount, the system charges an overdue document for at least the fixed minimum amount. If you configure a percentage with a threshold amount, the system charges a document only if the calculated charge amount is greater than or equal to the threshold amount. For details, see the following subsections of this topic: ### Charging a percentage with a minimum amount If you define an overdue charge as a percentage on an open balance for the number of days late with a minimum amount specified, the system charges a document as follows: + If the charge amount is less than the specified minimum amount, the system charges the document for the minimum amount. + If the charge amount is greater than or equal to the specified minimum amount, the system charges the document for the calculated charge amount. To charge a percentage with a minimum amount, in the **Charging settings** section in the Overdue charges window, you do the following: + In the **Charging method** field, you select the **Percent with min. amount** option. + In the **Min. amount** field (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify the minimum amount an overdue document should be charged. + In the **Total threshold** field, you specify the minimum amount of the overdue charge document; if the total amount of the lines of the overdue charge document is less than the total threshold amount, the document will not be created. + In the table (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify percent rate (or rates) with the date when the rate becomes effective. ### Charging a percentage with a threshold amount If you define an overdue charge as a percentage on an open balance for the number of days late with a threshold amount specified, the system charges a document as follows: + If the charge amount is less than the specified threshold amount, the system does not charge the document. + If the charge amount is greater than or equal to the specified threshold amount, the system charges a document for the calculated charge amount. To charge a percentage with a threshold amount, in the **Charging settings** section in the Overdue charges window, you do the following: + In the **Charging method** field, you select the **Percent with threshold** option. + In the **Threshold** field (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify the amount of charges that should define whether to charge a document. + In the **Total threshold** field, you specify the minimum amount of the overdue charge document; if the total amount of the lines of the overdue charge document is less than the total threshold amount, the document will not be created. + In the table (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify a percent rate (or rates) with the date when the rate becomes effective. ### Charging a fixed amount An overdue charge can be defined as a fixed amount. To define an overdue charge as a fixed amount, in the **Charging settings** section in the Overdue charges window, you do the following: + In the **Charging method** field, you select the **Fixed amount** option. + In the **Amount** field (which appears once you have selected this charging method), you specify the fixed amount of the charge for overdue documents. + In the **Total threshold** field, you specify the minimum amount of the overdue charge document; if the total amount of the lines of the overdue charge document is less than the total threshold amount, the document will not be created. Thus, if an open balance of an overdue document is greater than zero, the system charges the specified fixed amount. ## Overdue fee Some companies charge a fixed amount (a fee) for processing documents of the **Overdue charge** type. In these cases, a customer must pay the fee amount in addition to the amount of calculated overdue charges. A fee is charged for each overdue charge document. An additional line with the fee amount is added to the document. If your company charges a fee for processing late documents, in the Overdue charges (AR204500) window, for any overdue charge code, specify the following settings: Fee amount : The fixed amount to be charged for a document of the **Overdue charge** type. A customer pays the amount in addition to the amount of the overdue charges. Fee account : ( **Fee subaccount** ): The account (and subaccount, if applicable) to which fee amounts are recorded. You can leave these fields empty if your company does not charge fees for overdue charge documents.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About the criteria for creating an overdue charge document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-the-criteria-for-creating-an-overdue-charge-document page The processing of overdue documents creates documents of the Overdue charge type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the criteria for creating an overdue charge document The processing of overdue documents creates documents of the Overdue charge type. When the system finds a customer's overdue document, the system adds this document as a line item to the document of the **Overdue charge** type (which is created once any overdue document is found). If the system has found multiple overdue documents of a customer, the system creates a document of the **Overdue charge** type with multiple lines. These documents of the **Overdue charge** type, also referred to as overdue charge documents, can be viewed in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You can set up a threshold amount that defines the amount of charges that should initiate the generation of an overdue charge document. You specify this threshold amount in the **Total threshold** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. > [!NOTE] > The overdue fee is not included in the overdue charge document amount that is compared to the threshold. With the total threshold specified, the system decides whether to create an overdue charge document as follows: 1. It finds an overdue document of a customer or multiple documents of the customer. 1. It calculates the charge amount for each overdue document it found. 1. It compares the total amount of the calculated charges to the threshold amount, and then the system proceeds as follows: + If the total amount is greater than the threshold amount, the system creates an overdue charge document for the customer. + If the total amount is less than the threshold amount, the system does not create an overdue charge document for the customer. For example, suppose that your company collects overdue charges only if the charge amount is greater than €10; you thus specify 10 in the **Total threshold** field. Further suppose that your company charges a fixed charge amount of €1. If a customer has at least 10 overdue documents, the system will create an overdue charge document to debit the customer account. If your company instead charges an annual rate, the system behaves in the same way. If the total of calculated percentages for a customer's overdue documents is greater than €10, the system creates an overdue charge document for the customer. In addition to setting a threshold for the overdue charge amount, you can set a minimum amount and a threshold amount for adding a document as a line to the overdue charge document. You can configure the line threshold for only a charge that is defined as a percentage. To do this, you set up an overdue charge code on the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window and specify the **Charging a percentage with a minimum amount** or **Charging a percentage with a threshold amount** charging method. For details, see [About overdue charge code definition](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition/). ## Overdue fee collection You may want to charge your customers an additional fee each time overdue charges are calculated. In the **Overdue fee settings** section of the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, you can specify the amount of the overdue fee and the account and subaccount to register the collected fee to. The fee is recorded as a separate line in the document of the **Overdue charge** type in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Example of how to apply calculation methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/example-of-how-to-apply-calculation-methods page This topic provides examples of the overdue charge calculation methods that can be set in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Example of how to apply calculation methods This topic provides examples of the overdue charge calculation methods that can be set in the system. Suppose that a customer's invoice is due on April 1; its open balance is €500 as of the due date. The customer paid the invoice after the due date with three payments: €300 on April 22, €100 on April 29, and €100 on May 26. The system calculates overdue charges on the 10th day of each month. The overdue charge amount is an annual rate of 10% and no thresholds are configured. The system calculates the overdue charges differently, as described in the following sections of this topic, depending on the calculation method set for the overdue charge code in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. ## Interest on balance If you select **Interest on balance** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, the system calculates the overdue charges as follows: 1. On the first calculation of overdue charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €500 open balance for 10 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 10 \* €500 / 365 = €1.37. 1. On the second calculation of overdue charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €100 open balance for 30 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 30 \* €100 / 365 = €0.82. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system does not apply overdue charges because the document is fully paid. Overall, the system debited the customer's account for an additional €2.19 in overdue charges. ## Interest on prorated balance If you select **Interest on prorated balance** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, the system calculates the overdue charges as follows (see the green lines in the figure above): 1. On the first calculation of overdue charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €500 open balance for 10 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 10 \* €500 / 365 = €1.37. 1. On the second calculation of overdue charges, the system applies the sum of charges to the €500 open balance for 12 days overdue, to the €200 open balance for 7 days overdue, and to the €100 open balance for 11 days overdue; it then creates an overdue charge document in the amount of (0.1 \* 12 \* €500 / 365) + (0.1 \* 7 \* €200 / 365) + (0.1 \* 11 \* €100 / 365) = €1.64 + €0.38 + €0.3 = €2.32. 1. On the third calculation of charges, the system applies overdue charges to the €100 open balance for 16 days overdue and creates an overdue charge document in the amount of 0.1 \* 16\* €100 / 365 = €0.44. Overall, the system debited the customer's account for an additional €4.13. ## Interest on arrears If you select the **Interest on arrears** option in the **Calculation method** field in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window, the system calculates overdue charges when the document is fully paid (in the figure, the point when the charges are calculated for the third time). The overdue charges are the sum of charges applied to the €500 open balance for 22 days overdue, to the €200 open balance for 7 days overdue, and to the €100 open balance for 27 days overdue. The system creates an overdue charge document in the amount of (0.1 \* 22 \* €500 / 365) \+ (0.1 \* 7 \* €200 / 365) + (0.1 \* 27 \* €100 / 365) = €3.01 + €0.38 + €0.74 = €4.13. Overall, the system debited the customer's account for an additional €4.13.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure an overdue charge code /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/configure-an-overdue-charge-code section In this window, you configure an overdue charge code that defines the calculation method, the criteria of collecting charges, and the type of charge collection (fixed amount or percentage). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure an overdue charge code In this window, you configure an overdue charge code that defines the calculation method, the criteria of collecting charges, and the type of charge collection (fixed amount or percentage). 1. Go to the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) add a new code. 1. In the **Overdue charge ID** field, type an ID for your code. Have a look at the existing codes before you decide on a number or text, so that you don't use the same as an existing ID. You can use both numbers and letters. 1. Optional: Enter a **Description** and select a **Calculation method**. For more information about each calculation method, see [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). 1. In the **Terms** field, select the terms for the payment. 1. Optional: select the **Base currency** check box if you want the system to calculate the overdue charge by using the base currency. 1. In the **Overdue charge account** field, select an overdue charge account. 1. In the **Overdue charge subaccount** field, press **F3** to choose a subaccount. If you do not use subaccounts, press and hold 0 until all sections in the field are filled. 1. Optional: In the **VAT code** field, select the VAT category. 1. Optional: If your company charges an overdue fee, in the **Overdue fee settings** section, enter the following details: + In the **Fee amount** field, type the amount of the overdue fee. + In the **Fee account** field, specify the account to which the overdue fee should be recorded. + In the **Fee subaccount** field, specify the subaccount to which the overdue fee should be recorded. + In the **Fee description** field, type the description of the overdue fee. 1. In the **Charging settings** section, do the following: + In the **Total threshold** field, specify the amount of the overdue charges that should initiate the generation of a document of the **Overdue charge** type. + In the **Charging method** field, select the method that the system should use to charge overdue documents. The following options are available: + **Fixed amount**: If you select this option, you need to specify the fixed amount in the **Amount** field, which appears when you select the **Fixed amount** charging method. + **Percent with threshold**: If you select this option, you need to specify the percentage in the Rates table and the threshold amount in the **Threshold** field. Both of these elements appear once you select the **Percent with threshold** charging method. + **Percent with min. amount**: If you select this option, you need to specify the percentage in the **Rates** table and the minimum charge amount in the **Min. amount** field. Both of these elements appear once you select the **Percent with min. amount** charging method. For details, see: [About overdue charge code definition](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charge-code-definition/). What is next? [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Calculate overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/calculate-overdue-charges page You calculate overdue charges for customer ledger documents by using the Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate overdue charges You calculate overdue charges for customer ledger documents by using the Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) window. For more information: [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/). You calculate overdue charges for customer ledger documents by using the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window. Once the overdue charges are calculated, you process selected overdue documents to create open customer ledger documents with the **Overdue charges** type. The overdue charges are based on the settings specified in the [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) window. 1. Go to the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) window. 1. In the **Overdue charge date** field, select the date for when you want to calculate and process overdue charges. 1. **Optional:** In the **Period** drop-down list, change the financial period to the one that you want to post the document's transactions to. 1. In the **Statement cycle** drop-down list, select a statement cycle. Leave this field blank if you want to calculate overdue charges for all statement cycles. If the check box **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle** is selected in [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/), you have to specify the statement cycle. 1. Optional: To narrow the document results listed in the table after calculation, select a customer class in the **Customer class** drop-down list and a customer account in the **Customer** drop-down list. These drop-down lists are only displayed if the check box **Set default overdue charges by statement cycle** is not selected in [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). 1. Click **Calculate** to calculate the overdue charges. The system now lists the overdue documents and their details, including the number of days past the due date and the charge amounts. 1. In the toolbar, do one of the following: + Click **Process all** to create overdue charges documents for all listed documents. + Select check boxes for individual documents and click **Process** to create overdue charges documents for only specific documents. When you have completed this procedure successfully, Visma Net creates customer ledger documents with the type **Overdue charges** and the statuses **On hold** or **Balanced**, depending on the following settings in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window: **Hold documents on entry** and **Hold document on failed credit check**. If the system finds an unreleased overdue charge document for an invoice during overdue charge processing, the invoice is marked with error and no new overdue charge document is created. You can select an invoice with error and click **View last charge** to view and release an existing overdue charge document. Then you can calculate and process overdue charges for this invoice again.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Statement cycles /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement cycles Statement cycles - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview page In Visma Net, you can configure statement cycles for collection procedures. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement cycles - overview In Visma Net, you can configure statement cycles for collection procedures. At the end of a statement cycle, you prepare statements and send them to your customers. Statements provide customers with records of their financial activity for a specific period and include the ending balance. Customers can reconcile the balances of their accounts with the information in the statements. ## Statement cycle definition You use the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window to create new statement cycles and modify existing ones. For each statement cycle, you define the following: + The schedule. You can generate statements once or twice a month. The **Prepare on** setting offers the following options: + **End of month**: If you select this option, statements will be generated on the last day of each month. + **Fixed day**: If you select this option, statements will be generated on a particular day of each month. If you select this option, you use the **Day of month** field to specify the number of this day (such as **15** if invoicing occurs on the 15th day of each month). + **Custom**: If you select this option, statements will be generated on the two days of the month that you specify. If you select this option, you use the **Day of month** and the **Day of month 1** fields to specify the numbers of these two days. + The ageing periods. You can set up four aging periods for each cycle, to group the sums of the balances of open invoices and debit notes by the number of days they are past due. You use the **Ageing settings** section of this window to define the maximum number of days past the due date for each ageing period and the description of the period. If you want aging periods to take into account the balances of credit memos and open payments, select the **Age credits** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. The system also uses the aging period settings in customer ledger ageing reports, which you can analyse to identify potential cash flow problems. + The statement processing options of the cycle. You can use the following options to implement your company's policies: + **Require overdue charges calculation before statement**: If you select this check box, when you try to prepare statements, the system checks whether overdue charges have been calculated and, if not, issues a warning that overdue charges should be calculated before the statements are created. + **Require payment application before statement processing**: If you select this check box, when you try to prepare statements, the system checks whether all customer payments are applied and, if not, issues a warning that payments should be applied to invoices before statements are created. + The overdue charges of the cycle. The **Apply overdue charges** and **Overdue charge ID** settings define, respectively, whether calculation of overdue charges is required for customers assigned to the statement cycle and which overdue charges should be used; these settings apply only if the **Set default overdue charge by statement cycle** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window is selected. If the check box is cleared, the overdue charges defined for the customer class are instead applied. You can assign a statement cycle to a customer class by using the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window or directly to a customer by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. ## Statement type Visma Net offers two types of statements: Open item : The statement lists only open documents of the customer through the date when the statement was prepared. Balance brought forward : The statement lists all documents recorded during the last statement cycle period. Also, the amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement. You can assign either statement type to customer classes and to individual customers. You use the **Statement type** field to set this option for a specific customer class in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window and for an individual customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. ## Multi-currency and consolidated statements By default, the statements are prepared in the base currency; the **Customer statement** (AR641500) report is used. For foreign customers, you can specify that statements should be created in multiple currencies; in this case, the **Customer statement currency** (AR642000) report is used. For customers of a specific customer class, you can specify whether to create the statements in multi-currency format, by using the **Multi-currency statements** check box in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. For particular customers of the class, you can override the class setting by using the option with the same name in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Depending on the policies established in your company, you can prepare a single consolidated statement for each customer or prepare multiple statements for each branch of your company. To prepare consolidated statements for all customers, select the **Consolidate statements for all branches** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If you want to prepare consolidated statements, in the **Statement from branch** field, you should also select the branch that will be specified as the sender.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About the statement processing workflow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/about-the-statement-processing-workflow page As described in Statement cycles - overview, the configuration of statements involves creating statement cycles, assigning cycles to customer classes and customers, and deciding whether you need consolidated statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the statement processing workflow As described in Statement cycles - overview, the configuration of statements involves creating statement cycles, assigning cycles to customer classes and customers, and deciding whether you need consolidated statements. For more information: [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). This topic describes how the processing of statements unfolds. The statement processing workflow consists of the following stages (each of which is described in detail later in this topic): ## Configure customer preferences (optional) When you create a customer, it gets the default statement processing settings of the customer class it belongs to. For each customer, you can change the following settings related to statement processing: Statement type : You specify what type of statement a customer prefers, balance-forward or open-item. For details, see [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). Print statements : You select this check box if you want to make statements of this customer available for mass-printing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. For details, see [Print customer statements or send them by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email/). Send statements by email : You select this check box if you want to make statements of this customer available for mass-emailing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. For details, see [Print customer statements or send them by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email/). Multi-currency statements : You select this check box if you want statements of this customer to be created in multi-currency format. Such statements are displayed for mass-processing (printing or emailing) if the **Foreign currency statements** check box is selected in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. For details, see [Statement cycles - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/statement-cycles-overview/). If needed, you can modify the **Customer statement** (AR641500) report (for local customers) or the **Customer statement (currency)** (AR642000) report (for foreign customers) to format the statements to better meet your needs. ## Prepare statements (required) Before you prepare statements, make sure that you have applied open payments from customers to the corresponding invoices (if any) and calculated any overdue charges to avoid incorrect calculation of aged balances. You use the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window to prepare statements for all statement cycles or for only selected ones. The system prepares statements in the appropriate format required for printing them or sending them by email to customers. When statements are prepared, you can view them, regenerate them (if, for instance, you have discovered that a document was missing), print them, or send them by email. Because the process of generating statements may require significant time, you should schedule it to be performed at the most convenient time. For details on preparing statements, see [Prepare customer statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-customer-statements/). ## Viewing statements (optional) You can preview a statement that you have printed or emailed by using the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. Also, Visma Net provides the following inquiries that display a detailed statement history: + By statement cycle: [Statement history summary (AR404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000/) + By customer: [Customer statement history (AR404600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600/) ## Regenerate statements (optional) Prepared statements will not be affected by new transactions. If you discover some missing documents after the customer statements have been generated, you can create and release these documents and then regenerate the statements. Printed and emailed versions of the updated statement are marked with appropriate notes if previous statement versions have been printed or emailed already (the **Printed** and **Emailed** check boxes, respectively, of a statement are selected). You can regenerate statements by using the following windows: + [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/). You use the **Regenerate statement** action in this window to regenerate statements for customers of a particular statement cycle. + [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/). You use the **Regenerate last statement** action in this window to regenerate the most recent statement of the selected customer. + [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/). You use the **Regenerate last statement** action in this window to regenerate statements of the selected statement cycle. ## Print statements (optional) You can print statements on paper to send them to customers by postal mail, by using the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. The **Print statement** action marks processed statements as printed or the **Printed** check box of each statement is selected automatically. For details, see [Print customer statements or send them by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email/). ## Email statements (optional) You can generate emails with statements by using the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. The **Email statement** action marks processed statements as emailed or the **Emailed** check box of each statement is selected automatically. The system generates the body of the email and the attachment according to the settings of the **STATEMENT** mailing. For details, see [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About statement schedule types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/about-statement-schedule-types page You can schedule preparation of statements for the selected cycle ID with the help of the options in the Schedule type field: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About statement schedule types You can schedule preparation of statements for the selected cycle ID with the help of the options in the Schedule type field: Weekly : Statements will be generated each week, on the day specified in the **Day of the week** field. Twice a month : Statements will be generated twice a month, on the days specified in the **Day of month 1** and **Day of month 2** fields. Fixed day of month : Statements will be generated each month, on the day specified in the **Day of month 1** field (such as 15 if invoicing occurs on the 15th day of each month). End of month : Statements will be generated on the last day of each month. End of financial period : Statements will be generated on the last day of each financial period of the current year or on the end date specified for the financial period in the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Choose a statement cycle for overdue charges /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/choose-a-statement-cycle-for-overdue-charges section These settings only apply if the Set default overdue charge by statement cycle check box on the General settings tab in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is selected. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Choose a statement cycle for overdue charges These settings only apply if the Set default overdue charge by statement cycle check box on the General settings tab in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is selected. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). If you deselect the check box, the system applies the overdue charges defined to the customer class. 1. Go to the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window. 1. In the **Cycle ID** field, select a cycle ID. 1. Select the check box **Require payment application before statement processing**. 1. Select the **Apply overdue charges** check box. 1. Optional: Select the check box **Require overdue charges calculation before statement**. 1. In the **Overdue charge ID** field, select an **overdue charge ID**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). For released documents of customer accounts where this check box is selected, you can change this default value on the **Financial details** tab in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Prepare customer statements /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-customer-statements page You can prepare customer statements by using the Prepare statements (AR503000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare customer statements You can prepare customer statements by using the Prepare statements (AR503000) window. For more information: [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/). You can prepare customer statements by using the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. Customer statements will be prepared in the appropriate format to be printed or sent by email. (You can also prepare statements to be sent in both formats.) The statement format depends on the customer settings. ## Before you start Before you prepare customer statements, make sure the payment application process has been performed for the customer accounts associated with the appropriate statement cycles, as described in: [About Apply payments automatically](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/about-apply-payments-automatically/). 1. Go to the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. > [!NOTE] > You can use filtering to narrow the documents that are listed when you open the window. 1. Do one of the following: + To prepare statements for all statement cycles, click **Process all** in the window toolbar. + To prepare statements for only selected statement cycles, select the appropriate unlabelled check boxes and click **Process** in the window toolbar. > [!NOTE] > If the process of statements preparation was interrupted for some reason, the system will prepare statements for all customer accounts selected during the next run of the process.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare statements /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-statements section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare statements ## Before you start The system prepares the statements in the format you have specified for each customer, for example to be sent by email or to be printed. 1. Go to the [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) window. 1. Select a date in the **Prepare for** field. All statement cycles whose next statement date is before or the same as the date in this field are loaded to the table along with the newly created statement cycles with blank next statement dates. You can also prepare the statements in advance. 1. Optional: To include future statement cycles, you can change the date in the **Company** drop-down list in the top right corner. Click the arrow and change the date. 1. Select the check boxes for the cycles you want to process and click **Process**. If you want to process all the cycles, leave the check boxes unmarked and click **Process all**. 1. When the processing is finished, in the left column on each cycle's row. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed ## What is next? Continue to the Print statements window to print or email your statements. See [Print statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-statements/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Print statements /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-statements page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print statements ## Before you start Before you can print statements, you have to prepare them. See [Prepare statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-statements/). 1. Go to the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. In the **Actions** field, select what you want to do. The default action is **Print statement**, but you can also email or regenerate statements or decide not to print or email them. 1. In the **Statement cycle** field, select the statement cycle you want to process. You can only process one cycle at a time. 1. In the **Message** field, you can write a message that will be printed to all customer statements. 1. Click **Process**. The statement will be displayed and you can review it before you print or email it. To set up or change your printing preferences for a customer, see: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Print customer statements or send them by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/print-customer-statements-or-send-them-by-email page You can print customer statements (to send them to customers by postal mail) and send statements by email in the Print statements (AR503500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print customer statements or send them by email You can print customer statements (to send them to customers by postal mail) and send statements by email in the Print statements (AR503500) window. For more information: [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/). You can print customer statements (to send them to customers by postal mail) and send statements by email in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. The window lists only statements that were previously prepared. For details, see: [Prepare customer statements](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/statement-cycles/prepare-customer-statements/). 1. Go to the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. In the top part, select the statement cycle for which customer statements will be processed. 1. In the **Statement date** field, check the date of the customer statements to be sure that it is the date you want to use. 1. In the **Actions** field, do one of the following: + To print statements to send them to customers by postal mail, select **Print statement**. As a result, the system displays the list of customers (for the selected statement cycle) that prefer to get a printed version of a statement or customers that have the **Print statement** check box selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. + To send statements to customers electronically by email, select **Email Statement**. As a result, the system displays the list of customers (for the selected statement cycle) that prefer to get a statement by email or customers that have **Send statements by email** check box selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, do one of the following: + To process all the listed statements, click **Process all**. + To process only selected statements, select the unlabeled check boxes for the statements and click **Process**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Write-off methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off methods Write-off methods - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview page You can use write-off functionality to implement the direct write-off and allowance methods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off methods - overview You can use write-off functionality to implement the direct write-off and allowance methods. In this topic, you will read about how write-off methods are used and what transactions are generated when you implement the direct write-off or allowance method. ## Direct write-off method Your business may use the direct write-off method for financial reporting when you can determine that an amount will be uncollectible in the period when the sale took place and that the amount represents an insignificant amount, as with bank charges. The direct write-off method ignores VAT amounts previously paid to a tax authority on the documents being written off. You may need to manually record the written-off amounts and the corresponding VAT amounts to use them for adjustments to the tax return. In the direct method, a write-off requires a journal entry that increases an expense account (the Balance write-off account) and a journal entry that decreases accounts receivable for the customer. You configure a reason code that determines the expense account and then write off an amount from a customer invoice by using this reason code. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Balance write-off account|Amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Amount| If you write off customer credits, the amount will be recognised as income, and the customer balance of accounts receivable will be increased. You configure a reason code that determines the income account and then write off an amount from a customer invoice by using this reason code. Accounts are affected as shown in the following table. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Credit write-off account|0.0|Amount| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| If a customer pays a debt that has been written off, you enter the payment as usual and do not apply it to any document. You then write off the payment by using a document of the **Credit write-off** type. ## Allowance method The allowance method is based on the idea that some of customer debts will not be paid, although companies don't know in advance which customers will not pay. This method involves using two special accounts: + Allowance for doubtful accounts: This contra asset account to accounts receivable contains the estimated amount of the debts that will not be collected. The estimate may be a percentage of sales or an amount based on an ageing analysis of sales receivables. + Bad debts expense: This is a temporary expense account that reports credit losses for only the period shown on the income statement. The allowance method is used as follows: At the end of the accounting period, you estimate the amount to become uncollectible in accounts receivable and manually update accounts by using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Bad debts expense|Amount|0.0| |Allowance for doubtful accounts|0.0|Amount| You configure a reason code that points to the Allowance for doubtful accounts account. When a specific customer's account is identified as uncollectible, you write off debts by using this reason code. Accounts are affected as shown below. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Allowance for doubtful accounts|Amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account (customer account)|0.0|Amount| Under the allowance method, a write-off does not change the net realisable value of sales receivables. It simply reduces sales receivables and the allowance for bad debts by equivalent amounts.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About write-off setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/about-write-off-setup page Setting up write-off functionality is similar for the direct write-off and allowance methods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About write-off setup Setting up write-off functionality is similar for the direct write-off and allowance methods. To use the functionality of write-offs, you need to configure the following entities: + General ledger accounts to record balance and credit write-offs to. + Reason codes to point to the general ledger account and subaccount where write-offs are to be recorded. + Customer accounts with write-off functionality enabled and write-off limits specified. If these accounts already exist, you just need to change their settings. In this topic, you will read about setting up write-off functionality and additional information that you may need during configuration. ## Write-off process setup To use the write-off functionality, you perform the following steps: 1. You configure the general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be used for writing off expenses by using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window as follows: + For the direct write-off method, you configure an expense account (for instance, the Balance write-off account) and subaccounts (if needed). + For the allowance method, you configure a contra asset account to accounts receivable (for instance, Allowance for doubtful accounts) and an expense account (for example, Bad debts expense) and subaccounts (if needed). 1. In the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window, you configure reason codes that point to the general ledger accounts you have configured in Step 1: + For the direct write-off method, you create a reason code that points to the expense account and subaccount to be used for writing off expenses. You can configure different reason codes to distribute write-offs to different accounts or use one reason code for all such expenses. + For the allowance method, you create a reason code that points to the contra asset account (Allowance for doubtful accounts) and subaccount. Then you write off bad debts by using this reason code directly from an invoice and make the entries manually for the contra asset account in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. For details, see [Add a reason code](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/add-a-reason-code/). 1. You enable write-off functionality for a group of customer accounts by using the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window or individually for a customer account by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. For details, see [Enable or disable write-offs](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/enable-or-disable-write-offs/). ### After configuration is done, you can + Write off balances directly from an invoice when you apply a payment to it by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. + Write off balances or credits of several documents at once by using the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. + Write off balances directly from an invoice when you apply a payment (created to match a bank transaction) to it by using the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window. ## Default reason codes By using the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, you can specify the reason codes to be used by default for writing off credits and balances. The system will fill in the reason codes specified here in the **Reason code** field in the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window, as well as in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, when you select the type of write-off operation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add a reason code /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/add-a-reason-code section You define reason codes on the Reason codes (CS211000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a reason code You define reason codes on the Reason codes (CS211000) window. For more information: [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/). You define reason codes on the[Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. For each reason code, you must specify with what transaction it will be used. The transaction type determines the Visma Net workspace the reason code can be used in. You can define the reason codes for the following types of transactions originated from the Customer ledger workspace: credit write-off and balance write-off. Before doing the following, make sure that the General ledger accounts and subaccounts you are going to use for write-offs are configured. 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Reason code** field, type the identifier of the reason code. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used. 1. In the **Description** field, type a short description of the reason code. 1. In the **Usage** field, select the option indicating where the reason code will be used: + To use the reason code for writing off credits, select **Credit write-off**. + To use the reason code for writing off balances, select **Balance write-off**. 1. In the **Combine sub. from** field, construct a subaccount mask. Point to each segment and press F3 to open the list of options. 1. In the **Account** field, select the account to be updated by the transaction amount for transactions marked by the reason code. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, specify a subaccount according to the mask. Point to each segment and press F3 to open the list of options. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create reason codes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create reason codes 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Reason code** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to see the next free number for you to enter in this field. 1. Enter the number in the **Reason code** field. 1. Enter a **Description** for your reason code. 1. In the **Usage** field select one of the following usages: 1. **Sales** 1. **Issue** 1. **Receipt** 1. **Adjustment** 1. **Transfer** > [!NOTE] > To create reason codes for write-offs, see: [Create reason codes for write-offs](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes-for-write-offs/). 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the account that the reason code will affect. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, enter the subaccount that the reason code will affect. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > Reason codes are also used for stocktaking reviews. The default code for a stocktaking review is **4**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Enable or disable write-offs /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/enable-or-disable-write-offs section You can define write-offs to be enabled by default for customers grouped under a particular class or modify the default setting for a particular customer of the class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable or disable write-offs You can define write-offs to be enabled by default for customers grouped under a particular class or modify the default setting for a particular customer of the class. You use the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window to configure default write-off settings for each class and the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window to override default class settings for particular customers. ## Set the default write-off settings for customers of a customer class 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class that you want to enable or disable write-offs for. 1. On the **General information** tab, in the **Default financial and payment settings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Enable write-offs** check box if you want to allow write-off operations for customers of this customer class or clear the check box to disable write-offs for customers of the class. 1. If you have enabled write-offs for the class, in the **Write-off limit** field, type the maximum value that may be written off for each application line for documents of customers of the class. All balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can then change default write-offs settings for each customer individually. ## Override default write-off settings for a customer 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Customer number** field, select the customer that you want to enable or disable write-offs for. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Financial settings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Enable write-offs** check box if you want to allow write-off operations for the selected customer or clear the check box to disable write-off operations. 1. If you have enabled write-offs for the class, in the **Write-off limit** field, type the maximum value that may be written off for each application line. All balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create reason codes for write-offs /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes-for-write-offs section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create reason codes for write-offs ## Before you start In the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window you can create reason codes for **Balance write-offs** and **Credit write-offs**. These are used in the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) and [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) windows. > [!NOTE] > Reason codes are mandatory for performing write-offs on your invoices or credit notes > [!NOTE] > Reason codes are also used for stocktaking reviews. The default code for a stocktaking review is **4**. 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Reason code** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to see how many reason codes already exist: use the next available number for your new reason code. 1. In the ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) -field, fill in the number of your new reason code. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the reason for your write-off. 1. In the **Usage** field select one of the following: 1. **Balance write-off** - to write-off an underpayment. or 1. **Credit write-off** - to write-off an overpayment. 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the account the reason code will affect. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, enter the subaccount the reason code will affect. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Write off balances and credits /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-balances-and-credits page By using the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window, you can view the balances and credits (of appropriately low amounts) of customers for which write-offs are allowed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write off balances and credits By using the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window, you can view the balances and credits (of appropriately low amounts) of customers for which write-offs are allowed. For more information: [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/). By using the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window, you can view the balances and credits (of appropriately low amounts) of customers for which write-offs are allowed. You can select the documents to be written off. ## Before you start Make sure that reason codes are properly configured and write-offs are enabled. For details, see: [About write-off setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/about-write-off-setup/). ## Write off small balances 1. Go to the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select one of the following options: + To write off underpayments: **Balance write-off** + To write off overpayments: **Credit write-off** 1. In the **Doc. date** field, select the date when the write-off will be performed. The system automatically fills in the **Post period** field based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch for which you want to display data. The field is automatically filled with the branch you have access to. 1. Optional: In the **Customer** field, select the customer for which you want to write off small balances from the list of customers for which write-offs are permitted. 1. In the **Reason code** field, select the reason code you want to mark write-off transactions with. The reason code defines the account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances. The field is automatically filled with the default reason code specified in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. In the table, the system lists the documents for which the balance amount (underpayment or overpayment, depending on the selected write-off type) is below the limit. After you increase the limit amount, you can write off the balances that exceed the default limit. 1. To write off balances for documents, do one of the following: + To write off the small balances for particular documents, select the unnamed check box in the document row for each document, and then click **Process** in the window toolbar. + To write off the small balances for all listed documents, click **Process all** in the window toolbar. After processing has been successfully completed, you can view the batch in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Write-off underpayments or overpayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-underpayments-or-overpayments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off underpayments or overpayments ## Before you start To be able to write off, you have to enable this in the settings for your customer: [Enable write-offs for customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/enable-write-offs-for-customer/). 1. Go to the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. 1. In **Type**, select the write-off operation you want to use: 1. **Balance write-off** - to write-off an underpayment. 1. **Credit write-off** - to write-off an overpayment. 1. Select a **customer** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). 1. Optional: Select a **post period** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). 1. Select a **reason code** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). If there is no relevant reason code: [Create reason codes for write-offs](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/create-reason-codes-for-write-offs/). 1. Go to the table, and select the invoices you want to process. 1. Click: 1. Process the selected invoices, or 1. Process all in the list of invoices / credit notes, and create batches with status **Posted** or **Unposted**. The write-offs are posted to the general ledger.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Multiple price lists /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Multiple price lists Manage sales prices - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview page Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for maintaining sales prices: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage sales prices - overview Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for maintaining sales prices: Default prices : By using this straightforward mechanism, you define and maintain a price for each individual item, manually or by using import scenarios. The default price is used for sales. You can use discounts with these prices, if needed. With this mechanism, the retention of price changes is not supported. Price lists : By using this mechanism, you can implement different pricing strategies. You can define a base price list, price lists that apply to a group of customers and a particular customer, promotional price lists, and prices that depend on the quantity of the product. To avoid inconsistency, you should choose just one mechanism for maintaining prices of stock items. Prices defined for the same stock item by using both mechanisms are independent and there is no synchronisation between them. In these topics, you will read about price lists and how you can use them to easily implement any pricing strategy that will increase sales and help your company meet its changing objectives. For details on configuration and maintenance of the default prices, see: [About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/).

Related pages

Concepts

 About multiple price lists /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-multiple-price-lists page In Visma Net, you can maintain multiple price lists for various customer price classes and in multiple currencies, and you can update the lists any time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About multiple price lists In Visma Net, you can maintain multiple price lists for various customer price classes and in multiple currencies, and you can update the lists any time. A price list is a list of sales prices for goods or services. The prices are expressed in a specific currency and intended for either customers of a specific customer price class or a particular customer. You configure price lists in the Customer ledger workspace, so that even if the Inventory module is not included in your license, you can define non-stock items and maintain prices for them. The system automatically applies these prices to the non-stock items listed on an invoice when the document is being saved. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system (which means that you can configure stock items too), the system applies sales prices to stock and non-stock items on sales orders. In this topic, you will read about price lists, price records, and rules of price application. ## Price list definition In Visma Net, a price list is a selection of records that meet user-defined criteria. By using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, you define this selection criteria and get the list of records. If you want to use the obtained list of records for editing and mass-calculation of prices, you may create a sales price worksheet based on the selection, by using the **Create price worksheet** button in the window. For details about using worksheets, see [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/). You can select prices by criteria related to the price record: type, code, stock identifier, and date. You can also select prices by criteria related to stock or item class, price class, work group, and manager responsible for pricing some of the items on the list. The stock-related settings are specified for each item on the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. ## Price record definition In Visma Net each price record is a combination of the price type, price code (if applicable), stock item, unit of measure, price, and currency. Each combination must be unique at any given time. For details, see [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/). You can create multiple price records for the same stock item by changing any component of its price record. Additionally, you may create records for promotional prices and for prices that depend on the volume of products being sold. ## Rules for automatic price selection As you have seen in the previous example, you can define multiple prices, each with a different goal, for one stock item. When a user modifies the quantity in a sales order or an invoice, the system searches for applicable prices (that is, those that are valid at the invoice date) for each item as follows: > [!NOTE] > Once the system finds an applicable price, it searches no further. 1. Promotional customer-specific price 1. Customer-specific price 1. Promotional price specific to the customer price class 1. Price for the customer price class 1. Promotional base price 1. Base price 1. Default price > [!NOTE] > If price tiers are defined in the applicable price list, the system applies the price from the tier that applies to the item quantity. A user can update the prices and discounts for an existing document with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status by clicking **Recalculate prices and discounts** (in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar of the data entry window used to create the document). This option should be used if prices and discounts may have changed since the document was first entered or modified.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About sales price types /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-sales-price-types page In general, by using the price list pricing mechanism, you can create sales prices of the following types: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales price types In general, by using the price list pricing mechanism, you can create sales prices of the following types: + Base: Prices aimed to all customers. These prices are used if no more specific prices are defined. + Specific to a customer price class: Prices aimed to customers that belong to a particular price class. + Specific to a customer: Prices aimed to a particular customer. + Promotional: Prices aimed to draw customers' attention. + Volume-dependent: Prices that depend on the volume of products being sold. > [!NOTE] > A price can be of multiple types simultaneously, for example, promotional, volume-dependent, and specific to a customer. In this topic, you will read about how you create a sales price of each listed type. ## Price types and codes Price types and codes are used to specify the target audience of the price. Each price record you define for a stock item must be assigned a price type and code (components of a price record). You select one of the following price types: + **Base**: You use this price type for prices that you want to include in a base price list. Prices from this price list are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or specific to customers). This price type does not have any price codes. + **Customer price class**: You use this price type for prices that you want to include in a price list aimed at customers of a particular customer price class. This price type also requires a price code to be specified. The price codes are identifiers of customer price classes defined in the system. > [!NOTE] > You use the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window to define a customer price class or a group of customers that may be offered special prices because of their buying habits. For instance, you could define as a class those customers that buy the largest quantities and are offered the most competitive prices. By default, all customers of the same customer price class are charged the same price for the same item. + **Customer**: You use this price type for prices that you want to include in a price list aimed at a particular customer. This price type also requires a price code to be specified. The price codes are identifiers of customer accounts defined in the system. This price type might be needed if you have customers that have unique buying habits even among customers of the same price class, or customers who buy especially large volumes of products. > [!NOTE] > If you set up especially low prices for some customers or if you generally prefer to use customer-specific prices rather than configure customer-specific discounts, you can use the **Ignore line discounts if the Customer-specific price is available** option to instruct the system not to apply the line-level discounts when it applies the customer-specific prices. The option is located on the **Price/discount settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By using the described price types and codes, you can create different price lists in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window or the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. You can sort price records by their type and code, and the resulting selection is a price list that applicable to a group of customers or to a particular customer. ## Promotional prices If your company uses promotions to draw customer attention to new products or to clear some inventory, in Visma Net, you can define promotional prices or temporary prices for specific items. Such prices should have expiration dates after which they are not used. You can define promotional prices one by one by selecting the **Promotion** check box for price records and specifying expiration dates in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. You can also define promotional prices in bulk by using the functionality of the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. ## Volume-dependent prices If your license includes the **Volume pricing** functionality, you can enable it in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The prices (sales prices and purchase prices) that had been defined before the functionality has been enabled will be automatically redefined as prices for the zero-quantity tiers. Once you have been using the functionality, you should not disable it, because enabling the functionality causes certain changes in the database that cannot be rolled back by disabling the functionality. Consider a simple example of defining sales prices for tiers based on quantities. Your company sells an item at a base price of €100, but you want to encourage your customers to buy more of the item. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is not enabled, the same price is used, regardless of the quantity of the item being purchased. With the functionality enabled, you can define the following quantity tiers: + 0 units: €100 per unit + 5 units: €95 per unit + 10 units: €80 per unit + 50 units: €75 per unit By using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window or the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, you can add four price records for the same stock item and specify the break quantity for each price record (in the **Break qty** column) and the respective price. The system selects the prices for items on the document lines by the item quantities and the available price tiers: If a customer buys 4 items, the total is €400 ( €100 per unit); if the customer buys 50 units, the customer total is €3750 (€75 per unit). The process of updating tiered prices is similar to that of updating regular sales prices. Generally, for each tier, you should specify the new break quantity, the price, and the date (we recommend using the same date for all tiers of the price). You can redefine the same number of tiers or add new tiers.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About effective period of prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices page A price is effective during some period of time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About effective period of prices A price is effective during some period of time. In each price record, you define this period with the effective date and the expiration date; both dates are included in the effective period. The period can be open (no effective date or expiration date is specified) or closed (both dates are specified). In this topic, you will read about how the system validates a price record (regular and promotional), both when you add it manually and when you add it by using the worksheet functionality. ## Price record validation when you add the record manually When you add a new price record for a stock item by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, the system checks whether the record overlaps in time with existing records that have the same price type, code (if applicable), and currency. If the new record duplicates an existing one, the system flags the record with an error when you attempt to save your changes, until you adjust the date range either of the new record or of an existing one. Consider the following example: In one record, you define a base price in dollars for an stock item that is effective on 04.08.2020, with no expiration date specified. Suppose that you add for the same stock item a record with a new base price in Euros that will be effective on 06.08.2020. The system warns you that the new record duplicates the existing one and cannot be saved. ## Overlap in effective periods To successfully save your changes, you need to close the open period of the existing price record or specify an expiration date that is before the effective period of the new record. In this example, an expiration date of 05.08.2020 is used to fix the overlap. Then you can save the new record. ## Price record validation when you add the record by worksheet By using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, you can add records in bulk or mass-update records by recalculating prices. When you release a worksheet for which you have added new records or updated existing ones, the system checks whether each record overlaps in time with existing records that have the same price type, code (if applicable), and currency, but the check is done within the records of the selected worksheet. The system does not warn you that price records in the worksheet overlap in time with the sales price records; it solves any overlapping automatically. The way the system automatically fixes overlap depends on whether the **Overwrite overlapping prices** check box is selected: + If it is cleared, the system automatically closes the open period of the price record with which a new record overlaps. (That is the same operation that you have to perform manually when you add the price record by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window.) + If it is selected, the system removes the price records with which a new record overlaps completely and adjusts the periods of the records with which a new record overlaps partially. Consider the following example: Two customer-specific prices are defined for an stock item. The first (€20000) price is effective from 17.08.2020 through 25.8.2020. The second (€22000) price is effective starting on 26.8.2020. Suppose that you want to update prices for this stock item by adding a new price, €23000, which is effective starting on 20.08.2020. The new price record overlaps partially (from 20.08.2020 through 25.8.2020) with the first one shown above and completely (from 26.08.2020 indefinitely into the future) with the second one. Suppose that you create a worksheet with the new price record and select the **Overwrite overlapping prices** check box. When you release the worksheet, the system adjusts the effective period of the first record and overwrites the second one with the new record. ## Validation of promotional price records Promotional price records may overlap in time with non-promotional price records. When you add records manually by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, the system validates promotional price records in the same way as it validates regular prices. When you update promotional prices by using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, the **Overwrite overlapping prices** check box is selected by default and cannot be cleared. That is, the system always removes price records with which a new record overlaps completely and adjusts the periods of the records with which a new record overlaps partially.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About sales price calculation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-sales-price-calculation page Pricing policy is a major factor affecting a company's total income, profit, and competitiveness. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales price calculation Pricing policy is a major factor affecting a company's total income, profit, and competitiveness. Companies generally set prices that cover their production costs and bring some profit, while also being low enough to motivate customers to buy more frequently and in greater quantity than they otherwise would. At times, companies pursue short-term pricing strategies for certain products. In Visma Net, you can manually set prices on a per-record basis, or you can mass-calculate sales prices by using the price basis you specify. If your business needs to maintain prices that include a VAT, as with value-added taxes (VATs), you can configure the system to exclude the VAT from the price on sales orders if this VAT does not apply or to recalculate the VAT if a discount was applied. For details, see [About inclusive VAT support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-inclusive-vat-support/). In this topic, you will read about the price basis used to calculate prices and how to maintain VAT-inclusive prices. ## Price basis While some companies use a cost-plus approach in calculating sales prices, others set prices to achieve specific profit goals. In Visma Net, you can use the approach that makes the most sense at a particular time. In Visma Net, the options for the price basis can be divided into the following groups: + Inventory-related: A cost-plus basis (the **Last cost + mark.up %** or **Avg./std. cost + mark-up %** option) or the manufacturer's suggested retail price ( **MSRP** ). You specify values for these options by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for stock items. For non-stock items only the **Avg./std. cost + mark-up %** option is applicable, and the system uses instead of the average or standard cost the current cost of a non-stock item, which is specified in the **Current cost** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + Price record-related: The item's current price ( **Source price** ) or pending price ( **Pending price** ). You specify values for these options by using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. Before you start price calculation, make sure that the option you want to use as a price basis has the correct values. ## Calculate prices By using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, you can perform mass calculation of prices for all records in the selected worksheet. > [!NOTE] > Only pending prices can be calculated; the prices that are currently in effect cannot be modified. To calculate the pending prices for the price records in the worksheet, you use the **Calculate pending prices** dialog box, which you invoke by clicking the **Calculate pending prices** button on the table toolbar. In the dialog box, you can select one of the following price bases, in accordance with your company's pricing policies: + **Last cost + mark-up %**: To calculate each pending price based on the stock item's last cost plus the mark-up percentage specified for the item. > [!NOTE] > The option is not applicable for non-stock items. + **Avg./std. cost + mark-up %**: To calculate each pending price based on the stock item's average or standard cost increased by the mark-up percentage specified for the item. In case of non-stock items, the system uses the current cost, instead of the average or standard cost. + **Source price**: To calculate each pending price based on the item's source price (displayed in the **Source price** column). + **MSRP**: To calculate each pending price based on the manufacturer's suggested retail price of the item. + **Pending price**: To calculate the new pending price based on the earlier pending price of the item. If value-added (or similar) taxes are enforced for your business, you can apply a specific percentage to the basis you select to cover additional unassigned costs or to include a specific VAT. Also, you can change the number of decimal places when you calculate pending prices. For a price list intended for end customers, you may want to set prices expressed in integers or with fewer decimal places than are used by the currency for which you calculate pending sales prices. ## Minimal mark-up validation You can configure minimal mark-up validation for prices on the **General settings** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. In the **Validate min. profit margin** field, you can select one of the following options: No validation : No mark-up validation is performed for new pending prices. Warning : The system will display a warning when a user enters a pending price that is below the price with the minimum mark-up. Set to minimum : The system will automatically set the price to the value with the minimum mark-up if a user enters a pending price below the price with the minimal mark-up. The mark-up percentage defined for an item class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window is used as a default value for items of the class. You can override the item class setting for a particular stock item by defining the mark-up percentage on the **Price/cost information** tab for non-stock items by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, and for stock items by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## VAT-inclusive prices Your company may need to maintain prices that include a VAT. Such prices are typical in countries where value-added taxes are enforced. Among your company's customers may be end customers that must pay a VAT and retail customers that are exempt from paying the VAT. To maintain price lists with taxes included and to prevent charging VAT-exempt customers, take the following steps: + In the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window, create a price list with the VAT amount added to prices. + Specify the VAT included in the prices in the **VAT** column of the same window. + Assign customers exempt from the VAT to a VAT zone that doesn't include this VAT, and customers that pay this VAT to a zone that includes it. When you save a sales order created for a customer, the system creates the list of applicable taxes by using the VAT category of each item and the VAT zone of the customer. For each item on the order, the system performs checks and handles prices accordingly: + If the VAT included in the price applies to the line item, the price is used as-is and the VAT is processed as inclusive. + If the VAT included in the price does not apply to the line item, the VAT amount is excluded from the price.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Sales price worksheets /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales price worksheets Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Sales price worksheet - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/about-sales-price-worksheet-overview page A sales price worksheet is a tool used to update sales price records in bulk. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Sales price worksheet - overview A sales price worksheet is a tool used to update sales price records in bulk. In Visma Net, you use the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window for this purpose. You can edit records one by one or apply changes to multiple records at once. Prices defined in a worksheet become effective only when you release the worksheet. In general, you perform the following steps to update sales prices by using the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window: ## 1. Create a worksheet You create a new worksheet by using the **Add new record** button in the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window toolbar. Each worksheet has a reference number that the system generates according to the number series defined in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. A worksheet is created with the **On hold** status and the **Hold** check box selected, which indicates that a user can edit the worksheet but cannot release it yet. You can edit the price records of existing worksheets that have the **On hold** or **Open** status. Also, you can click the **Create price worksheet** button in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window to create a worksheet that is populated with the price records you have selected in this window. ## 2. Populate a worksheet You decide which price records you want to update and add these records to a worksheet. You can populate a worksheet by performing any of the following actions, each of which adds new records to the existing list: + Adding the new price records one by one, by using a standard button in the table toolbar + Deleting the price records one by one, by using a standard button in the table toolbar + Uploading price records from an Excel file, by using a standard button in the table toolbar + Uploading the list of items with their default price information from the Inventory workspace by using the **Add item** button in the table toolbar + Making a copy of existing price records by using the **Copy prices** button in the table toolbar You can edit the added price records and then add more new price records to the worksheet, or window the list of price records first and then proceed to editing. The worksheet should have the **Hold** check box selected (which gives it the **On hold** status). ## 3. Edit price records You can edit price records by performing any of the following actions: + Editing components of price records one by one, including creating tiered prices and changing a unit of measure or price type and code (if needed). Also, you can enter the new prices for the stock items in the list in the **Pending price** column. + Calculating the new pending prices for all price records in the worksheet by using the selected price basis. You can base sales prices in price lists on the manufacturer's suggested retail prices (MSRP), standard or average costs, mark-ups set for particular item classes or inventory price classes, or other rules. To ensure that the appropriate mark-up is achieved, you can configure the system to warn users, when they modify a sales order, that the price is lower than the required minimum mark-up percentage. For details, see [About sales price calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-sales-price-calculation/). + Making all the records in the worksheet promotional, by selecting the **Promotional** check box and specifying the expiration date in the top part of the window. When you have finished editing price records, you should clear the **Hold** check box, which gives the worksheet the **Open** status, indicating that the worksheet is ready to be released. With this status, you still can edit price records one by one, but you cannot use mass-editing tools. ## 4. Update price records The price records listed in the worksheet are added to the sales prices records when you release the worksheet by clicking **Release** in the window toolbar. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the **Effective date** field of the worksheet. When you release a worksheet, the system validates records, ensuring that the following criteria are met: + Pending prices should be set for all records. If you do not want to update a price, delete the row from the table or specify the current price in the **Pending price** column. + Regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time. + Promotional prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time. Note: Promotional and regular prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure, and currency may overlap one another in time. For details on price record validity, see [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About Sales price worksheets /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/about-sales-price-worksheets page By using a sales price worksheet, you can make changes to your prices in a batch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Sales price worksheets By using a sales price worksheet, you can make changes to your prices in a batch. ## Before you start If you want to maintain your sales prices using the Sales price worksheets window, you should not use the default prices in the Non-stock items and Stock items windows. See: [Maintain default prices for non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-non-stock-items/) and [Maintain default prices for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items/). You can create a worksheet with promotional prices, and set an expiration date for the promotion. You can also use a worksheet to calculate the pending prices for multiple items by using a price basis you specify yourself. To populate a worksheet, you can manually add new rows, upload prices from an Excel or a.csv file, or use the **Add item** and **Copy prices** buttons. See: [Import data from a local file to a table](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/import-data-from-file-to-table-task/). When you use the **Customer** or **Customer price class** price type, you must also select a **price code**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a sales price worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/create-a-sales-price-worksheet section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales price worksheet 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Write a **description** for the new sales price worksheet. 1. To add items to the worksheet, you can: + Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar and select the **item ID** you want to add to the worksheet. + Click **Add item** in the table toolbar. In the **Add item to worksheet** pop-up window, you can select the desired **item IDs** and click **Add** or **Add and close**. + Click **Copy prices** in the table toolbar. In the pop-up window, you can select the source and destination price type of the items you want to copy to the new price worksheet, and define the effective date of the prices. Click **Copy** to copy. + Click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) to open the **File upload** dialog box. You can locate and import local files, Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx), and.csv files. See: [Import data from a local file to a table](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/import-data-from-file-to-table-task/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Add records for multiple items to a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-records-for-multiple-items-to-a-worksheet section Use this window to add price records for particular items to a worksheet by copying their default prices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add records for multiple items to a worksheet Use this window to add price records for particular items to a worksheet by copying their default prices. 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of the window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add item**. 1. In the **Add item to worksheet dialog box**, do the following: 1. To view the list of stock items for which you want to create price records, specify selection criteria in the Selection area. The following criteria are available: + **Item**: Start typing in the field, and the system displays the list of stock items that contain the string in their ID or description. Alternatively, you can select the stock item. + **Item class ID**: Select the ID of the class of stock or non-stock stock items that you want to add to a worksheet. Leave the field blank to add items of multiple item classes. + **Price class ID**: Select the item price class of the items that you want to add to a worksheet. You can leave the field blank to add items in multiple item price classes. + **Product manager** and **Me**: You can use these criteria as follows: + Select the **Me** check box to add items assigned to you. + Clear the **Me** check box and select a username to add items assigned to the user. + Leave the field blank to add items assigned to multiple users of the selected price work group or all groups. + **Work group** and **My**: You can use these criteria as follows: + Select the **My** check box to add items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group). + Clear the **My** check box and select a price work group in the field to add items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group). + Leave the field blank and clear the check box to add items assigned to multiple price work groups. 1. In the **Price type to add** section, do the following: Values specified in this section will be applied to all new price records if you click **Add** or **Add and close**. 1. In the **Price type** field, select the type of the price. The following options are available: + **Base**: Select this price type to add base price records. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). For this price type, you do not need to enter a price code. + **Customer**: Select this price type to add customer-specific price records. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** cell. In this case, the price code is an identifier of a customer account defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: Select this price type to add price records specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** cell. In this case, the price code is an identifier of the customer price class defined in the system. 1. If you have selected *Base* in the **Price type** field, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** field, select a price code. 1. In the **Currency** field, select the currency of the price. The list of available currencies is defined in the Currency management workspace. 1. In the table, select the unlabeled check boxes next to the stock items for which you want to add price records. 1. Do one of the following: + Click **Add** to add price records for the selected stock items and proceed with the item selection. + Click **Add and close** to add price records for the selected stock items and close the dialog box + Click **Cancel** to close the dialog box without adding price records for the selected stock items. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Add a record to a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-a-record-to-a-worksheet section On the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, you can add new price record to a worksheet. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a record to a worksheet On the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, you can add new price record to a worksheet. For more information: [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/). 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of the window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. 1. In the table, do the following: 1. Add a row. In the **Price type** column of the new row, select the type of this price, which is one of the following options: + **Base**: Select this price type to add a base price record. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). For this price type, you do not need to specify a price code. + **Customer**: Select this price type to add a customer-specific price record. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** column. In this case, the price code is an identifier of a customer account defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: Select this price type to add a price record specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** column. In this case, the price code is an identifier of a customer price class defined in the system. 1. If you have selected the **Base** option in the **Price type** column, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** column of the row, select a price code (as described in the previous sub step). 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the identifier of the stock item you want to add the price for. When you make this selection, the system fills in the **Description** column with the description of the selected stock item. It also fills in the **Source price** column with the default price of the item. 1. In the **UoM** column, select the unit of measure in which you want to sell the stock item. The list of available units of measure for a stock item is defined in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for stock items (if the Inventory module is enabled) and the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window for non-stock items. 1. Optional: In the **Break qty.** column, specify the minimum quantity of the product for which this price is valid. This column is displayed if the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. In the **Pending price** column, specify the sales price for the selected stock item. 1. In the **Currency** column, select the currency in which the price is expressed. The list of available currencies is defined in the Currency management 1. Optional: In the **VAT** column, select the VAT whose amount is included in the sales price. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Copy prices to a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/copy-prices-to-a-worksheet section You can use the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window to copy to a worksheet the price records of items that meet particular criteria. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Copy prices to a worksheet You can use the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window to copy to a worksheet the price records of items that meet particular criteria. For more information: [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/). You can use the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window to copy to a worksheet the price records of items that meet particular criteria. For the copied price records, you can change the currency, price type, and code. 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of this window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. For details, see: [Create a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet/). 1. Click **Copy prices** in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Copy prices dialog box** that is brought up, do the following: 1. In the **Source** area of the dialog box, specify the selection criteria the system uses to window the list of stock items for which you want to copy price records: + In the **Price type** field, select one of the following options as the type of the price records to be copied: + **Base**: To copy base price records. For this price type, you do not need to specify a price code. + **Customer**: To copy customer-specific price records. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer accounts defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: To copy price records specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer price classes defined in the system. + If you have selected **Base** in the **Price type** field, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** field, select a price code, as described above. + In the **Source currency** field, select the currency of the price records to be copied. + In the **Effective as of** field, select the date that the effective date of the item prices should match. + Optional: Select the **Promotional prices** check box if you want to copy promotional price records. 1. In the **Destination** area, do the following: The values specified in this area will be applied to all new price records when you copy the prices. 1. In the **Price type** field, select the type of the price, which is one of the following options: + **Base**: To add base price records. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). For this price type, you don't need to specify a price code. + **Customer**: To add customer-specific price records. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer accounts defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: To add price records specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** field. In this case, the price codes are the identifiers of the customer price classes defined in the system. 1. If you have selected **Base** in the **Price type** field, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** field, select a price code, as described above. 1. In the **Destination currency** field, select the currency of the price. 1. If the **Source currency** and **Destination currency** values differ, in the **Currency conversion** area, do the following: + In the **Rate type** field, select the rate type to be used for currency conversion. + In the **Currency effective date** field, select the date when the exchange rate for the destination currency becomes effective. 1. Do one of the following: + Click **Copy** to add to the worksheet the copied price records with the new values and close the dialog box. + Click **Cancel** to close the dialog box without adding price records. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Add promotional prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-promotional-prices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add promotional prices 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the functionality of this window, create a new worksheet or open an existing one. For details, see: [Create a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet/). 1. Populate the worksheet with the price records you want to make promotional by using any of the following procedures: + [Add a record to a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-a-record-to-a-worksheet/) + [Add records for multiple items to a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/add-records-for-multiple-items-to-a-worksheet/) + [Copy prices to a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/copy-prices-to-a-worksheet/) 1. Update prices with the values that are becoming promotional, by specifying their values in the **Pending price** column for each record or by following the [Calculate pending prices in a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-in-a-worksheet/) procedure. 1. Select the **Promotional** check box to mark all price records in the worksheet as promotional. 1. In the **Effective date** field, select the date when the defined prices should become effective. For details, see: [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/). 1. In the **Expiration date** field, select the date when the defined prices expires. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can release the worksheet to make defined promotional prices effective.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Calculate pending prices in a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-in-a-worksheet section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate pending prices in a worksheet ## Before you start Be sure that you have a populated worksheet with the **Hold** status that includes the records for which you want to calculate prices, and that this list of price records meets your requirements. Also, make sure that the options you want to use as a price basis have the correct values. 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. By using the standard functionality of this window, create a new worksheet and populate it with the price records or open an existing worksheet. For details, see: [Create a worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet/). 1. Click the **Calculate pending prices** button in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Calculate pending prices dialog box** that is brought up, do the following: 1. In the **Price adjustment** area of the dialog box, specify the price increase or decrease as a percentage of the basis. Do the following: + In the **% of original price** field, enter the percentage at which the new pending prices will be calculated by using the selected price basis. + In the **Decimal places** field, type the number of places after the decimal point that will be shown for prices. + Select the **Update with zero price when basis is zero** check box if you want the pending price parameter of the price record to be updated with the value zero if the selected price basis for this record is zero. 1. In the **Price basis** area, specify the basis for calculating new pending prices by selecting one of the following options: + **Last cost + mark-up %**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the stock items' last costs increased by the mark-up percentage specified for the items. > [!NOTE] > The option is not applicable for non-stock items. + **Average/standard cost + mark-up %**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the stock items' average/standard costs increased by the mark-up percentage specified for the items. In case of non-stock items, the system uses the current cost, instead of the average or standard cost. + **Source price**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the item's source price (displayed in the **Source price** column). + **MSRP**: Select this option if you want to calculate prices based on the manufacturer's suggested retail price. + **Pending price**: Select this option if you want to recalculate pending prices based on currently pending prices. + **Replacement cost**: An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on the item's replacement cost. 1. Do one of the following: + Click **Update** to update the pending prices with the new values. + Click **Cancel** to close the dialog box without updating price records. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After you have updated the price records with the new pending prices, you can release the worksheet to make effective the pending prices of the items.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Calculate pending prices for items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-for-items page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate pending prices for items 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the price list for which you want to calculate pending prices. 1. In the **Effective date** field, enter a date from which the pending prices will be effective. It's automatically set to today's date. 1. Optional: When you select the option **Overwrite overlapping prices**, the prices whose effective dates overlap with the effective dates of the worksheet will be overwritten by the prices in the worksheet. 1. Click **Calculate pending prices**. 1. In the pop-up window, select the percentage of the price adjustment in the **% of original price** field. For example: if you want to raise the prices by 10%, enter 110. 1. Select the **price basis** of the adjustment. 1. Click **Update**. 1. Deselect the **Hold** check box. 1. Click **Release**. The pending prices will become effective on the date you entered in the **Effective date** field. > [!NOTE] > If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**. Price list maintenance /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Price list maintenance About Sales prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/about-sales-prices page In the Sales prices (AR202000) window, you can maintain and review the sales prices for your non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Sales prices In the Sales prices (AR202000) window, you can maintain and review the sales prices for your non-stock items. For more information: [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/). If you are using the Inventory module, you can also maintain your stock items. In addition, you can maintain your customer-specific or customer price class-specific prices. The built-in **BASE** class is used for all customers that are not assigned to any specific price class. For more information on how to use customer price classes, see [Add a customer price class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/add-a-customer-price-class/). The changes you make in this window will become effective immediately: you are not able to retain a price history. If the option **Always calculate the price from the base currency** in the Customer ledger preferences window is selected, the price in any foreign currency is calculated based on the price expressed in the base currency. ## Manage sales prices Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for sales prices management: 1. **Default prices**: Define and maintain the default sales price for each individual item in the Non-stock items or Stock items windows. See: [Maintain default prices for non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-non-stock-items/) and [Maintain default prices for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items/). You can use discounts with these prices. 1. **Sales prices**: Implement different pricing strategies. You can define a base price list, price lists that applies to a customer class or a particular customer, promotional price lists, and prices that depend on the quantity of the product. See: [Maintain and review sales prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/maintain-and-review-sales-prices/). 1. **Sales price worksheets**: Use the list of records created in the Sales prices window to edit and mass-calculate prices with Sales price worksheets. See: [Create a sales price worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/create-a-sales-price-worksheet/). You can edit records one by one, or to apply changes to multiple the records at once. You can also calculate pending prices for your items. See: [Calculate pending prices for items](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/calculate-pending-prices-for-items/). If you are using Sales prices and/or Sales price worksheets to maintain your sales prices, do not use the default prices, and vice versa.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Add a price record /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/add-a-price-record section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a price record 1. Go to the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. 1. In the table, do the following: 1. Add a row. In the **Price type** column of the new row, select one of the following price types: + **Base**: A base price record. Base prices are used if there are no more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). You do not need to specify a price code for this price type. + **Customer**: A customer-specific price record. For this price type, you must select a price code in the **Price code** column. In this case, the price code should be an ID of a customer account defined in the system. + **Customer price class**: A price record specific to a price class. For this price type, you must select a price code. In this case, the price code should be an ID of a customer price class defined in the system. 1. If you have selected the **Base** option in the **Price type** column, skip this step; otherwise, in the **Price code** column of the row, select a price code. 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the ID of the item you want to add a price for. The **Description** column is filled in by default with the description of the selected item. 1. In the **UoM** column, select the unit of measure in which you want to sell the item. The list of available units of measure for an item is defined by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for stock items (if the Inventory module is enabled). For non-stock items, the units of measure are defined in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Promotion** column, if you want to mark the price record as promotional, select the check box. 1. Optional: In the **Break quantity** column, specify the minimum quantity of the product for which the price is valid. This column is displayed if the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. In the **Price** column, specify the sales price for the selected stock item. 1. In the **Currency** column, select the currency in which the price should be expressed. The list of available currencies is defined in the Currency management workspace. 1. In the **Effective date** column, select the date when the defined price becomes effective. For details, see: [About effective period of prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/about-effective-period-of-prices/). 1. Optional: In the **Expiration date** column, select the date when the defined price expires. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/create-a-worksheet section You can create a sales price worksheet in two different ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a worksheet You can create a sales price worksheet in two different ways: + To create a new worksheet that is populated with the price records you have selected, you use the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. + To create a new empty worksheet to be populated, you use the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. ## Create a populated worksheet 1. Go to the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. 1. In the Selection area of the window, specify the criteria that the price records to be listed should meet. We recommend that you specify the date for which you want to get the price records in the **Effective as of** field. The database may contain price records that differ only by price and date. When you try to create a worksheet, the system will force you to specify the date for which you want to get price records if the resulting list of records contains such similar records. 1. If needed, adjust the resulting list of price records by deleting or adding particular records. 1. In the window toolbar, click the **Create price worksheet** button. This brings up the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window, where you can continue working with a price worksheet containing all prices matching the criteria that you have selected in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. By default, the new worksheet has the **On hold** status and the current business date. ## Create an empty worksheet 1. Go to the [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the window toolbar. 1. Optional: In the **Reference no** field, specify the ID. If the field contains the `` placeholder, it means that the system will automatically generate a new number when you save the worksheet. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, type the description of the new worksheet. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The new worksheet has the **On hold** status and the current business date, which can be changed any time.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add a customer price class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/add-a-customer-price-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a customer price class ## Before you start Customer classes group customers by the price level that is offered to them. If you do not create price classes, all customers are assigned to the BASE price class. 1. Go to the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. Enter a unique identifier for the price class. You can use up to 10 characters, both letters and numbers. 1. Enter a detailed description of the class. You can use up to 50 characters, both letters and numbers. 1. In the **Sort order** column, enter a number that will represent the order in which the class will be displayed on reports. > [!NOTE] > The price class with the lowest value will be displayed in the first row of the price classes table in the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Edit or delete a customer price class /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/edit-or-delete-a-customer-price-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit or delete a customer price class 1. Go to the [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) window. 1. Select a row that you want to edit. 1. To edit a price class, double-click in the columns you want to change. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). To delete a row, select it, click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png) and then ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Maintain and review sales prices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/maintain-and-review-sales-prices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain and review sales prices 1. Go to the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. 1. Go to the drop-down list, and select the **price type** you want to review the sales price information for. 1. Use the other fields to filter your item list. > [!NOTE] > If you leave them empty, you will get a list with the sales prices of the selected type for all items. 1. Optional: In the **Item class** field, select the item class for which you want to review sales price information. You can also click **Me** to filter on the prices you have entered as a price manager, or **My** to filter on the price work groups you belong to. 1. Manually define new prices for the items you wish to edit. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar, to add a new item. 1. Fill in the information for the item. 1. Optional: You can define promotional prices by selecting the **Promotion** check box for the desired items. Enter the promotional price in the **Price** field and the period of the promotion in the **Effective date** and **Expiration date** fields. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > To add the items and their prices to a price list, click **Create price worksheets**. This will open the Sales price worksheets window. For more information, see [About Sales price worksheets](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/sales-price-worksheets/about-sales-price-worksheets/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts section In Visma Net, your company can configure discounts of various types, which can be applied to sales orders if the Inventory functionality (which includes the Inventory, Inventory, and Purchases workspaces) is enabled in your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage discounts In Visma Net, your company can configure discounts of various types, which can be applied to sales orders if the Inventory functionality (which includes the Inventory, Inventory, and Purchases workspaces) is enabled in your system. If the Inventory functionality is not enabled, discounts can be applied to invoices. These topics gives an overview of the discount-related functionality. About discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discounts page Discounts can be used as effective tools of your organisation's overall marketing strategy, for example, to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discounts Discounts can be used as effective tools of your organisation's overall marketing strategy, for example, to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. In Visma Net, your company can configure various types of discounts: unconditional or condition-based, simple or tiered, and applied automatically or manually. ## Documents to apply discounts You configure discounts in the Customer ledger workspace, so that even if the Inventory module (which includes the Inventory, Inventory, and Purchases workspaces) is not included in your license, you will be able to configure discounts. If the Inventory module is not enabled, the system automatically applies the best discounts to an invoice when the document is being saved. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, the system applies discounts to sales orders. ## Stages of configuring discounts You can create discounts in the following two stages: 1. Designing **discount codes** by using the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, where for each discount code you specify the type of the discount and the type of conditions for this discount application. 1. Creating **discount series** for each discount code by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. A discount series defines a particular discount percent, fixed amount, or quantity of a free item; the series also defines the particular conditions of application. For more information, see [About discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-series/). This topic describes the options available at the stage of designing the discount codes. ## Types of discounts In Visma Net, you can create discounts of the following general types: Line-level discounts : that apply to a document line: These discounts may be based on the line amount or quantity of the line, and they can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. Line-level discounts can be applied to the price of item or extended price of the item (line amount), depending on the option selected on the **Price/discount settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Group-level discounts : that may apply to multiple lines of the same order. These discounts may be based on the amount or quantity that is the sum of multiple lines, and they can be expressed as percentages, fixed amounts, or specific quantities of free items. Because some of the discounts can be free items, the system cannot determine which of the group discounts is the best, so it applies all of those discounts that are applicable by the discount conditions. Document-level discounts : that apply to the document total: These discounts may be based on the document total, and they can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. ## Conditional and unconditional discounts You can configure the discounts of all levels to be applied unconditionally or to be applied only if specific conditions are met. In the Discount codes window, for each discount code, you can specify whether the discount is unconditional or is based on specific conditions; for conditional discounts, you can select the type of conditions to be used to determine whether a particular document is affected by the discounts with this discount code. ### The document-level discounts can have the following types of conditions + **Customer and branch** + **Customer** + **Customer price class** + **Customer price class and branch** ### The line-level and group-level discounts can have the following types of conditions + **Warehouse** + **Warehouse and item** + **Warehouse and customer** + **Warehouse and item price class** + **Warehouse and customer price class** + **Item** + **Item price class** + **Customer** + **Customer and item** + **Customer price class** + **Customer and item price class** + **Customer price class and item** + **Customer price class and item price class** + **Branch** + **Unconditional** Once you have defined the discount codes, when you create discount series in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. For instance, if a document-level discount is intended to promote a new branch to valuable customers, you can specify this branch and the particular customer class as conditions for this discount series. If you need to clean up a warehouse, you can create discounts that apply only to orders to be fulfilled from this particular warehouse. ## Automatic and manual discounts The discounts with the **Manual** check box selected will not be applied automatically or selected as the best available when the user saves the document. Manual discounts can be configured, for example, for rebates or for coupons. You can apply a manual discount to a particular document by using the appropriate window, which can be one of the following windows: + Customer invoices + Cash sales + Sales orders + Sales invoices ## Discount series The particular details and conditions of application for each discount code are defined by discount series, which you can create by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. For more information, see [About discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-series/). You can decide whether you want to use auto-numbering for the series associated with each discount code. If you do, the system will assign a series ID to each series automatically. By default, the discount code is used as a prefix for generating series IDs; alternatively, you can specify (in the **Last number** column) another string to be used as a prefix for auto-numbering.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About discount series /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-series page Many companies offer their customers discounts that depend on the total quantities of items, the quantities of specific items, the document total amounts, or specific line amounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discount series Many companies offer their customers discounts that depend on the total quantities of items, the quantities of specific items, the document total amounts, or specific line amounts. In Visma Net, you create discounts in the following stages: 1. Defining discount codes for all types of discounts used in your organisation by using the Discount codes (AR209000) window. A discount code defines broad characteristics of the discount, such as whether it is applied automatically or manually, what level the discount is applicable at ( **Document**, **Group** of lines, or **Line** ), and whether it is unconditional or conditional. If a discount code is conditional, you also specify on this window what types of conditions (customer, item, customer price class, warehouse, or item price class) should be used to determine whether the discount can be applied to a document. For more information, see [About discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discounts/). 1. Creating multiple discount series for each discount code by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. A discount series defines the particular discount percent or the fixed discount amount applicable to a document if the document details match the discount application conditions. Discount series may define discounts that are **updatable** or **promotional** and **simple** or **tiered**. Multiple series of the same discount can be effective at the same time only if they have non-intersecting sets of conditions. For instance, you could define a line-level discount that is conditional and applies to items, and you can configure the discount series to have the same start date but apply to different items. ## Discount series details For each discount code, you can create multiple discount series by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. Generally, you should enter a unique ID for each series. If auto-numbering is configured for the discount code, when you create a new series for this discount code, the system assigns its series ID automatically. By default, the discount code is used as a prefix for generating series IDs. If auto-numbering is not configured for the discount code, you should enter a unique ID for each series. For each discount series, you specify the following: + Whether the discount is a promotional discount (and has an expiration date) or an updatable discount. + How the discount is expressed: as a percentage, an amount, or a certain quantity of a free item. + What are the particular items, customers, item classes, warehouses, and so forth to which the discount may be applied; the types of conditions are defined by the discount code. For instance, if the discount code was defined for discounts to be applied to items, the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window will have the **Items** tab, which you can use to list the particular items to which each series is applicable. + How the discount is tiered (if applicable): by amount (for discount codes of all types) or by quantity (for only discount codes of the **Line** and **Group** types). Each discount series has an effective (start) date and can be applied only on or after this date. ## Simple and tiered discounts Within a series, you can configure a **simple** discount, which is applicable to any amount or quantity, or a **tiered** discount, for which you can specify different per cents or fixed amounts based on the quantities of items or on the amounts. To configure tiers for a discount, you specify break points that define the ranges of amounts or quantities for which different discount per cents, amounts, or quantities of free items are applicable. This section gives some examples of discount series. See [About discount calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-calculation/) for more details about how discount amounts are calculated. A simple series can be defined in the following way: Whether the series break points are specified as amounts or quantities, set **0** as the first and only break point. An example of how you define such a series for a document-level discount based on the total amount follows: + 0: 10% discount Then, if conditions of the discount application are met for a document, no matter what the document total is, the discount of 10% will be applied. + 100 units: 5% discount + 200 units: 7% discount + 300 units: 10% discount Consider a series for a fixed-amount discount based on the document total, with tiers defined by amounts (in U.S. currency). The series can be specified as follows: + €1000: €10 discount + €2000: €25 discount + €3000: €40 discount ## Updatable and promotional discounts A discount series can define an **updatable** discount or a **promotional** discount. Promotional discounts are effective over a limited time, so such series should have start dates and expiration dates. After the expiration date, the promotional discounts are not applicable. > [!NOTE] > To create a promotional series, always select the **Promotional** check box. Updatable series or series for which the **Promotional** check boxes are not selected—have only start (effective) dates. However, for each updatable series, you can have multiple versions: + The **active** version, which is the one that defines the discount currently in effect + The **pending** version, which is the one that defines the discount to be in effect starting on the **Pending** date + The **last** version, which is the one that defined the discount that was in effect before the current discount You cannot create all of these versions for the series at the same time. For the series, you can specify new break amounts (or quantities) as pending amounts (or quantities), and the new effective date as the pending date. When the new start date has arrived, you can update the current series with the pending values. Once you update the series by using the [Update discounts - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500/) window, the currently active series version becomes the last version, and the pending version becomes the active one.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About customer discounts and series for discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-customer-discounts-and-series-for-discounts page You use this window to define the series for the customer discount codes that you have set up. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer discounts and series for discounts You use this window to define the series for the customer discount codes that you have set up. See: [Add discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-discount-codes/). A **discount series** specifies how the system calculates a discount, based on the amount or quantity of the line item or on the document-amount. It is made up out of a list of break points. Each breakpoint specifies a range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts qualified for the specific discount amount or percentage. Many companies offer their customers discounts based on the total quantity of all items, specific items, the total document-amount, or amount of specific lines. ## The stages of defining customer discounts In Visma Net, you create discounts in two stages: 1. In the Discount codes window, define the following characteristics for all types of discounts used in your organisation. + Unconditional or conditional + Conditions + Automatic or manual + Application level (documents, groups, or lines). For more information, see [The principles of customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts/). 1. In the Discounts window, create discount series for each discount code. A discount series defines a discount that can be updated or is promotional, and simple or tiered. Multiple series of the same discount can only be effective at the same time if they have non-intersecting sets of conditions. For example: a line-level discount is defined as a conditional discount that applies to items. You can configure the series to have the same start date, but apply to different items. ## About the different discount series For each discount code, you can create multiple discount series, as long as you use a unique identifier for each series. If you have configured auto-numbering for the discount code, the system automatically assigns its series ID when you create a new series for this discount code. By default, the discount code is used as a prefix for generating series IDs. Alternatively, you can specify another string to be used as a prefix for auto-numbering. For each discount series, you specify the following: + How the discount is tiered: **by amount** (for discount codes of all types) or **by quantity** (only for the line and group discount code types). + How the discount is expressed: as a percentage, as an amount, or as a certain quantity of free items. + Whether the discount is a promotional discount with an expiration date, or whether it is an updatable discount. + Which conditions apply. The types of conditions are defined by the discount code. For example: if you have decided that the discount code should apply discounts to specific items, you can see the **Items** tab in the Discounts window. On this tab, you can create a list of items to which each series is applicable. Each discount series has an effective (start) date and will apply only on and after this date. ## Simple and tiered discounts You can enter a simple discount within a series that you can apply to any amount or quantity, or enter a tiered discount based on quantities of items/amounts. In order to configure tiers for a discount, you specify break points to define a range of amounts or quantities. For each range you can apply different discount percentages, amounts, or quantities of free items. For more information on how the system calculates discount amounts, see [Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-document-level-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts/) and [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-line-level-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/). If you want to specify the series break points as amounts or quantities, you set 0 as the first break point, as in the following example: + 0: 10% discount As an example of tiered discounts, consider a discount that is based on the quantity of goods purchased. If you want a discount series with three tiers you can specify it like this: + 100 units: 5% discount + 200 units: 7% discount + 300 units: 10% discount Consider a series for a discount based on the document total and tiered by amount (in GBP). You can specify the series as follows: + £1000: £10 discount + £2000: £25 discount + £3000: £40 discount ## Updateable and promotional discounts A discount series can define updateable or promotional discounts. Promotional discounts are effective for a limited time period. You need to set start dates and expiration dates. After the expiration date, the promotional discounts no longer apply. > [!NOTE] > If you want to create a promotional series, select the **Promotional** check box in the Discounts window. If you **do not** select the **Promotional** check box, it means series can be updated. They only have the start (effective) date. However, for each series that can be updated, you can have multiple versions: + The active version: the discount that is currently in effect. + The pending version: the discount will be in effect starting on the pending date. + The last version: the discount that previously was in effect before the current discount. You cannot create all such versions of a series at the same time. You can specify new break amounts (or quantities) as pending amounts (or quantities) and the new effective date as the pending date. Then, when the new start date arrives, you can update the current series with the pending values. Once you update the series in the **Update discounts** pop-up window in the Discounts window, the active series version becomes the last version, and the pending version becomes the active one.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About Discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-codes page In this window you can add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Discount codes In this window you can add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. To complete the discount configuration, you must specify discount series for each discount code in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. See: [The principles of customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts/). Click one of the drop-down lists below for more information about that subject. ## The order in which Visma Net applies customer discounts When you save a document, customer discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts marked as manual. This topic tells you in which order the system applies the discounts. ## The application order for automatic discounts You do not have to specify the order of application for automatic discounts. The discounts are always applied in the following order: Line-level : (applied to each line of the document) For each document line, the system checks if there are applicable line-level discounts, and picks the one with the largest discount amount. Group-level : (applied to multiple lines of the document) The system checks which group discounts that may be applicable, and applies all of them. Document-level : (applied to the total amount) There can be only one best document-level discount; that is why group-level discounts (that apply to multiple lines of the document) are often used as document-level discounts. Several options affect the order of discount application and the calculation of the discounts: Exclude from discountable amount : If you use this option (available for line-level discounts), you can exclude the discountable amount of the line-level discount from the discountable amount for higher-level discounts (group or document). For example: by using this option, you can exclude items with a special 75% clearance discount defined at the line level from the basis for the usual 5% document discount the customer receives on orders that exceed £2000. Skip document discount : This option is available for group-level discounts. If you design a group-level discount to apply to multiple lines and significantly reduce the document total, select this option to exclude a document-level discount from the documents to which this group-level discount has been applied. ## How discounts and customer specific prices interact In Visma Net, you can define special prices for particular customers. You can enter and maintain such prices by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. If customer specific prices are available for items listed on a customer document, the system replaces the general sales prices with customer specific prices. If you want to use customer specific prices as an alternative to discounts, you can select the check box **Ignore line discounts if the customer specific price is available** in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. The system only applies line-level discounts to lines with generally priced items (if applicable). In both cases, group- and document-level discounts are applied as usual. ## About applying manual discounts If you select the **Manual** check box in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, the discount will not be applied automatically, or selected as the best-available when you save the document. You can use manual discounts for example for rebates or for coupons. Automatic discounts are applied when you save the document, but you apply a manual discount to documents in one of these windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) You can apply manual line-level discounts to a document on the **Document details** tab in the correct window by selecting the discount code on a specific line. When you select the code and the system applies the discount, the other discounts are recalculated as well. To apply manual group-level or document-level discounts, you select each manual discount by its code in the table on the **Discount details** tab in the correct window. If you change the line quantities while you are adding manual discounts, the system recalculates manual discounts; they will not be replaced by automatic discounts, even if the latter results in a bigger discount. > [!NOTE] > You can always go to the **Discount details** tab in the windows mentioned above, to view the details of the document-level and group-level discounts that were applied to a document. ## Validation of discount limit You can configure the system to validate the percentage allowed for discounts on orders (or invoices). When the total discount percent calculated for the group-level and document-level discounts exceeds the established limit for customers of a specific customer class, you will get a warning. You specify the limit (as a percent) in the **Group/document discount limit (%)** field in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. ## About applying extra manual discounts When all automatic discounts have been applied, you can apply manual discounts (without discount codes). You specify manual discounts for specific document lines on the **Document details** tab in these windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount — the system automatically recalculates other related values. ## About refreshing discounts and prices on documents You can update the discounts for documents that have been on hold for some time, if you know the prices or discounts have been updated, or new discounts have been defined in the system. To update the prices and discounts, select the action **Recalculate prices** in the respective windows. You can also choose whether you want to replace manual discounts by automatic discounts or not. If you are not satisfied with the result, you can apply the manual discounts.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About discount application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-application page When a user saves a document (that is, a sales order or invoice), discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Discount codes - reference information window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discount application When a user saves a document (that is, a sales order or invoice), discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Discount codes - reference information window. For more information: [Discount codes - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/). This topic provides details about the automatic and manual application of discounts. ## Application of automatic discounts For automatic discounts, you don't have to specify the order of their application. When the user saves a document, the system always applies automatic discounts in the following order: + **Line-level** (applied to each line of the document) For each document line, the system checks applicable line-level discounts and picks the one with the largest discount amount. + **Group-level** (applied to multiple lines of the document) The system checks for applicable group-level discounts and applies all of them. + **Document-level** (applied to the document total amount) There can be only one (the best) document-level discount, which is why group-level discounts (that apply to multiple lines of the document) are often used as document-level discounts. For example, if you create a group-level discount that is applicable to a specific customer price class, it will work as a document-level discount affecting each line of a document. The following options, which are located in the [Discount codes - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, affect the order of discount application and the calculation of the discounts: Exclude from discountable amount : If you select this option, available for line-level discounts, you can exclude the discountable amount of the line-level discount from the discountable amount for higher-level (group or document) discounts. For instance, by using this option, you can exclude items with a 75% clearance discount defined at the line level from the basis for the usual 5% document discount that the customer receives on orders exceeding €2000. Skip document discount : This option is available for group-level discounts. If you design a group-level discount to be applicable to multiple lines and significantly reducing the document total, select this option to not apply a document-level discount to the documents to which this group-level discount has been applied. ## Interaction between discounts and customer-specific prices In Visma Net, you can define special prices to be used for particular customers. You can enter and maintain such prices by using the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. If customer-specific prices are available for items listed on a customer document, the system replaces the general sales prices with customer-specific prices. If you want to use customer-specific prices as an alternative to discounts, you can select the **Ignore line discounts if the customer-specific price is a Available** option on the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. With this option selected, the system will apply line-level discounts only to lines with generally priced items (if applicable). In both cases, **Group-** and **Document-level** discounts are applied as usual. ## Application of manual discounts The discounts with the **Manual** check box selected in the [Discount codes - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window will not be applied automatically or selected as the best available when the user saves the document. You can configure manual discounts, for example, for rebates or coupons. While automatic discounts of all levels are applied when a document is being saved, the user can apply a manual discount to the document in the appropriate window, which can be one of the following windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) A user can apply manual line-level discounts to a document on the **Document details** tab of the appropriate window by selecting the discount code in the particular line. After the code has been selected and the discount amount has been calculated, the system calculates other discounts. To apply manual group-level or document-level discounts, the user selects each manual discount by its code in the table on the **Discount details** tab of the appropriate window. If the user changes the line quantities when adding manual discounts, manual discounts will be recalculated. (They will not, however, be replaced by automatic discounts even if the automatic discounts would result in a greater discount amount.) ## Details of discounts applied to documents The users can view the details of the document-level and group-level discounts, automatic or manual, that were applied to the document on the **Discount details** tab of the respective data entry window (listed in the previous section). ## Discount limit validation You can configure the system to validate the percentage allowed for discounts on orders (or invoices) and issue a warning when the total discount percent calculated for the group-level and document-level discounts exceeds the established limit for customers of specific customer class. To do this, specify the limit (as a percent) in the **Group/document discount limit (%)** field in the Customer classes (AR201000) window. ## Refreshing prices and discounts on documents For documents with the **On hold** status, the users may periodically refresh the prices and discounts if they suspect that the prices or discounts were updated or new discounts have been defined in the system. To update the prices and discounts, the user can use the **Recalculate prices** dialog box, which opens when the user selects **Recalculate prices** on the **Actions** menu of the window toolbar of the respective window. In the dialog box, the user can select whether to replace manual discounts with automatic discounts. If the user is not satisfied with the result, the user can apply the manual discounts. ## Application of auxiliary manual discounts Manual discounts (without discount codes) are applied when all automatic discounts have been applied. You can specify the manual discount for particular document lines by using the **Document details** tab of the appropriate data entry windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) + [Cash sales - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. The system will recalculate other related values automatically.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About discount calculation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-calculation page With the algorithms Visma Net uses to calculate discounts, you can give the customer the maximum discount available for the ordered goods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About discount calculation With the algorithms Visma Net uses to calculate discounts, you can give the customer the maximum discount available for the ordered goods. When you enter a discount series in Visma Net by using the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you can specify the same discount for all amounts or quantities, or you can create tiers by specifying **break points**, with each break point defining the minimum discountable quantity or amount for a new tier. You can express the particular discounts for these tiers as well as for discounts without tiers as percentages, fixed amounts, or certain quantities of free items. When you create discounts in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window and specify break points as the discountable quantities of the item, you should specify the quantities in the units of measure (UoMs) defined as base units of the item. Even if you do not specify UoMs, the system calculates discounts as if the quantities were specified in base units. The sections below describe how, based on the discount type and the selected options, the system calculates the discount amounts or the quantities of free items. ## Calculation of document-level discounts with tiers defined by a Amounts For **document-level** discounts, the tiers can be created only by break points defined as amounts, while the discount can be defined as a fixed amount or a percentage of the document amount. When the system processes a sales order or an invoice and finds a matching discount (based on the application conditions), the system compares the discountable amount to the break points in the discount series as follows: 1. The document amount is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and no further comparison is performed. 1. The document amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the document amount is calculated and deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a quantity of a free item, the quantity defined for this tier is used. + No further comparison is performed. 1. Comparison continues similarly, with Step 2 repeated until a discount is found or the last break point is checked. This topic covers examples of tiered discounts. In these examples, amounts are in Euros. ### Example 1 If a series for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount corresponding to the appropriate tier is subtracted from the document total. Suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €1000: 5% + €2000: 7% + €5000: 10% For a document with a €900 total, the discount is €0, while for a document with a €2500 total, the discount is €175 (7%). For a document with total of €9000, the discount is €900 (10%). ### Example 2 Suppose that a series for a document-level discount is broken down by amount, with the discounts expressed as fixed amounts that are subtracted from the total amount. Further suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €1000: €100 + €2000: €225 + €3000: €350 Customers receive a discount of €0 for orders with amounts less than €1000. The discount for an order with a total between €1000 and €1999.99 is €100, the discount for an order between €2000 and €2999.99 is €225, and the discount for an order of €3000 or more is €350. ## Calculation of line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts Tiers for line-level discounts can be defined by amounts or by quantities. The method of calculation of line-level discounts depends on the option you select in the **Apply line discount to** field on the **Price/discount settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can apply the discounts to prices of items or extended prices of items (line amounts before taxes), and the selected option affects the discount calculation. Both methods are described in this section. ### Discounts applied to extended prices If the system is configured to apply line discounts to extended prices of items and the tiers are defined by line amounts, the system performs discount calculation as follows: 1. The line amount (that is, the extended price of the item) is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and no further comparison is performed. 1. The line amount is compared to a next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the line amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the line amount is calculated and deducted from the line amount. + No further comparison is performed. 1. Comparison continues similarly, with Step 2 repeated until a discount is found or the last break point is checked. #### Example 3 A customer buys an item whose unit cost is €95. If the series for the line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts, with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount (calculated by using the percent defined for the appropriate tier) of the item's extended price is subtracted from the extended price. Suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €1000: 5% + €2000: 10% + €5000: 20% For a line with 10 items (which means that the extended price is €950), the discount is €0. For a line with 20 items (for an extended price of €1900), the discount is €95 (5%). And for a line with 60 items (and an extended price of €5700), the discount is €1140 (20%). ### Discounts applied to unit prices If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices, for discounts with break points defined as amounts, you should specify the break points to be compared to prices. The system performs this discount calculation as follows: 1. The line item's price is compared to the first break point. If the item price is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and no further comparison is performed. 1. The item price is compared to a next break point. If the price is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the item's unit price, and the extended price is recalculated. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the unit price is calculated and deducted from the item's unit price. + No further comparison is performed. 1. Comparison continues similarly, with Step 2 repeated until a discount is found or the last break point is checked. If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices and a series is broken down by the quantity of the item, the line quantity of the item is compared to the quantities selected as break points, and the discount is calculated as follows: + If the discount is defined as a percentage, the specified percent is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. + If the discount is defined as a fixed amount, the specified fixed amount is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. #### Example 4 A customer buys different items with prices of €95, €210, and €600. If a series for a line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount (calculated as the percent defined for the appropriate tier) of the item price is subtracted from the price. Suppose that the series is specified with the following break points: + €100: 5% + €200: 10% + €500: 20% For a line with 10 units of the item priced at €95, the discount will be €0. For a line with 20 units of the item priced at €210, the discount will be €21.10 per unit with the discount for the line at €21.0 multiplied by the quantity. And for a line with one item prices at €600 the discount will be €120 per unit. ## Discount calculation for prorated discounts Discount series can be prorated if the **Prorate discounts** option is selected in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. For prorated discount series, the discount amount (or the quantity of free items) is calculated so that the customer won't try to split a sales order to get greater discount amount or a larger quantity of free items. The **Prorate discounts** option is applicable to discount series with discountable quantities or discountable amounts. For instance, you can configure a discount described as “Get €5 off for every 10 units purchased." ### Example 5 Consider a prorated group-level discount with tiers based on quantity. The series defines the discount with the following tiers: + 10 units: 1 unit of the free item + 20 units: 2 units of the free item + 40 units: 3 units of the free item To determine the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities and uses the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount according to the break points used. For this example, a sales order for 50 units would yield 4 units of the free item, computed as 3 (for 40 units) plus 1 (for 10 units). For an order of 70 units, the discount is calculated as 6 units of the free item: 3 as the discount for 40 units, plus 2 as the discount for 20 units, plus 1 as the discount for 10 units.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 The principles of customer discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts page In Visma Net, you can maintain customer discounts in order to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The principles of customer discounts In Visma Net, you can maintain customer discounts in order to stimulate sales of new products, promote new branches of the organisation, and accelerate sales of the items that are becoming obsolete. ## Overview of discounts ### Types of customer discounts You can configure various types of discounts: unconditional or condition-based, simple or tiered, and automatic or manual (including rebates and coupons). ## Prerequisites Make sure that your license includes the **Customer discounts** functionality and that you have activated it (see [Enable or disable customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-customer-discounts/) ). You can configure customer discounts in the Customer ledger workspace. This means that even if you do not have the Inventory workspace as part of your license, you can configure customer discounts. The system automatically applies customer discounts to each sales invoice when the document is saved. If your company uses the Inventory module, the system applies discounts to sales orders. ## Stages of configuring customer discounts 1. In the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, you define customer discount codes, and specify the discount types and their conditions. 1. In the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you create discount sequences for each discount code. ## Types of discounts - on the line, group or document level There are three general types of customer discounts in Visma Net: Line-level discounts : (apply to a document line) These discounts may be based on the line amount or quantity, and can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. They can be applied to the item price or extended item price (line amount), depending on the option you have selected on the **Price/discount settings** tab in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Group-level discounts : (apply to multiple lines of the same order) These discounts may be based on the amount or quantity that is the sum of multiple lines. They can be expressed as percentages, fixed amounts, or specific quantities of free items. Because some of the discounts can be free items, the system cannot determine which of the group discounts is the best, so it applies all of those discounts that are applicable by the discount conditions. Document-level discounts : (apply to the total of the document) These discounts may be based on the document total. They can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. In the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, you can specify for each discount code whether the discount will be unconditional or whether it will have specific conditions. For conditional discounts, you can select the type of conditions to be used to determine whether a particular document is affected by the discounts with this discount code. Then, when you create discount sequences in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. For example: If a document-level discount is intended to promote a new branch to valuable customers, you can specify this branch and customer class as conditions for this discount sequence. If you need to clean up a warehouse, you can create discounts that apply only to orders to be fulfilled from this particular warehouse. ## Automatic and manual discounts If you create discount codes and select the **Manual** check box in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, the system will not automatically apply the manual discount, nor will it select it as the best-available when a user saves the document. You can configure manual discounts for rebates or for coupons. While the system applies automatic discounts of all levels when you save the document, you can apply a manual discount to a specific document in one of these windows: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) ( Financials ) + [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) + [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) On the **Document details** tab in any of these windows, you can apply line-level discounts; just select the **Manual discount** check box for a specific line and select the discount code. On the **Discount details** tab, you can apply manual group- and document-level discounts. ## Discount sequences Discount sequences define the particular application details and conditions for each discount code. You create these sequences in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. For each supplier discount code, you can decide whether you want to use auto-numbering for the sequence associated with this discount code. If you do, the system automatically assigns a sequence ID to each sequence. By default, the supplier discount code is used as a prefix when the system generates sequence IDs. Alternatively, you can specify another prefix to use for auto-numbering. For more information about discount sequences, see: [About customer discounts and sequences for discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-customer-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/). Set up a discount series /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/set-up-a-discount-series section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a discount series 1. Go to the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the **Discount code** you want to use. 1. In the **Series** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select a series number from the list or enter a new number manually. > [!NOTE] > If the **Auto numbering** for the discount is selected in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, the system will automatically create a new series for you. The field will display **<NEW>** before you save. 1. In the drop-down list **Discount by**, select whether the discount should be specified by **Percent** or **Amount**. 1. In the drop-down list **Break by**, choose a range for the series in the form of **Quantity** or **Amount**. 1. If the series is active, select the **Active** check box. 1. If the series is a promotional discount, select the **Promotional** check box. > [!NOTE] > For promotional discount series, you must specify the effective date and the expiration date. 1. If you want the discount to be prorated, select the **Prorate discount** check box. This requires that you have chosen **Amount** in the **Discount by** drop-down list. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-discount-codes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add discount codes 1. Go to the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Discount code** column, enter a unique code for the discount. You can use letters and numbers, up to 10 characters. 1. In the **Description** column, enter a brief description of the discount. You can use letters and numbers, up to 250 characters. 1. Select the right **Discount type**. 1. From the drop-down list in the **Applicable to** column, select the entity that you want to be applied to the discount. > [!NOTE] > Depending on your discount type, you will get different options. 1. You can further specify the discount code by selecting one or more check boxes in the next columns. **Example**: If you want the system to automatically generate series IDs, based on the created discount code, select **Auto numbering**. The series will then be displayed in the **Last number** column. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Add customers to a discount series /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-customers-to-a-discount-series section On the Customers tab you can make a list of the customers you want to apply the discount series to. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add customers to a discount series On the Customers tab you can make a list of the customers you want to apply the discount series to. 1. Go to the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. 1. In the **Discount code** field, select a discount code that is applicable to customers. The **Customers** tab will now be visible. 1. On the **Customers** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to find the customer that you want to use this discount series for. 1. Click **Select**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add discount breakpoints /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/add-discount-breakpoints section You use the Discount breakpoints tab to create a breakdown sequence defined in accordance with the choices you made when you Set up a discount series. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add discount breakpoints You use the Discount breakpoints tab to create a breakdown sequence defined in accordance with the choices you made when you Set up a discount series. For more information: [Set up a discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/set-up-a-discount-series/). You can also use it to view the details of an existing series. The columns on this tab depend on the options selected in the **Discount by** and **Break by** drop-down lists. 1. Go to the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter a **Pending break amount** or a **Pending break quantity** depending on your choice in the **Break by** drop-down list. 1. Enter a **Pending discount percent** or a **Pending discount amount**, depending on your choice in the **Discount by** drop-down list. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-line-level-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts page You can define tiers (for a line-level discount) by amounts or by quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts You can define tiers (for a line-level discount) by amounts or by quantities. ## Introduction You can define tiers (for a line-level discount) by amounts or by quantities. The calculation method for line-level discounts depends on whether you want to apply the discount to item price or to the extended item price. Required setting before you start: [Apply line discount to Item price or Extended item price](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/apply-line-discount-to-item-price-or-extended-item-price/). ## Apply line discount to extended price If the system is configured to apply line discounts to extended item price and the tiers are defined by line amounts, the system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line amount (that is, the extended price of the item) is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the sequence, the discount equals zero and the system does no further comparison. 1. The line amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point, but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the line amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the line amount is calculated and deducted from the line amount. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. ### Example A customer buys an item whose unit cost is $95. If the sequence for the line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts, with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount calculated as a percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the extended item’s price, from the extended price. Let us say that the sequence is specified with the following break points: + £1000: 5% + £2000: 10% + £5000: 20% For a line with 10 items (the extended price is £950), the discount is zero. For a line with 20 items (for an extended price of £1900), the discount is £95 (5%). And for a line with 60 items (and an extended price of £5700), the discount is £1140 (20%). ## Apply line discount to item price If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices for discounts with break points defined as amounts, you should specify the break points to be compared to prices. The system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line item's price is compared to the first break point. If the item price is less than the first break point in the sequence, the discount equals zero and the system does no further comparison. 1. The item price is compared to the next break point. If the price is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the item's unit price, and the system recalculates the extended price. + If the discount is a percentage, the system calculates and deducts the percent (specified for this tier) of the unit price from the item's unit price. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. If the system is configured to apply line discounts to item prices, and a sequence is broken down by the quantity of the item, the line quantity of the item is compared to the quantities selected as break points. In that case, the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is defined as a percentage, the specified percent is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. + If the discount is defined as a fixed amount, the specified fixed amount is deducted from the item price and then the discounted price is multiplied by the item quantity. ### Example A customer buys different items with prices £95, £210, and £600. If a sequence for a line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount is calculated as the percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the item price and the system subtracts it from the price. Suppose that you have specified the sequence with the following break points: + £100: 5% + £200: 10% + £500: 20% For a line with 10 units of the item priced at £95, the discount will be zero. For a line with 20 units of the item priced at £210, the discount will be £21.10 per unit with the discount for the line at £21.0 multiplied by the quantity. And for a line with one item priced at £600, the discount will be £120 per unit. > [!NOTE] > If you need information on discount calculation for prorated discounts, see: [Calculate prorated discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-prorated-discounts/).

Related pages

Concepts

 Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-document-level-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts page In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate customer discounts allow you to give customers the maximum discount for the ordered goods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate customer discounts allow you to give customers the maximum discount for the ordered goods. ## Introduction When you enter a discount sequence, you can specify the same discount for all amounts or quantities, or you can create tiers by specifying the break points and the particular discounts for these tiers. For more information, see: [The principles of customer discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/the-principles-of-customer-discounts/), [About Discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-discount-codes/), and [About customer discounts and sequences for discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/about-customer-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/). > [!NOTE] > When you create discounts and specify break points as the discountable quantities of the item, you should specify the quantities in the units of measure (UOMs) that are used to define the item's base units. Even if you do not specify UOMs, the system calculates discounts as if the quantities were specified in base units. ## Calculation principles You can only create tiers for document-level discounts, if you define break points as amounts. The discount can be defined as a fixed amount, or a percentage of the document amount. When the system processes a sales order or an invoice and finds a matching discount (based on the application conditions), the system compares the discountable amount to the break points in the discount sequence. This comparing works like this: 1. The document amount is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the sequence, the discount equals zero and the system does no further comparison. 1. The document amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the document amount is calculated and deducted from the document amount. + If the discount is a quantity of a free item, the quantity defined for this tier is used. + The system does not perform any further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare, and repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last breakpoint. ### Example 1 If a sequence for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount corresponding to the appropriate tier from the document total. Suppose that you have specified a sequence with the following breakpoints: + £1000: 5% + £2000: 7% + £5000: 10% For a document with £900 total, the discount is zero, while for a document with £2500, it is £175 (7%), and for a document with total of £9000, the discount is £900 (10%). ### Example 2 Next, suppose that a sequence for a document-level discount is broken down by amount, with the discounts expressed as fixed amounts that are subtracted from the total amount. Furthermore, suppose that you have specified the sequence with the following break points: + £1000: £100 + £2000: £225 + £3000: £350 For purchase orders with amounts less than £1000, your company will receive a discount of zero. The discount for an order with a total between £1000 and £1999.99 is £100, the discount on an order between £2000 and £2999.99 is £225, and the discount for an order of £3000 or more is £350. ## What is next? [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-line-level-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Calculate prorated discounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/calculate-prorated-discounts page Discount sequences can be prorated if you select the Prorate discounts check box in the Discounts window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate prorated discounts Discount sequences can be prorated if you select the Prorate discounts check box in the Discounts window. ## Introduction Discount sequences can be prorated if you select the **Prorate discounts** check box in the Discounts window. For prorated discount sequences, the discount amount (or the quantity of free items) is calculated in such a way that the customer cannot try to split a sales order to get a greater discount, or a larger quantity of free items. The **Prorate discounts** option is applicable to discount sequences with discountable quantities as well as with discountable amounts. ## Example This example concerns a prorated group-level discount defined for quantity tiers. The sequence defines the discount with the following tiers: + 10 units: 1 unit of the free item + 20 units: 2 units of the free item + 40 units: 3 units of the free item To determine the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point, but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, using the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount according to the breakpoints used. With prorated discounts, a sales order for 50 units would yield 4 units of the free item: 3 (for 40 units) + 1 (for 10 units) = 4. For an order of 70 units, the discount is 6 units of the free item: 3 (for 40 units) + 2 (for 20 units) + 1 (for 10 units) = 6.

Related pages

Concepts

 Process customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process customer ledger documents Process customer ledger documents - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/process-customer-ledger-documents-overview page In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process customer ledger documents - overview In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. During the implementation of this workspace in your system, the following customer ledger settings and entities were defined, making it easy for you to process customer ledger documents: + Number series for customer ledger documents and the related general ledger batches in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Customer accounts to uniquely identify each of your clients and hold their information and settings. + Credit and collection policies, which include terms of sales, customer credit verification rules, overdue charges, statements, and dunning letters. + The goods and services (defined as stock items in the system) that your company sells to your customers. + Sales prices and discount policies. With these entities defined, users in your company can record and process documents in Visma Net quickly and accurately, with minimal manual actions. The system fills in the most of the needed information automatically. ## Topics + [About types of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About the customer ledger document processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-the-customer-ledger-document-processing-flow/) + [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About tracking customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-tracking-customer-ledger-documents/) + [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/) + [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/) + [Enter a cash sale](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/enter-a-cash-sale/) + [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) + [Track customer prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/track-customer-prepayments/) + [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/) + [Schedule recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/schedule-recurring-documents/) + [Generate recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/generate-recurring-documents/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About types of customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents page In Visma Net, customer ledger documents are differentiated by document types. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of customer ledger documents In Visma Net, customer ledger documents are differentiated by document types. In Visma Net, customer ledger documents are differentiated by document types. Multiple document types help you track documents more easily and make your sales history with a customer clearer. Customer ledger document types can be divided in two groups based on their method of creation: + Manual: Users create customer ledger documents to record their financial relationship with customers. The following documents can be created by a user: **Invoice**, **Debit note**, **Credit note**, **Payment**, **Prepayment**, **Customer refund**, **Cash sale**, and **Cash return**. + Automatic: The system creates customer ledger documents when a user have run the appropriate processes. The following documents are created by the system: **Overdue charge**, **Void payment**, **Credit write-off**, and **Balance write-off**. > [!NOTE] > A user cannot create customer ledger documents of these types manually. In this topic, you will read about when and why each type of an customer ledger document is used in Visma Net. ## Invoice You use this document type to record your request for payment for goods sold or services rendered to a customer. The system includes the sum of all open customer documents with the **Invoice** type in the customer balance, which is displayed in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, balances of open invoices increase the customer's balance. You use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify invoices, the system uses the number series specified in the **Invoice number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Payment You use this document type to record a customer payment for goods or services sold. Also, you can use this type to record a customer's prepayments, if you do not need to track prepayments separately. The system includes the sum of all open customer payment documents with the **Payment** type in the customer balance, which it displays in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, balances of open payments decrease the customer's balance. You can apply outstanding documents to a payment before or after you release it. You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify payments, the system uses the number series specified in the **Payment number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If the **Manual numbering** check box is selected for the specified number series in the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window, the system validates each new reference number you enter in order to prevent the creation of payments and prepayments with the same reference number. ## Prepayment You use this document type if you want to distinguish customer payments from prepayments. The system displays the sum of all open customer payment documents with the **Prepayment** type separately in the **Prepayments balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Also, balances of open prepayments decrease the customer's balance. You can apply outstanding documents to a prepayment before or after you release it. > [!NOTE] > The customer prepayment balance is displayed with a minus sign in the **Prepayments balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify prepayments, the system uses the number series specified in the **Payment number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If the **Manual numbering** check box is selected for the specified number series in the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window, the system validates each new reference number you enter in order to prevent the creation of payments and prepayments with the same reference number. ## Debit note and credit note You use these document types if you want to adjust the balances of the previously issued invoices or in other cases when corrections are needed. The system includes the sum of all open customer documents with these types in the customer balance for the customer, which is displayed in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The balances of open debit notes increase the customer's balance, and the balances of open credit notes decrease customer's balance. You use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window to create and process documents of these types. To identify these documents, the system uses the numbering sequences specified in the **Debit note number series** and **Credit note number series** fields, respectively, on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Customer refund You use this document type to record a refund to the customer for returned goods, an overpaid amount, or an unused amount of a prepayment. A customer refund must be fully applied to an open payment, prepayment, or credit note before you release the refund. To perform a refund for a closed payment document, first reverse the applications of the payment document, and then create a refund for the payment document. When you release a customer refund, the system changes its status to **Closed** because its amount was fully applied. The balances of refunds do not affect the customer's balance. You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify refunds, the system uses the number series specified in the **Payment number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Cash sale You use this document type to record a quick sale or a sale for which the services rendered or goods sold are paid immediately by either cash or credit card. Cash sales do not affect the customer's balance. You use the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify cash sales, the system uses the number series specified in the **Invoice number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Cash return You use this document type to record a return of sold goods, which you refunded immediately by either cash or credit card refund. Also, the system creates a document of this type when you reverse a cash sale. Cash returns do not affect the customer's balance. You use the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window to create and process a document of this type. To identify cash returns, the system uses the number series specified in the **Invoice number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Void payment The system creates a document of this type when you void a payment document of the **Payment**, **Prepayment**, or **Balance write-off** type that was erroneously recorded or is otherwise invalid. When you release a document of this type, the system reverses the original payment transactions. The system increases the customer's balance by the balance of voided payment. To identify documents of this type, the system uses the reference number of the voided payment document. ## Overdue charge The system creates documents of this type when you run the process to collect overdue charges by using the [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) mass processing window. The system includes the sum of all open customer documents with the **Overdue charge** type in the customer balance for the customer, which is displayed in the **Balance** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, balances of open charges increase the customer's balance. To identify overdue charges, the system uses the number series specified in the **Overdue charge number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Write-off balance and credit The system creates documents of the **Balance write-off** and **Credit write-off** type when you write off balances and credits of multiple documents at once by using the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) mass processing window. The system decreases the customer's balance by the written-off balance and increases the customer's balance by the written-off credit. To identify documents of this type, the system uses the number series specified in the **Write-off number series** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About the customer ledger document processing flow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-the-customer-ledger-document-processing-flow page Typically, a customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the customer ledger document processing flow Typically, a customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: ## 1. Recorded Documents that have been entered but not released. Recorded documents do not affect the balances of customers and general ledger accounts. Recorded documents may be processed further or may be just deleted from the system. ## 2. Released Documents that have been released but not closed. Released documents affect the balances of customers and general ledger accounts, and require further processing. Released documents cannot simply be deleted from the system. Their effect on balances may be reversed. ## 3. Closed Documents that have been released and closed. Closed documents had affected balances of customers and general ledger accounts when they were closed. Closed documents do not require further processing and cannot be deleted from the system. Their effect on balances may be reversed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About changing the processing of customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents page In Visma Net, you can require that a user performs additional steps during the processing of customer ledger documents, by using settings located under the Data entry settings section on the General settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About changing the processing of customer ledger documents In Visma Net, you can require that a user performs additional steps during the processing of customer ledger documents, by using settings located under the Data entry settings section on the General settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). ## Deferring the release of customer ledger documents You select the **Hold documents on entry** check field to indicate to the system that a new document should be saved as a draft. That is, the **Hold** check field is selected by default, and the system saves each new document with the **On hold** status until a user clears the check field. When the user clears the check field, the system changes the document status to **Balanced**. > [!NOTE] > For documents with the **Invoice** type, the system may instead change the document status to either **Pending print** or **Pending email**. The **Hold documents on entry** setting affects system behaviour in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/), [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/), and [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) windows. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created in these windows. ## Making the entry of amounts error-proof You select the **Validate document totals on entry** check field to prevent any actions from being performed on a document (that is still editable) until a user types the total amount of the document in the **Amount** field, which is displayed in the data entry window if the check box is selected. The amount that the user enters must be equal to the amount calculated by the system. The **Validate document totals on entry** setting affects system behaviour in only the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created on this window. ## Ensuring that the document is printed or emailed You select the **Require invoice printing before release** check box to prevent an invoice from being released until a user prints the invoice for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies. The system assigns the **Pending print** status to the invoice when a user creates the invoice or clears the **Hold** check box if both the following conditions are met: + The **Print invoices** check box is selected for the customer account on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. + The **Printed** check box is cleared for the invoice on the **Invoicing address** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You select the **Require invoice emailing before release** check box to prevent an invoice from being released until a user sends the invoice by email to those customers who prefer to receive invoices by email. The system assigns the **Pending email** status to the invoice when a user creates the invoice or clears the **Hold** check box if both the following criteria are met: + The **Send invoices by email** check box is selected for the customer account on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the Customers window. + The **Emailed** check box is cleared for the invoice on the **Invoicing address** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. These settings affect system behaviour in only the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created in this window. ## Making the entry of an external reference number foolproof You select the **Require payment reference on entry** check box to prevent any actions from being performed on a document (that is still editable) until a user types the external reference number of the document in the **Payment ref.** field, which is displayed in the window. You can turn on auto-numbering for this field when you configure a payment method. The **Require payment reference on entry** setting affects system behaviour on the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) and [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) windows. The system behaviour controlled by this option applies to all document types that can be created on these windows. ## Affecting the processing of batches The processing workflow of batches generated in the Customer ledger workspace is controlled by settings in the **Posting and retention settings** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By using these settings, you can do the following: + Prevent the automatic posting of the batches generated when a document is released. To do this, you clear the **Automatically post on release** check box. + Switch on the summarising of amounts of document lines that contain the same sales account in one transaction. To do this, you select the **Post summary on updating genera ledger** check box and make sure that the **Summary** option is specified for the sales account in the **Post option** column in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. For details: See the description of the check box in [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About tracking customer ledger documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-tracking-customer-ledger-documents page A customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About tracking customer ledger documents A customer ledger document goes through the following states during its life cycle: 1. Recorded: Documents that have been entered but not released 1. Released: Documents that have been released but not closed 1. Closed: Documents that have been released and closed In Visma Net, you can track information about customer ledger documents in each state by using inquiries and reports in the workspace. ## Tracking recorded customer ledger documents To track documents that have been entered but not released (and have the **On hold**, **Pending print**, **Pending email**, or **Balanced** status), you can use the following inquiry and reports: + [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/): You select a specific customer and select the **Include unreleased documents** check box to view the list of unreleased documents associated with the customer, along with the documents with the other processing stages (which you can filter out by using simple filters). + [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500/): You can view all the customer ledger documents that were created but not released or select a specific document type and view only documents of that type. Documents are shown with all details and listed by the financial period, the document date, and the customer of the document. + [Open customer ledger documents (AR656000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000/): You can specify a range of financial periods to view the list of customer ledger documents that have not yet been released. You can access this report by selecting a financial period and clicking the **Unreleased documents** button in the window toolbar of the [Close financial periods (AR509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000/) window. ## Tracking released customer ledger documents To track released documents (which have the **Open** status), you can use the following inquiry and reports: + [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/): You select a specific customer and make sure that the **Show all documents** and **Include unreleased documents** check boxes are cleared to view the list of open documents associated with the customer. + [Customer documents (AR621500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500/): You can view the customer ledger documents for all customers or select a specific customer and view only the documents of that customer. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer account. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. + [Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000/): You can view all the documents released in the specified financial period or select a specific document type and view only the documents of that type. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer account. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. + [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) and [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/): You can view the documents for all customers or select a particular customer to view only the documents of that customer. Documents are listed by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. You use these reports to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. + [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/) and [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/): You can view the documents for all customers or select a particular customer to view only the documents of that customer. Documents are listed by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. These reports are designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. + [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/): You can view the documents (by statement cycle and by customer) that are outstanding at the end of the specified period, broken down by ageing periods. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Tracking closed customer ledger documents To track processed documents that have the **Closed** status, you can use the [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) inquiry. You select a specific customer and select the **Show all documents** check box to view the list of closed documents associated with the customer along with the documents with other processing stages (which can be filtered out by using simple filters).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About customer ledger ageing reports /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports page In Visma Net there are reports, described in the following sections, that can be used by your collection personnel to determine which invoices are overdue for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer ledger ageing reports In Visma Net there are reports, described in the following sections, that can be used by your collection personnel to determine which invoices are overdue for payment. These reports can also be used by management to determine the effectiveness of the credit and collections functions. ## Aged past due You use the [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) and its multi-currency version, [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/), to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. These reports show all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer. > [!NOTE] > To age overdue customer balances at the end of the particular period, use the [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/). For each customer, the report shows the outstanding customer balance in the system and lists open documents, which are broken down by ageing periods. That is, the balances of the documents are sorted into columns that represent ageing buckets. The system forms ageing buckets by using the ageing periods defined for the customer's statement cycle. In the report, debit documents are aged based on their due date and the ageing date specified for the report (in the **Ageing date** field). If the due date of a debit document is earlier than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. Credit documents are aged based on their document date and the ageing date specified for the report if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts are shown in the **Current** column. With the check box selected, if the document date of a credit document is earlier than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. ## Aged outstanding The [Aged outstanding (AR631500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/) and its multi-currency version, [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/), are designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. These reports show all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer. > [!NOTE] > To age overdue customer balances at the end of the particular period, use the [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/). For each customer, the report shows the outstanding customer balance in the system and lists open documents, which are broken down by ageing periods. That is, the balances of the documents are sorted into columns that represent ageing buckets. The system forms ageing buckets by using the ageing periods defined for the customer's statement cycle. In the report, debit documents are aged based on their due date and the ageing date specified for the report (in the **Ageing date** field). If the due date of a debit document is later than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. Credit documents are aged based on their document date and the ageing date specified for the report if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts are shown in the **Current** column. With the check box selected, if the document date of a credit document is later than the ageing date, the document balance is reflected in the **Current** column of the report. Otherwise, the document balance is reflected in the corresponding ageing bucket. ## Aged period sensitive You use the [Aged period sensitive (AR630500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/) to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. The report shows the customer ledger documents that are open at the end of the financial period you select in the **Financial period** field in the report window. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer. The report ages the balances of the debit and credit document in the same way as the [Aged past due (AR631000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/) does. For details, see the Aged past due section in this topic.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Enter a cash sale /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/enter-a-cash-sale section You can use a cash sale document to record an invoice that is fully paid at the time of its creation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a cash sale You can use a cash sale document to record an invoice that is fully paid at the time of its creation. You can use a cash sale document to record an invoice that is fully paid at the time of its creation. You create a cash sale document by using the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. When the cash sale document is released, a batch is created. 1. Go to the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the The top part, select **Cash sale**. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date of the cash sale document. By default, the current date is selected in the field, but you can select another date. The **Application period** field will be filled out automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. 1. Check the customer location and change it if needed. 1. In the **Payment method** field, check the customer's default payment method. The cash sale must be paid by a method based on cash, check, or credit card. 1. Make sure the document currency matches the currency of the customer payment. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the reference number of the customer payment. 1. Optional: Enter a description of the cash sale. 1. In the columns of the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the cash sale document, following the instructions below for each line (transaction): 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the item ID of the particular non-stock item or service paid for by the customer. 1. Optional: Enter the description of the transaction. 1. Optional: Enter the quantity of the item or service. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, enter the unit of measure used with the quantity. 1. Optional: In the **Unit price** column, enter the price per unit. 1. In the **Ext. price** column, enter the sale amount if the amount has not been filled in automatically (as it is when you have specified the quantity and the unit price). 1. Optional: To offer the customer a discount on this item or service, in the **Discount** column, enter the discount percentage. The system calculates the discount amount automatically as the extended price of the item multiplied by the discount percentage. 1. Check the **Amount** column, which displays the total for the line item (calculated by deducting the discount amount from the extended price). 1. Check the **Account** column and change it if needed. 1. Make sure the **Subaccount** column, which the system fills in, in accordance with the rule in the **Combine sales Sub. from** field of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, has the value you want, and change it if necessary. 1. Optional: Select the **Commissionable** check box if commission is paid on the line amount. 1. Make sure the correct salesperson is specified, and select another salesperson if needed. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select the deferral code defined in the system if the expenses related to the item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the applicable charges or fees for processing this payment in the bank. For each applicable charge, do the following: 1. Click **Add row** to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type that designates the bank charge that applies to this cash sale. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount that applies to this document. 1. To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the document with the **Balanced** status, follow the steps below: + In the **Payment amount** field of the **Invoice top part**, enter the total amount of the cash sale. + Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Release customer documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release customer documents 1. Go to the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window. 1. If you want to release specific documents, select the check box next to the documents you want to release. If you want to release all the documents in the window, you do not have to select any documents. 1. To release the invoices you have selected, click **Release**. To release all available invoices at once, click **Release all**. Once you have released the invoices, their statuses change to **Open** and you see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About schedules for recurring documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents page Certain documents in the Customer ledger workspace repeat regularly, such as lease and rental invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About schedules for recurring documents Certain documents in the Customer ledger workspace repeat regularly, such as lease and rental invoices. That is, at regular intervals, documents with the same amount and most of the same document settings need to be entered. To automate the entry of recurring documents, you can create schedules for them. A schedule defines how many times and how often a specific document or specific documents should be repeated. You can set up a maximum number of times the schedule may be executed (or allow an unlimited number of executions) or set an expiration date. In this topic, you will read about the steps you need to perform to schedule document generation, to run a schedule, and to process the generated documents. ## Scheduling the generation of documents Each time you need to schedule the generation of a customer ledger document, you perform these steps: 1. You create a document in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, which will serve as a template for the future documents generated as a result of running a schedule. 1. You create a schedule in the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window and specify its settings. 1. You add a template document to the schedule, either during schedule creation or later. > [!NOTE] > Only the documents of the following types **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Credit note**, and with the following statuses **Balanced, Pending print** or **Pending email** can be scheduled. Once you have added a template document to a schedule, the system changes its status to **Scheduled**. You can assign one document or multiple documents to a schedule. As an alternative to steps 1–3, if you need to schedule only one document, in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, you click **Actions** - **Add to schedule** in the window toolbar to create a new schedule for this document. 1. Optional: You can attach to a schedule the scanned documents or electronic versions of the documents that are the basis for the schedule you have created. Also, you can attach a file or multiple files for each document in the table in the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window explaining why this document is generated periodically. Once you have finished the scheduling, you run the schedule regularly by using the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. When these documents are generated, you process them as you do for regular documents. ## Running schedules To generate documents in accordance with the schedule, you can use the following windows: + [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/): To run the selected schedule. + [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/): To run one schedule or multiple schedules listed in the table. When you run a schedule, the system uses the template document to generate similar documents. The documents generated by a schedule can differ from the template document as follows: + Date: The date of each document is determined by the schedule you have configured. + Reference number: A new reference number is generated for each document in accordance with the number series specified in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + VAT rate: If a VAT or taxes are applied to a document, the system calculates VAT and taxable amounts in the document by using the VAT rates effective on the date of the document creation. Thus, in documents generated according to the same schedule, the VAT amounts can differ. You can find the VAT rate used by the system in each particular document on the **VAT Details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. + Currency rate: If a currency of a document differs from the base currency set in the system, the system uses for conversion the currency exchange rate effective on the date of the document creation. No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. The system determines whether it should generate documents depending on the current date, the schedule's start and expiration date, the schedule type, and the date when the documents were last generated. After the required documents have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed on** date in the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window. Thus, no documents will be generated ahead of time, but missing documents can be generated by running the schedule once for each missed date. For example, imagine that you schedule an invoice to be generated weekly on each Tuesday with an unlimited number of times. If you run the schedule every week on Wednesday, one invoice will be generated each time. If you run this schedule every day, the invoices will be created only on Tuesdays. If you run this schedule only on the last Wednesday of each month, run it four times to generate one invoice each time. When you run a schedule in the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window, you can generate documents ahead of time. You specify the current date in the **Start on** field, select the **On this date** option button in the **Stop** section, and specify a future date. Thus, you define a date range within which the system will run a schedule. The system checks every date in this range and generates documents only on dates that comply with the frequency settings of the schedule. You can view the documents generated by a schedule on the **Generated documents** tab of the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window. Generated documents have the **Balanced** status and can be released or posted, as any other documents can. If needed, you can change the amounts of the transactions. To view and edit a generated document, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. When necessary corrections are made, the document can be saved only if its status remains **Balanced**. ## Editing template documents You can edit the template document (that is, the document with the **Scheduled** status) any time you need to. On the next schedule run, the system will use the modified version of the document for generating documents. Also, you can remove a scheduled document from the table on the **Document list** tab of the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window by using **Delete row** in the table toolbar. The system changes the status of the document to **Voided** and does not use the document any more for generating documents.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Schedule recurring documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/schedule-recurring-documents section You use the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window to create a schedule and add a template document or documents to this schedule. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule recurring documents You use the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window to create a schedule and add a template document or documents to this schedule. For more information: [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/). ## Before you start Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Save each document with the **Balanced** status. Do not release it. > [!NOTE] > The documents of the following types **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Credit note**, and with the following statuses **Balanced**, **Pending print** or **Pending email** can be added as the template documents to a schedule. If you want to use a document that is already closed, copy and paste it to a new document. 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. In The top part, in the **Description** field, add a description of the schedule. 1. In the **Start date** field, select the start date for the schedule. By default, the current date is selected. 1. Place limitations on the schedule execution in one of the following ways: + In the **Expiration date** field, enter the date when the schedule expires, or select the **Never expires** check box. + In the **Execution limit (times)** field, enter the maximum number of times the schedule should be executed, or select the **No limit** check box. 1. Specify how often the document should be generated: + To generate the document daily or every **x** days, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily**. 1. In the **Every day(s)** field of the **Daily** section, type an integer to specify the number of days between document generation. For example: To generate a document every day, enter 1, and to generate a document every other day, enter 2. + To generate the document weekly or every **x** weeks, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Weekly**. 1. In the **Every week(s)** field of the **Weekly** section, type an integer to specify the number of weeks between document generation. 1. Select the appropriate check box or check boxes in the **Weekly** group of elements to specify the day or days of the week when the documents should be generated. + To generate the document monthly or every **x** months, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Monthly**. 1. In the **Every month(s)** field of the **Monthly** section, enter an integer to specify the number of months between document generation. 1. Select when the document should be generated: either the day of the month or the week in the month and day of the week (such as the first Monday of the month). + To generate the document every **x** financial periods, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section of the top part, select **By financial period**. 1. In the **Every period(s)** field, type an integer to specify the frequency of document generation by financial period. 1. Specify whether the document should be generated on the first day of the financial period, the last day of the financial period, or a specific day of the period. 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for the schedule. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: For user reference, attach a scanned copy or electronic version of the document on which this schedule is based. To do this, drag the file from the folder on your computer and drop it in the top part. 1. On the **Document list** tab, repeat the following steps for each document you want to add: 1. Click **Add row** in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Type** column, select the type of a document to be added. 1. In the **Reference no** column, select the document by its reference number. 1. Optional: To attach an electronic version of the related document or a scanned image of it, click ![icon-attach](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-attach.png), and select and upload the document. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Generate recurring documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/generate-recurring-documents page You generate a document in accordance with the schedule by using the Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring documents You generate a document in accordance with the schedule by using the Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) window. For more information: [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/). You generate a document in accordance with the schedule by using the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. You can then view and edit the generated documents if needed, using the drill-down capabilities available in the window. 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. 1. To select the schedules by the range of due dates, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Click the **On this date** option button, and in the unlabelled adjacent field, select the date that ends the range of due dates. 1. To run a specific number of schedules, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Click the **After running this number of schedules** option button, and in the unlabelled adjacent field, type the number. 1. Do one of the following: + To run all listed schedules, on the window toolbar, click **Run all**. + To run only selected schedules, select the unlabelled check box of each schedule you want to run; then click **Run selected** in the window toolbar. Once processing is completed, you can click a link in the **Schedule ID** column to navigate to the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window, where on the **Generated documents** tab, you can view the list of generated invoices.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Generate recurring transactions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/generate-recurring-transactions page You can use this window to view all active schedules, and run all the listed schedules or just the ones you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions You can use this window to view all active schedules, and run all the listed schedules or just the ones you select. 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) window. 1. In the **Start on** field you can enter the start date of the date range for the selected schedules. Leave this field empty to display all schedules that were due earlier. 1. In the **Stop** section, select **On this date** if you want to enter an end date of the date range for the schedule selection. Or select **After running this number of schedules** to set the number of schedules where the process will stop running. 1. In the bottom part of this window you can view the details of a selected schedule by clicking **View schedule**. You can also create a new schedule if you click **New schedule**. This will open the [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) window. 1. Click **Run selected** to run only the schedules that you have selected in the list. Click **Run all** to run all the listed schedules.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Process invoices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process invoices Process invoices - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview page In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process invoices - overview In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. During the implementation of this workspace in your system, the following Customer ledger settings and entities were defined, making it easy for you to process customer ledger documents: + Number series for customer ledger documents and the related general ledger batches in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Customer accounts to uniquely identify each of your clients and hold their information and settings. + Credit and collection policies, which include terms of sales, customer credit verification rules, overdue charges, statements, and dunning letters. For details, see: [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). + The goods and services (defined as stock items in the system) that your company sells to your customers. For details on recording services, see: [Manage non-stock items - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/manage-non-stock-items-overview/). + Sales prices and discount policy, as described in [Manage sales prices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/) and [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). With these entities defined, users in your company can record and process documents in Visma Net quickly and accurately, with minimal manual actions. The system fills in the most of the needed information automatically. ## Topics + [About invoice processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-processing-flow/) + [About invoice recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording/) + [About invoice releasing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing/) + [About correction of a released invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-correction-of-a-released-invoice/) + [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/) + [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About Know your customer (KYC) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-know-your-customer-kyc page Know your customer, KYC, is a process for financial institutes to know their customers' identity, financial operations and risk profile. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Know your customer (KYC) Know your customer, KYC, is a process for financial institutes to know their customers' identity, financial operations and risk profile. The KYC process is one of the measures to comply with European Union legislation on anti-money laundering. As of 1 July 2022, PEPPOL introduced new KYC requirements, which affects the activation of AutoInvoice in Visma Net. ## What is PEPPOL? PEPPOL refers to the Pan-European Public Procurement On-Line project. PEPPOL facilitates standards for the development of electronic documents, and provides the network and infrastructure allowing for documents such as e-invoices, to be sent and received in a standardised way, regardless of the financial systems used by the senders and receivers. PEPPOL enables access to its infrastructure through access points, one of them being AutoInvoice. As an access point, AutoInvoice uses the PEPPOL eDelivery Network to send and receive invoices. OpenPEPPOL AISBL, the PEPPOL coordinating authority, requires that each access point service provider must have a written service contract with its customers carrying forward the minimum requirements defined by OpenPEPPOL. Furthermore, the ownership of PEPPOL participants acting in the role as sender or receiver of documents exchanged over the PEPPOL eDelivery Network, shall be identified and verified in the message exchange between access points (see [PEPPOL compliance policy, version 1.0](https://peppol.eu/wp-content/uploads/2019/02/PEPPOL-Compliance-Policy_v1.0_PUBLISHED.pdf) ). This new KYC requirement takes effect from 1 July 2022. ## How Visma Net complies to KYC requirements As of 1 July 2022, all new companies and branches wanting to use AutoInvoice for sending and receiving invoices, will need to sign the KYC verification agreement from AutoInvoice. This is done in Visma Sign, where a company signatory can view and sign the KYC verification agreement. Access to Visma Sign is granted via a KYC verification email containing a link and password. After completing the KYC process, the new company or branch will be able to use AutoInvoice. To receive the KYC verification email when activating AutoInvoice, click the **Activate AutoInvoice** button in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window, the **The AutoInvoice setting** section. The KYC verification email will be sent to the customer administrator's email address, and can then be forwarded to a company signatory. In case AutoInvoice is already activated but your company or branch is not yet verified, click the **Verify KYC** button in the same section and fill in the company signatory's email address you want the email to be sent to. New companies will receive the KYC verification email to the customer administrator's email address automatically, provided that AutoInvoice is activated when the company is created. This email can then be forwarded to a company signatory.

Related pages

Tasks

 About invoice processing flow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-processing-flow page In the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, customer ledger documents of the following types can be entered directly: Invoice, Credit note, and Debit note. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice processing flow In the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, customer ledger documents of the following types can be entered directly: Invoice, Credit note, and Debit note. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). A document with the **Overdue charges** type is generated by the system only, but you can further process it by using this window. The processing flow described below applies to documents of all these types. > [!NOTE] > Documents with the **Credit write-off** type can be only viewed on this window. For details on writing off credits, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). This topic describes the stages of processing these documents and the statuses that indicate these stages. ## Processing stages During all the stages of processing an invoice, Visma Net assigns the document a status that indicates its current state within the processing flow. The main stages are the following: 1. **Recording**: In this stage, you create a document or you enter all the necessary information into the system. When you save the document for the first time, the system assigns a unique reference number to it for tracking purposes. By default, the system assigns to the document the **Balanced** status when you initially save it. This status indicates that the user has finished editing the document and is ready to release it. (You still can edit a document with this status, however.) Alternatively, you can select the **Hold** check box to indicate that this document is not ready to be released; this changes the status of the document to **On hold**. For details, see: [About invoice recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording/). > [!NOTE] > This stage does not apply to a document with the **Overdue charges** type, which is generated only by the system. For details, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). 1. **Releasing**: You can release a document only if it has the **Balanced** status. When you release the document, the system changes its status to **Open**, updates the customer's balance, and generates a general ledger batch with the document transactions. This status indicates to users and the system that the document is pending a customer payment. For details, see: [About invoice releasing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing/). 1. **Closing**: When the full amount of the document is paid manually or automatically, by one payment for the full amount or by multiple payments, the system changes the status of the document to **Closed** and decreases the balances of the documents involved in the application. The system may change the balance of the customer if documents with different currencies are involved. For details on applying payments and closing invoices, see: [Processing payments and applications - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/processing-payments-and-applications-overview/). In addition to the actions you perform during the main stages, you may need to do the following: + Print an invoice, note, or an overdue charge and send it to a customer by postal mail or electronically. + Correct an amount of a released document by issuing a credit or debit note. + Reverse a released document. ## Changes to the workflow of an invoice As described above, the three primary statuses the system assigns to an invoice are **Balanced**, **Open**, and **Closed**. In Visma Net, you can require a user to perform additional steps during the recording of an invoice; these steps cause the invoice to be assigned additional statuses. You can use invoice-wide settings, located under the **Data entry settings** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, to change the processing flow of invoices. For details, see: [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/). ## Invoice printing and emailing Before you release an invoice or note, your company's internal policies might require you to print it (to send it to the customer by mail), email it (to send it to the customer electronically), or both print it and email it. To implement such policies, you need to perform the following steps: + Select the **Require invoice printing before release** or **Require invoice emailing before release** check box (or both) on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Make sure that the printing and emailing preferences of your customers are configured for customer classes, as described in the **Default printing and emailing settings** section of the [About customer classes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes/) topic. + Make sure that the corresponding mailings are configured, as described in the [Manage mailings - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview/) topic. To print and email customer ledger documents before release, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window or [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) mass-processing window. See [Print invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-invoice/) and [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/) for more information. When the user prints or emails the invoice or memo (or does both), the system selects the **Printed** or **Emailed** check box (or both) on the document entry window. The document is considered printed or emailed if the corresponding check box is selected. These settings can be viewed on the **Invoicing address** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, in the **Print and email options** section. The **Printed** and **Emailed** settings are affected only by the related actions performed in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About invoice recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording page An invoice is a request for payment for goods sold or services rendered. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice recording An invoice is a request for payment for goods sold or services rendered. In Visma Net, a customer ledger invoice holds the amount and cost of products or services that have been provided by your company, as well as the due date by which the customer should send payment for the goods or services that have been purchased. In this topic, you will read about the sources of invoice creation, the groups of settings that make up a customer ledger invoice, and the way the system uses the settings of the related entities to automatically fill in settings for the invoice, thus saving you time. ## Invoice creation sources In Visma Net, a user can manually enter a customer ledger invoice by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. An invoice can also be generated by the system (and is available for working with on the same window) as a result of the following processes: + Invoicing of a contract, as described in [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/) + Invoicing of a project, as described in [About project invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing/) + Processing of a sales order, as described in [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/) + Scheduling of a recurring invoice, as described in [About schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/) If a user initiates the invoicing process from a workspace other than Customer ledger, the system generates an invoice with the **Balanced** status and may release it automatically, depending on the settings of the particular invoicing process. If a user runs a invoicing process from the Customer ledger workspace, the system generates an invoice with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, depending on whether the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected or cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. This setting also controls the initial status of an invoice a user enters manually. For step-by-step instructions on recording an invoice manually, see: [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/). ## Document structure Regardless of how an invoice is generated, it has the same groups of settings, which are described in this topic. In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, a customer ledger invoice has the **Invoice** type, but the settings described below are the same for other types of documents that can be created in this window. The settings of these documents can be grouped as follows: + **Summary**: The settings that are located in the top part of the window define the general information used when the invoice is issued and processed. When you create a new document, the system inserts the current business date and the corresponding post period automatically. When you select the ID of the customer account, the system uses the customer data to automatically fill in most settings needed for processing the invoice; these settings can be manually overridden. + **Processing details**: This group of settings, spread across all tabs of the window except **Document details**, define how the invoice is to be processed further and how VAT and sales commissions are to be calculated. The system fills in the values for these settings automatically when you select a customer account, but most default settings can be overridden. + **Document details**: Each product or service that you sell to the customer is specified in a separate line of the table on the **Document details** tab. An invoice may have one line or multiple lines. Each line includes settings that define the item to be sold, the sales account used for the transaction, the VAT category, and the line discount. When you add a line, the system uses values from the customer location to automatically fill in the default sales account, VAT category, and salesperson. If you specify only the amount to be invoiced in the **Manual amount** column, the system calculates the applicable VAT and commissions, and the invoice is ready for further processing. Alternatively, for each line, you can specify the non-stock item or stock item and the quantity to be sold. In this case, the system automatically fills in the unit price of the item and then calculates the total price and the applicable taxes and discounts. Also, you can upload the details of the invoice from an Excel file. When you save the document for the first time, the system generates a unique reference number for the invoice in accordance with the number series assigned to invoices on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Application of payment terms The due date of the document is calculated based on the payment terms associated with the customer, as are the days when the cash discount is available. By default, the system associates the document with the payment terms specified for the selected customer account, but you can change the default setting. If you do, the system automatically calculates the new due date and the end of the cash discount period. The system calculates the cash discount amount after you have added at least one line to the document details. For details on the calculation of the payment period and cash discount period, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). ## VAT application If the calculation of VAT is configured in your system, the system calculates the applicable taxes for each invoice and records the VAT amounts to the document. On each line, the system fills in a VAT category automatically. For more information about how this VAT category is set, see: [About suggested VAT categories](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/). You can edit the VAT category on each line. You can view the list of the applied VAT on the **VAT details** tab of the window. ## Discount application For each line, you can specify a manual discount offered to a customer, which may be a percent of the total amount or a manually entered amount. The system stores the discount details in the document and does not generate a separate transaction to be posted to General Ledger accounts. If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can configure various types of discounts that can be applied manually or automatically. The system generates separate transactions for discounts with the **Group-level** or **Document-level** types only. For details, see: [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). ## Commission calculation Commissions can be calculated on a per-invoice or per-payment basis, depending on the **Salesperson commission by** option selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Commission is calculated on the invoice amount for all salespersons associated with the invoice. For details on configuring and processing commissions, see: [Manage commissions - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/manage-commissions-overview/). ## Payment application When you enter an invoice and the specified customer has open payments, prepayments and credit notes, the system displays these documents on the **Applications** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. By default, the system sorts these documents by their document type (credit notes, payments, and prepayments) and reference number in ascending order. You can manually specify the paid amount in the **Amount paid** column for the payment document or credit note that you select. Alternatively, you can click **Apply automatically** in the table toolbar. In this case, the system fills in the **Amount paid** column, starting with the first document in the list, until the invoice balance is fully paid. When you release the invoice, the system does the following: 1. Creates and releases application records for the open payment documents that have a non-zero value specified in the **Amount paid** column. 1. Decreases the balances of the invoice and the applied payments or credit notes. 1. If the balances of the invoice and the applied documents are zero, changes the status of these documents to **Closed**; otherwise, the status remains **Open**. The system excludes payments and prepayments from the list of payment documents that can be applied to the invoice if they meet at least one of the following criteria: + The open payment document is linked to a sales order. That is, the payment document has a reservation record or multiple reservation records on the **Orders to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For details, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). + The open payment document was put on hold. That is, a user selected the **Hold** check box for the payment document with the **Open** status in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, and the system changed the document status from **Open** to **Reserved**. > [!NOTE] > To release the payment from hold, clear the **Hold** check box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About invoice releasing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing page In Visma Net, invoices that can be released manually have the following document types in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window: Invoice, Debit note, and Overdue charge. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice releasing In Visma Net, invoices that can be released manually have the following document types in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window: Invoice, Debit note, and Overdue charge. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). The information in this topic applies to documents of these types. When you release an invoice, the system does the following: + Changes the status of the invoice to **Open**, so it appears in the list of the customer's outstanding documents. In the open invoice, you can edit the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled + Increases the customer's balance + Generates a general ledger batch of transactions to update the asset and income accounts > [!NOTE] > An invoice with the **Credit note** type can also be released manually in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, but the release of a credit note affects the balances of general ledger accounts and customers differently. This topic describes the windows you may use to release an invoice and the generation of the general ledger batch. ## Release an invoice You can release an invoice only if it has the **Balanced** status. In Visma Net, you can release an invoice by using one of the following windows: + Sales invoices: You release an invoice by clicking the **Release** button on the window toolbar. For details, see: [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/). + Release customer documents: You use this mass-processing window to release a particular invoice or multiple invoices at once. For details, see: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/). ## Generate a general ledger batch When you release an invoice, the system generates a batch of transactions to record the sale to the general ledger. The invoice includes all the information the system needs to generate the batch. The following two accounts are usually involved: + The asset account specified in the **Customer ledger account** field on the **Financial details** tab + The income account specified for each line in the **Account** column on the **Document details** tab You can view the details of the batch associated with an invoice by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. For a one-line invoice, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| If the calculation of taxes is configured in your system, the system calculates the applicable VAT for each invoice. The system records the VAT amount to the liability account specified for each involved VAT in the **VAT payable account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. Thus, for a one-line invoice with a VAT, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount + VAT Amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| |VAT payable account|0.0|VAT amount| If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and you have configured manual or automatic discounts with the **Group-level** or **Document-level** type, the system adds separate transactions for applied discounts to the batch. The amount of the discount applied is recorded to the expense account specified in the **Discount account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Thus, for a one-line invoice with a tax and a document-level discount applied, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Amount + VAT amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| |Discount account|Discount total|0.0| |VAT payable account|0.0|VAT amount| If the **Invoice rounding** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, one more account may be involved: the rounding account, which is updated by the amounts resulting from rounding the document total. The small amount resulting from rounding may be posted as a debit or a credit, depending on its sign. If an invoice is in the base currency, the system uses the rounding gain and loss accounts specified in the **Rounding settings** section of the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. If an invoice is in a foreign currency, the system uses the accounts specified for this currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. For details, see: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/). Thus, for a one-line invoice with a VAT and the rounding is set to increase the invoice total, the following transactions will be recorded to the general ledger when the invoice is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|Rounded amount + VAT amount|0.0| |Sales account|0.0|Amount| |VAT payable account|0.0|VAT amount| |Rounding gain / Loss account|0.0|Rounding difference amount| If the invoice is in a foreign currency, its details must be recalculated in the base currency of your system. To record the difference resulting from rounding during currency conversion, the system uses the rounding gain and loss accounts specified for the document currency in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The small amount resulting from the currency rounding may be posted as a debit or a credit, depending on its sign. For details, see: [About currency rounding rules](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/configure-currency/about-currency-rounding-rules/). Commission amounts are visible for the invoice, but commission-related transactions are not included in the batch. To calculate commissions and generate appropriate transactions, use the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About invoice response messages /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-response-messages page Invoice response messages are messages sent from the ERP system of the receiver of a sales invoice (the customer) to the ERP system of the sender of the sales invoice (you). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice response messages Invoice response messages are messages sent from the ERP system of the receiver of a sales invoice (the customer) to the ERP system of the sender of the sales invoice (you). ## How to activate and update invoice response messages? You can activate receiving invoice response messages in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window and you can then find the messages in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) and [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) windows in the **Business level status** field in the **Invoice address** tab. You can update the status by clicking the **Actions** button and selecting **Poll invoice status**. ## What are invoice response messages and what are they used for? An invoice response message informs you about: + the status of the invoice during its processing by the customer, + any actions needed from your side. Apart from predefined status messages, the customer can send the following, which you find in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) and [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) windows: + a predefined **Reason code**, which clarifies the **Business level status**, + a predefined **Action code**, which gives information about what action needs to be taken + manual messages ( **Reason** and **Action** fields) in addition to or instead of the respective codes. These are imported as is in the ERP system.

Related pages

Windows

 About correction of a released invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-correction-of-a-released-invoice page You may need to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice when the invoice overcharged the customer or the customer reported receiving damaged goods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About correction of a released invoice You may need to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice when the invoice overcharged the customer or the customer reported receiving damaged goods. On the other hand, you may need to increase the amount of an invoice due to additional expenses being incurred during delivery of the goods or services listed in the original invoice. In Visma Net, the amount of a released invoice, which increases a customer's debt, cannot be changed directly in the released document. In the open (released) invoice, you can edit only the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled. The closed invoice cannot be edited at all. Thus, the correction of an invoice can be performed only by issuing an additional document (credit or debit note) that affects the customer's balance (credit or debit note). In some cases, it is possible to use the correct invoice functionality directly in the invoice. In this topic, you will read about the ways to correct a released invoice. ## Use the Correct invoice action An invoice with no payments linked to it and no invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window can be corrected by using the **Correct invoice** action in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The system creates a new correction invoice which is a copy of the original invoice. The system also creates a sales credit note for the original invoice in the background. After you make your corrections and save and release the corrected invoice, the original invoice will be matched against the automatically created sales credit note. On both the corrected and original invoice, there will be a button in the window toolbar with direct links to each other, for you to quickly review the changes. For step-by-step instructions on using the **Correct invoice** action, see: [Correct a released sales invoice (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice/). ## Decrease the amount of an invoice You issue a credit note, which will be used to decrease a customer's debt, by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window or the same window you use to create an invoice. The credit note is independent from the original invoice, with no direct reference to it. You can, however, enter the original invoice reference number in the **Description** field for the note. A credit note may have multiple lines or one summary line. Credit notes do not have due dates and may be numbered differently from invoices. The release of a credit note decreases the customer's balance. The application of a released credit note against invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges decreases the outstanding amount of these documents by the amount of the credit note. When you release a credit note, the system generates a batch of general ledger transactions that update the asset and income accounts. For details on the general ledger accounts involved, see [About invoice releasing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-releasing/). The following transactions will be posted to the General ledger workspace when a one-line credit note with a VAT is released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Amount + VAT amount| |Sales account|Amount|0.0| |VAT payable account|VAT amount|0.0| Once a credit note has been applied to an outstanding document, the system generates a batch in only the following cases: + You have written off some balance along with the application. In this case, the system generates a batch to update the asset account specified for the outstanding document in the **Customer ledger account** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, and the expense account specified in the **Account** field in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window for the reason code you have used to write off the balance. + The credit note or the outstanding document to which you want to apply the credit note is in a foreign currency. The system generates a batch to update the balance of the realised gain or loss (RGOL) account by the amount resulting from the difference in the exchange rate on the outstanding document date and the credit note date. The RGOL account is specified for each currency in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. For step-by-step instructions on creating and applying a credit note, see [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) and [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). ## Increase the amount of an invoice It is not possible to increase the outstanding amount of an open invoice (which has been released) or the paid amount of a closed one. You instead issue a debit note by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. When you release this document, it increases the debt of the customer; the debit note does not change the balance of any invoice and should be paid as a separate document. The debit note doesn't contain a direct reference to any original invoice, but you can enter the reference number of the original invoice in the **Description** field. Debit notes may be numbered differently from invoices. A debit note is processed similarly to an invoice. For details on the recording and release of a debit note, see: [About invoice and processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-processing-flow/). ## Reverse an invoice When you reverse an invoice, its status and outstanding amount do not change. You can reverse an invoice in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window in one of the following ways: + By clicking the **Reverse** action for the invoice. The system automatically generates a credit note with details similar to those of the invoice; you then need to release and apply to the original invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse an invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/). + By manually creating a credit note for the full balance of the invoice and then applying the credit note to the invoice. > [!NOTE] > If you are reversing a closed invoice, before applying a credit note, you need to reverse the application of the document used to close this invoice, thus causing the invoice to again be assigned the **Open** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About rounding of document amounts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts page Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the total amounts on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About rounding of document amounts Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the total amounts on invoices. In Visma Net, you can enable the **Invoice rounding** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. With this functionality enabled, the system will round the document total amount according to the rounding rules that you have set up for Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces. (You set up separate rules for each of these workspaces.) > [!NOTE] > The line total, tax total, and other subtotals (if any) of a document are not rounded. For detailed instructions on configuring the rounding of document totals, see [Set up document amount rounding](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/set-up-document-amount-rounding/). In this topic, you will read about the steps you perform to set up rounding and the details of how the rounding rules are applied. ## Rounding setup In Visma Net, rounding is determined by parameters that define the rounding rule, rounding precision, and rounding limit. You use the following windows to specify these settings: + [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/): You use this window to specify the rounding rule and the precision that apply to the customer ledger documents of the following types: **Invoice**, **Credit note**, **Debit note**, **Overdue charge**, and **Cash sale**. + [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/): You use this window to specify the rounding rule and the precision that apply to the supplier ledger documents of the following types: **Invoice**, **Credit adjustment**, **Purchase debit note**, and **Prepayment**. + [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/): You use this window to specify the system-wide rounding limit (the maximum rounding difference, which is the difference between the rounded and original document amount). The system applies rounding rules to documents in all currencies (base and foreign). The rounding limit is set in the base currency but is applied to documents in foreign currencies as well. The system always recalculates the amounts of an invoice in a foreign currency to amounts in the base currency of your system, including the rounding difference. The system compares the rounding difference recalculated to the base currency with the rounding limit, and issues a warning if the limit is exceeded. The rounding difference should be recorded to specific rounding gain and loss accounts. Depending on the policies established in your company, you can use a single gain account and a single loss account (and the corresponding subaccounts, if applicable) to be used for all currencies, or you can use different gain and loss accounts (and corresponding subaccounts) for each currency used by your company. You use the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window to specify the rounding gain and loss accounts (and subaccounts, if enabled in your system) for the base currency, and you use the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window to specify the gain and loss accounts and subaccounts for each of the foreign currencies used by your customers and suppliers. ## Rounding rules To set up rounding for documents, you select the rounding rule and precision. The following rounding rules are available: Nearest : To round each total amount to the nearest multiple of the smallest unit. Up : To round each total amount up to the next multiple of the smallest unit. Down : To round each total down to the previous multiple of the smallest unit. Use the currency precision : To temporarily not use rounding if it is activated in your system. If this option is selected, for each document, the system will round the document total according to the precision specified for the document currency. The precision of the base currency is specified in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window, and the precision of foreign currencies is defined in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. In addition to selecting the rounding rule, you select the rounding precision or the smallest unit to be used for document amounts. The following options are available: 0.1 : To round the totals to multiples of 0.10 0.5 : To round the totals to multiples of 0.5 1.0 : To round the totals to integers 10.0 : To round the totals to multiples of 10 100.0 : To round the totals to multiples of 100 The table below illustrates the results of rounding with different rules and precisions applied to the sample value of €1734.57. |Rule/precision|0.1|.05|1.0|10|100| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |**Nearest**|€1734.6|€1734.5|€1735|€1740|€1700| |**Up**|€1734.6|€1735.0|€1735|€1740|€1800| |**Down**|€1734.5|€1734.5|€1734|€1730|€1700|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About sending direct debit invoices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-sending-direct-debit-invoices page Direct debit is a payment method in which a third party is granted permission to take payments from a bank account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sending direct debit invoices Direct debit is a payment method in which a third party is granted permission to take payments from a bank account. In setting up a direct debit transaction, authorisation must be given in order to permit the party seeking payments to make the withdrawals from your account. Essentially, you give a company permission to take an amount at a time specified by that organisation. Once you have set up the authorisation, the amount is taken automatically (as opposed to you needing to take additional action to make the payment, such as entering credit card details or initiating a bank transfer). In Visma Net, you use bank deposits to track customer payments that you deposit to the bank in bulk. See [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/). When you enter into the system payments intended for such deposits, the payments are temporarily recorded to special **clearing** cash accounts. For direct debit, you have to set up clearing cash accounts in Visma Net. See [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/). Clearing accounts should be set as the default cash accounts for associated payment methods. Create an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice section You create a customer ledger invoice by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an invoice You create a customer ledger invoice by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to initiate a database entry for a new document. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, change the current business date if needed. The **Post period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer associated with the document. 1. In the **Location** field, check the customer location, and change it if necessary. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need, and select another if necessary. This currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Terms** field, check the payment terms associated with the customer. The due date of the invoice is calculated based on the payment terms. The payment terms may allow a cash discount to be taken and specify its terms. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number from the original customer document. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, add a brief description of the invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the invoice, doing the following for each line (transaction): 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to append a row to the table. 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the ID of the particular item sold or service provided to the customer. 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction if it has not been filled in automatically. 1. Optional: Enter the quantity of the item sold. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, enter the unit of measure for the item if it has not been filled in automatically. 1. Optional: In the **Unit price** column, enter the price per unit if it has not been filled in automatically. 1. In the **Ext. price** column, enter the extended price of the specified stock item or service if it has not been calculated automatically. 1. Optional: To offer the customer a discount on this item or service, enter the discount percentage in the **Discount** column or the discount amount in the **Discount amount** column. If you enter a percentage, the system will calculate the discount amount automatically by multiplying the extended price of the item by the discount percentage. 1. Check the **Amount** column, which displays the total for the line item. The system calculates this total by deducting the discount amount (if any) from the extended price. 1. Check the **Account** column and change it if needed. 1. Check the **Subaccount** column if applicable, which by default is filled in by the system in accordance with the rule in the **Combine sales sub. from** field of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window; you can change the default subaccount if necessary. 1. Check the salesperson associated with the customer. You can change the salesperson if needed. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: Select the **Commission** check box if a commission is paid on the line item amount. 1. If you want to save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. If you want to save the document with the **Balanced** status, do one of the steps below, and make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field is available in the top part of the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. + If the **Amount** field is not available in the window, make sure the total amount of the document is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. In the **Cash discount** field in the top part, check the cash discount amount of the document. This field may be filled in automatically, based on the payment terms of the customer. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Change customer or customer location on sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-invoice section In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales invoice, even when it already has lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer or customer location on sales invoice In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales invoice, even when it already has lines. If you want to change the customer or customer location to one with a different VAT calculation, on a sales invoice with lines, consider the following to make sure the VAT calculation is changed as well. ## Before you start Make sure the **Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document** check box in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window is selected. See also: [Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/set-up-calculation/recalculate-vat-when-customer-is-changed-on-document/). 1. Do you want to change the customer location? + If **Yes**, make sure that the **Export type** is filled in for the location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. + If **No**, continue to step 2. 1. In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window on the invoice, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Customer** or **Location** field and select a new customer or location. **Result**: the **VAT details** tab and the VAT category on the lines will be updated accordingly if the new customer or location has a different VAT calculation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Print invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-invoice page You can print selected invoices and memos by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print invoice You can print selected invoices and memos by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window. For more information: [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/). You can print selected invoices and memos by using the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. You should print invoices or notes to send them to the customer before release if the **Require invoice/note printing before release** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and the settings of the customer require the printing of these documents or the **Print invoices** check box is selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. For customers with this check box selected, each invoice that is created and is not on hold is assigned the **Pending print** status. After you have printed the document, its status is changed to **Balanced**, and you can release it. 1. Make sure the printer is connected to your computer and ready for printing. 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field of the Selection area, select the **Print invoice/note** action. 1. Optional: For invoices associated with contract servicing, select the user or the work group (in the **Assigned to** or **Work group** field) to whom the documents are assigned. > [!NOTE] > You can use filtering to display only specific documents in the table. 1. In the table, select the unlabeled check boxes for the documents you intend to print. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Process**. Each document will appear in a new browser tab. 1. For each document to be printed, do the following: 1. In the window toolbar, click **Print**; the browser opens the **Print dialog box**. 1. Select the appropriate options, and then click **OK**. The selected pages will be printed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Send invoice attachments through AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-invoice-attachments-through-autoinvoice section In Customer ledger you can add attachments on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoice attachments through AutoInvoice In Customer ledger you can add attachments on invoices. You can send PDF files with the invoice through AutoInvoice. 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the **Attachments** tab and select the desired attachments in **Send the file to AutoInvoice**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Actions** and choose **Send to AutoInvoice**. Release an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice page To release a particular invoice or note, use the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, as described below. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release an invoice To release a particular invoice or note, use the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, as described below. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). To release a particular invoice or note, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, as described below. You can also release multiple invoices and notes at a time, as described in: [Release customer documents.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Optional: to search and filter invoices by their type, select a type in the **Type** field of the top part. 1. Bring up the particular invoice or note you want to release by taking one of the following actions: + Use the search field in the upper right corner of the window. + Click on a column's name, and use the filter and/or search field. + To navigate among invoices or notes, click the appropriate navigation buttons until you see the document. 1. Select the invoice or note you want to release by clicking on its **Ref. no.** or double-clicking the line. 1. Check the status of the document: + If the status is **On hold**, enter the control total in the **Amount** field (if applicable), and clear the **Hold** check field to change the status to **Balanced**. + If the status is **Balanced**, proceed to the next step. 1. Click **Release**. The released document is assigned the **Open** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reverse an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse an invoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the invoice with the status **Open**. > [!NOTE] > You must release the invoice and its status has to be **Open** or **Closed** for you to proceed. 1. Click **Actions** - **Reverse**. The invoice type now changes to **Credit note**. 1. Optional: Change the **quantity** and the **unit price**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Reports** - **Preview invoice/note** to preview the credit note. 1. Click **Release**. The status changes to **Open** and ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) becomes visible. 1. Click **Reports** - **Print invoice/note**, to print it. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to match the invoice and credit note and to close them. For step-by-step instructions of how to match a credit note to an invoice, see: [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). ## What is next? Once the invoice is released, you send it to the customer. How the invoice is sent depends on the customer's **Print and e-mail settings**, if the options **Send invoices by email** or **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** are selected. See: [Set up e-mail invoices for one customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer/) and [Send one invoice to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-one-invoice-to-autoinvoice/). You can release and post a batch of invoices / credit notes from the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window, and you can also send a batch from the **Print invoice** window. See: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) and [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/). Create a credit note /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note section To credit a customer if, for example, the customer received damaged goods or the invoice mistakenly overcharged the customer, you create a credit note by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a credit note To credit a customer if, for example, the customer received damaged goods or the invoice mistakenly overcharged the customer, you create a credit note by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). To apply a credit note that was previously released (as described in [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/) ) to customer ledger documents or to create a customer refund, see: [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to initiate a database entry for a new document. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Credit note**. 1. In the **Date** field, enter the credit note date. The **Post period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected document date. 1. Select the customer associated with the credit note. 1. In the **Location** field, check the customer location, and change it if necessary. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number assigned by the customer to the customer document. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need, and change it if necessary. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, add a brief description of the credit note or the reference number of the original invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the credit note, performing the following steps for each line (transaction): > [!NOTE] > A credit note must include at least one line. 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to append a row to the table. 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the ID of the item sold or the service provided to the customer. 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction. 1. Optional: Enter the quantity of the item sold. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, enter the unit of measure for the item. 1. Optional: In the **Unit price** column, enter the price per unit. 1. In the **Manual amount** column, enter the amount for the line. If you have specified a stock item, the system calculates the manual amount by multiplying its unit price and the quantity sold, but you can override this calculated price. 1. Check the **Account** column and change it if needed. 1. Check the **Subaccount** column if applicable, which the system fills in by default based on the rule in the **Combine sales sub. from** field of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window; you can manually change the subaccount if necessary. 1. Check the salesperson associated with the customer. You can change the selected salesperson if needed. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the document with the **Balanced** status, do one of the steps below, and make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field is available in the top part of the window, enter the total amount of the credit note. + If the **Amount** field is not available in the window, make sure the total amount of the document is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Apply a credit note to open documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents section After you have created a credit note (as described in Create a credit note ), the note should be released; see Release an invoice for details. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply a credit note to open documents After you have created a credit note (as described in Create a credit note ), the note should be released; see Release an invoice for details. For more information: [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/), [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/). After you have created a credit note (as described in [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/)), the note should be released; see [Release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/release-an-invoice/) for details. You then close the credit note in one of the following ways: + Apply the credit note to open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. If you apply the credit note to any of these documents, it receives the **Closed** status. + If a customer has already paid an overcharging invoice, create a customer refund, which you apply to the credit note to return the money to the customer. For step-by-step instructions, see [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/). + If the credit note was created to credit a customer that was overcharged based on documents that have been paid and documents that have not been paid, you can apply part of the credit note against unpaid invoices and the rest of the credit note balance against a customer refund. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Credit note**. 1. Select the appropriate reference number for the credit note in the **Ref. no.** field. 1. Check the date of the credit note in the **Date** field; by default, the current date is selected, but you can select another date. The **Financial period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected credit note date. 1. In the columns of the **Documents to apply** tab, enter the documents to which the credit note should be applied, following the steps below to add each line (document): 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar to append a row to the table. 1. In the **Document type** column, select the appropriate option to apply the credit note to an invoice, debit note, or overdue charge. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select a document by its ID from the list of documents. (The system includes in this list documents associated with the current customer that have the **Open** status and the selected document type.) 1. Check the information in the other columns of this table, which are filled out automatically when you select a document. 1. Check the **Applied to documents** field; the system automatically inserts the total amount of the applied documents. 1. To release the credit note, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click **Release** button in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create and release an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create and release an invoice > [!NOTE] > If you are using direct debit as payment, see [Get started with direct debit](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/direct-debit/get-started-with-direct-debit/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. If necessary, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new document. In the **Type** field, **Invoice** is always the default choice. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. Most fields are filled in with the information on the specific customer. 1. Enter the general invoice information in the upper part of the window. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. On the **Document details** tab, add the invoice lines. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new invoice line. 1. Optional: Enter the **Item ID**. 1. Enter any relevant information for each line. For example: Quantity, amount, discount, account and sub-account. Some fields are filled in automatically. > If you are using AutoInvoice to send invoices, the **Transactions description** is mandatory. 1. Continue with the other tabs and enter the relevant information. If you use direct debit as payment follow the steps below: 1. Go to the **Financial details** tab. 1. In the **Payment method** field, check that you have the correct direct debit **Core** or **B2B**. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select the cash account where the direct debit will be collected. 1. Go to the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under the **Direct debit information** area, check if the **Mandate ID** is correct. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: Select **Reports** - **Preview invoice/note** to preview the invoice. 1. Click **Release**. Once the invoice is released, the status changes to **Open** and. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed 1. Optional: If the **Print invoices** check box is selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, click **Reports** - **Print invoice/note** to print the invoice. See: [Print an invoice.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-an-invoice/) When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account. ## What is next? Once the invoice is released, you send it to the customer. How the invoice is sent depends on the customer's **Print and e-mail settings**, if the options **Send invoices by email** or **Send invoices to AutoInvoice** are selected. See: [Set up e-mail invoices for one customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer/) and [Send one invoice to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-one-invoice-to-autoinvoice/). You can release and post a batch of invoices / credit notes from the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window, and you can also send a batch from the **Print invoice** window. See: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/) and [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up document amount rounding /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/set-up-document-amount-rounding section Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the amounts on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up document amount rounding Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the amounts on invoices. Your company policy or local regulations may require that you round the amounts on invoices. For more information, see: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/). You set up the rounding rules and rounding precision for supplier ledger invoices by using the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, and for customer ledger invoices by using the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Before you proceed 1. In the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, make sure that the **Invoice rounding** check box is selected, which indicates that the functionality is enabled. For details, see: [About enabling functionalities](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/about-enabling-functionalities/). 1. Make sure the rounding gain and loss accounts (and subaccounts), if they are used in your system) for the base currency are specified in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, and that the accounts and subaccounts for each foreign currency used by your customers and suppliers are specified in the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. ## Set up rounding rules for supplier ledger invoices 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. If you want to enter the rounding amount manually, select the **Enter rounding amount manually** check box. 1. If you want to use automatic rounding, go the **Rounding for invoices** field and select one of the 1. In the **Rounding rule for invoices** field, select one of the following rules to be used to round the totals of supplier ledger invoices: + **Use the currency precision**: To round the total amount of each document according to the precision of the currency of the document. With this option selected, the system will process the documents as if the document rounding feature is not enabled for supplier ledger documents. + **Nearest**: To round the total amount of each document to the nearest multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision. + **Up**: To round each total amount up to the next multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision. + **Down**: To round each total amount down to the previous multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision. 1. In the **Rounding precision** field, select the smallest unit (rounding precision) to which the totals will be rounded. Select one of the following precision options to be used for rounding: + **0.1**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.10 + **0.5**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.5 + **1.0**: To round the totals to integers + **10.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 10 + **100.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 100 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The system will use the same rounding precision for all currencies. ## Set up rounding rules for customer ledger invoices 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. In the **Rounding rule for invoices** field, select one of the following rules to be used to round the totals of customer ledger invoices: + **Use the currency precision**: To round the total amount of each document according to the precision of the currency of the document + **Nearest**: To round the total amount of each document to the nearest multiple of the selected smallest unit selected as the rounding precision + **Up**: To round each document total amount up to the next multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision + **Down**: To round each document total down to the previous multiple of the smallest unit selected as the rounding precision 1. In the **Rounding precision** field, select the precision to which the totals will be rounded. Select one of the following available precision options as the smallest unit to which the amounts should be rounded: + **0.1**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.10 + **0.5**: To round the totals to multiples of 0.5 + **1.0**: To round the totals to integers + **10.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 10 + **100.0**: To round the totals to multiples of 100 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Check sent email status for AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check sent email status for AutoInvoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under **AutoInvoice**, check if the **Sent to AutoInvoice** check box is selected. This indicates that the invoice is sent to AutoInvoice. 1. Check the **AutoInvoice status**: 1. **Sent to AutoInvoice**: > [!NOTE] > Awaiting processing. 1. **Pending** > [!NOTE] > The invoice is pending and has not been sent yet from the **Pending emails** (SM507000) window. You can from this window send the invoice **before** the system's scheduled dispatch of emails. 1. **Sent** > [!NOTE] > The invoice is sent and you can find it in the overview of **Sent emails** (CO409080). 1. **Error** > [!NOTE] > Contact Support if this is the status. ## What is next? If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes in the email in the Pending emails window. See [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Check sent email status /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check sent email status ## Before you start In the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window, you can send the invoice **before** the system's scheduled dispatch of emails. 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under **Print and email options**, check if the **Emailed** check box is selected. This shows that the invoice is sent by email. ## What is next? If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes as instructed in: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/). In the [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/) window, you can see an overview over all your sent emails. Correct a sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-sales-invoice section You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct a sales invoice You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). In this topic, you will read about the way to correct an invoice that has not been released. ## Correct an invoice that has not been released 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Locate the invoice you want to correct by typing in the search field in the upper right corner or clicking on a column's name, and use the filter and/or search field. 1. Select the invoice you want to correct by clicking on its **Ref. no.** or double-clicking the line. 1. Make your corrections on the invoice. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, do one of the steps below and then make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field of the top part is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. (The **Amount** field is visible when the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window.) + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the invoice is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Correct an invoice that has been released In an open invoice, you can edit only the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled. Other corrections cannot be done directly in the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be edited at all. For released invoices you correct differently depending on whether there are payments linked to the invoice or invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. + To correct a released invoice with no payments linked to it and no invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, see: [Correct a released sales invoice (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice/). + To correct a released invoice with payments linked to it or invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, select one of the following ways: + Reverse the invoice to reverse the impact of the invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse an invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/). + Issue a credit note to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to create and apply a credit note, see: [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) and [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). + Issue a debit note to increase the outstanding amount of an invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Correct a released sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice page You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct a released sales invoice You correct a customer ledger invoice differently depending on whether the invoice was released (and has the Open or Closed status) or was not released (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). In this topic, you will read about the ways to correct an invoice that has been released. In an open (released) invoice, you can edit only the cash discount date and the due date until the document is settled. Other corrections cannot be done directly in the invoice. A closed invoice cannot be edited at all. For released invoices you correct differently depending on whether there are payments linked to the invoice or invoice lines from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) or [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## Correcting an invoice with no payments linked to it and no invoice lines from the Shipments (SO302000) or Sales orders (SO301000) window 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Search the invoice you want to correct by clicking on a column's name and filter or search, or by typing in the search field in the upper right corner. Select the invoice you want to correct by clicking on its **Ref. no.** or double-clicking the line. 1. Select **Correct invoice** in the **Actions** drop-down list. 1. The system asks if you want to correct the invoice, answer **Yes**. The system creates a new correction invoice which is a copy of the original invoice. The system also creates a sales credit note for the original invoice in the background. (The original invoice will remain in status **Open** until the new corrected invoice is released.) 1. On the new correction invoice, make your corrections. 1. Save and release. The original invoice will be matched against the automatically created sales credit note, and change status to **Closed**. On both the corrected and original invoice, there will be a button in the window toolbar with direct links to each other, for you to quickly review the changes. ## Correcting an invoice with payments linked to it or invoice lines from the Shipments (SO302000) or Sales orders (SO301000) window, or when an invoice is closed + Reverse the invoice to reverse the impact of the invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse an invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/). + Issue a credit note to decrease the outstanding amount of an invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to create and apply a credit note, see: [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) and [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). + Issue a debit note to increase the outstanding amount of an invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Send an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send an invoice 1. [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/). 1. Click **Release**. The status changes to **Open** and. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed 1. Select the distribution type: 1. Click **Actions** and select **Email invoice/note**., and the invoice is sent to the recipient address that has been defined for this customer. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed Or 1. Click **Reports** and select **Print invoice/note** (to send by regular mail). 1. In the **Invoice/note form** window, click **Print**. The **Print** window is displayed. 1. In the **Print** window, select the desired layout and number of copies and change any other settings if you like, and click **Print**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Send one invoice to AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-one-invoice-to-autoinvoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send one invoice to AutoInvoice ## Before you start As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: [About Know your customer (KYC)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-know-your-customer-kyc/). [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/) 1. [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/) and release it., and the status changes to **Open**. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed 1. Click **Actions**, and select **Send to AutoInvoice**. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed, and the invoice is sent to AutoInvoice. Attachments that you add on the **Attachments** tab will be automatically sent to AutoInvoice if you have selected option **Automatically mark file attachments to be sent to AutoInvoice** in the **AutoInvoice settings** window for the active branch. When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account. ## What is next? For more information about the statuses of the invoices you have sent to AutoInvoice, see: [Poll the invoice status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/poll-the-invoice-status/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Email an invoice from preview in a report /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-from-preview-in-a-report page If the Do not email check box is selected on the Invoice address tab and the invoice is released, you cannot send the invoice as an email from the Sales invoices window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email an invoice from preview in a report If the Do not email check box is selected on the Invoice address tab and the invoice is released, you cannot send the invoice as an email from the Sales invoices window. 1. Go to [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). 1. Click **Reports** and select **Preview invoice/note**. 1. Click **Send** to open the **Email activity** window. > [!NOTE] > You will not use the invoice notification in this email, but a default notification.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Email an invoice or a credit note /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-or-a-credit-note section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email an invoice or a credit note ## Before you start There are several ways of emailing an invoice or a credit note from the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You can either email an invoice with a few clicks via the **Actions** button, or you can preview and email an invoice via the **Reports** button. Instead of emailing to the registered contact on your customer, you can also enter a new email address in the invoice preview, or override the existing email address. It is also possible to email an invoice to a customer that you have already registered **not to** receive any emails. See also: [Set customer print and email preferences.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. 1. Click **Actions** and select **Email invoice/note**. When the invoice is sent to the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window,. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account. ## What is next? If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or email recipient, you can make changes in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. For more information, see: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/). To get an overview of all your outgoing emails, go to the [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Override an email address /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/override-an-email-address section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Override an email address 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. On the **Invoice address** tab, under **Contact information**, select **Override contact**. 1. Enter the new email address for this invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Email an invoice to an unregistered contact /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-to-an-unregistered-contact section You can email the invoice to another contact than the email address registered on the customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email an invoice to an unregistered contact You can email the invoice to another contact than the email address registered on the customer. 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. 1. Click **Reports** and select **Print invoice/note**. 1. In the preview of the invoice, click **Send**. 1. In the **Email activity** window, enter the email address or click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to search for recipients. 1. Click **Send**. ## What is next? If you have sent your email to a the wrong recipient, see [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/). You can also get an overview of all your outgoing emails.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Poll the invoice status /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/poll-the-invoice-status section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Poll the invoice status 1. You are here: In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, with your invoice released and sent to AutoInvoice. 1. Click **Actions** and select **Poll invoice status**. The system polls the status and when it is finished, you see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon. 1. Click the **Invoice address** tab. 1. Under the **AutoInvoice** section: + Find the **AutoInvoice status** field. You see the status of your invoice. > Available statuses are: > > + Sent to AutoInvoice - awaiting processing. > + Pending - awaiting delivery. > + Sent - the invoice is sent. > + Error - to check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice. + In the **Sending method** field, you see the value **Consumer** if the invoice was sent as banking e-invoice, or the value **Standard**, if it was sent as a regular e-invoice. This field is populated as soon as you create the invoice and select the customer, so you can check the sending method before the actual sending to AutoInvoice. + In the **AutoInvoice sent by** field, you see the service that was used to send the invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Close customer invoices open due to rounding differences /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/close-customer-invoices-open-due-to-rounding-differences page If the customer has made a payment for an invoice with rounding differences, the customer's balance will be open. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close customer invoices open due to rounding differences If the customer has made a payment for an invoice with rounding differences, the customer's balance will be open. You can do the depreciation in an easy way in Visma Net. ## Closing open customer invoices with rounding differences 1. Go to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Select the check box **Enable write-offs** and enter a write-off limit (e.g. 0.99) for the customers you would like to make a depreciation. You can make this a default setting when you create new customers. You do this in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window and create a new code for write-offs. 1. Go to the [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) window. 1. Select the invoices you would like to depreciate and click **Process** to update the vouchers. You have now got a voucher with correct roundings which will close the invoice. Preview an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/preview-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preview an invoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. The invoice must have the status **Balanced**. 1. Click **Reports**. 1. From the drop-down list, select **Preview invoice/note**. The invoice is displayed in the **Invoice/note form** window, where you can send, print, create a PDF, or export the invoice to other formats.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Print an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print an invoice 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. 1. Click the **Reports** button and select **Print invoice/note**. The invoice is displayed. 1. Hover over the invoice to see the ![icon-print](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-print.png) icon, and click it. The invoice is displayed in Window's **Print** window. 1. In the **Print** window, select the layout, and do any other settings that you find necessary. 1. Click the **Print** button. See also: [Print several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/). When you use direct debit as a payment method, the generated invoice will show information about the mandate, and that the invoice amount will automatically be deducted from the customer's bank account.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add text to invoices /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/add-text-to-invoices section In some situations, you might need to add additional text on invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add text to invoices In some situations, you might need to add additional text on invoices. ## Adding additional text 1. Go to the [Report texts (AR20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s/) window. 1. Add the **report text code** and a **name**. Remember to use a meaningful name. 1. Write the text you need. You can have two different texts on each customer class. 1. **Save** this text block. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. Select the correct **customer class** and open tab **Report text settings**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Under **Notification ID**, choose if the text block is added to **Invoices** or **Dunning letters**. 1. Under **Report text ID**, select the text block you created before. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The text will now be added when creating invoices/dunning letters for this customer class. Process payments and applications /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments and applications Processing payments and applications - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/processing-payments-and-applications-overview page In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Processing payments and applications - overview In general, you use the Customer ledger workspace specifically for sales made on credit. During the implementation of this workspace in your system, the following Customer ledger settings and entities were defined, making it easy for you to process customer ledger documents: + Number series for Customer ledger documents and the related general ledger batches in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + Customer accounts to uniquely identify each of your clients and hold their information and settings. + Credit and collection policies, which include terms of sales, customer credit verification rules, overdue charges, statements, and dunning letters. For details, see: [Manage credit policy - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/manage-credit-policy-overview/). + The goods and services (defined as stock items in the system) that your company sells to your customers. For details on recording services, see: [Manage non-stock items - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/manage-non-stock-items-overview/). + Sales prices and discount policy, as described in [Manage sales prices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/) and [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). With these entities defined, users in your company can record and process documents in Visma Net quickly and accurately, with minimal manual actions. The system fills in the most of the needed information automatically. ## Topics + [About payment processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow/) + [About payment recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-payment-recording/) + [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/) + [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/) + [About release of payments and prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments/) + [About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/) + [About refund processing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-refund-processing/) + [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/) + [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/) + [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) + [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/) + [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/) + [Apply a payment document automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/apply-a-payment-document-automatically/) + [Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/) + [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/) + [Void a payment or prepayment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About payment recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-payment-recording page In Visma Net, you can create the following types of payment documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment recording In Visma Net, you can create the following types of payment documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. The information in this topic applies to documents of all these types. > [!NOTE] > In this topic, the term **payment** is used for payment documents of the three mentioned types if a type is not stated explicitly. In this topic, you will read about the windows you may use to create a payment, the structure of a payment document, and other details. ## Payment creation sources In Visma Net, a user can manually enter a customer ledger payment from the following windows: + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. You create a payment document here from scratch. For step-by-step instructions, see [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/) and [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/). + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, by using the **Enter payment/apply memo** action. The system opens the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window where a payment document with the **Payment** type is created automatically: The elements of the window are filled in with the customer information, the invoice amount is specified as the document amount, and the application record of the invoice is added. You simply release the payment the system has created, and the system releases the application record as well and closes both documents. For step-by-step instructions, see [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/). ## Document structure Regardless of how a payment document is created, it has the same groups of settings, which are described in this topic: The top part : Settings that are located in the top part of the window define the general information required for issuing the payment. When you create a new document, the system inserts the current business date as the date of application and the corresponding post period. When you select the ID of the customer account, the system uses the customer as a source to automatically fill in most settings needed for processing the payment. All settings filled in by the system can be manually overridden. **Financial details**: This group of settings, located on the **Financial details** tab, defines the general ledger accounts where the payment transactions are recorded after a user releases the payment. The system fills in the values for these settings automatically when you select a customer account, but they can be manually overridden. When you create a new document, the system also inserts the current business date as the payment date and the corresponding post period. Application details : Each outstanding document that you want to pay with the payment is specified in a separate line of the table on the **Applications** tab. The payment document can be applied to multiple outstanding documents. For each line, you specify the amount to be paid in the **Amount paid** column. For details, see [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/). Balance details : Read-only elements in the top part of the window display how the amount of the payment document has been distributed and currently available balance (the amount that is not applied). The system updates the values of these elements when you modify application details. When you save the document for the first time, the system generates a unique reference number for the payment document in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to corresponding payment document on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## Registration of bank charges If bank charges for customer payments are configured in your system, you can specify the amounts of these charges on each payment document that is processed by the bank on the **Finance charges** tab. The amount of finance charges is displayed in the top part in the following fields: Finance charges : The total of finance charges included in the payment amount. That is, the entry type used to record the charge has the **Deduct from payment** check box cleared in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. Deducted charges : The total of finance charges deducted from the payment amount. That is, the entry type used to record the charge has the **Deduct from payment** check box selected in the [Entry types (CA203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/entry-types-ca203000/) window. For details, see [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/). ## Attachment of the original document For user reference, you can attach to each entered payment a scanned image of the original customer document or an electronic version of the customer document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About automatic payment application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application page Manually applying payment documents to invoices may require a significant amount of time if your company sells a lot in a financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About automatic payment application Manually applying payment documents to invoices may require a significant amount of time if your company sells a lot in a financial period. To ease this process, Visma Net provides the functionality to automate the application of payment documents. In this topic, you will read about the auto-application options offered by the system, as well as their configuration and implementation details. ## Auto-application use cases You can use automatic application of a payment document in the following cases: + You work with a customer who purchases very frequently; therefore, there are a lot of invoices and payments involved. For this customer, you can turn on automatic application of new payments to outstanding documents associated with the customer account. + You want to apply all open payment documents recorded in the system to outstanding documents at some particular time, such as before preparing customer statements. You use the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window for this purpose. + It is common in your company to receive payments in advance and you want to apply open payment documents when you record the related invoice. For details on applying payments when recording invoices, see [About invoice recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-recording/). ## Auto-application for a customer account Suppose that your company has customers who purchase frequently and you want to save time on the application of their payment documents with the **Payment** type to outstanding documents. For such customers, you select the **Apply payments automatically** check box on the **Financial settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. When you release a new payment (with the **Balanced** status) of one of these customers in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, the system automatically applies the payment to any outstanding documents of this customer. > [!NOTE] > For auto-application to occur, when you release the payment, it must not have any outstanding documents specified on the **Documents to apply** tab. The system forms the list of outstanding documents and distributes the payment amount as follows: > [!NOTE] > The system sorts outstanding documents in descending order by their due date and then their reference number. 1. If the customer account has open documents of the **Credit note** type, the system adds them at the top of the list. The balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents. 1. If the **Apply payments to overdue charges first** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and the customer account has open documents of the **Overdue charge** type, the system distributes the available payment balance among these documents. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system searches for outstanding documents of other types. 1. If the customer account has outstanding documents, the system applies the available payment balance to the first document in the list. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system applies the rest of the balance to the next document in the list and continues this process until the available payment balance is fully applied. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system searches among all outstanding documents associated with the customer account, regardless of the branch specified for the documents. The system creates application records for each paid outstanding document and releases the application records simultaneously with the payment. ## Auto-application for multiple documents Before you prepare statements for your customers, we recommend that you apply open payment documents from customers to any corresponding invoices and calculate any overdue charges, to avoid incorrect calculation of aged balances. For a statement cycle, if the **Require payment application before statement** check box is selected in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window, the system will issue a warning if you try to process statements while there are open payments of customers involved in the statement cycle. > [!NOTE] > You can review the list of open documents of the customers by using Visma Net reports, as described in [About payment processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow/). If there are open payment documents and credit notes, you can go through these documents one by one and apply them to the outstanding documents manually, as described in [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/), or you can use the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window. In this window, you select a statement cycle or multiple statement cycles to specify the group of customers for which the system will run the auto-application process. When you run the process (by clicking **Process** or **Process a ll** in the window toolbar), the system does the following for each customer that is assigned to the selected statement cycles: 1. Searches for all open payments and prepayments, and sorts these documents in ascending order by the document date, document type, and reference number. If you have selected the **Apply credit notes** check box in the window, the system includes open credit notes in the list of payment documents. 1. Searches for all open debit notes, invoices, and overdue charges, and sorts these documents in ascending order by due date. If the **Apply payments to overdue charges first** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system moves any overdue charges to the top of the list. 1. Applies any found credit notes (if included) and payment documents to the outstanding documents one by one by creating the corresponding application records, starting with the first credit note or payment document and the first outstanding document. 1. If you have selected the **Release batch when finished** check box in the window, releases application records and closes documents whose balance becomes 0. If you have not selected this check box, you need to release application records manually for each payment document in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window or by using the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) mass processing window. For details, see [About release of payments and prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments/). > [!NOTE] > If the **Automatically post on release** option is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system also posts the released batches. After the process is complete, for each payment document, you can view the list of applications that have been saved but not yet released on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. You can track the history of released payment applications by using the **Application history** tab of the window. For step-by-step instructions, see [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/). ## Auto-application to documents of child customer accounts If the **Parent-Child Customer Relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and parent-child relations between customer accounts are configured, you can include the open documents of child accounts in the process of automatic payment application. In the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window, in the **Include child documents** field, you can select the types of open documents of child accounts that should be included in the process of payment application. The system will process first the open documents of the child accounts and then the open documents of the parent account. For details, see [Manage parent-child relationships - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/manage-parent-child-relationships-overview/). ## Exclusion from the automatic application of payment documents The system excludes payments and prepayments from the list of payment documents that can be applied to outstanding documents if they meet at least one of the following criteria: + The open payment document is linked to a sales order. That is, the payment document has a reservation record or multiple reservation records on the **Orders to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For details, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). + The open payment document was put on hold. That is, a user selected the **Hold** check box for the payment document with the **Open** status in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, and the system changed the document status from **Open** to **Reserved**. > [!NOTE] > To release the payment from hold, clear the **Hold** check box. Thus, the system ignores these payment documents when you record an invoice and want to perform an application, as well as when you initiate the auto-application process in the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) mass processing window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About release of payments and prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments page This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About release of payments and prepayments This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. ## Introduction ## In this topic This topic describes: + The windows you may use to release a payment or prepayment. + What happens in the system after release. + The details of the general ledger batch generated after release. ## When and where to release a payment and prepayment The following table displays when and where (pre)payments can be released. |When a payment or prepayment has the status|Then it can be released in|For instructions on how to release, see| |---|---|---| |**Balanced**|[Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)|[Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/)| |[Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/)|[Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/)|| ## System processes after releasing payments and prepayments The following tables give an overview of what happens in the system after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Payments ||Payment|||| |---|---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied|voided| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**|#### Closed **Note**: the status of the payment changes to **Voided**.| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|increased **Note**: if paid document's status was **Closed**, the status changes to **Open**.| |Customer's balance is|decreased with payment amount|+ decreased with paid amount + decreased with available payment balance|decreased with paid amount|increased with voided amount| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes|yes, any reversed application records are released| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes|yes| ### Prepayments ||Prepayment||| |---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.| |Customer's balance is|not applicable|decreased with paid amount|decreased with paid amount| |Customer's prepayment balance is|increased with prepayment amount|increased with available prepayment amount|not applicable| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes| ## General ledger batch after release of payment and prepayment The following sections give information about the general ledger batch created after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Involved accounts When a payment or prepayment is released, the system generates a general ledger batch to update the involved asset accounts with the (pre)payment transactions. Usually, this involves the following accounts retrieved from other fields in the system: |Account type|Specified in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window's field for|Corresponding field in [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, General ledger accounts tab, per document type| |---|---|---| |Asset|the **Customer ledger account** on the **Financial details** tab.|Payment: #### Customer ledger account| |Prepayment: 1. **Prepayment account** (if set) 1. **Customer ledger account**||| |Cash|the **Cash account** in the top part.|not applicable| ### Recorded transactions The transactions recorded in the general ledger batch differ depending on the below described specifications. #### Payments and prepayments with no designated prepayment account After the release of a payment or a prepayment with no designated prepayment account, regardless of whether the payment or prepayment is without applications, partially or fully applied, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|(Pre)payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|(Pre)payment amount| #### Prepayments with designated prepayment account For a prepayment with a designated prepayment account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record payments to, the recorded transactions differ depending on whether the prepayment is without applications, partially applied or fully applied. ##### Prepayment without applications After the release of a prepayment without applications, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Prepayment amount| ##### Partially applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Paid amount (prepayment amount - applied amount)| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Applied amount| ##### Fully applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Prepayment amount| ### Batch details and additional transactions The following sections explain where to view the batch details and where to find more information on additional transactions. #### View batch details You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. #### Bank charge and application record transactions The following additional transactions may be generated and included in the batch: |Transaction type|For details, see| |---|---| |Bank charge|[Finance charge transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/finance-charge-transactions/)| |Application record|[About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/)|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About release of application records /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records page In most cases, when you release applications records, the system does not generate any transactions that need to be posted to the general ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About release of application records In most cases, when you release applications records, the system does not generate any transactions that need to be posted to the general ledger. The system generates additional transactions when any of the following need to be recorded: + The applied cash discount + The written-off balance + The realised gain or loss (RGOL) incurred if payments and outstanding documents are in a foreign currency + The amount transferred between different customer ledger accounts that are involved in an application. This topic describes the windows you may use to release application records of a payment document and the details of releasing application records, as well as the details of the generation of the general ledger batch. ## Release payment applications In Visma Net, you can add application records to a payment document when you record the payment document and after you have released it. In both cases, you can use either of the following windows when you need to release an application record: + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/): You release an application record for an open payment by clicking the **Release** button on the window toolbar. + [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/): You use this mass-processing window to release the application records for a particular open payment or multiple open payments. Each time you release an application record for a payment document, the system does the following: + For the payment document, updates the **Application date** and **Application period** fields in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window with the date when the application record is released. + Moves the application record from the **Documents to apply** tab to the **Application history** tab. + Generates any application transactions. + Decreases the available payment balance for the applied amount. If the available payment balance becomes 0, the system changes the payment status to **Closed**. When you add application records to a payment document with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status and then release the payment document, the system simultaneously releases its application records. If the application records require some transactions to be recorded, the system adds these transactions to a general ledger batch with the payment transactions. You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window or by clicking the link in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab of this window. > [!NOTE] > The system displays the batch number in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab even if there were no application transactions. In this case, the batch will contain only payment transactions. When you add application records to a released payment document (with the **Open** status), you release only application records. If the application records require some transactions to be recorded, the system generates an additional general ledger batch with the application transactions. You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. ## Release an application with a cash discount When you add an invoice for which a cash discount is valid to the **Documents to apply** tab, the system automatically fills in the **Cash discount taken** column for the invoice with the cash discount amount defined by the payment terms associated with the invoice. You can decrease the cash discount amount, if needed. When you then release a payment with an application record that contains an applied cash discount, the system generates a batch of the following transactions. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount + Cash discount amount| |Cash discount account|Cash discount amount|0.0| ## Release an application with a written-off balance You write off some balance along with the application by specifying the amount and the reason code in the **Balance write-off** and **Write-off reason code** columns, respectively. When you release a payment with an application record that contains a written-off amount, the system generates a batch of the following transactions. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount + Write-off amount| |Bad debts|Write-off amount|0.0| ## Release an application with a RGOL Suppose that you apply a payment in a foreign currency to an outstanding document in the same foreign currency and the exchange rate on the invoice date is less than the exchange rate on the payment date. When you release the payment with its application record, the system generates a batch of the following transactions in the foreign currency. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account (foreign currency)|Payment amount (in the foreign currency)|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount (in the foreign currency)| |Realised gain / loss account|0.0|0.0| If you view the batch in the base currency by clicking the **View base** button in the top part of the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, the system displays the same transaction in the base currency. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account (foreign currency)|Payment amount (in the base currency)|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|Payment amount - RGOL amount (in the base currency)| |Realised gain / loss account|0.0|RGOL amount (in the base currency)| ## Release an application with different customer ledger accounts Suppose that you recorded a payment document to some customer ledger account and did not specify any application records. When you release this payment, the system generates the batch with the payment transactions as follows. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account of the payment|0.0|Payment amount| You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Then you apply this open payment to an outstanding document that was recorded to another customer ledger account. When you release the application record, the system generates a batch of the following transactions. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account of the payment|Payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account of the outstanding document|0.0|Payment amount| You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch number** column on the **Application history** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Pay a specific outstanding document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document section You can enter a customer payment received for a specific outstanding document by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window as a starting point. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pay a specific outstanding document You can enter a customer payment received for a specific outstanding document by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window as a starting point. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). 1. Go to the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select the type of the outstanding document: **Invoice**, **Credit note**, **Debit note**, **Credit write-off**, or **Overdue charge**. 1. Select the document by the reference number, or navigate to it. 1. Check the status of the document. You can enter a payment for an outstanding document only if it has the **Open** status. 1. In the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar, select **Enter payment/apply note**. This action causes the system to navigate to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The system automatically fills in most of the fields in the Selection area; check this information. Also, the payment is automatically applied to the outstanding document; check the information in the **Documents to apply** tab. 1. Enter a reference to the customer payment in the **Payment ref.** field. Depending on the settings you have established, this field might be filled in automatically by the system. 1. Optional: Add a description of the payment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, check the amount of the customer payment. 1. To save the customer payment with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: Click **Release** in the window toolbar. When the payment document is released, it is assigned the **Closed** status because the amount of the document applied to the payment is equal to the payment amount.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Track customer prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/track-customer-prepayments page You can track customer prepayments in the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track customer prepayments You can track customer prepayments in the following windows: + [Customer summary (AR401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000/): Displays prepayment balances + [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/): Shows prepayments from individual customers + [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/): Displays all prepayments collected on the prepayment account To track customer prepayments, you use a special liability account, the **prepayment account**, to record prepayments from customers. > [!NOTE] > If you want to set a default prepayment account to be used for each new customer a user creates, in the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, specify the prepayment account and subaccount for each of the customer classes that might be used when a user creates a new customer. You can change the prepayment account and subaccount for a particular customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The system credits this account by default when a user enters a new prepayment from the customer. ## View prepayment balances 1. Go to the [Customer summary (AR401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Period** field, select the financial period, or leave the field blank to view all open prepayments. 1. In the **Customer ledger account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of customers with the prepayment balances calculated for the selected criteria. The **Total prepayments** field of the top part shows the total amount of customer prepayments calculated, based on the selected criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can adjust the list by changing the selection criteria. ## View prepayments by customer 1. Go to the [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer whose prepayments you want to view. 1. In the **Customer ledger account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of prepayments that match the selected criteria. The **Prepayments balance** field of the top part displays the total amount of customer prepayments calculated, based on the selected criteria. ## View all prepayments 1. Go to the [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/). 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, specify the report parameters that fit your information needs. > [!NOTE] > If you leave the **Branch** field blank, you get information on all branches. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Run report**. 1. Find the prepayment account in the report to view all prepayments that fit the specified criteria. Additionally, you can use filtering to display only specific documents in the report. For example: After you set the report parameters and before you run the report, you can add filter condition lines to the **Additional filtering conditions** table on the **Additional sort and filters** tab as follows: + To view only documents collected on the prepayment account with account ID 140000, use the settings shown in the table below. |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |Account.AccountCD|Equals|140000| + To view only prepayments, use the settings shown in the table below. |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |ARRegister.DocType|Equals|Prepayment|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Apply a payment document automatically /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/apply-a-payment-document-automatically page You can initiate the process of payment auto-application by using the Apply payments automatically (AR506000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply a payment document automatically You can initiate the process of payment auto-application by using the Apply payments automatically (AR506000) window. For more information: [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/). You can initiate the process of payment auto-application by using the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) window. Customer payments and prepayments can be applied automatically to one invoice or multiple invoices, as well as to debit notes and overdue charges. For details, see: [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/). ## Before you proceed Make sure that all needed customer ledger documents of the customer accounts for which you want to run the automatic application process have been released. You can review the list of customer ledger documents of customers by using Visma Net reports, as described in: [About payment processing flow](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow/). 1. Go to the [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) window. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date on which you want to perform the auto-application. By default, the current business date is displayed. The system records this date for each payment document or credit note (if any credit note was included in the automatic application process) in the **Application date** field on the top part of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The **Application period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected date; the application will be performed for this financial period. 1. Optional: To include credit notes in the automatic application process, select the **Apply credit notes** check box. If you do, the balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents. 1. Optional: To automatically release batches created as a result of the automatic application process, select the **Release batch when finished** check box. If this check box is cleared, the resulting batches receive the **Balanced** status and you will need to release the application records manually for each payment document in the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window or for multiple payment documents by using the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) mass processing window. 1. Do one of the following: + To initiate the automatic application process for the customer accounts that belong to all statement cycles listed in the table, click **Process all** in the window toolbar. + To initiate the automatic application process for the customer accounts that belong to particular cycles only, select the statement cycles you want to process by selecting the corresponding check boxes, and click **Process**. After the process is complete, for each payment document, you can view the list of applications that have been saved but not yet released on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The history of released payment applications can be tracked on the **Application history** tab of the window. For step-by-step instructions, see: [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Match incoming payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-incoming-payments page After the payments are processed in the AutoPay inbox (CA50400S) window, you need to match them automatically from the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match incoming payments After the payments are processed in the AutoPay inbox (CA50400S) window, you need to match them automatically from the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window. For more information: [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/), [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/). After the payments are processed in the [AutoPay inbox (CA50400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/autopay-inbox-ca50400s/) window, you need to match them automatically from the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Go to the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. If you have defined a default cash account for this window, you will see all the payments that have been imported from AutoPay. 1. If you do not use a default account or want to match payments from a different account, select the account in the **Cash account** field. The system displays all imported payments for that account in the table. 1. If you do not want to include matches with 0 relevance, select the **Display only relevant matches** check box. 1. Click **Match automatically**. The system now tries to match the imported incoming payments with the customer ledger invoices in the system. The matching is based on payment reference and/or invoice numbers. For payments that the system has matched automatically, you see that the **Ready to process** check box is selected. These are now ready for processing. ## What is next? If the payments were matched automatically: [Process matched incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/process-matched-incoming-payments/) Or, if the system could **not** automatically match payments, you need to review these transactions.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents section In the Process bank transactions (CA306000) and Process incoming payments (AR305000) windows, you can split a bank transaction or incoming payment line in the left table into different lines to process them against corresponding, multiple documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents In the Process bank transactions (CA306000) and Process incoming payments (AR305000) windows, you can split a bank transaction or incoming payment line in the left table into different lines to process them against corresponding, multiple documents. For more information: [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/), [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/). You can match a bank transaction or incoming payment against multiple, different documents, for example, documents from different workspaces. > [!NOTE] > You can activate automatic splitting of payments on bank statements and/or incoming payments import by selecting the **Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer** check box on the **Bank statements settings** and/or **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. You then only need to process them in the respective windows. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) or [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Select a cash account in the top part. 1. In the left pane table, select the line that you want to match. 1. In the **Create payment** tab (in the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window) or **Create document** tab (in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window), fill in the required information and select the first document to match. If an amount is remaining, the **Split** button will appear. 1. Click **Split** and a new line will appear below the original line in the left table, marked with an arrow. > [!NOTE] > The original line will be adjusted with a new amount and the **Ready to process** check box will be selected. The new line will have the unapplied amount in the **Receipt** or **Disbursement** field, depending on whether the unapplied amount is positive or negative. 1. Select the new line and perform the same procedure as in Step 4 to match it against a different document. > [!NOTE] > You can continue splitting as long as the line has an unapplied amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system selects the **Ready to process** check box in the left pane table. 1. You can now continue processing the lines.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a new payment or document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document section For bank transactions and incoming payments with no match, you can create a new document or payment to match manually. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new payment or document For bank transactions and incoming payments with no match, you can create a new document or payment to match manually. 1. Go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) or [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. 1. Select a cash account in the top part. 1. In the left pane table, select the line that you want to match. 1. In the **Create payment** tab (in the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window) or **Create document** tab (in the [[Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window), select the **Create** check box. > [!NOTE] > If the details of an imported bank transaction or incoming payment include an invoice number in the **Invoice no.** field, the system searches for an open invoice that has the same reference number after you have selected the **Create** check box. If an invoice is found, the system fills in fields on the tab automatically with the data from the invoice and applies the amount to the invoice, and the line is ready for processing. Note that the bank transaction or incoming payment amount may differ from the invoice total. 1. Optional: In [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/), you can attach a file to the new document or the transaction. Drag the file to the **Create payment** tab area or click **Attach file** and select **Add file...** on the tab to open the **Upload file dialog box**. 1. In the **Workspace** field, select the workspace where the document originated. 1. If you in Step 6 selected **Cash management**: 1. Specify the **Entry type ID**. > [!NOTE] > Make sure that all needed entry types are listed under the **Entry types** tab of the selected cash account in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window. 1. Optional: in the **VAT Zone** field, change or specify the **VAT Zone** that applies to the transaction. 1. Optional: in the **Tran. descr.** field, you can change the transaction description for the new document. 1. Add a row in the table and specify the required fields. 1. If you in Step 6 selected **Supplier ledger** or **Customer ledger**: 1. Select the **Customer/Supplier no.**, **Location** and **Payment method**. 1. Optional: in the **Tran. descr.** field, you can change the transaction description for the new document. 1. You can select documents to be added to the table via the **Select documents** button, load documents to the table via the **Load documents** button, or add a row in the table and specify the required fields. 1. Optional: you can change the cross rate by adding the **Cross rate** column to the table and edit it, if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000).](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system selects the **Ready to process** check box in the left pane table. 1. You can now continue processing the lines.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process matched incoming payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/process-matched-incoming-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process matched incoming payments 1. Go to the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window and select a **Cash account**. 1. When you have reviewed the transactions, click **Process**. The system now reconciles all matching transactions. After processing, in the first column, a ![Success](/media/visma-net-erp/Success.png) or ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) is displayed for each processed line to indicate if the processing was successful or not. 1. Optional: hover over the ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) icon on each line to read why the specific line could not be processed. Resolve the error and repeat Step 1 and 2. 1. Optional: go to the [Process bank transactions (CA306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/process-bank-transactions-ca306000/) window again and select the same **Cash account** as you did in Step 1. All matched transactions have now disappeared from the table, leaving only the ones that were not successfully processed and had no match. 1. Optional: click **Settings for matching** to match more of the remaining transactions. In the **Settings for matching** dialog box, you can **temporarily** change the settings for matching, for example date settings or the weight settings for the relevance calculation. Click **Process** again. > [!NOTE] > The settings you make in the **Settings for matching** dialog box are reset to default when you leave the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) window. > [!NOTE] > To set new, permanent settings for matching, go to the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window and click the **Incoming payments settings** tab. These settings are common for the matching of payments in the customer ledger and the supplier ledger.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Customer payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About payment processing flow /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-payment-processing-flow page In the Customer payments (AR302000) window, you can create the following types of customer ledger documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment processing flow In the Customer payments (AR302000) window, you can create the following types of customer ledger documents: Payment, Prepayment, and Customer refund. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). A document with the **Voided payment** type is generated by the system only, but you can further process it by using this window. The processing flow described below applies to documents of all these types. > [!NOTE] > Documents with the **Balance write-off** type can be only viewed on this window. For details on writing off credits, see [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). In this topic, we use the term **payment** to describe documents of the **Payment**, **Prepayment**, and **Customer refund** types, if a type is not stated explicitly. This topic focuses on the processing stages of a document and the statuses that indicates these stages. ## Process stages When you receive a payment from a customer, you create a corresponding document in the system. When you save the document for the first time, the system assigns a unique reference number to it for tracking purposes and a status that indicates the current state of the document within its processing flow. The main stages are the following: 1. **Recording**: In this stage, you create a payment or provide all the necessary information to the system. By default, the system assigns to the payment the **Balanced** status when you save it for the first time. This status indicates that the user has finished editing the payment and it is ready to be released, although you still can edit a payment with this status. Alternatively, if you select the **Hold** check box to indicate to the system that this payment is not ready to be released, the system changes the payment status to **On hold**. For details, see: [About payment recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-payment-recording/). 1. **Application**: In this stage, you specify the list of the outstanding documents to which the system should apply the payment. You can do this while you record the payment or after you have released the payment. You can fully or partially apply the payment amount to an outstanding document, or distribute the payment amount among multiple outstanding documents. The system creates application records, which include the paid amount, for each included outstanding document. The system does not change the payment status during this stage; it remains **Balanced**, **On hold** (if **Hold** is selected), or **Open** (if the payment has been released). For details, see: [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/). 1. **Releasing a payment**: You can release a payment only if it has the **Balanced** status. When you release the payment, the system checks the available payment balance and processes the payment accordingly. If the available payment balance is zero (that is, if the payment has been fully applied to an outstanding document), the system changes the statuses of both the payment and the paid document to **Closed**. If the available payment balance is not zero, the system changes the payment status to **Open**. This status indicates to users and to the system that the payment is ready to be applied to the outstanding documents of a customer. For details, see: [About release of payments and prepayments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments/). 1. **Releasing application records**: If you specify a list of outstanding documents for a payment with the **Open** status, you should release the application records after you have finished distributing the payment amount between the outstanding documents. You can fully or partially apply the payment amount to outstanding documents. When you release the applications, the system checks the available payment balance. Based on this data, the system processes the payment differently, in one of the following ways: + If the payment amount is fully applied to an outstanding document, the system does the following: releases application records; changes the statuses of the payment and the paid document to **Closed**; and decreases the balances of the paid document and the payment. The system may change the balance of the customer, if documents with different currencies are involved. + If the payment amount is partially applied, the system leaves the payment status as **Open**; it also decreases the balances of the paid document, the payment, and the customer. If some outstanding documents were fully paid with the applied amount, the system changes the status of the paid document to **Closed**. In addition to the actions you perform during the main stages, you may need to do the following: + Register finance charges that may accompany a payment. For details, see: [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/). + Correct a released payment by voiding it and recording the correct one. For step-by-step instructions, see: [Void a payment or prepayment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document/). + Reserve a payment with the **Open** status by selecting the **On hold** check box for the payment. + Allocate a payment for a sales order if the **Distribution** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For details, see: [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). ## Affecting a payment document flow You can use invoice-wide settings, located under **Data entry settings** on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, to change the processing flow of invoices. For details, see: [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/). In Visma Net, you can require users to perform additional steps during the recording of a payment by using settings located under **Data entry settings** on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. For details, see: [About changing the processing of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-changing-the-processing-of-customer-ledger-documents/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About release of payments and prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-release-of-payments-and-prepayments page This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About release of payments and prepayments This topic contains information that applies to releasing documents of the Payment and Prepayment type. ## Introduction ## In this topic This topic describes: + The windows you may use to release a payment or prepayment. + What happens in the system after release. + The details of the general ledger batch generated after release. ## When and where to release a payment and prepayment The following table displays when and where (pre)payments can be released. |When a payment or prepayment has the status|Then it can be released in|For instructions on how to release, see| |---|---|---| |**Balanced**|[Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)|[Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/)| |[Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/)|[Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/)|| ## System processes after releasing payments and prepayments The following tables give an overview of what happens in the system after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Payments ||Payment|||| |---|---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied|voided| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**|#### Closed **Note**: the status of the payment changes to **Voided**.| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|increased **Note**: if paid document's status was **Closed**, the status changes to **Open**.| |Customer's balance is|decreased with payment amount|+ decreased with paid amount + decreased with available payment balance|decreased with paid amount|increased with voided amount| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes|yes, any reversed application records are released| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes|yes| ### Prepayments ||Prepayment||| |---|---|---|---| |System change|without applications|partially applied|fully applied| |Status changes to|**Open**|**Open**|**Closed**| |Paid documents' balances are|not applicable|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.|decreased **Note**: if paid document's balance becomes 0, its status changes to **Closed**.| |Customer's balance is|not applicable|decreased with paid amount|decreased with paid amount| |Customer's prepayment balance is|increased with prepayment amount|increased with available prepayment amount|not applicable| |Application records are released|not applicable|yes|yes| |General ledger batch is created|yes|yes|yes| ## General ledger batch after release of payment and prepayment The following sections give information about the general ledger batch created after the release of a (pre)payment. ### Involved accounts When a payment or prepayment is released, the system generates a general ledger batch to update the involved asset accounts with the (pre)payment transactions. Usually, this involves the following accounts retrieved from other fields in the system: |Account type|Specified in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window's field for|Corresponding field in [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, General ledger accounts tab, per document type| |---|---|---| |Asset|the **Customer ledger account** on the **Financial details** tab.|Payment: #### Customer ledger account| |Prepayment: 1. **Prepayment account** (if set) 1. **Customer ledger account**||| |Cash|the **Cash account** in the top part.|not applicable| ### Recorded transactions The transactions recorded in the general ledger batch differ depending on the below described specifications. #### Payments and prepayments with no designated prepayment account After the release of a payment or a prepayment with no designated prepayment account, regardless of whether the payment or prepayment is without applications, partially or fully applied, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|(Pre)payment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account|0.0|(Pre)payment amount| #### Prepayments with designated prepayment account For a prepayment with a designated prepayment account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record payments to, the recorded transactions differ depending on whether the prepayment is without applications, partially applied or fully applied. ##### Prepayment without applications After the release of a prepayment without applications, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Prepayment amount| ##### Partially applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for prepayments|0.0|Paid amount (prepayment amount - applied amount)| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Applied amount| ##### Fully applied prepayment After the release of a partially fully applied prepayment, with a designated customer ledger account that differs from the customer ledger account used to record outstanding documents to, the following transactions will be recorded: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|Prepayment amount|0.0| |Customer ledger account for invoices|0.0|Prepayment amount| ### Batch details and additional transactions The following sections explain where to view the batch details and where to find more information on additional transactions. #### View batch details You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. #### Bank charge and application record transactions The following additional transactions may be generated and included in the batch: |Transaction type|For details, see| |---|---| |Bank charge|[Finance charge transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/finance-charge-transactions/)| |Application record|[About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/)|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About manual payment application /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application page After you have received a payment document from a customer and recorded it in the system, you then need to apply this payment document to the customer's outstanding documents to close the sale. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About manual payment application After you have received a payment document from a customer and recorded it in the system, you then need to apply this payment document to the customer's outstanding documents to close the sale. When you receive a payment from a customer, in Visma Net, you create a corresponding payment document of the **Payment** or **Prepayment** type by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Payment documents of this type can be applied to the following types of outstanding documents: **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Overdue charge**. In this topic you will read about how to apply a payment to a specific outstanding document or multiple outstanding documents. The topic describes how to perform additional operations, such as giving a cash discount, changing a cross rate, writing off a balance, and applying a payment to outstanding documents that belong to child customer accounts. ## Paying a specific outstanding document Usually a payment document that you receive from a customer references the outstanding document it should be applied to. In this case, you can use one of the following forms as a starting point to pay the document: + [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/): You select the outstanding document here and then click the **Enter payment/apply note** action. The system redirects you to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, where the system has filled on most of the settings of a new payment, which is almost ready for release. For step-by-step instructions, see [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/). + [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/): In this window, you record the payment you have received from the customer, specify the outstanding document in the table on the **Documents to apply** tab, and release the payment. For step-by-step instructions on recording a payment, see [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). In both cases, the system creates an application record (including the paid amount) for the outstanding document. When you release the payment, the system releases the application record simultaneously. You can track the history of payment applications on the **Application history** tab of the payment document. For step-by-step instructions, see [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/). ## Paying multiple outstanding documents You use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to pay multiple outstanding documents. In general, you perform the following steps: 1. You record a payment, which you may or may not release. For step-by-step instructions, see: [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). 1. You window the list of documents to be paid. You can window it manually or you can direct the system to window the list of outstanding documents of the customer to be paid with the payment. 1. You distribute the payment amount among the manually added outstanding documents or modify the paid amount filled in by the system, if needed, for each automatically added outstanding document. 1. If you have released the payment before forming the list of applications, you click **Release** in the window toolbar and the system releases the application records you have created. If you have not released the payment yet, you click **Release** and the system releases the payment and its application records. You can track the history of payment applications by using the **Application history** tab of the payment document. For step-by-step instructions, see: [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/). ## Forming the list of outstanding documents manually You form the list of outstanding documents by adding documents to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab one by one; you distribute the payment amount as you prefer. For step-by-step instructions, see: [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/). If there are open documents of the **Credit note** type, you can add them to the list only if the list will include some outstanding documents when you finish forming the list. The system uses balances of the added credit notes for application to an outstanding document. In other words, the system applies the sum of the payment and credit note's balances to the sum of the outstanding documents' balances. The system creates application records for each included outstanding document, with the amount applied specified in the **Amount paid** column. When you release the payment, the system releases the application record simultaneously. ## Forming the list of outstanding documents automatically For the system to form the list of outstanding documents, you click **Load documents** on the table toolbar and specify selection criteria in the **Load options** dialog box. The system loads to the table the list of the outstanding documents of the customer that meet your specified criteria, with documents sorted in descending order by the parameters you have specified. By default, the sorting order is by due date and reference number. The system forms the list as follows: 1. If the customer account has open documents of the **Credit note** type, the system adds them at the top of the list. The balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents. 1. If the **Apply payments to overdue charges first** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and the customer account has open documents of the **Overdue charge** type, the system distributes the available payment balance among these documents. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system searches for outstanding documents of other types. 1. If the customer account has outstanding documents, the system applies the available payment balance to the first document in the list. If the available payment balance, including the balances of any open credit notes, has not been fully applied, the system applies the rest of the balance to the next document in the list and continues this process until the available payment balance is fully applied. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system searches among all outstanding documents associated with the customer account, regardless of the branch specified for the documents. The system creates application records for each outstanding document that is included, with the amount applied specified in the **Amount paid** column. When you release the payment, the system releases the application record simultaneously. For step-by-step instructions, see [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). ## Distributing the payment amount When you add an outstanding document to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab, the system automatically fills the **Amount paid** column as follows: + If the balance of the outstanding document is less than the payment available balance, the system fills the **Amount paid** column with the document balance. + If the balance of the outstanding document is more than the payment available balance, the system fills the **Amount paid** column with the payment balance. + If the payment amount is not specified and therefore the available balance of the payment is 0, the system fills the **Amount paid** column with the document balance and warns you that the payment is out of balance. You can specify a payment amount that is equal to the value the system added to the **Amount paid** column. Alternatively, you can specify a smaller amount and adjust the value in the **Amount paid** column accordingly. If you specify a larger amount, you can add other outstanding documents to fully apply the payment. In the top part of the window, you can see the balance of the payment that is available for further application in the **Available balance** field and the balance that has been applied in the **Applied to documents** field. ## Correcting the list of applications When you window the list of outstanding documents on the **Documents to apply** tab, the system creates an application record for each line. You can add new documents and remove or modify already-added documents until you release the application records by clicking **Release** in the window toolbar. When you release the application records, the system moves these records to the **Application history** tab, where you can view (but not modify) the list of the applied documents. If you have mistakenly applied a customer payment or prepayment to the wrong document, you can correct an application record. If the application record has not yet been released, you simply remove the incorrect line from the table on the **Documents to apply** tab. If the application record has been released, you reverse the released application record on the **Application history** tab by clicking the mistaken record and then clicking **Reverse application** in the table toolbar. When you click the button, the system does the following: + Adds the reversed application record to the **Documents to apply** tab with the negative application amount in the **Amount paid** column + Changes the status of the payment and of the applied document to **Open** + Changes the available balance and the application amount in accordance with the amount of the application that was reversed You then release the reversed application record, and the system moves it to the **Application history** tab. If you have mistakenly applied a customer refund to the wrong document and released the refund with its applications, you can correct the application record similarly. The only difference is that a customer refund cannot have an available balance after it was released. Thus, you must fully apply the available refund balance right after you have reversed the incorrect application record. You then release both the reversed application records and the new ones. For step-by-step instructions, see [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/). ## Recording a cash discount You can give a customer a discount for early payment when you apply the payment amount to an outstanding document. If you have configured payment terms for the customer that define the cash discount period and the discount amount, the system automatically calculates whether to add a cash discount. If the cash discount period of the document has not ended, the system fills in the **Cash discount taken** column for the document with the discount amount after you have added the document to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab. You can change the discount amount if needed. If the payment terms of the customer do not define any cash discount, you can fill in the **Cash discount taken** column for the document with the discount amount after you have added the document, and correct the applied amount in the **Amount paid** column. For details on configuring payment terms with a cash discount, see: [About payment terms](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/payment-terms/about-payment-terms/). ## Writing off a balance If write-offs are enabled and configured in the system, as described in [About write-off setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/about-write-off-setup/), you can write off an amount along with the application. For each document that you add for the application, you can specify the amount to write off in the **Balance write-off** column and the reason code in the **Write-off reason code** column. The total amount of write-offs is displayed in the **Write-off amount** field in the top part. > [!NOTE] > You can use only reason codes that are defined for balance write-offs or reason codes with the **Balance write-off** option selected in the **Usage** field on the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. When you release such applications, the system does not create a document of the **Balance write-off** type. The system stores write-off details in the document and generates a separate transaction to post to general ledger accounts. ## Changing the cross rate If the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and multiple currencies and their exchange rates are configured in the system, you can change the cross rate along with the application, if needed. For instance, suppose you had issued an invoice in a foreign currency, and then you received a payment in this foreign currency. Your company does not have a bank account in the foreign currency, and the bank used some currency rate to translate the payment amount to the currency of your bank account. In this case, you record the payment to a cash account that represents your bank account and apply it to the invoice. The rate used by the bank may differ from the rate you used to record the invoice. To make the payment amount and the invoice amount equal, you can adjust the rate in the **Cross rate** column for the applied invoice. When you release the payment and its applications, the balance of the realised gain or loss (RGOL) account is updated by the amount resulting from the difference in the exchange rates used to record the invoice and the payment. If your company has a bank account in the foreign currency (so there is a cash account in the system that represents this bank account), you record the payment in a foreign currency to this cash account. When you release the payment and its applications, the balance of the RGOL account is updated by the amount resulting from the difference in the exchange rate on the invoice date and the payment application date. ## Applying a payment to documents of child customer accounts If the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and parent-child relations between customer accounts are configured, you can add to the list of outstanding documents those that belong to child customer accounts. For details, see: [Manage parent-child relationships - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-parent-child-relationship/manage-parent-child-relationships-overview/). ## Reserving a payment for future application You can reserve an open payment for future application. To mark an open payment as reserved, you select the **Hold** check box for the payment document with the **Open** status in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)window. The system changes the document status from **Open** to **Reserved**. Reserved payments cannot be applied to outstanding documents and are excluded from the auto-application process. To release the payment from hold, clear the **Hold** check box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About refund processing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-refund-processing page In Visma Net, payment documents that can be released manually have the following document types on the Customer payments (AR302000) window: Payment, Prepayment, Customer refund, Credit note, Balance write-off, and Voided payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About refund processing In Visma Net, payment documents that can be released manually have the following document types on the Customer payments (AR302000) window: Payment, Prepayment, Customer refund, Credit note, Balance write-off, and Voided payment. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). The information in this topic applies to documents of the **Customer refund** type. This topic describes the windows you may use to release a customer refund and outlines the details of releasing refunds and their application records, as well as the details of the generation of the general ledger batch. ## Release a customer refund When you are recording a customer refund, you must fully apply its available balance to one open payment, prepayment, or credit note (or multiple documents of these types) before you release the refund. For step-by-step instructions, see [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/). You distribute the entire available refund balance among the open payment documents you add to the table on the **Documents to apply** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. The system creates application records for each document listed on the tab and includes the applied amount. Thus, the available refund balance becomes zero. When you release a customer refund, the system does the following: + Changes the refund status to **Closed**. + Releases the application records. + Decreases the balances of the paid documents. If the balance of a paid document becomes zero, the system changes its status to **Closed**. + Increases the customer's balance by the refund amount, if the refund is applied to a document of the **Payment** or **Credit note** type. + Decreases the customer's prepayment balance by the refund amount, if the refund is applied to a payment document of the **Prepayment** type. + Generates a general ledger batch to update the involved asset accounts. The following refund transactions are recorded to the general ledger when the refund and its applications are released. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Cash account|0.0|Amount| |Customer ledger account|Amount|0.0| You can view the batch details by clicking the link in the **Batch no.** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. When you release a refund, the general ledger batch may contain, in addition to the refund transactions, some transactions generated by its application records. For details, see [About release of application records](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-release-of-application-records/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About customer payment methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-customer-payment-methods page In Visma Net, you can use payment methods configured for use in Customer ledger with any customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About customer payment methods In Visma Net, you can use payment methods configured for use in Customer ledger with any customer account. In Visma Net, you can use payment methods configured for use in Customer ledger with any customer account. You can configure multiple payment methods that are available for all customers by default. You can use a payment method that is available by default as a template to create a **customer payment method**, which is an instance of a payment method that has been tailored for use with a specific customer account. In this topic, you will read about how to create a payment method that is available by default, how to set up a customer payment method, and how to set up a particular payment method to be used by default with a customer account. ## Payment methods for customers A payment method is available by default if it has been configured as follows in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window: + The payment method is active or the **Active** check box is selected. + The payment method is based on the **Cash** means of payment. + The payment method is marked for use in Customer ledger or the **Use in customers** check box is selected. + The payment method does not require an account number or the **Require account number** check box is cleared on the **Settings for customer ledger** tab. When you create a new customer account, the system automatically adds these default payment methods to the account. This is done because these payment methods can be used without any customer-specific details being specified. That is, for these payment methods, you generally do not need to use the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window to specify a customer-specific instance of the payment method. You can start recording customer documents by using the available payment methods. ## Customer payment method setup You set up customer payment methods by using the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window. You may need to create a customer payment method in the following cases: + If you want to modify the settings of available by default payment method. For example, you might decide to record a cash payment from a particular customer on another cash account. You can see all payment methods used by a customer on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. This tab displays both payment methods that are available by default (for those payment methods, the **Override** check box is cleared) and customer payment methods (for those methods, the **Override** check box is selected). All active payment methods (those listed on this tab) can be used for payments by this customer. Inactive methods do not appear on the list of the customer's payment methods. Also, on the **Payment methods** tab, you can create a new customer payment method by clicking **Add payment method**, and view or edit the details of an existing customer payment method by selecting the method and clicking **View payment method**. ## Default customer payment method You can specify the default payment method for the particular customer by selecting the **Is default** check box for the selected payment method on the **Payment methods** tab in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. You can specify a default payment method for a customer class. Then when you create a new customer account and associate it with this customer class, the system does one of the following: + If the payment method is generic (it is already present in the customer account), the system marks it as the default one. + If this payment method requires any specific information, you have to provide this information to be able to save the new customer account. After the new customer account is successfully added, the payment method is listed on the **Payment methods** tab in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window for this customer and marked as the default method. When you enter customer payments in the Customer ledger workspace, you should first select the customer. Once you do, certain elements on the window are filled in with the settings associated with the selected customer account and its default location and default payment method. The default payment method provides the identifier of the cash account. If you select a payment method other than the default one, the identifier of the cash account will change to the one associated with the selected payment method. The default payment method and the cash account associated with it can be overridden on customer payments. ## On-the-fly creation of a customer payment method If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, you can create a new customer payment method on the fly as you enter a sales order for the customer. On-the-fly creation mostly is used for customer payment methods that represents the credit or debit card. ## Customer payment method deletion You can delete customer payment methods that are no longer needed by using the **Delete** button in the toolbar of the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window. > [!NOTE] > A customer payment method that is associated with a processing centre can be deleted if all the authorised transactions made with this payment method are captured

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add customer payment methods /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/add-customer-payment-methods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add customer payment methods 1. Go to the [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) window. 1. In the **Customer** field click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a customer. 1. In the **Payment method** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the associated payment method to the customer.. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a cash account (optional). 1. On the **Payment method details** tab, double-click the **Value** field in order to enter the account number. Depending on your selection in step 2, you might also need to enter additional information about the payment method. The value in the **Description** column comes from the **Payment method** settings in the Cash management workspace. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). By default, the **Active** check box is selected to indicate that the payment method is active. Deselect if you do not want this payment method to be active. ## What is next? For information on how to use a CID configuration, see [Select a CID for payment methods](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/select-a-cid-for-payment-methods/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Enter a payment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document section To enter a document that corresponds to a payment received from a customer, you use the Payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a payment document To enter a document that corresponds to a payment received from a customer, you use the Payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). To enter a document that corresponds to a payment received from a customer, you use the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. You can then apply the payment to invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges, as described in [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). 1. Go to the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Payment** or **Prepayment**. 1. Check the date of the document in the **Application date** field. This field is filled in automatically based on the current date, but you can select another date. When you release the payment, the system uses the date specified here to fill in the **Payment date** field on the **Financial details** tab. After the payment is released, you use the **Application date** field to specify the date of the application records release. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. The system uses the customer as a source to automatically fill in window elements with default values for the location, payment method, cash account and other customer-related settings. 1. In the **Location** field, check the customer location and change it if needed. 1. In the **Payment method** field, check the method of payment. You can change it if multiple payment methods can be accepted from the customer. Payment methods are specified on the **Payment methods** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, check the cash account. You may change it to another cash account that is allowed for the selected payment method; if you want to use a cash account allowed for another payment method, you need to change the payment method first. 1. Make sure the document currency matches the currency on the customer payment, and select another currency if necessary. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. Check the **Payment ref.** field: The system automatically inserts a reference number if for the selected customer payment method, the **Suggest next number** check box is selected on the **Allowed cash accounts** tab of the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. Otherwise, enter the payment reference number. 1. Optional: Add a brief description of the payment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, enter the total amount paid according to the customer payment. 1. Optional: Attach a scanned image of the original customer document to this payment. To do this, click **Files** on the window title bar. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the charges or fees applied by the bank for processing. For each charge, do the following: 1. Click **Add row** to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type that designates the bank charge applied to this payment. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount applied to this document. For details on configuring the processing of charges, see: [About the registration of finance charges](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-registration-of-finance-charges/). 1. Do one of the following to prepare the payment document for further processing in accordance with your company's policies: + To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the document with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create a payment for a sales invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-payment-for-a-sales-invoice section Follow the steps below to create a payment for a sales invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a payment for a sales invoice Follow the steps below to create a payment for a sales invoice. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the top part, select **Payment** in the **Type** field. 1. In the **Customer** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer. **Result**: all fields marked with \* are filled in automatically. 1. Fill in the **Payment ref.** field if it is required and not filled in by the system. 1. Optional: select **Hold** if you want to save this payment as a draft. Remember that you have to deselect it before you release the payment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, enter the paid amount. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a document. 1. The document type **Invoice** is already selected. 1. Select the **Reference no.** for the invoice. **Result**: Visma Net retrieves all the information related to this invoice. 1. Check that the paid amount and the invoiced amount (under **Amount paid** ) are identical. If they are not the same, the **Amount paid** field is highlighted. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure the check box **Hold** is not selected and click **Release**. **Result**:, and the payment is recorded in your company's ledgers. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 View invoices paid with a specific payment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document page To check which invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges a customer payment or prepayment is applied to, you open the payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window and check the application history. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoices paid with a specific payment document To check which invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges a customer payment or prepayment is applied to, you open the payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window and check the application history. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). > [!NOTE] > You can see which payment documents were applied to a particular invoice on the **Applications** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select the type of the payment. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the payment whose applications you want to view. 1. On the **Application history** tab, check the application log. > [!NOTE] > This tab shows the history of applications rather than the list of documents paid by this payment. When an invoice is applied, the system adds a row with the invoice data, and the applied amount is listed in the **Amount paid** column. When an invoice application is reversed, the system adds a row with the invoice data and shows the reversed paid amount (that is, the amount with the negative sign) in the **Amount paid** column. 1. Optional: use filtering to narrow the documents listed on the **Application history** tab. For example: to track the application history of the invoice with the **000460** reference number, do the following:

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release a payment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document page Follow the steps below to release a particular payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release a payment document Follow the steps below to release a particular payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). ## Before you start This topic describes how to release a particular document in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. For instructions on how to release multiple payment documents at a time, see: [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/release-customer-documents/). The following document types can be released manually in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window: + **Payment**, + **Credit note**, + **Prepayment**, + **Customer refund**, + **Balance write-off** 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select one of the following options: + **Payment**, + **Credit note**, + **Prepayment**, + **Customer refund**, + **Balance write-off** 1. Bring up the particular payment document you want to release by taking one of the following actions: + To navigate among documents, click the appropriate navigation buttons until you see the document. + Click the selector button in the **Ref. no.** field, and do the following: 1. If you see the needed document in the table, proceed to step 3. 1. Select the column you want to search by clicking its header. 1. Type the search string in the **Search** field in the lower-left corner, and press Enter. The system highlights items in the column that contain the text. 1. Double-click the needed document to display its details on the window. 1. Check the status of the document, and do one of the following: + If the status is **On hold**, clear the **Hold** check box to change the status to **Balanced**. + If the status is **Balanced**, proceed to the next step. 1. Click **Release**. The released document is assigned the **Open** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Match customer documents in Customer ledger /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-customer-documents-in-customer-ledger section You can match invoices and credit notes to close the documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match customer documents in Customer ledger You can match invoices and credit notes to close the documents. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. Under **Type**, select **Credit note**. 1. Select the **Reference no.** of the credit note. 1. Add a new row and select the original invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) and **Release**. Match a credit note with an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-a-credit-note-with-an-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match a credit note with an invoice 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Credit note**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the credit note. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new invoice line. 1. The document type **Invoice** is already selected. 1. Select the **Reference no.** for the invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure **Hold** is not selected, and click **Release** to match the credit note with the invoice. > [!NOTE] > Once the invoice and the credit note have been matched and released, the status changes to **Closed** and the system displays ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Correct an application record /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record section If you have mistakenly applied a customer payment, prepayment, or refund to the wrong document, you can correct the application record. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct an application record If you have mistakenly applied a customer payment, prepayment, or refund to the wrong document, you can correct the application record. > [!NOTE] > After you have corrected the application record, you can apply the payment document to other documents. For more information, see: [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) or [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). You correct an application record differently depending on whether the application record has been released or not. In either case, you use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. ## Remove an application record that has not been released 1. Got to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the document type. 1. Select the document whose application record you want to correct. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, leave only the documents you want to apply by doing the following: 1. Select the document you don't want to apply. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Delete row**. 1. Repeat the previous two steps for each document you don't want to apply. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Reverse a released application record 1. Got to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the type of the payment. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the number of the document whose application record you want to correct. 1. On the **Application history** tab, select the application you want to reverse. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Reverse application**. 1. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application you want to reverse. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you have reversed application records for a customer refund, you must fully apply its available balance before you complete the next step. For step-by-step instruction, see: [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) or [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/). 1. Click **Release** to release the reversed application records.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Form a list of applications automatically /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically section You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Form a list of applications automatically You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). If there are open credit notes for the customer, they also can be used in payment application. In the top part of the window, the **Available balance** field holds the balance of the payment that is available for further application, and the **Applied to documents** field contains the balance that has been applied. For details on the application of a payment document, see: [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/); for instructions about how to enter a payment into the system, see: [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). 1. Go to the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Payment** or **Prepayment**, depending on the document you want to apply. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the reference number of the payment or prepayment. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, manually compose the list of outstanding documents to be paid with the payment document, by doing the following for each line (outstanding document): 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add row** to append a row to the table. 1. In the **Doc. type** column, select the type of the outstanding document. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the reference number of the outstanding document. The system fills in appropriate values in the other columns automatically. 1. Optional: In the **Amount paid** column, modify the applied amount, if needed. 1. Optional: If you want to give the customer a cash discount, in the **Cash discount taken** column, enter or modify the amount of the cash discount. 1. Optional: If you want to write off some balance, in the **Balance write-off** column, enter the amount you want to write off and in the **Write-off reason code** select the reason code, which defines an account where the system records the written-off amount. 1. Optional: If the payment document and the outstanding document are in a foreign currency, you may need to adjust the cross rate in the **Cross rate** column. You can adjust the list by adding and removing documents and by typing the application amounts for each document. The application amount may not exceed the payment amount. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, you can proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To save the document with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the payment document and its applications, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click **Release**. When the payment is released, its status changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document changes to **Open**. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **Open** status, proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **Open** status and the list of applications you have formed, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the applications, click **Release**. When the application records are released, the status of the payment changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document remains **Open**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Form a list of applications manually /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually section You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Form a list of applications manually You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). You can apply a customer payment or prepayment to any number of invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. If there are open credit notes for the customer, they also can be used in payment application. In the top part of the window, the **Available balance** field holds the balance of the payment that is available for further application, and the **Applied to documents** field contains the balance that has been applied. For details on the application of a payment document, see [About manual payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/about-manual-payment-application/); for instructions about how to enter a payment into the system, see: [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/). 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field in the top part, select **Payment** or **Prepayment**, depending on the document you want to apply. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the reference number of the payment or prepayment. 1. On the table toolbar of the **Documents to apply** tab, click **Load documents** to open the **Load options dialog box**. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the customer documents by specifying any of the following criteria: + The date range of the documents to be loaded, by using the **From date** and **To date** fields + The range of reference numbers for documents to be loaded, by using the **Start ref. no** and **End ref. no** fields + The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database that comply with any other criteria you have specified You can also specify the way the system should order the documents on the list, by selecting an option in the **Order by** section. By default, the **Due date, Reference no.** option button is selected. 1. Click **Load**. On the **Documents to apply** tab, the system displays the list of the open invoices and notes that match any criteria specified in the dialog box and that have a total applied amount equal to the payment amount. If there are open credit notes, they are displayed at the top of the list. If you have specified no criteria, the system loads the documents according to the order option selected by default until the application total is equal to the payment total. > [!NOTE] > You can manually adjust the list by adding and removing documents and by typing the application amounts for each document. The application amount may not exceed the payment amount. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **On hold** or **Balanced** status, you can proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To save the document with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the payment document and its applications, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and click **Release**. > [!NOTE] > When you the payment document, the status of the payment changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document changes to **Open**. 1. If the payment document for which you have formed the list of the outstanding documents has the **Open** status, you can proceed as follows: + To save the document with the **Open** status and the list of applications you have formed, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). + To release the applications, click **Release**. When the application records are released, the status of the payment changes to **Closed** if the application amount is equal to the payment amount. If the application amount is less than the payment amount, the status of the released payment document remains **Open**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Void a payment or prepayment document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document section Incoming payments can be voided if errors were made or the payments are otherwise invalid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a payment or prepayment document Incoming payments can be voided if errors were made or the payments are otherwise invalid. Incoming payments can be voided if errors were made or the payments are otherwise invalid. Voiding a payment reverses the original payment transactions. You can use the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to void a customer payment or prepayment that has been applied to invoices. 1. Go to the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the payment type. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the document you want to void. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system does the following: + Reverses the payment application in full. + Changes the status of the payment document to **Voided**. + Creates a document with the **Voided payment** type with the same reference number as the payment or prepayment. You use this document in the remaining steps of this procedure. 1. Optional: In the **Application date** field, change the date of the voided payment. The date specified in this field should be the date when the vosided payment is released ( **Payment date** ) and when the related batch was created ( **Transaction date** ). 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) to save the voided payment. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Release**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Void a customer refund /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-customer-refund page Customer refunds can be voided if errors have been made or the refunds are otherwise invalid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a customer refund Customer refunds can be voided if errors have been made or the refunds are otherwise invalid. Customer refunds can be voided if errors have been made or the refunds are otherwise invalid. Voiding a refund reverses the original refund transactions. You can use the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window to void a customer refund that has been applied to customer payments, prepayments, or credit notes. 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the **Customer** refund type. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the document you want to void. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system does the following: + Reverses the refund in full. + Changes the status of the customer refund to **Voided**. + Creates a document with the **Voided refund** type that has the same reference number as the customer refund has. You use this document in the remaining steps of this procedure. 1. Optional: In the **Date** field in the top part, change the date of the voided refund. The date specified in this field should be the date when the voided refund is released (payment date) and when the related batch was created (transaction date). 1. In the window toolbar, click **Save** to save the voided refund. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Release**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Issue a refund /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund section You can issue a customer refund for a payment, prepayment, or credit note by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Issue a refund You can issue a customer refund for a payment, prepayment, or credit note by using the Customer payments (AR302000) window. For more information: [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/). > [!NOTE] > This window cannot be used for payment via AutoPay. To create a customer refund via AutoPay, see [Customer refunds via AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/customer-refunds-via-autopay/). A customer refund is used when the company needs to return money to a customer, such as when the customer overpays or returns an item. ## Before you proceed You can issue a refund for a document with an **Open** status; thus, you should make sure the document for which you want to issue a refund has this status. If the document status is **Closed**, reverse the document applications and release the reversed application records. After the reversal, you can issue a customer refund for the document. For more information, see [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/). 1. Go to the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Customer refund**. 1. Check the date of the customer refund in the **Payment date** field on the **Financial details** tab. This field is filled in automatically based on the current date, but you can select another date. 1. Check the date of the application records in the **Application date** field. This field is filled in automatically, based on the selected document date. By default, the current date is selected, but you can select another date. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer you want to refund. 1. In the **Location** field, select a different customer location than the default one, if required. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need, and change it if necessary. In the **Payment method** field, select the payment method that can be used for refunds. The currency may be overridden only if the **Allow currency override** check box is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. > [!NOTE] > Make sure you do not select the payment method associated with the clearing account that is used to hold customers' undeposited payments. > [!NOTE] > You cannot select a payment method that is used for payment via AutoPay (the check box **Create batch payment (customer and supplier ledgers)** cannot be selected for the payment method in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window). 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the payment reference number. 1. Optional: Enter a description of the refund. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, enter the credit notes, prepayments, or payments for which you are issuing the customer refund, performing the steps below for each refunded document: 1. Click **Add row** on the table toolbar to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Document type** column, select **Credit note**, **Payment**, or **Prepayment**, depending on the document for which the customer refund is issued. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document you want to refund. 1. Optional: In the **Amount paid** column, correct the refund amount to be paid for the document. 1. In the **Payment amount** field of the top part, enter the total amount of the refund. 1. Prepare the customer refund for further processing in accordance with your company policies by doing one of the following: + To save the refund with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the refund with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: If the refund has the **Balanced** status, click **Release** to release the customer refund and its application records.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage contracts Manage contracts - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/manage-contracts-overview page By using Visma Net contracts, you can invoice your customers recurrently. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage contracts - overview By using Visma Net contracts, you can invoice your customers recurrently. By using Visma Net contracts, you can invoice your customers recurrently. You can configure different combinations of terms and services to satisfy your and your customers' needs. Some contracts may include services that your company provides—such as cable TV service, Internet access, or web account hosting—to customers during a specified period of time. Other contracts may contain service agreements to maintain and repair a product during the warranty period of the manufacturer or after it has expired. Such contracts include a number of cases (often called tickets) that may be solved during the warranty period. A case is used to track efforts, such as work time spent to repair a device and related phone calls and emails, to resolve a particular issue. To start using contracts, you need to activate the **Contract management**functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Contract-related windows appear on the site map after you have activated this functionality. This topic will help you to configure and use contracts. It describes contract preparation, the contract life cycle, and the most common contract-related tasks. + [About prior configuration of contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-prior-configuration-of-contracts/) + [About contract preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation/) + [About the contract life cycle](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/about-the-contract-life-cycle/) + [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/) + [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/) + [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/) + [Make changes to contract services](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services/) + [About contract renewal](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal/) + [Contract examples - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/contract-examples-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Prior configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prior configuration About prior configuration of contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-prior-configuration-of-contracts page Contracts come in various types, depending on the industry and company, but most contain similar elements and are maintained similarly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About prior configuration of contracts Contracts come in various types, depending on the industry and company, but most contain similar elements and are maintained similarly. Visma Net provides capabilities that ease the processes of contract creation and maintenance. You need to configure the following Visma Net entities before creating a contract: ## Contract template A contract template serves as the base for a contract and provides it with the default settings. For each type of contract (such as a service agreement or support plan) your company has with its customers, you can set up a contract template. Then, when you create a contract, you select the appropriate contract template, which causes the default settings to be filled in. A contract template may also provide a list of products and services that you want to sell. These services and products are represented by contract items, which you configure separately. ## Customer account The customer account that you select for a contract provides the invoicing and location details that are specific to the customer. When you create a contract, in addition to specifying the contract template, you specify the customer account, which causes the system to fill in appropriate settings that are specific to the customer. ## Discount codes If you want to give the customer a discount for services provided recurrently through the contract, you should configure a discount code, which determines the discount rate, the application rules, and the non-stock items it is applied to. You can later specify this discount code when you create a contract. For details on configuring discounts, see: [Manage discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-discounts/). This topic will help you to configure contract templates and contract items.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About contract templates /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-contract-templates page A contract template, which is required for creating a contract, provides invoicing, refund, and renewal settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract templates A contract template, which is required for creating a contract, provides invoicing, refund, and renewal settings. A template for a particular type of contract can include as many details as are needed for a typical contract of the type. A template might provide all the contract details except for the customer name and location, or it may contain only a few settings in addition to the required ones. A contract template may or may not determine the list of contract details, which are the services and products that you want to sell. These services and products are represented by contract items, which you configure separately. The list of details is created by adding the contract items to a contract template. When you are creating a contract and you select the contract template to base it on, the list is copied to the contract. You can modify the list of items if this is allowed by the contract template (that is, if the **Enable template items override** check box is selected). To prepare a contract template, you do the following: + Configure the contract template. + Configure the contract items that you want to add to the contract template, if any. + Add the contract items to the contract template.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure a contract template /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a contract template ## Before you proceed Make sure that the contract items you want to include in the contract template are properly configured. For details, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). If you want to invoice customers for the number of cases, you should also configure a designated non-stock item. For details see: [Set up invoicing by the number of cases](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases/). 1. Go to the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: Specify the ID manually in the **Contract template** field. The unique ID of a contract template is formed in accordance with the **TMCONTRACT** segmented key. If the **Contract template** field contains the `` place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for a key segment and the ID is assigned automatically. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of this contract template, including any relevant comments. 1. In the **Contract settings** section of the **Summary** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Contract type** field, select the expiration policy. The following options are available: + **Renewable**: Select this option if you are going to renew contracts based on this template. The renewal process changes the expiration date of a contract of this type and generates an invoice for a renewal fee, if there is one. A contract should be renewed during its grace period; otherwise, the renewal process changes the contract status to **Expired** and creates a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status. + **Expiring**: Select this option if you are not going to renew contracts based on this template. If you run the renewal process for such a contract, the contract status changes to **Expired** and a copy of the contract is created with the **Draft** status. + **Unlimited**: Select this option if you want contracts based on this template to have no expiration date. A contract of this type can be terminated only. 1. In the **Duration** fields, type the number of units and select the duration unit to specify the period when a contract based on this template is valid. 1. Select the **Refundable** check box if you want to refund the setup and renewal fee when a contract based on this template is terminated. The setup fee is refunded if both the contract and the contract item are marked as refundable. If a renewal fee is collected on activation, it is refunded along with the setup fee. If the contract is terminated, recurring charges are refunded in proportion to unused services. 1. If you have selected the **Refundable** check box, type the appropriate number of days in the **Refund period** field. If a contract based on this template is terminated during this period, the customer may claim a refund. 1. Select the **Renew automatically** check box if you want the contract based on the template to be available for mass processing and displayed in the [Renew contracts (CT502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000/) window. 1. In the **Grace period** field, type the number of days after the expiration date when services under a contract are still provided and the contract can be renewed according to its type. When you invoke the **Renew contract** action after the end of the grace period, a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status is created, regardless of the contract type. 1. In the **Currency** field, select the currency to be used for invoicing the customer. The customer's currency should match the template currency. You can include only contract items priced in the same currency. 1. Select the **Enable template items override** check box if you want to allow users to modify the list of contract items for each contract based on this template. 1. Select the **Automatically release customer documents** check box if you want Customer ledger documents generated during contract invoicing to be released automatically; otherwise, they will keep the **Balanced** status. The **Undo last action** command in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window is not available for actions that involve released documents. 1. Optional: In the **Effective from** and **Discontinue after** fields, specify the period of time when the contract template is available for creating contracts based on it. 1. In the **Invoicing settings** section, do the following: 1. In the **Invoicing period** field, select the time period the contract invoicing schedule should be divided into. The following options are available: **Week**, **Month**, **Quarter**, **Year**, **Statement based**, and **On demand**. With the **On demand** option, invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice a contract on any date. This option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured and are not assigned to a deposit contract item. 1. In the **Invoice to** field, select the account that is to be invoiced for the contract. The following options are available: **Parent account**, **Customer account**, and **Specific account**. 1. In the **Invoicing schedule starts on** field, select the starting point of the contract invoicing schedule. The following options are available: **Setup date** and **Activation date**. The contract expiration date is calculated based on this setting. 1. In the **Invoicing format** field, select the format of invoices for invoicing contracts based on the template. The following options are available: + **Summary**: Contract item usage is summed up and shown as one line with the total quantity and total sum. The expense claims are shown individually. + **Detail**: Each contract item usage occurrence is shown as a separate line. 1. In the **Case count item** field, select the non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract. You can invoice a customer for the number of cases accumulated. For details, see: [Set up invoicing by the number of cases](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases/). 1. To add contract items to a contract template, switch to the **Details** tab, and do the following: 1. On the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). In the **Item code** column, select the contract item you want to offer to customers. The system fills related columns with the appropriate values automatically. You can change the item description and quantity within the allowed limits. 1. Repeat step 8.a for each contract item you want include in the contract template. 1. In the top part, select the **Active** check box to make the template available for creating contracts based on it. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Now you can proceed to contract preparation.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About contract Items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/about-contract-items page In Visma Net, a contract item defines the services and products, along with price and provision policies, that you want to offer to customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract Items In Visma Net, a contract item defines the services and products, along with price and provision policies, that you want to offer to customers. In Visma Net, a contract item defines the services and products, along with price and provision policies, that you want to offer to customers. A service or product provided as part of a contract is defined as a non-stock item. Thus, before you create contract items, you should consider what services and products you will offer to your customers through contracts; you then create non-stock items for each product and service. For each non-stock item, you specify the base price (which is used to calculate the contract item price) and the General ledger sales account and subaccount used to record item-related transactions. For details on configuring non-stock items, see [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). Once you have configured the appropriate non-stock items, you configure the contract items. A contract item has three parts: ## 1. Setup You configure this part of a contract item to specify the non-stock item you want to provide during contract setup and define the pricing policy to be used to calculate the setup price. Also, this part of the contract item is used to configure the deposit contract item used in retainer contracts. ## 2. Renewal When you configure this part of a contract item, you specify the non-stock item you want to provide during contract renewal and define the pricing policy to be used to calculate the renewal price. You can configure the renewal price to be dependent on the setup price. ## 3. Recurring When you configure this part of a contract item, you define the policy for the recurring invoicing, specify the non-stock item you want to provide recurrently, and define the pricing policy to be used to calculate the recurring price. For items that are provided recurrently, you can specify a price for extra usage. When item usage exceeds the included usage, the extra amount can be invoiced at another price. You can configure both the recurring and extra usage prices to be dependent on the setup price. > [!NOTE] > All non-stock items included in a contract item should be priced in the same currency. For a contract item, you can configure all three of the parts listed above, any two parts, or only one part. For example: You might provide a customer with Visma Net first and then provide support services recurrently. In this case, you would assign the Visma Net to the setup part and support services to the recurring part of the contract item.

Related pages

Concepts

 Configure a contract item /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a contract item ## Before you proceed Make sure that non-stock items are properly configured for each service you want to include in a contract item. For details on configuring non-stock items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). The offered instruction is divided into four parts: general settings (required), setup, renewal, and setting up recurring invoicing. You can refer to the parts that you need to configure the contract item you want to offer and skip other parts. 1. Go to the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: Specify the ID manually in the **Contract item** field. The unique ID of a contract item is formed in accordance with the **CONTRACTITEM** segmented key. If the **Contract item** field contains the `` place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for the key segment and the ID is assigned automatically. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of the services included. 1. In the top part of the **Price options** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Maximum allowed quantity** and **Minimum allowed quantity** fields, type the quantity limits for the provided services. 1. In the **Default quantity** field, type the service quantity that is included in the contract by default. This value can be modified in a template or a contract within the allowed limits (which are defined by **Maximum allowed quantity**and **Minimum allowed quantity**). If service usage has exceeded the included quantity, the difference is considered extra usage. Allowed quantity limits are not applied to extra usage. 1. In the **Currency ID** field, select the currency of this contract item. You should use non-stock items priced in one currency within each contract item. 1. To set up pricing for a service to be provided as a part of contract setup, in the **Setup and renewal** area, do the following: 1. In the **Setup item** field, select the non-stock item you want to provide and invoice when contract setup occurs. 1. In the **Setup pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option means you can not modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected **Use item price** in the **Setup pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy you have selected. 1. Skip the **Retain rate** and **Deposit** elements, which are used only for creating a contract item to serve as a prepayment. For details, see: [Create a deposit contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/create-a-deposit-contract-item/). 1. Select the **Refundable** check box if you want to allow the amount the customer paid for setup to be refunded in case of contract termination. The setup fee is refunded if both the contract template and this contract item are marked as refundable. If the renewal fee is collected on activation, it is refunded along with the setup fee. Recurring charges are refunded in proportion to unused services in case of termination. 1. Select the **Prorate setup** check box if you want to allow the amount the customer paid for setup to be invoiced in proportion to unused services in case of termination or changes in contract terms. 1. Optional: If you have finished specifying settings for the contract item, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Otherwise, proceed with the part of instruction you need. 1. To set up pricing for a service to be provided when contract renewal occurs, on the **Setup and renewal** area, do the following: 1. In the **Renew item** field, select the non-stock item you want to provide and invoice when contract renewal occurs. 1. Select the **Collect renewal fee on activation** check box if you want to invoice the customer for services provided on renewal both at the moment of contract activation and at contract renewal. For a usage example, see: [About fixed-price contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/about-fixed-price-contracts/). 1. In the **Renewal pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Percent of setup price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the setup price of the contract item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option means you can not modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected the **Use item price** option in the **Renewal pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy you selected. 1. Optional: If you have finished specifying settings for the contract item, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Otherwise, proceed with the part of the instruction you need. 1. To set up pricing for service to be provided recurrently, in the **Recurring invoicing** area, do the following: 1. In the **Invoice type** field select the invoicing policy. The following options are available: + **None**: Select this option if you are not going to invoice the customer recurrently, and the elements of the **Recurring invoicing** area become unavailable. + **Prepaid**: Select this option if you want to invoice the customer at the beginning of the scheduled invoicing period. + **Postpaid**: Select this option if you want to invoice the customer at the end of the scheduled invoicing period. 1. In the **Recurring item** field, select the non-stock item that you want to provide and invoice recurrently. 1. Select the **Reset usage on invoicing** check box if you want the contract item usage to be reset after the invoicing for a previous invoicing period has been performed. If this check box is selected, the included quantity is set per invoicing period. If this check box is cleared, the included quantity is set for the whole duration of the contract, so clear the check box only if the invoicing period is equal to the contract duration. 1. In the **Recurring pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Percent of setup price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the setup price of the contract item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option means you can not modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected **Use item price** in the **Recurring pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy selected. 1. In the **Extra usage pricing** field, select the pricing policy to be applied to the service price if the customer has exceeded the service included quantity. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: Select this option if you want to use the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Percent of setup price**: Select this option if you want the price to be calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percent** field to the setup price of the contract item. + **Enter manually**: Select this option if you want to specify the price manually in the **Item price/percent** field. Selecting this option also allows to modify the price later in the contract. 1. (Skip this step if you have selected **Use item price** in the **Extra usage pricing** field.) In the **Item price/percent** field, type the item price or percent, depending on the pricing policy selected. 1. Optional: In the **Deposit item** field, select the deposit contract item you want to tie to the contract item you are configuring. > [!NOTE] > The deposit item is used only with contract items that offer service provided recurrently. For details on configuring, see: [About retainer contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/about-retainer-contracts/). 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contract preparation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract preparation About contract preparation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation page To create a new contract in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you select a template and a customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract preparation To create a new contract in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you select a template and a customer account. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). To create a new contract in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, you select a template and a customer account. This window is filled in with default values provided by the selected template and the customer account. You may then change the included quantity of contract items within the allowed limits and modify invoicing information. You can modify the list of contract items if such modifications are allowed in the selected contract template. Also, you can change the prices if the pricing policy of the contract item allows it. A newly created contract has the **Draft** status. ## Contract IDs Contract IDs are based on the **CONTRACT** segment key, which inherits its structure from the **PROJECT** segment key. To be able to distinguish contracts from projects in lookup lists, reserve one segment of the key for a value designating whether an ID belongs to projects or contracts. Consider two examples of defining the keys: 1. You can configure two segments in the **PROJECT** segment key: a two-letter segment with two possible values ( **PR** and **CT** ) to designate the type of ID, and a 10-character auto-numbered segment to identify the particular project or contract. For the second segment of the **CONTRACT** key, you can assign a different numbering sequence to maintain the numbers for contracts independently from those of projects. 1. If you decide to define a one-segment structure for the **PROJECT** key with an auto-numbered segment, you can assign different numbering sequences to the **PROJECT** and **CONTRACT** keys. Create the sequence intended for projects with **PR** as a prefix, and define the sequence intended for contracts with the **CT** prefix.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/configure-a-contract section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a contract ## Before you proceed Make sure that the contract template you want to base the contract on is active (the **Active** check box is selected), the date of contract creation is later than the **Effective from** date and sooner than the **Discontinue after** date of the template, and the template currency matches the customer currency. If you want to apply a discount to the contract, make sure that it is properly configured. 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: Specify the ID manually in the **Contract ID** field. If the field contains the **<NEW>** place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for a key segment and the system assigns the ID automatically. 1. In the top part, do the following: 1. In the **Contract template** field, select the contract template that the new contract should be based on. The system automatically fills in the invoicing policy settings and the list of services with the default values from the selected template. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer account you want to configure the contract with. 1. Optional: Change the customer location and contract description. 1. On the **Summary** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Setup date** field (and optionally the **Activation date** field), specify the dates of the contract being signed and the start services being provided. These dates are to be displayed by default and can be changed in the **Activate contract dialog box**, which opens when you invoke the **Set up contract** or **Activate contract** action. The fields become read-only after the respective action has been performed. 1. Optional: Modify the following settings if needed: **Grace period**, **Renew automatically**, and **Invoice information**. 1. Optional: In the **Contract management** section, assign the contract owner and salesperson. 1. On the **Details** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Promo code** field, select the discount to be applied to the prices of items. 1. If the contract template allows modification of the contract items included, change the quantity and description of items, add new items, and delete listed items, as needed. (Use the applicable buttons in the table toolbar to add and delete rows.) Also, you can enter new prices for non-stock items that have the pricing policy set to the **Enter manually** option. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After the contract preparation is finished, you can proceed to signing and activating it.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About the contract life cycle /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/about-the-contract-life-cycle page If you have a contract with the Draft status and the contract details reflect your agreement with a customer, you activate the contract to initiate its life cycle. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the contract life cycle If you have a contract with the Draft status and the contract details reflect your agreement with a customer, you activate the contract to initiate its life cycle. If you have a contract with the **Draft** status and the contract details reflect your agreement with a customer, you activate the contract to initiate its life cycle. The contract life cycle consists of mandatory stages: setup and activation, fulfillment, and expiration. The life cycle may include the following optional stages: changes to contract services, contract renewal, and contract termination. This article describes the contract life cycle stages in detail. A contract life cycle may consist of the following stages: ## 1. Setup and activation (mandatory) Once you have prepared a contract, you can initiate it. If the services covered by a contract require setup before contract activation, you may initiate invoicing for the setup separately. For example, contracts involving Internet access may require installation of a router or other equipment. You initiate the contract setup: the contract becomes effective and the customer is invoiced for any services associated with setup. At this point, you can no longer modify the terms and scope of the contract. When setup is finished, you activate the contract and start to invoice the customer recurrently. If you do not need to separate the setup of the contract and the activation, these steps can be done simultaneously. For details, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). ## 2. Fulfillment (mandatory) During this stage, the longest of the contract life cycle, the customer uses services described in the contract, and invoicing is performed according to the terms defined in the contract and the contract items. For details, see [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/) and [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/). ## 3. Changes to services (optional) You or the customer may want to change (upgrade or downgrade) a set of services within the scope of an active contract. Both contract upgrading and downgrading are done in two steps: preparation and activation. During preparation, contract invoicing and the provision of services are done according to the initial settings of the contract. For details, see: [Make changes to contract services](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services/). ## 4. Expiration (mandatory) Each time you run the contract invoicing process, it checks whether the next invoicing date exceeds or equals a contract expiration date. If it does, the contract invoicing process sets the next invoicing day equal to the contract expiration date. The next time you run the contract invoicing process, it generates invoice for the contract usage and changes the contract status to **Expired**. You can not record any usage for expired contracts. Expired contracts can be either renewed or terminated: ### Renewal (optional) The renewal scenario depends on the expired contract type, which is defined by the contract template. There are three types of contracts: #### Renewable During the renewal process, the system changes the expiration date of a contract and generates an invoice for the renewal fee, if any. After renewal is completed, the contract is again in the fulfilment stage. A contract should be renewed during its grace period; otherwise, the renewal process creates a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status. You need to activate the copied contract to start the provision of services. #### Expiring A contract of this type expires at the end of its duration, but it is available for a renewal operation—manual or automatic (if scheduled). When such a contract is renewed, a copy of the expired contract is created with the **Draft** status, and you need to activate the copied contract to start the provision of services. #### Unlimited A contract of this type has no expiration date and can be terminated only. For details about renewing contracts, see: [About contract renewal](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal/). ### Termination (optional) You can terminate an expired contract if you are not going to renew or copy it. Also, contract termination may be done at any point in the contract life cycle, if you or the customer decide to terminate the relationship defined by a contract. When you initiate contract termination, the system gathers information on the not yet invoiced usage of a contract and issues an invoice or a credit memo, if needed. The termination date must be within the current invoicing period (between the **Last invoicing date** and the **Next invoicing date**).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contract setup and activation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract setup and activation About contract setup and activation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation page The way you initiate a contract may depend on the services you provide. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract setup and activation The way you initiate a contract may depend on the services you provide. You may want the contract signing and the start of provision to occur at different times. For example: You might need some time to install the equipment required for the provision of services and you may want to invoice the customer for this equipment before installation. In this case, the recurring invoicing schedule should begin at the start date of provision. If you don't need to separate the time of contract signing and service provision, you can perform these two actions simultaneously. In Visma Net, contract signing is referred to as **contract setup**. The date when the contract is signed is called the **setup date**. The start of the provision of services is referred to as **contract activation**, and the date of contract activation is called the **activation date**. Note that you can record service usage for only activated contracts.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/set-up-a-contract page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to set up a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a contract You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to set up a contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window to set up a contract. The setup operation is available for contracts that have the **Draft** status only. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to initiate. 1. Review the contract details to ensure that the contract meets the intentions of the parties, and make any needed changes. 1. Click **Actions**, and select the **Set up contract** action. 1. In the **Set up contract dialog box**, specify the date of contract setup and click **OK**. When the operation completes, the following actions occur: + The contract gets the **Pending activation** status. + The setup date becomes unavailable for editing. + If the invoicing schedule starts on the setup date, the **Expiration date** field and the **Invoicing schedule** section are filled with details. + An invoice is issued for any service to be provided on setup. If the invoicing schedule starts on the setup date, the invoice also includes a renewal fee if such a fee is configured to be collected on contract activation. You can view the invoice details on the **Sales history** tab of the window. You cannot enter contract usage at this point; to proceed, you need to activate the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Activate a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/activate-a-contract page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to activate a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate a contract You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to activate a contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window to activate a contract. This operation is available only for contracts with the **Pending activation** status. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to activate. 1. Click **Actions**, and then select the **Activate contract** action. 1. In the **Activate contract dialog box**, specify date of contract activation and click **OK**. ## When the operation is completed, the following actions occur + The contract gets the **Active** status. + The activation date becomes unavailable for editing. + If the invoicing schedule starts on the activation date, the **Expiration date** field and the **Invoicing schedule** section are filled with details. + An invoice for prepaid services is issued. If the invoicing schedule starts on the activation date, the invoice also includes a renewal fee if the fee is configured to be collected on contract activation. You can view the invoice details on the **Sales history** tab of the window. Now you can proceed with usage recording. For details, see [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up and activate a contract simultaneously /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/set-up-and-activate-a-contract-simultaneously page In the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you can simultaneously set up and activate a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up and activate a contract simultaneously In the Customer contracts (CT301000) window, you can simultaneously set up and activate a contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). In the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, you can simultaneously set up and activate a contract. This operation is available for contracts with the **Draft** status only. 1. Review the contract details to ensure that the contract meets the intentions of the parties, and make any needed changes. 1. Click **Actions**, and select the **Set up and activate contract** action. 1. In the **Activate contract** dialog box, specify the date of contract activation and click **OK**. This operation triggers the following actions: + The contract gets the **Active** status. + The setup and activation dates become unavailable for editing. + The **Expiration date** field and the **Invoicing schedule** section are filled with details, based on the template settings. + An invoice is issued for the setup and prepaid services. The invoice also includes a renewal fee if such a fee is configured to be collected on contract activation. You can view the invoice details on the **Sales history** tab of the window. Now you can proceed with usage recording. For details, see: [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contract usage recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract usage recording About contract usage recording /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording page After contract activation, your company can start providing the services defined by the contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract usage recording After contract activation, your company can start providing the services defined by the contract. After contract activation, your company can start providing the services defined by the contract. The contract is invoiced in accordance with its invoicing schedule. Invoicing is performed for usage accumulated during an invoicing period. If the contract is invoiced on demand, invoicing is performed for usage accumulated up to the date of the invoicing. Contract usage is the sum of used units of each non-stock item associated with the contract. You can associate a non-stock item with the contract directly or through such system entities as cases, activities, and expense claims. You may want to track the usage of a particular non-stock item during a invoicing period or the whole duration of the contract. To track usage, you create a contract item, specify this non-stock item as the one provided recurrently, and add the item to a contract template. When a contract based on this template is activated, contract items that have non-stock items provided recurrently are listed on the **Recurring summary** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. Here you can view the usage of the contract item, which is the sum of the used units of the non-stock item provided recurrently. You can affect the contract usage in the following ways: ## Using cases You can associate a case with a contract. To recognise the invoiceable time of a case as a contract item usage, you should assign a non-stock item that is provided recurrently to a case class that is invoiced on a per-case basis. When a case of this class is closed and released, its invoiceable time is added to the usage of the contract item. The invoiceable time of cases associated with non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on using contracts for cases invoicing, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/). ## Using case activities If a case belongs to a case class that is invoiced on a per-activity basis, you can associate the case with a contract as well. When a case activity is completed and released, the respective transaction can be viewed in the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. The invoiceable time of activities associated with non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on using contracts for activities invoicing, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/). ## Using expense claims You can associate the details of expense claims with a contract. After an expense claim is invoiced, a transaction for the details associated with a contract can be viewed in the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. The quantity of details associated with non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on managing expense claims, see [Process expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-processing-expense-claims/). ## Using non-stock items You can associate the usage of any non-stock item with a contract by using the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. The usage of non-stock items that are not included in the contract is presented on the invoice as a separate line. For details on entering usage transactions, see [Enter contract usage](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage/). You can enter item usage for past, current, and future invoicing periods. If you have entered transactions with a date in a past invoicing period, they will be invoiced in the next invoicing period. If you have entered a transaction with a date in the future, the transaction will be invoiced in the invoicing period that contains the date. When you run a contract invoicing process, the system checks the date of transactions and invoices those with a date before or the same as the current business date. Records of usage transactions are presented as invoice details according to the invoicing format settings of the applicable contract template.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Enter contract usage /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter contract usage 1. Go to the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to enter usage for. 1. On the **Transactions not yet invoiced** tab, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the window toolbar. The customer account associated with the contract is selected by default as well as the customer location, the current business date, and the branch from which you are signed in. You can modify the values of all fields except for the customer account. 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the non-stock item that you want to invoice the customer for. 1. In the **Quantity** column, type the number of used units. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat step 3 for each transaction. You run the contract invoicing process to invoice the entered transactions. For details on contract invoicing, see: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 View contract usage /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/view-contract-usage page You use the Contract usage (CT303000) window to view all usage transactions associated with a contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View contract usage You use the Contract usage (CT303000) window to view all usage transactions associated with a contract. For more information: [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/). You use the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window to view all usage transactions associated with a contract. To view the usage of contract items provided recurrently, you use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. ## View all contract transactions 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to view transactions for. 1. To view uninvoiced transactions, click the **Transactions not yet invoiced** tab, which shows the list of transactions that are not yet invoiced. 1. To view invoiced transactions, click the **Transaction history** tab. The list of invoiced transactions is displayed. You can select a post period to narrow the results. ## View contract item usage 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to view usage for. 1. Click the **Recurring summary** tab, and view the list of contract items provided recurrently in the table. For each contract item listed in the table, you can view: + In the **Included** column: The usage included in the contract by default and invoiced at the recurring price. (If the included usage is exceeded, the customer is invoiced for additional units at the price for extra usage specified in the respective contract item.) + In the **Used** column: The usage accumulated for the current invoicing period. + In the **Used total** column: The total usage accumulated from the contract activation date.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Contract invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract invoicing About contract invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing page After contract usage has been recorded, you should begin invoicing for the usage. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract invoicing After contract usage has been recorded, you should begin invoicing for the usage. After contract usage has been recorded, you should begin invoicing for the usage. When you run the contract invoicing process, the system produces an invoice. This topic describes the source of invoice details and common invoicing scenarios. ## Source of invoice details The system gets most details for the invoice by using the non-stock item that is used to track this usage, as described in [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/). The non-stock item provides the following information: Basis for unit price : The unit price is calculated by using the base price of the non-stock item. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. If the non-stock item is included in the contract item, then the system calculates the unit price by applying the rules specified in the contract item to the non-stock item base price or the price from the customer price class. Sales account : This is the general ledger account used to record sale transactions of this non-stock item. You specify the sales account by using the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Sales subaccount : The sales subaccount is the subaccount used to record sale transactions of this non-stock item. The subaccount is combined automatically according the rules defined in the **Combine sales sub.** from field in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) windows. VAT category : This is the category Visma Net uses to calculate the VAT applied to supplying goods or services. ## Common invoicing scenarios In Visma Net, you can configure different invoicing scenarios to suit your business needs. You can invoice a customer on a schedule or on demand, as described below: Scheduled invoicing : Scheduled invoicing is the most common way to invoice customers recurrently. The duration of the contract is divided into equal time intervals, which are the invoicing periods. Invoicing is performed once in an invoicing period, causing one invoice to be generated per invoicing period. The system calculates invoicing dates by using the date when the contract's invoicing schedule is started and the contract's invoicing period—which is used as an incrementation step. You can select one of the following steps: week, month, quarter, or year. The invoicing schedule for a contract can be viewed on the **Summary** tab in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. Here you can see the start date of the invoicing schedule, the invoicing period, the date of the last invoice, and the date of the next invoice. When you run contract invoicing, the system generates an invoice with the next invoicing date and shifts the schedule dates on the incrementation step. Invoices can be viewed on the **Sales history** tab of a contract. Additionally, you can define for each recurrent contract item whether it is invoiced at the beginning of the invoicing periods or at the end of it. If you have not invoiced a contract for two or more periods, you have to run the invoicing process for each missed period. Invoicing on demand : You can provide services on demand, rather than recurrently. In this case, you might want to perform contract invoicing any time services have been provided. An invoice with the date you have specified is generated each time you run contract invoicing. You can run contract invoicing for a particular contract in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, use the mass-processing [Run contract invoicing (CT501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000/) window to run invoicing for multiple contracts, or configure the automation schedule functionality for contract invoicing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Run contract invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/run-contract-invoicing page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to run the invoicing process for a contract as long as the contract has the Active or Pending upgrade status. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run contract invoicing You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to run the invoicing process for a contract as long as the contract has the Active or Pending upgrade status. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Run contract invoicing (CT501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000/) window to run the invoicing process for a number of contracts at once. 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to invoice. 1. Click **Actions** and then select **Run contract invoicing**. If the selected contract is configured to be invoiced on demand, the **Invoicing on demand dialogue box** is displayed, where you can enter the invoice date. If the operation completes successfully, the green check mark appears in the window toolbar. After the operation completes, you can view and further process the generated invoice in the **Sales history** tab of the window. ## Run invoicing process for multiple contracts 1. Go to the [Run contract invoicing (CT501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000/) window. 1. In the **Invoicing date** field, select the date of invoicing. The list of contracts that require invoicing on that date is generated. 1. Optional: Narrow the list of contracts by selecting any combination of a contract template, customer class, and particular customer. 1. Do one of the following: + To invoice all listed contracts, click **Process all**. + To invoice only selected contracts, select the unlabelled check boxes for the contracts you want to invoice, and click **Process**. If the contracts were invoiced successfully, the system marks them with green check marks. When you initiate invoicing for all contracts or selected ones, invoices are generated for each contract and each customer involved. You can view and further process generated invoices on the **Sales history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for each contract. Also, you can use invoice-related windows for further processing. For details, see: [Process invoices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Make changes to contract services /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services section Changing a contract's terms of provision may involve changes in services, prices, or quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make changes to contract services Changing a contract's terms of provision may involve changes in services, prices, or quantities. Changing a contract's terms of provision may involve changes in services, prices, or quantities. You can add or delete services, change the included quantity, or apply a discount. Note that you can change the set of provided services for contracts that are based on templates that allow overriding of contract items. Contract upgrades and downgrades are performed in two stages: preparation and activation. During the preparation stage, you modify provisioning terms, but contract invoicing and service provision are performed according to the initial settings of the contract. When the changes are activated, contract invoicing and service provision are performed according to the new settings. You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to change services of a contract with the **Active** status as follows: 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to upgrade. 1. Click **Actions**, and select **Upgrade contract**. This gives the contract the **Pending upgrade** status, which means that you can change the terms of provision. 1. On the **Details** tab, modify the list of services or their quantity, or apply a discount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Actions**, and select the **Activate upgrade** action. In the **Activate contract dialog box**, specify the date of contract activation and click **OK**. If the operation is completed successfully, the green check mark appears in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Contract renewal /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract renewal About contract renewal /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal page When a contract has expired, you and your customer may want to continue the relationship under the same terms. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About contract renewal When a contract has expired, you and your customer may want to continue the relationship under the same terms. When a contract has expired, you and your customer may want to continue the relationship under the same terms. In this case, you can renew an expired contract to avoid the provision of services being interrupted. The contract renewal process and its outcome are defined by the contract type. Contracts of the following types can be renewed: ## Renewable When you renew a contract of this type, the expiration date is shifted by the duration; apart from that, contract stays unchanged. The renewal fee, if one is configured, is invoiced. After renewal is completed, the contract is again in the fulfillment stage. A contract can be renewed either manually or automatically (if scheduled). ## Expiring When you renew a contract of this type, a copy of an expired contract is created with the **Draft** status. You can modify contract details, if required, and activate it on the date of your choice. > [!NOTE] > If you want to renew a contract after the end of the grace period, a copy of the contract with the **Draft** status is created, regardless of the original contract type. You can track contracts that are about to expire by using the [Expiring customer contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/expiring-customer-contracts-ct401000/) (CT401000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Renew a contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/renew-a-contract page You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to renew a single contract. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Renew a contract You use the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to renew a single contract. For more information: [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/). You use the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window to renew a single contract. To renew a number of contracts at once, you use the [Renew contracts (CT502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000/) window. 1. Go to the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. 1. In the **Contract ID** field, select the contract you want to renew. 1. Click **Actions**, and select **Renew contract**. If the operation is completed successfully, one of the following occurs: + For a renewable contract, the expiration date is shifted by its duration and the renewal fee is invoiced. After the renewal operation is completed, you can view and further process the generated invoice on the **Sales history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. + For an expiring contract, another contract (which is a copy of the expiring contract with a new ID) is created with the **Draft** status. You can view all related contracts (both parent and child) on the **Contract history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. ## Renew multiple contracts You can also renew multiple contracts at once, as long as each of the contracts has the **Renew automatically** check box selected in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window. To renew multiple contracts, do the following: 1. Go to the [Renew contracts (CT502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000/) window. 1. In the **Renewal date** field, select the start date of the date range in which the contracts will expire. The list of contracts that expire during the specified range (and thus require renewal) is generated. 1. Optional: Expand or narrow the list of contracts by narrowing the list of contracts to be displayed by selecting the customer class, the contract template, or both. 1. Do one of the following: + To renew all listed contracts, click **Process all**. + To renew only selected contracts, select the empty check boxes for the contracts you want to renew, and click **Process**. If the contracts are renewed successfully, the system marks them with green check marks. You can view and further process the generated invoices on the **Sales history** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for each contract. Also, you can use invoice-related windows for further processing. For details, see: [Process invoices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contract examples /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract examples Contract examples - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/contract-examples-overview page Visma Net provides you with different scenarios of invoicing a customer for the usage of services you offer with the contracts functionality, as the following topics describe. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract examples - overview Visma Net provides you with different scenarios of invoicing a customer for the usage of services you offer with the contracts functionality, as the following topics describe. Visma Net include the following, each of which is described in its own topic: + [About fixed-price contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/about-fixed-price-contracts/) + [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/) + [About retainer contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/about-retainer-contracts/) ## Contracts with invoicing on demand You may want to have the ability to provide a customer with any service or solution you have at any time and invoice the customer as needed. To implement such a scenario, do the following: 1. Create an active contract template with the invoicing period set to the **On demand** option, and do not add any contract items. Prepare a contract with the **Draft** status based on this template. For details, see [About contract preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation/). 1. Set up and activate the contract. The contract status is changed to **Active** and you can proceed with the contract usage recording. For details, see [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. For the contract, enter the usage of the non-stock items that correspond to the services or solutions provided to this customer. For details, see [Enter contract usage](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage/). 1. Invoice the contract any time you need to. For details, see [Run contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/run-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About fixed-price contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/about-fixed-price-contracts page You may offer services at a price that is not based on the service's usage, as with a fee for internet connection or domain name registration. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About fixed-price contracts You may offer services at a price that is not based on the service's usage, as with a fee for internet connection or domain name registration. You generally collect such a fee on a schedule, for example, once a year or on a monthly basis. Consider an example: You offer domain name registration and maintenance for a year with renewal. To implement such a scenario, do the following: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create **Domain name registration** and **Maintenance** non-stock items that represent services you offer. 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, configure a contract item as follows: + In the **Setup item** field, select the **Domain name registration** non-stock item, and specify the pricing policy for the setup item. You provide a domain name and invoice for it during the contract setup stage. + In the **Renewal item** field, select the **Maintenance** non-stock item, and specify the pricing policy for the renewal item. You provide a maintenance item only after renewal and invoice for it when the contract is renewed. + To invoice the customer for maintenance during the first year, select the **Collect renewal fee on activation** check box. The fee for the renewal item will be included in the first invoice. + Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details on configuring contract items, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create a contract template as follows: + Set the **Contract type** to **Renewable** and the **Duration** to **1 Year**. + Specify **Year** as the **invoicing period**. + In the **Invoicing schedule starts on** field, select **setup date**. + Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. + Add the contract item you have configured to the contract template. For details on configuring a contract template, see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/). 1. Set up and activate the contract. An invoice for domain name registration and maintenance is issued automatically as the result of the setup procedure. For more information, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. Renew the contract in a year. An invoice for maintenance only is issued automatically as the result of the renewal procedure. For details, see: [About contract renewal](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-renewal/about-contract-renewal/). You can combine fixed-price contract items with ones that are invoiced based on usage. For example: Suppose that you provide bandwidth or disk space along with a domain name. In this case, you could include in one contract item a domain name as the setup item and some quantity of disk space as the recurring item, or you could create separate contract items.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Usage-based contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Usage-based contracts About usage-based contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts page You may offer services at a price that depends on the usage of the service, such as support hours, disk space, or support cases. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About usage-based contracts You may offer services at a price that depends on the usage of the service, such as support hours, disk space, or support cases. The contracts functionality of Visma Net can help you to track and invoice the usage of a particular service. You can invoice customers for services at the regular price and at an extra usage price, and you can provide some quantity for free. You can track the usage of the services that are provided recurrently within a invoicing period as well as for the whole contract duration. ## Annual support with free options If you offer annual support with free options, you can use Visma Net to implement the following scenarios. Each scenario is described briefly below; see the **Settings for the examples** table for the settings you would use to implement the scenario. You can also refer to procedures that walk you through implementation of each scenario. + **Annual support with hours for free**: To implement this scenario, use the settings listed in the appropriate column of the table below. To implement scenarios in which the contract covers annual support with free hours, do the following: Annual support that includes free hours might be structured as in the following examples: + **The first 10 hours for free**: You could offer a contract for annual support with the first 10 hours free and additional hours invoiced at €100 per hour. The contract is invoiced monthly. + **10 hours for free each month**: You might offer a contract for annual support with 10 hours free each month and other hours invoiced at €100 per hour. The contract is invoiced monthly. + For a case class that is invoiced by case, follow the [Set up per-case invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-case-invoicing/) procedure. + For a case class that is invoiced by activity, follow the [Set up per-activity invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-activity-invoicing/) procedure. + **Annual support with cases for free**: To implement this scenario, too, you use the settings listed in the appropriate column of the table below. Annual support that includes free cases might be structured as in the following examples: + **The first 10 cases for free**: You might offer a contract for annual support with the first 10 cases free and additional cases invoiced at €100 per case. The contract is invoiced monthly. + **10 cases for free each month**: You could offer a contract for annual support with 10 free cases each month and additional cases invoiced at €100 per case. The contract is invoiced monthly. To implement a scenario in which the contract covers annual support with free cases, follow the [Set up invoicing by the number of cases](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases/) procedure. ## Settings for the examples This table shows the settings you would use to implement each of the scenarios described above. |Entity|Annual support with hours for free|Annual support with cases for free| |---|---|---| |**Non-stock item** (Use the Non-stock items window.)|+ **Item ID** = **SUPPORTHOURS** + **Item status** = **Active** + **Type** = **Labor** + **UOMs** = **Hours**|+ **Item ID** = **CASENUMBER** + **Item status** = **Active** + **Type** = **Non-stock item** + **UOMs** = **ITEM**| |**Contract item** (Use the Contract items window.)|+ **Default quantity** = **10** + **Recurring item** = **SUPPORTHOURS** + **Reset usage on invoicing**: + Cleared for the **The first 10 hours for free** scenario + Selected for the **10 hours for free each month** scenario + **Recurring pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **0** + **Extra usage pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **100**|+ **Default quantity** = **10** + **Recurring item** = **CASENUMBER** + **Reset usage on invoicing**: + Cleared for the **The first 10 cases for free** scenario + Selected for the **10 cases for free each month** scenario + **Recurring pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **0** + **Extra usage pricing** = **Enter manually** + **Item price/percent** = **100**| |**Contract template** (Use the Contract templates window.)|+ **Duration** = **1 Year invoicing** + **Period** = **Month**|+ **Duration** = **1 Year invoicing** + **Period** = **Month** + **Case count item** = **CASENUMBER**| > [!NOTE] > Fill in settings that are not mentioned in the table at your discretion.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up per-case invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-case-invoicing page To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-case basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up per-case invoicing To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-case basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create a non-stock item of the **Labour** type to represent hours. For details, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a contract item. In the **Recurring item** window, specify the non-stock item created in Step 1 as the one provisioned recurrently. Also, specify the recurring and extra usage prices of this item. Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details, see [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create an active contract template with scheduled invoicing. Add the contract item created in Step 3 to the contract template. For more information, see [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs; now you can proceed with the contract fulfillment. See: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/) for details. 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule, as described in: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up per-activity invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-per-activity-invoicing page To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-activity basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up per-activity invoicing To invoice a customer recurrently and on a per-activity basis for time and overtime, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create a non-stock item of the **Labour** type to represent hours. For details, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a contract item. In the **Recurring item** field, specify the non-stock item created in Step 1 as the one provisioned recurrently. Also, specify the recurring and extra usage prices of this item. Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create an active contract template with scheduled invoicing. Add the contract item created in Step 3 to the contract template; see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/) for more information. 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs; now you can proceed with the contract fulfilment. For details, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule. [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/). For more information, see:

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up invoicing by the number of cases /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/set-up-invoicing-by-the-number-of-cases page To invoice a customer recurrently for a number of cases, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up invoicing by the number of cases To invoice a customer recurrently for a number of cases, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, create a non-stock item. Specify the item's unit of measure and price, and fill in other details at your discretion. For details, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a contract item. In the **Recurring item** field, specify the non-stock item created in Step 1 as the one provisioned recurrently. Also, specify the recurring and extra usage price of this item. Fill in other required parameters (and any optional ones) at your discretion. For details, see: [Configure a contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-item/). 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create an active contract template with scheduled invoicing. Add the contract item created in Step 2 to the contract template, and in the **Case count item** field, specify the non-stock item you created in Step 1. For details, see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/). 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs; now you can proceed with the contract fulfilment. For more information, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. As needed, enter contract usage in the following way: + Directly for the non-stock item you have configured, by using the [Contract usage (CT303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000/) window. For details, see: [Enter contract usage](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/enter-contract-usage/). 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule. For more information, see: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Retainer contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Retainer contracts About retainer contracts /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/about-retainer-contracts page In some cases, a contract includes a retainer along with the services to be provided. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About retainer contracts In some cases, a contract includes a retainer along with the services to be provided. In some cases, a contract includes a retainer along with the services to be provided. The customer pays the retainer at contract setup. The customer is then charged for the actual usage of services according to its invoicing schedule, and the cost of provided services is deducted from the retainer. In Visma Net, a retainer is referred to as a **deposit contract item**. You configure a contract item marked as a deposit (by selecting the **Deposit** check box). This contract item represents a retainer that the customer should pay at contract setup. Then you assign this deposit contract item to contract items that represent services. That is, you specify a deposit contract item in the **Deposit item** field for each contract item whose cost of usage is to be deducted from the retainer. After required contract items are configured, you add them, except for the deposit contract item, to a contract template designed for retainer contracts. When you add a contract item to a contract template, the system checks whether it has a deposit contract item attached; if there is one, it checks whether it has been added already. If a contract item has a deposit item attached that is not yet present in the contract template, this deposit contract item is added automatically. You create a retainer contract based on the contract template configured for this purpose and activate it. When you provide services to a customer, the usage of the services is recorded in the contract. The customer is invoiced according to its invoicing schedule, and invoices are issued as a result of the invoicing process. Each provided service and the retainer are displayed as separate lines in the invoice. The customer is invoiced for each service usage according to the pricing policy defined in the **Recurring pricing** field of the respective contract item. When the retainer has been spent, the customer is invoiced for each service usage according to the pricing policy defined in the **Extra usage pricing** field of the respective contract item. If a customer wants to replenish a retainer, this can be done with the contract upgrade procedure. You can change the deposit contract item quantity if the contract template allows overriding of contract items. For details, see: [Make changes to contract services](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/make-changes-to-contract-services/). ## Retainer contract restrictions 1. The contract template must contain only one deposit contract item. The system does not allow a contract template to be saved if there are multiple deposit contract items. 1. The contract must be of either the **Expiring** type or the **Unlimited** type. The contract type is defined by the **Contract type** setting of the contract template that the contract is based on.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure a retainer contract /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/configure-a-retainer-contract page To configure a retainer contract, perform the following steps: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a retainer contract To configure a retainer contract, perform the following steps: 1. By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, configure a non-stock item. In the **Sales account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab, we recommend that you specify a designated liability account to post related transactions instead of an income one. 1. In the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a deposit contract item. For details, see: [Create a deposit contract item](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/create-a-deposit-contract-item/). 1. Also in the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, create a service contract item that is provided recurrently and assign the deposit contract item to it. 1. By using the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window, create a contract template at your discretion. You do not add the deposit contract item to a contract template directly; you instead add the service contract item to the contract template, and the deposit contract item assigned to it is added automatically. For details, see: [Configure a contract template](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/prior-configuration/configure-a-contract-template/). 1. Initiate the contract in the way that suits your needs. The invoice that includes the prepayment sum is issued and you can proceed with contract fulfilment. For details, see: [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). 1. Enter contract usage. For details, see: [About contract usage recording](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-usage-recording/about-contract-usage-recording/). 1. Invoice the contract according to its schedule. For details, see: [About contract invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-invoicing/about-contract-invoicing/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a deposit contract item /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/retainer-contracts/create-a-deposit-contract-item section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a deposit contract item ## Before you proceed By using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, you must create a non-stock item to be used for the creation of deposit contract items. No special settings are required for this item; we recommend only that in the **Sales account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the window, you specify a designated liability account to post deposit-related transactions to. For details on configuring non-stock items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). 1. Go to the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Contract item** field, specify the unique ID of the deposit contract item. IDs of contract items are formed in accordance with the **CONTRACTITEM** segmented key. If the **Contract item** field contains the `` place holder, it means that auto-numbering is enabled for a key segment and the system will assign the ID automatically. Otherwise, you should specify the ID manually. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of the deposit contract item. 1. In the top part of the **Price options** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Maximum allowed quantity** and the **Minimum allowed quantity** fields, type the limits of the retainer quantity. 1. In the **Default quantity** field, type the quantity of retainers that is included in the contract by default. This value can be modified in a contract template or a contract, as long as it is within the allowed limits. 1. In the **Currency ID** field, select the currency of the contract item. Within each contract item, you should use non-stock items priced in the same currency. 1. In the **Setup and renewal** section, do the following: 1. In the **Setup item** field, select the non-stock item you have configured. 1. In the **Setup pricing** field, select the pricing policy. The following options are available: + **Use item price**: The base price of the non-stock item is used. If a price is configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class, then the price from the customer price class is used. + **Percent of item price**: The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the **Item price/percentage** field to the base price of the non-stock item. + **Enter manually**: The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract. 1. In the **Retain rate** field, specify the percent of the deposit amount at which the user viewing contract details will receive a system warning. 1. Select the **Deposit** check box to mark this contract item as the one to be used as the retainer. 1. Select the **Refundable** check box if you want to allow the retainer to be refunded if the contract is terminated. The retainer is refunded if both the contract template and the deposit contract item are marked as refundable. The balance of the retainer at the date of termination is refunded. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Now you can proceed to creating a contract item that represents a service provided recurrently. When you create the service contract item in the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window, you specify the deposit contract item you have configured in the **Deposit item** field on the **Price options** tab of this window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage non-stock items Manage non-stock items - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/manage-non-stock-items-overview page The sections below provide the description of how you can manage non-stock items if the Inventory module has been disabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage non-stock items - overview The sections below provide the description of how you can manage non-stock items if the Inventory module has been disabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). The sections below provide the description of how you can manage non-stock items if theInventory module has been disabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For details on managing non-stock items when the Inventory moduleis enabled, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). Non-stock items may be "products" that consist of no physical entity and thus cannot bestocked in warehouses (as with labour, services, or charges) or physical entities for which youdo not need to track quantities in a warehouse because very small quantities are required.Manystores sell items that cannot be found on their shelves (for instance, product warranties) orservices (such as product assembly, installation, and customisation). Since non-stock items do not require tracking of quantities, you can maintain only standardcosts and base price information for them. ## Types of non-stock items Visma Net supports the following types of non-stock items: Non-stock item : A general type of non-stock item generally bought for internal needs orfor using in sales but not for selling separately Labour : A non-stock item mostly used as a source of general ledger accounts for recordingsales of labour Service : A non-stock item to designate service fees Charge : A non-stock item that represents specific type of charges Expense : A non-stock item that represents specific type of expense ## Settings for non-stock items You can maintain information about non-stock items and their properties by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window available in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces.The listbelow describes some of the settings that you can provide for a non-stock item by using thiswindow: + **Item ID**: Every non-stock item is assigned a unique identifier based on the **INVENTORY** segmented key. You can configure item IDs by specifying settings forthe **INVENTORY** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. For the key, you can define how many segments it is to have, what valuesmay be used, whether these values should be validated, and whether auto-numbering should beused in one of the segments. If required, you can change the ID for any non-stock itemmanually by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **Units of measure**: For each non-stock item, you can select the unit of measure (UoM)used as base unit for the item and specify conversion rules for them and for other UoMs usedfor the item. You can select UoMs from the list of those available for the item class or typenew UoMs manually. Note that every conversion rule is specified with respect to the UoM chosenas the item's base unit. + **General ledger accounts and subaccounts**: The general ledger accounts and subaccountsused for non-stock items are limited to sales accounts, and expense accounts. Correspondingsubaccounts are used to detail records within each account. The default expense subaccountis generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine expense sub.** from field inthe [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, and the default sales subaccount isspecified in the **Combine sales sub.** from field in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. + **Valuation method**: Only the standard cost method applies to non-stock items. + **Price information**: For non-stock items of all types, you can specify price classesand assign prices that become effective on specific dates. + **Attributes**: You can track additional information for non-stock items by using theattributes functionality. ## Labour items Non-stock items of the **Labour** type are processed in the system differently fromnon-stock items of other types. They are used as a source of general ledger accounts fortransactions that the system generates as a result of contract and project invoicing. For labouritems, you can track costs, define prices, and maintain the price lists. For more information,see: [About labour items](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/about-labour-items/). ## Non-stock item costs To make it possible to enter the non-stock item cost and use it in the non-stock item pricecalculation, Visma Net enables you to maintain standard costs for non-stock items. The standard costs are determined outside of the system by cost experts, and the values shouldinclude some of the indirect and direct costs allocated. You can specify the standard cost for anon-stock item as a pending cost by using the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Along with the pending cost, you can specify a date when the cost willbecome effective.Standard costs are defined with respect to the base unit of the stock item. If you want to update standard costs for non-stock items, use the **Price/cost**information tab of the window: Enter a pending cost and the date for the new cost and selectthe **Update cost** action.The system displays only the last cost and current cost. Thehistorical costs that were effective before the last cost are not stored in the database. ## Prices for non-stock items You can maintain default prices for non-stock items and specify them for the base units in thebase currency. You can enter default prices individually for each non-stock item by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window and update them at any time on a per-item basis. Default prices have noexpiration dates and cannot be specified as based on item quantity. For more information, see:[About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/). ## Topics + [About labour items](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/about-labour-items/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About labour items /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-non-stock-items/about-labour-items page Among other products, your company may sell the labour of its employees, which is an item that consists of no physical entity and thus cannot be stored in warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About labour items Among other products, your company may sell the labour of its employees, which is an item that consists of no physical entity and thus cannot be stored in warehouses. Among other products, your company may sell the labour of its employees, which is an item that consists of no physical entity and thus cannot be stored in warehouses. In Visma Net, you can define a certain type of labour available for sale (that is, a type performed regularly by your company) by a labour item. A labour item is a non-stock item that contains information about the default price and the sales account to be used for transactions. The system extracts data from labour items for each invoice that the system generates when a case or an activity has been invoiced. You need to create a new labour item each time you want to sell the same type of labour at a different price (for instance, you might charge more for labour performed by an expert than for labour performed by a junior employee) or with a different sales account (for example, if you invoice a case associated with a different contract). To ensure that the system will be able to obtain the required information from each labour item when an invoice is generated, you need to associate this labour item with the appropriate entity (that is, an employee, a case, a project, or a contract), which may depend on the type of the invoicing process that you use. The uses of labour items are described in the topics below. If no labour items are specified for the appropriate entities, the system will not generate the invoice. ## Case invoicing For cases whose case class uses the **Per activity** invoicing mode, the system uses the first available labour item specified in the following places in the system (listed in the order in which the system performs the search for available labour item values): 1. The **Employee overrides** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for the contract specified for the case being invoiced: On this tab, a specific labour item can be specified for a particular employee (selected in the **Employee** column). Also, the table can include a row with **All employees** selected in the **Employee** column and a particular labour item that will be used for all other employees. Moreover, on this tab, a separate labour item can be specified for each earning type. 1. The **Employees** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window for the project associated with the activities related to the case being invoiced: On this tab, labour items can be specified for a particular employee: one specific labour item for each earning type. 1. The **Labour item overrides** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activities related to the case being invoiced: On this tab, a specific labour item can be specified for each earning type. 1. The **General info** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activities related to the case being invoiced: On this tab, a labour item can be specified that is to be used for the employee regardless of the earning type. For further information about the invoicing of contract-related cases, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/). ## Activity invoicing When activities are being invoiced, the system uses the first available labour item specified in the following places in the system (listed in the order in which the system performs the search for available labour item values): 1. The **Employees** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window for the project associated with the activity being invoiced: On this tab, you can specify labour items for a particular employee, one specific labour item for each earning type. 1. The **Labour item overrides** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activity being invoiced: On this tab, a specific labour item can be specified for each earning type. 1. The **General info** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window for the employee who is the owner of the activity being invoiced: On this tab, a labour item can be specified that is to be used for the employee regardless of the earning type.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage mailings /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage mailings Manage mailings - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/manage-mailings-overview page Efficient processing of electronic documents can help organisations reduce costs and optimise investments, so they can stay competitive in today's dynamically changing economy. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage mailings - overview Efficient processing of electronic documents can help organisations reduce costs and optimise investments, so they can stay competitive in today's dynamically changing economy. Efficient processing of electronic documents can help organisations reduce costs and optimise investments, so they can stay competitive in today's dynamically changing economy. In Visma Net, for each customer, you can specify how your organisation sends documents to the business: electronically or through postal mail (on paper). For businesses that want to receive electronic documents, you can easily set up the sending of documents by email, such as invoices and customer statements. You can configure the system to simultaneously send emails to employees who oversee operations with particular customers. You can send the customer any of the following types of correspondence: ## Report-based You can use customer ledger reports to send invoices, notes, statements, and dunning letters by using the **Send** action in a report window. For a Visma Net report, you can control the look and feel in addition to the reporting functions. You can use the default look and feel of the report or customise the report by using the **Report Designer**. You can provide settings specifying who will receive the report-based email and which format should be used, as well as possibly a specific template to be used as the email body (for email personalisation). ## Window-related You can send an email regarding a specific invoice by using the **Send email** action jn the window that displays the document. These emails will be listed under the **Activity** menu in the window title bar. ## Mailings For each customer, you can configure a number of mailings. The mailing body is based on a notification template that may contain placeholders and can be modified easily. You can assign a report that will generate a document to be sent as a mailing attachment. A customer's mailing settings are used for mass processing documents and for emailing a particular invoice. Template-based emails can be used, for example, to notify customer contacts about expiration of their credit cards. When the system generates such emails for multiple customers, it replaces placeholders with the particular customer's information, such as card type, partial card number, and expiration date. For details on mailings, see: [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/). By default, the actual sending of the emails is not performed right away. Emails sent by all the mentioned ways are gathered in a queue in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window, from which they can be sent. This topic will help you to configure and use mailings. It describes the mailing types, the workflow, and the most common tasks you will perform. ## Topics + [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/) + [Set up mass processing of mailings](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/set-up-mass-processing-of-mailings/) + [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About mailings for customers /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers page For each customer, you can configure a number of mailings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About mailings for customers For each customer, you can configure a number of mailings. The mailing body is based on a notification template that may contain placeholders and can be modified easily. You can assign a report that will generate a document to be sent as a mailing attachment. A customer's mailing settings are used for mass processing documents and for emailing a particular invoice. Template-based emails can be used, for example, to notify customer contacts about expiration of their credit cards. When the system generates such emails for multiple customers, it replaces placeholders with the particular customer's information, such as card type, partial card number, and expiration date. In this topic you will read about ways to correspond with a customer, predefined mailings offered by Visma Net, their components and workflow. ## Mailing components A mailing is made up of the following: + **Identifier**: The mailing identifier or **Mailing ID** is used to configure a mailing workflow that uses automation steps. Visma Net provides a default mailing workflow for predefined mailings. + **Body**: A notification template can be assigned to any mailing to serve as the email body. The body consists of text that can be personalised while the email is generated with the help of placeholders used in the template. These placeholders are replaced with information from the customer record. You can modify a notification template to comply with your company policies. + **Attachment**: For a mailing, you can select a report that will generate a document to be sent as an attachment. A report holds data from the system constructed in the required format. Visma Net provides default reports to generate invoices, notes, statements, and dunning letters. A report may also provide text for the mailing body. You can select the attachment format from the list of supported formats. + You need to specify either a notification template or a report for a mailing. If a notification template is not specified, the text for the email body is taken from the report settings. + You can attach multiple reports in the same format or different formats to one mailing. + If the email body contains no specific text and the HTML format is selected in the email settings of the report, the report is inserted in the email body in the HTML format instead of being attached to the email. ## Mailing workflow The mailing workflow consists of the following steps: 1. **Mailing configuration**: You can set up mailings for a group of customers by using [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window or for a specific customer, by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. You can configure the list of mailings and recipients, as well as notification template and attachment settings. Customer class provides the default settings for the included customers, but these default settings can be overridden to make the mailing configuration more specific. Mailings modified for specific customer (in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window) are marked as overridden (the **Overriden** check box is selected). If you change mailings configuration in a customer class, these changes affect mailings of all customers of this class, except those that were modified specifically for a customer (overridden). 1. **Mailing mass processing configuration**: You can control whether invoices and statements are available for mass emailing. For details, see [Set up mass processing of mailings](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/set-up-mass-processing-of-mailings/). 1. **Document preparation and preview**: Generally, you prepare the email and the attached document, if any, and then preview them in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. If mass-emailing is being done, the preparation of statements may be a time-consuming process; thus, mass preparation and preview of statements are separated. 1. **Email sending**: By default, the system doesn't perform the actual sending of the emails right away. Prepared emails are gathered in the queue shown on the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window; use this window when you're ready to actually send them. > [!NOTE] > This is the default email workflow; consult your system administrator to find out whether it has been modified. ## Predefined mailings for customers You can view the list of predefined mailings and add new ones by using the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Here you can configure the basic settings of each mailing, these settings will be used by default when you add a mailing to a customer class or a customer. See table 1 below. When you create a new customer class all mailings (predefined and manually created) are added to new customer class by default. Also, if the Inventory workspace is activated, the mailings listed in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window are added to new customer class. You can modify this list, leaving those that you need for customers of this class. See table 2 below. |Mailing|Purpose|Usage| |---|---|---| |INVOICE|To send customer invoices|To generate emails about multiple invoices, use the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. To send a particular invoice, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window.| |STATEMENT|To inform customers about their balances with your organisation|To generate emails for multiple statements or a single statement, use the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window.| |STATEMENTMC|To inform customers about their balances (in multi-currency format) with your organisation|To generate emails for multiple statements or a single statement in multi-currency format, use the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window.| |DUNNINGLETTER|To inform customers and your employees (users) about past due balances of customers|To generate emails with dunning letters, use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window.| |Mailing|Purpose|Usage| |---|---|---| |QUOTE|To inform customers about their quotes|To generate the emails for multiple quotes, use the [Print/email orders (SO502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000/) window. To generate an email for a particular quote, use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window.| |PICK LIST|To define different reports for printing pick lists for different customer classes|To print multiple pick lists, use the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. To print a pick list for a particular order, use the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window.| |SALES ORDER|To inform customers about open sales orders|To generate the emails for multiple orders, use the [Print/email orders (SO502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000/) window. To generate an email for a specific order, use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window.| |SHIPMENT|To inform customers when their orders ship|To email one or more shipment confirmations, use the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window.| |SO INVOICE|To inform customers that their invoices are ready for release|To generate the emails for multiple sales invoices, use the [Process sales invoices (SO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000/) window. To generate an email for a particular invoice, use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window.|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Send invoices by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email page You can email invoices and notes by using one of the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoices by email You can email invoices and notes by using one of the following windows: + To email multiple invoices and other customer ledger documents at a time, use the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. + To email one invoice or note, use the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Open the invoice in the window; in the **Actions** menu of the window toolbar, select the **Email invoice** action. ## Before you proceed Before you can email invoices and memos to customers, the respective mailing has to be configured in the system. You can use the [Set up a dunning letter mailing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-a-dunning-letter-mailing/) as an example of configuring a mailing. 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field of the top part, select **Email invoice**. 1. Optional: For invoices associated with contract servicing, select the user or the work group (in the **Assigned to** or **Work group** field) to whom the documents are assigned. You can use filtering to display a narrower range of documents when you get into this window. 1. Do one of the following: + To send all listed invoices, click **Process all**. + To send the selected invoices, select the unlabeled check boxes for the documents you intend to email, and click **Process**. If the emails containing documents were generated successfully, the system marks them with green check marks. The system lists prepared emails in a queue in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window, which you can use to review and actually send the emails. + What is next? [Check sent email status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status/) If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes in the email in the Pending emails window. See: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add other attachments to invoice sent by email /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/add-other-attachments-to-invoice-sent-by-email section To add other attachments to an invoice you send by email, you have to send the email from the Reports workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add other attachments to invoice sent by email To add other attachments to an invoice you send by email, you have to send the email from the Reports workspace. ## To email an invoice with additional attachment(s) 1. Go to the [Invoice - English (AR64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-english-ar64101s/) window (or invoice layout in any language). 1. Click the **Document type** drop-down list and select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Reference number** field, enter or select the invoice number. 1. Click **Run report**. A PDF file with your invoice is displayed. 1. Click **Send**. The **Email activity** window opens. 1. In the top right corner of the window, click **Files**. A message tells you to save before you can go on, click **OK**. The **Files** dialogue box opens. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add other attachments to your email. The **Upload file** dialogue box is displayed. 1. Select your files and click **Upload**. 1. Close the **Files** dialogue box. In the top right corner of the **Email activity** window, you will see that the number of attachments has been updated. 1. Fill in the email address of the recipient, the subject (mandatory) and any message text that you want to include. 1. Click **Send**. Email several invoices or credit notes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/email-several-invoices-or-credit-notes page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email several invoices or credit notes ## Before you start Before you can see any documents in this window, they must have been released and activated for this distribution type. See: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) You can email selected documents, or mark them not to be emailed. 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Email invoice/note**. A list is displayed, with all the documents that are available with the selected filter. 1. Select the documents you want to email. 1. Click the **Process** button to email only the selected documents, or click **Process all** to email them all. You can release and emailprint a single document from the[Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. See: [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/). ## What is next? [Check sent email status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status/) If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or receiver of the email, you can still delete or do your changes in the email in the Pending emails window. See: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice ## Before you start As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: [About Know your customer (KYC)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-know-your-customer-kyc/). To see invoices in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window, they must have the status **Released** and you must check that you have activated AutoInvoice for the customer. See [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/). 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Send to AutoInvoice**. A list opens, which contains all the invoices that are available with the selected filter. 1. Select the invoices and credit notes in the table that you want to send to AutoInvoice. 1. Click the **Process** button to send only the selected invoices and credit notes to AutoInvoice, or click **Process all** to send them all to AutoInvoice.. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed ## What is next? [Check sent email status for AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice/). If you regret sending an email due to an incorrect attachment or email recipient, you can: [Change the recipient address for a pending email](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Print and send invoices or credit notes by regular mail /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-and-send-invoices-or-credit-notes-by-regular-mail page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print and send invoices or credit notes by regular mail ## Before you start Before you can see any documents in this window, they must have been released and activated for this distribution type. See: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Print invoice/note**. A list opens, which contains all the invoices that are available with the selected filter. 1. Select the invoices/credit notes you want to print/send in the table. 1. Click the **Process** button to print/send only the selected invoices/credit notes, or click **Process all** to print/send all invoices/credit notes at once. 1. In the preview of the invoices, give the invoices a final quality check. 1. Click **Print**. You can also release and print an invoice from within the same window. See: [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Print several invoices or credit notes /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-several-invoices-or-credit-notes page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print several invoices or credit notes ## Before you start Before you can see any documents in this window, they must have been released and activated for this distribution type. See: [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) 1. Go to the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. In the **Action** drop-down list, select **Print invoice/note**. A list opens, which contains all the invoices that are available with the selected filter. 1. In the table, select the documents you want to print. 1. Click the **Process** button to print only the selected documents, or click **Process all** to print all the documents displayed in the table. 1. In the preview window, do a final quality check of each document. 1. Click **Print**. You can release and emailprint a single document from the[Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. See: [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Set up mass processing of mailings /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/set-up-mass-processing-of-mailings section You can specify how the customer prefers to receive invoices and statements: printed and sent through postal mail, or sent electronically by email. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up mass processing of mailings You can specify how the customer prefers to receive invoices and statements: printed and sent through postal mail, or sent electronically by email. You can specify how the customer prefers to receive invoices and statements: printed and sent through postal mail, or sent electronically by email. Customer media type preferences also affect documents' availability for mass processing. By using the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window, you can specify these preferences on the customer class level, which provides default settings for customers of the class, as the following steps describe. (You can override these default settings for each customer individually.) If a document has already been printed or emailed, it is not listed on the mass processing forms. The system checks the values of the **Printed** and **Emailed** attributes for a document when it builds the list for mass processing, and the document is considered printed or emailed if the corresponding check box is selected. You can view the current values of these attributes on the **Invoicing address** tab of an invoice, in the **Print and email options** area. Attributes are affected only by respective actions performed in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class that you want to configure preferences for. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Default print and email settings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Print invoices** check box if you want to make invoices available for printing in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) 1. Select the **Send invoices by email** check box if you want to make invoices available for emailing in the [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) window. 1. Select the **Print statements** check box if you want to make statements available for printing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. Select the **Send statements by email** check box if you want to make statements available for emailing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. Select the **Multi-currency statements** check box if you want to make statements in multi-currency format available for printing and emailing in the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage dunning letters /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage dunning letters Manage dunning letters - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview page Dunning letters are letters of payment collection used to inform your customers of past-due invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage dunning letters - overview Dunning letters are letters of payment collection used to inform your customers of past-due invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. The form and content of dunning letters generally vary depending on the country in which you run your business. Usually, multiple letters are sent in a sequence. You can create the text of successive dunning letters, varying in tone and content from a polite first letter informing the customer about unpaid invoices to a last letter mentioning all allowable collection options. We recommend that these letters be sent at carefully selected intervals so that a customer with intent to pay has enough time between letters to settle all invoices before the arrival of the next letter. The functionality is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The following topics describe how to set up and manage the dunning process. ## Topics + [About dunning process setup](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-setup/) + [About dunning process by customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-customer/) + [About dunning process by document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-document/) + [Set up the dunning process](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-the-dunning-process/) + [Set up a dunning letter mailing](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-a-dunning-letter-mailing/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About dunning process setup /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-setup page Visma Net provides you with capabilities that ease the process of producing dunning letters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dunning process setup Visma Net provides you with capabilities that ease the process of producing dunning letters. Visma Net provides you with capabilities that ease the process of producing dunning letters. For all customers, the dunning process checks customers' due documents and gives you the ability to prepare and send reminder letters of different levels of severity. To start producing dunning letters, you define the process settings that suit your company (one-time setup) and then you run the process when needed. As a result of executing the process, you have prepared dunning letters that can be emailed to customers or printed to be sent by postal mail. In this topic, you will read about the dunning process options offered by Visma Net and the general steps of setting up the process. ## Dunning process options In Visma Net, you can select how the system prepares dunning letters: by grouping overdue documents by customer account (the **By customer** option) or by grouping overdue documents by customer and by the dunning level of a document ( **By document** ). You select the appropriate option in the **Dunning process** field on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. By default, the **By customer** option is set. If you want more manual control over the process, you can select the **By document** option. The dunning process workflow and the rules of generating dunning letters depend on the selected option. We recommend that you make the **Dunning process** selection when you begin implementing the process and keep that setting. You can switch from **By customer** to **By document**, but switching from **By document** to **By customer**is not recommended. You can use the following windows to view the history of dunning letters that have been produced: + [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/): Shows the history of dunning letters that have been produced for the selected customer account + [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/): Displays the history of dunning letters that have been produced for documents of the selected customer account ## Dunning level of a document In Visma Net, a dunning level is associated with a particular document (invoice or note). The system assigns a dunning level to a document that is equal to the level of the last dunning letter that included this document. If the document has not been included in a dunning letter yet, the system sets 0 dunning level for the document. You can view the current dunning level of a document in the **Dunning information** section on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Also, in this section, you can view the date of the last released dunning letter that included this document. ## Exclusion from the dunning process You can exclude a customer account from the dunning process, regardless of the dunning process option selected. To do this for a customer, you should clear both the **Send dunning letters by email** and **Print dunning letters** check boxes in the **Print and email settings** section on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. If you prepare dunning letters by document (that is, if the **By document** option is selected in the **Dunning process** field), you can exclude a particular document from the dunning process by selecting the **Revoked** check box that appears in the **Dunning Info** section of a document (the Sales invoices window). For instance, suppose that the dunning level of a particular document is 1, and it is time to prepare dunning letters; however, the customer has notified you that the invoice is settled, but due to bank holidays, the payment is late. By selecting the **Revoked** check box for the document, you can exclude this invoice from the dunning process to avoid negatively affecting your company's relations with this customer. > [!NOTE] > If you prepare dunning letters by customer, a particular document cannot be excluded from the dunning process. ## Dunning fee collection You may want to charge your customers for the expenses your company incurs while sending dunning letters. On the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, you can specify the amount of the dunning fee for each level. You specify dedicated non-stock item that provides a sales account and a subaccount (if applicable) to register the collected fee, and a tax category. > [!NOTE] > Make sure that a correct account and a subaccount (if applicable) are specified for the non-stock item in the **Sales account** and **Sales sub.** fields on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. When a dunning letter of a particular level is released, the system generates an invoice for customer with the fee amount specified for the level. This invoice is created with the **Balanced** status. You can adjust the fee amount, if needed, and then release the invoice in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If the dunning fee amount is set to zero, no invoice is generated. If you will not need to adjust any dunning fee invoices, you can configure the automatic release of the dunning fee invoices when a corresponding dunning letters are released. To do this, select the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > The amount of the dunning fee is converted to the customer's currency if the **Enable currency override** check box is cleared in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. ## Appearance and content of dunning letters In Visma Net the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) is used to generate a printed version of a dunning letter. You can control the look and feel of this report in addition to the reporting functions. You can use the default look and feel of the report, or customise the report by using the Report Designer. You can provide settings specifying who will receive the report-based email and which format should be used, as well as possibly a specific template to be used as the email body (for email personalisation). By using the report window, you can print a dunning letter by using the **Print** action on the report toolbar or email it by using the **Send** action. By default, the system generates an email based on the **DunningLetterNotification** notification template, which you can edit by using the [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window. If you want to print or email multiple letters at once, you can use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) mass-processing window. The mass-emailing process requires the mailing with the **DUNNINGLETTER** identifier to be configured for the customer accounts that you plan to notify. ## Dunning process configuration You need to perform the following steps to set up the dunning process: 1. **Dunning process setup**: You can configure the process of generating and sending dunning letters on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can specify the settings for the levels, the dunning fee details, and the sending criteria for each letter in the sequence. Also, you can define the number of days you offer a customer to settle the due document. 1. **Report modification**: If the default design of the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) window report does not suit you, you can modify it by using the Report Designer. 1. **Mailing configuration**: If you plan to send dunning letter by email, you need to configure the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing for a customer class or a customer. If you want to send an email attachment with the details of due documents, select the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) to generate it. When you have finished setting up the process, you may proceed to preparing and sending dunning letters.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About dunning process by customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-customer page You select the By customer option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to define that the system groups overdue documents by customer account when it prepares dunning letters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dunning process by customer You select the By customer option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to define that the system groups overdue documents by customer account when it prepares dunning letters. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). In general, you prepare dunning letters as follows: 1. You select the customer accounts for which you want to prepare dunning letters and initiate the preparation. > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit notes that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. You print or send by email the prepared dunning letters. In this topic, you will read about the letter generation rules, the dunning process workflow, and the way the system changes the status of the dunning letter. ## Dunning letter generation rules When you group overdue documents by customer account, the generation of the letters is based on the following rules: + The letter of the **first** level is generated for a customer account if the customer has at least one invoice or note whose number of days past the due date exceeds the number of days specified for the first level in the **Days past due** field on the **Dunning settings** tab. The document is marked with the first dunning level when you initiate letter preparation. + The letter of the **second** level is generated if the customer has at least one document with the first level that is still unpaid and the number of days this document is past due exceeds the number specified for the second level in the **Days past due** field. If there are other overdue documents (with 0 level), the system includes in the letter these documents as well, and increases their dunning level to 1. The system increases the dunning level to 2 for the document whose number of days past due exceeds the number specified for the second level. + The letters of the **next** levels in the sequence are generated similarly to the letters of the second level. + The letter of the **last** level for the customer is generated if at least one document listed in the previous letter is unpaid and the number of days this document is past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level. When this letter is prepared, the system selects the **Final reminder** check box for this letter in the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. In this case, after letter generation, the customer account is excluded from the dunning process and can be selected on the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window, so you can put this account on the credit hold. > [!NOTE] > If for some reason the process of dunning letters preparation was delayed for a period of time, the system will shift the dates of dunning letters generation for the period of the delay. In your company's dunning letters, you can notify customers receiving the letters about all open documents, unpaid (the due date is still in the future) and overdue (the due date has passed). To do this, you select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box on the **Dunning settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window. In the printed version of these letters, the unpaid due documents will be listed at the end, and the **Falling due** column contains the word **Current** instead of the due date. > [!NOTE] > The system generates the printed version of a dunning letter with the help of the [Dunning letter (AR661000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/) report. You can use the default look and feel of the report or customise the report by using the Report designer. ## Dunning letter statuses During the processing of a dunning letter, the system changes the status of the letter as follows: Released : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and released and can be printed, sent by email, or voided. If a non-zero dunning fee was specified for the level of this letter (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window), the system also creates the invoice for the dunning fee during the release of the dunning letter. If the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window) is selected, the system automatically releases the invoice when the corresponding dunning letter is released. Voided : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been voided, the system decreases the dunning level for each document that was included to this letter, and will process these documents when you prepare a dunning letter for this customer account again. ## Letter preparation You use the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window to prepare dunning letters. The table lists the customer accounts that have at least one overdue document. You can generate dunning letters for all listed customers or only those you select. After you have selected the customer accounts that you want to process (by selecting the check boxes in their rows), you click **Process** (on the window toolbar) to prepare dunning letters. You can instead prepare dunning letters for all records in the table by clicking **Process all**. If the letters have been generated successfully, the system displays a green check mark on the window toolbar. The letters are prepared with the **Released** status and are ready for printing or emailing. > [!NOTE] > You can schedule the preparation of dunning letters to be performed automatically by using the automation schedule functionality. When a dunning letter is prepared, the system updates the information in the **Dunning letter info** section on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. For each document involved, the system updates the date of the last released dunning letter that included the document, and increases the document dunning level by one. ## Letter previewing and sending You use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window to print released dunning letters or initiate the emailing of them. In this window, you can print dunning letters to be sent through postal mail, or generate emails that you can preview before sending them in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This is the default workflow of sending emails; consult your system administrator to find out whether it has been modified. Letters from all branches can be sent separately or can be consolidated (on generation) into a single letter to the customer. This is controlled by the **Consolidate dunning letters for all branches** check box on the **General settings** tab of the Customer ledger preferences window. In the **Dunning letter from branch** field on this tab, you should also select the branch that will be specified as the sender.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About dunning process by document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/about-dunning-process-by-document page You select the By document option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to set that the system groups overdue documents by customer account and by document dunning level when it prepares dunning letters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dunning process by document You select the By document option in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window to set that the system groups overdue documents by customer account and by document dunning level when it prepares dunning letters. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). You can prepare a separate dunning letter for each document, or you can group the documents of a customer account with different levels into one letter. If you group documents into one letter, in the printed version, the documents are grouped by level. In general, you prepare dunning letters as follows: 1. You select the documents for which you want to prepare dunning letters and initiate the preparation. > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit notes that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. Optional: You edit the lists of included documents (if needed) and release the prepared dunning letters. 1. You can skip this step if you have enabled the automatic release of letters. 1. You print or send by email the reviewed and released dunning letters. You can use the following windows to view the history of dunning letters that have been produced: + [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/): Displays the history of dunning letters that have been produced for the selected customer account + [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/): Shows the history of dunning letters that have been produced for documents of the selected customer account In this topic, you will read about the letter generation rules, the dunning process workflow, and the way the system changes the status of the dunning letter. ## Dunning letter generation rules When you group overdue documents by customer account and document dunning level, the generation of the letters is based on the following rules: + The letter of the **first** level is generated for a document for which the number of days past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level in the **Days past due** field on the **Dunning settings** tab. The document is marked with the first dunning level. + The letter of the **second** level is generated when the document (whose level is 1) is still unpaid and the number of days the document is past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level in the **Days past due**. The system increases the dunning level of the document. (If you have only two levels defined, see the description for the letter for the last level.) + The letters of the **next** levels in the series are generated similarly to the letters of the second level. + The letter of the **last** level for the document is generated if the document is still unpaid and the number of days the document is past due exceeds the number of days specified for this level. When this letter is prepared, the system selects the **Final reminder** check box for this letter in the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. In this case, the customer account can be selected on the [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) window, so you can put this account on credit hold. The rest of the overdue documents of this customer account are still included in the dunning process. > [!NOTE] > If for some reason the process of dunning letters preparation was delayed for a period of time, the system will shift the dates of dunning letters generation for the period of the delay. If you want to notify customers receiving dunning letters about all open documents, unpaid (the due date is still in the future), due (the due date has passed), and overdue (the number of days past due has exceeded the number of days past due specified for the level), you select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. (Unpaid and due documents are marked with a level of zero.) With this check box selected, the system includes open documents as follows: If you prepare a dunning letter for a document associated with the first level, the system includes overdue, unpaid, and due documents. When you prepare the next dunning letter for this document, the system includes overdue and unpaid documents, but no due ones. ## Dunning letter statuses During the processing of a dunning letter, the system changes its status as follows: Draft : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter. If the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box is selected on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the system skips the **Draft** status. Released : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been released and can be printed, sent by email, or voided. If a non-zero dunning fee was specified for the level of this letter (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window), the invoice for the dunning fee was also created during the release of the dunning letter. If the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box (on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window) is selected, the system automatically releases the invoice when the corresponding dunning letter is released. Voided : This status indicates that the dunning letter has been voided, the system decreased the dunning level for each document that was included to this letter and these documents are available for preparing a new letter with the **Draft** status. ## Letter preparation You use the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window to prepare dunning letters. The table lists the overdue documents grouped by customer and by document dunning level. For instance, if a customer account has two overdue documents with different levels, the system will display two rows in the table. If a customer account has two documents with the same level, the system will group the documents into one row. The way by which you select and process documents affects the contents of the letter prepared. If you want to prepare separate dunning letters for documents of the same customer account but each with a different dunning level, you should select a one document and click **Process** (in the window toolbar) and then select the next one and process it. If you want the system to group into one letter documents of the same customer but with different dunning levels, you should select all such documents and click **Process**. After you have selected the documents that you want to process (by selecting the check boxes in their rows), you click **Process** to prepare these dunning letters. You can instead prepare dunning letters for all records in the table by clicking **Process all**. If the letters have been generated successfully, the system displays a green check mark in the window toolbar. If the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box is cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, the letters are prepared with the **Draft** status and you need to release them; if the check box is selected, the letters are prepared with the **Released** status and are ready for printing or emailing. > [!NOTE] > You can schedule the preparation of dunning letters to be performed automatically by using the automation schedule functionality. ## Letter editing and releasing If the **Automatically Release Dunning Letters** check box is cleared in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, each generated letter has the **Draft** status, and you can adjust the list of documents included for each letter or delete the draft of the letter itself. The [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window displays the list of prepared dunning letters. You can highlight the row in the table with the letter you want to edit and click **View dunning letter**in the table toolbar. The system navigates you to the [Dunning letters (AR306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letters-ar306000/) window, where you can view and adjust the list of documents. If you have deleted either the documents from the list or the letter itself (with all the documents it included), the system will process these documents the next time you prepare dunning letters. On this window, you can exclude a particular document from the dunning process by selecting the document in the table and clicking **Revoke** in the table toolbar. The system removes the document from the list and marks it as excluded from the dunning process by selecting the **Revoked** check box in the **Dunning letter info** section on the **Financial details** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window for each document involved. (You can select or clear this check box in the Sales invoices window as well.) The deletion or exclusion of documents from the list may influence the level of the dunning letter that is displayed on the **Dunning letter level** in the top part of the window. The system uses the value of this field to define the dunning fee amount for which an invoice should be generated. If there are documents with different dunning levels included in the letter, the system sets the highest document level (that is, the level with the largest value) as the dunning level of the letter. If you delete documents with the highest level, the system decreases the level of the letter. By using the [Dunning letters (AR306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letters-ar306000/) window, you can also release the letter and then print or email it (or void it, if needed). In the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window, you can release groups of dunning letters by selecting the **Release dunning letter** action and processing the selected documents or all listed documents. When a dunning letter is released manually or automatically, the system updates the information in the **Dunning letter info** section on the **Financial details** tab of the Sales invoices window. For each document involved, the system updates the date of the last released dunning letter that included the document, and increases the document dunning level by one. ## Letter previewing and sending You use the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window to print released dunning letters or initiate the emailing of them. In this window, you can print dunning letters to be sent through postal mail, or generate emails that you can preview before sending them in the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This is the default workflow of sending emails; consult your system administrator to find out whether it has been modified. Letters from all branches can be sent separately or can be consolidated (on generation) into a single letter to the customer. This is controlled by the **Consolidate dunning letters for all branches** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. In the **Dunning letter from branch** field on this tab, you should also select the branch that will be specified as the sender.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up the dunning process /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-the-dunning-process section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up the dunning process ## Before you proceed If you plan to charge a dunning fee, you need to create a non-stock item (or use existing one) that will provide an account and a subaccount (if applicable) to register the collected fee, and a VAT category. 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. In the **Dunning process** field on the **Dunning settings** tab, select how the system prepares dunning letters. The following options are available: + **By customer**: Select this option if you want the system to prepare dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer account. When you select this option, the system selects the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box and sets it as read-only. + **By document**: Select this option if you want the system to prepare dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer and by document dunning level. 1. Optional: Select the **Automatically release dunning letters** check box if you want the system to automatically release dunning letters after preparation is completed. In this case, you will not be able to edit the list of overdue documents or delete the letter draft. The field is available for editing if the **By document** option was selected in the **Dunning process** field. 1. Select the **Include other unpaid documents** check box if you want the system to automatically include documents that are not yet overdue in the list of due documents in a dunning letter. This is the default value for the **Include other unpaid documents** check box in the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters. 1. Optional: If you want to collect a fee for each dunning letter you send (with the amount specified for each level), in the **Item ID** field, specify a non-stock item configured for this purpose. 1. Optional: Select the **Automatically release dunning fee documents** check box if you want the system to automatically release an invoice for the applicable dunning fee when the corresponding dunning letter is released. 1. In the table, do the following: 1. Add a row. The added row is filled with default values. The **Dunning letter level** column is read-only. 1. In the **Days past due** column, type the number of days to be used for comparison with the number of days the invoice is past its due date. 1. In the **Days to settle** column, type the number of days that will be added to the letter date to calculate the deadline date for the payment. The payment deadline date is included in the [Dunning letter (AR6611000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/). 1. In the **Description** column, type the description of this level. 1. Optional: In the **Dunning fee** column, type the amount of the fee that will be assessed for this level. If you specify a dunning fee for any row, make sure that the non-stock item is specified; see Step 5. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat Step 7 for each level you need.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up a dunning letter mailing /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/set-up-a-dunning-letter-mailing section You use the default mailing with the DUNNINGLETTER identifier to send dunning letters via email. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a dunning letter mailing You use the default mailing with the DUNNINGLETTER identifier to send dunning letters via email. You use the default mailing with the **DUNNINGLETTER** identifier to send dunning letters via email. To configure a mailing for a group of customers, you can create a customer class or use an existing class. In this case, the mailing configuration is copied to each customer account of this customer class. ## Before you proceed You should set up dunning process in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Make sure that the text of the email template **DunningLetterNotification** (used for the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing) complies with your corporate policies. To do this, open the template by using the [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window, and edit the template, if required. The look and feel of the attachment is defined with the [Dunning letter (AR6611000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/). 1. Go to the [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. 1. In the **Class ID** field, select the customer class you want to configure the mailing for. 1. On the **Mailing settings** tab, in the **Mailings** table, do the following: The table may already have a row for the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing with default settings. In this case, check that it is configured as described in the following substeps. 1. Add a row. In the **Mailing ID** column of the new row, select the **DUNNINGLETTER** mailing. 1. In the **Branch** column of the row, select the branch on behalf of which the emails for the mailing will be sent. Leave the **Branch** column blank to use the same mailing settings for all branches. 1. In the **Email account** column, select the email account the mailing is to be sent from. 1. In the **Report** column, select the report to be used for generating the dunning letter document, which will be sent as an attachment. 1. In the **Notification template** column, select the **DunningLetterNotification** notification template, which will be used to compose the body of the email. 1. In the **Format** column, select the attachment format. If the format specified in this mailing does not match the format preferences of a contact, the attachment will be sent in the format preferred by the contact. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the mailing. 1. In the **Recipients** table, add the types of contacts to receive dunning letters. The system will automatically load the actual email address that corresponds to the added contact type when a new customer account of this customer class is created. Select the attachment format preferred by the contact. Make sure the contact is active, and specify whether the contact should receive a blind carbon copy of the emails that will be generated for this mailing. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can adjust these mailing settings to serve the preferences of a particular customer by using the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. After you complete these steps, you can prepare dunning letters and email them to inform your customers of invoices that are past due by using the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) and [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) windows.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare dunning letters by document /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-document page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare dunning letters by document ## Before you start [Enable or disable dunning letter management](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-dunning-letter-management/) [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/) [Set customer class print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-customer-class-print-and-email-preferences/) [Set up dunning letter mailing for a customer class](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-classes/set-up-dunning-letter-mailing-for-a-customer-class/) For all customers, the dunning process checks customers' due documents and gives you the ability to prepare and send dunning letters of different severity levels. You can prepare a separate dunning letter for each document, or you can group the documents of a customer with different levels into one letter. > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit memos that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. Go to the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window. 1. Optional: Select a **customer class**. 1. Optional: Select a **customer**. 1. In the table, select the documents you want to prepare dunning letters for. Select the **All overdue documents** radio button, to have the system create dunning letters from all overdue documents. Select the **Dunning letter level** radio button and enter the dunning letter levels you want to use in the **From** and **To** fields. 1. Click **Process** or **Process all**. ## What is next? To print or email the reviewed and released dunning letters, go to the **Print/release dunning letters** window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare dunning letters by customer /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/prepare-dunning-letters-by-customer page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare dunning letters by customer ## Before you start For all customers, the dunning process checks customers' due documents and gives you the ability to prepare and send dunning letters of different severity levels. The system groups overdue documents by customer when it prepares dunning letters. See: [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/). > [!NOTE] > Before you start preparing dunning letters, make sure that customers do not have open payments, prepayments and credit notes that can be applied against outstanding documents. 1. Go to the [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) window. 1. Optional: Select a **customer class**. 1. Optional: Select a **customer**. 1. In the table, select the customer you want to prepare dunning letters for. 1. Click **Process** or **Process all**. ## What is next? To print or email the reviewed and released dunning letters, go to the **Print/release dunning letters** window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add a text for dunning letters and reminders /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/add-a-text-for-dunning-letters-and-reminders section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a text for dunning letters and reminders 1. Go to the [Report texts (AR20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s/) window. 1. In the **Report text code** field, enter a code number or abbreviation, for example **RE1**. You can use both letters and numbers. 1. In the **Name** field, enter the name of the text, for example **First reminder**. 1. In the topmost text field, enter the desired text of your reminder or dunning letter. > [!NOTE] > There is also a second text field, which you can use if you want to add a message to the customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you have additional payment reminders or dunning letters, you must create a text for each of them, and name them with unique names. > Repeat the procedure above to add another reminder text. Remember to use a unique code for each text. You can also create a fixed text that can be printed on invoices. ## What is next? [Make overdue and dunning settings in the Customer ledger preferences window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-preferences/make-overdue-and-dunning-settings-in-the-customer-ledger-preferences/)

Related pages

Windows

 Print/release dunning letters /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/print-release-dunning-letters page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/release dunning letters 1. Go to the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select how you wish to process the dunning letters: Note that you have to either email or print each letter. 1. To display all letters in the table, check the box **Show all**. To display the letters created during a certain period, select the **Start date** and the **End date**. 1. Optional: To see the list of the documents included into a letter, click the row of the letter and click **View document**. 1. To apply the selected action to all letters, click **Process all**. 1. To apply the selected action to some of the letters, check the box in the beginning of their rows and click **Process**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage commissions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage commissions Manage commissions - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/manage-commissions-overview page In Visma Net, you can configure commission calculations that support your company's policies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage commissions - overview In Visma Net, you can configure commission calculations that support your company's policies. The functionality is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The topics below provide information on configuring and processing commissions. ## Topics + [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/) + [Configure commissions](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/configure-commissions/) + [Prepare commissions](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/prepare-commissions/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About commission configuration and calculation /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation page Commission configuration involves defining commission periods, creating salesperson accounts, assigning salespersons to customers, and choosing general commission calculation options. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About commission configuration and calculation Commission configuration involves defining commission periods, creating salesperson accounts, assigning salespersons to customers, and choosing general commission calculation options. Commission configuration involves defining commission periods, creating salesperson accounts, assigning salespersons to customers, and choosing general commission calculation options. You use the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window to set up individual salespersons' accounts. The **Salesperson ID** is the unique ID of the salesperson. Develop naming conventions for this ID and use the **SALESPERSON** segmented key to define these requirements. For more information, see [About ID segmentation](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/about-id-segmentation/). By using this window, you also assign a default commission percentage to each salesperson. At the bottom of the window, add a list of customers the salesperson works with and the commission percentages specific for customers if different from the default rate. (On a particular invoice, the salesperson's rate for the customer may be overridden.) Generally, commission is calculated once in a commission period, just before the period is closed. In Visma Net, you set the commission period for all salespeople in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window, with the following options available: **By financial period**, **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, and **Yearly**. > [!NOTE] > A document is assigned to the earliest open commission period unless its date is later than the period end. Thus, if the document with the date matching the closed commission period appears in the system, the commission for it will be prepared in the currently open period. Some businesses pay commissions calculated on invoice amounts, while other businesses pay commissions only after customer payments are received. In Visma Net, you can select the option that fits your company policy in the Customer ledger preferences window, in the **Salesperson commission by** field. The following options of commission calculation are available: By invoice : Commission is calculated on the invoice amount when the invoice is released. By payments : Commission is calculated on the paid invoices only when the status of the invoice changes to **Closed**. In this case, any discount taken by the customer decreases the commission base. ## Commission processing Generally, information about salespersons associated with the sale and their commissions is specified on an invoice. You can split commission between multiple salespersons; to do this, you add multiple salespersons on an invoice and specify commission percentages for each of them manually. To calculate commissions for the commission period, use the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. Commissions can be prepared for only the earliest open period. You cannot prepare commissions for a period if the previous period has the **Open** or **Prepared** status. To calculate commissions to salespersons for the commission period, you need to collect commission information over all invoices that were released (or closed if commissions are paid on paid invoices) during the commission period. Each document contains the commission details calculated based on the commission percentages of salespersons associated with the document. During commission preparation, the documents (invoices or payments) for which commission details have been added to the salespersons' totals are marked as processed in the chosen period. > [!NOTE] > Although commission is calculated on the invoices or paid invoices, corresponding commission transactions are not included in the batches generated for invoices or payments; commission amounts are stored with the appropriate documents. To actually pay commissions to the salespersons, you will need to enter all related transactions manually. Once commissions have been prepared, the commission period should be closed using the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window. In this window, you can also view information about commissions earned by salespersons during any of the closed commission periods. ## Recalculating commissions If errors in assigning documents to salespersons are detected or important documents arrive later, you may need to recalculate commissions. If commissions have been prepared for the period, void them by using the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window. If the period has been closed, reopen the period by clicking the appropriate action in the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window and void the prepared commission. > [!NOTE] > You can reopen only the latest closed period, but only if commissions for later periods have not been prepared. Prepare commissions for the reopened period again, and close the period.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure commissions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/configure-commissions section You can configure the commission period and define commission calculation parameters for all salespersons on the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure commissions You can configure the commission period and define commission calculation parameters for all salespersons on the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information: [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/). To set a default commission for a particular salesperson and specify a commission percent for each customer the salesperson works with, use the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. ## Set the commission period and select a calculation option 1. Go to the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General information** tab. 1. In the **Salesperson commission by** field of the **Salesperson commission settings** area, define the method of commission calculation by selecting one of the following options: + **Invoice**: This option calculates the commission on the invoice when it is released (whether it was paid or not). + **Payment**: This option calculates the commission on the paid invoice when it receives the **Closed** status. In this case, the commission base is decreased by the amount of any discount taken by the customer. 1. In the **Commission period type** field, select **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, **Yearly**, or **By financial period**. Commission is calculated once during the selected time period for all salespersons. 1. In the window toolbar, click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Set a salesperson default commission 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. Select the salesperson in the **Salesperson ID** field. 1. In the **Default commission %** field, specify the default percent of commission. This commission percent can be overridden for a particular invoice. 1. Optional: Create a list of customers the salesperson works with, and specify the particular commission percent for every customer, if it differs from the default commission percent. To add a customer the salesperson works with, perform the following steps: 1. In the table toolbar of the **Customers** tab, click **Add row** to append a new row to the table. 1. In the **Customer** column, select the customer the salesperson works with. 1. In the **Commission %** column, enter the commission percent to be used on sales for the specified customer. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare commissions /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/prepare-commissions page You can prepare salespersons' commissions for the commission period by using first the Calculate commissions (AR505500) window and then the Close commission period (AR506500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare commissions You can prepare salespersons' commissions for the commission period by using first the Calculate commissions (AR505500) window and then the Close commission period (AR506500) window. For more information: [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/), [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/). For information about how to define commission settings, see: [Configure commissions](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/configure-commissions/). ## Calculate the commissions 1. Go to the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. 1. In the **Commission period** field, check the status of the commission period (that is, the period for which the commissions should be calculated; you can prepare commissions for only an open period). 1. In the table, check the list of salespersons with their commissions calculated for the commission period. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Process all** to initiate commission processing for the period, collecting commission information for applicable invoices. If the operation has completed successfully, the system changes the status of the commission period to **Prepared**. ## Close the commission period 1. Go to the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window. 1. In the **Commission period** field, select the period you want to close. Select the **Status** check box. You can close the commission period only if it has the **Prepared** status. 1. In the table, check the list of salespersons with the commissions they earned for the commission period. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Action** and then **Close period** to initiate the process of collecting commission information and then close the period. If the operation completes successfully, the system changes the status of the commission period to **Closed**. > [!NOTE] > If new invoices or payments for the period arrive after you have prepared the commission, you need to repeat the process of preparing commissions. To do this, select the period and then click **Void commission** in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manual payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manual payments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Manual payments /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments/about-manual-payments page In Visma Net, you can create incoming payments manually. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Manual payments In Visma Net, you can create incoming payments manually. ## Introduction This is an advantage when you have transactions that are outside AutoPay. In the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes and overdue charges. You select eligible documents from the table, where you will find all not closed documents sorted on due date. The service automatically matches the invoice with the created incoming payment and automatically sets the invoice status to closed if the balance is 0,-. The service automatically uses the reference number series set under Customer Ledger setup for payments. ## Features in the Manual payments window These are some of the things you can do in the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window. For a step- by-step description of how to process manual payments and an overview of the field names, see [Process several payments at once](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments/process-several-payments-at-once/). In the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window, you can: + Create incoming payments based on existing invoices that have a due date earlier than or equal to today’s date. + Use the standard filter functions available in Visma Net. You can for example filter on a specific invoice number. + Edit the pay date, so overdue charges will be calculated correctly. + Change the paid amount, to pay more or less than the invoice. + Enter a text for the incoming payment (for example, who the payment is from, or which month it refers to). + Drill down to the invoice document in a pop-up window. + See the incoming payments reference that is created after processing.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process several payments at once /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manual-payments/process-several-payments-at-once section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process several payments at once ## Before you start In Visma Net, you can create several incoming payments at once. This is an advantage when you have transactions that are outside AutoPay. In the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. 1. Go to the [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) window. 1. In the table area, you see all the unpaid invoices that have a due date before or on today’s date. 1. Optional: Filter on **Payment method** to make it easier to distinguish the documents that you want to work with. 1. Optional: Use the filter function in any field to tailor your view to your needs. 1. Click the check boxes to select the documents for which you want to create payments. 1. Click **Process**. The selected documents are processed and the system creates a **Reference number from Payments** for each one. to the left of each document that has been processed successfully. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed > [!NOTE] > After processing you can create an Excel file with the resulting information for control purposes. To do so, click ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Salespersons /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Salespersons Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Create a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/create-a-salesperson section The information you enter in this window is displayed on the Salespersons tab in the Customers (AR303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a salesperson The information you enter in this window is displayed on the Salespersons tab in the Customers (AR303000) window. For more information: [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/). 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter the next free **Salesperson ID**. If you are unsure of the next free number, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Salesperson ID** window. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. Enter the **Name** of your salesperson. The rest of the fields are optional. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Change a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/change-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In the **Salesperson ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the salesperson you want to make changes to. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Delete a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/delete-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In **Salesperson ID**, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the contact you want to delete. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to delete the salesperson.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Connect a customer to a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/connect-a-customer-to-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Connect a customer to a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In **Salesperson ID**, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select your salesperson. 1. On the **Customers** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the new row in the **Customer** column, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the customer you want to connect to your salesperson. 1. Enter data in **Commission %**. Visma Net fills in the rest of the fields when you save. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Disconnect a customer connection to a salesperson /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/disconnect-a-customer-connection-to-a-salesperson section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disconnect a customer connection to a salesperson 1. Go to the [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) window. 1. In the **Salesperson ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the salesperson. 1. On the **Customers** tab, mark the line with the customer you want to disconnect from the salesperson. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to disconnect the customer from the salesperson. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Update a column for all order lines /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines page For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update a column for all order lines For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. You can do this in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window for the **Salesperson**, **Warehouse**, **Shipping rule**, **Requested on** and **Ship on** columns. This is particularly useful when your order has many lines. Follow the steps below to update one of the above mentioned columns for all existing order lines. 1. Open the order in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. Change the field that corresponds to the column you want to update for all order lines. The table below lists the field names and their corresponding columns in the **Order lines** tab. 1. Answer the question as follows: + Click **Yes** if you want to update all existing order lines with the newly selected value. + Click **No** if you only want newly added order lines to retrieve the newly selected value. > [!NOTE] > you cannot select the lines you want to update, the change will be applied to all existing lines. Customer ledger windows /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger windows Customer ledger windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Customer ledger workspace. ## Transactions [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) [Sales price worksheets (AR202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010/) [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) ## Registers [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) [Recurring transactions (AR203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500/) [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) ## Processes [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) [Send invoices (AR508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000/) [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/) [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) [Reprint invoices (AR50801S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/reprint-invoices-ar50801s/) [Manual payments (AR30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s/) [Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s/) [Apply payments automatically (AR506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000/) [Process customer refunds (AR50300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-customer-refunds-ar50300s/) [Manage credit holds (AR523000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000/) [Write-off balances and credits (AR505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000/) [Generate recurring transactions (AR504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000/) [Calculate overdue charges (AR507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000/) [Update discounts (AR502500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500/) [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) [Prepare statements (AR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000/) [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) [Close financial periods (AR509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000/) [Validate customer balances (AR509900)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/validate-customer-balances-ar509900/) [Change customer details (AR50107S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/change-customer-details-ar50107s/) ## Inquiries [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) [Customer summary (AR401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000/) [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/) [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/) [Statement history summary (AR404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000/) [Statement history details (AR404300)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-details-ar404300/) [Incoming payments history (AR407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/incoming-payments-history-ar407000/) [Customer statement history (AR404600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600/) [Commission details (AR403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/commission-details-ar403000/) [Sales profitability analysis (AR409000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000/) [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/) [Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-vat-zone-deviation-ar40102s/) [Sales by item and customer (AR40103S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-by-item-and-customer-ar40103s/) [Sales invoices - overview (AR40104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-invoices-overview-ar40104s/) [GDPR - personal data (GA000081)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/gdpr-personal-data-ga000081/) [Invoice history by item (AR40105S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/invoice-history-by-item-ar40105s/) ## Reports [Balance by customer (AR632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/): Displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. [Customer summary (AR65050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s/): Lists all the customers with their current balances, default currency, payment terms, VAT zone, and other related information. [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/): Displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. Documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. [Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000/): Displays the outstanding foreign currency balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. [Aged past due (AR631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/): Lists the customers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days past due. [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/): Displays the customers with outstanding foreign currency balances. The balances are broken down by days past due. [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/): Shows the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. The foreign currency balances and amounts are shown in their original currency. [Aged period sensitive (AR630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. [Incoming payments (AR63050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/incoming-payments-ar63050s/): Displays the list of incoming payments. [Customer profiles (AR651000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-profiles-ar651000/): Shows all the details from the database of the selected customer account or all customer accounts. [Customer history summary (AR652100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-summary-ar652100/): Shows a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the date range you specify. [Customer specification (AR65200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-specification-ar65200s/): Shows the ending and beginning balances of the selected customer. [Unreleased transactions (AR611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ar611000/): Lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. You can choose a specific customer or view the documents for all customers. [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500/): Displays, with all details, the list of customer ledger documents of the chosen type that were entered but not released. [Customer documents (AR621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500/): Lists all the documents released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected customer (or all customers). [Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000/): Shows the details of documents of the selected type (or all types) released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. [Batch register customers (AR620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-ar620500/): Displays the list of all batches released in Customer ledger during the specified financial period. [Batch register customers (detailed) (AR621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-detailed-ar621000/): Lists all batches (with details) released in Customer ledger during the specified financial period. [Open customer ledger documents (AR656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000/): Lets you view and print the list of Customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. [Daily sales profitability (AR676000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the profitability data for each day within the specified date range. [Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by customer. [Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales order. [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to customers of each customer class during the specified date range. In detailed format, this report shows the data broken down by sales to particular customers. [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales orders. [Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on item class basis on the sales occurred during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by stock items. ## Preferences [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) [Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/) [Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) [Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/) [Report texts (AR20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s/) [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) [Item price classes (IN209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000/) [Salespersons (AR205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000/) [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) Apply payments automatically (AR506000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/apply-payments-automatically-ar506000 page You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply payments automatically (AR506000) You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to initiate automatic payment application for the all open documents of the customers that belong to the statement cycle that you select in this window. You should apply payments and calculate any overdue charges before preparing statements, to avoid incorrect calculation of aged balances. For details, see [About automatic payment application](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/about-automatic-payment-application/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the application process for the customer accounts that belong to the statement cycles you have selected by using the unlabeled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates the application process for customer accounts that belong to all statement cycles displayed in the table.
## The top part In this area, you can select the date of payment application and the financial period. Also, you can select whether to include credit notes in the auto-application process and whether to release batches with the application records when the process is complete.
Element Description
Date

The date when an application is performed. By default, the current business date is displayed.

The system records this date for each payment document or credit notes (if credit notes were included in the auto-application process) in the Date field on the top part of the Customer payments (AR302000) window.
Financial period The financial period when the application is performed. The field is filled in automatically, based on the selected date.
Apply credit notes

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system includes credit notes in the application process.

The balances of the open credit notes increase the balance that can be applied to outstanding documents.
Release batch when finished

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system releases batches with the application records when the process is complete.

If you leave the check box cleared, when the process is complete, you need to release the application records manually for each payment document in the Customer payments (AR302000) window or by using the Release customer documents (AR501000) mass processing window.
Include child documents

An indicator of the types of documents that belong to any child customer accounts that should be processed, along with the documents of these customer accounts. The following options are available:

None
Indicates that none of the documents of the child customer accounts should be processed.
Except credit notes
Indicates that the system should process all documents of the child accounts that meet other specified criteria, except for the documents with the Credit note type.
All types
Indicates that the system should process all documents of the child accounts that meet the other specified criteria. The option is available if the Apply credit note check box is selected in the window.

The option you select is used by the system for parent accounts that have child accounts with the Consolidate balance check box selected on the Invoicing information tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

This box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The table This table contains information about statement cycles. You can select the statement cycles to define a group of customer accounts for which the system will run the auto-application process.
Column Description
Cycle ID The unique ID of the statement cycle.
Last statement date The date when the statement was last prepared.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Next statement date The date of the next statement, according to the cycle parameters.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Availability calculation rules (IN201500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/availability-calculation-rules-in201500 page In this window, you can define the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to a particular item class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Availability calculation rules (IN201500) In this window, you can define the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to a particular item class. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. You can add new rules, modify existing rules, and delete unused rules if they are not assigned to any item classes. For more information, see [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). You can view the availability data for each item in the [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this part, you set the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to the item class to which this availability calculation rule is assigned.
Element Description
Availability calculation rule The unique ID of the availability calculation rule. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the availability calculation rule.
Deduct qty. on open issues

If you select this check box, the system deducts (for items of the class) the quantities of issued items from the available quantities of these items.

The documents in the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.
Deduct qty. on sales on hold

If you select this check box, the system will deduct the quantities of the item on sales orders (of the SO, IN, and CS types) with the On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, and Rejected statuses from the available quantity.

The quantity of each item on sales orders with these statuses is shown in the Sales order prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. on sales orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items on sales orders with the Open status from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders booked field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. on shipments

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of shipped items from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders shipped field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. allocated

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items being prepared for shipping (on unconfirmed shipments) and the quantities that were specifically allocated for sales orders (of the SA and SO types) from the available quantities of these stock items. The orders with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open statuses are used for this calculation.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders allocated field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. of kit assembly demand

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated for kit assembly from the available quantities of these items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Deduct qty. on back orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated to sales orders with the Back order status from the available quantity of these items.

The quantities on these sales orders are shown in the Back orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Include qty. on receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on inventory receipts (with On hold and Balanced statuses) in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. in transit If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items in transit in the available quantities of these stock items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.
Include qty. on purchase order receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on unreleased purchase receipts in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. on purchase on hold

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on purchase orders (with the statuses of On hold and Pending approval ) in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses is shown in the Purchase prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Include qty. on purchase orders

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on open purchase orders in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the Open status is shown in the Purchase orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Include qty. of kit assembly supply

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items that are kits and listed in the kit assembly documents in the available quantities of these items.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Include qty. on returns

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on return orders and on shipments with the Receipt operation selected (in the Shipments (SO302000) window) in the available quantities of these items. In particular, quantities are affected as follows:

  • The quantities on return orders with the On hold status are deducted from the Sales order prepared quantities.
  • The quantities on return orders with the Open status are deducted from the Sales orders booked quantities.
  • The quantities on unconfirmed shipments with the Receipt operation are deducted from the Sales orders allocated quantities.
  • The quantities on confirmed shipments are deducted from the Sales orders shipped quantities.

Thus, the quantities on shipments with the Receipt operation decrease the Total deduction quantities in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Calculate commissions (AR505500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500 page In this window, you can collect information about commissions payable to salespersons for the earliest open commission period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate commissions (AR505500) In this window, you can collect information about commissions payable to salespersons for the earliest open commission period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Each invoice contains the commission details, which are calculated based on the number of salespersons associated with the invoice and their percentages. Commission earned can be collected over all the invoices or over the paid invoices only, depending on the **Salesperson commission by** option selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you prepare commissions once per commission period, just before closing the period. In commission calculation for the open commission period, all invoices that match the conditions of commission calculation and have dates earlier than the ending date of period are included. Thus, you need not recalculate commission for the period if some of the related documents are entered into the system later; they will be included in calculation for the next commission period. To repeat the process of preparing the commissions for the commission period if salespersons were incorrectly specified on invoices for the period, you must first void the prepared commissions by using the [Close commission period (AR506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500/) window, and then prepare them again. The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process all Initiates commission processing for the period.
Review commission period Navigates to Close commission period (AR506500) window so that you can close the period for which commissions have been prepared.
## The top part In this area, you can view read-only information for the commission period, which is the oldest open period on the list of commission periods.
Element Description
Commission period The period for which commissions should be collected. Commission periods are set in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status The status of the commission period. You can prepare commissions only for an open period.
From The start date of the commission period.
To The end date of the commission period.
## The table This table displays the list of salespersons with their commissions calculated for the period specified in the upper area of the window.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The identifier of the salesperson whose commission is shown in the line.
Name The name of the salesperson as it was specified in the Salespersons (AR205000) window.
Documents The number of documents involved.
Commissionable amount The total amount of the documents that commission calculation was based on.
Commission amount The total amount of commissions for the salesperson during the specified period.
Average commission % The average commission percent on the documents during the specified period.
Minimum commission (%) The minimum commission percent during the specified period.
Maximum commission (%) The maximum commission percent during the specified period.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-overdue-charges-ar507000 page You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate overdue charges (AR507000) You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to find documents that are subject to overdue charges, calculate the exact amounts of overdue charges, and create appropriate documents for the charges. The overdue documents can be selected by statement cycle, customer class, and customer. As a result of processing, the system generates customer ledger documents of the **Overdue charge** type with the **Balanced** or **On hold** status depending on the value of the **Hold documents on entry** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can further process generated documents by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > The system calculates overdue charges for all customer accounts for which overdue charges are assigned, except for accounts with the **Inactive** or **On hold** status. This window is available if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Also make sure that the option **Apply overdue charges** is selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **General information** tab, the **Financial settings** section. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Calculate Finds the overdue documents that meet the selection criteria and calculates the amounts of overdue charges for the documents in accordance with the overdue charge code settings in the Overdue charges (AR204500) window.
Process Processes the overdue charges for the documents you have selected, creating new customer ledger documents of the Overdue charge type with the Balanced or On hold status depending on the value of the Hold documents on entry check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Process all Processes the overdue charges for all the listed documents, creating new customer ledger documents of the Overdue charge type with the Balanced or On hold status depending on the value of the Hold documents on entry check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
View last charge Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window and displays the details of the unreleased overdue charge document that had been generated for the selected overdue document.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area (described in the following table) to select the date and the financial period for the charges, and the criteria for the overdue documents to be displayed.
Element Description
Overdue charge date The date when overdue charges are calculated and appropriate documents are created.
Period The financial period to which the document’s transactions should be posted.
Statement cycle The statement cycle for which you want to display data. Leave the field blank if you want to calculate charges for all cycles. If the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window, you must specify the statement cycle.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. The field is available if the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is cleared in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Customer The customer account for which you want to display data. The field is available if the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box is cleared in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
## The table This table contains the list of overdue documents with relevant details for each document, including the amounts of overdue charges. > [!NOTE] > Overdue documents appear in the table only after you click **Calculate** in the window toolbar to find overdue documents and calculate overdue charges for them.
Element Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you select to include the document for processing.
Type The type of customer ledger document for which overdue charges were calculated: Invoice, Debit note, or Overdue charge.
Reference no. The reference number of the document, which was assigned by a number series. By clicking the number, you can navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, where you can view document details.
Date The date of the document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the payment terms.
Customer The customer for whom this document is intended, by its ID.
Customer name The customer’s complete name as it appears in the system.
Currency The currency of the original document.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Open balance The amount of the original document to which payments were not applied.
Last payment date The date of the last applied payment.
Last charge date The date of the last overdue charge document generated for this document.
Overdue days The number of days this document is past due since its due date or, if overdue charges were previously calculated, since the last charge date.
Charge currency The currency used for the overdue charges.
Charge amount The amount of the charge.
Branch

The branch as retrieved from the Branch field on the Financial details tab in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

This column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Cash sales (AR304000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000 section You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash sales (AR304000) You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to record cash sales; those for which the services rendered are paid immediately. The resulting document generated upon release of a cash sale is a fully paid invoice, which can be cleared right away. The default status of a newly created document is defined by the **Hold documents on entry** and **Validate document**totals on entry options in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If the **Hold documents on**entry option is selected, the default status will be **On hold**, whether or not the document is balanced. For more information, see: [About types of customer ledger documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-types-of-customer-ledger-documents/). If a cash sale is subjected to bank charges for payment processing, you can specify these charges on the **Finance charges** tab. As with other customer payments, a cash sale can be included in a batch deposit. For details, see: [About the preparation of deposits](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/track-cash-payments/about-the-preparation-of-deposits/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases balanced cash sale documents.
Reverse Generates a cash return document with transactions reversed with respect to the original document. If a processing centre confirms voiding or refunding, the system marks the cash return document as Closed.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Email invoice/note
Sends the selected document as an email to the customer for the INVOICE mailing.
Send email
Opens the Activity dialog box,which you can use to create an email.
Reclassify general ledger batch
Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, on which you can initiate the reclassification process. For more information, see Process splitting.
Inquiries Provides the Customer details menu command, which you can click to quickly navigate to the Customer details (AR402000) inquiry window.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (AR611000) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
Invoice/note
Navigates to the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
## The top part In the top part of the window, you can create a new cash sales document or select an existing document for modification.
Element Description
Type

The document type. The following types are available:

Cash sale
A document that contains a list of goods sold or services provided that were paid in full immediately.
Cash return
A document that reverses the transactions generated by the cash sale document.
Ref.no The reference number of the document, as automatically generated by the system in accordance with the number series assigned to cash sales in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

The status of the document, which is one of the following:

On hold
The user can edit the document but cannot release it.
Balanced
The Detail total value of the document plus the VAT total value equals the Balance value. The document maybe released, or it may be edited and saved with the On hold or Balanced status.
Open
The document has been released. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
Closed
The balance of the document is zero.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft and has the On hold status. Such a document may be edited and cannot be released.
Date The date when the customer ledger document was created. By default, for a new document, it is the current business date, but the date may be changed.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted. By default, it is the current period, but the period can be changed. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the Allow posting to closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Payment ref. The reference number of the customer payment.
Invoice text Any user-provided description of the cash sale document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Location The relevant customer location.
Payment method The payment method used by the customer to pay for the invoice.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account debited as a result of the cash sale transaction.
Currency The currency of the document. Initially, it is the customer’s default currency, but you can change it if the Allow currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window for this customer. To view or change the exchange rate, click the second field, which contains the exchange rate, to invoke the Rate selection dialog box.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Detail total The document total, as calculated for all items on the Document details tab.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is a subject to value-added tax (VAT).

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT exempt total

The total VAT amount that is exempted from charging.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total The document VAT amount; the details are shown on the VAT details tab.
Balance For an open customer ledger document, the balance after any cash discount was taken.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original document amount and the rounded amount.

The field appears only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Payment amount The amount of the customer payment.
Cash discount taken

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken on the document, which the system calculates based on the specified payment terms. If a document has the On holdor Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT window.
Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Deducted charges The total amount of the bank charges that were deducted by the bank from the payment amount on the cash account. Even if the charges were actually deducted by the bank, the original payment amount is shown in the top part.
## The Document details tab On this tab, you can specify the line details for a new customer ledger document or view the details of the document selected in the upper area of the window.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Column Description
Branch The branch that sells the line item or provides theservice.
Item ID The item ID of the line item, if applicable. Only anon-stock item can be selected.
Transaction descr. Any brief comment relevant to the transaction. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of items (goods or services) of a particular type sold to the customer.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the item.
Unit price The price set for the item with respect to the specified unit.
Manual amount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. This column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount percent The percent of the discount that has been applied manually. If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.
Discount amount The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually to this line. If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.
Amount The amount after the discount has been applied.
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount. This column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The sales account used for the transaction. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount used for this transaction.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated. This column appears if the Projects module has been activated and integrated with this workspace.
Salesperson ID The salesperson responsible for the sale.
Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the Cash return documents created by the reversing process. It shows the identifier of the deferral schedule associated with the original Cash sale document.

Note

If a Cash return document is created manually, then you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the original documents, this column remains empty.
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the line item, if any.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.
Term start date The start date of the term.
Term end date The end date of the term.
VAT category The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction. The category represents the type of goods or services. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Commissionable A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission is paid on the line item amount. The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer's VAT zone and payment terms. Also, the tab specifies the work group associated with the document and the commissions calculated on document details. For a released customer ledger document, the tab contains the reference to the batch that implements transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions on posting.
Branch The branch with which this document is associated.
Customer ledger account The asset account specified as the default account for the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used for the customer.
Original document The original document in general ledger.
### The Payment info section
Element Description
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale has been cleared with the bank.
Clear date The date when the cash sale document has been cleared with the bank.
Batch deposit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale should be deposited. You can change this option if the status of cash account has been changed. Deposits can be performed only from a clearing account.
Deposited A check box that indicates (if selected) that the cash sale has been deposited.
Batch deposit date The date when the cash sale was deposited.
Batch deposit no. The reference number of the batch deposit that includes this cash sale.
### The VAT info section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone By default, the VAT zone associated with the customer location, as specified in the Customer locations (CR303010) window. If this VAT zone is not specified, it is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.
### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID The work group associated with the document, if any.
Owner ID The employee who owns (is responsible for) the document.
## The Invoice address tab This tab displays the invoice address of the customer and the contact information for invoicing purposes. ### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Override address A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing address is not the default invoicing address of the customer.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postal code for the invoicing address. An input mask for postal codes be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the customer’s invoicing address.
Country The customer’s country.
County The state or province of the customer.
### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to override the default contact information and type new information in the following elements.
Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should not be sent to the customer as a printed document.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should not be sent to the customer by email.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab contains information related to the taxes to be paid on the cash sale and is filled out automatically for a new document after you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
VAT ID The identifier of a VAT applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the VAT, calculated at the document level.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT, calculated at the document level.
## The Salesperson commission tab This tab displays the commissions that can be calculated for the document. You calculate commissions in the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons. ### The top part
Element Description
Default salesperson The identifier of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
## The Finance charges tab This tab contains a list of charges applied to the cash sale by the bank for payment processing. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Entry type The charge, selected by its entry type ID. You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.
Description A detailed description of the entry type to be used as finance charge.
Offset account The account that is used for this finance charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this finance charge.
Amount The amount of the finance charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Change customer details (AR50107S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/change-customer-details-ar50107s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer details (AR50107S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this to change the column information of the customer(s) you have selected in the table.
Process all Click this to change the column information of all customers that are displayed in the table, according to the filter you have set in the top part of the window.
## The top part ### The Filter values section
Element Description
Customer class The customers included in the customer class selected here will be displayed in the table.
Status The customers whose status is accordant with the status you select here will be displayed in the table.
VAT zone ID The customers whose VAT zone is accordant with the VAT zone you select here will be displayed in the table.
### The Change values section
Element Description
Change column information

Select the column you want to change. The options are:

  • Customer class
  • VAT zone
  • Exclude from EC sales list (Brexit) When you select this, the check box Exclude from EC sales list will be selected for the customer(s) you want to change this column for.
New customer class When you select Customer class as the column you want to change, here you can select the new customer class to which you want to change.
Update the customer’s settings with the customer class defaults When you select Customer class as the column you want to change, you can select this check box if you want to update the customer’s settings with the default settings of the new customer class.
New VAT zone ID When you select VAT zone as the column you want to change, here you can select the new VAT zone ID to which you want to change.
## The table
Column Description
Customer no. The ID of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
VAT zone The current VAT zone of the customer.
Location ID The location ID of the customer.
Address The address of the customer.
Postcode The postcode of the customer.
City The city of the customer.
Country The country of the customer.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the customer.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person. Inherited from the customer details in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Phone 1 The phone number of the customer.
Email The email of the customer.
Last sale The date when the last sale was made to the customer.
Status The status of the customer.
Customer class The customer class to which the customer belongs.
Exclude EC sales list When this check box is selected, the customer on the row and their transactions will not be included in the EC sales list.
Close commission period (AR506500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-commission-period-ar506500 page In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close commission period (AR506500) In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view information about commissions earned by salespersons during the selected commission period. You can also close a commission period for which commissions have been calculated in the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. Also, you can reopen the last closed period and void any prepared commissions. Before you open the latest closed period, make sure the commission for the current period has not been calculated or has been voided. The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions
Void commissions
Removes information about prepared commissions from the document database. Reopen a period if you need to void commission for the closed period.
Close period
Closes the selected commission period. Only a period for which commission has been prepared (calculated) can be closed.
Reopen period
Reopens the last closed period, so that the commission for the period can be voided and recalculated.
## The top part In this area, you can select a commission period to view its details or to close it.
Element Description
Commission period The period for which commissions should be calculated. Commission periods are defined in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

A read-only box that displays the status of the commission period. The following values are used:

Prepared
Commission was calculated for the period.
Closed
The period is closed.
Open
The commission was not yet calculated for the period.
From A read-only field that shows the start date of the commission period.
To A read-only field that shows the end date of the commission period.
## The table In this table, you can view the list of salespersons, which includes summary information about commissions they have earned during the selected period.
Column Description
View details Navigates to the Commission details (AR403000) window so you can view the details of the commission for the selected period.
Salesperson ID The unique ID of the salesperson whose commission is shown in the row.
Type The type of the salesperson, which can be one of the following options: Supplier or Employee. This column is available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Name The name of the salesperson as it was specified in the Salespersons (AR205000) window.
Commissionable amount The total amount of the documents that was used as the base for commission calculation.
Commission amount The total amount of commissions for the salesperson during the specified period.
Payroll processed date The date when the commission was processed in the Payroll module. Available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Close financial periods (AR509000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ar509000 page You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (AR509000) You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Customer ledger workspace, which is a prerequisite to closing a period in the General ledger workspace. The financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. To allow posting to closed periods, select the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

Note

The green OK icon appears if the closing operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.
Unreleased documents Opens the Unreleased customer ledger document report so you can view documents that are not released in the selected period (documents that have On hold, Balanced, Pending print, or Pending email status).
## The table This table displays all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. A period can be closed only if there no documents with the **On hold**, **Balanced**, **Pending print**, or **Pending email** status to be posted to this period. You select one or more periods for closing and click **Close periods**. When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well.
Column Description
Period The identifier of the financial period.
Description The description of the financial period.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is active.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Commission details (AR403000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/commission-details-ar403000 page You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Commission details (AR403000) You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window for quick inquiries about commissions payable to salespersons on sales to specific customers. You can select a salesperson, a commission period, a customer, and a specific customer location. You can then view the commission information and drill down to the details of the payment or invoicing document. Before you can view the commission for an open period, collect the commission information by using the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. For more information, see: [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/). The window is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select a salesperson and commission period to view the summary on all customers meeting these criteria. Also, you can specify a customer and one of the customer's locations to view more details.
Element Description
Salesperson ID The salesperson whose commission details you want to view. Leave this field blank to view the commissions for all salespersons.
Commission period The commission period for which you want to display data. Periods are configured in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Customer A customer associated with the salesperson. You can select a customer from the list or leave the field blank to view documents for all customers.
Location The customer location related to the sales, if a customer has been specified.
## The table This table contains the list of documents matching the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of document. If the commission is calculated on open invoices, it is a type of invoice document ( invoice or note ). If the commission is calculated on payments, it is one of the payment document types.
Ref. no. The identification number of the document for which the commission is calculated. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Original doc. type If the commission is calculated on payments, this is the type of the invoice document on which the specified payment is based. If the commission is calculated on open invoices, this column is empty.
Original ref. no. The identification number of the invoice document on which the specified payment is based. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Doc. amount The document amount.
Commissionable amount The amount that was used as a base for commission calculation.
Commission (%) The commission percent used for the document.
Commission amount The commission amount earned by the salesperson on the document.
Customer no. The customer to whom the goods or services were sold.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is stored in the system.
Location The customer location related to the sales.
Location name The name of the customer location.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contract items (CT201000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000 page You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract items (CT201000) You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create and maintain contract items. Contract items are non-stock items to be provided to a customer under a contract. You define item quantity limits and pricing for item setup, recurring invoicing and renewal. The contract item quantity can be changed within specified limits in a template or in a contract itself. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can create a new contract item or select an existing item for editing.
Element Description
Contract item The unique identifier of a contract item specified in accordance with the CONTRACTITEM segmented key.
Description A description of the contract item, with any relevant comments.
## The Price options tab This tab provides quantity and price settings for contract items. ### The Price options tab elements
Element Description
Maximum allowed quantity This is the maximum quantity of the contract item that a customer may buy under the contract.
Minimum allowed quantity This is the minimum quantity of the contract item that a customer may buy under the contract.
Default quantity This is the contract item quantity included by default. It can be overridden within the allowed limits for the item in a contract template and a contract based on this template.
Currency ID

The currency of the item price.

You should use contract items priced in the same currency in one template.
Setup price A read-only field that displays contract item price for setup, calculated based on settings configured under the Setup and renewal section.
Recurring price A read-only field that displays contract item recurring price, calculated based on settings configured under the Recurring invoicing section.
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays contract item price for extra usage, calculated based on settings configured under the Recurring invoicing section.
Renewal price A read-only field that displays contract item price for renewal, calculated based on settings configured under the Setup and renewal section.
### The Setup and renewal section
Element Description
Setup item The unique alphanumeric identifier of a non-stock item to be provided on a contract setup.
Setup pricing

The setup item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the non-stock item base price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Retain rate A percent of deposit original amount. The system displays a warning on a contract screen when deposit balance gets to the percentage point.
Deposit A check box that, if selected, indicates that the contract item is treated as a deposit.
Refundable A check box that, if selected, indicates that the setup price of the contract item is refundable.
Prorate setup A check box that, if selected, indicates that the setup price of the contract item is invoiced in proportion to unused services in case of contract terms change.
Renewal item The unique alphanumeric identifier of a non-stock item to be provided on a contract renewal.
Collect renewal fee on activation A check box that, if selected, indicates that a customer is invoiced for item renewal in the first invoicing period.
Renewal pricing

The renew item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The renew item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
### The Recurring invoicing section
Element Description
Invoice type

The recurring invoicing policy. The following options are available:

None
recurring invoicing is not performed.
Prepaid
customer is invoiced at the beginning of scheduled invoicing period.
Postpaid
customer is invoiced at the end of scheduled invoicing period.
Recurring item The unique identifier of a non-stock item customer is invoiced for recurrently.
Reset usage on invoicing A check box that, if selected, indicates that contract item usage is reset after the invoicing for a previous invoicing period has been performed.
Recurring pricing

The recurring item pricing policy. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually and can not be changed later in a contract.
Item price/percent The recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Extra usage pricing

The recurring item pricing policy. It is applied to service price if customer exceeded service included quantity. The following options are available:

Use item price
The non-stock item base price is used. If there is a price configured for a customer price class and a customer that purchases this service belongs to this price class then the price from the customer price class is used.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item base price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually.
Item price/percent The price for recurring item extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Deposit item The unique identifier of a deposit assigned to the non-stock item customer is invoiced for recurrently.
## The Used in contract templates tab The **Used in contract templates** tab contains the list of contract templates the selected contract item is added to.
Column Description
Contract template The unique alphanumeric identifier of a contract template.
Description The contract template description.
## The Active contracts tab The **Active contracts** tab contains the list (in a tabular format) of an active contracts the selected item is included to. A contract is considered active if its status is not **Draft**, **Cancelled**, or **Expired**.
Column Description
Contract ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of a contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Status The contract status. For details, see: Customer contracts (CT301000).
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when contract expires.
Description The contract description, which includes any related comments.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contract templates (CT202000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000 page You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract templates (CT202000) You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create and maintain contract templates. A contract template defines the settings for all contracts that are based on the template. The following settings are basic for contracts built on this template: renewal and refund policy, duration, currency, invoicing format, and case invoicing settings. Each contract with a customer must be based on a contract template. When you create a new contract by using the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window, you select the appropriate template, and the system fills in the settings of the template. For details, see: [About contract preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-preparation/about-contract-preparation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can create a new contract template or select an existing template for editing.
Element Description
Contract template The unique identifier of the contract template, which is specified in accordance with the TMCONTRACT segmented key.
Description

A description of the contract template, with any relevant comments.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the template is available for selection.
## The Summary tab This tab provides general settings for contracts that are based on this template. ### The Contract settings section
Element Description
Contract type

The type of contract to be based on this template, which can be one of the following options:

Renewable
The contract expires at the end of its duration and can be renewed during its grace period manually or automatically (if it is scheduled). If you renew such a contract, the system changes the contract expiration date and generates an invoice for a renewal fee, if one applies.
Expiring
The contract expires at the end of its duration. A copy of an expired contract can be created by using the Renew contract action in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window or by using the Renew contracts (CT502000) mass processing window. The new contract is created with the Draft status and should be activated.
Unlimited
The contract has no expiration date and can be terminated only.
Duration The duration of the contract, in the specified units. Select the number of units, and select one of the following units in the adjacent field: Year, Quarter, Month, or Custom (days).
Refundable A check box that indicates (if selected) that recurring charges are to be refunded in proportion to unused services, but the setup and renewal fee is to be refunded according to the settings defined for each involved contract item in the Contract items (CT201000) window.
Refund period The number of days after the contract setup date the customer may claim a refund.
Mass renewal

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window starting on the date that is the number of days before expiration specified in the Renewal point field.

The check box provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.
Renewal point

The number of days before the contract expiration date when the system starts to display the contract in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window if the Mass renewal check box is selected for the contract.

The fields provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.
Grace period

The period of time (in days) after the contract expiration date when services under a contract are provided and the contract can be renewed according to its type. After the end of the grace period, you cannot renew the contract. If you invoke the Renew contract action in the Customer contracts (CT301000) window after the grace period, the system creates a copy of the contract with the Draft status.

The field provides a default value for the contracts to be based on the template.
Currency The currency to be used for invoicing the customer.
Enable template item override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the list of contract items included in the template can be changed for each contract based on this template.
Automatically release customer documents A check box that indicates (if specified) that the customer documents generated in the process of contract invoicing will be released automatically; otherwise, they will have the Balanced status.
Effective from The date when the template starts to be available for new contracts that you want to base on it.
Discontinue after The date after which the template becomes unavailable for selection when you create a new contract.
### The Invoicing settings section
Element Description
Invoicing period

The invoicing period for the contracts based on the template.

The following options are available: Week, Month, Quarter, Half a year, Year, Statement-based, and On demand. The On demand option means that invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice a contract on any date; this option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured, except for items that are tied up with a deposit item or have a default quantity of zero.

For details on deposit contract items, see: About retainer contracts.
Invoice to

The customer account to be billed for a contract.

The following options are available: Parent account, Customer account, and Specific account.
Invoicing schedule starts on

The starting point of the invoicing schedule: Setup date or Activation date.

The contract expiration date is calculated based on this setting.
Invoicing format

The format of an invoice that is issued as a result of contract invoicing. The following options are available:

Summary
Usage for a contract item is summed up and showed as one line with a total quantity and total sum. The expense claims are not summed up and showed individually.
Detail
Each contract item usage occurrence is shown as a separate line.
Invoice description In this field, you can specify the formulas for invoice descriptions by using the standard formula editor. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
Line description In this field, you can specify the formulas for line descriptions by using the standard formula editor. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
### The Case invoicing settings section
Element Description
Case count item

The non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract based on this template.

For details, see: Set up invoicing by the number of cases.
## The Details tab This tab lists the contract items that will be provided for contracts based on the template. Contract items are defined in the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. You can use this tab to include new contract items or to modify the quantity of each contract item to be included by default for a contract based on the contract template.
Column Description
Item code The unique alphanumeric identifier of the contract item.
Description A read-only field that shows the description of the contract item.
Quantity

The quantity of the contract item that is included by default in a contract based on this template.

You can modify this quantity within the allowed limits set for the contract item in the Contract items (CT201000) window.

If you plan to use the template for creating retainer contracts or contracts that are invoiced on demand and add to the template some recurring contract items, we recommend that you specify a quantity of zero.
Setup price A read-only box that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced on contract setup.
Recurring price A read-only field that shows the fee for the included quantity of the item to be invoiced recurrently.
Extra usage price A read-only field that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced as extra usage of the item.
Renewal price A read-only field that shows the fee of the item to be invoiced on contract renewal.
## The Contracts tab The **Contracts** tab lists contracts that have been created in the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window based on the selected template. The system adds a row to this table each time you save a newly defined contract based on the template.
Column Description
Contract ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of the contract based on this template.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Status The contract status, which can be Draft, Pending activation, Active, Expired, Cancelled, or Pending upgrade.
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Description The description provided for the contract.
## The Attributes tab By using this tab, you can define a list of attributes for the classification of contracts. The attributes you define here are displayed on the **Attributes** tab of the [Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/) window for each contract based on this template. A user can not save a new contract if a value for a required attribute is not specified.
Column Description
Attribute ID The attribute name.
Description The description of the attribute.
Sort order A number representing the position of the attribute in the resulting list of attributes.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must provide a value for the attribute.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is not available on the Self-service portal.
Control type The type of control (element) used for the attribute. This can be one of the following options: Text, Check box, Combo box, Multi select combo, or Date/time.
Default value The default value for the attribute.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Contract usage (CT303000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-usage-ct303000 page By using this window, you can view invoiced and not yet invoiced usage of existing contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Contract usage (CT303000) By using this window, you can view invoiced and not yet invoiced usage of existing contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also enter usage data, if needed. ## The top part In this area, you select an existing contract to view its usage and invoicing history.
Element Description
Contract ID The contract for which you want to view usage information.
## The Transactions not yet invoiced tab This tab contains various information about the not yet invoiced activities related to the contract.
Column Description
Branch The appropriate branch.
Item ID The non-stock item to be invoiced.
Description A description of the non-stock item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity A number of units used for the item.
Date The date of the activity, case, applied labour, or other usage (for the item).
Case ID The link to the case whose invoicing resulted in this transaction. This column is displayed only if the Customer management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Transactions history tab This tab displays information about the items of a contract that were invoiced. You can use the elements in the upper area of the tab to select a particular post period to view only specific usage in the table.
Element Description
Post period The post period for which you want to view invoicing information.
Column Description
Branch The appropriate branch.
Item ID The non-stock item.
Description A description of the non-stock item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity The used quantity of the item (in the units of measure).
Date The date of the activity, case, applied labour, or other usage (for the item).
Type The type of the customer ledger document.
Reference no. The reference number of the invoice. You can click the link to navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window so you can view invoice details.
Invoicing date The date when the invoice was issued.
Case ID The ID of the case whose invoicing resulted in this transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Payment terms (CS206500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500 page You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms (CS206500) You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Payment terms include the instalment option (one payment or multiple instalments), the payment schedule, and the terms for a cash discount (for only the single instalment option). Also, payment terms can be used as a schedule for overdue charges. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General information section You use the elements in this area to define a new set of payment terms and its settings, or to select an existing set of terms and view its settings.
Element Description
Terms ID The unique identifier for these payment terms. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 10 characters.
Description A detailed description of the payment terms. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Visible to

The target audience for which the terms are visible, which can be one of the following:

All
The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers.
Suppliers
The terms can be assigned to suppliers only.
Customers
The terms can be assigned to customers only.
Disabled
The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers.
## The Due day settings section
Element Description
Due date type

The method of due date calculation. The following options are available:

Fixed number of days
The payment is due a fixed number of days after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Day of next month
The payment is due on a particular day of the next month; you should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
End of the month
The payment is due at the end of the current month.
End of next month
The payment is due at the end of the next month.
Day of the month
The payment is due on a particular day of the current month. You should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
Fixed number of days starting next month
The payment is due a fixed number of days starting the next month after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Custom
With this option, you specify two due days that could be used; which due day is to be used depends on the time interval set for the document’s date. For example: You may specify one due day for documents issued in the first part of the month, and the second due day for documents issued in the second part of the month. You use the remaining elements in the Due date settings section to set the due days and their respective date ranges.
Move due date if on the weekend If the due date on the invoice falls onto a weekend (Saturday or Sunday), use the options in the drop-down to calculate it to the Friday before the due date or the Monday after it. With the option Keep the exact date the due date remains unchanged.
Due day 1 The first due day, which is used with certain Due date type options. Specify the number of days if the Fixed number of days option is selected, the day of the month if the Day of next month or Day of the month option is selected, and the first due day if the Custom option is selected.
Day from 1 The start day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 1 The end day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Due day 2 The second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day from 2 The start day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 2 The end day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
## The Cash discount settings section In this section, you provide the details of the cash discount included with this set of payment terms. You can specify a cash discount only if the **Single** instalment type is selected in the **Instalments settings** section.
Element Description
Discount type

The method of calculating the cash discount period, which can be one of the following options:

Fixed number of days
If this option is selected, the discount is available a set number of days after the document date. In the Discount day field, you should also specify the number of days.
Day of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available until a particular day in the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the next month.
End of month
When you select this option, the discount is available through the end of the month (that is, the month of the document date).
End of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available through the end of the next month (that is, the month after the document date).
Day of the month
If this option is selected, the discount is available until the particular day of the month when the document was issued. In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the month.
Fixed number of days starting next month
When you select this option, the discount is available a set number of days starting the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the number of days.
Discount day The number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the Discount type; this field is unavailable for some options.
Discount (%) The percent of the discount.
Delay days With the amount of days defined here, the cash discount will be considered when registering the payment on the invoice. For example, the cash discount date is set to the 1st of the month, the Delay days field has value 2. You register the payment on the 3rd of the month, and cash discount amount will be used.
## The Instalment settings section By using these elements, you can define how documents should be paid: in a single payment or in multiple instalments. If the amount is due in multiple instalments, you can also specify a percentage and a due date for each instalment; the due date for the first instalment is specified in the **Due day settings** section. Discounts are not available for multiple-instalment payment terms.
Element Description
Instalment type

The type of instalment, which can be one of the following options:

Single
If you select this option, other elements in this section become unavailable. You should also select the due date and other options for the single payment.
Multiple
If you select this option, payment is due in multiple instalments. You should also specify the method, frequency, and schedule of the instalments.
Number of instalments The specific number of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method.
Instalment frequency

The frequency of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method. The following options are available:

Weekly
The second instalment will be a week after the first one, and so on.
Monthly
The second instalment will be a month after the first one, and so on.
Semi-monthly
The second instalment will be a half of a month after the first one, and so on.
Instalment method

The method by which the amounts of instalments are calculated. Select one of the following options:

Equal parts
The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. The schedule of payments is defined by the due date, instalment frequency, and number of instalments specified.
VAT in the first instalment
The amount of the document (its total before taxes) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. The schedule of payments is defined by the instalment frequency and number of instalments specified.
Split by percent in table
The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages specified for each instalment in the Instalments schedule table below this section.
## The Instalments schedule table
Column Description
Days The number of days from the due date on which a particular instalment is due. You must use an integer between 0 (due date) and 31.
Percent The percent of a document total. As you add a new instalment, the percent is automatically adjusted to make all instalments total 100 percent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Customer classes (AR201000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000 page In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer classes (AR201000) In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create customer classes, which are groups of customers with similar properties. These classes make it easier to create customer accounts in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window: Once you select a class for a customer you are entering, the system inserts the settings you have defined for the class, such as default accounts and subaccounts, into the corresponding window elements. (You can override these values, if needed.) To ease the creation of customer classes, specify an existing customer class as the default one in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. After you do this, when you create a new customer class, its elements will be populated with values from the default customer class. (You can overwrite any of these values.) For more information about customer classes, see: [About customer classes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/preliminary-configuration/about-customer-classes/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Apply restriction settings to all customers Updates the security settings for all customers of the class. If you have changed the default restriction group for the selected customer class (on the General settings tab of this window, Default general settings section), clicking this action will include all customers of the class in the specified group and exclude them from the group previously specified as the default one.
## The top part In this area, you can select a class by its identifier and view its information, or you can specify the summary information for a class you are creating.
Element Description
Class ID The unique identifier of the class. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description

A detailed description of the customer class.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
## The General information tab This tab is used to store general settings for the customer class. You can specify as few or as many default settings as you'd like. > [!NOTE] > Changes to class settings will not affect existing records of customers of the class; however, when you create a customer account by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window and fill in the **Customer class** field, the new customer gets the most up-to-date class settings. ### The Default general settings section
Element Description
Country The country of customers of the class.
VAT zone ID The default VAT zone for customers of the class.
Require VAT zone A check box that means (if selected) that the VAT zone value is required for customers of the class. If the check box is cleared, the VAT zone is optional for these customers.
Default location ID from branch

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the identifier of the branch the user is currently signed in to is used by default as the identifier of the customer’s main location instead of theMAIN (default).

This field is available only when the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default restriction group The restriction group to which newly created customers of the class are assigned by default. To assign existing customers of the class to the default group, click Apply restriction settings to all suppliers in the toolbar.
Salesperson ID The salesperson to make sales to customers of the class.
Export type

The export type defined for the customer class.

See also: About export types.
Document language The language of the documents to be printed to the customers of the class.
Currency ID The default currency, by its ID, that is used in operations with customers of this class.
Enable currency override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the currency may be overridden in operations with customers of the class; that is, you can select a currency other than the default currency for individual documents.
Currency rate type The default currency rate type used in operations with customers of this class.
Enable rate override A check box that means (if selected) that users may override the currency rate type in operations with customers of the class, selecting a currency rate type other than the default one for individual documents
Group/document discount limit (%)

The maximum percentage of group-level and document-level discounts allowed per document for customers of this class.

This value will be used for validation of discounts in sales orders and invoices. If for an order or invoice, the percentage of the total discount exceeds the specified limit, the system will display a warning on the Discount detailstab of the appropriate window. The percentage of the total discount for a document is calculated as follows: the total of the Discount amt. column (on theDiscount details tab) divided by the value of the Detail total field in the top part of the appropriate window.
Price class ID The identifier of the price class.
### The Default delivery settings section
Element Description
Ship via The carrier whose service will be used by default for customers of the class.
Shipping terms The shipping terms to be assigned by default to customers of the class.
Shipping rule

The way shipments for orders should be created by default for a customer of this class. Select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
The shipment can be created only if all the goods on the order are available for shipping.
Back orders allowed
If the quantity of the goods is not sufficient for order fulfillment, or some of the line items are not currently available, a back order should be created.
Cancel remainder
The shipment is created for any quantity of the items, and the remainder on the order is cancelled.
Warning when missing VAT registration ID When this check box is selected, the system displays a warning when VAT registration ID is missing on the item.
Warning when missing corporate ID When this check box is selected, the system displays a warning when corporate ID is missing on the order.
### The Default credit verification settings section
Element Description
Credit verification

The credit verification rule for customers of the class. The following options are available:

Days past due
Defines the credit period as a certain number of days past the due date of the invoice. The number of days is specified as the Credit days past due in this section.
Credit limit
Does not allow the customer to exceed the credit limit amount (the Credit limit in this section).
Limit and days past due
Causes both rules to be applied: The customer’s debt should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than Credit days past due specifies.
Disabled
Uses no credit verification in relations with customers of the class.
Credit limit The credit limit amount for customers of the class if the Credit limit or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
Amount over limit The maximum amount allowed over the credit limit for customers of the class.
Credit days past due The duration of the credit period. This value is used if the Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
### The Default financial and payment settings section
Element Description
Terms The default payment terms of the customer class; terms are defined in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Statement cycle ID The default statement cycle to be used for customers of this class.
Payment method The payment method used by default in relations with these customers.
Apply payments automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment application may be performed automatically for customers of the class.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that overdue charges can be applied to these customers.

This check box is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Overdue charge ID

The overdue charge to be applied for customers of this class.

The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality has been enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Enable write-offs A check box that indicates (if selected) that balance and credit write-offs are allowed for customers of this class.
Write-off limit

The maximum value that may be written off for customers of the class. All balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off.

This field is available only if the Enable write-offs check box is selected.
Exclude debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the customer invoices connected to this customer class to be sent to debt collection. You can reverse this setting on the Customer classes (AR201000) window, tab General information, by de-selecting the check box Exclude debt collection.
### The Default customer properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification The check box you select to enable Webhook notifications for the customer class.
### The Default print and email settings section
Element Description
Print invoices A check box that indicates (if selected) that invoices can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Send invoices by email A check box that indicates (if selected) that invoices can be sent by email to customers of the class by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Print dunning letters

A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters can be printed for sending to customers of the class by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Send dunning letters by email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters canbe sent by email to customers of the class by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Print statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements can be printed for sending to customers of the class in the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Send statements by email A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements can be sent by email to customers of the class by using the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Multi-currency statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements will be printed or sent by email in multi-currency format for customers of the class.
Statement type

The statement type used by default in relations with customers of the class:

Open item
A statement includes all open items for the customer.
Balance brought forward
The amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement.
### The Send AutoInvoice Route section
Element Description
Send invoices to AutoInvoice Select this check box if you are using AutoInvoice and want to send invoices directly to this service.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-invoices. This applies to Norway only.
Print

When this check box is selected, a new element is added into the outgoing invoice called MediaType that will be populated with the Print value. The customer language is also retrieved from the Customers (AR303000) window from the Document language field. This is used in Sweden when the printing service is activated.

This check box is only visible when you have not enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice check box.
Exclude invoice PDF

When selected, this enables the possibility to not generate and imbed invoice PDF while sending electronic invoices via the PEPPOL BIS invoice format.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box.
Use the first AutoInvoice attachment to view invoice

When this check box is selected, the first attachment marked to be sent to AutoInvoice will be the visible invoice for the receiver. This only applies if an attachment exists on the invoice, else the pure XML will be used to generate a readable version of the invoice for the receiver.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box and the Exclude invoice PDF check box.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab holds the default general ledger accounts and corresponding subaccounts of customers of the class.
Element Description
Customer ledger account The asset account that stores the balance of the customers of this class.
Customer ledger sub. The subaccount for the asset account that stores the balance of the transactions related to customers of this class.
Cash discount account The expense account used to record cash discount amounts received by customers of this class.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by customers of this class.
Sales account The income account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - non-taxable account The non-taxable sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - EU account The EU sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales - export account The export sales account used to record sales made to the customers of this class.
Sales sub. The subaccount used to record sales made to customers of the class.
Discount account

The expense account used to record trade discount amounts received by customers of this class.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount sub.

The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by customers of this class.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Prepayment account The account to record prepayments received from customers of the class.
Prepayment sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Freight account The income account used to record the freight charges for shipping the goods to customers of this class.
Freight sub. The subaccount used with the income account to record the freight charges for shipping the goods to customers of this class.
Unrealised gain account

The account to record unrealised gains calculated on transactions with customers of this class.

If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window will be used.
Unrealised gain sub.

The corresponding subaccount to record unrealised gains on transactions with customers of this class.

If no subaccount is selected in this column, a subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.
Unrealised loss account

The account to record unrealised losses calculated on transactions with customers of this class.

If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window will be used.
Unrealised loss sub.

The corresponding subaccount to record unrealised losses on transactions with customers of this class.

If no subaccount is selected in this column, the subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of customer attributes associated with the class. You can select an attribute from the list of attributes defined in your system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Element Description
Attribute ID The name of the attribute, which serves as its identifier. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description A detailed description of the attribute. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Sort order A number that represents the order of the attribute for sorting in reports.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for all customers of the class.
Internal A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is not available for portal users.
Control type The type of control for the attribute: Text, Combo, Multi select combo, Lookup, Check field, or Date/time.
Default value The default value of the attribute.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers of the class. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents(by email) to customers and company employees overseeing operations with customers of the class. The mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailings configured for particular customers. You can select mailings for the customer class from the list of predefined mailings available in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window and in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window (if the Inventory module is enabled in the system). The **Mailing settings** tab provides default values for mailings to be configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be generated and sent to customer contacts and company employees when a user invokes the action specific to the mailing on appropriate processing forms. Such emails can contain customer statements, invoices, or dunning letters in any of the available formats. The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, with the list of recipients. In the **Recipients** table, you can specify default types of customer contacts, not particular contacts. Only employees of your company can be specified as email recipients at the customer class level. ### The Mailings table By using this table you can view and modify the list of mailings to be available by default for customers of the class. The settings here are used as follows: + To provide default values for mailing settings for customers of the class, + To specify the mailings to be used to inform employees of your company, if needed, about changes in the documents of customers of this class.
Element Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of this mailing.
Branch The branch for which this mailing is defined.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing to customers of the class. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The customer ledger report to be used by default as the email body for the mailing, if this mailing uses a report rather than a mailing template.
Notification template The email template to be used for generating personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is used. For each mailing, you can specify either a report or an email template. By default, a notification template specified in the Notification template column on the Mailing settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is inserted in this column (if any).
Format The format in which the report, if a report is used, will be sent by default if a recipient has no preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Emails will be sent for only active mailings.
### The Recipients table Use the **Recipients** table to view and modify the list of default recipients for mailings. This list is used primarily to provide default contact types for the customer class; if necessary, you can also specify an employee of your company to receive electronic copies of documents of customers of this class.
Element Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive the mailing:

Primary
The contact specified as the customer’s primary contact
Invoicing
The contact specified as the customer’s remittance contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the customer’s shipping contact
Employee
The employee of your company who handles the documents of customers of the class or is otherwise associated with the customers
Contact ID

The particular recipient of the selected type.

A recipient can be specified only if Employee has been specified in the Contact type column. This employee will by default receive emails with documents of all customers of the class.
Format The format in which the document (formatted according to the selected report if applicable) will be sent for recipients of this type by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients will receive emails for the mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contacts of this type will by default receive blind carbon copies (Bcc) of the emails for this mailing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer contracts (CT301000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000 page By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer contracts (CT301000) By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create and maintain contracts for customer service. When you are creating a new contract, you can select the contract template you want to base it on. For more details, see [About contract setup and activation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-setup-and-activation/about-contract-setup-and-activation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Set up contract
Initiates contract setup. You can modify the contract setup date in the Set up contract dialog box that opens. By default, the contract setup date is the date specified in the Setup date field on the Summary tab of this window (the Contract settings section). When the operation has completed successfully, the contract gets the Pending activation status and an invoice is generated for the contract items that have a setup price specified.
Activate contract
Initiates the provision of contract services. You can modify the contract activation date in the Activate contract dialog box that opens. By default, the activation date is the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab (the Contract settings section). When the operation has completed successfully, the contract gets the Active status and an invoice is generated for contract items that have a prepaid recurring price specified. (The recurring price is invoiced in proportion to the services to be used.)
Set up and activate contract
Initiates contract setup and service provision on the same date. You can modify the contract setup and activation date in the Activate contract dialog box that opens. By default, this date is the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab (the Contract settings section).
Run contract invoicing
Initiates the invoicing process for the contract according to the invoicing schedule. After the operation has completed, you can view and further process the generated invoice on the Customer ledger history tab of the current window.
Renew contract
Initiates contract renewal according to the type of the contract. For details, see: About contract renewal.
Terminate contract
Cancels the contract (the contract status is changed to Cancelled ); no services will be provided.
Upgrade contract
Initiates the contract upgrade. The contract is given the Pending upgrade status and contract details can be edited. If you run contract invoicing for such contracts, it is performed according to the settings of the previous contract.
Activate upgrade
Initiates the provision of contract services according to the new settings that you have specified when the contract status was Pending upgrade. For details, see: Make changes to contract services.
Undo last action
Cancels the last action performed on this contract. This menu command is unavailable when the contract has the Draft status and when the last action involved released documents. After an action is undone, the Undo last action command becomes available again after another action is performed on a contract. The list of actions performed is available on the Contract history tab of this window.
Change ID
Brings up the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can type the new contract identifier.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu command, which you can click for quick access to an inquiry window:

Contract usage
Navigates to the Contract usage (CT303000) window so you can view the usage of the contract.
### The Set up contract dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Set up contract** action. By using this dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can modify the date of the contract setup.
Element Description
Setup date

The date of contract setup.

By default, this box contains the date specified in the Setup date field on the Summary tab of the contract.
OK (button) Initiates the selected operation.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing the selected operation.
### The Activate contract dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Activate contract** or **Set up and activate contract** action. By using this dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can modify the date of the contract activation.
Element Description
Activation date

The date of contract activation.

By default, this box contains the date specified in the Activation date field on the Summary tab of the contract.
OK (button) Initiates the selected operation.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing the selected operation.
### Specify new ID This dialog box opens when you select the **Change ID** action. By using the dialog box, you can modify the identifier of the contract.
Element Description
Contract ID The new contract identifier.
OK (button) Changes the contract identifier to the new one.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new contract based on a specific template or to select an existing contract for editing.
Element Description
Contract ID The unique identifier of a contract, which is specified in accordance with the configuration of the CONTRACT segmented key. The CONTRACT segmented key inherits its structure from the PROJECT segmented key.
Contract template The contract template that is used as a base for the contract.
Status

The status of the contract, which is one of the following:

Draft
The contract has not been activated and cannot yet be used.
Pending activation
The contract is set up and needs to be activated so that you can start providing services and initiate recurring invoicing (if required).
Active
The contract is activated and should be used as the basis for invoicing.
Expired
The contract has expired and can be renewed within the grace period.
Cancelled
The contract has been cancelled and is no longer used.
Pending upgrade
The contract is being prepared for upgrade and can be edited and invoiced. Contract invoicing is performed according to the settings of the previous contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Location The customer location associated with the contract.
Description

The description of the contract, which includes any related comments.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Balance A read-only field that displays the sum of the balances of open invoices associated with the contract.
## The Summary tab You use this tab to configure the general settings of a new contract or to view the settings of an existing contract. ### The Contract settings section
Element Description
Setup date The contract setup date. For contracts with the Draft status, in this field, you select the setup date, which will be displayed by default and can be changed in the Set up contract dialog box (which opens when you click the Set up contract action). This field is read-only after the contract has been set up.
Activation date The contract activation date. For contracts with the Draft or Pending activation status, you use this field to select the date, which will be displayed by default and can be changed in the Activate contract dialog box (which opens when you click the Activate contract action). This field is read-only after the contract has been activated.
Expiration date A read-only field that displays the date when the contract will expire. The date is calculated automatically according to the contract invoicing schedule.
Termination date A read-only field that displays the date when the contract was cancelled, if applicable.
Grace period (in days) The period of time after the expiration date when the renewable contract can be renewed. After the end of the grace period, only a copy of this contract with the Draft status can be created when you click the Renew contract action (that is, you cannot renew the same contract).
Mass renewal A check box that, if selected, indicates that this contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window.
Renewal point x Days before expiration

The number of days before the contract expiration date when the system starts to display the contract in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window if the Mass renewal check box is selected for the contract.

The accepted maximum value in the field is 3650 days (10 years).
Currency A read-only field that displays the currency to be used for contract invoicing.
### The Invoicing schedule section
Element Description
Invoicing schedule starts on A read-only field that displays the start date of the first invoicing period. The date, which is calculated automatically according to the contract invoicing schedule, is displayed after contract activation.
Invoicing period

The type of invoicing schedule, which can be one of the following options: Week, Month, Quarter, Half a year, Year, Statement-based, or On demand.

The invoice date is calculated based on the selected option and the date when the invoicing schedule is started. The On demand option means that invoicing is not scheduled and you can invoice the contract on any date.

The option cannot be used with contract items that have recurring pricing configured, except for items that are tied up with a deposit item or have a default quantity of zero. For details on deposit contract items, see: About retainer contracts.
Last invoicing date A read-only field that shows the date when the invoicing was performed most recently.
Next invoicing date The date of the next invoicing invoice, according to the invoicing schedule.
### The Invoice information section
Element Description
Invoice to

The setting that defines the customer account to be invoiced for a contract. The following options are available:

Parent account
The account to be invoiced is the parent account of the customer account specified in the Customer field of the top part of this window.
Customer account
The account to be invoiced is the account specified in the Customer field of the top part of this window.
Specific account
The account to be invoiced is the account specified in the Account field of the current section of the Summary tab.
Account The specific account that is to be invoiced for contract services. This field is available only if the Specific account option is selected in the Invoice to field.
Location The customer location associated with the account the contract is invoiced to.
Invoice description In this field, you can specify the formulas for invoice descriptions by using the standard formula editor. The field is available for editing only when the Enable overriding formulas in contracts check box is selected in the Contract templates (CT202000) window. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
Line description In this field, you can specify the formulas for line descriptions by using the standard formula editor. The field is available for editing only when the Enable overriding formulas in contracts check box is selected in the Contract templates (CT202000) window. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.
### The Contract management section
Element Description
Owner The owner of the contract.
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the contract.
Case count item A non-stock item used for counting cases associated with the contract. For details, see: Set up invoicing by the number of cases.
## The Details tab This tab lists the contract items provided under the contract. The list of contract items is loaded automatically from the template you have selected. You can modify the list of items if the **Enable template item override** check box is selected for the template in the [Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/) window.
Element Description
Effective from The date when the contract was set up or upgraded. This field is available for editing when the contract has the Pending upgrade status. You may select a date here that is to be displayed by default and can be changed in the Activate contract dialog box, which opens when you click the Activate upgrade action.
Promo code The code of the discount to be applied.
Pending setup

A read-only field that displays information as follows:

  • If the contract status is Draft, the total of setup fees (item setup price multiplied by included quantity)
  • If the contract status is Pending upgrade, the total difference of setup fees before upgrade and during upgrade setup (the item setup price multiplied by the difference in quantity)
Pending recurring

A read-only field that displays information as follows:

  • If the contract status is Draft, the total of recurring fees (item recurring price multiplied by included quantity)
  • If the contract status is Pending upgrade, the total difference of recurring fees before upgrade and during upgrade setup (item recurring price multiplied by the difference in quantity)
Pending renewal A read-only field that displays the total of renewal prices (item renewal price multiplied by included quantity). This field is displayed for contracts that have the Draft or Pending upgrade status.
Total pending A read-only field that displays the total pending amount. This field is displayed for contracts that have the Draft or Pending Upgrade status.
Current setup A read-only field that displays the total of setup fees (item setup price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with this sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Current recurring A read-only field that displays the total of recurring fees (item recurring price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with this sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Current renewal A read-only field that displays the total of renewal prices (item renewal price multiplied by included quantity). This field is populated with the sum on contract activation or upgrade.
Column Description
Item code The identifier of the contract item.
Description A description of the item, with any relevant comments.
Included The contract item quantity included by default. It can be overridden within the allowed limits. For recurring contract items, if any are added to retainer contracts or contracts that are invoiced on demand, we recommend that you specify an included quantity of zero.
Difference The quantity difference if the contract status is Pending upgrade.
Setup price The contract item price for setup.
Setup discount (%) The discount percent applied to the setup price.
Recurring price The contract item recurring price.
Extra usage price The contract item price for extra usage.
Recurring discount (%) The discount percent applied to the recurring price.
Renewal price The contract item price for renewal.
Renewal discount (%) The discount percent applied to the renewal price.
## The Recurring summary tab This tab lists the contract items that have a recurring price configured.
Element Description
Recurring total A read-only field that displays the total sum to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Extra usage total A read-only field that displays the total sum to be invoiced for extra usage for the current invoicing period.
Total due A read-only field that displays the total amount to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Column Description
Item code The identifier of the contract item.
Description A description of the item, with any relevant comments.
Item ID The identifier of the non-stock item the customer is invoiced for recurrently.
UoM The unit of measure used for invoicing. The UoM is the contract currency for deposit contract items.
Invoice type The item invoicing policy defined in the contract item. The invoicing type is Deposit for deposit contract items.
Included The item quantity the customer is invoiced for at the recurring price.
Recurring price The recurring price of the item.
Recurring discount (%) The discount percent applied to the recurring price.
Extra usage price The price of extra usage of the item.
Not yet invoiced The item quantity for which the customer is to be invoiced for the current invoicing period.
Used total The item quantity used from contract activation until the current business date.
## The Employee overrides tab The tab displays a list of the associations between the earning type, the labour item, and the employee. An association is used to determine the labour item to be used as the source of the price and sales accounts for recording contract usage if this labour item is not explicitly defined in the case class for the earning type specified in the released activity. For details, see [About usage-based contracts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-contracts/contract-examples/usage-based-contracts/about-usage-based-contracts/).
Column Description
Type of hour The identifier of the type of hour.
Description The description of the type of hour.
Labour item The identifier of the non-stock item (of the Labour type) used as a source of the price and sales account to record the contract usage.
Employee The identifier of the employee. If the employee is not selected, the value is All employees.
Employee name The name of the employee.
## The Contract history tab
Button Description
View contract Opens a new window with the Customer contracts (CT301000) window so you can view the related contract details.
### Table columns
Column Description
Action The action performed for the contract.
Date The date when the action was performed.
User The user who performed the action.
Related contract The ID of any related contract. The related contract is either derived from the current contract or served as a derivation for the current contract. The field is populated by the system during the renewal process. For details, see: Renew a contract.
## The Sales history tab The tab displays the list of documents related to the contract.
Column Description
Type The type of customer ledger document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the document. By clicking the number, you can navigate to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, where you can view the details of the document.
Post period The financial period to which the invoice transactions are posted.
Date The date of the invoice.
Due date The due date of the invoice.
Status The status of the invoice.
Amount The amount of the invoice.
Balance The balance of the invoice if it was paid partially.
Payment method The customer default payment method.
## The Attributes tab The list of attributes defined in the selected template. You can use available attributes for classification of contracts.
Column Description
Attribute The attribute name.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must provide a value for the attribute.
Value The value for the attribute.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer details (AR402000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000 page You use this window to track outstanding balances for each customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer details (AR402000) You use this window to track outstanding balances for each customer. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can select the branch, customer, financial period, currency, and customer ledger account–subaccount pair used for the customer; you then view the list of documents associated with the customer. By default the window displays the list of open customer documents for the selected customer (with the **Open** status), but you can add to the list closed documents and unreleased documents by selecting the **Show all documents** and **Include unreleased documents** check boxes correspondingly. You can also print other reports based on this information, which are listed under **Reports** in the upper part of the window. > [!NOTE] > Cash sales transactions are shown as split into **Cash sale** and **Cash sale invoice** transactions. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Enter new invoice
Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, so that you can enter a new invoice for the customer.
Enter new payment
Navigates to the Customer payments (AR302000) window, so that you can enter a new payment for the customer.
Pay invoice
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window, so that you can enter a new payment for the selected invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

Balance by customer
Navigates to the Balance by customer (AR632500) report.
Customer history
Navigates to the Customer history (AR652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AR631000) report.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AR631500) report.
Customer documents
Navigates to the Customer documents (AR621500) report.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select a financial period, a customer, and the currency of the operations. Also, you can select a particular customer ledger account with the corresponding subaccount.
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to view data. By default, it is the company you have access to.
Branch The branch for which you want to view data. By default, it is the branch you have access to.
Customer The customer whose open documents you want to view. Obligatory.
Period The financial period for which you want to view the data. If you make no selection, information related to all open periods will be displayed.
Currency The currency used with the specified customer.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account used for the customer.
Customer ledger sub The corresponding subaccount.
Show all documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that closed documents (with the Closed status) are included in the list. The check box is not displayed if a financial period is selected in the Period field.
Include unreleased documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that unreleased documents (with the On hold and Balanced statuses) are included in the list.
Balance by documents A read-only field that displays the total balance recalculated for all customer’s documents matching the selected criteria. The balance will not change based on whether the Open documents only option is selected because Closed documents do not affect the balance.
Current balance A read-only field that displays the customer balance retrieved from the account history records in the database.
Prepayments balance The balance of customer prepayments calculated for the selected criteria.
Balance discrepancy

A read-only field that displays the difference between the Balance by documents value and the sum of Current balance and

Prepayment balance values. If unreleased documents are not included, the value should be equal to zero; if it’s not zero, there are errors in the database.
Include child accounts

A check box that you select to view documents of both the parent account and its child accounts. The Balance by documents, Current balance, Prepayment balance, and Balance discrepancy fields (in the top part of the window) will display the consolidated balance for parent accounts that have child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected on the Invoicing settings tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The table The table contains the list of documents matching the criteria specified in the top part. The amounts or balances on customer payments are shown as negative values.
Column Description
Customer The customer number.
Branch The branch ID.
Type The type of customer ledger document: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, Payment, Overdue charge, or Prepayment.
Reference no. The identifier of the document as it was assigned by the number series.
Post period The period to which the document transactions should be posted.
Date The date when the document was created.
Due date The due date of the document.
Status The status of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Original amount (currency) The amount in the currency of the document (before discount).
Balance (currency) The balance of the document in the specified currency.
Cash discount taken (currency) The cash discount taken in the specified currency.
Orig. amount The original amount of the document, before payment application, in the base currency.
Balance The balance of the document, if a payment was applied, in the base currency.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount received by the customer on the document.
RGOL amount The total amount of realised gain or loss (RGOL) incurred as the result of currency rate fluctuation.
Payment method The payment method used by the customer for the document.
Sales invoice no./payment no. The reference number of the original customer document.
Invoice text A detailed description of the document.
Period beg. balance The balance of the account at the beginning of the selected financial period.
Period beg. balance in currency The account balance in the specified currency at the start of the selected financial period.

Related pages

Concepts

 Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000 section You use this window to configure the Customer ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) You use this window to configure the Customer ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Settings defined in this window include number series for customer ledger documents, document and payment processing options, and mailing settings. Some settings in this window cannot be changed once the workspace is in use, such as the number series assigned for invoices, debit andcredit notes, and customer payments. Other settings can be changed at will. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The General information tab The general settings for the Customer ledger workspace include the number series used for customer documents and for financial charges. Also, you can set various document processing options. > [!NOTE] > You can use different number series for each document type or the same series for multiple types. In the latter case, the system assigns all documents numbers (identifiers) from the same series, based on the order they were entered or generated, so two successive identifiers may refer to documents of different types. ### The Number series section
Element Description
General ledger batch number series The number series used for batches originating in the Customer ledger workspace.
Invoice number series The number series used for customer ledger invoices. A customer ledger invoice is created for each original customer document, invoice, note, or financial charge.
Payment number series The number series used for customer payments.
Debit note number series The number series used for debit adjustments.
Credit note number series The number series used for credit adjustments.
Write-off number series The number series used for write-off documents.
Overdue charge number series The number series used for overdue charges. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Price worksheet number series The number series used for price worksheets.
Dunning fee number series The number series used for dunning fees.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically post on release A check box that indicates (if selected) that transactions will be automatically posted to the General ledger workspace once they are released in the Customer ledger workspace.
Post summary when updating the general ledger

A check box that indicates (if selected) that customer ledger documents will be posted to the General ledger workspace with summarised row amounts if particular criteria are met. That is, if multiple rows in a customer ledger document specify the same account (and subaccount, if any) and branch (if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), then in the general ledger batch, these rows will be combined into one row with the summarised amount. Note: The summarised transaction amounts can be posted to an account (and subaccount, if any) only if both the Post summary when updating the general ledger check box is selected in this window and the Summary option is specified for an account in the Post option column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.

Note

The general ledger batch can contain multiple documents if the Consolidated posting to general ledger functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see Overview of the functionalities.
Activate migration mode

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user can release documents in Customer ledger and Supplier ledger (both invoices and payments) without creating a General ledger batch in the General ledger.The balance will still be added to the customer or supplier.

Stock items can also be selected.

The Sales and Purchases workspaces cannot be used.
### The Data entry settings section
Element Description
Default customer class ID The customer class to be used as the default class. When you create a new class by using the Customer classes (AR201000) window, the settings defined for the class specified here will be inserted. (You can change any of these settings.)
Combine sales sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the sales subaccount to be used in data entry windows in the Customer ledger workspace. To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

C
Subaccount associated with the branch
E
Subaccount associated with the employee
I
Subaccount associated with the item
L
Subaccount associated with the customer location
S
Subaccount associated with the salesperson

For a segment, the characters designating each option are repeated as many times there are characters in the segment. See: About combined subaccounts for more information.
Rounding rule for invoices

The rule to be used for invoice total amount rounding, which is one of the following:

Use currency precision
To round the amounts to the precision supported for the currency of the document
Nearest
To round each invoice total to the nearest multiple of the smallest unit (specified in the Rounding precision field)
Up
To round up each invoice total to the next multiple of the smallest unit
Down
To round down each invoice total to the previous multiple of the smallest unit

This field is available only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Rounding precision

The smallest unit for invoice amount rounding; this list is not available if the Use currency precision option is selected in the Rounding rule field. Select one of the following options:

0.05
To round each total to a multiple of 0.05
0.10
To round each total to a multiple of 0.1
0.50
To round each total to a multiple of 0.5
1.00
To round each total to a multiple of 1
10.00
To round each total to a multiple of 10
100.00
To round each total to a multiple of 100

This field is available only if the Invoice roundingfunctionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Hold documents on entry A check box that means (if selected) that documents will get the On hold status by default when they are saved.
Validate document totals on entry A check box that means (if selected) that totals of new documents will be validated on entry.
Require payment reference on entry A check box that means (if selected) that users must fill in the Payment ref. field in data entry windows in the Customer ledger, Cash management, and Sales workspaces.
Hold document on failed credit check A check box that indicates (if selected) that new invoices and notes are placed on hold and cannot be released for customers that failed the credit check. If the check box is not selected, new documents can be saved and processed regardless of the credit check result, although the system warns users about customers that failed their credit check.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Automatic payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Process customer refunds (AR50300S) window.
Manual payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Manual payments (AR30200S) window.
Direct debit payment method This value will automatically be set when you open the Send direct debit invoices (AR50850S) window.
### The Data processing settings section
Element Description
Age credits A check box that means (if selected) that credit notes and open payments will be aged on customer statements and reports along with invoices and debit notes according to the ageing periods defined in the Statement cycles (AR202800) window. If the check box is cleared, credit notes and open payments will appear as the current documents.
Set default overdue charges by statement cycle A check box that means (if selected) that overdue charges specified for the statement cycle are applied to an overdue document. If the check box is not selected, overdue charges specified for the customer class are applied. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Calculate on overdue charge documents A check box that means (if selected) that overdue charges will be calculated on overdue charge documents as well as on invoices; thus, the amount of overdue charges compounds. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Apply payments to overdue charges first A check box that indicates (if selected) that payments will be applied to overdue charges first and only after that to outstanding invoices, starting with those having the earliest dates, if the Apply payments automatically check box is selected for a customer in the Customers (AR303000) window. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Salesperson commission settings section
Element Description
Salesperson commission by

The way commissions for all salespersons are calculated:

Invoice
On the invoices associated with a salesperson, whether the invoices are paid or not
Payment
On only the paid invoices
Commission period type The way commission is paid: Monthly, Quarterly, Yearly, or By financial period.
### The Consolidation settings section
Element Description
Consolidate statements for all branches A check box that indicates (if selected) that statements from different branches should be consolidated.
Statement from branch The branch to appear on the consolidated statements.
Consolidate dunning letters for all branches A check box that indicates (if selected) that dunning letters from different branches should be consolidated.
Dunning letter from branch The branch to appear on the consolidated dunning letters.
### The Default write-off reason codes section
Element Description
Reason code balance write-off The reason code that is used by default when you perform a balance write-off operation.
Reason code credit write-off The reason code that is used by default when you perform a credit write-off operation.
### The VAT recalculation settings section This section is available only if the VAT reporting feature is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Automatically release credit notes A check box that indicates (if selected) that VAT credit notes generated for the invoices that are fully paid within the cash discount period will be released automatically when you process them in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window.
Credit note description

The description to be used for the credit note, which is generated for a document that was paid early and that adjusts the VAT and taxable amounts.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
### The Customer refund settings section
Element Description
Payment message prefix The prefix that will be used in outgoing payment messages.
## The Price/discount settings tab By using this tab, you can select options that affect price calculation, price history retention, and discount application. ### The Price maintenance section
Element Description
Default rate type The default rate type to be used for calculation of prices in foreign currencies. The field provides a rate type to be used by default when you work with sales prices.
Always calculate the price from the base currency

A check box that indicates (if selected) that if a document uses a non-base currency, then the item price (sales or default) is converted to a price in the currency of the document, based on the item price expressed in the base currency. Thus, when you add an item to a document (an order or invoice) that uses a non-base currency, the system suggests the price of the item based the value of this check box:

Cleared
The system looks for a sales price of the item in the document currency, and if a sales price is found, the system suggests this item price for the document. If a sales price is not found, the system converts the default price of the item to the document currency and suggests the converted default price.
Selected
The system looks for a sales price of the item in the base currency, and if the sales price is found, the system converts this price to the document currency and suggests this item price for the document. If a sales price is not found, the system converts the default price of the item to the document currency and suggests it.
Load sales prices by alternative item ID A check box that (if selected) makes it possible to specify prices in sales price worksheets by the alternative IDs of items, so that the system will find and populate the corresponding item IDs automatically.
### The Price retention section
Element Description
Retention type

The way the history of prices, which is defined by using the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, will be retained. Select one of the following options:

Last price
The last defined price is kept.
Fixed number of months
The history of price changes is kept for the number of months specified in the Number of months field. The period is calculated back from the effective date of a worksheet that contains respective price record.
Note

By default, Retention type is set to Fixed number of months and Number of months is set to 0, which means that the history of prices will be kept forever.
Number of months The number of months the history of price changes should be kept. This field is available if the Fixed number of months option is selected in the Retention type field.
### The Discounts section This section is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Line discount basis

The way the line discount will be applied. Select one of the following options:

Manual amount
The discount will be applied to the line amount.
Unit price
The discount will be applied to the item’s unit price.
Apply quantity discounts to

The way the system applies the discounts defined by quantity. Select one of the following options:

The UoM on the document line
The system applies the discount to the quantity in the document line’s unit of measure (UoM).
The base UoM
The system converts the quantity in the document line’s UoM to the quantity in the base UoM and applies discounts based on the calculated base quantity.
Apply line discounts specific to A check box that indicates (if selected) that any line-level discounts should be skipped if there is a special price for the line item that is defined for this particular customer.
## The Dunning settings tab By using the **Dunning settings** tab, you can define how the system prepares dunning letters: by grouping overdue documents by customer account; or by grouping overdue documents by customer and by the dunning level of a document. The amount of the dunning letter fee (and which accounts are used for recording this fee), and what intervals are used for sending dunning letters. This tab is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ### The Dunning process settings section In this section, you define how the documents are grouped when the system prepares dunning letters and which documents you want to prepare letters for.
Element Description
Dunning process

The way the system groups overdue documents when prepares dunning letters. Select one of the following options:

By customer
The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer account. With this option selected, the system selects the Automatically release dunning letters check box and sets it as read-only.
By document
The system prepares dunning letters by grouping overdue documents by customer and by document dunning level.
Note

We recommend that you select the way of setting a level from the very beginning and keep that setting. You can switch from By customer to By document, but switching from By document to By customer is not recommended.
Automatically release dunning letters A check box that indicates, if selected, that dunning letters are automatically released after preparation is completed. The field is available for editing if the By document option was selected in the Dunning process field.
Include other unpaid documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system includes in dunning letters the unpaid documents that are not due yet. This is the default value for the Include other unpaid documents check box in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters.
Include credit note documents

A check box that indicates, if selected, that the dunning letter will contain credit notes.

This is the default value for the Include credit note documents check box in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window that you can change any time you prepare dunning letters.
### The Dunning fee settings section In this section, you define the accounts to which you want to record the dunning letters fee, if your company charges one.
Element Description
Dunning fee item The non-stock item that provides an account and a subaccount (if applicable) to register the collected fee, and a VAT category.
Automatically release dunning fee documents A check box that indicates (if selected) that an invoice for the dunning fee is automatically released when the corresponding dunning letter is released. Otherwise, you need to release it manually by using the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
### The table columns
Element Description
Dunning letter level An integer that indicates the order in which a letter of this level should be sent.
Days past due The number of days that should pass after the due date for at least one customer document before the system may generate a dunning letter of this level.
Days to settle The number of days that are added to the letter date to calculate the deadline for the payment.
Description Any comment that is relevant to a dunning letter of this level.
Dunning fee The amount of the dunning letter fee, if your company charges one, for this level.
Days to due The number of days to the due date.
Report text code The code of the report text that will be included in the dunning letter.
## The Reporting settings tab The **Reporting settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents (by email) to customers and company employees overseeing operations with customers. Mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailing settings of customer classes, which in turn will provide default values for mailings configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be sent to customer contacts and company employees when an employee (a user) performs specific processing. Such emails can contain customer statements, invoices, or dunning letters. Also, customers can be notified about credit card expiration. The tab includes the **Default sources** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Default recipients** table, with the list of recipients. ### The Default sources table You use the **Default source** table to view the list of predefined mailings and select any of them for use in the Customer ledger workspace. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Mailing ID

The unique ID of the mailing. The mailings available in the Customer ledger workspace are listed below:

INVOICE
To send invoices by email
DUNNINGLETTER
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances.
STATEMENT
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances (in the base currency)
STATEMENTMC
To inform users and customers about customers’ outstanding balances (in multi-currency format)
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The customer ledger report that, by default, will be used to structure the information available in the document. The document will be sent as an attachment. A notification template, if selected next, is used to window an email body, otherwise an email body is taken from the report settings.
Notification template

The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is selected for this mailing.

Note

You need to specify either a notification template or a report for a mailing at least. If a notification template is not specified, text for email body is taken from the report settings.

The system inserts this template by default in the Notification template column on the Mailing settings tab in the Customer classes (AR201000) window when you add a mailing in the Mailings table.
Format The format in which the document (if a report is used) will be sent by default if no other preferences are specified in the Customers (AR303000) window for the particular customer contacts. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Emails will be generated only for active mailings.
### The Default recipients table By using the **Default recipients** table, you can view and modify default types of recipients for the mailing selected in the**Default sources** table. Contact types specified here are used as default values for the contact types of customer classes.
Element Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive mailings. You select one of the following options:

Primary
A primary contact of the customer
Remittance
A remittance contact of the customer
Shipping
A shipping contact of the customer
Employee
An employee of your company who handles documents of specific customer classes or specific customers, or is otherwise associated with the classes or customers
Contact ID The ID of the mailing recipient. A particular recipient can be selected only if you have selected Employee as the contact type. This employee, if one is selected, will receive emails about changes in the documents of all customers.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients receive the emails for the mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact (or contact of this type) will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails for this mailing.
## The Payment settings tab On this tab, you can create new payment configurations. ### The top part
Element Description
Select configuration Click icon-select and double-click to select your preferred CID configuration.
Status The status of the configuration. To hide/view CID code on outgoing invoices, set the status to Inactive/Active accordingly. The Editing status allows you to edit the predefined format of the CID.
Branch The branch in which the configuration is applied. If you have multiple branches, you can add different settings for each branch.
Payment method The payment method to which you want your configuration to apply.
Digit counter The number of digits to be used in the payment references with this configuration.
Description The name for the new configuration.
Display mask The display mask to be used to control the format of dates and numeric values.
Reference modulus The modulus for the new configuration.
Reference weight The weight or relevance of the modulus.
Amount check digit The digit that is used for checking of amount.
Amount weight The weight or relevance of the amount.
### The table columns
Element Description
Element Choose the elements that will make up the new configuration.
Fixed value A fixed value in the element, if any.
Number of positions The number of digits the element should have.
Leading/trailing zeros The value that shows if leading/trailing zeros will be used in the elements or now.
## The AutoInvoice settings tab For more information about the settings to be defined here for the use of AutoInvoice, see [Settings in Customer ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/settings-in-customer-ledger-preferences/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer list (AR40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer list (AR40101S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the selected customer account.
## The top part
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display the customer accounts.
Status

The status of the customer accounts you want to display. You can select one of the following options:

Active
accounts that are in use.
On hold
accounts that are not completed; editing or additional information is needed.
Credit hold
accounts for which no invoices may be entered, because some payments have not been received.
Inactive
accounts that are set to Inactive.
One time
accounts marked as one-time customers.
Country The customer’s country.
AutoInvoice validation (B2B) When this check box is selected, the AutoInvoice validation is used on the displayed customers.
AutoInvoice validation (B2C) When this check box is selected, the AutoInvoice validation is used on the displayed customers.
## The table
Column Description
Customer no. The ID of the customer account.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is displayed in the system.
Address 1 The first line of the customer’s address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
Corporate ID The customer’s company ID, associated with the location.
Attention The customer’s main contact attention line.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Last sale The date when the last sale has been made to the customer.
Status The status of the customer. Accordant with the status selected in the top part of the window.
Customer class The class to which the customer is assigned. Accordant with the customer class selected in the top part of the window.
Address 2 The second line of the customer’s address.
Address 3 The third line of the customer’s address.
County The customer’s county or province.
Finvoice contract ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice contract, if applicable.
Finvoice intermediator ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice intermediator, if applicable.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer.
Print dunning letters A check box that, if selected, indicates that dunning letters for the customer can be printed in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.
Print invoices A check box that, if selected, indicates that invoices for the customer can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
Send dunning letters by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send dunning letters for the customer by email in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.
Fax The fax number of the customer.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice When this check box is selected, invoices for the customer are sent to AutoInvoice.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) When this check box is selected, invoices for the customer are sent to AutoInvoice as a banking e-invoice. This applies to Norway only.
Send statements by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements for the customer can be sent by email to the customer in the Print statements (AR503500) window.
Terms The ID of the payment terms used in operations with the customer.
Send invoices by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices for the customer by email in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.
VAT registration ID The customer’s taxpayer ID associated with the location.
VAT zone The VAT zone of the customer’s default location.

Related pages

Tasks

 Customer locations (CR303010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010 page In this window, which is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can define the locations of businesses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer locations (CR303010) In this window, which is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you can define the locations of businesses. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part In this area, you can select a customer and create a new location for it, or select an existing location for editing.
Element Description
Business connection The customer this location is associated with.
Location ID

The identifier of the location; an alphanumeric string of up to six characters may be used.

The system automatically assigns the identifier (MAIN) to the first location associated with the customer. For each additional location, you can specify the identifier.
Active

A check box that you select if the location is active.

For auditing purposes, locations cannot be removed. If the location is not used, mark it as inactive by clearing the check box.
Location name

A descriptive name to help users recognise the location.

You can enter an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.
## The General information tab On this tab, you can specify the location's contact and address information. The tab has elements organised in sections to make it easier to find information. ### The Location contact section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that you select if the contact information is the same as the company’s main information.

If this check box is selected, the elements below it are populated with this information.
Company name This location’s legal business name.
Attention Information about the contact person.
Email The location’s default email address.
Web The website address (if any) related to the location.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the location.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the location.
Fax The default fax number of the location.
### The Location address section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that you select if the location address is the same as the customer’s main address.

The system then populates the elements below with this address.
Address 1 The first line of the address of this location.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Postcode The location’s postal code.
City The city of the location.
Country The country of the location.
County The county or province of the location.
View on map A button you can click to view the location on a map.
VAT registration ID The optional VAT registration ID associated with the location. An input mask or regular expression can be set to validate this value.
Corporate ID The organisation number to be used for the customer location.
VAT zone The VAT zone associated with the location.
Export type

The export type defined for the customer location.

See also: About export types.
VAT exemption number If this location is VAT exempt, the exemption number.
EDI code The EDI code to be used for the customer location.
GLN The GLN to be used for the customer location.
Shipping branch The location of your company that will be used to ship the goods to the customer location.
Price class The price class that is associated with the customer location. A price class, defined in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window, indicates the price level offered to the location.
Default project The project associated with this location by default, or a non-project code indicating that no projects are associated by default.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to issue the goods to the location.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ship via The carrier used for shipping the goods to the customer location.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used in relations with the location.
Shipping zone The shipping zone used to calculate the freight charge when your company ships goods to the location.
FOB point The location at which title for the shipment passes from your company to the customer location.
Residential delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the shipment will be delivered to a residential area.
Saturday delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the shipment may be delivered on Saturday.
Insurance A check box that indicates (if selected) that insurance is required for the order.
Shipping rule

The option that defines how the orders should be fulfilled for this customer location. You can use one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
back orders are allowed if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
the ordered quantity can be shipped partially, and the quantity remaining after the first shipment will be cancelled.
Order priority The priority of sales orders of this location. (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can be used for informational purposes only.)
Lead time (days) The number of days required for shipped goods to reach the location.
Calendar The calendar associated with the location. Calendar settings are defined in the Work calendar (CS209000) window.
### The Excise duty section This tab section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Check box Description
Exclude from duty calculation

A check box that you select if you want the location to be excluded from excise duty calculations. Orders and invoices with items connected to excise duties will display excise duty amounts and totals, but these will always be 0.

Released invoices with excise duty items are traceable in the Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000) window.
## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you can specify the general ledger accounts associated with the location.
Element Description
Same as default location A check box that indicates (if selected) that the accounts to be used for this location are those specified for the default customer location.
Customer ledger account The asset account used to record the account balance for this location.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Sales account The account used to record sales to this location; you must specify this account.
Sales - non-taxable account The account used to record non-taxable sales to this location.
Sales - EU account The account used to record the EU sales to this location.
Sales - export account The account used to record the export sales to this location.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount; you must specify a subaccount.
Discount account The expense account to record the discount received by the customer location.
Discount sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Freight account The account to record freight charges for sales orders.
Freight sub. The corresponding subaccount.
## The AutoInvoice settings tab Fields to be used when sending electronic invoices in PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format. ### The PEPPOL scheme section
Element Description
Endpoint

Seller electronic address identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the seller electronic address.

Example value: 0088
Party identification

Buyer identifier identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the Buyer identifier.

Example value: 0088
Party legal

Seller legal registration identifier identification scheme identifier. The identification scheme identifier of the Seller legal registration identifier.

Example value: 0007
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref.

Invoice line buyer accounting reference. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the buyer’s financial accounts.

Example value: 4217:2323:2323
Originator document ref.

Tender or lot reference. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.

Example value: PPID-123
Contract document ref.

Contract reference. The identification of a contract.

Example value: 123Contractref

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer payment methods (AR303010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010 page You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payment methods (AR303010) You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to specify details for the payment methods used by particular customers. You may assign each customer any number of payment methods and, for payment methods that can involve multiple sets of details, any number of these detail sets. ## The top part In this area of the window, you can specify the customer for which you want to add a customer payment method and the payment method that will be used as a template. The layout of this area and of the **Payment method details** tab depends on the settings of the selected payment method.
Element Description
Customer The customer whose payment method you want to view or add; select a customer from the list of customers defined in the system.
Payment method The payment method used as a template for a customer payment method you are currently viewing; select a payment method to use its settings for creating a new customer payment method.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected customer payment method is active (that is, available for recording payments).
Cash account

The cash account to accrue customer payments made by this payment method, if it differs from the default cash account specified for the payment method selected. You can select an account from the list of cash accounts allowed for the payment method.

If the field is empty, the system will use the default cash account of the selected payment method.
Description The description of the selected payment method.
## The Payment method details tab The specific elements on this tab depend on the selected payment method, which is defined in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window.
Column Description
Description A description of the column. Depending on the selected payment method you will see different descriptions here.
Value Enter the value, for example a bank account number.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer payments (AR302000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000 page You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer payments (AR302000) You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to enter incoming payments and apply them against the customer's open items, as well as to create customer refunds. Also, you can add charges applied by the bank for payment processing, and release a payment document. If the payment document still has a non-zero balance after it has been applied to customer invoices and notes, you can apply its balance against additional invoices or notes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Match a credit note with an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-a-credit-note-with-an-invoice/) + [Enter a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/enter-a-payment-document/) + [Release a payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/release-a-payment-document/) + [Create a payment for a sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-payment-for-a-sales-invoice/) + [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/) + [Correct an application record](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/correct-an-application-record/) + [View invoices paid with a specific payment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/view-invoices-paid-with-a-specific-payment-document/) + [Form a list of applications automatically](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-automatically/) + [Form a list of applications manually](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/form-a-list-of-applications-manually/) + [Issue a refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/issue-a-refund/) + [Void a payment or prepayment document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-payment-or-prepayment-document/) + [Void a customer refund](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/void-a-customer-refund/) + [Match customer documents in Customer ledger](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/match-customer-documents-in-customer-ledger/) + [Create a voided payment](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-payments/create-a-voided-payment/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the payment, automatically creating a batch of appropriate transactions.
Void The system creates the document of the Voided refund type with a negative amount. For the voided refund, you can specify the application date, period, and description, and then release the voided refund.
Inquiries Provides the Customer details and Customer documents menu command, which you can click for quick access to the respective windows.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
## The top part Here, you can enter a new payment or select one of the existing documents for viewing its details or for editing.
Element Description
Type

The type of a document. The following types are available:

Payment
A document recording a payment received from the customer. One payment may be applied to multiple invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges.
Credit note
A document crediting the customer, which may be used as a base for a customer refund or applied against invoices and debit notes.
Prepayment
A document recording a customer prepayment. One prepayment may be applied to one or multiple invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges.
Customer refund
A payment, designed to reimburse the customer, that can be applied to credit notes.
Voided payment
A payment that was voided.
Voided refund
A refund that was voided.
Balance write-off
A document that writes off a customer’s small balance that won’t be paid.
Ref. no

The unique identifier for the payment. This number is automatically generated by the system for a new payment document, based on the number series in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Note

If the Manual numbering check box is selected for the specified numbering sequence in the Number series (CS201010), the system validates each new reference number you enter in order to prevent the creation of payments and prepayments with the same reference number.
Status

The status of the customer payment, which for a new document is either Balanced or On hold. (The default status of a new document is controlled by the Hold documents on entry option in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.) The status of an existing document can be one of following:

On hold
A user can edit the document but cannot release it. If you clear the Hold check box when you finish editing, the document status changes to Balanced.
Balanced
The credit and debit totals are equal for the newly created customer ledger and it can be released. To change the status of the document to Balanced, clear the Hold check box.
Open
The document is released, but the application amount is less than the payment amount.
Reserved
The document has been released and then put on hold. A user selected the Hold check box for the document with the Open status and the system changed the document status from Open to Reserved. Reserved payments could not be applied to outstanding documents and are excluded from the auto-application process. You can clear the Hold check box to release the payment from hold.
Closed
The document has been released and closed (application amount is equal to the payment amount).
Voided
The document has been voided.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft with the On hold status.

This check box is unavailable for debit adjustments.
Date The date when a payment is applied to a document (invoice or note). The field displays the current business date for unapplied or partially applied payments and the latest application date for the closed payment. You can apply a payment to a number of documents on different application dates. Also, you can use the Balance by customer (AR632500) report to view application dates of the documents.
Financial period The financial period to which the payment should be applied, which the system fills in based on the date.
Payment ref.

A secondary payment reference identifier, which can be:

  • a system-generated number, if the Suggest next customer ledger no. check box is selected for the used cash account in the Payment methods (CA204000) window, or
  • an external reference number entered manually (such as a bank check number).

The system requires a payment reference number if the Require payment reference on entry check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

This field is not available for credit notes.
Customer The customer who issued the payment.
Location

The customer location associated with the sale. Once the customer is selected, this field displays the customer’s default location ID, which can be changed.

This element appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Payment method The customer’s default payment method; this field is not available for credit notes.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s default payment method.
Cash account The default cash account associated with the payment method; this field is not available for credit notes. If this is a clearing cash account, the payment will be included in a batch deposit.
Currency

The currency of the payment document.

Once the customer is selected, the system inserts the customer’s default currency, but it may be changed if the customer’s settings allow currency overriding.
Invoice text A user-defined description of the payment. The description may contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Payment amount The total of the payment that is entered manually.
Applied to documents The total of the documents to which payment is to be applied. The total is displayed until payment release.
Applied to orders The total of the orders for which payment is reserved, minus the amount transferred to invoice.
Available balance The amount that has not been applied. This value is non-zero if the payment amount is greater than the document amount.
Write-off amount The amount that has been written off.
Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Deducted charges

The total amount of bank charges deducted by bank from the payment amount on your cash account (bank account).

Even if the charges were actually deducted by bank, the original payment amount is shown in the top part.
ROT or RUT payment (check box) (check box)

A check box that you select to indicate that this is a payment from Skatteverket for ROT and RUT.

Note

By selecting this check box, you can filter on ROT/RUT payments in a generic inquiry.
## The Documents to apply tab This tab includes the list (in a tabular format) of the customer's open documents to which the incoming payment is to be applied. Click **Load documents** in the table toolbar to specify a date range, a range of reference numbers, or both, and the system adds to the list the customer's documents that meet the criteria. If there are open credit notes matching the specified criteria, they appear at the top of the list.
Button Description
Load documents Opens the Load options dialog box, where you can specify criteria for loading the customer’s open invoices or debit notes.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which the payment has been created.
Doc. type

The type of document to which the payment is applied. The selection depends on the type of the payment document selected in the top part of the window:

  • A payment may be applied against the documents of the following types: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, and Overdue charge.
  • A credit note, prepayment, and balance write-off may be applied against the documents of the following types: Invoice, Debit note, and Overdue charge.
  • A customer refund may be applied against the documents of the following types: Credit note, Payment, and Prepayment.
Note

The Overdue charge option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ref. no

The reference number of the invoice or note to which the payment is applied.

If you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window opens, on which you can view the details of the selected document.
Customer The identifier of the customer.
Amount paid The amount to be paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The cash discount to be taken.
Balance write-off The amount to be written off.
Write-off reason code

A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances.

You must select a reason code if the balance write-off amount is non-zero.
Date The creation date of the customer ledger document.
Due date The due date of the customer ledger document.
Cash discount date The date through which the customer can take a cash discount.
Balance The balance of the document after the cash discount is taken and the amount is paid.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of the cash discount, in case of partial payment.
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the customer ledger document.
Post period The period to which the payment transactions are to be posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number.
Cross rate A cross rate that you can optionally specify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.
### The Load options dialog box You use this dialog box, which opens when you click **Load documents** in the table toolbar, to add to the list of the customer's open documents the documents that meet the criteria you specify.
Element Description
From date The earliest date for the documents to be displayed.
To date The latest date for the documents to be displayed.
From ref. no. The document reference number to start with.
End ref. no. The document reference number to end with.
Max. number of documents

The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database.

The default value is 999. That is, the system selects 999 records from the database that comply specified criteria, applies additional filters, if needed, and displays the resulted list of records.
Include child documents

A field where you can select an option to indicate to the system the types of documents that belong to the child customer accounts of the selected parent account that should be loaded along with the documents of the currently selected customer account. The following options are available:

None
Indicates that the system should load none of the documents of the child customer accounts.
Except credit notes
Indicates that the system should load all documents of the child accounts that meet the other specified criteria, except for the documents with the Credit note type.
All
Indicates that the system should load all documents of the child accounts that meet the specified criteria.

The field is available if both of the following conditions are met:
Order by

An option you can select to order the listed documents, which can be one of the following:

Due date, ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order first by due date and then by reference number. This option is selected by default.
Doc. date, ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order first by document date and then by reference number.
Ref. no.
The system loads the list of the documents sorted in ascending order by reference number.
Load (button) Loads the documents matching the specified criteria to the table and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Application history tab This tab is used to store the history of the payment applications. As a result of each application, a batch of journal transactions is generated. All application batches are displayed on this tab.
Button Description
Reverse application

Cancels the payment application.

The button is not available for a document of the Balance write-off type.

To reverse an application for this document type, void the document (Balance write-off) and release the voiding.

The system sets the Voided status to the document ( Balance write-off ) and opens the invoice it has been applied to.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Batch number The ID of the batch that contains appropriate transactions. If you click this number, the Journal transactions (GL301000) window opens, where you can view the details of the batch.
Type The type of document to which the payment was applied.
Ref. no The reference number of the customer ledger document to which the payment was applied. If you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window opens, where you can view the details of the customer ledger document.
Customer The customer who issued the payment.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The cash discount taken during the application.
Balance write-off The amount that has been written off.
Financial period The financial period of the payment application.
Date The date of the document (invoice or debit memo).
Due date The due date of the customer ledger document.
Cash discount date The last date when the cash discount for the customer was available.
Balance The remaining amount after the cash discount was taken and certain amount was paid.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of a cash discount, in case of partial payment.
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the payment document.
Post period The period to which payment transactions were posted.
Customer order A reference to the customer document, such as a purchase order number.
VAT adjustment A check box automatically selected by the system if the customer ledger document specified in this row is subject to VAT adjustment.
VAT Credit note

The reference number of the VAT credit note generated in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window for the customer ledger document specified in this row.

This reference number is specified by the system automatically once the VAT credit note is generated.
VAT doc. no. The number of the VAT document.
## The Orders to apply tab This tab includes the list of the customer's open orders for which the incoming payment is to be reserved. Click **Load orders** in the table toolbar to specify a date range (and, if needed, a range of reference numbers) to add the customer's specific orders to the list.
Button Description
Load orders Opens the Load options dialog box so that you can add the customer’s orders to the list.
Column Description
Order type The order type for which the payment is to be reserved. A customer ledger payment may be reserved for the order types that generate customer ledger documents of the Invoice or Debit note type.
Order no.

The reference number of the order for which the payment is reserved.

By clicking this number, the Sales orders (SO301000) window opens, in which you can view the order details
Status

The status of the document, which is assigned automatically and can be one of the following options:

On hold, Credit hold, Open, Back order, Shipping, Cancelled, Invoiced, or Completed.

For details on statuses, see: About sales order processing options.
Applied to order The total amount reserved for the order.
Transferred to invoice The amount that has been applied to invoice.
Date The creation date of the order.
Due date The due date of the order.
Cash discount date The date through which the customer can take a cash discount.
Balance The balance of the order after the cash discount is taken and the amount is paid.
Description A description of the order.
Order total The total amount of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Invoice no. The reference number of the invoice generated for the order.
Invoice date The date of the invoice.
### The Load options dialog box You use this dialog box, which opens when you click **Load orders** in the table toolbar, to select the order to reserve the payment for.
Element Description
Branch The branch in the company to which the order belongs.
To date The latest date for the documents to be displayed.
From date The earliest date for the documents to be displayed.
End order no. The order number to end with.
Start order no. The order number to start with.
Max. number of documents

The maximum number of documents to be selected from the database.

The default value is 999. That is, the system selects 999 records from the database that comply specified criteria and applies additional filters, if needed.
Order by

An option you can select to order the documents on the list, which can be one of the following:

  • Order date, order no.
  • Order no.
Load (button) Displays the documents matching the specified criteria and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer ledger account and subaccount used in the payment document, as well as the date and period of the document. For a released payment, it contains the reference to the batch that implements appropriate transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The batch that contains appropriate transactions. You can click the batch number to view the batch.
Branch The branch that had applied this payment.
Customer ledger account The asset account specified as the default customer ledger account for the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding default subaccount for the customer.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.

This field appears only if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
### The Payment information section
Element Description
Payment date The date of the payment release.
Payment period The period associated with the payment date.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment has been cleared with the bank.
Clear date The date when the payment has been cleared with the bank.
Batch deposit

A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment should be deposited.

You can change this option if the status of the cash account has been changed. Payments can be deposited only from a clearing cash account.
Deposited A check box that indicates (if selected) that payment was deposited.
Batch deposit date The date of the deposit.
Batch deposit no. The number of the deposit that includes the payment.
Payment message A free-form message connected with the payment, max. 140 characters.
## The Finance charges tab This tab contains a list of charges and fees applied to the payment by the bank for processing. For example, if you receive a customer payment where the bank has withdrawn a fee, you can register this bank fee together with the payment. > [!NOTE] > Finance charges cannot be specified for customer refunds, credit notes, and prepayments.
Column Description
Entry type

The charge, selected by its entry type ID.

You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.

Note

A finance charge will be posted as a cash transaction and will not affect the customer ledger.
Description A detailed description of the entry type.
Offset account The account that is used for this charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this charge.
Amount The amount of the charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer price classes (AR208000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000 page In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete customer price classes, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer price classes (AR208000) In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete customer price classes, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can add, edit, view, and delete **customer price classes**, which are classes that group customers by the price level offered to them. If no other price classes are defined in the system, all customers are assigned to the **BASE** price class. For each customer price class, you can create price lists in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. ## The table This table displays all the customer price classes defined in the system. You can add, edit, and delete classes.
Column Description
Price class ID The unique identifier for the price class. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters may be used.
Description

A detailed description of the class. An alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters may be used.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Sort order An integer indicating the order in which this class will be displayed on reports. The price class with the lowest value will be displayed as the leftmost column in all price classes.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer statement history (AR404600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-statement-history-ar404600 page You can use this window to view the statement history for a particular customer and drill down to the details of each statement. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer statement history (AR404600) You can use this window to view the statement history for a particular customer and drill down to the details of each statement. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Print statement Navigates to the Customer statement report generated for the selected customer.
## The top part In this area, select a customer to view the statement history for this customer.
Element Description
Customer The customer by its ID.
## The table This table contains the list of statements printed for the customer selected above. You can print a statement, if needed.
Column Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle by ID.
Statement date The date of the statement.
Statement balance The customer balance (in the base currency) as shown on the statement.
Overdue balance The overdue balance (in the base currency) as shown on the statement.
Currency The currency used by the customer.
FC statement balance The customer balance in the specified currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue amount in the specified currency.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be printed.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be sent by email.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was sent by email.
On-demand statement When this check box is selected, you can generate statements on demand.
Prepared on The date when the statement was prepared.

Related pages

Windows

 Customer summary (AR401000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-summary-ar401000 page You can use this window to view outstanding customer balances by the criteria you select, such as the customer class, the financial period, and the account-subaccount pair used for the customers of the class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer summary (AR401000) You can use this window to view outstanding customer balances by the criteria you select, such as the customer class, the financial period, and the account-subaccount pair used for the customers of the class. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard buttons and a window-specific button. The window-specific button is listed below.
Button Description
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Balance by customer
Navigates to the Balance by customer (AR632500) report
Customer history
Navigates to the Customer history (AR652000) report
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AR631000) report
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AR631500)
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select the criteria of customers to be listed in the table.
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to display data. By default, it is the company you have access to.
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. By default, it is the branch you have access to.
Period The financial period for inquiry. If you leave the field blank, information related to all open periods will be displayed.
Customer class The customer class selected for inquiry. You can leave the field blank to list customers of all classes.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account used for customers to be listed.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Currency ID The currency for which you want to display data. You can leave the field blank to view the balances in the all currencies used by the customers if you select the Split by currency check box or in the base currency if you clear the Split by currency check box.
Split by currency A check box that you select to view the customer balances by currency. This check box is visible only if the Currency field is blank.
Only customers with balance A check box that you select to display information on only customers that carry non-zero balances. Clear the check box to display all customers.
By financial period A check box that you select to display balances calculated by financial period rather than by document date. Clear the check box to view the balances calculated by document date.
Consolidate by parent

A check box that you select to indicate to the system to display the consolidated balance for parent accounts that have child accounts for which the Consolidated balance check box is selected on the Invoicing info tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

The child accounts are excluded from the list if the check box is selected. The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Total balance A read-only field that shows the total balance for the customers of the selected class or all classes calculated using the specified criteria.
Total prepayments The total amount of customer prepayments calculated for the selected criteria.
Total unrealised gain/loss The total amount of unrealised gains and losses calculated for transactions matching the selected criteria.
## The table The table contains the list of customers matching the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Customer no. The unique ID of the customer, which is also a link. Click the link to navigate to the Customer details (AR402000) window with the details of this customer.
Customer name The customer name as it appears in the documents.
Last activity period The last period when any transactions related to the customer were released.
Currency ID The currency used by the customer.
Beginning balance (currency) The beginning balance on documents in the specified currency.
Ending balance (currency) The ending balance on documents in the specified currency.
Prepayment balance (currency) The balance of prepayments made in the specified currency.
Sales PTD (currency) Period-to-date sales made in the specified currency.
Payments PTD (currency) Period-to-date payments made in the specified currency.
Cash Discount Taken PTD (currency) The cash discount total on cash discounts takes in the specified currency.
Overdue charges PTD (currency) Period-to-date overdue charges in the specified currency.
Credit notes currency PTD The total on credit notes made in the specified currency.
Debit notes currency PTD The total on debit notes made in the specified currency.
Prepayments PTD (currency) The total on prepayments made in the specified currency.
Beginning balance

The customer’s outstanding balance in the base currency at the start of the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column shows the balance at the start of the last activity period.
Ending balance

The customer’s outstanding balance in the base currency at the end of the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column shows the balance at the end of the last activity period.
Prepayment balance The unapplied amount of the customer prepayments.
Sales PTD

The total amount (in the base currency) of the period-to-date (PTD) sales for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total sales amount during the last activity period.
Payments PTD

The total amount of the period-to-date payments (in the base currency) received from the customer for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total payment amount during the last activity period.
Cash discount taken PTD

The total period-to-date amount of cash discounts received by the customer for the specified period.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total on all the cash discounts taken by the customer during the last activity period.
Realised gain/loss PTD

The total PTD amount of realised gains and losses received as the result of operations with the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total realised gain or loss (RGOL) amount for the customer during the last activity period.
Credit notes PTD

The total PTD amount of credit notes received from the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total credit note amount for the customer during the last activity period.
Debit notes PTD

The total PTD amount of debit notes received from the customer.

If no period is specified, the column displays the total of the debit notes for the customer during the last activity period.
Unrealised gain/loss The amount of unrealised gain or loss calculated for open documents.
Prepayments PTD The amount of prepayments received during this period until the current date.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-vat-zone-deviation-ar40102s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer VAT zone deviation (AR40102S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View batch If you select a line in the table, you can click View batch to see the journal transactions for this line. You can also click the link in the Batch no. column to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.
View document If you select a line in the table, you can click View document to see the supplier document for this line. You can also click the link in the Reference no. column to open the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the customer account.
## The top part
Element Description
From period The period from when you want to list customers with VAT zone deviations.
To period The period to when you want to list customers with VAT zone deviations.
Document type

Use this field if you want to filter the list on specific document types:

  • Invoice - lists only sales invoices with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Debit note - lists only debit notes with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Credit note - lists only credit notes with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Overdue charge - lists only overdue charges with a VAT zone deviation.
  • Credit write-off - lists only credit write-offs with a VAT zone deviation.
Ref. no. Use this field if you want to see customer VAT deviation for a specific reference number.
## The table
Column Description
Batch no. The batch number that the customer document belongs to.
Invoice no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Type The type of customer ledger document: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, Payment, Overdue charge, or Prepayment.
Customer The customer’s ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Customer ledger account The customer ledger account of the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The customer ledger subaccount of the customer.
Invoice text A detailed description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Total amount The total document amount.
Document VAT zone The VAT zone selected for the document.
Customer VAT zone The VAT zone selected for the customer.
VAT total The total VAT amount on the document.
Date The date of the customer document.
Post period The post period of the customer document.
Customers (AR303000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000 page With this window, you can create customer accounts and view the details of existing accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customers (AR303000) With this window, you can create customer accounts and view the details of existing accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can enter the needed number of locations and contacts for any customer. When you create a new customer account, first assign the customer to a customer class. This saves you time on data entry because the system inserts the default values of the class into the appropriate window elements; you can override any of these default settings. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/create-a-customer/) + [Make customer-specific changes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/make-customer-specific-changes/) + [Set direct debit preferences for a customer](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-direct-debit-preferences-for-a-customer/) + [Connect contact to customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/connect-contact-to-customer/) + [Delete customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/delete-customer/) + [Enable write-offs for customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/enable-write-offs-for-customer/) + [Add general information for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-general-information-for-a-customer/) + [Add a payment method and a bank account to a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-a-payment-method-and-a-bank-account-to-a-customer/) + [Add invoicing settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-invoicing-settings-for-a-customer/) + [Add delivery settings for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/add-delivery-settings-for-a-customer/) + [Set up e-mail invoices for one customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-e-mail-invoices-for-one-customer/) + [Configure mailing settings for dunning letters for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/configure-mailing-settings-for-dunning-letters-for-a-customer/) + [Set customer print and email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-customer-print-and-email-preferences/) + [Prepare to use electronic invoices for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-electronic-invoices-for-customers/) + [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for a new customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-a-new-customer/) + [Prepare to use AutoInvoice for an existing customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/prepare-to-use-autoinvoice-for-an-existing-customer/) + [Set up invoice mailing for a customer](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/set-up-invoice-mailing-for-a-customer/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View on map A button you can click to view the customer’s location on a map.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

View supplier
Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window so that you can view this customer’s supplier account if this customer has a supplier account too.
New invoice
Navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000) window so that you can create a new invoice.
View business account
This window is currently not in use.
New payment
Navigates to the Customer payments (AR302000) window, which you can use to define a new payment for the customer.
Write-off balance
Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window.
New sales order
Navigates to the Sales orders (SO301000) window so that you can create a new sales order for this customer.
Add location
Opens the Customer locations (CR303010) window, so that you can add a new location for the customer or edit the existing locations.
Add contact
Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window, so that you can add a new contact person for the customer or edit the existing contacts.
Add payment method
Opens the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can add a new payment method for the customer or edit existing payment methods.
Extend to supplier
Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window, so that you can define this customer as a supplier and add supplier-specific information.
View restriction groups
Navigates to the Restriction groups by customer (AR102010) window, which you can use to view the restriction groups this customer is a member of.
Generate statement on demand
This action is currently not in use.
Regenerate last statement
Initiates the regeneration and preparation of the customer’s most recent statement.
Change ID
Gives you the ability to change the ID of the currently selected customer.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry windows:

  • Sales prices: Navigates to the Sales prices (AR202000) window, where you can view or edit sales prices for the selected customer.
  • Customer details: Navigates to the Customer details (AR402000) window, where you can view detailed information on the customer balance.
  • Customer statement history: Navigates to the Customer statement history (AR404600) window, where you can view the statement history for the selected customer and drill down to the details of each statement.
  • Sales by item and customer: Navigates to the Sales by item and customer (AR40103S) window, where you can view detailed information about sales by item and customer.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:
## The top part By using the elements in the top part, you can create a new customer account or select an existing account for editing.
Element Description
Customer no.

The number of the customer account, which is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key or by the CUSTOMER segmented key (which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key). When you are creating a new customer, you must specify an ID.

Note

You can later change the customer number by selecting Change ID from the Actions menu in the toolbar.
Customer name The name of the customer to appear in the system, which may be a trade name or a doing-business-as (DBA) name.
Status

The status of the customer account. You can select one of the following options:

Active
The account is in use, and the customer appears on all selection lists.
On hold
This account is not completed; editing or additional information is needed.
Credit hold
Because some payments haven’t been received, invoices may not be entered for the customer account.
Inactive
The account is not available for selection.
One time
The account is marked as a one-time customer.
Balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Prepayment balance The total amount of unapplied prepayments calculated for the customer. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Consolidated balance

The total balance of the parent customer account, including balances of its child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected in the Invoicing settings tab of this window. The amount includes the balances of all open documents and prepayments.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and is only visible in the top part of the parent customer account.
Retained balance This field is not in use for the customer ledger.
## The General information tab You can use this tab to enter the main contact information of the customer's company, as well as the payment terms and the credit verification rule applied to the customer. If you are defining a new customer, you should first specify its customer class on this tab; once you do, various elements in the window will be filled with the class settings. ### The Main address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line of the customer’s address.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Address 3 The third line of the address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode. You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The customer’s county or province.
View on map A button you can click to view the customer’s location on a map.
### The Main contact section
Element Description
Company name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Web The customer’s website address.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer.
Fax The fax number of the customer.
Account ref. Your company’s account number in the customer’s system.
### The Financial settings section
Element Description
Customer class The class to which the customer is assigned. Once you select the customer class (which is required), the system fills in various elements in this window automatically with the values specified for the specified class; you can, however, change these values.
Terms The type of payment terms used in operations with the customer. You define payment terms in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Statement cycle ID The default statement cycle to be used for the customer.
Document language

The language in which the documents of the customer will be created.

This field is also used when using the multi-language functionality. For more information, see: About multi-language support.
Apply payments automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that payments should be applied automatically to the customer’s documents.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that you may apply overdue charges to this customer.

Note

The overdue charges will be applied to the documents created after you have selected this check box. That is, the system will calculate the overdue charges for the newly created invoices only. The overdue charges will not be calculated for the invoices created earlier than you have selected this check box.

To set up the system to calculate the overdue charges for a document created earlier than you have selected this check box, you can select the Apply overdue charge check box for the document on the Financial details tab of the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Enable write-offs A check box that indicates (if selected) that balance and credit write-offs are allowed.
Exclude EC sales list Select this check box if you want this customer to be excluded from the EC sales list (AR40501S).
Write-off limit The maximum value that may be written off during each application line. Balances and credits that are less than this value may be written off.
Currency ID The currency used in operations with the customer, which you can select from the list of currencies defined in the system.
Enable currency override A check box that indicates (if selected) that users may override the currency specified as the default for the customer.
Currency rate type The currency rate type used for the customer.
Enable rate override A check box that indicates (if selected) that users may override the currency rate specified as the default for the customer.
Auto load documents

Select how documents for this customer will be automatically loaded in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window for matching.

The following options are available:

Use Cash management settings
To use the setting for automatic loading of documents that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, the Bank statement settings tab. This is the default.
First exact doc. amount, then all documents
All documents will be automatically loaded after the ones with exact matching document amounts have been loaded.
Document with exact amount
The system searches the documents that have the exact matching amount with the transactions and loads only them.
Disabled
Automatic loading is not in use.
Exclude debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the customer invoices connected to this customer class to be sent to debt collection. You can reverse this setting on the Customers (AR303000) window, tab General information, by de-selecting the check box Exclude debt collection.
### The Customer properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification

When this check box is selected and saved for a customer, you will be notified regarding changes. The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the specific customer.

More information about webhooks, see: About Webhooks.
### The Credit verification rules section
Element Description
Credit verification

The credit rule applied to this customer. The following options are available:

Days past due
Specifies that payment should not exceed the due date of the invoice beyond the credit period (which is a certain number of days past due). This credit period is specified as the Credit days past due.
Credit limit
Doesn’t allow this customer to exceed its credit limit, which is specified in the Credit limit field.
Limit and days past due
Applies both rules to the customer debt: It should not exceed the credit limit, and the payment date should not exceed the due date of an invoice by more days than the credit period.
Disabled
Uses no credit verification in relations with this customer.
Credit limit

The amount, if applicable, that serves as a credit limit for the customer.

If the selected customer account is involved in the parent-child relationship, the field displays the credit limit of the group (parent account and its child accounts).
Credit days past due The maximum number of days by which the customer payment may exceed the invoice date. This value is used if the Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field.
Unreleased balance

The balance of unreleased documents.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of unreleased documents of the parent account and of its child accounts. For the child accounts the field displays individual balance.
Balance of open orders

The total balance of customer’s open orders, which is the sum of uninvoiced amounts of all orders to the customer except the orders that are assigned the On hold status.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of open orders of the parent account and of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays individual balance.
Remaining credit limit

The credit limit that is not used regarding the current balance.

If the selected customer account is in a parent-child relationship, the field displays the remaining credit limit that applies to new sales orders and invoices of the parent account and its child accounts.
First due date

The due date of the earliest open invoice, if either Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field, otherwise the value is not displayed.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice among all the open invoices associated with a parent account of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice associated with this account.
## The Invoicing settings tab This tab is used to store the customer's default payment information and the invoicing address. ### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing address is the same as the main address. If you select this check box, the elements below are populated with the main contact information. If the check box is cleared, you can enter different information.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
View on map A button you can click to view the location on a map.
### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing contact information is the same as the main information, and the elements below will be populated by the main address information specified on the General settings tab.
Company name The name of the customer’s department as it should appear on the invoicing documents, if it is different from the customer name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s phone number.
Phone 2 An additional phone number for the contact person, in case there are invoicing questions.
Fax The fax number of the contact person.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Web The customer’s invoicing-related web page.
### The Parent info section This section is available if the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Parent account

The parent account of the currently selected customer account.

The availability of this field and the list of accounts that can be selected here depend on whether the Consolidate balance and Consolidate statements check boxes are selected for the selected customer account. If both check boxes are cleared, the field is always available and a business account of any type can be specified as the parent account.

If at least one of the check boxes is selected, a business account of the Customer or Customer and supplier type should be specified as the parent account of the selected customer account. This field is disabled if the displayed customer account has child accounts (because an account cannot be both a child and a parent).

For details, see: About setting up parent-child relationships.
Consolidate balance

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that the balances of child accounts are included in the parent balance; in this case, the consolidated balance is shown in the Consolidated balance field in the top part of the corresponding parent account.

You can apply the payments and credit notes of the parent account to the documents of this child account. In addition, you can select the Share credit policy check box to apply the credit policy configured for the parent account to the new sales orders and invoices of its child accounts.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About balance consolidation.
Consolidate statements

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that documents of the child accounts are included in the statements generated for the parent account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.
Shared credit policy

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that the credit policy (a combination of the credit verification rules and credit limit) defined for its parent account will be applied to the new sales orders and invoices of the child account. The check box becomes available for selection, if the Consolidate balance check box has been selected for this account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.
### The Print and email settings section
Element Description
Print invoices A check box that, if selected, indicates that invoices can be printed in the Send invoices (AR508000) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Send invoices by email A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices by email by using the Send invoices (AR508000) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Send dunning letters by email

A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send dunning letters by email by using the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class. This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Print dunning letters

A check box that, if selected, indicates that dunning letters can be printed in the Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class. This field is available only if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Send statements by email

A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements can be sent by email to the customer in the Print statements (AR503500) window.

The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Multi-currency statements

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this customer’s statements must be printed in multi-currency format.

If the check box is cleared, the system will print statements for the customer in the base-currency format. The check box is displayed if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in your system.
Print statements A check box that, if selected, indicates that statements can be printed in the Print statements (AR503500) window. The default value of the setting is provided by the customer class.
Statement type

The statement type used by default in relations with the customer, which can be one of the following:

Open item
The statement includes all open items for the customer.
Balance brought forward
The amount outstanding from the previous statement is shown at the beginning of the statement.
### The Send AutoInvoice Route section
Element Description
Send invoices to AutoInvoice Select this check box if you are using AutoInvoice and want to send invoices directly to this service.
Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) A check box that, if selected, indicates that you can send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-invoices. This applies to Norway only.
Print

When this check box is selected, a new element is added into the outgoing invoice called MediaType that will be populated with the Print value. The customer language is also retrieved from the Document language field in the General information tab. This is used in Sweden when the printing service is activated.

This check box is only visible when you have not enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice check box.
Exclude invoice PDF

When selected, this enables the possibility to not generate and imbed invoice PDF while sending electronic invoices via the PEPPOL BIS invoice format.

This setting is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box.
Use the first AutoInvoice attachment to view invoice

When selected, the system opens the first document attached to AutoInvoice. This way, you save time by not having to check the attachments manually.

This check box is only visible when you have enabled PEPPOL invoice in the in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000).

You can only select this check box if you select the Send invoices to AutoInvoice or Send invoices to AutoInvoice as banking e-Invoice (Norway) check box and the Exclude invoice PDF check box.
### The Default payment method section
Element Description
Default payment method The default payment method used for the customer.
Cash account The cash account to be used for the default payment method.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s default payment method.
Account used for payment The type of the account used for payments, such as Domestic payment.
### The Payment method details table This section holds the details of the payment method used by the customer if such details have been configured in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window.
Element Description
Description The name of a user-defined column configured to contain a detail of the payment method.
Value The value of this payment method detail.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains information required for delivering goods and services to the customer. ### The Shipping address section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the delivery address is the same as the customer’s main address. If you select this check box, the elements below are populated with the main contact information specified on the General settings tab.

If the check box is not selected, you can change the delivery address.
Address 1 The first line of the delivery address.
Address 2 The second line of the delivery address.
Address 3 The third line of the delivery address.
Postcode The customer’s postal code. If an input mask is set for the country postal codes, provide a valid code that matches the input mask.
City The customer’s delivery location city.
Country The customer’s country. By default, it is the country of your company.
County The customer’s county or province.
View on map A button you can click to view the customer location on the map.
### The Shipping contact section This tab contains information required for delivering goods and services to the customer.
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the customer’s main information is used as its shipping info, and the elements below display the main company information.
Company name The business name of the customer’s shipping location, if it’s different from the customer name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person.
Email The email address of the customer’s department to be used in case of delivery problems.
Web The customer’s website address.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer’s receiving department.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the customer’s receiving department.
Fax The fax number of the customer’s receiving department.
### The Default location settings section
Element Description
Location name A description of the customer location.
VAT zone

The VAT zone of the customer’s default location.

If a customer has been converted from a prospect account or extended from a supplier account, the customer’s VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone (if any) specified for the original account. You can override the default value.
Corporate ID The customer’s company ID, associated with the location.
VAT registration ID The customer’s taxpayer ID associated with the location.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice
Invoice to default location

A check box that you select to indicate that sales invoices and sales order for this customer automatically have the default invoice address and invoice contact.

The invoice address and invoice contact can be overridden manually for each sales invoice in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, the Invoice address tab, and each sales order in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, the Financial settings tab.
Shipping branch The branch of your company that will be used to ship the goods to the customer.
Price class ID The price class assigned to the customer. A price class, defined in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window, indicates the price level offered to the customer and can be used as a condition to be met for a discount application.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to issue the goods to the customer.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ship via The carrier used to ship the goods.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used for the customer.
Shipping zone ID The identification of the shipping zone of the customer to be used to calculate freight.
FOB point The location at which the title for the shipment passes from your company to the customer.
Residential delivery A check box that you select to indicate that delivery will not be performed to a business.
Saturday delivery A check box that you select to indicate that this customer allows delivery on Saturdays.
Insurance A check box that informs a user (if selected) that insurance is required for the order.
Shipping rule

The way the orders should be fulfilled for this customer. You can use one of the following options:

Shipping complete
Only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
Back orders are allowed for the customer if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
Orders should be shipped even if the quantities shipped are less than the quantities specified on the order. If all the requested items are out of stock, the order should be cancelled.
Order priority The priority of sales orders of this customer. (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can be used for informational purposes only.)
Lead time (days) The number of days preceding the due date for the shipping title to reach the customer.
### Intrastat
Element Description
Mode of transportation

Intrastat is the system for collecting information and producing statistics on the trade in goods between countries of the European Union (EU).

The mode of transportation denotes how the goods is transported. Available values are:

0 - Unknown

1 - Transport by sea

2 - Transport by rail

3 - Transport by road

4 - Transport by aeroplane

5 - Consignments by post

7 - Fixed transport installations

8 - Transport by inland waterway
## The Locations tab This tab contains a table showing the customer's locations. You can select any location as the default one. This tab is available only if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The **MAIN** location is always automatically created for the customer when you enter the customer's main address.
Button Description
Add location Opens the Customer locations (CR303010) window, so you can enter a new customer location.
Set as default Selects the Is default check box for the selected location. Only one location can be selected as the default one.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the location is active. If the check box is cleared, the location will not be available for selection when users create customer documents.
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the location has been set as the default customer location. You cannot directly select or clear this check box; to make a location the default location, you select the location and click Set as default in the toolbar.
Location ID The unique ID of the location.
Location name A descriptive name of the customer’s location.
City The city of the customer’s location.
Country The country of the customer’s location.
County The county or province of the customer’s location.
VAT zone A VAT zone associated with the county.
Price class ID The price class to be used by default for this customer location.
Sales account The account selected in the Sales account field in the Customer locations (CR303010) window.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice.
## The Payment methods tab This tab contains the list of payment methods that can be accepted from the customer. You can select any method as the default one.
Button Description
Add payment method Navigates to the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can define a new payment method for the customer.
View payment method Navigates to the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window, so that you can view the details of the customer payment method. Customer payment methods have the Override check box selected.
Column Description
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is the default one for the customer. You select this check box to mark the payment method as the default one for this customer.
Payment method The payment method ID.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is used in the system.
Override A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment method is specific to the customer (that is, it was created by using the Customer payment methods (AR303010) window).
## The Contacts tab This tab displays a table showing the customer's contact persons and their information. To add a new contact, click **Add contact**. To view or change the details of a particular contact, click the link in the **Name** field, which opens the [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) window for the contact.
Button Description
Add contact Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can enter a new contact.
Set as default Selects the Is default check box for the selected contact person. Only one contact can be selected as the default one.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact is active.
Is default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact person is the default one for the customer.
Position The position the contact person has in his or her company.
Name The contact person’s name. You can click the link in this column to open the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window.
City The contact person’s city.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Phone 1 The contact person’s phone number.
## The Salespersons tab The **Salespersons** tab contains the list of salespersons associated with the customer's locations.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The ID of the salesperson who is assigned to the customer.
Name The salesperson’s name.
Location ID The customer location associated with the salesperson.
Location name A descriptive name of the customer location.
Commission % The commission percent used for the salesperson. The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default A check box that indicates (if selected) that this salesperson is the default salesperson for this customer.
## The Child accounts tab This tab contains the list of child customers that belong to a selected parent together with their balance information. This is only visible when selecting a parent customer in the customer field and if the **Parent-child customer relationship** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window
Column Description
Customer no

The number of the customer account, which is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key or by the CUSTOMER segmented key (which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key). When you are creating a new customer, you must specify an ID.

Note

You can later change the customer number by selecting Change ID from the Actions menu in the toolbar.
Customer name . The name of the customer to appear in the system, which may be a trade name or a doing-business-as (DBA) name.
Balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Prepayment balance The total amount of unapplied prepayments calculated for the customer. This read-only field appears only if you select an existing customer.
Unreleased balance

The balance of unreleased documents.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of unreleased documents of the parent account and of its child accounts. For the child accounts the field displays individual balance.
Balance of open orders

The total balance of customer’s open orders, which is the sum of uninvoiced amounts of all orders to the customer except the orders that are assigned the On hold status.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the total balance of open orders of the parent account and of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays individual balance.
First due date

The due date of the earliest open invoice, if either Days past due or Limit and days past due option is selected in the Credit verification field, otherwise the value is not displayed.

If the selected customer account is a parent account, the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice among all the open invoices associated with a parent account of its child accounts. For a child account the field displays the due date of the earliest open invoice associated with this account.
Consolidate balance

The total balance of the parent customer account, including balances of its child accounts for which the Consolidate balance check box is selected in the Invoicing settings tab of this window. The amount includes the balances of all open documents and prepayments.

The field is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and is only visible in the top part of the parent customer account.
Consolidate statement

A check box that indicates, if selected for a child account, that documents of the child accounts are included in the statements generated for the parent account.

The check box value set for a parent account provides the default value of the check box for its child accounts. If you change the value for a parent account, the system will prompt you to change the value for all child accounts.

For details, see: About credit policy application.
Share credit policy A check box that indicated, if selected that the credit policy configured for the parent account applies to the new sales orders and invoices of its child accounts.
Statement cycle The default statement cycle to be used for the customer.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of customer attributes defined in the associated customer class. Attributes defined in the business account class or supplier class to which the related business account or supplier (if any) belongs may also be listed on this tab. You specify the value of the attributes from the list, if required.
Column Description
Attribute The description of the attribute.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that specifying the attribute value is required.
Value The value of the attribute.
## The Activities tab This tab has a table with the list of activities associated with the customer. You use this tab to associate particular tasks, events, and other activities with the customer.
Button Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window so you can create a new task.
Add event Opens the Event (CR306030) window so you can create a new event.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window so you can send an email to the customer.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the list of available activity types. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Work group The work group the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The username of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Related entity description The entity that this activity is associated with.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Project

The project with which the activity is associated, or the code indicating that this activity is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Project task

The task in the project with which the activity is associated.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Released A check box that indicates whether or not the activity is released.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab shows the default general ledger accounts for this customer. For a new customer, the accounts and subaccounts initially displayed on this tab are, by default, those specified for the customer class you have selected on the **General information** tab; however, you can select other accounts and subaccounts.
Element Description
Customer ledger account The asset account that stores the balance of the transactions related to the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The subaccount used for the customer.
Sales account The income account used to record sales made to the customer. By default, it is the account specified for the customer class. You must specify this account.
Sales non-taxable account The account for non-taxable sales.
Sales - EU account The account for sales within the European Union.
Sales - export account The account for export sales.
Sales sub. The subaccount used to record the sales made to the customer. You must specify the subaccount.
Discount account

The expense account used to record discount amounts received by the customer. You must specify the account if you plan to use configurable discounts.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For details, see: Manage discounts.
Discount sub.

The subaccount (if any) used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by the customer. You must specify this subaccount if you plan to use configurable discounts.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Freight account The income account used to record the freight charges for delivering goods to the customer.
Freight sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record freight charges applied for delivering the goods to the customer.
Cash discount account The expense account used to record cash discount amounts received by the customer due to its payment terms. You must specify the account.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount used with the expense account to record the discount amounts received by the customer due to its payment terms. You must specify this subaccount.
Prepayment account The asset account to accumulate prepayments to the customer.
Prepayment sub. The subaccount used with the prepayment account to record the prepayment amounts sent to the customer.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab displays the mailings that can be used for the customer. Mailings are used to set up the sending of electronic versions of specific documents to the customer contacts and company employees that are specified as recipients for the customers. For example, emails for the **INVOICE** mailing are sent when a user clicks **Email invoice** in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window toolbar for the selected invoice. By default, on this tab, mailings selected for the customer class are listed, but you can select other mailings from the lists defined in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) and [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) windows. For an overview of the functionality, see: [About mailings for customers](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/about-mailings-for-customers/). The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, which has the list of recipients. ### The Mailings table In this table, you can view and modify the list of mailings to be used for the customer. Initial settings from the customer class can be overridden for any customer.
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique ID of the mailing.
Branch The branch of the organisation on behalf of which this mailing will be set up.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails to the customer for this mailing. If no account is specified, the system account specified for the customer class will be used.
Report The Customer ledger report to be used to structure the information from the document, if a report is selected for the mailing rather than an email template (notification template).
Notification template The notification template to be used to generate personalised emails for the mailing. For each mailing, either a report or a notification template can be specified.
Format The format in which the report-based document, if applicable, will be sent by default if the recipient has no other preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Only active mailings are used to generate emails.
Overridden A check box that indicates (if selected) that the default mailing for the customer class has been changed.
### The Recipients table By using the this table you can select recipients (one per line) for the mailing selected in the Mailings table.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails. Specify one of the following options:

Primary
The contact specified as the customer’s primary contact
Invoicing
The contact specified as the customer’s invoicing contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the customer’s shipping contact
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the customer’s documents or is otherwise associated with the customer
Contact
Any additional contact of the customer
Document contact
The contact specified on the document, e.g. the sales order or invoice.
Contact ID The particular recipient of the selected type.
Email The email address of this recipient.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to this recipient. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact is active. Only active recipients receive the emails for the mailing.
To A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact will be the main recipient for this mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that this contact will receive a blind carbon copy (bcc) of the email for this mailing.
## The Other invoice settings tab The Finvoice invoices are in use in Finland only.
Column Description
Finvoice contract ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice contract.
Finvoice intermediator ID The ID of the customer’s Finvoice intermediator.
## The Direct debit tab The Direct debit functionality is in use in the Netherlands only.
Column Description
Mandate ID The unique ID for the direct debit mandate.
Mandate description The description of the direct debit mandate.
Date of signature The date the customer signed the direct debit mandate.
Is default If you select this check box, you indicate which mandate is used as default value in a sales invoice if more than one mandate is linked to the customer.
One time If you select this check box, you indicate that this is a one-time mandate.
BIC (SWIFT) The BIC code of the customer’s bank account.
IBAN The IBAN of the customer’s bank account.
Last collection date The date of the last direct debit transaction for this mandate.
Max. amount The maximum amount that can be collected for this mandate in a single transaction.
Expiration date The date when the mandate expires.
Branch The ID of the branch being used.
## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for a customer, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific customer. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Discount codes (AR209000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000 page You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discount codes (AR209000) You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete the discount codes defined in your company. To complete the configuration of discounts, you specify discount sequences for each discount code in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The Discount codes table This table contains all the discount codes defined in the system and can be used to create new discounts.
Column Description
Discount code The unique code for the discount. You can use up to 10 characters, both letters and numbers.
Description A brief description of the discount. Use an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Discount type

The type of the discount, which can be one of the following options:

Line
The discount applies to a document line.
Document
The discount applies to the document amount.
Group
The discount applies to multiple lines in the same document.
Applicable to

The entity to which the discount may be applied. For a Line or Group discount, you can select one of the following options:

Customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer.
Item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific item.
Item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to items of specific price class.
Customer and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and specific item.
Customer and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and items of a specific price class.
Customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific customer price class.
Customer price class and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific price class and a specific item.
Customer price class and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific price class and to items of a specific price class.
Warehouse
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and item
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific item sold from a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and a specific warehouse. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and item price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse and items of a specific price class. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Warehouse and customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific warehouse and to a customer of a specific price class. (This option appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific branch.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally.

For a document discount, the following options are available:

Customer
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer.
Customer and branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a specific customer and a specific branch.
Customer price class
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of specific customer price class.
Customer price class and branch
The discount is applied if the document refers to a customer of a specific customer price class and a specific branch.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally; this option is mostly used for promotional discounts.
Applied to deferred revenue A check box that (if selected) indicates that a discount should be applied to a component price while computing a deferred revenue for the component. This option is applied to the Line discounts only. This check box is only available if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Manual A check box that (if selected) indicates that this discount is excluded from automatic searches for the best available discount. A user can, however, add manual discounts to a document line or to a document.
Exclude from discountable amount A check box that (if selected) indicates that the line amount is excluded from the amount that is the base for any applicable Group or Document discount. This option is available for only line-level discounts.
Skip document discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that after this discount has been applied, no other applicable discounts should be applied. This option is available to only Group discounts.
Auto-numbering A check box that you select to use auto-numbering for generating IDs for series based on this discount code. By default, the discount code will be used as a prefix for generating series IDs, but you can instead specify in the Last number column a series of characters to be used as a template for auto-numbering.
Last number The last ID used for the series if series IDs are auto-numbered. If you enter a series of characters here before any series is created, the character series will be used as a template for auto-numbering. The character series may contain up to 10 characters with digits at the end. The last letter used divides the character series into a prefix and the integer to be auto-incremented. If no value is specified, the discount code will be used as a prefix.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Discounts (AR209500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500 page You use this window to define the series for discount codes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discounts (AR209500) You use this window to define the series for discount codes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define the series for discount codes. A discount series specifies exactly how the discount is calculated, based on the amount or quantity of the line item, or on the amount of the document. A series for a discount includes a list of breakpoints, with each break point specifying the range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts that are qualified for the specific discount amount or percentage. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Update discounts Opens the Update discounts dialog box, which you can use to select pending discount series by their start date (pending date) for updating. As a result of updating, the current discount amounts (or per cents) become the last discount amounts (or per cents), and the pending discount amounts (or per cents) become the current discounts.
### The Update discounts dialog box You use this dialog box to select discount series by pending date and to update the discounts.
Element Description
Filter date The latest pending date to select discount series for updating.
OK (button) Updates the discounts that are selected based on the specified date.
Cancel (button) Cancels your selection and closes the dialog box.
## The top part In this part you can create a new discount series for the discount and specify its general options, or select an existing series and view its options.
Element Description
Discount code The code of the discount for which you want to create a new series or view an existing one.
Series

The ID of the series defined for the discount. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.

An ID will be generated by the system if auto-numbering is selected for the discount in the Discount codes (AR209000) window.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the series is active.

Active series for the same discount should not have overlapping time intervals, or if they do, the series should apply to different entities.
Promotional

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the series is a promotional discount.

For promotional discount series, you must specify the effective date and the expiration date ( End date ).
Description A brief description of the series. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used.
Discount by

The way the discount for the series is specified. The following options are available:

Percent
The discount is specified by a percentage.
Amount
The discount is specified by a fixed amount.
Free item
The discount is defined by a specific quantity of a certain free item added to an order. This option is used only with group-level discounts.
Break by

The way the breakpoints for this discount series are specified. Select one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified amounts.
Prorate discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount can be prorated.

With prorated discounts, the amount of the discount (or the number of free items) is calculated as if the order is split into multiple orders, so that the customer can get the largest possible discount. To determine the amount of the discount (or the number of free items) for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, by using the largest possible break point quantities.

It then calculates the discount amount (or the number of free items) according to the breakpoints used.
Effective date The date when the series becomes effective. This field appears for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Expiration date The date when the promotional discount expires. This field appears for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when the discount series was last updated. This field appears only for a non-promotional discount series; the system inserts a value if the series has been updated at least once.
## The Discount breakpoints tab You use the **Discount breakpoints** tab to create a breakdown series defined in accordance with the options selected in the top part, or to view the details of an existing series. The columns on this tab's table generally depend on the options selected in the **Discount by** and **Break by** fields. ### If Quantity is selected as the Break by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break quantity The quantity of items (break quantity) that starts the new range for a discount level for the currently effective series. Any break quantity should be specified in the base units.
Discount percent The discount percent to be currently used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Discount amount The discount amount to be used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending break quantity The quantity of items (break point) that starts the new range for the pending (not yet effective) series.
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used with the pending break point for the pending series if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending discount amount The amount to be used as the discount for the pending series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break quantity The quantity of item (break point) that started the range for the discount series used before the effective date.
Last discount percent The discount percent used for the break point for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last discount amount The amount used as the discount for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last date The date when the current series became effective.
### If Amount is selected as the Break by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break amount The line or document amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Discount percent The discount percent to be used for the amounts that exceed this break amount for the currently effective series.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (one that is not yet in effect).
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used for the break point in the pending series.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last discount percent The percentage used for the break point in the previously effective series.
### If Amount is selected as the Break by option and Free item as the Discount by option, the table has the following columns
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount to orders for this discount series.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (the one that is not yet in effect).
Pending free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount to orders for the pending discount series.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last free item qty. The quantity of the free item that was used as the discount for the previously effective series.
### Table columns (the Promotional check box is selected)
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new range for the promotional series.
Discount amount The amount of the discount for this range for the promotional series.
## The Free item tab The **Free item** tab of the window displays the free item that is added as the discount, as well as the free item pending to be added and the free item previously added. This tab appears only if **Free item** is selected in the **Discount by** field.
Element Description
Free item The free item (by its item ID) that is added to orders as the discount for this series.
Pending free item The free item (by its item ID) that will be added to orders as the discount for this series, starting on the date specified in the Pending date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last free item The free item (by its item ID) that had been added to orders as the discount for this series before the date shown in the Last date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when this discount series has been updated last.
## The Items tab The **Items** tab of the window has a table showing the items to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item** (**Item**, **Customer and item**, or **Customer price class and item**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Item ID The stock or non-stock item, by its item ID, to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the item.
## The Item price classes tab The **Item price classes** tab of the window has a table with the item price classes to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item price class** (**Item price class**, **Customer and item price class**, or **Customer price class and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Price class ID The item price class to which the series is applicable.
Description The description of the item price class.
## The Customers tab The **Customers** tab of the window has a table with the customers to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Customer** (**Customer**, **Customer and item**, or **Customer and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Customer The customer to which the series is applicable.
Description The business name of the customer.
## The Customer price classes tab The **Customer price classes** tab of the window has a table with the customer price classes to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Customer price class** (**Customer price class**, **Customer price class and item**, or **Customer price class and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Customer price class ID The customer price class to which the series is applicable.
Description The description of the customer price class.
## The Warehouses tab The **Warehouses** tab of the window has a table that lists the warehouses to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Warehouse** (**Warehouse**, **Warehouse and item**, **Warehouse and customer price class**, **Warehouse and customer**, or **Warehouse and item price class**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Warehouse ID The warehouse to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the warehouse.
## The Branches tab The **Branches** tab of the window has a table showing the branches to which the series can be applied. This tab appears only if the **Branch** option is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the branch.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000 page By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000) By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for the selected customer account. For more information on producing dunning letters, see: [About managing dunning letters](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part In the top part, select a customer and date range to view the history of dunning letters for this customer.
Element Description
Customer The customer account, by its ID.
Start date The start date in the date range for which you want to display the history of dunning letters.
End date The end date in the date range for which to display the history of dunning letters.
## The table This table contains the list of dunning letters that were generated for the customer during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000) window, where you can view the list of documents included in the letter.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. Only displayed if you are using multiple branches.
Customer The customer account associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Customer name The customer name.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter.
Status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
This status indicates that the dunning letter is released and can be printed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window, the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
This status indicates that the dunning letter is voided and that the customer documents listed in this letter are available for preparing a new letter with the Draft status.
Overdue balance The total overdue amount owed by the customer.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Number of documents The number of documents listed in the letter.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Dunning letter history by document (AR408500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500 page By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for documents of the selected customer account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter history by document (AR408500) By using this window, you can view the history of produced dunning letters for documents of the selected customer account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information on producing dunning letters, see [About managing dunning letters](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/). This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The top part In the top part you specify a customer, date range, and range of the dunning letter levels to view the history of the documents.
Element Description
Customer The customer account, by its identifier.
Start date The start date in the date range for which you want to display the history of the documents.
End date The end date in the date range for which you want to display the history of the documents.
Element Description
From The starting level in the range of dunning letter levels for which you want to display the history of documents.
To The ending level in the range of dunning letter levels for which you want to display the history of documents.
## The table This table contains the list of customer documents that were included in the dunning letters generated for the customer during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000), where you can view the list of documents included in the letter.
Column Description
Customer The customer account, by its identifier.
Type The type of the document.
Invoice no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Document balance The balance of the document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.
Dunning letter status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
The dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
The dunning letter is released and can be printed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter (on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window), the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
The dunning letter is voided and the customer documents listed in this letter are available for preparing a new letter with the Draft status.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Dunning letters (AR306000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letters-ar306000 page If you have selected the dunning process by document, by using this window, you can adjust the list of documents included in a letter with the Draft status—that is, you can remove a document from the current letter or exclude it from the dunning process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letters (AR306000) If you have selected the dunning process by document, by using this window, you can adjust the list of documents included in a letter with the Draft status—that is, you can remove a document from the current letter or exclude it from the dunning process. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. When you have finished making adjustments, you can release the draft and then print, email, or void the released letter. If you have selected the dunning process by customer, by using this window you can print, email, or void the released letter. For more information on producing dunning letters, see [Manage dunning letters - overview.](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-dunning-letters/manage-dunning-letters-overview/) This window is available only if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. This window is not displayed in the navigation pane. You access the window by selecting a record and clicking **View dunning letter** on one of the following windows: + [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) + [Dunning letter history by customer (AR408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-customer-ar408000/) + [Dunning letter history by document (AR408500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/dunning-letter-history-by-document-ar408500/) ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Release Releases the selected dunning letter.
Void Voids the selected dunning letter.
Print Prints the selected dunning letter.
## The top part In the top part you can view the letter status, level and date, as well as the customer account for which the letter was generated. If an amount of the dunning fee was specified for the level of the letter, the link to the invoice is displayed after you release the letter.
Element Description
Status

The status of the dunning letter, which can be one of the following:

Draft
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been prepared and can be released. You can edit the list of customer documents included in the letter.
Released
This status indicates that the dunning letter has been released and can be printed, emailed or voided. If a dunning fee amount was specified for the level of this letter (on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window), the invoice for the dunning fee is created and released as well.
Voided
This status indicates that the dunning letter is voided and that the dunning level of documents listed in this letter is decreased and these documents are available for preparing a new letter.
Dunning letter level

The level of this dunning letter. The system uses the value of this box to define for which dunning fee amount the invoice should be generated.

If there are documents with different dunning level are included in the letter, the system uses the highest level (among document levels) to set as the dunning level of the letter. You can delete documents with the highest level to decrease the level of the letter.
Customer The customer associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Dunning letter date The creation date of this dunning letter.
Fee ref. no. The reference number of the invoice that was created for the dunning fee amount specified for this level of the dunning letter. The invoice is created when you release the dunning letter. You can click the link to view document details.
## The table This table contains the list of customer documents to be included in the dunning letter.
Button Description
Revoke Excludes the selected document from the dunning process. The action is available for dunning letters with the Draft status. After you have excluded a document, you can again include the document in the dunning process by clearing the Revoked check box on the Financial details tab of the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Column Description
Type The type of the document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. You can click the link to view document details.
Due date The due date of the document.
Original document amount The original document amount.
Overdue balance The overdue amount of the document.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Expiring customer contracts (CT401000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/expiring-customer-contracts-ct401000 page In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the Renew automatically check box selected. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expiring customer contracts (CT401000) In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the Renew automatically check box selected. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view contracts that will expire soon, as well as auto-renewable contracts, which have the **Renew automatically** check box selected. Contracts may be selected by customer class, contract template, and expiration period. ## Expiration window Use the elements in this area to specify the criteria for selecting contracts.
Element Description
Start date The start date of the date range for which you want to display contracts.
Duration The number of days included in the date range. The system will display contracts with expiration dates in this date range.
Show contracts available for mass renewal A check box that you select to include the auto-renewable contracts that will expire during the specified date range.
Customer class The class of the customers with similar settings. Leave the field blank to show information on all classes.
Contract template A contract template used for contracts with similar settings. Leave the field blank to show information on all templates.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria set in the top part. You can select a contract and view its details.
Column Description
Contract ID The contract’s ID. Click the ID to navigate to the Customer contracts (CT301000) window to see the details of the selected contract.
Description A description of the contract.
Contract template The template used for the contract.
Contract type The type of contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract, by ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Status The status of the contract.
Setup date The date of the contract setup.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Mass renewal A check box that, if selected, indicates that the contract is available for mass processing and is to be displayed in the Renew contracts (CT502000) window.
Last invoicing date The date of the most recent invoicing for the contract.
Next invoicing date The date of the next invoicing for the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 GDPR - personal data (GA000081) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/gdpr-personal-data-ga000081 page The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a legal framework that sets guidelines for the collection and processing of personal information from individuals who live in the European Union (EU). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # GDPR - personal data (GA000081) The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) is a legal framework that sets guidelines for the collection and processing of personal information from individuals who live in the European Union (EU). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With the help of the details registered in this window, you can provide the users with the information you have stored about them in the system if they request it. ## The top part In the top part, select the user for whom you want to view the stored information.
Element Description
Contact The user whose details are registered.
## The table This table contains the details of the user that are used when collecting personal data on the user.
Column Description
Display name The name of the user that is used in the different windows of the system.
Address 1 The first address line of the user’s address.
Address 2 The second address line of the user’s address.
Address 3 The third address line of the user’s address.
Postcode The postcode of the user’s address.
City The city of the user’s address.
County The county of the user’s address.
Country The country of the user’s address.
Email The email address of the user.
Phone 1 The telephone number 1 of the user.
Phone 2 The telephone number 2 of the user.
Phone 3 The telephone number 3 of the user.
Fax The user’s fax number.
Date of birth The user’s date of birth.
Created by The user who has registered the user details.
Created on The date when the user details have been created.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the details of the user.
Last modified The date when the details of the user have been last modified.
Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ar504000 page You use this window to run a schedule or multiple schedules that automatically generate the customer ledger documents based on the template document or documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions (AR504000) You use this window to run a schedule or multiple schedules that automatically generate the customer ledger documents based on the template document or documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information, see [Schedules for recurring documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-schedules-for-recurring-documents/). The schedules to be processed are filtered by the date that you specify in the **Execution date** field. You also need to specify the condition on which the system will stop running the schedules. When you run a schedule, the system uses the original (**Scheduled**) documents as templates to generate similar documents. For each processed schedule, after the required documents have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed** date. No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run Runs the schedules you have selected (by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table) and generates documents with an Open status.
Run all Runs all schedules in the table.
New schedule Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window, from which you can create a new schedule.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify the criteria that the system uses for selecting the schedules to be loaded to the table and determining when the schedule executions should be stopped.
Element Description
Execution date

The date that the system uses to filter the schedules to be loaded to the table. Those schedules whose Next execution date is earlier than or equal to the date specified in this field are loaded. Clear the field to display all schedules.

By default, the current business date is displayed.
Stop on execution date An option button that indicates that the date you specify in the Execution date field will be used as the date when the system stops running the schedules.
Stop after number of executions An option button that indicates that the system stops running schedules when the specified number of schedule executions have been performed. You specify the number of schedule executions in the field located near this option button.
## The table The table contains the list of active schedules that match the settings you have specified. You can select the check boxes to include schedules for processing.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you can use to select this schedule for processing.
Schedule ID

The schedule’s unique ID.

By clicking the number, the system opens the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window as a dialog window; in this window, you can view the details of the selected schedule.
Description The user-defined description of the schedule.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date The expiration date for the schedule.
Executed (times) The number of times the documents attached to the schedule were generated.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule may be executed.
Next execution The date when the documents should be generated next.
Last executed The date when the documents were last generated, according to the schedule.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500 page In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the Reduce taxable amount on early payment option selected in the Cash discount field in the VAT (TX205000) window). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the Reduce taxable amount on early payment option selected in the Cash discount field in the VAT (TX205000) window). For more information: [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which a VAT calculated based on cash discounts has been applied (that is, a VAT with the **Reduce taxable amount on early payment** option selected in the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window). You can generate credit notes for the documents you select or for all listed documents. After the generated credit note or notes are released, the cash discount amounts will be applied to the appropriate documents, and the documents will be closed. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of generating credit notes for the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates the process of generating credit notes for all listed documents.
## The top part Here, you can select specific parameters for filtering the documents to be shown in the table below.
Element Description
Date

The date, which you select to view unprocessed documents with payment dates earlier than or the same as the selected date.

By default, the current business date is selected.
Branch The branch for which you want to view documents. By default, the company branch is specified.
Customer

The customer whose documents you want to view. You can leave this field empty to view the documents of all customers.

Note

If the parent-child relationships are established between customer accounts (that is, if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), and if the parent company has paid the invoice of the child company, you can create the credit note for the child company by selecting the customer that represents the parent company in this field (or by leaving this field empty).
Consolidate credit notes by customer

A check box that indicates (if selected) that one credit note will be generated for multiple documents grouped by the branch, customer, customer location, currency, customer ledger account (and customer ledger subaccount, if any), and VAT zone.

The check box is selected by default. If you clear this check box, a separate credit note will be generated for each document.
Credit note date

The date to be used as the date of the credit note.

This option is required if the Consolidate credit notes by customer check box is selected in this window. By default, the current business date is selected.
Period

The financial period, which you select to post credit notes.

This option is required if the Consolidate credit notes by customer check box is selected in this window. By default, it is the period of the current business date.
## The table This table contains the list of documents for which early payments were made.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document in the row relates.
Customer The customer specified in the document of this row.
Doc. type The type of the document in this row.
Ref. no. The number that identifies the document in the system.
Doc. date The document date.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The total document amount.
Cash discount The amount of the cash discount applied to the document.
Payment terms The payment terms specified for the document.
Payment ref. no. The number that identifies the related payment in the system.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Import incoming payments (AR305500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/import-incoming-payments-ar305500 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import incoming payments (AR305500) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Cash account In the table will be displayed the incoming payments with the cash account that you select here.
Ref. no. Select the reference number of the document you want to process or create a new one.
Import date The date when the payment was imported.
## The table
Buttons Description
Unhide transaction Click this to unhide a selected transaction. This will clear the Processed and Hidden check boxes for the transaction. The transaction becomes available for processing in the Process incoming payments (AR305000) window.
Unmatch Click this to unmatch a matched transaction.
View matched document Click this to view the details of the matched document.
Column Description
Matched This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been matched.
Processed This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been processed.
Hidden This check box is selected by default, it the transaction has been hidden.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Receipt The amount of the receipt.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.
Orig. receipt The original amount of the receipt.
Orig. disbursement The original amount of the disbursement.
Applied rule The rule that was applied when matching the payment.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the document in the archive.
Business account The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Entry type ID The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.
Invoice number list When a line refers to more than one invoice number, the invoice numbers are listed here.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Module The module from which the transaction originates.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the document.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment number list When a line refers to more than one payment reference, the payment reference numbers are listed here.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Workspace The involved workspace in the system.
Incoming payments history (AR407000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/incoming-payments-history-ar407000 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Incoming payments history (AR407000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Cash account In the table will be displayed the incoming payments with the cash account that you select here.
From date The date from which the transactions will be displayed in the table.
To date The date until which the transactions will be displayed in the table.
Statement no. The number of the statement whose transactions you want to view.
## The table
Element Description
Statement no. The number of the statement from which the transaction comes.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Match type

The available match types are:

  • Matched to payment
  • Matched to invoice
  • Created
  • Hidden
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Receipt The amount of the disbursement.
Disbursement The amount of the receipt.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.
Entry type ID The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected bank transaction.
Applied rule The rule that was applied when matching the payment.
Workspace The workspace from which the transaction originates.
Type The type of the original transaction.
Ref. no. The reference number of the invoice to which the transaction belongs.
Business account The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Business account name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice history by item (AR40105S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/invoice-history-by-item-ar40105s page You use this inquiry to list all invoices from the Customer ledger that are released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice history by item (AR40105S) You use this inquiry to list all invoices from the Customer ledger that are released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on customer invoice lines, regardless if they have a connection to a sales order. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the invoice history for.
Item class The item class of the items to be included in the report. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class The class of the customers to be included in the report.
Salesperson The salesperson for whom you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
## The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID. You can click the link to view the details of the item in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

 Manage credit holds (AR523000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manage-credit-holds-ar523000 page By using this window, you can place customers that have overdue invoices and have received the final dunning letters on credit hold; you can also release them from credit hold after they have paid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage credit holds (AR523000) By using this window, you can place customers that have overdue invoices and have received the final dunning letters on credit hold; you can also release them from credit hold after they have paid. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the processing, based on the selected action, of the customer accounts you have selected.
Process all Initiates the processing of all customer accounts listed in the table.
## The top part Here, you can select the action to be performed if you click **Process** or **Process all**. Also, you can specify the time interval during which the final dunning letters were generated.
Element Description
Action

The operation the system performs if you click Process or Process all. The following options are available:

  • Apply credit hold: Prevents users from creating any new sales orders for the selected customers.

If you select this option, the table will include only the customers eligible for applying the credit hold. In other words, the table will include the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated and the credit hold was not applied. This rule applies only when the Show all check box is not selected.

  • Release credit hold: Takes the selected customer accounts off hold so that new sales orders can be created.

If you select this option, the table will include only the customers eligible for releasing the credit hold. In other words, the table will include the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated and the credit hold was applied. This rule applies only when the Show all check box is not selected.
Show all A check box that you select to have the table include all the customers for which the final dunning letters were generated in the specified date range. If you do not select this check box, the table will display the customers as specified in the description of the Action field.
Start date

The starting date of the date range within which the final dunning letters were generated.

Date selection is available only if the Apply credit hold action is selected.
End date

The ending date of the date range within which the final dunning letters were generated.

Date selection is available only if the Apply credit hold action is selected.
## The table This table contains the list of customers for which the final dunning letters were generated in the specified date range.
Column Description
Customer no. An ID of the customer account.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date

The date when the final letter was generated.

The column is available if the Dunning letter management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Overdue balance The overdue amount owed by the customer.
Customer balance The total amount of the open customer documents.
Status The status of the customer account.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manual payments (AR30200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ar30200s section In this window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manual payments (AR30200S) In this window, you can create incoming payments for open documents in the customer ledger, for example, for invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process

Click the check boxes to select the documents for which you want to create payments and click Process. The selected documents are processed and the system creates a Reference number from Payments for each payment.

icon-confirmation is displayed to the left of each document that has been processed successfully.
## The top part
Element Description
Due date less than or equal to The due date of the documents to be displayed in the table is less than or equal to the date you select here.
Payment method The payment methods of the documents to be displayed in the table. If you do not select anything here, in the table are displayed documents with all payment methods.
## The table
Button Description
View document View the sales invoice connected with the document selected in the table.
View payment View the payment invoice connected with the document selected in the table.
Column Description
Document type

The type of the document. The options are:

  • Invoice
  • Debit note
  • Credit note
  • Overdue charge
  • Credit write-off
Invoice ref. no. The invoice number. Sort and drill down to see the invoice.
Customer The customer’s ID.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Amount The document amount.
Balance The balance of the document.
Amount paid The actual amount paid.
Payment date The date of the payment release. You can edit the pay date, so that overdue charges will be calculated correctly.
Payment period The period associated with the payment date.
Ref. no. from Payments Shows the reference number after you have processed the payments.
KID-number The customer identification number from the payment.
Date The date on the invoice.
Currency The currency used on the invoice.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash account The cash account connected with the invoice.
Payment method The description of the payment method used on the invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Overdue charges (AR204500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500 page In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charges (AR204500) In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define overdue charges to be used for late payments in the collection process. You define the overdue charges by creating overdue charge codes. You can create as many overdue charge codes (particular overdue charge entities with its own settings) as needed. For details, see: [About overdue charges](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/overdue-charges/about-overdue-charges/). Before you create an overdue charge code, you need to create appropriate payment terms by using the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window that define the due date for paying the documents of the **Overdue charge** type. This window is available if the **Overdue charges** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General settings section This section contains several sections with various information about the overdue charges. You use the elements in this section to define a new overdue charge code and its settings, or to select an existing code and view its settings.
Element Description
Overdue charge ID The unique ID for the overdue charge code. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A description of the overdue charge code. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters
Calculation method

The way the system calculates charges for overdue documents. The following options are available:

Interest on open entries
The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance as of the date of calculation. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges.
Interest on open, partially paid, and paid entries
The overdue document is subject to charges until it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days. If overdue charges have been recorded for the document, the system calculates the charges for the number of days since the date of the last overdue charges.
Interest on paid entries
The overdue document becomes subject to charges at the moment it is closed. To calculate the charges for the days past due, the system uses the document’s open balance for each of these days.
Terms The payment terms that apply to generated documents of the Overdue charge type. You create payment terms by using the Payment terms (CS206500) window to provide a schedule for paying this overdue charge.
Base currency A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will calculate the overdue charge by using the base currency. If the check box is cleared, the system will calculate the overdue charge by using the currency of an overdue document.
Overdue charge account The account to which collected overdue charges are recorded.
Overdue charge subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
VAT category The VAT category, if applicable to this overdue charge and overdue fee (if any).
## The Overdue fee settings section You use the elements in this section to define an overdue fee that is associated with the selected overdue charge code.
Element Description
Fee amount The amount of the fee for an overdue charge document (if your company charges any). If the Base currency check box is selected, the fee is charged in the base currency. If the check box is cleared, the fee is charged in the currency of the overdue document.
Fee account The account to which the overdue fee is recorded.
Fee subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Description

A description of the overdue fee.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
## The Charging settings section You use the elements in this section to define the criteria the system uses for generating a document of the **Overdue charges** type.
Element Description
Total threshold The minimum amount of overdue charges that should initiate the generation of a document of the Overdue charge type.
Charging method

The way the system charges an overdue document. An overdue charge can be defined either as a fixed amount or as a percentage (annual rate) on a document’s open balance for the number of days late. The following options are available:

  • Fixed amount: The system charges overdue documents for a fixed amount. You specify the fixed amount in the Amount field, which appears when you select the Fixed amount charging method.

  • Percent with threshold: The system calculates the overdue charge as a percentage of the document’s open balance for the number of days late. (You specify the percentage in the Rates table, which appears once you select this charging method.) Then the system compares the calculated overdue charge amount with the threshold amount (which you enter in the Threshold field) and does either of the following:

    • If the amount of overdue charges is less than the specified threshold amount, the system does not charge the document.
    • If the amount of overdue charges is greater than or equal to the threshold amount, the system charges the document for the calculated charge amount.

  • Percent with min. amount: The system calculates the overdue charge as a percentage of the document’s open balance for the number of days late. (You specify the percentage in the Rates table, which appears once you select this charging method.) Then the system compares the calculated charge amount with the minimum amount (which you enter in the Min. amount field) and does either of the following:

    • If the amount of overdue charges is less than the minimum amount, the system charges a document for the minimum amount.
    • If the amount of overdue charges is greater than or equal to the minimum amount, the system charges a document for the calculated charge amount.
Amount

The amount that the system uses as the fixed charge amount for overdue documents when the Fixed amount charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Charging method field.
Threshold

The threshold amount of overdue charges, which defines whether to charge an overdue document when the Percent with threshold charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Percent with threshold option is selected in the Charging method field.
Min. amount

The minimum amount that the system uses to charge an overdue document when the Percent with min. amount charging method is applied.

This field is available if the Percent with min. amount option is selected in the Charging method field.
## The Rates table You use the elements in this table to define rates and their effective start date. The system uses the percent rate in the row that has the most recent start date at the time of overdue charge calculation. This table is only available if the **Percent with threshold** or **Percent with min. amount** option is selected in the **Charging method** field.
Element Description
Start date The date when the rate in this row becomes effective.
Percent rate The annual percentage rate to be used to calculate an overdue charge.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Packaging types (CS207600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600 page You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Packaging types (CS207600) You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain the list of packages used by your company for shipping goods by using different carriers. Such parameters of packages as dimensions, tare weight, and maximum weight capacity are used for automatic packaging and for freight calculation for shipments. ## The table This table provides information about the packages to be used for shipping. > [!NOTE] > After you have added a new package to the list and saved it, the system will reorder the items alphabetically.
Column Description
Box ID The ID of the type of packages. An alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters may be used.
Description A description of the content of the package.
Tare weight The weight of an empty package of this type, may include the weight of any packaging material used to pack items inside the package.
Max. weight The maximum weight a package of that type can hold.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight as specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Max. volume The maximum volume of items that can fit into a package of the type.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the volume as specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Length

The length of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.
Width

The width of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.
Height

The height of the package.

Note

For information purposes only; the value is not used in any calculation.
Active by default If you select this check box, the package will be added by default to the list of packages on the Packages tab of the Ship via codes (CS207500) window for each new ship via code.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000 page In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can generate dunning letters (letters of payment collection) for customers that have unpaid and overdue invoices. The intervals between successive dunning letters of different levels are defined on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. After you generate dunning letters by using the current window, you can review and process them further in the [Print/release dunning letters (AR522000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000/) window. The window is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of generating dunning letters for the selected records or those for which you have selected the unlabeled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates the process of generating dunning letters for all the records in the table.
## The top part Here, you can make selections to narrow the list of records.
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. You can select a particular customer class to view only customers of the class that have overdue balances, or leave the field blank to view all customers with overdue balances.
Customer The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date The date to be specified on the generated letters.
Include other unpaid documents A check box that you select to include unpaid documents that are not yet due in the preparation of dunning letters.
Include credit note documents A check box that indicates, if selected, that the dunning letter will contain credit notes.
Split by documents reference number A check box that indicates, if selected, that the table below will contain information split by the documents reference number. If not selected, the table will contain documents grouped by customer.
This section is displayed if **Dunning process** is set to **By document** on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window.
Element Description
All overdue documents The option button that you select to include all the overdue documents of a customer into the dunning letters preparation process.
Dunning letter level The option button that you select to include into the dunning letters preparation process those overdue documents whose level is in the range specified in the From and To fields.
From The starting level of the range. The field is available if the Dunning letter level option is selected.
To The ending level of the range. The field is available if the Dunning letter level option is selected.
## The table The table contents depends on the option selected in the **Dunning process** field on the **Dunning settings** tab of the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window: By customer : The table lists the customer accounts that have at least one overdue document. By document : The table lists the overdue documents grouped by customer and by document dunning level. For instance: If a customer account has two overdue documents with different levels, the system will display two rows in the table. If a customer account has two documents with the same level, the system will group the documents into one row.
Column Description
Customer class The customer class of the customer.
Customer The identifier of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Earliest due date The due date of the oldest overdue invoice of the customer.
Branch The branch on behalf of which the letter will be sent. If one consolidated letter is generated for all branches, the branch selected as the letter sender on the General settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is shown.
Overdue balance The overdue amount that is due from the customer (sum of open invoices, overdue charges and debit notes).
Number of overdue documents The number of overdue documents of the customer for which a dunning letter of the current level (by customer or by document) has not been prepared yet.
Customer balance The total balance of all open documents of the customer including the total balance of prepayments.
Number of documents The number of overdue and other unpaid documents of the customer for which a dunning letters of the current level (by customer or by document) has not been prepared yet.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter to be generated for the customer.
Last dunning letter date The date of the previous dunning letter, if any has been generated.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare statements (AR503000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-statements-ar503000 page In this window, you can prepare statements for selected statement cycles or for all cycles. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare statements (AR503000) In this window, you can prepare statements for selected statement cycles or for all cycles. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing of the statements for the cycles you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing of statements for all cycles listed in the window.
## The Statements table In this table, you can select the statement cycles you want to process. Statements will be prepared in the format required for printing or for sending by email, as specified for each customer or customer class. To view and further process statements, use the [Print statements (AR503500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500/) window. You can get a detailed statement history through inquiries.
Column Description
Prepare for The date for which you want to prepare statements.
Cycle ID The unique ID of the cycle.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Last statement date The date when the statements for the cycle were last generated.
Last finance charge date The date when overdue charges were last calculated for the customers.
Schedule type The selected statement cycle processing option. The following values are available: The end of the month, A fixed day of the month, and Custom.
Next statement date The date when the statements should be generated next, according to the cycle settings.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Send invoices (AR508000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/send-invoices-ar508000 page From this window, you can print the customer ledger documents for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies of the documents (the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer account). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send invoices (AR508000) From this window, you can print the customer ledger documents for those customers who prefer to receive printed copies of the documents (the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer account). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also email selected documents for those customers who prefer to receive documents by email (that is, the **Send invoices by email** check box is selected for the customer accounts in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **Invoicing settings** tab) or mark them to indicate that they should not be emailed. For details, see: [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/). ## What to do from this window + [Send several invoices or credit notes to AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-several-invoices-or-credit-notes-to-autoinvoice/) + [Email several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/email-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/) + [Send invoices by email](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/send-invoices-by-email/) + [Print invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-invoice/) + [Print several invoices or credit notes](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-several-invoices-or-credit-notes/) + [Print and send invoices or credit notes by regular mail](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-mailings/print-and-send-invoices-or-credit-notes-by-regular-mail/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing of all documents, with the specific type of processing dependent on the action selected, listed in the table.
View document Displays the selected document in the window in which it was originally created.
## The top part Here, you can select the type of processing to be done if you click **Process** or **Process all**. Also, for invoices associated with contract servicing, you can select invoices by the user or work group that owns them.
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken. The following options are available:

  • Mark as do not email: Marks the selected documents as ones that should not be emailed.

  • Email invoice/note: Generates emails for the selected documents (or all documents) in accordance with the INVOICE mailing settings.

  • Print invoice/note: Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.

  • Poll invoice status: Updates the status of the AutoInvoice column in the table.

    • Sent to AutoInvoice, awaiting processing
    • Pending, awaiting delivery
    • Sent, the invoice is sent
    • Error, to check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice

If applicable, it also updates the Business level status found in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

  • Send to AutoInvoice: Select this action to send this invoice to AutoInvoice.

    Note

    As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

  • Print overdue charge: Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.
Show all A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) to display all the documents with a status other than Closed, regardless of specified selection criteria.
Show closed invoices/credit notes

(This check box appears when you select the Poll invoice status or the Send to AutoInvoice action.)

When this check box is selected, the system will display all documents with the Closed status.
Start date The starting date of the date range within which documents were created.
End date The ending date of the date range within which documents were created.
## The table This table contains the list of documents that match the criteria specified in the to part and were not printed or emailed before (that is, the **Printed** or **Emailed** check box is cleared in the document settings).
Column Description
Type The type of the document: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Overdue charge, or Credit write-off.
Invoice no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the selected document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period of the document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Due date The due date of the document in accordance with the payment terms assigned to the customer.
Amount The amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice status The status of the invoice in AutoInvoice.
Sending method Here you can select the sending method: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice sent by Here you can filter the invoices on the manner it was sent to AutoInvoice. The options are: Home network, Email, Print, Print PRIORITY, e-invoice, Bank network, N/A.
AutoInvoice error message If the invoice has an error in AutoInvoice, the error message from AutoInvoice is displayed here.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process customer refunds (AR50300S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-customer-refunds-ar50300s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process customer refunds (AR50300S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create customer refunds Click this to create customer refunds and to open a window, where you can view the status of your refunds and send them to AutoPay.
## The top part ### The Filter documents on section
Element Description
Payment method Select the payment method you want to filter on.
Cash account Select the cash account you want to filter on.
Date before Select the date before you want to filter on.
Customer Select the customer you want to filter on.
### The Input section
Element Description
Payment method Select the preferred payment method. You can only select from payment methods that have the Create batch payment (customer and supplier ledgers) check box selected in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account The Cash account is automatically displayed, but you can select another one if you want to.
Payment date In the Payment date field, select the date you want the refund to take place.
Currency The currency of the refund. If you have a cash account that uses foreign currency, you can use the View base button to view the amount(s) in the base currency instead of the foreign currency.
Customer The customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Post period The post period of the refund.
### The Calculation section
Element Description
GL balance General ledger balance
Available balance Available balance
Selection total The total of the selected documents
Bank balance Bank balance
Documents to pay The number of documents to pay.
## The table
Column Description
Doc. type The document type of the payment to be refunded.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Customer The number of the customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Customer name The name of the customer to whom the refund will be paid.
Customer account The account of the customer to which the refund will be paid.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment refund.
Pay separately Select this if you want to pay the refund separately.
Payment date In the Payment date field, select the date you want the refund to take place. The suggested date is today’s date.
Amount paid In the Amount paid column, verify the suggested amount or change the amount you want to refund.
Balance The remaining balance of the payment that can be refunded.
Currency The currency of the balance.
Balance (original currency) The balance of the payment in the original currency.
Reprint invoices (AR50801S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/reprint-invoices-ar50801s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reprint invoices (AR50801S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates reprinting of the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates reprinting of all documents listed in the table.
View document Shows the document connected with the invoice/note selected in the table.
## The top part
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken. The following option is available:

Reprint invoice/note
Initiates the process of printing the selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.
Sent to AutoInvoice
when you select this option, the table displays all documents that were sent to AutoInvoice during the selected date range. You can then initiate the process of printing selected documents (or all documents) for sending by mail.
Start date The starting date of the date range within which documents were created.
End date The ending date of the date range within which documents were created.
## The table
Column Description
Type The type of the document: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Overdue charge, or Credit write-off.
Invoice no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the selected document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period of the document.
Customer The customer associated with the document.
Customer name The name of the customer as it appears on the documents.
Due date The due date of the document in accordance with the payment terms assigned to the customer.
Amount The amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.

Related pages

Windows

 Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-release-dunning-letters-ar522000 page You can use this window to release, email and print the dunning letters that were created in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/release dunning letters (AR522000) You can use this window to release, email and print the dunning letters that were created in the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. For more information: [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The window is available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of the letters you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates processing, based on the selected action, of all letters listed in the table.
## The top part Here, you can select the action to be performed if you click **Process** or **Process all**, as well as the date range when the letters were generated.
Element Description
Action

The processing action to be taken if you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following options:

Print dunning letter
Initiates the process of printing each dunning letter for sending by mail.
Email dunning letter
Initiates the process of sending each dunning letter electronically to customers.
Mark as: do not email
For each dunning letter, selects the Do not email check box.
Mark as: do not print
For each dunning letter, selects the Do not print check box.
Release dunning letter
Initiates the process of releasing dunning letters with the Draft status. If a dunning fee amount is specified for this level, the system creates and releases an invoice for the fee amount. This invoice does not include the due documents listed in the letter.
Show all A check box that you select to indicate to the system that all letters should be displayed, no matter dates specified and what kind of processing they require, printing, emailing, or other.
Start date The date that starts the date range during which the dunning letters were generated.
End date The date that ends the date range during which the dunning letters were generated.
## The table This table contains the list of dunning letters that were generated during the date range specified in the top part.
Button Description
View dunning letter Opens the Dunning letters (AR306000) window, where you can view the list of documents included into the letter.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which you want to display data.
Customer The customer associated with the dunning letter, by its ID.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Dunning letter date The creation date of the dunning letter.
Dunning letter level The level of the dunning letter.
Overdue balance The total overdue amount owed by the customer.
Final reminder A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter is a final reminder. In this case, the customer account for which such letter was prepared can be selected in the Manage credit holds (AR523000) window, so you can put this account on credit hold.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter should not be printed.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter has been printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter should not be emailed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that this dunning letter has been emailed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Print statements (AR503500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/print-statements-ar503500 page You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print statements (AR503500) You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to print or email statements for the selected statement cycle in accordance with customer settings. Also, you can view unprocessed statements or already-processed statements. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates processing of the statements you have included (by selecting the unlabelled check boxes in the table) for the selected cycle.
Process all Initiates processing of all statements (listed in the window) of the selected cycle.
Inquiries

List of inquiries you can navigate to from this window:
## The top part Here, you can specify selection criteria to narrow the statements displayed in the table. Statements were prepared in the format required for printing or sending by email (or both), as specified for each customer or customer class, and can be either sent by email or printed for mailing.
Element Description
Actions

The action to be applied to the statements selected for processing:

Print statement
Select this action to print statements prepared for printing.
Email statement
Select this action to generate emails for statements in accordance with the STATEMENT mailing settings.
Mark as: do not email
Select this option to mark statements as not requiring emailing.
Mark as: do not print
Select this option to mark statements as not requiring printing.
Regenerate statement
Select this action to regenerate and prepare the most recent customer statements.
Statement cycle A statement cycle whose statements will be processed.
Statement date The date of the statements.
Branch The branch for which you want to view statements.
Foreign currency statements A check box that indicates (if selected) that foreign currency statements should be included in processing.
Show all A check box that indicates (if selected) that all statements (processed or not) will be displayed in the table.
Message In this field, you can write a free-form message connected with the statement.
## The table This table displays the statements matching the criteria defined in the top part. You can use the unlabelled check boxes to select statements for processing.
Column Description
Customer The unique identifier of the customer.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Statement balance The balance of the customer’s statement in the base currency.
Overdue balance The overdue balance of customer’s statement in the base currency.
Currency The currency of the statement.
FC statement balance The balance of the statement in the foreign currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue balance of customer’s statement in the foreign currency.
FC statement balance A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement is in the foreign currency.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that it is not required to print the statement in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement has been printed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that it is not required to email the statement to the customer in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement has been emailed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process incoming payments (AR305000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process incoming payments (AR305000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Match incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-incoming-payments/) + [Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document/) + [Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/match-a-bank-transaction-or-incoming-payment-line-to-different-documents/) + [Process matched incoming payments](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/process-matched-incoming-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Status description Click this to open a dialogue box that shows you the statuses of the active document, such as “Remaining balance available”.
Match automatically

When you click this, the system tries to match the imported incoming payments with the customer ledger invoices in the system. The matching is based on payment reference and/or invoice numbers.

For payments that the system has matched automatically, you see that the Ready to process check box is selected. These are now ready for processing.
Process

Initiates the processing of transactions with the Ready to process check box selected. The processing takes place on all lines that are ready for processing, regardless of any filters set on the table.

After processing, in the first column, a Success or icon-error is displayed for each processed line to indicate if the processing was successful or not. You can hover over the icon to read the line-specific message. Successfully processed lines do not show up again for the selected cash account.
Setting for matching

In the Settings for matching dialog box, you can temporarily change the settings for matching, for example date settings or the weight settings for the relevance calculation.

The settings you make here disappear when you leave the window.
### The Settings for matching dialog box In this dialog box, you can specify preferences for matching and relevance calculation. By default, the system uses the values specified on the **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window. These values remain effective during your session unless you specify new values. #### The Disbursement date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of a cash management transaction (disbursement) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the disbursement a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
Allow matching to credit note

A check box that (if selected) indicates that the system will automatically match the receipt bank transactions to credit notes by the reference number prior to matching them to the purchase invoices.

If the check box is cleared (the default value), the receipt bank transactions are always matched to the purchase invoices.
#### The Receipt date matching section
Element Description
Days before bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of cash management transaction (receipt) and the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
Days after bank transaction date

The maximum number of days allowed between the date of the selected transaction on the bank statement and the date of a receipt.

The system considers the receipt a matching one if the difference falls within the specified date range.
#### The Weights for relevance calculation section
Ref. no. weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the reference numbers of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Consider empty ref. no. as matching

A check box that (if selected) specifies that a bank transaction with an empty reference number is considered as matching to a cash transaction with an empty reference number.

If this check box is cleared (the default value), transactions with empty reference numbers are not considered as matching.
Doc. date weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the dates of the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
Doc. payee weight The relative weight of the evaluated difference between the names of the customer (or supplier) on the bank transaction and the cash management transaction.
#### The Date range for relevance calculation section
Element Description
Average delay payment clearing The average number of days for a payment to be cleared with the bank.
Estimated deviation (days) The number of days before and after the average delay date during which 50% of payments are generally cleared.
Skip voided transactions during matching A check box that you select to make the system skip voided transactions during the reconciliation process.
Save and close (button) By clicking this button it saves the settings during your working session and closes the dialog box.
## The top part
Element Description
Cash account If you do not use a default account or want to match payments from a different account, select the account in the Cash account field. The system displays all imported payments for that account in the table.
Display only relevant matches Invoices matching the criteria set up in the Settings for matching dialog box are automatically displayed and matched on the relevance factor. If you do not want to display invoices with 0 match relevance, select the Display only relevant matches check box.
## The table
Button Description
Unmatch Click this to unmatch the selected match.
Unmatch all Click this to unmatch all matches that have been done this time.
Hide selected

Click this to hide the transactions that are selected in the Hide column from the table. This undoes all changes to the selected transactions and marks them as processed.

To be able to view and process a hidden transaction again, select the transaction in the Import incoming payments (AR305500) window and click Unhide transaction.
Undo split

Click this to undo the splitting of the selected split line.

If you have processed one or more of the split lines, you will not be able to undo the split on the not processed lines.
Column Description
Ready to process A check box that, if selected, indicates to the system that this transaction is ready to be processed. Namely, the transaction has been matched to the transaction in the system or details of a new document (to match this transaction) were specified.
Trans. date The original date of the transaction.
Trans. descr. The description of the transaction.
Disbursement The amount of the disbursement.
Receipt The amount of the incoming payment.
Orig. receipt The original amount of the receipt.
Orig. disbursement The original amount of the disbursement.
Trans. code The code of the transaction.
Hide A check box which you can select for each transaction you want to hide. After you have made your selection, click the Hide selected button.
Account from bank The bank account or IBAN from which the payment was paid for the customer transactions. In some formats, it contains the IBAN or bank account from which you have paid to the supplier.
Archive code The code of the document in the archive.
Customer/Supplier no The supplier or customer associated with the document, by its account ID.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Entry type ID The identifier of the entry type that was used to create a document to match the transaction.
Invoice no. The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid. The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.
Invoice number list When a line refers to more than one invoice number, the invoice numbers are listed here.
Location The location of the supplier or customer.
Match type

The available match types are:

  • Matched to payment
  • Matched to invoice
  • Created
  • Hidden
Workspace The workspace from which the transaction originates. This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Name from bank The name of the bank that processed the document.
Payee name The payee name, if any, specified for a transaction.
Payment method The payment method that was used for the transaction.
Payment number list When a line refers to more than one payment reference, the payment reference numbers are listed here.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Ext. ref. no. The reference number of the invoice.
Trans. ID The ID of the transaction.
Trans. entry date The entry date of the transaction.
## Right pane: Match to payment tab The tab provides a list of payments that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular transaction in the table, you will see the payments that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Incoming payments settings** tab of the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. For the matching document you choose among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected in the left pane.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction in the left pane and this document.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Trans. type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Orig. doc. number The ID of the document, as assigned by the corresponding numbering series.
Document ref. The number of the corresponding external document, if one exists.
Description A detailed description of the document.
Doc. date The date of the transaction or document.
Post period The post period of the payment.
Incoming payment The document amount or transaction amount if it is a receipt.
Disbursement The document amount or transaction amount if it is a disbursement.
## Right pane: The Match to invoice tab The tab provides a list of invoices that the system has evaluated as matching the transaction selected in the table on the left pane. If you have manually selected a particular transaction in the table, you will see the invoices that have the same amount and are matched by the date range specified on the **Settings for matching** dialog box, or on the **Incoming payments settings** tab in the [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window if you did not specify any preferences in the dialog box. If you choose a matching document among the listed ones, you select the check box in the **Matched** column. If you have invoked auto-matching and the system has found more than one matching document, you need to manually specify the match.
Element Description
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Location The business account location associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method associated with the document.
Account no. The account to which the payment has been made.
Update bank account

You can update the IBAN/BBAN from the imported bank payment line.

In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window under Bank statement settings, select the check box Update bank account on customer/supplier from Process bank transactions. When the payment line contains a bank account from the bank and you select a customer/supplier, a lookup against the default IBAN/BBAN will be done.

If the customer’s/supplier’s bank account is empty or different, the button Update bank account will appear. If you click the button the customer/supplier is updated with the account from the bank.
### The table
Column Description
Matched A check box that you select to match the document in this row to the transaction selected in the left pane.
Match relevance The coefficient of the match relevance, which is less than or equal to 1 and is calculated automatically for the selected transaction in the left pane and this document.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoice has been released.
Workspace The workspace in which the document was entered.
Type The document type to which the selected payment from the left part can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. Click the link to view the details of the document.
Ext. ref. no The supplier’s reference number.
Doc. date The date of the document.
Amount The document amount.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer or the supplier account.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.
Description The invoice text provided for the document.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## Right pane: The Create document tab By using this tab, for payments with no match, you can create new documents of the type determined by the workspace of origin and the type of transaction (receipt or disbursement). See also:[Create a new payment or document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/create-a-new-payment-or-document/). ### The top part
Element Description
Create Select this check box to initiate creating a new document for the selected transaction. Clear the check box to delete any information you have specified for the new document.
Clear rule A button that clears the applied rule and the settings the system has configured by using the applied rule.
Create rule

Click this button to navigate to the Bank transaction rules (CA204500) window where you can create a new rule, view and modify the details of the rule and save it for future use.

Note

You can define rules to create documents originating in the Cash management workspace only.
Cash account details/ Customer details/ Supplier details

Click this button to open the cash account, supplier ledger or customer ledger window as a pop-up to see the details of the selected document.

The name of the button changes depending on the selected workspace. In the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, the Bank statement settings tab, you can define which window will be opened for the different workspaces.

If no window has been selected, the following windows will be opened:

  • Cash management opens the Cash account details (CA303000) window with the active cash account selected.
  • Supplier ledger opens the Supplier details (AP402000) window with the selected supplier selected. If the supplier number is empty, the window opens without a supplier selected.
  • Customer ledger opens the Customer details (AR402000) window with the selected customer selected. If the customer number is empty, the window opens without a customer selected.
Workspace

The workspace where the document originated.

Select one of the following workspaces:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Cash management
Entry type ID

The ID of an entry type that is used as a template for a new cash transaction to be created to match the selected transaction.

The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.
VAT zone

Change or specify the VAT zone or VAT category that applies to the transaction if necessary.

The VAT calculation mode is set to Gross by the system, and the VAT category field is updated with the default value when the VAT zone is selected.

The field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.
VAT calculation mode This field has a read-only value that always shows Gross.
Trans. descr. The description of the selected transaction that can be modified. These changes affect the description in the new document only; the description of the imported bank transaction or incoming payment remains unchanged (the table in the left pane).
Customer/Supplier no.

The ID and name of the customer or the supplier, associated with the document.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Location

The location of the supplier or customer.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Payment method

The payment method used by the customer or supplier for the document.

This field is visible if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Invoice no.

The internal reference number for the invoice/credit note that has been paid.

The system uses this column to make a lookup against the reference number on the purchase invoice if it is a disbursement and on the sales invoice if it is a receipt.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Total amount The total amount of the document.
Amount used

The amount of the transaction for which the documents

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.
Remaining balance

The balance of the transaction for which you can add the documents.

This field is displayed if the Cash management option is selected in the Workspace field.
Application amount

The amount of the application for this payment.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Unapplied balance

The unapplied balance of the document.

This field is displayed if the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.
Write-off amount

The total amount of write-offs specified for documents to be applied.

This field is displayed if the Customer ledger option is selected in the Workspace field.

Split

(button)

Click this button to split the selected line in the left table into different lines. The button only appears when there is a remaining amount to match. To read more about this functionality, go to Match a bank transaction or incoming payment line to different documents.

If the Automatic split of batch payment from customers into payments per customer check box is selected on the Incoming payments settings tab in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, payments will be automatically split on incoming payments import.
Allow unapplied balance Select this check box to process payments in situations where you need to overrule the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied. This check box is available only if the setting Do not create payment when bank payment amount is not fully applied is selected in the Bank statement settings tab in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window and the unapplied balance is different from 0.
### The table for documents that originated in the Cash management workspace In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to split the transaction amount. You cannot add documents that originated in the Customer ledger and Supplier ledger workspaces.
Column Description
Branch

The branch that created the document.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Description The description of the document. By default, this is the description in the Trans. descr. field in the top part of this tab, and you can edit it.
Quantity The quantity of the item.
Price The price for the item.
Amount The total amount for all items.
Offset cash account

The cash account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset cash account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.

The field is displayed if the selected entry type is used for payments reclassification.
Offset account

The account to be updated by the document.

By default, it is an offset account defined with the entry type selected in the Entry type ID field, but you can change this account.
Description A description of the account.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for the document.
Item ID The ID of the non-stock item used as a transaction subject.
VAT category The default value is based upon what you selected in the VAT zone field.
Non-invoiceable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document line is non-invoiceable in the project.

This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the non-project code indicating that this document is not associated with any project.

The Non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.

The column is available if the Project accounting check box is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

That is, the Cash management check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is hidden by default.
### The table for documents that originated in the Supplier ledger and Customer ledger workspaces In this table, you can add the documents to which you want to apply the new payment. You cannot add documents that originated in the Cash management workspace.
Button Description
Select documents

By clicking the button, the Select documents pop-up window appears. Here you can select multiple documents using the date and branch filters on the top and the Select all documents option.

You need to select a Customer/Supplier no. in the top part of this tab for documents to be displayed in this pop-up window.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.
Load documents

By clicking the button, the customer or the supplier documents will load in the table, until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part, starting with the oldest documents.

If you click the button and there is no conversion rate between the cash account’s currency and none of the documents’ currencies of the selected Customer/Supplier no., a message appears. It notifies that you need to define the exchange rate for the currency of this cash account in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.
#### The Select documents pop-up window This pop-up window appears when you have clicked the **Select documents** button. Here you select Supplier ledger or Customer ledger documents that you want to apply to the respective incoming payment. ##### The top part
Element Description
Up to due date The last due date up to which you want to filter the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.
Currency The cash account’s currency.
Total amount The total amount of the transaction selected in the main window.
Application amount

The total value of the selected documents.

This amount is always less than or equal to the Total amount.
Unapplied balance The difference between Total amount and Application amount.
Trans. descr. The transaction description of the transaction selected in the main window.
##### The table
Button Description
Select all documents Click this to select all documents until the sum of their amounts reach the Total amount in the top part.
Column Description
Select document Check box for selecting the documents.
Branch

The branch on which you want to select the documents.

By default the cash account’s branch is selected.
Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied to.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
Due date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document is due to be paid.
Amount in cash account currency The document amount converted in the cash account’s currency.
Balance in cash account currency The document balance converted in the cash account’s currency.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier number from the customer/supplier document.
Description The description from the supplier or customer documents.
Amount The document amount paid in the original currency.
Balance The document balance amount in the original currency.
Currency The currency of the document.
Customer order/supplier ref. The document’s original customer order/supplier reference as assigned by the customer/supplier (for informational purposes).
External reference/buyer’s order no. The external reference number/buyer’s order number of the transaction.
Customer name/supplier name The customer name/supplier name associated with the document.
Location The customer or supplier location.
#### The table
Column Description
Document type The type of the document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document to which the payment selected in the left table can be applied.
Customer order The original reference number or ID assigned by the customer to the customer document (for informational purposes).
Customer name The customer name associated with the document.
Customer

The parent or child customer associated with the document, by its customer number.

The Parent-child customer relationship can be enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window

For more information about parent-child relationship, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview
Invoice text The text from the customer documents.
External ref. The external reference number of the transaction.
Amount paid The amount paid for this document.
Balance The amount of the document after the specified amount was paid.
Date The date when the Supplier ledger or Customer ledger document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Balance write-off The amount to be written off.
Branch

The branch on which the document is created.

This column is only available if the Multi-Branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash discount balance The unused amount of the available discount, if any.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment.
Cross rate

A cross rate that you can optionally modify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.

The column is hidden by default and available if the Multi-currency accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Post period The financial period in which the document is posted.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if withholding taxes are applicable).
With. tax balance The difference between the amount of the tax to be withheld and the actual withheld amount (if any withholding taxes are applicable).
Write-off reason code A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off balances. You must select a reason code if the balance write-off amount is non-zero.
Description The description from the supplier documents.
Supplier ref. The document’s original reference number as assigned by the supplier (for informational purposes).

Related pages

Tasks

 Recurring transactions (AR203500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ar203500 page You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (AR203500) You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain schedules for the customer ledger documents that repeat regularly. You create a schedule and add one document or multiple documents of the following types to this schedule: **Invoice**, **Debit note**, and **Credit note**. You can also add documents to an existing schedule or schedules. Only the documents with the **Balanced**, **Pending print**, or **Pending email** statuses can be scheduled. Once you assign a document to a schedule, its status changes to **Scheduled**. A schedule defines how often and how many times generation of the assigned documents should repeat. The system uses the original documents as templates to generate similar documents with transaction dates and some other details changed. In this window, you can also view the details of the active and completed schedules. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run now Initiates the process of running a schedule and generating documents according to the schedule.
## The top part Here, you can create a new schedule and edit or delete any of the existing schedules.
Element Description
Schedule ID

The ID of the schedule.

A new schedule gets its unique identifier in accordance with the number series assigned to schedules in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule is active. When the check box is cleared, the schedule cannot be used.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date A date that, if set, indicates when the schedule expires. This field is unavailable if the Never expire check box is selected.
Never expires A check box that indicates (if selected) that no expiration date is set.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. This field is unavailable when the No limit option is selected.
No limit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule should be continued into future financial periods indefinitely; when you select this check box, the Execution limit field becomes unavailable.
Description A description for the schedule.
Last executed A read-only field that displays the date when the documents were last generated. If no documents have been generated according to the schedule, the box is unavailable.
Next execution A read-only field that displays the date when the schedule should be executed next, based on the schedule parameters.
Executed (times)

A read-only field whose value shows how many times the schedule was executed or how many times the documents were generated.

A 0 here indicates that the schedule has not been executed yet and no documents have been generated.
Schedule type

The frequency at which documents should be generated. Click one of the following option buttons, which are described in detail in the next sections:

Daily
The documents should be generated daily or every x days.
Weekly
The documents should be generated once a week or once every x weeks.
Monthly
The documents should be generated once per month or once every x months.
By financial period
The documents will be generated only once per financial period or once every x financial periods.

Select the schedule type, and enter the settings specific to the type in the corresponding section (described below).
### The Daily section
Element Description
Every An integer that specifies the time period (in days) when the document is generated. For example: 1 means every day and 2 means every other day, starting on the Start date
### The Weekly section
Element Description
Every An integer that specifies the time period (in weeks) when the document is generated. You can also select the day of the week when the document is generated.
### The Monthly section
Element Description
Every

An integer that specifies the time period (in months) for document generation.

For example: A 3 here would generate documents every three months.

For this schedule type, you should enter an integer and select one of the option buttons below this field.
On day

An option button that you select if you want to select a particular day of the month.

If you select this button, you should select the day of the month for the invoice in the adjacent field.
On the

An option button that you can select if you want to select a particular day of the week within the month.

If you select this button, you should also select the ordinal number in the left field that specifies the week in the month, and the day of the week in the right field. For example: 2nd Thursday.
### The By financial period section
Element Description
Every

An integer that specifies the interval for document generation, measured in financial periods.

In addition to selecting this integer, you should select one of the following option buttons, which determine when documents should be generated.
Start of the financial period An option button that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
End of period An option button that sets the end date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
Fixed day of the period

An option button that you use if documents should be generated on a particular day of the financial period.

If you select this button, select the particular day in the field.
## The Document list tab On the **Document list** tab, you can assign one document or multiple documents to the schedule. You can select documents from the list of those with a status of **Balanced**. Other columns in the row display the selected document's details.
Column Description
Type The type of the customer ledger document. Documents of the following types may be scheduled: Invoice, Debit note, and Credit note.
Ref. no The ID number of the original document, which is used as a template to generate documents. Other columns in the row are read-only and display the details of the original document.
Customer The ID of the customer whose document is being scheduled.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the document transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The user-defined description of the document.
## The Generated documents tab This tab contains a table showing the documents that have been generated as a result of this schedule being run.
Column Description
Type The document type, which can be one of the following: Invoice, Debit note, and Credit note.
Ref. no The reference number of the generated document.
Customer The customer whose document was scheduled.
Customer name The customer’s name, as it appears on the documents.
Status The status of the generated document.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the generated transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the generated document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The description of the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release customer documents (AR501000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000 page This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) documents or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release customer documents (AR501000) This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) documents or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window can be used to release all ready-to-be-released (**Balanced**) documents or only selected ones. Whether documents will be posted automatically when they are released is defined by the **Automatically post on release** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the customer ledger documents you have selected in the table, changes their status to Open, and creates unposted batches or posts batches directly to the General ledger, depending on whether the Automatically post on release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Release all Releases all the customer ledger documents on the list at once and changes their status to Open. Whether transactions are directly posted on release is defined by the Automatically post on release check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
## The table The table contains all ready-to-be-released customer ledger documents and payments (those with a status of **Balanced**). To include a document, select the check box that precedes it. To select all the documents, select the check box in the column header.
Column Description
Type

The type of customer ledger document. The following types can be released:

Invoice
An invoice sent to the customer for goods sold or services provided
Debit note
A document that adjusts the debit amount in one previous invoice or multiple previous invoices
Credit note
A document that adjusts the credit amount in one previous invoice or multiple previous invoices
Payment
A customer payment
Voided payment
A payment that has been cancelled
Prepayment
A customer payment
Customer refund
A document created for a customer refund
Voided refund
A refund has been voided
Overdue charge
A document for overdue charges
Balance write-off
A document that writes off a customer’s small balance that will not be paid.
Credit write-off
A document created for a customer refund
Cash sale
A document created to record a sale paid immediately by cash
Cash return
A document that is used to record a return of sold goods, which is refunded immediately by cash refund. The system also creates a document of this type when you reverse a cash-sale. Cash returns do not affect the customer’s balance.
Ref. no. The identifier of the document. Clicking the link navigates to the Sales invoices (AR301000), Customer payments (AR302000), or Cash sales (AR304000) window, depending on the type of the selected document, and displays the details of the selected customer ledger document.
Customer The customer (by ID) referred to on this document.
Customer name The customer’s complete name as it should appear on the documents.
Customer order The document reference number used by the customer.
Status The status of the document. Only Balanced documents can be released.
Date The date when the document was created.
Post period The period to which the transactions of the document should be posted.
Amount The amount of the document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Invoice text The user-provided description for the document.
Branch The ID of the branch.
Branch name The name of the branch.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Renew contracts (CT502000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/renew-contracts-ct502000 page You can use this window to view the automatically renewable contracts that will expire soon, as well as to renew contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Renew contracts (CT502000) You can use this window to view the automatically renewable contracts that will expire soon, as well as to renew contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates the renewal of the contracts you have selected in the Contract column.
Process all Initiates the renewal of all the listed contracts at once.
## The top part Use the elements in this area to specify the criteria for selecting contracts to be listed in the table (and possibly included in the renewal process). You can select contracts by a customer class, a contract template, and the date range in which they will expire.
Element Description
Renewal date The start date of the date range in which the contracts will expire.
Element Description
Customer class The customer class for which contracts will be listed. Leave the field blank to view information on all classes.
Contract template The contract template used for contracts with similar settings. Leave the field blank to view information on all templates.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria you chose in the selection area. You can select any listed contract and view its details before renewing it. To select some of the contracts for renewal, select the corresponding check boxes and click **Process**. To renew all the listed contracts, click **Process all**.
Column Description
Contract The contract ID.
Description A description of the contract.
Contract template The template used for the contract.
Contract type The type of contract. Use one of the following options: Renewable or Expiring.
Customer no. The customer associated with the contract.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Status The status of the contract.
Setup date The setup date of the contract.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Last invoicing date The most recent invoicing date for the contract.
Next invoicing date The next invoicing date for the contract.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Report texts (AR20200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/report-texts-ar20200s page You can use this window to write texts for dunning letters and reminders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Report texts (AR20200S) You can use this window to write texts for dunning letters and reminders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Report text code

The code of the report text, max. 30 characters. The field is alphanumeric.

Example: RE1.
Name

The name of the report text code.

Example: Reminder 1.
Text fields

In the topmost text field, enter the desired text of your reminder or dunning letter.

In the second text field, you can for en example add a message to the customer.

You can use maximum 255 characters in these fields.

Related pages

Tasks

 Run contract invoicing (CT501000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/run-contract-invoicing-ct501000 page You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run contract invoicing (CT501000) You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to perform invoicing for contracts. Invoices are generated for each contract and for each customer involved. For details on the settings and methods used in contract invoicing, see: Contract invoicing. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates invoicing processing for the contracts that you have included by selecting the unlabelled check boxes in the table.
Process all Initiates invoicing processing for all the contracts listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to configure the criteria for selecting contracts that you may want to invoice.
Element Description
Invoicing date The date that determines the contracts to be shown; contracts with a next invoicing date that is before or on the date you have selected here are to be displayed. The selected date serves as the invoice date for contracts with the invoicing period set to On demand.
Contract template The contract template that the contracts to be listed were based on. Leave the field blank to view contracts based on all templates.
Customer class The customer class of the contracts to be listed. Leave the field blank to view the contracts of customers of all classes.
Customer The customer whose contracts you want to invoice. Leave the field blank to see the contracts of all customers of the class (or all customers of all classes).
## The table This table contains the list of contracts matching the criteria specified in the top part. Only contracts with at least one not yet invoiced (but completed) invoicing period are displayed. If multiple invoicing periods were not invoiced for the contract, you should run the invoicing process once for each not yet invoiced period. You can select contracts by using the check boxes in the first column.
Column Description
Contract ID The contract identifier.
Description A description of the contract.
Customer The customer associated with the contract.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Last invoicing date The date when the contract was last invoiced.
Next invoicing date The date when the contract is to be invoiced next time.
Expiration date The date when the contract expires.
Contract template The contract template that the contract is based on.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales invoices (AR301000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000 section You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales invoices (AR301000) You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create, view, and modify customer ledger invoices, notes, and other documents. For more information, see: [Process invoices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/process-invoices-overview/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-an-invoice/) + [Change customer or customer location on sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-invoice/) + [Create and release an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-and-release-an-invoice/) + [Correct a released sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-released-sales-invoice/) + [Reverse an invoice with ROT or RUT](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/reverse-an-invoice-with-rot-or-rut/) + [Pay a specific outstanding document](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-payments-and-applications/pay-a-specific-outstanding-document/) + [Poll the invoice status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/poll-the-invoice-status/) + [Preview an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/preview-an-invoice/) + [Email an invoice from preview in a report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-from-preview-in-a-report/) + [Email an invoice or a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-or-a-credit-note/) + [Print an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/print-an-invoice/) + [Send an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/send-an-invoice/) + [Email an invoice to an unregistered contact](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/email-an-invoice-to-an-unregistered-contact/) + [Override an email address](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/override-an-email-address/) + [Create a credit note](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/create-a-credit-note/) + [Correct a sales invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/correct-a-sales-invoice/) + [Check sent email status](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status/) + [Check sent email status for AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/check-sent-email-status-for-autoinvoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the document.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Reverse and apply to note: For the selected invoice, creates a credit note for the same customer and applies it to the invoice. For invoices with items connected to excise duties, including invoices with an Excise duty total of 0, you can not use this action. For instructions on how to reverse these invoices, see Reverse an invoice with excise duty.

  • Email invoice/note: Sends the selected document as an email to the customer for the INVOICE mailing. For details on setting up mailings, see: About mailings for customers.

  • Send email: Opens the Send (CR306015) window, which you can use to create an email.

  • Enter payment/apply note: Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window with the elements filled in with the customer information and with the invoice amount specified as the document amount. This action is only available if the document has a status of Open.

  • Reclassify general ledger batch: Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, where you can initiate the reclassification process. For details, see: About reclassifying general ledger transactions.

  • Reverse: For the selected invoice, creates a credit note for the same customer.

  • Write-off: Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window.

  • Add to schedule: Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window, which you use to assign the document to a schedule.

  • Mark as: do not email: Selects the Do not email check box for the document.

  • Recalculate prices: Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.

  • Send to AutoInvoice: Will send the invoice to AutoInvoice.

    Note

    As of 1 July 2022, new branches need to verify their company in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window to be able to use AutoInvoice. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

  • Poll invoice status: Updates the AutoInvoice status and Business level status under the AutoInvoice section of the Invoice address tab.

    • Sent to AutoInvoice: Awaiting processing.
    • Pending: Awaiting delivery.
    • Sent: The invoice is sent.
    • Error: To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.

+

Generate e-Invoice XML draft:

Generates a draft version of the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 XML, so that you have the possibility to check the content and validate that all settings are correct, before you start using the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format for electronic invoicing. It is also possible to use this action after you have sent the invoice to AutoInvoice.

The action can be used on all statuses except On hold , and becomes available if PEPPOL BIS 3.0 is activated and you have enabled the setting Send to AutoInvoice on the Invoice address tab.

Note

** The generated file is a draft and may not be used as a legal document.

Correct invoice
When using the Correct invoice feature, the system will automatically create a copy of the original invoice that you can further edit. When releasing this new invoice, the system will automatically create a sales credit note for the original invoice and match it against the chosen invoice to be corrected. The original invoice will remain in status Open until the new corrected document will be finally released, but will no further be included in the payment process. Correcting of invoices with lines from the Shipments (SO302000) or Sales orders (SO301000) windows is currently not supported.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry forms:

Customer details
Navigates to the Customer details (AR402000) window.
Sales invoice
Navigates to the Customer invoices (SO303000) window.
Customer documents
Navigates to the Customer documents (AR621500) window.
View proforma:
Navigates to the Pro forma invoices (PM307000) window. This menu command is available only if the invoice has originated from a proforma invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you click for fast access to the following reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) report.
Unreleased transactions
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (AR611000) report.
Customer documents (detailed)
Navigates to the Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) report.
Preview invoice/note
Navigates to a preview of the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
Print invoice/note
Navigates to the Invoice/note (AR641000) report.
Print overdue charge
Navigates to the Overdue charge (AR643000) report.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options for updating prices and discounts for the invoice.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are calculated. You can select one of the following options:

All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines of the document.
Current line:
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line of the document.
Set current unit prices A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the item prices with the current prices.
Override manual prices

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit price or Manual amount columns) with the current prices.

The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.

After the manual prices are overridden in the document, the system clears the Manual price check boxes in the appropriate document lines.
Recalculate discounts

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must recalculate the discounts for the current line or for the selected lines.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Override manual line discounts

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should cancel the manual discounts for the current line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
## The top part Here you can create a new document or select an existing customer ledger document for modification. The following table summarises the elements of this area.
Element Description
Type

The document type. The following types are available:

Invoice
A document that contains a list of goods sold or services provided.
Debit note
A document that adjusts the amount in previous undercharging invoices.
Credit note
A document that credits a customer for damaged goods or a previous overcharging invoice.
Overdue charge
A document that lists overdue charges to be paid on an outstanding document that is past due. The option is available if the Overdue charges functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Credit write-off
A document that writes off a small credit of the customer.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the customer ledger document in the system; for a new document, the <NEW> string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

On hold
You can edit the document but cannot release it.
Pending print
You can edit the document but should print the document before releasing it. After the document is printed, the document’s status changes to Balanced. The document is created with this status if the Require invoice/note printing before release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window and if the Print invoices check box is selected for the customer for which the invoice is created in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Pending email
You can edit the document, but should send the document by email before releasing it. After the document is emailed, the document’s status changes to Balanced. The document is created with this status if the Require invoice/note emailing before release check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window and if the Send invoices by email check box is selected for the customer for which the invoice is created in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Balanced
The Detail total value of the document plus the VAT amount value equals the Balance value. The document may be released, or it may be edited and saved with the On hold or Balanced status.
Scheduled
The document is attached to a schedule. Scheduled documents are used as templates for generating similar documents, with the dates calculated according to the schedule settings. A document can be scheduled if its status is Balanced, or Pending print, or Pending email.
Voided
The document is no longer used for generating recurring transactions. The system changes the document status from Scheduled to Voided when a user has removed the document from the table on the Document list tab of the Recurring transactions (AR203500) window.
Open
The document has been released and cannot be edited. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
Closed
The balance of the document, which had been open, is equal to zero.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a draft.

A document with the On hold status may be edited and cannot be released.
Date

The date when the customer ledger document was created.

By default, for a new document, it is the current business date, but you can change the date.
Post period

The period to which the document should be posted.

By default, it is the current period, but you can change the period. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the Allow posting to closed periods check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Customer order The original reference number or ID assigned by the customer to the customer document (for informational purposes).
External ref. The external reference used in AutoInvoice.
Project

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This field appears if the Customer ledger workspace has been integrated with the Projects module.
Invoice text Any user-provided description of the customer ledger document.
Customer The customer associated with the document. When the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) and a child customer is selected in the child field first, the corresponding parent account is automatically populated in this field.
Child This field is only displayed when the functionality Paren-child customer relationship is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)
Consolidate Invoices

When this check box is selected, invoices for the current child customer will be sent to the parent account. This overrides the information and settings in the Invoice address and Invoice contact sections.

The following invoice information is retrieved from the parent when this check box is selected:

  • Invoice contact,
  • Invoice address,
  • Payment terms,
  • Payment method.

This element is disabled if the displayed account is a parent account.
Location

The location of the customer related to the document.

By default, it is the default location of the selected customer.
Contact The contact associated with the customer.
Currency

The currency of the document.

By default, it is the customer’s default currency, but it can be changed if the Enable currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Exchange rate

The amount corresponding to the Currency field, and the name of the field is only visible if you hover over the field.

By clicking the field, the Rate selection dialog box opens. See description below.
View base (button)

When you click View base the following happens:

  • All amounts will be converted to your base currency.
  • In the Currency column, the text will be displayed as your base currency.

Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the payment terms.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period, which the system calculates by using the payment terms.
Detail total The document total, which the system calculates for all line items in the Document details tab.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document.

This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT.

The VAT taxable amount is displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window.

If the check box is cleared, this field is empty.

This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Note

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.
VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT.

This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window. This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total The VAT amount of the document, as defined on the VAT details tab.
Balance For an open customer ledger document, the balance after any cash discount was taken. For a document used in the application process, this is the balance after the payments were applied.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original amount and the rounded amount.

The field only appears if the Invoice rounding functionality is activated.

For details, see: Set up document amount rounding.
Amount

The amount paid by the document.

The field appears for new documents if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. If the check box is cleared, then the field appears when the document status is Open.
Cash discount

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken on the document, which the system calculates based on the specified payment terms.

If a document has the On hold or Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and tax amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.
ROT or RUT deductible document Select this check box if the amount on this document is applicable for ROT or RUT deduction. The ROT and RUT details tab will appear and the columns RUT or ROT deductible, Item type, Type of work and Deductible amount will be displayed in the Document details tab table.
### The Rate selection dialog box
Element Description
Currency rate type ID

The currency rate type specified for the selected currency pair.

By default, it is the customer’s default currency rate type, but it can be changed if the Enable rate override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Effective date The date on which the currency rate in this row becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents

View the currency conversion.

Note

It’s possible to change the currency rate for an individual invoice here without changing the currency rate type, but the currency rate will restore back to original if this invoice is corrected. Therefore, it’s recommended to create a new currency rate instead, which can then be applied to the individual invoice ( See also: Add a currency rate ).
OK (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Document details tab On this tab, you can specify the line details for a new customer ledger document (invoice or note) or view the details of the document selected in the upper area of the window.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Element Description
Branch The branch that sells the item or provides the service.
Item ID The item ID of the line item, if applicable.
Transaction descr. Any comments relevant to the transaction. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of this item sold to the customer, expressed in the unit of measure specified in the UoM column.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the item.
Unit price

The unit price set for the item or service.

If you want to update the unit price automatically to the current value (that is, the applicable sales or default price), you can use the Recalculate prices action.

If you have modified the unit price and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system if you change the document date.
Manual amount

The manual amount, which is either the unit price multiplied by the quantity or a manually entered amount that may not be equal to the product of the unit price and the quantity.

If you want to update the manual amount automatically to the current value (that is, the applicable sales or default price multiplied by the item quantity), you can use the Recalculate prices action.

If you have modified the manual amount once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system if you change the document date.
Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

The system selects the Manual discount check box and calculates the discount amount after you have entered the percent manually and saved your changes or added a new line.
Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

The system selects the Manual discount check box and calculates the line amount after you have entered the discount amount manually and save your changes or added a new line.
Amount

The amount after the discount has been applied.

The value of this read-only field is calculated automatically by deducting the discount amount from the manual amount.
Manual discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually.

If you clear the check box, the system clears entered discount percent, or discount amount, or selected discount code.

This column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount code

The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line automatically or manually.

This column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The sales account used for the transaction. See also:About suggested sales accounts.
Description The description of the account.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount used to record this sale transaction.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated.

This column appears if the integration of the Projects module with Customer ledger has been enabled. That is, the Customer ledger check box must be selected in the Visibility settings section in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Salesperson ID The ID of the applicable salesperson.
Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the document created as a result of reversing an invoice, credit note, or debit note.

The column shows the ID of the deferral schedule associated with the reversed document.

Note

If a credit note document is created manually, then you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the reversed documents, this column remains empty.
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the stock item or non-stock item specified in this document line.

Upon release of the document, the system generates a deferral schedule (or schedules) based on the settings defined in this deferral code.

You can change the deferral code in this field manually if needed.

Note

If you change an MDA deferral code (the deferral code that indicates that an item is a package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider the item to not be a package and will ignore its components while generating a deferral schedule. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule for the item based on the settings of the specified non-MDA deferral code.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.
Term start date

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should start for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Term end date

The date when the process of the deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT category

The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction. See also:About suggested VAT categories.

By default, it is the VAT category defined for the non-stock or stock item specified in the line; otherwise, the VAT category is the default VAT category of the VAT zone associated with the selected location of the customer.
Commissionable

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission is paid on the line item amount.

The column is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
RUT or ROT deductible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line item is ROT or RUT deductible, according to its settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window. This only applies to non-stock items.
Item type

The Item type applies to a ROT or RUT deductible document. You can edit this column. The type of the item, as selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, the ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section, the Type field. For a stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

For a non-stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

When there is no Type selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, Other cost is the default type.
Type of work The type of work the line item is related to, according to the item’s settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) window. You can edit this column.
Deductible amount Read-only column. The amount your client can deduct for the line item, if the item is ROT or RUT deductible.
Start date Sets the start date for the invoice period that the item is invoiced for. You can manually set this value for invoices created in the Customer ledger workspace. You can set it per invoice line and/or it can be retrieved from the corresponding field in the Invoice period settings section on the Financial details tab. The Start date field is set in the e-invoice if the invoice is sent in the PEPPOL format.
End date Sets the end date for the invoice period that the item is invoiced for. You can manually set this value for invoices created in the Customer ledger workspace. You can set it per invoice line and/or it can be retrieved from the corresponding field in the Invoice period settings section on the Financial details tab. The End date field is set in the e-invoice if the invoice is sent in the PEPPOL format.
Order no. The order number retrieved from the accordant order, if applicable.
Shipment no. The shipment number retrieved from the accordant confirmed shipment, if applicable.
Order type The order type retrieved from the accordant order, if applicable.
Base qty The quantity of the item sold to the customer, expressed in the base unit of measure. This quantity is used for calculating discounts if The base UoM is selected in the Apply quantity discounts to field on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Disc. unit price The unit price after the discount percent has been applied.
Discount series

The ID of the discount series that has been applied to this line.

The column is hidden by default and only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expense date The date of the corresponding expense claim.
External link A read-only column displaying the external link for the line, collected from the corresponding sales order.
Line no. The number of the item line on the invoice.
Manual price

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unit price in this line has been corrected or specified manually.

The system automatically selects this check box for the line when you change the price in the Unit price column. If the check box is selected, when you change the unit of measure or quantity in the line, the unit price is not automatically refreshed with the price from the price list.

If you clear this check box, the system updates the unit price in the document line with the current price (if one is specified).
Order line no. The number of the item line on the corresponding order.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the customer ledger account and subaccount used in the document and the customer's VAT zone. For a released customer ledger document, it also contains the reference to the batch that implements transactions. ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions when the batch is posted.
Branch The branch with which this invoice or note is associated.
Customer ledger account The liability account specified as the customer ledger account for the selected location of the customer.
Customer ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used for the customer.
Original document If a credit note is currently selected in the top part of this window, this is the identifier of the document that was reversed with the credit note. If you click the link in this box, the current window opens with the details of the reversed document.
### The Payment information section
Element Description
Payment method The payment method that the customer will use to pay the document.
Description The identifier or description of the customer’s payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment ref. no The reference number of the payment.
Apply overdue charges

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will calculate overdue charges for this document. Clear the check box to exclude the document from the process of overdue charges being applied.

The check box is displayed after the document is released if the Apply overdue charges check box is selected for the selected customer in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Payment message Here you can enter a short message of alphanumeric characters.
### The VAT information section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone

The Customer VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone associated with the selected location of the customer.

If no VAT zone is specified for the customer location, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.

You can override the default value.
### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID The work group associated with the document, if any.
Owner The employee who owns (is responsible for) the document.
### The Invoice period dates section
Element Description
Start date The start date of the invoice period
End date The end date of the invoice period
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the Buyer’s financial accounts.
Originator document ref. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.
Contract document ref. The identification of a contract.
Customer project The project number requested by the customer. When a project number is entered in this field, it will replace the internal project number when sending to AutoInvoice for VismaXML and PEPPOL BIS. When nothing is filled in, the internal project number will be sent to AutoInvoice.
### The Dunning info section This section is only available if the **Dunning letter management** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Dunning letter date The date of the last released dunning letter in which the document was listed.
Dunning level The dunning level of the document.
Revoked

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is excluded from the dunning process. Clear the check box if you want the system to process the document when you prepare dunning letters.

The field is displayed if the By document option is selected in the Dunning process field on the Dunning settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
### The Debt collection information section This section is only available if you have a **Case number** entered. functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Case number The case number from debt collection for the invoice.
Case type

The case type from debt collection for the invoice. Collection notification

  • Collection
  • Payment notification
  • Legal collection
Case status

The case status from debt collection for the invoice.

  • Active
  • Paused
  • Closed, not paid
  • Closed and paid
Exclude from debt collection A check box that, if selected, will exclude the invoice from being sent to debt collection. This check box is inherited from the window Customers (AR303000). The check box will not be visible if the invoice has been sent to dept collection. This section will display information when you receive the case number from the debt collection.
### The Cash discount information section This section is only available if the document contains at least one tax that has the **Reduces taxable amount on early payment** option selected in the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window and if the document has a non-zero cash discount amount. The elements in this section display the calculated amounts if the document is paid during the cash discount period and a cash discount is applied to the document.
Element Description
Discounted doc. total The document total, which has been discounted due to the cash discount being applied; this occurs when the document has been paid within the cash discount period.
Discounted taxable total The taxable amount, which has been discounted due to the cash discount being applied to the document.
VAT on discounted price The VAT amount, which is calculated based on the price to which the cash discount has been applied.
## The Invoice address tab This tab displays the invoicing address of the customer and the contact information for invoicing purposes. The **Override address** and **Override contact** check boxes on this tab are selected by default if the **Invoice to default location** check box is not selected in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **Delivery settings** tab, for this customer. ### The Address section
Element Description
Override address

A check box you select to specify an invoice address other than the default invoice address of the customer.

When this check box is cleared, the invoice address to be used for this customer is the same as the default invoice address of the customer.
Address 1 The first line of the invoice address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoice address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoice address.
Postcode

The postcode for the invoicing address.

An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the customer’s invoice address.
Country The customer’s country.
County The state or province of the customer.
### The Contact information section
Element Description
Override contact

A check box you select to specify contact info other than the default contact information of the customer.

When this check box is cleared, the contact info to be used for this customer is the same as the default contact information of the customer.
Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Email The email address of the contact person.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was printed.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was emailed.
Do not print

A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing and the document is not included in the list of documents available for mass-printing in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.

The default value of this setting depends on the value of the Print invoices check box in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Do not email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing and the document is not included into the list of documents available for mass-emailing in the Send invoices (AR508000) window.

The default value of this setting depends on the value of the Send invoices by email check box in the Customers (AR303000) window.
### The Report settings section
Element Description
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the text in the Invoice text field on the invoice, and, if applicable, the sales order confirmation.
Print note on external sales documents Select this check box to print a note on external sales documents.
Print note on internal sales documents Select this check box to print a note on internal sales documents.
### The AutoInvoice section In this tab you find the AutoInvoice sending information. Here, you also find the invoice response message, if you have activated this functionality in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window, and the customer has activated this from their side. For more information, see: [About invoice response messages](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-response-messages/).
Element Description
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sending method Indicates which path the AutoInvoice was sent by: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice status

Shows the status of processing. Available statuses are:

Sent to AutoInvoice
Awaiting processing.
Pending
Awaiting delivery.
Sent
The invoice is sent.
Error
To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice sent by

Shows how the invoice was sent. Possible values are:

  • Sent inside home network
  • Sent by email
  • Sent by print
  • Sent by print PRIORITY
  • Sent by print WORLD
  • Sent e-Invoice
  • Sent to bank network
  • Sent by N/A
Business level status

The status of the invoice as sent by the customer. It can be one of the following:

  • Message acknowledgment
  • In process
  • Under query
  • Conditionally accepted
  • Rejected
  • Accepted
  • Paid

To get the current status, click the Actions button and select Poll invoice status.
Reason code The reason given by the customer to clarify the business level status. This text is predefined, see this status clarification reason list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible reason codes.
Reason Text entered manually by the customer.
Action code The action the customer wants you to take for this invoice. This text is predefined, see this status clarification action list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible action codes.
Action Text entered manually by the customer.
### The Direct debit information section
Element Description
Mandate ID Shows the direct debit information from the Direct debit tab of the Customers (AR303000) window. The selected mandate is the default one for the branch selected on the Financial details tab of the invoice. The list will display only mandates linked to current branch or mandates without a branch set.
Sent to AutoPay A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoPay.
Send to AutoPay A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be send to AutoPay.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab contains information related to the VAT to be paid on the invoice. The table is filled out automatically for the invoice or note when you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the VAT applied to the document.
Description The description of the VAT ID in clear language.
VAT rate The rate of the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the VAT, which is calculated at the document level.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT, which is calculated at the document level.
Reverse VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.
Statistical VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.
Pending VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT is pending and will be recognised after completing the VAT recognition process.
Include in VAT exempt total A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.
VAT type

The type of the VAT, which can be one of the following:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Salesperson commission tab This tab displays the commissions that can be calculated for the document. To calculate commissions, use the [Calculate commissions (AR505500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/calculate-commissions-ar505500/) window. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Default salesperson The ID of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line. By default, it is a salesperson associated with the selected location of the customer.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table showing the **Document**- and **Group**-level discounts that were applied to the document. The **Line**-level discounts applied to the document (if any) are shown on the **Document details** tab. This tab is only available if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the document. Selecting the check box updates the total and the line amounts of the document but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the table.
Discount code The ID (code) of the discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose series was applied to the document.
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually. The discount was selected from the Group- or Document- level discounts for which the Manual check box is selected in the Discount codes (AR209000) window.
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount.
Order type The type of order.
Order no. The order number.
## The Applications tab The content of this tab depends on the type of the document selected in the top part. If a document with the **Invoice**, **Debit note**, or **Overdue charge** type and the **Open** or **Closed** status is selected, this tab displays the list of customer ledger payments that have been applied to the document. For invoices and debit notes with the **Balanced** status, the tab displays the list of open payments or credit notes (if any) that can be applied to the document. You can specify the exact amount to be paid with each document or click the **Apply automatically** button in the table toolbar to let the system to decide how to pay the invoice. The specified applications are applied when you release the invoice. If a document with the **Credit note** type and the **Open** or **Closed** status is selected, the tab displays the list of customer ledger invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges the selected credit note is applied to. For credit notes with the **Balanced** status, you can specify invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges to which this credit note is applied when you release it. You add documents for application by adding a row to the table and selecting the document type and reference number. The system automatically fills in the **Amount paid** field with the possible value, but you can change this value for each added document. The specified applications are applied when you release the credit note.
Button Description
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can view the document details or application, depending on the document type.
Apply automatically

Automatically applies the available payments to the document.

The button is displayed if the Invoice type is selected in the top part.
### If you select Invoice, Debit note, or Overdue charge in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document that was applied.
Reference no. The reference number of the document. When you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) or Customer payments (AR302000) window opens in a pop-up window, depending on the document type, so that you can view the document details.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The amount of the cash discount that was deducted from the invoice amount in case the invoice was paid during the cash discount period.
Payment date The date of the payment application.
Balance The balance of the document after the payment was applied.
Invoice text The description of the payment document.
Currency The currency of the payment document.
Payment period The period to which the payment transactions are posted.
Payment ref. The reference number used by the customer on its payment document.
Status The status of the payment document.
VAT adjustment A check box automatically selected by the system if the customer ledger document specified in this row is subject to VAT adjustment.
VAT credit note

The reference number of the VAT credit note generated in the Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500) window for the customer ledger document specified in this row.

This reference number is specified by the system automatically once the VAT credit note is generated.
### If you select Credit note in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Document type The type of the document that was applied.
Reference no. The reference number of the applied document. By clicking this number, the document details window opens.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Date The date of the document.
Balance The balance of the document after the credit note was applied.
Invoice text The description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document transactions are posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number (for informational purposes).
Status The status of the document.
## The ROT and RUT details (Sweden) tab This tab is displayed when you select the **ROT or RUT deductible document** check box in the top part of this window. ### The ROT and RUT settings section
Element Description
Distribute automatically (check box) (check box) When this check box is selected, the amount will be distributed equally among the specified personal IDs.
RUT (check box) (check box) Select this option if the work is related to RUT (cleaning, maintenance, laundry) deduction.
ROT (check box) (check box) Select this check box if the work is related to ROT (repairs, conversion, extension) deduction. When you select this, you need to fill in either the Property field, or the Apartment and Corporate ID fields.
Apartment The apartment number.
Property The property number.
Corporate ID The housing cooperative’s ID.
### The ROT and RUT distribution section Here you can add the person(s) who will receive the tax deduction.
Column Description
Personal ID (YYYYMMDDNNNN) The personal ID in the format YYYYMMDDNNNN.
Amount The amount distributed to this person. If the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, you can edit this field and manually distribute the amount among the personal IDs.
Over 65 A check box that you select to indicate that this person is over 65 years old. This is not done automatically.
### The ROT and RUT totals section
Elemant Description
Total deductible amount The total amount that is tax deductible.
Other cost The total amount for items of the Other cost type, including VAT.
Material cost The total amount for items of the Material cost type, including VAT.
Work price The total price of labour hours (items of the Service type), including VAT. This is the amount eligible for tax deduction.
Distributed amount or Undistributed amount

When the Distribute automatically check box is selected, this will display the total amount distributed among the specified personal IDs.

When the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, this will display the amount still to be distributed manually among the specified personal IDs.
### The Balancing documents for ROT and RUT deduction section This section appears after the invoice is balanced, which is either after releasing the invoice or when sending the claim, depending on your setting for **Balance invoices on** on the **ROT and RUT settings (Sweden)** tab in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. You can also invoke the balancing of invoices manually by using the **Balance** action in the [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/) window.
Element Description
Balancing credit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing credit note to the customer, with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
Balancing debit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing debit note to Skatteverket (The Swedish Tax Agency), with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
## The Attachments tab
Button Description
View file Opens the File maintenance (SM202510) window.
Column Description
Send the file to AutoInvoice The selected files will be attached to the invoice.
Name The name of the attachment.
Created by The person who added the attachment.
Creation time The date and time the attachment was created.
Comment Shows the comment that you can enter in the File maintenance (SM202510) window.
File size The size of the attached file.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales prices (AR202000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000 page You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales prices (AR202000) You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to review and edit all prices for items matching the selected criteria. Changes made here become effective immediately. Also, with one click, you can create a price worksheet containing all prices for items matching the selected criteria. For more information on sales prices, see: [Managing sales prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create price worksheet

Navigates to the Sales price worksheets (AR202010) window, where you proceed working with a price worksheet containing all price records matching the criteria that you have selected in the current window. By default, the new worksheet is created with the On hold status and the current business date.

Note

If the selection of records contains multiple records defined for the same item, but effective on different dates, the system forces you to specify particular date in the Effective as of field to eliminate duplicates (all records in the worksheet are to be effective on the same date.)
## The top part In this part, you can select sales prices for viewing and possibly revising by their price type, item, and effective date. You can display only the prices of items assigned to your work group (or another specific work group), or you can display only the prices of the items assigned to you.
Element Description
Price type

The type of prices you want to view. Select one of the following options:

All prices
Prices of all available types are displayed.
Base
Prices of the base type are displayed. The base price is used if there are no other more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Customer-specific prices are displayed. You can select a particular customer account in the Price code field to create a price list for this customer or to narrow the list of prices.
Customer price class
Prices specific to the price classes are displayed. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a price list for all customers from this price class or to narrow the list of prices. For an item, you can set different prices for different customer price classes, which can be created and modified in the Customer price classes (AR208000) window.
Price code/Customer The customer or a customer price class for which you want to create or edit a price list. This field is available if the Customer or the Customer price class option is selected in the Price type field.
Effective as of A date that you select to view or edit prices effective on this exact date.
Item class ID The class of stock or non-stock items, by its ID, for which you want to review sales price information. Leave the field blank to view information on items of all item classes.
Item ID The item for which you want to view or edit prices.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price applies.
Price class The item price class of the items for which you want to review sales price information. You can leave the field blank to view information on items in all item price classes.
Price manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use as follows to select the price manager whose items you want to view:

  • Select the Me check box to view the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another username to view the items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the fields blank to view items assigned to all users of the selected price work group or all groups.
Price work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the price work group of the price manager of the items you want to view:

  • Select the My check box to view the items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Clear the My check box and select a price work group in the unlabelled field to display the items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group).
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the items assigned to all price work groups.
## The Sales prices table This table displays the sales prices for items that match the criteria you have specified. You can view and edit the existing items and add new records.
Column Description
Price type The price type of the item: Base, Customer, or Customer price class.
Price code/Customer Depending on the price type, the price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class. If the price type is Base, Price code is empty.
Price code description Depending on the price type, the price code description is the customer name or customer price class description.
Item ID The ID of the stock or non-stock item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price applies.
Promotion A check box that indicates (if selected) that the price for this item is promotional. Promotional prices, which may overlap with regular prices, should have expiration dates after which they are not used.
Break qty.

The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with the specific price.

This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Price

The price for the item, which becomes effective immediately after you save your changes in this window. You can set any price as long as minimum markup validation is not configured for the Inventory workspace, which is the case when the No validation option is selected in the Validate min. markup field in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.

If minimal mark up validation is configured (that is, if the Warning or Set to minimum option is selected in the Validate min. markup field) and you enter a pending price lower than that allowed by the Min. markup % value for the item, you will get a warning or the pending price will be set to the minimum allowed.

The Min. markup % for the item is specified on the Price/cost information tab in the Stock items (IN202500) window or the similarly named tab in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT

The VAT amount that is included in the sales price. (This functionality can be used in countries where value-added or similar VATs are enforced.) This VAT will be used to correct the list of VATs that apply to a sales order line: If the list of VATs that apply to the sales order doesn’t include this VAT, the VAT amount will be deducted from the price.

For details, see: Sales price calculation.
Effective date The date when the price became effective.
Expiration date The date when the price expires.
Alt. item ID

The alternative ID of the item. You can upload prices in worksheets with alternative item IDs instead of item identifiers defined in the system, and to create alternative item IDs for stock items on release of worksheets.

To enable alternative item IDs, select the Load sales prices by alternative item ID check box on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales price worksheets (AR202010) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-price-worksheets-ar202010 page You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales price worksheets (AR202010) You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create sales price worksheets. By using a worksheet, you can make changes to prices in a batch. Prices defined in a worksheet update sales prices when you release the worksheet; before you release it, you can save the changes. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the **Effective date** field. Also, you can create a worksheet with promotional prices and set an expiration date for the promotion. You can use a worksheet to calculate the pending prices for multiple items by using the price basis you specify. For more information on sales prices, see: [Manage sales prices - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/manage-sales-prices-overview/). You can populate a worksheet by manually adding new rows, uploading prices from an Excel file, using Visma Net import scenarios, and clicking the **Add item** and **Copy prices** buttons. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release

Updates sales price records. The release process validates records, ensuring that the following criteria are met:

  • Pending prices should be set for all records. If you do not want to update a price, delete the row from the table.
  • Regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure (UoM), and currency may not overlap in time.
  • Promotional prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time.
Note

Promotional and regular prices for the same combination of a price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure, and currency may overlap each other in time.
## The top part Here, you can select a prices worksheet by its reference number to view its information, or you can create a worksheet.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the worksheet in the system; for a new document, the NEW string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated when you save the document. The number series used is defined in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status

The status of the worksheet, which is one of the following:

On hold
Indicates that a user can edit the worksheet but cannot release it. The Hold check box is selected, and you should clear the check box when you are ready to release the worksheet.
Open
Indicates that the worksheet is ready to be released, but can be edited. The Hold check box is cleared. With the Open status, you can edit price records one by one, but you cannot use the Add item, Copy prices and Calculate pending prices buttons in the table toolbar.
Released
Indicates that the prices defined in the worksheet are added to the sales prices records. Prices in the released worksheet become effective on the date you have specified in the Effective date field.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the worksheet is a draft. Clear the check box to change the status of a worksheet from On hold to Open.
Description A brief description of the worksheet.
Effective date The date when the prices defined in the worksheet become effective.
Promotional A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices defined in the worksheet are promotional and an expiration date must be specified. With the check box selected, the Overwrite overlapping prices check box is selected automatically and not available for editing.
Expiration date The date when promotional prices expire. This field becomes available if the Promotional check box is selected.
Overwrite overlapping prices

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices whose effective dates overlap with the effective dates of the worksheet will be overwritten by the prices defined in the worksheet.

Make the check box available by enabling retention of prices:

  1. Go to the Customer ledger preferences window, Price/discount settings tab
  2. Set Retention type to Fixed number of months
  3. Make sure the Promotional check box is cleared

Overwrite overlapping prices check box is selected automatically and not available for editing if:

  • the retention of prices is disabled
  • the Promotional check box is selected
## The Sales prices worksheet table This table displays the sales prices of items in the selected worksheet. You can view the existing items, upload the listed items with their pricing information, add items from inventory, or copy the existing list to another currency. For all the listed items, you can manually define new pending prices for all units used for the item, or you can direct the system to perform calculation of new pending prices.
Button Description
Add item Opens the Add item to worksheet dialog box so that you can load the list of items from the Inventory workspace.
Copy prices Opens the Copy prices dialog box so that you can copy prices from the selection you specify to a new price worksheet for another customer or customer price class.
Calculate pending prices Opens the Calculate pending prices dialog box so that you can calculate new pending prices or recalculate (update) pending prices by using the selected price basis.
Column Description
Price type The price type of the item: Base, Customer, or Customer price class.
Price code Depending on the price type, the price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class. If the price type is Base, Price code is empty.
Item ID The ID of the stock or non-stock item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse for which the price is defined. If this field is empty, the price applies to all warehouses. This column appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Break qty. The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with a specific price. This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Source price The price that serves as a source for calculating pending price of an item. When you add a new record, the value corresponds to the default price of the item, for which you add the record to the worksheet. However, when you are adding records by using the Copy prices dialog box, the value depends on the selection of a source.
Pending price The pending price for the item. You can set any price here and it becomes effective immediately after you release the worksheet.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT The VAT whose amount is included in the sales price. (This functionality can be used in countries where value-added or similar taxes are enforced.) This VAT will be used to correct the list of VATs that apply to a sales order line: If the list of taxes that apply to the sales order doesn’t include this VAT, the VAT amount will be deducted from the price. For details, see: About sales price calculation.
Alt. item ID

The alternative ID of the stock or non-stock item for which you want to define the price. The system will search for the stock or non-stock item by the alternative item ID you specify in this column and populate the Item ID, Description, and UoM columns of the row with the settings of the item it finds. If the system does not find the specified alternative ID, when the price worksheet is released, the system will create a global alternative item ID and assign it to the item with the item ID that is specified in this row of the worksheet.

This column is hidden by default and appears if the Load sales prices by alternative item ID check box is selected on the Price/discount settings tab in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window. For more information, see About item cross-references.
## The Add item to worksheet dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Add item** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can upload the list of items that match the criteria you have selected, with their default price information from the Inventory workspace. Each added item is assigned the price code and currency you specify in the dialog box.
Element Description
Item The item or items. Start typing in the field, and the system displays the list of items that contain the string you have typed in their identifier or description.
Item class ID The identifier of the class of stock or non-stock items that you want to add to a worksheet. Leave the field blank to add items of all item classes.
Price class ID The ID of the item price class of the items that you want to add to a worksheet. You can leave the field blank to add items in all item price classes.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use as follows to select the product manager whose items you want to add:

  • Select the Me check box to add the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Deselect the Me check box and select another username to add the items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the fields blank to add items assigned to all users of the selected price work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the price work group of the price manager of the items you want to add:

  • Select the My check box to add the items assigned to your price work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Deselect the My check box and select a price work group in the field to add the items assigned to the price work group (or to a particular price manager, if you select one, in the selected group).
  • Leave the field blank and deselect the check box to add the items assigned to all price work groups.
### The Price type to add section
Element Description
Price type

The type of price you want to assign to newly added items. Select one the following options:

Base
The base type is assigned to newly added items. The base price is used if there are no other more specific prices defined (promotional or customer-specific). This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
The customer-specific price type is assigned to newly added items. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to create a price worksheet for this customer.
Customer price class
The price class-specific price type is assigned to newly added items. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a price worksheet for all customers from this price class.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) for which you want to create a price worksheet.
Currency The currency to be assigned to the prices of newly added items.
Warehouse The warehouse for which the price is defined. If this field is empty, the price applies to all warehouses. This column appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The table
Element Description
Item ID The identifier of the stock or non-stock item.
Item class ID The identifier of the class of stock or non-stock items.
Description The description of the stock or non-stock item.
Price class ID The identifier of the item price class.
Price work group The identifier of the price work group.
Price manager The price manager responsible for the pricing policy.
Add (button) Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet. The dialog box stays open so that you can change selection criteria and add more items. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Copy prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Copy prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can add records to the currently selected worksheet, by copying items that match selection criteria and assigning the specified price code and currency to copied records. If source and destination currencies are different, you specify the type and date of the rate to be used for currency conversion.
Element Description
Price type

The price type of items you want to copy. Select one of the following options:

Base
Items with the base type are to be copied. This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Items with a customer-specific price type are to be copied. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to narrow the selection.
Customer price class
Items with a price class-specific price type are to be copied. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to narrow the selection.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) whose items you want to copy.
Source currency The currency of the items you want to copy.
Warehouse The warehouse whose prices should be copied. If this box is empty, the system will copy only the prices that have no warehouse specified. This field appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Effective as of The date that the effective date of the item prices should match.
Promotional price A check box that you select to copy items that have promotional prices.
### The Destination section
Element Description
Price type

The price type you want to assign to copies of items. Select one the following options:

Base
Items with the base type are to be copied. This price type does not have any price codes.
Customer
Copies are assigned with a customer-specific price type. You can select a particular customer in the Price code field to create a worksheet for the customer. You cannot change the source currency of items when you copy customer-specific prices.
Customer price class
Copies are assigned with a price class-specific price type. You can select a particular price class in the Price code field to create a worksheet for the customer. You can also specify a new currency in the Destination currency field.
Price code The price code is the identifier of the customer or a customer price class (depending on the option selected in the Price type field) you want to assign to copies of items.
Destination currency The currency to which you want to copy prices. If the source and destination currencies are different, you should specify conversion details in the Currency conversion section.
Warehouse The warehouse to which the copied prices will be assigned. This field appears if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Currency conversion section
Element Description
Rate type The rate type to be used for currency conversion.
Currency effective date The date when the exchange rate for the destination currency becomes effective.
Copy (button) Copies the selected items, adds the copied items to the currently selected worksheet, and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all items added.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Calculate pending prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Calculate pending prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can calculate the new pending prices in the worksheet by using the selected price basis.
Element Description
% of original price The percentage at which the new pending prices will be calculated by using the selected price basis. By default, this is 100%, which reflects no change. If you specified 98%, the new prices would be 98% of the price selected as basis.
Decimal places The number of places after the decimal point to be shown for prices.
Update with zero price when basis is zero The check box the indicates, if selected, that the pending price parameter of the price record will be updated with the zero value if the selected price basis for this record is zero.
### The Price basis section
Element Description
Last cost + markup %

An option that you select to calculate prices based on the stock items’ last costs increased by the mark up percentage specified for the items.

Note

The option is not applicable for non-stock items.
Average/standard cost + markup % An option that you select to calculate prices based on the items’ average/standard costs increased by the markup percentage specified for the stock items. In case of non-stock items, the system uses the current cost, instead of the average or standard cost.
Source price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the values specified in the Source price column.
List price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the manufacturer’s suggested retail price.
Pending price An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on currently pending prices.
Replacement cost An option that you select to calculate pending prices based on the item’s replacement cost.
Update (button) Updates all pending prices in the currently selected worksheet with the new values.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without updating prices.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Salespersons (AR205000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/salespersons-ar205000 page You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Salespersons (AR205000) You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create new salesperson accounts and to modify existing accounts. For more information, see: [About commission configuration and calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-commissions/about-commission-configuration-and-calculation/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can create a new salesperson account or select an existing salesperson account for viewing or editing its settings.
Element Description
Salesperson ID

The unique identifier of the salesperson.

Requirements for the ID are set by the SALESPER segmented key.

For more information, see: About ID segmentation.
Is active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the salesperson account is active.
Name The salesperson’s name as it should appear on documents.
Default commission %

The default percent of commission to be used for the salesperson.

The field is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Sales sub. The subaccount associated with the salesperson.
## The Customers tab This tab contains a list of the salesperson's customers, and the applicable location and the commission percentage associated with each.
Column Description
Customer no. The customer’s unique identifier. You can select a customer from the list of available customers.
Customer name A read-only column showing the customer’s name as it should appear on the documents.
Location A read-only column with the default location of the customer with whom the salesperson works.
Location name A read-only column that displays the name of the location.
Commission %

The commission percent on sales for the particular customer.

The field is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default When this check box is selected, this salesperson is the default salesperson of the customer.
## The Commission history tab This tab displays the history of commissions for the salesperson. The tab is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Button Description
View details Navigates to the Commission details (AR403000) window and displays the details of the selected document.
Column Description
Commission period The commission period in which the commission was incurred. The commission periods are set in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Commissionable amount The amount used for commission calculation during the period. The commission is calculated on an invoice amount before VAT.
Commission amount The amount of commissions earned during the period.
Payroll processed date

The date when the commission was processed in the Payroll module.

This column is available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales profitability analysis (AR409000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000 page By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability analysis (AR409000) By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view and export all the details you may need to analyse sales profitability. You specify the branch and the time range for which you want to get data, and the system displays the details of the transactions generated by the system when documents were released within the selected time frame. You can specify additional criteria to narrow the list of transactions. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify the branch and the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions, as well as other criteria to determine which transactions are listed.
Element Description
Branch The branch for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Date from The starting date in the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Date to The ending date in the date range for which you want to view the list of transactions.
Completed transactions only A check box that indicates (if selected) that only completed transactions will be displayed. A transaction is considered completed if the inventory issue for the stock item sold in this transaction is released.
Salesperson The identifier and name of the salesperson that was involved in sales for the transactions to be listed. Leave the field blank to view broader range of results.
Item class The item class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all item classes.
Item The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customer classes.
Customer The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customers.
## The table This table contains the list of transactions posted during the date range specified in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch for which the transaction belongs.
Date The date of the invoice to which the transaction belongs.
Net sale The net sale amount of the sold item.
Cost

A value that is one of the following:

  • If a non-stock item is sold with the transaction, the item’s extended price
  • If a stock item is sold and the transaction is not completed, the item’s estimated cost
  • If a stock item is sold and the transaction is completed, the item’s final cost
Margin The difference between the net sale value and the cost.
Margin % A percentage of margin to net sale ratio.
Completed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction is completed. That is, the inventory issue for a stock item sold with this transaction is released. If a non-stock item is sold, the transaction could not be completed.
Sales order no. The reference number of the sales order involved. Click the link to view the details of the sales order.
Sales order type The type of the sales order involved.
Type The type of the document whose release triggered the transaction generation (invoice or cash sale).
Item ID The identifier of the sold item.
Item description The description of the sold item.
Customer class The description of the customer class of the customer who purchased the item.
Customer The name of the customer who purchased the item.
Salesperson The name of the salesperson associated with the sale of the item.
Branch ID The identifier of the branch.
Customer no. The identifier of the customer who purchased the item.
Customer class ID The identifier of the customer class.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction is released.
Item class The item class description to which the sold item is assigned.
Row number The line number in this list.
Item class ID The identifier of the item class.
Salesperson ID The identifier of the salesperson associated with the sale of the item.

Related pages

Windows

 Statement cycles (AR202800) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800 page You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement cycles (AR202800) You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create statement cycles, which make it possible to track customers' outstanding balances and send electronic or printed statements to the customers. You can define four ageing periods for customer ledger documents and use them to prepare a customer ledger ageing schedule at the end of each month. By analysing your customer ledger ageing schedule, you can more easily identify potential cash flow problems. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Regenerate last statement Initiates the process of again generating the most recent statement with an updated date.
## The General settings section
Element Description
Cycle ID The unique identifier of the cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used.
Description A detailed description of the statement cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used.
Schedule type

The day when the statement should be generated. The following options are available:

Weekly:
The statement will be generated each week, on the day specified in the Day of week 1 field.
Twice a month
The statement will be generated twice a month, on the days specified in the Day of month 1 and the Day of month 2 fields.
A fixed day of the month
The statement will be generated on the day specified in the Day of month 1 field.
The end of the month
The statement will be generated on the last day of each month.
The end of the financial period:
The statement will be generated on the last day of each financial period of the current financial year.
Day of month 1 The day of each month when the statement should be generated. The field is available if either Fixed day of the month or Twice a month is selected in the Schedule type field.
Day of month 2 The day of each month when the statement should be generated for the second time. This field is available only if the Twice a month option is selected.
Day of the week The day of each week when the statement should be generated. This field is available only if Weekly is selected in the Schedule type field. The default value is Sunday.
Last statement date A read-only field that displays the date when the statement was generated most recently.
Require payment application before statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payments should be applied to invoices before each statement is processed.
Print empty statements If you do not want the statements with no details to be printed, unselect this check box for statement cycles. After the process of preparing the statement, you can view these statements with the Do not print and Do not email check boxes selected in the Statement history details (AR404300), Customer statement history (AR404600), and Print statements (AR503500) window.
## The Ageing section You use this section to define four periods for ageing the customer ledger document. Each period is defined by the following elements.
Element Description
Use financial periods for ageing A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system uses the financial periods as ageing periods in customer statements and customer ledger ageing reports. If this check box is selected, the system uses the financial period to which the statement date or the ageing date belongs as the first ageing period.
Ageing period (days)

In the fields you can select the current period or the number of days the documents to be included overdue.

  • The first period includes documents that are past due or outstanding for the specified number of days or fewer.
  • The second and third periods include documents that are past due or outstanding for the number of days (or fewer) specified in this box and greater than the number of days specified for the previous period.
  • The fourth period includes documents that are more than x days past due or outstanding, where x is the number of days specified for the third period.
Description You can write and edit the descriptions of the defined ageing periods. The descriptions will be printed to the customer statement reports.
Age based on Select whether the age of the documents is based on their due date or document date.
## The Finance charge settings section
Element Description
Apply overdue charges A check box that indicates (if selected) that calculation of overdue charges is required for all customers assigned to the statement cycle.
Require overdue charge calculation before statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should calculate overdue charges before processing a statement.
Overdue charge ID The overdue charges to be used for customers assigned to the statement cycle. The overdue charges that are actually applied depend on whether the Set default overdue charges by statement cycle check box in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window is selected; if not, the charges from the customer class will be applied.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Statement history details (AR404300) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-details-ar404300 page You can use this window to view the statement history for each statement cycle. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement history details (AR404300) You can use this window to view the statement history for each statement cycle. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can easily drill down to the details of the statement. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Customer statement history Navigates to the Customer statement history (AR404600) window.
Print statement Navigates to the Customer statement report generated for the selected customer.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select the statement cycle and the date when the statement was printed.
Element Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle by its ID.
Statement date The date when the statement was printed.
## The table The table shows the list of customers included in the statement printed on the specified date, along with such details as the balance and the currency used by the customer.
Column Description
Customer The unique identifier of the customer account in the system.
Customer name The name of the customer as it is stored in the system.
Statement balance The customer’s balance (in the base currency) on the statement.
Overdue balance The total amount that is overdue.
Currency One of currencies used by the customer.
FC statement balance The customer balance in the specified currency.
FC overdue balance The overdue amount in the specified currency.
FC statement A check box that indicates (if selected) that the multi-currency format of statement should be used.
Do not print A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be printed in accordance with the customer settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was printed.
Do not email A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement should not be sent by email.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the statement was sent by email.
On-demand statement When this check box is selected, you can generate statements on demand.
Prepared on The date when the statement was prepared.

Related pages

Windows

 Statement history summary (AR404000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-history-summary-ar404000 page In this window, you can view the history of statements for each statement cycle during the specified period of time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Statement history summary (AR404000) In this window, you can view the history of statements for each statement cycle during the specified period of time. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can easily drill down to the details of each statement.
Button Description
Statement history details Navigates to the Statement history details (AR404300) window.
Print statements Navigates to the Print statements (AR503500) report.
## The top part In this part, you can select the statement cycle and the date range for which you want to display data.
Element Description
Statement cycle The statement cycle for which data will be displayed. If you leave the field blank, information for all statement cycles will be displayed.
Include on-demand statements When this is selected, on-demand statements will also be displayed in the summary.
Start date The start date of the date range. By default, it is the start day of the current financial year.
End date The end date of the date range. By default, it is the current business date.
## The table This table displays the list of statements issued during the specified period of time.
Column Description
Statement cycle ID The ID of the statement cycle.
Statement date The date of the statement.
Description The description of the statement cycle.
Number of documents The number of documents included into the statement.
To print The number of statements requiring printing in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Printed The number of statements printed in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
To email The number of statements requiring emailing in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed The number of statements emailed in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
No action The number of statements requiring no action in accordance with the settings in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Email completion (%) The percentage of statements that have been emailed (among all statements to be emailed).
Print completion (%) The percentage of statements that have been printed (among all statements to be printed).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Task (CR306020) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/task-cr306020 page By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Task (CR306020) By using this window, you can create a new task or view the details of an existing task. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Complete Changes the status of the task to Completed. This action is available only to the task owner.
Complete and follow-up Changes the task status to Completed and creates an task that has the same details as the current one but the Not started status. This action is available only to the task owner.
Cancel Cancels the task, changing its status to Cancelled. This action is available only to the user who created the task.
## The Details tab By using this tab, you can create a new task and view or edit the details of an existing task.
Element Description
Summary The task summary description, which can be used as its ID.
Start date The start date and time of the task.
Internal A check box that, if selected, indicates that the task is hidden from external users.
Due date The date and time when the task should be completed.
Completion (%) The estimation of the task completion, expressed as a percent.
Work group The workgroup the task is assigned to.
Owner The user the task is assigned to. By default, it shows the employee ID of the task creator.
Reminder This check box is not in use.
Remind at (date) This field is not in use.
Related entity description

The entity that this activity is associated with. For example: If you are creating an activity that is associated with a lead, this lead will be specified in the field by default.

To adjust the value, click the magnifier icon; as a result, the Select entity dialog box opens.
Parent A read-only field displaying the parent task this task is related to via the Related tasks tab of the parent task, if applicable.
Project The project associated with this task (or the non-project code indicating that this task is not associated with any project defined to the system); appears if the Projects module is activated.
Project task The particular project task with which this task is associated; appears if the Projects module has been activated. You can select only a project task of the selected project.
Priority The priority level of the task: Low, Normal, or High. These levels are used for informational purposes only; no specific functionality is associated with them.
Status

The status of the task. Select one of the following options:

Open
The task has been assigned to an owner.
Draft
The task has not been assigned yet.
In process
The task owner has started processing the task.
Cancelled
The user who created the task has cancelled it.
Completed
The task owner has finished processing the task.
Category The category of the task.
Completed at The date and time of task completion.
Time spent The time in days, hours, and minutes from task creation to completion.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable time The number of invoiceable hours from task creation to completion.
Invoiceable overtime The number of billable overtime hours spent on the task.
You can use the editor area, found at the bottom of the tab, to add comments about the task. You can edit the text by using the buttons in the formatting toolbar, which give you the ability to edit text (including cut, copy, and paste), change its typographical treatment (including using boldface, italics, superscript, subscript, colour and highlighting), and format it (changing its alignment, indenting, or creating lists). ### The Select entity dialog box By using this dialog box, you can specify which entity relates to the activity whose data you are adjusting.
Element Description
Type The type of the related entity.
Entity The related entity of the type.
OK A button that causes your changes to be accepted and closes the dialog box.
Cancel A button that closes the dialog box and cancels the selection.
## The Related activities tab This tab displays a table that shows activities related to the task.
Button Description
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window, from which you can send an email.
Add activity Contains a menu with options that correspond to the activity types. By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, which you use to create an activity of the corresponding type.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity. With an email, it matches the content of the email subject field.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Category The category of the task.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time spent on the activity can be invoiced.
Time spent The number of hours spent to complete the activity.
Overtime The number of hours outside of work hours spent to complete the activity.
Invoiceable time The number of hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Invoiceable overtime The number of overtime hours spent to complete the activity that can be invoiced.
Work group The work group that the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The name of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the activity has been released.
## The Related tasks tab This tab lists the tasks that are related to this task. This task will be set as the **Parent** for the tasks added here.
Button Description
Add related task Opens the Task (CR306020) window in a pop-up window.
Column Description
Subject The description of the task and a link to it.
Status The status of the task.
Start date The start date of the task.
Due date The due date of the task.
Completed at The date and time when the task was actually completed.
Update contract prices (CT503000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-contract-prices-ct503000 page You can use this window to update prices for contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update contract prices (CT503000) You can use this window to update prices for contracts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to update prices for contracts. You change pricing options of a contract item, by using the [Contract items (CT201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-items-ct201000/) window. Then, by using this window, you view the list of contracts that include modified contract item and select those you want to update with these changes. If a contract has the **Active** status you can update pricing options of a setup and renewal items. If a contract has the **Draft** or **Pending activation** status you can update pricing options of a setup, renewal, and recurring items. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Update Updates the contracts you have selected by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table.
Update all Updates all the contracts listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to select a modified contract item, and review its current pricing details and pricing details used in contracts that include the selected contract item.
Element Description
Item code The unique identifier of a contract item.
Setup pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the setup item, which can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the base price of the non-stock item.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Setup price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for setup, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Setup pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Renewal pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the renewal item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the renewal item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Renewal price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for renewal, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Renewal pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Recurring pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the recurring item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and can not be changed later in a contract
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Recurring price A read-only field that displays the contract item recurring price, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Recurring pricing and Item price/percent fields.
Extra usage pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy defined for the recurring item, which is applied to the price if the customer has exceeded the included quantity of the service. It can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field.
Item price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price for extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price.
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for extra usage, which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Extra usage pricing and Item price/percent fields.
## The table This table contains the list of contracts that include the contract item specified in the top part. You can compare the pricing options of the contract item displayed in the Selection area with those used in contracts. You can select contracts by using the check fields in the first column.
Column Description
Identifier A read-only field that displays the contract identifier.
Status A read-only field that displays the status of a contract.
Setup pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the setup item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percentage field to the price of the non-stock item.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the setup item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Setup price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for setup (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Setup pricing and Price/percent fields.
Renewal pricing

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the renewal item, which can be the one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field and then can be changed in a contract.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the renewal item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Renewal price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for renewal (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Renewal pricing and Price/percent fields.
Fixed recurring

The recurring invoicing policy. The following options are available:

None
recurring invoicing is not performed.
Prepaid
customer is invoiced at the beginning of scheduled invoicing period.
Postpaid
customer is invoiced at the end of scheduled invoicing period.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Recurring price A read-only field that displays the contract item recurring price (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Recurring pricing and Price/percent fields.
Usage price

A read-only field that displays the pricing policy currently used in the contract for the recurring item, which is applied to the price if the customer has exceeded the included quantity of the service. It can be one of the following options:

Use item price
The applicable sales price of the non-stock item is used. If a sales price is not found, the default price of the non-stock item is used. For details, see: About multiple price lists.
Percent of item price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the non-stock item price.
Percent of setup price
The price is a percentage calculated by applying the percent specified in the Item price/percent field to the contract item setup price.
Enter manually
The price is specified manually in the Item price/percent field.
Price/percent A read-only field that displays the recurring item price for extra usage or percent to be applied to the non-stock item price (currently used in the contract).
Extra usage price A read-only field that displays the contract item price for extra usage (currently used in the contract), which is calculated based on the settings specified in the Extra usage pricing and Price/percent fields.

Related pages

Windows

 Update discounts (AR502500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/update-discounts-ar502500 page You use this window to make pending discount series effective ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update discounts (AR502500) You use this window to make pending discount series effective ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Pending series will appear in the list only if their start date is sooner than the specified pending date. You can update all of them or only the selected ones. While it updates discounts, the system performs the following steps for each selected series: + Removes from the database the last series (the one used before the currently effective series), if any + Marks the currently effective series, if any, as the last one + Marks the pending series as the currently effective one > [!NOTE] > For each discount, effective series, if defined for the same time interval, should not have intersecting lists of customers, items, or other entities. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the discounts you have selected in the table, replacing the currently effective series with pending series whose start dates have reached the date specified in the Max. pending discount date field.
Process all Processes all the listed discounts, replacing the currently effective series with pending series whose start dates have reached the Max. pending discount date.
## The top part Here, you can select the latest start date for pending discount series to be made effective.
Element Description
Max. pending discount date The date used to select pending series for updating; only pending series with later start dates than this date will be updated.
## The table This table contains the discount series with start dates that have reached the **Max. pending discount date**.
Column Description
Discount code The code of the discount whose series can be processed.
Series The identifier of the pending series of the discount.
Description The description provided for the series.
Discount by The way the discount is expressed: by percentage or by amount.
Break by

The way the discount breakdown series is specified, which is one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by specified amounts.
Effective date The date when the discount series becomes effective and can be applied to sales orders and invoices.
Last update date The date when the discount was last updated.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Validate customer balances (AR509900) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/validate-customer-balances-ar509900 page In this window, you can validate customer balances, starting with the selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate customer balances (AR509900) In this window, you can validate customer balances, starting with the selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Validation entails recalculating the balances based on the history records (released customer ledger documents) and matching them to the customer balances stored in the database. The system also uses the open sales orders to validate whether the customer balances exceed the credit limits specified for these customers. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you validate the customer balances after you change the credit validation rules. > [!NOTE] > Also, you may run this process if there is any discrepancy between the customer balance and the total amount of all the released customer documents. Use the [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) window to view if there is any discrepancy; use the [Customer history (AR652000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-ar652000/) report for details on the customer account history. In the top part, you select a financial period (and, optionally, a customer class), and you can view the list of customers in the table. To validate the balances of all customers in the list, click **Process all**. To validate the balances of only particular customers, select the check boxes next to those customers and click **Process**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Recalculates the balances for the customers you have selected in the table.
Process all Recalculates the balances for all the customers listed in the table.
## The top part You use this part to select a financial period and a customer class for which you want to validate customer balances.
Element Description
Period The financial period starting which you want to validate customer balances. By default, the system selects the earliest financial period that is open in Customer ledger.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to validate customer balances. If you make no selection, customers of all classes will be displayed.
## The table This table lists all customers or the customers of the class you selected.
Button Description
View Customer Navigates to the Customers (AR303000) window and displays the selected customer’s account details.
Column Description
Customer no. The customer who has balance to be validated. Click the ID to navigate to the Customers (AR303000) window to see the selected customer’s account details.
Customer class The class to which the customer belongs.
Customer name The name of the customer.

Related pages

Windows

 Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/write-off-balances-and-credits-ar505000 page You use this window to write off balances or credits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) You use this window to write off balances or credits. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to write off balances or credits. You can select documents by customer, post period, and type of write-off operation. As a result of processing, the system does the following: 1. Generates documents of the **Balance write-off** or **Credit write-off** types depending on write-off operation you have selected. 1. Releases these documents regardless of the value of the **Hold documents on entry** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Generates batches of appropriate transactions with the **Unposted** or **Posted** status, depending on the value of the **Automatically post on release** check box in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. 1. Applies each generated document to the corresponding document that you have written balance or credit off and closes both documents. For more information, see: [Write-off methods - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-credit-policy/write-off-methods/write-off-methods-overview/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the write-offs for the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes the write-offs for all the listed documents.
## The top part You can use the elements in this part to narrow the list of documents displayed in the table.
Element Description
Type The type of operation. The following types are available: Credit write-off and Balance write-off.
Doc. date The date when the write-offs are performed.
Post period The period to which the write-off transactions should be posted.
Branch The branch for which you want to display data. By default, it is the branch a user is currently logged in. If a user clears the box value, the system displays the documents from all the branches to which the user has access to.
Customer The customer whose balances or credits will be written off. You can select a customer from the list or leave the field blank to view the documents of all the customers.
Reason code A reason code that defines an account and subaccount to be used for writing off credits or balances. By default, the system uses reason codes you specified in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Limit The maximum balance of a document that may be a subject to the selected write-off operation. By default, it is the value specified for the customer (if selected) in the Write-off limit field in the Customers (AR303000) window. You can enter the specific limit manually, if needed.
Selection total A read-only box that shows the total amount on the selected documents.
## The table This table displays documents that have a balance no greater than the amount specified in the **Limit** field and match other criteria specified in the Selection area. Review the documents that may be subject to write-off.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the document.
Type

The type of customer ledger document. The following types can be processed, if the type of operation is set to Balance write-off:

Invoice
Created for an invoice sent to the customer for goods sold or services provided.
Credit note
Used for a document that adjusts the credit amount in previous invoices.
Overdue charge
Used for overdue charges.

The following types can be processed, if the type of operation is set to Credit write-off:

Debit note
Created for a document that adjusts the debit amount in previous invoices.
Payment
Created for a payment received from the customer.
Prepayment
Created for a prepayment received from the customer
Ref. no. The identifier of the document. If you click the link, the system opens the Sales invoices (AR301000) or Customer payments (AR302000) window, depending on the type of the selected document, and displays the details of the selected customer ledger document.
Customer The customer for whom this document is intended.
Customer name The customer’s name.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The post period of the document.
Currency

The currency of the document.

This column is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Foreign currency balance

The open balance of the document in the foreign currency to which payment was not applied.

This column is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Foreign currency amount The amount in foreign currency.
Amount The amount in base currency.
Balance The open balance of the document in the base currency to which payment was not applied.
Balance % Percentage of balance from the amount
Invoice text A detailed description for the document in which the amount will be written off.
Reason code A reason code used.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer ledger reports /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger reports Customer ledger reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-ledger-reports-overview page With the wide variety of reports available for the Customer ledger workspace, you can promptly get vital information, analyse financial data by various criteria, review transactions efficiently, and track data edits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer ledger reports - overview With the wide variety of reports available for the Customer ledger workspace, you can promptly get vital information, analyse financial data by various criteria, review transactions efficiently, and track data edits. Some reports have a standard version and a multi-currency version. Because the Customer ledger workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, such as General ledger and Cash management, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. > [!NOTE] > Because the Customer ledger reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. When you print a supplier customer document and send it by email, the system will use the notification template set on the **Mailing settings** tab in the [Suppliers window](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) [Customers window](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/). ## Customer ledger reports The Customer ledger workspace includes the following reports: ### Balance + [Aged past due (AR631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000/): Lists the customers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days past due. + [Aged past due (currency) (AR631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100/): Displays the customers with outstanding foreign currency balances. The balances are broken down by days past due. + [Aged outstanding (AR631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/): Shows the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. + [Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances, with balances arranged by days outstanding. The foreign currency balances and amounts are shown in their original currency. + [Aged period sensitive (AR630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500/): Displays the list of customers with outstanding balances. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. + [Balance by customer (AR632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500/): Displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. + [Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000/): Displays the outstanding foreign currency balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. + [Balance by general ledger account (AR632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000/): Displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. Documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. ### Window + [Customer statement MC, Dutch (AR64205S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-dutch-ar64205s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Dutch. + [Customer statement MC, Danish (AR64206S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-danish-ar64206s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Danish. + [Customer statement MC, English (AR64201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-english-ar64201s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in English. + [Customer statement MC, Norwegian (AR64204S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-norwegian-ar64204s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Norwegian. + [Customer statement MC, Swedish (AR64213S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-swedish-ar64213s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Swedish. + [Customer statement MC, Swedish left address (AR64203S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-swedish-left-address-ar64203s/): Shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Swedish, with the address information on the left side. + [Invoice/note (AR641000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-note-ar641000/): Prints the invoice. + [Invoice - English (AR64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-english-ar64101s/): hows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. + [Invoice - Finnish (AR64102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-finnish-ar64102s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. + [Invoice - Swedish for Finland (AR64103S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-for-finland-ar64103s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. + [Invoice - Norwegian (AR64104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-norwegian-ar64104s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. + [Invoice - Dutch (AR64105S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-ar64105s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. + [Invoice - Danish (AR64106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-danish-ar64106s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. + [Invoice - Swedish left address (AR64108S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-left-address-ar64108s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. + [Invoice - Dutch pre-printed (AR64110S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-pre-printed-ar64110s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. + [Invoice - Swedish (AR64118S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-ar64118s/): Shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. + [Dunning letter (AR661000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000/): Displays dunning letters that have been generated. + [Dunning letter, Danish (AR66106S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-danish-ar66106s/) + [Dunning letter, Dutch (AR66105S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-dutch-ar66105s/) + [Dunning letter, Norwegian (AR66104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-norwegian-ar66104s/) + [Dunning letter, Swedish (AR66113S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-swedish-ar66113s/) + [Dunning letter, Swedish left address (AR66103S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-swedish-left-address-ar66103s/) + [Overdue charge (AR643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-ar643000/): Displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. + [Overdue charge, Danish (AR64306S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-danish-ar64306s/) + [Overdue charge, Dutch (AR64305S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-ar64305s/) + [Overdue charge, Dutch pre-printed (AR64310S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-pre-printed-ar64310s/) + [Overdue charge, English (AR64301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-english-ar64301s/) + [Overdue charge, Finnish (AR64302S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-finnish-ar64302s/) + [Overdue charge, Swedish (AR64318S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-ar64318s/) + [Overdue charge, Swedish for Finland (AR64303S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-for-finland-ar64303s/) + [Overdue charge, Swedish left address (AR64308S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-left-address-ar64308s/) ### Audit + [Customer documents (AR621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500/): Lists all the documents released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected customer (or all customers). + [Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000/): Shows the details of documents of the selected type (or all types) released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. + [Customer history (AR652000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-ar652000/): Shows the customer's balance history for the specified period of time. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. + [Customer history summary (AR652100)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-summary-ar652100/): Shows a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the date range you specify. + [Customer profiles (AR651000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-profiles-ar651000/): Shows all the details from the database of the selected customer account or all customer accounts. + [Customer list (AR40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-list-ar40101s/) + [Customer specification (AR65200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-specification-ar65200s/): Shows the customer balance specification for the selected customers. + [Customer summary (AR65050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s/): Lists all the customers with their current balances, default currency, payment terms, VAT zone, and other related information. + [Incoming payments (AR63050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/incoming-payments-ar63050s/): Shows the incoming payments for the selected cash account. + [Open customer ledger documents (AR656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000/): Lets you view and print the list of Customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. + [Unreleased transactions (AR611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ar611000/): Lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. You can choose a specific customer or view the documents for all customers. + [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500/): Displays, with all details, the list of customer ledger documents of the chosen type that were entered but not released. ### Analysis + [Daily sales profitability (AR676000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the profitability data for each day within the specified date range. + [Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by customer. + [Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to each customer during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales order. + [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to customers of each customer class during the specified date range. In detailed format, this report shows the data broken down by sales to particular customers. + [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales orders. + [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages on all sales to customers of each customer class during the specified date range. In detailed format, this report shows the data broken down by sales to particular customers. + [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/): Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by sales orders. + [Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000/): Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on item class basis on the sales occurred during the specified date range. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by stock items. Aged past due (AR631000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ar631000 section You use this report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due (AR631000) You use this report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the report shows open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the applicable statement cycle, while the balances that are not overdue are displayed in the **Current** column of the report. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates the same as or later than the ageing date are displayed in the **Current** column on this report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies.

By default, the current company is selected. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information for all classes.
Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.
Project The project to be reported on, if any.
Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.
Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected.

The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-currency-ar631100 section This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due (currency) (AR631100) This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this multi-currency report to determine which documents are overdue for payment and for how long. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the report shows open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are shown in the currency of the document and in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the applicable statement cycle, while the balances that are not overdue are displayed in the **Current** column of the report. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates the same as or later than the ageing date are displayed in the **Current** column on this report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information on all classes.
Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.
Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Aged period sensitive (AR630500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ar630500 section You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged period sensitive (AR630500) You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period. This report shows the documents (by statement cycle and by customer) that are outstanding at the end of the specified period, broken down by ageing periods. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the applicable statement cycle, while the balances that are not overdue are displayed in the **Current** column of the report. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates the same as or later than the ageing date are displayed in the **Current** column on this report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) windoww.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period The financial period the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents. By default, the current financial period is used.
Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information for all classes.
Group by parent account A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group. The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Aged outstanding (AR631500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500 section This report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (AR631500) This report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open general ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are displayed in the zero ageing period (the **Past due** column on the report), while the balances that are not overdue are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the statement cycle. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates earlier than the ageing date are displayed in the zero ageing period on the report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit memos are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that have passed from the document date through the **Aged on** date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information on all classes.
Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.
Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabledthe Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ar631600 section This multi-currency report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (currency) (AR631600) This multi-currency report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is available only if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. This multi-currency report is designed to show when you should expect to get payments for the outstanding documents. The report shows all open documents recorded in the system, regardless of the current business date or the date specified in the **Ageing date** field in the report window. That is, the reports show open customer ledger documents, even if they are posted to periods later than the ageing date period. The documents are grouped by statement cycle and by customer, broken down by ageing periods. The amounts are shown in the currency of the document and in the base currency. ## Calculating ageing periods The system calculates ageing periods for this report based on the date you select in the **Ageing date** field on the **Report parameters** tab of this report form and on the statement cycle settings specified in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window as follows: + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is selected for the statement cycle, the system will use aging periods that correspond to the financial periods; the zero aging period (the **Due date** column in the report) is the financial period of the **Ageing date** on the **Report parameters** tab. + If the **Use financial periods for ageing** check box is cleared for the statement cycle, the system will show the aging periods that are specified in the statement cycle. On the generated report, the selected financial period is displayed in the **Fin. period** field and the last date of the period is displayed in the **Aged on** field. ## Ageing outstanding documents The system distributes the open invoices, debit notes, and overdue charges over the financial periods or ageing periods depending on the statement cycle settings in the [Statement cycles (AR202800)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/statement-cycles-ar202800/) window: + If **Due date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the due dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The overdue balances are displayed in the zero ageing period (the **Past due** column on the report), while the balances that are not overdue are grouped by the ageing periods or financial periods specified for the statement cycle. + If **Document date** is selected in the **Age based on** field for the statement cycle, the system will compare the document dates of outstanding documents with the **Ageing date** date you specify in this report window. The balances of the documents with dates earlier than the ageing date are displayed in the zero ageing period on the report. Other outstanding balances are broken down by the number of days from the **Aged on** of the report through the document date. For more information, see: [About customer ledger ageing reports](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-customer-ledger-documents/about-customer-ledger-ageing-reports/). ## Ageing credit amounts In the report, the amounts of open payments, prepayments, and credit notes that are recorded to the future periods are aged by periods if the **Age credits** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If the credit amounts are aged, they are broken down by the number of days that will pass from the **Aged on** date through the document date. By default, the check box is cleared and the credit amounts show up in the **Current** column. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding customer documents.
Summary
To view outstanding customer balances.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer class

The customer class for which you want to display data.

Select a customer class from the list of customer classes, or leave the field blank to view information about all classes.
Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use when calculating the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current date is used, but you can select another date.
Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Balance by customer (AR632500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-ar632500 section This report displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by customer (AR632500) This report displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the outstanding balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account–subaccount pair and listed by reference number. You can easily see each document's dates, original amount, and balance after payment application. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Account summary
To view documents total of a customer that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by Customer ledger account and subaccount.
Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
Open + current period
To view documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
All documents (customer required)
To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a customer if you select this option.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period

The financial period for which you want to display data; you must specify a financial period.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.
Include applications A check box you select to include applied documents.
Consolidate data by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-customer-currency-ar633000 section This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by customer (currency) (AR633000) This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the outstanding foreign currency balances of the selected customer (or all customers) during the chosen period. For each customer, documents are grouped by account–subaccount pair and listed by reference number. You can easily see each document's dates, original amount, and balance after payment application. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Account summary
To view documents total of a customer that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by Customer ledger account and subaccount.
Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
Open + current period
To view documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
All documents (customer required)
To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a customer if you select this option.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period The financial period for which you want to display data; you must specify a financial period. The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Customer

The customer to be reported on, if any.

Select a customer by ID from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.
Include applications A check box you select to include applied documents.
Consolidate data by parent account A check box you select to consolidate data that is involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/balance-by-general-ledger-account-ar632000 section This report displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by general ledger account (AR632000) This report displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the balances of the customer ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the chosen period. Documents are grouped by account and subaccount pair and listed by their reference numbers. You can view each document's dates, original amount, and balance after payment application. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Account summary
To view documents total that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by customer ledger account and subaccount.
Customer summary
To view account documents total split by documents total of the customers.
Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by customer ledger account, subaccount, and customer account.
Open + current period
To view documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period grouped by customer ledger account, subaccount, and customer account.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period

The financial period for which you want to display data; you must specify a financial period.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Include applications A check box you select to include applied documents.
Group by parent account

A check box you select to group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account and display consolidated balance of the group.

The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality is enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For details, see: Manage parent-child relationships - overview.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Batch register customers (AR620500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-ar620500 section This report lists all the batches released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register customers (AR620500) This report lists all the batches released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists all the batches released in Customer ledger for the specified financial period. Transactions are listed by their date and shown with batch control totals in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger for which you want to display data.

You must select a ledger.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include unposted transactions A check box that indicates (if selected) that information about unposted transactions will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Batch register customers (detailed) (AR621000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/batch-register-customers-detailed-ar621000 section This report displays all customer ledger batches posted during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register customers (detailed) (AR621000) This report displays all customer ledger batches posted during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays all customer ledger batches posted during the specified financial period. Batch details include accounts, subaccounts, document reference numbers, and debit and credit amounts. The batches are listed by their dates. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger for which you want to display data.

You must select a ledger.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include unposted transactions A check box that indicates (if selected) that information about unposted transactions will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Customer documents (AR621500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-ar621500 section This report lists all the documents released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) that meet the criteria you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer documents (AR621500) This report lists all the documents released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) that meet the criteria you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Document type

The type of document you want to view.

Select one of the available types, or leave the field blank to view documents of all types.
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a customer, or leave the field blank to view documents of all customers.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-documents-detailed-ar622000 section This report shows the details of documents of the selected type (or of all types) released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer documents (detailed) (AR622000) This report shows the details of documents of the selected type (or of all types) released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses Open, Closed, and Reserved ) for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the details of documents of the selected type (or of all types) released in Customer ledger (that is, with statuses **Open**, **Closed**, and **Reserved**) for the specified financial period. Documents are arranged by type, date, and customer. The details include the batch number and batch transactions. Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger for which you want to display data.

You must select a ledger.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Document type

The type of document you want to view.

Select one of the available types, or leave the field blank to view documents of all types.
Ref. no.

The reference number of the document you want to display.

Select a document by its reference number, or leave the field blank to view all documents of the chosen type.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer profiles (AR651000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-profiles-ar651000 section This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected customer account or of all customer accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer profiles (AR651000) This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected customer account or of all customer accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Customer

The customer by its ID.

Select a customer from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Customer history (AR652000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-ar652000 section This report displays a customer's balance history over the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer history (AR652000) This report displays a customer's balance history over the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
Customer

The customer by its ID.

Select a customer from the list of active customers, or leave the field blank to view information about all customers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Customer history summary (AR652100) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-history-summary-ar652100 section This report displays a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the period range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer history summary (AR652100) This report displays a summary of balance history for customers whose balance has been changing during the period range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
Show customers with no changes A check box that you select to include customer accounts that have no changes in balance history for the selected period range.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Customer summary (AR65050S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s section This report lists customers with their current balances, default currency, creditterms, VAT zone, and other related information. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer summary (AR65050S) This report lists customers with their current balances, default currency, creditterms, VAT zone, and other related information. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Hide zero balances A check box that you select toexclude from the report customers with balances of zero.
Hide inactive customers A check box that you select to exclude from the report customers that are inactive or customersfor which the Active check box is deselected in the Customers (AR303000) window.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer specification (AR65200S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-specification-ar65200s section This report shows the customer balance specification for the selected customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer specification (AR65200S) This report shows the customer balance specification for the selected customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch The branch for which you want to view information. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period The period starting from which the customer specification will be printed.
To period The period up to and including which the customer specification will be printed.
From customer no. The customer number starting from which the customer specification will be printed.
To customer no. The customer number up to and including which the customer specification will be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Customer statement MC, English (AR64201S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-english-ar64201s section This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer statement MC, English (AR64201S) This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Statement date The date from which the statement is printed.
Statement cycle ID The ID of the statement cycle from which the statement is printed.
Message to the customer The free-form message you can write for the customer.
Customer no. The ID of the customer if which the statement is printed.
Send by email Select this to send the statement by email.
Print on paper Select this to print the statement on paper.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Customer statement MC, Norwegian (AR64204S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-statement-mc-norwegian-ar64204s section This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer statement MC, Norwegian (AR64204S) This report shows the customer statement accordant with the selected details in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Statement date The date from which the statement is printed.
Statement cycle ID The ID of the statement cycle from which the statement is printed.
Message to the customer The free-form message you can write for the customer.
Customer no. The number of the customer if which the statement is printed.
Send by email Select this to send the statement by email.
Print on paper Select this to print the statement on paper.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Dunning letter (AR661000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-ar661000 section Using this report, you can view dunning letters that were generated by using the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter (AR661000) Using this report, you can view dunning letters that were generated by using the Prepare dunning letters (AR521000) window. For more information: [Prepare dunning letters (AR521000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/prepare-dunning-letters-ar521000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Dunning letter The dunning letter whose details will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Dunning letter, Norwegian (AR66104S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-norwegian-ar66104s section This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter, Norwegian (AR66104S) This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Dunning letter ID The dunning letter whose details will be displayed in the report in Norwegian.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Dunning letter, English (AR66101S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/dunning-letter-english-ar66101s section This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dunning letter, English (AR66101S) This report lists the dunning letters and overdue balance by customer in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Dunning letter ID The dunning letter whose details will be displayed in the report in English.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Daily sales profitability (AR676000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the specific transactions to each customer during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Daily sales profitability (AR676000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the specific transactions to each customer during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by transaction type, warehouse, and item. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date The end date of the date range. By default, the current date is selected.
Document type

The type of document for which you want to view information.

The following options are available: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Cash sale, and Cash return. Leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses. (This field appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.
Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Incoming payments (AR63050S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/incoming-payments-ar63050s section This report shows the incoming payments for the selected cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Incoming payments (AR63050S) This report shows the incoming payments for the selected cash account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Cash account The cash account whose incoming payments will be printed to the report.
Start date The date starting from which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
End date The date until which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
From ref. no. The reference number from which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
To ref. no. The reference number until which incoming payments will be printed to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Invoice/note (AR641000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-note-ar641000 section By using this report, you can view and print the current documents of the selected type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice/note (AR641000) By using this report, you can view and print the current documents of the selected type. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Invoice - English (AR64101S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-english-ar64101s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - English (AR64101S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Finnish (AR64102S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-finnish-ar64102s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Finnish (AR64102S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Swedish for Finland (AR64103S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-for-finland-ar64103s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Swedish for Finland (AR64103S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Norwegian (AR64104S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-norwegian-ar64104s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Norwegian (AR64104S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Dutch (AR64105S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-ar64105s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Dutch (AR64105S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Danish (AR64106S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-danish-ar64106s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Danish (AR64106S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Swedish left address (AR64108S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-left-address-ar64108s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Swedish left address (AR64108S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Dutch pre-printed (AR64110S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-dutch-pre-printed-ar64110s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Dutch pre-printed (AR64110S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice - Swedish (AR64118S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-swedish-ar64118s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice - Swedish (AR64118S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge (AR643000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-ar643000 section This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge (AR643000) This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, English (AR64301S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-english-ar64301s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, English (AR64301S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Finnish (AR64302S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-finnish-ar64302s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Finnish (AR64302S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Swedish for Finland (AR64303S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-for-finland-ar64303s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Swedish for Finland (AR64303S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Norwegian (AR64304S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-norwegian-ar64304s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Norwegian (AR64304S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Dutch (AR64305S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-ar64305s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Dutch (AR64305S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Danish (AR64306S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-danish-ar64306s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Danish (AR64306S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Danish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Swedish left address (AR64308S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-left-address-ar64308s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Swedish left address (AR64308S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish, address information on the left side. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Dutch pre-printed (AR64310S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-dutch-pre-printed-ar64310s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Dutch pre-printed (AR64310S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch on a pre-printed form. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Overdue charge, Swedish (AR64318S) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/overdue-charge-swedish-ar64318s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overdue charge, Swedish (AR64318S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed. The type is Overdue charge by default.
Reference no. The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Open customer ledger documents (AR656000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/open-customer-ledger-documents-ar656000 section With this report, you can view and print the list of customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Open customer ledger documents (AR656000) With this report, you can view and print the list of customer ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > The report includes open documents that belong to deleted customer accounts. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of the sales to each customer during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of the sales to each customer during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by item. The window is available if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.
Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of all sales to each customer class and each customer during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of all sales to each customer class and each customer during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by item. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.
Customer class

A particular customer class.

Select the customer class to view the sales data for only customers of this class, or leave it blank to view a broader range of data.
Customer The customer for which you want to display data. Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.
Item The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Released transactions only A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions. To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
Completed transactions only A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions. To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by customer. The window is available if the Inventory functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.
Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for each stock item and item class based on the sales that occurred during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for each stock item and item class based on the sales that occurred during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can filter the data by customer. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) windoww.
From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.
Item class

A particular item class.

Select the item class to view the sales data for only this item class, or leave it blank to view a broader range of data.
Item

The stock item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all stock items.
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.
Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000 section This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000) This report (available in the Summary and Detailed formats) shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report in detailed format shows the data broken down by customer. Additionally, you can filter the data by item. The report is available if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report.

Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information for each order in the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each item for the specified date range.
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From date

The start date of the date range of the report.

By default, the first date of the current period is selected.
To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current date is selected.
Salesperson

The salesperson for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view information for all customers.
Item

The item for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Released transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the released transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
Completed transactions only

A check box you select to include in the report only the completed transactions.

To view a broader range of data, make sure the check box is cleared.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Subscriptions accounting (AR677000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/subscriptions-accounting-ar677000 section You use this report for CMRR reporting. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Subscriptions accounting (AR677000) You use this report for CMRR reporting. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It is available for Visma Net users and administrators who have the Contract management functionality enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the profitability information on the sales performed by each salesperson to particular customers during the specified date range.
Summary
To view the summary data for each salesperson for the specified date range.
From year

The start year of the date range of the report.

By default, the year of the current period is selected.
To year

The end year of the date range.

By default, the current business year is selected.
Template

The template for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view information on all templates.
Contract

The contract for which you want to view information.

Leave the field blank to view information for all contracts.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Unreleased transactions (AR611000) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ar611000 section This report lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (AR611000) This report lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists the customer ledger documents that were entered but not released. You can view the documents for all customers or select a customer for which you want to view documents. Documents are listed by document type, financial period, and document date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Customer

The customer for which you want to display data.

Select a specific customer by its ID, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box you select to include transactions with the On hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) /visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ar610500 section This report displays the list of customer ledger documents, shown with all details, of the selected type that were entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AR610500) This report displays the list of customer ledger documents, shown with all details, of the selected type that were entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of customer ledger documents, shown with all details, of the selected type that were entered but not released. You can select a specific document type or view all the documents. Documents are listed by the financial period, the document date, and the customer of the document. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system, in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Document type

The type of document you want to view.

Select one of the available types, or leave the field blank to view documents of all types.
Ref. no.

The reference number for which you want to display data.

Select a specific document by its reference number, or leave the field blank to view all the documents.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box you select to include transactions with the On hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customisation /visma-net-erp/help/customisation section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customisation Customisation - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-overview page The Customisation workspace in Visma Net gives you the ability to create, configure, and maintain custom user interface elements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customisation - overview The Customisation workspace in Visma Net gives you the ability to create, configure, and maintain custom user interface elements. The Customisation workspace in Visma Net gives you the ability to create, configure, and maintain custom user interface elements. By using the Customisation workspace, you can also manage filter settings and change the structure (that is, the site map) of Visma Net. ## Filtering options In Visma Net, you can set up filters to list only the records you want to view. By using the Filters window, you can create system filters for personal use or filters to be shared by other users. The [Custom notifications (SM205041)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/custom-notifications-sm205041/) window makes it possible to set up and configure your own notifications within Visma Net that will be sent by email the same as the system made notifications in [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/). There are two types of notifications that can be configured into the Custom notifications window: + Predefined notifications which are fixed and mainly are made to turn on/off or to change the recipients. + Custom notifications which needs to be completely defined from scratch by system administrators who then define their own conditions. ## The use of Custom notifications Custom notifications can help you monitor and follow up movement within the system. All according to your own needs. You can define: + Which area you want to monitor; suppliers, invoices, stock items etc. + Which fields within a record that is to change to trigger a notification. + The conditions that is to be fulfilled to trigger a notification. + The recipient of the notification. + The name and the message of the notification. + If the notification is with regards to a due date, you can also indicate that in your definition of the notification. A recipient can be: + A specific user + A user in a specific role + A group of user + Warehouse personnel + Accountants In addition, we will enable the possibility to notify users that have a relation to a document/record or entity: + The creator of the invoice + Owner of the sales order + Accountants + Warehouse personnel Example of a situation where the user would like to receive a notification: + Stock items below a certain level + Changes in a customers information + Items in sales order are shipped to customer As default, the notifications displayed are for the current, active company. By using a filter, users can see notifications for all companies. ## Generic inquiries In Visma Net, you can build pivot tables based on the data from generic inquiries. A pivot table is a program tool that you use to reorganise and summarise data in a generic inquiry to view it from different perspectives. You can set up and change the pivot table structure by dragging and dropping fields. ## Dashboard page management Dashboards are a very important and convenient tool for monitoring and analysing critical business information. In the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window, you can add dashboard pages, locate them in the site map, and set up access rights to dashboard pages. Manage generic inquiries /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries section In Visma Net, you can create and manage inquiries without having any programming skills by using the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage generic inquiries In Visma Net, you can create and manage inquiries without having any programming skills by using the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window. For more information: [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/). In Visma Net, you can create and manage inquiries without having any programming skills by using the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. You can edit the inquiry view and the titles, and arrange the elements in the window as you need. After saving your changes, you can immediately check your changes. Additionally, you can create multiple pivot tables for each generic inquiry. You can use pivot tables to reorganise and summarise data in a generic inquiry, to view it from different perspectives. Another option is to create side panel navigation paths for generic inquiries. Design an inquiry based on inventory data /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/design-an-inquiry-based-on-inventory-data section You can easily create inquiry windows by using the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Design an inquiry based on inventory data You can easily create inquiry windows by using the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window. For more information: [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/). You can easily create inquiry windows by using the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. To design an inquiry, you need to have a general knowledge of data access classes (DACs), through which data can be extracted from the system database tables. For more information about DACs, see the Visma Net Customisation guide. The following sections describe the process of creating an inquiry that shows the availability of active stock items. ## About the design specifications The inquiry will have a **Selection** area with the following elements: + The **Warehouse** field where you can select a particular warehouse to view its stock items + The **Active only** check box you can select to indicate that information about only active items (instead of all items) should be displayed Choose one of the following ways to arrange these two boxes in the **Selection** area: + One column: This will result in two lines, with the second element under the first one. + Two columns: This will result in one line, with the second element to the right of the first one. The table with inquiry results will display all the stock items available at the selected warehouse (or at all warehouses, if no warehouse has been selected). This table will have the **Stock items** title on the UI and the following columns: **Item ID**, **Description**, **Subitem ID**, **Warehouse**, **Base unit**, **Base price**, **Quantity on hand**, and **Available quantity**. ## About the DACs to be used for the inquiry All the information about stock items is available through the following basic DACs, which represent specific data from system databases as if it is arranged in tables: PX.Objects.IN.ItemSite : Contains warehouse-specific information about items: standard cost history, price information, and replenishment parameters. PX.Objects.IN.INSiteStatus : Contains information about warehouses: the items stored there and their availability information. PX.Objects.IN.InventoryItem : Holds general information about each stock item: General ledger accounts, subaccounts, kit status (whether the item is a kit), item class, price class, and lot/serial class. This DAC also provides information on the item's cost, price, and VAT categories. A simple representation of the sample data in these tables is shown below; the actual tables include more columns than are shown, and no data is shown for columns that are not used in the inquiry being designed in this topic. The table names specified in parentheses are aliases specified for the tables for the inquiry under design (see the **Creating a new inquiry** section of this topic). ### The PX.Objects.IN.ItemSite (ItemSite) table contains the following data |Site ID|Item ID|ABC code|Pending price|Last price|Pending cost|Last cost|Replenishment parameters| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |RETAIL|Blinds 100mm X1000mm|A|12.5|10|7|6|-| |WHOLESALE|Blinds 100mm X1000mm|A|12.5|10|7|6|-| ### The PX.Objects.IN.INSiteStatus (SiteStatus) table contains the following data |Item ID|Subitem|Description|Site ID|Qty. avail.|Qty. on hand|Qty. not avail.| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Z00B00250|0 (black)|Blinds 100mmX1000mm|RETAIL|500|100|0| |Z00B00250|0 (black)|Blinds 100mmX1000mm|WHOLESALE|10|1100|0| |LCS000011|0 (black)|LSC1 monitor|RETAIL|36|36|0| |LCS000011|1 (white)|LSC1 monitor|RETAIL|36|36|36| |LCS000011|2 (brown)|LSC1 monitor|RETAIL|0|0|0| |LCS000011|0 (black)|LSC1 monitor black|WHOLESALE|8805|64|64| |LCS000011|1 (white)|LSC1 monitor|WHOLESALE|-300|-300|0| ### The PX.Objects.IN.InventoryItem (InventoryItem) table contains the following data |Item ID|Subitem|Description|Base unit|Base price|Evaluation method|GL accounts|VAT category| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Z00B00250|0 black|Blinds 100mmX1000mm|piece|10|0|-|-| |LCS000011|0 (black)|LSC1 monitor|piece|200|0|-|-| |LCS000011|1 (white)|LSC1 monitor|piece|250|0|-|-| |LCS000011|2 (brown)|LSC1 monitor|piece|200|0|-|-| ### The PX.Objects.IN.INSubitem (Subitem) table contains the following data |Subitem ID|Group mask|Description|Created by| |---|---|---|---| |0|-|Black|administrator| |1|-|White|administrator| |2|-|Brown|administrator| ## Create a new inquiry 1. Go to the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. 1. In the **Inquiry title** field, type a name for the inquiry, such as `Availability by warehouse`. 1. In the **Sitemap title** field, type a title, which is the name of the inquiry. 1. In the **Location in the menu** field, select Start, to give your inquiry a location. You can choose any location, because your inquiry is independent of structure and will always appear in the **Custom views** workspace. 1. Type `2` in the **Arrange parameters in x columns** field. 1. Leave the **Select top x records** field blank, so you can display all the results. 1. Optional: In the **Records per page** field, specify the number of records you want to see per page. 1. Optional: Select **Number pages** if you want to give each results page a page number. 1. On the **Tables** tab, click anywhere below the last row to add a new row. 1. In the **Table name** column, search for and select INSiteStatus ( **PX.Objects.IN.INSiteStatus** ). 1. In the **Alias** column, type an easy-to-use name (such as `SiteStatus` ). 1. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for each table you need for your inquiry. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Your inquiry is saved and receives a window ID. You will now find it in the **Custom views** work space. If you want to place your inquiry in a workspace of your choice, you can duplicate it. ## Specify table relations You need to specify relations between tables so that the system can generate SQL requests to get the required data from the tables involved. On the **Relations** tab, perform the following steps: 1. In the **Table relations** table, append a new row. Select **SiteStatus** as the parent table, **left** as the join type, and **ItemID** as the child table. To get the data from both tables for each item ID, do the following in the **DataField links for active relations** table: + Select **ItemID** in the **Parent field** column. + Select **Equals** in the **Condition** column. + Select **ItemID** in the **Child field** column. 1. In the **Table relations** table, append a new row. Select **SiteStatus** as the parent table, **left** as the join type, and **SubItem** as the child table. To get information on subitems of stock items, do the following in the **DataField links for active relations** table: + Select **SubItemID** in the **Parent field** column. + Select **Equals** in the **Condition** column. + Select **SubItemID** in the **Child field** column. 1. In the **Table relations** table, append a new row. Select **SiteStatus** as the parent table, **left** as the join type, and **ItemSite** as the child table. To get the data from both tables for each stock item stored in each warehouse, do the following in the **DataField links for active relations** table: + Select **ItemID** as the parent field that equals the **ItemID** child field. + In the next row, specify **SiteID** as the parent field that equals the **SiteID** child field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure inquiry parameters To configure the elements for inquiry parameters, do the following: 1. On the **Parameters** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to append a row to the table. 1. In the **Name** column, specify the name of the inquiry parameter. 1. In the **Display name** column, type `Warehouse`; this is the name of the element the user will use to select a particular warehouse. 1. In the **Schema field** column, select a schema. If no schema is specified, a simple text field will be used on the inquiry window. We recommend that you select as a schema the **Warehouse** column from the respective table. 1. Select the **From schema** check box and select one of warehouses as the default value. 1. If you have chosen to arrange parameters in two columns, in the **Column span** field, type the number of columns the **Warehouse** text field will span. 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to append a new row. 1. Type `Active` in the **Name** column. 1. Specify a check box as the schema. 1. Type `Active Only` as the display name. 1. Type `=1` as the default value for the check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Specify conditions By using the **Conditions** tab, you can specify the conditions that determine the data (records) to be displayed. The inquiry parameters used in conditions appear in square brackets; for example, `[Warehouse]` stands for the first parameter of the inquiry (the ID of the warehouse selected by the user), and `[Active]` designates the value of the **Active only** check box, which the user can select to view only active items. For this example, we want to select stock items matching the following conditions, based on user selections: + If a user selects a particular warehouse: Items stored at this warehouse + If the user doesn't select any warehouse: Items stored at all warehouses + If the user selects the **Active only** check box: Items with the **Active** status + If the user clears the **Active only** check box: Items with any status To implement these conditions, perform the following steps: 1. Enter the following: a single opening parenthesis, the **SiteID** column of the **SiteStatus** table ( **SiteStatus.SiteID** ) in the **Data field** column, the **Equals** condition, `[Warehouse]` as **Value 1**, and **Or** as the operator. 1. In the next row, enter `[Warehouse]` in the **Data field** column, **Is null** as the condition, and a single closing parenthesis. Select **And** as the operator to join another condition. 1. In the next row, enter the following: double opening parentheses, `[Active]` in the **Data field** (the value of the **Active only** parameter), the **Equals** condition, `=1` as the **Value 1**, a single closing bracket, and **And** as the operator. 1. In the next row, select **InventoryItem.ItemStatus** ( **ItemStatus** of the **StockItem** table) as the data field, the **Equals** condition, the **From schema** check box, **Active** as **Value 1**, a single closing parenthesis, and the operator **Or**. 1. In the next row, select `[Active]` as the data field, select **Equals** as the condition, type `=0` as the **Value 1**, and add a single closing parenthesis. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure the results area On the **Results grid** tab, select the column from the involved DACs to display data. To add a column to the resulting table, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. In the **Object** column, select the DAC that contains the particular column. 1. In the **Data field** column, select the particular DAC column. 1. Specify a schema for the column. Generally, you select the schema used for the column in its DAC. 1. Optional: Specify the width of the column (in pixels) if the values are long strings. 1. Select the **Visible** check box if you want this column to be visible in the table by default. Clear the check box if the column will be an optional column that can be brought up by users as needed. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Sorting results To sort the results, select one column and specify how the values should be ordered in the respective column. To do this, on the **Sort order** tab, do the following: 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to append a new row. 1. Select the column of the specific table whose values should be ordered. 1. Select descending or ascending order. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can speed up a generic inquiry if you define a custom sorting order that optimises a database query. For example, such order may include less fields than a default sorting order, which contains keys for all tables added in the generic inquiry. ## Preview the inquiry To preview the inquiry you have created, click **View inquiry** on the window toolbar. To return to the Generic inquiry window, click **Back** (or the equivalent action) on the toolbar of your browser. ## Add the new inquiry to a workspace you choose In Visma Net, user-defined inquiries are automatically added to the workspace called **Custom views**. You can also add tem to a workspace of your choice, for example you can add customer ledger-specific inquiries to the Customer ledger workspace. 1. Go to the workspace you want to add the inquiry to. 1. In the bottom left corner, click **Edit menu**. 1. Click **+ Add menu item** in the top menu edit bar. The **Select windows** dialog is displayed. 1. Search for your inquiry title. 1. Select the check box to the left of your inquiry title and click **Add and close**. 1. In the bottom left corner of the window, click **Exit the Edit menu**. The inquiry will now be displayed both in your selected workspace and in **Custom views**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About side panels /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/about-side-panels page A side panel is a navigation option that can be enabled for a generic inquiry on the Navigation tab of the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About side panels A side panel is a navigation option that can be enabled for a generic inquiry on the Navigation tab of the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window. For more information: [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/). The side panel can be used to display the details of entities related to a record that is currently selected on the inquiry window. The side panel navigation path can be added to existing generic inquires or new ones. For more information, see: [Enable the side panel](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/enable-the-side-panel/) ## Elements of the side panel When the side panel navigation option is enabled for an inquiry, you will see the following in the right side of the window: + Side panel The side panel is a navigation option you can use to drill down to relevant details about any record listed on the inquiry window. > [!NOTE] > By default, this panel is hidden and you can see only the **Display** button and the tabs defined for this panel. + Side panel tab Either one window can be displayed on the side panel or the panel may have tabs with multiple windows. If the side panel has tabs, you can navigate between them. To view relevant information in a side panel tab, you select a record on the inquiry window, and then click the needed tab icon on the side panel. In the side panel, the system displays the window with the information related to the selected record inside the side panel. You can hover over the tab icon to see the name of the window used for this tab. + Display/Hide button (arrow) You use these buttons to open or close the side panel of the inquiry window. To open the side panel, you click the **Display** button, and to hide the panel, you click the **Hide** button. + Window title This section of the side panel displays the title of the window you selected for a specific tab. + Window area When you select the record from the inquiry window and open the tab on the side panel (if multiple tabs are defined for the inquiry), the system displays the details of the entity related to the record in the window area. ## Examples of possible elements to be shown in the side panel When you create your customized side panels, you can select between the following different elements to show specific information from the selected line in the list: + Windows + Inquiries + Dashboards (PDFs, static webpages, graphs) > [!NOTE] > You can add a dashboard with parameters to a side panel. Adding the navigation path for a dashboard is done the same way as for the other windows. When you are going through the records of the inquiry, the system will filter widget data by the parameters passed from the inquiry. For more information, see: [About dashboard configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboard-configuration/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Enable the side panel /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/enable-the-side-panel section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable the side panel A side panel is a navigation option that can be enabled for a generic inquiry on the Navigation tab of the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. The side panel can be used to display the details of entities related to a record that is currently selected on the inquiry window. The side panel navigation path can be added to existing generic inquires or new ones. 1. Go to the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. 1. In the **Inquiry title** field, select the generic inquiry for which you want to enable the side panel. 1. In the **Windows** area of the **Navigation** tab, add the window of the related entity whose details you want to review in the resulting side panel. 1. In the **Navigation parameters** table, specify the parameters to be passed to the selected window. 1. In the **Window mode** field, select the **Side panel** option. 1. In the **Icon** field, select an image to be displayed in the selection area of the side panel. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: You can add multiple side panel navigation paths to a generic inquiry by repeating step 3 to 7 for each additional window. The only limit is the set of tables in the generic inquiry, which you can easily expand by adding new tables and setting up table relations. With multiple side panel navigation paths, for each record in the inquiry, you can view the details of multiple related entities, by switching between paths in the selection area of the side panel. > [!NOTE] > Be aware that large inquiries with a lot joins of different tables could influence the loading time of a side panel. > [!NOTE] > To view your side panels, you can click the **View inquiry** button and expand the side bar by clicking the **Display or Hide** button (arrow in upper right corner) that shows the side panels of the window. For more information, see: [About side panels](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/about-side-panels/) > [!NOTE] > You can add a dashboard with parameters to a side panel. Adding the navigation path for a dashboard is done the same way as for the other windows. When you are going through the records of the inquiry, the system will filter widget data by the parameters passed from the inquiry. For more information, see: [About dashboard configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboard-configuration/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Find the names of the database fields /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/find-the-names-of-the-database-fields section If you want to edit a report or add a new generic inquiry, you need to know the names of the database fields. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Find the names of the database fields If you want to edit a report or add a new generic inquiry, you need to know the names of the database fields. 1. Go to the [Users (SM201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/users-sm201010/) window. 1. In the **Login** field, select your username. 1. On the **Roles** tab, select the role **Customizer** and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to a desired window in the system, move the mouse pointer on a field, press **Ctrl + Alt** on the keyboard and click the left mouse button. The **Element properties** window opens and here you will find the **Data field** names. Manage pivot tables /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-pivot-tables section In Visma Net, you can build pivot tables based on the data from generic inquiries. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage pivot tables In Visma Net, you can build pivot tables based on the data from generic inquiries. A pivot table is a program tool that you can use to reorganise and summarise data in a generic inquiry, to view it from different perspectives. Among other functions, a pivot table can automatically sort, count, total, or give the average of the data stored in a generic inquiry, displaying the results in a separate table showing the summarised data. You can configure and change the structure of pivot tables simply by dragging and dropping fields. In the following topic you will find information on configuring and using pivot tables in Visma Net. About pivot tables in Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-pivot-tables/about-pivot-tables-in-visma-net page In Visma Net, you can use pivot tables to reorganise and summarise data taken from generic inquiries and analyse it from various perspectives. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About pivot tables in Visma Net In Visma Net, you can use pivot tables to reorganise and summarise data taken from generic inquiries and analyse it from various perspectives. In Visma Net, you can use pivot tables to reorganise and summarise data taken from generic inquiries and analyse it from various perspectives. This capability is useful when you have large amounts of data in the generic inquiry and you need to build aggregate reports based on this data. For example: Suppose that you have a generic inquiry that lists open sales orders and contains the following information: order date, customer name, order number, order quality, order total sum, and order status. If you want to see number of open orders by each customer and the overall sum per customer, you build a pivot table that includes this data. In this topic, you can find information about configuring and managing pivot tables in Visma Net. ## Prerequisites Before you start configuring a pivot table you need to do the following: + Create the generic inquiry that will be used as a data source for pivot tables if this inquiry doesn't already exist. For details, see: [Design an inquiry based on inventory data](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/design-an-inquiry-based-on-inventory-data/). + Plan which data from the generic inquiry you want to see in rows, columns, and the data area of the pivot table; also plan which data should be used for filtering. ## Configure pivot tables You perform the following steps to configure a pivot table in Visma Net in the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window: 1. Go to the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window. 1. In the **Window ID** field, you select a generic inquiry from the list of existing generic inquiries. 1. By dragging the fields to the appropriate panes of the window, you select the generic inquiry fields that will be used in rows, in columns, and in the data area (the **Values** pane) of the pivot table; you also select the fields that should be used for filtering by dragging and dropping them to the **Filters** pane in the window. 1. Optional: You specify display properties for the generic inquiry fields that are used in the pivot table, such as a custom caption, sorting type, aggregate functions, and cell width. 1. Optional: In the **Sitemap location** field in the top part of the window, you specify the position of the created pivot table in the Visma Net site map if you want users of your Visma Net instance to access it in the site map. 1. Optional: You share the pivot table within your Visma Net instance if you want other users of Visma Net to use it, by selecting the **Is shared** check box. 1. Optional: In the top part of the window, you select a shared filter that will be applied to the pivot table. For the detailed procedure you should use to add a pivot table, see: [Add a pivot table](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-pivot-tables/add-a-pivot-table/). ## Format field values in pivot tables If you want to change the format of the fields to be displayed in a pivot table, you can specify the required format in the **Format** field of the **Properties** pane in the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window. In this field, you can type one of the standard formats defined for the format function in.Net. For date fields, in the Properties pane, you can configure the following extended format settings: + Rounding data with the specified accuracy: You can select the accuracy of calculating data gathered by date. For example:Suppose that for each sales manager, you want to analyse sales amounts aggregated by quarters of the year. Suppose that the sales amounts are collected daily, which means that the date field in the generic inquiry with the required data contains the day, the month, and the year (such as 04/11/2016). To aggregate the sales amounts by quarter in the pivot table, in the Round to field, you select Quarters, and the date will contain only the year and the quarter (such as 2016 Q4) in the pivot table. + Aggregating data by the particular date part: You can select the part of a date field by which you want to aggregate data in a pivot table. For example:Suppose that you want to analyse the seasonal demand on T-shirts for the last five years. To solve this task, you can build a pivot table that displays sales amounts aggregated by month. Suppose that the date field in the generic inquiry with sales amounts for T-shirts contains the month and the year (such as July 2017). To make the system aggregate data by month and display only months in the pivot table, in the Date part field, you select Month. + Displaying hierarchical column or row headers: If you want to configure dates in columns or rows for a pivot table to meet your needs, you can set up a hierarchical structure of parts of the dates. For example:Suppose that you want to analyse the amount of shipped laptops by month for the last three years. Suppose that the date in the generic inquiry contains the day, the month, and the year (such as 04/11/2016). In the pivot table, you can display a one-level column, which will contain the following date values: Jan 2015, Feb 2015, and so on until June 2017. Alternatively, you can configure the system so that it displays two levels of column headers: In the first level, the system displays the years, and under each year, the system displays the months. To configure the system in this way, you add two copies of the date field to the Columns pane of the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window. For the first copy, in the Round to field, you select Years; for the second copy, in the Date part field, you select Month. For fields for which segmented keys are configured to have multiple segments, in the Properties pane, you can configure the following format settings: + Aggregating data by the particular segment: You can select the segment by which the system will aggregate data in a pivot table. For example, suppose that your company sells fruit and vegetables to restaurants. Suppose that the item class values consist of the following segments: the item category (FR or VEG), the item type (APL, ORG, CBR, or PTO), and the country of origin (such as ES, CN, or MA). If you want to analyse the amounts of item types shipped to each customer by using a pivot table, in the Segment field, for the item class field, you select the segment that corresponds to the item type. With these settings, the system will aggregate sales data by the item type (such as apples, designated by APL). + Displaying hierarchical column or row headers: If you want to analyse data by a combination of two segments of a field value, you can set up a hierarchical structure of the segments. Suppose that in the example described in the previous item, you also want to add to the pivot table the country of origin for each item type. To address this task, to the Columns pane, you add two copies of the Item class field. For the first copy, in the Segment field, you select the segment used for the item category; for the second copy, in the Segment field, you select the segment used for the country of origin. ## Pivot tables and generic inquiries In Visma Net, you use the data from generic inquiries to build pivot tables. For a single generic inquiry you can create multiple pivot tables that will summarise data in different dimensions. You use only one generic inquiry to build each pivot table. If you need to build pivot tables with information stored in multiple generic inquiries, you must first create a single generic inquiry that includes all the necessary data. When you modify a generic inquiry that pivot tables are based on (for example, when you add or remove fields), you may need to reflect these changes in the pivot tables. To do this, you click **Pivot tables** in the generic inquiry title bar and click a pivot table name you want to open. In the pivot table window that opens, you click **Customise** in the window title bar. In the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window that opens, you modify the settings of the pivot table. The data for pivot tables is stored separately from generic inquiries data in the system database. This makes it possible for users to work with pivot tables even if the generic inquiry on which they are based is unavailable for some reason. In addition, you can allow users to access only pivot tables, if security policies of your organisation require this. Users of your organisation may open configured pivot tables as follows: + Through the site map, if you added the pivot table there during configuration. + From the generic inquiry window, by using the **Pivot tables** menu item in the window title bar, which appears when at least one pivot table is created for this generic inquiry. Related reference [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Add a pivot table /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-pivot-tables/add-a-pivot-table section You use the Pivot tables (SM208010) window to add a pivot table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a pivot table You use the Pivot tables (SM208010) window to add a pivot table. For more information: [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/). You use the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window to add a pivot table. For details on pivot tables in Visma Net, see: [About pivot tables in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-pivot-tables/about-pivot-tables-in-visma-net/). ## Before you begin Before you start configuring a pivot table you need to do the following: + Create the generic inquiry that will be used as a data source for pivot tables if this inquiry doesn't already exist. For details, see: [Design an inquiry based on inventory data](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/design-an-inquiry-based-on-inventory-data/). + Plan which data from the generic inquiry you want to see in rows, columns, and the data area of the pivot table; also plan which data should be used for filtering. 1. Go to the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window. 1. In the **Window ID** field, select the generic inquiry that will be used as a data source for the pivot table. (If you opened this window from the generic inquiry window, the generic inquiry is selected automatically.) 1. In the **Name** field, type the name you want to use for the pivot table. This name will be used as pivot table ID after you save your changes to the table. 1. Configure the layout of the pivot table as follows: + Drag and drop the generic inquiry fields from the **Fields** pane to one of the following panes, depending on the desired layout of the pivot table: **Rows**, **Columns**, or **Values**. + Optional: Drag and drop the generic inquiry fields from the **Fields** pane to the **Filters** pane if you want to filter data in the pivot table by these fields. 1. Optional: Set up display properties for the generic inquiry fields that are used in the pivot tables as follows: 1. Click a field that is now in the **Filters**, **Columns**, **Rows**, or **Values** pane. 1. In the **Properties** pane, perform any of the following steps, as needed, to change the properties of the selected field: + In the **Caption** field, change the caption of the selected field that will be displayed in the pivot table. + In the **Aggregate** list, select the aggregate function that will be applied to the field value. + In the **Sort order** list, select the way you want the field values to be sorted. + Select the **Show percent** check box if you want to display the field value selected in the **Values** pane as a percent of the total value. + Select the **Show total** check box if you want to display a **Total** field for this field in the pivot table. + In the **Total label** field, type the custom name of the **Total** field. + In the **Width** field, type the width of the cells (in pixels) in which the field values are displayed. + In the **Format** field, specify the format of the field if it should differ from the original format. 1. Optional: In the **Location in the menu** field, specify the position of the pivot table in the Visma Net site map if you want users of your Visma Net instance to navigate to it from the menu. 1. Optional: Select the **Is shared** check box if you want other users of Visma Net to see the pivot table. 1. Optional: Select a shared filter in the **Shared filter to apply** field if you want to filter data in the pivot table by using an existing filter. 1. In the window toolbar, click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** to save the pivot table.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Delete a pivot table /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-pivot-tables/delete-a-pivot-table section You use the Pivot tables (SM208010) window to delete a pivot table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete a pivot table You use the Pivot tables (SM208010) window to delete a pivot table. For more information: [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/). You use the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window to delete a pivot table. For details on pivot tables Visma Net, see: [About pivot tables in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-pivot-tables/about-pivot-tables-in-visma-net/). 1. Go to the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window. 1. In the **Window ID** field, select a generic inquiry that is used as a data source for the pivot table. If you opened this window from the generic inquiry window, it will be selected automatically. 1. In the **Pivot table ID** field, select a pivot table that should be deleted. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage subsitutes of entry windows /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows section After you add a particular type of information (such as business accounts) to the system by using the applicable data entry window, you may want to have a way to view a list of these records. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage subsitutes of entry windows After you add a particular type of information (such as business accounts) to the system by using the applicable data entry window, you may want to have a way to view a list of these records. The most convenient way is to configure a substitute form of the inquiry type that will serve as an entry point to the entry window. With a substitute window, when a user clicks the name of the entry window in the navigation pane, the user is automatically redirected to the corresponding substitute form that contains the list of these records in a tabular format. When the user clicks a record, the entry window opens to show the details of the selected record. The topics below contain information on the configuration and management of the substitute windows in your system. About substitutes for entry windows /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/about-substitutes-for-entry-windows page Sometimes, you might need a faster way to retrieve particular data from the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About substitutes for entry windows Sometimes, you might need a faster way to retrieve particular data from the system. This could be information about a specific supplier or the list of customers. Data retrieval Typically, in Visma Net, you can retrieve specific information by navigating to the relevant data entry or maintenance window and selecting the magnifier icon in the necessary field. This action will open a list of records in a pop-up window. However, this process might not provide the required information quickly enough. While the data entry and maintenance windows are useful for inputting new data, once the majority of data has been entered, you might find it more beneficial to view the list of records that were created in the data entry window. ## The process Within Visma Net, it's possible to construct a generic inquiry or a custom window. This window will display the data from a data entry or maintenance window, referred to as the **entry window** in this scenario, in a table format. The newly created generic inquiry or custom window is known as the **substitute window** in this context. After the substitute window is created, it can replace the original entry window. Therefore, when the entry window's name is clicked in the navigation pane, the substitute window containing the list of records is accessed. Clicking on a record name in this list will open the corresponding entry window (data entry or maintenance). ## Configuring a generic inquiry to be used as a substitute window To configure a generic inquiry to be used as a substitute window, first select the entry window, configure the list of records to be displayed in the substitute window, and finally select the location on the site map. The [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window is used for this configuration. For an example of configuring a generic inquiry, see: [Design an inquiry based on inventory data](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/design-an-inquiry-based-on-inventory-data/). To add or delete the records in the list or make edits to the data shown in the list, you can add the required buttons and menu commands to the window toolbar of the substitute window. You can add any of the following options to a substitute window: ### Enabling the creation of new records Activating this feature makes the **New record** button accessible in the substitute window. Clicking this button opens the entry window, allowing the user to add a new record. Enabling the creation of new records in the substitute window allows you to set default values for the fields that are displayed when a record is added. When a user adds a new record, the system will automatically populate these fields with the default values. These default values are defined in the **New record defaults**, located on the **Entry point** tab of the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. ### Enabling mass removal of records If you enable mass removal of records, the **Delete** button and the **Selected** column will be available in the substitute window. A user can select one record or multiple records and then delete them. You also have the option to configure the system to automatically confirm the deletion of records after this button is clicked and before the records are actually deleted. ### Enabling mass update of records Activating this feature will make the **Update** and **Update all** commands available in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar, as well as in the **Selected** column of the substitute window's table. You can configure this feature by selecting the field or fields to be updated when one of these options is selected by the user. A user has the ability to select either a single record or multiple records. After selection, the user can then modify the specified fields of these selected records. ### Enabling mass actions on records When you configure this setting, you can select any of the available options according to your requirements. The options you can select from are determined by the content within the entry window where you are creating the ingquiry. For example: The following options might be available for the window: + **Copy** + **Paste** + **Validate address** + **Mark as validated**. After you have selected the required options and saved the list, these commands will be displayed in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar and the **Selected** column in the table of the substitute window. A user can select one or multiple records and then apply any available command to those selected records. For instructions on setting up a generic inquiry as a substitute window, see: [Configure a generic inquiry to replace an entry window](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/configure-a-generic-inquiry-to-replace-an-entry-window/). ## Configuring a custom window to be used as a substitute window With Visma Net, you can design your own custom windows to substitute the default entry windows. Each substitute window must include fields that correspond and map to the key fields of the original entry window. Once the custom window is ready, you match the window to the corresponding entry window This means specifying which entry window will be replaced with the custom window. This can be done using the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. For details on how to configure a custom window to be used as a substitute window, see: [Replace an entry window with a custom window](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/replace-an-entry-window-with-a-custom-window/). ## Accessing substitute windows In Visma Net, each window has its own level of access that you can configure by using the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-window-sm201020/) window. The access levels for the entry and substitute windows can be modified independently. However, when a substitute window replaces the corresponding entry window, the substitute window inherits the level of access the users have to the entry window. To change the level of access users have to the substitute window, you change the level of access to the entry window. If required, you can cancel the replacement. This involves configuring the system to redirect users to the original entry window, instead of the substitute window when they try to open the entry window in the navigation pane. Note that cancelling the replacement does not involve deleting windows. If you cancel the replacement, the access level of the substitute window reverts to the initial state This means, the access level the substitute window had before you used it to replace an entry window. ## Replacing the entry window with the substitute window Once a substitute window is configured, you match the substitute window to the corresponding entry window. This means specifying which substitute window will replace which entry window. Each pair of entry and substitute windows will have its own row in the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. When you select the entry window on the **Primary screen** tab, a generic inquiry is automatically matched to it. This occurs in the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. If you delete the row containing the inquiry in the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window, the selection in the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window is removed. You can activate or cancel the replacement of any entry window in the list at any time. Cancelling the replacement does not remove the window pair from the list. For details of activating and cancelling the replacement of an entry window, see: [Activate the replacement of an entry window](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/activate-the-replacement-of-an-entry-window/) and [Cancel the replacement of an entry window](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/cancel-the-replacement-of-an-entry-window/). If you delete the row containing the entry window and the corresponding substitute window, the match betwen the windows is removed. This cancels the replacement, but does not delete the windows. ## Defining the way the users locate entry and substitute windows in the navigation pane When configuring the substitute window, you determine how users can locate this window. The following ways are available: + Place the substitute window in the **Hidden** folder of the site map and replace the entry window with the substitute window. Users can accesses the substitute window by clicking the name of the entry window in the navigation pane. The entry window opens when a user selects a record or creates a new record in the substitute window. + Place the substitute window in any folder on the site map except the **Hidden** folder, without replacing the entry window with the substitute window. Users can accesses both the substitute window and teh entry window by clicking its name in the navigation pane. + Place the substitute window in the **Hidden** folder on the site map without replacing the entry window with the substitute window. In this case, users won't be able to access the substitute window. They can access the entry window by clicking its name in the navigation pane. You can see the list of entry windows and the corresponding substitute windows, review and edit the locations of the windows in the list, check which entry windows are replaced with substitute windows, and toggle the replacement by using the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. Parent topic: [Manage substitutes of entry windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/cu-manage-substitutes-entry-window-con/)

Related pages

Tasks

 Configure a generic inquiry to replace an entry window /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/configure-a-generic-inquiry-to-replace-an-entry-window section You can use the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window to create an inquiry based on a entry window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a generic inquiry to replace an entry window You can use the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window to create an inquiry based on a entry window. For more information: [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/). You can use the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window to create an inquiry based on a entry window. This inquiry can be used as a substitute window that lists the records created by the using the corresponding entry window, so that you can see many records at a glance. For more information, see:[About substitutes for entry windows](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/about-substitutes-for-entry-windows/). If you use the substitute window to replace the entry window on the navigation pane, when a user clicks the name of the entry window, the system opens the substitute window. The instructions below describe how to configure a substitute window to replace the corresponding entry window. ## Before you begin Prepare the inquiry that you want to use as a substitute window for the entry window. For an example, see: [Design an inquiry based on inventory data](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-generic-inquiries/design-an-inquiry-based-on-inventory-data/). 1. Go to the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. 1. In the **Inquiry title** field, select the inquiry that you want to use as the substitute window for the entry window. 1. On the **Entry point** tab, in the **Entry screen settings** section, do the following: 1. In the **Entry screen** field, select the entry window that the substitute window will replace. When you select the entry window, this window is automatically added to the **Navigation** tab. 1. To replace the selected entry screen with the substitute window, select the **Replace entry screen with this inquiry in menu** check box. If you select this check box, the entry window always opens in the same browser tab when a user is adding a new record from this inquiry or viewing the details of an existing record from the inquiry. 1. To give the user the ability to add new records from the substitute window, in the **Operations with records** section, select the **Enable new record creation** check box. The **New record** button appears on the window toolbar of the substitute window. When the user clicks this button, the system opens the entry window that the user can use to add a new record. 1. To give the user the ability to delete existing records from the system by using the substitute window, select the **Enable mass record deletion** check box. The **Delete** button appears on the window toolbar and the **Selected** column appears in the table of the substitute window. A user can select one record or multiple records, and then delete any of these records from the system. The user will have to confirm the deletion of every record. 1. To make the system automatically confirm the deletion of records on the substitute window, select the **Auto-confirm custom delete confirmations** check box. With this check box selected, when a user tries to delete one record or multiple records, the records will be deleted without confirmation. 1. To give the user the ability to update particular fields of the records by using the substitute window, do the following: 1. Select the **Enable mass record update** check box. 1. On the **Mass update fields** tab, add the fields to the table. The **Update** and **Update all** commands appear on the **Actions** menu of the window toolbar and the Selected column appears in the table of the substitute window. 1. To give the user the ability to use particular commands (such **Copy** or **Add note** ) on the substitute window, do the following: 1. Select the **Enable mass actions on records** check box. 1. On the **Mass actions** tab, add to the table the actions you want to provide. The added commands appear on the **Actions** menu of the window toolbar, and the Selected column appears in the table of the substitute window. 1. To define how to open the entry window from the substitute window when a user is adding a new record or viewing the details of an existing record (if you haven't replaced the entry window with the substitute window), do the following: 1. In the **Screens** section of the **Navigation** tab, select the entry screen, which was added automatically when you selected the entry screen on the **Entry point** tab. 1. In the **Navigation parameters** section, select one of the following values in the **Window mode** field: + **Same tab** (default value): The entry window opens in the same browser tab. + **New tab**: The entry window opens in a new browser tab. + **Pop-up window**: The entry window opens in a new pop-up window. 1. Optional: In the **Navigation parameters** section of the **Navigation** tab, modify the inquiry parameters that should be passed to the key fields of the entry window. 1. Optional: In the **New record defaults** table, specify the default parameters for the fields to be added while the new records are created on the inquiry window. The New record defaults table is available only if the Enable new record creation check box is selected. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). As a result of these steps, the inquiry window will be displayed as the entry window in the defined site map location. Parent topic: [Manage substitutes of entry windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/cu-manage-substitutes-entry-window-con/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Replace an entry window with a custom window /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/replace-an-entry-window-with-a-custom-window section With Visma Net, you can use not only generic inquiries but your own custom windows as entry points to the entry windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Replace an entry window with a custom window With Visma Net, you can use not only generic inquiries but your own custom windows as entry points to the entry windows. For more information on substitutes for entry windows, see: [About substitutes for entry windows](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/about-substitutes-for-entry-windows/). A custom form that you want to use as a substitute to an entry window must be mapped to the entry window. To use a custom window as a substitute form for an entry window, you match your custom window to the entry window and activate the replacement by using the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. 1. Go to the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Entry screen location** field, select the entry window. The ID of the window is displayed in the **Entry screen ID** field. 1. In the **List screen location** field, select the substitute window. The ID of the window is displayed in the **List window ID** field. 1. In the table, make sure that the **Active** check box is selected to replace the entry window with the substitute window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Parent topic: [Manage substitutes of entry windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/cu-manage-substitutes-entry-window-con/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Activate the replacement of an entry window /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/activate-the-replacement-of-an-entry-window section To replace an entry window with the corresponding substitute window, you enable the replacement in the Lists as entry points (SM208500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate the replacement of an entry window To replace an entry window with the corresponding substitute window, you enable the replacement in the Lists as entry points (SM208500) window. For more information: [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/). To replace an entry window with the corresponding substitute window, you enable the replacement in the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. For more information, see:: [About substitutes for entry windows](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/about-substitutes-for-entry-windows/). 1. Go to the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. 1. In the table, select the **Active** check box in the row of the entry window that you want to replace. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Parent topic: [Manage substitutes of entry windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/cu-manage-substitutes-entry-window-con/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Cancel the replacement of an entry window /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/cancel-the-replacement-of-an-entry-window section You can temporarily cancel the replacement of the entry window with the correspondingsubstitute windows at any time—for example, while you make changes to the substitutewindow —by using the Lists as entry points Lists as entry points (SM208500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cancel the replacement of an entry window You can temporarily cancel the replacement of the entry window with the correspondingsubstitute windows at any time—for example, while you make changes to the substitutewindow —by using the Lists as entry points Lists as entry points (SM208500) window. For more information: [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/). You can temporarily cancel the replacement of the entry window with the correspondingsubstitute windows at any time—for example, while you make changes to the substitutewindow —by using the Lists as entry points [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. Later, you canenable the replacement again, as described in: [Activate the replacement of an entry window](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/activate-the-replacement-of-an-entry-window/). For more information, see:[About substitutes for entry windows](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-subsitutes-of-entry-windows/about-substitutes-for-entry-windows/). 1. Go to the [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) window. 1. In the table, clear the **Active** check box in the row ofthe entry window for which you want to cancel the replacement. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Parent topic: [Manage substitutes of entry windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/cu-manage-substitutes-entry-window-con/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Manage shared filters /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters section Shared filters are the reusable filters that is automatically applied to the specified form for all users in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage shared filters Shared filters are the reusable filters that is automatically applied to the specified form for all users in the system. In this topic, you can information on managing shared filters. About shared filters /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/about-shared-filters page Shared filters are a type of reusable filters that are available for every user of your instance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About shared filters Shared filters are a type of reusable filters that are available for every user of your instance. Shared filters are a type of reusable filters that are available for every user of your instance. You use the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window to create, modify, and delete the shared filters. In this topic, you can find information on managing shared filters. ## Create shared filters You can use one of the following ways to add a shared filter: + By using the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window: By default, every filter you create in the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window is shared. For detailed procedure, see: [Add a system filter](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/add-a-system-filter/). + By creating a filter in a window and marking the filter as shared. For more information about creating filters, see: [About creating temporary or reusable filters](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/about-creating-temporary-or-reusable-filters/). ## Modify shared filters You can modify the conditions and change the category of a shared filter only by using the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window. For detailed procedure, see: [Modify a system filter](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/modify-a-system-filter/). If you make a filter not shared, the filter will become available for editing only in the window for which the filter has been created. ## Delete shared filters You can delete an obsolete shared filter by using the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

 Add a system filter /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/add-a-system-filter section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a system filter 1. Go to the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, specify the settings for the filter: 1. In the **Name** field, type the name of the new filter. The system fills the Filter ID field automatically when you save the filter. 1. In the **Window ID** field, select the window the filter should be applied to. 1. In the **View** window, select the view for the selected window. If the selected screen does not support reusable filters, you won't be able to create a filter. 1. To make the filter applied to the form by default, select the **Is default** check box. 1. For the filter to be used for form dashboards, select the **Is shortcut** check box. 1. In the table, define conditions for the filter. For more information about filter conditions, see: [About creating temporary or reusable filters](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/personalise-the-presentation-of-data/about-creating-temporary-or-reusable-filters/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

 Modify a system filter /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/modify-a-system-filter section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Modify a system filter 1. Go to the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window. 1. In the **Filter ID** field, select a filter. 1. Do any of the following actions to modify the filter: + In the top part, in the **Name** field, type the new filter name. + In the top part, select a filter category or categories. + In the filter conditions table, select the **Active** check boxes to specify the active conditions. + In the filter conditions table, add or delete rows with filter conditions. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. To make the filter unavailable for other users, click **Make filter not shared** on the window toolbar, and then click **Yes** in the **Warning dialog box**.

Related pages

Concepts

 Delete a system filter /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/delete-a-system-filter section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete a system filter 1. Go to the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window. 1. In the **Filter ID** field, select the filter. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. In the pop-up window, click **OK** to confirm.

Related pages

Concepts

 Manage dashboard pages /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages section In Visma Net, a dashboard is a collection of widgets that are displayed on a single page and are designed to give you needed information at a glance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage dashboard pages In Visma Net, a dashboard is a collection of widgets that are displayed on a single page and are designed to give you needed information at a glance. The page that displays the collection is known as a dashboard page. In the following topics, you will find information on managing dashboard pages. About dashboard pages /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-dashboard-pages page In Visma Net, a dashboard refers to a collection of widgets that is displayed on one page. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dashboard pages In Visma Net, a dashboard refers to a collection of widgets that is displayed on one page. In Visma Net, a dashboard refers to a collection of widgets that is displayed on one page. The intention is to give you needed information at a glance. Use dashboards to display vital information for the business processes of your organisation on a single page in Visma Net. The system provides predefined dashboard pages located in specific areas of the site map. Alternatively, you can create and position your own dashboard pages in the site map for optimal convenience. These dashboards can be utilized by users in their daily tasks. In this topic, you can find information on how to: + add new dashboard pages + manage access rights to dashboard pages + reset dashboards ## Adding a new dashboard page New dashboard pages can be added using the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window. Any user with access to this window can: + add + remove + modify the properties of dashboards. To create a new dashboard page, follow these steps: 1. Create a new dashboard page and specify its location in the site map. 1. Select the role for the dashboard owner. Refer to [About access rights to dashboards](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-access-rights-to-dashboards/) for more details. If you are configuring the dashboard, ensure to select an owner role that you are assigned to. Otherwise, you will be working with your personal copy of the dashboard, and other users will not see any widgets that you add. 1. Choose the user roles that should be allowed to view the dashboard page. For more information on user roles, refer to [About role-based access](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-role-based-access/). 1. Optional: Provide users (based on their user roles) with the ability to add, modify, and delete widgets on the dashboard. This capability is set at the dashboard level and applies to all user roles that can view the dashboard. For the detailed procedure of adding a new dashboard, see: [Add a new dashboard page (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/add-a-new-dashboard-page/). After you have created the dashboard page, add the widgets. For details on working with widgets, see:. ## Assigning access rights to dashboards Users who will work with dashboards can be given any of the following access rights capabilities: + Managing dashboard pages: Users with this capability can: + create new dashboard pages + delete dashboard pages + set up access rights to dashboard pages + populate the dashboard pages with widgets With regard to access rights to dashboards, these are the most powerful users. + Configuring an original dashboard: Users with this capability can + modify widgets on an original dashboard + reset all user copies to the original settings. These users are regarded as dashboard owners. + Viewing dashboards: Users with this capability can only view information on a dashboard. These users are the least powerful dashboard users because they cannot modify widgets on a dashboard. + Personalization dashboard: Users with this capability can view and modify widgets on their copy of a dashboard. For details on access rights to dashboards, see: [About access rights to dashboards](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-access-rights-to-dashboards/). ## Resetting dashboard pages When you reset a dashboard, its widgets are replaced with the widgets from the original dashboard. The predefined dashboards settings are derived from the To reset a predefined dashboard, open the dashboard in the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window and click **Reset to predefined** on the window toolbar. The settings for user copies of dashboards, whether created by you or your colleagues, are derived from the original dashboard. To reset all user copies of the dashboard simultaneously, open the dashboard in the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window and click **Reset all user copies**. Users who work with a copy of the dashboard can also reset their copy.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About access rights to dashboards /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-access-rights-to-dashboards page In Visma Net, users can manage, view, and modify widgets on dashboard pages. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About access rights to dashboards In Visma Net, users can manage, view, and modify widgets on dashboard pages. In Visma Net, users can manage, view, and modify widgets on dashboard pages. This topic discusses the access rights capabilities related to dashboard pages. For additional information on dashboard pages, see: [About dashboard pages](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-dashboard-pages/). ## Access rights for managing dashboard pages For users to manage dashboard pages, they must be assigned a user role that has complete access rights to the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window. For additional information on access rights, see [About access rights for roles](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/about-access-rights-for-roles/). Users with the role that has full access to the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window can: + add and remove dashboards + set up access rights to dashboards for user roles + select a user role that will own a dashboard + change the locations of dashboards in the site map and + allow other users to modify dashboards. If you want a user, who has the ability to manage a dashboard page, to also be able to configure an original dashboard (meaning, they can make changes that all users with dashboard access can see), assign this user the role of dashboard owner. ## Access rights for configuring dashboards A dashboard can only be configured by a user assigned the role of the dashboard's owner. For both predefined dashboards and those created in earlier versions of Visma Net, the default owner role is the predefined role **DashboardDesigner**. The role of a dashboard owner can be specified and modified in the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window. For more information, see: [Add a new dashboard page](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/add-a-new-dashboard-page/). A user with a dashboard owner role can design the dashboard from scratch: + add and delete widgets + arrange widgets and + modify widget properties. An owner of a dashboard has the ability to access the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window. They can edit the dashboard properties, given that the owner role has been granted access to this window. ## Access rights for viewing dashboards You can manage the visibility of each dashboard based on user roles using the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window. For more information, refer to: [Add a new dashboard page](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/add-a-new-dashboard-page/). Dashboards created by you or your colleagues can be found at any level of the site map. If a user lacks the necessary access rights to view a dashboard, it will not be visible to them in the user interface. For instance, if you create a dashboard and place it in the Inventory module at the same level as the workspaces, it will be visible to users with the appropriate access rights. For these users, the dashboard name will appear on the main menu alongside the workspace names. Users without the necessary access rights will not see this additional menu item. If a dashboard is located at a workspace level and a user without the necessary access rights attempts to view it, they will see a help topic related to the workspace instead of the dashboard. The widgets displayed to users who can view the dashboard depend on their access rights to the windows from which the widgets' source data is derived. If access to the window is denied for certain users, they will see a placeholder instead. For example, if you add the following widgets to the home page dashboard: Invoices to approve : , which derives data from the [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/) window, and Customer ledger balances : , which derives data from the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) window. Users without access to the [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/) window will only see the **Customer ledger balances** widget upon logging into the system. They will not see the **Invoices to approve** widget on the dashboard. However, if these users have the necessary access rights to personalize dashboards (refer to the following section), they have the option to either delete the hidden widget or modify its properties. ## Access rights for personalising dashboards Users with dashboard access can also be granted the ability to personalise the dashboard, meaning they can configure and modify its widgets. To enable this feature, select the **Allow users to personalise** check box in the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window. When users personalise a dashboard, they are actually working with a copy of the dashboard. This copy is automatically created by the system when a user starts modifying any widget on the dashboard. Users can reset their copies back to the original dashboard. Note that it is also possible to reset all user copies of the dashboard simultaneously. For more information, see: [About dashboard pages](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-dashboard-pages/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Add a new dashboard page /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/add-a-new-dashboard-page section For more information on managing dashboard pages, see: About dashboard pages. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a new dashboard page For more information on managing dashboard pages, see: About dashboard pages. For more information: [About dashboard pages](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-dashboard-pages/). 1. Go to the [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Name** field, type the name of the new dashboard. It should be unique within the system, because it will be used as the ID of the dashboard. 1. Specify location of the dashboard page in one of the following ways: + In the **Sitemap location** field, select a node of the site map where the dashboard should be located. + Click **Add new node** to create a separate node in the site map for the dashboard. 1. Optional: In the **Owner role** field, select a user role to be an owner of the dashboard. 1. Optional: Select the **Allow users to personalise** check box if you want to permit other users who have access to the dashboard to create personal copies of the dashboard. 1. In the **Visible to** table, set up the access rights for the user roles to the dashboard by selecting or clearing the check box in the corresponding row. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The dashboard page is added to the location you have specified.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Configure dashboards /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure dashboards Dashboards - overview /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/dashboards-overview page With Visma Net dashboards, you can monitor 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dashboards - overview With Visma Net dashboards, you can monitor + current financial, + operational, and + organisational information, and analyse real-time trends that relate to their job. With the correct access rights, you can create personalised dashboards. These display the specific information you need, based on your role and responsibilities. Dashboards can display different types of information in various formats, depending on your preferences and the specific data you wish to view: + text, + charts, + graphs, + tables, These topics describe ways to configure and personalise dashboards in Visma Net. The Dashboard page /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/the-dashboard-page page In Visma Net, a dashboard is a collection of widgets that is displayed on a dashboard page. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The Dashboard page In Visma Net, a dashboard is a collection of widgets that is displayed on a dashboard page. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In Visma Net, a dashboard is a collection of widgets that is displayed on a dashboard page. A dashboard page contains buttons you click to invoke dashboard-specific actions, and widgets that aggregate information from other windows. ## The dashboard page title bar The dashboard page title bar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
Design

Switches the dashboard between view mode and design mode.

  • In view mode, you can only view information on the dashboard and cannot edit it.
  • In design mode, you can edit the dashboard layout and add or modify widgets.

This button is visible to users who are assigned the Administrator role or a dashboard owner role, and to users who have created a personal copy of the dashboard by clicking Create user copy.

For details, see: About access rights to dashboards.
Edit layout This button appears only in the design mode an opens the Dashboard layouts dialogue box.
Properties

Opens the Dashboards (SM208600) window, where you can specify the properties of the dashboard.

The button is displayed only in design mode and only if you have access to the Dashboards (SM208600) window.
Reset to default

Replaces the settings of your copy of the dashboard with the settings of the original dashboard.

The button is displayed only in the design mode. The button is available only if you are not the dashboard owner and if you have modified the dashboard.
Create user copy

Creates your personal copy of the dashboard. After you have clicked this button, you can personalise the dashboard. Changes you make to the dashboard will be visible only for you.

The button is displayed only if your system administrator has allowed users to personalise the dashboard.
## The top part In the top part, you can select the values of any parameters, and the system will filter the data displayed in widgets by using these values. Data will be filtered on only those widgets that have the filter settings by the parameters. This section is displayed only if at least one active parameter has been specified in the dashboard settings. ## The dashboard layouts dialog box By using this dialog box, you can change the layout of the dashboard. You can invoke this dialog box by clicking **Edit layout** on the dashboard page title bar. The dialog box has the following elements:
Element Description
Layout variant The list of layouts that can be applied to the dashboard. You can select a layout variant that will organise information on your dashboard appropriately.
OK ( button) Saves the new layout and closes the dialog box.
Cancel ( button) Closes the dialog box without saving any data.
## The widget toolbar For the description of the widget toolbar, see: [The widget toolbar](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/the-widget-toolbar/). Parent topic: [Dashboard reference](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboard-reference/)

Related pages

Concepts

 The widget toolbar /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/the-widget-toolbar section The widget toolbar is located at the top of each widget. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The widget toolbar The widget toolbar is located at the top of each widget. The widget toolbar is located at the top of each widget. The actions that are available to you depend on the mode in which you are working with the dashboard (view or design) and on the widget type.
Mode Action
View mode
  • update the widget (this operation is available for all widget types) and
  • add a new entity (this operation is available for only the table widget).
Design mode
  • delete the widget and edit its properties:
You can switch to design mode only if you have the rights to modify the dashboard on which the widget is added—that is, only if you see the **Design** button on the dashboard toolbar. ## Standard widget toolbar buttons The widget toolbar includes only standard buttons. The following table provides descriptions of the standard buttons of the widget toolbar. |Button|Icon|Description| |---|---|---| |**Update**|![Icons_Refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Refresh.png)|Updates the widget view.| |**Add row**|![Icons_Add_row](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Add_row.png)|Opens the appropriate entry form, so you can add a new record to the generic inquiry selected as the widget source. This button appears only for a table widget and only if the **Enable new record creation** check box is selected on the **Entry point** tab of the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window.| |**Edit**|![Icons_Form_Grid_Views](/media/visma-net-erp/Icons_Form_Grid_Views.png)|Opens the appropriate version of the **Widget properties** dialog box.| |**Delete**|![form_toolbar_buttons_Delete](/media/visma-net-erp/form_toolbar_buttons_Delete.png)|Deletes the widget from the dashboard.| Parent topic: [About dashboard reference](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboard-reference/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About dashboard configuration /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboard-configuration page You can configure a dashboard to meet your needs if an administrator has given you sufficient access rights to the dashboard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dashboard configuration You can configure a dashboard to meet your needs if an administrator has given you sufficient access rights to the dashboard. You can configure a dashboard to meet your needs if an administrator has given you sufficient access rights to the dashboard. When you change the layout of a dashboard, a copy of it is created, so you configure your own copy of the dashboard. This topic provides information on configuring dashboards. ## Preliminary steps Before you modify a dashboard, plan how many widgets and which types you will add. We recommend that you add no more than seven to ten widgets to one dashboard. Otherwise, information on a dashboard may become hard to read for you. If you would like to see more widgets while keeping the dashboard readable, you can use a second monitor or divide widgets between multiple dashboards, based on the widget type or functional scope. ## Configuration steps The process of configuring a dashboard includes the following steps: 1. You open the dashboard that you want to configure. The way you open a dashboard depends on the dashboard location. For details on opening a dashboard page used as the home page or the workspace page, see: [Open a dashboard](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/). If the needed dashboard is located elsewhere on the site map, you navigate there by using the menu and navigation pane. 1. You create your personal copy of the dashboard by clicking the **Create user copy** button on the title bar of the dashboard page. 1. You switch the dashboard to the design mode by clicking the **Design** button on the title bar of the dashboard page. 1. Optional: You add new widgets to the dashboard. For details, see the topic Addition of widgets to a dashboard below. 1. Optional: You remove widgets from the dashboard if you no longer need to have the information they display at hand. For details, see: [Arrange widgets on a dashboard](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/arrange-widgets-on-a-dashboard/). 1. Optional: You edit the settings of a widget by clicking **Edit** in the widget toolbar to change its type or the data. For details, see the topic Addition of widgets to a dashboard below. 1. Optional: You select a dashboard layout template and place widgets on the dashboard for convenient viewing of information. For details, see: [Arrange widgets on a dashboard](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/arrange-widgets-on-a-dashboard/). 1. Optional: If you don't want to preserve the changes you have made, you reset the dashboard by clicking **Reset to default** on the dashboard title bar to replace its widgets with the widgets from the original dashboard. ## Addition of widgets to a dashboard You can use widgets of different types on a dashboard. For more information on widget types, see:. See the following procedures for details on adding the supported types of widgets: + [Add a doughnut chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-doughnut-chart/) + [Add a line chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-line-chart/) + + [Add a stacked column chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-column-chart/) + [Add a bar chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-bar-chart/) + [Add a stacked bar chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-bar-chart/) + [Add a funnel chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-funnel-chart/) + [Add a data table widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-data-table-widget/) + [Add an embedded page widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-an-embedded-page-widget/) + [Add a Power BI tile widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-power-bi-tile-widget/) + [Add a scorecard KPI widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-scorecard-kpi-widget/) + [Add a trend card KPI widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-trend-card-kpi-widget/) + ## Update of information on widgets You can refresh the information on a particular widget by clicking **Refresh** in the top left corner of a widget toolbar. ## Configuration of colours for chart widgets You can specify custom colours for series in chart widgets. Series can be displayed on the following types of chart widgets: line, column, stacked column, bar, and stacked bar. You may need to change the default colours of series, for example, to make the dashboard correspond to your corporate style. To specify the colours depending on the series values, you should use expressions in the **Colour** field of the **Chart settings** dialog box. For example: To make a chart element red if the series value is **USD** and blue if the series value is **EUR**, you would specify the following expression: `=Switch(Value = 'USD', '#FF0000', Value = 'EUR', '#0A26FF')`. About dashboards and widgets /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboards-and-widgets page In Visma Net, a dashboard is a collection of widgets that are displayed on a single page and are designed to give you needed information at a glance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About dashboards and widgets In Visma Net, a dashboard is a collection of widgets that are displayed on a single page and are designed to give you needed information at a glance. In Visma Net, a **dashboard** is a collection of widgets that are displayed on a single page and are designed to give you needed information at a glance. A **widget** is a small component that delivers a particular type of information that you view or manage by using Visma Net. From the dashboard, you can click any widget to further explore the information it contains. The page that displays the collection of widgets is referred to as a **Dashboard page**. Dashboards may serve different purposes, and if you have appropriate permissions, you can create dashboards that display information from a variety of sources, including Visma Net inquiries and even external pages. If the source of the information shown on the dashboard is an Visma Net window, the data from the window can be displayed in various types of charts and tables, with the data filtered to meet the particular selection criteria according to your needs. In this topic, you can find information about the supported types of widgets. ## Types of widgets You can add the following types of widgets to the dashboards: Charts : Graphical representations of data from Visma Net windows. You can use charts of various types, such as bar charts and line charts. Data tables : Data from an Visma Net window arranged into rows and columns. Embedded pages : Documents or images that are stored on external resources, such as cloud storage, and should be displayed on an Visma Net dashboard. Power BI tiles : Charts, scorecards, and other analytical information that is represented on Power BI dashboards designed by your organization. Scorecard KPIs : Parameters that are important for the business processes of your organisation and that should be monitored on a daily basis. Trend card KPIs : Parameters whose dynamic change is important for business processes of your organisation. For more information on managing widgets, see: [About dashboard configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboard-configuration/) in the Visma Net User guide.

Related pages

Concepts

 About chart widgets /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-chart-widgets page You can use various types of charts, which are graphical representations of data, as widgets on dashboards. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About chart widgets You can use various types of charts, which are graphical representations of data, as widgets on dashboards. You can use various types of charts, which are graphical representations of data, as widgets on dashboards. If it is well designed, a chart can convey ideas, such as trends or comparisons, that might not be apparent if the data were shown in a table or presented as text. When you use a chart, be careful about its design because poor choices can yield a distorted picture of the data and the relationships it represents. Carefully select the chart type for the data you wish to display. Charts are most effective when the number of data points displayed gives the viewer a clear picture of the underlying information. Some charts, such as line charts, work well with numerous data points, while others, such as doughnut charts, better convey information if you use fewer data points. In Visma Net, you can add the following types of charts to your dashboards: ## The doughnut chart A doughnut chart is a circular chart (with a hole in the middle) divided into sectors or parts that illustrate proportion. This type of chart works best when you want to show how the parts relate to the whole at a fixed point in time. Although a doughnut chart is visually appealing, it is seldom the best chart to use when you want to compare the parts to one another. Also, a doughnut chart is not designed to show changes over time. With a doughnut chart, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this chart as the data source + Drill down to the details of a particular chart sector + Update the chart view + View the chart legend + Highlight particular sectors on the chart + Exclude particular sectors from the chart + View details of particular sectors on the chart If you have permissions to edit the dashboard, you can also: + Convert the chart to another chart type + Change the properties of the chart To define a doughnut chart, do the following: 1. Select the category—such as customer name, financial period, or cash account—that will be displayed as individual sectors on the doughnut. In the following doughnut chart, the **Customer name** is the category. 1. Select one measurable entity (such as total sales, beginning balance, or total payments) that will define the size of the sectors. The chart legend can be opened as a pop-up window or located on the widget near the chart. When you are viewing a chart legend, you can perform the following actions: + Point to the desired legend item to view its details on the chart. + Click a legend item to exclude the associated sector from the chart. The share of the excluded sector is then proportionally distributed among the remaining sectors on the chart. For a detailed description of how to add a doughnut chart, see: [Add a doughnut chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-doughnut-chart/). ## The line chart A line chart is a type of chart that displays information as a series of data points connected by straight line segments. Line charts can be especially valuable when you want to plot some type of data over time, such as by financial period. With a line chart widget, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this chart as the data source + Drill down to the details of a particular line point + Update the chart view + View the details of the data points of the chart + Zoom in on particular segments of the chart (for details see: [Zoom in on and out of a chart region](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/zoom-in-on-and-out-of-a-chart-region/) ) If you have permissions to edit the dashboard, you have the following additional capabilities: + Convert the chart to another chart type + Change the properties of the chart. To define a line chart, do the following: 1. Select one entity to provide the horizontal axis values, such as financial period. In the following line chart, the **Financial period** is displayed on the horizontal axis. 1. Select a measurable entity to provide the vertical axis values, such as total sales, pending balance, or beginning balance. In the following line chart, the **Salesperson sales** is the measurable entity. 1. Optional: Select an entity, such as branch or salesperson, to display its values as separate lines on the same chart (series). In the following line chart, the **Salesperson name** is the series. You can customize line colours for particular values. For a detailed description of how to add a line chart, see: [Add a line chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-line-chart/). ## The column chart A column chart is a chart with bars whose lengths are proportional to the values they represent. Column charts are used for plotting data that has discrete values. They are generally a better choice than doughnut charts when you want to show how parts compare to one another, because it is easier for the viewer to estimate the relative column height than to assess the size of doughnut chart sectors. With a widget based on a column chart, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this chart as the data source + Drill down to the details of a particular column + Update the chart view + View details of chart columns + Zoom in on particular regions of the chart (for details see: [Zoom in on and out of a chart region](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/zoom-in-on-and-out-of-a-chart-region/) ) If you have permissions to edit the dashboard, you have the following additional capabilities: + Convert the chart to another chart type + Change the properties of the chart To define a column chart, do the following: 1. Select one entity to provide the horizontal axis values, such as customer number, supplier number, financial period, or cash account. In the following column chart, the **Customer name** is the displayed on the horizontal axis. 1. Select a measurable entity to provide the vertical axis values, such as total sales, pending balance, or beginning balance. In the following column chart, the **Salesperson sales** is the measurable entity. 1. Optional: Select an entity, such as branch, to display its values as separate columns for each value on the horizontal axis (series). In the following column chart with series, the **Salesperson name** is the series. You can customise column colours for particular values. For a detailed description of how to add a column chart, see: [Add a column chart](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/dasboardswidgets/dw-add-column-char-task/). ## The stacked column chart A stacked column chart illustrates the relationship of the parts to the whole. The columns in a stacked column chart are divided into legend categories, and each column represents a total. With a widget of a stacked column chart, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this chart as the data source + Drill down to the details of a particular column sector + Update the chart view + View details of the chart columns + Zoom in on particular regions of the chart (for details see: [Zoom in on and out of a chart region](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/zoom-in-on-and-out-of-a-chart-region/) ) If you have permissions to edit the dashboard, you have the following additional capabilities: + Convert the chart to another chart type + Change the properties of the chart To define a stacked column chart, do the following: 1. Select the entity to provide the horizontal axis values, such as financial period or account class. In the following stacked column chart, the **Financial period** is displayed on the horizontal axis. 1. Select a measurable entity, such as sales total, debit total, credit total, ending balance, or beginning balance. In the following stacked column chart, the **Invoiced items** is the measurable entity. 1. Select an entity, such as customer number, supplier number, currency ID, or account type, to be displayed as column sectors (series). In the following stacked column chart, the **Customer name** is the series. You can customise sector colours for particular values. For a detailed description of how to add a stacked column chart, see: [Add a stacked column chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-column-chart/). ## The bar chart A bar chart is a chart with rectangular bars that are plotted horizontally and have lengths proportional to the values that they represent. Bar charts are used for clearly showing data that has discrete values. With a bar chart widget, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this chart as the data source + Drill down to the details of a particular bar + Update the chart view + View details of the chart bars + Zoom in on particular regions of the chart (for details see: [Zoom in on and out of a chart region](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/zoom-in-on-and-out-of-a-chart-region/) ) If you have permissions to edit the dashboard, you have the following additional capabilities: + Convert the chart to another chart type + Change the properties of the chart To define a bar chart, do the following: 1. Select a measurable entity to provide the horizontal axis values, such as total sales, pending balance, or beginning balance. In the following bar chart, the **Salesperson sales** is the measurable entity. 1. Select one entity to provide the vertical axis values, such as customer number, supplier number, financial period, or cash account. In the following bar chart, the **Customer name** is the displayed on the vertical axis. 1. Optional: Select an entity, such as branch, to display its values as separate bars for each value on the vertical axis (series). For a detailed description of how to add a bar chart, see: [Add a bar chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-bar-chart/). ## The stacked bar chart A stacked bar chart is an inverted stacked column chart in which the horizontal and vertical axes are reversed. A stacked bar chart also illustrates the relationship of the parts to the whole, and its bars are divided into legend categories, with each bar representing a total. With a widget of a stacked bar chart, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this chart as the data source + Drill down to the details of a particular bar sector + Update the chart view + View details of chart bars + Zoom in on particular regions of the chart (for details see: [Zoom in on and out of a chart region](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/zoom-in-on-and-out-of-a-chart-region/) ) If you have permissions to edit the dashboard, you have the following additional capabilities: + Convert the chart to another chart type + Change the properties of the chart To define a stacked bar chart, do the following: 1. Select a measurable entity to provide the horizontal axis values, such as sales total, debit total, credit total, ending balance, or beginning balance. In the following stacked bar chart, the **Invoiced items** is the measurable entity. 1. Select the category for the vertical axis, such as financial period or account class. In the following stacked bar chart, the **Financial period** is displayed on the vertical axis. 1. Select an entity, such as customer number, supplier number, currency ID, or account type, to be displayed as bar sectors (series). For a detailed description of how to add a stacked bar chart, see: [Add a stacked bar chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-bar-chart/). ## The funnel chart A funnel chart is a chart with no axes that shows sectors or slices of data in a funnel shape. Each slice represents a portion of the whole, or the slices may represent a process flow, with each slice (or part of the process) having data filtered out from the previous slice. For example: With a sales process, you could use a funnel chart, with each slice corresponding to a stage in the process and showing the amount of potential revenue. With a funnel chart widget, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this chart as the data source + Drill down to the details of a particular chart slice + Update the chart view + View the chart legend + Highlight particular slices on the chart + Exclude particular slices from the chart + View details of particular slices on the chart If you have permissions to edit the dashboard, you have the following additional capabilities: + Convert the chart to another chart type + Change the properties of the chart To define a funnel chart, do the following: 1. Select the category—such as customer name, financial period, or cash account—that will be displayed as individual slice of the funnel. In the following funnel chart, the **Customer name** is the category. 1. Select one measurable entity (such as total sales, beginning balance, or total payments) that will define the size of the slices. The chart legend can be opened as a pop-up window or located on the widget near the chart. When you are viewing a chart legend, you can perform the following actions: + Point to the desired legend item to view its details on the chart. + Click a legend item to exclude the associated slice from the chart. The share of the excluded slice is then proportionally distributed among the remaining slices on the chart. For a detailed description of how to add a funnel chart, see: [Add a funnel chart](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-funnel-chart/). You can easily change the type of a particular chart without changing its properties, such as chart axis values or sort order, as long as the data requirements for both charts are equivalent. For example: You can create a line chart widget and later convert this widget to another chart type with just a couple of clicks. Parent topic: [Dashboards - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/dashboards-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About data table widgets /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-data-table-widgets page You can use tables as widgets on dashboards. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About data table widgets You can use tables as widgets on dashboards. You can use tables as widgets on dashboards. A table is an arrangement of numerical data in rows and columns; it is designed to show a set of related facts in a compact, comprehensive form. Although tables are not as eye-catching as charts, they are often the best way to help the viewer grasp key ideas about the data. A table is often a better choice than a chart when you want to show multiple types (columns) of data. When adding a table, you need to specify the following: + The inquiry form to provide data for the dashboard title for the table + The columns to be displayed on the dashboard The widget contains the standard toolbar, which is described in [The widget toolbar](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/the-widget-toolbar/). By using a table widget, you can do the following: + Open the window used by this table as the data source + Update the widget view + Drill down to the details of the rows in the table + Change the order of columns + Adjust the width of columns + Add new records to the generic inquiry that is used as a data source for the table widget When you open the source window used by the table or drill down to the details of the table rows, you can perform data navigation and processing actions that apply to the window. For the step-by-step procedure on how to add a table to a dashboard, see: [Add a data table widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-data-table-widget/). Parent topic: [Dashboards - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/dashboards-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About embedded page widgets /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-embedded-page-widgets page You can embed a page from an external website as a widget on a dashboard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About embedded page widgets You can embed a page from an external website as a widget on a dashboard. You can embed a page from an external website as a widget on a dashboard. You may want to display important information from external systems (for example, a currency rate or a document from external cloud storage) in Visma Net to provide yourself and your colleagues (if they also use the dashboard) with consolidated information on one page. When adding a page, you need to specify a link to the external page. Please note that a valid URL looks like this: You also have the option to add dashboard parameters to the link. By choosing to use the parameters, the system will add these to the source URL as query parameters. In this way the widget can be used to filter and customise the information displayed e.g. customer, project, and branch information. The following is an example: param1=param1Value¶m2=param2Value. The widget contains the standard toolbar, which is described in [The widget toolbar](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/the-widget-toolbar/). By using an embedded page widget, you can open the source web page and update the widget view. With some cloud storage providers, you can modify views of documents in the application where they are displayed. For the step-by-step procedure on how to add a web page to a dashboard, see: [Add an embedded page widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-an-embedded-page-widget/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About power BI tile widgets /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-power-bi-tile-widgets page You can embed a Power BI tile on a dashboard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About power BI tile widgets You can embed a Power BI tile on a dashboard. You can embed a Power BI tile on a dashboard. If you use Power BI tools for the monitoring and analysis of various data in your organization, you can display this information in Visma Net to provide yourself and your colleagues (if they also use the dashboard) with all necessary business indicators on one page. When embedding a Power BI tile as a widget on an Visma Net dashboard, you need to specify the parameters that your system administrator obtained after registering your Visma Net instance on Microsoft Azure; you also specify a Power BI dashboard and a Power BI tile from this dashboard. By using a Power BI tile widget, you can open the source Power BI dashboard and update the widget view. For the step-by-step procedure on how to add a Power BI tile to an Visma Net dashboard, see: [Add a Power BI tile widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-power-bi-tile-widget/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About scorecard KPI widgets /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-scorecard-kpi-widgets page You can add a scorecard KPI (key performance indicator) widget to a dashboard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About scorecard KPI widgets You can add a scorecard KPI (key performance indicator) widget to a dashboard. You can add a scorecard KPI (key performance indicator) widget to a dashboard. Scorecards are useful when you need to monitor single parameters that are critical for particular business processes in your organisation. For example: A scorecard can display the number of new support cases from customers. When adding a scorecard KPI widget to a dashboard, you have to specify the following: + The inquiry form to provide data for the dashboard + The field from the inquiry to be displayed on the dashboard + The threshold values for warnings and alarms + The colours for the widget background The widget contains the standard toolbar, which is described in: [The widget toolbar](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/the-widget-toolbar/). By using the scorecard KPI widget, you can open the form used as a data source by this widget and update the widget view. For the step-by-step procedure on how to add a scorecard KPI widget to a dashboard, see: [Add a scorecard KPI widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-scorecard-kpi-widget/). [About dashboards and widgets](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-dashboards-and-widgets/)

Related pages

Tasks

 About trend card KPI widgets /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/about-trend-card-kpi-widgets page You can add a trend card KPI (key performance indicator) widget on a dashboard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About trend card KPI widgets You can add a trend card KPI (key performance indicator) widget on a dashboard. You can add a trend card KPI (key performance indicator) widget on a dashboard. A trend card KPI widget is useful when you want to display a trend of metrics that change over time. For example: You can display the total sum of closed deals in the current month in comparison to the sum in the previous month and see if it increases or decreases. The trend card widget consists of the following parts: 1. An arrow that shows whether the trend is rising or falling 1. The trend card title 1. The absolute difference between the current KPI value and the previous one 1. The difference in the percent between the current KPI value and the previous one 1. The current KPI value The colour of the background indicates whether a trend is rising, falling, or flat. When adding a trend card KPI widget to a dashboard, you need to select the following: + The inquiry form to provide data for the dashboard + The field from the inquiry to be displayed on the dashboard + The timeline field from the inquiry to provide data about dates + The period for comparison The KPI values to be displayed on the trend card KPI widget are calculated based on the selected period, the aggregate function, and the current business date. For example, if you want to display the number of support cases and compare it with the number in the previous month on the trend card KPI widget, you specify the **Last month** value in the **Period** field and the **Count** value in the **Aggregate function** field. Suppose that the current business date is July 14, 2019. To find the current KPI value, the system counts the number of cases from July 1, 2019, to July 14, 2019. To find the difference, the system counts the number of cases in the previous calendar month (from June 1, 2019, to June 14, 2019) and calculates the difference between the current value and the previous one. Then the absolute difference, the difference expressed as a in percent, and the current number of cases are displayed on the widget. By using the trend card KPI widget, you can open the form used as a data source for this widget and update the widget view. For the step-by-step procedure on how to add a trend card KPI widget to a dashboard, see: [Add a trend card KPI widget](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-trend-card-kpi-widget/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Open a dashboard /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard section The way you open a dashboard depends on the dashboard location. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Open a dashboard The way you open a dashboard depends on the dashboard location. The way you open a dashboard depends on the dashboard location. In this topic, you will find information about opening dashboards from specific locations. ## Open the home dashboard On the main menu, click the banner with the Visma Net logo. ## Open a workspace dashboard 1. On the main menu, select the workspace whose dashboard you want to view. 1. In the navigation pane, click the workspace name. If you have sufficient access rights, you can configure the dashboard as you need. Add a doughnut chart /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-doughnut-chart page You can add to a dashboard a doughnut chart widget based on an inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a doughnut chart You can add to a dashboard a doughnut chart widget based on an inquiry window of Visma Net. ## Open the Add widget dialog box 1. On the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Chart**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. ## Specify the settings that are common for all chart types 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window that should provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that should be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Configure** to open the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Chart type** field, select **Doughnut**. 1. Optional: In the **Legend position** field, change the location of the legend on the widget. ## In the Categories section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select a column from the source window whose values should be displayed as individual sectors on the doughnut. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. ## In the Values section, do the following 1. In the **Value** field, select the column from the source window to provide the values for the categories. 1. In the **Aggregation** field, select the aggregate function to be applied to the field selected in the **Value** field. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes and close the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the chart to the dashboard. Add a line chart /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-line-chart page You can add to a dashboard a line chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a line chart You can add to a dashboard a line chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. You can add to a dashboard a line chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. Once you have added and configured the line chart, you can zoom in on a region of it. ## Open the Add widget dialog box 1. On the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Chart**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. ## Specify the settings that are common for all chart types as follows 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window that should provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that should be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Configure** to open the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Chart type** field, select **Line**. 1. Optional: In the **Legend position** field, change the location of the legend on the widget. ## In the Categories section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select the column from the source window to provide the values for the horizontal axis. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. ## Optional: In the Series section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select the column from the source window whose values will be displayed as separate lines in the data area of the chart. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Optional: In the **Colour** field, specify the custom colours of chart elements for values defined in the **Series** section. Use expressions to specify a colour depending on a value. For example: To make a chart element red if a field value is **USD** and blue if a field value is **EUR**, specify the following expression: `=Switch(Value = 'USD', '#FF0000', Value = 'EUR', '#0A26FF')`. ## In the Values section, do the following 1. In the **Value** field, select the column from the source window to provide the values for the categories. 1. In the **Aggregation** field, select the aggregate function to be applied to the field selected in the **Value** field. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes and close the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the chart to the dashboard. ## Parent topic Add a stacked column chart /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-column-chart page You can add to a dashboard a widget of a stacked column chart, which can be based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a stacked column chart You can add to a dashboard a widget of a stacked column chart, which can be based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. ## Open the Add widget dialog box 1. On the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Chart**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. ## Specify the settings that are common for all chart types as follows 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window that should provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that should be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Configure** to open the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Chart type** field, select **Stacked column**. 1. Optional: In the **Legend position** field, change the location of the legend on the widget. ## In the Categories section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select a column from the source window to provide the values for the horizontal axis. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. ## Optional: In the Series section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select the column from the source window whose values will be displayed as separate lines in the data area of the chart. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Optional: In the **Colour** field, specify the custom colours of chart elements for values defined in the **Series** section. Use expressions to specify a colour depending on a value. For example: To make a chart element red if a field value is **USD** and blue if a field value is **EUR**, specify the following expression: `=Switch(Value = 'USD', '#FF0000', Value = 'EUR', '#0A26FF')`. ## In the Values section, do the following 1. In the **Value** field, select the column from the source window to provide the values for the categories. 1. In the **Aggregation** field, select the aggregate function to be applied to the field selected in the **Value** field. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes and close the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the chart to the dashboard. Add a bar chart /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-bar-chart page You can add to a dashboard a bar chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a bar chart You can add to a dashboard a bar chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. ## Open the Add widget dialog box 1. On the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Chart**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. For a detailed description of the **Widget properties** dialog box for charts, see: [Add widget dialog box for chart widgets](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/widget-dialog-boxes/add-widget-dialog-box-for-chart-widgets/). ## Specify the settings that are common for all chart types as follows 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window that should provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that should be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Configure** to open the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Chart type** field, select **Bar**. 1. Optional: In the **Legend position** field, change the location of the legend on the widget. ## In the Categories section, do the following 1. In the **Value** field, select a column from the source window to be displayed on the horizontal axis and used as a source for the data area. 1. In the **Aggregation** field, select the aggregate function to be applied to the field selected in the **Value** field. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes and close the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the chart to the dashboard. 1. In the **Legend** field, select a column from the source window to provide the values for the vertical axis. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. ## Optional: In the Series section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select the column from the source window whose values will be displayed as separate lines in the data area of the chart. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Optional: In the **Colour** field, specify the custom colours of chart elements for values defined in the **Series** section. Use expressions to specify a colour depending on a value. For example: To make a chart element red if a field value is **USD** and blue if a field value is **EUR**, specify the following expression: `=Switch(Value = 'USD', '#FF0000', Value = 'EUR', '#0A26FF')`. ## In the Values section, do the following 1. In the **Value** field, select the column from the source window to provide the values for the categories. 1. In the **Aggregation** field, select the aggregate function to be applied to the field selected in the **Value** field. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes and close the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the chart to the dashboard. Add a stacked bar chart /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-stacked-bar-chart page You can add to a dashboard a widget of a stacked bar chart that is based on any inquiry window of Visma Net.. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a stacked bar chart You can add to a dashboard a widget of a stacked bar chart that is based on any inquiry window of Visma Net.. This topic describes how you add a stacked bar chart to a dashboard. ## Open the Add widget dialog box 1. On the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Chart**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. ## Specify the settings that are common for all chart types as follows 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window that should provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that should be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Configure** to open the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Chart type** field, select **Stacked bar**. 1. Optional: In the **Legend position** field, change location of the legend on the widget. ## In the Categories section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select a column from the source window to provide the values for the vertical axis. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. ## Optional: In the Series section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select the column from the source window whose values will be displayed as separate lines in the data area of the chart. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Optional: In the **Colour** field, specify the custom colours of chart elements for values defined in the **Series** section. Use expressions to specify a colour depending on a value. For example: To make a chart element red if a field value is **USD** and blue if a field value is **EUR**, specify the following expression: `=Switch(Value = 'USD', '#FF0000', Value = 'EUR', '#0A26FF')`. ## In the Values section, do the following 1. In the **Value** field, select the column from the source window to provide the values for the categories. 1. In the **Aggregation** field, select the aggregate function to be applied to the field selected in the **Value** field. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes and close the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the chart to the dashboard. Add a funnel chart /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-funnel-chart page You can add to a dashboard a funnel chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a funnel chart You can add to a dashboard a funnel chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. You can add to a dashboard a funnel chart widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. ## Open the Add widget dialog box 1. On the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Chart**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. ## Specify the settings that are common for all chart types as follows 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window that should provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that should be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Configure** to open the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Chart type** field, select **Funnel**. 1. Optional: In the **Legend position** field, change the location of the legend on the widget. ## In the Categories section, do the following 1. In the **Legend** field, select a column from the source window to be displayed as individual slices in the funnel. 1. Define the sorting of the values. In the **Sort by** fields, select the sequence to be sorted and the sorting order. 1. If you want to change the default maximum number of values (10) to be individually shown on the chart, specify the maximum number of values in the **Maximum number of values shown** field. (The system selects the largest values first.) 1. If you want to display the sum of the remaining values as a single element on the chart, select the **Show sum of other entries** check box. 1. Optional: If you have selected a date field in the **Legend** field, in the **Date rounding** field, select the part of the date field that will be shown on the widget. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. ## In the Values section, do the following 1. In the **Value** field, select the column from the source window to provide the values for the categories. 1. In the **Aggregation** field, select the aggregate function to be applied to the field selected in the **Value** field. 1. In the **Format** field, specify the format of the numeric and date fields if it should differ from the original format. 1. Click **OK** to save your changes and close the **Chart settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the chart to the dashboard. **Parent topic:** [Configure dashboards - overview](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/dw-configure-dashboards-con/) Add a data table widget /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-data-table-widget page You can add to a dashboard a data table widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a data table widget You can add to a dashboard a data table widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. You can add to a dashboard a data table widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. For more information on table widgets, see: About dashboards. This topic describes the process of adding a data table widget to a dashboard. 1. Open the **Add widget** dialog box as follows: 1. Open the dashboard where you want to add a widget. 1. In the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window that will provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that will be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: Set up the height of the widget and the number of records to be displayed on the widget as follows: + If you want to display a certain number of records on the widget, select the **Automatically adjust height** check box, and in the **Record limit** field, specify the number of records or leave the default value. With these settings, the widget height will be adjusted automatically by the system according to the number of records specified in the **Record limit** field. (You cannot adjust the widget height manually.) + If the widget size is more important to you than the particular number of records on the widget, you need to make sure that the **Automatically adjust height** check box is cleared, and adjust the widget height manually. The system will limit the number of records automatically according to the widget height. 1. Click **Column settings** to open the **Column settings** dialog box. 1. In the **Column settings** dialog box, configure the list of columns that should be displayed on the widget as follows, and then click **OK**: + To remove a column from the list of selected columns, double-click the column name in the **Selected columns** list. The column name is moved to the **Available columns** list. + To add a column to the list of selected columns, double-click the column name in the **Available columns** list. The column name is moved to the **Selected columns** list. + To arrange the order of columns in the **Selected columns** list, select the column name that should be moved to another place and click Move up or Move down. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. In the **Widget properties** dialog box, click **Finish** to add the table widget to the dashboard. Add an embedded page widget /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-an-embedded-page-widget page You can add to a dashboard a widget with a page from an external website. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add an embedded page widget You can add to a dashboard a widget with a page from an external website. You can add to a dashboard a widget with a page from an external website. ## Add an embedded page to a dashboard 1. Open the **Add widget** dialog box as follows: 1. Open the dashboard where you want to add a widget. 1. In the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add a widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Embedded page**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. 1. In the **Source** field, type the URL of the web page that should be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Optional: Select the **Use dashboard parameters** check box to use dashboard parameters in the URL, and display filtered information from the source. 1. If the check box is selected, the system will display the read-only field **Preview parameters**, where you will see a preview of a parameter in the format: ProjectId=[ProjectId]. The system will later replace the parameter name with the specific dynamic value for that parameter. 1. **Note**: For each widget you want to configure to include parameters on the external link, you need to: 1. select the check box **Use dashboard parameters** in the Widget properties dialog box, 1. for the relevant parameter(s), select the check box **Use in widget Embedded page** on the **Dashboards page (SM208600)**, to allow its use in an Embedded page widget. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Finish** to add the embedded page widget to the dashboard. Add a Power BI tile widget /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-power-bi-tile-widget page You can add to a dashboard a widget with a Power BI tile. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a Power BI tile widget You can add to a dashboard a widget with a Power BI tile. You can add to a dashboard a widget with a Power BI tile. This topic describes how you add a Power BI tile widget to a dashboard in Visma Net. ## Before you begin Before adding a Power BI tile widget on a dashboard, ask your administrator for the client ID and client secret that he or she received after registering your Visma Net instance on Microsoft Azure for Power BI. ## Add a Power BI tile widget 1. Open the **Add widget** dialog box as follows: 1. Open the dashboard where you want to add a widget. 1. In the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Power BI tile**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. 1. In the **Client ID** field, paste the client ID that your system administrator has provided. 1. In the **Client secret** field, paste the client secret that your system administrator has provided. 1. Click **Sign in** to log in to the Microsoft Power BI website. After the successful login, you will be automatically redirected to Visma Net. Notice that the **Dashboard** and **Tile** fields appear in the **Widget properties** dialog box. 1. In the **Dashboard** field, select the Power BI dashboard with the tile that you want to embed in the Visma Net dashboard. 1. In the **Tile** field, select the Power BI tile that you want to embed in the Visma Net dashboard. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Finish** to add the Power BI tile widget to the dashboard. Add a scorecard KPI widget /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-scorecard-kpi-widget page You can add to a dashboard a scorecard KPI (Key Performance Indicator) widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a scorecard KPI widget You can add to a dashboard a scorecard KPI (Key Performance Indicator) widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. You can add to a dashboard a scorecard KPI (Key Performance Indicator) widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 1. Open the **Add widget** dialog box as follows: 1. Open the dashboard where you want to add a widget. 1. In the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Scorecard KPI**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window to provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that will be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Scorecard title** field, type the caption of the scorecard parameter to be displayed in the scorecard area. 1. In the **Field to aggregate** field, select the field from the selected inquiry window to be displayed on the widget. 1. In the **Aggregate function** field, select the function to aggregate the values of the selected inquiry field on the widget. 1. Specify the alarm settings for the widget as follows: 1. In the **Normal level** field, specify the normal threshold of an aggregated field value. 1. In the **Alarm level** field, specify the alarm threshold of an aggregated field value. An employee of your company who monitors the dashboard should pay attention to the parameter if it is close to or greater than this threshold. 1. In the **Normal colour** field, select the colour of the widget background to be used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the **Field to aggregate** field is less than or equal to the value specified in the **Normal level** field. 1. In the **Warning colour** field, select the colour of the widget background to be used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the **Field to aggregate** field is between the values specified in the **Normal level** and **Alarm level** fields. 1. In the **Alarm colour** field, select the colour of the widget background to be used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the **Field to aggregate** field is equal to or greater than the value specified in the **Alarm level** field. 1. If you want to manually specify the font size to be used on the widget, make sure that the **Automatically adjust font size** check box is cleared, and in the **Font size** field, specify the font size. Otherwise, the font size will be adjusted automatically by the system. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Finish** to add the scorecard KPI widget to the dashboard. Add a trend card KPI widget /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/add-a-trend-card-kpi-widget page You can add to a dashboard a trend card KPI (Key Performance Indicator) widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a trend card KPI widget You can add to a dashboard a trend card KPI (Key Performance Indicator) widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. You can add to a dashboard a trend card KPI (Key Performance Indicator) widget based on any inquiry window of Visma Net. For details on trend card KPI widgets, see:. 1. Open the **Add widget** dialog box as follows: 1. Open the dashboard where you want to add a widget. 1. On the dashboard title bar, click **Design** to switch to design mode. 1. In one of the place holders in the widgets area, click **Add a new widget** to open the **Add widget** dialog box. 1. In the list of widgets, click **Trend card KPI**, and then click **Next** to open the **Widget properties** dialog box. 1. In the **Inquiry screen** field, select the inquiry window to provide the source data for the widget. 1. Optional: Click **Inquiry parameters** to change the default parameters for the selected inquiry. 1. Optional: In the **Shared filter to apply** field, select the shared filter that should be used to filter the data shown in the widget. 1. Optional: In the **Trend card title** field, type the name of the trend card parameter to be displayed in the trend card area. 1. In the **Field to aggregate** field, select the field from the selected inquiry window to be used for calculating the values that will be displayed on the widget. 1. In the **Aggregate function** field, select the function to aggregate the values of the selected inquiry field on the widget. 1. Specify the highlighting settings for the widget as follows: 1. In the **Time-line field** field, select the field of the date type from the selected inquiry window to be used for counting trends. 1. In the **Period** field, select the time period with which the comparison of the selected field is performed. 1. In the **Rising trend colour** field, select the colour values. 1. In the **Rising trend colour** field, select the colour of the widget background to be used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the **Field to aggregate** field rises in comparison to the period selected in the **Period** field. 1. In the **Flat trend colour** field, select the colour of the widget background to be used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the **Field to aggregate** field stays the same in comparison to the period selected in the **Period** field. 1. In the **Falling trend colour** field, select the colour of the widget background to be used when the aggregate value of the field selected in the **Field to aggregate** field decreases in comparison to the period selected in the **Period** field. 1. If you want to manually specify the font size to be used on the widget, make sure that the **Automatically adjust font size** check box is cleared, and in the **Font size** field, specify the font size. Otherwise, the font size will be adjusted automatically by the system. 1. Optional: In the **Caption** field, type the name of the widget to be displayed on the dashboard. 1. Click **Finish** to add the trend card KPI widget to the dashboard. Arrange widgets on a dashboard /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/arrange-widgets-on-a-dashboard section You can change the layout of a dashboard in a number of ways, as outlined in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Arrange widgets on a dashboard You can change the layout of a dashboard in a number of ways, as outlined in this topic. You can change the layout of a dashboard in a number of ways, as outlined in this topic. ## Change the layout of a dashboard Click **Edit layout** on the title bar of the dashboard window to change the dashboard layout template. ## Change the position of a widget Drag the widget by its title bar to move it to the needed location on the dashboard. ## Resize a widget Drag any of the corners or borders of the widget to resize it as you want. ## Remove a widget from a dashboard 1. Open the dashboard whose widget you want to remove. 1. In the widget toolbar, click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png) (the **Remove** button). Zoom in on and out of a chart region /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/open-a-dashboard/zoom-in-on-and-out-of-a-chart-region page On a chart of any type, except doughnut and funnel charts, you can zoom in and out of any region: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Zoom in on and out of a chart region On a chart of any type, except doughnut and funnel charts, you can zoom in and out of any region: + To zoom in of a chart region, drag the mouse pointer to create a selection around the area where you want to zoom in. + To zoom out to the left of the chart title, click **Refresh**. Parent topic: [Dashboards - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/configure-dashboards/dashboards-overview/) Customisation windows /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows section On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customisation windows On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. ## List of windows [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) [Lists as entry points (SM208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500/) [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) [Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/) [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) Dashboards (SM208600) /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600 page You use this window to create and delete dashboards, and to manage dashboard properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dashboards (SM208600) You use this window to create and delete dashboards, and to manage dashboard properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Youcan specify the location of a dashboard in the site map and provide access rights to thedashboard.From this window, you can also view a dashboard settings. For more information on setting up dashboards,see: [About dashboard pages](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-dashboard-pages/about-dashboard-pages/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View

Displays the dashboard selected on the window.

This button becomes availablewhen you select an existing dashboard or after you save a newdashboard.
Reset all user copies

Overrides all user copies of the dashboard and gives them the originaldashboard settings.

This button becomes available when you select an existingdashboard that was created manually or after you save a new dashboard.
## The top part You can use this area to create a new dashboard or to select an existing dashboard to viewor edit its details.
Element Description
Dashboard ID The unique ID of the dashboard.For a new dashboard, leave this fieldblank; once the dashboard is saved, the system will insert its name into this field toserve as the ID.
Name Required.The name of the dashboard.For a new dashboard, type a name thatdescribes the data that is shown on this dashboard.
Location in the menu The position in the sitemap where the dashboard will be displayed.
Add new node

A button that opens the Add new dashboard node dialog box,where you can create a node in the sitemap for the dashboard.

This button becomesavailable after you type the name of a new dashboard or select an existingdashboard.
Owner role

Required.The user role that owns the dashboard.A user with this roleassigned can design and delete the dashboard, and edit its settings.

If you will configure the dashboard that you are creating, you should select an owner role that you are assigned to. Otherwise, you will be working with your personal copy of the dashboard, and other users will not see any widgets that you add on the dashboard.
Allow users to personalise

A check box that you select to allow other users of your Visma Net instance who have access to the dashboard to copy the dashboard and modify itssettings according to their needs. When they modify the dashboard, the settings ofthe original dashboard are not changed.

By default, this check box isselected.
### The Add new dashboard node dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Add new node** button.By using this dialog box, you can add a new node to the sitemap for the selecteddashboard.
Element Description
Folder The folder in the site map where a new node for the dashboard should be added.
Title The title of the new dashboard node.
Add (button) Adds a new node for the dashboard to the site map and closes the dialogbox.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without creating a new node for the dashboard.
## The Visible to tab The **Visible to** table contains the full list of user roles in thesystem. This list appears only when a sitemap location is specified. By using this table,you can manage the access rights of user roles to view the dashboard.
Column Description
Selected A check box that indicates (if selected) that a user with the role can view thedashboard. You can select and clear check boxes for all roles at once by clickingthe check box in the table header.
Role name The unique ID of the role.
Role description The detailed description of the role.
## Parameters tab You use the **Parameters** tab to specify the types of fields to be used in the **Selection** area of the dashboard. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the parameter is active and appears in the Selection area of the dashboard.
Is required A check box that indicates (if selected) that this parameter is required on the dashboard. That is, widgets whose data is filtered by this parameter do not display any data until a user selects the parameter value in the Selection area of the dashboard.
Name

The name of the parameter.

The name is used during dashboard creation and editing on the current window. It is used by default as the display name, but you can specify a different display name in the Display name field.
Schema object The data access class (DAC) that contains the field whose values are used for the parameter.
Schema field Optional: The field from the selected DAC whose values are used as the parameter values. If no field is specified, the parameter will be a simple text field.
Display name

Optional: The name for the parameter that is displayed in the Selection area of the dashboard.If this column is empty, the system uses the value from the Name column as the display name.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
From schema A check box that indicates (if selected) that in the Default value column of this row the system displays the values of the field selected in the Schema field column as a drop-down list.
Default value

Optional: The default value of the parameter.

If the From schema check box is selected in this row, you can select one of the existing values of the field selected in the Schema field column of the row.

If the From schemacheck box is cleared, you can type any value. For a data field of the date type that is based on a schema field (that is, the From schemacheck box is selected), you can select one of the following date-relative parameters in the Calendardialog box (which is opened when you click the down arrow icon in the box):

@Today
The current day.
@WeekStart
and @WeekEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current week.The start and end of the week are determined according to the default system locale or the locale the user has selected when signing in to Visma Net.The system locales are specified and configured in the System Locales (SM200550) window.
@MonthStart
and @MonthEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current month.
@QuarterStart
and @QuarterEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current quarter.
@PeriodStart
and @PeriodEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current financial period. The financial periods are defined in the Financial year (GL101000) window.
  • @YearStart and @YearEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current calendar year.

All the date-relative parameters use the date of the server used to run the Visma Net instance as the current date. Additionally, you can modify the date-relative parameters by adding or subtracting integers. The unit of measure of the parameter is determined automatically and the reference point is moved based on the measurement of the parameter—for example, @WeekStart+1 relates to the start of the next week.
Use in widget Embedded page A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected dashboard parameter should be accessible by a widget of the Embedded page type. When adding a new widget of this type, the option Use dashboard parameters needs to be selected. The parameters are used to open an external URL with a dynamic value e.g. customer number.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Filters (CS209010) /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010 page You use this window to create, edit, delete, and manage filters that are shared among all users of the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Filters (CS209010) You use this window to create, edit, delete, and manage filters that are shared among all users of the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Some inquiry or processing windows may display a great deal of information, making it difficult for users to find the data they generally need. For example: If a specific inquiry window displays transactions in a table on dozens of pages but users need to see only the most recent transactions, you can apply a default filter to the table that would display only transactions for the past three days. The filters created in this window cannot be modified in the windows on which they are applied. ## What to do from this window + [Add a system filter](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/add-a-system-filter/) + [Delete a system filter](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/delete-a-system-filter/) + [Modify a system filter](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/manage-shared-filters/modify-a-system-filter/) + [Translate filter tab captions](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/translate-filter-tab-captions/)
Button Description
Make filter not shared Makes the selected filter available in the window it applies to for only the user who created it. This button appears when select an existing filter or after you save a new filter.
## The top part You can use this area to create a new filter or to select an existing filter to view or edit its details.
Element Description
Filter ID The unique identifier of the filter. For a new filter, leave this field blank; once the filter is saved, the system will insert its name in this field as a ID.
Name The name of the filter. For a new filter, enter a name that describes the type of data that is shown with this filter.
Screen ID The window you select from the sitemap to which the filter will be applied.
View The table in the window (selected in the Window ID field) that the filter is to be applied to. Filters can be applied to the data in tables only. If the selected window has multiple tables, they will be displayed in a drop-down list in this field.
Is default A check box that you select to make the filter the default filter for the selected table.
## The table This table contains the filter conditions. Conditions are created with respect to the data available in the window chosen in the top part. A filter may contain a number of simple conditions or lines combined into one logical expression with brackets and logical operators (**And** and **Or**).
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the condition is active for the chosen window and table in the window.
Brackets A group of opening brackets to group logical conditions.
Property The property associated with the system graph and particular table.
Condition

The logical operation to apply to the value of the chosen property. The following options are available:

Equals
Displays records where the value of a value of the specified property is equal to the value in the Value column.
Does not equal
Displays records where a value of the specified property is not equal to the value in the Value column.
Is greater than
Displays records where a value of the specified property is greater than the value in the Value column.
Is greater than or equal to
Displays records where a value of the specified property is greater than or equal to the value in the Value column.
Is less than
Displays records where a value of the specified property is less than the value in the Value column.
Is less than or equal to
Displays records where a value of the specified property is less than or equal to the value in the Value column.
Is between
Displays records where a value of the specified property is between values in the Value and Value2 columns.
Contains
Displays records where a value of the specified property (string) contains the value in the Value field.
Does not contain
Displays records where a value of the specified property (string) does not contain the value in the Value column.
Ends with
Displays records where a value of the specified property ends with the same character or string as the value in the Value column contains.
Starts with
Displays records where a value of the specified property contains at the beginning the value in the Value column.
Is null
Displays records where a value of the specified property is null.
Is not null
Displays records where a value of the specified property is not null.
Is in
(for values of the user type): Displays records where a value of the specified property (a user) is included in the work group selected in the Value column. You can use this parameter with the @MyGroups and @MyWorktree clauses.
Is not in
(for values of the user type): Displays records where a value of the specified property (a user) is not included in the work group selected in the Value column. You can use this parameter with the @MyGroups and @MyWorktree clauses.
Value

The value you enter for the logical condition used to filter the data, if the selected condition requires a value. The value you enter must conform with the data type of the selected property. You can enter or select a fixed value or one of the predefined parameters.

The predefined parameters are listed in About creating temporary or reusable filters.
Value2

The second value for the logical condition, if the selected logical condition requires a second value. (For example: The Is between logical condition requires a second value.) The value you enter must conform with the data type of the selected property. You can enter or select a fixed value or one of the predefined parameters.

The predefined parameters are listed in: About creating temporary or reusable filters.
Brackets A group of closing brackets to group logical conditions.
Operator The logical operator to be used between groups of logical conditions.
Generic inquiry (SM208000) /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000 section By using this window, you can create inquiries on the fly, without programming. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generic inquiry (SM208000) By using this window, you can create inquiries on the fly, without programming. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can view how the selected or newly designed inquiry looks, and you can test its functionality by selecting parameters and viewing the results. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View inquiry Displays the inquiry defined by or selected on the window.
## The top part In this area, you can specify the titles to be used for the newly created inquiry window, the area of the inquiry window that contains the inquiry parameters, and the area that contains the inquiry results. Also, for the created inquiry window, you can specify how to arrange the inquiry parameter elements and how many resulting records are displayed. Click **Add inquiry to sitemap** to specify the position of the inquiry in the site map or the workspace and the section within the workspace to hold this newly designed inquiry.
Element Description
Inquiry title The title to be used for the inquiry window. Type a name to add a new inquiry or select an inquiry for editing from the list of existing inquiries.
Sitemap title

The name of the inquiry window as it will be displayed on the sitemap. You can enter any name by using alphabetic or numeric characters.

You must specify the sitemap title if you want to replace a entry window with this inquiry window.
Location in the menu

The location of the new inquiry window on the sitemap. You can select a required location manually.

You must specify the sitemap location if you want to replace an entry window with this inquiry window.
Window ID The ID of the inquiry window.
Arrange parameters in x columns The number of columns in which the elements for parameters should be arranged in the parameters area of the inquiry window.
Select top x records The maximum number of records to be displayed as results.
Records per page The maximum number of records to be displayed on the page.
Export top x records
## The tabs in this window Descriptions of the different tabs are expandable in the list below. ## The Tables tab This table holds the list of database tables to be used for the inquiry or the list of data access classes (DACs) that are used to represent the data from the system database tables.
Column Description
Table name The name of the table or DAC that provides access to database tables. You can select a table from the list of available tables (DACs).
Alias The alias to be used in SQL statements to designate the table. If no alias is specified, the Table name is used.
## The Relationship tab In the **Table relations** area of this tab, you can specify relations between pairs of tables. For each pair of related tables, you specify links between the columns of these two tables in the **Data field links for active relations** area. Here you specify relations between pairs of tables.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the record is active and is used to specify relations.
Parent table The name (alias) of the first table in a JOIN statement of SQL.
Join type

The type of JOIN between participating tables or DACs, which can be one of the following options:

Inner
Returns rows when there is at least one match in both tables.
Right
Returns all rows from the right table, even if there are no matches in the left table.
Left
Returns all rows from the left table, even if there are no matches in the right table.
Full
Returns rows when there is a match in one of the tables.
Cross
Returns all records in which each row from the first table is combined with each row from the second table. The size of a resulting set is the number of rows in the first table multiplied by the number of rows in the second table.

You can concatenate multiple joining conditions between different parent tables to the same child table into one ON clause. For example, if you cross join Custom week and Employees, you can also join time cards that exist for the Custom week-Employees pairs.
Child table The second table to be used in the JOIN statement.
**Data field links for active relations** table columns. In this area, you define links between pairs of fields for the related tables selected in the **Table relations** area.
Element Description
Brackets The opening bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Parent field The field from the parent table. Click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_DropDownList icon to select a field, or click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_CreateNewObject icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.
Condition

One of the following logical conditions:

Equals
Returns TRUE if the value of the specified parent field is equal to the value of the specified child field.
Does not equal
Returns TRUE if the parent field value is not equal to the child field value.
Is greater than
Returns TRUE if the parent field value is greater than the child field value.
Is greater than or equal to
Returns TRUE if the parent field value is greater than or equal to the child field value.
Is less than
Returns TRUE if the parent field value is less than the child field value.
Is less than or equal to
Returns TRUE if the parent field value is less than or equal to the child field value.
Is between
Not applicable for parent and child field values.
Contains
Returns TRUE if the parent field value (string) contains the child field value.
Ends with
Returns TRUE if the parent field value ends with the same character or string as the child field value contains.
Starts with
Returns TRUE if the parent field value contains at the beginning the child field value.
Is null
Returns TRUE if the parent field value is null.
Is not null
Returns TRUE if the parent field value is not null.
Child field The field from the second table. Click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_DropDownList icon to select a field, or click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_CreateNewObject icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.
Brackets The closing bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Operator The logical operator between conditions, which can be And or Or.
## The Parameters tab You use this tab to specify the types of fields to be used in the parameters area of the inquiry window.
Button Description
Move row up Moves the selected row up by one row.
Move row down Moves the selected row down by one row.
Combo box values Brings up the Combo box values dialog box, which you can use to enter the options to be used for the drop-down list of options for this parameter.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the parameter is active and will be added to the inquiry area that provides fields for inquiry parameters.
Is required A check box that indicates (if selected) that this field is required in the inquiry window.
Name The name of the parameter.
Schema field An optional field indicating the database field selected as the schema for this field. If no field is specified, the parameter field will be a simple data input field.
Display name

The name for the field to be displayed in the window.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
From schema A check box that indicates (if selected) that the field will be based on (copied from) the schema field.
Default value

The default value of the field.

For the data fields of the date type that are based on schema fields (that is, the From schema check box is selected), you can select one of the following date-relative parameters in the Calendar dialog box:

@Today
The current day.
@WeekStart
and @WeekEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current week. The start and end of the week are determined according to the default system locale or the locale you selected when you signed in to Visma Net. The system locales are specified and configured in the System locales (SM200550) window.
@MonthStart
and @MonthEnd: The start and end of the current month accordingly.
@QuarterStart
and @QuarterEnd: The start and end of the current quarter accordingly.
@PeriodStart
and @PeriodEnd: The start and end of the current financial period accordingly. The financial periods are defined in the Financial year (GL101000) window.
@YearStart
and @YearEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current calendar year.

All the date-relative parameters use the date of the server used to run the Visma Net instance as the current date.

Additionally, you can modify the date-relative parameters by adding or subtracting integers.

The unit of measure of the parameter is determined automatically and the reference point is moved according to the measurement of the parameter, for example, @WeekStart+1 relate to the start of the next week.
Column span The number of columns in the parameters area in the inquiry window this column will span.
Control size The size that represents the height and width of the control in pixels.
Column width The width of the grid column.
Field size The size of the field in the inquiry. Options between XXS and XL.
Hidden When this check box is selected, the field is hidden in the inquiry.
Label size The size of the label in the inquiry. Options between XXS and XL.
### The Combo box values dialog box In this dialog box, you can specify options for a drop-down list for the combo box field that will be used as the parameter field for the inquiry.
Element Description
Value The value assigned to an option to be added to the combo-box list.
Label A text string to be displayed as an option.
OK (button) Saves the combo-box options for the parameter.
## The Conditions tab On this tab, you can specify the conditions to be met for the rows to be returned; the system uses these conditions to generate the **WHERE** SQL request. To include a parameter value in the condition, use the `[ParameterName]` format. You configure the fields for inquiry parameters on the **Parameters** tab (to be displayed in the selection area of the new inquiry window); once they have been configured, they appear on the list of fields shown in the **Data field** column on this tab.
Button Description
Move row up Moves the selected row up by one position.
Move row down Moves the selected row down by one position.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the row is an active condition.
Brackets The opening bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Data field The field whose value the condition should be applied to.
Condition

One of the following logical conditions, which will be applied to the value of the field specified as the Data field and the values in the Value 1 and Value 2 fields if applicable:

Equals
Returns TRUE if the value of the Data field field is equal to the value specified as Value 1.
Does not equal
Returns TRUE if the field value is not equal to the Value 1 value.
Is greater than
Returns TRUE if the field value is greater than the Value 1 value.
Is greater than or equal to
Returns TRUE if the field value is greater than or equal to the Value 1 value.
Is less than
Returns TRUE if the field value is less than the Value 1 value.
Is less than or equal to
Returns TRUE if the field value is less than or equal to the Value 1 value.
Is between
Returns TRUE if the field value is between the Value 1 and Value 2 values. (For this option, you must specify both Value 1 and Value 2.)
Contains
Returns TRUE if the field value (string) contains the Value 1 value.
Does not contain
Returns TRUE if the field value (string) does not contain the Value 1 value.
Starts with
Returns TRUE if the field value contains at the beginning the Value 1 value.
Ends with
Returns TRUE if the field value ends with the Value 1 value.
Is null
Returns TRUE if the field value is null.
Is not null
Returns TRUE if the field value is not null.

If you try to filter the inquiry results by using a string with the underscore, the result will also contain the values with the same string with any symbol instead of the underscore. For example, if you try to filter the inquiry by a customer name that contains the Customer_Name string, the system will return all the customers whose name contains any of the following strings: Customer_Name, Customer-Name, and Customer Name. The reason that all of these strings will be returned is that the underscore is used as a wildcard character.
From schema A check box that indicates (if selected) that Value 1 will display the specified data field’s options in the system.
Value 1

The value to be used in the selected condition. Click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_DropDownList icon to select a field, or click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_CreateNewObject icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.

For the date-related data fields you can use the date-relative parameters either by selecting the parameter in the Calendar dialog box (if the field is based on a schema field and the From schema check box is selected) or by using the date-relative parameter in a formula (if the field is not based on a schema field and you use the formula editor). The following date-relative parameters are available:

@Today
The current day.
@WeekStart
and @WeekEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current week. The start and end of the week are determined according to the default system locale or the locale you selected when you signed in to Visma Net. The system locales are specified and configured in the System locales (SM200550) window.
@MonthStart
and @MonthEnd: The start and end of the current month accordingly.
@QuarterStart
and @QuarterEnd: The start and end of the current quarter accordingly.
@PeriodStart
and @PeriodEnd: The start and end of the current financial period accordingly. The financial periods are defined in the Financial year (GL101000) window.
@YearStart
and @YearEnd: The start and end, respectively, of the current calendar year.

All the date-relative parameters use the date (in UTC) of the server used to run the Visma Net instance as the current date.

Additionally, you can modify the date-relative parameters by adding or subtracting integers. The unit of measure of the parameter is determined automatically and the reference point is moved according to the measurement of the parameter, for example, @WeekStart+1 relate to the start of the next week.
Value 2

The second value to be used, if the selected condition requires one. Click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_DropDownList icon to select a field, or click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_CreateNewObject icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.

For the date-related data fields that are not based on a schema field (that is, the From schema check box is cleared), you can use one of the date-relative parameters, as described in Value1.
Brackets The opening bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Operator The logical operator to join conditions in a logical expression, which can be And or Or.
## The Grouping tab On this tab, you specify the grouping conditions according to which the results should be displayed on the inquiry window. One result row is returned for each group. **SUM** is the aggregate function that is applied to the result columns with the numeric type by default. **MAX** is the aggregate function that is applied to the other result columns by default. You can select an aggregate function value for each result column in the **Aggregate function** column on the **Results grid** tab.
Button Description
Move row up Moves the selected row up by one position.
Move row down Moves the selected row down by one position.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the row is active and is used in grouping the inquiry results.
Data field

The field whose value the grouping should be applied to. You cannot select the attribute fields as a value of this column.

In the entry and maintenance window of a class, the attribute fields are listed on the Attributes tab.
## The Sort order tab On this tab, you specify the order in which the results should be displayed in the new inquiry window.
Button Description
Move row up Moves the selected row up by one position.
Move row down Moves the selected row down by one position.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the row is active and is used in sorting the inquiry results.
Data field The name of the field in the inquiry window.
Sort order An option describing how values should be ordered in this column: in Ascending or Descending order.
## The Results grid tab By using this tab, you can specify how the results of the search in the database tables should be displayed.
Button Description
Up Moves the selected row up by one row.
Down Moves the selected row down by one row.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the row is active and thus is used in selecting the results.
Object The name (alias) of the table.
Data field The field of the table or the formula that includes fields and constants. Click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_DropDownList icon to select a field, or click the SM_20_70_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_CreateNewObject icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.
Schema field The field to be used as the source of properties for this field.
Width (pixels) The width of the grid column in pixels.
Visible A check box that indicates (if selected) that this field will appear in the resulting grid. If the check box is cleared, the field will be hidden by default but can be added to the grid by a user.
Default navigation

A check box that indicates (if selected, which is the default value) that the field value can be a link to the default window, which the user can open by clicking the link, specified in the source code. For example: For the field that holds the invoice reference number, the default window is the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.

If the check box is cleared, the field value can be a link to the window selected in the Navigate to field.

If the Default navigation check box and the Navigate to field are cleared, the field cannot be a link.

If you select the Default navigation check box, you should clear the Navigate to field.
Navigate to

A window specified on the Navigation tab that the user can open by clicking the link in the column.

If you select any window in the field, the Default navigation check box is cleared automatically.
Aggregate function

A function that defines how the resulting value should be calculated for the grouped values in this column. The following aggregate functions are available:

AVG
Returns the average of all non-null values of the group.
COUNT
Returns a count of all values of the group.
MAX
Returns the maximum value of all values of the group.
MIN
Returns the minimum value of all values of the group.
SUM
Returns the sum of all values of the group.

The following aggregate functions are applied by default, when no function is selected:

SUM
is applied to the columns with the numeric type.
MAX
is applied to the other columns.
Caption

The name for the column header to be displayed in the window.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Quick filter A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should add a button with the quick filter for this field to the filtering area of the generic inquiry form. If multiple tabs are displayed on this generic inquiry form, the button with the quick filter is added to the filtering area of the All records tab. By default, this check box is cleared.
## The Entry point tab By using this tab, you can match the selected inquiry (called the **substitute window** in this context) to a data entry or maintenance window (called the **entry window** in this context). You can then replace the entry window with the inquiry in the navigation pane. Once you have replaced the entry window with this inquiry, when you try to click the name of the entry window in the navigation pane, you are redirected to the inquiry. If you select a record in the list, the entry window opens and displays the details of the selected record. Also, if you create a new record from the inquiry, the entry window opens. Additionally, you can configure the actions to be available on the inquiry. For more information, see: see: [Manage substitutes of entry windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/cu-manage-substitutes-entry-window-con/). ### The Entry window settings section
Element Description
Entry window

The entry window to be associated with this inquiry. The list of available windows is filtered according to the data access classes selected for the inquiry on the Tables tab.

When you select an entry window, this window is added to the Navigation tab automatically. The navigation parameters, which are the key fields in the entry window and the inquiry parameters that should be passed to these fields, are filled in automatically, but you can also specify these parameters manually.
Replace entry window with this inquiry in menu A check box you select to replace the entry window selected in the Entry window column with the inquiry (that is, to display the inquiry instead of the entry window when the user clicks the menu item in the navigation pane).
### The Operations with records section
Element Description
Enable mass actions for records

A check box that you select to allow users to perform the actions you select on the records in the inquiry window. With this check box selected, the Mass actions tab appears in this window. On this tab, you can specify the action or actions that will be available in the Actions menu in the window toolbar of the inquiry window.

If this box is selected, the selected commands will appear in the Actions menu in the window toolbar and the Selected column in the table of the substitute window. A user can select one record or multiple records, and then apply any available command to the selected records.
Automatically confirm customized mass actions This check box and the Enable mass actions for record must both be selected, in order to make the system confirm automatically any confirmation dialog pop-up that would be raised by the system while executing the action.
Enable mass deletion

A check box you select to allow users to delete multiple records from the list in the inquiry window.

If this check box is selected, the Delete button appears in the window toolbar and the Selected column appears in the inquiry window. A user can select one or multiple records, and then delete them.
Automatically confirm customized mass deletion This check box and the Enable mass record deletion must both be selected, in order to have the system automatically confirm the deletion of records when a user clicks Delete.
Enable mass update

A check box that you select to allow users to update multiple records from the list in the inquiry window. If you select this check box, the Mass update fields tab appears in the window. Use this tab to select the field (or fields) that users should be able to update.

If this check box is selected, the Update and Update all commands appear in the Actions menu in the window toolbar and the Selected column in the table of the inquiry window. A user can select one record or multiple records, and then change the specified fields of the selected records.
Enable new creation

A check box you select to allow users to create new records from the inquiry window.

If this check box is selected, the Add record button appears in the window toolbar in the table of the inquiry window. When a user clicks the button, the entry window opens so the user can add a new record.
### The New record defaults table This table is available only if the **Enable new record creation** check box is selected. In this table, you can specify the default values for the records that can be created in the inquiry window.
Column Description
Field The name of the field in the entry window.
Value The default value for the selected field.
## The Navigation tab In the **Windows** area of this tab, you can specify the list of screens to be used for navigation from the inquiry. For each window, in the **Navigation parameters** area, you can specify navigation parameters and select the way to open the window. ### The Windows area In this area, you can specify the list of screens to be used for navigation from the inquiry. You can select any data entry or maintenance window as well as an inquiry or a report. ### The Navigation parameters area By using this area, for each window, you can specify navigation parameters and select the way to open the window.
Column Description
Field The name of the field of the window, which can be the field in the entry window, the inquiry parameter, or the report parameter.
Parameter The default value for the selected field.
### The Navigation parameters area element By using this element, you can select the way the window is opened.
Element Description
Window mode

The way the window is opened. The following modes are available:

  • Same tab: The window opens in the same browser tab instead of the inquiry. This is the default mode.
  • New tab: The window opens in a new browser tab.
  • Pop-up window: The window opens in a new pop-up window.
  • Side panel: The window opens in the side panel, allowing to quickly edit the desired values, while you still have the main generic inquiry window open. About side panels and Enable the side panel

For more information, see:

If the window is selected as the entry window on the Entry point tab and replaced with the inquiry, the window mode of this window is Inline. This means that this window opens in the same browser tab when a user is adding a new record or viewing the details of an existing record. You cannot change this mode.
## The Mass update fields tab This tab appears only if the **Enable mass record update** check box is selected on the **Entry point** tab. By using this tab, you can specify the fields of the entry window that can be updated in the table if a user clicks **Update all** in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar of the inquiry.
Column Description
Select

An unlabelled check box that you use to select the fields you want to be updated.

When you add a field to this table, it becomes active, with the Select check box automatically selected. You can clear the check box any time.
Field name The name of the field that should be updated.
## The Mass actions tab This tab appears only if the **Enable mass actions on records** check box is selected on the **Entry point** tab. By using this tab, you can specify the options that will be available in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar of the inquiry.
Column Description
Select

An unlabelled check box that you use to select an action.

When you add an action to this table, it becomes active, with the Select check box automatically selected. You can clear this check box any time.
Action The name of the action that will be available in the Actions menu in the window toolbar of the inquiry.
## Formulas In some columns of the **Relationship**, **Conditions**, and **Result grid** tabs, you can use formulas to calculate the values of these columns by using the formula editor, which is invoked by clicking the edit control button in the columns. The formula editor includes standard and window-specific functions. For the list of standard functions, see: [About operators](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-operators/) and [About functions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-functions/). The window-specific function is the `Concat()` function. If the software of your Visma Net database is MySQL Server, for generic inquiries, use the `Concat()` function instead of `+` to sum the values of the string data type, as follows. `=Concat('My first string', 'My second string', [Object.DataField])`

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Lists as entry points (SM208500) /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/lists-as-entry-points-sm208500 page By using this window, you can view the list of entry windows that have substitute windows and activate or cancel the replacement of the entry windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Lists as entry points (SM208500) By using this window, you can view the list of entry windows that have substitute windows and activate or cancel the replacement of the entry windows. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Additionally, you can change the location of the windows on the sitemap. Note: If you delete a row in the table, you cancel the replacement of the entry window; the entry and the substitute windows themselves are not deleted. ## The table The table displays the list of data entry windows that have the substitute windows. By using this table, you can manage the replacement of the data entry windows. Additionally, you can view and change the location of the windows in the sitemap.
Column Description
Active

A check box that you select to replace the entry window with the corresponding substitute window when a user clicks the name of the entry window on the navigation pane. Clear the check box to cancel the replacement.

For generic inquiries that are used as substitute windows, selecting or clearing the Active check box selects or clears, respectively, the Replace entry window with this inquiry in menu check box on the Entry point tab of the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window.
Entry window location The name and location (in the sitemap) of the entry window.
Entry window ID The unique ID of the entry window.
Substitute window location The name and location (on the site map) of the substitute window.
Substitute window ID The unique ID of the substitute window.
Pivot tables (SM208010) /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010 section You use this window to add and edit pivot tables, which are based on generic inquiries. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pivot tables (SM208010) You use this window to add and edit pivot tables, which are based on generic inquiries. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. When designing a pivot table, you select the generic inquiry fields that will provide data for analysis and for filtering. In addition, you can specify display parameters for each field that is used in the pivot table. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View pivot Builds the pivot table designed or selected in the window. This button becomes available after you save changes in the pivot table parameters.
Edit inquiry Opens the Generic inquiry (SM208000) window for the generic inquiry that is selected in the Window ID field. This button becomes available after you select a generic inquiry in the Window ID field.
## The top part In this area, you can create a new pivot table or select an existing pivot table to view and edit its parameters.
Element Description
Screen ID Required. The unique ID of the generic inquiry that is used for building the pivot table.
Sitemap location

The location of the new pivot table in the Visma Net site map, where it is available for users to open.

You should specify the site map location in this field if you want to display the created pivot table in the site map; otherwise, leave this field blank.
Pivot table ID

Required.

The unique ID of the pivot table. For a new pivot table, leave this field blank; once the pivot table is saved, the system will insert the value of the Name field in this field as an ID.

For an existing pivot table, you can select a value in this field only after the screen ID has been selected.
Shared filter to apply

The name of a shared filter that is used with the pivot table.

The default value of this field is All records.
Name The name of the pivot table. For a new pivot table, enter a name that describes the type of data that is shown with this pivot table.
Is shared

A check box that you select to share the pivot table between all users of your Visma Net instance.

By default, this check box is cleared.
## The Fields pane This pane contains the list of fields from the selected generic inquiry that are not used in the pivot table settings. Initially, it contains the full list of fields from the selected generic inquiry. You can move fields from this pane to other panes of the window in the following ways: + Select fields in this pane, and then click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) on the pane where you want to move the field. + Drag and drop fields to other panes in the window. The pane toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The Filters pane This pane contains a list of fields from the selected generic inquiry that are used as filters in the pivot table. You can filter pivot table data by multiple fields. You can add fields to this pane and remove fields from the pane by dragging and dropping them or by using the toolbar buttons. The pane toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The Columns pane This pane contains a list of fields from the selected generic inquiry that are displayed as columns in the pivot table. You can use multiple fields in the columns of the pivot table. You can add fields to this pane and remove fields from the pane by dragging and dropping them or by using the toolbar buttons. The pane toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The Rows pane This pane contains a list of fields from the selected generic inquiry that are displayed as rows in the pivot table. You can use multiple fields in the rows of the pivot table. You can add fields to this pane and remove fields from the pane by dragging and dropping them or by using the toolbar buttons. The pane toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The Values pane This pane contains a list of fields from the selected generic inquiry whose values are displayed in cells of the pivot table. You can add multiple fields in this pane. You can add fields to this pane and remove fields from the pane by dragging and dropping them or by using the toolbar buttons. The pane toolbar includes only standard buttons. ## The Properties pane This pane contains the display properties for a field that is selected in the **Filters**, **Columns**, **Rows**, or **Values** pane. The following table describes the properties.
Property Description
Caption

The caption of the field that is displayed in the pivot table. You change the caption in this field if you want to see a different field name than the field name in the generic inquiry in the pivot table.

By default, the property value is equal to the field name in the generic inquiry.
Aggregate

An aggregate function that is applied to the field values. Select one of the following functions:

Sum
Returns the sum of the field values (for numeric fields)
Count
Returns the number of the field values (for all types of fields)
Average
Returns the average value of the field values (for numeric fields)
Min
Returns the smallest value among the field values (for date and numeric fields)
Max
Returns the largest value among the field values (for date and numeric fields)
Median
Returns the middle value of the field values (for date and numeric fields)

The default value of this property is Sum for numeric fields and Count for non-numeric fields.
Sort order

The order in which the field values are sorted in the pivot table. Select one of the following values:

Ascending
That is, A to Z for text, lower to higher for numbers, or newest to oldest for dates
Descending
That is, Z to A for text, higher to lower for numbers, or oldest to newest for dates

The default value of this parameter is Ascending.
Show percent

A check box that you select if you want to display value of the field as a percentage of the total value. This check box should be used with fields from the Values pane only.

By default, the check box is cleared.
Show total

A check box that you select if you want to display the total field for the set of fields.

By default, the check box is selected.
Total label

The name of the total field in the pivot table. The field is displayed only when the Show total check box is selected.

By default, the field is empty and the field label is Total.
Width

The width (in pixels) of the cells in the pivot table where the field values are displayed.

The default value of this parameter is 100 pixels.
Format

The format of the field value that is displayed in the pivot table. You can use the standard formats defined for the format function in.Net.

By default, the field is empty, which means that the field is not formatted.
Round to

The part of the date field that is used in the pivot table. You can analyse data by using either the full date or a particular part of it (for example, a month or a year).

This property appears only for fields of the date type.

Select one of the following values:

None
(default): The full date is used in the pivot table.
Minutes
Only minutes from the selected date field are used in the pivot table.
Hours
Only hours from the selected date field are used in the pivot table.
Days
Only days of month from the selected date field are used in the pivot table.
Months
Only months from the selected date field are used in the pivot table.
Quarters
Only quarters are used in the pivot table. The system calculates the quarter based on the date in the selected date field.
Years
Only years from the selected date field are used in the pivot table.
Date part

The part of the date field by which the system aggregates data in the pivot table. For example: If the date field contains the month and the year (such as July 2017), you can configure the system so that it aggregates data by month for multiple years.

If you want to display only the year in the headers of the pivot table, you need to select the Year value in the Round to field.

You can select one of the following values:

None
(default): The data by full date is displayed in the pivot table.
Hour
The system aggregates data by the hour. (Only the hour is displayed in the pivot table.)
Day
The system aggregates data by the day. (Only the day is displayed in the pivot table.)
Month
The system aggregates data by the month. (Only the month is displayed in the pivot table.)
Quarter
The system aggregates data by the quarter. (Only the quarter is displayed in the pivot table.)

This property appears for only fields of the date type.

You can specify either a part of the date in this box or the rounding specified in the Round to field. For example: If you specified a value in the Round to field and then selected a value in this field, the system automatically resets the value of the Round to field to None.
Segment The segment of the field value that the system uses to aggregate data in the pivot table. In this field, you can select one of the segments specified in the Segment keys (CS202000) window for the segment key. This property appears for only fields whose values are defined by a segment key (such as General ledger subaccounts).
## The pivot table title bar The title bar of the window that contains the generated pivot table (which appears when you click **View pivot** from the window) includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Buttons Description
Save as Creates a copy of the pivot table with a different name. You click this button when you change the pivot table settings and want to save it as a new table for the same general inquiry.
Save Saves changes to the pivot table. You click this button when you change the settings of the pivot table and want your changed version to replace the previous version of pivot table.
Customise Opens the Pivot tables (SM208010) window, where you can modify the pivot table settings.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Custom notifications (SM205041) /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/custom-notifications-sm205041 page By using this window you can set up and activate notifications about changes/actions within your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Custom notifications (SM205041) By using this window you can set up and activate notifications about changes/actions within your system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You will get the notifications by email. You can: + initiate system set notifications to be received by selected or all user. + configure your own notifications and also set them to be received by other user. Users can sign up to receive notification about these changes in particular windows, registrations or documents. You can create and use notifications with special variables or placeholders where the system will insert the recipient’s personalised data when the system generates the notification. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View window Opens the window you have selected in Window ID. By doing this you are leaving the Custom notifications (SM205041) window.
## The top part Use this area to either + create a new notification or + select an existing notification and view its details. For a new notification, you select the window from which you want to be notified about changed or if something is created. You also specify the message (the **Notification message** field) for the notification.
Element Description
Window ID Use the magnifier or start typing the window name/ID you want notifications about.
Notification category

A list of areas/categories the notification applies to. You can select between:

  • System information
  • Projects
  • Payments
  • Accounting
  • Orders
  • Invoicing
Notification ID The unique identifier, which the system automatically assigns (by using the Description value) when you save the notification for the first time. You can select existing notifications by their IDs or use the magnifier to see all the notification details.
Notification name A description of the notification, which will be available in the notification details You can search for the description to select. This value can be an alphanumeric string.
Notification message This text will be used in the notification.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this notification is active. and can be viewed on the tab Active.

This check box can only be edited for custom notifications. The systems pre-set notifications will always be set to active.

If you want to receive notifications by email, go to User settings (SM203010), General information tab, Custom notifications section and select Enable custom notification emails.
No. of days until due
## The tabs in this window Descriptions of the different tabs are expandable in the list below. ## The Conditions tab On the **Conditions** tab, you can specify the conditions that the system checks each time anything changes in the window you have specified. The system generates a notification only if the conditions are met.
Element Description
Active

A check box you select if you want the conditions to initiate a notification the recipients you have specified.

By deselecting, the conditions and notification will be inactive, but you may activate whenever you want.
Field name The data field on the window which value is used in the condition.
Condition

The logical operation to apply to the value of the selected data field. The following options are available:

  • Equals
  • Does not equal
  • Is greater than
  • Is greater than or equal to
  • Contains
  • Starts with
  • Ends with
  • Does not contain
  • Is between - requires that you use both Value and Value 2
  • Is null
  • Is not null
Is relative A check box that you select if the field value is relative to the current business date. This option is used only for date fields.
Value The first value of the condition to be compared with the selected data field value. Most of the conditions require only one value, while Is between requires two values.
Value 2 The second value of the condition, if required by the chosen condition.
Operator

The character representing the action you want to perform. The valid operators are:

  • And
  • Or
## The Recipient tab On the **Recipient** tab, you can select recipient of the notification.
Element Description
Active A check box that you select if this recipient is active and can receive the notification.
Source

The source of the recipient. Select one of the following options:

  • User: The users of the specified Window ID, generally the employees
  • Document: The contacts associated with specific documents such as invoice, suppliers, customers etc. You can filter further in the column recipient when you have selected this option.
  • Role: The users grouped into roles e.g. Administrators

When you have selected your source, you can specify further in the Recipient field.
Recipient

After selecting Source, you specify further whom is to receive the notification. Click the magnifier to see the lists of users or roles.

If you select Document as your source, you will have more options. These are the options sorted by window:
Window Condition
Suppliers:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created the supplier.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Customers:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created the customer.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Stock items:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created stock item.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Stock items (IN202500) window..
Product manager > Default contact The person to be notified is the user that is entered in the Product manager field in Stock items (IN202500) window.
Non-stock items:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created non-stock item.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Product manager > Default contact The person to be notified is the user that is entered in the Product manager field in Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Projects:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created project.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Projects (PM631000) report window.
Customer > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the customer that is entered in the Projects (PM301000) window.
Customer > Last updated by The person that will be notified is the user who last updated the customer that is entered in the Projects (PM301000) window.
Project manager > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the project manager that is assigned to the project, not the project manager for the project.
Project manager > Last updated by The user to be notified is the user who last modified the project manager that is assigned to the project, not the project manager for the project.
Invoice:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created the invoice.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Invoice (SO643000) report window.
Customer > created by The person to be notified is the user that created the customer that is assigned to the invoice
Customer > Last updated by The person to be notified is the user that last updated the customer assigned to invoice.
Project > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the project that is set on the top part of Sales invoices (AR301000).
Project > Last updated by The person to be notified is the user that last updated the project assigned to the invoice.
Customer > Default contact The person to be notified is the one owning the e-mail set in Main contact in the Customers (AR303000) window, General information tab.
Default salesperson > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the Default salesperson in the Salespersons (AR205000) window who is assigned in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, on the Salesperson commission tab.
Default salesperson > Last modified by The person to be notified is the person that last modified the Default salesperson in Salespersons (AR205000) which is assigned in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window, on the Salesperson commission tab.
Project > Invoice contact The person to be notified is the user entered on the Summary tab, Invoice contact section, Email in the Projects (PM301000) window, who is assigned to the project set in the top part of Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Sales order:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created the sales order.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Customer > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the Customer that is on the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Customer > Last updated by The person to be notified is the user that last updated the Customer assigned to the sales order.
Project > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the Project that is on the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Project > Last updated by The person to be notified is the user that last updated the Project assigned to the sales order.
Owner > Default contact The person to be notified is the Owner from Sales orders (SO301000) window, the Financial settings tab> Financial information section.
Shipments:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created the shipment.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Shipments (SO302000) window.
Owner > Default contact The person to be notified is the Owner from the top part of the window.
Customer > Default contact The person to be notified is the owner of the main contact email from the Customer (not from contacts tab, but from General info tab > Main Contact > Email.
Purchase order:
Created by The person to be notified is the user that created purchase order.
Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last did a modification in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.
Supplier > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the supplier.
Supplier > Last updated by The person to be notified is the user that last updated the Supplier on the purchase order.
Project > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the project that is assigned to the purchase order.
Project > Last Updated by The person to be notified is the user that last updated the Project assigned to the purchase order.
Owner > Last modified by The person to be notified is the user who last modified the employee that is set as owner to the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.
Owner > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the employee that is set as Owner to the on the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.
Sales order no. > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the sales order linked in the Other Information tab.
Sales order no > Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last modified the Sales order no. on the Purchase order (PO641000) window.
Prepayment ref. no > Created by The person to be notified is the user who created the prepayment linked in the Other Information tab
Prepayment ref. no. > Last modified by The person to be notified is the user that last modified the Prepayment ref. no.
## The Fields tab On the **Fields** tab, you have an overview of the fields used in the notification.
Element Description
Active A check box that you select if this Field name is active for this notification.
Field name The field to be monitored for changes. Recipients will be notified each time the value of the field changes under the conditions set in the conditions tab.
Related reference [Automation notifications (SM205040)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-notifications-sm205040/) [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Report designer /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/report-designer section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Report designer Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Visma Report designer application /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/report-designer/about-visma-report-designer-application section Visma Report designer offers the possibility to design financial reports. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Visma Report designer application Visma Report designer offers the possibility to design financial reports. With Report designer, you can + design, + preview and + publish custom reports, and additionally to deploy them in (send back to) Financials, where the custom defined reports will be available for other users too. Customise the workspace /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/report-designer/about-visma-report-designer-application/customise-the-workspace page Follow these steps to customise the workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customise the workspace Follow these steps to customise the workspace. The layout of the workspace and sections can be changed to fit working preferences, as follows: 1. Workspace can be re-sized by dragging the separator line. 1. Side-panels can be pinned and unpinned. 1. Toolbars can be hidden or displayed by clicking this icon in the **Design** tab of the **Toolbar**, and checking the appropriate boxes from the drop-down list. 1. A toolbar settings menu offers the possibility to customize the drawing of grid lines over the report. You can select **Draw grid** and adjust the grid width and grid height (in pixels, minimum value is 2). Another available option is **Snap to grid**, which alters the behavior of dragging the elements over the report area. These elements will then be snapped to the grid lines or to existing elements in close proximity. Snap to grid can be activated even if the grid is not drawn. 1. When clicking outside the report area, the **Properties** panel to the right will be populated with details about the **Layout** properties. This allows selecting the **Layout unit** which updates all values below based on the selected unit. The **Page settings** allows you to alternate between a landscape or portrait page orientation. Design a report /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/report-designer/about-visma-report-designer-application/design-a-report page Follow these steps to design a report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Design a report Follow these steps to design a report. 1. Select the section from the report to be changed. Information about the section is displayed when it is hovered over. To format and edit text elements, select the text box with the name of the report or any other text field, and follow the steps below: 1. Click on the appropriate icons from the **Toolbar** to change font color or background. 1. Changes made can be displayed in the application by clicking **Preview**. Insert panel drag-and-drop /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/report-designer/about-visma-report-designer-application/insert-panel-drag-and-drop page The Insert panel is located on the left side of the window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Insert panel drag-and-drop The Insert panel is located on the left side of the window. Elements availability from the **Insert** panel. |Buttons|Explanation| |---|---| |**Header**|The button will display entered text at the top of every page. Formatting is available similarly to other text elements.| |**Footer**|The button will display entered text at the bottom of every page. Formatting is available similarly to other text elements.| |**Textbox**|The button will define a custom box area with the text input, and will display it with the set formats at the location specified. Can be used for comments input, attention lines, target values setting and so forth.| |**Picture box**|The button will display a line at the set coordinates, having the defined formats.| |**Line**|The button will display a line at the set coordinates, having the defined formats.| |**Panel**|The button will place a panel at the set location. Formatting is available in the **Properties** box.| 1. Inserting a picture box + Click on **Picture Box** + Drag it to the location in the work area where you want the picture to be placed + Drop the icon 1. After you have done the desired changes to the report it can be published and made available for future use. Please refer to next section for guidelines how to do so. 1. After selecting and placing the picture box, you can choose the type of picture to be added. From **Properties** - **Source** you can pick: + Embedded + Database or + Bar code + QR codes have been added to the list of supported bar codes. The following steps show how to add a QR code: 1. Insert a picture box into the design area of the report 1. From the **Properties** panel select **Bar code** as Source 1. From Bar code type, select QR code 1. Enter a value to be rendered into the code 1. For Embedded type, a pop-up window will be displayed when the button from **Value** is clicked. From here you can upload the picture. 1. Select location where the picture is stored 1. Click **Browse** 1. Click **Open** 1. Click **Upload Image**: After an image is uploaded, a preview of it is displayed in the pop-up window. You can keep or remove it. Opening this pop-up window on a picture box that already has an embedded image, displays a preview of that image and also allows for it to be removed. The selected and confirmed picture will be added in the report and can be previewed by clicking the **Preview** tab: Publish report /visma-net-erp/help/customisation/report-designer/about-visma-report-designer-application/publish-report page Follow these steps to publish a designed report in Financials. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Publish report Follow these steps to publish a designed report in Financials. 1. Go to **Preview** tab, click on Publish button from the top right corner: A pop-up window will be displayed which informs you that a new version of this report has been deployed. 1. If you click on **Open Report** you will be automatically redirected to Financials, where you can see the designed and published report if you click on **Run Report**. Deferred revenue /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue section Basic accounting principles dictate that income is only recognised when earned, and expenses when incurred. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue Basic accounting principles dictate that income is only recognised when earned, and expenses when incurred. This concept employs "deferral" in accounting, which delays recording certain revenues or expenses on the income statement. Instead, they are initially recorded on the balance sheet (liability or asset) until they are earned or used. In subsequent periods, these amounts are gradually transferred from the balance sheet to the income statement. In Visma Net, you can manage the processes of recognising the revenues until you deliver goods and services, and deferring expenses over the defined number of periods until they are used up. ## Deferral codes By using deferral codes, you can set up various scenarios of revenue and expense recognition. The system generates appropriate recognition transactions for each document line (such as invoice in the customer ledger invoice detail lines) that require deferrals according to the settings of the specified deferral codes. When the recognition process is run, the system releases and posts recognition transactions that come due, so a portion of the revenue or expenses is recognised. ## Recognition of deferred revenue in previous periods In the Deferred revenue workspace of Visma Net, you can manage the deferred revenue and expense recognition process. You can set up the recognition of deferrals in future financial periods as well as in previous financial periods (those that are earlier than the period of the date of the related document) by configuring deferral codes with the appropriate settings. ## Revenue recognition for packages If a line item in a document is a package (that is, a stock item or non-stock item that includes multiple components), different deferral codes can be assigned to its components as separate units of accounting to set up more accurate revenue recognition procedures. ## Custom deferral schedules If a document was released before the decision about deferral had been made, you can manually create custom deferral schedules for its lines and link them to the document. ## Other functionalities and options Other primary functionalities of the workspace include the following: + The ability to process schedules in bulk by assigning them to automation schedules + The ability to process credit notes associated with deferred invoices + Reports that help you to correctly forecast revenues and expenses Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Set up the recognition process /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/set-up-the-recognition-process section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up the recognition process Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Set up the recognition process - overview /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/set-up-the-recognition-process/set-up-the-recognition-process-overview page To set up the process of the revenue or expense recognition in Visma Net, you first need to configure the required deferral codes in the Deferred revenue workspace in the Deferral codes (DR202000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up the recognition process - overview To set up the process of the revenue or expense recognition in Visma Net, you first need to configure the required deferral codes in the Deferred revenue workspace in the Deferral codes (DR202000) window. For more information: [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/). + For each deferral code, define such settings as the recognition method to be applied, general ledger accounts to be used, and schedule settings. + Assign a deferral code to the applicable items, or add the code to the required line of a document that requires deferrals. + On release of documents with deferral codes specified, the system generates recognition transactions in accordance with the schedules defined by the deferral codes. + To make the system release and post recognition transactions that come due, run the recognition process in the [Run recognition (DR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/run-recognition-dr501000/) window, so that the transactions are posted in each specified period and a portion of the revenue or expenses is recognised. About deferral code setup /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/set-up-the-recognition-process/about-deferral-code-setup page You use deferral codes for recognition of revenues and expenses over multiple financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About deferral code setup You use deferral codes for recognition of revenues and expenses over multiple financial periods. ## Introduction The system will then use them to create deferral transactions on release of documents (such as invoices) in which these deferral codes are specified. ## Configuring deferral codes You configure a deferral code by using the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window. For each code, you specify the following settings: Recognition method : The method that defines how an amount will be distributed over the specified financial periods. Code type : The type of the code, which indicates whether it will be used for expense or revenue deferrals. Deferral account : The general ledger account to hold the deferred revenue (liability account) or expense (asset account) amount. Deferral sub. : The subaccount (if applicable in your system), for proper tracking of deferral transactions. Recognise now % : The percentage of the document amount (or line amount) that can be recognised immediately. Schedule settings : , **Every x periods**: The frequency of generating the recognition transactions. Document date selection : ( **Start of the financial period**, **End of period**, **Fixed day in the period** ): The exact day when the documents for a recognition transaction will be generated. Once you have specified all required settings based on the selected recognition method, the code will be available in the list of deferral codes that can be assigned to documents and used by the system for generating recognition schedules. If you do not assign a deferral code to an item, you can still add a deferral code to the required line of a document on the **Document details** tab when you enter a document into the system. The list of available deferral codes that you have created in Visma Net are available on the **Deferral settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. About recognition methods for deferred revenues or expenses /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/set-up-the-recognition-process/about-recognition-methods-for-deferred-revenues-or-expenses page Recognition methods determine how the deferred revenue or expense amount of a particular document will be distributed over the defined number of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About recognition methods for deferred revenues or expenses Recognition methods determine how the deferred revenue or expense amount of a particular document will be distributed over the defined number of periods. ## Introduction Recognition methods determine how the deferred revenue or expense amount of a particular document will be distributed over the defined number of periods. You specify a particular recognition method in the settings of each deferral code in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window. You can assign a deferral code to a line of an invoice. ## Evenly by periods With the **Evenly by periods** recognition method, the amount to be recognised is distributed evenly to all included periods. The number of recognition periods is defined by the value you specify in the **Occurrences** field for the deferral code in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window. An occurrence is a recognition event for which a recognition transaction is generated. The frequency of recognition events depends on the number (of financial periods) that you select in the **Every X periods** field. (For example, a **2** in this field would mean that a recognition event occurs every 2 financial periods.) Thus, when you select the **Evenly by periods** recognition method, you also need to define the number of recognition occurrences for the document amount and their frequency. The number of occurrences does not include immediate recognition of the revenue or expenses, which is based on the percentage specified in the **Recognise now (%)** field. ### Example Suppose there is an invoice dated January 11, 2021, that contains one line with an amount of €1500. The sales revenue should be recognised over six months in equal recognition amounts. (In this example, periods are defined as months in the system.) You apply a deferral code that has the following settings in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window: Recognition method : **Evenly by periods** Occurrences : **6** Schedule settings : **Every 1 period(s)** With this recognition method, the document amount (€1500) is divided evenly among six periods: January, February, March, April, May, and June; each portion is equal to €250. In this example, the recognition period is equal to the financial period because we set the recognition schedule to **Every 1 period(s)**. If we had set it to **Every 2 period(s)**, the recognition period would be equal to two financial periods, which means that the recognition process would be performed once every two months. ## Evenly by periods, prorate by days With the **Evenly by periods, prorate by days** method, the amount to be recognised is distributed evenly among recognition periods (the number of which is defined by the value specified in the **Occurrences** field in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window). The first and last periods are counted together as one recognition period and the amount to be recognised for each is proportional to the number of days in each period. Again, an occurrence is a recognition event. The frequency of occurrences depends on the number (of financial periods) you select in the **Every X period(s)** field. The instalment amounts for the first and last periods are calculated based on a full-period amount that is proportional to the number of days each instalment should cover. ### Example Suppose there is an invoice, dated 1.11.2021, that contains one line with an amount of €1500. The sales revenue should be recognised over six months. (In this example, periods are defined as months in the system.) You apply a deferral code that has the following settings in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window: + Recognition method: **Evenly by periods, prorate by days** + **Occurrences**: **6** + **Schedule settings**: **Every 1 period(s)** With this recognition method, the document amount is divided evenly among five full periods, with each portion equal to €300. Four of these periods are February, March, April, and May. The fifth €300 portion is divided into two parts, each of which is proportional to the number of days included in the recognition time interval in January (20 days, so €193.55) and in June (11 days, so €106.45). The amounts are rounded according to the base currency precision, which is set to 2. ## Evenly by days in period With the **Evenly by days in period** method, the amount to be recognised is distributed by periods with a proportional division by the number of calendar days in each period. The number of recognition periods is defined by the value specified in the **Occurrences** field in the deferral code settings in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window. As mentioned, an occurrence is a recurring recognition event for which a recognition transaction is generated. The frequency of occurrences depends on the number (of financial periods) you select in the **Every X period(s)** field. ### Example Suppose there is an invoice, dated 1.1.2021 that contains one line with an amount of €1500. The sales revenue should be recognised over six months. (In this example, periods are defined as months in the system.) You apply a deferral code that has the following settings in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window: + Recognition method: **Evenly by days in period** + **Occurrences**: **6** + Schedule settings: **Every 1 period(s)** With this recognition method, the amount for each recognition period is computed based on the number of calendar days in each period: + January (31 days): The amount to be recognised is €256.91. + February (28 days): The amount to be recognised is €232.04. + March (31 days): The amount to be recognised is also €256.91. + April (30 days): The amount to be recognised is €248.62. + May (31 days): The amount to be recognised is €256.91. + June (30 days): The amount to be recognised is €248.61. ## Flexible by periods, prorate by days With the **Flexible by periods, prorate by days** method, the amount to be recognised is distributed evenly among periods, with a proportional division by days among the first and last periods. The first and the last periods may be less than a full period, depending on the start recognition date and the final recognition date specified in a particular document (such as purchase invoice). The number of recognition periods is defined by the recognition dates specified in a document. ### Example Suppose there is an invoice that contains one line with an amount of €1500. In this invoice, the start date of the recognition process (in the **Term start date** field in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window) is set to 15.2.2021, and the final date of the recognition process (in the **Term end date** field) is set to 21.6.2021. Thus, the document amount should be recognised within the date range defined by the term start date and the term end date. A deferral code with the following settings in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window is applied to this invoice: Recognition method : **Flexible by periods, prorate by days** Schedule settings : **Every 1 period(s)** With this recognition method, the document amount is distributed over the date range that starts on the 15.2. ( term start date ) and ends on the 21.6. ( Term end date ). The date range covers 14 days of February, three full periods (March, April and May), and 21 days of June. The 14 days of February is 0.5 period (14 days / 28 days = 0.5). The 21 days of June is 0.7 period (21 days / 30 days = 0.7). Thus, February and June together makes 1.2 periods. So that, the revenue amount should be distributed across 4.2 periods, which is 3 periods of March, April and May + 1.2 periods of February and June. The amount recognised in each of the three full periods (March, April, and May) is €1500 / 4.2 = €357.14. The amount recognised in February is 0.5 \* €357.14 = €178.57, and the amount recognised in June is 0.7 \* €357.14 = €250.01. ## Flexible by days in period With the **Flexible by days in period** method, the amount to be recognised is distributed among periods, according to the number of calendar days in each particular period. The start date and the final date of the recognition process is specified individually for each line of a particular supplier ledger document (such as purchase invoice or cash sale). ### Example Suppose there is an invoice that contains one line with an amount of €1500. In this invoice, the start date of the recognition process (in the **Term start date** field in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window) is set to 15.2.2021, and the final date of the recognition process (in the **Term end date** field) is set to 21.6.2021. Thus, the document amount should be recognised within the specified date range, which is equal to 127 days (the number of days between the term start date and the term end date. A deferral code that has the following settings in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window is applied to the invoice: + **Recognition method**: **Flexible by days in period** + Schedule settings: **Every 1 period(s)** With this recognition method, the document amount is spread over the 127 days, with a proportional division by days. Thus, the document amounts are allocated as follows: + February (14 days): The amount is €165.35. + March (31 days): The amount is €366.14. + April (30 days): The amount is €354.33. + May (31 days): The amount is €366.14. + June (21 days): The amount is €248.04. ## On payment Before payment arrives, the recognition is planned evenly over the specified number of periods. Once a payment has been applied to the appropriate line of the original document, recognition is performed in the amount of the payment that is proportional to the line amount (if there are multiple lines). The recognition of the unpaid amount will be projected in portions that are calculated proportionally to the number of remaining period, while the actual recognition of the next portion will be performed when the next payment arrives. This method can be applied to the revenue recognition only. When you select the On payment method in the **Recognition method** field, then the **Revenue** option is selected by default in the **Code type** field and is not available for editing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Run recognition /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/set-up-the-recognition-process/run-recognition page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run recognition 1. Go to the [Run recognition (DR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/run-recognition-dr501000/) window. 1. In the **Recognition date** field, enter a date to select the recognition transactions in the deferral schedules that are due. 1. In the **Deferral code** field, you can select a code if you want to select only deferral schedules associated with this specific code. You can leave the field blank to view schedules for all codes. 1. To run recognition for specific schedules, select the check box in front of the schedules you want to include in the run. 1. Click **Process**. To run recognition for all schedules displayed in the table, you do not have to select them, just click **Process all**.

Related pages

Windows

 Process deferrals /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process deferrals Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About recognition of revenue and expenses /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/about-recognition-of-revenue-and-expenses page A deferral code assigned to an item on the Deferral settings tab in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window defines how revenue or expenses will be recognised. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About recognition of revenue and expenses A deferral code assigned to an item on the Deferral settings tab in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window defines how revenue or expenses will be recognised. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/), [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/). ## Introduction If no deferral code is assigned, the revenue or expenses will be recognised immediately and no deferral schedule will be generated. ## Revenue recognition When you enter an invoice in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window and select an item in a line on the **Document details** tab, the deferral code automatically appears in the **Deferral code** column if a deferral code has been previously defined for the item in its settings (if not, you can select a one manually). + When an invoice requiring deferral is released, the system generates one deferral schedule for each deferral code in the document. If multiple lines have the same code, one schedule for all lines with the code is generated. + A deferral schedule contains the list of recognition transactions, each of which the system releases in the specified financial period to recognise a portion of the revenue. You can use the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window to view the schedules and adjust them manually if needed. + As the revenues are earned, they are moved from the balance sheet liability account (the deferral account) to an income account (the sales account specified in the invoice) in multiple recognition transactions. + If no items on an invoice require deferral (that is, if no deferral codes are defined for the items), the total sales amount of the invoice is recorded to the revenue account upon release of the invoice; that is, the revenue is recognised during the post period. If some items on the invoice require deferral, revenue from the sale of other items (those with no deferral code assigned) is still recognised immediately. ## Expense recognition Generally, for purchased items, costs or expenses are recognised immediately on release of the appropriate invoices. + When you enter an invoice by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window and add a line for a non-stock item with a deferral code assigned, the deferral code appears in the **Deferral code** column by default. + Once the invoice is released, the system generates the schedules automatically. The system generates a schedule for each deferral code in the document, and multiple items can be included in one schedule. + You can review and manually edit the schedule by using the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window. Expenses are deferred to a balance sheet asset account (deferral account) until the expenses are used up or expired. At that time, they are moved to the expense account specified in the invoice. ## Manual running of a recognition schedule You can generate recognition transactions for both revenue and expenses in the [Run recognition (DR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/run-recognition-dr501000/) window. + Each time you run a schedule, only one recognition transaction is released and posted — even if, according to the schedule, multiple such transactions for a schedule are due. + You use the [Deferral transaction summary (DR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-transaction-summary-dr402000/) window to view the transactions that have been posted. In the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window, you can see which deferral transactions have been posted and which have yet to be posted.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About recognition of deferrals in previous periods /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/about-recognition-of-deferrals-in-previous-periods page In Visma Net, you can enter documents that require recognition of revenue or expenses in previous financial periods or in periods that are earlier than the period of the document date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About recognition of deferrals in previous periods In Visma Net, you can enter documents that require recognition of revenue or expenses in previous financial periods or in periods that are earlier than the period of the document date. ## Introduction When these documents are released, the system generates recognition transactions for each line of the document according to the specific set of settings of a deferral code specified for a line. ## Deferral codes and recognition methods You can process the recognition of deferrals in different ways, depending on the recognition method that you specify for each particular deferral code. You configure deferral codes in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window. Depending on the selected recognition method, you specify the particular set of settings for the deferral code. You use the following deferral methods: |Recognise deferred revenue in previous periods|Recognise deferred revenue and expenses in previous and future periods| |---|---| |**Flexible by periods**|**Evenly by periods**| |****Prorate by days**\**|**Prorate by days**| |****Flexible by days in period**\**|**Evenly by days in period**| ||**On payment**| ## Recognition period To define the start recognition period, specify the **Start offset** parameter while you configure a deferral code. This parameter defines the number of periods between the period of the document date and the start recognition period or the period when recognition process starts: + If you specify a negative value in this field (for example, –1), the recognition period will start one period earlier than the period of the document date. + If you specify a positive value in this field (for example, 1), the recognition will start one period later than the period of the document date. About custom deferral schedules /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/about-custom-deferral-schedules page You can manually create a deferral schedule to process deferrals that have been recognised only partially in your old system or to perform recognition of deferrals for documents without deferral codes specified that have been already released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About custom deferral schedules You can manually create a deferral schedule to process deferrals that have been recognised only partially in your old system or to perform recognition of deferrals for documents without deferral codes specified that have been already released. You can manually create a deferral schedule to process deferrals that have been recognised only partially in your old system or to perform recognition of deferrals for documents without deferral codes specified that have been already released. You can either + associate the schedule with a particular customer or supplier only, and process recognition of the specified amount without linking it to a specific document, or + link the schedule to the specific document (in which you select a particular line which amount should be deferred). ## Step-by-step instructions For step-by-step instructions, see: [Link deferral schedule to document.](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/link-deferral-schedule-to-document/) Link deferral schedule to document /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/link-deferral-schedule-to-document section You use the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window to create a deferral schedule for a selected document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Link deferral schedule to document You use the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window to create a deferral schedule for a selected document. For more information: [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/). 1. Go to the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part of the window, specify the following parameters: 1. In the **Doc. type** field, select the type of the document that requires a deferral. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the document by its reference number. 1. In the **Line no.** field, select the line of the document with the amount for which you want to schedule recognition. 1. Optional:: Click **View document** to make sure that you have selected the document correctly and specified the appropriate line number (if applicable). 1. In the **Components** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and do the following: 1. In the **Component ID** column, leave **< NONE>**, or select a required component (by its ID). 1. In the **Deferral code** column, specify the deferral code to be used for generating recognition transactions. 1. Optional:: In the **Deferral account** column (and **Deferral sub.**, if subaccounts are used in your system), review the account (and the subaccount, if applicable) taken from the deferral code settings, and edit it (if needed). 1. In the **Account** (and **Subaccount** ) fields, select the sales or expense account (depending on the selected document type), and corresponding subaccount (if applicable) to which recognised amounts should be posted. 1. In the **Total amount** column, type the amount to be deferred. The sum of total amounts of all listed components must be equal to amount of the selected line ( **Line amount** ). 1. In the table toolbar, click **Generate transactions**, so that the system generates recognition transactions for the selected row, and displays them in the **Transactions** table. Perform step 3 for all components that requires deferral. 1. In the **Transactions** table, edit the transaction details (for example, amounts or dates), if necessary. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. No general ledger transactions are generated when you release a deferral schedule. If you need to release multiple custom schedules at the same time, use the [Release schedules (DR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/release-schedules-dr503000/) window. For custom recognition transactions, you run the recognition process in the same way as you do for automatically generated transactions in the [Run recognition (DR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/run-recognition-dr501000/) window. Release schedules /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/release-schedules page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release schedules 1. Go to the [Release schedules (DR503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/release-schedules-dr503000/) window. 1. In the **Code type** field, select the type of deferral codes you want to process deferral schedules for: expense or revenue. You can also filter the list of schedules by using any of the other fields in the top part of the window, or a combination of them. 1. To release specific schedules, select the check box in front of the schedules you want to release. 1. Click **Process**.To release all schedules displayed in the table, you do not have to select them, just click **Process all**.

Related pages

Windows

 Adjusting deferrals /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/adjusting-deferrals section Assume that you have a document (such as a purchase invoice), for which the deferral schedule has been already generated, but you need to cancel this document or to adjust its document amount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Adjusting deferrals Assume that you have a document (such as a purchase invoice), for which the deferral schedule has been already generated, but you need to cancel this document or to adjust its document amount. Assume that you have a document (such as a purchase invoice), for which the deferral schedule has been already generated, but you need to cancel this document or to adjust its document amount. You cannot cancel or delete a document that is already being processed in the system. Instead, you can create an adjusting document, such as a purchase credit note for a purchase invoice, which allows you to either reverse the original document or to correct the document amount. As with the original document that contains items with deferrals, the adjustment document also requires deferrals. You can create an adjustment document either manually (and link the deferral schedule of the original document to it), or by reversing an original document (so that the deferral schedule will be associated with the original document automatically). For more information, see: [Create an adjustment document](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/adjusting-deferrals/create-an-adjustment-document/) Create an adjustment document /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/adjusting-deferrals/create-an-adjustment-document page When you need to correct an amount of the document, you can manually create an adjustment document, such as a credit note, that will adjust the document amount and the amounts of recognition transactions of the deferred schedule generated for this document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an adjustment document When you need to correct an amount of the document, you can manually create an adjustment document, such as a credit note, that will adjust the document amount and the amounts of recognition transactions of the deferred schedule generated for this document. You can create a credit note with the deferral schedule to be generated either independently from the original document, or in accordance with the schedule generated for the original document. You process these approaches as follows: 1. Create an adjusting document, and, in its detail lines, add items with the deferral codes assigned or add a deferral code in the **Deferral code** column in each line manually. This document will be processed by the system independently of the original one according to its own deferral schedule as described in [About recognition of revenue and expenses.](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/about-recognition-of-revenue-and-expenses/) 1. Link the adjusting document to the deferral schedule generated for the original document (as described below), so that the adjusting amount is divided among the deferred portions of the original document. ## Link an adjustment document to the original document You link an adjustment document to the deferral schedule of the original document while creating an adjustment document. For a credit note, in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, when you add an item that has a deferral code assigned, select the schedule of the original document in the **Deferral schedule** column. For a purchase credit note, in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, when you add an item that have deferral code assigned, select the schedule in the **Deferral schedule** column. Thus, the deferral schedule generated for the adjustment document is associated with the deferral schedule of the original document. You can view the associated schedules on the **Original schedules** tab in the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window. ## Example of processing of adjustment schedules Consider an example demonstrating the two ways of processing a credit note: independently, and as linked to the original document's schedule. This example explores revenue recognition for an invoice of €1000 that is dated April 1 and scheduled as follows: + April 1: Amount to be recognised now of €0 + May 1: First instalment of €200 + June 1: Second instalment of €200 + July 1: Third instalment of €200 + August 1: Fourth instalment of €200 + September 1: Fifth instalment of €200 Suppose further that on June 15, an error on the €1000 invoice was detected, and a €180 credit note was created to adjust the invoice amount. The credit note may be processed separately from the invoice, as an independent document (considered below in section I), or it may be linked to the original invoice to be processed according to the schedule of the original invoice (considered below in section II). I. The credit note has not been linked to the original invoice. It can be assigned to any deferral code available in the system (except a code with the **By payment** method specified). For example: Assume that it was assigned the same deferral code as the original invoice had. Thus, the credit note amount will be recognised in the following instalment: + July 15: Amount to be recognised now of €0 + July 1: First instalment of €36 + August 1: Second instalment of €36 + September 1: Third instalment of €36 + October 1: Fourth instalment of €36 + November 1: Fifth instalment of €36 II. The credit note has been linked to the schedule of the original invoice. On June 15, the invoice amount still to be recognised is €600, and recognition is planned through three future transactions. The credit note amount will be divided among these three transactions as follows: + July 1: €60 + August 1: €60 + September 1: €60 Manage recognition for packages /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/manage-recognition-for-packages section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage recognition for packages Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Manage recognition for packages - overview /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/manage-recognition-for-packages/manage-recognition-for-packages-overview page In many industries, selling multiple products and services as packages is a common practice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage recognition for packages - overview In many industries, selling multiple products and services as packages is a common practice. d For some time, however, recognition of revenue resulting from such sales posed an accounting problem. A package has a single price and multiple components (deliverables) included, which are often delivered at different times but not necessarily at the time of the sale; for example, a package might include a cell phone, its activation, and a one-year service plan. Moreover, it might be permissible to return some components, but not others. Different countries have different regulations about how to divide an MDA into separate units of accounting and how to allocate revenue to these units. About configuring a package /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/manage-recognition-for-packages/about-configuring-a-package section In Visma Net, you configure a package as an item for which you specify an appropriate multiple-deliverable arrangement (MDA) deferral code and add several components (stock or non-stock items). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About configuring a package In Visma Net, you configure a package as an item for which you specify an appropriate multiple-deliverable arrangement (MDA) deferral code and add several components (stock or non-stock items). ## Introduction ## Package configuration parameters You configure a package in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or ([Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window on the **Deferral settings** tab. On this tab, you specify the following parameters: + In the **Deferral code** field, select an MDA deferral code (the one that has the **Multiple-deliverable arrangement** field selected in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window), which indicates that an item is a package. + In the **Revenue components** table, add the required items (components) to the package (stock items or non-stock items that were previously configured). In addition to specifying a deferral code for the package, specify a deferral code for each component of the package, because each component may have different deferral periods. If you do not specify a deferral code for a component, the price of the component will be recognised immediately. ## Allocation method While adding components to this table, define how the total package price will be allocated between all components. To do this, select one of the following options for each component of the package in the **Allocation method** column: Percentage : The component price (fair value) is a percentage of the total package price. The column becomes available for editing if you select this option. Fixed amount : The component price is a fixed amount, which you specify in the **Fixed amount** column. This column becomes available for editing if you select this option. Residual : The price of the component is computed as the difference (residue) between the total package price and the sum of the prices calculated for all other components of the package. The cost for such a component is calculated after the fair values of all other components are computed. You can select the **Residual** option for only one component of the package. The **Deferral code** column is not available for a component with the **Residual** allocation method selected. After you have specified all required data for a package on the **Deferral setting** tab, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Create a package /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/manage-recognition-for-packages/create-a-package section You use the Stock items (IN202500) or ( Non-stock items (IN202000) window to configure a package (that is, a multiple-deliverable arrangement ) in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a package You use the Stock items (IN202500) or ( Non-stock items (IN202000) window to configure a package (that is, a multiple-deliverable arrangement ) in the system. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/), [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/). ## Introduction ## Before you start Before you configure the tax report, make sure: + That all required deferral codes designed for configuring packages are created in the system. + That all required items to be part of a package are created in the system. You can similarly create a package in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. On the window toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to create a new non-stock item. 1. On the **Deferral settings** tab, specify the deferral settings of this item: 1. In the **Deferral code** field, select the deferral code that was created in your system for configuring multiple-deliverable arrangements. (For this code, the **Multiple-deliverable arrangement** field is selected in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window.) 1. On the toolbar of the **Revenue components** table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Item ID** column of this row, select the item to be included in the package. 1. In the **Quantity** column, specify the number of this item that is included in the package. 1. In the **Deferral code** column, select the deferral code, which defines the conditions for deferring this item. If you select a deferral code with the **Flexible by periods, prorate by days,** or **Flexible by days in period** recognition method specified in the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window, the next two columns will be available for editing. 1. In the **Default term** column (if available), specify the period to defer the item (for example, the period that is defined in the maintenance contract). 1. In the **Default term UoM** column (if available), select the unit of measure to be used for the default term. Possible values are the following: **year(s)**, **month(s)**, **week(s),** or **day(s)**. 1. In the **Allocation method** column, select the method to be used to allocate the total document amount between the components of the package: **Percentage**, **Fixed amount**, or **Residual**. 1. Optional: If you have selected the **Percentage** option in the **Allocation method** column (which makes the **Percentage** column available for editing), specify the percentage that defines the component portion of the total package price. 1. Optional: If you have selected the **Fixed amount** option in the **Allocation method** column (which makes the **Fixed amount** column available for editing), specify the fixed price of this component. 1. Repeat step 3 (with all its substeps) for each item to be added to the package. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). About processing packages /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/manage-recognition-for-packages/about-processing-packages page When you sell a package, you enter an invoice in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window and include the package to the invoice detail line. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing packages When you sell a package, you enter an invoice in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window and include the package to the invoice detail line. For more information: [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/). When you sell a package, you enter an invoice in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window and include the package to the invoice detail line. Once the invoice is released, the system will generate as many schedules for the line as there are components in the package. You can use the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window to view the schedules and adjust them manually if needed. ## Packages and discounts In Visma Net, you can configure a discount that will be applied not only to the total package price but also to the fair value of the package components. + To configure such a discount, create a discount code in the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window and select the **Apply to deferred revenue** field for this code. The discount based on this discount code will be applied to the fair value of the non-residual package components, so that the discount will be applied to the deferred revenue or expense amount. Otherwise, the discount will be applied to the document total amount and will be reflected in the residual component amount that will be recognised immediately. + In the [Discount codes (AR209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discount-codes-ar209000/) window, define the entities to which the discount may be applied (the **Applicable to** column), so that in the documents with these entities specified (for example, a specific customer), this discount will be applied by the system automatically. + In the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window, select this code and define all required parameters, such as a particular customer or item this discount should be applied to. The item that you assign to such a discount should be a package. + When you have configured such a discount, the system will automatically insert this discount in the **Discount percent** column of the document, in which a particular customer or item is specified. The system will then use this discount while it calculates the fair value of a component of the package. + If you manually edit the discount amount in the invoice, the system will apply the new discount to the total amount of the invoice only (so that the amount of the residual component will be affected). However, the new discount does not affect the fair value of a non-residual component, which will be calculated by using the discount percent recorded in the system in the [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) window. ## Fair value of a component Often, a package contains two or more components, such as a product and some accompanying service (for example, a maintenance contract). Although these components can be sold separately and are configured in the system as separate items, they are usually offered as a package, which has a price that is less than the sum of the individual prices of each component. When you configure a package that consists of separate items (components), define which portion of the package price each component has or define the **fair value** of each component. Do this when the cost of at least one component should be recognised immediately, and the cost of at least one other component should be deferred over some period (such as the cost of a 12-month maintenance license). Deferred revenue windows /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue windows Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Deferred revenue preferences (DR101000) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferred-revenue-preferences-dr101000 page In this window, you can define the settings that affect the Deferred revenue workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue preferences (DR101000) In this window, you can define the settings that affect the Deferred revenue workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The Number series section
Element Description
Deferral schedules The number series used for deferral schedules.
Deferral schedule (DR201500) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferral schedule (DR201500) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + In this window, you can view the schedules the system has automatically generated for documents whose lines have deferral codes assigned. + You can also use the window to create custom schedules to defer recognising revenue or expense amounts for already released documents. + This functionality may help you if the decision about deferral has been made after the documents were released. For details on custom schedules, see: [About custom deferral schedules](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/about-custom-deferral-schedules/). ## What to do from this window + [Create an adjustment document](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/adjusting-deferrals/create-an-adjustment-document/) + [Link deferral schedule to document](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/link-deferral-schedule-to-document/) ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
View document Navigates to one of the document entry windows, such as Sales invoices (AR301000) or Purchase invoices (AP301000), to show the details of the document to which the deferral schedule is linked.
Release

Releases the deferral schedule. Once the schedule is released, the recognition transactions are ready to be posted when it becomes due. In the released schedule, you cannot edit the summary information and the component details (in the Components table).

You can still edit the details of the generated transactions in the Transactions table (those transactions that are not posted yet).

No general ledger transactions are generated when you release a deferral schedule.
## The top part You use the elements in this part to select a custom or system-generated schedule and to view its summary information. Also, you can select a released document by its type and reference number and create a custom deferral schedule for it.
Element Description
Schedule no. The ID of the schedule, which is automatically generated by the system. Select a schedule to view its details.
Date The date that determines the period when the first recognition transaction should be recognised and posted. In the deferral schedules generated automatically for documents with the deferral codes specified, this is the document date specified by the system by default. In the custom deferral schedules, you define this date manually.
Period The financial period to which the first recognition transaction should be posted.
Doc. type The type of the original document for which the schedule is displayed or is being created.
Customer/Supplier no The customer/supplier connected with the schedule.
Doc. no. The document number of the original document.
Line no.

The line in the customer ledger or supplier ledger document for which you can create and view the deferral schedule.

In the Line no. selector, the amount displayed for a line in the Amount column can differ from the line amount of the original document, because it does not contain any discount amounts or inclusive VAT amounts that have been applied to the document (if any). Thus, this is the amount to be recorded to the corresponding sales or expense account (depending on the document type), and to be deferred.

The amounts are shown in the base currency, which can differ from the currency of the corresponding document.
Line amount The original amount for the specified document line. Displayed if a line number is selected.
Company The company to which the document belongs.
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Location The location of the customer or supplier.
Project

The project with which the document is associated, or the non-project code if the document is not associated with any project.

The field appears only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task The project task with which this document is associated.
Term start date The date when the process of recognition of deferrals should start; this date should be specified for the item for which the deferral code based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method is assigned.
Term end date The date when the process of recognition of deferrals should finish; this date should be specified for the item for which the deferral code based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method is assigned.
Show closed documents When this check box is selected, closed documents are also displayed. The default is open documents.
## The Details tab This tab includes the **Components** and **Transactions** tables. For each component specified in the **Components** table, the tab shows in the **Transactions** table the recognition transactions that were generated for the component according to the deferral code selected for the component. For documents that were released without deferral codes assigned, you can manually create deferral schedules for each component. ### The Components table toolbar
Button Description
Generate transactions

Generates recognition transactions for the selected component.

You cannot regenerate transactions for a component for which one or more transactions have been already posted.
### The Components table columns
Column Description
Component ID

The component of the line item, if the line item is a package; otherwise, the item, by its item ID.

For details about packages, see: Manage recognition for packages - overview.
Deferral code

The code that has been assigned to the line of the selected document or manually specified for a component in the custom deferral schedule. This code is used for generating recognition transactions to defer the amount specified in the line.

You can edit this field for the components that have the Draft status (those components for which the deferral schedules have not been released yet) in the custom deferral schedules.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.
Deferral account The account to hold the amount to be deferred.
Deferral sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used with the account.
Account The sales or expense account to which the transaction amount is or will be posted.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Total amount The amount on the original document or document line.
Deferred amount The amount yet to be recognised.
Line total The total amount to be recognised. This amount is calculated automatically as the control sum of transaction amounts if the transaction amounts were edited manually.
Status The status of the transaction.
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
### The Transactions table columns You can edit the settings of the generated recognition transactions as long as they are not posted.
Column Description
Trans. no. An integer that indicates the order of the recognition transaction in the schedule.
Status The status of the transaction.
Rec. date The date that determines the period when the transaction amount should be recognised and posted. You can change this date manually.
Trans. date The date when the general ledger batch is created.
Amount The amount to be recognised. You can edit this amount manually.
Account The sales or expense account to which the transaction amount is or will be posted. You can change this account manually.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount. You can change it manually.
Period The financial period when the transaction amount should be recognised and posted.
Branch The branch in which the transaction was created. You can change it manually.
Batch no. The reference number of the batch that posts the recognition transaction. Click the number to view the batch details.
## The Original schedules tab The table on the **Original schedules** tab displays any schedules associated with the selected schedule. For example, if the schedule is based on a credit note, the tab will display the schedules generated for the original invoice. Note: This tab is only visible if you have: + In the [Deferral codes (DR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000/) window, created a deferral code. + In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) or the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) windows, then created an invoice and selected the deferral code on the line, and released the invoice + In the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window, scheduled for that invoice. ### The table toolbar
Button Description
View schedule Displays the details of the schedule created for the associated document.
### The table columns
Column Description
Schedule no. The number of the schedule in the system.
Transaction descr. The status of the schedule associated with the original document.
Doc. type The type of the original document.
Doc. no. The document number of the document.
Period The period to which the document transactions are posted.
Deferral codes (DR202000) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-codes-dr202000 page You use this window to view the details of deferral codes defined in the system, as well as to create new deferral codes that can be used for revenue or expense recognition in your organisation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferral codes (DR202000) You use this window to view the details of deferral codes defined in the system, as well as to create new deferral codes that can be used for revenue or expense recognition in your organisation. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction By assigning a deferral code to a line of an invoice or a credit note, you can defer the amount and recognise it as a revenue or expense in appropriate portions over some number of periods. Once the document is released, a schedule for it is generated according to the recognition method associated with the code; you can use the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window to view these schedules. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Link deferral schedule to document](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/link-deferral-schedule-to-document/) + [Create an adjustment document](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/adjusting-deferrals/create-an-adjustment-document/) ## The top part Here you can define a new code to account for deferred revenues or expenses. You can also select an existing code and view its details.
Element Description
Deferral code The unique code for the deferral type, max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the deferral code.
Active

Deselecting this check box will remove this code from all look-ups where you can select a deferral code. If entered manually, you will get an error message that this code is inactive.

If the code is in use on non-stock items, stock items, components, Invoice inbox rules, or any purchase or sales invoices/credit notes, you will get a message listing the items and rules where it is used and the number of the unreleased purchase or sales documents where it is used.

Schedules, where the code is used, will not be affected by these inactive settings but be processed.

Note

In the list windows for Non-stock items, Stock items, and Invoice inbox rules, you can unhide the column Deferral code and filter on it to easily find the records using deferral code.|
Deferred revenue from item When this check box is selected, the deferred revenue of the code will be retrieved from the connected item.
Recognition method

The method used to distribute the document amount over the periods. The following options are available:

  • Evenly by periods: With this method, equal amounts are distributed to all included periods.
  • Evenly by periods, prorate by days: With this method, the amount to be recognised is distributed evenly among periods, with a proportional division among the first and last periods, which are counted as one full period. The instalment amounts for the first and last periods are calculated based on a full-period amount that is proportional to the number of days each instalment should cover. This method can be used for documents that have a date in the middle of a financial period.
  • Evenly by days in period: With this method, the amount is calculated proportionally based on the exact number of days in the period.
  • Flexible by periods, prorate by days: With this method, the amount to be recognised is distributed among periods, with a proportional division among the first and last periods. With this option, the start date of the first period and the end date of the last period are fixed; these dates are taken from the invoice details. Other than this, the method works in the same manner as the Evenly by periods, prorate by days method, described above.

If this method is selected, the Start offset and the Occurrences fields are not available.

  • Flexible by days in period: With this method, the start date and the end date of the period is taken from the invoice details. Other than this, the method works in the same manner as the Evenly by days in period method.

If this method is selected, the Start offset and the Occurrences fields are not available.

  • On payment: Before payment arrives, the recognition is planned evenly over the specified number of periods. Once a payment has been applied to the appropriate line of the original document, recognition is performed in the amount of the payment that is proportional to the line amount (if there are multiple lines). The recognition of the unpaid amount will be projected in portions that are calculated proportionally to the number of remaining periods, while the actual recognition of the next portion will be performed when the next payment arrives. This method can be applied to the revenue recognition only. When you select the On payment method in the Recognition method field, the Revenue option is selected by default in the Code type field and is not available for editing.

You can find detailed examples of using each of these recognition methods at About recognition methods for deferred revenues or expenses.
Allow recognition in previous periods

When this check box is selected, the deferred revenue can be recognised in periods that are earlier than the period of the document (such as an invoice). The first recognition period is defined by the Term start date specified in the document.

If this check box is cleared and the term start date is earlier than the document date, the system will generate recognition transactions for all required previous periods, but these transactions will be posted to the period of the document date.

This check box is available only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method is selected in the Recognition method field.
Recognise now % The percentage of the line amount (expense or income) to be recognised immediately on the document date in the first “recognise-now” transaction.
Start offset

The number of periods between the period of the transaction date and the next one.

This field is not available if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period option is selected in the Recognition method field.
From period Choose the period from which you want the occurrence to start from.
Occurrences

The number of transactions through which recognition of the deferred revenue or expense will be performed. This number doesn’t include the first (“recognise-now”) transaction, and the amount to be divided among occurrences does not include the “recognise-now” amount.

This field is not available if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period method is selected in the Recognition method field.
Code type

The type of the deferral code, which can be one of the following options:

Revenue
For revenue recognition
Expense
For expense recognition

You can use both recognition methods Flexible by period, prorate by days and Flexible by days in period for the code type Expense. When you select a deferral code with one of these recognition methods on a purchase invoice, you will be able to enter a start and end date.
Use deferral account from

The source of the deferral account that will be used for holding the deferred amounts until these amounts are fully recognised. The following options are available:

  • Item
  • Deferral code
Combine deferral sub. from

The rule of composing the deferral subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document. The following mask options are available for the Revenue code type:

E
Subaccount associated with the employee
D
Subaccount associated with deferral code
L
Subaccount associated with the customer location
S
Subaccount associated with the salesperson
I
Subaccount associated with the item

The following mask options are available for the Expense code type:

E
Subaccount associated with the employee
D
Subaccount associated with deferral code
L
Subaccount associated with the customer location
I
Subaccount associated with the item
Copy sub. from sales/expense sub. When this check box is selected, the corresponding sales or expense subaccount is copied to the deferral subaccount.
Deferral account

The account used to hold the deferred amount until it is fully recognised. The account type should be specified as follows:

  • A liability account for a deferral code of the Revenue type
  • An asset account for a deferral code of the Expense type
Deferral sub. The corresponding subaccount.
### The Schedule settings section
Element Description
Every x period(s) The frequency for generating documents, in periods.
### The Document date selection section
Element Description
Start of the financial period An option button that you click if you want the documents for a recognition transaction to be generated on the first day of the financial period.
End of period An option button that you click if you want the documents for a recognition transaction to be generated on the last day of the financial period.
Fixed day in the period An option button that you click if you want the documents for a recognition transaction to be generated on some particular day of the period. If you select this option, specify the particular day.
Deferral schedule summary (DR401000) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-summary-dr401000 page In this window, you can view the details of revenue or expense recognition. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferral schedule summary (DR401000) In this window, you can view the details of revenue or expense recognition. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The top part You can use this part to specify selection criteria for schedules and then view the schedules matching the criteria in the table.
Element Description
Code type

The type of deferral code. Select one of the following options:

Revenue
To view the details of revenue recognition
Expense
To view the details of expense recognition
Deferral account The account used to hold unrecognised amounts.
Deferral sub. The corresponding subaccount used to flag the unrecognised amounts.
Company The company in which the schedule is used.
Branch The branch in which the schedule is used.
Deferral code A deferral code assigned to document lines. Select a code from the list of codes defined in the system, or leave the field blank to view documents with any codes of the type.
Customer/Supplier no. The customer or supplier that is associated with the document.
Component

The component of the package, if the item is a package.

For details about packages, see: Manage recognition for packages - overview.
Total scheduled The total scheduled amount on the schedule.
Total deferred The total deferred amount on the schedule.
Branch The branch with which the document is associated.
## The table This table contains a list of schedules that meet the criteria specified in the top part. For deferral codes that are set to inactive, you will get a warning on the line that the code is inactive.
Column Description
Schedule ID The schedule, by its ID, that matches the selection criteria.
Doc. type The type of the original document for which the schedule was generated.
Doc. no. The number of the document. Click the number to open the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window to view the details of the schedule for the selected line of the original document (if different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the original document).
Component ID The component if the line item is a package and consists of components; otherwise, the item ID of the line item.
Line no. The transaction number in the database record, which may be different from the line in the document.
Date The date of the document.
Status The status of the document.
Total amount The total amount of the document.
Branch The branch connected with the document.
Deferred amount The part of the amount that was deferred.
Deferral code The deferral code used for the line.
Deferral account The account that holds the deferral amount.
Deferral sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Account The account to which the recognised amounts will be posted.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer/supplier associated with the document.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the customer/supplierassociated with the document.
Deferral transaction summary (DR402000) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-transaction-summary-dr402000 page You use this window to view the posted recognition transactions that match the criteria you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferral transaction summary (DR402000) You use this window to view the posted recognition transactions that match the criteria you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The top part In this area, you can specify the criteria the system uses to select deferral transactions to be displayed in the list below.
Element Description
Company The company in which the recognition transaction was created.
Branch The branch in which the recognition transaction was created.
Code type The type of deferral code for which you want to display the recognition transactions. Select one of the following options: Revenue or Expense.
Period The financial period of the transactions to be displayed.
Deferral code The specific deferral code for which you want to view the related transactions. Select a code, or leave the field blank to view transactions for all codes.
Account The account that holds deferred amounts.
Subaccount The subaccount used for the transaction.
Customer/Supplier no. The customer or supplier that is associated with the transaction. Leave this field blank to view transactions for all customers and suppliers.
## The table This table includes the list of transactions posted in the selected financial period to recognise amounts of revenue or expenses previously deferred on the specified account. For deferral codes that are set to inactive you will get a warning on the line that the **Deferral code** is inactive.
Column Description
Schedule ID The ID of the schedule matching the selection criteria.
Component ID

The ID of the line item.

For details about packages, see: Set up the recognition process - overview.
Rec. date The date when the recognition transaction was posted.
Trans. date The date of the recognition transaction.
Amount The amount recognised by the transaction.
Account The account to which the recognised amount was posted.
Period The financial period to which the transaction was posted.
Deferral code The code used for the schedule.
Doc. type The type of the document this transaction is based on.
Doc. no. The number of the document that this transaction is based on.
Line no. The line number associated with the transaction in the database record. This number may not be the same as the line number in the document because some of the line items, as packages, may require as many lines as there are components in them.
Customer/Supplier no. The customer or supplier associated with the original document.
Branch The branch in which the recognition transaction was created.
Batch no. The reference number of the batch that posted the recognition transactions to general ledger accounts.
Release schedules (DR503000) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/release-schedules-dr503000 page In this window, you release custom deferral schedules. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release schedules (DR503000) In this window, you release custom deferral schedules. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction In this window, you release custom deferral schedules. Custom deferral schedules are the schedules that you create manually by using the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window. You can link a custom schedule to the required document at the time of creating the schedule or any time later. You may need to create custom schedules manually for documents that were imported to Visma Net from third-party software or that were released without deferral codes specified. For details, see: [About custom deferral schedules.](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/about-custom-deferral-schedules/) ## What to do from this window + [Release schedules](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/process-deferrals/release-schedules/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the schedules that you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes all the listed schedules.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select custom schedules for processing by the deferral account, deferral code, and customer or supplier. Also, you can select schedules linked to specific components.
Element Description
Code type The type of deferral codes for which you want to process deferral schedules.
Deferral account The account used to record the deferred amounts.
Deferral sub. The subaccount used to record the deferred amounts.
Deferral code The particular deferral code for which you want to review and process transactions.
Customer/Supplier no. The particular customer or supplier whose deferral transactions you want to view.
Component The particular component for which you want to view deferral transactions.
## The table This table includes all the unreleased custom schedules created for documents released with no deferral codes assigned. You can create custom schedules in the [Deferral schedule (DR201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/deferral-schedule-dr201500/) window. For deferral codes that are set to inactive, you will get a warning on the line that the code is inactive.
Column Description
Schedule no.

The ID of the schedule, which was automatically generated by the system when you created a custom schedule for the document released without a deferral code assigned.

Click this number to open the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window in a pop-up window.
Deferral code The deferral code used for the document line (or item component, if the line item is a package).
Doc. type The type of the original document, the schedule transactions are based on.
Doc. no. The number of the original document. When you click this number, the system navigates you to the window where the document was created and you can view the document details.
Component ID The component of the line item if the line item is a package and consists of components; otherwise, the item ID of the line item.
Total amount The amount of the document line.
Deferral account The account to record the unrecognised (deferred) amount.
Deferral sub. The subaccount used for the deferral.
Date The date when the original document was created.
Post period The period to post the transactions.
Customer/Supplier no. The customer or supplier associated with the original document.
Deferred amount

The deferred amount for the document line.

This column is hidden by default. You can add this column to the table by using the Column configuration dialog box.
Line no.

The line in the original document for which the deferral schedule was created.

This column is hidden by default. You can add this column to the table by using the Column configuration dialog box.
Run recognition (DR501000) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/run-recognition-dr501000 page By using this window, you can perform recognition in accordance with deferral schedules assigned to various documents associated with the specified deferral code. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run recognition (DR501000) By using this window, you can perform recognition in accordance with deferral schedules assigned to various documents associated with the specified deferral code. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction By using this window, you can perform recognition in accordance with deferral schedules assigned to various documents associated with the specified deferral code. Each time you run a schedule, only one recognition transaction in this schedule is released, even if multiple transactions are due according to the schedule. ## What to do from this window + [Run recognition](/visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/set-up-the-recognition-process/run-recognition/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the schedules that you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes all the schedules.
## The top part By using the elements in this part, you can select the schedules to be listed in the table by recognition transaction date and deferral code.
Element Description
Recognition date The date to select the recognition transactions in the deferral schedules that are due.
Deferral code The deferral code. Specify a code if you want to select only deferral schedules associated with this specific code. You can leave the field blank to view schedules for all codes.
## The table This table includes the schedules having recognition transactions that can be processed up to the specified date (if one was specified). If you specified a deferral code in the top part, you will see only schedules associated with it. For deferral codes that are set to inactive. you will get a warning on the line that the code is inactive.
Column Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you select to include the schedule for processing when you click Process.
Schedule no. The ID of the schedule, which was automatically generated by the system when the deferral schedule was created. Click this number to open the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and view the details of the schedule.
Deferral code The deferral code used for the document line (or item component, if the line item is a package).
Doc. type The type of the original document, which can be one of the following: Invoice, Credit note, Debit note, Cash sale, Cash return, Purchase invoice, Credit adjustment, Purchase credit note.
Doc. no The number of the invoice connected with deferral schedule.
Customer/Supplier no. The number of the customer/supplier connected with the invoice.
Customer/Supplier name The name of the customer/supplier connected with the invoice.
Component ID The component of the line item if the line item is a package and consists of components; otherwise, the item ID of the line item.
Trans. no. The number that indicates the order of the recognition transaction in the schedule.
Rec. date The date when the partial amount was recognised.
Amount The amount to be recognised in the period.
Account The account to post the recognised amounts.
Period The period to post the transactions.
Branch The branch with which the document is associated.
Validate deferred balances (DR509900) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-windows/validate-deferred-balances-dr509900 page You use this window to validate the balances of deferrals. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate deferred balances (DR509900) You use this window to validate the balances of deferrals. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You use this window to validate the balances of deferrals. Validation entails recalculating the balances based on the history records and matching them to the deferral schedules stored in the database. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Validate Recalculates deferral balances for the types of deferrals that you have selected in the table.
Validate all Recalculates balances for all listed deferrals.
## The table This table contains the list of deferral types for which the balances can be recalculated.
Column Description
Balance type The deferral type, Expense or Revenue.
Deferred revenue reports /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports section The Deferred revenue reports show projections of revenue and expenses by periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue reports The Deferred revenue reports show projections of revenue and expenses by periods. Because the Deferred revenue workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, such as Supplier ledger and Customer ledger, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a report to any supporting details. Because the reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. Deferred revenue balance by account (DR630010) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-balance-by-account-dr630010 section This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the selected deferred revenue account (or multiple accounts) in the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue balance by account (DR630010) This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the selected deferred revenue account (or multiple accounts) in the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view the balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Hide zero balances When this check box is selected, zero values for the beginning and ending balances will not be included in the report.
Show subaccounts When this check box is selected, subaccounts will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred revenue balance by customer (DR630012) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-balance-by-customer-dr630012 section This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred revenue accounts in the specified period, broken down by customer within each account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue balance by customer (DR630012) This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred revenue accounts in the specified period, broken down by customer within each account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Hide zero balances When this check box is selected, zero values for the beginning and ending balances will not be included in the report.
Show subaccounts When this check box is selected, subaccounts will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred revenue balance by component (DR630014) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-balance-by-component-dr630014 section This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred revenue accounts in the specified period, broken down by component within each account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue balance by component (DR630014) This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred revenue accounts in the specified period, broken down by component within each account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Hide zero balances When this check box is selected, zero values for the beginning and ending balances will not be included in the report.
Show subaccounts When this check box is selected, subaccounts will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred expense balance by account (DR630015) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-balance-by-account-dr630015 section This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred expense accounts in the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense balance by account (DR630015) This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred expense accounts in the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Hide zero balances When this check box is selected, zero values for the beginning and ending balances will not be included in the report.
Show subaccounts When this check box is selected, subaccounts will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred expense balance by supplier (DR630017) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-balance-by-supplier-dr630017 section This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred expense accounts in the specified period, broken down by supplier or within each account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense balance by supplier (DR630017) This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred expense accounts in the specified period, broken down by supplier or within each account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Hide zero balances When this check box is selected, zero values for the beginning and ending balances will not be included in the report.
Show subaccounts When this check box is selected, subaccounts will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred expense balance by component (DR630019) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-balance-by-component-dr630019 section This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred expense accounts in the specified period, broken down by component within each account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense balance by component (DR630019) This report displays the beginning and ending balances of the deferred expense accounts in the specified period, broken down by component within each account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Hide zero balances When this check box is selected, zero values for the beginning and ending balances will not be included in the report.
Show subaccounts When this check box is selected, subaccounts will be displayed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Draft schedules (DR630030) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/draft-schedules-dr630030 section This report displays the balances of deferral accounts generated based on draft schedules of each type of deferrals. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Draft schedules (DR630030) This report displays the balances of deferral accounts generated based on draft schedules of each type of deferrals. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Type The type of deferral, which can be Revenue or Expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Revenue recognised by account (DR630070) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/revenue-recognised-by-account-dr630070 section This report displays the revenue recognized to a specific account during a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Revenue recognised by account (DR630070) This report displays the revenue recognized to a specific account during a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Include revenue recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Expenses recognised by account (DR630075) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/expenses-recognised-by-account-dr630075 section This report displays the expenses recognised to a specific account during a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expenses recognised by account (DR630075) This report displays the expenses recognised to a specific account during a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view the balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Include expense recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Revenue recognised by customer (DR630080) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/revenue-recognised-by-customer-dr630080 section This report displays the revenue amounts related to a specific customer that were recognised during a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Revenue recognised by customer (DR630080) This report displays the revenue amounts related to a specific customer that were recognised during a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view the balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Include revenue recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Expenses recognised by supplier (DR630085) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/expenses-recognised-by-supplier-dr630085 section This report displays the expenses related to a specific supplier that were recognised during a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expenses recognised by supplier (DR630085) This report displays the expenses related to a specific supplier that were recognised during a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view the balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Include expense recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Revenue recognised by component (DR630090) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/revenue-recognised-by-component-dr630090 section This report displays the revenue amounts associated with a specific component recognised during a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Revenue recognised by component (DR630090) This report displays the revenue amounts associated with a specific component recognised during a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods.

By default, the current period is used.
Include revenue recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, whichperformed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Expenses recognised by component (DR630095) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/expenses-recognised-by-component-dr630095 section This report displays the expense amounts associated with a specific component recognised during a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expenses recognised by component (DR630095) This report displays the expense amounts associated with a specific component recognised during a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period whose balances you want to see.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all periods. By default, the current period is used.
Account

The account whose balances you want to see.

Select an account, or leave the field blank to view information on all accounts for the specified period.
Subaccount

The subaccount whose balances you want to see.

Select a subaccount, or leave the field blank to view the balances of all subaccounts for the specified period.
Include expense recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferral schedule summary (DR650040) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferral-schedule-summary-dr650040 section This report displays summary information on all deferred revenues and expenses scheduled for recognition, with the information listed by customer or supplier respectively. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferral schedule summary (DR650040) This report displays summary information on all deferred revenues and expenses scheduled for recognition, with the information listed by customer or supplier respectively. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company to be reported on. The default is the current company.
Branch The branch to be reported on. The default is the current branch.
Type The type of deferred amount you want to view details on.
Period The financial period the report will cover.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred revenue projected balance by customer(DR660030) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-projected-balance-by-customer-dr660030 section This report, over the specified range of periods, displays by customer the movement of funds on deferred revenue accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue projected balance by customer(DR660030) This report, over the specified range of periods, displays by customer the movement of funds on deferred revenue accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred expense projected balance by supplier (DR660035) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-projected-balance-by-supplier-dr660035 section This report displays, by supplier, the movement of funds on deferred expense accounts over the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense projected balance by supplier (DR660035) This report displays, by supplier, the movement of funds on deferred expense accounts over the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred revenue projected balance by component (DR660040) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-projected-balance-by-component-dr660040 section This report, over the specified range of periods, displays by component the movement of funds on deferred revenue accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue projected balance by component (DR660040) This report, over the specified range of periods, displays by component the movement of funds on deferred revenue accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred expense projected balance by component (DR660045) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-projected-balance-by-component-dr660045 section This report displays, by component, the movement of funds on deferred expense accounts over the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense projected balance by component (DR660045) This report displays, by component, the movement of funds on deferred expense accounts over the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred revenue projected recognition by customer (DR660050) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-projected-recognition-by-customer-dr660050 section This report displays by customer the projection of revenue recognised in the selected range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue projected recognition by customer (DR660050) This report displays by customer the projection of revenue recognised in the selected range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
Include revenue recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred expense projected recognition by supplier (DR660055) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-projected-recognition-by-supplier-dr660055 section This report displays, by supplier, deferred expense amounts on deferral accounts over the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense projected recognition by supplier (DR660055) This report displays, by supplier, deferred expense amounts on deferral accounts over the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
Include expense recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred revenue projected recognition by component (DR660060) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-projected-recognition-by-component-dr660060 section This report displays, by component of packages sold, the projection of revenue recognised in the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue projected recognition by component (DR660060) This report displays, by component of packages sold, the projection of revenue recognised in the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
Include revenue recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred expense projected recognition by component (DR660065) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-projected-recognition-by-component-dr660065 section For the time interval you select, this report displays the projections of expenses recognised by component of packages purchased. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense projected recognition by component (DR660065) For the time interval you select, this report displays the projections of expenses recognised by component of packages purchased. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
Include expense recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: Reports - overview Deferred revenue projected balance by account (DR660070) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-projected-balance-by-account-dr660070 section This report displays, by deferral account–subaccount pair, the projection of deferred revenue amounts in the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue projected balance by account (DR660070) This report displays, by deferral account–subaccount pair, the projection of deferred revenue amounts in the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred expense projected balance by account (DR660075) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-projected-balance-by-account-dr660075 section This report displays, by deferral account/subaccount pair, the projection of deferred expense amounts over the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense projected balance by account (DR660075) This report displays, by deferral account/subaccount pair, the projection of deferred expense amounts over the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred revenue projected recognition by account (DR660080) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-revenue-projected-recognition-by-account-dr660080 section This report displays, by account–subaccount pair, the projection of revenue recognised in the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred revenue projected recognition by account (DR660080) This report displays, by account–subaccount pair, the projection of revenue recognised in the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
Include expense recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Deferred expense projected recognition by account (DR660085) /visma-net-erp/help/deferred-revenue/deferred-revenue-reports/deferred-expense-projected-recognition-by-account-dr660085 section For the range of periods you select, this report shows, by account–subaccount pair, the projection of expenses recognised. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deferred expense projected recognition by account (DR660085) For the range of periods you select, this report shows, by account–subaccount pair, the projection of expenses recognised. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first period that the report will cover.
To period The last period that the report will cover.
Include expense recognised in the same period as deferred When this check box is selected, the transactions are included in the report, which performed the recognition of certain partial amounts in the same periods in which the original amounts were deferred.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Excise duty /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Excise duty The **Excise duty** functionality in Visma Net enables you to keep track of the excise duties (særavgifter) you have to pay on certain products. You can also keep track of sales to and returns from locations excluded from excise duties. For each month, you can create reports of all invoiced excise duties and excise duty exceptions, which you can use when you report these to the tax authorities. Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About excise duties /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/about-excise-duties page In this topic 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About excise duties In this topic ## Introduction The **Excise duty** functionality in Visma Net enables you to keep track of the excise duties (særavgifter) you have to pay on certain products. You can also keep track of sales to and returns from locations excluded from excise duties. For each month, you can create reports of all invoiced excise duties and excise duty exceptions, which you can use when you report these to the tax authorities. ## In this topic This topic describes: + what excise duties are and how they work in Visma Net, + the differences in excise duty handling between order types, + how excise duties are calculated, + how excise duties are recorded to the general ledger, + what to do when it is time to report excise duties. ## Excise duties background and setup in Visma Net ### What are excise duties? Excise duties include duties like environmental tax and alcoholic beverage tax. For Norway, you use the following document for setting up excise duties: [Veileder for bruk av koder ved fastsettelse av særavgifter](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/avgifter/saravgifter/rapportere/saravgiftsmelding/kodeveileder/). Read more on the [Skatteetaten website](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/avgifter/saravgifter/). ### Excise duties in Visma Net In short, the excise duty functionality consists of duty type/group combinations with a set duty rate and one or more connected items per combination. When you sell and invoice an item that is connected to a duty group/type, the order and invoice will show an excise duty total. When it is time to report excise duties to the tax authority, you can create a list of all excise duties for a certain period. You will need to report them manually. For more information on how to set up and use excise duties, see [Enable and set up excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/enable-and-set-up-excise-duty/). ## Sales and returns ### Excise duty handling per order type The following table gives an overview of the differences in how the excise duty is handled for different order types for sales and returns not excluded from excise duty calculation: |Order type|Excise duty total|Excise duty factor in [Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-including-excise-duty-ef402000/)| |---|---|---| |**QT**|Sum of excise duty amounts on lines|not applicable| |**SO**, **CS**, **SA**, **IN**|Sum of excise duty amounts on lines|**1**| |**CM**, **RC**, **CR**|Sum of excise duty amounts on lines|**-1**| |**RM**|Sum of excise duty amounts on **Issue** lines, minus the sum of excise duty amounts on **Receipt** lines.|+ **-1** for returned items + **1** for newly issued and invoiced items| |**RR**|0|not applicable| |**TR**|not supported|not supported| > [!NOTE] > that you can not use the **RR** order type when an item's duty calculation has changed, even if the item price for the customer is the same. These changes will not be traceable in the [Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000/) or [Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-including-excise-duty-ef402000/) window. ### Returned and credited items The way of calculating the excise duty amounts and setting the excise duty factors is the same whether or not a returned or credited item is based on an invoice. This means, that returned and credited items based on an invoice can be affected by a new customer location exemption status and/or duty rate set after the invoice was released. Therefore, the excise duty amounts may differ compared to the invoice. ## Calculations of excise duty amounts The excise duty amount calculations depend on: + Duty rate, + Calculation rule, which can be calculation based on: + line amount, + quantity on order line, + How many duties an item is connected to, + Excise duty factor. See the sections below for more information about each of these points. ### Duty rate You set the duty rate in the [Duty rates (EF207000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/duty-rates-ef207000/) window. The start date determines which rate is used. ### Calculation rule You set the calculation rule in the [Duty groups (EF205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/duty-groups-ef205000/) window. The following options are available: + **Turnover factor**: the duty amount is calculated based on the **Manual amount**, which is the line amount after discount, as `Duty rate x Manual amount`. + **Standard**: the duty amount is calculated based on: + quantity on order line, + conversion factor from the duty UoM to the base unit, + conversion factor from the UoM on order line to the base unit. See the next section for more information about the **Standard** calculation rule. ### Standard calculation rule formula For the **Standard** calculation rule, the UoM used on the order line is considered when calculating the line's excise duty amount. As this UoM may differ from the duty UoM in various ways, this comes down to the following three calculation formulas:
UoM on order line is same as Formula to calculate excise duty amount on line
Duty UoM Duty rate x Quantity on order line
Base unit

Duty rate x Quantity on order line x Duty conversion factor

The duty conversion factor is set on the Excise duty tab in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Sales unit or other UoM

Duty rate x Quantity on order line x Duty conversion factor x or / Conversion factor

The conversion factor from the UoM on the line to the item’s base unit is set in the unit conversion table on the General settings tab in the Stock items (IN202500) window. Depending on the operator set there, the formula contains multiplication or division by this conversion factor.
#### Item connected to several duties When a line item is connected to several active duties, the separately calculated duties will be added together. #### Excise duty factor The excise duty factor indicates whether the excise duty amount is to be paid, reimbursed, or it can set the excise duty amount to 0. The following table displays which factor is automatically set for which situations, and which windows you can use to track them. |Factor|Used for|Inquiry window| |---|---|---| |**1**|Sales, excise duty to be paid|[Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-including-excise-duty-ef402000/)| |**-1**|Returns, excise duty to be reimbursed|| |**0**|Sales and returns to customer locations exempted from excise duties.|[Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000/)| #### Excluded customer locations Deliveries to certain customer locations, i.e. diplomats, are exempted from excise duties but still need to be reported to Skatteetaten. You can exclude a customer location from excise duty calculations in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. All excise duty amounts for these locations will be 0. ## General ledger batch After you have released an invoice with excise duties, the excise duty total is recorded to the general ledger. For a sales order with an order total of 1250, of which the VAT total is 250 and the excise duty total is 74, the following accounts are involved: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Customer ledger account|1250|0| |Liability account (VAT)|0|250| |Income account|0|926| |Excise duty sales account|0|74| |Excise duty sales offset account|74|0| |Excise duty payable account|0|74| ### Excise duty accounts The accounts to which the excise duty amounts are recorded, are retrieved from the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, and if empty, from the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. ## Reports of sales and returns with excise duties When it is time to report your sales and returns with excise duties to the tax authorities, you can use the [Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000/) and [Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-including-excise-duty-ef402000/) windows. In these windows, you select the period which you want to report to display a table with all sales and returns for that period. You can use these to manually report excise duties.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Enable and set up excise duty /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/enable-and-set-up-excise-duty section This topic describes how you: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable and set up excise duty This topic describes how you: + enable the **Excise duty** functionality, + set up different duty groups, types and rates and connect them to items, + set the conversion factor and accounts for the connected item, + exclude a location from excise duty calculations, + find the accumulated information when you need to report excise duties to the tax authorities. ## Before you start 1. Make sure **Excise duty** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. If not, follow these steps to enable the functionality: 1. click the **Change** button in the window toolbar, 1. select the **Excise duty** check box under **Advanced logistics**, 1. click the **Enable** button in the window toolbar. 1. Make sure you have the latest version of the [Veileder for bruk av koder ved fastsettelse av særavgifter](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/avgifter/saravgifter/rapportere/saravgiftsmelding/kodeveileder/) document. You need this document to set up the correct excise duties. ## Set up and use excise duties Follow the steps below to set up and use the **Excise duty** functionality. 1. Create the stock item for which you need to report excise duty in the usual way. > [!NOTE] > Currently, excise duties can only be connected to stock items. 1. In the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for the item or the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window for the item's posting class, on the **General ledger accounts** tab, in the **Excise duty** section, select the accounts to be used for the excise duty amount. > [!NOTE] > If these accounts are not set in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, they are retrieved from the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. If they are not set there either, you will not be able to release an invoice with this item. 1. In the main menu, click **More items**, and under **Finance**, click **Excise duty**. Complete the following actions for each window, and click ![Save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) after each action. **Result**: the duty type and group combination is added to the **Excise duty** tab for the item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window.
Window Action
Duty types (EF204000) Click plus and add the excise duty types relevant for your company.
Duty groups (EF205000) 
1. Click ![plus](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select a duty type,
    1. fill in the **Duty group** and **Duty group description** fields to create the duty group which is to be connected to the duty type,
    1. under **Calculation rule**, select **Standard** or **Turnover factor**.
Duty rates (EF207000) 
1. Click ![plus](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select a duty type and group,
    1. fill in the fields **Unit**, **Start date** and **Duty rate**.

> [!NOTE]
> You can not edit existing duty rate lines. When a duty rate is changed by the government, you need to add a new line with a new start date and the new duty rate.
Duty items (EF208000) 
1. Click ![plus](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and select a duty type and group,
    1. in the **Item ID** field, select the item you want to connect to this type and group.
1. Do one of the following: |IF the duty UoM and the item's base UoM are|THEN you| |---|---| |**identical**|go to step 5.| |**different**|go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the **Excise duty** tab, and set the conversion factor from the duty UoM to the item base UoM.| 1. Optional: to exclude a location that should not pay excise duty, go to the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window and select **Exclude from duty calculation** in the **General information** tab. > [!NOTE] > All excise duty amounts for excluded locations are **0**. You can keep track of these transactions in the [Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000/) window. 1. Create an order with a duty item in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The excise duty amount is displayed on the line and the excise duty total in the top part. > [!NOTE] > Excise duty is supported for all order types, except orders of the **TR** type. 1. Prepare the invoice directly or after creating and confirming the shipment. The excise duty amount is displayed on the line and the excise duty total in the top part of the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. 1. Release the invoice. **Result**: the system generates a general ledger batch which includes the excise duty amount recorded to the accounts set in Step 2. ## Report excise duties To report excise duties to the tax authorities, there are two inquiry windows under the **Excise duty** menu where you can find the totals you need. These inquiry windows retrieve information from released invoices. ### Report sales and returns with calculated excise duty amounts Follow the steps below to report sales and returns with calculated excise duty amounts: 1. Go to the [Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-including-excise-duty-ef402000/) window. 1. In the top part: 1. select the **Excise duty factor** you want to display in the table. 1. select the **Period** for which you want to report excise duties. 1. **Result**: the table displays all invoiced transactions with the selected excise duty factor for the selected period. Each excise duty group and type combination is displayed on one line and all invoiced items connected to this group/type combination are accumulated on the line with the accumulated excise duty amounts and quantities. 1. You can now use the information in the table to manually report excise duties to the tax authorities. ### Report sales and returns for locations excluded from excise duty Follow the steps below to report sales and returns for customer locations that were excluded from excise duty calculation. 1. Go to the [Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000/) window. 1. In the top part, select the **Period** for which you want to report excise duties. 1. **Result**: the table displays all invoiced transactions with the excise duty factor 0 for the selected period. Per transaction type **Sale** or **Return**, each excise duty group and type combination together with each unique customer location ID for the same postcode and city is displayed on one line, and the quantities of all invoiced items belonging to this unique combination are accumulated. 1. You can now use the information in the table to manually report excise duties to the tax authorities.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reverse an invoice with excise duty /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/reverse-an-invoice-with-excise-duty page This topic describes how you reverse an invoice with items connected to excise duties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse an invoice with excise duty This topic describes how you reverse an invoice with items connected to excise duties. Even if the excise duty total is 0, you can not use the **Reverse** and **Reverse and apply** actions in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Instead, you need to create a credit note and add the invoice to it; follow the steps below on how to do this. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. In the **Order type** field in the top part, select **CM**. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer for the invoice you want to reverse. 1. In the **Document details** tab, click **Add sales invoice**. 1. In the **Add invoice details** dialog box, the **Ref.no.** field, select the invoice number you want to reverse. **Result**: the invoice lines are displayed in the table. 1. Select the lines you want to reverse, and click **Add and close**. 1. Under **Actions**, click **Prepare invoice**. **Result**: the credit note opens in the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. 1. Under **Actions**, click **Release**. **Result**: in the [Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-including-excise-duty-ef402000/) or [Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000/) window, the credited invoice lines are added with **Excise duty factor** **-1** or **0** respectively. In the [Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000/) window, the line will have transaction type **Return**. ## What is next? After this procedure, both the invoice and the credit note have the status **Open**. To close both documents, you need to apply the credit note to the invoice. For instructions, see [Apply a credit note to open documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/apply-a-credit-note-to-open-documents/). Excise duty windows /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Excise duty windows Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Duty types (EF204000) /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/duty-types-ef204000 page In this window, you create the duty types relevant for your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Duty types (EF204000) In this window, you create the duty types relevant for your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Activate and set up excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/enable-and-set-up-excise-duty/) ## The table Fill in the values below as provided by [Skatteetaten](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/avgifter/saravgifter/). Once a duty type is used, it can not be deleted.
Column Description
Duty type The duty type ID.
Duty type description The duty type description.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Duty groups (EF205000) /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/duty-groups-ef205000 page In this window, you connect your created duty types to the duty groups relevant for your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Duty groups (EF205000) In this window, you connect your created duty types to the duty groups relevant for your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Activate and set up excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/enable-and-set-up-excise-duty/) ## The top part Fill in the values below as provided by [Skatteetaten](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/avgifter/saravgifter/) [Punktskatter](https://skatteverket.se/foretag/skatterochavdrag/punktskatter) [Punktafgifter](https://skat.dk/erhverv/afgifter-paa-varer-og-ydelser-punktafgifter) [Excise duties](https://www.vero.fi/en/businesses-and-corporations/taxes-and-charges/excise-taxation/#:~:text=Excise%20duties%20are%20levied%20on,%28products%20released%20for%20consumption) [Excise duty](https://business.gov.nl/regulation/excise-duty-consumption-tax/#art:excise-duty). Once a duty type and group combination is used, it can not be deleted. The code for duty group. The division into different duty groups within the individual tax type is primarily justified by the fact that, in many cases, it is necessary to divide the scope of goods with different rates within the same tax type.
Element Description
Duty type A two-letter code. The duty type is the ID for the duty type, usually the foundation (e.g. product type) of the duty.
Duty group The division into different duty groups within the individual duty type is a division of different rates within the same duty.
Duty group description A description of the Duty group.
Unit The unit of measure for the Duty group, e.g. litre, kg.
Calculation rule

Use these alternatives to select the rule to calculate the Excise duty for the Duty type.

Alternatives:

Turnover factor
multiplying the Excise duty by the total turnover after the discount (turnover * Excise Duty Rate).
Standard
multiplying the Excise duty with the quantity sold ( UoM * conversion Factor * excise duty rate)
Multiple factors
Factor 1 calculation: ( UoM * conversion factor * Excise Duty ) plus Factor 2 calculation: (UoM * conversion Factor * Volume% * Excise Duty ).

Currently, only alcohol uses the Multiple factors calculation rule.

Example Factor 1 can be Piece. Conversion factor can be 20 kg/piece.

Example Factor 2 can be Volum% (used for selling alcohol).
## Duty rate This tab contains information about the schedule of the excise duty, its rate, etc.
Column name Description
Start date The date when the duty will start to take effect.
Duty rate The fee rate.
Customer class Customer class for the duty rate (optional).
Deduction % The deduction in per cent.
Max. amount The maximum amount that the tax can calculate.
Tax free This check mark indicates when used that the types of goods are not taxed.
## Additional code Additional codes are used when the taxpayer must self-assess and report, for example, withdrawals for various forms of tax-free use. For additional information from Skatteetaten regarding Excise duties, see [Skatteetaten](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/avgifter/saravgifter/rapportere/saravgiftsmelding/kodeveileder/).
Column name Description
Fee additional code An additional code for the fee.
Additional code description A description of the Fee additional code.
Type
Article
The item that is the basis for the use of additional code.
Location
The customer’s location is the basis for the additional code.
Return order
An additional code used when returning goods or credit notes.
Factor

Factor alternatives:

Note

If you receive returns from a combination of customers, some subject to excise duty and some not subject to excise duty, you must enter return Type 0 and Type -1.

  • -1, (deduction of previously paid excise duty)
  • 0:
  • 1:
Duty items (EF208000) /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/duty-items-ef208000 page In this window, you connect a duty type and group combination to an item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Duty items (EF208000) In this window, you connect a duty type and group combination to an item. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can connect the same item to different type and group combinations, and the same type and group combination to different items. All duty type and group combinations that an item is connected to, are displayed on the **Excise duty** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Activate and set up excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/enable-and-set-up-excise-duty/) ## The table Fill in the values below as provided by [Skatteetaten](https://www.skatteetaten.no/bedrift-og-organisasjon/avgifter/saravgifter/). > [!NOTE] > Currently, only stock items are supported.
Column Description
Duty type The duty type ID.
Duty type description The duty type description.
Duty group The duty group ID.
Duty group description The duty group description.
Item ID The ID of the item.
Description The description of the item.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000) /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-excluding-excise-duty-ef402000 page You can use this window to view the information needed when you report excise duty to the tax authorities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales/returns excluding excise duty (EF402000) You can use this window to view the information needed when you report excise duty to the tax authorities. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The transactions listed here are from invoiced customer locations that were excluded from excise duty calculation. ## The top part In this area, you select the period for which you want to display the table.
Element Description
Excise duty factor The excise duty factor, which is 0 for sales and returns excluded from excise duty.
Period The month you want to display the sales and returns for.
## The table Per transaction type **Sale** or **Return**, each excise duty group and type combination together with each unique customer location ID for the same postcode and city is displayed on one line, and the quantities of all invoiced items belonging to this unique combination are accumulated. Note that, when an item is connected to several duties, its quantity is reported each time for each duty.
Column Description
Excise duty type The excise duty type ID.
Excise duty type description The excise duty type description.
Excise duty group The excise duty group ID.
Excise duty group description The excise duty group description.
Sum excise duty quantities The sum of all the item’s quantities that have this type/group combination, expressed in the duty UoM.
Excise duty UoM The duty rate unit of measure used when calculating the duty.
Invoice customer location The customer’s invoiced location ID.
Invoice customer location postcode The postcode for the invoiced customer location.
Invoice customer location city The city for the invoiced customer location.
Excise duty factor The excise duty factor, which is 0 for sales and returns excluded from excise duty.
Sale/return

The transaction type of the quantities on the line, which can be one of the following:

Sale
,
Return
.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000) /visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/sales-returns-including-excise-duty-ef402000 page You can use this window to view the information needed when you report excise duty to the tax authorities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales/returns including excise duty (EF402000) You can use this window to view the information needed when you report excise duty to the tax authorities. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The transactions listed here are based on released invoices. ## The top part In this area, you select the duty factor and period for which you want to display the table.
Element Description
Excise duty factor

The excise duty factor, which can be one of the following options:

All
,
-1
used for returns,
1
used for sales.
Period The month you want to display the sales and returns for.
## The table Each excise duty group and type combination is displayed on one line and all invoiced items connected to this group and type combination are accumulated on the line with the accumulated excise duty amounts and quantities. Note that, when an item is connected to several duties, its quantity is reported each time for each duty.
Column Description
Excise duty type The excise duty type ID.
Excise duty type description The excise duty type description.
Excise duty group The excise duty group ID.
Excise duty group description The excise duty group description.
Sum excise duty quantities The sum of all the item’s quantities that have this type/group combination, expressed in the duty UoM.
Excise duty UoM The duty rate unit of measure used when calculating the duty.
Sum excise duty amounts The sum of all the excise duty amounts for this type/group combination.
Excise duty factor

The factor indicates whether the excise duty amount is to be paid or to be reimbursed. It can be one of the following options:

-1
used for returns,
1
used for sales.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Email /visma-net-erp/help/email section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email Email - overview /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-overview page You can manage system email accounts and perform such operations as sending emails from system email accounts and receiving emails to system email accounts; you can also schedule these operations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email - overview You can manage system email accounts and perform such operations as sending emails from system email accounts and receiving emails to system email accounts; you can also schedule these operations. You can manage system email accounts and perform such operations as sending emails from system email accounts and receiving emails to system email accounts; you can also schedule these operations. ## Processing incoming emails In Visma Net, you can activate automatic processing of incoming emails for each system email account. This automatic processing includes forwarding incoming emails to employees based on email history tracked by the system. For details, see: [About processing incoming mail](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-processing-incoming-mail/). ## Using personal email addresses for customer management For prompt communication with contacts, employees can use their personal email accounts registered with the system. The system analyse email history and automatically forwards incoming emails to the email addresses of all employees that were involved in case processing. ## Using email templates In Visma Net, you can create and maintain a virtually unlimited number of email and notification templates. Email and notification templates are usually created for specific types of recipients (contacts, mailing list members, or campaign members) on particular subjects, such as sales or purchase orders and cash transactions. These templates can contain place-holders, which the system replaces with actual information when it generates emails for each recipient of the type. Files attached to the templates are sent as email attachments. For further details, see: [About notification templates](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/about-notification-templates/). ## Sending documents electronically Many outgoing emails are electronic versions of documents sent to customers and suppliers. With Visma Net, you can define the mailing settings for customers and suppliers, which will be used to send documents to them by email. (You can continue to print documents for sending them via postal services to customers and suppliers who do not want to receive documents electronically.) Also, you can configure these emails to be sent to employees who work with specific suppliers or customers. For more information, see [About predefined mailings for customers and suppliers](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap303000-predefined-mailings-con/). ## Using other functionalities and options You can also do the following: + Temporarily suspend all **send** and **receive** operations at any time + Archive old emails Configure email accounts /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts section In Visma Net, you can create and configure system email accounts that can be used to centrally send mass emails, and you can schedule the sending and receiving of the emails. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure email accounts In Visma Net, you can create and configure system email accounts that can be used to centrally send mass emails, and you can schedule the sending and receiving of the emails. In Visma Net, you can create and configure system email accounts that can be used to centrally send mass emails, and you can schedule the sending and receiving of the emails. For more information, see: [About system email accounts.](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-system-email-accounts/) You can also use automatic processing of incoming mail, which includes generating activities based on replies to campaign-related emails, and routing case-related emails to employees involved in case processing. For details, see: [About processing incoming mail.](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-processing-incoming-mail/) About configuring email accounts /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-configuring-email-accounts page In Visma Net, you can create and configure system email accounts that can be used to centrally send mass emails, and you can schedule the sending and receiving of the emails. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About configuring email accounts In Visma Net, you can create and configure system email accounts that can be used to centrally send mass emails, and you can schedule the sending and receiving of the emails. In Visma Net, you can create and configure system email accounts that can be used to centrally send mass emails, and you can schedule the sending and receiving of the emails. For more information, see:: [About system email accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-system-email-accounts/). You can also use automatic processing of incoming mail, which includes generating activities based on replies to campaign-related emails, and routing case-related emails to employees involved in case processing. For details, see: [About processing incoming mail](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-processing-incoming-mail/).

Related pages

Concepts

 About system email accounts /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-system-email-accounts page In Visma Net, you can configure and manage system email accounts by using the System email accounts (SM204002) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About system email accounts In Visma Net, you can configure and manage system email accounts by using the System email accounts (SM204002) window. For more information: [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/). In Visma Net, you can configure and manage system email accounts by using the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window. You can create as many accounts as you may need, each serving a different purpose, for instance, one account for communications with your customer support department, and another account for sending newsletters. For each system email account, you specify the outgoing mail server, the incoming mail server (optional), and the protocol to be used. Also, you must specify ports, login information for servers of both types, and the type of encrypted connection (if required by the server). For any system account, you can enable processing of incoming mail and select processing options that define how emails received to the account should be processed, such as whether to create a case for each email message or a new lead record (for details, see: [About processing incoming mail](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-processing-incoming-mail/)). Also, you can specify the types of attachments that are permitted, if attachments are permitted at all. You can allow the deletion of processed emails or forbid it (if your organisation requires emails to be kept for a particular period of time, for instance). If needed, you can set up automatic confirmation of received emails or automatic replies to unassigned emails. To make it faster for users to select a system email account for sending emails in the related windows, you can select one of the system accounts as the default system email account by using the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. If a user has access to system email accounts, the user can select one of these accounts as this user's personal default email account by using the **Email settings** tab of the [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/) window. [Create a system email account](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/create-a-system-email-account/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Define email preferences /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/define-email-preferences section You can use this window to view the existing system email accounts, and to select a default system email account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define email preferences You can use this window to view the existing system email accounts, and to select a default system email account. You can also define how many times the system attempts to resend the emails before their status is changed to **Failed**. 1. Go to the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. 1. In the **Default email account** field you select the account you want to use as the default system account for sending and receiving emails. You can also setup the default system account in the [Email](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup/email/) window. 1. In the **Archive emails** field, you define which sent emails you want to archive. The options are **None** and **older than 0, 3, 6, 9** and **12 months**. **None** disables the automatic archiving of e-mails depending on their age. 1. In the **Automatic resend attempts** field, you define the number of times the scheduled processing for an email can fail before its status changes from **Pending processing** to **Failed**. However, if a critical error occurs on the mail server, or if you run the processing manually, the system will ignore this setting. The number of automatic resend attempts is set to 0 by default. 1. In the **Email template password changed** field, you select the notification email template you want to use in order to send the email that provides a user with a new password after a change has been requested. In the table in the lower part of the window, you can view the existing system email accounts, and their basic details. To create new accounts, use the [System email accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/system-email-accounts/) window that is displayed when you click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar. Create a system email account /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/create-a-system-email-account section By using the System email accounts (SM204002) window, you can create an email account to send and receive emails through Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a system email account By using the System email accounts (SM204002) window, you can create an email account to send and receive emails through Visma Net. For more information: [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/). By using the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window, you can create an email account to send and receive emails through Visma Net. You can create as many system email accounts as you need and can even use an individual account for each specific purpose, but only one account can be set up as the default system email account to be used for sending automatic emails. 1. Go to the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part of the window, do the following: 1. In the **Email account ID** field, type the name of the system email account. 1. In the **Email address** field, type the email address of the account that will be used as a system email account. 1. Optional: In the **Reply address** field, type the email address that will be used for automatic replies. 1. On the **Servers** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Incoming email protocol** field (in the **Server information** section), select the protocol to be used to connect to the incoming server. If you have selected the **IMAP** protocol, in the **Root folder (on server)** field, you need to type the path to the folder that will be used as the root folder for storing emails. 1. In the **Incoming email server** field, type the name of the server that will be used to receive emails. 1. In the **Outgoing email server** field, type the name of the server that will be used to send emails. 1. In the **Username** field (in the **Login information** section), type the name of the email account that will be used as a system email account. 1. In the **Password** field, type the password to the specified email account. 1. On the **Advanced settings** tab, do the following: 1. If the outgoing server requires additional authentication, in the **Security** section, select the **My outgoing server requires authentication** check box. 1. If the system needs to use certain credentials to access the outgoing server, specify the following information: + **Log in using**: Selected + **Username**: The name of the account through which the system will access the outgoing server + **Password**: The password to the account If you leave the **Log on using** check box cleared, the credentials that you have specified for the incoming mail server will be used for authentication on the outgoing server. 1. If the server should validate the **From** values of outgoing emails, select the **My outgoing server validates the 'From' field** check box. 1. In the **Incoming server port (POP3/IMAP)** field in the **Server port numbers** section, type the number of the port to be used for incoming mail. 1. If SSL connection to the incoming server is required, select the **Incoming server requires encrypted connection (SSL)** check box. 1. In the **Outgoing server port (SMTP)** field, type the number of the port to be used for outgoing mail. 1. In the **Outgoing server encrypted connection**, select the protocol to be used by the outgoing mail server. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), and then click **Test** to test the email account settings. If the testing fails, you may have to check the security settings of the account that you want to use as the system email account. If the system email account has been configured correctly, the testing process completes successfully, which is indicated by a green check mark that appears next to the **Actions** menu. ## Set up the default system email account 1. Go to the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. 1. In the **Default email account** field, select the system email account that you want to be used for sending automatic emails. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Now all emails sent on behalf of Visma Net will be sent from this address.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 System email accounts /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/system-email-accounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # System email accounts 1. Go to [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) 1. In the **Email account ID** field, enter the ID of the new system email account. 1. In the **Email address** field, enter the email address of the account. 1. On the **Servers** tab, enter the **Outgoing mail server**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Set up the reply email address /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/set-up-the-reply-email-address page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up the reply email address 1. Go to the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window. 1. In the **Reply address** field, enter your email address. 1. Click **Save**. Change system email address /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/change-system-email-address section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change system email address 1. Go to [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) 1. Select the **email account ID** whose email address you want to change. 1. In the **Email address** field, write the new email address from which system emails will be sent. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

 Define email preferences (SM204001) /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/define-email-preferences-sm204001 section You can use this window to view the existing system email accounts, and to select a default system email account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define email preferences (SM204001) You can use this window to view the existing system email accounts, and to select a default system email account. You can also define how many times the system attempts to resend the emails before their status is changed to **Failed**. 1. In the **Default email account** field you select the account you want to use as the default system account for sending and receiving emails. You can also setup the default system account in the [Email](/visma-net-erp/getting-started/assisted-setup/email/) window. 1. In the **Archive emails** field, you define which sent emails you want to archive. The options are **None** and **older than 0, 3, 6, 9** and **12 months**. **None** disables the automatic archiving of emails depending on their age. You can also archive selected emails in the [Archive sent emails](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/archive-sent-emails/) window. 1. In the **Automatic resend attempts** field, you define the number of times the scheduled processing for an email can fail before its status changes from **Pending processing** to **Failed**. However, if a critical error occurs on the mail server, or if you run the processing manually, the system will ignore this setting. The number of automatic resend attempts is set to 0 by default. 1. In the **Email template password changed** field, you select the notification email template you want to use in order to send the email that provides a user with a new password after a change has been requested. In the table in the lower part of the window, you can view the existing system email accounts, and their basic details. To create new accounts, use the [System email accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/system-email-accounts/) window that is displayed when you click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar. About processing incoming mail /visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-processing-incoming-mail page In Visma Net, you can activate automatic processing of incoming emails individually for each system email account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing incoming mail In Visma Net, you can activate automatic processing of incoming emails individually for each system email account. In Visma Net, you can activate automatic processing of incoming emails individually for each system email account. Only the emails received by the system accounts can be processed. The basic functionality, which requires no additional configuration, includes forwarding incoming emails to employees based on the email history tracked by the system. Depending on your business, the mail you receive through Visma Net may consist of requests for information, emails related to customer contracts, or emails received from contacts as replies to emails sent during specific marketing campaigns. You can configure incoming mail processing so that based on an incoming email, the system creates a case, a lead, or an activity associated with an existing lead or contact, and attaches the email to the created entity as a related activity. You can configure the processing of incoming mail differently on each of the system email accounts. You can also specify an email assignment map, which the system will use when it cannot assign incoming emails based on email history. ## Activation of incoming mail processing For each system account, you can choose whether to activate the processing of incoming emails. You can activate it by selecting the required account in the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window, and then selecting the **Activate incoming mail processing** check box on the **Incoming mail processing** tab. Before you activate this processing, make sure that email addresses are specified for all employees in either the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window or the [Users (SM201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/users-sm201010/) window. ## Stages of automatic processing The system processes incoming emails by using a built-in scenario that can be divided into two major parts: the basic part, which is executed whenever processing is enabled for the account; and the optional part, which you can tailor to fit your needs. The basic part includes forwarding incoming emails to employees based on the email history tracked by the system. The optional part includes the following stages, which you can configure by using the **Incoming mail processing** tab of the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window: + **Initial processing**: You can configure the system to confirm the receipt of incoming emails by sending replies based on specific templates. + **Main processing**: You can select options corresponding to any of the following actions: + Create a new case for each processed email and attach the email to the case as a related activity. + Attach each processed email to the business account or contact related to the email exchange. + Reply to unassigned emails by using a specific template. + **Final processing**: You can decide whether the system should remove processed messages and whether it should add available source information to the bottom of each processed email. Generally, the subjects for outgoing mass emails are system-generated and contain values from particular contact records, cases, and activities that will help later with processing replies to the emails if addressees do not change the email subjects.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Manage emails /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails section Visma Net provides email management functionality where users can use their favourite email programs for communication with customer contacts, and use their personal email accounts if these email addresses are registered with the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage emails Visma Net provides email management functionality where users can use their favourite email programs for communication with customer contacts, and use their personal email accounts if these email addresses are registered with the system. You should specify the user's personal email account in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window, the [Users (SM201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/users-sm201010/) window, or both windows. If incoming mail processing is activated for a system email account, before the system forwards incoming emails to a specific employee, it checks whether the employee has an email address specified in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window; if there is no such address, the system uses the email address specified in the [Users (SM201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/users-sm201010/) window. In the [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/) window, you can create a signature, which will be inserted at the end of each email this user sends. The **Email settings** tab provides a text box and a toolbar with tools to format the text of the signature. In the windows used for creating emails, personal email addresses are available for selection to only their owners. Users can use templates for their emails or set up automatic notifications based on specific templates. For details, see: [About notification templates.](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/about-notification-templates/) For each system email account, you can manually initiate the processes of sending and receiving mail, or you can set up an automatic schedule for these processes. Also, you can suspend sending and receiving emails for all system email accounts at once. For more info, see: [About mail sending and receipt.](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/about-mail-sending-and-receipt/) To prevent the system from slowing down due to a large number of emails, both incoming and outgoing, accumulated over a long time, you can archive processed emails. For details, see: [About email archiving.](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/about-email-archiving/) About email archiving /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/about-email-archiving page Over time, system email accounts may accumulate an extremely large number of emails, both incoming and outgoing, which may result in considerable system slowdown, especially if incoming mail processing has been enabled for these accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About email archiving Over time, system email accounts may accumulate an extremely large number of emails, both incoming and outgoing, which may result in considerable system slowdown, especially if incoming mail processing has been enabled for these accounts. In Visma Net, you can archive emails that are too old to be relevant. In the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window, you can enable email archiving by specifying the minimum age of emails to be archived. The actual archiving is performed when you apply this setting to a particular system email account by executing the **Send all**, **Receive all**, or **Send/receive all** action, which you can do on any of the following windows: + [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/): In this window, you can process only one email account at a time. + [Send and receive email (SM507010)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/send-and-receive-email-sm507010/): In this window, you can process multiple email accounts at once. + [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/): You can use this window to create an automation schedule for the Send and receive email window so that you can regularly process the selected email accounts. For details, see: [Create a send and receive email schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/create-a-send-and-receive-email-schedule/). Only emails that have the **Processed** status can be archived. After the archiving process is completed, the archived emails disappear from the lists in the Incoming (CO409000) and [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/) windows. Thus, archived emails do not get in your way when you are browsing through incoming or outgoing emails, although you still can search for an archived item, or even perform regular actions, such as **Reply** or **Forward**, on it. Regardless of the settings specified in the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window, you can use the **Archive** action in the window toolbar of the Incoming (A) and Sent emails windows to archive selected emails at any time. Also, you can archive any email that has the **Processed** status by opening it in the [Send (CR306015)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/send-cr306015/) window and using the **Archive** action in the window toolbar. After it has been archived, an email associated with a particular entity remains listed on the**Activities**tab of the respective data entry window. Also, if time tracking has been enabled for this email, the invoiceable time spent on this email (if any) will be invoiced to the customer even if the email has been archived. An archived email can be restored from the archive. When it has been restored, the email is again listed in the Incoming (CO409000) and Sent emails window, depending on whether it is an incoming or outgoing email; the status of the email changes back to **Processed**. You can restore an individual email by opening it in the [Send (CR306015)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/send-cr306015/) window and clicking **Actions** title="and then" class="gui"> - **Restore from archive** in the window toolbar. About mail sending and receipt /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/about-mail-sending-and-receipt page To initiate the sending of outgoing emails, use the Send and receive email (SM507010) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About mail sending and receipt To initiate the sending of outgoing emails, use the Send and receive email (SM507010) window. For more information: [Send and receive email (SM507010)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/send-and-receive-email-sm507010/). To initiate the sending of outgoing emails, use the [Send and receive email (SM507010)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/send-and-receive-email-sm507010/) window. To send the emails selectively, use the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. Once the system accounts are configured, you can use the [Send and receive email (SM507010)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/send-and-receive-email-sm507010/) window to initiate the receipt of incoming emails and schedule the operations of sending and receiving mail. To process selected incoming and outgoing emails, use the [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/) window. To allow the system to automatically resend outgoing emails whose processing has failed, you can use the **Automatic resend attempts** setting in the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. This setting defines the number of times that the scheduled processing is allowed to fail for an email before the email's status changes from **Pending processing** to **Failed**. However, the system ignores this setting if a critical error (that is, an error whose code starts with 5, such as 550) occurs on the mail server or if you run the processing manually. You can suspend the operations of sending and receiving emails for all system email accounts at once by selecting the **Suspend email processing** check box in the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. You may need to do this if you have troubles with your mail servers and need to suspend all operations on these servers to diagnose the problem. [Create a send and receive email schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/create-a-send-and-receive-email-schedule/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Archive sent emails /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/archive-sent-emails page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Archive sent emails 1. Go to window [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/). 1. In the overview, select the check box in front of the emails you want to archive. 1. In the **Actions** drop-down list, select **Archive**. The system archives all the selected emails.

Related pages

Tasks

 Create a send and receive email schedule /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/create-a-send-and-receive-email-schedule section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a send and receive email schedule 1. Go to the [Send and receive email (SM507010)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/send-and-receive-email-sm507010/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Send/receive all**. 1. On the window toolbar, click **Schedules** ![icon-scheduler](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-scheduler.png) > **Add**. This opens the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window as a pop-up. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of the schedule, such as Send and receive email schedule. 1. On the **Details** tab, select the following settings: + **No execution limit**: Selected + **No expiration date**: Selected 1. On the **Schedule** tab, specify the following settings (assuming, as an example, that a daily schedule is best for optimal response time): 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily** for the schedule to be executed every day. 1. In **Schedule details** section, in the **Next execution date** field, select the current date. 1. In the **Every** field, type 1 **Day(s)**. 1. In the **Execution time** section, in the **Every** field, type the interval between successive sessions of schedule execution in hours and minutes, for example, type 00:05 to execute the schedule every five minutes. 1. On the **Filter values** tab, add a row in the table with the following settings: 1. **Active**: Selected 1. **Field name**: **Action** 1. **Relative**: Cleared 1. **Value**: **Send/receive all** 1. **Ignore error**: Cleared 1. Click **Save and close** on the window toolbar to apply the settings.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Filter sent emails /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/filter-sent-emails section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Filter sent emails 1. Go to window [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/). 1. Click the ![icon-filter](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-filter.png) icon. 1. In the **Filter settings** dialog box, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a line. 1. Under **Property**, click the field to activate the drop-down list. 1. Select your search criterion from the drop-down options. 1. Repeat these steps for the **Condition** field. 1. In the **Value** field, enter text that will narrow down your search. 1. Click **OK**. 1. To remove the filter, click ![icon-remove](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-remove.png) in the **Filter applied** field. If this is a filter you will be using several times, click **Save** and enter the name of the filter in the dialog box. You can enter an additional line in your filter by clicking ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png), and select again for **Property** and **Condition**.

Related pages

Tasks

 Forward or reply to sent emails /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/forward-or-reply-to-sent-emails page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Forward or reply to sent emails 1. Go to window [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/). 1. In the overview, select the check box in front of the email you want to reply or forward. 1. In the **Actions** drop-down list, select **Reply**, **Reply all**, or **Forward**. 1. In the **Email activity** dialog box, add and/or change the details and enter the email address to which you want forward the message. 1. Click **Send**.

Related pages

Tasks

 Search for sent emails /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/search-for-sent-emails page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Search for sent emails 1. Go to window [Sent emails (CO409080)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080/). 1. In the **Search** field, enter the information you want to find. For example: text in the **Subject** field of the email, or a part of the email address. 1. Click the **Search** button. The emails matching your search criteria are displayed in the window. Add an attachment to a pending email /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/add-an-attachment-to-a-pending-email section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add an attachment to a pending email 1. Go to [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/). 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an account. The email account that has been created by the system is by default shown here. 1. In the **Assigned to** field, you either select the **Me** check box, or click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select someone else that is assigned to the email. 1. In the **Subject** column, click the link to the email to which you want to attach a file. 1. In the **Email activity** window, click **Files**. 1. Click **Browse...** 1. In the **Choose File to Upload** dialog box, select a file and click **Open**. 1. In the **Files** window, click **Upload**. 1. Click ![icon-remove](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-remove.png). 1. In the **Email activity** window, click **Actions** and select **Process** to send. Add a recipient address to a pending email /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/add-a-recipient-address-to-a-pending-email section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a recipient address to a pending email 1. Go to window [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/). 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an account. The email account that has been created by the system is by default shown here. 1. In the **Assigned to** field, you either select the **Me** check box, or click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select someone else that is assigned to the email. 1. In the **Subject** column, click the link to the corresponding email you want to edit. 1. In the **Email activity** window, click **Actions** and select **Cancel sending**. 1. In the **Cc** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a new email address, or manually enter one. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) or **Save and close**, or click **Send** to email it. Change the recipient address for a pending email /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-the-recipient-address-for-a-pending-email section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the recipient address for a pending email 1. Go to window [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/). 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an account. The email account that has been created by the system is by default shown here. 1. In the **Assigned to** field, you either select the **Me** check box, or click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select someone else that is assigned to the email. 1. In the **Subject** column, click the link to the corresponding email for which you want to change the recipient email address. 1. In the **Email activity** window, click **Actions** and select **Cancel sending**. 1. In the **To** field, click ![icon-remove](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-remove.png) to remove the existing email address. 1. In the **To** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to find a new email address, or manually enter one. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) or **Save and close**, or click **Send** to send the email. Change a scheduled dispatch of pending emails /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-a-scheduled-dispatch-of-pending-emails section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change a scheduled dispatch of pending emails 1. Go to window [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/). 1. Click ![icon-scheduler](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-scheduler.png) and select **Add**. 1. In the **Automation schedules** window that opens, check that **Pending emails** is selected in the **Window ID** field. 1. Make your changes in the upper part of the window, and also underneath the **Dates** and **Hours** tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Delete a pending email /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/delete-a-pending-email section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete a pending email 1. Go to window [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/). 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an account. The email account that has been created by the system is by default shown here. 1. In the **Assigned to** field, you either select the **Me** check box, or click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select someone else that is assigned to the email. 1. In the **Subject** column, click the link to the corresponding email you want to delete. 1. In the **Email activity** window, click **Actions** and select **Cancel sending**. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). 1. Confirm that the current record will be deleted. 1. Press **F5** to refresh the window. You will now see that the e-mail has been deleted. Send pending emails /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/send-pending-emails section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send pending emails 1. Go to window [Pending emails (SM507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000/). 1. In the **Account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an account. The email account that has been created by the system is by default shown here. 1. In the **Assigned to** field, you either select the **Me** check box, or click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select someone else that is assigned to the email. 1. Click the check box on the row for the email you want to send. 1. Click **Process**. 1. To send **all** emails in this view, click **Process all**. 1. Press **F5** to refresh the window. You will now see that the email or emails you sent are no longer visible in this window. About notification templates /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/about-notification-templates page You can configure Visma Net to automatically send template-based emails to users on different occasions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About notification templates You can configure Visma Net to automatically send template-based emails to users on different occasions. You can configure Visma Net to automatically send template-based emails to users on different occasions. For example: A new user may receive an email with the user credentials to be used to access the system, or a user can receive a notification that a document has been approved and needs further processing. Also, you can use template-based emails in mass mailings. For an example of a notification template for notifications on changes in case contents made through Self-service portal, see: [Add a notification template for changes in case contents](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/add-a-notification-template-for-changes-in-case-contents/). In addition to the standard set of templates that comes with Visma Net, you can create new templates for notifications or emails by using the [Notification templates](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window. In the [Email preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window, you can set the default templates for welcoming new users and for helping users with login and password recovery. Any template that you want to use as a user welcome template must have four place-holders set up in the following order: **((Company))**, **((Name))**, **((Username))**, and **((Password))**. To see an example, view the **User welcome notification** template, which is the default template to welcome new users to Visma Net, in the [Notification templates](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window. [Add a notification template for changes in case contents](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/add-a-notification-template-for-changes-in-case-contents/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Add a notification template for changes in case contents /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/add-a-notification-template-for-changes-in-case-contents section To add a notification template to informing case owners about customers adding comments or attaching files to cases, you use the Notification templates (SM204003) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a notification template for changes in case contents To add a notification template to informing case owners about customers adding comments or attaching files to cases, you use the Notification templates (SM204003) window. For more information: [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/). After you added the notification template, you register the template on **Self-service portal** to automatically send emails to case owners. This topic describes how you can add simple notification template for informing a case owner of additions to their cases. ## Add a notification template for activities in cases 1. Go to the [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Notification ID** field, enter the name of the notification. 1. In the **From** field, select the system email account to be used to send emails. 1. In the **To** field, select the case owner. Type ( (Case.OwnerID.Email) ) or select the necessary option in the list. 1. In the **Subject** field, type the subject of the email, and add the case ID. Type ( (Case.CaseCD) ) or select the necessary option in the list. 1. In the text area, enter the email text and add the contents of the change. Do the following: + Enter the text of the email. + Add the subject of the customer comment. Type ( (ActivitiesSelect.Subject) ). + Add the contents of the case change to the email body. Type ( (Activities.Body) ). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Change notification template body text /visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/change-notification-template-body-text section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change notification template body text 1. Go to window [Notification templates (SM204003)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003/). 1. In the **Notification** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), and select the notification whose body text you want to change. 1. In the lower part of the window, edit the existing text. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Email windows /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows section In the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email windows In the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. All emails (CO409070) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/all-emails-co409070 page You can use this window to view any email that has passed through the system email accounts, regardless of its owner or status (except emails that have been permanently deleted). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # All emails (CO409070) You can use this window to view any email that has passed through the system email accounts, regardless of its owner or status (except emails that have been permanently deleted). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view any email that has passed through the system email accounts, regardless of its owner or status (except emails that have been permanently deleted). You also can edit or delete emails by using this window. ## The table The table shown on each filter tab contains the list of emails that match the criteria of the selected filter tab.
Column Description
Subject The subject of the email. Click the subject to view the details of the email.
From The sender of the email.
Date The date of the email.
Mail status The status of the email that indicates whether the email has been processed.
To The system email account that received the email.
Related entity description The description of the entity with which this email is associated. Click this link to view the details of this entity.
Work group The work group to which the email has been assigned.
Owner The employee to whom the email has been assigned.
Each of the default filter tabs (listed below) has a table whose records may be filtered by certain criteria.
Filter Description
All records Displays the complete list of emails.
Outgoing emails Displays only the outgoing emails.
Incoming emails Displays only the incoming emails.
Failed emails

Displays only the emails that have the Failed status.

For details on mail processing, see: About mail sending and receipt.
Archived emails

Displays only the archived emails.

For details on email archiving, see: About email archiving.
Email preferences (SM204001) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001 section You can use this window to view the system email accounts available in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Email preferences (SM204001) You can use this window to view the system email accounts available in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view the system email accounts available in the system. In the window, you can also select the default system email account and the account that will be used for specific system support needs. ## The top part You use this area to specify the system email account to be used by default for sending automatic emails. Also, you can temporarily suspend the processing of outgoing and incoming emails.
Element Description
Default email account The account to be used as the default system account for sending and receiving emails.
Email tag prefix The opening of the tag the system adds to an email header to help with tracking the email.
Email tag suffix The closing of the tag the system adds to an email header to help with tracking the email.
Archive emails

The option that defines which emails are to be archived. This option applies to particular system email accounts when the user manually initiates email processing by using the System email accounts (SM204002) or Send and receive email (SM507010) window, and for scheduled email processing.

The following options are available:

None
Archiving of emails depending on their age is disabled. However, you can archive selected emails in the Incoming (CO409000) and Sent emails (CO409080) windows.
Older than 3 months
Emails older than 3 months may be archived.
Older than 6 months
Emails older than 6 months may be archived.
Older than 9 months
Emails older than 9 months may be archived.
Older than 12 months
Emails older than 12 months may be archived.

For more information, see: About email archiving.
Automatic resend attempts The number of times that the scheduled processing is allowed to fail for an email before the email’s status changes from Pending processing to Failed. However, the system ignores this setting if a critical error occurs on the mail server or if you run the processing manually. By default, the number of automatic resend attempts is set to 0.
Suspend email processing A check box that you select to suspend the processing of outgoing and incoming emails on all system accounts. You clear the check box to resume email processing.
New user welcome email template

The notification (email) template to be used to send a welcome email to a new user.

Any template that you want to use as a user welcome template must have four place-holders set up in the following order: ((Company)), ((Name)), ((Username)), and ((Password)). To see an example, in the Notification templates (SM204003) window, you can view the User welcome notification template, which is the default template to welcome new users to Visma Net.
Password changed email template The notification (email) template to be used to send an email that will provide a user with the new password after it has been changed.
Login recovery email template The notification (email) template to be used to send an email that will give a user a way to log in if the user forgot the login.
Password recovery email template The notification (email) template to be used to send an email that will provide a way for a user to change the password if the user has forgotten the current password.
URL to be used in notifications The URL of the Visma Net site that sends notifications.
## The table In this table, you can view the existing system email accounts and basic information about them. To create new accounts, use the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window, which the system brings up in a new window if you click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar.
Column Description
Email account ID The name of the system email account.
Email address The email address of the system account.
User name The username you use for this system email account.
Outgoing mail server The server to be used for outgoing mail from this account.
Incoming mail server The server to be used for incoming mail to this account.
My sent emails (CO409080) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/my-sent-emails-co409080 page You can use this window to view any email that has been sent through the system email accounts, regardless of its owner. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # My sent emails (CO409080) You can use this window to view any email that has been sent through the system email accounts, regardless of its owner. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can reply to the emails, forward or archive them. You also can edit or delete emails by using this window. ## What to do from this window + [Set up automatic processing of AutoPay messages from the AutoPay inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/set-up-automatic-processing-of-autopay-messages-from-the-autopay-inbox/) + [Forward or reply to sent emails](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/forward-or-reply-to-sent-emails/) + [Search for sent emails](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/search-for-sent-emails/) + [Archive sent emails](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/archive-sent-emails/) + [Filter sent emails](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/filter-sent-emails/) ## Table filter tabs
Filter Description
All records Displays the complete list of emails, regardless of their owner.
My emails Displays only the emails that belong to you.
## The window toolbar
Element Description
Actions

Short description of what you do in this field. If the field is a drop-down list with several options, describe each option in a bullet list:

Reply
Opens the Send (CR306015) window for reply to sender.
Reply all
Opens the Send (CR306015) window for reply to sender and recipients.
Forward
Opens the Send (CR306015) window for forwarding to any chosen recipient(s).
Archive
Moves marked email(s) to archive folder.
## The All records tab The table shown on each filter tab contains the list of emails that match the criteria of the selected filter tab.
Element Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you select to include this email among those to be deleted or archived when you click the Delete button or Actions - Archive in the window toolbar, respectively.
Subject The subject of the email. Click the subject to view the details of the email.
To The system email account that received the email.
Cc An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy (Cc) of the email.
Bcc The email address of a person to receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email; an address entered in this field will be hidden from other recipients.
Date The date of the email.
Email status The status of the email that indicates whether the email has been processed.
From The sender of the email.
Related entity description The description of the entity with which this email is associated. Click this link to view the details of this entity.
Work group The work group to which the email has been assigned.
Owner The employee to whom the email has been assigned.
Created by The person who has created the email.
## The My emails tab The table shown on each filter tab contains the list of emails that match the criteria of the selected filter tab.
Element Description
Subject The subject of the email. Click the subject to view the details of the email.
To The system email account that received the email.
Cc An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy (Cc) of the email.
Bcc The email address of a person to receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email; an address entered in this field will be hidden from other recipients.
Date The date of the email.
Email status The status of the email that indicates whether the email has been processed.
From The sender of the email.
Related entity description The description of the entity with which this email is associated. Click this link to view the details of this entity.
Work group The work group to which the email has been assigned.
Owner The employee to whom the email has been assigned.
Created by
Incoming (CO409000) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/incoming-co409000 page You can use this window to view incoming emails in accordance with the applied filter. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Incoming (CO409000) You can use this window to view incoming emails in accordance with the applied filter. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, unread messages are displayed in bold font, and read messages are shown in regular font. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands (which affect the email or emails you have selected before invoking the command), which you can click to invoke actions:

Reply
Initiates the sending of a reply to the sender of the email.
Reply all
Initiates the sending of a reply to the sender of the email and to all its recipients.
Forward
Initiates the sending of a copy of the email to new recipients.
Mark as read
Marks the selected unread messages as read. Only the assigned owner can mark a message as read.
Mark as unread
Marks the selected read messages as unread. Only the assigned owner can mark a message as unread.
Link to
Invokes the Related entity dialog box. By using this dialog box, you can associate the selected email with an existing entity.
Archive
Stores the selected messages in archival storage.
Create

Provides the following menu commands, which affect the email or emails you have selected before invoking a particular command:

Event
Opens the Event (CR306030) window in a pop-up window. By using this window, you can create a new event; the selected emails will be associated with this event as related activities.
Task
Opens the Task (CR306020) window. In this window, you can create a new task; the selected emails will be associated with this task as related activities.
Contact
Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window in a pop-up window. In this window, you can create a new contact; the selected emails will be associated with this contact and listed among other activities on the Activities tab of the Contacts (CR302000) window.
Case
Opens the Cases (CR306000) window in a pop-up window. By using this window, you can create a new case; the selected emails will be associated with this case and listed among other activities on the Activities tab of the Cases (CR306000) window. This menu command is available only if the Case management feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expense receipt
Opens the Expense receipt (EP301020) window in a pop-up window. By using this window, you can create a new expense receipt; the selected emails will be associated with this receipt and listed among other activities, which you can view by clicking Activities on the title bar of the Expense receipt (EP301020) window.
Related entity dialog box
Element Description
Type

The type of the entity with which you want to associate the selected email. The following options are available:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Sales invoice/note
  • Case
  • Customer
  • Employee
  • Expense
  • Receipt
  • General ledger batch
  • Lead/contact
  • Opportunity
  • Prospect
  • Purchase order
  • Purchase receipt
  • Sales order
  • Shipment
  • Supplier
Entity The entity of the selected type with which you want to associate the selected email.
This dialog box has the following buttons.
OK Accepts the specified data and closes the dialog box. As a result, the email is linked to the selected entity as an activity.
Cancel Discards the specified data and closes the dialog box.
## The table The table shown on each filter tab contains the list of emails that match the criteria of the selected filter tab. Table columns
Columns Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you select to include this email among those upon whom an action can be performed.
Subject The subject of the email. Click the subject to view the details of the email.
From The sender of the email.
Date The date of the email.
Email status The status of the email, which indicates whether it has been processed.
to The system email account that received the email.
Related entity description The description of the entity with which this email is associated. Click this link to view the details of this entity.
Workgroup The workgroup to which the email has been assigned.
Owner The employee to whom the email has been assigned.
Created by The name of the employee who created the email.
The table filter tabs Each of the default filter tabs (listed below) has a table whose records are filtered by certain criteria.
Filter Description
All records Displays the complete list of incoming emails, regardless of their owner or status.
Unread emails Displays only the unread incoming emails, regardless of their owner.
My emails Displays only the incoming emails assigned to you, regardless of their status.
My workgroup’s emails Displays only the incoming emails assigned to your workgroup.
Unassigned Displays only the incoming emails that are not assigned to any owner.
Unprocessed Displays only the incoming emails that have not yet been processed by the email server.
Pending emails (SM507000) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/pending-emails-sm507000 page You can use this window to perform manual processing of the incoming and outgoing emails that you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pending emails (SM507000) You can use this window to perform manual processing of the incoming and outgoing emails that you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By default, the system processes incoming emails based on the built-in functionality that assigns emails to employees by using information available in the subject, the **To** and **From** fields, and the body of the email; for details, see: [About processing incoming mail](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-processing-incoming-mail/). Also, by using this window, you can initiate repeated processing of outgoing emails with the **Failed** status. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the emails you have selected for the selected email account.
Process all Processes all the emails listed for the selected email account.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can define criteria to display only particular emails in the table.
Element Description
Account The system email account for which emails will be displayed. You can leave this field blank to view emails for all accounts.
Assigned to

A Me check box and unlabelled box, which you use as follows to select the user to whom the emails to be displayed are assigned:

  • Select the Me check box to view the emails assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another user to view the emails assigned to the user.
  • Leave the elements blank to view emails assigned to all users.
Type Select the type of emails to be displayed: All, Incoming, or Outgoing.
Include failed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the emails with the Failed status are also listed in the table. If the check box is cleared, only emails with the Pending processing status can be processed in this window.
## The table This table contains the list of emails that match the selection criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Email account ID The name of the system email account.
Subject The subject or summary of the email.
From The author of the email.
To The recipient of the email.
Start date The date of the email.
Owner The username of the employee to whom the email has been assigned.
Mail status The status of the email, which can be Pending processing or Failed.
Notification templates (SM204003) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/notification-templates-sm204003 page You use this window to create and edit notification and email templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Notification templates (SM204003) You use this window to create and edit notification and email templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and edit notification and email templates. Notification and email templates define the look and content of the emails to be sent to employees or customer or supplier contacts. You can insert place-holders or system variables enclosed in double parentheses, such as **((CustomerFullName))**—to use recipients' data to personalise notification emails when they're sent. Placeholders can be used in the email template's body as well as in the email properties, such as **Subject**, **To**, **CC**, and **BCC**. Any template that you want to use as a user welcome template must have four place-holders set up in the following order: **((Company))**, **((Name))**, **((Username))**, and **((Password))**. To see an example, view the **User welcome notification** template, which is the default template to welcome new users to Visma Net. You can include information from document detail lines in notifications by adding a `foreach` loop to the body of the notification template in the HTML format. For instance: You can use the following construction for notifications about sales forecasts: ` Element Description Notification ID The string that uniquely identifies the template. The system generates the identifier automatically based on the value in the Description field. Description Required. A description of the template. From The system email address from which emails generated for this template should be sent. To The email address of the user to receive the email, or a place-holder for the user’s email address. CC The additional email addresses of persons to receive a copy of the email, or the place-holders for the email addresses of the recipients. BCC The additional email addresses of persons to receive a hidden copy of the email, or the place-holders of these persons’ email addresses. Subject The subject of the notification, a place-holder that makes up the subject, or a combination of text and place-holders. Window Required. The window whose elements are used as the source of specific place-holders for this template. You click the magnifier icon in the field to display the site tree and then select the form by its name from the site tree. Window ID

A read-only field that displays the identifier of the window whose elements are used as the source of specific place-holders for this template.

The system fills in the value in this field automatically after you select a value in the Window field.

Locale

The locale that the system uses to apply region-specific settings to the text, dates, and digits in the body of the notification template and to retrieve translations of values needed to replace place-holders in the body according to the language associated with the locale.

The field appears only if multiple system locales are configured in the System locales (SM200550) window.

## Message text area You can create a message by using a WYSIWYG text editor with a text field and toolbar. The toolbar of the text editor has formatting tools similar to the ones provided by many popular text editors. By using the editor, you can perform the following actions: + Type the text of the email + Change the font and size for selected text + Copy, cut, and paste selected text + Create a numbered or bulleted list

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Send and receive email (SM507010) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/send-and-receive-email-sm507010 page By using the Schedules menu on the window toolbar, you can also schedule the automatic execution of these operations for emails in queues. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send and receive email (SM507010) By using the Schedules menu on the window toolbar, you can also schedule the automatic execution of these operations for emails in queues. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Create a send and receive email schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/email/manage-emails/create-a-send-and-receive-email-schedule/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Executes the operation selected in the Action field for the email accounts you have selected.
Process all Executes the selected operation for all email accounts.
## The top part In this area, select the operation you want to execute.
Element Description
Action

The operation you want to execute when you click Process or Process all.

The following options are available:

Receive all
Initiates the receipt of all incoming emails for the selected email accounts. Depending on the Archive emails setting specified in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, this action may initiate archiving of incoming emails for the selected email accounts.
Send all
Initiates the sending of all outgoing emails for the selected email accounts. Depending on the Archive emails setting specified in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, this action may initiate archiving of sent emails for the selected email accounts.
Send/receive all
Initiates the sending and receipt of all emails for the selected email accounts. Depending on the Archive emails setting specified in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, this action may initiate archiving of both incoming and sent emails for the selected email accounts.
## The table This table lists the system email accounts. You can select the accounts you want to include in processing.
Column Description
Email account ID The name of the email account. Click the account name to open the selected account in the System email accounts (SM204002) window in a new browser window for editing.
Email address The email address used to receive and send emails.
Inbox The number of incoming emails in the queue.
Last receive date The date when the receiving operation was last performed.
Last send date The date when the sending operation was last performed.
Outbox The number of outgoing emails in the queue.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 System email accounts (SM204002) /visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002 page You can use this window to create new system email accounts and to view the details of existing email accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # System email accounts (SM204002) You can use this window to create new system email accounts and to view the details of existing email accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create new system email accounts and to view the details of existing email accounts. For information on how to configure a system email account, see: [About system email accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-system-email-accounts/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Test Initiates tests of the connection over the specified ports to the selected system email account by using the selected protocol.
Actions

Provides the following actions:

Send all
Initiates the sending of all outgoing emails for the selected email account. Depending on the Archive emails setting specified in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, this action may also initiate the archival of sent emails for the selected email account.
Receive all
Initiates the receipt of all incoming emails for the selected email account. Depending on the Archive emails setting specified in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, this action may also initiate the archival of incoming emails for the selected email account.
Send/receive all
Initiates the sending and receipt of all emails for the selected email account. Depending on the Archive emails setting specified in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, this action may also initiate the archival of both incoming and sent emails for the selected email account.
## The top part You use the top part to create a new system email account or to select an existing account so that you can view or edit its details.
Element Description
Email account ID The identifier of the system email account. Select the identifier of the account you want to view (and, optionally, edit), or leave this field blank if you are defining a new email account.
Email account type

The account type that the system has assigned to each system email account. An email account can have one of the following types:

Standard
A standard system email account that you have created by using this window.
Email address The email address of the account.
Reply address The address to be used as the sender address for automatic replies to unassigned emails.
## The Servers tab You use the **Servers** tab to specify the servers for incoming and outgoing mail, as well as information about signing in to the account. ### The Server information section
Element Description
Incoming mail protocol The protocol to be used to connect to the incoming server. You can select one of the following options: IMAP or POP3.
Root folder (on server) The path to the folder that will be used as the root folder for storing emails. This field is available only if IMAP has been selected as the incoming mail protocol.
Incoming mail server The server to be used to receive emails.
Outgoing mail server The server to be used to send emails.
Group mails The maximum number of emails in a batch that the outgoing server processes within a single session. If a large number of emails has been submitted for processing, the outgoing server will try to process all of them within a single session, but it may fail to do so if the session is too short. Instead of resubmitting emails with the Failed status after each session, you can group emails into batches whose size is limited to a certain number. In this case, the server processes only one batch of emails during a single session, which is the number of emails you specify here, and the remaining emails are processed during subsequent sessions, batch by batch.
### The Login information section
Element Description
Username The username to be used to access the email account.
Password The password to be used to access the email account. The entered characters are masked.
## The Processing of incoming email tab You use the **Processing of incoming email** tab to activate the automatic processing of incoming emails. Automatic processing includes, for example, the creation of lead or contact accounts based on information available in incoming emails, or the creation of activities associated with existing contacts and the assignment of them to specific employees. If needed, you can set up automatic confirmation of received emails or automatic reply to unassigned emails. For more details, see: [About processing incoming mail](/visma-net-erp/help/email/configure-email-accounts/about-processing-incoming-mail/).
Element Description
Activate incoming processing A check box that you select to activate the automatic processing of incoming mail. Once you select this check box, the other elements on the tab are activated.
### The Initial processing section
Element Description
Confirm receipt

A check box that you select to configure the system to automatically send confirmation replies to incoming emails. The system will generate replies according to the specified template.

However, receipt confirmation doesn’t mean that the received email has been viewed or processed by an employee.
Confirmation template The template to be used for these confirmation replies; this field is available only if you select the Confirm receipt check box.
### The Main processing section
Element Description
Create new case A check box that you select if you want the system to create a new case based on each processed email.
New case class

The case class based on which new cases are created as a result of mail processing.

This field is available only if the Create new case check box is selected.
Attach to business account or contact or lead A check box that you select to create an email activity for each processed email. The email activity is added to the list of activities associated with the business account, contact, or lead, depending on the information available in the email.
Create new lead A check box that you select if you want the system to create a new lead based on the sender of each processed email.
Reply to unassigned emails

A check box that you select if you want the system to send automatic replies to the emails that the system has failed to assign.

For example: If the system email account used by your support service receives an email that the system fails to relate to any existing case, it might be reasonable to notify the customer who sent this email that he or she should try other methods of contacting the support service, especially if a quick response is needed. You need to set up a template for automatic replies and specify it in the Reply template field.
Reply template The template to be used for replies to unassigned emails; this field is available only if the Reply to unassigned emails check box is selected.
### The Final processing section
Element Description
Delete messages after**_**processing

A check box that you select to indicate to the system that email messages should be deleted after the type of processing you select, and the field where you can select one of the following processing options:

Any
Messages are to be deleted regardless of whether their processing has been completed successfully.
Failed
Messages are to be deleted only if their processing has failed.
Successful
Messages are to be deleted only if their processing has been completed successfully.
Add brief information about references A check box that you select to configure the system to add information (based on the history of email exchanges) to the incoming emails.
## The Content tab This tab has settings related to the content of email messages: You can specify whether attachments are allowed and which types of attachments are permitted. Also, you can allow or forbid the deletion of processed emails.
Element Description
Remove messages from server A check box that you select to remove from the server the email messages that have been read by users.
Allowed attachment types

The extensions of files that are allowed as attachments. If needed, use commas to separate extensions.

After allowed extensions have been specified for an account, if files with other extensions are attached to incoming emails, they will be discarded and lost to the recipient.
## The Assignment settings tab You use this tab to specify the assignment map that the system will use for assigning emails that remained unassigned after automatic processing of incoming mail. The system uses the assignment map only if incoming mail processing is enabled for the system email account. Also, on this tab, you can specify the default owner or work-group to which the system will assign the emails that failed to match the criteria specified in the assignment map.
Element Description
Email assignment map The map to be used for automatic assignment of emails when automatic processing of incoming mail has failed to assign an email to an owner. If incoming mail processing is not activated for the email account, the email assignment map is not applicable.
Default email work group The work-group to which an email is assigned if it has failed to match the criteria specified in the assignment map.
Default email owner The employee to whom an email is assigned if it has failed to match the criteria specified in the assignment map. If a work-group is specified in the Default email work group field, you can select an owner only from the employees that belong to this work group.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets section The Fixed assets workspace provides the functionality that enables you to create fixed assets, track them through their useful life, depreciate them, and dispose them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed assets The Fixed assets workspace provides the functionality that enables you to create fixed assets, track them through their useful life, depreciate them, and dispose them. ## Quick conversion from acquired items to fixed assets In Visma Net, if your company has acquired new assets, you can quickly convert these items into fixed assets. The acquisitions can be converted as separate assets or as components of an existing asset. Alternatively, you can add a fixed asset by entering the required information manually. ## Fixed asset classes You can configure fixed asset classes, which let you group similar fixed assets for processing and reporting. Once you assign a new asset to a specific class, the default values from the class are automatically filled in. For more information, see:[Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) ## Fixed asset types While creating a new fixed asset or fixed asset class in the system, you have to specify the type of the asset. In Visma Net, a list of predefined fixed asset types is available. If additional asset types are required, you can create new asset types that meet your business needs, and define each type as describing tangible or intangible assets. For more information, see:[About fixed asset types](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/about-fixed-asset-types/) ## Fixed asset hierarchy You can create a fixed asset hierarchy by selecting parent classes for fixed asset classes and associating fixed assets with parent assets. The hierarchy is implemented only for informational purposes. ## Depreciation methods The depreciation method determines the way the cost of an asset is allocated over the asset's useful life or its lifetime production of units. In addition to the standard depreciation methods, you can configure your own ones. For the same asset, different depreciation methods can be used for financial reporting and VAT reporting. For more information, see:[About depreciation configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-configuration/) ## Built-in averaging conventions Visma Net provides a number of built-in averaging conventions to be used for calculating depreciation for the financial periods within which an asset was acquired or disposed. You can select the averaging convention that suits the specific depreciation method. For more information, see:[About averaging conventions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-averaging-conventions/) ## Flexible options for depreciation calculation You can automate depreciation calculations for all types of assets by creating schedules for depreciation. You can run these schedules for a particular asset or for multiple assets. If needed, you can suspend the depreciation of specific assets for an unspecified number of periods. For more information, see:[About depreciation of fixed assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-of-fixed-assets/) ## Mass fixed asset transfer By using Visma Net, you can transfer the assets between branches one by one or in bulk. For more information, see:[About transfers of fixed assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-transfers-of-fixed-assets/about-transfers-of-fixed-assets/) ## Other functionalities and options By using the Fixed assets workspace, you can also do the following: + Create custom depreciation methods + Schedule depreciation + Easily track fixed assets by branch, department, and custodian + View the depreciation history of an asset in multiple ways and change the views at any time + Use a wide variety of fixed-asset reports that provide accounting and management information + Assign multiple depreciation books (for example, one for VAT reporting and one for financial management) to the fixed assets + Split and transfer assets + Delete empty transaction documents Manage fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage fixed assets About fixed asset types /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/about-fixed-asset-types page The fixed assets can be one of the following types: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About fixed asset types The fixed assets can be one of the following types: + Land, buildings, equipment, vehicles, furniture, fixtures ( **tangible** assets or those that have physical substance) + Copyright, goodwill, computer software, patents ( **Intangible** assets or those that have no physical substance) In Visma Net, you need to specify an asset type for each fixed asset that you create in the system in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. Specifying an asset type allows you to organise all your fixed assets by their function. You must also specify an asset type for each fixed asset class that you create in the system by using the [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window because a fixed asset class allows you to group fixed assets with a similar properties (which includes the asset type as well). ## Predefined asset types When you create a fixed asset in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window or a fixed asset class in the [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window, you can select an asset type from the list of predefined asset types available in the **Asset type** field. The list of predefined asset types includes the following types: **Building**, **Computers**, **Copyrights**, **Equipment**, **Furniture**, **Goodwill**, **Land**, **Machinery**, **Patents**, **Software**, and **Vehicle**. If the list of default asset types does not include a particular asset type that you need, you can create a new asset type manually. ## Adding a new asset type You use the [Fixed asset types (FA201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-types-fa201010/) window to add a new asset type. You can add a new asset type, and edit or delete an existing asset type. > [!NOTE] > You cannot delete an asset type if it is already specified for any fixed asset or fixed asset class. While creating a new asset type, you define its name with a brief description, and specify whether assets of this type are tangible or intangible (by selecting the **Tangible** check box). After you have created and saved a required asset type in the system, it becomes available in the list of all asset types in the **Asset type** field in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window or the [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window. ## Fixed asset hierarchy In Visma Net, the fixed asset hierarchy is a group of relationships between parent and child assets. A fixed asset can have an unlimited number of child assets (also referred to as **components**) and only one parent asset. To build a fixed asset hierarchy, take into account what assets consist of and how assets will be replaced at the end of their useful life. ### Creating a hierarchy of fixed assets You can use the following windows to organise the hierarchy of fixed assets: [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/), [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/), and [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/). + In the [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window, you can specify a parent class for a fixed asset class. + In the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, you can select a **Parent asset** for the fixed asset in the top part. If you do, the current (child) asset and its details will appear on the **Components** tab for the parent asset. + An asset cannot be a parent and a child of the same fixed asset. + You can also organise the hierarchy of fixed assets as you convert purchased items into fixed assets. + You can specify units of items that you want to convert as components of selected assets on the **Reconciliation** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window and in the [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About types of fixed asset transactions /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/about-types-of-fixed-asset-transactions page The system adds records for every transaction. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of fixed asset transactions The system adds records for every transaction. The types of transactions are described in detail below in this topic. ## Purchasing + Through this transaction, the cost of the asset transfers from the fixed asset accrual account (by default) to the fixed assets account, indicating that a new asset has been acquired. The accounting transactions can be illustrated as follows (if the default accounts are selected). |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Fixed assets account|Amount|0.0| |Fixed assets accrual account|0.0|Amount| The **Purchasing +** transaction is generated by the system, once an asset is created in the system either manually in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, or by converting a purchase to an asset in the [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/) window. The system uses the date (and its financial period) of the asset purchase document (specified in the **Receipt date** field) as the date and period of the **Purchasing +** transaction. ## Purchasing – Through this transaction, the cost of the asset transfers from the fixed assets account to the account specified in the acquisition document (by default, the fixed assets accrual account) when you reverse the asset acquisition. The accounting transactions can be illustrated as follows (if the default accounts are selected). |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |FA accrual account|Amount|0.0| |Fixed assets account|0.0|Amount| ## Reconciliation + and Reconciliation – Through this transaction, the cost of the fixed asset is reconciled with the appropriate purchasing transaction or transactions. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Fixed assets accrual account The asset account that is used to record the cost of purchased items that have not been put into service yet. This account is specified for the fixed asset in the **Fixed assets accrual account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window.|Amount|0.0| |Account An account that has been specified in the document (such as an supplier ledger invoice) or the account that has been debited by purchasing of the item.|0.0|Amount| The Reconciliation + transactions are generated automatically when you convert purchases to assets, increase the asset net book value, or enter assets in the initialisation mode. The Reconciliation – transactions are generated automatically when you decrease the net book value of an asset. ## Depreciation + This transaction type is used to record the depreciation incurred during the financial period. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Depreciation expense account|Amount|0.0| |Accumulated depreciation account|0.0|Amount| ## Depreciation – This transaction type indicates that the accumulated depreciation amount was decreased on the accumulated depreciation account, for example, as a result of the disposal reverse of the asset. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Accumulated depreciation account|Amount|0.0| |Depreciation expense account|0.0|Amount| ## Depreciation adjusting + and Depreciation adjusting – Transactions of this type are generated when the system updates the balance of the accumulated depreciation account. For example: When the asset is split, this transaction displays the amount of depreciation that was added to the new asset. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Accumulated depreciation account|Amount|0.0| |Accumulated depreciation account|0.0|Amount| ## Calculated + This system-generated transaction occurs automatically when you calculate depreciation for an asset. When the transaction is released, it transforms to a **Depreciation +** transaction. ## Calculated – This system-generated transaction occurs automatically when you reverse depreciation for an asset. When the transaction is released, it transforms to a **Depreciation –** transaction. ## Purchasing disposal and sale/dispose + Through these transactions, the system records the proceeds from the sale or disposal of the asset. ## Purchase reversal and sale/dispose – These transactions are generated by the system when you reverse the disposal of the asset. ## Transfer purchasing This transaction type indicates that a newly acquired asset that has not yet been depreciated has changed its location, custodian, or department. This system-generated transaction allows for using the other subaccount for the asset. ## Transfer depreciation This transaction type indicates that the asset that has been depreciated has changed its location, custodian, or department. This system-generated transaction allows for using the other subaccount for the asset.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About fixed asset adjustment transactions /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/about-fixed-asset-adjustment-transactions page Generally, transactions related to fixed asset maintenance (such as the acquisition or depreciation of assets) are created in the system automatically right after you create or depreciate an asset. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About fixed asset adjustment transactions Generally, transactions related to fixed asset maintenance (such as the acquisition or depreciation of assets) are created in the system automatically right after you create or depreciate an asset. Generally, transactions related to fixed asset maintenance (such as the acquisition or depreciation of assets) are created in the system automatically right after you create or depreciate an asset. You can review the list of transactions related to a particular asset on the **Transaction history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. Sometimes you may need to change the fixed asset amounts posted in the system, such as the amount of the depreciation of the selected fixed asset in a particular period, or the depreciable basis for the asset. In these cases, you can create an adjusting transaction manually by using the [Fixed asset transactions (FA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-transactions-fa301000/) window. An amount of the transaction that you create will update a required amount (depending on the transaction type that you have specified). When you create a new transaction, select an asset, the book that will be affected, and the type of transaction being created, and specify the transaction amount. You can manually create the following types of adjusting transactions:
Type Description
Purchasing +

Through this transaction, the depreciable basis of the fixed asset specified in the transaction will be updated, so that since the period of this transaction, the depreciation will be calculated according to the recalculated depreciable basis.

Then the system updates the current cost of the fixed asset (the Current cost field on the Balance tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window) and the depreciable basis (the Basis field on the Balance tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window) to calculate the depreciation expenses of the selected asset.

Note

The changes will affect the selected book only.
Depreciation+

Through this transaction, the depreciation amount calculated in a particular period for the fixed asset specified in this transaction will be updated.

The system updates the amount in the Depreciated field on the Depreciation history tab in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window immediately after releasing the Depreciation+ transaction.

This adjusting transaction will affect the selected book only.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Fixed asset classes /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes section You create new asset classes by using the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window, as described in: Create an asset class Alternatively, you can copy an existing class to create a similar asset class, as described in: Create an asset class by copying an existing class 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset classes You create new asset classes by using the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window, as described in: Create an asset class Alternatively, you can copy an existing class to create a similar asset class, as described in: Create an asset class by copying an existing class For more information: [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/), [Create an asset class](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class/), [Create an asset class by copying an existing class](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class-by-copying-an-existing-class/). You create new asset classes by using the [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window, as described in: [Create an asset class](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class/) Alternatively, you can copy an existing class to create a similar asset class, as described in: [Create an asset class by copying an existing class](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class-by-copying-an-existing-class/) Fixed assets classes serve the following purposes: + To group assets into categories having a similar nature, function, or use in your company's business. + To provide default settings when you add an asset to the system and assign the asset to a particular class. Most of the defaults can be overridden. You can configure separate classes for tangible and intangible assets of different types with a different estimated useful life, or create a separate asset class for a non-depreciating fixed assets. ## Default values provided by an asset class + When you create an asset class, you specify the default settings for all the assets of the class. + You can associate multiple books with the class, each with its own depreciation settings. You have to add the posting book if you want to post to the general ledger the transactions generated for the assets of the class. + You can use accelerated depreciation of all the books that use the straight line depreciation method and Dutch method 2. Note that you will be able to associate the assets of the class with only the books that you select for the class. + The general ledger accounts assigned to the class define most of the accounts that will be used to record the transactions for the assets of the class.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create an asset class /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an asset class 1. Go to the [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Asset class ID** field, type the unique identifier for the asset class. 1. Optional: Select the parent class for the asset class you want to add. 1. In the **Description** field, briefly describe the class. 1. If you want to make the class available when users add assets, select the **Active** check box. 1. If you want to give the new assets of the class the **On hold** status, select the **Hold on entry** check box. 1. On the **General settings** tab, perform the following steps: 1. In the **Asset type** field, select the asset type of the assets of the class. 1. If the class is to be associated with tangible assets, the **Tangible** check box will be selected by the system automatically. Otherwise, it will be cleared. 1. In the **Useful life, years** field, specify the useful life of assets of the class in years. 1. To use accelerated depreciation for the assets of the class, select the **Accelerated depreciation for Straight line deprec. method and Dutch method 2** check box. This setting will be applied to all the books of the class that use the straight line depreciation method. 1. On the **Depreciation settings** tab, define the list of books available for the assets and the depreciation settings for those books. Do one of the following: + For every book that may be associated with the assets of the class, perform these steps: 1. In the **Useful life, years** column, specify the useful life of the assets of the class in years for the selected book. 1. In the **Class method** column, select the depreciation method to be used to report asset depreciation in the selected book. 1. In the **Averaging conversion** column, specify the averaging conversion for the selected depreciation method. 1. If the assets of the class are to have a bonus, select the **Bonus** check box. + For every book that should not be available for the assets of the class, perform these steps: 1. Select the book in the table. 1. Click **Delete row**. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, specify the default general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be used to record transactions of the assets of the class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!CAUTION] > You can later delete the asset class only if no assets have been associated with it.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create an asset class by copying an existing class /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class-by-copying-an-existing-class section You can define a new asset class from scratch, as described in: Create an asset class The Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window also gives you the ability to copy the configuration of an existing class to use it as the base for the new class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an asset class by copying an existing class You can define a new asset class from scratch, as described in: Create an asset class The Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window also gives you the ability to copy the configuration of an existing class to use it as the base for the new class. For more information: [Create an asset class](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class/), [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/). You can define a new asset class from scratch, as described in: [Create an asset class](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-classes/create-an-asset-class/) The [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window also gives you the ability to copy the configuration of an existing class to use it as the base for the new class. 1. Go to The [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window. 1. In the **Asset class ID** field, select the asset class whose configuration you want to use as the base for the new class. 1. Select **Clipboard**, and then click **Copy**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Asset class ID** field, type the unique identifier for the asset class. 1. In the toolbar, select **Clipboard**, and then click **Paste**. The settings of the class you copied are pasted to the new class. 1. Review the settings of the new class, and make any required changes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!CAUTION] > You can later delete an asset class only if no assets have been associated with it.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Fixed asset entry /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset entry About fixed asset entry /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/about-fixed-asset-entry page Your organisation can acquire fixed assets in a variety of ways, including construction, purchasing, and contribution to the authorised capital from the founders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About fixed asset entry Your organisation can acquire fixed assets in a variety of ways, including construction, purchasing, and contribution to the authorised capital from the founders. You create a record for each of the organisation's fixed assets that you want to manage by using Visma Net. If you have made a mistake when creating the record for an asset, you may delete or annul the asset, and then record the asset correctly. ## Entering a fixed asset To enter assets one at a time, you use the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, which is the primary data entry form for the Fixed assets workspace, and enter all pertinent information. For a new asset, you specify at least the following parameters: + The asset class. Once you select a class, the system fills in common fixed asset settings, such as property type, asset type, useful life, depreciation book or books, and appropriate general ledger accounts that can be used for an asset to be created. You can change most of the default settings, if required. + The acquisition information, such as the receipt date, the original acquisition cost, and the quantity of units in the asset. + The start date of the depreciation (for a depreciable asset) or the placed-in-service date (for a non-depreciable asset). + The department to which the asset belongs. You can change the acquisition cost of the asset only before you release the purchasing transaction, so that the data on the **Balance** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window will be updated correctly. After the purchasing transaction is released, the data will be posted to the books and cannot be modified even though the **Orig. acquisition cost** field on the **General settings** tab of the window is available for editing. Entering a fixed asset into the system creates a **Purchasing +** transaction. The cost of the asset is recorded as an unreconciled amount, which you can view on the **Reconciliation** tab in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. You can later reconcile the acquisition cost of the asset with the financial documents declaring the asset acquisition. ## Entering a non-depreciable fixed asset Non-depreciable assets are the assets that cannot be depreciated or those assets that do not lose their value over their useful time. Land and most intangible assets are considered non-depreciable assets because they have an unlimited useful life. When you create a non-depreciable fixed asset by using the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window or a fixed asset class (for grouping non-depreciable assets) by using the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, you need to clear the **Depreciate** check box so that users will not be required to fill in the **Useful life, years** field. After saving an asset and releasing an appropriate transaction, you can perform any common operation with a non-depreciable asset, such as disposing, splitting, transferring, and creating additions and deductions. However, the depreciation will not be calculated for such asset. ## Converting items into fixed assets All the transactions that are associated with converting acquired items into fixed assets are aggregated on one account and subaccount by default. You specify the fixed assets accrual account and subaccount in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window as the default account and subaccount for such transactions. To convert items to assets, you use the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. You select the appropriate fixed asset accrual account in the **Account** field in the top part, and after that, transactions associated with the selected account appear in the upper table of the current window. You can convert one item or multiple items at once, each into one asset or multiple assets. In the lower table, you can add a line for each particular asset manually, or add all required asset lines (that correspond to the quantity of items specified in a transaction in the upper table) at once by selecting an asset class for a transaction in the upper table. You can set up the conversion parameters on three different levels: in the top part, in the lines of the upper table, and for the assets in the lower table. The settings in the top part are used as the defaults for the invoices in the upper table; the settings in the line of the upper table are used as the defaults for the assets in the lower table. You can override any default settings by changing them in the lower table for each new asset individually. If you use the fixed assets accrual account and subaccount to aggregate not only the items for conversion but also other items, you should hide the items that you don't want to convert. In this case, select the **Reconciled** check box for those items in the upper table. The items will be hidden when you process the conversion of the new assets. Converting a purchase into a fixed asset creates **Purchasing +** and **Reconciliation +** transactions. ## Importing fixed assets You can import assets with accumulated depreciation into Visma Net without updating the general ledger. You can create a record for each asset manually or import the existing records from other applications. To add an existing asset manually, you switch the Fixed assets workspace to the initialisation mode and add a new record in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. For the asset, you specify the asset parameters, such as the date when the asset was acquired, the original cost, the start of the depreciation, and the asset class. Also, you must specify the accumulated depreciation amount and the last depreciation period. Then you calculate the depreciation and check the results. If the resulting depreciation amounts match the depreciation in the legacy application, you can switch off the initialisation mode. ## Specifying the quantity of items included in the asset A fixed asset may contain more than one unit. You can specify the quantity of units in the asset when you create the asset. Later, you can split the asset (if, for example, you want to dispose of part of the asset). For more information, see: [About fixed asset splits](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-splits/about-fixed-asset-splits/) ## Deleting an asset You can delete a fixed asset from the system if it does not have any transactions associated with it. If transactions were made but were not released, you can first delete the transactions and then delete the fixed asset. When you delete an asset, the asset record is completely removed from the system and the system can later reuse the asset ID. For more information, see: [Delete a fixed asset](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/delete-a-fixed-asset/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Enter an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/enter-an-asset section You can add a record for a fixed asset by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter an asset You can add a record for a fixed asset by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Description** field of the top part, type the description of the asset. 1. Optional: If the asset is a child of another asset, specify the parent asset. 1. In the **Asset summary** section of the **General settings** tab, specify the asset information: 1. In the **Asset class** field, select the asset class, which defines general fixed asset parameters. You can change any of these parameters, if required. 1. In the **Property type** field, select the way the asset was acquired. 1. Optional: Select the **Hold** check box if the asset record you are entering is a draft. If you entering information for an active asset, clear this check box. 1. In the **Asset type** field, select the type of the fixed asset. The system fills in this field automatically according to the fixed asset class that you have selected, but you can change the value. 1. Optional: If the asset consists of multiple items, enter the quantity of these items in the **Quantity** field. 1. In the **Receipt date** field, specify the date of the asset acquisition. 1. If the asset is depreciable, perform these steps: + Select the **Depreciate** check box. + In the **Placed-in-service date** field, specify the start date for depreciation. > [!NOTE] > This field will be unavailable for editing once the first depreciation transaction (of the Depreciation+ type) is created for the asset. 1. If the asset is non-depreciable, perform these steps: + Clear the **Depreciate** check box. + In the **Date placed in service** field, specify the placed-in-service date for the asset. 1. In the **Orig. acquisition cost** field, specify the amount that was spent to acquire the asset. The original acquisition cost is used as the basis for depreciation of the asset, which you can find in the **Basis** column on the **Balance** tab. > [!NOTE] > After you first save the asset, any further changes to the original acquisition cost won't affect the depreciation basis. 1. Optional: In the **Salvage amount** field, specify the book value at the end of the useful life of the asset. 1. Optional: In the **Replacement cost** field, specify the cost of replacement of the asset with a similar one. 1. In the **Tracking information** section of the **General settings** tab, specify where the asset must be placed: 1. In the **Department** field, select the department to which you want to assign the asset. 1. Optional: Specify the other applicable location parameters in the corresponding fields. 1. Optional: Specify the details of the purchase or lease of the asset on the **Purchase/tangible info** tab. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, review the accounts to be used to enter asset transactions. If required, change the accounts. > [!NOTE] > You can change the asset accounts only until a transaction is posted to a particular account. 1. On the **Balance** tab, review the depreciation settings. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system automatically generates the **Asset ID** the first time you save a new record. 1. Release the resulting transactions according to your company workflow. After you create an asset, you reconcile its acquisition cost with one or multiple financial documents.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Convert items to fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/convert-items-to-fixed-assets section You can convert one acquired item or multiple items, for example, purchased goods to fixed assets by using the Convert purchases to assets (FA504500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Convert items to fixed assets You can convert one acquired item or multiple items, for example, purchased goods to fixed assets by using the Convert purchases to assets (FA504500) window. For more information: [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/). 1. Go to the [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/) window. 1. Specify selection criteria for the items you might want to convert to assets as follows: 1. In the **Account** field, select the account of the acquisition transaction. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, select the subaccount of the acquisition transaction. 1. If you want to view the transactions that are marked reconciled and hidden from display, select the **Show transactions marked as reconciled** check box. The items that meet the specified criteria are displayed in the upper table. If you don't see the items you want to convert, check the account and subaccount in the acquisition document (such as a bill for a purchased item). 1. Optional: Select the default department the assets will be assigned to, and/or the default custodian. 1. If you want hide the items in the upper table that are not to be converted, select the **Reconciled** check box in the item lines. When you convert the other items, the items with the **Reconciled** check box selected will be hidden from the table. To view the items marked as reconciled, select the **Show transactions marked as reconciled** check box in the top part. 1. For every acquired item you want to convert, do the following: 1. Click the **Selected** check box in the item row in the upper table to view the assets the items will be converted into in the lower table. 1. If you want to convert every unit of the acquired item into a separate asset manually, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar of the lower table. Do it as many times as the quantity of units specified for the item in the upper table. The system generates a row in the lower table with the default settings you specified in the top part and the upper table. 1. If you want to convert all acquired items a bulk, select an asset class for the item row in the upper table. So that, the system will generate the number of rows in the lower table equal to the number of units specified for the item in the upper table. 1. Make sure the **New asset** check box is selected for the added row. 1. To associate the new asset with a parent asset, select the **Component** check box, and then select the parent asset in the **Asset** column. 1. Check and correct the asset settings for conversion, filling in at least the following columns: + **Asset class** + **Branch** + **Department** + **Trans. date** + **Trans. period** The values in the **Selected quantity**, **Selected amount**, **Open quantity**, and **Open amount** columns in the upper table reflect the changes you made in the lower table. 1. Click **Process** to convert the acquired items to fixed assets. The new assets are created with the settings that you specified. The system assigns asset IDs according to the asset number series. 1. Release the resulting transactions as dictated by your company workflow. [Release a fixed asset transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-a-fixed-asset-transaction/) For more information, see:

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Import fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/import-fixed-assets section Importing an asset means adding an asset with accumulated depreciation to Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import fixed assets Importing an asset means adding an asset with accumulated depreciation to Visma Net. Importing an asset means adding an asset with accumulated depreciation to Visma Net. To add an asset with accumulated depreciation manually, you need to switch the Fixed assets workspace to the initialisation mode. Then, by using the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, you add a new asset record, and specify asset’s parameters including the accumulated depreciation amount and the last depreciation period. 1. Go to the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. 1. In the **Posting settings** section, clear the **Update general ledger** check box to turn on initialisation mode for the Fixed assets workspace. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. For each asset you want to add, do the following: 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, type the description of the asset. 1. In the **Asset class** field of the **General settings** tab, select the class of the asset. This causes the system to fill in the settings associated with the asset class. 1. Select the property type. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box to make the asset active. 1. In the **Receipt date** field, enter the date of the purchase. 1. Make sure the **Depreciate** check box is selected. 1. In the **Date placed in service** field, enter the date when the asset has been placed in use. The system will calculate the depreciation of the asset starting from this date. 1. In the **Orig. acquisition cost** field, enter the original cost of acquiring the asset. The original acquisition cost is used as the basis for depreciation of the asset. > [!CAUTION] > After you save the asset for the first time, you won't be able to change the depreciation basis, even if you change the original acquisition cost. 1. Optional: In the **Salvage amount** field, enter the expected book value at the end of the useful life of the asset. 1. Optional: Enter the replacement cost of the asset. 1. In the **Department** field of the **Tracking information** section, select the department of the asset. 1. On the **Balance** tab, in the **Last depr. period** column, enter the period of the last depreciation. 1. In the **Accum. depr.** column, type the accumulated depreciation amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the **Asset ID** field, you can see the asset identifier generated by the system. 1. On the **Transaction history** tab, release the acquisition transactions. [Release multiple fixed asset transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-multiple-fixed-asset-transactions/) For more information, see: > [!NOTE] > The transactions have the **Unposted** status even after release. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Actions** - **Calculate depreciation**. On the **Depreciation history** tab, you can see that no depreciation is shown before the amount that you entered in the **Accum. depr.** column. The system depreciates the remaining cost until the end of the useful life of the asset. 1. On the **Finance** tab, click **Fixed assets**. In the left pane, select the **Configuration** tab, and then navigate the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. 1. In the **Posting settings** section, select the **Update general ledger** check box to turn off initialisation mode for the Fixed assets workspace. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Convert purchased items to components of a fixed asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/convert-purchased-items-to-components-of-a-fixed-asset page To convert purchased items to new assets that are components of an existing asset, you can use one of the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Convert purchased items to components of a fixed asset To convert purchased items to new assets that are components of an existing asset, you can use one of the following windows: + [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/) You select the parent asset for each of the new assets. You can select different parent assets for every new asset. [Convert items to fixed assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/convert-items-to-fixed-assets/) For more information, see: + [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) You open the record of the parent-to-be asset, and then convert the purchases into the components of the selected asset only, as described later in this topic. 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field of the top part, select the identifier of the asset to which you want to add new components. 1. Set up the filter to select the acquisitions. On the **Reconciliation** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Account** field of the Stop part, select the account of the acquisition transaction. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, select the subaccount of the acquisition transaction. The documents are displayed in the table. If you don't see the document you need, check the account and subaccount in the bill. 1. In the **Trans. date** field, select the date of the addition. 1. In the **Addition period**, select the period of the addition. 1. For every purchase you want to convert, in the table, do the following: 1. Select the Selected check box. 1. Select the **Component** check box. 1. In the **Asset class** column, select the asset class for the new asset. 1. If you want to convert part of the purchase, fill in the values for the new asset in the **Selected quantity** and **Selected amount** columns. > [!NOTE] > The quantity of the asset must be equal or greater than 1. 1. Click **Process**. The selected items are converted to components of the currently selected fixed asset. The new asset is created with the settings you specified. The asset ID is assigned according to the asset number series.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Delete a fixed asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/delete-a-fixed-asset page You can delete a fixed asset from the system if no released transactions are associated with it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete a fixed asset You can delete a fixed asset from the system if no released transactions are associated with it. You can delete a fixed asset from the system if no released transactions are associated with it. To delete an asset, use the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. If unreleased transactions are associated with the fixed asset, you can delete the transactions first and then delete the fixed asset. For more information, see: [Delete an unreleased fixed asset transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/delete-an-unreleased-fixed-asset-transaction/) 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the identifier of the fixed asset you want to delete. 1. Click **Delete**. 1. Click **OK** to confirm the deletion of the asset. The fixed asset is deleted and the system can later reuse the asset ID.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Fixed asset splits /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-splits section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset splits About fixed asset splits /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-splits/about-fixed-asset-splits page Splitting is used to divide a fixed asset consisting of a group of items into two or more separate assets, or to divide an asset by only cost and depreciation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About fixed asset splits Splitting is used to divide a fixed asset consisting of a group of items into two or more separate assets, or to divide an asset by only cost and depreciation. Splitting is used to divide a fixed asset consisting of a group of items into two or more separate assets, or to divide an asset by only cost and depreciation. It is also used for partial asset disposals and transfers, because you might need to get rid of a portion of an asset, perhaps because you determine that a portion of the asset has become useless or you simply decide that selling part of the asset would be profitable. + When splitting assets, define the cost and the quantity of units for the asset components being removed from the fixed asset. The new asset record is created, containing the appropriate percentage of the original asset cost, the specified quantity, and the depreciation adjustments. + An asset can contain one unit or multiple units. You can split an asset regardless of the quantity of units, even if the original quantity was 1. + Due to the split, the original asset that you divide by cost remains with the original asset ID, but its cost, depreciation, and salvage amount are reduced by the amount of the new asset, which you created by splitting the original one. The new asset is a separate asset with a new unique identifier. As the asset's description, the system automatically adds **Split from** and the number of the original asset. + After you split an asset, you must release the associated transactions that signify the asset and asset depreciation split according to your company's workflow. You cannot reverse the corresponding split. + You can split an asset only before its disposal date. You can view the history of the splits of an asset in the [Asset splits (FA405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/asset-splits-fa405000/) window. ## Release of transactions When you split an asset, the system generates the following transactions: + For the original asset: + **Purchasing –** with the total removed cost + **Depreciation adjusting –** with the total removed amount of the accumulated depreciation + For each new asset: + **Purchasing +** with the cost of the new asset + **Depreciation adjusting +** with the appropriate percentage of the accumulated depreciation The transactions are nominal transactions signifying the split; they are not posted to the general ledger. ## Example Suppose that you purchase 100 units of office chairs for €1000 total, and that you can set up one fixed asset with an original quantity of 100 units and a useful life of one year, by using the straight line method, with a depreciation cost of €83,30 monthly as a whole. Then, on the third month after its purchase, you want to sell part of the asset: 20 of the 100 chairs. The already depreciated cost of the original asset is €250 and the cost to be depreciated is €750. For this operation, you split the asset into two: + The original asset, the quantity of which is reduced from 100 units to 80, with the ratio equal to 80%. The asset ID is not changed. The depreciated cost is reduced to €200 and the residual value to be depreciated is reduced to €600. + The new asset, with a quantity of 20 items and a ratio of 20%. This asset has a unique asset ID generated by the system. The asset gains the depreciated cost of €50 and the residual value to be depreciated is €150. This is the asset that you sell.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Split an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-splits/split-an-asset section By using the Split assets (FA506000) window, you can divide one asset into separate assets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Split an asset By using the Split assets (FA506000) window, you can divide one asset into separate assets. For more information: [Split assets (FA506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/split-assets-fa506000/). By using the [Split assets (FA506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/split-assets-fa506000/) window, you can divide one asset into separate assets. For each asset being removed from the original fixed asset, you specify the appropriate percentage, quantity, and amount. The original asset remains in the system; its cost, quantity, accumulated depreciation, and salvage amount are reduced by the total amount of the new assets. 1. Go to the [Split assets (FA506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/split-assets-fa506000/) window. 1. In the **Fixed asset** field of the top part, select the asset you want to split. 1. In the **Split date** field, select the date of the split. 1. In the **Split period** field, select the period of the split. 1. If you want to depreciate the asset before the split, select the **Depreciate before split** check box. 1. For each asset the original asset will be split into, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Define the part of the original asset to be assigned to the new asset. Do one of the following: + In the **Cost** column, specify the cost to be assigned to a new asset. + In the **Ration** column, specify the percentage of the original cost of the asset. + Optional: In the **Quantity** column, specify the quantity to be assigned to a new asset. 1. Click **Split**. The new assets are created; for each, the identifier is displayed in the **Asset ID** column. Every new asset contains the part of the original asset cost and depreciation that you specified. 1. Release the resulting transactions as dictated by your company workflow.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Fixed asset reversal /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-reversal section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset reversal About fixed asset reversal /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-reversal/about-fixed-asset-reversal page In Visma Net, if a fixed asset has released transactions associated with it, you cannot delete this asset from the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About fixed asset reversal In Visma Net, if a fixed asset has released transactions associated with it, you cannot delete this asset from the system. In Visma Net, if a fixed asset has released transactions associated with it, you cannot delete this asset from the system. In this case, you can reverse the transactions and then annul the asset. For example, suppose that you have created a new asset by converting a purchase to a fixed asset. Then you have realised that the wrong receipt date is specified in the fixed asset record. This date cannot be edited because the corresponding transactions (**Purchasing +** and **Reconciliation +** ) have already been released. For more information, see: [About types of fixed asset transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/about-types-of-fixed-asset-transactions/) In this case, you can annul this asset and again convert a purchase to a fixed asset with the correct settings. You annul the asset by using the reverse procedure. When you invoke this procedure, all transactions associated with the fixed asset are reversed in the corresponding book in which the original transactions are posted, and the asset gets the **Reversed** status. For transactions recorded in the non-posting book, the reversal transactions are posted to the same financial period as the period of the original transactions. For transactions recorded in the posting book in the book that updates general ledger or the reversal transactions are posted to the period of the original transactions only if this period is open; if the period of the original transactions is closed, the reversal transactions are posted to the nearest open financial period. ## Reversing a fixed asset To reverse a fixed asset, in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, you need to select the required fixed asset in the **Asset ID** field, and click **Reverse** in the **Actions** menu on the toolbar. Reversal of an asset yields the following results: + Reversal transactions are generated for all original fixed asset transactions in the corresponding fixed asset book. + The annulled asset is displayed as **Reversed** on reports, with the depreciable basis and the amount of accumulated depreciation equal to zero. The status of the asset at the moment of the reversal must be **Active**. The reversed asset cannot be deleted or edited.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reverse an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-reversal/reverse-an-asset page You use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to annul a fixed asset in Visma Net by using the reverse procedure. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse an asset You use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to annul a fixed asset in Visma Net by using the reverse procedure. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field of the top part, select the asset you need to reverse. You can reverse an asset with the Active status only. 1. Click **Reverse**. The asset is reversed; reversal transactions are generated for all released transactions associated with this fixed asset and posted to the same book as the original transactions. > [!NOTE] > In the posting book, if the financial period of the original fixed asset transactions is already closed, the reversal transactions will be posted to the nearest open financial period. 1. Release the resulting transactions as dictated by your company workflow. [Release multiple fixed asset transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-multiple-fixed-asset-transactions/) For more information, see:

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Revaluation of an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/revaluation-of-an-asset section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Revaluation of an asset Change net book value of an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/revaluation-of-an-asset/change-net-book-value-of-an-asset section You use the Reconciliation tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to change the net book value of the selected asset. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change net book value of an asset You use the Reconciliation tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to change the net book value of the selected asset. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the asset whose net book value you want to change. 1. On the **Reconciliation** tab, in the **Reconciliation type** field, specify if you want to increase or decrease the net book value of the asset. 1. Set up the criteria to select the document declaring the change in the net book value of the asset. Do the following: 1. In the **Account** field, specify the account of the document. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, specify the subaccount of the document. 1. In the **Trans. date** field, specify the date of the reconciliation transaction. 1. In the **Addition period** field, specify the financial period of the reconciliation transaction. 1. In the table, select the **Selected** check box for the document to be used. 1. Make sure the **Component** check box is cleared. 1. In the **Selected amount** field, specify the amount of the transaction. 1. Click **Process** in the table toolbar to process the transaction. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the resulting transactions as directed by your company workflow. [Release a fixed asset transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-a-fixed-asset-transaction/) For more information, see: The resulting transactions affect the net book value and the current cost of the selected asset displayed on the **Balance** and **Reconciliation** tabs.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Changes in fixed asset estimates /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Changes in fixed asset estimates About changes in fixed asset estimates /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/about-changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates page Adding a fixed asset involves determining the estimated useful life and salvage amount of the asset. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About changes in fixed asset estimates Adding a fixed asset involves determining the estimated useful life and salvage amount of the asset. Adding a fixed asset involves determining the estimated useful life and salvage amount of the asset. Estimates are subjective and may require revisions during the life of the asset. For example, the rapid technological advances may result in the actual useful life and salvage amount differing from your company's current estimates. In Visma Net, you can account for changes in the following estimates: + The useful life of a fixed asset. [Change the useful life of an asset](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/change-the-useful-life-of-an-asset/) For more information, see: + The salvage amount of a fixed asset. [Change the salvage value of an asset](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/change-the-salvage-value-of-an-asset/) For more information, see: ## Depreciation after changes in estimates The changes in estimates effect the current and future periods. The system uses the revised value for the depreciation throughout entire asset life in periods after the change. You can configure the system to accelerate the depreciation for the assets that use the straight line method and Dutch method 2. In this case, the system uses the revalued amount as the basis for the depreciation in the periods after revaluation. For more information, see: [About depreciation configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-configuration/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Change the useful life of an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/change-the-useful-life-of-an-asset section If the estimation of the useful life of an asset has changed, you change the estimated useful life in the asset record accordingly on the General settings tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the useful life of an asset If the estimation of the useful life of an asset has changed, you change the estimated useful life in the asset record accordingly on the General settings tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). If the estimation of the useful life of an asset has changed, you change the estimated useful life in the asset record accordingly on the **General settings** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. For more information about changing the estimated useful life of an asset, see: [About changes in fixed asset estimates](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/about-changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/) 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the asset whose net book value you want to change. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Useful life, years** field, specify the new estimation of the asset useful life. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the resulting transactions as directed by your company's workflow. [Release a fixed asset transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-a-fixed-asset-transaction/) For more information, see: The resulting transactions affect the net book value and the current cost of the selected asset displayed on the **Balance** and **Reconciliation** tabs.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Change the salvage value of an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/change-the-salvage-value-of-an-asset section If the estimation of the salvage value of an asset has changed, you change the estimated salvage value in the asset record accordingly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the salvage value of an asset If the estimation of the salvage value of an asset has changed, you change the estimated salvage value in the asset record accordingly. If the estimation of the salvage value of an asset has changed, you change the estimated salvage value in the asset record accordingly. You use the **General settings** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window to change the salvage value of the selected asset. For more information about changing the estimated salvage value of an asset, see: [About changes in fixed asset estimates](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/about-changes-in-fixed-asset-estimates/) 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the asset whose net book value you want to change. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Useful life** field, specify the new estimation of the asset useful life. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the resulting transactions as directed by your company's workflow. [Release a fixed asset transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-a-fixed-asset-transaction/) For more information, see: The resulting transactions affect the net book value and the current cost of the selected asset displayed on the **Balance** and **Reconciliation** tabs.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage fixed asset depreciation /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation section By depreciating an asset, you can spread the cost of the asset over its entire useful service life. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage fixed asset depreciation By depreciating an asset, you can spread the cost of the asset over its entire useful service life. By depreciating an asset, you can spread the cost of the asset over its entire useful service life. The service life is the period over which the asset is used, until it is no longer usable. About depreciation of fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-of-fixed-assets page Depreciation is used to spread the cost of an asset over its entire useful service life or the period over which the asset is used, until it is no longer usable. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About depreciation of fixed assets Depreciation is used to spread the cost of an asset over its entire useful service life or the period over which the asset is used, until it is no longer usable. You can calculate the depreciation and depreciate an asset only after you have released fixed asset transactions related to an asset acquisition in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) or the [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/) window. ## Processing depreciation You process the calculation of the depreciation expenses, specify selection criteria to get the list of fixed assets and the period to which the depreciation should be calculated by using the [Calculate depreciation (FA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/calculate-depreciation-fa502000/) window. You also need to specify either the system should only calculate the depreciation amounts for informative purposes, or to calculate the amounts, and generate corresponding depreciation transactions to depreciate the assets once these transactions are released. To define it, you should select one of the following options in the **Action** field: Calculate only : With this option, the system calculates depreciation expenses, and generates no transactions. You can view calculated amounts for each fixed asset in the **Calculated** column on the **Depreciation history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. You can use these amounts for the planning purposes. Depreciate : With this option, the system calculates depreciation expenses, and generates the **Calculated+** transactions. Once these transactions are released, their type automatically changes to **Depreciation+**. You can view the calculated and depreciated amounts for each fixed asset in the **Calculated** and **Depreciated** columns on the **Depreciation history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. You can also calculate depreciation for a particular fixed asset in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. In this window, you select a required asset in the **Asset ID** field, and click **Calculate depreciation** in the **Actions** menu on the window toolbar. No transactions are generated with this process. To depreciate the asset, you need to use the [Calculate depreciation (FA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/calculate-depreciation-fa502000/) window. ## Viewing the depreciation history You can view the depreciation history of an asset on the **Depreciation history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. You can view an asset's depreciation history in one of the following ways, depending on the **Depreciation history view** option selected in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window: + If the **By book** option is selected, you can filter depreciation history by book. In this case, you select a book to display its information in the window. The depreciation history is a table that has years as columns and periods per year as rows. + If the **Side by side** option is selected, all the books to which the asset is assigned are displayed simultaneously. In this case, depreciation history is represented as a table with depreciation periods as rows and books as columns.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About depreciation configuration /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-configuration page You have to select an appropriate depreciation method and select certain depreciation settings for each fixed asset you add to the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About depreciation configuration You have to select an appropriate depreciation method and select certain depreciation settings for each fixed asset you add to the system. You have to select an appropriate depreciation method and select certain depreciation settings for each fixed asset you add to the system. + The depreciation method determines how the asset cost is allocated over the useful life or lifetime production of the asset. You use the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window to manage formula-based methods and the [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/) window to manage table based methods. + If you change the settings for an asset, for example, you revalue the asset or change its useful life, the system uses the revalued amount as the basis for the depreciation in periods after revaluation. + You can configure the system to accelerate the depreciation for the assets that use the straight line method and Dutch method 2. In this case, the system uses the revalued amount as the basis for the depreciation in the periods after revaluation. + You can switch on the accelerated depreciation for an asset class, and the setting will be applied to all the assets of the class. + To switch on the accelerated depreciation for the assets that use the straight line method and Dutch method 2, select the [Fixed asset classes (FA201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000/) window. ## Configuring the depreciation of an asset The choice of a depreciation method depends on what your company policy is and how accurately the method reflects the physical depreciation of an asset. Visma Net supports assigning multiple books to one asset, with each book using its own depreciation method for different purposes. + You assign a class to the asset, and then specify the books to be assigned to the asset from the books associated with the asset class. Note that the asset must be assigned to the book that updates the general ledger. + Additionally, after you assign a book to an asset, you can change the default depreciation method of the book for the selected asset by using the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About depreciation methods /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-methods page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About depreciation methods + A depreciation method defines how the cost of a tangible asset is allocated over its expected useful life. In Visma Net, you can use multiple depreciation methods for calculating depreciation for the same asset; for example, you may need to apply different depreciation methods for VAT reporting and financial management purposes. + To depreciate the same asset by using different methods, you must use a separate depreciation book for each method. + You can configure and use formula-based depreciation methods in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window and table-based depreciation methods in the [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/) window. + Visma Net provides several predefined depreciation methods, and you can configure custom depreciation methods. + You can only view the predefined depreciation methods, not edit them. + Depreciation methods differ from one another depending on the calculation method used for calculating the depreciation expense. The sections of this topic describe the available methods of calculating depreciation in Visma Net. ## Straight line calculation method The **Straight line** method of calculating depreciation is the simplest and most popular method. With this method, the depreciation expense is spread evenly over the estimated useful life of the asset. This method assumes that physical obsolescence of an asset occurs evenly from the time the asset has been placed into service until the full write-off of its cost. When you use the **Straight line** calculation method, the depreciation expense is calculated by using the following parameters: + The depreciable basis, which is the asset acquisition cost minus the asset salvage amount (if one is specified) + The straight line rate, which is calculated as **100% \* (1 / N useful life)** This calculation method is expressed in the following formula: ### D = (Ac - Sa) \* SL rate where **SL rate** = 100% \* (1 / **N useful life** ) The symbols in the formula have the following meanings: D : The depreciation expense (for a year or an accounting period) Ac : The acquisition cost of an asset Sa : The salvage amount (or the residual value) specified for the asset in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window N useful life : The estimated time period that the asset is expected to be used, starting from the placed-in-service date To configure the depreciation method based on this calculation method, you need to select **Straight line** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. ## Declining balance calculation method The **Declining balance** calculation method allows you to mostly depreciate an asset in the early years of its useful life, so that by using this method, you can accelerate the depreciation of the asset. Practically, it means that the a company writes off the cost of the asset while the asset is relatively new. This method is expedient for the assets that become obsolete very quickly due to, for example, technological innovation. The acceleration of depreciation is performed by applying the acceleration rate. A company can set the acceleration rate up to 200%. The calculation formula of this method uses the following parameters: + The net book value of an asset. + The depreciation rate, which is calculated as **100% \* (1 / N useful life)** for the straight line method, but with respect to the declining balance method, in which the acceleration factor should be applied, you can use the increased multiplier (in percent) depending on the acceleration factor that your company set up. Thus, the multiplier can be set as 125%, 150% or 200%. In Visma Net, you enter this value in the **DB multiplier** field while you configure the **Declining balance** depreciation method in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. Thus, the formula of calculating the depreciation expense by using the **Declining balance** depreciation method is the following: ### D = NBV \* DB rate where ### DB rate = DB multiplier \* (1 / N useful life) The symbols in the formula have the following meanings: + **D**: The depreciation expense (for a year or an accounting period) + **NBV**: The net book value of an asset at the beginning of the year or period (that is, the asset cost minus the accumulated depreciation) + **DB multiplier**: The percent of depreciation acceleration that a company sets up for an asset > [!NOTE] > The depreciation method in which you use 200% as the multiplication factor is known as the double declining balance (DDB) depreciation method. + **N**: The asset useful life, in years (of accounting periods) To configure the depreciation method based on this calculation method, you need to select **Declining balance** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. This calculation method does not depreciate the asset to zero. Thus, if you need to fully depreciate an asset, you can set the system to switch the calculation method to **Straight line** when the depreciation amount calculated by using the **Straight line**method is greater than the depreciation amount calculated for the **Declining balance** method. To set the system to switch the calculation method, select the **Switch to SL** check box in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window when you configure the depreciation method based on the **Declining balance** calculation method. ## Sum of the years' digits calculation method The **Sum of the years' digits** calculation method accelerates depreciation more than the straight line method but less than the declining balance method. The depreciation expense per year is equal to the depreciable basis multiplied by the depreciation rate, where the depreciation rate is the ratio of the number of years remaining to depreciate the asset to the sum of the years' digits. For example: Suppose that an asset's useful life is 3 years. In the first year, the depreciation rate is 3 / (1 + 2 + 3) = 1/2. Thus, the asset would be depreciated by 50% in the first year of its useful life. To configure the depreciation method based on this calculation method, you need to select **Sum of the years' digits** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. ## Remaining value calculation method The **Remaining value** calculation method is similar to the **Straight line** method. The difference between the two methods is that the remaining value method always depreciates the asset by the end of its useful life, so that the depreciable basis minus the accumulated depreciation will be zero. The remaining value calculation method is used if, for example, the useful life of an asset will end earlier than had been planned. Regardless of which depreciation method was used to depreciate the asset, the user can switch the method to the **Remaining value** method at any time. As a result, the asset will be fully depreciated to the amount of zero by the end of its useful life. To configure the depreciation method based on this calculation method, you need to select **Remaining value** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. ## Dutch method 1 and Dutch method 2 The **Dutch method 1** and **Dutch method 2** calculation methods are commonly used for calculating depreciation in the Netherlands. These methods are similar to the declining balance calculation method, which allows you to mostly depreciate an asset in the earlier years of its useful life. To configure a depreciation method based on these calculation methods, you need to select either **Dutch method 1** or **Dutch method 2** in the **Calculation method** field in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. With these methods, the depreciation expenses are calculated by using the following formula: ### D = NBV \* D rate The symbols in the formula have the following meanings: + **D**: The depreciation expenses (per period). + **NBV**: The net book value of an asset at the beginning of the period. The net book value is calculated as the asset’s acquisition cost minus the total accumulated depreciation by the beginning of the period. + **D rate**: The depreciation rate. It follows from the formula that both of these methods involve applying the specific depreciation rate. The difference between these methods is that different parameters are required for calculating this depreciation rate, as described below. The depreciation rate for the **Dutch method 1** method is calculated by using the asset salvage amount and the asset useful life (number of periods). The rate, in this case, is calculated in a way that allows you to fully depreciate an asset during its expected useful life. The **Dutch method 1** uses the following calculation formula: ### D rate = 1 - (Sa / Ac) ^ (1/n) The symbols in the formula have the following meanings: D rate : The depreciation rate Sa : The salvage amount of an asset Ac : The asset acquisition cost n : The number of periods of asset useful life The depreciation rate for the **Dutch method 2** method is calculated by using the constant percentage and the number of periods in a year. The constant percentage defines the part of an asset's net book value that should be depreciated during this year. The **Dutch method 2** uses the following calculation formula: ### D rate = 1 - (1 - Percentage / 100) ^ (1/N) The symbols in the formula have the following meanings: D rate : The depreciation rate. Percentage : The constant percent that defines which part of the asset net book value should be depreciated (in the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window, you should enter this value in the **Percent per year** field). N : The number of periods in a year

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About averaging conventions /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-averaging-conventions page Averaging conventions determine how fixed assets must be depreciated for the financial period within which they are acquired or disposed of. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About averaging conventions Averaging conventions determine how fixed assets must be depreciated for the financial period within which they are acquired or disposed of. Assets usually are not put into service on the first date of the financial period; similarly, they are seldom disposed of on the last date of the financial period. + Visma Net provides built-in averaging conventions, which significantly simplify the calculation of depreciation. In the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window, you specify the averaging conventions that best fit the selected depreciation method. If you select a built-in depreciation method, the system automatically assigns the statutory-allowed averaging convention for the depreciation book; however, you can manually change the convention. + Some averaging conventions require the system to determine the middle of the financial period. You can specify the rule for determining the middle of the period for averaging conventions assigned to each depreciation book by using the **Mid period type** and **Day in mid period** columns in the [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/) window. ## Built-in options for averaging conventions in Visma Net
Option Description
Full period Depreciation is calculated for the full financial period when the asset was acquired. When the asset is disposed off, no depreciation is calculated for the period of disposal.
Mid-period When an asset is acquired (or disposed off), depreciation is calculated for the half financial period when the asset is acquired (or disposed off).
Next period N o depreciation is calculated for the financial period when the asset is acquired; depreciation is instead calculated starting from the period after the acquisition period. Depreciation is then calculated for the full financial period in which the asset is disposed off.
Modified half period If an asset was acquired within the first half of the financial period, depreciation is calculated for a full period, and no extra periods are added for asset depreciation. If an asset was acquired during the second half of the financial period, depreciation is calculated for half the amount for that period. It is also calculated for half the amount of the last asset life period, and this period is added to the end of the asset’s lifetime. That is, the number of depreciation periods increases by 1, and the depreciation is calculated for half of the first period and for half of the last one.
Modified half period 2 If the asset was acquired within the first half of the financial period, depreciation is calculated for a full period, and no extra periods are added for asset depreciation. If the asset was acquired within the second half of the financial period, depreciation is not calculated for that period. Also, if depreciation is calculated for the extra asset life period, this period is added to the end of the asset’s lifetime. That is, the number of depreciation periods increases by 1, and depreciation is not calculated for the first period but is fully calculated for the last one.
Full quarter Depreciation is calculated by using the appropriate percentage of annual depreciation (acquisition and disposal), which depends on the quarter when the asset was acquired or disposed.
Mid quarter Depreciation calculation is based on the acquisition or disposal percentage of annual depreciation, which depends on the quarter when the asset was acquired or disposed off.
Full year Depreciation is calculated for the full year during which the asset was acquired. No depreciation is calculated for the year the asset was disposed off.
Mid year Depreciation is calculated for the half year when the asset was acquired or disposed off.
Full day The most accurate calculation method. With it selected, depreciation is calculated for the days in the period starting from the day when the asset was acquired or disposed of.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Calculate depreciation /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/calculate-depreciation page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate depreciation 1. In the [Calculate depreciation (FA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/calculate-depreciation-fa502000/) window, in the **To period** field, select the financial period that ends the period range for which you want to calculate depreciation expenses. 1. In the **Action** field, select one of these two: + **Calculate only** if you only want to calculate depreciation expenses for the assets. + **Depreciate** to calculate the depreciation expenses and to create transactions for the assets. > [!NOTE] > If no value is specified in the **To period** field, the **Calculate only** option is selected by default, and you cannot edit the **Action** field. 1. To run the selected action for specified fixed assets in the table, select the check box in front of those fixed assets lines. 1. Click **Process**. To run the selected action for all fixed assets in the table, click **Process all**. You can schedule an automatic execution of this operation in the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Depreciate an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/depreciate-an-asset page To depreciate one asset or multiple assets, you use the Calculate depreciation (FA502000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Depreciate an asset To depreciate one asset or multiple assets, you use the Calculate depreciation (FA502000) window. For more information: [Calculate depreciation (FA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/calculate-depreciation-fa502000/). ## Before you start Before you report the depreciation of the assets, you can calculate the depreciation amounts by using the **Calculate only** option available in the **Action** field. You can review calculated amounts for the selected asset on the **Depreciation history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. Go to the [Calculate depreciation (FA502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/calculate-depreciation-fa502000/) window. 1. In the **To period** field, specify the financial period that ends the period range for which you want to depreciate assets. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Depreciate**. 1. In the **Branch** field, specify the branch of the organisation whose assets you want to depreciate. 1. Optional: In the **Asset class** field, select an asset class, so that assets of this class only will be filtered for depreciation. 1. Optional: In the **Parent asset** field, select a parent asset if you want to depreciate the components of a particular asset. 1. Optional: In the **Book** field, select a book to depreciate the assets associated with the particular book. > [!NOTE] > The depreciation would be reported in all the books associated with the asset. 1. To depreciate only particular assets, select the check boxes next to required assets in the table, and click **Process** on the toolbar. 1. To depreciate all assets listed in the table, click **Process all** in the toolbar. 1. Release the resulting transactions as directed by your company's workflow. [Release multiple fixed asset transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-multiple-fixed-asset-transactions/) For more information, see:

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About depreciation suspension /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-suspension page Sometimes it is necessary to stop or suspend calculating depreciation of a fixed asset for some number of financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About depreciation suspension Sometimes it is necessary to stop or suspend calculating depreciation of a fixed asset for some number of financial periods. Sometimes it is necessary to stop or **suspend** calculating depreciation of a fixed asset for some number of financial periods. When you restart depreciation, the system resumes depreciation calculation and extends the asset life for the number of periods the asset has been suspended to ensure full depreciation. Suspension can be used if, for example, some asset is not used without disposal and becomes temporarily inactive. + In Visma Net, you can suspend an asset with the **Active** status starting from the current business date. The asset status is changed to **Suspended**. + The system generates a line to the asset depreciation history for suspended assets with the amount of 0 for each period that you did not depreciate. You can view the history of asset depreciation on the **Depreciation history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. + To start the depreciating the asset again, resume the depreciation of the asset starting at the beginning of the financial period you specified.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Suspend asset depreciation /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/suspend-asset-depreciation page You can suspend the depreciation of an active asset by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Suspend asset depreciation You can suspend the depreciation of an active asset by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the fixed asset whose depreciation you want to suspend. 1. Click **Actions**, and then select **Suspend**. Alternatively, on the **Balance** tab, you can click **Suspend** in the table toolbar. The depreciation of the selected asset is suspended starting from the current business date.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure table methods of class type /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/configure-table-methods-of-class-type section To add a new depreciation table method, first you use the Depreciation table methods (FA202600) window to add a method of the class type that will be used to aggregate methods of asset type, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure table methods of class type To add a new depreciation table method, first you use the Depreciation table methods (FA202600) window to add a method of the class type that will be used to aggregate methods of asset type, as described in this topic. For more information: [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/). 1. Go to the [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Record type** field, select **Class** type. 1. In the **Useful life, years** and **Recovery period** fields, specify the supposed asset useful life in years and month accordingly. 1. In the **Description** field, specify the description of the asset. 1. In the **Averaging convention** field, select the averaging convention to be used for the method. 1. In the **Convention period** field, type 1. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After you added a method of class type, you configure the methods of assets type, as described in: [Configure table methods of asset type](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/configure-table-methods-of-asset-type/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure table methods with annual depreciation /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/configure-table-methods-with-annual-depreciation section To add a new depreciation table method with annual depreciation, you use the Depreciation table methods (FA202600) window to add a method of the both type that is used to specify both the settings of the depreciation methods and the annual depreciation rates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure table methods with annual depreciation To add a new depreciation table method with annual depreciation, you use the Depreciation table methods (FA202600) window to add a method of the both type that is used to specify both the settings of the depreciation methods and the annual depreciation rates. For more information: [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/). To add a new depreciation table method with annual depreciation, you use the [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/) window to add a method of the **both** type that is used to specify both the settings of the depreciation methods and the annual depreciation rates. Such methods use the **Full year** or **Mid year** averaging conventions. 1. Go to the [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Record type** field, select the **Both** type. 1. In the **Useful life, years** and **Recovery period** fields, specify the supposed asset useful life in years and month accordingly. 1. In the **Description** field, specify the description of the asset. 1. In the **Averaging convention** field, select a **Full year** or **Mid year** averaging convention. 1. In the **Convention period** field, type 1. 1. In the table, type the rates for the recovery years. The sum of rates, displayed in the **Total percent** field, must be 100 percent. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure table methods of asset type /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/configure-table-methods-of-asset-type section After you configured a table method of class type, as described in Configure table methods of class type, you use the Depreciation table methods (FA202600) window to configure table methods of asset type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure table methods of asset type After you configured a table method of class type, as described in Configure table methods of class type, you use the Depreciation table methods (FA202600) window to configure table methods of asset type. For more information: [Configure table methods of class type](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/configure-table-methods-of-class-type/), [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/). Table methods of asset type specify the annual percentage in the convention periods for the methods of class type. 1. Go to the [Depreciation table methods (FA202600)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Class method** field, specify the table method of class type. 1. In the **Record type** field, select **Asset** type. 1. In the **Useful life, years**, **Recovery period**, and **Averaging convention** fields, specify the same settings as for the associated class method. 1. In the **Description** field, specify the description of the method. 1. In the **Convention period**, type the convention period for which this method specifies the annual percentage. 1. In the table, type the rates for the recovery years. > [!NOTE] > The sum of rates, displayed in the **Total percent** field, must be 100 percent. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for every convention period of the method of asset class.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure formula-based depreciation methods /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/configure-formula-based-depreciation-methods section In the Depreciation methods (FA202500) window, you can configure a formula-based depreciation method by using any of the available depreciation calculation methods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure formula-based depreciation methods In the Depreciation methods (FA202500) window, you can configure a formula-based depreciation method by using any of the available depreciation calculation methods. For more information: [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/). ## Configure the straight line depreciation method 1. Go to the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Calculation method** field, select **Straight line**. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a useful description of the depreciation method that you are configuring. It will allow you to easily find this method in the list of available depreciation methods. 1. Optional: In the **Averaging convention** field, select the convention that determines how fixed assets must be depreciated for the financial year within which they are acquired or disposed of. The following options are available: **Full period**, **Mid period**, **Next period**, **Modified half period**, **Modified half period 2**, **Full quarter**, **Mid quarter**, **Full year**, **Mid year**, and **Full day**. 1. Optional: Select the **Annual accounting** check box to configure the system to calculate the depreciation amount on a yearly basis, so that the system will calculate the depreciation expense for a year and then divide this amount evenly by the number of periods in a year. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure the declining balance depreciation method 1. Go to the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Calculation method** field, select **Declining balance**. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a useful description of the depreciation method that you are configuring. It will allow you to easily find this method in the list of available depreciation methods. 1. In the **DB multiplier** field, enter the value (that is, the percentage of depreciation acceleration that you have decided to use in this method). For details, see the description of the **Declining balance** calculation method available the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. 1. Optional: Select the **Switch to SL** check box to configure the system to switch the calculation method to **Straight line** in order to depreciate an asset to zero or to its salvage value (if specified). 1. Optional: In the **Averaging convention** field, select the convention that determines how fixed assets must be depreciated for the financial year within which they are acquired or disposed of. The following options are available: **Full period**, **Mid year**, **Mid quarter**, and **Full day**. 1. Optional: Select the **Annual accounting** check box to configure the system to calculate the depreciation amount on a yearly basis, so that the system will calculate the depreciation expense for a year and then divide this amount evenly by the number of periods in a year. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure the sum of the years' digits depreciation method 1. Go to the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Calculation method** field, select **Sum of the years' digits**. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a useful description of the depreciation method that you are configuring. It will allow you to easily find this method in the list of available depreciation methods. 1. Optional: In the **Averaging convention** field, select the convention that determines how fixed assets must be depreciated for the financial year within which they are acquired or disposed of. The following options are available: **Full period** and **Full day**. 1. Select the **Annual accounting** check box to configure the system to calculate the depreciation amount on a yearly basis, so that the system will calculate the depreciation expense for a year and then divide this amount evenly by the number of periods in a year. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure the remaining value depreciation method 1. Go to the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Calculation method** field, select **Remaining value**. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a useful description of the depreciation method that you are configuring. It will allow you to easily find this method in the list of available depreciation methods. 1. Optional: In the **Averaging convention** field, select the convention that determines how fixed assets must be depreciated for the financial year within which they are acquired or disposed of. The following options are available: **Full period**, **Mid period**, **Next period**, **Modified half period**, **Modified half period 2**, **Full quarter**, **Mid quarter**, **Full year**, **Mid year**, and **Full day**. 1. Optional: Select the **Annual accounting** check box to configure the system to calculate the depreciation amount on a yearly basis, so that the system will calculate the depreciation expense for a year and then divide this amount evenly by the number of periods in a year. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure the Dutch method 1 > [!NOTE] > The formula used by the system to calculate the depreciation expenses by this depreciation method is described in **Depreciation methods**. 1. Go to the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Calculation method** field, select **Dutch method 1**. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a useful description of the depreciation method that you are configuring. It will allow you to easily find this method in the list of available depreciation methods. 1. Leave the **Annual accounting** check box cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Configure the Dutch method 2 > [!NOTE] > The formula used by the system to calculate the depreciation expenses by this depreciation method is described the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/). 1. Go to the [Depreciation methods (FA202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500/) window. 1. In the **Depreciation method ID** field, type the name of the new method. 1. In the **Calculation method** field, select **Dutch method 2**. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a useful description of the depreciation method that you are configuring. It will allow you to easily find this method in the list of available depreciation methods. 1. In the **Percent per year** field, specify the value (in percent) that defines which part of the asset net book value should be depreciated for one year. 1. Leave the **Annual accounting** check box cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage transfers of fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-transfers-of-fixed-assets section Visma Net supports transfers of fixed assets between departments, change of the custodian within the branch, and transfers of assets between your company's branches. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage transfers of fixed assets Visma Net supports transfers of fixed assets between departments, change of the custodian within the branch, and transfers of assets between your company's branches. About transfers of fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-transfers-of-fixed-assets/about-transfers-of-fixed-assets page A fixed asset transfer occurs when a department gives an asset to another department or when an asset is moved from one branch to another. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About transfers of fixed assets A fixed asset transfer occurs when a department gives an asset to another department or when an asset is moved from one branch to another. A fixed asset transfer occurs when a department gives an asset to another department or when an asset is moved from one branch to another. With Visma Net , you can perform two types of asset transfer: + **Individual asset transfer**: You can change the location of an individual asset in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. You can use this option to change the custodian of the asset or to move the asset within the branch. The date of the transaction is the current business date. [Transfer an individual asset](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-transfers-of-fixed-assets/transfer-an-individual-asset/) For more information, see: + **Mass asset transfer**: You can transfer one or multiple assets from one location to another by using the [Transfer assets (FA507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/transfer-assets-fa507000/) window. You can use this window for inter-branch transactions. You can also select the date and period of the transfer. [Mass-transfer fixed assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-transfers-of-fixed-assets/mass-transfer-fixed-assets/) For more information, see: When you transfer an asset in Visma Net, the accounts and subaccounts to which the cost and depreciation were posted change to the new ones. After release, a historical record of the transactions is created. You can view the details of this record on the **Location history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, in the [Transfers (FA640000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transfers-fa640000/) report, and on other reports.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Transfer an individual asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-transfers-of-fixed-assets/transfer-an-individual-asset section You can change the custodian of an asset or manage transfers of the asset within one branch by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transfer an individual asset You can change the custodian of an asset or manage transfers of the asset within one branch by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the fixed asset you want to transfer. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Tracking information** section, specify the new location by changing any of the following: + **Building** + **Floor** + **Room** + **Custodian** + **Department** 1. In the **Reason** field, enter the reason for the transfer. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. 1. Release the resulting transactions by following your company's workflow. [Release multiple fixed asset transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-multiple-fixed-asset-transactions/) For more information, see:

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Mass-transfer fixed assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-transfers-of-fixed-assets/mass-transfer-fixed-assets page You can transfer fixed assets by using the Transfer assets (FA507000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Mass-transfer fixed assets You can transfer fixed assets by using the Transfer assets (FA507000) window. For more information: [Transfer assets (FA507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/transfer-assets-fa507000/). 1. Go to the [Transfer assets (FA507000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/transfer-assets-fa507000/) window. 1. In the **Transfer date** field, select the date when you want to make the transfer. 1. In the **Transfer period** field, select the effective financial period of the transaction. 1. Optional: In the **Reason** field, specify the reason for the transfer. 1. In the **Transfer from** section, specify the selection criteria for the assets you may want to transfer: 1. In the **Department** field, select the department from which you want to transfer assets. 1. Optional: In the **Asset class** field, select the asset class of the assets to be transferred. > [!NOTE] > To transfer the assets only from one branch to another, leave the **Department** field blank. 1. In the **To** section, specify the location to which you want to transfer assets: 1. In the **Department** field, specify the destination department. 1. Optional: In the **Asset class** field, select the asset class from the list of classes specified in the destination department that will be assigned to the transferred assets. > [!NOTE] > To transfer the assets only from one branch to another, leave the **Department** field blank. 1. In the table, select the check box for each asset you want to transfer. 1. Click **Process**. This opens the [Transfer transactions (FA642000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transfer-transactions-fa642000/) report, which displays the transfer transactions for the selected assets. 1. Release the resulting transactions by following your company's workflow. [Release a fixed asset transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-a-fixed-asset-transaction/) For more information, see:

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage fixed asset disposals /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals section Visma Net supports a variety of fixed asset disposal methods, and you can dispose of assets individually or as a group. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage fixed asset disposals Visma Net supports a variety of fixed asset disposal methods, and you can dispose of assets individually or as a group. Visma Net supports a variety of fixed asset disposal methods, and you can dispose of assets individually or as a group. If necessary, you can reverse disposal. Visma Net updates appropriate general ledger accounts as a result of disposal. About asset disposals /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/about-asset-disposals page You dispose of an asset for of variety of reasons, such as the end of its useful life or a reduction of the asset's productivity later in its life. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About asset disposals You dispose of an asset for of variety of reasons, such as the end of its useful life or a reduction of the asset's productivity later in its life. You configure the disposal methods, and then you select the required disposal method when you dispose of an asset. You can dispose of fixed assets one by one or in bulk. For more information, see:[Dispose of an asset](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/dispose-of-an-asset/) and [Dispose of multiple assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/dispose-of-multiple-assets/) ## Updated general ledger accounts as a result of fixed asset disposal When a fixed asset is disposed of, the system records the proceeds from the disposal, as well as any gain or loss in its disposal. The system generates **Sales/disposal+**, **Depreciation adjusting-**, and **Purchasing disposal** transactions. Generally, the accounting transactions can be illustrated as follows. |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Gain account / Loss account|0.0 or loss amount (book value – proceeds amount, if the book value is greater than the proceeds amount)|Gain amount (proceeds amount – book value, if the book value is smaller then the proceeds amount) or 0.0| |Fixed Assets account|0.0|Acquisition cost| |Accumulated depreciation account|Accumulated depreciation amount|0.0| |Proceeds account|Proceeds amount|0.0| The gain or loss is calculated and recorded in the gain account or loss account. To calculate the gain or loss amount, the system deducts the accumulated depreciation amount plus the salvage amount from the acquisition cost and compares the calculated amount with the proceeds from disposal. + If there is a gain on disposal, the gain account is updated. + If there is a loss on disposal, the loss account is updated. ## Reverse fixed asset disposal If you have specified disposal parameters incorrectly or erroneously disposed of an asset, you can reverse the disposal. For more information, see:[Reverse an asset disposal](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/reverse-an-asset-disposal/) When you reverse a disposal, you reverse the transactions of the disposal. After the reversal of the disposal, the status of the asset changes from **Disposed** to **Active**.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Configure disposal methods /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/configure-disposal-methods section You configure the disposal methods for the system by using the Disposal methods (FA207000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure disposal methods You configure the disposal methods for the system by using the Disposal methods (FA207000) window. For more information: [Disposal methods (FA207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/disposal-methods-fa207000/). You configure the disposal methods for the system by using the [Disposal methods (FA207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/disposal-methods-fa207000/) window. 1. Go to the [Disposal methods (FA207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/disposal-methods-fa207000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Disposal method ID** column, specify the ID for new method. 1. In the **Description** column, enter the description of the new method. 1. Optional: Specify the account for the proceeds. By default, the system uses the proceeds account you specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. 1. Optional: Specify the subaccount for the proceeds account. By default, the system uses the proceeds subaccount you specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Dispose of an asset /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/dispose-of-an-asset page If you need to dispose of one asset, you generally use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dispose of an asset If you need to dispose of one asset, you generally use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). > [!NOTE] > Alternatively, you can use the [Asset summary (FA402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/asset-summary-fa402000/) window to dispose of an asset. 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the fixed asset that you want to dispose of. 1. Select **Actions**, and then click **Dispose**. 1. In the **Disposal parameters** dialog box, enter the disposal parameters: 1. In the **Disposal date** field, enter the date of the disposal. By default, the system uses the current business date. 1. In the **Disposal period** field, enter the financial period of the disposal. By default, the system uses the current financial period. 1. Optional: In the **Proceeds amount** field, type the proceeds amount that is gained as a result of the disposal. 1. In the **Disposal method** field, select the disposal method. 1. In the **Proceeds account** field, enter the account to post proceeds from the disposal of the asset. By default, the system uses the proceeds account specified for the asset. 1. In the **Proceeds sub** field, enter the subaccount to post proceeds from the disposal of the asset. By default, the system uses the proceeds subaccount specified for the asset. 1. If you want to depreciate the asset up to the disposal period (in the current financial period), select the **Depreciate before disposal** check box. > [!NOTE] > The system can depreciate the asset automatically during disposal only if system is configured to release all transactions automatically. You can change the settings for release of transactions in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. Otherwise, you need to manually depreciate the asset before disposal. 1. Optional: In the **Reason** field, type the reason for disposal. 1. Click **OK** to dispose of the asset and close the dialog box. 1. Release the resulting transactions as directed by your company's workflow. [Release multiple fixed asset transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-multiple-fixed-asset-transactions/) For more information, see: The status of the disposed asset is changed from **Active** to **Disposed**. After asset disposal, the system automatically displays the following information on the **General settings** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window: the date of disposal, the disposal method, and the proceeds amount from the disposal of the asset.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Dispose of multiple assets /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/dispose-of-multiple-assets page By using the Dispose assets (FA505000) window, you can dispose of one asset or multiple assets at once. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dispose of multiple assets By using the Dispose assets (FA505000) window, you can dispose of one asset or multiple assets at once. For more information: [Dispose assets (FA505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/dispose-of-assets-fa505000/). You can dispose of multiple assets that are associated with the same branch if the disposal parameters are the same for all assets; the only parameter you may specify for each asset individually is the proceeds amount. 1. Go to the [Dispose assets (FA505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/dispose-of-assets-fa505000/) window. 1. In the top part, specify the selection criteria for the assets you may want to dispose of as follows: 1. In the **Asset class** field, select the asset class of the assets. 1. If you want to dispose of the components of an asset, select the parent asset in the **Parent asset** field. 1. Optional: In the **Book** field, select the book with which the assets are associated. The assets that meet the specified criteria are displayed in the table. If you don't see the asset or assets you want to dispose of, make needed changes to the selection criteria you have specified. 1. Specify the disposal parameters on the right side of the top part by doing the following: 1. In the **Disposal date** field, enter the date of the disposal. The current business date is used by default. 1. In the **Disposal period** field, enter the financial period of the disposal. By default, the current business period is used. 1. To split the total amount of the proceeds among all disposed assets equally, do the following: 1. In the **Disposal amount entry** field, select **Automatic**. 1. In the **Total proceeds amount** field, type the proceeds amount gained as a result of the disposal. 1. To enter the proceeds amount for each asset individually, in the **Disposal amount entry** field, select **Manual**. (You will enter these amounts in a later step.) 1. In the **Disposal method** field, select the disposal method. 1. In the **Proceeds account** field, enter the account to post proceeds from the disposal of the asset. By default, the system uses the proceeds account specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. 1. In the **Proceeds sub.** field, enter the subaccount to post proceeds from the disposal of the asset. By default, the system uses the proceeds subaccount specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. 1. If you want to depreciate the assets up to the disposal period (that is, in the current financial period), select the **Depreciate before disposal** check box. > [!NOTE] > The system can depreciate the assets automatically during disposal only if the system is configured to release fixed asset transactions automatically (if the **Automatically release depreciation transactions** check box is selected in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window). Otherwise, you need to manually depreciate the assets before disposal. 1. Optional: In the **Reason** field, type the reason for disposal. 1. To dispose of only selected assets, do the following: 1. For each transaction you want to release, select the appropriate **Selected** check box. 1. If you have opted to enter the proceeds amount for each asset manually, enter the proceeds amount in the **Proceeds amount** field for each selected asset. 1. Click **Process**. 1. To dispose of all listed assets, do the following: 1. If you have opted to enter the proceeds amount for each asset manually, enter the proceeds amount in the **Proceeds amount** field for every listed asset. 1. Click **Process all**. 1. Release the resulting transactions as dictated by your company's workflow. [Release multiple fixed asset transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-multiple-fixed-asset-transactions/) For more information, see: The status of the disposed assets is changed from **Active** to **Disposed**. After asset disposal, the system automatically displays the following information for every asset on the **General settings** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window: the date of disposal, the disposal method, and the proceeds amount from the disposal of the asset.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Reverse an asset disposal /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-disposals/reverse-an-asset-disposal page If you specified disposal parameters incorrectly, or erroneously disposed of an asset, you can reverse disposal by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse an asset disposal If you specified disposal parameters incorrectly, or erroneously disposed of an asset, you can reverse disposal by using the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the fixed asset whose disposal you want to reverse. 1. Select **Actions**, and then click **Reverse disposal**. 1. In the **Reverse disposal information dialog box**, specify the financial period for the reverse of disposal. 1. Click **OK**. 1. Release the resulting transactions as directed by your company's workflow. [Release a fixed asset transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-a-fixed-asset-transaction/) For more information, see: The disposal of the asset is reversed; the status of the asset is changed to **Active** . > [!NOTE] > The depreciation would not be reversed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Daily routines /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines section In these topics, you can find details about tasks that are performed regularly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Daily routines In these topics, you can find details about tasks that are performed regularly. Release a fixed asset transaction /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-a-fixed-asset-transaction page You can use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to release a transaction associated with a selected asset. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release a fixed asset transaction You can use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to release a transaction associated with a selected asset. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the fixed asset the unreleased transaction is associated with. 1. On the **Transaction history** tab, in the **Reference number** column, click the number of the unreleased transaction. This opens the [Fixed asset transactions (FA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-transactions-fa301000/) window for the selected unreleased transaction in a separate browser window. 1. Click **Release**. 1. After the transaction is released, close the window. 1. To refresh the status of the transaction, on the table toolbar of the **Transaction history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window, click **Refresh**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release multiple fixed asset transactions /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/release-multiple-fixed-asset-transactions page You can use the Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000) window to release the fixed asset transactions that have not been released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release multiple fixed asset transactions You can use the Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000) window to release the fixed asset transactions that have not been released. For more information: [Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/release-fixed-assets-transactions-fa503000/). You can use the [Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/release-fixed-assets-transactions-fa503000/) window to release the fixed asset transactions that have not been released. 1. Go to the [Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/release-fixed-assets-transactions-fa503000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Origin** field, select a transaction type to view only transactions of the selected type. 1. To release only particular listed transactions, do the following: 1. For each transaction you want to release, select the check boxes for these transactions in the list. 1. Click **Release**. 1. To release all listed transactions, click **Release all**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Delete an unreleased fixed asset transaction /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/delete-an-unreleased-fixed-asset-transaction section You can use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to delete an incorrect transaction (associated with a selected asset) that was not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete an unreleased fixed asset transaction You can use the Fixed assets (FA303000) window to delete an incorrect transaction (associated with a selected asset) that was not released. For more information: [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/). 1. Go to the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. 1. In the **Asset ID** field, select the fixed asset the incorrect transaction is associated with. 1. On the **Transaction history** tab, in the **Reference number** column, click the number of the unreleased transaction you want to delete. 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-delete-cross](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete-cross.png). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The deleted transaction is removed from the system.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Delete multiple unreleased fixed asset transactions /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/delete-multiple-unreleased-fixed-asset-transactions page You can use the Delete unreleased transactions (FA508000) window to delete the transactions that have not been released, one or several at a time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete multiple unreleased fixed asset transactions You can use the Delete unreleased transactions (FA508000) window to delete the transactions that have not been released, one or several at a time. For more information: [Delete unreleased transactions (FA508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/delete-unreleased-transactions-fa508000/). 1. Go to the [Delete unreleased transactions (FA508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/delete-unreleased-transactions-fa508000/) window. 1. To delete only specific transactions in the list, do the following: 1. For each transaction that you want to delete, select the appropriate **Selected** check box. 1. Click **Process**. 1. To delete all listed transactions, click **Process all**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Close financial period /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/daily-routines/close-financial-period page To close a financial period, use the Close financial periods (FA509000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial period To close a financial period, use the Close financial periods (FA509000) window. For more information: [Close financial periods (FA509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/close-financial-periods-fa509000/). To close a financial period, use the [Close financial periods (FA509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/close-financial-periods-fa509000/) window. You can only close a financial period if there no unreleased transactions for it; you can check this by using the [Unreleased fixed assets documents (FA651000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/unreleased-fixed-assets-documents-fa651000/) report. ## Before you begin In accordance with your company's policies, you might need to take the following steps before you close a financial period in the Fixed assets workspace: 1. Make sure all the assets that must be depreciated are depreciated in the period to be closed. 1. Make sure there are no unreleased transactions for the period. 1. Go to the [Close financial periods (FA509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/close-financial-periods-fa509000/) window. 1. In the table, select the appropriate check boxes to specify the financial periods you want to close. To select all the displayed active periods for closing, click the selected check box in the column header. 1. Click **Close periods** in the toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Books and Book calendars /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars section In Visma Net, books are used to record fixed asset transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Books and Book calendars In Visma Net, books are used to record fixed asset transactions. In Visma Net, books are used to record fixed asset transactions. Every asset must be assigned to at least one book that will hold the transaction history of the asset. You may need to depreciate an asset by using different depreciation methods at the same time, for example, for reporting and statistical purposes. For this, you can configure multiple books in the in the [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/) window, and then assign one book or multiple books to an asset. ## Configuring books For each book, you specify the book title and the rules for determining the middle of the period to be used for averaging conventions For more information, see: [About averaging conventions](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-averaging-conventions/) + In the [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/) window, you also define a book, which will be used as the **posting book** or transactions recorded in this book will update the general ledger accounts. For this book, you select the **Update general ledger** check box. + Only one book can be specified as the posting one. + The posting book uses the financial year structure configured in the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window. + Do not change the posting book after you have created fixed assets associated with this book. + In the [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/) window, you can also create any number of non-posting books (those that do not update the general ledger accounts). + For such books, you leave the **Update GL** check box cleared. Once you have created a non-posting book, you need to set up a structure of the calendar to be used for this book. Once the structure is defined, you can generate a book calendar in the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window. ## Creating a book calendar For each book, you need to generate a book calendar in the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window. + Before generating a calendar for a non-posting book, you should define the structure of the calendar in the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window by specifying the start calendar date and the type of the periods to be used in this calendar. Then, in the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window, you generate a calendar for a selected book which will be based on the calendar structure that you have defined. + You do not need to configure a calendar structure for a posting book in the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. You just process the generation of the calendar in the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window, which will be based on the general ledger calendar structure. + A calendar is used to record depreciation expenses according to the calendar periods. If you want to depreciate assets over a particular number of years, you must create book calendars accordingly. ## Setting up book calendar periods The book calendar year is divided into periods, which may have equal or different durations. The total length of all periods may or may not be equal to the year. You can set up the calendar periods for non-posting book by using the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. + When setting up periods, you can select an option based on months or weeks, or you can define custom-length periods. + If you select one of the options based on months ( **Month**, **Two months**, or **Quarter** ), the periods will start and end on the same dates each year, and each successive financial year will start and end on the same date. + However, if you define periods by using an option based on weeks ( **Week**, **Two weeks**, **Four weeks**, **4-4-5 weeks**, **4-5-4 weeks**, or **5-4-4 weeks** ), the start and end dates of same-name periods will vary with the year, and the number of periods per year may vary. + Periods based on weeks start on the same day of the week and end on the same day of the week. However, a calendar year has 365 or 366 days, while the maximum length of the year with periods based on weeks is 364 days. + For a book calendar year based on the **4-4-5**, **4-5-4**, or **5-4-4** option, the system automatically adds an additional week to the last period if the gap between the end of the book calendar year and the end of the last period exceeds three days. + For a book calendar year with week-long periods, to process the difference between the length of a calendar year and the length of all week-long periods, the system uses the **Last day of the financial year** method. That is, the system adds an additional (fifty-third) week-length period if the last period ends four or more days earlier than the financial year ends. If the last period ends fewer than four days earlier, no additional period is added. For more information about adding a calendar, see: [Configure a book calendar](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/configure-a-book-calendar/) or [Configure a book calendar with week-based periods](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/configure-a-book-calendar-with-week-based-periods/) For more information about generating periods for book calendars, see: [Generate periods for a book calendar](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/generate-periods-for-a-book-calendar/) ## Shifting of the first book calendar year Fixed assets may have a long useful life. For example: Buildings can be used for decades. + If your company owns an asset whose depreciation started before you started working with Visma Net, you may want to configure a book calendar to start when the asset depreciation started. + You can shift the first year of the book calendar one year earlier and then generate periods for the added year. For more information, see:[Shift the first year one year earlier](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/shift-the-first-year-one-year-earlier/) ## Deleting a book In the [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/) window, you can delete the selected book by clicking **Delete row** on the table toolbar. + The book can be deleted only if there are no transactions posted in the selected book. + Once the book is deleted, the calendar generated for this book in the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window will be deleted as well. Add a book /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/add-a-book section You can set up depreciation books for fixed assets by using the Books (FA205000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a book You can set up depreciation books for fixed assets by using the Books (FA205000) window. For more information: [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/). You can set up depreciation books for fixed assets by using the [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/) window. You then assign one book or multiple books to an asset class, depending on your company policy. 1. Go to the [Books (FA205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) 1. In the **Book ID** column, type a short name of the book. 1. In the **Description** column, type the description of the book. 1. If you want to make a posting book, select the **Update general ledger** check box. > [!NOTE] > You can select only one book for posting. 1. Select the mid-period type for the book. 1. Specify the mid-period day. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After you add a new non-posting book, set up a calendar for the book by using the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. For more information, see: [Configure a book calendar](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/configure-a-book-calendar/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Configure a book calendar with week-based periods /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/configure-a-book-calendar-with-week-based-periods section You add a book calendar for each non-posting book you add to the system by using the Book calendars (FA206000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a book calendar with week-based periods You add a book calendar for each non-posting book you add to the system by using the Book calendars (FA206000) window. For more information: [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/). You add a book calendar for each non-posting book you add to the system by using the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. For each calendar, you have to define the parameters of the financial year, including its starting and ending dates and its periods. 1. Go to the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. 1. In the **Book** field, select the book for which you want to set up a book calendar. 1. Set up the first year of the book calendar: 1. In the **Year starts on** field, select the date for the start of the book calendar year. 1. If the start date of the book year belongs to the next financial year, select the **Belongs to next year** check box. The system then determines the first calendar year. 1. To define periods, in the **Period type** field, select **Week**. 1. In the **Periods start day of week** field, select the day of week on which periods will start. 1. Select the **Add adjustment period** check box if you want the system to generate an adjustment period. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure a book calendar /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/configure-a-book-calendar page You add a book calendar for each non-posting book that you add to the system by using the Book calendars (FA206000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a book calendar You add a book calendar for each non-posting book that you add to the system by using the Book calendars (FA206000) window. For more information: [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/). You add a book calendar for each non-posting book that you add to the system by using the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. For each calendar, you have to define the parameters of the financial year, including its starting and ending dates and its periods. 1. Go to the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. 1. In the **Book** field, select the book for which you want to set up a book calendar. 1. In the **Financial year starts on** field, specify the starting date of the first financial year in which your company wants to keep records in Visma Net. 1. In the **First financial year** field, review the first year based on the starting date. If you want to change the first financial year, change the starting date, as described in Step 3. > [!NOTE] > If you plan to start recording operations at the very start of the financial year, select the previous year as the first financial year. This will allow you to enter initial account balances in the period before the first period of actual transactions. 1. To set up the first year of the book calendar, in the **Year starts on** field, select the date for the start of the book calendar year. The system then determines the first book calendar year. 1. In the **First financial year** field, specify the first year in which your company wants to keep records in Visma Net. > [!NOTE] > If you plan to start recording operations at the very start of the financial year, choose the previous year as the first financial year. This will allow you to enter initial account balances in the period before the first period of actual transactions. 1. If the start date of the book year belongs to the next financial year, select the **Belongs to next year** check box. 1. To define the periods of the year, in the **Period type** field, select one of the following options: + **Month**: Each period lasts one month, and there are 12 periods per year. + **Two months**: Each period lasts two months, and there are 6 periods per year. + **Quarter**: Each period lasts a quarter, and there are 3 periods per year. 1. Select the **Adjust to period start** check box if the period is to be aligned with the starting and ending dates of the corresponding calendar period. 1. Select the **Add adjustment period** check box if you want the system to generate an adjustment period. 1. In the toolbar, click **Generate periods**. 1. If the periods have not been generated as you expected, click **Delete** in the toolbar to remove the generated periods; then adjust the settings and click **Generate periods** to regenerate periods. 1. Click **Save**. Generate periods for a book calendar /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/generate-periods-for-a-book-calendar page You can generate periods for book calendars by using the Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate periods for a book calendar You can generate periods for book calendars by using the Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000) window. For more information: [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/). ## Before you proceed Make sure the book calendar and its periods have been configured by using the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. 1. Go to the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window. 1. In the **Generate through year** field, type the last estimated year through which you want to generate calendars. 1. To generate periods for particular book calendars, do the following: 1. In the table, select the book calendars by selecting the appropriate check boxes. 1. In the toolbar, click **Process**. 1. To generate periods for all book calendars, click **Process all** in the toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Shift the first year one year earlier /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/books-and-book-calendars/shift-the-first-year-one-year-earlier section If a fixed asset was acquired before your company started using Visma Net and you need the depreciation to be posted before the system start date, you can shift the first book calendar one year earlier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shift the first year one year earlier If a fixed asset was acquired before your company started using Visma Net and you need the depreciation to be posted before the system start date, you can shift the first book calendar one year earlier. You can shift the first year by using the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window, and then generate periods for the book calendar in the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window. 1. Go to the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. 1. In the **Book** field, select the book whose book calendar you want to shift. 1. On the toolbar, click **Shift the first year**. This brings up a message that warns you about the consequences of such an action. > [!CAUTION] > Shifting the first year to an earlier date can affect statistics and data on reports. 1. Click **Yes** to shift the first year and close the message field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) 1. Go to the [Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000/) window. 1. In the table, select the book calendar for which you shifted the first year. 1. In the **Generate through year** field, type the year after the last year through which the book calendar has been generated. 1. In the toolbar, click **Process**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Fixed asset windows /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset windows Account balance by assets (FA401000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/account-balance-by-assets-fa401000 page In this window, you can view the balance of the selected account (and subaccount, if any) that was accumulated by means of fixed assets linked to that account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account balance by assets (FA401000) In this window, you can view the balance of the selected account (and subaccount, if any) that was accumulated by means of fixed assets linked to that account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the balance of the selected account (and subaccount, if any) that was accumulated by means of fixed assets linked to that account. The table in this window shows the list of fixed assets with the balances posted to the selected account from the time when the asset had been placed in service through the specified financial period (**Inception to date**), from the beginning of the year through the specified financial period (**Year to date**) and during the specified financial period (**Period to date**). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Asset transaction history For the asset you have clicked in the table, opens the Asset transaction history (FA404000) window, where you can view all transactions of a particular fixed asset recorded to the specified account and subaccount.
## The top part In this part, you can specify the criteria to determine the data shown in the table.
Element Description
Account The account whose balance (split by fixed assets) will be shown in the table below.
Subaccount

The subaccount used with the selected account.

This field is available only if the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period

The ending financial period that will be used to define the asset balances displayed in the table area.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
Book The posting book to which the assets to be viewed are assigned.
Branch

The branch which the account information covers.

By default, the current branch is selected.
Balance by assets The total balance of all fixed assets listed in the table at the end of the financial period selected in the Fin. period field. This amount is equal to the sum of the amounts shown in the Inception to date column in the table below.
## The table The table displays the list of assets whose cost and accumulated depreciation is posted in the selected account (and subaccount, if any).
Column Description
Asset ID The identifier that defines the asset in the system.
Description The description of the asset.
Status The status of the asset.
Asset class The asset class to which the asset is assigned.
Date placed in service The date when the asset has been placed in use. This date is recorded in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
Branch The branch the asset is assigned to.
Department The department the asset is assigned to.
Year to date

The year-to-date (YTD) amount, which is one of the following:

For the fixed asset account
The asset cost added from the beginning of the selected year through the financial period you have specified in the top part.
For the accumulated depreciation account
The amount of depreciation accumulated from the beginning of the selected year through the financial period you have specified in the to part.
Period to date

The period-to-date (PTD) amount, which is one of the following:

For the fixed asset account
The asset cost added during the selected period.
For the accumulated depreciation account
The amount of depreciation accumulated through the selected period.

Related pages

Windows

 Asset balance by accounts (FA403000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/asset-balance-by-accounts-fa403000 page In this window, you can view the balance of the selected fixed asset on all accounts used by this fixed asset by the end of the selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Asset balance by accounts (FA403000) In this window, you can view the balance of the selected fixed asset on all accounts used by this fixed asset by the end of the selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the balance of the selected fixed asset on all accounts used by this fixed asset by the end of the selected financial period. The table shows the list of accounts with the asset balances from the asset placed-in-service date through the specified financial period, from the beginning of the year through the specified financial period (**Year to date**), and during the specified financial period (**Period to date**). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Asset transaction history For the account you have clicked in the table, opens the Asset transaction history (FA404000) window, where you can view all transactions of a particular fixed asset recorded to the specified account-subaccount pair.
## The top part Here, you can select a fixed asset and the book and the ending financial period for which you want to view the asset balances.
Element Description
Asset ID The fixed asset whose information you want to view.
Period

The financial period through which you want to view the asset balances.

By default, the current business period is selected.
Book

The book from which you want to view the asset balances.

By default, the posting book is selected.
## The table This area displays asset balances for each account (and subaccount, if any) to which fixed asset transactions were posted by the end of the specified financial period.
Column Description
Book The book to which the asset is assigned.
Account The account which asset balance is shown.
Account description The description of the account.
Subaccount

The subaccount to which the asset balance is recorded.

This column is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Subaccount description The description of the subaccount.
Branch The branch to which the asset information relates.
Total amount The total amount of the account.
Year to date The year-to-date (YTD) amount, which is the cumulative total of the asset cost (for the fixed asset account) or the total accumulated depreciation amount (for the accumulated depreciation account) from the beginning of the current year through the financial period you have specified in the top part.
Period to date The period-to-date (PTD) amount, which is the total of the asset cost (for the fixed asset account) or the depreciation amount (for the accumulated depreciation account) posted in the selected period.

Related pages

Windows

 Asset splits (FA405000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/asset-splits-fa405000 page In this window, you can view split transactions for a specific fixed asset. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Asset splits (FA405000) In this window, you can view split transactions for a specific fixed asset. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The split transactions are displayed in the normalised window. ## The top part In this area, you can select the fixed asset and the book for which you want to view split transactions.
Element Description
Fixed asset The fixed asset for which transactions should be displayed.
Book The book the transactions were posted to.
## The table The table displays a list of split transactions based on the selection criteria that you have specified.
Column Description
Asset The name of the fixed asset.
Book The book the transactions were posted to.
Reference number The reference number associated with the specific journal entry.
Trans. date The date of the transaction.
Trans. period The financial period in the book to which the transaction was posted.
Transaction type A brief description of the transaction. For more information, see: About types of fixed asset transactions
Account The account affected by the transaction.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used for such transactions.
Debit The debit amount of the split transaction in the base currency.
Credit The credit amount of the split transaction in the base currency.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Asset summary (FA402000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/asset-summary-fa402000 page In this window, you can view the list of assets existing in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Asset summary (FA402000) In this window, you can view the list of assets existing in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can filter the list of assets by any of the available selection elements. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to filter the list of assets to be listed in the table in the window.
Element Description
Asset class The class of the fixed assets you want to view.
Asset type The fixed asset type, such as Building, Land, Vehicle, Machinery, Equipment, Computers, Furniture, Software, Goodwill, Patents, or Copyrights.
Property type

The way the assets were acquired. The following options are available:

Property
Indicates that the assets were acquired in a typical way (for example, through a purchase).
Grant property
Indicates that the assets were acquired as a gift.
Leased
Indicates that the assets were leased from a lessor.
Leased to others
Indicates that the assets, which your company owns, are available to be leased.
Rented
Indicates that your company rented the assets from a landlord.
Rented to others
Indicates that the assets, which your company owns, are available to be rented.
To the credit of
Indicates that the assets were bought on credit.
Condition The condition of the assets. The following options are available: Good, Average, or Poor.
Date placed in service from The date when the assets were put into service.
To The end date of the date range within which the assets were put into service.
Branch The company branch to which the asset is assigned.
Building The building where the assets are located.
Floor The floor number where the assets are located.
Room The room number where the assets are located.
Custodian The employee ID of the person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe.
Department The department to which the assets belong.
Purchase order no. The number of the purchase order related to the purchase receipt document.
Receipt no. The ID of the purchase receipt document for the assets.
Invoice no. The number of the purchase invoice from the supplier for the assets.
## The table This table lists the fixed assets that match the criteria you specified in the Selection area and provides basic details about them.
Column Description
Asset ID The ID of the fixed asset.
Description The description of the fixed asset.
Asset class The asset class to which the asset belongs.
Parent asset The applicable parent asset of the asset.
Asset type The particular type of the fixed asset. (The options are listed above.)
Useful life, years The period of time (in years) the asset is expected to be used.
Date placed in service The date when the asset was put into service and from which the asset can be depreciated.
Orig. acquisition cost The amount that was spent to acquire the asset. This amount depends on the way the asset was acquired.
Property type The way the asset was acquired. (The options are listed above.)
Condition The condition of the asset: Good, Average, or Poor.
Receipt no. The applicable purchase receipt document.
Purchase order no. The purchase order related to the purchase receipt.
Invoice no. The number of the purchase invoice that was received from the supplier of the asset.
Branch The branch of the company to which the asset is assigned.
Building The building where the asset is located.
Floor The floor number where the asset is located.
Room The room number where the asset is located.
Custodian The ID of the person who is responsible for keeping the asset safe.
Department The department the asset belongs to.

Related pages

Tasks

 Asset transaction history (FA404000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/asset-transaction-history-fa404000 page In this window, you can get a detailed view of the transaction history of a specific asset for the selected account (and subaccount, if any) within the specified range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Asset transaction history (FA404000) In this window, you can get a detailed view of the transaction history of a specific asset for the selected account (and subaccount, if any) within the specified range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part In this area, you can specify the criteria for selecting the transactions to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Asset ID The fixed asset for which transactions will be displayed.
From period

The starting financial period in the range of periods the history will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
To period

The ending financial period in the range of periods the history will cover.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
Book

The book which asset transactions you want to view.

By default, the Fixed asset posting book is selected.
Account The account which asset transactions you want to view.
Subaccount

The subaccount used for such transactions.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The table This table displays transactions that match the selection criteria you have specified.
Column Description
Book The book in which the transaction is posted.
Reference number The reference number, which identifies the transaction document in the system.
Batch no. The identifier of the general ledger batch.
Trans. date The date of the transaction.
Trans. period The financial period in the book to which the transaction is posted.
Branch The branch to which the transaction is related.
Transaction type

The type of the transaction.

For more information, see: About types of fixed asset transactions
Transaction description The description of the transaction.
Debit The debit amount of the transaction (if any).
Credit The credit amount of the transaction (if any).
Account The account to which the transaction amount is posted.
Subaccount

The subaccount to which the transaction amount is posted.

This column is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Bonuses (FA208000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/bonuses-fa208000 page In this window, you can create, view, edit, and delete bonuses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Bonuses (FA208000) In this window, you can create, view, edit, and delete bonuses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can specify bonus rates, relevant date ranges, and maximum bonus amounts for each bonus. Once you create bonuses, you can assign them to depreciation books in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can specify general information about a new bonus or select an existing bonus to view or edit its details.
Element Description
Bonus ID The unique ID of the bonus.
Description A description of the bonus.
## The table In this table, you can create a list of bonus rates, relevant date ranges, and maximum bonus amounts.
Column Description
Start date The start date of the date range of the bonus. A bonus amount reduces the depreciable basis if the start depreciation date (specified in the Depr. from column in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window is within the date range.
End date The end date of the date range of the bonus. A bonus amount reduces the depreciable basis if the start depreciation date is within this date range.
Bonus, % The bonus rate (expressed as a percentage of the depreciable basis). The bonus rate is used to calculate the bonus amount as the acquisition cost multiplied by the bonus rate.
Max. bonus The maximum allowable amount of the bonus.

Related pages

Windows

 Book calendars (FA206000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000 page In this window, you can set up calendars for non-posting books and view, edit, and delete the existing calendars. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Book calendars (FA206000) In this window, you can set up calendars for non-posting books and view, edit, and delete the existing calendars. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You create a calendar for every depreciation book that does not update the general l edger. The system uses the calendar and records depreciation expenses according to the depreciation schedule. By default, the same configuration of a year and its periods will be used for the first year and all subsequent years. For more information about configuring fixed asset depreciation in Visma Net, see: [About depreciation of fixed assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-of-fixed-assets/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Generate periods Creates the periods for a new year in accordance with the settings of the year.
Shift the first year Shifts the first year of the assets life one year earlier (if, for example, you want to start depreciating an asset before you acquire it).
Delete book periods Deletes the periods of a book. You can delete periods in a book only if there are no transactions in these periods.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select a non-posting depreciation book and set up a calendar for it, or to view or edit the settings of an existing calendar. > [!NOTE] > If a depreciation book updates the general ledger, it uses the financial periods defined for the general ledger.
Element Description
Book The identifier of the depreciation book to which the calendar is assigned. Select a book from the list of books available in the system.
First year The first year that your company wants to keep records in Visma Net for this calendar. To start recording operations at the very beginning of the financial year and to post beginning balances for the accounts, specify the previous year for this field and post balances for the last period of the previous financial year for this calendar.
Year starts on

The date when the financial year starts for the calendar.

By default, this field displays the current date.
Belongs to next year A check box that indicates (if selected) that the start date of the year belongs to the next financial year. Select this option if the next financial year starts in the current year. For example: If the 2024 financial year starts on September 1, 2023.
Period type

The type of financial periods. The following options are available:

Month
Financial periods are created on a monthly basis (12 periods per year).
Two months
Financial periods are created on a bimonthly basis (6 periods per year).
Quarter
Financial periods are created on a quarterly basis (3 periods per year).
Week
Financial periods are defined as lasting one week (52 or 53 periods per year).
Two weeks
Financial periods last two weeks (26 or 27 periods per year).
Four weeks
Financial periods have a duration of four weeks (13 or 14 periods per year).
Custom number of periods
A user-defined number of financial periods is used with a custom duration.
Custom-length periods
Periods have user-defined durations, and the number of periods may change with the year.
Day of week The week day the period starts. This box appears only when you select the Week period type.
Start first period The date when the first period starts.
Adjust to period start

A check box that aligns (if selected) the start and end dates of financial periods with the start and end dates of the corresponding calendar period.

This check box appears for the following period types: Month, Two months, and Quarter.

For example: With this check box selected, if the start date of the financial year is March 10 and the period type is Monthly, the first period will start on March 1, and if the period type is Quarterly, the first period will start on January 1. If this check box were not selected, then the first period will start (as the financial year) on March 10.
Number of periods

The total number of financial periods within a year for the calendar.

By default, the number of periods is zero. If you selected the Custom period type, enter the number periods in one year.

For the other period types, the number of periods is generated automatically.
Use adjustment period

A check box that you select to add an adjustment period or an additional period for posting adjustments. The adjustment period will have the same start and end date and will be the last period in the financial year. For journal transactions, an adjustment period is available only for manual selection.

This field does not appear for the Custom period types.
## The table In the table, you can view the list of financial periods for the selected depreciation book. The financial periods must have consecutive numbers; thus, each time you need to delete a period, you can delete only the last one. > [!NOTE] > You cannot delete a financial period if any released journal transactions are associated with the period.
Column Description
Period no. The system-generated two-digit unique identifier of a period within a financial year, which indicates the order of the period.
Start date The system-generated date when the period starts, which is generated according the settings specified at the top part.
End date The system-generated date when the period ends, which is generated according the settings specified at the top part.
Description

The description of the financial period.

By default, this column contains the number of the period within a financial year (for example, Period# 01 ) or the name of the month, but it can be overwritten.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Books (FA205000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/books-fa205000 page In this window, you can create, edit, or delete depreciation books for fixed assets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Books (FA205000) In this window, you can create, edit, or delete depreciation books for fixed assets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create, edit, or delete depreciation books for fixed assets. Also, you use this window to select the posting book that updates the general ledger. All depreciable assets must be assigned to the posting book. You can also assign depreciable assets to multiple depreciation books, if needed. For more information about configuring fixed asset depreciation settings in Visma Net, see: [About depreciation of fixed assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-of-fixed-assets/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Calendar

Navigates to the Book calendars (FA206000) window where you can set up a calendar for the selected book.

You can set up a calendar for non-posting book only.
## The table This table displays all the depreciation books defined in the system and their properties.
Column Description
Book ID The identifier for the book, up to 10 characters.
Description A brief description of the book.
Update general ledger

A check box that indicates (if selected) that transactions recorded in this book are posted to the general ledger. The posting book uses the general ledger calendar structure.

Note

Only one book can be set up as the posting book.

For a non-posting book (with the Update general ledger check box cleared), you should set up a calendar structure in the Book calendars (FA206000) window (that opens if you click Calendar in the window toolbar).

Note

If a calendar structure has been already configured for a non-posting book in the Book calendars (FA206000) window, this book cannot be specified as the posting one. That is, the Update general ledger check box is not available for selection.
Mid period type

The rule defining the middle of the period to be used for averaging conventions.

The averaging convention, which determines how fixed assets will be depreciated for periods within which assets were acquired or disposed of, is selected on the Depreciation settings tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. Financial periods can start from any date of a calendar month and last for one, two, or three months. Select one of the following options:

Fixed day
Used to set a particular date (which you specify in the Day in mid period column) as the last day of the first half of the period.
Number of days
Used when you specify the number of days (which you specify in the Day in mid period column) the system will add to the first date of the calendar month to calculate the last day of the first half of the period.
Day in mid period

The needed day to set the middle of a financial period. The option you have selected in the Day in mid period column determines how you specify the value in this column:

  • If you have selected Fixed day in the Mid period type column: Specify the particular date of a period as the last day of the first half of the period in this column. For example: If you specify 10 in this column, the 10th day of the period will be the last one in the first half of the period.
  • If you have selected Number of days in the Mid period type column: Specify the number of days the system will add to the first date of the calendar month to calculate the last day of the first half of the period. For example: If you specify 10 in this column with the Number of days option selected in the Mid period type column, for a financial period starting on the second day of a calendar month, the 12th day of the month will be the last one in the first half of the period.
First calendar year Read-only. The year that starts the book calendar.
Last calendar year The last year for generating the calendar of the book.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Calculate depreciation (FA502000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/calculate-depreciation-fa502000 page By using this window, you can project depreciation and depreciate fixed assets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate depreciation (FA502000) By using this window, you can project depreciation and depreciate fixed assets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can view the calculated depreciation on the **Depreciation history** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process specified in the Action field for the fixed assets you have selected in the table.
Process all Initiates the process specified in the Action field for all fixed assets listed in the table.
Schedules

In the drop-down list you have the following options:

  • Add Once a schedule is added to this window, the following options are also available:

This opens the Automation schedules (SM205020) window as a pop-up. Here you can create and add automation schedules. For more information, see: Schedule processing.

  • History
  • Delete
  • Delete all
  • View
## The top part In this area, you can specify the criteria to select the records to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
To period

The financial period that ends the period range for which you want to calculate depreciation expenses.

If no value is specified, the Calculate only option is selected by default in the Action field, and this field is unavailable for editing.
Action

The following options are available:

  • Calculate only:

Calculates depreciation expenses for the assets selected in the table or for all assets shown in the table (depending on whether you click Process or Process a ll in the window toolbar).

For each fixed asset, you can view the amounts in the Calculated column on the Depreciation history tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.

  • Depreciate:

Calculates depreciation expenses and generates Calculated+ transactions for the assets selected in the table or for all assets shown in the table (depending on whether you click Process or Process all in the window toolbar).

Once these transactions are released, their type automatically changes to Depreciation+.

For each fixed asset, you can view the amounts in the Depreciated column on the Depreciation history tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
Branch The branch of the company to which the assets to be displayed are assigned.
Asset class The fixed asset class to which the assets to be displayed are assigned.
Parent asset The parent asset to which the assets to be displayed are assigned. A fixed asset can have only one parent asset.
Book The book to which the assets to be displayed are assigned.
## The table In the table, you can view the list of fixed assets that meet the criteria specified in the top part. For all listed assets or only those you select, you can perform actions to calculate depreciation and create (and, optionally, release) the related transactions.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the company where the asset is located.
Fixed asset The fixed asset, by its identifier.
Description The description of the asset.
Asset class The fixed asset class to which the fixed asset belongs.
Parent asset The parent asset to which the fixed asset is assigned.
Book The book to which the fixed asset is assigned.
Current period

The financial period starting from which the asset can be depreciated.

If this column is empty, the acquisition transaction of the asset has not been released yet; hence, you cannot depreciate the asset.
Basis

The depreciable basis, which is the amount that is allocated over the useful life of the asset.

This is a system-generated value; the amount of the depreciable basis depends on the depreciation method applied. For some methods, the basis can be equal to the acquisition cost minus the salvage amount. Also, you can adjust the basis amount based on the percentage of business use, and the bonus amount.
Receipt date The date of the purchase receipt document, or the date when the asset was acquired.
Useful life, years The period of time, in calendar years, during which the asset is supposed to be used.
Fixed assets account The Fixed assets account (an asset account) used to post the actual costs of the fixed asset.
Fixed assets sub. The subaccount for the associated Fixed assets account.
Tag number

The tag number of the asset.

In the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window, the tag number can be the same as the asset ID.
Account class The class of the fixed assets account.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Close financial periods (FA509000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/close-financial-periods-fa509000 page By using this window, you can close active financial periods in the Fixed assets workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (FA509000) By using this window, you can close active financial periods in the Fixed assets workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can close active financial periods in the Fixed assets workspace. A financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well. Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. You permit it by selecting the **Allow posting to closed periods** option in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Starts the process of closing the selected financial periods.

The green OK icon appears if the closing operation has completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because critical conditions were not met.
Unreleased documents Opens the Unreleased fixed assets documents (FA651000) report, which shows you the documents that must be closed before you can close the financial period.
Show fixed assets

Opens the Non-depreciated fixed assets (FA652000) report to display open documents for the period.

This action is available for only periods that have open documents.
## The table The table of periods displays all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. Select one or more periods for closing, and then click **Close periods**. A period can be closed only if there are no documents with the **On hold**, **Balanced**, and **Released** statuses to be posted to this period.
Column Description
Financial period ID The identifier of the financial period.
Description The description of the financial period.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is active.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Convert purchases to assets (FA504500) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500 page By using this window, you can convert purchased items to fixed assets or define the items as components of a specific fixed asset in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Convert purchases to assets (FA504500) By using this window, you can convert purchased items to fixed assets or define the items as components of a specific fixed asset in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can convert purchased items to fixed assets or define the items as components of a specific fixed asset in the system. If a transaction includes multiple units of a purchased item, you can convert fewer units into fixed assets than this quantity. For more information about how to convert purchased items to fixed assets, see: [About fixed asset entry](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-assets/fixed-asset-entry/about-fixed-asset-entry/) To prepare for the conversion of purchases to fixed assets, when you create the invoices for purchases based on requisitions, you should use the fixed asset accrual accounts and subaccounts that are specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Based on your selections in this window, processes the lines you have selected in the lower table and creates new fixed assets or new components of the specified assets.
Process all Based on your selections in this window, processes all the lines in the lower table and creates new fixed assets or new components of the specified assets.
## The top part Select the details, such as the accrual account used for fixed assets and the appropriate subaccount to display the purchase transactions in the upper table. If you need to assign certain selected items to different branches, custodians, or departments, you can specify these details for each item in the respective row of the upper table. You can also specify different branches, custodians, or departments for each unit of the item in the lower table.
Element Description
Account

The asset account of the purchase transactions that should be converted into fixed assets.

By default, this account is the fixed asset accrual account specified in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window.
Subaccount

The subaccount of the purchase transactions.

By default, this subaccount is the fixed asset accrual subaccount specified in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window.
Show transactions marked as reconciled A check box that you select to view transactions marked as Reconciled.
Branch The branch of the organisation to which the new fixed assets will be assigned.
Custodian The person who will be responsible for the new fixed assets.
Department The department to which the new fixed assets will belong.
## The upper table This table displays the transactions from purchase receipts. If you select a transaction in this table, you can specify the conversion details in the lower table.
Column Description
Selected An unlabelled check box that you can select to include the purchase if you click Process. Leave the check box clear for the purchases you don’t want to convert.
Asset class The asset class to which the new fixed assets will be assigned by default. If multiple assets should be created and assigned to different classes, you can enter these details in the lower table.
Reconciled A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction was reconciled.
Branch The branch of the organisation where the selected quantity of the item will be placed if the transaction is processed.
Custodian The person who will be responsible for the selected quantity of the item when the item is converted into fixed assets.
Department The department to which the selected quantity of the item will belong after its conversion into fixed assets.
Transaction branch The branch whose balance is updated by the conversion transaction.
Item ID The item ID of the item to be converted into fixed assets.
UoM The unit of measure used for this stock item.
Selected quantity The quantity of the stock item that will be converted to new fixed assets. This value is automatically updated as you specify details for this stock item in the lower table.
Selected amount The total cost of the selected quantity of the stock item. This amount is equal to the selected quantity multiplied by the unit cost.
Open quantity The difference between the quantity specified in the transaction and the selected quantity.
Open amount The total cost of the open quantity of the stock item, which is calculated as the difference between the original amount and the sum of the amounts specified in the lower table.
Orig. quantity The original quantity, which is the number of units of the purchased item.
Unit cost The cost per unit, according to the invoice.
Orig. amount The total cost of the item, according to the transaction. This amount is calculated as the unit cost multiplied by the original quantity.
Transaction date The date of the transaction.
Module The two-letter identifier of the workspace that is the origin of the transaction.
Batch number The identifier of the batch generated for the transaction.
Ref. no. The external or internal reference number associated with the transaction.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier that is associated with the transaction.
Transaction description The description of the transaction.
## The lower table This table provides a list of units of the item selected for conversion in the upper table. In this table, you can assign new assets (converted from units of the item selected in the upper table) to classes, associate new assets with their parent assets, and specify the department, location, and custodian for the converted assets.
Column Description
New asset

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected unit of the stock item will be a new asset.

This asset will have no parent asset if the Component check box is cleared. If the Component check box is selected, select a parent asset. Clear the New asset check box if the selected unit of the stock item will be another unit of an existing fixed asset, which you specify in the Asset column.
Component A check box that you select to indicate that this unit of the stock item will be a component of the asset specified in the Asset column.
Asset class The class with which the new asset is associated.
Asset ID The unique identifier for the new fixed asset, which can be assigned automatically or manually.
Quantity The quantity of the new fixed asset.
Asset

A value that has different meanings depending on whether the New asset and Component check boxes are selected:

  • If both check boxes are selected, this column displays the asset ID of the parent asset for this new asset. A fixed asset can have any number of components.
  • If New Asset is selected and Component is cleared, this column is unavailable.
  • If both check boxes are cleared (if New asset is cleared, Components is unavailable), this column refers to an existing asset; after processing, the number of units of this asset will increased by one. That is, the selected unit of the item will be added to the quantity of this asset.
Branch The branch of the organisation to which the selected quantity of the item will be assigned.
Custodian The person who will be responsible for the selected unit of the item when it is converted into a fixed asset.
Department The department to which the selected unit of the item will belong.
Transaction type

The type of the transaction. The following option is available: Purchasing +.

With this transaction, the asset cost asset is transferred from the fixed asset accrual account that is specified in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window to the default fixed asset account specified for the asset class.
Receipt date The date of the purchase receipt document.
Date placed in service The date when an asset will be placed in use and from which this asset will be depreciated.
Tran. date

The date of the Purchasing + transaction. For more information, see: About types of fixed asset transactions

By default, the date of the purchase document is used (the date that is specified in the Receipt date field).
Tran. period The financial period to which the purchasing transaction should be posted. The period of the transaction date is used.
Transaction amount The amount of the transaction or the cost of the asset.
Transaction description The description of the asset.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Delete unreleased transactions (FA508000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/delete-unreleased-transactions-fa508000 page In this window, you can delete fixed assets documents that contain unreleased transactions before these transactions can be released in the Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete unreleased transactions (FA508000) In this window, you can delete fixed assets documents that contain unreleased transactions before these transactions can be released in the Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000) window. For more information: [Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/release-fixed-assets-transactions-fa503000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can delete fixed assets documents that contain unreleased transactions before these transactions can be released in the [Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/release-fixed-assets-transactions-fa503000/) window. It is recommended to delete empty transaction documents that may be generated by the system. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Delete Deletes the transactions you have selected in the table.
Delete all Deletes all the listed transactions.
## The table This table displays a list of all fixed assets documents that contain unreleased transactions. Select the documents that you want to delete, and then click **Process** or **Process all.**
Column Description
Reference number The number identifying the transaction document in the system.
Document date The date when the transaction document was created. By default, the current date is specified, but you can change it.
Origin

A read-only column that indicates the way the transaction was entered into the system:

Adjustment
An adjusting transaction.
Purchasing
A fixed asset acquisition transaction.
Depreciation
A fixed asset depreciation transaction.
Disposal
A fixed asset disposal transaction.
Transfer
A transaction created when the location, custodian, or department of the asset was changed.
Reconciliation
A transaction created when purchased items were converted to fixed assets on the Reconciliation tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
Split
Takes you to the Split assets (FA506000) window.
Reversal
A reversal transaction.
Disposal reversal
A transaction created when disposals of fixed assets were reversed.
Description A description of the transaction.
On hold A check box that indicates whether the status of the transaction document is On hold.
Empty A check box that indicates whether the document is empty. If this check box is cleared, the document contains some transactions.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Depreciation methods (FA202500) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-methods-fa202500 page The depreciation method determines how the asset cost is allocated over the asset useful life. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Depreciation methods (FA202500) The depreciation method determines how the asset cost is allocated over the asset useful life. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The depreciation method determines how the asset cost is allocated over the asset useful life. Visma Net provides multiple built-in depreciation methods, and you can also configure custom depreciation methods. In this window, you can create, delete, and edit the formula-based depreciation method or the depreciation methods that use formulas to calculate the depreciation during the entire useful life of an asset. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can enter information for a new depreciation method, or view or edit the information for an existing one.
Element Description
Depreciation method ID The identifier of the depreciation method.
Calculation method

The calculation method used by the selected depreciation method. The following options are available:

  • Straight line
  • Declining balance
  • Sum of the years’ digits
  • Remaining value
  • Dutch method 1
  • Dutch method 2
Description A brief description of the depreciation method.
Declining balance multiplier

The percentage of depreciation acceleration used by the Declining balance calculation method for calculating the depreciation rate, which, in turn, is required for calculating the depreciation expense per a year.

Usually, the percent of depreciation acceleration is considered as 125%, 150%, 175%, or 200%.

Note

The maximum value to be entered in this field is 99,999.0000.
Switch to straight line A check box that you select to direct the system to switch from the Declining balance calculation method to the Straight line method, when the depreciation amount calculated by using the Straight line method is greater than the depreciation amount calculated for the Declining balance method.
Percent per year The percent of fixed asset depreciation for one year for the Dutch method 2 calculation method with the Yearly accountancy check box selected.
Source

The source of the selected depreciation method. The following options are available:

Predefined
A depreciation method predefined by the system. The settings of this method cannot be edited by a user.
Custom
A depreciation method configured by a user.
Averaging convention

The way fixed assets will be depreciated for the period within which the asset was acquired or disposed. You should select an averaging convention depending on the depreciation method you specified.

The following options, described more fully in About averaging conventions, are available: Full period, Mid period, Next period, Modified half period, Modified half period 2, Full quarter, Mid quarter, Full year, Mid year, and Full day.
Annual accounting

A check box that you select to direct the system to calculate the depreciation amount on a yearly basis. That is, the system uses the formula specific for the selected calculation method to calculate the depreciation expenses per each year.

Then the system spreads this depreciation amount over the financial periods in a year (for example, months) by dividing this amount by the number of periods.

With this check box deselected, the system calculates the deprecation amount for each period (not the whole year) by using the formula specific for the selected calculation method.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Depreciation table methods (FA202600) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/depreciation-table-methods-fa202600 page The depreciation method determines how the asset cost is allocated over the useful life. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Depreciation table methods (FA202600) The depreciation method determines how the asset cost is allocated over the useful life. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The depreciation method determines how the asset cost is allocated over the useful life.Visma Net provides multiple predefined depreciation methods, but you can also create the required custom depreciation methods. To create a custom table-based method, specify the depreciation percent of the depreciable basis that will be allocated over every year of the asset's useful life: + First, add a table method of the class type that will be used to aggregate methods of the asset type. + Then, add methods of asset type that are used to specify the annual percentage for the selected convention period. With table-based depreciation methods, the system does not take into consideration the acquisition date of the asset. The depreciation amounts within the year are calculated based on the period of the asset acquisition. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can enter information for a new depreciation method, or view or edit the information for an existing one.
Element Description
Depreciation method ID The identifier of the depreciation method.
Record type

The object type for which you can specify the current depreciation method. The following options are available:

  • Class: A class methods is used to join separate methods of asset type into one method that can be assigned to a fixed asset class. The quantity of aggregated methods of asset type equals the number of conversion periods in a financial year that you specify for the class method.

You can select this depreciation method while you are creating a fixed asset class in the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window.

  • Asset: An asset method is a part of a class method that specifies the asset depreciation in the selected conversion period of a financial year. The class of the asset is specified in the Class method field.
  • Both: A class method of this type is used if assets of this type must be depreciated once a year. You can select this depreciation method while creating a fixed asset class in the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window.
Class method The method used to group the methods of the asset type. This field is available for the Asset record type only.
Useful life, years The period of time (in calendar years) the asset is supposed to be in use.
Recovery period The useful life in months or the useful life (in years) multiplied by 12.
Description A brief description of the depreciation method.
Averaging convention

The convention that determines how fixed assets will be depreciated for the period within which the asset was acquired or disposed.

Select an averaging convention depending on the depreciation method you specified. For the available options, see About averaging conventions.
Convention period The period number in the financial year to which the averaging convention method is applied.
Total percent Read-only. The percent of depreciation by years. The value of this box should always be 100%.
Source The source of the method which can be predefined or custom. The predefined methods are included in Visma Net and cannot be modified or deleted. The custom methods have been configured in your Visma Net instance and can modified as needed.
## The table You use the table to specify the depreciation percent of the depreciable basis for recovery years of the selected method of asset type; depreciation calculations for every recovery period may differ.
Column Description
Recovery year The year of the useful life within which the asset is depreciated.
Percent per year The depreciation percent of the depreciable basis that must be allocated over the specified recovery year.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Disposal methods (FA207000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/disposal-methods-fa207000 page By using this window, you can create, edit, view, and delete the disposal methods available in your company for fixed assets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disposal methods (FA207000) By using this window, you can create, edit, view, and delete the disposal methods available in your company for fixed assets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create, edit, view, and delete the disposal methods available in your company for fixed assets. For example: Fixed assets can be sold, damaged, lost, exchanged, or abandoned. ## The table This table contains a list of disposal methods defined in the system; you can use this table to add new methods.
Column Description
Disposal method ID The unique identifier for the disposal method.
Description A brief description of the disposal method.
Proceeds account The account to be used to record the proceeds from disposal of assets by this method.
Proceeds subaccount The subaccount to be used to record the proceeds from disposal of assets by this method.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Dispose of assets (FA505000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/dispose-of-assets-fa505000 page By using this window, you can dispose of multiple assets simultaneously. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Dispose of assets (FA505000) By using this window, you can dispose of multiple assets simultaneously. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Prepare Initialises the processing of the selected transfer transactions: prepares the transactions for posting, or releases the selected disposal transactions and changes their statuses to Released or Unposted, depending on whether the Automatically release disposal transactions check box in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window is selected.
Prepare all Initialises the processing of all listed transfer transactions.
## The top part In the top part, you can specify the criteria to select the records to be displayed in the table below. You can also define the disposal parameters.
Element Description
Branch The branch of the company to which the assets to be displayed are assigned.
Asset class The fixed asset class to which the assets to be displayed are assigned. Leave the field blank to display assets of all classes.
Parent asset The parent asset to which the assets to be displayed are assigned. Leave the field blank to display assets of all parents.
Book The book to which the assets to be displayed are assigned.
Disposal date The disposal date for the asset, which is the date the asset is removed from service.
Disposal period The financial period in which the asset is removed from service. The disposal period is calculated automatically based on the date entered as the Disposal date, but you can select another period.
Disposal method The way the assets were retired (for example, sold or damaged).
Total proceeds amount

This field is available for editing only if the Automatic option is selected in the Disposal amount entry field.

The total amount to be posted to the Proceeds account for the assets being disposed of. This amount will be automatically distributed between the disposed assets in proportion to their current cost.
Proceeds allocation

The way the disposal amount is specified for the assets being disposed of. The following options are available:

Automatic
Select this option if you want the disposal amount to be distributed among the disposed assets automatically in proportion to their current cost. Specify the disposal amount to be distributed in the Total proceeds amount field.
Manual
Select this option to manually specify the disposal amount for each of the assets in the Proceeds amount column in the table.
Proceeds account The account to be used to record the proceeds from the disposal of assets. By default, this is the account defined for the fixed asset class, but you can specify a different account.
Proceeds sub. The subaccount to be used along with the specified proceeds account.
Depreciate before disposal A check box that you select to depreciate the assets up to the date of the disposal.
Reason The reason for depreciation before disposal.
## The table This table provides the list of fixed assets that meet the criteria specified in the top part. You can perform actions to retire the fixed assets and create (and, optionally, release) the associated transactions for all or selected assets.
Column Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you can select to include the asset in processing if you click Prepare.
Branch The branch of the company to which the asset is assigned.
Asset class The fixed asset class to which the fixed asset belongs.
Asset ID The unique identifier of the asset.
Description The description specified for the asset.
Parent asset The parent asset to which the asset is assigned.
Status The status of the asset.
Basis

The depreciable basis, which is the amount that is allocated over the useful life of the asset.

This is a system-generated value; the amount of the depreciable basis depends on the depreciation method applied to depreciate the asset. For some methods, the basis can be equal to the acquisition cost minus the salvage amount.
Proceeds amount

The disposal amount of the asset.

This column is available for editing only if the Manual option is selected in the Disposal amount entry field in the top part.
Receipt date The date when the asset was received.
Useful life, years The period of time (in years) the asset is expected to be used.
Salvage amount The estimated salvage value of the asset.
Fixed assets account The fixed assets account (an asset account) used to post the actual costs of the fixed asset.
Fixed assets sub The subaccount for the specified fixed assets account.
Tag number

The tag number of the asset.

Depending on the settings in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window, it can be the same as the item ID of the asset.
Fixed assets account class The account class that groups the asset accounts used for fixed assets.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Fixed asset classes (FA201000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-classes-fa201000 page By using this window, you can create asset classes that will group fixed assets with a similar properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset classes (FA201000) By using this window, you can create asset classes that will group fixed assets with a similar properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create asset classes that will group fixed assets with a similar properties. It is required to specify an asset class while creating a fixed asset in the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. Once you specify an asset class, the default properties, such as asset type, depreciation settings, general ledger accounts will be inserted in the corresponding elements that eases and facilitates the process of creating a new fixed asset in the system. (You can overwrite any of these values at any time.) On this window, you can also edit and delete existing fixed asset classes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In the top part, you can create a new fixed asset class and edit or delete any existing fixed asset class.
Element Description
Asset class ID The unique ID to be used for the fixed asset class.
Parent class The optional parent class, which you can select from the list of existing asset classes.
Description A description of the fixed asset class.
Active A check box that you select if this class can be used for fixed asset creation.
Hold on entry

A check box that you select if you want new assets of this class to have the On hold status by default.

This check box is automatically selected and unavailable for editing if the book that updates the general ledger is used for the assets of the class (that is, added on the Depreciation settings tab).
## The General settings tab On the **General settings** tab, you can specify or view basic settings for the fixed asset class.
Element Description
Asset type

The particular type of the fixed asset or assets associated with the selected asset class.

You can change the fixed asset type by selecting the required one from the list.

You can create a required fixed asset type or edit the existing one by using the Fixed asset types (FA201010) window, which you can access by clicking the Edit button next to the Asset type field.
Tangible

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the assets associated with the selected asset class are tangible—that is, have a physical substance.

You can edit this value by using the Fixed asset types (FA201010) window.
Depreciate A check box that indicates (if selected) that a fixed asset associated with this asset class will be depreciated.
Useful life, years The period of time (in years) an asset of the class is supposed to be in use.
Accelerated depreciation for Straight line deprec. method and Dutch method 2

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the revalued net book value of an asset must be depreciated during the remaining useful life of the asset.

For more information, see: About depreciation configuration
## The Depreciation settings tab On this tab, you can set up depreciation parameters for the fixed asset class. By using this tab, you can create a list of books to be used for assets of the class. (If you specify no books on this tab when you create a class, all books defined in the system will be assigned to the class automatically.) Once this list is defined for the class, for a fixed asset of the class, you will be able to select a book only from this list.
Column Description
Book The depreciation book to which assets of the current class can be assigned. Books are defined in the Books (FA205000) window.
Useful life, years

The period of time (in years) during which the assets of this class, for the current book, are expected to be in use.

The default value for this column is specified on the General settings tab of the current window.
Update general ledger

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the general ledger will be updated from the specified book.

The posting book is selected in the Books (FA205000) window.
Class method The depreciation method to used to depreciate fixed assets of this class in the book specified in this row.
Averaging convention

A convention that determines how fixed assets of this class (with the book specified in this row) will be depreciated for the period within which the asset was acquired or disposed. The list of available averaging conventions depends on the depreciation method you have specified.

If you select the Modified half period option or the Modified half period 2 option, the Mid period type and Day in mid period fields become available for editing.

For more information, see: About averaging conventions
Bonus

A check box that you select if you want to specify the parameters of a bonus for assets of the current class.

These parameters will be used by default on the Balance tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.

A bonus is a peculiarity of the USA tax system whose amount reduces the depreciable basis in the first year of asset’s useful life. In Visma Net, you can specify the parameters of a bonus by using the Books (FA205000) window.
Mid period type

The rule for defining the date as the middle of the disposal and acquisition period. The following options are available:

Fixed day
Used to set a particular calendar day (in the Day in mid period column) as the last day of the first half of the period. For example, if you specify 10, the 10th calendar day of the period will be the last one in the first half of the period.
Number of days
Used to set the value (in the Day in mid period column) that defines the number of days that the system will add to the first day of the financial period to calculate the last day of the first half of the period. For example: If you specify 10 and the financial period starts on the 2nd day of a calendar month, the 12th day of the month will be the last one in the first half of the period.

The default value is defined for each book in the Books (FA205000) window.
Day in mid period

The value that determines the middle of the financial period. Depending on the option that you have selected in the Mid period type column, this value has one of the following meanings:

  • If the Fixed day option is selected in the Mid period type column: The value defines a particular calendar date that defines the last day of the first half of the period in this column. For example: If this column contains 10, the tenth calendar day of the period will be the last one in the first half of the period.
  • If the Number of days option is selected in the Mid period type column: The value defines the number of days the system will add to the day when the financial period starts to calculate the last day of the first half of the period. For example: If the Day in mid period column holds 10 and the financial period starts on the 2nd day of a calendar month, the 12th day of the month will be the last one in the first half of the period.
## The General ledger accounts tab You use this tab to specify the default accounts and subaccounts to post accumulated depreciation, fixed asset costs, proceeds from disposal of fixed assets of the class, and depreciation expenses for assets of the class.
Element Description
Fixed assets account The fixed assets account (an asset account) used to post the cost of fixed assets.
Fixed assets sub. The subaccount to be used for this fixed asset class.
Combine fixed asset sub. from

A subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing the fixed asset subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the fixed asset class, department, location and fixed asset itself).

To set up the rule, select a segment field, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

A
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset. This subaccount is specified in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
C
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset class, as specified in the current window.
D
The expense subaccount associated with the department. This subaccount is specified in the Departments (EP201500) window.
L
Branches (CS102000) window.

For a segment, each of the available options is designated by a specific letter repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Account accumulated depreciation The account used to post accumulated depreciation (an asset account).
Subaccount accumulated Depreciation The subaccount for the specified accumulated depreciation account.
Use fixed asset sub. mask

A check box that you select if the fixed asset subaccount mask will define the rule for selecting segment values for the accumulated depreciation subaccounts to be used.

If you select this check box, the Combine accumulated depreciation sub. from column will not be enabled.
Combine accumulated depreciation sub. from

A subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing the accumulated depreciation subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the fixed asset class, department, location and fixed asset itself). To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

A
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset. This subaccount is specified in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
C
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset class, as specified in the current window.
D
The expense subaccount associated with the department. This subaccount is specified in the Departments (EP201500) window.
L
The expense subaccount associated with the branch, as specified in the Branches (CS102000) window.

For a segment, each of the available options is designated by a specific letter repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Depreciation Expense Account The expense account used to post depreciation expenses.
Depreciation Expense Sub. The subaccount for the specified depreciation expense account.
Combine depreciation expense sub. from

A subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing the depreciation expense subaccounts from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the fixed asset class, department, location and fixed asset itself). To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

A
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset. This subaccount is specified in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
C
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset class, as specified in the current window.
D
The expense subaccount associated with the department. This subaccount is specified in the Departments (EP201500) window.
L
The expense subaccount associated with the branch, as specified in the Branches (CS102000) window.

For a segment, each of the available options is designated by a specific letter repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Proceeds account The account to be used to post proceeds from the disposal of fixed assets.
Proceeds sub. The subaccount to be used to record proceeds from assets of this class to the specified proceeds account.
Combine proceeds sub. from

A subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing the proceed subaccounts from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the fixed asset class, department, location and fixed asset itself). To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

A
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset. This subaccount is specified in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
C
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset class, as specified in the current window.
D
The expense subaccount associated with the department. This subaccount is specified in the Departments (EP201500) window.
L
The expense subaccount associated with the branch, as specified in the Branches (CS102000) window.

For a segment, each of the available options is designated by a specific letter repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Gain account The account to which a gain resulting from disposal will be posted.
Gain sub. The subaccount to which a gain resulting from disposal will be posted.
Loss account The account to which a loss resulting from disposal will be posted.
Loss sub. The subaccount to which a loss resulting from disposal will be posted.
Combine gain/loss sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing the gain/loss subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the fixed asset class, department, location and fixed asset itself).

To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

A
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset. This subaccount is specified in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
C
The subaccount associated with the fixed asset class, as specified in the current window.
D
The expense subaccount associated with the department. This subaccount is specified in the Departments (EP201500) window.
L
The expense subaccount associated with the branch, as specified in the Branches (CS102000) window.

For a segment, each of the available options is designated by a specific letter repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Fixed asset transactions (FA301000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-transactions-fa301000 page By using this window, you can create, view, edit, delete, and release fixed asset transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset transactions (FA301000) By using this window, you can create, view, edit, delete, and release fixed asset transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > A transaction can be deleted only if it has not been released. Also, a system-generated transaction cannot be edited. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release

Releases the transaction and changes its status to Unposted or Posted, depending on the settings in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window.

Note

Only balanced transactions can be released.
## The top part In the top part of the window, you can enter information for a new transaction or select an existing one for release.
Element Description
Reference number The reference number identifying the transaction in the system.
Document date The date when the transaction document was created. By default, the current date is specified, but you can change it.
Document total The total amount for the transactions.
Status

A read-only info box that shows the status of the transaction document:

On hold
The document may be edited and may not be released.
Balanced
The debit and credit amounts of the transaction are equal.
Unposted
The document is ready to be posted. Unposted transactions cannot be modified or deleted.
Posted
Indicates that the transaction was posted and the appropriate general ledger account balances were updated. Posted transactions cannot be modified or deleted.
On hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the status of the transaction document is On hold. Clear the check box to allow release of the document.
Origin

Read-only. The way the transaction was entered into the system:

Adjustment
This adjusting transaction was entered manually.
Purchasing
This transaction records the acquisition of the fixed asset.
Depreciation
This transaction records the depreciation of the fixed asset.
Disposed
This transaction records the disposal of the fixed asset.
Transfer
This transaction occurs if the branch, custodian, or department of the fixed asset was changed.
Description A description of the transaction.
## The table This table contains transaction details, with each row defining one transaction detail.
Column Description
Asset The fixed asset affected by the transaction.
Description A description of the asset.
Book The book to which the asset is assigned.
Transaction type

A brief description of the transaction.

For more information, see: About types of fixed asset transactions
Debit account The account to be debited by this transaction.
Description The user-provided description of the account.
Debit subaccount The subaccount to be debited by this transaction.
Description The user-provided description of the subaccount.
Credit account The account to be credited by this transaction.
Description The user-provided description of the account.
Credit subaccount The subaccount to be credited by this transaction.
Description The user-provided description of the subaccount.
Transaction amount The amount of the transaction.
Batch no. The batch, by its identifier, generated for the book that updates the General Ledger.
Transaction description The description of the transaction.
Trans. period

The financial period in the book to which the transaction should be posted. The first two characters reflect the period number within the financial year, and the last four digits indicate the financial year.

The period is calculated based on the document date; however, you can select another period from the list.
Method

The statute-allowed benefit that is used to depreciate the asset, which is one of the following options:

Bonus
A bonus amount reduces the depreciable basis in the first year of the useful life of the asset.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Fixed asset types (FA201010) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-types-fa201010 page By using this window, you can maintain the list of the fixed asset types available in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset types (FA201010) By using this window, you can maintain the list of the fixed asset types available in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can maintain the list of the fixed asset types available in the system. You can create new fixed asset types and delete any existing types. You can also edit the settings of the existing fixed asset types. You can delete a fixed asset type only if it has not been used (which means that it is not specified for any fixed asset or fixed asset class). By default, the list of predefined fixed asset types is available in this window. ## The table This table holds the list of fixed asset types defined in the system.
Column Description
Asset type ID An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters identifying the asset type.
Description A brief description of the asset type.
Tangible A check box that indicates (if selected) that a fixed asset is tangible. This setting (selected or cleared) will be displayed in the Tangible check box on the General settings tab in the Fixed assets (FA303000) and Fixed asset classes (FA201000) windows when this asset type is selected in the Asset type field.
Depreciate A check box that indicates (if selected) that a fixed asset is depreciable. This setting (selected or cleared) will be displayed in the Depreciate check box on the General settings tab in the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window when this asset type is selected in the Asset type field.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Fixed assets (FA303000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000 page By using this window, you can create, view, edit, and delete fixed assets in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed assets (FA303000) By using this window, you can create, view, edit, and delete fixed assets in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can quickly convert purchased items to fixed assets and track assets by custodian, department, and location. You can also view depreciation and transaction history, calculate depreciation, dispose of assets, and assign bonuses and other allowed VAT benefits to depreciate assets. It is also possible to create an import scenario for importing fixed assets. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The table toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Dispose: Opens the Disposal parameters dialog box, which you use to set up disposal parameters and dispose of the asset. The asset status is set to Disposed. You can dispose of assets with the Active status only.

  • Reverse disposal: Opens the Reverse disposal information dialog box, which you use to reverse the disposal of the asset. The status of the asset is changed from Disposed to Active. This command is available for only disposed assets.

  • Suspend: Suspends depreciation of the asset. The asset status is set to Suspended. You can suspend assets with the Active status only.

  • Unsuspend: Opens the Suspend parameters dialog box, which you use to set up the financial period since that the depreciation for the asset will be resumed. The status of the asset is changed from Suspended to Active. This command is available for only suspended assets.

  • Reverse: Reverses asset disposal to the time when the asset was put into service. You can reverse assets with the Active status only.

  • Calculate depreciation: Calculates depreciation through the entire life of an asset. You can view the calculated amounts on the Depreciation history tab in the Calculated column.

    Note

    No transactions are generated with the Calculate depreciation action. To depreciate an asset, use the Calculate depreciation (FA502000), in which you can depreciate the asset or assets through the specified period.

  • Split: Navigates to the Split assets (FA506000) window, which you can use to split an asset into two or more separate assets. You can split assets with the Active status only.
### The Disposal parameters dialog box By using the **Disposal parameters** dialog box, you can configure disposal and dispose of the asset. The dialog box includes the elements described below.
Element Description
Disposal date The date the asset must be removed from service. This date cannot be earlier than the acquisition date of the asset.
Disposal period The financial period in which the asset is removed from service. The disposal period is calculated automatically based on the date you have entered in the Disposal date field, but you can select another period.
Proceeds amount The disposal amount of the asset.
Disposal method The disposal method to be used. Disposal methods are defined in the Disposal methods (FA207000) window.
Proceeds account

The account to post proceeds from the disposal of fixed assets.

By default, this account is that defined for the fixed asset class, but you can specify a different account.
Proceeds sub.

The subaccount for the specified proceeds account.

By default, this subaccount is the one defined for the fixed asset class, but you can override the class value.
Depreciate before disposal A check box that you select to depreciate the asset up to the date of the disposal.
Reason The reason for the disposal.
OK ( button) Closes the dialog box and disposes of the asset.
Cancel ( button) Closes the dialog box without disposing of the asset.
### The Reverse disposal information dialog box By using the **Reverse disposal info** dialog box, you can reverse the disposal of an asset. The dialog box includes the elements described below.
Element Description
Disposal date The date the asset has been removed from service.
Disposal period The financial period in which the asset has been removed from service.
Proceeds amount The disposal amount of the asset.
Disposal method The disposal method that has been used.
Proceeds account The account the proceeds from the disposal of fixed asset have been posted to.
Proceeds sub. The subaccount for the specified proceeds account.
Reversal date The date to be used for the reversal of the disposal of the asset. If the current business date is later than the disposal date, the current business date is used. Otherwise, the disposal date is used.
Reversal period The financial period in which the asset disposal is to be reversed. By default, the system uses the financial period the reversal date belongs to. If required, you can change the reversal period to a period older than the period of the reversal.
OK ( button) Closes the dialog box and reverses the disposal of the asset.
Cancel ( button) Closes the dialog box without reversing the disposal of the asset.
## The top part Here you can add information for a new fixed asset or select an existing fixed asset for calculation of depreciation or disposal.
Element Description
Asset ID The unique ID of the asset. The ID is determined by the numbering sequence specified in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window.
Parent asset The parent asset of this asset. You can use this box to set up the relationship among assets.
Description A description of the fixed asset.
## The General information tab The **General information** tab is used to specify asset summary and tracking details. ### The Asset summary section
Element Description
Asset class

The asset class to which the asset belongs.

When you fill in the appropriate asset class for a fixed asset you are creating, the system fills in many boxes with the settings of the class, thus easing data entry. These classes are defined in the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window.
Property type

The way the asset was acquired. The property type can help you to select a depreciation method. Select one of the following options:

Property
The asset was acquired in the usual way (for example, it was purchased).
Grant property
The asset was acquired by a gift or grant.
Leased
The asset was leased from a lessor.
Leased to others
The asset, which you own, is available to be leased.
Rented
The asset was rented from a landlord.
Rented to others
The asset, which you own, is available to be rented.
To the credit of
The asset was bought on credit.
Status

The system-generated status of the fixed asset, which is one of the following options:

On hold
Indicates that the asset cannot be depreciated or disposed of, and may still be edited. A newly created asset receives this status if the Hold on entry check box is selected in the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window for the class to which the asset belongs.
Active
Reflects that the asset can be depreciated and disposed of. The asset receives this status if the Hold on entry check box is cleared in the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window for the class to which the asset belongs. Otherwise, the asset receives this status as soon as the Hold check box is cleared.
Disposed
Indicates that the asset has been disposed of. To dispose of an asset, click Dispose in the Actions menu.
Suspended
Indicates that the depreciation is currently stopped for the asset. To suspend the depreciation of an asset, click Suspend in the Actions menu.
Reversed
Indicates that the asset is annulled, which means that all released transactions associated with the asset are reversed in open periods in the General ledger, and the asset is displayed as Reversed on reports with a depreciated amount equal to zero. To annul an asset, click Reverse in the Actions menu in the window toolbar.
Fully depreciated
Indicates that the asset cost was fully depreciated over its useful life in all books assigned to the asset.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the status of the fixed asset document is On hold and the document can be edited. Clear the check box to change the status of the asset to Active.
Asset type

The particular type of the fixed asset. The system fills in this box automatically, based on the fixed asset class the asset is assigned to, but you can manually change the type by selecting the required one from the list.

You can create a required fixed asset type or edit an existing one by using the Fixed asset types (FA201010) window, which you can access by clicking the Edit button next to the Asset type field.
Tangible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the asset is tangible or it has a physical existence. The value is filled in by the system automatically according to the asset type selected in the Asset type field.
Quantity The quantity of the fixed asset.
Depreciate

A check box that you select if the asset will be depreciated.

This check box is filled in by the system according to the settings of the asset class selected in the Asset class field. However, you can select or clear it manually.
Useful life, years

The period of time (in years) the asset is expected to be used.

This column is filled in by the system according to the setting of the fixed asset class; however, you can override the class setting.
Receipt date The date of the purchase receipt document or the date when the asset was acquired. This date is used by the system as the date of the Purchasing+ transaction generated once an asset is created and saved.
Date placed in service

The date when an asset is placed in use. You enter the date for both depreciable and non-depreciable fixed assets. For a depreciable fixed asset, the depreciation is calculated starting from this date.

For a depreciable fixed asset, this field will be unavailable for editing once the first depreciation transaction (of the Depreciation+ type) is created.
Orig. acquisition cost The amount that was spent to acquire the asset. Depending on the way the asset was acquired, this amount can be the purchase price or the fair market value of the asset. It also can include closing costs and other expenses spent to acquire the asset.
Salvage amount The book value at the end of the useful life of the asset.
Replacement cost The cost to replace the asset with a similar one.
Disposal date

The date the asset was removed from service.

This value is generated by the system after the disposal of the asset, based on the date specified in the Disposal parameters dialog box.
Disposal method

The way the asset was retired (for example, sold or damaged).

The system generates this value after the disposal of the asset, according to the method specified in the Disposal parameters dialog box.
Disposal amount

The amount of proceeds from the disposal of the asset.

The system generates this value after the disposal, according to the amount specified in the Disposal parameters dialog box.
Property tax group

The property tax group of the asset.

In this field you choose and set the correct property tax group for the fixed asset.

You can also create a new property tax group. For more information, see: Property tax groups (FA209000)
### The Tracking information section These elements hold information about the location, custodian, and department of the asset.
Element Description
Branch The company branch to which the asset is assigned.
Building The ID of the building where the asset is located.
Floor The floor number where the asset is located.
Room The room number where the asset is located.
Custodian The ID of the person who is responsible for keeping the asset safe.
Department The department the asset belongs to. Define departments in the Departments (EP201500) window.
Reason

The reason for transferring an asset. Type the reason here if you change the location information in this section.

The field is populated automatically with the reason you specify for transfer if you use the Transfer assets (FA507000) window.
Tag number The tag number of the asset. Depending on the settings in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window, the tag number can be the same as the item ID of the asset.
## The Purchase/tangible information tab This tab is used to specify details that may apply to a tangible asset. ### The Purchase details section
Element Description
Receipt date The date of the purchase receipt document.
Receipt type

The type of the document. The following options are available:

Receipt
Used for a purchase receipt document created for assets received on purchase
Return
Used for a purchase return document created for assets returned back to the supplier
Transfer receipt
TBD
Receipt no. The ID of the purchase receipt document.
Purchase order number The number of the purchase order related to the purchase receipt document.
Purchase invoice no. The number of the invoice received from the supplier from which the asset was purchased.
Manufacturer The manufacturer of the asset.
Model The model of the asset.
Serial number The serial number of the asset that has been assigned by the manufacturer. You use this number when you receive information and warranty services from the manufacturer.
Warranty expires on The date after which the asset will not be replaced or repaired by the manufacturer, if the asset proves to be defective.
### The Tangible info section
Element Description
Personal property type Select the Not applicable option, unless the personal property type you select for the Tangible personal property tax if your business or rental property is located in Florida (in the United States).
Condition The condition of the asset; you can specify Good, Average, or Poor.
Fair market value The price of the asset as agreed upon by both the buyer and the seller.
### The Lease/rent information section Use this group of elements if you have leased or rented the asset.
Element Description
Lessor The owner of the asset that you have leased or rented.
Lease/rent term, months The number of months the lease or rental agreement is in force.
Lease number The number assigned to the lease agreement.
Rent amount The amount that you have paid to use the asset.
Retail cost The price of the asset that can be paid for it by the end consumer.
Manufacturing year The year on which the asset was manufactured.
## The General ledger accounts tab You use the **General ledger accounts** tab to define the accounts and subaccounts to which the system will post accumulated depreciation, fixed asset costs, proceeds from asset disposal, and depreciation expenses. If an asset is assigned to a particular fixed asset class, by default, this tab displays the accounts and subaccounts for the fixed asset class; however, you can select other accounts and subaccounts for this fixed asset.
Element Description
Fixed assets account The Fixed assets account (an asset account) used to post the actual costs of the fixed asset.
Fixed assets sub. The subaccount for the specified Fixed assets account. The subaccount is automatically changed if the asset changes its location.
Accrual account The asset account to be used to record the cost of items that have not been put into service yet but may be fixed assets in the future.
Accrual sub. The subaccount to be used along with the specified accrual account.
Account accumulated depreciation The asset account used to post accumulated depreciation.
Subaccount accumulated depreciation The subaccount for the specified accumulated depreciation account.
Depreciation expense account The expense account used to post depreciation expense.
Depreciation expense sub. The subaccount for the specified depreciation expense account.
Proceeds account The account used to post proceeds from the disposal of fixed assets.
Proceeds sub. The subaccount for the specified proceeds account.
Gain account The account to which resulting gain will be posted.
Gain sub. The subaccount to which resulting gain will be posted.
Loss account The account to which resulting loss will be posted.
Loss sub. The subaccount to which resulting loss will be posted.
## The Balance tab You use this tab to assign the asset to depreciation books, and to view and edit the information related to the balance of the asset.
Column Description
Book The ID of the book to which the asset is assigned.
Depreciation method

The depreciation method for the asset.

By default, the depreciation method selected for the fixed asset class is shown here. However, you can select another method from the list.

For more information about the methods supported by Visma Net, see: About depreciation configuration
Status

The system-generated status of the asset balance. The status can be one of the following options:

Active
This status is assigned to newly created assets and will be changed if the asset is fully depreciated or disposed.
Fully depreciated
This status reflects the asset cost or the depreciable basis that was fully depreciated over its useful life.
Disposed
This status indicates that the asset was disposed.
Suspended
This status indicates that the depreciation is currently stopped for the asset.
Reversed
This status indicates that the asset is annulled, which means that all released transactions associated with the asset are reversed in open periods in the General ledger, and the asset is displayed as Reversed on reports with a depreciated amount equal to zero.
Update general ledger A check box that indicates (if selected) that transactions associated with fixed asset documents will be posted to the General ledger.
Date placed-in service

The date when an asset was first placed in use.

This column is available only for a non-depreciable fixed asset (that is, one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab).
Period placed in service

The period when an asset was first placed in use.

This column is available only if the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab for the selected fixed asset.
Depr. from

The date starting from which the asset will be depreciated.

This date must be specified for each book and can be different from the acquisition date; however, this date cannot be earlier than the acquisition date of the asset.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Depr. from period

The first depreciation period that is specified for the book, by its identification number.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Last depr. period

The period when the asset was depreciated last, by its identification number.

This value is system-generated for fully depreciated assets.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Depr. to period

The latest depreciation period or the period until which the asset will be depreciated—by its identification number. This period is determined according to the first depreciation period, the book calendar, the averaging convention, and the useful life of the asset.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Orig. acquisition cost

The amount that was spent to acquire the asset.

This amount depends on the way the asset was acquired. It can be the purchase price or the fair market value of the asset; it also can include closing costs and other expenses spent to acquire the asset.
Current cost A read-only field that shows the current cost of the asset that you have selected.
Business use (%)

The use of the asset that is for business purposes, expressed as a percentage.

If you use the asset for both personal and business purposes (as with a car), you may depreciate the cost of the business use only, but not the full cost. The system does not depreciate more than this percentage of the acquisition cost.
Basis

The depreciable basis, which is the amount that is allocated over the useful life of the asset.

This is a system-generated value; the amount of the depreciable basis depends on the depreciation method applied to depreciate the asset. For some methods, the basis can be equal to the acquisition cost minus the salvage amount. Also, you can adjust the basis amount based on the percentage of business use and the bonus amount.
Salvage amount

The expected book value of the asset at the end of its useful life.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Accum. depr.

The amount of the depreciation that has been accumulated.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Net value The net book value of the asset.
Gain/loss amount

The amount of gain or loss incurred for the company if the asset is disposed of.

The gain or loss amount is calculated as the acquisition cost of the asset minus the accumulated depreciation and minus proceeds from disposal.
Useful life, years

The period of time (in years) the asset is expected to be used.

This column is filled in by the system according to the setting of the fixed asset class; however, you can override the class setting.
Recovery periods The number of depreciation periods. This value is generated by the system according to the Useful life, years setting on this tab.
ADS life, years The Alternative Depreciation System (ADS) life, which is the period of time (in years) the asset is supposed to be used. The ADS life is used with some depreciation methods instead of the useful life.
Averaging convention

The convention that determines how fixed assets will be depreciated for the period within which the asset was acquired or disposed. The list of available averaging conventions depends on the depreciation method you have specified.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Mid period type

The column that displays the rule (set during the creation of the book) that defines the day in the period that will be considered by the system as the middle of the disposal and acquisition period. The following options are available:

Fixed day
Used to set a particular date (specified in the Day in mid period ) as the last day of the first half of the period.
Number of days
Used when you have specified (in the Day in mid period column) the number of days the system will add to the first date of the calendar month to calculate the last day of the first half of the period.

This field becomes available for editing if you select the Modified half period option or the Modified half period 2 option in the Averaging convention column.
Day in mid period

A column that displays the day of the month (specified during book creation) that is considered by the system as the middle of the financial period. Depending on the option selected in the Mid period type column during the creation of the book, this column can hold the following value:

  • If the Fixed day option is selected in the Mid period type column: The particular date of a period is specified as the last day of the first half of the period in Day in mid period. For example: If you specify 10 in Day in mid period, the 10th day of the period will be the last one in the first half of the period.
  • If the Number of days option is selected in the Mid period type column: Day in mid period holds the number of days the system will add to the first date of the calendar month to calculate the last day of the first half of the period. For example, if you specify 10 in the Day in mid period column and the financial period starts on the 2nd day of a calendar month, the 12th day of the month will be the last one in the first half of the period.

This field becomes available for editing if you select the Modified half period option or the Modified half period 2 option in the Averaging convention column.
Bonus

The ID of the bonus assigned to the depreciation book.

This column is available if you have selected the Bonus check box on the Depreciation settings tab of the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window for the class and book associated with the asset. You can set up bonuses by using the Bonuses (FA208000) window.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab for the selected fixed asset).
Bonus rate

The bonus rate (as a percentage) that is defined for this bonus in the Bonuses (FA208000) window. The system calculates the bonus if the start depreciation date (specified in the Depr. from column) is within the date range specified for the bonus.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Bonus amount

The bonus amount, which is the acquisition cost multiplied by the bonus rate.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
Bonus recapture

The amount that must be recaptured if the asset is disposed of during the first two years of its useful life.

This column is not available for a non-depreciable fixed asset (one for which the Depreciate field is cleared on the General settings tab ).
## The Components tab This tab displays the list of fixed assets for which the current asset is the parent asset. For example, a component of this asset can be the repair or improvement of it. You cannot modify any information displayed on this tab.
Column Description
Asset ID The ID of the asset.
Description A description of the asset.
Asset class The asset class to which the component asset belongs. Asset classes are defined in the Fixed asset classes (FA201000) window.
Asset type The component type, which can be Building, Land, Vehicle, Machinery, Equipment, Computers, Furniture, Software, Goodwill, Patents, or Copyrights.
Status The system-generated status of the fixed asset component, which is one of the following options, as described under the General settings tab: Active, On hold, or Disposed.
Orig. acquisition cost The amount that was spent to acquire the component.
Useful life, years The time period (in years) the component asset is supposed to be used. All the components have the same useful life as the parent asset.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the fixed asset has a status of Active.
Property type

The way the component asset was acquired.

The following options, described under the General settings tab, are available: Property, Grant property, Leased, Leased to others, Rented, Rented to others, and To the credit of.
Condition The condition of the asset, which can be Good, Average, or Poor.
Receipt date The date of the purchase receipt document.
Receipt type

The type of the document. The following options are available:

Receipt
Created for an asset received on purchase.
Return
Created for an asset returned back to the supplier.
Receipt no. The reference number of the purchase receipt.
Purchase order number The reference number of the purchase order related to the purchase receipt document.
Purchase invoice no. The number of the invoice that was received from the supplier of the asset.
Manufacturer The manufacturer of the asset.
Serial number The ID of the asset that is assigned by the manufacturer. Through the serial number, you can receive information or warranty services from the manufacturer.
Tag number The tag number of this asset. Depending on the settings in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window, the tag number can be the same as the ID of the asset.
## The Depreciation history tab You can use the **Depreciation history** tab to view the calculated depreciation according to the depreciation books to which the asset was assigned. This tab appears as soon as the settings of the Fixed assets workspace are specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. The way the data is displayed on this tab depends on the **Depreciation history view** option specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. You can set up the window to view depreciation records in a selected book ( **By book** ) or in all books at once ( **Side by side** ). ### The top part If **By book** is selected in the **Depreciation history view** field of the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window, this tab displays depreciation records for a book you select in this area.
Element Description
Book The book for which depreciation history is shown below.
### The By book table If **By book** is selected in the **Depreciation history view** field of the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window, this table displays information on depreciation history for the book you have selected above. This information cannot be edited.
Column Description
Period The financial period in the book to which the depreciation should be posted. The first two characters reflect the period number within a financial year; the last four digits indicate the financial year.
Calculated The calculated depreciation amount for the financial period. If depreciation was suspended for this period, the transaction amount is zero.
Depreciated The actual amount depreciated for this period. If depreciation was suspended for this period, the transaction amount is zero.
### The Side by side table If **Side by side** is selected in the **Depreciation history view** field of the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window, this tab displays side by side all the books to which the asset has been assigned. You may not edit the information displayed in this table.
Element Description
Period The financial period in the book to which the depreciation should be posted. The first two characters of the text reflect the period number within a financial year, and the last four digits indicate the financial year.
1 Calculated The depreciation amount of calculated value for the related financial period. If depreciation was suspended for this period, the transaction amount is zero.
1 Depreciated The depreciation amount of real value for the related financial period. If depreciation was suspended for this period, the transaction amount is zero.
## The Location history tab This tab displays any modifications that were made to the **Tracking information** section on the **General settings tab**. That is, this tab displays where the asset was located, which department the asset belonged to, and who was the custodian of the asset before any modifications (for example, replacing the asset or changing the custodian) were made. You cannot edit or delete the information displayed on this tab. The most recent modification is displayed at the top of the modification list.
Column Description
Transaction date The date of the transaction related to the modification in the Tracking information section on the General settings tab.
Branch The branch where the asset was located before the modification date.
Building The building where the asset was placed.
Floor The floor where the asset was placed.
Room The room where the asset was placed.
Custodian The ID of the person who was responsible for keeping the asset safe before the modification date.
Employee name The name of the custodian of the asset.
Department The department to which the asset belonged before the modification date.
Reason The reason of transaction.
Fixed assets account The fixed assets account (an asset account) used to post the cost of fixed assets.
Fixed assets sub. The subaccount for the specified fixed assets account.
Account accumulated depreciation The account used to post accumulated depreciation (an asset account).
Subaccount accumulated depreciation The subaccount for the specified accumulated depreciation account.
Depreciation expense account The expense account used to post depreciation expenses.
Depreciation expense sub. The subaccount for the specified depreciation expense account.
Last modified by The user who made the modification.
Modification date The date when the modification was made.
## The Transaction history tab On this tab, you can view all the asset-related transactions that were generated by the system or entered manually. You can manually create transactions of the **Purchasing +** or **Depreciation +** types by using the [Fixed asset transactions (FA301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-asset-transactions-fa301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > You can delete a transaction listed here only if it has not been released. You can filter the transactions to be displayed below.
Element Description
Book

The book where the transactions were entered.

If this field is empty, all the transactions of the asset are displayed in the table on this tab.
Column Description
Book The book where the transaction was entered.
Trans. date The date when the transaction was entered into the system.
Tran. period The financial period in the book to which the transaction should be posted.
Transaction type

The type of the transaction.

For more information, see: About types of fixed asset transactions
Debit account

The account to be debited by this transaction.

The system generates this value according to the transaction type and the settings on the General ledger accounts tab.
Description The description provided for the account.
Debit subaccount

The subaccount to be debited by this transaction.

The system generates this value according to the transaction type and the settings on the General ledger accounts tab.
Description The description provided for the subaccount.
Credit account

The account to be credited by this transaction.

The system generates this value according to the transaction type and the settings on the General ledger accounts tab.
Description The description provided for the account.
Credit subaccount

The subaccount to be credited by this transaction.

The system generates this value according to the transaction type and the settings on the General ledger accounts tab.
Description The description provided for the subaccount.
Transaction amount The amount of the transaction.
Reference number The number identifying the transaction in the system.
Batch no. The batch, by its ID, generated for the transaction that updates the general ledger.
Released

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction was released.

Only balanced transactions can be released.
Method

The statute-allowed benefit that is used to depreciate the asset:

Bonus
A bonus amount reduces the depreciable basis in the first year of the useful life of the asset.
Transaction description A description of the transaction.
## The Reconciliation tab You can use this tab to make additions or deductions to the net book value and to convert purchased items to components of the selected asset. You can view the document on this tab only if the fixed asset accrual account and corresponding subaccount have been specified on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window when the invoice was created. If the selected asset is not associated with the posting book, this tab is only informational. ### The Transactions table You can filter the list of transactions to be shown by account and subaccount. Each of the transactions might include multiple quantities of an item that can be converted into fixed assets as individual assets or components of the current asset.
Element Description
Reconciliation type

The type of the reconciliation. The following options are available:

Addition
To reconcile the asset with added value.
Deduction
To reconcile the asset with deducted value. This option is available only for assets with non-zero accrual balance.
Account

The asset account. You should generally specify the account that has been used to temporarily record transactions, including stock items that have already been purchased but have not yet been put into service.

By default, the asset account is the fixed asset accrual account that is specified in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window.
Subaccount

The appropriate subaccount for the specified asset account.

By default, this subaccount is the fixed asset accrual subaccount that is specified in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window.

This field is available only if the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Trans. date

The date which will be assigned to the transaction of the Purchasing+ or Purchasing- type that is created automatically when you make addition or deduction to the existing fixed asset.

By default, the acquisition date of the currently selected asset is specified.
Addition period The financial period to which the transaction of the Purchasing+ or Purchasing- type (that is created automatically when you make addition or deduction to the existing fixed asset) will be posted. Select an appropriate period.
Show transactions marked as reconciled A check box you select to view transactions marked as reconciled.
Acquisition cost The amount that was spent to acquire the asset.
Current cost The current cost of the asset.
Accrual balance The part of the amount reconciled with the General ledger.
Unreconciled amount The rest of the amount to be reconciled with the General ledger.
Selection total The total cost of items to be selected, which is the total of the amounts specified in the Selected amount column. This amount is equal to the selected quantity multiplied by the unit cost.
Expected cost The estimated cost of the asset after reconciliation.
Expected accrual balance The estimated amount of the accrual balance after reconciliation.
Reduce unreconciled cost

A button that you can click to instruct the system to ignore the unreconciled amount and bring the cost of the fixed asset to the reconciled value.

This button is available for partially reconciled assets (that is, the assets that have accrual balance and unreconciled amount present). As a result, the system generates Purchasing - transaction.
### The table toolbar The table toolbar includes standard buttons and buttons specific to this table.
Button Description
Process Generates a transaction or transactions of the Reconciliation+ type if the Addition option is selected in the Reconciliation type field in the top part of this tab. This action generates a transaction or transactions of the Reconciliation type if the Deduction option is selected in the Reconciliation type field.
### The table columns The table shown on this tab displays transactions that were included in invoices in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window and then released and posted to the General ledger. If you select a transaction in this table, the entire quantity of the selected item will be converted to a fixed asset.
Column Description
Included

An unlabelled check box you can select to include the item for processing. After the check box is selected, you have two ways to proceed, depending on whether you want to create new fixed assets or you plan to create components of the currently selected fixed asset:

  • To convert one unit of the purchased item specified in this row to a fixed asset, click Process in the table toolbar.
  • To convert one unit or multiple units of this purchased item to components of the currently selected asset, select the Component check box, specify a child asset class of the current asset in the Asset class column, and select the number of units (the quantity of the item) to be asset components in the Selected quantity column.
Component A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected quantity of the item will be components of the currently selected asset. A fixed asset can have any number of components. If you select the check box, specify (in the next column) the asset class that will be a child asset class of the current asset.
Asset class The asset class to which the selected quantity of the item must be assigned during conversion. The asset class will be a child asset class of the current asset. You should specify the asset class to which the selected units of the stock item will be assigned if the Component check box is selected.
Reconciled A check box that indicates whether the transaction is reconciled.
Branch The branch of your company where the asset is located.
Item ID The ID of the stock item.
UOM The unit of measure of the stock item.
Selected quantity

The quantity of the stock item selected to be a fixed asset.

By default, this value is 1; you can increase it to convert a larger quantity of the item into fixed assets as components of the current asset. To do this, select the Component check box and assign the selected units to the asset class by using the Asset class column.
Selected amount

The total cost of the selected quantity of the stock item.

This amount is equal to the selected quantity multiplied by the unit cost.
Open quantity The original quantity minus the selected quantity.
Open amount The total cost of the open quantity of the stock item, which is calculated as the open quantity multiplied by the unit cost.
Orig. quantity The original quantity, which is the number of units of the stock item that were purchased, according to the invoice entered into the system by using the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Unit cost The cost per unit, according to the invoice entered into the system in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Orig. amount

The total cost of units of the stock item that were originally purchased, according to the invoice.

This amount is calculated as the unit cost multiplied by the number of units that were purchased.
Transaction date The date of the invoice.
Transaction description The description of the purchased item.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000 page In this window, you can configure the Fixed assets workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) In this window, you can configure the Fixed assets workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can configure the Fixed assets workspace. These settings are used to assign the number series and special accounts used in the workspace, to set document processing options, and to select the depreciation history view. Before you can quickly convert purchased items into fixed assets, you should specify the **FA accrual account** and **FA accrual subaccount** in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window. This account and subaccount will be updated by the purchasing transaction. The account and subaccount that you specified in the [Fixed assets preferences (FA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-preferences-fa101000/) window will be the default account and subaccount for all the transactions associated with converting purchased items made by using the [Convert purchases to assets (FA504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/convert-purchases-to-assets-fa504500/) window. Also, this account will be the default account for the transactions made on the **Reconciliation** tab of the [Fixed assets (FA303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/fixed-assets-fa303000/) window. ## The top part This area contains four groups of configuration settings for the Fixed assets workspace. ## The Account settings section
Element Description
Accrual account

The asset account to be used to record the cost of items that have not been put into service yet but may become fixed assets in the future.

The transaction on this account will be listed in Convert purchases to assets (FA504500). So this account should be used for transactions that shall be converted to asset in the future. If the Convert purchases to assets (FA504500) window is loading too many transactions, please consider to change this setting to another account that is used only for this purpose.
Accrual sub. The subaccount to be used for such transactions.
Proceeds account The account to be used to record the proceeds from disposal of assets.
Proceeds subaccount The subaccount to be used to record proceeds from disposal of assets.
## The Other section
Element Description
Depreciation history view

The way the depreciation history is displayed on the Deprecation history tab in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window. The following options are available:

Side by side
For every book to which the asset is assigned, the table displays the calculated and amounted depreciation in separate columns.
By book
You select a book and the system displays the depreciation of the asset recorded in the selected book.
Depreciate in disposal period A check box that you select to make sure the asset is depreciated in all financial periods before the current financial period before you dispose of the asset.
Show accurate depreciation

The way calculated depreciation amounts are displayed in the system. Leave the check box clear to view the calculated depreciation amounts.

Alternatively, select the check box to view the reported depreciation amount for the previous financial periods and the depreciation adjustment for the current period. The adjustment is calculated as follows:

Adjustment = B2 – B1 + A1,

where;

  • B2 is the calculated depreciation amount for the current financial period,
  • B1 is the calculated amount of the previous financial period,
  • and A1 is reported depreciation amount of the previous financial period.
Require full reconciliation before disposal

A check box that you select to prohibit disposing of the assets that have the unreconciled amount.

Note

You can review the unreconciled amount for each asset on the Reconciliation tab in the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
Allow to modify predefined depreciation methods

A check box that you select to allow modification of the predefined depreciation methods.

Note

We strongly recommend that you create your own depreciation methods based on the predefined ones rather then modify the predefined depreciation methods.
## The Number series section
Element Description
Transaction number series The sequence to be used for assigning reference numbers to fixed asset transactions.
Asset number series The series to be used for assigning reference numbers to fixed assets.
Batch number series The series to be used for assigning reference numbers to batches originating in the Fixed assets workspace.
Tag number series The sequence to be used for assigning reference numbers to tags. Usually, every tangible asset has a label with a unique ID or a tag.
Copy tag number from asset ID A check box that you select to use asset IDs as tag numbers.
## The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically release acquisition transactions A check box that you select if the system should release acquisition transactions automatically.
Automatically release depreciation transactions A check box that you select if the system should release depreciation transactions automatically.
Automatically release disposal transactions A check box that you select if the system should release disposal transactions automatically.
Automatically release transfer transactions A check box that you select if the system should release transfer transactions automatically.
Automatically release reversal transactions A check box that you select if the system should release reversal transactions automatically.
Automatically release split transactions A check box that you select if the system should release split transactions automatically.
Update general ledger

A check box that you clear if transactions associated with fixed asset documents should not be posted to the General ledger when you import the assets with accumulated depreciation. Do not forget to select this check box after you finish importing the assets.

For more information, see: About fixed asset entry
Automatically post on release A check box that you select if transactions associated with fixed asset documents should be automatically posted on release.
Post summary when updating the general ledger A check box that you select to allow posting of batches with summary data to the General ledger. For these transactions, accounts that allow posting of summary values should be used.
Post depreciation summary when updating the general ledger

A check box that you select to post batches with depreciation data by summary to the General ledger.

If the Post summary when updating the general ledger check box is selected, then this check box is unavailable.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/generate-fixed-asset-calendars-fa501000 page By using this window, you can generate financial periods through the specified year for selected depreciation books (or all books) for which calendars were configured. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate fixed asset calendars (FA501000) By using this window, you can generate financial periods through the specified year for selected depreciation books (or all books) for which calendars were configured. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can generate financial periods through the specified year for selected depreciation books (or all books) for which calendars were configured. The periods for the posting book are generated in accordance with the General ledger calendar. The periods for the non-posting books are generated in accordance with the book calendars you have set up in the [Book calendars (FA206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/book-calendars-fa206000/) window. For more information about configuring the depreciation settings for fixed assets in Visma Net, see: [About depreciation of fixed assets](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/manage-fixed-asset-depreciation/about-depreciation-of-fixed-assets/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Generates calendars for the books you have selected (by using the Included check boxes) in the table.
Process all Generates calendars for all books listed in the table.
## The top part In the top part, you can specify the year through which the calendars of the selected books must be generated.
Element Description
Generate throughout year The year to be used as the last calendar year of the books selected for processing.
## The table In the table, you can view the list of depreciation books and select those for which you want to generate calendars through the year specified in the top part.
Column Description
Book ID The depreciation book, by its ID.
Description The brief description of the book.
First calendar year The year that starts the book calendar.
Last calendar year The year through which the book calendar has been generated already.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/release-fixed-assets-transactions-fa503000 page The window lists all fixed asset transactions that have a status of Balanced; you can release either all displayed transactions or only particular ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release fixed assets transactions (FA503000) The window lists all fixed asset transactions that have a status of Balanced; you can release either all displayed transactions or only particular ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the selected transactions and changes their statuses to Released or Unposted, depending on whether the Automatically post on release check box in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window is selected.
Release all Releases all the listed transactions and changes their statuses to Released or Unposted, depending on whether the Automatically post on release check box in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window is selected.
## The top part In this area, you can specify the criteria to select the transactions to be displayed in the table below.
Element Description
Origin

The origin of the transaction documents to be displayed:

Adjustment
Displays the list of documents that contain adjusting transactions.
Purchasing
Displays the list of documents that contain fixed asset acquisition transactions.
Depreciation
Displays the list of documents that contain fixed asset depreciation transactions.
Disposal
Displays the list of documents that contain fixed asset disposal transactions.
Transfer
Displays the list of documents that contain transactions created when the location, custodian, or department of the asset has changed.
Reconciliation
Displays the list of documents that contain transactions created when purchased items are converted to fixed assets on the Reconciliation tab of the Fixed assets (FA303000) window.
Split
Displays the list of documents that contain transactions created when a value is transferred from one asset to another or an asset is split by using the Split assets (FA506000) window.
Reversal
Displays the list of documents that contain reversal transactions.
Disposal reversal
Displays the list of documents that contain transactions created when disposals of fixed assets are reversed.
## The table This table displays the list of fixed asset transactions that have a status of **Balanced** and the selected origin (if one was specified). You cannot release transactions of assets that have the **On hold** status. Depreciation transactions of the same asset can be released only in period order; for example, it is impossible to release the depreciation transaction for the second period if the depreciation transaction for the first period has not been released first.
Column Description
Reference number

The identifier of the transaction document.

Click the ID to navigate to the Fixed asset transactions (FA301000) window, where you can view or edit details about the transaction.

A system-generated transaction cannot be edited; it can be deleted only if it was not released.
Origin The way the transaction was entered into the system.
Status The status of the transaction. Only Balanced transactions can be released.
Document date The date when the transaction document was created.
Period ID The financial period to which the transaction is related. This column is filled in for system-generated transactions only.
Description A user-defined or system-generated description of the transaction document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Split assets (FA506000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/split-assets-fa506000 page In this window, you can divide an asset into two or more separate assets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Split assets (FA506000) In this window, you can divide an asset into two or more separate assets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Split Based on the options that you have specified, splits an asset into new separate assets.
## The top part In the top part, you can select the fixed asset you want to split and specify options for the split.
Element Description
Fixed asset The fixed asset to be split into separate assets.
Cost The current cost of the selected asset.
Quantity The current quantity of the selected asset.
Split date The date of the split. By default, this field contains the current date, but you can specify another date.
Split period The financial period of the split. By default, the financial period that corresponds to the date, but you can select another period.
Depreciate before split

A check box that you select to depreciate the asset before splitting it.

This check box is available for editing only if the Automatically release depreciation transactions check box is selected in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window.
## The table You use this table to define the percentage, quantity, and amount for the new assets being split from the fixed asset.
Column Description
Cost The base currency amount to be assigned as the cost to the new asset.
Quantity The quantity to be assigned to the new asset.
Ratio The percentage of the original asset cost to be assigned to the new asset.
Asset ID The unique ID of the new asset.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Transfer assets (FA507000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/transfer-assets-fa507000 page By using this window, you can transfer fixed assets between departments of a single branch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transfer assets (FA507000) By using this window, you can transfer fixed assets between departments of a single branch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initialises the processing of the selected transfer transactions: prepares the transactions for posting, or releases the transactions and changes their statuses to Released or Unposted, depending on whether the Automatically release transfer transactions check box in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window is selected.
Process all Initialises the processing of all listed transfer transactions.
## The top part In this area, you can specify criteria for the fixed assets to be selected, as well as options that affect processing. ### The Transfer period section
Element Description
Transfer date The effective date for the transfer.
Transfer period The effective financial period of the General ledger transaction.
Reason The reason for the transfer.
### The Transfer from section
Element Description
Branch The company branch from which you want to transfer assets.
Department The department from which you want to transfer assets. Leave blank to view the assets of all departments.
Asset class The class of the assets you want to transfer. Leave blank to view the assets of all classes.
### The Transfer to section
Element Description
Branch Required. The company branch to which you want to transfer assets.
Department The department of the branch to which you want to transfer assets.
Asset class The class of the asset after transfer.
## The table View the list of assets that meet the criteria specified in the top part. You can transfer all the listed assets or only the ones you select in the list, and create (and, optionally, release) the appropriate transactions.
Column Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you select to include the asset in processing if you click Prepare.
Branch The branch of the company to which the assets are assigned.
Asset class The fixed asset class to which the assets belong.
Asset ID The fixed asset ID.
Description The description provided for the asset.
Parent asset The parent asset to which the assets are assigned. Any given fixed asset can have only one parent asset.
Basis

The depreciable basis, which is the amount that is allocated over the useful life of the asset.

This is a system-generated value; the amount of the depreciable basis depends on the depreciation method applied to depreciate the asset. For some methods, the basis can be equal to the acquisition cost minus the salvage amount.
Receipt date The date of the purchase receipt document, or the date when the asset was acquired.
Useful life, years The period of time, in calendar years, during which the asset is supposed to be used.
Transfer period The effective period of the General ledger transaction related to the transfer.
Fixed assets account The fixed assets account (an asset account) used to post the actual costs of the fixed asset.
Fixed assets sub.

The subaccount for the transaction.

The subaccount is automatically changed if the asset changes its location.
Tag number

The tag number of the asset.

Depending on the settings in the Fixed assets preferences (FA101000) window, the tag number may be the same as the item ID of the asset.
Fixed assets account class The class of the fixed assets account.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Fixed assets reports /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed assets reports Acquisitions (FA611000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/acquisitions-fa611000 section This report displays details of the fixed asset acquisitions for the specified financial period (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Acquisitions (FA611000) This report displays details of the fixed asset acquisitions for the specified financial period (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays details of the fixed asset acquisitions for the specified financial period (or all periods). The information can be filtered by book, fixed asset class, department, location, and custodian. The report displays the company information, acquisition cost, and debit and credit accounts and subaccounts. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Class

The class of the assets the report will cover.

Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department

The department to which the assets belong.

Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian

The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe.

Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Additions (FA691002) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/additions-fa691002 section This report displays information about the additions and added costs of fixed assets for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Additions (FA691002) This report displays information about the additions and added costs of fixed assets for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about the additions and added costs of fixed assets for the specified financial period. Fixed assets are grouped by department, class, and branch on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period that the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Additions monthly (FA691001) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/additions-monthly-fa691001 section This report displays information about the additions and added costs of fixed assets accounts and subaccounts for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Additions monthly (FA691001) This report displays information about the additions and added costs of fixed assets accounts and subaccounts for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about the additions and added costs of fixed assets accounts and subaccounts for the specified financial period. Fixed assets are grouped by department, class, and branch on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period that the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance (FA630000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/balance-fa630000 section This report lists fixed assets and shows the status of the asset balance, the useful life, the depreciation method, the last depreciation period, the business use (expressed as a percentage), the acquisition cost, the basis amount, the accumulated depreciation, and the net value. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance (FA630000) This report lists fixed assets and shows the status of the asset balance, the useful life, the depreciation method, the last depreciation period, the business use (expressed as a percentage), the acquisition cost, the basis amount, the accumulated depreciation, and the net value. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department The department to which the assets belong. Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe. Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance projection by account (FA670010) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/balance-projection-by-account-fa670010 section This report displays the projection of fixed asset balances for the specified financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance projection by account (FA670010) This report displays the projection of fixed asset balances for the specified financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the projection of fixed asset balances for the specified financial periods. Fixed assets are grouped by account–subaccount pairs on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Fixed asset account The fixed asset account of the fixed assets to be reported on. Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Fixed asset sub.

The fixed asset subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account accumulated depreciation The accumulated depreciation account to be reported on. Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Subaccount accumulated depreciation

The accumulated depreciation subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department The department to which the assets belong. Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe. Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance projection by class (FA670020) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/balance-projection-by-class-fa670020 section This report displays the projection of fixed asset balances for the specified range of the financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance projection by class (FA670020) This report displays the projection of fixed asset balances for the specified range of the financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Fixed assets are grouped by class. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Fixed asset account The fixed asset account of the fixed assets to be reported on. Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Fixed asset sub.

The fixed asset subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account accumulated depreciation The accumulated depreciation account to be reported on. Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Subbaccount accumulated depreciation

The accumulated depreciation subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department The department to which the assets belong. Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe. Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Depreciation (FA615010) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/depreciation-fa615010 section This report displays depreciation details of assets assigned to the specified book for the specified financial period (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Depreciation (FA615010) This report displays depreciation details of assets assigned to the specified book for the specified financial period (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays depreciation details of assets assigned to the specified book for the specified financial period (or all periods). Fixed assets can be grouped by classes on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Fixed asset account

The fixed asset account of the fixed assets to be reported on.

Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Fixed asset sub.

The fixed asset subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account accumulated depreciation The accumulated depreciation account to be reported on. Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Subaccount accumulated depreciation

The accumulated depreciation subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department

The department to which the assets belong.

Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian

The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe.

Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Disposals (FA612010) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/disposals-fa612010 section This report displays the disposal list for the specified financial period or periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Disposals (FA612010) This report displays the disposal list for the specified financial period or periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the disposal list for the specified financial period or periods. The report shows the disposal amount, debit and credit accounts, debit and credit subaccounts, capital gain, and gain on sale of assets. Fixed assets can be grouped by classes on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department The department to which the assets belong. Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe. Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Fixed asset balance by general ledger account (FA643000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/fixed-asset-balance-by-general-ledger-account-fa643000 section This report shows the balances of the accounts used in the Fixed assets workspace (as the Fixed asset account and Accumulated depreciation account) at the end of the selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed asset balance by general ledger account (FA643000) This report shows the balances of the accounts used in the Fixed assets workspace (as the Fixed asset account and Accumulated depreciation account) at the end of the selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can generate either the report that shows the total accounts balances posted by all fixed assets during the selected period (the **Summary** report), or the report that shows the list of fixed assets under each account with the amount posted to the account by each particular fixed asset (the **Detailed** report). ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The report format, which in this case indicates the level of detail of data in the report to be generated.

The following options are available:

Detailed
(default): The balance of each account (subaccount) is itemised by fixed assets or the total amount posted to each account (subaccount) is shown for each particular fixed asset.
Summary
The balance of each account (subaccount) at the end of the selected period are shown.
  • From date: The starting date of the date range the report will cover.

By default, the first date of the current period is used.

  • To date: The end date of the date range.

By default, the current business date is used.
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period

The required financial period.

By default, the current business period is selected.
Account The account whose balance will be shown in the report.
Subaccount

The subaccount related to the selected account which balance will be shown in the report. This field is available only if the

functionality is enabled in your system only if the Subaccounts in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Fixed balance projection by branch (FA670030) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/fixed-balance-projection-by-branch-fa670030 section This report displays the projection of fixed asset balances for the specified financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed balance projection by branch (FA670030) This report displays the projection of fixed asset balances for the specified financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report groups fixed assets by location. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover.

By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Fixed asset account The fixed asset account of the fixed assets to be reported on. Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Fixed asset sub.

The fixed asset subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account accumulated depreciation The accumulated depreciation account to be reported on. Select an account from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Subaccount accumulated depreciation

The accumulated depreciation subaccount.

Select a subaccount from the list, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Class

The class of the assets the report will cover.

Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department

The department to which the assets belong.

Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian

The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe.

Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Fixed assets cost by class (FA691101) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/fixed-assets-cost-by-class-fa691101 section This report displays information about the additions and disposals of fixed assets assigned to a specified book for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed assets cost by class (FA691101) This report displays information about the additions and disposals of fixed assets assigned to a specified book for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about the additions and disposals of fixed assets assigned to a specified book for the specified financial period. On the report, fixed assets are grouped by class on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch to be reported on.

By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book the asset transactions are posted to.

By default, the posting book is used.
Period

The financial period that the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Fixed assets list (FA610500) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/fixed-assets-list-fa610500 section This report lists summary information about fixed assets, listed by their IDs, for the specified range of dates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed assets list (FA610500) This report lists summary information about fixed assets, listed by their IDs, for the specified range of dates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists summary information about fixed assets, listed by their IDs, for the specified range of dates. You can select fixed assets by class, department, location, or custodian. The report provides company information, as well as the types, receipt dates, and statuses of the assets. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From date

The starting date of the date range the report will cover.

By default, the first date of the current period is used.
To date

The end date of the date range.

By default, the current business date is used.
Class

The class of the assets the report will cover.

Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department

The department to which the assets belong.

Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian

The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe.

Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Fixed assets net value (FA613000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/fixed-assets-net-value-fa613000 section This report displays information about the net value of fixed assets assigned to the specified book for the specified financial period (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fixed assets net value (FA613000) This report displays information about the net value of fixed assets assigned to the specified book for the specified financial period (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about the net value of fixed assets assigned to the specified book for the specified financial period (or all periods). The report shows the beginning and ending net values, addition amount per period, disposal amount per period, beginning and ending depreciation, and depreciation per period. Fixed assets can be grouped by classes on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

You must select a period.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department The department to which the assets belong. Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe. Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Mass disposal preview (FA680010) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/mass-disposal-preview-fa680010 section If the disposal transactions are not released automatically, this report displays the unreleased disposal transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Mass disposal preview (FA680010) If the disposal transactions are not released automatically, this report displays the unreleased disposal transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. If the disposal transactions are not released automatically, this report displays the unreleased disposal transactions. Transactions on the report are grouped by asset, account, and subaccount. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The report format, which in this case indicates the level of detail of data in the report to be generated.

The following options are available:

Detailed
(default): The balance of each account (subaccount) is itemized by fixed assets or the total amount posted to each account (subaccount) is shown for each particular fixed asset.
Summary
The balance of each account (subaccount) at the end of the selected period are shown.
From date

The starting date of the date range the report will cover.

By default, the first date of the current period is used.
To date

The end date of the date range. By default, the current business date is used.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Non-depreciated fixed assets (FA652000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/non-depreciated-fixed-assets-fa652000 section This report displays the assets that must be depreciated before you can close a financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Non-depreciated fixed assets (FA652000) This report displays the assets that must be depreciated before you can close a financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Splits (FA641000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/splits-fa641000 section This report displays information about the split transactions assigned to the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Splits (FA641000) This report displays information about the split transactions assigned to the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about the split transactions assigned to the specified financial period. The split transactions are displayed in the normalised window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Show transactions

The type of transactions to be displayed.

The following options are available: All, Released, and Unreleased.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Transactions by account (FA631010) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transactions-by-account-fa631010 section This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions for the specified financial period (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions by account (FA631010) This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions for the specified financial period (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions for the specified financial period (or all periods). Fixed asset transactions are grouped by account on the report, which shows the debit and credit accounts and subaccounts, the transaction amount and type, and the reference number and description of the asset. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Book

The depreciation book where the transactions to be reported on were entered.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Transactions by asset (FA631020) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transactions-by-asset-fa631020 section This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions by asset (FA631020) This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions. Fixed asset transactions are grouped by assets. The report shows the debit and credit accounts and subaccounts, as well as the transaction amount and type. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Book

The depreciation book where the transactions to be reported on were entered.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Transactions by class (FA631025) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transactions-by-class-fa631025 section This report displays information related to the fixed asset transactions for the specified financial periods (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions by class (FA631025) This report displays information related to the fixed asset transactions for the specified financial periods (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Fixed asset transactions are grouped by classes on the report. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department The department to which the assets belong. Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe. Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
View asset A check box you select to display the asset reference numbers and descriptions in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Transactions by period (FA631015) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transactions-by-period-fa631015 section This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions for the specified financial periods (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions by period (FA631015) This report displays information related to fixed asset transactions for the specified financial periods (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required company from the list. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report will cover. By default, the current branch is selected. Leave the field blank to view the information about assets of all the branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book

The book to which the assets to be reported on were assigned.

By default, the posting book is used.
From period

The starting financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
To period

The ending financial period of the range of periods the report will cover.

By default, the current business period is used.
Class The class of the assets the report will cover. Select a fixed asset class from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all fixed asset classes.
Department The department to which the assets belong. Select a department from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all departments.
Custodian The person who is responsible for keeping the assets safe. Select a person from the list, or leave the field blank to view information about assets of all custodians.
View asset A check box you select to display the asset reference numbers and descriptions in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Transfer transactions (FA642000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transfer-transactions-fa642000 section This report displays information about the transfers of the fixed assets in the specified range of financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transfer transactions (FA642000) This report displays information about the transfers of the fixed assets in the specified range of financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about the transfers of the fixed assets in the specified range of financial periods. The transfer transactions are displayed in the normalised window. The information in the report is grouped by assets. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Show transactions

The type of transactions to be displayed.

The following options are available: All, Released, and Unreleased.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Transfers (FA640000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/transfers-fa640000 section This report displays information about the fixed assets account and subaccount changes, transactions of fixed asset cost and accumulated depreciation, and other changes assigned for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transfers (FA640000) This report displays information about the fixed assets account and subaccount changes, transactions of fixed asset cost and accumulated depreciation, and other changes assigned for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased fixed assets documents (FA651000) /visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/unreleased-fixed-assets-documents-fa651000 section In this report, you can view the depreciation transaction documents that must be released before you can close a financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased fixed assets documents (FA651000) In this report, you can view the depreciation transaction documents that must be released before you can close a financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this report, you can view the depreciation transaction documents that must be released before you can close a financial period. You can navigate to this report directly, or it is displayed when you click **Show open documents** in the [Close financial periods (FA509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-asset-windows/close-financial-periods-fa509000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} General ledger /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger General ledger - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-overview page The General ledger workspace is the central financial application of Visma Net, offering integration with other workspaces and giving instant access to mission-critical financial data. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger - overview The General ledger workspace is the central financial application of Visma Net, offering integration with other workspaces and giving instant access to mission-critical financial data. The General ledger workspace is the central financial application of Visma Net, offering integration with other workspaces and giving instant access to mission-critical financial data. By using this workspace, you can monitor all transactions that are entered or automatically generated in the General ledger workspace. Each time a transaction is released in any other workspace, the information is posted to the general ledger. The primary functionalities of the General ledger workspace are described briefly below and in detail in other topics in this section. ## The chart of accounts You can establish the system of accounts that best supports your company's operations. The chart of accounts allows four account types: assets, liabilities (balance sheet accounts), income, and expenses (income statement accounts). The accounts can be categorised into user-defined account classes, such as petty cash and travel expenses, for convenient grouping of accounts on reports and for budgeting. Visma Net also allows you to configure and use two special system-maintained accounts: **YTD net income** and **Retained earnings**. ## User-defined subaccounts In Visma Net, you can use subaccounts with your accounts. The user-defined subaccounts reflect your operational needs, support reporting and analytical needs and enable you to keep the number of your accounts manageable. For details, see: [Manage subaccounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/manage-subaccounts-overview/). To use subaccounts, the **Subaccounts** functionality must be enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Flexible account and subaccount IDs Visma Net accommodates flexible configuration of account and subaccount (if the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system) IDs. To make account and subaccount IDs meaningful for users of the system, you may compose the IDs of multiple segments. The total length of IDs may be up to 30 characters. For details, see: [About account IDs](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-account-ids/) and [About subaccount IDs](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/about-subaccount-ids/). ## Account and subaccount security To restrict access to sensitive accounts and subaccounts, assign them to a restriction group. Only the users assigned to the same restriction group will have permission to work with the applicable accounts and subaccounts. ## User-definable financial year and periods A financial year is a year-long period with the start date you have specified. You can define any number of accounting periods within the financial year, and you can add a special adjustment period. Once you have defined financial periods, they will be generated for each subsequent financial year. ## Flexible period-end closing procedures Visma Net provides multiple options so that you can configure period closing procedures in accordance with your company policies. At any point in time, you can have multiple active periods. Activating a period doesn't require closing a previous one. For details, see: [About period-end closing procedures](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/about-period-end-closing-procedures/). ## Batch processing and scheduling of transactions General ledgertransactions are organised in batches. ransactions posted to the General ledger workspace can be manually entered or system-generated, posted from other workspaces, such as Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, or Inventory. Batches with recurring transactions may be assigned to easy-to-configure schedules to be repeated periodically. Period-end adjustment transactions can generate auto-reversing batches. ## Support for multiple ledgers Visma Net supports the following types of ledgers: **actual**, **budget**, **reporting**, and **statistical**. If your company has multiple branches, each of the branches may have one actual ledger and an unlimited number of ledgers of other types. ## Multi-currency support If multi-currency support is enabled, the system will use the base currency for updating account balances, but users can enter transactions in a foreign currency. Also, you can maintain accounts denominated to foreign currencies. The system will keep the balance of such accounts in the base currency and the currency of denomination. You can define default currency exchange rate types, to make data entry easier. For details, see: [About denominated accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-denominated-accounts/) and [About foreign currency transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/about-foreign-currency-transactions/). ## Trial balance import capabilities By using Visma Net, you can import trial balance data from consolidation units for reporting, or from third-party software to initialise the system during implementation. You can export the data in.csv or.xlsx format and import the data to Visma Net, thus saving time and preventing input mistakes. For details, see: [Import trial balances - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/import-trial-balances/import-trial-balances-overview/). ## Automation of allocations With Visma Net, you can use allocation templates to automate multiple allocations. You create an allocation source by specifying a group of accounts and subaccounts, with the help of grouping masks. Visma Net lets you automatically post amounts to multiple destination accounts and distribute the source amount by percentages, quantities, and PTD or YTD balances of the destination account. For details, see: [About allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations/about-allocation-rules/). ## Flexible budgeting capabilities Visma Net makes creating budgets an easy task. You can create a single budget structure that will be used by all branches and that consists of multiple levels of articles and subarticles. You can create a virtually unlimited number of budgets and budget scenarios, and you can compare budgets to other budgets or to actual data. Access to budget articles is managed by using restriction groups. For details, see: [Manage budgets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/manage-budgets-overview/). ## General ledger consolidations By using the General ledger workspace, you can perform various consolidation tasks. If your organisation is a consolidation unit, you can configure mapping of the accounts and subaccounts to the parent company accounts and subaccounts, as well as specify which ledgers contain consolidation data. If your organisation is a parent company, you can: + Configure remote access to the websites of each of the consolidation units. + Create a ledger to hold the consolidated data. + Periodically import consolidation data from the website of each consolidation unit. + Run consolidated reports. For details, see: [General ledger consolidation - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/general-ledger-consolidation-overview/) and [About account mapping for consolidations](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/about-account-mapping-for-consolidations/). ## The analytical report manager Use the analytical report manager to define and edit the analytical reports that consolidate and summarise data in meaningful ways that suit your business. To generate the reports for specific periods or to limit the volume of data displayed in the report, you can use data filters. ## Audit trail The General ledger workspace provides a full audit trail of journal transactions, along with information on the user who entered the transaction and the user who modified the record. The system does not allow any user to delete or cancel posted general ledger transactions. The only possible way to correct general ledger balances is to enter a correcting general ledger transaction with appropriate comments. The system can also be configured to keep modification history for any transaction. ## Other functionalities and options The General ledger workspace also supports the following functionalities: + Subaccounts along with accounts in every transaction record, for in-depth analysis + Transaction posting in summary or in detail + Multiple options for configuring financial periods, and the possibility to define custom periods + Extensive drill-down capabilities available for inquiries, reports, and processing windows + Data consolidation for any number of reporting units + Efficient data entry with many user-defined default values + Ability to perform allocations at any period-end time Manage accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts section Each company has its own structured list of general ledger accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage accounts Each company has its own structured list of general ledger accounts. Each company has its own structured list of general ledger accounts. When your accounts have been designed to capture the financial information you need, you are better positioned to make good financial decisions. Visma Net provides you with the ability to configure the chart of accounts that suits your company's needs. You add accounts of the required types by using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. About account types and classes /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-account-types-and-classes page When you make decisions about how to structure the chart of accounts for your company, you must consider a number of questions that will help you to establish the system of accounts that matches your company's operations, such as: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About account types and classes When you make decisions about how to structure the chart of accounts for your company, you must consider a number of questions that will help you to establish the system of accounts that matches your company's operations, such as: + What are the reporting requirements of the country and state (or province) where the company is located? + What level of detail do you actually need? The chart of accounts is created in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. Accounts in the chart of accounts are grouped by account types and, independently, by user-defined account classes. ## Types of accounts Four types of general ledger accounts are supported by the system: assets, liabilities (balance sheet accounts), income, and expenses (income statement accounts). Assigning accounts to specific types implements accounting logic. We recommend that you make the account types recognisable by the account IDs. ## Account classes The user-defined account class is used as a property of any general ledger account. Visma Net provides a list of predefined account classes that can be modified if needed. Account classes can be used in reports and inquiries for convenient grouping, sorting, and filtering of the financial information associated with general ledger accounts. For example: Liability accounts can be divided into the following classes: + Current liabilities, Supplier ledger + Current liabilities, Wages payable + Current liabilities, Interest payable + Long-term liabilities, Bonds payable + Long-term liabilities, Mortgage loan payable ## Populating the chart of accounts You use the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window to populate the chart of accounts. Account IDs should be set in a logical way and should comply with national standards and any held by the specific industry. For example: You might use the following account IDs: + 1000-1999: Assets accounts + 2000-2999: Liability accounts + 3000-3999: Income accounts + 4000-4999: Cost of goods sold accounts + 5000-6999: Expense accounts + 7000-7999: Other expenses accounts The order of accounts in each type of accounts may depend on the industry and differ from country to country. In some cases, part or all of the expense accounts are listed in alphabetical order. Set up account numbers in each type of accounts with gaps between them so you can insert new accounts if necessary. ## Special accounts Visma Net supports two special liability general ledger accounts: **Year-to-date net income** and **Retained earnings**. These accounts, which should be specified during General ledger setup in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, are system-maintained. Related reference [Subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/) [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About account IDs /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-account-ids page Accounts of different types should be easily recognisable to users by their IDs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About account IDs Accounts of different types should be easily recognisable to users by their IDs. Account IDs must comply with the following terms: + National generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) + Accounting best practices + Restrictive rules of financial reporting (in some countries) Well-planned design of account IDs increases users' efficiency. When IDs are meaningful, users can make fewer errors and enter data more quickly. Visma Net accommodates flexible configuration of account IDs with the help of segmented keys. Before you start creating a chart of accounts, take the time to think through the whole system of accounts (and subaccounts, if the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system) and the ways their IDs will be composed. Although you may add a segment to a segmented key or remove it from the key after some accounts have been created, these actions may have unpredictable results. ## Configuration of account IDs A **segmented key** is a system entity that you use to define the structure of IDs used in the system. The segmented key then serves as a template when a user creates an ID, such as for an account in the system. To configure the general ledger account IDs, in the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window, select the segmented key **ACCOUNT** and specify the settings for this key. The segmented key may contain an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters. It may be divided into multiple segments or may be non-segmented. In accounting, accounts are divided into multiple types: **asset**, **liability**, **equity**, **income**, and **expense**. In Visma Net, each accounts has a corresponding account type (**Asset**, **Liability**, **Income**, and **Expense**), associated with it. The account type can also be reflected in account IDs to make them recognisable to users. For example: By using a non-segmented account ID, you may set certain rules to associate the first character in the account ID with the account type as follows: **1** for asset accounts, **2** for current and long-term liabilities, **3** for income accounts, **4** through **7** for expense accounts, and so on. Alternatively, you could create a two-segment account ID, reserve the first one-character segment for account type, and reserve the second segment for the account number within the particular type. You should create logical and systematic account IDs to make them easy for users to recognise. This reduces the possibility of errors during data entry. ## Validation of account IDs Visma Net offers validation functionality, which you can use to reduce errors that could occur when the account IDs are defined. Before you add accounts by using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) windows, you can turn on the validation for each particular segment of the segment key that is used for accounts. To turn on the validation, in the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window, you need to select the **Validate** check box for a particular segment or all segments of the **ACCOUNT** segmented key. Once you have configured the **ACCOUNT** segmented key, in the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window, you specify the list of segment values for the segmented key. As a result, when you create an account ID, for a segment for which the **Validate** check box is selected, you can add a segment value only by selecting an appropriate one from the list of existing segment values. You open this list by pointing at any segment in the input mask that appears (such as ****_/**/____**, which indicates the number of segments and their lengths) and pressing**F3**. If the **Validate** check box is not selected for some segments, values for those segments will not be validated. When you enter new values for a non-validated segment, the values will not be added to the list of segment values automatically. About YTD net income and retained earnings accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-ytd-net-income-and-retained-earnings-accounts page In Visma Net, there are two special system-maintained accounts: YTD (Year-to-date) net income and Retained earnings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About YTD net income and retained earnings accounts In Visma Net, there are two special system-maintained accounts: YTD (Year-to-date) net income and Retained earnings. In Visma Net, there are two special system-maintained accounts: **YTD (Year-to-date) net income** and **Retained earnings**. Both accounts are of the **Liability** type and must be created in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window before any actual data is entered. The **YTD net income** account tracks net income accumulated since the beginning of the financial year or the difference between amounts posted to income and expense accounts. This account is updated by every transaction posted. During closing of the financial year, the balance of **YTD net income** account is transferred to the **Retained earnings** account, and the balance of **YTD net income** is reset to zero for a new financial year. > [!NOTE] > Transactions cannot be posted directly to the **YTD net income** account. The account itself cannot be changed once any journal transactions have been posted. The **Retained earnings** account accumulates the company’s net income (or loss) that is retained by the company after the dividends have been paid. Retained earnings are summarised over the years since the first year of company operations. During the financial year closing, this account is updated by the amount accumulated on **YTD net income** account. You can post direct transactions to this account, such as dividends paid to shareholders. This account is normally reported in the Shareholders' equity section of the balance sheet. Related reference [Chart of accounts - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) About denominated accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-denominated-accounts page If multi-currency support is activated (the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), a general ledger account may be marked as denominated. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About denominated accounts If multi-currency support is activated (the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), a general ledger account may be marked as denominated. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). If multi-currency support is activated (the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window), a general ledger account may be marked as denominated. A **denominated** account is one with a balance maintained in two currencies: the currency of denomination and the base currency. The currency of denomination is often a foreign currency, but it can be the base currency too. The foreign currency balance represents the actual holding of the company, whereas the base currency balance is just its reporting equivalent. In comparison with ordinary accounts, denominated accounts have a few specific restrictions: + You can enter and post to denominated accounts only journal entries in denominated currency. + Denominated accounts cannot be used as direct or contra source accounts or destination accounts for allocations. + You cannot mark an accounts as denominated if it has at least one journal entry in a currency other than the currency of denomination. + Due to currency rate fluctuations, you may need to revalue balances of denominated accounts at the end of the period. Because of these restrictions, you should denominate only accounts that absolutely must be denominated. Generally, these are the base accounts for cash accounts. You can always cancel the account denomination by clearing the **Currency** field in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. ## Revaluation of foreign currency accounts A denominated account has two balances: one in the currency of denomination, and another in the base currency. Each posted transaction updates both balances: foreign currency amounts update the foreign currency balance, and their base currency equivalents update the base currency balance. Because different transactions may use different exchange rates and even different rate types, the two balances of the denominated account do not relate to one another by any particular exchange rate or rate type. The rates of nearly all major foreign currencies fluctuate frequently due to changing market conditions. At the period end, cash, assets, and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are revalued to reflect their current values. During the revaluation process, the base currency balance is recalculated using an exchange rate effective at the date of revaluation. The default rate type for revaluation is specified for each denominated account in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. The difference between the accumulated base currency balance and the calculated value is posted to the revaluation gain account or revaluation loss account, depending on the sign of the difference. Revaluation gains and losses are included in the net income for the current period. Generally, revaluation is performed at the end of each financial period, but you can run it as often as needed, each time the results are adjusted with respect to the previous revaluation. For each account denominated to a foreign currency, a rate type to be used for revaluations is specified in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. Related reference [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Create an account class /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/create-an-account-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an account class 1. Go to the [Account classes (GL202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-classes-gl202000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Account class ID** field, type a unique identifier for the account class. 1. In the **Description** field, briefly describe the class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can later delete the account class only if no accounts have been associated with it. View an account summary /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/view-an-account-summary page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View an account summary 1. Go to the [Account summary (GL401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/). 1. In the **Ledger** field, select the ledger. 1. In the **Financial period** field, select a period. (By default, the current period is selected.) 1. To inquire about the accounts of specific class, select an **Account class**. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, do one of the following: + Specify a subaccount. + Specify a mask to view a group of subaccounts. To define a mask, specify the values for only some of the segments. The system will select all the different subaccounts that have the specified segment values. + Leave this field blank to view transactions on the account detailed by all relevant subaccounts. 1. Select the **Show currency details** check box if you want to view currency details. This option appears only if multi-currency support is activated for your system. 1. In the table, view the summary balance for general ledger accounts and subaccounts that meet the selection criteria you have entered. 1. Optional: View more information by doing any of the following: + To view account details, select an account and click **Account details** on the table toolbar. + To view account balances by subaccount, select an account and click **Account by sub** on the table toolbar. + To view account information by financial period, select an account and click **Account by period** on the table toolbar. + To view account activity for the previous period, click **Go to previous record** on the window toolbar. + To view account activity for the next period, click **Go to the next record** on the window toolbar. View account details /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/view-account-details page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View account details 1. Go to the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window. 1. In the **Ledger** field, select the ledger. 1. In the **From period** field in the top part, select the financial period that begins the time range of the batches you want to view. 1. In the **To period** field, select the financial period that ends the time range of the batches you want to view. 1. If you have a lot of data that you want to view, select the **Manually started search** check box. When you have entered the account in the **Account** field.and selected the filter options listed below, you can click the **Search** button. The system will list the first transactions that matches your search filter. If you want to see more search results in the list, click the **Search** button again. 1. If you want the search to start automatically, select an account from the list of existing accounts in the **Account** field. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, do one of the following: + Specify a subaccount. + Specify a mask to view a group of subaccounts. To define a mask, specify the values for only some of the segments. The system will select all the different subaccounts that have the specified segment values. + Leave this field blank to view transactions on the account detailed by all relevant subaccounts. 1. To specify an interval within the selected financial period, specify an appropriate start date and end date. 1. Use the check boxes on the right side of the top part to adjust the information you want to view in the list: + To view only daily total credits and total debits, select the **Show summary** check box. Totals are calculated over all the transactions that occur during a day of the period. Per default, seven columns are displayed: **Transaction date**, **Period**, **Beginning balance**, **Quantity**, **Debit amount**, and **Credit amount**, **Ending balance**. + To add the batches with the **Unposted** status, select the **Include unposted** check box. + To add the batches with the **Balanced** status, select the **Include unreleased** check box. + To add the batches with the status **Posted** that have been reclassified, select the **Include reclassified** check box. You can only select this check box when the **Show summary** check box is clear. + To view currency details, select the **Show currency details** check box, which appears only if multi-currency support was activated for your system. 1. In the list in the table, view the transactions that updated the account balance (for the selected subaccount or a group of subaccounts) during the selected financial period. 1. Optional: View more data as follows: + To view similar information for the financial period preceding the current one, click **Go to previous record** in the window toolbar. + To view similar information for the financial period after the current one, click **Go to the next record**. View account balances by period /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/view-account-balances-by-period page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View account balances by period 1. Go to the [Account by period (GL402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-by-period-gl402000/) window. 1. In the **Ledger** field, select the ledger. 1. In the **Financial year** field, select a year. 1. In the **Account** field, select an account from the list of existing accounts. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, do one of the following: + Specify a subaccount. + Specify a mask to view a group of subaccounts. To define a mask, specify the values for only some of the segments. The system will select all the different subaccounts that have the specified segment values. + Leave this field blank to view transactions on the account detailed by all relevant subaccounts. 1. Select the **Show currency details** check box if you want to view currency details. This option appears only if multi-currency support is activated in your system. 1. In the table, view the account balances calculated for the financial periods of the year. 1. Optional: View more information on the account as follows: + To view account details, click **Account details** in the table toolbar. + To view account balances by subaccount, click **Account by subaccount** in the table toolbar. + To view account balances in the previous year, click **Go to previous record** in the window toolbar. + To view the data for the next year, click **Go to the next record**. View the trial balance on reports /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/view-the-trial-balance-on-reports page The trial balance is the listing of all active accounts with their beginning and ending balances, and the debit and credit transactions for the period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View the trial balance on reports The trial balance is the listing of all active accounts with their beginning and ending balances, and the debit and credit transactions for the period. The trial balance is the listing of all active accounts with their beginning and ending balances, and the debit and credit transactions for the period. You use the trial balance report to ensure that accurate data is maintained in the actual ledger, so this data can be used in the financial reporting for your business. If the total value of all debit entries equals the total value of the credit entries, the data is accurate and can be used to prepare a profit and loss statement and a balance sheet. If the totals are not equal, by using the functionality of inquiries and reports, you can drill down to the transaction that caused the error. ## Use the account summary window 1. Go to the [Account summary (GL401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/) window. 1. In the **Ledger ID** field, select the actual ledger. 1. In the **Financial period** field, select a period. View the trial balance. 1. Optional: By using the **Account class** and **Subaccount** fields, filter the balances. 1. Optional: By using the **Account details**, **Account by subaccount**, and **Account by period** buttons, drill down to particular debit and credit transactions. 1. Optional: By using the filter text field, set up criteria to display only specific accounts on the list. ## Use the trial balance summary report 1. Go to the [Trial balance summary (GL63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-summary-gl63200s-report/) window. 1. In the **Ledger ID** field, select the actual ledger. 1. In the **Financial year** field, select a financial year. 1. In the **From period** and **To period** fields, select the period to include. 1. In the **From account** and **To account** fields, select the series of accounts to include. 1. Optional: Select the **Combine totals** check box if you want debits and credits to be calculated to one value. 1. Select the **Suppress zero balances** check box if you want to exclude accounts with zero balances from the report. 1. Click **Run report**. 1. Review the company trial balance information grouped by general ledger account. ## Use the trial balance detailed report 1. Go to the [Trial balance detailed (GL632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-detailed-gl632500/) window. 1. In the **Ledger ID** field, select the actual ledger. 1. In the **Financial period** field, select a financial period. 1. Optional: Select the **Combine totals** check box if you want debits and credits to be calculated to one value. 1. Select the **Suppress zero balances** check box if you want to exclude accounts with zero balances from the report. 1. Click **Run report**. 1. Review the company trial balance information, grouped by the type of general ledger accounts and detailed to a particular subaccount.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 View reconciled accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/view-reconciled-accounts page The steps of how to view accounts that has been reconciled in the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View reconciled accounts The steps of how to view accounts that has been reconciled in the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window. For more information: [Journal reconciliation (GL30201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-gl30201s/). 1. Go to the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window. + If you have a lot of data that you want to view, select the **Manually started search** check box, enter the account that you use to reconcile transactions and click the **Search** button. 1. Optional: If you want to view a reconciliation document, click the number in the **Reconciliation ref. no.** column. You will now be redirected to the [Journal reconciliation (GL30201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-gl30201s/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage subaccounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage subaccounts Manage subaccounts - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/manage-subaccounts-overview page General ledger accounts hold all financial data for your organisation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage subaccounts - overview General ledger accounts hold all financial data for your organisation. In Visma Net, in addition to accounts, you can use subaccounts. To use subaccounts in your system, the **Subaccounts** functionality must be enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Subaccounts are usually used to compartmentalise large accounts for better tracking of various company earnings and expenses, or for budget allocation. For example: A company might set up a subaccount for each of its departments to clarify the record keeping. If subaccounts are activated in your system, they are always required with accounts; that is, when you specify an account, you need to specify the corresponding subaccount. Subaccounts can be based on the structure of your organisation, such as the department, cost centre, or product. You use subaccounts to virtually split accounts into smaller, more specific accounts to achieve finer classification for reporting and internal management purposes. These topics provide an example of configuring subaccount identifiers and includes the procedures related to subaccounts in the system. ## Topics + [About subaccount IDs](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/about-subaccount-ids/) + [Example of a subaccount definition](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/example-of-a-subaccount-definition/) + [About combined subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/about-combined-subaccounts/) + [Add a subaccount](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/add-a-subaccount/) + [Deactivate a subaccount](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/deactivate-a-subaccount/) + [View account balances by subaccount](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/view-account-balances-by-subaccount/) About subaccount IDs /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/about-subaccount-ids page In the General ledger workspace, you can use either only accounts, or both accounts and subaccounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About subaccount IDs In the General ledger workspace, you can use either only accounts, or both accounts and subaccounts. In the General ledger workspace, you can use either only accounts, or both accounts and subaccounts. In the latter case, each subaccount is used in a pair with the corresponding account. Subaccounts are usually used to meet internal management needs. By using subaccounts, your organisation can virtually break down an account into multiple accounts that are smaller and more specific, for better tracking of budgets or expenses for reporting. In Visma Net, you can configure subaccount IDs so that the users can easily recognise each particular subaccount in the system. You configure a subaccount ID with the help of the **segmented key** that lets you define the structure of the ID, and serves as a template for creating the subaccount ID. Before you start creating the list of required subaccounts, take the time to think through the whole system of accounts and subaccounts and the ways their IDs will be composed. If you add a segment to a segmented key or remove it from the key after some subaccounts have been created, these actions may have unpredictable results. ## Configuration of subaccount identifiers To configure the subaccount IDs, in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, select the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key and specify the settings for this key. he segmented key may contain an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters. It may be divided into several segments or may be non-segmented. To make subaccount IDs meaningful for users of the system, you could compose IDs of several segments with different meanings. For example: The general ledger subaccount IDs could contain a two-character regional branch code, a one-digit department number, and a three-character product type, resulting in an ID such as CA-1-T32. ## Validation of subaccount segment values You can turn on the validation that will be applied while adding each particular segment value when you create a subaccount in any data entry window (in which a subaccount can be added). In the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, select the **Validate** check box for a required segment (or segments) of the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key. As a result, when you create a subaccount, for a segment with the **Validate** check box selected, you select a segment value from the list of existing segment values. You open this list by pointing to any segment in the input mask (such as ****_/**/____**, which indicates the number of segments and their lengths), and pressing F3. If the **Validate** check box is not selected for a segment, you can enter any segment value. In that case, the new values are not added to the list of segment values automatically. ## Validation of subaccounts entry You can turn on the validation that will be applied when you add a subaccount in a data entry window (in which a subaccount can be added). This validation controls whether a subaccount is entered by selecting an existing subaccount from the list of subaccounts. To turn on the validation of subaccount entry, clear the **Allow adding new values on the fly** check box in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. The **Allow adding new values on the fly** check box works as follows: + If the check box is cleared, users can add a subaccount only by selecting an existing one from the list of subaccounts. + If the check box is selected, users can enter a subaccount by specifying the values segment by segment. Selecting the **Allow adding new values on the fly** check box is helpful when the number of segments and the number of values in each segment could produce too many combinations to enter them in advance. Parent topic: [Manage subaccounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/manage-subaccounts-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Example of a subaccount definition /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/example-of-a-subaccount-definition page Consider an example that is explored in other articles in this section. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Example of a subaccount definition Consider an example that is explored in other articles in this section. North Serpent Company, with stores in the mountainous areas of California and Nevada, sells skis and snowboards and offers rental services. Each sale transaction of a ski or a snowboard is recorded to sales account 40000, but later, at the period closing, management would like to know the total sales on skis in Nevada store and the total sales on snowboards in California store, as well as the total rental of snowboards in California store and the total rental of skis in Nevada store. Thus, we can split the sales account into eight more specific accounts, for example, as shown below: + 40100: Ski sales in the Nevada store + 40200: Snowboard sales in the Nevada store + 40300: Ski rentals in the Nevada store + 40400: Snowboard rentals in the Nevada store + 40500: Ski sales in the California store + 40600: Snowboard sales in the California store + 40700: Ski rentals in the California store + 40800: Snowboard rentals in the California store To enter a transaction, a user has to remember all the accounts, but it is easy to mistype the account. The following section explores some ways Visma Net makes this process easier and less error-prone. ## Subaccount identifiers In Visma Net, accounts and subaccounts are referred to by their identifiers. Generally, account identifiers must follow the regulations used in your country. Because subaccounts are mostly used for internal management purposes, greater flexibility is allowed for their design. Identifiers can be segmented. Segmented identifiers with meaningful, recognizable segment values, because they are easier to enter, reduce the input error rate. For the North Serpent Company, you could define a three-segment subaccount in the following way: + First segment: Company division - **NV** (Nevada) and **CA** (California) + Second segment: Profit centre - **RENT** (rentals) and **SALE** (sales) + Third segment: Product type - **SK** (skis) and **SB** (snowboards) All sales and rental transactions can then be posted to the sales account 40000 with the following subaccounts: NV-SALE-SK : To enter sales amounts on skis in Nevada NV-SALE-SB : To enter sales amounts on snowboards in Nevada NV-RENT-SK : To enter amounts received on ski rentals in Nevada NV-RENT-SB : To enter amounts received on snowboard rentals in Nevada CA-SALE-SK : To enter sales amounts on skis in California CA-SALE-SB : To enter sales amounts on snowboards in California CA-RENT-SK : To enter amounts received on ski rentals in California CA-RENT-SB : To enter amounts received on snowboard rentals in California Later, the documents and records can be filtered by any combination of subaccount segment values to produce the requested balances. Subaccounts simplify data analysis as follows: + If you do not specify any subaccount, you will see the balances of natural accounts, reflecting the overall company performance. + If you select a particular subaccount, you will see the result of specific transactions. Parent topic: [Manage subaccounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/manage-subaccounts-overview/) Related reference [Chart of accounts - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) [Subaccounts - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/) [../shared-files/cs202000-ref.html](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About combined subaccounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/about-combined-subaccounts page Parent topic: Manage subaccounts - overview 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About combined subaccounts Parent topic: Manage subaccounts - overview For more information: [Manage subaccounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/manage-subaccounts-overview/). With the combined subaccount functionality provided by Visma Net , you can define rules for combining a subaccount from multiple subaccounts to keep the most detailed records. For example, when you enter a document, such as a purchase invoice or a sales, in the system, multiple subaccounts are involved, such as the subaccount associated with the product being purchased or sold, the subaccount associated with the employee handling the operation, and the subaccount associated with the supplier or customer involved. With the combined subaccount functionality, you can use a particular subaccount that is a combination of the involved subaccounts that you select or you configure a rule that the system uses to compose a new subaccount identifier by using the segment values of each of the selected subaccounts.The combined subaccounts functionality is available in the following workspaces: Supplier ledger , Customer ledger , Projects , Time and expenses , Inventory , and Sales orders . For the Supplier ledger , Customer ledger , Projects , and Time and expenses workspaces, you specify the combined subaccount in the Combine [type] sub. from field in the Visma Net window where you specify preferences for that workspace. For example, to specify the combined expense subaccount to be used for non-stock items in data entry windows in the Supplier ledger workspace, you use the Combine expense sub. from field in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. If you use the Inventory module in your system, you can configure most of the combined subaccounts in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window of the Inventory workspace. ## Configuration of a combined subaccount A field for a combined subaccount contains a subaccount mask, such as **––––.––.–––.––––**, in accordance with the segmented structure of subaccounts defined in your company. You can specify the rule for selecting the values for the segments of a combined subaccount from the subaccounts involved. Note: We recommend that you select the **On-the-fly entry** check box for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, so that the system can generate valid subaccounts segment by segment. Otherwise, all the subaccounts that may result from combining segments from multiple sources must be predefined in the system or added to the list of valid subaccounts in the [Subaccounts (GL203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/) window. To set up a rule for combined subaccounts, do the following: 1. Point to the required segment, press F3, and select the required segment value, which determines the source of the value that will be used for a subaccount. You can select one of the following options (the available options in the list vary depending on the workspace and on the document type): For a segment, the character designating the option is repeated as many times there are characters in the segment (for example, **CCCC**, **EEEE**, **IIII**, or **LLLL** for a four-character segment, and **CC**, **EE**, **II**, or **LL** for a two-character segment). + **C**: The subaccount associated with the company branch + **E**: The subaccount associated with the employee + **I**: The subaccount associated with the stock or non-stock item + **L**: The subaccount associated with the customer location or a supplier location + **P**: The subaccount associated with the project + **T**: The subaccount associated with the project task + **S**: The subaccount associated with the salesperson + **W**: The subaccount associated with the warehouse 1. Repeat Step 1 for each segment of the combined subaccount. ## Example of a combined subaccount Suppose that a company uses the **XX-XX-XXXX** subaccount structure, with the segments used as follows: 1. **XX**: A two-character segment designating a branch. Possible values are **MN** (a branch on Main Street), **BW** (a branch on Broadway Street), **CA** (a branch on California Street), and **00** (not applicable or a non-specific value). 1. **XX**: A two-character segment designating a product line. Possible values are **B1, B2, B3**, and **00** (not applicable or a non-specific value). 1. **XXXX**: A four-character segment to specify a department involved. Possible values are **DEVP, PRDC**, and **0000** (not applicable or a non-specific value). The company buys specific services required for the product line **B1** from the supplier VENDOR Inc. The company's default expense accounts involved in this transaction are listed below with the characters used to designate the respective subaccount or a segment of the subaccount in the combined subaccount: 00-B1-PRDC : For the supplier location ( **L** ) BW-00-DEVP : For the employee monitoring the services provided by the suppliers ( **E** ) CA-00-0000 : For the company's receiving branch ( **C** ) 00-B1-0000 : For the non-stock item featuring the service provided ( **I** ) For this company, the combined subaccount would be specified as follows: **EE-II-LLLL** . Here, **EE** means that the value for the first segment is copied from the first segment of the default subaccount associated with the employee. The **II** means that the value for the second segment is copied from the second segment of the default subaccount associated with the stock item. The **LLLL** means that the value for the third segment is copied from the third segment of the subaccount associated with the supplier's default location. The resulting subaccount is **BW-B1-PRDC** . Parent topic: [Manage subaccounts - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/manage-subaccounts-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Add a subaccount /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/add-a-subaccount section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a subaccount ## Before you proceed 1. In the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, be sure the structure of the subaccount has been configured. 1. Review the meanings of the subaccount segment values in your organisation. You define valid values by using the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for segments requiring validation. 1. Got to the [Subaccounts (GL203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/) window. 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to append a blank row to the table. The input mask for subaccounts is shown in the **Subaccount** column for the new row. 1. Create the subaccount segment by segment by using one of the following methods, depending on whether the **Validate** check box is selected for the segment in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window: + If the **Validate** option is selected, select the segment value from the list of predefined values. + If the option is not selected, type a value for the segment. Only the number of characters and the type of string (specified in the **Edit mask** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window) will be validated. 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for the subaccount. 1. Optional: In the **Description** column, briefly describe the subaccount. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** in the window toolbar. Deactivate a subaccount /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/deactivate-a-subaccount section A subaccount for an account that has transactions posted cannot be deleted; if such a subaccount is not used any more, you can deactivate it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deactivate a subaccount A subaccount for an account that has transactions posted cannot be deleted; if such a subaccount is not used any more, you can deactivate it. A subaccount for an account that has transactions posted cannot be deleted; if such a subaccount is not used any more, you can deactivate it. The subaccount, after deactivation, remains in the database but does not appear on the list of subaccounts for selection. 1. Go to the [Subaccounts (GL203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/). 1. To quickly find a subaccount, type a segment value in the **Search** field at the bottom left of the window and review the results. 1. Click anywhere in the row with the subaccount you want to deactivate. 1. Clear the **Active** check box for the subaccount. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. View account balances by subaccount /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-subaccounts/view-account-balances-by-subaccount page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View account balances by subaccount 1. Go to the [Account by subaccount (GL403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-by-subaccount-gl403000/) window. 1. In the **Ledger** field, select the ledger where the account you want to view is located. 1. In the **Financial period** field, select the period. 1. In the **Account** field, select the account. 1. In the **Subaccount** field, do one of the following: + Specify a subaccount. + Specify a mask to view a group of subaccounts. To define a mask, specify the values for only some of the segments. The system will select all the different subaccounts that have the specified segment values. + Leave the field blank to view transactions on the account broken down by all relevant subaccounts. 1. Select the **Show currency details** check field if you want to view currency details. This option appears only if multi-currency support is activated in your system. 1. In the table, view the account balances for the selected subaccount or group of subaccounts. 1. Optional: View more information as follows: + To view the account balances by subaccount in the previous period, click **Go to previous record** in the window toolbar. + To view the data for the next period, click **Go to the next record**. + To view the account details, select a subaccount and click **Account details**. Import trial balances /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/import-trial-balances section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import trial balances Import trial balances - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/import-trial-balances/import-trial-balances-overview page In Visma Net, to initialise the system during initial implementation, you can import either a trial balance (or balances) or a number of general ledger transactions from third-party software. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import trial balances - overview In Visma Net, to initialise the system during initial implementation, you can import either a trial balance (or balances) or a number of general ledger transactions from third-party software. In Visma Net, to initialise the system during initial implementation, you can import either a trial balance (or balances) or a number of general ledger transactions from third-party software. If you import the general ledger transactions, you do not need to import the trial balance because the trial balance will be computed by the system automatically according to imported general ledger transactions. If you do not need to keep the history of general ledger transactions in Visma Net, you can import the trial balance only. Before importing the trial balance, you need to select the period to start keeping records in Visma Net, and decide whether you want to import the history of balances for multiple preceding periods or just one period. We recommend that you import the trial balance for at least one period prior to the period in which you start using Visma Net. For example: If you start using Visma Net in 01-2021, you import the trial balance for at least 12-2020. In the third-party software, you should prepare the data to be imported. For each required period, you should run the trial balance report. If the third-party software has no such report, you need to use a traditional trial balance report and calculate the balances of accounts by using information about the account types. ## Prepare and edit the file to be imported From the third-party software, you should export the prepared trial balance data to a CSV file (.csv) or to an Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx). The file should have the following columns: + **Account**: The account ID of the account to be imported. + **Subaccount**: The subaccount ID of the subaccount to be imported. If there is no specific subaccount for a particular account, specify a non-specific subaccount that fits the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key in your system, for example, **000-00-00**. This column is required only if you plan to use subaccounts with your accounts. In that case, the **Subaccounts** functionality should be enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. + **YTD balance**: The ending balance of the account for the period. The balance can be provided either with the positive or with negative sign. For details about the signs of the balance, see sections below in this topic. For this column, the **Currency** or **Text** format setting can be specified in the Excel file. The file can contain multiple columns with the balances for different financial periods. + **Description** (optional): Any meaningful description of the account that you can add for convenient working with the file. You should not import the balance of the **YTD net income** account; Visma Net calculates this balance automatically from the imported balances of income and expense accounts. ## Specify the sign of the trial balance The following types of trial balances can be used in different accounting software: + Normal trial balances are those that have debit balances for asset and expense accounts and credit balances for liability and income accounts, and these balances are displayed with the plus sign if the respective debit or credit balances are positive. + Reversed trial balances are those that have normal balances of asset and expense accounts or positive amounts are displayed with the plus sign. The balances of liability and income accounts are reversed: the credit balances of these accounts are positive, but they are displayed with the minus sign. From the third-party software, you have exported either the normal or the reversed type of the balance, so before you start importing the trial balance to Visma Net, you need to specify an appropriate option in the **Sign of the trial balance** field in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window: Normal : To keep the signs of account balances while importing a trial balance Reversed : To reverse the signs of credit balances of the liability and income accounts while importing a trial balance ## Import normal balances Normal balances satisfy the following validation criterion. `Total debit balance of the (assets + expense)accounts = Total credit balance of the (income + liabilities) accounts` The example below demonstrates a trial balance with normal account balances. |Account|Type|Balance| |---|---|---| |Cash|Asset|100| |Customer ledger|Asset|400| |Supplier ledger|Liability|100| |Shareholders' equity|Liability|100| |Retained earnings|Liability|100| |Sales|Income|400| |COGS|Expense|100| |Other expense|Expense|100| |**Totals:**||| |**Debit total (asset accounts +expense accounts)**||**700**| |**Credit total (income accounts + liability a ccounts)**||**700**| For a normal trial balance, you select **Normal** as the **sign of the trial balance** in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## Importing reversed credit balances The reversed credit balances, implemented in some applications, satisfy the following validation criterion. `Total debit balance of (assets + expense)accounts = - (Total credit balance of (income + liabilities)accounts)` This criterion can also be expressed as follows. `Total debit balance of (assets + expense)accounts + Total credit balance of (income + liabilities)accounts = 0` The example below demonstrates a valid trial balance with reversed credit balances for liability and income accounts. |Account|Type|Balance| |---|---|---| |Cash|Asset|100| |Customer ledger|Asset|400| |Supplier ledger|Liability|-100| |Shareholders' equity|Liability|-100| |Retained earnings|Liability|-100| |Sales|Income|-400| |COGS|Expense|100| |Other expense|Expense|100| |**Totals:**||| |**Debit total (asset accounts +expense accounts)**||**700**| |**Credit total (income accounts + liability accounts)**||**-700**| Before importing a reversed trial balance, you should select the **Reversed** option in the **Sign of the trial balance** box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, so that the balances of liability and income accounts will be imported properly. ## Process imported data You import data by uploading a specially prepared Excel or CSV file with the trial balance in the[Trial balance (GL303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/trial-balance-gl303010/) window. You import data to a selected target branch into its posting ledger to the specified financial period. For the import to complete successfully, you have to map the imported list of accounts (and subaccounts, if any) to the internal accounts (and subaccounts) used in Visma Net. After you have uploaded the file with the trial balance, the list of accounts (and subaccounts) to be imported are displayed on the **Transaction details** tab. Visma Net performs most of the mapping of the imported accounts (and subaccounts) and the internal accounts (and subaccounts) automatically when you select the **Validate** action and click **Process** or **Process all** in the table toolbar. However, after the mapping process is finished, some lines can contain unmapped accounts (and subaccounts). Such records are marked as errors and displayed in red font. The system also marks the duplicate records as errors. In this case, you need to perform the mapping of accounts and subaccounts manually, and merging the duplicate records (by processing the **Merge duplicates** action on the table toolbar). If you import the trial balance data for system initialisation, the **Exceptions** tab will be empty because the target ledger contains no records. If you perform periodic imports, the **Exceptions** tab contains the list of accounts (and subaccounts) with their balances (as currently recorded in the ledger for the specified period) that are not present in the data being imported. In this case, you should review this list carefully and make sure that the balances of these accounts should be equal to zero in the period for which you are importing the trial balance. This review is needed because on release of the trial balance entry, for each account listed on the **Exceptions** tab, the system generates a transaction that makes the account balance zero for the period you are importing the trial balance for. If these accounts balances should be non-zero, verify and correct the list of accounts in the file from which you are importing the trial balance. Once you are done mapping the accounts and adjusting the records, clear the **Hold** check box and release (**Release**) the trial balance entry. After the release, the system will generate a batch of general ledger transactions that adjusts account balances in the ledger to match the imported trial balance. Only the **Balanced** trial balance entry can be released. If you import the trial balance for the second financial period and all subsequent financial periods, the system generates journal entries in the amount of the difference between the ending balances of the previous period and the imported balance of the next period. Therefore, if you import the trial balance for more than one financial period, you have to release each generated batch and post the transactions before you import the trial balance for the next period; otherwise, the transactions might be generated incorrectly. During the release of the trial balance entry, the system generates a general ledger batch with the **On hold** status. For normal balances, for each asset and expense account, the system generates a debit entry if the imported balance is positive, or a credit entry if the imported balance is negative. For each liability and income account, the system generates a credit entry if the imported balance is positive, or a debit entry if the imported balance is negative. For the reversed balances, for each liability and income account, the system generates a credit entry if the imported balance is negative, or a debit entry if the imported balance is positive. If you have imported the trial balance incorrectly, or you have had some inconsistencies during the importing process, you can repeat the importing procedure once again. After you release and post the general ledger batch, the account balances will be adjusted.

Related pages

Tasks

 Import trial balance /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/import-trial-balances/import-trial-balance page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import trial balance ## Before you proceed Before importing trial balances, make sure of the following: + The CSV file (.csv) or the Excel file (.xlsx) is correctly prepared for importing trial balance data in the system. For details, see: [Import trial balances - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/import-trial-balances/import-trial-balances-overview/). + The chart of accounts is configured, and all required accounts are defined in Visma Net. + If the trial balance file to be imported contains subaccounts, the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. + In the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, in the **Sign of the trial balance** field, the selected option corresponds to the balances that you are going to import ( **Normal** or **Reversed** ). 1. Go to the [Trial balance (GL303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/trial-balance-gl303010/) window. 1. In the **Import date** field, specify the date of import. By default, the system business date is specified in this field. 1. In the **Period** field, specify the financial period to which the imported data should be posted. We recommend that you import the trial balance for at least one period prior the period in which you start using Visma Net. For example: If you start using Visma Net in 01-2021, you import the trial balance for at least 12-2020. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch of the organisation whose trial balance is to be imported. 1. In the **Ledger** field, select the ledger to which the imported data should be posted. By default, this is the default posting ledger specified in the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. 1. In the **Control total** field, enter the control amount to be used to validate the total amount of the balance to be imported. This amount is equal to the sum of the debit totals (of the asset and expense accounts) and the credit totals (of the liability and income accounts) of the trial balance. This field is available only if the **Validate batch control totals on entry** check box is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. 1. On the **Transaction details** tab, perform the following steps to prepare for the import: 1. In the table toolbar, click **Load records from file**. 1. In the **File upload dialog box**, select the required file and click **Upload**. 1. In the **Common settings dialog box**, do the following and click **OK**: + In the **Null value** field, type the character that is used as the null value in the source file, or leave this field empty. + In the **Culture** field, select the locale in which the data is presented in the source file. + In the **Mode** field, select the **Insert all records** option to update records existing in the system. 1. In the **Columns dialog box**, for the columns in your file, select the appropriate property name. Click **OK**. The records are exported from the file to the table area of the **Transaction details** tab. 1. In the table, select the unlabelled check box next to a record or all records. 1. In the table toolbar, select the **Validate** action, and click **Process** (to validate selected accounts) or **Process all** (to validate all accounts in the list). The system performs most of the mapping automatically. 1. If there are unmapped accounts or subaccounts, map them manually to the corresponding internal accounts or subaccounts. 1. If there are duplicate accounts or subaccounts, on the table toolbar, select the **Merge duplicate** action, and click **Process** or **Process all**. After that, select and process the **Validate** action once again. 1. Review the list on the **Exceptions** tab. If you perform periodic imports and the target ledger contains records, this tab displays the list of accounts and subaccounts (with their balances) that currently exist in the ledger for the period you are importing the trial balance for and that are not present in the data being imported. For details, see: [Import trial balances - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/import-trial-balances/import-trial-balances-overview/). 1. Check the **Debit total** amount and the **Credit total** amount in the top part. Clear the **Hold** check box. The import entry gets the **Balanced** status. 1. Click **Save** in the window toolbar. 1. Click **Release** in the window toolbar. 1. In the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, release and post the batch generated for the imported trial balance. If you are going to import the trial balance for more than one financial periods, you have to import the trial balances one by one successively, and release and post each generated batch before you import the trial balance for the next period. It is required because the system generates journal entries in the amount of the difference between the ending balances of the previous period and the imported balance of the next period. Set up a financial year /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a financial year Set up a financial year - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/set-up-a-financial-year-overview page One of the first tasks of system configuration is setting up the financial year and financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a financial year - overview One of the first tasks of system configuration is setting up the financial year and financial periods. One of the first tasks of system configuration is setting up the financial year and financial periods. The system provides flexibility for setting up the financial year and its periods because the start date and required number of periods of the financial year vary across businesses and countries. The following topics provide information and step-by-step instructions on initial configuration of the financial year and financial periods in the system. ## Topics + [About the financial year and financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/about-the-financial-year-and-financial-periods/) + [Configure week-based financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-week-based-financial-periods/) + [Configure a fiscal year and its periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-a-fiscal-year-and-its-periods/) + [Configure a financial year that matches the calendar year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-a-financial-year-that-matches-the-calendar-year/) + [Shift the first year one year earlier](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/shift-the-first-year-one-year-earlier/) + [Add an adjustment period](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/add-an-adjustment-period/) About the financial year and financial periods /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/about-the-financial-year-and-financial-periods section Parent topic: Set up a financial year - overview 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the financial year and financial periods Parent topic: Set up a financial year - overview For more information: [Set up a financial year - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/set-up-a-financial-year-overview/). ## The financial year Generally, a financial year is defined by its start date and lasts twelve months. The financial year may be set as a calendar year starting January 1, or it may be different. For example: The company's financial year begins on October 1 of the previous calendar year and ends on September 30 of the year that gives the financial year its number—so the financial year 2020 ran from October 1, 2019, to September 30, 2020. You select the **Belongs to next year** option in the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window when the financial year starts late in the calendar year and gets its number from the next year. The system calculates the end date of the financial year automatically as the end date of the last period. For details, see: [Configure a financial year that matches the calendar year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-a-financial-year-that-matches-the-calendar-year/) and [Configure a fiscal year and its periods.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-a-fiscal-year-and-its-periods/) If you have configured a financial year, and then you have discovered that this is not the year that you need, the system allows you to delete your financial year setup by clicking **![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png)** in the window toolbar and create the new one. You can delete the financial year setup only if there are no financial periods generated for this year in the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. ## The first financial year The first financial year usually designates the year when the company starts processing its operations in Visma Net. However, if you plan to transfer beginning balances for the accounts, activate at least one period that precedes the first period of actual operations. For example: If you plan to start using Visma Net from the first period of a new financial year, select the previous year as the first year, generate all periods, activate only the last period of that year, and enter initial balances in the last period of the "first" year. If your company starts operations in Visma Net after the year's first financial period, activate only the period when you actually start entering transactions. You cannot post transactions with dates earlier than the start date of the first active period of the first financial year in Visma Net. You should not change the start date of the first financial year if any financial periods have been generated and transactions have been posted to them. Nevertheless, if needed, during system implementation and initiation, you can shift the start date one year earlier. For details, see [Shift the first year one year earlier](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/shift-the-first-year-one-year-earlier/). ## The financial year periods The financial year is divided into financial periods, which may have equal or different durations. The total length of all periods may or may not be equal to the year. When setting up periods, you can select an option based on months or weeks, or you can define custom-length periods. If you select one of the options based on months (**Month**, **Two months**, or **Quarter**), the periods will start and end on the same dates each year, and each successive financial year will start and end on the same date. However, if you define periods by using an option based on weeks ( **Week**, **Two weeks**, **Four weeks**, **4-4-5 weeks**, **4-5-4 weeks**, or **5-4-4 weeks** ), the start and end dates of same-name periods will vary with the year, and the number of periods per year may vary. Financial periods based on weeks start on the same day of the week and end on the same day of the week. However, a calendar year has 365 or 366 days, while the maximum length of the a year's periods based on weeks is 364 days. For a financial year based on the **4-4-5**, **4-5-4**, or **5-4-4** option, the system automatically adds an additional week to the last period if the gap between the end of the financial year and the end of the last period exceeds three days. For a financial year with week-long periods, to process the difference between the length of a calendar year and the length of all week-long periods, you can select one of the following year-end calculation options: Last day of the financial year : The system adds an additional (53rd) week-length period if the last period ends four or more days earlier than the financial year ends. If the last period ends fewer than four days earlier, no additional period is added. Include the Last <Day of week> of the financial year : You can select a specific day of the week (Sunday, Monday, or any other day of week) for this method, and the system will add an additional (53rd) week-length period if the year's last period doesn't include the last in the financial year specific day of the week, and adds no additional period if the last period includes the last in the financial year specific day of week. Include <Day of week> nearest to the end of financial year : The system defines the end of the year so that its last period includes the selected day of the week that is nearest to the end of the financial year. An additional (53rd) period is added if the specific day of the week is closer to the end of the year than to the end of the last period. The financial periods for each new financial year can be generated in the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. ## Modification of the periods for the current year Once financial periods are defined, the same periods will be used for all subsequent financial years. If needed, you can modify the financial periods of the upcoming year by using the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. You can change the financial period settings if all previous financial years are closed and you did not post any transaction to any period of the current financial year. However, modifying periods is **highly inadvisable**, since it will affect all budgets and reports that compare information about the previous and current year. Such a change may result in reporting errors and formatting problems. If you need to modify the periods of the upcoming year, generate the periods for this year and select the **User-defined periods** check box. After that, you can edit the end date for any of the periods, with the start date of the next period adjusted automatically. It may happen that after you have modified the periods, the last period ends on a different date than the financial year does. Then, once you attempt to save the periods, the system lets you select a method to make the year end on the end date of the last period. You can select one of the following options: Modify start date of the next year : To move the start date of the next financial year to the end of the last period. Modify financial year settings : To modify the settings of the financial year to make the last period end when the year ends. Extend the last period : To extend the last period so that it will include the end of the year. If you modify one-week periods, the day of week on which the last period ends may not be the same day of the week on which other periods of the year end, and once you save the modified periods, the system will let you choose whether to move the start day of the week for periods of the next year. Make sure that you move the start day of periods to another day of week only if it is absolutely necessary; the change of the start day will affect budgets and reports that compare the data of successive financial years. ## Adjustment period An adjustment period is a special one-day period added after the last period in a year. Its end date is the same as its start date. An adjustment period can be used for posting only adjustment transactions. If you need to, you can add an adjustment period during the initial financial year setup. For details, see: [Add an adjustment period.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/add-an-adjustment-period/) Later, you can add an adjustment period for a particular financial year or delete it for a particular financial year (if it was configured) by using the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. To enable modification of periods, select the **User-defined periods** check box and add an adjustment period (with the end date the same as the start date) after the last period. Alternatively, you can select the last period and select a check box in the **Adjustment period** column for this period. When you click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**,the last period will become an adjustment period with the new end date equal to initial start date of the period. Parent topic: [Set up a financial year - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/set-up-a-financial-year-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Create a new financial year /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/create-a-new-financial-year section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new financial year To go back to the main process, click outside this pop-up window. ## Before you start Before a new financial year starts, you must create the new periods for this financial year. Once this is done, account balances will be transferred and updated continuously while you still post into the old year. The new financial year will be created with the same settings as the existing financial year. 1. At the top of the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). The new financial year is created. 1. Click **Generate periods**. The periods for the new financial year are created. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Configure week-based financial periods /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-week-based-financial-periods section In Visma Net, you can configure a financial year with weeks as financial periods by using the Financial year (GL101000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure week-based financial periods In Visma Net, you can configure a financial year with weeks as financial periods by using the Financial year (GL101000) window. For more information: [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/). ## Configure a financial year 1. Go to the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window. 1. In the **Start financial year** field, specify the start date of the first financial year in which your company wants to keep records in Visma Net. 1. In the **First financial year** field, review the first year based on the start date. If you want to change the first financial year, change the start date, as described in Step 2. If you plan to start recording operations at the very start of the financial year, select the previous year as the first financial year. This will allow you to enter initial account balances in the period before the first period of actual transactions. 1. Make sure the **Belongs to next year** check box is cleared if your financial year gets its name from the current year. 1. To define periods, in the **Period type** field, select **Week**. 1. In the **Periods start day of week** field, select the day of week on which periods will start. 1. In the **Year end calculation method** field, select one of the following options, which will be used to define the end of each financial year: + **Last day of the financial year**: To add an additional (53rd) week-length period if the last period ends four or more days earlier than the financial year ends. If the last period ends less than four days earlier, no additional period will be added. + **Include last <Day of week> of the financial year** (here, **<Day of week>** is the day of week that is the last in your week period): To add an additional (53rd) week period if there is a complete week between the end day of the last period and the end of the year. + **Include <Day of week> nearest to the end of financial year**: To add an additional period if the last period ends four or more days earlier than the financial year ends. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Generate financial periods 1. Go to the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new year. 1. Click **Generate periods**. The system will display the periods for the newly added year, which are generated according to the settings of the financial year. Review the periods and the last date of the financial year. 1. If the periods have not been generated as you expected, click **![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png)** to remove the generated periods and return to the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window to select another method of end-year calculation. 1. If the periods have been generated as you planned, click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. Configure a fiscal year and its periods /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-a-fiscal-year-and-its-periods section You use the Financial year (GL101000) window to configure a fiscal year that has month-based periods (each consisting of one, two, or three months) in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a fiscal year and its periods You use the Financial year (GL101000) window to configure a fiscal year that has month-based periods (each consisting of one, two, or three months) in Visma Net. For more information: [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/). If your financial year matches the calendar year, see [Configure a financial year that matches the calendar year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-a-financial-year-that-matches-the-calendar-year/). 1. Go to the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window. 1. In the **Financial year starts on** field, specify the start date of the first financial year in which your company wants to keep records in Visma Net. 1. In the **First financial year** field, review the first year based on the start date. If you want to change the first financial year, change the start date, as described in the previous step. 1. Select the **Belongs to next year** check box if the fiscal year gets its number from the year when the fiscal year ends. 1. Define the periods of the year. In the **Period type** field, select one of the following options: + **Month**: Each financial period lasts one month, and there are 12 periods per year. + **Two months**: Each financial period lasts two months, and there are 6 periods per year. + **Quarter**: Each financial period lasts a quarter (four months), and there are 3 periods per year. 1. Select the **Add adjustment period** check box if you want the system to generate an adjustment period. 1. Make sure the **Adjust to period start** check box is cleared. 1. Click **Generate periods**. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. Configure a financial year that matches the calendar year /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/configure-a-financial-year-that-matches-the-calendar-year section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a financial year that matches the calendar year 1. Go to the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window. 1. In the **Start financial year** field, specify the start date as **January 1** of the first financial year for which your company wants to keep records. 1. In the **First financial year** field, review the first year based on the start date. If you want to change the first financial year, change the start date, as described in the previous step. If you plan to start recording operations at the very start of the financial year, select the previous year as the first financial year. This will allow you to enter initial account balances in the period before the first period of actual transactions. 1. Make sure the **Belongs to next year** check box is cleared. 1. To define periods, in the **Period type** field, select one of the following options: + **Month**: To define 12 month-long periods + **Two months**: To define six equal periods per year + **Quarter**: To define four periods per year, with each period to last three months 1. Make sure the **Adjust to period start** check box is cleared. 1. Select the **Use adjustment period** check box if you want to add an adjustment period. 1. Click **Generate periods**. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. Shift the first year one year earlier /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/shift-the-first-year-one-year-earlier section When you start to use Visma Net, if you realise that some financial data (such as beginning balances for general ledger accounts) should be posted before the start date, you may need to shift the first financial year earlier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shift the first year one year earlier When you start to use Visma Net, if you realise that some financial data (such as beginning balances for general ledger accounts) should be posted before the start date, you may need to shift the first financial year earlier. You can shift the first year by using the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window. ## Shift the first year 1. Go to the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window. Review the information about the first financial year configured in the system. 1. Click **Shift the first year**. This brings up a message that warns you about the consequences of such an action. CAUTION: Shifting the first year to an earlier date can affect statistics and data on reports. 1. Click **Yes** to shift the first year and close the message window. 1. On the window toolbar, click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Generate periods for the first year 1. Go to the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. 1. Click **Add year before the first**. This brings up a message that warns you about the consequences of such an action. 1. Click **Yes** to add the first year and close the message window. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. 1. Click **Generate periods**. 1. On the list of periods, select the **Active** check box only for the period or periods for which you will enter the data. Now you can enter the required transactions to the active periods of the new first year. To be able to close any of the later periods, you should close the periods of the first year first. Add an adjustment period /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/add-an-adjustment-period section In Visma Net, you can add an adjustment period for each year only during initial setup, when you configure your financial year and its periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add an adjustment period In Visma Net, you can add an adjustment period for each year only during initial setup, when you configure your financial year and its periods. However, when you are generating financial periods for the next year, you can easily add an adjustment period for this particular year. In Visma Net, you can add an adjustment period by using the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. 1. Go to the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to add a new year. 1. Click **Generate periods**. The system will display the periods for the newly added year, which are generated according to the settings of the financial year. 1. Select the **User defined periods** check box. This brings up a message that warns you about the consequences of such an action: Modifying periods may affect statistics, budgets, and reports. 1. Click **Yes** in the warning dialog box. You will see the list of financial periods in the table. Two new columns appear in the table ( **Adjustment period** and **Period length** ). 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** in the table toolbar. The system adds a new period as an adjustment period. Review the values that appear in the new row by default. The start and end dates of the adjustment period should be the same as the end date of the previous period. 1. Make sure the check box in the **Adjustment period** column is selected for the last period. Type a new description for the period that would indicate that this is an adjustment period. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. Manage financial periods /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage financial periods Generate periods for a new financial year /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/generate-periods-for-a-new-financial-year section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate periods for a new financial year ## Before you proceed Make sure the financial year and its periods have been configured in the [Financial year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) window. 1. Go to the [Financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Add new record**. The new year will appear in the **Financial year** field. Note the information in the **Start date** and **Number of periods** info fields. These settings, determined in the [Financial year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) window, are used for the generation of new periods. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Generate periods**. 1. In the table, select the **Active** check box for each of the periods to which you are going to post transactions. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Activate a financial period /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/activate-a-financial-period section When a new financial period starts, you may need to activate (open) it to be able to select this period in documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate a financial period When a new financial period starts, you may need to activate (open) it to be able to select this period in documents. When a new financial period starts, you may need to activate (open) it to be able to select this period in documents. A financial period can be activated by using the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. You can open more than one period at a time. 1. Go to the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. 1. In the table, review the list of financial periods. 1. Select the **Active** check boxes for periods you want to open for posting transactions 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Close financial periods /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/close-financial-periods page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods ## Before you start Before you close the period for the workspaces Customer ledger and General ledger, the VAT period must be closed for the financial period you want to close. When all batches are posted, you can close a financial period. Follow the steps below to close a financial period in one operation via the General ledger. 1. Select the periods you want to close. You can multi-select periods by selecting the check box of the last period you want to close. 1. Click **Close periods**. 1. If there are still open periods in other workspaces, confirm that you want to close them together with the general ledger periods. If there are still open batches you will get an error message. Normally you cannot post into closed periods, but you can change this if you go to the[General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) and select the option **Allow posting to closed periods**. This is also possible during an on-going financial year.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About period-end closing procedures /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/about-period-end-closing-procedures page Visma Net provides multiple options to let you configure period-closing procedures in accordance with your company's policies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About period-end closing procedures Visma Net provides multiple options to let you configure period-closing procedures in accordance with your company's policies. Employees at your company can decide when to perform period-end closing procedures. You do not need to postpone period-end closing to allow recording of certain transactions dated in the period to be closed. Posting transactions to closed periods is possible if the **Allow posting to closed periods** option in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window is selected. At any point in time, you can have multiple active periods. Activating a period doesn't require closing a previous one. ## Perform period-end closing Follow your company's internal procedures to determine the prerequisites to closing a financial period. Your company might require the following tasks to be completed before a period is closed: + Performing allocations + Generating recurring documents and releasing them + Performing revaluation of foreign currency accounts + Generating and reviewing the trial balance To close a period in General ledger, you first have to perform the closing operations in the subledger workspaces you are using. These include the following: + Customer ledger + Supplier ledger + Cash management + Inventory + Fixed assets A period is considered closed only when it has been closed in the General ledger workspace by using the [Close financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/) window. This window gives you information about the status of periods in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. If a period has not been closed in any of the workspaces, you can close it there. Closing a period in general ledger initiates the generation of auto-reversing batches if the **Generate auto-reversing entries on period closing** check box is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. You should never close the last activated financial period; always activate one or more financial periods before you close a period. ## Close a period in a subledger workspace A financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. You need to perform the closing procedure in only the subledger workspaces that are activated in your system. A period can be closed in Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets as follows if in the workspace there are no documents with the **Released**, ( **Unposted** ), **Balanced**, or **On hold** status that are to be posted to this period: + To close a period in Supplier ledger, use the [Close financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/) window. + To close a period in Customer ledger, use the [Close financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/) window. + To close a period in the Cash management workspace, use the [Close financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/) window. + To close a period in the Inventory workspace, use the [Close financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/) window. + To close a period in the Fixed assets workspace, use the [Close financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/) window. When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well. During the initial stage of using Visma Net, if you decided to add one or more periods before the first financial period, you can activate those periods (even if you have one or more closed periods) and post the required transactions to them. Later, to be able to close any of the later periods, you should close those periods first. ## Perform year-end closing In Visma Net, year-end closing is performed automatically when you close the last period of the financial year. Thus, closing the last period of the financial year should be done only when the company is ready to close the general ledger financial year. Period-end closing for the last period of the financial year must be completed in all other active workspaces before users can perform year-end closing in the General ledger workspace. The year-end closing may include the following stages: + At the end of the financial year, generating periods for the new year and activating at least one of them + Carrying out the operations according to your company's "year-end" check list + Closing the last period in general ledger and fulfilling all the requirements During closing of the financial year, the balance of YTD net income account updates the Retained earnings account, which accumulates the net income over years. After that, the balance of the YTD net income account is reset to zero for a new financial year. The balances of the balance sheet accounts are simply transferred into the new financial year, while balances of other accounts are reset to zeros. Related reference [Financial year](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Close a financial period from any workspace /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/close-a-financial-period-from-any-workspace page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close a financial period from any workspace ## Before you start Before you close the period for the workspaces Customer ledger and General ledger, the VAT period must be closed for the financial period you want to close. When all batches are posted, you can close a financial period. Many companies might choose to close the financial periods for the different workspaces separately. 1. Select the periods you want to close. You can multi-select periods by selecting the check box of the last period you want to close. 1. Click **Close periods**. If there are still open batches you will get an error message. Reconcile general ledger before closing the financial period /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/reconcile-general-ledger-before-closing-the-financial-period page Before you close the active financial period or when you want to reconcile financial periods, you should check possible differences between the General ledger and certain other workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile general ledger before closing the financial period Before you close the active financial period or when you want to reconcile financial periods, you should check possible differences between the General ledger and certain other workspaces. You can also check how many outstanding invoices you have, how many incoming payments you have received, and if there are unreleased VAT transactions in the system. ## Reconcile Customer ledger and General ledger + To see the differences between Customer ledger and General ledger, run the [Balance sheet specification/Open entries (GL63309S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-specification-open-entries-gl63309s/) to see the difference between the open invoices total and account total values. + To view how many outstanding invoices you had in the end of a period, run the [Customer summary (AR65050S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/customer-summary-ar65050s/) to see the beginning balance of the following period. Also check the [Aged outstanding (AR631500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ar631500/). + To see how many incoming payments your company has received, run the [Process incoming payments (AR305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/process-incoming-payments-ar305000/) report that shows all received payments. ## Reconcile Supplier ledger and General ledger + To see the differences between Supplier ledger and General ledger, run the [Balance sheet specification/Open entries (GL63309S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-specification-open-entries-gl63309s/) to see the difference between the open invoices total and account total values. + To see how many outstanding invoices you had in the end of a period, run the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/). Also check the [Aged outstanding (AP631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ap631500/) report. + To see the payments you have sent via AutoPay, run the [Sent payments (AP61300S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/sent-payments-ap61300s/). ## Reconcile VAT and General ledger + You will get a warning when you are preparing the VAT report and there are unreleased transactions with a VAT ID in the system. You can run the **All unreleased transactions** report in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window to see these transactions. + You can also run the [VAT account control details (TX40400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-account-control-details-tx40400s/) inquiry or the [VAT specification (TX62050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-specification-tx62050s/) report. ## Reconcile Cash management and General ledger + Use the reconciliation statement process, see [Reconcile statements](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/reconcile-statements/). ## Reconcile Fixed assets and General ledger + Print the [Balance (FA630000)](/visma-net-erp/help/fixed-assets/fixed-assets-reports/balance-fa630000/) report, compare the different books manually, and create journal transactions for the differences between the books. Beginning balance when starting a new period /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/beginning-balance-when-starting-a-new-period page When you are starting a new financial period or year, you can see its beginning balance as follows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Beginning balance when starting a new period When you are starting a new financial period or year, you can see its beginning balance as follows: 1. Open the [Account summary (GL401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/) window and filter it by type to show assets and liabilities only. 1. Select the correct ledger and the first period after the closed period or the period whose beginning balance you want to see. Ensure that the previous period is closed to get the correct balances. 1. Now you can see the balance in the **Beg. balance** column, and you can export it to Excel.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage chart of accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage chart of accounts Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Add an account to the chart of accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/add-an-account-to-the-chart-of-accounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add an account to the chart of accounts ## Before you proceed + Know your organisation's internal agreements about account classes. + Make sure the list of account classes contains the class to which you want assign the new account. + If you are not sure about settings for this account, you should find an account in the same account class and insert the same values. + Review the structure of accounts and subaccounts and the meanings of their segment values in your organisation. For more information about account identifiers, see: [About account IDs.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-account-ids/) 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add row** to append a blank row to the table. 1. In the **Account** column, enter a new account in one of the following ways, depending on the **Validate** check box in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window: + If the check box is selected, select the segment value from the list of predefined values by pressing **F3** in the field. + If the check box is cleared, type a value for the segment here. The system validates only the number of characters and the type of string (specified in the **Edit mask** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window). 1. In the **Type** column, select the type of account: **Asset**, **Liability**, **Income**, or **Expense**. 1. Optional: In the **Account class** column, select the account class to which the account is assigned. 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for the account. 1. Optional: In the **Description** column, briefly describe the account. 1. Select the **Require units** check box if along with amounts, the users should specify the quantities and units of measure (UoMs) for each transaction to be posted to this account. Clear the check box if the quantities and UoMs are not required. 1. Select the **Use default sub** check box to use the account **only** with the default subaccount, specified in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, in data entry windows. If you clear the check box, all subaccounts can be used with the account. 1. In the **Post option** column, select whether transactions should be posted to this account in detail or in summary. 1. Optional: In the **Consolidation account** column, if your company is a subsidiary of another company, specify the external general ledger account (from the parent company chart of accounts) to which the balance of the account will be exported in the consolidation process. 1. Optional: If the account will be used for foreign currency transactions, select the currency in the **Currency** column and specify the appropriate type of exchange rates in the **Revaluation rate type** column. 1. Optional: If you have **Webhook notification** selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, you can view a notification when the change is done and saved on your account. Click the **View notification feedback** button which takes you to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window where you can [view webhook notifications on accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notifications-on-accounts/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Create a cash account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/create-a-cash-account/) Delete an account /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/delete-an-account section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete an account 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window 1. In the table, click the account you want to delete. 1. Click the ![icon-remove](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-remove.png) icon. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) 1. Optional:If you have **Webhook notification** selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, you can view a notification when the change is done and saved on your account. Click the **View notification feedback** button which takes you to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window where you can [view webhook notifications on accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notifications-on-accounts/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Edit an account /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/edit-an-account section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit an account 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. In the table, click the account you want to edit. 1. Click ![icon-grid](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-grid.png). 1. In the window view of the account, make your changes. You can, for example, double-click the **Account** column, change the account number, save the change and confirm the security message.The account number is changed. All existing records will be adjusted accordingly. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click ![icon-grid](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-grid.png) to come back to the table view again. 1. Optional:If you have **Webhook notification** selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, you can view a notification when the change is done and saved on your account. Click the **View notification feedback** button which takes you to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window where you can [view webhook notifications on accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notifications-on-accounts/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Deactivate an account /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/deactivate-an-account section An account that has transactions posted cannot be deleted; if the account is no longer being used, you can instead deactivate it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Deactivate an account An account that has transactions posted cannot be deleted; if the account is no longer being used, you can instead deactivate it. An account that has transactions posted cannot be deleted; if the account is no longer being used, you can instead deactivate it. Once deactivated, the account remains in the database but does not appear in any selector field among the accounts listed for selection. 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. To find the account you want to deactivate, type an identifying string in the **Search** field at the bottom left of the window, and review the results. 1. Click anywhere in the row with the account you want to deactivate. 1. Clear the **Active** check box for the account. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Import accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/import-accounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import accounts 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png). 1. In the **File upload** dialog box, click **Choose file**. 1. In the **Open** dialog box, browse for the file on your pc. 1. Select a csv. or xlsx. file. 1. Click **Open**. 1. In the **File upload** dialog box, click **Upload**. 1. Confirm the import settings. 1. A window opens with more detailed information about the content that you are about to import. Confirm also this information. Once the file is imported, you will see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon in the toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Check the link between a cash account and a base account /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-chart-of-accounts/check-the-link-between-a-cash-account-and-a-base-account page When you have performed the task described in Create a cash account, you need to ensure that the link between the new cash account and the base account in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window is set up correctly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check the link between a cash account and a base account When you have performed the task described in Create a cash account, you need to ensure that the link between the new cash account and the base account in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window is set up correctly. For more information: [Create a cash account](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/create-a-cash-account/), [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/). 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. In the **Account** column, find the account that you used as a base to create your cash account. 1. In the **Cash Account** column, make sure that the check box is selected for that base account.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions section Transactions posted to General ledger are organised into batches that can be created manually or generated automatically by the system when documents are released in other Visma Net workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage transactions Transactions posted to General ledger are organised into batches that can be created manually or generated automatically by the system when documents are released in other Visma Net workspaces. Transactions posted to General ledger are organised into batches that can be created manually or generated automatically by the system when documents are released in other Visma Net workspaces. Each batch can contain one transaction or multiple transactions. A transaction, in turn, can contain at least two journal entries, for which the account and debit and credit amount is specified. This topic describes how to work with batches in the General ledger workspace, and how to create, release, and post batches in this workspace. It also describes how to automate the entry of transactions that are repeated regularly (recurring transactions), and how to create adjusting transactions that are reversed at the beginning of the next period (auto-reversing transactions). General ledger batches /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger batches About general ledger batches /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/about-general-ledger-batches page Transactions posted to General ledger, whether manually entered or system-generated, are organised in batches. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About general ledger batches Transactions posted to General ledger, whether manually entered or system-generated, are organised in batches. Transactions posted to General ledger, whether manually entered or system-generated, are organised in batches. Because of the potential for errors, we recommend that manual entries to the General ledger be kept to a minimum. This topic focuses on the use of manually entered general ledger batches. ## Manually entered batch All transactions in one general ledger batch must use the same currency (but not necessarily the base currency). They also must be posted to the same ledger and the same period. A General ledger batch must include at least two transactions. For each transaction, you should specify all of the following by using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window: + Account + Subaccount (if subaccounts are enabled in your system) + Debit or credit amount The total credit and debit amounts of transactions in a batch must be equal; otherwise, the batch cannot be processed further. CAUTION: No transactions can be entered for the **Year-to-date net income** account. When you first save a batch, its batch number is automatically generated in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to General ledger batches in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## Batch status The batch status reflects its current state and defines what processing can be applied to it. See below for a description of the batch statuses.
Status Description
On hold

A batch with On hold status cannot be released or posted.

You can give a batch this status by selecting the Hold check box in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window. The On hold status is usually assigned to a newly created batch if further editing is planned.

Also, if after being edited, a batch becomes out of balance, it can be saved as On hold. If a batch that’s on hold has total debits equal to total credits, you can change its status to Balanced once you clear the Hold check box.

To have the On hold status assigned by default to all batches on their entry, select the Hold batches on entry check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Balanced

The Balanced status indicates that the batch’s debit total equals its credit total and the batch can be released or posted. You can modify or delete a balanced batch, but you can save changes only if the batch’s credit and debit totals remain equal.

To have the Balanced status assigned by default to all entered batches, clear the Hold batches on entry check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Scheduled

The Scheduled status indicates that the batch was attached to a schedule. A scheduled batch is used as a template for generating similar general ledger preferences batches with dates calculated according to the schedule settings. The batch can be scheduled if its status is Balanced. A batch with a Scheduled status can be modified, but it can be saved only if its debit and credit totals are equal.

The status of a batch will change to Void if the batch is deleted from the schedule. A scheduled batch can be fully deleted only if the schedule was never executed and no ordinary general ledger preferences batches were generated in accordance with it.
Unposted A batch with the Unposted status is a balanced batch that was released but not yet posted (used to update general ledger preferences account balances). You cannot edit or delete such a batch.
Posted The Posted status indicates that the transactions of the batch were posted or were used for updating appropriate general ledger preferences account balances. A posted batch cannot be modified or deleted; it is available only for viewing.
Void The Void status indicates that this batch was cancelled, for example, because it was removed from the schedule before the schedule was completed. However, the voided batch cannot be deleted because it is needed for auditing.
## Control total amount of a batch In Visma Net, each batch has a control total, which is specified in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. For a balanced batch, the control total is equal to both its credit total and its debit total. If these totals differ, the batch cannot be released and posted. You use the **Validate batch control totals on entry** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window to enforce validation of batch control totals as follows: + If this check box is selected, each time you add a transaction (by using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window) during initial entry of the batch or later editing, the system updates the **Total credits** and **Total debits** and highlights in red the **Control total**. To save the batch with the **Balanced** status, in the **Control total** field, you must enter the control total amount, which is equal to both total credits and total debits. If you cannot make the batch balanced, change its status to **On hold** by selecting the **Hold** check box and clicking **Save**. An **On hold** batch doesn't need to have valid control totals. + If the **Validate batch control totals on entry** check box is cleared, the **Control total** field isn't shown in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. The system checks the batch totals only when you click **Save**, and if the totals are not equal, an error message appears. Unbalanced batches may be saved as drafts with the **On hold** status. ## Batch processing Once the batch status changes to **Balanced**, the batch may be processed further. You can apply the **Release** action in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window after you have finished editing the batch, or you can use the [Release transactions (GL501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-transactions-gl501000/) window. After you release the batch, it gets the **Unposted** status and cannot be modified. You can instead configure the system to immediately post batches on their release. To do this, use the **Automatically post on release** option, located in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. You can post released batches (those with the **Unposted** status) only by using the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. You can post all the batches listed or only those you select. The system initiates the posting process in the background so that you can continue with data entry or other tasks. When the system has finished posting the batches to general ledger, it automatically updates the status of the batches to **Posted**. ## Batch audit trail To facilitate batch tracking, you can attach scanned images of supporting documents to a batch and to each line of the batch. Once transactions are posted to the database, you cannot delete them because they're needed for auditing purposes. The only way to correct errors while keeping a full audit trail is to create another batch that contains reversing or adjusting journal entries for the original batch. + [Create a batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/create-a-batch/) [Release a batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/release-a-batch/) [Release multiple batches](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/release-multiple-batches/) [Post batches](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/post-batches/) [Find and view a particular batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/find-and-view-a-particular-batch/) Create a batch /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/create-a-batch section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a batch 1. Go to the > [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, perform the following steps: 1. In the **Module** field, select **General ledger** because a new batch can be created only for the General ledger workspace. 1. In the **Transaction date** field, specify the transaction date for the batch. All journal transactions that you will add to this batch will have the transaction date specified here. 1. In the **Post period** field, specify the financial period to which the transactions should be posted. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter the brief description of the transaction. 1. In the **Branch** field, specify the branch to which the transactions belong. 1. In the **Ledger** field, specify the ledger to post the transactions. By default, the posting ledger specified for the branch in the [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) window is selected in this field. 1. In the **Currency** field, select the currency used for all journal transactions of the batch. By default, the base currency defined for all branches in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window is specified. 1. Optional: Select the **Auto-reversing** check box, if the batch contains the adjusting period-end transactions that should be automatically reversed at the beginning of the next period. 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and enter journal entry parameters in the following way: 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch whose balance will be updated by the journal entry. By default, the branch that you have specified in the top part is specified. 1. In the **Account** field, select the account to be updated by the entry. 1. Optional: In the **Ref. number** column, specify a value that meets your internal requirements. For example: The reference number of the document for which this batch was generated. 1. Optional: In the **Quantity** field, specify the quantity of items associated with the transaction, if relevant. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** field, specify the unit of measure for items associated with the transaction, if relevant. 1. In the **Debit amount** field, specify the debit amount of the journal entry (if any). 1. In the **Credit amount** field, specify the credit amount of the journal entry (if any). > [!NOTE] > A single entry contains either a debit amount or a credit amount. 1. Optional: In the **Transaction description** field, enter the description that will help you or other users identify the journal entry. > [!NOTE] > Perform these steps for each journal entry to be added in the batch. 1. Optional: Attach scanned images of the supporting documents or their electronic versions to this batch. 1. To save the batch with the **On hold** status make sure, that the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the batch with the **Balanced** status, do one of the following: + If the **Control total** field is shown in the window, enter the amount that equals the debit total or credit total. + If the **Control total** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the debit total equals the credit total. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Parent topic: Related reference [Journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/)

Related pages

Tasks

 Release a batch /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/release-a-batch page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release a batch 1. Go to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. Open the batch that you want to release; see: [Find and view a particular batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/find-and-view-a-particular-batch/) if necessary. 1. Optional: If the batch has the **On hold** status, clear the **Hold** check box and type in the control total if applicable. This changes the status to **Balanced**. 1. Once the batch has a status of **Balanced**, click **Release**. This changes the status of the batch to **Unposted** or **Posted**, depending on whether the **Automatically post on release** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window is selected. Release multiple batches /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/release-multiple-batches page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release multiple batches 1. Go to the [Release transactions (PM501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/release-transactions-pm501000/) window. Batches with the **Balanced** status are listed here. You can set up a filter to display only specific batches on the list. 1. Do one of the following: + Select the batches for release by selecting the check boxes next to the batches. If you plan to release most of the listed batches, instead select the check box in the column header (to select all check boxes on the page), and clear the check boxes preceding batches you don't want to release. + Click **Release**. + Click **Release all** to release all the listed batches. The release operation changes the status of batches to **Unposted** or **Posted**, depending on whether the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. Post batches /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/post-batches page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Post batches 1. Go to the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. You can set up a filter to display only specific batches on the list. 1. Do one of the following actions, each of which changes the status of applicable batches to **Posted**: + Select the batches in the list (by selecting the unlabelled check boxes next to the batches) and click **Post**. + Click **Post all**. Find and view a particular batch /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/find-and-view-a-particular-batch section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Find and view a particular batch ## Find a batch by using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window 1. Go to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. 1. In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). 1. To locate the batch, do one of the following: + Click the **Batch no.** column heading, or any other column heading, to arrange the items in ascending or descending order of the values. Navigate between pages to locate the specific batch. + Click the column heading for any column where a search may be helpful, and then type a string in the search box at the bottom left of the lookup window. As you type, the system filters the listed batches to display only those containing the text in the selected column. + Create a filter to find the batch by its details. To do this, click the **Add filter** icon in the **Filter** field at the top right of the lookup window, and specify a condition based on the batch details. 1. When you find the batch, double-click anywhere in the row to open that batch and view its information. ## Find a batch by using the [Unreleased transactions summary (GL61150S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-summary-gl61150s/) window This window lists **On hold** batches grouped by period. 1. Go to the [Unreleased transactions summary (GL61150S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-summary-gl61150s/) window. 1. Select the ledger and a financial period. 1. Click **Run report**. 1. Review the list of batches for the period. If you don not see the batch you are looking for, click **Parameters**, change the selection criteria, and run the report again. 1. To view the details of the batch you were looking for, click the batch number to navigate to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. Post transactions with VAT directly in general ledger /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/post-transactions-with-vat-directly-in-general-ledger section Normally, you can only post VAT from the Customer ledger and the Supplier ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Post transactions with VAT directly in general ledger Normally, you can only post VAT from the Customer ledger and the Supplier ledger. In some cases, posting VAT directly in the General ledger may be necessary. To do this, activate this functionality first and after that you can create a journal transaction with VAT. ## Activating VAT entry from the General ledger 1. Go to the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Select **VAT entry from general ledger**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Enable**. ## Posting a journal transaction with VAT 1. Go to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. 1. Select **Create VAT transactions**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add row. 1. Enter your transaction. Make sure to enter the **VAT code** on the income/expense line and **VAT ID** on the VAT line 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release** to process the transaction through to the tax reports. Auto-reversing transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/auto-reversing-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Auto-reversing transactions About auto-reversing transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/auto-reversing-transactions/about-auto-reversing-transactions page Visma Net makes it easy to close your books at the end of a period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About auto-reversing transactions Visma Net makes it easy to close your books at the end of a period. Visma Net makes it easy to close your books at the end of a period. To do so, you may need to post some adjusting transactions that should be reversed at the beginning of the next period. For example: At the period-end, the accounts maintained in foreign currencies are revalued in the base currency, and the adjusting entries are posted to the General ledger's unrealised gains and losses accounts. At the beginning of the next period, these entries should be reversed. In Visma Net, the General ledger workspace can process auto-reversing batches, which can be manually marked as such in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. Also, some auto-reversing batches are automatically generated. ## Reversing batches For a batch marked as auto-reversing, the system automatically creates the reversing batch according to the following rules: + All transactions are reversed—that is, a debit entry is reversed as a credit entry and vice versa. + The first day of the next financial period is set as the date of the reversing transactions. Depending on the **Generate reversing entries** option in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window, the system can be configured to generate reversing batches at either of the following times: On post : Each reversing batch is generated once the original batch is posted. On period closing : All reversing batches are generated at once when the process of period closing has been initiated. When you view the batches in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, note that for the reversing batches, the **Reversing entry** check box is selected. Reverse a batch /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/auto-reversing-transactions/reverse-a-batch section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse a batch 1. Go to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. 1. Open the batch you want to reverse; see: [Find and view a particular batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/find-and-view-a-particular-batch/) if necessary. 1. In the toolbar, on the **Actions** menu, select **Reverse batch**. This creates and opens a new batch in which credit entries become debit entries and debit entries become credit entries. 1. In the **Orig. batch number** field, note the reference number of the batch that was reversed. 1. Notice that the **Reversing entry** check box is selected, which indicates that this is a reversing batch. 1. If the **Control total** field is shown, enter the control total. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). **Parent topic:** [About auto-reversing transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/auto-reversing-transactions/about-auto-reversing-transactions/) Recurring journal transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring journal transactions About recurring journal transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/about-recurring-journal-transactions page Some General ledger transactions, such as loan payments, depreciation-related transactions, repeat regularly. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About recurring journal transactions Some General ledger transactions, such as loan payments, depreciation-related transactions, repeat regularly. Some General ledger transactions, such as loan payments, depreciation-related transactions, repeat regularly. To automate the entering of recurring transactions, you can create schedules for them in the General ledger workspace. ## Create schedules You create schedules by using the [Recurring transactions (GL203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500/) window. To a schedule, you can add general ledger batches immediately (if all the required batches are already created) or later. The batches of the **Normal** type and the **Balanced** status can be scheduled only. Once a batch is assigned to a schedule, its status changes to **Scheduled**. A schedule defines how many times and how often specific General ledger transactions should be created. When creating a schedule, you can either specify a maximum number of times the schedule should be repeated, or set up an unlimited schedule executions by selecting the **No execution limit** option. For a schedule, you can select from multiple frequency options: Daily : The batches should be generated daily or every **x** days. Weekly : The batches should be generated once a week or every **x** weeks. Monthly : The batches should be generated once per month or every **x** months. By financial period : The batches should be generated only once per financial period or every **x** financial periods. If you need to schedule only one batch, in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, click **Add to schedule** in the window toolbar to create a new schedule for this batch. ## Attach relevant documents To make tracking of batches easier for users and to facilitate auditing, you can attach to each schedule the scanned documents or electronic versions of the documents that are the basis for the schedule you have created. To attach a file to the schedule, in the [Recurring transactions (GL203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500/) window, perform these steps: 1. In the **Schedule** field, select the schedule by its ID. 1. In the window title bar, click **Files**. This opens the **Files dialog box**. 1. In the dialog box, click **Add new record** in the table title bar. This brings up the **Upload file dialog box**. 1. In the dialog box, click **Browse** to locate the file and then click **Upload** to import the file and close the dialog box. If multiple non-related batches are assigned to the same schedule, on the **Batch list** tab of the window, for each batch in the table, click the paper clip (at the beginning of the row) to attach a file or multiple files explaining why this batch is generated periodically. ## Run schedules To generate batches in accordance with the schedule, you run the schedule periodically by using the [Generate recurring transactions (GL504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-gl504000/) window. When you run a schedule, the system uses a template batch to generate similar batches. The batches generated by a schedule can differ from the template as follows: Date : The date of each batch is determined by the schedule you have configured. Reference number : A new reference number is generated for each batch in accordance with the numbering series specified in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. Currency rate : If a currency of a batch differs from the base currency set in the system, the system uses for conversion the currency exchange rate effective on the date of the batch creation. No matter how many times you run the schedule, batches will be generated only as required by the schedule. The system determines whether it should generate the batches depending on the current date, the schedule's start and expiration dates, the schedule type, and the date when the batches were last generated. After required batches have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed on** value. Thus, no batches will be generated ahead of time, but you can generate missing batches for past due dates by running the [Generate recurring transactions (GL504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-gl504000/) window for each batch that is due. For example: Suppose that you have scheduled a particular batch to be performed weekly on each Tuesday, with no execution limit. If you run the schedule every week on Wednesday, one batch will be generated each time. If you run this schedule every day, the batches will be generated only on Tuesdays. If you want to run this schedule once in a month, on the last Wednesday, you should run it four times to generate four batches. ## Further processing Batches generated as a result of running a schedule appear in the list of batches in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window with the **Balanced** status. They can be released or posted as any other batches can. You can change the transaction amounts, if needed. When necessary corrections are made, a batch can be saved only if its status remains **Balanced**.

Related pages

Tasks

 Generate recurring transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/generate-recurring-transactions page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions ## Generate a recurring transaction 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (GL504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-gl504000/) window. 1. In the **Execution date** field, specify the date that the system will use to filter the schedules to be loaded to the table. Those schedules whose **Next execution** date is earlier than or equal to the date specified in this field will be loaded. By default, the current business date is selected. 1. Specify the condition that the system will use to stop schedule executions by selecting one of the following option buttons: + **Stop on execution date**: the system stops running schedules on the date that you specify in the **Execution date** field. + **Stop after number of executions**: the system stops running schedules when the specified number of schedule executions have been performed. If you select this option button, specify the required number in the adjacent box. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Run** or **Run all** to process selected schedules or all listed schedules respectively. ## View the generated batches 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (GL504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-gl504000/) window. 1. In the list of schedules, open the required schedule by clicking the link in the **Schedule ID** column. The **Recurring transactions** window as a dialog box with the selected schedule opens. 1. On the **Generated documents** tab, click the number of the batch in the **Batch number** column. 1. In the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window that opens, view the details of the batch. Work with recurring transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/work-with-recurring-transactions section Here you create and maintain schedules for recurring invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Work with recurring transactions Here you create and maintain schedules for recurring invoices. You can also view the details of active and completed schedules. ## How to create a schedule for recurring invoices 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (GL203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new record. The **Schedule ID** will be generated automatically upon saving. Use the **Active** check box to activate or deactivate the schedule. 1. Select a **Start date** for the schedule. 1. Continue to fill in the other fields (optional): **Expiration date**: Only active if the **Never expires** check box is deselected. **Execution limit (times)**: The maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. Only active if the **No limit** check box is deselected. **Description**: Enter a description for the schedule. The **Next execution** field is a read-only field that will display the next execution date for the schedule. 1. In the **Schedule type** section you decide how often you want to generate invoices. Select the schedule type and enter the parameters in the corresponding section on the right hand side. 1. In the **Document list** tab click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to assign one or more invoices to the schedule. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, click to activate the field and click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an invoice by its reference number. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the **Generated documents** tab you can see a list of the documents generated as a result of running this schedule. ## How to delete or edit a schedule 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a **Schedule ID** to edit or delete. 1. If you want to edit the schedule, make your changes in the fields and check boxes. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) to save your changes. 1. Click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png) if you want to delete the selected schedule and click **OK** to confirm. **Tip!** If you want to run your schedule manually, click **Run now** and the schedule will run immediately. Schedule a recurring batch /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/schedule-a-recurring-batch section If specific journal transactions must be entered periodically, you can automate this task by creating a schedule and assigning a batch or multiple batches to it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule a recurring batch If specific journal transactions must be entered periodically, you can automate this task by creating a schedule and assigning a batch or multiple batches to it. If specific journal transactions must be entered periodically, you can automate this task by creating a schedule and assigning a batch or multiple batches to it. When you define the schedule, you specify how often and how many times the batches should be generated. For more information on schedules, see: [About recurring journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/about-recurring-journal-transactions/). ## Before you proceed Create a batch (or multiple batches if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. Save each batch with the **Balanced** status. Do not release. > [!NOTE] > If you want to generate new batches that are similar to a posted batch, copy and paste this posted batch to a new batch and make necessary edits; save with the **Balanced** status. ## Create a schedule 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (GL203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500/) window. 1. In the **Description** field, add a description of the schedule. 1. In the **Start date** field, select the start date for the schedule. By default, the current date is selected. 1. Place limitations on the schedule execution in one of the following ways: + Enter the maximum number of times it should be executed in the **Execution limit** field, or select the **No limit** check box. + In **Expiration date** field, enter the date when the schedule expires, or select the **Never expires** check box. 1. Specify how often the batches should be generated: + To generate the batches daily or every **x** days, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily**. 1. In the **Every day(s)** field of the **Daily** section, type an integer to specify the number of days between successive batches. + To generate the batches weekly or every **x** weeks, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Weekly**. 1. In the **Every week(s)** field of the **Weekly** section, type an integer to specify the number of weeks between successive batches. 1. Select the days of the week on which the batches should be generated. + To generate the batches monthly or every x months, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Monthly**. 1. In the **Every month(s)** field of the **Monthly** section, enter an integer to specify the number of months between successive batches. 1. Select when the batches should be generated: either the day of the month, or the week of the month and day of the week. + To generate the invoice every **x** financial periods, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **By financial period**. 1. In the **Every period(s)** field, type an integer to specify the frequency of invoice generation by financial period. 1. Specify whether the invoice should be generated on the first day of the financial period, the last day of the financial period, or a specific day of the period (the day can be selected). 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for the schedule. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the **Schedule ID** field, notice the unique ID of the schedule, which the system generated in accordance with the numbering series assigned to schedules in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. 1. Optional: For user reference, attach a scanned copy or electronic version of the document on which this schedule is based. For this, drag the file from the folder on your computer and drop it to the top part. ## Add batches to the schedule 1. On the **Batch list** tab, click **Add row**. 1. In the **Module** column, select **General ledger** from the list of system workspaces. 1. In the **Batch number** column, select the batch by its number. 1. Optional: To attach an electronic version of the related document or its scanned image to the scheduled batch, click a staple icon, select and upload the document. 1. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for each batch you want to add. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Parent topic: [About recurring journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/about-recurring-journal-transactions/) Reclassify and split general ledger transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reclassify and split general ledger transactions About reclassifying general ledger transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/about-reclassifying-general-ledger-transactions page In Visma Net, the reclassification of a general ledger transaction means the creation of a correcting transaction to move an amount from one general ledger account to another general ledger account, from one subaccount to another subaccount, or from one company branch to another one. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About reclassifying general ledger transactions In Visma Net, the reclassification of a general ledger transaction means the creation of a correcting transaction to move an amount from one general ledger account to another general ledger account, from one subaccount to another subaccount, or from one company branch to another one. In Visma Net, the reclassification of a general ledger transaction means the creation of a correcting transaction to move an amount from one general ledger account to another general ledger account, from one subaccount to another subaccount, or from one company branch to another one. You can reclassify a general ledger transaction if an amount has been posted to the wrong general ledger account, subaccount, or branch by mistake. As a result of the reclassification process, the system generates a new transaction of the **Reclassification** type based on the original general ledger transaction. The **Reclassification** transaction moves the amount from the wrong general ledger account, subaccount, or branch to the required one. The following section provides an example of the reclassification process and illustrates the corresponding general ledger transactions. ## Understanding the reclassification process Suppose that you classify all your expenses by department by using a dedicated subaccount segment for each department code. By mistake, you have specified the wrong subaccount in the supplier ledger invoice, so that an amount has been posted to the expenses of the wrong department; now you need to reclassify the wrong journal entry by creating a correcting transaction, so that amount will be moved to the subaccount of the correct department. The following table shows the journal entries of the original general ledger transaction of the **Normal** type. |Account|Subaccount|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Supplier ledger account|00-00-000|00.00|Amount| |Expense account|00-00-OPS|Amount|00.00| The following table shows the journal entries of the correcting general ledger transaction of the **Reclassification** type. |Account|Subaccount|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Expense account|00-00-OPS|00.00|Amount| |Expense account|00-00-FIN|Amount|00.00| You can find and view transactions of the **Reclassification** type in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. In this window, in the **Orig. batch no.** column of the table, the reclassified journal entries contain the links to the original general ledger transactions (that is, to the batches generated for the transactions). In Visma Net, a batch is generated for each transaction created in the system. A batch can contain one transaction or multiple transactions, and each transaction consists of at least two journal entries (a debit entry and a credit entry). Through the reclassification process, you can reclassify a wrong journal entry or move an amount from the wrong account, subaccount, or branch to the correct one. The reclassification process generates the correcting transaction, which includes two journal entries. ## Understanding the splitting process The split of a general ledger transaction means the creation of a correcting transaction to move a part of the amount (of the original transaction) from one general ledger account to another general ledger account, from one subaccount to another subaccount, or from one company branch to another branch. You can split the transaction in any of these regards. As a result of the reclassification or split process, the system generates a new transaction of the Reclassification type based on the original general ledger transaction. The Reclassification transaction moves the amount or a part of the amount from the wrong general ledger account, subaccount, or branch (or more than one of these) to the required one (or ones). Related reference [Account details](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) [Reclassification history](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassification-history-gl405000/) [Reclassify transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Initiate reclassification and split /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/initiate-reclassification-and-split page You can open the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window in one of the following ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Initiate reclassification and split You can open the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window in one of the following ways: For more information: [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/). + By using the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window. In this window, you select a general ledger account and, in the list of transactions posted to this account, the transactions that you need to reclassify. You then click **Reclassify** on the window toolbar. The [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window opens with the selected transactions displayed in the table. (To reclassify all transactions posted to the selected account, you can instead click **Reclassify all** on the window toolbar.) + By using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. In this window, you select a required **released** general ledger batch, and in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar, click **Reclassify**. The [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window opens, displaying the transactions included in the selected general ledger batch. + Go to the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window. The [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window opens with no entries in the list. To load the entries to be reclassified, you click **Load** on the window toolbar. In the **Load transactions dialog box** that opens, you specify the parameters of the transactions to be uploaded to the window. Once the transactions are uploaded, you can modify the details of each required transaction or of multiple transactions simultaneously. (For details, see the next section of this topic.) + By using the [Reclassification history (GL405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassification-history-gl405000/) window. In this window, you can select the last transaction of the reclassification chain, and then click **Reclassify** on the window toolbar, which opens the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window. Transactions with a control account specified in any rows cannot be reclassified, so these transactions are not transferred to the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window. **Parent topic:** [About reclassifying general ledger transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/about-reclassifying-general-ledger-transactions/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Process reclassification /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/process-reclassification page In the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, before you perform the reclassification process, you need to specify new details for each journal entry that you need to reclassify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process reclassification In the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, before you perform the reclassification process, you need to specify new details for each journal entry that you need to reclassify. For more information: [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/). In the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window, before you perform the reclassification process, you need to specify new details for each journal entry that you need to reclassify. You can change an account, subaccount, and branch. While reclassifying a transaction, you can also edit the transaction date and the description of the reclassification transaction. If you edit the date, the new date has to be in the range of the financial period of the original transaction. You can change required parameters in each needed row manually, or perform mass changing of parameters in multiple rows. These options are described in details in the next sections of this topic. ## Modify selected transactions manually To change the required parameters manually, in each needed row, you modify any of the following boxes: To account : The transaction amount will be moved from the originally specified general ledger account ( **Account** ) to the account specified in this field. To subaccount : The transaction amount will be moved from the originally specified subaccount ( **Subaccount** ) to the subaccount specified in this field. This field is available only if the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. To branch : The transaction will be moved to the general ledger account or subaccount of the branch specified in this field. This field is available only if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. By default, these fields contain the values of the original journal entry. Once you have changed any of the default values, the entry becomes available for reclassification. To edit the date and description of a transaction, you need to enter new parameters in the **New trans. date** and **New transaction description** fields, respectively. ## Modify a group of transactions To perform mass-changing of parameters in multiple rows, on the window toolbar of the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window, click **Replace**. In the **Find and replace dialog box** that opens, specify the original and replacement transaction parameters. Then click **Replace** to close the dialog box and replace the parameters in the needed rows. To run the reclassification process, click **Process** in the window toolbar. Parent topic: [About reclassifying general ledger transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/about-reclassifying-general-ledger-transactions/) Related reference [Reclassification history](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassification-history-gl405000/) [Reclassify transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Process splitting /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/process-splitting page In the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, to process splitting of a transaction, you need to add new lines that represent the journal entries to which a part of the original journal entry amount will be split. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process splitting In the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, to process splitting of a transaction, you need to add new lines that represent the journal entries to which a part of the original journal entry amount will be split. For more information: [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/). A part of the amount can be transferred to another account, subaccount, or branch (or more than one of these). You first click the journal entry to be split and then click **Split** in the window toolbar. The system adds a new entry under the original one. The original entry has the icon, and each new line added during the split process has the icon. The original entry and each new entry are highlighted in bold during the process of splitting the transaction. Multiple new entries can be added to split the original entry. In each new row and in the original one, you modify the values in any of the following columns: + To account: The transaction amount will be moved from the originally specified general ledger account (Account) to the account you specify in this column. + To subaccount: The transaction amount will be moved from the originally specified subaccount (Subaccount) to the subaccount you specify in this column. + This column is available only if the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. + To branch: The transaction amount will be moved from the originally specified branch to the general ledger account or subaccount of the branch you specify in this column. This column is available only if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. By default, these columns contain the values of the original journal entry. For new lines of the splitting group, these columns contain values of the original journal entry even if you have changed any of these values of the original entry. For each new entry, in the **New amount** column, you specify the amount to be transferred from the original entry to a new one. For the original entry, in this column, the system calculates the remaining amount based on the new amounts of new entries. The total amount of new entries cannot be more than the amount of the original entry. Negative values can be specified in the **New amount** column for the new entries. The negative amounts are highlighted in red and increase the amount of the original entry. To edit the date and description of a transaction, you need to enter new parameters in the **New tran. date** and **New transaction description** fields, respectively. If you edit the date, the new date has to be within the financial period of the original transaction. The transaction is ready for splitting if the check box is selected in the **Selected** column for the original entry and all the related new entries. The systems selects this check box for each new entry when you have changed a value in the **To account**, **To subaccount**, or **To branch** column and have specified the amount to be moved to the new entry in the **New amount** columns. The systems selects this check box for the original entry when you have changed a value in the **To account**, **To subaccount**, or **To branch** column or the amount has been adjusted according to the changes made for amounts of the new lines. Split general ledger transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/split-general-ledger-transactions page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Split general ledger transactions 1. Open the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window: 1. In the window toolbar, click **Load**. 1. In the **Load transactions** dialog box, which the system has opened, specify the needed selection criteria to help you find the required general ledger transactions, and click **Load** (to add new transactions meeting the specified criteria to the list of existing transactions, if any) or **Reload** (to remove any existing transactions listed in the window and load new transactions that match the specified criteria) to upload these transactions to the window. 1. Split an amount of each necessary journal entry by doing the following: 1. In the table, click the journal entry to be split. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Split**. 1. In the new line, in the **To account**, **To subaccount**, and **To branch** column, specify the account, subaccount (if applicable), and branch (if applicable), respectively, to which the amount will be transferred. 1. In the **New amount** column, specify the amount that will be transferred from the original journal entry to the new one. 1. If an amount of the original journal entry has to be split to one more line, repeat the three previous substeps. 1. Click **Process** in the window toolbar to initiate the process of splitting the transaction. Once the process has completed successfully, the **Reclass. batch number** column appears with the number of the corresponding split batch. You can now release the split batch in the [Release transactions (GL501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-transactions-gl501000/) window. You can also reclassify the original entry. The following parameters can be reclassified: the account (To account), the subaccount (To subaccount), and the branch (To branch). For the original line, in the **New amount** column, the system displays the remaining amount of the entry that can be split. For each new line (that is added when you click **Split** ), in the **New amount** column, you specify the amount to be transferred from the original entry to a new one. For the new entries, both positive and negative values can be specified in this column. Positive amounts will decrease the amount of the original entry. Negative amounts, which are highlighted in red, will increase the amount of the original entry. While splitting a journal entry, you can also edit the date and description of the transactions ( **New tran. date** and **New transaction description** ). If you edit the date, the new date has to be within the financial period of the original transaction. In the same reclassification batch, the system includes journal entries that have the same transaction period and currency specified. A separate reclassification batch is generated for each journal entry that has a different transaction period or currency. The batch will be released automatically if the **Automatically release reclassification batches** check box is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. About viewing and managing reclassification transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/about-viewing-and-managing-reclassification-transactions page In the Account details (GL404000) window, you can view the list of transactions posted to a selected general ledger account within the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About viewing and managing reclassification transactions In the Account details (GL404000) window, you can view the list of transactions posted to a selected general ledger account within the specified period. For more information: [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/). In the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window, you can view the list of transactions posted to a selected general ledger account within the specified period. By default, the system does not show the entries that were reclassified. To include in the list of entries the journal entries that have been reclassified, select the **Include reclassified** check box in the top part. In the **Reclass. batch number** column, each of the reclassified entries has a link to the appropriate **Reclassification** transaction. You can also view a list of transactions that includes the reclassified journal entries by preparing the transactions for account or transactions for period report with the **Include reclassified** check box selected. Read more in [About Transactions for account](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-account-gl633500/). ## Editing reclassification transactions You can edit general ledger transactions that were generated by the reclassification process. After editing, the number of the reclassification batch remains unchanged. To perform editing, in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, you need to select a batch of the **Reclassification** type with the **Balanced** or **On hold** status, and click **Edit** in the window toolbar. The [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window opens, displaying all journal entries included in the batch. On this window, in the **Reclass. batch number** column, the number of the batch that you edit is shown. You can edit the following details of each displayed journal entry: the branch (**To branch**), the account (**To account**), the subaccount (**To subaccount**), the transaction date (**New trans. date**), and the description of the transaction (**New transaction description**). The following rules apply to the editing process: + If you edit an account in one of the journal entries of the batch, the new account that you specify must have the same default currency as the default currency of the batch. + If you change the transaction date for all journal entries of the batch, the date of the original batch will be changed after you finish editing the transactions. While editing, you can add new journal entries (rows) to the list of journal entries in the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window. You add new journal entry (or multiple entries) by clicking **Load** in the window toolbar. In the **Load transactions dialog box**, you specify the criteria to load the required journal entries. For these journal entries, if you specify a post period or currency that differs from the period or currency of the original general ledger transaction, then when you process the transaction, the system generates a new reclassification transaction (with a new identification number) that includes these journal entries. You can also delete journal entries (rows) from the list of journal entries when you edit a transaction, so that after you run the process, the reclassification transaction will not contain deleted journal entries. ## Reversing a reclassification batch You can reverse the general ledger transactions that were generated by the reclassification process. To reverse these transactions, in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, you need to select a released general ledger batch of the **Reclassification** type, and click **Actions** - **Reverse batch** on the window toolbar. The [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window opens, which already contains the data that reverses the original batch. In this window, you can edit the required details in the journal entries that are displayed. When you click **Process**, the new **Reclassification** batch is generated. ## Viewing the history of reclassification transactions You can view the history of reclassifications for a selected general ledger transaction that has been reclassified. The reclassification history is represented as a list of transactions generated by the reclassification process, starting with the original general ledger transaction. You can view the reclassification history for a transaction in the [Reclassification history (GL405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassification-history-gl405000/) window. You can open this window by clicking the **Reclassification history** button in the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window for the selected transaction (if it has been reclassified), or in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window for a selected transaction of the **Reclassification** type in the general ledger batch. You can reclassify only the last transaction in the list of transactions in the [Reclassification history (GL405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassification-history-gl405000/) window by clicking **Reclassify** in the window toolbar. ## Knowing which transactions cannot be reclassified The following transactions cannot be reclassified: + A journal entry of a transaction in which a control account is specified. (A control account is a general ledger account that accumulates the summary information of a subsidiary ledger. The details of the control account balance are contained in a subledger, so the balance of the control account should match the total of the related subsidiary ledger.) + General ledger transactions generated in the General ledger workspace when consolidation data has been imported in the [Import consolidation data (GL509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000/) window. For details, see: [General ledger consolidation - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/general-ledger-consolidation-overview/). + General ledger transactions generated in the General ledger workspace by a user invoking the run allocations process in the [Run allocations (GL504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/run-allocations-gl504500/) window. For details, see: [About allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations/about-allocation-rules/). + All general ledger transactions generated in the Currency management workspace. + If the **Project management** functionality is enabled in Visma Net, the general ledger transactions related to any project. > [!NOTE] > You can reclassify the general ledger transactions in which the non-project code is specified. Parent topic: [About reclassifying general ledger transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/about-reclassifying-general-ledger-transactions/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Reclassify general ledger transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/reclassify-general-ledger-transactions page You can begin working with the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window in the following ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reclassify general ledger transactions You can begin working with the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window in the following ways: For more information: [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/). + By using the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window, in which you select transactions to be reclassified and click **Reclassify** (or **Reclassify all** ) in the window toolbar. + By using the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, in which you select a required general ledger batch and then click **Reclassify** in the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar. + By navigating to it directly. 1. If the system has brought up the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window via the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window, or the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window and transactions are listed in the table, skip Steps 2 and 3 and proceed to Step 4. 1. Click **Load** in the window toolbar. 1. In the **Load transactions dialog box** that opens, specify the needed selection parameters to help you find the required general ledger transactions, and click **Load** or **Reload** to upload them to the window. When you click **Load**, new transactions will be added to the list of existing transactions (if any); when you click **Reload**, new transactions will overwrite any transactions listed on the window. 1. Reclassify transactions in one of the following ways: 1. Enter new parameters for multiple transactions at once by clicking **Replace** on the window toolbar and specifying new parameters in the **Find and replace dialog box** that opens. In the **Find** section, specify the original parameters of the transactions that should be reclassified; in the **Replace with** section, specify reclassification parameters. Click **Replace**. 1. Enter new parameters for one transaction or multiple selected transactions manually in each required row. The following parameters can be reclassified: the account ( **To account** ), the subaccount ( **To subaccount** ), or the branch ( **To branch** ). While reclassifying a journal entry, you can also edit the date and description of the transactions ( **New trans. date** and **New transaction description** ). 1. Click **Process** in the window toolbar to initiate the reclassification process. Once the process is completed successfully, The **Reclass. batch number** column appears with the number of the corresponding reclassification batch. The system includes journal entries, which have the same transaction period or the currency specified, in the same reclassification batch. A separate reclassification batch is generated for each journal entry that has a different transaction period or currency. 1. In the [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) window, release the batch. The batch will be released automatically if the **Automatically release reclassification batches** check box is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. Related reference [Reclassification history](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassification-history-gl405000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About VAT entries from the general ledger /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/about-vat-entries-from-the-general-ledger page In Visma Net, you can configure automatic VAT calculation in documents that you create in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT entries from the general ledger In Visma Net, you can configure automatic VAT calculation in documents that you create in the system. In Visma Net, you can configure automatic VAT calculation in documents that you create in the system. With automatic VAT calculation, tax and taxable amounts are computed automatically on each invoice or invoice created in the system workspaces (such as Customer ledger or Supplier ledger). Once a document is created and released, the system automatically creates the appropriate general ledger transactions containing VAT-related journal entries. In Visma Net, you can also create tax-related transactions manually in the General ledger workspace. These transactions update the balances of the general ledger accounts specified for each journal entry of the transaction. Manual creating of VAT-related transactions is available only if the **VAT entry from general ledger module** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Manual creation of a VAT-related journal transaction You should use the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/)window to create a VAT-related journal transaction in the General ledger workspace. In this window, you need to select the **Create VAT transactions** check box so that the additional **VAT ID** and **VAT category** columns appear in the table. Each VAT-related transaction should contain at least three journal entries: + A journal entry that represents the document amount. (This amount can be recorded, for example, to the supplier ledger account.) + A journal entry that represents the VAT amount. (This amount can be recorded, for example, to the VAT payable account defined for a VAT.) + A journal entry that represents the taxable amount. (This amount can be recorded, for example, to any expense or income account, depending on the VAT type.) While creating a journal transaction, you need to specify the following information for each journal entry you add: Account : The general ledger account that should be updated with the amount you enter in this line. Subaccount : The appropriate subaccount (if any). Ref. number : The number of the internal or external document to which the transaction is related. VAT-related information will be posted to the appropriate VAT report only if you specify this reference number. Otherwise (if the **Ref. number** column is empty), VAT and taxable amounts will not be reflected in the VAT report. All journal entries of the journal transaction that relate to the same document should have the same document number in the Ref. number column. Debit amount : or **Credit amount**: The amount that should debit or credit the specified general ledger account (and subaccount, if applicable). A single journal entry should contain only a debit amount or credit amount. VAT ID : The VAT to be used to calculate VAT amount. The system enters the tax automatically if you have specified an account assigned to a particular VAT on the **General ledger accounts** tab in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. VAT category : The VAT category based on which the taxable amount is calculated. The system enters the tax category automatically if you have selected an account (expense, income, or inventory) that is associated with a particular VAT category in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. In a transaction, the total credit amount ( **Credit total** in the top part) of all journal entries must be equal to total debit amount ( **Debit total** ) of all journal entries. ## VAT amount calculation When you create a journal entry in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) windoww, the system calculates the tax amount according to the VAT associated with the general ledger account (and subaccount, if applicable) that you specify in the **Account** (and **Subaccount**, if any) column. When you specify the account (subaccount), the system automatically enters the tax associated with this account (subaccount) in the **VAT ID** column and uses it for calculating the VAT amount for the entry. The account (and subaccount. if any) associated with the tax has been specified in the **VAT payable account** (and **Subaccount** ) or **VAT claimable account** (and **Subaccount** ) field (depending on the VAT type) on the **General ledger accounts** tab in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window during configuration of a tax in the system. While you are adding a journal entry, you can overwrite the default **VAT ID** value. ## Taxable amount calculation The system calculates the taxable amount according to the VAT category specified for the journal entry in the **VAT category** column in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/)window. Once you have selected an account in the **Account** column, the system automatically enters the VAT category associated with the general ledger account. The associated VAT category is the one that is assigned to the selected general ledger account in the **VAT category** column in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. If no VAT category is specified for the general ledger account you select in the **Account** column, no VAT-related transaction can be created. ## Batch release On release of the journal transaction (a batch) that you have created, the general ledger accounts specified in each journal entry will be updated with the appropriate amounts. The tax-related amounts will be reflected in the appropriate tax report only if the number of the document related to the journal transaction is specified for each journal entry in the **Ref. number** column. About rules for balancing inter-branch transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/about-rules-for-balancing-inter-branch-transactions page When an organisation consists of multiple legal entities (branches), it often has transactions that occur between these branches. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About rules for balancing inter-branch transactions When an organisation consists of multiple legal entities (branches), it often has transactions that occur between these branches. When an organisation consists of multiple legal entities (branches), it often has transactions that occur between these branches. The branches of the same organisation may regularly purchase stock items for other branches, transfer goods, or redistribute funds among branches in the organisation. Inter-branch transactions, if they are not properly processed and eliminated, can result in overestimation of the organisation's financial position. Visma Net supports automatic generation of inter-branch transactions if the **Inter-branch transactions** functionality is activated. ## Types of inter-branch transactions An inter-branch transaction occurs when one branch of an organisation is involved in a transaction with another branch of the same organisation. Branches engaging in transactions with one another debit and credit each other as they would if there were no corporate relationship between them. Transactions between branches of an entity can take multiple windows and can occur between any branches of the entity. The transactions are processed differently depending on whether both branches are legal entities (or are units of different legal entities). There are two basic types of inter-branch transactions: 1. If transactions occur between branches that are legal entities themselves or are subordinate branches of different legal entities, they should be balanced in each branch involved so that the accounts of each legal entity will be in balance. 1. If transactions occur between a consolidation branch and its subordinate branch, these transactions do not always require balancing within each branch. However, it may happen that some inter-branch transactions require elimination before reporting. In Visma Net, an inter-branch transaction is considered a transaction of the first type if the following criteria are met: + The branches involved in the transaction post their records to different ledgers. + The branches use the same ledger, and for the ledger, the **Branch accounting** check box is selected in the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. Inter-branch transactions of the first type should be balanced in such a way that each branch can file reports separately. ## An example of inter-branch transaction balancing In Visma Net, the rules for balancing inter-branch transactions define offset accounts to be used for particular branches involved, depending on the accounts used in the original transactions. Let's create balancing rules based on the following example: Consider a retailing organisation with several autonomous branches (Model 2). To use volume discounts, Branch 1 purchases goods for itself and other branches and then transfers the purchased inventory to other branches. For example, Branch 1 moves some of the purchased inventory from its asset account 12000 to Branch 2's asset account 12100 and records the following journal entries. |Branch|Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Branch 1|12000|0.0|€ 3867.49| |Branch 2|12100|€ 3867.49|0.0| To balance these transactions for each branch, we should add one complementary transaction for each original transaction, as shown below. |Branch|Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Branch 1|12000|0.0|€ 3867.49| |Branch 1|XXXX (Receivables from Branch 2)|€ 3867.49|0.0| |Branch 2|12100|€ 3867.49|0.0| |Branch 2|YYYY (Payables to Branch 1)|0.0|€ 3867.49| In this example, **XXXX** and **YYYY** are offset accounts that should be defined by the balancing rules. **XXXX** is an account used by Branch 1 to record the amounts receivable from Branch 2, and **YYYY** is an account used by Branch 2 to record the amounts payable to Branch 1. Using specially created offset (inter-branch) accounts helps you efficiently identify inter-branch transactions, view that they are in balance, and eliminate them when you close an accounting period. Failure to eliminate inter-branch transactions when preparing the consolidated financial statements results in overstated financial results and can lead to legal consequences. ## Rules for transaction balancing In Visma Net, you can create account mapping by using the [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/)window. For each branch, specify a range of accounts that might be involved in inter-branch transactions. In each branch, specify offset (inter-branch) accounts for amounts to be paid to other branches (Payables to Branch 1, Payables to Branch 3, and so forth) and for amounts to be received from other branches (Receivables from Branch 1, Receivables from Branch 2, and so forth). The following terminology is used in the [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/)window: An **originating** branch is always the branch specified in the top part (header) of the document to be balanced, and each of the branches specified in the document lines are the **destination** branches. For each branch selected in the top part of the [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) window, use the **Transaction in the originating branch** tab to specify the offset accounts to be used for specific ranges of accounts in each of the other branches. Then, if an inter-branch transaction refers to an account in one of the specified ranges in any destination branch, the system will generate a new balancing transaction in the originating branch for the respective offset account. You can use the **Transaction in the destination branch** tab to specify the offset accounts to be used for generating balancing transactions in other branches if the inter-branch transactions refers to accounts within specific account ranges in the destination branches. To better understand how to use the [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/)window, consider the following example: There are three branches in an organisation. If you select **Branch 1** in the top part of the window, on the **Transaction in the originating branch** tab, for Branch 1 you can specify the following offset accounts: **Receivables from branch 2**, **Receivables from branch 3**. For the above example, by using the **Transaction in the destination branch** tab, you can specify the following offset accounts: + For branch 2: **Payables to Branch 1** + For branch 3: **Payables to Branch 1** Successively selecting Branch 2 and Branch 3 in the top part of the window, you can specify the inter-branch accounts for all possible inter-branch transactions. ## Using the rules The system will apply the balancing rules to the inter-branch transactions once the following conditions are met: + The transaction accounts match the account range specified by rules for inter-branch transactions. + The transaction's header and the details refer to different branches. Complementary transactions are generated when the original transactions are posted. About foreign currency transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/about-foreign-currency-transactions page You can use the General ledger workspace to record batches of journal entries in foreign currencies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About foreign currency transactions You can use the General ledger workspace to record batches of journal entries in foreign currencies. You can use the General ledger workspace to record batches of journal entries in foreign currencies. All the transactions in one batch must use the same currency, but not necessarily the base currency. If at least one of the accounts used in a batch is denominated to a specific currency, only this currency can be used as a batch currency. The default exchange rate type is defined for all the foreign currencies in the [Currency management preferences (CM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-management-preferences-cm101000/) window. Exchange rates for all rate types are maintained in the system with their history. ## Rounding gains and losses Once you enter your journal transactions with debit and credit amounts in the foreign currency, the system automatically converts the amounts into the base currency based on the default or the specified exchange rate. The base currency generally has fewer decimal places than the exchange rate, which has six decimal places. Thus, the debit and credit amounts calculated in the base currency may differ by a very small amount, causing the batch to not balance. In this case, the difference is recorded to one of the accounts specified for each currency, **Rounding gain** account or **Rounding loss** account, and the corresponding transaction is automatically added to the batch. ### Related concepts [About denominated accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-denominated-accounts/) ### Related reference [Journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) Manage ledgers /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage ledgers Manage ledgers - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/manage-ledgers-overview page In companies that have multiple branches, each branch may have one actual ledger and an unlimited number of ledgers of other types. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage ledgers - overview In companies that have multiple branches, each branch may have one actual ledger and an unlimited number of ledgers of other types. In companies that have multiple branches, each branch may have one actual ledger and an unlimited number of ledgers of other types. Visma Net supports multiple ledgers for the General ledger workspace. Multiple books are maintained in a single database. Because you can keep ledgers of multiple types, you can record actual financial information and can store budgets, forecasts, and statistical and reporting information for all branches of your organisation. The topics below describe the types of ledgers supported by Visma Net, and provides step-by-step instructions on creating a ledger of the required type. ## Topics + [About multiple ledger support](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/about-multiple-ledger-support/) + [About statistical ledgers](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/about-statistical-ledgers/) + [Add a ledger](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/add-a-ledger/) About multiple ledger support /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/about-multiple-ledger-support page Visma Net supports the following types of ledgers: Actual, Budget, Reporting, and Statistical. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About multiple ledger support Visma Net supports the following types of ledgers: Actual, Budget, Reporting, and Statistical. You can create ledgers of any type in the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. You cannot delete a ledger or change its currency or type if the ledger has any journal entries or other records. ## Actual ledgers In Visma Net, a ledger of the **Actual** type is the core of your company’s financial records, and every transaction flows through the actual ledger. The records in the actual ledger keep the history of all financial transactions since day one of the life of your company. You must create at least one ledger with the **Actual** type in the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window and define it as the default posting ledger before you can start live operations in Visma Net. The system supports only one actual ledger per branch. You can assign actual ledgers to branches by using the [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) window. Multiple branches can use the same actual ledger. For each ledger, you can select one branch which consolidates the data of other branches in the same ledger as **consolidation branch**. To indicate that the ledger is shared by multiple branches that are separate legal entities, select no consolidation branch. For each actual ledger that is used by multiple branches, specify whether inter-branch transactions should be automatically generated. You can specify the rules for generating inter-branch transactions by using the [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) window. ## Budget ledgers A ledger of the **Budget** type is a special ledger that is used to store budget information. Such a ledger is updated in the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window. An organisation can use an unlimited number of budget ledgers. Entering journal transactions for a budget ledger is not allowed. ## Statistical ledgers A **statistical ledger** is a ledger that can be used to store statistical information about a branch's operations. Each organisation can have multiple statistical ledgers, each for a different type of information. Statistical ledgers can be used as a data source for reporting, to calculate allocations based on statistical data, or for other purposes. For more information, see[About statistical ledgers](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/about-statistical-ledgers/). ## Reporting ledgers A **reporting ledger** is a ledger that is used to store translated financial information; this type of ledger is available only if multi-currency support has been activated. Entering journal transactions for a reporting ledger is not allowed. An organisation can use any number of reporting ledgers. Reporting ledgers are mainly used by organisations, which are subsidiaries of a parent company, to hold the data translated for consolidations performed by the parent company. Parent topic: [Managing ledgers - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/manage-ledgers-overview/)

Related pages

Tasks

 About statistical ledgers /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/about-statistical-ledgers page Organisations use statistical data to better understand and analyse financial data. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About statistical ledgers Organisations use statistical data to better understand and analyse financial data. With Visma Net, your organisation can add an unlimited number of statistical ledgers to store statistical information. If your organisation has multiple branches, all branches can use the same statistical ledgers since information in ledgers are arranged by branch, or each branch can use separate statistical ledgers created for the branch. You can add a new ledger of the **statistical balance** type by using the [Ledgers](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. The same chart of accounts is used for posting to statistical ledgers as to actual ledgers. Depending on the policies established in your organisation, you can create special accounts to be used for statistical information and use only those accounts with statistical ledgers, or you can use the same monetary accounts as you use for financial data. Balances for each account are calculated by a ledger. Statistical data is entered into ledgers through batches of journal entries. You can create batches of statistical entries in the [Journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. When creating journal entries for a statistical ledger, you can specify the quantities of goods or services and the units of measure (in which the quantities are measured) along with monetary amounts. To make statistical data on reports more useful, follow the organisation policies in selecting the units of measure for specific goods or services. A batch of journal entries to be posted to a statistical ledger may be unbalanced or it may not comply with the double-entry bookkeeping rule and may have a total credit amount that is not equal to the total debit amount even if the **Validate batch control totals on entry** option is selected in the [General ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. For batches of journal entries containing statistical data for a statistical ledger, you can apply all the options available for batches intended for actual ledgers: You can create auto-reversing batches and schedule recurring batches by using the [Recurring transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500/) window. Also, you can use the statistical data in a statistical ledger as the basis for calculating allocation amounts when you configure allocations by using the [Allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) (GL204500) window. Add a ledger /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/add-a-ledger section In Visma Net, you add a ledger by using the Ledgers (GL201500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a ledger In Visma Net, you add a ledger by using the Ledgers (GL201500) window. For more information: [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/). out 1. Go to the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to insert a row in the table. 1. In the **Ledger ID** column, type the unique ID of the ledger. 1. In the **Description** column, briefly describe the ledger. 1. In the **Balance type** column, select the option that best fits how the ledger will be used: + **Actual**, for reporting purposes + **Budget**, for creating budgets + **Reporting**, to keep translations + **Statistical**, to store statistical data 1. In the **Currency** column, select the ledger currency. 1. Optional: Select the **Branch accounting** check box to automatically generate the inter-branch transactions, if the ledger will be used by multiple branches. 1. Optional: Select the **Is consolidation source** check box if the ledger will be used as a source ledger for consolidation with the parent company. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. You can later delete the ledger or modify its properties only if it has no journal entries or other record. Making reports in different currencies /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-ledgers/making-reports-in-different-currencies section You will usually report your balance sheets and profit and loss statements in the base currency of your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Making reports in different currencies You will usually report your balance sheets and profit and loss statements in the base currency of your company. For international companies, it may be necessary to prepare these reports in other currencies. In Visma Net, you can translate your ledger to a different currency to get the reports needed. ## Create a new reporting ledger for a different currency 1. Go to the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. 1. Enter a **ledger ID** and **description** that reflects the currency you will use this ledger for. 1. Select **Balance type** reporting. 1. Select the correct **currency**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Defining your translation 1. Go to the **Translate definition** window. 1. Create a **Translation ID** for your new currency ledger. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select your actual ledger as the **Source ledger ID** and newly made reporting ledger as the **Destination ledger ID**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new record and select the accounts and subaccounts to include. 1. Select your preferred **Translation method** and **Rate type**. 1. Select the check box **Active**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Processing your translation 1. Go to the **Prepare translations** window. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the **Period** and **Translation ID**. 1. Click **Create translation**. 1. If necessary, edit any of the amounts. 1. Click **Release**. Now you can select the new reporting ledger when you want to make a report for that currency. Manage budgets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage budgets Manage budgets - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/manage-budgets-overview page A company budget generally consists of a set of interrelated budgets that the company's top managers use for planning, financial analysis, and forecasting. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage budgets - overview A company budget generally consists of a set of interrelated budgets that the company's top managers use for planning, financial analysis, and forecasting. A company budget generally consists of a set of interrelated budgets that the company's top managers use for planning, financial analysis, and forecasting. In Visma Net, you can create and maintain any number of budgets and budget scenarios (versions of a budget) for all branches, and you can compare budgets to actual data or to other budgets. Also, you can configure user access to sensitive budget articles. The topics below contain an overview of the budgets (simple and hierarchical), a description of the configuration of the budget tree, and other details concerning the budgets in Visma Net. ## Topics + [Overview of budgets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/overview-of-budgets/) + [Budget structure example](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/budget-structure-example/) + [Prepare a budget](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/prepare-a-budget/) Overview of budgets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/overview-of-budgets section With Visma Net, you can create budgets without first configuring single-level lists of budget articles. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Overview of budgets With Visma Net, you can create budgets without first configuring single-level lists of budget articles. With Visma Net, you can create budgets without first configuring single-level lists of budget articles. If your company needs hierarchical budgets, you can configure a budget tree and then create hierarchical budgets. ## Features affecting the budgets If the **Branch accounting** functionality is enabled in your system, budgets can be created on a per-branch basis, with one ledger holding the budgets for all branches. If this functionality is not enabled, each budget you create is intended for the entire organisation. Detailed budgets may include articles that are split by subaccounts into multiple subarticles. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is not enabled in your system, budget articles are created on a per-account basis. This overview discusses the functionality of budgets in a system where the **Branch accounting** and **Subaccounts** functionalities are enabled. ## Single-level budgets In its simplest window, a budget is a list of planned or forecasted revenues and expenses. You can create such budgets as single-level lists of budget articles with the amounts representing specific expenses and revenues for a budget year at a particular branch. In such budgets, a **budget article** is defined by an account-subaccount pair (or by a particular account in a system where subaccounts are not used). Simple budgets, unlike hierarchical budgets, require no preliminary configuring. You can create single-level budgets by using the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window. In the same budget ledger, you can keep budgets of all the branches of your organisation for one financial year or multiple years. You can create separate budgets for each branch. You can create a list of budget articles in one of the following ways: + By manually selecting an account and subaccount and typing the amount for each budget article. + By importing the list from an Excel spreadsheet. + By loading the account-subaccount pairs from an actual ledger or from another budget ledger with their amounts. You can specify a multiplier to calculate the budget amounts based on the amounts available in the source ledger. Also, you can create the budget in multiple stages that may include: + Creating a list of account-subaccount pairs manually, by importing the list, or by loading it. You may create a list by using one of the methods or a combination of the methods. + Entering, loading, or importing the amounts. ## Budget tree configuration If no budget tree has been configured in your system, you can create only single-level budgets. If your company needs hierarchical budgets, you can configure the budget structure by using the [Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) window. Review the budgets of all branches to include all the budget levels used by your branches, because the same tree will be used for all branches and all budget versions. A budget tree has **leaves** or budget articles, each of which is defined by an account-subaccount pair and **nodes**; each node may include leaf articles and nodes. A node article can be defined by its description and optionally by an account and subaccount mask. An account-subaccount pair may be used only once within the tree. The main difference between leaf articles and node articles is that when you create a budget, you can enter the amounts for leaves, but not for nodes. The system calculates the amount for each node automatically as the sum of the amounts of all its leaf articles. The amounts for nodes containing other nodes are also calculated automatically, based on the amounts of all leaf articles within those nodes. For an example of a budget structure, see: [Budget structure example](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/budget-structure-example/), You can populate each node in any of the following ways: + By manually creating a list of subarticles: nodes, nodes and leaf articles, or only leaf articles. + By generating the list of pairs for the specified range of accounts and the specified subaccount mask. Depending on whether the **On-the-fly entry** check box is selected for subaccounts in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, the possible pairs will be generated for only subaccounts available on the list of subaccounts (if the check box is cleared) or for all possible subaccounts resulting from combining all segment values (if the check box is selected). Once all the specified pairs have been generated, you can delete the pairs that are not needed in the budget article. Modifications of the budget tree do not affect released budgets, so you can modify the tree at any time. ## Leaf articles with aggregation When you prepare budgets in Visma Net, in addition to budget articles that are leaves or nodes, you can use budget articles that are leaf articles with aggregating masks for accounts and subaccounts. An article of this type can be used for initial aggregation of insignificant amounts into one budget article. For example: Suppose that you are planning office supplies for the next year based on the amount spent last year. You don't want to enter all the amounts for office supplies required for each employee in each department. Rather, you want to get the total amount previously spent on such supplies, to use this amount as a basis for a new amount for such supplies adjusted for increase or decrease in the number of employees and for other factors. In such a case, you add to the budget tree a leaf budget article that aggregates amounts over multiple similar account-subaccount pairs defined by account and subaccount masks. Then, on pre-loading the actual data for this budget article, the system will calculate the sum of the amounts available for all pairs defined by the specified masks. However, you will not be able to view the details of the article or the list of account-subaccount pairs defined by the masks and their amounts. You can edit this aggregated amount as an amount of any other leaf article. For details, see [Budget structure example.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/budget-structure-example/) ## Hierarchical budgets You can create hierarchical budgets by using the>[Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) window. Each budget should be saved to a ledger of the **Budget** type. Each budget ledger may store budgets for all branches for all financial years. If you had created single-level budgets before you configured the budget tree, you can convert each of them to a hierarchical budget based on the budget tree. CAUTION: Before you start converting simple budgets into hierarchical budgets, make sure that there are no conflicts between the tree and the single-level budget. No conversion will be performed if any mask used for a single-level budget is split into multiple masks on a tree or if multiple masks used somewhere in the single-level budget are merged into a single mask for the tree. To do this, in the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window, select an existing single-level budget, and click **Manage budgets** in the window toolbar. In the dialog box, select the **Convert budget using current budget configuration** action and click **OK**. ## Budget data entry with the wizard Once you start to prepare a new budget by using the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window, the system loads the budget articles from the budget tree. After that, you will be able to enter the amounts for the budget articles loaded from the tree and add new articles. You cannot remove any of the articles loaded window the budget tree even if they are not needed in this particular budget. You can enter the amounts for leaf budget articles in one of the following ways: + Manually + By importing the amounts from a file + By loading the data from an actual ledger or from an existing budget. To facilitate data loading, Visma Net provides the **Preload budget articles** wizard, which helps you select the budget articles for loading and specify the data source. You can load the amounts for the budget at once or separately, for each node of the budget. You can load the articles from an actual ledger or from another budget, or you can import the amounts from a file. You can specify a multiplier to calculate the budget amounts based on the amounts in the selected source. For more information, see: [Prepare a budget.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/prepare-a-budget/) ## Distribution over financial periods The amounts specified for an article should be distributed over the periods of the year before you can release the budget article. For the budget article to be released, the amount of the article must be equal to the distributed amount. You can enter the amounts for each period manually, or you can distribute them automatically by clicking **Distribute** in the table toolbar of the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window and selecting the option that defines how the amounts should be distributed: evenly or by period balances. If your company has an adjustment period, it will be included in the distribution performed based on available balances for the periods of the year. If you want to distribute the amounts over the financial periods evenly, the system excludes the adjustment period from this distribution. To facilitate distributing, you also can select whether you want to distribute the amount for only the selected article or for all articles in the same node. Also, you can select a node and distribute the amounts for all subarticles of this node. ## Budget ledgers and budget scenarios You can create a budget and save it in a ledger of the **Budget** type. Generally, each budget ledger holds a budget of a specific type for all branches. To create different budgets for the same year, such as **worst-case**, **break-even**, and **best-case**, use different budget ledgers. When the system loads the data for a new budget scenario from an existing budget, you can specify the multiplier to decrease or increase the amounts being loaded for this budget scenario. Later, you can use the same ledger to create the budget of the same type for the next budget year. ## Budget approval and release The amounts of budget articles are not posted to the budget ledger until the articles are released. Only leaf budget articles may be released. The amounts for the budget articles that are nodes will be calculated based on the amounts of released articles. To release a leaf budget article, make sure the year amount of the article is equal to the sum of amounts calculated over the financial periods of the year. You can release the entire budget or the selected budget articles by using the [Release budgets (GL505510)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-budgets-gl505510/) window. Once a budget article has been released, the **Released** check box is selected for it in the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window. You can modify budgets at any time. Once you have modified a budget article, you have to release the article to view its amount on reports. Also, you can roll back the budget to the previous released budget. ## Budget comparison You can compare the budget being prepared to actual data of the previous year, to year-to-date amounts of the current year, or to other budgets. Save the budget before comparison by clicking ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) on the window toolbar. To compare the budgets, in the top part of the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window, ensure that the ledger and the financial year of the budget being prepared is selected in the **Budget** and **Financial year** fields respectively. In the **Compare to ledger** and the **Compare to year** fields, select the ledger and the financial year of the budget needed for comparison. Once you have specified the required ledgers and financial years in the table, the system adds a row to each budget article being prepared that shows the amounts of the budget of the compared ledger and financial year. Only the released amounts of the budget articles are shown in the table. If the **Multi-branch support** functionality is available in your system (the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window), you can compare the budgets of different branches by selecting the required branches in the **Branch** and **Compare to branch** fields. ## Budget access restrictions In Visma Net, organisations implement general access restrictions by assigning roles to users of the system. The roles assigned to users allow them to perform specific tasks required by their position in the organisation. If a role allows a user to view or edit budget articles, the user can view all the articles, including those that might be sensitive. Setting up proper restriction groups can ensure that only particular users see particular budget articles. A restriction group allows access to particular objects of specific types (which are included in the group) to only the users who are members of the same group. Objects of the following types can be included in a restriction group: + Budget articles (leaf articles or nodes at any level) + Users To protect sensitive budget articles, you create a restriction group by using the [Budget access (GL105030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/budget-access-gl105030/) window and include the budget articles and the users who should have access to these articles. As a result, the users not included in the group will not be able to access the budget articles and these articles' subarticles if there are any. You can add new budget articles to existing groups by using the [Restriction groups by budget article (GL105020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-budget-article-gl105020/) window. Parent topic: [Manage budgets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/manage-budgets-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Budget structure example /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/budget-structure-example page In Visma Net, you can create a budget structure with multiple levels of budget articles. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Budget structure example In Visma Net, you can create a budget structure with multiple levels of budget articles. In Visma Net, you can create a budget structure with multiple levels of budget articles. For more information on budgets, see: [Overview of budgets.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/overview-of-budgets/) Consider a simplified example of a budget structure for a company called Winter fun. This business has two stores (one store on the west slope of a mountain and another on the east slope), sells skis and snowboards, and offers rental services. The company's stores are too small to function as branches, so the **Branch accounting** functionality is disabled in the company's system. The organisational structure of the company is reflected in the subaccounts. In Visma Net, if the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled, subaccounts are used with accounts to virtually split accounts into more specific accounts for detailed tracking and reporting. In our example, the subaccounts have the following structure: + First segment: **Company store (point of sale)** + **WS** (west slope store) + **ES** (east slope store) + **00** (non-specific to a store) + Second segment: **Profit centre** + **RENT** (rentals) + **SALE** (sales) + **0000** (non-specific to a profit centre) + Third segment: **Product type** + **SK** (skis) + **SB** (snowboards) + **00** (non-specific) In our simplified example, the Winter fun company prepares the budgets with the following major budget articles: + Revenue from sales + Revenue from rentals + COGS + Other expenses In Visma Net, you use the [Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) window to build a budget tree for the company. On the budget tree, the major budget articles are the nodes of the first level (just under the root node). No account and subaccount masks are specified for these nodes because these nodes include only nodes, not leaf articles. Masks are used for generating leaf articles or for aggregating the data for leaf articles for a particular budget. On the left pane of this window, the tree-like budget structure for the company would be organised as schematically shown in the table below. ## Budget tree |Article|Subarticles|Subarticles|Account mask|Subaccount mask|Account|Subaccount| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |**Sales**||||||| ||**Sales–West slope**|||||| |||Sales–West slope–Skis|||3100|WS-SALE-SK| |||Sales–West slope–Snowboards|||3100|WS-SALE-SB| ||**Sales–East slope**||3100|ES-SALE-??||| |||Sales–East slope–Skis|||3000|ES-SALE-SK| |||Sales–East slope–Snowboards|||3000|ES-SALE-SB| |**Rentals**||||||| ||**Rentals–West slope**||3500|WS-RENT-??||| |||Rentals–West slope–Skis|||3500|WS-RENT-SK| |||Rentals–West slope–Snowboards|||3500|WS-RENT-SB| ||**Rentals–East slope**||3500|ES-RENT-??||| |||Rentals–East slope–Skis|||3500|ES-RENT-SK| |||Rentals–East slope–Snowboards|||3500|ES-RENT-SB| |**COGS**||||||| ||**COGS–Skis**||4500|??-SALE-SK||| |||COGS–East slope–Skis|||4500|ES-SALE-SK| |||COGS–West slope–Skis|||4500|WS-SALE-SK| ||**COGS–Snowboards**||4500|??-SALE-SB||| |||COGS–East slope–Snowboards|||4500|ES-SALE-SB| |||COGS–West slope–Snowboards|||4500|WS-SALE-SB| |**Other Expenses**||||||| ||**Repairs and Maintenance**||55??|??-????-??||| |||Repairs and maintenance–East slope|5570|ES-????-?? (Aggregation)|5570|ES-0000-00| |||Repairs and maintenance–West slope|5580|WS-????-?? (Aggregation)|5580|WS-0000-00| In the [Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) window, each budget article shown in the table above with an account mask (or just an account) in the **Account mask** column and a subaccount mask in the **Subaccount mask** column is a node. Each budget article with an account specified in the **Account** column and a subaccount specified in the **Subaccount** column is a leaf article on the budget tree. Budget articles included in other budget articles (nodes) are also referred to as subarticles. Once you specify the amounts for all leaf articles, the system will calculate the sums of subarticle amounts for each node article. The articles with values in all four columns are leaf articles with initial aggregation over the data defined by these masks. The expenses recorded to the **Repairs and maintenance** account for each store last year, although summed up to significant amounts, cannot help in predicting the expenses for the budget year, but the their sum can. The company can plan the amounts based on the previous year's data with a specific coefficient whose value is based on the percentage of old equipment and other related factors. The company plans these amounts as lump sums without details. To do this, the company uses the budget articles with aggregation. The articles have the account-subaccount pairs specified and the subaccount masks for aggregating the amounts. Parent topic: [Manage budgets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/manage-budgets-overview/) Related reference [Budgets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Prepare a budget /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/prepare-a-budget section The process of preparing a budget may be performed in multiple stages over time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare a budget The process of preparing a budget may be performed in multiple stages over time. You can save the budget at any time and continue to work on it later. ## Before you proceed Make sure the budget tree has been configured in the [Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) window. To create a new budget, perform the following steps: 1. Go to the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch for which you want to prepare this budget. 1. In the **Ledger** field, select a ledger of the **Budget** type for this new budget. 1. Select the **Tree view** check box to also view the Tree pane. 1. In the **Financial year** field, select a budget year. The **Preload from budget configuration dialog box** appears. 1. Click **Yes** in the dialog box. The system loads the budget tree, which you can see in the left pane. > [!NOTE] > You cannot remove any of the loaded articles, even if they are not needed for this particular budget. 1. Optional: In the **Compare to branch** field, select the branch whose data you want to compare with the budget data. The selected branch will be used as the default branch for loading the data to populate the budget. 1. Optional: In the **Compare to ledger** field, select the ledger whose data you want to compare with the budget data. The selected ledger will be used as the default ledger for loading the data to populate the budget. 1. Optional: In the **Compare to year** field, select the financial year whose data you want to compare with the budget data. The selected year's data will be used as a source for loading the data to populate the budget. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you want to load the data for the entire budget, in the Budget tree pane, select the root node. (If you want to load the data for only a particular node, select the node.) The selected node is shown in red type. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Preload articles**. 1. On the first page (Step 1) of the **Preload budget articles** wizard, in the **Branch** field, select the branch whose data you want to load. 1. In the **Ledger** field, select the ledger from which you want to load the data. 1. In the **Financial year** field, select the year for loading this year data. 1. In the **Multiplier** field, specify whether you want to load the data without changes (100%), with an increase (>100%), or with a decrease (<100%). 1. Click **Next** to open the next page of the wizard (Step 2). 1. In the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. In the **Account to** field, select the account to end the range of accounts for loading; otherwise, the system loads the accounts ending with the account listed last in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. In the **Account mask** field, specify the mask to select only specific accounts from the range. 1. In the **Subaccount mask** field, modify the mask to select only specific subaccounts. 1. Click **Next** to open the next page of the wizard (Step 3). 1. Select one of the following options: + **Update existing articles only**: To load the data for only the articles available in this node and the nodes within this node. + **Update existing articles and Load non-existent articles**: To load the data for the articles available in this node and to add the articles not available in this node and load the data for them. + **Load non-existent articles only**: To add the articles that are not listed in the selected node and load the data for them. 1. Click **Finish** to close the wizard. 1. In the table, review the amounts of the budget articles, and change them as needed. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Distribute the amounts over the financial periods in all budgets by following the following steps: 1. In the Budget tree (left) pane, select the root node. 1. In the Budget articles (right) pane, click **Distribute** in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Distribute year amounts by periods dialog box**, select **Evenly** to distribute equal amounts to all periods or **Proportionally to compared values** to follow the distribution pattern in the source. 1. Select the **Apply to all articles in this node** check box to perform distribution for all articles in the selected node. 1. Select the **Apply to subarticles** check box to perform distribution within other nodes of the selected node. 1. Click **OK** to close the dialog box and to perform the distribution. 1. Adjust the period amounts manually if needed. Make sure the article's amount is equal to the distributed amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Parent topic: [Manage budgets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/manage-budgets-overview/) Manage consolidations /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations section By using the functionality of the General ledger workspace, you can consolidate data from specific branches of subsidiaries (or consolidation units) into a specific branch of the parent company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage consolidations By using the functionality of the General ledger workspace, you can consolidate data from specific branches of subsidiaries (or consolidation units) into a specific branch of the parent company. By using the functionality of the General ledger workspace, you can consolidate data from specific branches of subsidiaries (or consolidation units) into a specific branch of the parent company. You can configure which data should be consolidated and how exactly the data should be consolidated. After that, you can consolidate the data as often as you need within each financial period. This functionality is available only if the **General ledger consolidation** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In the overview below, you can find topics that describe the consolidation process when both the subsidiary and the parent company use Visma Net. Consolidation data is available through the standard simple object access protocol (SOAP) gateway, so third-party software can be used by either side. General ledger consolidation overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/general-ledger-consolidation-overview page The consolidation process in the General ledger includes three stages: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger consolidation overview The consolidation process in the General ledger includes three stages: + Consolidation setup, which is performed by each consolidation unit and by the parent company + Data preparation by each consolidation unit + Import of the consolidation data from each of the units by the parent company These stages are described in the sections below. ## Setup by the parent company The parent company should perform the following actions to set up consolidation: + Decide which branches will consolidate which data. + Provide proper information about the accounts and subaccounts in accordance with the required level of consolidation details. This information will be used for mapping in the consolidation units. + Perform the synchronisation to update the lists of ledgers and branches available in the consolidation units for consolidation. + Configure access to the consolidation unit's Visma Net website by specifying valid credentials. ## Setup by the consolidation unit To set up consolidation, the consolidation unit should perform the following actions: + Mapping the unit's accounts to the parent company's accounts on the chart of accounts. + Specifying all the settings for proper mapping of the unit's subaccount segments to the parent company's subaccounts in the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/), [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/), and [Consolidation (GL103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) windows. For mapping options and examples, see: [About account mapping for consolidations](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/about-account-mapping-for-consolidations/).Selecting the required ledgers as source ledgers for consolidation in the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window, and specifying a particular branch or branches if needed. ## Restriction on financial periods During the import, consolidation data is grouped by the financial periods of the reporting unit. Thus, financial periods in the consolidation units and in the parent company should be defined similarly; otherwise, the consolidated data will be incorrect. ## Data preparation If a consolidation unit uses multiple currencies or a different base currency than that of the parent company, the unit should translate the data into the base currency of the parent company before the parent company imports the data. If you want to consolidate the translated data, specify the reporting ledger as the unit's source ledger. To consolidate the original data, specify the actual ledger as the source ledger of the unit. ## Data import The consolidation data is imported to the selected branch of the parent company as general ledger batches with system-generated descriptions. Before the system starts to import the consolidation data, the system transforms the unit's subaccounts into the parent's subaccounts using the segment values mapping and other related settings. Consolidation data being imported to the parent company is available by using the SOAP gateway as a set of GLConsolRead instances. Every GLConsolRead instance consists of four data fields: + `AccountCD` (general ledger account) + `MappedValue` (parent company subaccount) + `ConsolAmtCredit` (total credit value for period) + `ConsolAmtDebit` (total debit value for period) To import the consolidation data from the consolidation units to the parent company, use the [Import consolidation data (GL509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000/) window. Select the unit and the source ledger, and then click **Process**. The financial data will be imported from the database of the consolidation unit to the specified branch of the parent company. To consolidate data of the different types (such as actual data and budget data), use separate ledgers in the parent company. Related reference [Chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) [Subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About consolidation configuration /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/about-consolidation-configuration page This topic provides instructions on how to configure consolidation for your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About consolidation configuration This topic provides instructions on how to configure consolidation for your company. Before you get started, review the hierarchy of the companies whose data should be consolidated, and determine which companies report to which. In this section, consider only a two-level hierarchy: a parent company and one or more subsidiaries (consolidation units) that report to it. This simple hierarchy can be used as a part of a more complicated hierarchy, with the consolidation process going from the bottom to the top and with parent companies after consolidating data from the units becoming units of the next level. Suppose that both a parent company and subsidiaries use Visma Net. If a consolidation unit uses a third-party ERP software, the parent company can consolidate the data by importing the trial balance prepared by the unit and exported to a CSV file by using its third-party software. Mapping of accounts and subaccounts should be performed in this case manually directly in the file, before the parent company will perform import from this file. For more information about the functionality intended for consolidations, see [General ledger consolidation - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/general-ledger-consolidation-overview/). ## Consolidation requirements For correct consolidated data, the following requirements should be met: + The parent company and its subsidiaries should have the same configuration of financial year and periods, since the consolidation data is grouped by the financial periods of subsidiaries. + The parent company and its subsidiaries should have similar structure of charts of accounts, with fewer accounts on the parent chart. Data from multiple accounts used in a subsidiary can be consolidated into one account of the parent company. + A subsidiary should have a subaccount structure similar to that of the parent company. The parent company may have one additional segment (compared to the subsidiary) with values designating subsidiaries. ## Consolidation procedures Generally, the consolidation process includes these three stages: + Consolidation setup, which is performed by each subsidiary and by the parent company + Data preparation by each of the subsidiaries + Import of each subsidiary consolidation data by the parent company The procedures required for configuring and performing consolidation are discussed in the following topics: + [Configure consolidation in a parent company](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/configure-consolidation-in-a-parent-company/) + [Configure consolidation in a subsidiary](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/configure-consolidation-in-a-subsidiary/) + [Prepare the consolidation data in a subsidiary](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/prepare-the-consolidation-data-in-a-subsidiary/) + [Import the consolidation data from a subsidiary](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/import-the-consolidation-data-from-a-subsidiary/) Configure consolidation in a parent company /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/configure-consolidation-in-a-parent-company section The following actions should be performed in the system of the parent company to set up consolidation: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure consolidation in a parent company The following actions should be performed in the system of the parent company to set up consolidation: + Provide access to each subsidiary Visma Net website by specifying valid credentials. + Perform synchronisation to update the list of ledgers and branches available in each subsidiary as sources of consolidation data These actions, performed in the [Consolidation (GL103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) window, are described in detail in the sections below. ## Before you proceed + Provide information about the parent company accounts and subaccounts to personnel at subsidiaries, so that this information can be used for mapping. + Provide information about the parent company base currency to appropriate personnel, to allow subsidiaries to translate the data intended for consolidation from the base currency of each subsidiary to the base currency used by your company. + Make sure the ledgers in each subsidiary whose branches store the data to be consolidated have been specified as the consolidation sources. ## Provide access to subsidiary systems 1. Go to the [Consolidation (GL103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) window. 1. In the **Consolidation segment number** field, specify the number of the subaccount segment used in the parent company to designate the subsidiaries (consolidation units). 1. Provide access information for each of the branches of the parent company that will be importing data from the branches of subsidiaries, following the steps below for each subsidiary. 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** to insert a row in the table. 1. In the **Consolidation branch** column, select the consolidation branch to hold the consolidated data. 1. In the **Consolidation ledger** column, notice the consolidation ledger associated with the branch. 1. Specify the **Consolidation segment value**, which is used to designate this subsidiary or this branch of the subsidiary. 1. Select the **Paste segment value** check box if the consolidation segment is not present in the subsidiary segments. 1. In the **Paste segment value** column, specify the business name of the subsidiary. 1. In the appropriate columns, provide the **User name** and **Password** that can be used to access the website of the subsidiary, as well as the **URL** of the website. 1. In the **From period** and **To period** columns, specify the start and end period for consolidation. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Perform synchronisation between the websites involved 1. While you are still in the [Consolidation (GL103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) window, perform synchronisation between the websites in one of the following ways: It may take several minutes to compile the web services that are used for consolidation. If you receive an **Internal error** message, wait two minutes and repeat the attempt to perform synchronisation. + By using the unlabelled check box, select the added or modified record for each appropriate subsidiary, and click **Synchronise** in the window toolbar. + Click **Synchronise all**. 1. Once synchronisation is completed, in the **Source ledger** column of the table, specify the source ledger and the source branch. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. Parent topic: [About consolidation configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/about-consolidation-configuration/) Configure consolidation in a subsidiary /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/configure-consolidation-in-a-subsidiary section To set up consolidation with the parent company, for the subsidiary, you perform the following actions: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure consolidation in a subsidiary To set up consolidation with the parent company, for the subsidiary, you perform the following actions: + Map the subsidiary general ledger accounts to the parent company accounts by using the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. + Map the subsidiary subaccount segments to the parent company subaccounts by using the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window and the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) windows. + Select the source ledger for consolidation in the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. ## Map accounts to the parent company accounts 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. For each account, in the **Consolidation account** column, specify the parent company account to consolidate the data. You may select from the list of the subsidiary accounts if the parent company chart of accounts is similar to the subsidiary chart. Multiple accounts may be mapped to the same account on the parent chart. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Verify that all accounts are mapped 1. Click the **![icon-filter](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-filter.png)** icon. 1. In the **Filter settings dialog box**, select **Consolidation account** as the property and **Is zero** as the condition. If you want to save the filter for future use, click **Save** and enter a filter name before you close the **Filter settings** dialog box. 1. Click **OK** to close the dialog box and apply the filter. 1. The system will display the list of general ledger accounts that were not mapped. 1. Map these accounts, if any, and save the changes. ## Map subaccounts to the parent company subaccounts You can provide mapping for any subaccount structure in the parent or subsidiary. For simplicity, there is the following procedure on these assumptions: + Subaccounts in subsidiaries and in the parent company have the same general structure, with one additional segment in the parent subaccounts used to designate the subsidiary. + The subsidiaries do not have such a segment. + All other segments in the subsidiaries have values that can be easily mapped to the appropriate segment values in the parent company. You map subaccount segments to segments in the parent subaccounts by using the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window as follows: Go to the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. 1. In the **Segment key ID** field, select **SUBACCOUNT**. 1. For each of the segments, in the **Consol. order** column, type an integer to specify the order of this segment in the parent subaccount. 1. In the **Number of characters** column, specify the lengths of appropriate segments in the parent company. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. You map segment values to parent subaccount segment values in the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window as follows: 1. Go to the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. 1. In the **Segmented key ID** field, select **SUBACCOUNT**. For each of the segments, perform the following steps: + In the **Segment ID** field, select the segment by its number in the subsidiary subaccount. + In the table area, for each of the segment values, specify the matching value in the parent subaccount segment in the **Mapped value** column. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Specify a ledger as a consolidation source 1. Go to the [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window. 1. Review the list of ledgers available in your system and select the **Is consolidation source** check box for the appropriate ledger. 1. Use the following guidelines in selecting the ledger: + If consolidation will be performed in a base currency other than the base currency of the subsidiary, select the reporting ledger that will contain the translated trial balance or budget data. + If consolidation will be performed in the subsidiary base currency, select the actual ledger. + If consolidation will be performed for only budget data in the subsidiary base currency, select the budget ledger. Prepare the consolidation data in a subsidiary /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/prepare-the-consolidation-data-in-a-subsidiary page How the consolidation data should be prepared in a subsidiary depends on whether the subsidiary uses multiple currencies and whether its base currency is the same as the base currency of the parent company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare the consolidation data in a subsidiary How the consolidation data should be prepared in a subsidiary depends on whether the subsidiary uses multiple currencies and whether its base currency is the same as the base currency of the parent company. This topic discusses the following cases: + A subsidiary uses the same base currency as the parent company does. + A subsidiary uses another base currency than the parent company does. If a subsidiary uses only one currency in the single-currency system, no special data preparation is required. Translation to the base currency of the parent company can be performed in the parent company after the import is completed. ## Prepare data in any subsidiary 1. Prepare the trial balance for the consolidation period. Make sure it is correct. For details, see: [View the trial balance on reports](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/view-the-trial-balance-on-reports/). 1. Close the financial period for which consolidation will be performed. ## Prepare data in a subsidiary with another base currency 1. Update exchange rates to be used for translation of balances to the base currency of the parent company. 1. Translate the balances to the parent company base currency, and record the translated balances to the ledger that has been specified as the consolidation source. Parent topic: [About consolidation configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/about-consolidation-configuration/) Import the consolidation data from a subsidiary /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/import-the-consolidation-data-from-a-subsidiary page To import the consolidation data from the consolidation units to the branches of the parent company, use the Import consolidation data (GL509000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import the consolidation data from a subsidiary To import the consolidation data from the consolidation units to the branches of the parent company, use the Import consolidation data (GL509000) window. For more information: [Import consolidation data (GL509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000/). To import the consolidation data from the consolidation units to the branches of the parent company, use the [Import consolidation data (GL509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000/) window. For access to the websites of the units, the system uses information provided in the [Consolidation (GL103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) window. The financial data will be imported from the database of the consolidation unit to the specified ledger of the parent company. To consolidate data of different types, such as actual data and budget data, import them to different ledgers in the parent company. ## Before you proceed + Make sure that the previous financial year is closed before importing the data for the first time in the new year. + Make sure that in the parent company, all financial periods for which the data is available in subsidiaries are activated. 1. Log in to the parent company. 1. Go to the [Import consolidation data (GL509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000/) window. 1. In the list of consolidations, select the check box(es) for the consolidations that you want to process. 1. Make sure the consolidation branches to which the data will be imported from the consolidation units are specified correctly. 1. Click **Process**. Data is imported for all open periods, and only data posted to the source ledgers of the consolidation units after the previous consolidation will be imported to the specified consolidation ledgers of the parent company. You can prepare and review the trial balance and proceed with preparing financial statements for the parent company. About account mapping for consolidations /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/about-account-mapping-for-consolidations page Successful, complete consolidation requires thorough mapping of the subsidiary's accounts and subaccounts to the respective accounts and subaccounts of the parent company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About account mapping for consolidations Successful, complete consolidation requires thorough mapping of the subsidiary's accounts and subaccounts to the respective accounts and subaccounts of the parent company. This mapping depends on your consolidation scenario: what level of details should be available in the consolidation branch for the required consolidated reports. ## Account mapping The chart of accounts may be different in each subsidiary and in the parent company. Matching accounts for consolidation is a relatively straightforward task when the parent company and subsidiaries have similar charts of accounts. Note that some of the accounts may be assigned to a specific branch. Multiple accounts in a unit can be merged into a single account of the parent company if you set the same external account against different accounts in the consolidation unit in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. If the parent company has a more detailed chart of accounts than some of its subsidiaries do, some consolidated accounts may not contain correct information. For example, consider a parent company with several accounts to record travel expenses and a subsidiary with only one account, Travel expenses. In this case, the only travel expense account of the subsidiary has to be consolidated with one of the parent's travel expense accounts. No matter which account is chosen as a consolidation target, the consolidated data will be incorrect. Note: For correct reporting, we recommend that the subsidiaries keep similar or more detailed charts of accounts than the parent company. ## Subaccount mapping In Visma Net, subaccounts carry additional information about the organisational structure of each company. Subaccounts of the consolidation unit are matched to subaccounts of the parent by mapping the unit's segments to strings of the specified length set in the specified order to form the parent's subaccounts. This makes mapping of subaccounts easier and more flexible. For each subaccount segment in the consolidation unit, you define the following parameters for consolidation mapping in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window: + Number of characters: The length of the string (segment or part of the segment) in the parent's subaccount to which the segment value is mapped + Consolidation order: The number that represents the place of this string among other strings in the parent's subaccount If a segment in a unit's subaccount does not match any string (segment or part of the segment) in the parent subaccount, set both of these parameters to zeros. This means the amounts associated with the segment will be aggregated. During data collection, the subaccounts of the unit are mapped to temporary or raw subaccounts that may differ from the parent's subaccounts by the absence of the consolidation segment. ## Example of mapping Consider an example when the parent company has four segments, the first of which is a consolidation segment not involved in mapping. The subaccount of the consolidation unit consists of three segments. Each segment of the unit can be mapped to a same-meaning segment of the parent even though the lengths of the segments are different. In the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, the consolidation mapping parameters for the unit's subaccounts will have the following values. |Segment|Description|Length|Consol. order|Number of characters| |---|---|---|---|---| |1|Project|3|2|2| |2|Department|4|4|2| |3|Brand|3|3|3| The three-character values of the first segment (Project) of the unit's subaccount will be mapped to the two-character values of the second segment of the parent's subaccount, and other segments will be mapped similarly. Particular strings are specified in the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window in the **Mapped values** column. A segment of a unit may be mapped to a string that is shorter than the segment in the parent's subaccount. Here, in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, the consolidation mapping parameters for the unit's subaccounts will have the following values. |Segment|Description|Length|Consol. order|Number of characters| |---|---|---|---|---| |1|Project|3|2|1| |2|Department|4|3|3| |3|Brand|3|4|2| ## Consolidation segment One segment in subaccounts of the parent company should be designated for subsidiaries or consolidation units. Such a segment should be specified as a consolidation segment in the [Consolidation (GL103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) window in the parent company. The values of this segment are associated with the subsidiaries or consolidation units. As a rule, the consolidation segment is not involved in mapping because the subsidiary does not contain such a segment in its subaccounts. In this case, the segment value can be added to the temporary subaccount during import of the data performed by the parent company (if the **Paste segment value** check box in this window is checked). Related reference [Consolidation](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) [Subaccounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Manage allocations /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations section Handling allocations manually can be time-consuming and error-prone. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage allocations Handling allocations manually can be time-consuming and error-prone. By using Visma Net, you can create and maintain allocation templates (which define how the allocations are to be performed) and perform allocations automatically according to your definitions. This functionality is available only if the **Allocation templates** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. About allocation rules /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations/about-allocation-rules page You create templates by using the Allocations (GL204500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About allocation rules You create templates by using the Allocations (GL204500) window. For more information: [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/). You create templates by using the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window. Special input masks let you create an allocation pool by specifying source branches' accounts and subaccounts, and you can set up rules for distributing the allocation amount over several destination accounts for specific branches. Multi-level allocations are supported as well. Allocation templates provide the following information: + The source branch + The source accounts and subaccounts (the allocation pool) + The allocation amount + The destination branch + The destination accounts and subaccounts + The methods for distributing the allocation amount to destination accounts CAUTION: If you create allocation, which distributes specific amounts between multiple branches, consider configuring rules to automatically balance inter-branch transactions. ## Source accounts You may select the source accounts by specifying each account and subaccount individually or by specifying a group of accounts or subaccounts with the help of special grouping masks. To create an allocation pool from similar accounts, you can select source accounts and subaccounts by groups. To do this, use special masks on the **Source accounts** tab of the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window. Accounts and subaccounts have alphanumerical identifiers, which usually are segmented. An input validation mask helps you enter the required number of characters or the required number of valid segments. The masks in this window instead allow you to specify characters in some fixed places or some segment values and leave other segments or places blank, thus selecting all the accounts in which the identifiers have the specified fixed characters (and any possible values in other positions). For example, suppose that all the accounts have five-character identifiers, and all the marketing expense accounts start with `51`. Entering `51` in the account mask `(51___)` allows you to select the accounts 51001, 51022, 51135, and so on. Consider another example. Suppose that subaccounts are segmented in the following way: a two-letter country code (US, FR, GE), a two-letter department code (AD, PR, SL, DV, DP), and a three-letter product code (001,002,... 237). Specifying only **US** for the first segment (mask: `US-__-___` ) allows you to select all subaccounts related to operations in the United States: + US-AD-001 through US-AD-237 + US-PR-001 through US-PR-237 + US-SL-001 through US-SL-237 + US-DV-001 through US-DV-237 + US-DP-001 through US-DP-237 If you want to specify only several characters in a specific segment, type **?** in other positions of the segment. For example: `__/D?/155` will select all of the following subaccounts: + US-DV-155 and US-DP-155 + FR-DV-155 and FR-DP-155 + GE-DV-155 and GE-DP-155 ## Contra accounts Contra accounts and subaccounts may be selected as actual sources of deducting allocation amounts. You must select contra accounts and subaccounts explicitly by choosing them from the list. If the contra account and subaccount are specified, you can define the grouping masks for selecting accounts and subaccounts only to determine the total allocation amount, but the total amount will be deducted from the contra account. ## Allocation methods To define how the allocation amount should be collected from the source accounts, use the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window. You can select one of the following options as the allocation method: By account PTD : To collect the period-to-date amount. From prev. GL allocation : To collect the amount accumulated since the last allocation. ## Distribution methods To define how the allocation amount should be distributed among the destination accounts, use the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window. You can select one of the following options as the distribution method: + **By percent**: The source amount is distributed among destination accounts by percentages, which are set on the **Destination accounts** tab of this window. The total is 100 percent. + **By weight**: The amount is distributed between destination accounts by user-defined coefficients, which are set on the **Destination accounts** tab of this window. The total is not defined. + **By dest. account YTD**: The amount is distributed between the destination accounts of the destination branches proportionally to year-to-date balances of the destination accounts in the allocation ledger if no base branches are specified. If the base branches with the base accounts and subaccounts are specified, the allocation amount is distributed proportionally to YTD balances of the base accounts (recorded under the base subaccounts) of the base branches in the base ledger. If the base branches with the base accounts and subaccounts are specified but no base ledger is specified, the system performs the calculation based on the YTD balances of the base accounts in the allocation ledger. If no base branches are specified, the system uses the destination branches for calculation of these proportions. + **By dest. account PTD**: The amount is distributed between destination accounts of the destination branches proportionally to period-to-date balances of the destination accounts in the allocation ledger if no base branches are specified. If the base branches with the base accounts and subaccounts are specified, the allocation amount is distributed proportionally to PTD balances of the base accounts of the base branches in the base ledger. If the base branches with the base accounts and subaccounts are specified but no base ledger is specified, the system performs the calculation based on the PTD balances of the base accounts in the allocation ledger. If no base branches are specified, the system uses the destination branches for calculation of these proportions. ## Allocation amounts The amount to be allocated is taken from all the specified source accounts (the allocation pool). If the source accounts are specified explicitly on the **Source accounts** tab of the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window, the individual maximum amount ( **Limit amount** ) or a percentage of it ( **Limit percent** ) may be specified for each source account. If the amount limit is specified, the account balance will be allocated completely, unless it exceeds the limit; in this case, only the amount equal to the amount limit will be allocated. If accounts are selected by a group mask, the limit amount or percent (depending on which is specified) will be the same for each of the selected accounts. ## Allocation periods Post periods for an allocation are defined by the start and end period (set on the **Allocation** tab of the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window), including any periods in between. The allocation may be recurring, which means it will be repeated every financial year for the same periods. If an allocation was not performed for the required period, it can be processed (batches generated) in the next period only if the required period was not closed. ## Multi-level allocations An allocation can be a part of a multi-level allocation. The same accounts and subaccounts can be involved in different allocations as source and destination accounts and subaccounts. In this case, the order in which the allocations are performed is important. In Visma Net, multi-level allocation can be performed as a sequence of allocations with a fixed order of allocations. By using the **Allocation** tab of the [Allocations ( GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window, you can assign an appropriate sort order value to each allocation. The allocation with the lowest value is applied first, so a **1** indicates first priority, a **2** indicates second priority, and so on. CAUTION: If you select and try to process an allocation with a higher sort order value (which indicates a lower priority) while an allocation with a lower sort order value (which indicates a higher priority and earlier processing) is not processed, the system will issue a warning and will not process the selected allocation. ## Allocation batches To initiate automatic generation of batches for allocations, use the [Run allocations (GL504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/run-allocations-gl504500/) window. In the window, you can view and select allocations for processing. For each allocation, one batch is generated, which gets the current date as its date stamp. The number of transactions in a batch depends on the number of source accounts, the number of subaccounts involved, and the number of destination accounts. The batches automatically generated for allocations have a **Balanced** status. They can be modified if needed and are then released or posted as other batches. Generally, allocations can be processed several times during the financial period; each time, the batches will be generated. If a **Limit amount** has been specified (on the **Source accounts** tab of the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window), the batches will be generated unless the source accounts' balances become zero or the limit is reached. To view the history of batches for the allocation, use the **Allocation history** tab of the [Allocations (GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window. Run allocations /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations/run-allocations page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run allocations 1. Go to the [Run allocations (GL504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/run-allocations-gl504500/) window. 1. In the **Allocation date** field, select the date of the allocation. 1. In the **Post period** field, select the financial period that you want to view and process allocations for. 1. To process specific allocations, select the check box in front of the allocations you want to process. 1. Click **Process**. The system generates batches for the selected allocations. To process all allocations, you do not have to select them, just click **Process all**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage analytical reports /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports section The analytical reports are used to display the consolidated and summarised data in a view defined by the report designer at the report design stage. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage analytical reports The analytical reports are used to display the consolidated and summarised data in a view defined by the report designer at the report design stage. The analytical reports are used to display the consolidated and summarised data in a view defined by the report designer at the report design stage. The analytical reports are used to provide the summarised and aggregated values in a variety of views: The data in the analytical report can be displayed in the monthly, yearly, and quarterly views, and the data can provide information from the point of view of departments, selected account classes, and other dimensions. In Visma Net, you can design analytical reports and run the reports that were designed and published on the site. About the analytical report manager /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager page The analytical report manager is a web-based report access and management tool for creating and modifying analytical reports. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the analytical report manager The analytical report manager is a web-based report access and management tool for creating and modifying analytical reports. Report designers can use this tool to design and run custom analytical reports using advanced data selection criteria, data calculation rules, and customisable report layout design functionalities. By using the Analytical report manager, you can perform the following tasks: + Create the layout and structure of analytical report, based on your business requirements. + Define data selection criteria for the report with a high level of granularity. The entities specified as the data source could include, for example, a range of accounts, subaccounts, and financial periods. + Use advanced formulas to calculate values based on the information extracted from the data source. + Create consolidated reports based on the data from multiple data sources or analytical reports. + Localise data used by a report if multilingual support of user input is enabled. Once you save and publish reports, they become available to users for viewing. Related reference [Report definitions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) [Unit sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) [Column sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) [Row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) Analytical report parameters /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/analytical-report-parameters page An analytical report is described by the set of parameters, including the following: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Analytical report parameters An analytical report is described by the set of parameters, including the following: Report layout parameters : The parameters specifying how the information in the report should be organised Data source parameters : The parameters that specify how the data should be selected for the report Data transformation and calculation rules : The parameters used in the expression and the formulas applied to calculate the report values based on the data selected from the database Report formatting parameters : The parameters specifying the data visual presentation in the report ## Report layout parameters The report layout determines the report outlook, and defines the content of the rows and columns in the report. To set the report layout, specify the unit structure of the report, identify the rows and columns to be displayed in the report, define the report headers, and set the headers for the specific groups of columns and rows in the report or for the individual columns and rows.
Parameter Description
Column set

Identifies the columns to be included in the analytical report. This is a mandatory attribute for the analytical report.

For more information about the column sets, see Column sets - overview.
Row set

Identifies the columns to be included in the analytical report. This is a mandatory attribute.

For details about the row sets, see About row sets.
Unit set

Identifies the units used to compose the analytical report. Use units to describe the structure of complex reports, such as the reports composed from several sections or including different views of data. Units present the dimensions of data in the analytical report.

For more information about the unit sets, see Unit sets - overview.
Report header

Specifies the text describing the content analytical report. Depending on the report structure, a row header or a column header can be used to specify the header for analytical report.

The report header can be defined as a header for the column set selected for the report, or as the row header having the appropriate style.
Row headers Are used to insert the descriptive text into the report. Depending on the report structure, a row header specifies the header text for a single row or a group of rows in the report.
Column headers Are used to insert the descriptive text into the report. Depending on the report structure, a column header specifies the header text for a single column or a group of columns in the report.
Printing control attributes Include the row and column attributes used to insert the page breaks and line breaks in the reports, display or hide the rows or columns from printing, and set the column groups and printing groups to print data from the specific rows in the specific columns.
The Printing control parameter can be specified for the columns and rows in the report. It manages the line breaks for the rows, page breaks for the rows and columns, includes or excludes the rows or columns from the printed report, and switches the rows and columns merging on or off.
The Column group and Printing group parameters identify that the specific rows will be printed in the specific columns of the report.
## Data source parameters Data source parameters specify how the data will be selected for the report. Depending on the report structure, the data source can be defined for the whole report, and different data selection criteria can be used for the rows and columns.
Parameter Description
Data source selected for the report

Specifies the data filtering criteria on the report level. The data can be filtered using various criteria including groups of accounts and subaccounts, specific periods, and totals calculation method.

For information about the data filtering criteria, see About data filtering criteria.
Data source selected for the row Specifies the data filtering criteria on the row level. You can define the filtering rules separately for each row or set the rules for the groups of rows included in the report. The data can be filtered using various criteria, including groups of accounts and subaccounts, specific periods, and total calculation method.
Data source selected for the column Specifies the data filtering criteria on the column level. You can define the filtering rules separately for each column or set the rules for the groups of rows included in the report. The data can be filtered using various criteria, including groups of accounts and subaccounts, specific periods, and total calculation method.
## Data transformation and calculation rules To calculate the values in the report, you should use formulas. Formulas describe data transformations and other operations performed with the data selected from the data source. The formulas can use the data selected from the data source as the parameters. Depending on the report structure, formulas can be defined on the unit, row, or column level. For more information about the formulas, see [About formulas](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/).
Type Description
Formulas defined for the units Specify the data transformation and calculation rules on the unit level. The operations specified by the formula defined for a unit can be performed with the data related to the other units, or the data from the columns, rows, and cells in the report table.
Formulas defined for the rows Specify the data transformation and calculation rules on the row level. The operations specified by the formula defined for a row can be performed with the data related to the other rows, columns, and cells in the report table.
Formulas defined for the columns The formulas designed for the columns specify the data transformation and calculation rules on the column level. The operations specified by the formula defined for a row can be performed with the data related to the other rows, columns, and cells in the report table.
## Report formatting parameters The formatting options can be defined for the entire report and for any particular row or column. Formatting options allow for setting the report page layout, selecting font attributes, and visually emphasising some rows or columns in the report.
Type Description
Formatting parameters defined on the report level

Allow for setting up the page layout including the report page and margins sizes, selecting the font attributes (the font name, size, style, and colour), and setting the text align and background colour attributes for the text lines in the report.

The formatting parameters defined for the whole report include setting the report attributes for the page formatting, and defining the printing style for the report text. For more information about the printing style, see Printing styles.
Formatting parameters defined on the row level

Can be set for any particular row in the report to visually emphasise it. These parameters include text align, font name, size, style and colour, and background colour attributes. Additionally, the separation lines can be included in the report by adding the rows having an underline type.

The formatting parameters defined on the row level include setting the row attributes for the row formatting, and defining the printing style for the text in the row. For more information about the row attributes, see About row attributes.
Formatting parameters defined on the column level

Can be set for any particular column in the report to visually emphasise it. These parameters include text align, font name, size, style and colour, and background colour attributes.

The formatting parameters defined on the column level include setting the column attributes for the column formatting, and defining the printing style for the text in the column. For more information about the column attributes, see Column attributes.
[Row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets/) [Unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/unit-sets-overview/) [Data source - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/data-source-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Row sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Row sets About row sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets page A row set is a set of rows to be used in a report or in a group of reports that use the same rows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About row sets A row set is a set of rows to be used in a report or in a group of reports that use the same rows. You define row sets and their properties in the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window. While a row set can be used in multiple reports, each report can be associated with a single row set. You can specify what rows will be displayed in the analytical report by creating a new row set, adding the rows to it, and including this row set in the report in the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window. Every row included in the row set has a set of attributes. The row attributes include the report layout and row printing style parameters, the data source for the row, and the data transformation and calculation rules defined to display the calculated values in the row. For more information about row attributes, see [About row attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-attributes/). Related concepts [About analytical report parameters](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/analytical-report-parameters/) About row attributes /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-attributes page Each row in the row set has its set of attributes displayed in the lines of the Row sets (CS206010) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About row attributes Each row in the row set has its set of attributes displayed in the lines of the Row sets (CS206010) window. For more information: [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/). The row attributes specify how the data are selected, calculated, formatted, and displayed in the rows of printed analytical reports. By changing the row attributes, you can define the data selection, processing and formatting rules for a specific row in the analytical report. To define what data should be included in the report and set up the visual formatting for the rows, you should set the values of the following row attributes. ## Code and description The row code is an unique value specified by the system when you add a new row to the row set. This code is used to identify the row within the row set, and the references to the rows in the formulas also include the rows codes. The code assigned to the row can be changed later, but we do not recommend that you change the existing row codes, because they can be used in the formula references to this row. The rows in the row sets are sorted by the row code in ascending order, and this is the order they appear in the generated report. We also do not recommended that you use the successive values as the codes of new rows added to the row set to simplify the procedure of adding the rows to be inserted into the report between the existing ones. The row description is a descriptive definition of the row contents. The data from the **Description** field is not printed in the analytical report. To include the row description in the report, you should create a caption for this row. ## Type By defining the **Type** attribute in the row set, you specify what data will be displayed in a particular report row, and how the data in the row will be processed. You can select one of the following row types:
Type Description
General ledger A row type that you select when the data to be displayed in the row does not include some calculated values like yearly or quarterly totals and can be used as a source in the summarised data calculations. This row type can be selected when no formulas are used to calculate the values in the row.
Caption A row type that you select to set the caption for a row or a group of rows. The row caption can be printed on a separate line in the report or merged with the data in the next row of the row set and displayed in the specified column on the next report line. To print the caption on a separate line, you should select Caption in the Type field, then specify the Style attribute to define the caption printing style, and specify the default settings for the other attributes in the row. To display the caption on the same line, specify the Column group attribute for the row, which defines a caption, and select the Merge next option for the Printing control attribute.
Line A row type that you select to insert a row separating line in the report. The separating lines are used to improve the report readability and visually segregate the groups of data displayed in the report lines. You can specify the line style for the separating lines by setting the Line style attribute for the row.
Total A row type that you select when the data displayed in the row includes some calculated values like yearly or quarterly totals and should be excluded from the volume of data that can be selected as a source for summarised values calculation. This row type is commonly used when the row includes a formula which calculates the sums or total values.
Header A row type that you select to print the specific header in this row in the report. You should specify the header in the Headers section of the Column sets (CS206020) window. To display the header in the report, specify the Column group attribute for the row, which defines a header. This attribute specifies the reference to the appropriate header defined for the column set included in this report.
## Value By specifying the **Value** attribute, you can define a certain value to be displayed in the report line. The values in the rows can be predefined parameters or computed values calculated using formulas. Values are frequently used to insert the sums and totals into the report lines. The formulas used to calculate the data in the report lines usually include the references to other rows or particular cells in the report. The expressions used to insert the data in the report rows can also use the parametric queries to select the necessary data from the data source. Note: When you use the **Values** attribute to display the total values in the row, it is necessary to confirm that the appropriate **Row type** attribute is selected for this row to exclude it from the data that can be selected as a source for summarised values calculation. ## Format You use the **Format** attribute to specify the format functions for the row cells. For the rules of the row cell formatting, see [Cell formatting.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/cell-formatting/) ## Data source You use the **Data source** attribute to define the filtering criteria for the data to be displayed in a specific row of your report. To set up filtering criteria, you should specify appropriate parameters in the **Data source editor** dialog box. You can specify criteria on different levels (row, column, unit, or entire report). The filtering rules defined for the unit have the highest priority. The rules defined on the row, column, and report levels have the next highest priorities (in that order). For example, if you want to define filtering criteria for a column and these criteria differ from the criteria that has already been specified for the rows, you need to clear the parameters or specify them as **Not set** for the row that interacts with the corresponding column so that the data filtering criteria specified for the column will be applied. By specifying the data filtering parameters on the row level, you define the data structure in the report. For example, if a group of lines in the report must display the calculated values for the specific period, you should set the start date and the end date of the period for each row included in this group of report lines. If some lines in the report must display the data related to a specific account, and the columns must display the values calculated for certain periods, you should specify the account on the rows level, and set the start date and the end date of each period on the columns level. ## Style You can use the **Style** attribute to define the printing style, such as the font, background colour, or text alignment, for the data in a specific report row. This attribute can be used when some report row must be visually emphasised and have formatting that differs from that of the other rows in the report. For example, you can set special formatting attributes for the rows that include the total values for some periods. ## Printing control You use the **Printing control** attribute to specify how the rows will be printed in the report. The following printing control options are available for the rows:
Parameter Description
Line break The option you select to insert a line break after each row. In this case, each row will be printed on a separate line.
Merge next The option you select to merge the row data with the data in the next row. When two rows are merged, the values from the merged row are inserted in the free cells of the next row. To merge the rows, you should define in which columns of the next row the data will be inserted, by setting the Column group attributes for the merged rows. You can merge the rows, for example, when some report line must include data from various rows selected from the database by using different selection criteria.
Start box and End box The option you select to visually group a certain number of sequential rows by adding a frame box to these rows in the printed report. Use the Start box option for the first row in the group of rows to be included in the frame, and use the End box option for the last row in this group.
## Page formatting and row printing control attributes Multiple row attributes are used to define the page formatting and to control printing. These attributes include the options that allow you to set the row printing options and block the empty lines printing.
Attribute Description
Page break This attribute allows you to insert a page break in the printed report after the current row.
Height This attribute allows you to set the row height in the printed report (in pixels).
Indent This attribute allows you to set the row indent in the printed report (in pixels).
Line style This attribute is used to set the line style for the row having the Underline type.
Suppress empty This attribute is used when the empty lines must not be printed in the report.
Hide zero This attribute is used to print blank spaces instead of zero values in the row.
Linked row This attribute enables inheriting the printing control properties of a row in the row set from the printing control properties of another row. The printing control properties of a row are defined by the values of Printing control, Suppress empty, and Hide zero attributes. Linked rows are used when the two rows should be printed or not printed in the report simultaneously, and the printing control properties of the first row are used to set the printing control properties for the second row. To define the row whose printing control properties should be used to set the same properties for the current row, you should enter the code of this row in Linked row for the current row attributes set.
## Column group The **Column group** attribute is used to define the group of columns where the values from the current row will be printed. Every column group selected for the current row can include one or several columns. When a column group attribute is set for the current row, the same value should be assigned to the **Printing group** attribute for the columns that will be included in this analytical report and where the values from the current row will be inserted. For example, if the values from the row having the R01 code should be displayed in the columns A and B, the **Column group** attribute should have the same value as the **Printing group** attribute defined for the columns A and B. ## Unit group You use the **Unit group** attribute to include the current row in the unit group. Unit groups are used to generate summarised or aggregated reports, to define the groups of rows to be displayed in some specific reports. Unit groups include the column sets and row sets into the hierarchically organised units that can be used to summarise the values in the report formed from the various column sets and row sets. ### Parent topic [About row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets/) [About row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets/) [About data filtering criteria](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/about-data-filtering-criteria/) [About printing styles](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/printing-styles/) [About formulas](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Column sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Column sets Column sets - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-sets-overview page Column sets are used to define the set of columns to be used in a specific report or in a variety of reports having a common layout. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Column sets - overview Column sets are used to define the set of columns to be used in a specific report or in a variety of reports having a common layout. When different reports use the same columns, you can create a single column set for them. You can specify which columns will be displayed in the analytical report by creating a new column set, adding the columns to it, and including this column set in the report in the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window of the Visma Net Analytical report manager. Each column set can be used in a specific analytical report or in a variety of analytical reports. Every report can be associated only with a single column set. The column sets and their properties are defined in the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window of the Analytical report manager. Every column included in the column set has its set of attributes. The column attributes include the report layout and column printing style parameters, the data source specification for the column, and data transformation and calculation rules defined to display the calculated values in the column. For more information about the column attributes, see [Column attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-attributes/).

Related pages

Concepts

 Column attributes /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-attributes page Each column in the column set has its set of attributes displayed in the lines of the Column sets (CS206020) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Column attributes Each column in the column set has its set of attributes displayed in the lines of the Column sets (CS206020) window. For more information: [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/). The column attributes specify how the data is selected, calculated, formatted, and displayed in the columns of printed analytical reports. By changing the column attributes, you can define the data selection, processing, and formatting rules for a specific column in the analytical report. To define what data should be included in the report and set up the formatting for the columns, you can set the values of the column attributes covered in the sections in this topic. ## Code and description The system assigns a letter code to every column that you add to the column set. The added columns are named as they are named in the Excel file, and the letter assigned to the column cannot be changed later. In the **Description** field, you can add a descriptive definition of the column contents. The data from the **Description** field is not automatically printed in the analytical report. To include the column description in the report, you should create a header for this column. ## Type By defining the **Type** attribute for a column in the column set, you specify what data will be displayed in the particular report column, and how the data in this column will be processed. You can select one of the following column types:
Type Description
General ledger A column type you select when the data to be displayed in the column does not include the values calculated on the column level. This column type can be selected when no formulas are used to calculate the values in the column. If some cells from the rows to be displayed in the report use formulas to calculate the values to be inserted in the row, these formulas will be applied to calculate the values in this column.
Calc A column type you select when a formula is used to calculate the values to be inserted in this cell (for example, when a column cell summarises the values from the other columns).
Descr A column type you select if a test description must be displayed in this column of the printed report.
## Value By specifying the **Value** attribute, you define a certain value to be displayed in the report column. The values in the columns can be predefined parameters or computed values calculated by using formulas. Values are frequently used to insert the sums and totals into the report columns. The formulas used to calculate the data in the report columns usually include the references to other columns or particular cells in the report. The expressions defined for the report columns can also use the parameter queries to select the values from the data source and insert them in the column cells. Note: When you use the **Value** attribute to display the predefined or calculated values in the column, you must confirm that the appropriate **Type** attribute is selected for this column; otherwise, the formula and value calculation rules will be ignored. For more information about the formulas, see [About formulas](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/). ## Rounding By specifying the **Rounding** attribute, you set up the level of rounding that will be used in each particular column of your report to round the values. You can select one of the following types of rounding for a column: **No rounding**, **Whole dollars**, **Thousands**, **Whole thousands**, **Millions**, **Whole millions**, **Billions**, and **Whole billions**. For a detailed description of each type, see [Column sets (CS206020).](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) ## Format You use the **Format** attribute to specify the format functions for the column cells and row cells. For the rules of cell formatting, see [Cell formatting.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/cell-formatting/) ## Page formatting and column printing control attributes Multiple column attributes are used to define page formatting and to control printing, as shown in the following table. These attributes include options you can use to set the column printing options and block the printing of empty columns.
Column type Description
Width The column width in the printed report (in pixels).
Auto height An attribute that automatically adjusts (if selected) the height of the selected cell in a column. You can select this check box to move a long string of text to the next line inside the cell.
Extra space The indentation for the entire column.
Suppress empty An attribute that is used when the empty columns must not be printed in the report.
Suppress line An attribute that is used to control the underline printing in the column. This parameter switches printing the underlines in the report if some rows in the report have the Underline type; the underlines will not be printed in the column when the Suppress line option is selected for it.
Page break An attribute that you use to split the printed report into the pages and insert a page break in the printed report after the current column. If this option is selected, the next columns in the column set will be printed on the next page.
## Printing group You use the **Printing group** attribute to define the group of rows where the values from the current column will be printed. Every printing group can include one row or multiple rows, and can be assigned to a single column set or multiple sets. When a column group attribute is set for the current row, the same column group should be assigned to the **Printing group** attribute for the column set that will be included in this analytical report. ## Unit group You use the **Unit group** attribute to include the current column in the unit group. Unit groups are used to generate summarised or aggregated reports; they define the groups of columns to be displayed in some specific reports. Unit groups include the column sets and row sets in the hierarchically organised units that can be used to summarise the values in the report formed from the various column sets and row sets. ## Printing control You use the **Printing control** attribute to specify how the columns will be printed in the report. The following printing control options are available for the columns.
Printing control parameter Description
Print The option you select to print the column in the report.
Hidden The option you select to prevent the column from appearing in the printed report. If you select it, the column will not be printed in the report. You can use this option when some columns are used only as a source of data to calculate other report values and must not be included in the printed report.
Merge next The option you select to merge the data in the current column with the data in the next column. When the two columns are merged, the values from the merged column are inserted in the free cells of the next column. To merge the columns, you should define in which rows of the next row the data will be inserted, by setting the Printing group values for the merged rows. Rows merging is used, for example, when a single report line must include data from various rows selected from the database by using different selection criteria or calculated values.
## Visible formula You use the **Visible formula** attribute to define the conditions of hiding a column when you run the report. If you do not want to have needless columns (for example, those with no data) in the report, you can hide a column or multiple columns by specifying appropriate hiding conditions in the **Visible formula** box. Hiding a column does not remove a column or its data at all. The column will be displayed when the report is generated outside the specified conditions. For example, suppose you have an annual report that has twelve columns, where each column accumulates data by month. If you run the report in March, it will contain the data for the three months (from January to March), so only three columns will contain data. In that case, there is no need to display other columns that have no data. Thus, you can specify conditions to hide the columns depending on the period of time when you run the report. For the **Visible formula** attribute, you can specify such values as = **True** (for displaying the column), **=False** (for hiding the column), or a formula with specific conditions for hiding the column depending on the @StartPeriod parameter. ## Style You can use the **Style** attribute to define the printing style, such as the font, background colour, or text alignment, for the data in a specific report column. This attribute can be used when some report column must be visually emphasised and have formatting that differs from that of the other columns in the report. For example, you can set special formatting attributes for the columns that include the total values for some periods. For more information about the printing style, see [Printing styles](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/printing-styles/). ## Data source You use the **Data source** attribute to define the filtering criteria for the data to be displayed in a specific column of your report. To set up filtering criteria, you should specify appropriate parameters in the **Data source editor** dialog box. You can specify criteria on different levels (row, column, unit, or entire report). The filtering rules defined for the unit have the highest priority. The rules defined on the row, column, and report levels have the next highest priorities (in that order). For example, if you want to define filtering criteria for a column and these criteria differ from the criteria that has already been specified for the rows, you need to clear the parameters or specify them as **Not set** for the row that interacts with the corresponding column so that the data filtering criteria specified for the column will be applied. For more information about the data filtering criteria, see [About data filtering criteria](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/about-data-filtering-criteria/). By specifying the data filtering parameters on the row level, you define the data structure in the report. For example, if a group of lines in the report must display the calculated values for the specific period, you should set the start date and the end date of the period for each row included in this group of report lines. If some lines in the report must display the data related to a specific account, and the columns must display the values calculated for certain periods, you should specify the account on the rows level, and set the start date and the end date of each period on the columns level. Cell formatting /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/cell-formatting page You use the format functions specified for the Format attribute in the Column sets (CS206020) window (for the column cell) and in the Row sets (CS206010) window (for the row cell). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cell formatting You use the format functions specified for the Format attribute in the Column sets (CS206020) window (for the column cell) and in the Row sets (CS206010) window (for the row cell). For more information: [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/), [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/). To set the format for the column or row cells, you can use the standard formats defined for the format function in.Net. Both standard (numeric and datetime) and user-defined data formats are supported. The standard numeric data formats use the window **Axx**, where **A** is a single alphabetic character called the format specifier, and **xx** is an optional integer called the precision specifier. The precision specifier ranges from 0 to 99 and controls the number of significant digits or zeros to the right of a decimal point. The format string cannot contain white spaces. The standard **DateTime** format string consists of a single format specifier character. If the format specifier is not found in the list of standard string format specifiers, a runtime exception is thrown. If the format string is longer than a single character (even if the extra characters are blanks), the format string is interpreted as a custom format string. If the standard numeric format specifiers do not provide the type of formatting required by the report, you can use custom format strings. The custom format strings use the format characters to specify what symbol should be placed in the specific position of the format string. Any numeric format string that does not fit the definition of a standard numeric format string is interpreted as a custom numeric format string. Thus, the format string **c!** is interpreted as a custom format string because it contains two alphabetic characters, even though the character **c** is a standard numeric format specifier. The custom **DateTime** format specifiers can be used to create a custom **DateTime** format string. ## Standard numeric format strings The following table describes the standard numeric format strings. Note that the result string produced by these format specifiers is influenced by the settings in the **Regional options** control panel. Computers using different settings will generate different result strings. |Format specifier|Name|Description| |---|---|---| |**C** or **c**|Currency|The numbers in the report row or column will be converted to strings that represent the currency amounts. The precision specifier indicates the number of decimal places to be shown. **Examples**: `c` `c2` You can use a currency symbol in the report rows, such as the US dollar symbol ($) or the European Euro symbol (€). To set up the required symbol, use the format string as in the following example: **Example (for Euro)**: `\€ #,##0.00` Any symbol that you type after the backslash (\) will be printed as is.| |**D** or **d**|Decimal|This format is supported for integral types only. The number is converted to a string of decimal digits (0 to9), prefixed by a minus sign if the number is negative. The precision specifier indicates the minimum number of digits in the resulting string. If required, the number is padded with zeros to its left to produce the number of digits given by the precision specifier. The exponent always consists of a plus or minus sign and a minimum of three digits. The exponent is padded with zeros to meet this minimum, if required. **Examples**: dd4| |**E** or **e**|Scientific (exponential) (This format is very seldom used in the analytical reports)|The number is converted to a string of the window **-d.ddd... E+ddd** or **-d.ddd... e+ddd** , where each **d** indicates a digit (0 to 9). The string starts with a minus sign if the number is negative. One digit always precedes the decimal point. The precision specifier indicates the appropriate number of digits after the decimal point. If the precision specifier is omitted, a default of six digits after the decimal point is used. The case of the format specifier indicates whether to prefix the exponent with an **E** or an **e** . The exponent always consists of a plus or minus sign and a minimum of three digits. The exponent is padded with zeros to meet this minimum, if required. **Examples**: ee2| |**F** or **f**|Fixed point|The number is converted to a string of the window **-ddd.ddd...** where each **d** indicates a digit (0 to 9). The string starts with a minus sign if the number is negative. The precision specifier indicates the number of decimal places to be shown. **Examples**: ff4| |**G** or **g**|General|The number is converted to the most compact of the fixed-point or scientific notation, depending on the type of the number and whether a precision specifier is present. If the precision specifier is omitted or zero, the type of the number determines the default precision, as indicated by the following list. + Byte or SByte: 3 + Int16 or UInt16: 5 + Int32 or UInt32: 10 + Int64 or UInt64: 19 + Single: 7 + Double: 15 + Decimal: 29 Fixed-point notation is used if the exponent that would result from expressing the number in scientific notation is greater than –5 and less than the precision specifier; otherwise, scientific notation is used. The result contains a decimal point, if required, and trailing zeroes are omitted. If the precision specifier is present and the number of significant digits in the result exceeds the specified precision, then the excess trailing digits are removed by rounding. If scientific notation is used, the exponent in the result is prefixed with **E** if the format specifier is **G** , or **e** if the format specifier is **g** . The exception to the preceding rule is if the number is a decimal and the precision specifier is omitted. In that case, fixed-point notation is always used and trailing zeroes are preserved. **Examples**: gg4| |**N** or **n**|Number|The number is converted to a string of the window **"-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...** where each **d** indicates a digit (0 to 9). The string starts with a minus sign if the number is negative. Thousand separators are inserted between each group of three digits to the left of the decimal point. The precision specifier indicates the number of decimal places to be shown. **Examples**: nn4| |**P** or **p**|Percent|The number is converted to a string that represents a percent. The converted number is multiplied by 100 in order to be presented as a percentage. The precision specifier indicates the number of decimal places to be shown. **Examples**: pp4| |**R** or **r**|Round-trip (This format is very seldom used in the analytical reports)|The round-trip specifier guarantees that a numeric value converted to a string will be parsed back into the same numeric value. When a numeric value is formatted using this specifier, it is first tested using the general format, with 15 spaces of precision for a **Double** and 7 spaces of precision for a **Single** . If the value is successfully parsed back to the same numeric value, it is formatted by using the general format specifier. However, if the value is not successfully parsed back to the same numeric value, then the value is formatted by using 17 digits of precision for a **Double** and 9 digits of precision for a **Single** . Although a precision specifier can be appended to the round-trip format specifier, it is ignored. Round trips are given precedence over precision when using this specifier. This format is supported by floating-point types only. **Example**: r| |**X** or **x**|Hexadecimal (This format is very seldom used in the analytical reports)|The number is converted to a string of hexadecimal digits. The case of the format specifier indicates whether to use uppercase or lowercase characters for the hexadecimal digits greater than 9. For example, use **X** to produce **ABCDEF** , and **x** to produce **abcdef** . The precision specifier indicates the minimum number of digits in the resulting string. If required, the number is padded with zeros to its left to produce the number of digits given by the precision specifier. This format is supported for integral types only. **Examples**: xX| ## Custom numeric format strings The following table shows the characters you can use to create custom numeric format strings and their definitions. Note that the result strings produced by some of these characters are influenced by the settings in the **Regional options** control panel. Computers using different cultures will generate different result strings. |Format character|Name|Description| |---|---|---| |**0**|Zero placeholder|If the value being formatted has a digit in the position where the **0** appears in the format string, then that digit is copied to the result string. The position of the leftmost **0** before the decimal point and the rightmost **0** after the decimal point determines the range of digits that are always present in the result string. The **00** specifier causes the value to be rounded to the nearest digit preceding the decimal, where rounding away from zero is always used. For example, formatting 34.5 with **00** would result in the value 35.| |**#**|Digit placeholder|If the value being formatted has a digit in the position where the **#** appears in the format string, then that digit is copied to the result string. Otherwise, nothing is stored in that position in the result string. Note that this specifier never displays the **0** character if it is not a significant digit, even if **0** is the only digit in the string. It displays the **0** character if it is a significant digit in the number being displayed. The **##** format string causes the value to be rounded to the nearest digit preceding the decimal, where rounding away from zero is always used. For example, formatting 34.5 with **##** would result in the value 35.| |**.**|Decimal point|The first **.** character in the format string determines the location of the decimal separator in the formatted value; any additional **.** characters are ignored. The actual character used as the decimal separator is determined by the settings in the **Regional options** control panel.| |**,**|Thousand separator and number scaling|This character serves two purposes. First, if the format string contains a **,** character between two digit placeholders (0 or #) and to the left of the decimal point if one is present, then the output will have thousand separators inserted between each group of three digits (counting from the right) to the left of the decimal separator. The actual character used as the decimal separator in the result string is determined by the settings in the **Regional options** control panel. Second, if the format string contains one or more **,** characters immediately to the left of the decimal point, then the number will be divided by the number of **,** characters multiplied by 1000 before it is formatted. For example, the format string **0,,** will represent 100 million as simply 100. Use of the **,** character to indicate that scaling does not include thousand separators in the formatted number. Thus, to scale a number by 1 million and insert thousand separators you would use the format string **#,##0,,**.| |**%**|Percentage placeholder|The presence of the **%** character in a format string causes a number to be multiplied by 100 before it is formatted. The appropriate symbol is inserted in the number itself at the location where the **%** appears in the format string. The percent character used is dependent on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel.| |**E0** **E+0** **E-0** **e0** **e+0** ### e-0|Scientific notation|If any of the strings **E**, **E+**, **E-**, **e**, **e+**, or **e-** is present in the format string and followed immediately by at least one **0** character, then the number is formatted using scientific notation with an **E** or **e** inserted between the number and the exponent. The number of **0** characters following the scientific notation indicator determines the minimum number of digits to output for the exponent. The **E+** and **e+** formats indicate that a sign character (plus or minus) should always precede the exponent. The **E**, **E-**, **e**, or **e-** formats indicate that a sign character should only precede negative exponents.| |**\**|Escape character|In C# and C++, the backslash character causes the next character in the format string to be interpreted as an escape sequence. It is used with traditional formatting sequences like **\n** (new line).| |**'ABC' "ABC"**|Literal string|Characters enclosed in single or double quotes are copied to the result string literally, and do not affect formatting.| |**;**|Section separator|This character is used to separate sections for positive, negative, and zero numbers in the format string.| |**Other**|All other characters|All other characters are copied to the result string as literals in the position they appear.| ## Standard DateTime format strings The following table describes the standard date/time format specifiers. The output of these format specifiers is influenced by the current culture and the settings in the **Regional options** control panel. |Format character|Name|Description| |---|---|---| |**d**|Short date pattern|Displays a value in a short date format. Depending on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel, the value can be in one of the following formats: + **M/d/yyyy** (for **en-US** local settings) + **yyyy/MM/dd** (for **ja-JP** local settings) + **dd/MM/yyyy** (for **fr-FR** local settings) **Example**: d| |**D**|Long date pattern|Displays a value in a long date format. Depending on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel, the value can be in one of the following formats: + **dddd, MMMM dd, yyyy** (for **en-US** local settings) + **yyyy'?'M'?'d'?'** (for **ja-JP** local settings) + **dddd d MMMM yyyy** (for **fr-FR** local settings) **Example**: D| |**t**|Short time pattern|Displays a value in a short time format. Depending on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel, the value can be in one of the following formats: + **h:mm tt** (for **en-US** local settings) + **H:mm** (for ja-JP local settings) + **HH:mm** (for fr-FR local settings) **Example**: t| |**T**|Long time pattern|Displays a value in a long time format. Depending on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel, the value can be in one of the following formats: + **h:mm:ss tt** (for **en-US** local settings) + **H:mm:ss** (for ja-JP local settings) + **HH:mm:ss** (for fr-FR local settings) **Example**: T| |**f**|Full date/time pattern (short time)|Displays a value in a combination of the long date and short time format patterns, separated by a space. **Example**: f| |**F**|Full date/time pattern (long time)|Displays a value in a full date/time format. Depending on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel, the value can be in one of the following formats: + **yyyy h:mm:ss tt** (for **en-US** local settings) + **yyyy'?'M'?'d'?' H:mm:ss** (for ja-JP local settings) + **dddd d MMMM yyyy HH:mm:ss** (for fr-FR local settings) **Example**: `F`| |**g**|General date/time pattern (short time)|Displays a combination of the short date and short time patterns, separated by a space. **Example**: `g`| |**G**|General date/time pattern (long time)|Displays a combination of the short date and long time patterns, separated by a space. **Example**: `G`| |**M** or **m**|Month day pattern|Displays a day of month defined by the value. Depending on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel, the value can be in one of the following formats: + **MMMM dd** (for **en-US** local settings) + **M'?'d'?'** (for ja-JP local settings) + **d MMMM** (for fr-FR local settings **Examples**: Mm| |**R** or **r**|RFC1123 pattern|Displays a time value based on the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Request for Comments (RFC) 1123 specification. This specification sets the following common time format (regardless of the settings in the **Regional options** control panel): **ddd, dd MMM yyyy HH':'mm':'ss 'GMT'** Formatting does not modify the **DateTime** value; therefore, you must adjust the value to GMT before formatting. **Examples**: Rr| |**s**|Sortable date/time pattern; conforms to ISO 8601|Displays a date and time in ISO 8601-compatible format. The format uses the following custom format: **yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss** **Example**: `s`| |**u**|Universal sortable date/time pattern|Displays a time value in a standard defined window. This specification sets the following common time format (regardless of the settings in the **Regional options** control panel): **yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ssZ** No time zone conversion is done when the date and time is formatted; therefore, convert a local date and time to universal time before using this format specifier. **Example**: `u`| |**Y** or **y**|Year month pattern|Displays a year value. Depending on the settings in the **Regional options** control panel, the value can be in one of the following formats: + **MMMM, yyyy** (for **en-US** local settings) + **yyyy'?'M'?'** (for ja-JP local settings) + **MMMM yyyy** (for fr-FR local settings) **Examples**: `Y` `y`| ## Custom Date Time Format Strings The following table describes the custom date/time format specifiers. The output of these format specifiers is influenced by the current culture and the settings in the **Regional options** control panel.
Format specifier Description
d Displays the current day of the month, measured as a number between 1 and 31. If the day is a single digit only (1 to 9), then it is displayed as a single digit. Note that if the d format specifier is used without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard format specifier for the short date pattern. If the d format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
ddd Displays the abbreviated name of the day for the specified DateTime.
dddd (plus any number of additional “d” characters) Displays the full name of the day for the specified DateTime.
dddd (plus any number of additional “d” characters) Displays the full name of the day for the specified DateTime.
f Displays the most significant digit of the seconds fraction. Note that if the f format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the full (long date + short time) format specifier. If the f format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
ff Displays the two most significant digits of the seconds fraction.
fff Displays the three most significant digits of the seconds fraction.
ffff Displays the four most significant digits of the seconds fraction.
fffff Displays the five most significant digits of the seconds fraction.
ffffff Displays the six most significant digits of the seconds fraction.
fffffff Displays the seven most significant digits of the seconds fraction.
F Displays the most significant digit of the seconds fraction. Nothing is displayed if the digit is zero.
FF Displays the two most significant digits of the seconds fraction. However, trailing zeros, or two zero digits, are not displayed.
FFF Displays the three most significant digits of the seconds fraction. However, trailing zeros, or three zero digits, are not displayed.
FFFF Displays the four most significant digits of the seconds fraction. However, trailing zeros, or four zero digits, are not displayed.
FFFFF Displays the five most significant digits of the seconds fraction. However, trailing zeros, or five zero digits, are not displayed.
FFFFFF Displays the six most significant digits of the seconds fraction. However, trailing zeros, or six zero digits, are not displayed.
FFFFFFF Displays the seven most significant digits of the seconds fraction. However, trailing zeros, or seven zero digits, are not displayed.
g or gg (plus any number of additional “g” characters) Displays the era (A.D. for example) for the specified DateTime value. Note that if the g format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard general format specifier. If the g format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
h Displays the hour for the specified DateTime value in the range 1 to 12. The hour represents whole hours passed since either midnight (displayed as 12) or noon (also displayed as 12). If this format is used alone, then the same hour before or after noon is indistinguishable. If the hour is a single digit (1 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit. No rounding occurs when the hour is displayed. For example, a DateTime of 5:43 returns 5.
hh, hh (plus any number of additional “h” characters) Displays the hour for the specified DateTime value in the range 1 to 12. The hour represents whole hours passed since either midnight (displayed as 12) or noon (also displayed as 12). If this format is used alone, then the same hour before or after noon is indistinguishable. If the hour is a single digit (1 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01-09).
H Displays the hour for the specified DateTime value in the range 0 to 23. The hour represents whole hours passed since midnight (displayed as 0). If the hour is a single digit (0 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit.
HH, HH (plus any number of additional “H” characters) Displays the hour for the specified DateTime value in the range 0 to 23. The hour represents whole hours passed since midnight (displayed as 0). If the hour is a single digit (0 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01 to 09).
m Displays the minute for the specified DateTime value in the range 0 to 59. The minute represents whole minutes passed since the last hour. If the minute is a single digit (0 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit. Note that if the m format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard format specifier for the month-day pattern. If the m format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
mm, mm (plus any number of additional “m” characters) Displays the minute for the specified DateTime in the range 0 to 59. The minute represents whole minutes passed since the last hour. If the minute is a single digit (0 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01 to 09).
M Displays the month, expressed as a number between 1 and 12. If the month is a single digit (1 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit. Note that if the M format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard format specifier for the month-day pattern. If the M format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
MM Displays the month, measured as a number between 1 and 12. If the month is a single digit (1 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01 to 09).
MMM Displays the abbreviated name of the month for the specified DateTime value.
MMMM Displays the full name of the month for the specified DateTime value.
s Displays the seconds for the specified DateTime value in the range 0 to 59. The second represents whole seconds passed since the last minute. If the second is a single digit (0 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit only. Note that if the s format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard sortable format specifier for the date-time pattern. If the s format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
ss, ss (plus any number of additional “s” characters) Displays the seconds for the specified DateTime value in the range 0 to 59. The second represents whole seconds passed since the last minute. If the second is a single digit (0 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit only. Note that if the s format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard sortable format specifier for the date-time pattern. If the s format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
ss, ss (plus any number of additional “s” characters) Displays the seconds for the specified DateTime in the range 0 to 59. The second represents whole seconds passed since the last minute. If the second is a single digit (0 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01 to 09).
t Displays the first character of the a.m./p.m. designator for the specified DateTime value. Note that if the t format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard format specifier for the long time pattern. If the t format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
tt, tt (plus any number of additional “t” characters) Displays the a.m./p.m. designator for the specified DateTime value.
y Displays the year for the specified DateTime value as a maximum two-digit number. The first two digits of the year are omitted. If the year is a single digit (1 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit. Note that if the y format specifier is used alone, without other custom format strings, it is interpreted as the standard format specifier for the short date pattern. If the y format specifier is passed with other custom format specifiers or the % character, it is interpreted as a custom format specifier.
yy Displays the year for the specified DateTime value as a maximum two-digit number. The first two digits of the year are omitted. If the year is a single digit (1 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01 to 09).
yyyy Displays the year for the specified DateTime value, including the century. If the year is fewer than four digits in length, then preceding zeros are appended as necessary to make the displayed year four digits long.
z Displays the time zone offset for the system’s current time zone in whole hours only. The offset is always displayed with a leading sign (zero is displayed as +0 ), indicating hours ahead of Greenwich mean time (+) or hours behind Greenwich mean time (–). The range of values is –12 to +13. If the offset is a single digit (0 to 9), it is displayed as a single digit with the appropriate leading sign. The setting for the time zone is specified as +X or –X where X is the offset in hours from GMT. The displayed offset is affected by daylight saving time.
zz Displays the time zone offset for the system’s current time zone in whole hours only. The offset is always displayed with a leading or trailing sign (zero is displayed as +00 ), indicating hours ahead of Greenwich mean time (+) or hours behind Greenwich mean time (–). The range of values is –12 to +13. If the offset is a single digit (0 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01 to 09) with the appropriate leading sign. The setting for the time zone is specified as +X or –X where X is the offset in hours from GMT. The displayed offset is affected by daylight saving time.
zzz, zzz (plus any number of additional “z” characters) Displays the time zone offset for the system’s current time zone in whole hours only. The offset is always displayed with a leading or trailing sign (zero is displayed as +00 ), indicating hours ahead of Greenwich mean time (+) or hours behind Greenwich mean time (–). The range of values is –12 to +13. If the offset is a single digit (0 to 9), it is formatted with a preceding 0 (01 to 09) with the appropriate leading sign. The setting for the time zone is specified as +X or –X where X is the offset in hours from GMT. The displayed offset is affected by daylight saving time.
: Serves as a time separator.
/ Functions as a date separator.
" Indicates a quoted string. Displays the literal value of any string between two quotation marks preceded by the escape character (/).
' Indicates a quoted string. Displays the literal value of any string between two single quotation marks.
%c Where c is both a standard format specifier and a custom format specifier, displays the custom format pattern associated with the format specifier. Note that if a format specifier is used alone as a single character, it is interpreted as a standard format specifier. Only format specifiers consisting of two or more characters are interpreted as custom format specifiers. In order to display the custom format for a specifier defined as both a standard and a custom format specifier, precede the specifier with a % symbol.
\c Where c is any character, displays the next character as a literal. The escape character cannot be used to create an escape sequence (like \n for new line) in this context.
Related concepts [Analytical report parameters](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/analytical-report-parameters/) [Column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-sets-overview/) [Row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets/) [About data filtering criteria](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/about-data-filtering-criteria/) [Printing styles](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/printing-styles/) [Formulas - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/) Unit sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unit sets Unit sets - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/unit-sets-overview page Unit sets are used to organise the report structure in a report or a group of reports when the groups of rows and columns included in the report use data from the different data sources, or formulas must be applied to calculate the report values based on specific data from the explicitly defined groups of columns and rows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unit sets - overview Unit sets are used to organise the report structure in a report or a group of reports when the groups of rows and columns included in the report use data from the different data sources, or formulas must be applied to calculate the report values based on specific data from the explicitly defined groups of columns and rows. Unit sets and their properties are defined in the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window. A unit set can include one or more units that define the calculation formulas (for report values), printing groups, and the data source for a data set to be used. Units allow for applying additional data filtering criteria and data calculations for the specific data set in the report. You can specify what units will be included in the unit set by adding the units in it, and organising the unit structure in the report. Each unit set can be used in a report or a group of reports, and each report can use only one unit set. Every unit included in the unit set has a number of attributes. The unit attributes include the formulas used to calculate the report values, and the data source parameters used to select the data. Every unit can use either the formula or the data source parameters to define the data processing rules for the report. [About unit attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/about-unit-attributes/) Related reference [Report definitions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) [Column sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About unit attributes /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/about-unit-attributes page Each unit in the unit set has the attributes displayed in the lines of the Unit sets (CS206030) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About unit attributes Each unit in the unit set has the attributes displayed in the lines of the Unit sets (CS206030) window. For more information: [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/). The unit attributes specify how the data are selected, calculated, and displayed in the printed analytical reports. By changing the unit attributes, you can define the data selection and processing rules and layout parameters for a specific unit included in the analytical report. To define what data should be included in the unit set and set up the formatting for the rows and columns, you can set the values of the attributes covered in the sections in this topic. ## Unit code and description The unit code is an unique value specified by the system when a new unit is added to the unit set. This code is used to identify the unit within the row set, and the references in the formulas defined for the units can also include the unit codes. The units in the unit sets are sorted by the row code in ascending order, and this is the order they appear in the hierarchical structure in the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window. We do not recommend that you use the successive values as the codes of new units added to the unit set to simplify the procedure of adding the units between the existing ones. The **Description** field should contain a descriptive definition of the unit. The data from the **Description** field is not printed in the analytical report. ## Value By specifying the **Value** unit attribute, you can define a certain calculated value to be displayed in the report. The values in the units can be predefined parameters or computed values calculated using formulas. Values are frequently used to insert the sums and totals into the reports. The formulas used to calculate the data in the units usually include the references to other units. The expressions defined for the units can also use the parameter queries to select the values from the data source and insert them in the column cells. Values defined for the units in the analytical reports usually specify the report structure and follow up the defined units hierarchical structure. The units from the top hierarchical level are usually based on the calculated values from the units on the lower hierarchical levels. The higher hierarchical levels can include the summarised and aggregated values based on the units from the lower hierarchical levels. ## Printing group The **Printing group** attribute identifies which groups of columns and rows from the row and column sets will be included in the current unit. The **Printing group** parameter should be specified for the respective columns and rows in the row and column sets of the analytical report. ## Data source You can use the **Data source** attribute to define the data filtering criteria for the data set to be displayed in the specific report column. You can specify the data filtering criteria on the row, column, unit and report levels. The filtering rules defined for the data rows are applied first, and the rules defined on the column level are applied to the data set formed by applying the rules defined on the row level, and after that the criteria defined on the unit level are applied. The data filtering criteria specified on the unit level are applied to the unit as a number of rows and columns included in it. If the data selection criteria set on the unit level have no common data source with the data set received from the data source defined on the rows and columns level, the report will not produce any meaningful result. Data filtering rules used in the data source definition on the unit level help you to narrow the criteria applied on the row and column level. For example, if a group of columns in the report included in the unit must display the calculated values for the specific subaccounts, you should set the start subaccount and the end subaccount in the data filtering rules defined for the unit. ### Parent topic [Unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/unit-sets-overview/) Related concepts [Column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-sets-overview/) [Row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets/) [Formulas - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/) [About data filtering criteria](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/about-data-filtering-criteria/) Formulas /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Formulas About formulas /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas page Formulas are used to calculate the values to be displayed in the report rows and columns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About formulas Formulas are used to calculate the values to be displayed in the report rows and columns. The formulas provide the possibility to use advanced calculations and data transformation functions if some values in the report rows and columns are calculated or depend on the data from other sources (such as rows, columns or individual cells included in the report). Formulas used in the analytical reports are much like the formulas used in Excel. You can define the parameters and construct a formula using operators and functions. You can select the parameters used in the formula from the list of predefined parameters or enter them into the formula. Related concepts [About parameters](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-parameters/) [About functions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-functions/) About parameters /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-parameters page A formula may include parameters that reference the data you want use in calculating the values in the report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About parameters A formula may include parameters that reference the data you want use in calculating the values in the report. There are two types of parameters: predefined parameters and links to specific rows, columns, or individual report cells. ## Predefined parameters The predefined parameters are application-specific and refer to the report parameters that you specify in other ARM windows, such as the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window or the [Row sets (CS206010](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window. For example, the @StartPeriod parameter refers to the value specified in the **Start period** field in the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window, or the @BaseRowCode parameter refers to the value specified in the **Base row** field in the [Row sets (CS206010](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window. All available predefined parameters are listed in the **Data source editor** dialog box. The table below provides the list of the predefined parameters with their descriptions.
Parameter Description
@AccountCode

The code of the current account (if the Account option is selected in the Expand field in the Data source editor).

The code of the current subaccount (if the Sub option is selected in the Expand field in the Data source editor).
@AccountDescr

The description of the current account (if the Account option is selected in the Expand field in the Data source editor).

The description of the current subaccount (if the Sub option is selected in the Expand field in the Data source editor).
@BaseRowCode The row code specified in the selected row in the Base row column in the Row sets (CS206010 window. This row code is referred to by the @BaseRowCode parameter, which you use in the formula in the Value field in the Column sets (CS206020) window to retrieve the value specified in this row for computing another value in the report.
@BookCode The code of the ledger whose data is used in the report. Refers to the value in the Ledger field in the Default data source section section.
@BranchName The name of the branch that is used in the report.
@ColumnCode The code of the current column in the report.
@ColumnIndex The index of the current column in the report.
@ColumnSetCode The code of the current column set in the report.
@ColumnText The description of the current column in the report.
@EndAccount The last account in the range of accounts used in the report. Refers to the value in the Start account field in the Default data source section section.
@EndAccountGroup

The last account group in the range of account groups used in the report. Refers to the value in the End account field in the Default data source section section.

Note: This parameter is valid only in the reports of the PM type.
@EndBranch The last branch in the range of branches used in the report. Refers to the value in the End branch field in the Default data source section section.
@EndPeriod The end period of the report. Refers to the value in the End period field in the Default data source section section.
@EndProject

The last project in the range of projects used in the report. Refers to the value in the End project field in the Default data source section section.

Note: This parameter is valid only in the reports of the PM type.
@EndProjectTask

The last project tasks in the range of the project tasks used in the report. Refers to the value in the End task field in the Default data source section section.

Note: This parameter is valid only in the reports of the PM type.
@EndSub The last subaccount in the range of subaccounts used in the report. Refers to the value in the End sub field in the Default data source section section.
@StartAccount The first account in the range of accounts used in the report. Refers to the value in the Start account field in the Default data source section section.
@StartAccountGroup

The first account group in the range of account groups used in the report. Refers to the value in the Start account field in the Default data source section section.

Note: This parameter is valid only in the reports of the PM type.
@StartBranch The first branch in the range of branches used in the report. Refers to the value in the Start branch field in the Default data source section section.
@StartPeriod The start period of the report. Refers to the value in the Start period field in the Default data source section section.
@StartProject The first project in the range of projects used in the report. Refers to the value in the Start project field in the Default data source section section. Note: This parameter is valid only in the reports of the PM type.
@StartProjectTask The first project tasks in the range of the project tasks used in the report. Refers to the value in the Start task field in the Default data source section section. Note: This parameter is valid only in the reports of the PM type.
@StartSub The first subaccount in the range of subaccounts used in the report. Refers to the value in the Start sub field in the Default data source section section.
@ReportDescr Report description that the system prints in the column set header.
@RowCode The code of the current row in the report.
@RowIndex The index of the current row in the report.
@RowSetCode The code of the current row set in the report.
@RowText The description of the current row in the report.
@UnitCode The code of the current unit in the report.
@UnitSetCode The code of the current unit set in the report.
@UnitText The description of the current unit in the report.
## Links to rows You can use the links to the rows in the formulas to define the parameters. The links to the rows are used when a formula is defined for the row to calculate its values, and the referenced rows are the parameters used in these calculations. For example, when a row is a summarised value of the other two rows, the formula includes the references to the rows to be summarised. You can use the links to the rows in the formulas designed for the calculation of row and column values. However, we do not recommend that you reference the rows in the formulas defined for columns because of the self-references in such formulas. Self-references can be the source of circular reference errors in the formulas. The links to the rows have the following format: **row_code**, where **row_code** is the code of the referenced row (for example, **00112** ). ## Links to columns You can use the links to the columns in the formulas to define the parameters. Use the links to the columns when a formula is defined for the column to calculate its values, and the referenced columns are the parameters used in these calculations. For example, when a column is a summarised value of the other two columns, the formula includes the references to the columns to be summarised. You can use the links to the columns in the formulas designed for calculation of column and row values. Again, avoid referencing the columns in the formulas defined for rows because self-references in such formula can cause circular reference errors. To reference a column, replace its code into the formula as a parameter. ## Links to cells You can use the links to the report cells in the formulas to define the parameters. You use these links when a formula is defined for the column or row to calculate its values, and the referenced cells are the parameters used in these calculations. To reference a cell, substitute its code into the formula as a parameter. ## Self-links in formula parameters The self-links in the formulas can be used in very few cases; they typically are avoided to escape the situations when a self-link results in circular reference error. An example of a useful self-link is the case when some operations must be performed with the values selected directly from the data source, such as calculations of charges for a certain period. To use a self-link in a formula, insert a link to the row or column in the formula defined for this row or column. ### Parent topic [About formulas](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/) Related concepts [About functions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-functions/) [About data filtering criteria](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/about-data-filtering-criteria/) About operators /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-operators page You use operators to perform certain operations with the formula parameters or modify the data specified by the Data source report parameter before the data is added in the report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About operators You use operators to perform certain operations with the formula parameters or modify the data specified by the Data source report parameter before the data is added in the report. You can add operator manually by typing them in the formula area or select them from the list of operators available in the formula editor. There are several groups of operators in the formulas which are covered in the following sections. ## Arithmetic operators Arithmetic operators perform common arithmetic operations with numeric values. The parameters of the arithmetic expressions are handled as the decimal values. The parameters of any other data type will be converted to the decimal type.
Operator Description and examples
+ (addition)

Adds the value of one numeric expression to another or concatenates two strings.

Example: =A10+B10

Here, A10 and B10 are cell references. If the values in the cells are 12.85 and 2.25, the result of the expression would be 12.85 + 2.25 = 15.1.
+ (subtraction)

Subtracts the value of one numeric expression from another.

Example: =A20-B30

Here, A20 and B30 are cell references. If the values in the cells are 12.85 and 2.25, the result of the expression would be 12.85 - 2.25 = 10.6.
* (multiplication)

Multiplies the value of two expressions.

Example: =C10*D10

Here, A20 and B30 are cell references. Assuming that the parameters have the values C10 = 2.25 and D10 = 2, the example would evaluate to 2.25 * 2 = 4.5.
/ (division)

Divides the values of two expressions.

Example: =A10/C10.

Here, A10 and C10 are cell references. If the values in the cells are 4.0 and 2.0, the result of the expression would be 4.0 / 2.0 = 2.0.
% (Mod)

Divides two numbers and returns only the remainder.

Example: =B15 % C15

Here, B15 and C15 are cell references. If the values in the cells are 15.0 and 6.0, the result of the expression would be 3.0.
## Logical operators The logical operators, described below, compare Boolean expressions and return a Boolean result.
Operator Description and examples
And

Performs logical conjunction on two Boolean expressions. If both expressions evaluate to True, then the operator returns True; if either or both expressions evaluate to False, And returns False.

Example: =(A10>0) And (C10>0)

In this example, A10 and C10 are cell references. If A10 = 10 and C10 = 20, then the expression would evaluate to True. Alternatively, f A10 = -10 and C10 = 20, the expression would evaluate to False.
Or

Performs logical disjunction on two Boolean expressions. If either expression evaluates to True, the operation returns True; if neither expression evaluates to True, Or returns False.

Example: =(A10>0) Or (C10>0)

In this example, A10 and C10 are cell references. If A10 = 10 and C10 = 20, then the expression would evaluate to True. Alternatively, f A10 = -10 and C10 = -20, the expression would evaluate to False.
Not

Performs logical negation on a Boolean expression, yielding the opposite of the expression it evaluates. If the expression evaluates to True, the operator yields False; alternatively, if the expression evaluates to False, Not yields True.

Example: =Not (A10>C10)

In this example, A10 and C10 are cell references. If A10 is larger than C10, then the expression would evaluate to False. Alternatively, if A10 is smaller than C10, the expression would evaluate to True.
## Comparison operators These operators, described below, compare two expressions and return a Boolean value that represents the result of the comparison.
Operator Description and examples
=

Equality operator.

Example: =(A10=B10)

In this example, A10 and B10 are cell references. If the value in the A10 cell is equal to the value in C10, then the expression evaluates to True, otherwise the expression evaluates to False.
<>

Inequality operator.

Example: =(C10<>A10)

(where A10 and C10 are the links used as a formula parameters)

In this example, A10 and C10 are cell references. If the value in the A10 cell is not equal to the value in B10, then the expression evaluates to True, otherwise the expression evaluates to False.
<

The less than operator.

Example: =(@10<@12) (where @10 and @12 are the links to cells in the current column)

In this example, @10 and @12 are the links to cells in the current column. If the value in the A10 cell is not equal to the value in B10, then the expression evaluates to True, otherwise the expression evaluates to False.
>

Greater than operator.

Example: =(C10>A10) (where A10 and C10 are the links used as a formula parameters)

In this example, A10 and C10 are cell references. If the value in the A10 cell is not equal to the value in B10, then the expression evaluates to True, otherwise the expression evaluates to False.
<=

The less than or equal to operator.

Example: =(C10<=A10) (where A10 and C10 are the links used as a formula parameters)

In this example, A10 and C10 are cell references. If the value in the A10 cell is not equal to the value in B10, then the expression evaluates to True, otherwise the expression evaluates to False.
>=

The greater than or equal to operator.

Example: =(A10>=A10) (where A10 and C10 are the links used as a formula parameters)

In this example, A10 and C10 are cell references. If the value in the A10 cell is not equal to the value in B10, then the expression evaluates to True, otherwise the expression evaluates to False.
## Other operators This group includes the following operators.
Operator Description and examples
In (a binary operator)

This operator is used in an elementary logical expression that evaluates the search results and returns True when the parameter matches one of the elements from the set of values.

Example: =(A20 In (10, 50, 57)) (where A20 is the link used as a formula parameter)
True (a binary constant)

This operator is used as a parameter in logical expressions.

Example: =((D30<A30)=True) (where D30 is the link used as a formula parameter)
False (a binary constant)

This operator is used as a parameter in logical expressions.

Example: =((C10=E10)=False) (where C10 and E10 are the links to the data)
Null (a value)

This operator is used as a parameter in logical expressions.

Example: =(@20=Null) (where @20 is the cell in the current column and 10th row)
Parent topic: [Formulas - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About functions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-functions page You use functions to perform specific tasks that facilitate data processing for the reports. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About functions You use functions to perform specific tasks that facilitate data processing for the reports. Many functions available in the Analytical report manager process the data selected from the data source and return the values to be used in the report. To use functions in the formula, you can enter them directly in the formula editing area or select them from the list of functions provided by the. The groups of functions in the formulas are described below. ## Conversion functions You use conversion functions, summarised in the following table to convert data from one data type to another.
Function Description and examples
CBool(x)

Converts an expression defined in a function argument into the Boolean expression. If the expression is zero, False is returned; otherwise, True is returned.

Example: =CBool(A11+B11-C11*0.05) (where A11, B11 and C11 are the links used in a function argument)
CDate(x)

Converts an expression defined in a function argument to a value of the Date type. The CDate function argument should be a valid date expression. CDate recognises date formats according to the locale setting of the system.

Example: =CDate(A2-B2) (where A2 and B2 are the links used in a function argument)
CStr(x)

Converts an expression defined in a function argument to a string. If the CStr function argument equals null, CStr returns a run-time error; otherwise, it returns a string of characters.

Example: =CStr(A12) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
CDbl(x)

Converts an expression defined in a function argument to a value of the Double type.

Example: =CDbl(A12/B2) (where A12 and B2 are the links used in a function argument)
CSng(x)

Converts an expression defined in a function argument to a value of the Single type. If the expression defined in the function argument lies outside the acceptable range for the Single type, an error occurs.

Example: =CSng(A12) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
CDec(x)

Converts an expression defined in a function argument to a value of the Decimal type.

Example: =CDec(A12*0.15) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
CInt(x)

Converts an expression defined in a function argument to a value of the Integer type.

Example: =CInt(A10) (where A10 is the link used in a function argument)
CShort(x)

Converts a numeric value to a value of the Short type.

Example: =CShort(B2) (where B2 is the link used in a function argument)
CLong(x)

Converts a numeric value to a value of the Long type.

Example: =CLong(B12) (where B12 is the link used in a function argument)
## Text functions Text functions, described in the following table, are used to perform operations with the text strings.
Function Description and Examples
LTrim(string)

Removes all leading spaces or parsing characters from the specified character expression, or all leading zero bytes from the specified binary expression.

Example: =LTrim(CStr(A12)) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
RTrim(string)

Removes all trailing spaces or parsing characters from the specified character expression, or all trailing zero bytes from the specified binary expression.

Example: =RTrim(CStr(A12)) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
Trim(string)

Removes all trailing spaces or parsing characters from the specified character expression, or all trailing zero bytes from the specified binary expression.

Example: =Trim(CStr(A12)) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
Format(format, argument(s) )

Replaces the format item in a specified formatting string ( format ) with the text equivalent of the arguments ( arguments ).

Example: =Format('Currency:........ {0:C}; Account:........ {1:N}', A1, B1) (where A1 and B1 are the links used as a function arguments; 0, 1 are the specifiers indicating where the arguments will be inserted; C is the currency format specifier; and N is the number format specifier)
UCase(string)

Returns a string that has been converted to upper case. The string argument is any valid string expression. If string contains a null value, the null value is returned.

Example: =UCase(CStr(A12)) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
LCase(string)

Returns a string that has been converted to lower case. The string argument is any valid string expression. If string contains a null value, the null value is returned.

Example: =LCase(CStr(A12)) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
InStr(string, findString)

Returns the position of the first occurrence of one string ( findString ) within another ( string ).

Example: =InStr(CStr(A12), 'rur') (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
InStrRev(string, findString )

Returns the position of the last occurrence of one string ( findString ) within another ( string ), starting from the right side of the string.

Example: =InStrRev(CStr(A12), 'rur') (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
Len(string )

Returns an integer containing either the number of characters in a string or the nominal number of bytes required to store a variable.

Example: =Len(CStr(A12)) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
Left(string, length )

Returns a string containing a specified number of characters from the left side of a string. If string contains the null value, the null value is returned.

Example: =Left(CStr(A12), 3) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
Right(string, length )

Returns a string containing a specified number of characters from the right side of a string. If string contains a null value, the null value is returned.

Example: =Right(CStr(A12), 3) (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
Replace(string, oldValue, newValue )

Returns a string in which a specified sub string ( oldValue ) has been replaced with another sub string ( newValue ).

Example: =Replace(CStr(A12), 'rur', 'eur') (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
PadLeft(string, width, paddingChar )

Right-aligns the characters in a specified string ( string ), padding with the specified characters ( paddingChar ) on the left for a specified total width ( width ).

Example: =PadLeft(CStr(A12), 3, '%') (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
PadRight(string, width, paddingChar )

Left-aligns the characters in a specified string ( string ), padding with the specified characters ( paddingChar ) on the right for a specified total width ( width ).

Example: =PadRight(CStr(A12), 3, '%') (where A12 is the link used in a function argument)
## Math functions Mathematical functions, described in the following table, perform calculations, usually based on input values provided as arguments, and return numeric values.
Function Description and Examples
Abs(x)

Returns the absolute value of a number.

Example: =Abs(A10-B10)

Here A10 and B10 are the links used in a function argument.
Floor(x)

Returns the largest integer that is not greater than the argument.

Example: =Floor(A10-A12)

Here A10 and A12 are the links used in a function argument.
Ceiling(x)

Returns the smallest integer that is not less than the argument.

Example: =Ceiling(A10-C11)

Here A10 and C11 are the links used in a function argument.
Round(x, decimals )

Returns a numeric expression, rounded to the specified precision ( decimals ).

Example: =Round((A10-B12), 5)

Here A10 and B12 are the links used in a function argument, and 5 is the number of digits after the decimal separator.
Min(x, y)

Returns the smaller of the two values.

Example: =Min(A10, A12) =Min(A10, 12)

Here A10 and A12 are the links used as function arguments)
Max(x, y)

Returns the greater of the two values.

Example: =Max(A12, A14) =Max(A12, 240)

Here A12 and A14 are the links used as function arguments.
Pow(x, power )

Computes the value of x raised to the specified power ( power ).

Example: =Pow((A12, 2))

Here A12 is the link used as a function argument, and 2 is the power index.
## DateTime functions The DateTime functions (described below) perform operations on input values and return string, numeric, or **DateTime** value results.
Function Description and Examples
Now()

Returns the current date and time according to the system date and time on the local computer.

Example: =Now()
Today()

Returns the current date according to the system date and time on the local computer.

Example: =Today()
NowUTC()

Returns the current date and time according to the user’s time zone.

The system gets the user’s time zone from the following sources, which are ordered by the priority from the highest to the lowest:

  1. User’s preferences specified in the User settings (SM203010) window.
  2. The employee calendar specified in the Work calendar (CS209000) window and selected for the user’s employee in the Employees (EP203000) window.

Example: =NowUTC()
TodayUTC()

Returns the current date according to the user’s time zone.

The system gets the user’s time zone from the following sources, which are ordered by the priority from the highest to the lowest:

  1. User’s preferences specified in the User settings (SM203010) window.
  2. The employee calendar specified in the Work calendar (CS209000) window and selected for the user’s employee in the Employees (EP203000) window.

Example: =TodayUTC()
DateAdd(date, interval, number )

Returns the new date calculated as a date parameter to which the specified time interval has been added.

The interval argument is a string expression that is the interval to be added. This argument can have the following values:

yyyy
year (a number of years will be added to a date )
m
month (a number of months will be added to a date )
y
day of year (same as day )
d
day (a number of days will be added to a date )
h
hour (a number of hours will be added to a date )
n
minute (a number of minutes will be added to a date )
s
second (a number of seconds will be added to a date )

The number is the numeric expression that is the number of intervals to be added. The numeric expression can either be positive, for dates in the future, or negative, for dates in the past. The date argument is the date to which interval is added.

Example: =DateAdd(CDate('31/01/1995'), 'm', -2) =DateAdd(Today(), 'y', 3) =DateAdd(Now(), 'd', 1)
Year(date )

Returns the year component of the date.

Example: =Year(Now())
Month(date )

Returns the month component of the date.

Example: =Month(Now())
Day(date )

Returns the day component of the date.

Example: =Day(Now())
DayOfWeek(date )

Returns the day of week for a date.

Example: =DayOfWeek(Today())
DayOfYear(date )

Returns the day of the year for a date.

Example: =DayOfYear(Now())
Minute(date )

Returns the minutes for a date.

Example: =Minute(Now())
Second(date>)

Returns the second component of the date.

Example: =Second(Now())
## Other functions The **Other functions** group includes the following functions.
Function Description and examples
IIf(expression, truePart, falsePart )

Returns one of two values, depending on the evaluation of an expression. If the expression evaluates to True, the function returns the truePart value; otherwise, it returns falsePart value.

Example: =IIf((A10-B10)<>0), CStr(A12), 'No data available') (where A10, A12, and B10 are the links used as a function arguments)
Switch(expression_1, value_1, expression_2, value_2,…)

Returns one of the values, depending on the evaluation of the expressions in the parameter. The function returns the value_n, which corresponds to the first expression in the enumeration that evaluates to True.

Example: =Switch(((A10-B10)<>0), A12, ((A10-B10)>0), B35)
IsNull(value, nullValue )

Returns nullValue, if value is NULL; otherwise, returns value.

Example: =IsNull(A10, '0') (if A10 is NULL, returns 0, otherwise returns the A10 value)
Sum(from, to)

Returns the sum of the values in the specified interval.

Example: =Sum('A11','A100') (where A11 and A100 are the links used in a function argument)
Sort(from, to, column )

Returns the values in the specified range of rows in the specified column sorted in ascending order.

Example: Sort('0100','0145','B') (the values in rows from ‘0100’ to ‘0145’ in the ‘B’ column will be sorted in ascending order)
SortD(from, to, column )

Returns the values in the specified range of rows in the specified column sorted in descending order.

Example: SortD('0100','0145','B') (the values in rows from ‘0100’ to ‘0145’ in the ‘B’ column will be sorted in descending order)
## Application-specific functions This functions are specific for Visma Net.
Function Description and Examples
ExtToInt(object field, object value ) Converts the external format of the object field parameter into the internal object presentation (for example, converts AccountCD to AccountID ). Both arguments of the ExtToInt function must have the same data type.
ExtToUI(object field, object value ) Converts the external format of the object field parameter into the UI format. Both arguments of the ExtToUI function must have the same data type.
GetDefExt(object field) Gets the default value of the object field parameter in the external format.
GetDefInt(object field) Gets the default value of the object field parameter in the internal format.
GetDefUI(object field) Gets the default value of the object field parameter in the UI format.
GetDescription(object field, object value )> Returns the description of the object field parameter as it is defined in the PXSelectorAttribute. Both arguments of the GetDescription function must have the same data type. Note: If you use this function for subaccounts, the subaccount description is not available if the On-the-fly entry option is specified for subaccounts in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.
GetDisplayName(object field) Returns the localised name of the object field parameter.
GetFormat(object field) Returns the data type of the object field parameter.
GetMask(object field) Returns the mask of the object field parameter.
IntToExt(object field, object value ) Converts the external format of the object field parameter into the internal object presentation (for example, converts AccountID to AccountCD ). Both arguments of the IntToExt function must have the same data type.
IntToUI(object field, object value ) Converts the internal format of the object field parameter into the UI format. Both arguments of the IntToUI function must have the same data type.
UIToExt(object field, object value ) Converts the UI format of the object field parameter into the external object format. Both arguments of the UIToExt function must have the same data type.
UIToInt(object field, object value ) Converts the UI format of the object field parameter into the internal object format. Both arguments of the UIToInt function must have the same data type.
FormatPeriod(object period ) Performs ExtToUI data conversion for the object period parameter. This function is used to get the period defined by the report @StartPeriod and @EndPeriod dates.
FormatPeriod(object period, object period shift ) Performs ExtToUI data conversion for the object period parameter with a time shift defined by object period shift argument. This function is used to get the period defined by the report @StartPeriod and @EndPeriod dates.
FormatYear(object period ) Performs ExtToUI data conversion for the object period parameter year part. This function is used to get the period defined by the report @StartPeriod and @EndPeriod dates.
FormatYear(object period, object period shift ) Performs ExtToUI data conversion for the object period parameter year part with a time shift defined by object period shift argument. This function is used to get the period defined by the report @StartPeriod and @EndPeriod dates.
### Parent topic [Formulas - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Data source /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Data source Data source - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/data-source-overview page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Data source - overview The data source defines and applies the data filtering criteria to select the data that will be used in the report. You include the selected data in the report in the following ways: + For the row, by applying data filtering criteria to the report rows in the **Data source editor** dialog box. You invoke this dialog box from the **Data source** **column** field in the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window). + For the column, by applying data filtering criteria to the report columns in the dialog box. This dialog box is invoked from the **Data source** field in the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window). + For the unit, by applying data filtering criteria to the rows and columns included in the unit in the **Data source editor** dialog box. You invoke this dialog box from the **Data source column** field in the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window. + For the data source defined for the entire report, by applying additional data filtering criteria to the report rows and columns. You do this by setting the data source parameters in the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window. Thus, you can define the data filtering criteria for a separate row, column, or unit included in the report, or for the whole report at once. [About the analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About data filtering criteria /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/about-data-filtering-criteria page Data filtering criteria specify how the data will be selected from the database. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About data filtering criteria Data filtering criteria specify how the data will be selected from the database. These criteria can be defined for the whole report, for a unit, or for any specific row or column in the report. Usually, the criteria defined for the rows and columns reflect the report structure: They specify how the report data will be grouped in rows and columns. Data filtering criteria specified for a report or individual row or column in the report include the following: Specific group of accounts and subaccounts : The specific group of accounts and subaccounts used to limit the volume of data to be included in the report Specific period : The limited time period used to set the time frame for the data to be used in the report Type of amount : The specific amount type to be used in the ARM report (in the whole report or in a separate row or column), such as the beginning balance amount or ending balance amount ## Specific group of accounts and subaccounts To filter out the data that is not related to the specific account and subaccount, or set the range of the accounts and subaccounts to be used for data filtering criteria in the report, you should define the account and subaccount ranges. To specify the group of accounts and subaccounts to be included in the report, you can use the **Account class** value. To set additional limitations and select the specific accounts, subaccounts, or both as data filtering criteria, you should set the values of the **Start account** and **End account** parameters. If the accounts specified in the **Account class**, **Start account,** and **End account** fields have no common data, **Null** values will be displayed in the report rows, columns, or both. Note: You can use the denominated accounts for retrieving amounts in a foreign currency. ## Specific period To set the specific periods for the data to be included in the report, specify the **Start period** and **End period** parameters. The data related to the periods not included in the selected one will be filtered out and not included in the report. ## Amount type To define the type of amounts that should be used in the report lines (displayed or used in calculations), you should specify the **Amount type** parameter in the **Data source editor** dialog box. The following types of amounts can be selected: **Turnover**, **Credit**, **Debit**, **Beg balance**, **Ending balance**. These types of amounts can be specified for use in the whole analytical report or for a separate row or column. You can also use the amounts in a foreign currency retrieved from the denominated accounts by specifying one of the following parameters: **Curr. turnover**, **Curr. credit**, **Curr. debit**, **Curr. beg. balance**, **Curr. ending balance**. If the **Amount type** parameter is not specified for any report item (such as row or column), the **Null** value will be displayed in the report row or column. ### Parent topic [About the data source](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/data-source-overview/) [About row attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-attributes/) [About column attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-attributes/) Related reference [Report definitions - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) [Row sets - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) [Column sets - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Printing styles /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/printing-styles page Printing style parameters determine how the text in the report will be formatted and printed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Printing styles Printing style parameters determine how the text in the report will be formatted and printed. The printing style parameters include the text formatting options defined for the report pages and the individual rows and columns. Report formatting parameters You set the report formatting parameters in the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window of the Analytical report manager. To define the printing style for a report, you can set the following report printing parameters.
Report layout parameter Description
Margins

Specifies the margin size settings for the report page, which can be set in pixels, points, picas, centimetres, millimetres, or inches.

Left
Specifies the size of the left margin of the report page.
Top
Specifies the size of the top margin of the report page.
Bottom
Specifies the size of the bottom margin of the report page.
Right
Specifies the size of the right margin of the report page.
Size

Determines the size of the report page, which can be set in pixels, points, picas, centimetres, millimetres, or inches.

Width
Specifies the report page width.
Height
Specifies the report page height.
Style Sets the style parameters, including font formatting, background colour, and text align options, for the report. These parameters are the same as the settings specified for the row and column Style parameters used to define the printing style for the rows and columns.
Row formatting parameters To set the formatting parameters for each report row, use the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window. Row formatting lets you highlight some rows in the report. To define the row formatting, set the following row attributes.
Row formatting parameter Description
Height Specifies the row height (in pixels).
Indent Specifies the row indentation (in pixels).
Style Sets the style parameters, including font formatting, background colour, and text align options, for the row.
Column formatting parameters You can set the text formatting parameters for each report column in the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. Column formatting is frequently used to highlight some columns in the report (for example, when the highlighted columns display totals calculated for some reporting periods, and they must have a notable formatting). To define the column formatting, set the following column attributes.
Column formatting parameter Description
Width Specifies the column width (in pixels).
Extra space Specifies the indent defined for a column (in pixels).
Style Sets the style parameters, including font formatting, background colour, and text align options for the column.
Style parameters Style parameters are the text formatting parameters specified for the entire report or for individual row or column. The text formatting parameters for a report, row, or column are specified in the Style group of the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window or in the Style dialog box, which you invoke from the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) or the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. Use the Style dialog box to set the following formatting parameters.
Formatting parameter Description
Text align The alignment for the text in the report lines.
Colour The text colour.
Back colour The background colour.
Font The font name.
Font size The font size.
Font style The font style (the following options are available: Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline, or Strikeout).
Related concepts [Analytical report parameters](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/analytical-report-parameters/) Design analytical reports /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Design analytical reports Design analytical reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports-overview page The process of designing an analytical report starts with the definition of the report layout. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Design analytical reports - overview The process of designing an analytical report starts with the definition of the report layout. The report layout definition includes the rules specifying the data to be included in the report, the structure of the table containing the report data, and the parameters describing the report formatting. The procedure of creating a new analytical report can be split into several steps as described below. 1. **Design the report layout**: In this step, you need to do the following: + Define the row set and column set for the report to specify the report structure + Specify the unit set for the report to split the report into sections + Configure the report formatting 1. **Publish the report and granting access rights to users**: In this step, you must make the report available to target audience: you must publish the report and provide your user access to the report. 1. **Run and verify the analytical report**: In this step, you run the report and make sure it works as expected and delivers the correct data in the correct way. ## Topics + [Design the report layout](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/design-the-report-layout/) + [View and edit row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/) + [View and edit the column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/view-and-edit-the-column-sets-overview/) + [View and edit the unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/view-and-edit-the-unit-sets-overview/) + [Place the analytical report in a workspace](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/place-the-analytical-report-in-a-workspace/) Design the report layout /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Design the report layout Design the report layout /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/design-the-report-layout page The report layout determines the report outlook, and identifies the rows and columns to be included in the report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Design the report layout The report layout determines the report outlook, and identifies the rows and columns to be included in the report. To design the report layout, you should perform the following steps: + [Define the report structure](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/define-the-report-structure/) In this step, you define what sections will be included in the report, how the data will be grouped in the report, what rows and columns will be included in the report, and the order in which the rows and columns will be displayed in the report. + [Set up the report headers and captions - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/set-up-the-report-headers-and-captions-overview/) In this step, you define the headers for the report columns and for the report itself, and sets the captions for the rows. + Setting the printing control attributes for the report At this step, you define how the columns and rows included in the report will be printed. ## Parent topic [Design analytical reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports-overview/) Define the report structure /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/define-the-report-structure page Defining the analytical report structure is a part of the report layout design process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define the report structure Defining the analytical report structure is a part of the report layout design process. To define the analytical report structure, you should perform the following basic steps: + Define what rows and columns will be included in the report. To define what rows and columns will be included in the report, you should define the row set and column set for the report. + Define what sections will be included in the report. To define the sections to be included in the report, you should define unit set for the report. + Define how the report sections will be grouped and displayed. To define the order of the sections in the report, you should specify the order of the units in the unit set. All the parameters required to define the analytical report structure can be set using the Analytical report manager windows. + [Select rows and columns for the report](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/select-rows-and-columns-for-the-report/) + [Define the analytical report sections](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/define-the-analytical-report-sections/) + [About grouping the sections in the report](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/about-grouping-the-sections-in-the-report/) Select rows and columns for the report /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/select-rows-and-columns-for-the-report page Every report has its sets of rows and columns, which can be specific for this report or be used in other reports. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Select rows and columns for the report Every report has its sets of rows and columns, which can be specific for this report or be used in other reports. Every row included in the row set and every column included in the column set have a set of attributes specifying what data will be displayed in the report. You should define the row set and column set for the report. The row set and column set can be used in a specific report or in a variety of reports having common data selection criteria and similar structure. To define the rows and columns to be included in the report, you should perform the following steps: 1. Identify what rows will be included in the report: To define what rows will be included in the report, you should add these rows to the row set used in this report. 1. View the existing row sets, select or edit a row set, or create a new row set when necessary. For the detailed description of operations with the row sets, see [View and edit row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/). 1. Identify what columns will be included in the report: To define what columns will be included in the report, you should add these columns to the column set used in this report. 1. View the existing column sets, select or edit a column set, or create a new row set when necessary. 1. Open the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window and set the **Column set** and **Row set** parameters for the report. The row and column sets are defined for the report as a whole, and if the report includes multiple sections each consisting of various rows and columns, the row set and column set should include all rows and columns for all the report sections. ## Parent topic [Define the report structure - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/define-the-report-structure/) [Column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-sets-overview/) [View and edit the column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/view-and-edit-the-column-sets-overview/) [About the analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Define the analytical report sections /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/define-the-analytical-report-sections page Every report can include one or more sections. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define the analytical report sections Every report can include one or more sections. The report can be comprised of a number of sections having different number of rows and columns. The rows and columns grouping rules can also be set separately for each report section. To define the structure of the sections in the report, you should create a unit structure. The unit structure for each report is defined by the unit set selected for this report. The structure of each report section is determined by the unit set, row set, and column set attributes. To define what sections will be included in the report, you should perform the following steps: 1. Identify what sections will be included in the report, and define the order in which the sections will be displayed in the report. The report sections structure is defined by the unit set selected for this report. For each report section, a separate unit must be created. 1. View the existing unit sets, edit a unit set or create a new unit set when necessary. For the detailed description of operations with the unit sets, refer to the [View and edit the unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/view-and-edit-the-unit-sets-overview/) section of this guide. For each section in the report, you should specify the following: + The rows and columns to be included in this section. + The data selection criteria used to include the data in this section of the report. ## Define the rows and columns to be included in the report section The rows and columns to be displayed in the analytical report sections can be selected separately for each report section. To specify the rows and columns to be included in the report section, perform the following steps: 1. Open the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window and set the **Printing group** attribute value for the unit which is related to this report section. 1. Open the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window and set the same value for the **Unit group** attribute for all the rows to be included in this report section. For the detailed description of setting the row attributes operation, refer to the [View and edit row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/) section of this guide. 1. Open the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window and set the same value for the **Unit group** attribute for all the columns to be included in this report section. For the detailed description of setting the column attributes operation, refer to the [View and edit the column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/view-and-edit-the-column-sets-overview/) section of this guide. ## Define the data selection criteria for the report sections Each report section can use its specific data filtering criteria to select the data to be displayed in this section. Depending on the report structure and the need to use the same row sets and column sets in a variety of reports, you can define the section-specific data filtering criteria for the rows and columns included in this report section, or define them separately for each unit. To choose where to define the data filtering criteria, you should use the following rule: + When the row set and column set are used only in one report, or the other reports' row set and column set have common data selection criteria, the data selection criteria for each report section can be defined on the row and column level. + When the row set and column set will be used in another report, the data selection criteria for each report section should be defined on the units level. To define the data selection criteria for the report section on the rows and columns level, perform the following steps: 1. Set the data source parameters for each row included in the report section. 1. Set the data source parameters for each column included in the report section. To define the data selection criteria for the report section on the unit level, set the data source parameters for the unit related to the specific report section. ### Parent topic [Define the report structure](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/define-the-report-structure/) [View and edit the row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/) [About column sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-sets-overview/) [View and edit the column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/view-and-edit-the-column-sets-overview/) [About unit sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/unit-sets-overview/) [View and edit the unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/view-and-edit-the-unit-sets-overview/) [About the data source](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/data-source-overview/) [About data filtering criteria](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/about-data-filtering-criteria/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About grouping the sections in the report /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/about-grouping-the-sections-in-the-report page The order of the sections included in the report determine the report structure. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About grouping the sections in the report The order of the sections included in the report determine the report structure. The sections in the report can be arranged in a flat or hierarchical structure; depending on the data sampling rules, you can use either flat or hierarchical report structure. The hierarchical report structure is used when a report section includes the data from the other sections of the report (for example, the consolidated sales volumes followed by separation of the sales volumes by the time periods). The flat structure can be used when the report consists of several sets of data assembled in different numbers of rows and columns. To define how the sections will be grouped and displayed in the report, you should define the unit structure in the unit set selected for the report. For a flat report structure, the sections will be included in the report in the same order as the corresponding units in the unit set selected for the report. For a hierarchical structure, the sections corresponding to the nodes in the units' hierarchical structure will be displayed before the sections corresponding to the child nodes or leaves in the units' hierarchical structure. When the sections in the report are organised in a hierarchical structure, you usually should apply additional data filtering rules for the node units to include the particular data from the other report sections in the section corresponding to the node unit, use the formulas in the node units if the data in one report sections are calculated using the data from the other report sections, or apply both formulas and data filtering rules. To group the section in the report, you should perform the following steps: 1. View the units included in the unit set selected for the report. 1. Create the units' hierarchical structure: add units to be included as the nodes in the hierarchical structure when necessary, or move the existing units to the node level. For the detailed description of creating a units structure operation, refer to the [View and edit the unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/view-and-edit-the-unit-sets-overview/) section of this guide. 1. For the node units in the unit set, define the data source to apply the additional data filtering criteria for data selection for the node unit, and define the formulas to calculate the values based on the data from the other units, when necessary. ## Parent topic [Define the report structure - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/define-the-report-structure/) [Data source - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/data-source/data-source-overview/) [Formulas - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/) Related reference [Unit sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Set up the report headers and captions - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/set-up-the-report-headers-and-captions-overview page To provide the description of the data included in the report, you should define the titles for the report and its sections, add the headers for the report columns or column groups, and set up the captions for the rows or chain of rows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up the report headers and captions - overview To provide the description of the data included in the report, you should define the titles for the report and its sections, add the headers for the report columns or column groups, and set up the captions for the rows or chain of rows. To perform these tasks, you can use the following steps: + Set up the report title. + Set up the titles for each section of the report. + Set up the headers for a range of columns or for individual columns in the report. + Set up the captions for a range of rows or for individual rows in the report. All the parameters required to define the titles for the analytical report can be set using the Analytical report manager windows. + [Add a title for the report section](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/add-a-title-for-the-report-section/) ## Parent topic [Design the report layout](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/design-the-report-layout/) Add the report title /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/add-the-report-title page The report title generally contains the report title and other information that will appear only at the beginning of the report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add the report title The report title generally contains the report title and other information that will appear only at the beginning of the report. Depending on the report structure and the information to be displayed in the report title, you can use one of the following ways to create a title for the report: + Create a header in the list of headers defined for the column set selected for the report. Use it as the report title. This is the preferred method to define the title for a report that has a hierarchical structure. To include the variable data in the report title, add the report title in the list of headers defined for the column set. + Define a caption in the first row of the row set selected for the report. This method can be used when the report has a flat structure and variable data should not be used in the report title. ## Use the column sets headers to set up the report title To set up the report title by using the headers defined for the columns set, perform the following steps: 1. Open the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window, and select the column set used in the report. 1. Click the **New** button in the **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. 1. Select a column where to define header in the **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. The report title definition can span one or multiple columns. For example, a short text can be displayed in one column and the variable data in the other. To display the report title in the centre of the header line, select the first column to define the header. 1. In the selected column in **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window, enter the header text, or enter the formulas to display variable data in the report title if needed. 1. Set the range of columns where the report title will be displayed. + In the column containing the header, click the lookup button. The dialog box containing the column range and header style parameters appears. + Enter the relevant values in the **Columns range** elements in the opened dialog box. Note that the start value in the columns range should contain the reference to the column where the report title is defined. 1. Set the header style parameters. + In the dialog box containing the column range and header style, set the formatting parameters for the header text and background. 1. Use the **Shift up** and **Shift down** buttons in the **Headers** toolbar of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window to move the report title to the top position in the headers list. 1. Click **Save** button in the window toolbar to save the changes. ## Using the row sets captions to set up the report title To set up the report title by using the captions defined for the [Row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/), use the following steps: 1. Open the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window and select the row set used in the report. For the detailed description of operations with the row sets, see the [View and edit row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/) section. 1. In the **Rows** table, click the **New** button to add a new row to the row set. 1. Set the **Code** parameter for the new row. The code for the created row should be selected to make it the first row in the row set. 1. Enter the **Description text** for the new row. This text will be displayed in the report title. 1. Select the **Caption** value for the **Type** parameter of the new row. 1. Set the **Style** parameter values for the row to define the report title formatting. 1. Click **Save** in the window toolbar of the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window to save the changes. Add a title for the report section /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/design-the-report-layout/add-a-title-for-the-report-section section The report can include multiple sections each having a header. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add a title for the report section The report can include multiple sections each having a header. Depending on the report structure, you can use either row captions or column headers to set up the headers for the report sections. For a flat report structure, the report sections usually include a number of rows from the whole row set, and to set up a report section header, you can choose between a caption defined for a number of rows or a header defined in the column set and printed in the specific row of the report. For a hierarchical report structure, you should use column set headers for each section in the report. ## Set up the report section titles for a flat report structure For a flat report structure, you can define the report section title using the captions defined for the row set or the headers defined for the column set. For both captions and headers, you can define the report lines where the report sections titled will be placed. To set up the report section title using the header defined for the columns set, perform the following steps: 1. Open the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window and select the column set used in the report. For the detailed description of operations with the column sets, see the [View and edit row sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/) section of this guide. 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** in the **top toolbar** of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. 1. Select a column where to define the header in the **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. The report section title can be defined in a single column, or split between multiple columns. For example, the short text can be displayed in one column, and the variable data in the other. To display the report section title in the centre of the header line, select the first column to define the header. 1. In the selected column in **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window, enter the header text, or enter [formulas](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/formulas/about-formulas/) to display variable data in the report section title if needed. 1. Set the range of columns where the report section title will be displayed. + In the column containing the header, click the lookup button. The dialog box containing the column range and header style parameters appears. + Enter the relevant values in the **Columns range** elements in the opened dialog box. Note that the start value in the columns range should contain the reference to the column where the report section title is defined. 1. Set the header style parameters. In the dialog box containing the column range and header style, set the formatting parameters for the header text and background. Use the **Shift up** and **Shift down** buttons in the **Headers** toolbar of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window to move the report section title to the relevant position in the headers list. 1. To define the line of the report where the report section title will appear, set the same values for the **Printing group** parameter of the header and the **Column group** parameter of the row where the report section title will be inserted: + Set the **Printing group** parameter value for the header. + Open the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window, and set the following parameter values for the row where the report section title will be inserted: + For the **Type** row attribute, select the **Header** value. + For the **Column group** row attribute, set the same value that you defined for the **Printing group** parameter value for the header. 1. Click **Save** in the window toolbar of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window to save the changes. ### To set up the report section title using the caption defined for the row set, perform the following steps 1. Open the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window, and select the row set used in the report. 1. In the **Rows** table, select or add the row where the report section title will be inserted. 1. Enter the **Description** text for the row. This text will be displayed in the report section title. 1. Select the **Caption** value for the **Type** parameter of the row. 1. Set the **Style** parameter values for the row to define the report section title formatting. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** in the window toolbar of the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window to save the changes. ## Set up the report section titles for a hierarchical report structure For a hierarchical report structure, you should use the headers defined for the column set. you can define a special title for every section in the report hierarchical structure. Within the report sections, both the row captions and row headers can be used to segregate them in the smaller segments. To set up the report section title using the header defined for the columns set, perform the following steps: 1. Open the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window and select the column set used in the report. 1. Click **New** button in the **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. 1. Select a column where to define header in the **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. The report section title can be defined in a single column, or split between multiple columns. For example, the short text can be displayed in one column, and the variable data in the other. To display the report section title in the centre of the header line, select the first column to define the header. 1. In the selected column in **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window, enter the header text, or enter formulas to display variable data in the report section title if needed. 1. Set the range of columns where the report section title will be displayed. + In the column containing the header, click the lookup button. The dialog box containing the columns range and header style parameters appears. + Enter the relevant values in the **Columns range** elements in the opened dialog box. Note that the start value in the columns range should contain the reference to the column where the report section title is defined. 1. Set the header style parameters. In the dialog box containing the columns range and header style, set the formatting parameters for the header text and background. 1. Use the **Shift up** and **Shift down** buttons in the **Headers** toolbar of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window to move the report section title to the relevant position in the headers list. 1. To define the line of the report where the report section title will appear, set the same values for the **Printing group** parameter of the header and the **Column group** parameter of the row where the report section title will be inserted: + Set the **Printing group** parameter value for the header. + Open the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window, and set the following parameters values for the row where the report section title will be inserted: + For the **Type** row attribute, select the **Header** value. + For the **Column group** row attribute, set the same value that you defined for the **Printing group** parameter value for the header. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** the window toolbar of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window to save the changes. View and edit row sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and edit row sets View and edit row sets - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview page To view the parameters of existing row set, you can use navigation buttons in the control panel in the Row sets (CS206010) window, or select the row set code using the Code selector in the Row set window area. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and edit row sets - overview To view the parameters of existing row set, you can use navigation buttons in the control panel in the Row sets (CS206010) window, or select the row set code using the Code selector in the Row set window area. For more information: [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/). The navigation buttons allow moving to the first, next, previous and the last row set in the collection of available row sets. By defining the row sets, you can specify what rows will be included in the analytical report. The steps to be performed for the row set modification are similar to the ones used to create a new row set. + [Operations with row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/operations-with-row-sets/) + [Defining the rows to include in the row set](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/defining-the-rows-to-include-in-the-row-set/) Operations with row sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/operations-with-row-sets page Row sets are used to define the structure of the analytical reports, including the data to be displayed in the report rows and the report layout parameters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Operations with row sets Row sets are used to define the structure of the analytical reports, including the data to be displayed in the report rows and the report layout parameters. You can use these parameters in multiple reports that use similar data selection rules and a similar report layout structure. To specify the set of rows for a group of analytical reports or a single report, you can create new row sets or modify the existing ones. To remove the set of rows associated with the reports that are no longer used, you can delete the row sets associated with them. To perform these operations with the row sets, use the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window of [Analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/). ## Add a new row set To create a new row set, perform the following steps: 1. Click **Insert** in the window toolbar. 1. Enter the code of the row set in the **Code** field. 1. Enter the row set description in the **Description** field. (The row description is not displayed in the printed report and is used only to add a descriptive comment to the row set.) 1. Click **Save** on the window toolbar to save the created row set. The rows can be added to the created row set later. Note: The row set code must be unique within the whole system. The length of the unique row set code is limited by the range of 1 to 10 symbols. The allowed symbols are only digits and letters. ## Modify an existing row set To modify an existing row set, perform the following steps: 1. Select the existing row set code in the **Code** field in the **Row set** area of the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window, or use navigation buttons in the control panel to find the required row set. 1. Change the row set attributes as required. 1. Click **Save** in the window toolbar to save the changes. ## Delete a row set To delete an existing row set, perform the following steps: 1. Display the row set to be deleted in the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window. Use navigation buttons or select the row set code in the **Code** field. 1. Click **Delete** in the window toolbar. 1. Confirm the row set deletion operation. ## Use a row set in the analytical reports After the row set is defined, include this row set in the analytical report it was designed for by using the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window of [Analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/). **Parent topic:** [View and edit the row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/) [About row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Defining the rows to include in the row set /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/defining-the-rows-to-include-in-the-row-set section To define the rows included in the row set, you can perform the following operations with the rows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Defining the rows to include in the row set To define the rows included in the row set, you can perform the following operations with the rows: + Add new rows to the row sets + Set the attributes for each row in the row set + Delete the rows from the row set To perform the operations with the rows in the row set, the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window is used. The table displays the available rows and their attributes. ## Create a new row To create a new row in the row set, you should perform the following steps: 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** in the **Rows** toolbar; 1. Specify the new row attributes in the relevant columns of the **Rows** table. Only the **Code** attribute is mandatory, and it is necessary to enter the row code to add a new row to the row set. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** in the **Row sets** control panel. Note: The row code must be unique within the row set which includes this row. The length of the unique row code is limited by the range of 1 to 10 symbols. The allowed symbols are only digits and letters. ## View and edit the row attributes By changing the row attributes, you can define the data selection, processing and formatting rules for the data to be included in this row. The attributes of each row are displayed as the values in the **Rows** table in the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window. You can edit these attributes for the selected row by changing the values in the relevant columns of the **Rows** table. To change a specific row attribute, you should select this attribute and change its value. After all necessary changes to the row attributes are performed, you must save the changes by clicking **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** in the **Row sets** control panel. Unsaved changes will be cancelled after navigation to another page. For every new row added to the row set for the specific report, you should specify the row attributes. ## Delete a row To delete an existing row from the row set, you should perform the following steps: 1. Select the row to be deleted in the **Rows** table; 1. Click **![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png)** in the **Rows** toolbar; 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** in the **Row set** control panel. ### Parent topic [View and edit row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-row-sets/view-and-edit-row-sets-overview/) [About row attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-attributes/)

Related pages

Concepts

 View and edit column sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and edit column sets View and edit the column sets - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/view-and-edit-the-column-sets-overview page To view the parameters of existing column set, you can use navigation buttons in the Unit sets (CS206030) window, or select the column set code using the Code selector in the Column set window area. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and edit the column sets - overview To view the parameters of existing column set, you can use navigation buttons in the Unit sets (CS206030) window, or select the column set code using the Code selector in the Column set window area. For more information: [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/). The navigation buttons allow moving to the first, next, previous and the last column set in the collection of available column sets. By defining the column sets, you can specify what columns will be included in the analytical report. The steps to be performed for the column set modification are similar to the ones used to create a new column set. ## Topics + [Operations with column sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/operations-with-column-sets/) + [Define the columns to be included in the column set](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/define-the-columns-to-be-included-in-the-column-set/) Operations with column sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/operations-with-column-sets section Column sets are used to define the structure of the analytical reports, including the data to be displayed in the report columns, and the report layout parameters. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Operations with column sets Column sets are used to define the structure of the analytical reports, including the data to be displayed in the report columns, and the report layout parameters. These parameters can be used in multiple reports that use similar data selection rules and a similar report layout structure. To specify the set of columns for a group of analytical reports or a single report, you can create new column sets or modify existing ones. To remove the set of columns associated with the reports that are no longer used, you can delete the column sets associated with them. To perform these operations with the column sets, use the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window of the [About the analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/). ## Create a new column set 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** in the **Column set** control panel. 1. Enter the code of the column set in the **Code** field. 1. Enter the column set description in the **Description** field. The column description is not displayed in the printed report and is used only to add a descriptive comment to the column set. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** to save the created column set. The columns and data filters can be added to the created column set later. The column set code must be unique within the whole system. The length of the unique column set code is limited by the range of 1 to 10 symbols. The allowed symbols are only digits and letters. ## Modify the existing column set 1. Select the existing column set code in the **Code** field in the Column set area of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window, or use navigation buttons in the control panel to find the required row set. 1. Change the column set attributes as required. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** in the **Column set** control panel to save the changes. ## Delete a column set 1. Display the column set to be deleted in the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. 1. Click **![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png)** in the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window control panel. ### Parent topic [View and edit the column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/view-and-edit-the-column-sets-overview/) Related concepts [About the analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/) [Column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-sets-overview/) Related reference [Report definitions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) Define the columns to be included in the column set /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/define-the-columns-to-be-included-in-the-column-set section To define the columns included in the column set, you can perform the following operations with the columns: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define the columns to be included in the column set To define the columns included in the column set, you can perform the following operations with the columns: + Add new columns to the column sets + Set the attributes for each column in the column set + Delete the columns from the column set To perform the operations with the columns in the column set, use the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. The **Columns** table in this window displays the existing columns and their attributes. ## Create a new column To create a new column in the column set, perform the following steps: 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)**. 1. Specify the new column attributes in the relevant columns of the **Columns** table. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Add a header to the column To add a text description for a single column or a column range in the printed report, define a header for a column or a columns range. The **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window allows you to add the headers to the reports and define in which rows the headers should be printed. The **Headers** section of the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window provides the tools to define the headers for a single column or a column range, and insert the headers in the rows specified by the **Printing group** attribute in the **Headers** table. The header for a column or a columns range should be defined after the columns are added to the column set. Every header can be assigned its printing style. You can add, delete, and change the order of the headers in the **Headers** table, and copy the printing style defined for a certain header to apply it to another header in the analytical report. To add a header for a single column or a columns range, perform the following steps: 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)**. 1. If the header should be printed in a specific row, in the **Printing group** column of the **Headers** table enter the printing group code (the same code should be entered in the **Column group** column for the relevant row). 1. Enter the header text in the column where the header should appear. 1. Use the lookup control in the column to set the columns range for the header printing and define the printing style. By default, the columns range is limited by a single column where the header text is entered. To set the columns range, enter the codes of the start column and the end column in the range. ## View and edit the column attributes The attributes of each column are displayed as the values in the **Columns** table in the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window. You can edit these attributes for the selected column by changing the values in the relevant rows of the **Columns** table. To change a specific column attribute, select this attribute and change its value. After all necessary changes to the column attributes are performed, save the changes by clicking **Save** in the **Column sets** control panel. Unsaved changes will be cancelled after navigation to another page. By changing the column attributes, you can define the data selection, processing and formatting rules for the data to be included in this column. For every new column added to the column set for the specific report, specify the column attributes. ## Delete a column To delete an existing column from the column set, perform the following steps: 1. Select the column you want to delete. 1. Click **![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png)**. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## Use the column set in the analytical reports Once you define a column set, you can use this column set in any analytical report you configure using the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window. ### Parent topic [View and edit the column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-column-sets/view-and-edit-the-column-sets-overview/) ### Related concepts [About the analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/) [About column attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-attributes/) [About printing styles](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/printing-styles/) View and edit unit sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and edit unit sets View and edit the unit sets - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/view-and-edit-the-unit-sets-overview page To display the parameters of existing unit sets, you can use navigation buttons in the control panel, or select the unit set code using the Code selector in the Unit set area of the Unit sets (CS206030) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and edit the unit sets - overview To display the parameters of existing unit sets, you can use navigation buttons in the control panel, or select the unit set code using the Code selector in the Unit set area of the Unit sets (CS206030) window. For more information: [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/). The navigation buttons allow moving to the first, next, previous, and the last unit set in the collection of available unit sets. By defining the unit sets, you can specify what units will be included in the analytical report. Usually, the units define the report structure, and are used to include the specific rows and columns from the rows set and columns set into the report section. ## Topics + [Operations with unit sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/operations-with-unit-sets/) + [Define the units to be included in the unit set](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/define-the-units-to-be-included-in-the-unit-set/) Operations with unit sets /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/operations-with-unit-sets section You can use column sets to define which sections will be included in the analytical reports, and set the data filtering criteria and data calculation rules separately for each report section. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Operations with unit sets You can use column sets to define which sections will be included in the analytical reports, and set the data filtering criteria and data calculation rules separately for each report section. You can use the units from a unit set in multiple reports that have similar data selection rules and a similar report layout structure. To specify the unit set for a group of analytical reports or a single report, create new unit sets or modify existing ones. To remove the unit sets associated with the reports that are no longer used, delete the unit sets associated with them. To perform these operations with the unit sets, use the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window of the [About the analytical report manager](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/about-the-analytical-report-manager/). ## Create a new unit set To create a new unit set, perform the following steps: 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)** in the window toolbar. 1. In the **Code** field, enter the code of the unit set. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the unit set description. (The unit description is not displayed in the printed report and is used only to add a descriptive comment to the unit set.) 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** to save the created unit set. The units and data filters can be added to the created unit set later. The unit set code must be unique within the whole system. The length of the unique unit set code is limited by the range of 1 to 10 symbols. Use only digits and letters. ## Modify an existing unit set To modify an existing unit set, perform the following steps: 1. Select the unit set code in the **Code** field in the **Unit set** area of the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window, or use navigation buttons in the control panel to find the required unit set. 1. Change the unit set attributes as required. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** on the window toolbar to save the changes. ## Delete a unit set To delete an existing unit set, perform the following steps: 1. Display the unit set to be deleted in the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window. 1. Click **![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png)**. ## Use the unit set in the analytical reports After the unit set is defined, you can include this unit set in the analytical report it was designed for by using the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window of the Analytical report manager. ### Parent topic [View and edit the unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/view-and-edit-the-unit-sets-overview/) Related concepts [Unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/unit-sets-overview/) Define the units to be included in the unit set /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/define-the-units-to-be-included-in-the-unit-set section To define the units included in the unit set, you can perform the following operations with the columns: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define the units to be included in the unit set To define the units included in the unit set, you can perform the following operations with the columns: + Add new units to the unit sets + Set the attributes for each unit in the unit set + Delete the units from the unit set To perform the operations with the units in the unit set, the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window is used. The **Units** table in the window displays the available columns and their attributes. ## Create a new unit 1. Click **![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png)**. 1. Specify the new unit attributes in the relevant columns of the **Units** table. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)** in the **Unit sets** control panel. ## View and edit the unit attributes The attributes of each unit are displayed as the values in the **Units** table in the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window. You can edit these attributes for the selected unit by changing the values in the relevant rows of the **Units** table. To change a specific unit attribute, you should select this attribute and change its value. After all necessary changes to the unit attributes are performed, you must save the changes by clicking **Save** in the **Unit sets** control panel. Unsaved changes will be cancelled after navigation to another page. By changing the unit attributes, you can define the data selection and processing rules for the data to be included in this unit. For every new unit added to the unit set for the specific report, you should specify the unit attributes. ## Define the units' hierarchical structure The units in the unit set can be organised into the hierarchical structure. The units hierarchical structure defines the order in which the units will be included in the report and define the report structure. 1. In the left area of the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window, select the unit in the hierarchical structure. 1. Use the arrow buttons to move the selected unit to the appropriate position: + The **Move to external node** button moves the unit one position left and places it in the next external node in the hierarchical structure. + The **Move to internal node** button moves the unit one position right and places it in the next internal node in the hierarchical structure. + The **Move up** button moves the unit one position up and places it in the next upper node on the same level of the hierarchical structure. + The **Move down** button moves the unit one position down and places it in the next lower node on the same level of the hierarchical structure. ## Delete a unit 1. Select the unit you want to delete in the **Units** table. 1. Click ![icon-delete-cross](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete-cross.png). 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ### Parent topic [View and edit the unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/view-and-edit-unit-sets/view-and-edit-the-unit-sets-overview/) [About unit attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/about-unit-attributes/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Place the analytical report in a workspace /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/place-the-analytical-report-in-a-workspace section A designed analytical report must be placed on the Visma Net site to be available to users. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Place the analytical report in a workspace A designed analytical report must be placed on the Visma Net site to be available to users. To do that, you use the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window. To place the report in your preferred workspace, do the following steps: 1. Open the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window and create the report with the parameters that you would like. 1. In the **Location** field, select the folder where you want to place the report. We recommend that you place it in the **Reports** folder in the workspace you choose. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. To see the report, go to the workspace and area where you placed it. For example, if you selected General ledger, then Reports and Financial statements in step 2, go to the menu item and workspace General ledger, and either search for the report by the name you gave it or look for it in the workspace. You may have to click **Show the full menu** to see all reports and financial statements. 1. You can now open and run the report from the workspace where you placed it. Check accounts for financial statement reports /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/design-analytical-reports/check-accounts-for-financial-statement-reports page In the Report definitions (CS206000) window, you can check whether every general ledger account is actually included in the report totals. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check accounts for financial statement reports In the Report definitions (CS206000) window, you can check whether every general ledger account is actually included in the report totals. For more information: [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/). 1. Go to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window. 1. In the **Code** field, select the report whose accounts you want to check. 1. Click **Validate row set definition**. 1. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the types of accounts you want to include in the selected report. You can also select to check if there are any missing subaccounts. 1. Click **OK**. The program now - validates that the selected types of accounts are included in the row set definition selected for the specific report - displays the accounts and subaccounts, if any, that are not included in the row set definition. Manage reconciliations /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage reconciliations About transaction reconciliation /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/about-transaction-reconciliation page Reconciliation is the process of comparing the cash transactions recorded in the system to records of the same transactions tracked by other means or third parties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About transaction reconciliation Reconciliation is the process of comparing the cash transactions recorded in the system to records of the same transactions tracked by other means or third parties. For instance, if you reconcile a bank account, you use the bank statements for comparison. By performing periodic reconciliation for a cash account, you make sure that the transactions recorded to the account are correct and that the list of transactions is complete. See: [Reconcile general ledger transactions.](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/reconcile-general-ledger-transactions/) About Journal reconciliation /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/about-journal-reconciliation page In the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window you reconcile the general ledger account transactions, to ensure that the accounts contains correct transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Journal reconciliation In the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window you reconcile the general ledger account transactions, to ensure that the accounts contains correct transactions. For more information: [Journal reconciliation (GL30201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-gl30201s/). Which accounts to be reconciled is set up in the [Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-preferences-gl30200s/) window. ## Features + You can reconcile by selecting the different transactions and click the **Reconcile** button + You can **Void** a reconciliation document to start again + You can hide transaction for future reconciliation document + You can for information purpose show transaction as: + **Unposted** + **Reclassified** + **Hidden lines**

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up an account for reconciliation /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/set-up-an-account-for-reconciliation section You can set up an account to be used to reconcile general ledger transactions in the Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up an account for reconciliation You can set up an account to be used to reconcile general ledger transactions in the Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S) window. For more information: [Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-preferences-gl30200s/). 1. Go to the [Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-preferences-gl30200s/) window. 1. In the **Setting ID** field, select the ID or enter a value. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a name of your setting. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new line in the table below. 1. On the new row, in the **Account** column, select which account you want to reconcile. 1. In the **Branch** column, select which branch you want to use for your account. **Note**: You can have multiple branches for one account. You cannot use the same branch twice on an account. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Set number series for reconciliation for general ledger transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/set-number-series-for-reconciliation-for-general-ledger-transactions section You can change or update the number series and their respective settings for the reconcile transactions in the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set number series for reconciliation for general ledger transactions You can change or update the number series and their respective settings for the reconcile transactions in the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window. For more information: [Journal reconciliation (GL30201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-gl30201s/). 1. Go to the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. 1. In the **Reconciliation setting ID** field, the **RECONSETUP** - **Reconciliation setting ID** is set as default in the system. To change the number series, click ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) next to the field to do your changes in the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) pop-up window. 1. In the **Reconciliation number series** field, the **RECONID** - **Reconciliation number series** is set as default in the system. To change the setting for the reconciliation numbers of the documents, click ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) next to the field to do your changes the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) pop-up window 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reconcile general ledger transactions /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/reconcile-general-ledger-transactions section Here you will find how to set up for reconciliations of general ledger accounts, and how to reconcile transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile general ledger transactions Here you will find how to set up for reconciliations of general ledger accounts, and how to reconcile transactions. ## Before you start You have to set the following preferences before you can start on the instructions below. 1. [Set up an account for reconciliation](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/set-up-an-account-for-reconciliation/) 1. Optional: [Set number series for reconciliation for general ledger transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/set-number-series-for-reconciliation-for-general-ledger-transactions/) 1. Go to the [Journal reconciliation (GL30201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-gl30201s/) window. 1. In the **Reconciliation setting** field, select a setting that you created in the [Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-preferences-gl30200s/) window. The **Reconciliation balance** field will now show the amount of the balance. The **Reconciliation date** field is automatically updated with today's date. The system will also list up all documents up to this date. You can change the today's date in the **Load documents up to** field. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter your own information. 1. Optional: Select one, two, or all of the following check boxes: + **Include unposted** + **Include reclassified** + **Include hidden lines** In the table below, these transactions appear with a yellow icon and a message that informs you that these reconciling records are not posted and/or reclassified. 1. Optional: Select the **Include hidden lines** check box. There are some transactions that you are not able to reconcile, and they will stay this way as unreconciled. By selecting this check box these transactions will not be included. The hidden lines will appear in the table below, along with the **Hide line** column with selected check boxes. 1. Optional: If you think that you can reconcile a transaction, deselect the check box in the **Hide line** column for the relevant transaction. 1. In the **Selected** column, select the check box for relevant transactions. The amounts for the transactions are listed in the **Credit** column. The **Reconciled credit** in the **Calculation** section. The amount will automatically be updated according to your selected transactions. This is shown in the **Reconciled credit** field. The **Difference** field will now have a negative amount. 1. In the **Selected** column, select the check box for the transactions to be reconciled with the ones in the step above. The amount(s) for the transaction(s) are listed in the **Debit** column. The **Reconciled debit** in the **Calculation** section. The amount will automatically be updated according to your selected transaction. This is shown in the **Reconciled debit** field. The **Difference** field will now be in zero, as it always should. 1. Optional: Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Deselect the **Hold** check box. The **Reconcile** button is activated. 1. Click the **Reconcile** button. The transactions are now reconciled. > [!NOTE] > You can also view reconciled transactions in the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window. > See: [View reconciled accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/view-reconciled-accounts/) Customer and supplier reconciliation (GL408000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/customer-and-supplier-reconciliation-gl408000 page Regular reconciliation in Visma Net reconciles within ledgers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer and supplier reconciliation (GL408000) Regular reconciliation in Visma Net reconciles within ledgers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can set up reconciliation between General ledger : and **Customer ledger** General ledger : and **Supplier ledger** The window toolbar
Button Description
Cancel (Esc) Will cancel your selections.
Go to the first first record Goes to the first period.
Go to previous record Changes to the previous period. If the From period and To period fields are not the same period, this button will change both to and from periods one period back.
Go to next record Changes to the next period. If the From period and To period fields are not the same period, this button will change both to and from periods one period forward.
Go to the last record Goes to the last period.
The window will display the balances on **Accounts** between **General ledger** and **Customer ledger** / **Supplier ledger** causing the discrepancies. The top part
Field Description
Period An ID of the financial period
Control account module

With this field, you can select which control account module you want to perform reconciliation on.

A control account is a general ledger account that aggregates the balances of entities in a ledger; it can be used for analytical purposes as well as for the reconciliation of balances between ledgers and the General ledger.

You indicate that an account is to be used as a control account for a particular subledger by selecting the ledger.

The alternatives are:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Supplier ledger and Customer ledger
  • All
Account Select the control account you want to use in the reconciliation
Company

The company you want to filter on. If no company and branch are selected, you will get the sum of all companies.

Note

Company and branch is only available when Multi-branch is activated
Branch The Branch you want to filter on. If no branch is selected, you will get all branches for the selected company.
The table
Column Description
Account The account (associated with the specified branch) whose balance will be updated by the journal entry.
Branch The unique ID of the branch.
Account name The name of the control account.
Control account module

This field indicates which control account module is selected for this reconciliation batch.

The alternatives are:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Supplier ledger and Customer ledger
Allow manual entry A check mark that restrict direct posting to the control accounts. If the check mark is set, it indicates that the account allows manual entry to correct the errors the reconciliation discloses.
Last period The last period transactions have been posted on this account.
Balance General ledger

A statement of all transactions made in the General ledger at the time given in the field Last period.

The link will open the window General ledger details.
Balance Supplier ledger This field displays the Supplier ledger ’s balance for the selected financial period.
Balance Customer ledger This field displays the Customer ledger ’s balance for the selected financial period.
Discrepancy The discrepancy amount is the difference from what is expected or acceptable between the account and the ledgers you have set to calculate.
The additional table columns The following columns also appear if the **Split by currency** check box is selected.
Column Description
Currency ID The currency for the transactions have been posted.
Balance general ledger (currency) A statement of all transactions made in the General ledger at the time given in the field Last period in currency.
Balance supplier ledger (currency) This field displays the Supplier ledger’s balance for the selected financial period in currency.
Balance customer ledger (currency) This field displays the customer ledger’s balance in currency for the selected financial period.
Discrepancy (currency) The discrepancy amount is the difference from what is expected or acceptable between the account and the ledgers you have set to calculate in currency.
Discrepancy details customer ledger vs general ledger (GL408010) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-reconciliations/discrepancy-details-customer-ledger-vs-general-ledger-gl408010 page This window shows discrepancies between the Customer ledger and the posted General ledger transaction for the Customer ledger account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discrepancy details customer ledger vs general ledger (GL408010) This window shows discrepancies between the Customer ledger and the posted General ledger transaction for the Customer ledger account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It will only show documents that cause the discrepancies. You will only be able to process not-released and not-posted batches in this window. All other discrepancies must be corrected by manually posting the missing transactions. For other discrepancies, please contact Visma support, who will assist you in correcting the transactions. The window toolbar
Button Description
Release/post

By clicking Release/post, you will release marked documents. Only documents with the error message Not released in General ledger or Not posted in General ledger will be processed.

The button is only active if you have selected the Discrepancy category Unposted/Unreleased.
Hide/Unhide A button for hiding/unhiding selected lines. This is used for discrepancy lines that have been corrected.
Set reconciled period A button for updating the reconciled period, used to suggest the From period. This period is found in General ledger preferences - Discrepancy settings, Reconciled financial period.
## The top part
Field Description
Company

Filter on Company.

The column is only visible if you have activated multi-branch.
Branch

Filter on Branch.

The column is only visible if you have activated multi-branch.
Discrepancy category

Filtering different categories of discrepancies.

  • UnPosted/Unreleased [1,2,21]
  • Manually entered [22]
  • GL Transactions do not exist [0]
  • AR Transactions do not exist [20,22]
  • Amount mismatch [3,4,5,6]
  • Other work spaces [22]
  • Different branches [23]
  • Reversed batch [24]
  • Deleted documents [25]

[NN] The numbers correspond with the Discrepancy category (in the top part), see information in the Discrepancy column in the table.
Include hidden lines Selecting this checkbox will display previously hidden transactions, and you will be able to unhide the documents again.
From period

Filter on From period.

The period is suggested from Reconciled financial period in General ledger preferences and, if that is empty, it will suggest the first open period from Financial periods.
To period Filter on To period.
Account

Filter on Account.

You can only select accounts defined as Control account module for customers and suppliers.
Customer

Filter on Customer.

Select the customer you wish to filter upon.
Sum Customer ledger Sum based on the selected tab for Customer ledger documents.
Sum General ledger Sum based on the selected tab for the General ledger documents.
Sum discrepancies Sum based on the selected tab for discrepancies between the Customer ledger and the General ledger documents.
## The table This table will adjust which columns are visible, depending on the Discrepancy category selected in the **Top part**, to reduce the display of empty columns.
Column Description
Note

This is the Note from the transaction.

If the line contains a General ledger transaction, it will be the note you see or can edit and if the line only contains a Customer transaction, it will be the invoice note that will shown and can be edited.
Selected The selection column for lines you want to hide/unhide or release/post.
Hidden

A check box that, when selected, indicates that the transaction is hidden.

To hide or unhide, you can select the line and click the Hide/Unhide button. You hide transactions when you have found a matching correction transaction, so you do not need to check them again.
Discrepancy

Discrepancy types:

  1. The General ledger transaction does not exist.

  2. The General ledger transaction is not released.

  3. The General ledger transaction is not posted.

  4. The Currency ID does not match.

  5. The Currency rate does not match.

  6. The invoice ledger currency sum does not match.

  7. General ledger currency sum.

  8. The invoice ledger amount does not match General ledger amount.

  9. The Branch ID does not match.

  10. The invoice does not exist.

  11. The invoice has not been released.

  12. The General ledger transaction is directly entered.

  13. The General ledger account is used in another module.

[99] the number exists in the database text, so it can be used in Generic queries
Discrepancy amount

The difference between Customer ledger amount and General ledger amount.

(General ledger amount - Customer ledger amount)
Currency discrepancy amount The difference between Customer ledger amount and General ledger amount in currency.
Branch, Customer ledger The branch for the Customer ledger document. This document is found in the Financial setting section in customer documents.
Transaction type, Customer ledger The transaction type of the customer document.
Ref. no, Customer ledger The reference number of the customer document.
Amount, Customer ledger The total amount for the customer document.
Adjustment amount, Customer ledger Currency gain or loss amount.
Currency, Customer ledger The currency of the customer document.
Currency rate, Customer ledger The currency rate for the customer document.
Currency amount, Customer ledger The total amount in currency for the customer document.
Workspace The workspace for the voucher line in the General ledger, if the general ledger transaction is missing, it will display Customer ledger.
Transaction type, General ledger The Transaction type for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Ref. no, General ledger The Reference number for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Branch, General ledger The Branch for the voucher line in the General ledger.
General ledger, batch number The Batch no. for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Currency amount, General ledger The Currency amount for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Amount, General ledger The Amount for the voucher line.
Account number The Account number for the transaction.
Account description The Account name for the account.
Period, customer Financial period for the customer document.
Period, General ledger Financial period for the General ledger transactions.
AR Created The date when the customer document was created.
AR Created by Screen ID

The window where the customer document was created.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was created in. (00000000 = created by API).
AR Last modified by screen ID

The window where the customer document was last edited.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was modified in. (00000000 = created by API).
GL Created The date when the General ledger transaction was created.
Created by window ID General ledger

The window where the GL Batch was created.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was created in. (00000000 = created by API).
GL Last modified by screen ID

The window where the customer document was last edited.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was modified in. (00000000 = created by API).
Manage webhook notifications /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage webhook notifications Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About Webhooks /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/about-webhooks page By activating webhooks, Visma Net can send notifications to a third-party integrator, whenever a change has been made to the supported types listed below. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Webhooks By activating webhooks, Visma Net can send notifications to a third-party integrator, whenever a change has been made to the supported types listed below. After receiving the notification, the third-party integrator can return a notification feedback back to Visma Net. Visma Net supports three types of webhook notifications: Entity : triggers whenever an entity is created or updated, for example, a customer or a supplier. It also triggers if an account has been deleted. Document : triggers whenever a document status is updated, for example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. Action : triggers when you run a customised action. ## Supported entities + Accounts + Customers + Employees + Non-stock items + Suppliers + Stock items + Projects ## Supported documents + Sales orders + Purchase orders + Customer invoices + Shipments ## Actions You can use webhook notifications on customised actions as well. You define a customised action by using the **Automation actions** window. You give the action a name and a webhook parameter, which will then be sent together with the notification to the recipient. **Automation actions** uses the same access rights rules as other actions. So to be able to use the **Automation actions** window, you must have sufficient access rights. Webhooks for accounts are enabled in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window by selecting the **Webhook notification** check box. In the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window you can edit, create, or delete an account. When you click the **View notification feedback** button, it will take to you to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window where you can view notifications related to accounts. Notification for deleted accounts are also visible.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Enable webhook notifications /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications section The setting for enabling the Webhook notification feature can only be found in the supported windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable webhook notifications The setting for enabling the Webhook notification feature can only be found in the supported windows. The setting for enabling the Webhook notification feature can only be found in the supported windows. See: [About Webhooks](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/about-webhooks/). This procedure uses the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window as an example. You can also use the classes windows to enable Webhook notifications, for example [Customer classes (AR201000/AR2010PL)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/). You can then apply that class to the selected customer. 1. Go to [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/). 1. Create a new or edit an existing customer. 1. On the **General information** tab under **Customer properties**, select the **Webhook notification** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). An additional tab called **Webhook notifications** appears where you can see all triggered events from the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. From now on, every time you do a change on the customer and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), a new notification will be created and sent to the recipient. 1. Optional: On the **Webhook notification** tab, click **View notification feedback** to see the message from the third-party integrator. 1. Optional: On the **Webhook notification** tab, click **Resend notification** if you want to send the notification once more, or if something went wrong. To enable webhook notifications for accounts, see: [Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications-on-a-chart-of-accounts/) Note: To use Webhook notifications on documents (sales orders, shipments etc.), the document must be connected to an entity that has the Webhook notification feature enabled.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications-on-a-chart-of-accounts section If you want to receive notifications when an account has been created, changed or deleted, you have to set this setting. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts If you want to receive notifications when an account has been created, changed or deleted, you have to set this setting. 1. Go to the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. 1. Under the **Chart of accounts settings** section, select the **Webhook notification** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The **View notification feedback** button appears in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. After changes are done and saved on your accounts, you can click the **View notification feedback** button and the system takes you to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window where you can: [View webhook notifications on accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notifications-on-accounts/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 View webhook notification via chart of accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notification-via-chart-of-accounts page You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View webhook notification via chart of accounts You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your accounts. A notification will also be sent if an account is deleted or if a new account is created. ## Before you start [Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications-on-a-chart-of-accounts/) 1. Go to the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. Select an account. 1. Edit, create, or delete the account. 1. Click the **View notification feedback** button to view the notification for the account. The system navigates you to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window. ## What is next? [View webhook notifications on accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notifications-on-accounts/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 View the webhook notification for a deleted account /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-the-webhook-notification-for-a-deleted-account page You can view the notification sent by the system when an account is deleted. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View the webhook notification for a deleted account You can view the notification sent by the system when an account is deleted. ## Before you start [Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications-on-a-chart-of-accounts/) 1. Go to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window. You can also navigate to this window by clicking the **View notification feedback** button in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. In the **Account** field, search for the deleted account. A message appear to inform you that this account has been deleted. 1. In the **Event** column, it is **Entity deleted**. 1. In the **Message** column, hover over the row and a message shows you what has been changed. 1. Click the **View notification feedback** button to view the feedback in the **Webhook notification feedback** pop-up window. 1. Optional: Click the **Resend notification** button to resend if needed. You can use this only for notifications with the status **Sent**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 View webhook notifications on accounts /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notifications-on-accounts page You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View webhook notifications on accounts You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your accounts. A notification will also be sent if an account is deleted or if a new account is created. ## Before you start [Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications-on-a-chart-of-accounts/) 1. Go to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window. You can also navigate to this window by clicking the **View notification feedback** button in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. 1. You can filter on **Account**, **Type**, and/or **Account class** to check for notifications in the table below. 1. In the **Event** column, you can see if the account is created, updated, or deleted. 1. In the **Message** column, hover over the row and a message shows you what has been changed. For example, if you have given an account a new ID, you can see both the old account ID and the current account ID. 1. Click the **View notification feedback** button to view the feedback in the **Webhook notification feedback** pop-up window. 1. Optional: Click the **Resend notification** button to resend if needed. You can use this only for notifications with the status **Sent**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 View webhook notification for the Edit account information window /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/view-webhook-notification-for-the-edit-account-information-window page You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View webhook notification for the Edit account information window You can view the notification sent by the system each time there is a change with one of your accounts. ## Before you start In order to view webhook notifications, you need to set up the system for it. See: [Enable webhook notifications on a chart of accounts](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-webhook-notifications/enable-webhook-notifications-on-a-chart-of-accounts/) 1. Go to the [Edit account information (GL50506S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/edit-account-information-gl50506s/) window. 1. Select one or several accounts. 1. Change the account types, or the account classes. 1. To view the notification, go to the [Webhook notification for account (GL407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage SIE import VAT settings /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-sie-import-vat-settings section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage SIE import VAT settings Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Set VAT ID in SIE import VAT settings /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-sie-import-vat-settings/set-vat-id-in-sie-import-vat-settings section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set VAT ID in SIE import VAT settings 1. Go to the [SIE import VAT settings (GL20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-import-vat-settings-gl20200s/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar to add a new row. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Account** field to select the purchase account for which you want to set up specific VAT handling. 1. In the **Posting type** field, select **VAT**. 1. In the **VAT ID** field, select the right VAT ID for the account. This VAT ID is then always used on the transactions of the selected account in SIE import files and VAT reports. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Generate extra VAT line in SIE import VAT settings /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-sie-import-vat-settings/generate-extra-vat-line-in-sie-import-vat-settings section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate extra VAT line in SIE import VAT settings 1. Go to the [SIE import VAT settings (GL20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-import-vat-settings-gl20200s/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar to add a new row. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Account** field to select a sales account for international sales for generating an extra VAT line ("0 VAT") to the file import. 1. In the **Posting type** field, select **Sales/Expense**. 1. In the **VAT ID** field, select the right VAT ID for the transaction. 1. Check option **Generate extra VAT line**. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Extra line account** field to select the VAT account for the generated line. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage workbooks /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-workbooks section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage workbooks Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About workbooks /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-workbooks/about-workbooks page As a standard practice, some companies register vouchers that are grouped into batches based on their type (for example, purchase invoices or sales invoices). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About workbooks As a standard practice, some companies register vouchers that are grouped into batches based on their type (for example, purchase invoices or sales invoices). To follow this practice in Visma Net, you can use the General ledger workbooks functionality. With this functionality, you can add batches of vouchers of a particular type, which means that you can separate vouchers by source or type. Each workbook will also have its own number series. ## Voucher batches In Visma Net, you add batches of vouchers (voucher batches) by using the General ledger workbooks. Each workbook supports a particular type of vouchers that you can enter in this workbook. In the workbook, you create a voucher batch, to which you then add all required vouchers. When the vouchers are added, you release the batch, which releases all vouchers included in the batch. Vouchers within each batch get a unique voucher number and the batches will get a unique voucher batch number. ## Easy navigation Visma Net has many windows and often you need to switch between different workspaces in order to complete a task. When you use the workbooks you will have the same starting point no matter which voucher type you want to register. This makes it easy to navigate to the correct window and you can complete your task faster. ## Simplified window layouts Many of the windows in Visma Net are very complex and contain many tabs and fields, which can be time-consuming and complicated to use. With the workbooks functionality you can use a simplified window layout with less tabs and fields, which makes it much faster and easier to enter your vouchers. ## Voucher default values To even more improve efficiency it is possible to setup default values on a workbook. The values available depends on the workspace you have selected when you created your workbook. If you, for example, have selected the Customer ledger workspace, you can set a default customer, location and a description. These fields will then be pre-filled in the voucher window. ## Preconfigured workbooks In Visma Net we have preconfigured workbooks for general ledger transactions and expense and income payments. If you want to add more workbooks you can create new ones in the [Workbooks (GL307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/workbooks-gl307000/) window. Set up a workbook /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-workbooks/set-up-a-workbook section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a workbook 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new workbook. 1. In the **Workbook ID** field, enter an ID for the workbook. You can use up to 10 characters. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the workbook. 1. In the **Workspace** drop-down menu, select the workspace you want to use in this workbook. 1. In the **Transaction type** drop-down menu, select the transaction type you want to use in this workbook. Depending on the workspace you have selected in step 4, you will get different options here. 1. In the **Voucher entry window** field, select a window that will be the entry window for this workbook. Depending on the choices in step 4 and 5, you will get different options here. 1. Optional: Select the check box **Allow only one unreleased voucher batch per workbook** if you need to have only one voucher batch available for editing in this workbook. If you enable this functionality, the voucher numbering sequence in a batch will not be interrupted. 1. In the **Voucher batch** field, select a numbering ID to use as the default number series for the voucher batch. 1. In the **Voucher** field, select a numbering ID to use as the default number series for the vouchers within the voucher batch. 1. In the **Voucher default values** section, you can fill in different default values that should apply for this workbook. The values available depends on the workspace you have selected in step 4. **Example**: If you have selected the workspace Customer ledger, you will get three default values that you can choose to fill in: **Customer**, **Location,** and **Default description**. These will then be pre-filled in the voucher window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a voucher batch in a workbook /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-workbooks/create-a-voucher-batch-in-a-workbook section The procedure for creating a voucher batch is the same for all workbooks. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a voucher batch in a workbook The procedure for creating a voucher batch is the same for all workbooks. 1. Open the workbook type for which you want to create voucher batches. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new voucher batch. > [!NOTE] > ** If you have selected the check box **Allow only one unreleased voucher batch per workbook** in the setup, it will not be possible to add a new voucher batch until you have released all previous unreleased batches in the workbook. 1. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter a description for the batch. 1. Click **Create**. The system redirects you to a simplified window for the transaction type that belongs to the workbook. 1. Some of the required fields in the top part of the window are already filled in, like the transaction date and the post period. You can change the transaction date, and the post period will change accordingly. Fill in the rest of the required fields. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add rows to the transaction. 1. Optional: Click **Save and add** if you want to add more vouchers to the voucher batch. 1. Click **Save and close**. This will take you back to the workbook, where you also see a list of all the voucher batches that were created for this workbook.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Delete a voucher batch from a workbook /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-workbooks/delete-a-voucher-batch-from-a-workbook section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete a voucher batch from a workbook 1. Open the workbook that contains the voucher batch you want to delete. > [!NOTE] > ** If you delete a voucher batch, the voucher numbers will also be deleted. 1. Click to select the batch you want to delete. > [!NOTE] > that you can only delete one batch at a time. Even though you are allowed to select more than one voucher batch, it is the last one you select that will be deleted. 1. Click ![icon-delete-cross](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete-cross.png) to delete the batch. Click **OK** in the warning pop-up, to delete the selected voucher batch including all its vouchers. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed to the left of the deleted batch after processing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release a voucher batch in a workbook /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-workbooks/release-a-voucher-batch-in-a-workbook section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release a voucher batch in a workbook 1. Open the workbook that contains the voucher batches you want to release. 1. Click one ore more check boxes in front of the listed voucher batches, to select them. 1. Click **Release**. All released voucher batches will be marked with a ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) in the leftmost column. 1. Click ![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) to go back to the default view. All released voucher batches are now marked in the **Released** column. To view a released voucher batch, select it and click **View and edit**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Update a voucher batch in a workbook /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-workbooks/update-a-voucher-batch-in-a-workbook section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update a voucher batch in a workbook 1. Open the workbook that contains the voucher batch you want to update. 1. Select a voucher batch and click **View and edit**. On the left side you see one or more vouchers that are included in this voucher batch. 1. Click each of the vouchers you want to change and make the necessary changes. 1. If you are done, click **Save and close** or click **Save and add** if you want to add another voucher. You can only add a voucher if the batch is unreleased. > [!NOTE] > You can also delete a voucher. Just do step 1 and 2, on the left side click the voucher you want to delete and then click ![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png). Note that the voucher number will be lost.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 General ledger windows /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger windows General ledger windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the General ledger workspace. ## Transactions [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) [Workbooks (GL307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/workbooks-gl307000/) [Trial balance (GL303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/trial-balance-gl303010/) [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) ## Registers [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) [Subaccounts (GL203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/) [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) [Allocations ( GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) [Recurring transactions (GL203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500/) ## Processes [Release transactions (GL501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-transactions-gl501000/) [Reclassify transactions (GL506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000/) [Release workbooks (GL50505S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-workbooks-gl50505s/) [Release vouchers (GL501500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-vouchers-gl501500/) [Release budgets (GL505510)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-budgets-gl505510/) [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) [Close financial periods (GL503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/) [SIE export (GL40100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-export-gl40100s/) [SIE import (GL40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-import-gl40101s/) [Hermes export (GL40300S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/hermes-export-gl40300s/) [Run allocations (GL504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/run-allocations-gl504500/) [Generate recurring transactions (GL504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-gl504000/) [Import consolidation data (GL509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000/) [Validate account history (GL509900)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/validate-account-history-gl509900/) ## Inquiries [Account summary (GL401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/) [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) [Account by subaccount (GL403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-by-subaccount-gl403000/) [Account by period (GL402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-by-period-gl402000/) [Voucher list (GL40600S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/voucher-list-gl40600s/) [Voucher details inquiry (GL40601S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/voucher-details-inquiry-gl40601s/) [Voucher document inquiry (GL40400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/voucher-document-inquiry-gl40400s/) ## Reports [Trial balance summary (GL63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-summary-gl63200s-report/): Displays the account balances for the period. [Trial balance detailed (GL632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-detailed-gl632500/): For the selected period, displays the balances of the accounts, detailed to subaccounts. [Transactions for period (GL63300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-period-gl633000/): Displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. [Transactions for account (GL633500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-account-gl633500/): Shows activities on the account and under the specified subaccount during the range of periods. [All unreleased documents (GL65601S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/all-unreleased-documents-gl65601s/): [Budgets (GL612001)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/budgets-gl612001/): Displays the list of budget articles with their requested and released amounts in the selected ledger for the specified branch and for the specified financial year. [Unreleased transactions summary (GL61150S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-summary-gl61150s/): Displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. [Unreleased transactions (detailed) (GL610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-gl610500/): Shows transactions entered but not released for different accounts during the specified period (or all open periods). [Unreleased transactions account distribution (GL61100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-account-distribution-gl61100s/): Displays the list of transactions, with their details, that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. [Unreleased transactions account distribution (currency) (GL61120S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-account-distribution-currency-gl61120s/): [General ledger register (GL62050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-register-gl62050s/): Displays the list of all the batches released and posted to General Ledger during the specified financial period. [General ledger register (detailed) (GL62100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-register-detailed-gl62100s/): Displays the list of all the batches released and posted to General Ledger during the specified financial period. Batch details include accounts, subaccounts, currency, and amounts. [Recurring transactions (GL641500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/recurring-transactions-gl641500/): Displays a schedule or the list of schedules created for recurring transactions. [Recurring transactions (detailed) (GL640500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/recurring-transactions-detailed-gl640500/): Displays the details of a schedule or schedules to which recurring transactions are assigned. [Journal transactions list (GL63302S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/journal-transactions-list-gl63302s/): [Reversing batches (GL690010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/reversing-batches-gl690010/): Displays the list of reversing batches with their details which have been generated for the selected batch. [Balance sheet specification/Open entries (GL63309S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-specification-open-entries-gl63309s/): [Audit transaction list (GL63303S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/audit-transaction-list-gl63303s/) [Transactions with external codes (GL63304S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-with-external-codes-gl63304s/): [Balance with external codes (GL63201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-with-external-codes-gl63201s/): [Account specification (GL63301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/account-specification-gl63301s/): ## Financial statements [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/): Displays the company's balance sheet as of the start of the specified financial period. Assets are shown against liabilities. [Profit and loss (GL635000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-gl635000/): Displays your company's profits and losses for the specified period in period-to-date and year-to-date amounts, versus the period-to-date and year-to-date amounts of the previous year as calculated for the same date. [Balance sheet - detailed (GL63401S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-detailed-gl63401s/): Displays the company's balance sheet by quarter. Assets are shown against liabilities. [Balance sheet - quarterly (GL634500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-quarterly-gl634500/): Displays the company's balance sheet by quarter. Assets are shown against liabilities. Balance sheet - quarterly (detailed) (GL63451S): Displays the company's balance sheet by quarter. Assets are shown against liabilities. [Profit and loss (detailed) (GL63501S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-detailed-gl63501s/): [Profit and loss - quarterly (detailed) (GL63551S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-quarterly-detailed-gl63551s/): Displays your company's profits and losses in year-to-date amounts for each quarter. ## Preferences [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) [Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010/) [Voucher entry codes (GL106000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/voucher-entry-codes-gl106000/) [General ledger numbering (GL107000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-numbering-gl107000/) [Workbooks (GL107500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/workbooks-gl107500/) [Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) [Account classes (GL202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-classes-gl202000/) [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) [Edit account information (GL50506S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/edit-account-information-gl50506s/) [External codes 1 (GL20251S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/external-codes-1-gl20251s/) [External codes 2 (GL20252S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/external-codes-2-gl20252s/) [BI analysis codes (GL20253S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/bi-analysis-codes-gl20253s/) [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) [SIE import VAT settings (GL20200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-import-vat-settings-gl20200s/) [Standard VAT codes (CS20500S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/standard-vat-codes-cs20500s/) [Export/import settings (CS10200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/export-import-settings-cs10200s/) Account by period (GL402000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-by-period-gl402000 page You can use this window to easily obtain all information about a selected account by financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account by period (GL402000) You can use this window to easily obtain all information about a selected account by financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to easily obtain all information about a selected account by financial period. By using the **Subaccount** field, you can select either one subaccount or a group of subaccounts and view the related transactions. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Account details Navigates to the Account by subaccount (GL403000) window.
Account by subaccount Navigates to the Account details (GL404000) window.
## The top part In this area, you can specify criteria to narrow the information displayed in the table. In the **Subaccount** field, you can select one particular subaccount or select a group of subaccounts by specifying values for only some of the segments. You also can view the currency details if any currencies other than the base currency were used in the transactions related to the account.
Element Description
Branch The branch of the company whose data you want to view. You can select a required branch, or clear this field. If the field is left empty, information on all branches is shown. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger The ledger of the accounts you want to review.
Financial year The financial year whose periods you want to view.
Account The account whose balance you want to view through all the financial periods of the selected financial year.
Subaccount

A subaccount or a group of subaccounts.

If the field is left blank, all the transactions for the selected account in the specified period will be listed. If the values for only some segments are specified, this defines a group of subaccounts with the specified values as well as all the different values in the segments that were left blank.
Show currency details A check box that indicates (if selected) that the additional columns related to the currency will be displayed.
## The table This table contains the account balances for all the financial periods of the selected financial year. The account balances are calculated for the group of subaccounts specified in the **Subaccount** field in the top part.
Column Description
Period The financial period of the year.
Beg. balance The balance of the account, calculated for the selected subaccounts, at the beginning of the financial period.
Debit total The debit total charged to the account during the specified period. The amount is calculated for the selected subaccounts only.
Credit total The credit total charged to the account during the specified period. The amount is calculated for the selected subaccounts only.
Ending balance The balance of the account, calculated for the selected subaccounts, at the end of the specified period.
### The additional table columns The following columns also appear if the **Show currency details** check box is selected.
Column Description
Currency The currency of transactions in the account. If it is not specified, the balance is in the base currency.
Curr. beg. balance The account balance in the selected currency at the start of the selected period.
Curr. debit total The debit total in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Curr. credit total The credit total in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Curr. ending balance The account balance in the selected currency at the end of the selected period.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related concepts Related reference [Journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) [Account summary](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/) Account by subaccount (GL403000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-by-subaccount-gl403000 page You can use this window to easily obtain information, by different subaccounts, about activities on the selected account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account by subaccount (GL403000) You can use this window to easily obtain information, by different subaccounts, about activities on the selected account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to easily obtain information, by different subaccounts, about activities on the selected account. In the **Subaccount** field, you can select a group of subaccounts by specifying values in only particular segments while leaving other segments blank. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Account details Navigates to the Account details (GL404000) window, so you can view the account details.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can narrow the records to be displayed in the table. You can select a particular subaccount, or you can select a group of subaccounts by specifying the values for only some of the segments in the **Subaccount** field.
Element Description
Branch

The branch of the company whose data you want to view. You can select a required branch, or clear this field. With the empty field, information on all branches is shown.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger The ledger whose accounts you want to review.
Period The financial period for which you want to view data.
Account The account whose data you want to display.
Subaccount

The subaccount or mask for a group of subaccounts.

If you leave the field blank, all transactions for the selected account in the specified period will be listed. If values are specified for only some segments, this defines a group of subaccounts with the specified values as well as all the different values in the segments that were left blank.
Show currency details A check box that indicates (if selected) that the columns showing the currency details of the transactions will also be displayed. If the check box is cleared, all transactions are shown in the base currency.
## The table This table displays the account balances for all the subaccounts specified in the **Subaccount** field of the top part.
Column Description
Subaccount The subaccount used with the account.
Beg. balance The balance of the account by the subaccount at the beginning of the selected financial period.
Debit total The debit total posted to the account by the subaccount during the selected financial period.
Credit total The total of credits posted to the account by the subaccount during the selected financial period.
Ending balance The balance of the account by the subaccount at the end of the selected financial period or on the current business date.
### The additional table columns The following columns appear if the **Show currency details** option is selected.
Column Description
Currency ID The currency of transactions in the account. If it is not specified, the balance is in the base currency.
Beg. balance (currency) The account balance in the selected currency at the start of the selected period.
Debit total (currency) The debit total in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Credit total (currency) The credit total in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Ending balance (currency) The account balance in the selected currency at the end of the selected period.
### Parent topic [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related concepts Related reference [Account summary (GL401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/) [Account by period (GL402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-by-period-gl402000/) [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) Account classes (GL202000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-classes-gl202000 page By using this window, you can create new account classes and maintain the list of account classes in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account classes (GL202000) By using this window, you can create new account classes and maintain the list of account classes in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create new account classes and maintain the list of account classes in the system. There is no specific logic associated with account classes; these user-defined classes are used as properties of general ledger accounts for convenient grouping, sorting, and filtering of information associated with general ledger accounts in reports and inquiries. For example: Liability accounts can be divided into several classes, such as the following: + Current liabilities, Supplier ledger + Current liabilities, Wages payable + Current liabilities, Interest payable + Long-term liabilities, Bonds payable + Long-term liabilities, Mortgage loan payable ## The table
Column Description
Account class ID An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters identifying the account class. Follow appropriate internal agreements before naming account classes; the ID cannot be changed in the future.
Type The type of the accounts in this class, which is one of the following four types: Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Description

A description of the account class. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters may be used.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Account details (GL404000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000 page The Subaccount field is available only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account details (GL404000) The Subaccount field is available only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view all activities in a specific account during a selected financial period or range of financial periods. You can easily switch between financial periods. In the **Subaccount** field, you can select one subaccount or a group of subaccounts; you can then view the related transactions. It is also possible to view the reconciled transactions. In the **Account** field, you select an account that was used to reconcile transactions in the [Journal reconciliation (GL30201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-gl30201s/) window. By using this window, you can also select required transactions for reclassification, or view the reclassification history for the selected **Reclassification** transaction. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Reclassify

Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, where you can proceed with the reclassification of the selected transactions.

You select the check boxes next to the required transactions in the table before clicking Reclassify.
Reclassify all Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, where you can proceed with the reclassification of all transactions listed on this window.
Reclassification history

Opens the Reclassification history (GL405000) window for the selected transaction.

This button is available only if the reclassified transaction is selected in the table.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify the selection criteria to show the transactions in the table. If you specify a period that spans multiple years to view batches recorded to the accounts of the **Income** and **Expenses** types and the **Retained earnings** account, the system will display zero balance in the **Beginning balance** and **Ending balance** fields.
Element Description
Company

The company whose data you want to view.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch of the company whose data you want to view. You can select a required branch, or clear this field. With the empty field, information on all branches is shown.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger in which you want to view the account balances.

You can select a ledger of the Actual, reporting, or Statistical type.

A ledger of the Budget type is not available for selection.
From period The financial period that begins the date range of the batches you want to view.
To period The financial period that ends the date range of the batches you want to view.
Account The account for which you want to view activities in the selected financial period.
Subaccount

The subaccount or mask for a group of subaccounts.

If the field is left blank, all the transactions for the selected account in the specified period will be listed. If values are specified for only some segments, this defines a group of subaccounts with the specified values, as well as all the different values in the segments that were left blank.
From date The first date of the interval within the period.
Period start date The first date of the selected financial period.
To date The last date of the interval within the selected period.
Period end date The last date of the selected financial period.
Manually started search

When you have a large number of transactions that you want to view, you can select the Manually started search check box to avoid that the system starts searching every time you change your search criteria, and to faster see your search results.

By clicking the Manually started search, a Search button appears. Select your search criteria and then click the Search button. Each time you click the Search button, a new set of transactions matching your search criteria will appear in the search result list.
Search The Search button that appears when you have selected the Manually started search check box.
Show summary A check box that indicates (if selected) that the rows with transactions in the table are combined by dates. That is, the transactions of the same date are combined into one row, in which the amounts of all included transactions are summarised.
Include unposted A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unposted batches are also added to the list.
Include unreleased A check box that indicates (if selected) that the balanced batches are also added to the list.
Include reclassified A check box that indicates (if selected) that the reclassified batches are also added to the list.
Show currency details A check box that indicates (if selected) that additional table columns with currency details will be displayed below.
Show beginning and ending balance A check box that indicates (if selected) that the additional table columns Beg. balance and Ending balance will be displayed below.
Beginning balance The balance of the selected account (with the specified subaccount) on the date selected in the From date field, or at the beginning of the period selected in the From period field if the date is not specified.
Turnover The difference between the ending and beginning balances.
Ending balance

The ending balance of the account calculated based on the transactions shown in the table.

When a filter is applied to the records in the table, the ending balance of the account is calculated as the beginning balance of the account in the period selected in the From period field plus the turnover amount calculated based on the records shown in the table.
## The table In this table, the list shows the batches that match the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Workspace

The workspace where the transaction originated.

This column appears if, for the selected range of days or periods, there are transactions originating in other workspaces that updated the balance of the selected account.
Batch no.

The reference number of the batch (generated for the transaction) that updated the balance of the selected account.

Click the link to navigate to the Journal transactions (GL301000) window so you can view batch details.
Trans. date The date of the transaction.
Period The financial period of the transaction.
Description The user-defined description of the transaction.
Ref. no. The reference number of the external document on which this transaction is based. Click the link to navigate to the appropriate window so you can view the details of the transaction.
Branch

The branch of the company, that the entry was posted in.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The account updated by the batch transactions.
Subaccount The subaccount used in the batch.
Beg. balance The running total of the account’s beginning balance calculated in the order of transactions displayed in the table. If you reorder or filter transactions, the amount in this column will be recalculated.
Debit amount The transaction debit amount charged to the account during the selected financial period.
Credit amount The transaction credit amount charged to the account during the selected financial period.
Ending balance The running total of the account’s ending balance calculated in the order of transactions displayed in the table. If you reorder or filter transactions, the amount in this column will be recalculated.
Reclass. batch number The number of the corresponding Reclassification batch.
Customer/Supplier no.

The ID of the customer or the supplier account.

It is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key or by the CUSTOMER or the SUPPLIER segmented key (which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key) when you are creating a new customer or a supplier in the Customers (AR303000) or the Suppliers (AP303000) window.

You can later change the customer or supplier no. by selecting Change ID from the Actions menu in the toolbar in the same window.
Customer/Supplier name

The name of the customer or the supplier, that appear in the system, which may be a trading name or a doing-business-as (DBA) name.

The name is created in the Customers (AR303000) or the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Item ID The Stock or Non-stock item identifier number associated with the transaction, if relevant.
Line no. The transaction’s line number in the batch.
Quantity Optional. The quantity of items associated with the transaction, if relevant.
Hidden from reconciliation A check box selected in the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window that indicates that the transaction is not to be reconciled
Reconciliation ref. no. The reconciliation reference number that is created in the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window.
Reconciled by user The user who reconciled the transaction.
Reconciled date The reconciliation date.
### The additional table columns The following columns also appear if the **Show currency details** check box is selected.
Column Description
Currency The currency of transactions in the account. If it is not specified, the balance is in the base currency.
Beg. balance (currency) The account balance in the selected currency at the start of the selected period.
Debit amount (currency) The debit amount in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Credit amount (currency) The credit amount in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Ending balance (currency) The account balance in the selected currency at the end of the selected period.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Account summary (GL401000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000 page By using this window, you obtain summary information about all accounts of a specific class for the selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account summary (GL401000) By using this window, you obtain summary information about all accounts of a specific class for the selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you obtain summary information about all accounts of a specific class for the selected financial period. You can easily drill down to every document detail. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Go to previous record Changes to the last selected record. If the From period and To period fields are not the same period, this button will change both to and from periods one period back.
Go to next record Changes to the next selected record. If the From period and To period fields are not the same period, this button will change both to and from periods one period forward.
Account details Navigates to the Account details (GL404000) window.
Account by subaccount Navigates to the Account by subaccount (GL403000) window.
Account by period Navigates to the Account by period (GL402000) window.
## The top part By using the elements in this part, you can narrow the accounts for which summaries are displayed. Also, you can specify a subaccount, or select a group of subaccounts by specifying a mask in the **Subaccount** field.
Field Description
Company: The company for which data you want to view. To be able to view the account summary by branches, leave this field empty.
Branch The branch of the company for which data you want to view. You can select a required branch, or clear this field. If the field is left empty, information on all branches is shown. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger The ledger for the accounts you want to review.
From period The start period for which you want to display summaries and the period for the beginning balance.
To period The end period for which you want to display the summaries and the period for the ending balance.
Account class

Optional.

The account class for which you want to display summaries. For the selected class, all the account activities matching the selected subaccount or subaccount group will be displayed in the table. If this element is left blank, accounts of all classes will be displayed. The available account classes are defined in the Account classes (GL202000) window.
Subaccount

A subaccount or a mask for a group of subaccounts.

If the field is left blank, all the transactions for the selected account or accounts in the specified period will be listed. If values only for some segments are specified, this defines a group of subaccounts with the specified segment values and various values in any segments that you left blank.
Show currency details A check box that indicates (if selected) that the additional columns related to the currency used in accounts will be displayed. Note! Only accounts defined as currency accounts will have a value in the currency columns.
Show only accounts with activity

Selecting this check box will display a list of accounts with only a debit or credit transaction in the specified period.

Accounts with only Beginning balance / Ending balance but with no debit or credit values will be excluded from the list.
Group by public code 1 A check box that will group the lines by the defined Public code 1 on the Chart of accounts. If some accounts are missing a value, they will be summarized on an empty line.
Group by branches A check box that (if selected) will display the summary grouped by branches.
## The table This table lists the summary balances for general ledger accounts and subaccounts that meet the criteria you entered in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the company.
Account The specific account.
Type The type of the account, which is one of the following values: Expense, Asset, Income, or Liability.
Description The user-defined description of the account.
Beg. balance The balance of the account at the beginning of the selected From period.
Debit total The total of debits posted to the account during the selected financial periods.
Credit total The total of credits posted to the account during the selected financial periods.
Ending balance The balance of the account at the end of the selected To period.
Consolidation account The consolidation account of the parent company for this account.
Account class The account class of this account.
Last activity The period of the most recent transaction posted to the account. After you close the last period of a financial year, the column shows the first period of the next financial year by default (even if there is no transaction posted to this account in this period yet).
### The additional table columns The following columns also appear if the **Show currency details** or the **Group by public code 1** check box is selected.
Column Description
Currency ID The currency of transactions in the account. If it is not specified, the balance is in the base currency.
Beg. balance (currency) The account balance in the selected currency at the start of the selected period.
Debit total (currency) The debit total in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Credit total (currency) The credit total in the selected currency for the specified account over the selected period.
Ending balance (currency) The account balance in the selected currency at the end of the selected period.
Public code description This field contains the description of the Public code. This column will only appear if the check box Group by public code 1 is selected.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Allocations (GL204500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500 page By using this window, you can create, modify, or delete allocation templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Allocations (GL204500) By using this window, you can create, modify, or delete allocation templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can create, modify, or delete allocation templates. For more information on creating and using allocation templates and performing allocations, see: [Allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations/about-allocation-rules/). This window is available only if the **Allocation templates** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select an existing allocation or to provide the settings for a new allocation.
Element Description
Allocation ID

The unique ID of the allocation.

The system generates IDs in accordance with the numbering series selected for allocations on the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Description

A detailed description of the allocation.

The alphanumeric string may contain as many as 30 characters.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the allocation is active.
## The Allocation tab This tab contains general settings for an allocation.
Element Description
From period The first financial period when allocation may be applied.
To period The last period when allocation may be applied.
Recurring A check box that indicates (if selected) that the allocation is recurring (that is, should be applied each year for each of the specified periods).
Allocation method

The way the allocation amount should be collected from the source accounts. Select one of the following options:

By account PTD
The period-to-date amount should be collected from the source accounts.
From prev. allocation
The amount accumulated since the last allocation should be collected from the source accounts.
Note

If it is important for you to have the allocation batch on the same financial period as the source document, select By account PTD.

If it is more important to allocate all transactions that are not yet allocated, no matter what financial date the source document has, select From prev. allocation.
Distribution method

The way the allocated amount is distributed over the destination accounts. The following options are available:

By percent
The source amount is distributed among destination accounts by percentages, which are set in the Destination accounts tab of this window. The total is 100 percent.
By weight
The amount is distributed between destination accounts by user-defined coefficients, which are set on the Destination accounts tab of this window. The total is not defined.
By destination account PTD
The amount is distributed between the destination branches proportionally to period-to-date balances of the destination accounts in the allocation ledger or proportionally to PTD balances of the base accounts of the base branches in the base ledger if it is specified or in the allocation ledger if the base ledger is not specified.
By destination account YTD
The amount is distributed between the destination branches proportionally to year-to-date balances of the destination accounts in the allocation ledger or proportionally to YTD balances of the base accounts of the base branches in the base ledger if it is specified or in the allocation ledger if the base ledger is not specified.
Allocation ledger

Required.

The ledger to which journal entries generated for the allocation are posted. You can select a ledger of the following types: Actual, Statistical, Budget, or Reporting types.
Source ledger

Required.

The specified ledger is used to calculate an amount to be allocated.
Base ledger An optional property used only for the distribution methods By destination account YTD and By destination account PTD. If specified, it is used to calculate the proportions for distributing allocation amounts among the destination accounts. If the base ledger is not specified, the allocation ledger will be used for calculating proportions.
Sort order An integer specifying the order in which this allocation should be applied if there are several allocation for the same period. Those with lower values should be applied first.
Last revision date The last date when the revision of an allocation was made.
## The Source accounts tab The **Source accounts** tab contains the list (in a tabular format) of accounts in the allocation ledger which will be used as allocation source.
Column Description
Branch The branch whose accounts will be the source of allocation amounts.
Account

The account or accounts (if you use a grouping mask) that will be the source of the allocation amount. To use a grouping mask, specify characters common for all account identifiers and use ? as a wildcard character to designate varying characters in the accounts.

If you want to specify common characters only at the beginning of the segment, you may leave the rest of segment blank. You need not type ? in every position, but if you want to specify characters at the beginning and at the end of the same segment, type ? in the positions between them.

For example: The mask 110____ selects all the accounts in which identifiers start with 110. The mask 310???5 selects the accounts in which identifiers start with 310 and end in 5: 3100005, 3100015, 3100195, and so on.
Subaccount

The subaccount for the accounts that will be the source of the allocation amount. You can use a grouping mask to specify a group of subaccounts. Select a segment and press F3 to select a value common to all subaccounts you want to view; leave the segments blank if they can have varying values in the subaccounts.

If you want to specify only several characters in a specific segment, type ? in other positions of the segment.

For example: You could use the mask Dept1/Product2//orDept?/Product?//, where**/** is a segment separator character.
Contra account

Optional.

The account from which the allocated amount will be actually deducted. You may not use a grouping mask here.
Contra subaccount

Optional.

The subaccount for the specified contra account. You may not use a grouping mask here.
Amount limit The maximum amount that may be allocated from each account grouped by the account and subaccount masks within one period (so that if the accounts are grouped by the account and subaccount masks, the limit will be specific for each such account).
Percentage limit

The percentage of the balance that may be allocated from each account grouped by the account and subaccount masks.

The default is 100 percent.
## The Destination accounts tab This tab contains a list (in a tabular format) of the destination accounts for the allocation, which you can use to specify how the allocation amount is to be distributed between accounts of specific branches. For details on using this tab, see: [Allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations/about-allocation-rules/).
Column Description
Account An account that will be the destination of the allocation amounts.
Subaccount An subaccount that will be the destination of the allocation amounts.
Base branch

(Optional and available only if Distribution method is set to By destination account PTD or By destination account YTD.)

The base branch, whose account balances should be used to calculate a proportion for distributing the allocation amount between the destination accounts of the destination branches. For this, the system uses the base branch’s account balances in the ledger specified in the Base ledger field on the Allocations tab.

If no base ledger is specified, the system uses the allocation ledger.

If no base branches are specified in this column, no base accounts and base subaccounts are specified in the respective columns, the system distributes the allocation amount between the destination branches proportionally to YTD or PTD balances of the destination accounts (with corresponding subaccounts). If only the base branches are not specified, the system uses the destination branches for calculate proportions based on the balances of base accounts.
Base account

(Optional and available only if Distribution method is set to By destination account PTD or By destination account YTD.)

The base account for the allocation. The allocation amount will be distributed between the destination branches according to the current PTD or YTD balances of the base accounts for the base branches. For this calculation, the system uses the account balances of the branches (for the base subaccounts) in the base ledger (specified in the Base ledger field on the Allocations tab).

If no base branch is specified, the system uses the destination branch.

If no base ledger is specified, the system uses the balances of the base accounts in the allocation ledger.
Base subaccount

(Optional and available only if Distribution method is set to By destination account PTD or By destination account YTD.)

The base subaccount for the allocation. The allocated amount will be distributed according to the current PTD or YTD balances of the base accounts under the specified base subaccounts in the base ledger for the base branch.

If no base branch is specified, the system uses the destination branch. If the Base ledger is not specified on the Allocations tab, the proportion is calculated based on the balances in the allocation ledger.
Weight/percent

(Available only if Distribution method is set to By percent or By weight and required.)

A value that defines the weight of the account. The allocation amount will be distributed among the destination accounts proportionally to their respective weights or according to the specified percentages. If the Distribution method is By percent, the sum of values in this column must be equal to 100 percent.
## The Allocation history tab This tab displays read-only information about the history of batches generated for the allocation.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace that generated the batch.
Batch number The unique identification number of the batch. You can click this number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, on which you can view the details of the batch.
Ledger The ledger to which the batch transactions will be posted.
Transaction date The date when the batch was generated.
Post period The financial period to which the batch transactions should be posted.
Status The batch status, which is initially Unposted.
Control total The control total amount of the batch.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) BI analysis codes (GL20253S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/bi-analysis-codes-gl20253s page This code is used in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window and must be defined here first. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # BI analysis codes (GL20253S) This code is used in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window and must be defined here first. For more information: [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It can then be used as a filter or a summary in general inquiries or APIs, to sort or summarise general ledger transactions. The table
Column Description
Analysis code The ID of the analysis code.
Description The description of the analysis code.

Related pages

Concepts

 Budget configuration (GL205000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000 page You use this window to create a budget structure for your organisation or to view and modify the existing budget structure. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Budget configuration (GL205000) You use this window to create a budget structure for your organisation or to view and modify the existing budget structure. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The budget structure is represented by a tree that consists of budget articles. Some of the budget articles are **leaves**, and some are **nodes**. Each budget article that is a **leaf** is defined by an account-subaccount pair. Each budget article that is a **node** contains leaves, other nodes, or leaves and nodes. The budget articles, whether they are leaves or nodes, listed within a node, are also referred to as **subarticles**. For more information on budget structures, see: [Budget structure example](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-budgets/budget-structure-example/). > [!NOTE] > When you create a budget by using the [Budget (GL302010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/) window, you specify the amounts for only budget articles that are leaves. The amount for each budget article that is a node is calculated automatically as the sum of the article's subarticles. ## The Budget tree pane In this pane, you can view or modify the budget tree that will be used for all budgets in all branches of your organisation. The pane displays only the budget articles that are nodes; click any node to open the list of its subarticles in the right pane.
Button Description
Delete node Removes the selected node from the tree.
Move left Moves the selected node one level up, under the enclosing node.
Move right Moves the selected node one level down or appends the node at the bottom of the list contained by the upper node of the same level.
Move node up Moves the selected node one position up the list within the same node.
Move node down Moves the selected node one position down the list within the same node.
## The Subarticles pane In this pane, you can view the list of budget articles contained within the budget article that is a node selected in the **Budget tree** pane. The list may contain budget articles that are nodes and budget articles that are leaves. In this pane, you can create the list of items for the node selected in the tree as follows: To add nodes to the list : For each node-type budget article, add a row, type the article name in the **Description** column and select the **Node** check box. Optionally, specify a mask for accounts and a mask for subaccounts that will define the article's subarticles. When you save your changes, the budget articles appear as same-level nodes on the budget tree. To add leaves to the list : Click **Preload accounts** on the pane toolbar and, in the dialog box, specify the range of accounts and a mask for subaccounts (if subaccounts are used in your system). The system will generate all possible pairs by using only the accounts listed on the chart of accounts and all the subaccounts that are combinations of subaccount segment values. Once this list is generated, you can remove the account-subaccount pairs you don't need for budgets.
Button Description
Preload accounts Opens the Preload accounts dialog box, which you use to specify a range of accounts and a subaccount mask for generating possible account-subaccount pairs.
Configure security

Navigates to the Restriction groups by budget article (GL105020) window so you can review and edit the restriction groups related to budget articles.

This button is available only if the Row-level security check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Preload accounts dialog box
Element Description
Account from The account that starts the range of accounts selected for loading.
Account to The account that ends the range of accounts selected for loading.
Subaccount mask (This field appears only if the Subaccounts functionality is activated in your system.) The subaccount mask that defines the subaccounts to be loaded. You can specify a particular segment value or just a few characters of the segment value to select the subaccounts for loading. You can use ? as a wild card character.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and generates account-subaccount pairs by selecting existing accounts from the specified range and existing subaccounts according to the specified mask.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without loading any data.
### The table
Column Description
Node A check box that, indicates (if selected) that this subarticle (list item) is a node on the budget tree.
Account The account of the budget article, if the article is a leaf article. A leaf budget article is defined by an account (or by an account-subaccount pair if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in your system).
Subaccount (This column appears only if the Subaccounts functionality is activated in your system.) The subaccount of the budget article if the article is a leaf article. A leaf budget article is defined by an account-subaccount pair.
Description A description of the budget article. The description is used as the budget article name on the budget tree and on other budget-related windows.
Account mask

The account mask. The mask specified for the node will provide the default values for the account range in the Preload accounts dialog box when you populate this node.

If the mask is specified for a leaf article, then, on data loading for a new budget, amounts can be aggregated over all the account-subaccount pairs selected by this mask and the mask for subaccounts.
Subaccount mask

The subaccount mask. This mask, if specified for a node, provides the default subaccount mask in the Preload accounts dialog box when you populate this node.

This mask, if specified for a leaf article, on data loading for a new budget, amounts can be aggregated over all the account-subaccount pairs selected by the mask for accounts and this mask.

(This column appears only if the Subaccounts functionality is activated in your system.)
Secured A check box that indicates (if selected) that this budget article is included in one or more restriction groups.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Budget (GL302010) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010 page You use this window to create new budgets or to view and update existing budgets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Budget (GL302010) You use this window to create new budgets or to view and update existing budgets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Each budget should be saved in a dedicated ledger of the **Budget** type. If no budget tree has been configured in your system in the [Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) window, you can create only single-level budgets. To be able to create hierarchical budgets, you should configure the budget tree first. A single-level budget is a list of budget articles, each of which is defined by an account-subaccount pair with the amount. You can enter the amounts manually, import them from a file, or calculate the amounts when you load budget articles from the actual ledger or other budgets. A hierarchical budget (one that is based on the budget tree configured in the [Budget configuration (GL205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-configuration-gl205000/) window) includes budget articles of two types: **leaves** and **nodes**. + A budget article that is a leaf, is defined by an account-subaccount pair. + A budget article that is a node, may contain node-type articles and leaf-type budget articles. You can enter the amount for each budget article that is a leaf, but you cannot enter the amount for any article that is a node. The amount for each node article is calculated automatically as a sum of all sub-articles of this node. The budget articles that were loaded with the budget tree cannot be removed from a particular budget. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Preload articles Opens the Preload budget articles wizard dialog box, which you can use to load (into the node selected on the tree) the selected data of a specific financial year from an actual, statistical, or budget ledger with a specific multiplier.
Manage budget Opens the Manage budget dialog box.
### The Preload budget articles wizard (Step 1 of 3) dialog box
Element Description
Branch

Required.

The branch whose budget you create or view. By default, it is the branch to which you have signed in.

This field appears only if the Multi-branch check box is selected and enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

Required.

The ledger of the Budget or Statistical type that stores the budget.
Financial year

Required.

The financial year of the budget.
Multiplier (%)

The multiplier, expressed as a percent, to be used to calculate the amounts for the budget.

By default, the multiplier is 100.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without making any changes.
Next (button) Opens the next step of the dialog box.
### The Preload budget articles wizard (Step 2 of 3) dialog box
Element Description
Account from

Optional.

The account that starts the range of accounts you want to load. If any value appears by default, it is based on the account mask specified for the node.

If you leave the field blank, the system will use the first account listed the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.
Account to

Optional.

The account that ends the range of accounts you want to load. If any value appears by default, it is based on the account mask specified for the node.

If you leave the field blank, the system will use the last account listed in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.
Account mask

Optional.

The account mask that selects the accounts to be loaded. Use ? as a wildcard character.

If both the range and the mask are specified, the accounts selected both by the mask and by the range will be loaded.
Subaccount mask

Optional.

The subaccount mask that defines the subaccounts to be loaded. You can specify a value of a particular segment or just a few characters of the segment value to select the subaccounts for loading. Use ? as a wildcard character.

This field appears only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without making any changes.
Prev (button) Returns to the previous step of the dialog box.
Next (button) Opens the next step of the dialog box.
### The Preload budget articles wizard (Step 3 of 3) dialog box
Element Description
Update existing articles only A check box that you select to update only the budget articles that exist in this budget.
Update existing articles and load non-existent articles A check box that you select to update the existing budget articles and load the articles that do not already exist in the budget.
Load non-existent articles only A check box that you select to load only the articles that do not already exist in the budget.
Cancel (button) Closes the wizard without making any changes.
Prev (button) Returns to the previous step of the wizard.
Finish (button) Closes the wizard and loads the selected data.
## The Manage budget dialog box
Element Description
Select action

Determines the action to be taken if you click OK:

Roll back to released values
Cancels the changes made to the budget after it has been released, and restores the released values.
Convert budget using current budget configuration
Transforms the current budget into a budget tree, which you can view and edit in the Budget configuration (GL205000) window. We recommend that you fill in the Account mask and Subaccount mask columns for the nodes in the configured budget tree. The account and subaccount masks define the group of articles that can be added to each node during the conversion. If the account and subaccount masks are not specified for the nodes and if a leaf is not defined for each required article of the node, the appropriate articles will not be added to the required nodes. As a result, the conversion will be completed improperly.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and executes the selected operation.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The top part In the top part, you can select a branch, a budget ledger, and a budget year to create a new budget or to review an existing one. Also, you can select the data to compare the budget. When you create a new budget (for a future year, another branch, or a new budget ledger), the system loads the budget configuration from the budget tree if such a budget tree has been configured in the system. To quickly find the data you need in an existing budget, do the following: + To view in the right pane the budget articles with specific subaccounts only, specify the subaccount filter. + To view in the tree pane specific nodes only, use the tree node filter.
Element Description
Branch

The branch of the organization whose budget is being created or selected for viewing.

This field appears only if the Multi-branch check box is selected and enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The budget ledger.

If you are going to create a new budget from scratch, you should first create a budget ledger by using the Ledgers (GL201500) window.
Financial year

The financial year of the budget.

If the budget ledger does not contain data for the selected year, the system prompts you to agree to load the budget tree structure.
Tree view A check box that appears only if a budget tree has been configured in the Budget configuration (GL205000) window. This check box indicates (if selected) that the budget article structure is displayed in the Budget structure pane of the current window. With the budget tree shown in the left pane, the Budget articles table lists only subarticles of the article selected in the tree. If the check box is not selected, the Budget structure pane is hidden and all subarticles of all levels are listed in the Budget articles table.
Compare to branch

Optional.

This field appears only if the Multi-branch check box is selected and enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

The branch whose budget or ledger data will be used for comparison.
Compare to ledger

Optional.

The ledger to be used for comparison. The amounts from the selected ledger for the selected year will be displayed in the Budget articles pane in a separate line under each budget article for comparison.
Compare to year

Optional.

The financial year to be used for comparison.
Subaccount filter

Optional.

This field appears only if the Subaccounts functionality is activated in your system. Specify the segment values to display in the right table only the budget articles with specific segment values in their subaccounts.
Tree node filter

Optional.

This field can be used only if the Tree view check box is selected.

Specify the characters in node names to display only the specific nodes of the budget tree in the Budget tree pane.
## The Budget area (the lower part) The Budget area of this window consists of the Budget tree pane and the Budget articles table: + The Budget tree pane (on the left side of the table): Note: It is displayed only if the **Tree view** check box is selected. + The Budget articles table: Contains a table with the list of all budget articles if there is no budget tree configured, or the list of the budget articles of the node selected in the Budget tree pane. The table is documented below.
Button Description
Distribute Opens the Distribute year amount by periods dialog box, which helps you distribute the year amount over financial periods.
### The Distribute year amount by periods dialog box
Element Description
Distribution method

The method of distribution, which is one of the following options:

Evenly
To distribute the year amount over the financial periods evenly, excluding the adjustment period if this period has been configured in your system.
Proportionally to the previous year
To distribute the year amount over the financial periods proportionally to amounts of the previous year’s periods, including the adjustment period. (This option is available only if budget articles were loaded with the amounts from one of the previous years.)
Proportionally to compared values
To distribute the year amount over the financial periods proportionally to the amounts selected for comparison. (This option is available only if budget articles were loaded with the amounts.)
Apply to all articles in the node A check box that you select if you want to distribute for the selected article and other articles in this node the year amounts among the periods.
Apply to subarticles A check box that you select if you want to distribute the year amount among the periods for each subarticle of the selected node.
OK (button) Calculates the budget amounts for each period and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without making any changes.
### The Budget articles table
Column Description
Node A check box that indicates (if selected) that the budget article in this row is a node on the budget tree.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the budget article has been released.
Account The account of the budget article if the article is a leaf on the budget tree.
Subaccount

The subaccount of the budget article if the article is a leaf on the budget tree.

This column appears only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Description A description of the budget article. By default, this column displays the account description.
Amount

The article amount, which is one of the following:

  • A manually entered amount if the article is a leaf
  • A read-only amount, automatically aggregated over the subarticles, if the article is a node
  • An editable amount, initially automatically aggregated for a leaf article over the subarticles specified by an account mask and subaccount mask
Distributed amount The amount distributed over the periods. For the budget article to be released, the distributed amount should be equal to the value in the Amount column.
Period 01 through Period 12 Columns reserved for distributing the article amount over the periods of the year. Each column contains the budget article’s amount for the respective period in the budget year.
Created by The name of the user who created this budget item.
Last modified by The name of the user who last edited this budget item.
Released amount The amount that has been released for this article.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Chart of accounts (GL202500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500 page You use this window to create and maintain the structure of accounts specific to your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Chart of accounts (GL202500) You use this window to create and maintain the structure of accounts specific to your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain the structure of accounts specific to your company. The system supports four types of general ledger accounts: **Asset**, **Liability** (balance accounts), **Income**, and **Expense** (income statement accounts). With this window, you also can assign accounts to account classes, which can be used for information grouping and sorting for reports and inquiries. For more information about accounts, see: [About account types and classes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-account-types-and-classes/). Before you create your chart of accounts by using this window, create the account classes by using the [Account classes (GL202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-classes-gl202000/) window. Also, consider your organisational structure, and configure the account and subaccount identifiers by using the designated segmented keys defined in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View restriction groups Navigates to the Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020) window and displays the list of restriction groups associated with the account. You can add the account to the selected restriction groups.
View notification feedback

This button appears if the Webhook notifications check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window is selected.

If you click this button, the Webhook notification for account (GL407000) window opens where you can view the notifications regarding changes done on accounts and view the notification feedbacks.
## The table
Column Description
Account

The unique identifier of the general ledger account in the system.

While specifying the values in segments, you can use the validation function, which allows you to select a value for each segment from the list of existing ones. For details, see the Segment keys (CS202000) window. For details about validation, see: About account IDs.
Account class Optional. The account class to which the account is assigned. Account classes are used for convenient grouping, sorting, and filtering of the information associated with General Ledger accounts in reports and inquiries.
Type The type of account, which is one of the following four types: Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is active. An inactive account does not appear in the drop-down lists of available accounts on data-entry forms. Clear the check box if the account is no longer used.
Description

An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters that describes the account.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Require units A check box that indicates (if selected) that every transaction posted to this account should have quantities and units of measure specified.
Use default sub A check box that causes the system (if selected) to set the default subaccount as the Subaccount if the account is selected. The default subaccount is defined using the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Post option

An option that defines how transactions created in other workspaces are posted to this account. Two options are available:

  • Summary (default): Indicates that transaction amounts can be summarised for posting to the account (subaccount, if any).
  • Detail: Indicates that each transaction will be posted to a selected account (subaccount) separately. If you select this option, the Post summary on updating general ledger option specified on the preferences forms of other workspaces will be overwritten. The Detail option is specified by default and not available for editing for the accounts, for which the Cash account check box is selected.

If the Post summary on updating general ledger check box is cleared on the preferences window of a particular workspace, the transactions will be posted separately to account (subaccount) regardless of which option is specified for an account in the current window.

The summarised transaction amounts will be posted to an account (subaccount) only if both the Summary option is specified for an account and the Post summary on updating general ledger check box is selected on the preferences window of the corresponding workspace.
Consolidation account

Optional. This column is used only if the company is a consolidation unit in a parent company.

The external general ledger account from the parent company’s chart of accounts to which the balance of the account will be exported in the process of consolidation. Select the account in this column only if the synchronization of the parent company with the current company has been performed in the Consolidation (GL103000) window for the parent company.

This column is available only if the General ledger consolidation functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency

Optional: This column appears only if support for multiple currencies has been activated for the system.

The currency of denomination used for the account. If the field is blank, the account uses the base currency. Denominated general ledger accounts cannot be used as source or destination accounts for general ledger allocations. You can always cancel currency denomination by clearing this field.
Cash account A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account has a cash account or multiple cash accounts linked to it. Cash accounts are created by using the Cash accounts (CA202000) window.
Control account module

A control account is a general ledger account that aggregates the balances of entities in a subledger; it can be used for analytical purposes as well as for the reconciliation of balances between subledgers and the general ledger.

You indicate that an account is to be used as a control account for a particular subledger by selecting the subledger.

The alternatives are:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Supplier ledger and Customer ledger
Allow manual entry A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account allows manual entries.
Control account module The identifier of the subledger for which the account is used as a control account. The field is unavailable if the Cash account check box is selected.
Allow manual entry A check box that indicates (if selected) that users can post transactions directly to this control account. This check box is available for selection only for control accounts (that is, for accounts for which a subledger is specified in the Control account module column).
Secured A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is included in one or more restriction groups.
Revaluation rate type The exchange rate type that should be used for the account when revaluation is performed. A value is required only for accounts denominated to a foreign currency.
Account group The account group (used in project management if the Projects workspace has been activated) that includes this account.
VAT category

A VAT category that you define for the selected account. When you create a journal transaction manually in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, based on this VAT category, the taxable amount will be calculated for the journal entry. The category selected here will be used as the default on the invoice lines with this account.

The type of the account must correspond to the type of the tax specified in the VAT category. For example: A VAT category representing a sales tax could not be associated with an expense account, and a VAT category representing value-added tax (VAT) accumulated on purchases could not be associated with an income account.
Public code 1

It is used as the standard account code in the SAF-T report for Norway ( SAF-T report (TX50600S) ) and the FIA report ( FIA report (GL40500S) for Finland.

There is no lookup here, so you have to know what code to enter.
External code 1 These are codes for free usage and you have to register values in the External codes 1 (GL20251S) window.
External code 2 These are codes for free usage and you have to register values in the External codes 2 (GL20252S) window.
Analysis code This codes for free usage and you have to register values in the BI analysis codes (GL20253S) window.
Account ID This is the unique id for the account and are used all places where there is a reference to an account in the system. This is given a value automatically.
Order of the charts of accounts

This column is filled out based on the Account type and are used in some reports and inquiries to sort and group the accounts. The values are as following: 1 = Assets, 2 = Liability, 3 = Income and 4 = Expense.

In the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window you can select the sort order for this code.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Close financial periods (GL503000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000 page You can use this window to close financial periods in the General ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (GL503000) You can use this window to close financial periods in the General ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to close financial periods in the General ledger workspace. A period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Cash management, Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will also be closed if they have not already been closed. The financial year is considered closed only when all periods of the year are closed. For more details, see: [About period-end closing procedures](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-financial-periods/about-period-end-closing-procedures/). Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. To post to closed periods, select the **Allow posting to closed periods** option in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

Note

The green OK icon appears in the form toolbar if the operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.
Unposted documents Runs and opens the Unposted general ledger documents report.
## The table This table displays the active financial periods (in a tabular format) for the earliest year that has active periods.
Column Description
Financial period ID The identifier of the financial period.
Description A description of the financial period.
Active A check box that, if selected, indicates that the financial period is active.
Closed in supplier ledger

A read-only check box that, if selected, indicates that the financial period is closed in the Supplier ledger workspace; if the check box is cleared, it indicates that the period is active in the Supplier ledger workspace.

To close a period in the Close financial periods (AP506000) window. For details see: About period-end closing procedures.
Closed in customer ledger

A read-only check box that, if selected, indicates that the financial period is closed in the Customer ledger workspace; if the check box is cleared, it indicates that the period is active in the workspace.

To close a period in the Customer ledger workspace, use the Close financial periods (AP506000) window.
Closed in inventory

A read-only check box that, if selected, indicates that the financial period is closed in the Inventory workspace; if the check box is cleared, it indicates that the period is active in the Inventory workspace.

To close a period in the Inventory workspace, use the Close financial periods (AP506000) window.
Closed in cash management

A read-only check box that, if selected, indicates that the financial period is closed in the Cash management workspace; if the check box is cleared, it indicates that the period is active in the Cash management workspace.

To close a period in the Cash management workspace, use the Close financial periods (AP506000) window.
Closed in fixed assets

A read-only check box that, if selected, indicates that the financial period is closed in the Fixed assets workspace; if the check box is cleared, it indicates that the period is active in the Fixed assets workspace.

To close a period in the Fixed assets workspace, use the Close financial periods (AP506000) window.
### Parent topic [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Column sets (CS206020) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020 page To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Column sets (CS206020) To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. A column set defines the columns to be included in the report and the data to be displayed in each column, as described in [Column sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/column-sets/column-sets-overview/). This window, which is part of the Analytical report manager, displays the column sets defined for the analytical reports. You can view or modify existing column sets, create new column sets, and delete any column sets. For each column set, add the columns to be included in the analytical report and define the properties for each column. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Copy column set

Initiates the copying of the selected column set configuration.

If you click this button, you type the new column set code in the New column set code dialogue box that opens.
## The top part This area of the window displays basic information about the column set. You can define a new column set, or you can look up an existing one by selecting its code or using actions on the window toolbar.
Element Description
Code The unique code used to identify the column set. You can use up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
Type

The data source of the column set. Select one of the following options:

General ledger
The General ledger workspace is used as the data source.
Project
The Projects workspace is used as the data source.
Description The descriptive name of the column set.
## The upper table This area displays the headers defined for the columns and their properties, which you can modify. You can add or delete a header for a single column or a selected column range. The column headers are displayed in the table and can be modified.
Button Description
Shift left Shifts the selected cell value to the left.
Shift right Shifts the selected cell value to the right.
Shift down Shifts the selected cell value down.
Shift up Shifts the selected cell value up.
Copy style Copies the printing style from a header to use it in another header.
Paste style Pastes the printing style copied from another header.
Element Description
Height The height of the header line (in pixels).
Printing group The printing group to which the header is applied. When you specify a printing group for a header, the header will be printed for only the columns in the defined printing group.
Formula

The formula that defines the header name and printing style selected for the range of columns. To specify the header name, you can use text or formulas.

You click the selector in this field to view the Formula dialog box. To specify a formula, enter it in this field. For more information about formulas, see: About formulas.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
### The Formula dialog box You use the **Formula** dialog box, which you invoke by clicking the selector in the **Formula** field, to define the text of the header. This dialog box has the following elements:
Element Description
Column range The column range for which the header is displayed. Enter the first and last column names in these fields.
You use the Style section of the dialog box to define the printing style for the column range.
Text align

The alignment of the text to be displayed for the range of columns. You can select one of the following options:

Not set
There is no specific text alignment.
Left
The text is left-aligned.
Centre
The text is centred.
Right
The text is right-aligned.
Colour The colour to be used for the range of columns.
Background colour The background colour used for the range of columns.
Font The name of the font to be used for the range of columns.
Font size The font size to be used for the range of columns. Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
Bold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the text displayed in the range of columns will be in bold type.
Italic A check box that indicates (if selected) that the text displayed in the range of columns will be italicised.
Strikeout A check box that indicates (if selected) that the text displayed in the range of columns will have the strikeout font style applied to it.
Underline A check box that indicates (if selected) that the text displayed in the range of columns will be underlined.
## The lower table The lower table displays in a tabular format the columns included in the column set and their properties, which can be modified. You can add a column to the column set or delete a column from the set.
Button Description
Shift left Shifts the selected cell value to the left.
Shift right Shifts the selected cell value to the right.
Copy style Copies the printing style from a header to use it in another header.
Paste style Pastes the printing style copied from another header.
Column Description
Description

The descriptive name of the column.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Type The column type, which defines how the values in the column are calculated.
Value

The value to be displayed in the column. You can create a formula to define the value.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Rounding

The rounding rule, which the system uses to round the values in the corresponding columns of the report. Select one of the following values:

No rounding
The value is not rounded in the report.
Whole currency unit
The system rounds the value to an integer. (€1,117,559,400.58 is rounded to €1,117,559,400.)
Thousands
The system truncates the last three digits of the value (before the decimal point) and rounds the number to an integer portion and one decimal place. (€1,117,559,400.58 is rounded to €1,117,559.4.) Thus, the values in the selected column of the report will be considered thousands.
Whole thousands
The system truncates the last three digits of the value (before the decimal point) and rounds the number to an integer value. ( €1,117,559,400.58 is rounded to €1,117,559.) Thus, the values in the selected column of the report will be considered thousands.
Millions
The system truncates the last six digits of the value (before the decimal point) and rounds the number to an integer portion and one decimal place. (€1,117,559,400.58 is rounded to €1,117.6.) Thus, the values in the selected column of the report will be considered millions.
Whole millions
The system truncates the last six digits of the value (before the decimal point) and rounds the number to an integer value. ( €1,117,559,400.58 is rounded to €1,118.) Thus, the values in the selected column of the report will be considered millions.
Billions
The system truncates the last nine digits of the value (before the decimal point) and rounds the number to an integer portion and one decimal place. (€1,117,559,400.58 is rounded to €1.1.) Thus, the values in the selected column of the report will be considered billions.
Whole billions
The system truncates the last nine digits of the value (before the decimal point) and rounds the number to an integer value. ( €1,117,559,400.58 is rounded to €1.) Thus, the values in the selected column of the report will be considered billions.

The selected rounding rule is applied to all column cells except those whose rows contain the RoundingDiff() function in the formulas. The values of such cells will be rounded by the rows’ formulas.
Format

The format used to convert the data selected from the data source to the string value used in the printed report. You can use C# data conversion functions to convert data to string values.

  • #,##0.00 format an amount column with 2 decimals
  • #,##0% format for a calculation and add % in the end
Width The column width (in pixels).
Auto height A check box that, if selected, adjusts the height of the cell in the selected column. You can use this attribute when you need to move a long string of text to the next line inside the cell.
Extra space The extra space added to the column (in pixels).
Hide empty A check box that, if selected, prevents the printing of empty columns.
Hide zero A check box that, if selected, prevents the printing of zero values in the row.
Hide line A check box that, if selected, prevents the printing of empty lines.
Printing group

The printing group to include the column.

If you specify a printing group, the data from these columns will be printed only in the rows that have the same Column group value as the value defined here.
Unit group The unit group that includes the row.
Printing control

The way the column will be printed, which is one of the following:

Print
The column will be printed in the report.
Hidden
The column will be hidden from the report and used only to store some values.
Merge next
The column will be merged with the next one in the report.
Visible formula

The formula that defines the conditions of visibility of a column in the generated report.

For details, see: Column attributes.
Page break A check box that indicates (if selected) that a page break should be inserted after the column in the printed report.
Style

The printing style to be used for this data row. The printing style parameters are defined in the Style dialog box, which you invoke by clicking the selector in this field.

For this lookup description, see the Style parameters section of Printing styles.
Data source

The source of the data to be displayed in the column.

Used to limit content based on Ledger, Account, Subaccount, Period, Offset period, Unit set, Amount type.

Mostly used for offset periods and budget columns.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Consolidation (GL103000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000 page The parent company uses this form to set up consolidation with its consolidation units or subsidiaries. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Consolidation (GL103000) The parent company uses this form to set up consolidation with its consolidation units or subsidiaries. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The parent company uses this form to set up consolidation with its consolidation units or subsidiaries. The system uses the information provided on this form to import consolidation data from the consolidation units. For more detailed information, see: [General ledger consolidation overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-consolidations/general-ledger-consolidation-overview/). This window is available only if the **General ledger consolidation** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Synchronise Synchronises the data for the selected consolidation units or imports the list of ledgers from the units. In the unit or subsidiary, these ledgers should be marked as Consolidation source in the Ledgers (GL201500) window.
Synchronise all Synchronises the data for all consolidation units.
## The top part In this area, you can select a consolidation segment by a number that defines the position of the segment in the segmented key.
Element Description
Consolidation segment number

The ID of a segment in the subaccount segmented key of the parent company.

You reserve this subaccount segment for identifying a subsidiary once the consolidation process is performed. The system inserts a specified subaccount segment value of a subsidiary to this segment.

The appropriate segment values are specified for each required subsidiary in the Consolidation segment value column of the current window.

Note that the consolidation segment is not involved in mapping because the subsidiary does not contain such a segment in its subaccounts.
## The table In this table, you can select different ledgers and particular branches in the parent company to consolidate data of different types from the consolidation units or from specific branches of those units. For example: Use one ledger for actual data and another for budget data.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the ledger is active.
Consolidation company The name of the consolidation company.
Consolidation branch The branch of the consolidating company to which the data will be imported.
Consolidation ledger The ledger (of the Actual type) to hold the imported records from the consolidation unit or units.
Consolidation unit The description of the consolidation unit.
Username The username to be used to sign in to the Visma Net website of the consolidation unit.
Password The password associated with the user name.
URL The address of the consolidation unit website.
Source ledger

The ledger of the consolidation unit that should be used as a data source for consolidation.

The list of ledgers appears after you click Synchronise on the window toolbar.
Source branch The branch of the consolidation unit.
From period The period starting which the data should be imported.
To period The last period for which the data should be imported.
Last post period

A read-only value that displays the financial period of the last consolidation.

The value is updated each time a consolidation has been performed.
Last consolidation date A read-only value showing the date of the last consolidation.
Bypass account/sub. validation A check box that, if selected, indicates that account and subaccount validation should be bypassed.
Consolidation segment value The segment value used to identify the consolidation unit. This value will be inserted to the specified segment (in the Consolidation segment number field) of the parent’s company subaccount during the consolidation process if the Paste segment value check box is selected.
Paste segment value A check box that indicates (if selected) that the consolidation segment value is added to the specified subaccount segment of the parent company during the consolidation process.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) [Import consolidation data (GL509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000/) Edit account information (GL50506S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/edit-account-information-gl50506s section In this window, a financial administrator can correct the account class and account type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit account information (GL50506S) In this window, a financial administrator can correct the account class and account type. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, a financial administrator can correct the account class and account type. The results of the correction are displayed in the [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) window. Changes to account classes and types are always logged, so that you can see who has done the changes. Note: Other users must not enter transactions in the system while you edit the account type and validate the account history. Some posted batches might not be included in the account history, but they will be included when you run the validation again. ## The top part
Button Description
Process Click Process to make your changes take effect.
## The table The icons in the table are standard icons. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add the account you want to make changes to.
Element Description
Account The account you want to make changes to.
Current account class The current account class.
New account class The account class you want to change the current account class to.
Current account type The current account type.
New account type

The account type you want to change to. There are four account types to choose from:

  • Asset
  • Liability
  • Income
  • Expense
Active If this check box is selected, the account is an active account. You cannot change the preference for this check box in this window.
Description The description of the account.

Related pages

Concepts

 Export/import settings (CS10200S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/export-import-settings-cs10200s page Here you define export or import scenarios for VAT reporting and the FIA report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export/import settings (CS10200S) Here you define export or import scenarios for VAT reporting and the FIA report. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It is only the Governmental general ledger reporting scenario that is in use. ## The Government settings tab ### The VAT reporting section
Element Description
VAT reporting scenario

Select the VAT reporting scenario you want to use for export/import of VAT.

It is mandatory to enter a value. Use the default Export VAT Scenario.
### The Governmental general ledger reporting section
Element Description
Governmental general ledger reporting scenario

Select the governmental general ledger reporting scenario you want to use.

It is mandatory to have a value, so use the default FIA Reporting Export Scenario. Others will affect the output of the file created.

It is used in the FIA report (GL40500S) window. On the export, this value which is selected here is used as a scenario name in the exported report.

Related pages

Concepts

 External codes 1 (GL20251S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/external-codes-1-gl20251s page This code is used in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window and must be defined here first. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # External codes 1 (GL20251S) This code is used in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window and must be defined here first. For more information: [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It can then be used as a filter or a summary in general inquiries or APIs, to sort or summarise general ledger transactions. There are two internal reports that contain this column: + [Transactions with external codes (GL63304S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-with-external-codes-gl63304s/) + [Balance with external codes (GL63201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-with-external-codes-gl63201s/) The table
Column Description
External code The ID of the external code, max. 10 characters.
Description The description of the external code.

Related pages

Concepts

 External codes 2 (GL20252S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/external-codes-2-gl20252s page This code is used in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window and must be defined here first. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # External codes 2 (GL20252S) This code is used in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window and must be defined here first. For more information: [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It can then be used as a filter or a summary in general inquiries or APIs, to sort or summarise general ledger transactions. There are two internal reports that contain this column: + [Transactions with external codes (GL63304S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-with-external-codes-gl63304s/) + [Balance with external codes (GL63201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-with-external-codes-gl63201s/) The table
Column Description
External code The ID of the external code, max. 10 characters.
Description The description of the external code.

Related pages

Concepts

 Financial periods (GL201000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000 page By using this window, you can generate financial periods for a new financial year, activate a financial period, or delete a financial period that has no transactions posted. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Financial periods (GL201000) By using this window, you can generate financial periods for a new financial year, activate a financial period, or delete a financial period that has no transactions posted. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can generate financial periods for a new financial year, activate a financial period, or delete a financial period that has no transactions posted. You can also view the status of a period in the Customer ledger, Supplier ledger and General ledger workspaces. By default, when you open this window, it displays the data of the current year. To initially configure a financial year and its periods, use the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
Generate periods Generates financial periods for the specified year in accordance with the settings in the Financial year (GL101000) window. If a new financial year has just been activated, all financial periods will be generated. If some of the financial periods for the current year had been generated earlier, only the rest of the periods for this year will be generated.
Reopen period

Open a dialog where you can select what workspace you want to reopen. The General ledger will always be reopened if it is closed when you select another workspace.

The dialog:

This will open the general ledger and other selected workspaces for the chosen and subsequent periods.

Reopen from period PP-YYYY

  • General ledger
  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Cash management
  • Inventory management
  • Fixed assets

If you try to reopen a period in which all workspaces are open, you will get the message Financial Period ‘09-2024’ is already opened.
Add year before the first Adds a financial year before the currently first year, for which you can then generate financial periods. The button is displayed if you have clicked the Shift the first year button in the Financial year (GL101000) window.
## The top part In this area, you can add a new financial year or select an existing year to view its periods.
Element Description
Financial year The financial year. To view a past year, select it from the list of financial years. To open a new year, type it directly into the field.
Start date A read-only field that displays the date when the financial year starts.
Number of periods A read-only field that specifies the total number of periods in the year.
User defined periods

A check box that you select to enable modification of the periods of the current year.

You can edit the end dates of periods; the start dates of the periods will adjust automatically. If, after modification of the periods, the last period ends on a different date than the financial year does, when you save your changes, the system opens the Update financial year dialog box where you can select a method to update the end of the year.

You can select one of the following options:

Modify start date of the next year:
To move the start date of the next financial year to the end of the last period.
Modify financial year settings:
To modify the settings of the financial year to make the last period end when the year ends.
Extend the last period:
To extend the last period so that it will include the end of the year.

Also, you can select whether to move the start date of a financial period to another day of the week.
You can also select whether to move the start date of a financial period to another day of the week. ## The table In this table, you can view the list of financial periods for the selected financial year. The total number of periods and their start and end dates are defined in the [Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/) window. You can modify the financial periods for the current financial year if needed. To do this, select the User-defined periods check box. You can only change the last financial year; if next year is created, you can delete this if there are no transactions. You cannot delete a financial period if journal transactions associated with the period are released. When you have selected **User-defined periods** and are working on setting up the year, the financial periods must have consecutive numbers; that is why each time you want to delete a period, you can delete only the last period. Later, you can add missing periods when they are needed. NOTE: Modifying financial periods is highly inadvisable because it will cause errors in all budgets and reports that compare data from two or more successive years.
Column Description
Period no. The two-digit unique ID of the period within a financial year. This number, automatically generated by the system, represents the order of the period: 01 is the first period, 02 is the second period, and so forth.
Period The unique ID of the financial period. The value is automatically generated by the system as a combination of the financial year and the period number.
Start date The date when the financial period starts. This date is automatically calculated based on the settings provided in the Financial year (GL101000) window.
End date The date when the financial period ends. This date, too, is automatically calculated based on the settings provided in the Financial year (GL101000) window.
Length (days) The length of the period in days. This column is available only if the User defined periods check box is selected.
Description

The description of the financial period (such as the name of the month or the number of the quarter). This value is set in the Financial year (GL101000) window but can be overwritten.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Adjustment period

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the adjustment period is active and available for posting adjustment transactions.

This column is available only if the User defined periods check box is selected.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the period can be used for posting transactions. Open but inactive periods can be used only for budgets.
Closed in Supplier ledger A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is closed in the Supplier ledger workspace; if this check box is cleared, the period is active in the Supplier ledger workspace.
Closed in Customer ledger A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is closed in the Customer ledger workspace; if this check box is cleared, the period is active in this workspace.
Closed in Inventory management A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is closed in the Inventory workspace; if this check box is cleared, the period is active in the workspace.
Closed in General ledger A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is closed in the General ledger workspace; if this check box is cleared, the period is active in the General ledger workspace.
Closed in Cash management A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is closed in the Cash management; if this check box is cleared, the period is active in this workspace.
Closed in Fixed assets A read-only check box that indicates (if selected) that the financial period is closed in the Fixed assets workspace; if this check box is cleared, the period is active in the Fixed assets workspace.
Reopened by user This field contains the username of the last user who reopened the period.
Reopened date/time This field contains the last date and time the reopening was done.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Close financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Financial year (GL101000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000 section You can use this window for the initial configuration of your company's specific financial year and financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Financial year (GL101000) You can use this window for the initial configuration of your company's specific financial year and financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Setting up financial periods is one of the first tasks you need to accomplish when you configure Visma Net for your company. You can set up any configuration of financial periods, including periods based on months, periods based on weeks, or custom periods of arbitrary durations. A financial year whose periods are based on weeks or have custom lengths will have a variable length. By default, the same configuration will be used for all subsequent years. If you have configured the wrong year, you can delete it by clicking **![icon-delete](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete.png)** in the window toolbar. This operation is available only if there are no financial periods generated for this year in the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Generate periods

Generates a period template based on which you generate the financial periods for a financial year in the Financial periods (GL201000) window.

A periods template can be generated for the periods of the Month, Two months, and Quarter types (specified in the Period type field), and for the custom periods (the Custom number of periods option specified in the Period type field).

The system does not support automatic period generation for periods based on weeks.
Shift the first year

Shifts the company’s first year to one year earlier.

After clicking this button, you can add a new financial year and generate periods for it by using the Financial periods (GL201000) window.
## The top part The top part of the window contains information about the financial year and financial periods. For more details on different types of periods, see: [About the financial year and financial periods](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/set-up-a-financial-year/about-the-financial-year-and-financial-periods/).
Column Description
First financial year The first year your company wants to keep records in Visma Net. If you want to start recording operations at the very beginning of the financial year and post beginning balances for the accounts, specify the previous year in this field and post balances for its last period.
Start financial year The start date of the financial year (and the first financial period of the year).
Belongs to next year A check box that indicates (if selected) that the start date of the year belongs to the next financial year. Select this option if the next financial year starts in the current year, as with a 2021 financial year that starts on September 15, 2020.
Period type

The type of financial periods that make up the year. The following options are available:

Month
Each of the financial periods lasts one month (12 periods per year).
Two months
Each of the financial periods has a duration of two months (six periods per year).
Quarter
Each of the financial periods lasts a quarter-year, or three months (four periods per year).
Week
Each of the financial periods lasts one week (52 or 53 periods per year). For instructions, see: Configure week-based financial periods.
Two weeks
Each of the financial periods lasts two weeks (26 or 27 periods per year).
Four weeks
Each of the financial periods has a duration of four weeks (13 or 14 periods per year).
4-4-5 weeks
The financial year is divided into four quarters, and each quarter includes two four-week periods and a five-week period.
4-5-4 weeks
The financial year is divided into four quarters, and each quarter includes a four-week period, a five-week period, and a four-week period.
5-4-4 weeks
The financial year is divided into four quarters, and each quarter includes the following periods: a five-week period and two four-week periods.
Custom number of periods
The financial year is divided into a user-defined number of financial periods. Once you specify the number in the Number of financial periods field, the system generates the periods, and you will be able to adjust the their lengths.
Periods start day of week

The day of the week when each period starts.

Note: This setting is available only for period types based on weeks.
First period start date Read-only. The date on which the first period starts.
Adjust to period start

A check box that you select to align the start and end dates of financial periods with the start and end dates of the corresponding calendar period.

This option is enabled for the following period types:

  • Month
  • Two months
  • Quarter

For example, with this option selected:

  • If the financial year’s start date is March 10 and the period type is Monthly, the first period will start on March 1.
  • If the period type is Quarterly, the first period will start on January 1.
  • If this option were not selected in either case, then the first period would start on March 10 (as the financial year does).
Number of financial periods

This field is available only for period types based on months and for the Custom number of periods option.

The total number of financial periods within a financial year. With custom-length periods (or a custom number of periods), this setting defines the required number of financial periods. Otherwise, it displays the number of periods, which the system calculates automatically based on the period type.
Use adjustment period

A check box that causes the system (if selected) to generate an adjustment period or an additional period for posting adjustments. The adjustment period will have the same start and end date and will be the last period in the financial year.

The adjustment period does not appear by default for any date; in the lookup boxes for selecting document dates, you have to select it manually.
Length of financial period This field is available only for period types expressed in weeks. The length of periods for the selected period type.
Year-end calculation method

Note: This field is available only for week-long periods.

The method used to determine the end of the year for week-long periods. You can select one of the following options:

Last day of the financial year
To add an additional (fifty-third) week-length period if the last period ends four or more days earlier than the financial year ends. If the last period ends fewer than four days earlier, no additional period will be added.
Include last <Day of week> of the financial year
To add an additional (fifty-third) week-length period only if the specific day of week (which is the last in the financial year) is not included in the last period.
Include <Day of week> nearest to the end of financial year
To set the year end so that its last period includes the specific day of week that is nearest to the end of the financial year. An additional (fifty-third) period will be added if the specific day of week is closer to the end of the year than to the end of the last period.

For these options, <Day of the week> is the day of the week selected in the Day of week field.
Day of week (This field is available only for period types expressed in weeks.) The specific day of the week to be used with the Year end calculation method option. By default, the <Day of week> is the day of the week on which each week-length financial period ends.
## The table This table contains information about the start and end date of each financial period, based on your specifications in the top part. For the **Custom number of periods** type of periods, you can define periods of arbitrary length by selecting the end date for each period—the start date of the next period will adjust automatically.
Column Description
Period no. The number of the financial period. The system automatically generates these numbers for periods.
Start date The start date of the period. For the first period, the date is calculated automatically based on the Financial year starts on value. For each successive period, the start date is calculated based on the end date of the previous period.
End date The date the financial period ends. This date is calculated automatically, based on the start date of the period and its duration.
Description

A description of the financial period (such as the name of the month or the number of the quarter). For financial periods based on months, the descriptions are populated automatically but can be overwritten.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [gl201000-ref.html](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) [Close financial periods (GL503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-gl503000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 General ledger account access (GL104000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of accounts and subaccounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users, accounts, or subaccounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger account access (GL104000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of accounts and subaccounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users, accounts, or subaccounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also use the [Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-general-ledger-account-gl104020/) and [Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-subaccount-gl104030/) windows to manage the visibility of accounts and subaccounts to users, but you cannot create restriction groups on these windows. > [!CAUTION] > By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, > and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to > the restricted entities. > It is recommended that you carefully configure restriction groups > that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in > different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash > accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Accounts tab On this tab, you can view the list of general ledger accounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Account Read-only. The account that can be included in the restriction group.
Type Read-only. The account type, which can be Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Account class Read-only. The account class to which this account belongs.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the account.
Currency Read-only. The account currency, for a currency-denominated account.
## The Subaccounts tab By using this tab, you can view the list of subaccounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group. This tab is displayed on the window when the **By segmented key** mode is selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key.
Column Description
Subaccount The subaccount to be included in the restriction group. You can click the subaccount to open the Subaccounts - reference information window.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the subaccount.
## The Subaccount segments tab By using this tab, you can view the list of subaccount segment values by the segment ID defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group. This tab is displayed on the window when the **By segment: All avail. segment values** mode is selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window for the **SUBACCOUNT** segmented key.
Element Description
Segment ID The ID of the subaccount segment. When you select a value in this field, in the Segment values table, the system displays the list of the segment values that correspond to this ID.
Column Description
Segment value The value of the subaccount segment to be included in the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount segment is active.
Description Read-only. The description of the subaccount segment.

Related pages

Concepts

 General ledger numbering (GL107000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-numbering-gl107000 section This window contains the list of transaction codes available in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger numbering (GL107000) This window contains the list of transaction codes available in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can add new codes by clicking the ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) icon. ## The table
Element Description
Numbering code The numbering code for the general ledger number series, max. 5 digits.
Numbering ID The numbering ID of the number series, which you can select by clicking the icon-select icon.

Related pages

Concepts

 General ledger preferences (GL102000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000 page You use this window to assign numbering sequences and special accounts used in the General ledger workspace and to select the document processing options. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger preferences (GL102000) You use this window to assign numbering sequences and special accounts used in the General ledger workspace and to select the document processing options. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Number series section
Element Description
Batch number series A number series assigned to batches.
Import number series A number series assigned to imports of trial balances.
Schedule number series A number series assigned to schedules.
Allocation number series

A number series assigned to allocations.

This field is available only if the Allocation templates check box is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Document batch number series A number series assigned to batches of documents that users have entered in the General ledger workspace by using the Journal vouchers (GL304000) window.
Reconciliation setting ID A number serie assigned to the Setting ID for the Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S) window.
Reconciliation number series A number series assigned to Reference no. in the Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) window.
Reuse reference numbers in Journal vouchers

A check box that, if selected, indicates that reference numbers for documents created by using the Journal vouchers (GL304000) window are reused in case the number was allocated for the document that was not saved (thus, not created), or the reference number was allocated for a deleted document.

This check box is available if the Journal voucher check box is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Public code digit rule

A setting for the number of digits for the SAF-T standard account code.

For the Norwegian SAF-T report only the values 2 or 4 are valid.
## The Chart of accounts settings
Element Description
Year to date net income account A special general ledger account the system maintains. You must create the account by using the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window before you specify the account here. Once specified, the account can be replaced by another one as long as no journal transactions were posted to it.
Retained earnings account A special account the system maintains. You must create the account by using the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window before you specify the account here. Once specified, the account can be replaced by another one as long as no journal transactions were posted to it.
Sign for trial balance

The option that defines how the balances of the liability and income accounts are represented in the trial balance. The following options are available:

Normal
The credit balances for liability and income accounts are displayed with the plus sign, the debit balances with the minus sign. The Year to date net income account is included in the trial balance. In the trial balance of this type, the total balance of all asset accounts is equal to the total balance of all liability accounts.
Reversed
The credit balances of liability and income accounts are displayed with the minus sign, the debit balances with the plus sign. The Year to date net income account is excluded from the trial balance. In the trial balance of this type, the total balance of all accounts is equal to zero.

You need to specify an appropriate option before importing the trial balance to Visma Net depending on the type of the trial balance to be imported.
Webhook notifications When this check box is selected and saved, the View notification feedback button appears in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window. You will now be notified regarding changes on the account.
### The Chart of accounts order section The option button that you select in this section defines the order of accounts on the general ledger reports. The following option buttons are available.
Button Description
1:Assets 2:Liabilities 3:Income and Expenses The system generates GL reports that have accounts listed in the following order: assets accounts, liabilities accounts, and then income and expense accounts are shown in mixed order, sorted by the account ID.
1:Assets 2:Liabilities 3:Income 4:Expenses The system generates GL reports that have accounts listed in the following order: assets accounts, liabilities accounts, income accounts, and expense accounts. Within each section, the accounts are sorted according to the account ID.
1:Income 2:Expenses 3:Assets 4:Liabilities The system generates GL reports that have accounts listed in the following order: income accounts, expenses accounts, assets accounts, and finally liabilities accounts. Within each section, the accounts are sorted according to the account ID.
1:Income and Expenses 2:Assets 3:Liabilities The system generates GL reports that have accounts listed in the following order: income and expenses accounts are shown in mixed order, then assets accounts and finally liabilities accounts. Within each section, the accounts are sorted according to the account ID.
Custom chart of accounts order You specify the order of accounts manually by using the Chart of accounts order column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window. In this column, you specify the number that indicates the order in which the account appears in the list of all accounts in the general ledger reports.
## The SIE settings section
Element Description
Target for SIE import Select where the SIE files will be imported: To workbooks or to journal transactions.
## The Posting settings section
Element Description
Generate reversing entries

The option that indicates when the system generates reversing batches: On period closing or On post.

The On period closing cannot be selected if you want to revalue supplier/customer accounts in the currency management module (windows Revalue supplier accounts (CM504000) and Revalue customer accounts (CM505000) ).
Automatically post on release A check box that indicates (if selected) that transaction posting upon release is allowed. This simplifies batches processing. No batches with an Unposted status will be generated.
Allow posting to closed periods

A check box that indicates (if selected) that transaction posting to closed financial periods is allowed. Closed periods do not appear in the data entry windows on the list of financial periods, so the users have to type in the period directly.

If this check box is not selected, an error message will appear if the user attempts to post or enter transactions into a closed financial period.
Generate consolidated batches

A check box that indicates (if selected) that on the release of multiple documents in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, and Inventory workspaces, documents are grouped by branch, posting period, and currency, and the batches are generated on a per-group basis rather than on a per-document basis.

If this check box is not selected, then for each document released in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, and Inventory workspaces, a separate batch is generated in the General ledger workspace.
Automatically release reclassification batches A check box that indicates (if selected) that Reclassification transactions will be posted automatically upon the release.
Allow reversing batches from other workspaces A check box that indicates (if selected) that is possible to reverse batches from other workspaces in the General ledger workspace.
## The Data entry section
Element Description
Hold batches on entry A check box that indicates (if selected) that when new batches are saved, they have the On hold status by default.
Hold vouchers on entry

This check box is only available when the Journal voucher check box is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

If you select this check box, then when new vouchers are saved, they have the On hold status by default.
Validate batch control totals on entry

A check box that indicates (if selected) that batch control totals will be validated: The users will have to enter the batch control total before they save the batch in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.

If the check box is not selected, validation will be performed only when the user deselect the Hold batches on entry check box for a batch, and unbalanced batches may be saved as drafts.
Require voucher entry codes on journal transactions

This field is available only if the VAT entry from general ledger and the Journal voucher check boxes are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the voucher entry code is required when you add VAT-related journal transactions in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.
Require ref. nos. for general ledger documents with VAT

This check box is only available when the Journal voucher check box is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

If this check box is selected, the Ref.no. column in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window is automatically populated, with the next available number from the assigned numbering which you find in the Last number column in the Number series (CS201010) window.
Default subaccount A subaccount to be used as the default subaccount with accounts for which the Use default subaccount option is selected in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.
## The Rounding settings section The accounts and subaccounts specified here are used for recording rounding gains and losses of the base currency. To start recording rounding gains and losses, you need to select the **Invoice rounding** check box in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and set up the rounding rules and the precision. For details, see: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/). Also, rounding gains and losses may occur when the amounts calculated are rounded in accordance with the currency precision if the **Multi-currency accounting** check box is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Rounding gain account The account to which gains resulted from rounding in the base currency will be posted.
Rounding gain subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such gains.
Rounding loss account The account to which losses resulted from rounding in the base currency will be posted.
Rounding loss subaccount The corresponding subaccount for such losses.
Rounding limit The limit that a user specifies to prevent the release of the documents with the unacceptable rounding difference. That is, the difference between the rounded and original document amount. The limit is defined in the base currency and may have 0 or a positive value.
## The ARM report settings section
Element Description
Use From branch filter to get only the selected branch When this check box is selected, you can use the filter for From branch to report a single branch.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) [Account classes (GL202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-classes-gl202000/) [Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/) [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Generate recurring transactions (GL504000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-gl504000 page In this window, you run a schedule or multiple schedules that the system uses to automatically generate recurring general ledger transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions (GL504000) In this window, you run a schedule or multiple schedules that the system uses to automatically generate recurring general ledger transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you run a schedule or multiple schedules that the system uses to automatically generate recurring general ledger transactions. The schedules to be processed are filtered by the date that you specify in the **Execution date** field. You also need to specify the condition on which the system will stop running the schedules. Each time a schedule is processed, the system updates the **Last executed on** date. No batches can be generated ahead of time, but you can generate missing batches for previous due dates by running the schedule for each skipped due date. For details, see: [Generate recurring transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/generate-recurring-transactions/). The system generates recurring transactions by using the original transactions as templates with transaction dates set according to the schedules. No matter how many times a schedule is run, batches will be generated only as required by the schedule settings. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run Runs the schedules you have selected in the table by using the unlabelled check boxes.
Run all Runs all schedules in the table.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify the criteria that the system uses for selecting the schedules to be loaded to the table and determining when the schedule executions should be stopped.
Element Description
Execution date

The date that the system uses to filter the schedules to be loaded to the table. Those schedules whose Next execution date is earlier than or equal to the date specified in this field are loaded. Clear the field to display all schedules.

By default, the current business date is displayed.
Stop on execution date An option button that indicates that the date you specify in the Execution date field will be used as the date when the system stops running the schedules.
Stop after number of executions An option button that indicates that the system stops running schedules when the specified number of schedule executions have been performed. You specify the number of schedule executions in the field located near this option button.
## The table The table contains the list of active schedules that match the settings you have specified. You can select the check boxes to include schedules for processing.
Column Description
Schedule ID

The schedule’s unique ID.

By clicking the number, the system opens the Recurring transactions (GL203500) window as a dialog window; in this window, you can view the details of the selected schedule.
Description The user-defined description of the schedule.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date The expiration date for the schedule.
Executed (times) The number of times the batches attached to the schedule were generated.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule may be executed.
Next execution The date when the documents should be generated next.
Last executed The date when the documents were last generated, according to the schedule.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) [Recurring transactions (GL203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Import consolidation data (GL509000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/import-consolidation-data-gl509000 page This window is used by the parent company to import consolidation data from its consolidation units. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import consolidation data (GL509000) This window is used by the parent company to import consolidation data from its consolidation units. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window is used by the parent company to import consolidation data from its consolidation units. Data is imported for all open periods, and only data posted to the ledgers of the consolidation units after the previous consolidation is imported to the specified consolidation ledger of the parent company. For access to the unit's website and automatic importing, the system uses information provided in the [Consolidation (GL103000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/consolidation-gl103000/) window. This window is available only if the **General ledger consolidation** check box is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the process of automatically importing the consolidation data from the website of the consolidation unit.
## The table The table listing the consolidation units contains all the necessary information to import the consolidation data.
Column Description
Consolidation branch The branch of your company that consolidates the data from consolidation units.
Consolidation ledger The ledger to which all the imported records from consolidation units will be stored.
Consolidation unit The description of the consolidation unit.
Consolidation company The name of the consolidation company.
URL The web address of the consolidation unit’s website.
Source ledger The consolidation unit’s source ledger used for data import.
Source branch The branch of the consolidation unit.
Last post period A read-only field that contains the financial period of the last consolidation. The system updates this value each time consolidation is performed.
Last consolidation date The date of the last consolidation. The system updates this value each time consolidation is performed.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/inter-branch-account-mapping-gl101010 page By using this window, you can select a posting ledger for each newly added branch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010) By using this window, you can select a posting ledger for each newly added branch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Also, if the **Inter-branch transactions** functionality is activated in your system, you can specify the rules to be used to automatically balance transactions that occur between different branches in the organisation. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, for a recently added branch, you can select a posting ledger. Also, you can select a branch to define the rules to be used to automatically generate transactions for each inter-branch transaction originated in this branch.
Element Description
Originating branch The branch for which you define the rules for auto-generating transactions to balance any inter-branch transaction originating in this branch. You can select one of the existing branches that are defined in the Branches (CS102000) window.
Posting ledger The posting ledger of the Actual type for the selected branch.
## The Transaction in originating branch tab This tab is available only if the **Inter-branch transactions** functionality is activated in your system. On this tab, you can specify the rules to be used to generate balancing transactions in the originating branch or the branch that initiates an inter-branch transaction. The **originating** branch is always the branch specified in the top part of the document to be balanced, and each of the branches specified in the document lines are **destination** branches. For each destination branch, you can specify a range of accounts (or multiple ranges) and map each of these ranges to a specific offset account (and subaccount) in the originating branch. Then, if an inter-branch transaction refers to an account in one of the specified ranges in any destination branch, the system will generate a new balancing transaction in the originating branch for the respective offset account. Such offset accounts are often called **Inter-branch receivables**.
Column Description
Destination branch The branch specified in the line of the original document to be balanced.
Account from The destination branch’s account that starts the account range for mapping.
Account to The destination branch’s account that ends the account range for mapping.
Offset account The account to be used in the originating branch to offset the inter-branch transactions on the accounts of the specified range in the destination branch.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for balancing transactions in the originating branch.
## The Transaction in destination branch tab This tab is available only if the **Inter-branch transactions** functionality is activated. By using this tab, you can specify the rules to be used to generate balancing transactions in each of the destination branches. An **originating** branch is always the branch specified in the top part of the document to be balanced, and each of the branches specified in the document lines are **destination** branches. For each destination branch, you can specify a range of accounts (or multiple ranges) in the destination branch and map each of these ranges to a specific offset account (and subaccount) in the destination branch. Then, if an inter-branch transaction refers to an account in one of the specified ranges in specific destination branch, the system will generate a balancing transaction in this destination branch for the specified offset account. These offset accounts are often called **Inter-branch payables**.
Column Description
Destination branch The branch specified in the line of the original document to be balanced.
Account from The destination branch’s account that starts the account range for mapping.
Account to The destination branch’s account that ends the account range for mapping.
Offset account The account to be used in the destination branch to offset the inter-branch transactions on the accounts of the specified range.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used for balancing transactions in the destination branch.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-gl30201s page By using this window, you can reconcile your account transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Journal reconciliation (GL30201S) By using this window, you can reconcile your account transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can reconcile your account transactions. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Reconcile This will set the reconciliation on selected transactions.
Void This will void the already reconciled transactions.
## The top part ### Input section
Element Description
Reference no. The reference number of the reconciliation.
Reconciliation setting The setting of the reconciliation.
Reconciliation date The date when the reconciliation was created.
Reconciliation balance Here you enter the reconciliation balance.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the batch has the On hold status and cannot be released or posted. You can clear the check box only if the batch has total debits equal to total credits.
Description A description of the reconciliation.
### The Filter documents on section
Element Description
Load documents up to Load documents up to your selected date.
Include unposted Includes unposted documents to be reconciled.
Include reclassified Includes reclassified documents to be reconciled.
Include hidden lines Includes hidden lines.
### The Calculation section
Element Description
Beginning balance Beginning balance from previous reconciliation.
Reconciled debit The sum of the debit transactions that are check-marked.
Reconciled credit The sum of the credit transactions that are check-marked.
Difference The difference between debit and credit transactions.
## The table
Button Description
Select all Sets a check box in selected for all records displayed in the table.
Deselect all Removes the check box in selected for all records displayed in the table.
Column Description
Selected A check box that you select to indicate that the transaction is included in the reconciliation document as a reconciled one.
Account The account of the reconciliation.
Account description A description of the account
Ref. no.

The reference number of the external or internal document associated with the journal transaction. Journal entries related to the same document should have the same reference number specified.

The documents reference numbers must be specified for VAT-related journal transactions.

It is required because VAT and taxable amounts are reflected in the VAT reports only if they are linked to the corresponding documents.

If the reference number of the external document has been manually specified for a journal transaction, the document cannot be opened because it was not added to the system.
Transaction description A description of the transaction or any comments relevant to the transaction.
Transaction date The transaction date of the document associated with the journal transaction.
Debit

The debit amount of the journal entry.

You can specify only a debit or a credit amount for a single journal entry.
Credit

The credit amount of the journal entry.

Again, you can specify only a debit or a credit amount for a single journal entry.
Subaccount The subaccount of the reconciliation.
Released This check box is selected when the document is released.
Reclassified This check box is selected if this is a journal entry of the type Reclassification.
Batch no. The unique ID of the batch, which is generated by the number series assigned to batches in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Workspace

The workspace where the batch originates.

New batches can be created only for General ledger.
Orig. batch no. The number to the original general ledger batch based on which the selected Reclassification batch has been generated.
Orig. workspace The original workspace based on which the selected Reclassification batch has been generated.
Post period The period that the transaction is posted in.
Posted Status for the transaction if it is posted or not.
Hide line A check box for hiding this line for future reconciliations.
Branch The branch associated with this journal entry.
Project

The project with which this transaction line is associated, or the code indicating that this batch is not associated with any project.

The Non-project code is specified on the General information tab in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This column appears only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this transaction line is associated.

This column appears only if the Project accounting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Concepts

 Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-reconciliation-preferences-gl30200s page By using this window, you can set up the accounts by the branch you want to reconcile. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Journal reconciliation preferences (GL30200S) By using this window, you can set up the accounts by the branch you want to reconcile. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can set up the accounts by the branch you want to reconcile. You can put in several accounts for the same branch, or accounts in different branches. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part This part contains summary information about the number and description of the reconciliation setting.
Element Description
Setting ID The identifier of the reconciliation setting.
Description A description of the reconciliation setting.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the reconciliation setting is active.
## The table
Column Description
Account The account to be reconciled.
Account description The description for the account from the chart of accounts.
Branch The branch in which the account will be used for reconciliation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Journal transactions (GL301000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000 page By using this window, you can do the following: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Journal transactions (GL301000) By using this window, you can do the following: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + View batches containing journal transactions created by different system workspaces. + Directly enter journal transactions intended to update the General ledger account balances. Direct entering is allowed only in the General ledger workspace. + Create special batches for which recurring and auto-reversing journal transactions will be generated. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/general-ledger-batches/create-a-batch/) + [Reverse a batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/auto-reversing-transactions/reverse-a-batch/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates the batch release process and changes the batch status to Unposted or Posted, depending on whether the Automatically post on release option has been selected in the preferences window of the appropriate workspace.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

Reverse batch
Generates a reversing batch for the currently open batch and displays its details in the window. Enter the Control total for the reversing batch and save it.
Add to schedule
Navigates to the Recurring transactions (GL203500) window, where you can specify the schedule parameters for the batch. Once the batch is assigned to a schedule, its status changes to Scheduled. Only batches with the Balanced status can be assigned to a schedule.
Reclassify
Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, in which you can initiate the reclassification process. For details, see: About reclassifying general ledger transactions.
Reports

Includes the following menu commands you can click to generate reports:

Batch register details
Navigates to the General ledger register (detailed) (GL62100S) report, which displays the list of all the batches released and posted to the general ledger during the specified financial period. Batch details include accounts, subaccounts, currency, and amounts.
Unreleased transactions details
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (GL610500) report, which displays the list of transactions that were entered (but not released) during the specified financial period.
Reversing batches
Navigates to the Reversing batches (GL690010) report, which displays details of reversing batches.
## The top part This part contains summary information about batch transactions, such as the financial period, the posting ledger, the batch date, the workspace where the batch was created, the debit and credit totals, and the currency of the transactions.
Element Description
Workspace The workspace where the batch originates. New batches can be created only for General ledger.
Batch no. The unique ID of the batch, which is generated by the number series assigned to batches in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Status

The current status of the batch. The status defines what processing can be applied to the batch. The following options are available:

On hold
This status is usually assigned to newly created batches. Batches with the On hold status cannot be released or posted. If an On hold batch has total debits equal to the total credits, its status can be changed to Balanced once you clear the Hold check box.
Balanced
This status indicates that the debit total of the batch equals the credit total and that the batch is ready to be released or posted. A balanced batch can be modified or deleted, but changes can be saved only if the batch credit and debit totals are equal.
Scheduled
This status indicates that the batch was attached to a schedule. Scheduled batches are used as templates for generating similar general ledger batches, with the dates calculated according to the schedule settings. The batch can be scheduled if its status is Balanced. A batch with a Scheduled status can be modified, but it can be saved only if the debit and credit totals are equal.
Unposted
This status indicates a balanced batch that was released but not yet posted. Such a batch cannot be edited or deleted.
Posted
This status indicates that batch journal entries were posted or were used for updating appropriate general ledger account balances. Posted batches cannot be modified or deleted; they are available only for viewing.
Void
This status indicates that this batch is invalid and was cancelled, for example, in cases when the batch was removed from the schedule before the schedule was completed. However, because it is needed for auditing, the batch cannot be deleted.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the batch has the On hold status and cannot be released or posted. You can clear the check box only if the batch has total debits equal to total credits.
Transaction date

The date when the batch was created, which relates to the transaction dates of the journal entries as follows:

  • For a manually created batch: All journal entries included in the batch have this transaction date specified in the Transaction date column in the table.
  • For a batch generated automatically by a Visma Net workspace other than the General ledger: Each journal entry included in the batch can have its own transaction date specified in the Transaction date column of the Table area according to the transaction date specified in the corresponding workspace.
Post period

The financial period to which the transactions should be posted.

All transactions from a batch are posted to the same financial period. By default, the period is calculated based on the transaction date and the definition of financial periods, but the period can be changed. If the transaction date doesn’t match any financial period, an error message stating that the financial period is closed or does not exist in the system will appear, and you will not be able to save the batch.

The system supports posting to closed financial periods if the Allow posting to closed periods check box is selected in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window. Closed financial periods do not appear in the list of financial periods, so a closed period can be entered only manually.
Description The description of the batch.
Branch The branch to which this batch is related.
Ledger The unique ID of the ledger to which batch transactions are posted. By default, it is the default posting ledger specified for the branch in the Inter-branch account mapping window, but another posting ledger can be selected.
Currency The currency used for all the journal transactions in the selected batch. By default, it is the base currency defined for all branches in the Branches (CS102000) window.
Automatic reversing

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the batch is auto-reversing.

For such a batch, the General ledger workspace automatically creates a batch that reverses the original debit and credit transactions into the next financial period (that is, the debit entry is reversed and becomes a credit entry, and the credit entry is reversed and becomes a debit entry).

Such batches are used to reverse period-end adjustments. A reversed batch will be created when the original batch is released or posted, depending on the value selected for the Generate reversing entries option in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Reversing entry A check box that indicates (if selected) that the batch is a reversing batch. The Orig. batch number field displays the ID of the batch that was reversed by this batch.
Trans. code The code of the transaction. This field is displayed if the Journal voucher option is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Type

The type of this general ledger batch, which is specified by the system automatically. A general ledger batch can be one of the following types:

Normal
The type of general ledger batch that either you create manually in the General ledger workspace, or the system creates automatically in any workspace of Visma Net once a document is released and posted to the General ledger. For example: When you release a supplier invoice in the Supplier ledger workspace, a general ledger batch of the Normal type is generated in the General ledger workspace.
Consolidation
The type of general ledger batch generated by the system once the process of importing the data from the consolidation units to the parent company is run. For details, see: General ledger consolidation overview.
Trial balance
The type of general ledger batch generated by the system when you release the trial balance entry in the Trial balance window. For details on importing the trial balances, see: Import trial balances - overview.
Reclassification
The type of general ledger batch generated by the system when you reclassify a general ledger transaction of the Normal type. For details on the reclassification process, see: About reclassifying general ledger transactions.
Allocation
The type of general ledger batch generated by the system when the allocation process is run. For details on the allocation process, see: About allocation rules.
Orig. batch number For a scheduled or auto-reversing batch, the reference number of the batch used as a template.
Reversing batches The number of reversing batches for the selected batch. The field is not displayed if there are no reversing batches. Clicking the number navigates to the Reversing batches (GL690010) report, which displays details of reversing batches.
Debit total The total of transaction debit amounts for the batch; the value is calculated automatically.
Credit total The total of transaction credit amounts for the batch; the value is calculated automatically.
Control total The control total of the batch, which is used for batch status validation. The batch can be posted, released, or scheduled only if this amount is equal to the Debit total and Credit total amounts for the batch. To disable this control, clear the Validate batch control totals on entry check box in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Create VAT transactions

A check box that indicates (if selected) that a VAT-related transaction can be created manually; select this check box when you begin to create the transaction. When you select this check box, the VAT ID and VAT category columns appear in the table area on this window.

If this check box is selected, the Skip VAT amount validation check box appears in the top part of this window.

Note that it is not possible to enter both purchase and sales VAT in the same batch, and VAT IDs having the artially deductible VAT set cannot be used.
Skip VAT amount validation

A check box that (if selected) causes automatic validation of a VAT-related transaction that you create manually to be skipped. This check box appears only if the Create VAT transactions check box is selected in this window.

It is recommended that you leave this check box clear so the system performs VAT amount validation.

If the VAT amount validation is skipped (this check box is selected), the system does not warn you if the manually entered VAT amount does not match the taxable amount of a transaction, which may cause errors in the appropriate VAT report.
## The table The table contains the list of journal entries and their details. Each row defines one journal entry, and a single journal entry specifies only a debit or credit amount. For the batch to be posted, total credits for all journal entries in the batch must be equal to total debits.
Button Description
View source document Opens the document based on which this batch was generated. This button is active for batches originating in workspaces other than General ledger.
Reclassification history

Opens the Reclassification history window for the selected transaction.

This button is available only if a reclassified transaction is selected in the table.
Column Description
Branch The branch associated with this journal entry.
Account

The account (associated with the specified branch) whose balance will be updated by the journal entry. If an account denominated to a foreign currency is specified, all other batch transactions should be in the same foreign currency.

NOTE: The account that is specified as the Year to date net income account in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window cannot be used for direct updating by journal entries.
Description A detailed transaction description provided by a user or generated by the system.
Subaccount The subaccount used with the account to detail a journal entry.
Project The project with which this batch is associated, or the code indicating that this batch is not associated with any project. The non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences window. This column appears only if the Projects workspace has been enabled in your system and integrated with this workspace.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this batch is associated.

This column appears only if the Projects workspace has been enabled and integrated with this workspace.
Ref. no.

The reference number of the external or internal document associated with the journal transaction.

Journal entries related to the same document should have the same reference number specified.

The documents reference numbers must be specified for VAT-related journal transactions. It is required because VAT and taxable amounts are reflected in the VAT reports only if they are linked to the corresponding documents.

If the reference number of the external document has been manually specified for a journal transaction, the document can only be opened if it originates from workspaces other than General ledger.
Quantity Optional. The quantity of items associated with the transaction, if relevant.
UoM Optional. The unit of measure for items associated with the transaction, if relevant.
Debit amount The debit amount of the journal entry. You can specify only a debit or a credit amount for a single journal entry.
Credit amount The credit amount of the journal entry. Again, you can specify only a debit or a credit amount for a single journal entry.
Transaction description A description of the transaction or any comments relevant to the transaction.
VAT ID

The VAT used to calculate the VAT amount; this column appears if the Create VAT transactions check box is selected in the top part. The VAT is entered automatically by the system when you select an account in the Account column (and the subaccount in the Subaccount column, if applicable) associated with a particular VAT.

You can overwrite the default value.

Note that a VAT ID having partially deductible VAT will not be available in this module, you have to use Purchase invoices (AP301000) or Transactions (CA304000) window.
VAT ID description The description of the VAT ID.
VAT category

The VAT category based on which the taxable amount is calculated; this column appears if the Create VAT transactions check box is selected in the top part of the window.

This VAT code is entered automatically by the system if you select an account in the Account column for which a particular VAT category has been defined in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.

You can change the default VAT code.

Note that a VATcategory having partially deductible VAT will not be available in this module, you have to use Purchase invoices (AP301000) or Transactions (CA304000) window.
VAT category description The description of the VAT category.
Non-invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that this transaction is non-invoiceable in the project. This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace.
Reclass. batch number The number of the reclassification batch that was generated for the selected general ledger transaction. This number is displayed only for a transaction that has been reclassified.
Orig. batch number The number to the original general ledger batch based on which the selected Reclassification batch has been generated.
Transaction date

The date when the transaction was generated, which the system fills in as follows:

  • For a manually created batch: This is the date of batch creation as specified in the Transaction date field in the top part of the current window.
  • For a batch generated automatically by an Visma Net workspace other than General ledger: This is the creation date that was defined for the transaction by the conventions of the functionality that generated this transaction.

The date specified in this column is used for the transaction in Visma Net reports.
Customer/Supplier The customer or supplier specified in the transaction.
Ledger The ledger for the posting.
Line no. The line number in the batch.
Item ID Shows a link to the stock or non-stock item.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Journal vouchers (GL304000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000 page By using this window, you can quickly enter a batch of miscellaneous documents from a single window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Journal vouchers (GL304000) By using this window, you can quickly enter a batch of miscellaneous documents from a single window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can quickly enter a batch of miscellaneous documents from a single window. For each document type, as determined by the transaction code defined in the [Voucher entry codes (GL106000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/voucher-entry-codes-gl106000/) window, you enter only the required information, by summary or with line details, if needed. On batch release, the system generates and releases actual documents of the specified types in the General ledger, Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, and Cash management workspaces. While adding the documents to a batch, you can apply them to payments or apply payments to them, depending on the document type. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates the batch release process and changes the batch status to Released if all listed documents have been generated and released successfully.
## The top part This part contains summary information about the batch, such as the branch originator, the batch date, the posting period, the batch debit and credit totals, and the currency of documents and transactions.
Element Description
Batch number The unique identifier of the document batch, which is generated by the numbering series assigned to document batches in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Status

The current status of the batch. The status defines what processing can be applied to the batch. The following options are available:

On hold
This status is usually assigned to newly created batches. You can add new documents to the batches with the On hold status. You can take the batch off hold only if all the included documents have all the required information.
Balanced
This status indicates that all the batch’s documents are valid or the documents have all the required information. A balanced batch can be modified or deleted, but changes can be saved only if the added documents are valid.
Released
This status indicates that all the listed documents were successfully generated.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the batch has the On hold status and cannot be released.

You can deselect the check box only if the documents included in the batch are valid (have all the required information).
Transaction date The date when the batch was created.
Post period

The financial period to which all the documents and transactions should be posted. All transactions from a batch are posted to the same financial period.

By default, the period is calculated based on the batch date and the definition of financial periods.

Nevertheless, you may specify other dates for particular documents or transactions included in the batch.
Branch The branch to which this batch is related.
Ledger The ledger to which batch transactions are posted—that is, the default posting ledger specified for the branch in the Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010) window.
Currency

The currency used for all the journal transactions in the selected batch.

By default, this is the base currency defined for all branches in the Organisations (CS101500) window. However, it is possible to select a different currency by clicking the field.
Exchange rate

The exchange rate of the document that is valid for the chosen document currency and the Transaction date as defined in the Currency rates (CM301000) window.

You can change the rate in the Rate selection dialog box which appears by clicking the exchange rate field.

View base / View currency

(button)

 By clicking this button you switch between the base currency and the foreign currency view of the document.
Description A description of the batch.
Debit total The total of the debit amounts for the batch; the value is calculated automatically.
Credit total The total of transaction credit amounts for the batch; the value is calculated automatically.
Control total

The batch’s control total, which is used for batch status validation. The batch can be posted, released, or scheduled only if this amount is equal to the Debit total and Credit total amounts.

To make this control unavailable, deselect the Validate batch control totals on entry check box under the Data entry section in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
## The Rate selection dialog box This dialog box opens once you click in the **Exchange rate** field in the top part. It shows the available currency options to use, and has the following elements.
Element Description
Currency rate type ID The rate type specified for the selected currency pair.
Effective date A certain date on which the currency rate becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents The rate and reciprocal rate for the selected currency pair
OK (button) This button saves the settings and closes the dialog box.
## The Transactions tab You use this tab to enter information about the Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, and Cash management documents and General ledger transactions required to generate appropriate documents and transactions in the respective workspaces. Once you select a document type by specifying the transaction code, the elements specific to this document type will be available, and the elements that are not used for documents of this type will be unavailable. In each row, you enter information available in the document header, and the line total (the document amount with VAT amounts included) and line subtotal (the document amount before VAT is calculated). To provide line details, select the **Split** check box in the table; this leaves the information about document header on the existing row and makes it possible to add rows with information about document lines.
Button Description
View document Opens the document generated based on information specified in this row.
Show VAT Opens the Document VAT dialog box (described below), so that you can view the list of taxes that apply to the selected document.
Column Description
Ref. no

The reference number to be used for the generated document; the number is assigned as you specify a few values for the document, and it is reserved for the document until the actual document will be generated.

This number is generated according to the number series assigned to the selected type of documents.
Trans. code

The transaction code.

User-defined transaction codes are assigned to the document types available in Visma Net in the Voucher entry codes (GL106000) window.
Transaction date The date of the document or transaction.
Customer/supplier The customer or supplier involved.
Location The location of the customer or supplier related to the transaction.
Entry type ID The entry type of the cash transaction if the selected code is associated with the Cash management workspace.
Debit account

The account that will be debited by the document or transaction amount.

The system fills in this field automatically according to the settings specified for a selected customer or supplier on the General ledger accounts tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) or the Customers (AR303000) window.

For example, on the General ledger accounts tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window the following will be used:

  • For the supplier invoice, an account specified in the Supplier ledger account field.
  • For a prepayment document, an account specified in the Prepayment account field.
Debit subaccount

The subaccount to be used for the debit journal entry.

Inserted by the system automatically cording to the settings specified for a selected supplier or customer.

You can overwrite a default value manually.
Credit account The account that will be credited by the amount of the document or transaction.
Credit subaccount The subaccount be used for the credit journal entry.
Ext. ref. number The reference number of the external document or transaction that this document is based on.
Total amount The amount of the document or transaction, including the tax total amount.
Subtotal amount The sum of the document (or transaction) details or lines.
VAT zone The VAT zone for the document, if applicable.
VAT category The VAT category of the document, if applicable.
VAT amount The amount of the VAT applicable to the document.
Split A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document or this transaction includes details specified on other rows.
Transaction description A description of the document or transaction or any comments relevant to the transaction.
Project

The project with which this transaction is associated, or the code indicating that this batch is not associated with any project.

The Non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This column appears if the Projects check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The particular task of the project with which this batch is associated.

This column appears if the Projects check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Payment method The payment method used for this document, if this document is a payment.
Terms The payment terms used for the supplier or customer associated with the document.
Due date The due date for the document, if applicable.
Cash discount date The date of the cash discount for the document if applicable.
Cash discount The amount of the cash discount for the document, if applicable.
Included VAT amount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the VAT amount is included in the document total.
Doc. total The document total.
Doc. created A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document specified by this row has been created.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document specified by this row has been released. The system releases the documents once they have been generated.
Line no. The line number of the displayed batch.
Payment message The message connected to the payment.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Payment type The type of supplier ledger payment document in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window.
### The Document VAT dialog box This dialog box opens once you click **Show VAT** on the table toolbar of the **Transactions** tab. It shows the list of VAT applicable to the selected document.
Element Description
VAT ID The VAT that applies to the selected document.
Taxable amount The amount that is subjected to the VAT.
VAT rate The VAT rate.
VAT amount The resulting amount of the VAT.
OK (button) This button closes the dialog box.
## The Outgoing payment applications tab This tab contains two tables, that you can use to apply the checks or prepayments available in the batch to the supplier ledger documents in the same batch or to documents available in the system: + The upper table displays the payments available in the batch. + The lower table you can use to select the documents to apply to the payment selected in the upper table. Make sure you saved the batch before you start applying the payments to the documents. The newly added documents will not appear on this tab until they are saved with the batch. You can enter a supplier ledger payment and apply it to an invoice or invoices also added to the same batch of documents. The batch cannot be saved as **Balanced** if it includes a check with non-zero unapplied balance. ### The table for payments available in the batch
Column Description
Trans. code The code of the supplier ledger payment document.
Ref. no The reference number of the payment document.
Transaction date The date of the payment document.
Supplier The supplier specified on the document.
Location The location of the supplier associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method used for the document.
Debit account The account that will be debited by the document amount.
Debit subaccount The subaccount used for the debit entry.
Credit account The account that will be credited by the document amount.
Credit subaccount The subaccount used for the credit entry.
Ext. ref. no The reference number of the original supplier document.
Currency The currency of the transaction.
Application amount The amount of the application.
Unapplied balance The unapplied balance of the document.
Subtotal amount The amount of the payment before taxes.
Transaction description The description of the document.
### The Documents to apply table
Column Description
Document type The type of supplier ledger document. Once you have selected the document, the value in this field cannot be edited.
Ref. no The reference number of the generated document. Once you have selected the document, the value in this field cannot be edited.
Amount paid The amount paid for this document (that is, the application amount).
Cash discount taken The amount of the cash discount taken on the document.
With. tax The tax amount withheld on the document.
Date The date of the document.
Due date The due date for the document.
Cash discount date The date until which the cash discount is available.
Balance The balance of the document after payment application.
Cash discount balance The amount of the cash discount that has not been used.
With. tax balance The balance of the tax withheld on the document.
Description The description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The financial period to post the document.
Supplier ref. The document’s original reference number as assigned by the supplier (for informational purposes).
## The Incoming payment applications tab This tab contains two tables, that you can use to apply the customer ledger payments available in the batch to the customer ledger documents available in the system: + The upper table displays the payments available in the batch. + The lower table you can use to select the documents to apply to the payment selected in the upper table. Make sure you have saved the batch before you start applying the payments to the documents. The newly added documents will not appear on this tab until they are saved with the batch. ### The table for payments available in the batch
Column Description
Trans. code The code of the customer ledger payment document.
Ref. no The reference number of the generated document.
Transaction date The date of the document.
Customer The customer specified on the payment document.
Location The location of the customer associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method used for the document.
Debit account The account that will be debited by the document amount.
Debit subaccount The subaccount used for the debit entry.
Credit account The account that will be credited by the document amount.
Credit subaccount The subaccount used for the credit entry.
Ext. ref. no The reference number of the original customer document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Application amount The amount of the application.
Unapplied balance The unapplied balance of the document.
Subtotal amount The amount of payment before taxes.
Transaction description The description of the document.
### The Documents to apply table
Column Description
Document type The type of customer ledger document. Once you have selected the document, the value in this field cannot be edited.
Ref. no The reference number of the generated document. Once you have selected the document, the value in this field cannot be edited.
Amount paid The amount paid for this document.
Cash discount taken The amount of the cash discount taken on the document.
Balance write-off The amount that has been written off.
Write-off reason code The identifier of the write-off reason code that provides a general ledger account to be updated with the write-off transaction amount.
Date The date of the document.
Due date The due date of the customer document.
Cash discount date The last date when the cash discount for the customer was available.
Balance The balance of the payment after document application
Cash discount balance The amount of the cash discount that has not been used.
Write-off limit The write-off limit allowed for the customer.
Invoice text The description of the invoice document. But also for debit/credit notes and other documents.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The financial period to post the document.
Customer order The reference number of the original customer order.
## The General ledger transactions tab This tab shows the general ledger transactions automatically generated for the documents included in the batch upon the release of these documents.
Column Description
Ref. no The reference number of the generated document.
Workspace The workspace where the document or transaction was generated.
Batch no. The reference number of the batch.
Transaction date The date of the document or transaction.
Account The account updated by the document transaction.
Subaccount The subaccount used.
Quantity Optional. The quantity of items associated with the transaction, if relevant.
Currency The currency of the transaction.
Debit amount The debit amount of the transaction.
Credit amount The credit amount of the transaction.
Transaction description The description of the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Ledgers (GL201500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500 page You use this window to enter and maintain information about financial ledgers used in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Ledgers (GL201500) You use this window to enter and maintain information about financial ledgers used in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to enter and maintain information about financial ledgers used in the system. The default posting ledger is the only built-in ledger; by using this window, you can create other ledgers when they are needed. This table lists all the ledgers available in the system. If the ledger has any transactions posted to it, you cannot delete the ledger or change its currency or ledger type. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part
Element Description
Ledger ID

An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters used to identify the ledger.

Follow your company’s internal rules when naming ledgers. The ID, once specified, cannot be changed in the future.
Description

A detailed ledger description. This alphanumeric string can be up to 30 characters.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Balance type

The type of balance in the ledger. Select one of the following predefined types:

Actual
A ledger of this type is updated through journal transaction posting. Journal transactions are organised in batches, and the double-entry bookkeeping rule is enforced for these batches. The system supports multiple actual ledgers in the General ledger workspace; however, journal transactions generated by other workspaces will be posted only to the default posting ledgers specified for each branch in the Inter-branch account mapping (GL101010) window.
Budget
A budget ledger is used to store budget information. You update this type of ledger directly in the Budget (GL302010) window. Entering journal transactions to a budget ledger is not allowed.
Reporting
A reporting ledger is used to store translated financial information. This option is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality has been activated.
Statistical
A statistical ledger is used to store statistical information. Ledgers of this type are updated through journal entries in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.
Currency The default currency of the ledger. All transactions in other currencies posted to the ledger will be converted to the base currency by using the currency rate effective on the date of transaction.
Branch accounting

A check box that you select to indicate that the system should automatically generate inter-branch transactions for this ledger to balance transactions for all branches involved.

This column is displayed only if the Inter-branch transactions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and is available for editing if the consolidated branch ( Consol. branch ) is specified.
Consolidation source

A check box that specifies, if selected, that the ledger should be used as a source ledger for consolidation. Ledgers for consolidation have the Reporting balance type if they contain information translated from the base currency.

This column is available only if the General ledger consolidation check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Organisations tab
Column Description
Company The company ID that can use this ledger.
Company name The name of the company.
Active The check box shows if the Company is active or inactive.
Organisation type
  • Without branches
  • Without branches not requiring balancing
  • With branches requiring balancing
## The Branches tab
Column Description
Branch ID The branch ID that can use this ledger registered.
Branch name The branch name.
Active The check box shows if the Branch is active or inactive.
Company name The company name this branch belongs to.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Post transactions (GL502000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000 page You can use this window to post batches of transactions (journal entries). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Post transactions (GL502000) You can use this window to post batches of transactions (journal entries). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to post batches of transactions (journal entries). When the window opens, it lists all batches with a status of **Balanced** or **Unposted**. To post selected batches, select the appropriate check boxes and click **Post** in the window toolbar; to post all the batches at once, click **Post all**. Either operation changes the status of the affected batches to **Posted**. Posted batches cannot be deleted or modified; they are available only for viewing. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Post Initiates the posting process for the selected batches.
Post all Initiates the posting process for all listed batches.
## The table This window includes a table with the list of batches that can be posted.
Column Description
Module A read-only value that specifies the workspace where the batch transactions were created.
Batch number The batch number. You can click the link to view the details of the batch.
Ledger A read-only value specifying the ledger.
Transaction date A read-only value that specifies the date of the transactions as it was entered in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.
Last modified by A read-only value indicating the last user who modified the batch.
Post period A read-only value that indicates the financial period to which the batch transactions will be posted.
Control total A read-only value showing the batch control total. It should be equal to the debit total or credit total amount.
Description The description of the batch.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Release transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-transactions-gl501000/) Reclassification history (GL405000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassification-history-gl405000 page In this window, you can view the list of transactions generated by the reclassification process for a particular original transaction. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reclassification history (GL405000) In this window, you can view the list of transactions generated by the reclassification process for a particular original transaction. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the list of transactions generated by the reclassification process for a particular original transaction. The original general ledger transaction is displayed in the first row of the table. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Reclassify Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window with the last transaction of the reclassification chain displayed.
## The table The table contains the list of general ledger transactions generated by the system during the reclassification process. The first general ledger transaction in the list is the original general ledger transaction.
Column Description
Batch number The batch number of the transaction.
Branch

The branch to which the transaction was posted.

This column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The account to which the transaction amount was posted.
Description The description of the general ledger account.
Subaccount

The subaccount to which the transaction amount was posted.

This column is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Debit amount The amount that debited the specified account (if any).
Credit amount The amount that credited the specified account (if any).
Transaction description The description of the transaction (if any).
Transaction date The date of the transaction.
Post period The financial period to which the transaction amount was posted.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Account details](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) [Account summary](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/) [Journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Reclassify transactions (GL506000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/reclassify-transactions-gl506000 page In this window, you can initiate the reclassification process of the selected transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reclassify transactions (GL506000) In this window, you can initiate the reclassification process of the selected transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can initiate the reclassification process of the selected transactions. You can load the needed transactions by specifying the required selection criteria in the **Load transactions** dialog box (which you open by clicking **Load** in the window toolbar), or the transactions already appear in the list if the system has navigated to this window from the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) or [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. A transaction is available for reclassification (the system selects the check box in the row of transaction) once you have modified any of the required parameters in its row. You can change the required parameters for each selected transaction manually by modifying settings as needed in each row, or initiate the system to change them at once by using the **Find and replace** dialog box (which you open by clicking **Replace** in the window toolbar). For details, see: [About reclassifying general ledger transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/reclassify-and-split-general-ledger-transactions/about-reclassifying-general-ledger-transactions/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Load

Opens the Load transactions dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can specify the selection criteria to load the required list of transactions to the window.
Replace

Opens the Find and replace dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can specify the original and reclassification parameters for the transactions.

This replacement will be applied to the bulk of transactions that match the specified original parameters.
Split

Inserts a row under the one you have selected, in which you can specify the parameters to be used when the system splits the transaction.

This button is available only if you have clicked the row of an entry to be split in the table of the window.
Process Initiates the reclassification process, which generates the reclassification batch.
### The Load transactions dialog box
Element Description
Branch

The branch to which the transaction was posted.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From account

The first account in the range of accounts.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its account must be within the specified range of accounts.
To account

The last account in the range of accounts.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its account must be within the specified range of accounts.
From subaccount

The first subaccount in the range of subaccounts.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its subaccount must be within the specified range of subaccounts.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
To subaccount

The last subaccount in the range of subaccounts.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its subaccount must be within the specified range of subaccounts.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The first financial period in the range of periods.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its period must be within the specified range of periods.
To period

The last financial period in the range of periods.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its period must be within the specified range of periods.
From date

The first date in the range of dates.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its date must be within the specified date range.
To date

The last date in the range of dates.

For a transaction to be uploaded to the window, its date must be within the specified date range.
Workspace

The workspace where the transaction originated.

If you select a workspace, a transaction will be uploaded to the window only if it originated in this workspace.
Batch no. The number of the batch.
Ref. no. The reference number of a document in a batch (if any).
Customer/supplier

The customer or a supplier specified in the transaction.

If you select a customer or supplier, a transaction will be uploaded to the window only if it is specified in the transaction.
Max. number of transactions

The maximum number of the records to be selected from the database.

The default value is 999. The system selects 999 records from the database that matches the criteria, applies additional filters, if needed, and displays the list of records.
Load

A button that closes the dialog box and loads transactions that match the specified criteria.

New transactions are added to the list of existing transactions (if any).
Reload A button that closes the dialog box and loads transactions that match the specified criteria. Any existing transactions listed in the window are removed, and new transactions that match the specified criteria appear.
Cancel A button that closes the dialog box and ignores any specified criteria.
### The Find and replace dialog box In this dialog box, which opens when you click **Replace** in the window toolbar, you can specify the parameters for mass updating of the rows listed in the window.
Element Description
Find
Branch

The branch of the original transaction.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The account specified in the original transaction.
Subaccount

The subaccount specified in the original transaction.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Date The date of the original transaction.
Post period The financial period to which the original transaction was posted.
Transaction description

The description of the original transaction. The system searches for the exact string that you enter in this field.

To find transactions with no descriptions, enter two quotation marks in this field. You can use the wild card characters (* or?) to perform flexible search.
Replace with
Branch

The branch which should be specified in the reclassification transaction.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The account that should be specified in the reclassification transaction.
Subaccount

The subaccount that should be specified in the reclassification transaction.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Date The date to which the reclassification transaction should be posted.
Transaction description The description of the reclassification transaction. To replace the description of the original transaction with the empty description in the reclassification transaction, enter the quotes in this field.
Replace Initiates the process of replacing the original parameters with the specified reclassification parameters in the rows of the current window.
Cancel Closes the dialog box and ignores any specified parameters.
## The table The table contains the list of journal transactions that you can reclassify or split. You can either change the required parameters in each selected transaction manually or change the same parameters in a group of transaction by using the **find and replace** functionality (the **Replace** button in the window toolbar). To split a transaction, you click the transaction, click the **Split** button in the window toolbar, and change the required parameters in the new line manually.
Column Description
Arrow icon

The arrow icon that identifies the new entry that has been added in the process of splitting the selected journal entry. Select the original entry to be split or the new entry that has been added in the process of splitting the selected journal entry.

This column appears only if you have split the selected journal entry.
Reclass. batch number

The number of the generated reclassification batch.

This column appears once the selected journal entry has been reclassified split and processed.
To branch

The branch of the reclassified transaction. This field is available for editing.

If you change this parameter, the system selects the check box to indicate that this transaction will be reclassified.

This column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
To account

The account of the reclassified or split transaction. This field is available for editing.

If you change this parameter, the system selects the check box to indicate that this transaction will be reclassified.
Description The description of the account specified in the original transaction.
To subaccount

The subaccount of the reclassified or split transaction. This field is available for editing.

If you change this parameter, the system selects the check box to indicate that this transaction will be reclassified or split.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
New trans. date

The date of the reclassified or split transaction. This column is available for editing.

For the lines of the split transaction, this column is available for editing if the branch, account, or subaccount (if applicable) has been changed in the To branch, To account, or To subaccount columns.
New transaction description

A description of the reclassified or split transaction. You can enter an appropriate description. This field is available for editing.

For the lines of the split transaction, this column is available for editing if the branch, account, or subaccount (if applicable) has been changed in the the To branch, To account, or To subaccount columns.
New amount

This column appears when you click Split for the selected journal entry and is available for editing only for the new lines that have been added when splitting the selected journal entry.

The remaining amount that can be split from the original journal entry or the amount to be transferred from the original entry to a new entry (for a new line).

For the new entries, either positive or negative values can be specified in this column. Positive amounts will decrease the amount of the original entry. Negative amounts, which are highlighted in red, will increase the amount of the original entry.
Debit amount (currency) The debit amount of the original transaction is shown in the foreign currency. This column is not available for editing.
Credit amount (currency) The credit amount of the original transaction is shown in the foreign currency. This column is not available for editing.
Currency The currency of the original transaction. This column is not available for editing.
Debit amount The debit amount of the original transaction in the base currency. This column is not available for editing.
Credit amount The credit amount of the original transaction in the base currency. This column is not available for editing.
Branch

The branch of the original transaction. This field is not available for editing.

This column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The account of the original transaction. This field is not available for editing.
Description The description of the account specified in the original transaction. This field is not available for editing.
Subaccount

The subaccount of the original transaction. This field is not available for editing.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Transaction date The date of the original transaction. This field is not available for editing.
Post period The financial period of the original transaction. This field is not available for editing.
Transaction date The description of the original transaction. This field is not available for editing.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) [Account summary (GL401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-summary-gl401000/) [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Recurring transactions (GL203500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-gl203500 page You can use this window to create and maintain scheduled batches. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (GL203500) You can use this window to create and maintain scheduled batches. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Also, you can view the details of active and completed schedules. Schedules are used to automatically generate recurring batches, such as loan-related journal entries recording monthly paid interest or principal amounts or both. A schedule defines how many times and how often specific batches should be repeated. One or several batches of the **Normal** type and the **Balanced** status can be assigned to a schedule. Once a batch is assigned to a schedule, its status changes to **Scheduled**. The system uses the original batches as templates to generate similar batches with transaction dates generated based on how you define the schedule. Only batches originated in the General ledger can be scheduled. > [!NOTE] > For user reference, you can attach to a schedule a scanned image (or electronic version) of the related contract or another document that is the basis for the schedule you have created. For more information on recurring batches, see: [About recurring journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/about-recurring-journal-transactions/) and [Schedule a recurring batch](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-transactions/recurring-journal-transactions/schedule-a-recurring-batch/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
Run now Executes the schedule.
## The top part In the top part, you can create a new schedule or select any existing schedule for editing or deleting.
Element Description
Schedule ID The ID of the schedule. The system assigns a new schedule’s unique ID in accordance with the numbering series assigned to schedules in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule is active. When the check box is cleared, the schedule cannot be used.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date The date that, if set, indicates when the schedule expires (unavailable when the Never expires check box is selected).
Never expires A check box that indicates (if selected) that no expiration date is set.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. This field is unavailable when the No limit check box is selected.
No limit A check box that indicates (if selected) that the schedule should be continued into future financial periods.
Description A description for the schedule.
Last executed A read-only field that displays the date when the batches were last generated, if applicable.
Next execution A read-only field that displays the date when the schedule should be executed next, based on the schedule parameters.
Executed (times) A read-only field whose value shows how many times the schedule was executed —that is, how many times batches were generated. A 0 here indicates that the schedule was not executed yet and no batches were generated.
Schedule type

The frequency of batch generation. The following options are available, and the time-related ones are described in detail in the next section:

Daily
The batches should be generated daily or every x days.
Weekly
The batches should be generated once a week or every x weeks.
Monthly
The batches should be generated once per month or every x months.
By financial period
The batches will be generated only once per financial period or every x financial periods.
### The Daily section Enter the parameters described below, which depend on the schedule's type.
Element Description
Every x day(s) An integer that specifies a time interval (in days) for batch generation. For example: 1 would mean every day and 2 would mean every other day, starting on the Start date.
### The Weekly section
Element Description
Every x week(s) An integer that specifies a time interval (in weeks) for batch generation, with the check boxes indicating the day of the week when the batches should be generated: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, or Saturday.
### The Monthly section
Element Description
Every x month(s) An integer that specifies a time interval (in months) for batch generation. For example: A 3 here would generate the batch every three months.
On day The day of the month for the batch.
On then th day of the week This option includes an ordinal number in the left field that specifies the week in the month, and a day of the week in the right field, such as 2nd Thursday.
### The By financial period section
Element Description
Every x period(s) An integer that specifies a time interval for batch generation, measured in financial periods.
Start of financial period An option button that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
End of financial period An option button that sets the end date of financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
Fixed day of the period An option button that defines the particular day of the financial period when documents should be generated.
## The Batch list tab This tab includes the list of batches assigned to the schedule (in a tabular format). Each row displays details of the selected batch. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Batch number The reference number of the original batch, which is used as a template for scheduled batches.
Ledger The default ledger to which the batch transactions should be posted.
Transaction date The date of the batch transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the batch transactions are to be posted.
Status The status of the original batch.
Control total The control total of the batch, which should be equal to both the credit and debit amounts of the batch.
Currency The currency used for the batch transactions.
## The Generated documents tab This tab contains the list of batches generated according to the schedule. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Batch number The ID number of the generated batch.
Ledger The default ledger to which the batch transactions should be or were posted.
Transaction date The date of the batch transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the batch transactions should be or were posted.
Status The status of the generated batch.
Control total The control total of the batch, which is equal to both the credit and debit amounts of the batch.
Currency The currency used for the batch transactions.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Release budgets (GL505510) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-budgets-gl505510 page This window can be used to release budget articles. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release budgets (GL505510) This window can be used to release budget articles. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window can be used to release budget articles. Once released, budget articles are stored in the appropriate ledger and are available for reports, budget consolidation, and comparison with the actual data. When you open the window, it lists all budget articles that are not yet released. To release the budget articles, select the appropriate check boxes and click **Release** on the toolbar. To release all budget articles at once, click **Release all**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates the release process for the selected budget articles.
Release all Initiates the release process for all budget articles.
## The table The list contains all budget articles that have not been released. You can release all articles or select particular articles for release.
Column Description
Branch The branch whose budget article is shown in the table row.
Ledger A read-only field showing the ledger where the budget will be stored.
Financial year A read-only field that contains the financial year for which the budget is created.
Account A read-only field that specifies the account of the budget article.
Subaccount A read-only field that specifies the subaccount of the budget article.
Description The description provided for the budget article.
Amount The budget amount for the article.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Budgets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/budget-gl302010/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Release transactions (GL501000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-transactions-gl501000 page This window lists all batches that have a status of Balanced. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release transactions (GL501000) This window lists all batches that have a status of Balanced. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window lists all batches that have a status of **Balanced**. You can release either all batches or only those you select. After successful completion of the release operation, the status of the released batches changes to **Unposted** or **Posted**, depending on whether the **Automatically post on release** option is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the selected batches and changes their statuses to Released or Unposted, depending on whether the Automatically post on release option is selected in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Release all Releases all the batches and changes their statuses to Released or Unposted, depending on whether the Automatically post on release option is selected in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
## The table This window includes a table with the list of batches that are ready to be released.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace where the batch transactions were created.
Batch number The batch number.
Ledger The ledger to which batch transactions should be posted.
Transaction date The date of transactions.
Last modified by The last user to modify the batch.
Post period The financial period to which the batch transactions will be posted.
Control total The batch control total, which should be equal to both the credit total and the debit total for the batch to be released.
Description The description of the batch.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Journal transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) [Post transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/)

Related pages

Tasks

 Release vouchers (GL501500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-vouchers-gl501500 page You can use this window to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) batches of documents that were prepared in the Journal vouchers (GL304000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release vouchers (GL501500) You can use this window to release all ready-to-be-released ( Balanced ) batches of documents that were prepared in the Journal vouchers (GL304000) window. For more information: [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to release all ready-to-be-released (**Balanced**) batches of documents that were prepared in the [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/) window. Upon release of the batch or batches, the system generates and releases actual documents of the specified types in the General ledger, Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, or Cash management workspaces. This window is available if the **Journal voucher** option is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases a selected batch and changes the batch status to Released if all documents of the batch have been generated and released successfully.
Release all Releases all batches listed in the table, and changes their status to Released if the documents of all batches have been generated and released successfully in the respective workspaces.
## The table The table contains all ready-to-be-released (**balanced**) batches. To release a batch (or multiple batches), select the unlabeled check box in the line of the required batch (or batches) and then click **Release** on the window toolbar. To release all the batches, click **Release all**on the window toolbar.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace in which the documents included in the batch will be generated and released.
Batch number

The identifier of the batch.

Clicking the link navigates to the Journal vouchers (GL304000) window and displays the details of the selected batch.
Ledger The ledger in which the documents will be posted.
Transaction date The date when the batch was created.
Last modified by The login name of a user who last edited the batch.
Post period The period to which the documents included in the batch will be posted.
Control total The total amount of the transaction (the sum of total amounts of all documents included in the batch).
Description The user-provided description for the transaction.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Voucher entry codes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/voucher-entry-codes-gl106000/) Release workbooks (GL50505S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-workbooks-gl50505s page This window can be used to release workbooks. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release workbooks (GL50505S) This window can be used to release workbooks. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window can be used to release workbooks. Once released, workbooks are stored in the appropriate ledger and are available for reports, budget consolidation, and comparison with the actual data. When you open the window, it lists all workbooks that are not yet released. To release the workbooks, select the appropriate check boxes and click **Process** on the toolbar. To process all workbooks at once, click **Process all**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Initiates the release process for the selected workbooks.
Process all Initiates the release process for all workbooks.
## The top part
Element Description
Workbook ID Select the workbook that contains the voucher batches you want to release.
Workspace In the table will be displayed the voucher batches for the workbooks connected with the workspace you select here.
Doc. type In the table will be displayed the documents with the type you select here.
## The table In this table, the list shows the vouchers that match the criteria specified in the top part.
Element Description
Workbook ID The ID of the workbook.
Workbook description The description of the workbook.
Voucher batch no. The number of the voucher batch within the workbook.
Batch description The description on the voucher batch.
Workspace The workspace in which the workbook is used.
Doc. type The type of the document, as selected in the top part.
Number of documents The number of documents included in the voucher batch.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the voucher batch.
Last modified on The date when the voucher batch was last modified.
Created by The user who has created the voucher batch.
Created on The date when the voucher batch was created.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Report definitions (CS206000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000 page This window, which is part of the Visma Net Analytical report manager, displays the properties of each defined analytical report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Report definitions (CS206000) This window, which is part of the Visma Net Analytical report manager, displays the properties of each defined analytical report. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window, which is part of the Visma Net Analytical report manager, displays the properties of each defined analytical report. You can view or modify existing reports, create a new analytical report, and delete existing reports. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part
Button Description
Copy report Initiates the copying of the selected report configuration. You type the new report code in the New report code dialogue box that opens.
Preview Initiates the previewing of the selected report. You can review the look and feel of the report in the window that opens.
Validate row set definition

This button opens the Account types to be included in the row set validation dialogue box. Here you can select what account types you want to control:

  • Income
  • Assets
  • Liability
  • Expense
  • Check also if there is missing subaccounts

Depending on what you select and what the Row set contains of accounts, you will get a list of accounts that are missing in the row set.
The window includes several sections that hold the settings of the analytical report. ## The Report definition section
Element Description
Code The unique code used to identify the analytical report. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The descriptive name of the analytical report.
Type

The data source of the analytical report. The selected option defines the set of parameters in the Default data source settings section.

Select one of the following options:

General ledger
The General ledger workspace is used as the data source.
Project
The Projects workspace is used as the data source.
Account type Select the relevant account type value to improve performance of the report.
Row set The set of rows to be displayed in this analytical report.
Column set The set of columns to be displayed in this analytical report.
Unit set The set of units to be included in this analytical report.
From unit The start unit in the unit set; this parameter indicates the first unit in the selected unit set. The units starting from this one will be included in the analytical report.
## The Default data source settings section (General ledger) The set of parameters in this section is defined by the option you have selected in the **Type** field in the **Report definition** section. The following settings are displayed if you have selected the **General ledger** option in the **Type** field.
Element Description
Company

The company to be used as the source.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the Company field to the report window so that the user can select a company before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the Company field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.

In addition, this column/check box requires that the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger to be used as the data source.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the Ledger field to the report window so that the user can select a ledger before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the Ledger field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
From account

The starting account in the range of account numbers to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the From account field to the report window so that the user can select an account number to start with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the From account field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To account

The ending account in the range of account numbers to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the To account field to the report window so that the user can select an account number to end with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the To account field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
From sub.

The starting subaccount in the range of subaccounts to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the From sub. field to the report window so that the user can select a subaccount number to start with before running the report.

If the check box is not selected, the From sub. field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To sub.

The ending subaccount in the range of subaccounts to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the To sub. field to the report window so that the user can select a subaccount number to end with before running the report.

If the check box is not selected, the To sub. field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
From branch

The starting branch in the range of branches to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the From branch field to the report window so that the user can select a branch to start with before running the report.

If the check box is not selected, the From branch field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.

In addition, this column/check box requires that the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
To branch

The ending branch in the range of branches to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the To branch field to the report window so that the user can select a branch to end with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the To branch field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.

In addition, this column/check box requires that the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The starting financial period in the range of periods to be used in the report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the From period field to the report window so that the user can select a financial period to start with before running the report.

If the check box is not selected, the From period field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To period

The ending financial period in the range of periods to be used in the report. Use the list field to the right of To period to specify how the end period is set:

Not set
No end period is defined for the report.
Request
The end period is added to the report window so that the user can select a value in it before running the report.
Use start
The report uses the same start and end period.
Account class

The account class to be used as the data source.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option, to add the Account class field to the report window so that the user can select an account class before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the Account class field will not appear in the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
Symbol display (+/-)
  • Not set: No symbol is defined for the report.
  • Positive values
  • Swap liability/expense
  • Debit/credit values
Amount type

The amount type to be used to calculate the values in the report.

Select one of the following options:

Not set
No specific amount type is defined for the report.
Turnover
The turnover amounts are included in the report.
Credit
The credit amounts are included in the report.
Debit
The debit amounts are included in the report.
Beg. balance
The beginning balance amounts are used in the report.
Ending balance
The ending balance amounts are used in the report.
Turnover (currency)
The turnover amounts in a foreign currency are included (retrieved from the denominated accounts).
Credit (currency)
The credit amounts in a foreign currency are included (retrieved from the denominated accounts).
Debit (currency)
The debit amounts in a foreign currency are included (retrieved from the denominated accounts).
Beg. balance (currency)
The beginning balance amounts in a foreign currency are included (retrieved from the denominated accounts).
Ending balance (currency)
The ending balance amounts in a foreign currency are included (retrieved from the denominated accounts).
Apply restriction groups A check box that you select to restrict access to report details for users.
## The Default data source settings section (Project) The set of parameters in this section is defined by the option you have selected in the **Type** field in the **Report definition** section. The following settings are displayed if you have selected the **Project** option in the **Type** field.
Element Description
From acc. group

The starting account group in the range of account groups to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the From acc. group field to the report window so that the user can select an account group to start with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the From acc. group field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To acc. group

The ending account group in the range of account groups to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the To acc. group field to the report window so that the user can select an account group to end with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the To acc. group field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
From project

The starting project in the range of projects to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the From project field to the report window so that the user can select a project to start with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the From project field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To project

The ending project in the range of projects to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the To project field to the report window so that the user can select a project to end with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the To project field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
From task

The starting task in the range of tasks to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the From task field to the report window so that the user can select a task identifier to start with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the From task field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To task

The ending task in the range of tasks to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the To task field to the report window so that the user can select a task identifier to end with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the To task field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
From item ID

The first item ID in the range of item IDs to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the From item field to the report window so that the user can select an inventory to start with before running the report.

If the check box is not selected, the From item field will not appear in the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To item ID

The last item ID in the range of item IDs to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the To item field to the report window so that the user can select an inventory to end with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the To item field will not appear in the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
From branch

The starting branch in the range of branches to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the From branch field to the report window so that the user can select a branch to start with before running the report.

If the check box is not selected, the From branch field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.

In addition, this column/check box requires that the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
To branch

The ending branch in the range of branches to be included in the analytical report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the To branch field to the report window so that the user can select a branch to end with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the End branch field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.

In addition, this column/check box requires that the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The starting financial period in the range of periods to be used in the report.

Select the Request check box to the right of the option to add the From period field to the report window so that the user can select a financial period to start with before running the report.

If the Request check box is not selected, the From period field will not appear on the window, and you should specify a value here that will always be used for the report.
To period

The ending financial period in the range of periods to be used in the report. Use the list field to the right of To period to specify how the end period is set:

Not set
No end period of the period is defined for the report.
Request
The end period is added to the report window so that the user can select a value in it before running the report.
Use start
The report uses the same start and end period.
Symbol display (+/-)
  • Not set: No symbol is defined for the report.
  • Positive values
  • Swap liability/expense
  • Debit/credit values
Amount type

The amount type to calculate the values in the report.

Select one of the following options:

Not set
Unspecified amount type; the amount type should be taken from a set (row set or unit set) with a higher priority.
Actual amount
The ending balance of the actual amount of the project budget for the specified period.
Actual quantity
The ending balance of the project budget’s actual quantity for the specified period.
Amount turnover
The turnover of the project budget’s actual amount for the specified period.
Quantity turnover
The turnover of the actual quantity of the project budget for the specified period.
Original budget amount
The original budgeted amount of the project budget.
Original budget quantity
The original budgeted quantity of the project budget.
Revised budget amount
The revised budgeted amount of the project budget.
Revised budget quantity
The revised budgeted quantity of the project budget.
Original committed amount
The original committed amount of the project budget.
Original committed quantity
The original committed quantity of the project budget.
Revised committed amount
The revised committed amount of the project budget.
Revised committed quantity
The revised committed quantity of the project budget.
Committed open amount
The open (not received yet) amount of the original committed project budget.
Committed open quantity
The open (not received yet) quantity of the original committed project budget.
Committed received quantity
The received quantity of the original committed project budget.
Committed invoiced amount
The amount of the released invoices of the original committed project budget.
Committed invoiced quantity
The quantity of the released invoices of the original committed project budget.
Apply restriction groups A check box that you select to restrict access to report details for users.
Optimise unit set report

When this is selected, you will see the unit set selector in Parameters section when starting the report, and you have to select one unit set definition before running the report. The Print all functionality is now disabled in this routine.

This is only visible if Unit set is defined in the Report definition section of this report.
## The Sitemap section
Element Description
Location The site map folder where the report is located.
Title The report title on the site map.
## The Page settings section
Element Description
Paper kind The paper kind used to print the report. Select the appropriate kind from the extensive list of available options.
Landscape

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the report should have landscape orientation, with the shorter side running top to bottom so wider columns can be accommodated.

If the check box is cleared, portrait orientation is used, which means that the longer side runs top to bottom.
## The Margins section The elements in the **Margins** section are used to define the sizes of the margins for the report.
Element Description
Top

The size of the top margin.

Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
Bottom

The size of the bottom margin.

Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
Left

The size of the left margin.

Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
Right

The size of the right margin.

Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
## The Print area section You use these elements to define the size of the printed area for the report.
Element Description
Width The horizontal size of the printed area for the selected paper format. Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
Height The vertical size of the printed area for the selected paper format. Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
## The Default font style section
Element Description
Font The name of the font to be used in the printed report.
Text alignment

The text alignment of the printed report. You can select one of the following options:

Not set
There is no specific text alignment.
Left
The text is aligned to the left.
Centre
The text is aligned by centre.
Right
The text is aligned to the right.
Font style

The font style to be used in printed report.

The available options are Regular, Bold, Italic, Underline, and Strikeout.
Font size

The font size to be used in printed report.

Enter the appropriate value in the text field, and use the drop-down field to select the unit of measure ( Pixel, Point, Pica, Inch, Mm., or Cm. ) for the value.
Colour The colour to be used in the printed report.
Background colour The background colour of the printed report.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-general-ledger-account-gl104020 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular General ledger account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by general ledger account (GL104020) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular General ledger account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular General ledger account. You can also change the visibility of the account in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of General ledger accounts by using the [General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). CAUTION: By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to the restricted entities. We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can select the general ledger account for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected general ledger account.
Element Description
Account The general ledger account whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Type

Read-only. The type of the selected account.

For more information, see: About account types and classes.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected account.
Account class

Read-only. The class of the selected account.

For more information, see: About account types and classes
Currency Read-only. The specific currency if the selected general ledger account is a currency-denominated account. (If this field is blank, the base currency is used for the account.)
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the account. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the general ledger account in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-subaccount-gl104030 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount. You can also change the visibility of the subaccount in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of subaccounts by using the [General ledger account access (GL104000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-account-access-gl104000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). CAUTION: By restricting the visibility of accounts, subaccounts, and branches, you also restrict the visibility of the cash accounts that are linked to the restricted entities. We recommend that you carefully configure restriction groups that contain accounts, subaccounts, and branches because including these entities in different restriction groups may block the processing of the associated cash accounts. ## The top part In this area, you can select the subaccount for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view the description of the selected subaccount.
Element Description
Subaccount The subaccount whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected subaccount.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the subaccount. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the subaccount in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Restriction groups by sub segment (GL104040) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-sub-segment-gl104040 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount segment value. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by sub segment (GL104040) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount segment value. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular subaccount segment value. You can also change the visibility of the subaccount segment value in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups that currently contain it. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can select the subaccount segment value for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected subaccount segment value.
Element Description
Segment ID The subaccount segment (by its identifier) for which you want to select a value.
Segment value The segment value for the selected subaccount segment. In this field, you can select the subaccount segment value for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected subaccount segment value.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected subaccount segment value is active.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled Included column is selected for each group that contains the subaccount segment value. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the subaccount segment value in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. The system does not enforce restrictions imposed by inactive groups.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Row sets (CS206010) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010 page To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Row sets (CS206010) To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. A row set defines the rows to be included in the report and the data to be displayed in each row. For more information on using row sets, see: [About row sets](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/row-sets/about-row-sets/). This window, which is part of the Analytical report manager, displays the row sets defined for the analytical reports. You use the window to view or modify existing row sets, create new row sets, and delete row sets. For each row set, add the rows to be included in the analytical report and define the properties for each row. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Copy row set Initiates copying of the selected row set configuration. If you click this button, you type the new row set code in the New row set code dialog box that opens.
## The top part This part of the window displays basic information about the particular row set. You can define a new row set, or you can look up an existing one by selecting its code or by using the actions in the window toolbar.
Element Description
Code The unique code used to identify the row set. You can use up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
Type

The data source of the row set. Select one of the following options:

General ledger
The General ledger workspace is used as the data source.
Project
The Projects workspace is used as the data source.
Description The descriptive name of the row set.
## The table The table shows the rows included in the row set, along with their properties, which you can modify. You can add a row to the row set or delete a row from the set.
Button Description
Copy style Copies the printing style from a row to use it in another row.
Paste style Pastes the printing style copied from another row.
Renumber

Initiates the renumbering of rows.

You can type numbering step and code length (up to 10) in the Set numbering step dialog box that opens. The system changes the row codes to comply with new settings.
Column Description
Code The unique code used to identify the row. You can use up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
Description

The descriptive name of the row.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Type

The type of the row.

This property defines how the values in the row are calculated and whether the column will display any data.

Select one of the available options:

General ledger
Use this row type to select the source of the data to calculate the values in the row from the general ledger.
Caption
Use this row type to display the caption of the report in this row.
Line
Use this row type to display the continuous line in this row.
Total
Use this row type to exclude the subtotals from the value calculation for the row.
Header
Use this row type to display the report header in this row.
Value

The value to be displayed in the row. You can create a formula to define the value and use parameters in the formula you define.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Format The format used to convert the data selected from the data source to the string value used in the printed report. C# data conversion functions can be used to convert data to string values.
Data source The source of the data to be displayed in the row. Click the lookup button for the particular row to use the Data source editor dialog box to define the data source.
Style

The printing style to be used for this data row. The printing style parameters are defined in the Style dialog box, which you invoke by clicking the selector in the Style field.

For the description of this lookup, see the Style parameters section of Printing styles.
Printing control The property that identifies the row’s position in the report and the way the row printing will be controlled.
Page break A check box that, if selected, indicates that a page break should be inserted after the row line in the printed report.
Height The row height in the printed report (in pixels).
Indent The indent value used for the row in the printed report (in pixels).
Line style The line style used when the Underline option is selected for the row type in the Type field.
Suppress empty A check box that prevents (if selected) the printing of empty rows.
Hide zero A check box that prevents (if selected) the printing of zero values in the row.
Linked row The code of the row linked to the current one. The linked rows are printed on the same line in the report.
Base row A row code. You specify the row code in the specific row cell if you need to reference to this row in the formula that you enter in the Value field in the Column sets (CS206020) window (by using the @BaseRowCode parameter) when the system should use the value specified in this row to compute another value. For details, see: About parameters.
Column group The column group to include the row.
Unit group The unit group to include the row.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Run allocations (GL504500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/run-allocations-gl504500 page You can use this window to process all allocations that are active in a post period or only selected allocations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run allocations (GL504500) You can use this window to process all allocations that are active in a post period or only selected allocations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to process all allocations that are active in a post period or only selected allocations. You must process an allocation at least once during each financial period involved. An allocation can be processed multiple times during the same post period. You can open the **Allocation history** tab in the [Allocations ( GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) window to check how many batches were created for the selected allocation. Batches will not be generated if the chosen post period is closed. For more information on using allocations, see: [About allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-allocations/about-allocation-rules/). If you are processing the allocations manually, note that allocations with the lowest **Sort order** values should be processed first. The batches generated as the result of processing allocations appear in the [Release transactions (GL501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-transactions-gl501000/) and [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) windows. They can be modified and posted as other batches. This window is available only if the **Allocation templates** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Generates the batches for the allocations you have selected in the table.
Process all Generates the batches for all allocations.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select the post period for allocations.
Element Description
Allocation date The date of allocation.
Post period The financial period for which you want to view and process allocations.
## The table This table displays a list of the allocations active in the financial period selected as the **Post period**.
Column Description
Allocation ID The identifier of the allocation. The numbering series for allocations is assigned in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Description The detailed description of the allocation.
Distribution method

The way a source amount should be distributed between the destination accounts. The available options are as follows:

By percent
By percentages, with a total of 100 percent
By weight
By user-defined coefficients, with the total not defined
By destination account YTD
To year-to-date balances on the specified accounts
By destination account PTD
To period-to-date balances on the specified accounts
Allocation ledger The ledger where the allocation takes place. The source and target accounts must belong to the same ledger.
Sort order An integer that indicates the priority of the allocation. The allocations with lower values are processed first.
Last batch The ID of the batch that was last generated for the allocation.
Batch period The period for which the last batch was generated.
Batch amount The control total of the batch.
Batch status

The status of the batch. By default, the status of an allocation batch is Balanced.

If an allocation batch was modified by a user, it can be saved only if the status remains Balanced.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Allocations ( GL204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/allocations-gl204500/) [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) [Release transactions (GL501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/release-transactions-gl501000/) [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/)

Related pages

Concepts

 SIE export (GL40100S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-export-gl40100s page A SIE format is an interface that includes: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # SIE export (GL40100S) A SIE format is an interface that includes: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. • Exchange of data between accounting software • Import of data from pre-systems such as invoicing and payroll • Export of accounting data for financial statement and tax return software ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Export SIE file Click this to execute the export of the SIE file.
## The top part ### The Selection section
Element Description
Export type

Select the type of export you want to execute:

  • Year balance (SIE type 1)
  • Period balance (SIE type 2)
  • Period balance for object (SIE type 3)
  • Balance and transactions (SIE type 4)
  • Transactions (SIE type 4)
Branch If the multi-branch feature is in use, select the branch for which you want to execute the export.
Posting ledger Select the posting ledger from which the export will be executed.
Export only used subaccounts

When this check box is selected, only the accounts that have been used on the selected period will be exported.

If you have in the Export type field, selected Year balance (SIE type 1) then this field is not visible.
### The Period selection section
Column Description
From period Select the period from which the selected type of export will be executed. If you have in the Export type field, selected Year balance (SIE type 1) then this field is not visible.
To period

Select the period to which the selected type of export will be executed.

If you have in the Export type field, selected Year balance (SIE type 1) then this field is not visible.
Financial year

Here you select the financial year from which the export will be executed.

If you have in the Export type field, selected Year balance (SIE type 1) then this field is visible.
## The Subaccounts tab ### The Selection section
Check box Description
Export dimensions When this check box is selected, the dimensions (segments) will be included in the export.
Export only used subaccounts When this check box is selected, only the subaccounts that have been used on the selected period will be exported.
### The table
Column Description
Export Select this check box if you want to export the line.
Segment ID The ID of the segment included the export.
Description The description of the segment included the export.
Mapped SIE dimension The segments must be mapped with the predefined definitions in the SIE standard.
Own ID Use your own dimension type, ID (20-) and dimension name if more dimensions are needed.
Dimension name The name of your own dimension.
Sort Use sort to decide the order of how the segments are presented in the transactions.
## The Voucher number series tab ### The Voucher number handling section
Element Description
Include voucher number series When this check box is selected, the voucher number series will be included in the SIE file.
Include voucher number When this check box is selected, the voucher numbers will be included in the SIE file.
Place the series ID and voucher number in front of the voucher text When this check box is selected, the series ID and voucher number will be placed in front of the text field on the voucher lines.
Enter period and transaction date in front of the voucher text When this check box is selected, the period and the transaction date will be placed in front of the text field on the voucher lines.
### The Merge of voucher series section
Element Description
Move the chosen series to one series When this check box is selected, the chosen series will be moved to one series in the file.
New series ID Enter the ID of the series to which the chosen series will be moved.
First voucher no. Enter the number from which the voucher series of the new series will begin.
Split voucher on different dates When this check box is selected, the voucher will be split on different dates.
### The table
Element Description
Export Select this check box if you want to export the details from the module on the line.
Workspace The workspace from which the details will be exported.
Workspace name The name of the workspace from which the details will be exported.
New series ID The ID of the new series you selected above.

Related pages

Concepts

 SIE import (GL40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-import-gl40101s page SIE format is an interface that includes: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # SIE import (GL40101S) SIE format is an interface that includes: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. • Exchange of data between accounting software • Import of data from pre-systems such as invoicing and payroll • Export of accounting data for financial statement and tax return software ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Import SIE file Click this to execute the import of the SIE file.
## The top part ### The Select the file to import section
Element Description
File name Select the SIE file to import. Click button Upload and browse for the file.
### The Import type section
Check box Description
Vouchers Select this check box to import transactions.
Incoming balance Select the check box incoming balance and choose a transaction code (voucher number series), and the system creates a batch with incoming balances for the first date of the first year.
Workbook ID Select the workbook ID from which incoming balance is to be imported from.
Trans. code Select the check box incoming balance and choose a transaction code (voucher number series), and the system creates a batch with incoming balances for the first date of the first year.
SRU codes Select this check box to import the codes used for tax purposes in Sweden to the chart of accounts.
Subaccounts Select this check box to import subaccounts from transactions. This is valid if also the vouchers check box is selected.
### The Selection of vouchers to import section
Column Description
Import all vouchers Select this check box to import all vouchers in the SIE file. If this check box is not selected, set from and to date to filter what vouchers to import.
From If the Import all vouchers check box is not selected, set from and to dates to filter which vouchers to import.
To If the Import all vouchers check box is not selected, set from and to dates to filter which vouchers to import.
### The VAT handling section
Column Description
Create VAT transaction Select this check box to activate VAT handling for the imported transactions and to have them included in the VAT import. When the transactions are imported and visible in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, the check box Create tax trans. is also selected for the batch there.
Skip VAT amount validation Select this check box to allow differences in calculation of tax amount based on taxable amount. The transactions are imported as in the SIE file even though there are VAT calculation differences.
### The Messages section When there is an error, the SIE import is interrupted. The cause of the error must be fixed and the SIE import can be done again after this.
Column Description
Key value The key value of the error.
Type The type of the error.
Message The error message.
## The Series tab ### The Selection section
Check box Description
Move the chosen series to one series When this is selected, the chosen series will be moved to one series in the file.
Split voucher on different dates When this is selected, the voucher will be split on different dates.
Place the series ID and voucher number in front of the voucher text When this is selected, the series ID and voucher number will be placed in front of the text field on the voucher lines.
New series ID Enter the ID of the series to which the chosen series will be moved.
### The table
Column Description
Import The target of the SIE import (not in use with workbooks).
SIE series ID The ID of the series to which the import is done.
Trans. code The code of the imported transaction.
Workbook ID The target of the SIE import. The feature set General ledger workbooks needs to be activated the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window before you can select a workbook as a target for SIE import.
## The Subaccounts tab ### The Update information section
Check box Description
Import only used subaccounts When this is selected, only subaccounts used in balances or transactions registered in the SIE file, are imported to the subaccount register. All subaccounts from the SIE file are imported to the subaccount table if the check box is not selected.
Update subaccount name from import file Select this check box to use the account description in the SIE import file to update the account description in chart of accounts.
### The table
Column Description
Import Select this check box if you want to import the details on the line.
SIE dimension Select the SIE dimension for the export.
Description The description of the dimension.
Segment ID Select segment ID to use in Visma Net for each SIE dimension in the file.
Segment description The description of the selected segment ID.
## The Accounts and SRU codes tab The Selection section
Check box Description
Import only used accounts When this is selected, only accounts used in balances or transactions registered in the SIE file, are imported to the account register. All accounts from the SIE file are imported to the account table if the check box is not selected.
Update account name from import file Select this check box to use the account description in the SIE import file to update the account description in chart of accounts.
Update SRU codes Select this check box to update SRU codes in column Public code 1 in the chart of accounts according to the SIE import file.
## The VAT settings tab This is used to automate the VAT handling for SIE import: For international transactions (sales/purchases) with zero VAT and reversed VAT. ### The table
Column Description
Account When the account selected here is used or encountered in a SIE import file, the VAT ID selected in the VAT ID field will be added to the transaction with the account.
Posting type Select the posting type to be used on the account.
VAT ID The VAT ID to be used in he import.
Generate extra VAT line When this is selected, the SIE import creates an extra VAT line which facilitates the processing of international transactions.
Extra line account If the Generate extra VAT line box is selected, the extra line account ID is mandatory.

Related pages

Concepts

 SIE import VAT settings (GL20200S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/sie-import-vat-settings-gl20200s page This window is used to automate the VAT handling for SIE import: For international transactions (sales/purchases) with zero VAT and reversed VAT. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # SIE import VAT settings (GL20200S) This window is used to automate the VAT handling for SIE import: For international transactions (sales/purchases) with zero VAT and reversed VAT. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The table
Column Description
Account When the account selected here is used or encountered in a SIE import file, the VAT ID selected in the VAT ID field will be added to the transaction with the account.
Posting type Select the posting type to be used on the account.
VAT ID The VAT ID to be used in he import.
Generate extra VAT line When this is selected, the SIE import creates an extra VAT line which facilitates the processing of international transactions.
Extra line account If the Generate extra VAT line box is selected, the extra line account ID is mandatory.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Standard VAT codes (CS20500S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/standard-vat-codes-cs20500s page In this window, you can maintain Standard VAT codes used in reporting to the government. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Standard VAT codes (CS20500S) In this window, you can maintain Standard VAT codes used in reporting to the government. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. These codes must contain valid codes that are given by the government. These codes are used in the **SAF-T report** and are registered in VAT categories when the internal VAT category has another ID than the code required by the government. The top part
Element Description
Country By default the country of the selected branch. You can change it.
The table
Column Description
Standard VAT code The ID of the standard VAT code, max. 10 characters.
Description The description of the Standard VAT code.
Note Click here to describe the usage of the code or to add instructions
Files Click here to add public documents regarding the code.
VAT type

The VAT type of the code.

The options are:

  • Sales
  • Purchase
  • Both
VAT rate description You can use this for an additional code. Max. 32 characters.
Compensation If the VAT code is a compensation code this check box is selected.
Country

The country code for the VAT code.

Note

This window only shows codes with the same country as the active company. So, if you import codes for other countries, you have to switch to a branch that has the other imported country.

If the import file is missing country, it will be created with the country code from the active branch.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Subaccounts (GL203000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000 page You use this window to create and maintain the list of subaccounts for your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Subaccounts (GL203000) You use this window to create and maintain the list of subaccounts for your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain the list of subaccounts for your company. Subaccounts are used to detail records of the activity within an account for subsequent financial analysis. For more information on accounts and subaccounts, see: [About account types and classes](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-accounts/about-account-types-and-classes/). When you use this window, you create subaccounts segment by segment. If the **Validate** check box in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window is selected, you can enter a segment value only by selecting it from the list of values defined in the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window. If the **Validate** check box is cleared, you can enter a new value for the segment, and only the number of characters and the type of string specified in the **Edit mask** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window will be validated. In some cases, you should use this window to create a complete list of subaccounts, depending on the **Allow adding new values on the fly** check box, which is also in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window: + If this check box is selected, users can enter subaccounts segment by segment on any data entry window. For each segment, the user selects the segment value from the list of available segment values, which should be populated in advance. You do not need to create a complete list of subaccounts in advance using this window. + If this check box is cleared, you must use this window to configure the subaccounts before they can be used for data entry. After you have done this, on any data entry window, a user can select a subaccount from the list of available subaccounts. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
View restriction groups Navigates to the Restriction groups by subaccount (GL104030) window, which you can use to view the memberships of the subaccount in restriction groups.
## The table The table in this area lists all subaccounts configured in the system.
Element Description
Subaccount

In this field you can see and add a value for a subaccount.

You configure the length, input mask, and segment structure of the identifier in the Segment keys (CS202000) window. While adding a value to each segment, you can use the validation function, which allows you to select a segment value from the list of existing ones.

For details, see: About account IDs.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount is active. If the check box is cleared, the subaccount is inactive, which means that it does not appear on drop-down lists of available subaccounts on data entry windows and cannot be selected.
Description

A detailed description of the subaccount.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Subaccount ID The unique subaccount identifier.
Secured A check box that indicates (if selected) that the subaccount is associated with restriction groups.
Trial balance (GL303010) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/trial-balance-gl303010 page You use this window to import the trial balances of branches from third-party software during initial implementation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Trial balance (GL303010) You use this window to import the trial balances of branches from third-party software during initial implementation. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to import the trial balances of branches from third-party software during initial implementation. The data for import should be in either `.csv` or `.xlsx` format. After the data has been successfully imported, you can process it by mapping the imported accounts and subaccounts to those available in the system. The system performs mapping automatically and marks the accounts and subaccounts that do not exist in your system with error indications. You can perform further mapping manually. After you complete the mapping and make sure the transactions are in balance, you clear the **Hold** check box and click **Release**. This creates an adjusting batch that does the following: + Sets to zero the balances of all account-subaccount pairs (available in the ledger before import) for which no data was imported. + Updates the balances of other accounts to match those in the imported trial balance data. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release

Initiates the release process for the selected import record.

Only a balanced import can be released. As a result, the status of the import changes to Released.
## The top part Here, you specify the main parameters required for importing the trial balance, such as the target branch, the posting ledger, and the financial period to import trial balance data. This area also contains fields you can use to validate the control debit and credit totals before importing the trial balance.
Element Description
Import number The ID of the import record.
Status

The current status of the import record. The following options are available:

On hold
This status indicates that the import record is a draft and can be edited manually. While the status of an import is On hold, the import may contain error indications. When you clear the Hold check box for an import with this status, if the import contains no errors and its total debits equal its total credits, the system changes the status to Balanced.
Balanced
This status indicates that the import record is created and is ready to be released or posted. An import with this status can be modified or deleted, but changes can be saved only if the credit and debit totals for the import are equal.
Released
This status indicates that the import record has been released.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the import record has the On hold status and is still a draft. You can clear the check box only if the record contains no error indications and has total debits equal to its total credits.
Import date The date of the import operation for this import record. All journal transactions of the generated batch will have the transaction date specified here.
Period The financial period to which the imported data is posted.
Branch The branch of the organisation whose trial balance is imported.
Ledger The ledger to which the imported data is posted. By default, this is the default posting ledger specified in the Ledgers (GL201500) window, but you can select another posting ledger.
Batch number The batch’s unique identifier, which the system generates based on the numbering series assigned to batches in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Description A brief description of the import operation or of the imported data.
Debit total

The total of the debit amounts for the import record (the sum of the debit totals of the asset and expense accounts).

The system calculates this value automatically.
Credit total

The total of the credit amounts for the import record (the sum of the credit totals of the liability and income accounts).

The system calculates this value automatically.

The system calculates this value by using the type of the balance to be imported, normal or reversed; that is, the sign used to display the positive amounts of the credit totals of the liability and income accounts accounted for calculations.

For details, see: Import trial balances - overview.
## The Transaction details tab This tab contains the list of account-subaccount pairs for the import record and their YTD balances imported from the file. You can validate the data by mapping imported accounts and subaccounts to the internal accounts and subaccounts. The rows where accounts or subaccounts cannot be mapped automatically are marked with errors and can be mapped manually.
Button Description
Select an action

Gives you the ability to select one of the following actions to be performed for the records:

Validate
Validates the selected records or all records if you click the Process or Process all button, respectively
Merge duplicates
Merges duplicates for the selected records or all records if you click the Process or Process all button, respectively
Process Validates or merges duplicates, depending on the selected action, for the selected records.
Process all Validates or merges duplicates, depending on the selected action, for all the records.
Column Description
Status

The status of the record. The following options are available:

New
Indicates that the record was just imported.
Validated
Indicates that the record was validated—that is, that the account and subaccount were mapped to the internal account and subaccount.
Error
Indicates that the record was not validated—that is, that either the account or the subaccount was not mapped to an internal account or subaccount.
Duplicate
Marks the records detected as duplicates.
Imported account The account imported from the file.
Mapped account The internal account to match the imported account to.
Imported subaccount The imported subaccount.
Mapped subaccount The internal subaccount to match the imported subaccount to.
Year to date balance The year-to-date balance of the account-subaccount pair.
Currency YTD balance The year-to-date balance of the account-subaccount pair in a foreign currency.
Type The type of General ledger account.
Description A detailed description of the account.
## The Exceptions tab If you have performed the import for the first time, the **Exceptions** tab is blank. For further imports, the **Exceptions** tab lists (in a tabular format) all account (and subaccount, if applicable) pairs with non-zero balances that are present in the ledger but not listed in the imported data. You should review this list carefully and make sure that the balances of these accounts should be equal to zero in the period for which you are importing the trial balance. It is required, because on release of the trial balance entry, for each account listed, the system generates a transaction that makes the account balance zero for the period you are importing the trial balance for. If these accounts balances should be non-zero, verify and correct the list of accounts in the file from which you are importing the trial balance. For details, see: [Import trial balances - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/import-trial-balances/import-trial-balances-overview/). For released imports, the tab is not displayed.
Column Description
Account The account in the specified ledger.
Subaccount The subaccount used with the account.
Type The type of the account, which is one of the following options: Asset, Liability, Expense, or Income.
Description The description of the account.
Last activity The date of the last activity on the account.
Beg. balance The balance of the account at the beginning of the selected period.
Debit total The total of debits posted to the account since the beginning of the period.
Credit total The total of credits posted to the account since the beginning of the period.
Ending balance The ending balance of the account at the end of the selected period or at the trial balance date if the current period is selected.
**Parent topic:** [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Unit sets (CS206030) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030 page To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unit sets (CS206030) To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. To define what data will be displayed in each analytical report and how it will be organised, you need to define the row set and column set; optionally, you can define the unit set. Unit sets are used to organise the report structure when the groups of rows and columns included in the report use data from different data sources, or when formulas must be applied to calculate the report values based on the data from the particular groups of columns and rows. For more information about the unit sets, see: [Unit sets - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/manage-analytical-reports/unit-sets/unit-sets-overview/). The Unit sets window, which is part of the Analytical report manager in Visma Net, displays the unit sets defined for the analytical reports. You can view or modify existing unit sets, create new unit sets, and delete any unit sets. For each unit set, define the units to be available for the analytical report and provide the unit description. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Copy unit set Initiates copying of the selected unit set configuration. If you click this button, you type the new unit set code in the New unit set code dialog box that opens.
## The top part This area of the window displays basic information about the particular unit set. You can define a new unit set, or you can look up an existing one by selecting its code or using the actions in the window toolbar.
Element Description
Code The unique code used to identify the unit set. You can use up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
Type

The data source of the unit set. Select one of the following options:

General ledger
The General ledger workspace is used as the data source.
Project
The Projects workspace is used as the data source.
Description The descriptive name of the unit set.
## The Units section This area of the window displays in a tabular format the units included in the unit set, along with their properties, which can be modified. You can add a unit to the unit set or delete a unit from the set. The units in the unit sets are organised in a hierarchical structure, which is displayed left of the **Units** section in the window. Use the buttons above the hierarchical structure to move a unit up or down or change its hierarchical level.
Unit attribute Description
Code The unique code used to identify the unit. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description

The descriptive name of the unit.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Value

The formulas to be used to calculate the values to be used in this unit.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Printing group The printing group that includes the unit. If you specify a printing group, the data from these units will be printed only in the rows and columns with the same Column group and Printing group value.
Data source The source of data to be displayed in the reports included in this unit group.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Validate account history (GL509900) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/validate-account-history-gl509900 page By using this window, you can validate account history in the selected ledgers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate account history (GL509900) By using this window, you can validate account history in the selected ledgers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can validate account history in the selected ledgers. Validation entails recalculating the balances, based on the account history records, and matching them to the account balances stored in the database. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you run this process only if a system error has occurred and the account balances are incorrect. For the list of transactions of a particular account, use the [Account details (GL404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-details-gl404000/) window. To validate the account history in all ledgers, click**Validate all**. To validate the account history in particular ledgers, select the check boxes next to those ledgers and click **Validate**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Validate Validates the history of the accounts in the ledgers you have selected in the table.
Validate all Validates the history of the accounts in all ledgers.
## The table The table lists all the ledgers available in the system.
Column Description
Ledger The ledger ID.
Description The description of the ledger.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Related reference [Ledgers](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) Voucher entry codes (GL106000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/voucher-entry-codes-gl106000 section By using this window, you can view transaction codes for General ledger, Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, and Cash management documents and transactions; you can also enter new codes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Voucher entry codes (GL106000) By using this window, you can view transaction codes for General ledger, Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, and Cash management documents and transactions; you can also enter new codes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Transaction codes are used to generate documents or transactions of particular types in specific workspaces, based on batch of documents entered by using the [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/) window. This window is available if the Journal voucher option is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The table This table contains the list of transaction codes available in the system.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace where a document or a transaction with a code will be generated. This functionality is available for the following workspaces: General ledger, Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, and Cash management.
Workspace trans. type

The type of document or transaction to be generated for the code. This list of document types that can be processed through document batches in each specific workspace is the following:

  • General ledger: General ledger entry
  • Supplier ledger: Purchase invoice, Quick payment (not in use), Payment, Credit adjustment, Purchase credit note, or Prepayment
  • Customer ledger: Sales invoice, Cash sale, Credit note, Debit note, Payment, or Prepayment
  • Cash management: Cash entry
Unique trans. code The unique code for the type of documents or transactions in the selected workspace.
Description A brief description for the code.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this code can be used in the system.
Numbering ID

The numbering ID of the Number series (CS201010) window, which you can select by clicking the icon-select icon. The selected numbering ID processes the consecutive numbering of the transactions of the entry code it is assigned to. You find the assigned number in the Ref.no. column in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window

Note. Numbering ID is only available for general ledger transactions
Default trans. code

By selecting the check box, the respective Unique trans. code is set as default for the General Ledger entry transaction type.

You find the unique transaction code in the Trans. code field in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.

Note. Default transaction code is only available for general ledger transactions.
Parent topic: [General ledger windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-windows-overview/) Voucher list (GL40600S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/voucher-list-gl40600s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Voucher list (GL40600S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View batch Click this to view the batch from which the selected row in the table originates in the Journal transactions (GL301000) window.
View source document Click this to view the source document of the selected row in the table. The window that is opened depends on the module (Sales or Purchases) from which the voucher originates.
## The top part
Element Description
From period The financial period that begins the date range of the vouchers you want to view.
To period The financial period that ends the date range of the vouchers you want to view.
Workspace The module from which the vouchers originate. To view all vouchers regardless of the workspace, select All workspaces.
Transaction type To view the transactions with a certain type, select one here. The options depend on the selected module.
Ref. number starts with Enter here the number with which the reference number of the voucher you want to view starts.
Show missing only Select this to view only the vouchers that are missing one or more reference numbers.
Detailed view Select this to view more details on the voucher.
## The table In this table, the list shows the vouchers that match the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Missing There is a yellow warning sign in this column, if the voucher is missing one or more reference numbers.
Workspace

The workspace where the transaction originated.

This column is displayed for the selected range of days or periods, there are transactions originating in other workspaces that updated the balance of the selected account.
Transaction type The transaction type of the voucher.
Ref. no. The reference number of the external document on which this transaction is based. Click the link to navigate to the appropriate window so you can view the details of the transaction.
Batch status The status of the batch to which the voucher or transaction belongs.
Document status The status of the document to which the voucher or transaction is connected.
Deleted This is selected, if the voucher or transaction has been deleted.
Description The description of the voucher or transaction.
Batch number The batch from which the voucher or transaction originates.
Transaction date The date of the transaction.
Period The period to which the voucher or transactions is posted.
Batch amount The amount of the batch to which the voucher or transaction belongs.
Workbook ID The ID of the workbook to which the voucher or transaction belongs.
Voucher batch no. The number of the voucher batch to which the voucher or transaction belongs.

Related pages

Concepts

 Webhook notification for account (GL407000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/webhook-notification-for-account-gl407000 section In this window you can view the webhook notifications that are related to changes done on your accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Webhook notification for account (GL407000) In this window you can view the webhook notifications that are related to changes done on your accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It is also possible to view notifications for deleted accounts. In order to list information in the table, you must select **Account**, **Type** and/or **Account class**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
icon-refresh Refreshes the information in the window.
## The top part
Element Description
Account A field where you search and select the unique identifier of the general ledger account in the system.
Type A drop-down where you select the following type of account you want to shown in the table below: Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Account class

A field where you search and select the account class to which the account is assigned.

Account classes are used for grouping, sorting, and filtering of the information associated with General ledger accounts in reports and inquiries.
## The table In this table, the list shows the vouchers that match the criteria specified in the top part.
Button Description
View notification feedback Opens the Webhook notification feedback window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.
Resend notification The notifications with status Sent can be resent by clicking this button.
Element Description
Account The unique identifier of the general ledger account in the system.
Description The description of the account.
Account class The account class to which the account is assigned.
Success If the message has been sent successfully, True appears in the column. It if failed, then False is visible.
Event

Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear:

  • Entity created
  • Entity updated
  • Entity deleted
Status

Indicates the status of the message, and is one of the following:

  • Sent
  • Resent
  • Available
  • Consumed
Source

Indicates the source of the event:

Visma Net
If the source is this, the status can be Sent or Resent
APIs
If the source is this, the status is Available. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators.
External integrator
If the source is this, the status is Consumed. The customer confirms receiving the message.
User Indicates which user made a change to the entity.
Date Indicates the date when the change was made.
Message Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.
Account ID Indicates the ID of the account.
Workbooks (GL107500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/workbooks-gl107500 page As a standard practice, some companies register vouchers that are grouped into batches based on their type (for example, purchase invoices or sales invoices). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Workbooks (GL107500) As a standard practice, some companies register vouchers that are grouped into batches based on their type (for example, purchase invoices or sales invoices). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. To follow this practice in Visma Net, you can use the General ledger workbooks functionality. With this functionality, you can add batches of vouchers of a particular type, which means that you can separate vouchers by source or type. Each workbook will also have its own number series. ## The General settings section
Element Description
Workbook ID The ID of the workbook.
Description The description of the workbook.
Workspace Select the workspace in which the workbook will be used.
Transaction type Select the transaction type you want to use in this workbook.
Reversing workbook ID You can select a workbook that will be used to reverse the documents created with the workbook selected in the Workbook ID field.
Voucher entry window

Here, you select a window that will be the entry window for this workbook.

Depending on the choices you have made above, you will get different options here.
Status

The status of the workbook:

  • Active
  • Inactive
  • Hidden
Allow only one unreleased voucher batch per workbook If you have selected the check box Allow only one unreleased voucher batch per workbook in the setup, it will not be possible to add a new voucher batch until you have released all previous unreleased batches in the workbook.
## The Number series section
Element Description
Voucher batch Select a numbering ID to use as the default number series for the voucher batch.
Voucher Select a numbering ID to use as the default number series for the vouchers within the voucher batch.
## The Voucher default values section Here, you can fill in different default values that should apply for this workbook. The values available depends on the workspace you have selected
Element Description
Default description The default description of the voucher batch.

Supplier

Customer

Cash account

 The supplier, customer, or cash account connected with the voucher batch, depending on the selected workspace.
Location The location of the customer or supplier.
Default entry type The default entry type for the cash account.

Related pages

Concepts

 Workbooks (GL307000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/workbooks-gl307000 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Workbooks (GL307000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View and edit Click this to view/edit the voucher batch documents of the selected workbook.
Release Click this to release the workbooks you have selected in the table.
## The top part
Element Description
Workbook ID The ID of the workbook.
Release status The release status of the workbook.
## The table In this table, the list shows the vouchers that match the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Voucher batch no. The number of the voucher batch within the workbook.
Description The description on the voucher batch.
Number of documents The number of documents included in the voucher batch.
Released If the voucher batch is released, this check box is selected.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Customer and supplier reconciliation (GL408000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/customer-and-supplier-reconciliation-gl408000 page Regular reconciliation in Visma Net reconciles within ledgers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer and supplier reconciliation (GL408000) Regular reconciliation in Visma Net reconciles within ledgers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can set up reconciliation between General ledger : and **Customer ledger** General ledger : and **Supplier ledger** The window toolbar
Button Description
Cancel (Esc) Will cancel your selections.
Go to the first first record Goes to the first period.
Go to previous record Changes to the previous period. If the From period and To period fields are not the same period, this button will change both to and from periods one period back.
Go to next record Changes to the next period. If the From period and To period fields are not the same period, this button will change both to and from periods one period forward.
Go to the last record Goes to the last period.
The window will display the balances on **Accounts** between **General ledger** and **Customer ledger** / **Supplier ledger** causing the discrepancies. The top part
Field Description
Period An ID of the financial period
Control account module

With this field, you can select which control account module you want to perform reconciliation on.

A control account is a general ledger account that aggregates the balances of entities in a ledger; it can be used for analytical purposes as well as for the reconciliation of balances between ledgers and the General ledger.

You indicate that an account is to be used as a control account for a particular subledger by selecting the ledger.

The alternatives are:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Supplier ledger and Customer ledger
  • All
Account Select the control account you want to use in the reconciliation
Company

The company you want to filter on. If no company and branch are selected, you will get the sum of all companies.

Note

Company and branch is only available when Multi-branch is activated
Branch The Branch you want to filter on. If no branch is selected, you will get all branches for the selected company.
The table
Column Description
Account The account (associated with the specified branch) whose balance will be updated by the journal entry.
Branch The unique ID of the branch.
Account name The name of the control account.
Control account module

This field indicates which control account module is selected for this reconciliation batch.

The alternatives are:

  • Supplier ledger
  • Customer ledger
  • Supplier ledger and Customer ledger
Allow manual entry A check mark that restrict direct posting to the control accounts. If the check mark is set, it indicates that the account allows manual entry to correct the errors the reconciliation discloses.
Last period The last period transactions have been posted on this account.
Balance General ledger

A statement of all transactions made in the General ledger at the time given in the field Last period.

The link will open the window General ledger details.
Balance Supplier ledger This field displays the Supplier ledger ’s balance for the selected financial period.
Balance Customer ledger This field displays the Customer ledger ’s balance for the selected financial period.
Discrepancy The discrepancy amount is the difference from what is expected or acceptable between the account and the ledgers you have set to calculate.
The additional table columns The following columns also appear if the **Split by currency** check box is selected.
Column Description
Currency ID The currency for the transactions have been posted.
Balance general ledger (currency) A statement of all transactions made in the General ledger at the time given in the field Last period in currency.
Balance supplier ledger (currency) This field displays the Supplier ledger’s balance for the selected financial period in currency.
Balance customer ledger (currency) This field displays the customer ledger’s balance in currency for the selected financial period.
Discrepancy (currency) The discrepancy amount is the difference from what is expected or acceptable between the account and the ledgers you have set to calculate in currency.
Discrepancy details customer ledger vs general ledger (GL408010) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/discrepancy-details-customer-ledger-vs-general-ledger-gl408010 page This window shows discrepancies between the Customer ledger and the posted General ledger transaction for the Customer ledger account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Discrepancy details customer ledger vs general ledger (GL408010) This window shows discrepancies between the Customer ledger and the posted General ledger transaction for the Customer ledger account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It will only show documents that cause the discrepancies. You will only be able to process not-released and not-posted batches in this window. All other discrepancies must be corrected by manually posting the missing transactions. For other discrepancies, please contact Visma support, who will assist you in correcting the transactions. The window toolbar
Button Description
Release/post

By clicking Release/post, you will release marked documents. Only documents with the error message Not released in General ledger or Not posted in General ledger will be processed.

The button is only active if you have selected the Discrepancy category Unposted/Unreleased.
Hide/Unhide A button for hiding/unhiding selected lines. This is used for discrepancy lines that have been corrected.
Set reconciled period A button for updating the reconciled period, used to suggest the From period. This period is found in General ledger preferences - Discrepancy settings, Reconciled financial period.
## The top part
Field Description
Company

Filter on Company.

The column is only visible if you have activated multi-branch.
Branch

Filter on Branch.

The column is only visible if you have activated multi-branch.
Discrepancy category

Filtering different categories of discrepancies.

  • UnPosted/Unreleased [1,2,21]
  • Manually entered [22]
  • GL Transactions do not exist [0]
  • AR Transactions do not exist [20,22]
  • Amount mismatch [3,4,5,6]
  • Other work spaces [22]
  • Different branches [23]
  • Reversed batch [24]
  • Deleted documents [25]

[NN] The numbers correspond with the Discrepancy category (in the top part), see information in the Discrepancy column in the table.
Include hidden lines Selecting this checkbox will display previously hidden transactions, and you will be able to unhide the documents again.
From period

Filter on From period.

The period is suggested from Reconciled financial period in General ledger preferences and, if that is empty, it will suggest the first open period from Financial periods.
To period Filter on To period.
Account

Filter on Account.

You can only select accounts defined as Control account module for customers and suppliers.
Customer

Filter on Customer.

Select the customer you wish to filter upon.
Sum Customer ledger Sum based on the selected tab for Customer ledger documents.
Sum General ledger Sum based on the selected tab for the General ledger documents.
Sum discrepancies Sum based on the selected tab for discrepancies between the Customer ledger and the General ledger documents.
## The table This table will adjust which columns are visible, depending on the Discrepancy category selected in the **Top part**, to reduce the display of empty columns.
Column Description
Note

This is the Note from the transaction.

If the line contains a General ledger transaction, it will be the note you see or can edit and if the line only contains a Customer transaction, it will be the invoice note that will shown and can be edited.
Selected The selection column for lines you want to hide/unhide or release/post.
Hidden

A check box that, when selected, indicates that the transaction is hidden.

To hide or unhide, you can select the line and click the Hide/Unhide button. You hide transactions when you have found a matching correction transaction, so you do not need to check them again.
Discrepancy

Discrepancy types:

  1. The General ledger transaction does not exist.

  2. The General ledger transaction is not released.

  3. The General ledger transaction is not posted.

  4. The Currency ID does not match.

  5. The Currency rate does not match.

  6. The invoice ledger currency sum does not match.

  7. General ledger currency sum.

  8. The invoice ledger amount does not match General ledger amount.

  9. The Branch ID does not match.

  10. The invoice does not exist.

  11. The invoice has not been released.

  12. The General ledger transaction is directly entered.

  13. The General ledger account is used in another module.

[99] the number exists in the database text, so it can be used in Generic queries
Discrepancy amount

The difference between Customer ledger amount and General ledger amount.

(General ledger amount - Customer ledger amount)
Currency discrepancy amount The difference between Customer ledger amount and General ledger amount in currency.
Branch, Customer ledger The branch for the Customer ledger document. This document is found in the Financial setting section in customer documents.
Transaction type, Customer ledger The transaction type of the customer document.
Ref. no, Customer ledger The reference number of the customer document.
Amount, Customer ledger The total amount for the customer document.
Adjustment amount, Customer ledger Currency gain or loss amount.
Currency, Customer ledger The currency of the customer document.
Currency rate, Customer ledger The currency rate for the customer document.
Currency amount, Customer ledger The total amount in currency for the customer document.
Workspace The workspace for the voucher line in the General ledger, if the general ledger transaction is missing, it will display Customer ledger.
Transaction type, General ledger The Transaction type for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Ref. no, General ledger The Reference number for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Branch, General ledger The Branch for the voucher line in the General ledger.
General ledger, batch number The Batch no. for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Currency amount, General ledger The Currency amount for the voucher line in the General ledger.
Amount, General ledger The Amount for the voucher line.
Account number The Account number for the transaction.
Account description The Account name for the account.
Period, customer Financial period for the customer document.
Period, General ledger Financial period for the General ledger transactions.
AR Created The date when the customer document was created.
AR Created by Screen ID

The window where the customer document was created.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was created in. (00000000 = created by API).
AR Last modified by screen ID

The window where the customer document was last edited.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was modified in. (00000000 = created by API).
GL Created The date when the General ledger transaction was created.
Created by window ID General ledger

The window where the GL Batch was created.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was created in. (00000000 = created by API).
GL Last modified by screen ID

The window where the customer document was last edited.

The screen ID will tell you what window the document was modified in. (00000000 = created by API).
General ledger reports /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger reports General ledger reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview page With the wide variety of reports for the General ledger workspace, you can promptly get vital information, analyse financial data by various criteria, review transactions efficiently, and track data edits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger reports - overview With the wide variety of reports for the General ledger workspace, you can promptly get vital information, analyse financial data by various criteria, review transactions efficiently, and track data edits. Because the General ledger workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces—such as Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, and Cash management —you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. > [!NOTE] > Because the general ledger reports can be generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## General ledger reports The General ledger workspace includes the following reports: ### Balance + [Trial balance summary (GL63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-summary-gl63200s-report/): Displays the account balances for the period. + [Trial balance detailed (GL632500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-detailed-gl632500/): For the selected period, displays the balances of the accounts, detailed to subaccounts. + [Transactions for period (GL63300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-period-gl633000/): Displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. + [Transactions for account (GL633500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-account-gl633500/): Shows activities on the account and under the specified subaccount during the range of periods. ### Financial statements + [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/): Displays the company's balance sheet as of the start of the specified financial period. Assets are shown against liabilities. + [Balance sheet - quarterly (GL634500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-quarterly-gl634500/): Displays the company's balance sheet by quarter. Assets are shown against liabilities. + [Balance sheet - detailed (GL63401S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-detailed-gl63401s/): Displays the company's balance sheet by quarter. Assets are shown against liabilities. + [Balance sheet - quarterly (detailed) (GL63451S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-quarterly-detailed-gl63451s/): + Displays the company's balance sheet by quarter. Assets are shown against liabilities. + [Profit and loss (GL635000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-gl635000/): Displays your company's profits and losses for the specified period in period-to-date and year-to-date amounts, versus the period-to-date and year-to-date amounts of the previous year as calculated for the same date. + [Profit and loss (detailed) (GL63501S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-detailed-gl63501s/) + [Profit and loss - quarterly (GL635500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-quarterly-gl635500/): Displays your company's profits and losses for the specified period in period-to-date and year-to-date amounts, versus the period-to-date and year-to-date amounts of the previous year as calculated for the same date. + [Profit and loss - quarterly (detailed) (GL63551S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-quarterly-detailed-gl63551s/): Displays your company's profits and losses in year-to-date amounts for each quarter. ### Audit + [Budgets (GL612001)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/budgets-gl612001/): Displays the list of budget articles with their requested and released amounts in the selected ledger for the specified branch and for the specified financial year. + [Unreleased transactions summary (GL61150S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-summary-gl61150s/): Displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. + [Unreleased transactions account distribution (GL61100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-account-distribution-gl61100s/): Displays the list of transactions, with their details, that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. + [Unreleased transactions account distribution (currency) (GL61120S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-account-distribution-currency-gl61120s/): + [General ledger register (GL62050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-register-gl62050s/): Displays the list of all the batches released and posted to General ledger during the specified financial period. + [General ledger register (detailed) (GL62100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-register-detailed-gl62100s/): Displays the list of all the batches released and posted to General ledger during the specified financial period. Batch details include accounts, subaccounts, currency, and amounts. + [All unreleased documents (GL65601S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/all-unreleased-documents-gl65601s/) + [Account specification (GL63301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/account-specification-gl63301s/) + [Journal transactions list (GL63302S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/journal-transactions-list-gl63302s/) + [Open general ledger documents (GL656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/open-general-ledger-documents-gl656000/): Displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. + [Recurring transactions (GL641500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/recurring-transactions-gl641500/): Displays a schedule or the list of schedules created for recurring transactions. + [Recurring transactions (detailed) (GL640500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/recurring-transactions-detailed-gl640500/): Displays the details of a schedule or schedules to which recurring transactions are assigned. + [Reversing batches (GL690010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/reversing-batches-gl690010/): Displays the list of reversing batches with their details which have been generated for the selected batch. + [Balance sheet specification/Open entries (GL63309S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-specification-open-entries-gl63309s/) + [Audit transaction list (GL63303S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/audit-transaction-list-gl63303s/) + [Transactions with external codes (GL63304S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-with-external-codes-gl63304s/) + [Balance with external codes (GL63201S)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-with-external-codes-gl63201s/) Account specification (GL63301S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/account-specification-gl63301s section This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account specification (GL63301S) This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Transactions are grouped by account-subaccount pair, with each pair listed by the transaction date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ledger ID The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Company The company for which the report should include data. Select a company to view only data for this company, or leave the field blank to view data from all companies. The default is the current company.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.
Account ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period isused.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Subaccount

The subaccount or mask for a group of subaccounts.

If the field is left blank, all the transactions for the selected account in the specified period will be listed. If values are specified for only some segments, this defines a group of subaccounts with the specified values, as well as all the different values in the segments that were left blank.
Multicurrency format A check box you select to display the report in multicurrency format. If you select this check box, for accounts denominated in foreign currencies, all amounts are shown in both the base currency and the currency of denomination. (Foreign currency transactions on other accounts are also shown in two currencies.) If you clear the check box, all transactions (including foreign currency transactions) are shown in only the base currency.
Show accounts with no changes A check box that you select to include accounts with no changes into the report transactions.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} All unreleased documents (GL65601S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/all-unreleased-documents-gl65601s section This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # All unreleased documents (GL65601S) This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Transactions are shown with their status and with batch control totals in the base currency. Transactions are grouped by period and by workspace of origin; for each workspace, they are listed by date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Show only unreleased documents with VAT When this is selected, the report is displayed only with the unreleased documents that include VAT.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} All unreleased documents with VAT (GL65603S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/all-unreleased-documents-with-vat-gl65603s section This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # All unreleased documents with VAT (GL65603S) This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Transactions are shown with their status and with batch control totals in the base currency. Transactions are grouped by period and by workspace of origin; for each workspace, they are listed by date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Audit transaction list (GL63303S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/audit-transaction-list-gl63303s section This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Audit transaction list (GL63303S) This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. Transactions are grouped by reference number. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ledger ID The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Company The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Multicurrency format A check box you select to display the report in multi-currency format. If you select this check box, for accounts denominated in foreign currencies, all amounts are shown in both the base currency and the currency of denomination. (Foreign currency transactions on other accounts are also shown in two currencies.) If you clear the check box, all transactions (including foreign currency transactions) are shown in only the base currency.
Journal transaction list When this check box is selected, to the report will be printed the list of journal transaction from the selected period.
Account specification When this check box is selected, to the report will be printed the account specification from the selected period.
VAT specification When this check box is selected, to the report will be printed the VAT specification from the selected period.
Customer specification When this check box is selected, to the report will be printed the customer specification from the selected period.
Supplier specification When this check box is selected, to the report will be printed the supplier specification from the selected period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance sheet (GL634000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000 section This report displays the company's balance sheet for the selected ledger and financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance sheet (GL634000) This report displays the company's balance sheet for the selected ledger and financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the company's balance sheet for the selected ledger and financial period. Assets are shown against liabilities. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed in the report:
From financial period The financial period from which you want to view information.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information.
Symbol display (+/-) Select one of the following values: Not set, Positive values, Debit/credit values or Swap liability/expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} **Parent topic:** [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/) Balance sheet - quarterly (GL634500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-quarterly-gl634500 section This report displays the company's balance sheet as of the start of the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance sheet - quarterly (GL634500) This report displays the company's balance sheet as of the start of the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the company's balance sheet as of the start of the specified financial period. Assets are shown against liabilities. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Period

The financial period for which you want to view information.

You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Symbol display (+/-)

Select one of the following values:

  • Not set
  • Positive values
  • Debit/credit values
  • Swap liability/expense
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Balance sheet - quarterly (detailed) (GL63451S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-quarterly-detailed-gl63451s section This report displays the detailed quarterly balance sheet from the selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance sheet - quarterly (detailed) (GL63451S) This report displays the detailed quarterly balance sheet from the selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to view information. You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Symbol display (+/-) Select one of the following values: Not set, Positive values, Debit/credit values or Swap liability/expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance sheet specification/Open entries (GL63309S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-specification-open-entries-gl63309s section This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance sheet specification/Open entries (GL63309S) This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. Transactions are grouped by account-subaccount pair, with each pair listed by the transaction date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.
Ledger The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Account The account whose details you want to view.
Multicurrency format A check box you select to display the report in multicurrency format. If you select this check box, for accounts denominated in foreign currencies, all amounts are shown in both the base currency and the currency of denomination. (Foreign currency transactions on other accounts are also shown in two currencies.) If you clear the check box, all transactions (including foreign currency transactions) are shown in only the base currency.
Show detailed transactions A check box that you select to show detailed transactions on the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance sheet - detailed (GL63401S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-detailed-gl63401s section This report displays the detailed balance sheet from the selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance sheet - detailed (GL63401S) This report displays the detailed balance sheet from the selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From financial period The financial period from which you want to view information. You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information. You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Symbol display (+/-) Select one of the following values: Not set, Positive values, Debit/credit values or Swap liability/expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance with external codes (GL63201S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-with-external-codes-gl63201s section On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance with external codes (GL63201S) On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters
Element Description
Branch ID The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.
Ledger ID The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Combine totals When this check box is selected, debits and credits will be calculated to one value.
Hide zero balances When this check box is selected, accounts with zero balances will not displayed on the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Budgets (GL612001) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/budgets-gl612001 section This report displays the list of budget articles with their released amounts in the selected ledger for the specified financial year. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Budgets (GL612001) This report displays the list of budget articles with their released amounts in the selected ledger for the specified financial year. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of budget articles with their released amounts in the selected ledger for the specified financial year. Also the report lists the user names of employees who last updated each article. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger which stores the budget.

You must select a ledger.
Financial year

The financial year for which you want to view information.

Select a financial year from the list, which includes the closed years. By default, the current business year is specified.
Created by The user who created a budget.
Last modified by The user who last modified the budget.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 General ledger register (GL62050S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-register-gl62050s section This report displays the list of all batches released in the General ledger workspace for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger register (GL62050S) This report displays the list of all batches released in the General ledger workspace for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Transactions are listed by their date and shown with batch control totals in the base currency. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed in the report:
Columns Description
Company The company to be reported on. The default is the current company.
Branch The branch to be reported on.
Ledger The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Batch no. The batch the report will cover.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom you want to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch for whom you want to view information.
Multi currency format: A check box that you select to include into report transactions of other currencies.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 General ledger register (detailed) (GL62100S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-register-detailed-gl62100s section This report displays the list of all batches posted to the general ledger during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger register (detailed) (GL62100S) This report displays the list of all batches posted to the general ledger during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of all batches posted to the general ledger during the specified financial period. Batch details in the report include accounts, subaccounts, currency, and debit and credit amounts. Transactions are grouped by period and by workspace of origin; for each workspace, they are listed by date. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters toselect the information to be displayed on the report:
Column Description
Ledger The ledger to be reported on.You must select aledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Company

The company the report should cover.Select acompany, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies.By default, thecurrent company is selected.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabledin the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.Select abranch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.By default, thecurrent branch is selected.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabledin the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period The first financial period of the periodrange the report will cover. By default, the current financial period isused.
To period The last financial period of the period rangethe report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Batch number The batch the report will cover.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom youwant to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch forwhom you want to view information.
Include unposted transactions A check box that you select to include unposted transactions in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Journal transactions list (GL63302S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/journal-transactions-list-gl63302s section This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Journal transactions list (GL63302S) This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. Transactions are grouped by account-subaccount pair, with each pair listed by the transaction date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Column Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger ID

The ledger to be reported on.

You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Multicurrency format A check box that you select to include transactions of other currencies into the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Open general ledger documents (GL656000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/open-general-ledger-documents-gl656000 section This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Open general ledger documents (GL656000) This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Thisreportdisplays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. Transactions are shown with their status and with batch control totals in the base currency. Transactions are grouped by period and by workspace of origin; for each workspace, they are listed by date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first financial period in the range of periods for which you want to view information; you must specify a start period. The list of periods contains all the periods, including closed ones.
To period The last financial period in the range of periods for which you want to view information; you must specify a period here.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} [gl-reports-overview-con.html](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Profit and loss (GL635000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-gl635000 section This report displays your company profits and losses for the specified period in period-to-date and year-to-date amounts, versus these amounts of the previous year as calculated for the same date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Profit and loss (GL635000) This report displays your company profits and losses for the specified period in period-to-date and year-to-date amounts, versus these amounts of the previous year as calculated for the same date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed in the report:
From financial period The financial period from which you want to view information.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information.
Symbol display (+/-) Select one of the following values: Not set, Positive values, Debit/credit values or Swap liability/expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} **Parent topic:** [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/) Profit and loss (detailed) (GL63501S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-detailed-gl63501s section This report displays your company profits and losses for the specified period in period-to-date and year-to-date amounts, versus these amounts of the previous year as calculated for the same date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Profit and loss (detailed) (GL63501S) This report displays your company profits and losses for the specified period in period-to-date and year-to-date amounts, versus these amounts of the previous year as calculated for the same date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From financial period The financial period from which you want to view information. You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information. You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Symbol display (+/-) Select one of the following values: Not set, Positive values, Debit/credit values or Swap liability/expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Profit and loss - quarterly (GL635500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-quarterly-gl635500 section This report displays your company's profits and losses in year-to-date amounts for each quarter. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Profit and loss - quarterly (GL635500) This report displays your company's profits and losses in year-to-date amounts for each quarter. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The total amounts for the previous year are shown for comparison. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed in the report:
Period The financial period for which you want to view information. You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Symbol display (+/-) Select one of the following values: Not set, Positive values, Debit/credit values or Swap liability/expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} **Parent topic:** [General ledger reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/) Profit and loss - quarterly (detailed) (GL63551S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/profit-and-loss-quarterly-detailed-gl63551s section This report displays your company's profits and losses in year-to-date amounts for each quarter. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Profit and loss - quarterly (detailed) (GL63551S) This report displays your company's profits and losses in year-to-date amounts for each quarter. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to view information. You must select a period from the list, which contains all the periods, including the closed ones.
Symbol display (+/-) Select one of the following values: Not set, Positive values, Debit/credit values or Swap liability/expense.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Recurring transactions (GL641500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/recurring-transactions-gl641500 section This report displays a schedule or the list of schedules created for recurring transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (GL641500) This report displays a schedule or the list of schedules created for recurring transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.
Schedule A schedule which data should be displayed in the report. You can leave this field empty to view data on all schedules in the report.
Show active schedules only A check box that indicates (if selected) that the data of the active schedules only will be used in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/) Recurring transactions (detailed) (GL640500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/recurring-transactions-detailed-gl640500 section This report displays the details of a schedule or schedules to which recurring transactions are assigned. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (detailed) (GL640500) This report displays the details of a schedule or schedules to which recurring transactions are assigned. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Company The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.
Schedule A schedule which data should be displayed in the report. You can leave this field empty to view data on all schedules in the report.
Show active schedules only A check box that indicates (if selected) that the data of the active schedules only will be used in the report.
Print schedules on separate pages A check box that indicates (if selected) that information on each schedule will be displayed on a separate page of the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/) Reversing batches (GL690010) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/reversing-batches-gl690010 section This report displays the details of reversing batches for the specified batch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reversing batches (GL690010) This report displays the details of reversing batches for the specified batch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Workspace The workspace the batch originated from. You must select a workspace.
Batch number The number of a batch for which you want to view reversing batches. You must select a batch.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/) Transactions for account (GL633500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-account-gl633500 section This report shows activities on the account and under the specified subaccount during the range of periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions for account (GL633500) This report shows activities on the account and under the specified subaccount during the range of periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows activities on the account and under the specified subaccount during the range of periods. Transactions and documents are listed by date. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed in the report:
Company The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.
Ledger The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Account The account for which you want to view information. The selection list contains only accounts that you are authorized to work with. You must specify an account.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information. This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled inthe Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Workspace Visma Net workspace for which you want to view information.
Include foreign currency details A check box you select to display the report in multi-currency format. If you select this check box, for accounts denominated in foreign currencies, all amounts are shown in both the base currency and the currency of denomination. (Foreign currency transactions on other accounts are also shown in two currencies.) If you clear the check box, all transactions (including foreign currency transactions) are shown in only the base currency.
Include reclassified transactions A check box that you select to include the transactions that have been reclassified into the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} **Parent topic:** [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/general-ledger-reports-overview/) Transactions for period (GL633000) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-for-period-gl633000 section This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions for period (GL633000) This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Transactions are grouped by account-subaccount pair, with each pair listed by the transaction date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.
Ledger ID The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Period The financial period that starts a range of periods for which you want to view information. The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the financial period of the current business date is selected.
From account The first account number in the range for which you want to view information. Enter a starting and ending account to include only a range of accounts in the report; leave these fields blank to report on all accounts.
To account The last account number in the range for which you want to view information. Enter a starting and ending account to include only a range of accounts in the report; leave these fields blank to report on all accounts.
From subaccount

The starting subaccount number in the range for which you want to view information.

Enter a starting and ending subaccount to include only a range of subaccounts in the report; leave these fields blank to report on all accounts.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
To subaccount

The endring subaccount number in the range for which you want to view information.

Enter a starting and ending subaccount to include only a range of subaccounts in the report; leave these fields blank to report on all accounts.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Multicurrency format: A check box you select to display the report in multi-currency format. If you select this check box, for accounts denominated in foreign currencies, all amounts are shown in both the base currency and the currency of denomination. (Foreign currency transactions on other accounts are also shown in two currencies.) If you clear the check box, all transactions (including foreign currency transactions) are shown in only the base currency.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Transactions with external codes (GL63304S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/transactions-with-external-codes-gl63304s section This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transactions with external codes (GL63304S) This report displays the list of transactions that occurred during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Transactions are grouped by account-subaccount pair, with each pair listed by the transaction date. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch ID The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.
Ledger ID The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
From account The first account number in the range for which you want to view information. Enter a starting and ending account to include only a range of accounts in the report; leave these fields blank to report on all accounts.
To account The last account number in the range for which you want to view information. Enter a starting and ending account to include only a range of accounts in the report; leave these fields blank to report on all accounts.
Multicurrency format A check box you select to display the report in multi-currency format. If you select this check box, for accounts denominated in foreign currencies, all amounts are shown in both the base currency and the currency of denomination. (Foreign currency transactions on other accounts are also shown in two currencies.) If you clear the check box, all transactions (including foreign currency transactions) are shown in only the base currency.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Trial balance detailed (GL632500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-detailed-gl632500 section This period-end report displays the balances for accounts, including subaccount details, for the chosen period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Trial balance detailed (GL632500) This period-end report displays the balances for accounts, including subaccount details, for the chosen period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This period-end report displays the balances for accounts, including subaccount details, for the chosen period. Types of accounts are listed according to the order specified in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. Accounts of the same type are listed in alphanumeric order, and subaccounts are listed according to the alphanumeric order of segment values, starting with the leftmost segment. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed in the report:
Company

The company the report should cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger The ledger to be reported on. You must select a ledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Period The financial period for which you want to view information. The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. You must specify a period.
Hide zero balances A check box that you select to remove from the report accounts that have all zero values (beginning and ending balance, credits, and debits separately or combined).
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Trial balance summary (GL63200S) report /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/trial-balance-summary-gl63200s-report section This period-end report displays the account balances for the selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Trial balance summary (GL63200S) report This period-end report displays the account balances for the selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report includes the beginning and ending balances, as well as the period's total debits and credits. Accounts are grouped by their types ( **Assets**, **Liabilities**, **Income**, and **Expenses** ), and these groups of accounts are listed according to the order specified in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. Accounts of the same type are listed in alphanumeric order. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company the report should cover.

Select a company, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.

Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger to be reported on.

By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Financial year

The financial year to be reported on.

By default, the current financial year is selected.
From period

The period from when the report should start.

By default, the current financial period is selected.
To period

The period from when the report should end. By default, the current financial period is selected. The list of periods contains all periods including closed periods.

If the ’to period’ is before the ‘from period’, you will get a warning on the report saying ‘Select a To period that is after the From Period’.

If the ’to period’ is not within the financial year, you will get a warning on the report saying ‘The selected periods are crossing years. The ending balance for income and expense is not correct.’.
From account

The first account in a series of accounts that the report should include.

When the report is run, you can click on each account in the report to open the Account details (GL404000) window to see the transaction lines.
To account

The last account in a series of account that the report should include.

When the report is run, you can click on each account in the report to open the Account details (GL404000) window to see the transaction lines.
Combine totals Select this check box if you want totals to be combined in the report.
Hide zero balances Select this check box if you want to remove accounts that have all zero values (beginning and ending balance, credits, and debits separately or combined) from the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Unreleased transactions (detailed) (GL610500) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-gl610500 section This report displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (detailed) (GL610500) This report displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. Transactions, which are shown with all details, are grouped by workspace and listed for each workspace by the date of the batch. ## Report parameters On thistab, use the following parameters to select theinformation to be displayed on the report:
Company

The company the report should cover.Select acompany, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies.By default, thecurrent company is selected.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabledin the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch the report should cover.Select abranch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches.By default, thecurrent branch is selected.

This field is only available if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabledin the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger

The ledger to be reported on.You must select a ledger.

By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the periodrange the report will cover.You must select a period. By default, the currentfinancial period is selected.
To period: The last financial period of the period rangethe report will cover.You must select a period. By default, the currentfinancial period is selected.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom youwant to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch forwhom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box that you select to include into report transactions that have the Hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Unreleased transactions summary (GL61150S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-summary-gl61150s section This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period.Transactions are shown with their status and with batch control totals in the base currency.Transactions are grouped by period and by workspace of origin; for each workspace, they are listed by date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions summary (GL61150S) This report displays the list of all the transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period.Transactions are shown with their status and with batch control totals in the base currency.Transactions are grouped by period and by workspace of origin; for each workspace, they are listed by date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report** parameters tab. ## Report parameters On thistab, use the following parameters to select theinformation to be displayed on the report:
Columns Description
Ledger The ledger to be reported on.You must select aledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
From period The first financial period of the periodrange the report will cover. By default, the current financial period isused.
To period The last financial period of the period rangethe report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom youwant to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch forwhom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box that you select to include into report transactions that have the Hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Unreleased transactions account distribution (GL61100S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-account-distribution-gl61100s section This report shows transactions entered but not released for different accounts during the specified period (or all open periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions account distribution (GL61100S) This report shows transactions entered but not released for different accounts during the specified period (or all open periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows transactions entered but not released for different accounts during the specified period (or all open periods). Batches are grouped by account–subaccount pair, and for each pair they are listed by date. All amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Report parameters On thistab, use the following parameters to select theinformation to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ledger ID The ledger to be reported on.You must select aledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Company The company the report should cover.Select acompany, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, thecurrent company is selected.
From period The first financial period of the periodrange the report will cover. By default, the current financial period isused.
To period The last financial period of the period rangethe report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom youwant to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch forwhom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box that you select to include into report transactions that have the Hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased transactions account distribution (currency) (GL61120S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-account-distribution-currency-gl61120s section This report displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions account distribution (currency) (GL61120S) This report displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period. Transactions, which are shown with all details, are grouped by account and listed by the date of the batch. ## Report parameters On thistab, use the following parameters to select theinformation to be displayed on the report:
Column Description
Ledger ID The ledger to be reported on.You must select aledger. By default, the actual ledger is selected.
Company The company the report should cover.Select acompany, or leave the field blank to view data on all companies. By default, thecurrent company is selected.
Branch The branch the report should cover.Select abranch, or leave the field blank to view data on all branches. By default, thecurrent branch is selected.
From period The first financial period of the periodrange the report will cover. By default, the current financial period isused.
To period The last financial period of the period rangethe report will cover.By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch for whom youwant to view information.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch forwhom you want to view information.
Include transactions on hold A check box that you select to include into report transactions that have the Hold status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Voucher details inquiry (GL40601S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/voucher-details-inquiry-gl40601s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Voucher details inquiry (GL40601S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View batch Opens the Journal transactions (GL301000) window where you can view the details of the batch in which the voucher is included.
View document Opens the window where the document in which the voucher is included was first created.
## The top part
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the voucher whose details you want to view.
From period The financial period that begins the date range of the vouchers you want to view.
To period The financial period that ends the date range of the vouchers you want to view.
Ledger Select the ledger to which the vouchers belong you want to view.
Workspace Select the workspace from which the vouchers originate you want to view.
From account The account starting from which you want to view vouchers.
To account The account to which you want to view vouchers.
Subaccount Select a subaccount if you want to view vouchers with a certain subaccount.
Include unreleased general ledger documents When this is checked, unreleased general documents are also included in the table.
## The table In this table, the list shows the vouchers that match the criteria specified in the top part.
Column Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the voucher whose details you are viewing.
Batch number The number of the batch in which the voucher is included.
Workspace

The workspace where the transaction originated.

This column is displayed for the selected range of days or periods, there are transactions originating in other workspaces that updated the balance of the selected account.
Transaction type The type of the transaction on the line.
Transaction date The date of the transaction on the line.
Post period The post period of the transaction.
Account The payment account of the transaction.
Subaccount The subaccount used on the transaction, if any.
Transaction description The description of the transaction.
Debit amount The debit amount of the transaction.
Credit amount The credit amount of the transaction.
Batch status The status of the batch to which the transaction belongs.
Amount This is the amount shown as positive for debit transactions and negative for credit transactions.
Ledger

It shows the name of the selected ledger in the heading.

NOTE! All ledger types except budget will be shown here.

Related pages

Concepts

 Voucher document inquiry (GL40400S) /visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/voucher-document-inquiry-gl40400s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Voucher document inquiry (GL40400S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Branch The branch to which the documents you want to view belong.
Workspace To view the documents that originate from a certain workspace, select the workspace here.
Doc. type The type of the documents you want to view.
Workbook ID To view the documents that originate from a certain workbook, select the workbook here.
From period The first financial period in the date range of the documents you want to view.
From ref. no. The first reference number in the date range of the documents you want to view.
Show only deleted When you select this check box, only the deleted documents will be displayed in the table.
To period The last financial period in the date range of the documents you want to view.
To ref. no. The last reference number in the date range of the documents you want to view.
## The table with option General ledger
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Workspace The workspace where the transaction originated.
Batch no. The batch number of the external document on which this transaction is based. Click the link to navigate to the appropriate window to view the details of the transaction.
Description The description of the transaction, if any.
Workbook ID The workbook from which the transaction originates.
Transaction date The date of the transaction.
Post period The post period of the transaction.
Debit total The total debit amount on the transaction.
Credit total The total credit amount on the transaction.
Status The status of the transaction in the general ledger.
Released This check box is selected, if the transaction has been released.
Posted This check box is selected, if the transaction has been posted.
Voided This check box is selected, if the transaction has been voided.
Deleted This check box is selected, if the transaction has been deleted.
Created by The name of the user who has created the transaction.
Created in window ID The system window in which the transaction was created.
Created on The date when the transaction was created.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the transaction.
Last modified on The date when the transaction was last modified.
Last modified in window ID The system window where the transaction was last modified.
## The table with the option Supplier ledger
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Type The type of the supplier ledger document.
Ref. no The number that identifies the supplier ledger document in the system, as generated by the system according to the number series assigned to documents of this type in the Supplier ledger preferences window.
Description The description of the document, if any.
Batch no. The batch number of the external document on which this transaction is based. Click the link to navigate to the appropriate window so you can view the details of the document.
Pre-releasing batch no If the document has been pre-released in a batch, the number of the batch is displayed here.
Workbook ID The workbook from which the document originates.
Supplier The number of the supplier on the purchase document.
Supplier name The name of the supplier on the purchase document.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The post period of the document.
Amount The total amount for the specified quantity of items or services of this type (after the discount has been taken).
Balance The open balance of the document.
Status The status of the document in the supplier ledger.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval.
Released This check box is selected, if the transaction has been released.
Voided This check box is selected, if the transaction has been voided.
Deleted This check box is selected, if the transaction has been deleted.
Created by The name of the user who has created the transaction.
Created on The date when the transaction was created.
Created in window ID The system window in which the transaction was created.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the transaction.
Last modified in window ID The system window where the transaction was last modified.
Last modified on The date when the transaction was last modified.
## The table with the Customer ledger option
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Type The type of the customer ledger document.
Ref. no The number that identifies the customer ledger document in the system.
Invoice text The informative text written to the sales invoice, if any.
Batch no. The batch number of the external document on which this transaction is based. Click the link to navigate to the appropriate window so you can view the details of the document.
Workbook ID The workbook from which the document originates.
Customer The number of the customer on the sales document.
Customer name The name of the customer on the sales document.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The post period of the document.
Amount The total amount for the specified quantity of items or services of this type (after the discount has been taken).
Balance The open balance of the document.
Status The status of the document in the supplier ledger.
Released This check box is selected, if the transaction has been released.
Voided This check box is selected, if the transaction has been voided.
Deleted This check box is selected, if the transaction has been deleted.
Created by The name of the user who has created the transaction.
Created in window ID The system window in which the transaction was created.
Created on The date when the transaction was created.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the transaction.
Last modified in window ID The system window where the transaction was last modified.
Last modified on The date when the transaction was last modified.
## The table with the Cash management option is selected
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs.
Trans. Type The type of the transaction.
Ref. no The number that identifies the customer ledger document in the system.
Description The description of the transaction, if any.
Batch no. The batch number of the external document on which this transaction is based. Click the link to navigate to the appropriate window so you can view the details of the document.
Workbook ID The workbook from which the transaction originates.
Cash account The cash account connected with the transaction.
Disb./receipt The type of the transaction, disbursement or receipt.
Entry type The entry type of this disbursement or receipt.
Trans. date The date of the transaction.
Period The post period of the document.
Amount The total amount for the specified quantity of items or services of this type (after the discount has been taken).
Status The status of the transaction in cash management.
Released This check box is selected, if the transaction has been released.
Deleted This check box is selected, if the transaction has been deleted.
Created by The name of the user who has created the transaction.
Created in window ID The system window in which the transaction was created.
Created on The date when the transaction was created.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the transaction.
Last modified in window ID The system window where the transaction was last modified.
Last modified on The date when the transaction was last modified.
Integration /visma-net-erp/help/integration section The implementation of an ERP system is a complex process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Integration The implementation of an ERP system is a complex process. The implementation of an ERP system is a complex process. During implementation, your organisation may migrate data from legacy apps to eliminate manual entry. Some companies continue to use legacy apps, even during or after implementation. Visma Net's distributed design allows assembling apps from various suppliers to match business needs. Specialised country-specific software, like VAT reporting and payroll, requires regular updates for compliance. Data synchronisation is crucial to maintain consistency between source and target. ## Best practices for importing data Before you import data into your live system, take the following necessary precautions: 1. Create a snapshot of your system with all the data available. This snapshot will help you restore the data if anything goes wrong with the import. 1. Validate the scenario. Before you start importing real data, which sometimes has hundreds or thousands of records, prepare a test file that contains no more than 10 records and import from that file first. 1. Perform the operation when the users are inactive or less active, for example, overnight. If the import was performed successfully but you imported the wrong data, you can modify the same scenario that was used for import to remove the imported data from the system. ## Data providers If you need to transfer data between an external application and Visma Net, you have to convert the data in an external format to or from the data in the format of Visma Net. The tool you use to perform such conversions in Visma Net is a **data provider**. A configured data provider, which has information about the source of external data and the structure of the data, performs data transfers between the external application or external file and Visma Net. You create data providers in the [Data providers](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. To create a provider, you specify its name and type, the access parameters to the source, and the data schema. You can find more information on data providers in [Data providers](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/). ## Import scenarios To import data from an external system or file to Visma Net, you need to map the external data fields to the fields of an Visma Net window. To define such mapping in Visma Net, you use **import scenarios**. An import scenario specifies the sequence of actions to be performed by Visma Net to import data from an external source. You can create an import scenario in one of the following ways: + **Standard way**: First you create a data provider, and then you add a new import scenario and map the data. + **Simplified way**: You upload the file, map window elements to external data, and then import the data. The data provider and the standard import scenario are added automatically. [Simplified scenarios for data import](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/importing-and-exporting-records-by-using-scenarios/simplified-scenarios-for-data-import/). For more information, see: ## Export scenarios **Export scenarios** are used primarily to export data from Visma Net to an external data source, such as a file or SQL table. You can also use export scenarios to update records in the system. For example, you can use export scenarios to mark records in the system once they have been exported to exclude them from future exports. As another example: Suppose you want to update existing records or mass-execute some action on them. If you have the list of particular record IDs that you want to update, it is easier to compose an import scenario and update the records by processing the list of IDs. If you have no list of IDs, you can compose an export scenario to select and update the needed records by the specified condition. For more information on export scenarios, see: [Configuring export scenarios](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/integration/configuring-export-scenarios/configuring-export-scenarios/). ## Easy data conversion Each of the built-in data providers, which are reusable and require no additional custom code, recognises the data structure of the file or application and efficiently converts data from the particular external format into the internal format of Visma Net; it also efficiently converts internal data into the particular external format. Nevertheless, you may need to convert the data during import or export to formats specific to the particular system or perform other necessary data transformation. To do this, you can create formulas with the help of the easy-to-use formula editor. For details, see the following topics: + [Formulas in the mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/formulas-in-the-mapping/) + [Functions](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/functions/) + [Operators](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/operators/) Preparing data for import and export by using scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios section Before you import data to or export data from Visma Net, you must define to the Visma Net system the format of the data in the external system or file. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preparing data for import and export by using scenarios Before you import data to or export data from Visma Net, you must define to the Visma Net system the format of the data in the external system or file. Before you import data to or export data from Visma Net, you must define to the Visma Net system the format of the data in the external system or file. For this purpose, you use data providers in the system. In this chapter, you will find detailed information on data providers and will learn how to create data providers for the external data. Preparing data for import and export by using scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios page Before you import data to or export data from Visma Net, you must define to the Visma Net system the format of the data in the external system or file. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preparing data for import and export by using scenarios Before you import data to or export data from Visma Net, you must define to the Visma Net system the format of the data in the external system or file. Before you import data to or export data from Visma Net, you must define to the Visma Net system the format of the data in the external system or file. For this purpose, you use data providers in the system. In this chapter, you will find detailed information on data providers and will learn how to create data providers for the external data.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 About import and export scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/about-import-and-export-scenarios page To upload data to and from Visma Net, you can use import scenarios and export scenarios, which define the data import and data export instructions, respectively, for the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About import and export scenarios To upload data to and from Visma Net, you can use import scenarios and export scenarios, which define the data import and data export instructions, respectively, for the system. To upload data to and from Visma Net, you can use **import scenarios**and**export scenarios**, which define the data import and data export instructions, respectively, for the system. An import or export scenario is a sequence of actions to be executed for a data record as if the record is being manipulated by user through an Visma Net window. When you enter data into the system manually, you perform a sequence of actions. You open the needed data entry window and start entering data. To add a new record, you use the UI elements one by one or you type text, select values from combo boxes, clear or select check boxes, and click buttons. In the corresponding scenario, you compose exactly the same sequence of actions, you specify a command for each user action in the window. Just as you cannot perform multiple actions simultaneously in the window, the scenario executes commands successively. To construct the scenario, you reflect the actions you make in the window in the sequence of commands for the scenario. Because in these scenarios you either save data to an external system or file, or upload data from an external system or file to Visma Net, you must define in Visma Net the format of the external system or file. For this purpose, you set up a **data provider** in the system. A data provider is an entity that defines the structure of the external data source; Visma Net then uses the data provider to transfer data from and to the external system or file. Therefore, to use an integration scenario, you have to define the data provider and the needed import or export scenario. An integration scenario works as if the data is being manually processed in a Visma Net window. ## Manual input and integration scenarios input When you are creating an integration scenario, you first create the needed data provider, which defines the type and schema of the data source. For example: The type can be an Excel file, and the schema of an Excel data source consists of the names of spreadsheets that should be used for data import or export and the list of columns on the spreadsheets. If the external data source has changed (for example, if a new column has been added to an Excel spreadsheet), you have to update the data provider in Visma Net to be able to use the new column in scenarios for which the data provider is specified. After you have prepared the data provider, the second step is to define the scenario, including the scenario mapping. You can construct a scenario for any data entry window. In the scenario, you use internal fields, which are the fields of Visma Net, and external fields, which are defined in the specified data provider. In the scenario, you map internal fields to external fields and specify commands. An integration scenario is specific to the Visma Net window and the external data schema. After the scenario is ready, you can run the import or export for the scenario to get the result. You can also schedule scenarios to be run, so that you can import and export data on a regular basis.

Related pages

Tasks

 About data providers /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/about-data-providers page You create data providers in the Data providers (SM206015) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About data providers You create data providers in the Data providers (SM206015) window. For more information: [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/). You create data providers in the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. To create a provider, you specify its name and type, the access parameters to the source, and the data schema. ## Data provider types Excel spreadsheets or files in CSV format are generally used for data exchange between different ERP products, because most ERP products support exporting and importing data in these formats. Besides using files in an external format as a data source, you can import data from or export data to an external application directly. For example: You can connect to a Microsoft SQL Server and download data from it or upload data to it. Visma Net provides a number of built-in types of data providers through which the application can efficiently import data from external files or third-party software to Visma Net, or export data from Visma Net to external destinations. These types of data providers, which you use when you configure a provider on the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window, are listed below: + File providers that you use to access data in external files: + **CSV provider** ( `PX.DataSync.CSVSYProvider` ): For import from and export to files in CSV format + **Excel provider** ( `PX.DataSync.ExcelSYProvider` ): For import from and export to Excel spreadsheets + **XML provider** ( `PX.DataSync.XMLSYProvider` ): For import from and export to files in XML format + Providers that are preconfigured for importing data from and exporting data to external systems: + **Salesforce provider** ( `PX.DataSync.SFSYProvider` ): For import from and export to SalesForce CRM by using the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP). + **MS SQL provider** ( `PX.DataSync.MSSqlSYProvider` ): For import from and export to Microsoft SQL Server. + **HubSpot provider** ( `PX.DataSync.HubSpot.HSSYProvider` ): For exporting leads to HubSpot for nurturing and importing leads to Visma Net for processing. + Providers for exporting payment data to external payment systems: + **ACH provider** ( `PX.DataSync.ACHProvider` ): For exporting data for processing in the Automated Clearing House (ACH) system. + **Giro Payment provider** ( `PX.DataSync.Banks.GIROPaymentProvider` ): For exporting data for processing in giro-based payment systems. To import data from other sources, you need to create a custom data provider by using the API provided by Visma Net. ## Provider parameters To define a particular data source to be used for import or export, you define the parameters of the data provider in the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. The set of parameters depends on the data provider type, as described below: + **Parameters of file providers:** File providers generally have a simple set of parameters that specify the file properties necessary for accessing data in the file. Each of the file providers has the **FileName** parameter, which specifies the path to the file that should be used for data import or export. The path to the file is set automatically after you have uploaded an external file to the provider. The **FileName** parameter displays the path to the uploaded file in the internal format: `Data Providers ()\`, where `` and `` are replaced with the corresponding values. Other parameters of a file provider depend on the provider type. You should specify these parameters so the system can correctly open the file and process the contents of the file. + **Parameters of providers that connect to external data systems:** For providers that connect to external data systems, such as SalesForce or MS SQL provider, you specify a set of parameters for connecting Visma Net to the external system. Each of these providers has a parameter that you use to specify the location of the remote resource. This parameter is either the URL of a remote service or the path to a local server. Other parameters are specific to each provider type. These parameters are necessary for authentication on the remote resource. ## External data schema Data that you are going to transfer between an external data source and Visma Net usually has a table structure. That is, the data includes a number of data records, and each record has a list of parameters specified. You specify the structure of an external data source for a data provider by defining the external data schema or you specify the objects and fields of the data source. The object is usually the whole data source or a part of the data source that corresponds to a complete data table. For example: For an Excel file, objects correspond to spreadsheets. For the source objects that should be used for import or export, you should select the **Active** check box in the **Source objects** table on the **Schema** tab of the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. Source fields are defined by the list of attributes that are specified for each record. For an Excel file, source fields correspond to columns on a spreadsheet. For each field you want to use the field in a scenario, you should select the **Active** check box in the **Source fields** table on the **Schema** tab of the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. ## Data provider creation You create data providers in the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. The process of creating a data provider consists of the following general steps: 1. **Reviewing the structure of external data** Before you create the data provider, you review the external source to identify the needed provider type and the external data schema. If you are going to import data to Visma Net, you review the source data to determine the needed provider type, to check that the data meets the requirements, and to see the external data schema. If you are going to export data from Visma Net, you review the data schema in the target file or application to which you want to export the Visma Net data, or create a file to hold the data to be exported and provide field names matching the intended use of the data. 1. **Creating a provider and setting its type** In the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window, you create the data provider. You specify the name of the provider, which usually describes the data you will transfer by using this provider. You also select the needed type of the provider. You can use built-in provider types or develop a custom data provider type. 1. **Specifying the provider parameters** On the **Parameters** tab of the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window, you specify the particular data source. You attach a file or specify the location of the remote source. You also specify the source-dependent parameters, if necessary. 1. **Filling in the source objects and fields of the provider** On the **Schema** tab of the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window, you fill in objects and fields from the attached file or remote resource to the data provider. After that, the data provider is ready and can be edited as needed. For a file provider, you can upload the new version of an attached file and then update source objects and fields. For a provider connected to a remote system, you can reload the data schema from the server if you make any changes.

Related pages

Tasks

 Create a CSV data provider /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/create-a-csv-data-provider section You use the Data providers - reference information window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a CSV data provider You use the Data providers - reference information window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. For more information: [Data providers - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/). This procedure describes how to create a data provider that works with the records in a CSV file. 1. Review the file for which you need to create the data provider to identify the needed provider parameters (the delimiter that is used in the file and file encoding) and external data schema. 1. Go to the [Data providers - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. 1. Create a provider and specify the following settings: + **Name**: The name of the provider. It usually describes the data you will transfer by using this provider, such as Import/Export Customers + **Data Type**: **CSV Provider** (PX.DataSync.CSVSYProvider) 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system requires you to save the provider before you upload the file. 1. Drag and drop the file to the window, and refresh the window in your browser. The file is uploaded to the window. As an alternative to this step, to upload the source file to the window, in the title bar, click **Files**. In the **Files** dialog box that opens, click **Browse** to locate the source file. Select the file, and click **Open**. In the dialog box, click **Upload** to upload the file to the website; then close the dialog box. 1. On the **Parameters** tab, do the following to set the parameters of the data provider: + Check that the value of the **FileName** parameter is correct; it was filled in automatically when you uploaded the file. + As the value of the **Encoding** parameter, specify the encoding of the source file by selecting the proper encoding value from the drop-down list in the **Value** column of the table. + As the value of the **Delimiter** parameter, specify the delimiter that is used in the CSV file. 1. Open the **Schema** tab. In the **Source objects** area, select the **Active** check box for the only available object of the CSV provider to make the object available in integration scenarios. If you don't see an object on the **Source objects** area, click **Fill schema objects** in the toolbar of the **Source objects** area. 1. In the toolbar of the **Source fields** area, click **Fill schema fields**. The system displays the field names available in the file in this area. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for all the fields of the file for which data will be imported or exported. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You have created a CSV data provider that you can use in an import or export scenario.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create an Excel data provider /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/create-an-excel-data-provider section You use the Data providers (SM206015) window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an Excel data provider You use the Data providers (SM206015) window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. For more information: [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/). You use the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. This procedure describes how to create a data provider that works with the records in an Excel file. ## Create an Excel data provider 1. Review the data file for which you need to create the data provider to identify the external data schema. Open the file and review the available columns. Make sure that you understand how the names of the columns match the contents. 1. Go to the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. 1. Create a provider with the following settings: + **Name**: The name of the provider, which usually describes the data you will transfer by using this provider, such as Import/Export AR Invoices. + **Data type**: **Excel provider** (PX.DataSync.ExcelSYProvider The list of provider parameters becomes available on the **Parameters** tab, which contains one parameter: **FileName**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The system requires that you save the provider before you upload a file. 1. Drag and drop the file to the form, and refresh the window in your browser. The file is uploaded to the window. As an alternative to this step, to upload the source file to the window, in the title bar, click **Files**. In the **Files** dialog box that opens, click **Browse** to locate the source file. Select the file, and click **Open**. In the dialog box, click **Upload** to upload the file to the website; then close the dialog box. The **FileName** parameter is set to the name of the file that you have uploaded. 1. On the toolbar of the **Source objects** area of the **Schema** tab, select the **Active** check box for the needed object (which corresponds to a spreadsheet) to make the object available in integration scenarios. 1. On the toolbar of the **Source fields** area, click **Fill schema fields**. The system displays the fields available in the source file in this area. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for all the columns of the file for which data will be imported or exported. 1. Repeat the previous two steps for all the objects (spreadsheets) and fields (columns) that you want to use for data import and export. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You have created an Excel data provider that you can use in an import or export scenario.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create a Microsoft SQL data provider /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/create-a-microsoft-sql-data-provider section You use the Data providers (SM206015) window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a Microsoft SQL data provider You use the Data providers (SM206015) window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. For more information: [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/). You use the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window to create a data provider that defines the structure of external data for Visma Net during data import or data export. This procedure describes how to create a Microsoft SQL data provider that is used to transfer data between Visma Net and a table of a Microsoft SQL Server database. 1. Review the columns of the database table for which you need to create the data provider to identify the external data schema. 1. Go to the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. 1. Create a provider, and specify the following settings for it: 1. **Name**: The name of the provider, which usually describes the data you will transfer by using this provider. 1. **Data Type**: **MS SQL Provider**. 1. On the **Parameters** tab, do the following: 1. As the value of the **Server** parameter, specify one of the following: + The name of the computer where the Microsoft SQL Server instance is installed if you use the default instance of Microsoft SQL Server. + The name of the computer and the name of the Microsoft SQL Server instance if you use a named instance. 1. Specify the database name as the value of the **Database** parameter. 1. Specify the login and password for accessing the SQL Server instance and the type of authentication that is used by the SQL Server instance (either **SQL** or **Windows** ). 1. On the toolbar in the **Source objects** area of the **Schema** tab, click **Fill schema objects**. The system connects to the database, pulls the list of tables and views from it, and populates the **Source objects** tab with the schema objects that correspond to tables and views. If you don't see **Fill schema objects** in the toolbar, click ![Images-How_to_Create_a_Provider_for_Data_Import_SM_20_60_15Icon_FillIn](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-How_to_Create_a_Provider_for_Data_Import_SM_20_60_15Icon_FillIn.jpg), to display any buttons that do not fit on the toolbar. 1. Select the **Active** check box for the needed object. In the toolbar of the **Source fields** area, click **Fill schema fields**. The system displays the column headers available in the source database table. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for all needed fields. 1. Repeat the previous step for all objects (SQL tables and views) that you want to import data to and export data from. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You have created a Microsoft SQL data provider that you can use in an import or export scenario.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Modify a file data provider /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/modify-a-file-data-provider section You can use the Data providers (SM206015) window to modify existing data providers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Modify a file data provider You can use the Data providers (SM206015) window to modify existing data providers. For more information: [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/). If the data source has changed, for example, if you have added a column to the Excel file, you have to update the data provider. To update the data provider, you have to replace the file attached to the provider in the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window and update the provider schema. 1. Go to the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. 1. Select the provider that you want to modify, and in the window title bar, click **Files**. 1. In the **Files** dialog box, click **Edit** to the right of the file name. Clicking **Edit** opens the [File maintenance (SM202510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/file-maintenance-sm202510/) window, which displays the details of the file attachment. 1. In the toolbar, click **Check out** to make the file unavailable to other users for editing while you are updating it. You may skip this step if no other users can work with this file simultaneously. 1. Click **Get latest version** in the toolbar, and download the file. Open the file and modify it. Save the edited version to your computer. You do not necessarily have to download the file first; you can just upload a new version and skip this step. 1. In the window toolbar of the [File maintenance (SM202510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/file-maintenance-sm202510/) window, click **Upload new version** to open the **File upload** dialog box, and upload the edited version of the file into the system. If you checked the file out, select the **Check in** check box to make the file available for editing to other users. On the **Versions** tab, notice the list of available file versions (see the screenshot below). If necessary, you could download or restore the needed file version. To download a file version, select the needed version and click **View selected version** in the table toolbar. Then you can upload the file as a new version. To delete a file version, click **Delete row** in the table toolbar. 1. Close the [File maintenance (SM202510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/file-maintenance-sm202510/) window and the **Files** dialog box to resume work in the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. 1. On the **Schema** tab, on the toolbar of the **Source fields** area, click **Fill schema objects**. The system updates the list of available objects. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for all objects that you need to use for data import or data export. 1. For each active source object, select the object on the **Source fields** area and click **Fill schema fields** in the toolbar of the **Source fields** area. The system updates the list of available fields. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected for all fields that you need to use for data import or data export. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Link a file data provider to an existing file /visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/link-a-file-data-provider-to-an-existing-file section The file that should be used for creating the data provider may be already uploaded to Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Link a file data provider to an existing file The file that should be used for creating the data provider may be already uploaded to Visma Net. The file that should be used for creating the data provider may be already uploaded to Visma Net. In this case, you perform the steps described below. You use the [Search in files (SM202520)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/search-in-files-sm202520/) window to get the link of the file you need to link to a file provider. You then use the [Data providers](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window to create a provider and specify the copied link on that window. 1. Go to the [Search in files (SM202520)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/search-in-files-sm202520/) window. 1. In the **File name contains** field, type the name of the file that you need to link to a file provider and press Enter. The table in the lower right area contains the list of files matching the specified criteria. 1. For the needed file that appeared in the search results, click **Get file link**, and copy the internal link to the file from the **Attached file link** dialog box. 1. Go to the [Data providers](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. 1. Create a data provider, and specify its name and type in the **Name** and **Data type** fields. 1. On the **Parameters** tab, set the **FileName** parameter value to the copied link. 1. On the **Schema** tab in the **Source objects** area, click **Fill schema objects**. The source objects appear on the tab. Select the **Active** check box for the needed object. In the **Source fields** area, click **Fill schema fields**. The fields have been retrieved from the file and appear on the tab. Make sure all fields are active. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You have created a file provider and linked it to a file that was uploaded to the system earlier. This provider can be used for importing or exporting records.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Configuring import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios section You create import scenarios in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configuring import scenarios You create import scenarios in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/). To create an import scenario, you should specify its name, the Visma Net window that should be used for importing data, the data provider that defines the structure of the imported data, and the data provider object. You should also configure the mapping of the scenario. Import scenario creation /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/import-scenario-creation page You create import scenarios in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import scenario creation You create import scenarios in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/). The creation of the import scenario consists of the following general steps: ## 1. Analysing the sequence of actions in the window Before you start creating an import scenario in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, you should create a data provider, as described in [About data providers](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/preparing-data-for-import-and-export-by-using-scenarios/about-data-providers/), and learn how a data record is entered in the target Visma Net window. When reviewing the Visma Net window for which you will compose the import scenario, pay attention to the required fields in the window. All these fields must be filled in when you create a new record. Some fields in the window can get default values, which can also be used during import. For example: You can configure customer classes before you import customer records so that when these records are imported, the system gets most of settings from the customer class specified for the customer. You can provide the values of the fields that have default values during import and override these default values. Make sure all required data fields either are included in the imported data or are filled with default values. Before you start creating a scenario, we strongly recommend that you manually enter one record of the imported data or a test record. (During import, you can exclude this record from processing to avoid duplication of records in the system). Pay attention to the sequence of actions you perform: the order in which you specify values in the fields in the window and the actions you perform for the entered record, such as adding a new row and saving your changes. ## 2. Specifying scenario parameters The parameters of an import scenario define the name of the scenario, the Visma Net window to which data will be imported, and the data provider and source object, which together specify the data source. You can also set other import scenario parameters that define the mode of import and the properties of the data being imported. ## 3. Creating mapping of the scenario Mapping is the process of creating one-way relations between the fields of an external data source and the fields of a Visma Net window. To provide mapping for a particular field in a Visma Net window, you perform the following steps on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window: 1. Add a row for the field you want to map. 1. In the **Target object** column, specify the Visma Net object that includes the target field. An object represents a group of fields in a Visma Net window, such as the top part or a detail tab. 1. In the **Field/action name** column, select the appropriate internal field or action. An internal field is a field of the Visma Net object selected in the **Target object** column. 1. In the **Source field/value** column, select the matching external field, internal field, or combination of internal and external fields, functions, and constants. An external field is a field of the object from the data provider specified in the scenario. When you are mapping fields, you should first map the key fields: the fields that the system uses to distinguish records that belong to different documents. For example: In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, there are two key fields: **Type** and **Reference no**. You should map these fields before you map the other fields, because you fill in these fields first on the window when you manually enter an invoice. After you have mapped key fields, you should map other fields in the order in which you would fill them in, in the window. You can deactivate some rows of the scenario mapping by clearing the **Active** check box for corresponding rows. This will exclude the corresponding instruction from the scenario mapping, and this instruction will not be executed during the import process. At the end of the mapping of the scenario that imports or updates data in the system, to save the imported record to the database, you have to insert a row with the **<Action: Save>** action. ## 4. Configuring source and target restrictions To import only some records from the data source or update only the records that satisfy some condition, you can configure source and target restrictions for an import scenario in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. You can find detailed descriptions and examples of the use of source and target restrictions in the following topics: + [Source restrictions in import scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/source-restrictions-in-import-scenarios/) + [Target restrictions in import scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/target-restrictions-in-import-scenarios/) After these steps have been performed, the scenario is ready, and you can use it for data processing. Import scenario parameters /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/import-scenario-parameters page When you begin creating an import scenario by using the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, you specify the following required parameters: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import scenario parameters When you begin creating an import scenario by using the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, you specify the following required parameters: For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/). Name : In this field, you specify a name that reflects the functionality of the import scenario. You have to use unique names between import and export scenarios. Window name : In this field you select the Visma Net window that should be used for data import. Provider : and **Provider object**: In these fields, you select one of the previously created data providers and its object that should be used for data import. If you select a file data provider, Visma Net automatically attaches to the scenario in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window the file used for file data provider creation. This file is shared between the data provider and the import scenario that uses it for data import or it is attached to both the [Data providers - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window for the provider and the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window for the scenario. You can view and modify the attached file in the [File maintenance (SM202510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/file-maintenance-sm202510/) window; to open the window, while you are viewing the import scenario, click **Files** in the title bar. After you specify the required parameters, you can set the following optional parameters: + **Sync type**: By default, the **Full** sync type is selected in this field, which means that all data available in the source is imported. Selecting a different option is useful if you use the same scenario regularly for importing only some of the data from the source. For example: If after the initial import you need to periodically upload new data records that have appeared in the source. If the data is imported from a file data source, you can set the scenario to import the data only if a new version of the source file is provided before import. To do this, set **Sync type** to **Incremental - All records** or **Incremental - New only**; both options provide the same result. In this case, if you upload a new version of the source file by using the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window before import, the data from the source file is imported to the system. If no new version of the file is provided, no data is imported. + **Format locale**: For Visma Net to recognise the format of imported dates, numbers, and other country-specific data correctly, you should specify the appropriate locale in this field. By default, Visma Net uses the invariant locale, which is similar to the English (United States) locale. The newly created scenario has the **Active** check box selected by default. This check box must be selected so that you can use the scenario for processing records in the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. Target objects and fields in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/target-objects-and-fields-in-import-scenarios page When you are performing mapping on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, you have to select the target object and field. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Target objects and fields in import scenarios When you are performing mapping on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, you have to select the target object and field. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/). ## The target objects and fields In the **Target object**column, you have to select the object of the Visma Net window into which you want to insert the value. The object names that appear in this drop-down field are the names of the UI elements that you see in the window. Custom UI elements that you add to the system by means of customisation are also available for mapping in the same way as the original ones. For example, to be able to select the **Statement cycle ID** field that is located in the **Financial settings** group on the **General info** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, you would select `General info -> Financial settings` as the target object for mapping. Each field or action on a Visma Net window (such as a text box, combo box, table column, or button) is associated with a particular target object and becomes available for selection in the **Field/action name** column once you select the target object in the **Target object** column. The field name has the same name as the corresponding field in the window, such as `Statement cycle ID`. If you are not sure that you have selected the field name correctly, you can check it as follows: 1. On the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, add the **Native field/Action name** column to the mapping table. (You can change the list of columns that are displayed in the mapping table in the **Columns configuration** dialog box, which opens if you click the header icon of the first column in the mapping table.) In the **Native field/Action name** column, you can see the internal name of the target field. 1. In the title bar of the target Visma Net window, click **Customisation** **>** **Inspect element** and click the target element in the window. In the **Element properties** dialog box, which opens, check that the value of the **Data field** element is equal to the value in the **Native field/Action name** column in the mapping table in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. Multiple objects support the functionality of each Visma Net window: a summary object, detail objects, and related objects. These types of objects are described in the following sections. ## The summary object The summary object is the main object in the window; it contains the keys that identify the record in the system. You can use the fields of the summary object to do the following: + Set the values of the corresponding fields in the window. + Search for a record in the system. That is, you can create custom keys from these fields to search for a particular record. For example: You can find a needed customer record in the system by using the value of the **Customer name** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. + Filter imported records by these fields by using target restrictions. For example: You can select for processing only the customer records that have the **Inactive** status in the **Status** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. Generally, you can identify the fields that belong to the summary object in the window as the fields of the top part of the window. More precisely, these are the data fields of the data access class (DAC) underlying the summary object. To use the summary object in scenario mapping, select the first object in the **Target object** drop-down field on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. For example: The summary object in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window is `Customer summary`. It includes the key **Customer no.** field. The summary object in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window is `Invoice summary`. It includes two key fields: **Type** and **Reference no**. ## The detail objects Detail objects correspond to the tabs that include lists of detail records. The fields of a detail object correspond to the columns of the detail tab. You can use the fields of the detail object to do the following: + Set the values of corresponding fields of a detail line. + Search for a detail line in the document. That is, you can create custom keys from these fields to search for a particular detail line in the document. For example: In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, you can find a needed detail line of a sales invoice by using the value in the **Transaction descr.** column. To use the detail object in the scenario mapping, in the **Target object** column in the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, select the object with the same name as the name of the detail tab. For example, [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window has the **Contacts** tab, shown in the following screenshot, which includes a list of contacts. The corresponding detail object has the `Contacts` name. In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, the `Document details` object contains a list of invoice lines. ## The related objects Related objects support the functionality of other tabs and groups of fields in the window. You can use the fields of these objects only to set the values of the corresponding fields in the window. You cannot use the fields of these objects to search for records by using customer keys or to filter imported records by using target restrictions. For example: In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, you cannot search for the needed customer record by using the value of the **Email** field of the **Main contact** group of the **General info** tab as a custom key, and you cannot filter records by using the **Country** field of the **Main address** group of the **General settings** tab by using target restrictions. To use a related object in the scenario mapping, in the **Target object** column in the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, select the object with the name of corresponding tab or group of fields in the window. The related objects that correspond to tabs in the window have the names of the tabs. The related objects that correspond to groups of fields in the window have names in one of the following formats: `Summary name -> Group of fields name` or `Tab name -> Group of fields name`. For example, in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, the **Main contact** and **Main address** groups of elements on the **General settings** tab are represented by related objects. These objects are listed in the **Target object** column as `General info -> Main contact` and `General info -> Main address`. Source fields in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/source-fields-in-import-scenarios page When you are performing mapping on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, you have to select in the Source field / value column the source field from which the system takes the value to be inserted into the target field. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Source fields in import scenarios When you are performing mapping on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, you have to select in the Source field / value column the source field from which the system takes the value to be inserted into the target field. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/). You can use the following as source fields: + The fields defined in the data provider + The fields of a Visma Net window, from which we can take the value that already exists in the system or the default value + Any combination of the fields defined in the data provider, the fields of a Visma Net window, constants, and functions ## Relationships between source fields and target objects and fields Source data includes a set of master records, such as customer account records. Each master record has a set of fields that are mapped to the fields of the summary object and related objects. For customer accounts, these fields can include **Customer number** and **Email**. There may be only one value of such field for each summary object or related object. A master record can have a set of detail lines that are mapped to the fields of detail objects. For example, a customer account can have multiple contact details. There may be many detail lines for each detail object. Therefore, for these detail lines to be imported to Visma Net, external data should include the identifier of the master record for each detail line. That is, each detail line should have the key fields of the summary object specified. For example, suppose that you have a customer account with two contact details. In this case, the external data that you are going to import to Visma Net should include two records, one record with the customer number and contact information for each contact detail. Such records should include a key field that the system uses to distinguish lines that belong to different records. Source restrictions in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/source-restrictions-in-import-scenarios page You can use source restrictions to filter the data that you want to extract from the source for processing by the import scenario. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Source restrictions in import scenarios You can use source restrictions to filter the data that you want to extract from the source for processing by the import scenario. You can use source restrictions to filter the data that you want to extract from the source for processing by the import scenario. For example: Some customer number values in the source have **CUST** prefixes. You can specify a source restriction that selects only the records from the source that have the **CUST** prefix in the customer number field. To configure restrictions on the data that will be extracted from the source during the import, you specify conditions for the fields of the source file on the **Source restrictions** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. If you specify source restrictions, when the system prepares records for import, it selects only the records that conform to the specified condition or conditions from the source and imports only these records. For example, suppose that you want to import only the customer records that have the **CUST** prefix in the customer number. In this case, you can add the condition to the source restrictions that the external customer number field should start with the **CUST** prefix. The system will import only the records for which the customer number has the specified prefix. Target restrictions in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/target-restrictions-in-import-scenarios page You can specify target restrictions that apply to records after they have been processed by the import scenario. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Target restrictions in import scenarios You can specify target restrictions that apply to records after they have been processed by the import scenario. You can specify target restrictions that apply to records after they have been processed by the import scenario. For example: Suppose that you have imported customer records to Visma Net and then manually changed the status of some of these records to **Inactive** in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and now you want to update only imported customer records that have the **Inactive** status. Because you do not have the status in the source file, you cannot use source restrictions to select needed records. You can, however, specify a target restriction that makes the system save the results of import for only the records that have **Inactive** status in the window. To configure restrictions that apply to records after they have been processed by the import scenario, you specify conditions for the target fields on the **Target restrictions** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. If you have specified target restrictions, after a record is imported, the system checks the conditions for the imported record. If a record meets the conditions, the system saves the result of processing the record during import. If a record violates the target restrictions, the resulting record is not saved; by default, the system stops processing records and displays an error. To make the system skip errors for the records that do not meet the restrictions and proceed with processing other records, you should set the system to not break on an incorrect target. In this case, the system will continue to process subsequent records after an error has occurred for a record. For example, suppose that you want to delete customer records that have an **Inactive** status in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. To do this, you can add to the target restrictions the condition that the imported customer records should have the **Inactive** status. During import, the system will check whether each imported record has the **Inactive** status, and delete the record only if it has this status. To determine target restrictions, you can use only the fields of the summary object. For example: In the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, you can filter records by the **Customer number**, **Customer name**, and **Status** fields. You cannot use columns of **Select** dialog boxes, fields of related objects, and fields of detail objects to filter records. For example: For this window, you can filter customer records neither by the value of the **Country** field of the **Main contact** group on the **General settings** tab, nor by the **Country** column of the Selector dialog box of the **Customer no.** field. Enable manual override of number series during import /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-import-scenarios/enable-manual-override-of-number-series-during-import section Import is normally run from the Import by scenario (SM206036) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable manual override of number series during import Import is normally run from the Import by scenario (SM206036) window. For more information: [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/). If you need to do a manual override of the number series during the import, you can enable this by following the steps below. 1. Go to the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Select the **Allow manual numbering on imports** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Go to the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. 1. Select the **Override number series upon import** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Configuring export scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-export-scenarios section You create export scenarios in the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configuring export scenarios You create export scenarios in the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. For more information: [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). To create an export scenario, you specify its name, the Visma Net window to be used for export, the data provider that defines the structure of the target data, and the data provider object; you also configure scenario mapping. After you have created an export scenario, you can export data by using this scenario. You export data in the [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) window. Export scenario creation /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-export-scenarios/export-scenario-creation page You create export scenarios in the window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export scenario creation You create export scenarios in the window. The creation of the export scenario consists of the following general steps: 1. **Analysing the sequence of actions in the window for data export** Before you start creating an export scenario in the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window, you create a data provider and learn how to retrieve the needed data records from the corresponding Visma Net window. If needed, you could use the same data provider for import and export of data in the same format. However, a data provider and the scenarios that use this provider share the same external data source. Therefore, if you do not want to confuse the input and output data sources, you should create separate data providers for importing and exporting data. Before you start creating a scenario, we strongly recommend that you try to retrieve the records of the exported data manually. Pay attention to the sequence of actions you perform: the order in which you specify values in the fields in the window, and the actions you perform. 1. **Specifying scenario parameters** You specify the following parameters of an export scenario: the name of the scenario, the Visma Net window that should be used for export, and the data provider and the object, which together specify the target data source. You can also specify other export scenario parameters that define the mode of export and the properties of the data resulting from the export. 1. **Creating scenario mapping** Mapping is the process of creating one-way relations between the fields of the Visma Net window and the fields of the external data source. To provide mapping for a particular field on an Visma Net window, you perform the following steps on the **Mapping** tab of the [Schedule export scenarios (SM207035)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-export-scenarios-sm207035/) window: 1. In the **Source object** field, you specify the Visma Net object that includes the source field. An object represents a group of fields on an Visma Net window, such as a top part or a detail tab. (These are the same objects that are used in import scenario mapping.) 1. In the **Field/Action Name** column, you select the appropriate internal field or action. An internal field is a field of the Visma Net object selected in the **Source Object** field. 1. In the **Target field/value** column, you select the matching external field or type a formula the system will use to determine the value. An external field is a field of the object from the data provider specified in the scenario. You first map the key fields that identify the records you want to export. After you have mapped the key fields, you should map the other needed fields. You can deactivate some steps of a scenario by clearing the **Active** check box for the corresponding rows. 1. **Configuring source restrictions** To export only some records from the Visma Net database, you can configure source restrictions for an export scenario in the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window. After these steps have been performed, the scenario is ready and can be used for data processing. Export scenario parameters /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-export-scenarios/export-scenario-parameters page When you create an export scenario in the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window, you first specify the following required parameters: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export scenario parameters When you create an export scenario in the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window, you first specify the following required parameters: For more information: [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). Name : In this field, you specify a name for the export scenario that reflects its functionality. You have to use unique names between import and export scenarios. (That is, you cannot use the same name for both an import scenario and an export scenario.) Window name : In this field, you select the Visma Net window from which you want to export data. Provider : and **Provider object**: In these fields, you select one of the existing data providers and its object that should be used for data export. If you select a file data provider, Visma Net automatically attaches to the scenario in the [Schedule export scenarios (SM207035)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-export-scenarios-sm207035/) window the file used for file data provider creation. This file is shared between the data provider and the export scenario that uses it for data export (that is, it is attached to both the [Data providers - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window for the provider and the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window for the scenario). You can view and modify the attached file by using the [File maintenance (SM202510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/file-maintenance-sm202510/) window. To open the window, while you are viewing the export scenario, click **Files** on the title bar. Then you can specify the following optional parameters: + **Sync type**: By default, the **Full** option is selected, causing all records to be exported. Selecting a different option is useful when you use the same scenario for exporting data regularly. For example: After the initial export, you may periodically need to export new or changed data records in Visma Net to the external system or file. You can select from two options that provide incremental export. To export only the records for which data has changed in the Visma Net database since the previous export took place, select the **Incremental - all records** sync type. To import only new records in the Visma Net database, select the **Incremental - new only** sync type. + **Format locale**: For Visma Net to export dates, numbers, and other country-specific data in the needed format, you should specify the locale in the **Format locale** field. By default, Visma Net uses the invariant locale. The newly created scenario has the **Active** check box selected, which indicates that the scenario can be used for processing. Source restrictions in export scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-export-scenarios/source-restrictions-in-export-scenarios page You use source restrictions in an export scenario for the data available in the Visma Net database. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Source restrictions in export scenarios You use source restrictions in an export scenario for the data available in the Visma Net database. You use source restrictions in an export scenario for the data available in the Visma Net database. For example: You can configure the system to export only the records that have a particular status. To specify restrictions on the data being exported, you specify conditions for the Visma Net fields on the **Source restrictions** tab of the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window. In this case, when it prepares records for export, the system selects only the records that meet the specified condition (or conditions) and imports only these records. For example, suppose that you want to export from the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window only the customer records that have **Active** status. In this case, you can add to the source restrictions the condition that the **Status** field should be equal to **Active**. During the preparation process (when you click **Prepare** in the [Schedule import scenarios (SM206035)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-import-scenarios-sm206035/) window and the system prepares the data for export), the system processes the records that match the source restrictions of the scenario and prepares only the records with the **Active** status. In source restrictions, you can use only the fields of the summary object or detail objects of the window from which you are exporting data. You cannot use columns of **Select** dialog boxes and fields of related objects to filter records or detail lines. Configuring scenario mapping /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping section You perform the mapping of an import scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, and you perform the mapping of an export scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configuring scenario mapping You perform the mapping of an import scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, and you perform the mapping of an export scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/), [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). You use similar principles when configuring the mapping of either type of scenario. In this chapter, you can find the main ideas that apply to scenario mapping. Most of the ideas are described in examples of import scenarios. However, you can configure the mapping of an export scenario similarly. The topics of this chapter also describe information that is specific to mappings of export scenarios. Configuring scenario mapping /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping page You perform the mapping of an import scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, and you perform the mapping of an export scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configuring scenario mapping You perform the mapping of an import scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, and you perform the mapping of an export scenario on the Mapping tab of the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/), [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). You perform the mapping of an import scenario on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, and you perform the mapping of an export scenario on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window. You use similar principles when configuring the mapping of either type of scenario. In this chapter, you can find the main ideas that apply to scenario mapping. Most of the ideas are described in examples of import scenarios. However, you can configure the mapping of an export scenario similarly. The topics of this chapter also describe information that is specific to mappings of export scenarios. General recommendations and limitations of data import /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/general-recommendations-and-limitations-of-data-import page In this topic, you will find general recommendations for data import, including its limitations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General recommendations and limitations of data import In this topic, you will find general recommendations for data import, including its limitations. ## General recommendations for importing accounts and subaccounts When you import accounts and subaccounts to Visma Net, consider the following general recommendations: + In your new Visma Net implementation, the chart of accounts may differ from the chart of accounts in the legacy application from which you are going to import the data. When the company switches to newer software, the length of the account identifier is usually extended to include more characters; in many cases, several zeros are added in the middle of or at the end of the account identifier. In such a simple case, consider inserting these additional characters during the import process by using a formula. + In Visma Net, subaccount identifiers are segmented, but the separator characters are not part of the subaccount identifier as it is saved in the database. If subaccount identifiers in the external file have segments separated by a character, use a formula such as the following to remove this character from the external data during import. `replace([Sales Subaccount],'-','')` + If you import subaccounts from your subsidiary or parent company, consider the differences in their segment structures. You may need to add a segment when you are importing from a subsidiary or remove a segment when you're importing from a parent company. ## General recommendations for importing supplier and customer data Here are some general recommendations for importing supplier and customer data to Visma Net: + In Visma Net, supplier and customer numbers may be segmented. You can create a formula to insert any missing segments into the imported IDs. + If the external file contains fields with supplier or customer data that is not tracked in Visma Net in built-in fields, you can create and use attributes to store this supplier or customer data in Visma Net. Attributes are created for supplier or customer classes, and then can be entered and tracked for individual suppliers and customers. + If customer and supplier records have numerical IDs in the source and you want to retain these IDs in the new implementation, perform the following steps: + In the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window, configure the **SUPPLIER** and **CUSTOMER** segmented keys as alphanumeric one-segment keys. + Import the records with their IDs unchanged. + In the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window, assign appropriate numbering sequences to the **SUPPLIER** and **CUSTOMER** segmented keys with the appropriately adjusted last-used numbers (equal to the largest number used in the imported data for suppliers and customers, respectively) to assign numeric IDs to new customers and suppliers. When a Visma Net user creates a new supplier or customer account in the standard way in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) or [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, some fields are populated automatically with the values provided by the default supplier or customer class or the supplier or customer class the user has selected instead. To use the functionality of classes while you are importing supplier or customer data, before import, analyse the source data and create as many classes as there are groups of customers or suppliers in the source (or source file) that would need accounts, subaccounts, and other common information you can specify among the class settings. When you create classes, take one of the following approaches: + If one group of settings can fit all customers or suppliers, use just one default class. To use default values from the default supplier or customer class, you don't even need to do anything specific, such as mapping the **Supplier class** field or **Customer class** field to any data. + To use default values from a particular class, in the **Field/action name** field of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, you can assign the class to the **Supplier class** field (when you are importing supplier records) or to the **Customer class** field (when you are importing customer records) directly as a literal or assign a class conditionally, by using appropriate formulas that are based on customer or supplier properties. Filling in the class ID field requires a commit to the database and a window refresh. ## General recommendations for importing documents and batches When you are importing batches, supplier ledger documents, or customer ledger documents, consider the following recommendations regarding the mapping: + **Batch or document IDs**: By default, Visma Net automatically generates identifiers for general ledger batches and supplier ledger and customer ledger documents. For example: When importing batches to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, even if you map the **Batch number** field to an external field holding batch IDs, when the record is saved, the original batch ID will be overwritten by an automatically generated ID. If you plan to update the imported batches later, you will not be able to recognise the imported records by their new IDs. To make updating of the imported records possible, you need to save the original ID to another field to be able to recognise the previously imported records. You can use the **Description** field for this purpose. As an alternative to this approach, you can configure manual numbering of batches or documents in the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window, import them with their IDs defined in the source, and then configure the system to use auto-numbering again. + **Batch control totals**: When importing batches to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, if you are mapping the **Control total** field, take into account whether the **Validate batch control totals on entry** check box is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. If it is selected and you map the **Control total** field to the source field, during data import until all batch entries are imported, the system will display the error, indicating that the control total does not match the credit total or debit total. In this case, in the Import scenarios window, select the **Ignore error** check box for the row that maps the **Control total** field to force the system to ignore such errors during the import process. + **Document amounts**: When importing documents to the, if you are mapping the **Amount** field, take into account whether the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) or [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. If it is selected and you map the **Amount** field to the source field, during data import until all document details are imported, the system will display the error, indicating that the document is out of balance. In this case, in the Import scenarios window, select the **Ignore error** check box for the row that maps the **Amount** field to force the system to ignore such errors during the import process. + **Mapping Statuses**: The possible batch and document statuses in the source may be different from those in Visma Net. To manage this discrepancy, you might want to exclude the **Status** field of the applicable window from mapping. In this case, the imported batch or document will get one of the following statuses: + **On hold**, if the **Hold batches on entry** check box is selected in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window or the **Hold documents on entry** selected is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) or [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window + **Open**, if the **Hold batches on entry** or **Hold documents on entry** check box is not selected in the appropriate window ## General recommendations for importing attributes Attributes in Visma Net make it possible for users to specify additional properties (those not already defined in the applicable Visma Net window) of entities, such as stock items and customers. The list of attributes is specified for an entity class, so that entities assigned to different classes may have different sets of attributes. To import data with attributes, you have to create a scenario for each class if the applicable classes have different sets of attributes. In the mapping of the scenario created to import entities of a particular class in the [Schedule import scenarios (SM206035)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-import-scenarios-sm206035/) window, you should specify the name of the attribute as the source field for the **Attribute** target field and the value of this attribute as the source field for the **Value** target field. ## Limitations of data import By using import scenarios, you can perform the same commands in the window as you do during manual input, with the following exception: + For the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, `` (which corresponds to the **Auto apply** button on the **Applications** tab) does not work because Visma Net does not load applications during data import. Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Types of target fields in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/types-of-target-fields-in-import-scenarios page You perform mapping of an import scenario in the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Types of target fields in import scenarios You perform mapping of an import scenario in the Mapping tab of the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/). You perform mapping of an import scenario in the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. For each target field on an Visma Net window, you need to know the type of the target field and be sure the source field values have the appropriate format for the type, so that the system can insert the value of the field correctly. The type of the target field, which depends in the type of UI element that represents it in the window to which you are importing data, might be a field of several types, a date picker, a check box, a drop-down list, a radio button, or an action or menu in the toolbar. Also, the target field might be on a dialog box or pop-up panel rather than in the window itself. In most cases, it is clear which format of the value you need for the mapping. However, if you are not sure which format of the value you need, you can create one record manually in Visma Net, specify the needed value of a field of this record, compose an export scenario, and export the value of this field. Make sure the export scenario has output the value in the appropriate format. ## Fields with text The target field in the Visma Net window may be afield into which a user types text. For example: The **Email** field in the **General settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window is a field in which the user types an e-mail address. A field can have a mask, which is denoted by the (_) symbol. If the field has a mask, you cannot insert the underscore symbol (_) because this symbol is reserved for masked input in the system. If the field has no mask, you can insert any characters into the field, including any letters and symbols. The length of the string that you insert into a field should not exceed the maximum length of the underlying target element. (To check the maximum length, find the maximum string that can be manually inserted into the field in the window.) For some fields, you can type text in multiple languages. To import the values of a text box in multiple languages, you should specify a string in JSON format that contains values in the needed languages. ## Fields with currency amount The target field in the Visma Net window may be a field that holds a currency amount. For example: The **Amount** field in the top part of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window is a field with a currency amount. You have to provide currency amounts in the format that you specified for the import scenario in the **Format locale** field in the top part of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. For example: If you specified the English (United States) locale for a import scenario, you have to provide amounts where the decimal part is separated by a decimal point: **12.34**. By default, Visma Net imports currency amounts with a decimal precision of 2, which is specified in the **Decimal precision** field in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. When you import the currency amounts of supplier ledger or customer ledger documents, make sure that the sum of imported lines is equal the imported document total, taking into account the rounding accuracy as follows: + The decimal precision of line amounts must be equal to the decimal precision of document total. + The decimal precision of all amounts must be less than or equal to the decimal precision that is specified in Visma Net. For example: If the decimal precision in Visma Net is 2 and you import an amount with a decimal precision of 3, such as **10.345**, the imported value will be rounded by arithmetical rules to **10.35**. If you import data from an Excel file, you can use the **Round(x,y)** function to round the amounts, and then you can copy the values to a column from which you will import data. ## Fields with a key value The target field in the Visma Net window may be a field that holds a key value. Two examples of key fields are **Customer no.** in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and **Reference no.** in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The way you specify the value for key fields depends on your goal and the auto-numbering settings of the records that you are importing. ## Date picker The target field in the Visma Net window may be a date picker that is used to select the date. For example: The **Date** element in the top part of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window is a date picker. You have to provide date values in the format that you specified for the import scenario in the **Format locale** field in the top part of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. For example: If you specified the English (United States) locale for the import scenario, you have to provide dates in the format **DD/MM/YYYY**. Thus, September 1, 2014 will be **01/09/2014**. ## Check box The target field in the Visma Net window may be a check box the user can select or clear. For example: The **Hold** element in the top part of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window is a check box. To select a check box, map the corresponding target field to the value **True**. To clear a check box, map the target field to the value **False**. ## Drop-down list The target field in the Visma Net window may be a drop-down list from which the user selects an option. For example: The **Type** element in the top part of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window is a drop-down list. To insert a value into a drop-down list, you have to specify the value as it is displayed in the list. For example: In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, you can insert the value **Invoice** into the **Type** field. ## Radio buttons The target field in the Visma Net window may be a group of radio buttons. For example: A group of radio buttons is in the **Additional processing** group of the **Settings for Supplier ledger** tab of the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. In the system, a group of radio buttons is treated as one field, which can have as the values the names of the radio buttons. Therefore, to select a radio button by using an import scenario, you should select the name of the group that contains the radio button in the **Field / action name** column of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, and specify the name of the radio button in the **Source field / value** column. ## Buttons and menu items in the toolbar The action in the Visma Net window may be a button or menu item in the toolbar. For example: The **Release** button is on the toolbar of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. To reflect a user clicking a button in the scenario mapping, you have to insert the corresponding action in the proper position in the mapping, and you don't have to map the action to any value. ## Dialog box The target field may be on a dialog box invoked by a user action on the Visma Net window. Dialog boxes usually appear in a window to request confirmation from the user. For example: When you update the **Customer class** value in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window for an existing customer, the system displays a **Warning** dialog box. ## Pop-up panel The target field may be on a pop-up panel invoked by a user action in the Visma Net window. For example: The **Add sales order** pop-up panel appears when the user clicks **Add order** on the **Document details** tab of the [Shipments - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. In a similar way as you specify values for fields in windows and invoke actions, you can specify values and click buttons in pop-up panels that users can invoke. Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Fields with commit in import and export scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/fields-with-commit-in-import-and-export-scenarios page There are two types of fields in Visma Net windows: fields with commit, and fields without commit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fields with commit in import and export scenarios There are two types of fields in Visma Net windows: fields with commit, and fields without commit. There are two types of fields in Visma Net windows: fields with commit, and fields without commit. A commit is an action initiated by the window that, when triggered, sends the data to the server. On the server, the commit causes all data in the window to be updated, including the insertion of default values and the recalculation of appropriate fields in the window. A commit is a costly operation that causes the browser to make requests to the server and takes server time. As such, a commit is invoked for only a limited number of fields: mainly the key fields and the fields on which the other fields depend. On the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window or the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window, if you select a field for which the system performs a commit, the system automatically selects the **Commit** check box. If the **Commit** check box is cleared on this tab, the field is filled in with data, but no update of the window is invoked. If the **Commit** check box is selected, after the field is filled in, the commit is invoked on the server and the window is updated. For example: When you select a customer in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, the system assigns values to fields related to customer settings, such as the customer terms, due date, and cash discount date. When you create an import scenario for this window, for fields such as **Customer**, the system automatically selects the **Commit** check box on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. In most cases, when you compose the mapping of an import or export scenario, you can use the **Commit** check boxes as they are set by default. However, you may need to force the system to invoke a commit to the server, for example, when you need to commit the value of one field before entering another field value, or to indicate the beginning and the end of a record if you enter records without specifying the key field value. In such cases, you should manually select the **Commit** check box for the field or action. Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Service commands in Import and export scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/service-commands-in-import-and-export-scenarios page For key fields and the first field that has a commit among the fields of a detail table, the system adds service commands on the Mapping tab of the scenario you are creating in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window or the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Service commands in Import and export scenarios For key fields and the first field that has a commit among the fields of a detail table, the system adds service commands on the Mapping tab of the scenario you are creating in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window or the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/), [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). For key fields and the first field that has a commit among the fields of a detail table, the system adds **service commands** on the **Mapping** tab of the scenario you are creating in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window or the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window. Service commands are commands that invoke hidden actions in the system, such as searching for the record by the key field, refreshing the window, and adding a new line to the detail table. The system automatically adds service commands to the scenario immediately before the commands that invoke them. For example: Suppose that in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, you are mapping the **Type** field of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The system automatically inserts a set of service commands before the mapping of the **Type** field: The `` and `` commands invoke search by the key fields, and the `` command restores the default settings for the selected document type. In the table toolbar of the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window or the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, by default, the **Show all commands** option is selected in the drop-down list, which means that you can view the service commands that the system automatically adds to the import scenario. You can replace service commands with your own commands to change the default behaviour of the system. For example: If you map the first field that has a commit among the fields of a detail table, the system adds the `=-1` service command. That means that a new row is added for each new detail line. You can specify the needed line number in the `` command to modify the value of the previously imported detail line. Line numbering starts with 0. If you search for a detail line by a custom key, you have to delete the instruction that sets the `` to -1 from the mapping so that the system does not add a new detail line but instead searches for a detail line. Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Pop-up dialog boxes in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/pop-up-dialog-boxes-in-import-scenarios page When you update specific fields in some windows under certain circumstances, the system displays pop-up dialog boxes where you need to specify an answer (by clicking a button) to a question in order to proceed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pop-up dialog boxes in import scenarios When you update specific fields in some windows under certain circumstances, the system displays pop-up dialog boxes where you need to specify an answer (by clicking a button) to a question in order to proceed. When you update specific fields in some windows under certain circumstances, the system displays pop-up dialog boxes where you need to specify an answer (by clicking a button) to a question in order to proceed. For example, when you update the **Customer class** value in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window for an existing customer, the system displays a **Warning** dialog box with the text **Please confirm if you want to update current customer settings with the customer class defaults. Otherwise, original settings will be preserved.** and the **Yes** and **No** buttons. You should click **Yes** to proceed with changing the customer class. When you are specifying mapping for an import scenario, when you need to specify an answer to a question that would appear in a pop-up dialog box if the data was being entered manually, you should use a dialog answer command (which has the `` name) of the Summary object. You should insert this command directly before you map the field that causes the appearance of the dialog box. For the dialog answer, you should select the proper answer from the options available in the **Source field/value** drop-down list on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. The system selects the **Commit** check box for the dialog answer command automatically. In most cases, you can select the summary object as the target object of the dialog answer command, because the dialog answer is shared between all objects of an Visma Net window. You may need to select another object as the target object of the dialog answer command, if you need to overwrite the answer that is specified by the dialog answer command of the Summary object. Below are the settings in the two rows you would enter on the **Mapping** tab to update the customer class of an existing customer record. The first row contains the instruction to click **Yes** in the confirmation dialog box. |**Target object**|**Field/action name**|**Source field/value**| |---|---|---| |**Customer summary**|**<Dialog answer>**|**='Yes'**| |**General settings -> Financial settings**|**Customer class**|**CUSTOMER CLASS**| **Parent topic:** [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Actions in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/actions-in-import-scenarios page As you perform mapping for an import scenario in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, when you need to reflect a button being clicked in a window (such as Save, Delete, or Release to perform one of these actions on a document), you should use the corresponding action. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Actions in import scenarios As you perform mapping for an import scenario in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) window, when you need to reflect a button being clicked in a window (such as Save, Delete, or Release to perform one of these actions on a document), you should use the corresponding action. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/). As you perform mapping for an import scenario in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, when you need to reflect a button being clicked in a window (such as **Save**, **Delete**, or **Release** to perform one of these actions on a document), you should use the corresponding action. Actions are available for all buttons in a window. In import scenario mapping, to use an action, you always have to select the summary object as the target object. No matter where the button that corresponds to the action appears in the window (on the top part, the toolbar of a tab, or a pop-up panel), all actions use the summary object as the target object. Action names have the `Action:` prefix and are surrounded with angle brackets, for example, `` or ``. For an action, you should not select any external field in the **Source field/value** column of the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. Key fields and search in import scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/key-fields-and-search-in-import-scenarios page In the mapping of an import scenario, you have to map the key fields first, mapping the target key fields in the system to the source key fields. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Key fields and search in import scenarios In the mapping of an import scenario, you have to map the key fields first, mapping the target key fields in the system to the source key fields. In the mapping of an import scenario, you have to map the key fields first, mapping the target key fields in the system to the source key fields. The system uses the following keys: **Customer number** for customers in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, and **Type** and **Reference no.** for documents in multiple windows, such as the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. The order of key fields is important for mapping, so you should follow the order of key fields as they are displayed in Visma Net windows. In particular, for documents, you have to assign first the **Type** field and then the **Reference no.** field. ## Auto-numbering of records You can import records with their key values from the source, and the records will have the same key values in the system and the source. For example: Suppose you are importing records to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. If you have the customer **CUST000001** in the Excel file, you can import this customer to the system so that the customer record will have the same ID: **CUST000001**. Later, you can update customer records by mapping the Excel column with the ID to the **Customer number** field in the system. As an alternative to importing records with their key values from the source, you can import records and have the system automatically assign IDs. For example, you can import the customer records so that after the import, the customer will have an automatically assigned ID in the system that was not in the Excel file, such as **C000000001**. You can import master records with automatically assigned IDs in several ways, which are described below: + You can enable auto-numbering of records in the system and map the key fields to unique identifiers of records in the source. + If there is just one line for each unique record in the data source, you can enable auto-numbering of records in the system and import each line from the source file as an unique record in the system with an automatically assigned ID. With this way of mapping, you do not map key fields in the import scenario and add the <Action: Insert> instruction at the beginning of the mapping. + You can map the key field to a formula that produces unique identifiers for each imported record in the needed format. Auto-numbering of master records is configured in the corresponding segmented keys in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. Documents are usually automatically assigned a reference number in the system. During the initial implementation, you can disable auto-numbering of documents in the system, import the documents with their IDs, and then turn on auto-numbering starting from the last imported ID. Auto-numbering of documents is configured in the numbering sequences that are specified for the corresponding document types in workspace preferences. For example: The **ARINVOICE** sequence is specified for the auto-numbering of invoices in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. You can update records imported with automatically generated IDs by searching for them in the system by using their unique fields available the source. For example: You can identify customers by email addresses or phone numbers in the Excel file. To search for a record, you have to declare a custom key or use a column of a **Select** dialog box. Both of these methods are described below. ## Custom key To specify a custom key, you have to define the key by using the `@@` notation; directly after the notation, assign the custom key field a value. On the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, you should select the **Commit** check box for this field to make the system update the form after the key is specified. Below is an example of the settings for a mapping instruction that declares the **Customer name** as the custom key for customer records you are importing to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. In this example, we suppose that the Excel file doesn't contain the customer number, and you are using the **CUSTOMER NAME**value from the Excel file to find the customer record in the system. > ### Custom key mapping > > |**Target object**|**Field/action name**|**Native Field / Action Name**|**Commit**|**Source Field / Value**| > |---|---|---|---|---| > |**Customer summary**|@@AcctName|@@AcctName||=[BAccount.AcctName]| > |**Customer summary**|**Customer name**|AcctName|Selected|**CUSTOMER NAME**| You can specify custom keys to search for a record or a detail line. You can use the fields of the summary object and the detail objects, but not the fields of related objects, as custom key fields. For example: You can find the needed customer record in the system by using the **Customer name** field of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window as the custom key, but you cannot find the record by using the **Email** field of the **Main contact** group of the **General settings** tab as the custom key. ## Selector column Selector columns in an Visma Net window appear when a user clicks the magnifier icon of a key field of the form to bring up the **Select** dialog box. When you are performing mapping for an import scenario, you can use any selector columns that are available in the window for the key field. To use a selector column for a search in an import scenario, you have to map the selector column to the matching external field. Selector column names start with the key field name, followed by `->` and then the name of the selector column in the window, such as `Customer ID -> Email`. For example: The instruction with the following settings maps the **Email** selector column of the **Customer number** field in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window to the EMAIL field available in the source. > ### Selector command mapping > > |**Target object**|**Field/action name**|**Source field/value**| > |---|---|---| > |**Customer summary**|**Customer ID -> E-mail**|**E-MAIL**| Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Export of all records: use of every /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/export-of-all-records-use-of-every page If you want to export every record of a specific type, on the Mapping tab of the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window, you map the key field to the =Every system action. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export of all records: use of every If you want to export every record of a specific type, on the Mapping tab of the Manage export scenarios (SM207025) window, you map the key field to the =Every system action. For more information: [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). If you want to export every record of a specific type, on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window, you map the key field to the `=Every` system action. (The **Commit** check box is selected automatically for this field.) This action ensures that every record of the specific type will be processed during export. For example: If you want to export all customer records available in the system, you should map the **Customer no.** field to `=Every`. The **Commit** check box is selected automatically for this field. If you need the value of the **Customer no.** field in the output destination, you should also map this field to the appropriate external field. The example below shows the mapping that makes the system export all customer records available in the system and export the **Customer no.** field to the target **CUSTOMER ID** field. > ## Usage of the = Every instruction > > |**Source object**|**Field/action name**|**Target field/value**| > |---|---|---| > |**Customer summary**|**Customer ID**|**=Every**| > |**Customer summary**|**Customer ID**|**CUSTOMER ID**| Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Data modification during export: use of commit and actions /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/data-modification-during-export-use-of-commit-and-actions page You can change the values of some fields or apply an action to a record during export. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Data modification during export: use of commit and actions You can change the values of some fields or apply an action to a record during export. You can change the values of some fields or apply an action to a record during export. For example: You can change a description field of a record or delete a record as you are exporting it. ## Changing the value of a field If you need to change the values of some fields during export, you must perform a commit of these fields to the server. That is, on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window, you must select the **Commit** check box for each internal field whose data is modified. If you change the values of some fields during export, you also need to insert the `` command at the end of the scenario to save the changes to Visma Net. If you specified specific field values on the form during export only in order to select the data for exporting, however, you don't need to insert the `` command at the end of the scenario. If you configured the scenario to change the values of some fields in Visma Net, the system prepares the specified records in the source and tries to apply modifications to them during the preparation process. (If modification of the specified field is not allowed in the system, the field remains unchanged.) Then the system exports all prepared records to the external system. For example, suppose that you create a scenario that exports customer ledger invoices from the window and adds the string **Exported on 05.10.2020** to their descriptions in Visma Net. As a result of the processing of this scenario, all invoices are exported, and only the invoices with the **Balanced** and **On hold** statuses are modified. Modification of documents with other statuses is not allowed in the system, so these documents are exported without any change to their descriptions in Visma Net. ## Applying an action As you perform mapping for an export scenario, when you need to reflect the clicking of a button in a window, you should use the corresponding action. You can use the same actions in export scenarios as in import scenarios. If you are going to delete records or apply another action to records by using an export scenario, you have to specify precise source restrictions that select only those records that can be processed; otherwise, no records will be processed. For example: Suppose that you want to delete customer ledger invoices that have **X** as the value of the **Project** element in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. To select only invoices that can be deleted, in the source restrictions of the export scenario, you have to specify not only the condition **Project = X** but also the condition **Status = On hold or Status = Balanced**. If you do not specify filtering by status and there are invoices with the **Open** status in the system, no records will be deleted. Multi-language fields in import and export scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/multi-language-fields-in-import-and-export-scenarios page For some text boxes in Visma Net windows, users can type values in multiple languages if multiple locales are configured in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Multi-language fields in import and export scenarios For some text boxes in Visma Net windows, users can type values in multiple languages if multiple locales are configured in Visma Net. For some text boxes in Visma Net windows, users can type values in multiple languages if multiple locales are configured in Visma Net. For example: If your Visma Net instance has English and French locales activated and multilingual user input configured, you can specify the value of the **Description** field in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window in English and French. ## Import of localised field values As you perform mapping for an import scenario in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, when you need to import localised values of a field, you map this field to a source field that contains a string in JSON format with the localised values. In this string, you use the two-letter ISO code of the language with which the value should be associated. In the example that is mentioned at the beginning of the topic, if you need to import the values in English and French to the **Description** element of stock item records in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, you map the **Description** field to a source field that contains data in the following format: `[{en:English description},{fr:French description}]`. The mapping example below presumes that the **DescriptionsInJSONFormat** source field contains a string in JSON format. > ### Import of localised field values > > |**Target object**|**Field/action name**|**Source field/value**| > |---|---|---| > |**Stock item summary**|**Description**|**DescriptionsInJSONFormat**| In the JSON-formatted string, you should specify the actual values of the field in all languages that are configured for multilingual user input. If you specify the values of the field in particular languages, the values of the field in other languages configured for multilingual user input become empty. For example: Suppose that in your instance of Visma Net, multi-language fields can have values in English and French. If you pass the value of a field in the following format `[{en:English description}]`, the French value of the field becomes empty. If a source field that you map to a multi-language field contains plain text, this text is saved as the value of the field in the current language of Visma Net (that is, the language that you selected on the login page of Visma Net ). ## Export of localised field values Each text field that supports multiple input languages has a corresponding field with the suffix **Translations** in its native name. This corresponding field contains all localised values of the text field. For example: The **Description** field in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window corresponds to the field with native name **Descr**. The **Descr** field has the **DescrTranslations** corresponding field, which contains the localised descriptions of a stock item. If you want to export localised values of a text field, on the **Mapping** tab of the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window, you map the needed **Translations** field, which contains localised values, to a target field. The **Translations** fields are not available in the list of fields in the **Field/action name** column on the **Mapping** tab; you should type the needed name manually. For example: Suppose that you need to export the localised values of the **Description** element of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. You should find out the native name of the **Description** field, which is **Descr**, and map the **DescrTranslations** field to the target field, as shown in the following mapping example. To find out the native name of a field, in the title bar of the target Visma Net window, click **Customisation** - **Inspect element**, and then click the target element in the window. In the **Element properties** dialog box, which opens, find the value of the **Data field** element, which is the native name of the field. > ### Export of localised field values > > |Source object|Field/Action Name|Target field/value| > |---|---|---| > |**Stock Item Summary**|**DescrTranslations**|**DESCRIPTION**| As a result of the export of localised field values, the target field contains a string in JSON format with the available localised values of the field. The language to which the value belongs is identified by the two-letter ISO code of the language. For example: Suppose that the **Description** element of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window has value **Item** in English and **Pièce** in French. In this case, the target field contains the following string: `[{en:Item},{fr:Pièce}]`. Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Formulas in the mapping /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/formulas-in-the-mapping page If you need to convert data into a different format during data import or export, you can map an internal field to a formula. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Formulas in the mapping If you need to convert data into a different format during data import or export, you can map an internal field to a formula. If you need to convert data into a different format during data import or export, you can map an internal field to a formula. You can define formulas by using the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) or [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window. ## Components of a formula A formula can include the following components: + **Digital and text literals**: Literals are constants within the formula that you don't want to be modified: + Type digital literals as they are, such as 2, 8.25, or 13.84. + Enclose text literals within single quotation marks, for example, 'DEF_CLASS' and 'FOB'. + **Operators**: The following types of operators are available: + Arithmetic operators take numerical values and return a numerical value. + Logical operators evaluate one or two Boolean expressions and return a Boolean result. + Comparison operators compare two expressions and return a Boolean value that represents the result. + **Functions**: Functions, which perform specific tasks and return results, include the following types: + Text functions perform operations on text strings. + Math functions perform calculations. + Conversion functions convert data from one type to another. + Date/time functions perform functions related to the date, the time, or both. + **Fields**: External or internal fields (elements) can be used in a formula as operands or function arguments. ## Assigning a formula To assign a formula to a field, do the following in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) or [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window: 1. Click the pen icon in the field where you want to insert a formula. This invokes the Formula editor dialog box, which can be used to create the formula you want. 1. Click any of the types in the Component types area (on the upper left of the dialog box) to open the list of related components in the right area. 1. Double-click a component from the list of components. Note that all components are added to the right of the formula text. 1. Repeat Steps 2–3 to add all the needed components. 1. In the Formula text area (at the bottom of the dialog box), manually edit the text to construct a correct formula: Move the function argument or arguments within a function's parentheses, correctly arrange operands and operations, and add any needed brackets to ensure the proper order of operations. 1. Click **Validate** to check the syntax of the formula and make necessary corrections if required. 1. Click **OK** to save the formula. Once it's inserted, a formula is preceded by an equal sign (=). ## Formulas in export scenarios When you map the data in Visma Net to the external fields, you will usually need field-to-field mapping. In some cases, however, you may need to add values from multiple internal fields to export the resulting value to an external one, to extract only a part of the internal field's value, or to perform another transformation or conversion for the data to be exported. If you map an internal field to a formula instead of an external field, the resulting value will be assigned back to the Visma Net field. This functionality can be used, for example, to set criteria on inquiry forms to export only filtered data or to mark exported records as exported. ## Formulas in import scenarios When you map Visma Net fields to the external data, you will usually need field-to-field mapping. For some fields, however, you may need to add values from multiple external fields to an internal one, to extract only a part of the external field's value, or to perform another transformation or conversion. As you map an Visma Net field to the external data, the system checks the functionality of the mapped field and automatically adds, if necessary, a line that contains the system action (hidden by default) required for the field, such as a refresh of the window or a commit to the database. ## Formula examples Here are some examples illustrating the use of formulas: + This formula is used for assigning a literal: `ClassID ='Imported suppliers'`. + This formula assigns a concatenated string: `SupplierID = 'X'+[SupplierID]`. + This formula is used for assigning a value to a check box: `IsAddressSameAsMain = true`. + If the internal field is required, it's important to check that the field value is not blank. To do this, use the `Iif(str, truestatement, falsestatement)` function, as in the following example: `CountryID =iif(trim[Country]='','US',[Country])`. Then the internal field will get the `US` value if the external field is blank. + If the customer numbers from the source cannot be used in your implementation, create new IDs for them. For example: In the demo data, customer and supplier IDs are short versions (up to 15 characters) of their names converted to uppercase. To do this, remove any spaces from the name by using the `trim(arg)` function, convert it to uppercase with the `UCase(arg)` function, and remove any characters in excess of 10 by using the `Left(arg)` function: `Customer ID =Left( trim(UCase([Name])),10)`. Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Operators /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/operators page Operators are used in formulas that you create in the Formula editor dialog box, which is called from the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) or Manage export scenarios (SM207025) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Operators Operators are used in formulas that you create in the Formula editor dialog box, which is called from the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) or Manage export scenarios (SM207025) windows. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/), [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). To add operators to the formula, you can enter them directly in the Formula text area of the dialog box or select them from the list of formula components available within the dialog box. (Select an operator type to view the list of operators of the type, and then select an operator.) To specify the operands for operators, you can type them in the Formula text area or select them from the list of external or internal fields provided within the Formula editor dialog box. This article describes and provides examples of the operators you can use in formulas, broken down by operator type. ## Overview of operators There are two types of operators: unary and binary. Unary operators are applicable to only one operand, while binary operators require two operands. In general, expressions are evaluated from left to right with the following order of precedence: + Logical operators: `Not`, `And`, `Or` + Comparison operators: =, <>,, <=, >= + Arithmetic operators: -, \*, /, `Mod`, +, - ## Arithmetic operators Arithmetic operators, which are listed below, take numerical values as their operands and return a single numerical value.
Operator Description and example

Adds the two operands and returns the result. If at least one operand is a string, this operator returns a concatenated string.

Example: =[Amount]+[VAT amount]

In this example, the [Amount] and [VAT amount] values are used as operands.

Subtracts the second operand from the first.

Example: =[Amount]-[Cash discount]

In this example, the [Amount] and [Cash discount] values act as operands.

Multiplies the two operands.

Example: =[Chargeable amount]*0.03

In this example, the [Chargeable Amount] value and the number 0.03 serve as operands.
/

Yields the quotient of the operands, which is the first operand divided by the second.

Example: =[Amount]/[Rate reciprocal]

In this example, the [Amount] and [Rate reciprocal] values are the first and second operands.
Mod (Modulus)

Divides the first integer operand by the second integer operand and returns the remainder, rounded to the nearest integer.

Example: =[Volume] Mod [Conversion factor]

In this example, the [Volume] and [Conversion factor] values are used as operands.
## Logical operators Logical operators evaluate one or two Boolean expressions and return a Boolean result (`True` or `False`). Because these operators evaluate only Boolean expressions, you must use elements whose only values are `True` and `False` (typically check boxes and radio buttons). The logical operators are listed below.
Operator Description and example
And

Performs logical conjunction on two Boolean expressions: returns True if and only if both expressions evaluate to True; in other cases, returns False.

Example: =[Hold] And [Validate control totals on entry]

In this example, the [Hold] and [Validate control totals on entry] check boxes are used as operands.
Or

Performs logical disjunction on two Boolean expressions: returns True if at least one expression evaluates to True; returns False if neither expression evaluates to True.

Example: =[Hold] Or [Validate control totals on entry] In this example, the [Hold] and [Validate control totals on entry] check boxes act as operands.
Not

Performs logical negation on a Boolean expression: returns True if and only if the operand is False. Logical negation is an unary operator.

Example: =Not [Hold documents on entry]

In this example, the [Hold documents on entry] check box is used as the single operand.
## Comparison operators Comparison operators compare two expressions and return a Boolean value (`True` or `False`) that represents the result of the comparison. This group of operators includes the following operators.
Operator Description and example
=

Returns True if operands are equal.

Example: =([Credit total] = [Control total])

In this example, the [Credit total] and [Control total] values are used as operands.
<>

Returns True if operands are not equal.

Example: =([Credit total] <> [Debit total])

In this example, the [Credit total] and [Debit total] values act as operands.
<

Returns True if the first operand is less than the second one.

Example: =([DocDate] < [DueDate])

In this example, the [DocDate] and [DueDate] values act as operands.
>

Returns True if the first operand is greater than the second one.

Example: =([CrLmt] > 1000])

In this example, the [CrLmt] value is used as the first operand, and the number 1000 acts as the second operand.
<=

Returns True if the first operand is less than or equal to the second operand.

Example: =(([DueDate]-[CashDiscountDate]) <= [LeadTime])

In this example, [DueDate] - [CashDiscountDate] is the first operand, and the [LeadTime] value is used as the second operand.
>=

Returns True if the first operand is greater than or equal to the second operand.

Example: =([Balance] => [Amount])

In this example, the [Balance] and [Amount] values are used as operands.
## Other operators This miscellaneous group of operators includes the following operators and constants.
Operator Description and example
In

An operator that returns True if the second operand (a string) contains the first operand (which is also a string).

Example: =('Inc.' In [Supplier name])

In this example, the [Supplier name] value is used as an operand, and the formula returns True if the name of the supplier contains Inc.
True

A binary constant used as an operand in logical expressions.

Example: =True
False

A binary constant used as an operand in logical expressions.

Example: =False
Null

A special value used as an operand in logical expressions; designates an undefined value.

Example: =Null
Parent topic: [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Related reference Formula editor dialog box [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Functions /visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/functions page Functions are used in formulas that you create on the Formula editor dialog box, which you can invoke from the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) or Manage export scenarios (SM207025) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Functions Functions are used in formulas that you create on the Formula editor dialog box, which you can invoke from the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) or Manage export scenarios (SM207025) windows. For more information: [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/), [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/). To add functions to a formula, you can type them in the Formula text area of the dialog box or select them from the list of formula components available within the dialog box. (Select a function type to view the list of functions of the type, and then select a function.) This topic describes and provides examples of the functions you can use in formulas, broken down by type. ## Conversion functions The available conversion functions, which are used to convert data from one data type to another, are listed below.
Function Description and example
CBool(x)

Converts the expression used as the function argument into a Boolean expression. Returns False if the Boolean value is zero; otherwise, returns True.

Example: =CBool([CashDiscountAmount]

Here [CashDiscountAmount] is used as the function argument.
CDate(x)

Converts the expression used as the function argument into a value of the Date type. The argument should be a valid date expression according to the locale selected for the import or export scenario.

Example: =CDate('24/12/2011')

Here a string is used as the function argument.
CStr(x)

Converts the expression used as the function argument into a string. If the argument is Null, the function returns a run-time error; otherwise, it returns a string.

Example: ='(' +CStr([AreaCode])+')'+CStr([Phone])

Here [AreaCode] and [Phone] are used in the function argument.
CDbl(x)

Converts the expression defined in the function argument into a value of the Double type.

Example: =CDbl(1.0/[ExchangeRate])

Here [ExchangeRate] is used in the function argument.
CSng(x)

Converts the expression used as the function argument into a value of the Single type. If the expression has a value outside the acceptable range for the Single type, this function returns an error.

Example: =CSng([CashDiscountAmount]/[DocAmount])

Here [CashDiscountAmount] and [DocAmount] are used in the function argument.
CDec(x)

Converts the expression used as the function argument into a value of the Decimal type.

Example: =CDec([DocAmount]*0.015)

Here [DocAmount] is used in the function argument.
CInt(x)

Converts the expression used as the function argument into a value of the Integer type.

Example: =CInt('2012')-Year([DocDate])

Here [DocDate] is used in the function argument.
CShort(x)

Converts a numeric value to a value of the Short type.

Example: =CShort([CashDiscountAmount])

Here [CashDiscountAmount] is used as the function argument.
CLong(x)

Converts a numeric value to a value of the Long type.

Example: =CLong([CashDiscountAmount])

Here [CashDiscountAmount] is used as the function argument.
## Text functions Text functions are used to perform operations on text strings. The group of text functions includes the functions described below.
Function Description and example
LTrim(string)

Removes all leading spaces or parsing characters from the specified string, or all leading zero bytes (0) from the specified binary expression.

Example: =LTrim(CStr([Phone]))

Here [Phone] is used as the function argument.
RTrim(string)

Removes all trailing spaces or parsing characters from the specified character expression, or all trailing zero (0) bytes from the specified binary expression.

Example: =RTrim(CStr([AreaCode]))

Here [AreaCode] is used as the function argument.
Trim(string)

Removes all leading and trailing spaces or parsing characters from the specified character expression, or all trailing zero (0) bytes from the specified binary expression.

Example: =Iif(Trim([Country])

Here [Country] is used in the function argument.
Format(format, argument(s))

Replaces the format item in a specified formatting string ( format ) with the text equivalent of the arguments ( arguments ).

Example: =Format('Currency:........ {0:C}; Account:........ {1:N}', [Currency], [AccountBalance])

Here [Currency] and [AccountBalance] are used in the function argument; 0 and 1 are the specifiers indicating where the arguments will be inserted, C is the currency format specifier, and N is the number format specifier.
UCase(string)

Returns a string that has been converted to uppercase. The string argument can be any valid string expression. If string contains Null, Null is returned.

Example: =UCase([CustomerName])

Here [CustomerName] is used as the function argument.
LCase(string)

Returns a string that has been converted to lowercase. The string argument can be any valid string expression. If string contains Null, Null is returned.

Example: =LCase(CStr([CustomerID])

Here [CustomerID] is used in the function argument.
InStr(string, findString)

Returns the position of the first occurrence of one string ( findString ) within another ( string ).

Example: =InStr([CustomerName], 'Inc')

Here [CustomerName] is used in the function argument.
InStrRev(string, findString)

Returns the position of the last occurrence of one string ( findString ) within another ( string ).

Example: =InStrRev([CustomerName], 'Inc')

Here [CustomerName] is used in the function argument.
Len(string)

Returns an integer containing either the number of characters in the string or the nominal number of bytes required to store a variable.

Example: =Len([CustomerName])

Here [CustomerName] is used as the function argument.
Left(string, length)

Returns a string containing the specified number of characters from the left side of a string. If string contains Null, Null is returned.

Example: =Left(Trim([VendorName]), 10)

Here [VendorName] is used in the function argument.
Right(string, length)

Returns a string containing a specified number of characters from the right side of a string. If string contains Null, Null is returned.

Example: =Right(CustomerName, 3)

Here [CustomerName] is used in the function argument.
Replace(string, oldValue, newValue)

Returns a string in which the specified substring ( oldValue ) has been replaced with another substring ( newValue ).

Example: =Replace([Description], 'rur', 'eur')

Here [Description] is used in the function argument.
PadLeft(string, width, paddingChar)

Right-aligns the characters in a specified string (string), padding with the specified character (paddingChar) on the left up to the specified total width (width). If the actual length of the string is less than the specified width, returns the original string.

Example: =PadLeft(CStr(Phone), 12, '_')

Here [Phone] is used in the function argument. If the actual length of the string is less than the specified width, returns the original string.
PadRight(string, width, paddingChar)

Left-aligns the characters in a specified string ( string ), padding with the specified character ( paddingChar ) on the right up to the specified total width ( width ).

Example: =PadRight(CStr([City]), 25, '_')

Here [City] is used in the function argument. If the actual length of the string is less than the specified width, returns the original string.
## Math functions Mathematical functions, which are listed and described below, perform calculations, usually based on input values provided as arguments, and return numeric values.
Function Description and example
Abs(x)

Returns the absolute value of the number.

Example: =Abs([TotalDebit]-[TotalCredit])

Here [TotalDebit] and [TotalCredit] are used in the function argument.
Floor(x)

Returns the largest integer that is not greater than the argument.

Example: =Floor([Price]/([Cost])

Here [Price] and [Cost] are used in the function argument.
Ceiling(x)

Returns the smallest integer that is not less than the argument.

Example: =Ceiling([Price]/[Cost])

Here [Cost] and [Price] are used in the function argument.
Round(x, decimals)

Returns a numeric expression, rounded to the specified precision ( decimals ).

Example: =Round(([Price]-[Cost])/[Cost], 2)

Here [Cost] and [Price] are used in a function argument, and 2 is the number of decimal places.
Min(x, y)

Returns the smaller of the two values.

Example: =Min([Price],[Cost])

Here [Cost] and [Price] are used in the function argument.
Max(x, y)

Returns the greater of the two values.

Example: =Max({StandardCost],[AvrCost])

Here [StandardCost] and [AvrCost] are used in the function argument.
Pow(x, power)

Computes the value of x raised to the specified power ( power ).

Example: =Pow(([Markup], 2))

Here [Markup] is used in the function argument; the function returns the mark-up value squared (or to the second power).
## Date/time functions The date/time functions, described below, perform operations on system-generated values and return values of the following types: string, numeric, or **Date/time**.
Function Description and example
Now()

Returns the current date and time according to the system date and time on the local computer.

Example: =Now()
Today()

Returns the current date according to the system date and time on the local computer.

Example: =Today()
NowUTC()

Returns the current date and time according to the user’s time zone.

The system gets the user’s time zone from the following sources, which are ordered by the priority from the highest to the lowest:

  1. User’s preferences specified in the User profile (SP203010) window.
  2. The employee calendar specified in the Work calendar (CS209000) window and selected for the user’s employee in the Employees (EP203000) window.

Example: =NowUTC()
TodayUTC()

Returns the current date according to the user’s time zone.

The system gets the user’s time zone from the following sources, which are ordered by the priority from the highest to the lowest:

  1. User’s preferences specified in the User profile (SP203010) window.

  2. The employee calendar specified

1. The employee calendar specified in the Work calendar (CS209000) window and selected for the user's employee in the Employees (EP203000) window.

Example: =TodayUTC()
DateAdd(dt, int, nbr)

Returns a new date calculated by adding the specified number ( nbr ) of time intervals ( int ) to the date ( dt ). The int argument specifies the type of time interval and is one of the following options:

yyyy
A number ( nbr ) of years will be added to the specified date ( dt ).
m
A number ( nbr ) of months will be added to the specified date ( dt ).
y
Same as d; see below.
d
A number ( nbr ) of days will be added to the specified date ( dt ).
h
A number ( nbr ) of hours will be added to the specified date ( dt ).
n
A number ( nbr ) of minutes will be added to the specified date ( dt ).
s
A number ( nbr ) of seconds will be added to the specified date ( dt ).

Examples:

  • =DateAdd([StartPeriod], 'm', 12)
  • =DateAdd([CashDiscountDate], 'd', -2)

In these examples, [CashDiscountDate] and [StartPeriods] are used in the function arguments.
Year(date)

Returns the year, as an integer, extracted from the specified date ( date ).

Example: =Year([StartPeriod])

Here [StartPeriod] is used as the function argument.
Month(date)

Returns the month, as an integer, extracted from the specified date ( date ).

Example: =Month([StartPeriod])

Here [StartPeriod] is used as the function argument.
Day(date)

Returns the day (as an integer) extracted from the specified date ( date ).

Example: =Iif(Day([DueDate]-[LeadTime])=0, True, False

Here [DueDate] and [LeadTime] are used in the function argument.
DayOfWeek(date)

Returns the day of the week associated with the specified date ( date ) as an integer.

Example: =DayOfWeek([StartPeriod])

Here [StartPeriod] is used as the function argument.
DayOfYear(date)

Returns the day of the year calculated for the specified date ( date ).

Example: =DayOfYear([StartPeriod])

Here [StartPeriod] is used as the function argument.
Minute(date)

Returns the number of minutes extracted from the specified date ( date ).

Example: =Minute([StartPeriod])

Here [StartPeriod] is used as the function argument.
Second(date)

Returns the seconds extracted from the specified date ( date ) as an integer.

Example: =Second([StartPeriod])

Here [StartPeriod] is used as the function argument.
## Other functions This miscellaneous group of functions includes the following functions.
Function Description and Example
IIf(expression, truePart, falsePart)

Returns one of two values, depending on the evaluation of the expression: If the expression evaluates to True, the function returns the truePart value; otherwise, it returns the falsePart value.

Example: =IIf(([CurrencyID]='', 'USD', [CurrencyID])

Here [CurrencyID] is used in the function argument.
Switch( expression_1, value_1, expression_2, value_2,…)

Returns the value value_n that corresponds to the first expression expression_n that evaluates to True. expression_1, expression_2, and so on are Boolean expressions.

Example: =Switch(([DocAmount]<100), 'small', (([DocAmount]>=100)And([DocAmount]<500)), 'medium',(([DocAmount]>=500)And([DocAmount]<1000)),'large')

Here [DocAmount] is used in the function argument.
IsNull(value, nullValue)

Replaces NULL with the specified replacement value. The value argument is to be checked for NULL.

Example: =IsNull([CustomerID],'NULL value') Here, [CustomerID] is used in the function argument.
Sum(from, to) Is not applicable to formulas used by the Integration forms.
Provider.CalculateHash(string)

Calculates the hash string for the specified string.

Example: =Provider.CalculateHash([CUSTOMER ID] + [INVOICE REF NBR] + [LINE NBR])

In this example, the hash string is calculated for the string that contains concatenated values of the [CUSTOMER ID], [INVOICE REF NBR], and [LINE NBR] fields.
Provider.CalculateHashCode(string)

Calculates the hash code (which is an Integer value) for the specified string.

Example: =Provider.CalculateHash([CUSTOMER ID] + [INVOICE REF NBR] + [LINE NBR])

In this example, the hash code is calculated for the string that contains concatenated values of the [CUSTOMER ID], [INVOICE REF NBR], and [LINE NBR] fields.
**Parent topic:** [Configuring scenario mapping](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/configuring-scenario-mapping/configuring-scenario-mapping/) Importing and exporting records by using scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/integration/importing-and-exporting-records-by-using-scenarios section After you have created an integration scenario, you can use it to transfer data between Visma Net and the external system or file. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Importing and exporting records by using scenarios After you have created an integration scenario, you can use it to transfer data between Visma Net and the external system or file. You import records in the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window by using the import scenario you have created. Similarly, you export records in the [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) window by using the export scenario you have created. In this chapter, you can find a description of standard data import, simplified data import, and data export. Data import /visma-net-erp/help/integration/importing-and-exporting-records-by-using-scenarios/data-import page After you have created an import scenario, you should test it on one record. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Data import After you have created an import scenario, you should test it on one record. After you have created an import scenario, you should test it on one record. If the scenario is not working as you expected, the first way to troubleshoot the scenario is to reproduce the mapping instructions manually on the window to which you want to import the data. In most cases, this troubleshooting step helps you quickly identify the reason why the scenario is not working, so that you can fix the scenario and continue. After you have tested an import scenario, you can use it to import data in the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. To import external data to Visma Net by using a scenario that has already been created, you should perform the steps, which are described in this topic. ## 1. Selecting an import scenario In the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window, you first select the name of the scenario that has been created for data import. You can select a scenario from only the scenarios that work with windows in which you can enter data. If you do not have the access rights to enter data in the window, you cannot use a scenario that imports data to this window either. If you do not have access rights to a particular window, you will not see any scenarios for this window listed among the other scenarios. You can view the access rights to particular windows in the [Access rights by window (SM201020)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/access-rights-by-window-sm201020/) window. ## 2. Uploading a new file version If you are not using a file for importing data, skip this step. If you are importing data from a file, decide whether you need to upload a new version of the file. The file that is used for data import is attached to the window; you can click **Files** in the title bar to view the file. This file is attached to each of the following windows: [Data providers](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/), [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/), and [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/). If you need to use a new version of the file when importing data, you can upload the new file to the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window by clicking **Upload file version** in the window toolbar. The schema of the uploaded file must match the schema defined in the data provider and used in the import scenario. If you have changed the file structure, you have to update the data provider and the import scenario, and only then can you use the new file to import the data. If there is no file attached to the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window, you have to upload the file either by dragging the file to the window or by using the **Files** menu. Do not use the **Upload file version** button to upload the file. After the file is uploaded to the window, you can update the version of the file by clicking **Upload file version**. ## 3. Preparing the data for import You prepare records by uploading them in the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. To prepare the data for import, you click the **Prepare** button in the window toolbar. The data is displayed on the **Prepared data** tab; no data is yet imported into the system. ## 4. Importing the prepared data To import data to the system, you click the **Import** button in the window toolbar of the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. The system tries to import the records with the **Active** check box selected one by one. After a record has been successfully processed, the system selects the **Processed** check box for this record. If an error occurs during the processing of a record, the process stops on the record that caused the error. ## 5. Correcting any errors If an error occurred during the import process, you have to review the error; you then do one of the following: correct the record that caused the error, or exclude the wrong record from import, or modify the import scenario. Then you have to run the import process again to process the remaining records. If you need to correct only a small number of records, you can correct them directly on the **Prepare data** tab, click **Save**, and click **Import** again. You can exclude an incorrect record by clearing the **Active** check box, saving your changes, and clicking **Import** again. If you need to correct a large number of records or all records, you can correct the records in the source, upload a new file version if you are importing data from a file, and prepare and import the data again. If you need to correct the import scenario itself, make changes to the scenario in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, and prepare and import the data again in the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. You can clear the history of scenario execution and clear the prepared data by clicking **Roll back** on the **History** tab of the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. The **Roll back** action doesn't reverse records that have already been imported. ## Summary of data import After you have imported data, open the destination window and make sure that the imported records appear among the records. Simplified scenarios for data import /visma-net-erp/help/integration/importing-and-exporting-records-by-using-scenarios/simplified-scenarios-for-data-import page With simplified scenarios, you skip the step of creating the data provider before you create the import scenario. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Simplified scenarios for data import With simplified scenarios, you skip the step of creating the data provider before you create the import scenario. With simplified scenarios, you skip the step of creating the data provider before you create the import scenario. You compose the mapping directly in the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window and then you immediately run the import procedure in the window. Simplified scenarios are appropriate for one-time import, such as during data migration. For data migration, you can prepare all data in the source file in the format needed for import and use a straightforward mapping of the source fields to the target fields. If you need to compose a complex scenario which might involve using custom keys, searching for records, and modifying service commands, you have to use regular import scenarios that you compose by creating the data provider and then defining the mapping in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. To import data by using a simplified scenario, you have to complete the following steps: 1. **Upload the file** You first upload the file with data that you want to import to the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. You can upload an Excel, a CSV, or an XML file. The following criteria should be met for the source files for a simplified scenario: + Only the data from the first sheet of an Excel file is imported. + A CSV file should use a comma (,) as the delimiter and have US-ASCII encoding. These default parameters are used for data provider creation. + An XML file should have US-ASCII encoding and a tree structure. These default parameters are used for data provider creation. 1. **Specify the parameters of the import scenario** Also in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, you specify the Visma Net window to which you want to import data. The system suggests the scenario name depending on the selected window, but you can change the name. The system automatically detects the type of the data provider based on the extension of the uploaded file. When you click **Save**, the system automatically creates an import scenario (with default parameters and the specified name) and a data provider of the specified type for the simplified import procedure. 1. **Configure mapping** You configure mapping between the fields of the external file and the fields of the Visma Net window on the **Mapping** tab of the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. You should select the source field and the corresponding target object and field. You use the same target objects and fields that are used in regular import scenarios that you create in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. However, in simplified scenarios, you cannot use service commands and actions. You should select the **Key** check box for the fields that should be used as key fields to distinguish records that belong to different documents. You can use as keys only the fields that are mapped to the fields of the summary object. You can map the fields of the source file in any order. After you have saved the mapping, the system places the fields in the correct order and creates the import scenario mapping. The system adds all actions (including ``) and service commands to the import scenario automatically. 1. **Prepare and import data** After you have specified the scenario mapping, you can prepare and import data in the same way as you do with regular import scenarios. Simplified scenarios are not available for editing in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window, and you cannot edit the data provider that was automatically created for the simplified import scenario. If the simplified scenario is not working, you should convert the simplified scenario to a regular scenario by clicking **Convert to manual scenario** in the [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) window. Data export /visma-net-erp/help/integration/importing-and-exporting-records-by-using-scenarios/data-export page You use the Export by scenario (SM207036) window for data export. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Data export You use the Export by scenario (SM207036) window for data export. For more information: [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/). To export data from Visma Net to an external source, you perform the steps, which are described in this topic. ## 1. Select an export scenario In the [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) window, you select the name of the scenario created for data export. ## 2. Prepare the data for export You prepare records by uploading them in the [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) window. The system performs all modifications defined by the scenario and uploads the modified data in the window. To prepare the data for export, you click the **Prepare** button in the window toolbar. You can view the data on the **Prepared data** tab of this window. ## 3. Export prepared data To run the export process, you should click **Export** in the window toolbar of the [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) window. The system tries to export the records that have the **Active** check box selected. ## 4. Correct any errors Make sure each record has the check box in the **Processed** column on the **Prepared data** tab of the [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) window selected, which means that this record has been successfully exported. The result of export may include errors, which are indicated by the icon on the window toolbar. ## 5. Download the results of the export If you are exporting data to a file, during export, the system creates a new version of the file attached to the [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) window. This file has the same structure as the file that was used for data provider creation. You can download the result of export by clicking the **Get latest version** button in the window toolbar. Internal data is exported to the external data source in a table window. That means that the values of the fields of detail objects are translated to multiple rows of this table. The number of rows is equal to the number of detail lines of the source record. Each of these rows has the values of the fields of the summary object and related objects specified. For example, suppose that in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, a sales invoice has three detail lines. If you export this invoice with the detail lines, the data prepared for export will include three records for this invoice, one record for each detail line. These records will include identical values of the fields of the invoice summary, such as type and reference number, and different values of the detail line fields. Download your company’s attachments /visma-net-erp/help/integration/download-your-company-s-attachments section As a financial administrator in Visma Net, you can use the Download attachments (SM508090) window to download attachments on customer, supplier, journal, and cash transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Download your company’s attachments As a financial administrator in Visma Net, you can use the Download attachments (SM508090) window to download attachments on customer, supplier, journal, and cash transactions. For more information: [Download attachments (SM508090)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/download-attachments-sm508090/). To be able to start the downloading process, you first need to create a new archive job by following the steps below. 1. Go to the [Download attachments (SM508090)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/download-attachments-sm508090/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter an **Archive ID** for the archive. 1. In the **Description** field, add a name for the archive. 1. In the **Document type** field, select the transaction document type you want to download attachments for. 1. In the **From period** and **To period** fields, specify the start and end period you want to download attachments for. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). **Result**: the **Generate Archive** button in the toolbar is activated. 1. Click the **Generate Archive** button. **Result**: the system will start collecting the files and creating a zip file. If there are many attachments to download, the process can take some time. You can leave the window and continue with other tasks in Visma Net, and return later and check the status by clicking the **Update status** button in the toolbar. 1. When the process is completed, the generated archives will be available on the **Available zip archives** tab. The system automatically splits the archive into one or more zip files when many attachments are large files. Integration windows /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Integration windows Integration windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/integration-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Integration windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the window. On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the window. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. ## Transactions [Import by scenario (SM206036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036/) [Export by scenario (SM207036)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036/) ## Registers [Data providers - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) [Company template (CS10300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/company-template-cs10300s/) ## Processes [Schedule import scenarios (SM206035)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-import-scenarios-sm206035/) [Schedule export scenarios (SM207035)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-export-scenarios-sm207035/) [Import customised reports and inquiries (CS10302S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/import-updates-from-templates-cs10302s/) [Publish customised reports and inquiries (CS10301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/publish-customised-reports-and-inquiries-cs10301s/) [Download attachments (SM508090)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/download-attachments-sm508090/) Data providers (SM206015) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015 section You use this window to create a provider for data import or data export; you can also use the form to view the details of existing providers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Data providers (SM206015) You use this window to create a provider for data import or data export; you can also use the form to view the details of existing providers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create a provider for data import or data export; you can also use the form to view the details of existing providers. You can configure providers to work with files in CSV, Excel, and XML format and with different external systems. If you have exported to XML a file data provider that has a file attached to the window (by using the **Clipboard** - **Export to XML** standard button on the form toolbar), when you import the data of the provider (by using **Clipboard** - **Import from XML** ), you need to attach the file to the data provider manually. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Get file link Opens the Attached file link dialog box, where you can get a link to the file attached to the provider.
The dialog box, called when you click **Get file link** on the toolbar, has the following elements:
Element Description
Link The internal link to the file that is attached to the provider.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The top part You use this area to identify the provider. You can specify the name and details for a new provider, or you can select an existing provider and view its information.
Element Description
Name The name of the provider, which usually describes the data you will transfer by using this provider. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 100 characters.
Provider type

The type of provider, such as the following:

  • File providers that you use to access data in external files:

    • CSV provider ( PX.DataSync.CSVSYProvider ): For import from and export to files in CSV format
    • Excel provider ( PX.DataSync.ExcelSYProvider ): For import from and export to Excel spreadsheets
    • XML provider ( PX.DataSync.XMLSYProvider ): For import from and export to files in XML format

  • Providers that are preconfigured for importing data from and exporting data to external systems:

    • Salesforce provider ( PX.DataSync.SFSYProvider ): For import from and export to SalesForce CRM by using the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP)
    • MS SQL provider ( PX.DataSync.MSSqlSYProvider ): For import from and export to Microsoft SQL Server
    • HubSpot provider ( PX.DataSync.HubSpot.HSSYProvider ): For exporting leads to HubSpot for nurturing and importing leads to Visma Net for processing

  • Providers for exporting payment data to external payment systems:

    • ACH provider ( PX.DataSync.ACHProvider ): For exporting data for processing in the Automated Clearing House (ACH) system
    • Giro payment provider ( PX.DataSync.Banks.GIROPaymentProvider ): For exporting data for processing in giro-based payment systems
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this provider is active and will be available for selection in the Visma Net windows related to data import.
## The Parameters tab The **Parameters** tab provides the list of parameters (in a tabular format) specific for the selected provider type. For a new provider, fill in the columns.
Button Description
Reload parameters Reloads the default values of the parameters specific to the provider type.
Column Description
Name

The name of the parameter, which is specific to the provider type.

A CSV provider uses the following parameters:

  • The FileName parameter, which is standard for file providers, specifies the name of the file that should be used for data import or data export. The path to the file is set automatically after you have uploaded an external file to the provider.
  • The Encoding parameter specifies the encoding of the source file. You can select the proper encoding value from the drop-down list in the Value column of the table on the Parameters tab. By default, the value of the parameter is set to US-ASCII.
  • The Delimiter parameter specifies the delimiter that is used in the CSV file. You can use as a delimiter any printable character. By default, a comma (,) is used as the delimiter.
  • The QuoteAll parameter makes the provider enclose all values from the source file in double quotes. By default, the system does not enclose source values in double quotes.

An Excel provider uses the following parameters:

  • The FileName parameter, which is standard for file providers, specifies the name of the file that should be used for data import or data export.

An XML provider uses the following parameters:

  • The FileName parameter, which is standard for file providers, specifies the name of the file that should be used for data import or data export.

  • The Encoding parameter specifies the encoding of the source file. You can select the proper encoding value from the drop-down list in the Value column of the table on the Parameters tab. By default, the value of the parameter is set to US-ASCII.

  • The Format parameter specifies the format of the XML file. There are two options:

    • Tree: The source file has a tree structure; that is, the values of the source fields are placed in tags of the source XML file. This is the default option.
    • Flat: The source file has a flat structure; that is, the values of the source fields are placed in attributes of tags in the source XML file.

A Microsoft SQL provider uses the following parameters:

  • Server: Specifies the location of the Microsoft SQL Server instance. This is a required parameter. You set the parameter to the server name for a default instance of Microsoft SQL Server (for example MyServer ), and to the server name and instance name for a named instance of Microsoft SQL Server (for example, Myserver\MyInstance). If a default instance of Microsoft SQL Server is installed on the same computer where Visma Net is installed, you can set the value of the parameter to (local).

  • Database: Specifies the name of the database on the server. This is a required parameter.

  • Login: Specifies the login for accessing the Microsoft SQL Server database. This is a required parameter.

  • Password: Specifies the password for accessing the Microsoft SQL Server database. This is a required parameter.

  • LastModifiedDateColumn: Specifies the column of the database table or view that contains the date when the record was most recently modified. This parameter is necessary only if you want Visma Net to use the synchronisation type of an import scenario based on the Microsoft SQL provider. For details on the synchronisation types, see the description of the Sync type field in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) topic.

  • CreatedDateColumn: Specifies the column of the database table or view that contains the date when the record was created. This parameter is necessary only if you want Visma Net to use the synchronisation type of an import scenario based on the Microsoft SQL provider. For details on the synchronization types, see the description of the Sync type field in the Manage import scenarios (SM206025) topic.

  • Authentication: Defines the authentication type to be used to connect to the database server. There are two options:

    • SQL: Visma Net connects through SQL Server authentication. The account you specify should have sufficient rights for making changes to the database. This authentication type is used by default.
    • Windows: Visma Net connects through a Windows user account with the login and password you provide. Windows authentication works only for a local Microsoft SQL Server or when both application and database servers are members of the same Windows domain.
Description The description of the parameter.
Value The value of the parameter to be used by the provider.
## The Schema tab On this tab, you can view and manually correct, if needed, the schema of the data used in the specified external data source (file or application). For a new provider, you can extract the schema from the data source in accordance with the provider type. If you uploaded a new version of the file for an existing provider, refresh the data schema by filling in schema lines again. This tab includes two panes: The **Source objects** area contains the table with the list of objects of the data source, and the **Source fields** area contains the table with the list of fields for the object selected in the left area. ### The Source objects area
Button Description
Fill schema objects Fills in the objects from the data source in accordance with the provider type. If you don’t see this button on the toolbar, click the Images-How_to_Create_a_Provider_for_Data_Import_SM_20_60_15Icon_FillIn icon, which displays actions that do not fit on the toolbar.
Edit command

Opens the Object command editor dialog bo x, where you can type the commands for the selected table line.

Click Close to save the command and close the dialog box.

This button is used for only SQL data providers.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the object should be used for import or export. By default, the check box is not selected.
Object The name of the object in the source, such as a worksheet in an Excel spreadsheet.
Command

The command to be executed for the object during data preparation.

For example: You can apply SQL commands to source objects to apply restrictions on the imported records, select particular records from the source database table, or join data from several tables into one object in the data provider.

This column is used for only SQL data providers.
### The Source fields area
Button Description
Fill schema fields Fills in the fields from the selected data source object in accordance with the provider type.
Edit command

Opens the Object command editor dialog box, where you can type the commands for the selected table line.

Click Close to save the command and close the dialog box.

This button is used for only SQL data providers.
Toggle activation Reverses the value in the Active column in the selected line and updates the rest of the lines with this value.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the field can be used in an import or export scenario.
Field The name of the field of the object in the external data source.
Key

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the field contains the key to the data set of the object.

Currently this column is not used by data providers.
Description The description of the field.
Data type

The type of data in the field, which can be one of the following options: String, DateTime, Double, Decimal, Boolean, or Int32.

For SQL data providers, the value of this field is filled in automatically from the corresponding property of the columns of SQL tables. For other provider types, you do not need to set the value in this column.
Data length

The length of the data in the field.

For SQL data providers, the value of this field is filled in automatically from the corresponding property of the columns of SQL tables. For other provider types, you do not need to set the value in this column.
Command

The action to be performed on the field data during data preparation. For example: You can replace the value of a field with some calculated value, or change the value of a field depending on some condition.

This column is only used for SQL data providers.
Parent topic: [Integration windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/integration-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Export by scenario (SM207036) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/export-by-scenario-sm207036 page You can use this window to select an export scenario and prepare the data, export it, or roll back the changes in accordance with the selected scenario. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export by scenario (SM207036) You can use this window to select an export scenario and prepare the data, export it, or roll back the changes in accordance with the selected scenario. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In the window, you can review the prepared data if the export has failed and view the history of processing for the scenario. You can create scenarios for export by using the [Manage export scenarios (SM207025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025/) window. Export is performed to the file uploaded to the Visma Net website or to the third-party application specified in the export provider. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Prepare and export Prepares and exports the data.
Prepare Prepares the data for export by uploading it in the window. The system performs all modifications defined by the scenario at this step and uploads the modified data in the window. You can view the data in the Prepared data tab of the window.
Export Exports the prepared data. The system tries to export the records that have the Active check box selected.
Upload file version Opens the Upload new revision dialog box, which lets you update an already uploaded file.
Get latest version Downloads the latest file attached to the selected scenario. If you export data to a file, during export, the system creates a new version of the file attached to the window.
## The top part In this area, you can select an export scenario and view information about the selected scenario.
Element Description
Name The name of the export scenario. Select the scenario you want to work with, and you can view information about it.
Window name A read-only field showing the name of the Visma Net window whose functionality is used to perform data export.
Status

A read-only field showing the status of the selected scenario, which is automatically assigned during the processing and can be one of the following options:

New
Indicates that this scenario is either new and has not been used for data preparation or that the history of processing for this scenario has been rolled back.
Prepared
Indicates that the data has been prepared in accordance with the scenario.
Partially processed
Means that the data for the scenario has been processed only partially.
Processed
Indicates that the data for the scenario has been processed completely.
Number of records A read-only field that displays the number of records prepared or exported to the target file or application.
## The Prepared data tab On this tab, you can review the data prepared for export and view any errors that have occurred. The actual list displays the processed data, with as many columns as there are external fields mapped to the internal data.
Button Description
Toggle activation Reverses the value in the Active column in the selected line, and updates the rest of the lines with this value.
Clear activation until error Clears the check boxes in the Active column for the lines before the line with an error. If there are no errors, clears all the check boxes in the Active column.
Toggle processing Reverses the value in the Processed column in the selected line, and updates the rest of the lines with this value.
Clear error Clears the error messages in the Error column.
Column Description
Number The number of the record in the list of records for export.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this record is active and will be exported.
Processed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the information in the row was exported.
Error The error message, if an error occurred for this row.
## The History tab On this tab, you can view the history of processing for the selected scenario.
Button Description
Roll back Rolls back the changes in the export history and removes the prepared data.
Column Description
Status date The date when the status of the data had changed as a result of processing being performed.
Status The status of the data as a result of the processing being performed.
Number of records The number of records processed.
Version The version of the exported file. If export was successful, the system creates a new version.
## The Details tab On this tab, you can view additional information about the selected scenario.
Element Description
Provider A read-only field that displays the data provider that is used in the export scenario. To view the details about the provider, click the button to the right of the field to open the Data providers (SM206015) window.
Sync type

A read-only field that shows the type of synchronization for the selected scenario, which can be one of the following options:

Full
Performs export of all the data in accordance with the scenario.
Incremental: all records
Performs partial export, including only the data (mentioned in the scenario) that has changed in the Visma Net records.
Incremental: new only
Performs partial export, including only those records that have appeared in the Visma Net database since the previous export took place.
Prepared on A read-only field displaying the date when the data was prepared or the export was performed.
Completed on A read-only field that shows the date and time when the export was completed.
Element Description
Sitemap location The location of the scenario on the sitemap. Select the location if you want to add the scenario to the sitemap.
Sitemap title The title of the scenario on the site map. Provide the title if you want to add the scenario to the site map.
Element Description
Skip headers

A check box that you select to not export the titles of the elements in the window.

You specify this option for a particular execution of a scenario. That is, the selected value is discarded after each execution of the scenario or each refresh of the page.
Parent topic: [Integration windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/integration-windows-overview/) File synchronisation (SM202530) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/file-synchronisation-sm202530 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # File synchronisation (SM202530) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process file Initiates the synchronization of the selected files.
Process all files Initiates the synchronization of all listed files.
Schedules

In the drop-down list you have the following options:

  • Add Once a schedule is added to this window, the following options are also available:

This opens the Automation schedules (SM205020) window as a pop-up. Here you can create and add automation schedules. For more information, see: Schedule processing.

  • History
  • Delete
  • Delete all
  • View
## The top part You can use this area to specify search criteria that might help you find the file you want to locate.
Element Description
Operation The operation to be performed for the files you want to synchronize. You can select one of the following options: Import file or Export file.
## The table
Column Description
Selected A check box that you select to include the file in processing if you click Process file.
Name The name of the file to be synchronised.
Synchronisation type The type of synchronisation to be performed for the file.
Path The path to the file to be synchronised.
Synchronise folder content A check box that indicates (if selected) that the file will be synchronized with the folder.
Last import date The date when an import operation was last performed.
Last export date The date when an export operation was last performed.
Created by The name of the user who has created the file.
Manage export scenarios (SM207025) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-export-scenarios-sm207025 section You use this window to create export scenarios. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage export scenarios (SM207025) You use this window to create export scenarios. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can perform data export as a one-time activity or periodically if you have configured synchronisation between Visma Net and the third-party software. You create an export scenario for a specific provider. You can create and view providers for export by using the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. Generally, a scenario includes the mapping between the data in Visma Net (source data) and the fields in an external file or a third-party source (target data), as well as any restrictions on the source data. For more information, see: [Configuring export scenarios](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/integration/configuring-export-scenarios/configuring-export-scenarios/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View window Navigates to the window selected in the Window name field.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new scenario for one-time export or periodic synchronisation, or to select an existing scenario for editing.
Element Description
Name The name of the scenario, which may be an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this scenario is active and can be used for data export.
Window name The name of the Visma Net window whose functionality will be used to perform data export. You can select the window name by finding its workspace, finding its section, and selecting the applicable window.
Export mapped fields only

A check box that indicates (if selected) that only the fields that are mapped in the export scenario should appear in the output of data export; other fields of the data provider are skipped during export. If the check box is cleared, the fields of the data provider that are not mapped in the export scenario are exported and have null values.

We recommend that you select this check box when you are exporting data to external systems, such as HubSpot, to avoid the system rewriting of the fields that are not mapped in the scenario with null values during data export.
Provider The data provider that should be used for data export.
Provider object The object of the specified data provider. Only active provider objects are available for selection.
Sync type

The type of synchronisation for the selected scenario, which can be one of the following options:

Full
Select this option to perform export of all the data in accordance with the scenario.
Incremental - all records
Select this option to perform partial export, including only the data (mentioned in the scenario) that has changed in the Visma Net records.
Incremental - new only
Select this option to perform partial export, including only those records that have appeared in the Visma Net database since the previous export took place.
Format locale The locale whose date format (and other locale-specific formats)will be used for the data to be exported.
Inverse mapping ID The scenario that can be used for import of the same data if data synchronisation between Visma Net and the third-party software is configured.
## The Mapping tab You use this tab to map the data in the Visma Net window (in any section of windows except for **Reports** ) to the target fields in the external file or third-party application.
Button Description
Insert Inserts a new table row above the selected row.
Unlabelled field with display options

Displays the window controls according to the selected option, which is one of the following: Show all commands or Hide service commands.

By default, the Show all commands option is selected, which indicates that all commands (including service commands) are displayed.
Up Moves the selected row up the list.
Down Moves the selected row down the list.
Insert from… Gives you the ability to insert a part of another scenario; invokes the Choose scenario to insert steps from dialog box.
### The Choose scenario to insert steps from dialog box In this dialog box, you can select another scenario to insert its mapping lines into the current scenario. This operation inserts all lines of the selected scenario. Once the lines are inserted, you can make inactive or delete any lines you don't want to keep. This dialog box has the following elements.
Element Description
Mapping The scenario whose mapping lines you want to insert.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and inserts the lines from the selected scenario.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing insertion.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this step of the scenario is active during data export.
Source object The name of the functional object of the graph the Visma Net window is based on. (The functional object can be the top part,the Details area, or any of the tabs or dialog boxes.)
Field/action name The name of the field or action of the functional object selected as the Source object. Click the icon-arrowdown icon to select a field or action, or click the icon-edit icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.
Commit A check box that indicates (if selected) that when this field ora ction is filled in, a commit to the database is required.
Target field/value

The external field (in the target file) to hold the value to be exported. Click the icon-arrowdown icon to select from the available external fields.

Click the icon-edit icon to create a formula if you want to assign its resulting value back to the internal field specified as the Field/action name.
Ignore error A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should ignore errors when processing the data for this field.
## The Source restrictions tab You can use this tab to set up restrictions for the data to be exported.
Column Description
Active A check box that, if selected, indicates that the restriction is active.
Brackets The opening bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Field name The field whose value the condition will be applied to.
Condition

The logical operation to apply to the value of the selected field. The following options are available:

Equals
Returns True if the field value is equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Does not equal
Returns True if the field value is not equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Is greater than
Returns True if the field value is greater than the value specified in the Value field.
Is greater than or equal to
Returns True if the field value is greater than or equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Is less than
Returns True if the field value is less than the value specified in the Value field.
Is less than or equal to
Returns True if the field value is less than or equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Is between
Returns True if the field value is between the values specified for Value and Value 2.
Contains
Returns True if the field value(string) contains the value specified in the Value field.
Ends with
Returns True if the field value ends with the character or string specified in the Value field.
Starts with
Returns True if the field value begins with the character or string specified in the Value field.
Is null
Returns True if the field value is null.
Is not null
Returns True if the field value is not null.
Does not contain
Returns True if the field value (string) does not contain the value specified in the Value field.
Is relative A check box that indicates (if selected) that the field value represents the number of days with respect to the current business date.
Value The first value of the condition, which will be compared with the value of the chosen field. Most of the conditions require only one value, while Is between requires two values.
Value 2 The second value of the condition, if required by the selected condition.
Brackets The closing bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Operator A logical operator to be used between the logical conditions enclosed in brackets.
Schedule export scenarios (SM207035) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-export-scenarios-sm207035 page You can use this window to prepare data for export and to export the data for the export scenarios that you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule export scenarios (SM207035) You can use this window to prepare data for export and to export the data for the export scenarios that you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Also, you can view any errors that have occurred during the process and fix them in the scenarios. You can roll back the prepared data and the history of processing, if needed. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Performs the operation that you selected (in the Operation field) for the selected scenarios.
Process all Performs the operation that you selected for all scenarios in the list.
## The top part In this area, you can select an operation to be executed.
Element Description
Operation

The operation to be performed for the scenario or scenarios selected in the Scenarios area. Select one of the following options:

Prepare and export
Prepares and exports the data in one step.
Prepare
Only prepares the data for export (without exporting it); select this option if the data may require manual editing.
Export
Exports the already-prepared data.
Roll back
Rolls back the data prepared for export or removes the prepared data from the Prepared data dialog box and the latest record from the history of scenario processing in the Mapping history dialog box.
Skip headers A check box that you select to not export the titles of the elements in the window.
## The table The table of scenarios in this area includes the scenarios with the appropriate status for the operation (selected in the Parameters area) to be performed. You can select one export scenario or multiple scenarios for processing.
Button Description
History Opens the Mapping history dialog box, which displays the history of operations for the selected scenario.
Prepared data Opens the Prepared data dialog box, which displays the prepared data for the selected scenario.
Column Description
Name The name of the scenario.
Window name A read-only field showing the screen ID of the Visma Net window used by the scenario.
Provider A read-only field showing the provider used for export.
Sync type The type of synchronisation for the export scenario, which is one of the following options: Full; Incremental - all records; or Incremental - new only.
Status The status of the scenario, which can be one of the following options: Prepared, Exported, or Partially processed.
Number of records The number of records that have been processed.
Prepared on The date and time when the data was prepared.
Completed on The date and time when the data export was completed.
### The Mapping history dialog box Here, you can view the history of data export for the selected scenario. The table in the dialog box has the following columns
Column Description
Status date The date when the status last changed.
Status The status of the data, which is one of the following options: Prepared, Exported, or Partially processed.
Number of records The number of records that have been processed.
Version The date and time stamp of the version of the exported file.
### The Prepared data dialog box On the **Prepared data** dialog box, you can view the prepared data with errors indicated. The dialog box includes the toolbar and the data organised into columns that depend on the mapping of the data exported. The list below describes only the three columns that have information about processing. The table in the dialog box has the following columns.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the data is active and will be exported.
Processed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the data in the row was processed.
Error The error message, if an error has occurred for the data in this row.
Close (button) Saves the selections and closes the dialog box.
Parent topic: [Integration windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/integration-windows-overview/) Schedule import scenarios (SM206035) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/schedule-import-scenarios-sm206035 page In this window, you can prepare data for import and import the data for multiple import scenarios. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule import scenarios (SM206035) In this window, you can prepare data for import and import the data for multiple import scenarios. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can prepare data for import and import the data for multiple import scenarios. Also, you can roll back the prepared data (or history or processing) if needed. You can perform data import for the selected import scenarios that were created in the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Performs the operation you selected (in the Operation field) for the selected scenarios.
Process all Performs the operation you selected for all scenarios in the list.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select the operation to be executed and the processing options.
Element Description
Operation

The operation to be performed for the scenarios selected in the table. The following options are available:

Prepare and import
Select this operation to prepare and import the data in one step.
Prepare
Select this operation to only prepare (but not import) the data for import if the data may require manual editing.
Import
Select this operation to only import (but not prepare) the already-prepared data.
Roll-back
Select this operation to roll back the data prepared for import or remove the prepared data from the Prepared data dialog box and remove the latest record from the history of scenario processing in the History dialog box.
Break on error A check box that indicates (if selected) that the processing will be cancelled if an error occurs.
Break on incorrect target A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will stop processing records at the first error that occurs for a record that violates the target restrictions.
Validate data (no saving)

A check box that indicates (if selected) that only data validation will be performed.

The scenario processing emulates data import and is cancelled if an error occurs.

If you want to save the imported data after successful validation, select the Save if data is valid check box.
Save if data is valid

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the data should be saved if it is valid.

Clear the check box if you don’t want to save the data after import validation.

This option is available only when you select the Validate data (no saving) check box to switch to import validation mode.
Skip headers A check box that you select to not export the titles of the elements in the window.
## The table The table contains the list of scenarios with the appropriate status for the operation (selected in the Parameters area) to be performed. You can select one scenario or multiple scenarios for processing.
Button Description
History Opens the History dialog box, which displays the history of operations for the selected scenario.
Prepared data Opens the Prepared data dialog box, which displays the prepared data for the selected scenario.
Column Description
Name The name of the scenario.
Screen name A read-only field showing the screen name of the Visma Net window used by the scenario.
Provider A read-only field showing the provider used for import.
Sync type The type of synchronisation for the import scenario, which is one of the following options: Full; incremental - all records; or Incremental - new only.
Status The status of the scenario, which can be one of the following options: Prepared, Imported, or Partially processed.
Number of records The number of records in the external source.
Prepared on The date and time when the data was prepared.
Completed on The date and time when the import was completed.
### The History dialog box In the **History** dialog box, you can view the history of data import for the selected scenario. The dialog box has the following columns:
Column Description
Status date The date when the status last changed.
Status

The status of the scenario, as automatically assigned during the processing. The status can be one of the following options:

Prepared
Indicates that the data has been prepared in accordance with the scenario
Partially processed
Indicates that the data for the scenario has been imported only partially
Imported
Indicates that the data for the scenario has been imported completely
Number of records The number of records processed.
Version The date and time stamp of the version of the source file.
### The Prepared data dialog box Here, you can view the prepared data, with any errors indicated. This dialog box includes the toolbar and the data organised into columns that are specific to the data being imported. The list below describes only the three columns that have information about processing. The table in the dialog box has the following columns:
Column Description
Active A check box that, if selected, indicates that the data should be processed.
Processed A check box that, if selected, indicates that the data in the row was processed.
Error The error message, if an error has occurred for the data in this row.
Close (button) Saves the selections and closes the dialog box.
Import by scenario (SM206036) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/import-by-scenario-sm206036 section In this window, you can select an import scenario and prepare and import the data in accordance with the selected scenario. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import by scenario (SM206036) In this window, you can select an import scenario and prepare and import the data in accordance with the selected scenario. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You create scenarios for import by using the [Manage import scenarios (SM206025)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025/) window. Alternatively, you can use this form to import data directly from a file, such as an Excel spreadsheet. In this case, upload the file, set up the mapping, and then prepare and import the data. For more information, see: [Simplified scenarios for data import](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/importing-and-exporting-records-by-using-scenarios/simplified-scenarios-for-data-import/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
icon-add

Gives you the ability to add a new simplified import scenario.

Clicking this button first opens the Select file for import dialog box, where you can select the file whose data you want to import, and then opens the Provide new scenario properties dialog box, where you select the window to be used for data import, name the scenario, and select the data provider type.
Prepare and import Prepares the data and imports it.
Prepare Prepares the data for import.
Import Imports the prepared data.
Upload file version Opens the Upload new revision dialog box that you can use to update an already uploaded file.
Get file Downloads the latest file attached to the selected scenario.
View screen Displays the Visma Net window to which you are importing data with the error occurred during data import. The button is only available if there was an error during data import.
### The Provide new scenario properties dialog box In this dialog box, you can select the window to be used for importing data, enter the scenario name, and change the data provider.
Element Description
Window name

Required. The Visma Net form to be used for importing data from the uploaded file.

You select the window name by finding its workspace, finding its section, and selecting the applicable form in the site tree.
Scenario name

Required. The name of the new simplified import scenario.

The system generates the name automatically, based on the title of the form you selected in the Window name field. If required, you can change the name.
Provider type Required. The provider type, which is defined automatically based on the file type.
OK Creates a new simplified scenario for data import and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without creating a new simplified scenario for data import.
## The top part In this area, you can select an existing import scenario and view information about the scenario.
Element Description
Name The name of the scenario that should be used for data import.
Window name A read-only element showing the name of the Visma Net window whose functionality will be used to perform import.
Status

A read-only element that shows the status of the selected scenario, which is automatically assigned during the processing and can be one of the following options:

New
Indicates either that this scenario is new and has not been used for data preparation or that the history of processing for this scenario has been rolled back.
Prepared
Indicates that the data has been prepared in accordance with the scenario.
Partially processed
Indicates that the data for the scenario has been imported only partially.
Processed
Indicates that the data for the scenario has been imported completely.
Number of records A read-only element that displays the number of records in the external source.
Simple scenario A read-only check box that, if selected, indicates that the selected scenario is a simplified import scenario. For more information, see: Simplified scenarios for data import.
Discard previous result

A check box that you select to prepare and import data regardless of the status and the results of the previous import.

Generally, you should select this check box if you are scheduling the processing of the selected scenario and you expect errors during the import that do not affect the performance of the scenario.

For example: The system returns an error for a line when it is trying to import a line that has been imported in the previous cycle. If you select the check box, the system can run the scenario on a schedule, thus importing the new lines. If you clear the check box, the system won’t be able to run the scenario on schedule if the previous processing of the scenario returned errors.

For more information about scheduling, see: About scheduled processing.
## The Prepared data tab On this tab, you can review the data prepared for import and any errors that have occurred. The actual list displays the processed data, with as many columns as there are internal fields mapped to the external data.
Button Description
Toggle activation Reverses the value in the Active column in the selected line and updates the rest of the lines with this value.
Clear activation till error Clears the check boxes in the Active column for the lines before the line with an error. If there are no errors, clears all the check boxes in the Active column.
Toggle processing Reverses the value in the Processed column in the selected line and updates the rest of the lines with this value.
Clear error Clears the error messages in the Error column.
Column Description
Number The number of the record in the list of records for import.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the record is active and will be imported.
Processed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the information in the row was processed.
Error The error message, if an error has occurred for this row.
## The Mapping tab You use this tab, which appears only when you create or open a simplified data import, to map the data from the external source to the fields of the specified data entry window in Visma Net for automatic import. For more details on simplified import scenarios, see: [Simplified scenarios for data import](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/importing-and-exporting-records-by-using-scenarios/simplified-scenarios-for-data-import/).
Button Description
Refresh from file Refreshes the data schema for an existing provider after you have uploaded a new version of the file.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this field or action is active during import.
Source field/value An external field (in the source file) whose value should be imported into the specified internal field, or an expression to be executed on import to generate the value for an internal field. Click the Images-SM_20_60_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_DropDownList icon to select from the list of available fields, or click the Images-SM_20_60_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_CreateNewObject icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.
Key A check box you select to mark the key fields in the uploaded file.
Target object The name of the functional object of the graph that the Visma Net window is based on. (The functional object can be the top part, the details area, or any of the tabs or dialog boxes available for the window.)
Field name The name of the field or action of the functional object selected in the Target object column. Click the field to display the list of available values.
## The History tab You use this tab to view the history of processing for the selected scenario. A history record is inserted in the table after the import operation is completed. Therefore, if an application server restarts during processing of an import scenario (for example, if the session was timed out), no history record is inserted in the table.
Button Description
Roll back Clears the history of scenario execution and clears the prepared data. Clicking Roll back doesn’t reverse records that have already been imported.
Column Description
Status date The date when the status of the data had changed as a result of the processing being performed.
Status The status of the data as a result of processing being performed.
Number of records The number of records processed.
Version The version of the uploaded external file.
Description The description of the operation.
## The Details tab On this tab, you can view additional information about the selected scenario. ### The Information section
Element Description
Provider

A read-only box that displays the data provider of the selected import scenario.

To view the details of the provider, click the button to the right of the field to open the Data providers (SM206015) window.
Sync type

A read-only box that shows the type of synchronisation for the selected scenario, which can be one of the following options:

Full
Performs export of all the data in accordance with the scenario.
Incremental: all records
Performs partial export, including only the data (mentioned in the scenario) that has changed in the Visma Net records.
Incremental: new only
Performs partial export, including only those records that have appeared in the Visma Net database since the previous export took place.
Prepared on A read-only box displaying the date when the data was prepared or the export was performed.
Completed on A read-only box that shows the date and time when the export was completed.
### The Site map section
Element Description
Site map location The location of the scenario on the site map. Select the location if you want to add the scenario to the site map.
Site map title The title of the scenario on the site map. Provide the title if you want to add the scenario to the site map.
### The Options section
Element Description
Break on error

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the processing will be cancelled if an error occurs.

You specify this option for a particular execution of a scenario. That is, the selected value is discarded after each execution of the scenario or each refresh of the page.

This check box affects the order in which the records are imported. For example: Suppose that you are importing documents with auto-numbering of documents, and each line of the source contains one document.

If you clear the Break on error check box, all correct documents will be imported first, and then you will review all errors at once and import the corrected records. The order in which the reference numbers are assigned to the imported documents will be different than in the situation if you import documents one by one and stop after each error.

If the order of record processing is not important, you can clear the Break on error check box.
Break on incorrect target

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will stop processing records at the first error that occurs for a record that violates the target restrictions.

You specify this option for a particular execution of a scenario. That is, the selected value is discarded after each execution of the scenario or each refresh of the page.
Validate data (no saving)

A check box you select to validate the selected import scenario. The scenario processing emulates data import and is cancelled if an error occurs. If you want to save the imported data after successful validation, select the Save if data is valid check box.

You specify this option for a particular execution of a scenario. That is, the selected value is discarded after each execution of the scenario or each refresh of the page.
Save if data is valid

A check box you select to save the data if the import validation is successful. Clear the check box if you don’t want to save the data after import validation.

This option is available only when you select the Validate data (no saving) check box to switch to import validation mode.

You specify this option for a particular execution of a scenario. That is, the selected value is discarded after each execution of the scenario or each refresh of the page.
Skip headers

A check box that you select to not import the titles of the elements in the window.

You specify this option for a particular execution of a scenario. That is, the selected value is discarded after each execution of the scenario or each refresh of the page.
Parent topic: [Integration windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/integration-windows-overview/) Manage import scenarios (SM206025) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/manage-import-scenarios-sm206025 section You use this window to create an import scenario. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage import scenarios (SM206025) You use this window to create an import scenario. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can perform data import as a one-time activity or periodically if you have configured synchronisation between Visma Net and the third-party software. An import scenario is created for a specific provider. You can create and view providers for import by using the [Data providers (SM206015)](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/data-providers-sm206015/) window. Generally, a scenario includes the mapping between the data in the external data source and the data in Visma Net, as well as any restrictions on the source and target data. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View screen Navigates to the window selected in the Screen name field.
## The top part In this area, you can create a new import scenario or select an existing one for editing.
Element Description
Name The name of the scenario, which may be an alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this scenario is active and can be used for data import.
Screen name

The name of the Visma Net window whose functionality will be used to perform data import.

You can select the screen name by finding its workspace, finding its section, and selecting the applicable form.
Provider The data provider that should be used for data import.
Provider object The object of the specified data provider. Only active provider objects are available for selection.
Sync type

The type of synchronisation for the import scenario, which can be one of the following options:

Full
Select this option to perform import of all the data available in the source.
Incremental - all records
Select this option to perform partial import, including only the data in each record that has changed in the source.
Incremental - new only
Select this option to perform partial import, including only records that have appeared in the source since the previous import took place.

If the data is imported from a file data source, the Incremental - all records and Incremental - new only options provide the same result: Selecting either of these options makes the system import the data only if a new version of the source file is provided before import.
Format locale The locale used in the source field to format date, time, and other locale-specific information.
Inverse mapping ID The scenario that can be used for export of the same data if data synchronisation between Visma Net and the third-party software is configured.
## The Mapping tab You use this tab to map the data from the external source to the fields of the specified data entry form in Visma Net for automatic import or synchronisation.
Button Description
Insert Inserts a new table row above the selected row.
Unlabelled field with display options

Displays the Visma Net form controls according to the selected option, which is one of the following: Show all commands or Hide service commands.

By default, the Show all commands option is selected, which indicates that all commands (including service commands) are displayed.
Up Moves the selected row up the list.
Down Moves the selected row down the list.
Insert from Makes it possible to insert a part of another scenario; invokes the Choose scenario to insert steps from dialog box.
### The Choose scenario to insert steps from dialog box In this dialog box, you can select another scenario to insert its mapping lines into the scenario currently under modification. This operation inserts all lines of the selected scenario. Once the lines are inserted, you can make inactive or delete any lines you don't want to keep. The dialog box has the following elements:
Element Description
Mapping The scenario whose mapping lines you want to insert.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and inserts the lines from the selected scenario.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without performing insertion.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this step of the scenario is active during data import.
Target object The name of the functional object of the graph the Visma Net window is based on. (The functional object can be the top part, the details area, or any of the tabs or dialog boxes available for the form.)
Field/action name The name of the field or action of the functional object selected in the Target object column. Click the field to display the list of available values.
Commit A check box that indicates (if selected) that when this field is filled in, a commit to the database is required. The check box is automatically selected when it is required by the functionality of the field.
Source field/value An external field (in the source file) whose value should be imported into the specified internal field, or an expression to be executed on import to generate the value for the internal field. Click the Images-SM_20_60_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_DropDownList icon to select from the list of available fields, or click the Images-SM_20_60_25_SM_20_60_25Icon_CreateNewObject icon to open the Formula editor dialog box and create a formula.
Ignore error A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should ignore errors when the data for this field is imported.
## The Source restrictions tab On this tab, you can set up restrictions to filter the data that you want to extract from the source for processing by the import scenario. For example,some customer ID values in the source have **CUST** prefixes.You canspecify a source restriction that selects the only the records from the source that have the **CUST** prefix in the customer ID field. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction is active.
Brackets The opening bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Field Name The field whose value the condition will be applied to.
Condition

The logical operation to apply to the value of the selected field; in some cases, the operation entails comparing it to the values specified for Value and Value 2.The following options are available:

Equals
Returns True if the field value is equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Does not equal
Returns True if the field value is not equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Is greater than
Returns True if the field value is greater than the value specified in the Value field.
Is greater than or equal to
Returns True if the field value is greater than or equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Is less than
Returns True if the field value is less than the value specified in the Value field.
Is less than or equal to
Returns True if the field value is less than or equal to the value specified in the Value field.
Is between
Returns True if the field value is between the values specified for Value and Value 2.
Contains
Returns True if the field value (string) contains the value specified in the Value field.
Ends with
Returns True if the field value ends with the character or string specified in the Value field.
Starts with
Returns True if the field value begins with the character or string specified in the Value field.
Is null
Returns True if the field value is null.
Is not null
Returns True if the field value is not null.
Does not contain
Returns True if the field value (string) does not contain the value specified in the Value field.
Is relative A check box that indicates (if selected) that the field value represents the number of days with respect to the current business date.
Value The first value of the condition, which will be compared with the value of the selected field. Most of the conditions require only one value, while Is between requires two values.
Value 2 The second value of the condition, if required by the selected condition.
Brackets The closing bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Operator The logical operator to be used between the logical conditions enclosed in brackets.
## The Target restrictions tab You can use this tab to set up restrictions that are applied to records after they have been processed by the import scenario. For example: Suppose you have imported customer records to Visma Net and then manually changed the status of some of these records to **Inactive**,and now you want to update only those imported customer records that have **Inactive** status. Because you do not have the status in the source file, you cannot use source restrictions to select needed records. You can specify a target restriction that makes the system save the results of import for only the records that have **Inactive** status in Visma Net.
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction is active.
Brackets The opening bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Field name The field whose value the condition will be applied to.
Condition

The logical operation to apply to the value of the selected field; in some cases, the operation entails comparing it to the values specified for Value and Value 2.

Typically, the following options are available: Equals, Does not equal, Is greater than, Is greater *than or equal to*, Is less than, Is less than or *equal to*, Is between, Contains, Ends *with*, Starts with, Is null, Is not *null*.
Is relative A check box that indicates (if selected) that the field value represents the number of days with respect to the current business date.
Value

The first value of the condition, which will be compared with the value of the selected field.

Most of the conditions require only one value, while Is between requires two values.
Value 2 The second value of the condition, if required by the selected condition.
Brackets The closing bracket or brackets for composing a logical expression with multiple conditions.
Operator The logical operator to be used between the logical conditions enclosed in brackets.
Download attachments (SM508090) /visma-net-erp/help/integration/integration-windows/download-attachments-sm508090 page You use this window to download attachments on 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Download attachments (SM508090) You use this window to download attachments on This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available for users assigned with the Financial administrator role. + customer, + supplier, + journal, and + cash transactions. We recommend that you create one archive per financial year. If your company has many attachments, this process will take some time. Visma Net allows you to leave the window and continue to work with your other tasks in Visma Net. You can return to this window at any time, to see if the process has been completed and your archive is ready to be downloaded. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Download your company’s attachments](/visma-net-erp/help/integration/download-your-company-s-attachments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Generate archives Creates one or more archives with your company’s attachments.
Update status Checks and updates the archive status.
Information box Gives information about how the archive is generated.
## The Available zip archives tab
Element Description
Download (button) Downloads the selected archive.
File name

An automatically created file name showing the company ID and From/To period for the included attachments.

Example:

Company: 123456

Document type:

AR - Customer transactions,

AP - Supplier transactions,

GL- General ledger transactions, or

CA - Cash transactions

From period: 202301

To period: 202312
File size (KB) Total file size of the archive.
Expires on The date when the archive will no longer be available for download.
Created on The date when the archive was created.
Created by user The name of the user who created the archive.
Last downloaded on The date when the zip file was last downloaded by a user.
Downloaded by user The name of the user who downloaded the archive.
## The History tab
Element Description
Download (button) Downloads the selected archive.
File name

An automatically created file name showing the company ID and From/To period for the included attachments.

Example:

Company: 123456

Document type:

AR - Customer transactions,

AP - Supplier transactions,

GL- General ledger transactions, or

CA - Cash transactions

From period: 202301

To period: 202312
File size (KB) Total file size of the archive.
Expires on The date when the archive will no longer be available for download.
Created on The date when the archive was created.
Created by user The name of the user who created the archive.
Last downloaded on The date when the zip file was last downloaded by a user.
Downloaded by user The name of the user who downloaded the archive.
Inventory /visma-net-erp/help/inventory section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Inventory - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-overview page The Inventory workspace provides real-time access to stock item availability data configured in accordance with your company policies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory - overview The Inventory workspace provides real-time access to stock item availability data configured in accordance with your company policies. By using the Inventory workspace, you can maintain a perpetual inventory system while also performing physical inventories as full inventories and by cycles. In Visma Net, you can track items by either lot or serial numbers, as well as by expiration dates. By using flexible valuation methods, you can accurately maintain item costs and trace cost flows. Advanced functionality of the workspace includes flexible posting settings and automatic initiation of stock replenishment. ## Stock and non-stock items Items are the goods, products, services, or component parts recorded to and tracked in your system database. Items can be divided into two major categories, stock and non-stock items, based on how they are handled and accounted for. For more information, see the following articles: + [About stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items/) + [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/) ## Flexible item identifiers and support of alternative IDs By using configurable item IDs, you can uniquely identify stock and non-stock items. You can easily gather additional business-specific data about items by configuring custom fields, called **attributes**. Also, on purchase and sales orders, you can use bar codes, or supplier, or customer alternative IDs to find items or record the item information. For more information, see the following articles: + [About stock and non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items/) + [About stock item attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-attributes/) + [About item cross-references](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-cross-references/) + [About barcode support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-barcode-support/) ## Global and item-specific UoMs You can use an unlimited number of units of measure (UoMs) in your system. Commonly used units of measure (UoMs), such as litres, gallons, pounds, kilograms, and conversion rules between UoMS (such as pounds and kilograms) can be defined globally and then used as base units of measure, UoMs, for specific item classes or particular products. You can also define units of measure and conversion rules at the item-class and item level or cases or boxes intended for different products can be of different capacity. Once you have defined conversion rules, the system automatically makes conversions to the correct unit of measure when necessary. For more information, see [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/). ## Multiple units of measure If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, for each item you can define, in addition to the base unit, the purchase UoM to be used to measure item quantity on purchase orders and receipts and the sales unit to measure the item quantities on sales orders and invoices. Prices for base UoMs and for sales UoMs can be set as independent prices if needed. For details, see [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/). ## Multiple warehouses and locations In Visma Net, you can maintain a complex warehouse structure, defining multiple warehouses with multiple locations within each warehouse. This functionality is enabled by the **Warehouses** and **Warehouse locations** functionalities. By configuring segmentation for location identifiers, you maintain a hierarchy of rooms, rows, levels, shelves, bins, and other divisions. For each location, you can define which inventory operations can be performed there. You can also specify a primary stock item or primary item class, and set up validation so that if a preferred item is specified and the validation is turned on, only it can be received at the location. By using security features, you can restrict access to warehouse information to groups of authorised users. For more information, see the following articles: + [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/) ## Flexible system of defaults and overrides For processing inventory transactions, the item settings specified for a particular warehouse are used. To ease data entry for all possible combinations of item and warehouse, default values can be specified at the item class level and at the item level. The default values help users to save time and reduce the number of input errors. Default settings can be overridden if necessary. ## Flexible posting settings You can choose whether to automatically update the general ledger on release of inventory documents. Posting classes assigned to items define the rules for selecting particular general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be updated when transactions with the items are performed. Reason codes for inventory transactions provide the offset accounts to be updated, depending on the type of inventory transactions. For more information, see the following articles: + [About posting settings](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-settings/) + [About posting classes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage/) + [About reason codes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage/) ## Inventory transactions The Inventory workspace supports the following types of documents, recording the same-name inventory transactions: receipt, issue, adjustment, transfer, and kit assembly. Inventory documents facilitate accounting for transactions that result in changing inventory quantities. For more information about these inventory transactions, see [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/) ## Availability calculation Visma Net provides real-time visibility into the available inventory levels. The way availability data is calculated can be configured in accordance with the policies set in your company. Calculation options are specified for item classes and may differ for items assigned to different item classes. The availability data of items is shown on sales orders, purchase orders, and kit assemblies. For more information, see [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). ## Lot and serial number tracking With the Inventory workspace, you can track stock items by lot or serial numbers and by expiration dates if the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Visma Net provides flexible numbering schemes for lot and serial numbers and the ability to track different products differently. For more information about the use of lot and serial numbers, see the following articles: + [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/) + [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/) ## Kit assembling Some stock or non-stock items may be kits made up of other items. Non-stock kits may include only stock components; stock kits require assembly and may include non-stock components of the labour and expense types. A kit specification contains the list of kit components and can have revisions. If a stock kit will require disassembling, it can be done in accordance with the appropriate revision or the same one that was used to assemble the kit. For more information about kits, see [About accounting for kits](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-accounting-for-kits/). ## Inventory valuation By using a perpetual inventory system, which Visma Net enables, your company can estimate the total cost of its inventory at any moment, because on-hand quantities and inventory account balances are updated with every transaction, purchase, or sale. Periodic revision of standard costs for items with standard cost valuation methods results in the revaluation of the cost of inventory. Periodic updates of base prices can be performed automatically. For more information on inventory valuation, see the following articles: + [About the cost of inventory](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-the-cost-of-inventory/) + [About item costs and valuation methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-item-costs-and-valuation-methods/) + [About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/) ## Stocktaking counts By using Visma Net, your company can maintain a perpetual inventory system with the combination of full stocktaking counts and cycle counting that best fits the company policies and goals. Count data can be entered simultaneously from multiple computers. The information from these counts provides company managers with exact values of stock levels at any time. For more information, see the following articles: + [About overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) + [About stocktaking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-stocktaking/) + [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) ## Automated replenishment In Visma Net, you can configure automated replenishment of stock items. Flexible, automated replenishment ensures that for items requiring replenishment the right quantities will be calculated and listed on automatically generated purchase orders. Moreover, you can use the predicted average daily demand, calculated with the help of demand forecasting methods, to periodically update the values of replenishment parametres (such as maximum quantity, reorder point, and safety stock) to more precisely calculate the quantities required for replenishment. For more information, see the following articles: + [About configuration of automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment/) + [About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/) + [About replenishment methods and their parameters](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-methods-and-their-parameters/) + [About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast/) ## Other features and options The Inventory workspace also provides the following features: + The ability to quickly add product images to the item record. + Tracking of items by product work group or product manager. + Item availability data displayed when you create a sales or a purchase order. + The ability to print count sheets, tags, and item and location labels to facilitate the counting process. + For perishable items, tracking of expiration dates, with alerts displayed about expired items. + The ability to set up the automatic issue of items by expiration date. + Segmented identifiers for locations, to make it easier to locate stock. By using segments, you can define further detail levels of locations, such as rooms, shelves, and bins.

Related pages

Concepts

 Configuration overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/configuration-overview page The Inventory workspace is at the heart of Inventory, which also includes the Purchases and Sales workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configuration overview The Inventory workspace is at the heart of Inventory, which also includes the Purchases and Sales workspaces. The Inventory workspace is at the heart of Inventory, which also includes the Purchases and Sales workspaces. The Inventory workspace is the first distribution workspace you implement; the Purchases and Sales workspaces use the functionality of the Inventory workspace. The workspaces of Inventory can be adapted to any organisation's workflow, so you can implement virtually any kind of inventory model. Configuring the Inventory workspace will facilitate your organisation's daily operations. ## Prerequisites and dependencies The General ledger workspace must be configured before you implement the Inventory workspace.

Related pages

Concepts

 Manage inventory defaults /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage inventory defaults Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Manage inventory defaults - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/manage-inventory-defaults-overview page To help make data entry easier and more error-proof, Visma Net gives you the ability to set up default values and use them when you create stock and non-stock items and when you record transactions that involve stock and non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage inventory defaults - overview To help make data entry easier and more error-proof, Visma Net gives you the ability to set up default values and use them when you create stock and non-stock items and when you record transactions that involve stock and non-stock items. Any default value you establish can be overridden. For each stock and non-stock item, you can assign appropriate units of measure (UoMs) to measure item quantity, volume, and weight. You can define global UoMs (which are used throughout the system), item-specific UoMs (which are used only for particular items), and conversion rules for units of measure. ## Topics + [About reason codes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage/) + [About posting classes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage/) + [About posting settings](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-settings/) + [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/) About reason codes: definition and usage /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage page Generally, transactions with items are performed when the items are purchased or sold, and respective inventory receipts or issues are generated by financial documents, such as purchase receipts and sales orders, originating in other workspaces. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About reason codes: definition and usage Generally, transactions with items are performed when the items are purchased or sold, and respective inventory receipts or issues are generated by financial documents, such as purchase receipts and sales orders, originating in other workspaces. Because direct inventory transactions (not based on any financial documents) are not standard operations, the users should explain why the particular inventory transactions were performed. Reason codes are used with direct inventory transactions to provide the reasons for such transactions, as well as account / subaccount pairs to be used to post the transactions to general ledger. You define reason codes in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. For each reason code, you must specify with what inventory transaction it will be used. You can define the reason codes for the following types of inventory transactions: + Receipt + Issue / return + Adjustment + Transfer > [!NOTE] > Identifiers of reason codes may have up to 10 characters and can clearly designate the reason of the transaction, as with **DAMAGE**, **EXPIRATION**, **SHRINKAGE**, and **RETURNS**. ## Reason code account Each reason code provides an account to be used for the transaction. The type of the account depends on the type of transaction the reason code is associated with as well as the reason for the transaction; in most cases, it is a kind of expense account to record specific costs. For example, reason codes defined for issues are used to provide offset accounts for specific types of issues. If the issue is made for kit assembling, the offset account is usually an expense account like material expense. If the issue is made to remove expired goods, the offset account can be expired goods' costs. An inventory return functions similarly to an issue, with the entries reversed. ## Reason code subaccount and subaccount mask Each reason code provides a subaccount associated with it and a subaccount mask to set up the rule for creating a subaccount for transactions by combining segment values copied from the multiple subaccounts involved including the reason code's subaccount. To create a subaccount mask for a reason code, you can choose subaccount segments from the following sources: I (Item) : A subaccount associated with the item W (Warehouse) : A subaccount associated with the warehouse where the transaction is performed P (Posting class) : A subaccount associated with the posting class R (Reason code) : A subaccount associated with the reason code itself ## Usage of reason codes in inventory When an inventory transaction is performed directly in the Inventory workspace, the reason code defines what account will be used as an offset account and what subaccount will mark the transaction. On release of the transaction, the inventory account (coming from the stock item) and the offset account (from the reason code) will be updated with the amount of the transaction. For each type of inventory transaction, you can select the reason code that is used most frequently and assign it as the default reason code for the transaction type. You specify the default reason codes to be used for different types of inventory transactions on the **General settings** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. You can assign default reason codes to the following inventory transactions: + Receipts + Issue / returns + Adjustment + Stocktaking adjustments When you create one of these inventory documents, the system automatically inserts the appropriate default reason code for the type. You can replace it with another reason code defined for the transaction type if necessary. ## Sales account and sales subaccount Reason codes can only provide a sales account and sales subaccount segment source for sales transactions that refer to a specific order type. You can set this in the **Use sales account from** and **Combine sales sub. from** fields in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About posting classes: definition and usage /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage page Every inventory transaction creates an appropriate posting to the general ledger, depending on the particular item, the type of transaction, the warehouse location where the item is stocked, and other conditions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About posting classes: definition and usage Every inventory transaction creates an appropriate posting to the general ledger, depending on the particular item, the type of transaction, the warehouse location where the item is stocked, and other conditions. A posting class is a set of rules defining for each item which accounts and subaccounts should be used to post specific transactions to the general ledger. Also, posting classes are used to provide default general ledger accounts for stock and non-stock items on sales and purchase orders. You create posting classes by using the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. The definition of a posting class includes the accounts assigned to the class (specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab) and the settings to be used for transaction posting to general ledger (located on the **Posting settings** tab). ## Default general ledger accounts for items of the class Each posting class has general ledger accounts assigned to it. These accounts will be used in the following ways: + As default general ledger accounts for items assigned to the posting class + As general ledger accounts assigned to the posting class itself as one of the sources for selecting the proper accounts to be used for specific transactions The list of accounts specified for the posting class includes the following accounts: + The inventory ( **Asset** ) account and subaccount to be used to keep the balance of transactions with the stock item assigned to the posting class or the accrual account ( **Expense** ) if the item is a non-stock item + The reason code subaccount to be used to mark direct inventory transactions with the stock item + The sales ( **Income** ) account and subaccount to be used when the stock item is issued from the inventory for sale (based on sales orders) + The cost of goods sold ( **Expense** ) account and subaccount to be used when the stock item is issued for sale or the expense account when a non-stock item is sold + The standard cost variance ( **Expense** ) account and subaccount to be used when the stock item's cost on the purchase receipt differs from the cost on the inventory receipt (for items with the standard cost valuation method assigned) + The standard cost revaluation ( **Expense** ) account and subaccount to be used to record a gain or loss when the standard cost is updated (for items with the standard cost valuation method assigned + The purchase accrual ( **Liability** ) account and subaccount to be used to accrue amounts on purchase receipts related to the stock item + The purchase price variance account and subaccount ( **Expense** ) to be used to record any differences between the item cost on the purchase receipt and the inventory receipt + The landed cost variance account and subaccount ( **Expense** ) to be used to record any differences between the landed costs specified on the purchase receipts on Inventory receipts ## Rules for choosing accounts Accounts and subaccounts for inventory transactions related to sales, purchases and valuation of items can be obtained from the sources, depending on the policies established in your company. For example, if only one inventory account is used in your company for all stock items, you might want to provide very specific subaccounts to track which warehouses were involved in every transaction. In Visma Net, you can choose accounts from the following sources:
Item: The inventory account for all transactions of the item will be the same regardless of where the inventory transaction occurs.
Warehouse: The inventory account will vary depending on the warehouse where the inventory transaction is made.
Posting class: The inventory account assigned to the posting class itself (as specified on the General ledger accounts tab) will be used. This option is helpful when you need to replace the inventory account previously used for items of the posting class with a new account.
> [!NOTE] > for sales orders, the sales account is retrieved according to settings in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. ## Rules for choosing subaccounts Generally, subaccounts to be used for transaction posting can be selected from the same sources as accounts, but since subaccounts consist of multiple segments, you have the option to combine segment values from different sources to get subaccounts that would perfectly reflect all the details of the transaction. A posting class provides the subaccount masks on the **Posting settings** tab, which allows you to configure how the subaccounts should be composed using segment values copied from various sources. Consider a simple example of configuring a subaccount mask for a sales subaccount. Suppose there are four segments in the subaccounts used in your company, which have the format **XX-XXX-XX-XX**. For each segment, you have the choice of three options designating the source of the segment value: + P: Posting class + I: Item + W: Warehouse If you configure the sales subaccount mask as **II-III-II-II**, it means that for sales transactions, the subaccount specified as sales subaccount for the item will be used. If you configure the sales subaccount mask as **WW-PPP-II-PP**, then for sales transactions, the sales subaccount will be a combination of three subaccounts: + The first segment will be copied from the sales subaccount associated with the warehouse, specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. + The second and fourth segment will be copied from the sales subaccount associated with the posting class of the item, specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. + The third segment will be copied from the sales subaccount associated with the item, specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. ## Using posting classes Posting classes facilitate specifying general ledger accounts for multiple items assigned to specific classes. One of the posting classes can be chosen as the default posting class in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. Then, when a user creates a new stock item using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the item is assigned to the default posting class. If necessary, the user can choose another posting class for the item. Once the posting class is selected, the **General ledger accounts tab** will have the values (intended for general ledger accounts and subaccounts) filled in for the item, based on the posting class. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you choose as the default class the posting class with settings that apply to the largest number of items. Other posting classes can be more specific and contain settings that apply to fewer items. Later, on release on a specific inventory document, the system checks the posting class of each stock item and applies the rules of the item's posting class to determine accounts and subaccounts to be used for the transaction. For example, for each line item in a sales invoice, the system checks the posting class of the stock item, and applies the rules of the item's posting class to determine a sales account and subaccount and a COGS-account and subaccount to be used for the transaction. Depending on whether the **Post summary when updating the general ledger** option is selected on the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, the system generates a batch with journal entries grouped by the account / subaccount pair or with full details. After that, the system generates a batch using the accounts and subaccounts in accordance with the posting classes of the items listed in the document. When the standard costs for the stock items are changed (at the end of financial year or when needed), the process of updating the standard costs generates inventory adjustments to be posted to the general ledger. The system will use the standard cost revaluation account and the corresponding subaccount determined by the rules defined by the posting class of the item whose cost is being updated. If upon release of the purchase receipt, there are differences between the purchase receipt amount and the inventory receipt amount, the following accounts will be used: + For items with the standard cost valuation method, the standard cost variance account and subaccount. + For items with other valuation methods, the purchase price variance account and subaccount. + For all items, the landed cost variance account and subaccount to record any differences between the landed costs specified on the purchase receipts and inventory receipts.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About posting settings /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-settings page The Inventory workspace of Visma Net is tightly integrated with the General ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About posting settings The Inventory workspace of Visma Net is tightly integrated with the General ledger workspace. The Inventory workspace of Visma Net is tightly integrated with the General ledger workspace. Depending on the configuration settings selected for the Inventory workspace, the inventory transactions can be automatically posted to the general ledger each time an inventory transaction is released. Posting classes give you great flexibility to create appropriate rules for choosing accounts to be updated in the general ledger by specific inventory transactions. ## Inventory–general ledger integration settings The settings used to configure the level of integration between the Inventory and General ledger workspaces are located on the **General settings** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. The following options are available: Update general ledger : If this option is selected, transactions originating in the Inventory workspace will update the general ledger. If this option is cleared, inventory transactions do not update the general ledger, and the inventory can be maintained independently from the General ledger workspace. Post summary when updating the general ledger : If this option is selected, only summary information (for the account / subaccount pair) will be included into the batch. If this option is cleared, the detailed information for each document line will be included in the batch generated for the document. Automatically post on release : If this option is cleared, inventory transactions will not be automatically posted to the general ledger on release of Inventory documents; they should be posted through the General ledger workspace. If this option is selected, inventory transactions will be posted on the release of inventory documents. ## Posting classes A posting class groups stock or non-stock items by the way general ledger accounts are selected for posting specific transactions to the general ledger. The posting class also provides the account and subaccount to be used if the source of general ledger accounts for a transaction is a posting class itself. You create posting classes using the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. You can assign a posting class to an item class as the default posting class for stock items of the item class. You can also assign a posting class to a stock item using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and to a non-stock item using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. A posting class defines the rules for selecting general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be used for transactions with items assigned to the posting class. When a transaction with an item is performed, several similar accounts are involved. For example: When a stock item is received at a particular warehouse, a debit amount can be recorded to either the inventory account associated with the warehouse or the inventory account associated with the item. Subaccounts for various types of transactions can be combined from multiple involved subaccounts depending on the policies established in your organisation. Accounts and subaccount segment values can be chosen from the following sources: + Item + Warehouse + Posting class For more details about using posting classes, see: [About posting classes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-posting-classes-definition-and-usage/). ## Reason codes If inventory transactions are generated from the Purchases or Sales workspace, the system will use the purchase accrual account (for purchase receipts) or the COGS account (for sales orders). The offset account and subaccount for a receipt, issue, adjustment, or transfer are determined by the document's reason code, which is selected depending on the specific transaction being performed. For different types of inventory transactions, different types of offset accounts should be selected. Reason codes also can be used to gather statistics about specific inventory transactions. You define reason codes in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. Each reason code is associated with the type of inventory transaction it will be used for. For each type of inventory transaction, multiple reason codes can be created if necessary to further categorise transactions within their types. By using the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, you can define the reason codes used most frequently with each type of as the default reason codes for types of transactions. The reason code serves the same two purposes as the posting class does: + To define the sources of the offset subaccount segment values on a per-segment basis + To provide the offset account and offset subaccount, if the source is the reason code itself For more information on using reason codes, see: [About reason codes: definition and usage](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-reason-codes-definition-and-usage/).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About units of measure and conversions /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions page In Visma Net, you can maintain any number of different units of measure (UoMs) to be used for products that are purchased, stocked, or sold by your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About units of measure and conversions In Visma Net, you can maintain any number of different units of measure (UoMs) to be used for products that are purchased, stocked, or sold by your company. In Visma Net, you can maintain any number of different units of measure (UoMs) to be used for products that are purchased, stocked, or sold by your company. Multiple units of measure are required because items can be sold by the piece or grouped into boxes, packages, crates, and so forth. Some units of measure apply to many products and as such are defined globally. Other units of measure are used only for particular products or for groups of similar products. Visma Net allows you to define UoMs and conversion rules at all of these levels, as the sections below describe. ## Global units of measure You use the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window to define units of measure that can be used globally for all items. You can add new units of measure to the unit conversion reference table in this window and specify how they are converted to units already defined in the table if applicable. The global UoMs specified in this table can be used throughout Visma Net, including when a user is selecting default UoMs for a new item class or item. ## Product-specific units of measure If (for each item class, which is defined and modified in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window) the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled, you can specify the base, sales, and purchase units to be used by default for items of the class: Base unit : The unit of measure used for stock keeping and to calculate unit costs. Quantities of the stock item at warehouses are counted using the UoM specified as the base unit for the stock item. Sales unit : The unit of measure typically used when your company sells the product. Purchase unit : The unit of measure typically used when your company purchases the product. You can select globally defined units of measure or type a class-specific UoM. For all units selected for the class, unit conversions are specified with respect to the class' default base unit. In the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) and [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) windows, you can select the base, sales, and purchase units for particular items. (This information is specified on the **General settings** tab of either window.) You can select units from the list of UoMs defined for the class or manually enter units for a particular item. The system will not automatically add item-specific UoMs either globally or for the class. If you want the new units to be available for selection when users create other new items, add them for the class. For a stock item stocked at a particular warehouse, you can select warehouse-specific sales and purchase units by using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is disabled in your system, you can use only base units for item classes as well as for individual stock and non-stock items. If you decide at any moment to enable this functionality, the sales and purchase units of each stock and non-stock item will get their values from the currently used base unit of the item. > [!NOTE] > The system will not automatically add class-specific units to the global unit conversion reference table in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. ## Choosing the base unit In general, you may want to choose for each item a base unit that is the smallest unit you would ever use when buying or selling the product, so you can avoid any problems caused by rounding. To understand this guideline, consider a simple example: You purchase and stock a product (canned juice) in boxes of 12 cans, and choose a box as the base unit for this product. If you then decided to sell the product by cans, you will need to specify quantities in fractions or define the sales unit (if sales and purchase units are enabled in your system) as 0.0833333 (one-twelfth) of the base unit. Further, suppose the quantities in your system are calculated up to 3 decimal places, as specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. Imagine that one customer wants to buy 5 cans, and another wants to buy another 5 cans. In both cases the sales order will specify 0.417 units (5 \* 0.0833333), and both customers will get 5 cans. The remaining 0.166 units doesn't actually equate to the 2 cans left in the box! During a financial period, in a warehouse, such rounding problems can cause a significant discrepancy between the quantities on books and physical quantities. During stocktaking, counting is performed in base units, so if the base unit for the product is not the smallest UoM applicable to the item, counting results may prove incorrect. Considering the above example, counting only boxes can result in incorrect total number of cans because some of the boxes may not be full. ## Specifying conversion rules If different UoMs are used as base, sales, and purchase units, you specify conversion rules with respect to the UoM chosen as the base unit for the item. For instance, imagine a product is sold to customers by the piece (**PIECE**), making **PIECE** its sales unit. It is stocked in boxes, and each box (**BOX**) includes 6 pieces. The product is purchased from a supplier in containers. Each container (**CONTAINER**) contains 12 boxes, and the purchase unit is **CONTAINER**. As the base unit, you can choose **PIECE** or **BOX**. (The smallest unit is usually chosen.) If you chose **BOX**, you would specify the following conversion rules: |From unit|Multiply / divide|Conversion factor|To unit| |---|---|---|---| |CONTAINER|Multiply|12|BOX| |PIECE|Divide|6|BOX| ## Priority of conversion rules When you enter a transaction and specify the quantity of a stock item and the unit of measure in which the quantity is measured, the system follows the following rules to determine how the specified UoM can be converted to the base unit for cost-of-sold-goods calculation and to sales units for finding the proper price: 1. The system first searches the unit conversion table for the item–warehouse pair. 1. If no unit is found, the system checks the unit conversion table specific for the stock item. 1. If no item is found, the global unit conversion table is searched. ## Units of weight and volume When a third-party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from a supplier to your company or from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company for freight, depending on the weight or volume of the shipment, or set restrictions on the package weight and volume. Landed costs incurred for shipments can be allocated by weight or by volume. To allow the system to automatically calculate the weight and volume of shipments, in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, select a globally defined unit of measure as the measure of weight and another as the measure of volume. For each stock item, you can specify the weight (measured in weight UoMs) and the volume (measured in volume UoMs) of its base unit on the **Packaging** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About units of weight and volume /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-weight-and-volume page When a third party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company specific freight amounts that depend on the weights or volumes of the packages in shipments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About units of weight and volume When a third party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company specific freight amounts that depend on the weights or volumes of the packages in shipments. When a third party (a carrier) is used to deliver products from your company to a customer, the carrier can charge your company specific freight amounts that depend on the weights or volumes of the packages in shipments. The carrier may also set restrictions on the weight or volume of packages. Landed costs incurred for shipments delivered from suppliers to your company can be allocated by the weight or volume of the items in the shipment. In Visma Net, you can select the base units of measure for weight and volume and set up the automatic calculation of weights and volumes for sales and purchase orders. ## The base weight and volume UoMs In the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window, you should create a unit of measure (UoM) to be used in your system as the base UoM for weight. The weights of all sales and purchase orders will be calculated in this UoM. However, if the items differ in weight significantly, you can create other UoMs for measuring the weights of the base units of stock and non-stock items. For each additional weight UoM, you must specify the rules for converting this UoM to the base weight UoM. In the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window, you should define a UoM that will be used in your system to measure the volume that specific quantities of the items listed on sales and purchase orders can take. Define all other UoMs that may be used to measure the volumes that the base units of various items can take and specify the conversion factors with respect to the base volume UoM. In the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, select the base weight UoM in the **Weight UoM** field and select the base volume UoM in the **Volume UoM** field. ## Weight and volume of stock items For each stock item, you can specify the weight (measured in a specific weight UoM) and the volume (measured in a specific volume UoM) of its base unit on the **Packaging** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. For non-stock items, you can specify such values (if applicable) by using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. For the item-specific weight and volume UoMS there must be rules for conversion to the appropriate base UoMs specified either in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window or in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in your system, make sure that rules for converting each sales and purchase unit to the base UoM selected for the item are defined in the system. Also, if the **Use a price adjustment multiplier** check box is selected on the **General settings** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can specify a price adjustment multiplier for the item. ## Weight and volume calculation for sales orders With the base weight and volume UoMs selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window and with weights and volumes of the base units of the items specified in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the system can calculate the weight and volume of the ordered quantities of stock items for each sales order. For each item, its quantity specified in the sales units is calculated in the base units and multiplied by the weight of the base unit. You can view the weight and volume totals for the order on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The freight rates are specified for shipping zones based on the total shipment weight and (optionally) volume. The weight of a shipment is compared to break points, and the first one that is less than the shipment weight provides the freight rate. The system calculates the freight cost based on the calculation method, **Per unit** or **Net**. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is enabled in your system, the system uses the packaging options specified in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window and the items' weight and volume to determine the packages (that is, the set of boxes) for each shipment. ## Weight and volume calculation for purchase receipts The system can calculate the weight and volume of the received quantities of stock and non-stock items for each purchase receipt. The landed cost specified for each purchase receipt can be split over the items listed in the receipt in proportion to the item weights or volumes (among other options).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Define weight UoMs /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/define-weight-uoms section You can define new units of measure for weight and specify the rules for conversion one UoM into another UoM by using the Units of measure (CS203100) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define weight UoMs You can define new units of measure for weight and specify the rules for conversion one UoM into another UoM by using the Units of measure (CS203100) window. For more information: [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/). You can define new units of measure for weight and specify the rules for conversion one UoM into another UoM by using the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. For the example illustrated in this procedure, we will create weight UoMs for a gram (**GRAM**) and pound (**LB**) and define conversion rules to convert the weights measured in pounds to weights measured in grams and to convert the weights measured in grams to weights measured in pounds. ## Create a new UoM 1. Go to the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **From unit** column, type a name for the new unit, such as **GRAM**. 1. In the **To unit** column, type the name of the new UoM that you specified in the **From unit** column ( **GRAM** in this example). 1. In the **Multiply/divide** column, select **Multiply**. 1. In the **Conversion Factor** column, type **1.0** 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). For this example, repeat the steps above to create the **LB** (pound) UoM. ## Specify the conversion rule from LB to GRAM 1. Go to the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **From unit** column, select **LB**. 1. In the **To unit** column, select **GRAM**. 1. In the **Multiply/divide** column, select **Multiply**. 1. In the **Conversion factor** column, type **453.5923**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Specify the conversion rule from GRAM to LB 1. Go to the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **From unit** column, select **GRAM**. 1. In the **To unit** column, select **LB**. 1. In the **Multiply/divide** column, select **Multiply**. 1. In the **Conversion factor** column, type **0.0022046**. > [!NOTE] > Here we specified the conversion factor as 0.0022046 with 7 decimal places. This value shows how many pounds one gram contains. In your system, the decimal precision is defined in the **Quantity decimal places** field in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window. Make sure that the selected decimal precision does not cut off any meaningful digits. For instance, if we set the number of decimal places for quantities to 2, this would result in incorrect conversions from grams to pounds. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage stock and non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage stock and non-stock items Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Manage stock and non-stock items - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items-overview page Inventory, an important asset for any business, encompasses the finished goods and raw materials that 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage stock and non-stock items - overview Inventory, an important asset for any business, encompasses the finished goods and raw materials that + cost money, + have value, and + are stored and used in the business. These goods or products are generally referred to as **stock items**. Along with stock items, businesses may sell **non-stock items** or non-physical goods, such as services and warranties, that are not stocked and **kits** that include other stock and non-stock items. About the hierarchy of item classes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-the-hierarchy-of-item-classes section In Visma Net, item classes are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the hierarchy of item classes In Visma Net, item classes are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. The item class: + is a required parameter of a stock item + includes the settings that are used for availability calculation, replenishment, price management, and posting to the general ledger, and + can be used for categorising items. In the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, you can create item classes for stock items as well as for non-stock items of each type that is used in your business. A user specifies an item class when they define a new stock or non-stock item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window respectively, and the system fills in many values, thus saving users time and increasing the accuracy of the entered data. ## Planning the item class hierarchy The structure of item class IDs is defined by the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key, which you can review and modify in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. This segmented key has a hierarchical structure which means that each segment of the segmented key defines the hierarchical level. You can review the item class hierarchy in the **Item class tree** pane in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. In this pane, you will be able to see if an item class is made up of one or more levels by the way the tree is structured. After you have defined the structure of the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key, the system shows the mask that corresponds to this structure in any field that requires the user to enter an item class ID. Here is an example of what a mask for the item class ID with three segments of two symbols each looks like: **-**-**. Segments that are not yet specified are denotated with *****. You can change the default character (**-**) that separates the segments in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. The following diagram shows examples of different levels of item class hierarchy. ![IN_CON_ItemClassDiagram](/media/visma-net-erp/IN_CON_ItemClassDiagram.png)
IF the INITEMCLASS segmented key THEN
has one segment the item classes will have a plain structure with no nested levels. (See Example 1 on the diagram.)
has two or more segments

each segment after the first segment defines a subsequent level of hierarchy.

Note: Item classes that have the second segment specified are displayed at the second level of hierarchy.
An item class segment of the second level directly refers to the parent item class segment of the first level. That is, under different parent item classes, you can create child item classes with the same ID of the second segment but different settings; see **20-10 (Technical literature)** and **30-10 (Paper)** in Example 2 on the diagram above. By adding more segments to the segmented key, you can expand your ability to categorise items by item classes. For instance, you could add a third level (see the hierarchy in Example 3 on the diagram above) to make your inventory categorisation even more comprehensive and flexible. By using the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key, you can specify as many levels as you need. > [!NOTE] > You can append a new segment to the key at any time; however, we recommend that you carefully plan the structure of the segmented key before you start to create and use item classes. ## Entering item class ID segment values When you create a new item class or enter an item class ID in any appropriate field in the system, you have to specify the needed symbols according to the mask of the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key. If you skip any of the characters in any segment, the system shows \* instead of a blank symbol. When you enter an item class ID, you can either enter each segment value manually, or press **F3** and select the segment value from the list. ### First level segment values For the first segment, only the segment values of the first level of hierarchy are displayed in the selection field. ### Subsequent segment values For each subsequent segment, in the selection list, the system shows the child segment values that are appropriate based on the previous segment or segments selected. > [!NOTE] > The way the system narrows the list of segment values based on previously selected values is defined by the **By segments: Child segment values** option selected in the **Lookup mode** field in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window; this option is the default for the **INITEMCLASS** segmented key. ## Mass-updating settings of item classes When you change some settings of a parent item class, they will apply to all newly created item classes of this parent item class, but these changes do not influence the settings of the existing child item classes of this parent item class. To simplify the process and automatically apply the settings of the parent item class to all its child item classes: 1. Go to the parent class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. 1. Click **Actions - Apply to children** in the window toolbar. 1. Confirm the action. **Result**: All the item classes of this tree node will have identical settings. ## Reviewing the items of the item class You can review the items that belong to a particular item class in the [Items by item class (IN408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000/) window. ### The left pane The left pane of this window shows the tree of item classes. ### The right panel The right pane of the window offers the following views: + Default view, by selecting the **Only related to the current item class** option button, which shows only the items that belong to the selected item class. + Extended view, by selecting the **Related to the current and child item classes** option button, which shows the items that belong to the selected item class, along with items that belong to all child item classes of the selected item class. + Available connections by entering the ID of a particular item in the **Item ID** field, which will show which item class it belongs to and which other items belong to this item class.

Related pages

Windows

 About stock and non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items page This article highlights general information about stock and non-stock items and their processing in Visma Net, and the major differences between them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About stock and non-stock items This article highlights general information about stock and non-stock items and their processing in Visma Net, and the major differences between them. **Stock items** are e.g. the finished goods and raw materials that cost money, have value, and are stored and used in the business. **Non-stock items** are e.g. non-physical goods, such as services and warranties, that are not stocked. Each item has a record in the database that provides information about the type of the item (stock or non-stock); + unique identifier + description + the general ledger accounts used to account for transactions with it + price and cost information, + the various units of measure (UoMs) that apply to it and conversions between UoMs. + additional information required to track the items in the system. ## Item IDs Each stock and non-stock item has a unique identifier in the system. This ID can be just a number, or it can be configured to provide basic information about the type, brand, or use of the item. As with other identifiers in Visma Net, item IDs can be configured using the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. You configure identifiers for stock and non-stock items using the same segmented key: **INVENTORY**. You can define: + how many segments the key will have + what values may be used + whether they are to be validated + whether auto-numbering are to be used in one of the segments Because the same segmented key is used for stock and non-stock items, one segment may be reserved to indicate the type of the item. ## Stock items Stock items are items that you purchase and re-sell to your customers. Stock items may have lot or serial numbers you can use to track them during their lifetime. The system automatically tracks stock items and maintains availability data: + how many base units are on hand + how many are ordered from suppliers + how many are booked to sales orders and shipments You can configure how exactly the availability data is computed, and the data is updated as the item is received, invoiced, adjusted, or transferred. For details, see: [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). Stock items are also tracked by their value, and several valuation methods can be used. Typically, a stock item is an asset until it is sold. Its cost becomes an expense. The system also automatically monitors when the stock level of the item falls below the defined minimum and automatically calculates the quantities required to replenish the stock, based on the demand for the item and the inventory information you have defined for the stock item. For details, see: [About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/). ## Non-stock items Non-stock items are typically non-physical goods such as: + labour + services + warranties + small repair or installation part + items with very low values that might be hard to track. Supported types of non-stock items are: + **Non-stock item** + **Labour** + **Service** + **Charge** + **Expense** Non-stock kits are not stocked; they are sold as one item with all stock components shipped as one package. Available quantities of non-stock items are not tracked by the system; they are treated as if they are available in any quantity at any time. A line on a sales order that features a non-stock item cannot be back ordered. The list of non-stock items appears when you choose overstock components for kits, labour for contracts, and items on an invoice. Only standard cost valuation method applies to non-stock items. For more information on non-stock items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About non-stock item support /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support page Non-stock items may be "products" that consist of no physical entity and thus cannot be stocked in warehouses (as with labour, services, or charges) or physical entities for which you do not need to track quantities in a warehouse because very small quantities are required. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About non-stock item support Non-stock items may be "products" that consist of no physical entity and thus cannot be stocked in warehouses (as with labour, services, or charges) or physical entities for which you do not need to track quantities in a warehouse because very small quantities are required. Many stores sell items that can’t be found on their shelves, such as product warranties, or services such as product assembly, installation, or customisation. Some items are obviously non-stock, such as labour rates and services, but the decision about whether to consider other items (such as gift-wrapping) stock or non-stock depends on the company's inventory policies and other conditions. In the system, non-stock items are handled differently from stock items kept in warehouses. For stock items, the Inventory workspace maintains all cost, quantity, sales, and cost-of-goods-sold information. Since non-stock items do not require tracking of quantities, the Inventory workspace maintains only standard costs and base price information for them. > [!NOTE] > You can use non-stock items in > > + Supplier ledger > + Customer ledger > + Project > > even if the **Logistics** functionality is not enabled in your system. > > However, you will not be able to define the item classes nor the posting classes for them, and it will not be possible to update their prices and costs in bulk. ## Types of non-stock items Visma Net supports the following types of non-stock items:
Non-stock item A general type of non-stock item generally bought for internal needs or for using in sales but not for selling separately.
Labour or Labour class A non-stock item mostly used as a source of general ledger accounts for recording sales of labour.
Service A non-stock item to designate service fees.
Charge A non-stock item that represents specific type of charges.
Expense A non-stock item that represents specific type of expense.
## Item classes for non-stock items You can create item classes for non-stock items to provide default settings for each type of non-stock items used in your business. With such classes defined, users specify an item class when they use the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window to define a new non-stock item, and the system fills in many values, thus saving time and increasing accuracy. ## Settings for non-stock items Information about non-stock items and their properties is maintained using the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window available in the Customer ledger, Supplier ledger, and Inventory workspaces. The list below describes some of the settings you can provide for a non-stock item using this window:
Item ID Every non-stock item is assigned an unique identifier based on the INVENTORY segmented key. For details on identifier configuration possibilities, see: About stock and non-stock items. For material non-stock items, you can specify a default warehouse and select whether the items require shipping and receipts on purchase.
Units and conversion rules For each non-stock item, you can select the units of measure (UoMs) used as base, sales, and purchase units for the item. You can specify conversion rules for them and for other UoMs used for the item. You select UoMs from the list of those available for the item class or type new UoMs manually. Note that every conversion rule is specified with respect to the UoM chosen as the item’s base unit.
Packaging options If the non-stock item requires shipping, specify the weight of the base unit and the UoM used to measure the weight.
General ledger accounts and subaccounts

Purchases and sales of non-stock items do not affect companies’ assets, so the general ledger accounts and subaccounts used for non-stock items are limited to

  • sales accounts,
  • expense accounts, and
  • accounts required for posting transactions related to kit assembly (if the item is a kit or a kit component).

Corresponding subaccounts are used to detail records within each account.

Note

If receipt is required for a non-stock item, a price variance account and a purchase accrual account are required to record purchases of this non-stock item. When the receipt is matched to the invoice, any price variance for the non-stock item is recorded to the specified price variance account.

You can create posting classes to provide default sales/expense accounts and subaccounts for non-stock items. If a non-stock item has not been assigned to a posting class, the default expense subaccount is generated according to the rule specified in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Valuation method Only the standard cost method applies to non-stockitems.
Price information For non-stock items of all types, you can specify price classes and assign prices that become effective on specific dates.
## Labour-type non-stock item Non-stock items of the **Labour** type are processed in the system differently from non-stock items of other types. They are used in the Projects and Time and expenses workspaces as a source of accounts to be used in contract and project invoicing. For more information, see [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) ## Non-stock item costs Non-stock items do not affect company's inventory balance. However, to make it possible to enter the non-stock item cost and use it in the non-stock item price calculation, Visma Net enables you to maintain standard costs for non-stock items. The standard costs are determined outside of the system by cost experts, and the values should include some of the indirect and direct costs allocated. Standard costs are defined with respect to the base unit of the non-stock item. Entering cost information By using the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window you can: + Specify the standard cost for a non-stock item as pending cost. + Specify a date when the cost will become effective. + Update standard costs for non-stock items by using the **Update cost** action. The system displays only the last cost and current cost. The historical costs that were effective before the last cost are not stored in the database. If you want to make similar changes to many or all non-stock (and possibly stock) items, use the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. By using the window, you can enter new costs and compare current and pending costs side-by-side for all items that you select. If you are satisfied with the changes, you can update the current standard costs with the pending standard costs for all items or only selected ones. ## Prices for non-stock items For non-stock items, you can define and maintain a default sales price for each item in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, or you can implement different pricing strategies in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. For more information, see: [About default prices](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices/) and [About Sales prices](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/multiple-price-lists/price-list-maintenance/about-sales-prices/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About item cross-references /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-cross-references page Cross-reference means you associate an item's internal item ID maintained by your company with an alternative ID used by the supplier or customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About item cross-references Cross-reference means you associate an item's internal item ID maintained by your company with an alternative ID used by the supplier or customer. You create cross-references for an item using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, the **Cross-references** tab. Cross-referencing: + saves time spent on handling customer and supplier orders, and + helps you avoid costly errors ## Alternative IDs For each stock item, you can provide alternative IDs as used by customers (one ID per customer) and as used by suppliers (one ID per supplier). As a consequence, when you enter a customer's sales order and specify an alternative ID for an item, the system will insert the item ID and item price in the order. Alternative IDs may contain numbers, letters, special characters, and spaces. They are not verified by the system. How alternative IDs are specified depends on whether the partner (the customer or supplier) uses the same classification of items or its classification has more or fewer details than are maintained in Visma Net. In any case, to ensure unique identification by alternative IDs, work out internal rules on specifying alternative IDs. ## Bar codes A bar code + is a machine-readable graphical representation of data that contains information about the product to which the bar code is attached. + can be found om most products that are sold or purchased. + is read by using a special scanner that reads the information encoded in the image. + is converted into alphanumeric strings by a Scanner software. + is specific to the company that manufactures or resells the product. Different bar code standards are used for different types of products and in different world regions. With Visma Net: + you can use any bar codes as alternative IDs for items. + bar codes do not require any association with particular supplier or customer, and + they can be entered in any number for the same item. Bar codes can be entered into the system: + on creating a receipt by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, by scanning a bar code of the product and associating it with the item ID used for this product in the system, + by using a scanner in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window ( **Cross-references** tab), or + manually. ## Customer alternative IDs Customer alternative IDs are item identifiers (such as part numbers) used by the customers for the product. In the system, you can: + create multiple alternative IDs for the product (one for each customer), + specify each alternative ID for the item and indicate that it is used by a customer using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, in the **Cross-references** tab, + create alternative IDs (and cross-references) on the fly while specifying the details of the sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, and + update an item record by overriding the existing alternative ID. ## Supplier alternative IDs Supplier alternative IDs are item identifiers used by your company's suppliers for the product. As with customer alternative IDs, you can: + maintain multiple supplier alternative IDs in the Inventory workspace, + create alternative IDs on the fly while specifying the details of the purchase order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, and + update an item record by overriding the existing alternative ID. ## Supplier catalogues For items your company frequently purchases from a particular supplier, a supplier catalogue can be maintained in either the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window or the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, under the **Supplier details** tab. Along with alternative IDs, you can specify supplier's last prices for the items and update them with prices quoted on supplier documents such as receipts or even purchase orders. When they create purchase orders, users will be able to see the supplier's last prices for the items listed on the orders.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About item attributes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-item-attributes page For each stock and non-stock item, Visma Net provides a basic set of item properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About item attributes For each stock and non-stock item, Visma Net provides a basic set of item properties. For each stock and non-stock item, Visma Net provides a basic set of item properties. These properties include the item's + identifier + description + price + cost + units of measure + default warehouse + default supplier information Stock and non-stock items can have additional properties, known as **attributes** in Visma Net, that do not affect item processing in the Inventory workspace but may help your company analyse stock movements or item sales. Attributes may differ for different types of items. ## Types of attributes In the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window, you can decide what attributes are needed, what values are allowed for each, and what control (type of element) is used to implement the attribute on the interface. You can define an attribute as optional or required. This allows items to have no value for the attribute. Alternatively, you can define a special value such as **None** or **N/A** (not applicable) for use with such items. Attributes may be of the following types:
Text: Users can enter any text as the attribute value.
Combo box: The user selects the attribute value from a predefined list that consists of values you specify when you create the attribute. For each value, you specify its ID (such as 1M ), its description (such as Less than 1,000,000 ), and its sort order. Values with smaller sort orders are listed nearer to the top of the combo box list.
Multi select combo: The control will be a list field with a check box against each attribute value so users can select multiple options. The user can enter a list of possible values.
Check box: The attribute is a Boolean value, which means that the user can only select or clear it (such as yes/no, true/false, or on/off ).
Date/time: The user selects a date-time value.
## Attribute assignment You assign attributes at the item class level using the **Attributes** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. The same attribute can be used for one or several item classes. Item class attributes When a user creates a new item and assigns it to an item class by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the system will display the list of attributes assigned to the item's class. All items of the same item class will have the same set of attributes, although their values may differ for different items. For example, if you define a colour attribute for an item class, each item in the class will have this attribute but the items can have different colours or be optional. Because item classes have different lists of attributes, users can have more complete information about each item. You can design custom reports to allow users to analyse information provided by item attributes.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About accounting for kits /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-accounting-for-kits page The sections below discuss general properties of kits and details about stock and non-stock kits. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About accounting for kits The sections below discuss general properties of kits and details about stock and non-stock kits. Kits are stock or non-stock items that consist of stock and non-stock items as components and require assembly to become sellable goods. ## General settings about kits In the Inventory workspace of Visma Net, in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window respectively, you can: + enter the properties of a kit, + select the **Is a kit** check box on the **General settings** tab, to indicate that the stock or non stock item is a kit, and + assign pending prices to kits on a per-kit basis on the **Price/cost** tab. To ease the process of creating new kits, you can define an item class for stock kits and another one for non-stock kits. The item class provides default values for settings common to items (kits) of the class. For stock kits, the item class settings might include the assignment of lot or serial numbers and expiration dates to kits and the specification of when they're assigned: on kit production or sale. ## Kit specifications A kit specification lists the components of a kit. You create one in the [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) window, where you can also: + save a modification of a kit specification as a revision that, once created and used, cannot be modified. + use the elements available to allow or disallow changing the quantity of components and adding components to the kit during kit assembly. + specify the minimum and maximum quantities, if adding components is allowed. + use the **Stock components** tab to add stock components to both stock and non-stock kits. For creating kits, only the last revision can be used. For disassembly of a stock kit, if required, select the revision that was used for its assembly. ## Stock and non-stock kits comparison The table below compares stock and non-stock kits. Please note that the attributes of a non-stock kit will apply to a non-stock kit if it includes stock items. |Feature|Stock kit|Non-stock kit| |---|---|---| |Stock components|Yes|Yes| |Non-stock components|Yes|Yes| |Production|May be produced before a sales order requesting them is entered into the system. Production of stock kits (with valuation methods other than the standard cost method) creates a new cost layer.|Not applicable| |Creation and reviewing|The [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) window is used to create and view kit assembly documents, for new kits that are assembled and for existing kits that are disassembled.|Not applicable| |On release of a kit assembly document|On-hand quantities of the items used as components are automatically decreased, and the on-hand quantity of the kits is increased.|Not applicable| |On Sales order|One line item appears in the transaction and the on-hand quantity of the kit is reduced.|Stock components on the kit are specified on a pick list and shipped.| |Serial/lot number|Might be required to be assigned on production or on selling, depending on the item class settings.|Not applicable| |Expiration date|Might be required to be assigned on production or on selling, depending on the item class settings.|Not applicable| |Disassembly|May be required when its expiration date has approached. Can be performed in accordance with the revision used to assemble the kit.|Can be performed in accordance with the revision used to assemble the kit.| |Validation of components|No. The calculated quantities can be manually adjusted.|No. The calculated quantities can be manually adjusted.| |Additional costs for assembly|Can be defined as non-stock items.|Not applicable| |Cost valuation method|Average, FIFO, Specific or Standard valuation method.|Only the standard cost valuation may be assigned. Cost is recorded to the expense accrual account specified for the non stock item.| |Standard cost variance account for difference between the standard cost and the cost of actually used components|Yes|Yes| ## Stock kit cost calculation The cost of a stock kit is calculated based on the costs of components when the document is released. The total cost of the kit is: + the total cost of stock components according to the specification's revision, + the cost of components added during assembly, and + the rates of non-stock components of the **Labour** and **Service** types multiplied by their quantities.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Specify default item classes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-default-item-classes page When you create an item class (stock or non-stock) that is the child of any other item class, the system suggests the default settings of the parent class. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify default item classes When you create an item class (stock or non-stock) that is the child of any other item class, the system suggests the default settings of the parent class. For the classes at the first level of the item class hierarchy, which have no parent classes that could provide default settings, you can specify the default item classes as follows: 1. Go to the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. 1. In the **Default stock item class** field, select the stock item class or In the **Default non-stock item class** field, select the non-stock item class. These item class settings will be used by default for newly created stock or non-stock item classes. Delete item classes with children /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/delete-item-classes-with-children page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Delete item classes with children 1. Go to the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. 1. Open the item class. 1. Click **Delete** in the window toolbar. When you delete a parent item class, the system asks whether you want to keep the child item classes of this parent. The system proceeds as follows based on your response in the message field:
IF THEN
you click Yes

the system deletes the parent item class and keeps all its the children in the hierarchy.

Result: The children item classes becomes the children of the item class at the level immediately above the deleted item class.
you click No the system deletes the entire tree node of the item class hierarchy (that is, the parent item class along with all of its children item classes).
> [!NOTE] > ** You can delete only those item classes to which no items have been assigned yet. Move item classes within the hierarchy /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/move-item-classes-within-the-hierarchy page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Move item classes within the hierarchy 1. Go to the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. 1. Click **Actions** in the window toolbar. 1. Select **Change ID**. 1. Click **OK.** **Result**: The item class ID changes, and the system rebuilds the item class hierarchy. Move items to another item class /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/move-items-to-another-item-class page For a single stock or non-stock item, you can change the item class in the item's settings in the Stock items (IN202500) window and Non-stock items (IN202000) window, respectively. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Move items to another item class For a single stock or non-stock item, you can change the item class in the item's settings in the Stock items (IN202500) window and Non-stock items (IN202000) window, respectively. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/), [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/). If you need to move multiple items to another item class at a time, follow these steps: 1. Go to the [Items by item class (IN408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000/) window. 1. Click the item class to which the items currently belong in the Item class level tree pane. 1. Select the unlabelled check boxes in the rows with the items you want to move. 1. Click the **Cut the selected records** button on the table toolbar of the right pane. **Result**: The system copies the selected rows to the clipboard. 1. In the Item class level tree pane, click the destination item class (the class into which you want to move the selected items). 1. On the table toolbar of the right pane, click the **Paste records** button. **Result**: The system asks whether you want to keep the settings of the moved items. 1. Choose **Yes** or **No** in the message field. 1. If you click **Yes** in the message field, the system updates the settings of the moved items to the settings of the destination item class. 1. If you click **No** in the message field, the system keeps the settings of the moved items unchanged. Create non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/create-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create non-stock items 1. Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Add a unique **Item ID** for the non-stock item. You can use both letters and numbers. > [!NOTE] > You define the requirements for the item in the **Segment keys** window. > [!NOTE] > To change the item ID later, click the **Actions** button and select **Change ID**. 1. In the **Item status** field, select the status of the item. The status **Active** indicates that you can use the item on transactions. 1. Complete the general information on the **General settings** tab. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. If necessary, fill in information on the other tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > To register non-stock items faster, use item classes as templates for your work. See: [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Use stock items on projects /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/use-stock-items-on-projects section There are two ways if issuing items in projects: From an existing warehouse location or from a specific project warehouse location. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use stock items on projects There are two ways if issuing items in projects: From an existing warehouse location or from a specific project warehouse location. ## Issue an item from a project-specific warehouse location 1. Create a warehouse location for the project and project task, as described in steps 1 through 3 in: [Link purchase orders to projects](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/link-purchase-orders-to-projects/). 1. Go to the [Transfers (IN304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000/) window. 1. Transfer the item(s) that you want to use on your project from your warehouse to the project's warehouse location. 1. After the transfer is finished, you can issue the item(s) to the project. ## Issue an item from an existing warehouse location 1. Go to the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. 1. On the **Transaction details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the item, the project, and the project task. 1. Click **Release**. The system now updates the project balance.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Maintain default prices for non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain default prices for non-stock items 1. Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the non-stock item whose default price you want to maintain. 1. Go to the tab **Price/cost information**. 1. In the **Default price** field, enter the default price for the non-stock item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The price you have entered is displayed as the base price for the non-stock item in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) window. To open the window, select **Sales prices** from the **Inquiries** drop-down list.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Maintain default prices for stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain default prices for stock items 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the stock item whose default price you want to maintain. 1. Go to the tab **Price/cost information**. 1. In the **Default price** field, enter the default price for the stock item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The price you have entered will be displayed as the base price of the stock item in the [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) and [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) windows. To open the window, select **Sales prices** or **Supplier prices** from the **Inquiries** drop-down list.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Maintain pending standard costs for non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-pending-standard-costs-for-non-stock-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain pending standard costs for non-stock items 1. In the **Item ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the non-stock item whose default pending standard cost you want to maintain. 1. Go to the tab **Price/cost information**. 1. In the **Pending cost** field, under the **Standard cost** section, enter the pending cost price for the non-stock item. 1. In the **Pending cost date** field, enter the date when the pending cost becomes effective. > [!NOTE] > If you do not enter a date, the system uses the current date by default. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Add bar code to stock item /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/add-bar-code-to-stock-item section You can use product bar codes as alternative identifiers for stock items to be able to use a scanner to, for example, add the item to a purchase receipt. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add bar code to stock item You can use product bar codes as alternative identifiers for stock items to be able to use a scanner to, for example, add the item to a purchase receipt. You can enter bar codes for items manually or by scanning them. The scanner converts the scanned bar code to an alphanumeric string that is immediately visible in the appropriate box as if it had been typed. ## How to add a bar code for a stock item 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. Go to the **Cross-reference** tab. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new line. 1. Select **Barcode** in the **Alt. item ID type** column. 1. Enter the bar code in the **Alt. item ID** column, either manually or by using a scanner. Change a stock item's Item ID /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/change-a-stock-item-s-item-id section In the Inventory workspace you can change the Item ID in the following way: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change a stock item's Item ID In the Inventory workspace you can change the Item ID in the following way: ## Changing the Item ID 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the item for which you want to change the ID. 1. After you have selected the item, click **Actions** and choose **Change ID**. 1. Specify the new ID for the item and click **OK**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Specify standard costs for stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-standard-costs-for-stock-items page You can specify the pending standard costs for stock items in the Stock items (IN202500) window on the Price/cost information tab, and to override the costs for a particular warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window on the Price/cost information tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify standard costs for stock items You can specify the pending standard costs for stock items in the Stock items (IN202500) window on the Price/cost information tab, and to override the costs for a particular warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window on the Price/cost information tab. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/), [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/). 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the item you want to specify a standard cost for. 1. Go to the **Price/cost information** tab. 1. In the **Pending cost** field, enter the standard cost to be assigned to the stock item when the costs are updated. 1. In the **Pending cost date** field, enter the date when the pending cost becomes effective. 1. Save.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Specify standard costs for non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-standard-costs-for-non-stock-items page You can specify the pending standard costs for non-stock items in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window on the Price/cost information tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify standard costs for non-stock items You can specify the pending standard costs for non-stock items in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window on the Price/cost information tab. For more information: [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/). 1. Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the item you want to specify a standard cost for. 1. Go to the **Price/cost information** tab. 1. In the **Pending cost** field, enter the standard cost to be assigned to the non-stock item when the costs are updated. 1. In the **Pending cost date** field, enter the date when the pending cost becomes effective. 1. Save.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage availability data /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage availability data Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Manage availability data - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/manage-availability-data-overview page Visma Net gives you real-time visibility into available inventory, which can help you improve customer service by being able to deliver promised items in the needed quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage availability data - overview Visma Net gives you real-time visibility into available inventory, which can help you improve customer service by being able to deliver promised items in the needed quantities. You can configure the way availability data is calculated in accordance with your company's policies. Also, in Visma Net, you can track certain types of stock items as they are received, stored, manufactured, and shipped. Some products are tracked because they have expiration dates, while other products must be tracked individually from the manufacturer to the consumer because of safety and warranty issues. ## Topics + [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/) + [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/) + [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/) About availability calculation /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation page Quantities of items on hand at warehouses are automatically updated only after the documents that record inventory transactions are released or posted. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About availability calculation Quantities of items on hand at warehouses are automatically updated only after the documents that record inventory transactions are released or posted. ## On hand quantities vs. actual quantities On-hand quantities (also referred to as **book quantities** ) usually differ from actual quantities on hand because during document processing, certain quantities of items can be: + booked on sales orders, + picked for shipping, + returned from customers, + ordered from suppliers, + in transit between warehouses. Visma Net gives you real-time visibility into available inventory, thus improving customer service. ## Configuration of availability data Configure the way availability data is calculated in accordance with your company's policies. You specify calculation options for each item class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## Types of quantities calculated The available quantities of items are calculated at the location level. ### Damaged or returned items Some warehouse locations may hold some quantities of damaged or returned items, and those quantities generally cannot be used for sale and should not be included in the quantities available. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality is disabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, all the quantities available for a single default location of each warehouse are included in the availability data. For more information, see: [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/). ### List of item quantities maintained in the system For each item, the quantities summarised below are maintained in the system and available for viewing on any window where you choose a stock item for adding to the document.
Option Description
Quantity on hand The on-hand quantity is the quantity of items (expressed in the base unit of measure) that are physically in stock and immediately available. The on-hand quantity of items is affected only by released documents.
Quantity not available

For each location in a warehouse, you can specify whether quantities at the location will be included in the quantity available.

For example: Items should not be included in quantities available for locations dedicated to items that are:

  • consigned
  • damaged
  • returned
  • in need of repair.
Total addition and total deduction

The Inventory allocation details (IN402000) inquiry window shows Total addition and Total deduction, which have values calculated based on unreleased documents with various statuses.

Total addition is the quantity of base units of the stock item on:

  • unreleased purchase orders,
  • receipts,
  • incoming transfers.

For each item class, you can specify which of the listed quantities should be included in this value for items of the class.

Total deduction is the quantity of base units of the stock item on:

  • unreleased sales orders,
  • inventory issues,
  • shipments,
  • transfers, and
  • kit assembly documents,
  • plus the non-available quantity.

For each item class, you can specify which of the listed quantities should be included in the total deduction quantity for items of the class in accordance with policies established in your organization.
Quantity available

For each item, the quantity available is calculated as Quantity on hand + Total addition - Total deduction.

This value is calculated in accordance with the options selected in the Item class window for the item class.
Quantity available for shipping

This quantity is calculated by the system as the on-hand quantity with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

This calculation is not affected by any options selected by users.
## Allowing negative item quantity If the **Allow negative quantity** check box is selected in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, Visma Net allows a negative on-hand quantity for items of the class. Warnings are issued on transactions that will result in negative inventory quantities. Location-level negative quantity can occur due to: + errors on inventory documents + incorrect quantities specified or wrong locations + delayed release of receipt or transfer documents confirming the actual arrival of goods. Stocktaking count can be undertaken for items with negative on-hand quantities. ## Option to include quantity as available at location If the **Include in qty. available** option is selected for the location in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window, the quantities available at the location will be added to the quantity available. If the option is not selected, those quantities will be added to the quantity not available. As a result, for each warehouse, the total quantities available and unavailable are calculated as the sum of respective quantities for all warehouse locations. ## Viewing availability information Visma Net availability data allows you to get complete inventory visibility in all distribution-oriented workspaces, so you can provide better customer service and reduce inventory carrying costs: + For each item, you can view summary information about various quantities of this stock item at various warehouses and locations using the [Inventory summary (IN401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000/) window. + For each stock component of a kit, using the [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) window, you can view the availability data at the bottom of the screen. + For each item, you can view complete information about how its quantities are allocated (in accordance with unreleased documents) at a particular warehouse using the [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. + In the Sales workspace, item availability data is displayed when a user adds a stock item to a sales order in the sales order window: For the selected warehouse, you can view the quantity on hand and quantity available. + In the Purchases workspace, item availability data is displayed when a user adds a stock item to a purchase order in the purchase order window: For the selected warehouse, you can view the quantity on hand, quantity available, and quantities on purchase order receipts and orders.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About lot and serial numbers /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers page Lot numbers and serial numbers are used to track certain types of stock items as they are received, stored, manufactured, and shipped. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About lot and serial numbers Lot numbers and serial numbers are used to track certain types of stock items as they are received, stored, manufactured, and shipped. ## Enabling tracking of stock items If the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can set up tracking of stock items by lot or serial number, as well as by expiration date. [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/) gives additional information about this tracking. ## Number schemes for lot and serial numbers Visma Net provides flexible numbering schemes for lot and serial numbers and gives you the option to track different products differently. It also provides different valuation methods to account for the cost of inventory per lot or serial number. Kits may have their own serial numbers while also containing components that have lot and serial numbers. ## Serial numbers A serial number is a unique number that identifies a single item of stock, such as a camera, DVD player, or bicycle. Serial numbers can be generated by the system, or you can assign them manually on a per-item basis so the system reflects the numbers provided by the manufacturer. ## Lot numbers A lot number is a unique identification code assigned to a specific quantity or **lot** of a product. A lot number includes the information about the stock item model and may include an expiration date. The same lot number is assigned to every item of the lot. The lot size is generally specified on the purchase order or on the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## Lot and serial classes Lot and serial numbers are defined at the item class level using the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. Lot or serial classes are divided into three groups by their tracking method: + Classes of items that are not tracked by either number; you should define at least one lot/serial class for such items. + Classes whose items are tracked by lot numbers. + Classes whose items are tracked by serial numbers. ## Guidelines to consider Consider these guidelines when you are deciding which lot/serial classes to create: + Define a class intended for items that will not be tracked. This class can be used as the default lot/serial class if most stock items will not be tracked by any property. + Create separate groups of classes for items with serial numbers and items with lot numbers. Within each group, create separate classes for items with expiration dates and without them, if both types of products are involved in your business. + Use separate classes to group items to which serial numbers are assigned on receipt and on usage. Items purchased for further sale generally are assigned numbers on their receipt, while items produced (and kits assembled) are assigned numbers on their sale or usage. + Consider using additional classes for items with different issue methods: FIFO, sequential, date, and custom. Visma Net provides flexible tools to allow you to configure different templates for generating such numbers, or you can manually enter them. ## Other relevant settings Other settings of the lot/serial classes define: + how and when the numbers will be generated, + whether expiration dates are assigned and tracked, and + what order is used for issuing the items from warehouses. ## Lot/serial class settings When creating a class whose items will be tracked by lot or serial numbers, you specify the following information in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window: + Which tracking method is used for the class. + Whether to track expiration dates or not. + The maximum number of lot or serial numbers that can be assigned at once, controlled by the **Auto-generate number batch size** option. + How the numbers are assigned. + What the issue method is for items of the class. ## Exceeded number of lot or serial numbers If, on a document, a larger quantity of the item is specified, only the maximum number of lot/serial numbers will be generated with the excess quantity remaining with unassigned numbers. You can initiate assignment of lot/serial numbers for an unassigned quantity of the item manually. ## Assignment of lot/serial numbers The following table lists the assignment methods available.
When received When used
  • Items get a lot/serial number when they are received.
  • Items are handled as lot- or serial-numbered throughout their “life” in stock until they’re issued from a warehouse.
  • The lot/serial number is not assigned to items until they are issued them from stock or used in assembly.
  • Before lot/serial numbers are issued, items are handled as stock that is not lot- or serial-numbered.
## Issue method for items in a lot/serial class The following table lists the issue methods for items in a lot/serial class:
FIFO Lot/serial numbers are picked for issue by receipt date (oldest first).
LIFO Lot/serial numbers are picked for issue by receipt date (newest first).
Sequential Lot/serial numbers are picked in alphabetical order.
Expiration Lot/serial numbers are picked by expiration date (faster-expiring first). We recommend that you select Expiration as the issue method for items with a rather short shelf life.
Custom (User-enterable) This method is not implemented in the current version.
## Segmented structure of lot and serial numbers Lot and serial numbers are segmented, and you can decide how many and what kind of segments there should be. Visma Net supports the following types of segments:
Constant A segment of this type is a predefined alphanumerical string to be used in all lot or serial numbers generated for items of the class.
Date A segment of this type will be generated based on the relevant date (of receipt or of usage), which may include day, month number, month name, and two- or four-digit year value.
Auto-incremental value A segment of this type is automatically computed by the system when a new lot/serial number is generated, as it’s actually a numbering sequence assigned.
## Shared or separate sequential numbers for item classes You can use the **Share auto-incremental value between all class items** check box in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window to choose if the same numbering sequence should be used for all items of the same class, or if there should be separate incremental values for different items. |IF THE CHECK BOX|THEN| |---|---| |Is selected|The same numbering sequence should be used for all items of the same class.| |Is NOT selected|you can specify a separate auto-incremental value for each stock item of the class, that is, an individual initial string of digits to be auto-incremented. In this case the items will all have the same segment auto-numbered.| ## Avoiding non-intersecting number ranges To prevent generation of similar serial numbers for different items of the same class, consider using different initial strings (auto-incremented values) for items of the class so that numbers for different items will be generated in non-intersecting ranges. **For example:** Imagine that there are 10 items in a lot/serial class. During a year, no more than 1000 units of any item pass through warehouses. The auto-incremental values for items can be selected in the following way: 000000, 100000, 200000,..., 900000. If additional items (beyond 10) will be added to the class, new auto-incremental values can be used for them. ## Assignment to stock items Each stock item is assigned to a lot/serial class that defines whether the items will be tracked by lot or serial numbers. The following table describes typical procedures for a stock item:
WHEN THEN
stock items are assigned to lot/serial classes using the General settings tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.

lot and serial numbers, if any should be assigned, are generated automatically by the system.

Depending on the assignment method of the lot/serial class, this is done when the stock items are:

  • received

  • issued, or

  • assembled.
such items are moved (transferred between warehouses or sold) the user can invoke the Allocations dialog box, to view or specify particular lot or serial numbers to be transferred or picked for a specific sales order, depending on the issue method selected for the class.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About lot and serial number tracking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking page To be able to track stock items by either lot or serial numbers as well as by expiration dates, you need to enable the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About lot and serial number tracking To be able to track stock items by either lot or serial numbers as well as by expiration dates, you need to enable the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). ## Reasons for tracking items Some products, such as food products and chemical compounds, are tracked because they have expiration dates, while other products, such as medications, are tracked because laws require manufacturers to keep accurate records about their distribution. Still other products, such as electronics, appliances, and cars, must be tracked individually from the manufacturer to the consumer because of safety and warranty issues. Items to be tracked should be assigned to specific lot/serial classes you have created in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. For more details on configuring lot and serial numbers, see: [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/). ## Lot number tracking Lot numbers can be tracked only for base units. If component parts as well as assembled kits have lot or serial numbers, your company will know precisely which assembled kits contain any component, if this information is requested by the component manufacturer. ## Assigning lot numbers on receipts When you enter a purchase receipt for lot-numbered items: + You can specify the quantities of items in units of measure other than base units. If so, the system converts the quantity on receipt to base units and calculates how many lots are received. + The system then generates lot numbers according to the lot number templates specified by the lot/serial classes the items are assigned to. + The same lot number is assigned to all base units in the lot. ### Print lables For the receipt, you can run the [Stock item labels (IN619200)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200/) report to print labels for products. This can be useful for stocktaking counts and for picking items for sales orders. ### Example of unit conversion (lot numbers) Consider this example of unit conversion: Suppose that you create a purchase receipt for two crates of lot-numbered goods for which the following information applies: + The base unit is **PIECE**. + A crate contains 12 pieces. + The lot size is a crate. For this transaction, the system will generate two lot numbers and create two receipt transactions. ## Tracking lot numbers on sales orders If your company produces items, you can assign lot numbers to items on their sale. When you enter a lot-numbered stock item on a sales order: + the system generates the list of particular lot numbers (in the base unit) for items to be picked. + Items are picked in accordance with the issue method assigned to the item's lot/serial class or + Items are selected with assigned lot numbers based on the issue method (FIFO, LIFO, Expiration, Sequential or Custom). ### Fractional quantities If the sales unit is smaller than the base unit for an item tracked by lot number (that is, the base unit consists of several sales units), the item may be sold in fractional quantities with the specified lot number. ## Serial number tracking With serialised inventory (stock items with serial numbers), you maintain the history of any serial number and track its costs and to find the customer in case of recall. For serialised inventory, the base unit should be the smallest unit of measure used for the item. In most cases, the same unit is used as the purchase unit, sales unit, and the base unit. ## Assigning serial numbers on receipts When you enter a purchase receipt that includes a serial-numbered item and the quantity was specified in purchase units that differ from the base units: + the system will perform quantity conversion to the base units and + generate a serial number for each base unit of the product. To view the generated serial numbers, you can invoke the **Allocations** dialog box on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. ### Example of unit conversion (serial numbers) As an example of unit conversion, imagine that you enter a purchase receipt for a case of serialised items for which: + the base unit is **PIECE**, + the purchase unit is **BOX**, which includes 10 **PIECES**. For the item, on receipt, the system will generate 10 serial numbers. > [!NOTE] > To enable tracking from supplier to customer, you can use the manufacturer's serial number in one of the segments of serial numbers. ## Tracking serial numbers on sales orders If serial numbers should be assigned on item sale, the numbers are assigned in accordance with the valuation method specified for the item lot/serial class. When you enter a sales order for a serialised stock item in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window: + The particular items will be selected in accordance with the issue method selected for the lot/serial class of the stock item. + You can open the **Allocations** dialog box (on the **Document details** tab of this window), if the sales unit is different from the base unit, to view particular serial numbers. > [!NOTE] > When you enter a supplier return, the unit of measure that appears by default is the purchase unit as defined on the item record. Specify particular serial numbers of each returned base unit of the item. ## Tracking expiration dates Visma Net provides an option to track the expiration date for each lot and serial number. The expiration date: + is specified on receipt of the items, and the same date is assigned to all items of a lot. + can be assigned to each item with a serial number individually. Issuing items by expiration date For a lot/serial class whose items are tracked by expiration dates, you can select the **Expiration** issue method to automatically issue items with the earliest expiration dates, which lets you minimize losses. Automatic deduction of expired items For the stock items with tracked expiration dates, the quantity of expired items is calculated automatically and can be deducted from the available quantity. The quantities of expired inventory can be monitored with the help of reports and inquiries, so you can promptly discard the expired items. ## Inquiries and reports for tracking inventory The inquiry windows and reports in the Inventory workspace, listed below, provide various information about the lot/serial numbers so that you can view how the item is allocated, and you can easily locate any item by its lot/serial number: + [Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-lot-serial-history-in407000/): Use this window to find the required item's location by lot or serial number assigned. + [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/): Use this window to view how the item is allocated: the quantities at specific locations, on sales orders and purchase orders, and in transit between warehouses. + [Lot/serial numbers (IN613000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000/): Use this report to view the list of items (with their specific lot or serial numbers) located at the selected warehouse or particular location.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage warehouses /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage warehouses Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About warehouses and warehouse locations /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations page Given the broad scope of possibilities for warehouses and locations within Visma Net, you can choose an approach that best fits your business. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About warehouses and warehouse locations Given the broad scope of possibilities for warehouses and locations within Visma Net, you can choose an approach that best fits your business. You can use a single warehouse or configure multiple warehouses. Within each warehouse, you can define a single location or configure multiple locations. ## Enabling multiple warehouses You should enable the following functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window according to your needs. + To use multiple warehouses, you must enable the **Multiple warehouses** functionality. + To be able to use multiple locations with multiple warehouses, you must enable both the **Multiple warehouses** and **Multiple warehouse locations** functionalities. ## Using multiple warehouses With the **Multiple warehouses** functionality enabled, you can create a distributed structure of warehouses. In Visma Net, a warehouse does not necessarily represent a physical building where your inventory is stocked. You can: + divide a large physical storage space into multiple areas and define each area as a warehouse in Visma Net. + define a virtual warehouse: For example, you might consider all goods that are on the way from the supplier to you as being located in a goods-in-transit (GIT) warehouse. ## Warehouse identifiers Identifiers for warehouses are defined by the **INSITE** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. You can configure identifiers to have one segment or multiple segments. If you are going to use the multiple segments, you need to determine: + how many segments (and of what length) will be used, + whether the segments should be validated (and if so, what kind of values are allowed), and + whether an auto-numbering segment will be used. ## Creating a new warehouse To create a new warehouse, you use the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. For the warehouse, you specify the following information: + warehouse ID + description + branch the warehouse is related to (if applicable) + address and contact information, and + the general ledger accounts associated with the warehouse > [!NOTE] > The general ledger accounts and subaccounts specified in this window serve as one of the possible sources of accounts and subaccounts to be used by default to post various transactions related to warehouse. The actual accounts and subaccounts for a particular transaction at the warehouse are determined by the posting classes of the stock items involved in the transactions. ## Having multiple warehouses In Visma Net, if you have multiple warehouses defined, you can perform transfers between warehouses, relocating stock items as needed, or you can use one warehouse as a source of replenishment for other warehouses by having purchased goods delivered to only this warehouse and then transferring the goods to other warehouses. ## Using multiple warehouse locations With the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality enabled in Visma Net, you can configure multiple locations in each warehouse to best fit the logistics processes established in your company. By using multiple locations, you can: + reserve specific locations for sales, receipts, or returns. + use some locations for assembly; for other locations, transfers may not be allowed. + assign different primary items to different locations, with validation configured for those items, and + assign different pick priorities to items, to more quickly empty certain locations while using others less frequently. ## Defining location identifiers Although you cannot create a hierarchy of locations directly (site, aisle, pallet, bin, and so forth), you can configure location identifiers that consist of several segments, with each segment denoting a specific level in this hierarchy. Identifiers for locations are defined by the **INLOCATION** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. ## The Location entry setting By using the **Location entry** setting in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window, you can specify whether locations can be added only by using that same window, or also on the fly, as the users enter inventory documents. |If the **Allow on-the-fly entry** option is|THEN| |---|---| |selected|new locations entered on the fly during data entry will also appear in the warehouse's location table (described in the following section) with default settings, which you can modify later if needed.| |not selected|new locations can only be entered by using the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window.| ## Using the location table The **Location table** tab in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window shows all the locations for the particular warehouse. You can add locations to a warehouse and specify how they will be used, and you can view or edit the warehouse's locations. ### Location If you use barcode scanners in your warehouses, you can print location labels for warehouse locations by using the [Location labels (IN619000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000/) report. This will help users easily specify locations for purchased items on receipts. ### Location configuration For each warehouse location specified in the location table, you specify its location ID and description. The following table describes additional information you can set for a location:
If you want to Then
include the quantities of stock items stored at this location in the quantity of available items calculated for the warehouse select the Include in qty. available check box.
use this location as a temporary storage or for stock items that were returned or damaged clear the Include in qty. available check box.
choose which inventory operations are allowed for the location

select the relevant alternative(s):

Sales allowed
,
Receipts allowed
,
Transfers allowed
, and/or
  • Assembly allowed
choose the pick priority for the location for picking the items to fulfil the sales order select an integer for the location. The lower the value, the higher the priority of this location.
### Product-specific or class-specific locations You can also choose whether there should be a **primary item** (or a **primary item class** ) for the location. In a warehouse, certain locations may be dedicated to a specific product or a specific class of products. You can configure such a restriction in Visma Net by choosing: + a **primary item** or + a **primary item class** and + setting **Primary item validation** to a restrictive option (warning or error). Primary item validation is enforced only for receipts. If the location already had some quantities of non-primary items before you enabled the validation, these quantities can be adjusted, issued, or transferred from the location without restriction. > [!NOTE] > Avoid setting up primary item validation for all locations in the warehouse. Default locations When you define the warehouse structure, you can set up **default** locations for the following inventory operations: + The receiving location for the purchased goods. + The shipping location from which the goods are sold. + The return material authorisation (RMA) location where returned goods will be received. By specifying a special location for receiving the returned stock items, you can avoid including the location in the quantity availability calculation. + The drop-ship location used to account for drop shipments. Although the goods will be delivered to the customer's location, by defining this location, you can keep data regarding item quantities on drop shipments. On purchase receipts and sales orders, these default warehouse locations simplify data entry. ## Using warehouse specifics for stock items If the details of stocking a particular stock item vary at different warehouses, you specify these details in the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window, and they are shown on the **Warehouse details** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. For each stock item at a particular warehouse, you can specify: + The default locations for issuing and receiving the item at this warehouse. + The inventory account and subaccount to be used for the stock item at this warehouse. + The sales and purchase units assigned to the item at this warehouse, and the necessary conversion rules. + The ABC code and movement class assigned to the item when it is at this warehouse. + The replenishment settings for the item when it is stocked in this warehouse. + The cost statistics related to this item at this warehouse.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage costs /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage costs Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About default prices /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-default-prices page In Visma Net, default prices are the sales prices of stock and non-stock items expressed in the base currency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About default prices In Visma Net, default prices are the sales prices of stock and non-stock items expressed in the base currency. In Visma Net, default prices are the sales prices of stock and non-stock items expressed in the base currency. Default prices may be used for the items whose prices do not vary depending on the quantity purchased, season, special promotional periods, and other factors. ## Assignment of default prices and updating You can manually enter the default price of non-stock items, and if the Inventory module is enabled in your system, the default prices of stock items. These are added in the **Default price** field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window and the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window respectively. The default prices for stock items and non-stock items are specified in the base currency and for the base units. You can update the default prices as often as needed. ### Bulk editing prices If you need to enter the default prices for many or all the items or update the prices in bulk, you can create appropriate import scenarios. ### Inventory module not enabled If the Inventory module is not enabled in your system, you can only specify default prices for non-stock items. ## Limitations of default prices The following are the most important limitations related to default prices: + A default price has no start and expiration date and once specified, it is used for the item until a new default price has been entered. + The system does not keep the history of default prices. You cannot define the default prices as promotional prices that are in effect for a particular date range or as tiered prices. + When updating price lists, you can specify a method of calculating the updated prices (based on item markup per cents, percent of increase, or so forth), and the new prices will be calculated automatically. However, when updating the default prices you calculate the default prices externally (using any method you consider appropriate) and enter the resulting prices manually on per item basis or import them from a file by using an import scenario. + The default price of an item is used as a sales price on an invoice (and a sales order, if applicable) only if there are no other prices (base price, or customer-class price, or customer-specific price) entered for the item. ## Discounts If the default price is used for an item on an invoice or sales order, the discounts defined in the system will apply to the default price too.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About item costs and valuation methods /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-item-costs-and-valuation-methods page Visma Net allows you to track stock item costs over time in accordance with the valuation method assigned to each item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About item costs and valuation methods Visma Net allows you to track stock item costs over time in accordance with the valuation method assigned to each item. Item costs are tracked for base units, as well as units in which items are stored at warehouses or moved between locations or warehouses. ## Determining unit costs Depending on the valuation method you have selected for the stock item, the cost of its base unit is either: + computed by the system based on purchase receipts or + estimated outside the system and entered manually by the user. For information about how costs are maintained for non-stock items, see [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). The system uses the item's valuation method to revalue its stock and to determine its unit cost for sales orders and inventory transactions. ## Valuation methods The following valuation methods are available to choose from: + FIFO (first in, first out) + Specific + Average + Standard cost These methods are discussed in detail in the sections below. ### Assigning valuation method You assign valuation methods to stock items in the following ways: + By using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, you can assign a valuation method to a class, which will be used for the items of the class. + By using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, you can assign a valuation method to a particular item, if you want to override the valuation method of its item class. ### Reassigning the valuation method As long as the item is out of stock, you can reassign an item's valuation method in the following way: + from **FIFO** to **Average**, + from **Average** to **FIFO**, and + from **Standard cost** to **Average** and **FIFO**. ## FIFO valuation method If the **FIFO** valuation method is assigned to a stock item, its unit costs are recorded in layers, each of which is identified by + the receipt date, + the quantity, and + the purchase price (unit cost). ### Cost layers Each new receipt creates a new cost layer with specific unit cost. You can view the cost of the last layer in the **Last cost** read-only field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. > [!NOTE] > By default, the item cost is zero until it has been automatically or manually assigned. When a certain quantity of the stock item is issued, the cost for the item is assigned starting with the earliest available cost layer. If the quantity to be issued is greater than the quantity in the earliest layer, the entire quantity from the earliest layer will be issued (with the associated unit cost) and the rest of the required quantity will be issued using the next earliest layer (with another unit cost). ### Example with the FIFO issue method Let's say a stock item was purchased in the following way: + Cost layer 1: May 10, 5 units at €8 each + Cost layer 2: June 10, 5 units at €10 each The total stock cost is (5 \* €8) + (5 \* €10) = €90. Further imagine that for a sales order, 8 items are required. All units from cost layer 1, and three units from cost layer 2 will be used to complete the transaction, with the extended cost equal to (5 \* €8) + (2 \* €10) = €60. For the next sales order, there will be no more items with the €8 unit cost. ### Cost separately option For each location in a warehouse that has the **Cost separately** check box selected, separate cost layers will be created, based on purchase receipts made to the particular location. If certain quantities of the items should be issued from the location, the extended cost will be computed based on those location-specific cost layers. ## The specific valuation method The Specific valuation method is used for items with lot or seral number tracking. With this method, the unit cost for each item is defined by the unit's purchase price. The unit cost assigned to the item on its receipt will remain the same until the item is issued, used as a component, or sold. ### Cost layers With the **Specific** method, cost layers are based on the serial or lot numbers. New receipts specifying the same serial or lot number will update the cost of the layer. ### Example with the specific issue method Imagine that a stock item was purchased as follows: + May 19, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023423 at €2.00 each + May 21, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023523 at €2.10 each + May 19, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023623 at €1.90 each + May 19, 100 items starting with the serial number 11023723 at €2.20 each The total stock cost is €820. When items with the serial numbers 11023666 and 11023444 are sold, the unit costs recorded to the COGS account are €1.90 and €2.00 respectively. ## The average valuation method If the **Average** valuation method (also known as **average moving cost** ) is assigned to the stock item, the unit cost will be calculated as the average weighted cost of all items at the warehouses or the total costs of all quantities of the stock items at the warehouses divided by the total quantity. This valuation method is used for items that do not require tracking by lot or serial numbers or by expiration dates. ### Cost layers The average cost will be automatically updated every time a new receipt specifying a unit cost different from the current average cost is released. Once this receipt has been released, a batch of journal entries will be generated to adjust the costs of all available items. You can view the current average cost in the **Average cost** read-only field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ### Example with the average valuation method Imagine that a stock item was purchased as follows: + Layer 1: 100 items at €2.00 each + Layer 2: 100 items at €2.10 each + Layer 3: 100 items at €1.90 each + Layer 4: 100 items at €2.20 each The total stock cost is €820, and the average cost is €2.05. If you sell 250 items, the unit cost is €2.05, and the extended cost recorded to the COGS account is €512.5 = €2.05 \* 250. ## The standard cost valuation method Standard costs, which are estimated to include some of the indirect and direct costs allocated, for stock items are determined outside of Visma Net by cost experts. For a stock item with the **Standard cost** valuation method assigned, the unit cost is entered directly by the user in the **Pending cost** field on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ### Warehouse specific standard costs For items with the standard cost valuation method, standard costs can be maintained for each warehouse separately if the **Override standard** check box, located on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window, is selected for the item stocked at a particular warehouse. The item cost doesn't change as new receipts are released. ### Example with the standard cost valuation method A stock item with a standard cost defined at €2.50 was purchased in the following way: + Layer 1: 100 items at €2.00 each + Layer 2: 100 items at €1.90 each + Layer 3: 100 items at €2.30 each + Layer 4: 100 items at €2.60 each The total stock cost is €1000. Any differences between the standard cost and the unit cost on receipts multiplied by the quantity on the receipt are recorded to the standard cost variance account: in this case, €50, €60, €30, and –€10 respectively. On sales orders, the unit cost will appear as €2.50. ### Updating standard costs Generally, standard costs are revised at the end of the financial year based on the financial results of the year, although they can be updated as often as is needed. If you want to update standard costs for a number of stock items, use the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. New values for standard costs are entered as pending standard costs. The pending cost assigned to a stock item that uses the standard cost valuation method becomes effective starting on the **Pending date** specified on this tab. ### Update costs for multiple items If you want to make similar changes to many or all stock items, use the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window to enter new values and compare current and pending costs side by side for all stock items. If you are satisfied with the changes, you can update the current standard costs with the pending standard costs for all items or only selected ones by using the **Process all** or **Process** action on the window toolbar. ### Historical data The system doesn't keep a history of the standard costs for the stock items, displaying only the last cost and current cost values on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. The historical costs that were effective before the last cost are not stored in the database. ## Unit cost and manual cost on issues For items with the **Standard cost** or **Average** valuation methods, on inventory issues, unit costs (costs with respect to the base unit) are specified in the **Unit cost** field in the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. If an item has the **FIFO** or **Specific** valuation method assigned, costs of its units may be different, and the **Unit cost** field on the window displays the unit cost for the first unit to be issued, in accordance with the stock item's issue method. You can invoke the **Allocations** dialog box to view particular items to be issued or to select them by lot or serial numbers. The **Manual amount** value in the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window will automatically appear as the sum of the unit costs of all listed items.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About the cost of inventory /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-the-cost-of-inventory page For effective inventory management, your company needs to know the value of the inventory at its warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the cost of inventory For effective inventory management, your company needs to know the value of the inventory at its warehouses. For effective inventory management, your company needs to know the value of the inventory at its warehouses. Inventory accuracy depends in part on how well you account for inventory. There are two basic methods of accounting for inventory: Perpetual : By using a perpetual method, your company can estimate the total cost of its inventory at any moment, updating inventory quantities and inventory account balances by every transaction, purchase, or sale. Information is updated continually in real time with this approach, without the need to cease inventory operations for counting. Over time, the accuracy of inventory levels and total costs may deteriorate due to theft, spoilage, losses, and other factors. Periodic : By using a periodic method, your company estimates inventory levels by performing periodical (cycle) counting. Cycle counting provides the most accurate data but is expensive and disruptive to business. With Visma Net, your company can use the advantages of both methods to the extent that fits your business. While having perpetual inventory, you can implement the cycle counting strategy that will help you minimise the costs of performing stocktaking while improving the accuracy of inventory levels. ## Multiple valuation methods For a perpetual inventory method, you use inventory valuation methods to estimate the cost of inventory stored at each warehouse at any moment. Valuation (cost flow) methods define how unit costs are calculated for each stock item on receipts and issues, thus allowing the system to maintain a correct, up-to-date inventory balance. With the Inventory workspace, you can choose from the following valuation methods: + Standard cost + Average + First-in-first-out (FIFO) + Specific ## Negative quantities In the Inventory workspace, a negative quantity of stock item of a specific item class is allowed at a location as long as the quantity on hand is positive. Appropriate warnings are issued on transactions that result in negative quantities. The **Allow negative quantity** check box is located in the **General information** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) windows. Negative quantities on hand can result when an issue has been made before the receipt specifying arrival of the certain quantity of the stock item is released. In this case, for over-issued quantity, a new layer is created. The cost assigned to the layer is the most recent historical cost of the item. When the inventory is actually received (on receipt in question release), the system compares the cost on the over-issue layer with the cost on the receipt, and generates a cost adjustment for the difference multiplied by the quantity on the layer (the quantity of over-issued units). > [!CAUTION] > This option can be used for items with the standard cost, average cost, and FIFO valuation methods. You may not use this option for items with lot or serial numbers assigned. ## Inventory valuation and revaluation You can review the cost of inventory on hand in the [Inventory valuation (IN61550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s/) and [Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s/) reports. Generally, standard costs are revised at the end of the financial year based on the year’s financial results, although they can be updated more often. ### Editing and updating standard costs The pending standard costs and their effective dates are entered manually for each stock item that uses this valuation method on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. Pending standard costs are updated for multiple items by using the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. For items whose standard costs are being updated, revaluation of their cost is performed. The system generates a batch of transactions that increase or decrease the balance of the inventory accounts, depending on whether the pending costs are greater or less than the current costs and updates the standard cost revaluation accounts defined by the item’s posting class.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About inventory ranking methods /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods page In inventory management, you can use ABC codes and movement classes to identify categories of stock that may require different management and controls. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About inventory ranking methods In inventory management, you can use ABC codes and movement classes to identify categories of stock that may require different management and controls. In inventory management, you can use ABC codes and movement classes to identify categories of stock that may require different management and controls. These categorisation methods let you rank stock items by their cost and turnover, respectively. This information can be used to group items for planning stocktaking and for making strategic and tactical decisions. ## ABC codes Data gathered on various types of businesses shows that the 80-20 rule applies to most of them: 80% of the effect is generated by 20% of the cause. Similar logic generally applies to inventory: + A small number of items (which can be designated with the **A** code) typically accounts for the largest value of stock. + A slightly larger number of items ( **B** code items) accounts for a smaller yet significant stock value. + The remaining large number of items ( **C** code items) accounts for only a small part of stock value. > [!NOTE] > In Visma Net, the ABC-codes are specified in such way that the total of percentages for all codes should be equal to 100%. ### Stock value as count basis Ranking items by stock values can be used as the basis for planning efficient physical inventories in which **A** items are counted more often than **B** items (which in turn are counted more often than **C** items). This reduces the total number of stocktakings performed while maintaining more accurate inventory levels. ## Defining ABC codes You define the ABC codes to be used for stock items by using the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window. For each code, you specify the percentage threshold and the frequency of stocktaking per year. ## Assignment of ABC codes Initially, you can manually assign ABC-codes to some items by using the **General information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, and the items will have the same code assigned in every warehouse until the code assignment is updated for the first time. You should only assign codes to items for which codes will be fixed (that is, not updated over time) and skip initial assignment for other items. At the end of a financial period, you can use the [Update ABC code (IN506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000/) window to mass-assign ABC-codes to items based on their stock-on-hand values. ## Automated assignment process For the selected warehouse and financial period, the system assigns pending ABC-codes as follows: + The system arranges stock items in decreasing order, based on their percentages of total stock. + For each item, a subtotal is calculated as the item's percentage plus the previous subtotal (the sum of percentages of previous items). + These subtotals are compared to the thresholds specified for codes as follows: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |items have subtotals that are less than the threshold for the A code,|they are assigned the pending A code (including the item whose subtotal is equal to the A threshold if any).| |items have subtotal percentages between the threshold for A and the sum of the thresholds for A and B codes,|they will be assigned to the pending B code.| Assignment continues in this fashion, and the subtotals for the C-code items should be greater than the sum of **A**, **B** thresholds and less than the sum of the **A**, **B**, and **C** thresholds. You can view the list of the stock items with their current and pending ABC codes, and update the ABC-code assignments for all displayed items. ## Costly inventory insights The ABC analysis gives you an immediate view of items that are expensive to stock. Via this analysis, you can learn where your money is locked up and reduce the stock of expensive items. When planning stocktaking counts, you can perform stocktakings for items with each code at the appropriate frequency for that code. Items with fixed codes are part of the assignment, but their codes do not change in accordance with the statistical data. > [!NOTE] > ABC code assignment should be performed only when a certain volume of statistical data is available. If the data is available for fewer items than a certain threshold number, no items will be assigned to the **A** code. ## Movement classes As with ABC codes, movement classes group items based on key inventory data or in this case, turnover. For each movement class, defined using the [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) window, you specify the frequency of stocktakings per year and the threshold value of criteria based on turnover to assign stock items to this class. The number of turnover periods per year for all warehouses is specified ( **Turnover periods per year** ) on the **General information** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. ## Assignment of movement classes You can initially assign items to movement classes using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window; these items will have the same class in every warehouse until movement class assignments are updated for the first time. You might instead initially assign only items to the classes, for which class assignment will be fixed, and skip assignment for other items. ## Updating movement class You can update movement class assignments for a particular warehouse and a chosen turnover period using the[Update movement class (IN506100)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100/) window. The system assigns movement classes to items as follows: + The system arranges stock items in decreasing order, based on their turnover rate. + For each item, a subtotal is calculated as the item's turnover rate plus the previous subtotal (the sum of turnover rates of previous items). + These partial sums are compared to the specified threshold for a class. + All the items for which the accumulated values are less than the threshold for the first movement class, are assigned to this movement class. + The items with accumulated percentages between the threshold for the first and second movement class will be assigned to the second class. Assignment continues in this fashion. ## Basis for stocktaking frequency When planning stocktaking, you can organise it by the frequencies specified for movement classes. Thus, you can perform stocktakings for items with higher turnover rates more frequently. Items of each movement class will be counted at the frequency you have specified for the movement class.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage stocktaking counts /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage stocktaking counts Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About overview of stocktaking options /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options page Most businesses conduct a full stocktaking for each warehouse at least once a year. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About overview of stocktaking options Most businesses conduct a full stocktaking for each warehouse at least once a year. Most businesses conduct a full stocktaking for each warehouse at least once a year. A full stocktaking greatly improves the accuracy of availability data, but it disrupts business processes and can be very costly. An alternative to a full stocktaking is cycle counting, whereby all items are assigned to specific cycles and separate stocktaking counts are performed for each cycle's items at an appropriate frequency. Because they can be conducted more quickly, cycle counts are less disruptive to daily operations; they also can be tailored to specific business types. But over time, the accuracy of item availability data deteriorates due to material movement between locations and warehouses. ## Planning stocktaking of various types By using Visma Net, you can create as many stocktaking types or types of stocktaking counts as you need using the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. A stocktaking type may describe a stocktaking that is performed periodically, such as a full stocktaking or a stocktaking performed at a specific warehouse for particular stock items. The definition of each stocktaking type includes the following: + What method is used to generate the list of stock items for counting + Whether the stocktaking should be always performed at a particular warehouse or can be performed at any warehouse The particular list of items is generated when you prepare the stocktaking sheets for the stocktaking of the selected type using the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window. ## Flexible stocktaking combination Using Visma Net, your company can create a stocktaking system by using a combination of full stocktaking and cycle counting that best fits its policies and goals. You can perform stocktaking counts based on different generation methods. In this article you will find a description of the following alternatives for doing this. + Counting the full stocktaking + Counting by item class + Counting by cycle and by cycle stocktaking frequency + Counting by movement class and by associated stocktaking frequency + Counting by ABC code and by code stocktaking frequency + Counting specific stock items ## Counting the full stocktaking If you select the **Full stocktaking** generation method in the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window, the resulting stocktaking document includes all stock items available in the specified warehouse, in all locations or only selected ones and lot or serial numbers. Counting all the items in the warehouse is a time-consuming procedure generally performed during a planned closing. All movements of inventory involved in counting should be stopped during counting, and no transactions are released during counting. ## Counting by item class Depending on how you have defined item classes, you may decide to perform counts by item class. For example: One item class may include your company's most valuable items, which you stock more frequently. If you select the **By item class** method in the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window, you can choose the class on the **Item class selection** tab, which appears once you select this method. You can create a type for each item class. ## Counting by cycle and by cycle stocktaking frequency You can create stocktaking cycles using the[Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) window. Stocktaking cycles are used to group different stock items for counting by your chosen criteria. For each cycle, you specify the frequency of counts (by the counts-per-year value) performed for items of the cycle. Once all items are assigned to cycles, you can organise stocktaking counting by cycles. ### Variations The **By cycle** generation method has two variations, depending on whether you specify a cycle or select the **By frequency** check box on the **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab, which appears when you choose this generation method. The following table describes this: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you specify a cycle in the Cycle ID field and clear the By frequency check box,|only the items assigned to a particular cycle will be included in the stocktaking.| |you select the By frequency check box and do not specify a cycle,|the items of all cycles for which counting is due based on the frequency associated with their cycles will be included.| ### Steps to include all items To ensure that no items will be skipped during the stocktaking counts, follow these steps: + Perform an initial full stocktaking. + Conduct counts in one of these ways: + As often as specified for each cycle in your system (by the counts-per-year value). + At a frequency defined by the largest number of counts per year among all cycles. ### By the largest number of counts - an inclusive count frequency When you create the stocktaking type, select the **By frequency** option, and when you are preparing the stocktaking document, only items that are due for counting by their cycle frequencies will be included. In this case, a stocktaking document can include items of more than one cycle, if the counts-per-year values for different cycles are factors of the largest count-per-year value. ## Counting by movement class and by associated stocktaking frequency Multiple studies show that the more often a product is received or shipped, the less accurate its availability data becomes. Thus, it may be reasonable to conduct more counts for items with higher turnover rates. In Visma Net, you define movement classes using the [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) window and assign items to classes either on a permanent basis or by using their turnover rates during the specified turnover period. This is done in the Stock items window under the General information tab. ### Variations The **By movement class** generation method has two variations, depending on whether you specify a movement class or select the **By frequency** check box on the **Movement class selection** tab (which appears when you choose this generation method). The following table describes this: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you specify a movement class in the Movement class ID box and clear the By frequency check box,|only the items assigned to a particular movement class will be included.| |you select the By frequency check box rather than specifying a movement class,|all the items of all classes, for which counting is due based on the frequency associated with the movement class, will be included.| Once items are assigned to movement classes, you can organise counting by movement classes in the following way: + Perform an initial full stocktaking count. + Conduct counts in one of these ways: + By creating a type for each movement class and performing counts of each type at the frequency defined for the movement class. + By creating a type with the **By frequency** check box selected for the **By movement class** generation method. ### By frequency based on the maximum counts per year Make sure that the counts-per-year values are factors of the largest counts-per-year value. A stocktaking document in this case can include items of several movement classes, for which counts-per-year values are factors of the largest counts-per-year value. Conduct counts at a frequency defined by the largest value of counts per year required for movement classes. ### Example Lets say you have defined three movement classes and that they have been set with the following counts per year value: Movement class 1 - 4 counts per year Movement class 2 - 2 counts per year Movement class 3 - 1 count per year During stocktaking, all movement class items are initially included. In the subsequent session, only items from movement classes 1 and 2 are included, since items in class 3 been accounted for to meet the required count (one count). This logical progression applies to all subsequent stocktakings. ## Counting by ABC code and by code stocktaking frequency If your company uses ABC codes to identify items critical to your business, select the **By ABC code** generation method to have counts performed based on the frequencies required for items with different codes assigned. ABC codes, created using the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window, group items by their stock value in a specific warehouse in a specific period, based on period-to-date balances of appropriate inventory accounts. ABC codes divide items into groups that require different management and controls; for example, **A** code items, because of their high impact on the business, should be counted more often than items with other codes assigned. ### Variations The generation method for counting based on ABC codes has two variations, based on your specifications on the **ABC code selection** tab, which appears when you choose this generation method. The following table describes this: |IF|THEN| |---|---| |you specify a code in the ABC code field and leave the By frequency check box clear,|only the items assigned to a particular ABC code will be included in the stocktaking.| |you select the By frequency check box and don't specify an ABC code,|items with any code for which counting is due, based on the frequency associated with the ABC code, will be included in the stocktaking.| Once ABC codes are assigned to items, you can organise counting by ABC codes in the following way: + Perform an initial full stocktaking. + Conduct counts in one of these ways: + Create a type for each ABC code defined in the system (which has a specific frequency specified in the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window). Conduct counts for items assigned to every code with the appropriate frequencies. ### By frequency based on the maximum counts per year Make sure that the counts-per-year values for different codes are factors of the largest counts-per-year value. Then, when you are preparing the stocktaking document, only items that are due for counting by their code frequency will be included. A stocktaking document in this case can include items with different codes assigned, for which counts-per-year values are factors of the largest stocktaking-per-year value. ### Example Lets say you have defined the following counts per year values for the ABC codes: A - 4 counts per year B - 2 counts per year C - 1 count per year During stocktaking, all code items are initially included. In the subsequent session, only A and B code items are included since code C items been accounted for to meet the required count (one count). This logical progression applies to all subsequent stocktakings. ### Optimal stock counting for most companies Counting by ABC codes usually works best for maintaining accurate stocktaking counts because in most businesses, a small number of items generally accounts for the largest value of stock, and this method lets you count the high-value items most frequently. ## Counting specific stock items By using the **By item** generation method, you can create stocktaking types that generate stocktaking lists for: + items with a negative book quantity, + randomly selected items, + items selected by the date of previous counts, or + particular items that you specify. Select the appropriate **Selection method** on the **Stock item selection** tab, which appears when you choose this generation method. The following table explains the specific types of counts: |Type of count|Items with negative book qty|Random items (up to)|Last count on or before|List of items| |---|---|---|---|---| |**Context**|Visma Net can allow a negative inventory balance for items of specific item classes. The stocktaking may show positive values.|By using this option, you can also check the accuracy of the full stocktaking. The system generates the list of items for random counting.|You can create a stocktaking type, for a particular warehouse or any warehouse, that would generate the joint list of items that were counted a specified number of days ago or earlier.|In some cases, you may want to perform stocktaking for only particular items.| |**Items included**|Items that have negative quantity at one or more locations.|Items selected at random up to the specified number of items.|Items counted the specified number of days ago are included in this list, regardless of what type of stocktaking the item was involved in earlier.|The specific items you list in the Items table.| |**Useful for**|Checking the actual availability of items shown on the books with negative quantities.|Evaluating the accuracy of item availability data. You can also check the accuracy of the full stocktaking.|Setting up a schedule based stocktaking, or performing stocktaking that doesn't include items that have recently been counted.|For example, you may want to stocktake the most valuable items stored at a specific location every other day.| |**Procedure**|Create a stocktaking type and specify that items should be selected for counting only if they have negative quantity at one or more locations.|Select the Random items (up to) selection method and then specify the number of items for counting.|Choose the Last stocktaking on or before selection method, and in the field that appears to the right of the option, specify the number of days.|To stocktake only particular items that you specify, select the List of items selection method and add items to the list.|

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About stocktaking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-stocktaking page The stocktaking process in a particular warehouse includes the following stages: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About stocktaking The stocktaking process in a particular warehouse includes the following stages: 1. Prepare stocktaking 1. Taking stock 1. Data entry 1. Adjustment generation These stages are discussed in detail in the following sections. ## Prepare stocktaking The preparation process is described in the table below.
Stage Description
1

The user:

Note: It is only possible to select a particular warehouse and locations if a warehouse is not defined by the type.

Stocktaking types are created in the Stocktaking types (IN208900) window.

  • Clicks the Generate stocktaking action in the window toolbar. Result: The list of items to be counted is shown in the Detailsarea, and the stocktaking review document will be generated.

  • Uses the Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) to print item lists for distribution to all employees involved in taking stock.
### The Stocktaking review document The document ID is auto-generated in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to stocktakings in the[Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. Starting at the moment when the document has been generated, no operations involving items included in the list are allowed, meaning that this inventory is in a "frozen" state. The Stocktaking review document contains the list of items for stocktaking, arranged to your specifications on the **Assignment order** tab of the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. ### Document lines The line number is assigned to one or more items that + have the same item ID, + are located in the same storage location, and + if applicable, have a specific lot or serial number. For each stock item included in the stocktaking, the document may have one or more lines, depending on how many locations are used to store the item and whether the item has subitems or lot or serial numbers. For items with serial numbers assigned, a separate line is generated for each serial number. ### Count sheets for counting items Use the [Stocktaking sheets (IN620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500/) to print item lists for distribution to all employees involved in taking stock. You can use these stocktaking sheets for recording the results of actual stocktaking and, when signed, for entering the stocktaking results. ### Using tags in stocktaking Tags may or may not be used in the stocktaking process, depending on the **Use tags** check box on the Inventory preferences window. A stocktaking with tags is more complicated than a stocktaking without them; during a tag stocktaking, every item in a warehouse is counted by its location. The tag stocktaking is appropriate for a full-scale, end-of-year stocktaking. When you use tags for the first time, specify an appropriate **Last tag number** on the Inventory preferences window. This value incremented by 1 will be used as the first tag number. > [!NOTE] > We recommend that you use 1000 as the start number for the first stocktaking. If the **Use tags** option is selected, the stocktaking document includes tag numbers for each line generated. To print tags for the stocktaking in progress, use the Stocktaking sheets report and distribute tags among employees in accordance with their lists. ## Taking stock Employees involved in the stocktaking use the stocktaking sheets. No movement of goods is allowed at the time of stocktaking, and no stock transactions are released. If you are using tags, they are used for recording the stocktaking results for the line items they specify. When the stocktaking is complete, tags are used for data entry. Match all tags against the document to ensure that all tags are returned and no data is skipped. ## Data entry The Data entry process is described in the table below.
Stage Description
1

A manager responsible for stocktaking can:

  • oversee the data entry process by using theStocktaking count (IN305010) window. Note: Each line of the document has its own status, and as stocktaking data is entered, the status of the line changes from Not entered to Entered.
2

An employee:

  • enters a number in a cell in this window.
Result
the number is committed to the database and the data can be visible to other users who are using the window and to the manager.
3

The manager:

  • reviews the stocktaking data in the Stocktaking review (IN305000) window.

  • can cancel the stocktaking, or

  • complete the stocktaking when all the lines of the document have the Entered status.

  • can set the stocktaking values to zero or change the line status from Not entered to Skipped, if there is no valid data for some of the lines.
4

The system:

  • verifies the data.
5

The manager:

  • can indicate to the system that the stocktaking is completed by clicking Finish stocktaking in the window toolbar.

Result: Completing the stocktaking will unfreeze the stock items involved if the Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state check box is not selected for the specific warehouse in the Warehouses (IN204000) window.

If the option is selected, stock will be frozen until data entry is completed.
## Adjustment generation Once the manager overseeing the stocktaking completes it, the system changes the Stocktaking review document's status to **Completed** and generates an inventory adjustment or receipt to correct the book quantities. The reference numbers of these documents are displayed on the **Adjustment info** tab, and the status of the documents is **Balanced**. A receipt is generated for items with no records of item-associated transactions. These items are considered newly received, and a receipt is generated. An adjustment is generated for all other items with a non-zero quantity variance. The system uses the current costs of the items for calculation of the cost variance.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About setting up cycle stocktaking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-setting-up-cycle-stocktaking page Any resale business must periodically perform a full stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About setting up cycle stocktaking Any resale business must periodically perform a full stocktaking. To minimise the planned closings of the business that are required for full stocktaking, you can use a combination of full stocktaking and cycle stocktaking. For cycle stocktaking, all items are assigned to specific cycles and separate stocktakings are performed for each cycle’s items at the appropriate frequency. Because they can be conducted more quickly, cycle stocktakings are less disruptive to daily operations; they can also be tailored to specific business types. For more information, see: [Overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/). We recommend that you set up stocktaking by cycles during the initial configuration of the Inventory workspace. However, you can configure cycle stocktaking later as well. ## General stages The configuration of cycle stocktaking includes the following stages: 1. Creating stocktaking cycles. 1. Assigning stock items to appropriate cycles. 1. Creating stocktaking types. 1. Performing the stocktaking. These stages are discussed in the following sections. ## Creating stocktaking cycles You create stocktaking cycles by using the [Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) window. You should decide how often you want to perform full stocktakes and which items you want to stocktake more frequently (and how often). For the full stocktake and for each cycle, you specify how many times in a year the items should be counted, that is the stocktaking-per-year value. We recommend that you select the stocktaking-per-year values (frequencies) for cycles as factors of the largest stocktaking-per-year value. Thus, items of all cycles will be counted during the full stocktaking, which is performed least frequently, and some of the other stocktakings will include items of more than one cycle. ## Assigning stock items to appropriate cycles If you configure cycle stocktaking during the implementation stage, you can assign stock items to stocktaking cycles when you import the stock items from your legacy system. Otherwise, you assign each item to an appropriate cycle manually. ## Creating stocktaking types You will need a type for a full stocktaking (see [Create a stocktaking type for full count](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type-for-full-count/) ) and one type for stocktaking by frequency. Optionally, you can create a stocktaking type for each cycle. You should plan the convention for the identifiers of stocktaking types and decide how to organise data on stocktaking sheets for each type of stocktaking. ## Performing the stocktaking Perform the stocktaking in the following order: 1. Conducting an initial full stocktaking by using the **Full** stocktaking type. 1. Conducting other stocktakings with the frequency determined by the largest (among all cycles) number of stocktakings per year and by using the stocktaking type that selects items by their stocktaking frequency. For each stocktaking, only items that are due for stocktaking by their cycle frequency will be included. Some stocktakings will include only the items with the largest frequency, while other stocktakings will be joint stocktakings for items from two or more cycles. > [!NOTE] > If some warehouses have items of only specific cycles, you can perform stocktakings by cycles in those warehouses. About setting up stocktaking by ABC codes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-setting-up-stocktaking-by-abc-codes page If your company uses ABC codes to identify items that are critical to your business, you can set up stocktaking by the ABC codes assigned to stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About setting up stocktaking by ABC codes If your company uses ABC codes to identify items that are critical to your business, you can set up stocktaking by the ABC codes assigned to stock items. If your company uses ABC codes to identify items that are critical to your business, you can set up stocktaking by the ABC codes assigned to stock items. Counting by ABC codes usually works best for maintaining accurate stocktaking because in most businesses, a small number of items accounts for the largest value of stock, and this method lets you stocktaking the high-value items most frequently. For more information on using ABC codes in Visma Net, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/). If you plan to use counting by ABC codes, we recommend that you set up stocktaking by ABC codes during the initial configuration of the Inventory workspace. However, you can configure ABC counting later as well. ## General stages The configuration of stocktaking by ABC codes includes the following stages: 1. Specify frequencies for the ABC codes defined in your system. 1. Assign stock items to appropriate ABC codes. 1. Create stocktaking types. 1. Organising counting by ABC codes. These stages are discussed in the following sections. ## Specify frequencies for the ABC codes defined in your system When planning stocktaking frequencies, make sure that the stocktaking-per-year values for different codes are factors of the largest stocktaking-per-year value. ## Assign stock items to appropriate ABC codes If you configure counting by ABC codes during the implementation stage, you can assign initial ABC codes to items when you import the stock items from your legacy system. Otherwise, you assign the codes to items manually. Later, as the statistical data on sales is collected, you can update ABC codes for items automatically. ## Create stocktaking types You will need a type for a full stocktaking (see: [Create a stocktaking type for full count](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type-for-full-count/) ) and a type for counting by frequency. Then, when you are preparing the stocktaking document, the system will include only items that are due for counting by their code frequency. Also, you can create stocktaking count types for particular codes. You should plan the convention for the identifiers of stocktaking count types and decide how to organize data on stocktaking sheets for each type of stocktaking. ## Organising counting by ABC codes Organising counting by ABC codes in the following way: 1. Performing an initial full stocktaking. 1. Conducting stocktakings based on ABC codes that have the **By frequency** option selected. 1. Optionally, conducting stocktakings by particular ABC codes. Set up cycle stocktaking /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/set-up-cycle-stocktaking section Instead of conducting a full stocktaking, organisations may use cycle counting. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up cycle stocktaking Instead of conducting a full stocktaking, organisations may use cycle counting. In this approach, all items are assigned to specific cycles, and separate stocktaking counts are carried out for the items within each cycle at a suitable frequency. Cycle counts offer a quicker alternative that is less disruptive to daily operations. Additionally, they can be customised to suit various business types. The following sections describe how to set up cycle stocktaking. ## Create a stocktaking cycle For the cycles that you planned, perform the following steps: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Cycle ID** column, type the unique identifier for the new cycle. 1. In the **Description** column, type a brief description. 1. In the **Stocktaking per year** column, enter the integer indicating how many times in a year the items of the cycle should be counted. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Assign a stock item to a stocktaking cycle 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. For each stock item to be assigned to a specific cycle, do the following: 1. Select the stock item by its item ID. 1. On the **General information** tab, in the **Stocktaking cycle** field, select the appropriate stocktaking cycle. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create a stocktaking type for a stocktaking cycle For each cycle, create a stocktaking type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By cycle**. The **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab, select an appropriate stocktaking cycle. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the fields: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create a stocktaking type for stocktaking by frequency For stocktaking to be performed for multiple cycles at once, create a stocktaking type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By cycle**. The **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **Stocktaking cycle selection** tab, make sure the **By frequency** check box is selected. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the fields: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up stocktaking by ABC codes /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/set-up-stocktaking-by-abc-codes section Using ABC codes for counting is typically the most effective approach for ensuring accurate stocktaking counts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up stocktaking by ABC codes Using ABC codes for counting is typically the most effective approach for ensuring accurate stocktaking counts. This is because, in many businesses, a limited number of items usually contribute significantly to the overall stock value. This method allows for more frequent stocktaking of high-value items. The following sections describe the stages of setting up stocktaking by ABC codes. ## Specify a stocktaking frequency for an ABC code 1. Go to the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window. 1. For each ABC code available in the system, in the **Counts per year** column, type the appropriate integer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Assign an ABC code to a stock item 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. For each stock item, do the following: 1. Select the stock item by its item ID. 1. In the **ABC code** field on the **General information** tab, select the appropriate code. 1. Select the **Fixed ABC code** check box if the item should be permanently assigned to the same code. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create a stocktaking type for an ABC code For each ABC code, create a stocktaking type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By ABC code**. The **ABC code selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **ABC code selection** tab, select an appropriate ABC code in the **ABC code** field. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the boxes: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create the stocktaking type for stocktaking by frequency For stocktaking to be performed for multiple cycles at once, create a PI type as follows: 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type the unique identifier for the new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **By ABC code**. The **ABC code selection** tab is displayed. 1. On the **ABC code selection** tab, make sure the **By frequency** check box is selected. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the stocktaking sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the boxes: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the stocktaking sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a stocktaking type /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a stocktaking type 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, enter a new stocktaking type. 1. Enter a **Description**. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select the method you will use to create stocktaking sheets for this stocktaking type. 1. On the **Warehouse/location selection** tab you find the **Warehouse** field. Select the warehouse where stocktaking of this type will take place. If you leave the field empty, this type will apply at all warehouses. > [!NOTE] > The **Warehouse/location selection** tab will only be displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab you can select the order in which tag and line numbers are assigned to stocktaking counts of this type. > [!NOTE] > In the **Blank lines to add** field, you can define the number of blank lines that will be added at the end of the stocktaking sheets. You can use them if you find and count unregistered items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a stocktaking type for full count /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/create-a-stocktaking-type-for-full-count section With Visma Net, you can organise stocktaking counts by cycles, ABC codes, movement classes, item classes, or stock items; you can even perform counts for randomly selected items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a stocktaking type for full count With Visma Net, you can organise stocktaking counts by cycles, ABC codes, movement classes, item classes, or stock items; you can even perform counts for randomly selected items. Nevertheless, you should occasionally undertake full stock counts to maintain correct book quantities. 1. Go to the [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type ID** field, type a unique identifier for a new stocktaking type. 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description indicating that this is the full count. 1. In the **Generation method** field, select **Full stocktaking**. 1. Optional: On the **Warehouse/location selection** tab, specify the warehouse where the full count should be performed. Do this only if full counts will be performed only in this warehouse. 1. On the **Assignment order** tab, specify the assignment order to be used on the count sheets by selecting one of the following options in each of the fields: **By location**, **By item ID**, **By item description**, or **By lot/serial number**. (Some of the options appear only if the appropriate functionalities are enabled in your system.) 1. Optional: Specify how many blank lines to add to the count sheets. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Perform a stocktaking count /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/perform-a-stocktaking-count section You can enter the count data into the system by using the Stocktaking count window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Perform a stocktaking count You can enter the count data into the system by using the Stocktaking count window. Other employees who are participating in the count simultaneously, can enter their count data using the same window from their computers. Once you have entered any count data in this window, the service commits the data to the database. This makes the data immediately visible to all users who may simultaneously be using this window for data entry. ## How to enter count data 1. Go to the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) window. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the count you are participating in. 1. Select the warehouse where you participated in the count. 1. For each item on your count sheet, find the table row with the item. 1. When you have finished, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## How to enter count data for a new item 1. Go to the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) window. 1. Click **Add** in the table toolbar. The **Add line** dialog box opens. 1. Select the item ID for the new item. 1. Specify the location of the new item. 1. In the **Qty.** field, enter the item quantity measured in the unit of measure shown. 1. If the item requires a lot or serial number, enter this number in the **Lot/Serial no** field. 1. If the item has a lot number, specify the expiration date. 1. To add only this record, click **Add and close**, which closes the dialog box. To add more than one record without closing the dialog box click **Add**. 1. When you are finished, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Import count data from Excel /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/import-count-data-from-excel section In the Stocktaking review window, you can import count data from Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx files). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Import count data from Excel In the Stocktaking review window, you can import count data from Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx files). ## Preparation Review the Excel spreadsheets with the count results and correct any errors in the counted quantities. ## The import count data process 1. Go to the [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) window. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the count you are participating in. It has the status **Counting in progress**. 1. On the **Stocktaking details** tab, click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png). 1. In the **File upload** dialog box, click **Select file**. Browse to the file with your count results and select it. 1. Click **Upload**. The **Common settings** dialog box is displayed. 1. In the **Culture** drop-down list, select the language of the file. 1. In the **Mode** drop-down list, select **Update existing**. 1. Click **OK**. The **Columns** dialog box is displayed. 1. Map each column from the file to a column in the window, as follows: + In the **Column name** column, select a column in the uploaded file. + In the **Property name** column, select a column to update from the columns available. 1. Click **OK**. 1. Review the values in the **Physical quantity** and **Variance quantity** columns. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The data import can take some time. A spinning wheel icon in the toolbar shows that the import is in progress. When this changes to a green check mark icon, the import is completed successfully.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 View and correct imported count data /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/view-and-correct-imported-count-data section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View and correct imported count data If you see a ![icon-error](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error.png) in the toolbar instead of the expected ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png), the import process has failed. Do the following to review and correct the errors: 1. In the top right corner of the window, click **Help** and select **Trace**. 1. You can see that the errors are highlighted in the log. 1. Go to the original Excel spreadsheet and correct the errors. 1. Save the original spreadsheet. 1. Repeat the steps in the [Import count data from Excel](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/import-count-data-from-excel/) process.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Complete a stocktaking count /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/complete-a-stocktaking-count section Once the count has been completed by all involved employees and all the available data have been entered, you can complete the stocktaking and generate all the required adjustments by using the Stocktaking review window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Complete a stocktaking count Once the count has been completed by all involved employees and all the available data have been entered, you can complete the stocktaking and generate all the required adjustments by using the Stocktaking review window. You can also cancel the stocktaking count. 1. Go to the [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) window. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the stocktaking count to be completed. 1. Select the warehouse where the count has taken place. 1. On the **Stocktaking details** tab, review the list of items that were counted and their variance quantities. Notice the past expiration dates of the items. 1. Make sure that all counted items have the status **Entered** and have their quantities specified in the **Physical quantity** column. 1. Click **Finish counting**. The system calculates the totals, including the variance total quantity and amount. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > You cannot complete the stocktaking count if the table contains lines for which the status is set to **Not entered**. You must first set the physical quantity of these lines to zero by clicking **Set not entered to zero**, or exclude them from the stocktaking count by clicking **Set not entered to skipped**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage replenishment /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage replenishment Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About automated replenishment /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment page Visma Net is flexible enough to let you configure automated replenishment to cover many possible situations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About automated replenishment Visma Net is flexible enough to let you configure automated replenishment to cover many possible situations. Visma Net is flexible enough to let you configure automated replenishment to cover many possible situations. Replenishment for stock items is performed on a per-warehouse basis. ## Single vs multiple warehouses The following table describes the difference between having single and multiple warehouses. |If|Then| |---|---| |your company has a single warehouse,|it purchases inventory to replenish the stock.| |your company has multiple warehouses (and the Multiple warehouses functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled),|your company can purchase stock for some warehouses and replenish stock for others by transferring required quantities from these warehouses.| Some products at specific warehouses may be purchased only if there are customer orders requesting the products. In this case the items can be purchased to a wholesale warehouse and transferred to point-of sale warehouses. By using forecast models, you can fine-tune such parameters as safety stock, reorder point, and maximum quantities based on sales statistics. ## Replenishment preparation In the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window, you can view the list of items that require replenishment. To more effectively process the requests, you can select a warehouse and a planned purchase date, and view the list of applicable items requiring replenishment in this warehouse at a specified date. You can further narrow the list by a specific supplier, or you can view only the items assigned to you as a product manager or to your work group. You can select particular items and process them by clicking **Process**, or you can process all the listed items by clicking **Process all** in the window toolbar of the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window. ## Conditions to initiate replenishment for a stock item To create the list of items that require replenishment, the system uses the settings specified on the **Replenishment info** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window, for each item at each warehouse where the item can be stocked. ### Criteria for inclusion on item list An item is listed in the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window if the following general conditions are fulfilled: + The processing date you have selected is within the time interval when the replenishment settings are effective (defined by **Launch date** and **Termination date** ). + The quantity on hand is below the reorder point for this item at this warehouse. + The item has one of the following sources: **Purchase**, **Manufacturing** or **Transfer**. For more information, see About configuration of automated replenishment. ### Generation of replenishment request The following table describes the conditions that decide when replenishment requests are generated. |IF|AND|THEN| |---|---|---| |an item should be replenished by using the **Fixed** replenishment method,|the replenishment source is **Transfer**,|the system will generate a replenishment request for the transfer economic recommended quantity (transfer ERQ).| |an item should be replenished by using the **Fixed** replenishment method,|the replenishment source is **Purchase**,|the system will generate a replenishment request for economic order quantity (EOQ) specified for the selected supplier, on the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window.| |an item should be replenished by using the **Min./max.** replenishment method,||the system will generate a replenishment request for the target quantity which is calculated as follows: Target quantity = Max. quantity - Reorder point - Quantity on supply + Quantity on demand| ### Low season adjustments The replenishment quantities on the list appear adjusted for low seasons defined by your system's set of seasonality settings. By using seasonality settings, you can adjust the quantities for replenishment that are initiated during low seasons, each of which is defined by its starting and ending date. For a purchase date within a low season, the replenishment quantity is calculated with a **decreasing** factor, which is a factor that appropriately decreases replenishment quantities. ## Handling replenishment requests Processing the items listed in the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window, prompts the system to create appropriate replenishment requests, which are internal Visma Net documents used as the basis for creating purchase and transfer orders. Replenishment requests have reference numbers, which are determined by the numbering sequence specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. The system handles replenishment requests differently based on the item replenishment source. The two tables below describe the **Purchase** and **Transfer** replacement source respectively. ### Purchase replacement source
Stage Description
1 The replenishment requests appear in the Create purchase orders (PO505000) window.
2

The user:

  • can use the window to create one order for all items to be purchased from a specific supplier.
3

The system:

  • performs any needed conversions to purchase units.
The replenishment quantities on the purchase order will be calculated differently depending on the replenishment method that has been selected for the item in question. The following table explains this. ### For the Purchase replacement source
If Then
the Min./max.method has been chosen for the item,

the system computes the replenishment quantity as:

the difference between the maximum quantity and the reorder point, minus the quantity on supply (the quantity of items on unreleased purchase orders, purchase receipts, and quantities in transit), and plus the quantity on demand (on customer released and unreleased orders).
the Fixed order quantity method has been selected, the system uses the EOQ values specified for the chosen supplier.
### Transfer replacement source The **Transfer** option is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses functionality** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Stage Description
1 The replenishment requests appear in the Create transfer orders (SO509000).
2

The user:

  • creates transfer orders to move the products from the replenishment warehouse to the warehouse when the item needs replenishment.
## Calculating the final replenishment quantities The quantities specified on the purchase order may differ from those specified on the replenishment requests. The final replenishment quantity for an item on a purchase order is calculated based on the settings provided for the supplier that will fulfill replenishment. The table below explains the changes that may occur. |If|Then| |---|---| |the quantity required by replenishment settings is less than the minimum order quantity,|the system uses the minimum order quantity.| |the quantity required by replenishment settings exceeds the maximum order quantity,|the system uses the maximum order quantity.| |the requested quantity is not divisible by the lot size,|the result is rounded up to the next integer, and that number of lots is ordered.| |the order frequency is specified,|the system estimates the time interval between the previous purchase order and the planned purchase date of the current replenishment.|

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About configuration of automated replenishment /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment page To be competitive, a company must strike a balance with its inventory levels: The company should not overstock inventory, because this ties up working capital, yet it should avoid stockouts, which result in lost customers and diminished customer loyalty. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About configuration of automated replenishment To be competitive, a company must strike a balance with its inventory levels: The company should not overstock inventory, because this ties up working capital, yet it should avoid stockouts, which result in lost customers and diminished customer loyalty. With Visma Net, you can configure automatic replenishment for stock items at multiple warehouses. If your company has many warehouses, some may be used only for receiving purchases, while others may be used only for sales. You can configure the system so that warehouses from which sales are performed are replenished from warehouses where purchases are performed. ## Before you start Before you start to configure automated replenishment in your system, thoroughly consider the warehouse functions in your system, including which warehouses will serve as replenishment sources for other warehouses and which will be replenished by direct purchasing or manufacturing. ## Configuration steps To reduce time that would be spent typing replenishment settings for each item in each warehouse, you can configure default replenishment settings at multiple levels. In general, you perform the following steps to configure automated replenishment: 1. Create appropriate replenishment classes. 1. Assign each warehouse to a replenishment class. 1. For each item class, specify replenishment settings for all replenishment classes, including the applicable seasonality settings. 1. For each stock item, review the replenishment settings that are default values from the item class, and make any needed adjustments. 1. For each stock item at each specific warehouse, review the replenishment settings that are default values from the item. Adjust these settings for each warehouse if needed. The sections below provide information that will help you execute these steps. ## Replenishment classes Replenishment classes group warehouses by the **replenishment sources** used in your company, that is, how stock is replenished at the warehouse. You create replenishment classes by using the [Replenishment classes (IN208800)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-classes-in208800/) window and you assign a replenishment class to every warehouse. For each class, specify its + name, + description, and + replenishment source. ### Replenishment source As the replenishment source, you can select one of the following options:
Source Description
None No replenishment is required. This could be used, for example, for a warehouse that is closing its operations.
Purchase The items for stock replenishment will be purchased from suppliers.
Manufacturing The items for stock replenishment will be manufactured.
Transfer The items will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.
Purchase to order The items for stock replenishment will be purchased only when customer orders have been received for them and in the quantities requested by the orders.
### Virtual warehouse For items that are usually sold by using drop ship orders and do not require replenishment, you can create a virtual warehouse and assign the replenishment class with the **Drop shipment** option as the replenishment source. ## Setting up default values To make it easier to provide replenishment settings for each item that is specific to each warehouse where the item is stocked, you can set up default values at multiple levels. The sections below explain how to do this. Fist level: Item-class replenishment settings Specify replenishment settings to be used as default settings for items of the class, by using the the Replenishment settings tab on the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ### Items at separate warehouses If you know that items of the class are stocked at multiple warehouses with different replenishment sources, configure how the items are typically replenished for each replenishment class. Specify the following information for each item class: + The method of demand calculation + The seasonality + The replenishment method + The demand forecast model and parameters for the model (the period type, number of periods to analyse, and service level). + The launch and termination dates of the period when the settings are effective for the class. ### The method of demand calculation When specifying the method of demand calculation for each item class, you can select one of the options described below.
IF THEN
you select the Hard demand only option,

the demand will be calculated as

Allocated sales order qty. + Sales order qty. on shipments + Qty. on sales back orders.
you select the Item class settings, the demand will be calculated in accordance with the availability settings specified for this item. This setting is defined on the General information tab of the Item classes (IN201000) window.
### Second level: Item replenishment settings On the **Replenishment settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, you can view the replenishment settings of a particular item, which by default are provided by the item class. For the item, you can review replenishment settings for different replenishment classes that might be used if the item is stocked at multiple warehouses, and override the settings if needed. ## Replenishment settings for an item at a specific warehouse The many replenishment settings for all items at all warehouses are filled in with default values. In the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window ( **Replenishment info** tab), you can review the replenishment parameters to be used for the particular item at the selected warehouse. These settings come from the item settings but can be overridden for a particular warehouse. > [!NOTE] > You cannot use a different replenishment source for an item than the one specified for the warehouse. If an item is stocked at multiple warehouses, there may be multiple records with different sets of replenishment parameters. The settings for a particular item are stored in the **Replenishment info** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## Configuration of consolidated purchasing for replenishment With Visma Net, you can configure replenishment for a number of warehouses that is performed by transfers from one large warehouse, a distribution centre, for which centralised purchasing is performed, and perform it efficiently. For items in the smaller warehouses that should be replenished by transfers from the distribution centre, specify **Transfer** as a replenishment source, while for the same items stocked in the distribution centre select **Purchase** as a replenishment source. The table below describes the replenishment process for multiple warehouses.
Stage Description
1

The user
2

The system

  • generates transfer orders requesting replenishment.
  • creates demand for replenishment in the distribution centre.
2

The system

  • creates a single purchase order for all the requested quantities of each item no matter which the demand warehouses are.
3

The user

  • creates a receipt for the merchandise from a supplier for this purchase order and releases it. If the item is replenished by using the Purchase to order source, for each warehouse where the item is stocked, the user can specify the same replenishment warehouse.
4

The system

  • automatically generates transfer orders to split the received quantity between demand warehouses according to the quantities on original sales orders.

Related pages

Windows

 About replenishment methods and their parameters /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-methods-and-their-parameters page With Visma Net, you can assign different replenishment methods to different items of inventory stocked at different warehouses and specify warehouse-specific parameters for these methods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About replenishment methods and their parameters With Visma Net, you can assign different replenishment methods to different items of inventory stocked at different warehouses and specify warehouse-specific parameters for these methods. Different items may require different parameters because of different customer demand for them and different numbers of days required to receive the requested quantities from the suppliers. You can use either of the following replenishment methods: **Min./max.** and **Fixed order qty**. For each stock item, the system uses the specified method to calculate the quantities required to replenish the stock of this item, based on the replenishment parameters that you specify on the **Replenishment info** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. The available replenishment methods and their parameters are discussed in the sections below. ## The min./max. method You use the **Min./max.** method to maintain the stock level of a stock item at a particular warehouse between the specified minimum and maximum quantities. To use this method for an item, you should specify the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Maximum quantity This is the maximum stock quantity allowed for the item at the warehouse.
Safety stock This is the additional stock of the item maintained to avoid stockouts. A safety stock is required if there are fluctuations in demand and supply.
Reorder point The system uses the reorder point quantity in the Min./max. replenishment method rather than a minimum quantity. Generally, a minimum quantity would be estimated as the quantity that may be required during the lead time (the time when the product is being shipped from the supplier location to your company). The quantity set as the reorder point is the minimum quantity plus the safety stock.
### Process triggered at low stock level Once the system detects that the current stock level (the available quantity) has reached or fallen below the reorder point, it: + calculates the required replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and current quantities to replenish the stock up to the maximum quantity. + estimates the available quantity by adding quantities on supply and deducting quantities on demand. You control the way the system calculates the quantities on supply and quantities on demand for classes of stock items by using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## The fixed order quantity method Use the **Fixed order quantity** method when you want to replenish the item stock with a fixed quantity each time it falls below the reorder point. This method uses the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Fixed quantity

We recommend that you use as the fixed quantity the economical order quantity (EOQ) determined by warehouse specialists for a particular item by estimating the cost of ordering the item from a particular supplier. For each supplier from which the stock item can be purchased, the EOQ is specified in the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window.

You can view EOQs specified for all suppliers of the item on the Supplier details tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Safety stock This is an additional stock of the item maintained to avoid stockouts. The safety stock is required if there are fluctuations in demand and supply.
Reorder point For this method, just like above, the reorder point is specified as the safety stock plus the quantity that may be required during the lead time.
### Process triggered at low stock level With the **Fixed order quantity** method, the system: + generates request for the economical order quantity (EOQ) for the item once it determines that the available quantity reaches reorder point or is lower than that. + estimates the available quantities by adding quantities on supply and deducting quantities on demand. You define the way the quantities on supply and quantities on demand are calculated for stock items by using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## The parameter estimation For automated replenishment, you can manually enter estimates of replenishment parameters, such as safety stock, maximum quantity, and reorder point that were made externally by logistics specialists for each item. Alternatively, you can configure the system to automatically calculate the replenishment parameters. In Visma Net, you can use demand forecast models to calculate replenishment parameters by using sales statistics. With this flexibility, you can lower carrying costs, avoid stockouts, minimise excess or obsolete inventory, improve cash flow, and increase customer loyalty levels. ## Other item-specific parameters The parameters described below are also used in automated replenishment for the stock item at the specific warehouse.
Parameter Description
Launch and termination dates These dates define the range during which the replenishment settings specified in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window will affect the item if it is stocked at this warehouse. By default, the dates come from the item settings (which are specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window but can be overridden for the item at the specific warehouse).
Supplier details

To replenish the stock of the stock item at the warehouse, you should specify the supplier from which inventory will be purchased.

The system uses the default supplier of the stock item (as specified on the Supplier details tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window) unless you have chosen another supplier for the item at the warehouse.

The other item-specific parameters are associated with the selected preferred supplier:

  • Lead time required to ship the item from the supplier location to the warehouse
  • Lot size
  • Order frequency (minimum number of days between two successive orders)
  • Minimum and maximum order quantity
  • EOQ

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast page Businesses strive to have enough stock for potential sales. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast Businesses strive to have enough stock for potential sales. Businesses strive to have enough stock for potential sales. Replenishing the stock in time and in the proper quantities helps businesses to retain customers while reducing storage costs. For an overview of the automated replenishment functionality implemented in Visma Net, see[About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/). To predict the demand, that is, the stock level you may need in the future for each item, you can use demand forecast methods. ## Demand forecast method The current version of Visma Net uses the **moving average** method, one of the simplest methods. In Visma Net, you can use the predicted average daily demand, calculated with the help of demand forecasting models, to periodically update the values of replenishment parameters (such as maximum quantity, reorder point, and safety stock) in order to more precisely calculate the quantities required for replenishment. ## Moving average method With the moving average method, you calculate the demand for a specific future period based on historical data for multiple consecutive periods in the immediate past. This method works well for items with specific trends in sales or with stable sales not subjected to random significant fluctuations. To apply the moving average method to forecasting demand, you choose + the specific time period (a week, a month, or a quarter), and + the number of these periods to analyse the data, depending on how sales of the particular product or group of products (implemented in Visma Net as an item class) change over time. This forecast model uses the data available for the specified number of past periods to forecast demand for the period immediately following the last period whose data is used in forecasting. ### Data from full periods If you select a month as the forecast period and want to perform a forecast on the 15th day of the current month, 15 days' worth of data will not be used for forecasting; only data from full periods is used. The system calculates the daily demand for the nearest future period based on daily sales in all days of the specified number of prior periods. As the actual data for the last forecast period becomes available, you can forecast demand for the next period by using the data of the previous periods shifted by one period. This method smooths out the data; the more periods you use to calculate the average demand, the greater the smoothing effect. ### Average lead time calculation The **average lead time** is calculated for each stock item‒preferred supplier pair based on all purchase orders in the system history. The average lead time is computed as average difference (on all orders) between the date when + an order is created (the **Requested on** date) and + the date of the receipt created for the goods listed on the order. ## Using seasonality parameters for forecasting Sales of some products follow certain cycles or patterns. For example, the peak of ski sales is in the winter. Such patterns in sales can be described as **seasonality**. A set of seasonality settings is a list of low and high seasons with appropriate factors (coefficients) that show how sales decline or increase in each of these specific seasons, as compared to average sales volumes calculated over all time. The seasons for particular products or groups of products with similar sales behaviour and corresponding factors can be determined by analysing sales data spanning several financial years. ### Defining seasonality settings You define seasonality settings by using the[Replenishment seasonality (IN206600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-seasonality-in206600/) window. The seasons for one seasonality should not intersect. For date ranges not included in any season, the factor is 1.0 by default. A low season for groups of products may span multiple financial periods or be contained in a single financial period. The seasonality settings are used in the following procedure: 1. The system normalises the historical data available for the specified seasons. The sales volumes for each day of a season are deleted by the appropriate factor to calculate the sales as though it were a normal season. 1. The system calculates the average daily sales amount based on the historical data of the specified number of periods. For seasons within the specified periods, the system uses the normalised data. > [!NOTE] > The standard deviation for the average daily demand is calculated for actual sales data, not for normalised data. 1. The average daily sales amount is adjusted for seasons if seasons are expected within the forecast period. The average daily demand is multiplied by the average seasonality factor (calculated over all days in the forecast period—normal days and days of seasons). ## Calculation of replenishment parameters The system uses: + the calculated average daily demand, + average lead time, and + their standard deviation values, to compute the parameters below that are used in automated replenishment: **Reorder point** and **Safety stock**. ### The reorder point calculation > [!NOTE] > Reorder point = (Average daily demand)*(Average lead time) + (Safety stock) ### The safety stock calculation The safety stock is calculated as follows to address possible fluctuations in demand: > [!NOTE] > Safety stock = serviceFactor \* sqrt (aLeadTimeMSE \* aDemandPerDay)^2 + (aLeadTime \* aDemandMSE)^2 > > Where MSE is calculated as statistics method: Mean squared error The **Maximum stock** is set equal to **Reorder point**; if needed, you can manually increase the value of **Maximum stock**. ### Service level setting The service level is used to optimise the safety stock level. Generally, it is set on the item-class level, but you can specify it for each item in each warehouse if needed. The service level represents the probability of not reaching stockout. The **Normsinv (service level)** function provides the factor that adjusts the safety stock required for the specified service level. With the service level selected at 50%, the safety stock is zero (that is, not required). ### Default value for service level The factor reaches 1.0 with the service level approximately 84%, which is the default value for service level in the[Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. To maintain a higher service level, you will need a safety stock that exceeds the calculated quantity. ## Setting up parameter calculation You specify the forecast method and its parameters for each item class by using the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, and then the settings are used as default values for items of the class. You can select values that differ from the default ones for particular items of the class by using the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. Moreover, you can adjust the replenishment settings for each warehouse in which the items are stocked. ## Updating replenishment parameters by forecast-based values You use the following Visma Net windows to update replenishment parameters and then prepare the replenishment: + [Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500/): You use this window to compute the average daily demand and average lead time, and then to calculate the following parameters used in automated replenishment: **Maximum quantity**, **Reorder point**, and **Safety stock**. + [Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/apply-replenishment-parameters-in509500/): In this window, you review the parameter values suggested by the forecast and replace the old values of replenishment parameters. You can manually adjust the suggested parameters if needed. + [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/): Use this window to find the items that need replenishment and to calculate replenishment quantities for these items. + [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/): To generate purchase orders for items requiring replenishment, you can use this window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Manage inventory transactions /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage inventory transactions Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About inventory transactions /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions page Inventory transactions are used to account for stock items moved to or from a specific warehouse, between locations within a warehouse, or between warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About inventory transactions Inventory transactions are used to account for stock items moved to or from a specific warehouse, between locations within a warehouse, or between warehouses. Purchases and sales cause stock item movements, and the respective inventory transactions are generated by financial documents, such as purchase receipts and sales orders, originated in other workspaces. Your company may also have direct inventory transactions or those not based on a financial document, such as an issue transaction to remove damaged or expired goods from inventory. Because direct transactions are not standard operations, they should be accompanied by reason codes to explain why they were performed. With the Inventory workspace, you use the following documents to account for inventory transactions performed: Receipt : To record the arrival of some quantity of stock items at the warehouse Issue : To record the withdrawal of some quantity of stock items from the warehouse Adjustment : To update the quantity of stock items at the warehouse performed (usually after stocktaking counts) and to update costs for items with standard cost and average valuation methods Transfer : To record the movement of stock items between locations or warehouses Kit assembly : To update the quantities of kits that were assembled and items used as kit components ## Receipts ### Creating receipts Inventory receipts, created and viewed by using the [Receipts (IN301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/receipts-in301000/) window, are used to account for inventory received at a warehouse. If the Purchases workspace is integrated with the Inventory workspace, the system creates inventory receipts automatically once purchase receipts have been released. You can perform a direct receipt at a warehouse or warehouse location when some quantity of a stock item is received as the transferred inventory in a two-step transfer process. ### Items with no transaction history Also, during physical inventory, a receipt is generated for items with no history of transactions. The items are considered as newly received, and an inventory receipt is generated. ### Posting settings for items The information required to post transactions listed in automatically generated receipts comes from the posting class of the item, defined in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. When an inventory receipt based on a purchase receipt is released, the item's posting class determines the general ledger accounts (inventory account and Supplier ledger accrual account) to be updated. If the item has the average cost valuation method assigned, its costs are also updated. ### Reason codes The system inserts the default reason code for receipts, specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, automatically, but you can choose a more relevant reason code. Reason codes are defined in the[Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. For direct receipts, the system specifies the costs of items automatically based on the item valuation methods. On release of a receipt, the inventory account (depending on posting settings) will be updated; the offset account will be determined by the reason code selected for the receipt line. ## Issues ### Creating issues The system automatically generates issues, which allow you to account for inventory withdrawals and returns, upon release of sales orders, credit and debit notes, and kit assembly documents. You can create, view, or modify issues using the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. ### Direct issues You can use a direct issue not linked to any sales order or note in the following situations: + To remove expired or damaged goods + To return excessively issued goods If an issue is the result of an employee picking items to fill a sales order, the extended cost amount usually debits a cost of goods sold account and credits an inventory account, with the accounts determined by the posting class of the stock item. With a direct issue, the extended cost amount decreases the inventory account balance and increases the balance of the offset account. The chosen offset account depends on the reason of the transaction; in any case, it's a specific expense account. ### Reason codes Reason codes used for issues should provide offset accounts for specific types of issues. The system automatically inserts the default reason code for direct issues specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, but you can choose a more relevant reason code. If the issue is made for kit assembling, the offset account is usually an expense account such as **Material expense**. If the issue is made to remove expired goods, the offset account might be **Expired goods' costs**. ### Return transaction If a stock item was issued in excessive quantity and is being returned, or if an inventory withdrawal was incorrect or not needed, you can create a return transaction and specify a reason code for it. A return to inventory increases the balance of the inventory account and decreases the balance of the offset account specified by the reason code. ## Adjustments ### Creating adjustments Adjustments can be created manually or by the system. You can enter, view, or modify adjustments in the [Adjustments (IN303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/adjustments-in303000/) window. ### Use of adjustments You can use an adjustment in the following situations: + To write off shrinkage occurring due to theft, loss, or expiration of goods. + To correct a released issue or receipt. + To adjust costs for items with FIFO and specific valuation methods. (The reference to the original receipt, and the date of receipt are required.) + To document unrecorded gain or loss detected during stocktaking count. For example, previously written-off (as loss) items may reappear during counting. + To create initial inventory balances for a new implementation. ### Inventory transaction corrections You can create an adjustment to correct a released transaction (receipt or issue) with an error. Because the system records each inventory transaction for accounting purposes, you cannot delete an incorrect transaction. An adjustment specifies a negative or positive quantity of the items and updates the inventory accounts. In the process of standard cost updating, the system generates cost adjustments to update the respective inventory accounts and standard cost variation accounts. In the process of stocktaking, when the data entry is completed, the system generates adjustments for items for which quantity on hand differs from count data. ## Transfers ### Creating transfers Occasionally, you might need to move inventory from one location or warehouse to another location or warehouse. In Visma Net, a transfer is created, viewed, and modified in the [Transfers (IN304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000/) window. You can use transfers to record two types of inventory movements. One-step transfer : Movement between different locations within a warehouse or between warehouses performed in one step Two-step transfer : Movement between different warehouses performed in two steps ### One-step transfers A one-step transfer documents the movement of items from one location to another one within the same warehouse. Also, goods movement between two warehouses can be performed as a one-step transfer, if goods are moved immediately or very quickly (as with adjacent warehouses). A batch generated for one-step transfer includes no transactions if inventory accounts and subaccounts used for the items are the same for the source and destination locations. If the accounts and subaccounts differ, the system will generate journal entries for transactions performed between the inventory account used for the item at the source location, the in-transit account (specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window), and the inventory account used for the item at the destination location. If a transfer includes more than one line, the journal entry to the in-transit account is the summary for all line items. The system selects unit costs for items automatically based on the items' valuation methods. ### Two-step transfers Two-step transfers are used for transferring inventory between any two warehouses located far enough from one another that they cannot be moved immediately. In a two-step transfer, the stock items are issued from the source warehouse's location and costs of items are recorded to the in-transit account specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window for all two-step transfers. Later, when the transferred inventory arrives at the target warehouse, the user creates an inventory receipt with a reference to the original inventory transfer document; the batch generated for the receipt will move the costs of goods from the in-transit account to the inventory account used for the items in the destination warehouse. Depending on the item class, the quantities of in-transit goods may or may not be included in availability calculation. The rules for inventory availability calculation are specified for each item class on the **General information** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## Kit assemblies ### Creating Kit assemblies Kit assemblies, which you create using the [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) window, are used to account for kits and their components. As a result of assembly transactions, new kits (finished goods) are created and their quantity on hand increases, while quantities of the kit components are deducted by the quantities used in kits. A batch generated on kit assembly release updates the following accounts: + the inventory account associated with the kit at a particular warehouse, + the inventory accounts associated with stock components, and + the expense accrual accounts associated with non-stock components. ## Transaction reason codes As noted, you use reason codes to indicate why inventory transactions are made. Each reason code has a default account and subaccount specified, and they are used as the offset account and subaccount for the inventory transaction. You can specify reason codes for inventory receipts, issues, and adjustments.

Related pages

Windows

 View inventory transactions details /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/view-inventory-transactions-details section The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to check details when something is not correct. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View inventory transactions details The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to check details when something is not correct. Use this screen to look at specific item's movements in a specific period. You can use selection criteria to display the data you want to see. 1. Go to the [Inventory transaction details (IN404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-details-in404000/) window. 1. In **Period**, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the period for which you want to view the details. You can also specify date ranges or choose **By financial period (without running values)**. 1. In **Location**, you see where the item is located. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select another location. 1. In **Item ID**, select the item you want to see transaction details for. This is a required field. 1. The table shows details such as transaction type, status (released or not), quantity in and out, cost in and out and may also let you drill down to underlying documents in the columns **Ref. no.**, **Sales order no.** and **Purchase order receipt no.**. 1. For items that have underlying documents or other information, you can also click **Stock item**, **Summary** or **Allocation details** to drill down to details in related windows. > [!NOTE] > Click **Summary by day** to see only summarised information for an item on a specific day. > [!NOTE] > Click **Include unreleased (without costs )** to hide the columns **Cost in**, **Cost out** and **Unit cost**, and also display unreleased transactions.

Related pages

Windows

 View inventory transactions by account /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/view-inventory-transactions-by-account section The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses this window to re-conciliate the inventory. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View inventory transactions by account The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses this window to re-conciliate the inventory. Use this window to view detailed information about transactions in a selected inventory account within a selected period, including the account balance and all related transactions. 1. Go to the [Inventory transactions by account (IN403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transactions-by-account-in403000/) window. 1. In the **Inventory account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the account for which you want to see the transactions. Select a **Period** and / or date range if you want to narrow your search. You can also choose to list the results by financial period. 1. If you want to see information for a specific stock item or from a specific warehouse, select the item or warehouse in **Item ID** or **Warehouse**. If you prefer to see a daily summary of transactions by account, select **Summary by day**. 1. The table lists the transactions that match your criteria. You can sort and search on any of the column headings. In the transaction type column, you can see the type of transaction, for example **Receipt** or **Adjustment**. 1. For transactions that have underlying information, you can drill down in the columns **Ref. no.** and **Item ID**. > [!NOTE] > You can go directly to related windows, by clicking **Summary** or **Allocation details** in the navigation bar. > [!NOTE] > You can also export your transaction history to Excel, by clicking ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Windows

 View inventory transaction history /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/view-inventory-transaction-history section You use this window to look at item movements from one date to another. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View inventory transaction history You use this window to look at item movements from one date to another. It is typically used by a warehouse manager, who wants to track inventory transactions. 1. Go to the [Inventory transaction history (IN405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the item for which you want to see the transaction history. Select a start and end date in the date fields if you want to narrow your search. 1. If you want to see information from a specific warehouse, select the warehouse in **Location**. If you prefer to see a daily summary or transactions, select **Summary by day**. You can also click to include unreleased transactions. 1. The table lists the transactions that match your criteria. You can sort and search by clicking the column headings. In the **Trans. type** column, you can see the type of transaction, for example **Receipt** or **Invoice**. 1. For transactions that have underlying information, you can drill down in the fields **Ref. no.**, **Sales order no.** and **Purchase order receipt no.**. > [!NOTE] > You can go directly to related windows, by clicking **Stock item**, **Summary** or **Allocation details**. > [!NOTE] > You can also export your transaction history to Excel, by clicking ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Windows

 Use the inventory transaction summary /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/use-the-inventory-transaction-summary section The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to get a sum of all transactions grouped by period and item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Use the inventory transaction summary The typical user of this window is an accountant, who uses it to get a sum of all transactions grouped by period and item. 1. Go to the [Inventory transaction summary (IN406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000/) window. 1. In the **Period** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the period for which you want to see the transaction summary. Select **By financial period** if you want to see transactions according to a specific financial period. 1. In the **Location** field, select the warehouse for which you want to see the transaction summary. Your company may for example have a standard location and a return location. You can also select a specific item ID if you want the summary to show transactions for only that item. 1. Select **Show items without movement** if you want to display items that have had no movements in the period you are viewing. You can sort and search on any of the column headings in the table. For example, it is easy to see which item has sold more, by clicking the **Sales** column label and selecting **Sort ascending** or **Sort descending**. 1. To see more details about the warehouse and location of an item, select **Warehouse details** and **Location details**, to display the corresponding columns. 1. For transactions that have underlying information, you can click the **View** button and select Inventory transaction details, **Summary** or **Allocation details** to drill down to details in related windows. > [!NOTE] > You can also export your transaction summary to Excel, by clicking ![icon-excel](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-excel.png).

Related pages

Windows

 Inventory windows /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory windows Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Inventory windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Inventory workspace. ## Transactions [Receipts (IN301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/receipts-in301000/) [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) [Adjustments (IN303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/adjustments-in303000/) [Transfers (IN304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000/) [Kit assembly (IN307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000/) [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) ## Registers [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) ## Processes [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) [Release inventory documents (IN501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/release-inventory-documents-in501000/) [Close financial periods (IN509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/close-financial-periods-in509000/) [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) [Update ABC code (IN506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000/) [Update movement class (IN506100)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100/) [Validate inventory (IN505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/validate-inventory-in505000/) [Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500/) [Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/apply-replenishment-parameters-in509500/) [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) ## Inquiries [Inventory summary (IN401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000/) [Inventory allocation details (IN402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) [Inventory transaction summary (IN406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000/) [Inventory transaction history (IN405000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000/) [Inventory transaction details (IN404000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-details-in404000/) [Inventory transactions by account (IN403000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transactions-by-account-in403000/) [Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-lot-serial-history-in407000/) [Stock items by item class (IN408000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000/) [Summary of items sold and purchased (IN40199S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/summary-of-items-sold-and-purchased-in40199s/) ## Reports [Inventory balance (IN61500S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-balance-in61500s/) Displays detailed, up-to-date information about the quantities and unit costs of stock items at different warehouses and locations. [Historical inventory balance (IN61600S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s/) For the chosen period, presents detailed information about the beginning and ending quantities of stock items at different warehouses and locations. [Inventory valuation (IN61550S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s/) Displays information about the quantities on hand and the total cost of inventory by inventory account, with details for different warehouses. [Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s/) For the chosen period, displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses change during the period. [Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/summary-of-historical-inventory-valuation-in61800s/) This report displays summary data for each inventory account/subaccount resulting from operations with stock items. [Inventory register (IN61400S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-register-in61400s/) Presents up-to-date, detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). [Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-detailed-in61100s/) Displays up-to-date summary information about every generated inventory document (receipt, issue, adjustment, or transfer). [Preview standard cost change (IN617500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/preview-standard-cost-change-in617500/) Gives you estimates of the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you perform updating of the standard costs of the items. [Goods in transit (IN616500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/goods-in-transit-in616500/) Shows up-to-date information about the goods in transit, their total quantities, and their total cost. [Lot/serial numbers (IN613000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000/) Displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected aging date. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Lot/serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window,. [Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500/) Generates stocktaking sheets for the selected stocktacking. [Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-variance-preview-in621500/) Lists the stock items included into stocktacking, and displays the book quantities and the count results for the items. ## Preferences [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) [Item price classes (IN209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000/) [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) [Item sales categories (IN204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060/) [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) [Availability calculation rules (IN201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/availability-calculation-rules-in201500/) [Replenishment classes (IN208800)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-classes-in208800/) [Replenishment seasonality (IN206600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-seasonality-in206600/) [Stocktaking types (IN208900)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900/) [Stocktaking cycles (IN208700)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700/) [Shipping zones (CS207510)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-zones-cs207510/) [Shipping terms (CS208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000/) [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) [FOB points (CS208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/fob-points-cs208500/) ## Other [Stock item labels (IN619200) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200/) Generates labels for stock items received according to a particular receipt. [Location labels (IN619000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000/) Generates labels for locations within specific warehouse with stock item or item class specified. ABC codes (IN208500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500 page This window holds the definitions of the ABC codes used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # ABC codes (IN208500) This window holds the definitions of the ABC codes used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In Visma Net, ABC analysis is based on relative stock values of stock items. For each code to be used in your system, you can specify the threshold value of the criteria to be used to assign items to it, and the frequency of stock takes required for stock items assigned to it. To assign codes for the first time or to update code assignment for items at a particular warehouse, based on the stock values for the selected financial period, use the [Update ABC codes (IN506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000/) window. For details on using ABC codes, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) and [Overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) ## The top part
Element Description
Total ABC code % The total percentage of the criteria used to assign stock items to all ABC codes, 100%.
## The table This area displays a table showing all ABC codes defined in the system and their properties.
Column Description
ABC code The code defined in the system.
Description A brief description of the code.
Counts per year The number of stocktaking counts to be performed per year for the items with this code assigned.
ABC code %

A threshold value (%) of the criteria to be used to assign the stock items to this code.

For details on assignment method, see About inventory ranking methods.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Adjustments (IN303000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/adjustments-in303000 page In this window, you can create, view, and edit adjustments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Adjustments (IN303000) In this window, you can create, view, and edit adjustments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create, view, and edit adjustments. You can save adjustment documents with the status **On hold** or **Balanced** and release them. The processing of adjustment documents depends on certain settings in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/). By default, adjustments are saved with the status**On hold** if the **Hold documents on entry** option is selected. Adjustment totals are validated on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** option is selected. When an adjustment is released, its transactions are posted to general ledger if the **Automatically post on release** option is selected. For more information about adjustments, see [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates document release, which changes the status of the adjustment to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports:
## The top part In this area, you can select an existing adjustment by its reference number or specify summary information about a new adjustment.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the adjustment, which the system automatically generates according to the numbering sequence assigned to adjustments in the Inventory preferences (IN101000).
Status

The status of the adjustment. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft and can be edited. An adjustment with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
Indicates that the document’s data has been validated by the system and the document can be released. A document with this status can be modified or deleted, but changes can be saved only if the receipt remains balanced.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. A document with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold

A check box that, if selected, indicates that the receipt has the On hold status.

Clear the check box to save adjustment with the Balanced status.
Date The date when the adjustment was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions from the adjustment should be posted.
External ref. Any external reference number of the inventory adjustment document.
Description A brief description of the document or the transactions entered.
Total qty. The total quantity of stock items specified in the adjustment.
Control qty.

The manually entered quantity of items specified in the adjustment.

Note

This field is only available if the Validate document totals on entry option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) is selected.

Enter this value manually to confirm the total adjusted quantity of stock item as compared to the automatically calculated quantity of stock items included in this document.

If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.
Total cost The total cost of stock items listed in the adjustment.
Control cost

The manually entered cost of stock items listed in the adjustment.

Note

This field is only available if the Validate document totals on entry option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) is selected.

Enter this value manually to confirm the total cost as calculated automatically for the document.

If the Control cost and Total cost values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.
## The Transaction details tab This tab contains the list of transactions included in the adjustment document. The system automatically validates the data upon entry, flagging incorrect data with error indications. Correct the data before you try to save or release the document.
Button Description
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add items to the adjustment document.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up so you can view item availability data.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for the selected source warehouse and its locations and to add specific quantities of the items to the transfer document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Item** field.
Element Description
Item

The identifier of a particular item whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item ID to find the item.
Barcode

The barcode of the item to be listed.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.
Item class ID

The item class of the items whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.
Show available items only If you select this check box, the system will list only items whose available quantities are greater than zero in the table.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item are stocked.

Leave the field blank to view items from all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of the stock item (under the specified item ID and subitem code) in the base units that you want to add to the transfer.
Warehouse The warehouse where the items are stocked.
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Item ID The stock item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID and subitem code.
Base unit The unit of measure used as a base unit for the stock item.
Qty. available The available quantity of this item at the specified warehouse.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number and branch of the batch generated upon release of the adjustment. If the **Update general ledger** option in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window is not selected, there will be no batch.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the transfer. Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the transactions’ details.
Branch The branch associated with the adjustment.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/apply-replenishment-parameters-in509500 page You can use this window to apply replenishment parameters the system has calculated according to the forecast models used, to stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply replenishment parameters (IN509500) You can use this window to apply replenishment parameters the system has calculated according to the forecast models used, to stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can initiate this calculation by using the [Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500/) window. After you apply the replenishment parameters, you can use the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/)window to view whether stock replenishment for the item is needed and in what quantities. For an overview of the functionality, see: [About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Updates the replenishment parameters with the calculated values for the items you have selected in the table area.
Process all Updates replenishment parameters (by replacing them with the calculated values) for all the items listed in the table area to determine whether they should be replenished and in what quantities.
## The top part In this area, you specify the criteria the system uses to display the items in the **Items for replenishment** area.
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse where the items to be shown are stocked. If you leave the field blank, the system displays the items of all warehouses.

Note

This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Seasonality The set of replenishment seasonality settings assigned to the items to be displayed. You can leave this field blank to view the items with various seasonality settings.
Item class The item class of the items to be viewed. You can leave the field blank to view the items of various classes.
## The table This area has a table with the stock items that match all the criteria you have specified in the top part. During processing, replenishment parameters for the items will be replaced by the suggested parameters. You can manually adjust the suggested parameters before processing.
Column Description
Selected A check box you select to include this replenishment record in processing if you then click Process.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stock will be replenished.

Note

This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The stock item for which stock replenishment is required.
Override default supplier A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) that the default supplier is overridden for the warehouse.
Default supplier The default supplier from which the item is generally purchased for stock replenishment, as specified for the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. You can choose another supplier if necessary.
Default location

The location of the supplier from which the item is purchased by default. You can choose another supplier location if necessary.

Note

This field is only available if the Account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window.
Replenishment class The replenishment class assigned to the item.
Override replenishment settings This check box indicates (if selected) that the replenishment settings of the item have been overridden for the warehouse.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings for the item.
Replenishment method The replenishment method assigned to the item.
Replenishment source The source of replenishment for the item at this warehouse.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse that is the source of replenishment.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the maximum shelf life parameter has been overridden for the warehouse.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days the item can be stocked.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the safety stock parameter has been overridden for this warehouse.
Safety stock The safety stock value for the stock item as specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Safety stock suggested The safety stock according to the forecast and the selected service level.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the reorder point quantity of the item has been overridden for the warehouse.
Reorder point

The stock level that, when it has been reached, prompts the system to replenish the stock of the stock item.

The minimum quantity of the stock item is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Reorder point suggested The reorder point quantity, according to the forecast.
Max. qty. The maximum quantity of the item that can be stocked.
Max. qty. suggested The maximum quantity of the item according to the forecast.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the maximum quantity of the item has been overridden for the warehouse.
Last forecast date The date of the last demand forecast.
Last forecast results application date The date when the last demand forecast was applied.
Daily demand forecast The daily demand for an item, according to the last forecast.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation error for the daily demand according to the forecast.
Lead time average The average lead time according to the forecast.
Lead time STDEV The standard deviation for the average lead time according to the forecast.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/calculate-replenishment-parameters-in508500 page Use this window to calculate replenishment parameters for the stock items for which automated replenishment was configured in your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate replenishment parameters (IN508500) Use this window to calculate replenishment parameters for the stock items for which automated replenishment was configured in your system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to calculate replenishment parameters for the stock items for which automated replenishment was configured in your system. The system calculates the parameters according to the selected demand forecasting model and the seasonality settings assigned to each item on the **Replenishment info** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. For more information, see: [About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-replenishment-parameters-based-on-demand-forecast/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process For the items you have selected, calculates the replenishment parameters according to the demand forecast method assigned to the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Process all Calculates the replenishment parameters for all items listed in the table.
## The top part In this area, you can select the criteria the system uses to display the items in the table below.
Element Description
Forecast date The date of forecast calculation.
Action

Select one of the following options:

  • Calculate: Use this option to calculate the replenishment parameters.

  • Clear: Use this option to clear the calculations for the selected Forecast date.

    Note

    You must be especially careful when using this option if the demand forecast method that is used for calculations depends on the results of the previous calculations.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the items to be displayed are stocked.

If you leave the field blank, the system displays the items of all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Seasonality The seasonality settings assigned to the items to be shown. You can leave the field blank to view items with various seasonality settings.
Item class ID The item class of the items to be viewed. You can leave the field blank to view items of multiple classes.
## The Replenishment area Use this area to view the stock items that match all the criteria you have specified.
Column Description
Warehouse The warehouse of the stock item.
Item ID The stock item for which stock replenishment is configured.
Override preferred supplier This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the preferred supplier is overridden.
Default supplier The preferred supplier from which the item is generally purchased for stock replenishment, as specified for the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. You can select another supplier if necessary.
Default location

The location of the supplier from which the item is purchased by default. You can select another supplier location if necessary.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Accounts locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Replenishment class The replenishment class assigned to the item.
Override replenishment settings This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the replenishment settings has been overridden for the item at the warehouse.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings for the item.
Replenishment method The replenishment method assigned to the item.
Replenishment source The source of replenishment for the item at this warehouse.
Replenishment warehouse

The warehouse that is the source of replenishment.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the maximum shelf life parameter has been overridden for the warehouse.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days the item can be stocked.
Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the safety stock parameter has been overridden for the warehouse.
Safety stock The safety stock value for the item, which is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the reorder point quantity has been overridden for the warehouse.
Reorder point The stock level that, when it has been reached, will prompt the system to replenish the stock of the item. The minimum quantity of the stock item is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Override This check box indicates to the system (if selected) that the max. quantity has been overridden for the warehouse.
Max. qty. The maximum quantity of the item that can be stocked.
Last forecast date The date of the last demand forecast.
Daily demand forecast The daily demand according to the last forecast.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation error for the daily demand according to the forecast.
Lead time average The average lead time according to the forecast.
Lead time STDEV The standard deviation for the average lead time according to the forecast.
Reorder point suggested The quantity (reorder point quantity) according to the forecast.
Safety stock suggested The safety stock according to the forecast and the selected service level.
Max. qty. suggested The maximum quantity of the item according to the forecast.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Close financial periods (IN509000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/close-financial-periods-in509000 section You use this window to close active financial periods in the Inventory workspace, which is a required stage of closing a period in the general ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (IN509000) You use this window to close active financial periods in the Inventory workspace, which is a required stage of closing a period in the general ledger. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to close active financial periods in the Inventory workspace, which is a required stage of closing a period in the general ledger. (The financial period can be closed in the General ledger workspace only if it is closed in the Supplier ledger, Cash management, Customer ledger, and Inventory workspaces.) When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well if they have not already been closed. > [!NOTE] > Posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed unless you have selected the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the chosen financial periods or those for which you have selected the check box in the Financial periods area.

Note

When the operation is completed successfully, the icon-confirmation icon is displayed. The icon-error icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.
Unreleased Documents Generates the list of unreleased inventory documents for the selected financial periods (that is, the periods you have selected in the table), so you can view their details. The system generates this report in the PDF format and opens the created document.
Unposted to Inventory documents Opens the All unreleased documents (GL65601S) report, which displays a list of all transactions that were entered but not released during the specified financial period.
## The top part This area has a table showing all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. Select one or more periods for closing and click **Close periods** in the window toolbar. A period can only be closed if there are no documents with the **On hold**, **Balanced**, and **Released** statuses to be posted to this period.
Column Description
Period The identifier of the financial period.
Description A description of the financial period.
Active If you select this check box, the financial period can be used for posting transactions. This check box is read-only; to change the state of the financial period, use the Financial periods (GL201000) window.

Related pages

Windows

 FOB points (CS208500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/fob-points-cs208500 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # FOB points (CS208500) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to create and maintain the list of FOB (which means **freight on board** or **free on board** ) points. At these FOB points, the supplier delivers the goods and pays for the freight (cargo) to be loaded to the transportation provided by the carrier. The freight and other expenses for the cargo from that point are borne by the customer. ## The FOB points table You use the buttons in the table toolbar to add a new FOB point or sort or to remove existing FOB points. After you have added a new FOB point to the list and saved it, the system will reorder the items alphabetically.
Column Description
FOB point ID

The ID of the point (such as a city or town) where the title of goods passes from the company to the customer or from the supplier to the company.

You can use up to 20 characters, both letters and numbers.
Description A description of the FOB point. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

Related pages

Windows

 Inventory allocation details (IN402000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000 page By using this window, you can view how a selected stock item is distributed among warehouses and warehouse locations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory allocation details (IN402000) By using this window, you can view how a selected stock item is distributed among warehouses and warehouse locations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The typical user of this window is a warehouse manager or a salesperson, who uses it to find out which items are available, check the availability and location of a single item and reallocate items if necessary. You also can view the on-hand (book) quantity and actual quantity of the stock item according to unreleased documents. You can set up filters to display only the data you want to view. The quantities displayed in the window are calculated automatically, based on the availability calculation options defined for the item class associated with the stock item. These settings are specified on the **General settings** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. ## The top part By using the first five elements in this area, you can select the most relevant data to be displayed in the table for your information needs. This area also includes informational elements that show the base unit of the item and the distribution of the available quantity of the selected stock item according to various unreleased documents. The **[*]** notation indicates that the quantities of the stock item at the locations marked as **Except loc. not available** are not included in the displayed value. > [!NOTE] > This notation is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. The **[**]** notation indicates that the quantities of the stock item at the locations marked as **Except expired and loc. not available** , as well as the quantities of expired items, are not included in the displayed value. > [!NOTE] > This notation is only displayed if the **Lot and serial tracking** and the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionalities in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window are enabled.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window, where you can view the availability data of the stock item.
Element Description
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view data. You must select an item.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view data. Leave the field blank to view information about the stock item in all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location for which you want to view data. Leave the field blank to view information on all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number for which you want to view data. Leave the field blank to view information not split by lot or serial numbers.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Base unit

Read only.

This field shows the unit of measure (UoM) used as a base unit for this stock item.
On hand

Read only.

This field shows the quantity on hand for this stock item.
Total addition

Read only.

This field shows the total quantity of stock item to be added to the on-hand quantity at the warehouse.

Computation is performed in accordance with availability calculation options specified for the item class.
Total deduction

Read only.

This field shows the total quantity of stock item to be deducted from the on-hand quantity at the warehouse.

Computation is performed in accordance with availability calculation options specified for the item class.
Available

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item available at the warehouses.

It is the sum of the quantity on hand plus the total addition value and minus the total deduction value.
Available for shipping

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the item available for shipping from this location.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with the quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.
On loc. not available

The quantity of the stock item stored at locations not included in the availability calculation.

For each warehouse location, the Include in qty. available option in the Warehouses (IN204000) window defines whether the quantity of items stored at this location is included in the quantity of available items.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If the functionality is disabled, all items from a single location (the MAIN location) are always available for shipping.
Expired [*]

The quantity of the stock item that has expired, based on the expiration date specified for the lot.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Sales order prepared

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on sales orders of the Sales, Common settings, and Inventory types with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, and Pending approval statuses.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on sales prepared option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Sales orders booked [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on unreleased sales orders.

This value is calculated as the total quantity of the item included in all sales orders after deduction of the quantities of shipped items and items being shipped.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on customer orders option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Sales orders allocated [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unconfirmed shipments.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. shipping check box is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Sales orders shipped [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item shipped according to the confirmed shipments.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. shipped option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Back orders [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on sales orders with the Back order status. Also includes the unallocated quantities (those which are unavailable at the specified locations) for On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open orders of SA order type.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on back orders option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Inventory issues [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item included in the inventory issue documents that were not released yet.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on issues option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Sales order to purchase

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders created for sales orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.
Sales order to drop-ship

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders created for drop-ship orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Purchase prepared

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item calculated for all purchase orders that are not yet open, that is, are in the On hold or Pending approval status.

This value affects the Available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase prepared option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window (as reflected by a read-only check field to the right of the field).
Purchase orders

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on all open purchase orders that affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase orders option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Purchase order receipts

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unreleased purchase receipts, which affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase orders receipts option is set for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
Inventory receipts [*]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unreleased receipts.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on receipts option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
In transit [**]

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item on unreleased incoming two-step inventory transfers.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. in transit option is selected for the item class (as reflected by a read-only check box to the right of the field).
In transit to sales order Quantity of the stock item in transit to sales order.
Purchase for sales order (prepared)

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on purchase orders created for back orders and not yet open.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.
Purchase for sales order

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on open purchase orders created for sales orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.
Sales order receipts

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on purchase receipts that were created for back orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.
Drop-ship for sales order, prepared

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on drop-ship sales orders in the of On hold or Pending approval status.

This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Drop-ship for sales order

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on open drop-ship sales orders.

This quantity doesn’t affect the item availability.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Drop-ship for sales order, receipts

Read only.

This field shows the quantity of the stock item listed on receipts for drop-ship sales orders.

This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
## The table In this table, you can view detailed information matching the criteria specified in the **Selection** area about the allocation of the selected stock item.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace where the document with the availability information about this stock item originated.
Allocation type The type of allocation for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Allocation date The date of the allocation.
Document type The type of document used as a source of allocation information about the specified quantity of the stock item.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document used as a source of allocation information about the specified quantity of the stock item.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the specified quantity of the stock item was allocated.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location where the specified quantity of the stock item was allocated.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number assigned to the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Qty. The quantity of the item allocated at the specified location.
Account ID The identifier of the business account associated with the allocation.
Account name The company name of the business account associated with the allocation.
Loc. not available This check box indicates (if selected) that this quantity is not available (for example, broken) at the location.
Expired This check box indicates (if selected) that the expiration date for quantity has passed.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-lot-serial-history-in407000 page In this window, you can view detailed information about inventory stocked at the warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory lot/serial history (IN407000) In this window, you can view detailed information about inventory stocked at the warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view detailed information about inventory stocked at the warehouses. You can locate a particular unit of the stock item by its lot or serial number. > [!NOTE] > This window is only displayed when the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Element Description
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number for which you want to view transaction information.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses and Multiple warehouse locations functionalities in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window are enabled.
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view transaction information.
Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Include landed cost in unit cost A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system displays in the Unit cost column the sum of item unit cost and landed cost which is taken from a purchase receipt (if any) associated with the item.
## The table This area displays the details of the transactions that meet the criteria you specified in the **Selection** area.
Button Description
Summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Opens the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window as a pop-up to display information about how the selected stock item is allocated at the specified warehouse.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item involved in the transaction.
Trans. date The transaction date.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type. For transactions originating in the Inventory workspace, the types can be:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment

For transactions originating in another workspace, the types can be:

  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number assigned to the unit or units with the specified item ID.
Expiration date The expiration date of the specified unit or units under the same lot or serial number.
UoM The unit of measure used for the stock item.
Quantity The quantity of the item in the specified UoM.
Unit cost The cost of the item for the specified UoM.
Sales order type The type of the order that the inventory transaction is based on.
Order no. The reference number of the order that the transaction is based on.
Customer no. The number of the customer on the sales order that the transaction is based on.
Customer name The name of the customer on the sales order that the transaction is based on.
Purchase receipt type The type of the receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Receipt no. The reference number of the receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Supplier The ID of the supplier on the purchase receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Supplier name The name of the supplier on the purchase receipt the inventory transaction is based on.
Released If this check box is selected, the inventory document has been released.
Description The description of the transaction.

Related pages

Concepts

 Inventory preferences (IN101000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000 page You use this window to configure the Inventory workspace to suit your business. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory preferences (IN101000) You use this window to configure the Inventory workspace to suit your business. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The settings include global settings for stock items to be used in all workspaces, settings defining integration with the General ledger workspace, and inventory-specific settings, such as numbering sequences used for inventory-related documents, transactions, and stocktaking. ## The General information tab This tab contains groups of settings used to configure the Inventory workspace. ### The Number series section You use the elements in this section to assign number series for all types of inventory documents.
Element Description
Batches The number series to be used to assign reference numbers to batches generated for inventory documents.
Receipts/transfers The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during receipt and transfer warehouse operations.
Issues The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during issue warehouse operations.
Adjustments The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during adjustment warehouse operations.
Kit assemblies The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during kit assembly warehouse operations.
Stocktakings The series to be used to generate reference numbers for inventory documents created during stocktaking operations.
Replenishments The series to be used to generate reference numbers for replenishment documents.
### The Inventory options section This group of element includes price and cost calculation decimal precision and units to measure volume and weight.
Element Description
Reschedule back orders A check box that you select to indicate that the system should reschedule received quantities (update plan types) for sales orders with the back order status on release of inventory receipts. If this option is selected, you can run the Create shipments process in the Process orders (SO501000) window for back orders that can be fulfilled by the received quantities. If this option is not selected, after release of receipts, you have to open the back orders first (by using the Open orders action in the Process orders (SO501000) window) when you need to create shipments or you have to create shipments for back orders on a per-order basis.
### The Account settings section By using these elements, you can specify the appropriate accounts and subaccounts for inventory transactions.
Element Description
Clearing account customers The account to be used as an customer ledger clearing account for inventory transactions.
Clearing subaccount customers The subaccount to be used with the customer ledger clearing account.
In-transit branch The branch assigned to the in-transit warehouse, which is a hidden warehouse stock items become associated with when they have been issued from the source warehouse but have not yet been delivered to the destination warehouse. This field is available only if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
In-transit account The account to be used to accumulate the amounts on uncompleted transfers.
In-transit sub. The subaccount to be used with the in-transit account.
Work in progress account

The account to be used for work-in-progress transactions generated for kits in the processes of kit assembly and disassembly.

Note

This field is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Work in progress sub.

The subaccount to be used for the work-in-progress transactions generated for kits.

Note

This field is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Posting settings section Here you can specify how inventory transactions are posted to the general ledger, and what the retention period is for inventory transactions.
Element Description
Update general ledger This check box (if selected) causes the inventory transactions to be posted to the General ledger.
Post summary when updating the general ledger This check box (if selected) allows posting of batches with summary data to the General ledger. For these transactions, accounts that allow posting of summary values should be used.
Automatically post on release This check box (if selected) causes inventory batches to be posted to the General ledger automatically once the inventory documents are released.
### The Data entry section You use these elements to specify data entry-related settings to be used in the Inventory workspace.
Element Description
Hold documents on entry

This check box indicates (if selected) that new documents will be saved by default with the On hold status.

If the check box is cleared, the documents by default can be saved in the Balanced status.
Validate document totals on entry This check box indicates (if selected) that the user will need to enter the document control total before saving the document.
Add one unit per bar code This check box indicates (if selected) that the item quantity on the receipt should be increased by one unit each time an item bar code is entered into the system, manually or by using a bar code scanner.
Automatically add receipt line for bar code This check box indicates (if selected) that when a bar code scanner is used, lines should be added to receipts automatically once a bar code is scanned or entered.
Default stock item class

The default stock item class to be used to provide default settings for new items of the class and for new item classes.

The stock item classes are defined using the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Default non-stock item class

The default non-stock item class to be used to provide default settings for new items of the class and for new item classes.

The non-stock item classes are defined using the Item classes (IN201000) window.
### The Default reason codes section In this section, you specify the reason codes to be used in the Inventory workspace.
Element Description
Receipt reason code The reason code to be used by default for generated receipts. You define the receipt reason codes, as well as the accounts and subaccounts related to these reason codes, by using the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
Reason code issue/return The reason code to be used by default for all generated issue documents. You also define the issue reason codes, as well as the related accounts and subaccounts, in the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
Adjustment reason code The reason code to be used by default for all generated adjustments. You define the adjustment reason codes, as well as the related accounts and subaccounts, in the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
Stocktaking reason code The reason code to be used by default for all adjustment documents generated as the result of stocktaking. You define the stocktaking reason code, as well as the related accounts and subaccounts, in the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
### The Stocktaking settings section
Element Description
Use tags If you select this check box, Visma Net will use inventory tags for physical inventories. If you do not select this check box, the system will generate inventory documents with line numbers only.
Last tag number

The number of the last tag generated for physical inventory in the current financial year. Only digits are allowed. When the next physical inventory document ins generated, this value, incremented by 1, will be used as the first tag number in the document. Other tag numbers for the physical inventory document are generated successively by incrementing the previous tag number by 1.

We recommend that you specify a relatively large number (for example 1000 or 10 000) as the Last tag number when you enter it for the first time. This makes the tag number s clearly distinguishable for the quantities specified on the tags. Then the users will not confuse tag number #1001 with a count quantity of 1 as they could with tag number #1 and a quantity of 1.
Turnover periods per year The number of periods per year used to calculate the turnover for stock items. You can enter one of the following numbers here: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or 12.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Weight UoM Here you can select the required unit of measurement.

Related pages

Tasks

 Inventory summary (IN401000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000 page You use this window to view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory summary (IN401000) You use this window to view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The typical user of this window is a warehouse manager or salesperson, who wants to have information about the stock available in your company's warehouse. The information is grouped by location, so that you can see where specific items are located. You can specify criteria to filter the data to be displayed. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Element Description
Slow mover

Select this check box to see stock items that have had minimal customer demand based on the quantity on hand for a longer period of time.

By selecting this check box, the field Not moved since becomes available, where you select a date.
Not moved since

Select a date to show slow moving stock items.

Note

This field only appears if the Slow mover check box is selected.
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view data. You must select an item.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view data.

Select a warehouse to view its data, or leave the field blank to view the data of the item at all warehouses.

Note

This field only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Expand by lot/serial number

A check box that you select to view the data related to each lot or serial number for the selected item on a separate line in the table.

Clear the check box to instead view summary data for the item.

Note

This field only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Location

The location for which you want to view data; select a location, or make no selection to view data for all locations.

Note

This element only appears if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
## The table In this table, you can view the availability data of the stock item, filtered by the settings in the top part. The availability data is calculated based on the availability calculation options selected for the item class on the **General settings** tab of the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window.
Column Description
Item ID The selected stock item. Click the link in the Item ID column to open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window, where you can see more details about the allocation of the item.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the selected stock item is available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Location

The location where the selected stock item is available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Available The quantity of the stock item available at the specific warehouse and location.
Available for shipment The quantity of the stock item available for shipment at the specific warehouse and location, which is calculated based on the quantity on hand with the quantity of shipped items and items being shipped deducted.
Available for Issue The quantity of the stock item available for issue at the specific warehouse and location, which is calculated based on the quantity on hand with the shipped quantity deducted.
Not available The quantity of the stock item on locations for which the Include in qty. available option is not selected.
Sales order prepared

The quantity of the stock item listed on sales orders of the SO, CS, and IN types with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, and Pending approval statuses.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on sales on hold option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window. To view the list of sales orders, open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Sales order booked

The quantity of the stock item booked according to sales orders.

This value is calculated as the total quantity of the stock item included in all sales orders after deduction of the quantities of shipped items and items being shipped.

To view the list of sales orders, open the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Sales orders allocated

The quantity of the stock item currently being shipped according to the unconfirmed shipments. This value also includes the quantities on orders of the SA type with On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, Rejected, and Open statues; it also includes the quantities specifically allocated for sales orders of the SO type with the On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, and Open statuses.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. allocated check box is selected for the item class. If the Multiple warehouses and Sales order to purchase order link features are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the sales orders allocated quantity includes the quantities on transfer orders based on sales orders.
Sales orders shipped

The quantity of the stock item shipped according to the confirmed shipments; also includes the quantities on open orders of the CS and IN types.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on shipments option is selected for the item class.
Back orders

The quantity of the stock item on sales orders with the Back order status. Also includes the unallocated quantities (those which are unavailable at the specified locations) for On Hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open orders of SA order type.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on back orders option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Inventory issues

The quantity of the stock item included in the inventory issue documents that have not yet been released.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. on issues option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Inventory receipts

The quantity of the stock item included in the inventory receipt documents that have not yet been released.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on receipts option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
In transit

The quantity of the stock item included as in-transit quantities in the inventory transfer documents that have not yet been released.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. in transit option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
In transit to sales order

The quantity of the stock item on transfer orders (not yet released) that were generated for sales order allocations.

Note

This column is available only if the Multiple warehouses feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
In assembly demand

The quantity of the stock item included in unreleased kit assembly documents as components or kits, depending on whether the item is a kit or a kit component.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Deduct qty. of kit assembly demand option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Note

This column is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
In assembly supply

The quantity of the stock item listed on unreleased kit assembly documents. This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. of kit assembly supply option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

Note

This column is available only if the Kit assembly feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Purchase prepared

The quantity of the stock item listed on purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses.

This value affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase on hold option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Purchase orders

The quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders. To view the purchase orders, open the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This value affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase orders option is selected for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Purchase order receipts

The quantity of the stock item included in the purchase receipts that have not yet been released. To view the purchase receipts, open the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

This quantity affects the available quantity only if the Include qty. on purchase order receipts option is set for the item class.
Expired

The quantity of the stock item that has reached its expiration date.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
On hand The quantity of the stock item available on hand at the specified warehouse and location.
Sales order to purchase The quantity of the stock item included in unreleased sales orders requiring creating purchase orders.
Purchase for sales order

The quantity of the stock item listed on open purchase orders created for sales orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is available only if the Sales order to purchase order link feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Purchase for sales order (prepared)

The quantity of the stock item listed on purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses created for back orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is available only if the Sales order to purchase order link feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Purchase for sales order receipts

The quantity of the stock item listed on purchase receipts for orders that were created for sales orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is available only if the Sales order to purchase order link feature is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Sales order to drop-ship

The quantity of the stock item included in open purchase orders created for drop-ship orders.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Drop-ship for sales order

The quantity of the stock item listed on open drop-ship orders. This value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Drop-ship for sales order, prepared

The quantity of the stock item listed on drop-ship sales orders with a status of On hold or Pending approval; this value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Drop-ship for sales order, receipts

The quantity of the stock item listed on receipts for drop-ship sales orders; this value is not included in the quantity available.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) is enabled.
Base unit The unit of measure (UoM) selected as the base unit for the stock item in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Estimated unit cost The estimated unit cost of the selected stock item.
Estimated total cost The estimated total cost of the stock item available at the specified warehouse and location.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Inventory transactions by account (IN403000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transactions-by-account-in403000 page In this window, you can view detailed information about a selected account within a selected period, including the account balance and all related transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transactions by account (IN403000) In this window, you can view detailed information about a selected account within a selected period, including the account balance and all related transactions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window, from which you can view the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window, from which you can view information about how the selected stock item is currently distributed among warehouses and locations.
Element Description
Inventory account The inventory account for which you want to view the posted inventory transactions.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view the posted inventory transactions.
Period The financial period for which you want to view the posted inventory transactions.
By financial period A check box that you select to view the inventory transactions grouped by financial period.
Item ID The stock item for which data will be displayed.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which data will be displayed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Element Description
Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Summary by day A check box that you select to display only summary values for each day in the table. Clear this check box to display detailed information for each day within the selected period.
Period start date

Read only.

This value displays the start date of the selected financial period.
Period end date

Read only.

This value displays the end date of the selected financial period.
## The table
Column Description
Account The account used to post the inventory transaction.
Subaccount The subaccount used to post the inventory transaction.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type, which can be a transaction type related to an inventory operation, or a transaction type, used in another system workspace if the account was shared by both that workspace and the Inventory workspace.

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment
  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Item ID The stock item used in this inventory transaction.
Cost sub item

The sub item of the stock item if item cost is split by sub item segment values.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Stocky sub items functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location (if costed)

The location where the transaction was performed.

Note

You can only select locations for which the Cost separately check box on the Locations table tab in the Warehouses (IN204000) window is selected.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Cost adjustment A read-only check box which (if selected) indicates that cost adjustment was generated for the transaction.
Date The transaction date.
Beginning balance The account beginning balance (before the transaction).
Debit The debit amount related to the transaction.
Credit The credit amount related to the transaction.
Ending balance The account’s ending balance (after the transaction).
Period The financial period to which the transaction was posted.
Transaction period The financial period when the transaction was created.
Qty. The quantity of the stock item involved in the transaction.
Unit cost The unit cost of the stock item used in this transaction.
Description The transaction description.
Sales order type The type of order for items sold or to be sold.
Sales order no. The number of the sales order for items sold or to be sold.
Purchase order receipt no. The number of the purchase receipt for items purchased.

Related pages

Tasks

 Inventory transaction details (IN404000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-details-in404000 page You can use this window to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within a selected financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transaction details (IN404000) You can use this window to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within a selected financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within a selected financial period. You can set up criteria to display only specific data. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window so you can view information about the allocation of the selected stock item at the specific warehouse.
Element Description
Period (Required) The financial period for which you want to view inventory transactions.
By financial period (without running values) A check box that you select to display the inventory transactions by financial period, and to not display the running values ( Beginning quantity, Ending quantity, Beginning balance, and Ending balance ) in the table. If the check box is cleared, the inventory transactions will be selected by the date range in the specified financial period and the running values will be displayed.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view inventory transactions.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location for which you want to view inventory transactions.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view inventory transactions.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number for which you want to view inventory transactions. A value can be selected only for stock items with lot or serial numbers.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Sub item

The subitem of the stock item for which you want to view inventory transactions.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Stock sub items functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Element Description
Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Summary by day A check box that you select to view only summary values for each day in the specified period. Clear this check box to display detailed information for each day within the specified period.
Include unreleased (without costs)

A check box that you select to view unreleased transactions along with posted transactions.

All types of transactions will be displayed without costs.
Period start date

Read only.

This value shows the start date of the selected financial period.
Period end date

Read only.

This value shows the end date of the selected financial period.
## The table This table displays the details of inventory transactions that meet the criteria you have specified in the **top part**. Values for columns marked with **[*]** are calculated based on the estimated per-unit cost, which depends on the valuation method selected for the stock item. For details about valuation methods and per-unit costs, see: [About the cost of inventory](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-the-cost-of-inventory/) and [About item costs and valuation methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-item-costs-and-valuation-methods/).
Column Description
Date The date when the inventory transaction was performed.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type. For transactions originating in the Inventory workspace, the types can be:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment

For transactions originating in another workspace, the types can be:

  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Stock sub items functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number involved in the inventory transaction.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Period The financial period to which the transaction was posted.
Transaction period The financial period in which the transaction was created.
Released This check box (if selected) indicates that the transaction was released.
Beginning qty The quantity of the stock item in the beginning of the selected period.
Qty. in The quantity of the stock item accepted at the warehouse within the selected period.
Qty. out The quantity of the stock item removed from the warehouse within the selected period.
Ending qty. The quantity of the stock item at the end of the selected period.
Beginning balance [*] The inventory balance in the beginning of the selected period.
Cost in [*] The cost of the stock items accepted at the warehouse within the selected period.
Cost out [*] The cost of the stock items removed from the warehouse within the selected period.
Ending balance [*] The inventory balance at the end of the selected period.
Unit cost in/out [*] The cost of the unit of the item of inventory involved in the inventory transactions within the selected period.
Sales order type The type of the sales order involved.
Sales order no. The reference number of the sales order involved.
Purchase order receipt no. The reference number of the purchase order involved.
Doc. type The type of the documents within the selected period.
Grid line no. The number of the grid line.
Item ID The ID of the selected stock item.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Inventory transaction history (IN405000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000 page You use this inquiry window to view detailed information about inventory transactions posted within a selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transaction history (IN405000) You use this inquiry window to view detailed information about inventory transactions posted within a selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this inquiry window to view detailed information about inventory transactions posted within a selected period. You can set up criteria to view only particular data. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
Summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window to display information about how the selected stock item is allocated at the specified warehouse.
Element Description
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view transaction information.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location for which you want to view transaction information.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number for which you want to view inventory transactions (if the stock item has lot or serial numbers).

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Start date The start date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
End date The end date of the date range for the inventory transactions to be displayed.
Summary by day A check box that you select to display only the summary information for each day in the table. Clear this check box to display detailed information for each day within the selected period.
Include unreleased A check box that you select to display the non-released transactions along with released transactions in the table.
Include landed cost in unit cost A check box that you select to include the landed cost in unit cost.
## The table In this area, you can view the details of the transactions that meet the criteria you have specified in the **top part**.
Column Description
Date The transaction date.
Trans. type

The inventory transaction type. For transactions originating in the Inventory workspace, the types can be:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Transfer
  • Adjustment

For transactions originating in another workspace, the types can be:

  • Invoice
  • Credit note
  • Return
Ref. no. The reference number of the transaction.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location where the inventory transaction was performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number involved in the inventory transaction.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Released A check box that indicates (if selected) that the transaction has been released.
Beginning qty. The quantity of the selected stock item available at this warehouse before the inventory transaction was made.
Qty. in The quantity of the selected stock item that were received at this warehouse as the result of the inventory transaction.
Qty. out The quantity of the selected stock item that were issued from this warehouse as the result of the inventory transaction.
Ending qty. The quantity of the selected stock item that were available at this warehouse after the inventory transaction was made.
Unit cost The unit of measure used for the stock item.
Sales order type The type of the sales order involved.
Sales order no. The reference number of the sales order.
Purchase order receipt no. The reference number of the purchase order.
Created by The person who created the inventory transaction.
Doc. type The type of the document
Grid line no. The number of the grid line.
Item ID The stock item of the inventory transaction.
Period The financial period to which the transaction was posted.
Transaction period The financial period when the transaction was created.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Inventory transaction summary (IN406000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000 page Use this window to check the inventory balance for the selected financial period and to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within this period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory transaction summary (IN406000) Use this window to check the inventory balance for the selected financial period and to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within this period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to check the inventory balance for the selected financial period and to view summary information about inventory transactions posted within this period. You can use selection criteria to display only particular data. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your information needs.
Button Description
View
Inventory transaction details
Navigates to the Inventory transaction details (IN404000) window to display detailed transaction data for the selected stock item.
Summary
Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window to display the availability data of the stock item.
Allocation details
Navigates to the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window to display information about the allocation of the selected stock item at the specific warehouse.
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to view data. This is a required element.
By financial period A check box that you select to group the inventory transactions in the table by financial period.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to view data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location for which you want to view data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses and Multiple warehouse locations functionalities in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view data.
Show items without movement A check box that you select to display information on stock items for which no inventory transactions were made within the selected period.
Use these check boxes to select the detail level of the data displayed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse details

If you select this check box, the system displays the warehouse data in a single row of the table shown below.

Clear this check box to show the summary information for all warehouses.
Location details

If you select this check box, the system displays the location data in a single row of the table shown below.

Clear this check box to show the summary data for all locations.
## The table This table displays the transaction summary data by using the criteria you have specified in the top part. Your selections in the check boxes in the top part affect whether or not some of these columns appear.
Column Description
Period The financial period of the transaction summary data.
Item ID The stock item for which the transaction summary data is displayed.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the transaction summary data is displayed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Warehouse details check box is selected, and if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location for which the transaction summary data is displayed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Location details check box is selected, and if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Beginning qty. The beginning quantity of the stock item (at the start of the selected period).
Issued The issued quantity of the stock item for the selected period.
Received The received quantity of the stock item for the selected period.
Sales The quantity of the stock item in sales operations for the selected period.
Credit notes The quantity of the stock item on credit note documents for the selected period.
Drop-ship sales

The quantity of the stock item included in the drop ship orders within the selected period.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Drop-shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Transfer in The quantity of the stock item transferred into the warehouse within the selected period.
Transfer out The quantity of the stock item transferred out of the warehouse within the selected period.
Adjusted The quantity of the stock item on adjustment documents created within the selected period.
Ending qty. The quantity of the stock item at the end of the selected period.
Description The description of the item.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Issues (IN302000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000 page By using this window, you can create, view, and edit issue documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Issues (IN302000) By using this window, you can create, view, and edit issue documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can save issues with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status and release them. The way issues are processed depends on certain settings in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. The system validates totals on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected, and on an issue release, the transactions will be posted to the General ledger if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected. For more information about inventory issues, see [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates the release of the issue, which changes the status of the issue to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports:
## The top part In this area, you can select an existing issue by its reference number or provide summary information about a new issue.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the issue, which the system automatically assigns in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to issues in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The current status of the issue document. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft and can be edited manually or deleted. A document with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
Means that the document transactions are balanced. This document can be modified, deleted, or released.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. Documents with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold A check box that, if selected, indicates that the issue document has the On hold status. You can clear the check box to save it with the Balanced status.
Date The date when the issue document was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which transactions from the document should be posted.
External ref. The external reference number of the inventory issue document (for example, the supplier’s reference code).
Description A brief description of the inventory issue or its transactions.
Total qty. The total quantity of stock items, which the system calculates automatically, for the document.
Control qty. The manually entered quantity of stock items. Control qty. is available only if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the issue cannot be saved.
Total amount The total amount, calculated as a sum of amounts for all inventory issue operations included in this issue document.
Control amount The manually entered summary amount for all specified stock items. Control amount is available only if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. If the Control amount and Total a mount values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the issue cannot be saved.
## The Transaction details tab This tab has a table with the transactions included in the issue document.
Button Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box, from which you can define locations, lot or serial numbers, quantities, and expiration dates for the stock item received.
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add an item to the receipt.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up so that you can view item availability data.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the inventory issue operation.
Trans. type

The type of inventory issue transaction. Select one of the following types:

Issue
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is issued from the warehouse. The quantity of issued items will be subtracted from the quantity of items available at the warehouse.
Return
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item was returned to the warehouse. The quantity of returned items will be added to the quantity of items available at the warehouse.
Invoice
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is issued based on an invoice; the system generates this type of transaction on release of appropriate documents. The quantity of items in this transaction will be subtracted from the quantity of the items available at the warehouse. The batch of relevant journal entries will be generated and posted to the General ledger workspace.
Debit note
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is issued from the warehouse based on a debit note; the system also generates this type of transaction on release of appropriate documents. The quantity of the item in this transaction will be deducted from the quantity of the item available at the warehouse. The batch of relevant journal entries will be generated and posted to the General ledger.
Credit note
Indicates that the specified quantity of the stock item is received at the warehouse based on a credit note; this type of transaction is also generated by the system on release of appropriate documents. The quantity of the item in this transaction will be added to the quantity of inventory available at the warehouse. The batch of relevant journal entries will be generated and posted to the General ledger workspace.
Item ID The item ID of the stock item. Stock items are maintained by using the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse from which the item is issued.
Location (This column appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse location from which the item is issued.
Quantity The quantity of the specified item (in the units of measure indicated below).
UoM The unit of measure used for the stock item.
Unit price The price of the specified unit of this stock item.
Manual amount The extended price of the specified stock item, calculated automatically as the unit price multiplied by the quantity of the stock item involved in the inventory issue operation. The value can be edited manually later, for example, to round up or down the value.
Unit cost The cost of the specified unit of this stock item.
Cost The extended cost of the specified stock item. An extended cost is calculated automatically as the unit cost multiplied by the quantity of units involved in this transaction. The value can be edited manually later, for example, to round up the number.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the stock item. To specify the lot or serial numbers of the particular units, click Allocations in the table toolbar. If multiple serial or lot numbers were specified, the column displays <SPLIT>. This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Expiration date The expiration date of the specified stock item. This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Reason code The reason code for the inventory transaction.
Project The project with which this transaction is associated, or the code indicating that this transaction is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window. This column appears if the Projects module has been enabled and activated.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this transaction is associated. This column appears if the Projects module has been enabled and activated.
Description A brief description of the transaction.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can split an issue transaction into several records when units of the stock item are picked from different locations or have different lot, or serial numbers. Also, you can assign lot or serial numbers to stock items if such numbers are to be assigned on issue. The **Allocations** dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no location specified or lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from The lot or serial number to be used as a start number. This field appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Generate (button) A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers. (This button appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Column Description
Location (This column appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse.
Lot/serial no. (This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same sub item code and the same lot number. It is 1 for items with serial numbers.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date (This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.
Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for various warehouses and warehouse locations (if the **Warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in your system) and to add the required quantity of the item to the document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Inventory** field.
Element Description
Item The ID of a particular item whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item’s item ID to find the it.
Barcode The bar code of the item to be listed. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.
Item class ID The item class of the items whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.
Warehouse (This field is available for selection only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse where the item are stocked. Leave the field blank to view items from all warehouses.
Location (This field appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in your system.) The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.
Show available items only A check box that you select if only items whose available quantities are greater than zero should be listed in the table.
Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of sales units of the stock item that you want to add to the document.
Warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse where the items are stocked.
Location (This column appears only if the Warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse.
Item ID The stock item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID.
Base unit The unit of measure used as a base unit for the stock item.
Qty. available The available quantity of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number and the branch of the batch generated upon release of the issue.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the issue. Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the details of the transactions.
Branch The branch that issues the products.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Item classes (IN201000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000 section In this window, you can define item classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item classes (IN201000) In this window, you can define item classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar properties and to provide default settings for new items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can browse through the existing item classes and modify their settings, add new classes, and delete unused (unpopulated) classes from the system. ## What to do from this window ## The table toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can use to invoke actions:

View restriction groups
Navigates to the Restriction groups by item class (IN103010) window so you can view the restriction group members.
Apply to children
Applies the settings of the currently selected item class to all its child item classes.
Change ID
Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, in which you can enter a new identifier (ID) for the item class.
Apply restriction settings to all items
Updates the security settings for all items of the class if the default restriction groups of the class have been reassigned.
## The top part In this area, you can enter the identifier and description for a new item class, or select an existing class for viewing or modification.
Element Description
Class ID The unique identifier of the item class.
Description

A description of the item class.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
## The General information tab This tab holds the basic settings of the item class, including the unit conversion rules for it. ### The General information section
Element Description
Stock item If you select this check box, this class only includes stock items.
Allow negative quantity

If you select this check box, negative quantities for items of this class are allowed.

Note

This setting should be avoided in your day-to day operations, as it will lead to differences between the physical values and the system values. This makes it difficult to do an inventory reconciliation. The reason why this setting exists is because there may be a need to allow negative quantities in given situations, where the warehouse needs to be corrected.
Webhook notification If you select this check box, Webhook notifications are enabled for the item class.
Item type

The item type that will be selected by default for new items of this item class.

For stock items, you can select one of the following options:

  • Finished good
  • Component part
  • Subassembly

For non-stock items, you can select one of the following options:

Non-stock item
A general type of non-stock item
Labour
A type of non-stock item to be used for labour hour rates
Service
A type of non-stock item to be used for service fees
Charge
A type of non-stock items that are used for charge rates
Expense
A type of non-stock items that are added to documents to designate specific expenses

The types of non-stock items are used mostly for informational purposes, except for the Labour; the items of this type appear on the lists filtered by Labour item type for selection in specific UI elements in windows related to project accounting, organisation structure, and employee time and expenses.
Valuation method

The valuation method to be assigned by default to all stock items of the class.

You can select one of the following options:

  • Standard
  • Average
  • FIFO
  • Specific
Note

The option Specific only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Posting class

The posting class selected for the item class.

Use the Posting classes (IN206000) window to define posting classes and their settings.
Lot/serial class

The lot/serial class to be assigned by default to new items of this item class.

Use the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window to define lot/serial classes and their settings.

Note

This element only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Price class

The price class to be assigned by default to new items of this item class.

Use the Item price classes (IN209000) window to define lot/serial classes and their settings.
Default warehouse

The warehouse that will be used by default for receiving and issuing the items of this item class.

Note

This element only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If not, the MAIN warehouse is used as the default warehouse.
### The VAT settings section
Element Description
VAT category

The VAT code to be assigned by default to new items of this item class.

VAT categories are defined by using the VAT categories (TX205500) window.
Sales VAT category The VAT category for sales.
Export VAT category The VAT category for export sales.
Sales EU VAT category The VAT category for sales within the EU.
Exempt VAT sales VAT category The VAT category for VAT-exempt sales.
Expense VAT category The VAT category for purchases.
Import VAT category The VAT category for import purchases.
Expense EU VAT category The VAT category for import purchases within the EU.
Exempt VAT expense VAT category The VAT category for VAT-exempt purchases.
### The Availability calculation window By using the elements in this pop-up window that opens when you click ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) in the **Availability calculation rule** field, you set the rules for calculating the availability of stock items that belong to the item class.
Element Description
Availability calculation rule The unique ID of the availability calculation rule. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the availability calculation rule.
Deduct qty. on open issues

If you select this check box, the system deducts (for items of the class) the quantities of issued items from the available quantities of these items.

The documents in the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.
Deduct qty. on sales on hold

If you select this check box, the system will deduct the quantities of the item on sales orders (of the SO, IN, and CS types) with the On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, and Rejected statuses from the available quantity.

The quantity of each item on sales orders with these statuses is shown in the Sales order prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. on sales orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items on sales orders with the Open status from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders booked field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. on shipments

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of shipped items from the available quantities of these items.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders shipped field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. allocated

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items being prepared for shipping (on unconfirmed shipments) and the quantities that were specifically allocated for sales orders (of the SA and SO types) from the available quantities of these stock items. The orders with the On hold, Credit hold, Rejected, Pending approval, and Open statuses are used for this calculation.

The item’s quantity on these sales orders is shown in the Sales orders allocated field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Deduct qty. of kit assembly demand

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated for kit assembly from the available quantities of these items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Deduct qty. on back orders

If you select this check box, the system will deduct (for items of the class) the quantities of items allocated to sales orders with the Back order status from the available quantity of these items.

The quantities on these sales orders are shown in the Back orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Include qty. on receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on inventory receipts (with On hold and Balanced statuses) in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. in transit If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items in transit in the available quantities of these stock items. The documents with the On hold and Balanced statuses are used for availability calculation.
Include qty. on purchase order receipts If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on unreleased purchase receipts in the available quantities of these items.
Include qty. on purchase on hold

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on purchase orders (with the statuses of On hold and Pending approval ) in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the On hold and Pending approval statuses is shown in the Purchase prepared field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Include qty. on purchase orders

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on open purchase orders in the available quantities of these items.

The item quantity in the purchase orders with the Open status is shown in the Purchase orders field in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
Include qty. of kit assembly supply

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items that are kits and listed in the kit assembly documents in the available quantities of these items.

Note

This check box is available only if the Kit assembly functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Include qty. on returns

If you select this check box, the system will include (for items of the class) the quantities of items on return orders and on shipments with the Receipt operation selected (in the Shipments (SO302000) window) in the available quantities of these items. In particular, quantities are affected as follows:

  • The quantities on return orders with the On hold status are deducted from the Sales order prepared quantities.
  • The quantities on return orders with the Open status are deducted from the Sales orders booked quantities.
  • The quantities on unconfirmed shipments with the Receipt operation are deducted from the Sales orders allocated quantities.
  • The quantities on confirmed shipments are deducted from the Sales orders shipped quantities.

Thus, the quantities on shipments with the Receipt operation decrease the Total deduction quantities in the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window.
### The Unit of measurement section In this section, you specify a unit of measure (UoM) to be used as default base UoM for items of the item class. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled, you can specify the UoMs to be used as default sales and purchase units for items of the class. You can also define conversion rules for those units. For more details, see: [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/)
Element Description
Base unit

The UoM to be used as the default base unit for items of the class.

Select the base unit from the list of UoMs defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Sales unit

The UoM to be used as the default sales unit for items of the class.

Select this unit from the list of globally defined UoMs for which conversion factors to the chosen base unit are specified in the Units of measure (CS203100) window, or type the unit.

Press Enter, and a new row will be appended to the unit conversion table for the class. In this row, specify a conversion rule between the UoM selected as the sales unit and the UoM selected as the base unit.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Purchase unit

The UoM to be used as the default purchase unit for items of the class.

Select the unit from the list of globally defined UoMs for which conversion factors to the chosen base unit are specified in the Units of measure (CS203100) window, or type the unit.

Press Enter, and a new row will be appended to the unit conversion table for the class. In this row, specify a conversion rule between the UoM selected as the purchase unit and the UoM selected as the base unit.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Undership threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) for the system to mark the order as shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
Overship threshold (%) The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
### The Unit conversion table In the unit conversion table, you can define conversion rules between the UoMs set as the default purchase and sales units and the UoM set as the default base UoM for items of the class. You also can specify how other units of measure used for items of the class can be converted to the default base unit. > [!NOTE] > This conversion table is only displayed if the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Column Description
From unit The UoM to be converted to the base unit.
Multiply/divide

The operation to be performed for the unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform the appropriate conversion from the unit specified in the From unit column to the unit specified in the To unit column.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for conversion with the specified operation.
To unit The target unit for the unit conversion, which is the UoM selected as the base unit.
### The Price management section This section holds the price management settings for stock items of the class.
Element Description
Price work group The default work group responsible for pricing items of the class.
Price manager The default manager responsible for pricing items of the class.
Min. mark-up (%) The default minimum mark-up percentage required for items of the class.
Mark-up (%)

The default mark-up percentage for items of the class.

The mark-up is the difference between the price of the item and its cost, with respect to the cost.
## The Replenishment settings tab On this tab, you can create a list (in a tabular format) of replenishment classes that apply by default to stock items of the item class. Also, for each replenishment class, you can select a demand forecasting model and parameters for this model to be used in automatic replenishment.
Element Description
Demand calculation

The demand calculation option defines how the system calculates the item quantity for replenishment. You can select one of the following options:

Item class settings
Demand will be calculated based on the availability calculation rule for this item class as specified on the General information tab of this window.
Hard demand only
Demand will be calculated as (Qty. sales order allocated) + (Qty. sales order back ordered) + (Qty. sales order on shipments).
Column Description
Replenishment class ID The replenishment class that applies to items of this item class.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings to be used with the replenishment class, by its ID.
Source

The source of replenishment used for the item class with this replenishment class. One of the following options can be selected:

  • None No replenishment is required.

  • Purchase The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased.

  • Manufacturing The items for the stock replenishment will be manufactured. (Not implemented in the current version.)

  • Transfer The items will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Drop shipment The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased through drop shipment purchase orders, and the purchased goods will not be received at your company’s warehouse.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Purchase to order The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased only when a customer’s order has been received.
Method

The method of replenishment to be used for the class with this replenishment class. You can select one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed.
Minimum/maximum
The system will compute the replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and minimum quantities with the quantity on supply deducted. (The quantity on supply is the quantity of items on unreleased purchase orders, on purchase receipts, and in transit.)
Fixed reorder quantity
The system will initiate replenishment once the minimum stock level is reached, and the quantity on replenishment request will be equal to the EOQ (economical order quantity) value specified for the selected supplier.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse to serve as the source of replenishment if the source of replenishment is Transfer, Purchase to order, Drop shipment.
Stock transfer lead time The number of days required for transferring goods from the source warehouse.
Transfer ERQ The economic reasonable quantity (ERQ) for the item transfer. This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total transfer costs.
Demand forecast model

The model to be used for calculating the revised replenishment parameters for this replenishment class when applied to items of the item class. The following options are available:

None
None of the models will be used; replenishment parameters can be changed only manually.
Moving average
The demand forecast model is based on calculating average sales, based on historical data and seasonality settings.
Forecast period type

The type of time period to be used for selecting historical data for demand forecast model. The following options are available:

  • Quarter
  • Month
  • Week
  • Day
Periods to analyse The number of specified time periods for selecting historical data for the demand forecast model.
Launch date The date when the current replenishment settings become effective for replenishment of items of the class.
Termination date The date when the current replenishment settings of the replenishment class expire.
Service level (%)

The service level assigned to the item class.

Note

The default value is 84.0%, which results in zero level of safety stock.

For details on usage of the service level parameter, see: About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast
## The Attributes tab This tab has a table with the attributes to be used for items of the item class and attribute properties, including order on the list of class attributes. To create a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window.
Column Description
Attribute ID The identifier of the attribute.
Description A read-only column that displays the detailed description of the attribute.
Sort order

A number that represents the order of the attribute in the list of class attributes.

Type an integer directly in the column. The lower the integer, the higher the attribute will be in the list of class attributes.
Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for items of the class.
Control type

Read-only. This column displays the type of control (element) for the attribute:

  • Text
  • Combo
  • Check box
  • Date time

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Item warehouse details (IN204500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500 page This window is available only if the Warehouses functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item warehouse details (IN204500) This window is available only if the Warehouses functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, for each stock item, you can provide default storage settings, cost and price information, replenishment settings, and units of measure that are specific to the warehouses where the item is stored. For more details about stock items, see: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/). For more information about warehouses, see: [About warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/). ## The top part In this area, you can select a stock item and a particular warehouse and view the details about the stock of the item at this warehouse.
Element Description
Item ID The stock item, which may have specific properties in different warehouses. Select the item from this list.
Warehouse The specific warehouse where the selected stock item is stocked in this case.
Status

The status of the stock item at this warehouse. Select one of the available options:

Active
The stock item is available for inventory operations at this warehouse.
Inactive
The stock item is not available for inventory operations at this warehouse.
Product work group The product work group defined for the stock item at this warehouse.
Product manager The product manager assigned to this stock item at this warehouse.
## The General settings tab On this tab, you can define specific settings for the stock item when it is stocked at this warehouse, including the storage settings, the sales and purchase units specific for the item at this warehouse, the inventory account (and subaccount) to be used to post inventory transactions with the item originating in this warehouse, and the stocktaking parameters specific for the warehouse. ### The Storage defaults section Here you can specify the default issue and receipt locations for the selected stock item at the warehouse. > [!NOTE] > This section is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouse locations** option in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is selected. > [!NOTE] > If the functionality is not enabled, the **MAIN** location is automatically assigned as the default issue and default receiving locations.
Element Description
Default issue from The default location to issue the stock items from this warehouse.
Default receipt to The default location to receive the stock items at this warehouse.
### The Unit of measure section By using the elements in the this section, you can set the unit conversion rules for the units of measure (UoMs) used for the stock item at this warehouse. The base unit is not warehouse-specific; it is selected for the item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for use in all warehouses, but sales and purchase units can be warehouse-specific. Conversion rules are specified with respect to the base unit. For more information, see: [About units of measure and conversions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-measure-and-conversions/). > [!NOTE] > If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is disabled, only the **Base unit** field is available (the **Sales unit** field, **Purchase unit** field, and the table are not displayed).
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for the non-stock item.
Sales unit

The UoM used as the sales unit for the non-stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Purchase unit

The UoM used as the purchase unit for the non-stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
From unit The unit of measure to be converted to the base unit.
Multiply / divide

The operation to be performed for the unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform the appropriate conversion from the specified UoM to the base unit.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for conversion with the specified operation.
To unit The target unit for the unit conversion, which is the UoM chosen as the base unit for the selected item.
### The General ledger accounts section Here you can specify the general ledger accounts to which the inventory transactions related to the specific stock item at the particular warehouse should be posted.
Element Description
Override inventory account/sub. A check box you select to specify an inventory account and subaccount other than the default inventory account and subaccount for the warehouse.
Inventory account The asset account to be used to post inventory transactions related to this stock item at this warehouse.
Inventory sub. The subaccount to be used to post inventory transactions related to this stock item at this warehouse.
### The Stocktaking section The elements in this section hold the stocktaking settings for the particular stock item at the specific warehouse.
Element Description
ABC code override This check box indicates (if selected) that the ABC code assigned for the selected stock item can be overridden for this warehouse.
ABC code The ABC code of the selected item at the selected warehouse.
Fixed ABC code This check box indicates (if selected) that the ABC code is fixed for the selected stock item at the warehouse.
Movement class override This check box indicates (if selected) that the movement class assigned for the selected stock item can be overridden for this warehouse.
Movement class The movement class for the selected stock item at the specific warehouse.
Fixed movement class This check box indicates (if selected) that the movement class is fixed for the chosen stock item at the specific warehouse.
## The Replenishment info tab Use this tab to specify the replenishment settings for the item at this warehouse. By default, the settings that were specified in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window are displayed, but you can override most of them. ### The Replenishment settings section
Element Description
Replenishment class The replenishment class to be used for this item at this warehouse.
Override replenishment settings A check box you select if you want to override the replenishment settings for this item at this warehouse defined by the selected replenishment class.
Seasonality

The set of seasonality settings (by its ID) to be used with the replenishment class, which the system uses to adjust the replenishment quantities to low and high seasons.

To define the seasonality settings, use the Replenishment seasonality (IN206600) window.
Replenishment source

The replenishment source to be used for this stock item in this warehouse. By default, it is the replenishment source associated with the item. You can select one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed.
Purchase
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be purchased.
Manufacturing
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be manufactured.
Transfer
The requested quantity of the item will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.
Drop shipment
The option to be used as a default option for the item if this item is usually sold from this warehouse by using drop ship orders.
Purchase to order
The item will be purchased only when a customer order exists. The purchased item will not be received at any warehouse; the purchased quantity will be instead sent to the customer.
Replenishment method

The replenishment method to be used for this stock item for the selected replenishment source in this warehouse.

By default, it is the replenishment method associated with the item. The method can be one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed for the stock item.
Minimum/maximum
The system will compute the replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and minimum quantities with the quantity on supply deducted. The quantity on supply is the quantity of the item on unreleased purchase orders, purchase receipts, and quantities in transit.
Fixed reorder quantity
The system will initiate replenishment for the item once the minimum stock level is reached and the quantity on replenishment request is equal to the economical order quantity (EOQ) value specified for the chosen supplier.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse to be used as the source of replenishment.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days that the stock item can be stored.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the maximum shelf life for this stock item at this warehouse.
Launch date The date starting the date range when the replenishment settings apply to the stock item as initially defined on Item classes window.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the launch date for this stock item in this warehouse.
Termination date The date ending the date range during which the replenishment settings apply to the stock item.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the termination date for this stock item at this warehouse.
Service level (%) The service level assigned to the item, affects the safety stock. For details, see: About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the service level assigned to this stock item at this warehouse.
### The Replenishment parameters section
Element Description
Safety stock The quantity of the stock item that is maintained in the warehouse to prevent possible stockouts during the time period between initiation of replenishment and receiving of the requested supply.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the safety stock for this stock item in this warehouse.
Reorder point

The stock level that, upon its reach, should prompt the system to replenish the stock of the item at this warehouse.

Minimum quantities should be set equal to anticipated demand during the lead time plus a safety stock.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the reorder point for this stock item in this warehouse.
Max. qty.

The maximum stock level for the replenishment.

When the quantity of the item falls below the Reorder point value, the order should be issued to replenish the stock up to the Max. quantity value.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the maximum quantity for this stock item in this warehouse.
Economic transfer quantity

The economic reasonable quantity (ERQ) for the item transfer.

This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total transfer costs.
Override If you select this check box, the system overrides the transfer ERQ for this stock item in this warehouse.
### The Demand forecast result section
Element Description
Daily demand forecast The forecasted average daily demand for this item at this warehouse.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation calculated for average daily demand for this item in this warehouse.
Lead time average The average lead time calculated based on historical data.
Lead time STDEV The standard deviation calculated for average lead time.
Safety stock suggested The safety stock of the item at this warehouse calculated based on the forecast and the specified service level.
Reorder point suggested The quantity to be used as the reorder point for stock item that is based on the forecast.
Last forecast date The date when the forecast was done last.
### The Preferred parameters section
Element Description
Override preferred supplier If you select this check box, the system overrides the preferred supplier for this item at this warehouse.
Preferred supplier The supplier from which the item will be purchased for stock replenishment in this warehouse. By default, the preferred supplier specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window appears here.
Preferred location

The supplier location from which the item will be purchased for stock replenishment in this warehouse.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Supplier lead time (days)

Read only.

This field shows the lead time for the selected supplier location. This lead time is defined in the Shipping instructions section on the General information tab of the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.
Shipment lead time (days)

The additional lead time for the selected item, which represents the additional time required by the supplier to produce, assemble, and dispatch the item.

This value is added to the supplier Lead time value, defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window, to calculate the resulting lead time required to deliver the purchased item from the supplier’s location to your company’s warehouse.
Min. order freq. (days) The minimum purchase frequency for the item required when purchasing from this supplier.
Min. order qty. The minimum order quantity required for the item when purchasing from this supplier.
Max. order qty. The maximum order quantity of the item required when purchasing from this supplier.
Lot size The lot size for the item when purchased from this supplier.
EOQ

The economic order quantity (EOQ) when the item is purchased from this supplier.

This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total inventory holding costs and ordering costs.
## The Price/cost information tab On this tab, you can view the standard cost and cost statistics for the selected stock item at the specified warehouse. You can also view the price management information for this stock item. ### The Standard cost section By using these elements, you can view the standard cost information related to the stock item.
Element Description
Override standard cost

This check box indicates (if selected) that the standard cost can be overridden.

Select this option to manually set the standard cost for the stock item at the warehouse.
Last cost The last cost used for the stock item.
Current cost

Read only.

This field displays the current cost of the stock item.
Effective date

Read only.

This field displays the effective date for the current cost value of the stock item.
Pending cost

The pending cost value for the stock item, which becomes effective on the Pending cost date.

This value can be set only if the Standard cost override check box is selected.
Pending cost date

The date when the pending cost value of the stock item will become effective.

This value can be set only if the Standard cost override check box is selected.
### The Price management section These settings provide information about the price work group and price manager responsible for the item price, as well as about the recommended price and standard costs of the stock item at this warehouse.
Element Description
Work group

The work group responsible for the product pricing of the item at this warehouse.

Select the group from the list of the groups that were defined in the Company tree (EP204060) window.
Price manager

The manager responsible for the product pricing of the item at this warehouse.

Select a company employee from the list of employees defined in the Employees (EP203000) window.

If you have selected a specific work group as the Price work group, the list of employees contains only the members of the selected work group.
Subject to commission This check box indicates (if selected) that commissions should be paid on sale of this stock item at this warehouse.
Override mark-up (%)

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the mark-up value can be overridden for this item in this warehouse.

Select this option to set the mark-up value for the stock item in this warehouse in the Mark-up (%) field.
Mark-up (%)

The mark-up percentage to be used for this item stored in this warehouse.

The mark-up is a percentage of cost added to the cost to get the selling price.
Override price This check box indicates (if selected) that the manufacturer’s suggested price for the item can be overridden for this warehouse.
List price

The manufacturer’s suggested price of the stock item.

This is the retail price suggested for stock item by its manufacturer.
### The Cost statistics section Here you can view the cost statistics data for the item at this warehouse.
Element Description
Last cost

Read only.

This field shows the last cost defined for the stock item.
Average cost

Read only.

This field shows the average cost value defined for the stock item.
Min. cost

Read only.

This field shows the minimum cost value defined for the stock item.
Max. cost

Read only.

This field shows the maximum cost value defined for the stock item.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Item price classes (IN209000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000 page This window displays a list of the item price classes available in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item price classes (IN209000) This window displays a list of the item price classes available in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use the window to add new classes or delete unused (unpopulated) classes. Item price classes are used to group stock items for base and sales price calculation. A price class may include items of one or more item classes. ## The table This area displays the item price classes defined in the system. You can add new price classes and delete any class to which no item has been assigned.
Column Description
Price class ID The alphanumeric ID of the price class. You can use 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description

A brief description of the price class.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Related pages

Windows

 Item sales categories (IN204060) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060 page In this window, you can create, delete, and manage the sales categories. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Item sales categories (IN204060) In this window, you can create, delete, and manage the sales categories. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also view and update the list of stock items included in the sales categories. ## The Categories pane In this pane, the existing categories are represented as nodes. You click a node icon to the left of any category to expand the node and view the hierarchical structure of the category. Some categories have a one-level list of categories, while other workspaces have several levels. You click a category to view the items included in the category in the **Category members** table in the right pane. The toolbar on the pane includes only custom buttons, described below.
Button Description
Move node up Moves the selected node one level up in the tree within the parent node.
Move node down Moves the selected node one level down in the tree within the parent node.
Add category

Adds a subcategory to the category selected in the Categories pane.

Note

To add a new category on the first level, select your company name in the Categories pane.
Delete category Deletes the category selected in the Categories pane and all subcategories of the selected category.
## Right pane: The top part In the top part of the right pane, you can view and edit the description and the parent category of the category selected in the **Categories** pane.
Column Description
Description

The name of the selected category.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Parent category The parent category of the selected category.
## Right pane: The Category members table Use this table to view and update the lists of stock items included in the sales category selected in the **Category member** table.
Button Description
Add items Opens the Add items dialog box, which you can use to add all items of an item class or all items to the selected category. Select an item class in the Item class field, and then click Add to add all items of the class to the table. Or click Cancel to close the dialog box without any changes.
Column Description
Item ID The identifier of the stock item.
Description The description of the stock item.
Item class The item class of the stock item.
Item status The status of the stock item.
### Add items dialog box You use this dialog box to add all items of the selected class or all items to the item sales category you selected in the **Categories** pane.
Element Description
Add items

The drop-down list you use to select which items you want to add to the item sales category. The following options are available:

By class
Select this option, and then specify the item class in the Item class field to add all items of the selected class to the sales category.
All items
Select this option to add all inventory items to the sales category.
Item class The item class whose items you want to add to the item sales category. This field is available only when you select the By class option in the Add items drop-down list.
Add (button) Adds the selected items to the item sales category and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding any items to the item sales category.

Related pages

Windows

 Kit assembly (IN307000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-assembly-in307000 page This window shows different sets of elements and table columns depending on which of the following functionalities are enabled in your system: Lot and serial tracking, Multiple warehouses, or Multiple warehouse locations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Kit assembly (IN307000) This window shows different sets of elements and table columns depending on which of the following functionalities are enabled in your system: Lot and serial tracking, Multiple warehouses, or Multiple warehouse locations. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window shows different sets of elements and table columns depending on which of the following functionalities are enabled in your system: **Lot and serial tracking**, **Multiple warehouses**, or **Multiple warehouse locations**. In this window, you can create and view kit assembly documents. You can select the operation performed on stock kits (production or disassembly), the warehouse where the operation is performed, the revision of the kit specification, and a variety of other factors. The kit assembly document includes the required stock components with their quantities and costs calculated in accordance with the kit specification revision you specify. If the specification allows component quantity variance, you can change the quantity of the component in the specified range. If the revision allows addition of components, you can add components to record all stock items included and relevant costs incurred in the process of kit production or disassembly. Also, for kits that as stock items require assigning lot or serial numbers, you can provide this information by using the **Allocations** tab. For more information about processing kits, see: [About accounting for kits](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-accounting-for-kits/). For additional details about inventory transactions, see: [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Here, you select an existing document that records kit production or disassembly, or you provide summary information for a new document.
Button Description
Release Releases the kit assembly document, updates the availability data for items that are kits or kit components, and generates a batch of transactions to update the general ledger.
Review batch Navigates to the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, to let you view the details of the batch.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following reports related to kit assembly:

Assembly picklist
Navigates to the Assembly picklist (IN30701S) window, to let you view the details of the picklist report.
Assembly confirmation
Navigates to the Assembly confirmation (IN30702S) window, to let you view the details of the confirmation report.
Element Description
Type

The type of operation to be performed for this kit. You can select one of the following options:

Production
The document records kit assembly or production.
Disassembly
The document records kit disassembly.
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the kit assembly document, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering sequence specified for kit assembly documents in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The current status of the kit assembly document. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft, can be edited manually, and cannot be released.
Balanced
Indicates that the document is ready to be released. A document with the Balanced status can be modified or deleted.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. Documents with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold

This check box indicates (if selected) that the kit assembly document has the status On hold.

Clear the check box to change the status to Balanced.
Date

The date when the kit assembly document was created.

All transactions based on this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions from the document should be posted.
Item ID

The identifier of the kit as an stock item.

When you are selecting an existing kit for viewing or modification, you can select from only the items marked as kits on the General settings tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Revision The revision of the kit specification used for the kit assembling or disassembling.
Reason code

The reason code used for the kit disassembling operation.

(This field is not available for the operations of the Production type.)
Description A brief description of the kit assembly document.
Created from If a kit assembly document has been created from a sales order line, this field displays a link to the sales document and the sales order line.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the assembly or disassembly is performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location where the assembly or disassembly is performed.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
UoM The unit of measure used for the kit.
Quantity The quantity of the kits assembled or disassembled.
## The Stock components tab On this tab, you can view all the components required to assemble the specified number of kits, or all the components that will become available after disassembly of the specified number of kits. Components are listed in accordance with the selected revision of the kit specification, as defined on the **Stock components** tab of the [Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/) window. If the **Allow component addition** check box is selected for the revision, you can add components. Also, for components for which lot or serial numbers are traced, you can provide such information.
Element Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box, so you can specify how the quantity of this specific component is split between sub items, locations, lot/serial numbers, and expiration dates for the component. This button is available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Multiple warehouse locations, Inventory sub items, or Lot serial tracking.
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of this kit component.
Description A description of the kit component.
Location

The warehouse location where the component is stored.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
UoM The unit of measure of this stock item added as a component of the kit.
Quantity

The actual quantity of this stock item added as a kit component.

For the Production type of operation, you can change the quantities of the component only if quantity variance is allowed for it in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window, which is determined by the Allow component qty. variance check box.

For the Disassembly type of operation, the quantity of the component is not validated.
Unit cost The cost of the base unit of this stock item serving as a component of the kit.
Reason code

(Only available only for operations of the Disassembly type.)

The reason code used to record costs for the kit disassembling operation.
Component qty. A read-only column that shows the quantity of this stock item added as a kit component, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
UoM A read-only column displaying the unit of measure (UoM) used for the stock item added as a kit component, as defined by the kit specification.
Disassembly coeff.

The coefficient indicating, for kit disassembly, to what extent the component can be returned to the inventory. This coefficient is a decimal value between 0 and 1.

If the kit can be totally disassembled back to its components, the coefficient for every component is 1. If this component is included in a part of the kit that can not be disassembled completely, the value is less than 1.
Allow component qty. variance

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

This check box (if selected) indicates that the component quantity may be increased or decreased. You can change the quantity to 0 on kit assembly lines created from the Sales orders (SO301000) window when this option is set to true.

This read-only column was set in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Min. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

Read only. This column displays the minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit, as defined by the kit specification.
Max. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

Read only. This column displays the maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit, as defined by the kit specification.
Allow component substitution This check box (if selected) indicates that the components can be substituted by another stock item. This read-only column was set in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, lot or serial numbers or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item on the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no location specified or lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Generate (button)

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Quantity

The quantity of the stock item with the same subitem code and the same lot number.

It is 1 for items with serial numbers.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
## The Non-stock components tab This tab displays the components that define additional costs for the kit to be assembled or disassembled, in accordance with the selected revision of the kit specification. You can add components only if component addition is allowed for this kit revision.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item of this kit component.
Description A description of the kit component.
UoM The unit of measure of this non-stock item added as a component of the kit.
Quantity

The actual quantity of the non-stock item as a kit component.

For operations of the Production type, you can change the quantities of the component only if quantity variance is allowed for it in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.

For operations of the Disassembly type, the quantity of the component is not validated.
Unit cost The cost of this non-stock item serving as a component of the kit.
Reason code

(Only available for operations of the Disassembly type.)

The reason code used to record costs for the kit disassembling operation.
Component qty. A read-only column that shows the quantity of this non-stock item added as a kit component, as defined by the kit specification in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
UoM A read-only column showing the unit of measure used for the non-stock item added as a kit component, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Allow component qty. variance

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

A check box that indicates whether the component quantity actually used in kit may differ from the quantity specified in the specification revision. This read-only value was specified in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Min. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operations.)

A read-only column displaying the minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the inventory kit, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Max. component qty.

(Only available for the Production type of operation.)

A read-only column that shows the maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the inventory kit, as defined in the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
## The Allocations tab On this tab, you specify how the total quantity of kits produced or disassembled (according to this document) is split by lot or serial number, or expiration date. For new kits, this information is specified only if these numbers are to be assigned on production.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item (kit) that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number for these kits.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Generate

A button that, if clicked, initiates generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
Location

The location where the specific quantity of kits is stored.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number assigned to the specific quantity.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
UoM The unit of measure used for the kits as the base unit.
Quantity The quantity of the kits with specific property: subitem, lot or serial number, or location.
Expiration date

The expiration date for the specific quantity of kits.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
## The Financial details tab On this tab, you specify how the total quantity of kits produced or disassembled (according to this document) is split by lot or serial number, or expiration date. For new kits, this information is specified only if these numbers are to be assigned on production.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the kit assembly document. Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window, and you can view the transactions’ details.
Branch The branch for which the kits have been assembled.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Kit specifications (IN209500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500 page You can use this window to view already-defined kit specifications, create new kit specifications, and create new revisions of kit specifications. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Kit specifications (IN209500) You can use this window to view already-defined kit specifications, create new kit specifications, and create new revisions of kit specifications. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view already-defined kit specifications, create new kit specifications, and create new revisions of kit specifications. To define the cost of assembling the kits, you can add non-stock components of the **labour** type. You can create a kit specification only for a stock item marked as a kit on the **General settings** tab of the[Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Any modification of a kit specification is saved as a revision, and revisions are stored in case a kit requires disassembly. ## The top part By using this area, you can create a new revision of a kit specification; you can also select any kit specification by its ID and view its revisions or add a new revision. You cannot modify an existing revision; you only can create a new one.
Element Description
Kit item ID The item ID of the kit, as assigned to the kit in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Non-stock Read only. This check box indicates (if selected) that this is a non-stock kit.
Revision The unique identifier of the kit specification revision.
Description

A brief description of the kit specification.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Active If you select this check box, this kit specification is active.
Allow component addition If you select this check box, it is permitted to add unlisted components to this kit on its assembly or shipping.
Total cost The total cost of all components combined.
## The Stock components tab On this tab, you can view all the components required to assemble the specified number of kits, or all the components that will become available after disassembly of the specified number of kits. Components are listed in accordance with the selected revision of the kit specification, as defined on the **Stock components** tab of the Kit specifications window. If the **Allow component addition** check box is selected for the revision, you can add components. Also, you can provide such information for components for which lot or serial numbers are traced..
Column Description
Component ID

The ID of the kit component.

Note

For non-stock kits, only stock components may be added.
Description A description of the kit component.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item added as the component to the kit.
Component qty. The quantity of the item added as a component to the kit.
Allow component qty. variance A check box that indicates (if selected) that the component quantity of items may be increased or decreased.
Min. component qty. The minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Max. component qty. The maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Disassembly coeff.

The coefficient indicating, for kit disassembly, to what extent the component can be returned to the inventory. This coefficient is a decimal value between 0 and 1.

If the kit can be totally disassembled back to its components, the coefficient for every component is 1. If this component is included in a part of the kit that can not be disassembled completely, the value is less than 1.
Allow component substitution A check box that indicates (if selected) that a substitution can be made for this component in the kit.
Unit cost The cost of a single piece.
Cost The sum of unit cost multiplied by quantity.
## The Non-stock components tab On this tab, you can view a table showing the non-stock items included as components in the kit specification. Generally, non-stock items added as components represent the overhead costs of kit assembly, such as labour and other manufacturing costs.
Element Description
Component ID The ID of a non-stock item added as the kit component.
Description A description of the kit component.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item added as the component to the kit
Component qty. The quantity of the item added as the component to the kit.
Allow component qty. variance This check box indicates (if selected) that the component quantity may be increased or decreased.
Min. component qty. The minimum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Max. component qty. The maximum quantity of the component that can be added to the kit.
Unit cost The cost of a single piece.
Cost The sum of unit cost multiplied by quantity.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Lot/serial classes (IN207000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000 page You can use this window to define the lot/serial classes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Lot/serial classes (IN207000) You can use this window to define the lot/serial classes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only displayed if the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). > [!NOTE] > If this functionality is not enabled, the **DEFAULT** lot and serial class is automatically assigned to all item classes and individual stock items. A lot/serial class is used to group stock items with lot or serial numbers and to provide default settings for new items of the class. In this window, you can browse through the existing lot/serial classes and modify their properties, add new classes, and delete unused unpopulated classes from the system. For details on configuring lot and serial numbers, see: [About lot and serial numbers](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-numbers/). For information about using these numbers, see: [About lot and serial number tracking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-lot-and-serial-number-tracking/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can enter basic information about a new lot/serial class and view information about an existing class.
Element Description
Class ID The unique ID of the lot/serial class. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the lot/serial class.
Tracking method

The tracking method for the inventory lot/serial class. Select one of the following options:

Not tracked
No tracking of the lot numbers or serial numbers for items of the class will be performed.
Track lot numbers
Tracking of the lot numbers for items of the inventory lot/serial class will be performed.
Track serial numbers
Tracking of the serial numbers for items of the inventory lot/serial class will be performed.
Track expiration date

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system will track the expiration date for stock items of this lot/serial class.

This option is not used for classes with Not tracked selected as their tracking method.
Required for drop-ship This check box indicates (if selected) that the stock items of this lot/serial class are required for drop-ship.
Assignment method

The method of assigning lot or serial numbers to the items. Select one of the following options:

When received
Assigns these numbers to the items when the items are received
When used
Assigns these numbers to the items when the items are used
Issue method

The method used to issue the items of this lot/serial class, which is not applicable for items of the class for which the Not tracked tracking method is selected. You can select one of the following issue methods:

FIFO
A first-in-first-out (FIFO) issue method
LIFO
A last-in-first-out (LIFO) issue method
Sequential
A sequential issue method
Expiration
An issue method based on the expiration date; to use this method, select the Track expiration date check box for this class
User defined
A custom, user-defined issue method
Share the auto-increment value between all class items

This check box lets you use (if selected) the same auto-increment value for all stock items in the lot/serial class.

If it is cleared, for each item, an individual auto-increment value may be set in the Stock items (IN202500) window; if such a number is not set, the initial value for each item will be 0000 by default.
Automatic incremental value

For a newly created class, the initial value to be used for generating new values (incremented by 1) in the lot/serial number segment that has the Automatic incremental value option selected in the Type column on this window. The value will change as follows:

  • If the Share the auto-increment value between all class items option is selected, the value will be incremented each time a new lot of any item of the class is received.

  • If this option is not selected for the class, the box will be blank. For different items of the class, individual auto-increment values will be used as follows:

    • If for an item of the class, the initial auto-increment value is specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window, that value will be used for the lot segment.
    • If for an item of the class the initial auto-increment value is not specified in the Stock items (IN202500) window, the default value 0000 will be used as the initial auto-increment value.
Automatically generate next number

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system will automatically generate the next number for items of the class with an auto-increment segment.

If the check box is not selected, users should manually enter serial numbers.
Max. auto-generate number

The maximum number of serial numbers that can be generated at once for items of this lot/serial class.

If a larger quantity of the item is specified on a document, you will get an error message telling you that you have more than enough quantity, and because of that there will be unassigned numbers. You need to enter a new line for the exceeding quantity.

You can initiate assignment of serial numbers for unassigned quantity of the item manually.
## The Numbering settings table You can specify the structure of the lot/serial numbers in this table. Each row describes a segment of the lot/serial numbers to be used for items of the class.
Column Description
Segment number The segment number of a lot or serial number, which is assigned automatically by the system.
Type

The type of segment value to be used for this segment. You can use one of the following options:

Automatic incremental value
Generates incremented values for the segment using as the initial value either the Auto-incremental value for this class or the value specific to the stock item if the Share the auto-increment value between all class items check box is not selected. This option can be selected for only one of the segments.
Constant
Uses a constant in the number segment.
Day
Uses the day (from the date when the lot or serial number is generated) in the segment.
Month
Uses the two-digit month (from the date when the lot or serial number is generated) in the segment.
Month long
Uses the month name in the lot/serial number segment.
Year
Uses the two-digit year in the lot/serial number segment.
Year long
Uses the four-digit year in the lot/serial number segment.
Custom date format
Uses the date in the custom date format in the segment.
Value

The specific value to be used in the lot/serial number segment. Enter the value in this column taking into account the type of the value:

  • For the Constant type, specify a constant to be used as the segment value.
  • For the Custom date format type, specify a date format ( yyMM, ddMM, or yyyy-MM-dd ) to be used in the segment.

Values are not required for other types of segments.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Movement classes (IN208600) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600 page You use this window to define, view, or modify movement classes, which are used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Movement classes (IN208600) You use this window to define, view, or modify movement classes, which are used to group stock items for various inventory management tasks. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The system assigns movement classes to stock items based on the turnover rates of the items, use the [Update movement class (IN506100)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100/) window to make mass changes to movement classes of items. For details on using movement classes, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) and [Overview of stocktaking options](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) ## The table
Column Description
Movement class ID A one-letter ID of the movement class.
Description A brief description of this movement class.
Counts per year The number of stocktaking counts per year to be performed for items assigned to this movement class.
Max. turnover %

A threshold value (%) of the criteria to be used for assigning the stock items (in the specific warehouse in a specific turnover period) to this movement class.

For details of the assignment method, see: About inventory ranking methods

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Non-stock items (IN202000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000 page You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Non-stock items (IN202000) You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Non-stock items are not kept in a warehouse, so they are immediately available for purchase when they are ordered. For details on these items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

Update cost
To update the cost of the selected non-stock item
View restriction groups
To navigate to the Restriction groups by item (IN103020) window, so that you can view or change the restriction groups that have access to the non-stock item.
Change the item ID
To change the ID of the currently selected non-stock item
Inquiries

Provides quick access to inquiry forms as follows:

Sales prices
To open the Sales prices (AR202000) window and view or edit sales prices for the selected non-stock item.
Supplier prices
To open the Supplier prices (AP202000) window and view or edit supplier prices for the selected non-stock item.
## The top part In this area, you can select an item by its ID to view its information, or you can create a record for a new non-stock item.
Element Description
Item ID

The unique alphanumeric identifier of the non-stock item.

The structure of identifiers is defined by the INVENTORY segmented key in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.

Note

At a later time, you can change the non-stock item ID by selecting Change ID on the Actions menu in the toolbar.
Item status

The status of the non-stock item. You can select one of the following options:

Active
Indicates that the item can be used in inventory operations, such as issues and receipts.
No sales
Indicates that the item cannot be sold.
No purchases
Indicates that the item cannot be purchased.
No request
Indicates that the item cannot be used on requisition requests.
Inactive
Indicates that no inventory operations are allowed for the non-stock item.
Marked for deletion
Indicates that the item is marked for deletion. No inventory operations are allowed, but the record will be kept in the database if any inventory transactions were related to it.
Description A brief description of the non-stock item.
Work group The work group that is responsible for the non-stock item.
Product manager The product manager who is responsible for the non-stock item.
## The General information tab On this tab, you can define or change the default settings for a non-stock item. You can also specify its unit conversion rules. ### The Item defaults section By using the elements in the section, you can assign this item to an item class, a posting class, and a price class, and you can specify other default properties.
Element Description
Item class

The item class the item is associated with; only item classes for non-stock items appear on the list for selection.

Item classes, which are used to group stock items and provide default settings for new items of the class, are defined in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Type

The non-stock item type. You can select one of the following options:

Non-stock item
A general type of non-stock items
Labour
A type of non-stock items to be used as labour hour rates.
Service
A type of non-stock items to be used as service fees
Charge
A type of non-stock items that are used as charge rates
Expense
A type of non-stock items that are added to documents to designate specific expenses
Posting class

The posting class the item is associated with.

You can use posting classes to group non-stock items with similar properties and provide default settings used to post inventory transactions related to the items to the general ledger. The posting classes are defined in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.
Is a kit

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a kit.

The components of the kit can be specified by using the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Webhook notification

When this check box is selected and saved for an item, you will be notified regarding changes.

The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the item.
VAT category The VAT category of the non-stock item. By default, this is the VAT category specified for the item class to which this item has been assigned. If needed, another VAT category can be selected for the item.
Default warehouse

The warehouse whose settings can be used for this non-stock item on sales orders or purchase orders.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Require receipt

A check box that you select to require that the system create a purchase receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, the system will not generate any inventory transactions for the non-stock item.
Require shipment

A check box you select to require that the system create a sales order receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, you cannot have the system generate any inventory transactions for this non-stock item.
Complete purchase order line

Choose between:

  • By amount
  • By quantity
Reverse charge item

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a reverse charge item.

Note

This check box is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
External ID

This field is automatically populated if the non-stock item is linked to an external expense type in the Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S) window.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
### The Unit conversion section By using the unit conversion table, you can set up conversion rules between different units of measure used for this item. The unit conversion parameters are specified with respect to the UoM selected as the base unit for the non-stock item. This table is only available if the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Column Description
From unit The unit of measure for which the conversion parameters are specified.
Multiply/divide

The operation to be performed for unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform conversions from different units of measure to the UoM specified as the base unit.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation specified in the Multiply/divide column.
To unit The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
### The Unit of measurement section In this section, you can select the base unit of measure (UoM) for the non-stock item. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can also specify the UoMs to be used as sales and purchase units for the non-stock item, and the conversion rules for these units and other UoMs that can apply to the item (available from the item class). You can select UoMs from the list of UoMs available for the item class or type new UoMs.
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for the non-stock item.
Sales unit

The UoM used as the sales unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Purchase unit

The UoM used as the purchase unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Price/cost information tab On this tab, you can view and set the default price and the pending standard cost for the non-stock item in the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. ### The Price management section Here you can specify settings related to the management of prices.
Element Description
Price class The item price class associated with the non-stock item. These classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar price calculation methods, are defined in the Item price classes (IN209000) window.
Price work group The work group responsible for product pricing. Select the pricing work group for the non-stock item.
Price manager The manager responsible for the product pricing.
Subject to commission

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission should be calculated on the sale of this non-stock item.

The check box is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Min. mark-up (%) The minimum mark-up percentage defined for this non-stock item.
Mark-up (%) The mark-up percentage to be used for setting the price for the item.
List price The manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP) of this non-stock item.
Default price

The price of the non-stock item.

This price is used as the default price if there are no other prices (from any price list) defined for this item in the Supplier ledger workspace.
### The Standard cost section
Element Description
Pending cost

The standard cost to be assigned to the non-stock item when the costs are updated.

You can type the cost directly into the field.
Pending cost date

The date when the pending cost becomes effective.

You can select the date for a pending cost.
Current cost The current standard cost of the non-stock item.
Effective date The date when the current standard cost became effective.
Last cost The standard cost assigned to the non-stock item before the current standard cost was set.
### The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section
Element Description
ROT or RUT deductible item Select this check box if the item should be used for ROT or RUT deduction.
ROT Select this option if the work is related to ROT deduction (repairs, conversion, extension).
RUT Select this option if the work is related to RUT deduction (cleaning, maintenance, laundry).
Type

Select one of the following types:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost
Type of work

The following work types are available for RUT:

  • Babysitting
  • Cleaning
  • Cloth maintenance
  • Furniture
  • Gardening
  • IT services
  • Kitchen appliance
  • Laundry
  • Personal care
  • Relocation service
  • Snow job
  • Supervision of housing
  • Transport to sales

The following work types are available for ROT:

  • Bricklaying
  • Construction
  • Drain work
  • Electricity work
  • Glass work
  • Painting
  • Plumbing
## The Supplier details tab This tab contains information about the supplier from which the item is purchased and the supplier's prices for the item.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is active.
Default

This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is the default supplier for this item.

Select this check box to mark the supplier that is the main supplier of the item.

When you create a purchase order to purchase an item, the default supplier is selected for this purchase.
Supplier no. The ID of the supplier. Supplier settings are specified in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item is purchased.
Location

The supplier location from which the item is purchased, which by default is the supplier’s default location. These locations are defined for the supplier in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Purchase unit

The unit of measure in which the item is purchased.

This UoM is specified on the General settings tab of this window.
Supplier item ID The item ID used by the supplier for this item.
Currency ID The currency used by the supplier to charge for the item.
Last supplier price

Read only.

This column shows the last supplier price defined for the item.
## The Cross-reference tab You use the **Cross-reference** tab to maintain cross-references between the item ID of the non-stock item used in your company and the identifiers used by your suppliers and customers for the item.
Column Description
Alt. item ID type

The type of alternate codification used for the item, You can select one of the following options:

Customer part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the customer part number.
Supplier part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the supplier part numbers.
Global
You use this type to maintain the cross-references between the item ID and the global codification.
Barcode
You use this type to specify (or enter it by using a barcode scanner) a bar code for the item ID.
Supplier/customer The supplier or customer (by its ID) that uses the alternative identification for this non-stock item.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the non-stock item as used by the supplier or customer.
Description Any comments applicable to the specified cross-reference.
## The Packaging tab This tab contains information about the measurements of the item.
Element Description
Weight The weight of the item.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight of the item.
Volume The volume of the item.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the item volume.
## The Deferral settings tab You use this tab to specify how deferrals should be performed for this non-stock item when it is sold or purchased. If no deferral code is assigned to the item, no deferrals will be performed, and the revenue or expense will be recognised immediately. If a code is assigned to the item, revenue from its sales will be recognised according to the deferral code. If this non-stock item is a package, also referred to as a multiple delivery arrangement (MDA), specify how the item price can be split into components (separate units of accounting) that use different methods of revenue recognition to comply with revenue recognition regulations in your country. For each component, you can assign an individual deferral code in the **Revenue components** table.
Element Description
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to this non-stock item.

The code specifies how the revenue from the sale of this item will be recognised. The deferral codes are defined in the Deferral codes (DR202000) window.
Default term

The date range defined for deferred revenue recognition (for example, 2 years for a two-year customer support subscription that you sell).

The field is available for editing only if the Flexible by period, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method is selected for the deferral code selected in the Deferral code field.

The maximum value is 10000. Possible time units are year(s), month(s), week(s), and day(s).
Use component subaccounts This check box indicates (if selected) that the component subaccount is used to account for deferred revenue.
Total percentage

The total percentage of the item price as split among components.

This value is calculated automatically as the sum of the percentages assigned to the components if the item is sold as a package and consists of components.

When the item is not a package, the total percentage is set to 100.
### The Revenue components table In this table, you can add detailed information about the item's components to be used for deferrals. Each component can be assigned a specific deferral code and a percentage or fixed amount of the item price that will be used for deferrals when the item is sold.
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the component of this non-stock item, which is sold as a package.
Sales account The sales account used for this component.
Sales sub. The sales subaccount used for this component.
UoM The unit of measure used for this component.
Quantity The quantity of the specified units for this component of the non-stock item.
Deferral code The deferral code that has been specified for this component.
Default term

The date range defined for the process of the deferred revenue or expense recognition (for example, 6 months for a six-month support license).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days, or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.
Default term UOM

The unit of measure for the default term: year(s), month(s), week(s), or day(s).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.
Allocation method

The method used to allocate the document amount between the components. The following options are available:

Percentage
The component price will be computed as the percentage of the total package price. If you select this option, the Percentage column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the percentage defined for this component.
Fixed amount
The component price will be defined as a fixed price. If you select this option, the Fixed amount column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the amount defined for this component.
Residual
This method applies to the non-deferral components. The price for such a component will be defined as the amount that will remain after the system deducts the deferred revenues of the other components from the total package amount.
Fixed amount The fixed amount of the item price assigned to the component if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Allocation method column.
Percentage The percentage of the item price for this component if the Percentage option is selected in the Allocation method column.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab contains information about the default general ledger accounts used to post transactions related to this non-stock item. The specified accounts and subaccounts are mostly used as the sources of options for the posting settings of the item defined by its posting class.
Element Description
Expense accrual account

For a non-stock item, that is a component of a stock kit, this account (of the Expense or Liability type) will be used to accrue the costs (standard costs) of non-stock components in the process of kit assembly, if the option Item is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the General ledger accounts tab in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

For a Labour type item, the expense accrual account is used to accrue the cost of labour on projects (the account is credited on release of time cards). The account will be used for time card related transactions if Labour item accrual is selected as the Expense accrual account source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Expense accrual sub.

The subaccount to be used as the default expense accrual subaccount for this non-stock item.

For kit assembly related transactions, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the posting class (the Combine inventory / accrual sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

For transactions with labour items, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the Expense accrual sub. source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Reason code sub The subaccount of the reason code for the item.
Expense account The default expense account to be used for this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this account will be used for transactions with this item as the default expense account if Item is selected in the Use COGS / expense account from field for the posting class of the item.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense EU account The EU expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense account, import The import expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense payroll taxable account

The expense payroll taxable account to be used for this non-stock item.

This field is visible only if Expense Integration is enabled and the non-stock item is of type Expense.
Expense sub. The subaccount to be used by default with the expense account for transactions related to this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default expense subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine COGS / expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase accrual account

The liability account to be used for this non-stock item to accrue purchase order item amounts for this item, if the option Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.
Purchase accrual sub.

Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class for this item (the Posting classes (IN206000) window), this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.
Sales account The account to be used as the sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - non-taxable account The account to be used as the non-taxable sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - EU account The account to be used as the EU sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - export account The account to be used as the export sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used by default for transactions recording a sale of this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default sales subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine sales sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase price variance account

The account (of the Expense type) to be used as the default purchase price variance account to record purchases of this non-stock item on receipts if Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field for the posting class of the item.

The purchase price account is used to record any differences between the extended price on the purchase receipt and the extended price on the purchase invoice (if this item is assigned any of the valuation methods except for the standard cost valuation method).
Purchase price variance sub.

The corresponding subaccount.

This subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default purchase price variance subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine purchase price variance sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Deferral account

The account to be used to hold the deferred amount until it is fully recognised. The account type should be specified as follows:

  • A liability account for a deferral code of the revenue type
  • An asset account for a deferral code of the expense type
Deferral sub. The subaccount to be used with the deferral account.
## The Attributes tab You can use the **Attributes** tab to associate attributes with the non-stock item. You can select each attribute from the list of attributes defined in the system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. ### The Attributes section
Column Description
Attribute ID The name of the attribute.
Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for a non-stock item of the class.
Value The value of the attribute.
### The Sales categories section By using this table, you can select the values of the sales categories for the non-stock item. To define the sales categories or view their details, use the [Item sales categories (IN204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060/) window.
Column Description
Category The sales category identifier.
### The Image upload section
Element Description
Browse Click the button to locate the image you want to upload.
Upload Click the button to upload selected image.
## The Description tab On this tab, you can create stock item descriptions that includes tables, images, and web links. ## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for an item, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific item. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Posting classes (IN206000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000 page You use this window to define posting classes for stock and non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Posting classes (IN206000) You use this window to define posting classes for stock and non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define posting classes for stock and non-stock items. A posting class is a group of settings that provide the default values for the purchase, sales, and inventory transactions with the item and define how these transaction will be posted to the general ledger. By using this window, you can browse through the existing posting classes and modify their properties, add new posting classes, and delete obsolete classes from the system. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the identifier and description of a new posting class, or select an existing class to view or modify its details.
Element Description
Class ID The unique alphanumeric identifier of the posting class. You can use up to 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the posting class.
## The Posting settings tab On this tab, you can specify which accounts and subaccounts will be used when inventory or other transactions related to items of the class are posted to the general ledger. For most subaccounts on this tab, you can specify the rule of choosing segment values to be used when the item-related transactions are posted to the general ledger. To set up the rule for a specific subaccount, for each segment in the subaccount, press **F3** and choose a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options: + **I** The subaccount associated with the stock item or non-stock item. Subaccounts for stock items are specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and for non-stock items on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **W** The subaccount associated with the warehouse. Subaccounts for warehouses are specified using the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This field is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. + **P** The subaccount associated with the posting class. Subaccounts for posting classes are specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of this window. + **V** The subaccount associated with the supplier. Subaccounts for suppliers are specified on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. > [!NOTE] > This option is only available for the **Combine purchase accrual sub. from** field. For a segment, the character designating the option is repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Element Description
Use inventory/accrual account from

The source of the inventory account (of the Asset type) for stock items or expense accrual account for non-stock items or labour items (of the Asset or Liability type) to be used for transactions that involve items assigned to this posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
Uses the inventory account associated with the stock item or the expense accrual account associated with the non-stock item. The inventory account for stock items is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window. The expense accrual account for non-stock items is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
Applicable to stock items only. Uses the inventory account associated with the warehouse. This inventory account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
Uses the inventory/accrual account associated with the posting class. The inventory/accrual account associated with the posting class is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine inventory/accrual sub. from

A rule that defines from where each inventory subaccount segment value, or expense accrual subaccount segment value, is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the inventory account, or expense accrual account, for transactions that involve items of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, and Warehouse.
Use sales account from
Note

for the Sales orders (SO301000) window, the sales account is retrieved according to the Use sales account from setting in the Order types (SO201000) window. See also: About suggested sales accounts.

The source of the sales account to be used for inventory transactions involving items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the sales account associated with the item. This sales account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
To use the sales account associated with the warehouse. This sales account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the sales account associated with the posting class. This sales account is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine sales sub. from A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the sales account is composed for inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class.
Use COGS/expense account from

The source of the COGS (for stock items) or expense (for non-stock items) account to be used for inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the COGS or expense account associated with the item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window or the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
To use the COGS or expense account associated with the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the COGS or expense account associated with the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Copy COGS sub. from sales This check box indicates that the system will copy the COGS or expense subaccount from the sales subaccount. When this option is selected, you cannot define the rule to combine COGS subaccount from the related subaccounts.
Combine COGS/expense sub. from

A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the COGS (for stock items) or expense (for non-stock items) account is composed for transactions that involve items of the posting class.

Note

Combine COGS/expense sub. from is only enabled if the Copy COGS sub. from sales check box is not selected.

The sources of the segment values are Warehouse, Posting class, and Item.
Use standard cost variance account from

The source of the standard cost variance account to be used for the inventory transactions with items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the standard cost variance account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the standard cost variance account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the standard cost variance account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine standard cost variance sub. from

A rule that defines from where each standard cost variance subaccount segment value is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the standard cost variance account for the inventory transactions that involve items of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, and Warehouse.
Use standard cost revaluation account from

The source of the standard cost revaluation account to be used for inventory transactions involving items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the standard cost revaluation account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the standard cost revaluation account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the standard cost revaluation account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine standard cost revaluation sub. from

A rule that defines from where each standard cost revaluation subaccount segment value is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the standard cost revaluation account for the inventory transactions that involve items of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, and Warehouse.
Use purchase accrual account from

The source of the purchase accrual account to be used for the purchase receipts and inventory transactions with items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

  • Item To use the purchase accrual account specified for the stock item or non-stock item (that requires a purchase receipt) on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window or the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

  • Warehouse To use the purchase accrual account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.

    Note

    This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Posting class To use the purchase accrual account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.

  • Supplier To use the purchase accrual account specified for the supplier on the General ledger accounts tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Combine purchase accrual sub. from

A rule that defines from where each purchase accrual subaccount segment value is collected. The resulting subaccount is used with the purchase accrual account for purchase receipts and inventory transactions that involve stock items and non-stock items (that require a purchase receipt) of this posting class.

The possible sources of the segment values are Item, Posting class, Supplier, and Warehouse.
Use purchase price variance account from

The source of purchase price variance account to be used for inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the purchase price variance account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the purchase price variance account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the purchase price variance account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine purchase price variance sub. from A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the purchase price variance account is composed for the inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class.
Use landed cost variance account from

The source of landed cost variance account to be used for inventory transactions involving items of the posting class. You can select one of the following options:

Item
To use the landed cost variance account specified for the stock item on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse
To use the landed cost variance account specified for the warehouse on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Posting class
To use the landed cost variance account specified for the posting class on the General ledger accounts tab of this window.
Combine landed cost variance sub. from A subaccount mask used to define how the subaccount used with the landed cost variance account is composed for the inventory transactions that involve items of the posting class.
Stocktaking reason code For stock items only. The reason code to be used by default for stocktaking involving items associated with this posting class.
## The General ledger accounts tab On the **General ledger accounts** tab, you can specify general ledger accounts and subaccounts associated with the posting class itself to be used as one of the options for combining subaccounts and specifying accounts for the posting class.
Element Description
Inventory/accrual account The asset account to be used as the inventory account for stock items of this posting class, or the asset or liability account to be used as the expense accrual account for non-stock items or labour items of this posting class, if the option Posting class is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the Posting settings tab in this window.
Inventory/accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from field in the Posting settings tab in this window for this posting class, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the inventory subaccount to be used with the inventory account, or the expense accrual subaccount to be used with the expense accrual account.
Reason code sub. The subaccount to be used with the reason code for items of the posting class.
Sales account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class.
Sales - non-taxable account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class, for non-taxable income.
Sales - EU account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class, for income from the EU.
Sales - export account The income account to be used as the sales account associated with the posting class, for income from export.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used with the sales account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost variance account The expense account to be used with the standard cost variance account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with standard cost variance account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost revaluation account The expense account to be used as the standard cost revaluation account associated with the posting class.
Standard cost revaluation sub. The subaccount to be used with standard cost revaluation account associated with the posting class.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used to accrue purchase order item amounts for items associated with this posting class, if the option Posting class is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the Posting settings tab in this window.
Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the Posting settings tab in this window for this posting class, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Purchase price variance account The expense account to be used as the purchase price variance account associated with the posting class.
Purchase price variance sub. The purchase price variance subaccount to be used for the default posting class.
COGS/expense account If this posting class will be used for stock items, this is the expense account to be used as the cost of goods sold (COGS) account associated with the posting class. If this class will be used for non-stock items or labour items, this is the expense account associated with the posting class.
Expense acct, non-taxable The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for non-taxable expenses.
Expense EU account The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for EU-related expenses.
Expense account, import The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for import-related expenses.
Expense payroll taxable account

The account to be used as the expense account associated with the posting class, for payroll taxable expenses.

Note

This field is visible only if Expense Integration is enabled.
COGS/expense sub. The subaccount to be used with the COGS or expense account associated with the posting class.
Landed cost variance account The expense account to be used as the landed cost variance account associated with the posting class.
Landed cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the landed cost variance account as associated with the posting class.
Deferral account The general ledger account to hold the deferred revenue (liability account) or expense (asset account) amount.
Deferral sub. The subaccount (if applicable in your system), for proper tracking of deferral transactions.
### The Excise duty section This section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. The priority order in which the accounts in this section are used is: 1. from the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, and if empty, 1. from the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. For information about the generated General ledger batch, see [About excise duties](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/about-excise-duties/).
Element Description
Sales account The income account that is connected to the VAT payable account (it has a set VAT category). The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Sales sub The subaccount to be used with the sales account.
Sales offset account The income account that is not connected to the VAT payable account (it does not have a set VAT category), used to balance the sales account. The excise duty amounts are recorded in debit.
Sales offset sub The subaccount to be used with the sales offset account.
Payable account The liability account that accumulates the excise duty amounts to be paid to a tax agency for the excise duty reporting period. The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Payable sub The corresponding payable subaccount.
### The Expense accounts section
Element Description
Use Expense accounts If this check box is selected and when a purchase invoice is released, the following transactions will be added to journal transactions.
Purchase P&L (debit) Select an account here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Purchase P&L sub. Select a subaccount here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L (credit) Select an account for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L sub. Select a subaccount for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Purchase EU Select an account here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase EU sub. Select a subaccount here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase import Select an account for a non-EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase import sub. Select a subaccount for a non-EU supplier in P/L account.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Prepare replenishment (IN508000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000 page Use this window to prepare replenishment requests for the stock items whose stock at a specific warehouse needs to be replenished in accordance with the automated replenishment settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare replenishment (IN508000) Use this window to prepare replenishment requests for the stock items whose stock at a specific warehouse needs to be replenished in accordance with the automated replenishment settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The settings provided on the **Replenishment info** tab in the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window define whether stock replenishment for the item is needed and in what quantities. If for some items replenishment is to be performed from the source warehouse, as the result of this processing, the requests for the appropriate quantities of the items (required for replenishment) will become visible in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window so that transfer orders can be generated. For the prepared replenishment requests, you can create purchase orders in the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window and transfer orders by using the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View supplier inventory Navigates to the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window so you can view supplier-specific details for the stock item if purchased from the supplier specified in the Preferred supplier column.
Process Processes the items that have been selected by using the check boxes in the unlabelled column of the table.
Process all Processes all the items listed in the table.
## The top part In this part, you specify criteria the system uses to select items to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse (This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse where the stock should be replenished. If the Warehouses functionality is disabled, the MAIN warehouse is assumed.
Purchase date The date when the purchase will be made to replenish the stock.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use to select the items to be displayed based on the product manager to whom the items are assigned for management:

  • Select the Me check box to view the items assigned to you. The field will contain your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another product manager to view the items assigned to the manager.
  • Clear the check box and leave the field blank to view items assigned to all product managers of the selected product work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you can use to select the items to be displayed based on the product work group the items are assigned to:

  • Select the My check box to view the items assigned to your product work group or to the selected product manager in the group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another product work group to display the items assigned to the work group or to a particular product manager in the selected group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the items assigned to all product work groups.
Only suggested items A check box you select to display only the items that require replenishment.
Supplier The supplier from which the items will be purchased.
Item Class ID The item class of the items to be purchased. You can leave the box blank to view the items of all item classes requiring replenishment.
Item ID The item ID of the particular item to be purchased for stock replenishment. You can leave the field blank to view various items requiring replenishment.
Description The description of the item to be purchased for stock replenishment.
## The table This table contains the list of stock items to be purchased for stock replenishment. By using the elements in the Selection area (the upper part of the window) you can specify the criteria for selecting the items to be displayed in the table.
Column Description
Warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse where the stock will be replenished.
Item ID The stock item for which stock replenishment is required.
Description The description of the item for which stock replenishment is required.
Suggested qty. The quantity to be replenished. By default, it is the value calculated based on replenishment parameters specified for the item in the particular warehouse minus the quantity on supply. The value can be manually adjusted.
Internal replenishment The quantity (on internal replenishment requests) to be ordered to replenish the stock.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of the stock item at this warehouse.
Qty. not available The quantity that is not available.
Incoming The quantity of items included in the purchase orders, purchase receipts, and inventory transfer documents that have not yet been released. This quantity is deducted from the planned replenishment quantity if the Minimum/maximum. replenishment method is used for this item, which is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details window.
Outgoing The quantity on shipments and sales orders calculated according to the availability settings of the item class.
Qty. on hard demand The quantity on shipments and sales orders calculated as hard demand, that is, (Qty. sales order shipping) + (Qty sales order back-ordered) + (Qty sales order shipped).
Qty. available The available quantity.
Safety stock The safety stock value for the stock item, which is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details window.
Reorder point The stock level that, when it has been reached, prompts the system to replenish the stock of the item. The quantity is specified on the Replenishment info tab of the Item warehouse details window.
Max. qty. The maximum quantity allowed at the warehouse.
Replenishment source The source of replenishment for the item at this warehouse.
Source warehouse (This column appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.) The warehouse that is the source of replenishment.
Default supplier The preferred supplier from which the item will be purchased for stock replenishment, as specified for the item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. You can choose another supplier if necessary.
Default location (This column only appears if the Account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The supplier’s location from which the item can be purchased. You can choose a non-default location if necessary.
Default supplier name The name of the selected supplier.
Item class The item class to which the item was assigned.
Supplier class The class of the supplier indicated in the Preferred supplier column.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Prepare stocktaking (IN504000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000 page By using this window, you can generate a stocktaking document that lists the stock items in a particular warehouse for stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare stocktaking (IN504000) By using this window, you can generate a stocktaking document that lists the stock items in a particular warehouse for stocktaking. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can generate a stocktaking document that lists the stock items in a particular warehouse for stocktaking. You can select the stocktaking type, the warehouse (if it is not defined by the type), and particular warehouse locations. The method of generating the list of items to be counted is defined by the stocktaking type. Generating a stocktaking document starts a new stocktaking process and "freezes" all operations with the stock items in the specified warehouse until the stocktaking count is completed or until all the count data is entered, depending on whether the **Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state** check box is selected for the warehouse in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. If the selected stocktaking type is based on the **Full stocktaking** generation method and no particular location is selected on the **Location selection** tab of this window, the whole warehouse will be in the frozen state; if specific locations are selected, only those locations will be in the frozen state. > [!NOTE] > If the selected stocktaking type is based on the **Full stocktaking** generation method, the whole warehouse or the selected locations will freeze, regardless if you select items in the list. ## The top part
Button Description
Generate stocktaking

Generates the stocktaking document only for the items you have selected by using the check boxes in the table. You can also select all items in a page by selecting the unlabelled check box in the table column, next to the Item ID column.

When the generation is done, you will be redirected to the Stocktaking review (IN305000) window, where you continue the stocktaking process.
Generate stocktaking all

Generates the stocktaking document for all items shown in the table. Any selections you may have done in the table will be overridden when you click this button.

When the generation is done, you will be redirected to the Stocktaking review (IN305000) window, where you continue the stocktaking process.
## The Warehouse/inventory selection tab On this tab, you can select the type of stocktaking count and specify additional options for generating count sheets, if needed.
Element Description
Type ID The type of stocktaking count to be used to generate the stocktaking sheets.
Description The description of the type.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the stocktaking should be prepared. By default, it is the warehouse defined by the stocktaking type. If no warehouse is specified by the type, you can select a warehouse for stocktaking.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If not, the MAIN warehouse is selected by default.
Generation method The generation method to be used to select stock items for counting. By default, the generation method is associated with the stocktaking type.
Blank lines to add The number of lines to be added to the end of the list. These lines can be used to record additional information.
Include items with zero stock balance When this is selected, the items listed in this window will include items with zero stock balance and the last previous warehouse.
Starting date to include from The date selector filters the items with zero stock balance by date. For example, if you set the date to 01/01/2024, the list will only include items and locations in stock between 01/01/2024 and the current date.
## The Location selection tab On the tab, you can select the warehouse locations from which items will be included into the list for the stocktaking count. > [!NOTE] > This column is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Column Description
Location The warehouse location where the stocktaking will be performed. The structure of the warehouse is defined in the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Description The description of the warehouse location.
Pick priority The pick priority specified for this location.
## The table
Column Description
Line number The line number in the stocktaking document.
Tag number

The tag number to be used for counting items with the properties specified on this line: item ID, sub item code, lot/serial number, and location.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Use tags option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window is selected.
Item ID The identifier of the item.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expiration date

The expiration date for the specified quantity of the item with the specified lot number, if applicable.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Book qty. The quantity of the item available on hand at the specified warehouse location.
Base unit The base unit of the item.
Description The description of the item.
Item class ID The item class to which the item belongs.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Reason codes (CS211000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000 page In this window, you can configure the reason codes for use in other workspaces of the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reason codes (CS211000) In this window, you can configure the reason codes for use in other workspaces of the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can configure the reason codes for use in other workspaces of the system. A reason code is used to provide a reason for the transaction, as well as to set an offset account and a subaccount to be used for the General ledger transaction. It can be used with direct inventory transactions to provide this information. For each reason code, you specify which inventory transaction it should be used with. Based on this, the reason code can then be selected for the specific type of transaction. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window fields These fields can be used to define a new code or to edit an existing code.
Field Description
Reason code The ID of the reason code. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description A description of the reason code.
Usage

An option indicating where this code can be used.

The following options are available:

  • Sales This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The Combine sub. from, Account and Subaccount fields are disabled for this option.
  • Credit write-off This code is used in the Customer ledger workspace. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.
  • Balance write-off This code is used in the Customer ledger workspace. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.
  • Supplier write-off This code is used in the Supplier ledger for automatic write-offs of small remaining balances.

The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.

Issue
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for issue documents. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on issues is specified in Combine sub. from.
Receipt
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for receipts. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on receipts may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Adjustment
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for adjustments. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on adjustments may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Transfer
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used for inventory transfers. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on transfers may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Disassembly
This code is used in the Inventory workspace. The reason code will be used in accounting for kits. The rule governing how to combine subaccounts on disassembly may be specified in Combine sub. from.
Combine sub. from

The field is not available for reason codes with the Sales usage option.

The adjustable subaccount mask that defines the rule of composing a default subaccount for specific types of documents on data entry forms.

For each segment, point to a segment and press F3 to open the list of options. The available mask options depend on the Usage field value:

  • Credit write-off, Supplier write-off, and Balance write-off:

    • R - From a subaccount associated with the reason code
    • L - From a subaccount associated with the customer location This field is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
    • C - From a subaccount associated with the branch summary
    • S - From a subaccount associated with the salesperson

  • Issue, Receipt, Adjustment, Transfer, and Disassembly:

    • R - From a subaccount associated with the reason code
    • I - From a subaccount associated with the stocky item
    • P - From a subaccount associated with the posting class
    • W - From a subaccount associated with the warehouse This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Note

The letter designating the option will be repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Account

The general ledger account to be updated by the transaction amount for transactions marked by the reason code. Cash accounts cannot be used for any of the write-off types in the Usage field.

For issues, this account will override the COGS account.

Note

The field is not available for reason codes with the Sales usage option.
Subaccount

The corresponding subaccount to be used with the reason code.

This account is used for reason codes to be used in inventory.

Note

The field is not available for reason codes with the Sales usage option.
Sales account The sales account to be updated by the transaction amount. The field is available for reason codes with the Sales and Issue usage options.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used with the reason code. The field is available for reason codes with the Sales and Issue usage options.
Parent topic: [Inventory windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Receipts (IN301000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/receipts-in301000 page You can use this window to create, view, and edit receipts, which you can save with the On hold or Balanced status and release. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Receipts (IN301000) You can use this window to create, view, and edit receipts, which you can save with the On hold or Balanced status and release. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The processing of receipts depends on certain settings in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. By default, receipts are saved with the **On hold** status if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected. Receipt totals are validated on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected. When a receipt is released, its transactions will be posted to the General ledger if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected. For more information about receipts, see: [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates document release, which changes the status of the receipt to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports related to receipts:
## The top part In the top part, you can select an existing receipt by its reference number or specify summary information about a new receipt.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the receipt, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering sequence selected for receipts in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The current status of the receipt. The following options are available:

On hold
The receipt is a draft and can be edited. Receipts with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
The receipt data has been validated by the system and the receipt can be released. It also can be modified or deleted, but changes can be saved only if the receipt is balanced.
Released
The receipt has been released and cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold A check box that you select to give the receipt the On hold status. Clear the check box to save the receipt with the Balanced status.
Date The date when the receipt was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions recorded in the document should be posted.
Transfer no. The transfer number for the receipt operation. (Enter this number only if the two-step transfer operation is performed.)
External ref. The external reference number of the inventory receipt (for example, the reference number used by the supplier).
Description A brief description of the receipt or its transactions.
Total qty. The total quantity of items to be received.
Control qty. The control quantity of items specified in the receipt. Control qty. is available only if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. The user enters this value manually to confirm the total quantity of stock items received as compared to the automatically calculated quantity of stock items included in this document. If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.
Total cost The total cost of the stock items received. The system automatically calculates this value as a sum of all extended cost values of all received stock items listed in the Transaction details tab of this window.
Control cost The total cost of the stock items to be received. Control cost is only available if the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window. The user enters this value manually to confirm the total cost as calculated automatically for the document. If the Control cost and Total cost values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.
## The Transaction details tab This tab has a table with the transactions included in the receipt.
Button Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box, from which you can define sub items, locations, lot or serial numbers, quantities, and expiration dates for the stock item received.
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add items to the receipt.
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the stock item received. Stock items are maintained in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stock item is received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The warehouse location where the stock item is received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Quantity The quantity of the received stock item (in the unit of measure indicated below).
UoM The unit of measure of the received stock item.
Unit cost The cost of a unit of the received stock item.
Cost The extended cost of the received stock item. An extended cost is calculated automatically as the unit cost multiplied by the quantity (or amount) of item that was received.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the received stock item. To specify the lot or serial numbers of the received item, click the Allocations action on the table toolbar. If multiple serial or lot numbers should be specified, the column displays <SPLIT>. This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the received stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Reason code The reason code for the receipt transaction.
Project The project with which this receipt line is associated, or the code indicating that this receipt line is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window. This column is only displayed if the Projects workspace has been activated.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this receipt is associated. This column is only displayed if the Projects workspace has been activated.
Description A brief description of the receipt transaction.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, sub items, lot or serial numbers or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item or assign sub items. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The **Allocations** dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

Note

This element is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Generate

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same lot number. It is 1 for items with a serial number.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for various warehouses and warehouse locations (if the **Warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in your system) and to add the required quantity of the item to the document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Inventory** field. The dialog box has a selection area and a table with items that meet the criteria you specify.
Element Description
Item The ID of a particular item whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item ID to find the item.
Barcode The bar code of the item to be listed. Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.
Item class ID The item class of the items whose information you want to view. Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.
Show available items only A check box that you select if only items whose available quantities are greater than zero should be listed in the table.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item are stocked. Leave the field blank to view items from all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of sales units of the stock item (under the specified item ID) that you want to add to the document.
Site

The warehouse where the items are stocked.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Item ID The stock item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID.
Base unit The unit of measure used as a base unit for the stock item.
Qty. available The available quantity of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse and location.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number and the branch of the batch generated upon release of the receipt.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the receipt. Click on the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the details of the transactions.
Branch The branch receiving the goods.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Release inventory documents (IN501000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/release-inventory-documents-in501000 page You use this window to view and release inventory documents with the status Balanced. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release inventory documents (IN501000) You use this window to view and release inventory documents with the status Balanced. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to view and release inventory documents with the status **Balanced**. When the documents are released, the corresponding transactions will be posted to the General ledger workspace if the **Automatically post on release** option is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. ## The top part
Button Description
Release Releases the documents whose check boxes you have selected (in the unlabelled column) in the Documents area.
Release all Releases all documents listed in the Documents area.
## The table In this area, you can view the list of inventory documents with the status **Balanced** and select the documents to be released.
Column Description
Document type

The type of inventory document. The following types are available:

  • Receipt
  • Issue
  • Adjustment
  • Transfer
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the inventory document.
Status The current status of the inventory document.
Date The date when the inventory document was created.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions generated by the inventory document should be posted.
Total qty. The total quantity of goods from the inventory document.
Total cost The total cost of goods from the inventory document.
Total amount The total amount of goods from the inventory document.
Description The brief description provided for the inventory document.

Related pages

Tasks

 Replenishment classes (IN208800) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-classes-in208800 page You can use this window to define new replenishment classes or to view and modify existing replenishment classes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Replenishment classes (IN208800) You can use this window to define new replenishment classes or to view and modify existing replenishment classes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Replenishment classes are used to define how stock items in different warehouses should be replenished. For example: Stock of a central warehouse may be replenished by purchasing, while stock of other, smaller warehouses can be replenished by transferring the items from the central one. You associate replenishment classes with warehouses in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. For details about replenishment classes, see: [About configuration of automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment/) ## The table
Column Description
Class ID The unique ID of the replenishment class.
Description A brief description of the replenishment class.
Replenishment source

The default source used for stock replenishment. You can select one of the following options as the primary source of stock replenishment:

  • None No replenishment is required.

  • Purchase The items for stock replenishment will be purchased.

  • Manufacturing The items for stock replenishment will be manufactured.

  • Transfer The items for stock replenishment will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.

    Note

    This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Drop shipment The items for stock replenishment are usually sold by drop-ship orders.

    Note

    This field is only displayed if the Drop shipment functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • Purchase to order The items for the stock replenishment will be purchased only when a customer order has been received and in the quantity requested by the order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Replenishment seasonality (IN206600) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/replenishment-seasonality-in206600 page Use this window to create, view, and modify the seasonality settings for replenishment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Replenishment seasonality (IN206600) Use this window to create, view, and modify the seasonality settings for replenishment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use this window to create, view, and modify the seasonality settings for replenishment. For details on how the seasonality settings are used for the configuration of replenishment, see: [About configuration of automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-configuration-of-automated-replenishment/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part This area contains summary information about a particular set of seasonality settings.
Element Description
Seasonality ID The unique ID of the set of seasonality settings. You can use 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the seasonality settings.
Calendar The calendar to be used for determining low seasons and for gathering sales statistics.
## The table This area has a table containing the seasons for product replenishment (usually related to lower sales), which have non-intersecting date ranges.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that this low season record is active.
Season start date The start date of the season.
Season end date

The end date of the season.

CAUTION: Seasons should not intersect.
Factor

The factor (coefficient) used to reduce or increase the item replenishment quantity if replenishment is performed during the low season.

CAUTION: Do not set factor equal to zero.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Ship via codes (CS207500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500 page You use this window to maintain information about each carrier your company uses for shipping goods and about your company's own shipping options. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Ship via codes (CS207500) You use this window to maintain information about each carrier your company uses for shipping goods and about your company's own shipping options. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to maintain information about each carrier your company uses for shipping goods and about your company's own shipping options. A **ship via code** denotes a possible method your company uses to ship goods to customers. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use this area to define a new ship via code or to select an existing shipping service by its code to view or edit its details.
Element Description
Ship via The unique code associated with the non-integrated carrier, or the shipping option of your company. You can use up to 15 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A description of this shipping service or option. You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.
## The Details tab On this tab, you can specify whether this code stands for a common carrier or one of your company's shipping options. You can also select the general ledger accounts to be used to record the charges applied when goods are shipped under this code.
Element Description
Calendar The calendar associated with the carrier. A calendar reflects the carrier’s work hours and the days when the carrier ships the goods.
Calculation method

The method used to calculate freight charges, by using the rate breakdown specified on the Freight rates tab. The following options are available:

Per unit
The rates are specified as rates per weight unit.
Net
The rates are specified as flat rates.
Manual
The freight amount is specified manually for each sales order in the Freight cost field on the Totals tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Base rate The flat-rate charge to be added to the freight amount, which is calculated as specified on the Freight rates tab.
Common carrier

A check box that indicates whether this carrier is a common carrier.

Because common carriers deliver goods from a company branch to the customer location which is the sales point, this check box controls which set of taxes applies to the invoice. If the check box is selected, the taxes associated with the address of the customer location are applied. If the check box is cleared, the taxes associated with the address of the selling branch are applied.
VAT category

The VAT category to be applied to the freight amount when goods are shipped with this code.

For details, see: About freight calculation.
Freight sales account The general ledger account of the Income type that is used to record the freight charges to be paid to the company. This account is associated with the ship via code and is used as one of the sources for the Use freight account from setting in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Freight sales sub.

The freight sales subaccount associated with the ship via code is used as one of the sources for generating the freight sales subaccount according to the rule specified in the Combine freight sub. from field in the Order types (SO201000) window.

This field is available if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window.
Freight expense account The general ledger account of the Expense type to be used to record the freight amounts to be paid to the carrier. This account is not updated by the freight cost amounts from the sales orders shipped by the carrier. This account is updated on release of purchase orders by the amounts of the Freight -type lines with this ship via code specified in the Supplier location column.
Freight expense sub.

The freight expense subaccount associated with the ship via code.

This field is available if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities window.
## The Freight rates tab The tab provides information about how the rates depend on the weight (and optionally volume) of goods to be shipped by the carrier. Rate break points are indicated by shipment weight, with volume specifying an additional restriction, if needed. Rates are flat or per weight unit, depending on the **Calculation method** value on the **Details** tab. For details about the calculation of freight cost, see [About freight calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation/).
Column Description
Weight The minimum weight to which the rate may be applied.
Volume The minimum volume to which the rate may be applied.
Zone ID The shipping zone to which the goods with the specified weight and volume are shipped.
Rate

The flat rate or rate per weight unit, depending on the option (Net or Per Unit) selected in the Calculation method field on the Details tab. The number of decimal places for freight rates is defined by the value in the Price/cost decimal places field in the Organisations (CS101500) window.

The freight amount is calculated as follows:

  • With the Net option selected, the freight amount equals this value for the shipment.
  • With the Per unit option selected, the freight amount equals this value multiplied by the shipment weight.
## The Packages tab The tab holds information about packages or, boxes used with this ship via code. You can define boxes in the [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) window. In Visma Net, you can specify carrier packaging information for all carriers. You can configure the system in such a way that the users can select boxes for shipments manually; alternatively, if the **Automatic packaging** functionality is included in your license, the system automatically suggests the optimal set of boxes for each order and then for each shipment. For more information, see [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/).
Column Description
Box ID The ID of the type of boxes used by the carrier under this ship via code.
Description A description of the type of field.
Tare weight The weight of a box of this type.
Max. weight The maximum weight of items that can fit into a box of this type.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight.
Max. volume The maximum volume a box of the type can hold.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the volume.
Length The length of a box of the type; along with width and height defines the three-dimensional shape of the box.
Width The width of a box of the type; along with length and height, it defines the three-dimensional shape of the box.
Height The height of a box of the type; along with width and length, it defines the three-dimensional shape of the box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Stock items (IN202500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500 page Use this window to view or edit information about specific stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stock items (IN202500) Use this window to view or edit information about specific stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information about stock items, see: [About stock and non-stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-stock-and-non-stock-items/) ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Specify standard costs for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/specify-standard-costs-for-stock-items/) + [Maintain default prices for stock items](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/maintain-default-prices-for-stock-items/) + [Configure a stock item for automatic packaging](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-a-stock-item-for-automatic-packaging/) + [Change a stock item's Item ID](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/change-a-stock-item-s-item-id/) + [Move items to another item class](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/move-items-to-another-item-class/) + [Add bar code to stock item](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/add-bar-code-to-stock-item/) + [Activate and set up excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/enable-and-set-up-excise-duty/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

Update cost
To update the cost of the current stock item.
View restriction groups
To navigate to the Restriction groups by item (IN103020) window, so that you can view or change the restriction groups that have access to the non-stock item.
Change the item ID
To change the ID of the currently selected stock item.
Inquiries

Provides quick access to inquiry forms as follows:

Summary
To open the Inventory summary (IN401000) window and view summary information on the quantities of the stock item available in the system.
Allocation details
To open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window and view detailed information on how quantities of the stock item are allocated among warehouses and locations.
Transaction summary
To open the Inventory transaction summary (IN406000) window and view summary information on inventory transactions related to the stock item.
Transaction details
To open the Inventory transaction history (IN405000) window and view detailed information on inventory transactions.
Transaction history
To open the Inventory transaction history (IN405000) window and view detailed information on inventory transactions posted within a selected period.
Sales prices
To open the Sales prices (AR202000) window and view or edit sales prices for the selected stock item.
Supplier prices
To open the Supplier prices (AP202000) window window and view or edit supplier prices for the selected stock item.
## The top part In this area, you enter basic information about a new stock item. You can also select an existing stock item by its ID and view or change its details.
Element Description
Item ID

The unique alphanumeric identifier of the stock item.

The structure of identifiers is defined by the INVENTORY segmented key in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.

Note

You can later change the stock item ID by selecting Change item ID in the Actions menu of the toolbar.
Item status

The status of the stock item. You can select one of the following options:

Active
Indicates that the item can be used in inventory operations, such as issues and receipts.
No sales
Indicates that the item cannot be sold.
No purchases
Indicates that the item cannot be purchased.
No request
Indicates that the item cannot be used on requisition requests.
Inactive
Indicates that no inventory operations are allowed for the stock item.
Marked for deletion
Indicates that the item is marked for deletion: No inventory operations are allowed, but the record will be kept in the database if any inventory transactions were related to it.
Description A brief description of the stock item.
Work group The product work group to which the stock item is assigned.
Product manager The product manager to whom this stock item is assigned for processing.
## The General information tab In this tab you can specify the general settings for the stock item and unit conversion rules for all units of measure that can be used for the item. ### The Item defaults section
Element Description
Item class The item class to which the stock item is assigned. Selecting a class provides default settings for the item. The Item classes (IN201000) window is used to define settings and attributes for items of the class.
Type

The type of stock item. You can select one of the following options:

  • Finished good
  • Component part
  • Subassembly
Kit A check box that indicates (if selected) that this stock item is a kit. The components of the kit can be specified using the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Valuation method

The method used for the item for inventory valuation, which by default is the valuation method associated with the item class. You can select another valuation method for the item from the following options:

  • Standard
  • Average
  • FIFO
  • Specific
VAT category The VAT code of the stock item, which by default is the VAT code associated with the item class. You can choose another VAT code if needed.
Posting class The posting class of the stock item, which by default is the posting class assigned to the item class. You can select another posting class for the item. You use the Posting classes (IN206000) window to define posting classes and their properties.
Lot/serial class

The lot/serial class to which the stock item is assigned. Use the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window to define lot/serial classes and their properties.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Automatic incremental value

The start value for the automatic incremented segment. Use the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window to define this value.

Note

You can only set the start value for the auto-incremental segment if the option Share the auto-incremental value between all class items is cleared for the chosen class in the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Webhook notification When this check box is selected and saved for a stock item, you will be notified regarding changes. The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the stock item.
### The Warehouse defaults section
Element Description
Default warehouse

The default warehouse used to store the stock item with the specified item ID. Use the Warehouses (IN204000) window to define warehouses and their properties.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If the Multiple warehouses functionality is disabled, the MAIN warehouse is the default warehouse.
Default issue from

The location of the warehouse to be used by default to issue quantities of the selected stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Default receipt to

The location of warehouse to be used by default to receive certain quantities of the specified stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
### The Unit of measurement section
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for this stock item. All other units in the Unit conversion table are expressed with respect to this unit.
Sales unit

The UoM to be used as the sales unit for the stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Purchase unit

The UoM to be used as the purchase unit for the stock item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple units of measure functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Undership threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) for the system to mark the order as shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
Overship threshold (%) The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers; these items should be shipped exactly as specified. This setting provides the default value for items of this class.
### The Unit conversion table
Column Description
From unit The unit of measure for which the conversion parameters are specified.
Multiply/divide The operation to be performed for unit conversion. You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform conversions from different units of measure to the UoM specified as the base unit.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation specified in the Multiply/divide column.
To unit The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
Price adjustment multiplier Changes the price automatically if you change the UoM.
### The Stocktaking section
Element Description
Stocktaking cycles The stocktaking cycle assigned to the stock item. The cycle defines how often the stocktaking counts will be performed for the stock item. Stocktaking cycles and their properties are defined in the Stocktaking types (IN208900) window.
ABC code The ABC code this item is assigned to for the purpose of stocktaking.
Fixed ABC code A check box that indicates (if selected) that the ABC code assigned to the item should not be changed automatically when ABC code assignments are updated.
Movement class The movement class this item is assigned to for purpose of stocktaking.
Fixed movement class A check box that indicates (if selected) that the movement class assigned to the item should not be changed automatically when movement class assignments are updated.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
CN code Commodity codes according to the Combined nomenclature (CN) annually revised and published as a Commission regulation in the EU, Requirement for Intrastat reporting.
Country of origin The country the shipments is sent from.
Supplementary measure unit Standardised codes (EU) for measure units for Intrastat reporting. Required for certain types of items.
## The Price/cost information tab You can use the settings on this tab to specify the pending base price and the pending standard cost for the selected stock item, and you can view the cost statistics. ### The Price management section
Element Description
Price class The item price class associated with the stock item. These classes, which are used to group stock items with similar price calculation methods, are defined in the Item price classes (IN209000) window.
Price work group The work group responsible for product pricing. Select the pricing work group for the stock item.
Price manager The manager responsible for the product pricing.
Subject to commission A check box that indicates (if selected) that commissions should be paid on the sale of this stock item.
Min. mark-up (%) The minimum mark-up percentage defined for the stock item.
Mark-up (%) The percentage of the item cost you add to get the selling price for this stock item.
List price The manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP) of the stock item.
Default price The price of the stock item. This price is used as the default price, if there are no other prices (from any price list) defined for this item in the Customer ledger workspace.
### The Standard cost section
Element Description
Pending cost The pending standard cost for the stock item.
Pending cost date The date when the pending standard cost becomes effective.
Current cost Read-only. This field displays the current standard cost for the stock item.
Effective date Read-only. This field shows the effective date for the current standard cost of the stock item.
Last cost Read-only. This field showing the last standard cost defined for the stock item.
### The Cost price statistics section
Element Description
Last cost Read-only. This field showing the last standard cost used for the stock item.
Last cost incl. landed costs

Read-only. The last cost plus landed costs divided per item on the transaction from where the last cost is taken.

This is available when the Include landed cost in unit cost check box is selected in the Inventory transaction history (IN405000) window.
Average cost Read-only. This field that displays the average cost for the stock item.
Min. cost Read-only. This field that displays the minimum cost for the stock item.
Max. cost Read-only. This field showing the maximum cost for the stock item.
### The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section
Element Description
ROT Select this option if the item is related to ROT deduction (repairs, conversion, extension).
RUT Select this option if the item is related to RUT deduction (cleaning, maintenance, laundry).
Type

Select one of the following types:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost
Type of work

The following work types are available for RUT:

  • Babysitting
  • Cleaning
  • Cloth maintenance
  • Furniture
  • Gardening
  • IT services
  • Kitchen appliance
  • Laundry
  • Personal care
  • Relocation service
  • Snow job
  • Supervision of housing
  • Transport to sales

The following work types are available for ROT:

  • Bricklaying
  • Construction
  • Drain work
  • Electricity work
  • Glass work
  • Painting
  • Plumbing
## The Warehouse details tab This tab displays information about the availability of the item at various warehouses and about warehouse-specific properties of the item. You can change these settings in the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. > [!NOTE] > This tab is only available if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Button Description
Add warehouse details Navigates to the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window, where you can add warehouse-specific details of the item.
Column Description
Standard This check box indicates (if selected) that this is the standard warehouse for the stock item.
Warehouse The warehouse where the stock item is available.
Default receipt to

The location where the stock item is received by default. The default shipping and receiving locations for the item are specified in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.

Note

This column is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled
Default issue from

The location from which the stock item is issued by default.

Note

This column is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled
Status The status of the warehouse.
Inventory account The default General ledger account to be used for transactions related to the stock item. This account can be defined for the warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Inventory sub. The default General ledger subaccount to be used for transactions related to the stock item. This subaccount can also be defined for the warehouse in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Product work group The product work group for this stock item, which is defined in The top part of this window.
Product manager The product manager assigned to this stock item, which is defined in The top part of this window.
Override standard cost This check box indicates (if selected) that the standard cost may be overridden for this stock item. This option is assigned on the Price/cost information tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Price override This check box indicates (if selected) that the price can be overridden for this stock item. (This option is also assigned on the Price/cost information tab of the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.)
Qty. on hand The quantity of this item available (on hand) at the warehouse. This value is calculated based on the availability settings specified for the item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Override preferred supplier This check box indicates (if selected) that you may choose a supplier other than the preferred supplier for the item replenishment in this warehouse.
Default supplier The preferred supplier for this stock item when stocked at this warehouse, as defined in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window.
Override replenishment settings This check box indicates (if selected) that you may change replenishment settings for this item at this warehouse.
Seasonality The seasonality settings used for this item at this warehouse, by their ID.
Replenishment source The source for the item replenishment.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse that serves as the replenishment source for the item if the item stock is replenished by a transfer.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that you may change the service level for this item.
Service level (%) The service level assigned to this item at this warehouse.
Last forecast date The date when the forecast for this item was calculated last.
Daily demand forecast The daily demand for the item at this warehouse according to the forecast.
Daily demand forecast error (STDEV) The standard deviation error calculated for the forecasted daily demand.
## The Supplier details tab On this tab, you can define the supplier from which the item is purchased, view the supplier's prices for the item, and display the terms of quantity discount schedules offered by the supplier. The supplier's prices can be updated when a new price catalogue is received from the supplier.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is active.
Default This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is the default supplier for this item. Select this check box to mark the supplier that is the main supplier of the item. When you create a purchase order to purchase an item, the default supplier is selected for this purchase.
Supplier ID The ID of the supplier. The list of suppliers is maintained using the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item is purchased.
Location The supplier’s location from which the item is purchased, which by default is the supplier’s default location. These locations are defined for the supplier in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.
Warehouse The warehouse to receive the item.
Purchase unit The unit of measure in which the item is purchased. This UoM is specified on the General settings tab of this window.
Supplier item ID The Item ID used by supplier for this item.
Lead time (days)

Read only.

This column shows the lead time for the selected supplier location. This lead time is defined in the Shipping instructions section on the General information tab of the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.
Override This check box indicates (if selected) that the values in the following columns should be overridden. You can change the values in these columns only if this check box is selected.
Shipment lead time (days)

The additional lead time for the selected item, which represents the additional time required by the supplier to produce, assemble, and dispatch the item.

This value is added to the supplier Lead time value, defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window, to calculate the resulting lead time required to deliver the purchased item from the supplier’s location to your company’s warehouse.
Min. order freq. (days) The minimum purchase frequency for the item when purchased from this supplier.
Min. order qty. The minimum order quantity for the item when purchased from this supplier. The system uses this value when you prepare replenishment requests in the Prepare replenishment (IN508000) window.
Max. order qty. The maximum order quantity for the item when purchased from this supplier. The system uses this value when you prepare replenishment requests in the Prepare replenishment (IN508000) window.
Lot size The lot size for the item when purchased from this supplier.
EOQ The economic order quantity when the item is purchased from this supplier. This value represents the quantity on the order that minimises the total inventory holding costs and ordering costs.
Currency ID The currency used by the supplier to charge for the item you purchase.
Last supplier price

Read only.

This column shows the last supplier price defined for the stock item.
## The Attributes tab Use this tab to view and enter additional information about the stock item, such as attributes and the sales categories. Also, by using the elements available on this tab, you can select a file that contains an image of the stock item and upload it to the system (the image will be displayed on this tab). ### The Attributes table
Column Description
Attribute The attribute available for this stock item. The list of attributes is defined for the item class.
Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for a non-stock item of the class.
Value The value of the attribute specific to the item.
### The Sales categories table
Column Description
Category ID The sales category identifier.
## The Packaging tab On this tab, you add information about the item properties that can be used for packaging. ### The Measurements section
Column Description
Weight The weight of the base unit of the stock item, expressed in the weight unit of measure.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used to measure weight.
Volume The volume of the base unit of the stock item, measured in the volume UOM.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used to measure volume.
### The Automatic packaging section
Column Description
Packaging option

The option that the system uses to automatically determine the optimal set of boxes for this item on each sales order. You can select one of the following options:

Manual
To let the user select boxes for this item at the user’s discretion.
By weight
To select appropriate boxes by item weight on the order. In the Boxes table (which appears when you select this option), select the boxes and enter the maximum weight (measured in the specified UoMs) that can fit into each box. This item can be combined in a box with other items if the Pack separately option is not selected for the item.
By quantity
To select appropriate boxes by item quantity on the order. With this option selected, the item will be always packed separately from other items. (The Pack separately check box will be selected automatically and will not be available for editing.) In the Boxes table (which appears when you select this option), select the boxes and enter the quantities (measured in the specified UoMs) that can fit into each box.
By weight and volume
To select boxes for this item by weight and by volume. This option is intended for items that can be packed with other items. If you select this option, do not select the Pack separately option. In the Boxes table (which appears when you select this option), select the boxes and enter the maximum weight and maximum volume that can fit into each box.
Pack separately A check box that indicates (if selected) that this item should be packed separately from other items. This check box is automatically selected (and not available for editing) if By quantity is selected as the packaging option.
## The Cross-reference tab You use this tab to maintain cross-references between the item ID of the stock item used in your company and identifiers used by your suppliers and customers for the item.
Column Description
Alt. item ID type

The type of alternative codification used for the item, if applicable. You can select one of the following options:

Customer part number
Use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the customer part number.
Supplier part number
Use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the supplier part numbers.
Global
Use this type to maintain the cross-references between the item ID and the global codification.
Barcode
Use this type to specify (or enter it by using a bar code scanner) a bar code for the item ID.
Supplier/customer The supplier or customer (by its ID) that uses the alternative identification for this stock item.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the stock item (under the specified item ID) as used by the supplier or customer.
UoM The unit of measure used for this alternative item ID.
Description Any comments applicable to the specified cross-reference.
Default A check box you select to set the current alternative item ID as the default alternative item ID.
## The Replenishment information tab On this tab, you can specify replenishment settings and parameters that are used for the item by default in any warehouse. You can use the default settings of the item class, or you can specify other values if needed for this item. For particular warehouses, the item replenishment settings can be overridden by using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window.
Column Description
Repl. class The replenishment class to be used to replenish the stock of this item. To define the replenishment class or view its details, use the Replenishment classes (IN208800) window.
Seasonality The set of seasonality settings to be used with the replenishment class.
Source

The replenishment source to be used for the stock item. By default, it is the replenishment source associated with the replenishment class. You can select another source, if necessary, from the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed.
Purchase
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be purchased.
Manufacturing
The requested quantity (for stock replenishment) of the item will be manufactured.
Transfer
The requested quantity of the item will be transferred from a replenishment warehouse.
Drop-shipment
The option to be used by default for the item if this item is usually sold by using drop ship orders.
Purchase to order
The item will be purchased only when a customer order exists. If the purchased item will be received at the default (for the item) warehouse, for the quantity requested on the order, a transfer order will be generated automatically.
Method

The replenishment method to be used for the stock item with the selected replenishment source. This can be one of the following options:

None
No replenishment will be performed for the stock item. The value associated with the Purchase to order replenishment source.
Minimum/maximum
The system will compute the replenishment quantity as the difference between the maximum and minimum quantities with the quantity on supply deducted. The quantity on supply is the quantity of the item on unreleased purchase orders, on purchase receipts, and in transit.
Fixed reorder quantity
The system will initiate replenishment for the item once the minimum stock level is reached and the quantity on replenishment request will be equal to the economical order quantity (EOQ) value specified for the chosen supplier.
Replenishment warehouse The warehouse used as a source of replenishment if the source is Purchase to order, Drop-shipment, or Transfer.
Max. shelf life (days) The maximum number of days the stock item can be stored in a warehouse.
Launch date The date starting the time period when the specified replenishment settings will be in effect for this stock item.
Termination date The date ending the time period when the selected replenishment settings will apply to this stock item.
Service level (%) The service level assigned to the item. For details, see: About replenishment parameters based on demand forecast
Safety stock The safety stock (in base units) of the stock item to be used to calculate the quantity required for replenishment; these extra quantities of the item are kept at a warehouse to prevent possible stock-outs.
Reorder point The stock level that, when reached, prompts the system to initiate stock replenishment for the stock item. This quantity should be set equal to the anticipated demand during the lead time plus the safety stock.
Max. qty. The maximum stock level for the replenishment. When the quantity of the item falls below the Reorder point value, the system generates a replenishment request with the quantity required to replenish the stock up to the Max. qty. value.
Transfer ERQ The economic reorder quantity defined for transfers that involves this stock item. This value represents the level of inventory that minimises the total transfer costs.
Demand forecast model The demand forecast model to be used to calculate replenishment parameters for this item.
Forecast period type

The type of period to be used for selecting historical data for the model, which can be one of the following:

  • Quarter
  • Month
  • Week
  • Day
Periods to analyse The number of periods to be used for selecting historical data for the model.
## The Deferral settings tab Use this tab to specify how deferrals should be performed for the stock item when it is sold or purchased. If no deferral code is assigned to the item, no deferrals will be performed and the revenue or expense will be recognized immediately. If a code is assigned to the item, revenue from its sale will be recognised according to the code's schedule. If the stock item is a package, also known as a multiple delivery arrangement (MDA), specify how the item price can be split into components (separate units of accounting) that use different methods of revenue (or expense) recognition to comply with revenue recognition regulations in your country. For each component, you can assign an individual deferral code in the **Revenue components** table. ### The top part
Element Description
Deferral code The deferral code assigned to the stock item.
Default term The standard amount of years a term consists of.
Use component subaccounts This check box indicates (if selected) that the component subaccounts will be used in the component-associated deferrals.
Total percentage The total percentage of the item price, as split among components. This value is calculated automatically as you add components and specify percentages for them. If the item is not a package, the total percentage is set to 100.
### The Revenue components table
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the component.
Sales account The income account used to record sales for this component.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used to record sales for this component.
UoM The unit of measure used for this component.
Quantity The quantity of the specified units for the component.
Deferral code The deferral code assigned to this component.
Default term The standard term of the specified units for the component.
Default term UoM The standard UoM used for the component.
Allocation method An option indicating whether you will specify the component’s price as a percentage of the item’s price or a fixed amount in the columns that follow. Select Percentage or Fixed amount.
Fixed amount The fixed amount of the item price assigned to the component if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Amount option column.
Percentage This component’s percentage of the item’s price if the Percentage option is selected in the Amount option column.
## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you specify the default General ledger accounts to be used for inventory transactions performed with the stock item. For a new item, these elements are initially populated by the settings of the posting class selected for the item on the **General settings** tab of this window. Posting classes can be created in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. You can override the posting settings for the item by selecting the appropriate accounts and subaccounts.
Element Description
Inventory account

The asset account to be used for posting inventory transactions related to this stock item.

This account is used if the option Item is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item.
Inventory sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the inventory subaccount to be used with the inventory account.
Reason code sub. The subaccount to be used for this stock item when the transaction has a reason code specified.
Sales account The income account to be used for this stock item to record sales.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used for this item to record sales.
Sales - non-taxable account The income account to be used for this stock item to record non-taxable sales.
Sales - EU account The income account to be used for this stock item to record EU sales.
Sales - export account The income account to be used for this stock item to record export sales.
COGS account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record the cost of goods sold (COGS) once the sales order is released.
COGS sub. The subaccount to be used for this item with the COGS account.
Expense acct, non-taxable The income account to be used for this stock item to record non-taxable expenses.
Expense EU account The income account to be used for this stock item to record EU expenses.
Expense account, import The income account to be used for this stock item to record import expenses.
Standard cost variance account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record any differences between the currently effective standard cost and the cost on the inventory receipt for the specified quantities of the stock item. This account will be used only if this item is assigned the standard cost valuation method.
Standard cost variance sub The subaccount to be used for this stock item with the standard cost variance account.
Standard cost revaluation account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record the differences in inventory value estimated by using the pending standard cost and the currently effective standard cost for the quantities on hand of the stock item. Revaluation is performed at the moment of updating standard costs or when the currently effective standard cost becomes the last standard cost, and the pending cost becomes the effective standard cost. This account will be used only if this item is assigned the standard cost valuation method.
Standard cost revaluation sub. The subaccount to be used for this stock item with the standard cost revaluation account.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used for this stock item to accrue purchase order item amounts for this item, if the option Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item. Whenever receipts linked to purchase orders are released, the system generates transactions between the purchase accrual account and the inventory account.
Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Purchase price variance account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record any differences between the extended price on the purchase receipt and the extended price on the purchase invoice. This account is used if this item is assigned any of the valuation methods except for the standard cost valuation method.
Purchase price variance sub. The subaccount to be used for this item with the purchase price variance account.
Landed cost variance account The expense account to be used for this stock item to record any differences in landed costs that occurred between the landed costs amounts specified on purchase receipts and the amounts on inventory receipts.
Landed cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the landed cost variance account for this item.
Deferral account

The account to be used to hold the deferral amount until it is fully recognised. The account type should be specified as follows:

  • A liability account for a deferral code of the revenue type
  • An asset account for a deferral code of the expense type
Deferral sub. The subaccount to be used with the deferral account.
### The Excise duty section This section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. The priority order in which the accounts in this section are used is: 1. from the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, and if empty, 1. from the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. For information about the generated General ledger batch, see [About excise duties](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/about-excise-duties/).
Element Description
Sales account The income account that is connected to the VAT payable account (it has a set VAT category). The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Sales sub The subaccount to be used with the sales account.
Sales offset account The income account that is not connected to the VAT payable account (it does not have a set VAT category), used to balance the sales account. The excise duty amounts are recorded in debit.
Sales offset sub The subaccount to be used with the sales offset account.
Payable account The liability account that accumulates the excise duty amounts to be paid to a tax agency for the excise duty reporting period. The excise duty amounts are recorded in credit.
Payable sub The corresponding payable subaccount.
### The Expense accounts section These details are only applicable on purchase invoices with stock items and their expense tracking.
Element Description
Use Expense accounts If this check box is selected and when a purchase invoice is released, the following transactions will be added to journal transactions.
Purchase P&L (debit) Select an account here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Purchase P&L sub. Select a subaccount here for a domestic supplier in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L (credit) Select an account for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Inventory changes P&L sub. Select a subaccount for changes in inventories for goods and supplies in P/L account.
Purchase EU Select an account here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase EU sub. Select a subaccount here for an EU supplier in P/L account.
Purchase import Select an account for a non-EU supplier.
Purchase import sub. Select a subaccount for a non-EU supplier.
## The Restriction groups tab This tab provides information about sub item restriction groups and restriction groups the item is included in. The list of groups is read-only and cannot be changed in this window. By using this window, you can only include the item in a group or exclude the item from a group. If subitems are enabled in your system, the sub item restriction groups are created using the [Restriction groups (SM201030)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-sm201030/) window and listed in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window.
Custom action Description
Group details Navigates to the Restriction groups (SM201030) window, where you can view details of the restriction group.
Column Description
Group name The name of the sub item restriction group or restriction group.
Specific type The functional type of the group.
Description A brief description of the group.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the group is active.
Group type

A read-only column that shows the type of the restriction group:

  • A
  • A inverse
  • B
  • B inverse
## The Excise duty tab This tab section is only available if the **Excise duty** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. On this tab, you can view the excise duties this item is connected to, as set in the [Duty items (EF208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/excise-duty-windows/duty-items-ef208000/) window. Here, you also set the conversion factor from the duty UoM to the item's base unit, if these UoMs are not the same.
Column Description
Duty type The duty type ID.
Duty group The duty group ID.
From duty UoM The duty rate unit for the duty type and group, as set in the Duty rates (EF207000) window.
Multiply/divide The operation to be performed for conversion from the duty UoM to the UoM specified as the base unit. Only Multiply is supported.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation Multiply. When the duty UoM and item’s base unit are the same, the conversion factor is automatically set to 1.
To item base UoM The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
## The Description tab On this tab, you can create stock item descriptions that include tables, images, and web links. ## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for a stock item, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific stock item. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Stocktaking cycles (IN208700) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-cycles-in208700 page You use this window to define stocktaking cycles used in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking cycles (IN208700) You use this window to define stocktaking cycles used in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define stocktaking cycles used in your company. The stocktaking cycles are used to group the stock items for periodic counting with the class-specific period. For more details on using stocktaking cycles, see: [Overview of stocktaking options.](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-overview-of-stocktaking-options/) ## The table This table displays the stocktaking cycles defined in the system. You can edit and define new cycles.
Column Description
Cycle ID The ID of the stocktaking cycle. An alphanumeric string of up to 6 characters can be used.
Description A brief description of the stocktaking cycle.
Counts per year The number of counts per year for the stocktaking cycle.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Stocktaking count (IN305010) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010 page In this window, you can view the stocktaking documents that have the Counting in progress status and enter the data that results from stocktaking count. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking count (IN305010) In this window, you can view the stocktaking documents that have the Counting in progress status and enter the data that results from stocktaking count. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the stocktaking documents that have the **Counting in progress** status and enter the data that results from stocktaking count. Once you enter any digit in this window, the system commits the data to the database. This makes the entered data immediately visible to all users who may be simultaneously using this window for data entry or managing the stocktaking in the [Stocktaking review (IN305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000/) window. For more information about how to take stocktaking with Visma Net, see [About stocktaking](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stocktaking-counts/about-stocktaking/) ## The top part You use this area to select a stocktaking document with the **Counting in progress** status. For your convenience while you are entering count data, you can select the lines that contain particular stock items, relate to a particular location, or fall within a particular range of line numbers.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the stocktaking document, which the system automatically assigned when a user generated this document by using the Prepare stocktaking (IN504000) window.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stocktaking counting is performed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The warehouse location.

Select a location to display only the lines related to it, or make no selection to display lines related to all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Item ID

A stock item.

Select a particular stock item to display only the lines with this item. Make no selection to display lines related to all stock items.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Description The description of the stocktaking document.
Freeze date The date when all operations with the items involved in physical counting were frozen.
Number of lines The number of lines the document contains.
From line no. The start number of the range of lines to be displayed.
Last line no. The end number of the range of lines to be displayed.
## The table This table contains the list of stock items arranged by warehouse location, subitem, and lot or serial number in the order specified in the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window. The quantities resulting from stocktaking should be entered manually. Each line in the document has its own status. Once a quantity is entered for the line, the status of the line changes from **Not entered** or **Skipped** to **Entered**.
Button Description
Add Opens the Add line dialog box, which you use to enter an item. This dialog box can be used to efficiently enter information about items using a bar code scanner.
Column Description
Status

The status of the current line in the stocktaking document, which indicates whether count data was entered for it.

Lines with no count data have the Not entered status.
Line no.

The number of the line in the stocktaking document.

A line number is assigned to one or more items that have the same item ID, are located in the same storage location, and, if applicable, have a specific subitem code or lot or serial number.
Tag no.

The tag number for the line item.

Note

This column is only available if the Use tags option in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window was selected at the time the document was created.
Item ID The item ID of the line item.
Description The description that was provided for the item.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Book quantity The quantity of the item available on hand at the specified warehouse location.
Physical quantity The physical quantity of the item; this value is entered manually for the item.
Variance quantity The difference between the book quantity and the physical quantity for the item, as calculated automatically by the system.
### The Add line dialog box By using this dialog box, you can add a line specifying an stock item, and you can effectively add items by scanning their bar codes. To accomplish this, make sure the **Add receipt line automatically** option is selected. Once the item bar code is scanned, the system finds the item record and fills in the dialog box elements using the item default values. Then you can select the **Add one unit per bar code** option to increase the item quantity by one unit each time you scan the bar code or enter the item quantity manually.
Element Description
Barcode An optional element that contains the barcode of the item.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
UoM The read-only element that displays the unit of measure for the items.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Qty. The physical quantity of the item as entered manually.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the item with this specific lot or serial number.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Add one unit per barcode If you select this check box, the system increases the item quantity by one unit each time the item bar code is scanned or entered manually.
Auto add line If you select this check box, the system automatically adds a new line to the review for each bar code scanned for the first time. If the bar code has been scanned before, the item quantity will be increased by one unit.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Stocktaking review (IN305000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-review-in305000 page Use this window to view the results of a completed stocktaking and to manage the counting and data entry processes for an active stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking review (IN305000) Use this window to view the results of a completed stocktaking and to manage the counting and data entry processes for an active stocktaking. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can select an active stocktaking document, start the count data entry process, review and edit the results of the counting, complete the stocktaking review process, or cancel the stocktaking document. You generate stocktaking documents by using the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window, and count data is entered in the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Finish counting Changes the status of the stocktaking document to Counting in progress, which makes the document available for data entry. If the Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state check box was not selected for this warehouse, this action also reverses the freezing of the warehouse or item involved.
Complete stocktaking Completes the stocktaking review process. As a result, the status of the stocktaking document changes to Completed.
Cancel stocktaking

Cancels the stocktaking review process and changes the status of the current stocktaking document to Cancelled.

Usually, the user cancels the document if it is not correct or it contains unmatched data. Cancelled documents do not generate inventory adjustment transactions.
## The top part In this area, you select a stocktaking document to review its data.
Element Description
Reference no. The reference number of the stocktaking document to be reviewed.
Warehouse

An info field that shows the warehouse where the stocktaking count is performed.

Note

This field only is displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Status

An info field that shows the current status of this stocktaking document. The following options are available:

Counting in progress
Indicates that the stocktaking counting process is occurring and the stocktaking document can be edited. You can modify and save a document with this status. After all the available data has been entered, you can complete the counting process by clicking Finish counting.
Completed
Means that the counting and reviewing are completed. Documents with the Completed status cannot be modified.
Cancelled
Indicates that the document was cancelled and the data in the document was not used for generating adjustments. Documents with the Cancelled status cannot be edited.
Freeze date

An info field that shows the date when the stocktaking document was created.

On this date, all stock items selected for the stocktaking were “frozen,” meaning that no operations for these items are allowed until the document is cancelled or the counting process is completed.
Description The description of the stocktaking.
Total physical qty.

An info field showing the total actual quantity of all stock items listed in the document.

The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of all physical quantities of all items listed.
Total variance qty.

An info field showing the total variance quantity for the document.

The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of differences between the book quantity and the physical quantity for each item in the list.
Total variance cost

An info field showing the total variance cost for all stock items listed in the document.

The system automatically calculates this cost as the sum of differences between the item’s book quantity and the physical quantity for all items in the document.
## The Stocktaking details tab This tab displays the list of stock items for the selected document. Generally, the information about item physical quantities should be entered manually using the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window, but it can be entered using this window too. Depending on whether the data has been entered, the statuses of the lines in the document may change. Documents that have lines with the **Not entered** status cannot be completed. To complete the stocktaking count, for lines with **Not entered** status (for which the data is not available), perform one of these actions: + Set zeros as physical quantities by clicking **Set not entered to zero**. + Set the statuses of the lines to **Skipped** by clicking **Set not entered to skipped**.
Button Description
Add Opens the Add line dialog box, which you use to enter a new line for the item. This dialog box can be used to efficiently enter information about items using a bar code scanner.
Update actual cost Updates the cost of the stock items using quantities resulting from the stocktaking. The average cost is used for all items, no matter what cost valuation method is assigned.
Set not entered to zero Sets zero as the physical quantity for each line with the Not entered status and changes the status of the line to Entered.
Set not entered to skipped For each line with the Not entered status, changes the status to Skipped. The lines with the Skipped status are not processed by the system.
Column Description
Status

The status of the line of the stocktaking document, which indicates whether the actual physical quantity has been specified for the line.

Lines with no data have the Not entered status.

When you enter the count data in the line, its status changes to Entered.

You can also change the status of the lines from Not entered to Skipped. The system does not process the lines with the Skipped status.
Line no. The number of the line in the stocktaking document.
Tag no. The tag number for the line item, which is the stock item with the properties specified in the line, such as location, subitem, and lot or serial number.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Description The description provided for the item.
Subitem

The subitem code of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Stock subitems functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the item with this specific lot or serial number.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Book quantity The quantity of the item available on hand at the specified warehouse location.
Physical quantity The physical quantity of the item as entered manually.
Variance quantity The difference between the book quantity and the physical quantity for the line item. This value is calculated automatically by the system.
Unit cost The last cost of the item’s base unit as approximation of its unit cost during the count. (The last cost is shown here for all items, no matter which cost valuation method is assigned to the item.) When the stocktaking is completed, the actual unit cost will be recalculated in accordance with the valuation method, count results, and other settings.
Ext. variance cost The difference between the extended cost calculated based on the book quantity and the extended cost calculated based on the physical quantity for the item.
Reason code The reason code for the item. To define the reason codes, use the Reason codes (CS211000) window.
### The Add line dialog box
Element Description
Barcode An optional field that contains the barcode of the item.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Subitem

The subitem code of the item.

Note

This field is displayed only if the Stock subitems functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
UoM Read only. This field displays the unit of measure for the items.
Location

The warehouse location of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Qty. The physical quantity of the item as entered manually.
Lot/serial number

The lot or serial number of the item.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the item with this specific lot or serial number.

Note

This column is displayed only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Add one unit per bar code If you select this check box, the system increases the item quantity by one unit each time the item barcode is scanned or entered manually.
Auto add line

If you select this check box, the system automatically adds a new line to the review for each bar code scanned for the first time.

If the bar code has been scanned before, the item quantity will be increased by one unit.
Add Adds the entered data as a line to the review if the Add line automatically option was not selected.
Add and close Adds the entered data as a line to the review and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the review.
## The Adjustment info tab This tab displays information about adjustments generated for the document. An adjustment is generated for all line items for which there are transactions recorded in the database.
Element Description
Adjustment ref. no.

The reference number of the adjustment document generated for the stocktaking document.

Click the number to view the adjustment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Stocktaking types (IN208900) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-types-in208900 page In this window, you can define the types of stocktaking to be used at your company warehouse or warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking types (IN208900) In this window, you can define the types of stocktaking to be used at your company warehouse or warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use this area to create a new type of stocktaking. You can also select an existing type to modify it or view its details.
Element Description
Type ID The unique ID of the type of the stocktaking.
Description A description of the type.
Generation method

The method to be used to generate stocktaking sheets for the type. Select one of the following options:

Full stocktaking
To include all the items available at the specified warehouse or locations.
By item
To count only particular stock items, which you specify on the Item selection tab.
By movement class
To include only the items for which stocktaking is due according to the stocktaking frequency associated with their movement classes. If you select this generation method, choose the movement class on the Movement class selection tab. The stocktaking frequency of a movement class is the number of counts per year required for its items, as set in the Movement classes (IN208600) window.
By ABC code
To include only the items associated with the specific code or items for which counting is due according to stocktaking frequency associated with items’ ABC codes. You can select the code using the appropriate tab. The stocktaking frequency is determined by the stocktaking per year value, as set in the ABC codes (IN208500) window.
By cycle
To include only the items for which stocktaking is due according to the assigned stocktaking cycles. You can select the cycle by using the appropriate tab.
By item class
To include only items belonging to the specific class. You can select the class by using the appropriate tab.
## The Warehouse/location selection tab > [!NOTE] > This tab is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. By using this tab, you can view or define the warehouse where stocktaking of this type take place. If the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality is enabled in your system, you can specify locations. If no warehouse and locations are specified for this type of stocktaking, the type can be used at any warehouse and any locations. You can select the particular warehouse and locations for generating stocktaking sheets in the [Prepare stocktaking (IN504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-stocktaking-in504000/) window.
Element Description
Warehouse The particular warehouse where stocktaking of this type will take place. You can leave the field blank to apply this type at any warehouse.
Button Description
Add

Opens the dialog box that you can use to enter a scope of locations.

Select the start location in the Start location field, select the end location in the End location field, and then click Add to add the selected scope of locations to the Locations table.
Column Description
Location The location where counting of the type will take place.
Description The description of the location.
Pick priority The pick priority specified for the location.
## The Assignment order tab On this tab, you define the order in which tag and line numbers are assigned to items on the count sheets prepared for stocktakings of this type. ### The Line and tag number assignment order section These elements are used to specify how the line numbers and tags should be generated for items included in the stocktaking. In the list, the items will be grouped by the first value; in each first-level group, the items will be grouped by the second value, and so forth. Tags will be generated if the **Use tags** check box in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window is selected.
Element Description
1

An option to group list items for the stocktaking’s first-level groups. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

By item ID
Lists the items by their item ID.
By lot/serial number
Lists the items by lot or serial number.
By item description
Lists items by their item descriptions.
2

An option defining the order of items in each first-level group. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

By item ID
Lists the items by their item ID.
By lot/serial number
Lists the items by lot or serial number.
By item description
Lists items by their item descriptions.
3

An option defining the order of items in each of the second-level groups. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

By item ID
Lists the items by their item ID.
By lot/serial number
Lists the items by lot or serial number.
By item description
Lists items by their item descriptions.
4

An option defining the order of items in each third-level group. You can select one of the following options:

  • - (no order) - Lists the items in the order in which they are stored in the database.

  • By location - Lists the items by their location.

    Note

    This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

  • By item ID - Lists the items by their item ID.

+

  • By lot/serial number - Lists the items by lot or serial number.
  • By item description - Lists items by their item descriptions.
Element Description
Blank lines to add The number of blank lines (if any) to be added at the end of the stocktaking sheets, for use by employees if any unregistered items are detected and counted.
## The Item selection tab You use this tab, which appears when you select the **By item** generation method, to create a list of particular stock items for counts of this stocktaking type; you can instead select items at random, by their previous stocktaking date, or if they have negative quantities at one or more locations. ### The Selection method section
Element Description
Selection method

The option to be used for selecting stock items for stocktaking of the type:

Items with negative book qty.
Includes in the count items that have a negative quantity at one or more locations.
Random items (up to)
Includes items selected at random up to the specified number of items. You specify the Number of items, which appears once the option is selected.
List of items
Includes the specific items you list in the Items table.
Last count on or before
Includes items that were counted before the specified number of days from the current business date. Specify the number of days in Last count before (days), which appears if you choose this option.
Button Description
Add Opens the dialog box that enables you to add multiple items to the Items table.
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the stock item.
Description The description provided for the stock item.
Item status The status of the stock item.
Item class The item class associated with the item.
## The Movement class selection tab This tab, which appears only if you select the **By movement class** generation method, provides item selection options associated with movement classes.
Element Description
Movement class The movement class whose items will be included in the count of the type.
By frequency This check box indicates (if selected) that the items will be selected for counting from those that are due by frequencies associated with all movement classes.
## The ABC code selection tab This tab, which appears when you select the **By ABC code** generation method, provides item selection options associated with ABC codes.
Element Description
ABC code The ABC code whose items will be included in the count of the type.
By frequency This check box indicates (if selected) that the items will be selected for counting from those that are due by frequencies associated with all ABC codes.
## The stocktaking cycle selection tab This tab, appearing only when you select the **By cycle** generation method, provides two alternative item selection options associated with the stocktaking cycles.
Element Description
Cycle ID

The stocktaking cycle whose items will be included in the stocktaking of the type.

Select the cycle and clear the By frequency check box.
By frequency

This check box indicates (if selected) that the items will be selected for counting from those that are due by frequencies associated with all stocktaking cycles.

Selecting the check box disables the Cycle ID box.
## The Item class selection tab By using this tab (shown only if you select the **By item class** generation method), you can select the item class for this stocktaking type.
Element Description
Item class ID The item class.
Description The description of the item class

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Summary of items sold and purchased (IN40199S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/summary-of-items-sold-and-purchased-in40199s page You use this window to view detailed information about items sold and purchased, and quantities on shipments and receipts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Summary of items sold and purchased (IN40199S) You use this window to view detailed information about items sold and purchased, and quantities on shipments and receipts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The number of sold items - the sold quantity - consists of the quantity on shipment and the open quantity. This number is aggregated per item ID. You can specify criteria to filter the data to be displayed. ## The top part In this area, you can select a summary of items sold and purchased, and they can be grouped by financial period. You can also include your incomplete document lines in this summary.
Element Description
Item ID Select which item ID you want to be shown from the Select - Item ID dialog box.
Item class Select which item class you want to be shown from the Select - Item class dialog box.
Item type

Select the item type you want to be shown. You have three options:

  • All:
  • Stock item:
  • Non-stock item:
From period Select from which period you want the items to be shown from the Select - From period dialog box.
To period Select to which period you want the items to be shown from the Select - To period dialog box.
Include incomplete document lines If this check box is selected, the incomplete document lines will also be listed. Incomplete lines are the transactions for sold or purchased items which have not been shipped or received yet.
Group by financial period If this check box is selected, you see the items grouped by the period in which they were sold and purchased.
## The table The items will be listed in the table area.
Element Description
Item The ID of the item.
Type The type of the item.
Item description The description of the item.
Quantity sold The quantity of the item that is sold.
Qty. on shipments The quantity of the item that is shipped.
Quantity purchased The quantity of the item that is purchased.
Qty. on receipt The quantity of the item that has been received.
Item class The item class of the item.
Item class description The description of the item class.
Period The period in which the item was sold or purchased.
Pro forma invoice (SO64300S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/pro-forma-invoice-so64300s section You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice (SO64300S) You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Report parameters tab
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number; select one of the open shipments to prepare the pro forma invoice for it.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Transfers (IN304000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/transfers-in304000 page This window is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Transfers (IN304000) This window is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to view, edit, and create transfer documents, as well as to release balanced transfers. The processing of transfers depends on certain selections in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. By default, transfers are saved with the **On hold** status if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected. Document totals are validated on entry if the **Validate document totals on entry** check box is selected. When you release a transfer, its transactions will be posted to the general ledger if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected. Transfers can be defined as one-step or as two-step, performed by using the **in-transit** account and completed by receipts at the target warehouses. For more information about inventory transfers, see: [About inventory transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-transactions/about-inventory-transactions/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Initiates the document release process, which changes the status of the transfer document to Released.
Reports

Provides direct access to the following inventory reports related to inventory transfer:
## The top part In this part, you can select an existing transfer document by its reference number or specify summary information about a new transfer.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the transfer document, which the system automatically assigns according to the sequence assigned to transfers in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Status

The status of the transfer. The following options are available:

On hold
Indicates that the document is a draft and can be edited manually or deleted. A document with this status cannot be released.
Balanced
Indicates that the document’s transactions are balanced. A document with this status can be modified, deleted, or released.
Released
Indicates that the document has been released. A document with this status cannot be edited or deleted.
Hold A check box that, if selected, indicates that the transfer document has the status On hold status. Clear the check box to save the transfer with the status Balanced.
Transfer type

The type of transfer. The following options are available:

1-step
The transfer operation is performed in one step: The goods are transferred from the warehouse to the destination warehouse location.
2-step
The transfer operation is made in two steps: The goods are issued at the source location and received at the target location.
Date The date when the transfer document was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions from the transfer document should be posted.
From warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are transferred.
To warehouse The warehouse to which the goods are transferred.
External ref. Any external reference number of the inventory transfer document.
Description A brief description of the document or the transactions entered.
Control qty.

The manually entered quantity of goods transferred; available only if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.

When you’re creating a transfer, you enter this value manually to confirm the total quantity of stock items transferred, compared to the automatically calculated quantity of stock items included in this document.

If the Control qty. and Total qty. values do not match, the system generates a warning message and the document cannot be saved.
Total qty. The total quantity of goods transferred.
## The Transaction details tab This tab has a table containing the transactions included in the transfer document.
Button Description
Allocations Opens the Allocations dialog box so that you can specify how the quantity of the item is split among different locations, lot or serial numbers, and expiration dates.
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box so that you can add an item to the document.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up so that you can view item availability data.
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the goods to be transferred.
Location

The warehouse location from which the goods are transferred.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
To location ID

The warehouse location to which the goods are transferred.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the goods to be transferred.
Quantity The quantity of the transferred goods (in the units indicated below).
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number of the transferred goods.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the transferred goods.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Reason code The reason code associated with the transferred goods.
Description A brief description of the goods transfer transaction.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, lot or serial numbers or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item or assign subitems. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The Allocations dialog box includes the following elements:
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

Note

This element is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Generate (button)

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

Note

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the quantity of stock item received.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same sub item code and the same lot number. It is 1 for items with a serial number.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Button Description
OK Saves the records generated.
### The Item lookup dialog box You use this dialog box to view the item availability information for the selected source warehouse and its locations and to add specific quantities of the items to the transfer document. To find an item, you can type a string from its item ID in the **Inventory** field. The dialog box has a top part and a table with items that meet the criteria you specify.
Element Description
Item

The ID of a particular item whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria or type a string from the item ID to find the item.
Barcode

The bar code of the item to be listed.

Leave the field blank to filter information by other criteria.
Location

The location in the warehouse. Leave the field blank to view items in all locations.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Item class ID

The item class of the items whose information you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view information on items of all classes.
Receipt no. The reference number of a particular receipt. Select a receipt by its reference number to view availability information for the items that were listed on the selected receipt. Deselect the Show available items only check box to view the information on the listed items that are not currently available.
Show available items only If you select this check box, the system will list only items whose available quantities are greater than zero in the table.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items to the document.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The Financial details tab This tab displays the reference number of the batch generated upon release of the transfer.
Element Description
Batch no.

The reference number of the batch generated for the transfer.

Click the number to open the Journal transactions (GL301000) window and view the transaction details.
Branch The branch that initiated the transfer.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Update ABC code (IN506000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-abc-code-in506000 page You can use this window to make mass changes to the ABC codes assigned to the stock items in a selected warehouse, assigning each item a specific ABC code based on the stock value of the item in the chosen financial period and the code definitions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update ABC code (IN506000) You can use this window to make mass changes to the ABC codes assigned to the stock items in a selected warehouse, assigning each item a specific ABC code based on the stock value of the item in the chosen financial period and the code definitions. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The system arranges items by decreasing percentages in total stock value, calculates subtotals for each item (starting from the top of the list), and assigns projected ABC codes in accordance with the code threshold percentages. For details, see: [About inventory ranking methods](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-costs/about-inventory-ranking-methods/) In this window, you can also view the list of stock items with their current and projected ABC codes, and update the ABC code assignments for the listed items. Fixed ABC codes assigned to items in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window are not reassigned during this processing. You define the ABC codes for your site by using the [ABC codes (IN208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/abc-codes-in208500/) window. Initially, you can manually assign ABC codes to items at a specific warehouse on the **General settings** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. ## The top part In this area, you select the warehouse where the ABC code assignments will be updated and the financial period used to provide cost and stock value statistics for assigning ABC codes to items.
Button Description
Process

Updates the ABC code assignments for the stock items listed in the details table, using your ABC code definitions from the ABC codes (IN208500) window.

Fixed codes are not reassigned during processing.
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse where the ABC code assignment will be performed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period The financial period the ABC code assignment will be based on.
## The table This table shows the read-only list of items available in the selected warehouse for which ABC code assignments will be updated, based on the data of the chosen financial period. If no data is available for the period, the lowest code is assigned to all items. Assignment of codes is performed automatically and cannot be edited by using this window.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item at the warehouse whose ABC code can be updated.
Description The description of the stock item.
Current ABC code The ABC code currently assigned to the stock item.
Fixed

This check box indicates (if selected) that the ABC code is fixed for this stock item.

Fixed ABC codes are not updated. You can assign fixed ABC codes to a stock item by using the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Criteria value The criterion value for the item.
Ratio (%) The ratio (expressed as a percent) calculated for the item as the criterion value (item stock value) divided by the criterion total value (for all items).
Cumulative ratio (%) The sum of ratios from the top of the list, including the current item.
Projected ABC code

The ABC code to be assigned to the stock item.

This assignment is based on the code definition and on the stock value of the item for the selected period.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Update movement class (IN506100) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-movement-class-in506100 page You use this window to make mass changes to the movement class assignments for stock items at a particular warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update movement class (IN506100) You use this window to make mass changes to the movement class assignments for stock items at a particular warehouse. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to make mass changes to the movement class assignments for stock items at a particular warehouse. Movement class assignments are based on the turnover of each item during the selected turnover period. When you update movement class assignments in this window, the system assigns the projected movement class to each item, based on the movement class definitions and the position of the item in the list of warehouse items, which are arranged by turnover rate in the selected period. You define movement classes in the [Movement classes (IN208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/movement-classes-in208600/) window. You can initially assign the movement classes to items stored at the specific warehouse manually on the **General settings** tab of the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. In the Update movement class window, you can view the list of stock items with pending movement class assignments and update the assignments for the listed items. Items with a fixed movement class are also listed, but their assignments are not updated automatically. ## The top part In this area, you can select the warehouse where the movement class assignments will be updated and the turnover period for which the movement class assignments will be updated. The number of these periods per year and, thus, the length of each period is defined by the **Turnover periods per year** setting on the **General settings** tab of the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window.
Button Description
Process Updates the movement class assignments for the stock items listed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse where the movement class assignments will be updated.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.

Note

If not, the MAIN warehouse is used by default.
Year The year of the turnover period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.
Period number

Read-only. This field shows the number (within the year) of the turnover period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.

This value is calculated automatically based on the current business date and the number of turnover periods per year specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Start date

Read-only. This field displays the start date of the period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.

This value is calculated automatically based on the current business date and the number of turnover periods per year specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
End date

Read-only. This field displays the end date of the period for which the movement class assignments will be updated.

This value is calculated automatically based on the current business date and the number of turnover periods per year specified in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
## The table This table holds the read-only list of items for which the movement class assignments will be updated.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item for which the movement class assignment can be updated.
Description The description of this stock item.
Current movement class The movement class currently assigned to this stock item.
Fixed

This check box indicates (if selected) that the movement class is fixed for this stock item, which means that its movement class assignments are not updated.

A fixed movement class can be assigned to a stock item using the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Projected movement class The movement class to be assigned to the stock item base on the turnover rate and movement class definitions.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Update standard costs (IN502000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000 page By using this window, you can mass update standard costs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update standard costs (IN502000) By using this window, you can mass update standard costs. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can mass update standard costs. You can view by warehouse the list of the stock items with pending standard costs and update the standard costs for all items displayed in the list or only those you select. You can specify the pending standard costs for stock items on the **Price/cost information** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and override the costs for a particular warehouse by using the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window. You can specify the pending standard costs for non-stock items in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. When standard costs are updated, the system generates adjustments for the items being processed to make the necessary cost corrections. ## The top part Use the elements in this area to select the warehouse where the standard costs will be updated and the latest effective pending cost date.
Button Description
Process Updates the standard costs for the stock items you have selected by using the unlabelled check boxes in the Details area.
Process all Updates the standard costs for all stock items listed in the Details area.
Element Description
Warehouse

Select the warehouse or leave this box empty to view the stock items for all warehouses.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Max. pending cost date The latest effective pending cost date.
Revalue inventory A check box that you select if inventory revaluation should be performed during processing.
## The table In this area, the stock items with pending standard costs are shown in a table, and you can select the items for which standard costs will be updated.
Column Description
Item ID The stock item whose pending standard cost can be updated.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the stock item is stocked.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Inventory account The asset account to be used for the adjustment generated in the process of updating the standard cost of the item.
Inventory sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used with the inventory account.
Pending cost The value set as a pending cost for the item.
Pending cost date The date selected for the stock item as the effective date for the pending cost.
Current cost The currently effective standard cost assigned to the stock item.
Standard cost override An informational check box that indicates (if selected) that the standard cost of the item may be overridden at the selected warehouse.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Validate inventory (IN505000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/validate-inventory-in505000 page You use this window to recalculate the quantities of stock items available at warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate inventory (IN505000) You use this window to recalculate the quantities of stock items available at warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to recalculate the quantities of stock items available at warehouses. The validation process entails recalculating availability data for the selected stock items, based on all open inventory documents and open sales orders. For more information, see: [About availability calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-availability-data/about-availability-calculation/). > [!NOTE] > It is recommended that you perform the validation after you change the item availability calculation options. The system will recalculate the item availability and allocation data in accordance with the options selected most recently. The validation process doesn't update the cost layers. In this window, you can view the list of the stock items available at a particular warehouse and perform validation for all items available at the warehouse or for only the selected ones. > [!NOTE] > If, during the validation process, the system recovers available quantities of specific stock items, it attempts to open orders with the **Back order** status created for these items. Starting from the earliest back order, the system checks the quantity on the order. If the quantity is equal to or less than the recovered quantity, the system opens the order and switches to the next back order until either all recovered quantities are applied or all back orders are checked. ## The top part
Button Description
Process Starts the validation process for the chosen stock items or those for which you’ve selected the check box in the table.
Process all Starts the validation process for all stock items listed in the table.
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the validation will be performed.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period The financial period for the validation.
Rebuild item history If you select this check box, the system builds the history of items selected for processing based on the available open and released documents.
Reschedule back orders If you select this check box, the system opens the sales orders with back orders if there are positive changes during the validation.
## The table
Column Description
Item ID The stock item available at the warehouse.
Qty. on hand The quantity of the base units of the stock item on hand at the selected warehouse.
Qty. available The total quantity of base units of the stock item available at the selected warehouse.
Qty. not available The quantity (in base units) of stock items on locations with the Include in qty. available check box not selected. The option can be found in the Warehouses (IN204000) window.
Last validation date The date when the stock item was last validated.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Warehouses (IN204000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000 page You use this window to define, view, and modify warehouses and their settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Warehouses (IN204000) You use this window to define, view, and modify warehouses and their settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. After you have defined the settings for your company warehouses, you can use the [Item warehouse details (IN204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-warehouse-details-in204500/) window to set up the specific relationships between existing warehouses and stock items, and to define the warehouse settings specific to each item-warehouse combination. For more information about warehouses, see: [Warehouses and warehouse locations](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-warehouses/about-warehouses-and-warehouse-locations/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

  • View restriction groups: Navigates to the Restriction groups by warehouse (IN102010) window.

  • Change the item ID: Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, which you can use to enter a new identifier (ID) for the warehouse.

  • Apply replenishment to item warehouse details with no replenishment class: If replenishment class is missing in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window, the system will update the replenishment class for all item warehouse details connected to this warehouse.

    Note

    This action is only available if a replenishment class is set in the Replenishment class field.

  • Apply replenishment to all item warehouse details: Regardless if the replenishment class is missing or not in the Item warehouse details (IN204500) window, the system will update the replenishment class for all item warehouse details connected to this warehouse.

    Note

    This action is only available if a replenishment class is set in the Replenishment class field.
Reports Provides quick navigation to the following report: Location labels (IN619000).
## The top part In this area, you can create a record for a new warehouse, enter its ID and description, and define how its locations can be added. You can also select an existing warehouse and view or change its settings.
Element Description
Warehouse The unique ID of the warehouse.
Branch The branch to which this warehouse belongs.
Replenishment class

The replenishment class associated with this warehouse.

Replenishment classes are created using the Replenishment classes (IN208800) window.
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the warehouse is active.
Freeze the inventory when the stocktaking is in data entry state

This check box indicates (if selected) that the inventory in the warehouse will be frozen during the stocktaking and data entry stages of stocktaking.

If it is cleared, the inventory will be frozen only during the stocktaking stage.
Description A brief description of the warehouse.
Location entry

An option indicating whether warehouse locations can be added directly on any inventory document or only by using this window.

Select one of the following options:

Do not allow on-the-fly entry
On-the-fly entry of the warehouse locations is not allowed; new locations can be added only in this window.
Warn, but allow on-the-fly entry
Users are allowed to enter new locations on the fly, but the system will warn the users before allowing new locations to be added.
Allow on-the-fly entry
On-the-fly entry of the warehouse locations is allowed; while filling in a receipt or issue, a user can specify a new location.
Avg. default cost (Default unit cost for average method)

For items with the Average valuation method, the option that defines which of the costs should be used as the unit cost on sales, returns and receipts. You can select one of the following options:

Average
To use the average cost
Last
To use the last cost
FIFO default cost (Default unit cost for FIFO method)

For items with the FIFO valuation method, the option that defines which of the costs should be used as the unit cost on sales, returns and receipts. You can select one of the following options:

Average
To use the average cost
Last
To use the last cost
## The Location table tab > [!NOTE] > This tab only appears if the **Multiple warehouse locations** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled. > [!NOTE] > If the functionality is disabled, the single **MAIN** location is created automatically and is assigned as the default receiving, shipping, RMA, and drop-ship location. On this tab, you can add new locations and modify the properties of existing ones. The tab includes a table that holds the locations and an area where you can select the receiving, drop-ship, shipping, and return material authorisation (RMA) locations.
Element Description
Receiving location The warehouse location to be used to receive goods.
Shipping location The warehouse location to be used to ship goods.
RMA location

The RMA warehouse location.

The location you select will be used for all goods return operations. The returned goods will be delivered to the specified location, regardless of the warehouse location selected by default for the receipt of these goods.
Drop-ship location

The warehouse location used to account for drop shipments.

The goods will actually be delivered to the customer’s location; by specifying this location, you can maintain data about the item quantities on drop shipments.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Column Description
Location ID The unique ID of the warehouse location.
Description A brief description of the warehouse location.
Active This check box indicates whether this location is active.
Include in qty. available You select this check box if the quantities of goods available at this location will be included in the quantities of available goods and used in inventory transactions, such as issues and transfers.
Cost separately

You select this check box if the costs for goods available at this location will be calculated separately from costs calculated at the system-level; that is, for FIFO and specific valuation methods, separate cost layers will be created for this location.

You cannot select this check box if this is the only location at the warehouse.

CAUTION: We recommend that you not change this option once it has been set.
Sales allowed You select this check box if sales are allowed from this location.
Receipts allowed You select this check box if receipts are allowed at this location.
Transfers allowed You select this check box if transfers are allowed for this location.
Assembly allowed You select this check box if assembly operations are allowed at this location.
Pick priority

A value that indicates the priority of this location when items are chosen.

The value 1 indicates the highest priority, 2 the next highest, and so forth; 0 means that the pick priority is not defined.
Primary item validation

An option indicating whether the operations with the primary item should be validated for this location and how. Select one of the following options:

No validation
No validation for this location is required.
Primary item warning
Validation for this location is required only for the primary item, if another item is being received, a warning will be displayed.
Primary item error
Validation for this location is required only for the primary item. The system generates an error if you try to save the purchase receipt if an item other than the primary item is being received.
Primary item class warning
Validation for this location is required for items of the primary item class. The system will display a warning if items of other than the primary item class are received.
Primary item class error
Validation for this location is required for items from the primary item class. The system generates an error if you try to save the purchase receipt with items from non-primary item class.
Note

Primary item validation is enforced only for received goods.
Primary item

The primary item for this location, which is the item that is received the most often or stored here in the highest volumes.

Select the appropriate item from the list of available stock items.
Primary item class

The primary item class for this location; items of this class are received the most often or stored here in the highest volumes.

Select the appropriate item class from the list of available item classes.
Project The project to associate with this location by default.
Project task The project task to associate with this location by default.
## The General ledger accounts tab You use this tab to specify the general ledger accounts and subaccounts to be used for inventory transactions that originate in this warehouse.
Element Description
Override inventory account/sub.

A check box you select to specify the inventory account and subaccount to be used for inventory transactions related to this warehouse.

When this check box is selected, for each item belonging to this warehouse, the settings in the Use inventory/accrual account from and the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from fields in the Posting classes (IN206000) window, will be overruled.
Inventory account

The asset account to be used for posting inventory transactions related to this warehouse.

This account is used if the option Warehouse is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items belonging to this warehouse, or if the check box Override inventory account/sub. is selected in this tab.
Inventory sub.

Depending on the rule in the Combine inventory/accrual sub. from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items belonging to this warehouse, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the inventory subaccount to be used with the inventory account.

If the check box Override inventory account/sub. is selected in this tab, this is the subaccount that will be used with the inventory account.
Reason code sub. The subaccount to be used with any reason code for transactions originated in this warehouse.
Sales account The income account to be used to record sales made from this warehouse.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used for sales made from this warehouse.
Sales - non-taxable account The income account to be used for this warehouse to record non-taxable sales.
Sales - EU account The income account to be used for this warehouse to record EU sales.
Sales - export account The income account to be used for this warehouse to record export sales.
COGS/expense account The expense account to be used to record the cost of goods sold (COGS) when sales are made from this warehouse.
COGS/expense sub. The subaccount to be used with the COGS account for this warehouse.
Standard cost variance account

The expense account to be used to record differences between the extended standard costs of the stock items received at this warehouse and their extended prices.

This account is used only for transactions associated with stock items for which the standard cost valuation method is assigned.
Standard cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the standard cost variance account.
Standard cost revaluation account

The expense account to be used to record differences between the values of the items at this warehouse when standard costs are updated.

This account is used only for standard-valued stock items.
Standard cost revaluation sub. The subaccount to be used for this warehouse with the standard cost revaluation account.
Purchase accrual account

The liability account to be used to accrue purchase order item amounts for items received to this warehouse, if the option Warehouse is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items.

Whenever receipts based on purchase orders are released, the system generates a transaction between the purchase accrual account and the inventory account.
Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the purchase order items received to this warehouse, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Purchase price variance account

The expense account to be used to record any differences between the extended purchase prices of items received at this warehouse on purchase receipts and the extended costs of the items on related supplier invoices.

This account is used for stock items with non-standard cost valuation methods assigned.
Purchase price variance sub. The subaccount to be used with the purchase price variance account for this warehouse.
Landed cost variance account The expense account to be used to record any differences between the amounts of landed costs on purchase receipts and the amounts of landed costs on purchase invoices for stock items received at this warehouse.
Landed cost variance sub. The subaccount to be used with landed cost variance account for inventory transactions related to this warehouse.
## The Address information tab Use this tab to specify the address of the warehouse and to provide contact information for the warehouse. ### The Contact section
Element Description
Company name The legal business name of the warehouse to appear on the documents.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Email The email address of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
Web The URL of the web page where information about the warehouse is published.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
Phone 2 A secondary phone number of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
Fax The fax number of the contact person assigned to this warehouse.
### The Address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line in the address of the warehouse.
Address 2 The second line in the warehouse address.
City The city of the warehouse address.
Country The country where the warehouse is located.
County The county where the warehouse is located.
Postcode The postcode relevant for the warehouse address.
View on map A button that you can use to navigate to an interactive map on the web and view the warehouse location.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Inventory reports /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory reports Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Inventory reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-reports-overview page By using the wide variety of reports for the Inventory workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about inventory and warehouses, as well as inventory revaluation data. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory reports - overview By using the wide variety of reports for the Inventory workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about inventory and warehouses, as well as inventory revaluation data. By using the wide variety of reports for the Inventory workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about inventory and warehouses, as well as inventory revaluation data. You can also analyse the data by various criteria, and track inventory operations for different warehouses and locations. Many of the reports in this workspace have both summary and detailed versions; you can decide which version best meets your current needs. Because the Inventory workspace is tightly integrated lwith other workspaces, such as Purchases, Inventory, General ledger, and VAT, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. > [!NOTE] > Because the Inventory reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## Inventory reports The Inventory workspace includes the following reports: ### Balance + [Inventory balance (IN61500S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-balance-in61500s/): Displays detailed, up-to-date information about the quantities and unit costs of stock items at different warehouses and locations. + [Historical inventory balance (IN61600S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s/): For the chosen period, presents detailed information about the beginning and ending quantities of stock items at different warehouses and locations. + [Inventory valuation (IN61550S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s/): Displays information about the quantities on hand and the total cost of inventory by inventory account, with details for different warehouses. + [Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s/): For the chosen period, displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses change during the period. + [Goods in transit (IN616500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/goods-in-transit-in616500/): Shows up-to-date information about the goods in transit, their total quantities, and their total cost. + [Lot/serial numbers (IN613000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000/): Displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected aging date. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Lot/serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ### Stocktaking + [Stocktaking sheets (IN620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500/): Generates stocktaking sheets for the selected stocktacking. + [Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-variance-preview-in621500/): Lists the stock items included into stocktacking, and displays the book quantities and the count results for the items. ### Window + [Assembly confirmation (IN30702S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-confirmation-in30702s/) + [Assembly picklist (IN30701S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-picklist-in30701s/) + [Stock item labels (IN619200)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200/): Generates labels for stock items received according to a particular receipt. + [Location labels (IN619000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000/): Generates labels for locations within specific warehouse with stock item or item class specified. ### Audit + [Preview standard cost change (IN617500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/preview-standard-cost-change-in617500/): Gives you estimates of the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you perform updating of the standard costs of the items. + [Historical inventory balance (IN61600S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s/): Displays the list of all open inventory documents to be posted to the specified financial period. + [Inventory register (IN61400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-register-in61400s/): Presents up-to-date, detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). + [Inventory list summary (IN610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-summary-in610500/): Displays current summary information about unreleased inventory documents: receipts, issues, adjustments, and transfers. + [Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-detailed-in61100s/): Displays up-to-date summary information about every generated inventory document (receipt, issue, adjustment, or transfer). + [Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/summary-of-historical-inventory-valuation-in61800s/) + [Unreleased inventory documents (IN656000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/unreleased-inventory-documents-in656000/) Assembly confirmation (IN30702S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-confirmation-in30702s section Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Assembly confirmation (IN30702S) Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. You can select a template, or manually make selections that affect the information collected. And, finally, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the finished report. ## The Report parameters tab Here, you can select the reference number of the kit assembly document you want to make a confirmation report for.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the kit assembly document, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering sequence specified for kit assembly documents in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Windows

 Assembly picklist (IN30701S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/assembly-picklist-in30701s section Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Assembly picklist (IN30701S) Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Before you run a report, you have to set a variety of parameters, which you can do in this window. You can select a template, or manually make selections that affect the information collected. And, finally, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the finished report. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the kit assembly document, which the system automatically assigns according to the numbering series specified for kit assembly documents in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Windows

 Items by item class (IN408000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/items-by-item-class-in408000 section In this window, you can browse the hierarchy of item classes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Items by item class (IN408000) In this window, you can browse the hierarchy of item classes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This report is only displayed if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In this window, you can browse the hierarchy of item classes. You can select a particular item and view the item class to which it belongs. You can also review the entire list of items that belong to a particular item class: either the items that belong to only the selected item class or the items that belong to the selected item class and to child item classes. Also, you can move items from one item class to another. ## What to do from this window ## The Item class level tree pane In this pane, you can view the hierarchy of item classes that are defined in the system, and click any item class to view its items. The number of nested levels is defined by the configuration of the INITEMCLASS segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window.
Element Description
Class ID The ID of the item class for which the items belonging to the class are listed in the right pane. You can select an ID manually in this field, or if you click an item class in the tree, the field will be filled in with the item class you have clicked.
## The right pane By using the elements in this area, you can view in the table the data that is most relevant to your needs for information. ### The top part
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item for which you want to view the item class to which it belongs.
Only related to the current item class If this button is selected, the table shows only the items of the item class selected in the Class ID field.
Related to the current and child item classes If this button is selected, the table shows the items of the item class selected in the Class ID field along with the items of the child item classes of the selected item class.
### The Items in the item class table
Column Description
check box An unlabelled check box that you select to move the selected row to another item class if you click Cut selected records in the table toolbar.
Item ID The ID of the item.
Description The item description.
Item class The ID of the item class to which the item belongs.
Description The item class description.
Item status The status of the item.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Inventory balance (IN61500S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-balance-in61500s section The Inventory balance report displays up-to-date information about the stock items stocked at different warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory balance (IN61500S) The Inventory balance report displays up-to-date information about the stock items stocked at different warehouses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The information includes the warehouse ID, unit cost, quantity on hand, unavailable quantity, quantity of expired items, and available quantity. The stock items are listed by item ID. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view only data for this warehouse, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Location details

If you select this check box, the system includes warehouse location details in the report.

Note

This field only appears if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Allocation details A check box that you select to include in the report allocation information for each combination of item ID, subitem, and warehouse ID.
Company The company of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch for which you want to view inventory balance information. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to include information on all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Historical inventory balance (IN61600S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-balance-in61600s section This report displays beginning and ending quantities of stock items at the warehouses for the selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Historical inventory balance (IN61600S) This report displays beginning and ending quantities of stock items at the warehouses for the selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays beginning and ending quantities of stock items at the warehouses for the selected period. The report is available in two formats: summary and detail. For the summary format, only the quantities of stock items are shown for each type of operation performed with this stock item within the selected period. For the detailed format, the report displays the details of the transactions performed with the stock items during the selected period. The data in both report formats is grouped by item ID. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format to be used for the report: Summary or Enter the item ID.
Company The company the report will cover. Select a company, or leave the field blank to include information on all companies.
Branch The branch for which you want to view historical inventory balance information.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Inventory valuation (IN61550S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-in61550s section This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory valuation (IN61550S) This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + inventory account + different warehouses The report is available in two formats: + summary + detail. The report in the summary format displays only summary data for each warehouse. The detailed report displays information about the operations performed for each stock item in each warehouse; it includes the beginning and ending quantities and costs, and the reference numbers of the relevant inventory documents. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view only data for this warehouse, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Report format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Enter the item ID.
Company The company of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information for all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Inventory valuation by location (IN61551S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-valuation-by-location-in61551s section This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory valuation by location (IN61551S) This report displays the inventory for a company and total costs, organized by This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + inventory account + different warehouses + locations. The report is available in two formats: + summary + detail. The report in the summary format displays only summary data for each warehouse. The detailed report displays information about the operations performed for each stock item in each warehouse; it includes the beginning and ending quantities and costs, and the reference numbers of the relevant inventory documents. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view only data for this warehouse, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Company The company of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a company, or leave the field blank to view information for all companies.
Branch The branch of the organisation for which you want to display data. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information for all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/historical-inventory-valuation-in61700s section This report displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses have changed in the selected time interval. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Historical inventory valuation (IN61700S) This report displays information about how the balances of the inventory accounts and the costs of the stock items at different warehouses have changed in the selected time interval. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report is available in two formats: summary and detail. In the summary format, the report displays summary data for each inventory account/subaccount resulting from operations with stock items. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Enter item ID.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Company The company for which the report should include data. Select a company to view only data for this company, or leave the field blank to view data from all companies. The default is the current company.
Branch The branch for which the report should include data. Select a branch to view only data for this branch, or leave the field blank to view data from all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/summary-of-historical-inventory-valuation-in61800s section This report shows a summary of the value of all accounts and subaccounts in the inventory. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Summary of historical inventory valuation (IN61800S) This report shows a summary of the value of all accounts and subaccounts in the inventory. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It tells you what account the transactions have been made in, as well as the beginning and end cost for the period you select. You can also choose to view a detailed summary, where the transactions and cost per account will be grouped by item ID. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Details.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Company The company for which the report should include data. Select a company to view only data for this company, or leave the field blank to view data from all companies. The default is the current company.
Branch The branch for which the report should include data. Select a branch to view only data for this branch, or leave the field blank to view data from all branches.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Goods in transit (IN616500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/goods-in-transit-in616500 section The Goods in transit report displays information about the quantities of stock items in transit. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Goods in transit (IN616500) The Goods in transit report displays information about the quantities of stock items in transit. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This report is only displayed if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The Goods in transit report displays information about the quantities of stock items in transit. These are the items that were transferred to other warehouses in two steps and were not yet received at the destination warehouse. The report is available in two formats: summary and detailed. The summary format shows only the quantities of the stock items in transit. The detailed format provides detailed information about each transit operation with a reference to the original transfer document. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format The format for the report, which can be Summary or Detailed.
Dest. warehouse ID The destination warehouse the report will cover. Select a destination warehouse ID to limit the data displayed in the report to only the items in transit transferred to this destination warehouse; leave the field blank to view data for all destination warehouses.
Item ID The ID of the item the report will cover. Select an ID to view only data related to this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Transfer no. The number of the transfer.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Lot/serial numbers (IN613000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/lot-serial-numbers-in613000 section This report displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected ageing date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Lot/serial numbers (IN613000) This report displays information about stock items with lot or serial numbers: expiration dates, unit costs, quantities available, and expired quantities as calculated for the selected ageing date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This window is only available if the **Lot/serial tracking** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The expiration dates are displayed for only stock items whose lot/serial class has the **Track expiration date** option selected. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ageing date The ageing date. Select a date to view only the stock items having an expiration date before or equal to the selected ageing date; leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Expired items only A check box that you select to limit the data displayed in the report to only expired stock items.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which you want to display data.

Select a warehouse to view on only the stock items available on this location, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Location

The location for which data will be displayed.

Select a location to view only data, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.

Note

This field is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The stock item the report will cover. Select an item ID to view data on only this item, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Serial number The serial number the report will cover. Select a serial number to view only data for this serial number, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-sheets-in620500 section This report displays the stocktaking sheets generated for the stocktaking. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking sheets (IN620500) This report displays the stocktaking sheets generated for the stocktaking. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the stocktaking sheets generated for the stocktaking. You run this report to preview and print the sheets for stocktaking count to be used to enter the data during stocktaking. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ref. no The reference number of the stocktaking document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stocktaking-variance-preview-in621500 section This report lists the stock items included into stocktaking, and displays the book quantities and count results for the items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stocktaking variance preview (IN621500) This report lists the stock items included into stocktaking, and displays the book quantities and count results for the items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Ref. no The reference number of the stocktaking document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Stock item labels (IN619200) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/stock-item-labels-in619200 section This report displays the labels generated for the inventory received according to a particular receipt. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Stock item labels (IN619200) This report displays the labels generated for the inventory received according to a particular receipt. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Each label includes the name of the warehouse, the location where the item of inventory is stored, the item ID and description, the inventory receipt reference number, the date of receipt, and the lot/serial number for this item. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Receipt ref. number The reference number of a particular receipt. Select a reference number to view and print labels for this inventory receipt.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Location labels (IN619000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/location-labels-in619000 section This report displays the inventory labels for each warehouse, location, and primary item-primary item class combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Location labels (IN619000) This report displays the inventory labels for each warehouse, location, and primary item-primary item class combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the inventory labels for each warehouse, location, and primary item-primary item class combination. (The primary item is the item that is issued or received the most often or stored at this location in the highest volumes.) This report uses data from the **Location table** tab of the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. Use this report to preview and print the location labels for a warehouse or all warehouses. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Warehouse The warehouse the report will cover. Select a warehouse to display and print only the labels for it, or leave the field blank to display and print labels for all warehouses.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Preview standard cost change (IN617500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/preview-standard-cost-change-in617500 section By using this report, you can estimate the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you update the standard cost of the items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preview standard cost change (IN617500) By using this report, you can estimate the changes in the total cost of stock items stored at various warehouses before you update the standard cost of the items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report displays the quantity on hand, current standard cost, effective date, pending cost, pending date, total cost, cost change, and pending total for each stock item listed in the report. It also shows the total cost, cost change, and pending total for the warehouse. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Pending date The latest date for pending cost dates; the report will include the cost changes up to the date selected in this field.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Unreleased inventory documents (IN656000) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/unreleased-inventory-documents-in656000 section By using this report, you can view and print a list of open inventory documents that were to be posted in the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased inventory documents (IN656000) By using this report, you can view and print a list of open inventory documents that were to be posted in the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Inventory register (IN61400S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-register-in61400s section This report shows you detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory register (IN61400S) This report shows you detailed information about inventory operations in different warehouses within the selected financial period (or all periods). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. It provides details about each document, including lot and serial numbers assigned to units of the stock items involved in the operations, and the accounts and subaccounts whose balances are updated by these operations. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to view information. Select a financial period, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Document type The document type the report will cover. Select a document type to view the information only on documents with this type, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Reference no.

The reference number of the document for which you want to view data.

Select a number to view detailed data on only this document, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Inventory list summary (IN610500) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-summary-in610500 section This report displays summary information about inventory documents that are balanced but have not been released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory list summary (IN610500) This report displays summary information about inventory documents that are balanced but have not been released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary information about inventory documents that are balanced but have not been released. Use this report to view who prepared and modified documents. The report displays the following data: document type, reference number, document date and period, status of the document, name of the person who created and modified the document, and total quantity and total amount of the operation. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The starting financial period for the report.
To period The ending financial period for the report.
Created by The user that created the documents to be viewed in the report.
Last modified by The user that last modified the documents to be viewed in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S) /visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-reports/inventory-list-detailed-in61100s section This report displays detailed information about released inventory documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Inventory list (detailed) (IN61100S) This report displays detailed information about released inventory documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Use it to view document dates, amounts, and user names of the persons who created and modified the documents. ## Report parameters On this tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The document type the report will cover. Select a document type to view the information only on documents with this type, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
Reference no.

The reference number of the document for which you want to view data.

Select a number to view detailed data on only this document, or leave the field blank to view a broader range of data.
From period The financial period from which you want to view information. The default is the current period.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information. The default is the current period.
Created by The user who has created the list.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the list.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Management /visma-net-erp/help/management section You can maintain multiple locales and localise the Visma Net user interface to multiple languages. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Management You can maintain multiple locales and localise the Visma Net user interface to multiple languages. You can maintain multiple locales and localise the Visma Net user interface to multiple languages. You can translate application user interface strings directly in the application or by exporting the application strings to a third-party product and importing the translated strings back. With the help of **Field-level audit** you can monitor and record user changes in the windows. An audit trail keeps records of every change a user makes in a monitored window, such as changes to the documents, document properties, customer accounts, employee records, and security policies. You can also see who made the changes and when the user made them. You can also audit entire database tables or only certain database table fields, such as the fields associated with the interface elements in the window. Manage locales and languages /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages section Visma Net provides functionality that you can use to perform localisation to one locale or multiple locales. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage locales and languages Visma Net provides functionality that you can use to perform localisation to one locale or multiple locales. Visma Net provides functionality that you can use to perform localisation to one locale or multiple locales. In this chapter, you can find information on the translation process and the management of locales. About multi-language support /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/about-multi-language-support section With Visma Net, you can translate user input to multiple languages across the whole system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About multi-language support With Visma Net, you can translate user input to multiple languages across the whole system. > [!NOTE] > In order to activate this functionality you need to have one of these roles: Financials Administrator, System Administrator, and Financials User. > > All other users can use the functionality once it is activated. ## Usage For example, you can enter a description of a stock item in multiple languages. By using the document language defined on the customer/supplier, you will able to print a localised version in multiple reports. This functionality can be great to use when you do business in other countries, and you want to send business documents in the same language as your customers or suppliers use. The multi-language functionality will also work on electronic invoices. ## Activate You activate the multi-language functionality from the [System locales (SM200550)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550/) window, by clicking the **Set up languages** button where you define a default language and then enable the other languages to be used. You can set up as many languages as you want. To add new languages, just click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the System locales window and then click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the empty field in the **Locale name** column, and add a language from the list. See also: [Activate multi-language](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/activate-multi-language/). ## Deactivate and reactivate You deactivate the multi-language functionality from the [System locales (SM200550)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550/) window, by deselecting the **Active** check box for the default language and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can reactivate the functionality by selecting the **Active** check box for the default language and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The translations you have done in the system are preserved, so you do not have to redo them after you have reactivated the functionality. You can also deactivate another language than the default one, if you for example do not need to translate to that language anymore. Just deselect the **Active** check box for that specific language and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > ** The changes you do directly in the System locales table will override the settings made via the **Set up languages** button. ## Supported windows and fields When you have activated the multi-language functionality, you can translate user input for the fields that have multi-language support. A link to the default language (for example en, ) is displayed next to these text fields in the system. By clicking that link, the **Translations** dialog box opens, where you can add your translations for the languages you have enabled. The table below shows all windows and fields where you can use the multi-language functionality. |Window|Field/column| |---|---| |[Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/)|Description field| |[Financial year (GL101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-year-gl101000/)|Description column| |[Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/)|Description column| |[Ledgers (GL201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/)|Description field| |[Account classes (GL202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/account-classes-gl202000/)|Description column| |[Chart of accounts (GL202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/chart-of-accounts-gl202500/)|Description column| |[Subaccounts (GL203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/subaccounts-gl203000/)|Description column| |[Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/)|Description and Value columns| |[Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/)|The formula columns in the upper table and the Description and Value lines in the lower table.| |[Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/)|Description and Value columns| |[Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/)|Description field| |[Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/)|Description field| |[VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/)|Description field| |[Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/)|Description field (also available in Supplier ledger )| |[Overdue charges (AR204500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/overdue-charges-ar204500/)|Description field in Overdue fee settings| |[Customer classes (AR201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/)|Description field| |[Customer price classes (AR208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-price-classes-ar208000/)|Description column| |[Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/)|Description field| |[Contract templates (CT202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/contract-templates-ct202000/)|Description field| |[Customer contracts (CT301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-contracts-ct301000/)|Description field| |[Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/)|Credit note description| |[Item price classes (IN209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-price-classes-in209000/)|Description column| |[Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/)|Description field| |[Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/)|Description field and Description tab| |[Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/)|Description field and Description tab| |[Kit specifications (IN209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/kit-specifications-in209500/)|Description field| |[Item sales categories (IN204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060/)|Description field| |[Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/)|Description field| |[FOB points (CS208500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/fob-points-cs208500/)|Description column| |[Shipping terms (CS208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000/)|Description field| |[Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/countries-counties-postcodes-cs20400s/)|Country field| |[Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/)|Description field and Description column| |[Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/)|New number symbol field| |[Work calendar (CS209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/work-calendar-cs209000/)|Name| |[Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/)|The Display name column on the Parameters tab, and the Caption column on the Results grid tab| |[Dashboards (SM208600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/dashboards-sm208600/)|The Display name column on the Parameters tab|

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Activate multi-language /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/activate-multi-language section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate multi-language > [!NOTE] > In order to activate this functionality you need to have one of these roles: Financials Administrator, System Administrator, and Financials User. > > All other users can use the functionality once it is activated. 1. Go to the [System locales (SM200550)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550/) window. 1. Click the **Set up languages** button. The **Languages** dialog box will open. 1. In the **Default language** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select a default language. For example English. The default language will be used when you have not set up any translations for the specific text field. 1. Select which languages you want use when translating the values in the text fields that have multi-language support. [About multi-language support](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/about-multi-language-support/). See also:

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Select your locale settings /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/select-your-locale-settings section In Visma Net, you can specify your country settings, such as date, time, and number format (as described in this topic), so that correct data are applied when you create documents in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Select your locale settings In Visma Net, you can specify your country settings, such as date, time, and number format (as described in this topic), so that correct data are applied when you create documents in the system. 1. Go to the [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/) window. 1. Click the **Custom** **local format** tab. 1. In the **Format** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). The **Select - Format** dialog box is displayed. 1. Select the **Locale name** that you want to use for your user account. You can type the abbreviation for you country in the search field, or use the arrows at the bottom to change pages until you find what you are looking for. The system now fills in the parameters of the locale in the **Date and time formats** and **Number format** sections. 1. Optional: Change the settings in the **Date and time formats** and **Number format** sections. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. Translate filter tab captions /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/translate-filter-tab-captions section In Visma Net, you can translate tab captions for filters with multiple tabs, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Translate filter tab captions In Visma Net, you can translate tab captions for filters with multiple tabs, as described in this topic. In Visma Net, you can translate tab captions for filters with multiple tabs, as described in this topic. You need to use the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window to perform this translation. Before you begin, you need to enable multilingual user input. 1. Go to the [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/) window. 1. In the **Filter ID** field, select the name of the filter tab whose caption you want to translate. 1. To the right of the **Name** field, click the link with the language ISO code to open the **Translations dialog box**. 1. Type the translations of the caption in the necessary languages. 1. Close the **Translations dialog box**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat Steps 2–6 for every filter tab whose caption you want to translate. Translate column captions for a generic inquiry /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/translate-column-captions-for-a-generic-inquiry section In Visma Net, you can translate the column captions of a results grid for a generic inquiry, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Translate column captions for a generic inquiry In Visma Net, you can translate the column captions of a results grid for a generic inquiry, as described in this topic. In Visma Net, you can translate the column captions of a results grid for a generic inquiry, as described in this topic. You need to use the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window for translation. Before you begin, you need to enable multilingual user input. 1. Go to the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. 1. In the **Inquiry title** field, select the generic inquiry whose elements you want to translate. 1. In the **Caption** column of the **Results grid** tab, click the language ISO code link to open the **Translations** dialog box. 1. Type the translations of the column caption in the necessary languages. 1. Close the **Translations** dialog box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat Steps 3–6 for every column whose caption you want to translate. Translate parameter display names for a generic inquiry /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/translate-parameter-display-names-for-a-generic-inquiry section In Visma Net, you can translate the display names for the parameters of a generic inquiry, as described in this topic. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Translate parameter display names for a generic inquiry In Visma Net, you can translate the display names for the parameters of a generic inquiry, as described in this topic. In Visma Net, you can translate the display names for the parameters of a generic inquiry, as described in this topic. You need to use the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window for translation. Before you begin, you need to enable multilingual user input. 1. Go to the [Generic inquiry (SM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/generic-inquiry-sm208000/) window. 1. In the **Inquiry title** field, select the generic inquiry whose elements you want to translate. 1. In the **Display name** column of the **Parameters** tab, click the language ISO code link to open the **Translations dialog box**. 1. Type the translations of the parameter name in the necessary languages. 1. Close the **Translations dialog box**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Repeat Steps 2–6 for every parameter whose name you want to translate. Manage field level audit /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-field-level-audit section An audit trail is a series of records of activities in an application. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage field level audit An audit trail is a series of records of activities in an application. An audit trail is a series of records of activities in an application. In Visma Net, you can keep different audit trails, each devoted to a particular type of activity, such as system events and user activities. In this topic, you can find information on the field-level audit functionality which allows you to configure and manage audit trails that record user changes in the windows About field-level auditing /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-field-level-audit/about-field-level-auditing page The development of automatic data processing has made it necessary to consider protecting sensitive information. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About field-level auditing The development of automatic data processing has made it necessary to consider protecting sensitive information. The development of automatic data processing has made it necessary to consider protecting sensitive information. In certain highly regulated industries, companies must implement auditing to address identity-management concerns related to compliance issues. If your company wants to ensure accountability and the ability to track user actions in the system, or wants to implement sound auditing procedures, you can use the field-level auditing available in Visma Net. Field-level auditing functionality gives you the ability to monitor and record user actions in Visma Net windows as recorded in the system. The audit trail holds records of every change users have made in the monitored windows, such as changes to documents and their properties, modifications to customer accounts or employee records, and changes in security policies. You can also see who made the changes and when they took place. ## Managing access to field-level audit functionality Before you start configuring and turning on auditing for specific windows, you must enable the **Field-level audit** functionality. To give users the ability to configure, turn on, and turn off auditing of windows, as well as view the audit trails, you assign them the **Field-level audit** role and give them access to the windows used to manage field-level auditing. For more information, see: [About management of access to field-level audit functionality](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-field-level-audit/about-management-of-access-to-field-level-audit-functionality/). ## Configuring and turning on auditing of a window If you want to maintain a record of user activity in any window, you can configure and turn on auditing of the window. Granular auditing is configured, turned on, and turned off on a per-window basis. After the window audit is configured, you can quickly turn on and off auditing of the window. When you turn on the audit, every time a user makes changes to a document associated with the window and clicks **Save**, a record is added to the audit trail the system maintains for the window. This record contains the details of the modification, including who modified the document, what changes were made, and when the changes occurred. For more granular control, you can perform auditing of individual database tables associated with the windows and specific database table fields. You can audit entire database tables or only certain database table fields, such as the fields associated with the interface elements on the window. For more information, see: [Configure and turn on field-level auditing for a window](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-field-level-audit/configure-and-turn-on-field-level-auditing-for-a-window/). ## Viewing an audit trail When auditing is turned on for a window, you can select a document and view the changes made to the document directly from the window by clicking **Audit history** on the **Help** menu. The audit trail shows who modified the document and when, what window was used, when the modification took place, and what changes were made. Also, you can view all the changes made in the database tables of the audited window. The audit trail shows the user who modified the document, the date and time of the update, and the details of the modification of the selected database table. You can filter the modifications that you view in any audited database table by user and by date range.

Related pages

Tasks

 About management of access to field-level audit functionality /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-field-level-audit/about-management-of-access-to-field-level-audit-functionality page To make it possible for users to configure, turn on, and turn off auditing of windows, as well as view audit trails, you enable the Field-level audit functionality and then configure user access to the field-level audit functionality, as described in this article. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About management of access to field-level audit functionality To make it possible for users to configure, turn on, and turn off auditing of windows, as well as view audit trails, you enable the Field-level audit functionality and then configure user access to the field-level audit functionality, as described in this article. ## Enabling the field-level audit functionality To allow the use of field-level auditing in your system, you enable the **Field-level audit** functionality by using the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Managing access to field-level audit functionality You give users access only to the system objects that they need to accomplish their jobs: + To let a user configure, turn on, and turn off auditing of the windows, give the user access to the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window. + To let a user view the audit trail directly from an audited window, assign the user the **Field-level audit** role. When you assign this role to a user, the **Audit history** command in the **Help** menu on the window title bar becomes available to the user. The user can open any audited window, select a document created by using the window, and click **Audit history** to view the audit trail for the selected document. + To let a user view the complete audit trail for the window, give the user access to the [Audit history (SM205530)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-history-sm205530/) window. + To let a user view the list of forms for which auditing is configured and check whether auditing is turned in for each window, give the user access to the [Audit (SM205520)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205520/) window. In Visma Net, you manage access to system objects by using roles.

Related pages

Tasks

 Configure and turn on field-level auditing for a window /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-field-level-audit/configure-and-turn-on-field-level-auditing-for-a-window section Once field-level auditing is enabled in your system, you configure and turn on auditing for each window you want to monitor. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure and turn on field-level auditing for a window Once field-level auditing is enabled in your system, you configure and turn on auditing for each window you want to monitor. Once field-level auditing is enabled in your system, you configure and turn on auditing for each window you want to monitor. For the audited window, you can control the extent of the auditing by turning on auditing of particular database tables and fields associated with the window. Also, you can quickly turn on or off auditing of the individual database tables or the entire window. ## Configure auditing of a specific window 1. You use the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window to configure auditing in one of the following ways: + By navigating directly to the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window and selecting the window to be audited: 1. On the **System** tab, click **Management**. In the left pane, click **Manage** - **Audit**. 1. In the top part, in the **Window name** field, select the window for which you want to configure auditing. + By accessing the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window from the window to be audited, if auditing is not turned on for the selected window: 1. Open the window for which you want to configure auditing. 1. In the window toolbar, on the **Help** menu, click **Audit history** to open the **Field-level audit** dialog box. If the **Audit history** command is missing, the selected window doesn't support field-level auditing. 1. Click **Enable** to open the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window with the window from which you navigated to this dialog box selected in the **Window name** field of the top part. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, type a description of the auditing of this window. 1. In the **Show fields** field, select one of the available options to set this option in the **Show fields** column in the **Tables** table for all database tables. 1. Select the **Active** check box to turn on auditing of the window, or clear the check box to turn it off. 1. In the **Tables** table, select the **Active** check box for the database table you want to audit. By default, auditing is turned off for all the database tables associated with the window. 1. In the **Show fields** column, select one of the available options to view the fields shown on the user interface or all the fields of the selected database table in the **Fields** table. 1. In the **Fields** table, select the **Active** check box for the fields you want to audit. By default, all the database table fields shown in the **Fields** table are selected for audit. 1. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each database table you want to audit. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). After you turn on auditing for the window, the system monitors and records the changes to the documents created by the window. You can view the audit trail of each document. ## Turn on auditing for the window If auditing of the window is configured but turned off, use one of the following ways to turn on the auditing. First way: 1. Go to the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window. 1. In the table, click the name of the window you want to audit. This opens the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window in the new browser window with the window you clicked selected in the **Window name** field in the top part. 1. Select the **Active** check box. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Save and close** to turn on auditing and close the browser window. Second way: 1. Go to the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window. 1. In the top part, in the **Window name** field, select the window you want to audit. 1. Select the **Active** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) to turn on auditing. ## Turn off auditing for the window First way: 1. Go to the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window. 1. In the table, click the name of the window you want to audit. This opens the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window in the new browser window with the window you clicked selected in the **Window name** field in the top part. 1. Clear the **Active** check box. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Save and close** to turn off auditing and close the browser window. Second way: 1. Go to the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window. 1. In the top part, in the **Window name** field, select the window. 1. Clear the **Active** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) to turn off auditing. When you turn off auditing, the monitoring of the changes is turned off, but the configuration of the audit is left intact. ## Example To configure and turn on auditing of the fields shown on the interface in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, do the following: 1. Go to the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window. 1. In the top part, in the **Batch number** field, select a batch. 1. On the window title bar, on the **Help** menu, click **Audit history**. 1. In the **Field-level audit** dialog box, click **Enable**. This opens the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window with the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window selected in the **Window name** field. 1. Make sure that the **Active** check box is selected to turn on the audit immediately after you save your changes. 1. In the **Show fields** field of the top part, select **UI fields**.This changes the values in the **Show fields** column in the **Tables** table to **UI fields**. 1. In the **Tables** table, select the **Active** check box for the database table. 1. Make sure that all the database table fields in the **Fields** table are selected. 1. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for every database table. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

 Manage search /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-search section Within Visma Net, users can search wikis and various system entities, thus making the process of looking up for data quick and easy. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage search Within Visma Net, users can search wikis and various system entities, thus making the process of looking up for data quick and easy. Within Visma Net, users can search wikis and various system entities, thus making the process of looking up for data quick and easy. This topic describes the main points in search configuration and management. Search in Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-search/search-in-visma-net page Within Visma Net, users can perform searches in help, wikis, and various entities, such as suppliers, customers, invoices, and contracts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Search in Visma Net Within Visma Net, users can perform searches in help, wikis, and various entities, such as suppliers, customers, invoices, and contracts. Within Visma Net, users can perform searches in help, wikis, and various **entities**, such as suppliers, customers, invoices, and contracts. To make the process quick and accurate, Visma Net uses semantic search and search indexes. ## Semantic search in Visma Net Visma Net uses semantic search through SQL databases that allows the system to identify the key phrases in text or documents, discover similar or related documents, and provide information to explain how documents are similar or related. To employ semantic search in your Visma Net instance, make sure that semantic search functionality is enabled in your SQL server. + In Microsoft SQL Server, the semantic search functionality is disabled by default. + In MySQL Server, the semantic search functionality is enabled by default. ## Search indexes The search indexes are used to accelerate searching in Visma Net. When users perform the day-to-day operations, such as adding new documents or updating customer accounts, the new information is added to the appropriate search indexes automatically. You need to update the search indexes only after you upgraded your Visma Net system from a version that did not include the search indexes. For detailed procedure, see: [Build search indexes](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-search/build-search-indexes/). Build search indexes /visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-search/build-search-indexes page After you have upgraded your system from a version that did not include the search indexes, you use the Rebuild full-text entity index (SM209500) window to build search indexes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Build search indexes After you have upgraded your system from a version that did not include the search indexes, you use the Rebuild full-text entity index (SM209500) window to build search indexes. For more information: [Rebuild full-text entity index (SM209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/rebuild-full-text-entity-index-sm209500/). After you have upgraded your system from a version that did not include the search indexes, you use the [Rebuild full-text entity index (SM209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/rebuild-full-text-entity-index-sm209500/) window to build search indexes. 1. Go to the [Rebuild full-text entity index (SM209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/rebuild-full-text-entity-index-sm209500/) window. 1. Click **Process all**. The indexing of the data may take some time. The green check mark appears for the indexes after their successful creation. The red appears for the indexes that could not be built. 1. For each index that could not be built, do the following: + Select the index, and then click **Process**. The system tries to make the index again. 1. If the problem persists, you can recreate the indexes as follows: 1. Click **Clear all indexes**. 1. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to build indexes anew. 1. If your system includes custom wikis, build indexes for such wikis. Click **Index custom articles**. The indexes are added to the system. The existing indexes are updated automatically. Management windows /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows section On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Management windows On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. Audit (SM205510) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510 page You can use this window to configure, turn on, and turn off the auditing of specific windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Audit (SM205510) You can use this window to configure, turn on, and turn off the auditing of specific windows. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part You use this area to select a window for auditing and to specify summary data about auditing of this window.
Element Description
Window name The name of the window (screen) for which auditing is configured.
Description The description of auditing of this window.
Show fields

An option that determines which fields of the database table will be displayed in the Fields table for all database tables. You select one of the following options for all database tables in the Show fields column in the Tables table:

All fields
All fields of the selected database table, including hidden fields, will be shown in the Fields table.
UI fields
Only the visible fields (that is, those shown on the user interface) of the selected database table will be displayed in the Fields table.

You can select one of these options for each table individually as well.
Active A check box that you select to turn on auditing of the window when you click Save. Clear the check box and click Save to quickly turn off auditing of the window.
## The Tables table This table contains the database tables associated with the selected window. You can turn on or off auditing of each database table individually.
Column Description
Active A check box you select to audit the database table.
Table The name of the database table you want to audit.
Description A description of the database table you want to audit.
Show fields

An indicator of which fields of the database table will be displayed in the Fields table. Select one of the following options:

All fields
All fields of the selected database table, including hidden fields, will be shown in the Fields table.
UI fields
Only the fields of the selected database table shown on the user interface will be shown in the Fields table.
## The Fields table In this table, you can view the fields of the selected database table. You can turn on or off auditing of each field individually.
Column Description
Active A check box you select to audit the field.
Field The name of the field in the selected database table.
Audit (SM205520) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205520 page In this window, you can view all the windows with auditing configured and check whether auditing is turned on for each of the windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Audit (SM205520) In this window, you can view all the windows with auditing configured and check whether auditing is turned on for each of the windows. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table In this table, you can view the list of windows for which auditing is configured in the system, along with basic information about the auditing of each window. You can click a window name to open the [Audit (SM205510)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-sm205510/) window for it; in this window, you can view and modify the details of the auditing of the selected window.
Column Description
Audited window ID The ID of the window for which auditing is configured.
Audited window name The name of the window for which auditing is configured.
Active A check box that (if selected) indicates that auditing is turned on for the window.
Description The description of the auditing of this window.
Created by The user who initially configured the auditing of the window.
Created on The time when auditing of the window was initially configured.
Audit history (SM205530) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/audit-history-sm205530 page You can use this window to view the audit trail of the audited window or the recorded database table changes that are associated with the modifications of the documents made by using the audited window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Audit history (SM205530) You can use this window to view the audit trail of the audited window or the recorded database table changes that are associated with the modifications of the documents made by using the audited window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view the audit trail of the audited window or the recorded database table changes that are associated with the modifications of the documents made by using the audited window. The audit trail shows the user who modified the document, the date and time of the update, and the details of the modification of the selected database table. You can filter the modifications that you view in any audited database table by user and by date range. ## The window toolbar . The form-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Manage Opens the Audit (SM205510) window for the selected audit.
## The top part You use this area to specify the window and database table associated with the window for which you want to view the audit trail. You can also specify a particular user and date range.
Element Description
Window ID Required. The ID and the name of the screen (window) whose audit trail you want to see.
User The user who made the changes. Select a user if you want to view the changes made by the user. You can leave the box blank to view all recorded changes.
Start date The start date of the date range during which the changes took place. Specify a date if you want to view the changes made starting with this date.
Table name Required. The database table for which you want to see the audit trail.
End date The end date of the date range during which the changes took place. Specify a date if you want to view the changes made up to this date.
## The Records table This table displays the records of the modifications of the selected database table. The contents of this table depend on the database table you selected in the **Table name** field. ## The Events table This table shows who changed the record, when were the changes made, what operation was done, and the details of the modifications of the database table.
Column Description
Operation The type of recorded operation.
Date and time The date and time of the event.
User The user who modified the record.
Record columns The columns that display the changes in the selected record. If a column is blank, the value in the column was unmodified.
AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu command, which you can click to invoke action:

Change ID: Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can specify a new ID for the currently selected company.
## The top part
Element Description
Branch ID The unique ID assigned to the branch.
Branch name The name of the branch.
Company The company that is a part of the branch.
Corporate ID The unique ID corporate ID for the company.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the branch is an active branch.
Main Office A check box indicating (if selected) that the branch mentioned is the main office.
## The AutoInvoice tab ### The Sending invoices section
Element Description
Use printing services Select this check box if you want to use the printing services for AutoInvoice.
I accept the pricing agreement and want to use printing services Select this check box to confirm that you agree to the pricing scheme of the printing services.
Do not send invoices as PDF via email Select this check box if you do not want to send invoices as PDF using email.
Automatically mark file attachments to be sent to AutoInvoice Select this check box if you want file attachments that are added to the invoice to be sent to AutoInvoice. If you do not select it, you need to mark attachments for sending to AutoInvoice.
Contact person The contact person’s name. Use the contact fields to enter contact information when mails are sent from AutoInvoice to the invoice receiver.
Contact email The contact person’s email address. Use the contact fields to enter contact information when mails are sent from AutoInvoice to the invoice receiver.
Contact phone The contact person’s telephone number. Use the contact fields to enter contact information when mails are sent from AutoInvoice to the invoice receiver.
### B2C service for sending consumer e-invoice to bank
Element Description
Activate (button)

This button is only available if the agreement for sending consumer e-invoices to bank is inactive.

Click Activate if you want to start sending consumer e-invoices to bank.

Clicking Activate will open a dialog box where you enter your contact information (email address). You will receive an email that will initiate your agreement with AutoInvoice for using e-invoices with your bank. After receiving the email, you have three days to activate.
Deactivate (button) (button)

This button is only available if the agreement for sending consumer e-invoices to bank is active.

Click Deactivate to stop sending consumer e-invoices to the bank. You will be able to reactivate again later and start a new agreement.
Activation status A text indicating current activation status.
### The Invoice response messages section
Element Description
Activate Select this to activate the use of invoice response messages.
Activation status A text indicating current activation status.
Activation status message A message that explains the status of activation. If you get an error message instead of a status message, please contact Support.
### The Receiving invoices section
Element Description
Use AutoInvoice for receiving electronic invoices Select this check box to confirm that you want to use AutoInvoice for receiving e-invoices.
Use the ELMA register Select this check box if you want to use the ELMA register. This enables suppliers to send you electronic invoices without having established an electronic invoice agreement beforehand. Being registered in ELMA, you commit to receive files in “Elektronisk handelsformat” (EHF).
Contact’s email address The contact’s email address.
### The Scanning services section
Element Description
Activate (button) Click Activate if you want to use scanning services.
Scan account is deactivated (button) This button is only active if you have activated the AutoInvoice service and you want to deactivate it.

Your scan address

Electronic scan address (pdf files can be sent to this email address

 Enter the email address to which you want to receive PDF files.
### The Postal scan address for paper invoices section
Element Description
Company name The name of the company you want to send paper invoices to.
Scanning ID The scanning ID is the ID you get from AutoInvoice, which recognises your scanning contract. It is automatically filled in when you activate the service.
Postal address The postal address of the company.
Postcode The postal code of the company’s address.
City The name of the place connected to the postal code.
### The AutoInvoice section
Element Description
AutoInvoice endpoint The name of the endpoint used for AutoInvoice.
### The Invoice import settings section
Element Description
High level VAT ID The high level VAT category you want to use on imported invoices.
Medium level VAT ID The medium level VAT category you want to use on imported invoices.
Low level VAT ID The low level VAT category you want to use on imported invoices.
Zero level VAT ID The zero level VAT category you want to use on imported invoices.
### The VAT setting for Invoice inbox section
Element Description
Non-taxable Select Non-taxable if you want all invoices coming in to the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) to be categorised as non-taxable documents. Only gross amounts will be on invoices that are without VAT.
Scanned invoices: Calculate net amount based on VAT amount When this option is checked, Invoice inbox treats scanned invoices differently by taking the VAT amount as the starting point instead of the net amount. Then Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) calculates backwards the net amount. The difference between the sum of the VAT amount and the calculated net amount and the total invoice amount from the scanned invoice are is then updated to the rounding difference.
### The AutoInvoice setting section
Element Description
Activate AutoInvoice (button)

You can click this button to activate AutoInvoice. A KYC verification email will automatically be sent to the customer administrator’s email address. This email can be forwarded to a company signatory, to complete the KYC process that is associated with the activation of AutoInvoice. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

This button is only visible when AutoInvoice is not activated.
Activation status

The activation status of AutoInvoice:

  • Not activated - this status indicates that AutoInvoice has not been activated for this company / branch.
  • Activated - this status indicates that AutoInvoice has been activated for this company / branch.
Activation status message A message that explains the status of activation. If you get an error message instead of a status message, please contact Support.
Verified (KYC) status

The verification status for the KYC process:

Unverified
this status indicates that the KYC process has not been completed.
Verified
this status indicates that the KYC process has been completed.

This status is only visible when the activation status of AutoInvoice is Activated .
Verify KYC (button)

You can click this button to start the KYC process. A pop-up window will appear and you can follow the instructions to complete this process. See also: About Know your customer (KYC).

This button is only visible when the activation status of AutoInvoice is Activated and the Verified (KYC) status is Unverified.
### The Link company to AutoInvoice account section
Element Description
Link Click this button to link the company to the AutoInvoice account.

Related pages

Concepts

 Company template (CS10300S) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/company-template-cs10300s page This window is used to create a template to efficiently set settings when creating new companies. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Company template (CS10300S) This window is used to create a template to efficiently set settings when creating new companies. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The template will be based on settings for all windows in the list in the table section. Settings are based on the company you are logged in to. Available windows are listed in the windows table. This template can be used in the first time start up for new companies. ## The top part
Element Description
Template name Enter the name of the template you want to create.
Make available Select this check box to make the template available at first time start up of new companies.
Access code

An access code to limit the access for this template. We recommend a logical name to group/categorise the templates.

It is possible to use the same access code for several template.

This filed is alphanumeric, up to 255 characters.

The code will be used in the first time start up for new companies.
Element Description
Category

Settings implemented in the template will be retrieved from all categories/the complete list of windows displayed. To view specific settings in windows, you can select a category to simplify the search for the window.

It is not possible to select individual windows within a category.

After creating a template, it will be possible to change individual settings.

The categories are:

  • Show all categories
  • Preferences
  • Classes
  • Miscellaneous setup data
  • Reports
## The table
Column Description
Window Name and link to windows you want to use to create the template. The settings in these windows will be replicated when using this template during first time start up.
Module name The workspace in Visma Net where the window resides.
Category The category selected in the above part of this window.
Document templates (SM209020) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/document-templates-sm209020 page You can use the elements in this area to select an existing template for editing or create a new template. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Document templates (SM209020) You can use the elements in this area to select an existing template for editing or create a new template. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The window toolbar
Button Description
Save to clipboard Places the template on the clipboard so that you can paste it on the appropriate form.
The top part
Element Description
Template ID The unique identifier of the template, which the system assigns automatically when you save the template for the first time.
Window ID The window ID of the form used to create the template.
Description A description of the template. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters can be used. This required description also serves as a template identifier.
Graph The system graph associated with the form that was used to create the template.
The table
Column Description
Active A check box that indicates to the system (if selected) that the field (that is, the user interface element) specified by the row will have no assigned value for this template. If on the form, the field gets a default value, this will occur once the template is used for a new document.
Line A read-only value.
Container The area or tab of the form to which the field belongs.
View A read-only value. The view on the form this line belongs to.
Type The type of the internal object the field is related to.
Field The field in the area of the form specified as the container.
Value The value of the field to be used for the template.
Template ID The ID of the document template.
File maintenance (SM202510) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/file-maintenance-sm202510 page You can use this window to view properties of the selected file, to import a new version or delete an old version of the file, and to check the file out for editing or check in an updated version. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # File maintenance (SM202510) You can use this window to view properties of the selected file, to import a new version or delete an old version of the file, and to check the file out for editing or check in an updated version. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define a primary document or article if the initial primary document or article (from which the roles inherit the access rights to this file) to which the file was attached was renamed or deleted. Also, you can view and edit the access rights that roles have to the file and configure synchronisation of the file with an external file or folder. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Check out Closes (denies) access to the file for all users except you.
Undo checkout Opens access to a file that was previously checked out.
Upload new version Invokes the File upload dialog box, which you can use to import a new version of the selected file.
Get latest version Downloads the latest version of the file from the database.
Synchronisation Offers options you can select to define the direction of synchronisation: Import file or Export file.
## The top part You use this area to view the file name and whether the file is checked out and by whom.
Element Description
File The name of the file.
Checked out by A read-only field that shows the user name of the user who checked the file out (if applicable).
Checkout comment A read-only field that shows any comment provided by the user who checked out the file (if it has been checked out).
Is hidden A check box you select to cause the file to be hidden for users accessing the system from outside, such as through file transfer protocol (FTP).
External link The external link to the file.
Wiki link The internal link to the file.
WebDAV link The WebDAV link to the file.
## The Versions tab The table on this tab displays all versions of the file.
Button Description
View selected version Opens the selected version in a new browser window.
Column Description
Version ID A read-only field that shows the number of the version.
Created by A read-only field that shows the user who imported this version.
Creation time A read-only field that shows the date when the version was imported.
File size A read-only field that shows the size of the file.
Comment Any additional information that has been provided at the time of import about the version.
Original name (if different) The original name of the file, if it is different from the current name.
## The Articles tab This tab displays the list of articles the file is attached to, including the primary article.
Element Description
Name The name of the primary article (from which the roles inherit the access rights to this file) the file is attached to.
Button Description
Latest only If highlighted, indicates that the list currently includes only the latest versions of articles (if article versioning is turned on). Click the button to view all versions that have the file attached.
Open Opens the selected article or article version.
Column Description
ID A read-only field that shows the ID of the article the file is attached to.
Language A read-only field that shows the language of the file version.
Page version ID A read-only field that shows the ID of the article version that has the file attached.
Name A read-only field that shows the name of the file.
## The Entities tab This tab displays the list of system entities—such as stock items and supplier, customer, and employee accounts—the file is attached to.
Button Description
View entity Navigates to the appropriate window with the record displayed.
Column Description
Entity A read-only field that shows the system entity (by its graph name) the file is attached to.
Row values A read-only field that shows a description of the record that uniquely identifies the record in the system.
## The Access rights tab This tab displays the list of roles with their access rights for the file. The access rights the roles have to the file are inherited from the rights of the primary article or the primary window.
Element Description
Is public (the file ignores access rights and is visible to everyone) A check box that you select to make the system ignore any access rights specified for the file and display it to all users.
Wiki

The name of the wiki that contains the primary article.

For the file, you select the primary article in the selected wiki or the primary window.
Primary page

The wiki article that defines the access rights the role has to the file.

By default, it is the article to which the file was attached for the first time.

For the file, you select the primary article in the selected wiki or the primary window.
Primary window

The window that defines the access rights the role has to the file.

By default, this is the window to which the file was first attached.

For the file, you select the primary article in the selected wiki or the primary window.
Access rights A table with a read-only list of roles defined in the system and their access rights to the primary article or window. For more information, see: About levels of access rights.
## The Synchronisation tab You use this tab to configure synchronisation between the selected file and an external file or folder, which is specified on this tab. If synchronisation is with a folder, when exported from the system, the versions of the internal file become files within the folder, and, when imported into the system, the files within the folder are uploaded as versions of the internal file.
Element Description
Synchronise A check box that you select to indicate that file synchronisation is required.
Synchronisation type

The synchronization type to be used for the file. You can select one of the following options:

FTP
To synchronise files by using FTP.
HTTP
To perform synchronisation with a file specified by its URL.
Shared folder
To perform synchronisation with a shared folder or a file in the shared folder. Once selected, this option enables the Synchronise folder content check box.
Path The path to the external file or folder.
Login

The login to be used to access the file.

If you synchronise files with an FTP server, you should use a login without @, /, or \ characters in synchronisation settings. Otherwise Visma Net will not be able to connect to the server.
Password The password to be used to access the file.
Synchronise folder content The check box you select to indicate that synchronisation with the folder (specified by the path) is required. This option is available only for the Share folder option.
Import file validation mask The validation regexp mask to be used to import the folder content into the system. If you specify a mask, the system validates the file name (without the path) according to specified regexp. The regexp syntax complies with.Net Regular Expressions, and is case-insensitive and multi line. The field becomes available when you specify synchronisation type and path.
Export file naming format The format of the file name when the file is exported from the system.
Last import date The date when an import was last performed.
Last export date The date when an import was last performed.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Rebuild full-text entity index (SM209500) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/rebuild-full-text-entity-index-sm209500 page You use this window to update search indexes for Visma Net entities and wikis. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Rebuild full-text entity index (SM209500) You use this window to update search indexes for Visma Net entities and wikis. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Updates search indexes of the selected entities.
Process all Updates all existing search indexes.
Schedules

In the drop-down list you have the following options:

  • Add Once a schedule is added to this window, the following options are also available:

This opens the Automation schedules (SM205020) window as a pop-up. Here you can create and add automation schedules. For more information, see: Schedule processing.

  • History
  • Delete
  • Delete all
  • View
Clear all indexes Clears all existing search indexes.
Index custom articles Creates search indexes custom wikis. Created indexes for wikis are not displayed in the window.
## The table
Column Description
Name The short description of the entity.
Entity The entity for which the search index is available.
Search in files (SM202520) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/search-in-files-sm202520 page You can use this window to find specific files that have been imported into the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Search in files (SM202520) You can use this window to find specific files that have been imported into the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can search the files by the form to which the file was imported or by any combination of the following criteria: + Any text contained in the file name + The author or creator of the file + The date range during which the file was added to the system + The user who checked out or added the file ## The top part You can use this area to specify search criteria that might help you find the file you want to locate.
Element Description
File name contains The name of the file (that you want to locate) or any text that the file name contains.
Added from

The start date of the date range during which the files to be shown were added.

Specify this date if you want to view the files added during a particular date range, or leave the field blank to view the files added any time after system initialisation.
To

The end date of the date range during which the files to be shown were added.

Select this date or leave the field blank to view the files added up to the current date.
Added by The username of the employee who added the files to be shown.
Checked out by The username of the employee who checked out the files to be shown.
## The Left pane This pane contains a tree-like structure that includes the **Unassigned** node and the nodes for the system modules and workspaces that have documents with attached files. The **Unassigned** node contains files that are not attached to any document. (This might happen, for example, if the document to which the file was attached has been deleted.) When you first use the system, the left pane contains only one root node with the **Unassigned** node. The tree in the pane becomes populated as users add files to the system by using specific forms. For example: A module and the workspace within it appears on the site tree only after at least one file has been attached to a record (such as a batch, invoice, or invoice) that a user created by using a form of the workspace. The pane toolbar buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Reload tree Refreshes the tree to reflect the latest changes in the system.
## The Right pane In this pane, you can view: + All the files that match the criteria you specified in the Selection area if you didn't select a node in the left pane. + All the files attached to documents created by using the form you selected in the left pane, if you didn't specify any criteria in the top part. + The files attached to documents created by using the form you selected in the left pane that also match the criteria you specified in the top part. + The unattached files, if you have selected the **Unassigned** node in the left pane. You can also specify criteria in the top part to filter the list. The list of files is updated each time you modify the search criteria in the top part.
Button Description
Get file Downloads and opens the selected file by using the functionality of the browser.
Get file link Opens the File link dialog box, which you can use to get and copy the link to the file.
Delete file Deletes the file.
Column Description
Name The name of the file.
Creation time The date and time when the file was added to the system.
Created by The name of the employee who added the file.
Checkout comment The user-added description of or comment about the file.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Space usage (SM203525) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/space-usage-sm203525 page You can use this window to view statistics on the use of database space by your Visma Net instance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Space usage (SM203525) You can use this window to view statistics on the use of database space by your Visma Net instance. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view statistics on the use of database space by your Visma Net instance. You may need to view these statistics because your license for Visma Net includes a limit on the database space that your instance can use. The statistics of using database space, which is displayed on this window, does not include data related to the System company. Initially, the window displays the statistics calculated most recently and the date and time when they were calculated. To view the current statistics, you click **Calculate used space** on the window toolbar. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Calculate used space Calculates the space used by the data of your instance in the Visma Net database. The newly calculated data is displayed in the window.
## The top part In this area, you can view general information about the database space usage of the current instance.
Element Description
Last calculated The date and time when the database space used by the data of your instance was last calculated. If the field is empty, the space has never been calculated.
Used database space: Total The space in the Visma Net database used by all companies and all snapshots in your Visma Net instance.
Used database space: by tenants The space in the Visma Net database used by all companies that have been created in your instance.
Used database space: by snapshots The space in the Visma Net database used by all snapshots stored in the system.
Free space The space in the Visma Net database available for your instance for data storage.
Database space limit The limit for the database space that can be used by your instance to store data for companies and snapshots. The limit is specified either in your Visma Net license or in the web.config file.
Current Status

The status of the database space usage with regard to the limit. The system sets the status of the database space usage to one of the following:

Database space limit is not set
The limit for the database space has not been set in your license or in the web.config file.
OK
The limit has been set, and the used space does not exceed the limit
Database space limit is exceeded
The limit has been set, and the used space exceeds the limit
## The Tenants tab On this tab, you can view the space used in the Visma Net database by each company that has been created in your instance.
Button Description
View tables Opens the Table sizes by tenant dialog box.
Column Description
Current A check box that indicates (if selected) that you are signed in to the company.
Tenant ID The company identifier, which was generated automatically by the system when the company was created.
Tenant name The company name that is used on the site map.
Login name The name of the company that is displayed in the info area (in a multi-company system) and on the Welcome page.
Status

The status of the company. The system sets the company status to one of the following:

Active
A live company that has been used in production
Test tenant
A test company that has been used for testing application functionalities and for training purposes. The system applies this status to a company automatically when it is used in the trial version of Visma Net.
Unlicensed
A company that was created after the license limit for companies was reached. You cannot work with this company in the system.
Size in DB (MB) The size of the data, in megabytes, used by the company in the Visma Net database.
### Table sizes by tenant dialog box In this dialog box, which you open by clicking the **View Tables** button on the **Tenants** tab, you can view the list of tables that contain data for the selected company and the space that this data takes in the database.
Element Description
Tenant Name The name of the company selected in the Tenants table.
Size in DB (MB) The size of the data, in megabytes, used by the company in the Visma Net database.
Table Columns
Table Name The name of the table in the Visma Net database.
Record Quantity The quantity of records related to the selected company that are included in the table.
Size in DB (MB)

The size of the table in the Visma Net database.

The size is calculated for only data related to the selected company.
## The Snapshots tab On this tab, you can view the list of snapshots created in the system and the space each snapshot takes in the Visma Net database.
Button Description
View Tables Opens the Table sizes by snapshot dialog box.
Column Description
Name The name of the snapshot.
Description The description of the snapshot, which was specified during the creation of the snapshot.
Created The date and time when the snapshot was created.
Export Mode The export mode that was selected when the snapshot was created.
Size in DB (MB) The size of the data, in megabytes, used by the snapshot in the Visma Net database.
### The Table sizes by snapshot dialog box In this dialog box, which you open by clicking the **View tables** button on the **Snapshots** tab, you can view the list of tables that contain data for the selected snapshot and the space that this data takes in the database.
Element Description
Snapshot name The name of the snapshot selected in the Snapshots table.
Size in DB (MB) The size of the data, in megabytes, used by the snapshot in the Visma Net database.
Table name The name of the table in the Visma Net database.
Record quantity The quantity of records related to the selected snapshot that are included in the table.
Size in DB (MB)

The size of the table in the Visma Net database.

The size is calculated for only data related to the selected snapshot.
## The Tables tab On this tab, you can view the list of tables with data related to all companies and snapshots in your instance and the size of each table in the Visma Net database.
Button Description
View used space by tenants and snapshots Opens the Used space by tenants and snapshots dialog box.
Column Description
Table name The name of the table in the Visma Net database.
Record quantity The quantity of records in the table calculated for all companies and snapshots that include this table.
Size in DB (MB) The size of the table in the Visma Net database calculated for all snapshots and companies that include this table.
### Used space by tenants and snapshots dialog box In this dialog box, which you open by clicking the **View used space by tenants and snapshots** button on the **Tables** tab, you can view the list of snapshots and companies in which the selected table is included and the size of this table in the Visma Net database.
Element Description
Table name The name of the table in the Visma Net database.
Size in DB (MB) The size of the table in the Visma Net database calculated for all snapshots and companies that include this table.
Type

The type of object that includes the table. The value can be one of the following:

  • Snapshot
  • Tenant
Name The name of the snapshot or company.
Record quantity The quantity of records in the selected table, which the company or snapshot contains.
Size in DB (MB) The size of the table in the Visma Net database for the company or snapshot.
System locales (SM200550) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550 page In this window you can view system locales. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # System locales (SM200550) In this window you can view system locales. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can add new locales or edit details of existing system locales. You can also override locale preferences, which specify how the system should display numbers, dates, and times on the user interface. Also, on this window, you can set up the default language in which the system should display texts entered by a user if no text has been entered for a language associated with the locale a user is currently logged in. ## What to do from this window + [Activate multi-language](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/activate-multi-language/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Locale preferences Opens the Locale preferences dialog box, which you can use to override the region-specific settings of the selected locale.
Set up languages Opens the Languages dialog box, which you can use to define the default language and alternative languages in the system.
## The Language dialog box You can use this dialog box to define the default language and alternative languages to be involved in the localisation of values a user enters to text fields of the system. The system automatically retrieves the languages from the system locales you have added. See also: [About multi-language support](/visma-net-erp/help/management/manage-locales-and-languages/about-multi-language-support/) Multiple locales can be associated with a language. For example: The en-US, en-GB, and en-AU locales are all associated with the language whose ISO code is **en**. This dialog box has the following elements.
Element Description
Default language The language in which the system displays a translation if there is no translation for the language associated with the locale with which the user is currently logged in.
ISO code The ISO 639 lower case language code retrieved from the locales.
Native name The name of the language in the language itself.
Apply (button) Applies the settings and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Discards all changes and closes the dialog box.
## The table See below for descriptions of the table columns.
Column Description
Locale name

The name of the locale, based on the language tagging conventions of RFC 4646.

You can type the locale name manually (it must comply with RFC 4646) or select a locale from the list, which is provided by Microsoft.NET Framework.
English name

Read-only.

The locale name in English, which is also provided by Microsoft.NET Framework.
Locale in locale language The name of the locale in its native language.
Description Any comments relevant to this locale or the localisation.
Series

An integer indicating the position of this locale.

If you specify the same position for multiple locales, the system sorts locales with the same position in alphabetical order by the locale name.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the locale is available.
Alternative language

A check box that indicates (if selected) that for the language of the selected locale, a user may enter translations for boxes whose values can be localised. That is, the language is available in the Translations dialog box.

To change the check box value, click the Set up languages button in the window toolbar and select or clear the check box for the language.

See also: About multi-language support.
Default language

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system displays in text fields a translation provided by a user for this language if there is no translation for the language associated with the locale with which the user is currently logged in.

The user can enter this translation by using the Translations dialog box.

See also: About multi-language support.
Show validation warnings

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system displays warnings in windows about text strings on the interface that are not translated to the language of the locale.

To see the warnings, you must select this check box for the locale and sign in with the language of the locale. To turn these warnings off, clear this check box for the locale.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 User favourites (SM203020) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-favourites-sm203020 page By using this window, you can restructure your favourites list, which is the list of Visma Net windows to which you want to have quick access. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User favourites (SM203020) By using this window, you can restructure your favourites list, which is the list of Visma Net windows to which you want to have quick access. By using this window, you can restructure your favourites list, which is the list of Visma Net windows to which you want to have quick access. To open the window you want to view, click the favourite in the navigation pane (the left pane of the Visma Net screen). ## The Tree pane This pane contains a tree-like structure with folders you can use to organise favourites. When you click a folder in the tree pane, the right pane displays the list of its items or the folders and favourites this folder contains. The pane toolbar includes only buttons specific to this pane, which are listed below.
Button Description
Move one level up Moves the selected item into a folder located above the current item in the tree and at the same level. If no such folder exists, the item is not moved.
Move one level down Moves the selected item out of its current folder and into the parent folder of its current folder. The item will be positioned directly below the folder it was moved out of.
## The table In the table in the right pane, you can view or edit the items contained in the folder you have selected in the Tree pane.
Button Description
Move node up Moves the selected item one position up in the list.
Move node down Moves the selected item one position down in the list.
Column Description
Title The name of the folder or favourite.
Expanded A check box that you select if you want the system to show this folder expanded when you click the Favourites button on the main menu.
User settings (SM203010) /visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010 page You can use this window to edit your personal information, data presentation settings, and password. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # User settings (SM203010) You can use this window to edit your personal information, data presentation settings, and password. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. To open the window, click your username in the Info area (in the top right corner of the Visma Net window) and select User profile. ## The General information tab By using this tab, you can review and modify the general settings for your user account. ### The User settings section In this section, you can view and modify general information, including your name, email address, and password-related settings.
Element Description
Login The username you used to sign in to the system.
First name Your first name. You can edit this name.
Last name Your last name. You can edit this name.
Phone Your preferred phone number. You can edit a value of this box.
Email

Required. Your preferred email address.

If you forget your password and request password changing from the Welcome dialog box, the information required to change your password will be sent to this email address.
Change email A button that you click to open the User settings (SM203010) dialog box.
Password Read-only. The password that you use to sign in to the system.
Password recovery question A hint or question that you may specify to provide a secure way to acquire a new password if you forget your current one.
Comment Any text that was provided as a comment for your user account when it was created. You can edit this text, if needed.
### The Personal settings section In this section, you can specify a variety of default settings to be used in Visma Net. For example: You can select one of the available certificates as your personal certificate for signing files in the portable document format (PDF).
Element Description
PDF signing certificate

Optional.

The certificate that the system will use for signing PDF files you generate in Visma Net.
Time zone

Optional.

The time zone to be used to display document timestamps converted to your time zone if there are users working with the system from different time zones.

If no time zone is specified, documents will be time-stamped using the time settings specified for the Visma Net instance.
Reset to default time zone A button you click to use the default Visma Net time zone as your default time zone.
Default branch The branch to which you’ll be signed in by default if you have access to multiple branches.
Home page The dashboard to be displayed for you on the home page of Visma Net.
Turn off autocomplete A check box that you select to stop the system from displaying the drop-down list with suggestions (for lookup boxes that support autocomplete) when a user is typing text.
Show the classic appearance by default

A check box that indicates (if selected) that classic user interface of Visma Net is displayed by default when you sign in to the system.

If you want to work in modern user interface, you clear this check box.
### The Csv file export settings section
Element Description
Add separator after last column in csv file If this is unchecked, then no ; will be added after the last column.
Force leading zeroes If this is unchecked, then ’ will be removed from all char fields. Leading zeros will then not be shown in Excel.
### The Custom notifications section
Element Description
Enable custom notification emails By checking this check box, notifications will be sent to the above entered email address.
### The Change email dialog box By using this dialog box, you can enter a new preferred email and save it to the database. The dialog box has the following elements.
Element Description
New email Your new email address.
Password The password that you use to sign in to the system.
OK (buttons) Saves the new email address and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (buttons) Closes the dialog box without saving any data.
Element Description
Old password The password that you use to sign in to the system.
New password The new password, which must meet the security requirements set for passwords in your company.
Confirm password The new password again; enter the same new password you typed above.
OK (buttons) Saves the new password and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (buttons) Closes the dialog box without saving any data.
Element Description
New answer The answer for the recovery question.
Password The password that you use to sign in to the system.
OK (buttons) Saves the new recovery answer and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (buttons) Closes the dialog box without saving any data.
## The Email settings tab On this tab, you can specify your email settings, open your calendar to other users, and get the URL to synchronise the calendar with any third-party software products you use.
Element Description
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending your correspondence through the system.
Is public calendar A check box that indicates (if selected) that the calendar may be viewed by other users.
Synchronisation URL

A button that opens the Synchronisation URL dialog box, which displays the URL of your calendar.

Use the URL to synchronise your calendar with third-party software products that support the calendar synchronization functionality.
Download Outlook add-in manifest

A link that you click to download the manifest file of the Visma Net add-in for Outlook, which is individual for each user. The manifest file contains the instructions for the system to automatically deploy the add-in.

This link is available only if the Customer management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The User email signature section In this section, you can enter your email signature in the text area and specify signature settings.
Element Description
Include in new emails A check box that you select if you want to include the signature in all new emails that you send by using Visma Net.
Include in replies and forwarded emails A check box that you select if you want to include the signature in all replies and emails that you send by using Visma Net.
## The Custom locale format tab On this tab, you can select the date and time formats to be used for your user account when you sign in to Visma Net; otherwise, the settings of the default locale will be used. The default locale preferences are specified in the [System locales (SM200550)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/system-locales-sm200550/) window.
Element Description
Format The locale whose format settings you want to use for your user account.
### The Date and time formats section
Element Description
Date time The basic format for displaying the date and time.
Short time

The format to be used to display a time that includes hours and minutes.

Also, this format specifies whether to use a 12-hour clock, with tt standing for 12-hour clock and TT standing for 24-hour clock.
Long time The format to be used to display a time that includes hours, minutes, and seconds.
Short date The format to be used to display a date that includes a day, a month, and a two-digit or four-digit year.
Long date The format to be used to display a date that includes a day, a month, and a four-digit year.
AM symbol The string to designate times from midnight to before noon in a 12-hour clock (used only with the tt notation).
PM symbol The string to designate times from noon to before midnight in a 12-hour clock (used only with the tt notation).
### The Number format section
Element Description
Decimal symbol The symbol to be used to separate the fractional part of a number from its integer part.
Digit grouping symbol The symbol to be used to group digits in large numbers.
Organisation structure /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure section In the Organisation structure workspace of Visma Net, you can configure the structure of your organisation to consist of a single branch or multiple branches with different reporting settings to suit complex reporting requirements and data consolidation needs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Organisation structure In the Organisation structure workspace of Visma Net, you can configure the structure of your organisation to consist of a single branch or multiple branches with different reporting settings to suit complex reporting requirements and data consolidation needs. All branches of the organisation use the same currency and chart of accounts, and have shared lists of trade partners. You can configure automatic balancing of inter-branch transactions. If the branches operate separately, you can set up user access to specific branches only. For additional information, see the following topics: + [About companies](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-companies/) + [About multi-branch support](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-multi-branch-support/) + [About security of organisation branches](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-organisation-branches/) You can also build a company tree, which is a model of your organisation's hierarchy that includes branches and departments, as well as temporary or permanent work groups. The company tree may reflect the administrative hierarchy and include sub-hierarchies of work groups created within specific branches or departments. The company tree is used for escalating approvals of documents when they become overdue and for determining the scope of the users who want to view items assigned to them. About companies /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-companies page In Visma Net, you can create new companies or maintain existing companies by using the Organisations (CS101500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About companies In Visma Net, you can create new companies or maintain existing companies by using the Organisations (CS101500) window. For more information: [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/). ## Company type Each company has one of the following types, which is specified in the Company type field in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window: Without branches : A company with this type cannot have any branches. If the Multi-branch support functionality is not enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, this option is selected by default and cannot be changed. With branches not requiring balancing : A company with this type must have at least one branch. If multiple branches of the company are involved in a transaction, balancing entries are not required. his option is available if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. With branches requiring balancing : A company with this type must have at least one branch. If multiple branches of the company are involved in a transaction, balancing entries are required. This option is available if the **Multi-branch support** and **Inter-branch transactions** functionalities are enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For details about how Visma Net supports multiple branches for a company, see: [About multi-branch support](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-multi-branch-support/). After a company has been configured, you can still change the company type as follows: Change of company type table |From|To|Condition| |---|---|---| |Without branches|With branches not requiring balancing or With branches requiring balancing|At any time.| |With branches not requiring balancing or With branches requiring balancing|Without branches|The company has only one branch or no branches at all.| |With branches not requiring balancing|With branches requiring balancing.|No transactions have been posted by company branches or the company has only one branch.| |With branches not requiring balancing|With branches not requiring balancing|No transactions have been posted by company branches or the company has only one branch.| ## Company maintenance For a company that has the With branches not requiring balancing or With branches requiring balancing type, the Branches tab becomes available in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window. By using this tab, a system administrator can add new branches to the company (if it has any) or delete branches from the list of company branches; when the company has no branches, it can be also deleted. A company with the Without branches type can be deleted if it has no general ledger history (that is, if no general ledger transactions are associated with the company) and if no cash accounts, employees, warehouses, and fixed assets are linked to the company. If you clear the **Active** check box in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window for a company that has branches, all the company branches will be deactivated. However, a branch cannot be deactivated if it is linked to an active warehouse, to an employee with a status other than Inactive, or to a fixed asset with a status other than Disposed or Reversed, and a company with such a branch also cannot be deactivated. ## Configuration of access to company data Access to the data related to a specific branch or to all branches of a company is regulated by an access role. When an access role is specified for a company in the **Access role** field in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window, the system prompts whether the access role should be copied to the settings of all branches of the company. When the **Access role** field is cleared for the company, the system prompts whether the access role should be removed from the settings of all branches of the company. If no access role is specified for the company, an individual access role can be specified for each branch of the company in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. A user that has access to at least one of the company branches can select the company in corresponding fields in data entry windows. ## Ledgers A company can post transactions to various ledgers, but it can be associated with only one actual ledger. You can manage ledgers associated with a company in any of the following ways: + Create for a new company a ledger of the Actual type by clicking **Create ledger** in the window toolbar of the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window + Review the list of the ledgers associated with the company, add an existing ledger to the list, or remove a ledger from the list by using the **Ledgers** tab of the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window + Review the list of all ledgers associated with the company of the selected branch by using the **Ledgers** tab of the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window + Maintain the list of the companies that are allowed to post to non-actual ledgers by using the [Ledgers](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/ledgers-gl201500/) window An actual ledger can be detached from a company if the ledger contains no transactions associated with any branch of the company. ## VAT reports For a company with the With branches requiring balancing type, the **File VAT by branch** check box is available in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window. If the check box is cleared, a VAT report includes data related to all branches of the company. If the check box is selected, each branch of the company requires an individual report. For a company with any other type, VAT reports always include company-wide data. ## Logos On the **Logo** tab of the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window, you can specify separate images for the logo displayed in the top left corner of Visma Net and for the logo displayed on reports for the selected company or branch. About multi-branch support /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-multi-branch-support page Sooner or later, small and medium-sized businesses may face the challenges presented by growth. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About multi-branch support Sooner or later, small and medium-sized businesses may face the challenges presented by growth. Sooner or later, small and medium-sized businesses may face the challenges presented by growth. The organisation can grow by adding new locations that become branches with some degree of autonomy. Because most Visma Net customers are small and mid-sized businesses, the multi-branch functionality has been developed for organisations that meet certain requirements: + All branches use the same base currency. + The chart of accounts is shared among branches, or similar charts of accounts used by different branches can be merged into one chart of accounts used by all branches. + The branches have the same financial year and periods. Larger organisations with base currencies different in different branches, fiscal years, and periods can configure their subsidiaries as separate organisations with individual company IDs and use the consolidation functionality to be able to report as a single company. ## Organisation as a structure of branches Visma Net supports multi-branch functionality and provides several basic models for implementing most typical organisation structures. In Visma Net, an organisation has a company account with a company ID. Within a company account, at least one branch is needed to represent the organisation itself. If the organisation includes more than one branch, organisation branches are created within the same company ID. The IDs for branches (Branch IDs) are based on the **BIZACCT** segmented key or they have the same segments as IDs for organisations, customers, and suppliers. ## User access to branch data Since the branches are created within the same organisation, they have some shared data and some branch-specific data. Each employee (user) is assigned to a specific branch. To restrict user access to branch-specific data, you can configure a branch access role for each branch. Then the branch employees will be able to access the shared data (as their roles allow) and the data specific to their branch. To employees who are to have access to other branches too, you must assign the access roles for the branches in the user's scope. For details, see: [About security of organisation branches](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-organisation-branches/). If a user has access to several branches, the user will be able to choose the branch he or she needs by selecting it from the window toolbar on each data entry window. ## Data shared between branches Some of the data is unconditionally shared and available in all branches for all users who have access to this data by their roles. In addition to the financial year and periods, the organisation's branches share the following information: + The chart of accounts. + Subaccounts. + Budget tree. + Taxes, VAT categories, and VAT zones. + Payment terms and overdue charges. + Statement cycles. + Customer and supplier classes. + Customers and suppliers. You can specify for some customer and supplier locations a default branch with which they have operations, and this location will be unavailable for selection from other branches. + Stock and non-stock items. If you need to view inventory by branch, configure the **Inventory** segmented key appropriately, with a segment designating a branch to which the item belongs. All items will be visible in the list of available items. + Lot and serial classes. + Units of measure and conversion rules. + Posting classes for inventory. Company tree and assignment maps should include work groups that belong to all branches. Approval routes may pass across the entire organisation. You can use the functionality of restriction groups to assign specific accounts and subaccounts to a particular branch. For details, see: [About security of organisation branches](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/manage-visibility-with-restriction-groups/about-security-of-organisation-branches/). ## Branch-specific data The following entities are assigned to only one of the branches: + Cash accounts (each of which is denominated in a specific currency) + Warehouses + Employees + Buildings (a sort of fixed asset) Do not create a subaccount segment for branches; transactions are marked by the originating branch in other ways. Purchase invoices and invoices as well as other documents are associated with the particular branch in which they were created.. If a user has a branch access role that provides access to only one of the branches, the user will be able to view only the documents related to the respective branch. ## Data consolidation The multi-branch functionality, as it is implemented in Visma Net, enables complex organisations to view the consolidated data from multiple branches without having to perform any additional operations and in real time. It is easy to configure consolidated replenishment or centralised payment of purchase invoice or view consolidated data on reports running them from the headquarters branch. If a user has access to all branches, this user can view the data of any selected branch or the consolidated data by leaving the **Branch** field blank. If a user has access to only one branch, this user will be able to view only the data related to the particular branch even if he or she runs the report that should show the consolidated data. Replenishment is performed on a branch basis, although you can implement the following scenario: The headquarters has a large warehouse for which you configure automatic replenishment. Warehouses assigned to other branches are replenished through transfers from the headquarters' warehouse. Thus, your organisation will be able to save on volume discounts. In your system, purchase invoices can be paid by a headquarters branch on behalf of other branches. To do this, assign to authorised personnel the roles that provide access to branches. Then the employees who pay the purchase invoices will be able to view the purchase invoices from all branches in the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. The cash accounts from which payments are made should be assigned to the headquarters branch.

Related pages

Windows

 About security of organisation branches /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-security-of-organisation-branches page If your organisation has multiple branches defined in Visma Net, you may need to control which employees get access to which branches. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About security of organisation branches If your organisation has multiple branches defined in Visma Net, you may need to control which employees get access to which branches. If your organisation has multiple branches defined in Visma Net, you may need to control which employees get access to which branches. Because branches share some data, you may also need to control access to the shared data. Visma Net provides user access roles, which you can use to control users' access to branches, and restriction groups to limit the visibility of shared data. In this topic, you will read about ways to manage the security of a branch. In Visma Net, you can configure groups with direct and inverse restriction. In this topic, groups with direct restriction are used in examples for simplicity. You can use inverse restriction groups in the same way as you use direct restriction groups. For details on the types of restriction groups, see: About types of restriction groups. ## Usage scenarios The most common scenarios of managing the security of company branches are the following: + Managing user access to branches: If your organisation has multiple branches (and you have created multiple branches in Visma Net ), you can configure access to branches for employees who work in these branches. + Managing the visibility of data shared between branches: If you need to make data shared between branches (such as general ledger accounts and subaccounts) visible only within a particular branch, you can use restriction groups to resolve this task. You can create and maintain multiple branches in your Visma Net instance only if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window (for details, see: About multi-branch support). ## User access to branches After multiple branches have been defined in the system, you provide access to the branches for users who will work in the system as follows: 1. In the User roles (SM201005) window, you create branch-specific user roles (one role per branch) and assign these roles to user accounts. For details on user roles, see: About role-based access. 1. In the Branches (CS102000) window, you assign the roles to branches as follows: For each branch, in the **Access role** field, you select the user role created for this branch. + Once a role is assigned to one of the branches, other branches also must have roles assigned. A branch with no role assigned will be inaccessible to any user.To allow a user to access multiple branches, assign to him or her the roles for the branches to which the user should have access. If a user, based on his or her role, has access to a data entry form where this user enters a document and specifies the branch of origin, only the branches to which the user has access are available on the drop-down list. The users who have access to multiple branches can select the specific branch from the **Branches** menu in the window's title toolbar and create documents on behalf of the selected branch. No matter which branch users have access to, users who have access to the following windows, based on their roles, will see and work with all branches (because users configure system objects by using these windows): + Inter-branch account mapping - reference information + Branches (CS102000) + Buildings (CS205010) + Company tree (EP204060) + Restriction groups by branch (GL103020) + General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040) + Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060) ## Visibility of data within a branch Branches have some data shared between branches and some data kept as branch-specific (for details, see: About multi-branch support). You may need to restrict the visibility of data that is shared but may contain sensitive information, such as general ledger accounts and subaccounts. Visma Net provides restriction groups so you can control which accounts and subaccounts are used with which branch. For details on configuring restriction groups for accounts and subaccounts, see: About account and subaccount security. ## Windows for branch security In the following table, you can find the list of the windows that you can use to manage restriction groups with branches and the tasks that you can resolve by using each window. |Task|Window| |---|---| |To initially configure the visibility of accounts by branches|General ledger accounts by branch access (GL103040)| |To initially configure the visibility of subaccounts (or subaccount segments) by branches|Subaccounts by branch access (GL103060)| |To change the visibility of system objects by a branch in multiple groups|Restriction groups by branch (GL103020)| For information about how to add or remove objects from a restriction group, see: About operations with restriction groups. Parent topic: Manage visibility with restriction groups - overview About multiple calendar support /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-multiple-calendar-support page In Visma Net, you can define and maintain multiple calendars in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About multiple calendar support In Visma Net, you can define and maintain multiple calendars in the system. In Visma Net, you can define and maintain multiple calendars in the system. Calendars are used for a variety of purposes, including the following: + Labour calculations performed for contracts and projects + Effective scheduling of events + Tracking the movement of goods through carriers involved in shipping to and from your company + Escalation of work items automatically assigned to specific work groups ## The calendar settings Calendars can be defined in the [Work calendar (CS209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/work-calendar-cs209000/) window. For each employee calendar, you can define the week's work days and specify working hours for each day. On the **Exceptions** tab, you can define holidays, which pre-empt work days or shift them to a day when the employee generally does not work, and specify any change in working hours for a particular date. If the calendar is used for a carrier rather than an employee, specify on which days goods are moved. ## The employee calendars In the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window, you can associate calendars with particular employees, such as salespersons or members of customer service and support work groups. If a calendar will be used by others, the employee should mark his or her calendar as public by using the [User settings (SM203010)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/user-settings-sm203010/) window. An employee's calendar can also be used for labour calculation if the employee works in customer support or on projects. Work time and overtime are calculated automatically for time cards when the employee spends time working on a case or a project task, if the service contract or project allow invoice-able tasks and activities. To organise work more efficiently, employees who work together should share information about their free and busy times. They can do this in the following ways: + In Visma Net, users can export their calendar, which shows their free and busy time, and email the resulting file to involved persons. + Users can export their calendar data from MS Outlook and import it to Visma Net (in.cvs format). MS Outlook continues to periodically update the.cvs file when changes are made in Outlook.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a work calendar /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/create-a-work-calendar section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a work calendar 1. Go to the [Work calendar (CS209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/work-calendar-cs209000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Calendar ID** field, enter an ID for your new calendar. This ID can be a ten-character string of letters and numbers. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a name. 1. Go to the **Calendar settings** tab. 1. On this tab, you can select which days you want to add to your calender, at which time these days start, and at which time they end. For example: You can create a week that runs from Monday to Friday with days that begin at 09:00 and end at 18:00, but add a Wednesday that ends at 13:00 PM. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Optional steps + In the **Time zone** field, you can click the drop-down list to select a time zone. + For each day, you can select the **Goods are moved** check box to indicate whether or not goods can be moved on this day of the week. + On the **Exceptions** tab, you can enter holidays.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create departments /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/create-departments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create departments 1. Go to the [Departments (EP201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/departments-ep201500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Department ID** field, enter the ID of the department you want to create. This ID can consist of letters. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a name. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can now assign employees to this department. ## Optional steps In the **Expense account** field, select an account you want to use for the department. In the **Expense sub.** field, enter the account number of the subaccount you want to use for the department.

Related pages

Windows

 Create a position /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/create-a-position section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a position 1. Go to the [Positions (EP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/positions-ep201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Position ID** field, enter an ID for the new position. This ID can consist of 10 numbers and/or letters. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a name. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Organisation structure windows /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows section On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Organisation structure windows On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Organisation structure module. Organisations (CS101500) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500 page In this window, you can do any of the following: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Organisations (CS101500) In this window, you can do any of the following: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + Create new organisations + Maintain existing organisations + Add branches to a organisation (if it has any) and review the list of organisation branches + Create an actual ledger for a new organisation + Assign existing ledgers to organisations + Review the list of organisation employees + [Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/set-up-calculation/recalculate-vat-when-customer-is-changed-on-document/) ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu command, which you can click to invoke an action:

Change ID
Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can specify a new ID for the currently selected organisation.
Create ledger Opens the Create ledger dialog box, where you can specify the parameters necessary to create a new actual ledger for the organisation. This button is available only for a organisation that does not have an actual ledger assigned.
### Specify new ID dialog box In this area, you can assign a unique ID to a new organisation branch and specify its most commonly used name.
Element Description
Organisation ID The new identifier of the organisation.
OK Changes the organisation ID to the one you have specified, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Discards the changes and closes the dialog box.
### Create ledger dialog box In this area, you can, create a ledger for the active organisation.
Element Description
Ledger ID The identifier of the new actual ledger that will be assigned to the organisation.
Description A description of the actual ledger. By default, the description is composed from the organisation ID, with the “actual ledger“ string added to the end of it.
Create Creates a ledger with the Actual type and assigns it to the organisation. The organisation base currency is used as the ledger currency.
Cancel Discards the changes and closes the dialog box.
## The top part In this area, you can, create a ledger for the active organisation.
Element Description
Organisation ID The unique identifier of the organisation, which you compose according to the rules defined by the BIZACCT segmented key.
Company name The name of the organisation
Organisation type

The type of the organisation, which can be one of the following:

Without branches
A organisation with this type cannot have any branches. If the Multi-branch support functionality is not enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this option is selected by default and cannot be changed. If the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled, this organisation type can be changed to any other type at any time.
With branches not requiring balancing
A organisation with this type must have at least one branch. If multiple branches of the organisation are involved in a transaction, balancing entries are not required. This option is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
With branches requiring balancing
A organisation with this type must have at least one branch. If multiple branches of the organisation are involved in a transaction, balancing entries are required. This option is available only if the Multi-branch support and Inter-branch transactions functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the selected organisation is active.
Is main organisation If you want this organisation to be the main organisation of your branches, select this check box.
## The Organisation details tab The elements on this tab hold the general information about the organisation, such as the contact information, the base currency settings, VAT information, and the default configuration settings. ### The Main address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line of the organisation address.
Address 2 The second line of the organisation address.
Address 3 The third line of the organisation address.
Postcode

The postcode.

An input validation mask can be set for the country postcodes. For more information, see: the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the organisation address.
Country The country of the organisation address. Select a country from the predefined list of countries.
County

The county or province of the organisation address.

You can populate the list of counties by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
View on map A button that you can click to view the location on a map.
### The Main contact section
Company name The legal business name of the organisation, as registered with the appropriate tax agency. This is the name that will appear on the organisation documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The default email address of the organisation.
Web The website of the organisation, if one exists.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the organisation.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the organisation.
Fax The fax number of the organisation.
### The Document address section
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the business information of the default location is the same as the branch business information specified on the General settings tab. When you select this check box, the values in the fields are filled in automatically in accordance with the main business information.
Address 1 The first line of the organisation address.
Address 2 The second line of the organisation address.
Address 3 The third line of the organisation address.
Postcode

The postcode.

An input validation mask can be set for the country postcodes. For more information, see: the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the organisation address.
Country The country of the organisation address. Select a country from the predefined list of countries.
County

The county or province of the organisation address.

You can populate the list of counties by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
### The Base currency settings (shared) section This group of elements holds information that is shared among all branches of the organisation. The same base currency is used for all branches; you can select the base currency only when you create a organisation. Along with the base currency, you should specify the currency symbol and the required decimal precision.
Element Description
Base currency ID A string (of up to three characters) to identify the base currency.
Description The detailed description of the base currency.
Currency symbol The currency symbol for the base currency, which will appear with the currency amounts. We recommend that you follow established norms when assigning IDs to the currencies; refer to the ISO 4217 code list.
Decimal precision

The number of digits following the decimal point that are used in operations with the base currency.

The decimal precision must be selected to allow the use of the smallest subunit of the base currency unit. Currency amounts will be rounded in arithmetic operations in accordance with this setting.
### The VAT registration information section
Element Description
VAT registration ID The organisation registration ID for the country’s tax authority. An input mask or regular expression can be set to validate the input in this box.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the organisation.
File VAT by branch

A check box that indicates (if selected) that an individual VAT report is to be prepared for each branch. If the check box is not selected, one VAT report is prepared for all branches.

This check box is available for the organisation only if you select the With branches requiring balancing option in the Organisation type field.
File EC sales list by branch

A check box that indicates (if selected) that EC sales list is to be prepared for each branch. When this is checked, the EC sales list (AR40501S) will require that both organisation and branch are selected before you can create a EC sales list report.

This check box is available for the organisation only if you select the With branches requiring balancing option in the Organisation type field.
### The Configuration settings section
Element Description
Access role

The role to be used to give users access to organisation data. If the organisation has multiple branches, the selected access role is copied to the settings of each branch of the organisation. If you clear the field, the system prompts whether you want to remove the access role from the settings of all branches of the organisation.

For more information, see: About security of organisation branches.
Default country The default country, which is the country of most of the organisation’s customers and suppliers.
Default printer The default printer to be used for printing the documents of this organisation. This field is available only if the DeviceHub functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Industry code ID The branch’s industry code ID.
### The Report settings section
Element Description
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents Select this check box if you want a note to be printed on external sales documents.
Print line note on internal sales documents Select this check box if you want a note to be printed on internal sales documents.
Print description on purchase orders Select this check box if you want a description to be printed on purchase orders.
Print note on purchase orders Select this check box if you want a note to be printed on purchase orders.
### The Misc. settings (shared) section This group of elements holds information that is shared among all branches.
Element Description
Quantity decimal places The number of decimal places (that is, places after the decimal point) to be used for quantities.
Price/cost decimal places The number of decimal places to be used for prices and costs.
Weight UoM The unit of measure (UoM) to be used to calculate the weight of packages to be used for shipments.
Volume UoM The unit of measure to be used to calculate the volume of specific quantities of items for packages to be used for shipments.
Max. no. of pages on report preview The maximum number of pages that you can see when you preview a report.
## The Branches tab This tab displays the list of branches that belong to the organisation. The tab is available only if the selected organisation has the With branches not requiring balancing or With branches requiring balancing organisation type. ### Table buttons
Button Description
Add branch Opens the Branches (CS102000) window, where you can create a branch for the currently selected organisation.
### Table columns The table toolbar includes standard buttons and buttons specific to this table. The table-specific buttons are listed below.
Column Description
Branch ID The identifier of the branch, which is also a link that opens the Branches (CS102000) window populated with the data of the branch.
Branch name The name of the branch.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the branch is active.
Access role The role that is used to give the employees of the branch access to the branch data.
Role description The description of the access role.
## The Delivery settings tab You use the elements on this tab to specify the delivery contact and address of the organisation, along with the related shipping instructions. The tab is available only if the selected organisation has the **Without branches** organisation type. ### The Delivery contact section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the business information of the default location is the same as the branch business information specified on the General settings tab. When you select this check box, the values in the fields are filled in automatically in accordance with the main business information.
Company name The business name of the location, if it is different from the business name of the organisation.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The default email address of the location.
Web The website of the location, if one exists.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the location.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the location.
Fax The fax number of the location.
### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Same as main

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the default location’s address is the same as that of the main branch address specified on the General settings tab.

When you select the check box, the values in the boxes are filled in automatically in accordance with the values of the main address. You clear the check box if you want to enter a different address.
Address line 1 The first line of the default location address.
Address line 2 The second line of the default location address.
Postcode The postal code for the address.
City The city of the default location.
Country The country of the default location.
County The county of the default location.
View on map A button that you can click to view the location on a map.
### The Delivery instructions section The group of elements covers the shipping instructions for the delivery address.
Element Description
VAT zone ID The VAT zone of the delivery location.
Shipping rule

The way the orders should be fulfilled for this location. You can select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
Only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
Back orders are allowed if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
The ordered quantity can be shipped partially, and the quantity remaining after the first shipment will be cancelled.
## The Payment settings tab
Column Description
Days for remark The number of days that the receiver of the invoice has to make remarks on the invoice. The value filled in here is displayed on the invoice reports.
Bank language The language that the bank of the branch uses.
Bank name The name of the bank of the branch.
Bank address line 1 The first line of the bank’s payment address.
Bank address line 2 The second line of the bank’s payment address.
Bank address line 3 The third line of the bank’s payment address.
Bank country The country where the bank is located.
IBAN The bank’s IBAN number.
Bank account no. The main bank account number for the bank.
Bank account no. 2 The second bank account number for the bank.
Bank account no. 3 The third bank account number for the bank.
BIC (SWIFT) The BIC or SWIFT code of the bank.
Creditor identifier A uniform and standardised identification number that unambiguously identifies the creditor.
### The Payment process settings section
Element Description
Use basic payment process Select this check box if you want to allow the branch to use the simple payment process for outgoing payments.
Allow payment of pre-booked invoices Select this check box if you want to allow payment of purchase invoices that are pre-booked but not released yet.
## The Employees On this tab, you can view and update the list of organisation employees. ### Table buttons The table toolbar includes standard buttons and buttons specific to this table. The table-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
New employee Navigates to the Employees (EP203000) window so that you can define a new employee for the organisation.
### Table columns The table toolbar includes standard buttons and buttons specific to this table. The table-specific buttons are listed below.
Column Description
Branch ID The identifier of the organisation branch to which the employee belongs. This column is available only for a organisation that has the With branches not requiring balancing or With branches requiring balancing organisation type.
Employee ID The unique identifier of the employee in the system.
Name The full name of the employee.
Department The role that is used to give the employees of the branch access to the branch data.
City The city where the employee lives.
County The county where the employee lives.
Phone 1 The phone number of the employee.
Email The email address of the employee.
Status The status of the employee.
## The Ledgers tab On this tab, you can review and edit the list of the ledgers associated with the organisation. organisations of any types may or may not share actual ledgers; ledgers of other types can be attached to or detached from a organisation at any time. Only ledgers associated with a organisation can be updated by the organisation branches.
Column Description
Ledger The identifier of the ledger.
Description A description of the ledger.
Type The type of the ledger, which can be one of the following: Actual, Reporting, Statistical, or Budget.
Currency The currency of the ledger.
Consolidation source A check box that indicates (if selected) that the ledger is used as a source ledger for consolidation.
## The General ledger accounts tab You use this tab to specify the sales, expense, freight, and discount subaccounts to be used for the organisation. The tab is available only if the selected organisation has the **Without branches** organisation type.
Element Description
Sales sub The subaccount to be used as the default sales subaccount for the organisation.
Expense sub The subaccount to be used as the default expense subaccount for the organisation.
Freight sub The subaccount to be used as the default freight subaccount for the organisation.
Discount sub The subaccount to be used as the default discount subaccount for the organisation.
Currency gain/loss sub. The subaccount to be used as the default currency gain and loss subaccount for the organisation.
## The Logo tab On this tab, you can upload logo images for the branch. The uploaded images will be displayed in the system and on the reports when this branch is active. To delete images that you no longer need, you use the **Files** menu on the window title bar. ### Site logo section In this section, you can upload and preview the logo that will be displayed in the top left corner of the window (when this organisation is active). The recommended size of the uploaded image is 210 by 50 pixels.
Element Description
Browse Open the file section window, where you can select an image to upload.
Upload Uploads the selected image to the system.
Preview window Displays uploaded images. You can go through the images by pressing Ctrl+left arrow or Ctrl+right arrow.
### The Report logo section In this section, you can upload and preview the logo that will be displayed on the reports for the selected organisation. The recommended size of the uploaded image is 420 by 100 pixels.
Element Description
Browse Open the file section window, where you can select an image to upload.
Upload Uploads the selected image to the system.
Preview window Displays uploaded images. You can go through the images by pressing Ctrl+left arrow or Ctrl+right arrow.
## The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) tab On this tab, you can view and update the settings for ROT and RUT deduction for the branchorganisation. ROT and RUT deduction is a default setting in the Visma Net templates.
Element Description
Uses ROT/RUT deduction Select this check box if ROT and/or RUT deduction is used.
Currency The currency of the deduction amount, usually SEK.
Next claim no. The next number of the file that can be sent to the Swedish government.
Org. no. validation reg. exp. The regular expression used to validate an entered housing cooperative’s ID. This is automatically set to ten digits: ^(\d{10})$.
Default RUT/ROT type In this field, you can choose whether RUT or ROT is the default option in the following windows: Non-stock items (IN202000), Stock items (IN202500), Sales invoices (AR301000), Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000), and Sales orders (SO301000).
Tax agency account In this field, you choose the Swedish tax authority (Skatteverket). All incoming payments from ROT and RUT deductions will then be added to this customer.
Balance invoices on

Determines when the balancing Closed credit note to the customer and Open debit note to Skatteverket will be created. This can be one of the following:

Release customer ledger documents
upon release of the invoice.
Claim ROT and RUT
upon claiming the invoice in the Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000) window with the Claim action.
### The ROT section
Element Description
Standard allowance limit The standard maximum amount for ROT deduction per person.
Extra allowance limit The maximum amount for ROT deduction per person, when this is different from the standard maximum amount.
Deduction (%) The ROT deduction amount in percent.
### The RUT section
Element Description
Standard allowance limit The standard maximum amount for RUT deduction per person.
Extra allowance limit The maximum amount for RUT deduction per person, when this is different from the standard maximum amount.
Deduction (%) The RUT deduction amount in percent.
## The VAT information tab ### The Board address section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that indicates (if selected) that the business information of the default location is the same as the branch business information specified on the General settings tab. When you select this check box, the values in the fields are filled in automatically in accordance with the main business information.
Address 1 The first line of the organisation address.
Address 2 The second line of the organisation address.
Address 3 The third line of the organisation address.
Postcode

The postcode.

An input validation mask can be set for the country postcodes. For more information, see: the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the organisation address.
Country The country of the organisation address. Select a country from the predefined list of countries.
County

The county or province of the organisation address.

You can populate the list of counties by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
### The VAT type section
Element Description
VAT type

A drop-down field where you select the following options:

  • Taxable
  • Non-taxable
  • Corporate VAT
  • Taxable - discontinuation of activities
  • Non-taxable - discontinuation of activities
  • Corporate VAT - discontinuation of activities
Default tax agency

The ID and name of the default tax agency that will be suggested as tax agency in windows related to VAT handling. If this field is left empty, the Tax agency field in VAT handling windows will default to the first tax agency in the list of tax agencies.

If you have selected File VAT by branch you can also define the default tax agency for each branch.
### The Data entry section
Check box Description
Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document A check box that you select if you want the system to update the VAT category for existing lines when you change the customer or customer location in the Sales invoices (AR301000), Sales orders (SO301000) and Customer invoices (SO303000) windows.
## The Intrastat tab On this tab, you can view and update the Intrastat settings for the branch. ### The Report settings section
Element Description
Internal code This code is used only in Finland, it is called the INT code, and is given by the Customs authority. It is most often used in cases where the organisation has offices in different locations and each office wants to submit a statistical declaration of their own, due to practical reasons. The code is not mandatory.
Declarant ID The ID used for Intrastat reporting.
Contact person The contact person responsible for the Intrastat report.
### The Agency information section
Element Description
Use agency Set the check box if you are using an agency to do the Intrastat reporting for your branch.
Organisation name The organisation’s name.
VAT registration ID The organisation’s VAT number.
Internal code The internal code for the organisation.
Telephone The organisation’s telephone number.
## The Altinn settings tab ### The RF-1301 (Norway only) section
Element Description
Name The name of the responsible person.
Telephone The telephone number of the responsible person.
Notifications by email to The email to which the sender wants to receive notifications.
Notifications by SMS to The telephone number to which the sender wants to receive notifications.
### The SAF-T report information section This information is automatically shown on the **Altinn settings** tab in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window if you have not selected the **With branches requiring balancing** as the **Organisation type** and the **File VAT by branch** check box on the **Organisation details** tab.
Element Description
Contact person The name of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
Telephone The telephone number of the responsible person.
Reference no. The government’s reference number for the report. The reference number is mandatory when you send the report to Altinn. The number is given by the authority when they request this report.
## The AutoInvoice settings tab ### The PEPPOL scheme section
Element Description
Endpoint Identifies the invoicee party’s electronic address
Party identification Identification of the invoicee party.
Party legal Legal information of the invoicee party.
## The AutoReport tab ### The ApitamoPKI, VAT and EC sales report settings section
Element Description
Email address The email address (or addresses separated by a semicolon;), which is used when sending data that is expected to get response data, such as direct transfers.
Language The language of the responses. You can choose between English, Finnish, or Swedish. If the field is empty, the language will be set to Finnish.

Related pages

Concepts

 Branches (CS102000) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000 page This window holds general information about each branch of your company, including the ID, name, address, default location, and employees. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Branches (CS102000) This window holds general information about each branch of your company, including the ID, name, address, default location, and employees. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can provide tax registration information for the branch if it is a legal entity. By using the window, you can create a new branch or update information about an existing branch. Also, you can set up the base currency to be used by all the branches. For an overview of the branch-related functionality of Visma Net, see: [About multi-branch support](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/about-multi-branch-support/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Activate or deactivate the ROT and RUT deduction functionality](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/activate-or-deactivate-the-rot-and-rut-deduction-functionality/) + [Use the Basic payment processing for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/use-the-basic-payment-processing-for-autopay/) + [Use Advanced payment processing for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/use-advanced-payment-processing-for-autopay/) + [Enter contact information for RF-1301](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/b2c/enter-contact-information-for-rf-1301/) ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons. The window-specific buttons are listed below.
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu command, which you can click to invoke actions:

+

  • Change ID: Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can specify a new ID for the currently selected company.
## The top part In this area, you can assign a unique ID to a new company branch and specify its most commonly used name.
Element Description
Branch ID The unique ID of the branch, which you compose according to the rules defined by the BIZACCT segmented key.
Branch name The most commonly used name of the branch.
Company The company to which the branch belongs or whose subsidiary it is.
Active A check box that says (if selected) that the selected branch is active.
Main office Select this check box if this branch is the main office.
## The Branch details tab The elements on this tab hold the general information about the branch. ### The Main address section The elements in this section contain the company address. By default, this address is the one set as the main address. You can set another address as the main one on the **Delivery settings** tab.
Element Description
Address 1 The first line of the company branch address.
Address 2 The second line of the company branch address.
Address 3 The third line of the company branch address.
Postcode The postcode. An input validation mask can be set for the country postcodes.
City The city of the company branch address.
*Country The country of the company branch address. Select a country from the predefined list of countries.
County The county or province of the company branch address. You can populate the list of counties by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
View on map Click to view the location on a map.
### The Main contact section The elements in this section contain the main contact information of the company.
Element Description
Company name The legal business name of the company, as registered with the appropriate tax agency. This is the name that will appear on the company documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The default email address of the company.
Web The website of the company, if one exists.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the company.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the company.
Fax The fax number of the company.
### The Document address section
Element Description
Same as main Select this check box if you want the document address information to be the same as the main address information.
Address 1 The first line of the document address.
Address 2 The second line of the document address.
Address 3 The third line of the document address.
Postcode The postcode. An input validation mask can be set for the country postcodes. For more information, see: the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the document address.
Country The country of the document address. Select a country from the predefined list of countries.
County The county or province of the document address. You can populate the list of counties by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
### The VAT registration information section This group of elements provides miscellaneous legal information about the company branch.
Element Description
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the company.
VAT registration ID The branch registration ID for the country’s tax authority. An input mask or regular expression can be set to validate the input in this field.
### The Configuration settings section This group of elements covers the default country and the access role of the branch.
Element Description
Access role

The role to be used to give employees of the branch access to the branch data.

For more information, see: About security of organisation branches.
*Default country The default country, which is the country of most of the branch’s customers and suppliers.
Industry code ID The branch’s industry code ID.
### The Report settings section This group of elements holds information on report settings.
Element Description
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents Select this check box if you want a note to be printed on external sales documents.
Print note on internal sales documents Select this check box if you want a note to be printed on internal sales documents.
Print description on purchase orders Select this check box if you want a description to be printed on purchase orders.
Print note on purchase orders Select this check box if you want a note to be printed on purchase orders.
## The Delivery settings tab You use the elements on this tab to specify the delivery contact and address of the branch, along with related shipping instructions. ### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that you select if the default location’s address is the same as that of the main branch address specified on the General settings tab. If you select the check box, the values in the fields will be filled out automatically in accordance with the values of the main address. Clear the check box to enter another address.
Address 1 The first line of the default location address.
Address 2 The second line of the default location address.
Address 3 The third line of the default location address.
Postcode The postcode for the address.
City The city of the default location.
Country The country of the default location.
County The county or province of the company branch address. You can populate the list of counties by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
View on map Click to view the location on a map.
### The Delivery contact section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that you select if the business information of the default location is the same as the branch business information specified on the General settings tab; if you select this check box, the values in the boxes will be filled out automatically, in accordance with the main business information.
Company name The business name of the location, if it is different from the business name of the branch.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The email address to be used for this branch location.
Web The website address (if any) related to this branch location.
Phone 1 The primary phone number at the location.
Phone 2 An additional phone number at this location.
Fax An additional phone number at this location.
### The Shipping instructions section This group of elements covers the shipping instructions for the delivery address.
Element Description
VAT zone ID The VAT zone of the delivery location.
Shipping rule

The way the orders should be fulfilled for this location. You can select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
Only completely fulfilled orders are allowed.
Back orders allowed
Back orders are allowed if some items are out of stock.
Cancel remainder
The ordered quantity can be shipped partially, and the quantity remaining after the first shipment will be cancelled.
## The Payment settings tab
Column Description
Days for remark The number of days that the receiver of the invoice has to make remarks on the invoice. The value filled in here is displayed on the invoice reports.
Bank language The language that the bank of the branch uses.
Bank name The name of the bank of the branch.
Bank address line 1 The first line of the bank’s payment address.
Bank address line 2 The second line of the bank’s payment address.
Bank address line 3 The third line of the bank’s payment address.
Bank country The country where the bank is located.
IBAN The bank’s IBAN number.
Bank account no. The main bank account number for the bank.
Bank account no. 2 The second bank account number for the bank.
Bank account no. 3 The third bank account number for the bank.
BIC (SWIFT) The BIC or SWIFT code of the bank.
Creditor identifier The branch’s creditor ID. It is used for direct debit sending (only in the Netherlands)
### The Payment process settings section
Element Description
Allow payment of pre-booked invoices Select this check box if you want to allow payment of purchase invoices that are pre-booked but not released yet.
## The Ledgers tab On this tab, you can review and edit the list of the ledgers associated with the company. Companies of any types may or may not share actual ledgers; ledgers of other types can be attached to or detached from a company at any time. Only ledgers associated with a company can be updated by the company branches.
Column Description
*Ledger ID The identifier of the ledger.
Description A description of the ledger.
Type The type of the ledger, which can be one of the following: Actual, Reporting, Statistical, or Budget.
*Currency The currency of the ledger.
Consolidation source A check box that indicates (if selected) that the ledger is used as a source ledger for consolidation.
## The General ledger accounts tab You use this tab to specify the sales, expense, freight, and discount subaccounts to be used for the branch.
Element Description
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used as the default sales subaccount for the branch.
Expense sub. The subaccount to be used as the default expense subaccount for the branch.
Freight sub. The subaccount to be used as the default freight subaccount for the branch.
Discount sub. The subaccount to be used as the default discount subaccount for the branch.
Currency gain/loss sub. The subaccount to be used as the default currency gain and loss subaccount for the branch.
## The Logo tab On this tab, you can upload logo images for the branch. The uploaded images will be displayed in the system and on the reports when this branch is active. To delete images that you no longer need, you use the **Files** menu on the window title bar. ### The Site logo section In this section, you can upload and preview the logo that will be displayed in the top left corner of Visma Net (when this branch is active). The recommended size of the uploaded image is 210 by 50 pixels.
Elements Description
Browse Opens the file selection window, where you can select an image to upload.
Upload Uploads the selected image to the system.
Preview window Displays uploaded images. You can go through the images by pressing Ctrl+left arrow or Ctrl+right arrow.
### The Report logo section In this section, you can upload and preview the logo that will be displayed on the reports for the selected branch. The recommended size of the uploaded image is 420 by 100 pixels.
Elements Description
Browse Opens the file selection window, where you can select an image to upload.
Upload Uploads the selected image to the system.
Preview window Displays uploaded images. You can go through the images by pressing Ctrl+left arrow or Ctrl+right arrow.
## The Employees tab On this tab, you can view and update the list of branch employees. ### The table buttons
Button Description
New employee This button lets you navigate to the Employees (EP203000) window so that you can add information about a new employee for the branch.
### The table columns
Column Description
Employee ID The unique ID of the employee in the system.
Name The name of the employee.
*Department The department where the employee works.
City The city where the employee lives.
County The county where the employee lives.
Phone 1 The phone number of the employee.
Email The email address of the employee.
*Status The status of the employee.
## The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) tab On this tab, you can view and update the settings for ROT and RUT deduction for the branchorganisation. ROT and RUT deduction is a default setting in the Visma Net templates.
Element Description
Uses ROT/RUT deduction Select this check box if ROT and/or RUT deduction is used.
Currency The currency of the deduction amount, usually SEK.
Next claim no. The next number of the file that can be sent to the Swedish government.
Org. no. validation reg. exp. The regular expression used to validate an entered housing cooperative’s ID. This is automatically set to ten digits: ^(\d{10})$.
Default RUT/ROT type In this field, you can choose whether RUT or ROT is the default option in the following windows: Non-stock items (IN202000), Stock items (IN202500), Sales invoices (AR301000), Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000), and Sales orders (SO301000).
Tax agency account In this field, you choose the Swedish tax authority (Skatteverket). All incoming payments from ROT and RUT deductions will then be added to this customer.
Balance invoices on

Determines when the balancing Closed credit note to the customer and Open debit note to Skatteverket will be created. This can be one of the following:

Release customer ledger documents
upon release of the invoice.
Claim ROT and RUT
upon claiming the invoice in the Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000) window with the Claim action.
### The ROT section
Element Description
Standard allowance limit The standard maximum amount for ROT deduction per person.
Extra allowance limit The maximum amount for ROT deduction per person, when this is different from the standard maximum amount.
Deduction (%) The ROT deduction amount in percent.
### The RUT section
Element Description
Standard allowance limit The standard maximum amount for RUT deduction per person.
Extra allowance limit The maximum amount for RUT deduction per person, when this is different from the standard maximum amount.
Deduction (%) The RUT deduction amount in percent.
## The VAT information tab On this tab, you can view and update the VAT information for the branch. ### The Board address section
Element Description
Same as main A check box that you select if the business information of the default location is the same as the branch business information specified on the General settings tab; if you select this check box, the values in the boxes will be filled out automatically, in accordance with the main business information.
Address 1 The first line of the board location address.
Address 2 The second line of the board location address.
Address 3 The third line of the board location address.
Postcode The postcode for the address.
City The city of the location.
Country The country of the location.
County The county or province of the branch’s board address. You can populate the list of counties by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
View on map Click to view the location on a map.
### The VAT type section
Element Description
VAT type

By selecting one of the options in the drop-down list, will make an impact on your printed invoices.

Taxable
Adds Taxable ( MVA ) behind the company registration number on the printed invoice.
Non-taxable
Only the company registration number ( Org.nr. ) is visible on the printed invoice.
Corporate VAT
Adds Corporate ( Foretaksregistrert ) in front of the company registration number ( Org.nr., and VAT ( mva. ) behind it, on the printed invoice. - Adds the tax certificate F-skattebevis for your company on the printed invoice.
Taxable - discontinuation of activities
Adds this text ( MVA - Under avvikling ) behind the company registration number ( Org.nr. ) on the printed invoice.
Non-taxable - discontinuation of activities
Adds this text ( Ingen mva. - Under avvikling ) behind the company registration number ( Org.nr. ) on the printed invoice.
Corporate VAT - discontinuation of activities
Adds this text ( Foretaksregistrert MVA - Under avvikling ) behind the company registration number ( Org.nr. ) on the printed invoice.
Default tax agency The ID and name of the default tax agency that will be suggested as tax agency in windows related to VAT handling. If you have selected File VAT by branch you can define the default tax agency for each branch. If this field is left empty for the branch, the system will use the default tax agency selected for the company.
## The Altinn settings tab On this tab, you can view and update the Altinn settings for the branch. ### The RF-1301 (Norway only) section
Element Description
Name The name of the responsible person.
Phone no. The telephone number of the responsible person.
Notifications by email to The email to which the sender wants to receive notifications.
Notifications by SMS to The telephone number to which the sender wants to receive notifications.
### The SAF-T report information section
Element Description
Contact person

The responsible person for the SAF-T report that the government may contact.

In order to use the Download file button in the SAF-T report (TX50600S) window, this field must contain information since it is mandatory for the SAF-T report.
Email

The email address of the responsible person for the SAF-T report.

This information is mandatory for the SAF-T report.
Phone no.

The telephone number of the responsible person for the SAF-T report.

This information is mandatory for the SAF-T report.
Reference number

The reference number of the report given by Altinn to be used in the SAF-T report.

This information is mandatory for the SAF-T report.
## The Intrastat tab On this tab, you can view and update the Intrastat settings for the branch. ### The Report settings section
Element Description
Internal code This code is used only in Finland, it is called the INT code, and is given by the Customs authority. It is most often used in cases where the company has offices in different locations and each office wants to submit a statistical declaration of their own, due to practical reasons. The code is not mandatory.
Declarant ID The ID used for Intrastat reporting.
Contact person The contact person responsible for the Intrastat report.
### The Agency information section
Element Description
Use agency The name of the agency, if you are using an agency to do the Intrastat reporting for your branch.
ID The ID number for the agency.
Organisation name The agency’s name.
VAT number The agency’s VAT number.
Internal code The internal code for the agency.
Phone number The agency’s telephone number.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Buildings (CS205010) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/buildings-cs205010 page By using this window, you can view which buildings belong to which branches and assignavailable buildings to specific branches. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Buildings (CS205010) By using this window, you can view which buildings belong to which branches and assignavailable buildings to specific branches. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part In this area, you can select a branch to view the list of its buildings or to assignbuildings to it.
Element Description
Branch The branch for which you want to assign or viewbuildings.
## The table By using this area, you can add buildings to the list of those assigned to theselected branch or remove the buildings. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Building The building to be assigned to the selected branch.Select thebuilding from the list of fixed assets defined as buildings.
Description The description of the building.

Related pages

Concepts

 Company tree (EP204060) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/company-tree-ep204060 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Company tree (EP204060) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Update tree Updates the company tree to display recently added nodes, work groups, and work group members.
## The Company tree pane In this pane, the existing work groups are represented as nodes. You can click a node icon to the left of any work group to expand the node and view the hierarchical structure of the work group. The toolbar on the pane includes only custom buttons, which are described below. ## The List of groups table By using this table, you can create work groups positioned at the same level in the company tree. As you add a new group to the list, it will appear in the **Company tree** pane.
Element Description
Move node up Moves the selected node one position up in the list.
Move node down Moves the selected node one position down in the list.
Description A description of the group that can serve as an ID.
## The Group members table You can use this table to view and update the list of members of the group selected in the **List of groups** table.
Element Description
User The user associated with the employee.
Employee ID The ID of an employee who is a member of the group.
Employee name The name of the employee.
Position The employee position in the company.
Department The department of the employee.
Owner If you select this check box,, it indicates that this member is the owner in the work group — that is, a user who, by default, is assigned work items that are assigned to the group.
Active Select this check box to include the user in the selected work group.
Departments (EP201500) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/departments-ep201500 page In this window, you can add, view, edit, and delete departments in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Departments (EP201500) In this window, you can add, view, edit, and delete departments in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table Use this table to add, view, edit, and delete departments in your company.
Column Description
Department ID The unique identifier for the department.
Description A detailed description of the department.
Expense account The expense account to be used for recording department-related expenses.
Expense sub. The subaccount to be used for recording department-related expenses.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Employee classes (EP202000) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employee-classes-ep202000 page You can use this window to create, view, and edit employee classes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Employee classes (EP202000) You can use this window to create, view, and edit employee classes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create, view, and edit employee classes. For more information, see: [Create employee classes](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/create-employee-classes/). When you create new employees by using the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window, you must specify a particular employee class. The system will then fill in many of the elements in the window with default values provided by the class. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new employee class or to select an existing class so that you can view or modify its settings.
Element Description
Class ID A unique identifier assigned to an employee class.
Description A detailed description of the employee class.
Account used for payment The account used for payment for this employee class.
## The General settings tab Changing a setting for a class will not change that setting for all employees of the class; the class settings are used to provide default values only when you create new accounts for employees of the class.
Element Description
Terms The terms used as a schedule to pay salary or wages for employees of the class.
Payment method The payment method to be used by default for compensation payments.
Cash account The cash account to be used for compensation payments.
Supplier account The supplier account used to record payments owed to employees of the class.
Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Cash discount account One of the cash discount accounts used in the Supplier ledger workspace; this account is not actually used for employees.
Cash discount sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Prepayment account The account to be used to record prepayments paid to employees of the class.
Prepayment subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Expense account The account to record compensation amounts paid to employees of the class.
Expense subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Sales account The account to record any sales made by employees of the class.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Currency ID The currency of the payments.
Enable currency override A check box that (if selected) indicates that the currency may be changed for particular documents associated with the employee.
Curr. rate type The rate type to be used for the employees of the class.
Enable rate override A check box that (if selected) indicates the currency rate type may be changed for particular documents associated with the employee.
Calendar The calendar that defines work hours for the employees of the class, as well as the time zone they work from. Select the appropriate calendar from the list of calendars.
VAT zone ID The default VAT zone for the class.
Regular hours validation

The extent of validation of regular work hours for this employee. The default value is provided by the employee class. The following options are available:

Validate
Enables validation of regular work hours. If the total number of entered regular hours does not equal the number specified in the Regular hours per week field on the Employee cost tab, you will not be able to submit the time card for approval.
Warning only
Regular work hours are validated. Enables validation of regular work hours. If the total number of entered regular hours does not equal the number of regular hours per week, you will see a warning but you will still be able to release the time card.
None
Disables validation of regular work hours for this employee.
Time card default date

A setting that defines which date is specified by default for a new record that an employee of the class enters.

  • Next work day (selected by default): For the first activity in the selected reporting period, the default date is the first work day of the period.
  • Last day entered: For the first activity in the selected reporting period, the default date is the starting date of the period.
Webhook notification A check box which (if selected) indicates that the system will select the webhook notification check box for all employees in the given employee class.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains a table with the list of attributes associated with the employee class. Each attribute can be selected from the list of attributes defined in the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window.
Column Description
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is available for all employees of the class.

You can deactivate an obsolete attribute by clearing the check box—in this case, the deactivated attribute will no longer be displayed for employees of the class, but all attribute values that have already been specified for existing records still will be stored in the database, so if you re-activate the attribute, its values will become visible in the system again.
Attribute ID The name of the attribute, which serves as its identifier.
Description A brief description of the attribute.
Sort order A number that represents the order of the attribute in the list of class attributes.
Required A check box that (if selected) indicates that the attribute value is required for an employee of the class.
Internal A check box that (if selected) indicates that the attribute is not available for portal users.
Control type The type of the attribute: Text, Combo, Multi select combo, Lookup, Checkbox, or Datetime.
Default value The default value of the attribute.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Employees (EP203000) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000 page You can use this window to create employee accounts or to view and edit existing employee accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Employees (EP203000) You can use this window to create employee accounts or to view and edit existing employee accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Detach the employee’s login: Clears all login information and removes the login associated with the employee.

The menu item is available for all users who have access to this window. However, only administrators can use the User info tab in this window to create a new login or manage existing logins.

  • Change ID: Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can specify a new ID for the employee.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new employee account or to view or edit an existing employee account.
Element Description
Employee ID The unique identifier, which is assigned to the employee in accordance with the configuration of the EMPLOYEE segmented key.
Employee name The name of this employee.
Status

The status of the employee. The following options are available:

Active
The employee currently works for the company.
On hold
The employee account has not yet been activated.
Hold payments
Payments should be held for some reason.
Inactive
The employee has finished his or her work for the company.
One-time
The employee is defined as a one-time employee.
## The General information tab This tab contains the employee's contact information, address, and other general settings. ### The Contact info section
Element Description
Employee contact Link to the contact associated with the employee.
Title The courtesy title to be used for the employee.
First name The first name of the employee.
Middle name The middle name of the employee.
Last name The last name of the employee.
Phone 1

The phone number of the employee.

Select the phone number type, and enter the phone number in the adjacent field.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the employee.
Phone 3 An additional phone number of the employee.
Fax

The fax number of the employee.

Select the fax type, and enter the fax number in the adjacent field.
Email

The employee email address.

Note that an email address is required when you assign a user account to an employee.
Web The website of the employee, if any.
### The Address info section
Element Description
Address 1 The home address of the employee.
Address 2 The second line of the home address (if needed).
Address 3 The third line of the home address (if needed).
Postcode The postcode for the employee address.
City The city of the employee address.
Country The country of the employee address.
County

The state of the employee address.

If a list is available, select the state from the list of states in the country you selected above.
### The Employee settings section
Element Description
Employee ref. no. A reference number for the employee.
Employee class

The class of the employee.

Select one of the employee classes and many elements on the Financial settings tab will be filled in with the class settings.
Branch The branch or location of your organisation where the employee works.
Department The department the employee works for.
Calendar The calendar that describes the work hours of the employee and the time zone the employee works from. The default value is the calendar associated with the employee class.
Regular hours validation

The extent of validation of regular work hours for this employee. The default value is provided by the employee class. The following options are available:

Validate
Enables validation of regular work hours. If the total number of entered regular hours does not equal the number specified in the Regular hours per week field on the Employee cost tab, you will not be able to submit the time card for approval.
Warning only
Regular work hours are validated. Enables validation of regular work hours. If the total number of entered regular hours does not equal the number of regular hours per week, you will see a warning but you will still be able to release the time card.
None
Disables validation of regular work hours for this employee.
Reports to The manager or other employee who is responsible for the employee assignments. This information can be used on assignment maps for finding a proper work group for approving claims, time cards, and related documents.
Salesperson The salesperson identifier of the employee, if the employee is a salesperson.
Employee login The username to be used when the employee signs into the system.
Currency ID The currency to be used for the employee compensation payments.
Enable currency override A check box that (if selected) indicates that the currency may be changed for particular documents associated with the employee.
Curr. rate type The currency exchange rate type to be used for the employee.
Enable rate override A check box that (if selected) indicates that the currency rate type may be changed for particular documents associated with the employee.
Labour item The non-stock item (of the Labour type) used as a source of expense accounts for transactions associated with projects or contracts.
Forward emails A check box that (if selected) indicates that this employee’s emails should be forwarded to the employee’s email address.
Time card is required A check box that (if selected) indicates that time cards are required for this employee.
Webhook notification A check box which (if selected) indicates that the system will send a notification when an employee is created or updated.
Target ratio % The invoiceable part of the employee’s time. Used for inquires and reports.
### The Personal info section
Element Description
Date of birth The employee’s date of birth.
## The Employment history tab This tab contains information about the employee's history of employment in the company. By using this tab, you can also generate empty time cards for a particular time interval by clicking **Generate time cards**. ### The Generate time cards dialog box
Element Description
From The start date of the time interval for which you want to generate empty time cards.
Until The end date of the time interval for which you want to generate empty time cards.
Generate (button) Generates released empty time cards for the specified time interval.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box, and cancels the process of generating the time cards.
Element Description
Active A check box that (if selected) indicates that the employee currently holds this position.
Position The position the employee held in the company between the start date and the end date (see below).
Start date The date when the employee was appointed to this position.
Start reason

The reason the employee was appointed to this position. You can select one of the following options:

New
The employee was newly appointed to the position.
Rehire
The employee was rehired by the company.
Promotion
The employee was promoted.
Demotion
The employee was demoted.
New skills
The employee acquired new skills.
Reorganisation
The position resulted from reorganization that the company underwent.
Other
The employee’s appointment to the position occurred due to some other reason.
End date The date when the employee was appointed to another position or the employee’s employment in the company was terminated.
Terminated A check box that indicates (if selected) that the employee stopped working for the company.
Termination reason

The reason the employee’s employment in the company was terminated. You can select one of the following options:

Retirement
The employee has retired.
Layoff
The employee has been laid off.
Terminated for cause
The employee has been fired for a specific reason.
Resignation
The employee has resigned.
Deceased
The employee has died.
Medical issues
The employee has stopped working due to medical issues.
Rehire eligible

A check box that (if selected) indicates that the former employee is eligible for rehire.

This check box is available only if the Terminated check box is selected.
## The Financial settings tab You use this tab to specify the accounts involved in recording the employee compensation and payments. If you have selected an employee class on the **General info** tab, these elements will initially be populated with the values specified for the class, but you can change any of the values. ### The General ledger accounts section
Element Description
Supplier account The supplier account to be used to record payments owed to the employee.
Supplier ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Prepayment account The account to be used to record prepayments paid to the employee.
Prepayment sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Cash discount account One of the cash discount accounts used in the Supplier ledger workspace; this account is not actually used for employees.
Cash discount sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Expense account The account that will be used to record compensation amounts paid to the employee.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount.
Sales account The account to be used to record sales made by the employee, if applicable.
Sales sub. The corresponding subaccount.
### The Financial settings section
Element Description
VAT zone The applicable VAT zone.
Terms The terms used as a schedule to pay salary or wages for the employee.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Payment method The payment method to be used by default for compensation payments. The selected payment method defines the custom columns displayed in the Payment instructions field.
Cash account The cash account to be used for compensation payments.
Charge bearer Specifies which party will pay charges due for processing of the payment.
Account used for payment The account used for the payment.
## The Attributes tab This tab allows you to specify values of the attributes (if any) to categorise the employee. The list of attributes available on this tab depends on the attributes specified for the employee class to which the employee belongs.
Element Description
Attribute The attribute name.
Required A check box that (if selected) indicates that you will not be able to save changes in the employee record unless you specify an attribute value.
Value The value of the attribute specific to this employee.
## The Activities tab This tab has a table with the list of activities, such as tasks, events, and other activities associated with the employee. By using this tab, you can add a particular task, event, email, or some other activity to associate it with the employee.
Element Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window so you can create a new task.
Add event Opens the Event (CR306030) window so you can create a new event.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window so you can send an email to the lead.
Add activity Contains a menu with menu commands that correspond to the list of activity types configured in the Activity (CR306010) window. By clicking a menu command, you open the Activity (CR306010) window, where you can create an activity of the corresponding type.
In addition to the columns described below, the table includes columns (labeled with icons) you can use to attach notes and files to the activity, see if it is completed, and check its priority level.
Element Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Mail status The status of the associated email message (if applicable).
Released A check box that (if selected) indicates that the activity has been released.
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Work group The work group the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The name of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
## The Mailings tab This tab provides a table with information on mailings for which this employee is defined as a recipient.
Column Description
Workspace The workspace where the mailing is defined.
Source The entity, Supplier or Customer, that is the source of emails.
Mailing ID The identifier of the mailing.
Employee class The employee class for which the employee receives the mailing.
Description The description that has been provided for the class.
Report The particular report to be used as the body of emails if the mailing uses a report rather than an email template.
Notification template The email template to be used to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if the mailing uses a template rather than a report.
Format The format of the report, if applicable.
Bcc A check box that you select to indicate that a blind carbon copy of emails will be sent for this mailing.
Active A check box to indicate that this mailing is active for the employee.
## The Labour item overrides tab On this tab, you define the relationship between an earning type and a labour item, which is the source of expense accounts. Thus, depending on the earning type of the activity, the system will use particular expense accounts for posting particular project transactions.
Column Description
Type of hour The type of hour for the activity, which determines how labour price is calculated.
Description The description provided for the type of hour.
Labour item A non-stock item of the Labour type, which is the source of the expense accounts that the system uses for posting particular project transactions.
Default price Read only. The default price of the selected labour item. This price is not used in project transactions and is displayed for information only.
## The Employee cost tab This tab provides information about the hourly rates of the employee. ### The Default rates table
Column Description
Effective date The date when the rates specified by this row become effective.
Type of employment

The type of employee with regards to pay. You can choose one of the following options:

Hourly
The employee is paid (usually weekly or biweekly) based on hourly rate for hours worked.
Salaried non-exempt
The employee is compensated based on salary, with overtime hours paid additionally.
Salaried exempt
The employee is compensated based on salary, typically paid once or twice a month.
Regular hours per week The work hours that the employee should spend during a week on activities with the Regular hours earning type.
Annual salary amount The annual salary amount of the employee (only applicable for salaried employees).
Hourly rate The hourly rate of the employee’s pay (only applicable for employees payed hourly).
### The Overrides table
Column Description
Project The specific project the employee participates in.
Task The project task the employee works on.
Hourly rate The hourly rate for this project task if the employee is paid on an hourly basis.
## The User info tab You can use this tab to view and edit information about the user account associated with the employee. ### The top part
Element Description
Status

The account status. The following options are available:

Not created
The selected employee is not associated with any user account.
Pending activation
The new user account is awaiting activation.
Active
The user account is active.
Online
The user is signed in to the system.
Disabled
The user account is disabled.
Temporarily locked
The user account is temporarily locked out.
User type The user type of this user, which defines the set of roles available to the user and the creation rules of the user account.
Login The username for authorisation within the system.
Password The password the new user should use when initially signing in. This box is displayed (and is required) for newly added users and is available only if you clear the Generate password check box.
Generate password A check box that you select to have the system generate the password automatically. This check box appears only for newly added users. The information to sign in will be sent to the user’s email address when you save the user account.
Reset password Brings up a dialog box to let you reset the password for the selected user. This button becomes available after the user account has been created.
Activate user Activates the new user account if the account requires activation. This button is available only for the user accounts with the Pending activation status.
Enable user Enables the selected user account. This button is available only for disabled user accounts.
Disable user Temporarily disables the selected user account. This button is available only for enabled user accounts.
Unlock user Unlocks the selected user account. This button is available if the account has been temporarily locked.
### The table
Column Description
Role name The name that identifies the role.
Role description The description of the role.
## The Delegates tab On this tab, you can specify employees to whom you want to delegate the creation and adjustment of your expenses in the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) and [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) windows.
Column Description
Delegate The identifier of the employee who has been appointed a delegate.
Employee name The full name of the delegate employee.
## The Webhook notification tab This tab is only visible if the **Webhook notification** check box is selected on the **General information** tab. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Positions (EP201000) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/positions-ep201000 page In this window, you can add, view, edit, and delete positions available in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Positions (EP201000) In this window, you can add, view, edit, and delete positions available in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Position table You use this table to add, view, edit, and delete positions and their descriptions.
Column Description
Position ID The unique identifier for the position.
Description A detailed description of the position

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Work calendar (CS209000) /visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/work-calendar-cs209000 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Work calendar (CS209000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a work calendar](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/create-a-work-calendar/) ## The top part You use the elements in this area to specify an ID and description for a new calendar, or to select an existing calendar. Once you select a calendar, you can view the calendar settings on the tabs and make any necessary edits.
Element Description
Calendar ID The unique ID of the calendar.
Description A description of the calendar.
Time zone The time zone associated with the calendar. Select the proper time zone from the list of all time zones available.
## The Calendar settings tab On this tab, you define the working hours of the branch or its employees or business partners, depending on the particular calendar. The elements are grouped into seven rows, one for each day of the week.
Element Description
Day of the week The day of the week. Select the check box for the day if it is a work day.
Start time The time when the working hours start on this day of the week.
End time The time when the working hours end on this day of the week.
The goods are moved A check box that you select if goods can be moved on this day of the week.
## The Exceptions tab You use this tab to configure exceptions to the normal calendar for a particular year. Holidays, for example, may preempt work days or shift them to days when the employees generally do not work. Exceptions also may include changes in working hours for particular days, such as early closings.
Column Description
Date The date of the exception.
Day of the week The day of the week on the specified date.
Description A description of the exception.
Work day A check box that indicates (if selected) that this day is a work day. If this check box is not selected, the day is considered a non-working day.
Start time The start time of the working hours.
End time The end time of the working hours.
The goods are moved A check box that indicates (if selected) that goods are moved on the date of the exception.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project accounting /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting section The Projects workspace helps you manage your projects, whether they are internal or external. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project accounting The Projects workspace helps you manage your projects, whether they are internal or external. In Visma Net, a project is defined as a one-time effort planned for execution within specific time and cost limits, and with an expected budget and revenue. You can use the Projects workspace to maintain complete and structured information about projects, including tracking their costs, budget, and expected revenue. The workspace allows you create projects and project tasks, associate projects with employees, resources, and track labour time and costs as well as your project's work in progress. Furthermore, the module can be integrated with other workspaces in Visma Net. You can read about the primary features of the Projects workspaces below. To start setting up the workspace, see: [Set up and configure the workspace](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/set-up-and-configure-the-workspace/) ## Dependencies 1. The license for Visma Net must include the Projects functionality, and the functionality should be enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. The initial system configuration must be completed and the General ledger workspace must be configured before you implement the Projects workspace. The Projects workspace can be tightly integrated with many Visma Net workspaces. 1. If you plan to track employee time spent on activities related to projects, make sure the **Time reporting on activities** functionality is included in your license and enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The project life cycle From start to finish, a project goes through the following stages: Planning : During this stage, you specify project parameters, define tasks, add activities, and populate the project with employees, resources, and equipment. Each project once created is automatically assigned the **In planning** status. Approval : The project passes through this stage only if approval of projects is required in your system. Active : During this stage, the project is executed, and it becomes visible in the integrated workspaces and available for posting transactions. Completion : Once the project is finished, it is assigned the **Completed** status. A project with the **Completed** status is no longer available for posting transactions. This is the final stage in the project life cycle. For more information, see: [About the project life cycle](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-the-project-life-cycle/) ## Integration with other modules Integrating the Projects workspace with other Visma Net workspaces allows for complete project information as all project-related data is automatically entered and visible in all relevant workspaces. Once the Projects workspace is integrated with another workspace in Visma Net, any document posted in the integrated workspace can be associated with a specific project, ensuring that all project-related activity is accounted for. For more information, see: [About integration with other modules](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/about-integration-with-other-modules/) ## Fixed-price and cost-based projects Visma Net supports two types of projects: fixed-price and cost-based. With fixed-price projects, the price for the project is defined at the beginning of the project and it is not changed until in the project is complete. With cost-based projects, the final price of the project depends on the overall cost of fulfilling the project, and the costs may be invoiced with or without a premium. ## Budget In the Projects workspace, you can compare actual project costs with original and revised budgets. As a project progresses, you can continuously track budget execution, and see whether actual costs match the budget. This lets you know when to adjust expenditures or revise the budget. In Visma Net, you can also use continuous budgeting. For more information, see: [About project budgets](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets/about-project-budgets/) ## Templates for projects and tasks If your company regularly performs standard projects (for example, if you build standard houses), you do not need to create these projects from scratch each time a new project is started. Instead, you can create templates for standard projects and tasks, and use them each time you start a new project. For more information, see: [About templates for projects and tasks](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-templates-for-projects-and-tasks/) ## Flexible rate calculation By using the flexible rate calculation in Visma Net, you can implement complex pricing and accrual models that require the consideration of a large number of parameters. This functionality allows you to differentiate rates depending on project, task, account group, employee class or even specific dates or date ranges. See also: [Configure a rate table](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/configure-a-rate-table/), [Specify rates for rate tables](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/specify-rates-for-rate-tables/) and [Create rate types.](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/create-rate-types/) ## Account groups In projects, the account group plays the same role as the general ledger accounts do in the General ledger ledger: it is used to track the project budget and balances. Account groups facilitate aggregation, tracking, control, and management of information related to the project budget, costs, and future revenues. Because they are mapped to general ledger accounts, account groups provide transfer of the project-related financial information between the General ledger and Project accounting workspaces. To learn how to create account groups, see: [Create an account group](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-an-account-group/) For more information, see: [About account groups](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-account-groups/) ## Automatic project invoicing As a project moves from milestone to milestone or when it is completed, you can define the project to automatically generate invoicing information and invoices for customers. For more information, see: [About project invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing/) ## Project security Visma Net provides you with a variety of options that you can use to set up user access to specific projects and to project-configuration tools. ## Commitment tracking Visma Net supports tracking purchase orders and sales orders by project as project cost commitments and project revenue commitments, respectively. For more information, see:[About tracking commitments](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/about-tracking-commitments/) ## Draft invoice workflow You can enable draft invoices in the project invoicing workflow to work with a draft invoice that is isolated from the Customer ledger workspace. You can review and modify the draft invoice and reach agreement about the document with all required parties before the final sales invoice is prepared based on the information from the draft invoice. For more information, see:[About pro forma invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-pro-forma-invoices/) About integration with other modules /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/about-integration-with-other-modules page You can seamlessly integrate the Projects workspace with other workspaces of Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About integration with other modules You can seamlessly integrate the Projects workspace with other workspaces of Visma Net. You can seamlessly integrate the Projects workspace with other workspaces of Visma Net. With this integration, information about transactions related to projects can transparently flow into the Projects workspaces and be available for tracking budget, costs, and future revenue for projects. You can integrate the Projects workspaces with the following workspaces: + General ledger + Supplier ledger + Inventory + Customer ledger + Sales + Purchases + Time and expenses ## Visibility settings If you integrate the Projects workspace with other workspaces, the active projects defined in the Projects workspace become visible in those workspaces. All data entry windows of any integrated workspace include two additional elements, **Project** and **Task**. Each time you enter a transaction that relates to a specific active project in the Projects workspace, you can associate the transaction with this project by selecting the appropriate project and task. ## Non-project code The non-project code, which is specified in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window, is a code that you can use to indicate that specific transactions are not associated with any project. By default, this code is **X**, but you can specify a different non-project code. + Once you activate the Projects workspace and integrate another Visma Net workspace with it, users must specify **Project** and **Task** values when they enter transactions in the data entry windows of that workspace. + If you do not want to associate a particular transaction with any project, you must select the non-project code as the **Project**. With this code selected, no information will be transferred to the Projects workspace and no project balances will be updated. ## Integration with the General ledger workspace With the integration between the Projects and General ledger workspaces, in the General ledger workspace, you can directly enter transactions related to specific project tasks. + If you plan on integrating the Projects workspace with any of the Visma Net workspaces, we recommend that you integrate it with the General ledger workspace too. + Even if the Projects workspace is not integrated with the General ledger workspace, by using account groups that are mapped to general ledger, you will be able to view the transactions that are generated in other integrated workspaces and eventually posted to General ledger. ## Integration with Supplier ledger, Inventory, and Purchases When you integrate the Projects workspace with the Supplier ledger, Inventory, and Purchases workspaces, the mandatory **Project** and **Task** columns are added to data entry windows in the integrated workspace so that purchases of stock items, non-stock items, and services can be associated with specific project tasks, as can inventory transactions. + Each time you enter a document in any of these workspaces, you must either specify the project and task to associate with the current transaction or select the non-project code. + Integrated workspaces do not post transactions to Projects directly. A transaction originating in the Purchases workspace, on release, generates transactions in the Inventory workspace and in the Supplier ledger workspace. + The transactions related to projects in the Supplier ledger and Inventory workspaces are first released and then posted to the General ledger workspace; then from the General ledger workspace, they are copied to the Projects workspace. + To update the General ledger workspace with the full details of the original transactions, clear the **Post summary on updating general ledger** check boxes in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) and [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) windows. ## Integration with the Customer ledger and Sales workspaces When you integrate the Projects workspace with the Sales and Customer ledger workspace, in the windows of these workspaces, the **Project** field is added to the top part and the **Task** column is added to the **Details** area. + If you selects a specific project, you must also specify a particular task of this project. + Transactions originating in the Sales workspace, on release, generate transactions in the Inventory and Customer ledger workspaces. The Customer ledger and Inventory workspaces do not post transactions to Projects directly. The original transaction is first released and then posted to General ledger, and then from General ledger it is copied to the Projects workspace. + To update the Projects module with the full details of the original transactions, clear the **Post summary on updating general ledger** check boxes in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) and [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) windows. ## Integration with the Time and expenses workspace When you integrate the Projects module with the Time and expenses workspace, the **Project** and **Task** columns are added on all data entry windows. These columns are mandatory. + If your employees work on projects managed by using the Projects module, you can use the Time and expenses workspace to track the time they spend on projects, including regular time and overtime. By default, you use time cards for this purpose, but you can instead use expense claims. + Once released, a time card or an expense claim associated with a specific project does not directly generate general ledger transactions; instead, Visma Net generates one or more transactions in the Projects module. By using the options located in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window, you can select whether the transactions from the Projects module will be posted to an account group of the **Off-balance** type or to account groups of standard types: **Asset**, **Liability**, **Expense**, and **Income**. The General ledger will be updated through the transactions generated based on the transactions posted to account groups of standard types. + To reduce the time required for transaction processing, select the **Automatically release project documents** in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window. + In the Time and expenses workspace, notes and attached documents from a Time and expenses transaction can be copied to a Projects transaction if the **Copy files to project documents** and **Copy notes to project documents** check boxes are selected in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window. + You can use expense claims to track the expenses your employees incur when they work on specific projects. Once released, an expense claim associated with a specific project does not generate customer ledger transactions; instead, Visma Net generates transactions in the Projects module that, in turn, will generate the customer ledger transactions. + Once released, a time card associated with a specific project does not generate general ledger transactions. Instead, Visma Net generates transactions in the Projects module.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Settings and configuration /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Settings and configuration Preparation /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/preparation page This topic covers the prerequisites and preparatory steps needed before you begin configuring the Projects workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preparation This topic covers the prerequisites and preparatory steps needed before you begin configuring the Projects workspace. Perform the following steps before you actually configure the Projects workspace. These steps do not need to be done in the listed order and many can be done in parallel. Because this is the preparation phase of implementation, do not enter data into the system at this time.
Item Description
Develop a naming convention for projects and tasks

Each project in Visma Net is assigned a unique project ID. Project IDs can be comprised of segments with optional validation of each segment.

Plan the structure of the project ID based on the segmented key PROJECT: number of segments, length of segments, whether and how they should be validated, and whether auto-numbering should be used.

Note that the PROJECT segmented key is also used for project templates, so decide whether you want the IDs of projects to differ from the IDs of templates. Prepare a list of valid entries for segments that should be validated. Design a numbering sequence for an auto-numbered segment, if one will be used.

Plan also the structure for the task IDs (the segmented key PROTASK ).

The task ID should be unique only within a project. Two different projects can have tasks with the same identifier, and they will be different tasks. For this reason, you should not use auto-numbering for task IDs.
Define non-project code

Once the Projects workspace is enabled, the system will require project IDs and project task IDs for every transaction in all the integrated workspaces of Visma Net.

This does not mean that each transaction must be linked to a project; you can enter the non-project code (which you define) for a transaction that is not related to any project.

For convenience, the non-project code should be distinctly different from project IDs and should be short, such as the single character X, which is used by default.
Define account groups

The role of account groups in Projects is similar to the role of accounts in the General ledger: All transaction processing and all reporting in Projects are done by using account groups.

When defining account groups, first identify the accounts that will be used in project-related transactions. Customer ledger accounts (accounts debited by project invoicing) and supplier ledger accounts (accounts credited by purchase invoices) should be excluded. For each identified group, write down the following:

  • A short description of the account group.
  • The type of account group: Asset, Liability, Income, Expense, or Off-balance. The type of the group should be the same as the type of general ledger accounts included in the group. An off-balance group cannot include any general ledger account.
  • The list of General ledger accounts associated with the group.
  • The account group ID (which should comply with the ACCGROUP segmented key).

For more information, see: About account groups
Develop a naming convention for account groups

Plan the structure of IDs to be used for account groups.

The structure is defined by the ACCGROUP segmented key.

The account group IDs can mimic the general ledger account numbers or be text IDs, such as BUDGET, REVENUE, and EXPENSE.

If needed, the IDs can be defined with multiple segments. Use similar IDs for similar account groups to be able to specify ranges of account groups (arranged alphabetically) when defining allocation rules.
Plan labour items

Labour items provide information about hourly rates, general ledger accounts, and VAT categories to be used to account for labour on projects.

The general ledger accounts used for labour items should be mapped to appropriate account groups; otherwise, the transactions related to labour on projects will not be visible in the Projects workspace.

Decide what different types of labour are involved with projects and how they differ (thus, how their settings will differ). Decide how many labour items you will need for these types of labour.
Create a list of non-stock items to be used in projects

Write down all non-stock items to denote services, miscellaneous expenditures that may be used for projects, and various types of labour.

Select the general ledger accounts to be used for those items and note that the accounts should be mapped to the defined account groups.
Plan reason codes

To issue a stock item from a warehouse for a project, you have to specify a reason code that would provide appropriate accounts for the transaction.

The accounts specified for the reason codes should be mapped to appropriate account groups.
Plan attributes

Attributes can be used to store additional information about projects.

You can define the types of UI controls to be used for attributes and the lists of possible values; you can even make them required elements in the windows.
Plan on integrating Projects with other workspaces

The Projects workspace can be integrated with the General ledger, Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Purchases, Inventory, and Cash management workspaces. Integration with a specific workspace means that projects are visible in this workspace, and the users can enter project-related transactions in this workspace.

Particular projects and their tasks can have their own (more narrow) visibility scopes.

Whether or not the Projects workspace is integrated with the General ledger and Customer ledger workspaces, the system will post the Projects transactions to the General ledger workspace and generate sales invoices.
Define integration with time and expenses

If you are going to track the time your employees’ work on specific projects, integrate the Projects workspace with the Time and expenses workspace.

With this integration, the Time and expenses workspace will initially release the employee time cards to the Projects workspace; then, on allocation, the Projects workspace will post them to General ledger.
Decide whether you need to track time on activities

Enabling the Time reporting on activities functionality will allow you to track the work time and overtime your employees spend on the activities related to projects. This functionality should be included in your license.

Also, plan the activity types for which you want to track time.
Create a list of employees who will work for projects Make sure that all the employees who will work on projects have employee and user accounts; also, make sure that their hourly rates are specified and the appropriate labour items are defined.
Design roles Design the roles you need for users who will configure rate tables, set up allocation and invoicing rules, manage projects, and enter the data for projects.
The steps below can be done later when you will be configuring project templates or creating particular projects.
Define @Rates (rate tables)

In Projects, @Rate is a parameter used in formulas of the allocation and invoicing rules.

Different rates can be applied to different transactions based on many related factors, such as particular tasks or projects, account groups, stock items involved, particular employees participating, and the particular step of the allocation or invoicing.

For example: You can charge customers for consultant work differently depending on the particular consultant involved in a project.

In the context of rate tables, rate is a number (@Rate) that you can use in allocation rules as a multiplier, an addend, or a constant value. For instance: To implement a price model that estimates the project price as total costs plus 10 percent, you can define a @Rate of 1.1 in the appropriate rate table and calculate the project price as the total cost multiplied by this rate.

For more information about rates and rate tables, see: About rate tables and Configure a rate table
Define earning types You will need non-stock items to account for labour on projects.
Design allocation rules

Allocation rules define how to:

  • Re-allocate costs between account categories, tasks, and projects.
  • Calculate burdens, overheads, not yet invoiced, and unearned revenues.
  • Select and group transactions for posting.
  • Calculate invoiceable amounts and generate sales invoices.

For more information about allocation rules, see: Allocation rules (PM207500)
Design invoicing rules Invoicing rules define how to invoice the customers for work performed by your company on specific projects. For more information about project invoicing, see: About project invoicing
Consider creating templates for projects and tasks

Review the planned projects, group them by similar properties, and decide on creating project templates. Review the project tasks, and write down a list of the tasks that are common for most projects (common tasks).

Also, create lists of tasks specific for each group of projects to include them in respective project templates.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About setup and configuration of the workspace /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/about-setup-and-configuration-of-the-workspace page This section will help you configure the Projects module in Visma Net. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About setup and configuration of the workspace This section will help you configure the Projects module in Visma Net. |No.|Action|Description| |---|---|---| |**1**|**Define the structure of project IDs**|Use the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window to define the segmentation of the following IDs: + Project ID (by using the **PROJECT** key) + Project task ID (by using the **PROTASK** key) + Account group ID (by using the **ACCGROUP** key)| |**2**|**Enter segment values for validated segments**|Use the [Segment values (CS203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-values-cs203000/) window to enter allowed values for segments of the project ID, task ID, and account group ID that are configured as validated.| |**3**|**Define auto-number series**|Use the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window to create or review number series to be used for batches and transactions originating in the Projects module. Visma Net is installed with the following predefined, ready-to-use number series: + BATCH: Shared number sereis for batches of all workspaces, ranging from 0000000001 to 9999999999 + PMTRAN: Number series for Projects transactions, ranging from PM00000001 to PM99999999 You can use these sequences or design other ones to better fit your organisation's needs. If needed, create a sequence for the auto-number series of the **PROJECT** segmented key.| |**4**|**Specify projects preferences**|Use the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window to configure the Projects module. For more information, see: [Set preferences for projects](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/set-preferences-for-projects/)| |**5**|**Create account groups**|Use the [Account groups (PM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000/) window to create the designed account groups and map them to general ledger accounts. For more information, see: [Create an account group](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-an-account-group/)| |**6**|**Create roles**|Create roles by using the [User roles (SM201005)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/user-roles-sm201005/) window, and for roles, assign the proper levels of access to the Projects windows.| |**7**|**Attributes**|Create attributes, which are defined in the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. The definition of an attribute includes: 1. Attribute ID 1. Description 1. Control type: text, combo (selection from predefined list), check box (yes/no), or date and time. 1. Required or optional 1. Entry mask to validate entry for text or combo. 1. Regular expression for advanced validation of entry in text or combo (optional) 1. List of valid values for combo only; each value has a description and a sort order Finally, create the lists of attributes on the respective windows: + For account groups: [Account groups (PM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000/) window + For common tasks: [Common tasks (PM208030)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/common-tasks-pm208030/) window (when common tasks will be created) + For task templates: [Project template tasks (PM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-template-tasks-pm208010/) window (when template tasks will be created)| |**8**|**Create rate types**|Use the [Rate types (PM204100)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-types-pm204100/) window to create rate types to be used in the rate tables for different steps of allocation rules. For more information, see: [Create rate types](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/create-rate-types/)| |**9**|**Create rate tables**|Use the [Rate tables (PM204200)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-tables-pm204200/) window to create empty rate tables. Define rates in the rate tables by using the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) and the [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/) windows. For more information, see: [Configure a rate table](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/configure-a-rate-table/)| |**10**|**Create sequences**|Use the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window to create sequences (that is, lookup rules for factors defining the rates).| |**11**|**Fill in rate tables**|Use the [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/) window to enter current rates for all defined combinations of factors. For more information, see: [Configure a rate table](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/configure-a-rate-table/)| |**12**|**Create allocation rules**|Use the [Allocation rules (PM207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500/) window to create the rules for project allocation. For more information, see: [Set allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/set-allocation-rules/)| |**13**|**Create invoicing rules**|Use the [Invoicing rules (PM207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/invoicing-rules-pm207000/) window to create the rules for project invoicing. For more information, see: [Create an invoicing rule](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/create-an-invoicing-rule/)| |**14**|**Create project templates**|Use the [Project templates (PM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000/) window to create project templates. For more information, see: [Create a project template](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/create-a-project-template/)| |**15**|**Create template tasks and common tasks**|Use the [Project template tasks (PM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-template-tasks-pm208010/) window to create template tasks and the [Common tasks (PM208030)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/common-tasks-pm208030/) window to create common tasks. For more information, see: [Create a project template task](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-project-template-task/) and [Create a common task](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-common-task/)|

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set up and configure the workspace /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/set-up-and-configure-the-workspace page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up and configure the workspace ## General settings ### Number series Go to the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window. Check which number series your company uses and, if necessary, create the following: + EPCLAIM - expense claims + TIMECARD - time cards + PMTRAN - project transactions + PROJECT - project numbers ### Segment keys Go to the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window and, if necessary, create the following: + EMPLOYEE + PROJECT + PROTASK - project task + ACCGROUP - account group ### Reason codes Go to the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. You must provide reason codes when you issue stock on projects, for example: |Reason code|Description|Usage| |---|---|---| |Project|Material for project|Issue| ### Labour rates Before using labour rates, you have to create non-stock items of the type **Labour** and link them to employees. For example, you can create a labour rate called **Senior consultant** and link this to the employees working as senior consultants. When creating a labour rate, you have to select an **item class** and a **posting class**. For each item, the **posting class** defines the accounts and subaccounts used to post transactions to the general ledger. #### Review the posting classes Go to the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. The following posting classes are available for the Projects workspace:
ID Description
9 Services
10 Project expenses (Travel)
These posting classes are linked to the item classes below. #### Review the item classes Go to the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. The following item classes are available for the Projects workspace:
ID Description
8 Services
9 Project expenses (Travel)
These posting classes and item classes ensure that the labour and expense items used in the Projects workspace are linked to the correct general ledger accounts. If the accounts that are linked to the stock and non-stock items are not linked to an account group, transactions on these accounts will not show up in the project balance. #### Create labour items Go to the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Create non-stock items with the type **Labour**. Labour items provide information on hourly rates, general ledger accounts, and VAT categories you want to use to account for labour in projects. Example: |Item ID|Description|Item class|Type|Default price| |---|---|---|---|---| |PManager|Project Manager|8|Labour|1200 NOK| On the **General ledger accounts** tab, check that these accounts are correct: Expense accrual account, Expense account, Purchase accrual account, Sales account and Purchase price variance account. ## Organisational settings ### Work calendar Go to the [Work calendar (CS209000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/work-calendar-cs209000/) window. Work calendars are connected to employees and determine how many hours employees should register in their time sheets. Work calendars are also used for employees that work part-time. On the **Exceptions** tab, you can register days that are considered public holidays in your country. ### Employee classes Go to the [Employee classes (EP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employee-classes-ep202000/) window. Employee classes are used to group employees with similar properties and to provide default settings for new employees. The system contains one employee class to begin with. On the **General settings** tab, review the general ledger accounts and settings to make sure they are correct. ### Departments Go to the [Departments (EP201500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/departments-ep201500/) window. Create the departments you need for your company, for example:
Department ID Description
CONSULT Consultancy
### Roles Go to the [User roles (SM201005)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/user-roles-sm201005/) window. Create the roles you need for your company and assign the proper levels of access to the Project Accounting windows. ### Positions Go to the [Positions (EP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/positions-ep201000/) window. Create the positions you need for your company, for example:
Position ID Description
PMANAGER Project manager
### Employees Go to the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. Create the employees you need for your company. You can start by creating yourself as an employee for testing purposes. For detailed guidance, see [Create an employee](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/create-an-employee/). ### Users Go to the [Users (SM201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/user-security/user-security-windows/users-sm201010/) window. 1. In the **Login** field, select your own user profile. Your user profile is displayed. 1. In the **Linked entity** field, select the employee profile you created for yourself. 1. Repeat this procedure for other users if needed. If an employee profile is not linked to a user profile, it is not possible to register time sheets or expenses for the given employee. ### Company tree Go to the [Company tree (EP204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/company-tree-ep204060/) window. This window is used to set up which users will have access to employees' time sheets and expenses. For example, if you provide a user with project-controller access in the top of the company tree, that user will have access to time sheets and expense claims of all employees working on the project. This can, for example, be useful when an employee is not able to enter their own time sheet. The project controller can then enter the time sheet on behalf of the employee. ## Project settings ### Project accounting preferences Go to the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. Please review all the preferences for the Projects workspace. For detailed guidance on setting these preferences, see: [Set preferences for projects](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/set-preferences-for-projects/) #### Visibility settings Select the workspaces you want to integrate with the Projects workspace. If, for example, you have not selected Time and expenses, users will not be able to register hours and expenses to projects. ### Account groups Account groups make it possible to transfer information between the Projects workspace and other workspaces by associating transactions posted in other workspaces with a given project. Account groups are used to track the budget, expenses, and revenues of projects. An account group of a particular type is mapped to specific general ledger accounts of the same type. Review the account groups and linked general ledger accounts shown in the [Account groups (PM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000/) window. If needed, you can create supplementary account groups. For more information, see: [Create an account group](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-an-account-group/) For any project, the related account groups are displayed on the **Balances** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window and show the accumulated transaction amounts for the linked general ledger accounts. If you want Visma Net to display the general ledger accounts for stock items, non-stock items, expense items, and labour items in the project balance, you must make sure that you have registered the expense accounts for these items. You can only select accounts that are linked to account groups in the [Allocation rules (PM207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500/) window. ### Rate tables If your project uses a pricing model in which price may differ depending on multiple factors, such as task and stock item, you need to define this model in Visma Net by using rate tables that provide rates for different sets of factors. For more information, see: [Configure a rate table](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/configure-a-rate-table/) Go to the [Rate tables (PM204200)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-tables-pm204200/) window. Use the following rate table:
Rate table Description
STANDARD Standard rate able
### Rate types **Rate types** define how rates should be selected for specific steps of the allocation rules. Go to the [Rate types (PM204100)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-types-pm204100/) window. The Projects service comes with the following rate types. The allocation rules provided by Visma Net use the following rate types:
Type Description
1 Invoicing rate for labour
2 Invoicing rate for material
3 Invoicing rate for subcontractors
4 Invoicing rate for travel expenses
### Rate lookup rules Go to the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window. Rate lookup rules allow you to create sequences that the service will use to find the correct rate in the rate table. For example: If you want to use different rates for different tasks, you can select the **Project task** check box in a sequence, and then use the [Rate tables (PM204200)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-tables-pm204200/) window to define the rate, and to specify the particular tasks you want to apply this rate for. If you select the **Project task** check box, the [Rate tables (PM204200)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-tables-pm204200/) window will display the **Project task** tab. The same logic goes for project, account group, inventory, and employee. *1. In the example below, we use inventory for **Invoicing rate for labour**: This adds the **Inventory** tab to the window. You now have to link a non-stock item of the type **Labour** to the rate. **Rate table**: STANDARD **Rate type**: 1 - Invoicing rate for labour (the labour category assigned to each employee determines posting). |Sequence|Description|Project|Project task|Account group|Inventory|Employee| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |100|Project manager||||x|| 1. **Rate table**: STANDARD **Rate type**: 2 - Invoicing rate for material. |Sequence|Description|Project|Project task|Account group|Inventory|Employee| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |100|Material invoicing rate|||x||| In the example above, Visma Net activates the **Account group** tab, and you will have to link a rate to an account group. In this case, you must make sure that the expense account for the stock item you use for material on a project is registered to the account group you select for the rate. Otherwise, it will not show up on your project balances. 1. **Rate table**: STANDARD **Rate type**: 3 - Invoicing rate for subcontractors. |Sequence|Description|Project|Project task|Account group|Inventory|Employee| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |100|Sr. consultant|||x||| 1. **Rate table**: STANDARD **Rate type**: 4 - Invoicing rate for travel expenses. |Sequence|Description|Project|Project task|Account group|Inventory|Employee| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |100|Travel invoicing rate|||x||| ### Maintain rate tables Go to the [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/) window to specify the actual rates for each sequences or for each combination of particular factors. On the **Rate** tab you set the start/end date and the actual rate for the selected combination. The second tab will depend on the factor chosen in the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window. It can be either **Project**, **Project task**, **Account group**, **Item** or **Employee**. On this second tab, you specify the parameters for the given rate. #### Manage rate tables for labour categories In the example below, the rate type is 1 - **Invoicing rate for labour**, and for the rate lookup rules, inventory is set as the factor that defines the rate selection. Therefore, you will see the **Inventory** tab. |Section in the window|Field|Value| |---|---|---| |Top part|Rate table|STANDARD| |Top part|Rate type|1- Invoicing rate for labour| |Top part|Sequence|100 - Project manager| |Top part|Rate code|STANDARD| |Top part|Description|Project manager rate| |The **Rate** tab|Start date|01.01.2016| |The **Rate** tab|End date|| |The **Rate** tab|Rate|800.00| |The **Inventory** tab|Inventory ID|PManager| #### Manage rate tables for material In the example below, the **Material** tab is displayed because **Account group** is selected in the rate lookup rules. The rate is valid for all transactions that are linked to account group 6 - Material. |Section in the window|Field|Value| |---|---|---| |Top part|Rate table|STANDARD| |Top part|Rate type|2 - Invoicing rate for material| |Top part|Sequence|100 - Material invoicing rate| |Top part|Rate code|STANDARD| |Top part|Description|Material rates| |The **Rate** tab|Start date|01.01.2016| |The **Rate** tab|End date|| |The **Rate** tab|Rate|1.2| |The **Rate** tab|Account group|6| |The **Rate** tab|Description|Material| #### Manage rate tables for subcontractors |Section in the window|Field|Value| |---|---|---| |Top part|Rate table|STANDARD| |Top part|Rate type|3 - Invoicing rate for subcontractors| |Top part|Sequence|100 - Sr. consultant| |Top part|Rate code|STANDARD| |Top part|Description|Labour rate Sr. consultant subcon.| |The **Rate** tab|Start date|01.01.2016| |The **Rate** tab|End date|| |The **Rate** tab|Rate|950.00| |The **Rate** tab|Account group|7| |The **Rate** tab|Description|Subcontractors| #### Manage rates tables for travel expenses |Section in the window|Field|Value| |---|---|---| |Top part|Rate table|STANDARD| |Top part|Rate type|4 - Invoicing rate for travel expenses| |Top part|Sequence|100 - Travel invoicing rate| |Top part|Rate code|STANDARD| |Top part|Description|Travel rate| |The **Rate** tab|Start date|01.01.2016| |The **Rate** tab|End date|| |The **Rate** tab|Rate|1.0| |The **Rate** tab|Account group|8| |The **Rate** tab|Description|Travel| ### Project attributes For more information about how to create project attributes, see: [Create project attributes](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-project-attributes/) The attributes shown in the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window (and on the **Attributes** tab in other project-related windows) can be used when you set up allocation rules for a project: **MARGIN** (can be used with the allocation rule **Cost plus** ). If you now enter 10 as the attribute for margin in a project (with the allocation rule for cost plus projects), the system calculates a 10% margin over all costs. ### Allocation and invoicing rules In the Projects workspace, the process of allocating amounts to specific accounts, account groups (or both) to acknowledge expenses and revenues is called 'allocation'. Each month (or other period), you can allocate amounts of the expenditures involved in the project and the predicted future revenues. **Invoicing rules** are used to specify which allocated transactions in the Projects workspace that you want to include in the invoices. You select the transaction based on the account group they are associated with. **Allocation rules** are used to correctly track project expenditures and revenues. #### Allocation rules If your project uses a complex cost accrual model, allocation rules ensure that project expenditures and future revenues are tracked correctly. Allocation rules are managed in the [Allocation rules (PM207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500/) window. For more information, see: [Set allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/set-allocation-rules/) The following allocation rules are included in Projects workspace:
1 - Fixed price, unrecognised revenue Projects your company has negotiated a fixed price with the customer for.
2 - Time and material, unrecognised revenue Projects you invoice the actual use of time, materials, and expenses for.
3 - Time and material with WIP, unrecognised revenue Same as Time and material, but when the system allocates all time, material, and expense, the system transfers the transactions to a work-in-progress (WIP) account (balance account).
4 - Cost plus project, unrecognised revenue

These projects do not use the rate table to calculate the sales rates, but instead use a mark-up percentage for all project transactions.

You must enter the mark-up percentage in the Projects (PM301000) window, on the Attributes tab.
5 - None Can be used for internal projects you only register expenses for.
#### Invoicing rules Invoicing rules define which of the transactions should be used for invoicing and which accounts should be used to record the transactions that are generated in the invoicing process. Invoicing rules are managed in the [Invoicing rules (PM207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/invoicing-rules-pm207000/) window. For more information, see: [Create an invoicing rule](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/create-an-invoicing-rule/) The following invoicing rules are included in Projects workspace:
1 - Standard A standard invoicing rule that has no particular functionality. You can use this to invoice the transactions that have been registered in the Not yet invoiced account group.
2 - Guaranteed maximum price An invoicing rule that registers the amount that was entered on the budget on account group revenue, and does not allow any invoicing transactions that could involve exceeding the revised, budgeted quantity or amount (or both).
3 - WIP invoicing This invoicing rule uses only allocated transactions that include accounts of the WIP account group.
4 - None This invoicing rule can be used for internal projects or projects that will not be invoiced.
#### Supported combinations of allocations and invoicing rules The following combinations of allocation and invoicing rules are supported by the Projects workspace: |||||| |---|---|---|---|---| |#### Invoicing rules Allocation rules|**Standard**|**Guaranteed maximum price**|**WIP invoicing**|**None**| |**Fixed price, unrecognised revenue**|X|||X| |**Time and material, unrecognised revenue**|X|X||X| |**Time and material with WIP, unrecognised revenue**||(X)*|X|| |**Cost plus project, unrecognised revenue**|X|X||X| |**None**||||X| \* Mark WIP account group in Invoicing rules. > [!NOTE] > You can also limit users' access to and visibility of information about particular projects and related transactions. You can use roles to provide access to windows according to employees' responsibilities and restriction groups to configure the visibility of particular projects only to a responsible team.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Set preferences for projects /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/set-preferences-for-projects section There are the following steps you need to go through to set the preferences for the project accounting workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set preferences for projects There are the following steps you need to go through to set the preferences for the project accounting workspace. ## Step 1: General settings 1. Go to the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. 1. In the **Transaction number series** field, select a numbering ID for project-related transactions. 1. In the **Batch number series** field, select a numbering ID for batches. 1. In the **Non-project code** field, fill in a code you consequently will use for any transaction that is not associated with a project. This code can be a ten-character string of letters and numbers. 1. In the **Invoiceable cut-off date** field, decide whether you want to include or exclude transactions created on the invoicing date. 1. Optional: For invoices, you can also select one or both of the check boxes: **Automatically post on release** and **Automatically release allocations**. ## Step 2: Visibility settings Select the check boxes in this section to indicate which modules you want to integrate with the Projects workspace. ## Step 3: Account settings These settings define the rules for how you will select the expense account and subaccount to be used in transactions generated in the Projects workspace when time cards are released. 1. In the **Expense account source** field, click the drop-down list to choose between: + **Labour item** If you select this option, the system will use the default account associated with the labour item specified on the time card. For labour items, the default expense account is specified in the **Expense account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **Project** If you select this option, the system will use the default account associated with the underlying project and specified in the **Default account** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + **Task** If you select this option, the system will use the default account associated with the underlying task and specified in the **Default account** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. + **Employee** If you select this option, the system will use the default account associated with the employee. For employees, the default expense account is specified in the **Expense account** field on the **Financial settings** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. 1. To set up the rule of selecting segment values for the expense subaccount to be used for projects transactions, go to the **Expense sub. source** field. Position your cursor in the field, press **F3** on your keyboard and select one of the following options: > [!NOTE] > The **Expense sub. source** field is only available if, in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the **Subaccounts** option is enabled. + **E** The subaccount associated with the employee specified in the time card. For employees, the default expense subaccount is specified in the **Expense sub.** field, on the **Financial settings** tab in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. + **I** The subaccount associated with the non-stock item (labour item) used in the time card. For labour items, the default expense subaccount is specified in the **Expense Sub.** field, on the **General ledger accounts** tab in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **P** The subaccount associated with the project and specified in the **Default sub.** field, on the **General settings** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + **T** The subaccount associated with the project task and specified in the **Default sub.** field, on the **General settings** tab in the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. 1. In the **Expense accrual account source** field, click on the drop-down to select the source of the account for the credit side of the project transactions to be generated on release of the time cards. Select one of the following options: + **Labour item accrual** Use as the default in projects transactions the accrual account associated with the labour item on the timecard. For labour items, this account is specified in the **Expense accrual account** field on the **General ledger accounts** tab in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **Project** Use in projects transactions the accrual account associated with the project and specified in the **Default accrual account** field on the **General settings** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + **Task** Use as the default in projects transactions the default account associated with the task and specified in the **Default accrual account** field on the **General settings** tab in the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. 1. To set up the rule of selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount to be used for projects transactions, go to the **Expense accrual sub. source** field. > [!NOTE] > The **Expense accrual sub. source** field is only available if, in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the **Subaccounts** option is enabled. Position your cursor in the field, press **F3** on your keyboard and select one of the following options: + **E** The default accrual expense subaccount associated with the employee specified in the time card. For employees, the default expense subaccount is specified in the **Expense sub.** field, on the **Financial settings** tab in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. + **I** The default expense accrual subaccount associated with the non-stock item (labour item) used in the time card. For labour items, the default accrual subaccount is specified in the **Expense accrual sub.** field, on the **General ledger accounts** tab in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + **P** The default accrual subaccount associated with the project and specified in the **Default accrual sub.** field, on the **General settings** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + **T** The default accrual subaccount associated with the project task and specified in the **Default accrual sub.** field, on the **General settings** tab in the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a project template /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/settings-and-configuration/create-a-project-template section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a project template 1. Go to the [Project templates (PM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Status** field, click the drop down and choose between **Active** or **On hold**. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a short description of your project template. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. Customise your new project template by filling in any relevant information. 1. In the **Default subaccount** field, fill in the number of the subaccount you want to link to this project template. > [!NOTE] > If you do not want to use a subaccount: enter 00-000. 1. Optional: Click the **Tasks**, **Employees** and **Account task mapping** tabs to further customise your template, for example to add project tasks and employees. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage pricing in Projects /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage pricing in Projects About rate tables /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/about-rate-tables page Effective pricing management is crucial for successful project execution. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About rate tables Effective pricing management is crucial for successful project execution. In Visma Net, the rate tables feature within the Projects module allows you to balance project revenues and costs efficiently. To achieve desired business outcomes and make the most of your project budget, it is essential to develop a suitable pricing model. ## Rate table + You use a rate table to determine a specific value, a rate, for a particular transaction to be processed with the help of allocation rules. The table includes rates for all combinations of factors that might affect the rate, such as particular tasks, account groups, stock items involved, employees participating, etc. + You can also create distinct rate sets for individual steps in allocation rules by utilizing various rate types for each step. The rate or value obtained from the rate table for every transaction can be referenced in the allocation rule formulas as **@Rate** and employed as a multiplier, an addend, or a constant. + You can create one rate table to be used for all projects or multiple tables to be used for different projects. + If you want to define rates of different types, such as expressed as factors (1.2, 1.0, 0.2), defined as amounts (€1000), or defined as hourly rates (€100 per hour), create a separate rate table for each type. ## Rate table configuration You fully configure a rate table in four stages by using the following windows: 1. [Rate tables (PM204200)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-tables-pm204200/): To create a rate table. Initially, you just create an empty container for a new rate table; later, in another window, you will specify the rates and date ranges. 1. [Rate types (PM204100)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-types-pm204100/): Create rate types by establishing empty containers for them. Think of a rate type as a new dimension within the same table. Commonly, various rates are used for allocating labour costs, revenues, and expenses. At this point, determine the number and types of rate types needed; later, when creating allocation rules, assign different rate types to specific steps of allocation rules, allowing for step-specific rates. 1. [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/): To create sequences, each of which is a set of factors. Any combination of the following factors can be specified for a sequence: **Project**, **Project task**, **Account group**, **Item**, and **Employee**. 1. [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/): To actually specify the rates (with their date ranges) for each sequence or for each combination of particular factors. You can define rate codes on the fly to define multiple rates for the same sequence. ## Rate lookup sequences For rate tables, sequence include multiple factors that may affect the rates. You define sequences by using the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window as follows: + A sequence determines the factors that influence the rate, such as projects, project tasks, employees, account groups, or items. For instance, if tasks are a factor, unique rates can be applied to specific tasks or to certain tasks within particular projects when specific employees work on those tasks. + The order of numeric identifiers for sequences is crucial, as it determines the sequence in which the system searches for rates. Starting with the first sequence (smallest number), the system compares the factors specified in transactions with those defined by the current sequence. If there is a match, the rate is assigned to the **@Rate** parameter. If not, the system proceeds to the next sequence (by number). If no matching factors are found for the last sequence, the system follows the selected option for that allocation rule step. Options include: **Set @Rate to 1**, **Set @Rate to 0**, **Raise error**, and **Do not allocate**. A rate table may include different sets of sequences for different rate types. ## Rate codes A rate code serves as an extra dimension in a rate table, allowing for simpler configuration. By utilizing rate codes, you can decrease the number of sequences needed for each rate table-rate type pair, making it easier to specify all the necessary different rates. A rate code serves as an extra dimension in a rate table, allowing for simpler configuration. By utilising rate codes, you can decrease the number of sequences needed for each rate table-rate type pair, making it easier to specify all the necessary different rates. For example, suppose that you want to define a specific rate for each employee working on a project. You have two possible ways to create such rates: + Create as many sequences with the **Employee** check box selected as there are employees to have a separate rate. In the rate table, enter one rate code for all these sequences. For each sequence, select a particular employee and enter the rate. + Create only one sequences with the **Employee** check box selected. In the rate table, for each employee with a specific rate, enter a separate rate code, select the employee, and enter the rate for this employee. The total number of code-sequence combinations remains the same for both methods. However, using rate codes allows you to reuse the same sequence for defining multiple rates. It is important to note that even when using different rate codes, combinations of specific factors must be unique within a sequence. When searching for rates, the system will search through all rate codes. ## Rate specification By using the [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/) window, you can finally fill in the rate table for each rate type that you are going to use in the allocation rules. + Enter the rates along with the date range when they are effective. On the tabs for various factor types (which show up if defined in the rate lookup rules), provide specific factors like projects, tasks, employees, items, or account groups. + The rate application condition can be defined using the following rules: When conditions apply to specific projects, items, employees, or account groups, they are connected using OR operators. However, when conditions involve different rate factors, they are connected using AND operators.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Configure a rate table /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/configure-a-rate-table section In Visma Net, you can implement virtually any pricing model by using rate tables and rate types. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a rate table In Visma Net, you can implement virtually any pricing model by using rate tables and rate types. In Visma Net, you can implement virtually any pricing model by using rate tables and rate types. For more information about the functionality, see: [About rate tables](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/about-rate-tables/) ## Create a new rate table 1. Go to the [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Rate table** column, type the identifier for the new rate table. 1. In the **Description** column, provide a description for this new rate table. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create rate types 1. Go to the [Rate types (PM204100)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-types-pm204100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Rate type** column, type the ID for the new rate type. Specify identifiers in accordance with the type of allocation to be performed with this rate type, such as **LABOUR** for labour cost allocations and **BURDEN** for allocating costs. 1. In the **Description** column, provide a description for this new rate table. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Create sequences 1. Go to the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window. 1. In the **Rate table** field, select the rate table that you want to configure. 1. In the **Rate type** field, select one of the rate types to be used with this rate table. 1. For each planned sequence, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Sequence** column, type the sequence reference number. You can enter only digits in this field. > [!NOTE] > Leave a gap between reference numbers if you want to be able to insert additional sequences if needed without renumbering the existing sequences. 1. In the **Description** column, provide a description for this new sequence. 1. Select which types of factors affect the rate by selecting the check boxes in the respective columns: **Project**, **Project task**, **Account group**, **Inventory**, and **Employee**. 1. Review the reference numbers of sequences and adjust them if needed, keeping in mind that the numbers define the order in which the system will be applying the sequences to find the rate. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you plan to use the rate table with more than one rate type (that is, in more than one allocation step), perform Steps 3 through 6 for each remaining rate type. ## Enter rates 1. Go to the [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/) window. 1. In the **Rate table** field, select the rate table you are going to fill in. 1. In the **Rate type** field, select the rate type for which you are going to define rates in the selected rate table. 1. In the **Sequence** field, select one of the sequences defined for this rate table and this rate type, which you created by using the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window, as described in the previous section. For the factors selected for this sequence, the respective tabs appear. 1. In the **Rate code** field, type the new rate code. 1. In the **Description** field, provide a description of the rate code to be used for a new set of factors. 1. On the **Rate** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Start date** column, select the date when the rate will become (or has become) effective. 1. In the **End date** column, select the date that ends that date range when the rate is effective. 1. In the **Rate** column, enter the rate. 1. On each tab with a factor defined by this sequence, create the list of particular factors for which this rate is applicable as follows: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the first column, select the particular factor of the specified type. (For instance, select an employee if this is the **Employee** tab. 1. Repeat the two previous sub steps until you have selected all the particular factors of the type for which this rate is applicable. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you want to specify a rate for another rate code, repeat Steps 5 through 11. 1. Repeat Steps 4 through 12 until you have specified rates for all of the sequences defined for this rate table and this rate type. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you plan to use the rate table in more than one allocation step, repeat Steps 3 through 14 for another rate type.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create rate types /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/create-rate-types section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create rate types 1. Go to the [Rate types (PM204100)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-types-pm204100/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Rate type** field, enter the identifier for the rate type. This can be a ten-character string of letters and numbers. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a more detailed description of the rate type. This can be a 50-character string of letters and numbers. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). To create another rate type, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create rate lookup rules /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/create-rate-lookup-rules section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create rate lookup rules 1. Go to the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window. 1. In the **Rate table** field, select the rate table you want to specify sequences for. 1. In the **Rate type** field, select the rate type you want to specify sequences for. You define these rate types in the [Rate types (PM204100)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-types-pm204100/) window. 1. For each planned sequence, do the following: 1. Review the reference numbers of sequences and adjust them if needed, keeping in mind that the numbers define the order in which the system will be applying the sequences to find the rate. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you plan to use the rate table with more than one rate type (that is, in more than one allocation step), repeat step 3 - 5 for each rate type.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Specify rates for rate tables /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/specify-rates-for-rate-tables section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Specify rates for rate tables 1. Go to the [Rate table maintenance (PM206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000/) window. 1. In the **Rate table** field, select the ID of the rate table you want to set rates for. 1. In the **Rate type** field, select the rate type you want to view or maintain rates for. 1. In the **Sequence** field, select the sequence of the rate table for which you want to view or maintain rates. 1. In the **Rate code** field, select the rate code you want to define rates for. In order to create a new rate code, you can enter its identifier in this field. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the rate code. 1. On the **Rate** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Start date** column, enter the start date of the period when the rate is valid. 1. In the **End date** column, enter the end date of the period when the rate is valid. 1. In the **Rate** column, enter the rate. 1. On each tab with a factor defined by this sequence, create the list of particular factors for which this rate is applicable: 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the first column, select the particular factor of the specified type (for example, select an employee if this is the **Employee** tab). 1. Repeat steps a and b until you have selected all the factors of the type for which this rate is applicable. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) in the table toolbar. 1. To specify a rate for another rate code, repeat steps 4 - 10. 1. Repeat steps 3 - 11 until you have specified rates for all of the sequences defined for this rate table and this rate type. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you plan to use the rate table in more than one allocation step, repeat steps 1 through 13 for another rate type.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Manage allocations and invoicing rules /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage allocations and invoicing rules About labour and revenue allocation /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-labour-and-revenue-allocation page For information about how to set allocation rules, see: Set allocation rules 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About labour and revenue allocation For information about how to set allocation rules, see: Set allocation rules For more information: [Set allocation rules](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/set-allocation-rules/). In Visma Net, **allocation** is the process of allocating amounts to specific accounts, account groups, or both to acknowledge expenses and revenues. The allocation process is governed by allocation rules you specify by using the [Allocation rules (PM207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500/) window. The allocation process consists of two basic stages: Selection of transactions : By using allocation rule settings, Visma Net selects only those transactions that conform to the rule settings. These are used as underlying transactions for allocating amounts and quantities. For instance: You can use as an underlying transaction an invoice your employee paid when providing service to a customer. Allocation : Visma Net generates one or more allocation transactions with the amounts and quantities calculated based on those of the underlying transactions. You can specify rules that generate any transactions involving any accounts and posting; however, you normally use allocation to account for your current reimbursable costs (based on the completion percents of project tasks) and future revenues from the project. For instance: If you use a cost-based pricing model that implies a 15 percent up tick, you can specify an allocation rule that adds up all the cost transactions' current amounts, multiplies the sum by 1.15, and debits the resulting amount to the account you use for tracking your non-invoiced revenue. ## Tracking current revenue You may want to view future revenues as they are accumulated during project execution, regardless of when they will be actually recognised, charged to the customer, or both. For instance, the project may be invoiced monthly but you may need to track the amount you will invoice to the customer weekly or even daily. This way, you can continuously monitor how the actual revenues align with the projected revenues for the project. In Visma Net, you can track future project-related revenues as they are accumulated by allocating the corresponding amounts to special account groups. To track future revenues, you need to create the following account groups: Non-invoiced revenue: : This is an account group of the **Asset** type used to accumulate future revenue. When you view the allocation rule in the [Invoicing rules (PM207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/invoicing-rules-pm207000/) window, this account group appears in the **Debit** column. This way, each time you run allocation, you post to this account group the amounts that you plan to invoice to the customer. This account group may include multiple accounts to enable allocating different amounts for different allocations, for instance, allocating amounts for travel, labour, and services. Alternatively, you can use different accounting groups for each of these categories. Unrecognised revenue: : This account group of the **Liability** type is used to accumulate unrecognised revenue. When you view the allocation rule in the [Allocation rules (PM207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500/) window, this account group appears in the **Credit** column. This way, each time you run allocation, you post the amounts that you plan to recognise as revenue to this account group. This account group may include multiple accounts to enable allocating different amounts for different allocations. Each time you run allocation, you debit the account group used for non-invoiced revenue and credit the account group used for unrecognised revenue for the same amount. Later, you will recognise this amount as revenue and charge it to the customer when you run invoicing for the project. ## Multiple steps of the allocation rules For allocation purposes, you normally use the cost transactions. In Visma Net, this method is called **Transaction** and is defined in the allocation rule for the project. This method can be used in multiple steps of an allocation rule. With this method, the pricing for the project is based on direct costs associated with the project. Using multiple steps of the **Transaction** type, you can allocate future revenues for different activities. For example: The first step can allocate reimbursable travel expenses, while the second step can allocate labour time. ## Allocating labour in Projects + If the Projects module is not enabled, the release of a transaction in the Time and expenses workspace generates the corresponding transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace. Enabling the Projects module in Visma Net changes the way transactions are released in the Time and expenses workspace. + When non-project transactions are released, Visma Net generates regular supplier ledger transactions. If you enable the Projects module functionality, the release of a transaction associated with a specific project does not generate a supplier ledger transaction, but instead generates the corresponding Projects module transactions. + The further processing of the project transactions originating in the Time and expenses workspace is handled in the Projects module using allocation and invoicing rules. This workflow with the extra stage allows you to use costs in allocating and invoicing for projects and implement a cost-driven pricing model. Once you have all direct labour costs for the project entered in the Projects module, you can use the transaction information to allocate for the project any amounts and quantities enforced by your pricing model. About allocating transactions /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-allocating-transactions page In the Projects workspace, allocation is the process of distributing amounts to specific accounts, account groups, or both, to recognise expenses and revenues. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About allocating transactions In the Projects workspace, allocation is the process of distributing amounts to specific accounts, account groups, or both, to recognise expenses and revenues. In the Projects workspace, allocation is the process of distributing amounts to specific accounts, account groups, or both, to recognise expenses and revenues. For example, each month you can allocate amounts of the actual expenditures in the project and the future revenues calculated based on those expenditures. The allocation process is governed by allocation rules, which you specify in the [Allocation rules (PM207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500/) window. There are two stages in the allocation process: 1. Transaction selection Visma Net uses allocation rule settings to select only those transactions that conform to the rules. These are used as underlying transactions for allocating amounts and quantities. As underlying transactions, you can, for example, use invoices that your employees paid when they provided a service to a customer. 1. Allocation The Projects workspace generates one or more allocation transactions with the amounts and quantities calculated, based on the amounts and quantities in the underlying transactions. You can specify rules that generate any transactions involving any accounts and postings, but you normally use allocation to account for any current costs that can be reimbursed (based on the completion percentages of project tasks) and future revenues from the project. If you, for example, use a cost-based pricing model that implies a 15 percent rise, you can specify an allocation rule that adds up all the current amounts of cost transactions, then multiplies the sum by 1.15, and debits the resulting amount to the account you use for tracking your not-yet-invoiced revenue. ## Completion percentage Before you run allocation, you have to make sure that the percentage of completion is set on the task(s): + For fixed contract projects: Set the task with the contract amount on the right completion percentage. + For time and material projects: make sure that the completion percentage of each task is correct. + When you use the **Cost plus** allocation method, you must set a margin percentage on the **Attributes** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, and make sure that the percentage of completion per task is correct.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About project invoicing /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing page To invoice customers for the services provided as a part of a project, you can generate invoices based on the information collected in the Projects module. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About project invoicing To invoice customers for the services provided as a part of a project, you can generate invoices based on the information collected in the Projects module. To invoice customers for the services provided as a part of a project, you can generate invoices based on the information collected in the Projects module. The invoicing procedure is available only for external projects or for projects associated with customers. You can run the invoicing procedure automatically, manually, or on a schedule. You can enable draft invoices for a particular project, which gives you the ability to review and modify invoiceable transactions and amounts in a draft invoice before you prepare the final sales invoice with all information copied from the draft invoice. ## Invoicing procedure In Visma Net, you perform project invoicing by using one of the following windows: + In the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, you can run invoicing for the selected project by clicking **Run project invoicing** in the window toolbar. If the project is pending invoicing, the system creates an invoice with a date that is the same as the **Next invoicing date** of the project. For projects with the **On demand** invoicing period, the date of the invoice is the business date. + In the [Run project invoicing (PM503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-project-invoicing-pm503000/) window, you can run invoicing for multiple projects that are pending invoicing, depending on the **Invoice date** selected in the top part of the window. The system creates invoices with a date that is the same as the **Invoice date**. In both windows, the system invoices only a project that is pending invoicing or at least one of the following exist for the project: + A non-invoiced transaction that is ready to be invoiced on the invoice date or the date of the transaction is not later than the invoice date. The invoice date is the date of the invoice that the system creates during the invoicing. The invoice date depends on the window where you run invoicing as follows: + In the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, the invoice date is the **Next invoicing date**, which is specified on the **Summary** tab, for all the projects except those that are invoiced on demand. + In the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, the invoice date is the business date for all the projects for which the **Invoicing period**, which is specified on the **Summary** tab, is **On demand**. + In the [Run project invoicing (PM503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-project-invoicing-pm503000/) window, the invoice date is the **Invoice date**, which in specified in the top part of the window. Whether the system uses or not the transactions with the date is equal to the invoice date depends on the **Invoicing cut-off date** setting in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window as follows: + **Include trans. created on invoicing date**: With this setting, the non-invoiced transaction is ready to be invoiced if its date is earlier than or the same as the invoice date. + **Exclude trans. created on invoicing date**: With this setting, the non-invoiced transaction is ready to be invoiced if its date is earlier than the invoice date. + A revenue budget line with a non-zero pending invoice amount on the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + An amount postponed to the next invoicing from a pro forma invoice for which the corresponding sales invoice is released. + A task with a recurring invoicing item. + For the **Time and material** steps of the invoicing rules of project tasks, the system selects all the outstanding allocated project transactions and generates an invoice for the customer based on these transactions and according to the invoicing rule (for details about invoicing rules, see the section below). If you do not want to invoice any of the transactions, you can use the [Reverse non-invoiced transactions (PM505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/reverse-non-invoiced-transactions-pm505000/) window to reverse allocated transactions (either all listed transactions at once or only the selected ones). + For the **Progress invoicing** steps of the invoicing rules of project tasks whose processing does not involve allocations, the system generates an invoice with the invoiceable project revenue, meaning the revenue budget lines with a non-zero **Pending invoice amount** listed on the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. For the invoicing process for a project to be run successfully, the project should meet the following criteria: + All the mandatory settings are for the project and its tasks. + The project status is be **Active**, **Completed**, or **Suspended**. + The status of the project tasks is **Active** or **Completed**, and the invoicing rule should be specified for these tasks. + The project has a provision for invoicing or a non-invoiced project transaction associated with the task within this invoicing period for a time and material invoicing. + The steps of the invoicing rule should be applicable to the invoicing provisions. For example: The invoicing rule of a task that is supposed to be invoiced by a revenue budget line should have a **Progress invoicing** step. ## Invoicing rules For each project task, the invoicing process is defined by invoicing rules, which are defined in the [Invoicing rules (PM207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/invoicing-rules-pm207000/) window. For each invoicing rule, you can create steps of the following types: + A single **Progress invoicing** step to invoice pending invoice amounts + Multiple **Time and material** steps to invoice transactions by different account groups In a single invoicing rule, you can mix these types of invoicing steps, as well as create separate invoicing rules for each type of step. Each step of a invoicing rule has a variety of settings that depend on the step type, including the following: + The account group that is used as a filter to select the transactions for invoicing by the **Time and material** invoicing steps. The system selects all the transactions that are due for invoicing when the invoicing procedure is run. Normally, you use for invoicing the same account group or groups that you use for accumulating the unrecognised revenue. By running invoicing for these account groups, you recognise the revenue. + Formulas to define the description of the invoice and each invoice line. + Formulas to calculate the amount and quantity of the invoice lines created by the **Time and material** invoicing steps. + The sources of the sales account and the destination branch for each invoice line. The invoicing process uses the originating branch from the project settings in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window and the destination branches from the sources according to the invoicing rules. When a sales invoice is released, the customer ledger account is updated under the originating branch of the invoice, while the revenue amounts are recorded to the destination branches of the invoice lines. + The invoice group to make the system create separate invoices for particular steps with the similar invoice group during the project invoicing (either pro forma invoices or sales invoices, depending on the invoicing workflow of the project). During the invoicing process, the system groups the invoiceable amounts into invoices by the following: + The invoice group of the steps of the invoicing rules to which the project tasks refer + The customer + The customer location + The **Invoice separately** setting of each project task defined in the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window + Non-invoiceable transactions that do not contribute to the amount invoiced to the customer and that you may decide to include in the invoice. + Grouping criteria by date, employee, supplier, and stock item for the invoice lines created by the **Time and material** invoicing steps. ## Progress invoicing Progress invoicing is a simple invoicing workflow for the projects that are gradually invoiced at a fixed contract amount. Progress invoicing does not involve project transactions, and the system uses **Progress invoicing** steps of invoicing rules of the project tasks to process this invoicing. The project setup and the invoicing workflow proceed as follows: + You add a revenue budget line with a **Revised amount** to a project on the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + To provide a invoiceable amount (for example, on a monthly basis), you populate the **Pending invoice amount** or **Completed (%)** column on the **Revenue budget** tab for the revenue budget lines to make the system calculate the **Pending invoice amount.** + You run the project invoicing process to create a pro forma invoice (or a sales invoice, depending on the selected workflow). + The system creates an invoice with the amounts derived from the **Pending invoice amount** column of the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window for the revenue budget lines. The system updates the **Draft invoices amount** of the revenue budget lines with the **Pending invoice amount** and clears the **Pending invoice amount**. + If the system creates a pro forma invoice (depending on the selected workflow), the invoice lines that are produced by the progress invoicing steps are displayed on the **Progress invoicing** tab of the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window. > [!NOTE] > > + If a project task uses a invoicing rule that has no **Progress invoicing** step, when the system updates the **Completed (%)** column on the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, the system does not recalculate the **Pending invoice amount** column for the revenue budget lines that belong to this task, and the system ignores any pending invoice amount of these lines during the invoicing process. > + The **Actual quantity** of the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window is always zero in the revenue budget lines that are invoiced only by progress invoicing. ## Transaction-based invoicing This invoicing workflow is provided for projects that are invoiced based on project transactions. The system uses the **Time and material** steps of the invoicing rules of the project tasks to process this invoicing. A invoicing rule may have a number of **Time and material** steps for different account groups of transactions that should be used to determine the invoiced amounts by different formulas. The **Time and material** invoicing can be executed right after the project transactions that match the selection criteria have been provisioned in the system. The allocation process can be executed before invoicing, if necessary. The project setup and invoicing workflow proceeds as follows: + You run the project invoicing process to create a pro forma invoice (or a sales invoice, depending on the selected workflow). + The system creates the invoice based on the non-invoiced project transactions with amounts calculated by the invoicing rules of the project tasks. The system considers in the invoicing the transactions with a date that is earlier than the invoicing date and does not consider the transactions with the date that is later than the invoicing date. The transactions with a date on the invoicing date are invoiced if **Include trans. created on invoicing date** is selected as the **Invoicing cut-off date** in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. + If the system creates a pro forma invoice, the invoice lines that are produced by the **Time and material** invoicing steps are displayed on the **Time and material** tab of the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window. ## Recurring invoicing Your company may provide services to customers regularly for a flat price. For instance, you can lease construction machines to customers for an agreed number of hours per month for a fixed price. If you decide to manage this activity as a project, you do not have to manually create a new invoice every month—each time you run project invoicing, recurring transactions are added to the invoice (or to the invoice listed first in the rule if multiple invoices must be generated for the invoicing rule). Recurring invoicing is a task-level setting you define on the **Recurring invoicing** tab of the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. You can use non-stock items as line items for recurring invoicing to track employee and equipment work time. For each item, you can specify the following: + The flat price charged once each invoicing period. + The number of units included in the item fee. For instance, you may have an agreement with the customer to provide 40 hours of road scraper work at a flat price, while any extra hours are charged on a per-hour basis. + The option that determines whether the number of units included in the flat price is to be reset for each invoicing period or it is a fixed number for the entire project duration. + The minimum number of units for which invoicing may be performed. If the amount of services or products you provide is less than this value, you do not charge the customer. The invoicing period is a project-wide setting that you specify when planning the project at the level of the project template in the [Project templates (PM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000/) window. The following options are available: **Week**, **Month**, **Quarter**, **Year**, or **On demand**. The **On demand** option defines the invoicing that may be initiated when it is needed. ## Invoicing of postponed amounts With the draft invoice workflow, a user can modify a pro forma invoice and postpone the difference until the next invoicing. This remaining amount will be invoiced during the next invoicing if the sales invoice that contains the line from which the remainder originates is released. For more information about the draft invoice workflow, see: [About pro forma invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-pro-forma-invoices/) ## Mapping of accounts to tasks When you run a invoicing procedure for a project, the system may generate additional transactions, for instance, to include a discount or freight charge. Such transactions are automatically associated with the project, but you may also need to automatically associate these transactions with specific tasks in the project. You can have Visma Net automatically assign transactions to specific tasks by mapping specific general ledger accounts to tasks within the project in the **Default task for General ledger account** section on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. Once you map a general ledger account to a task, any transactions automatically generated by the system and associated with the account will be linked to this default task. ## Reverse transactions In the [Reverse non-invoiced transactions (PM505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/reverse-non-invoiced-transactions-pm505000/) window, you have two reversal options: + To reverse specific transactions, select the check box before each line you want to reverse, and click **Process**. + To reverse all transactions in the list, just click **Process all**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create an invoicing rule /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/create-an-invoicing-rule section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an invoicing rule 1. Go to the [Invoicing rules (PM207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/invoicing-rules-pm207000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Invoicing rule** field, enter the ID for the invoicing rule. This can be a fifteen-character string of letters and numbers. > [!NOTE] > If you want to edit an existing rule, click in the field to select one. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the invoicing rule. 1. In the table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Account group** column, click to select an account group. 1. In the **Account source** column, click the drop-down list to select an account group. > [!NOTE] > This column is by default set to **Invoicing rule**. 1. In the **Account** column, select the account you want to use for this line. 1. Optional: Select any relevant check boxes for the line, for example if you want non-invoiceable transactions to be included. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Set allocation rules /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/set-allocation-rules section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set allocation rules 1. Go to the [Allocation rules (PM207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Allocation rule** field, enter a unique ID for the new rule. You can use a fifteen-character string of letters and numbers. > [!NOTE] > If there are existing allocation rules, you can click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to see which identifiers and descriptions have been used previously. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a short description. 1. In the left pane, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Step ID** field, enter a unique ID for the new step. You can use a ten-character string of letters and numbers. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a short description. 1. Go to the **Allocation settings** tab. 1. At this point, you have 2 options: ## Select the check box Post transaction to general ledger This check box indicates that the allocation transactions should be posted to the general ledger. 1. In the **Debit transaction** section, select the **Account group** for the allocation's debit transactions. 1. In the **Credit transaction** section, select the **Account group** for the allocation's credit transactions. 1. Go to the **Calculation rules** tab. 1. In the **Account group from** field, select the account group that starts the range of account groups whose transactions are involved in this allocation step. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Do not select the check box Post transaction to general ledger If this check box is not selected, the transactions are not posted to the general ledger. Instead, they are only used to track analytical or statistical information for projects, and you can only specify account groups (not accounts) in the **Debit transaction** and **Credit transaction** sections. 1. In the **Debit transaction** section, in the **Account group** field, you have two options: + In the drop down of the left field, select **Use source** to use the account group specified in the original transaction. + In the left field, select **Replace** to enable the right field where you can specify the account group for the allocation's debit transactions. 1. In the **Credit transaction** section, in the **Account group** field, you have three options: + In the left field, select **Use source** to use the account group specified in the original transaction. + In the left field, select **Replace** to enable the right field where you can specify the account group for the allocation's credit transactions. + In the left field, select **None** if you do not want tot use an account group. 1. Go to the **Calculation rules** tab. 1. In the **Account group from** field, select the account group that starts the range of account groups whose transactions are involved in this allocation step. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Start the invoicing process for projects /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/start-the-invoicing-process-for-projects section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Start the invoicing process for projects 1. Go to the [Run project invoicing (PM503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-project-invoicing-pm503000/) window. 1. In the **Invoice date** field, select the date you want to be specified on the invoices. 1. In the **Period to post** field, click select a financial period. 1. Optional: In the **Statement cycle ID** field, select a statement cycle. 1. Optional: In the **Customer class** field, select a class, if you want to see all projects for a specific customer class. Leave this field blank to view information on all classes. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer you want to invoice projects for. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers of a specified class (or all customers of all classes). 1. Optional: In the **Template ID** field, you can select a template, to see projects that have been created with that specific template. Leave this field blank to view projects bases on all templates. 1. You now have two options: + Select the check boxes in front of specific projects in the table, and click **Invoice**. + Click **Invoice all** if you want to invoice all of the listed projects in the table. When the processing finishes you will see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) for all invoices that were successfully processed.

Related pages

Windows

 Run allocations by task /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/run-allocations-by-task section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run allocations by task 1. Go to the [Run allocations by tasks (PM502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-allocations-by-task-pm502000/) window. 1. In the **Allocation rule** field, select the allocation rule you want to list tasks for. 1. In the **Project** field, select the project you want to list tasks for. 1. Optional: + In the **Project task** field, you can select a project task. + In the **Customer class** field, you can select a customer class. The list in the table will only include the active project tasks for the selected customer class. + In the **Customer field**, you can select a customer. The list in the table will include only the active project tasks for the selected customer. + In the **Posting date** field, you can assign a date to the allocation transactions. + In the **Date range restrictions** section, you can select a date range. The system will only allocate transactions from the date range you specify. > [!NOTE] > If you do not select **From**, the system starts with the oldest allocated transaction. > [!NOTE] > If you do not select **To**, the system allocates up to the last allocated transaction. 1. You now have two options: + Select the check boxes in front of specific projects in the table, and click **Allocate**. + Click **Allocate all** if you want to invoice all of the listed projects in the table. When the processing finishes, you will see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) for all invoices that were successfully processed.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Run allocations by project /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/run-allocations-by-project section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run allocations by project 1. Go to the [Run allocations by project (PM502500)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-allocations-by-project-pm502500/) window. 1. In the **Allocation rule** field, select the allocation rule you want to apply. 1. In the **Project** field, select the project you want to list. 1. Optional: + In the **Customer class** field, you can select a customer class. The list in the table will only include the active projects for the selected customer class. + In the **Customer field**, you can select a customer. The list in the table will include only the active projects for the selected customer. + In the **Posting date** field, you can assign a date to the allocation transactions. + In the **Date range restrictions** section, you can select a date range. The system will only allocate transactions from the date range you specify. > [!NOTE] > If you do not select **From**, the system starts with the oldest allocated transaction. If you do not select **To**, the system allocates up to the last allocated transaction. 1. You now have two options: + Select the check boxes in front of specific projects in the table, and click **Allocate**. + Click **Allocate all** if you want to allocate all of the listed projects in the table. When the processing finishes, you will see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) for all invoices that were successfully processed.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Reverse non-invoiced transactions /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/reverse-non-invoiced-transactions page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse non-invoiced transactions 1. Go to the [Reverse non-invoiced transactions (PM505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/reverse-non-invoiced-transactions-pm505000/) window. 1. In the top part, you can narrow the range of transactions displayed in the table. If you do not make any selections, the table displays all allocated, non-invoiced transactions. 1. You now have two options: + If you want to reverse all non-invoiced transactions, click **Process all**. + If you want to reverse some of the transactions, select the check box next to the transactions you want to release and click **Process**.

Related pages

Windows

 Reverse allocations for project transactions /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/reverse-allocations-for-project-transactions page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse allocations for project transactions 1. Go to the [Project transactions (PM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-pm304000/) window. 1. In the **Workspace** field, select the workspace to which the project of the transactions belongs. 1. In the **Ref. no.** field, select the batch of allocated project transactions you want to reverse. > [!NOTE] > You can only reverse allocations with the status **Released**. 1. Click **Reverse allocation**.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About tracking commitments /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/about-tracking-commitments page Visma Net supports tracking purchase orders and sales orders by project as project cost commitments and project revenue commitments, respectively. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About tracking commitments Visma Net supports tracking purchase orders and sales orders by project as project cost commitments and project revenue commitments, respectively. Visma Net supports tracking purchase orders and sales orders by project as project cost commitments and project revenue commitments, respectively. These commitments affect the execution status of a project. You can track the budget and actual amounts of a project, as well as the original commitments that remain open. When the commitments are created, the system uses them to populate the revenue and cost budget for the corresponding project, project task, item, and account group. ## Tracking the committed cost by purchase order The system tracks the commitment cost in the base currency for the **Normal** and **Drop-ship** lines of the purchase orders associated with a project. These commitments are called **Internal** because they originate from documents created in the system, in contrast to **External** commitments that can be imported into Visma Net. The system tracks the internal commitment cost if the **Internal commitment tracking** check box is selected in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. When you save a purchase order created in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window with the **Open** status and the order refers to a project, the system creates a commitment record for each purchase order line in the amount of the **Ext. cost** of the line. These commitments are updated when the order line is changed (for example: When the quantity or amount of the line is corrected or the order line is completed or cancelled). You can review the commitment records in the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window. The original commitment amount is displayed in the **Amount** column of the line. For a new commitment, the **Open amount** equals the original committed amount. When a purchase order is received, the system updates the **Received quantity** and reduces the **Open amount** of the commitment line by an amount proportional to the received or invoiced quantity. The system updates the **Received quantity** of the commitment line depending on the type of the purchase order line as follows: + For the purchase order lines that are processed through a purchase receipt, the commitment lines are updated with the received quantity when the purchase receipt is released. + For the purchase order lines that are invoiced directly without a purchase receipt being processed, the commitment lines are updated with the invoiced quantity when the purchase invoice is released. When a purchase invoice that corresponds to the purchase order is released, the **Invoiced amount** is updated with the **Ext. cost** of the invoice line. After a purchase order has been closed, the **Open amount** of the commitment lines becomes zero. If a purchase order has been received partially or cancelled, the incomplete amounts are also subtracted from the **Open amount**. The validate process in the [Validate project balances (PM504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/validate-project-balances-pm504000/) window recreates internal commitment records based on the amounts and quantities in the lines of purchase orders if the tracking of project commitments is enabled. ## Tracking committed revenue by sales order The system tracks the commitment revenue in the base currency for the lines of sales orders associated with a project. As with commitments for purchase order lines, these commitments are internal because they originate in the system. The system tracks the internal commitment revenue if the **Internal commitment tracking** check box is selected in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. The **Commitment tracking** check box should also be selected in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window for the order type for which the commitment tracking is required. When you save a sales order created in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window with the **Open** status and the sales order refers to a project, the system creates a commitment record for each sales order line in the amount of the **Ext. cost** of the line. These commitments are updated as soon as the order line is changed (for example, when the quantity or amount of the line is corrected, or the order line is completed or cancelled). In the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window, the original commitment amount is displayed in the **Amount** column. For a new commitment, the **Open amount** equals the original committed amount. The system updates the **Received quantity** of the commitment line depending on whether a shipment is processed for the sales order as follows: + For the sales order lines that are processed through a shipment, the commitment lines are updated with the shipped quantity when the shipment is confirmed. + For the sales order lines that are invoiced directly without shipment processing, the commitment lines are updated with the invoiced quantity when the sales invoice is released. When a sales invoice that corresponds to the sales order is released, the **Invoiced amount** is updated with the **Amount** of the invoice line. After a sales order has been completed, the **Open amount** of the commitment lines becomes zero. If a sales order has been delivered partially or cancelled, the incomplete amounts are also subtracted from the **Open amount**. The return lines of sales orders are recorded as commitment lines with a negative sign if commitment tracking is enabled for the applicable return order type (for example, a credit note). The validation process in the [Validate project balances (PM504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/validate-project-balances-pm504000/) window recreates internal commitment records based on the amounts and quantities in the lines of sales orders for which the tracking of project commitments is enabled. ## Aggregating committed data for reports The commitment data aggregated by the project budget line key (project, project task, item, and account group or project, project task, item and account group ID, respectively) is available in the analytical reports and in the following windows: + In the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, in the corresponding columns on the **Revenue budget** and **Cost budget** tabs. For a selected budget line, you can click **View commitments** in the table toolbar to review the detailed commitment records in the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window. + In the [Row sets (CS206010)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/row-sets-cs206010/) window, in the **Amount type** field of the **Data source** of a row, for row sets of the **PM** type. + In the [Column sets (CS206020)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/column-sets-cs206020/) window, in the **Amount type** field of the **Data source** of a column, for column sets of the **PM** type. + In the [Unit sets (CS206030)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/unit-sets-cs206030/) window, in the **Amount type** field of the **Data source** of a unit, for unit sets of the **PM** type. ## Integrating commitments with external systems Project commitments do not necessarily have to originate from purchase orders or sales orders that exist in the system. + You can import commitment records from an external system into Visma Net for further analysis against budget and actual figures. These commitment records are called **External** in contrast to internal ones that originate from documents created in the system. + After the initial import, you can update imported commitment records as the project goes on and the system changes the applicable open committed amounts and invoiced amounts. Imported commitment records have the **External** type in the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window and are identified in Visma Net by the external reference number. + The selection of the **Internal commitment tracking** check box in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window is not necessary for the import of external commitment records. + To create an external commitment record, in the toolbar of the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window, you can click **Create external commitment** and then populate the necessary settings of the window, which opens. This window is also available for writing import and export scenarios and through the Web Services API.

Related pages

Windows

 Manage projects /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage projects About the project life cycle /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-the-project-life-cycle page Below, you can read about the different stages of a project, from planning to completion. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the project life cycle Below, you can read about the different stages of a project, from planning to completion. ## Planning stage Any new project you create in Visma Net is automatically assigned the **In planning** status. Before you make any project active or submit it for approval, you must thoroughly plan it and specify all the key properties. You can create a project either from scratch or from a template. If you use a template, your new project will be populated with the template settings, and you need to enter only information that differs from the information in the template. When adding a new project from the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, you should enter the following information: + **General settings**: This information includes the description, start date, end date, and invoicing period. You also select one of these invoicing options: on the date of the customer statement, at the end of each month, at the end of each quarter, or at the end of each year. + **Visibility settings**: You can specify the workspaces with which you want to integrate your project. We recommend that you select only those workspaces that you will use to post documents related to your project. + **Tasks**: You can define the tasks for the project. A task in a project is a separate work unit with its own life cycle, budget, cost, and revenue. + **Employees**: You specify the employees to be engaged in the project. You can override the default labour class specified for specific employees by defining different labour classes for regular working hours and for overtime hours. + **Attributes**: You can specify attribute values for the project if a group of attributes has been assigned to projects in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window and for project tasks if a group of attributes has been assigned to tasks. A project in the planning stage is not available for selection in data entry windows in other modules. To projects and project tasks that are in the **In planning** status, you can add activities by using the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) and [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) windows. For instance, you can add an employee task for planning budgets for project tasks while at the stage of project planning. However, the transactions generated for completed activities (if any) cannot be released until the project gets the **Active** status. After preparation has been completed, you can take the project off hold by clearing the **On hold** check box in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window and saving it. ## Active stage Active projects become available for selection on the windows of the modules you have selected for integration with the Projects module. For more information, see: [About integration with other modules](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/about-integration-with-other-modules/) When users create transactions in the integrated modules, they can link the transactions with a specific project task by specifying the project and task. Also, they can specify whether the transaction is invoiceable for the project task. If users do not want to link a transaction with any project, they can specify the non-project code. Budget changes often occur during the course of the project. In Visma Net, you cannot change the initial budget, although you can enter the revised figures for the project budget. The revised budget appears in a separate column. ## Completion of project A project life cycle ends when the project is either completed or closed. The project is considered completed when all its tasks are completed. You complete the project by assigning it the **Completed** status. A project may end prematurely when the customer stops using the services your company provides. In that case, you can close the project before completing all its tasks.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About the calculation of task completion percentage /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-the-calculation-of-task-completion-percentage page A project task is the smallest identifiable piece of work that is a part of the project. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the calculation of task completion percentage A project task is the smallest identifiable piece of work that is a part of the project. A project task is the smallest identifiable piece of work that is a part of the project. Some tasks may require more than one financial period to complete and may be invoiced on task completion or even on completion of the entire project. Often, the allocation rules for projects are rather straightforward and use the percentage-of-completion scheme to evaluate the revenue earned during a specific financial period. ## Methods of calculation of task completion percentage For each task in the project, you can select which method will be used to evaluate the completion percentage of the task, which is shown in the **Completed (%)** column in the **Tasks** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. You select the method in the **Completion calculation method** field in the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. You can select one of the following options: Manual : You can use this method if it is not possible to select one cost line in which the actual amount or quantity would reflect the overall task progress. This may be the case if different cost lines are expressed as quantities measured in different UoMs, or some of the lines have budgets expressed as amounts with other line budgets expressed as quantities. With this method, you evaluate the task progress by using all the available information and manually specify the task completion percentage in the **Completed (%)** field. You can change the value as often as needed and yous should update it before you perform an allocation for the project. Budgeted quantity : With this method, the system calculates the task completion percentage for all cost budget lines associated with the task for which the **Auto completed (%)** check box is selected in the **Cost budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. The system calculates the percentage based on the quantities in the **Actual quantity** and **Revised quantity** columns on the **Cost budget** tab by using the following formula: `Completed (%) = Actual quantity / Revised quantity`. If the **Auto completed (%)** check box is selected for more than one cost budget line associated with the task with this completion method, the result of the **Completed (%)** calculation can be unpredictable due to different UoMs of the cost budget lines. For example: Suppose that a task has a budget for 100 hours of consulting (with a cost of €100 per hour) for a customer company and a budget for 25 round trips (with a cost of €10 per hour) to the customer location. If you select the consulting cost for tracking the task completion, with 40 hours of consulting completed, the percentage of the task completion is calculated as 40%. Splitting or merging consulting sessions may change the number of required round trips; however, the task progress should be measured by the actual hours of consulting performed. Budgeted amount : You can use this method for a task if all cost lines have budgeted amounts. With this method selected, the system calculates the task completion percentage for all the cost budget lines associated with the task for which the **Auto completed (%)** check box is selected on the **Cost budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. The system calculates the percentage based on the amounts in the **Actual amount** and **Revised amount** columns on the **Cost budget** tab by using the following formula: `Completed (%) = Actual amount / Revised amount`. ## Evaluation of project completion percentage With Visma Net, you cannot directly track the completion percentage for the entire project although you can track completion for each of the project tasks. If needed, you can create a separate task and use it exclusively to manually specify the project completion percentage that you evaluate by using all the information available about the progress of project tasks and project-related transactions.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About project-specific format of invoices /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-project-specific-format-of-invoices page For individual projects, you can configure different formats for printable pro forma invoices and sales invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About project-specific format of invoices For individual projects, you can configure different formats for printable pro forma invoices and sales invoices. For individual projects, you can configure different formats for printable pro forma invoices and sales invoices. The invoice format may depend on the project type; for instance, an installation project may have one invoice format, and a repair project may have a different invoice format. Also, a default invoice format can be specified for particular customers, with this format used for all projects of this customer unless the user specifies a different format. ## Defining printing window of invoices for projects On the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, you can specify a custom format and an email notification template that should be used for the printing and emailing of the invoices prepared for the particular project. When you create a new project, the system copies all the predefined mailing settings from the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window, but you can override them. You can use the following predefined mailings: PROFORMA : The mailing with this ID is used to print pro forma invoices. By default, this mailing uses the [Pro forma invoice (PM642000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoice-pm642000/) for printing the pro forma invoice. INVOICE : The mailing with this ID is used to print customer ledger invoices that originate from the Projects module. By default, this mailing uses the [Pro forma invoice (PM642000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoice-pm642000/), which is a copy of the [Invoice/note (AR641000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-note-ar641000/), for printing the invoice. If you need to override the printing form of pro forma invoices or sales invoices for a project, you edit the respective mailing setting but do not edit the mailing identifier, which is the system setting. For example: Suppose you need to override the printing form of pro forma invoices for a project. For the **PROFORMA** mailing of this project, you select the needed report from the Projects module in the **Report** column of the **Mailing** table on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. ## Printing invoices When you print a pro forma invoice in the [Pro forma invoice (PM642000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoice-pm642000/) window, the system uses the report specified for the **PROFORMA** mailing of the corresponding project on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. If the corresponding project has no mailing setting with the **PROFORMA** identifier, an error occurs. When you print a sales invoice that originates from the Projects module in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, the system uses one of the following reports: + The report specified for the **INVOICE** mailing, if one is specified, of the corresponding project on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + The report specified for the customer on the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window if the **INVOICE** mailing of the corresponding project is not active. + The [Invoice/note (AR641000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/invoice-note-ar641000/) if the **INVOICE** mailing of the corresponding project and the customer is not active.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About project tasks /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-project-tasks page In Visma Net, each project can consist of one project task or multiple project task. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About project tasks In Visma Net, each project can consist of one project task or multiple project task. A project task is the smallest identifiable piece of work that is a part of the project, and you can select an invoicing rule for each project task to determine how it will be invoiced. + You create a project task when you are configuring a new project from the beginning or when you need to add a new project task to an existing project + + You can also create new project tasks directly in the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window by specifying the identifier of the project to which the project task relates, the identifier of the new project task, and the settings specific for the project task. + When you create a project-related document, you must specify a project task for each document line. If you have specified one of the project’s tasks as the default one for the project, the system will automatically insert this project task in the lines of documents when you select the project. + When you process a sales or purchase invoice related to the project, the system may automatically generate additional general ledger transaction lines, for instance, to include a discount or freight charge. To automatically associate these transaction lines with specific project tasks, you need to map particular general ledger accounts to specific project tasks within the project in the **Default task for the general ledger account** table on the **Defaults** tab the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. In the automatically generated transaction lines posted to the general ledger account mapped to a project task, the system will specify this project task by default. > [!NOTE] > The defined account mapping does not affect the entry of project-related invoices in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. In the invoice lines, the system inserts the default task of the project if it is configured on the **Tasks** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

 About project transactions /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-project-transactions page Project-related information from the documents processed in the system is collected by means of project transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About project transactions Project-related information from the documents processed in the system is collected by means of project transactions. You can also use project transactions for tracking budget costs and revenue directly without updating general ledger. You create project transactions manually if you need to directly capture project costs without updating the general ledger. The transactions created for a project update the actual values of the project budget with the incurred expenses that you may need in one of the following cases: + To control the amount of money spent on the project against the budgeted values + To invoice the customer for the incurred expenses + To control the project profitability You create general ledger transactions manually for a project if you need to directly capture project costs without creating original documents (such as invoices, purchase orders, or time activities). ## Creation of project transactions You can create a project transaction directly in the [Project transactions (PM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-pm304000/) window. When you specify the debit account and credit account for the project transaction and release the transaction, the system creates the general ledger transactions in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window, based on whether the amount of the project transaction is positive or negative. If you specify no debit and credit accounts for a project transaction in the [Project transactions (PM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-pm304000/) window or specify only the debit account, on the release of the transaction, the system does not generate the corresponding general ledger transaction. About pro forma invoices /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-pro-forma-invoices page Visma Net provides draft (pro forma) invoice capabilities for project invoicing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About pro forma invoices Visma Net provides draft (pro forma) invoice capabilities for project invoicing. Visma Net provides draft (pro forma) invoice capabilities for project invoicing. A pro forma invoice, which you can view in the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window, is isolated from the Customer ledger workspace. You can review and modify the invoiceable transactions and amounts of the pro forma invoice before you prepare the Customer ledger invoice that is based on this pro forma invoice. A pro forma invoice can be printed and sent to a customer as many times as is necessary until an agreement is reached. Once all the necessary changes have been applied to the pro forma invoice, it can be approved and released. When you release the pro forma invoice, the system creates a sales invoice with all the information copied from the pro forma invoice. With this process, you minimise corrections in the Customer ledger workspace. Pro forma invoices provide the following capabilities: + On the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, you can define invoicing limit amounts for revenue budget lines of the project if the **Use time and material revenue budget limits** check box is selected on the **Summary** tab of this window. The system applies these limit amounts to the pro forma invoices of the project. If an invoice exceeds a limit, in the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window, the user receives a warning or an error message, depending on the **Validate time and material revenue budget limits** setting in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. + You can use different formats of printable pro forma invoices, depending on the particular project. On the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, you can specify a custom format and an email notification template that should be used for the printing and emailing of the pro forma invoices prepared for that project. Also, in the **Invoice-to contact** and **Invoice-to address** sections of the **Summary** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, you can specify the contact information of the customer to whom the pro forma invoices should be sent. This information is copied to each pro forma invoice created for the project and can be modified at the invoice level. ## Creating a pro forma invoice A pro forma invoice can be created only through the project invoicing process (and assigned a reference number only automatically). You cannot manually enter new pro forma invoices in the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window. By default, the system creates a pro forma invoice when you invoice a project because the **Create pro forma on invoicing** check box is initially selected on the **Summary** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. To disable the draft invoice workflow for a project, you can clear this check box or to prevent the system from creating a pro forma invoice when you invoice the project. For a pro forma invoice created for a project, the system records to the following tabs of the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window the lines to be invoiced: + **Progress invoicing**: The system creates these lines by using the **Progress invoicing** steps of invoicing rules specified in the [Invoicing rules (PM207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/invoicing-rules-pm207000/) window. The lines originate from the revenue budget of the project. + **Time and material** The system creates these lines by using the **Time and material** steps of invoicing rules; the lines originate from the project transactions. The **Time and material** steps of invoicing rules support the aggregation of project transactions by date, employee, supplier, and stock item. On the **Time and material** tab of the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window, you can select a line and then click **View transactions details** in the table toolbar to drill down to the list of project transactions based on which the **Invoiced quantity** and **Invoiced amount** of the line have been calculated by the formula of the invoicing rule. Fore more information about the invoicing process, see: [About project invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing/) ## Modifying a pro forma invoice In the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window, you can edit a pro forma invoice when it is **On hold**, including the following: + You can delete a line of the pro forma invoice to invoice it later in the full amount. + You can modify the pro forma invoice to invoice any lines on the **Progress invoicing** and **Time and material** tabs in a greater or smaller amount by changing the **Amount to invoice** as desired. The **Amount to invoice** is added to the customer ledger invoice when the pro forma invoice is released. On the **Time and material** tab, if a manually edited **Amount to Invoice** is less than the **Invoiced amount**, you can make a decision about the difference between the calculated **Invoiced amount** and the corrected **Amount to invoice** by selecting the needed option in the **Status** column of the invoice line. The difference can be postponed until the next invoice (**Hold remainder**) or written off by this invoice (**Write off remainder**). The whole amount of the pro forma invoice line can also be written off (**Write off**); the amount will no longer show up in future invoices. > [!NOTE] > For a postponed amount to be added to a pro forma invoice, the sales invoice that contains the line from which this postponed amount originates must be released. + On the **Time and material** tab, you can select a line and then click **View transactions details** in the table toolbar to drill down to the list of project transactions for which the **Invoiced quantity** and **Invoiced amount** have been calculated by the formula of the invoicing rule. These values are summed to obtain the **Invoiced quantity** and **Invoiced amount**, respectively, of the pro forma invoice line. You can remove particular transactions from this list, and they will appear in the next invoice. + You can rearrange lines within the invoice by dragging them to the appropriate positions. If invoicing limit amounts are defined for the project in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, the system applies these limit amounts to the pro forma invoice lines as a running total, starting from the first line on the **Time and material** tab of the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window. For each line of the invoice, the system subtracts the **Amount to invoice** from the **Max available amount** and uses the reduced amount as the available limit for the next line. Invoice lines for which the **Over limit amount** becomes non-zero exceed the limit. By rearranging the lines, you can make the system apply the limit amounts to the needed lines of the invoice. + You can add to a pro forma invoice an adjustment line that does not originate from the revenue budget or project transactions. Such lines are also included in the limit application and can decrease or increase the limit total. ## Releasing a pro forma invoice The release of a pro forma invoice does not generate project transactions or general ledger transactions directly. When you release the pro forma invoice, the system creates a corresponding sales invoice with all information copied from the pro forma invoice. You can release the pro forma invoices one by one in the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window, or you can mass-process pro forma invoices to release them and produce sales invoices in the [Process pro forma invoices (PM506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/process-pro-forma-invoices-pm506000/) window. The pro forma invoices of a project can be released according to the following rules: + The pro forma invoices can be released only one by one, starting from the earliest one, on the **Invoices** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. The only exception is when multiple pro forma invoices segregated by invoice group have been generated during a single iteration of the invoicing process; in this case, the pro forma invoices can be released in any order. + A pro forma invoice can be released only after the sales invoice of the preceding pro forma invoice has been released. If the **Detail total** of a pro forma invoice is negative in the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window (for example, if you have added a negative adjustment line in an amount greater than the total amount of invoiceable lines), the system creates a sales credit note when the pro forma invoice is released. As a result of the release of the sales invoice, the general ledger transactions are recorded, and the revenue budget of the corresponding project is changed as follows on **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window: + The **Actual quantity** of the corresponding revenue budget line is increased by the line quantity of the released sales invoice if **Task and item** is the **Revenue budget level** of the project; otherwise, the **Actual quantity** is zero. + The **Actual amount** of the corresponding revenue budget line is increased by the line amount of the released sales invoice. + The **Draft invoices amount** of the corresponding revenue budget line is decreased by the line amount of the released sales invoice. The document details of an unreleased customer ledger document that originates from a pro forma invoice are displayed in read-only mode in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. To make a correction to the customer ledger document, you need to delete this document and start over from the pro forma invoice. In the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window, you can also navigate directly to the [Pro forma invoices (PM307000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000/) window by using the **View pro forma** menu command and view the pro forma invoice from which the current customer ledger document originates. This menu command becomes available on the **Inquiries** menu if the invoice being viewed has originated from a pro forma invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About templates for projects and tasks /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-templates-for-projects-and-tasks page In Visma Net, you can create project templates from scratch by adding every detail that you think will be required for a typical project of specific type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About templates for projects and tasks In Visma Net, you can create project templates from scratch by adding every detail that you think will be required for a typical project of specific type. In Visma Net, you can create project templates from scratch by adding every detail that you think will be required for a typical project of specific type. Alternatively, you can create a template based on an existing project which you think is a typical representation of projects of specific type. When you create projects based on the templates, you can change any settings for particular projects; templates are used only to provide the default settings. ## Templates created from existing projects + You can create a template based on an existing project. + In the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, select a project that is a typical project of specific type and click **Create template** from the **Actions** menu. + A template will be created with all the tasks that were included in the project. + You can modify the created template as you want. You can delete some of the tasks and add new tasks. ## Templates from scratch You can create project templates from scratch by using the [Project templates (PM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000/) window. When you create a project template, you can specify as many settings as you want, including the following: General settings : The broad information about the projects, including the default account and subaccount, default accrual account and subaccounts, and invoicing period. In the **Status** field, you can specify whether the specific project template is available for creating new projects. You can create projects only by using project templates with the **Active** status. Visibility settings : The list of the workspaces where the projects based on this template will be visible. Template tasks : The tasks to be included in the projects based on this template. Tasks for the project template can be added by using the [Project template tasks (PM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-template-tasks-pm208010/) window. List of employees : The employees who will work on the projects and the project manager who will be monitoring projects of the type. You also specify labour items and hourly rates for employees working on this project. Also, you can specify whether only the listed employees can work for the project. ## Template tasks and common tasks A project template may include tasks that are actually templates of tasks that can be included in projects based on the template. You can add task templates to the project template. You add the tasks to the project template and specify the settings for these tasks by using the [Project template tasks (PM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-template-tasks-pm208010/) window. When you create a new template task, you can specify whether it is automatically included in all projects based on the project template. Template task settings include the following: General settings : are overall information about the task, including approver, VAT category, default subaccount, and invoicing period. The general settings also include **Visibility settings**, the list of the workspaces in which this project task must be visible. You can make tasks visible only in the workspaces in which the parent project is visible; the scope for the task cannot be wider than the scope for the project. Recurring invoicing : can be used to implement the flat-price scenario with recurring payments when your future project uses flat rates for services or products you provide to your customer regularly. For more information about recurring invoicing, see: [About project invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing/) When you create a new project based on a project template, you can add to the new project any of the tasks associated with this project template and any of the existing common tasks. Common tasks are also templates of tasks, but they are not linked to any specific project template and, as such, can be added to any new or existing project. You can create common tasks with the help of the [Common tasks (PM208030)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/common-tasks-pm208030/) window. Generally, you provide the same types of settings for common tasks as for the template tasks: general, budget, and recurring invoicing settings.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About change orders /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-change-orders page You can use the change order functionality to control changes to a project’s budgeted and committed values and control the profitability of every change initiated by a customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About change orders You can use the change order functionality to control changes to a project’s budgeted and committed values and control the profitability of every change initiated by a customer. You can use the change order functionality to control changes to a project’s budgeted and committed values and control the profitability of every change initiated by a customer. A change order is a document for profitability analysis and an audit trial of changes to the project revenue budget, commitments, and budgeted costs. Change orders do not alter the original figures of a project directly; they are tracked separately from the original figures for analysis. With the help of change orders, you can do the following: + Record changes to the project revenue budget, cost budgets, and commitments. + Review the list of change orders related to a project on the **Change orders** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + See the changes for each purchase order as well as the original and committed values in the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window. + See the list of change orders that affect the purchase order on the **Change orders** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. + See the profitability of every change of the project budget initiated by the customer. Change orders are available when the **Change orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Change orders are managed in the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window.

Related pages

Windows

 About account groups /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-account-groups page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About account groups + An **account group** is an entity in Visma Net that you can define by using the [Account groups (PM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000/) window and map to a subset of General ledger accounts. + Account groups are used to track the project budget and balances. Because they are mapped to general ledger accounts, account groups allow for the transfer of project-related financial information between the General ledger and Project accounting workspaces. For information about how to create an account group, see [Create an account group](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-an-account-group/). ## Account group IDs To configure the IDs of account groups in Visma Net, you use the **ACCGROUP** segmented key in the [Segment keys (CS202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/segment-keys-cs202000/) window. + By default, this segmented key specifies that the account group ID is an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters. + You can divide account group IDs into segments with specific values. + In most cases, you do not need to change the default configuration of the **ACCGROUP** key. ## Types of account groups An account group can be one of the following types: **Asset**, **Liability**, **Expense**, or **Income**. It can be mapped to specific general ledger accounts of only certain types. You can use account groups of the **Off-balance** type to collect and track project statistics and other information that is not finance-related. For example, you can create an account group of the **Off-balance** type to record all hours spent by employees on a given project. You may want to know the total number of hours worked, but you do not want to post those numbers to the General ledger. ## Account groups and the general ledger You can create account groups to be used in the Projects module by using the [Account groups (PM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000/) window. Before defining account groups, identify the accounts that will be used for project-related transactions. Exclude customer ledger accounts and supplier ledger accounts. Use the following rules to create account groups: + Any single account group may include one or more general ledger accounts; however, you cannot map any general ledger account to more than one account group. + An account group should include accounts of only certain types (for instance, an account group of the **Income** type can include only income and expense accounts). + When you map the accounts to account groups, consider the invoicing and allocation rules. For invoicing and allocation, if the transactions of two accounts should be processed differently, these two accounts should be included in different account groups. If the transactions usually use the same rate, consider including their accounts in one group. + Consider whether you need the **Off-balance** account groups that are not linked to general ledger accounts and that can hold amounts not posted to the General ledger. By using account groups, you can view specific balances by project. For example: The **EXPENSE** account group was created for customisation projects and includes the following accounts: + 4010 Travel expenses + 4030 Accommodation + 4050 Car rent + 4113 Office supplies + 4115 Miscellaneous expenses Employees will record their expenses related to the project to the appropriate general ledger accounts. The project manager can view the project's expenses as the balance of the **EXPENSE** account group, which is the total of all expenses recorded to all the expense accounts included in the **EXPENSE** account group. ## Account-task mapping for automatically added transactions When creating a document, you must specify a project task for each applicable transaction. However, automatically added transactions, such as freight transactions for sales invoices, do not have a project task specified, leading to errors. To resolve this issue, provide account-task mapping for automatically added transactions using the **Account-task mapping** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. If multiple similar projects require the same mapping, define the rules using the [Project templates (PM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000/) window. ## Attributes for account groups You can create attributes in the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window to + Store additional properties of account groups that can be used in invoicing and in allocations. + Specify which of the attributes can be assigned to account groups in the [Account groups (PM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create an account group /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-an-account-group section Before defining account groups, identify the accounts that will be used for project-related transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an account group Before defining account groups, identify the accounts that will be used for project-related transactions. Before defining account groups, identify the accounts that will be used for project-related transactions. You should exclude customer ledger accounts (accounts debited by project invoicing) and supplier ledger accounts (accounts credited by supplier invoices). 1. Go to the [Account groups (PM201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Account group ID** field, enter an ID for the account group you want to create. You can use up to 10 characters, both letters and numbers. It must comply with the ACCGROUP segmented key. 1. In the **Type** field, select the account type of the account group. The type of group should be the same as the type of general ledger accounts included in the group. An off-balance account group cannot include any general ledger account. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a short description of the account group. 1. On the **Accounts** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Account** field, select an account. 1. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add more accounts to the account group. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create a project template task /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-project-template-task section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a project template task 1. Go to the [Project templates (PM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Template ID** field, select the template you want to create a task for. 1. In the **Task ID** field, enter an ID for the new template task. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a short description for your task. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. In the **Invoicing option** field, click the drop down and choose between: + By invoice period + On task completion + On project completion 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Use the other tabs to customise your new project template further.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a project /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-project section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a project 1. Go to the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. 1. If necessary, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to empty the fields and prepare the window for a new project. 1. In the **Project ID** field, the system displays <NEW>. The ID will automatically be assigned to the project when you save it. The project is automatically set to **On hold** and the status is **In planning**. 1. In the **Customer** field, if this is a customer-related project, select the customer you want to relate this project to. If you are creating an internal project, skip this field. 1. In the **Description** field, give a description of your project. This field is mandatory. 1. On the **General settings** tab, fill in the mandatory details, which is the project's start date, and for some types of project, the default subaccount. Fill in any other details you need.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a project task /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-project-task section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a project task 1. Go to the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. 1. If necessary, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to empty the fields and prepare the window for a new project task. 1. In the **Project ID** field, click to select the project you want to create a task for. 1. In the **Task ID** field, enter an ID for the task you want to create. This ID can be a ten-character string of letters and numbers. 1. Depending on the project ID you select, the **Task ID** field and other following fields in this window may be filled in automatically. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the project task. 1. Fill in the relevant fields on the **Summary** tab. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > A project task automatically gets the status **In planning**. When the project is started, it changes to **Active**, and when it is finished, it changes to **Completed**. If you want to cancel a task, select the status **Cancelled**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Save a project as a template /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/save-a-project-as-a-template section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Save a project as a template 1. Go to the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. 1. [Create a project](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-project/) or select the one in the **Project ID** field that you want to use as a template. 1. Click the **Actions** button and select **Create template**. 1. The **Project templates** window is displayed. 1. Modify any of the settings for your new project template, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create fixed-price projects /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-fixed-price-projects section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create fixed-price projects 1. Create a project as in [Create a project](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-project/). 1. In the **Invoicing settings** section, set the **Allocation rule** to **Fixed price, percent complete**. 1. Set the **Invoicing rule** to **Standard invoicing rule**. 1. On the **Task** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a task called **Contract price**. Set the account group to **Revenue**. See [Create a project task.](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-project-task/) 1. Select the task line you created and click the **View task** button. The [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window is displayed. 1. In the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window, go to the **Budget** tab. 1. In the **Budget** column, enter the contract amount. For a project task of the labour category, select the **Production** check box. This is to measure the percentage that is complete on the amount of hours registered on a project, compared to the budget. If you cannot see the **Production** column in the table, click ![icon-adjust-table](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-adjust-table.png) in the top left corner of the table and select the column header there. 1. On the **General settings** tab, set **Completion calculation method** to **Budgeted quantity** or **Budgeted amount**, so that the system will automatically calculate the percentage that is complete when a task is completed. You can also set this to **Manual**, which means that you have to enter the percentage manually per task. If you do that, update this percentage before the allocation process. The system uses this percentage to calculate earned revenue. You can also create a separate task for the contract amount and use this task to set the completion percentage (manually). This gives you the possibility to restrict the visibility of this task in other modules. 1. When you have registered the tasks you need, and given them all a budget, set the **Status** for each task line to **Active**. 1. Then set the **Status** for the project to **Active** and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create project attributes /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-project-attributes section To define new attributes, start by creating the attribute in the Attributes (CS205000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create project attributes To define new attributes, start by creating the attribute in the Attributes (CS205000) window. For more information: [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/). 1. Go to the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window. 1. In the **Name** field, select the entity type for which you want to add a new attribute. 1. To add a new attribute for the entity, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Attribute ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an attribute ID. 1. Optional: In the **Sort order** field, you can define the position of the attribute in the list of attributes available for the entity type. Specify 1 for the first attribute you want to be listed, 2 for the second, and so on. 1. Optional: Select the **Required** check box if you want to make it mandatory to enter a value for this attribute in the data entry window that is connected to this attribute. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > You can edit existing attributes directly from this window: click the ID for the attribute you want to edit in **Attribute ID** column, and make your changes in the pop-up window that opens.

Related pages

Windows

 Create a common task /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-common-task section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a common task 1. Go to the [Common tasks (PM208030)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/common-tasks-pm208030/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Task ID** field, enter an ID for the common task you want to create. This can be a ten-character string of letters and numbers. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the common task. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Rate table** field, select a rate table. 1. Select an **Invoicing option**. 1. Optional: When you add a common task, the settings for the **Invoicing rule** and **Allocation rule** will be inherited from the project settings. It is not necessary to set different rules, but if you do, the project settings will be overruled. 1. Optional: Fill in any other information you want to specify, on the other tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Windows

 Create a batch of project transactions /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/create-a-batch-of-project-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a batch of project transactions 1. Go to the [Project transactions (PM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-pm304000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Workspace** field, select the workspace to which the project you want to create a batch of transactions for belongs. The **Ref. number** field is filled in automatically when you save. 1. In the **Description** field, add a description for the batch of project transactions. 1. In the table, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Select the **Project**, **Project task**, **Account group**, and the **Amount**. 1. Optional: Fill in the other columns. 1. Optional: Edit the **date** and the **period**. > [!NOTE] > The system automatically displays the current date and period. 1. Repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7, to add more project transaction to the batch. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), or **Release**. The latter will immediately release the batch, and then save it. If you want to add information or a project to an existing batch: Start with step 2 and select the batch you want to edit.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Register expenses on a project /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/register-expenses-on-a-project section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Register expenses on a project 1. Go to the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to open a window where you can add a new expense receipt. 1. Fill out the following information: **Expense item**, **Description**, **Amount**, **Invoiceable**, **Project**, **Project task** 1. Click **Save and close**. 1. You en return to the **Expense receipts** window where you can see your receipt. 1. Click **Submit all**. The **Expense claim** window is displayed. 1. On the **Expense claim details** tab, you see the receipt you just created. If necessary, you can make corrections in the **Quantity** or **Unit cost** columns. Remember to save your changes. 1. Click the **Actions** button and select **Submit**. ## Correct and expense claim If you want to correct an expense claim, you must insert a line item with the same information as the original item from the previous expense claim, but with a negative quantity. Then, you insert a new line for the correction.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release transactions /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/release-transactions section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release transactions 1. Go to the [Release transactions (PM501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/release-transactions-pm501000/) window. 1. If you want to release all available transactions in the list, click **Release all**. 1. If you want to release only selected transactions, select the check box next to the transactions you want to release and click **Release**. Once you have released the transactions, their statuses change to **Open** and you see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) icon. If you do not want to post transactions when you release them, go to the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window, and deselect the **Automatically post on release** check box.

Related pages

Windows

 View project transactions in Project transactions - overview /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/view-project-transactions-in-project-transactions-overview page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View project transactions in Project transactions - overview 1. Go to the [Project transactions - overview (PM401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-overview-pm401000/) window 1. In the **Project** field, select the ID of the project of the transactions you want to view. The table list includes two types of transactions associated with the project: + Transactions that have not yet been released in the Projects module. + Transactions that have been released in all modules.

Related pages

Windows

 Manage project budgets /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage project budgets About project budgets /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets/about-project-budgets page A project budget is an estimate of expenses or revenues for a project or project task. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About project budgets A project budget is an estimate of expenses or revenues for a project or project task. A project budget is an estimate of expenses or revenues for a project or project task. In Visma Net, a budget can be defined, updated, and tracked for only a project task; the budget for a project holds the totals for all the project tasks included in the project. ## Budget planning You plan a project budget before any project transactions occur. For information about the project life cycle, see: [About the project life cycle](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-the-project-life-cycle/) On the **Budget** tab of the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window, you can add, revise, and delete budget lines for any project task that has the **In planning** status. A project task can have multiple budget lines. Each budget line has the following: + An account group, which determines the category of the expenditure or revenue that you expect to incur during the project execution. + A particular item (that is, a resource) needed to complete the task. You can select an item from the list of items associated with the accounts of the specified account group. However, if you want the budget line to include the budget for all transactions associated with the selected account group that are not linked to any particular item, you can select **<OTHER>** in the **Item ID** column for the particular budget line. Other information that you can specify in a budget line includes the budgeted quantity of the selected item, the rate, and the total budgeted amount, which is calculated automatically as the budgeted quantity multiplied by rate if you have not specified a value manually. You can modify the data in a budget line until you change the status of the project task to **Active**; after that, you can specify only a revised amount and quantity in the budget line. The system allows the modification of original budgeted totals for tasks with all statuses (not just **In planning** ), so you need to be careful about how you manage project budgets. (For instance: You may want to restrict access to the project budget data by configuring a restriction group in the Row-level security workspace so that only authorised employees can modify budget lines. In Visma Net, you can also use other windows, in addition to the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window, to enter, track, or revise a project budget. The windows, which include the same budget data but a different level of detail, include the following: + [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window: On the **Balances** tab of this window, the most general information about project budgets is displayed. The information, which contains the details of all the project-related tasks regardless of their status, is broken down into budget lines by account group. On this tab, you can view only the original budgeted amounts, the revised budgets, and the actual budgets calculated based on the project-related transactions that involve the specified account group; you cannot add, delete, or modify budget lines by using this window. + In the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) and the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) windows, you can use the **Auto-budget** action to automatically calculate an estimate of future revenue that will be added as a separate budget line for an account group with the **Income** type. For the calculation to be accurate, the project budget for the expenses, the involved account groups, and the allocation rules must be properly configured. + If you want to track the costs of the budget planning activities, you can add an employee task to the related project or project task by using the **Activity history** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) or the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window, respectively. However, transactions generated for a completed task cannot be released until the project gets the **Active** status. + In some cases (for instance, if project data has been modified through external tools or import scenarios), you may need to recalculate the project balances to bring them in line with the underlying transactions. You use the [Validate project balances (PM504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/validate-project-balances-pm504000/) window for recalculating the balances for the selected projects. ## Budget tracking For each active project or project task, you can review the budget at any time and decide whether you need to revise it or to adjust expenditures. For tracking a budget, you can use any of the following windows, depending on the level of detail at which you want to view the budget information: [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/), or [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/). Also, you can run the [Project balance (PM40102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-balance-pm40102s/) report, which shows the balances of all projects that are active during the selected financial period. In Visma Net, account groups are used for aggregation of the information related to project budgets. An account group includes general ledger accounts of a particular type to which project-related transactions are posted. As the project progresses, actual amounts are calculated for each budget line based on the posted transactions; you can track the actual amounts and compare them to the budgeted amounts when reviewing the budget. Because there is no way to assign a purchase invoice line for a landed cost to any project task, the purchase price variance amount calculated as the difference between the landed cost specified in the purchase receipt and the landed cost specified in the purchase invoice is not reflected in the project expenses. Also, you can track the actual quantities of the items included in the budget. An actual quantity is calculated automatically if the following conditions are met: + The budget was specified for the project or project task before any project-related transaction occurred. + Units of measure were specified for the items before the project was activated. + The same unit of measure is used for all items that were used in the transactions posted to the accounts included in a particular account group. + The transactions have been released and posted. ## Budget revision In some cases you may want to revise the budget. The original budgeted amounts and quantities should always remain unchanged so that you can later analyse the accuracy of your original estimates. You enter a revised amount or revised quantity for each budget line in a separate column labelled **Revised amount** or **Revised qty**. The actual progress of the task, which is displayed in the **Performance** column on the **Budget** tab of the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window, is calculated as a ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the actual amount to the revised budget amount. Also, the system uses the revised values for calculation of the task completion percentage if **Budgeted quantity** or **Budgeted amount** is selected for the task in the **Completion calculation method**field on the **General settings** tab of the [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/) window. For more information about how the task completion percentage is calculated, see: [About the calculation of task completion percentage](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-the-calculation-of-task-completion-percentage/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Validate project balances /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets/validate-project-balances section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate project balances 1. Go to the [Validate project balances (PM504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/validate-project-balances-pm504000/) window. 1. Click **Validate all** to validate the balances of all projects shown in this window. 1. To only validate the balances of particular projects, select the check boxes next to those projects. 1. Click **Validate**. When the processing is finished, you will see a ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) next to the successfully validated balances.

Related pages

Windows

 View project balances and update project tasks /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets/view-project-balances-and-update-project-tasks section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View project balances and update project tasks 1. Go to the [Project budget (PM309000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-budget-pm309000/) window. 1. In the **Account group** field, select the account group whose balance you want to view. 1. In the **Project** field, select the project whose balance you want to view. The **Project balance** tab shows any existing tasks in the project's budget. 1. If you wan to add a project task, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and fill in the fields. 1. If you want to delete a project task, place the cursor on the line you want to delete and click ![icon-delete-cross](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-delete-cross.png). 1. Optional: Click **View details** to view the details of the selected project task line. The **Project budget by period** dialog box is displayed. 1. Optional: Click **View transactions** to view the transactions associated with the selected task. The **Project transactions - overview** dialog box is displayed, where you can see the project's transactions. You can also filter transactions by **item ID**, **employee**, and **date**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 View project balance /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets/view-project-balance page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View project balance 1. Go tot he [Project balance (PM621000) report](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-balance-pm621000/) window. 1. If you do not select any options in the top part of the window, except for a project status, the table displays all the balances of the projects created in your company with the selected status. 1. To view more specific details on a project, select it in the table part and click **View project** in the top part to open it in the **Project** pop-up window.

Related pages

Windows

 Change orders /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/change-orders section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change orders About change order management /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/change-orders/about-change-order-management page Visma Net provides the change order functionality, which you can use to control changes to project’s budgeted and committed values and control the profitability of every change initiated by a customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About change order management Visma Net provides the change order functionality, which you can use to control changes to project’s budgeted and committed values and control the profitability of every change initiated by a customer. A change order is a document for profitability analysis and an audit trial of changes to the project revenue budget, commitments, and budgeted costs. Change orders do not alter the original figures of a project directly; they are tracked separately from the original figures for analysis. Change orders provide the following functionalities: + The ability to record changes to the project revenue budget, cost budgets, and commitments. + The ability to review the list of change orders related to a project on the **Change orders** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. + The ability to see in the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window the changes for each purchase order as well as the original and committed values. + The ability to see on the **Change orders** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window the list of change orders that affect the purchase order. + The ability to see the profitability of every change of the project budget initiated by the customer. The functionality of change orders is available only if the **Change orders** feature is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. To enable the change order workflow for a project, which enables the creation of change orders, select the **Change order workflow** check box on the **Summary** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window and save changes to the project. About change order creation /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/change-orders/about-change-order-creation page You can create a new change order either directly in the Change orders (PM308000) window or in the Projects (PM301000) window, if you click Create change order on the window toolbar or click Create change order on the table toolbar of the Change orders tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About change order creation You can create a new change order either directly in the Change orders (PM308000) window or in the Projects (PM301000) window, if you click Create change order on the window toolbar or click Create change order on the table toolbar of the Change orders tab. For more information: [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/), [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/). In a change order with the **On hold** status, you can enter the necessary amendments to the project budget and commitments. On the **Revenue budget** and **Cost budget** tabs the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window, when you edit a change order line, you can see the original budgeted amount in the **Original budgeted amount** column; the released and draft change order amounts in the **Previously approved CO amount** and **Other draft CO amount** columns, respectively; and the revised budgeted amount in the **Revised budgeted amount** column. You can do any of the following in the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window: On the **Revenue budget** and **Cost budget** tabs: + Create a new budget line with a positive amount + Create a new budget line with a negative amount + Add an existing budget line + Make a deduction from an existing budget line > [!NOTE] > You can add an existing budget line to be modified to the change order in the **Select budget lines** dialog box if you click **Select budget lines** on the table toolbar. On the **Commitments** tab: + Create a new purchase order with a new line + Add a new line to an existing purchase order + Add to an existing purchase order line + Make a deduction from an existing purchase order line > [!NOTE] > You can add an existing commitment to be modified to the change order in the **Select commitments** dialog box if you click **Select commitments** on the table toolbar. The deduction from the amount and quantity of a purchase order line cannot be greater than the received qty. and received amount of the line. A change order document has the following reference numbers in the top part of the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window: **Reference no.:** The number of the change order in the system. This number is assigned to each change order based on the CHANGEORD number series, which is selected in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window and can be reviewed or modified in the [Number series (CS201010)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/number-series-cs201010/) window. **Revenue change no.:** The number of the change order that can affect the revenue within the applicable project. Each project has its own number series of such change orders. The revenue change no. is an integer that the system assigns sequentially: 0001 for the first change order for the project, 0002 for the second, 0003 for the third, and so on. The last assigned number for the project is shown in the **Last revenue change no.** field in the **Project properties** area of the **Summary** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. You can manually change the revenue change no. of particular change order. (Duplicate numbers within a project are not allowed, however.) If you change the revenue change no. of a change order, you should respectively change the last revenue change no. of the corresponding project so that the system continues to assign these numbers correctly. For the changes orders that cannot affect the project revenue and the reversing change orders, the revenue change no. is read-only and equal to N/A. For the reversed change orders, you can reuse the revenue change no or assign the revenue change no. of a reversed change order to a new change order. This will not lead to an error of duplicated numbers because the reversed change order does not affect the project revenue anymore. If you reuse the revenue change no. of a reversed change order, you should respectively change the last revenue change no. of the corresponding project in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window so that the system continues to assign these numbers correctly. **External reference no.:** The external reference number. This number, which is entered manually, can be the identifier required by the customer or the number from an external system integrated with Visma Net. A change order can also have a detailed description, which you can enter on the **Detailed description** tab of the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window. About change order release /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/change-orders/about-change-order-release page When a change order is released, the balances and commitments of the corresponding project are updated as follows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About change order release When a change order is released, the balances and commitments of the corresponding project are updated as follows: + If the project has a revenue budget line with the same project task, cost code, or stock item, and account group as a revenue budget line of the change order, the system updates the following columns of the revenue budget line of the project on the **Revenue budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window: + Budgeted CO quantity = The total quantity of released change orders Budgeted CO amount = The total amount of released change orders + Revised budgeted quantity = Original budgeted quantity + Budgeted CO quantity + Revised budgeted amount = Original budgeted amount + Budgeted CO amount + Pending invoice amount = Completed (%) \* Revised budgeted amount – Actual amount – Draft invoices amount > [!NOTE] > As the result of the update, this amount can take rational values, including negative ones. + If the project does not have a revenue budget line with the same project task, cost code or inventory item, and account group as a revenue budget line of the change order, the system creates a new revenue budget line for the project based on the revenue budget line of the change order. + If the project has a cost budget line with the same project task, cost code or inventory item, and account group as a cost budget line of the change order, the system updates the following columns of the cost budget line of the project on the **Cost budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window: + Budgeted CO quantity = The total quantity of released change orders + Budgeted CO amount = The total amount of released change orders + Revised budgeted quantity = Original budgeted quantity + Budgeted CO quantity + Revised budgeted amount = Original budgeted amount + Budgeted CO amount If a commitment line of the change order has the **Update** status, the system updates the following values of the corresponding purchase order line on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window based on the commitment line of the change order: + Order qty. = Original order qty. of the purchase order line + Quantity of the commitment line of the change order + Open quantity = Order qty. – Qty. on receipts + Ext. cost = Original ext. cost of the purchase order line + Amount of the commitment line of the change order + Open amount = Ext. cost – Received amount + Requested date = Order date of the commitment line of the change order If a commitment line of the change order has the **New line** status, the system adds a new line with the following values to the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window for the corresponding purchase order based on the commitment line of the change order: + Order qty. = Quantity of the commitment line of the change order + Ext. cost = Amount of the commitment line of the change order + Requested date = Order date of the commitment line of the change order + The date of the created purchase order is the earliest order date of the commitment lines of the change order. + The requested date of each purchase order line is the order date of the commitment line of the change order. + The system generates the default description of the created purchase order by using the following formula: '''Description''' = 'Change Order#' + [PMChangeOrder.RefNbr]. > [!NOTE] > A purchase order that originates from a change order cannot be edited or removed and can be only canceled, completed, or altered by yet another change order. For each purchase order line updated by a change order, the system updates the corresponding project commitment the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window. For each purchase order line created from a change order, the system creates a new project commitment. In these commitments, the values are updated as follows: + Revised committed quantity = Order qty. of the purchase order line + Revised committed amount = Ext. cost of the purchase order line + Committed CO quantity = Revised committed quantity – Original committed quantity + Committed CO amount = Revised committed amount – Original committed amount + Committed open amount = Open amount of the purchase order line + If any commitment lines of the change order have the **New document** status, the system groups these lines by vendor and creates a new purchase order the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window for each supplier based on the commitment lines of the change order as follows: + For each purchase order line updated by a change order, the system updates the corresponding project commitment the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window. For each purchase order line created from a change order, the system creates a new project commitment. In these commitments, the values are updated as follows: + If the project has a cost budget line with the same project task, cost code or stock item, and account group as an updated or newly created commitment, the system updates the cost budget line of the project on the **Cost budget** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. Otherwise, the system creates a new cost budget line for the project based on the commitment. + If the project does not have a cost budget line with the same project task, cost code or stock item, and account group as a cost budget line of the change order, the system creates a new cost budget line for the project based on the cost budget line of the change order. > [!NOTE] > After a change order has been released, it can no longer be changed, only reversed in the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window by clicking the **Reverse** action on the window toolbar. Project accounting windows /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project accounting windows Account groups (PM201000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/account-groups-pm201000 page In this window, you can define account groups, which you can use to track the budget, expenses, and revenues of projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Account groups (PM201000) In this window, you can define account groups, which you can use to track the budget, expenses, and revenues of projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define account groups, which you can use to track the budget, expenses, and revenues of projects. An account group of a particular type is mapped to specific general ledger accounts of only certain types or an account group of the **Asset** or **Liability** type may include only asset and liability accounts and an account group of the **Income** or **Expense** type may include only income and expense accounts. You can also use this window to define account groups of the **Off-balance** type, which give you the ability to track statistical information for projects. For more information, see: [About account groups](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-projects/about-account-groups/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to add a new account group or to view the details of an existing group.
Element Description
Account group ID The unique (and automatically assigned) identifier of the account group.
Type

The type of the account group. You can select one of the following options:

Asset
The account group may include asset and liability accounts.
Liability
The account group may include liability and asset accounts.
Income
The account group may include income and expense accounts.
Expense
The account group may include expense and income accounts.
Off-balance
The account group is used to track statistical information.
Description The description of the account group.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account group is used in projects. If the check box is cleared, the account group is not available for selection in any project windows.
## The Accounts tab On this tab, you create a list of General ledger accounts to associate with the account group, unless the group is **Off-balance**.
Column Description
Account A General ledger account can only be associated with only one account group.
Type Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Account class The account class to which the account is assigned.
Description A description of the account. These descriptions are created in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.
Currency The currency of the account.
Default A check box that indicates (if selected) that the account is the default account for the account group.
## The Project attributes tab On this tab, it is only possible to add attributes that are defined with the account group type in the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window.
Column Description
Attribute The attribute name.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that this attribute is mandatory.
Value The value of the attribute for this account group.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Allocation rules (PM207500) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/allocation-rules-pm207500 section Your company can have such expenses as office rent or administrative expenses that are posted to the general ledger but not classified against projects and not presented in the project budget. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Allocation rules (PM207500) Your company can have such expenses as office rent or administrative expenses that are posted to the general ledger but not classified against projects and not presented in the project budget. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For a more accurate estimation of the project profitability, you can capture such expenses as the project overhead by **allocating** the project. To calculate the overhead for projects, you create an allocation rule. Using this allocation rule, the system creates allocation transactions based on the project transactions posted to a particular account group or specific groups. These allocation transactions post the calculated overhead amount to the specified account group. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify the settings for a new rule or select an existing rule to view or modify its details.
Element Description
Allocation rule The unique identifier of the rule.
Description The description of the allocation rule.
## The left pane In the left pane, you define the sequence of steps for the selected allocation rule. You then define the actual calculation rules and allocation settings for each step by using the tabs in the right pane.
Element Description
Step ID The identifier of the step in the allocation rule.
Description The description of the step.
## The Calculation rules tab For a step selected in the left pane, you can specify which transactions to use as the base for allocation and how to generate the resulting transactions.
Column Description
Allocation method

The method to be used for allocation. Select one of the following options:

Allocate transactions
The system calculates the amount to allocate by using the underlying transactions and their amounts. You use this option to implement a time and materials or cost-plus-project scenario in which the project total is calculated as a percentage of its costs.
Allocate budget
The system calculates the amount to allocate as a percentage of the task budget (other amounts are ignored and not used in calculations). You use this option to implement a fixed-price project scenario in which the project total is predefined by a budget.
Create allocation transaction

If you select this check box, the system will create the allocation transactions resulting from this step.

If you do not select this check box, the resulting transactions will be placed on a clipboard until used by another allocation step.
### The Selection criteria section
Element Description
Select transactions

The way the system should select the transactions to be used as the basis for generating allocation transactions in this step. Select one of the following options:

Not allocated transactions
The step will be applied to original project-related transactions that were not allocated. If you select this option, the fields Account group from and Account group to become available.
From previous allocation steps
The step will be applied to the transactions generated for previous steps and placed on the clipboard. If you select this option, the fields Range start and Range end become available.
Account group From

The account group that starts the range of account groups whose transactions are involved in this allocation step. (The account groups are ordered alphabetically.)

This field is only available if the From previous allocation steps option in the Transaction options section is selected.
Range start

The starting step that opens the range of previous steps,so that their allocation transactions can be used by the current step.

This field is only available if, under the Select transactions, you have selected the option From previous allocation steps.
Account group To

The account group that ends the range of account groups involved in this allocation step. (The groups are ordered alphabetically.)

This field is only available if, under the Select transactions, you have selected the option From previous allocation steps.
Range end

The step to end the range of previous steps whose allocation transactions will be used by the current step.

This field is only available if, under the Select transactions, you have selected the option From previous allocation steps.
### Rate settings section
Element Description
Rate type The rate type to be used for this step of the allocation rule.
If @Rate is not defined

The default action you want the system to perform if the value for the @Rate has not been defined after execution of the step.

Select one of the following options:

Set @Rate to 1
To set the @Rate to 1.
Set @Rate to 0
To set the @Rate to 0.
Raise error
To show the error message and stop processing.
Do not allocate
To skip the generation of the allocation transactions.
### The Calculation settings section
Element Description
Quantity formula

The formula you want to use to calculate the quantity for allocation transactions. Click icon-select to open the window.

You can also use other transaction parameters to calculate the quantity. The resulting value is normally used to track task or project completion or the total quantity for the task or project.
Formula invoiceable qty.

The formula for calculating the invoiceable quantity for allocation transactions. Click icon-select to open the window.

You can also use any other transaction parameters to calculate the invoiceable quantity. Generally, you use this field to define the quantity for which you will charge the customer during invoicing.
Amount formula

The formula for calculating the amount of allocation transactions. Click icon-select to open the window.

You can also use any other transaction parameters to calculate the amount. The resulting value is normally used to track task or project completion or the amount for the task or project.
Description formula

The formula you can use to generate the descriptions for allocation transactions. Click icon-select to open the window.

If you use this step of the allocation rule to accumulate invoiceable amounts, the text the formula generates will be displayed on the invoice.
## The Allocation settings tab On this tab, for the step selected in the left pane, you can specify how to allocate the project amounts to specific accounts and account groups. ### The Transaction options section
Element Description
Post transaction to General ledger

If you select this check box,the allocation transactions will be posted to the general ledger.

If you do not select this check box, the transactions are not posted to the general ledger. Instead, they are only used to track analytical or statistical information for projects, and you can only specify account groups (not accounts) in the Debit transaction and Credit transaction sections.
Reverse allocation

Indicates when the allocation transactions should be reversed. Select one of the following options:

On invoice release
The allocation transaction is reversed immediately after the release of the invoice generated on the basis of this allocation transaction.
On project invoicing
The allocation transaction is reversed immediately after the invoice is generated on the basis of this allocation transaction.
Never
The allocation transaction is never reversed.
Date source

Indicates how the date for the allocation transactions is defined. The following options are available:

Original transaction
Take the date from the original transaction.
Allocation date
Use the date of the allocation.
Create transaction with zero qty.

If you select this check box,the system will create the allocation transaction, even if it has a quantity of zero. As a result, such transactions will be available in the invoice after you run invoicing.

If you do not select this check box, the system will not create transactions with zero quantities.
Create transaction with zero amount

If you select this check box,the system will create the allocation transaction, even if it has an amount of zero. As a result, such transactions will be available in the invoice after you run invoicing.

If you do not select this check box, the system will not create transactions with zero amounts.
Create non-invoiceable transaction

If you select this check box,the system will create the allocation transaction, even if it is not invoiceable. As a result, such transactions will be available in the invoice after you run invoicing.

If you do not select this check box, the system will not create transactions that are not invoiceable.
Can be used as source in another allocation When this is selected, you can use it as a source in another allocation.
### The Debit transaction section
Element Description
Project

Two fields that you can use to select the project for the allocation’s debit transactions.

In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the project specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can click icon-select to specify the project for the allocation’s debit transactions.
Task

Two fields that you can use to select the task for the allocation’s debit transactions.

In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the task specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can click icon-select to specify the task for the allocation’s debit transactions.
Account group

When the Post transaction to general ledger check box is selected for the current allocation step, you see two fields. If not, you see one.

In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the account group specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can click icon-select to specify the account group for the allocation’s debit transactions.

In the right field, you can (if the above mentioned check box is selected) select the account group for the allocation’s debit transactions.
Account origin

Two fields that you can use to select the account for the allocation’s debit transactions.

These fields are available only if you have selected the Post transaction to general ledger check box for the current allocation step. In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the account group specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can click icon-select to specify the account group for the allocation transaction. In the field to the right, you can only select an account that is included in an account group.
Credit source
To have the system generate an allocation transaction that debits the credit account of the underlying (source) transaction.
Subaccount

Two fields that you can use to select the subaccount for the allocation’s debit transactions.

Note

These fields are only available if the Post the transaction to the general ledger check box is selected for the current allocation step.

Use the left field to specify the subaccount mask to be used to generate subaccounts for this step. To specify the mask, for each segment, select the source of segment values, which can be one of the following options:

A
The subaccount that is associated with the current allocation step and specified in the right field.
P
The default subaccount of the project.
S
The subaccount from the source transaction.
T
The default subaccount of the project task.
### The Credit transaction section
Element Description
Project

Two fields that you can use to select the project for the allocation’s credit transactions.

In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the project specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can select the project for the allocation’s credit transactions.
Task

Two fields that you can use to select the task for the allocation’s credit transactions.

In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the task specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can click icon-select to specify the task for the allocation’s credit transactions.
Account group

Two fields that you can use to select the account group for the allocation’s credit transactions.

These fields are only available if the Post transaction to general ledger check box is selected for the current allocation step.

In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the account group specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can click icon-select to specify the account group for the allocation’s credit transactions.
Replace
Do not use an account group.

In the right field, you can (if the above mentioned check box is selected) select the account group for the allocation’s credit transactions.
Account origin

Two fields that you can use to select the account for the allocation’s debit transactions.

These fields are available only if you have selected the Post transaction to general ledger check box for the current allocation step.

In the left field, choose one of the following options:

Use source
Use the account group specified in the original transaction.
Replace
Enables the field on the right, where you can click icon-select to specify the account group for the allocation transaction. In the field to the right, you can only select an account that is included in an account group.
Credit source
To have the system generate an allocation transaction that debits the credit account of the underlying (source) transaction.
Subaccount

Two fields that you can use to select the subaccount to be used for the allocation’s credit transactions.

These fields are available only if the Post transaction to General ledger check box is selected for the current allocation step.

Use the left field to specify the subaccount mask to be used to generate subaccounts for this step. To specify the mask, for each segment, select the source of segment values, which can be one of the following options:

A
The subaccount that is associated with the current allocation step and specified in the right text field
P
The default subaccount of the project
S
The subaccount from the source transaction
T
The default subaccount of the project task

Use the right field to select the subaccount if the A option is selected at least for one segment.
### The Aggregate transactions section
Element Description
The Aggregate transactions section

A set of check boxes that control how the system breaks the underlying transactions into groups when it generates the corresponding project transactions.

You can also group transactions by using multiple criteria.

For instance: If you apply grouping by employee and by item, Visma Net first breaks the underlying transactions by employee and then combines the transactions within the groups by stock items. The amount of each resulting transaction will be a sum of all transaction amounts in each subgroup.

By date
Groups the underlying transactions by date
By employee
Combines the underlying transactions by employee
By supplier
Combines the underlying transactions by supplier or customer
By item
Combines the underlying transactions by stock item.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Budget details (PMGI0010) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/budget-details-pmgi0010 page You use this window to view the budget details of all the projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Budget details (PMGI0010) You use this window to view the budget details of all the projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table The table shown on each filter tab contains the list of projects that match the criteria of the selected filter tab. The table on each tab has the following columns.
Element Description
Project ID

The unique ID for the project.

You can click the link to navigate to the Projects (PM301000) window and view the details of the selected project.
Description The description of the project.
Task ID The identifier of the task.
Item ID The item that is used in the revenue or cost budget line.
Account Group The account group of the revenue or cost budget line.
Type The type of the budget line, which has one of the following values: Asset, Expense, Liability, Income, or Off-balance.
Description The description of the revenue or cost budget line.
Budgeted quantity The budgeted quantity of the revenue or cost budget line.
UoM The unit of measure of the revenue or cost budget line.
Unit rate The price of the specified unit.
Budgeted amount The original budgeted amount of the revenue or cost budget line.
Revised quantity

The revised quantity if the budget quantity has been revised for the project after the initial budgeting.

By default, this quantity is equal to the Budgeted quantity value specified for the line.
Revised amount

The revised amount if the budget amount has been revised for the project after the initial budgeting.

By default, this quantity is equal to the Budgeted quantity value specified for the line.
Actual quantity The total quantity of the released project transactions that correspond to the budget line with the complex key of project, project task, account group, item ID, and cost code (if applicable).
Actual amount The total amount of the released project transactions that correspond to the budget line with the complex key of project, project task, account group, item ID, and cost code (if applicable).
Committed amount The total amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.
Committed open amount The total open amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, account group, item ID, and cost code (if applicable).
Committed invoiced amount The total invoiced amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, account group, item ID, and cost code (if applicable).
## The Table filter tabs Each of the default filter tabs listed below has a table whose records may be filtered by certain criteria.
Element Description
All records tab This tab lists all the existing project budget lines of any balance type ( Asset, Expense, Liability, Income, or Off-balance ).
Expenses tab This tab lists all the existing project budget lines of the Expense type.
Income tab This tab lists all the existing project budget lines of the Income type.

Related pages

Concepts

 Budget summary by account group (PMPV0010) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/budget-summary-by-account-group-pmpv0010 page You use this window to explore the particular amounts of project budgets provided by the Budget details (PMGI0010) generic inquiry. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Budget summary by account group (PMPV0010) You use this window to explore the particular amounts of project budgets provided by the Budget details (PMGI0010) generic inquiry. For more information: [Budget details (PMGI0010)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/budget-details-pmgi0010/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to explore the particular amounts of project budgets provided by the [Budget details (PMGI0010)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/budget-details-pmgi0010/) generic inquiry. To see the elements that you can add to or delete from your pivot table, click **Customise** at the top of the working area. The system navigates to the [Pivot tables (SM208010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/pivot-tables-sm208010/) window, where you can edit this specific pivot table or other pivot tables, if needed. ## The table The table displays the summarised data from the [Budget details (PMGI0010)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/budget-details-pmgi0010/) generic inquiry window. Please note that the language of the table columns is the language of the company template. Also, the content of the table depends on the customisation you have done.
Column Description
Project ID The unique identifier for the project.
Column Description
Type The type of the budget line, which has one of the following values: Asset, Expense, Liability, Income, or Off-balance.

Related pages

Concepts

 Change orders (PM3080PL) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm3080pl page In this window, you can select and open the change order you want to edit in the Change orders (PM308000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change orders (PM3080PL) In this window, you can select and open the change order you want to edit in the Change orders (PM308000) window. For more information: [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table columns The first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the change order, which the system automatically assigns.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

On hold
The user can edit or delete the change order with only this status but cannot release it.
Pending approval
The order is pending approval.
Open
The system assigns this status to the change order if the employee who was assigned to approve the change order has approved it. If no approval is configured for change orders, the system assigns this status to the change order immediately after a user clears the Hold check box. The user can release the change order or save it with the On hold status for further editing.
Closed
The change order has been released and cannot be edited.
Rejected
The change order has been rejected and cannot be edited.
Class ID The change order class of the order.
Customer name The name of the customer on the change order.
Customer no. The number of the customer on the change order.
Project ID The ID of the project connected with the change order.
Description The description of the project.
Revenue change no. The number of the change order that affect the project revenue within the project, which the system uses for printing. The revenue change number is an integer that the system assigns sequentially, starting from 1 and then 2, 3, and so on. The last assigned number for the change orders of the project is shown in the Last revenue change no. field in the Project properties section of the Summary tab of this window.
Description The description provided for the change order.
Change date The date on which the changes made with the change order should be recorded in the project balances.
Approval date The date that is communicated to the customer as the approval date of the agreed-upon changes.
Project no The number of the project associated with the change order. If the change order has at least one line on the Revenue budget, Cost budget, or Commitments tab, you cannot change the project for the change order.
Revenue budget change total The total amount of the changes of the change order to the revenue budget of the project.
Gross margin The difference between the Revenue budget change total and the Cost budget change total values.
Created on The creation date of the change order.
Display name The display name of the change order.
Last modified The date when the change order has been last modified.
Selected The check box you select to select the order for processing.
Change orders (PM308000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000 page You can use this window to view and modify a change order, as well as to add or delete an existing change order. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change orders (PM308000) You can use this window to view and modify a change order, as well as to add or delete an existing change order. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Release Releases the change order.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

Email change order
Sends the selected change order as an email.
Reverse
Invokes the creation of a new change order with lines that reverse the impact of the currently selected change order.

This action is available if the currently selected change order is released.
Reports Provides the Print change order menu command, which you click to navigate to the Change order (PM643000) report.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area to add a new change order or to select an existing change order and view its details.
Field Description
Ref. no The reference number of the change order, which the system automatically assigns.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

On hold
You can edit or delete the change order with only this status but cannot release it.
Open
The system assigns this status to the change order if the employee who was assigned to approve the change order has approved it. If no approval is configured for change orders, the system assigns this status to the change order immediately after a user clears the Hold check box. The user can release the change order or save it with the On Hold status for further editing.
Closed
The change order has been released and cannot be edited.
Rejected
The system assigns this status to the change order if the employee who was assigned to approve the change order has rejected it. The change order can be saved with the On hold status for further editing.
Pending approval
The change order has been taken off hold (that is, this status was assigned when the Hold check box was cleared for the change order). If Approval is activated, a change order with this status is visible to the employee who has been assigned to approve it. If the change order is approved, it is assigned the Open status; if the change order is rejected, its status changes to Rejected.The change order can be also saved with the On hold status for further editing.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the change order is a draft and thus has the On hold status.
Change date The date on which the changes made on the change order should be recorded in the project balances.
Approval date The date that has been communicated to the customer as the approval date of the agreed-upon changes.
Contract time change, days A positive or negative number of days that represents the delay of the contract and is used in reports.
Description The description provided for the change order.
Class The class of the change order, which is defined in the Change order classes (PM203000) window and provides default settings for the change order. If a change order class has been selected in the Default change order class field on General settings tab of the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window that class is inserted into this field by default when you create a new change order, but you can select another class.
Project The project associated with the change order. If the change order has at least one line on the Revenue budget, Cost budget, or Commitments tab, you cannot change the project for the change order.
Customer The customer associated with the project.
External reference no The external reference number of the change order.
Revenue change no.

The number of the change order that can affect the revenue within the project. That is, the change order class has the Revenue budget check box selected on the Details tab of the Change order classes (PM203000) window.

You can manually change the Revenue change no. (duplicate numbers within the project are not allowed, however). If you change this number for the change order, you should respectively change the last revenue change no. of the project in the Project properties section of the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window so that the system continues to assign these numbers correctly.

For the changes orders that cannot affect the project revenue and the reversing change orders, this number is read-only and equal to N/A.
Revenue budget change total The total amount of the changes of the change order to the revenue budget of the project, which is the total of the Amount column on the Revenue budget tab of the Change orders (PM308000) window.
Commitments change total The total amount of the changes of the change order to the commitments of the project, which is the total of the Amount in base currency column on the Commitments tab of the Change orders (PM308000) window.
Cost budget change total The total amount of the changes of the change order to the cost budget of the project, which is the total of the Amount column on the Cost budget tab of the Change orders (PM308000) window.
Gross margin amount The difference between the revenue budget change total and the cost budget change total values.
Gross margin % The system calculates this percentage by using the following formula: (Revenue budget change total – Cost budget change total ) / Revenue budget change total * 100.
## The Cost budget tab This tab lists all the changes that affect the cost budget of the project. Each line can modify an existing line of the cost budget or add a new one. ### The table toolbar ### The table columns
Element Description
Project task A task of the project. If you add a new line and the project has the default project task, this task is automatically populated in the column.
Item ID

The identifier of the item associated with the cost budget line of the project.

This column is shown if Task and item is selected as the Revenue budget level of the project on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
Cost code

The cost code associated with the cost budget line of the project. This column is shown if the Cost codes functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and Task and cost code is selected as the Cost budget level of the project

on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
Account group The income account group associated with the cost budget line of the project.
Description The description of the cost budget line that is associated with the project, project task, account group, and cost code or item.
Quantity The quantity of the change order line.
UoM

The unit of measure of the cost budget line.

This column is read-only for existing cost budget lines.
Unit rate The price of the specified unit of the cost budget line. This column is read-only for existing cost budget lines.
Amount The amount of the change order line in the base currency.
Original budgeted quantity

The original budgeted quantity of the cost budget line that is associated with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item.

This column is read-only.
Original budgeted amount

The original budgeted amount of the cost budget line that is associated with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item. The amount is displayed in the base currency.

This column is read-only.
Previously approved CO quantity

The total quantity of the released change orders that were created before the current one and that are associated with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item.

This column is read-only.
Previously approved CO amount

The total amount of the released change orders that were created before the current one and that are associated with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item. The amount is displayed in the base currency.

This column is read-only.
Revised budgeted quantity

The sum of the Original budgeted quantity and Quantity values.

This column is read-only.
Revised budgeted amount

The sum of the Original budgeted amount and Amount values. The amount is displayed in the base currency.

This column is read-only.
Revised committed quantity

The total revised quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, account group, and cost code or item.

This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Revised committed amount

The total revised amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, account group, and cost code or item. The amount is displayed in the base currency.

This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed received quantity

The total received quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed invoiced amount

The total invoiced quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed open quantity

The total open quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed invoiced amount

The total invoiced quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed CO quantity

The total quantity of the commitment lines of released change orders that were created before the current one and that are associated with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item.

This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed CO amount This column is read-only and is shown only if the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Actual quantity

The total amount of the commitment lines of released change orders that were created before the current one and that are associated with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item. The amount is displayed in the base currency.

The total quantity of the lines of the released customer invoices that refer to the cost budget line with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item.

This column is read-only.
Actual amount

The total amount of the lines of the released customer invoices that refer to the cost budget line with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item. The amount is displayed in the base currency.

This column is read-only.
Other draft CO amount

The total amount of the lines of the unreleased change orders (except for the current one) that refer to the cost budget line with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item. The amount is displayed in the base currency.

This column is read-only.
### The Select budget lines dialog box This dialog box, which opens when you click **Select budget lines** on the table toolbar, shows the list of cost budget lines of the project. In this dialog box, you can select specific cost budget lines or all the lines and add them to the change order.
Element Description
Included An unlabelled check box that you select to upload this cost budget line to the change order if you then click Add lines or Add lines and close.
Add lines Uploads the selected cost budget lines to the change order. The dialog box remains open.
Add lines and close Uploads the selected cost budget lines to the change order and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels your selections and closes the dialog box.
## The Commitments tab This tab lists all the changes that affect the commitments of the project. On each line you can modify an existing commitment or add a new one. ### The table toolbar
Select commitments Opens the Select commitments dialog box, which shows the list of purchase order lines associated with the corresponding project that you can add to the change order.
### The table columns
Element Description
Status

The status of the commitment line of the change order, which can be one of the following:

Update
The line updates an existing purchase order line associated with the project and project task.
New line
The line adds a new purchase order line associated with the project and project task to the selected purchase order.
New document
The line adds a new purchase order line associated with the project and project task to a new purchase order.

This column is read-only for an existing commitment.
Project task

A task of the project. If you add a new line and the project has the default project task, this task is automatically populated in the column.

This column is read-only for an existing commitment.
Item ID The identifier of the item associated with the commitment. This column is read-only for an existing commitment.
Cost code The cost code associated with the revenue budget line of the project. This column is shown if the Cost codes functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Description The description of the commitment that is associated with the project, project task, account group, and cost code or item.
Quantity The quantity of the commitment.
Description The description provided for the change order.
UoM

The unit of measure of the commitment.

This column is read-only for an existing commitment.
Unit cost

The price of the specified unit of the commitment in the currency of the purchase order.

This column is read-only for an existing commitment.
Amount The amount of the commitment in the currency of the purchase order.
Account

The expense account associated with the commitment.

This column is read-only for an existing commitment.
Supplier

The supplier associated with the commitment.

This column is read-only if the supplier is selected for the commitment line.
Purchase order no.

The reference number of the purchase order.

In this column, you can select any normal purchase order with the On hold, Pending printing, Pending email, or Open status that has at least one non-cancelled or non-completed line. If a supplier is selected for the line, you can select a purchase order associated with only the selected supplier.
Order date

The date of the commitment.

For an existing commitment, this is the date of the purchase order associated with the commitment.

For a commitment line with the New document status, this column is empty by default.

This column is read-only.
Currency

The currency of the purchase order associated with the commitment.

For a commitment line with the New document status, this is the default currency.

This column is read-only for an existing commitment.
Purchase order line no.

The number of the purchase order line associated with the commitment.

For a commitment line with the New line or New document status, this column is empty by default.
Draft invoices amount

The total amount of the lines of pro forma invoices that refer to the revenue budget line with the same project, project task, account group, and cost code or item and for which the corresponding customer invoices have not been released yet.

This column is read-only.
Line description

The description of the purchase order line associated with the commitment.

This column is read-only. For a commitment line with the New line or New document status, this column is empty.
Order qty.

The original quantity of the purchase order line associated with the commitment.

This column is read-only. For a commitment line with the New line or New document status, this column is empty.
Line amount

The original amount of the purchase order line associated with the commitment. The amount is displayed in the currency of the purchase order.

This column is read-only. For a commitment line with the New line or New document status, this column is empty.
Open qty.

The open quantity of the purchase order line associated with the commitment.

This column is read-only. For a commitment line with the New line or New document status, this column is empty.
Open amount

The open amount of the purchase order line associated with the commitment. The amount is displayed in the currency of the purchase order.

This column is read-only. For a commitment line with the New line or New document status, this amount is zero.
Amount in base currency

The amount of the commitment in the base currency.

This column is read-only.
Total potentially revised amount

The sum of the Amount and Line amount values. The amount is displayed in the currency of the purchase order.

This column is read-only.
Total potentially revised quantity

The sum of the Quantity and Order qty. values. The amount is displayed in the currency of the purchase order.

This column is read-only.
### The Select commitments dialog box This dialog box, which opens when you click **Select commitments** on the table toolbar, shows the list of purchase order lines associated with the project. Purchase order lines are listed in the dialog box only if they are not cancelled or completed and if the status of the corresponding purchase order is **Pending printing**, **Pending email**, or **Open**. In this dialog box, you can select specific lines or all the lines and add them to the change order. ### The Selection area The Selection area of the dialog box has the following elements, which you can use to select the criteria of purchase order lines to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier for which you want to view purchase order lines. If you want to see the purchase order lines associated with all suppliers, leave this field blank.
Purchase order no.

The reference number of the purchase order for which you want to view lines.

If you want to see purchase order lines associated with all purchase orders, leave this field blank.

In this column, you can select any normal purchase order with the Pending printing, Pending email, or Open status that has at least one non-cancelled or non-completed line. If a supplier is selected in the Selection area of the dialog box, you can select only a purchase order associated with the selected supplier.
Cost code from

The first cost code of the range for which you want to view purchase order lines. If you want to see the purchase order lines associated with all cost codes, leave this field blank.

This field is shown if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cost code to

The last cost code of the range for which you want to view purchase order lines. If you want to see the purchase order lines associated with all cost codes, leave this field blank.

This field is shown if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item for which you want to view purchase order lines.

If you want to see the purchase order lines associated with all items, leave this field blank.
Project task

The project task for which you want to view purchase order lines.

If you want to see the purchase order lines associated with all tasks, leave this field blank.
#### The table columns
Element Description
Project task The project task associated with the purchase order line.
Item ID The item of the purchase order line.
Cost code

The cost code associated with the purchase order line.

This field is shown if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Purchase order no. The reference number of the purchase order.
Supplier The supplier associated with the purchase order.
Order date The date of the purchase order.
Purchase order line no. The number of the purchase order line.
Line description The description of the purchase order line.
Order qty.

The quantity of the purchase order line.

This column is read-only. For a commitment line with the New line or New document status, this column is empty.
UoM The unit of measure of the purchase order line.
Unit cost The price of the specified unit of the purchase order line in the currency of the purchase order.
Received qty. The received quantity of the purchase order line.
Line amount The amount of the purchase order line.
Alternate ID The alternate identifier used for the item of the purchase order line.
Promised The date when the item’s delivery was promised.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference number specified for the purchase order.
Add lines Uploads the selected cost budget lines to the change order. The dialog box remains open.
Add lines and close Uploads the selected cost budget lines to the change order and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels your selections and closes the dialog box.
## The Attributes tab On the Attributes tab, you can view, add, change, or delete attribute values for the change order.
Element Description
Attribute The attribute used for the change order.
Required When this check box is selected, this attribute is required for the change order.
Value The value of the attribute for the change order.

Related pages

Concepts

 Change order classes (PM203000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-order-classes-pm203000 page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change order classes (PM203000) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + Change order classes enable grouping of change orders by their impact on projects and by additional attributes that classes can have. + You can also segregate changes by class in reports to analyse, for example, which types of changes have the greatest impact on project profitability. + By using a change order class, you can create an internal change order that does not affect the revenue budget of projects and is not assigned any reference number within a project. This class of change orders will not have the **Revenue budget** tab in the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window. + Change order classes also support the use of global attributes defined in the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. A list of attributes can be specified for a change order class to be available in each change order belonging to the class. + You can specify a default change order class in the **Default change order class** field on the **General settings** tab of the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. The default change order class is then assigned to each newly created document in the [Change orders (PM308000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/change-orders-pm308000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part
Element Description
Class ID The unique identifier of the change order class.
Description The description of the change order class.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the change order class is available for selection in the Change orders (PM308000) window.
## The Details tab This tab includes general information about the change order class.
Element Description
Cost budget A check box that indicates (if selected) that you can modify existing cost budget lines and add new ones with change orders of this class.
Revenue budget A check box that indicates (if selected) that you can modify existing revenue budget lines and add new ones with change orders of this class.
Commitments A check box that indicates (if selected) that you can modify existing commitments and add new ones with change orders of this class.
## The Attributes tab On the Attributes tab, you can select attributes for this change order class. You can add only attributes that have been defined in the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Element Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is available for the change orders of this class. You can deactivate an obsolete attribute by clearing the check box. In this case, the deactivated attribute will no longer be displayed for the change orders of this class, but all attribute values that have already been specified for existing change order still will be stored in the database. Thus, if you re-activate the attribute, its values will become visible in the system again.
Attribute ID The attribute identifier, which has been specified in the Attributes (CS205000) window.
Description A read-only field showing the description that has been provided for the attribute.
Sort order An integer that defines the position of the attribute in the list of attributes available for the entity type. You should specify 1 for the first attribute you want to be listed, 2 for the second, and so on.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must specify a value for this attribute on the appropriate data entry form.
Control type A read-only field displaying the element type of the attribute.
Default value A default value of the selected attribute, which is specified in the Attributes (CS205000) window.
Commitments (PM306000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000 page In this window, you can view the list of internal and external commitments associated with projects and create external commitments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Commitments (PM306000) In this window, you can view the list of internal and external commitments associated with projects and create external commitments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the list of internal and external commitments associated with projects and create external commitments. You can use selection criteria to narrow the list of commitments displayed. You can display only the commitments associated with a specific project, account group, project task, or stock item or any combination of these criteria. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Create external commitment Opens the External commitments (PM209000) window, which you can use to create a new external commitment.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select the criteria of commitments to be displayed in the table and to review the totals calculated for the selected commitments.
Element Description
Project

The identifier of the project whose commitments you want to view.

To see the commitments associated with all projects, leave this field blank.
Account group

The account group for which you want to view commitments.

To see the commitments associated with all account groups, leave this field blank.
Project task

The project task for which you want to view commitments.

To see the commitments associated with all tasks, leave this field blank.
Cost code

The cost code for which you want to view commitments. If you want to see commitments associated with all cost codes, leave this field blank.

The field is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item for which you want to view commitments.

To see the commitments associated with all items, leave this field blank.
Revised quantity A read-only field that displays the total quantity of the commitments that meet the criteria you have selected.
Revised amount A read-only field that displays the total amount of the commitments that meet the criteria you have selected.
Open quantity A read-only field that displays the total open quantity of the commitments that meet the criteria you have selected.
Open amount A read-only field that displays the total open amount of the commitments that meet the criteria you have selected.
Received quantity A read-only field that displays the total received quantity of the commitments that satisfy the criteria you have selected.
Invoiced quantity A read-only field that displays the total invoiced quantity of the commitments that satisfy the criteria you have selected.
Invoiced amount A read-only field that displays the total invoiced amount of the commitments that meet the criteria you have selected.
## The table In the table, you can view the commitments that meet the selection criteria you have specified.
Element Description
Related document The document related with the commitment.
Type

The type of the commitment, which can be one of the following options:

Internal
The commitment originates from a document created in the system.
External
The commitment has been imported to Visma Net or created manually.
Project The project associated with the commitment.
Account group The account group that was updated by the commitment.
Project task The project task associated with the commitment.
Item ID The item associated with the commitment.
Cost codes

The cost code associated with the commitment.

The field is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
External ref. no

The reference number of the commitment of the External type.

You can click the link in this column to open in a pop-up window the External commitments (PM209000) window, which you can use to modify or delete the external commitment.
UoM The unit of measure of the commitment.
Original committed quantity

The original quantity of the commitment that does not include the changes of change orders.

For a the commitment of the Internal type, this quantity is equal to the quantity of the corresponding line of the sales or purchase order from which the commitment originates.

In the Projects (PM301000) window, this quantity is included in the Committed quantity of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, stock item, and account group if the budget line has a UoM that the system can convert to the UoM of the commitment by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Original committed amount

The original amount of the commitment that does not include the changes of change orders.

For a commitment of the Internal type, this amount is equal to the amount of the corresponding line of the sales or purchase order from which the commitment originates.

For a commitment of the Internal type, this amount is equal to the ext. price of the corresponding line of the sales order or to the ext. cost of the corresponding line of the purchase order from which the commitment originates.
Committed CO quantity The total quantity of the cost commitment lines of released change orders that are associated with the commitment. This quantity is calculated as the difference between the revised committed quantity and the original committed quantity.
Committed CO amount The total amount of the cost commitment lines of released change orders that are associated with the commitment. This amount is calculated as the difference between the revised committed amount and the original committed amount.
Revised committed quantity

The received quantity of the commitment. The revised quantity of the commitment. For a the commitment of the Internal type, the revised quantity is equal to the quantity of the corresponding line of the sales or purchase order from which the commitment originates.

For a newly created commitment or for a commitment that no change order affects, this quantity is equal to the original committed quantity.
Revised committed amount

The invoiced quantity of the commitment.

The original amount of the commitment. For a commitment of the Internal type, the revised amount is equal to the ext. price of the corresponding line of the sales order or to the ext. cost of the corresponding line of the purchase order from which the commitment originates

For a newly created commitment or for a commitment that no change order affects, this amount is equal to the original committed amount.
Committed open quantity The open quantity of the commitment that has not been received yet. For a commitment of the Internal type, the system calculates this quantity as the difference between the revised committed quantity and the committed received quantity of the commitment.
Committed open amount The open amount of the commitment that has not been received yet. For a commitment of the Internal type, the system calculates this quantity as the difference between the revised committed amount and the received amount of the commitment.
Committed received quantity

The received quantity of the commitment. For a commitment of the Internal type, this is the received quantity of the purchase order line or the shipped quantity of the sales order line from which the commitment originates. If the commitment originates from a purchase order line, the system updates the received quantity of the commitment depending on the type of the purchase order line as follows:

  • If the purchase order line is processed through a purchase receipt, the commitment is updated with the received quantity when the purchase receipt is released.
  • If the purchase order line is invoiced directly without a purchase receipt being processed, the commitment is updated with the invoiced quantity when the purchase invoice is released.

If the commitment originates from a sales order line, the system updates the received quantity of the commitment depending on whether a shipment is processed for the sales order as follows:

  • If the sales order line is processed through a shipment, the commitment is updated with the shipped quantity when the shipment is confirmed.
  • If the sales order line is invoiced directly without shipment processing, the commitment line is updated with the invoiced quantity when the sales invoice is released.
Committed invoiced quantity The invoiced quantity of the commitment.
Committed invoiced amount The invoiced amount of the commitment. For a commitment of the Internal type that originates from a purchase order line, the system updates the Committed invoiced amount with the amount of the corresponding line of the released purchase invoice. For a commitment of the Internal type that originates from a sales order line, the system updates the Committed invoiced amount with the amount of the corresponding line of the released sales invoice.

Related pages

Concepts

 Common tasks (PM208030) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/common-tasks-pm208030 page You use this window to view and edit all the settings of a common task, as well as to add or delete a common task. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Common tasks (PM208030) You use this window to view and edit all the settings of a common task, as well as to add or delete a common task. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to view and edit all the settings of a common task, as well as to add or delete a common task. While a common task is similar to a template task, a common task can be added to any new or existing project, rather than just any project associated with one project template. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using this area, you can add a new common task or view the details of an existing one.
Element Description
Task ID The unique identifier of the common task. The structure of this identifier is defined by the PROTASK segmented key, which was configured in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.
Description The description of the common task.
## The Summary tab This tab includes general information about the common task. ### The Task properties section
Element Description
Completion method

The method of calculating the percentage of completion for the common task when it is added to a project. The following options are available:

Manual
Users manually specify the task completion percentage for each task in the Completed (%) field.
Budgeted quantity
The system automatically calculates the task completion percentage based on the total actual and budgeted quantities of the budget lines for which the Completed (%) column is selected on the Budget tab of this window. We recommend that you select the check box in the Completed (%) column for only one expense budget line of the task if you use this method of calculation or you need to select the most important cost for evaluating the task completion percentage.
Budgeted amount
The system automatically calculates the task completion percentage based on the total actual and budgeted amounts of the budget lines for which the Completed (%) column is selected on the Budget tab of this window. If the original budgets were revised at some point in the task progress for any of the budget lines, the completion percentage is calculated with respect to the revised budget amounts.

For more information, see: About the calculation of task completion percentage
Approver The default approver to be assigned to the common task to approve time activities.
### The Invoicing and allocation settings section
Element Description
Invoice separately A check box that (if selected) indicates that this common task should be invoiced by a separate invoice.
Allocation rule The rule that Visma Net uses to run allocation for this common task.
Invoicing rule The rule that Visma Net uses to run invoicing for this common task.
Branch The branch of your company with which this common task is associated.
Rate table The rate table to be used for the tasks created based on this common task.
Invoicing option

The way the common task becomes eligible for invoicing. You can select one of the following options:

By invoicing period
The task is available for invoicing on demand for the projects with the On demand invoicing period and is available for invoicing at the end of the invoicing period specified for the projects with another invoicing period.
On task completion
You can invoice the task only when it has been completed.
On project completion
The task is available for invoicing on project completion.
WIP account group The work-in-progress account group associated with this common task.
### The Default values section
Element Description
Default account The account to be used as one of the sources of possible accounts for the invoices and transactions that are generated for the common task.
Default subaccount The subaccount to be used as one of the sources of possible segment values for subaccounts to be used in the invoices and transactions that are generated for the common task.
Accrual account The account to be used as an expense accrual account in the transactions that are generated for the common task.
Accrual subaccount The subaccount to be used as an expense accrual subaccount in the transactions that are generated for the common task
VAT category The VAT category (if applicable) to be used as the default VAT category for the common task.
### The Visibility settings section
Element Description
General ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the General ledger workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this common task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in general ledger documents, and the release of such documents automatically updates the project data.
Supplier ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this common task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in supplier ledger documents, and the release of such documents automatically updates the project data.
Customer ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Customer ledger workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this common task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in customer ledger documents, and the release of such documents automatically updates the project data.
Sales

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Sales workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this common task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in sales documents, and the release of such documents automatically updates the project data.
Purchases

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Purchases workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this common task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in purchase documents, and the release of such documents automatically updates the project data.
Inventory

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Inventory workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this common task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in inventory documents, and the release of such documents automatically updates the project data.
Cash management

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Cash management workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this common task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in cash management documents, and the release of such documents automatically updates the project data.
Time entries

A check box that indicates whether the transactions of the Employee time card (EP305000) and Employee time activities (EP307000) windows (in the Time and expenses workspace) can be associated with the tasks created based on this common task.

If you select this check box, users can select the task in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the task data.
Expenses

A check box that indicates whether transactions of the Equipment time card (EP308000) window (in the Time and expenses workspace) can be associated with the tasks created based on this common task.

If you select this check box, users can select the task in documents in the window, and the release of these documents automatically updates the task data.
## The Budget tab On the **Budget** tab of the window, you can specify budgeted amounts for account groups.
Column Description
Type A read-only field that displays the type of the selected account group: Asset, Liability, Income, or Expense.
Account group The group of accounts for which the budgeted amount are specified.
Item ID

The stock or non-stock item. You can select an item from the list of items associated with accounts of the specified account group and specify the budget for this item.

By default, the system populates this field with the empty item code (N/A), which is defined in the Empty item code field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window. For the empty item code, you can specify the budget for all transactions associated with this account group that are not linked to any particular stock item.
Description The description of the budget line.
Budgeted quantity The quantity of the item or service planned for the common task.
UoM The unit of measure for the budget line, such as HOUR or BOX.
Unit rate The price of the item or the rate of the service.
Budgeted amount The total budgeted amount for the budget line. Visma Net automatically calculates the value as the product of the values in the Budget qty. and Rate columns, but you can override the value in this column by specifying the amount manually as long as the task has the In planning status.
Auto completed (%)

A check box that you select to make the system automatically calculate the percentage of task completion for a project based on the selected Completion method.

You can select this check box for any number of lines of the Expense type.
## The Recurring invoicing tab By using the **Recurring invoicing** tab, you can implement a regular flat-rate invoicing model for the common task, for example, to provide a certain number of hours of service to a customer for a flat monthly rate.
Column Description
Non-stock item The non-stock item that designates the service or labour associated with the common task.
Description The description of the service or labour associated with the common task.
Item fee The flat price for the service or labour.
Account source

The source of the account for the invoicing transactions, which can be one of the following:

Recurring item
The sales account associated with the non-stock item specified for the row
Project
The sales account associated with the project
Task
The sales account specified for the row in the Account column
Customer
The sales account associated with the customer
Subaccount mask

The rule for selecting segment values for the subaccount to be used for recurring invoicing transactions.

To set up the rule for selecting segment values, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

B
The subaccount associated with the non-stock item specified for the row
P
The subaccount associated with the project
T
The subaccount specified for the row in the Subaccount column
Account The account to be used in the invoicing transaction if the account source is set to Task.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used in the invoicing transaction if the subaccount mask uses T.
Reset usage

The setting that indicates whether the system resets the quantity of the service or labour, which is specified as the Included value, when invoicing is performed. You can select one of the following options:

Never
Visma Net carries over any used amount to the next period.
On invoicing
The system resets the quantity of the service or labour when invoicing is performed. Any unused hours of service in the current period are not carried over to the next period.
Included The quantity of the service or labour that is included in the invoicing period. If the quantity of service or labour provided to the customer exceeds this value for the current invoicing period, the entire extra quantity is charged at the regular rate.
UoM The unit of measure used for the service or labour.
## The Attributes tab On the **Attributes** tab, you can specify attributes for this common task. The attributes on this tab are those with the **Task** type in the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window.
Element Description
Attribute The attribute name.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a mandatory attribute.
Value The value of the attribute for this common task.

Related pages

Tasks

 External commitments (PM209000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/external-commitments-pm209000 page In this window, you can create a new external commitment or edit or delete an existing external commitment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # External commitments (PM209000) In this window, you can create a new external commitment or edit or delete an existing external commitment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can open this window only through the [Commitments (PM306000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/commitments-pm306000/) window, by clicking **Create external commitment** in the window toolbar, or by clicking the reference number in the **External ref. no.** column for an external commitment. ## The top part
Column Description
External ref. no ID The identifier of the external commitment.
Account group The account group of the account to be updated with this commitment.
Project The project associated with this commitment.
Project task The project task associated with this commitment. If you select a project that has the default project task, this task is automatically populated in the column.
Item ID The stock or non-stock item that is used in the commitment. By default, the system populates this field with the empty item code, which is initially N/A and you can change it in the Empty item code field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
UoM The unit of measure of the commitment. If a stock item is selected in the Item ID field, the system automatically fills this field with the base unit of measure of this item; you can change it to another UoM available for the item.
Revised committed amount The original amount of the commitment. In the Projects (PM301000) window, this amount is included in the revised committed amount of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, account group, and item.
Revised committed quantity The revised quantity of the commitment. In the Projects (PM301000) window, this quantity is included in the revised committed quantity of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, account group, and item if the budget line has a UoM that the system can convert to the UoM of the commitment by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed open amount The open amount of the commitment that has not been received yet, which is included in the committed open amount of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, item, and account group.
Committed open quantity The open quantity of the commitment that has not been processed yet. In the Projects (PM301000) window, this quantity is included in the committed open quantity of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, item, and account group if the budget line has a UoM that the system can convert to the UoM of the commitment by the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed received quantity The processed quantity of the commitment (for example, the quantity that has been processed or shipped). In the Projects (PM301000) window, this quantity is included in the committed received quantity of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, item, and account group if the budget line has an UoM that the system can convert to the UoM of the commitment by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed invoiced amount The invoiced amount of the commitment, which is included in the committed invoiced amount of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, item, and account group.
Committed invoiced quantity The invoiced quantity of the commitment. In the Projects (PM301000) window, this quantity is included in the committed invoiced quantity of the budget line associated with the same project, project task, item, and account group if the budget line has a UoM that the system can convert to the UoM of the commitment by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Invoicing rules (PM207000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/invoicing-rules-pm207000 page You can use this window to define the rules for invoicing customers by project. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoicing rules (PM207000) You can use this window to define the rules for invoicing customers by project. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify the settings for a new rule or select an existing rule to view or modify its details.
Element Description
Invoicing rule ID The unique identifier of the rule.
Description The description of the invoicing rule.
Active A check box that you can select to make the rule available for use in projects and tasks in Visma Net.
## The Left pane In the table in the left pane, you can define the sequence of steps for the selected invoicing rule. You then define the actual calculation rules and invoice settings for each step by using the right pane.
Element Description
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the step is performed as part of the invoicing process of the project with this invoicing rule applied.
Step ID The identifier, which can be only a numeric value, of the step in the invoicing rule. The steps are performed in ascending order by identifier.
Description The description of the step.
Invoice group

The identifier that is used to group the pro forma invoices generated by the steps of the invoicing rule.

You can enter any symbols in this column. The lines generated by the steps of the invoicing rules of the project tasks with the same Invoice group (except for those for which the Invoice separately check box is selected on the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window) are grouped into a single invoice.

A task with the selected Invoice separately check box in the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window is invoiced by a separate invoice.
## The right pane In the right pane, for the step selected in the left pane, you can specify the rules and calculation settings that the system will use for the process of invoicing projects.
Element Description
Invoicing type

The data source for the project invoicing of the step. The following options are available:

Time and material
The project is invoiced by the time and material spent during its implementation. As the data source for invoicing, the system uses the transactions of the Projects workspace associated with the project tasks within the invoicing period of the project. The transactions are selected by the Account group of the invoicing step they are associated with.
Progress invoicing
The project is invoiced gradually by the percentage of work completion. As the data source for invoicing, the system uses invoiceable project revenue or the revenue budget lines with a non-zero Pending invoice amount listed on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.

You can mix both types of steps in a single invoicing rule if needed, but we recommend that you create no more than one Progress invoicing step per invoicing rule.
### The Transaction selection criteria section The settings of the section define the selection criteria for the transactions of the Projects workspace used for invoicing. This section is shown only if the selected step has the **Time and material** invoicing type.
Element Description
Account group The account group whose transactions are involved in this invoicing step.
Rate type The rate type to be used for this step of the invoicing rule.
If @Rate is not defined

The default action to be performed on execution of the step if the value for @Rate has not been defined in the Rate table maintenance (PM206000) window. Select one of the following:

Set @Rate to 1
To set @Rate to 1
Set @Rate to 0
To set @Rate to 0
Raise error
To show the error message and stop the invoicing process
Do not invoice
To skip the use of the transaction for invoicing
### The Invoice settings section The settings of the section are used to create a pro forma invoice and fill it in with the invoicing data.
Element Description
Invoice description formula

The formula to be used to generate the description for the pro forma invoice that is created during invoicing.

To enter the formula, click the magnifier icon to open the Formula editor window.

If multiple steps of the invoicing rule are used in the creation of a single pro forma invoice, the formula of the topmost step is used for the invoice description.
Line quantity formula

The formula for calculating the quantity of a line of the pro forma invoice.

To enter the formula, click the magnifier icon to open the window. In addition to the quantities specified in the underlying transactions, you can use any other transaction parameters to calculate the quantity. If you define no formula in this field, the invoiceable quantity of the transaction will be used.

This field is shown only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.
Line amount formula

The formula for calculating the amount of a line of the pro forma invoice. To enter the formula, click the magnifier icon to open the window. In addition to the amount specified in the underlying transactions, you can use any other transaction parameters to calculate the amount.

This field is shown only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.

Instead of the @Rate parameter, you can also use the @Price parameter to retrieve the effective sales price to calculate the invoicing amount.
Line description formula The formula to be used to generate the description for a line of the pro forma invoice that is created during the invoicing. To enter the formula, click the magnifier icon to open the window.
Use destination branch from

The branch to be used for invoicing as the destination branch. The following options are available:

  • Source transaction: The branch of the source transaction.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.

  • Current branch: The current branch selected in the window title bar.

This option is available only if the step has the Progress invoicing invoicing type.

  • Invoicing rule: The branch associated with the invoicing rule, specified in the Destination branch field.
  • Project: The branch of the project, which is defined on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
  • Task: The branch of the project task, which is defined on the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window.
  • Customer: The branch of the customer location, which is defined on the General settings tab of the Customer locations (CR303010) window.
  • Employee: The branch of the employee, which is defined on the General settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.
Use sales account from

The account to be used for invoicing as a sales account. The following options are available:

  • Source transaction: The sales account of the source transaction.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.

  • Account group: The default account of the account group of the revenue budget line, which is defined in the Account groups (PM201000) window.

This option is available only if the step has the Progress invoicing invoicing type.

  • Invoicing rule: The account associated with the invoicing rule, specified in the Sales account field.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.

If the empty item code is selected as the stock item, the system uses the sales account of the customer location, which is defined on the General ledger accounts tab of the Customer locations (CR303010). The customer location of the project is defined on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.

  • Customer: The sales account of the customer, which is defined on the General ledger accounts tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.

  • Employee: The sales account of the employee, which is defined on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.
Sales subaccount mask

The subaccount mask to be used for generating sales subaccounts for invoicing.

To set up the rule for selecting segment values, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

  • B: The subaccount associated with the invoicing rule, specified in the Sales subaccount column.
  • C: The sales subaccount of the customer, which is defined on the General ledger accounts tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.
  • E: The sales subaccount of the employee, which is defined on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.

If the empty item code is selected as the stock item, the system uses the sales subaccount of the customer location, which is defined on the General ledger accounts tab of the Customer locations (CR303010) window. The customer location of the project is defined on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.

  • P: The default subaccount of the project, which is defined on the General ledger accounts tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
  • R: The sales subaccount of the branch, which is defined on the General ledger accounts tab of the Branches (CS102000) window.
  • T: The default subaccount of the project task, which is defined on the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window.

For a segment, the characters designating each option are repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Destination branch The destination branch to be used for invoicing if Invoicing rule is selected in the Use destination branch from field.
Sales account

The account to be used for invoicing if the Invoicing rule option is selected in the Use sales account from field.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.
Sales subaccount

The subaccount to be used for invoicing or as a source of segment values for the mask specified in the Sales subaccount field.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Invoicing options section
Element Description
Copy notes and file A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will copy to the pro forma invoice the notes and files of the corresponding lines.
Include non-invoiceable transactions

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will include non-invoiceable transactions in the pro forma invoice. If this check box is not selected, the system will not include non-invoiceable transactions in the pro forma invoice.

This option is available only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.
Include transactions with zero amounts

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will include a line in the pro forma invoice even if the line has an amount of zero.

If this check box is not selected, the system will not add lines with zero amounts to the pro forma invoice.
Include transactions with zero quantities

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will include a transaction in the pro forma invoice even if the transaction has a quantity of zero. If this check box is not selected, the system will not process transactions that have quantities of zero.

This check box is shown only if the step has the Time and material invoicing type.
### The Aggregate transactions by section The settings of the **Aggregate transactions by** section define how to aggregate the transactions used for invoicing in the pro forma invoice. This section is shown only if the selected step has the **Time and material** invoicing type.
Element Description
Date A check box that you select to aggregate the transactions with the same date in a single line of the pro forma invoice that is created during the invoicing.
Employee A check box that you select to aggregate the transactions with the same employee in a single line of the pro forma invoice that is created during the invoicing.
Supplier A check box that you select to aggregate the transactions with the same supplier in a single line of the pro forma invoice that is created during the invoicing.
Item ID A check box that you select to aggregate the transactions with the same item in a single line of the pro forma invoice that is created during the invoicing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Not yet invoiced project transactions (PM40107S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/not-yet-invoiced-project-transactions-pm40107s page This window shows all transactions that have been allocated, but not invoiced, and are linked to the account group(s) that are set up in the invoicing rule(s). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Not yet invoiced project transactions (PM40107S) This window shows all transactions that have been allocated, but not invoiced, and are linked to the account group(s) that are set up in the invoicing rule(s). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select the projects you want to view in the table.
Element Description
View project (button) Opens the Projects (PM301000) window, where you can view the details of a project you select.
Project manager The project manager of the projects whose transactions you want view in the table.
From project The ID of the project you want to start your selection from.
To project The ID of the project to you want to end your selection to.
From period The period you want to start your selection from.
To period The period you want to end your selection at.
Customer The customer of the transaction.
Invoicing rule The invoicing rule that applies to the transaction.
Status

The status of the projects that you want to view in the table:

In planning
This status is automatically assigned to any new project with the Hold check box selected and reflects that the project is a draft and not available for selection in data entry windows.
Active
The project can be associated with documents and activities in data entry windows in the modules integrated with the Projects module.
Completed
All tasks for the project have been completed.
Cancelled
Project is stopped before its completion. A cancelled project can be activated again.
Suspended
All activities on the project are suspended. A suspended project can be re-activated or cancelled.
Total amount The total amount of the transaction.
## The table
Element Description
From period The period you want to start your selection from.
To period The period you want to end your selection at.
Project ID The ID of the project that the transaction belongs to.
Project name The name of the project that the transaction belongs to.
Status The status of the transaction.
Amount The amount of the transaction.
Project manager The manager of the project that the transaction belongs to.
Customer The name of the customer.
Invoicing rule The invoicing rule that applies to the transaction.
Invoicing rule description The description of the invoicing rule.
Account group ID The ID of the account group.
Account group description The description of the account group.
Pro forma invoice (PM642000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoice-pm642000 section By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice (PM642000) By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference no. The reference number of the document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Pro forma invoices (PM307000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/pro-forma-invoices-pm307000 page You can use this window to view and modify pro forma invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoices (PM307000) You can use this window to view and modify pro forma invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view and modify pro forma invoices. Pro forma invoices are created during the project invoicing process in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Release

Releases the document.

  • The pro forma invoices of a project can be released only one by one, starting from the earliest one, on the Invoices tab of the Projects (PM301000) window. The only exception is when multiple pro forma invoices grouped by invoice group have been generated during a single iteration of the invoicing process; in this case, these pro forma invoices can be released in any order.
  • A pro forma invoice of a particular project can be released only after the sales invoice of the preceding pro forma invoice of the project has been released.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Approve: Changes the status of the pro forma invoice from Pending approval to Active.

This action is available if the Approval workflow functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and approval is configured for pro forma invoices.

  • Reject: Changes the status of the pro forma invoice from Pending approval to Rejected.

This action is available if the Approval workflow functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and approval is configured for pro forma invoices.

  • Email pro forma invoice: Sends the selected document as an email.
Reports Provides the Print pro forma invoice menu command, which you click to navigate to the report that is specified for the PROFORMA mailing of the corresponding project on the Mailing Settings tab of the Projects (PM301000) window. If the corresponding project has no mailing setting with the PROFORMA identifier, an error occurs.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area to select an existing pro forma invoice and view its details.
Element Description
Reference no. The reference number of the pro forma invoice in the system.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

  • On hold: The user can edit the document but cannot release it.
  • Pending approval: The pro forma invoice has been taken off hold (that is, the status was assigned when the Hold check box was cleared for the pro forma invoice). If Approval is activated, a pro forma invoice with this status is visible to the employee who has been assigned to approve the pro forma invoice. Once the pro forma invoice is approved, it is assigned the Open status; if the pro forma invoice is rejected, its status changes to Rejected.

This status is available only if the Approval Workflow functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and pro forma invoice approval is configured.

  • Rejected: The system assigns this status to the pro forma invoice if the employee who was assigned to approve the pro forma invoice has rejected it.

This status is available only if the Approval workflow functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and pro forma invoice approval is configured.

  • Open: The system assigns this status to the pro forma invoice if the employee who was assigned to approve the pro forma invoice has approved it. If no approval is configured for pro forma invoices, the system assigns this status to the pro forma invoice when the Hold check box is cleared. The user can release the pro forma invoice or save it with the On Hold status for further editing.
  • Closed: The document has been released and cannot be edited.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the pro forma invoice is a draft and thus has the On hold status.
Invoice date The date on which the pro forma invoice was created. You can change this date, if needed.
Post period The period that corresponds to the invoice date and to which the corresponding customer ledger document should be posted.
Description The description of the pro forma invoice, which is provided by the invoicing rule and can be manually modified.
Project The project associated with the pro forma invoice.
Customer The customer associated with the project.
Location

The location of the project related to the pro forma invoice.

This element is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency

The currency of the pro forma invoice.

This element is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Progress invoicing total The total of the Amount to invoice column on the Progressing invoicing tab.
Time and material total The total of the Amount to invoice column on the Time and material tab.
Detail total The document total, which the system calculates as the sum of the Progress invoicing total and the Time and material total.
VAT total The tax amount of the document, as defined on the VAT details tab.
Invoice total The sum of the Detail total and VAT total values.
Over-limit total

The total Over-limit amount from the Time and material tab that exceeds the invoicing limit. The total is shown only if the Use time and material revenue budget limits check box is selected for the project on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.

The validation level of the invoicing limit may vary, from a simple warning that is shown in this field and does not block the processing of the pro forma invoice to an error that prevents the pro forma invoice from being processed further until the invoice amount is within the limit. The desired behaviour is specified in the Validate time and material revenue budget limits field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
## The Progress invoicing tab This tab lists all the lines of the pro forma invoice generated by the **Progress invoicing** steps of the invoicing rules of the project tasks. You can review, modify, and delete these lines if needed. For more information, see: [About project invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing/)
Element Description
Branch

The branch that sells the item or provides the service.

The branch is provided from the source defined by the Use destination branch from setting of the particular step of the invoicing rule in the Invoicing rules (PM207000) window.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated.
Cost code

The cost code associated with the revenue budget line.

The column is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The stock item which this document line is associated.
Description The description of the line, which is provided by the invoicing rule and can be manually modified.
Revised amount The Revised amount of the corresponding revenue budget line of the project on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
Previously invoiced The running total of the Amount to invoice column on this tab for all the preceding pro forma invoice lines that refer to the same revenue budget line.
Total completed (%)

The percentage of the revised amount of the revenue budget line of the project that has been invoiced by all the pro forma invoices of the project, including the current one.

You can modify this percentage; in this case, the system automatically recalculates the values in the Amount to invoice and Current invoiced (%) columns of the line.
Amount

The original line amount calculated by the progress invoicing rule.

This column appears only if the Construction functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Stored material

The amount of material stored.

This column appears only if the Construction functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Amount to invoice

The amount to invoice the customer.

By default, this is the Pending invoice amount of the corresponding line of the project on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.

You can modify the amount in this column; in this case, the system automatically recalculates the values in the Total completed (%) and Current invoiced (%) columns of the line.

On creation of the sales invoice from the pro forma invoice, the system copies this amount to the Ext. price column of the corresponding line of the sales invoice.
Current invoiced (%)

The percentage of the revised amount of the revenue budget line of the project that is invoiced by this pro forma invoice line.

You can modify this percentage; in this case, the system automatically recalculates the values in the Amount to invoice and Total completed (%) columns of the line.
VAT category

By default, the VAT category of the corresponding revenue budget line of the project on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window. If no VAT category has been specified for the revenue budget line, the VAT category remains unspecified for the pro forma invoice line.

You can override the default value.
Sales account The sales account used for the transaction. The sales account is provided from the source defined by the Use sales account from setting of the particular step of the invoicing rule in the Invoicing rules (PM207000) window.
Sales subaccount

The corresponding subaccount used to record this sale transaction. The sales subaccount is provided according to the Sales subaccount mask setting of the particular step of the invoicing rule in the Invoicing rules (PM207000) window.

This column appears only f the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the stock item or non-stock item specified in this document line.

Upon release of this document, the system generates a deferral schedule (or multiple schedules) based on the settings defined in this deferral code. You can change the deferral code in this field manually if needed.

This column appears only if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

If you change an MDA deferral code (which indicates that an item is a package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider the item to not be a package and will ignore its components while generating a deferral schedule. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule for the item based on the settings of the specified non-MDA deferral code.
Actual amount The Actual amount of the corresponding revenue budget line on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window that shows the total of the corresponding lines of the released sales invoices.
Draft invoices amount The Draft invoices amount of the corresponding revenue budget line on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window that shows the total of the corresponding lines of the pro forma invoices for which the corresponding sales invoices have not been released yet.
Sort order

The sequence number of the line, which is used to sort the lines on the tab.

These numbers are assigned automatically and are changed automatically if you reorder the lines by dragging them to appropriate positions.
Line number The original sequence number of the line among all the pro forma invoice lines.
## The Time and material tab This tab lists all the lines of the pro forma invoice generated by the **Time and material** steps of the invoicing rules of the project tasks. You can review, modify, and delete these lines or add new ones if needed.
Element Description
Upload non-invoiced transactions Opens the Upload non-invoiced transactions dialog box, which shows the list of non-invoiced transactions of the corresponding project that can be added to the pro forma invoice.
View transaction details Opens the Transaction details dialog box, which shows the list of project transactions corresponding to the invoice line that were grouped during the invoicing according to the invoicing rule settings.
Status

The status that defines how to invoice the line, which can be one of the following:

Invoice
To invoice the line in the full amount or a greater amount than was initially invoiced or in the Amount to invoice of the line that is greater than or equal to the Invoiced amount of the line.
Hold remainder
To partially invoice the line in the Amount to invoice of the line that is less than the Invoiced amount of the line, and later invoice the remainder, which is the difference between the Invoiced amount and the Amount to invoice.
Write off remainder
To partially invoice the line in the Amount to invoice of the line that is less than the Invoiced amount of the line, and write off the remainder, which is the difference between the Invoiced amount and the Amount to invoice.
Write off
To write off the line in the full amount or a greater amount than was initially invoiced or in the Amount to invoice of the line that is greater than or equal to the Invoiced amount of the line.

You can also delete a selected line of the pro forma invoice to invoice it later in the full amount.
Branch

The branch that sells the item or provides the service.

The branch is provided from the source defined by the Use destination branch from setting of the particular step of the invoicing rule in the Invoicing rules (PM207000) window.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this document line is associated.
Item ID The stock item associated with the corresponding project transaction or the group of transactions aggregated based on the settings of the invoicing rule.
Cost code

The cost code associated with the corresponding project transaction.

The column is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Description The description of the line, which is provided by the invoicing rule and can be manually modified.
Employee The employee who provided the labour or service associated with the corresponding project transaction or the group of transactions aggregated based on the settings of the invoicing rule.
Supplier The supplier associated with the corresponding project transaction or the group of transactions aggregated based on the settings of the invoicing rule.
Date The date of creation of the corresponding project transaction.
Invoiced quantity The quantity to invoice the customer provided by the invoicing rule.
Invoiced amount The amount to invoice the customer provided by the invoicing rule.
Quantity to invoice

The quantity to be invoiced. When the sales invoice is created based on the pro forma invoice, the system copies this quantity to the corresponding line of the sales invoice.

By default, this quantity is equal to the invoiced quantity and can be manually modified.
UoM The unit of measure of the corresponding project transaction.
Unit price

The price of the item or the rate of the service of the corresponding project transaction.

You can modify the unit price.
Amount to invoice

The amount to invoice the customer.

On creation of the sales invoice from the pro forma invoice, the system copies this amount to the Ext. price column of the corresponding line of the sales invoice.

By default, this amount is equal to the Invoiced amount and can be manually modified. The difference between the calculated Invoiced amount and the corrected Amount to invoice is processed based on the Status of the line.

If you manually modify the Unit price or Quantity to invoice, the system automatically recalculates this amount as follows.
VAT category

By default, this is the VAT category of the item specified in the pro forma invoice line, or the VAT category of the project task if there is no item in the line or the VAT category of the item is not specified.

If neither the item nor the task has a VAT category specified, the VAT category is unspecified for the pro forma invoice line.

You can override the default value.
Sales account

The sales account of the corresponding project transaction.

The sales account is provided from the source defined by the Use sales account from setting of the particular step of the invoicing rule.
Sales subaccount

The sales subaccount of the corresponding project transaction.

The sales account is provided according to the Sales subaccount mask setting of the particular step of the invoicing rule.

This column appears only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the stock item or non-stock item specified in this document line. When the document is released, the system generates a deferral schedule (or schedules) based on the settings defined in this deferral code. You can change the deferral code in this field manually if needed.

This column appears only if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

If you change an MDA deferral code (the deferral code that indicates that an item is a package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider the item to not be a package and will ignore its components while generating a deferral schedule. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule for the item based on the settings of the specified non-MDA deferral code.
Max. available amount

The maximum amount available to invoice the customer based on the invoicing limit amount of the corresponding revenue budget line of the project.

If no invoicing limit amount is defined for the revenue budget line of the project or if the Max. limit amount is 0, the max. available amount of each corresponding pro forma invoice line is 0.

This column is shown if the Use time and material revenue budget limits check box is selected for the project on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
Max. limit amount

The invoicing limit amount ( Maximum amount ) of the corresponding revenue budget line of the project on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window. If no invoicing limit amount is defined for the revenue budget line of the project, the Max. limit amount of each corresponding pro forma invoice line is 0.

The column is shown if the Use time and material revenue budget Limits check box is selected for the project on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
Over-limit amount

The amount that exceeds the invoicing limit. The amount is calculated as the difference between the Amount to invoice and Max available amount. If this difference is negative or if the Max available amount is greater than the Amount to invoice, the Over-limit amount is 0. The invoice lines for which the Over-limit amount becomes non-zero exceed the limit.

This column is shown if the Use time and material revenue budget limits check box is selected for the project on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
Sort order The sequence number of the line, which is used to sort the lines on the tab. These numbers are assigned automatically and are changed automatically if you reorder the lines by dragging them to the appropriate positions.
Line number The original sequence number of the line among all the pro forma invoice lines.
### The Upload non-invoiced transactions dialog box This dialog box shows the list of non-invoiced transactions of the corresponding project that can be uploaded to the pro forma invoice. In this dialog box, you can select specific transactions or all transactions and upload them to the pro forma invoice.
Element Description
Branch The branch in which the transaction was created.
Ref. number The identifier of the transaction.
Stock ID The identifier of the stock or non-stock item associated with the transaction.
Description The detailed description provided for the transaction.
Employee The employee associated with the transaction, such as the employee who provided the labour or service to the customer.
Customer/supplier The name of the supplier (if the transaction originated in the Supplier ledger workspace) or customer (if the transaction originated in another workspace).
Date The date the transaction was created.
Invoiceable When this check box is selected, the transaction is used when the system calculates the amount that will be charged to the customer. If this check box is not selected, the transaction does not affect the invoicing for the project.
Quantity The quantity of the item or service.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item or service.
Invoiced quantity The quantity that will be invoiced to the customer.
Unit rate The price of the item or the rate of the service.
Amount The amount of the transaction.
Account group The account group of the debit side account of the transaction.
Credit account The account the transaction will credit if it is released.
Credit subaccount The subaccount the transaction will credit if it is released.
Debit account The account the transaction will debit if it is released.
Debit subaccount The subaccount the transaction will debit if it is released.
Upload (button) Uploads the selected transactions to the pro forma invoice. The dialog box remains open.
Upload and close (button)

Uploads the selected transactions to the pro forma invoice and closes the dialog box.

When a pro forma invoice is created, the system orders the lines of the pro forma invoice on the Time and material tab by the invoicing rule steps applied and by the project transaction reference number within each invoicing step. When you upload non-invoiced transactions, they are appended to the end of list of pro forma lines (so that after upload, you can identify them easily).
Cancel (button) Cancels your selections and closes the dialog box.
### The Transaction details dialog box This dialog box shows the list of project transactions corresponding to the invoice line that were grouped during the invoicing according to the invoicing rule settings. In this dialog box, you can manually delete transactions you do not want to invoice at the moment, which affects the amount and quantity of the pro forma invoice line.
Element Description
Ref. number The identifier of the transaction in Visma Net.
Stock ID The identifier of the stock or non-stock item associated with the transaction.
Description The detailed description provided for the transaction.
Employee The employee associated with the transaction, such as the employee who provided the labour or service to the customer.
Customer/supplier The name of the supplier (if the transaction originated in the Supplier ledger workspace) or customer (if the transaction originated in another workspace).
Date The date the transaction was created.
Invoiceable When check box is selected, the transaction is used to calculate the amount that will be charged to the customer. If this check box is not selected, the transaction does not affect the invoicing for the project.
Quantity The quantity for the transaction.
UoM The unit of measure used for the transaction.
Amount The amount of the transaction.
Invoiced quantity The quantity that is used for invoicing the customer.
Invoiced amount The amount that is used for invoicing the customer.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab contains information about the taxes to be paid on the invoice. The VAT details are calculated based on the VAT category specified in each line of the pro forma invoice on the **Progress invoicing** and **Time and material** tabs. Inclusive taxes are not supported. If you apply an inclusive VAT to a pro forma invoice, the system shows an error message and does not allow you to release the pro forma invoice.
Column Description
VAT ID The identifier of the tax applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate of the tax.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the tax, which is calculated at the document level.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific tax, which is calculated at the document level.
Retained taxable The retained taxable amount for this document. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retained VAT The retained VAT amount for this document. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information to be used for the creation of the corresponding customer ledger document. For a released pro forma invoice, the tab also shows the information about the created customer ledger document. ### The Invoice settings section
Element Description
Customer ledger doc type The type of the corresponding customer ledger document created when the pro forma invoice is released. Either a sales invoice or an sales credit note can be generated on release of a pro forma invoice, depending on the sign of the Detail total of the pro forma invoice.
Customer ledger ref. no. The reference number of the corresponding customer ledger document created on release of the pro forma invoice.
Branch The branch to be used on creation of the customer ledger document, which is provided by the project settings.
Customer VAT zone

The VAT zone of the customer location.

By default, the system inserts the VAT zone associated with the Customer location specified on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window; if no VAT zone has been specified for the customer location, the customer VAT zone is not filled in.

You can override the default value.
Terms The credit terms to be used on creation of the customer ledger document, which is provided by the project settings.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the credit terms.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period, which the system calculates by using the credit terms.
## The Invoicing settings tab This tab displays the invoicing address of the customer and the contact information of the corresponding project for invoicing purposes. The invoicing settings are populated based on the information specified on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. ### The Invoice-to contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact information provided by the project settings can be overridden.
Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
### The Invoice-to address section
Element Description
Override address A check box that indicates (if selected) that the invoicing address provided by the project settings can be overridden.
Address line 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address line 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
City The city of the invoicing address.
Country The country of the invoicing address.
County The state or province of the invoicing address.
Postcode

The postal code for the invoicing address.

An input mask for the postal code can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Process pro forma invoices (PM506000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/process-pro-forma-invoices-pm506000 page In this window, you can select the type of processing, specify criteria for selecting the pro forma invoices to be considered for processing, and process all of the filtered pro form invoices or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process pro forma invoices (PM506000) In this window, you can select the type of processing, specify criteria for selecting the pro forma invoices to be considered for processing, and process all of the filtered pro form invoices or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates the selected processing (based on the Action you select) for the pro forma invoices you have selected (by using the unlabelled check boxes) in the table.
Process all Initiates the selected processing (based on the Action you select) for all pro forma invoices listed in the table.
## The top part In this area, you can define the criteria for the pro forma invoices to be displayed in the table, as well as the action to be applied if you click **Process** or **Process all**.
Element Description
Action

The action to be taken when clicking Process or Process all in the window toolbar.

At this time, the Release option is available, which you select to release the pro forma invoices to produce sales invoices.
Start date

The start date of the date range for the pro forma invoice dates.

You can leave the box blank to view all pro forma invoices up to and including the End date.
End date

The end date of the date range for the pro forma invoice dates.

You can leave the box blank to view all pro forma invoices starting on the Start date.
## The table This table contains the list of pro forma invoices that match any criteria specified in the top part. You can select pro forma invoices for processing by using the check boxes in the unlabelled column.
Element Description
Project The project for which the pro forma invoice has been created.
Reference no. The reference number of the pro forma invoice.
Status

The status of the pro forma invoice.

Only invoices of the Open status, which indicates that the user can release these invoices, are listed in this window.
Invoice date The date of the pro forma invoice.
Post period The period to which the corresponding customer ledger document will be posted.
Customer The identifier of the customer associated with the pro forma invoice.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Pro forma gross amount in customer currency The gross amount of the invoice in the customer’s currency.
Pro forma customer currency The amount of the invoice in the customer’s currency.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the credit terms.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period, which the system calculates by using the credit terms.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Project access (PM102000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-access-pm102000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of projects to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project access (PM102000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of projects to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also use the [Restriction groups by project (PM102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/row-level-security-windows/restriction-groups-by-project-pm102010/) window to manage the visibility of projects to users, but you cannot create restriction groups in this window. ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups.
Active

A check box that (if selected) indicates that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Projects tab By using this tab, you can view the list of projects defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Project ID Read-only. The identifier of the project.
Description Read-only. The description of the project.
Customer Read-only. The customer associated with the project, if this project is external. For an internal project, no customer is specified.
Template Read-only. The template used for creating this project, if applicable.
Status Read-only. The status of the project.
Projects (PM301000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000 page In this window, you can create, view, modify, and delete projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Projects (PM301000) In this window, you can create, view, modify, and delete projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Run project invoicing

Initiates invoicing for the currently selected project.

You can run invoicing for an Active, Completed, or Suspended project that is not an internal project.
Create change order

Initiates creating of a change order. A change order is a document for profitability analysis and an audit trial of changes to the project revenue budget, cost budget, commitments, and time and material.

To use the change orders functionality, enable it in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

Lock budget
Prevents the Original budgeted quantity, Unit rate, and Original budgeted amount columns from being edited on the Revenue budget and Cost budget tabs of the window. The Unlock budget action reverses the effects of this action.
Unlock budget
Allows the Original budgeted quantity, Unit rate, and Original budgeted amount columns to be edited on the Revenue budget and Cost budget tabs of the current window. The Lock budget action reverses the effects of this action.
Lock commitments:
Prevents the direct creation of purchase orders for this project in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window. This action appears if the Change orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Internal cost commitment tracking check box is selected on the General settings tab of the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
  • Unlock commitments: Allows direct creation of purchase orders for this project in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.
  • Create template: Opens the New project template dialog box, where you can specify an ID for the project template.
  • Change ID: Opens the Specify new ID dialog box, where you can specify a new ID for the project.
  • Automatic budgeting: Calculates the projected revenue and updates the Balances and Revenue budget tabs of the current window with this revenue.

This action is available only when the project has the In planning, Active, or Completed status. For the calculation to be accurate, the project must be properly configured, with the necessary account groups and allocation rules created, and the projected budget for expenses must be specified.

For more information about tracking future revenues, see: About labour and revenue allocation
Reports
Print project balance
:

Opens the Project balance (PM621000) report report for the selected project.
## The top part You can use this area to add a new project or to select an existing project and view its details.
Element Description
Project ID The unique ID for the project.
Customer

The customer for the project if this project is external.

This value will be used in all invoices generated when you run the invoicing for the project. If you leave this field empty, the project is considered internal and you will not be able to run invoicing for it.
Template ID The template used for creating this project, if applicable.
Description

The description of the project.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Status

The status of the project, which can be one of the following options:

In planning
This status is automatically assigned to any new project where the Hold check box is selected. It reflects that the project is a draft and is not available for selection on data entry windows.
Active
Indicates that the project can be associated with documents and activities in data entry windows in the workspaces integrated with the Projects workspace.
Completed
Indicates that all tasks for the project have been completed.
Suspended
Indicates that the project and all underlying activities are suspended. You can reactivate or cancel a suspended project.
Cancelled
Indicates that the project is cancelled. You can reactivate a cancelled project.
Hold

A check box that you select to indicate that the project should have the In planning status.

When you clear the check box, the status changes to Active.
Completed % Manually enter the percentage of finished work. This value is only used in certain reports.
Assets The actual assets for the project.
Liabilities The actual liabilities for the project.
Income The income expected from the project.
Expenses The total of the current expenses incurred by the project.
## The Summary tab This tab includes general information about the project. ### The Project properties section
Element Description
Revenue budget level

The detail level of the revenue budget. Depending on the selected level, which can be one of the following options, the Item ID or Cost code column is shown or hidden on the Revenue budget tab:

Task
The project revenue is budgeted at the task ( Task ID ) level. With this option selected, the Item ID column is hidden on the Revenue budget tab of the window.
Task and item
The project revenue is budgeted at the task ( Task ID ) and item ( Item ID ) level. The option is not available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Task and cost code
The project revenue is budgeted at the task ( Task ID ) and cost code ( Cost code ) level. The option is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Start date The date when the project starts.
End date The date when the project is expected to end.
Project manager The person who is responsible for managing the project and authorised to approve the project task and task activities.
Last revenue change no. The last revenue change number on the project.
Change order workflow When this check box is selected, the creation of change orders is enabled.
Restrict employees

When this check box is selected, only the employees listed on the Employees tab of this window can create activities and documents associated with the current project.

These capabilities include creating activities on the Activity history tab of this window, time cards in the Employee time card (EP305000) window, and project transactions in the Project transactions (PM304000) window.
Track production data

A check box that you select to track the extra values reported by the people at the work site for the project.

If you select this check box, the following columns appear on the Cost budget tab: Cost to complete, Cost at completion, Percentage of completion, Last cost to complete, Last cost at completion, and Last percentage of completion.
Webhook notifications When this check box is selected, the system will send a notification when a project is created or updated. An update can consist of changes made to the following tabs: Summary, Employee, Tasks.
### The Invoicing and allocation settings section
Element Description
Invoicing period

The frequency of invoicing, which can be one of the following options:

Week
invoicing occurs once a week.
Month
invoicing occurs once a month.
Quarter
invoicing occurs once a quarter.
Year
invoicing occurs once a year.
On demand
invoicing can be performed at any time.

For projects with the Active status, the Invoicing period field is read-only.
Next invoicing date

The date for which the next invoicing is scheduled for the project. A value is displayed in this field only for active projects.

For newly created projects, the Next invoicing date is calculated as the Start date plus one Invoicing period. For the projects for which the project invoicing has been successfully performed at least once, the Next invoicing date is calculated as the Next invoicing date plus one Invoicing period. For the projects with the On demand invoicing period, the Next invoicing date is always empty.
Last invoicing date

The date when the latest invoicing was performed for the project.

A value is displayed in this field only for active projects.
Terms The type of credit terms used for invoices in the project. You define credit terms in the Credit terms (CS206500) window.
Allocation rule The default allocation rule that is used for the tasks created for the project.
Run allocation when you release project transactions When this check box is selected, allocation is run automatically during the release of the documents associated with this project.
Invoicing rule The default invoicing rule that is used for the tasks created for the project.
Rate table The rate table to be used with the allocation rules, if applicable.
Create a pro forma at the time of invoicing When this check box is selected, a pro forma invoice is created automatically for the project when you run project invoicing.
Use the revenue budget limits for time and material

When this check box is selected, the system will validate the limits of the revenue budget of the project when you process pro forma invoices for the project.

The Limit amount and Maximum amount columns are shown on the Revenue budget tab if this check box is selected.
Automatically release customer documents When this check box is selected, invoice documents are released automatically after the project invoicing is completed.
### The Invoice to section
Element Description
Customer location

The location of the project’s customer. When the customer is selected, the system populates this field with the customer’s default location.

This element is available if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Invoice contact section This section contains the contact information of the customer for invoicing purposes. These settings are initially populated with the information specified on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, but you can override any of the default settings.
Element Description
Override contact When this check box is selected, the contact information provided by the customer’s settings can be overridden.
Business name The name of the business.
Attention The department or person to be noted on the attention line, if this line is used by your company.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
### The Invoice address section This section contains the invoicing address of the customer for invoicing purposes. These settings are initially populated with the information specified on the **Invoicing settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, but you can override any of the default settings.
Element Description
Override address When this check box is selected, the invoicing address provided by the customer’s settings can be overridden.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
City The city of the invoicing address.
Country The country of the invoicing address.
County The county of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode for the invoicing address. An input mask for the postal code can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
### The Visibility settings section
Option Description
General ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the General ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in general ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Supplier ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in supplier ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Customer ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Customer ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in customer ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Sales

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Sales workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in sales documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Purchases

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Purchases workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in purchase documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Inventory

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Inventory workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in inventory documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Cash management

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Cash management workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this option, users can select the associated project and task when they enter a document in the Cash management workspace.
Time entries

A check box that indicates whether the transactions in the Time and expenses workspace can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Expenses

A check box that indicates whether transactions from Expense can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
## The Tasks tab On this tab, you can view and modify project tasks, delete project tasks, and add new tasks to the project.
Button Description
Add common tasks

Opens the Add tasks dialog box, where you can add a common task or a task associated with the template this project is based on.

For more information about common and template tasks, see: About templates for projects and tasks
Activate tasks Assigns the Active status to all the project tasks.
Complete tasks Assigns the Completed status to all the active project tasks and sets 100.00 as the value of the Completed (%) column for all of them.
Set as default Use this button to set a project task as the default for a project.
Task ID The ID of the task.
Description The description of the task.
Rate table

The rate table to be used in the allocation rules, if applicable.

If the task is created based on the project template selected in the Template field in the top part of this window, the system uses the rate table of the corresponding task of this project template.

If no project template is selected for the project, or no rate table is defined for the corresponding task of the selected project template, the system uses the rate table of the project specified in the Rate table field on the Summary tab of this window.
Allocation rule

The rule that Visma Net uses to run allocations for the task.

If the task is created based on the project template selected in the Template field in the top part of this window, the system uses the allocation rule of the corresponding task of this project template.

If no project template is selected for the project, or no allocation rule is defined for the corresponding task of the selected project template, the system uses the allocation rule of the project specified in the Allocation rule field on the Summary tab of this window.
Invoicing rule

The rule that Visma Net uses to run invoicing for the task.

If the task is created based on the project template selected in the Template field in the top part of this window, the system uses the invoicing rule of the corresponding task of this project template.

If no project template is selected for the project, or no invoicing rule is defined for the corresponding task of the selected project template, the system uses the invoicing rule of the project specified in the Invoicing rule field on the Summary tab of this window.
Status

The status of the task, which can be one of the following:

In planning
The task is a draft and is not available for selection in data entry windows. This status is automatically assigned to any new task.
Active
The task is active and can be selected on data entry windows.
Cancelled
Task execution has been stopped before task completion. A cancelled task can be activated again.
Completed
The task has been completed.
Completed (%)

The percentage of the work on the task that has been completed, which is determined as follows based on the value selected in the Completion method field on the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window:

Manual
Entered manually by a user.
Budgeted quantity
Calculated automatically as the actual quantity divided by the revised budgeted quantity for the cost budget lines associated with the task that have the Auto completed (%) check box selected on the Cost budget tab.
Budgeted amount
Calculated automatically as the actual amount divided by the revised budgeted amount for the cost budget lines associated with the task that have the Auto completed (%) check box selected on the Cost budget tab.

For more information, see: About the calculation of task completion percentage
Start date The date when the task was actually started.
End date The date when the task actually ended.
Approver The employee who is authorised to approve the time activities related to the task.
Invoicing option

The way the task becomes eligible for invoicing, which can be one of the following:

By invoicing period
The task is available for invoicing on demand if the project is assigned the On demand invoicing period, and is available for invoicing at the end of the specified invoicing period if the project is assigned other invoicing periods.
On task completion
The task can be invoiced only when it is completed.
On project completion
The task is available for invoicing when the project is completed.
Default This check box is automatically selected on the active line, when you click the Set as default button on the top part of the table.
Cash management

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Cash management workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this option, users can select the associated project and task when they enter a document in the Cash management workspace.
Customer ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Customer ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in customer ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Expenses

A check box that indicates whether transactions from Expense can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
General ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the General ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in general ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Inventory

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Inventory workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in inventory documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Purchases

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Purchases workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the projectchase documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Sales

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Sales workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in sales documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Supplier ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in supplier ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Time entries

A check box that indicates whether the transactions in the Time and expenses workspace can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
### The Add tasks dialog box
Column Description
Included A check box that you select for the tasks that you want to add to the project.
Task ID The ID of the task.
Description The description of the task.
Approver The employee assigned to approve time activities associated with the task.
Is global When this is checked, the task is in global use.
Add common tasks (button) Adds the common tasks that you have selected to the current project and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding any tasks to the current project.
## The Revenue budget tab This tab lists all the project revenues that can be created manually or generated by the project transactions and commitments—that is, generated for the corresponding project, project task, stock item or cost code, and account group.
Element Description
Project task

A task on the project.

If a task is selected, the table lists the revenue budget lines for only this task.
Task description The free-form description of the task you can enter.
Group by task

A check box that you select to make the table show all the revenue budget lines with the same task as a single line.

When the budget lines are grouped by task, the system shows the total for each numeric column of the table in the bottom-most row.
View commitments (button)

Opens the Commitments (PM306000) window in a pop-up window. This window shows the list of commitments that correspond to the selected revenue budget line.

This button is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Commitments (PM306000) window.
View transactions (button) Opens the Project transactions (PM304000) window in a pop-up window. This window shows the list of project transactions that correspond to the selected revenue budget line.
Project task A task on the project.
Item ID

The stock or non-stock stock item that is used for the time and material project invoicing.

By default, the system populates this field with the empty item code, which is initially N/A and can be changed in the Empty item code field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is shown if Task and item is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the window for the project.
Account group The income account group of the revenue budget line.
Cost code

The cost code that is associated with a revenue budget line. You can change the cost code value for each revenue line.

The column is shown if Task and cost code is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the window for the project.
Description The description of the revenue budget line.
Original budgeted quantity The budgeted quantity of the revenue budget line.
UoM

The unit of measure of the revenue budget line.

If a stock item is selected in the Item ID column, the UoM column is automatically filled in with the base unit of measure of this stock item, which can be changed to another UoM available for the item.

The base unit of measure of the empty item code is HOUR.

If the revenue budget line is created based on the project template selected in the Template field in the top part of this window, the system uses the UoM of the corresponding revenue budget line of this project template. If no UoM is defined for the corresponding revenue budget line of the selected project template, the system selects the UoM by using the logic described above.
Unit rate The price of the specified unit of the revenue budget line.
Original budgeted amount

The budgeted amount of the revenue budget line.

For the Budgeted quantity, UoM, and Unit rate specified for the line, the amount is calculated as Budgeted amount = Budgeted quantity * Unit rate.
Revised budgeted quantity

The revised budgeted quantity if the budget quantity has been revised for the project after the initial budgeting.

By default, this quantity is equal to the Budgeted quantity value specified for the line.
Revised budgeted amount

The revised budgeted amount if the budget amount has been revised for the project after the initial budgeting.

By default, this amount is equal to the Budgeted amount value specified for the line.
Budgeted CO quantity The budgeted change order quantity of the line. This is available, if the Change order workflow check box is selected on the project.
Budgeted CO amount The budgeted change order amount of the line. This is available, if the Change order workflow check box is selected on the project.
Amount limit

A check box that you select to be able to specify the Maximum amount.

This column is shown if the Use the revenue budget limits for time and material check box is selected on the Summary tab.
Maximum amount

The maximum invoiceable amount for the revenue budget line.

This column is shown if the Use the revenue budget limits for time and material check box is selected on the Summary tab.
Committed quantity

The total quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed amount

The total amount of commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed received quantity

The total received quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed invoiced quantity

The total invoiced quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed invoiced amount

The total invoiced amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed open quantity

The total open quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available onlyif the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed open amount

The total open amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Amount for draft invoices

If the Create pro forma on invoicing check box is selected for the project, the total amount of the lines of pro forma invoices for which the corresponding sales invoices have not been released yet.

If the Create pro forma on invoicing check box is cleared for the project, the column shows the total amount of unreleased sales invoices.
Actual quantity

The total quantity of the lines of the released sales invoices that correspond to the revenue budget line.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Actual amount The total amount of the lines of the released sales invoices that correspond to the revenue budget line.
Actual + open committed amount The sum of the Actual amount and Committed open amount values.
Variance amount The difference between the Revised amount and Actual + open committed amount values.
Completed (%)

The percentage of the work on the task that has been completed.

If the Pending invoice amount is manually changed, the Completed (%) is recalculated as follows: Completed (%) = (Draft invoices amount + Actual amount + Pending invoice amount) / Revised amount \* 100%.
Pending invoice amount

The amount to be invoiced on the next execution of the project invoicing process.

If the Completed (%) value is manually changed, the column values are recalculated as follows: Pending invoice amount = Revised amount \* Completed (% ) / 100 - (Actual amount + Draft invoices amount).
Performance (%) The task performance measure, which the system estimates as the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the actual amount to the revised budgeted amount.
VAT category

The VAT category for the revenue budget line.

By default, the system inserts the VAT category that has been specified for the item specified in the line.

If no item is selected in the line or the item has no VAT category defined, the system inserts into this column the VAT category of the task specified in the line. If the task also has no VAT category defined, this column is empty.

If the revenue budget line is copied from a template defined in the Project templates (PM208000) window, by default, the system inserts the VAT category defined in the template. If no VAT category is defined at the template level, the system selects the VAT category using the logic described in the previous paragraph.

You can override any default value the system inserts into this column.

If you change the item or task for the revenue budget line, the system changes the VAT category by using the logic described above.
## The Cost budget tab This tab lists all the project costs that can be created manually or generated by the project transactions and commitments or that can be generated for the corresponding project, project task, stock item, and expense account mapped to the account group. The **Cost budget update** setting in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window determines whether the system generates a cost budget line for each item or generates a single line with the empty item code for multiple cost transactions that have the same task and account group but different items.
Element Description
Project task A task on the project. If a task is selected, the table lists the revenue budget lines with only this task.
Task description The free-form description of the task you can enter.
Group by task

A check box that you select to make the table show all the revenue budget lines with the same task as a single line.

When the budget lines are grouped by task, the system shows the total for each numeric column of the table in the bottom-most row.
View commitments (button)

Opens the Commitments (PM306000) window in a pop-up window. It shows the list of commitments that correspond to the selected cost budget line.

This button is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
View transactions (button) Opens the Project transactions (PM304000) window in a pop-up window. It shows the list of project transactions that correspond to the selected cost budget line.
Project task A task on the project.
Item ID

The stock or non-stock stock item that is associated with the cost budget line.

The column is shown if Task and item is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the window for the project.
Cost code

The cost code that is associated with the cost budget line. You can change the cost code value for each line.

The column is shown if Task and cost code is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the window for the project.
Account group

The account group to which the corresponding expense account is mapped.

In addition to the account groups of the Expense type, you can select the Off-balance account groups for which the Expense check box is selected in the Account groups (PM201000) window.
Description The description of the cost budget line.
Original budgeted amount

The budgeted amount of the revenue budget line.

For the Budgeted quantity, UoM, and Unit rate specified for the line, the amount is calculated as Budgeted amount = Budgeted quantity * Unit rate.
UoM

The unit of measure of the cost budget line.

If a stock item is selected in the Item ID column, the UoM is automatically selected as the base unit of measure of this stock item and can be changed to another UoM available for the item.

If the cost budget line is created based on the project template selected in the Template field in the top part of this window, the system uses the UoM of the corresponding cost budget line of this project template. If no UoM is defined for the corresponding cost budget line of the selected project template, the system selects the UoM by using the logic described above.

If the item is not specified, any existing UoM can be selected.
Unit rate The price of the specified unit of the cost budget line.
Budgeted quantity The budgeted quantity of the task and optionally the stock item.
Budgeted amount The budgeted amount of the task and optionally the stock item. For the Budgeted quantity, UoM, and Unit rate specified for the line, the amount is calculated as Budgeted amount = Budgeted quantity * Unit rate.
Revised quantity The revised quantity if the budget quantity has been revised for the project after the initial budgeting.
Revised amount The revised amount if the budget amount has been revised for the project after the initial budgeting.
Budgeted CO quantity The budgeted change order quantity of the line. You can use this is available, if the Change order workflow check box is selected on the project.
Budgeted CO amount The budgeted change order amount of the line. You can use this is available, if the Change order workflow check box is selected on the project.
Committed quantity

The total quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed amount

The total amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed received quantity

The total received quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed invoiced quantity

The total invoiced quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed invoiced amount

The total invoiced amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed open quantity

The total open quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed open amount

The total open amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Actual quantity

The total quantity of the released Projects transactions that correspond to the cost budget line.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Actual amount The total amount of the released project transactions that correspond to the cost budget line.
Actual + open committed amount The sum of the Actual amount and Committed open amount values.
Variance quantity The difference between the Revised budgeted quantity and Actual quantity.
Variance amount The difference between the Revised amount and Actual + open committed amount values.
Performance (%) The task performance measure, which the system estimates as the percentage of the actual amount to the revised budgeted amount.
Automatically completed (%) When this check box is selected, the Completed (%) of the corresponding task is calculated automatically, based on the completion method of the task, which is specified in the Project tasks (PM302000) window.
Performance (%) The task performance measure, which the system estimates as the percentage of the actual amount to the revised budgeted amount.
Automatically completed (%) When this check box is selected, the Completed (%) of the corresponding task is calculated automatically, based on the completion method of the task, which is specified in the Project tasks (PM302000) window.
Revenue task The task for which the revenue budget is specified for the cost budget line.
Revenue item

The item for which the revenue budget is specified for the cost budget line.

This column is shown if Task and item is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of this window for the project.
## The Balances tab You use this tab to view the budget broken down by account groups.
Button Description
View transactions

Opens the Project transactions (PM304000) window in a pop-up window.

It shows the list of project transactions that correspond to the selected budget line.
View commitments

Opens the Commitments (PM306000) window in a pop-up window.

It window shows the list of commitments that correspond to the selected budget line.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Account group The group of accounts for which the actual and budgeted amounts are specified.
Description The description of the account group.
Original budgeted amount The amount budgeted for the project with respect to this account group.
Current budgeted amount The revised budgeted amount for the project with respect to this account group.
Actual amount The actual amount spent on the project with respect to this account group.
Performance (%) The project completion measure, estimated as the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the actual amount to the revised budgeted amount.
Budgeted CO quantity The budgeted change order quantity of the line. You can use this is available, if the Change order workflow check box is selected on the project.
Budgeted CO amount The budgeted change order amount of the line. You can use this is available, if the Change order workflow check box is selected on the project.
Committed amount

The total amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed open amount

The total open amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Committed invoiced amount

The total invoiced amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column is available only if the Internal commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Actual + open committed amount The sum of the Actual amount and Committed open amount values.
Variance amount The difference between the Revised amount and Actual + open committed amount values.
## The Commitments tab You use this tab to view purchase orders that have at least one line related to the project. ### The top part
Element Description
Show purchases When this check box is selected, you will see the purchase orders connected with the projects, which have purchases order types with the Commitment check box selected.
Show sales When this check box is selected, you will see the sales orders connected with the projects, which have sales order types with the Commitment check box selected.
### The table
Column Description
Workspace The workspace connected with the transactions.
Type The type of the purchase order.
Order no. The unique reference number of the purchase order.
Date The date the purchase order was created.

Customer/

supplier

 The number of the customer/supplier to/from which the items are sold/purchased.
Account name The name of the customer/supplier.
Order qty. The total quantity of the item that has been ordered, expressed in the unit of measure of the purchase order line.
Open qty. The quantity of the ordered items yet to be received for the purchase order.
Order total The total sum for the purchase order.
Currency The currency of the purchase order.
Status The status of the purchase order.
Line total The total amount of the line.
Order description The description of the sales or purchase order.
## The Customer invoice tab This tab lists all the invoices generated during various stages of project execution. If the invoicing workflow of the project includes the creation of pro forma invoices or the **Create pro forma on invoicing** check box is selected for the project and the sales invoices are listed in the same row with the pro forma invoice they were created based on.
Column Description
Invoicing number The serial number of the invoice that is being assigned to the invoices of the project in order of the creation of the invoices in accordance with the numbering sequence specified in the Pro forma number series field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Pro forma date The date of the pro forma invoice.
Pro forma ref. no. The reference number of the pro forma invoice.
Pro forma net amount in base currency The net amount of the pro forma invoice in the base currency.
Pro forma gross amount in base currency The gross amount of the pro forma invoice in the base currency.
Pro forma customer currency The customer currency of the pro forma invoice.
Pro forma gross amount in customer currency The gross amount of the pro forma invoice in the customer currency.
Pro forma net amount in customer currency The net amount of the pro forma invoice in the customer currency.
Description The description provided for the pro forma invoice.
Status The status of the pro forma invoice.
Invoice total The total amount of the pro forma invoice.
Doc. type The type of the customer ledger document.
Ref. no. customers The reference to the customer ledger document.
Doc. date The date of the customer ledger document.
Doc. status The status of the customer ledger document.
Doc. description The description of the customer ledger document.
Doc. amount The total amount of the customer ledger document.
Currency The currency of the invoice.
Open CL balance The current open balance of the invoice.
Customer doc. net amount The net amount of the customer document.
Open balance in currency The open balance of the invoice in currency.
## The Supplier invoices tab This tab displays the list of supplier documents associated with the project.
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier of the invoice assigned to the project.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference on the connected supplier document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the supplier document.
Description The description of the supplier document.
Date The date of the supplier document.
Type The type of supplier document.
Amount The amount of the document.
Status The status of the document.
Gross amount The gross amount of the document.
Net amount The net amount of the document.
Open balance The open balance of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Open balance in currency The open balance of the document in currency.
## The Change orders tab This tab lists change orders connected with the project. If the invoicing workflow of the project includes the creation of pro forma invoices or the **Create pro forma on invoicing** check box is selected for the project and the sales invoices are listed in the same row with the pro forma invoice they were created based on.
Column Description
Ref. no The reference number of the change order.
Class The class of the change order, which is defined in the Change order classes (PM203000) window.
Revenue change no.

The number of the change order that affect the project revenue within the project, which the system uses for printing.

The Revenue change no. is an integer that the system assigns sequentially, starting from 1 and then 2, 3, and so on. The last assigned number for the change orders of the project is shown in the Last revenue change no. field in the Project properties section of the Summary tab of this window.
Status

The status of the change order, which can be one of the following:

On hold
The change order is a draft that can be edited but cannot be released.
Open
The order is open.
Pending approval
The change order is pending the approval of the employee who has been assigned to approve the change order.
Rejected
The employee who was assigned to approve the change order has rejected it.
Open
The change order is ready to be released.
Closed
The change order has been released.
Description The description provided for the change order.
Change date The date on which the changes made with the change order should be recorded in the project balances.
Approval date The date that is communicated to the customer as the approval date of the agreed-upon changes.
External reference no The external reference number of the change order.
Revenue budget change total The total amount of the changes of the change order to the revenue budget of the project, which is the total of the Amount column on the Revenue budget tab of the Change orders (PM308000) window.
Commitments change total The total amount of the changes of the change order to the commitments of the project, which is the total of the Amount in base currency column on the Commitments tab of the Change orders (PM308000) window.
Cost budget change total The total amount of the changes of the change order to the cost budget of the project, which is the total of the Amount column on the Cost budget tab of the Change orders (PM308000) window.
Reverse status

The reverse status of the change order, which can be one of the following:

None
The change order is a normal change order.
Reversing
The change order is a reversing change order that reverses the impact of the original change order, whose reference number is shown in the Original CO ref. no. column.
Reversed
The change order that has been reversed.
Orig. CO ref. no The reference number of the original change order that the current change order reverses.
## The Activity history tab This tab displays the list of the activities that are associated with the project. If the **Restrict employees** check box is selected for the project on the **Summary** tab of this window, only the employees listed on the **Employees** tab of this window can add activities to the project. Activities cannot be added to a project with the **Completed** or **Cancelled** status. If activities have been added to a project that has the **In Planning** status, any related transactions cannot be released until the project status is set to **Active**. ### The activity type buttons
Button Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window in a pop-up window; you can use the window to create a new task associated with the project.
Add event Opens the Event (CR306030) window in a pop-up window; you can use the window to create a new event associated with the project.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window in a pop-up window; you can use the window to create and send an email associated with the project.
Add activity

Includes the following predefined menu commands:

Add note
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window, which you can use to create an activity with the Note type, in a pop-up window.
Add chat
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window, which you can use to create a new activity with the Chat type, in a pop-up window.
Add appointment
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window, which you can use to create a new activity with the Appointment type, in a pop-up window.
Add message
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window, which you can use to create a new activity with the Message type, in a pop-up window.
Add phone call
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window, which you can use to create a new activity with the Phone call type, in a pop-up window.
Add work item
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window, which you can use to create a new activity with the Work item type, in a pop-up window.
### The table columns In addition to the columns described below, the tab includes columns (labelled with icons) that you can use to attach notes and files to the activity, to check what priority level is specified for the activity, and whether the activity is completed.
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity. Click the link in this column for a specific activity to open the activity in a pop-up window.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Category The category of the activity.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time spent on the activity is invoiceable.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Overtime The time in excess of normal work hours spent on the activity.
Invoiceable time The number of invoiceable hours spent on the activity.
Invoiceable overtime The invoiceable time in excess of normal work hours spent on the activity.
Work group The work group to which the activity is assigned.
Owner The employee to whom the activity is assigned.
Created by The user who has created the activity.
Project The project connected with the activity.
Project task The project task connected with the activity.
Released This check box is selected if the activity has been released.
## The Employees tab The tab contains a list of the employees assigned to the project and the relevant details about each employee. If the **Restrict employees** check box is selected for the project on the **Summary** tab of this window, only the listed employees can create activities and documents associated with the current project, which includes creating activities on the **Activity history** tab of this window, time cards in the [Employee time card (EP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000/) window, or project transactions in the [Project transactions (PM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-pm304000/) window.
Column Description
Employee ID The ID of the employee assigned to the project.
Employee name The name of the employee assigned to the project.
Department The department of the employee.
Type of hour The hour type determines the labour cost of this employee with respect to the current project. You can create a new hour type by using the Type of hours (EP102000) window.
Description The description of the earning type.
Labour item The non-stock item of the Labour type used to account for the labour effort of the employee for this project.
Default price The price associated with the labour item by default.
## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you can select general ledger accounts that the system uses if the project is selected as the source of a particular account. ### The Default values section
Element Description
Default account

The account to be used as one of the sources of possible accounts for the invoices and transactions for the project.

This account is used as the expense account in project transactions if the Project option is selected in the Expense account source field in the Invoicing rules (PM207000) window.

This account is also used as the sales account for the invoice lines generated for the project by the invoicing rule with the Project selected in the Use sales account from field in the Invoicing rules (PM207000) window.
Default subaccount

The subaccount to be used as one of the sources of possible segment values for subaccounts to be used in the invoices and transactions for the project.

This subaccount is used as a source of segment values (to be used for project transactions) for the segments with the P option selected in the Expense sub. source field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

This subaccount is also used as a source of segment values for the sales subaccount for the invoice lines generated for the project by the invoicing rule with the P mask specified in the Sales subaccount mask field in the Invoicing rules (PM207000) window.
Accrual account The default accrual account to be used in project transactions for the project; also, this account is used as the default expense accrual account for transactions if the Project accrual option is selected in the Expense accrual account source field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Accrual subaccount The default accrual subaccount to be used in project transactions for the project; also, this subaccount is used as a source of segment values for the expense accrual subaccount (to be used for project transactions) for the segments with the P option selected in the Expense accrual sub. source field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
### The Default task for the general ledger account table When you create a document, you specify a project task for each transaction where it is applicable. However, no project task is specified for an automatically added transaction (such as a freight transaction added to an Customer ledger invoice), which causes an error. You use this table to map project tasks to the accounts that may be used in transactions automatically added to documents. If the same mapping should be used for multiple similar projects, you specify the corresponding rules by using the [Project templates (PM208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000/) window.
Column Description
Account The General ledger account that may appear in a transaction that is automatically added by the system to the documents associated with this project.
Default task The task of this project to be associated with the account.
## The Attributes tab On the **Attributes** tab, you can view, add, change, or delete attribute values for the project. The project-related attributes are selected in the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window.
Column Description
Attribute The attribute used for the project.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that this attribute is required for the project.
Value The value of the attribute for the project.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of predefined mailings that can be used for electronically (by email) sending the customer pro forma invoices and other documents related to the project. When a new project is created, the system copies to the project all the default mailing settings from the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. You can override these default settings. ### The Mailing table You use this table to view and modify the list of active mailings that can be used to send emails to the customer. For each mailing, you can select either a report or a email template to be used by default as the body of the email.
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique ID of the mailing.
Branch The branch of your company with which this mailing is associated.
Email account The email account to be used for as the sender of emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default email account, which is defined in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, will be used.
Report The report to be used by default for printing an invoice for the project and as the body or attachment of the email. The report you select here must be a report in the Projects workspace
Notification template The email template, which is defined in the Notification templates (SM204003) window, to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is used rather than a report.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no preferences have been specified for a particular recipient in the Customers (AR303000) window (for customer contacts). Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, this mailing is active. Emails will be generated only for active mailings. For the PROFORMA mailing, you cannot clear this check box.
### The Recipients table You use this table to view and modify the list of default types of recipients for the selected mailing.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails:

Primary
A primary contact of the customer
Employee
An employee of your company who handles documents of the project
Contact
One of the contacts of the customer
Contact ID The specific contact. A particular recipient can be selected only if you have selected Employee or Contact as the Contact type. The selected employee or contact will receive the emails.
Email The email address associated with the contact.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to recipients. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact is active. Only active recipients receive the emails generated for this mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact will receive a bcc of the emails.
## The Webhook notifications tab The Webhook notifications tab is visible only if the **Webhook notifications** check box is selected. In this tab you can see all triggered events from the Project window. Every time you make change in this window and save, a new notification will be created and sent to the recipient. ### The top part
Element Description
View notification feedback Opens the Webhook notification feedback window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.
Resend notification Is used to resend the notification.
### The table
Column Description
Success Indicates if the message has been sent successfully or not.
Event Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated.
Status Indicates the status of the message. If the source is Visma Net, the status can be sent or resent. If the source is an API, the status is available meaning it is ready to be sent to third party integrators. If the source is Third party-integrators, the status is Consumed meaning that the customer confirms receiving the message.
Source Indicates the source of the event: VNE, API, or Third Party-Integrators.
User Indicates which user made a change to the entity.
Date Indicates the date when the change was made.
Message Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project accounting preferences (PM101000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000 page You use this window to set up the Projects workspace and to establish appropriate project management settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project accounting preferences (PM101000) You use this window to set up the Projects workspace and to establish appropriate project management settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The General information tab Here, you will find the general settings of the Projects workspace. ### The General settings section
Element Description
Transaction number series The system uses this number to automatically assign reference numbers to project-related transactions.
Batch number series The system uses this number to assign reference numbers to project-related batches.
Pro forma number series The number series the system uses to assign reference numbers to pro forma invoices.
Non-project code

The project ID that indicates that a specific transaction or task is not related to any project. The default value is X.

When the Projects workspace is integrated with other modules, data entry windows in those modules include the Project column, where the user must specify the project associated with the transaction. You must enter the non-project code specified here if a transaction is not associated with any project.
Empty item code

The code to be specified as the Item ID to indicate that no specific item is associated with a project transaction, commitment, budget line of a project, or pro forma invoice line. In the Projects workspace, if a window includes the mandatory Item ID column where the user must specify an item, the system automatically populates this column with the empty item code, which the user can replace with the identifier of a particular item.

The default empty item code is <N/A>; you can specify a different code if needed. The default UoM of the empty item code is HOUR. In the windows of the Projects workspace, when the empty item code is selected as the Item ID, you can select any other UoM instead of HOUR.

The empty item code is treated as a real item in the Projects workspace, which gives users the opportunity to use this value in inquiries filtered by item, or to filter the rows in the windows of the Projects workspace by the empty item code you specify.

In other workspaces, the empty item code is not supported and treated as NULL. For example, if a pro forma invoice has lines with the empty item code selected as the Item ID in the Pro forma invoices (PM307000) window, when the pro forma invoice is released, the system creates a sales invoice that has an empty Item ID setting in the corresponding lines in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Invoiceable cut-off date

In the Run project invoicing (PM503000) window, you have specified an Invoice date.

Now, you can choose whether you want to include or exclude the transactions that are created on the invoice date for the automatic invoices. Select one of the following options:

  • Include transactions created on invoice date
  • Exclude transactions created on invoice date
Validate revenue budget limits for time and material

Defines how the system validates the limits of the revenue budget of a project when you process pro forma invoices for the project. You can select one of the following options:

Ignore
The system shows a warning message when revenue budget limits are exceeded.
Validate
(default): The system shows an error message when revenue budget limits are exceeded.
Cost budget update

The way the system updates the cost budget of projects with cost transactions.

When a cost transaction is posted to the Projects workspace, the system updates the corresponding project with this transaction.

If the cost budget of the project has a line with the same project task, account group, and item, the system updates the actual quantity and actual amount of this line on the Cost budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window with the quantity and amount of the transaction, respectively.

Otherwise, the system adds a new cost budget line.

The account group is the group to which the expense account updated by the transaction is mapped. The item is the item of the cost transaction or the empty item code based on the option selected in the Cost budget update field. You can select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): The system updates the cost budget line that has the same item as in the cost transaction. If the cost budget has no line that has this item, a new line with the item is added.
Summary
The system updates the cost budget line with the empty item code selected as the item, regardless of the item of the cost transaction. If the cost budget has no line with the empty item code, a new line with the empty item code is added.
Automatically post on release A check box that determines whether project transactions will be automatically posted to General ledger once they are released.
Automatically release allocations

A check box that indicates whether Projects allocation transactions will be automatically released when generated.

If you do not select this check box, you will be able to release the project allocation transactions manually by using the Release transactions (PM501000) window.
Internal cost commitment tracking If you select this check box,, purchase orders are tracked by project as cost commitment.
Internal revenue commitment tracking If you select this check box, sales orders are tracked by project as revenue commitment.
### The Visibility settings section By using the check boxes in this section, you can select the workspaces you want to integrate with the Projects workspace.
Option Description
General ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the General ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in general ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Supplier ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in supplier ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Customer ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Customer ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in customer ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Sales

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Sales workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in sales documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Purchases

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Purchases workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in purchase documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Inventory

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Inventory workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in inventory documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Cash management

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Cash management workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this option, users can select the associated project and task when they enter a document in the Cash management workspace.
Time entries

A check box that indicates whether the transactions in the Time and expenses workspace can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Expenses

A check box that indicates whether transactions from Expense can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Restrict available projects in customer ledger Select where the project selection list will be restricted, either for all projects or projects with a customer (in the customer ledger only).
### The Account settings section These elements define the rules for selecting the expense account and expense subaccount to be used in transactions generated in the Projects workspace on release of time cards.
Element Description
Expense account source

The source of the account for the debit side of the project transactions: The following options are available:

Labour item
Select this option to have the system use in projects transactions the default account associated with the labour item specified on the time card. For labour items, the default expense account is specified in the Expense account field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Project
Select this option to have the system use in project transactions the default account associated with the underlying project and specified in the Default account field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window.
Task
Select this option to have the system use in project transactions the default account associated with the underlying task and specified in the Default account field on the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window.
Resource
Select this option to have the system use in project transactions the default account associated with the employee. For employees, the default expense account is specified in the Expense account field on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.
Expense sub. source

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the expense subaccount to be used for project transactions. For a segment, the character designating the needed option is repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment. To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

E
The subaccount associated with the employee specified in the time card. For employees, the default expense subaccount is specified in the Expense sub. field on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.
I
The subaccount associated with the non-stock item (labour item) used in the time card. For labour items, the default expense subaccount is specified in the Expense sub. field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
P
The subaccount associated with the project and specified in the Default subaccount field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
T
The subaccount associated with the project task and specified in the Default subaccount field on the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window.

This element is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expense accrual account source

The source of the account for the credit side of the project transaction to be generated on release of the time cards. The following options are available:

Labour item accrual
Select this option to use by default in project transactions the accrual account associated with the labour item on the time card. For labour items, this account is specified in the Expense accrual account field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Project accrual
Select this option to use in project transactions the accrual account associated with the project and specified in the Accrual account field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
Task accrual
Select this option to use by default in project transactions the default account associated with the task and specified in the Accrual account field on the Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window.
Expense accrual sub. source

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount to be used for the Projects transactions generated on release of time cards.

For a segment, the character designating the needed option is repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment. To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

E
The default accrual expense subaccount associated with the employee specified in the time card. For employees, the default expense subaccount is specified in the Expense sub. field on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.
I
The default expense accrual subaccount associated with the non-stock item (labour item) used in the time card. For labour items, the default accrual subaccount is specified in the Expense accrual sub. field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
P
The default accrual subaccount associated with the project and specified in the Accrual subaccount field on the General ledger accounts tab of the Projects (PM301000) window.
T
The default accrual subaccount associated with the project task and specified in the Accrual subaccount field on Summary tab of the Project tasks (PM302000) window.

This element is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of predefined mailings that you can use for printing and electronically (by email) sending documents related to projects to customers. When a new project or a project template is created, the mailing settings specified on this tab are copied to the project or the project template. ### The Default sources table By using the **Default sources** table, you can view and modify the list of active mailings that can be used to send emails for projects. For each mailing, you can select either a report or an email template to be used by default as the body of the email.
Column Description
Mailing ID

The unique identifier of the mailing. Visma Net provides two predefined system mailings:

PROFORMA
The mailing is used to print and email pro forma invoices.
INVOICE
The mailing is used to print and email sales invoices that originate from the Projects workspace.
Default email account

The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing.

If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report ID

The report of the Projects workspace to be used by default for printing and also as the body or attachment of the email, if a report is used rather than an email template. By default, the following reports are used for the predefined system mailings:

PROFORMA
The Pro forma invoices (PM307000) report
INVOICE
The Project invoice (PM641000) report, which is a copy of the Invoice/note (AR641000) report
Notification template The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is used rather than a report. This template is defined in the Notification templates (SM204003) window.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no preferences have been specified for a particular recipient. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active.

Emails can be generated only for active mailings. For the PROFORMA mailing, this check box is automatically selected and cannot be cleared.
### The Default recipients table You use the **Default recipients** table to view and modify the list of default types of recipients for the selected mailing. The contact types specified in the table are used as the default values for the contact types for projects.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails:

Primary
A primary contact of the project
Employee
An employee of your company who handles documents of the project
Contact ID

The specific contact.

A particular recipient can be selected only if you have selected Employee as the Contact type.
Format

The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to recipients of this type.

Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact of this type is active.

Only active recipients receive the emails generated for this mailing.
BCC A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact of this type will receive a blind carbon copy (BCC) of the emails.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project attributes (PM202000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000 page An attribute group is a collection of additional elements to gather and store information related to specific entity types: projects, tasks, or account groups. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project attributes (PM202000) An attribute group is a collection of additional elements to gather and store information related to specific entity types: projects, tasks, or account groups. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. An attribute group is a collection of additional elements to gather and store information related to specific entity types: projects, tasks, or account groups. If a group is defined for the entity type, the attributes will be displayed on the **Attributes** tab of the corresponding window, so that users can specify them when they create an entity of that type. By using this window, you can create, view, modify, and delete attribute groups. To define the attributes, you use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. Only one group of attributes can be defined for each entity type used in the Projects workspace. ## The top part In this area, you can select the entity type and then create, modify, or delete its attribute group.
Element Description
Name

The entity type for which you want to specify the attribute group. The following options are available:

Project
The listed attributes will be added to the Projects (PM301000) window.
Task
To add the listed attributes to the Project tasks (PM302000) window.
Account group
To add the listed attributes to the Account groups (PM201000) window.
## The table In the table, you can create the list of attributes to be used for the specified entity type.
Column Description
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the attribute is available for all records of a particular type.

You can deactivate an obsolete attribute by clearing the check box.
Attribute ID The attribute ID.
Description A read-only field showing the description that has been provided for the attribute.
Sort order An integer that defines the position of the attribute in the list of attributes available for the entity type. You should specify 1 for the first attribute you want to be listed, 2 for the second, and so on.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that the user must specify a value for this attribute in the appropriate data entry window.
Control type A read-only box displaying the element type of the attribute: Text, Combo, Check box, or Date-time.

Related pages

Tasks

 Project balance (PM40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-balance-pm40102s page This report shows the project balances for projects you wish to see. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project balance (PM40102S) This report shows the project balances for projects you wish to see. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the project balances for projects you wish to see. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select the projects whose balances you want to view in the table.
Element Description
View project (button) Opens the Projects (PM301000) window, where you can view the details of a project you select.
From project The ID of the project you want to start your selection from.
To project The ID of the project to you want to end your selection at.
Project manager The project manager of the projects you want view in the table.
Customer The customer connected to the projects you want view in the table.
Start date The start date of the range of projects you want to view in the table.
End date The end date of the range of projects you want to view in the table.
Account group The account group of the projects you want to view in the table.
Status The status of the projects that you want to view in the table.
## The table
Element Description
Project The ID of the project.
Project name The name of the project.
Customer The name of the customer of the project.
Customer no. The number of the customer of the project.
Account group The name of the account group of the project.
Account group ID The ID of the account group of the project.
Current budget amount The current budget amount of the project.
Actual amount The actual amount of the project.
Difference The difference between the current budget amount and the actual amount.
Performance The performance of the project.
Status The status of the project.

Related pages

Tasks

 Project budget (PM309000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-budget-pm309000 page By using this window, you can do the following: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project budget (PM309000) By using this window, you can do the following: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + Add and update budget records of any type for any project + View transactions and commitments that correspond to budget lines + Upload to and export budget lines of any type from Excel + Import and export budget lines of any type with the help of integration scenarios ## The window toolbar
Element Description
View transactions Opens the Project transactions (PM304000) window in a pop-up window. This window shows the list of project transactions that correspond to the selected budget line.
View commitment details

Opens the Commitments (PM306000) window in a pop-up window. This window shows the list of commitments that correspond to the selected budget line.

This button appears if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.
## The table
Element Description
Project The identifier of the project.
Project task The identifier of a project task. If you select a project that has the default project task, this task is automatically populated in the column.
Item ID The item that is associated with the budget line. By default, the system populates this column with the empty item code, which is initially N/A and can be changed in the Empty item code field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Cost code

The cost code that is associated with the budget line. You can change the cost code value for each line.

The column is shown if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account group The account group of the budget line.
Description The detailed description of the budget line.
UoM The unit of measure of the budget line. If a stock item is selected in the Item ID column, the UoM column is automatically filled in with the base unit of measure of this stock item, which can be changed to another UoM available for the item.
Original budgeted quantity The budgeted quantity of the budget line.
Unit rate The price of the specified unit of the budget line.
Original budgeted amount The budgeted amount of the budget line. For the original budgeted quantity, UoM, and unit rate specified for the line, the amount is calculated as Original budgeted amount = Original budgeted quantity * Unit rate.
Revised budgeted quantity If the Change order workflow check box is cleared for the project on the Summary tab of the Projects (PM301000) window, you can change the quantity manually.
Revised budgeted amount The revised budgeted amount if the original budget amount has been revised for the project after the initial budgeting. By default, this amount is equal to the Original budgeted amount value specified for the line.
Revised committed quantity

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.

This column appears if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.
Revised committed amount

The total amount of commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column appears if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.
Committed revised quantity)

The total received quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column appears if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed invoiced quantity

The total invoiced quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group. This column appears if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed invoiced amount

The total invoiced amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column appears if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.
Committed open quantity

The total open quantity of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column appears if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.

The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Committed open amount

The total open amount of the commitments that are associated with the project, project task, and account group.

This column appears only if at least one of the following check boxes is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window: Internal cost commitment tracking or Revenue commitment tracking.
Actual quantity The total quantity of the lines of the released customer invoices that correspond to the budget line. The quantity is updated only if the UoM is specified in the budget line and if the system can convert the UoM of the document line to the UoM of the budget line by using the list of unit conversions defined in the Units of measure (CS203100) window.
Actual amount The total amount of the lines of the released customer invoices that correspond to the budget line.
Type

The type of the account group of the budget line that can be one of the following:

Asset
The account group may include asset and liability accounts.
Liability
The account group may include liability and asset accounts.
Income
The account group may include income, expense and liability accounts.
Expense
The account group may include expense and income accounts.
Off-balance
The account group is used to track statistical information.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Project list (PM40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-list-pm40101s page You use the elements in this area to select the projects you want to view in the table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project list (PM40101S) You use the elements in this area to select the projects you want to view in the table. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select the projects you want to view in the table.
Element Description
View project (button) Opens the Projects (PM301000) window, where you can view the details of a project you select.
From project The ID of the project you want to start your selection from.
To project The ID of the project to you want to end your selection at.
Project manager The project manager of the projects you want view in the table.
Customer The customer connected to the projects you want view in the table.
Start date The start date of the range of projects you want to view.
End date The end date of the range of projects you want to view.
Status The status of the projects that you want to view in the table.
## The table
Column Description
Project ID The ID of the project.
Project name The name of the project.
Project manager The manager of the project.
Completed (%) The percentage of the project that has been completed.
Start date The start date of the project.
End date The end date of the project.
Customer The customer of the project.
Currency The currency of the project.
Allocation rule The allocation rule that applies to the project.
Status The status of the project.
Project revenue and cost (PM40103S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-revenue-and-cost-pm40103s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project revenue and cost (PM40103S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
View project (button) Opens the Projects (PM301000) window, where you can view the details of a project you select.
From project The ID of the project you want to start your selection from.
To project The ID of the project to you want to end your selection at.
Project manager Use this field to filter projects belonging to a specific project manager.
Customer Use this field to filter projects belonging to a specific customer.
Start date The start date of the project. To change the date, you can either type a specific date into the date field, or select it by using the calendar.
End date The end date of the project. To change the date, you can either type a specific date into the date field, or select it by using the calendar.
Status

The status of the projects that you want to view in the table:

In planning
This status is automatically assigned to any new project with the Hold check box selected and reflects that the project is a draft and not available for selection in data entry windows.
Active
The project can be associated with documents and activities in data entry windows in the modules integrated with the Projects module.
Completed
All tasks for the project have been completed.
Cancelled
Project is stopped before its completion. A cancelled project can be activated again.
Suspended
All activities on the project are suspended. A suspended project can be re-activated or cancelled.
## The table
Element Description
Project ID The ID of the project.
Project name The name of the project.
Budget revenue The budget revenue of the project.
Actual revenue The actual revenue of the project.
Budget cost The budget cost of the project.
Actual cost The actual cost of the project.
Net revenue The net revenue of the project.
Gross margin (%) The gross margin of the project, shown in percentage.
Project tasks (PM302000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000 page You can use this window to do the following: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project tasks (PM302000) You can use this window to do the following: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + Add new tasks to projects + View and modify the settings of existing project tasks + Delete tasks from projects ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to add a new task or to select an existing task and view its details.
Element Description
Project ID The project to which the task is assigned.
Task ID The unique identifier of the task. The structure of this identifier is defined by the PROTASK segmented key, whose configuration is defined in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.
Description A detailed description of the task.
Status

The status of the project task, which can be one of the following:

In planning
Use this status, which is automatically assigned to a new task, if the task is a draft. Tasks with this status are not available for selection in data entry windows.
Active
Select this status when the task is active and should be available for selection in data entry windows.
Completed
Assign this status when the task is completed.
Cancelled
Select this status if task execution has been stopped before task completion. A cancelled task can be activated again.
Default If this check box is selected, the project task has been set as the default.
## The Summary tab This tab includes the general information about the project task. ### The Task properties section
Element Description
Planned start date The date when the task is expected to start.
Planned end date The date when the task is expected to end.
Start date

The actual start date of the task.

When the status of the project task is changed to Active, the system automatically specifies the current business date as the task’s start date.
End date

The actual end date of the task.

When the status of the task is changed to Completed, the system automatically specifies this date as the current business date.
Completion method

The method of calculating the percentage of completion of the task. The following options are available:

Manual
Users manually specify the task completion percentage for each task in the Completed (%) field.
Budgeted quantity
The system automatically calculates the task completion percentage based on the total actual and revised budgeted quantities of the budget lines selected to be used for the calculation.
Budgeted amount
The system automatically calculates the task completion percentage based on the total actual and revised budgeted amounts of the budget lines selected to be used for the calculation. If the original budgets were revised at some point in the task progress for any of the budget lines, the completion percentage is calculated with respect to the revised budget amounts.

For more information, see: About the calculation of task completion percentage
Completed (%)

The actual percentage of task completion, which is determined as follows:

  • If the Manual option is selected in the Completion method field, the percentage is entered manually by a user.
  • If the Budgeted quantity option is selected in the Completion method field, the percentage is calculated automatically as the actual quantity divided by the budgeted quantity for the budget line that has the check box selected in the Production column on the Budget tab.
  • If the Budgeted amount option is selected in the Completion method field, the percentage is calculated automatically as the total actual amount divided by the total budgeted amount for the budget lines that have the check boxes selected in the Production column.

The value is set to 100 once the task is completed.

The completion percentage is used in revenue allocations for the project. For more information, see: About labour and revenue allocation
Approver The employee who is authorised to approve the time activities related to this project task.
Restrict employees A check box that (if selected) indicates that only the employees listed on the Employees tab of this window can create activities and documents associated with the current project task.
### The Invoicing and allocation settings section
Element Description
Invoice separately A check box that indicates (if selected) that the task should be invoiced by a separate invoice.
Customer The customer associated with the task.
Location The customer location associated with the task. This element is available if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Allocation rule The allocation rule to be used for this project task.
Invoicing rule The rule that the system uses to run invoicing for the task.
Branch The branch of your company with which this task is associated.
Rate table The rate table to be used for this project task.
Invoicing option

The way the task becomes eligible for invoicing. You can select one of the following options:

By invoicing period
The task is available for invoicing on demand for the projects with the On demand invoicing period and is available for invoicing at the end of the invoicing period specified for the project with another invoicing period.
On task completion
The task can be invoiced only when it is completed.
On project completion
The task is available for invoicing when the project is completed.
WIP account group The work-in-progress account group associated with the task.
### The Default values section
Element Description
Default account The account to be used as one of the sources of possible accounts for the invoices and transactions for the task.
Default subaccount The subaccount to be used as one of the sources of possible segment values for subaccounts to be used in the invoices and transactions for the task.
Accrual account The account to be used as an expense accrual account in the transactions that are generated for the task.
Accrual subaccount The subaccount to be used as an expense accrual subaccount in the transactions that are generated for the task.
VAT category The VAT category (if applicable) to be used as the default VAT category for the task.
### The Visibility settings section
Option Description
General ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the General ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in general ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Supplier ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in supplier ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Customer ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Customer ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in customer ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Sales

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Sales workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in sales documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Purchases

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Purchases workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in purchase documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Inventory

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Inventory workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in inventory documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Cash management

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Cash management workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this option, users can select the associated project and task when they enter a document in the Cash management workspace.
Time entries

A check box that indicates whether the transactions in the Time and expenses workspace can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Expenses

A check box that indicates whether transactions from Expense can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
## The Recurring invoicing tab On the **Recurring invoicing** tab, you can implement a regular flat-rate invoicing model. An invoicing rule with at least one step is required for the project task to make the system produce an invoice even with a single recurring invoicing line.
Column Description
Non-stock item The non-stock item that designates a service or labour associated with the task.
Description The description of the service or labour associated with the task.
Item fee The flat price for the service or labour.
Account source

The source of the account for the invoicing transactions, which can be one of the following:

Recurring item
The sales account associated with the non-stock item specified for the row
Project
The sales account associated with the project
Task
The sales account specified for the row in the Account column
Customer
The sales account associated with the customer
Subaccount mask

The rule for selecting segment values for the subaccount to be used for recurring invoicing transactions. To set up the rule for selecting segment values, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

B
The subaccount associated with the non-stock item specified for the row
P
The subaccount associated with the project
T
The subaccount specified for the row in the Subaccount column
Account The account to be used in the invoicing transaction if the account source is set to Task.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used in the invoicing transaction if the subaccount mask uses T.
Reset usage

The setting that indicates whether the system resets the quantity of the service or labour, which is specified as the Included value, when invoicing is performed. You can select one of the following options:

Never
Visma Net carries over any used amount to the next period.
On invoicing
The system resets the quantity of the service or labour when invoicing is performed. Any unused hours of service in the current period are not carried over to the next period.
Included The quantity of the service or labour that you plan to provide when executing this task.
UoM The unit of measure used for the service or labour.
Used The quantity of the service or labour that was actually provided to the customer when this task was executed. If you select On invoicing as the Reset usage, the value in this column resets to zero each time you run the invoicing procedure.
## The Activity history tab This tab displays the list of activities (including emails and events) associated with the project task.
Element Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window in a pop-up window so you can create a new task associated with the project.
Add event Opens the Event (CR306030) window in a pop-up window so you can create a new event associated with the project.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window in a pop-up window so you can create and send an email associated with the project.
Add activity

Includes the following menu commands:

Add chat
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window in a pop-up window so you can create a new activity with the Chat type.
Add appointment
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window in a pop-up window so you can create a new activity with the Appointment type.
Add message
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window in a pop-up window so you can create a new activity with the Message type.
Add note
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window in a pop-up window to let you create an activity with the Note type.
Add phone call
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window in a pop-up window so you can create a new activity with the Phone Call type.
Add work item
Opens the Activity (CR306010) window in a pop-up window so you can create a new activity with the Work Item type.

If you added activities to the project task that is in the In planning status, any related transactions cannot be released until the project task status changes to Active.
Type The type of activity: Event, Task, Email, or Activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity. Click the Summary column of a specific activity to open the activity in a separate dialog box.
Status The status of the activity.
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Category The category of the activity.
Invoiceable A check box indicating whether the time spent on the activity is invoice able.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Overtime The time in excess of normal work hours spent on the activity.
Invoiceable time The number of invoiceable hours spent on the activity.
Invoiceable overtime The number of invoiceable hours spent on the activity in excess of normal work hours.
Work group The work group to which the activity is assigned.
Owner The employee to whom the activity is assigned.
## The Attributes tab On this tab, you can specify attribute values for the project task. The task-related attributes are selected in the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window.
Element Description
Attribute The attribute used for the task.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that this attribute is required for the project task.
Value The value of the attribute for the task.
## The Employees tab If the **Restrict employees** check box is selected for the project task on the **Summary** tab of this window, this tab is visible. Only the employees listed here will be able to create activities and documents associated with the current project task, including creating activities on the **Activity history** tab of this window, creating time cards in the [Employee time card (EP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000/) window, or creating project transactions in the [Project transactions (PM304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-pm304000/) window.
Element Description
Employee ID The identifier of the employee assigned to the project task.
Employee name The name of the employee assigned to the project task.
Department The department of the employee.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project task list (PM40105S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-task-list-pm40105s page You use the elements in this area to select the project tasks you want to view in the table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project task list (PM40105S) You use the elements in this area to select the project tasks you want to view in the table. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select the project tasks you want to view in the table.
Element Description
View project (button) Opens the Projects (PM301000) window, where you can view the details of a project you select.
Type The type of projects you want to view in the table.
From project The ID of the project you want to start your selection from.
To project The ID of the project to you want to end your selection at.
Project manager The project manager of the projects you want view in the table.
Customer The customer connected to the projects you want view in the table.
Start date The start date of the range of projects you want to view.
End date The end date of the range of projects you want to view.
Status The status of the projects that you want to view in the table.
## The table
Column Description
Project ID The ID of the project.
Project name The name of the project.
Task ID The task ID of the project task.
Description The description of the project.
Type The type of the project.
Status The status of the project.
Allocation rule The allocation rule that applies to the project.
Invoicing option The invoicing option applied to the project.
Start date The start date of the project.
End date The end date of the project.
Completed (%) The percentage of the project that has been completed.
Current budget amount The current budget amount of the project.
Actual amount The actual amount of the project.
Expected amount The expected amount of the project.
Actual vs. expected amount % The actual versus the expected amount of the project in %.
Project template tasks (PM208010) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-template-tasks-pm208010 page You can use this window to create tasks for project templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project template tasks (PM208010) You can use this window to create tasks for project templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create tasks for project templates. If the **Automatically include in project** check box is selected for the template task, it will be included in any created project that uses the associated project template. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to add a new template task, or to view the details of an existing template task.
Element Description
Template ID The identifier of the project template to be associated with the task. Select one of the project templates defined in your system.
Task ID The unique identifier of the template task. The structure of this identifier is defined by the PROTASK segmented key, which was configured in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.
Description The description of the template task.
Default If this check box is selected, the project task has been set as the default.
## The Summary tab This tab includes general information about the template task. ### The Task properties section
Element Description
Automatically include in project A check box that (if selected) indicates that the system should include this template task in any project created by using the associated project template.
Completion method

The method of calculating the percentage of completion for tasks based on this task template. The following options are available:

Manual
Users manually specify the task completion percentage for each task in the Completed (%) field.
Budgeted quantity
The system automatically calculates the task completion percentage based on the total actual and revised budgeted quantities of the budget lines selected to be used for the calculation.
Budgeted amount
The system automatically calculates the task completion percentage based on the total actual and revised budgeted amounts of the budget lines selected to be used for the calculation. If the original budgets were revised at some point in the task progress for any of the budget lines, the completion percentage is calculated with respect to the revised budget amounts.

For more information, see: About the calculation of task completion percentage
Approver The employee who is authorised to approve all task activities for tasks based on this task template.
### The Invoicing and allocation settings section
Element Description
Invoice separately A check box that indicates (if selected) that the tasks created based on this template task are being invoiced by a separate invoice.
Allocation rule The rule that Visma Net uses to run allocation for the tasks created based on this template task.
Invoicing rule The rule that Visma Net uses to run invoicing for the tasks created based on this template task.
Branch The branch of your company with which the tasks created based on this template task are associated.
Rate table The rate table to be used for the tasks created based on this template task.
Invoicing option

The way the task becomes eligible for invoicing. You can select one of the following options:

By invoicing period
The task is available for invoicing on demand for the projects with the On demand invoicing period and is available for invoicing at the end of the invoicing period specified for the project with another invoicing period.
On task completion
The task can be invoiced only when it is completed.
On project completion
The task is available for invoicing at the end of the project.
Work un progress account group The work-in-progress account group associated with the tasks created based on this template task.
### The Default values section
Element Description
Default account The account to be used as one of the sources of possible accounts for the invoices and transactions for the task based on this task template.
Default subaccount The subaccount to be used as one of the sources of possible segment values for subaccounts to be used in the invoices and transactions for the task based on this task template.
Accrual account The account to be used as an expense accrual account in transactions generated for the task based on this task template.
Accrual subaccount The subaccount to be used as an expense accrual subaccount in transactions generated for the task based on this task template.
VAT category The VAT category (if applicable) to be used as the default VAT category for the task based on this template task.
### The Visibility settings section
Element Description
General ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the General ledger workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this template task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in general ledger documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Supplier ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this template task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in supplier ledger documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Customer ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Customer ledger workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this template task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in customer ledger documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Sales

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Sales workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this template task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in sales documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Purchases

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Purchases workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this template task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in purchase documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Inventory

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Inventory workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this template task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in inventory documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Cash management

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Cash management workspace can be associated with tasks created by using this template task.

With this check box selected, users can select the task in cash management, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Time entries

A check box that indicates whether the transactions of the Employee time card (EP305000) and Employee time activities (EP307000) windows (in the Time and expenses s workspace) can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the task in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the task data.
Expenses

A check box that indicates whether transactions from Expense can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
## The Recurring invoicing tab By using the **Recurring invoicing** tab, you can implement a regular flat-rate invoicing model. For instance: You can use this tab in the following scenario. Suppose that the project task stipulates that you provide 100 hours of service to a customer for a flat rate of €500 on monthly basis. When you run invoicing for the project, €500 is automatically invoiced to the customer's account, while any extra hours (beyond 100 hours) are charged at a rate based on your invoicing rules.
Column Description
Non-stock item The non-stock item that designates the service or labour that is associated with the task created by using this template task.
Description The description of the service or labour that is associated with the task created by using this template task.
Item fee The flat price for the service or labour.
Account source

The source of the account for the invoicing transactions, which can be one of the following:

Recurring item
The sales account associated with the non-stock item specified for the row
Project
The sales account associated with the project
Task
The sales account specified for the row in the Account column
Customer
The sales account associated with the customer
Subaccount mask

The rule for selecting segment values for the subaccount to be used for recurring invoicing transactions. To set up the rule for selecting segment values, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

B
The subaccount associated with the non-stock item specified for the row
P
The subaccount associated with the project
T
The subaccount specified for the row in the Subaccount column
Account The account to be used in the invoicing transaction if the account source is set to Task.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used in the invoicing transaction if the subaccount mask uses T.
Reset usage

The setting that indicates whether the system resets the quantity of the service or labour, which is specified as the Included value, when invoicing is performed. You can select one of the following options:

Never
Visma Net carries over any used amount to the next period.
On invoicing
The system resets the quantity of the service or labour when invoicing is performed. Any unused hours of service in the current period are not carried over to the next period.
Included

The quantity of the service or labour that is included in invoicing period.

If the quantity of service or labour provided to customer exceeds this value for the current invoicing period, all extra quantity is charged at the regular rate.
UoM The unit of measure used for the service or labour.
## The Attributes tab By using the **Attributes** tab, you can specify attributes for this template task. The attributes on this tab are those with the **Task** type in the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window.
Column Description
Attribute The attribute ID.
Required A check box that you select to indicate that this is a mandatory attribute.
Value The value of the attribute for this template task.
Project templates (PM208000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-templates-pm208000 page In this window, you can add, view, modify, and delete project templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project templates (PM208000) In this window, you can add, view, modify, and delete project templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to add a new project template, or to select an existing project template and view its details.
Element Description
Template ID

The unique identifier for the project template.

The structure of this identifier is defined by the PROJECT segmented key, which was configured using the Segment keys (CS202000) window.
Status

The status of the project template. You can select one of the following options:

Active
The project template is active and can be used for creating projects.
On hold
The template is inactive and cannot be used to create projects.
Description A detailed description of the template.
## The Summary tab You use this tab to provide details for the project template. ### Project properties section
Element Description
Revenue budget level

The detail level of the revenue budget for the projects created by using this template: options:

Task
The project revenue is budgeted at the task level.
Task and item
The project revenue is budgeted at the task ( Task ID ) and item ( Stock ID ) level. The option is not available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project manager The person who is responsible for managing the project and authorised to approve the project task and task activities (for projects based on this template).
Restrict employees A check box that you select to allow time cards to be associated with the current project only if the employee is listed on the Employees tab.
Webhook notifications A check box which (if selected) indicates that the system will send a notification when a project is created or updated. An update can consist of changes made to the following tabs: Summary, Employee, Tasks.
### Invoicing and allocation settings section
Element Description
Invoicing period

The frequency of invoicing in the projects based on this template, which can be one of the following options:

Week
Invoicing occurs once a week.
Month
Invoicing occurs once a month.
Quarter
Invoicing occurs once a quarter.
Year
Invoicing occurs once a year.
On Demand
Invoicing is performed when it is needed.
Terms

The type of credit terms used for invoices of the project created based on this template.

Credit terms are defined in the Credit terms (CS206500) window.
Allocation rule The rule that Visma Net uses to run the allocation of transactions for the projects created using this template.
Run allocation on release of project transactions A check box that indicates (if selected) that allocation is run automatically during the release of the documents associated with the project.
Invoicing rule The rule that Visma Net uses to run invoicing for the projects created by using this template.
Branch The branch of your company with which the projects created by using this template will be associated.
Rate table The rate table to be used for pricing.
Create pro forma at the time of invoicing A check box that indicates (if selected) that pro forma invoices are created automatically when you run project invoicing for the projects created based on this template.
Use the revenue budget limits for the time and material A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system will validate the limits of the revenue budget when you process pro forma invoices for the projects created based on this template.
Automatically release customer documents A check box that indicates whether the system will automatically release invoice documents after invoicing is complete in Projects for the projects based on this template.
### Visibility settings section
Option Description
General ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the General ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in general ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Supplier ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Supplier ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in supplier ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Customer ledger

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Customer ledger workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in customer ledger documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Sales

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Sales workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in sales documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Purchases

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Purchases workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in purchase documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Inventory

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Inventory workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in inventory documents, and the release of these documents will automatically update the project data.
Cash management

A check box that indicates whether transactions in the Cash management workspace can be associated with the project based on this template.

If you select this option, users can select the associated project and task when they enter a document in the Cash management workspace.
Time entries

A check box that indicates whether the transactions in the Time and expenses workspace can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
Expenses

A check box that indicates whether transactions from Expense can be associated with the task based on this template.

If you select this check box, users can select the project in documents, and the release of these documents automatically updates the project data.
## The Tasks tab You use the **Tasks** tab to view, add, modify, and delete the tasks that are typical for the projects you will create by using this template.
Column Description
Set as default Use this button to set a project task as the default for a project.
Task ID The task template associated with the project template.
Description The description of the task.
Rate table The rate table to be used for pricing.
Allocation rule The rule that is used to run allocation for the task.
Invoicing rule The invoicing rule that is used to run invoicing for this project.
Invoicing option The option that defines how the project task should be invoiced, which can be one of the following options: By invoicing period, On task completion, or On project completion.
VAT category The VAT category (if applicable) of the task.
Default This check box is automatically selected on the active line, when you click the Set as default button on the top part of the table.
## The Revenue budget tab This tab lists the revenues that are typical for the projects you will create by using this template.
Button Description
Project task A template task of the project template.
Item ID

A stock or non-stock item that is used for the time and material project invoicing. By default, the system populates this box with the empty item code (N/A), which is defined in the Empty item code field in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

The column is shown if Task and item is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the template project.
Cost code

The cost code that is associated with a revenue budget line. You can change the cost code value for each revenue line.

The column is shown if Task and cost code is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the window for the project.
Account group The income account group of the revenue budget line.
Description The description of the revenue budget line.
Budgeted quantity The budgeted quantity of the revenue budget line.
UoM

The unit of measure of the revenue budget line. If an stock item is selected in the Item ID column, the UoM is automatically selected as the base unit of measure of this stock item and can be changed to another UoM available for the item.

The base unit of measure of the empty item code ( N/A ) is HOUR.
Unit rate The price of the specified unit of the revenue budget line.
Budgeted amount

The budgeted amount of the revenue budget line.

For the Budgeted quantity, UoM, and Unit rate specified for the line, the amount is calculated as Budgeted amount = Budgeted quantity * Unit rate.
VAT category The VAT category (if applied) for the revenue budget line.
## The Cost budget tab This tab lists the costs that are typical for the projects you will create by using this template.
Button Description
Project task A template task of the project template.
Item ID

The stock or non-stock item that is associated with the cost budget line.

The column is shown if Task and item is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the window for the project.
Cost code

The cost code that is associated with the cost budget line.

You can change the cost code value for each line.

The column is shown if Task and cost code is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the window for the project.
Account group The account group to which the corresponding expense account is mapped.
Description The description of the cost budget line.
UoM

The unit of measure of the cost budget line.

If an stock item is selected in the Item ID column, the UoM is automatically selected as the base unit of measure of this stock item and can be changed by another UoM available for the item.

If the item is not specified ( N/A ), any existing UoM can be selected.
Unit rate The price of the specified unit of the cost budget line.
Budgeted quantity The budgeted quantity of the cost budget line.
Budgeted amount

The budgeted amount of the cost budget line.

For the Budgeted quantity, UoM, and Unit rate specified for the line, the amount is calculated as Budgeted amount = Budgeted quantity * Unit rate.
Auto completed (%) A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system automatically updates the Completed (%) percentage of the work on the tasks.
Revenue task The task by which the revenue budget is specified for the cost budget line.
Revenue item

The item by which the revenue budget is specified for the cost budget line.

The column is shown if Time and item is selected as the Revenue budget level on the Summary tab of the project template.
## The Employees tab By using the **Employees** tab, you can view, add, modify, and delete the employees for the projects you will create by using this template.
Element Description
Employee ID The identifier of the employee who will be assigned to the project created by using this template.
Employee name The name of the employee who will be assigned to any project created by using this project template.
Department The department of the employee who will be assigned to the project created by using this template.
Earning type The earning type that determines how the labour of this employee is costed in projects based on this template. You can create a new earning type by using the Type of hours (EP102000) window.
Description The description of the earning type.
Labour item The labour-type non-stock item used to account for the labour effort of the employee in projects based on this template.
Default price The price associated with the labour item by default.
## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you can select general ledger accounts that the system uses if the projects based on this template are selected as the source of a particular account. ### Default values section
Element Description
Default account The sales account to be used as one of the sources of possible accounts for the invoices and transactions for projects based on this template.
Default subaccount The sales subaccount to be used as one of the sources of possible segment values for subaccounts to be used in the invoices and transactions for projects based on this template.
Accrual account The optional account to be used as the debit account (instead of the expense accrual account associated with the Labour non-stock item) in transactions generated based on time cards for projects based on this template.
Accrual subaccount The subaccount to be used as the debit subaccount (instead of the expense accrual subaccount associated with the labour non-stock item) in transactions generated based on time cards for projects based on this template.
### The Default task for General ledger account table This tab is used to map the accounts that may appear in the transactions automatically added to the transactions generated by the system for specific documents related to the projects based on this template, for instance, the system can add a freight transaction for a sales invoice. When users will be creating documents associated with the projects based on this template, they will specify project tasks for each transaction, but for transactions automatically added by the system later, there will be no association with projects, and this may cause an error. You should provide mapping for the accounts that may be used in the transactions automatically added by the system.
Column Description
Account The general ledger account that may appear in a transaction automatically added by the system to the documents associated with the projects based on this template.
Default task The task to be associated with the account that may appear in a transaction automatically generated by Visma Net.
## The Attributes tab On the **Attributes** tab, you can view, add, change, or delete attribute values for the projects based on this template. The project-related attributes are created and edited in the [Project attributes (PM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-attributes-pm202000/) window.
Column Description
Attribute The attribute used for the project template.
Required A check box that indicates (if selected) that this attribute is required for the project template.
Value

The value of the attribute for the project template.

This value will be used as the default value of the attribute of projects based on this template, but it can be overridden.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of predefined mailings that can be used for printing and electronically (by email) sending the customer pro forma invoices and other documents related to the projects you will create by using this template. When a new project template is created, the system copies to the project template all the default mailing settings from the **Mailing settings** tab of the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. You can override these default settings. ### The Mailing table You use this table to view and modify the list of active mailings that can be used to send emails to the customer. For each mailing, you can select either a report or a email template to be used by default as the body of the email.
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of the mailing.
Branch The branch of your company with which this mailing is associated.
Email account The email account to be used for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default email account, which is defined in the Email preferences (SM204001) window, will be used.
Report The report of the Projects module to be used by default for printing and also as the body or attachment of the email, if a report is used rather than an email template.
Notification template The email template, which is defined in the Notification templates (SM204003) window, to be used by default to generate personalized emails for this mailing, if a template is used rather than a report.
Format

The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no preferences have been specified for a particular recipient in the Customers (AR303000) window (for customer contacts).

Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Emails will be generated only for active mailings. For the PROFORMA mailing, you cannot clear this check box.
### The Recipients table You use this table to view and modify the list of default types of recipients for the selected mailing.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails:

Primary
A primary contact of the customer
Employee
An employee of your company who handles documents of the project
Contact ID

The specific contact.

A particular recipient can be selected only if you have selected Employee or Contact as the Contact type. The employee or contact, if one is selected, will receive the emails of the customer.
Format

The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to recipients of this type.

Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact of this type is active.

Only active recipients receive the emails generated for this mailing.
Bcc A check box that indicates (if selected) that the contact of this type will receive a blind carbon copy (BCC) of the emails.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project transactions (PM304000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-pm304000 page By using this window, you can view particular transactions associated with projects, review all the transaction details, and release the transaction or reverse the allocation that generated this transaction. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project transactions (PM304000) By using this window, you can view particular transactions associated with projects, review all the transaction details, and release the transaction or reverse the allocation that generated this transaction. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can view particular transactions associated with projects, review all the transaction details, and release the transaction or reverse the allocation that generated this transaction. Also, you can use this window to create new simple transactions, for instance, when you are testing new allocation rules. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Release Releases the currently selected transaction.
Reverse allocation Creates a new transaction that reverses (offsets) the currently selected transaction.
## The top part You use the elements in this area, described in the following table, to create a new transaction or select an existing transaction for viewing its details.
Element Description
Workspace

The workspace where the transactions have originated.

Select a workspace from the drop-down list, which includes Projects and all the workspaces for which the visibility option is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Ref. no. The reference number of the transaction, which the system automatically assigns by using the number series specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Status

The transaction status. The following statuses are possible:

Balanced
The transaction is fully balanced and available for release.
Released
The transaction has been released.
Description The description provided for the transaction.
Total quantity The total quantity of items in the transactions listed in the table.
Total invoiceable quantity The total invoiceable quantity for the transactions listed in the table.
Total amount The total amount for the transactions listed in the table.
## The table By using this table, you can provide details for a new transaction or view the details of an existing transaction.
Element Description
Branch The branch in which the transaction was created.
Project The project associated with the transaction.
Project task The project task associated with the transaction.
Cost code

The cost code associated with the transaction.

The column is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account group The account group of the debit account of the transaction.
Employee The employee associated with the transaction, such as the employee who worked on the project for the customer.
Customer/supplier The name of the supplier (if the transaction originated in the Supplier ledger workspace) or customer (if the transaction originated in another workspace).
Location

The location of the customer or supplier.

This column is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The identifier of the item associated with the transaction.

The item is the source of the expense accounts used for posting the transaction.
Description The description provided for the transaction.
UoM The unit of measure used to estimate the quantity for the transaction, such as HOUR or BOX.
Quantity The quantity for the transaction, such as the number of service hours provided to the customer.
Invoiceable A check box indicating whether the transaction is used in calculating the amount charged to the customer for the project task.
Invoiceable quantity

The quantity that is used for invoicing the customer.

For instance: You can invoice the customer based on the hours of service you have provided to the customer.
Unit rate

The price of the item or the rate of the service.

In the case of a labour item, the employee’s hourly rate is used as the unit rate.
Amount The amount of the transaction.
Debit account For released transactions, the account the transaction debited when it was released; for unreleased transactions, the account the transaction debits if it is released (mainly for the transactions that originate in the Projects workspace).
Debit subaccount For released transactions, the subaccount the transaction debited when it was released; for unreleased transactions, the subaccount the transaction debits if it is released.
Credit account For released transactions, the account the transaction credited when it was released; for unreleased transactions, the account the transaction credits if it is released.
Credit subaccount For released transactions, the subaccount the transaction credited when it was released; for unreleased transactions, the subaccount the transaction credits if it is released.
Date The date when the transaction was created.
Fin. period The financial period associated with the transaction.
Batch no. The batch number of the transaction in the General ledger workspace.
Earning type The earning type specified for the transaction to calculate the labour cost.
Multiplier The multiplier by which the unit rate is multiplied when the labour cost is calculated. The multiplier can differ from 1 only for earning types marked as overtime.
Use the quantity that can be invoiced in amount formula A check box that you select if you want the system to use the invoiceable quantity (the Invoiceable quantity column) instead of the overall quantity (the Quantity column) of the transaction when calculating the amount of transaction.
Allocated A check box that indicates whether the amounts of the transactions were allocated for the project. The transaction amount is allocated if this check box is selected; otherwise, the transaction amount is not allocated.
Released A check box indicating whether the transaction has been released.

Related pages

Tasks

 Project transactions - overview (PM401000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-transactions-overview-pm401000 page In this window, you can view the list of transactions associated with a particular project. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project transactions - overview (PM401000) In this window, you can view the list of transactions associated with a particular project. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the list of transactions associated with a particular project. You can filter the list of transactions by using selection criteria. The table list includes two types of transactions associated with the project: + Transactions that have not yet been released in the Projects module. + Transactions that have been released in all modules. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select transactions for display in the table.
Element Description
Project The identifier of the project whose transactions you want to view.
Account group The account group for which you want to view transactions. If you want to see transactions associated with all account groups, leave this field blank.
Project task The project task for which you want to view transactions. If you want to see transactions associated with all tasks, leave this field blank.
Cost code

The cost code for which you want to view transactions. If you want to see transactions associated with all cost codes, leave this field blank.

The field is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The stock item for which you want to view transactions. If you want to see transactions associated with all items, leave this field blank.
From The starting date of the range for which you want to view transactions. If you want to see transactions for all dates, leave this field (and To ) blank.
To The ending date of the range for which you want to view transactions. If you want to see transactions for all dates, leave this field (and From ) blank.
Employee The employee for which you want to view transactions. If you want to see transactions associated with all employees, leave this field blank.
Show only allocation A check box that you select to view only allocation transactions; any source transactions are not listed in the table. If you clear this check box, the table displays all transactions, including source transactions and allocation transactions.
## The table In the table, you can view the transactions that meet your selection criteria. This list includes two types of transactions associated with the project: + Transactions created and not yet released in the Projects module + Transactions released in all workspaces
Element Description
Branch The branch in which the transaction was created.
Workspace The workspace where this transaction was created or released.
Ref. no. The identifier of the transaction in Visma Net.
Project task The project task associated with the transaction.
Date The date the transaction was created.
Description The detailed description provided for the transaction.
Item ID The identifier of the stock or non-stock item associated with the transaction.
Cost code

The identifier of the cost code associated with the transaction.

The column is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
UoM The unit of measure used for the transaction, such as HOUR or BOX.
Quantity The quantity for the transaction, such as the number of service hours provided to the customer.
Invoiceable When this check box is selected, the transaction is used to calculate the amount that will be charged to the customer. If this check box is not selected, the transaction does not affect the invoicing for the project.
Invoiceable quantity The quantity that is used for invoicing the customer. For instance, you can invoice the customer based on the hours of service that your employees have provided to the customer.
Unit rate The price of the item or the rate of the service.
Amount (reversed) The amount of the transaction with the sign reversed (incomes and liabilities).
Amount (normal) The amount of the transaction with the positive sign (expenses and assets).
Customer/supplier The name of the supplier (if the transaction originated in the Supplier ledger workspace) or customer (if the transaction originated in another workspace).
Employee The employee associated with the transaction, such as the employee who provided the labour or service to the customer.
Debit account group The account group of the account to be debited in this transaction.
Debit account For a released transaction, the account the transaction debited when it was released, and for an unreleased transaction, the account the transaction will debit if it is released.
Debit subaccount For a released transaction, the subaccount the transaction debited when it was released, and for an unreleased transaction, the subaccount the transaction will debit if it is released.
Credit account group The account group of the account to be credited in this transaction.
Credit account For a released transaction, the account the transaction credited when it was released, and for an unreleased transaction, the account the transaction will credit when it is released.
Credit subaccount For a released transaction, the subaccount the transaction credited when it was released, and for an unreleased transaction, the subaccount the transaction will credit if it is released.
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the transaction in the General ledger workspace.
Earning type The earning time specified for the transaction to calculate the labour cost.
Multiplier The multiplier to be used with the earning time to calculate the labour cost.
Released When this check box is selected, the transaction has been released. If the check box is cleared, the transaction has not been released.
Allocated When this check box is selected, the transaction has been allocated as either an underlying (source) transaction or an allocation transaction. If this check box is cleared, no allocation transaction has been yet generated for the transaction.
Allocation ref. number The reference number of the allocation performed for the transaction.
Invoiced When this check box is selected, the invoicing transactions have been already generated for this transaction. If this check box is cleared, this transaction did not yet spawn invoicing transactions.
Orig. doc. type The type of the document that generated the transaction.
Orig. doc. no. The number of the document that generated the transaction when releasing it.
Invoice ref. number The reference number of the invoice generated when the transaction was used in invoicing.

Related pages

Tasks

 Rate lookup rules (PM205000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000 page By using this window, you can specify the sequences in which the system will search for rates in rate tables, as well as the factors that affect rate selection for each series. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Rate lookup rules (PM205000) By using this window, you can specify the sequences in which the system will search for rates in rate tables, as well as the factors that affect rate selection for each series. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For information about how to create rate lookup rules, see: [Create rate lookup rules](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/create-rate-lookup-rules/) ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select a rate table and a specific rate type. You can then view or modify the sequences for the rate table when used with this rate type.
Element Description
Rate table The rate table for which you want to view or specify sequences.
Rate type

The rate type for which you want to view or specify sequences.

By using these rate types, you can use different rates in different steps of allocation rules.
## The table In this table, you can create sequences that the system will use to find the rate in the rate table.
Column Description
View rates This button opens the Rate table maintenance (PM206000) window, where you can view and modify the rate for the selected sequence.
Sequence The sequence number. This number is automatically generated by the system, but you can change it manually. by clicking the arrow next to it.
Description A description of the sequence.
Project A check box that you use to indicate whether the project is a factor that affects rate selection.
Project task A check box that you use to indicate whether the project task is a factor that affects rate selection.
Account group A check box that you use to indicate whether the account group is a factor that affects rate selection.
Item A check box that you use to indicate whether the item is a factor that affects rate selection.
Employee A check box that you use to indicate whether the employee is a factor that affects rate selection.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Rate types (PM204100) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-types-pm204100 page You use this window to add, view, edit, and delete the rate types that can be used in allocation rules. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Rate types (PM204100) You use this window to add, view, edit, and delete the rate types that can be used in allocation rules. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to add, view, edit, and delete the rate types that can be used in allocation rules. Rate types define how rates should be selected for specific steps of the allocation rules. For more information about how to create rate types, see: [Create rate types](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/create-rate-types/) ## The table
Column Description
Rate type The unique ID for the rate type, an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description A more detailed description of the rate type. An alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Rate tables (PM204200) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-tables-pm204200 page You use this window to add new blank rate tables that can be used in projects for building pricing models. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Rate tables (PM204200) You use this window to add new blank rate tables that can be used in projects for building pricing models. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information about rate tables, see: [About rate tables](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/about-rate-tables/) ## The table
Column Description
Rate table The unique identifier for the rate table, an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description A more detailed description of the rate table. An alphanumeric string of up to 50 characters.

Related pages

Concepts

 Rate table maintenance (PM206000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-table-maintenance-pm206000 page You use this window to specify rates for different sequences of rate tables. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Rate table maintenance (PM206000) You use this window to specify rates for different sequences of rate tables. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For information about how to configure a rate table, see: [Configure a rate table](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/configure-a-rate-table/) For information about how to specify rates for rate tables, see: [Specify rates for rate tables](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-pricing-in-projects/specify-rates-for-rate-tables/) ## The top part In this area, you can select a rate table, its sequence, and the applicable price class, so that you can specify particular rates on the **Rate** tab.
Element Description
Rate table The rate table, which is created in the Rate tables (PM204200) window and is configured on the current window.
Rate type The rate type for which you want to view (and possibly change) rates. The rate types, which are defined in the Rate types (PM204100) window, are associated with particular steps of the allocation rules.
Sequence The sequence of the rate table for which you want to view (and possibly change) rates. Sequences are created in the Rate lookup rules (PM205000) window.
Rate code

The rate code for which you want to define rates. You can create a new rate code by typing its identifier in this box (an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used).

By using multiple rate codes with one sequence, you can specify for this sequence as many different rates (for different sets of particular factors defined by the sequence) as there are rate codes instead of creating a long list of similar sequences. For instance: suppose that you want to use different rates for three projects.
Description The description of the rate code.
## The Rate tab On the **Rate** tab, you can specify the specific rates to be used to calculate amounts to be invoiced, as well as the date ranges they are effective. You can specify multiple date ranges for a single rate.
Element Description
Start date The start date of the range when the rate is valid.
End date The end date of the range when the rate is valid.
Rate The value of the rate for the selected sequence, rate code, and price class. When you run allocations, this value is assigned to the @Rate variable, which you can use in formulas to calculate the allocation amount, quantity, and other values. The value can be used as a multiplier, a constant, or an addend.
## The Projects tab You can use the **Projects** tab to specify the projects for which the particular rate value is applied. This tab appears only if the sequence includes the project as a factor; the types of factors are specified in the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window. The rate application condition is defined as follows: Conditions on particular projects, particular items, particular employees, or particular account groups are joined by OR operators, while conditions on different types of factors are joined by AND operators. For instance, a special rate is valid for tasks 1, 2, and 3 of Project 1 and Project 2 if employees JOHN or JACK are involved. The resulting condition is expressed as follows: `((Project=Project1) OR (Project=Project2))AND`
Element Description
Project The project for which you want to apply the rate specified on the Rate tab.
Description The description of the project, as specified in the project settings.
## The Tasks tab
Element Description
Project task The task for which you want to apply the rate specified on the Rate tab.
Description The description of the project task.
## The Account groups tab By using the **Account groups** tab, you specify the account groups for which the particular rate value is applied. This tab appears only if the sequence includes the account group as a rate factor; rate factors are specified in the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window.
Element Description
Account group The account group for which you want to apply the rate specified on the Rate tab.
Description The description of the account group, as specified in the account group settings.
## The Inventory tab You can use the **Inventory** tab to specify the items for which the particular rate value is applied. This tab appears only if the sequence includes the item as a rate factor; rate factors are specified in the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window.
Element Description
Item ID The item for which you want to apply the rate specified on the Rate tab.
Description The description of the item, as specified in the item settings.
## The Employee tab You can use the **Employee** tab to specify the employees for which the particular rate value is applied. This tab appears only if the sequence includes the employee as a rate factor; rate factors are specified by using the [Rate lookup rules (PM205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/rate-lookup-rules-pm205000/) window.
Element Description
Employee ID The employee for which you want to apply the rate specified on the Rate tab.
Employee name The name of the employee, as specified in the employee account.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Restriction groups by project (PM102010) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/restriction-groups-by-project-pm102010 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular project. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by project (PM102010) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular project. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the restriction groups that contain a particular project. You can also change the visibility of the project in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from restriction groups that currently contain it. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of projects by using the [Project access (PM102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-access-pm102000/) window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/) ## The top part In this area, you can select the project for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected project.
Element Description
Project ID The project for which you want to view (and possibly edit) related restriction groups.
Status Read-only. The status of the selected project.
Customer Read-only. The customer for the selected project, if the project is external. For an internal project, this field is empty.
Template Read-only. The template used for creating the selected project, if applicable.
Description Read-only. The description of the selected project.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabeled **Included** column is selected for each group that contains the selected project. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the project in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name Read-only. The name of the restriction group.
Description Read-only. The description of the restriction group.
Active Read-only. A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active.
Group type Read-only. The type of the restriction group: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse. For more information, see: About types of restriction groups
Release transactions (PM501000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/release-transactions-pm501000 page By using this window, you can release transactions that are ready to be released ( Balanced ). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release transactions (PM501000) By using this window, you can release transactions that are ready to be released ( Balanced ). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The system automatically posts the transactions if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected in the [Project accounting preferences (PM101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-accounting-preferences-pm101000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Release

Releases the Projects transactions that you have selected.

The transactions are immediately posted on release if the Automatically post on release check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Release all

Releases all the project transactions available on the list.

The transactions may be posted on release, depending on the Automatically post on release setting.
## The table This table displays the transactions available for release.
Element Description
Ref. no. The identifier of the transaction, which was automatically assigned when the transaction was generated.
Transaction date The date when the transaction was created.
Description The description of the transaction.

Related pages

Tasks

 Reverse non-invoiced transactions (PM505000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/reverse-non-invoiced-transactions-pm505000 page By using this window, you can reverse transactions that have been allocated but not yet invoiced. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse non-invoiced transactions (PM505000) By using this window, you can reverse transactions that have been allocated but not yet invoiced. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Reverses the not yet invoiced transactions you have selected in the table.
Process all Reverses all not yet invoiced transactions listed in the table.
## The top part By making selections in this part, you can narrow the range of transactions displayed in the table below.
Element Description
Allocation rule

The allocation rule for which not yet invoiced transactions will be listed, which you select from the list of available rules.

If you do not select any value, the list in the table includes the transactions for all allocation rules.
Customer class

The customer class for which not yet invoiced transactions will be listed.

Select a customer class to include in the table only the not yet invoiced transactions associated with the selected class.
Customer

The customer for which not yet invoiced transactions will be listed.

Select a customer to include in the table only the not yet invoiced transactions associated with this customer.
Employee The employee for which not yet invoiced transactions will be listed. Select an employee to include in the table only the not yet invoiced transactions associated with the selected employee.
Project

The project for which not yet invoiced transactions will be listed.

Select a project to include in the table only the not yet invoiced transactions associated with this project.
Project task

The project task for which not yet invoiced transactions will be listed.

Select a project task to include in the table only the not yet invoiced transactions associated with the selected project task.
Item ID

The item ID for which not yet invoiced transactions will be listed.

Select the identifier of a stock or non-stock item to include in the table only the not yet invoiced transactions associated with this stock item.
From

The starting date of the date range for which not yet invoiced transactions will be included in the table.

If you do not select this date, the table will include not yet invoiced transactions starting from the first not yet invoiced transaction available in the system.
To

The ending date of the date range for which not yet invoiced transactions will be included in the table.

If you do not select this date, the table will include not yet invoiced transactions until the last not yet invoiced transaction available in the system.

If you specify neither a From date nor a To date, the table includes all not yet invoiced transactions available in the system.
## The table The table lists the not yet invoiced transactions that match the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Element Description
Ref. no. The identifier of the transaction in Visma Net.
Date The date the transaction was created.
Period The financial period associated with the transaction.
Project The project associated with the transaction.
Project task The project task associated with the transaction.
Customer class The customer class associated with the transaction.
Customer The number of the customer associated with the transaction.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Employee The detailed description provided for the transaction.
Item ID The identifier of the stock or non-stock item associated with the transaction.
Description The description provided for the transaction.
UoM The unit of measure used for the transaction, such as ITEM or BOX.
Quantity The quantity for the transaction, such as the number of service hours provided to the customer.
Invoiceable

A check box that indicates whether the transaction is intended for charging any amounts to the customer.

If this check box is not selected, the transaction does not affect the invoicing for the project.
Qty. that can be invoiced

The quantity that is used for invoicing the customer.

For instance: You can invoice the customer based on the hours of service you provided to the customer.
Unit rate The price of the item or rate of the service.
Amount The amount of the transaction.
Invoicing rule The invoicing rule associated with the transaction.
Branch The branch in which the transaction was created.
Type of hour The type of hour specified for the transaction to calculate the labour cost.
Multiplier The multiplier to be used with the earning time to calculate the labour cost.

Related pages

Tasks

 Run allocations by project (PM502500) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-allocations-by-project-pm502500 page By using this window, you can process all allocations in the Projects workspace or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run allocations by project (PM502500) By using this window, you can process all allocations in the Projects workspace or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this window, you can process all allocations in the Projects workspace or only selected ones. For more information on how to do this, see: [Run allocations by project](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/run-allocations-by-project/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Allocate Processes the project tasks you have selected and performs allocation of transaction amounts.
Allocate all Processes all listed project tasks and performs allocation of transaction amounts.
## The top part You can use the elements in this part to filter the project tasks for which you might want to run the allocation procedure.
Element Description
Allocation rule The rule for which you want to view projects. If you do not select any value here, the list in the table will include the project tasks for all allocation rules.
Project The project whose tasks you want to view. If you do not select any value here, the list in the table will include all the active projects.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. If you select a value here, the list in the table will include only the active projects for the selected customer class.
Customer The customer for which you want to display data. If you select a value here, the list in the table will include only the active projects for the selected customer.
Posting date The date to assign all the allocation transactions that will be generated when running the allocation procedure.
From

The start date of the date range for which you want to allocate transactions.

The system will allocate only transactions from the date range specified in the Date range restrictions section.

If you do not select any value here, Visma Net will allocate transactions starting with the oldest allocation transaction in the system.
To

The end date of the date range for which you want to allocate transactions.

The system will allocate only transactions from the date range specified in the Date range restrictions section.

If you do not select any value here, Visma Net will allocate transactions up to the last allocation transaction in the system.
## The table The table contains the list of projects matching the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Project ID The identifier of the project.
Description The description of the project.
Allocation rule The invoicing rule associated with the project to be used to generate invoices.
Customer The number of the customer associated with the project.
Customer name The name of the customer associated with the project.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Run allocations by task (PM502000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-allocations-by-task-pm502000 page By using this window, you can process all allocations in the Projects workspaces or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run allocations by task (PM502000) By using this window, you can process all allocations in the Projects workspaces or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For more information about how to do this, see: [Run allocations by task](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/run-allocations-by-task/) ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Allocate Processes the project tasks you have selected and performs allocation of transaction amounts.
Allocate all Processes all listed project tasks and performs allocation of transaction amounts.
## The top part You can use the elements in this part to filter the project tasks for which you want to run the allocation procedure.
Element Description
Allocation rule The allocation rule whose tasks you want to list. If you do not select any value here, the list in the table will include the project tasks for all allocation rules.
Project The project whose tasks you want to list. If you do not select any value here, the list in the table will include all the active project tasks.
Project task The particular project task. If you do not select any task, the list in the table will include all the active project tasks.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. If you select a value here, the list in the table will include only the active project tasks for the selected customer class.
Customer The customer for which you want to display data. If you select a value here, the list in the table will include only the active project tasks for the selected customer.
Posting date The date to assign all the allocation transactions that will be generated when running the allocation procedure.
From

The start of the date range for which you want to allocate transactions.

The system will allocate only transactions from the date range specified in the Date range restrictions section. If you do not select any value here, the system will allocate transactions starting with the oldest allocation transaction in the system.
To

The end of the date range for which you want to allocate transactions.

The system will allocate only transactions from the date range specified in the Date range restrictions section. If you do not select any value here, the system will allocate transactions up to the last allocation transaction in the system.
## The table
Column Description
Project The identifier of the project.
Task ID The identifier of the project task.
Description The description of the project task.
Allocation rule The allocation rule associated with the task. This allocation rule will be used for the allocation operation.
Customer The customer associated with the project and the project task.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Run project invoicing (PM503000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/run-project-invoicing-pm503000 page You can use this window to perform invoicing for projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run project invoicing (PM503000) You can use this window to perform invoicing for projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to perform invoicing for projects. Invoices are generated for each project and for each customer involved. For more information about invoicing settings and procedures, see: [About project invoicing](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-allocations-and-invoicing-rules/about-project-invoicing/) ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Initiates the invoicing process for the projects you have selected (using the unlabelled check boxes) in the table.
Process all Initiates the invoicing process for all the projects listed in the table.
## The top part By making specifications in this area, you can select the criteria the system uses to list projects that you can invoice.
Element Description
Invoice date

The date to be specified on the invoices generated during the invoicing procedure, which also serves as a cut-off date for the project to be invoiced. For more information about how the system applies the filtering criteria for projects to be shown in the window, see: About project invoicing

If no invoice date is specified, the system uses the following date as the invoice date, depending on the invoicing period of the projects:

On demand
The business date
Another invoicing period
The next invoicing date of the projects
Post period The financial period for which the invoice transactions will be posted.
Statement cycle The statement cycle to which the customers to be listed are assigned.
Customer class

The customer class for which you want to invoice projects.

Leave the field blank to view information on all classes.
Customer

The customer whose projects you want to invoice.

Leave the field blank to see information on all customers of the specified class (or all customers of all classes).
Project template

The project template associated with the projects to be listed.

Leave the field blank to view projects based on all templates.
## The table The table contains the list of projects matching any criteria specified in the top part. Only projects with at least one not yet invoiced (but completed) invoicing period are displayed. If multiple invoicing periods were not invoiced for the project, you should run the invoicing process once for each not yet invoiced period. You can select projects by using the check boxes in the first column.
Element Description
Project The project by its identifier.
Description The description provided for the project.
Customer The ID of the customer associated with the project, if any.
Customer name The name of the customer.
From The start date of the invoicing period that is the first not yet invoiced period for the project.
To The end date of this invoicing period.
Last invoicing date The date when the project was last invoiced.

Related pages

Tasks

 Validate project balances (PM504000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/validate-project-balances-pm504000 page For information about how to validate balances, see: Validate project balances 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate project balances (PM504000) For information about how to validate balances, see: Validate project balances For more information: [Validate project balances](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets/validate-project-balances/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Validate Recalculates the balances for the projects you have selected.
Validate all Recalculates the balances for all listed projects.
## The top part By using the check boxes in this area, you can indicate to the system to perform the selected additional actions on the selected projects (or all projects) during the next processing.
Element Description
Recalculate not yet invoiced summary If you select this check box, the system recalculates the balances that have not been invoiced.
Rebuild commitments If you select this check box, the system will rebuild internal commitment records for the selected projects or for all listed projects.
Recalculate the amount of draft invoices If you select this check box, the value of the Draft invoices amount column on the Revenue budget tab of the Projects (PM301000) window will be recalculated.
Recalculate change orders When this check box is selected, the value affected by change orders in the Projects (PM301000) window will be recalculated for the selected projects or for all listed projects when you click Process or Process all in the window toolbar.
## The table The table lists all the projects available in the system.
Column Description
Project ID The ID of the project.
Description The description of the project.
Customer The number of the customer for the project.
Customer name The name of the customer for the project.
Status

The status of the project, which can be:

In Planning
This status is automatically assigned to any new project with the Hold check box selected and reflects that the project is a draft and not available for selection in data entry windows.
Completed
All tasks for the project have been completed.
Cancelled
Project is stopped before its completion. You can reactivate a cancelled project.

Projects that are in planning are not included in the list.
Start date The date when the project was started.
End date The date when the project was completed.

Related pages

Tasks

 Projects reports /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Projects reports Aged period sensitive (PM63050S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/aged-period-sensitive-pm63050s page You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period on projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged period sensitive (PM63050S) You use this report to determine the state of the open documents at the end of a particular period on projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows the documents (by statement cycle, by project, and by customer) that are outstanding at the end of the specified period, broken down by aging periods or financial periods, depending on the settings of the statement cycle specified for a customer. The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period or by document dates for each project. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## The top part
Element Description
Template The template to be used for the report, if any.
Locale The country you want to runt the report for. The report is displayed in the local language of the country you select.
Default Defines the selected template as the your default one.
Shared Indicates that the selected template is shared with other users.
## The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report, depending on the current report. Contents can vary in the following regards: + How many, and which, elements are available on a particular report. + Which elements contain default values. + Whether specific elements require values to be selected. + Which elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data.
Element Description
Report format

The format to be used for the report. Choose one of the following options:

Summary
To view outstanding balances for the chosen period.
Detailed
To view outstanding documents for the chosen period.
Period The financial period the system will use to calculate the aging categories for the documents. You must specify a period.
Customer The customer connected to the projects you want view.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to display data. If you leave the field blank, you will see information about all classes.
From project The ID of the project you want to start your selection on.
To project The ID of the project to you want to end your selection on.
Project manager The project manager of the projects you want view in the table.
Group by parent account If you select this check box, you group customer accounts that are involved in parent-child relationship under a parent account, and display consolidated balance of the group. The system will group only those child accounts that have the Consolidate balance check box selected. The check box is available if the Parent-child customer relationship functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
## The Additional sort and filters tab > ### Additional sorting conditions > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
ElementDescription
PropertyThe report specific property you want to filter on.
Condition

Select one the following conditions:

  • Ascending
  • Descending
> ### Additional filtering conditions > > Defines the report filter. > To create a more complex logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
ElementDescription
Brackets( - (( - ((( - (((( - (((((
PropertyThe report specific property you want to filter on.
ConditionSelect one of the 13 conditions. They can be one-operand and two-operand.
ValueThe value of the property.
Second valuePossible second value of the property.
Brackets) - )) - ))) - )))) - )))))
Operator

Choose between:

  • And
  • Or
## The Print and email settings tab If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings area**. > ### Print settings > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
ElementDescription
Deleted recordsSelect what to do with deleted records: Hide them, print them, or show only deleted records.
Print all pagesLets you print all pages of the report.
Print in PDF formatDisplays the report in PDF format.
Compress PDF fileIndicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.
Embed fonts in PDF fileIndicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.
> ### Email settings > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > >
ElementDescription
FormatThe format (HTML, PDF, or Excel) in which the report will be e-mailed.
ToThe email address of the recipient.
CcAn additional addressee to receive a carbon copy (Cc) of the email.
BccThe email address of a person to receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email; an address entered in this field will be hidden from other recipients.
SubjectThe subject of the email.
## The Report versions tab
Element Description
Edit version You choose this option if you want to edit the specific version.
Activate You choose this option if you want to activate the specific version.
Version The version of the report.
Description The description of the report.
Active Indicates whether the report is active or not.
Created The date the version was created.
Change order (PM643000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/change-order-pm643000 section By using this report, you can view and print the selected document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change order (PM643000) By using this report, you can view and print the selected document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference no. The reference number of the document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Employee hours (PM622000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/employee-hours-pm622000 page This report displays the work hours your employees have spent on specific projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Employee hours (PM622000) This report displays the work hours your employees have spent on specific projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the work hours your employees have spent on specific projects. The records are grouped by task, and for each project, the spent and invoiceable time and overtime are listed. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Project ID The project for which you want to view information. Select a project, or make no selection to request information for all projects.
Include unreleased activities Select this check box to include the information of the unreleased activities in the report.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Employee hours by project and task (PM623000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/employee-hours-by-project-and-task-pm623000 section This report displays the work hours your employees have spent on different project tasks. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Employee hours by project and task (PM623000) This report displays the work hours your employees have spent on different project tasks. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the work hours your employees have spent on different project tasks. The report records are grouped by project broken down by project task, and for each project task, the spent and invoiceable time and overtime are listed. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Owner The employee for which you want to view information. Select an employee, or make no selection to request information for all employees.
Include unreleased activities Select this check box to include the information of the unreleased activities in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Profit and loss (PM64300S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s section This report displays the profit and loss of the company from a selected period and the preceding six month and a selected project or project range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Profit and loss (PM64300S) This report displays the profit and loss of the company from a selected period and the preceding six month and a selected project or project range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the profit and loss of the company from a selected period and the preceding six month and a selected project or project range. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period The period until which the figures will be shown from the preceding six months.
From project The project from which the figures will be reported.
To project The project until which the figures will be reported. To include only one project in the report, select the same project as in the From project field.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Pro forma invoice (PM642000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/pro-forma-invoice-pm642000 section By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice (PM642000) By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference no. The reference number of the document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Pro forma invoice - English (PM64201S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/pro-forma-invoice-english-pm64201s section By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice - English (PM64201S) By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference number The reference number of the document. You must select a document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Pro forma invoice - Finnish (PM64202S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/pro-forma-invoice-finnish-pm64202s section By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Finnish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice - Finnish (PM64202S) By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Finnish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference number The reference number of the document. You must select a document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Pro forma invoice - Norwegian (PM64204S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/pro-forma-invoice-norwegian-pm64204s section By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice - Norwegian (PM64204S) By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference number The reference number of the document. You must select a document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Pro forma invoice - Dutch (PM64205S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/pro-forma-invoice-dutch-pm64205s section By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Dutch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice - Dutch (PM64205S) By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Dutch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference number The reference number of the document. You must select a document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Pro forma invoice - Swedish (PM64218S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/pro-forma-invoice-swedish-pm64218s section By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pro forma invoice - Swedish (PM64218S) By using this report, you can view and print the selected pro forma invoice in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters Use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Reference number The reference number of the document. You must select a document.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Projects (PM631000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/projects-pm631000 section This report lists either all the projects grouped by customer or only the projects for the customer you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Projects (PM631000) This report lists either all the projects grouped by customer or only the projects for the customer you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists either all the projects grouped by customer or only the projects for the customer you select. The projects are listed along with their descriptions, statuses, and start dates. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameter to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Customer no. The customer whose projects and project tasks you want to view. If you leave this empty, the report will include all the projects in the system along with the project tasks; the projects and project tasks will be grouped by customer.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project invoice – English (PM64101S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-invoice-english-pm64101s section This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in English. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project invoice – English (PM64101S) This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in English. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference number The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Project invoice – Finnish (PM64102S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-invoice-finnish-pm64102s section This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project invoice – Finnish (PM64102S) This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in Finnish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference number The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Project invoice – Norwegian (PM64104S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-invoice-norwegian-pm64104s section This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project invoice – Norwegian (PM64104S) This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in Norwegian. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference number The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Project invoice – Dutch (PM64105S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-invoice-dutch-pm64105s section This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project invoice – Dutch (PM64105S) This report shows the invoice with the selected reference number in Dutch. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference number The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Project invoice – Swedish (PM64118S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-invoice-swedish-pm64118s section This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project invoice – Swedish (PM64118S) This report shows the project invoice with the selected reference number in Swedish. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The type of the document to be printed you select from the drop-down.
Reference number The reference number of the document to be printed.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Project balance (PM621000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-balance-pm621000 section This report lists all the account group balances for project tasks (grouped by project). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project balance (PM621000) This report lists all the account group balances for project tasks (grouped by project). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists all the account group balances for project tasks (grouped by project). The balances are listed along with their projected, revised, and actual quantities and amount. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Project The project for which you want to view information. Select a project, or make no selection to request information for all projects.
Task The task for which you want to view information. Select a task, or make no selection to request information for all tasks.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Project profitability (PM624000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-profitability-pm624000 section This report displays profitability for either completed projects or all the projects in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project profitability (PM624000) This report displays profitability for either completed projects or all the projects in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays profitability for either completed projects or all the projects in the system. The projects are listed along with their customer, project status, income, expense, and profit margin. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameter to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Include active projects A check box you select to include the information of the active projects in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project summary (PM64100S) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-summary-pm64100s section This report shows a summary of the details for a selected project or projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project summary (PM64100S) This report shows a summary of the details for a selected project or projects. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Customer To restrict the projects to be reported, select a customer whose projects you want to view.
From project The project from which the figures will be reported.
To project The project until which the figures will be reported. To include only one project in the report, select the same project as in the From project field.
Project manager To restrict the projects to be reported, select a project manager whose projects you want to view.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Project tasks (PM632000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-tasks-pm632000 section This report lists either all the project tasks grouped by customer or only the project tasks for the customer you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project tasks (PM632000) This report lists either all the project tasks grouped by customer or only the project tasks for the customer you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report lists either all the project tasks grouped by customer or only the project tasks for the customer you select. The report provides the list of projects with the breakdown to individual project tasks. The project tasks are listed, along with their description, status, and start date. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameter to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Customer no. The customer whose projects and project tasks you want to view. If you leave this empty, the report will include all the projects in the system along with the project tasks; the projects and project tasks will be grouped by customer.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Project transactions (PM633000) /visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/project-transactions-pm633000 section This report lists the project transactions for the project you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Project transactions (PM633000) This report lists the project transactions for the project you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The project transactions are listed along with their key properties. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameter to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Project The project whose transactions you want to view.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Purchases /visma-net-erp/help/purchases section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Purchases - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-overview page The Purchases workspace helps you organise and control the purchasing process, plan purchasing expenses, and reduce spending on goods and services. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases - overview The Purchases workspace helps you organise and control the purchasing process, plan purchasing expenses, and reduce spending on goods and services. The Purchases workspace helps you organise and control the purchasing process, plan purchasing expenses, and reduce spending on goods and services. Visma Net automates the purchasing process: issuing purchase orders, receiving orders, and creating purchase invoices. With the Purchases workspace, you gain complete visibility into the whole purchasing process, from planning purchases to paying the invoices. ## Multiple purchase order types The Purchases workspace supports the following purchase order types: **Normal**, **Drop shipment**, **Blanket**, and **Standard**. The functionalities that affect the list of order types (if not enabled) are: **Blanket and standard purchase orders** and **Drop shipments**. Orders of different types have different functionality and fulfilment flows; for instance, orders of the **Standard** type can be included in **Normal** orders. For more information, see: [About types of purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-types-of-purchase-orders/). ## Default settings Multiple default settings, if they hold the values your employees use most frequently, help users save time and avoid input errors during data entry. Some default settings are defined within the Purchases workspace, while others are defined in the workspaces that integrate closely with purchasing. Users can, of course, override these values at any time. For more information, see: [About purchasing-related defaults and overrides](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-purchasing-related-defaults-and-overrides/). ## Integration with Finance and Inventory Due to seamless integration of the workspaces in the Finance and Inventory modules, you can generate back orders, view item availability data, generate invoices for drop-ship orders, and view customer demand when you create purchase orders. You can automatically generate supplier ledger invoices and inventory receipts and issues. Such integration eliminates repetitive data entry and automates workflows for the complete purchasing cycle. ## Supplier catalogues To maintain up-to-date information on supplier prices in Visma Net, you can create supplier catalogues and update them periodically for each supplier. For updating, you can use information on released supplier documents or import supplier price lists. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can define price tiers for different quantities of the items purchased from a particular supplier. Also, you can specify minimum and maximum order quantities, lot sizes, alternative IDs used by suppliers for products they sell, and other related information. For more details, see [About supplier catalogues.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-supplier-catalogues/) ## Supplier prices and discounts By maintaining supplier discounts and prices in the system, you can take advantage of quantity pricing offers from the suppliers and effectively plan your purchases. In Visma Net, you can enter and maintain the supplier discounts that the system applies automatically to each purchase order or invoice if the **Supplier discounts** functionality is enabled. Supplier prices and discounts can be configured in the Supplier ledger workspace. ## Flexible approval procedures Most organisations require that purchase orders be approved by designated persons before they can be emailed or printed for sending by mail to the supplier. You can configure the approval process with approvals to be performed in parallel by multiple employees or in multiple successive stages. The rules for automatic assignment of orders for approval can be based on the type of order, supplier information, order amount, and other order-specific information. ## Processing of drop-ship orders Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. The quantities of stock items on drop-ship orders do not update the item availability data in the Inventory workspace. The functionality that allows processing of drop-ship orders is available only if the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For details, see: [Create a drop-ship order flow.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow/) ## Processing of returns For damaged goods or services not rendered, you can create returns. To a return, you can add a purchase order, add order lines, or specify the items with their quantities manually. You can configure the system on release of returns to automatically create Inventory issues for stock items. Further processing of returns depend on the policies established in your company: You can choose whether to create a purchase credit note and later apply it against a refund or against other invoices, or to later create a new receipt for replacements of damaged items. For details, see: [About return processing options.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-return-processing-options/) ## Support of collect on delivery purchases The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as **cash on delivery (COD)** or (because there are multiple possible methods of payment) **collect on delivery (COD)**. Visma Net provides you with the functionality that you can use to account for payments made on delivery. For information on a workflow used for processing COD transactions, see: [Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-a-cash-on-delivery-cod-transaction/) ## Landed cost tracking By using the Purchases workspace, you can account for additional costs that your company can incur in the process of purchasing goods, such as transportation costs, VAT, shipment insurances, and other charges. For information about how landed costs are processed in Visma Net, see: [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). ## Bar code support Scanning product bar codes on receipt of goods to warehouses simplifies data entry. By using warehouse and location IDs printed as bar codes and scanned on data entry, you can more easily maintain correct item allocation data, which helps your employees effectively fulfil orders. For more information, see: [About bar code support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-barcode-support/). ## Inclusive VAT support In Visma Net, you can configure automatic calculation of value-added taxes (VATs) included in item prices. This functionality is only available if the **VAT reporting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. VAT amounts will be calculated appropriately, recorded to proper VAT claimable accounts, and excluded from item costs. For details, see: [About inclusive VAT support](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-inclusive-vat-support/). ## Audit trail The Purchases workspace provides a complete audit trail of all purchasing transactions. After a transaction is released, it cannot be deleted; to correct mistakes, you must enter a transaction to reverse the incorrect entry. The system keeps the details of all purchasing transactions, including information about users who entered, approved, and modified records. Also, you can attach scanned copies of original documents and notes directly to the documents. ## Other functionalities and options The Purchases workspace also offers the following functionalities: + Integration with the Inventory workspace: You can purchase goods for inventory, and when the goods are received at the warehouse and the purchase receipts are released, the system automatically generates inventory receipts. + The ability to attach scanned images of supplier documents or images of items received from supplier to receipts or returns. + The ability to add notes with handling instructions to receipts. + The option to link receipts to purchase orders or to specific lines of a purchase order to easily trace the process of purchase order fulfilment. + Support of non-stock items on purchase receipts. + Automatic conversion of units of measure (and resulting item costs). + The ability to specify service charges and shipping and handling fees on purchase orders and receipts. + Automatic printing of purchase orders to further send them to suppliers by mail, or automatic emailing of such orders. + Automatic update of item costs, depending on the valuation methods chosen for stock items, with supplier prices specified on purchase receipts. + Convenient display of item availability information in the window when users create purchase orders. + Automatic calculation of VAT on purchases, depending on the VAT zone of the shipping location. Manage defaults /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage defaults Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About purchasing-related defaults and overrides /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-purchasing-related-defaults-and-overrides page In the Purchases workspace of Visma Net, many elements in many windows may have default values. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchasing-related defaults and overrides In the Purchases workspace of Visma Net, many elements in many windows may have default values. In the Purchases workspace of Visma Net, many elements in many windows may have default values. If the default values you set are the values your organisation uses most frequently, your users will save time and minimise errors. You can override these values any time. Some default settings are defined within the Purchases workspace; others are defined in the workspaces that integrate closely with the Purchases workspace: Inventory and Supplier ledger. ## Default general ledger accounts To specify the default accounts for use in the Purchases workspace, use the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. These default accounts include the following ones: + Account and subaccount for freight expenses: You need to specify the account and subaccount for the freight expenses incurred in the delivery of purchased goods from suppliers. Enter the appropriate freight expense account and freight expense sub. values. + Accounts used for purchase return operations: You can define the accounts and subaccounts used for purchase return operations by assigning a specific reason code for purchase returns in the **Purchase order return reason code** field in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. Reason codes are defined in the [Reason codes (CS211000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/reason-codes-cs211000/) window. ## Workflow options The settings used to control workflow in the Purchases workspace include the following: Hold receipts on entry : Defines whether receipts get the **On hold** status by default when they are saved. Validate totals on entry : Defines whether totals are validated on entry for purchase receipts and for purchase orders of different types. Automatically create invoices on release : Defines whether supplier ledger invoices are created when receipts are released. Supplier price update : Defines how supplier prices are updated. They can be updated when receipts are created or released, when purchase orders are created, or when invoices are generated for receipts. Release supplier documents automatically : and **Release inventory documents automatically** Define whether Supplier ledger and Inventory documents generated for purchase receipts are automatically released. ## Supplier defaults Once you select a supplier on a new purchase order, many elements on the order get default values. These values, specified in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, are used as default values on data entry windows in the Supplier ledger and Purchases workspaces. These settings include the following: + The currency used by the supplier. The currency can be overridden on particular documents, if this is allowed by supplier settings located on the **General info** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + The payment terms. + The shipping terms. + The supplier's shipping location. + The carrier used by the supplier. + The supplier's contact information. + The payment settings used for payments made to suppliers. + General ledger accounts and subaccounts used to record expenses, freights, prepayments, and total liability. A supplier's default settings also include the VAT zone, which determines the taxes applicable to goods and services purchased from the supplier. You can also define the minimum and maximum percentage of ordered goods that can be accepted, and the actions to be performed if the ordered quantity differs from the received quantity when the quantities of received goods fall outside the specified range. ## Stock item defaults The stock item records provide default values for purchase orders and receipts, such as the units of measure, supplier prices, and accounts involved. You can also provide the item settings associated with the specific warehouse that is used in purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace, and in the inventory receipts automatically generated to update the costs and availability data of the item. The default settings for stock items are defined in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. ## Landed cost defaults Choosing a landed cost code on a document, you specify the appropriate supplier (which provides the services resulting in landed costs), application method, terms of payment, VAT category, and accounts involved in accounting for landed costs. Processing the landed costs results in cost adjustments for the stock items that were listed on receipts or supplier ledger invoices with landed costs specified. You define the landed cost settings in the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window. For more information about the landed costs, see: [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). About inclusive VAT support /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-defaults/about-inclusive-vat-support page The Purchases workspace supports value added taxes (VATs) on purchased items if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About inclusive VAT support The Purchases workspace supports value added taxes (VATs) on purchased items if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). In most European countries, where value added taxes are often used, prices for consumers are VAT-inclusive or specified with the VAT amount included. The base and sale prices, too, can be specified as including or excluding the appropriate VAT amount. You configure inclusive and non-inclusive taxes in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. For inclusive taxes, select the **Extract from item amount** option. In the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, the document details include applicable VAT shown for informational purposes on the **VAT details** tab; the list of applicable VAT includes the VAT present in both the supplier VAT zone and the ordered item's VAT category. In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, VAT amounts are calculated because even though value-added taxes for stock items are paid to suppliers, they are claimable from the tax agency. ## Example of inclusive VAT processing Consider an example in which a company purchases 100 motherboards at €22 each with a 10% VAT included. The total amount is €2200, and the VAT amount calculated for the document is €200. The following transactions will be generated for the Inventory receipt. |Account|Credit|Debit| |---|---|---| |Inventory (components)|0|2200 – 200 = 2000| |Purchase accrual|2000|0| The following transactions will be generated for the supplier ledger invoice receipt. |Account|Credit|Debit| |---|---|---| |Purchase accrual|0|2000 (accrued amount)| |Supplier ledger|2200 (full receipt amount)|0| |VAT claimable account|0|200| If any difference arises due to rounding between the original receipt amount, the sum of the VAT amount, and the amount to be recorded to the accrual account, it will be added to the purchase price variance account.

Related pages

Windows

 Manage supplier catalogues /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage supplier catalogues Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About supplier catalogues /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-supplier-catalogues page In Visma Net, you can create and maintain supplier catalogues or the lists of supplier's stock items you purchase from your suppliers, along with the last prices of items and purchasing information about the items, which is generally used for automated replenishment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier catalogues In Visma Net, you can create and maintain supplier catalogues or the lists of supplier's stock items you purchase from your suppliers, along with the last prices of items and purchasing information about the items, which is generally used for automated replenishment. In Visma Net, you can create and maintain supplier catalogues or the lists of supplier's stock items you purchase from your suppliers, along with the last prices of items and purchasing information about the items, which is generally used for automated replenishment. By maintaining supplier catalogues, you can more efficiently select suppliers that sell specific types of items. You can also reduce errors on purchase orders by using supplier-specific alternative IDs of items. ## Creating supplier catalogues To create supplier catalogues, you use the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window. On this window, you can select a supplier and supplier location and create a list of items your company can purchase from this supplier location. For each item, you can specify the following information, some of which may be specific to the supplier location: + The supplier item ID, which is the identifier used by the supplier for the item. This alternative item ID can be assigned to the item. + The unit of measure (UoM) used by the supplier as the sales unit for the item at this location (defined as the item's **purchase unit** in your organisation). + The economic order quantity, which represents the quantity of this item that minimises the costs of ordering from this supplier location. + The Shipment lead time (days) (if any) for the stock item purchased from the supplier. The system uses the additional shipment lead time to schedule the purchases from the supplier and calculate the promised date. The system automatically calculates the promised date by adding the lead time and additional lead time (if any was specified for the item) to the requested date. + The purchasing information, which is used in automated replenishment: + The minimum frequency of orders. + The lot size defined for the item if it is tracked by lot numbers. + The minimum and maximum quantity that window the range in which the order quantity must fall You cannot enter the prices in the **Last supplier price** column. The column is populated and updated automatically by the prices that were last used for the items. For details on setting up automatic price updating, see the following section. Instead of entering all the items for each supplier and location, you can populate the supplier catalogues by creating a list of possible suppliers for each stock item by using the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and for each non-stock item by using the same-name tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Then, when you open the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window and select a supplier, you can view the stock and non-stock items that the supplier sells and modify this list if needed. ## Catalogue updating from supplier documents You can update the supplier catalogues manually at any time by replacing any changed data, such as alternative item IDs, economic order quantities (EOQs), lot sizes, and minimum and maximum quantities, with the newer and more correct data. However, the last used prices in the catalogues cannot be entered manually; the system updates these prices automatically from prices quoted on supplier documents. You can set up automatic updating of the last used supplier prices in the supplier catalogue based on the entry or release of specific supplier documents. To do this, in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, in the **Supplier price update** field, select one of the following options: + **On purchase order entry** + **On receipt entry** + **On receipt release** + **On purchase invoice release** + **None** When the event specified by the **Supplier price update** option (purchase order entry, purchase receipt entry, purchase receipt release, or release of an purchase invoice that is linked to a purchase receipt or order) occurs, the item's unit price from the document replaces the last price of the item with the same UoM in the supplier catalogue. If the UoM of the last price is the same as in the document, but the currency differs from the document's currency, the item's unit price in the document currency replaces the last price. If the UoM in the document line differs from the UoM of the last price, the system adds a new line to the supplier catalogue. The system does not keep the history of price changes in the supplier catalogue. If you do not want to maintain information about the last used prices in the supplier catalogues, select **None** as the **Supplier price update** option and the last used prices will not be updated. Note that in this case the last supplier price may be updated on release of a invoice that is not linked to any purchase order document. ## Using the prices from supplier catalogues If you regularly receive suppliers' price lists for all or most of their items, you can maintain supplier prices with much more flexibility by using the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) and the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. You can import the price lists, and calculate the updated prices by applying specific percentages. Maintaining supplier prices through supplier catalogues can also be useful for items for which the prices do not change often or information about prices is not available in advance. Once the system populates the **Last supplier price** column for items in the supplier catalogues, the system uses these last used prices as the default prices for the corresponding items on new purchase orders as follows: When you create a new purchase order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window or receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, if there are no prices listed for the item in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window, for each item, the system inserts the last price from the supplier catalogue as the supplier's default price (**Unit cost** in either window). If you are browsing the supplier catalogue in the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window in order to select a supplier for a specific item, you can view this supplier's current item prices by clicking the **Supplier prices** button on the table toolbar and navigating to the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. You can override the default catalogue prices on a purchase order or purchase receipt if the actual purchase prices for stock items are different from those listed in the supplier catalogue. In this case, the new prices that you enter will automatically appear in the supplier catalogue as the last used prices; the particular event triggering this update depends on the option selected in the **Supplier price update** field. The new prices will then appear on a new purchase order when a user creates it. However, if the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in your system, and you purchase different volumes with different prices from your suppliers, consider whether you need to maintain price updating in the catalogue, taking into account that you will not know what volume the price listed in the catalogue corresponds to.

Related pages

Windows

 About barcode support /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-barcode-support page Bar code scanning saves you time when you receive goods to warehouses and increases overall control of operations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About barcode support Bar code scanning saves you time when you receive goods to warehouses and increases overall control of operations. Visma Net supports integration with bar code scanning solutions in the following ways: ## Bar codes as alternative IDs for items In Visma Net, you can use product bar codes as alternative identifiers for items. Enter bar codes for items in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, the **Cross-references** tab, manually or by scanning them. The scanner's software converts the scanned bar code to an alphanumeric string that is immediately visible in the appropriate field as if it had been typed. You can add any number of different bar code strings to the item record in the database. Bar codes are not necessarily associated with particular suppliers or customers. ## Data entry through barcode scanning Barcode scanning can be used to effectively receive products at a warehouse and enter warehouse location information for them. From the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can invoke the **Add receipt line** dialog box, which has been designed for the following scenario: When you scan a product bar code, the system + finds the item record, + brings up the item information with the quantity copied from a matching purchase order, and + automatically adds a new line to the receipt or adds one unit per each scanned item if you scan items with serial numbers. To use the dialog box for bar code scanning, make sure the **Add line automatically** option is selected. Then, once the dialog box elements are filled in, the system creates a new line automatically. If you select the **Add one unit per barcode** check box in the dialog box, each time you scan a bar code, the item quantity for the receipt will be increased by one unit. If you clear the check box and you scan an item bar code, the system searches for a purchase order that matches the supplier and item ID associated with the barcode, and inserts the quantity of the item from the purchase order. If no such order is found, the system inserts one unit. If no item is found in the system after the item bar code has been scanned, you can enter the item ID of the item manually. In this case, this new barcode is automatically associated with the item. To further simplify data entry in warehouses, you can print bar codes for warehouse IDs and warehouse location IDs. You can print bar codes for such identifiers by using customised Visma Net reports. Bar codes of the warehouse and its locations also can be used when you create receipts by using the following scenarios: + If you create receipts at a desk, print bar codes on a sheet of paper, and put it close at hand. When you're creating a receipt line for an item, scan the bar code from the item, warehouse, and location bar codes from the paper. + If you generally create receipts from a cart (equipped with a scanner and a computer) after you place items in appropriate locations, perform the following actions prior to receiving goods: print location IDs as bar codes on special labels, and stick them to appropriate shelves, bins, or other storage structures available in your warehouse. Then, take items one by one from the cart, and read the item bar code and location bar code from the shelf. Appropriate receipt lines will be added automatically. ## Using bar code scanners for stocktaking With Visma Net, you can use bar code scanners to perform stocktaking counts. If product bar codes are used in your system as alternative item IDs, you can use bar code scanners for counting; each scanned bar code will increase the quantity of the item by one unit in the stocktaking document open in the [Stocktaking count (IN305010)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stocktaking-count-in305010/) if your system is configured for using bar codes and if the scanners are connected as an input device to your computer. Process purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders section Visma Net supports multiple types of purchase orders, and you can use various workflow options to configure the processing of orders of each type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase orders Visma Net supports multiple types of purchase orders, and you can use various workflow options to configure the processing of orders of each type. About types of purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-types-of-purchase-orders page Visma Net supports four types of purchase orders, described below: normal, drop-ship, blanket, and standard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of purchase orders Visma Net supports four types of purchase orders, described below: normal, drop-ship, blanket, and standard. ## Normal orders You can create normal purchase orders to order goods and services for retail, wholesale, production, stock replenishment, and other demands. Products purchased on normal orders are generally received to the company's warehouses. The quantities of items on such orders update the item's availability data. With the item look-up dialog box, you can check the item availability at a particular warehouse. With quantities on hand, available quantities, and quantities already on purchase orders in view, you can specify the appropriate quantity for the item. You generally create normal purchase orders by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. You select the type of the order as **Normal** and add the items to be purchased to the list; you can also add lines from an existing purchase order (or add the whole purchase order). Also, to adjust the quantity of the item on the order, you can view the demand for the item (that is, the item's quantity specified on back orders or orders with **Mark for purchase order** check box selected). By using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window, you can create multiple normal purchase orders for available back orders or sales orders with lines that list items not currently available in the company's stock and that have the **Mark for purchase order** check box selected. For more information on processing normal orders, see: [About purchase order processing options.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-purchase-order-processing-options/) ## Standard orders Orders of this type are available only if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Standard purchase orders are used as templates for normal orders. If your company regularly purchases from a supplier the same list of products in the same quantities, you can create a standard purchase order with those items listed in the required quantities by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. You can create multiple normal purchase orders that reference the standard purchase order. To do this, you add the entire standard sales order to a new normal purchase order, or add several lines from the standard sales order to a normal purchase order and edit the resulting item quantities. Unlike blanket purchase orders, standard orders have no expiration date, and their status does not change to **Closed** when all goods in the related normal orders are received. The quantities of items on standard orders do not update the items' availability data. ## Drop-ship orders Drop-ship purchase orders are used for goods that will be delivered directly from the supplier to the customer that ordered the goods from your company. These goods are not received in the inventory at your company. Orders of this type are available only if the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. To create a drop-ship purchase order, you create a new purchase order on the purchase orders window and select the **Drop ship** type. If there are sales orders for the items your company plans to purchase from the supplier, you can create a drop-ship order by using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. Once you select an item and a supplier for a new drop-ship order, sales orders (if they request the selected stock item and have the **Mark for purchase order** check box selected) are available for selection and can be added as document lines in the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. For details, see: [Create a drop-ship order flow](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow/). ## Blanket orders Blanket purchase orders are created for a longer time interval or a larger quantity of goods than your company currently needs. You may choose to order goods in larger volumes for reserved stock if considerable volume discounts are offered or the specified goods are not always available from the supplier. A blanket order has expiration date after which the order cannot be used for generating normal orders. Orders of this type are available only if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. A blanket order can be fulfilled through multiple normal orders. To do this, you create purchase orders with the **Normal** type that reference the blanket order. In this case, the open quantity on the blanket order is reduced by the quantity specified in the purchase orders with the **Normal** type, and the price is transferred to normal orders from the blanket order. When the entire quantity of goods included in the blanket order is purchased and received through normal orders, the blanket order's status changes to **Closed**. About purchase order processing options /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-purchase-order-processing-options page Organisations may have different steps and requirements for processing purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchase order processing options Organisations may have different steps and requirements for processing purchase orders. Organisations may have different steps and requirements for processing purchase orders. This topic describes the general workflow of order processing for purchase orders of the **Normal** type. ## Purchase order creation In general, the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window is the starting point for creating a purchase order, and employees can use this window to track the processing of the order. When creating a new order, you should first select a supplier and the supplier location. Then you can add stock items by clicking the **Add item** button in the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab and selecting from only the supplier's items or from the entire list of stock items. If you want to add non-stock items of any type (**Labour**, **Service**, **Non-stock**, or **Expense**), you can select them by their item IDs. If the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can add a blanket purchase order or a line of a blanket purchase order. A newly created purchase order has the **On hold** status. To reduce input errors on order entry, validation of order totals can be set up by selecting the **For normal and standard orders** check box in the **Validate total on entry** section of the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. If this check box is selected, then when you create new purchase orders in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, to take the order off hold, you must enter each order total in the **Control total** field after verifying the order details. Purchase orders based on requisitions, customer drop-ship orders, customer orders marked for purchasing, and replenishment requests can be created in bulk by using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. If approval of purchase orders is not configured in your system, a purchase order may need to be emailed, or printed once you take it off hold. After that, the order is given the **Open** status. If approval is configured, the order is given the **Pending approval** status once you take it off hold, which will change to **Pending printing**, **Pending email**, or **Open** once all the assigned approvers approve it. How an open purchase order will be processed further depends on the types and properties of the items included in the order. ## Processing of purchase orders with only stock items As you add a stock item to a purchase order, the system inserts **Goods for warehouse** as the line type for this line. The **Line type** setting indicates how the purchase order line should be processed. If a purchase order includes only stock items intended for inventory and not linked to a drop-ship order or any other sales order, its processing involves creating of a purchase receipt (or multiple receipts if the order is fulfilled by multiple shipments from the supplier). You can create a receipt for a purchase order by clicking **Actions - Enter purchase order receipt**in the toolbar of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. Alternatively, in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can create a receipt and link it to an existing purchase order or a particular line of the order by clicking **Add purchase order** or **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab. The inventory account that is used for a stock item on a receipt by default is selected according to the **Use inventory/accrual account from** setting of the posting class. On release of each receipt linked to the purchase order, the system automatically generates an inventory receipt for the items listed in the purchase receipt and calculates the quantities of the received goods for each order line. These values are displayed in the **Qty. on receipts** column on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. The order gets the **Closed** status once every line is completed according to the line completion rules (described below). Then for each receipt linked to the purchase order, you can create a invoice or multiple invoices. > ### Line completion rules > > By default, a line of a purchase order is considered completed if all the ordered quantity has been received. For each supplier, in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, you can specify the line completion rules for order lines with stock items. You can specify a threshold percent (in the **Threshold receipt (%)** field on the **Purchase settings** tab) for completing the lines of purchase orders. By default, this value is 100, which means that 100% of the specified quantity must be received for lines to be completed. This setting provides the default value for the **Complete on (%)** setting on purchase orders created for this supplier. You can change the **Complete on (%)** setting for any purchase order. Alternatively, you can also specify the min. receipt (%) and max. receipt (% **)** values, to define the range of quantities, and the **Receipt** action ( **Reject** , **Warn but accept** , or **Accept** ) to apply to the receipt if the received quantity for any line is outside this range of quantities. These settings specified for a supplier provide the default values for the same-name settings on lines of any purchase order for this supplier. > > When a receipt linked to the purchase order is released, the system will complete the line if the total quantity on receipts becomes equal to or greater than the threshold quantity (calculated as the threshold percentage of the ordered quantity). > > When you create a new receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can manually complete a line of the linked purchase order by selecting the **Complete purchase order line** check box on the line of the purchase receipt. ## Processing of purchase orders with only non-stock items that require receipt For each non-stock item, you can specify whether a purchase receipt is required by using the **Require receipt** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. This setting affects the processing of non-stock items. If a purchase order includes only non-stock items that require receipt, its processing involves creating a receipt (or multiple receipts if the ordered items are not delivered at the same time). When you add a non-stock item that requires receipt to a purchase order in the window ( **Document details** tab), the system inserts **Non-stock** as the line type. In the **Account** column, the system inserts the expense account defined by the **Use COGS/ expense account from** setting of the posting class. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the system also inserts the subaccount composed as defined by the **Combine COGS/ expense sub from** setting of the posting class appears in the **Sub.** column. If the **Require receipt** check box is selected for the non-stock item, the following accounts and subaccounts will be used: + When a purchase order is created, the item amount is recorded to the expense account (with the expense subaccount) + When a receipt linked to the purchase order is created, the line amount is moved from the expense account (with the expense subaccount) to the purchase accrual account (with the purchase accrual subaccount) + When a invoice is created for the receipt, the amount is moved back from the purchase accrual account (with the purchase accrual subaccount) to the expense account (with the expense subaccount). The expense and purchase accrual accounts to be used for receipt-related transactions are defined by the posting class of the item; the default accounts assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be used if the posting class's rules **Use COGS/expense account from** and **Use purchase accrual account from**, respectively, point to them (that is, have the **Item** option selected). The expense subaccount and purchase accrual subaccount are also defined by the settings of posting class of the item; the default subaccounts assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab will be used as the segment value sources for the resulting subaccounts according to the **Combine COGS/expense sub from** and **Combine purchase accrual sub from** rules, respectively. > ### Line completion rules > > When a receipt linked to the purchase order is released, to determine if the order line is completed, the system applies the rule that is specified for each non-stock item in the **Complete purchase order line** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, which is one of the following: > > + **By quantity** (the default option for items of the **Non-stock** type) The order line will be completed on release of a receipt if the item quantity specified on all linked receipts is equal to or exceeds the order line quantity. > > The system processes the purchase price variance amounts (if any) for the non-stock item. > + **By amount** (the default option for items of the **Labour, Service, Charge**, and **Expense** types.) If the **Require receipt** check box is selected for this item, the order line will be completed on release of a receipt if the item amount on all receipts is equal to or greater than the order line amount. ## Processing of purchase orders with only non-stock items that do not require receipt If a purchase order includes only non-stock items that do not require receipt (that is, the **Require receipt** check box is cleared for each item in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window), its processing doesn't involve creating a receipt. An invoice or multiple invoices can be created directly for the purchase order. When you add a non-stock item that does not require receipt to a purchase order in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window ( **Document details** tab), the system inserts **Service** as the line type. In the **Account** column, the system inserts the expense account defined by the **Use COGS/expense account** setting of the posting class. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the system inserts the subaccount composed as defined by the **Combine COGS /expense sub from** setting of the posting class in the **Sub.** column. > ### Line completion rules > > When a receipt linked to the purchase order is released, to determine when the order line is completed, the system applies the rule that is specified for each non-stock item in the **Complete purchase order line** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, which is one of the following: > > By quantity > : (the default option for items of the **Non-stock** type) The line will be completed on release of a invoice if the item quantity specified in the invoice is equal to or exceeds the open quantity in the order. > > By amount > : (the default option for items of the **Labour, Service, Charge**, and **Expense** types) This option indicates that the order line will be completed on release of a invoice if the amount of the invoice line is equal to or exceeds the uninvoiced amount of the order line. ## Purchase orders with mixed items If a purchase order includes stock and non-stock items of various types, its processing includes creating of a receipt or receipts, but not all the items from the order will appear on the receipts. You can use the [Purchase order details by account (PO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000/) report to view the order lines with non-stock items listed by the expense account. You will need to create invoices based on receipts linked to the order and invoices based on those lines of the original purchase order whose line items do not require receipt. Alternatively, you will need to manually add the items not requiring receipt to a invoice based on a receipt. ## Reordering lines in purchase orders You may need to reorder a line or multiple lines in the existing purchase order, or add a new line at the beginning of a list or in the middle of the list. You can reorder lines in a purchase order that is on hold. The order number of the purchase order line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for each document line. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combinations, such as the following: + A single purchase order line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example: lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of purchase order lines (for example: line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold **Shift** while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down arrow** until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of purchase order lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerate the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move purchase order lines between pages, cut the selected purchase order lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** number for each document line. You can cancel the line reordering by clicking **Cancel** in the window toolbar before you save these changes. You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. > ### Inserting lines into purchase orders > > You can insert a single line anywhere in the table. > To do this, click the line above which the > new line should be inserted and then press **Shift+Insert**, or right-click the needed > line and then click **Insert row**. > The system adds a new blank > line. > When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the > system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table. ## Tracking of open quantities To check on the fulfilment of a purchase order, you can use the **Other information** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, where the system tracks the open quantity and open balance. For a purchase order with the **Normal** or **Drop-ship** type, the open quantity is calculated as the difference between the quantity of ordered goods and the quantity of received goods on this order. For a purchase order with the **Blanket** or **Standard** type, the open quantity is calculated as the quantity of the ordered goods and the received quantities on orders of the **Normal** type that are linked to this blanket purchase order. The open balance is calculated as the difference between the total amount of the ordered items and the amount of the received items included in purchase receipts linked to the purchase orders. When the open quantity and open balance values are calculated, only released receipt documents are used for calculation. Notice that is not possible to change the item ID or UoM for any partially received line of a purchase order. If due to changes in the business process your organisation needs to switch to another UoM when purchasing a particular item and delete the rules for converting this old UoM to the base UoM, you must fulfil the following steps: 1. Define the new UoM and specify the rules for converting this UoM to the base UoM 1. Complete any purchase orders with this item's open quantities specified in the "old" purchase UoM 1. Create new orders for the remaining (unreceived) quantities specified in the "new" UoM Notice that it is not possible to delete an UoM specified for a stock item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window (or for a non-stock item in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window) if there are any released or open transactions with this UoM.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Purchase order statuses /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/purchase-order-statuses page Visma Net supports four purchase order types: normal, drop ship, blanket, and standard. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order statuses Visma Net supports four purchase order types: normal, drop ship, blanket, and standard. Visma Net supports four purchase order types: normal, drop ship, blanket, and standard. For all these types, the same set of statuses is used, however different processing steps can be configured for purchase orders of different types. The purchasing process usually starts when you create a purchase order in Visma Net. You can add goods to the purchase order and specify the details for each line. The system changes the status of a purchase order during its processing. ## The table This table describes each of the possible statuses and the ways they fit into purchase order processing; the statuses are listed in the order in which they occur, if applicable.
Status Description
On hold

The status of a newly created purchase order. The system may also assign the purchase order this status if it has been rejected by the person assigned to approve it or if you have selected the Hold check box. The purchase order can be left on hold for future editing, including addition or removal of lines.

When a purchase order is on hold, its totals and quantities of listed goods are not traced or checked. To move the On holdpurchase order to the next step in its processing and change its status, clear the Hold check box in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

You can turn on the validation of totals during data entry for purchase orders of specific types by selecting the relevant check boxes in the Validate total on entry group of options in the Purchase orders preferences (PO101000) window. This validation (if set on for purchase orders of specific type) is performed when the users clear the On hold check box for the order.

Depending on the purchase order approval rules set in the system and your required processing steps, the system changes the status of the purchase order to Pending approval, Pending printing, Pending email, or Open.
Pending printing

Each purchase order must be sent to the supplier in the suppliers’ preferred way.

Printing the purchase order is an optional step in purchase order processing. Depending on the setting selected for the supplier, the status of the purchase order may be changed to Pending printing.

To require printing in the purchase order processing steps for a particular supplier, select the Print order check box on the Purchase settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window. The Printed check box on the Other information tab of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window shows whether the order has been printed.

The Pending printing status indicates that an employee must print the purchase order and then send or fax it to the supplier. To print the purchase order, select the Reports - Print purchase order on the toolbar of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window. This changes the status of the purchase order to Pending email or Open.
Pending email

Emailing the purchase order to the supplier is an optional step in purchase order processing. Depending on the setting selected for the supplier, the status of the purchase order may be changed to Pending email.

To require emailing in the purchase order processing steps for a particular supplier, select the Email order check box on the Purchase settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window. The Emailed check box on the Other information tab of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window shows whether the order has been emailed.

When a purchase order has the Pending email status, the purchase order must be sent by email to the supplier. To complete this step, select Actions - Email purchase order on the toolbar of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window. This changes the order status to Open.
Cancelled

The status of the purchase order is changed to Cancelled if the purchase order has been cancelled. This status means the purchase order cannot be edited, and no receipts can be made for it.

The cancelled purchase order keeps this status unless you change the status to On hold by selecting the Hold check box for it.

If the status is changed to On hold, the document can be edited, and the usual purchase order processing steps can be performed.
Open

The status of the purchase order is changed to Open after any necessary approvals and any other required processing steps (printing the order, emailing it, or both) are performed for the purchase order.

If no approvals or optional processing steps are required, the status of the purchase order changes from On hold to Open when the Hold check box is cleared.

The Open status means that the quantity of the items on purchase receipts for this purchase order is less than the quantity required to complete the purchase order. In Visma Net, you create the receipts for the ordered and received items by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

When a purchase order has the Open status, the system traces the quantities of items received for the order and displays the item availability information in the Inventory allocation details window in accordance with the availability calculation settings of the item.

The availability calculation settings that apply to an item are defined for its item class; these options are set on the General settings tab of the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Closed

The status of the purchase order is changed from Open to Closed after all lines of the order have been completed according to the appropriate rules or manually.

Also, you can manually complete the order by selecting Actions - Complete order in the toolbar of the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

For more information about order fulfilment, see: About purchase order processing options.
Create a drop-ship order flow /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow section Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a drop-ship order flow Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. Drop shipping is a type of sales order fulfilment in which the customers order goods from your company, receive them directly from a supplier (wholesaler or manufacturer), and send payments for the orders to your company. The quantities of stock items on completed drop-ship orders are not included in the quantities available at any warehouse of your company, and the data in the Inventory workspace is not updated by the data from completed drop-ship orders. With Visma Net, you can create drop-ship orders for goods that should be delivered directly to a customer location. Stock items and non-stock items (those that have the **Require receipt** check box selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window) may be drop-shipped; kits cannot be drop-shipped, because they are manufactured in the company. Drop-ship orders are created based on sales orders and on requisitions created for customers. ## Configuration In Visma Net, the functionality of drop-ship orders is available only if the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. Before you start creating and processing drop-ship orders, make sure that the **Drop shipments** functionality is enabled and that each warehouse has a default location for drop-ship orders selected in **Drop-ship location** field in the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. Because specifying a warehouse and warehouse location is mandatory for all inventory documents, the system will automatically insert this location in all documents generated for drop-ship orders. ## Drop-ship order flow In general, the processing of drop-ship orders that originated in the Inventory workspace involves using the following actions and generating the following documents: ![Images-SO_Drop_Ship_Flow](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_Drop_Ship_Flow.png) The processing steps are described in more detail in the following sections below: ### Enter a sales order intended for drop-shipping To create a drop-ship purchase order from a sales order by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, follow the steps below: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. In the top part, select **SO** as the order type. 1. Select the customer and review the default location and currency values. Change these if needed. 1. Go to the **Document details** tab. 1. Specify the branch. 1. Specify the item ID of the requested stock item. 1. Select a warehouse. For items that are usually sold by using drop-ship orders and do not require replenishment, you can create a virtual warehouse and assign it to the replenishment class with the **Drop-shipment** option as the replenishment source. 1. Specify the quantity. Make sure the unit of measure selected by default is correct. 1. Type the price if it has not appeared by default from the supplier catalogue (if one is maintained in your system). 1. Select the **Mark for purchase order** check box. 1. Specify **Drop-shipment** as the **Purchase order source**. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared and save the order. The order status changes to **Open** and **Create purchase order** becomes available on the **Actions** menu of the toolbar. Click this action to open the appropriate window as a pop-up window so that you can create a drop-ship purchase order for this sales order. ### Generate a drop-ship purchase order Drop-ship orders can be automatically generated for multiple sales orders or can be created one-by-one for each sales order. To create a drop-ship purchase order for a particular sales order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, follow the steps below: 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Drop-ship** or a custom order type used in your organisation for drop shipping. 1. Select the supplier that will deliver the goods or services to the customer. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click **View sales order demand** on the table toolbar to view the sales orders that require drop shipping. 1. In the table of the dialog box, select the check box next to the order (or select multiple orders) and close the dialog box. 1. Edit the order if needed. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared and save the order. To save time, you can create drop-ship purchase orders in bulk by using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window as follows: 1. Go to the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window. 1. In the **Order type** field of the top part of the window, select **Sales order** or a custom order type used in your organisation for drop shipping. 1. To select specific sales orders, filter the list of sales orders by a product manager, product work group, item class, warehouse, or supplier. This selects orders with a specific preferred supplier of the goods in the order. 1. Make sure each of the sales order lines listed in the table have the proper supplier specified. 1. Select the sales orders by using the check boxes to the left and click **Process** in the toolbar, or click **Process all** to generate purchase orders for all listed sales orders. The system generates the required drop-ship purchase orders. ### Create a purchase receipt for a drop-ship order To create a receipt, you need a confirmation that the customer received the goods or services from the supplier. Confirmation may be received through a call, an email, or another means. Based on business routines established in your company, you can create purchase receipts on receiving invoices from the suppliers or when you have heard from the customer, or you can create purchase receipts in advance and release them upon entering supplier invoices as invoice. You can use the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window to create a receipt manually for each drop-ship purchase order in the following way: 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. Select the order fulfilled by drop-shipment. 1. From the **Actions** menu, select **Enter purchase order receipt**. The [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window opens with the order data filled in. 1. For each item that is tracked by lot or serial numbers and for which the **Required for drop shipments** check box is selected in the [Lot/serial classes](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window, click **Allocations** on the table toolbar and assign the lot numbers to specific quantities or the serial numbers to particular units of the item. The system ignores the assignment method of the lot/serial class for items on drop-ship orders and, by default, requires assignment on receipt. 1. Type the control totals if required in your system. 1. Click **Release** in the toolbar. The status of the original sales order changes to **Completed**. Also, you can create a receipt for multiple orders of the same supplier by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window as follows: 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. Select **Receipt** as the document type. 1. Select the supplier that delivered the goods or services to the customers. 1. In the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click **Add purchase order**. The **Add purchase order** dialog box opens with the list of the supplier's open orders. 1. Use the check boxes to the left of orders to select the orders to be added to the receipt. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. For each item that is tracked by lot or serial numbers and for which the **Required for drop shipments** check box is selected in the [Lot/serial classes](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window, click **Allocations** in the table toolbar and assign the lot numbers to specific quantities or the serial numbers to particular units of the item. The system ignores the assignment method of the lot/serial class for items on drop-ship orders and, by default, requires assignment on receipt. 1. Type the control totals, if required in your system. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared, and save the receipt. 1. Click **Release** in the toolbar. The status of the original sales order changes to **Completed**. ### Create an invoice for the drop-ship order To create an invoice for the drop-ship order in the [Process shipments](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window, proceed as follows: 1. Go to the [Process shipments](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. In the top part of the window, select **Prepare drop-ship invoice** in the **Action** field. 1. Select the customer to view the customer's receipts. 1. In the table, select the check boxes next to the receipts you want to include in an invoice. 1. Click **Process**. One invoice or multiple invoices will be generated based on whether the **Invoice separately** option is selected for the order type (the invoices will be grouped by order type) and whether the similar ( **Invoice separately** ) option is selected for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. The generated invoices are linked to the original sales orders. 1. Release invoices one-by-one by using the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) or the [Customer invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window, or release them in bulk using the [Release customer documents](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

 About processing invoices with stock and non-stock items /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-processing-invoices-with-stock-and-non-stock-items section If the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, each invoice in Visma Net (whether it was created manually or imported) may include a summary line for all the purchases or it may have detail lines for non-stock items purchased from the supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing invoices with stock and non-stock items If the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, each invoice in Visma Net (whether it was created manually or imported) may include a summary line for all the purchases or it may have detail lines for non-stock items purchased from the supplier. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, invoices can include stock items along with non-stock items, and invoices either can be generated based on purchase receipts and purchase orders or can be created independently and linked to these purchasing documents later. ## Workflow with invoices based on purchase receipts In Visma Net, you can set up the following order of processing purchase orders in which the invoices are generated after the goods and services have been received from the suppliers. ### Generating invoices bases on purchase receipts To set up the workflow of successive processing of purchase orders, receipts, and invoices, you can use the **Create invoice on receipt release** check box in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, which provides the default value for the **Create invoice** check box in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. If such a check box is selected for a purchase receipt, a invoice will be generated automatically once the purchase receipt is released. If the **Create invoice** check box is not selected for a purchase receipt, you can create a invoice manually for each receipt by clicking **Actions - Enter an invoice** in the toolbar of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. Alternatively, you can create invoices in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window by adding purchase receipts (for stock items and non-stock items requiring receipt) and purchase orders (for non-stock items that do not require purchase receipts) or only specific lines from purchase receipts. If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system, then when you create a invoice based on purchase receipt lines, purchase receipts, and purchase orders, supplier discounts that were originally applied to the purchase orders or purchase receipts are recalculated proportionally to the partial amounts in the invoice. ## Workflow with purchase receipts and invoices created independently In your organisation, if invoices are received from suppliers and entered the system before the goods arrive or invoices are imported from a third-party system, you must link them to existing purchase receipts or to purchase orders depending on the type of items before you can release them. In this case, you can establish a workflow in which at certain stage you link the lines in existing invoices to lines in existing purchase receipts or purchase orders. ### Linking invoices to receipts To be able to link invoice lines to the lines of corresponding purchase orders and purchase receipts, make sure that for the invoices the **VAT settings** option is selected in the **VAT calculation mode** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system, supplier discounts applied to the invoice are not recalculated when you link the invoice lines to the lines of purchase receipts or purchase orders. The major stages of this workflow of processing purchase orders, receipts, and invoices with stock items are described in the sections below. ## Create purchase orders Your organisation creates purchase orders of the **Normal** type as required by its purchasing policies by using the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. On a purchase order, you can list the stock and non-stock items to be purchased from the particular supplier. ## Create invoices You can import the invoices from a third-party application or you can enter invoices received from the suppliers by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Stock and non-stock items may be listed in a invoice. When you add a stock item to a invoice, the system displays a message that warns you that the line should be linked to a purchase receipt before the invoice can be released. You create or import invoices with the **On hold** or **Balanced** status. You can not release a created invoice until you link each line with a stock item to an appropriate line in a purchase receipt. ## Create purchase receipts You can create purchase receipts for a purchase order by clicking the **Enter purchase receipt**action in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. Alternatively, purchase receipts that are not based on purchase orders can be created in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. You can add to a purchase receipt stock items, non-stock items that require receipt, and non-stock items that do not require receipt. When you create a purchase receipt, make sure the **Create invoice**check box is cleared; otherwise, you will not be able to link this receipt to an existing invoice. ## Release purchase receipts You can release purchase receipts one by one by clicking **Release** in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. Alternatively, you can release multiple receipts at the same time by using the [Release purchase receipts (PO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-purchase-receipts-po501000/) window. When purchase receipts that include stock items are released, inventory receipts are generated. ## Link invoice lines to the lines of purchase receipts and orders By using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, you must link each line of a invoice with a stock item to a line of a released purchase receipt. If the invoice includes non-stock items, you also can link the lines with non-stock items to the lines of released purchase receipts or open purchase orders, depending on the type of non-stock items. You can link a invoice line to only one line of a purchase receipt. If you have received only a partial quantity of an item, you can link the purchase receipt with the remaining quantity to another invoice's line. To link all lines of a invoice to purchasing documents, perform the following steps: 1. For each line of the invoice, do the following: 1. Select a invoice line on the **Document details** tab. 1. Click **Link line** in the table toolbar. The **Link line** dialog box opens. 1. For a stock item or for a non-stock item that requires receipt, review the list of purchase receipt lines with the same item and the same or a smaller quantity measured in the same UoM. For matching lines, the system searches among the receipts of the same supplier, in the same currency, with the same supplier location. Select the matching receipt line. 1. For a non-stock item that does not require receipt, review the lines of purchase orders with the item and the same or a smaller quantity measured in the same UoM. For matching lines, the system searches among the orders of the same supplier, in the same currency, with the same supplier location. Select the matching line. If no matching line is found, select the **Purchase receipt** selection mode and review any listed purchase receipt lines with the item. Select the matching purchase receipt line. 1. Click **Save** in the dialog box to save the link and close the dialog box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Information about the linked documents appears for each linked line of the invoice on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window (in the **Purchase order type**, **Purchase order number**, **Purchase order receipt no.**, and **Purchase order receipt line** columns). While the invoice is unreleased, you can cancel the established links and link the invoice lines to other documents if needed.

Related pages

Concepts

 Link purchase orders to projects /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/link-purchase-orders-to-projects page To receive purchases in a warehouse that is linked to projects, you must first create one or more warehouse locations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Link purchase orders to projects To receive purchases in a warehouse that is linked to projects, you must first create one or more warehouse locations. To receive purchases in a warehouse that is linked to projects, you must first create one or more warehouse locations. Every project and task must have its own warehouse location. 1. Go to the [Warehouses (IN204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/warehouses-in204000/) window. 1. In the **Warehouse ID** field, select the warehouse where you want to receive the items you are going to use for the project. 1. In the **Location table**, click the plus sign to add a line and add the location ID, a description, the project you want to link to and the relevant project task. 1. Click **Save**. 1. Go to the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. 1. Select the supplier of the items you want to link to a project and fill out the necessary information. 1. Click **Save**. 1. Deselect the **Hold** check box and click **Release**. 1. On the purchase receipt line on the purchase receipt, the warehouse location now displays the project. 1. You can now issue the item to the project. 1. Go to the [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) window. 1. On the **Transaction details** tab, click the plus sign to add a new line. 1. In the **Item ID** column, select the item, the project, and the project task. 1. Click **Release**. 1. The system now updates the project balance. 1. Go to the [Purchase receipt (PO646000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000/) window and select the relevant purchase receipt. 1. Click the **Actions** button and select **Create purchase invoice**. 1. Enter a **Supplier ref.** and click **Save**. 1. Click **Release**. Purchase order workflow with change orders /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/purchase-order-workflow-with-change-orders page You can create change orders for the Normal type of purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order workflow with change orders You can create change orders for the Normal type of purchase orders. The change order workflow affects the standard purchase order life cycle as follows: + The change order workflow is automatically enabled for a normal purchase order if at least one purchase order line refers to a project with the change order workflow enabled. + After a purchase order with the change order workflow has been assigned the **Open** status and at least one related change order has been created, the purchase order cannot be removed or put on hold. + After an existing purchase order with the **Open** status has been changed by means of a change order and printing or emailing is required for the purchase order, the system assigns to the purchase order the **Pending printing** or **Pending email** status, respectively. + A purchase order with the **Pending printing** or **Pending email** status status cannot be removed from the system if there is a change order that refers to this purchase order. + A purchase order with the **Open** status and with the change order workflow enabled can be modified by means of change orders only. + A purchase order with the **Open** status or an open line of this purchase order can be canceled or completed. + A purchase order that originates from a change order cannot be edited or removed and can be only printed, emailed, cancelled, completed, or altered by yet another change order. Process purchase receipts and returns /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase receipts and returns Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Process purchase receipts and returns - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview page When purchase receipts are created and released, they indicate that the purchased goods have been received at the company's warehouses and allocated. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase receipts and returns - overview When purchase receipts are created and released, they indicate that the purchased goods have been received at the company's warehouses and allocated. When purchase receipts are created and released, they indicate that the purchased goods have been received at the company's warehouses and allocated. In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balances with the suppliers. In some cases, however, if the received items are in unsatisfactory condition or were shipped by mistake, they must be returned to the supplier for replacement or reimbursement. Also, services that were not rendered or were provided partially should be reimbursed. In these situations, purchase returns are created in Visma Net to account for the movement of items back to the supplier. About purchase receipt processing options /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-purchase-receipt-processing-options page A purchase receipt is used to track the one-time receipt of goods purchased from a single supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchase receipt processing options A purchase receipt is used to track the one-time receipt of goods purchased from a single supplier. A purchase receipt is used to track the one-time receipt of goods purchased from a single supplier. You use a purchase receipt to verify the fulfilment of the purchase order or orders in which the received goods were ordered. As such, a purchase receipt must be linked to the applicable purchase orders. This topic describes the general workflow of processing purchase receipts in Visma Net. For more information on tracking purchase order fulfilment, see: [About purchase order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-purchase-order-processing-options/). ## Creating a purchase receipt When goods are received, you create a new document with the **Receipt** type by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, which is also used for processing purchase receipts on per document basis. On the **Document details** tab, you add lines to specify the quantity and additional details of all received goods. If lot or serial numbers are traced for the received items, they may be assigned at the time of receipt if configured so. To view the assigned lot and serial numbers of the received items, click **Allocations** on the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab. If purchase orders are involved in your purchasing workflow, you can create purchase receipts which are based on purchase orders or linked to purchase orders or particular lines in the orders. If the goods or services received were previously ordered with a purchase order, you can create a receipt for this particular purchase order, by selecting **Actions** and **Create purchase receipt** in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. Only lines with stock items and non-stock items for which the **Require receipt** check box is selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be automatically added to the receipt. Alternatively, when you receive purchases from a single supplier and create a new purchase receipt by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can add one or multiple purchase orders to this receipt; also you can add particular lines from purchase orders. To add a purchase order line into the purchase receipt, click**Add purchase order line** in the table toolbar on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. To copy all lines of a purchase order into the purchase receipt, click **Add purchase order** in the table toolbar. Receipts can be linked to only normal or drop-ship orders; see [About types of purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/about-types-of-purchase-orders/) for details about these and other purchase order types. Only lines with stock items and non-stock items for which the **Require receipt**check box is selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be automatically added to the receipt. The status a new receipt will be saved with depends on the **Hold receipts on entry** check box in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/). If this check box is selected, new receipts are saved with the **On hold** status by default. If you clear this check box, new purchase receipts are saved with the **Balanced** status by default. To reduce input errors on receipt creation, you can set up validation of receipt totals by selecting the **For receipts** check box in the **Validate total on entry** section in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. If this check box is selected, you must enter the receipt total manually in the **Control amt.** field after verifying the details of the receipt. ## Reordering lines in purchase receipts You may need to reorder a purchase receipt's lines, for example, if you need the lines of the printed document to be in a specific order. Also, you may need to reorder the lines in the existing purchase receipt, or add a new line at the beginning of a list or in the middle of it. You can reorder the lines of a purchase receipt until it has been released. The order number of each purchase receipt line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for each document line. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combination, such as the following: + A single purchase receipt line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example, lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of purchase receipt lines (for example, line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold **Shift** while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down arrow** until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of purchase receipt lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold **Ctrl** while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move purchase receipt lines between pages, cut the selected purchase receipt lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** number for each document line. These numbers are used for numbering lines in the printable reports, such as the printable purchase receipt shown in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. You can cancel the line reordering by clicking **Cancel**in the window toolbar before you save these changes. You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. ## Inserting lines into purchase receipts You can insert a single line anywhere in the document. To do this, click the line above which the new line should be inserted and then press **Shift+Insert**, or right-click the needed line and then click **Insert row**. The system adds a new blank line. When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table. ## Calculating supplier discounts on receipts If the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system, you can configure supplier discounts to be applied to receipts. If purchase receipts are created as original purchasing documents, supplier discounts can be applied automatically or manually depending on how you configure the discounts. If purchase receipts are created based on purchase orders or lines of purchase orders, the discounts that were originally applied to the purchase orders are recalculated based on the original documents (orders). If a **line-level** discount was applied to a purchase order line, the system automatically recalculates the discount amount for an appropriate receipt line proportionally to the amount or quantity of the receipt line and selects the **Manual discount** check box for the receipt line to prevent automatic re-applying of the discounts to the receipt as to an original document. The amounts of the **group** and **document level** discounts for the receipt lines linked to purchase order are recalculated proportionally to the amount of the receipt lines with respect to the discountable amount of the purchase order. ## Releasing receipts You can release a purchase receipt with the **Balanced** status by clicking **Release**in the window toolbar of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On release of a purchase receipt, an inventory receipt is generated automatically. To release multiple purchase receipts simultaneously, use the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On release of a receipt that includes non-stock items requiring receipt, the amounts of appropriate lines are recorded to the purchase accrual accounts (with the purchase accrual subaccount). The purchase accrual account to be used for receipt of such a non-stock item is defined by the posting class of the non-stock item; the default account assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window will be used if the posting class's **Use purchase accrual account from** rule points to it (that is, to have the **Item** option selected). The purchase accrual subaccount is also defined by the settings of posting class of the item; the default subaccount assigned to the item on the **General ledger accounts** tab will be used as one of the segment value sources for the resulting subaccount according to the **Combine purchase accrual sub from** rule. If the **Release inventory documents automatically** option on the **General settings** tab of the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window is selected, the inventory receipt is released automatically once it is generated. By using the following options on the **General settings** tab of the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, you can adjust the workflow for processing the purchase receipts and the related documents as needed in your organisation: + The **Create invoice on receipt release** check box provides the default value for the **Create invoice** check box in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. You can override this setting if needed for the particular receipt. For the convenience of the users, select this check box if invoices should be generated automatically for most receipts. Clear this check box if the users should enter invoices manually for most receipts or if the users enter or import the invoices and later link them to receipts. + If the **Release supplier ledger documents automatically** option is selected, the purchase invoices based on the purchase receipts are released automatically once they are generated. For each purchase order or purchase order line added to the purchase receipt, the system calculates the quantities of the received goods, and displays this value for each line in the **Qty. on receipts** column on the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. For blanket purchase orders, these quantities of items (the **Qty. on receipts** column) are updated from the lines of normal purchase orders linked to these blanket orders. The system changes the purchase order's status to **Closed** after the ordered quantity of the purchased goods has been received.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About purchase price variance /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-purchase-price-variance page The purchase price variance is the difference between the total price of an item on a purchase receipt and the total price of the item on a related purchase invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About purchase price variance The purchase price variance is the difference between the total price of an item on a purchase receipt and the total price of the item on a related purchase invoice. ## Purchase price variance calculation This difference may have various causes, such as changes in the delivery costs. When you create a purchase receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you will normally enter estimates for the prices of the items in the receipt, since you do not know their actual prices. When you create the related purchase invoice in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, you do know the actual prices and any additional costs, and can enter these on the invoice. When you release the purchase invoice, the system calculates the purchase price variance for each line item as the difference between the total cost of the item on the purchase receipt and the total cost of the item on the invoice. The item cost on the purchase receipt depends on the cost valuation method assigned to the item. The ways in which the calculated purchase price valuation can be allocated depends on the selected item cost valuation method and allocation mode for the stock item. ## Purchase price variance valuation methods and allocation modes [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) Valuation methods for stock items are set using the **Valuation method** field in the **Stock items** window. If a stock item has been assigned the valuation method **Standard**, the purchase price variance amounts are allocated to the standard cost variance account defined by the posting class of the item. [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) If a stock item has been assigned the valuation method **Average**, **FIFO**, or **Specific**, you can select one of the following modes of purchase price variance allocation in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window: Inventory account : Select this allocation mode to register the variance to the inventory accounts and thereby update the item costs. If you select this mode, you must also select a reason code that provides the expense accounts and subaccounts used for the purchase price variance allocation. For examples on how to use the Inventory account allocation mode, see [Purchase price variance allocation - example 1](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-1/) and [Purchase price variance allocation - example 2](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-2/). Purchase price variance account : Select this allocation mode to register the variance to the purchase price variance accounts defined by the posting class of the item. About return processing options /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-return-processing-options page In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balance with the supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About return processing options In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balance with the supplier. In most cases, the purchasing process is completed when goods are received, and purchase invoices are released to adjust your outstanding balance with the supplier. In some cases, however, items that have been delivered in an unsatisfactory condition or shipped by mistake should be returned to the supplier for replacement or reimbursement. Also, services that were not rendered or were provided partially should be reimbursed. This topic describes the general workflow of processing purchase returns in Visma Net. ## Recording returns in the Purchases workspace When goods must be returned to the supplier, you can create receipts of the **Return** type in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. When you create a return, you can add a purchase order, add an order line, or specify the items with their quantities manually. If you have added a purchase order or a line of the purchase order and specified the quantity to be returned to the supplier, you may need to select the **Open purchase order line**check box for the return line to keep the linked order line open until replacement for the returned items is received. If you select the **Open purchase order line** check box for a return line, the quantity on receipts in the original order line (which is linked to the return line) will be decreased by the quantity in the appropriate return line. You can add stock and non-stock items to returns. For stock items, you must specify the warehouse from which the items will be issued to be sent back to the supplier. For items with lot or serial numbers, you can click **Allocations** in the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab to specify these numbers for the returned units. Also, notes and files can be attached to the document so you can give your supplier detailed information about why the items are being returned. For each line in the return receipt, a reason code must be specified. When the item is returned, on release of the purchase return, the item's extended cost is recorded to the expense account defined by the reason code specified for each return line. The further processing of returns in Visma Net involves integration with the Inventory and Supplier ledger workspaces. ## Processing returns in the Inventory workspace Once the return document (a receipt of the **Return** type) is released, the system automatically generates an inventory issue that includes only stock items; non-stock items of the **Non-stock** type that were listed on the return, are not included in this inventory issue. The inventory issues that are generated for returns are released immediately if the **Release inventory documents automatically** option is selected in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window; otherwise, you should release the issues manually in the Inventory workspace. Once inventory issues are released, the availability data for the items is updated: The quantities of returned items are deducted from the item quantities available at the specified warehouse locations. On release of such an inventory issue, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Dr, ext. cost + Inventory account, inventory subaccount: Cr, ext. cost The extended cost for an issue of the **Return** type is calculated as for an regular issue: Unit cost used for the item on the inventory issue for return depends on the valuation method (for instance, for items with **Average** as the valuation method, it is the current unit cost calculated at the moment of release of the issue. The purchase expense account is associated with the reason code specified for return, while the inventory account is determined by the posting class of the item. Once an item is issued from its warehouse location according to the inventory issue document, the item can be shipped or transferred to the supplier. ## Processing returns in the Supplier ledger workspace To make the system automatically generate an supplier ledger purchase credit note when a return (receipt of the **Return** type) is released, select the **Create invoice**check box in the top part of the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window for this return. Alternatively, you will need to click **Actions - Enter supplier ledger invoice** for the return in the window toolbar to generate a purchase credit note. The supplier ledger purchase credit notes are released immediately if the **Release supplier ledger documents automatically** option is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, you should release these adjustments manually in the Supplier ledger workspace. On release of the purchase credit note, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Supplier ledger account, supplier ledger subaccount: Dr, ext. cost + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Cr, ext. cost The purchase expense account is associated with the reason code specified for return, while the supplier ledger account is associated with the supplier location. Further processing of returns depends on the agreement between your company and the supplier. The stages of processing the item at the supplier company are not reflected by the return's statuses. You can complete the processing of the return in the Supplier ledger workspace in one of the following ways: + If the supplier usually refunds your company for returned items, you should enter the refund and apply it to the appropriate purchase credit note. + If the supplier usually sends your company replacements for all returned items, create a purchase return and link it to the original order.If the **Require approval of invoices prior to payment** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, make sure that the purchase credit notes are not approved for payment until the associated returns are received and approved by the supplier; otherwise, the adjustments might be applied to unrelated invoices. ## Viewing returns You can view information about item movements by using the [Inventory transaction summary](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-summary-in406000/) window. The items that were received and issued in the same period with no sales or transfer quantities specified are returns with cost information specified. To get more specific information, use the [Inventory transaction history](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-transaction-history-in405000/) window. In this window, you can select a particular stock item and view the reference numbers of purchase return documents. ## Tracking costs on returns: an example Suppose that your company purchased five chairs (item ID **CHR00124**) with a unit price at €100. The item with this item ID is assigned the **Average** valuation method. On release of the inventory receipt, the item's extended cost was recorded to the purchase accrual account defined by the posting class of the item. The following general ledger entries are generated: + Inventory account, inventory subaccount: Dr, 500 + Purchase accrual account, purchase accrual subaccount: Cr, 500 The inventory account and purchase accrual account for each item are determined by the posting class of this item; the rule for the selection of the posting class is specified in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window in the **Use inventory/accrual account from** and **Use purchase accrual account from** fields, respectively. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the inventory subaccount used for the batch transaction is defined by the rule specified in the **Combine inventory/accrual sub. from** field on the same window, and the purchase accrual subaccount is defined by the rule in the **Combine purchase accrual sub. from** field. On release of the supplier ledger invoice, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Purchase accrual account, purchase accrual subaccount: Dr, 500 + Supplier ledger account, supplier ledger subaccount: Cr, 500 The supplier ledger account and supplier ledger subaccount are associated with the location of the supplier in the [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) window. Later, an employee discovered that the chairs are of the wrong colour. A purchase receipt of the **Return** type was created, and the original purchase order was added to this receipt. On release of this purchase receipt, the system generates an inventory issue. On release of the inventory issue, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Dr, 512.50 + Inventory account, inventory subaccount: Cr, 512.50 The purchase expense account is determined by the reason code specified for the return line. The default reason code for returns can be specified in the **Purchase order return reason code** in the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. The extended cost on the inventory issue differs from the extended cost on the original receipt, because for inventory issues, the system uses the current average cost of the item, which is 102.50. On release of the purchase credit note, the following general ledger entries are generated: + Supplier ledger account, supplier ledger subaccount: Dr, 500 + Purchase expense account, purchase expense subaccount: Cr, 500 Thus, the purchase expense account (purchase expense subaccount) accrues any differences in costs as expenses, in this case, the amount of 12.50.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Create a purchase receipt /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/create-a-purchase-receipt section By using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you can create a purchase receipt for a particular purchase order or any items received at a specific warehouse for multiple purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase receipt By using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you can create a purchase receipt for a particular purchase order or any items received at a specific warehouse for multiple purchase orders. For more information: [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/). 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) (PO302000). 1. Select **Receipt** as the receipt type. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. 1. Check the location of the supplier, and change it if needed. 1. Check the date of the receipt, and change it if needed. 1. Select the **Create invoice** check box if you want the system to create an invoice for the received items automatically. If you want to create an invoice later, do not select the check box. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, specify the reference number of the supplier's original document if references to supplier documents are required in your system. 1. Provide a brief description of this receipt. 1. If you need to add the received items by entering specific item IDs or by scanning bar codes, click **Add line**. The **Add receipt line** dialog box opens. For each item that you want to add, do the following: 1. Enter the item's item ID in the **Item ID** field. 1. If there is only one purchase order with this item, notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. Proceed to step 9e. 1. If there are multiple orders with this item, when the **Add purchase order line** dialog box opens (displaying the lines with this item from multiple orders), select the check box next to the line that you want to add to the receipt. Notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. 1. At the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box, click **Add and close**. 1. Review the information about the order line in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, and click **Add line**. 1. If you added lines, in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, click **Close**. 1. Review any added lines, and specify the correct quantities of the received items in the **Receipt qty.** column. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, and click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. 1. If you need to add lines for items from specific purchase orders, click **Add purchase order**. The **Add purchase order** dialog box opens. 1. Select the check boxes (in the column with a check box as a column heading) next to orders that you want to add to the receipt. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order** dialog box. 1. Review the order lines, delete the unneeded lines, and specify the quantities of the received items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you need to add specific lines from purchase orders, click **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar. For each line that you want to add, perform the following actions: 1. In the **Order no.** column, select the order by its reference number. 1. Review its lines and select the line with the received item. 1. Click **Add** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box. 1. If you have added lines from purchase orders in the previous step, review each added line, and in the **Receipt qty.** column, specify the correct quantities of the received items. 1. If any of the added items require lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** in the table toolbar. In the **Allocations** dialog box, select the lot or serial numbers of the received items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Review each of the items for which lot or serial numbers must be specified when the items are received (which is indicated by a yellow exclamation mark in the **Receipt qty.** column). To specify particular locations or lot or serial numbers for each item, execute the following steps: 1. Select a line with an item requiring allocation, and click **Allocations** on the table toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. If you need to distribute the item quantity among multiple locations, in the **Location** column, select one of the locations with a non-zero quantity of the item and specify the quantity to be received to this location in the **Quantity** column. Add lines with other locations as needed until the entire quantity is distributed. 1. If you need to assign lot or serial numbers to the units of the item, select the location where the units will be stocked. Notice the value in the **Start lot/serial no.** field, and specify the quantity of units for which the lot or serial numbers will be generated. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. If the **Control quantity** field is available in the top part of the window, type the total quantity of the receipt. 1. If the **Control amount** field is available in the to part of the window, type the total amount of the receipt. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. 1. Click **Release**. To view the details of the original order linked to any selected line in this receipt, click the **View purchase order** button on the table toolbar. To view the inventory receipt generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries - View inventory document**. To view the invoice generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries** and select **View supplier document**. Parent topic: [Process purchase receipts and returns - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview/) Create a purchase return /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/create-a-purchase-return section To create a purchase return, by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you create a purchase receipt of the Return type for the items to be returned to the supplier for an replacement or an refund. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase return To create a purchase return, by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, you create a purchase receipt of the Return type for the items to be returned to the supplier for an replacement or an refund. For more information: [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/). 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Select **Return** as the receipt type. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. 1. Check the location of the supplier, and change it if needed. 1. Check the date of the return and change it if needed. 1. Select the **Create invoice** check box if you want the system to create a purchase credit note for the returned items automatically. If you want the returned items to be replaced, do not select the check box. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, specify the reference number of the supplier's original document such as return authorisation. 1. Provide a brief description of this return. 1. If you need to add the items (to be returned) by entering specific item IDs or by scanning bar codes, click **Add line** on the table toolbar. The **Add receipt line** dialog box opens. For each item that you want to add, do the following: 1. Enter the item ID in the **Item ID** field. 1. If there is only one order with this item, notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. Proceed to Step 9e. 1. If there are multiple orders, when the **Add purchase order line** dialog box opens (displaying the lines with this item from multiple orders), select the check box next to the line that you want to add to the return. Notice that the reference number of the order has been inserted in the **Purchase order no.** column for this row. 1. At the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box, click **Add and close**. 1. Review the information about the order line in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, and click **Add line**. 1. If you added lines, in the **Add receipt line** dialog box, click **Close**. 1. Review any added lines, and specify the correct quantities of the returned items in the **Receipt qty.** column. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is selected, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) in the window toolbar. 1. If you need to add items from specific purchase orders, click **Add purchase order**. The **Add purchase order** dialog box opens. 1. Select the check boxes (in the column with a check box as a column heading) next to orders that you want to add to the purchase return. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order** dialog box. 1. Review the order lines, delete the unnecessary lines, and specify the quantities of the items to be returned. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you need to add specific lines from purchase orders, click **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar. For each line that you want to add, perform the following actions: 1. In the **Order no.** column, select the order by its reference number. 1. Review its lines and select the line with the item to be returned. 1. Click **Add** at the bottom of the **Add purchase order line** dialog box. 1. If you have added lines from purchase orders in the previous step, review each added line and in the **Receipt qty.** column specify the correct quantities of the returned items. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Review each of the items requiring allocation (which is indicated by a yellow exclamation mark in the **Receipt qty.** column). To specify particular locations or lot or serial numbers for each item, execute the following steps: 1. Select a line with an item requiring allocation, and click **Allocations** on the table toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. If the specified location has lower quantity than the quantity to be returned, in the **Location** column, select one of the locations with a non-zero quantity of the item and specify the quantity to be returned from this location in the **Quantity** column. Add lines with other locations as needed. 1. If you need to return units of the item with particular lot or serial numbers, select the location where they are stocked. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select the lot or serial number for the returned unit. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 for a serialised item or to the lot quantity for a lot. A new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another lot or serial number. Continue selecting numbers until the remaining quantity of the return line is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. Review the receipt lines, and if needed, do the following for each line: 1. Select a specific reason code instead of the default reason code for returns. 1. Select the **Open purchase order** check box to open the purchase order line that is linked to the receipt line and to update (that is, decrease) the quantity on receipts for the order line. 1. If the **Control quantity** field is available in the top part of the window, type the total quantity on the return. 1. If the **Control amount** field is available in the top part of the window, type the total amount of the return. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. 1. To view the details of the original order linked to any selected line in this return, click the **View purchase order** button in the table toolbar. 1. To view the inventory issue generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries - View inventory document**. To view the purchase credit note generated for this receipt, in the window toolbar, click **Inquiries - View supplier document**. Parent topic: [Process purchase receipts and returns - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview/) Add items in purchase receipts using barcode scanner /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/add-items-in-purchase-receipts-using-barcode-scanner section You can use barcode scanning to effectively receive products at a warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add items in purchase receipts using barcode scanner You can use barcode scanning to effectively receive products at a warehouse. From the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you can invoke the **Add line** dialogue, where you scan a product barcode, the system finds the item record, brings up the item information, and adds a new line to the receipt. ## How to use barcodes to add purchase receipt lines 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new receipt and select a supplier. 1. Click **Add line**. 1. Add the bar code to the **Barcode** field with a scanner or enter it manually. To use the dialogue for barcode scanning, make sure the **Add line automatically** option is selected. Then, once the fields in the dialogue are filled in, the system creates a new line automatically. If you select the **Add one unit per barcode** check box in the dialogue, each time you scan a barcode, the item quantity for the receipt will be increased by one unit. If you clear the check box when an item barcode is scanned, the system searches the purchase order that matches the supplier and item ID associated with the barcode. Then the system inserts the quantity of the item from the purchase order. If no such order is found, the system inserts one unit. Add item to purchase receipt using supplier part ID /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/add-item-to-purchase-receipt-using-supplier-part-id page When receiving the items for a purchase order I want to search and add the items to the receipt by using the supplier part ID. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add item to purchase receipt using supplier part ID When receiving the items for a purchase order I want to search and add the items to the receipt by using the supplier part ID. 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. 1. Click **Add line** and the **Add receipt line** window opens. 1. Write the supplier part ID in the **Item ID** field and press **Enter** on the keyboard. If there is only one purchase order for the supplier containing the item, you will see the reference to the purchase order in the **Order no.** field. When you add the line to the purchase receipt, it is connected to the purchase order, so that the correct purchase order item is received. If there are several purchase orders for the supplier containing the item, the system will open the **Add purchase order line** window after you have entered the supplier part ID. Here you can select which purchase order item you receive and add it to the purchase receipt. > [!NOTE] > that you can also add items with the help of barcodes in the **Add receipt line** window. Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-a-cash-on-delivery-cod-transaction page The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as cash on delivery (COD) or, because other methods of payment besides cash might be involved, collect on delivery (COD). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as cash on delivery (COD) or, because other methods of payment besides cash might be involved, collect on delivery (COD). The type of purchasing transaction for which a buyer pays at the time of delivery is generally referred to as **cash on delivery (COD)** or, because other methods of payment besides cash might be involved, **collect on delivery (COD)**. Visma Net provides you with functionality that you can use to account for payments made on delivery. This topic describes the basic workflow when you process a purchase order to be paid on delivery. ## Basic process To process a purchase order that will be paid on delivery, you perform the following general steps: 1. **Create a purchase order** In the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, create a purchase order. Select the supplier, and provide all the required details about the goods and services to be purchased. Save the order. Depending on your company's policies, additional steps might follow the creation of the purchase order, for instance, for approval of the order. 1. Prepare a supplier ledger payment In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, open the prepayment request, and click **Pay invoice/apply adjustment** on the **Actions** menu. This action opens the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window with information filled in for a new supplier ledger payment, which is ready to be saved. Save and release the payment. 1. Create a receipt for the purchase order. Once the goods are received and payment is made, you can create a receipt in either of the following ways: + In the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, open the original purchase order, on the **Actions** menu, select **Create receipt**. This opens the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window with a ready-to-save receipt. + In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, specify the supplier, and on the table toolbar of the **Details** tab, click **Add purchase order**. Select the original purchase order to add to the receipt. Save the receipt. 1. **Release the receipt** On release of the receipt, the system generates an supplier ledger invoice, applies prepayment to the purchase order, and changes the status of the purchase order to **Closed**. Parent topic: [Process purchase receipts and returns - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns-overview/) Purchase price variance allocation - example 1 /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-1 page This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase price variance allocation - example 1 This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. The examples assume that: + You select **Inventory account** as the allocation mode for purchase price variance (PPV) amounts. + You assign the **Average cost** valuation method to the purchased items. + All quantities of items in stock remain unchanged between the dates of receipt and invoice. ## Step 1 - Create a purchase receipt In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you create a purchase receipt for the following items. ### Purchase receipt |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|250|2500| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|15|380|5700| |**Total**:|10960||| When you release the purchase receipt, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory receipt |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|2500|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|2760|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|5700|0| |**Purchase accrual:**|0|10960| ## Step 2 - Create an invoice In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, select Actions - Create purchase invoice. When you receive and enter the purchase invoice for the initial quantities of the items, you enter the following information. ### Purchase invoice |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|450|4500| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|15|180|2700| |**Total**:|9960||| When you release the purchase invoice, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the purchase invoice |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Purchase accrual**|9960|0| |**Supplier ledger**|0|9960| When you release this invoice, the system also creates an inventory adjustment with the following lines. ### Inventory adjustment |Item|Extended cost| |---|---| |**Item 1**|2000| |**Item 3**|-3000| ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory adjustment |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|2000|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|0|3000| |**Purchase accrual**:|1000|0| Purchase price variance allocation - example 2 /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/purchase-price-variance-allocation-example-2 page This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase price variance allocation - example 2 This topic gives examples of the documents that you create and the transactions that the system generates for purchase price variance allocation. The examples assume that: + You select **Inventory account** as the allocation mode for purchase price variance (PPV) amounts. + You assign the **Average cost** valuation method to the purchased items. + Some quantities of the purchased items were issued (sold) between the date of the receipt and the date of the invoice. ## Step 1 - Create a purchase receipt In the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you create a purchase receipt for the following items. ### Purchase receipt |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|250|2500| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|15|380|5700| |**Total**:|10960||| When you release the purchase receipt, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory receipt |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|2500|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|2760|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|5700|0| |**Purchase accrual**:|0|10960| ## Step 2 - Create an inventory issue During the next few days, you sell some quantities of the items. The system generates an inventory issue with the following lines. ### Inventory issue |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|7|250|1750| |**Item 2**|23|120|2760| |**Item 3**|5|380|1900| |**Total**:|6410||| As a result of this inventory issue, the system generates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the issue (sale) |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|1750|0| |**Inventory (Item 2)**|2760|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|1900|0| |**Expense (COGS)**|0|6410| ## Step 3 - Create an invoice In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, select Actions - Create purchase invoice. When you receive and enter the purchase invoice for the initial quantities of the items, you enter the following information. ### Purchase invoice |Item|Quantity|Unit cost|Amount| |---|---|---|---| |**Item 1**|10|450|4500| |**Item 2**|23|200|4600| |**Item 3**|15|180|2700| |**Total**:|11800||| When you release the purchase invoice, the system creates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the purchase invoice |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Purchase accrual**|11800|0| |**Supplier ledger**|0|11800| When you release this invoice, the system also creates an inventory adjustment with the following lines. ### Inventory adjustment |Item|Extended cost| |---|---| |**Item 1**|600| |**Item 3**|-2000| |**Item 1 (PPV expense)**|1400| |**Item 2 (PPV expense)**|1840| |**Item 3 (PPV expense)**|-1000| When you release this adjustment, the system generates the following transactions. ### General ledger transactions generated for the inventory adjustment |Account|Debit amount|Credit amount| |---|---|---| |**Inventory (Item 1)**|600|0| |**Inventory (Item 3)**|0|2000| |**PPV expense (Item 1)**|1400|0| |**PPV expense (Item 2)**|1840|0| |**PPV expense (Item 3)**|0|1000| |**Purchase accrual**|0|2000| |**Purchase accrual**|0|1840| |**Purchase accrual**|3000|0| Process landed costs /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs section In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process landed costs In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. Landed costs may depend on specific items, or on items' weight or volume. Some amounts of landed costs may be known in advance, while others become known only when the items are received at the destination warehouse. Process landed costs - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/process-landed-costs-overview page In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process landed costs - overview In Visma Net, you can design and maintain landed cost codes to be used to account for various types of additional costs that your company incurs when purchased goods are being shipped to your company warehouses, or when transfer of certain stock is performed between warehouses via an external carrier. Landed costs may depend on specific items, or on items' weight or volume. Some amounts of landed costs may be known in advance, while others become known only when the items are received at the destination warehouse. About landed cost codes /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-codes page The total cost of goods purchased generally includes the purchase price and additional charges, such as freight or other shipping costs and insurance; for an international shipment, it may also include customs duties and other taxes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About landed cost codes The total cost of goods purchased generally includes the purchase price and additional charges, such as freight or other shipping costs and insurance; for an international shipment, it may also include customs duties and other taxes. The total cost of goods purchased generally includes the purchase price and additional charges, such as freight or other shipping costs and insurance; for an international shipment, it may also include customs duties and other taxes. All these charges, often referred to as **landed costs**, affect the total product cost. Landed costs are the costs incurred, beyond the purchase price the supplier charges for the goods, in the process of bringing the goods to one of your company's warehouses. To accurately calculate the total product cost, you must consider all landed costs. By accurately analysing total product cost statistics, your company can assign the most appropriate prices to the products you sell. ## Landed cost code definition In Visma Net, landed cost codes are used to capture various types of landed costs. For each type of landed costs your company may encounter, create a landed cost code to be used to enter and process that type of landed costs. Most landed costs are not fixed amounts associated with a specific stock item. Landed costs may be fees, such as for shipping and handling, whose amount depends on a shipment's weight, volume, or quantity of items. Accordingly, you need to define how to allocate the incurred amounts among all items in the shipment. The landed cost amounts are ultimately paid to a carrier or customs office (the landed cost supplier) rather than to the supplier that sells the goods. In Visma Net, you create and maintain landed cost codes by using the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window. For each code, you specify the following information: + How the landed cost amount should be allocated among all goods in the shipment. Landed costs can be allocated to stock items based on their quantity, volume, cost, or weight. + What type of landed cost this is. + Which landed cost supplier provides the services. Only suppliers with the **Landed cost supplier** check box selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window can be associated with the code. + What account and subaccount is used to accrue landed cost amounts (the Landed cost accrual account and Landed cost accrual account subaccount). + What payment terms are used by the landed cost supplier. + How the landed cost is applied in the Purchases workspace, in the Supplier ledger workspace, or in both workspaces. Some of the landed costs, such as freight, are typically known when the goods are received, and can always be specified directly on purchase or transfer receipts in the Purchases workspace. Landed costs of other types may become known later, and can be entered in the Supplier ledger workspace, on an invoice associated with the original receipt. Some landed costs can be applied in either the Supplier ledger workspace or the Purchases workspace. For details, see [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). + What VAT category is used if the landed costs are service charges subject to taxes. A landed cost code is not associated with any specific currency, so if multi-currency support has been enabled in the system, landed costs are considered as specified in the currency of the document. ## Landed cost allocation method The allocation method of a landed cost defines how the landed cost is distributed among stock items (line items) specified in the document. When you are creating a landed cost code for specific type of landed cost, you can select one of the following allocation methods: By quantity : The landed cost amount is distributed among the line items in proportion to their quantities. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost to the goods purchased in the largest quantities. If units of measure (UoMs) other than the base UoMs are specified for items, item quantities are calculated with respect to the base UoMs. CAUTION: Use this option for only purchase orders that include similar items with the same base UoM or similar base UoMs. Do not use this option for purchase orders that include disparate items with base units that cannot be compared, such as pallets and tons, or meters and pounds. By cost : The landed cost amount is distributed among the line items in proportion to their extended cost. The extended cost is calculated based on the item's valuation method. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost amount to more expensive goods. By weight : The landed cost amount is distributed among the stock items proportionally to their weights. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost to the goods that weigh the most. The weight of the base unit of the stock item is specified on the **Packaging** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. By volume : The landed cost amount is distributed among the applicable items proportionally to their volumes. This adds a greater percentage of the landed cost to goods with more bulk. The volume of the base unit of the stock item is specified on the **Packaging** tab in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. When you add the landed costs to a purchase or transfer receipt or to an invoice with multiple receipts, you can always select specific items whose costs must be updated by the landed costs. On release of the landed cost document, the system generates an inventory adjustment for the stock items listed in the landed cost document. The amount of landed cost to be added to the cost of a particular stock item listed on the adjustment is calculated according to the allocation method.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About landed cost application scenarios /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios page With Visma Net, your company can track landed costs incurred for purchased or transferred stock items, to accurately calculate the total costs of the items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About landed cost application scenarios With Visma Net, your company can track landed costs incurred for purchased or transferred stock items, to accurately calculate the total costs of the items. ## Typical scenarios of adding landed costs Some of the landed costs, such as freight, are typically known when the goods are received and can be applied to purchase or transfer receipts in the Purchases workspace. Other types of landed costs may become known later, when an invoice from the service provider is received; these landed costs must be specified on an invoice in the Supplier ledger workspace that is linked to the appropriate purchase or transfer receipts. Also, there may be landed costs that can be applied in either of these ways: on a receipt or on an invoice. The way the landed costs of a particular type must be applied to item costs is defined by the application method selected for the appropriate landed cost code. There are two typical scenarios, then, of users tracking landed costs associated with the received items. The scenarios that are possible for the landed costs of specific type are defined by the option selected in the **Application method** field in the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window: + I. **From purchase order**: The landed costs are added directly to a purchase or transfer receipt. + II. **From supplier** The landed costs are added to an invoice that can be associated with an existing purchase or transfer receipt. If the **From both** option is selected the **Application method** field, either of scenarios can be applied. This topic describes how the landed costs can be specified for purchase receipts. ## Scenario I: Landed costs added to purchase or transfer receipt With this scenario, while you are entering a receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, you also enter the landed costs whose codes specify that they are applicable in the Purchases workspace or in both the Purchases and Supplier ledger workspaces. On the **Landed costs** tab of the window, select the landed cost code and specify the landed cost amount. When you release a receipt with landed costs specified, the following documents are generated: + An invoice to be paid to the supplier of the goods + One invoice or multiple invoices to be paid to each landed cost supplier (such as a carrier or customs office) with the landed cost code that was specified on the receipt + A receipt in the Inventory workspace for the goods received into inventory at a specific warehouse + Inventory adjustments that update stock item costs in accordance with the allocation method of the landed cost code, with as many adjustments for each item as there are different landed cost codes. If you configure landed cost codes that allow landed costs to be added directly to a purchase order receipt, you can select the **Release inventory documents automatically** option in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window to make sure that the item costs will be promptly updated. If the inventory adjustments were not created, which can happen if some of the accounts and subaccounts required for landed cost processing were not specified for stock items mentioned in the receipt, you use the [Release landed costs (AP506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-landed-costs-from-purchase-invoices-ap506500/) window to generate these adjustments. The receipt is visible on one window, the other, or both, depending on the application method (**From purchase order**, or **From both** method) selected for the landed cost code. When you need to enter the landed costs of a specific type on the purchase receipt, if the exact amount of the landed costs is not known, you can enter the estimated amount under this landed cost code. Later, when the exact amount becomes known, on the purchase invoice generated for the receipt, you can manually adjust the amount of the landed costs. The difference between the previous amount and the adjusted amount is automatically added to the **Landed cost variance** account specified in the [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window for the landed cost used on the original receipt. ## Scenario II: Landed costs added to an invoice With this scenario, you can enter an invoice from the landed cost supplier responsible for additional charges by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Such an invoice should be associated with the original purchase receipt or receipts. In this window, you can specify only landed costs with codes that allow application in the Suppliers workspace or both the Suppliers and Purchases workspaces. These costs, even though they are entered after the purchase, should also update inventory costs. Before you create an invoice for landed costs, make sure that the original purchase receipt and the inventory receipt are released. On release of such a landed cost invoice, inventory adjustments (for all stock items mentioned in the associated receipts) are generated to update the product costs. If an inventory adjustment was not generated automatically because some of the accounts were not specified, use the [Release landed costs (AP506500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-landed-costs-from-purchase-invoices-ap506500/) window to manually generate these adjustments for each invoice. ## Cost updating Upon release, an inventory adjustment updates the inventory costs of items differently depending on the valuation method of the item: + For stock items with the **FIFO** or **Specific** valuation method, the cost on the particular cost layer (created by the receipt) is updated as follows: + If the layer still has the original quantity, the cost of all items on the layer is updated, and the landed cost amount from the landed cost accrual account is transferred to the inventory account assigned to the item. + If the current quantity on the layer is less than the original quantity, the landed cost amount is moved from the landed cost accrual account to update the Landed cost variance account and the Inventory account in proportion with the sold and unsold quantities, respectively. (If you need to adjust the sales account on release of the inventory adjustment, you can use the same account for the COGS account and the landed cost variance account.) + For items with the **Average** valuation method, the landed cost amount from the landed cost accrual account is transferred to the inventory account assigned to the item and updates the average cost of the unit. At the moment of inventory adjustment release, if some of the units (listed on the purchase receipt) were sold, the landed cost amount updates both the landed cost variance account and the inventory account of the item proportionally to the unsold and sold quantities (as on the original purchase receipt), respectively. + For the **Standard cost** valuation method, the amount from the landed cost accrual account is moved to the landed cost variance account. [../so-landed-cost-transfers-con.html](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-landed-costs-for-transfers/) Purchases windows /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases windows Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Purchases windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Purchases workspace. ## Transactions [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) ## Registers [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) ## Processes [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) [Print/e-mail purchase orders (PO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/print-email-purchase-orders-po503000/) [Release purchase receipts (PO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-purchase-receipts-po501000/) [Release landed costs (PO506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-landed-costs-from-receipts-po506000/) ## Inquiries [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) [Purchase order list (PO40100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-list-po40100s/) [Purchase history by items (PO40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-history-by-item-po40101s/) ## Reports [Purchase order summary (PO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-summary-po610500/) For the time interval you select, shows summary information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. [Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-supplier-po611000/) For the time interval you select, displays detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in this report is grouped by supplier. [Purchase order details by stock item (PO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-item-po611500/) For the time interval you select, gives you detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in this report is grouped by item. [Purchase order details by account (PO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000/) For the time interval you select, gives you detailed information about purchase order lines with non-stock items. The data in this report is grouped by expense accounts (and expense subaccounts) specified in purchase orders. [Purchase receipt summary (PO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-summary-po620500/) Displays detailed information about purchase receipts and returns created in the Purchases workspace. [Purchase receipt history (PO643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-history-po643000/) Shows detailed information about the receipts performed on purchase orders. [Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-details-by-supplier-po621000/) Presents detailed information about purchase receipts and returns created in the Purchases workspace, with the data grouped by supplier. [Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po630500/) Displays summary information for the purchase receipts and returns by the accounts they used. [Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-details-po631000/) Shows detailed information for the purchase receipts and returns by the accounts they used. [Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-summary-po631500/) Provides summary information for the invoices generated upon the purchase receipts and returns. [Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-details-po632000/) Displays detailed information for the invoices generated upon the purchase receipts and returns. [Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-allocated-and-back-ordered-po622000/) Displays detailed information on allocations related to the items listed on receipts (of all statuses) for transfer and purchase orders. ## Preferences [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) [Landed cost codes ( PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) ## Other [Purchase receipt (PO646000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000/) Purchase order preferences (PO101000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000 page You use this window to provide the general settings for the Purchases workspace, such as number series for purchasing documents, validation requirements for purchase orders and receipts, approval and mailing settings, and the default freight expense account and subaccount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order preferences (PO101000) You use this window to provide the general settings for the Purchases workspace, such as number series for purchasing documents, validation requirements for purchase orders and receipts, approval and mailing settings, and the default freight expense account and subaccount. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The General settings tab This tab contains three groups of settings that affect the basic operations available in the Purchases workspace. ### The Purchase order numbering settings section In this section, you can specify the number series to be used for purchase orders and receipts created in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) and [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) windows.
Element Description
Blanket order number series

The number series used for assigning order numbers to purchase orders of the Blanket type.

This field is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Regular order number series The number series used for assigning order numbers to purchase orders of all other types except Blanket.
Receipt number series The number series used for assigning reference numbers to purchase receipts.
### The Validate total on entry section This section includes options to require validation of document totals during data entry for purchase receipts as well as various types of purchase orders.
Element Description
For receipts

When this check box is selected, the system will validate totals for purchase receipts on entry.

Note

To save a receipt with the Hold check box cleared, you have to enter the total amount of the order in the Control amount field and the total quantity in the Control qty. field in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.
For normal and default orders

When this check box is selected, you have to validate the total amounts of purchase orders with the Normal and Standard types on entry.

Note

To save an order with the Hold check box cleared, you have to enter the total amount of the order in the Control amount field in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.
For blanket orders

When this check box is selected, the system will validate the total amount for purchase orders with the Blanket type on entry.

Note

To save an order with the Hold check box cleared, you must enter the total amount in the Control amount field in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This check box is displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
For drop-ship orders

When this check box is selected, the system will validate totals for purchase orders with the Drop-ship type during data entry.

Note

To save an order with the Hold check box cleared, you have to enter the total amount in the Control amount field in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This check box is displayed if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Purchase price variance allocation section This section includes options that control how the purchase price variance amounts are processed in the system.
Element Description
Allocation mode

The mode of allocating the purchase price variance amounts. You can select one of the following options:

Inventory account
For stock items, to record the variance amounts to the inventory accounts, thus updating the costs. For non-stock items, to record the variance amounts to the expense account.
Purchase price variance account
For stock and non-stock items, to record any variance amounts to the purchase variance accounts.
Reason code

The reason code used as a source of accounts and subaccounts for transactions that allocate the purchase price variance amounts.

This field is available if Inventory is selected in the Allocation mode field.
### The Other section Use this section to specify the account and subaccount to be used to record freight expenses incurred on purchases, as well as miscellaneous settings related to document processing.
Element Description
Create invoice on receipt release

This check box determines the default value for the Create invoice check box in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window; the user creating a receipt can override this value if needed for the particular receipt.

For the convenience of users, select this check box if invoices should be generated automatically for most receipts. Clear this check box if users should enter invoices manually for most receipts.
Freight expense account

The default account to be used to accrue the freight expenses incurred in purchasing.

The freight amounts from purchase order lines with the Freight type and no ship via code specified in the Supplier location column will be posted to this account.
Freight expense sub. The corresponding default subaccount to be used to accrue the freight expenses.
Reason code purchase order returns The default reason code to be used for all purchase returns.
Release inventory documents automatically When this check box is selected, inventory receipts will be automatically released on release of purchase receipts.
Release LC IN adjustments automatically When this check box is selected, inventory adjustments for landed costs will be released automatically on release of purchase receipts.
Release supplier documents automatically When this check box is selected, all supplier documents associated with purchase receipts will be released automatically.
Complete purchase order line automatically

When this check box is selected, purchase order lines added to a receipt are completed automatically when:

  • the purchase receipt is released,
  • the line is deleted from the purchase receipt.

If you do not want a purchase order line to be completed when it is deleted from a purchase receipt, but you still want purchase order lines to be completed upon release of the purchase receipt, select Complete purchase order line in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.
Hold receipts on entry

When this check box is selected, purchase receipts will be saved with the On hold status by default.

If the check box is cleared, the documents will be saved with the Balanced status by default.
Do not check alt. item ID on creation of purchase receipt When this check box is selected, the system allows you to create a purchase receipt in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window, when an item’s alternative item ID has been changed since the purchase order was created.
Use purchase receipts to process service lines from normal purchase orders

When this check box is not selected, service lines are not copied from a purchase order to the corresponding purchase receipt. Also, they cannot be added manually to the purchase receipt by clicking Add purchase order or Add purchase order line in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. Service lines are invoiced directly from the purchase order. After a purchase invoice has been prepared for a purchase order line, it is not possible to create a second unreleased invoice for this line.

When this check box is selected, service lines are copied to a purchase receipt prepared for a purchase order that includes these lines; these lines cannot be invoiced directly from the purchase order.
Use purchase receipts to process service lines from drop-ship orders

When this check box is not selected, service lines are not copied from a drop-ship order to the corresponding purchase receipt. Also, they cannot be added manually to the purchase receipt by clicking Add purchase order or Add purchase order line in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. Service lines are invoiced directly from the drop-ship order. After a purchase invoice has been prepared for a purchase order line, it is not possible to create a second unreleased invoice for this line.

When this check box is selected, service lines are copied to a purchase receipt prepared for a drop-ship order that includes these lines; these lines cannot be invoiced directly from the purchase order.
Update sub. on order owner change

When this check box is selected, the expense subaccount shown for each non-stock item listed on a document will be updated when the document is assigned to another owner.

The expense subaccount is combined (according to the posting class of the expense) from multiple related subaccounts, including (if applicable) the subaccount associated with the employee handling the order or receipt.
Copy line descriptions from sales orders When this check box is selected, line descriptions will be copied from sales orders to purchase orders that are based on these sales orders.
Copy line notes from sales orders When this check box is selected, line notes will be copied from sales orders to purchase orders that are based on these sales orders.
Automatically add receipt line for barcode

When this check box is selected and a barcode scanner is used, lines will be added to purchase receipts automatically once a barcode is scanned or entered.

The selected option is used as the default option for the Add receipt line dialog box, which is called from the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window when you click Add line on the Document details tab.
Add one unit per barcode

The selected option is used as the default option in the Add receipt line dialog box, which is called from the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.

When this check box is selected, the item quantity will be increased by one unit each time an item barcode is entered into the system, manually or by using a barcode scanner.
Default shipping dest. type

The way the destination shipping address is selected for purchase orders when the orders are created in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window. Select one of the following options:

Branch
To use the address of the branch associated with the order as the default destination.
Warehouse
To use the address of the warehouse associated with the order as the default destination.

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default receipt quantity

The quantity that the system should specify on a new receipt by default. Select one of the following options:

Open quantity
To specify an item quantity from a purchase order or an order line added to the receipt.
Zero
To set zero quantity so that the users have to type the quantity manually.
## The Reporting settings tab This tab contains a list of predefined mailings that you can use for sending purchase orders and other documents to suppliers electronically (by email). Mailing settings specified on this tab are used as the default values for mailing settings specified for supplier classes, which in turn are used as the default values for setting up mailings for particular suppliers. This tab contains the following tables: **Default sources** and **Default recipients**. ### The Default sources table In this table, you can view and modify the active mailings to be used to send emails to suppliers and employees. For each mailing, you can select either a report or an email template to be used by default as the body of the email.
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of the mailing.
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The report that, by default, will be used to structure the information available in a purchase order. For the email, the report will be used as the email’s body (or attachment), if a report is used rather than an email template.
Notification template The template to be used by default to generate emails for the mailing, if an email template is used rather than a report.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no preferences are specified for a particular recipient in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. Select one of the following: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, this mailing is active. Emails are generated only for active mailings.
### The Default recipients table This table contains the default recipient types for the mailing selected in the **Default sources** table. Generally, this list provides default contact types for supplier classes if any of these mailings will be selected for a class.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails for the mailing. Choose one of the following options:

Primary
The primary contact of the supplier.
Remittance
A remittance contact of the supplier.
Shipping
A shipping contact of the supplier.
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the documents of the specific supplier classes or specific suppliers, or is otherwise associated with either of them.
Contact ID

The specific contact.

This column is not used for supplier contacts or the Primary, Remittance, and Shipping settings in the Contact type column. If you have selected the Employee type, you can select one of your company’s employees here; this person will receive all emails generated for this mailing in the Purchases workspace, if the mailing is active.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to recipients of this type. Select one of the following: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, the recipient is active. Only active recipients can be configured to receive emails for the mailing.
Bcc When this check box is selected, the recipient will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails for the selected mailing.
Purchase orders (PO301000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000 page In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new ones, and add lines to existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase orders (PO301000) In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new ones, and add lines to existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new ones, and add lines to existing ones. You can create a purchase order based on an existing sales order or by adding separate lines of different sales orders. Once an order has been saved, it can be approved, rejected, or cancelled by any of the employees assigned to review this purchase order. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a drop-ship order flow](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-orders/create-a-drop-ship-order-flow/) + [Process a cash-on-delivery (COD) transaction](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/process-a-cash-on-delivery-cod-transaction/) ## The top part
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

Email purchase order
Emails (according to the settings of the PURCHASE ORDER mailing) the order to the supplier specified in this order.
Mark as do not email
Selects the Do not email check box (on the Other information tab) for the purchase order, to skip the step of emailing the purchase order.
Create purchase receipt
Creates a purchase receipt when the ordered items listed in this purchase order are received. This action opens the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window with a new receipt that has all the details copied from the purchase order. Note that options Do not print and Do not email on the Other information tab need to be cleared when you want to create a purchase receipt.
Create purchase invoice
Creates a purchase invoice based on the current purchase order. This action opens the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window with a new purchase invoice that has all the details copied from the purchase order.
Complete order
Completes the current purchase order when no more receipts are expected for the order.
Cancel order
Cancels the purchase order, which changes its status to Cancelled. You cannot edit an order with this status nor associate receipts with it. You can later manually change its status to On hold (by selecting the Hold check box) and edit the order.
Recalculate prices
Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, where you can specify the extent to which you want to refresh the prices and discounts for the document.
Create prepayment
Creates a prepayment linked to this purchase order. The system opens the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window with a new prepayment request (based on the purchase order) ready to be saved. You can use the prepayment to pay for this order directly when the goods are received.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands with quick access to inquiry windows:

Supplier details
Opens the Supplier details (AP402000) window, which displays the data related to the supplier from which the goods in this order are ordered.
Supplier documents
Displays the list of supplier documents related to this purchase order.
Reports

Includes the following menu commands you can click for quick navigation to the following reports:

Print purchase order
To print the current purchase order by using the Purchase order (PO641000) report.
View purchase receipt history
To view the Purchase receipt history (PO643000) report showing all purchase receipts related to this purchase order.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used for updating prices (referred to in purchase orders as unit costs) and discounts for the purchase order.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. Select one of the following options:

Current line
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line.
All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines.
Set current unit prices When this check box is selected, the system will replace the item prices with the current prices in the selected line or all lines.
Override manual prices

When this check box is selected, the system will replace the item prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit cost or Ext. cost column) with the current prices.

This check box is available only if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.
Recalculate discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will recalculate the discounts for the selected line or the all lines.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Override manual line discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will cancel the manual discounts for the selected line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate box) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
### The top part elements
Element Description
Type

The type of the purchase order, which can be one of these options:

Normal
A purchase order for products and services that are purchased on invoice or paid in cash. This is the most common type of purchase orders.
Drop-ship
A purchase order for goods that are delivered directly from the supplier to the customer. The list of items and the shipping instructions are copied automatically from drop-ship sales orders to the drop-ship purchase order. This option is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Blanket
A purchase order for a large stock quantity that exceeds the quantity that is currently needed. This order reserves a certain quantity of supplier inventory for future purchasing. You can use blanket orders to purchase products that are rarely available from suppliers or that have special discounts for high volumes. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default
A purchase order that includes the products purchased regularly in the same quantities from a specific supplier and that can be processed repeatedly. Orders of this type are used when the demand for ordered products is predictable and does not change over time. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Order no. The unique number of the purchase order, which the system assigns based on the number series assigned to purchase orders of this type, as specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the purchase order gets the On hold status when it is created. You can clear the check box to change the status of the order to Open.

You are able change the supplier on a purchase order with order lines if the status of the order is On hold.
Status

The system-generated status of the purchase order, which can be one of the following options:

On hold
The purchase order is a draft and can be edited manually.
Open
The order was processed in accordance with the settings in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window but has not been completed yet.
Pending printing
Printing is required for the document but has not been done yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Print order option is selected for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Pending email
Emailing is required for this document, but it has not been performed yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Email order option in the Suppliers (AP303000) window is selected for the supplier.
Closed
All the ordered goods have been received.
Cancelled
The order was cancelled through the Cancel order action on the Actions menu of the toolbar. You cannot edit an order with this status, and purchase receipts cannot be based on it.
Date The date when the purchase order was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Delivery date The date when the supplier promised that the items listed in the order will arrive to their destination location.
Description A brief description of the purchase order.
Supplier The supplier from which the items will be purchased. For transfer requests, it is a branch of your organisation.
Location

The supplier location from which the items will be received.

This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Owner The user name of the employee who is responsible for the purchase order.
Currency The currency the purchase order will be paid in.
View base/View currency When you click View base in the Currency column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency, if the currency of the document is other than your base currency. Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the supplier document related to this purchase order. This information is required if the Require supplier reference check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Line total The total sum of the amount entries for all lines in the current purchase order. This value is calculated by the system and you cannot manually change it.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected on the VAT details tab.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will only be displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000)window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty. If the document contains multiple transactions with different VATs applied and each of them has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

This field is available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total The total VAT amount for all lines added to the current purchase order. This value, also calculated by the system, is the sum of the VAT amounts for each line.
Order total The total sum for the purchase order, including VAT. This read-only value is the sum of the Line total and VAT total values.
Control total The order’s total amount (including VAT), which you must enter manually when you attempt to save the order with the Balanced status.
## The Document details tab The **Document details** tab includes a table with detailed information about the items to be purchased according to the purchase order. When you select a line in the table, more information about the availability for the line item is displayed in the table footer. See the table footer description below for more information.
Button Description
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box where you can find a stock item in the list of existing stock items at a selected warehouse and include this item in the current document.
View sales order demand Opens the Demand dialog box, which displays the items in demand on open sales orders.
Add standard order

Opens the Add purchase order dialog box where you can select an existing purchase order and include it in the current document.

This button is displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Add standard order line

Opens the Add purchase order line dialog box where you can select lines from existing purchase orders and include them in the current document.

This button is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The table columns
Column Description
Item ID

The ID of the item.

You can select non-stock items as well as stock items.
Line type

The type of the purchase order line, which can be one of the following:

  • Goods for warehouse This line is a stock item not linked to any sales order.
  • Goods for sales order This line is linked to a sales order line marked for purchasing.
  • Goods for RP This line is intended for replenishment.
  • Goods for drop-ship This line is linked to a sales order line marked for drop-shipment.
  • Non-stock for drop-ship This line is linked to a sales order line marked for drop-shipment.

This option is available for a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

  • Non-stock for sales order This line is linked to a sales order line marked for purchasing.

This option is available for a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

  • Non-stock This line is a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
  • Service This line type is a non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is cleared in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
  • Freight This line is a freight expense to be posted directly to an expense account without allocation. The default freight expense account is specified in the Freight expense account field in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window. If you need to allocate the freight expenses, add them as landed costs.
  • Description This is an informational text line.
Line description A description of the purchase order line, which is copied from the item’s description.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
Warehouse

The warehouse to receive the item listed on the order.

This column is available only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) in which the quantity of the item is specified. If the value in the Qty. on receipts column is greater than zero, you cannot change the UoM for this line.
Order qty. The quantity of the item that has been ordered.
Base order qty. The quantity of the line in the base UoM of the item.
Qty. on receipts The quantity of the item that has been received according to all receipts, including the unreleased ones, based on the current purchase order.
Unit cost

The cost per UoM of the item.

If you had entered the unit cost (supplier price) manually and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date.

If you want to replace this value by the supplier price currently available for the item, use the Recalculate prices action.
Cost The total cost of the items on the line.
Discount percent

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is not enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the percent of the discount that has been entered manually or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item.

If the Supplier customer and discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.
Discount amount

If the Supplier customer discounts functionality is not enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the amount of the discount that has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually.

If the Supplier customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, this is the amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.
Manual discount When this check box is selected, the discount has been applied manually. You can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, or you can select the discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application.
Discount code

The code of the line discount that will be applied on this line.

This column is displayed if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount series

The ID of the discount series connected with the discount code that has been applied to this line.

The column is hidden by default and is only displayed if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Disc. unit cost The discounted unit cost of the item, if a discount is applied.
Amount The calculated amount of the item (after the discount has been taken).
Received amount The amount of the item received on this purchase order. The system automatically calculates this value by using the data available on purchase receipts associated with this purchase order, including unreleased purchase receipts.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID used for this item by the supplier. The system inserts the Alt. item ID value (if any) defined for the specified supplier in a line of the Supplier part number type on the Cross-reference tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Alternate description

The description of the alternative ID used for this item by the supplier.

The system inserts the description defined for the specified supplier in a line of the Supplier part number type on the Cross-reference tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Min. receipt (%) The minimum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse if the receipt action is Rejected. You can accept a larger quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is less than the percentage specified as max. receipt (%).
Max. receipt (%)

The maximum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse if the receipt action is Rejected. If a larger quantity arrives, the item will not be accepted.

You can accept a smaller quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is greater than the percentage specified as Min. receipt (%). The default value is specified for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Complete on (%) The minimum percentage of the ordered quantity for the item that must be received to complete the purchase order line (gets the default value from the Threshold receipt (%) setting of the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window).
Receipt action

The action that should be performed when the ordered item is received if its quantity is greater than the maximum receipt value or less than the minimum receipt value calculated based on the line’s ordered quantity. The following options are available:

Reject
The item on this line of the purchase order will be rejected.
Accept but warn
The item on this line of the purchase order will be accepted, but the system will display a warning.
Accept
The item will be accepted.
VAT category The VAT category assigned to the ordered item.
Account

The expense account used to record the purchased non-stock item that does not require receipt (by default, the account specified for the item in the Combine COGS/expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

You can select an account manually.
Description The description of the account used.
Sub. ID The subaccount used to record the purchased non-stock item that does not require receipt (by default, the subaccount generated in accordance with the rule defined in the Combine COGS/expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Project The project with which this purchase order line is associated.
Project task The project task with which this purchase order is associated. For a line with a stock item, you can select this project task only if the specified warehouse has a warehouse location assigned to this project task.
Completed When this check box is selected, the purchasing of the item on the line has been completed.
Complete purchase order line The way the purchase line is completed, by its quantity or by its amount.
Cancelled When this check box is selected, this line has been cancelled.
Order type The order type of the order.
Order no. The order number of a blanket or standard order.
Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
Retainage (%) The percent of the retainage amount to be retained from the line amount. The default percent value is copied to each newly added purchase order line from the Retainage (%) field on the Other information tab. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
Retainage amount The amount to be retained from the line amount. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
### The table footer When you select a line, more information about the line item is displayed in the table footer.
Element Description
On hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the warehouse.
available The quantity available of the item at the specified warehouse, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected warehouse.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.
on purchase orders The quantity of the item specified on existing purchase orders with the Open status.
on purchase receipts The quantity of the item specified on unreleased purchase receipts.
### The Add item dialog box This dialog box provides information on the availability of the supplier's item or items at your company's warehouses; you can add the appropriate quantity of the item to the document if needed. To find an item, type a string from its item ID or barcode in the **Item** field.
Element Description
Item A field you can use to search for a particular item or items by a string that is a part of the item IDs of the items.
Barcode A string that represents the barcode of the items you want to find.
Only supplier’s items When this check box is selected, search includes only items that are associated with the supplier on this document.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item you want to find is stored. You can leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.

This field is displayed if the Multiple warehouse functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item class ID The item class of the item for which you want to view the availability.
Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of the item you want to add to the current document.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the item is stored.
Item ID The unique ID of the item.
Description A description of the item.
Purchase unit The purchase unit of the item.
Qty. available The quantity of the stock item currently available at the warehouse.
Qty. on hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the warehouse.
Qty. on purchase orders The quantity of the stock item specified on existing purchase orders with the Open status.
Qty. on purchase receipts The quantity of the stock item specified on unreleased purchase receipts.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID used for the this item.
Alt. item ID type The type of the alternative item ID; Supplier part number, Customer part number, Barcode, or Global.
Alternate description The alternative item ID description of the item.
Default supplier The number of the default supplier for the item.
Default supplier name The name of the default supplier for the item.
Item class ID The ID of the item class in which the item is included.
Item class description The description of the item class in which the item is included.
Price class ID The ID of the price class in which the item is included.
Price class description The description of the price class in which the item is included.
Add (button) Adds the selected items (those with the Included check boxes selected) to the current purchase order.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected items (those with the Included check boxes selected) to the current purchase order and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box without adding any items to the current purchase order.
### The Add standard order dialog box This dialog box displays a table showing the existing purchase orders for the supplier specified for this purchase order. For purchase orders of types other than **Normal**, adding a purchase order is not supported. This dialog box is only displayed if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Column Description
Type The type of purchase order to be added to the current order.
Order no. The order number of the purchase order to be added to the current one.
Date The date when the added purchase order was created.
Expired on The expiration date of the added purchase order, if it is the Blanket type.
Status The status of the purchase order.
Currency The currency of the purchase order.
Order total The total value of the purchase order.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference number specified for the purchase order.
Terms The payment terms of the purchase order.
Description The description specified for the purchase order.
Open qty. The quantity of the ordered items yet to be received for the purchase order.
Open amt. The corresponding amount calculated for the ordered but not yet received item quantity.
Save (button) Adds the selected purchase orders and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels your changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Add standard order line dialog box You use this dialog box to add a line or multiple lines from an existing purchase order to the current purchase order, as long as both orders have the same supplier. This dialog box is displayed if the **Blanket and standard purchase orders** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, and only from purchase orders of the **Normal** type. You can add lines from **Standard** or **Blanket** purchase orders only.
Column Description
Type The type of purchase order from which lines will be added: Blanket or Standard.
Order no. The order number of the purchase order from which lines will be added.
Line type The type of this purchase order line.
Item ID The item ID of the ordered item.
UoM The unit of measure of the item on the purchase order line.
Order qty. The quantity of the item that has been ordered.
Open qty. The quantity of the item yet to be received according to the purchase order line.
Line description The description of the purchase order line.
Min. receipt (%) The minimum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse. If a smaller quantity arrives, the item will not be accepted. You can accept a larger quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is less than the percentage specified as the max. receipt (%) value.
Max. receipt (%) The maximum quantity of the item, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the item to be accepted at the warehouse. If a larger quantity arrives, the item will not be accepted. You can accept a smaller quantity as long as its percentage of the ordered quantity is greater than the percentage specified as the min. receipt (%) value.
Receipt action The action that will be performed on receipt of the ordered item if the received quantity is greater than the max. receipt value or less than the min. receipt value: Reject, Accept but Warn, or Accept
Save (button) Adds the selected purchase order lines and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels any changes and closes the dialog box.
## The VAT details tab This tab has a table that holds information related to the VAT to be paid on the purchase of the ordered items.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the current purchase order.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for this document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for this document.
Include in VAT exempt total When this check box is selected, the amount of the line is included in the VAT exempt total amount of the document.
Pending VAT When this check box is selected, there is pending VAT on the line.
Retained taxable The retained taxable amount for this document. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
Retained VAT The retained VAT amount for this document. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
Statistical VAT When this check box is selected, there is statistical VAT on the line.
Reverse VAT When this check box is selected, there is reverse VAT on the line.
VAT type The description of the VAT type on the line.
## The Shipping instructions tab This tab contains detailed information related to the shipping of the ordered items. ### The Shipping details section In this section, you provide shipping instructions for this purchase order.
Element Description
Shipping destination type

The type of the shipping destination:

  • Branch (meaning a branch of your company)
  • Customer
  • Supplier
  • Warehouse

The default shipping destination is specified in the Purchase orders preferences (PO101000) window.
Ship to

The particular destination of the selected type. For the Branch type, the field displays the list of branches. For the Customer or Supplier type, the field displays the list of customers or suppliers, respectively.

The field does not appear for the Warehouse type of destination. You will see the Warehouse field instead.
Shipping location The location from which the order is to be shipped. The field does not appear for the Warehouse type of destination.
### The Delivery address contact section Here you can specify additional shipping details.
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default contact settings for this shipping destination.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Business name The supplier’s shipping department name, if it is different from the supplier’s business name.
Business name The supplier’s shipping department name, if it is different from the supplier’s business name.
Phone 1 The main phone number of the person to contact on matters related to shipping of this purchase order.
### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default address settings for this shipping destination.
Address 1 The first line of the address for the selected destination.
Address 2 The second line of the address for the destination.
Postcode The postcode for the destination.
City The city where the destination is located.
Country The country of the destination.
County The county where the destination is located.
### The Ship via section Here you can specify additional shipping details.
Element Description
FOB point The location where title for the shipment passes from the supplier to your company.
Ship via The carrier selected to ship the goods for the purchase order.
Shipping terms The shipping terms to be used for this shipping.
## The Supplier info tab This tab contains detailed information about the supplier to supply the ordered goods. ### The Supplier contact section In this section, you provide the supplier's address and contact information.
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default contact settings for the supplier.
Business name The business name of the supplier contact for matters related to this purchase order.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The main phone number of the supplier contact for matters related to this purchase order.
Email The email address of the supplier contact for matters related to this purchase order.
### The Supplier address section
Element Description
Override When this check box is selected, you can override the default shipping address for the supplier.
Address 1 The first line of the supplier’s contact address.
Address 2 The second line of the supplier’s contact address.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier’s contact address.
City The city of the supplier’s contact address.
Country The country of the supplier’s contact address.
County The county of the supplier’s contact address.
### The Info section Here you can specify shipment terms for the purchase order.
Element Description
Terms The specific payment terms to be used for the purchase order.
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier’s location.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table that shows the details of the supplier discounts that were applied to the document. It is available if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount When this check box is selected, you can cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the document. Selecting the check box updates the document’s total and line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Discount code The discount code of the supplier discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series connected with the discount code applied to the document.
Type The type of discount applied to the document ( Group or Document ).
Manual discount When this check box is selected, the supplier discount shown on this line has been applied manually from the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as manual in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window.
Discountable amount The amount used as the basis for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as the basis for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the item quantity.
Discount amount The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item.
Retained discount The part of the discount deducted from the retained amount. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the Apply retainage check box is selected for the current purchase order.
## The Change orders tab You use this tab to view change orders related to the project and create new ones. To use the change orders functionality, enable it in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Column Description
Ref. no The number of the change order.
Class The class of the change order, which is defined in the Change order classes (PM203000) window.
Revenue change no. The number of the change order that affects the project revenue within the project, which the system uses for printing. The revenue change number is an integer that the system assigns sequentially, starting from 1 and then 2, 3, and so on.
Description The description provided for the change order.
Status

The status of the change order, which can be one of the following:

On hold
The change order is a draft that you can edit but not release.
Pending approval
The change order is pending the approval of the employee who has been assigned to approve the change order.
Rejected
The employee who was assigned to approve the change order has rejected it.
Open
The change order is ready to be released.
Closed
The change order has been released.
Change date The date on which the changes made on the change order should be recorded in the project balances.
Approval date The date that is communicated to the customer as the approval date of the agreed-upon changes.
Contract change time, days A positive or negative number of days that represents the delay of the contract, used in reports.
External reference no. The external reference number of the change order.
Reverse status

The reverse status of the change order, which can be one of the following:

None
The change order is a normal change order.
Reversing
The change order is a reversing change order that reverses the impact of the original change order, whose reference number is shown in the Original CO ref. no. column.
Reversed
The change order has been reversed.
Orig. CO ref. no The reference number of the original change order that the current change order reverses.
Project The project to which the change order is connected.
Project task The project task to which the change order is connected.
Item ID The ID of the item on the change order.
Description The description ID of the item on the change order.
Quantity The quantity of the item on the change order.
UoM The unit of measure of the item on the change order.
Unit cost The unit cost of the item on the change order.
Amount The amount of the item on the change order.
## The Other information tab This tab contains other information related to the purchase order, such as the branch ordering the goods or services, the work group, and the reference numbers of the related documents (requisition document, sales order, and prepayment).
Element Description
Branch The branch associated with the purchase order.
Sales order type The type of the sales order associated with the purchase order.
Sales order no. The number of the sales order associated with the purchase order.
Prepayment ref. no. The reference number of the prepayment request linked to this purchase order, if any.
Work group ID The work group to which the purchase order was assigned for processing.
Do not print

A check box that indicates (if selected) that printing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.

This check box is selected by default if the Print orders check box is not selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, the Purchase settings tab.
Printed When this check box is selected, the current purchase order has been printed. To print the purchase order, select Print purchase order on the Reports menu.
Do not email

A check box that indicates (if selected) that emailing of this document is not mandatory for further processing.

This check box is selected by default if the Send orders by email check box is not selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, the Purchase settings tab.
Emailed When this check box is selected, the current purchase order has been emailed. To email a purchase order, select Email purchase order on the Actions menu.
Open quantity The difference between the quantities of ordered and received items. The system calculates this value based on released receipts only.
Open amount The amount of the items that are ordered but not received. The system calculates the open amount based on released receipts only.
### The Report settings section The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Print order description Select this check box to print the order description.
Print notes Select this check box to print notes.
Apply retainage

When this is selected, retainage will be applied on the invoices.

This functionality is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retainage (%) The percent that is applied to calculate the amount to be retained for the line. This field appears if the Apply retainage check box is selected.
## The Purchase receipts tab This tab has a table that shows the details of the receipts that include the items from this purchase order.
Column Description
Type The type of the receipt document.
Receipt no. The reference number of the receipt document.
Status

The status of the document:

  • On hold:
  • Balanced
  • Released:
Supplier name The supplier on the order.
Currency The currency used on the document.
Total qty. The total quantity on the receipt document.
Total amount The total amount of the receipt document.
Ref. no. The reference number specified for the purchase order.
Date The receipt date of the purchase order.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Create purchase orders (PO505000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000 page You use this window to create purchase orders for transfer and sales orders for which the Mark for purchase order check box was selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create purchase orders (PO505000) You use this window to create purchase orders for transfer and sales orders for which the Mark for purchase order check box was selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Also, you can create purchase orders for the remaining quantities (those not yet shipped) of items that were partially shipped for sales orders and for replenishment requests generated by using the prepare the [Prepare replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window. Generally, the generated purchase orders will include the requests for each replenishment warehouse for each supplier, no matter which demand warehouses were specified for the items to be ordered. You can view the generated purchase orders in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Creates purchase orders for the sales orders you have selected in the table.
Process all Creates purchase orders for all sales orders listed in the table.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window in a pop-up window to display the availability data of the stock item you selected in the table (by clicking the row).
## The top part In the top part, you can select the orders to be listed (and processed, if needed) by stock item, item class, item product manager, work group, or specific customer. Also, you can select the creation date for the purchase orders to be generated.
Element Description
Creation date The date when the purchase orders will be created. The purchase order will get its date from this field.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you use as follows to select the sales orders for the stock items that are assigned to a particular product manager:

  • Select the Me check box to view the orders for stock items assigned to you. The field will display your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another user to view the sales order for stock items assigned to another product manager.
  • Clear the check box and the field to view the sales orders for stock items assigned to all users of the selected work group (if one is specified) or all work groups (if no work group is specified).
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use in the following ways to view the sales orders for stock items assigned to a specific work group or a product manager in a group:

  • Select the My check box to view the orders for stock items assigned to your work group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another work group to display the orders for stock items assigned to all members of the group or to a particular user of the group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the orders for stock items assigned to all work groups.
Item class ID The item class of the stock items listed on the sales orders.
Item ID The particular stock item for which you want to generate purchase orders (based on the sales orders requesting the item).
Warehouse ID

The destination warehouse for the items to be purchased (as specified on replenishment orders or back orders).

This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier The supplier from which the items are to be purchased. Select a particular supplier to create orders for this supplier by grouping supplier items for the selected warehouse.
Requested on The delivery date of the order.
Customer The customer (by its customer number) that will receive the items, if applicable.
Order type

The type of purchase order to be created from the sales order. The following options are available:

Normal
A purchase order of the normal type
Drop-ship
A purchase order of the drop-ship type
Order no. The number of the sales, transfer, or replenishment order.
Show details When this check box is selected, you will see the Supplier price, Currency ID, Weight, and Volume columns in the table part.
Exclude lines without supplier When this check box is selected, item lines without supplier information will not be displayed in the table part. This is selected by default when you open the window.
Weight A read-only field that displays the total weight of items on the purchase orders to be created.
Volume A read-only field that displays the total volume of items on the purchase orders to be created.
## The table In this table, you can view the sales orders that meet the specified selection criteria and select the sales orders for which you want to create purchase orders. Please note that some of these columns are not visible, if you have not selected the **Show details** option above.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Plan type The description of the type of order.
Item ID The ID of the stock item to be purchased. Stock items are maintained in the Inventory workspace. To view or edit an stock item, use the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Item description The description of the stock item to be purchased.
Warehouse

The warehouse for which the item will be purchased.

By default, this is the warehouse specified as the replenishment warehouse for the item when it is stocked at the demand warehouse (in the Item warehouse detail window).

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Warehouse description The description of the warehouse.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the stock item to be purchased.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item to be purchased.
Requested on The delivery date of the order.
Demand warehouse

The warehouse where the item was requested for the transfer order or for replenishment.

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Demand warehouse description

The description of the warehouse where the item was requested.

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier The ID of the supplier from which the item will be purchased.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item will be purchased.
Location

The supplier location from which the item will be purchased.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Lead time (days)

The number of days required for any item to reach the company when they are shipped from this supplier.

This value is specified in the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window.
Shipment lead time (days) The shipment lead time, if it has been specified for the supplier or the carrier.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the supplier.
Ship via The carrier used to ship the ordered item.
Supplier price

The supplier’s price for the stock item to be ordered.

The supplier price for the stock items is specified in the Supplier inventory (PO201000) window.
Extended amount The extended amount for the line, which the system calculates as the price multiplied by the quantity of the item.
Currency ID The applicable currency.
Customer The ID of the customer for which the item are to be purchased.
Customer name The name of the customer for which the item are to be purchased.
Customer price The price specified in the original sales order.
Customer unit The unit of measure used as the sale unit on the sales order.
Order no. The reference number of the original order.
Weight The weight of the specified quantity of the item.
Volume The volume of the specified quantity of the item.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/) Purchase receipts (PO302000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000 page In this window, you can view the existing purchase and transfer receipts and returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipts (PO302000) In this window, you can view the existing purchase and transfer receipts and returns. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view the existing purchase and transfer receipts and returns. You can also create a new purchase receipt or return based on a purchase order (or lines of purchase orders) and release the document. For more information, see: [About purchase receipt processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-purchase-receipts-and-returns/about-purchase-receipt-processing-options/) ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Here, you specify summary information for a new purchase receipt or return, or select an existing receipt or return by its reference number. ### The buttons
Button Description
Allocations

Opens the Allocations dialog box, which you can use to allocate stock items by location, lot/serial number, and expiration date.

This button is available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Sales order to purchase order link, Multiple warehouse locations, or Lot and serial tracking.
Release Releases the purchase or transfer receipt or return, and changes its status to Released.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

  • Create purchase invoice To create a purchase invoice.
  • Email purchase receipt To email, according to the settings of the PURCHASE ORDER mailing, the receipt to the supplier specified in this receipt.
  • Recalculate prices and discounts To open the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you can use to specify the extent to which you want to refresh the prices and discounts for the document.

This action is not available for transfer receipts.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands:

View inventory document
To view the details of the inventory receipt generated for this receipt in the Receipts (IN301000) window.
View supplier ledger document
To view the supplier ledger document (invoice, credit adjustment, purchase credit note, or prepayment) in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window, which is automatically created on release of the purchase receipt due to the selection of the Create invoice check box.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands:

Print purchase receipt
To print the current purchase receipt by using the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window.
View purchase receipt invoicing history
To view the invoicing details for the current purchase receipt by using the Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000) report.
Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered
To print the purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered by using the Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000) report.
Add transfer To add a transfer to a transfer receipt. This is available when the selected document type is Transfer receipt.
### The Recalculate prices and discounts dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used for updating prices (referred to in purchase orders as unit costs) and discounts for the purchase receipt.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. You can select one of the following options:

All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines
Current line
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line
Set current unit prices When this check box is selected, the system must replace the item prices with the current prices in the selected line or all lines.
Override manual prices

When this check box is selected, the system will replace the item prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit cost or Ext. cost column) with the current prices.

The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.
Recalculate discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will recalculate the discounts for the selected line or the all lines.

This check box is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Override manual line discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will cancel the manual discounts for the selected line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
### The elements
Element Description
Type

The type of the document, which can be one of the following:

Receipt
For a purchase receipt
Return
For a purchase return
Transfer receipt
For a transfer receipt
Receipt no. The unique reference number of the purchase receipt, transfer receipt, or return, which the system automatically assigns according to the number series specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window.
Status

The current status of the document, which the system assigns automatically. The following options are available:

On hold
The receipt document is a draft and you can edit it manually.
Balanced
The document is balanced and you can release it. You can modify or delete a document with Balanced, but you can save the changes only if the control total is equal to the new total amount.
Released
The document has been released and you cannot edit or delete it.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the document has the On hold status.

The check box is selected by default for a new receipt if the Hold receipts on entry option in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window is selected.
Date The date when the receipt document was created. All transactions included in this document will have this transaction date.
Post period The financial period to which transactions from the document should be posted.
Warehouse

The warehouse from which the items have been received for transfer orders.

This field is available for transfer receipts.
Supplier

The supplier from which the items have been received or to which they will be returned.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.
Location

The supplier location from which the items should be received or to which they should be returned.

This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.
Currency

The currency the supplier uses for invoicing./p>

This field is not available for transfer receipts.
View base/View currency When you click View base in the Currency column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency, if the currency of the document is other than your base currency. Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Create invoice

When this check box is selected, the system will create an appropriate invoice (or adjustment) automatically when the purchase receipt is released.

This check box gets its default value from the Create invoice check box in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window.
Supplier ref.

The reference number of the supplier document this receipt or return is based on.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.
Total qty. The total quantity of items received from or returned to the supplier. The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of all quantities of all stock items listed in the Document details tab of this window.
Control qty.

The total quantity of goods on the receipt or return

You must enter this value if the Validate totals on entry check box in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window is selected for receipts. If the check box is not selected, the field is not available.
VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the tax with the Include in VAT exempt totalcheck box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.

This field is not displayed for transfer receipts and is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will only be displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable tax in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable totalfield of the document.

This field is not available for transfer receipts and is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is only displayed if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Total amount

The total amount calculated for items received from or returned to the supplier. The system automatically calculates this value as the sum of all amounts of all stock items listed on the Document details tab of this window.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.
Control amount

The total amount of the receipt or return, which you manually enter. The system validates that the entered amount equals the total amount, which it calculates automatically. If the values are not equal, the system generates a warning message, and you can save the document only with the On hold status.

This field is only displayed if the Validate totals on entry option in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window is selected.

This field is not available for transfer receipts.
## The Document details tab This tab provides detailed information about the items that have been received or are being returned. You can provide these details by adding existing purchase orders or lines from them, thus avoiding typing the same information twice. When you select a line in the table, more information about the availability for the line item is displayed in the table footer. See the table footer description below for more information. ### The buttons
Button Description
Add line Opens the Add receipt line dialog box, where you can enter a new line for the receipt. You can use this dialog box to efficiently enter information about received items by using a barcode scanner.
Add purchase order

Opens the Add purchase order dialog box, where you can select a purchase order and include it in the current receipt or return.

This button is not available for transfer receipts.
Add purchase order line

Opens the Add purchase order line dialog box, which you can use to select lines from an existing purchase order and add the lines to this receipt or return.

This button is not available for transfer receipts.
View purchase order

Navigates to the Purchase orders (PO301000) window where you can view the details of the purchase order. This option is available only for lines based on purchase orders or purchase order lines.

This button is not available for transfer receipts.
Add transfer

Opens the Add transfer order dialog box, where you can select a transfer order and include it in the current receipt.

This button is only available for transfer receipts.
### The Allocations dialog box By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item is distributed between locations, lot or serial numbers, or you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant, or you can assign warehouse locations for the specified quantities of the item. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. This dialog box is only available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window: **Sales order to purchase orders link**, **Multiple warehouse locations**, or **Lot serial tracking**.
Element Description
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no location specified or lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers will be generated.
Lot/serial number from

The lot or serial number to be used as a start number.

This field is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Generate

A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers.

This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Column Description
Location

The location in the warehouse.

This column appears only if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Lot/serial no.

The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number assigned to specific quantity of stock item.

This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The ID of the stock item on the line.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item.

This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
OK (button) Saves the records generated.
### The table columns
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the received item.
Line type

The type of the purchase receipt line. You cannot change the value in this column if it comes from a purchase order or a purchase order line added to the purchase receipt. The available options are the following:

Goods for warehouse
An item ordered for warehouse. This line type is shown for all stock items for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Non-stock
A non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Service
A stock or non-stock item for which the Require receipt check box is cleared in the Stock items (IN202500) or the Non-stock items (IN202000) window, respectively.
Freight
An applicable freight amount.
Warehouse

The warehouse where the item has been received.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Location

The location where the item has been received. If a project or project task is specified for this document line, only locations assigned to this project or project task are available for selection. SPLIT is displayed if multiple locations are assigned to the received quantity of the item.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Transaction descr. The description of the receipt or return transaction.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the purchased or transferred item. By default, it is the purchase unit.
Ordered qty. The quantity of the purchased item (in the specified UoM).
Open qty. The quantity of the purchased item (in the specified UoM) that has not been received yet.
Receipt qty. The quantity of the item in the specified UoM that has been received (listed on released receipts).
Base receipt qty. The quantity of the item received, expressed in the base unit of measure.
Unit cost

The cost of a unit of the purchased item.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Cost

The extended cost of the item, which is the unit price multiplied by the quantity. You can manually enter the amount that is not based on the unit cost and the available discounts.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Discount percent

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the percent of the discount that has been entered manually or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item.

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.
Discount amount

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the amount of the discount that has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually.

If the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.
Manual discount

When this check box is selected, discount has been applied manually.

You can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount or you can select a discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application. This check box will be automatically selected if you enter the cost not based on the specified unit cost.
Discount code

The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line automatically.

This column appears only if the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount series

The ID of a discount series that has been applied to this line.

This column appears only if the Supplier and customer discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Disc. unit cost The cost of the item per unit, once the discount has been applied.
Amount

The amount calculated (after discount has been taken) for the item.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
VAT category

The VAT category assigned to the stock item.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Account

The account used to record the item amount on the purchase receipt; used for non-stock items for which receipt is not required (by default, it is the account specified for the item in the Use COGS/expense account from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

If this purchase receipt is created for return of such non-stock item, this account is associated with the default reason code for returns (specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window) but you can override it.
Description The description of this account.
Accrual account

The accrual account to record the item amount on the purchase receipt; used for stock items and non-stock items for which a receipt is required.

If this purchase receipt is created for a return, this account is empty.
Accrual sub.

The subaccount used to record the item amount on the purchase receipt, used for stock items and non-stock items for which a receipt is required.

If this purchase receipt is created for a return, this subaccount is empty.
Sub. ID

The subaccount to be used to record the non-stock item amount on the purchase receipt (for non-stock items for which receipts are not required).

By default, it is the subaccount generated in accordance with the rule defined in the Use COGS/expense account from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

If this purchase receipt is created for a return of such non-stock item, this subaccount is associated with the default reason code for returns (specified in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window) but you can override it.
Project

The project with which the document is associated. If the document is based on a purchase order, the project is automatically copied from the respective purchase order line.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Project task

The project task with which the document is associated.

If the document is based on a purchase order, the project task is automatically copied from the respective purchase order line. For the receipt line with a stock item, you can select this project task only if the specified warehouse has a warehouse location assigned to this project task.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Expiration date

The expiration date of the received item.

This column appears only if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Lot/serial no.

The lot or serial number assigned to the received quantity of the purchased item; SPLIT is displayed if multiple lot or serial numbers are assigned to the received quantity.

If the receipt is created for a drop-ship order, you have to enter a lot or serial number only if the Required for drop shipments check box is selected for the item’s lot or serial class in the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window.

This column is only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Purchase order type

The type of the purchase order related to this purchase receipt.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Purchase order no.

The reference number of the purchase order related to this purchase receipt.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Purchase order line no.

The line number of the purchase order related to this line of the purchase receipt.

This column does not appear for transfer receipts.
Transfer order type

The type of the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Transfer order no.

The reference number of the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Transfer line no.

The line number in the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Transfer shipment no.

The shipment number in the transfer order to which this receipt is linked.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Complete purchase order line

When this check box is selected, the purchase order line added to this receipt line will be considered completed upon release of this purchase receipt.

You use this check box to override the purchase order line completion requirements (the Min. receipt, Max. receipt, and Complete on values) set for the order in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.

This column is not available for transfer receipts.
Open purchase order line

When this check box is selected, the appropriate line of the purchase order linked to this return line will be opened:

The quantity in the Qty. on receipts column for the purchase order line will be decreased by the quantity on this return line.

This column appears for purchase receipts of the Return type only.
Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
CN code The CN code stands for Combined Nomenclature, and is a tool for classifying goods in the EU. It is a number to designate the transaction.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID used for this stock item by the supplier. The system inserts the Alt. item ID value (if any) defined for the specified supplier in a line of the Supplier part number type on the Cross-reference tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Supplementary measure unit A supplementary measure unit quantity (taken from the sales/purchase unit, or from the Net weight field).
Country of origin The Intrastat code (CH, DK, SE, etc.) for the country where the product was produced.
Net weight An Intrastat measure of unit. Usually the unit is the weight in kilograms. This unit is a code that you set in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
### The table footer When you select a line, more information about the line item is displayed in the table footer.
Element Description
On hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the specified location.
Available The quantity available of the item at the specified location, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
Available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected location.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.
### The Add receipt line dialog box Here you can add a line specifying that a stock item has been received at the warehouse, and you can effectively add items to the receipt by scanning their barcodes. To accomplish this, make sure the **Add line automatically** option is selected. Once the item barcode is scanned, the system finds the item record and fills in the dialog box elements by using the item default values with the quantity as specified on a matching purchase order or by one unit per barcode. You can select the **Add one unit per barcode** option to increase the item quantity by one unit each time you scan the barcode.
Element Description
Barcode An optional field that contains the barcode of the item.
Item ID The ID of the item.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the item.
Warehouse

The warehouse to receive the item.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Location

The location to receive the item.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expiration date The expiration date for the specified quantity of the item.
Receipt qty. The quantity of the item received, in the specified unit of measure.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item. For items requiring serial or lot numbers, this is the base unit; for other items it is the purchase unit.
Supplier The supplier from which the item was received.
Supplier location

The supplier location from which the item was received.

This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Order type The type of the purchase order with the selected item listed.
Order no. The number of the purchase order that has the selected item listed.
Line no. The order number of the document line.
Unit cost The unit cost of the stock item.
Amount The amount for the line, calculated as the unit cost multiplied by the receipt quantity.
Add one unit per barcode When this check box is selected, the item’s quantity is increased by one unit each time the item’s barcode is scanned or entered manually.
Add line automatically

When this check box is selected, a new receipt line will be added automatically for each barcode scanned for the first time.

If the barcode has been scanned before (for this receipt), the item quantity will be increased accordingly.
Add line (button) Adds the entered data as a line to the receipt if the Add line automatically option was not selected.
Add and close (button) Adds the entered data as a line to the receipt and closes the dialog box.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the receipt.
### The Add purchase order dialog box You use this dialog box to add an existing purchase order of the selected supplier to the current purchase receipt or return. Only purchase orders of **Normal** or **Drop-ship** types can be added.
Element Description
Type The type of purchase orders to be shown in the table.
Show purchase orders in all currencies When this check box is selected, orders in all currencies are displayed.
Type The type of the purchase order.
Order no. The number of the purchase order.
Date The date when the purchase order was created.
Status The status of the purchase order.
Currency The currency used on the purchase order.
Order total The total amount of the purchase order.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference number entered for the purchase order.
Terms The payment terms of the purchase order.
Description The description entered for the purchase order.
Open qty. The quantity of the stock item yet to be received on the purchase order.
Open amt. The corresponding amount for the item quantity yet to be received.
Qty. on receipt The quantity that has been received.
Received amount The amount that has been received.
Add purchase order (button) Adds the lines from the included purchase orders to the purchase receipt or return.
Add and close (button) Adds the lines from the included purchase orders to the receipt or return and closes the dialog box.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box without making additions to the receipt or return.
### The Add purchase order line dialog box You use this dialog box to add a line or multiple lines from an existing purchase order of the selected supplier to the current purchase receipt or return, to account for items received. You can add lines from only purchase orders with **Normal** or **Drop-ship** types.
Element Description
Type The type of purchase orders whose lines you want to view: Normal or Drop-ship.
Order no. The number of the particular purchase order from which you want to add a line. Select an order number if you want to view lines from only a particular order.
Order no. The number of the particular purchase order this line is from.
Line type The type of the purchase order line.
Line no. The order number of the document line.
Item ID The item ID of the item from the purchase order line.
Supplier The supplier from which the item is received.
UoM The unit of measure used for the stock item from the purchase order line.
Qty. on receipt The quantity that has been received.
Order qty. The quantity of the stock item (measured in the specified UoMs) from the purchase order line.
Open qty. The open quantity (not yet shipped) of the item on the purchase order line.
Line description The description of the purchase order line.
Promised date The date when the supplier promised that the items listed in the order will be received at their destination location.
Min. receipt (%) The minimum percent of the quantity on the order that may be received.
Max. receipt (%) The maximum percent of the quantity on the order that may be received.
Receipt action The action to be performed on receipt of the stock item if the received quantity is greater than the max. receipt value or less than the min. receipt value.
Add purchase order line (button) Adds the selected line or lines to the receipt or return.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected line or lines to the receipt or return and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding any selected lines to the receipt or return.
### The Add transfer order dialog box You use this dialog box to add one or multiple transfer orders to the current transfer receipt. Although by using this dialog you add the selected transfer orders with all their lines, you can delete from the **Details** table the lines for which the items are not yet received. You cannot change the item quantities for any added line.
Element Description
From warehouse The warehouse where the transfer originated. Select a warehouse to filter existing transfer orders by the warehouse of origin or leave the field blank to view transfers from all warehouses.
Order type The type of the order.
Order no. The number of the transfer order.
Shipment no. The number of the shipment order.
From warehouse The warehouse where the transfer originated.
To warehouse The warehouse to which transfer has been made (the warehouse that you selected in the Warehouse field in the top part ).
Date The date when the transfer order was created.
Description The description entered for the transfer order.
Add and close (button) Adds the included transfer orders to the transfer receipt and closes the dialog box.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box without making additions to the transfer receipt.
## The VAT details tab This tab contains detailed information related to the VAT to be paid for the received items. When you save the purchase receipt, its total amount is updated and the applicable VAT with its details are displayed on this tab. If the VAT that applies to the receipt is of the **VAT** (value-added VAT) type paid to the supplier but claimable from the tax agency if the items are purchased for production or further resale, and the prices are gross prices (that is, they include the VAT), the system calculates the amounts of VAT and records them to appropriate VAT accounts. Details about VAT and their amounts are displayed on the **VAT details** tab. This tab is not available for transfer receipts.
Column Description
VAT ID The specific VAT that has been applied to any of the items listed in the purchase receipt.
VAT rate The VAT rate used.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for this VAT.
VAT amount The amount of VAT.
## The Invoicing details tab This tab provides information about invoicing settings, total amounts, and the work group to which this purchase receipt is assigned. ### The Invoicing settings section You use these settings to add, view, and change the information used to create an invoice from the supplier. If the **Create invoice** check box (in the top part) is selected for the purchase receipt, the system automatically generates a new invoice in the Supplier ledger workspace, which you can view in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. The default values for these elements are defined in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window.
Element Description
Branch The branch involved in invoicing the supplier.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the supplier.
Purchase invoice date The date of the invoice generated for the receipt.
Due date The due date of the invoice.
Cash disc. date The date until which the cash discount from the supplier is available for the invoice.
Cash discount The cash discount amount.
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier.
### The Totals section Here you can view totals for this purchase receipt. These values are calculated and updated automatically as you enter and release invoices that may include separate lines of this receipt. You can enter and view the invoices by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window.
Element Description
Balance not yet invoiced The purchase receipt amount not yet invoiced.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of items on this receipt that is not yet invoiced.
Line total not yet invoiced The line amount that is not yet invoiced.
VAT total not yet invoiced The VAT amount on the purchase receipt that is not yet invoiced.
### The Assign to section Here you can view the work group to which the purchase receipt is assigned and the employee who owns it.
Element Description
Work group The work group to which the purchase receipt is assigned.
Owner The owner of this purchase receipt.
## The Landed costs tab This tab has a table with detailed information about the landed costs incurred for the stock items listed on this purchase or transfer receipt. For transfer receipts, this tab is available only if the transfer is performed between different warehouses (not between different locations within the same warehouse). ### The buttons
Button Description
View supplier document Navigates to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can view the supplier document related to the landed cost.
View inventory document Navigates to the Adjustments (IN303000) window where you can view the adjustment generated for the landed cost.
### The columns
Column Description
Landed cost code The landed cost code associated with the landed costs incurred for this purchase or transfer receipt. The codes are defined in the Landed cost codes ( PO202000) window.
Description The description of the landed cost code.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the original invoice from the landed cost supplier. This value will appear in the Supplier ref. field in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window for a landed cost invoice generated for this receipt. The value is mandatory if the Require supplier reference check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. If the supplier of the goods is also the landed cost supplier, make sure that the value specified in the Supplier ref. column on this tab differs from the value in the Supplier ref. field in the top part of this window, because an invoice for landed costs is always generated separately from an invoice for the received goods.
Supplier The landed cost supplier to whom the landed cost amount will be paid; select from the list of suppliers that have the Landed cost supplier check box selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Location

The location of the selected landed cost supplier.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier document type The type of the supplier document related to the landed cost.
Purchase receipt type The type of the purchase receipt related to the landed cost.
Purchase invoice date The date of the purchase invoice for the landed cost.
Currency The currency used for the landed cost.
Amount A non-zero amount of the landed cost.
VAT code The VAT code applicable to the landed cost of the type. By default, it’s the VAT category associated with supplier’s VAT zone.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the landed cost supplier.
Line no. The order number of the line.
Item ID The item ID of the stock item to which the specified amount of the landed costs associated with this code is allocated according to the allocation method defined for this landed cost code.
Supplier document type The type of the supplier document generated for the landed cost.
Ref. no. suppliers The reference number of the supplier document generated for the landed cost. Click the link to open the document in a pop-up window.
Inventory doc. type The type of the document generated in the Inventory workspace for this landed cost.
Inventory ref. no. The reference number of the document generated in the Inventory workspace for this landed cost. Click the link to open the document in a pop-up dialog box.
Landed cost trans. ID The ID of the landed cost transaction connected with this landed cost.
Postpone creation of purchase invoice

When this check box is selected, a related supplier ledger invoice will be created later for the incurred landed costs. On release of this receipt only an inventory adjustment (that will update the item costs) will be generated.

When the supplier’s invoice for the landed costs is actually received, you can create an invoice for the landed costs in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window and include this receipt by clicking the Add postponed landed costs action on the toolbar.
## The Discount details tab This tab shows the details of the supplier discounts that were applied to the document. This tab is only available if the **Supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount When this check box is selected, a Group and Document level discount will be cancelled for the document. Selecting the check box updates the document’s total and the line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the table.
Discount code The discount code of the supplier discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount applied to the document.
Manual discount When this check box is selected, the supplier discount shown in this row has been applied manually from the Group or Document level discounts marked as manual in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window.
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined as based on the item quantity.
Discount amount The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item.
## The Intrastat tab
Element Description
Transaction type The type of the Intrastat transaction, according to the Intrastat rules.
Mode of transportation

Here you can select the manner in which you like the order to be shipped.

  1. Unknown

  2. Transport by sea

  3. Transport by rail

  4. Transport by road

  5. Transport by aeroplane

  6. Consignments by posts

  7. Fixed transport installations

  8. Transport by inland waterway
Container When this check box is selected, the order will be shipped in a container.
Release purchase receipts (PO501000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-purchase-receipts-po501000 page You can use this window to view and release selected purchase receipt or return documents with the Balanced status. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release purchase receipts (PO501000) You can use this window to view and release selected purchase receipt or return documents with the Balanced status. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view and release selected purchase receipt or return documents with the **Balanced** status. The list of documents displayed in this window includes the purchase receipts or returns that were created in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Releases the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Releases all the documents listed in the table.
## The table In this table, you can view the list of the purchase receipts generated according to the purchase orders, as well as return documents. You can select the documents to be released or release all the listed documents.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Receipt no. The number of the purchase receipt or return document. Click the link to navigate to the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window to view the details of the selected document.
Type The type of the document, which can be Receipt or Return.
Supplier The supplier (by its ID) from which the goods are received or to which they are returned.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Location

The supplier location from which the goods are received or to which they are returned.

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Date The date when the document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Total amount The total amount of the document.
Work group The work group to which the document owner belongs.
Owner The owner of the document.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/) Print/email purchase orders (PO503000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/print-email-purchase-orders-po503000 page In this window, you can print the selected purchase orders with the Balanced status or send them by email. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/email purchase orders (PO503000) In this window, you can print the selected purchase orders with the Balanced status or send them by email. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can print the selected purchase orders with the **Balanced** status or send them by email. Also, you can apply the **Mark as do not email** action to selected orders to ensure that they are not sent by email. This causes the **Do not email**check box in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window to be selected for the particular orders. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes all documents listed in the table.
## The top part In the top part area, you can select (by owner or work group or both) the documents to be displayed in the table. You also select the action to be applied to the documents you process.
Element Description
Action

The action to be performed on the selected purchase orders if the Process or Process allaction is invoked:

Email purchase order
Generates emails for the purchase orders in accordance with the mailing settings
Mark as: do not email
Marks the purchase orders as not requiring emailing
Print purchase order
Prints purchase orders that are ready for printing
Assigned to

A field and the Me check box, which in the following ways to select the employee to whom the purchase orders to be displayed are assigned:

  • Select the Me check box to display the purchase orders assigned to you. The field will display your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another user to view the purchase orders assigned to the user.
  • Leave the elements blank to view the purchase orders of all users of the selected work group (if one is specified) or all work groups (if no work group is specified).
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use in the following ways to select the work group the purchase orders to be displayed are assigned to:

  • Select the My check box to view the purchase orders assigned to your work group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another work group to display the purchase orders assigned to everyone in the group or to a particular user of the group.
  • Leave the elements blank to view the purchase orders assigned to all work groups.
## The table In this table, you can view the list of purchase orders with the **Balanced** status that match any selection criteria you have specified. You can also select the documents to be processed or those to be printed, emailed, or marked as not intended for emailing, depending on the action you have selected.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Date The date when the purchase order was created.
Order no. The purchase order number. Navigates to the Purchase orders (PO301000) window where you can view the details of the selected purchase order.
Status The current status of the purchase order.
Owner The employee ID of the owner of the purchase order.
Employee name The name of the employee who is the owner of the purchase order.
Description Any description that has been provided for the purchase order.
Approver The employee ID of the person who approved the purchase order.
Currency The currency used in the purchase order.
Control total The manually entered total amount of the purchase order document.
Supplier The supplier associated with the order.
Supplier name The name of the supplier associated with the order.
Supplier class The class of suppliers to which this supplier is assigned.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/) Purchase history by item (PO40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-history-by-item-po40101s page You use this inquiry to list all the purchases by item, based on purchase order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase history by item (PO40101S) You use this inquiry to list all the purchases by item, based on purchase order lines. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID The particular item you want to view the purchase history for.
Item class The particular item class you want to view the purchase history for. You can only select from stock item classes.
Subaccount The subaccount you want to view the purchase history for.
Supplier The supplier you want to view the purchase history for.
Supplier class The supplier class you want to view the purchase history for.
From period The first period for the list.
To period The last period for the list.
Start date The start date of the date range.
End date The end date of the date range. Only purchase orders having dates falling within the specified interval will be included in the list.
Include not completed lines When this check box is selected, the data from not completed lines will be included.
## The table
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the item that has been purchased. To view or edit the item, use the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Description The description of the item.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item has been purchased.
Order qty. The quantity of items ordered.
Qty. on receipt The quantity of the item that has been received.
Amount The total amount for the item (after the deduction of discounts).
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/) Purchase order list (PO40100S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-list-po40100s page In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new purchase orders, and add lines to purchase orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order list (PO40100S) In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new purchase orders, and add lines to purchase orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view existing purchase orders, create new purchase orders, and add lines to purchase orders. You can create a purchase order based on an existing sales order or by adding separate lines of different sales orders. Once an order has been saved, it can be approved, rejected, or cancelled by any of the employees assigned to review this purchase order. ## The top part
Button Description
View purchase order Click this to view the purchase order selected in the table in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window that pops up.
Element Description
Type

The type of the purchase order, all or one of the following:

Normal
A purchase order for products and services that are purchased on invoice or paid in cash. This is the most common type of purchase orders.
Drop-ship
A purchase order for goods that are delivered directly from the supplier to the customer. The list of items and the shipping instructions are copied automatically from drop-ship sales orders to the drop-ship purchase order. This option is only displayed if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Blanket
A purchase order for a large stock quantity that exceeds the quantity that is currently needed. This order reserves a certain quantity of supplier inventory for future purchasing. Blanket orders may be used to purchase products that are rarely available from suppliers or that have special discounts for high volumes. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default
A purchase order that includes the products purchased regularly in the same quantities from a specific supplier and that can be processed repeatedly. Orders of this type are used when the demand for ordered products is predictable and does not change over time. This option is only displayed if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Status

The system-generated status of the purchase order, all or one of the following options:

On hold
The purchase order is a draft and you can edit it manually.
Pending approval
The purchase order has not been approved by all the assigned persons.
Rejected
The order has been rejected by one of the persons assigned to approve it.
Open
The order was processed in accordance with the settings in the Purchase order preferences (PO101000) window but has not been completed yet.
Pending printing
Printing is required for the document, but has not been done yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Print order option is selected for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Pending email
Emailing is required for thes document, but it has not been done yet. The purchase order should be printed if the Email order option in the Suppliers (AP303000) is selected for the supplier.
Cancelled
The order has been cancelled through the Cancel order action (on the Actions menu of the toolbar). An order with this status cannot be edited, and purchase receipts cannot be based on it.
Closed
All of the goods on the order have been received.
Printed
The purchase order has been printed.
Supplier The supplier from which the items will be purchased. For transfer requests, it is a branch of your organisation.
## The table
Column Description
Order no. The number of the sales order.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Date The date when the added purchase order was created.
Delivery date The date when the order was delivered.
Supplier ref. The supplier reference number specified for the purchase order.
Type The type of the order.
Status The current status of the order.
Currency The currency of the purchase order.
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the order’s supplier.
Discount total The total discount amount of the order.
VAT total The total VAT amount of the order.
Order total The total amount of the order.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 Landed cost codes (PO202000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000 page In this window, you can define the landed cost codes that are used in your system for specifying the additional costs incurred for delivering purchased goods to your company warehouses or to customer locations if the goods are drop-shipped. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Landed cost codes (PO202000) In this window, you can define the landed cost codes that are used in your system for specifying the additional costs incurred for delivering purchased goods to your company warehouses or to customer locations if the goods are drop-shipped. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can define the landed cost codes that are used in your system for specifying the additional costs incurred for delivering purchased goods to your company warehouses or to customer locations if the goods are drop-shipped. For more information, see: [About landed cost application scenarios](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/). For each code, you should assign a specific supplier and the account and subaccount that will accrue landed costs of the type. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part In the top part, you can specify a new code and its settings, or select an existing code to view or modify its settings.
Element Description
Landed cost code The unique ID of the landed cost. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description The description of the landed cost.
Type

The type of the landed cost, which identifies its source. The following options are available:

  • Freight and misc. origin charge The landed cost is associated with freight expenses and other origin-related charges.
  • Customs duties The landed cost is associated with customs duties paid for the purchased goods.
  • VAT The landed cost is associated with VAT.

This option is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

  • Misc. destination charges The landed cost is associated with miscellaneous destination charges.
  • Other The landed cost is of another type.
Application method The method of applying the landed cost with this code. The landed costs can be specified on an invoice or adjustment in the Supplier ledger workspace, on a purchase receipt in the Purchases workspace, or on both types of documents. Select one of the following options: From supplier, From purchase order, or From both.
Allocation method

The method of allocating the landed costs to the purchased goods. The allocation method defines how the landed cost amount is distributed among the purchased stock items. Select one of the following options:

By quantity
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the quantities of different goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased stock item is the portion of this item’s quantity in the total quantity of all items purchased. If units other than base units of measure (UoMs) are specified for items, item quantities are calculated with respect to the base UoMs. Use this option only for purchase orders that include similar items with the same base UoM or similar base UoMs. Do not use this option for purchase orders that include disparate items with base units that cannot be compared, such as pallets and tons or meters and pounds.
By cost
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the costs of purchased goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased item is the portion of this item’s cost in the total cost of all different items purchased.
By weight
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the weights of purchased goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased item is the portion of this item’s weight in the total weight of all items purchased.
By volume
The landed costs are allocated to the purchased goods based on the volumes of purchased goods. The percent of the landed cost allocated to each purchased item is the portion of this item’s volume in the total volume of all items purchased.
None
The landed costs are not allocated to item costs; only a purchase invoice will be created for the landed cost.
Supplier The supplier with whom this landed cost is associated; not necessarily the supplier of the goods. You can only select suppliers who have the Landed cost supplier check box selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Location

The supplier location with which the landed cost is associated.

This field appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Terms The payment terms for this landed cost. Payment terms are defined in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Reason code The reason code to be used by default for cost adjustment transactions generated for the purchased goods.
Landed cost accrual account The account used for accumulating the landed costs before applying them to make cost adjustments for the purchased goods.
Landed cost accrual sub. The associated subaccount used for accumulating the landed costs before applying them to make cost adjustments for the purchased goods.
VAT category The VAT category to be used for the landed costs with this code.
Landed cost variance account The landed cost variance account (expense) to be used to record any differences between the landed costs specified on the purchase receipts and inventory receipts.
Landed cost variance sub. The corresponding landed cost variance subaccount.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/) Release landed costs from receipts (PO506000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/release-landed-costs-from-receipts-po506000 page In this window, you can view and manually process the landed costs associated with purchase and transfer receipts, if the landed costs were not processed automatically. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release landed costs from receipts (PO506000) In this window, you can view and manually process the landed costs associated with purchase and transfer receipts, if the landed costs were not processed automatically. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view and manually process the landed costs associated with purchase and transfer receipts, if the landed costs were not processed automatically. For details, see: [About landed cost application scenarios.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/process-landed-costs/about-landed-cost-application-scenarios/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the landed costs for the items you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes the landed costs for all items listed in the table.
## The table In this table, you can select the documents for which the landed costs will be processed.
Column Description
Included An unlabeled check box that you use to select this document for processing.
Type The type of the document.
Receipt no. The reference number of the purchase or transfer receipt for which the landed costs should be processed. Click the link to navigate to the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window to view the details of the selected receipt.
Supplier The supplier (landed cost supplier) who provided the transportation services.
Location

The supplier location associated with the landed cost.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Date The date of the purchase or transfer receipt.
Currency The currency of the purchase or transfer receipt.
Receipt total amt. The total amount of the purchase or transfer receipt.
Landed cost total (base currency) The total amount of landed costs for the purchase or transfer receipt. This amount is specified in the base currency.
Landed cost records The number of landed cost records on the receipt.
Parent topic: [Purchases windows - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchases-windows-overview/) Supplier inventory (PO201000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000 page In this window, you can maintain supplier inventory catalogues or lists of items purchased from a particular supplier location and their prices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier inventory (PO201000) In this window, you can maintain supplier inventory catalogues or lists of items purchased from a particular supplier location and their prices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can maintain supplier inventory catalogues or lists of items purchased from a particular supplier location and their prices. The system uses this information when you create purchase orders. For more information, see: [About supplier catalogues.](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/manage-supplier-catalogues/about-supplier-catalogues/) ## The top part Here you can select a supplier and supplier location; the table below then displays items you have purchased from the supplier.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose inventory catalog will be displayed. Select a supplier from the list of suppliers available in the system, which have been created in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Location

The supplier location from which the items to be displayed are purchased. By default, the main location of the selected supplier will appear here, but you can select another location. Supplier locations are defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Warehouse The default warehouse (in your company) that will receive the goods from the supplier location. This warehouse is specified for each supplier location in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.
Lead time (days)

Read-only.

This field shows the lead time for the selected supplier location. This lead time is defined in the Shipping instructions section on the General information tab of the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.
Currency The default currency used for transactions with this supplier. This currency is defined in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
## The table In this table, you can view or edit the list of items purchased from the supplier at the selected supplier location, items that might be purchased in the future and items that have already been purchased or items for which this supplier is specified on the **Supplier details** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. For each listed item, you can specify the alternative ID used for the item by the supplier, and other supplier-specific information. The last column displays the supplier price (per a purchase UoM) used last for this item on a document of a specific type. There can be multiple lines for the same item if it is purchased in different UoMs. To view all suppliers' prices for the item, click **Supplier prices** on the table toolbar.
Button Description
Supplier prices Navigates to the Supplier prices (AP202000) window where you can view available information about the prices that are used by the supplier (selected in the Supplier field) for the item selected in the table.
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, this item purchased from this supplier is active.
Default When this check box is selected, the selected supplier is the default supplier for this item.
All locations

When this check box is selected, the specified item’s purchasing information is the same for all locations.

This column appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The ID of the item, as used by your company.
Description The description specified for the item.
Purchase unit The unit of measure in which the item is was purchased from the supplier.
Supplier item ID The alternative ID used by the supplier as its item ID for the item.
Shipment lead time (days)

The additional lead time for the selected item, which represents the additional time required by the supplier to produce, assemble, and dispatch the item.

This value is added to the supplier Lead time value, defined in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window, to calculate the resulting lead time required to deliver the purchased item from the supplier’s location to your company’s warehouse.
Override A read-only check box that (if selected) indicates that value in the Shipment lead time (days) can be overridden.
Min. order freq. (days) The minimum frequency at which the item may be purchased from this supplier location.
Min. order qty. The minimum quantity of the item the supplier (at this location) requires for an order being placed.
Max. order qty. The maximum quantity of the item the supplier (at this location) allows for an order being placed.
Lot size

The lot size of the item when purchased from this supplier location.

If the lot size is not zero, the quantity on a purchase order is rounded up to match one or multiple lots. No fractions of a lot are allowed.
EOQ

The economic order quantity for the item when purchased from this supplier location.

This value represents the quantity of the item on an order that minimises the item’s holding and ordering costs.
Currency ID The currency in which the last price was specified.
Last supplier price The supplier price last used for the specified purchase UoM of the item.
Purchases reports /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchases reports Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Purchase reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview page With the wide variety of reports for the Purchases workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about the purchase orders, purchase receipts, and returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase reports - overview With the wide variety of reports for the Purchases workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about the purchase orders, purchase receipts, and returns. You can also analyse the data by various criteria and track the purchase of goods at different warehouses and locations. Because the Purchases workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, such as Supplier ledger, Sales orders, General ledger, and VAT, you can find and analyse the precise information you need. Flexible selection options and data links allow you to easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. Because the purchase orders reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## Purchases reports The Purchases workspace includes the following reports: ### Audit + [Purchase order details by account (PO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000/): Displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. + [Purchase order details by stock item (PO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-item-po611500/): Displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. + [Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-supplier-po611000/): Displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. + [Purchase order summary (PO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-summary-po610500/): Shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. + [Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-details-po631000/): Displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. + [Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po630500/): Displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. + [Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-allocated-and-back-ordered-po622000/): Displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. + [Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-details-po632000/): Displays, for the selected financial period, summary information about the invoiced quantities and invoiced amounts for the released purchase receipts and information about adjustments made for returns. + [Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-summary-po631500/): Displays summary information about the invoices linked to the purchase receipts and the adjustments linked to returns. + [Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-details-by-supplier-po621000/): Displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. + [Purchase receipt history (PO643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-history-po643000/) + [Purchase receipt summary (PO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-summary-po620500/): Displays the summary information about the purchase receipts. ### Window + [Purchase receipt (PO646000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000/) + [Purchase order (PO641000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-po641000/) + [Purchase order, right address (PO64108S)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-right-address-po64108s/) Purchase order (PO641000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-po641000 section By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order (PO641000) By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. You can select a certain type of purchase order you want to view, or select an order number to view a particular purchase order. The selected purchase orders are displayed as they will be printed. Report lines that have the same item ID, line description, unit of measure, and unit price are aggregated. If multiple purchase orders are selected for the report, each order is displayed on a separate page. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type

The type of purchase orders you want to view in the report.

You can select one of the types ( Normal, Drop-ship, Blanket, or Default ) to limit the purchase orders to only those of the selected type.

The Blanketoption is only available if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in your system.
Order no. The number of the order to be displayed. Select an order number to display only this order, or leave the field blank if you want to view all purchase orders of the selected type.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase order details by account (PO612000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-account-po612000 section This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order details by account (PO612000) This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase order lines that include non-stock items. The data in the report is grouped by general ledger accounts and subaccounts specified for non-stock items in the purchase order lines (in the **Account** and **Sub.** columns, respectively). The report includes purchase orders with any statuse except for **Closed** and **Cancelled**. The report specifies the total open balance for each account and for all listed purchase order lines. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. Or you can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
Include unreleased receipts When this check box is selected, the data from unreleased purchase receipts should be taken into account when the Open qty. value is calculated for each purchase order included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase order details by item (PO611500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-item-po611500 section This report displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order details by item (PO611500) This report displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays, for a certain date range, the detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in the report is grouped by item. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. You can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
Include unreleased receipts When this check box is selected, the data from unreleased purchase receipts should be taken into account when the Open qty. value is calculated for each purchase order included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-details-by-supplier-po611000 section This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order details by supplier (PO611000) This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays, for a certain date range, detailed information about purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The data in the report is grouped by the suppliers for which the purchase orders were created. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. You can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
Include unreleased receipts When this check box is selected, the data from unreleased purchase receipts should be taken into account when the Open qty. value is calculated for each purchase order included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase order summary (PO610500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-summary-po610500 section This report shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order summary (PO610500) This report shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report shows, for a certain time interval, summary information about the purchase orders that are neither closed nor cancelled. The information presented for each purchase order includes the type, reference number, order date, status, currency, supplier number and name, ordered quantity, open quantity, line total, and open amount. It also includes total values (for all purchase orders included in the report) for ordered quantity, open quantity, line total, and open amount. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no The supplier for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse for which you want to view purchase order information, by its ID. Select a warehouse to view only purchase orders created for purchasing goods to be received at this warehouse. Or you can leave the field blank to view a broader range of data. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item for which you want to view purchase order information. Select an item ID to view only purchase orders created for purchasing this item.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Purchase reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase order, right address (PO64108S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-order-right-address-po64108s section By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase order, right address (PO64108S) By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can look through, print, and email the purchase orders created in the Purchases workspace. You can select a certain type of purchase order you want to view, or select an order number to view a particular purchase order. The selected purchase orders are displayed as they will be printed, with the address on the right side. Report lines that have the same item ID, line description, unit of measure, and unit price are aggregated. If you select multiple purchase orders for the report, each order is displayed on a separate page. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type

The type of purchase orders you want to include in the report.

You can select an order type ( Normal, Drop-ship, Blanket, or Standard ) to limit the purchase orders to only those of the selected type.

The Blanketoption is only available if the Blanket and standard purchase orders functionality is enabled in your system.
Order number The number of the order to be displayed. Select an order number to display only this order, or leave the field blank if you want to view all purchase orders of the selected type.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt (PO646000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-po646000 section By using this report, you can view, print, and email the purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt (PO646000) By using this report, you can view, print, and email the purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can view, print, and email the purchase receipts created in the Purchases workspace. You can select a certain type of purchase receipt to examine, or select a receipt number to view a particular purchase receipt. The selected purchase receipts are displayed as they will be printed. If multiple purchase receipts are selected for the report, each receipt is displayed on a separate page. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Type

The type of purchase receipts you want to view in the report.

You can select one of the available types to limit the purchase receipts to only those of the selected type.
Receipt no. The number of the receipt to be displayed. You can select a number to display only that receipt, or leave the field blank if you want to view all receipts of the type.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-details-po631000 section This report displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt accrual details (PO631000) This report displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays detailed data for the purchase receipt and return documents, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. The data in the report is grouped by the account and subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value, and the details on each purchased item are displayed. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Account ID The account used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify an account or leave the field blank to view data for all accounts.
Subaccount The subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify a subaccount or leave the field blank to view data for all subaccounts.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.
To period You can simulate accrual details on purchase order receipts by the To period option. When earlier periods are chosen as this period, the report will display the currently excluded receipts by the condition, if the receipt still included uninvoiced quantity and/or amounts on the last day of the selected period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po630500 section This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt accrual summary (PO630500) This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. The data in the report is grouped by the account and subaccount used to accumulate the value of the purchased goods. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Account The account used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify an account or leave the field blank to view data for all accounts.
Subaccount The subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify a subaccount or leave the field blank to view data for all subaccounts.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.
To period You can simulate accrual details on purchase order receipts by the To period option. When earlier periods are chosen as this period, the report will display the currently excluded receipts by the condition, if the receipt still included uninvoiced quantity and/or amounts on the last day of the selected period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-allocated-and-back-ordered-po622000 section This report displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt allocated and back-ordered (PO622000) This report displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the detailed information about the items currently on receipts in any statuses. This report, generated for a certain time period, for each item (listed on a receipt) provides you with detailed information on related inventory allocations or information on the linked sales order lines (those that were marked for purchasing and for which the purchase orders were generated) and, if the **Include back-ordered items received** check box is selected, on the lines of sales orders in the **Open** and **Back order** statuses and on uncompleted transfer orders. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier the report will cover. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Include back-ordered items received When this check box is selected, include information on the received items that are listed on sales orders with the Open and Back order statuses and also on uncompleted transfer orders will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-details-po632000 section This report displays, for the selected financial period, summary information about the invoiced quantities and invoiced amounts for the released purchase receipts and information about adjustments made for returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt invoicing details (PO632000) This report displays, for the selected financial period, summary information about the invoiced quantities and invoiced amounts for the released purchase receipts and information about adjustments made for returns. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Post period The financial period for which you want to view invoicing details about the released receipts or returns. The post period is not required if you select a particular receipt by its reference number in the Receipt number element.
Receipt number The reference number of the released purchase receipt or return document. Specify a reference number, or leave the field blank to view a wider range of data.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.
Detailed When this check box is selected, the report will be generated with information about particular invoices linked to the listed purchase receipts and particular adjustments linked to returns.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-invoicing-summary-po631500 section This report displays summary information about the invoices linked to the purchase receipts and the adjustments linked to returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt invoicing summary (PO631500) This report displays summary information about the invoices linked to the purchase receipts and the adjustments linked to returns. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. See below for a description of each parameter on the **Report parameters** tab. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-details-by-supplier-po621000 section This report displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt details by supplier (PO621000) This report displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays detailed information about the purchase receipts for the specified date range. The data in the report is grouped by the supplier for which the purchase receipts were created. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The item ID of the purchased item. Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt history (PO643000) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-history-po643000 section You use this report to view, print, and email the data on receipts for each normal or drop-ship purchase order created in the Purchases workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt history (PO643000) You use this report to view, print, and email the data on receipts for each normal or drop-ship purchase order created in the Purchases workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of purchase order, Normal or Drop- ship, you want to view in the report.
Order no.

The number of the order to be displayed in the report.

Select an order number to display only this order, or leave the field blank if you want to view a broader range of data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Purchase receipt summary (PO620500) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-receipt-summary-po620500 section This report displays the summary information about the purchase receipts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase receipt summary (PO620500) This report displays the summary information about the purchase receipts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The information is detailed up to the total quantity, lines total, and VAT total for each purchase receipt included in the report. The report includes total values (for all purchase receipts in the report) on received quantities, lines totals, and VAT total. The records in the reports are grouped by the currency used in the purchase receipt documents, and totals are calculated in each currency used. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the report date range.
End date The end date of the report date range. Only receipts having dates within the specified interval will be included in the report.
Supplier no. The supplier for which you want to view purchase receipt information, by its number. Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Historical purchase receipt accrual summary (PO63050S) /visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/historical-purchase-receipt-accrual-summary-po63050s section This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Historical purchase receipt accrual summary (PO63050S) This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary data for the purchase receipts and returns, with subtotals calculated for each unique account and subaccount combination. The data in the report is grouped by the account and subaccount used to accumulate the value of the purchased goods. Purchase receipt simulated accrual summary has added possibility for historical reconciliation of PO accruals by collecting all the data of the changes and enabling to fetch and simulate the uninvoiced quantity and uninvoiced amounts from the purchase receipt documents. Documents will be displayed in the report showcasing uninvoiced amount and uninvoiced quantity held in the document by the end of selected To period. ## Report parameters On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Account The account used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify an account or leave the field blank to view data for all accounts.
Subaccount The subaccount used to accumulate the purchased goods' value. Specify a subaccount or leave the field blank to view data for all subaccounts.
Supplier no.

The supplier from which the goods are purchased.

Specify a supplier or leave the field blank to view data for all suppliers.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the goods are purchased. Specify a warehouse or leave the field blank to view data for all warehouses. This field is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID

The item ID of the purchased item.

Specify an item or leave the field blank to view data for all items.
To period You can simulate accrual details on purchase receipts by the To period option. The report can display the already excluded receipts by this condition; if the receipt had uninvoiced quantity and/or amounts on the last day of the selected period, the document will be included with the uninvoiced values displayed in the report as they were by the end of the selected to period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-reports/purchase-reports-overview/) Sales /visma-net-erp/help/sales section In the sales process, you can manage customers, sales prices, non-stock items and discounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales In the sales process, you can manage customers, sales prices, non-stock items and discounts. You can also generate recurring transactions. Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Sales - overview /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-overview page By using the Inventory workspace, your company can easily configure and adjust sales order processing to fit your sales workflows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales - overview By using the Inventory workspace, your company can easily configure and adjust sales order processing to fit your sales workflows. By using the Inventory workspace, your company can easily configure and adjust sales order processing to fit your sales workflows. Visma Net provides typical predefined order types, and you can additionally create custom types of orders with specific processing. The Inventory workspace provides instant access to accurate inventory allocation information, as well as flexible pricing and discounting policies. With Visma Net, your company can fulfill orders accurately, consistently, and efficiently. The primary functionalities of the Inventory workspace are described briefly below and extensively in other topics in this section. ## Configurable order types Visma Net includes a set of predefined order types for common distribution operations; you can also define custom order types to meet specific order processing requirements. For each order type, you can specify inventory allocation rules, workflow scenario, and the type of document to be generated in the Customer ledger and Inventory workspaces. For more information, see the following topics: + [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/) + [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/) + [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/) + [About invoices in the sales workspace](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-invoices-in-the-sales-workspace/) ## Credit limit verification Before releasing a sales order, the system performs a credit check for the customer. Orders placed on credit hold can be released from credit hold if customer payments were entered or order amounts were appropriately decreased. Authorised users can override the credit hold status and force order fulfillment. ## Approval of sales orders You can set up parallel or multi stage approval of sales orders of the **SO** and **IN** types. ## Consolidated and partial shipments You can specify a different delivery date for each line item on a sales order. By using the warehouse availability information and cost data, the system can split a sales order into multiple shipments from different warehouses. Also, the system tracks the remaining balances of orders and manages back orders. For more details, see: [About shipment processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/about-shipment-processing-options/). ## Automatic packaging and freight calculation With Visma Net you can make processing of shipments more effective by configuring automatic packaging suggestions. With the **Automatic packaging** functionality configured, the system automatically selects the minimal set of packaging boxes for each sales order. Also, you can configure freight calculation. For details, see the following topics: + [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/) + [About freight calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation/) ## Integrated workflow Visma Net provides an integrated workflow so you can automate order processing and eliminate unnecessary steps. You can add tasks and activities for employees handling the orders, and set up notifications to be automatically triggered during order processing. ## Integration with the Inventory workspace Due to seamless integration with the Inventory workspace, the Inventory workspace provides real-time data about inventory levels of items on the sales order, including information about how each item is allocated. During the entry of a sales order, the system will notify the user if the quantity is not available or allocated through multiple warehouse locations or warehouses. You can configure the inventory allocation rules for each step of the sales process for custom order types. ## Stock reservation Visma Net allows you to perform stock reservations when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer cannot be shipped to another customer. In case when items are stocked at multiple warehouses, this helps avoid overstocks and stock outs because the system gives you the ability to reserve items at any warehouse and automates transfers. For more information, see: [Sales orders with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations/). ## Integration with the Purchases workspace The Inventory and Purchases workspaces are tightly integrated. With Visma Net, you can link sales orders with purchase orders, so that goods received from suppliers will be used for specific sales orders. The Inventory workspace supports **Back order** and **Drop shipment** functionalities. For more information, see: [About links between sales orders and purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-links-between-sales-orders-and-purchase-orders/). ## Customer return support Visma Net provides the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns and ensure complete traceability of these operations. Your company can set up its own return policies by using specific predefined order types and by creating custom order types for authorised and unauthorised returns. For more information, see: [Process returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/). ## Other functionalities and options The Inventory workspace lets you do the following: + On order and invoice documents, view the total weight, volume, and units + Easily attach scanned images or electronic versions of sales orders to facilitate tracking and processing of the orders + Add notes with shipping and handling instructions to sales orders or specific lines of sales orders + Combine multiple orders onto one invoice + Combine items from multiple orders into one shipment + Access item availability information during order entry + Create a new item while entering an order + Check inventory to automatically create a back order for out-of-stock items on shipment creation + Disallow invoices to credit-hold customers + Assign to each order the appropriate salespersons and calculate their commission + Assign the appropriate price for each item using price conversion for the base unit to the sales units + Take advantage of integrated back order processing + Use alternate item IDs for stock items + Track lot or serial numbers for valuable items on orders + More easily track returns and replacements using reason codes assigned to credit memos + Print carrier labels for RMA orders Manage defaults /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-defaults section Multiple default values that can be specified in this workspace and in the Inventory and Supplier ledger workspaces, help the users easily create new documents, process them, and minimize errors. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage defaults Multiple default values that can be specified in this workspace and in the Inventory and Supplier ledger workspaces, help the users easily create new documents, process them, and minimize errors. The default values can be set for automatic VAT calculation for sales orders, for shipment addresses and shipment processing options, and for automatic packaging suggestions. About sales VAT on sales orders and invoices /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-defaults/about-sales-vat-on-sales-orders-and-invoices page Items ordered from particular states are subject to the relevant state sales tax. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales VAT on sales orders and invoices Items ordered from particular states are subject to the relevant state sales tax. Items ordered from particular states are subject to the relevant state sales tax. The rate and the amount of sales tax depend on many factors, including the types of items purchased, the delivery address of the customer, the address of the selling branch, and the business presence of your organisation in the state of the customer. If automatic calculation of VAT is configured in your system, the system determines the applicable VAT for each sales order or invoice based on the VAT categories of the items sold and the VAT zones assigned to customer locations. To minimise VAT-related errors that users make when they enter sales orders, cash sales, and invoices, you can provide proper default values for the VAT zones used for VAT calculation, as described in this topic. ## VAT on sales orders You enter customer sales orders by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The system assigns the default VAT zone to the sales order (displayed in the **Customer VAT zone** field on the **Financial details** tab) as follows: 1. From the VAT zone specified for the quote if the order is created from a quote that has a VAT zone specified. 1. From the VAT zone of the customer location specified on the order, if specified. You can select VAT zones for customer locations in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. From the VAT zone determined by the postcode of the delivery address if no VAT zone is specified for this customer location and if the order is shipped by a common carrier. > [!NOTE] > On the order, the **Ship via** code denotes how the order is shipped. To check whether the ship via code denotes a delivery method of a common carrier, use the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. 1. From the VAT zone associated with the selling branch if no VAT zone is specified for this customer location and if the order is not shipped by a common carrier. (If the **Branch accounting** functionality is not activated in your system, the VAT zone assigned to your organisation is used.) If you know exactly which VAT zone should be used on a specific order, you can select it in the **Customer VAT zone** field from the list of all configured VAT zones. ## VAT on invoices When a sales order is shipped, the system generates an invoice. Invoices of this type have all the details copied from the associated sales orders. Also, you can manually create invoices to invoice customers for services rendered, or you can enter cash sales when the customer immediately pays for the services. You can create an invoice by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) or the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. Cash sales can be created in the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. The system assigns the default VAT zone for the invoice or cash sale (displayed in the **Customer VAT zone** field on the **Financial details** tab) as follows: 1. From the VAT zone of the customer location specified on the document. You can select VAT zones for customer locations in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. From the VAT zone associated with the selling branch if no VAT zone is specified for this customer location. (If the **Branch accounting** functionality is not activated in your system, the VAT zone assigned to your organisation in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window is used.) If you know exactly which VAT zone should be used on a specific invoice or a cash sale document, you can select it in the **Customer VAT zone** field from the list of all configured VAT zones.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Manage document types and work flows /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows section Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage document types and work flows Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations. To modify workflows for sales orders, you can use the [Sales orders preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. You can create more order types by modifying order type settings or templates if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. These topics provide descriptions of all applicable options. About predefined types of sales orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders page A sales order is an internal document that you use to record a customer's purchase order. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About predefined types of sales orders A sales order is an internal document that you use to record a customer's purchase order. Visma Net includes a variety of predefined order types (such as quotes, sales orders with allocation, and transfer orders) for common distribution operations. You can create sales orders of predefined types in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If needed, you can modify the predefined types and define custom order types to meet the specific order processing requirements in your company. You can control the steps required to process each type of sales order, from entry to shipping and invoicing. For details on custom order types, see: [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/). Most of the predefined order types are described in the remainder of this topic. The types of orders that are used for customer returns are described in: [About predefined order types for customer returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns/). ## Quote (QT) A quote is a proposal of future sales to a particular customer for a specified price. You can use documents of the **QT** order type to plan production or purchase orders. The functionality of approvals is supported for quotes (which is indicated by the selected **Supports approval** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window). The quantities of goods and the document amounts on open quotes do not update the information in the Inventory and Customer ledger workspaces. Because you can copy the information on quotes to sales orders, quotes can be used as templates for repeating orders with the same line item information for a particular customer. Freight is calculated on quotes of the predefined **QT** type. You can select whether to recalculate discounts on sales orders copied from quotes. After you copy a quote to a sales order (by selecting **Actions** - **Copy order** in the window toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window), the quote remains open until you cancel it. ## Sales order (SO) A sales order is a document with the **SO** order type that you create, possibly based on a quote, to represent a customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date. Once the order is saved, the credit history of the customer will be checked to verify that the customer has not exceeded the specified credit limits or days past due. To configure the system so that the status of the order changes to **Credit hold** if the customer fails the credit check, select the **Check credit on entry** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window; by default, this check box is cleared. After approval has been configured, when a sales order is saved, it will be assigned to an approver and will get the **Pending approval** status. If it has been rejected, the order should be edited and will be reassigned for approval. If it has been approved, the order may be shipped. Sales orders of the **SO** type are fulfilled by shipments (the **Process shipments** check box is selected on the **Template settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window). For orders of the **SO** type, you must generate invoices in the Customer ledger workspace and issues in the Inventory workspace. For more details on processing, see: [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/). ## Sales order with allocation (SA) This predefined type of sales order is only available if at least one of the **Lot and serial tracking**, **Stock subitems**, **Multiple warehouse locations**, and **Sales order to purchase order link** functionalities is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. If your organisation's policies require you to reserve stock for orders from specific customers, you can use the orders of the **SA** type for these customers. When you save a new order of this type in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the specified quantities of the line items are reserved specifically for this order. You can view the allocation for each line item by selecting a line and clicking the **Allocations** button on the **Document details** tab. If there is an insufficient quantity in the specified warehouse, the system will automatically split the requested quantity into two allocation schedules: one with the available quantity reserved in the specified warehouse, and one with the remaining quantity, for which you can select another source warehouse and reserve the quantity there (by selecting the **Allocated** check box). Once an order of the **SA** type is saved, the credit history of the customer is checked to verify that the customer has not exceeded the specified credit limits or days past due. If the customer fails the credit check, the status of the order is changed to **Credit hold**. (This is controlled by the **Check credit on entry** check box, which is selected by default on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.) Sales orders of the **SA** type are fulfilled by shipments; that is, the **Process shipments** check box is selected on the **Template settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. For orders of the **SA** type, you must generate invoices in the Supplier ledger workspace and issues in the Inventory workspace. For more information on orders of this type, see: [About sales orders with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations/) and [Create a sales order with reserved allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-reserved-allocations/). ## Invoice order (IN) An invoice order, which has the **IN** order type, is a special type of sales order you create when the goods requested by a customer have been shipped already, so the processing of the orders does not involve shipments. You can set up approval for the orders of the **IN** type. For orders of this type, you must create an invoice in the Customer ledger workspace and an issue in the Inventory workspace that updates the item quantities. Customer ledger invoices are generated for invoice orders separately from invoices of the same customer based on orders of other types. For more information, see: [About invoice order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-invoice-order-processing-options/). ## Cash sales (CS) You create an order with the **CS** order type when you sell items directly to the customer (with no shipping) and receive payment at that time (by cash, check, or credit card). You can save the order of the **CS** type, which you create by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, only after you enter the payment information including the payment reference number. For orders of this type, you should create a supplier ledger document of the **Cash sales** type and an issue in the Inventory workspace. For more information, see: [About cash sales processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-cash-sales-processing-options/). ## Transfer order (TR) Transfer orders or orders with the **TR** order type are used to account for stock items moved from one warehouse to another when replenishment window the source warehouse is performed or when stock items are allocated (reserved) to fulfil sales orders in other warehouses. This order type is only available if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In most cases, you create transfer orders by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. To generate multiple transfer orders for replenishment and for sales orders with stock allocation, you can use the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window. You can fulfill the transfer orders by shipments. For more information on transfer orders, see: [Process transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About custom order types /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types page Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations, as described in: About predefined types of sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About custom order types Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations, as described in: About predefined types of sales orders. For more information: [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/). Each predefined order type, which is available in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window, has an associated **template**. The template is a collection of settings that controls the processing of documents of the type, including what customer ledger and inventory documents it generates, whether it requires shipment, and how the automation behaviour determines conditions for changing statuses. You can create more order types by modifying order type settings or templates if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. You can configure custom order types based on the available templates, which involves making slight changes to an order type based on the template. In exceptional cases, new custom templates can be created with the help of the Visma Net development team, and custom order types can be based on those templates. Custom order types, whether they are based on predefined templates or custom templates, appear for selection in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window along with predefined order types. Users can create new orders of custom types and process them by using the windows in the **Processing** section of the Inventory workspace in accordance with the automation behaviour configured for the template. The sections below cover order types based on both predefined templates and custom templates created by Visma Net. ## Order types based on predefined templates By using the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window, you can view the settings of predefined order types and create new custom order types based on predefined templates. (When you create an order type based on a template, the template itself cannot be modified.) New order types based on predefined templates are minor modifications of the predefined template order type. For example: You can create separate quote order types, based on the **QT (quote)** template, for the customer price classes of wholesale, retail, and catalog customers. These types might use different number series to determine order IDs and different sets of general ledger accounts and subaccounts. Also, the types might have different processing options, such as the setting that determines whether the system performs a credit check when the quotes are entered. The following order type templates are available: CM (Credit note) : The built-in template for the **CM** order type. You use documents of this type to adjust already-completed sales orders. CR (Cash return) : The built-in template for the **CR** order type. Documents of this type are used when the customer returns goods from a cash sale order with no shipping. IN (Invoice) : The built-in template for the **IN** and **CS** order types. You use documents of these types, respectively, to invoice the customer for shipped goods and to register cash sales. QT (Quote) : The built-in template for the **QT** order type. Documents of this type register the customer's intention to buy goods in the specified quantity, on the specified date, and at the specified price. RC (Return for credit) : The built-in template for the **RC** order type. You use documents of this type to register customer returns for credit without replacement. RM (Generic authorised return) : The built-in template for the **RM** order type. Documents of this type register customer returns with replacement or for credit within the product's warranty period. RR (Return with replacement) : The built-in template for the **RR** order type. You use documents of this type to register customer returns with exact replacement. SA (Sales order with allocation) : The built-in template for the **SA** order type. You create documents of this type to record customers' requests to purchase goods and to reserve the requested goods for the orders. SO (Sales order) : The built-in template for the **SO** order type. Documents of this type are created to record customers' requests to purchase goods and to prepare shipments. TR (transfer) : The built-in template for the **TR** order type. You generate documents of this type to perform stock replenishment by transferring goods from the source warehouse to a destination warehouse. This order type only appears if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For each new order type based on one of the available templates, specify the following on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window: 1. The two-letter identifier and brief description. 1. The template to be used for the order type. Order types based on the same template usually have similar functionality. 1. The number series to be used for automatic generation of reference numbers for documents of the type. We recommend that you assign individual series with a prefix for each order type to help users track documents. 1. The number series to be used for the customer ledger document generated for each order of the type. Again, a series with a specific prefix for the order type helps users track documents more easily. 1. General ledger accounts and subaccounts, or rules for selecting accounts and subaccounts for the order type. 1. Various processing options, such as the following: + **Hold orders on entry** Whether orders should be saved with the **On hold** status when they are entered. + **Check credit on entry** Whether the system performs a credit check for the customer when the order is entered. + **Require control total** Whether the user must type in the control total on order entry and modification. + **Invoice separately** Whether the system should generate separate invoices for each order of this type. + **Calculate freight** Whether freight calculation is required on saving the orders. ## Order types based on custom templates In rare cases, a custom order type can be created based on a custom template. CAUTION: Although the **Template settings** tab is not hidden, we do not recommend that you modify the available templates. Custom templates can be created only based on settings provided by Visma Net developers. Each of the available templates is based on automation behaviour implemented in Visma Net—a set of automation steps developed for the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window and related windows involved in order processing. Automation behaviours use various built-in order and shipment plans. The following automation behaviours are available: Sales order : Implements typical sales order and transfer processing with approval. Invoice : Implements typical invoice order and cash sale order processing with approval. Quote : Implements typical quote processing with approval. Credit note : Implements typical credit memo processing. RMA order : Implements processing for typical types of customer returns: returns for credit, returns with replacement, and RMA returns. The functionality of order types is implemented through automation steps developed for each of the forms involved in order processing: the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, and the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. This functionality defines, for orders of specific types in each status, what actions are enabled and under what conditions. The settings in the **Operations** area on the **Template settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window affect the integration of orders with the Inventory and Customer ledger workspaces. For example: For the **RC (Return for credit)** template, the default inventory operation for receiving the returned goods will be **Receipt** in the Inventory workspace and that a credit note will be generated in the Customer ledger workspace to reimburse the customer for the returned goods. With the **RR (Return for replacement)** template, no customer ledger document will be generated for an order of the type, while in the Inventory workspace, the release of the receipt (the default inventory operation for this order type) will initiate the creation of an issue to account for the replacement sent to the customer in the same quantity with the same price.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About credit checks in the Sales workspace /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-credit-checks-in-the-sales-workspace page This topic describes the credit check settings for sales orders and invoices in the Inventory workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit checks in the Sales workspace This topic describes the credit check settings for sales orders and invoices in the Inventory workspace. This topic describes the credit check settings for sales orders and invoices in the Inventory workspace. ## Credit check for sales orders A credit check of the customer is performed for sales orders of most predefined types. When a user selects a customer for the order, the system performs the customer credit check. If the credit rules specified for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window have been violated (that is, if the customer has exceeded the credit limit, the days past due, or both), the system displays a yellow exclamation mark to the left of the **Customer** field. By pointing at the mark, the user can read the warning. You can use the **Hold document on failed credit check** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window to indicate to the system how the orders of the specific type should be processed if the customer fails the credit check: + If the check box is selected for the order type, when an order of this type is saved (or taken off hold, depending on whether the **Hold orders on entry** check box is selected for the order type), it will get the **Credit hold** status. + If the check box is cleared for the order type, when an order of this type is saved or taken off hold, it will get the **Open** status. The order can be processed as the orders that passed the credit check can be processed. As for the predefined order types, the **Hold document on failed credit check** check box is selected only for the orders of the **SA (Sales orders with allocation)** type. If customer payments were entered or order amounts were decreased, orders that were previously placed on credit hold can be released from it. In the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window, you can select orders with the **Credit hold** status and click **Release from credit hold** (as long as you are as a user have access to this action). This initiates credit checks for each order selected, and if the credit check is successful, the order receives a status of **Open**. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, you may need to assign the orders that have been taken from credit hold for approval as other orders. In this case, add to the approval map a condition or multiple conditions that assign the orders with **Credit hold** check box selected to specific approvers. Then on release from credit hold, the orders will get the **Pending approval** status if the conditions are met. Alternatively, you can release each order from credit hold individually by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If you as a user have access to the **Release from credit hold** action on the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can click this action to change the status of the order to **Open** and process it further despite of the failed credit check. If when editing this order you increase the order amount, then when you save the order, it will get the **Credit hold** status. If you do not change the amount, you can process the order further; an invoice generated for the order will not get the **Credit hold** status (even if the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window) and can be released. ## Credit check for invoices Generally, invoices are generated for sales orders that have passed the credit check; however, you may need to perform a separate credit check for invoices and hold invoices on failed credit check. Depending on your organisation's business processes, the time range between shipment creation and invoice generation may be significant and during this time, the prices may change. Also, services and warranties may be added manually to invoices, rather than to sales orders. A credit check is performed for each new invoice that is created by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window, and if the customer fails the credit check, the system displays a yellow exclamation mark to the left of the **Customer** field and a warning. However, you may want invoices to be placed on credit hold if they fail the credit check. You can select the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check field in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window to indicate to the system that all invoices that fail the credit check should get the **Credit hold** status. For invoices with the **Credit hold** status, in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window, you can periodically perform the **Release from credit hold** action, which initiates a credit check and opens the invoices of those customers who have paid their outstanding balances fully or partially or have extended the credit limits.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About invoices in the sales workspace /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-invoices-in-the-sales-workspace page Invoices of different types that you can view and edit by using the Customer invoices (SO303000) window are actually customer ledger documents that originate in the Inventory workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoices in the sales workspace Invoices of different types that you can view and edit by using the Customer invoices (SO303000) window are actually customer ledger documents that originate in the Inventory workspace. For more information: [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/). Invoices of different types that you can view and edit by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window are actually customer ledger documents that originate in the Inventory workspace. An invoice is a legally binding document that records the price and details of the sale and indicates that the order has been fulfilled. By the time an invoice is created, the goods or services have been delivered or rendered, and you may need to manually edit the document. The following types of documents can be processed by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/)window: + Invoices + Cash sales + Cash returns + Credit notes The sections below describe how different types of invoices created in the Inventory workspace are processed. ## Invoice processing You can create an invoice for each shipment or consolidate multiple shipment documents for the same customer into a single customer invoice in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window, or you can combine orders for an invoice manually by clicking **Add order** on the **Document details** tab of the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. You can generate an invoice for only a confirmed shipment (one with the **Confirmed** status). An invoice created in the Sales workspace has one of the following statuses: On hold : You can save an invoice with this status if you want to continue editing it. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, clear the **Hold** check box and save the document. If the **Validate totals** option has been selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, you first need to type the control total into the **Amount** field. Balanced : A **Balanced** invoice can be released to the Customer ledger workspace. When you release an invoice, the statuses of shipments included in the invoice change to **Invoiced**. Open : When an invoice is released to the Customer ledger workspace, it gets the **Open** status until it is paid for by the customer. Also, upon release of the invoice, the status of the original sales order changes to **Completed**. You can print the invoice (individually or among other invoices and notes) and send it to the customer by postal mail or you can send the invoice as an email or e-mail attachment depending on the mailing settings of the customer account. Closed : Once it is fully paid, the invoice gets the **Closed** status. The release of an invoice generates transactions in the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window and updates the General ledger workspace. The reference to the batch that posts transactions to the general ledger can be found on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. Salespersons' commissions are calculated when the invoice is released or paid, depending on the commission settings in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Total freight charges may include premium freight, insurance, shipment, and other charges that apply to the shipped goods and to entire shipments. The premium freight amounts, which are specified for sales orders, are allocated among the shipments fulfilling the order, according to the option selected in the **Freight allocation on partial shipping** field in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, which can be one of the following: Allocate proportionally : Distributes the premium freight amount shipments proportionally to the partial shipment amounts. Full amount first time : Assigns the premium freight amount to the first shipment. ## Cash sale processing An invoice of the cash sale type is generated for a cash sale order. The document updates appropriate sales and cash accounts. ## Cash return processing An customer ledger document of the **cash return** type is generated for cash return orders that are used to account for returns on cash sales orders. The document updates appropriate sales and cash accounts. ## Credit note processing A credit note is generated when an order of the **credit note** type is fulfilled to adjust the customer's balance with the company by the amount of the returned goods. Credit notes are used for unauthorised and authorised returns. A credit note can be released to the Customer ledger workspace and can update the Inventory workspace. In the Customer invoices window, for a **Balanced** credit note, the following actions are enabled in the **Actions** menu of the toolbar: Release : Releases the **Balanced** note to the Customer ledger workspace, to credit the customer account for the returned goods. Update IN : Releases relevant data to the Inventory workspace. The stock levels will be increased in the Inventory workspace by the quantity of returned goods. The original order will get the **Completed** status once the related customer ledger credit note is released. The reference number of the batch that posted the related transactions to the General ledger workspace can be found on the **Financial details** tab in the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. ## Reordering lines in invoices You may need to reorder invoice lines that you have added to be in a specific order requested by the customer. Also, you may need to sort invoice lines by the shipment number and order number to make it easier to review a printable invoice. You can reorder the lines of an invoice until it has been released. The order number of each invoice line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the order numbers for each document line in the **Sort order** column. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combinations, such as the following: + A single invoice line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example, lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of invoice lines (for example, line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold the **Shift** key down while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down** arrow until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of invoice lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move invoice lines between pages, cut the selected invoice lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. > [!NOTE] > You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. The invoice lines that you add by using the **Add order** dialog box are added to the table in the order in which you have added them. If you need to rearrange the lines in the table to sort them by shipment numbers and order numbers, you can click the **Reset sorting** button in the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab. When you click this button, the system automatically sorts the invoice lines and regenerates **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. ### Inserting lines into invoices You can insert a single line to any place in the document. To do this, click the line above which the new line should be inserted and then press Shift+Insert, or right-click the needed line and then click **Insert row**. The system adds a new blank line. When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About payment reservation for sales orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders page Many businesses perform sales on credit: A customer order is paid after the order has been shipped and an invoice for the shipped goods and services has been generated and sent to the customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment reservation for sales orders Many businesses perform sales on credit: A customer order is paid after the order has been shipped and an invoice for the shipped goods and services has been generated and sent to the customer. Many businesses perform sales on credit: A customer order is paid after the order has been shipped and an invoice for the shipped goods and services has been generated and sent to the customer. In some cases, businesses may require prepayments or payments made specifically for particular orders, or your organisation can charge a customer card for specific orders. If you rely on payment auto-application, payments are applied to unrelated invoices starting from the earliest documents and it is difficult to perform reconciliation later. With Visma Net, you can link payments to orders and orders to payments (including prepayments), thus reserving payments for particular orders. After that, once the orders are shipped, the payments will be applied to the invoices generated for the order shipments. Linking payments to orders can facilitate reconciliation. ## Linking payments to an order You can streamline your processes by entering a customer prepayment or a payment intended for a particular order directly by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. On the **Payments** tab of the window, you can click **Create payment** or **Create prepayment** to enter a payment or a prepayment, respectively. A prepayment or payment can be for a full amount or a partial amount. You can later create an additional payment for the balance or link the order to an existing payment or existing payments. Also, you can link a new order to existing prepayments or payments by selecting the available customer prepayments or payments by their reference numbers on the **Payments** tab. Moreover, you can reserve payments with balances that were already applied to unrelated invoices in the Supplier ledger workspace. ## Linking orders to a payment When you enter a customer prepayment or payment in the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)window in the Customer ledger or Inventory workspace, you can link it directly to a particular order or multiple orders by using the **Orders to apply** tab. The payments with balances that have been partially applied to invoices can also be reserved for sales orders. For customers who pay by credit cards, you can create a payment, link it to particular sales order or orders, and charge the credit card by using the same [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. ## Processing orders with reserved payments An order with a payment linked is processed in the same way as any other order is. An order can be fulfilled by one or multiple shipments: first shipments are created and confirmed, and then invoices are generated and released. An order can be edited until it is **Open**. If no invoice has been generated for the order, you can cancel payment application by removing the reserved payment from the list on the **Payments** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once any amount applied to an order has been transferred to the invoice generated for the order, you can view the history of application on the **Application history** tab of the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)window, which is available in both the Inventory workspace and the Customer ledger workspace. As orders linked to this payment are being shipped and completed, you will see on the **Application history** tab the list of applied invoices (generated for those orders) as it is populated. Consider a simple scenario when a full-amount payment was reserved for an order. Once the order has been shipped and an invoice has been generated and released, the payment amount is applied to the invoice and the invoice gets the **Closed** status. The payment amount that was applied to the invoice is shown as **Transferred to invoice**. The order gets the **Completed** status. If an order with a full-amount payment linked was shipped partially and then has been completed or cancelled, its unapplied balance is reset to zero while the payment with unapplied balance has the **Open** status and its applied amount is shown as **Transferred to invoice**. There may be many variations of this scenario: multiple shipments (and multiple invoices) for the order, multiple payments reserved for one order, or multiple orders paid by one prepayment. If the order is being shipped in multiple shipments, you can track how the payment's partial amounts was applied to multiple invoices. On release of invoices, the system applies the payments (in the amounts reserved for orders) to invoices, and if the amount of payments is equal to the order total, the invoices get the **Closed** status. If the total amount of payments (applied to orders) is less than the order total, one of the invoices is given the **Open** status with the balance that is equal to the difference between the order total and the payments' total. Some of the linked payments may be applied to an order partially and also applied to unrelated invoices.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Display profit and margin totals /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals page You can display or hide the unit cost and profit and margin totals in the Sales orders (SO301000) and Sales orders (SO30100S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Display profit and margin totals You can display or hide the unit cost and profit and margin totals in the Sales orders (SO301000) and Sales orders (SO30100S) windows. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/), [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). See the table below on how this is done for each window. |Window|Action| |---|---| |[Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/)|Go to the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, the **General settings** tab, and select or deselect the **Show gross margin/profit** check box.| |[Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/)|Remove or add the **Sales Profit Viewer** role for the user you want to hide or display the information for.| Change customer location on customer invoice /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/change-customer-location-on-customer-invoice section In Visma Net, you can change the customer location on a customer invoice, even when it already has lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer location on customer invoice In Visma Net, you can change the customer location on a customer invoice, even when it already has lines. If you want to change the customer location to one with a different VAT calculation, on an invoice with lines, consider the following to make sure the VAT calculation is changed as well. ## Before you start Make sure the **Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document** check box in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window is selected. See also: [Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/set-up-calculation/recalculate-vat-when-customer-is-changed-on-document/). 1. Make sure that the **Export type** is filled in for the location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. In the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window on the invoice, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Location** field and select a new location. **Result**: the **VAT details** tab and the VAT category on the lines will be updated accordingly if the new location has a different VAT calculation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure automatic packaging /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging section Visma Net provides options that give your company the ability to configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for the sales orders and shipments to be shipped, either via carriers with which integration is established or via other carriers whose delivery services your company uses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure automatic packaging Visma Net provides options that give your company the ability to configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for the sales orders and shipments to be shipped, either via carriers with which integration is established or via other carriers whose delivery services your company uses. You can set up the application to calculate a set of boxes for each sales order and shipment and calculate the freight. > [!NOTE] > To use this functionality, make sure the **Automatic packaging** is enabled in [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. With this functionality disabled, you will need to manually select all the boxes for sales orders and shipments and specify the gross weights of the resulting packages. About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers page With Visma Net, you can configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for all the carriers used by your organisation to ship the sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers With Visma Net, you can configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for all the carriers used by your organisation to ship the sales orders. > [!NOTE] > To use this functionality, make sure **Automatic packaging** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. With this functionality enabled and configured, the system will determine the optimal set of boxes (packages) for each sales order and shipment and calculate the freight. For detailed instructions, see: [Configure automatic packaging](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-automatic-packaging/). ## Package calculation for a sales order Once the automatic packaging functionality has been configured, you can use it when you prepare a sales order for shipping or create a consolidated shipment. Because the calculation of packages is resource-intensive, the system calculates packages only when the user requests this calculation. As you are preparing a sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window and adding items, the system calculates the weight and volume of the sales order. Once you specify the delivery information on the **Delivery settings** tab, including the ship via code, the shipping terms, and the shipping zone, and save the order, the system determines the set of boxes, each package weight, the freight cost, and the freight charges. The system uses a heuristic algorithm (an algorithm that quickly finds a satisfactory set of boxes, however it does not guarantee that this set is the best one) and the following information to make suggestions about the boxes required for the order: + The lists of boxes assigned to each ship via code, with the maximum weight and volume each box can hold and the weight of the box (which must include the weight of any packaging material) + The quantity of each stock item in base units, the weight and volume of the base unit of the item, and the option instructing the system about how to pack this item + The quantity of each non-stock item in base units, and the weight and volume of the base unit of the item You can view the particular packages in the **Shop for rates** dialog box, which opens when you click the **Packages** button on the **Delivery settings** tab. You can review the calculated totals on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If freight for a specific ship via code should be specified manually, you can enter the total freight amount in the **Freight** field on the **Totals** tab. In some cases, you may need to edit the packages manually. If you select the **Manual packaging** check box, you can adjust information about the boxes and their contents to match the quantities and weights of actual packages. > [!NOTE] > For packages > that have been suggested automatically (those with **Auto**selected in the > **Type**column), the system adds the weights of the boxes automatically. > > For each box that is added manually, you must specify the gross weight of the box. ## Package calculation for a shipment Once a shipment is generated for a sales order, the system updates the packages calculated for the order (if needed), and information about particular boxes used for the shipment becomes available for review on the **Packages** tab. If needed, you can adjust the packages manually: correct the gross weights of particular packages, or select another box (or other boxes) to match the quantities and weights of the actual packages. ## Package calculation for consolidated shipments You can create shipments for multiple orders by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. If multiple orders are consolidated into one shipment, you can recalculate the packages initially determined for sales orders by clicking the **Refresh packages** button in the toolbar on the **Packages** tab of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Once the set of boxes is determined for the consolidated shipment, you can review and edit this list if needed on the **Packages** tab. ## Manual packaging for specific items You can specify that certain items should always be packed manually; for example, if the items are small and can fit into a box packed with other items. To exclude such items from automatic packaging, you should select **Manual** in the **Packaging option** field in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window (on the **Packaging** tab). Then when preparing a sales order with such items in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you will need to select the boxes to be used to ship these items on the **Shop for rates** dialog box, specify their gross weights and the declared values in the **Packages** table. Recalculation of these packages will not be performed automatically for this order and that these particular packages will be used for shipping (even if the order is a part of a consolidated shipment).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About freight calculation /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation page With Visma Net, you can manage freight to better control any additional costs and revenues on sales transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About freight calculation With Visma Net, you can manage freight to better control any additional costs and revenues on sales transactions. With Visma Net, you can manage freight to better control any additional costs and revenues on sales transactions. The freight amount you charge your customers may include not only the freight your company is charged by carriers, but also insurance, handling, and packaging fees defined by your shipping terms and premium freight. You can define for each sales order type whether freight will be calculated automatically by selecting the **Calculate freight** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. Your company may use shipping services provided by various carriers or provide its own shipping services. The freight amount you charge your customers is calculated as the sum of the following: + The freight amount, which is calculated by applying shipping terms to the freight cost + The premium freight amount (if any) The actual amounts of freight and handling may differ from the anticipated cost; the actual cost becomes known only after the shipment is completed or the shipments (if the order may be split into multiple shipments) are completed. ## Freight cost calculated for non-integrated carriers If the goods for a sales order are shipped under a ship via code associated with a non-integrated carrier, the system estimates the freight cost based on the rates defined by the ship via code. You specify rates for each ship via code based on a non-integrated carrier on the **Freight rates** tab of the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, refer to: [Create a ship via code](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/create-a-ship-via-code/). The number of decimal places for freight rates is defined by the value in the **Price/cost decimal places** field in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window. When a user enters a sales order to be shipped by a non-integrated carrier, the system estimates the freight cost for the order based on the ship via code, that is, the predefined rates you have specified for the carrier. The weight of each order is calculated automatically in the same weight UoM that is specified in the **Weight UoM** field in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. For details on setting up the order weight calculation, see: [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/). By default, the currency of the freight is the currency of the sales order; however, you can manually change the currency of the freight or exchange rate for a particular shipment on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Shipments - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Rates are specified for shipping zones based on total shipment weight and, optionally, volume. The weight of an order is compared to break points, and the first one that is less than the order weight gives the freight rate. The system calculates the freight cost depending on the calculation method you have selected in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window for the carrier, **Per unit** or **Net**, with calculations as shown below: + For the **Per unit** calculation method: `FreightCost = BaseRate + (FreightRate x Weight)` + For the **Net** calculation method: Here, FreightRate is equal to the rate defined for a specific range of shipment weight and volume, as specified on the **Freight rates** tab of the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. `FreightCost = BaseRate + FreightRate` For the ship via code of the carrier, if **Manual** is selected as the freight calculation method in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, then when preparing a sales order, you should specify the freight amount in the **Freight cost** field on the **Totals** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## Freight amount to be charged Once the freight cost to be charged for the sales order shipped under a specific ship via code is known or estimated (for the codes associated with non-integrated carriers), the system applies the shipping terms used for relations with the customer, as assigned in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, to calculate the full freight amount for the order to be paid by the customer. The freight amount may include insurance, handling fees, or line handling fees. The account to be used to record freight for sales orders of a specific type is defined by the option selected in the **Use freight account from** field in the [Shipping terms (CS208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000/) window. The default freight account is also specified in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window; this account is used when the **Use freight account from** option points to an unavailable account. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the freight subaccount to record freight is generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine freight sub. from** field in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. To encourage larger orders, you can configure the shipping terms so that the customers will not pay freight on orders with amounts greater than a specified value. In the [Shipping terms (CS208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000/) window, the level of charges is defined by a sequence of break points based on shipping amount. For ship via codes with **Manual** selected as the freight calculation method, the freight amount is equal to the freight cost entered manually on the **Totals** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The freight amount is calculated similarly for all ship via codes, as shown below. `FreightAmt = (FreightCost x FreightCost% / 100)` ## Premium freight amount to be charged to customers The premium freight amount is specified for a sales order as a flat amount on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The premium freight amount can be any additional handling flat fee that originates during the processing of the sales order due to the order's properties or circumstances, for example, extreme fragility or extreme dimensions, volume, or weight. If you need to correct the excessive freight charges that were specified in one of the earlier orders, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order by decreasing it by the adjustment amount or by entering a negative freight amount. Notice that the order's total amount, which results from adjusting the premium freight amount, must be greater than zero or, at least, equal to zero. Otherwise, the invoice that is later generated for the order cannot be released. ## Freight allocation on shipments A sales order can be fulfilled by multiple shipments if it is allowed for the order, and with multiple shipments, your company can define how the freight amount should be allocated among shipments: Use the **Freight allocation on partial shipping** field, located on the **General settings** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, and select one of the following options: Full amount first time : to assign the freight amount to the first shipment created for the order Allocate proportionally : to distribute the freight amount among shipments proportionally to partial shipment amounts Notice that on shipments shipped with ship via codes for which **Manual** is selected as the freight calculation method, you can edit the freight amounts. ## Recognising freight costs as freight expenses The freight cost determined for a sales order is not recorded to any expense account until an invoice from the carrier is processed. An invoice from the carrier may include freight charges for all the sales orders that were shipped by the carrier during a specific time interval (a week, two weeks, or a month). If the invoices are created for each ship via code used for shipping, the Freight expense account specified in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window can be manually selected on the appropriate lines of the invoice. ## VAT applicable to freight sales For each ship via code defined for the shipping options provided by your company (with the **Common carrier** check box cleared), in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, you can specify the VAT category that applies to freight as to additional service provided by your company. The list of VAT applicable to the freight will include the VAT that are present both in the VAT category and in the VAT zone of the branch that sold the goods. If the goods are shipped by a common carrier, the VAT category is applied only to the amount of freight in excess of freight cost, and the list of VAT applied to the specified amount is the VAT from both the VAT category and the VAT zone of the customer's delivery address (the specified VAT zone of the customer location or, if not specified, the VAT zone automatically determined by the delivery address's post code). ## Further freight adjustments However, the real cost of freight and handling becomes known only after all shipments are completed and actual shipping charges for all packages have been provided by the carrier. If you need to correct the excessive freight charges that were specified in one of the earlier orders, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order by decreasing it by the adjustment amount or by entering a negative freight amount. If you need to adjust the **Total freight amt.** in an invoice, you can specify the needed positive or negative **Premium freight amt.** in the shipment line on the **Freight details** tab. Notice that the order's total amount, which results from adjusting the premium freight amount, must be greater than zero or at least equal to zero; otherwise, the invoice that is generated later for the order cannot be released. Create a ship via code /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/create-a-ship-via-code section In Visma Net, you can create a ship via code for each delivery service your organisation uses and specify which boxes are used for this service and what the freight rates are. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a ship via code In Visma Net, you can create a ship via code for each delivery service your organisation uses and specify which boxes are used for this service and what the freight rates are. In Visma Net, you can create a ship via code for each delivery service your organisation uses and specify which boxes are used for this service and what the freight rates are. You can use this window to create ship via codes. Perform the following steps for each ship via code you need to define. 1. Go to the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. 1. Enter the ship via code (which is an alphanumerical string of up to 15 characters) clearly identifying the specific delivery service. 1. Enter a description of the code. 1. On the **Details** tab, select the calendar that provides information about this carrier's work hours. 1. Select the method to calculate the freight from the following options: + **Per unit**: To calculate the freight as the rate by weight. + **Net**: To use flat rate. + **Manual**: To specify the freight amount manually for each sales order in the **Freight cost** field on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. In the **Base rate** field, if **Net** is selected as the calculation method, type the value of the flat-rate charge to be added to the freight amount. If **Per unit** is selected as the calculation method, type the value of the per unit rate. 1. On the **Freight rates** tab, if **Net** is selected as the calculation method, specify the rate ranges as follows: 1. Click **Add row** on the table toolbar to add a new rate range. 1. In the **Rate** column, specify the rate. 1. In the **Weight** column, specify the minimum weight to which the rate may be applied. 1. In the **Volume** column, specify the minimum volume to which the rate may be applied. 1. In the **Zone ID** column, specify the shipping zone to which the goods with the specified weight and volume are shipped. 1. In the **VAT code** field, select the VAT category to be applied to the freight charges. 1. In the **Freight sales account** field, select an income account to record the freight sales. 1. In the **Freight sales sub.** field, select a subaccount to record the freight sales. 1. In the **Freight expense account** field, select an income account to record the freight expenses. 1. In the **Freight expense sub.** field, select a subaccount to record the freight expenses. 1. On the **Packages** tab, select each of the boxes to be used with this delivery service as follows: + Click **Add row** in the toolbar to add information about a box. + In the **Box ID** column, select a box that is used by the service method. + Click **Save** in the toolbar. The box information will appear in the appropriate columns. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure a stock item for automatic packaging /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-a-stock-item-for-automatic-packaging section To enable the system to determine optimal packages for any sales order or shipment, you must specify packaging settings for each stock item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a stock item for automatic packaging To enable the system to determine optimal packages for any sales order or shipment, you must specify packaging settings for each stock item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/). To enable the system to determine optimal packages for any sales order or shipment, you must specify packaging settings for each stock item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is not enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can use these settings for the calculation of weight and volume of each sales order and shipment, and users will be able to select the boxes for each order manually. ## Before you proceed 1. In the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, make sure that the base weight UoM is selected in the **Weight UoM** field and that the base volume UoM is selected in the **Volume UoM** field. 1. In the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window, make sure that the UoM to measure the weight of the item's base unit is defined and that a conversion factor to convert this UoM to the base weight UoM is specified. Also, make sure that the UoM to measure the volume of the item's base unit is defined and that the conversion factor to convert this UoM to the base volume UoM is specified. ## Configure a stock item for automatic packaging 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select a stock item. 1. In the **Weight** field on the **Packages** tab, type the weight of the base unit of the item. 1. In the **Weight UoM** field, select the UoM used to measure the weight. 1. In the **Volume** field, type the volume of the base unit of the item. 1. In the **Volume UoM** field, select the UoM used to measure the volume. 1. If this item should always be packed separately from other items, select the **Pack separately** check box. 1. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is not enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, proceed to Step 10. 1. In the **Packaging option** field, select one of the available options: + **Manual** If the item should always be packed manually. + **By weight** If the item should be packed by weight. In the **Boxes** table (which appears), create a list of boxes that can be used for this item. + **By quantity** If the item should always be packed by quantity. An item to be packed by quantity is always packed separately from other items. (When you select this option, the **Pack separately** check box is selected and unavailable for editing.) In the **Boxes** table (which appears when you select this option), create the list of boxes, and for each box, specify the maximum quantity of the base units of this item that this box can hold. + **By weight and volume** If the item can be packed by weight or volume jointly with other items from a sales order. In the **Boxes** table (which appears when you select this option), create the list of boxes that can be used for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Configure automatic packaging /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-automatic-packaging section To make sales order processing more effective, you can configure the system to automatically determine the optimal set of boxes for sales orders and for shipments to be sent via carriers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure automatic packaging To make sales order processing more effective, you can configure the system to automatically determine the optimal set of boxes for sales orders and for shipments to be sent via carriers. Configuration includes the following major steps. ## Before you proceed Make sure the **Automatic packaging** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## 1. Create the weight and volume UoMs Start by compiling a list of the units of measure used in your system to measure weights and volumes for different stock items that are usually shipped via carriers. Then make sure that all these UoMs are defined in the system in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. If any UoM is not listed among the predefined UoMs, define it. For details, see: [Define weight UoMs](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/define-weight-uoms/). ## 2. Specify the base UoMs to measure weights and volumes Decide on the base unit of measure (UoM) to be used for weight and the base unit of measure to be used for volume in your system. For more information, see: [About units of weight and volume](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-weight-and-volume/). After you have created the UoMS that you planned to use as the base UoMs for weights and volumes, you use the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window to select these UoMs as the base weight and volume UoMs as follows: 1. Go to the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. 1. In the **Weight UoM** field, specify the UoM to be used to measure the weights of the stock items. 1. In the **Volume UoM** field, specify the UoM to be used to measure the volumes of the stock items. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## 3. Specify the rule for converting the base UoM to the carrier UoM for weight Make sure that the conversion rules from the base weight UoM to the UoM (which is equal to the carrier unit of weight) are defined in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. ## 4. Define the boxes to be used for shipping To make it possible for the system to make packaging suggestions for sales orders, in the [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) window, list all the available boxes with their own weights (which may include the weight of all packaging materials) and their capacities for weight and volume. Linear dimensions for boxes are optional and for information purposes only. The values are not used in any calculation. For details, see: [Define a box](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/define-a-box/). ## 5. Create ship via codes and assign boxes For each delivery service used by your organization, create a ship via code by using the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, specify the freight calculation method and freight rates, and create a list of boxes on the **Packages** tab. The rates of different carriers or different delivery services for boxes of the same capacity may vary significantly, and some services may be available for only packages with specific weights, volumes, or dimensions. For more details, see: [Create a ship via code](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/create-a-ship-via-code/). ## 6. Configure stock items for automatic packaging For each stock item, on the **Packaging settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, specify the weight and volume of the base unit and the packaging option that defines how this stock item should be packed: + By quantity, separately from other items + By weight, separately from other items + By weight, not necessarily separately from other items + By weight and volume, generally with other items + Manually For detailed instructions, see: [Configure a stock item for automatic packaging](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-a-stock-item-for-automatic-packaging/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Define a box /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/define-a-box section To send shipments via different delivery services and carriers, you need to define the types of boxes used by each of the carriers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define a box To send shipments via different delivery services and carriers, you need to define the types of boxes used by each of the carriers. To send shipments via different delivery services and carriers, you need to define the types of boxes used by each of the carriers. 1. Go to the [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) on the table toolbar to add a new line to the table. 1. Type a unique ID for the box. 1. In the **Weight UoM** box, select the UoM to be used to measure the weight. 1. Specify the weight of the box in the selected UoM. 1. Specify the maximum weight the box can hold. 1. In the **Volume UoM** box, select the UoM to be used to measure the volume of the box. 1. Specify the capacity of the box in volume UoMs. 1. Specify the maximum volume that the box can hold. 1. Optional: specify the linear dimensions (such as width, height, or length) for information purposes only; the values are not used in any calculation. 1. Specify a description for this box. 1. Make sure the **Active by default** check box is selected for the box, if boxes of this type are used for shipping by most of the carriers and should appear by default on the list of boxes used for any ship via code in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process sales orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders section Customer purchase orders are entered into the system as sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process sales orders Customer purchase orders are entered into the system as sales orders. Customer purchase orders are entered into the system as sales orders. Sales order fulfillment workflow depends on the organisation's business and may involve reservation of stock for specific orders, transfers of the stock from wholesale warehouses, back ordering of the stock that is not available, purchasing specific items directly to sales orders, or drop shipments. These topics describe the general order processing options available in Visma Net and processing options for some of the predefined order types. Work with sales orders (new) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/work-with-sales-orders-new section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Work with sales orders (new) The new [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window is under construction. New functionality is added continuously, but already implemented functionality works as it should. To see which functionality is already implemented, what is in progress and still to come, click the **Road map** icon ![road map](/media/visma-net-erp/roadmap.png). If you are working with an order and are missing functionality, you can switch to the classic window and continue there. Click the **Open in classic window** button to open the same order number in the classic window. ## Differences between classic and new window Below an overview of existing functions that are in a different place in the new window compared to the classic window: |Functionality|Classic window|New window| |---|---|---| |**Create shipment**|**Actions**|Window footer| |**Currency**|Top part|**Financial settings** tab| |**Delete order**|Window toolbar|**Actions**| |**Notes**|Window toolbar|Top part| |Print order/quote|**Reports**|Window footer ( **Preview document** button)| |Quantities per order line|Table footer after selection of order line|Columns in table **Order lines** tab| |**Ship via**|**Delivery settings** tab|Top part| |Set order statuses|**Actions** / **Hold** check box in top part|Status selectable directly in status field| ## More guides + [Change the order status](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-the-order-status/) + [Create a sales order (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-new/) + [Create a shipment](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-shipment/) + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) + [Hide and rearrange columns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/hide-and-rearrange-columns/) + [Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/mark-line-for-purchasing-and-create-purchase-order/) + [Print, email or export an order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/print-email-or-export-an-order/) + [Update a column for all order lines](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines/) About shipping rules /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules page The shipping rules specified for a particular sales order define how the goods for the sales order should be shipped; whether they should be shipped only in full or partial shipments for the available quantities are allowed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About shipping rules The shipping rules specified for a particular sales order define how the goods for the sales order should be shipped; whether they should be shipped only in full or partial shipments for the available quantities are allowed. The shipping rules specified for a particular sales order define how the goods for the sales order should be shipped; whether they should be shipped only in full or partial shipments for the available quantities are allowed. The shipment rules for a sales order are applied when you create a shipment for the order manually by using the **Create shipment** action in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, or automatically, by running the **Create shipments** process from the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. ## Shipping rule options In the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can specify the shipping rule for the sales order document as a whole (the **Shipping rule** field on the **Delivery settings** tab) and for each order line (in the **Shipping rule** column on the **Document details** tab). The document-level rule is inserted by default for each line of the order, but you can change the rule for any line as needed. You can specify any of the following shipping rule options for order lines and for orders: + **Back orders allowed** + **Cancel remainder** + **Ship only when complete** The shipping rules applied to order lines are explained in the following table.
Shipping rule option Result
Back orders allowed

The item specified in the line can be included in a shipment if any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping. The remaining quantity (if applicable) is shown as the Open quantity on the line. The ordered quantity can be shipped in multiple shipments.

The line gets the Completed status once the full ordered quantity has been shipped.

Note

If you have classes of stock items for which negative quantity is allowed and if you do not want to rely completely on availability data, select the Add zero lines for items which are not in stock check box in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window. Then, for order lines with the Back orders allowed shipping rule, a zero-quantity line will be added to the shipment if the item is not in stock, and you will be able to manually enter the actually available quantity of the item.
Cancel remainder

The item specified in the line can be included in a shipment if any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping.

With this shipping rule, shipping for the line is performed only once. After this shipment has been confirmed, the line is marked as Completed, and the Open quantity value is set to zero.
Ship only when complete

The item specified in the line can be included in a shipment only if the full ordered quantity is available for shipping. After this shipment has been confirmed, the line has the Completed status in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.

If the quantity of the item that is available for shipping is less than the ordered quantity, then the item in this line is not included in the shipment. The ordered quantity is shown as the Open quantity, and the line remains Open.
See the table below for details about how the shipping rule of a sales order affects the automatic processing of the sales order (performed by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window). > [!NOTE] > If you initiate shipment creation manually (by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window) and the system detects the shortage of the items, the system displays the message informing you that the order cannot be shipped in full so that you can make an appropriate decision on the fulfillment of this order and either change the quantities, or create a partial shipment, or change the order status to **Back order** manually.
Document-level rule Result
Ship only when complete

If shipping cannot be performed for each line of the order, no shipment is created, and the order gets the Back order status.

The shipment is created (and the order gets the Shipping status) if shipping can be performed for each line; that is, if the lines meet the following criteria:

  • For each Ship only when complete line The ordered quantity is available for shipping and can be shipped in full.
  • For each Cancel remainder line Any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping.
  • For each Back orders allowed line Any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping.

You cannot specify different Requested on dates for different lines in the order.

When the shipment has been confirmed, the order gets the Completed status if all the lines have the Completed status. If any line is not completed, the order gets the Back order status.
Cancel remainder

If shipping cannot be performed for any of the order lines, no shipment is created, and the order gets the Back order status.

If full or partial shipping can be performed for at least one line (according to the line’s shipping rule), the shipment is created.

You cannot specify different Requested on dates for different lines in the order.

When the shipment has been confirmed, the order gets the Completed status if at least one line has the Completed status and the lines not included in shipment have the Cancel remainder rule. The order gets the Back order status if at least one line is not completed (that is, if it has non-zero open quantity).
Back orders allowed

If shipping cannot be performed for any of the order lines, no shipment is created, and the order gets the Back order status.

You can specify different Requested on dates for different lines in the order and get the different lines shipped on different dates.

Note

If you change the Requested on date for the order, the system will prompt you to choose whether you want to keep the dates specified for each line or to update the respective dates with the new Requested on date.

If full or partial shipping can be performed for at least one line according to the line’s shipping rule, the shipment is created.

After the shipment has been confirmed, the order gets the Back order status if other lines are not completed.
## Examples of the application of shipping rules The table below presents the examples that illustrate how the shipping rules specified for the sales order and its lines affect the fulfillment of the order. Assume this order has the following lines: + Line 1: **Product 1** with an ordered quantity of 150 + Line 2: **Product 2** with an ordered quantity of 100 Each row of the table shows a combination of shipping rules: + The first column displays the rule specified for the sales order as a whole. + The second column displays the rules specified for the lines of the sales orders. + The third column displays the quantity of each product that is available for shipping in the example in the row. + The fourth column displays, for the particular shipping rules and available quantities, the result of and conditions. + The table includes enough combinations to give you an idea how these settings work together without covering an overwhelming amount of detail. |Document-level rule|Shipping rules for order lines|Qty. available for shipping|Result| |---|---|---|---| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Ship only when complete|+ 300 + 2000|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1** and 100 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Ship only when complete|+ 300 + 99|No shipment is created, and the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel Remainder|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1**, and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Back orders allowed|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1**, and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Cancel remainder**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 300 + 0|A shipment is created that includes only one line (150 of **Product 1** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Cancel remainder**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 100 + 50|A shipment is created that includes only one line (50 of **Product 2**), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Cancel remainder**|+ Line 1: Cancel remainder + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 0 + 0|No shipment is created and the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Back orders allowed**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1** and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the sales order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Back orders allowed**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Back orders allowed|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1** and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Back orders allowed**|+ Line 1: Cancel remainder + Line 2: Back orders allowed|+ 100 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (100 of **Product 1** and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| ## Shipment thresholds You can use under-shipment and over-shipment thresholds, in addition to shipping rules, to determine whether a shipment results in changing the status of the sales order line to **Completed**. On the **Document details** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, for each line of a sales order, you can specify whether under-shipment and over-shipment are allowed as follows: + To allow over-shipment, you enter in the **Over-ship. threshold (%)** column a value greater than 100 (meaning 100%). For an order line with the **Ship only when complete** shipping rule for 100 yards of fabric, you might opt to have the whole lap shipped (a lap of fabric has 100 metres, and each metre is 1.093 yards). To do this, you can specify the over-shipment threshold at 110%, which allows up to 10% more fabric than the ordered amount to be shipped. + To allow under-shipment, you enter in the **Under-ship. threshold (%)** a value that is less than 100 (meaning 100%). Suppose that when you create a shipment, for an order line with the **Back orders allowed** shipping rule, the system detects a small shortage of goods, for example, only 99 units are available for shipping and 100 have been ordered. If the line's under-shipment threshold was specified at 99% or lower, the 99 units for the line will be included in the shipment, the line will be marked as **Completed**, and no open quantity will be left on the line for a back order. > [!NOTE] > If 100(%) is specified in both these columns, it means that under-shipment or over-shipment are not allowed. ## Default values for shipping rules You can set up default values to be used for shipping rules on sales orders and order lines. During the implementation process or at any time after, you can specify the shipping rule for each customer class in the **Default delivery settings** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer classes (AR201000/AR2010PL)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. Then when you create a new customer account for a customer of this class, the customer will get the default shipping rule value along with other default values from the customer class. For each customer, the shipping rule is specified on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. When you create a sales order and select the customer, the sales order automatically gets the default shipping rule you specified for the customer. If the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the customer locations generally get the default shipping rule values from the customer accounts. If needed, you can specify different default shipping rules for different locations of the customer. ## Default shipping rules for transfer orders Because transfer orders are created to account for transfers between warehouses, and warehouses are assigned to branches, the default shipping rules can be specified for branches on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About sales order processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options page In Visma Net, you can control the steps required to process your sales orders, from entry to shipping and invoicing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales order processing options In Visma Net, you can control the steps required to process your sales orders, from entry to shipping and invoicing. In Visma Net, you can control the steps required to process your sales orders, from entry to shipping and invoicing. In general, the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window is the starting point for entering and processing sales orders of the **SO** type. The specific procedures of this process depend on your organisation's requirements. ## Entering a sales order A sales order of the **SO** type is created to represent a customer request to buy goods in a specified quantity on a specified date. In a typical distribution organisation, the customer order may be taken over the phone or received by e-mail. Alternatively, if sales quotes are involved in your sales process, quotes can be used as templates for repeating orders for a particular customer. In this case, you can create sales orders by copying the quotes. To copy a quote to a sales order, you use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window: Once you have selected the quote, select **Copy order** in the **Actions** menu. You can select whether to recalculate discounts on sales orders copied from quotes. After you copy a quote to a sales order, the quote remains open until you cancel it. New orders of the **SO** type will be saved with the **On hold** status by default, if the **Hold orders on entry** check box is selected for this order type on the status depends in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. A reference numbers for new orders are generated according to the number series assigned to this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. A new sales order of the **SO** type is created by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For a sales order, you specify the following information: + The customer, its location, and its tax information (VAT zone and VAT registration ID) > [!NOTE] > To facilitate order processing and tracking, you can attach scanned images or electronic versions of original customer orders to sales orders. + The payment terms + The payment method, if it is different from the default one + The shipping rule for the order and for each order line + The shipping terms + The carrier to be used for shipping + The included stock and non-stock items with their quantities, units of measure, and unit prices For items that have lot or serial numbers tracked in Visma Net, you can specify these numbers, thus reserving these particular items for the sales order. For each line selected on the **Details** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can view the item availability information at the bottom of the window. If you notice that the ordered goods are not available, you can select the **Actions** - **Place on back order** action for the order. If the ordered items are out of stock at the shipping warehouse only, you can split order lines into multiple allocation schedules to fulfill the order by transfers from other warehouses. To ensure that your order will be fulfilled in a timely fashion, you can reserve the specified item quantities for the order (by marking them as allocated). For details on creating a sales order (of the SO type), see: [Create a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order/) and [Create a sales order (SO) with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-allocations/). ## Reordering lines in sales orders You may need to reorder a sales order's lines, for example, if you need the lines of the printed document to be in a specific order, or if the customer wants you to sort the document lines in some custom order. Also, you may need to reorder a line or multiple lines in the existing sales order, or add a new line at the beginning of a list or in the middle of the list. You can reorder the lines of a sales order until it has been completed. The order number of each sales order line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for each document line. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combinations, such as the following: + A single sales order line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example, lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of sales order lines (for example, line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold the **Shift** key down while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down** arrow until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of sales order lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped, and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move sales order lines between pages, cut the selected sales order lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** number for each document line. These numbers are used for numbering lines in the printable reports, such as printable sales order shown in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. You can cancel the line reordering by clicking **Cancel** in the window toolbar before you save these changes. > [!NOTE] > You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. ## Inserting lines into sales orders You can insert a single line to any place in the document. To do this, click the line above which the new line should be inserted and then press **Shift+Insert**, or right-click the needed line and then click **Insert row**. The system adds a new blank line. When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table. ## Changing the customer number in sales orders You may start to create a sales order by copying and pasting another sales order, which you use as a template. In such a case, you need to change the customer number specified for the sales order to another one. You can change the customer number in the **Customer** field of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window for a sales order that has one of the following statuses: + **On hold** + **Open** (if the order is new) + **Credit hold** (if the order is new) + **Back order** (if the new order has been placed on back order manually) When you change the customer number in the sales order, the system preserves the following information: + Order type, order number, and description + Currency ID, currency rate type, and currency rate + Document date and date when the customer wants to receive the goods + Order-level shipping rule, and shipping rules in the order lines + Item IDs and warehouses specified in the order lines + Hard allocations of inventory + Notes, activities, and attachments When you change the customer number in the sales order, the system updates the following document settings by using the settings of the newly selected customer: + Credit verification status + Salesperson commissions + Customer-specific settings on the **Document details**, **Financial settings**, **Payment settings**, and **Delivery settings** tabs + VAT and freight VAT category + Group and document discounts + Unit prices, except manual unit prices for which the **Manual price** check box is selected in the document line + Line discounts, except manual line discounts for which the **Manual discount** check box is selected in the document line The system does not automatically save the document after you change the customer number, so you can easily cancel these changes. There are some restrictions on changing the customer in a sales order. You cannot save the customer change in a sales order in any of the following cases: + The sales order has the **Open** status and is subject for approval. + The sales order has a linked shipment, invoice, IN issue, or drop-ship purchase order. + Credit card payments have been authorised or captured for the sales order. + Customer ledger payments or prepayments have been applied to the sales order. + The currency of the newly selected customer differs from the currency that was previously specified in the sales order, and the system cannot override the currency in the sales order. (This could happen if the currency override is not allowed for the newly selected customer.) > [!NOTE] > You can also change the customer number in a return orders that does not have lines linked to invoices and in a sales quote that is not linked to a sales order. To avoid situations when the system does not allow you to override the customer, we recommend that you create order templates by currency and by each unique set of shipping rules, to make sure that shipments are processed as expected. ## Specifying the shipping rules The way the order will be fulfilled depends on the shipping rules specified for the order and for each line of the order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The shipping rule specified for a line on the **Details** tab defines whether the stock item should be shipped only with the full ordered quantity or it can be shipped partially in one shipment or multiple shipments. For detailed information, see: [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). The sales order has a default shipping rule if a rule has been specified for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window or for the customer location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window (if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window). If there is a default shipping rule for the customer or customer location, the system inserts the default rule for the order for each line of the order; however, you can override the shipping rule for any line and for the order if needed. ## Holding orders on a failed credit check By default, a credit check is performed for orders of the **SO** type, and the system displays a warning if the customer fails the credit check. However, if you want to instead hold sales orders on a failed credit check, you can select the **Credit check on entry** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window for the **SO** type. If the customer fails the credit check, the order gets the **Credit hold** status. Orders placed on credit hold can be released from credit hold if customer payments were entered or order amounts were appropriately decreased. To release these orders from credit hold, you can perform the **Release from credit hold** action in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. This initiates credit checks for each selected order, and gives the order the **Open** status if the credit check is successful.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About invoice order processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-invoice-order-processing-options section An invoice order, which has the IN order type selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, is a special type of sales order that you create when goods requested by a customer have been shipped or delivered already. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice order processing options An invoice order, which has the IN order type selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, is a special type of sales order that you create when goods requested by a customer have been shipped or delivered already. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). An invoice order, which has the **IN** order type selected in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, is a special type of sales order that you create when goods requested by a customer have been shipped or delivered already. The processing of orders of this type does not involve shipments. ## Invoice order creation New orders of the **IN** type will be saved with the **On hold** status by default if the **Hold orders on entry** check box is selected for this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. The reference numbers for new orders are generated according to the number series assigned to this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. An invoice order is created by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For an invoice order, you specify the following information: + The order type **IN** + The customer, its location, and its VAT information (VAT zone and VAT registration ID) + A list of included stock and non-stock items with their quantities, units of measure, and unit prices + The credit terms + The payment method, if it is different from the default one For items that have lot or serial numbers tracked in Visma Net, you can specify these numbers, thus indicating that these particular items have been delivered to the customer. You should clear the **On hold** check box for the order to process its further. ## Approval of invoice orders If approval is required, when an invoice order is taken off hold, the system assigns an invoice order the **Pending approval** status and selects an approver for the order, in accordance with the approval map used for invoice orders. If the approver approves the order, the order gets the **Open** status. If the approver rejects the order, the order gets the **Rejected** status. If the order is then edited, the system changes the status to **Pending approval**. ## General workflow The processing of invoice orders involves using the following actions and generating the following documents. ![Images-SO_IN_Order_Flows](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_IN_Order_Flows.png) You can prepare a sales invoice for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the window toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, or you can create sales invoices by executing the **Prepare invoice** action for the multiple selected invoice sales orders in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. Inventory issues will be released automatically on release of invoices if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About cash sales processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-cash-sales-processing-options section You create an order with the CS order type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window when you sell items directly to the customer (with no shipping) and receive payment at that time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash sales processing options You create an order with the CS order type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window when you sell items directly to the customer (with no shipping) and receive payment at that time. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). The processing of orders of this type does not involve shipments. ## Cash sales order creation New orders of the **CS** type will be saved with the **On hold** status by default if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected for this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. The reference numbers for new orders are generated according to the number series assigned to this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. An cash sale order is created by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For a cash sales order, you specify the following information: + The customer, its location, and its VAT information (VAT zone and VAT registration ID) + The included stock and non-stock items with their quantities, units of measure, and unit prices + The payment information, which includes the payment method (card information if payment is performed with a credit card), cash account, and payment reference number You cannot save a cash sales order before you specify the payment reference number. For items that have lot or serial numbers tracked in Visma Net, you can specify these numbers, thus indicating that these particular items have been delivered to the customer. You should clear the **On hold** check box for the order to process its further. ## General workflow The processing of cash sales orders (which may include stock items and non-stock items) involves using the following actions and generating the following documents. ![Images-SO_CS_Order_Flow](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_CS_Order_Flow.png) You can prepare a cash sales document in the Customer ledger workspace for a particular cash sales order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, or you can create the customer ledger cash sales documents by executing the **Prepare invoice** action for multiple selected cash sales orders in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. If the cash sales order includes only non-stock items, no inventory issue will be generated on release of customer ledger cash sales document. Inventory issues (if any) will be released automatically on release of customer ledger cash sales documents if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. A cash sales order gets the **Completed** status after both the customer ledger cash sales and inventory issue are released.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About suggested sales accounts /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-sales-accounts page In Visma Net, the automatically suggested sales account on a sales or customer invoice line and a sales order line can be retrieved from different fields and windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About suggested sales accounts In Visma Net, the automatically suggested sales account on a sales or customer invoice line and a sales order line can be retrieved from different fields and windows. This topic gives an overview of how a suggested sales account is set. ## Sales account on sales order The sales account suggested on the order line in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window is determined by the selected option for the **Use sales account from** field in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window, according to the following table.
Use sales account from Sales account
Reason code According to the sales account set in the Reason codes (CS211000) window for the reason code set on the sales order line.
Posting class

According to the option selected for Use sales account from in the Posting classes (IN206000) window. This can be:

  • Item
  • Warehouse
  • Posting class

See below.

Item,

Warehouse, or

Customer location

 See below.
### Use sales account from Item, Warehouse, Customer location, and Posting class The table below gives an overview of how the sales account is set on the sales order line for **Item**, **Warehouse**, **Customer location** and **Posting class** (assuming **Posting class** is selected for **Use sales account from** in both the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) and [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window). The information applies when the line item has an item ID. #### Export type and General ledger account tab Note that the **Export type** value is first retrieved from the customer location, and if not set, from the customer class. If it is not set in the customer class either, the **Export type** is not set.
When Export type is Field in General ledger accounts tab
Domestic or not set, and line is taxable Sales account

Domestic or not set, and line is non-taxable,

or

Domestic exempt VAT

 Sales - non-taxable account
EU Sales - EU account
Export Sales - export account
The window from which the **General ledger accounts** tab is read, corresponds to the **Use sales account from** option in the following way:
Use sales account from Window
Item

Stock items (IN202500), or

Non-stock items (IN202000)
Warehouse Warehouses (IN204000)
Customer location Customer locations (CR303010)
Posting class Posting classes (IN206000)
#### Exceptions no item ID The above information applies for a sales order line with no item ID, except when the sales account is to be retrieved from the item or posting class of the item. In these cases, the sales account is retrieved according to the **Customer location** option. ## Sales account on customer invoices, sales invoices and cash sales The sales account suggested on lines with an item ID in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) , [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) , and [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) windows is determined by the selected option for the **Use sales account from** field in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. This can be: + **Item** + **Posting class** ### Export type and General ledger account tab The table below gives an overview of how the sales account is set on the line for these options. Note that the **Export type** value is first retrieved from the customer location, and if not set, from the customer class. If it is not set in the customer class either, the **Export type** is not set.
When Export type is Field in General ledger accounts tab
Domestic or not set, and line is taxable Sales account

Domestic or not set, and line is non-taxable,

or

Domestic exempt VAT

 Sales - non-taxable account
EU Sales - EU account
Export Sales - export account
The window from which the **General ledger accounts** tab is read, corresponds to the **Use sales account from** option in the following way:
Use sales account from Window

Item, or

Warehouse

Stock items (IN202500), or

Non-stock items (IN202000)
Posting class Posting classes (IN206000)
#### Exceptions no item ID For a line with no item ID, the sales account is retrieved according to the **Export type** table above and from the **General ledger accounts** tab in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. #### Invoice created from sales order If the sales invoice, customer invoice or cash sale is created from the sales order, the sales accounts on the lines are the same as in the sales order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About suggested VAT categories /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories page In Visma Net, the automatically suggested VAT category on lines in sales and customer invoices, sales orders, and cash sales, can be retrieved from different fields and windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About suggested VAT categories In Visma Net, the automatically suggested VAT category on lines in sales and customer invoices, sales orders, and cash sales, can be retrieved from different fields and windows. This topic gives an overview of how a suggested VAT category is set. The following table explains how the suggested VAT category on a sales order, sales invoice, customer invoice, and cash sale line is set.
IF you add a line THEN the suggested VAT category is
with an item ID

the VAT category of the item class belonging to the item, corresponding to:

  1. the customer location’s Export type, or if not set,
  2. the customer’s class’s Export type.

See the table below.
without an item ID the Default VAT category of the VAT zone set for the customer location.
## Export types and corresponding VAT categories Each **Export type** option for a customer location corresponds to one **VAT category** field in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, according to the following table: |Export type|VAT category| |---|---| |**Domestic**|**Sales VAT category**| |**Domestic exempt VAT**|**Exempt VAT sales VAT category**| |**EU**|**Sales EU VAT category**| |**Export**|**Export VAT category**| ## Export type not set When you add a line with an item ID and the **Export type** is not set for the customer location and customer class, the suggested VAT category is retrieved from: 1. the **Sales VAT category** field in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window for the item class belonging to the item, or if this is not set, 1. the **VAT category** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) or [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for the item ID. **Note**: in this case, make sure your **VAT report** is correct. ## Corresponding VAT category not set When the VAT category corresponding to the export type is not set, the item's standard VAT category ( **VAT category** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) or [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window) is suggested. ## Item's VAT category Note that if the VAT category is to be retrieved from the item, and the VAT category there does not have the **Sales** or **Both** VAT type in the [VAT categories (TX205500)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-categories-tx205500/) window, there will be an error on the line. |IF you add a line|THEN the suggested VAT category is| |---|---| |with an item ID|the item's **VAT category** in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) or [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window| |without an item ID|the **Default VAT category** of the VAT zone set for the customer location.| ## Invoice created from sales order If a sales invoice, customer invoice or cash sale is created from the sales order, the VAT categories on the lines are the same as in the sales order.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About sales orders with allocations /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations section In Visma Net, you can reserve stock when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer can’t be shipped to another customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales orders with allocations In Visma Net, you can reserve stock when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer can’t be shipped to another customer. In Visma Net, you can reserve stock when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer can’t be shipped to another customer. In cases when items are stocked at multiple warehouses, this helps your company avoid overstocks and stock outs because the system gives you the ability to reserve items at any warehouse and automates generating of transfers. This article describes the allocation options available for orders of the **SO** and**SA** predefined types. For descriptions of the order types, see: [About predefined types of sales orders.](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/) > [!NOTE] > Notice that in your system, the predefined order types can be modified. ## Quantities booked and allocated Fulfillment of sales orders is most effective if the system displays correct information about the quantities of items that are on hand and available for shipping. For orders of different types, the system reflects the quantities of items on the orders differently. (For more information, see: [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/).) The quantities of the items listed on sales orders of the **SO** type (regular sales orders) are generally shown in the system as the **SO prepared** quantities for orders with the **On hold**, **Credit hold**, **Pending approval**,and **Rejected** statues and as the **SO booked** quantities for orders with the **Open** status. You can view the availability information in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. The **SO booked**quantities are those shown on sales orders but not associated with particular orders. Booking imposes no actual restrictions on items. The booked quantities are shown for informational purposes only; these quantities of the items can be picked for any other orders and shipped. For sales orders of the **SA** type (sales orders), once a user saves a new sales order even with the **On hold** status, the system performs virtual **allocation** of the items for this order. That is, it actually reserves the requested quantities of the items. The quantities of the items that have been allocated for the order are added to**SO allocated** quantities and deducted from **Available for shipping** quantities (both of which are reflected in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window); thus, these quantities cannot be shipped for another order. If the ordered quantity is available only partially and cannot be fully allocated at the specified locations, the quantity that has been allocated for the order will be added to the **SO allocated** quantity, while the remaining (unallocated) quantity will be added to the **SO back ordered** quantity. Once you allocate this quantity in other warehouses, the quantity is moved to **SO allocated**. > [!NOTE] > Non-stock items are considered as always available and cannot be allocated. The sections below describe in greater detail how the stock allocations are performed and how the quantities of the allocated items are reflected in the system. ## Allocation schedules for SA orders When you save an order of the **SA** type in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the system automatically attempts to reserve the requested quantities of all line items in the specified warehouse. If you select any line of the order, you can then click**Allocations** in the toolbar of the **Document**details tab, and view whether the entire ordered quantity of the line item has been successfully reserved (allocated). For any of the line items, if the quantity in the specified warehouse is less than the requested quantity, the system reserves the available quantity for the order line and adds an additional allocation line for the remaining quantity. You can manually allocate the remaining quantity (or a part of it) in another warehouse or multiple warehouses. If you attempt to create a shipment before you allocate the entire quantities and if partial shipment is allowed by the specified line-level and order-level shipping rules, the system will be able to include only the allocated quantities into the shipment even if the ordered quantities are available for shipping at another location or locations but were not allocated for the order. > [!NOTE] > The **Allocations** button in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window is available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in your system: **Sales order to purchase order link**, **Multiple warehouse locations**, or **Lot and serial tracking**. To reserve the remaining quantity, you can choose one of the following scenarios: + You can specify another warehouse or multiple warehouses from which you can transfer the remaining quantity of the item. Select the **Allocated** check box for each additional line, specify the warehouse, and save the order. You can generate transfer orders for this sales order in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window, and record the receipt of the transferred quantities on a purchase receipt by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. After all the quantities of all line items are transferred to a single warehouse, you can create a shipment for the order. See the flowchart for this scenario below: ![Images-SAOrder_Flows](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SAOrder_Flows.png) For details on processing transfer orders, see: [About processing transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-processing-transfer-orders/). + You can purchase the remaining quantity if the item is out of stock at other warehouses too. Whether or not you can create partial shipments depends on the shipping rules specified for the orders lines and for the whole order. [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). You can specify that the remaining quantity should be purchased for the order by selecting the **Mark for** purchase order check box for the line on the **Details** tab. Once you take the sales order off hold, the order appears in the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window and you can generate a purchase order which will be linked to the original sales order. The quantity initially allocated for the order, remains allocated while the quantity that must be purchased remains unallocated. Once receipts for the remaining quantities are released, you can allocate the initially unallocated quantities manually by using the **Allocations dialog box** in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Even if the **Replan back-orders** check box is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, releasing inventory receipts does not update automatically plan types for sales orders with allocations (on release of receipts, the unallocated quantities still are shown as **Back ordered** until you manually allocate them). For more information, see: ## Allocation schedules for sales orders If you have a sales order of the **SO** type, you may choose to allocate (reserve) the requested quantity for a specific item or multiple items if this is required by your company policies or was requested by the customer. If you perform allocation for any item on a sales order with the **On hold**, **Credit hold**, **Pending approval**, **Rejected**,or **Open** status, the item quantity will be added to the **SO**allocated quantity shown for the item in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. Also, you may want to reserve the line item if the item is available but the quantity required for the order line is distributed between different warehouses and one or more transfers are required. > [!NOTE] > Transfer orders will be automatically generated only for the allocation schedules with the **Allocated** check box selected. ## Use of the allocations dialog box To allocate stock for a particular **SO** order, you use the**Allocations** dialog box, which opens once you click**Allocations** in the table toolbar of the **Document**details tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The**Allocations** dialog box can be invoked for each line of a sales order of the **SO** or **SA** type. By using this dialog box, for sales orders of the **SO** type, you can select whether to reserve the requested quantities in a single warehouse or multiple warehouses. For orders of the **SA** type, you can process the additional allocation lines generated by the system if the requested quantity cannot be shipped from the warehouse specified in the order. If the order line is marked for purchasing, the system automatically selects the **Mark for purchase order** check box for the line with the unallocated quantity in the **Allocations dialog box**. Also, you can use the **Allocations dialog box** to track the order fulfillment. For each allocation line, the **Related document** column contains the reference number of the document related to the current stage of the order fulfillment. > [!NOTE] > To view all the related documents, make sure the **Active** filter is not applied to the list of allocations. ## Availability calculation for orders with and without allocations The way the order quantity is reflected in the system depends on the settings selected for the item class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. Generally, as the status of a sales order of the **SO** type changes, the order quantity updates the following total quantities: + The **SO prepared** quantity If the item's quantity is listed on an order with the **On Hold**, **Credit hold**, **Rejected**, or **Pending approval** status. + The **SO booked** quantity Once the order has been open with no quantities allocated. + The **SO allocated** quantity Once the shipment is created, the quantity that is included in the shipment. + The **On hand** quantity After the shipment has been confirmed and an invoice and inventory issue have been generated. The line item quantity on a sales order of the **SA** type updates the following quantities: + The **SO allocated** quantity Once a sales order of the **SA** type is created. + The **Back ordered** quantity The unallocated quantity that remains on the order. + The **SO allocated** quantity Once the received quantity (initially unallocated) is also allocated for the order. When a shipment is created, the quantity remains **SO allocated**. + The **On hand** quantity After the shipment has been confirmed and an invoice and an inventory issue have been generated.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About links between sales orders and purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-links-between-sales-orders-and-purchase-orders page If your company sells items that are purchased only when sales orders for these items exist, each sales order may result in multiple purchase orders for different suppliers, and each purchase order may include items from multiple sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About links between sales orders and purchase orders If your company sells items that are purchased only when sales orders for these items exist, each sales order may result in multiple purchase orders for different suppliers, and each purchase order may include items from multiple sales orders. If your company sells items that are purchased only when sales orders for these items exist, each sales order may result in multiple purchase orders for different suppliers, and each purchase order may include items from multiple sales orders. These factors make it difficult to track the fulfillment of sales orders. In Visma Net, if the **Sales order to purchase order link** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can easily link sales orders to existing purchase orders and receipts, to enable the tracking of sales order fulfillment. The system uses these links to allocate the items listed on purchase receipts for specific sales orders and to automate the creation of transfer orders, if needed. This functionality can be very helpful if you have multiple warehouses and perform purchasing only to particular larger warehouses (distribution centres). The system will generate the required transfers between warehouses, and you can easily track where the particular sales order is in the fulfillment process. This topic describes the general ways of specifying links between sales orders and purchase orders, and between purchase receipts and sales orders. ## Linking sales orders to purchase orders If you need to promptly fulfill a sales order line for which the quantity of the item is insufficient, or if the sales order includes an item that is purchased only for specific sales orders, you can mark the applicable lines for purchasing; that is, select the check box in the **Mark for purchase order** column. Also, after you have shipped the available quantity of an item, you may need to order the remaining quantity that was unavailable at the time of shipping; in this case, you also can select the **Mark for purchase order** check box for the line. You can include a sales order line that requires purchasing in a purchase order in one of the following ways: + By using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window: Select the sales order line, and then click **Create purchase order** in the **Actions** menu in the toolbar. + By using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window: Select multiple lines of different sales orders to create multiple purchase orders for these sales orders. The system consolidates the item quantities and group the items by supplier as needed. You also can link the line of a sales order that has the **Mark for purchase order** check box selected to an existing purchase order that has not been released yet. For example: If you have created a new order that lists the same items as the existing purchase order, you can link this sales order to the existing purchase order as follows: Open the sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, click **Purchase order link** in the table toolbar, and select the existing purchase order in the list. > [!NOTE] > If the purchase order has a quantity that exactly matches the total quantity on the sales orders that are already linked, you should first increase the quantity on the purchase order, and then link the sales order to this purchase order. ## Linking purchase receipts to sales orders Purchase orders are generated and emailed to suppliers. The items ordered in a sales order may be received to warehouses other than the warehouse specified on the sales order. If the users properly specify links between the purchase receipts and purchase orders, Visma Net enables tracking of sales order fulfillment, reserves the received items for sales orders, and automates transfers of the items, if needed. To make it possible to track items from receipts to original sales orders, you need to link each receipt to the corresponding purchase order in one of the following ways: + Open the purchase order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, and create a receipt for it by selecting **Enter purchase order receipt** from the **Actions** menu on the toolbar. + Create a receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, and link all the related purchase orders to this new receipt by clicking **Add purchase order** or **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar. To view the original sales orders linked to the purchase receipt, for each receipt line, click **View demand** in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. A dialog box opens that displays the list of sales orders that are linked to the purchase orders on which this receipt is based. After a receipt is properly linked to all the related purchase orders, you will be able to track the stage of fulfillment for each line of the original sales order by clicking **Allocations** in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. In the **Allocations** dialog box that opens, you can view an allocation that the system automatically performs to reserve the line item quantity required for the sale order on the purchase receipt. In the **Allocations** dialog box, you can also view the reference numbers of the related documents in the **Related documents** column: the purchase order and the receipt. (You can click any reference number of a related document to view the document.) On release of the receipt, the quantities of items required for the sales orders are deducted from the item quantities available for shipping. If items are received to a warehouse other than the warehouse specified on the sales order, the system will generate a transfer request, which you can use to create a transfer order by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window for a single transfer order, or in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window for multiple transfer orders. For details, see: [Create a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order/) and [Process multiple transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-multiple-transfer-orders/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **SO** as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the sales order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the **Project** field, and select a particular project if this order is associated with the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Provide a brief description for this sales order. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab, check the ship-to information. 1. Notice in the **Sched. shipment** field the date when the shipment of this order is scheduled; by default, it is the **Requested on** date minus the lead days for this customer. Change the date if needed. 1. In the **Shipping rule** field, notice the default shipping rule used for this customer. Select another rule if needed. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar and start typing in the **Item ID** field. You can also search for an item by clicking ![search](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), the **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the **Sales after** check box if the item has been sold recently. The **Sales after** field appears with the date that is three months earlier than the current business date; select another date if needed. The list of items is populated with the items that have been sold in this period. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, notice whether the **Show available items only** check box is selected. With this check box selected, you may not see some of the items. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID, description, or alternative item ID, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list to items located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the line with the information about the item you want to add, and in the **Qty. selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data (which appears in the columns to the right) for the selected warehouse and make sure that the specified quantity is available in the selected warehouse. 1. Click the **Add and close** button at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Review the shipping rule for the line. Select another rule if it is needed for this item. 1. Review the date in the **Requested on** column. By default, it is the **Requested on** date specified for the order. Change the date if it is needed for this item and if it complies with the line shipping rule. 1. Review the date in the **Ship on** column. By default, it is the **Sched. shipment** date. Change the date if it is needed for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The line numbers are assigned automatically and cannot be changed. 1. If the **Lot or serial tracking** functionality is enabled in your system, and you want to specify particular lot or serial numbers for the items listed on the order, execute the following steps on the **Document details** tab: 1. Select a line with the item requiring lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** in the toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select one of lot or serial numbers available in the allocation warehouse. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 in case of the serialised item or to the lot quantity in case of a lot and the **Allocated** check box becomes selected. A new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another serial or lot number. Repeat this step until the remaining quantity is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a sales order with allocations /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-allocations section If some of the specific items require reservation (allocation) for the order, you can reserve them as described in the following instructions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order with allocations If some of the specific items require reservation (allocation) for the order, you can reserve them as described in the following instructions. If some of the specific items require reservation (allocation) for the order, you can reserve them as described in the following instructions. For more information on processing options for sales orders of the **SO** type, see: [About sales orders with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations/). > [!NOTE] > The functionality of stock allocation (reservation) is available only if any of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: **Multiple warehouses**, **Sales order to purchase order link**, or **Lot and serial tracking**. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **SO** as the order type. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it in the window if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. If this order is associated with a particular project, in the **Project** field (where the non-project code appears by default), select the project. 1. Change the date of the sales order, which by default is the current date, if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number of the original customer document the sales order is based on. 1. Enter a brief description for this sales order. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab, check the ship-to information. 1. Notice in the **Sched. shipment** field the date when the shipment of this order is scheduled; by default, it is the **Requested on** date minus the lead days for this customer. Change the date if needed. 1. In the **Shipping rule** field, notice the default shipping rule used for this customer. Select another rule if needed. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar and start typing in the **Item ID** field. You can also search for an item by clicking ![search](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), the **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the **Item lookup** dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the **Sales after** check box if the item has been sold recently. The **Sales after** field appears with the date that is three months earlier than the current business date; select another date if needed. The list of items is populated with the items that have been sold in this period. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, notice whether the **Show available items only** check box is selected. With this check box selected, you may not see some of the items. 1. Optional: To narrow the resulting list to items located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list, select the line with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty. selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data for the selected warehouse, which appears in the columns to the right. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Review the shipping rule for the line. Select another rule if it is needed for this item. 1. Review the date in the **Requested on** column. By default, it is the **Requested on** date specified for the order. Change the date if it is needed for this item and if it complies with the line' shipping rule. 1. Review the date in the **Ship on** column. By default, it is the **Sched. shipment** date. Change the date if it is needed for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The line numbers are assigned automatically and cannot be changed. 1. If you need to reserve the quantities of specific items in the source warehouses for this sales order, perform the following steps for each item whose quantities should be reserved: 1. On the **Document details** tab, select the order line for the item. 1. Click the **Allocations** button in the toolbar. 1. In the **Allocations** dialog box, select the **Allocated** check box for the line. > [!NOTE] > If the full quantity is not available in the source warehouse, the system adjusts the quantity in the line (replaces it with the available quantity) and adds one more line for the remaining quantity. 1. For the additional line, select the check box in the **Allocated** column. Select the source warehouse from a list of warehouses, and review the quantity to be transferred from this warehouse; notice the item quantity available in this warehouse in the **Qty. on hand** column. The system may add one more line if the available quantity in the warehouse is less than the remaining quantity; if it does, either adjust the requested quantity or continue reserving item quantities in other warehouses. Click **OK** to save the allocation and close the dialog box. 1. If the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in your system, and you want to specify particular lot or serial numbers for the items listed on the order, select a line with the item requiring lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** on the toolbar. If you haven't performed any allocation for this item, select the only line in the **Allocations** dialog box. If you already have performed allocations for this item, execute the steps below for each of the allocation lines. 1. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select one of lot or serial numbers available in the allocation warehouse. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 in case the item has serial numbers or to the lot quantity in case the item has lot numbers, and as a new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another serial or lot number. Repeat this step until the remaining quantity is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. In the top part of the window, clear the **Hold** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If your order requires any transfers, you will need to create and process transfer orders.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a sales order with reserved allocations /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-reserved-allocations section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order with reserved allocations > [!NOTE] > The functionality of stock allocation (reservation) is available only if any of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: **Multiple warehouses**, **Sales order to purchase order link**, or **Lot and serial tracking**. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **SA** as the order type. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it on the form if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. If this order is associated with a particular project, in the **Project** field (where the non-project code appears by default), select the project. 1. Change the date of the sales order, which by default is the current date, if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number of the original customer document the sales order is based on. 1. Enter a brief description for this sales order. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab, check the ship-to information. 1. Notice in the **Sched. shipment** field the date when the shipment of this order is scheduled; by default, it is the **Requested on** date minus the lead days for this customer. Change the date if needed. 1. In the **Shipping rule** field, notice the default shipping rule used for this customer. Select another rule if needed. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar and start typing in the **Item ID** field. You can also search for an item by clicking ![search](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), the **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the **Sales after** check box if the item has been sold recently. The **Sales after** box appears with the date that is three months earlier than the current business date; select another date if needed. The list of items is populated with the items that have been sold in this period. 1. Optional: In the **Item lookup** dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID, or description, or alternative item ID, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. Optional: To narrow the resulting list to items located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list, select the line with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty. selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data for the selected warehouse, which appears in the columns to the right. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Review the shipping rule for the line. Select another rule if it is needed for this item. 1. Review the date in the **Requested on** column. By default, it is the **Requested on** date specified for the order. Change the date if it is needed for this item and if it complies with the line' shipping rule. 1. Review the date in the **Ship on** column. By default, it is the **Sched. shipment** date. Change the date if it is needed for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The line numbers are assigned automatically and cannot be changed. 1. To view how the quantities of the items for the order are allocated, complete the allocations, and view whether transfers will be needed, perform the following steps for each item: 1. On the **Document details** tab, select the order line for the item. 1. Click the **Allocations** button in the toolbar. This brings up the **Allocations** dialog box. 1. If there is only one line shown for the item in the dialog box, it has the **Allocated** check box selected, which means that the full quantity is reserved in a single warehouse; click **OK** to exit the dialog box and proceed to Step 13. > [!NOTE] > If there are more lines, that means that the available quantity at the specified warehouse is less the ordered quantity and you have to reserve the remaining quantity in another warehouse or in multiple warehouses. 1. In the additional line, select the **Allocated** check box. This enables the **Alloc. warehouse** column; click to bring up the **Select** dialog box. 1. In the **Select** dialog box, select the warehouse from a list of warehouses, and specify the quantity to be reserved in this warehouse. Notice the item quantity available in this warehouse in the **Qty. on hand** column. If the order line's full quantity has been allocated, click **OK** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. If still there is some quantity to allocate, repeat the two previous sub steps and click **OK** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. In the top part of the window, clear the **Hold** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If the reserved quantity is split between multiple warehouses, appropriate allocations will be visible in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window and you can generate transfer orders for the selected allocations or for all of them.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a sales order (new) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-new section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order (new) > [!NOTE] > **This topic gives you information about how to create a sales order in the new [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. This task file is based on a window under construction, and new functionality will be added continuously.** > [!NOTE] > If you cannot find the functionality you need, you can click on the **Open in classic window** button to continue modifying the sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. The **SO** order type i selected by default. You can change it to one of the other supported order types. > [!NOTE] > currently, this window only supports order types **SO**, **CS**, **IN** and **QT**, and order types based on these order templates. 1. In the top part: 1. Select the customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Optional: in the **Customer order** field, you can enter the reference number of the original customer document that the sales order is based on. 1. Optional: in the **External reference** field, you can enter an external reference number for the sales order. 1. Check the **Ship via** code for the customer, and change it if needed. 1. Does the **Ship via** code have the **Manual** freight calculation method? + If yes, specify the **Freight cost** in the **Totals** tab. + If no, continue to step **i**. 1. Optional: provide a brief description for this sales order in the **Description** field. 1. Optional: you can add key information about the document in the **Notes** field. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the **Project** field, and select a particular project if this order is associated with the project. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab: 1. Check the delivery contact and address and change the fields if needed. 1. Check the delivery information and change the fields if needed. > [!NOTE] > if the **Scheduled shipment** field is automatically set to a date earlier than the current business date, it will be updated automatically to today's business date after you save the order. 1. On the **Order lines** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Start typing the item ID or item description in the **Find items** field, or click the search icon in the **Find items** field. In the items list that appears, click the line of the item you want to add. 1. Notice the **Available for shipping** column. The quantity shown as available for shipping is based on the default shipping warehouse set for the item. If the quantity available for shipping is zero, a warning icon ![Warning](/media/visma-net-erp/16_Warning.png) will be displayed. 1. In the **Quantity** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the UoM column) and press **Enter**. 1. If needed, enter or update the price for the order line in the **Unit price** column and press **Enter**. 1. If needed, change the status in the top part of the window. You can also change the status after saving. 1. Click ![Save](/media/visma-net-erp/Icon-24-save.png). Add notes to sales order printouts /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/add-notes-to-sales-order-printouts page When you create a sales order document in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can add notes on both header and line level. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add notes to sales order printouts When you create a sales order document in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can add notes on both header and line level. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). Notes on header level can be added by clicking on **Notes** in the upper right corner and notes on line level can be added by clicking on the sign to the left on the document line. Follow the procedure below to add notes to the printouts. ## How to get notes displayed on printouts 1. On the sales order document, select the check box **Print note on external sales documents**. If you also would like to print the notes on internal documents, select the check box **Print note on internal sales documents**. 1. Click **Reports** and choose **Print sales order/quote** and you will see that the notes, both on header and line level, are displayed. The default selection on the **Print note on external sales documents** and **Print note on internal sales documents** options are set in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window on the **General settings** tab. Create a shipment /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-shipment page You can create a shipment in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window for sales orders with the Open status and when there are order lines available for shipping. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a shipment You can create a shipment in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window for sales orders with the Open status and when there are order lines available for shipping. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). 1. Click the **Create shipment** button in the bottom right corner. 1. Does your order contain different warehouses? + If yes, in the pop-up window, select which warehouse you want to create the shipment for, and click **Confirm**. + If no, go to step 3. 1. Wait for the shipment to be created. **Result** for a successfully created shipment: + shipment is added in the **Shipments** tab. There, you can click the shipment number to open the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. + order status changes to **Shipping**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create multiple shipments for one order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create multiple shipments for one order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Select **Customer**, **Location**, **Warehouse ID**, **Operation** and **Shipment date**. 1. In the **Document details** tab, click **Add order**. 1. Select **Order type** and **Order no.**. The order lines from the selected order will be displayed in the table. > [!NOTE] > Order lines that have been shipped completely or that are already in a shipment that has the status **Open**, will not appear in this table. 1. Select the lines you want to include in the shipment. Click **Add** or **Add and close**. This will save the shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat Step 2 to 5 to create a new shipment for different order lines. 1. Repeat this procedure for all shipments you want to create for the same order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Change customer or customer location on sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-order section In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales order, even when it already has lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer or customer location on sales order In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales order, even when it already has lines. If you want to change the customer or customer location to one with a different VAT calculation, on a sales order with lines, consider the following to make sure the VAT calculation is changed as well. ## Before you start Make sure the **Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document** check box in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window is selected. See also: [Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/set-up-calculation/recalculate-vat-when-customer-is-changed-on-document/). 1. Do you want to change the customer location? + If **Yes**, make sure that the **Export type** is filled in for the location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. + If **No**, continue to step 2. 1. In the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window on the order, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Customer** or **Location** field and select a new customer or location. **Result**: the **VAT details** tab and the VAT category on the lines will be updated accordingly if the new customer or location has a different VAT calculation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Change the order status /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-the-order-status section In the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can change the order's status manually by changing the status directly in the status field. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the order status In the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can change the order's status manually by changing the status directly in the status field. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). In this topic you will learn how you change the order status manually in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window, and from and to which order statuses you can change. ## How to change the order status Follow the steps below to change the status of an order. 1. Make sure your order is saved. 1. Click the current status of the order. **Result**: the possible statuses that you can change to are displayed in the drop-down list (see also the table in the section below). 1. Select the status you want to change to. 1. Click ![save-icon-new](/media/visma-net-erp/save-icon-new.png). ## Possible statuses to change to The following table displays per order status to which statuses you can change manually.
When the status is You can change the status to
Hold Open, Cancelled
Open Back order, Cancelled, Hold
Back order Cancelled, Hold, Open
Credit hold Cancelled, Hold, Open
Cancelled Open

Shipping

Invoiced

Completed

 not applicable
Hide and rearrange columns /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/hide-and-rearrange-columns section For each table in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can select which columns to display or hide. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Hide and rearrange columns For each table in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can select which columns to display or hide. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). You can also rearrange the order of the displayed columns. Follow the steps below to adjust a table to your needs. 1. In the top right of the table, click ![Table settings](/media/visma-net-erp/table-settings-icon.png "Table settings icon"). **Result**: the **Column setup** panel opens. 1. Select the check boxes for the columns you want to display, and deselect the check boxes for the columns you want to hide. 1. Click and hold the column bar to drag a column to a different place in the column order. 1. Optional: to reset the visible columns and column order to the default settings, click **Reset to default**. 1. Click ![close icon](/media/visma-net-erp/close-icon-new.png) in the top right of the panel when you are done making your changes. Update a column for all order lines /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines page For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update a column for all order lines For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. You can do this in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window for the **Salesperson**, **Warehouse**, **Shipping rule**, **Requested on** and **Ship on** columns. This is particularly useful when your order has many lines. Follow the steps below to update one of the above mentioned columns for all existing order lines. 1. Open the order in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. Change the field that corresponds to the column you want to update for all order lines. The table below lists the field names and their corresponding columns in the **Order lines** tab. 1. Answer the question as follows: + Click **Yes** if you want to update all existing order lines with the newly selected value. + Click **No** if you only want newly added order lines to retrieve the newly selected value. > [!NOTE] > you cannot select the lines you want to update, the change will be applied to all existing lines. Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/mark-line-for-purchasing-and-create-purchase-order section You can mark a sales order line for purchasing in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window and create the linked purchase order. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order You can mark a sales order line for purchasing in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window and create the linked purchase order. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). Follow the steps below: 1. On the **Order lines** tab: 1. In the **Purchase order link** column, select one of the following options: + **Purchase to order**, + **Drop-shipment**. 1. In the **Supplier** column, select the supplier which will supply the line item. 1. In the **Supplier price** column, edit the automatically set price if necessary. > [!NOTE] > You can only edit the price if the **Override supplier price** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, the **General information** tab. 1. Make sure the order status is set to **Open** and click ![save-icon-new](/media/visma-net-erp/save-icon-new.png). 1. Click the **Actions** button and click **Create purchase order**. **Result**: the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window opens where you can create the purchase order. > [!NOTE] > To remove the mark for purchasing on a line in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window, select **-** in the **Purchase order source** column.

Related pages

Tasks

 Print, email or export an order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/print-email-or-export-an-order section Follow the steps below to print an order, email it, or export it to Excel or PDF. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print, email or export an order Follow the steps below to print an order, email it, or export it to Excel or PDF. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. Create and save a new order, or select a specific order number. 1. In the window footer, click **Preview document**. **Result**: + for order types SO, CS and IN, the document opens in the [Order confirmation (SO64111S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-so64111s/) report, + for order type QT, the document opens in the [Quote (SO64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/quote-so64101s/) report. 1. From the table below, choose you next action based on what you want to do with the order:
IF you want to THEN
print the order click icon-print
email the order click Send and continue in the Send (CR306015) window
download the order in Excel or PDF format 
1. click **Export**
    1. select **Excel** or **PDF**
Process transfer orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders section Transfer orders can be created manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another, or generated automatically when the stock for sales order fulfillment is reserved in remote warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process transfer orders Transfer orders can be created manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another, or generated automatically when the stock for sales order fulfillment is reserved in remote warehouses. Transfer orders can also be generated in the process of replenishment, to move goods from the source warehouse to the warehouse where they are needed for sale. > [!NOTE] > This order type is available only if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. These topics describe transfer order processing options available in Visma Net. About processing transfer orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-processing-transfer-orders section You can create transfer orders manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing transfer orders You can create transfer orders manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another. You can create transfer orders manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another. Also, you can generate transfer orders for sales orders when you reserve (allocate) the stock for sales orders in other warehouses. In the process of replenishment, transfer orders are created to move goods from the source warehouse to the warehouse where they are needed for sale. ## Creation of transfer orders You can create a transfer order (an order of the **TR** type) by entering all the required information in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If needed, you can reserve stock in the source warehouse for each line item on the transfer order by selecting the line and clicking the **Allocations** button in the table toolbar, and then creating additional allocation schedules. Also, you can create multiple transfer orders by using the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window. In this window, the system displays the transfer requests (also referred to as **plan types**) that have been automatically generated by the system in the following cases: + For each sales order (of the **SO** or **SA** type) for which the stock has been allocated in other warehouses. + For replenishment by transfer if the items are to be purchased and delivered to a source warehouse. In the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window, you can select the transfer requests (plan types) by source and destination warehouses, item class, and product work group. After reviewing the resulting list, you can generate transfer orders for each line in the list, or you can select the orders to be generated by selecting the check boxes to the left of the plan types. You can view the generated orders in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## Transfer workflow The processing of transfer orders involves performing the following actions and generating the following documents. ![Images-SO_Transfer_Flow](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_Transfer_Flow.png) ## Fulfillment of transfer orders A transfer order is fulfilled by one shipment or by multiple shipments. You can create a shipment for a transfer order from the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, by clicking **Actions** - **Create shipment**. If you need to create shipments for multiple transfer orders, you can run the **Create shipment** process by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/)window. The shipments will be grouped by source and destination warehouses and by stock items. The item quantities on the shipment are deducted from the **Available** and **Available for shipping** quantities and added to the **SO allocated** quantity; you can see these quantities in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window, as well as in other windows. You can print a pick list for each shipment by clicking **Actions** - **Print pick list**in the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Alternatively, you can print pick lists for multiple shipments by applying the **Print pick lists** action for the selected shipments in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. You can confirm each shipment by using the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Upon shipment confirmation, the quantities of items on the shipment are added to the **SO shipped** quantity. To promptly update the item quantities in the destination warehouse, you can click **Actions** - **Update inventory** on the toolbar, and the item quantity is deducted from **SO shipped** and added to **In transit**. (These quantities are displayed on a variety of inventory inquiries and reports.) You use the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/)window to create a transfer receipt (that is, a receipt of the **Transfer receipt** type) to record the receipt of the transferred items at the destination warehouse. You create a transfer receipt by adding the lines from one transfer order or multiple transfer orders. A transfer receipt may include only some of the lines from a transfer order; you can also change the quantity in a particular line if the items specified in this line were received partially. On release of the transfer receipt, the item quantity is deducted from the **In transit** quantity and added to **Quantity available** and **Quantity on hand**. (These quantities are displayed on a variety of Inventory inquiries and reports.) Thus, the quantity of the item that has been transferred from the source warehouse to the destination warehouse becomes available for sale. ## Landed costs on transfer orders If your company's warehouses are located in different regions and your company uses external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses, then the transportation expenses must be added to the item costs as landed costs. For information on landed costs, see: [About landed costs for transfers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-landed-costs-for-transfers/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About landed costs for transfers /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-landed-costs-for-transfers page If your company's warehouses are located in different regions, your company may need to use external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About landed costs for transfers If your company's warehouses are located in different regions, your company may need to use external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses. If your company's warehouses are located in different regions, your company may need to use external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses. In this case, the transportation expenses must then be added to the item costs as landed costs. ## Typical scenarios of landed cost application As with landed costs for purchase receipts, the landed costs for transfers can be added to transfer receipts or, alternatively, to supplier ledger invoices that are linked to specific transfer receipts. The following methods of applying the landed costs are available: From PO : The landed costs are added to a transfer receipt (described below in the **Scenario I** section). From AP : The landed costs are added to a invoice created in the name of a landed cost supplier—the company that actually moved the goods from one warehouse to another warehouse (described below in the **Scenario II** section). From both : The landed costs can be added either way; that is, both scenarios can be used. ## Scenario I: Adding landed costs to a transfer receipt For a description of the general stages in transfer processing and a flowchart showing these stages, see: [About processing transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-processing-transfer-orders/). A transfer is performed as described briefly below. ### Processing a transfer order A new transfer order of the **TR** order type is created in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The transfer order lists the stock items to be moved with the following details: item ID, quantity, and destination and source warehouses. For more details, see: [Create a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order/). After creation of the transfer order, the related shipment is created and confirmed; on shipment confirmation, the system generates an inventory transfer and releases it if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. On release of this inventory transfer, the following general ledger transactions are created for each stock item: + Inventory account: Cr, cost of goods sold (COGS) amount + In-transit account: Dr, COGS amount The inventory account for each item is determined by the posting class of this item; the rule for its selection is specified in the **Use inventory/accrual account from** field in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the inventory subaccount used for the batch is defined by the rule specified in the **Combine inventory/accrual sub. from** field in the same window. The in-transit account (and subaccount, if applicable) are specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. As the result of the posting of this batch, the **On hand qty.** of the items in the source warehouse is decreased. ### Processing a transfer receipt You create a receipt (of the **Transfer receipt** type) for the transfer order by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On the **Landed costs** tab, you can add any landed costs by specifying a landed cost code for each transportation service provider involved in the transfer, as well as the amount, currency, and VAT category. On release of this transfer receipt, the system generates the following documents: + **Inventory receipt** The document is automatically released if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. On release of this inventory receipt, the item's on-hand quantity in the destination warehouse is increased. The following general ledger transactions are created: The costs the transferred items will have in the destination warehouse depend on the valuation methods assigned to the items. For items with the **FIFO** valuation method, this receipt creates a new cost layer with the number and date of this receipt (not the original receipt that is selected by **FIFO** method from receipts in the source warehouse). For details, see the **An example of cost updating for a FIFO Item** section below. + In-transit account: Cr, COGS amount + Inventory account: Dr, COGS amount + **Inventory adjustment** This document specifies the landed cost amounts to update the costs of each item. For details, see the **Cost updating** section below. + **Accounts payable invoice** This document is created based on the invoice received from the landed cost supplier and includes the following general ledger transactions: + Landed cost accrual account: Dr, landed cost amount + Supplier ledger account: Cr, landed cost amount The landed cost accrual account is associated with the landed cost code. The supplier ledger account is associated with the location of the supplier that provided the transportation services (the landed cost supplier). ## Scenario II: Creating an invoice for landed costs In this scenario, the landed costs are added to an invoice created in the name of a landed cost supplier, which is the company that actually moved the goods from one warehouse to another warehouse. The new transfer order of the **TR** order type is created in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, and processed as described above in the **Transfer order processing** subsection. ### Processing a transfer receipt You create a receipt (of the **Transfer receipt** type) for the transfer order by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On release of this transfer receipt, the system generates an inventory receipt. On release of this inventory receipt, the following general ledger transactions are created: + In-transit account: Cr, COGS amount + Inventory account: Dr, COGS amount As a result, the **On hand qty.** of the items in the destination warehouse is increased by the quantities of the received items. The costs the transferred items will have in the destination warehouse depend on the valuation methods assigned to the items. For items with the **FIFO** valuation method, the system creates a new cost layer with the number and date of this receipt (not the original receipt that is selected by the **FIFO** method from receipts in the source warehouse). For details, see **An example of cost updating for a FIFO Item** section below. ### Creating an invoice for the landed costs You create an invoice for the landed costs by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. For the invoice, you can select the supplier that performed the transfer of the goods, and on the **Landed costs** tab, you add multiple transfer receipts and split the landed cost amount among the stock items selected from these receipts. On release of the invoice with the landed costs, the following transactions are generated: + Landed cost accrual account: Dr, landed cost amount + Accounts payable account: Cr, landed cost amount Release of the invoice does not affect the item's on hand quantity in the source warehouse or in the destination warehouse. Also, the system automatically generates an inventory adjustment and splits the landed cost amount among the specified items according to the allocation method of this landed cost type and the valuation method of each item. ### Cost updating Upon release, an inventory adjustment updates the inventory costs of items differently depending on the valuation method of the item as follows: + For items with the **Standard cost** valuation method, the landed cost amount is moved from the landed cost accrual account to the standard cost variance account. The following transactions are generated: + Standard cost accrual account: Cr, landed cost amount + COGS account: Dr, landed cost amount + For items with the **Average** cost valuation method, the landed cost amount moved from the Landed cost accrual account to the inventory account (determined by the posting class of the item) updates the average cost of the unit. The following transactions are generated: + Landed cost accrual account: Cr, landed cost amount + Inventory account: Dr, landed cost amount + For stock items with the **FIFO** or **specific** valuation method, the system creates a new cost layer based on the transfer receipt (this layer has the date and the quantity from the transfer receipt) and the amounts moved between accounts vary as follows, based on the quantity of the layer: + If the layer still has the original quantity, the cost of all items in the layer is updated, and the landed cost amount from the landed cost accrual account is transferred to the inventory account assigned to the item. + If the current quantity in the layer is less than the original quantity on the receipt, the landed cost amount is moved from the landed cost accrual account to update the COGS account and the inventory account in proportion to the sold and unsold quantities, respectively.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create a transfer order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order section If you need to record the movement of goods from one warehouse to another, create a transfer order (a sales order of the predefined TR type). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a transfer order If you need to record the movement of goods from one warehouse to another, create a transfer order (a sales order of the predefined TR type). > [!NOTE] > Transfer orders are available only if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **TR** as the order type. 1. In the **Destination warehouse** field, select the warehouse to be replenished. 1. Change the date of the transfer if you don't want to use the current date. 1. If this transfer is associated with a particular project, in the **Project** field (where the non-project code appears by default), select the project. 1. Enter a brief description for this transfer. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the transfer order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar. The **Inventory lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the **Inventory lookup** dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Inventory** field. 1. Optional: To further narrow the resulting list to a particular sub item of the item (if sub items are used in your system), select it in the **Sub item** field. 1. Optional: To further narrow the resulting list to an item located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list, select the line with the item you want to add, and in the **Quantity** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data in the columns to the right. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you need to reserve the quantities of specific items in the source warehouse specifically for this transfer, perform the following steps for each item for which you want to reserve the stock: 1. On the **Document details** tab, select the order line for the item. 1. Click the **Allocations** button on the toolbar. 1. In the **Allocations** dialog box that is opened, select the check box in the **Allocated** column for the line. Click **OK** to save the changes and close the dialog box. 1. Click **Save**. 1. If the **Lot or serial tracking** functionality is enabled in your system, and you want to specify particular lot or serial numbers for the items listed on the order, execute the following steps on the **Document details** tab: 1. Select a line with the item requiring lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** in the toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select one of lot or serial numbers available in the allocation warehouse. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 if the item has serial numbers or to the lot quantity if the item has lot numbers, and as a new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another serial or lot number. Repeat this step until the remaining quantity is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process a transfer order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-a-transfer-order section Users fulfill transfer orders by creating shipments in the source warehouse that are received later at the destination warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process a transfer order Users fulfill transfer orders by creating shipments in the source warehouse that are received later at the destination warehouse. If you need to process one transfer order or a few transfer orders, you can do this by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > You can also process multiple transfer orders by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. If you need to process a multi-line transfer order that involves multiple warehouses (and hence generates multiple shipments), you should also use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. ## Create a shipment for the transfer order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **TR** as the order type. 1. Select the reference number of the transfer that you want to process. 1. In the **Actions** menu (in the toolbar), select **Create shipment**. 1. In the **Specify shipment parameters** dialog box, which appears, change the date of the shipment and the source warehouse if needed. Click **OK** to close the dialog box. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, which opens, review the shipment information and the packages if automatic packaging is configured in your system. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Process the shipment for the transfer order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **TR** as the order type. 1. Select the needed transfer order by its reference number. 1. In the **Shipments** tab, click the reference number, which is a link to the shipment. 1. In the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, which opens, click **Actions** - **Print pick list**. Prepare the items for packaging and shipping according to the pick list. 1. Open the **Packages** tab, and review the shipment information and the packages if automatic packaging is configured in your system, or specify the packages manually. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click **Save** in the toolbar. 1. Click **Actions** - **Confirm shipment** on the toolbar. Once the operation is successfully completed, the status of the shipment is changed to **Confirmed**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Update inventory** in the toolbar. A new inventory two-step transfer is generated and released if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. ## Create a receipt for the transfer order 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar. 1. Select **Transfer receipt** as the receipt type. 1. Select the destination warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click **Add transfer**. In the **Add transfer order** dialog box, which opens, select the source warehouse in the **From warehouse** field. 1. Select the check box next to the transfer order for which the items were received. 1. Click **Add and close** in the dialog box. 1. Review the added lines in the **Document details** tab, and correct the quantity for the lines for which the items are partially received. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process multiple transfer orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-multiple-transfer-orders page Transfer orders are fulfilled by the creation of shipments that are later received at the destination warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process multiple transfer orders Transfer orders are fulfilled by the creation of shipments that are later received at the destination warehouse. Transfer orders are fulfilled by the creation of shipments that are later received at the destination warehouse. If you need to process a single transfer order, see: [Process a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-a-transfer-order/). You can create shipments, print pick lists and shipment confirmations for multiple transfer orders simultaneously in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. Then you will need to confirm each shipment and then create receipts one by one. 1. Go to the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Create shipment**. 1. Optional: Select the appropriate option in the **Select by** field to specify how orders are displayed: + **Ship date**: To display the orders by their shipment dates + **Order date**: To display the orders by their creation dates 1. Optional: In the **Start date** and **End date** fields, specify the date range for the dates of the type you selected. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list of orders, select a particular customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Optional: In the **Ship via** field, select a particular ship via code. 1. Optional: Specify and apply a filter to select orders by specific criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can create a reusable filter for the window that, once created, gives you the ability to display particular documents each time you bring up this window. For more information, see: [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/). 1. Review the resulting list of orders and select the orders of the **TR** type for processing by selecting the check boxes next to them (in the column with a check box as a heading). 1. Click **Process** in the toolbar. Success of the process is indicated by a green **OK** button that appears in the toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments section Shipping goods is the main part of the order fulfillment process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process shipments Shipping goods is the main part of the order fulfillment process. Shipping goods is the main part of the order fulfillment process. This part includes an overview of the shipment processing in Visma Net. About shipment processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/about-shipment-processing-options page Shipments, which are a key part of the order fulfillment process, can be incoming or outgoing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About shipment processing options Shipments, which are a key part of the order fulfillment process, can be incoming or outgoing. Shipments, which are a key part of the order fulfillment process, can be incoming or outgoing. Outgoing shipments (based on the **issue** operation) involve goods shipped to customers, while incoming shipments (based on the **receipt** operation) involve customer returns based on return orders. This topic discusses outgoing shipments (we will refer to them as shipments). For details on incoming shipments, see: [About predefined order types for customer returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns/). ## Creating shipments In Visma Net, you can directly create a shipment document for a particular sales order in the following ways: + In the classic [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, by selecting **Actions** - **Create shipment** in the window toolbar, + In the new [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window, by clicking **Create shipment** in the window footer. The [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window can be used to create a consolidated shipment for multiple sales orders of the same customer. To create multiple shipments for multiple sales orders of multiple customers, use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. In order to optimise the picking process for multiple employees and offer separate deliveries over time, you can create multiple shipments for one sales order and one warehouse by using the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. See also: [Create multiple shipments for one sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order/). The system automatically assigns reference numbers to the created shipment documents, in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to shipments in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. ## Shipments with zero lines Your organisation may prefer to send customer invoices that list all the items from their sales orders so that they can see which items were ordered but at the time were unavailable. To allow the system to add these zero lines to shipments, select the **Add zero lines for items not in stock** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. Selecting this option also can be helpful if you do not want to rely completely on availability data, because in some cases, although the system shows an item as not in stock, the quantities required for a shipment may be available for some reason. You should select this check box if you have item classes for items of which negative quantities are allowed and if shipments are created manually on a per-order basis; then users can edit the shipments and specify the quantities that are currently not reflected on the books correctly and may be available on shipment confirmation (for instance if shown as quantities on purchase receipts). For example, if for a purchase order line with the **Back orders allowed** shipping rule, the available quantity of the item is zero, the shipment will not include this line if the **Add zero lines for items which are not in stock** option is not selected; while if it is selected, the shipment will include a zero-line for this item, and you will be able to enter the quantity that is actually available for this order line. If the **Add zero lines for items which are not in stock** option is selected, you should decide whether to allow the creation of shipments with all zero-quantity lines. You can allow the creation of such shipments by selecting the **Create zero shipments** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. However, we do not recommend using this option if in your organisation, shipments are generally created automatically by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. ## Shipping rules and partial shipments When you create a shipment for a sales order (by using either the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) or the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window), the system checks the availability of the items included in the sales order and uses the shipping rules to determine whether the shipment can be created. If the shipment is created, the system changes the order status to **Shipping**. When you create a shipment by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, if the system detects that no shipment can be created according to the shipment rules (due to a shortage of items), the system displays a warning; you then decide how to process the order further. However, if you use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window to create a shipment (or multiple shipments) and the system detects that no shipment can be created for an order according to the shipment rules, the system changes the status of the order to **Back order**. This system behaviour allows you to set up automatic processing of sales orders in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window to be performed on a schedule. For more information on shipping rules, over-shipment, and under-shipment, see: [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). For sales orders with the predefined type **SO**, partial shipments are generally allowed if the **Shipping rule** field in the **Delivery settings** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window has the **Back orders allowed** option selected and the **Back orders allowed** shipping rule is selected for at least one order line. These settings let you ship the available quantity of goods in one shipment and the remainder in one shipment or multiple shipments as the goods are received. ## Partial shipments and free items If a sales order is fulfilled with multiple partial shipments, the **Free item shipping** setting, located on the **General information** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, controls how free items should be shipped: proportionally to the amounts of goods in the partial shipments ( **Proportional** ), or sent with the last shipment ( **On last shipment** ). If free items are sent with the last shipment and only part of the needed quantity of free items is available, only the available quantity is shipped, and no back order is initiated for the missing free items. If the quantity of the free items should be distributed between the partial shipments, the total quantity of free items on all partial shipments for the order may be less than the quantity initially calculated for the applicable group discount, because the system rounds the free item quantity down on each partial shipment. In such a case, you can add the missing quantity of the free item manually to any of the partial shipments. ## Consolidated shipments You can consolidate shipments, creating one shipment document for multiple sales orders of the same customer, unless the **Ship separately** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window is selected for the order type being used. As long as the check box is cleared, you can use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window to create one shipment for multiple sales orders associated with the same customer. Sales orders with the predefined order type **SO** don't require goods to be shipped separately for separate sales orders. The **Use customer's account** setting in a shipment document is copied from the sales order. Thus, if you mass-process multiple sales orders that have different states of the **Use customer's account** check box on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the system will group the sales orders by the state of this check box and create two consolidated shipments: The first shipment will include the sales orders in which the check box is selected, and the second shipment will include the sales orders in which this check box is cleared. ## Pick lists With Visma Net, you can print a pick list for a particular shipment with the **On hold** or **Open** status by clicking **Action** - **Print pick list** in the window toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. If you need to print pick lists for multiple shipments, you can select the **Print pick list** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window and process all the shipments on the list or only the selected shipments. If a pick list was once printed for a shipment, the shipment will be listed in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window for this processing only if the **Show printed** check box is selected, which helps avoid double packing for the same shipment. The pick list is prepared based on item availability information and the pick priorities of warehouse locations. If the highest priority location has insufficient stock of any of the requested items, the system will search for another location with some quantity available for shipping to fill the remainder. On a pick list, items are ordered based on location, pick priority, and expiration dates of items. ## Automatic packaging suggestions If you use a set of standard boxes for shipping goods, you can configure the system to suggest boxes for each sales order based on the packaging options and weights specified for stock items. For details on configuring this functionality, see: [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/). If this functionality is configured, you will be able to view the suggested minimal set of boxes for a shipment on the **Packages** tab of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. If needed, you can manually correct information about packages to match the quantities and weights of the actual packages. If the shipment is sent under a ship via code, the information about packages can be used by the system to calculate the freight amount. ## Shipment confirmation After all the required goods are picked and packed, you can confirm the shipment by clicking **Actions** - **Confirm shipment** in the window toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. (If you need to print a shipment confirmation document before the shipment is confirmed, you can use the [Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-confirmation-so642000-so64200s/) report.) This action updates the available quantities and changes the status of the associated sales order. During shipment confirmation the system checks that for all items for which lot or serial numbers are tracked, the appropriate numbers were specified. Whether the order status is changed to **Completed** or **Back order** depends on the availability of the ordered items and on the shipping rules specified for the order lines and the whole order. For more information, see: [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). If you need to correct a shipment that has been confirmed, click **Actions** - **Correct shipment** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to open the shipment and make the required corrections. The associated order's status is changed to **Shipping** once you open the shipment. You can confirm the shipment after you have edited it. If an order that has a confirmed shipment has been was cancelled, you can reopen the order by clicking **Actions** - **Re-open order** in the toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. You can then delete or correct the shipment by using the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. ## Variations of the shipment processing To complete the confirmed shipments, you must generate sales invoices and inventory issues and release them. For generating and processing invoices and issues you can select one of the following workflows: Workflow I: : First generate sales invoices, then release them. On release of these invoices, inventory issues are generated automatically. Workflow II: : First create issues, and then generate invoices. Release invoices and issues. Both workflows are described in more detail in the subsections below. ## Workflow I This workflow is used by most organisations. You can prepare an invoice for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, or you can create invoices for multiple selected shipments by executing the **Prepare invoice** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. Edited invoices will be put on credit hold if the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. Inventory issues which are created automatically when you release the invoices and will be released automatically if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. If this check box is cleared, you have to release inventory issues. ## Workflow II If due to shipment policies, your organisation processes customer invoices later than it does inventory issues, you can first create issues and then generate invoices. You can create an inventory issue for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Update inventory** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, or you can create inventory issues for multiple selected shipments by executing the **Update inventory** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. You can prepare an invoice for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, or you can create invoices for multiple selected shipments by executing the **Prepare invoice** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. To adjust the dates in the invoices generated for confirmed shipments, you can use the **Use shipment date for invoice date** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window as follows: + Select this check box to set the shipment date as the invoice date + Clear the check box to use the current business date as the default date for the invoice If there is a significant time interval between the release of issues and the release of invoices in your organisation, you may need to delay posting the costs to the COGS accounts. To do this, select the **Use shipped-not-invoiced account** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/)window, and then select the appropriate **Shipped-not-invoiced account** field and **Shipped-not-invoiced sub account** to be used to temporarily record the costs. After that, on release of issues, the costs of shipped items will be temporarily recorded to this shipped-not-invoiced account (with the specified subaccount); then later, on release of invoices, the costs will be moved from the shipped-not-invoiced account to the appropriate COGS /expense accounts.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Print pick lists for multiple shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/print-pick-lists-for-multiple-shipments section Print lists for shipments can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print pick lists for multiple shipments Print lists for shipments can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. For more information: [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/). Print lists for shipments can be printed on per shipment basis from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Alternative, you can print multiple pick lists for multiple shipments by using the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. Go to the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Print pick list**. 1. Optional: In the **Start date** and **End date** fields, specify the date range for the dates of the type you selected. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list of orders, select a particular customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Optional: In the **Ship via** field, select a particular ship via code. 1. Optional: In the **Warehouse** field, select the source warehouse for shipments. 1. Optional: Specify and apply a filter to select orders by specific criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can create a reusable filter for the window that, once created, gives you the ability to display particular documents each time you bring up this field. For more information, see: [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/). 1. Select the shipments for processing by selecting the check boxes next to them (in the column with a check box as a heading). 1. Click **Process**. The ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed if the processing is successful.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Print shipment confirmations for multiple shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/print-shipment-confirmations-for-multiple-shipments section Shipment confirmations can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print shipment confirmations for multiple shipments Shipment confirmations can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. For more information: [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/). Shipment confirmations can be printed on per shipment basis from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Alternative, you can print multiple shipment confirmations for multiple shipments by using the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. Go to the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Print shipment confirmation**. 1. Optional: In the **Start date** and **End date** fields, specify the date range for the dates of the type you selected. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list of orders, select a particular customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Optional: In the **Ship via** field, select a particular ship via code. 1. Optional: In the **Warehouse** field, select the source warehouse for shipments. 1. Optional: Specify and apply a filter to select orders by specific criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can create a reusable filter for the window that, once created, gives you the ability to display particular documents each time you bring up this window. For more information, see: [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/). 1. Select the shipments for processing by selecting the check boxes next to them (in the column with a check box as a heading). 1. Click **Process**. The ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed if the processing is successful.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process a back order for a sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/process-a-back-order-for-a-sales-order page When you register a sales order on an item that can not be completely shipped because of the insufficient quantity of the item, it is possible to create a back order for that item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process a back order for a sales order When you register a sales order on an item that can not be completely shipped because of the insufficient quantity of the item, it is possible to create a back order for that item. To be able to create a back order for the item, the option **Back orders allowed** has to be selected in the **Shipping rule** column on the sales order line. ## Processing a back order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Create a shipment for the sales order for the quantity that can be completed. Select **Actions - Place on back order**. The sales order status changes to **Back order**. 1. Create and receive the purchase order that makes it possible to complete the sales order. 1. Go to the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. You can now create a shipment for the back-ordered item on the sales order. Create multiple shipments for one order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create multiple shipments for one order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Select **Customer**, **Location**, **Warehouse ID**, **Operation** and **Shipment date**. 1. In the **Document details** tab, click **Add order**. 1. Select **Order type** and **Order no.**. The order lines from the selected order will be displayed in the table. > [!NOTE] > Order lines that have been shipped completely or that are already in a shipment that has the status **Open**, will not appear in this table. 1. Select the lines you want to include in the shipment. Click **Add** or **Add and close**. This will save the shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat Step 2 to 5 to create a new shipment for different order lines. 1. Repeat this procedure for all shipments you want to create for the same order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Add shipment lines that are not in a sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/add-shipment-lines-that-are-not-in-a-sales-order section To be able to add a shipment line that is not in a sales order, the shipment should already have at least one line from a sales order. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add shipment lines that are not in a sales order To be able to add a shipment line that is not in a sales order, the shipment should already have at least one line from a sales order. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, create a shipment with a sales order line or open an existing shipment with at least one line from a sales order. You can only add lines to shipments that have the **Open** status. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Fill in the mandatory fields **Item ID**, **Warehouse**, **UoM** and **Shipped qty.**, and if needed, fill in other fields. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). **Result**: the line is added to the shipment and to the sales order from the first shipment line. > [!NOTE] > if you delete an added shipment line, you will be asked if you want to delete the corresponding line in the sales order as well.

Related pages

Concepts

 Cancel shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/cancel-shipments page To enable the option to cancel shipments, 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cancel shipments To enable the option to cancel shipments, ## Prerequisite to cancel shipments 1. Go to window [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/), section **Shipment settings.** 1. Check the box **Update the warehouse automatically when shipment is confirmed** 1. Check the box **Enable shipment cancellation**. Result: You have enabled the option to cancel shipments. ## Cancel a shipment 1. Go to window [Shipments (SO302000).](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) 1. Select the shipment you want to cancel. Ensure **Status** is **Confirmed** 1. Click the button **Action** at the top of the window. 1. Select **Cancel shipment**. Result: Your shipment transaction is cancelled. ## Confirm the cancellation 1. Stay in window [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/). 1. Go to tab **Orders**, column **Inventory correction ref.no.** ### Results + A new **Inventory correction ref.no.** for the issue is created. + The cancellation issue is displayed in the window [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) with **Trans. type** equals **Return**. + Cancelling a shipment has the same effect on the FIFO calculations as creating a receipt. This means the item(s) will be placed as the last bought item(s) and with the same value as they had when creating the shipment. + In the cancellation issue, under the tab **Financial details**, you will find the link to window [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/). By cancelling a shipment, a record for the reverse of the cost of goods sold is created in the **General ledger**. + You can see the shipment in the window [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/), tab **Shipments**, now with **Status** equals **Cancelled**. Process returns /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns section Visma Net gives you the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process returns Visma Net gives you the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns. Visma Net gives you the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns. Depending on your company's return policies, you can use some of the predefined return types or create new custom order types for returns. This part of the help provides information on processing customer returns. About predefined order types for customer returns /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns page The predefined order types in Visma Net support a variety of returns, both those that involve advance authorisation and those that do not. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About predefined order types for customer returns The predefined order types in Visma Net support a variety of returns, both those that involve advance authorisation and those that do not. Authorised returns, also known as **return merchandise authorisation (RMA) orders**, involve the company providing a numbered authorisation to permit a customer return. The order types for authorized returns are based on the **RMA order** automation behaviour, see: [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/). Visma Net provides the following predefined order types for authorised returns: + Return with replacement (the **RR** order type) The customer returns goods for an exact replacement (if, for instance, the goods were defective). + Return for credit (the **RC** order type) The customer returns goods for credit in the amount of the returned goods only. + Generic authorised return (the **RM** order type) The customer returns goods for possible credit and replacement. Here, different goods than those returned may be included for replacement, and freight and shipping and handling charges may be included. You can use credit notes (of the **CM** order type) to account for unauthorised returns. The following sections describe the processing of returns for each of the predefined order types. ## Credit note (CM) A document with the **CM** order type is used to account for unauthorised returns from customers; this order includes a reference to the original invoice. For each line of the order, you should specify a reason code, warehouse, and location. When this document is released, the system generates an issue of the **Credit note** type in the Inventory workspace (which updates the availability data) and a credit note in Customer ledger. ## Return for credit (RC) You use a document of this type to authorise customer returns for credit in the amount of the returned goods only. By customer request, an order (of the **RC** type) is created and its printed or electronic copy is sent to the customer to accompany the goods the customer intends to return. If the items to be returned have specific lot or serial numbers, you can select these particular items from the list of issued items, transfer them from the original invoice (by adding this invoice), or type them manually. Once the goods have been returned, the received goods are returned to inventory, and the customer receives money back. For the **RC** sales order, you create a shipment of the **Receipt** type by using the **Create receipt** action on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once the shipment has been confirmed, you generate a credit note in the Customer ledger and Inventory workspaces by clicking **Prepare invoice** on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For detailed instructions on processing return orders of the **RC** type, see: [Process returns for credit (RC)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-for-credit-rc/). ## Return with replacement (RR) You create an order with the **RR** type for authorisation of a customer return with an exact replacement. Once you create an order with this type, its printed or electronic copy is sent to the customer. The customer then returns the rejected goods according to this order, the goods are returned to inventory, and the customer receives a replacement for the rejected goods. When you create an order of the **RR** type, you fill in the lines for the items to be returned (or select the appropriate invoices) and select **Receipt** as the transaction type for these lines. If the items to be returned have specific lot or serial numbers, you can select these particular items from the list of issued items, transfer them from the original invoice (by adding this invoice), or type them manually. An order of the **RR** type for each line with the **Receipt** transaction type should have a line with **Issue** as the transaction type for a replacement item. You can add an **Issue** type line ((or multiple lines of this type)multiple lines of this type) manually. Alternatively, as long as the item in each **Receipt**-type line is not tracked by serial or lot numbers, you can select the **Auto-create issue** check box for the line. Then (on saving) the system will add the corresponding **Issue** type lines automatically by copying the details from the **Receipt**-type lines. The processing of an order of the **RR** type includes the following stages: Receiving the returned items : You create shipment of the **Receipt** type by using the **Create receipt** action on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once the shipment has been confirmed, you click **Update inventory** on the **Actions** menu in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window to generate an appropriate inventory transaction and to update the item availability data. Shipping the replacement items : In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, for this **RR** order, you create a shipment with the **Issue** operation, confirm it, and update the data in the Inventory workspace (by clicking **Update inventory** in the toolbar, as described in the previous stage). No documents in the Customer ledger workspace are generated for an RR order. For detailed instructions on processing return orders of the **RR** type, see: [Process returns with replacement (RR)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-with-replacement-rr/). ## Generic authorised return (RM) **RM** is the basic order type used for authorised returns. You use a document of this type for authorisation of customer returns. By customer request, the order is created and a printed or electronic copy is sent to the customer to accompany the goods to be returned. Once the goods are received by your organisation, they are returned to inventory, and the customer receives other goods instead. Any shipping charges on returns and on replacements can be reflected. When creating an order of the **RM** type, you fill in the lines for the items to be returned (by typing the details manually or by selecting the appropriate invoices) and select **Receipt** as the transaction type for these lines. For each line with the **Receipt** transaction type, an order of the **RM** type should have a line with the **Issue** transaction type for a replacement item. You can add an **Issue** type line (or multiple lines of this type) manually. Alternatively, as long as the item in each **Receipt** type line is not tracked by serial or lot numbers, you can select the **Auto-create issue** check box for the line. Then the system will add the corresponding **Issue** type lines automatically by copying the details from the **Receipt** type lines. The processing of an order of the **RM** type includes the following stages: Receiving the returned items : You create a new order of the **RM** type for the items to be returned, and then you create a shipment of the **Receipt** type by using the **Create receipt** action on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once the shipment has been confirmed, you generate a credit note in the Customer ledger and Inventory workspaces by clicking **Prepare invoice** on the **Actions** menu in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Shipping the replacement items : For the **Issue** -type lines of the **RM** order, you create a shipment, confirm it, and prepare an invoice. For detailed instructions on processing return orders of the **RM** type, see: [Process authorised returns (RM)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-authorised-returns-rm/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process returns for credit (RC) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-for-credit-rc page To credit a customer for returned goods, you create an authorised return for credit order (that is, an order of the RC order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process returns for credit (RC) To credit a customer for returned goods, you create an authorised return for credit order (that is, an order of the RC order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). ## Create a return for credit (RC) order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select RC as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the Customer field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the Project field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the Requested on field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. Provide a brief description of this return order. 1. On the Document details tab, add all the invoices that list the items that have been returned for credit. For each invoice, click on the toolbar and perform the following steps: 1. In the Reference no. field of the Add invoice details dialog box, which opens, select the customer invoice by its identifier. 1. Once the selected document appears in the table, select the check box to the left of each line with an item to be returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the Show non-stock kits by components check box. 1. Click the Add and close button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of each added line, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click Save. 1. Optional: To add other items that will be returned, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click in the table toolbar. The Inventory lookup dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the Inventory field. 1. To further narrow the list to a particular subitem of the item (if subitems are used in your system), select it in the Subitem field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the Quantity column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the UoM column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which adds the items and closes the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of the added table row, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click. 1. Clear the Hold check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click. ## Process the return for credit You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( RC ) and its reference number. 1. Click Actions - Create receipt to create a shipment (with the Receipt operation) that accounts for the returned goods. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. In the opened window, review the shipment details, clear the Hold check box, and click. 1. Click Actions - Confirm shipment. 1. Click Actions - Prepare invoice. This generates a credit note with the returned items listed. The system opens the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window to display the new document. 1. Optional: In the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window, release the credit note by clicking Actions - Release. This creates an issue transaction of the Credit note type in the Inventory workspace. Once you release the credit note, the original **RC** order gets the **Completed** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process cash returns (CR) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-cash-returns-cr page To process a return of items that were sold on a cash sale, you create a cash return order (that is, an order of the CR order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process cash returns (CR) To process a return of items that were sold on a cash sale, you create a cash return order (that is, an order of the CR order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). ## Create a cash return (CR) order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select CR as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the Customer field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the Project field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the Requested on field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. In the Description field, provide a brief description of this return order. 1. To specify the items to be returned, you can either add items or add original documents. To add the items to be returned, go to Step 12. If the items to be returned were listed on cash sales documents, on the Document details tab, add the original cash sales document. To do this, click in the table toolbar and perform the following steps for each cash sales document: 1. In the Type field of the Add invoice details dialog box, which opens, select Cash sales. 1. In the Reference no. box, select the customer document by its identifier. 1. Once the selected document appears in the table, select the check box to the left of each line with an item to be returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the Show non-stock kits by components check box. 1. Click the Add and close button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. Specify the Reason code for the return in each added line on the Document details tab. 1. Click. 1. To add the items that will be returned and that were paid by one payment, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click in the table toolbar. The Inventory lookup dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the Inventory field. 1. To further narrow the list to a particular subitem of the item (if subitems are used in your system), select it in the Subitem field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the Quantity column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the UoM column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which closes the dialog box. 1. In the row with the item you added, specify the Reason code for the return. 1. Click. 1. In the Payment ref. field on the Payments tab, type the payment reference number. 1. Clear the Hold check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click. ## Process the cash return You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( CR ) and its reference number. 1. Click Actions - Prepare invoice. This generates a cash return document with the returned items listed. The system opens the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window to display the new document. 1. Optional: In the opened window, select Actions - Release to release the cash return document. This updates the availability data (an inventory transaction of the Credit note type) and generates a cash transaction of the Cash return type. You can view the cash return document in the [Cash sales - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) (AR304000) window. Once you release the cash return, the original **CR** order gets the **Completed** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process returns with replacement (RR) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-with-replacement-rr section To authorise a return with replacement of the same item or a similar item (or multiple such items) when no additional charges are involved, you create an order of the RR type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process returns with replacement (RR) To authorise a return with replacement of the same item or a similar item (or multiple such items) when no additional charges are involved, you create an order of the RR type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). When you create an order of the **RR** type, make sure that for each line with the **Receipt** transaction type, the order has a line with **Issue** as the transaction type for a replacement item. You can add such lines manually (at this point, you can select other items for replacement), or you can select the **Create issue automatically** check box for each **Receipt** type line (for items that are not tracked by serial or lot numbers) to make the system add the lines of the **Issue** type automatically. ## Create a return with replacement (RR) Order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **RR** as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the **Project** field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. Provide a brief description of this return order. 1. On the **Document details** tab, add all the invoices that list the items to be returned. For each invoice, click **Add sales invoice** in the table toolbar and perform the following steps: 1. In the **Add invoice details** dialog box that opens, select the customer invoice in the **Ref. no.** field. 1. Once the selected document appears in the table in the dialog box, select the check box to the left of each line with an item being returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the **Show non-stock kits by components** check box. 1. Click the **Add and close** button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. In the **Operation** column for each the added line, make sure that **Receipt** is selected. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: To add other items that will be returned, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click **Add item**. The **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the unit of measure shown in the **Sales unit** column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which closes the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of the added table row, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click. 1. For each line with an item that will be replaced with other units (or another unit) of the same item, make sure the **Create issue automatically** check box is selected. > [!NOTE] > For items that are tracked by lot or serial numbers, always select the **Create issue automatically** check box. 1. For the lines that do not have the **Create issue automatically** check box selected, add the lines (with the **Issue** operation) for the replacement items by following the above steps 11a - 11 d, and make sure that Issue is selected in the Operation column of the added table lines. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Process the return with replacement You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( RR ) and its reference number. 1. Click Actions - Create receipt to create a shipment (with the Receipt operation) that accounts for the returned goods. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. In the opened window, review the shipment details, clear the Hold check box, and click. 1. Select Actions - Confirm shipment. 1. Select Actions - Update inventory. This generates an inventory issue (of the Return type) with the returned items listed. You process the order for the replacement items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( RR ) and its reference number. > [!NOTE] > Notice that the order lines with the **Receipt** operation (for returned items) have been automatically marked as completed. 1. Select **Actions** - **Create shipment** to create a shipment (with the **Issue** operation) that accounts for the replacement items. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. To print a pick list for the selected replacement items, select Reports - Print pick list. 1. Once you have prepared the shipment, click Actions - Confirm shipment. 1. Select Update inventory. This action updates the availability data and changes the status of the original RR order (created in the window) to Completed. Notice that no documents are created in the Supplier ledger workspace.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process authorised returns (RM) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-authorised-returns-rm page In the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can create a generic authorised return or an order document of the RM order type when a customer wants to replace any returned item with an item with a higher price, or when shipping and handling fees are charged for returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process authorised returns (RM) In the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can create a generic authorised return or an order document of the RM order type when a customer wants to replace any returned item with an item with a higher price, or when shipping and handling fees are charged for returns. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). When you create an order of the **RM** type, make sure that for each line with the **Receipt** transaction type, the order has a line with **Issue** as the transaction type for a replacement item. You can add such lines manually (at this point, you can select other items for replacement), or you can select the **Create issue automatically** check box for each **Receipt** type line (for items that are not tracked by serial or lot numbers) to make the system add the lines of the **Issue** type automatically. ## Create an authorised return (RM) order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select RM as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the Customer field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the Project field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the Requested on field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. In the Description field, provide a brief description of this return order. 1. On the **Document details** tab, add all the invoices that list the items to be returned. For each invoice, click **Add sales invoice** in the table toolbar and perform the following steps: 1. In the **Add invoice details** dialog box that opens, select the customer invoice in the **Ref. no.** field. 1. Once the lines of the selected invoice appears in the table, select the check boxes to the left of each line with an item that is being returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the **Show non-stock kits by components** check box. 1. Click the **Add and close** button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. For each added line, in the **Operation** column, make sure that **Receipt** is selected in the **Operation** field. 1. Notice the warning indicated by a red circle at the **Order total** element. Point to the mark to read the warning: **Document balance will go negative. Document will not be released.** > [!NOTE] > Until you add a replacement line (of the **Issue** type) or multiple such lines to make the order balance positive, you can save the document only in the **On hold** status. 1. Select the **Hold** check box 1. Optional: To add other items that will be returned, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click **Add item**. The **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the unit of measure shown in the **Sales unit** column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which closes the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of the added table row, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click. 1. For the lines that do not have the **Create issue automatically** check box selected, add the lines (with the **Issue** operation) for the replacement items by following the above steps 11a - 11 d, and make sure that Receipt is selected in the Operation column of the added table lines. 1. Add a line (with the Issue operation) for a refund as follows: 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the refund non-stock item. 1. Optional: In the Quantity column, specify the quantity of the item. 1. In the **Manual amount** column, type the refund amount. 1. Click. 1. Clear the Hold check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click. ## Process the authorised return You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by its type ( **RM** ) and its reference number. 1. Click **Actions** - **Create receipt** to create a shipment (with the **Receipt** operation) that accounts for the returned goods. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, review the shipment details, clear the **Hold** check box, and click **Save**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Confirm shipment**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Prepare invoice**. This generates a credit note with the returned items listed. The system opens the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window to display the new document. 1. Optional: In the opened window, release the credit note by clicking **Actions** - **Release**. This creates an issue transaction of the **Credit note** type in the Inventory workspace. You process the order for the replacement items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by its type ( **RM** ) and its reference number. > [!NOTE] > Notice that the lines with the **Receipt** operation (for returned items) have been automatically marked as completed. 1. Click **Actions** - **Create shipment** to create a shipment (with the **Issue** operation) that accounts for the replacement items. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. Optional: To print a pick list for the selected replacement items, click **Actions** - **Print pick list** in the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Once you have prepared the shipment, click **Actions** - **Confirm shipment**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** to generate an Customer ledger invoice with the **Balanced** status. This gives the original **RM** order the **Invoiced** status. The Customer ledger invoice can be further processed in the Customer invoices window in the Inventory workspace. Once you release the invoice, the original **RM** order gets the **Completed** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create multiple shipments for one order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create multiple shipments for one order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Select **Customer**, **Location**, **Warehouse ID**, **Operation** and **Shipment date**. 1. In the **Document details** tab, click **Add order**. 1. Select **Order type** and **Order no.**. The order lines from the selected order will be displayed in the table. > [!NOTE] > Order lines that have been shipped completely or that are already in a shipment that has the status **Open**, will not appear in this table. 1. Select the lines you want to include in the shipment. Click **Add** or **Add and close**. This will save the shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat Step 2 to 5 to create a new shipment for different order lines. 1. Repeat this procedure for all shipments you want to create for the same order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Sales windows /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales windows Sales windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Sales workspace. ## Transactions [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) ## Registers [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) ## Processes [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) [Reprint invoices (SO50501S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/reprint-invoices-so50501s/) [Print/email orders (SO502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000/) [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) (available for the **Multiple warehouses** functionality) [Process sales invoices (SO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000/) ## Inquiries [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) [Sales order list (SO40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-list-so40101s/) [Sales order history by item (SO40102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-history-by-item-so40102s/) [Sales order list (SO40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-list-so40101s/) [Sales profitability analysis (AR409000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000/) [Sales shipment history by item (SO40103S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-shipment-history-by-item-so40103s/) ## Reports [Sales order summary (SO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-summary-so610500/) Provides summary information on sales orders, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. [Sales order details by customer (SO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-customer-so611000/) Displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. The data can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Sales order details by stock item (SO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-item-so611500/) Shows information on open sales orders, ordered by item. [Order register (SO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/order-register-so612000/) Displays the list of sales orders recorded in Visma Net during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and order type. [Shipment summary (SO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-summary-so620500/) Gives you information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Shipment details by customer (SO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-customer-so621000/) Shows information on shipments, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Shipment details by stock item (SO621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-item-so621500/) Displays shipment information, ordered by item. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Shipment register (SO612500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-register-so612500/) Displays the list of shipments during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and carrier. [Daily sales profitability (AR676000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000/) Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the specific transactions to each customer during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000/) Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/) Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of all sales to each customer class and each customer during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000/) Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of the sales to each customer during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/) Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000/) Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for each item and item class based on the sales that occurred during the specified date range. ## Preferences [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) Create transfer orders (SO509000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000 page This window is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create transfer orders (SO509000) This window is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window is only available if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. You use this window to create transfer orders, which replenish the stock at the destination warehouse by transferring the required quantities of items from the source warehouse. You can create transfer orders for replenishment requests generated by using the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window. Also, you create transfer orders for sales orders with allocations if for order fulfillment it is required to move stock from one warehouse to another. For details, see: [About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the selected transfer and replenishment requests (plan types) or those for which you have selected the Included check box, and generates transfer orders for them.
Process all Processes all the listed transfer and replenishment requests and generates transfer orders for them.
Inventory summary Click this to view details about the items in the stock.
## The top part In this area, you can select the creation date and filter the requests by item class, warehouse, stock item, product manager, or product work group.
Element Description
Creation date The date to be used for creating transfer orders.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you use as follows to select the product manager to whom the items are assigned for maintenance:

  • Select the Me check box to view the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another product manager to view the items assigned to the manager.
  • Leave the elements blank to view items assigned to all product managers of the selected product work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the product work group the items are assigned to for maintenance:

  • Select the My check box to view the items assigned to your product work group or to the selected product manager in the group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another product work group in the field to display the items assigned to the work group or to a particular product manager in the selected group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the items assigned to all product work groups.
Item class ID The item class of the stock items to be transferred. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Item ID The stock item to be transferred. Leave the field blank to display requests for multiple items.
Weight The total weight of the item quantities to be transferred.
Volume The total volume of the item quantities to be transferred.
From warehouse The warehouse from which the items are to be transferred.
To warehouse The warehouse to which the items are to be transferred.
Customer The customer specified on the sales orders for which the transfers are requested; the field is blank for transfers initiated for replenishment.
Order type The type of the sales order for which the transfer is requested; the field is blank for transfers initiated for replenishment.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order for which the transfer is requested; the field is blank for transfers initiated for replenishment.
## The table This table holds the replenishment requests that match the selection criteria you have specified. You can process all listed items or only those you select.
Column Description
Plan type The type of functional built-in plan (an internal request based on allocation or a replenishment request) that shows the quantity of the item for which transfer is required.
Item ID The item ID of the stock item for which the transfer request or replenishment request was generated.
Item description The description provided for the stock item.
From warehouse The warehouse to supply items for the transfer.
To warehouse The destination warehouse for the transfer.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the stock item being transferred.
Quantity The quantity of the item requested for the transfer.
Requested on The date when the request was generated.
Customer The ID of the customer that requested the item on the sales order (if applicable).
Customer name The name of the customer that requested the item or items on the sales order (if applicable).
Order no. The reference number of the sales order for which this transfer has been initiated (if applicable).
Weight The total weight of the item quantity to be transferred.
Volume The total volume of the item quantity to be transferred.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Customer invoices (SO303000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000 section In this window, you can create customer ledger documents, such as invoices, credit notes, debit notes, cash sale, and cash return documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer invoices (SO303000) In this window, you can create customer ledger documents, such as invoices, credit notes, debit notes, cash sale, and cash return documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create customer ledger documents, such as invoices, credit notes, debit notes, cash sale, and cash return documents. You can also use this window to view existing documents, including those that have been generated automatically in the process of fulfilling sales orders or those that account for the return of goods. For additional details about invoices in the Inventory workspace, see: [About invoices in the sales module](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-invoices-in-the-sales-workspace/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Change customer location on customer invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/change-customer-location-on-customer-invoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

  • Release Changes the status of the document to Open.
  • Release from credit hold Releases the document from credit hold and gives you the ability to save it with the Balanced status.
  • Email invoice Generates an email for the invoice in accordance with the INVOICE mailing settings of the customer.
  • Recalculate prices Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.
  • Write-off Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window so that you can write off the document balance.
  • Reclassify general ledger batch
  • Send to AutoInvoice Sends the invoice automatically to AutoInvoice
  • Poll invoice status: Updates the AutoInvoice status and Business level status under the AutoInvoice section of the Invoice address tab.

+

Generate e-Invoice XML draft:

Generates a draft version of the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 XML, so that you have the possibility to check the content and validate that all settings are correct, before you start using the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format for electronic invoicing. It is also possible to use this action after you have sent the invoice to AutoInvoice.

The action can be used on all statuses except On hold , and becomes available if PEPPOL BIS 3.0 is activated and you have enabled the setting Send to AutoInvoice on the Invoice address tab.

Note

** The generated file is a draft and may not be used as a legal document.
Reports

Provides fast access to the following reports:

  • Unreleased transactions
  • Print invoice
  • Preview invoice
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options used for updating prices and discounts for the invoice.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. You can select one of the following options:

All lines
To refresh prices and discounts for all lines
Current line
To refresh prices and discounts for the selected line
Set current unit prices A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the item prices with the current prices.
Override manual prices A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit price column) with the current prices. The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected. After the manual prices are overridden in the document, the system clears the Manual price check boxes in the appropriate document lines.
Recalculate discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must recalculate the discounts for the current line or for the selected lines.
Override manual line discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should cancel the manual discounts for the current line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.
OK Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
## The top part You use this part to view summary information for an existing invoice or to provide this information for a new invoice.
Element Description
Type

The type of document, which can be one of the following options:

Invoice
A document used to invoice a customer for the shipped goods
Debit note
A document used to charge a customer for the shipped goods if undercharging or an error was detected
Credit note
A document used to credit the customer for returned goods
Cash sale
A document used for cash sales that do not update the customer’s customer ledger
Cash return
A document used for returns on cash sales; it does not update the customer’s customer ledger
Invoice no. The reference number of the document, which is automatically generated by the system in accordance with the number series assigned to invoices and notes in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically and can be one of the following options: On hold, Open, or Closed.
Hold A check box, which is unavailable for documents that are generated automatically, that indicates (if selected) that the document has a status of On Hold and cannot be released.
Credit hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the customer is on credit hold, and its documents cannot be processed further.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period to post transactions generated by the document.
Customer order The reference number of the document used by the customer.
Customer The customer to be invoiced.
Location (This field only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location of the customer.
Contact The customer contact.
Currency The currency of the document.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash discount date The date up to which the cash discount is available for the document, in accordance with the payment terms.
Child The customer ’s child account, where the associated order came from, if applicable.
Project The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window. Project appears if the Projects module has been activated.
Invoice text A short message to include in the invoice.
VAT exempt total (This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in your system.) The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT taxable total

(This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in your system.) The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will only be displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

Note

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.
Balance The balance of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount taken or to be taken on the document.
ROT or RUT deductible document Select this check box if the amount on this document is applicable for ROT or RUT deduction. The ROT and RUT details tab will appear and the columns RUT or ROT deductible, Item type, Type of work and Deductible amount will be displayed in the Document details tab table.
Excise duty total The total of the amounts in the Excise duty amount column in the Document details tab.
## The Document details tab This tab holds the details of the document. Use the **Add order** action (and its associated dialog box) to easily add shipped orders to the document.
Button Description
Add order Opens the Add order dialog box, which you can use to add the orders to the invoice.
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule window, so that you can view the details of the deferral schedule generated for the line.
Reset sorting Sorts the invoice lines in the table by the shipment numbers and sales order numbers.
### The Add order dialog box You can use this dialog box to add shipped orders of the same customer to the invoice if sales orders of this type have not been defined to be invoiced separately. The **Invoice separately** check box for order types is located in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.
Element Description
Order type The type of order to be added to the shipment.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment made to fulfill the sales order.
Customer The customer t receive the shipment.
Location (This column only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in your system.) The location of the customer to receive the shipment.
Shipment date The date of the shipment.
Shipment qty. The quantity of the item shipped.
The dialog box has the following buttons:
Add Adds the selected shipped orders.
Add and close Adds the selected orders and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The table
Column Description
Branch The branch where the shipment has been created.
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document included in this document.
Order type The type of the order that the shipment is based on.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Item ID The item ID of the shipped item.
Transaction descr. The description provided for the shipment.
Warehouse If the Multiple warehouses option is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the warehouse of the stock item is required for the customer invoice line. If you enter a customer invoice directly in this window, you can edit this column. For customer invoices prepared from shipments and sales orders, the system fills in this column automatically.
Location If the Multiple locations option is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the location of the stock item is required for the customer invoice line. If you enter customer invoice directly in this window, you can edit this column. For customer invoices prepared from shipments and sales orders, the system fills in this column automatically.
Quantity The quantity of items in the shipment.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.
Lot/serial no. If the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000), this column is required for customer invoice lines with lot- or serial-tracked stock items.
Expiration date If the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000), this column is required for customer invoice lines with lot- or serial-tracked stock items.
Unit price The price of the unit of the shipped item.
Manual price

This check box indicates (if selected) that the unit price has been specified for this line item manually, corrected, or transferred from a sales order. In the invoice generated for the sales order, this check box is selected automatically for each line of the invoice to prevent price updating if new prices are in effect on the date of the invoice.

If you clear this check box, the system updates the unit price in the document line with the current price (if one is specified).
Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

The selected Manual discount check box indicates that the percent of the discount is specified by the line-discount applied manually, or has been entered manually, or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item in the sales order or in this invoice.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.
Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

The selected Manual discount check box indicates that the amount of the discount is based on the line discount applied manually, or has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually for this line item in the sales order on in this invoice.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.
Manual discount This check box indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually for this line item in the sales order or in this invoice. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount or you can select a discount code of one of the line discounts intended for manual application. The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount code The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line.
Discount series The identifier of a discount series that has been applied to this line. The column is hidden by default and only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Amount The amount of goods shipped.
Account The sales account to be updated. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Description The description provided for the account.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be updated.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this document is associated. This column appears if the Projects module has been activated and integrated with the Inventory workspace.
Salesperson ID

(This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The salesperson associated with the sale of the items.
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the document line, if the line amount should be recognized as revenue over multiple periods. You can change the deferral code in this box manually, if needed.

Note

If you change the MDA deferral code (the deferral code that defines the item as an MDA package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider this item as not a package and will ignore its components while generating deferral schedule upon release of the document. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule according to the selected non-MDA deferral code.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.
Term start date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of recognition of the deferred revenue should start for the selected item; this date is specified if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.
Term end date

(This column appears only if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The default date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date is specified if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.
Excise duty amount The total excise duty amount for the line. The Date in the top part of the window determines which duty rate is used (from the Duty rates (EF207000) window).
Original deferral schedule The schedule generated in accordance with the deferral code assigned. Recognition of the line amount as income is performed according to the schedule.
VAT category The VAT category ID that applies to the goods. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Commissionable

(This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commissions should be calculated on this document.
External link A read-only column displaying the external link for the line, collected from the corresponding sales order.
Orig. inv. no. For the return lines, in this column, the system fills in a link to the original invoice.
Orig. inv. line no. For the return lines, in this column, the system fills in a link to the original invoice line number.
Inventory doc. type This column shows the type of the inventory document connected to the corresponding inventory issue that updated the inventory.
Inventory ref. no. This column shows a link to the corresponding inventory issue that updated the inventory.
Ref. no. The reference number of this document in which the line item is listed.
Trans. type The type of this transaction (document).
Line type

The line type for the customer invoice line, which can be one of the following options:

Misc. charge
for non-stock items that do not require shipment.
Goods for warehouse
for stock items.
Non-stock goods:
for non-stock items that require shipment.
Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
Order line no. The order’s line number that matches this line of the document.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates the number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table manually or by using the Reset sorting button.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab, which is filled out automatically when you click **Save**, contains information about all individual VAT applied to the document lines.
Column Description
VAT ID The identifier of the specific VAT applied to the document.
Description The description of the VAT ID in clear language.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the tax.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific tax.
Reverse VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.
Statistical VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.
Pending VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT is pending and will be recognised after completing the VAT recognition process.
Include in VAT exempt total A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.
VAT type

The type of the VAT, which can be one of the following:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Commissions tab This tab only appears if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. It is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type. In this tab, you can view the commissions calculated for the document, or specify salespersons who participated in sales.
Element Description
Default salesperson The identifier of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
### The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson who participated in sales.
Commission (%) The percent of commission generally earned by the salesperson.
Commission amt. The commission amount earned by the salesperson on this sale.
Commissionable amount The amount of the document subjected to commission.
## The Freight details tab This tab has a table with the shipments included in the invoice and all the freight charges applicable to the shipments. The freight details are read-only except for the Premium freight amt. To adjust the **Total freight amt.** in an invoice, you can specify the needed positive or negative amount in the **Premium freight amt.** field.
Column Description
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document.
Shipping terms The shipping terms specified in the shipment document.
Shipping zone ID The customer’s shipping zone.
Ship via The carrier through which shipping was performed.
Weight The weight of the shipment.
Volume The volume of the shipment.
Line total The total amount on all lines of the shipment document.
Freight cost The cost of freight for the invoice.
Freight amt. The charges for shipping the items.
Premium freight amt. Any additional flat charges for handling the shipments. You can use this box to adjust total freight charges for an invoice.
Total freight amt. The total of all freight charges.
Account The account used for recording freight charges.
Description The description provided for the account.
Sub. ID The corresponding subaccount.
Project task The task of the project.
VAT category The tax category of the freight charge.
## The Financial details tab This tab provides information about the batch generated for the document.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch that contains all the transactions generated by the document. You can click the number to view the batch.
Branch The branch where the invoice originated.
Customer ledger account The asset account to be updated by the document amount.
Customer ledger sub The corresponding subaccount to be used for the document.
Customer VAT zone By default, the VAT zone associated with the customer location. If such a VAT zone is not specified, it is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.
Work group The work group responsible for the shipment.
Owner The user responsible for the shipment.
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the Buyer’s financial accounts.
Originator document ref. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.
Contract document ref. The identification of a contract.
Customer project The project number requested by the customer. When a project number is entered in this field, it will replace the internal project number when sending to AutoInvoice for VismaXML and PEPPOL BIS. When nothing is filled in, the internal project number will be sent to AutoInvoice.
## The Payment information tab By using this tab, you can select a payment method for the invoice. If the payment method involves credit card processing, you can initiate payment processing. The tab provides information about processing centre transactions.
Element Description
Payment method The payment method of the customer to be used to pay for the invoice.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Clear date The date when the payment was cleared with the bank.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment was cleared with the bank.
Payment total The total amount of the payment.
Amount to capture The amount to be charged on the card.
Registered amount The amount captured on the customer account associated with the card as the payment for the invoice.
Orig. PC ref. no. This field is not in use.
## The Invoice address tab This tab contains the customer's invoice-to information. ### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to indicate that the default contact should not be used and to specify a new contact.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Override address A check box that you select to indicate that the default address should not be used and to specify a new address.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice has been printed.
Do not print A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice will not be printed.
Emailed A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice hast been sent by email.
Do not email A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice will not be sent by email.
### The Report settings section
Element Description
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents A check box that you select to indicate that the note will be printed on external sales documents.
Print line note on internal sales documents A check box that you select to indicate that the note will be printed on internal sales documents.
### The AutoInvoice section In this tab you find the AutoInvoice sending information. Here, you also find the invoice response message, if you have activated this functionality in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window, and the customer has activated this from their side. For more information, see: [About invoice response messages](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-response-messages/).
Element Description
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sending method Indicates which path the AutoInvoice was sent by: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice status

Shows the status of processing. Available statuses are:

Sent to AutoInvoice
Awaiting processing.
Pending
Awaiting delivery.
Sent
The invoice is sent.
Error
To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice sent by

Shows how the invoice was sent. Possible values are:

  • Sent inside home network
  • Sent by email
  • Sent by print
  • Sent by print PRIORITY
  • Sent by print WORLD
  • Sent e-Invoice
  • Sent to bank network
  • Sent by N/A
Business level status

The status of the invoice as sent by the customer. It can be one of the following:

  • Message acknowledgment
  • In process
  • Under query
  • Conditionally accepted
  • Rejected
  • Accepted
  • Paid

To get the current status, click the Actions button and select Poll invoice status.
Reason code The reason given by the customer to clarify the business level status. This text is predefined, see this status clarification reason list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible reason codes.
Reason Text entered manually by the customer.
Action code The action the customer wants you to take for this invoice. This text is predefined, see this status clarification action list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible action codes.
Action Text entered manually by the customer.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table that shows the details of the **Group** - and **Document** -level discounts that were applied to the document. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - and Document -level discount for the invoice. Selecting the check box updates the document’s total and the line amounts but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Order type The type of the sales order.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order.
Discount code The identifier (code) of the discount applied to the document.
Series ID The identifier of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose sequence was applied to the document ( Group, or Document ).
Manual discount This check box indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually (from the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as manual in the Discount codes - reference information window.
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as a discount.
## The Applications tab This tab has a table showing the payments applied to this document. This tab is not available for documents of the **Cash sales** and **Cash return** types.
Button Description
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can view the document details or application, depending on the document type.
Apply automatically Automatically applies the available payments to the document. The button is available if the Invoice type is selected in the top part of this window.
### If you select Invoice or Debit note in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Doc. type The type of the payment document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. When you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window or the Customer payments (AR302000) opens as a pop-up depending on the document type, so that you can view the document details.
Amount paid The amount specified by the payment document.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken during the application of the payment.
Payment date The date of the payment.
Balance The balance of the invoice after payment application.
Invoice text The description of the payment document.
Currency The currency of the transactions.
Payment period The period to which the payment transactions are posted.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment document.
Customer The customer to which the payment document belongs.
Status The status of the payment.
### If you select Credit note in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Document type The type of the document that was applied.
Reference no The reference number of the applied document. By clicking this number, the document details window opens.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Date The date of the document.
Balance The balance of the document after the credit note was applied.
Invoice text The description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document transactions are posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number (for informational purposes).
Status The status of the document.
## The Totals tab On the **Totals** tab, you can view the totals automatically calculated for the document.
Element Description
Line total

The total amount on all document lines with stock items and non-stock items that require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied. This total does not include the excise duty, freight and premium freight amounts.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Amount column on the Document details tab for lines of the Goods for warehouse and Non-stock goods line type.
Line total incl. excise duty The Line total incl. excise duty is calculated as the Line total + Excise duty total.
Misc. total

The total amount on all document lines with non-stock items that do not require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Amount column on the Document details tab for lines with the Misc. charge line type.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total The total amount of VAT calculated for the document.
Freight The amount of freight charges.
Premium freight Any additional flat charge that applies to the document for shipping and handling.
Payment total The total amount of payments for this invoice.
Registered amount The payment amount registered as the result of card processing.
## The ROT and RUT details (Sweden) tab This tab is displayed when you select the **ROT or RUT deductible document** check box in the top part of this window. ### The ROT and RUT settings section
Element Description
Distribute automatically (check box) (check box) When this check box is selected, the amount will be distributed equally among the specified personal IDs.
RUT (check box) (check box) Select this option if the work is related to RUT (cleaning, maintenance, laundry) deduction.
ROT (check box) (check box) Select this check box if the work is related to ROT (repairs, conversion, extension) deduction. When you select this, you need to fill in either the Property field, or the Apartment and Corporate ID fields.
Apartment The apartment number.
Property The property number.
Corporate ID The housing cooperative’s ID.
### The ROT and RUT distribution section Here you can add the person(s) who will receive the tax deduction.
Column Description
Personal ID (YYYYMMDDNNNN) The personal ID in the format YYYYMMDDNNNN.
Amount The amount distributed to this person. If the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, you can edit this field and manually distribute the amount among the personal IDs.
Over 65 A check box that you select to indicate that this person is over 65 years old. This is not done automatically.
### The ROT and RUT totals section
Elemant Description
Total deductible amount The total amount that is tax deductible.
Other cost The total amount for items of the Other cost type, including VAT.
Material cost The total amount for items of the Material cost type, including VAT.
Work price The total price of labour hours (items of the Service type), including VAT. This is the amount eligible for tax deduction.
Distributed amount or Undistributed amount

When the Distribute automatically check box is selected, this will display the total amount distributed among the specified personal IDs.

When the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, this will display the amount still to be distributed manually among the specified personal IDs.
### The Balancing documents for ROT and RUT deduction section This section appears after the invoice is balanced, which is either after releasing the invoice or when sending the claim, depending on your setting for **Balance invoices on** on the **ROT and RUT settings (Sweden)** tab in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. You can also invoke the balancing of invoices manually by using the **Balance** action in the [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/) window.
Element Description
Balancing credit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing credit note to the customer, with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
Balancing debit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing debit note to Skatteverket (The Swedish Tax Agency), with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
## The Attachments tab On this tab, you can view and send invoice attachments to AutoInvoice.
Column Description
View file View the selected attachment file.
Send the file to AutoInvoice When this is selected, the file will be sent to AutoInvoice with the invoice.
Name The name of the file.
Created by The user who has created the file.
Creation time The time when the file was created.
Comment An optional comment connected with the file.
File size The size of the file to be sent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Order types (SO201000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000 page You can use this window to view the settings of available order types. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order types (SO201000) You can use this window to view the settings of available order types. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For descriptions of the predefined order types, see: [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/) and [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/). > [!NOTE] > You can create new order types only if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. To create new order types, use one of the templates (which are groups of settings for typical order types) and make changes only in the **Order settings**, **Posting settings**, and **Customer ledger settings** sections on the **General information** tab. We do not recommend that you make changes to any available template on the **Template settings** tab, because this requires in-depth knowledge of the built-in automation behaviours associated with order types. For details about creating custom order types, see: [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/). In the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, users can create orders of both the types predefined in Visma Net and custom order types (if this functionality is enabled in your system). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part This area provides summary information about the order type. In this area, you can select an available order type and view and edit its settings, or create a new order type and specify its general settings (if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window).
Element Description
Order type

The ID of the order type, which is a two-character alphanumeric string. Visma Net provides the following predefined order types:

CM (Credit note)
Documents of this type are used as adjustments to already-completed sales orders when the customer returns goods without advance authorization.
CR (Cash return)
Documents of this type are used to register returns from cash sales that did not involve shipping.
CS (Cash sale)
Documents of this type are used to register cash sales.
IN (Invoice)
Documents of this type are used to bill a customer for shipped goods.
QT (Quote)
Documents of this type are used to register a customer’s intention to buy goods in the specified quantity, on the specified date, and at the specified price.
RC (Return for credit)
Documents of this type are used to register authorised customer returns for credit without replacement.
RM (Generic authorised return)
Documents of this type are used to register authorised customer returns for replacement or credit within the warranty period of a product.
RR (Return with replacement)
Documents of this type are used to register authorised customer returns for replacement.
SA (Sales order with allocation)
(This type of order is only available if the Lot and serial tracking, Multiple warehouse locations, or Sales order to purchase order link functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) You have to manually allocate the ordered quantities of the items at one location or multiple locations if the available quantity at the specified location is less than the ordered quantity. Once you save an order of this type, the quantities of items are added to the SO allocated plan types.
SO (Sales order)
Documents of this type are created to record customer requests to purchase goods and are used to prepare shipments.
TR (Transfer)
Documents of this type are generated to perform stock replenishment by transferring goods from the source warehouse. (This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order type is active, which means that users can create documents of the type.
Description

The brief description of the order type.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
Order template

The order template that the order type is based on. The following templates are available:

CM (Credit note)
The built-in template for the CM order type
CR (Cash return)
The built-in template for the CR order type
IN (Invoice)
The built-in template for the IN and CS order types
QT (Quote)
The built-in template for the QT order type
RC (Return for credit)
The built-in template for the RC order type
RM (RMA order)
The built-in template for the RM order type
RR (Return with replacement)
The built-in template for the RR order type
SA (Sales order with allocation)
The built-in template for the SA order type
SO (Sales order)
The built-in template for the SO order type
TR (Transfer)
The built-in template for the TR order type (This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window)
## The General information tab The tab contains settings that hold details about the order type. ### The Order settings section
Element Description
Order number series The number series to be used to automatically generate reference numbers for documents of this type.
Days to keep The number of days documents of the type should be kept in the system before they are removed as obsolete.
Hold orders on entry This check box indicates (if selected) that the system should save documents of the type with the On hold status by default.
Hold document on failed credit check

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system will change the status of the order to Credit hold if the customer fails the credit check.

The credit check is performed each time the order is saved.
Require control total This check box indicates (if selected) that the user must type the control total when creating or modifying a document of the type.
Invoice separately This check box indicates (if selected) that each order of this type should be billed (invoiced) separately from other orders of the same type.
Ship separately This check box indicates (if selected) that the goods for each order of this type should be shipped separately from goods for other orders of the same type.
Calculate freight This check box indicates (if selected) that the freight for each order of this type should be calculated.
Commitment tracking

(This element is only available if the Internal revenue commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that commitment tracking is activated for the order type. See also: About tracking commitments.
Copy notes This check box indicates (if selected) that when an order of this type is copied to an order of another type, the system should also copy any notes for the order.
Copy attachments This check box indicates (if selected) that when an order of this type is copied to an order of another type, the system should also copy any attachments to the order.
Copy line notes to shipment This check box indicates (if selected) that when a shipment is created for a line of an order of this type, the system should copy any line notes to the shipment as shipment line notes.
Copy line attachments to shipment This check box indicates (if selected) that when a shipment is created for a line of an order of this type, the system should copy any line attachments to the shipment as shipment line attachments.
Copy line notes to invoice This check box indicates (if selected) that when a user creates an invoice for a line of an order of this type, the system should copy line notes to the invoice as invoice line notes.
Only non-stock

(This element is only available if the Copy line notes to invoice option is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system copies line notes for only non-stock line items.
Copy line attachments to invoice This check box indicates (if selected) that when a user creates an invoice for a line of an order of this type, the system copies any attachments to the invoice as invoice line attachments.
Only non-stock

(This element is only available if the Copy line attachments to invoice option is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system must copy line attachments for only non-stock line items.
### The Customer ledger settings section
Element Description
Invoice number series The numbering sequence to be used for generating the reference numbers for customer ledger documents (invoices and credit memos) created when shipments for the order are confirmed.
Mark as: printed A check box that, if selected, indicates that the documents of this type will be marked as printed before release.
Mark as: emailed A check box that, if selected, indicates that the documents of this type will be marked as emailed before release.
Hold Invoices on entry A check box that you select to indicate to the system that new invoices should be saved with the On Hold status by default.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Use sales account from

The sales account to be used for the document of this type. You can select one of the following options:

Item
Uses the sales account selected for the item, which is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
Uses the sales account selected for the warehouse, which is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window. (This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Posting class
Uses the sales account according to the selected option for the Use sales account from field in the Posting classes tab of the Posting classes (IN206000) window. This option appears only if the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer location
Uses the sales account selected for the customer location. (This option is only displayed if the Business Account Locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Reason code
Uses the sales account associated with the reason code set on the sales order line.

See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Combine sales sub. from

The rule of composing a sales subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the item, posting class, warehouse, customer location, salesperson, and employee).

To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

E
The sales subaccount associated with the employee who is the owner of the document.
I
The sales subaccount associated with the item.
L
The sales subaccount associated with the customer location. (This option appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
W
The sales subaccount associated with the warehouse. (This option appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
S
The sales subaccount associated with the salesperson.
P
The sales subaccount associated with the posting class of the item.
R
The sales subaccount associated with the reason code.

For a segment, the selected option is designated by the specific letter repeated for each character in the segment.
Freight account

(Required.)

The default account of the Income type to record freight to be charged for orders of the type. This account is used as one of the sources for the Use freight account from rule and as the freight account when the account defined by the rule is unavailable.

For more information, see: About freight calculation.
Use freight account from

The freight account to be used for orders of this type. You can select one of the following options:

Order type
Uses the freight account selected for the order type, which is specified on this window, in the Freight account field.
Customer location
Uses the freight account selected for the customer location. (This option is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Ship via
Uses the freight account associated with the carrier, which is specified in the Ship via codes (CS207500) window.
Freight sub.

(Required.)

The default subaccount to record the freight for orders of this type. This subaccount is a source of segment values for the segments with the T option for the freight subaccount generated according to the Combine freight sub. from rule; it is also a source of segment values when other sources are unavailable.
Combine freight sub. from

The rule of composing a freight sales subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document. To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

E
The freight subaccount associated with the employee who is the owner of the order; the source of the segment value is Sales sub. on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window for the employee who is the owner of the order. If two or more orders with different owners are combined into one shipment (the Ship separately check box is cleared for the order), the segment value will be taken from the Sales Sub. specified for the customer location.
L
The freight subaccount associated with customer location. (This option is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
T
The freight subaccount associated with the order type, which is specified in the Freight sub. field.
V
The freight subaccount associated with the ship via code specified for the order.
Discount account

(Required.)

The default account to record discounts for orders of the type. This account is used as one of the sources for the Use discount account from rule; it is also used if the account defined by the rule is unavailable.
Use discount account from

The discount account to be used for a document of this type. You can select one of the following options:

Order type
Uses the discount account selected for the order type, which is specified in the Discount account field on this window.
Customer location
Uses the discount account selected for the customer location. (This option only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Discount sub.

(Required.)

The default subaccount to record discounts on orders of the type. This subaccount is a source of segment values for the segments with the T option for the discount subaccount generated according to the Combine discount sub. from rule; the subaccount is also a source of segment values in case when other sources are unavailable.
Combine discount sub. from

(This element is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The rule of composing a discount subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the order type and customer location). To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

L
The discount subaccount associated with customer location. (This option appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
T
The discount subaccount associated with order type, which is specified in the Discount sub. field on this window.
Post line discounts separately

(This element is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that (if selected) indicates that on release of invoices generated for orders of this type, the general ledger batches will include the following additional journal entries (with the discount amounts) for the line discounts:

  • Credit entry to the Sales account (determined by the Use sales account from setting of the order type)
  • Debit entry to the Discount account associated with the customer (determined by the Use discount account from setting of the order type)

If this check box is cleared, line discount are not posted to GL.
Use discount sub. from sales sub.

(This element is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that (if selected) indicates that discounts will be posted with sales subaccounts.

This check box is only displayed if the Post line discounts separately check box is selected.
## The Template settings tab This tab provides information about the template the order type is based on. The template defines how the orders of the type should be processed. For details, see: [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/) and [About predefined order types for customer returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns/). CAUTION: We do not recommend that you modify the available templates.
Element Description
Automation behaviour The type of automation behaviour used for the template, which can be Sales order, Invoice, Quote, Credit note, or RMA order. An automation behaviour is a set of automation steps.
Default operation The default inventory operation for the order type, which can be Receipt or Issue.
Customer document type

The type of customer ledger document to be generated on release of a document of this type.

Possible settings are Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, and No update (which means no customer ledger documents will be created).
Process shipments This check box indicates (if selected) that shipments should be processed for this order type.
Require lot/serial entry

This check box indicates (if selected) that lot or serial information for items is required for documents of this type. Items with specific lot or serial numbers are always allocated.

This check box can be selected for only order types for which the Process shipments check box is selected.
Require stock allocation

This check box indicates (if selected) that orders of this type require allocation (reservation) of stock when they are taken off hold.

For orders of the type with the Require lot/serial entry check box cleared, the items should be allocated even if particular lot or serial numbers are not specified on orders.
Column Description
Operation The inventory operation to be generated for the order of the type.
Inventory transaction type

The type of inventory issue transaction generated for a document of this type, which can be one of the following options:

Issue
A document that confirms the delivery of items from the warehouse
Return
A document that records the return of goods from the customer
Transfer:
A document that records the transfer of items from one warehouse to another
Invoice
A document that confirms the delivery of items from the warehouse based on the customer ledger invoice
Debit note
A document that adjusts the delivery of goods from the warehouse based on the customer ledger debit note
Credit note
A document that records the return of goods to the warehouse based on the customer ledger credit note
No update
A type indicating that no inventory transaction will be generated and no shipment will be processed

You can see issue transactions in the Issues - reference information window.
Order plan type The type of built-in order plan to be used for the documents of the type.
Shipment plan type The type of built-in shipment plan to be used for the documents of the type.
Require reason code

A check box that indicates (if selected) that a reason code is required for orders of the type.

(This check box is available for the Sales order and RMA order automation behaviours.)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Print/email orders (SO502000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000 page You use this window to print or email sales orders, depending on the order properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/email orders (SO502000) You use this window to print or email sales orders, depending on the order properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to print or email sales orders, depending on the order properties. The functionality of this window is based on the automation steps designed for the windows in the Inventory workspace. By adjusting the automation step, you can define which of the orders should be emailed and which should be printed by using this window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the selected orders—that is, those in the table for which you have selected the check boxes, based on the selected Action.
Process all Processes all orders (listed in the table) according to the selected Action.
## The top part You can use this part to specify the criteria for selecting orders for processing.
Element Description
Action

The action to be taken if you click Process or Process all in the toolbar. Select one of the following:

  • Print sales order/quote
  • Send by email
Assigned to

A field and the Me check box, which you use as follows to select the user to whom the orders are assigned:

  • Select the Me check box to view the orders assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another username to view the orders assigned to the user.
  • Leave the elements blank to view orders assigned to all users of the selected work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the work group the orders are assigned to:

  • Select the My check box to view the orders assigned to your work group or to the selected user in the group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another work group in the field to display the orders assigned to the work group or to a particular product manager in the selected group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the orders assigned to all work groups.
Salesperson ID

The particular salesperson related to the sales orders.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all salespersons.
Customer

The particular customer whose sales orders you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all customers.
Order type

The appropriate order type.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all types.
Status The status of orders to be displayed in the list. You can select orders by their statuses: Order, Open, On hold, Credit hold, Completed, Cancelled, Back order, Shipping, and Invoiced.
Start date The date to open the date range for selecting orders by their dates.
End date The date to end the date range for selecting orders by their dates. By default, it is the current business date.
## The table This table holds all the sales orders that match the selection criteria you've specified. You can process all listed items or only those you select.
Column Description
Order type The type of the order.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Description The description provided for the order.
Customer order The reference number of the original customer’s order.
Status The status of the order.
Requested on The date when the order should be fulfilled.
Sched. shipment The date when the order should be shipped.
Customer The customer, by its ID, that has initiated the order.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Location

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The location of the customer related to the order.
Location name

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The name of the customer location.
Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse from which the sales order will be shipped.
Description The description of the warehouse.
Ship via The ship via code associated with the carrier through which the order should be shipped.
Description The description of the ship via code.
Shipping zone The shipping zone of the customer.
Work group The work group assigned to handle the order.
Owner The default user (owner) of the work group.
Order weight The weight of the order.
Order volume The volume of the order.
Ordered qty. The total quantity of items on the order.
Currency The currency of the order.
Order total The total amount specified on the order.

Related pages

Concepts

 Process sales invoices (SO505000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000 page In this window, you can perform a variety of processing actions on multiple sales invoices and notes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process sales invoices (SO505000) In this window, you can perform a variety of processing actions on multiple sales invoices and notes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can perform a variety of processing actions on multiple sales invoices and notes. You can specify selection criteria to narrow the list of invoices and notes in the window. You can then process all the documents on the list or only the ones you select. If you release the invoices and notes, the related inventory transactions will be also created. The prepared inventory documents will be released automatically if the **Automatically release inventory documents** option is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window; otherwise, you need to manually release these documents. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View document Click this to view the document selected in the table in the Customer invoices window that pops up.
Process Applies the selected processing (based on the option you have specified in the Action field) to the selected documents.
Process all Applies the selected processing to all documents.
## The top part Here, you can choose the date range and customer for which documents will displayed, as well as the operation the system performs if you click **Process** or **Process all**.
Element Description
Action

The processing operation the system performs when you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following options:

  • Release To release the selected documents.

  • Post invoice to inventory To update the availability data in the Inventory workspace in accordance with the selected documents.

  • Release from credit hold To release the documents from credit hold so they can be saved with the Balanced status.

  • Print invoice To print the selected invoices for sending them by postal mail. The document selected for processing will be printed only if the following conditions are met: For more details, see: About mailings for customers.

    • This document has not been printed before (the Printed check box is cleared in the Customer invoices (SO303000) window)
    • The customer account has the Print invoices check box selected
    • The Credit hold check box is not selected for this document

  • Poll invoice status

  • Email invoice To email the selected invoices. The document selected for processing will be emailed only if the following conditions are met:

    • This document has not been e-mailed before (the Emailed check box is cleared in the Customer invoices (SO303000) window)
    • The customer account has the Send invoices by email check box selected
    • The Credit hold check box is not selected for this document

For more details, see: About mailings for customers.
Customer The customer (by its ID) for which you want to display documents.
Start date The start date of the date range for which you want to display documents.
End date The end date of the date range for which you want to display documents.
## The table This table displays the sales invoices that meet the selection criteria you have specified. You can process all documents or only those you select.
Button Description
View document Navigates to the Customer invoices (SO303000) window so that you can view all the details of the selected document.
Column Description
Type

The type of document, which can be one of the following options:

  • Invoice For a document used to invoice a customer for goods shipped
  • Credit note For a document used to credit a customer for returned goods
  • Debit note For a document used to correct undercharging invoices
  • Cash sale
  • Credit return
Reference no. The reference number of the document.
Customer The customer that ordered goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered goods or services.
Location

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services were ordered.
Location name

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The name of the location from which the goods or services were ordered.
Customer order The reference number of the document as assigned by the customer.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period to post the transactions generated by the document.
Amount The amount of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Invoice text The description provided for the document.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Email (This column is only available when you select the Email invoice action.) The email address to which the invoice will be sent.

Related pages

Concepts

 Process orders (SO501000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000 page You use this window to specify criteria for filtering the sales orders and then to process all of the listed orders or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process orders (SO501000) You use this window to specify criteria for filtering the sales orders and then to process all of the listed orders or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to specify criteria for filtering the sales orders and then to process all of the listed orders or only selected ones. By using this window, you can create shipment for the selected orders, prepare invoices or cancel the orders. Also, you can release the orders from credit hold and open them. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Applies the selected processing (based on the Action you select) to the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Applies the selected processing to all documents listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to define criteria for the documents to be displayed in the table below, as well as the action to be applied if you click **Process** or **Process all**.
Element Description
Action

The processing operation to be used when you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following options:

Prepare invoice
To generate invoices for the Closed orders.
Release from credit hold
To release the sales order from credit hold if the customer passes the credit check.
Cancel order
To cancel an order of any status.
Create shipment
To create shipments for orders with the Open, Back order or Shipping status. During this processing for any order, if no shipment is created due to the shipping rules specified for the order and the order lines, the status of this order changes to Back order. If the Replan back orders check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window, you can run the process of creating shipments for back orders after the purchase receipts for the appropriate items have been released. If the Replan back orders check box is not selected, you need to open the back orders first. For more information, see: About shipping rules.
Open order
To open orders with the Back order status.
Select by

The type of date by which the orders should be selected. Select one of the following options:

Ship date
To select documents by the date of planned shipment specified for each order line in the Ship on column on the Document details or Order lines tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) or Sales orders (SO30100S) window, respectively.
Cancel by
To select documents by the date of order cancellation
Order date
To select documents by their creation dates
Start date The start date of the date range for the type of dates specified in Select by. You can leave the field blank to view all orders with dates before the End date.
Shipment date

(This field is only displayed if the Create shipment is selected in the Action field.)

The date of the shipment or shipments to be created. By default, it is the current business date, but you can change it to another date.
End date The end date of the date range for the type of dates specified as Select by.
Customer

The customer involved.

Leave the field blank to view orders (that should be fulfilled) from various customers.
Carrier This field is not in use.
Ship via The ship via code associated with the carrier used to ship sales orders. Leave the field blank to view orders to be shipped with various ship via codes.
Warehouse

The warehouse from which the orders will be shipped.

(This field is only displayed if the Create shipment is selected in the Action field.)
## The table This table displays the documents matching the criteria specified in the top part. Review the list, and process all documents or only those you have selected using the check boxes in the first column.
Button Description
View document Navigates to the Sales orders (SO301000) window so you can view the details of the selected document.
Column Description
Order type The type of order.
Order no. The reference number of the document.
Description The description provided for the document.
Customer order The reference number if the original customer order.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Requested on The date on which the customer wants to receive the goods.
Sched. shipment

The date when the shipment for this order is scheduled (as specified in the Sched. shipment or Scheduled shipment field on the Delivery settings tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) or Sales orders (SO30100S) window, respectively).

If the scheduled shipment date is later than the range’s end date, that means that at least one line of the order was scheduled to be shipped in the selected date range (has the Ship on date in the range).
Customer The customer that ordered the goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered the goods or services.
Location (This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in your system.) The customer location from which the goods or services were ordered.
Location name The name of the location from which the goods or services were ordered.
Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse specified as the preferred warehouse for the order.
Warehouse description The description provided for the warehouse.
Ship via The carrier through which the goods are shipped.
Ship via description The description provided for the carrier.
Shipping zone The shipping zone of the customer.
Work group The work group processing the order.
Owner The user responsible for the order.
Order weight The total weight of the goods associated with the order.
Order volume The total volume of the goods associated with the order.
Ordered qty. The quantity of all items on the order.
Currency The currency of the document.
Order total The total for the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Process shipments (SO503000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000 page In this window, you can select the type of processing, specify criteria for filtering the shipments, and process all of the filtered shipments or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process shipments (SO503000) In this window, you can select the type of processing, specify criteria for filtering the shipments, and process all of the filtered shipments or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Applies the chosen processing to the selected documents.
Process all Applies the chosen processing to all documents.
## The top part Here, you can define criteria for the documents to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Action

The processing option to be used when you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following processing options:

  • Prepare invoice To generate invoices for the selected shipment documents.
  • Update warehouse To generate inventory documents for confirmed shipments made for sales orders (SO, SA) and some of returns. The issues will be released automatically if the Automatically release inventory documents check box is selected in the Sales orders preferences (SO101000) window.
  • Update warehouse - Confirm not invoiceable To generate inventory documents for shipments made for transfer orders and returns with replacements.
  • Email shipment: To generate emails with the shipment confirmation for the selected shipments.
  • Print pick list To create and print pick lists for the selected shipments with the On hold and Open statuses.
  • Confirm shipment To confirm the selected shipment.
  • Print shipment confirmation To print confirmations for the selected shipments.
  • Prepare drop-ship invoice To prepare drop-ship invoices for the selected receipts. When you select this processing option, the system displays in the table the list of receipts instead of shipments. (This option is only available if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Start date The start date of the date range for the shipment dates. You can leave the field blank to view all shipments up to the End date.
End date The end date of the date range for the shipment dates.
Invoice date The date of the applicable invoice.
Show printed

(This element only appears if one of the following actions is selected in the Action field: Print labels or Print pick list.)

  • For the Print pick list action, you select this check box to add to the listed shipments those shipments for which pick lists have been already printed.
  • For the Print labels action, you select this check box to add to the listed shipments those shipments for which labels have been already printed.
Customer The customer whose shipments will be displayed. Leave the field blank to view shipments for all customers.
Carrier This field is not in use.
Ship via The ship via code associated with the carrier which will perform or has performed shipping. You can leave the box blank to view shipments with all ship via codes of the carrier.
Warehouse (This field only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse from which the goods are shipped. You can leave the field blank to view shipments associated with all warehouses.
Packaging type The packaging type: Auto and manual, Auto, or Manual. In case an order has been packed manually, no re-packaging can be performed.
## The Shipments table This displays the shipments that match the criteria you specified in the top part. You can review the list and process all the shipments or only selected ones.
Button Description
View document Navigates to the Shipments (SO302000) window, so that you can view all the details of the selected document.
If you select in the **Action** field an option other than **Prepare drop-ship invoice**, the system displays in the table the list of shipments available for processing.
Column Description
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Shipment date The date when the goods were shipped.
Customer no. The customer number of the customer who ordered the goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered the goods or services.
Location

(This column only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services are ordered.
Location name The name of the location from which the goods or services are ordered.
Customer order The reference number of the order.
Warehouse ID The warehouse from which the shipment was performed.
Warehouse description The name of the warehouse.
Work group The work group that prepared the shipment and shipped the goods.
Owner The user responsible for the shipment.
Shipped quantity The quantity of the shipped items.
Ship via The carrier used for this shipment.
Ship via description The description provided for the carrier.
Shipped weight The total weight of goods in the shipment.
Shipped volume The total volume of goods in the shipment.
Labels printed This check box (if selected) indicates that labels have been printed for this shipment.
## The Receipts table If you select the **Prepare drop-ship invoice** option in the **Action** field, the system displays in the table the list of receipts available for processing.
Column Description
Receipt no. The reference number of the receipt document.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Date The date of the document.
Customer no. The customer number of the customer who ordered the goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered the goods or services.
Location

(This column only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services are ordered.
Location name The name of the location from which the goods or services are ordered.
Customer order The reference number of the order.
Warehouse ID The warehouse from which the shipment was performed.
Warehouse description The name of the warehouse.
Work group The work group that prepared the shipment and shipped the goods.
Owner The user responsible for the shipment.
Shipped quantity The quantity of the shipped items.
Ship via The carrier used for this shipment.
Ship via description The description provided for the carrier.
Shipped weight The total weight of goods in the shipment.
Shipped volume The total volume of goods in the shipment.
Labels printed A check box that, if selected indicates that labels have been printed for this shipment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Order confirmation (SO64111S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-so64111s section By using this report, you can display the selected order as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order confirmation (SO64111S) By using this report, you can display the selected order as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can display the selected order as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the top left), the ship-to and invoice-to address of the customer, the pertinent shipping information, and the itemised information about goods shipped. > [!NOTE] > If you have added line notes in the order, only the first three lines of each note are displayed in the report. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view; a type must be specified. For this report window, the default type is a sales order, but you can select any type.
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Order confirmation, right address (SO64118S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-right-address-so64118s section You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order confirmation, right address (SO64118S) You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Report parameters tab
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view. For this report window, the default type is a sales order, but you can select any type.
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Quote, right address (SO64108S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/quote-right-address-so64108s section With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Quote, right address (SO64108S) With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the top left), the ship-to and invoice-to address of the customer (on the right), the pertinent shipping information, and the itemised information about goods to be shipped. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view; a type must be specified. (Although by default the type of sales order is a quote on this report window, you can select any type.)
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Reprint invoices (SO50501S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/reprint-invoices-so50501s page You use this window to reprint invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reprint invoices (SO50501S) You use this window to reprint invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to reprint invoices. The functionality of this window is based on the automation steps designed for the windows in the Inventory workspace. By adjusting the automation step, you can define which of the orders should be emailed and which should be printed by using this window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View document Click this to see the underlying document for the invoice.
Process Processes the selected orders or those in the table for which you have selected the check boxes based on the selected Action.
Process all Processes all orders (listed in the table) according to the selected Action.
## The top part You can use this part to specify the criteria for selecting orders for processing.
Element Description
Action

The action to be taken if you click Process or Process all in the toolbar. Select one of the following:

  • Reprint invoices
Customer

The particular customer whose sales orders you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all customers.
Start date The date to open the date range for selecting orders by their dates.
End date The date to end the date range for selecting orders by their dates. By default, it is the current business date.
## The table This table holds all the sales orders that match the selection criteria you've specified. You can process all listed items or only those you select.
Column Description
Type The type of the order.
Reference no. The reference number of the order.
Customer The customer, by its ID, that has initiated the order.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Location

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The location of the customer related to the order.
Location name

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The name of the customer location.
Customer order The reference number of the document used by the customer.
Status The status of the invoice. This can be: Credit hold, On hold, Balanced, Voided, Scheduled, Open, Closed, Pending print, Pending email, and Reserved.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period to post transactions generated by the document.
Amount The total amount of the document
Currency The currency of the invoice.
Invoice text The additional invoice description entered in the top part of the document.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.

Related pages

Windows

 Sales invoices history by item (SO40104S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-invoices-history-by-item-so40104s page You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on all released invoices created from sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales invoices history by item (SO40104S) You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on all released invoices created from sales orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on sales invoice lines that have a connection to a sales order. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the invoice history for.
Item class The item class of the items to be included in the report. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class The class of the customers to be included in the report.
Salesperson The salesperson for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
## The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

 Sales by item and customer (AR40103S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-by-item-and-customer-ar40103s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales by item and customer (AR40103S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View item Click this to open the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window where you see the details on the item on the invoice selected in the table.
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the customer account of the customer selected in the table.
View document Click this to open the Sales invoices (AR301000) window where you see the details on the invoice document selected in the table.
## The top part
Column Description
From period Select the period starting from which documents will be displayed in the table.
To period Select the period until which documents will be displayed in the table.
Customer The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customers.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customer classes.
Salesperson The ID and name of the salesperson that was involved in sales for the transactions to be listed. Leave the field blank to view a broader range of results.
Item The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Item class The item class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all item classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information.
Include unreleased When this check box is selected, unreleased documents are also displayed in the table.
View details Click this to display the Reference number and Discount (%) columns in the table by default.
Total quantity The total quantity of items on the invoices displayed in the table.
Total amount The total amount of the invoices displayed in the table.
## The table Table columns with the **View details** option selected.
Column Description
Customer The ID of the customer to whom the invoice is created.
Customer name The name of the customer to whom the invoice is created.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Telephone no The default phone number of the customer.
Reference number The reference number of the document.
Type The type of the invoice document.
Item The item ID.
Item description The description of the item charged on the invoice. Click the item ID to see the details on it.
Period The financial period to which the invoice is posted.
Total quantity The total quantity of items on the invoice.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.
Unit price The unit price of the item.
Discount (%) The discount rate used on the invoice.
Discount amount The amount of discount on the invoice.
Total amount The total amount of the invoice.
Last sale date The date when a sale was last made to the customer.
Account The sales account used for the transaction.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
Currency unit price The unit price of the item in currency.
Customer class The customer class of the customer.
Description The description of the sales account used for the transaction.
Discount amount (currency) The amount of discount on the invoice in currency.
Item class The item class to which the item belongs.
Released When this check box is selected, the invoice has been released.
Salesperson The ID of the salesperson who has sold the items to the customer.
Salesperson name The name of the salesperson who has sold the items to the customer.
Subaccount The subaccount used on the invoice.
Total amount (currency) The total amount of the invoice in currency.

Related pages

Windows

 Sales invoices - overview (AR40104S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-invoices-overview-ar40104s page Use this inquiry to check up the status of invoices and to get an overview of them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales invoices - overview (AR40104S) Use this inquiry to check up the status of invoices and to get an overview of them. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Status

The status of the sales invoices to be viewed.

To view all invoices regardless of their status, select View all (default).
Customer class The customer class for whose customers’ invoices you want to view.
Customer

The customer whose invoices you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view the invoices of all customers.
Currency To view invoices in a certain currency, select a currency here.
Type

The type of invoices you want to view.

If there is no selection, all types of invoices will be displayed.
Show details To quickly see all unpaid documents for the invoices in your view, select the Show details check box, or click the link in the Documents column. The Summary view tab changes to the Details view and you can see all documents and their statuses.
Overdue documents only Select Overdue documents only if you want to list only the documents that are overdue.
Show closed, scheduled, and voided When this check box is selected, you also see closed, scheduled, and voided invoices in the table.
From due date The due date of the invoices to be displayed in the table starts from this date.
From cash discount date The cash discount date of the invoices to be displayed in the table starts from this date.
From period The period to which the invoices to be displayed in the table belong starts from this period.
From document date The document date of the invoices to be displayed in the table starts from this date.
To due date The due date of the invoices to be displayed in the table ends to this date.
To cash discount date The cash discount date of the invoices to be displayed in the table ends to this date.
To period The period to which the invoices to be displayed in the table belong ends to this period.
To document date The document date of the invoices to be displayed in the table ends to this date.
Detail total The amount of the invoice details in total.
VAT taxable total The amount of the invoice that is VAT taxable in total.
VAT exempt total The amount of the invoice that is VAT exempt in total.
VAT total The amount of VAT on the invoice in total.
Balance The balance of the invoice.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the invoice.
Amount The amount of the invoice.
Cash discount The amount of cash discount on the invoice.
## The table Table columns with the **Show details** option selected.
Element Description
Status The status of the invoice.
Type The type of the invoice.
Ref no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Customer The number of the customer on the invoice.
Customer name The name of the customer on the invoice.
Currency The currency of the invoice.
Detail total The amount of the invoice details in total.
VAT amount The VAT amount on the invoice.
Total incl. VAT The total amount of the invoice including VAT.
Balance The balance of the invoice.
Overdue amount The overdue amount of the invoice.
Document date The document date of the documents on the invoice.
Due date The due date of the documents on the invoice.
Pay date The pay date of the invoice.
Days overdue The number of days the invoice is overdue.
Days before due The number of days before the invoice will be overdue.
Printed When this check box is selected, the invoice has been printed.
Do not print When this check box is selected, the invoice will not be printed.
Emailed When this check box is selected, the invoice has been emailed.
Do not email When this check box is selected, the invoice will not be emailed.
Send to AutoInvoice When this check box is selected, the invoice will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sent to AutoInvoice When this check box is selected, the invoice has been sent to AutoInvoice.
Sent date The date when the invoice was sent.
AutoInvoice status The AutoInvoice status of the invoice.
AutoInvoice delivery status The AutoInvoice delivery status of the invoice.
AutoInvoice sent by The sender of the invoice to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice error message Possible error message from AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice ID The AutoInvoice ID of the invoice.
Sending method The method to be used to send the invoice to AutoInvoice.
Balance (currency) The balance of the invoice in currency.
Cash discount The amount of cash discount on the invoice.
Cash discount date The cash discount date of the invoice.
Detail total (currency) The amount of the invoice details in total in currency.
E-invoice address The e-invoice address on the invoice.
Overdue amount (currency) The overdue amount of the invoice in currency.
Period The period to which the invoice has been posted.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the invoice.
Total incl. VAT (currency) The total amount of the invoice including VAT in currency.
VAT exempt total The amount of the invoice that is VAT exempt in total.
VAT taxable total The amount of VAT on the invoice in total.

Related pages

Windows

 Sales order history by item (SO40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-history-by-item-so40102s page You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on sales order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order history by item (SO40102S) You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on sales order lines. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on sales order lines. If you leave all fields empty except for the period, you will get an overview of all items sold in that period. You can group the results by salesperson and owner, and you can also include not completed lines. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the sales order history for. Leave the field blank to include requests for all items.
Item class To view the sales history by class, select an item class. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer To view the sales history by customer, select a customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class To view the sales history by customer class, select a customer class.
Owner The owner is the user to whom the activity is assigned. Select the user for whom you want to view information, or leave the field blank to view information on all owners.
Salesperson The salesperson for whom you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Include not completed lines Select this check box to include lines that are not marked as Completed.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
Group by owner Groups the lines of the table per owner.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
## The table
Column Description
Owner The username of the user to whom the sales activity is assigned.
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Open qty The quantity of the item that was not shipped.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

 Sales shipment history by item (SO40103S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-shipment-history-by-item-so40103s page You use this inquiry to list all sales by item, based on shipment lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales shipment history by item (SO40103S) You use this inquiry to list all sales by item, based on shipment lines. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on shipment lines. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the shipment history for.
Item class The item class of the items to be included in the report. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class The class of the customers to be included in the report.
Salesperson The salesperson for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
Include not confirmed lines If you select this check box, all shipment statuses will be included in this inquiry. It will also show lines for items where the ordered quantity is partly delivered.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
## The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

 Sales orders (SO301000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000 section You can use this window to create new sales and transfer orders with the order types defined in the system, as well as to view and edit the details of existing sales and transfer orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales orders (SO301000) You can use this window to create new sales and transfer orders with the order types defined in the system, as well as to view and edit the details of existing sales and transfer orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can cancel an order, and you can create a shipment or prepare an invoice for an existing order. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order/) + [Create a sales order with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-allocations/) + [Create a sales order with reserved allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-reserved-allocations/) + [Change customer or customer location on sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-order/) + [Create a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order/) + [Process a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-a-transfer-order/) + [Process authorised returns (RM)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-authorised-returns-rm/) + [Process cash returns (CR)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-cash-returns-cr/) + [Process returns for credit (RC)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-for-credit-rc/) + [Process returns with replacement (RR)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-with-replacement-rr/) + [Create multiple shipments for the same sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order/) + [Add notes to sales order printouts](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/add-notes-to-sales-order-printouts/) + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) + [Update a column for all order lines](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines/) + [Reverse an invoice with excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/reverse-an-invoice-with-excise-duty/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

  • Create shipment To create a shipment for the sales order. When you invoke this action, the Specify shipment parameters dialog box opens.

    Note

    For a sales order line that has an open shipment, you cannot create a new shipment until the open shipment is confirmed.

  • Create receipt To create a receipt for an order involving an authorised customer return; you invoke this action when the goods are actually received. The Specify shipment parameters dialog box opens where you can select for which warehouse you want to create the receipt. You can repeat this for all warehouses.

  • Open order To change the status of the document to Open from Back order (after the goods that were back ordered have been received).

  • Reopen order To change the Cancelled status of the order to Open if you need to correct or delete the shipments created for the order.

  • Copy order To copy the order to a new order. When you invoke this action, the Copy to dialog box opens. In the dialog box, you can select whether to recalculate prices and discounts and whether to cancel manual discounts.

    Note

    The allocations performed for any line of the original order are not copied, even for orders that require allocations.

    Note

    If you choose to copy the order by using the Copy/paste menu on the toolbar, while prices and discounts a recopied from the original order (without automatic updating and without recalculation of discounts), allocations are again not copied to a new order.

Send by email
To initiate the process of sending the sales order as an email.
Release from credit hold
To change the status of the document from Credit hold to Open if the customer passes the credit check.
Prepare invoice
To prepare an invoice for the order.
Create purchase order
To create a purchase order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order.
Cancel order
To cancel the order regardless of its status. If you cancel an order for which there are confirmed shipments, you need to reopen the order to delete the shipments.
Create transfer order
You can create a transfer order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order. When you click this action, the system redirects you to the Create transfer orders (SO509000) window.
Place on back order
To change the status of this sales order to Back order.
Recalculate prices
To open the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.
Reports Provides navigation to the Sales order (SO64111S) report report, which you can use to print the sales order or quote for sending it to the customer.
Try out the new version

Opens the current order in the new Sales orders (SO30100S) window.

Note

This button is only available for orders with the order type SO, CS, IN or QT.
### The Specify shipment parameters dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the parameters of a new shipment that will be created for the order.
Column Description
Shipment date The date of the new shipment. By default, it is the current business date.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item will be shipped.
### The Copy to dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used to copy the selected order to a new one. The allocations performed for any line of the original order are not copied.
Column Description
Order type The type of the new order, which will be a copy of the selected order.
Order no. The system will assign a new order number to the copy of the selected order.
Recalculate unit prices Select this check box if you want the system to replace the item prices with the current prices, in the copy of the selected order.
Recalculate discounts Select this check box if you want the system to recalculate the discounts for the copy of the selected order.
Override manual discounts Select this check box if you want the system to cancel the manual discounts for the copy of the order, and search for applicable automatic discounts.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used for updating prices and discounts for the sales order.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. You can select one of the following options:

Current line
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line
All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines
Set current unit prices Select this check box if you want the system to replace the item prices with the current prices, in the selected line or all lines.
Override manual prices

Select this check box if you want the system to replace the item prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit price or Manual amount column), with the current prices.

The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected. Once the manual prices are overridden in the document, the system clears the Manual price check boxes in the appropriate document lines.
Recalculate discounts Select this check box if you want the system to recalculate the discounts for the selected line or all lines.
Override manual line discounts Select this check box if you want the system to cancel the manual discounts for the selected line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field), and search for the applicable automatic discounts.
## The top part
Element Description
Order type

Select one of the predefined order types or a custom order type created in the Order types (SO201000) window.

If an order type does not appear in the list of options, make sure the Active check box is selected for it in the Order types (SO201000) window.

For details on each type, see About predefined types of sales orders. The predefined order types include the following:

Credit note (CM)
A document created when goods rejected by the customer are returned.
Cash return (CR)
A document used to record returns for cash sales.
Cash sale (CS)
A document created to account for a cash sale that doesn’t require shipping.
Invoice (IN)
A document used to invoice the customer for the shipped goods.
Quote (QT)
An agreement to sell specific goods with a specified price to the customer in the future.
Return for credit (RC)
A document created to authorise a customer return for credit in the amount of the returned goods only.
Generic authorised return (RM)
A document created to authorise a customer return of another type, such as a return with replacement by another item, or a return that may require additional charges.
Return with replacement (RR)
A document created to authorise a customer return for an exact replacement.
Sales order with allocation (SA)
(This option is only available if the Sales order to purchase order link functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) A customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date; this request requires the reservation of the requested quantities of the items. Once you save an order of this type, the quantities of items are added to the Sales orders allocated plan types.
Note

For details, see: About sales orders with allocations.

Sales order (SO)
A customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date.
Transfer (TR)
This option is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. A document used to account for transferring goods from one warehouse to another for replenishment.
Order no. The order number of the document. For new documents, the system automatically generates this number by using the number series assigned to documents of the type.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following options:

  • On hold: Indicates that the order is on hold, which means that additions and changes can be made and order quantities do not affect the item availability. Deselect the Hold check box to initiate the following operations:

    1. A credit check for the customer (if it is required for this customer)
    2. The assignment for approval (if approval is configured in your system)
    3. The assignment of the Open status to the order if the credit check was successful and if the order was approved automatically

  • Credit hold: This status is only available for orders of the QT, SO, SA, IN, and CM order types. Indicates that the customer has failed the credit check, which the system performed when the order was taken off hold or saved with the On hold check box deselected. An order with this status can be saved with only the Credit hold or On hold status if the Hold document on failed credit check check box is selected for the order type in the Order types (SO201000) window. Once you have received payments from the customer, you can apply the Release from credit hold action.

Note

To subject the orders (of the SO, SA, TR, and QT types) that have been taken off credit hold to approval, add appropriate conditions (checking if the Credit hold check box is selected in the Sales orders window) to the approval map. Otherwise, the order will get the Open status.

  • Open: Indicates (if applicable) that the sales order is not on hold anymore, the customer has passed the credit check, the order has been approved (if approval is required), and shipment has not yet occurred. If approval of sales orders of this type is required in your organisation, open orders cannot be edited.

For a particular open order, you can create a shipment by clicking the Create shipment action, or you can create multiple shipments for multiple open orders by using the Process orders (SO501000) window. When you create shipments for multiple orders, the system checks the availability of each item; if a shipment cannot be created according to the shipping rules (for details, see: About shipping rules), the system assigns the Back order status to the order.

  • Cancelled: Indicates that the order has been cancelled. You can cancel an order if it has one of the following statuses: On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, Rejected, Back order, or Open. To cancel an order with the Completed status, you need to reopen the order to delete the shipments and then cancel the order. You can not cancel an order that has the Shipping status.
  • Shipping: (This status is not available for some return orders and orders of the CS and IN order types.) Indicates that the order is being shipped. If a shipment can be created according to the shipping rules, the order’s status changes to Shipping. Each confirmed shipment updates the data on the order showing how many items are being shipped ( Qty. on shipments ) and how many items are still to be shipped ( Open qty. ).
  • Back order: (This status is only available for sales orders of the SO and SA types.) Indicates that the order cannot be shipped because the specified items are not available. You can assign this status to an open order manually if when you attempt to create a shipment, the system detects that the order cannot be shipped in full and displays a message about this. This status can be assigned to orders automatically when you run the Create shipments process by using the Process orders (SO501000) window if the shipping rules specified on the document level and on the line level do not allow shipment creation. If the Replan back orders check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window, on release of the appropriate inventory receipts, the requested quantities of items are re-planned (booked) for back orders, so that you can create shipments for these back orders by running the Create shipment process in the Process orders (SO501000) window.
  • Invoiced: Means that the invoices for the order have been generated. This status is available only for orders of types that involve updating customer ledger; it is not used for transfer ( TR ), quote ( QT ), and return for replacement ( RR ) orders.
  • Completed: Indicates that all related inventory documents required for the order type have been generated and released. Completed orders of the QT order type can be opened again.
Note

For details on statuses, see: About sales order processing options.
Hold

A check box that you select if the document is on hold and should not be processed further at this time.

Deselect the check box to perform an automatic credit check for the customer (if configured) and then, if approval of sales orders is configured in your system, to assign the order for approval.
Date The date of the document.
Requested on The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; this date provides the default values for the Requested on dates for order lines. The default value is the current business date.
Customer order

(This field does not appear for orders of the TR type.)

The reference number of the original customer document that the sales order is based on.
External ref. The reference number of the sales order in a third-party application if Visma Net is integrated with such an application and imports the sales orders from it.
Customer

The customer that has ordered the goods or services.

If the TR order type is selected, Customer is read-only and displays your company ID and business name.
Location

(This field only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services have been ordered. If the Transfer order type has been selected, use this box to select the company location related to the transfer.
Contact The contact person of the customer.
Currency

(This field appears for all order types except the Transfer order type, if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The currency of the document.

To the right of the currency you have the exchange rate. Clicking the Exchange rate drop-down list, will open the Rate selection dialog box, where you can view and change the details of the exchange rate.

For the documents with amounts in foreign currency, the Currency toggle button switches the currency of the amounts between the base currency and the selected foreign currency. The label on the Currency toggle button depends on the currently selected currency of the amount:

View base: The amount is displayed in the foreign currency; click the button to view the amount in the base currency.

View currency: The amount is displayed in the base currency; click the button to view the amount in the foreign currency.

The Currency toggle button does not affect the documents with amounts in the base currency only.

Note

You can only change the customer’s default currency and rate when the Enable currency override and Enable rate override check boxes are selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Destination warehouse

(This field only appears if the TR order type is selected.)

The warehouse to which the goods should be transferred.
Credit hold

(This check box does not appear if the TR order type is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that this customer order is on credit hold. This happens if the customer does not comply with the credit verification rules and if the Check credit on entry option is selected for orders of this type in the Order types (SO201000) window. However, if you need to create a new sales order for this customer as an exception and you, based on a user role, have access to the Credit hold check box, you can clear the Credit hold check box, save the order, and release the order. The initial amount of the order serves as this document’s credit limit, and if a user increases the amount, the system does not allow the order to be removed from credit hold in this way.
Project

(This field is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to customer invoices.
Print line note on internal sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to order confirmations.
Description A brief description of the document.
Ordered qty. The sum of the quantity for all lines, with the exception of lines with line type Misc. charge.
VAT exempt total

(This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT taxable total

(This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The document total that is subject to VAT. The VAT taxable amount is only displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field is empty.

Note

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document is added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.
VAT total The total amount of tax paid on the document.
Order total

The total amount of the document, which is calculated as follows:

Line total + Misc. total + Freight + Premium freight

– Discount total + VAT total + Excise duty total
Discount total The total amount of discount on the sales order.
Total line discount The total amount of line discounts on the order.
Total profit The total profit calculated from the lines of the order. This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Margin total The total margin calculated from the lines of the order. This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Mark-up total The total mark-up on the order. This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Total cost

The total of the extended costs on the lines of the sales order. If the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box is selected, the Total cost is the total of replacement costs on the lines of the sales order.

This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
ROT or RUT deductible document Select this check box if the amount on this document is applicable for ROT or RUT deduction. The ROT and RUT details tab will appear and the columns RUT or ROT deductible, Item type, Type of work and Deductible amount will be displayed in the Document details tab table.
Use replacement cost for margin/profit When this option is selected, the line level profit and margin values are calculated based on the line’s Supplier price or the line item’s last cost, instead of the Unit cost.
Excise duty total The total of the amounts in the Excise duty amount column in the Document details tab.
## The Document details tab This tab has a table that lists all the items included in the sales order. The line numbers are assigned automatically and are changed automatically when you reorder the lines. Information on the applied manual discounts and the **Line** -level discounts (if any are configured in your system) is shown on the tab. > [!NOTE] > When you are creating a new order, you can enter the data manually or import the order details from a file in.xlsx or.csv format. When you select a line, more information about the availability for the line item is displayed in the table footer. See the table footer description below for more information.
Button Description
Allocations

(This button is only available if at least one of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Sales order to purchase order link, Multiple warehouse locations, and Lot and serial tracking.)

Opens the Allocations dialog box so that you can allocate the stock for the order and specify warehouse locations and lot or serial numbers of the items, if required for the order by order type settings.

For more details, see: the Order types (SO201000) window.
Add sales invoice

(This button is enabled for only return orders).

Opens the Add invoice details dialog box so that you can add a line or multiple lines from the selected invoice to this return order.
Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box, which shows the item availability at various warehouses and lets you add items to the sales order.
Purchase order link

(This button is only available for lines that have the Mark for purchase order check box selected.)

Opens the Purchasing details dialog box, which you use to link the sales order to an existing purchase order that has the required item listed.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up to display availability information about the selected stock item.
Assemble

A button that opens the Kit assembly dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
Kit specification

A button that opens the Kit specifications dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications (IN209500) window is available both for stock and non-stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
View kit assembly Click this button to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
### The table
Column Description
Branch The branch that sells the item. This column only appears if you have multiple branches.
Invoice no.

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

A column that holds the reference number of the original invoice (which lists the goods that were ordered and later returned by the customer).
Operation

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

The operation to be performed in the Inventory workspace to fulfill the order. An order of the RR or RM type includes lines with theReceipt operation and lines with the Issue operation. Orders of other return types include only lines with the Receipt operation.

Note

When you create an order of the RM type, you cannot save the order with the Open status until its balance is negative. Make sure the Hold check box is selected until you have added all the replacement and refund lines.

Note

For more details on return orders, see: Process returns.
Item ID The stock or non-stock item to be sold or returned, by its item ID.
Create issue automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that for each order line of the Receipt type in RR and RM orders, a line of the Issue type will be created automatically after the Receipt lines have been processed.
Free item

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the stock item specified in the row is a free item. You can add a free item manually, or it can be added automatically as a result of application of a group-level discount configured in the Discounts (AR209500) window.

If you select this check box for the item, the system updates the Unit price, Discount percent, Discount amount, and Manual amount amounts with 0 and selects the Manual discount check box.
Warehouse

The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item should be delivered.

This column only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Kit assembly

A link that opens the Kit assembly (IN307000) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
Kit specifications

A link that opens the Kit specifications (IN209500) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications dialog box is available both for stock and non-stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
View kit assembly Click this link to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.
Quantity The quantity of the item sold, measured in the UoM.
Qty. on shipments A read-only column that displays the quantity of the stock item being prepared for shipment and already shipped for this order.
Open qty. The quantity of the item to be shipped; that is, the total quantity minus the quantity shipped according to closed shipment documents.
Unit cost

The cost for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item. For information about how the unit cost is calculated, see About item costs and valuation methods.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
Unit price The price for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item. If you had entered the unit price manually and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. If you want to replace this price with the sales price currently available for the item, use the Recalculate prices action.
Manual price

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unit price in this line has been corrected or specified manually. If you clear this check box, the system updates the unit price in the document line with the current price (if one is specified).

If you change the customer number in the sales order or return order, the system does not update unit prices in the lines for which this check box is selected.

Note

For more information on changing the customer number in a sales order, see: About sales order processing options.
Discount code (The column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and it is not available for orders of the Transfer type.) The code of the discount that has been applied to this line.
Discount series (The column is hidden by default and is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The ID of the discount sequence that has been applied to this line.
Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item (if the item is not a free item).

A selected Manual discount check box indicates that the percent of the discount is specified by the line discount that has been applied manually, or has been entered manually or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.
Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item (if the item is not a free item).

The selected Manual discount check box indicates that the amount of the discount is based on the line discount that has been applied manually, or has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually for this line item.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.
Manual discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, or you can select the discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application. If you select the Free item check box for the line item, the Manual discount check box is selected automatically.

Note

If you change the customer number in the sales order or return order, the system does not update the line-level discounts in the lines for which this check box is selected. For more information on changing the customer number in a sales order, see: About sales order processing options.
Disc. unit price The unit price, which has been recalculated after the application of discounts.
Average cost

The total cost of the item in the warehouse, divided by the total quantity of the item in the warehouse.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
Manual amount

The unit price multiplied by the quantity, deducted with the line discount.

If you had entered the manual amount once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. If you want the manual amount to be recalculated automatically based on the applicable sales price, use the Recalculate prices action. If the Free item check box is selected for this stock item, the manual amount is set to 0.
Term start date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should start for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.
Term end date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.
Excise duty amount The total excise duty amount for the line. The Date in the top part of the window determines which duty rate is used (from the Duty rates (EF207000) window).
Amount not yet invoiced (This column is not available for orders of the Transfer type.) The amount not yet invoiced for the line, calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order. The line’s excise duty amount is not included.
Requested on The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; the default value is specified in the Requested on field in the top part. These dates can be different for different lines if the order-level shipping rule is Back orders allowed. For information on shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.
Ship on

The date when the item should be shipped. By default, this date is calculated as a date that is earlier than the Requested on date (for this line) by the number of lead days but not earlier than the current business date. You can modify the date only if the order-level shipping rule is set to the Back orders allowed option on the Delivery settings tab.

Note

If you change the Requested on date for the order, the system prompts you to choose whether you want to keep the dates specified for each line or to update the respective dates with the new Requested on date.

In the Process orders (SO501000) window, you can select the orders for creating shipments by the Ship on dates specified in their lines if you select the By ship date option in the Select by field and specify the range for scheduled shipment dates in the Start date and End date fields.
Shipping rule

The way the line item should be shipped. Select one of the following options:

Back orders allowed
The ordered quantity can be delivered in multiple shipments. If the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped, and the remaining quantity (open quantity) can be shipped later. The line is not completed until it has a non-zero open quantity. The order gets the Back order status.
Cancel remainder
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment, but if the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.
Ship only when complete
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment. If the ordered quantity is not available for shipping, the order with this line gets the Back order status.
Note

For more information, see: About shipping rules.
Undership threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) to consider the order shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Overship threshold (%) The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Completed A check box that can be selected to indicate to the system that this line is completed.
Mark for purchase order

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order line was marked for purchasing (if it has not been shipped completely). If you select this check box, the line will be visible in the Purchases workspace and available for adding to a purchase order.

The Mark for purchase order check box can be selected if the line item is a stock item or non-stock item that has both the Require shipment and Require receipt check boxes selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Supplier price

This field is populated with the first available value in the following order of priority:

  1. The default supplier’s price for the item set in the Supplier prices (AP202000) window, the Price column.
  2. The default supplier’s Last supplier price, collected from the Stock items (IN202500) window, the Supplier details tab.

You can override the default supplier for the line item by changing the Supplier column for the line.

You can set the Supplier price manually if the Override supplier price check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window, the General information tab.
Purchase order source

The type of purchase order to be used to fulfill this line, which can be one of the following options:

See also:
Lot/serial no. (This column only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is only available for orders of the RR type.) The lot or serial number of the item for returns.
Expiration date The expiration date for the item with the specified lot number. The column only appears for orders of the RR type.
Reason code

The reason code to be used for creation or cancellation of the order, if applicable. A reason code is required on creation of orders of the CR predefined order type.

Only reason codes with the Sales or Issue usage can be selected.
Salesperson ID (This column only appears if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is not available for orders of the TR type.) The salesperson associated with the sale of the line item.
VAT category (This column is not available for orders of the TR type.) The VAT category ID that applies to the line item. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Commissionable (This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is not available for orders of the TR type.) A check box that indicates that this line is subjected to sales commission. The details of commissions are shown on the Commissions tab.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID for the item, such as the item ID used by the customer.
Line description The description provided for the stock item.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Combine sales sub. from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column.
Project task (This column is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.
Extended cost

The extended cost of the item, which is the unit cost multiplied by the quantity. You can manually enter an amount that is not based on the unit cost.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
External link In this column, you can write a reference for the line to any other document or system.
Account The income account to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Use sales account from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Order type The type of sales order in which this line item is listed.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order in which this line item is listed.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
Line type

The line type for the sales order line, which can be one of the following options:

Misc. charge
for non-stock items that do not require shipment.
Goods for warehouse
for stock items.
Non-stock goods:
for non-stock items that require shipment.
Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
Base order qty The quantity of the item sold, expressed in the base unit of measure. This quantity is used for calculating discounts if The base UOM option is selected in the Apply quantity discounts to field on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
ROT or RUT deductible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line item is ROT or RUT deductible, according to its settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window. This only applies to non-stock items.
Item type

The Item type applies to a ROT or RUT deductible document. You can edit this column. The type of the item, as selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, the ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section, the Type field. For a stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

For a non-stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

When there is no Type selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, Other cost is the default type.
Type of work The type of work the line item is related to, according to the item’s settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) window. You can edit this column.
Deductible amount Read-only column. The amount your client can deduct for the line item, if the item is ROT or RUT deductible.
Supplier The supplier that will supply the item, by its ID.
Supplier name The name of the supplier that will supply the item.
Supplier currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier, by its ID.
Supplier UoM The item’s unit of measure used by the supplier.
### The table footer When you select a line, more information about the line item is displayed in the table footer.
Element Description
On hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the warehouse.
available for assembly (This element only appears when you select a line with a stock kit.) The quantity of kits that can be assembled based on component availability.
available The quantity available of the item at the specified warehouse, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class. When you select a line with a non-stock kit, the quantity of this non-stock kit on open and on hold sales orders is displayed in round brackets.
available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected warehouse.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.
allocated The quantity of the item that is reserved in any of the available warehouses.
Profit

The profit on the line.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
Margin

The margin on the line.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
Mark-up

The markup on the line.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
Replacement cost for the unit or Expected unit cost

The cost or expected cost to replace the item.

When the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box in the top part is selected, the Replacement cost for the unit is collected from the Supplier price column in the table. If Supplier price is not set, the Replacement cost for the unit is set as the item’s Last cost, collected from the Stock items (IN202500) window, the Price/cost information tab, the Cost statistics section.

When the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box in the top part is not selected, the Expected unit cost is collected from the Unit cost column in the table.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
### The Add sales invoice details dialog box (This dialog box is only available for the following document types: **credit notes (CM)**, **generic authorised returns** ( **RM)**, **returns for credit (RC)**, or **returns with replacements (RR)**.) You use this dialog box to add lines from an existing document of the selected type to this return order. The dialog box provides a top part and a table. The selected lines of the documents are added to the return order without changes: The system makes no price or discount updates, and no updates due to exchange rate fluctuations.
Element Description
Type The type of documents available for selection in the dialog box, which can be one of the following: Invoice, Cash sale, or Debit note.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document whose lines you want to add to the return order.
Show non-stock kits by component

A check box that you select for the table to display the stock item components of non-stock kits if there are any in the selected document.

If this check box is cleared, non-stock kits are displayed as is.
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the stock item or kit specified in the document line.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item was sold.
Location The warehouse location from which the specified quantity of the item was sold.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity

The quantity of the item specified in the document line. For a component of a non-stock kit, this column shows the total quantity, which is the quantity of the non-stock kit specified in the document line multiplied by the quantity of this component assembled in the non-stock kit.

Suppose that in the system there is a non-stock kit, NSKIT1, that includes 5 NSKITITEM1 stock items, and you have processed a sale of 2 NSKIT1 kits.

If you select the Show non-stock kits by components check box, the table will show the document line with the NSKITITEM1 ID and a quantity of 10.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number assigned to the specified quantity of the item.
Line description The description provided for the line in the original document.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Item lookup dialog box In this dialog box, you select the items to be added to the sales order and specify their quantities. By using this dialog box, you can find an item by a string in the item's item ID, alternative item ID, or description, and view the item availability information for various warehouses. You can specify the quantities to be delivered from different warehouses to which your user account has access.
Element Description
Item The item ID of an item, or a string in the item ID, alternative item ID, or description to be searched for.
Barcode The barcode of the item.
Warehouse

(This field only appears if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.)

The warehouse where the items are stocked. Leave the field blank to view information about all warehouses to which you have access.
Item class ID The item class of the item.
Show available items only A check box that indicates (if selected) that only items whose available quantities are greater than 0 will be listed.
All items A button that indicates (if selected) that all items will be searched by using the specified criteria.
Sales after

A button that indicates (if selected) that only items sold to this customer since the particular date (which you specify in the adjacent Sales after field, which appears as soon as you click the button) are searched.

The date that appears by default in the Sales after field is the date three months earlier than the current business date.
Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of sales units of the item (under the specified item ID) that you want to add to the order.
Item ID The item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID and subitem code.
Sales unit The unit of measure used as a sales unit for the item.
Qty. available Calculated as On hand quantity plus quantity in unreleased purchase orders minus the quantity in unreleased sales orders. Note that you can configure the way availability data is calculated in accordance with your company’s policies. You specify calculation options for each item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID for the item, such as the item ID used by the customer or any supplier.
Alt. item ID type The type of alternative codification used for the item if applicable; it can be one of the following options: Customer part number, Supplier part number, Global, or Barcode.
Alternate description The description provided for the alternative item ID.
Warehouse

(This column only appears if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.)

The warehouse where the items are stocked.
Qty. last sales

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The quantity of the item last sold to the customer.
Currency

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The currency of the price.
Last unit price

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The price used for the last sale.
Last sales date

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The date of the last sale.
Item class ID The item class of the item.
Item class description The description provided for the item class.
Price class ID The price class of the item.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Purchasing details dialog box (This dialog box is only available if the order line has a **Mark for purchase order** check box selected.) You use this dialog box to link the line of the sales order that has been marked for purchasing to one or more purchase orders. The dialog box provides a top part and a table.
Element Description
Purchase order source

The source to be used to fulfill this line, which can be one of the following options: Purchase to order or Drop ship.

( Drop ship only appears if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Supplier The supplier from which the goods have been ordered. Select a particular supplier, or leave the field blank to view orders for different supplier.
Purchase warehouse

(This field only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The destination warehouse for the items to be purchased.
Columns Description
Purchase type The type of purchase order.
Purchase order no. The reference number of the purchase order, which is a link to the purchase order.
Supplier ref. The reference number used by the supplier.
Line type The line type of the purchase order, which can be one of the following options: Goods for warehouse or Goods for sales order.
Item ID The item by its item ID.
Supplier The supplier that will supply the item, by its ID.
Supplier name The name of the supplier that will supply the item.
Promised The date when the items should be shipped, according to the purchase order.
UoM The unit of measure used for purchases.
Order qty. The quantity of items ordered.
Available quantity The quantity of the item that has not been linked to any sales order and is available for the sales order.
Open qty. The quantity of items that were not shipped.
Line description The description provided for the line in the purchase order.
Button Description
Save Adds the selected lines to the order and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Inventory summary dialog box Here you can view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses. For more information about this window, see [Inventory summary (IN401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000/). ## The VAT details tab This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type. The columns in this tab, which the system fills out automatically when you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), contain information on all individual taxes applied to the document lines. The VAT listed on the tab are those that are included in both the VAT categories of line items and the VAT zone of the customer shipping location.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT.
## The Commissions tab On the **Commissions** tab of the window, you can view the commissions calculated for this sales order. This tab only appears if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.
Element Description
Default salesperson The ID of a salesperson to be used by default for each sales order line.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The salesperson who participated in sales.
Commission (%) The percentage of commission generally earned by the salesperson.
Commission amt. The commission amount earned by the salesperson on this document.
Commissionable amount The amount used to calculate the commission.
## The Financial settings tab This tab holds the customer's invoice information for the sales order. ### The Invoice information section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to override the default contact information.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Override address A check box that you select to override the default address information.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Financial information section
Element Description
Branch The branch with which this order is associated.
Override VAT zone This check box indicates (if selected) that the selected customer’s VAT zone will not be overridden if a ship via code is changed for the order.
Customer VAT zone

(This field is not available for transfer orders.) The VAT zone to be used to process customer sales orders, which generally is the zone associated with the customer’s delivery address.

By default, the customer VAT zone is set to the VAT zone of the customer location specified for the order; if a VAT zone is not specified and the order is to be shipped via a common carrier, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone determined by the postcode of the delivery address; if the order is not to be shipped by a common carrier, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.

If the sales order was created from a quote that has a VAT zone specified, this VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone specified for this quote.

You can override the default VAT zone; to keep the selected VAT zone, select the Override VAT zone check box.
Invoice separately (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should be invoiced separately (that is, it requires a separate invoice).
Invoice no. (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The reference number of the invoice generated for this order. This field is only available for orders of the Invoice (IN) type if the Invoice separately check box is selected in the Order types (SO201000) window for the order type. You can enter a reference number for the invoice (before you click Prepare invoice in the Actions menu on the toolbar) if the numbering sequence assigned to invoices in the Order types (SO201000) window is configured for manual numbering.
Invoice date (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The date of the invoice generated for the order. You can enter the date manually if the Invoice separately check box is selected for the order type in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Terms (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Due date (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The due date of the invoice according to the payment terms.
Cash discount date (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The date when the cash discount is available for the invoice based on the payment terms.
Post period The period to post the transactions generated by the invoice.
Work group The work group responsible for the sales order.
Owner The user in the work group who is responsible for the sales order.
Orig. order type The type of the original order; this field is available only for returns.
Orig. order no. The reference number of the original sales order (for returns).
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order was emailed.
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the Buyer’s financial accounts.
Originator document ref. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.
Contract document ref. The identification of a contract.
Customer project The project number requested by the customer. When a project number is entered in this field, it will replace the internal project number when sending to AutoInvoice for VismaXML and PEPPOL BIS. When nothing is filled in, the internal project number will be sent to AutoInvoice.
## The Payment settings tab This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.
Element Description
Payment method The payment method to be used to pay for the sales order. By default, it is the customer’s default payment method, but you can select another method for the order.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the customer payment method. The field is filled in automatically with the cash account specified as the default for the selected method.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Processing status Read only. This field shows the processing status of the card transaction returned by a processing centre after a user has initiated authorisation, capture, or void.
PC response reason Read only. This field shows the processing details of the card transaction returned by a processing centre after a user has initiated authorisation, capture, or void.
Pre-auth.no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the authorisation transaction returned by a processing centre after a user has initiated authorisation.
Authentication expires on Read only. This field shows the date when the transaction authorisation expires.
Pre-authorised amount Read only. This field shows the amount that has been authorised.
Payment total Read only. This field shows the payment total amount.
Unpaid balance Read only. This field shows the amount that has not been paid if the sales order was paid partially.
Register transaction no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the transaction that captured the specified amount.
Orig. PC ref. no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the transaction in the processing centre.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains delivery information, including the customer's ship-to address, shipping terms, and zone. Also, you can specify the boxes to be used for the order. ### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to override the default contact information.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Override address A check box that you select if this is not the default address of the customer.
Address 1 The first line of the delivery address.
Address 2 The second line of the delivery address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Delivery information section
Element Description
Sched. shipment The date when the ordered goods are scheduled to be shipped. By default, it is the date that is specified in the Requested on field minus the number of lead days, but it is not earlier than the current business date. You can set this date manually.
Ship separately This check box indicates (if selected) that the goods for the customer should be shipped separately for each sales order.
Shipping rule

An option that controls whether incomplete and partial shipments for the order are allowed. Select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
This option indicates that the required quantity should be delivered in one shipment. Nothing will be shipped until the complete quantity is in stock.
Back orders allowed
This option indicates that the required quantity can be delivered in more than one shipment, with the remainder back-ordered.
Cancel remainder
This option indicates that the required items should be delivered in one shipment, but if the requested quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.

For more information on processing sales orders with different shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.
Cancel by The date when the order should be cancelled if the Back orders allowed option has been selected in the Shipping rule field. The suggested date in this field is generated based on the value in the Days to keep field on the General settings tab in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Cancelled A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order has been cancelled on the date specified in Cancel by.
Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse from which the goods should be shipped; the warehouse specified here appears as the default ship-from warehouse in the Shop for rates dialog box for all the packages.
Ship via

The ship via code that represents the carrier and its service to be used for shipping the ordered goods. For this ship via code, ifManual is specified as the freight calculation method ,the freight cost must be specified in the Freight cost field on the Totals tab (in this window).

Note

Changing the Ship via code for an open sales order may update the customer VAT zone specified in the Customer VAT zone field on the Financial settings tab. To prevent the selected customer VAT zone from being overridden if the ship via code is changed, select the Override VAT zone check box on the Financial settings tab.
Packages (button) Opens the Shop for rates dialog box, so you can manually select the boxes for the order or view the automatically suggested packages if the Automatic packaging functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
FOB point The point where ownership of the goods is transferred to the customer.
Priority (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can only be used for informational purposes.) The level of priority for processing orders of this customer, as specified for the customer on the Delivery settings tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used for this customer.
Shipping zone The shipping goods of the customer.
Residential delivery A check box that you select to indicate that the shipment should be delivered to a residential area.
Saturday delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order may be delivered on Saturday.
Insurance A check box that you select to indicate that insurance is required for this order.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Transaction type

A pick list where you select the transaction type to be used for Intrastat reporting.

You can also set a default transaction type for each order type. This is done in the Order types (SO201000) window.
### The Shop for rates dialog box By using this dialog box (which appears when you click the **Packages** button), you can manually select the boxes and specify their gross weight. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system automatically calculates the optimal set of packages for each order or shipment, and you can view and adjust them, if needed. > [!NOTE] > The particular packages defined with the help of the **Shop for rates** dialog box will be used for shipment only if you select the **Manual packaging** check box in this dialog box; if you do not, the system may recalculate the packages when it creates a consolidated shipment or the order is changed.
Element Description
Order weight The total weight of the order in the base UoM—that is, the weight of the items specified in the sales order. About units of weight and volume.
Package weight The gross weight of the order in the base UoM, which includes the order weight and the weights of the boxes selected for order packaging. weight calculation, see: About units of weight and volume.
Manual packaging This check box indicates (if selected) that the packages selected for the order in this dialog box will be used for shipping. You can select this check box and then select the boxes for the order manually in the Packages table, or you can review the suggested packages and then select the Manual packaging check box. If you select this check box, the packages will not be automatically recalculated to further optimise the cost even if the order is included in a consolidated shipment.
#### The Packages table This table includes the list of boxes used for this order. If the items should be packed manually, you can select the boxes for packages and specify the weight of each package.
Button Description
Refresh packages Recalculates packages for the carrier selected in the Packages table.
Column Description
Box ID The box used for the package.
Description The description provided for the box.
Ship from warehouse The warehouse from which the current package should be shipped. By default, it is the warehouse selected as the Preferred warehouse ID on the Delivery settings tab of this window.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used to specify the package weight.
Gross weight The gross weight of the package, including the weight of the box. For an automatically created package, the weight of the box has been added automatically. For manual packages, you can enter the gross weight.
Declared value

The estimated value of the package, to be used for insurance calculation.

Note

If you need to adjust the declared values for the packages, select the Manual packaging check box to prevent automatic recalculation of packages on any changes to the order or on automatic creation of shipments (which might reset the declared values to 0).
Cost of delivery

This check box indicates (if selected) that the package should be paid for on delivery.

Note

If you need to change this setting (Cost of delivery) for the package, select the Manual packaging check box to prevent automatic recalculation of packages on any changes to the order r on automatic creation of shipments (which might reset the Cost of delivery check box to the default value).
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table showing the **Document**- and **Group**-level discounts that we reapplied to the document. This tab is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window; it is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the sales order. Selecting the check box updates the document total and the line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Discount code The ID (code) of the discount applied to the document.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose series was applied to the document ( Group or Document ).
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually (one of the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as Manual in the Discount codes window).
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount.
## The Shipments tab This tab has a table showing the invoiced shipments for the order.
Column Description
Shipment no. The reference number of a shipment created to fulfill the sales order.
Shipment type The type of the shipment.
Document no. Link to the shipment. Clicking the link opens the Shipments (SO302000) window.
Status The status of the shipment.
Shipment date The date of the shipment.
Shipped qty. The quantity of goods on the shipment.
Shipped weight The weight of the shipped goods in the shipment (net weight).
Shipped volume The volume of the shipment.
Invoice type The type of the invoice.
Invoice no. The reference number of the invoice generated for the shipment.
Inventory doc type The type of inventory document generated for the shipment.
Inventory ref. no. The reference number of the inventory document generated for the shipment.
Operation The inventory operation to be performed for the shipment: Issue or Receipt.
Order type The type of document that was used when creating this shipment. For details on each type, see About predefined types of sales orders.
## The Payments tab (This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.) By using this tab, you can create a prepayment or payment for this sales order or link the order to existing payments or prepayments (to reserve them for the order). No payment can be created for a sales order with any of the following statuses:**Voided**, **Cancelled**, **Pending approval**, or **Rejected**. > [!NOTE] > For more information, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). This tab has a table that shows the prepayments and payments reserved for this sales order.
Button Description
Create prepayment Opens the Payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a prepayment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
Create payment Opens the Payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a payment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so that you can view the details of the selected prepayment or payment.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document available for applying to the sales order.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment document.
Applied to order The amount of the payment to be applied to the order.
Transferred to invoice The amount of the payment that has been applied to the customer ledger invoice generated for the order.
Balance The balance of the order.
Status The status of the payment.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment amount The amount of the payment or prepayment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
## The Totals tab This tab displays the totals calculated for the document. ### The Order totals section
Element Description
Line total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount on all document lines with stock items and non-stock items that require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied. This total does not include the excise duty amounts, freight and premium freight amounts.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Manual amount column on the Document detailstab for lines of the Goods for warehouse and Non-stock goods line type.
Line total incl. excise duty The Line total incl. excise duty is calculated as the Line total + Excise duty total.
Misc. total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount on all document lines with non-stock items that do not require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Manual amount column on the Document details tab for lines with the Misc. charge line type.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document.

This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Document details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total The VAT total calculated for the document.
### The Freight info section
Element Description
Order weight The total weight of the goods according to the document.
Order volume The total volume of goods according to the document.
Package weight Read-only. The total (gross) weight of the packages for this sales order, including the weight of the boxes used for packages. You can modify the gross weight of the packages in the Packages table of the Shop for rates dialog box that you can invoke on the Delivery settings tab by clicking the Packages button.
Freight cost (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The freight cost calculated for the document.
Freight

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The freight amount calculated in accordance with the shipping terms.

Note

For details, see: About freight calculation.
Premium freight

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

Any additional flat charges for handling the order.

Note

To correct the excessive freight charges in a previous order of the customer, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order. When entering a negative freight amount, make sure that the total amount in the order is greater than or equal to zero. Otherwise, an invoice that is generated for the order cannot be released.
Freight VAT category (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The VAT category that applies to the total freight amount. By default, it is the tax category associated with the ship via code selected for the order.
### The Calculated amounts and quantities section
Element Description
Unshipped quantity The quantity of the stock items not yet shipped according to the sales order. The unshipped quantity for each line is specified in the Open qty. column.
Unshipped amount

The sum of unshipped amounts calculated for the lines with non-zero unshipped quantities of stock items.

The unshipped amount for each line is calculated as the amount in the Manual amount column (after Line-level discounts were applied) divided by the line quantity (the Qty. column) and multiplied by the unshipped quantity (the Open qty. column).

At the moment of order creation when no item quantities are shipped, the amount is equal to the Line total + VAT total + Excise duty total; this total does not include any freight amounts.
Quantity not yet invoiced

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The quantity of items that were not yet invoiced.
Amount not yet invoiced

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The sum of not yet invoiced amounts for the lines with stock and non-stock items (in the Amount not yet invoiced column on the Document details tab).

The amount not yet invoiced for each line is calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order.

At the moment of order creation when no invoice is generated, the amount is equal to Line total + Misc. total + Vat total - Discount total + Excise duty total. This total does not include any freight amounts.
Payment total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount that has been paid for this sales order.
Pre-authorised amount

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The amount authorised for the order during the payment processing but not yet captured.
Unpaid balance

The unpaid amount of the order or Order total minus Payments total minus Pre-authorised amount.

Once an invoice for the unpaid amount of the order is generated, the unpaid amount becomes 0.
## The Webhook notification tab {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ## The ROT and RUT details (Sweden) tab This tab is displayed when you select the **ROT or RUT deductible document** check box in the top part of this window. ### The ROT and RUT settings section
Element Description
Distribute automatically (check box) (check box) When this check box is selected, the amount will be distributed equally among the specified personal IDs.
RUT (check box) (check box) Select this option if the work is related to RUT (cleaning, maintenance, laundry) deduction.
ROT (check box) (check box) Select this check box if the work is related to ROT (repairs, conversion, extension) deduction. When you select this, you need to fill in either the Property field, or the Apartment and Corporate ID fields.
Apartment The apartment number.
Property The property number.
Corporate ID The housing cooperative’s ID.
### The ROT and RUT distribution section Here you can add the person(s) who will receive the tax deduction.
Column Description
Personal ID (YYYYMMDDNNNN) The personal ID in the format YYYYMMDDNNNN.
Amount The amount distributed to this person. If the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, you can edit this field and manually distribute the amount among the personal IDs.
Over 65 A check box that you select to indicate that this person is over 65 years old. This is not done automatically.
### The ROT and RUT totals section
Elemant Description
Total deductible amount The total amount that is tax deductible.
Other cost The total amount for items of the Other cost type, including VAT.
Material cost The total amount for items of the Material cost type, including VAT.
Work price The total price of labour hours (items of the Service type), including VAT. This is the amount eligible for tax deduction.
Distributed amount or Undistributed amount

When the Distribute automatically check box is selected, this will display the total amount distributed among the specified personal IDs.

When the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, this will display the amount still to be distributed manually among the specified personal IDs.
### The Balancing documents for ROT and RUT deduction section This section appears after the invoice is balanced, which is either after releasing the invoice or when sending the claim, depending on your setting for **Balance invoices on** on the **ROT and RUT settings (Sweden)** tab in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. You can also invoke the balancing of invoices manually by using the **Balance** action in the [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/) window.
Element Description
Balancing credit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing credit note to the customer, with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
Balancing debit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing debit note to Skatteverket (The Swedish Tax Agency), with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales orders (SO30100S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s section You can use this new window to create a new order with the order types SO, CS, IN and QT, and order types based on these order templates, as well as to view and edit the details of existing orders of this type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales orders (SO30100S) You can use this new window to create a new order with the order types SO, CS, IN and QT, and order types based on these order templates, as well as to view and edit the details of existing orders of this type. > [!NOTE] > that until further notice, this window is a limited version of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. New tabs, fields and functionality will be added continuously.** This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also cancel an order, and you can create a shipment for an order. For more information, see: [Work with sales orders (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/work-with-sales-orders-new/). > [!NOTE] > If you cannot find the functionality you need, you can click on the **Open in classic window** button to continue modifying the order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Create a sales order (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-new/) + [Change the order status](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-the-order-status/) + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) + [Hide and rearrange columns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/hide-and-rearrange-columns/) + [Update a column for all order lines](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines/) + [Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/mark-line-for-purchasing-and-create-purchase-order/) + [Print, email or export an order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/print-email-or-export-an-order/) + [Create a shipment](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-shipment/) ## Keyboard shortcuts The following table gives an overview of the keyboard shortcuts in the **Order lines** tab.
Key Description
Arrow down Moves focus one cell down until the last row. Scrolls table and lists one row down if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow left Moves focus one cell left until the first column. Scrolls table and lists one column left if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow right Moves focus one cell right until the last column. Scrolls table and lists one column right if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow up Moves focus one cell up until the first row. Scrolls table and lists one row up if next cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow down Moves focus to the bottommost cell in the current column, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow left Moves focus to the leftmost cell in the current row, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow right Moves focus to the rightmost cell in the current row, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow up Moves focus to the topmost cell in the current column, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
End Moves focus to the last (right- and bottommost) cell, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Enter

Switches to editing mode for the first input inside the currently focused cell. When you are already in editing mode, it saves the value and returns focus on the cell.

When you are focused on a link inside a cell, it redirects to the linked window.
Esc

When you are in editing mode, it discards any changes to the value and returns focus on the cell.

When you are focused on a link inside a cell, it returns focus on the cell.
Home Moves focus to the first (left- and topmost) cell, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Page down

Scrolls lists down by one page (number of visible rows) or to the bottom row.

Moves focus on the bottommost cell in the current table column.
Page up

Scrolls lists up by one page (number of visible rows) or to the top row.

Moves focus on the topmost cell in the current table column.
Shift + Tab Saves value of current input, if any, and moves focus to previous input or focusable table cell or element outside of the table. Enables table cell edit mode if applicable. Skips cells that are not editable or focusable.
Space Selects or deselects the check box, when editing mode is enabled for a check box inside a cell.
Tab Saves value of current input, if any, and moves focus to next input or focusable table cell or element outside of the table. Enables table cell edit mode if applicable. Skips cells that are not editable or focusable.
## The window toolbar
Button Description
Back Navigates back to the Sales orders list window.
Open in classic window Navigates to the Sales orders (SO301000) window for the selected sales order.
Actions
Email document
To initiate the process of sending the order as an email.
Create purchase order
To create a purchase order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order. This option is available when an order line is marked for purchasing and the order status is Open or Back order.
delete-icon-new Delete order
To delete the order.
Save Saves the document.
Create new order Creates a new document.
Activities Opens a list of all emails created for the customer. The emails are sent according to the set automation schedule.
Element Description
Order type

The available predefined order types are:

Sales order (SO)
A customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date.
Cash sale (CS)
A document created to account for a cash sale that does not require shipping.
Invoice (IN)
A document used to invoice the customer for the shipped goods.
Quote (QT)
An agreement to sell specific goods with a specified price to the customer in the future.
Note

Currently, this window only supports the order types mentioned above. To create orders with other order types, go to the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Order no. The order number of the document. For new documents, the system automatically generates this number by using the number series assigned to documents of the type.
### The following buttons will be available soon
Button Description
Actions

  • Create receipt To create a receipt for an order involving an authorised customer return; you invoke this action when the goods are actually received.

  • Copy order To copy the order to a new order. When you invoke this action, the Copy to dialog box opens. In the dialog box, you can select whether to recalculate prices and discounts and whether to cancel manual discounts.

    Note

    The allocations performed for any line of the original order are not copied, even for orders that require allocations.

    Note

    If you choose to copy the order by using the Copy/paste menu on the toolbar, while prices and discounts a recopied from the original order (without automatic updating and without recalculation of discounts), allocations are again not copied to a new order.

Prepare invoice
To prepare an invoice for the order.
Create transfer order
You can create a transfer order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order. When you click this action, the system redirects you to the Create transfer orders (SO509000) window.
Recalculate prices
To open the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.
Reports Provides navigation to the Order confirmation (SO64111S) report, which you can use to print the sales order or quote for sending it to the customer.
## The top part
Element Description
Collapse Expand You can click this icon to collapse and expand this panel.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following options:

  • Hold: Indicates that the order is on hold and should not be processed further at this time. Orders with the Hold status can be changed to the Open status, and vice versa.
  • Credit hold: Indicates that the customer has failed the credit check.
  • Open: Indicates that the sales order is not on hold anymore, and shipment has not yet occurred.
  • Cancelled:

Indicates that the order has been cancelled.

You can select this status to cancel the order if it has one of the following statuses: Hold,Credit hold, Back order, or Open. You can open a cancelled order by selecting the Open status.

  • Shipping: Indicates that the order is being shipped. If a shipment can be created according to the shipping rules, the order’s status changes to Shipping. Each confirmed shipment updates the data on the order showing how many items are being shipped ( Quantity on shipments ) and how many items are still to be shipped ( Open quantity ).
  • Back order: Indicates that the order cannot be shipped because the specified items are not available. You can assign this status to an open order manually if, when you attempt to create a shipment, the system detects that the order cannot be shipped in full and displays a message about this. This status can be assigned to orders automatically when you run the Create shipments process by using the Process orders (SO501000) window if the shipping rules specified on the document level and on the line level do not allow shipment creation. If the Replan back orders check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window, on release of the appropriate inventory receipts, the requested quantities of items are re-planned (booked) for back orders, so that you can create shipments for these back orders by running the Create shipment process in the Process orders (SO501000) window. You can open a back-ordered order by selecting the Open status.
  • Invoiced: Means that the invoices for the order have been generated. This status is available only for orders of types that involve updating the customer ledger.
  • Completed: Indicates that all related inventory documents required for the order type have been generated and released.
Created by The user who created the selected sales order.
Last modified The time and date when the document was last modified.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services. Click Edit to open the Customers (AR303000) window where you can view and edit the customer’s details.
Location

(This field is only active if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services have been ordered. Hover over Map to view the address for the selected location.
Date The date of the document.
Requested on

The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; this date provides the default values for the Requested on dates for order lines. The default value is the current business date.

When you change this date, the Scheduled shipment date in the Delivery settings tab changes automatically.

Note

If your order has existing order lines and you change this date, you can choose or decline to update all order lines with the new Requested on and scheduled shipment date.
Contact The contact person of the customer. You can only edit this field when the order status is Hold, Open, Back order, or Credit hold.
Customer order

(This field does not appear for orders of the TR type.)

The reference number of the original customer document that the sales order is based on.
External reference The reference number of the sales order in a third-party application if Visma Net is integrated with such an application and imports the sales orders from it. You can edit this field.
Ship via The ship via code that represents the carrier and its service to be used for shipping the ordered goods. For this ship via code, if Manual is specified as the freight calculation method, the freight cost must be specified in the Freight cost field on the Totals tab (in this window).
Salesperson

(This field only appears if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The salesperson to be used by default for each sales order line.
Project

(This field is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Description Here you can enter a description of the document, of max 255 characters.
Notes You can use this field to communicate key information about the document.
### The order overview section
Element Description
Cost

The total of the Cost total column on the lines of the sales order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Profit

The total profit calculated from the lines of the order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Margin (chart)

Displays the margin percentage of the selected sales order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Order total

The total amount of the document, which is calculated as follows:

Line total + Misc. total + Freight + Premium freight

– Discount total + VAT total
VAT taxable total The document total that is subject to VAT. The VAT taxable amount is only displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT total The total amount of VAT paid on the document.
VAT exempt total The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.
Discount total The total amount of discount on the sales order.
Line discount total The total amount of line discounts on the order.
Markup total

The total markup on the order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Ordered quantity The sum of the quantity for all lines, with the exception of lines with line type Misc. charge.
Use replacement cost for margin/profit

When this check box is selected, the line level profit and margin values are calculated based on the line’s Supplier price or the line item’s last cost. When the check box is cleared, the default value for Unit cost is used.

You can change this value only when the order’s status is Hold, Open, Back order and Credit hold.

The default value for this check box is retrieved from the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
### The following elements will be available soon
Element Description
Destination warehouse

(This field only appears if the TR order type is selected.)

The warehouse to which the goods should be transferred.
Credit hold

(This check box does not appear if the TR order type is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that this customer order is on credit hold. This happens if the customer does not comply with the credit verification rules and if the Check credit on entry option is selected for orders of this type in the Order types (SO201000) window. However, if you need to create a new sales order for this customer as an exception and you, based on a user role, have access to the Credit hold check box, you can clear the Credit hold check box, save the order, and release the order. The initial amount of the order serves as this document’s credit limit, and if a user increases the amount, the system does not allow the order to be removed from credit hold in this way.
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to customer invoices.
Print line note on internal sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to order confirmations.
## The Order lines tab This tab has a table that lists all the items included in the sales order. The line numbers are assigned automatically. Information on the applied manual discounts and the line-level discounts (if any are configured in your system) is shown on the tab. Lines with a **free item** are greyed out and read-only. > [!NOTE] > When you are creating a new order, you can enter the data manually or import the order details from a file in.xlsx or.csv format.
Button Description
delete-icon-new ( Delete line ) You click this button to initiate deletion of selected order lines. Save the document to complete deletion.
Import from Excel icon ( Import order lines )

You click this button to import an Excel document with order lines.

Make sure the column names in your Excel document match the column names in the table.

After import, lines will be added in the Order lines tab, it is not possible to update existing order lines.
Export to Excel icon ( Export to Excel ) You click this button to download an Excel document of the order lines with the columns you have selected in the table settings.
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Field Description
Find items You can start typing here or click Search-new to trigger the items list.
### The items list In this list, you can view the **On hand**, **Available** and **Available for shipping** quantity for each item accumulated for all warehouses. Click an item line to add it to the order.
Column Description
Item ID The item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item.
On hand The quantity on hand of this item.
Available The quantity available of the item, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
Available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.
### The table
Column Description
Line The line number of the order line.
Item ID The stock or non-stock item to be sold, by its item ID.
Item description The description for the item selected in the line.
UoM

The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected warehouse.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with the quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

Note

The success icon Success is displayed when the quantity available for shipping is above zero. If the quantity available for shipping is zero, a warning icon Warning will be displayed.
Quantity The quantity of the item sold, measured in the UoM.
Unit price

The price for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item.

If you have entered the unit price manually and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. If you want to replace this price with the sales price currently available for the item, click the Reset price icon Reset price in the field.
Line total The extended price, which is the unit price multiplied by the quantity, deducted with the line discount.
Account The income account to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Use sales account from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Commissionable

(This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that indicates that this line is subjected to sales commission. The details of commissions are shown on theCommissions tab.
Completed A check box that can be selected to indicate to the system that this line is completed.
Cost total

The extended cost of the item, which is the value in the Unit cost column multiplied by the quantity. You can manually enter an amount that is not based on the unit cost.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

Based on the set discount amount, the discount percent will be calculated automatically.

To reset a manually set discount, click the Reset price icon Reset price in the field.
Discount code The code of the discount that has been applied to this line.
Discount %

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

Based on the set discount percent, the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

To reset a manually set discount, click the Reset price icon Reset price in the field.
Discount series The ID of the discount sequence that has been applied to this line.
External link In this column, you can write a reference for the line to any other document or system.
Line type

The line type for the sales order line, which can be one of the following options:

Miscellaneous charge
for non-stock items that do not require shipment.
Goods for warehouse
for stock items.
Non-stock goods:
for non-stock items that require shipment.
Note

An icon that you can click to add or edit the line note. The icon displayed can be one of the following:

  • No note icon: there is no current line note, click the icon to add a line note.
  • Note: there is a line note. Hover over the icon to view the line note, and click the icon to edit or remove the note.
Open quantity The quantity of the item to be shipped; that is, the total quantity minus the quantity shipped according to closed shipment documents.
Overship threshold % The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Project task (This column is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The particular task of the project with which this line is associated.
Purchase order source

The type of purchase order to be created to fulfill this line. This can be one of the following options:

See also:

Lines with Purchase to order or Drop-shipment will be visible in the Purchases workspace and available for adding to a purchase order.

The Purchase order source can be selected if the line item is a stock item, or a non-stock item that has both the Require shipment and Require receipt check boxes selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Purchase order number The purchase order number(s) connected to the line. You can click on a number to open the purchase order in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.
Quantity available The quantity available of the item, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
Quantity details Click View to open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window for the line item and warehouse.
Quantity on hand The quantity on hand of the item.
Quantity on shipments A read-only column that displays the quantity of the stock item being prepared for shipment and already shipped for this order.
Reason code

The reason code to be used for creation or cancellation of the order, if applicable.

Only reason codes with the Sales and Issue usage can be selected.
Replacement cost total

The total replacement cost for the line, calculated as the replacement unit cost multiplied by the item quantity.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Replacement unit cost

The cost to replace the item, per unit.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Requested on The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; the default value is specified in the Requested on field in the top part. These dates can be different for different lines if the order-level shipping rule is Back orders allowed. For information on shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.
Salesperson

(This column only appears if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The salesperson associated with the sale of the line item.
Ship on

The date when the item should be shipped. By default, this date is calculated as a date that is earlier than the Requested on date (for this line) by the number of lead days but not earlier than the current business date. You can modify the date only if the order-level shipping rule is set to the Back orders allowed option on the Delivery settings tab.

In the Process orders (SO501000) window, you can select the orders for creating shipments by the Ship on dates specified in their lines if you select the By ship date option in the Select by field and specify the range for scheduled shipment dates in the Start date and End date fields.
Shipping rule

The way the line item should be shipped. Select one of the following options:

Back orders allowed
The ordered quantity can be delivered in multiple shipments. If the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped, and the remaining quantity (open quantity) can be shipped later. The line is not completed until it has a non-zero open quantity. The order gets the Back order status.
Cancel remainder
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment, but if the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.
Ship only when complete
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment. If the ordered quantity is not available for shipping, the order with this line gets the Back order status.
Note

For more information, see: About shipping rules.
Supplier The name of the supplier that will supply the item.
Supplier price

This field is populated with the first available value in the following order of priority:

  1. The default supplier’s price for the item set in the Supplier prices (AP202000) window, the Price column.
  2. The default supplier’s Last supplier price, collected from the Stock items (IN202500) window, the Supplier details tab.

You can override the default supplier for the line item by changing the Supplier column for the line.

You can set the Supplier price manually if the Override supplier price check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window, the General information tab.
Undership threshold % The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) to consider the order shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Unit cost

The cost for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item. For information about how the unit cost is calculated, see About item costs and valuation methods

If the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box is selected, the Unit cost column displays the replacement cost.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.
VAT category The VAT category ID that applies to the line item. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Warehouse

The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item should be delivered.

You can start typing here or click Search-new to trigger a list with the item’s On hand, Available, and Available for shipping quantity per warehouse.

This column only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The following buttons will be available soon
Button Description
Allocations

(This button is only available if at least one of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Sales order to purchase order link, Multiple warehouse locations, and Lot and serial tracking.)

Opens the Allocations dialog box so that you can allocate the stock for the order and specify warehouse locations and lot or serial numbers of the items, if required for the order by order type settings.

For more details, see: the Order types (SO201000) window.
Add sales invoice

(This button is enabled for only return orders).

Opens the Add invoice details dialog box so that you can add a line or multiple lines from the selected invoice to this return order.
Purchase order link

(This button is only available for lines that have the Mark for purchase order check box selected.)

Opens the Purchasing details dialog box, which you use to link the sales order to an existing purchase order that has the required item listed.
Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up to display availability information about the selected stock item.
Assemble

A button that opens the Kit assembly dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
Kit specification

A button that opens the Kit specifications dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications (IN209500) window is available both for stock and non-stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
View kit assembly Click this button to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Branch The branch that sells the item. This column only appears if you have multiple branches.
Invoice no.

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

A column that holds the reference number of the original invoice (which lists the goods that were ordered and later returned by the customer).
Operation

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

The operation to be performed in the Inventory workspace to fulfill the order. An order of the RR or RM type includes lines with theReceipt operation and lines with the Issue operation. Orders of other return types include only lines with the Receipt operation.

Note

When you create an order of the RM type, you cannot save the order with the Open status until its balance is negative. Make sure the Hold check box is selected until you have added all the replacement and refund lines.

Note

For more details on return orders, see: Process returns.
Create issue automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that a line of the Issue type will be created automatically for each order line of the Receipt type if the order is of the RR type.
Kit assembly

A link that opens the Kit assembly (IN307000) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
Kit specifications

A link that opens the Kit specifications (IN209500) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications dialog box is available both for stock and non-stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.
View kit assembly Click this link to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
Disc. unit price The unit price, which has been recalculated after the application of discounts.
Average cost

The total cost of the item in the warehouse, divided by the total quantity of the item in the warehouse.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)
Term start date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should start for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.
Term end date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.
Amount not yet invoiced (This column is not available for orders of the Transfer type.) The amount not yet invoiced for the line, calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order.
Lot/serial no. (This column only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is only available for orders of the RR type.) The lot or serial number of the item for returns.
Expiration date The expiration date for the item with the specified lot number. The column only appears for orders of the RR type.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID for the item, such as the item ID used by the customer.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Combine sales sub. from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column.
Order type The type of sales order in which this line item is listed.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order in which this line item is listed.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
Base order qty The quantity of the item sold, expressed in the base unit of measure. This quantity is used for calculating discounts if The base UOM option is selected in the Apply quantity discounts to field on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Deductible amount Read-only column. The amount your client can deduct for the line item, if the item is ROT or RUT deductible.
ROT or RUT deductible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line item is ROT or RUT deductible, according to its settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window. This only applies to non-stock items.
Item type

The Item type applies to a Domestic services deductible document. You can edit this column. The type of the item, as selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, the Domestic services settings (Sweden) section, the Type field. For a stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

For a non-stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

When there is no Type selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, Other cost is the default type.
Type of work The type of work the line item is related to, according to the item’s settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) window. You can edit this column.
Supplier currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier, by its ID.
Supplier UoM The item’s unit of measure used by the supplier.
## The VAT details tab The columns in this tab contain information on all individual taxes applied to the document lines. The VAT listed on the tab are those that are included in both the VAT categories of line items and the VAT zone of the customer shipping location.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT.
Reverse VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Statistical VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.
Pending VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT is pending and will be recognised after completing the VAT recognition process.
Include in VAT exempt total A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.
VAT type

The type of the VAT, which can be one of the following:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Commissions tab On the **Commissions** tab of the window, you can view the commissions calculated for this sales order. This tab only appears if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The ID of the salesperson who participated in sales.
Salesperson name The salesperson who participated in sales.
Commission % The percentage of commission generally earned by the salesperson.
Commission amount The commission amount earned by the salesperson on this document.
Commissionable amount The amount used to calculate the commission.
## The Financial settings tab This tab holds the customer's invoice information for the sales order. ### The Invoice contact and address section If you make changes in this section and you want to reset to the default values, click the **Reset contact and address** icon ![Reset price](/media/visma-net-erp/Icon-16-reset.png).
Element Description
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Address line 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address line 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Address line 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Financial information section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone

The VAT zone to be used to process customer sales orders, which generally is the zone associated with the customer’s delivery address.

By default, the customer VAT zone is set to the VAT zone of the customer location specified for the order. If the sales order was created from a quote that has a VAT zone specified, this VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone specified for this quote.

If a VAT zone is not specified, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.
Invoice separately A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document requires a separate invoice. The default value for this setting is retrieved from the Order types (SO201000) window.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Invoice number The reference number of the invoice generated for this order. This field is only available for orders of the Invoice (IN) type if the Invoice separately check box is selected. You can enter a reference number for the invoice if the numbering sequence assigned to invoices in the Order types (SO201000) window is configured for manual numbering.
Invoice date The date of the invoice generated for the order. You can enter the date manually if the Invoice separately check box is selected.
Due date The due date of the invoice according to the payment terms.
Cash discount date The date when the cash discount is available for the invoice based on the payment terms.
Post period The period to post the transactions generated by the invoice.
Owner The user who is responsible for the order. By default, it is the employee with whom the user who created the order is associated in the Users (SM201010) window, the Linked entity field.
Currency

(This field appears if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The currency of the document.

Note

You can only change the customer’s default currency when the Enable currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Exchange rate The customer’s default exchange rate. This is a read-only field not affected by the Enable rate override setting in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order was emailed.
### The following fields will be available soon #### The Financial information section
Element Description
Branch The branch with which this order is associated.
Orig. order type The type of the original order; this field is available only for returns.
Orig. order no. The reference number of the original sales order (for returns).
## The Payment settings tab
Element Description
Payment method The payment method to be used to pay for the sales order. By default, it is the customer’s default payment method, but you can select another method for the order.
Cash account The cash account associated with the customer payment method. The field is filled in automatically with the cash account specified as the default for the selected method.
Payment reference The reference number of the payment.
### The following fields will be available soon
Element Description
Payment total Read only. This field shows the payment total amount.
Unpaid balance Read only. This field shows the amount that has not been paid if the sales order was paid partially.
Register transaction no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the transaction that captured the specified amount.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains delivery information, including the selected customer location's delivery contact and address, shipping terms, and zone. ### The Delivery contact and address section If you make changes in this section and you want to reset to the default values, click the **Reset contact and address** icon ![Reset price](/media/visma-net-erp/Icon-16-reset.png).
Element Description
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity. You can click email to open the email client of your choice.
Address line 1 The first line of the delivery address.
Address line 2 The second line of the delivery address.
Address line 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set by using the About Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Delivery information section
Element Description
Scheduled shipment

The date when the ordered goods are scheduled to be shipped. By default, it is the date that is specified in the Requested on field in the top part of this window, minus the number of lead days, but it is not earlier than the current business date. You can set this date manually.

Note

If your order has existing order lines and you change this date, you can choose or decline to update all order lines with the new scheduled shipment date.
Ship separately This check box indicates (if selected) that the goods for the customer should be shipped separately for each sales order.
Shipping rule

An option that controls whether incomplete and partial shipments for the order are allowed. Select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
This option indicates that the required quantity should be delivered in one shipment. Nothing will be shipped until the complete quantity is in stock.
Back orders allowed
This option indicates that the required quantity can be delivered in more than one shipment, with the remainder back-ordered.
Cancel remainder
This option indicates that the required items should be delivered in one shipment, but if the requested quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.

For more information on processing sales orders with different shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.
Cancel by The date when the order should be cancelled if the Back orders allowed option has been selected in the Shipping rule field. The suggested date in this field is generated based on the value in the Days to keep field on the General settings tab in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse to be used by default for each sales order line.
FOB point The point where ownership of the goods is transferred to the customer.
Priority (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can only be used for informational purposes.) The level of priority for processing orders of this customer, as specified for the customer on the Delivery settings tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used for this customer.
Shipping zone The shipping zone of the customer.
### The Optional settings section
Element Description
Saturday delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order may be delivered on Saturday.
Residential delivery A check box that you select to indicate that the shipment should be delivered to a residential area.
Insurance A check box that you select to indicate that insurance is required for this order.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Transaction type

A pick list where you select the transaction type to be used for Intrastat reporting.

You can also set a default transaction type for each order type. This is done in the Order types (SO201000) window.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table showing the **Document**- and **Group**-level discounts that were applied to the document. This tab is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
Discount code The ID (code) of the discount applied to the document.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose series was applied to the document ( D for Document or G for Group ).
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually (one of the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as Manual in the Discount codes (AR209000) window).
Discountable amount The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the amount.
Discountable quantity The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the item quantity.
Discount amount The amount of the discount.
Discount % The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item quantity The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the sales order. Selecting the check box updates the document total and the line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
## The Shipments tab This tab has a table showing the shipments connected to the order.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
Shipment type The type of the shipment.
Shipment number The reference number of and link to the shipment. Clicking the link opens the Shipments (SO302000) window.
Shipment date The date of the shipment.
Shipped quantity The quantity of goods on the shipment.
Shipped weight The weight of the shipped goods in the shipment (net weight).
Shipped volume The volume of the shipment.
Invoice type The type of the invoice.
Invoice number The reference number of the invoice generated for the shipment.
Inventory document type The type of inventory document generated for the shipment.
Inventory reference number The reference number of the inventory document generated for the shipment.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Status The status of the shipment.
## The Totals tab This tab displays the totals calculated for the document. ### The Order totals section
Element Description
Line total

The total amount on all document lines with stock items and non-stock items that require shipment, after line-level discounts are applied. This total does not include the freight and premium freight amounts.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Line total column on the Order linestab for lines of the Goods for warehouse and Non-stock goods line type.
Miscellaneous total

The total amount on all document lines with non-stock items that do not require shipment, after line-level discounts are applied.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Line total column on the Order lines tab for lines of the Miscellaneous charge line type.
### The Freight information section
Element Description
Order weight The total weight of the goods according to the document.
Order volume The total volume of goods according to the document.
Freight cost The freight cost calculated for the document.
Freight amount

The freight amount calculated in accordance with the shipping terms.

Note

For details, see: About freight calculation.
Premium freight amount

Any additional flat charges for handling the order.

Note

To correct the excessive freight charges in a previous order of the customer, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order. When entering a negative freight amount, make sure that the total amount in the order is greater than or equal to zero. Otherwise, an invoice that is generated for the order cannot be released.
Freight VAT category The VAT category that applies to the total freight amount. By default, it is the tax category associated with the ship via code selected for the order.
### The Calculated amounts and quantities section
Element Description
Unshipped amount

The sum of unshipped amounts calculated for the lines with non-zero unshipped quantities of stock items.

The unshipped amount for each line is calculated as the amount in the Line total column divided by the line quantity (the Quantity column) and multiplied by the unshipped quantity (the Open quantity column).

At the moment of order creation when no item quantities are shipped, the amount is equal to the Line total; this total does not include any freight amount.
Unshipped quantity The quantity of the stock items not yet shipped according to the sales order. The unshipped quantity for each line is specified in the Open quantity column.
Amount not yet invoiced

The sum of not yet invoiced amounts for the lines with stock and non-stock items.

The amount not yet invoiced for each line is calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order.

At the moment of order creation when no invoice is generated, the amount is equal to Line total plus Misc. total plus VAT total minus Discount total.This total does not include any freight amount.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of stock and non-stock items that were not yet invoiced.
### The following fields will be available soon #### The Calculated amounts and quantities section
Element Description
Payment total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount that has been paid for this sales order.
Pre-authorised amount

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The amount authorised for the order during the payment processing but not yet captured.
Unpaid balance

The unpaid amount of the order or Order total minus Payments total minus Pre-authorised amount.

Once an invoice for the unpaid amount of the order is generated, the unpaid amount becomes 0.
## The following tabs will be available soon ### The Payments tab (This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.) By using this tab, you can create a prepayment or payment for this sales order or link the order to existing payments or prepayments (to reserve them for the order). No payment can be created for a sales order with any of the following statuses:**Voided**, **Cancelled**, **Pending approval**, or **Rejected**. > [!NOTE] > For more information, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). This tab has a table that shows the prepayments and payments reserved for this sales order.
Button Description
Create prepayment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a prepayment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
Create payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a payment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so that you can view the details of the selected prepayment or payment.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document available for applying to the sales order.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment document.
Applied to order The amount of the payment to be applied to the order.
Transferred to invoice The amount of the payment that has been applied to the customer ledger invoice generated for the order.
Balance The balance of the order.
Status The status of the payment.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment amount The amount of the payment or prepayment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
### Domestic services details (Sweden) tab
Element Description
Distribute automatically Select this check box to distribute the amount automatically.
Repairs, conversion, extension Select this option if the work is related to ROT deduction.
Cleaning, maintenance, laundry Select this option if the work is related to RUT deduction
Apartment Enter the apartment number
Property Enter the property number
Corporate ID Enter the corporate ID of the housing cooperative
Personal ID Enter the personal ID or the personal IDs of the persons to distribute the amount on. The amount will be divided automatically between the persons.
Amount The amount that should be distributed to the registered personal ID
Total deductible amount The amount that will be deducted from the work price.
Other cost The total of other costs.
Material cost The total of material costs.
Work price The total price of the work.
Distributed/Undistributed amount Depending on if you have the Distribute automatically check box selected or not, you will either see the distributed amount or the undistributed amount under the Domestic services totals section. The distributed amount is the amount that will be reported to Skatteverket.
## The window footer
Element Description
Total The order total in the used currency.
x line(s) in this sales order The number of lines in the order.
Preview document (button) You can click this button to open the order or quote in the Order confirmation (SO64111S) or Quote (SO64101S) report, which you can use to print the document to send it to the customer.
Create shipment (button)

(This button does not appear for order types that do not require shipment.)

You can click this button to create a shipment for the sales order.

Note

For a sales order line that has an open shipment, you cannot create a new shipment until the open shipment is confirmed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Sales order list (SO40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-list-so40101s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order list (SO40101S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Button Description
View order When you click this button, the system opens a pop-up of the Sales orders (SO301000) window for the selected line.
View customer When you click this button, the system opens a pop-up of the Customers (AR303000) window for the selected line.
Element Description
Order type

Select the order type for which you want to display orders, which can be any of the active order types in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can leave the field blank to display orders of all types.

For details on each type, see: About predefined types of sales orders and About predefined order types for customer returns.

The predefined order types include the following:

  • Credit note (CM)
  • Cash sale (CS)
  • Cash return (CR)
  • Invoice (IN)
  • Quote (QT)
  • Return for credit (RC)
  • Generic authorised return (RM)
  • Return with replacement (RR)
  • Sales order (SA)
  • Sales order (SO)
  • Transfer (TR)
Status

Select for which status you want to display orders. The default status is Open.

Available options are:

View all
Orders with all statuses.
Open
Indicates (if applicable) that the sales order is not on hold anymore, the customer has passed the credit check, and shipment has not yet occurred.
On hold
Additions and changes can be made to these orders and order quantities do not affect the item availability.
Credit hold
Orders for which the customer has failed the credit check.
Completed
Orders for which all related inventory documents required for the order type have been generated and released.
Cancelled
Orders that have been cancelled.
Back order
Orders that cannot be shipped because the specified items are not available.
Shipping
Orders that are being shipped.
Invoiced
Orders for which invoices have been generated.

See Sales orders (SO301000) for more detailed status descriptions.
Customer

The customer that has ordered the goods or services.

If the TR order type is selected, Customer is read-only and displays your company ID and business name.
Owner The user name of the user to whom the activity is assigned. Leave the field blank to view information on all owners.
Salesperson The salesperson for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
## The table
Column Description
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Customer name The customer of the order.
Customer no. The ID of the customer.
Description The description of the order according to the Description field in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Date The date the order was created.
Status The status of the order.
Currency The currency used in the order.
Type

The type of customer ledger document that has been or is to be generated on release of this document, according to template settings in the Order types (SO201000) window.

Possible types are Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, and No update (which means no customer ledger documents have been or will be created).
Sched. shipment The date when the shipment for this order is scheduled (as specified in the Sched. shipment field on the Delivery settings tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) window).
Customer VAT zone The VAT zone to be used to process customer sales orders, which generally is the zone associated with the customer’s delivery address.
Discount total The discount total calculated for the order.
VAT taxable total (This column is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in your system.) The order total that is subjected to VAT.
Order total The total amount of the order.
Owner The user responsible for the order.
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the order.

Related pages

Windows

 Sales order preferences (SO101000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000 page This window holds settings that affect the Inventory workspace as a whole, including processing, posting, and approval settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order preferences (SO101000) This window holds settings that affect the Inventory workspace as a whole, including processing, posting, and approval settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) ## The General settings tab You can use this tab to select the default order types and price validation options, as well as to specify the processing options for shipments and documents created and generated in the workspace. ### The Data entry settings section
Element Description
Default sales order type The type of sales order that will appear as the default sales order type in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Default transfer order type (This element is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The type of transfer order that will appear as the default transfer order type in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Show gross margin/profit

If you select this check box, the totals for margin, profit and markup are displayed in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.

Note

This does not apply to the Sales orders (SO30100S) window. There, these values are only displayed when the user has the Sales Profit Viewer role.
Kit cost based on components Select this check box if you want the cost in the Sales orders (SO301000) window to be based on components instead of the kit itself.
Use replacement cost for margin/profit Select this check box if you want to use the default supplier’s price for the item or the item’s last cost, instead of the item’s default unit cost, to calculate margin and profit.
Override supplier price If you select this check box, you can override the supplier price.
Shipment number series The numbering sequence to be used to assign IDs to shipments when a new shipment is created by using the Shipments (SO302000) window.
Advanced availability validation This check box indicates (if selected) that a shipment document cannot be saved if the updated available quantity of any item listed on the document will result in a negative value.
### The Price settings section
Element Description
Validate min. markup

An option that controls whether the minimum markup, set on the Price/cost information tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window for stock items and on the similar tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window for non-stock items, will be validated when the user manually enters a unit price on a sales order, an invoice, or the Sales prices (AR202000) window. Select one of the following values:

No validation
To not perform minimum mark-up validation for prices that users enter on documents.
Warning
To display warnings when users enter prices that don’t meet the minimum mark-up requirement.
Set to minimum
To automatically set prices to the values that ensure the minimum mark up when users enter prices that provide a mark-up percentage lower than the minimum.
Use a price adjustment multiplier A check box that (if selected) causes the system to calculate prices for non-base units of measure by using the price adjustment factor along with the conversion factor. If the check box is cleared, the system ignores the price adjustment factor when calculating prices.
### The Freight calculation settings section This section only if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Freight allocation on partial shipping

For partial shipments, the way the premium freight amount should be allocated among shipments:

Full amount first time
To assign the premium freight total amount to the first shipment created for the order.
Allocate proportionally
To distribute the premium freight total amount among shipments proportionally to the amounts of the partial shipments.
### The Shipment settings section
Element Description
Free item shipping

This element is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

The way the free items should be distributed among partial shipments of all the goods specified in the sales order. Select one of the following options:

  • Proportional The free items should be distributed among shipments proportionally to the amounts of each shipment.

    Note

    If the total quantity of free items on all partial shipments for the order is less than the quantity initially calculated for the applicable group discount (which may happen because the system rounds the free item quantity down on each partial shipment), you can add the missing quantity of the free item manually to any of the partial shipments.

  • On last shipment The free items should be added to the last shipment that is based on the sales order.
Hold shipments on entry This check box indicates (if selected) that a newly created shipment will have the On hold status by default.
Validate shipment total on confirmation This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipment confirmation can be saved only after you enter the shipment total in the Control total field.
Add zero lines for items which are not in stock

This check box indicates (if selected) that pick lists and shipments will be generated with lines for items currently not in stock.

This option can be selected if you have classes of stock items for which a negative quantity is allowed and if you don’t want to rely completely on availability data (in some cases, although the system shows an item as not in stock, the quantities required for a shipment may be available for some reason). Then for order lines with the Back orders allowed shipping rule, a zero-quantity line will be added to a shipment if the item is not in stock, and you will be able to manually enter the quantity of the item that is actually available. See: About shipping rules.

You can also select this option because customers may want to view the lines for items that were ordered but not shipped.
Create zero shipments

A check box that indicates (if selected) that a shipment can be created even if there are no available items for any lines.

We do not recommend selecting this check box if in your organisation, shipments are generally created automatically by using the Process orders (SO501000) window.

This check box is available only if the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Update the warehouse automatically when shipment is confirmed This check box indicates (if selected) that system will automatically update the warehouse once the shipment is confirmed.
### The Invoice settings section
Element Description
Hold invoices on failed credit check A check box that indicates (if selected) that an edited invoice can be saved only with the On hold status if the customer fails the credit check.
Use shipment date for invoice date A check box that you select if you want the shipment dates to appear in invoices as invoice dates. If the check box is cleared, the current business date will be used as the default date for invoices when they are automatically generated for confirmed shipments.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically release inventory documents This check box indicates (if selected) that the inventory documents generated on release of the sales documents will be automatically released in the Inventory workspace. If the check box is not selected, the inventory documents generated on release of the sales documents should be manually released in the Inventory workspace.
Use shipped-not-invoiced account

This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipped-not-invoiced account (and subaccount, if applicable) should be used for cost transactions (instead of the COGS accounts) to delay posting to COGS accounts.

You can select this option if your organisation processes customer invoices for shipments later than inventory issues. Then when issues are released, the costs will be temporarily recorded (as debit amounts) to the shipped-not-invoiced account (and subaccount), and on release of invoices, the costs will be moved from the shipped-not-invoiced account to the COGS (expense) account. For more details, see: About shipment processing options.
Shipped-not-invoiced account The expense account to be used as the shipped-not-invoiced account if the Use Shipped-not-invoiced- account check box is selected.
Shipped-not-invoiced sub.

The subaccount to be used as the shipped-not-invoiced subaccount if the Use shipped-not-invoiced account check box is selected.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Sales profitability settings section This section is available only if the **Kit assembly** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Cost calculation basis for non-stock kits

Select one of the following options:

  • Stock component cost
  • Non-stock kit standard cost
  • Non-stock kit standard cost plus stock component cost
## The Reporting settings tab This tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents (by email) to customers and to company employees who oversee operations with customers. The mailing settings specified here are used as default values for mailing settings of customer classes, which in turn provide default values for mailings configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be sent to customer contacts and company employees when a user invokes the action specific to the mailing. Such emails can contain sales orders, pick lists, shipment confirmations, invoices, or dunning letters. You can modify predefined mailings or add new custom mailings. To add a new custom mailing to be used for customers, you need to define automation steps for the windows in which specific documents are created or processed. The tab includes the **Default sources** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Default recipients** table, with the list of recipient types. ### The Default sources table By using the **Default sources** table, you can create a list of active mailings that can be used for customers. You can select the report or an email template (notification template) to be used as the body of the emails generated for the mailing.
Column Description
Mailing ID

The unique ID of the mailing. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used. Select one of the following predefined mailings, which are designed to inform users and external contacts about the particular events:

Pick list
A pick list being created for an order
Quote
A change in the status of a quote
Sales order
A changes to a sales order
Shipment
The confirmation of a shipment
SO invoice
A sales invoice that is ready to be released
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for the mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report ID The ID of the sales orders report to be used as the email’s body (if a report is used for this mailing). Select the report from the list.
Notification template

The email template to be used to generate the body of the email (if an email template is used for this mailing).

Caution

For each mailing, you can use only one of the options as the body of the email: a report or a notification template (email template).
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if a recipient has no other preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Only active mailings can be used.
### The Default recipients table You use this table to create and modify the list of default recipient types for the mailing selected in the **Default sources** area.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails generated for the mailing.

Select one of the following:

Primary
Contacts specified as primary contacts of particular customers, or customers of specific classes
Remittance
Contacts specified as remittance contacts of particular customers, or customers of specific classes
Shipping
Contacts specified as the shipping contacts of particular customers, or customers of specific classes
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the documents of (or is otherwise associated with) the customer class or customer
Contact ID The ID of the recipient. A particular recipient can be selected only if Employee was specified as the Contact type. This employee will receive all the emails generated for the selected mailing.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that this contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients receive the emails.
Bcc This check box indicates (if selected) that this contact or contacts of the type will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails for the selected mailing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Shipments (SO302000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000 page You can use this window to create shipment documents for a sales order or for multiple sales orders of the same customer, as well as to view shipment documents that the system automatically generated for sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipments (SO302000) You can use this window to create shipment documents for a sales order or for multiple sales orders of the same customer, as well as to view shipment documents that the system automatically generated for sales orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Process a back order for a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/process-a-back-order-for-a-sales-order/) + [Create multiple shipments for one sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order/) + [Add lines that are not in a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/add-shipment-lines-that-are-not-in-a-sales-order/) + [Cancel shipments](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/cancel-shipments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions, which you can perform depending on the status of the shipment:

Confirm shipment
Changes the shipment’s status to Confirmed, marks the boxes included in the shipment as Confirmed on the Packages tab, and initiates recalculation of packages if there were changes since the shipment was previously saved.
Prepare invoice
Generates an customer ledger invoice for the shipment and changes the shipment status to Completed.
Prepare drop-ship invoice
Generates an invoice for the shipment, which fulfills a drop-ship order. (This option is available only if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in your system.)
Update inventory
Generates an inventory issue for the shipment. The issue will be released automatically if the Automatically release inventory documents check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Correct shipment
Reopens the confirmed shipment if it was not invoiced.
Cancel return
Cancels the return.
Email shipment
Generates an email with shipment confirmation in accordance with the SHIPMENT mailing settings of this customer.
Print pick list
Brings up the Pick list (SO644000) report for the shipment, so you can print it. Once a pick list has been generated and printed for the shipment, the shipment will not appear in the Process shipments (SO503000) window for the Print pick list action unless the Show printed check box is selected in the top part of that window.
Reports

Provides access to the following reports:

Print shipment confirmation
Navigates to the Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) report for the shipment, so you can print it.
Print pro forma invoice
Navigates to the Pro forma invoice (SO64300S) report, so you can print it.
## The top part Here, you can specify general information about the shipment document.
Element Description
Shipment no. The unique reference number of the document, which is automatically generated by the system in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to shipments in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Type

The type of the shipment document, which can be one of the following options:

Shipment
A document for normal shipments used to fulfill sales orders.
Transfer
A document for transfers between warehouses.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following options:

On hold
This status means that the shipment cannot be processed until the Hold check box is cleared. The Hold shipments on entry option is located in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Open
This status indicates that the shipment is being prepared, and you can print a pick list for a specific shipment (or for multiple shipments). The shipment is still open while items are being picked and packed. After the shipment is packed and before the shipment is confirmed, you can print a shipment confirmation document by using the Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) report, if needed.
Confirmed
This status indicates that the shipment has been confirmed as shipped.
Completed
This status reflects that a sales invoice was generated for the shipment.
Hold This check box indicates (if selected) that the documents cannot be processed further until the check box is cleared.
Operation The operation to be performed in the Inventory workspace for this shipment: Issue or Receipt.
Shipment date The date when the document has been created.
Customer (This field does not appear for transfers.) The customer to whom the goods specified in the document should be shipped.
Location (This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The customer location to receive the shipment.
Warehouse ID (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse from which the goods should be shipped.
To warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and available only for transfers.) The warehouse to which the goods should be shipped in case of a transfer.
Work group The work group to approve the shipment.
Owner The user assigned to approve the document.
Shipped quantity The quantity of goods shipped.
Shipped weight The weight of the goods shipped.
Shipped volume The total volume of the items in the shipment.
Packages The number of boxes included in this shipment.
Package weight The total weight of the shipment that includes the weight of boxes (for boxes determined automatically).
Package volume The sum of the values in the Volume column in the Packages tab.
Control quantity The control value, which you manually enter as a value equal to the shipped quantity if the Validate shipment total on confirmation check box has been selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Print order line note This check box indicates (if selected) that the order line note will be printed on the document.
## The Document details tab This tab displays the details of one or more sales orders that will be fulfilled by this shipment. If lot or serial numbers were specified for the items on the sales orders, item quantities are split by their lot or serial numbers.
Button Description
Allocations

(This button is only displayed if any of the Sales order to purchase order link, or Lot and serial tracking, or Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

Opens the Allocations dialog box, so that you can specify the locations, or lot or serial numbers for the units of the of the item. For items for which lot or serial numbers are tracked with the When received assignment method specified in the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window, you can select units with specific lot or serial numbers. For items with the When used assignment method, you can generate or specify manually the lot or serial numbers for the units to be shipped.
Add order Opens the Add sales order dialog box so that you can add to the shipment the selected items from other sales orders of the same customer.
Inventory summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window, so you can view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses.
Column Description
Order type The type of the order to which the shipment line belongs.
Order no. The reference number of the order to which the shipment line belongs.
Item ID The ID of the item being shipped.
Free item (This column does not appear for transfers.) The free item earned by the customer, if applicable.
Warehouse

(This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The warehouse from which the item is shipped. You can not set a warehouse different than the Warehouse ID in the top part.
Location (This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse from which the item is shipped.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item in shipment.
Shipped qty. The quantity of the item shipped.
Ordered qty. The quantity of the item ordered.
Open qty. The number of items still to be shipped.
Lot/serial no. (This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The lot or serial number of particular items of the item.
Expiration date The expiration date of the item, if it is traced for this item ID.
Reason code The reason code used for shipments.
Shipment no.

Read only.

The reference number of this shipment in which the line item is listed.
Line no.

Read only.

The line number of the shipment.
Order line no.

Read only.

The order’s line number that matches this shipment line.
Original qty.

Read only.

The item’s quantity in the original order.
CN code Commodity codes according to the Combined nomenclature (CN) annually revised and published as a Commission regulation in the EU, Requirement for Intrastat reporting (looked up from the Stock items - General information tab - Intrastat section).
Country of origin The country the shipments is sent from.
Description A short description for the shipment.
Net weight The net weight of the shipment.
External link A read-only column displaying the external link for the line, collected from the corresponding sales order.
Shipping rule The shipping rule for the line item. For details, see: About shipping rules.
Supplementary measure unit Standardised codes (EU) for measure units for Intrastat reporting. Required for certain types of items.
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Undership Threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) to consider the order shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
### The Allocations dialog box This dialog box is available if at least one of these functionalities are enabled: **Multiple warehouse locations**, or **Lot serial tracking**.) By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item can be distributed between locations available in the warehouse selected in the **Warehouse ID** field in the top part of the window, and you can select the locations, lot or serial numbers (from those available in the selected warehouse) for the item's quantity. Also, you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The **Allocations** dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Start lot/serial number The lot or serial number to be used as a start number. (This element is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Generate A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers. (This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Column Description
Item ID ID of the item to be allocated.
Location (This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse that is selected in the Warehouse ID field in the top part.
Lot/serial no. (This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in your system.) The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the specified quantity of stock item; you can select from the serial or lot numbers available for the selected warehouse.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same subitem code and the same lot/serial number. It is 1 for an item with a serial number.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item. This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Description The description of the item.
OK (button) Saves the records generated.
### The Add sales order dialog box You use this dialog box to add items from a selected sales order of the same customer to the shipment if sales orders of this type are not required to be shipped separately. The **Ship separately** check box can be found in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.
Element Description
Operation The operation to be performed with the inventory: Issue or Return.
Order type The type of order to be added to the shipment.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Item ID The item ID of the item being shipped.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item in shipment.
Location (This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse from which the item is delivered.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the particular item.
Sched. ship. date The scheduled shipment date of the order.
Quantity The quantity of the item ordered on the line of the sales order.
Line description The description provided for the line of the sales order.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box.
## The Orders tab This tab of has a table with the orders this shipment fulfils.
Column Description
Order type The type of the order.
Order no. The reference number of the sales or transfer order.
Shipped qty. The quantity of goods shipped in accordance with the order.
Shipped weight The weight of the goods shipped in accordance with the order.
Shipped volume The volume of the goods shipped in accordance with the sales or transfer order.
Invoice type The type of invoice for the goods shipped for the sales order.
Invoice no. The reference number of the invoice for the goods shipped.
Inventory doc. type The type of the inventory document that lists the items for this shipment.
Inventory ref. no. The reference number of the inventory document that lists the items for this shipment.
Order type The type of order according to which the goods are shipped.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order.
Discount code The discount applied to the sales order.
Sequence ID The discount sequence applied to the sales order.
Type The type of discount that was applied to the order.
Discountable qty. The line or document quantity of the sales order that earned the discount.
Free item A free item (by its item ID) earned by the customer due to the discount.
Free item qty. The quantity of free items earned by the customer due to the discount.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains delivery information, including the customer ship-to address (or address of the destination warehouse for transfers), carrier, and FOB point. ### The Delivery address contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to not use+ the default contact information and to type new contact information.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Email The email address of the customer shipping contact.
Override address A check box that you select to not include the default address information and to type new address information.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
### The Delivery information section
Element Description
Ship via The carrier used for shipping the goods.
FOB point The point where title of goods passes to the customer.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used in relations with the customer.
Shipping zone ID The shipping zone of the customer.
Residential delivery This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipping address is a residential one.
Saturday delivery This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipment may be delivered on Saturday.
Insurance This check box indicates (if selected) that insurance is required for the shipment.
Freight currency (This field does not appear for transfers.) The currency to be used for the shipment freight. By default, it is the currency of the sales order, but you can change it if needed.
Freight cost The freight cost of the shipment.
Freight amt. The amount of freight the customer will be charged for the shipment.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Transaction type The 1-digit code that describes the nature of the transaction (according to EU regulations for Intrastat reporting).
Mode of transportation

The method of transportation. You can choose between:

  1. Unknown

  2. Transport by sea

  3. Transport by rail

  4. Transport by road

  5. Transport by aeroplane

5.Consignments by posts

  1. Fixed transport installations

  2. Transport by inland waterway
Container This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipment gets marked as shipped in container for Intrastat reporting purposes.
## The Packages tab On this tab, you can view a table showing the packages (boxes) prepared and shipped for the shipment.
Button Description
Refresh packages Initiates recalculation of packages for the shipment. This button is only available if the Automatic packaging functionality is enabled in your system.
Column Description
Confirmed This check box indicates (if selected) that shipping of the package specified on the line has been confirmed.
Box ID The box used for the package.
Type The type of package: Auto or Manual. Only automatically created packages (boxes) can be refreshed and re-packed.
Description The description of the item or description of the box contents; required for return labels.
Weight The gross weight of the package. For packages that have been suggested automatically (those with Auto selected in the Type column), the system added the weights of the boxes automatically. For each box added manually, the gross weight must be specified.
UoM The unit of measure in which the weight of the package is specified.
Volume The volume of the package.
UoM The unit of measure in which the volume of the package is specified.
Declared value The amount of the package specified for insurance, you can edit the value if needed.
Cost of delivery amount The amount to be charged on delivery of the package, you can edit the value if needed.
Tracking number Here you can enter a tracking number for the package.
Custom ref. no. 1 An auxiliary reference number to appear on the carrier label for the box.
Custom ref. no. 2 An additional auxiliary reference number to appear on the carrier label for the box.
## The Webhook notification tab {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Shipment confirmation allocation (SO64201S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipment-confirmation-allocation-so64201s section This report displays the shipment confirmation allocation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment confirmation allocation (SO64201S) This report displays the shipment confirmation allocation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the shipment confirmation allocation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number for which a confirmation allocation window will be displayed when you run the report. Select a shipment to display and print its confirmation.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Shipping terms (CS208000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000 page You can use this window for creating and maintaining the list of shipping terms in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipping terms (CS208000) You can use this window for creating and maintaining the list of shipping terms in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window for creating and maintaining the list of shipping terms in the system. Shipping terms are used to define the shipping, packaging, and handling costs, depending on the shipment amount. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Use the elements in this area to add new shipping terms, or to view the details of an existing set of terms.
Element Description
Term ID The unique ID of the shipping terms. You can use up to 15 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description

A description of the shipping terms. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support
## The table You use this table to specify the break points for charges on shipments depending on the shipment amount. For details on the calculation and application of shipping terms, see: [About freight calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation/).
Column Description
Break amount A minimal shipment amount to which the settings specified on the line are applicable.
Freight cost % The percentage of the freight amount (charged by the carrier) that applies to values greater than this break amount. To leave the freight amount as charged by the carrier, specify 100%.
Invoice amount % The percentage of the invoice amount that applies to values greater than this break amount. To leave the invoice amount unchanged, specify 100%.
Shipping and handling The shipping and handling fee that applies to amounts greater than this break amount.
Line handling The flat handling fee that is specified for a document line, which applies to line amounts greater than this break amount.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Shipping zones (CS207510) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-zones-cs207510 page You use this window to create and maintain the list of shipping zones used to calculate freight charges when your company ships goods to customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipping zones (CS207510) You use this window to create and maintain the list of shipping zones used to calculate freight charges when your company ships goods to customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Shipping zones table You can use the table toolbar buttons to add a new shipping zone, sort the existing shipping zones, or remove any zone. After you have added a new shipping zone to the list and saved it, the system will reorder the items alphabetically.
Button Description
Load records from file Opens the File upload dialog box, which you can use to upload the file with the shipping zones list.
Column Description
Zone ID The unique ID of the shipping zone. You can use up to 20 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A description of the shipping zone. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

Related pages

Windows

 Sales reports /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales reports Sales reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-reports-overview page Visma Net provides reports for the Sales workspace that meet your organisation's reporting needs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales reports - overview Visma Net provides reports for the Sales workspace that meet your organisation's reporting needs. Visma Net provides reports for the Sales workspace that meet your organisation's reporting needs. The reports can also be customised. Because the Sales workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, including Inventory, Customer ledger, and Purchases, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a report to any supporting details. Because the sales order reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## Sales reports The Sales workspace includes the following reports: ### Window + [Quote (SO64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/quote-so64101s/): Presents the selected sales quote in a ready-to-print form. You can print the document or send it by email. + [Quote, right address (SO64108S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/quote-right-address-so64108s/) + [Order confirmation (SO64111S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-so64111s/): Presents the selected order in a ready-to-print form. You can print the document or send it by email. + [Order confirmation, right address (SO64118S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-right-address-so64118s/) + [Pick list (SO644000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/pick-list-so644000/): Displays the pick list created for a selected shipment in a ready-to-print form. The document can be printed or sent by email. + [Pro forma invoice (SO64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/pro-forma-invoice-so64300s/) + [Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-confirmation-so642000-so64200s/): Generates the shipment confirmation form created for a selected shipment in a ready-to-print form. The document can be printed or sent by email. + [Carrier labels (SO645000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/carrier-labels-so645000/): Displays ready-to-print carrier labels generated for particular shipment. + [Invoice (SO643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/invoice-so643000/): Displays invoices and notes in a ready-to-print form. ### Audit + [Sales order summary (SO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-summary-so610500/): Provides summary information on sales orders, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. + [Sales order details by customer (SO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-customer-so611000/): Displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. The data can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Sales order details by item (SO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-item-so611500/): Shows information on open sales orders, ordered by item. + [Shipment summary (SO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-summary-so620500/): Gives you information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Shipment details by customer (SO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-customer-so621000/): Shows information on shipments, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Shipment details by item (SO621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-item-so621500/): Displays shipment information, ordered by item. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Order register (SO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/order-register-so612000/): Displays the list of sales orders recorded in Visma Net during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and order type. + [Shipment register (SO612500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-register-so612500/): Displays the list of shipments during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and carrier.

Related pages

Windows

 Carrier labels (SO645000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/carrier-labels-so645000 section You use this report to generate and print the carrier labels for a particular shipment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Carrier labels (SO645000) You use this report to generate and print the carrier labels for a particular shipment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document for which you will generate carrier labels.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Invoice (SO643000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/invoice-so643000 section This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice (SO643000) This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the upper left), the invoice-to and ship-to addresses of the customer, the required customer information, and the itemised list of goods being shipped, along with the prices. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The document type for which information will be generated: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Fin. charge, Cash sale, or Void cash sale. Select a type, or leave the box blank to bring up multiple types.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document to be generated. If you don’t select a number, multiple invoices or notes will be generated, each on its own page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Order register (SO612000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/order-register-so612000 section This report displays the list of sales orders registered in Visma Net during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order register (SO612000) This report displays the list of sales orders registered in Visma Net during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of sales orders registered in Visma Net during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and order type. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Order type The order type for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all order types.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Pick list (SO644000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/pick-list-so644000 section This report displays a pick list for the selected sales order as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pick list (SO644000) This report displays a pick list for the selected sales order as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays a pick list for the selected sales order as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the list of items to be picked from various locations for the selected shipment. Quantity, weight, and volume information is provided for each items, and the total weight and volume are specified at the bottom of the document. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number; select one of the open shipments to prepare the pick list for it.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Quote (SO64101S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/quote-so64101s section With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Quote (SO64101S) With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the top left), the ship-to and invoice-to address of the customer, the pertinent shipping information, and the itemised information about goods to be shipped. > [!NOTE] > If you have added line notes in the order, only the first three lines of each note are displayed in the report. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view; a type must be specified. (Although by default the type of sales order is a quote in this report window, you can select any type.)
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Sales order details by customer (SO611000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-customer-so611000 section This report displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order details by customer (SO611000) This report displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. The data can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Summary Select this check box to display only summary by customer.
Uncompleted lines only Select this check box to include only uncompleted lines of the orders.
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. You can select among stock and non-stock items including stock and non-stock kits. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Sales order details by item (SO611500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-item-so611500 section This report displays information on open sales orders grouped by item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order details by item (SO611500) This report displays information on open sales orders grouped by item. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information on open sales orders grouped by item. The data can be displayed for a specific item (stock item, non-stock item, stock kit, or non-stock kit) or it can be filtered by customer, warehouse, and document date. ## The Report parameters tab On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Summary Select this check box to display only a summary by item.
Uncompleted lines only Select this check box to include only uncompleted lines of the orders.
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. You can select among stock and non-stock items including stock and non-stock kits. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Sales order summary (SO610500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-summary-so610500 section This report displays summary information about all sales orders, grouped by order type, reference number, and date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order summary (SO610500) This report displays summary information about all sales orders, grouped by order type, reference number, and date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary information about all sales orders, grouped by order type, reference number, and date. You can select sales orders by customer, warehouse, or item, and you can easily drill-down to the details of each sales order. ## The Report parameters tab On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. You can select among stock and non-stock items including stock and non-stock kits. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
Open orders only A check box that you select to view only open sales orders.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-confirmation-so642000-so64200s section This report displays the shipment confirmation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) This report displays the shipment confirmation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the shipment confirmation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. The document provides the company information (on the top left), the ship-to address of the customer, the required shipping information, and the itemised information about goods being shipped. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number for which a confirmation window will be displayed when you run the report. Select a shipment to display and print its confirmation.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Shipment details by customer (SO621000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-customer-so621000 section This report displays information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment details by customer (SO621000) This report displays information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, by item, and by document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Shipment details by item (SO621500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-item-so621500 section This report displays shipment details, grouped by item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment details by item (SO621500) This report displays shipment details, grouped by item. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays shipment details, grouped by item. Information can be filtered by warehouse, by item, and by document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Shipment register (SO612500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-register-so612500 section This report displays the list of shipments registered in Visma Net during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment register (SO612500) This report displays the list of shipments registered in Visma Net during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of shipments registered in Visma Net during the specified period. You can filter the list by customer, warehouse, and carrier. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Carrier ID The ship via code associated with the carrier. Leave the field blank to view information on all carriers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Shipment summary (SO620500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-summary-so620500 section This report displays summary information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment summary (SO620500) This report displays summary information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. Information can be filtered by customer, warehouse, by item, and by document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

 Supplier ledger /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger section By using the Supplier ledger workspace, you can maintain structured information about an unlimited number of suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger By using the Supplier ledger workspace, you can maintain structured information about an unlimited number of suppliers. By using the Supplier ledger workspace, you can maintain structured information about an unlimited number of suppliers. You can enter supplier documents, invoices, and adjustments, as well as track earlier payment discounts, apply payments to invoices, and print payments. ## Multi-currency support If you have activated the multi-currency support in Visma Net, you can assign a default foreign currency to each supplier account. The currency and its rate may be overridden on individual transactions if the settings of the supplier account allow currency overriding. The system automatically computes realised gains or losses upon payment of supplier invoices in foreign currencies. Outstanding foreign currency invoices can be revalued in the base currency as often as needed. ## Supplier defaults and overrides You can establish supplier classes that provide default values for creating other suppliers. You can also divide suppliers into classes based on the types of goods or services you purchase from them. On document entry, you specify a supplier, and most of the elements are populated with the supplier's default values. For more details, see: [About supplier defaults and overrides](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/about-supplier-defaults-and-overrides/). ## Rounding of invoice totals If the **Invoice rounding** functionality is activated in your system, you can set up the rules and the precision to be used to automatically round the amounts of the invoices that you enter or generate in the system. ## Expense reclassification If expense reclassification is performed as a separate stage of document processing in your organisation, you can configure support for expense reclassification for invoices. ## Configurable approval of invoices By using Visma Net, you can configure approval to match the approval procedures used in your company. + You can set up automatic pre-approval of all invoices and allow access to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window only to employees who are authorised to approve invoices and create payments. + Alternatively, you can configure the system in such a way that the invoices can be approved only by using the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window. ## Support for recurring invoices If you frequently have to create supplier invoices that contain the same information, you can assign such invoices to a schedule, so that the system will generate the documents at the frequency you specify: + once per financial period, on a specified day of each calendar month + on a specified day each week (or a user-specified number of weeks), or + on a user-specified number of days (such as daily or every other day) ## Supplier ledger inquiries Inquiries of the Supplier ledger workspace present suppliers' account information in a variety of ways. + You can view the total outstanding balances for a supplier or suppliers by a period and by a currency by using the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) inquiry window. + You can view all documents that are past due for a specific supplier, as well as the cash discount amounts taken or lost, in the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) inquiry window. + You can use extensive drill-down capabilities to quickly find any specific detail. ## Supplier ledger security options Visma Net implements a role-based, task-oriented approach to security. Users belong to roles, which are given appropriate rights to access only the resources the users need to perform their routine tasks. To restrict user access to some supplier accounts, you can include the supplier accounts and users authorised to work with them in restriction groups, which restrict other users' access to these sensitive supplier accounts. ## Sending documents electronically With Visma Net, you can define mailing settings for customers and suppliers to send documents to them electronically, by email. Also, you can configure sending such emails to employees who work with specific suppliers or customers. ## Payment terms You can define site-specific payment terms, which can be associated with specific suppliers (or supplier classes) and customers. The payment terms, which are applied to both outgoing and incoming payments, define the due dates and the available cash discounts. ## Other functionalities and options Depending on the chosen settings, you can perform various tasks related to supplier accounts, invoices, and payments: + Store any number of additional locations and contacts for each supplier + Attach scanned images or electronic versions of supplier documents to invoices, adjustments, and prepayments or to lines of the documents + Define three ageing periods for outstanding invoices + Pay each supplier's invoices by printing one payment or separate payments + Automatically calculate realised and unrealised gains and losses on foreign currency transactions + Process prepayments and multiple instalments. + Void payments + Track available and missed discounts Process purchase invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices section In Visma Net, a purchase invoice is created for each incoming invoice from a supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process purchase invoices In Visma Net, a purchase invoice is created for each incoming invoice from a supplier. + You can enter an invoice by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. + Invoices can be automatically generated when receipts are released in the Purchases workspace if the **Create invoice on receipt release** check box is selected in the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. + If the Inventory module is not enabled in your system, you can enter a invoice in the Supplier ledger workspace with only non-stock items. + If the Inventory module is enabled, an invoice may include lines with stock and non-stock items. ## Invoice data entry + An invoice must contain at least one detail line. It is recommended to include all available details from the original supplier document in the invoice. + To create an invoice, use the **Add purchase order receipt**, **Add purchase order receipt line**, and **Add purchase order** buttons in the table toolbar. These buttons are located in the **Document details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window and allow you to upload lines from receipts and purchase orders directly to the invoice. + When you click **Add purchase order**, a dialog box appears, displaying a list of uninvoiced purchase orders. These orders have lines with non-stock items that do not require a receipt, as indicated by the unchecked **Require receipt** box in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. + Upon saving an invoice for the first time, the system automatically assigns it a unique ID for tracking purposes. This ID is generated based on the number series assigned to invoices in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. + The system automatically calculates due dates and cash discount dates for each invoice, based on the supplier payment terms specified in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + You can attach to each invoice an electronic version or a scanned image of the original supplier document. Also, you can attach a related document to each line of the document. > [!NOTE] > To easily match supplier ledger documents and avoid duplications, ensure that invoices include a reference to the supplier's original document number. You can make this reference mandatory by selecting the **Require supplier reference** check box in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. To prevent users from entering duplicate documents, select the **Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number** check box in the same window. The system will then display an error message each time a user attempts to enter a supplier reference number that already exists in the system. ## Invoice amount rounding When the **Invoice rounding** functionality is activated in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window and rounding settings are configured in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, the system will automatically round the total invoice amount upon saving. For more information, refer to: [About rounding of document amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-rounding-of-document-amounts/). ## Expense reclassification If expense reclassification is a separate stage of document processing in your system, you can set up the workflow so that the users who enter invoices into the system will pre-release them, and later the authorised accountants will perform expense reclassification, or assign correct expense accounts (and subaccounts) and finally release them. For more information, see:[About support for expense reclassification.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/about-support-for-expense-reclassification/) ## Invoice statuses Each invoice has one of the following statuses, which tells you its stage in processing:
Option Description
On hold Generally, this status is used for an invoice that is a draft. This is the default status for new documents if the Hold documents on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. An invoice with the On hold status can be edited.
Balanced After editing is completed, you take the invoice off hold, thus changing its status to Balanced. If the Validate document totals on entry option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can take the invoice off hold only if you type the document control total.
Pre-released The status indicates that the invoice has been pre-released and requires expense reclassification. (This status is used only if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated.)
Open This status means that the document has been released (and approved, if required).
Closed This status reflects that the document has been paid.
Scheduled This status indicates that the document is assigned to a schedule, and a new document that is similar to the original one is generated periodically.
## Release of invoices To release invoices in bulk, use the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. For individual invoices, use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. A batch created upon release of the invoice is numbered in accordance with the number series assigned to the batches originating in supplier ledger. ## Invoice approval for payment If approval of invoices is not required in your system, all invoices, upon release, appear in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window and you can pay them. If approval of invoices is required before invoices may be paid, then upon release, the invoices appear in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window, from which you can approve them. Approved invoices appear in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window and you can pay them. ## Correcting errors on invoices Once released, a supplier ledger document cannot be edited or deleted; to correct it, you can issue an adjustment. Before you save the adjustment, type another **Supplier reference** value if the **Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number** option is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. ## Invoice payment You can pay invoices individually by using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window or in bulk in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. For details on payments, see: [About supplier ledger payment processing.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-supplier-ledger-payment-processing/) Enter an invoice in the base currency /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-in-the-base-currency section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter an invoice in the base currency 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, in the **Type** field, select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, the default is set to the current date, but you have the option to modify it. The **Post period** field will be automatically populated based on the document date you have selected. 1. In the **Supplier** field, choose the supplier who issued the invoice. The supplier's default location appears in the **Location** field. You have the option to select a different location. 1. In the **Supplier** field, choose the supplier who issued the invoice. The supplier's default location appears in the **Location** field. You have the option to select a different location. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the reference number of the supplier invoice the invoice is based on. This setting is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Make sure the base currency is shown in the **Currency** text field. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the invoice. An invoice must include at least one line. To add each detail row to the invoice, follow the steps below: 1. In the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Item ID** column, specify the line item by its item ID. If you select a stock item, you need to link it to a purchase receipt line, see [Link stock item to a purchase receipt line on purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap301000-link-item-purchase-receipt-task/). 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction. 1. In the **Quantity** column, enter the quantity of the line item purchased from the supplier. 1. Optional: Enter the unit of measure for the item in the **UoM** column. The default is the UoM defined to the product. 1. In the **Unit cost** column, enter the cost per specified unit. The default is the unit cost defined to the product. 1. If necessary, in the **Cost** column, manually enter the total amount of the specified quantity of the line item. The column is filled in by the system if you have specified the quantity and the unit cost. 1. Make sure the account shown in the **Account** column is correct; by default, the system uses the expense account associated with the supplier location, but you can select another account. The invoice is automatically posted to this account. 1. Make sure the subaccount shown in the **Subaccount** column is correct; by default, it is generated in accordance with the rule in the **Combine expense sub. from** field in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. You can manually change it if necessary. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the purchased item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: Attach a scanned image of the supplier original document to this invoice. To do this, click **Files** on the window title bar. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, select the **Hold** check box. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Enter a foreign currency invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-a-foreign-currency-invoice section Visma Net saves invoices, displaying the amounts in both the base currency and the document's currency, using the exchange rate specified in the document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a foreign currency invoice Visma Net saves invoices, displaying the amounts in both the base currency and the document's currency, using the exchange rate specified in the document. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, in the **Type** field, select **Purchase invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, enter the date of the invoice. The **Post period** field is filled out automatically based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier the invoice is from. The default location of the supplier is displayed in **Location** field. Select another location if necessary. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the number of the purchase invoice that the invoice is based on. This setting is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Ensure the invoice currency matches the supplier document currency. If not, choose a different currency. Overriding the currency is only possible if the **Enable currency override** check box is selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Optional: Click **Exchange rate** to open the **Rate selection** dialog box, where you can view the effective exchange rate for the currency. If the supplier's account settings allow, you can override their default exchange rate type. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the invoice. An invoice must include at least one line. To add each detail line to the invoice, follow the steps below: 1. On the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, specify the line item by its item ID (if available) or leave it blank. Only a non-stock item or service may be selected. The Inventory workspace will not be updated. 1. Optional: In the **Transaction descr.** column, enter a description of the transaction. 1. Optional: In the **Quantity** column, enter the quantity of the line item purchased from the supplier. 1. Optional: Enter the unit of measure for the item in the **UoM** column. 1. Optional: In the **Unit cost** column, enter the cost per specified unit. 1. If necessary, in the **Ext. cost** column, manually enter the total cost of the line item. The column is filled in by the system if you have specified the quantity and the unit cost. 1. Make sure the account shown in the **Account** column is correct; by default, the system uses the expense account associated with the supplier location, but you can select another account. 1. Make sure the subaccount shown in the **Subaccount** column is correct; by default, it is generated in accordance with the rule in the **Combine expense sub. from** field in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. You can manually change it if necessary. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select a deferral code if the expenses related to the purchased item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Optional: Attach a scanned image of the original document to this invoice. To do this, click **Files** on the window title bar. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, follow one of these steps and ensure the **Hold** check box is unchecked: + If the **Amount** field is visible in the top section of the window, input the invoice's total amount in this text field. + If the **Amount** field is not visible in the window, verify that the invoice's total amount is accurately displayed in the **Balance** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Use the **Currency toggle** button to view the document amounts in the foreign currency or in the base currency. Enter an invoice based on purchase receipts or purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-based-on-purchase-receipts-or-purchase-orders section In Visma Net, you can create an invoice for stock items received at the company warehouses based on purchase receipts or their individual lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter an invoice based on purchase receipts or purchase orders In Visma Net, you can create an invoice for stock items received at the company warehouses based on purchase receipts or their individual lines. ## Introduction Additionally, you can generate an invoice for non-stock items or services using purchase orders. Invoices are automatically generated for receipts with the **Create invoice** check box selected. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, in the **Type** field, select **Invoice**. 1. In the **Date** field, select the date of the invoice. By default, the current date is selected. The **Post period** field is filled out automatically based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select a required supplier. The default location of the supplier is displayed in **Location** text field; select another location if necessary. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the number of the invoice the invoice is based on if it is required in your system. This setting is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Ensure the document's currency is accurate. If not, choose an appropriate currency. To override the currency, the **Enable currency override** check box must be selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. Add purchase receipts to the list on the **Document details** tab as follows: 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add purchase order receipt** to add a purchase receipt with all its lines to the invoice. The system opens the **Add purchase order receipt** dialog box, which displays the list of released receipts of the selected supplier that have not been fully invoiced. 1. Select particular purchase receipts by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the unlabelled column. 1. Click **Add and close** to add the selected receipts to the invoice and close the dialog box. Check the columns of the **Document details** tab, which have been filled in automatically in accordance with the selected document or documents. Compare the item quantity and cost copied from the receipt with the amounts in the purchase invoice, and correct them, if needed. Delete unnecessary lines. If the unit cost specified in the invoice differs from the unit cost taken from the receipt, the system posts the discrepancy to the purchase price variance account associated with the item. 1. To add selected purchase receipt lines to the invoice, perform the following steps: 1. In the table toolbar, click the **Add purchase order receipt line** button to add one line or multiple lines of a specific receipt to the invoice. The system opens the **Add receipt line dialog box**. 1. Optional: In the **Receipt no.** text field in the dialog box, select the receipt whose lines you want to add to the invoice. All the lines of the selected receipt are displayed in the dialog box. 1. Select receipt lines by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the unlabelled column. 1. Click **Add and close** to add the selected receipt lines to the invoice and close the dialog box. Notice that the columns of the table on the **Document details** tab have been filled in automatically with the selected lines. Compare the item quantity and cost copied from the receipt with the amounts in the purchase invoice, and correct them, if needed. 1. To add purchase orders to the invoice, perform the following steps: 1. In the **Document details** tab toolbar, click **Add purchase order** if the goods ordered were non-stock items or services. The system opens the **Add purchase order dialog box**, which displays the list of purchase orders of the selected supplier. 1. Select purchase orders by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the unlabelled column. 1. Click the **Add and close** button to add the selected orders to the invoice. Examine the columns in the **Document details** tab, which are automatically populated based on the selected document. Compare the item quantity and cost from the purchase order to the amounts in the purchase invoice, and make any necessary corrections. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice as **Balanced**, follow one of the steps below and ensure the **Hold** check box is unchecked: + If the **Amount** field is visible, enter the invoice's total amount in the text field. + If the **Amount** field is not visible, verify that the invoice's total amount is correctly displayed in the **Balance** text field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Find a particular invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/find-a-particular-invoice section You can use multiple windows to find a invoice that has been created with Visma Net, depending on the status of the invoice and other parameters: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Find a particular invoice You can use multiple windows to find a invoice that has been created with Visma Net, depending on the status of the invoice and other parameters: ## Introduction + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window: Use this window to find any invoice in the system. + [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window: Use this window to find invoices with the **Open** status that require approval or have been approved (if approval of invoices is required in your system). + [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window: Use this window to find outstanding invoices with the **Open** status. ## Find an invoice via the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window: 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Invoice**. 1. Select a specific invoice in one of the following ways: + Click the navigation buttons on the window toolbar until you see the invoice. + Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Invoice no.** field of the top part, and do the following: 1. Select the column you want to search by clicking its header. 1. Type a text in the **Search** field in the lower-left corner, and press Enter. The system highlights the items in the column that contain the text. 1. Double-click the invoice to display its details in the window. ## Find an invoice via the Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) window 1. Go to the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window: 1. Choose options in the top section that correspond to the known attributes of the desired invoice. The table will display documents that match the specified criteria. 1. To display the invoice you are looking for in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, select the line with the particular invoice and click **View document** on the table toolbar. ## Find an invoice via the Process payments (AP50301S) window 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window: 1. Filter the documents to be displayed in the table part using the options in the **Filters** section in the top part of the window. 1. Select the line with the invoice and click its reference number link to display the invoice in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Pay an individual purchase invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/pay-an-individual-purchase-invoice section You use the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window to start the process of paying an individual open purchase invoice. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pay an individual purchase invoice You use the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window to start the process of paying an individual open purchase invoice. For more information: [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/). ## Introduction You use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window to start the process of paying an individual open purchase invoice. ## Before you proceed Ensure that purchase invoices that require approvals are processed in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window. ## Pay for an individual purchase invoice 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Purchase invoice**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the purchase invoice to be paid. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Actions** and then select **Manual payment**. The [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window opens with a new payment created for this purchase invoice. 1. Verify the document information: ensure the desired payment method is selected and the date is accurately specified. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the applicable charges or fees for processing this payment in the bank. For each applicable charge, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row to the table. 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type that designates the bank charge applicable to this payment. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount applicable to this payment. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box. If the **Hold** check box is disabled and displays a yellow warning mark to the left, print an invoice for this payment first. Afterwards, the document status will change to **Printed**. 1. Click **Release** in the window toolbar to release the payment. The document status will change to **Released**. Correct a purchase invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/correct-a-purchase-invoice section You correct a purchase invoice differently, depending on whether the invoice was released or not (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct a purchase invoice You correct a purchase invoice differently, depending on whether the invoice was released or not (and has the Balanced, On hold, or Scheduled status). ## Introduction You correct a purchase invoice differently, depending on whether the invoice was released or not (and has the **Balanced**, **On hold**, or **Scheduled** status). Use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window to correct or reverse an invoice. ## Correct an invoice that has not been released 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Find the invoice using the navigation buttons, or search for it by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Invoice no.** field at the top. This will open a list of documents. Alternatively, you can enter the invoice number directly into the **Invoice no.** field. 1. Make relevant corrections to the invoice. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, check whether the **Amount** field of the top part is displayed or not: + If the **Amount** field of the top part is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the invoice is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. Make sure that the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Correct an invoice that has been released Use one of the following ways to correct a released invoice: + Reverse the invoice to reverse the impact of the invoice. For step-by-step instructions of how to reverse a invoice, see: [Reverse an invoice.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/) + Use the **Correct invoice** action in the **Actions** drop-down in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. + Correct the invoice to decrease the supplier ledger balance by creating a purchase credit note. + Correct the invoice to increase the supplier ledger balance by creating a credit adjustment.

Related pages

Tasks

 Reverse an invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/reverse-an-invoice page Reversing an invoice, which pertains to a purchase receipt, impacts the supplier ledger account instead of the associated expense account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reverse an invoice Reversing an invoice, which pertains to a purchase receipt, impacts the supplier ledger account instead of the associated expense account. ## Introduction Reversing an invoice, which pertains to a purchase receipt, impacts the supplier ledger account instead of the associated expense account. Upon releasing the resulting purchase credit note, the purchase receipt status will be updated to **Open**. In Visma Net, you cannot delete an invoice once it has been released; you can either correct or reverse it. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Locate the invoice to be reversed in one of the following ways: + In the **Reference no.** field of the top part, select the invoice by its reference number. + Click the navigation buttons in the window toolbar until you see the appropriate invoice on the screen. 1. Click **Actions** on the window toolbar and select **Reverse**. The system will display the created purchase credit note with the same details as the invoice and a status of **Balanced**. 1. Verify that the settings of the newly created adjustment are accurate, such as ensuring the total amount of the purchase credit note matches the total amount of the invoice. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a reference to the invoice the adjustment is based on. 1. Change the reference to the supplier document if required, since the system checks if it is unique. 1. Click **Release** to release the adjustment.

Related pages

Tasks

 Release purchase invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/release-purchase-invoices page You can release invoices and adjustments by using one of the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release purchase invoices You can release invoices and adjustments by using one of the following windows: ## Introduction + To release a particular invoice or adjustment, use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Search the invoice or adjustment, and click **Release** in the window toolbar. + To release multiple invoices, adjustments, and other supplier ledger documents at a time, use the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) (AP501000) window, as described in the following section. 1. Go to the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. 1. Do one of the following: + To release all listed documents, click **Release all** in the window toolbar. + To release only selected documents, select each document you want to release by selecting the appropriate unlabelled check box, and in the window toolbar, click **Release**. You can use filtering to display a narrower range of documents when you get into this window. Approve purchase invoices for payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment section You can approve multiple invoices by using the Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) window if approval of invoices is required in your system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve purchase invoices for payment You can approve multiple invoices by using the Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) window if approval of invoices is required in your system. For more information: [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/). ## Introduction You can approve multiple invoices by using the [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/) window if approval of invoices is required in your system. You can pay invoices without approval if the **Require approval of invoices prior to payment** check box is not selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Go to the [Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000/) window. 1. In the top part, make sure the **Show approved for payment** check box is cleared. 1. Specify the criteria to select the invoices you want to approve. Indicate whether you want to take cash discounts, pay for overdue invoices, or to pay invoices before their due dates as follows: + To select the invoices with cash discounts available, select the **Cash discount expires within** check box and specify the maximum number of days in the adjacent field. + To display overdue invoices, select the **Due date within** check box, type **0** in the adjacent field, and select the **Pay date within** check box, and type **0** in the adjacent field. 1. In the table, review the list of documents that meet the criteria you have specified. In the table toolbar, you can use filtering options to display documents with specific properties only. 1. To approve all listed invoices, select the unlabelled check box used as a column heading. 1. To approve only some of the invoices, select the appropriate unlabelled check boxes in the column with a check box as a heading. 1. Optional: If an invoice should be paid individually, select the **Pay separately** check box for it. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Windows

 Create a purchase invoice in the general ledger /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-invoice-in-the-general-ledger section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase invoice in the general ledger 1. Go to the [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/) window. The [Journal vouchers (GL304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-vouchers-gl304000/) window is available, if you check option **Journal voucher** in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new record. 1. Enter the correct **Transaction date**, **Currency**, and **Description**. 1. On the **Transactions** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a row. 1. In the **Trans. code** column, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select **Supplier ledger** workspace with **INV** as the transaction type. 1. Enter any other necessary values on the row. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. ## What is next? If you are using AutoPay to pay the invoice, follow these instructions: [Create outgoing payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-outgoing-payments/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Preview purchase invoice attachments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/preview-purchase-invoice-attachments page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Preview purchase invoice attachments 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Choose an existing invoice with attachments or create a new purchase invoice and attach a file. A number will appear next to the **Files** element in the top right corner of the window when an invoice has attachments. 1. Click **Show files**. The split window displays the first attachment available. If there are multiple attachments, click the drop-down arrow beside the document icon in the top left corner of the split window to choose another attachment. + Use the page arrows to navigate between the pages of an attachment. + Use the rotation icons to rotate the attachment. + Use the cross-slide to zoom in and out on the attachment. + To adjust the width of the attachment display window, click and drag the vertical line between the invoice details and the displayed attachment. + When you navigate between different invoice records in the left part of the window, the display window shows the contents of the chosen invoice. + If there are no attachments, the display part is empty. 1. To close the attachment display window, click **Hide files**.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Register purchase invoices to projects /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/register-purchase-invoices-to-projects section In the Projects (PM301000) and Project tasks (PM302000) windows, on the General settings tab, in the Visibility settings section, make sure that you have selected the check box Supplier ledger, so that you can register purchase invoices to projects. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Register purchase invoices to projects In the Projects (PM301000) and Project tasks (PM302000) windows, on the General settings tab, in the Visibility settings section, make sure that you have selected the check box Supplier ledger, so that you can register purchase invoices to projects. For more information: [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/), [Project tasks (PM302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/project-tasks-pm302000/). 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Select the relevant supplier. 1. Add a **Supplier ref**. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a line and fill out the necessary information, making sure to add the correct project in the **Project** column. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. Create a purchase document /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-document section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase document 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** drop-down list, select one of the following [options](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap301000-purchase-invoices-document-types-pop-up-ref/): 1. **Purchase invoice**: If you want to create a new invoice. 1. **Credit adjustment**: If you want to adjust a sales invoice that has already been released. 1. **Purchase credit note**: If you want to adjust a purchase invoice that has already been released. 1. **Prepayment**: If you have a prepayment request from a supplier. 1. Fill in all mandatory fields (*). For outgoing payments, the CID is not mandatory. However, suppliers may require a CID for incoming payments. If an incoming payment lacks a CID, the bank will reject the payment for that supplier. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to enter document lines. The **Item ID** is optional. 1. Enter required details such as **Quantity**, **Unit cost**, and, if needed, choose the **Account** and **Subaccount**. 1. Enter any relevant information on the other tabs, for example, on the **Financial details** tab. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The document status is **Balanced**. 1. Click **Release** to post the document to the general ledger.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a purchase document with Approval /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-document-with-approval section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase document with Approval ## Before you start You must activate a license before you can approve documents in Approval: [Check activation of Approval license](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/check-activation-of-approval-license/) 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Under **Type**, select one of the following options: 1. **Purchase invoice**: To create a new invoice. 1. **Credit adjustment**: To adjust a sales invoice that is already released. 1. **Purchase credit note**: To adjust a purchase invoice that has already been released. 1. **Prepayment**: To have a prepayment request from a supplier. 1. Fill in all mandatory fields (*). > [!NOTE] > The CID is not mandatory on outgoing payments, but suppliers can require a CID on incoming payments. If there is no CID on an incoming payment, the bank rejects the payment for this supplier. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to enter document lines. The **Item ID** is optional. 1. Go to the **Approval details** tab. 1. In the **Default document** field, select the desired document. 1. Click **Add attachment**. 1. In the **Initial approver** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the approver. 1. Optional: In the **Comment** text box, enter a comment if necessary. 1. Save the invoice and click **Send to Approval**. > [!NOTE] > You can also set a preference that all invoices will automatically be released when they are approved in Approval: [Set Release document from Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/set-release-document-from-approval-as-the-default-action/) ## What is next? The payment request is now sent to Approval and the approvers will receive an email about a pending approving task [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/GB_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/SE_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/SE_sv/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/NO_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/NO_no/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/NL_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/Nl_nl/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/fi_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/fi_fi/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/DK_en/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm) [Approve with Approval](https://help.visma.net/DK_da/approval/online-help/actions-approvers/task-handling.htm). The **Approval status** field will show you the updated status, depending on the approvers actions in Approval : > [!NOTE] > You can click the status link for more information about the status in the reports [Approval document history (AP40104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-history-ap40104s/) and [Approval document line history (AP40105S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-line-history-ap40105s/).
Status Description
New The invoice is new.
Sent to Approval The invoice has been sent to Approval
Cancelled The status after you have clicked the Cancel button. (The Send to Approval button changes to Cancel after sending the document to Approval).
Received in Approval The invoice has been received by Approval.
Pending The invoice is on a valid approval flow and is pending approval.
Rejected The invoice has been rejected by Approval.
Approved The invoice has been approved and you can now release invoices that are ready to be paid. In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can set up automatic release of approved invoices.
> [!NOTE] > You must [release purchase invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/release-purchase-invoices/) before you can pay it, unless you have set that all approved invoices will automatically be released.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a purchase credit note for an existing purchase invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-credit-note-for-an-existing-purchase-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase credit note for an existing purchase invoice 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the invoice. Before you continue, ensure that the invoice has been released and has the status **Open** or **Closed**. If not, click **Release**. 1. Click **Actions - Reverse**. The invoice type will change to **Purchase credit note**. 1. If necessary, modify the details of the purchase credit note. For example, you can correct rounding differences in the **Rounding diff.** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. The status changes to **Open**. You have to close the credit note and the connected purchase invoice manually. ## Close the credit note and purchase invoice manually 1. You are here: In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, with your credit note in status **Open**. 1. Click **Actions** and choose **Manual payments**. The **Payments** window is displayed. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new invoice line. 1. The document type **Purchase invoice** is already selected. 1. Click in the **Reference no.** field and select the invoice you created the credit note from. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Ensure **Hold** is deselected, then click **Release** to match the credit note with the invoice. After matching and releasing the invoice and credit note, the status will change to **Closed** and display ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Create a purchase credit note /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-credit-note section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a purchase credit note 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Purchase credit note**. 1. Fill in all required fields (*). 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the transactions. 1. Click **Release**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Create an invoice with landed costs /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-an-invoice-with-landed-costs section You usually enter landed costs when you create a purchase receipt in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an invoice with landed costs You usually enter landed costs when you create a purchase receipt in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. For more information: [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/). ## Introduction You usually enter landed costs when you create a purchase receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. However, in some cases, you may receive an invoice from a landed cost supplier after the goods have been received. To add landed costs incurred for goods specified on a purchase receipt that has been released, create an invoice in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. ## Before you proceed In Visma Net, landed cost codes are utilized to specify additional expenses incurred when delivering purchased goods to your company's warehouses or directly to customer locations. As per your company's policies, the following details about the specific landed cost code must be defined in the [Landed cost codes (PO202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/landed-cost-codes-po202000/) window: the method of allocating landed cost amounts among the shipped goods, and the application of the landed cost — either to an invoice or adjustment in the Supplier ledger workspace only, to a purchase receipt in the Purchases workspace only, or to either of these documents. You can only associate suppliers with a landed cost code if the **Landed cost supplier** check box is selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. ## Create an invoice with landed costs 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part area, select **Invoice.** 1. In the **Date** field, enter the date from the supplier invoice. The **Post period** field is filled in automatically based on the selected date. 1. Select the supplier in the **Supplier** field. The default location of the supplier is displayed in the **Location** field. You can select another location. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the invoice number that the current invoice is based on. This field is mandatory if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Make sure the document currency is correct. You can select another currency. 1. Optional: Add a description of the invoice. 1. On the **Landed cost** tab, add landed costs to the invoice, following the steps below for each line. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Landed cost code** column, select the code that describes the specific landed costs incurred. The landed cost codes associated with the supplier are listed. 1. In the **Amount** column, enter the amount incurred for the goods specified on the purchase receipt. 1. Select a **VAT category**. 1. In the **Purchase order receipt no.** column, select the number of the receipt the invoice is associated with. 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, select the identifier of the item in the **Purchase order receipt** column for which the landed costs are specified. 1. To save the invoice with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. 1. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, take one of the steps below and then make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared: + If the **Amount** field of the top part area is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this text field. + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the invoice is displayed correctly in the **Balance** field. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Windows

 Recurring invoices and schedules /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/recurring-invoices-and-schedules page Some supplier ledger documents, such as monthly rent invoices or quarterly and annual insurance invoices, need to be entered regularly with the same amount and similar settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring invoices and schedules Some supplier ledger documents, such as monthly rent invoices or quarterly and annual insurance invoices, need to be entered regularly with the same amount and similar settings. ## Introduction To automate the process of adding these recurring documents to Visma Net, you can create schedules for them. ## Scheduling the generation of supplier ledger documents You can automate the process of creating recurring documents by doing either of the following: + By adding a particular document to an existing schedule in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. In this window, open the document to be scheduled and click **Actions - Add to schedule** in the window toolbar. + By creating a specific schedule and assigning one or multiple documents to that schedule in the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. You can only schedule documents with the **Balanced** status. A schedule determines the frequency and number of times specific documents are generated. In the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window, you can set a fixed number of repetitions for each schedule by entering a value in the **Execution limit (times)** field. Alternatively, you can allow unlimited schedule executions by selecting the **No limit** check box. You also define the frequency of the schedule executions by selecting one of the following option buttons in the window: Daily : The documents will be generated daily or every **x** days. Weekly : The documents will be generated once a week or once every **x** weeks. Monthly : The documents will be generated once per month or once every **x** months. By financial period : The documents will be generated once per financial period or once per **x** financial periods (or in every **xth** financial period). You can assign either a single document or multiple documents to a schedule. After a document has been assigned to a schedule, its status will change to **Scheduled**. ## Attaching relevant documents to schedules To simplify document tracking and streamline auditing, you can attach scanned or electronic versions of documents to each schedule. To do this, follow these steps in the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window: 1. In the **Schedule ID** field, select the schedule by its ID. 1. In the window title bar, click **Files**. This opens the **Files** dialog box. 1. In the dialog box, click **Add file** in the table title bar. This brings up the **Upload file** dialog box. 1. In the **Upload file** dialog box, click **Browse** to locate the file, and then click **Upload** to import the file and close the dialog box. When assigning multiple unrelated documents to the same schedule, go to the **Document list** tab and locate each document in the table. Click the staple icon at the beginning of each row to attach one or more files providing an explanation for the periodic invoice generation. ## Running schedules To generate documents in accordance with the schedule, run the schedule periodically by using the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window. When you run a schedule, the system uses the original document as a template to generate similar documents. The documents generated by a schedule differ from the template document as follows: Date : The date of each document is determined by the schedule you have configured. Reference number : A new reference number is generated for each document in accordance with the number series specified in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. VAT rate : The system calculates VAT and taxable amounts in a document using the VAT rates effective on the document creation date. As a result, VAT amounts may vary in documents generated with the same schedule. To view the VAT rate used in a specific document, go to the **VAT details** tab in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Currency rate : If a currency of a document differs from the base currency set in the system, the system uses for conversion the currency exchange rate effective on the date of the document creation. No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. No documents will be generated ahead of time, but missing documents for previous due dates can be generated by running the schedule once for each missed due date. The documents generated by the schedule will have the **Balanced** status, allowing you to release or post them like any other documents. To view and edit a specific document, access the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. If you make any adjustments, ensure that the invoice's status remains **Balanced** before releasing or approving it for payment. ## Editing template documents You can edit the template document with the **Scheduled** status at any time. To remove a scheduled document, navigate to the **Document list** tab in the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. Click **Delete row** in the table toolbar. The document's status will change to **Voided**, and it will no longer be used for generating documents. Generate a recurring invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-a-recurring-invoice page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate a recurring invoice 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window. 1. To select the schedules by a range of due dates, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Click the **On this date** button, and select the date that ends the range of due dates in the unlabelled field to the right. 1. To run a specific number of schedules, do the following: 1. Select the start date in the **Start on** field. 1. Select the **After running this number of schedules** button, and type the number in the unlabelled field to the right. 1. In the table, select the unlabelled check box preceding each schedule to be run. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Run selected** to generate documents based on the chosen schedule. Documents will only be generated according to the schedule, and cannot be generated ahead of time. The generated document will have the same details as the scheduled document, with its transaction date set according to the schedule. ## View the generated documents 1. Once processing is successfully completed, click one of the processed schedules on the list to select it. 1. Click **View schedule** in the toolbar. This opens the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window as a dialog box with the selected schedule. 1. Click the reference number of any document to open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window as a pop-up. Make any needed modifications to the document. Generate recurring supplier transactions /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-recurring-supplier-transactions page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring supplier transactions ## Before you start You can use the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window to view all active schedules, and run all the listed schedules or just the ones you select. To create recurring transactions, go to: [Create a schedule for recurring invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-schedule-for-recurring-invoices/). 1. Go to the [Generate recurring transactions (AP504000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000/) window. 1. In the **Start on** field you can enter the start date of the date range for the selected schedules. If you leave this field blank, it will show all schedules that were due before the current date. 1. In the **Stop** section, select **On this date** if you want to enter an end date of the date range for the schedule selection. Or select **After running this number of schedules** to set the number of schedules where the process will stop running. 1. In the bottom part of this window you can view the details of a selected schedule by clicking **View schedule**. You can also create a new schedule if you click **New schedule**. This will open the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. Click **Run selected** to run only the schedules that you have selected in the list. Click **Run all** to run all the listed schedules. Create a schedule for recurring invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-schedule-for-recurring-invoices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a schedule for recurring invoices 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new record. A **schedule ID** will be generated automatically upon saving. Use the **Active** check box to activate or deactivate the schedule. 1. Select a **start date** for the schedule. 1. Complete the optional fields: **Expiration date**: Available when **Never expires** is unchecked. **Execution limit (times)**: Set the maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. Available when **No limit** is unchecked. **Description**: Provide a description for the schedule. The **Next execution** field displays the next execution date for the schedule and is read-only. 1. In the **Schedule type** section, choose the frequency for generating invoices. Pick a schedule type and enter the required parameters in the related section on the right side. 1. In the **Document list** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to assign one or more invoices to the schedule. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, click to activate the field and click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select an invoice by its reference number. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the **Generated documents** tab you can see a list of the documents generated as a result of running this schedule. ## What is next? To run recurring transactions, go to [Generate recurring transactions.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-recurring-supplier-transactions/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Schedule a recurring invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/schedule-a-recurring-invoice section Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Schedule a recurring invoice Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. For more information: [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/). ## Before you proceed Create a document (or multiple documents if they should be generated according to the same schedule) by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Save each document with the **Balanced** status. Do not release the them. You can add supplier ledger documents of the following types to schedules: **Invoice**, **Credit adjustment**, **Purchase credit note**, and **Prepayment**. If you want to use a document that is already closed, copy, and paste it to a new document. ## Create a schedule 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. In the top part, in the **Description** field, add a description of the schedule. 1. In the **Start date** field, select the start date for the schedule. The default is the current date. 1. Define limitations on the schedule execution as follows: + Enter the date when this schedule expires in the **Expiration date** field, or select the **Never expires** check box. + Enter the maximum number of times the schedule should be executed in the **Execution limit** field, or select the **No limit** check box. 1. Specify how often the document should be generated: + To generate the document daily or every **x** days, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Daily**. 1. In the **Every day(s)** field, type an integer to specify the number of days between document generations. To generate a document every day, enter 1; to generate a document every other day, enter 2; and so on. + To generate the document weekly or every **x** weeks, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Weekly**. 1. In the **Every week(s)** field, type an integer to specify the number of weeks between document generation. 1. Select the check boxes to specify the days of the week when the documents should be generated. + To generate the document monthly or every **x** months, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **Monthly**. 1. In the **Every month(s)** field, enter an integer to specify the number of months between document generation. 1. Select when the document should be generated: either the day of the month or the week in the month and day of the week (such as the third Friday of the month). + To generate the document every **x** financial periods, do the following: 1. In the **Schedule type** section, select **By financial period**. 1. In the **Every period(s)** field, type an integer to specify the frequency of document generation by financial period. 1. Specify whether the document should be generated on the first day of the financial period, the last day of the financial period, or a specific day of the period. 1. Make sure the **Active** check box is selected to indicate that the schedule is active. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: For user reference, attach a scanned copy or electronic version of the document on which this schedule is based. To do this, drag the file from the folder on your computer and drop it in the top part. ## Add documents to a schedule 1. Go to the [Recurring transactions (AP203500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500/) window. 1. In the **Schedule ID** field, select a schedule to which you want to add a document or documents. 1. On the **Document list** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Type** column, select the type of a document to be added. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document by its reference number. 1. Optional: To attach an electronic version of the related document or its scanned image, click the staple icon and select and upload the document. 1. Repeat steps 1- 4 for each document you want to add. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Post documents to the general ledger manually /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/post-documents-to-the-general-ledger-manually section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Post documents to the general ledger manually ## Before you start If your company uses combined releasing and posting, the general ledger is automatically updated when you release. Both the payment and the purchase invoice, or the credit note, will be closed and you do not need to do anything in the general ledger. If you do not use automatic post and release or if the default combined post and release setting for the Supplier ledger has been changed (the **Do not automatically release supplier payments** check box is selected), you can post invoices manually by following the instructions below. 1. Go to the [Post transactions (GL502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/post-transactions-gl502000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) if your document is not listed. 1. Select the document you want to post. 1. Click **Post**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Check activation of Approval license /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/check-activation-of-approval-license page To approve your invoices in Approval, you must activate a license. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Check activation of Approval license To approve your invoices in Approval, you must activate a license. You can check if your licence is activated by following the steps below. 1. If you can see the **Approval details** tab in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, it means your license is active. 1. If you can see the **Send to Approval** button, it means that you can approve your purchase invoices in Approval.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Set Release document from Approval as the default action /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/set-release-document-from-approval-as-the-default-action section You can set as default action that all invoices will automatically be released when they are approved in Approval. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set Release document from Approval as the default action You can set as default action that all invoices will automatically be released when they are approved in Approval. 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. Find the **Approval settings** section. 1. Select the **Release document from Approval** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Override Send to Approval as the default action /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Override Send to Approval as the default action ## Before you start To handle large amounts of invoices more efficiently, you can send all invoices to Approval as a default action. If nothing is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window or in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, the system will use the Approval license to define the default action. + If Approval is activated, the default action is **Send to Approval**. For Sweden, if the pre-booking functionality is also activated in Approval, the default action is **Pre-book and Send to Approval**. + If Approval is not activated, the default action is **Release**. You can override these actions defined by the license, by following the instructions below. 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. Find the **Invoice inbox settings** section. 1. In the **Default action for invoice inbox** drop-down list, select **Send to Approval**. You can also set **Hold** or **Release** as a default actions here. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? You can also override this default action for one specific supplier: [Override Send to Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action-for-one-supplier/). Run ageing reports /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/run-ageing-reports page You can use multiple Supplier ledger ageing reports, depending on such factors as the currency in which you would like to view outstanding and past due balances in, and whether balances will be broken down by days outstanding or days past due. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Run ageing reports You can use multiple Supplier ledger ageing reports, depending on such factors as the currency in which you would like to view outstanding and past due balances in, and whether balances will be broken down by days outstanding or days past due. ## Introduction You can use multiple Supplier ledger ageing reports, depending on such factors as the currency in which you would like to view outstanding and past due balances in, and whether balances will be broken down by days outstanding or days past due. This topic provides instructions for using the following reports: + [Aged past due (AP631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ap631000/) + [Aged past due MC (AP631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-mc-ap631100/) + [Aged outstanding (AP631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ap631500/) + [Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ap631600/) + [Aged period sensitive (AP630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ap630500/) ## Run Aged past due 1. Go to the [Aged past due (AP631000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ap631000/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view the past due documents on the selected ageing date + **Summary**: To view the past due balances on the selected ageing date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all the suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with past due balances. Balances are broken down by days past due on the specified date, and all amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## Run Aged past due (MC) 1. Go to the [Aged past due MC (AP631100)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-mc-ap631100/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view the past due documents on the selected ageing date + **Summary**: To view the past due balances on the selected ageing date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with past due balances, which are broken down by days past due on the specified ageing date. The amounts are displayed in the documents' currencies and in the base currency. ## Run Aged outstanding 1. Go to the [Aged outstanding (AP631500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ap631500/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view outstanding documents on the selected aging date + **Summary**: To view outstanding balances on the selected aging date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days outstanding with respect to the specified ageing date. The amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## Run Aged outstanding (currency) 1. Go to the [Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ap631600/) window. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date + **Summary**: To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to view information on all suppliers. 1. In the **Ageing date** field, select the date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for documents. 1. Click **Run report**. The report displays the list of the suppliers with outstanding balances, which are broken down by days outstanding with respect to the specified ageing date. The amounts are displayed in the documents currencies and in the base currency. ## Aged period sensitive 1. Go to the [Aged period sensitive (AP630500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ap630500/) window. 1. Select the financial period. The system uses the selected period to calculate the ageing categories for the documents. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Detailed**: To view past due documents on the last day of the selected financial period + **Summary**: To view past due balances on the last day of the selected financial period 1. Select a supplier class, or leave the **Supplier class** field blank to view information on all the classes. 1. Click **Run report**. The report lists suppliers with past due balances, which are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. All the amounts are displayed in the base currency. About support for expense reclassification /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/about-support-for-expense-reclassification page Visma Net provides support for expense reclassification. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About support for expense reclassification Visma Net provides support for expense reclassification. ## Introduction If your company requires a separate step for expense reclassification during invoice processing, you can enable this feature. When activated in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the invoice release process consists of two stages: 1. **Pre-release**: A data entry worker enters an invoice and pre-releases it. All the expenses specified in the document are temporarily recorded to the reclassification account. 1. **Release**: An authorised accountant reviews a pre-released document, specifies the correct expense accounts and subaccounts (the system allows no other changes), and releases the document. ## Configuration of support for expense reclassification Once the functionality is activated, you can assign the account and subaccount for temporarily recording non-classified expenses for each supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. To quickly assign accounts to new suppliers, select the default account and subaccount for expenses that need reclassification for each supplier class. This can be done in the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. By doing this, every new supplier added to the class will automatically have the specified account and subaccount for that class. ## Possible workflows Pending expense reclassification is only allowed for invoices entered manually in the Supplier ledger workspace. You can use one of the following scenarios: Standard scenario : When the data entry worker is familiar with the appropriate expense accounts and subaccounts for an invoice, they can enter the document and release it. Two-step scenario : If you are uncertain about the correct expense accounts to select while entering an invoice, keep the default accounts and subaccounts on the document lines. Click **Pre-release** in the window toolbar to pre-release the document. An authorised accountant will review the document later, assign the appropriate expense account and subaccount to each line, and release the document. ## Reclassification of expenses An authorised accountant can reclassify expenses for documents pending reclassification using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. The accountant selects each document with the **Pre-released** status, reviews it, and assigns a specific expense account and subaccount to each document line, according to the expense classification used in your organisation. For a document with the **Pre-released** status, only the branch, expense account, and expense subaccount may be changed. ## Visibility of the pre-released documents The **pre-released** invoices appear on supplier ledger reports and inquiries as **Pre-released** documents. You can also view them in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. ## Rules for voiding the pre-released documents To void an invoice with a **Pre-released** status, make sure that it has not received any payments. If a payment has been made for a pre-released invoice you want to void, you must first void the payment and then void the invoice. Process payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About supplier ledger payment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-supplier-ledger-payment-processing page Supplier ledger payments are a type of internal payment document designed for settling invoices incurred through purchases from suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier ledger payment processing Supplier ledger payments are a type of internal payment document designed for settling invoices incurred through purchases from suppliers. ## Introduction ## Manual creation of supplier ledger payments You create a supplier ledger payment using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. First, choose the date, supplier, location, and how you want to pay them. On the **Details** tab, you can do two things: + You can add the invoices to pay and make changes. + You can let the system find all the invoices you owe automatically, including any money you need to pay back from returns, and then pick which ones you want to pay. The **Unapplied balance** field shows how much money you still owe. You cannot complete the payment until this balance reaches zero. If your bank adds extra charges to your payment, like interest fees, you can set those up on the **Finance charges** tab. ## Automatic creation of supplier ledger payments Initiate automatic invoice payments in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window using schedules. See [About the scheduler](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-scheduler/) and [Create a new schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule/). Select invoices for payment by date, cash account, method, supplier, and discount availability. Payments will be created for selected invoices, grouped by supplier. However, sometimes you might want to pay certain invoices separately. If you set the **Pay separately** option for a supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, each invoice or credit adjustment will have a separate payment. For specific invoices, you may need to select **Pay separately** for individual payments. If **Pay separately** is selected for a supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, each invoice or credit adjustment will get its own separate payment. ## Supplier ledger payment statuses Each supplier ledger payment has one of the following statuses, which tells you its stage in processing:
Status Description
On hold Typically used for drafts. This is the default status for new documents if the Hold documents on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. Payments with this status cannot have applied invoices or adjustments, and cannot be taken off hold if the payment method requires printing and has not been printed.
Printed Once editing is completed and the payment, if required, has been printed, the status of the supplier ledger payment will change to Printed. You can release a document in this status.
Closed The document has been released.
## Release of supplier ledger payments You can release supplier ledger payments that do not need to be printed whenever you want, regardless of when you plan to make the actual payment. When you release a payment, it generates a batch of transactions that decreases both the cash account and the supplier's ledger account balances. If you release the payment before the cash discount deadline, you can take advantage of a discount, which reduces the amount you need to pay. ## Voiding payments In the workspace, you have the option to void a supplier ledger payment that was previously released. When you void a payment, it effectively reverses all the transactions associated with that payment and undoes any entries made in the workspace. The voided payment for a supplier ledger payment contains the same summary and details as the original payment but with negative amounts, essentially cancelling out the previous transaction. About credit adjustment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-credit-adjustment-processing page You use a supplier ledger credit adjustment to correct errors on an existing invoice or to account for a supplier's debit note. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit adjustment processing You use a supplier ledger credit adjustment to correct errors on an existing invoice or to account for a supplier's debit note. You use a supplier ledger credit adjustment to correct errors on an existing invoice or to account for a supplier's debit note. To enter a credit adjustment, use the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. ## Data entry in credit adjustments + A credit adjustment summary contains information about the supplier, their location, and the transaction currency. Each credit adjustment must have at least one line, which can be a summary line or any number of detail lines. + For auditing purposes, you can attach an electronic version or scanned image of the original supplier document to each adjustment. Additionally, you can attach a related document to each line of the document. + Upon initial save, a credit adjustment receives a unique identifier, allowing for easy tracking within the system. This identifier is generated based on the number series designated for credit adjustments in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > A credit adjustment doesn't directly mention the invoice it is connected to. However, you can add a reference to the initial document (like an invoice or prepayment) in the adjustment's description. You can also include a reference to the supplier's related document in the **Supplier reference** field. > > If you have not chosen the **Raise error on invoice number duplicates** option in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, you can use the same reference number from the original supplier document for both the invoice and the linked credit adjustment. This simplifies finding both documents because they share the same reference number. ## Credit adjustment statuses Each adjustment has one of the following statuses, which tells you its stage in processing: On hold : Generally, this status is used for an adjustment that is a draft. This is the default status for new documents if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. You can edit a credit adjustment with the **On hold** status. Balanced : After editing is completed, you can save a **Balanced** adjustment if it remains balanced. If the **Validate document totals on entry** option is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, you can take an adjustment off hold only if you correctly type the document control total. Open : The document has been released (and approved, if required). Closed : The document has been paid. ## Release credit adjustments + To release credit adjustments in bulk, use the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. To release them individually, use the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. + A cash discount can be applied to a credit adjustment based on the payment terms. + A batch created upon release of the adjustment is numbered in accordance with the number series assigned to the batches originating in Customer ledger. ## Approval for payment + If your system does not require approval for invoices and adjustments, all credit adjustments and invoices that have been released will appear with an **Open** status in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. This means you can proceed to pay them. The system will also automatically set a default payment date. It calculates this date by subtracting the payment lead days from the due date of the invoice or adjustment. + When documents require approval before payment, you will initially encounter credit adjustments in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window for approval. Once these adjustments are approved, they will then show up in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window, where you can pay them. ## Error correction + Once released, a credit adjustment cannot be edited or deleted; you only can reverse it. + If you reverse the adjustment, the system generates a purchase credit note with the same details. + Before obtaining the purchase credit note, enter a different **Supplier reference** value if the **Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number** option is enabled in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. ## Payment of credit adjustments + You can pay adjustments individually by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. + You can also pay adjustments in bulk in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. Notifications in processing of payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/notifications-in-processing-of-payments page In the process of handling outgoing payments ( Process payments (AP50301S) ), sending of payment requests to AutoPay sometimes fails. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Notifications in processing of payments In the process of handling outgoing payments ( Process payments (AP50301S) ), sending of payment requests to AutoPay sometimes fails. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). ## General on notifications Additionally, if you are scheduling payments, there might be deviations within the schedules, preventing their execution. To help you address these concerns promptly, you can utilise the notification system. This system sends an email when payment requests fail or when there are discrepancies in scheduled payments. + Only users with the **Payment processor** role can receive notifications. + Users will receive notifications based on their branch. If the user is restricted to one branch, the user will only get notifications from that branch. + Notifications are sent either daily at a specific time or weekly at a specific day and time. ## Receive notification emails To receive email notifications: + Ensure that you have at least one system email account set up in the [System email accounts (SM204002)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/system-email-accounts-sm204002/) window. + Designate at least one email account in the **Default email account** field within the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. > [!NOTE] > The sender email ID used for notifications will correspond to the one selected in the [Email preferences (SM204001)](/visma-net-erp/help/email/email-windows/email-preferences-sm204001/) window. ## More actions - Notification settings for Process payments
Detail Description
Branch This setting is global, which means that it works for all the different notifications described below. As default you will only get notifications related to the branch you are restricted to use.
Notify the status of the payment request (instantly)

The notifications will be sent instantly as they occur.

You can choose to get notifications of failed or successful and failed payment requests.
Notify when invoice deviates

You can choose when and how often notifications will be sent.

Choose the frequency (daily or weekly), day (every day or on weekdays), time of the day and time zone.
Prepare payment of supplier documents /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/prepare-payment-of-supplier-documents page By using this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) using the payment method linked to the specific cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare payment of supplier documents By using this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) using the payment method linked to the specific cash account. You can initiate the payment of supplier documents in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. You can select supplier documents for payment by their due date, cash account, payment method, and supplier. Supplier ledger payments will be created for the selected documents, and you can group them by supplier using the **Group documents from the same supplier** option in the **Table options (...)** drop-down. If you require separate payment for a specific document, select the **Pay separately** option for this document in the table. The system will also group the supplier documents into a single payment for each supplier unless the **Pay separately** option is selected for a supplier, in which case a separate payment will be generated for each document. 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window, to the **Prepare payments** tab, to see all supplier documents that are due until the current or selected date. 1. To filter the documents in the table, click **Filters**. 1. When you have selected your filters, click **Apply filters** or undo the selections by clicking **Reset filters**. The table is populated with the documents accordant with the filtering options. 1. The documents are grouped by supplier by default. If you prefer an ungrouped view, click the **Table options (...)** button on the top right of the table and select **Individual documents**. To return to the grouped view, select **Group documents from the same supplier**. 1. By default, all documents in the table are included in the payment request. To exclude all documents in the table from the payment file to be created, deselect unlabelled **Select invoices** check box next to the **Doc. type** column. To select or deselect individual documents, use the check box in front of each document row you wish to exclude or include. 1. In the **Balance** sidebar on the right, you can see the amount to be paid from each cash account used on the selected documents as you select them, and the available balance of the cash accounts. If the amount to be paid exceeds the balance of the cash account, you will see a warning. 1. Optional: If you want to change the payment date of all selected documents, click the **Options (...)** button on the top right of the table and select **Change payment date**. Select a new payment date for the documents. To change the payment date of only one document, move the cursor to the **Payment date** column of the document row and select a new date in the calendar. 1. When you have done all the selections, click **Confirm payout**. 1. In the dialog box that opens, you are asked to confirm the creation of the payment file. 1. Once the payment file has been confirmed, click **Open AutoPay** to open the AutoPay window and approve the applicable payments. 1. To follow up the progress of the payment process, go to the ****Payment status**** tab. Process payments with deviations /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-payments-with-deviations page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments with deviations 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. 1. To view only the deviating payments in the table, click the **View** link in the warning " **You have n deviations that need your attention** " on the top of the window, or click the **Filters** button and activate option **View only deviations**. 1. Each row displays an error message that explains the reason for the document payment failure. If no error message column is present, hover over the red exclamation mark on the left side of the row to view the error message. 1. Click the error message and fix the issue in the pop-up window that opens. 1. Click **Save and close** in the pop-up window. 1. Refresh the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window to verify that all issues have been resolved. 1. When everything is corrected, click **Confirm payout** to confirm the corrected payments. Fix a payment request with an error /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/fix-a-payment-request-with-an-error page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Fix a payment request with an error 1. To view the details of a payment request, click the arrow in the **Details** column at the end of the row on the ****Payment status**** tab in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window for the failed request. This will open a window displaying all the payments included in the selected request. 1. Examine the error message to determine what information can be used to resolve the issue. 1. If necessary, use the search bar to locate the invoice with the error. You can search partially in all searchable fields. However, note that the bank account is encrypted, so you must copy the entire bank account number from the error message. 1. Click the invoice with the error to open it in a pop-up window. 1. Fix the error. 1. Save and close the pop up. 1. Click **Resend and close**. 1. Refresh the ****Payment status**** tab window. 1. The new request will appear in the request listing with the status **In progress**. If the error message indicates that the issue cannot be resolved and all invoices have returned to the **Prepare payments** tab, you can view the request details and click the **Archive and close** button to close the request. Remove failed payments or payment batches /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/remove-failed-payments-or-payment-batches page You can remove payments or payment batches that have failed to be sent to AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Remove failed payments or payment batches You can remove payments or payment batches that have failed to be sent to AutoPay. 1. In the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window on the **Payment status** tab, click the **Details** arrow icon next to the failed request you want modify. The **Details** view opens with a message on failed files on the top of the window with the reason of the failure. 1. To remove the entire batch, activate the check box next to the **Batch number** column. 1. To remove only selected payments, activate the check box in the beginning of their line. 1. Click the **Remove** button at the bottom right corner of the window. You see the number of the payments to be removed in the button. 1. Confirm the removal in the dialogue that opens. 1. To resend the remaining payments, click **Resend and close**. The number and amount of payments that are available for sending appear on the top part of the window. 1. When there are no remaining payments to send, click **Archive and close**. Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is zero /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-automatically-invoices-and-credit-notes-where-amount-to-pay-is-zero page The Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to release payments when the credit note + invoice amount = 0. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is zero The Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to release payments when the credit note + invoice amount = 0. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). For the payment request to be created when this happens, you need to take this into account: 1. Enable the option **Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is 0** in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Include only one credit note and one or more invoices in the document grouping and ensure that all documents use the same cash account, currency, and payment method. 1. Make sure that the grouping contains only credit notes with a payment date and/or document date in the past + invoices with a payment date in the future, provided that the payment date of the invoice is changed to the current date in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. Otherwise, a deviation will be displayed: "Invoice payment date is in the future. Please adjust the pay date to the current date in order to match the invoice with the credit note" Update payment document with document preview /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/update-payment-document-with-document-preview page You can make simultaneous updates to specific fields on the documents while viewing the scanned copy of the original document using the overlay edit panel with document preview in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update payment document with document preview You can make simultaneous updates to specific fields on the documents while viewing the scanned copy of the original document using the overlay edit panel with document preview in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). ## Overlay edit panel To access the overlay edit panel, click the link in the **Purchase invoice** field corresponding to the document you wish to edit or preview. You must have the **Payment processor** role to edit the details, or the **Payment viewer** role to view the details. You can update the following fields (the same as in the table): + Cash account + Account used for payment + Payment date + Amount to pay + Priority + Pay separately + Cash discount taken Editable fields are saved automatically. You can edit these fields even if there is no invoice document attached. + When a field contains a deviation, you will see a message that highlights the deviation, and a tooltip appears. For instance, if the deviation is due to a missing bank account, you can click on the message to open the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window and add a bank account. + If the invoice payment date falls within an ungenerated or inactive financial period, a deviation message will appear, providing a link to the [Financial periods (GL201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/financial-periods-gl201000/) window. + The fields **Account used for payment**, **Supplier name**, and **Supplier no** are linked to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, which opens as a pop-up. After saving your changes and closing the pop-up, refresh the window to see the updates. This also applies to the **Ref. no** and **Purchase invoice** fields, which open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window as a pop-up. ## Document preview To navigate between documents, use the **Preview documents** arrow buttons located at the bottom left of the overlay edit panel. You have several options for working with documents in the interface: + You can view, zoom in or out, download, and print documents. + You can also flip through document pages and copy text. + To switch between different documents, use the Preview Documents arrow buttons found at the bottom left of the overlay edit panel. Edit a supplier during payment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/edit-a-supplier-during-payment-processing page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Edit a supplier during payment processing 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. 1. In the table, click the supplier (link) you want to edit. 1. The [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window is opened as a pop-up. 1. Make your changes. 1. Click **Save and close**.

Related pages

Concepts

 About the Payment status tab /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-payment-status-tab page The Payment status tab in the Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to view the progress and status of payment requests sent to AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the Payment status tab The Payment status tab in the Process payments (AP50301S) window allows you to view the progress and status of payment requests sent to AutoPay. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). Use this tab to filter requests by date and status, and to fix and resend failed requests. + The **Payment status** tab displays the results of all requests, regardless of whether they are initiated manually by the user through the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window or automatically by the scheduler. + In most cases, payment requests are successfully submitted to AutoPay without any problems. However, there are some cases where requests may be rejected, for example, if an incorrect bank account is provided. Occasional technical errors can also prevent requests from being successfully submitted to AutoPay. + If sending a payment batch fails, you will see a red exclamation mark next to the tab name. Click on the **Details** arrow next to the failed batch you want to change. The **Details** view opens. You see a message telling the reason of failing. See [Remove failed payments or payments batches](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/remove-failed-payments-or-payment-batches/). + You can see how many documents are included in the payment request and also track the number of payments created. ## Statuses Requests are registered in the ****Payment status**** tab with one of the following statuses:
Status Request
In progress Requests in processing.
Failed All requests failed to be sent to AutoPay.
Error Payment request containing incomplete payments (release of the documents was not possible).
Sent to AutoPay At least one payment sent to AutoPay.
Partially sent to AutoPay Only for payment requests containing documents without payments or batches due to sequence number issues
Cancelled in AutoPay All payments are cancelled in AutoPay.
Sent to Bank At least one payment sent to bank.
Rejected by the Bank If the entire payment request is rejected/ all payments in the intent are rejected by the bank.
Completed in AutoPay At least one payment paid.
Archived
  • Empty payment requests
  • Scheduled requests with no invoices to send to AutoPay
  • Requests created for invoice + credit note amount = 0
## The Details view + To view the details of a request, click the arrow at the end of the row in the **Details** column. This will open a window showing all invoices associated with the selected request. + You can group payments from the same batch. + Each batch shows an **amount summary in the local currency**, providing you with a quick overview of financial information. + When you select a batch for deletion, all the payments included in that batch will be automatically deleted. + Any requests with a **Failed** status will appear at the top of the request list. These requests will come with an error message that will give you instructions on how to address and resolve the issue. You can remove failed payments here. You will see a red alert sign against all payments causing the payment requests to fail together with a tool tip message announcing the reason why AutoPay has rejected the payment + To correct an error in a claim, such as a missing bank account, first copy the invoice number. Then, using the copied number, search for the problematic invoice. Once found, correct the error and resend all invoices by creating a new request. + Click **View only incomplete transactions** to filter out transactions that have been completed and concentrate on incomplete transactions. The Payment status tab /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/the-payment-status-tab page On the *Payment status* tab, you can view the status of each payment request after it has been submitted to AutoPay. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The Payment status tab On the *Payment status* tab, you can view the status of each payment request after it has been submitted to AutoPay. This tab displays the results of all payment requests, regardless of whether they were initiated manually by the user or automatically by the scheduler. ## The filter options
Option Description
From date View the statuses of payment requests starting from this date.
To date View the statuses of payment requests until this date.
Status Select the status (or all) for the payment requests to be displayed.
## The table
Column Description
Branch The branch where the payment has been created.
Request ID The ID of the request for creating batches and payments.
Created on The date and time when the request was created.
Created by The user who has created the request.
No. of pay. The number of payments included in the request.
No. of docs The number of the documents in the request. In case of removing failed payments, the number of payments that are available for sending.
Amount The amount to be paid on the request. In case of removing failed payments, the amount of payments that are available for sending.
Payment status The status of the request. For more details on statuses, see About the Payment status tab.
Details Click Details to open a new tab with the details of each payment in the request. If there is an error message, it will tell you what to do. When you have fixed the error, resend all the invoices (and create a new request).
About the scheduler /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-scheduler page In the Process payments (AP50301S) window, you can utilise the scheduler feature to automate payment preparation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the scheduler In the Process payments (AP50301S) window, you can utilise the scheduler feature to automate payment preparation. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). By doing this, you can avoid manually creating payment requests each time you send payments to AutoPay. To open the scheduler, click **Schedule payments** at the top right of the window under **More actions**. For more information, see [Create a new schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule/). Consider the following points:
Point Description
Managing schedules You can modify your schedules at any time, with all adjustments being saved automatically. Additionally, you can remove a schedule during or after its creation.
Deviations When a schedule runs and generates a request, any invoices and documents with deviations, such as a missing bank account, will be excluded from the process.
Payment lead time

Payment lead times may vary for suppliers located in different countries. To account for this, you can set the lead time for each supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.

When an invoice is generated, the payment date will be adjusted according to the due date. This adjustment affects the Day column of a schedule when the chosen frequency is Daily.
Cash accounts and branches If your cash account has limited access to a particular branch, it will only be visible when you are logged in to that specific branch.
## Following a schedule execution After a schedule has been executed, the request will be displayed on the ****Payment status**** tab. If a schedule fails to run and does not even create a request, the failed attempt will also appear on the ****Payment status**** tab. ## The Schedule payments pop-up To create a new schedule, click **Add new schedule**. To delete a schedule, click the trash can icon on the far right of the line.
Column Description
Status The status of the schedule. Grey is inactive, green is active.
Name Type a name for the schedule.
Branch

The branch to which the schedule applies. The default is the current branch you are logged into. You can also schedule payments for all branches you have access to by selecting the All branches option.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Payment method You can use this column to restrict the documents to be included in the payment by their payment method. You can select a payment method or all payment methods. Note also the payment lead time that you define in the Suppliers (AP303000) window for each supplier.
Cash account

You can use this column to restrict the documents to be included in the request by their cash account. You can select a cash account or all cash accounts.

Note

You can use only the All cash accounts option if the All branches option is selected.
Frequency Select how often the documents will be sent to AutoPay, daily or weekly.
Day Select the day of the week on which documents will be sent to AutoPay, if the selected frequency is Weekly. If the selected option is Daily, the option you see here comes from the Payment terms (CS206500) window (see below).
Weekends To define whether payment requests will also be sent on weekends, go to the Payment terms (CS206500) window and select your preferred setting in the Move due date if on the weekend field. The options are: Keep the exact date Day before (Friday) Day after (Monday)
Payment date Select which invoices you want to include in the request you send to AutoPay. You can choose between All open documents, All open documents until current date, and All open documents until next run (current date + 6 days), depending on the selected frequency.
Time zone Select the time zone the schedule shall run in. As default, the current web browser time zone is selected.
Time Select at what time of the day the schedule will run. It is possible to run multiple schedules at the same time.
Status

Set the selector to On when you want the schedule to start running. The status of the schedule is also indicated to the very left. Grey is inactive, green is active.

Every time you make a change to the schedule, the status will be set to Off.
Create a new schedule /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule page You access the scheduler from the Process payments (AP50301S) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new schedule You access the scheduler from the Process payments (AP50301S) window. For more information: [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/). 1. Click **Schedule payments** under **More actions** on the top right. 1. To add a schedule, click **Add new schedule** in upper left corner. 1. In the **Name** column, enter a name for the new schedule. 1. In the **Branch** column, select a branch. The current branch is selected by default. 1. In the **Payment method** column, select a desired payment method or **All** payment methods. 1. In the **Cash account** column, you can select between a cash account or **All** cash accounts. You can select only the cash account connected to the chosen payment method. 1. Select the **frequency** of the schedule, **Daily** or **Weekly**. 1. If you select **Daily**, define in the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window in the **Move due date if on the weekend** field whether weekends are included or ignored. You see the selected option in the **Day** column. 1. If you select **Weekly**, select in the **Day** column the day of the week on which the schedule will be run. 1. In the **Payment date** field, select which invoices will be included in the request you send to AutoPay. The options that are available depend on the selected option in the **Frequency** column. 1. For **Daily**, you can choose between **All open documents** and **All open documents until current date**. Also note the payment lead team, see [About the scheduler](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/about-the-scheduler/). 1. For **Weekly**, you can choose between **All open documents, All open documents until current date**, and **All open documents until next run** (current date + 6 days). 1. Select the **time zone** the schedule shall run in. As default, the current web browser time zone is selected. 1. In the **Time** column, select at what time of the day the schedule will run. 1. In the **Status** column, set the selector to **On** when you want the schedule to start running. Void a payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/void-a-payment page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a payment 1. Navigate to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Select **Payment** in the **Type** field located at the top of the window. 1. Choose the payment to be voided using one of these methods: + Select the payment by its voucher number in the **Voucher no.** field. + Use the navigation buttons in the window toolbar to find the payment you want to void. 1. Click **Void** in the window toolbar. The system fully reverses the payment application, changes the payment status to **Voided**, and creates a voided payment with the **Balanced** status. 1. Optional: Modify the date of the voided payment in the **Application date** field, if necessary. The specified date will be used as the voided payment release date ( **Payment date** ) and the related batch creation date ( **Transaction date** ). 1. Click **Release** in the window toolbar to change the status of the voided payment to **Closed**. Releasing the voided payment generates a batch. Make a non-active AutoPay agreement active /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/make-a-non-active-autopay-agreement-active section If you encounter an error message while processing a payment without an active AutoPay agreement, you have the option to activate the agreement. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Make a non-active AutoPay agreement active If you encounter an error message while processing a payment without an active AutoPay agreement, you have the option to activate the agreement. Only users with the **AutoPay Administrator** role or the **AutoPay Approver** role are authorised to perform this task. 1. Close Visma Net. 1. Click AutoPay. 1. Click **Agreements**. 1. In the **Agreement - Main** window, click **Edit** for the relevant agreement. 1. In the **Agreements - Edit bank agreement** window, select the **Active** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Process one payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-one-payment section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process one payment ## Before you start To process manual payments in this window, a payment method is required. Please note that a payment method created using the **Create batch payment** option will not be visible in this window. You can also process payments without AutoPay in the [Manual payments (AP30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ap30200s/) window, see: [Process several payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-several-payments/). 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** drop-down list, select **Payment**. 1. In the **Date** field, select the date of the payment. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select a supplier. 1. In the **Payment method** field, select a payment method that you have created for manual payments. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select a cash account. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a description. This field is not mandatory, but the payment will be easier to locate if you have your own description for it. 1. Optional: In the **Payment ref.** field, enter a reference if you are prompted to and if the field is not filled in automatically. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, enter the paid amount. 1. In the **Financial period** field, select a financial period. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Document type** column, add the document type related to this payment. 1. Select **Voucher no.**. 1. Optional: If you need to add more documents to this payment, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat steps 10 - 12. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. Both the payment and the purchase invoice are now in status **Closed**. You can find the batch number and other information on the **Application history** tab. ## What is next? You do not have to do the other steps in this work process once you have followed these instructions and the payment has been released. The reason for this is that in Visma Net, the [default setting for the supplier ledger is a combined post and release action](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/activate-automatic-post-and-release-for-purchase-documents/). This means that when you release the payment, both the payment and the purchase invoice will be posted and closed in the general ledger. However, if the default settings for post and release have been changed (the **Do not automatically release supplier payments** check box is selected), you must post the payment transactions to the general ledger: [Update the general ledger with manual payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/post-documents-to-the-general-ledger-manually/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process several payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-several-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process several payments ## Before you start To handle manual payments, you need a payment method, see: [Create payment methods](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/manage-payment-methods/create-payment-methods/). However, if you create a payment method with the option **Create batch payment**, it will not be displayed in this window. You can also process manual payments via the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window: [Process one payment.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-one-payment/) 1. Go to the [Manual payments (AP30200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ap30200s/) window. 1. In the **Payment method** field, select a payment method. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select a cash account. 1. The default in the **Due date** field is today's date, but you can select a preferred due date. The system filters away the invoices after the selected date. 1. In the **Payment date** field, enter a payment date. 1. In the table you see invoices that are ready to be paid and you can select the invoices you want to process. 1. Click **Create payments**. if the processing is successful. ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed If you need to change the date or the cash account to continue with other manual payments, click ![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) and repeat these steps. Create batch payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-batch-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create batch payments 1. Go to the [Create batch payments (AP505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000/) window. 1. Select **Payment method** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select a payment method. 1. Select **Cash account** by clicking ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg). In the **Next payment ref.** field, the system will automatically suggest the next available payment number. 1. In the table, select the check boxes next to the payments that you want to create a batch of. 1. Click **Process** to process the selected payments, or click **Process all** to process all the payments in the table. ## What is next? If you use advanced payment processing for AutoPay, you are now sent to the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window: [Send outgoing payments to AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay/)

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create a supplier ledger payment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-supplier-ledger-payment section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier ledger payment 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Payment**. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date of the payment. The system fills in the **Application period** field automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. In the **Location** field, change the supplier location, if necessary. 1. Make sure the document currency is the one you need. You may override the default currency only if the **Enable currency override** check box is selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Payment method** field, make sure the payment method is specified correctly and select another if needed. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, type the payment reference number if required by your organisation's policy. The system automatically inserts a reference number here if for the payment method associated with the supplier, the **Supplier ledger - suggest next number** check box is in the [Cash accounts (CA202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-accounts-ca202000/) window (the **Payment methods** tab). 1. Optional: Add a description of the check. 1. In the table toolbar of the **Documents to apply** tab, click **Load documents**. The open invoices and adjustments will be displayed on this tab. Open debit adjustments, if any, will be listed at the top. Remove any unnecessary items from the list as needed. 1. In the table toolbar of the **Documents to apply** tab, click **Load documents**. Open debit adjustments, if any, will be listed at the top. Remove any unnecessary items from the list as needed. 1. In the **Payment amount** field of the top part of the window, type the total amount, which should be equal to the application amount. 1. On the **Remittance information** tab, make sure the remittance contact and address information is correct. By default, the branch information is displayed. 1. Optional: On the **Finance charges** tab, add the applicable charges or fees for processing this payment in the bank. For each applicable charge, do the following: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Entry type** column, select the entry type which designates the bank charge applicable to this payment. 1. In the **Amount** column, type the charge amount applicable to this payment. 1. Prepare the payment for further processing in accordance with your organisation policies: + Leave the document with the **On hold** status if you plan to update or add information. For this, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To enable further processing, clear the **Hold** check box. If the selected payment method requires printing of a check, you cannot take a document off hold until it is printed. To print a payment, click **Actions**, and select **Print payment**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Export batch payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/export-batch-payments section Only users with the Financials Admin role can export batch payments from this window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export batch payments Only users with the Financials Admin role can export batch payments from this window. 1. Go to the [Export batch payments (AP50560S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/export-batch-payments-ap50560s/) window. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select your desired cash account. 1. Optional: In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select your desired batch number. 1. In the table, select the batches you want to export. 1. Click **Export payment** to export the selected batches. ## What is next? If you are using the advanced payment processing for AutoPay, you are now taken to AutoPay: [Approve payments in AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay/)

Related pages

Windows

 Create outgoing payments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-outgoing-payments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create outgoing payments ## Before you start You can [create a purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-invoice-in-the-general-ledger/) in the General ledger workspace, and pay it via AutoPay as follows: 1. Go to the [Create batch payments (AP505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000/) window. 1. In the **Payment method** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and choose a payment method. 1. In the **Cash account** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and choose a cash account. 1. In the table, select the check box next to the payment you want to create. You can also select several payments to create a batch. 1. Click **Process**. ## What is next? The [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window is now displayed, and you can [send outgoing payments to AutoPay.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay/) This is available, if **Use basic payment process** is **not** checked in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window for the current branch. Match a credit note before payment with AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/match-a-credit-note-before-payment-with-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Match a credit note before payment with AutoPay 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** drop-down list, select **Purchase credit note**. 1. In the **Voucher no.** field, choose the purchase credit note to match with a purchase invoice. Ensure the selected adjustment has the **Open** status. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add the purchase invoice related to this purchase credit note. In the **Reference no.** column, add an open invoice to your purchase credit note. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, check if the payment amount is lower or higher than the purchase invoice amount: 1. If it is lower, it is still an amount left to pay on the invoice. 1. If it is higher, you can use that amount to match another invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Click **Release**. The purchase credit note is now closed and if there is still a balance on the purchase invoice, you can now pay it. ## What is next? You do not have to do the other steps in this work process once you have followed these instructions and the payment has been released. The reason for this is that in Visma Net, the [default setting for the supplier ledger is a combined post and release action](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/configure-cash-accounts/activate-automatic-post-and-release-for-purchase-documents/). This means that when you release the payment, both the payment and the purchase invoice will be posted and closed in the general ledger. However, if the default settings for post and release have been changed (the **Do not automatically release supplier payments** check box is selected), you must post the payment transactions to the general ledger: [Update the general ledger with manual payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/post-documents-to-the-general-ledger-manually/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Approve payments in AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve payments in AutoPay 1. Go to the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window. 1. Click **Approve** **in AutoPay** for the relevant payment. 1. In the **Payment details** window, check your payment. 1. Click **Approve**. 1. Enter your password. This is the same password you use to log in to Visma Net. 1. Click **OK**. In the **Approve** window, click **OK** to close the window. On the **Outgoing** tab, the batch status changes to **Approved** in the **Status** column.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Send outgoing payments to AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send outgoing payments to AutoPay 1. Go to the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window. 1. In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), and select the batch you want to send to AutoPay. 1. If the **AutoPay status** of the selected batch is **Not exported**, click the **Send payments** button. 1. Click **Approve in AutoPay**. Keep in mind that the AutoPay status in the upper part of the window shows the status of the whole batch, while the AutoPay status column in the table shows the status of individual payments. ## What is next? You will be redirected out of Visma Net to AutoPay that is displayed in a pop-up window, see: [Approve payments in AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Send outgoing refunds to AutoPay /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-refunds-to-autopay section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Send outgoing refunds to AutoPay ## Before you start ## Statuses in the Batch payments window + The refunds will be displayed in the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window with the status **In progress** and **AutoPay status**: **Not exported**. + The **AutoPay status** field in the top part of the window shows the status of the whole batch. + The **AutoPay status** column in the table shows the status of each refund. + After you click the **Re-sign payment** button, the **AutoPay status** of every refund will change to **Exported**. + As long as a refund has a status other than **Paid**, it will be visible in the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window. 1. Go to the [Batch payments (AP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000/) window. 1. In the **Batch no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), and select the batch you want to send to AutoPay. 1. If the **AutoPay status** of the selected batch is **Not exported**, click the **Send payments** button. The status changes to **Exported**. 1. Click **Approve in AutoPay**. AutoPay is displayed in a pop-up window. For further steps, see step 3-5 in [The basic outgoing payment process for AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/work-processes/autopay/the-basic-outgoing-payment-process-for-autopay/). Process prepayments /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process prepayments Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About prepayment processing /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/about-prepayment-processing page A prepayment is a type of supplier ledger document that you create to record advance payments or down payments to suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About prepayment processing A prepayment is a type of supplier ledger document that you create to record advance payments or down payments to suppliers. ## Introduction You can create a prepayment in one of the following methods: Standard method : Begin by entering the supplier's prepayment request in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window as an internal supplier ledger document of the **Prepayment** type. Next, create a payment for this prepayment request in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Once the payment is released, you can apply the prepayment against invoices. Simplified method : Create and release a prepayment directly using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Note that this method has some limitations. ## Creating prepayments in the standard way The standard method of creating prepayments involves the following stages: 1. In the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, create a supplier prepayment request by selecting the **Prepayment** document type. If the prepayment is for stock items, include this information in the description. Upon saving the prepayment, the system assigns a reference number based on the number series for invoices in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. A prepayment can have one summary line or multiple detail lines. VAT cannot be applied or withheld on prepayments, but VAT amounts can be added to the prepayment amount for simpler calculations. 1. You can release the prepayment requests one by one by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, or along with other supplier ledger documents by using the [Release supplier documents (AP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000/) window. A prepayment request, when released, does not generate any transactions. 1. If approval is required in your system, the prepayment request must be approved in the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window before it can be actually paid. 1. Pay the prepayment by creating an supplier ledger payment in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. Cash discounts do not apply to prepayments. 1. Release the supplier ledger payment. The system changes its status to **Closed** and changes the status of the original prepayment to **Open**, so that you can apply this prepayment to invoices and credit adjustments. ## Creating prepayments in the simplified way Alternatively, you can create a prepayment more simply, by using the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Even if approval of documents is required in your system, prepayments created in this way are not subject to approval. Also, you cannot pay prepayments created in this way by a payment method that requires printing of payments. ## Choosing general ledger accounts for prepayments If you do not designate a distinct account for prepayments, supplier prepayments will be debited to the supplier's ledger account. When determining the number and type of prepayment accounts to use for easier tracking in the system, you can choose one or any combination of the following options: + Use a single prepayment account for all prepayments (to all suppliers) + Specify prepayment accounts for specific supplier classes + Designate separate prepayment accounts for individual suppliers Assign the prepayment accounts as follows: 1. In the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window, specify the prepayment account and subaccount for the default supplier class and for each of the other supplier classes. This will make it easy to create new supplier classes and new suppliers with the proper prepayment account specified. 1. Use the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window to specify the prepayment account and subaccount for each supplier. ## Applying the prepayments You can apply the **Open** prepayment to invoices and adjustments. If a prepayment still has a balance after being applied to invoices and credit adjustments, it can be released with that balance. If a prepayment was incorrectly applied to invoices and adjustments and released, you can reverse the application if needed. To do this, click the **Reverse application** action on the **Application history** tab of the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) window. You can then apply the prepayment to other invoices and adjustments. ## Viewing prepayments and their balances To view information about prepayments, you use the following windows: + [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/): Shows prepayment balances. + [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/): Displays the prepayment balance and particular prepayments by supplier. + [Balance by GL account (AP63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s/): Shows all prepayments collected on the prepayment account. ## Correcting errors Correcting errors on prepayments depends on how you entered them. To void a **prepayment created in the standard way**, you have the following options: + If the prepayment has not been paid, void it by clicking **Void** in the window toolbar of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window for the selected prepayment. + If errors are detected for a paid prepayment, create an adjustment instead of voiding the prepayment. + If the prepayment has been paid, you void the associated supplier ledger payment. To void a **prepayment created using the simplified method**: + First locate the prepayment in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. Then, click **Void** on the window toolbar. + If the prepayment has already been applied, you must first unapply it before voiding. + If a supplier did not use the prepayment or used it only partially, you can enter a refund and apply it against the prepayment.

Related pages

Tasks

 Enter a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/enter-a-prepayment section In Visma Net, you can enter prepayments to suppliers in one of the following ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a prepayment In Visma Net, you can enter prepayments to suppliers in one of the following ways: ## Introduction Standard way : To enter the supplier's prepayment request, use the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window and create an internal supplier ledger document of the **Prepayment** type. Next, create a payment for this prepayment request in the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. Simplified method : Create a prepayment directly using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. Note that this method has some limitations. ## Enter a prepayment in the standard way 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. Check the date of the document, and change it if necessary. The system populates the **Post period** field automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. 1. In the **Location** field, change the supplier location, if necessary. 1. Ensure the document's currency is accurate. If not, choose an appropriate currency. You can only override the currency if the **Enable currency override** check box is selected for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, enter the reference number or ID assigned to the document by the supplier. This number is required if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Optional: Add a description of the prepayment request. 1. On the **Document details** tab, enter the details of the prepayment request, following the steps below for each line (transaction): The prepayment request should include at least one line. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Optional: In the **Item ID** column, enter the ID of the particular non-stock item or service to be delivered by the supplier; you can instead leave it blank. 1. Optional: Type the description of the transaction in the **Transaction descr.** field. 1. Optional: Enter the needed quantity of the item. 1. Optional: In the **UoM** column, type the unit of measure for the item. 1. Optional: In the **Unit cost** column, type the cost per unit. 1. Type the total amount in the **Amount** column. 1. Make sure that the **Account** column has the account you want to be specified. By default, the system uses the expense account associated with the supplier location. 1. Make sure that the **Subaccount** column has the subaccount you want to be specified. By default, the system fills in the **Subaccount** column in accordance with the rule selected in the **Combine expense sub. from** field of the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Make sure that the **Branch** column has the branch you want to be specified. 1. Optional: In the **Deferral code** column, select the deferral code defined in the system if the expenses related to the purchased item or service must be recognised in future periods. 1. Do one of the following steps to prepare the document for releasing: + If the **Amount** field in the top part is displayed in the window, enter the total amount of the invoice in this field. + If the **Amount** field is not displayed in the window, make sure the total amount of the prepayment in the **Balance** field is correct. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment request, following your company's workflow. 1. Pay the prepayment request in full with a supplier ledger payment. Create a supplier ledger payment and apply it to the prepayment request. Upon releasing the supplier ledger payment for the prepayment, the payment status changes to **Closed**. Additionally, a **Prepayment** type payment is created, using the reference number from the original prepayment request. ## Enter a prepayment in the simplified way 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. Check the date of the document, and change it if necessary. The system populates the **Post period** field automatically, based on the selected document date. 1. Select the supplier. 1. In the **Location** field, change the supplier location, if necessary. 1. Ensure the document's currency is accurate. If not, choose an appropriate currency. You can only override the currency if the **Allow currency override** option is enabled for the supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the reference number or ID provided by the supplier for the document. This number is mandatory if the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window; otherwise, it is optional. 1. Optional: Add a description of the prepayment. 1. In the **Payment amount** field, specify the total amount of the prepayment. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment, following your company's workflow. Void a prepayment request /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/void-a-prepayment-request section Entering a prepayment involves two stages. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a prepayment request Entering a prepayment involves two stages. ## Introduction First, input the supplier's prepayment request using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. Next, create an invoice to pay for this prepayment request using the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. The prepayment will then be released. In certain situations, you may need to void an unpaid prepayment request, such as when it was mistakenly entered into the system. 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the prepayment to be voided. 1. Click **Actions** in the window toolbar, and select **Void prepayment**. The status of the prepayment changes to **Voided**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). When you void a prepayment request, because no actual prepayment had been made, no batch is created and the voided prepayment may not be applied to a supplier ledger payment. Void a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/void-a-prepayment section You can void a prepayment if it has not been paid or applied to invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Void a prepayment You can void a prepayment if it has not been paid or applied to invoices. ## Introduction You can void a prepayment if it has not been paid or applied to invoices. To cancel an applied prepayment, you first need to unapply the prepayment, as described in [Unapply a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/unapply-a-prepayment/). ## Void a prepayment paid with a payment Upon creating a prepayment request and paying it using a supplier ledger payment, the system automatically generates a prepayment. If you try to void this prepayment, you get a notification advising you to void the supplier ledger payment used to create the prepayment. 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Payment**. 1. In the **Voucher no.** field, select the supplier ledger payment to be voided. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system changes the status of the original supplier ledger payment to **Voided** and creates a voided payment with the same reference number as the prepayment used. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Release the document following your company workflow. ## Void a prepayment 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. In the **Voucher no.** field, select the supplier ledger payment to be voided. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Void**. The system changes the status of the prepayment to **Voided** and creates a voided check with the same reference number as the prepayment used. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Release the prepayment following your company workflow.

Related pages

Tasks

 Enter a refund for a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/enter-a-refund-for-a-prepayment section When a supplier returns an unused prepayment or a part of it, you must record a refund for that prepayment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enter a refund for a prepayment When a supplier returns an unused prepayment or a part of it, you must record a refund for that prepayment. 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Supplier refund**. 1. In the **Application date** field, select the date when the supplier refund was applied. The **Application period** field is filled out automatically based on the selected application date. 1. Select the supplier. 1. In the **Location** field, check the supplier location and change it if necessary. 1. In the **Cash account** field, check the default cash account of the supplier. You can change the value, but the currency of the account should be the same as the **currency** specified. 1. In the **Payment ref.** field, enter the reference number of the supplier refund. 1. Optional: Add a description of the supplier refund document. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, enter the prepayment or prepayments on which the supplier refund is based. Do the following: + To add a document to the list: 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Document type** column, select the document type. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document from the list of applicable documents. 1. Check that all the other columns of the **Documents to apply** tab are correct. + To add all applicable documents to the list, click **Load documents** on the table toolbar. + To remove a document from the list, select the document and click **Delete row** in the table toolbar. 1. Prepare the document for further processing in accordance with the policies of your company: + To save the supplier refund with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the supplier refund with the **Balanced** status, do the following: + In the **Payment amount** field of the top part, enter the total amount of the purchase credit note applied to the document. + Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the document following your company workflow. The supplier refund now has the **Closed** status. > [!NOTE] > If you recorded the prepayment using the standard method, you can verify the refund application by opening the prepayment request in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window.

Related pages

Tasks

 Track prepayments to suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/track-prepayments-to-suppliers page To track prepayments, you use a special account, the prepayment account, to record prepayments to suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track prepayments to suppliers To track prepayments, you use a special account, the prepayment account, to record prepayments to suppliers. ## Introduction + If you want to set a default prepayment account to be used for each new supplier a user creates, in the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window, specify the prepayment account and subaccount for each of the supplier classes that might be used when a user creates a new supplier. + You can change the prepayment account and subaccount for a particular supplier by using the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. The system debits this account by default when a user enters a new prepayment to the supplier. To view information about prepayments, you use the following windows: + [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/): Shows prepayment balances + [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/): Displays prepayments from an individual supplier + [Balance by GL account (AP63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s/): Shows all prepayments collected on the prepayment account ## View prepayment balances 1. Go to the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Period** field, select the financial period, or leave the field blank to view all open prepayments. 1. In the **Supplier account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of suppliers with the prepayment balances calculated for the selected criteria. The **Total prepayments** field in the top part displays the total amount of prepayments to suppliers calculated for the selected criteria. You can adjust the list by changing the selection criteria. ## View prepayments by supplier 1. Go to the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. 1. In the **Supplier account** field, select the prepayment account. In the table, you can view the list of prepayments that match the selected criteria. The **Prepayments balance** field of the top part displays the total amount of prepayments to the supplier, based on the selected criteria. ## View all prepayments 1. Go to the [Balance by GL account (AP63200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s/). 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, specify the report parameters that meet your needs for information. If you leave the **Branch** field blank, you will get information on all branches. 1. On the window toolbar, click **Run report**. 1. Find the prepayment account in the report to view all prepayments that fit the specified criteria. Additionally, you can use filtering to display only specific documents in the report. For example: After you set the report parameters and before you run the report, you could add one of the following filter condition lines to the **Additional filtering conditions** table on the **Additional sort and filters** tab: + To view only documents collected on a prepayment account with account ID 140000: |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |Account.AccountCD|Equals|140000| + To view only prepayments: |Property|Condition|Value| |---|---|---| |Document.Type|Equals|Prepayment|

Related pages

Tasks

 Apply a prepayment to invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/apply-a-prepayment-to-invoices section To apply a prepayment (created using the standard or simplified method) to one or multiple invoices, use the Supplier payments (AP302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply a prepayment to invoices To apply a prepayment (created using the standard or simplified method) to one or multiple invoices, use the Supplier payments (AP302000) window. For more information: [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/). Once the prepayment application is released, it generates a batch. 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. By using the **Voucher no.** field, select the prepayment you want to apply. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, select the documents to which you want to apply the prepayment. Do the following: + To add a document to the list: 1. In the table toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Document type** column, select the document type. 1. In the **Reference no.** column, select the document from the list of applicable documents. 1. Check that all the other columns of the **Documents to apply** tab are correct. + To add all applicable documents to the list, click **Load documents** on the table toolbar. + To remove a document from the list, select the document and click **Delete row** in the table toolbar. 1. For each document, check the applied amount in the **Amount paid** field and change the amount if needed. 1. Prepare the prepayment for further processing in accordance with the policies of your company: + To save the prepayment application with the **On hold** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is selected. + To save the prepayment application with the **Open** status, make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment, following your company's workflow.

Related pages

Tasks

 Unapply a prepayment /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/unapply-a-prepayment section If you have mistakenly applied a prepayment to the incorrect documents (invoices or credit adjustments), you can unapply it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unapply a prepayment If you have mistakenly applied a prepayment to the incorrect documents (invoices or credit adjustments), you can unapply it. ## Introduction Unapplying a prepayment varies depending on whether the prepayment has been released (and has a status of **Open** or **Closed**) or has not been released (and has a status of **Balanced** or **On hold**). ## Correct a prepayment application that has not been released 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. By using the **Voucher no.** field, select the prepayment. 1. On the **Documents to apply** tab, for each document you do not want to apply, do the following: 1. Select the document you do not want to apply. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Delete row**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Reverse a prepayment application that has been released 1. Go to the [Supplier payments (AP302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Prepayment**. 1. By using the **Voucher no.** field, select the prepayment. 1. Go to the **Application history** tab, choose the document you want to reverse the application for, and click **Reverse application** in the table toolbar. The system will generate a batch that undoes the payment application to an invoice or credit adjustment, and sets the prepayment status to **Open**. 1. Repeat Step 4 for each application you want to reverse. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Release the prepayment following your company's workflow. Invoice inbox /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice inbox Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. View invoices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoices ## Before you start The [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) displays invoices with the statuses **New**, **Blocked**, or **Error** from AutoInvoice. A separate status box shows you the number of invoices with these statuses. If you want to see all invoices, regardless of status, click the **Inquiries** button and select Invoice inbox - overview. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. The framed status box shows the number of invoices you have received from AutoInvoice, which have the status **New, Blocked,** or **Error**. 1. In the **Inbox status** drop-down list, the default status is **New**. Select the document status you want to see invoices for. 1. To filter by a specific supplier or invoice date, enter the desired information in the **Supplier** field or the **Invoice date** field. You can use both fields together for a more refined search. The filtered results will be instantly shown in the table. 1. To see details for a specific invoice, select the line in the table and click **View details**. The **Invoice details** window is displayed. For more information, see [View invoice details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details/). ## What is next? [Process new invoices from AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/process-new-invoices-from-autoinvoice/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 View invoice details /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details section This window is displayed when you have selected an invoice in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) window and clicked the View details button. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoice details This window is displayed when you have selected an invoice in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) window and clicked the View details button. For more information: [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). + The bottom section shows the invoice lines. Click the **Hide lines** button to hide or display the lines. By default, the lines are visible. Hiding the lines allows you to view more of the PDF invoice. + On the right side, the **Document details** panel is visible. This panel shows information about the invoice, including the different amounts. + In the **Approval - information and process area**, the **Action** drop-down list offers the following options: **Hold**, **Release**, **Exclude from processing**, and **Send to approval**. If you have a license for Approval, the default action is **Send to approval**; otherwise, the default is **Release**. For instance, you can hold the invoice to verify something and add a comment in the **Comment** field until the issue is resolved. + In the **Initial approver** drop-down list, you can select your preferred initial approver. + You can create an invoice from this location by clicking the **Create invoice** button. This will open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. This feature is helpful when splitting an invoice to post amounts on different subaccounts or when invoice lines require approval from multiple approvers. To view the original document details, such as VAT information, click the **Inbox details** tab in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. + Remember to click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) to save any changes made in the **Invoice details** window or any related windows before clicking **Back** to close the window.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Correct invoices with errors /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/correct-invoices-with-errors section If the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) displays invoices with the Error status, it may be due to discrepancies in the amounts, such as rounding errors. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Correct invoices with errors If the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) displays invoices with the Error status, it may be due to discrepancies in the amounts, such as rounding errors. For more information: [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/). These errors are common when dealing with scanned invoices and usually result in minor differences. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. Select **Error** in the **Inbox status** field. This will display invoices with errors in the table. 1. To correct an invoice with a reference number and a minor error, such as a rounding difference, select the line and click the **Validate manually** button. This will change the invoice's status from **Error** to **Manually validated**. You can then manage it like other invoices in the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). 1. To make corrections to the invoice before validating it, click on the invoice's reference number. This will open the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. Make your changes and click **Release**. -- or --- click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) and then **Send to approval**.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process new invoices from AutoInvoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/process-new-invoices-from-autoinvoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process new invoices from AutoInvoice ## Before you start You can set a default action for the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/). For more information, see [Change the default action for the Invoice inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/change-the-default-action-for-the-invoice-inbox/). 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. In the **Inbox status** field, the default status is **New** and you see all invoices that have come in from AutoInvoice. If you have just worked on invoices with other statuses, select **New**. 1. If you want to process all the new invoices in the inbox, click **Process all**. -- or -- If you want to process selected invoices, select the check boxes for the invoices you want to process, and click **Process**. 1. The invoices are processed according to the action defined in the **Action** column. After processing, you see the ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) and your invoices are assigned a reference number. To see all invoices, regardless of status, click the **Inquiries** button and select **Invoice inbox - overview.** > [!NOTE] > **Conversion of attachments**: To be able to send invoices on flow, Visma Net converts all attachments to the PNG file format. If the attachment is not an image file, (for example a PDF, Word, Excel, or.txt file) the original document will be attached.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Update supplier details /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/update-supplier-details section Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update supplier details Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. For more information: [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). The following procedure demonstrates an example of updating supplier details: 1. You have received an invoice in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) where the supplier is recognised, but some information has changed or is missing, such as the bank account or the address. 1. On the invoice line, a warning symbol appears ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and the **Supplier difference status** column displays the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. To update supplier information, click **Update supplier**. A dialog box will appear, displaying both old and new values for you to review before confirming or cancelling the update. 1. Click **Yes** to update all fields with the new values. Click **No** not to update and continue processing the invoice as usual. Upon updating one line for multiple invoices from the same supplier, the warning symbol will be removed from the remaining lines. If the supplier is not recognised, you have to rematch the supplier, see: [Rematch invoice with unrecognised supplier details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/rematch-invoices-with-unrecognised-supplier-details/) You can choose not to use the supplier validation both in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) and the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) windows.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Rematch invoices with unrecognised supplier details /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/rematch-invoices-with-unrecognised-supplier-details section Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in either the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Rematch invoices with unrecognised supplier details Once you enable supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can modify supplier information in either the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) or the Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. For more information: [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice Inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). Below are examples of situations where updating supplier details may be necessary: ## Rematch one invoice with an unrecognised supplier 1. You have received an invoice in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) where the supplier is not recognised, and the invoice line has the status **Blocked**. This issue may be due to a missing organisation number or an incorrect bank account number. Since you know that the supplier exists in the system, you need to rematch the invoice with the correct supplier information. 1. In the **Supplier no.** column for the line, select the ID for the supplier that matches the supplier on the invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The invoice line gets the status **New** and a warning is displayed. 1. On the invoice line, you see the warning symbol ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and in the **Supplier difference status** column, you see the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. To update the supplier information, click **Update supplier**. A dialog box is displayed, with the old and the new value, so that you can check them before you confirm or cancel. 1. Click **Yes** if you want to update all fields with the new values. Click **No** if you do not want update and go back to processing the invoice normally. You can choose not to make the supplier validation both in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) and the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) windows. ## Rematch several invoices form the same supplier with unrecognised details 1. Imagine you have received 10 invoices from the same supplier in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), but the supplier is not recognised, and the invoice lines are marked as **Blocked**. This could be due to a missing organisation number or an incorrect bank account number. Since you know the supplier exists in the system, you need to re-associate the invoice with the correct supplier. 1. On the invoice lines, you see the warning symbol ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and in the **Supplier difference status** column, you see the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. In the **Supplier no.** column of the **first** line, choose the supplier's ID that corresponds to the one on the invoice. The system will automatically populate other lines with the same imported supplier reference number if the **Supplier no.** field is empty. Note that you can assign different supplier numbers to each line. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The invoice lines get the status **New** and a warning is displayed. 1. To update supplier information, click **Update supplier**. A dialog box will appear, showing both old and new values for you to review before confirming or cancelling the update. 1. Click **Yes** to update all fields with the new values. Click **No** to cancel the update and continue processing the invoice as usual. You can choose to disable supplier validation in both the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) and the [Invoice Inbox - Overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) windows.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Ignore supplier validation /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/ignore-supplier-validation section If you have selected supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can update or ignore the supplier details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) and Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Ignore supplier validation If you have selected supplier validation in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can update or ignore the supplier details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) and Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) windows. For more information: [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/), [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/). The steps below provide an example of a situation where the system suggests an update, but you want to ignore it. 1. You have received an invoice in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) with the status **New**. The supplier is either recognised or unrecognised, and some information has changed or is missing, for example, the bank account or the address. 1. On the invoice line, you see the warning symbol ![icon-error-exclamation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-error-exclamation.png), and in the **Supplier difference status** column, you see the message **Supplier update is required**. 1. To avoid updating data according to the supplier validation, click **Ignore supplier validation**. If you have selected **Ignore supplier validation** in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) or [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) window, you can undo your selection in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window later: On the **General settings** tab, go to the **Invoice import settings** section and select **Ignore validation during import of invoices.**

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a new supplier for a blocked invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/create-a-new-supplier-for-a-blocked-invoice section To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new supplier for a blocked invoice To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window to create a new supplier for a blocked invoice. 1. Click the **Create supplier** button. The [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window is displayed and the information from the supplier's invoice is automatically filled in. 1. Add information about the supplier. For details, see [Create a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) before closing the window or click **Save and close**. If you add or modify details in step 2, the table in the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window will display a check mark in the **Edited** column, indicating that changes have been made to the invoice. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Connect a supplier to a blocked invoice /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/connect-a-supplier-to-a-blocked-invoice section To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Connect a supplier to a blocked invoice To unblock an invoice, you must either select an existing supplier or create a new one, as the invoice is blocked due to the supplier not being recognised. 1. Go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window. 1. In the **Inbox status** drop-down list, select **Blocked** from the drop-down list. The system displays all blocked invoices. 1. Select the invoice line you wish to correct by clicking on it. 1. If you are aware that the supplier is registered in your system, activate the **Supplier no.** column by double-clicking on it and click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the supplier. The **Imported supplier reference** column provides information from the supplier's invoice, such as their name, to help you identify the supplier. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Change the default action for the Invoice inbox /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/change-the-default-action-for-the-invoice-inbox section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the default action for the Invoice inbox 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. On the **General information** tab, find the **Invoice inbox settings** section. 1. In the **Default action for invoice inbox** drop-down list, select one of these actions: **Hold**, **Release**, **Send to Approval**, or **Exclude from processing**. For a description of each alternative, click [/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap101000-inbox-actions-pop-up-reference/](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap101000-inbox-actions-pop-up-reference/). 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). In the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/) window, you will now see that the default action for invoices has been changed. View invoices in the Invoice inbox - overview /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices-in-the-invoice-inbox-overview page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View invoices in the Invoice inbox - overview ## Before you start The [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) window displays invoices from AutoInvoice with all statuses: **New**, **Blocked, Sent for Approval, Validated, Manually validated**, **Deleted**, and **Error**. If you want to see only the invoices that have the statuses **New**, **Blocked**, or **Error**, go to the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/). 1. Go to the [Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s/) window. 1. In the **Inbox status** drop-down list, the default status is **New.** Select **View all** to see all, or select the document status you want to see invoices for. 1. To filter on a specific supplier or on a specific invoice date, use the **Supplier** field or the **From date** and **To date** fields. You can also combine them. Visma Net immediately displays your results in the table. 1. Optional: To see details for a specific invoice, select the line in the table and click **View details**. The **Invoice details** window is displayed. For more information, see [View invoice details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details/). 1. Optional: If you click **Update supplier** for a specific invoice in the table, you can [update the supplier's details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/update-supplier-details/). A dialog box is displayed, where you can make your changes. 1. Optional: If the supplier is either recognised or unrecognised, and some information has changed or is missing, for example, the bank account or the address, you can click **Ignore supplier validation** to avoid updating the data. For more information, see [Ignore supplier validation](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/ignore-supplier-validation/). Suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Suppliers Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. About supplier defaults and overrides /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/about-supplier-defaults-and-overrides page With Visma Net, you can easily create suppliers by using the default values provided by supplier classes and then effectively use supplier default values to fill in appropriate supplier information on purchase orders and payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier defaults and overrides With Visma Net, you can easily create suppliers by using the default values provided by supplier classes and then effectively use supplier default values to fill in appropriate supplier information on purchase orders and payments. ## Introduction ## Supplier classes and the default supplier class Supplier classes streamline data entry by automatically providing default values when creating suppliers within a specific class. Organise suppliers into classes based on the goods or services they provide or other characteristics. Initially, create a supplier class containing the largest number of suppliers with the most common values. Designate this class as the default supplier class in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. This will save time when generating new supplier classes, as they will automatically populate with values from the default supplier class, reducing manual data entry. When you create a new supplier, it is automatically assigned to the **Default** supplier class. In most cases, you won't need to select a different supplier class. + A supplier class requires only a class ID and description. You can choose additional elements for each class as needed. + Payment terms, currency, rate type, country, VAT zone, specific general ledger accounts and subaccounts, a default cash account,and payment method can be set for the class. + Choose a foreign currency as the default currency for a supplier class only if most suppliers in that class use it. + If all suppliers in a class use the same currency, disable currency overriding on supplier documents to reduce input errors. + If some suppliers may use a non-default currency and rate type on individual documents, allow currency overriding for suppliers in the class. + When creating a new supplier in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, the default values are those specified for the default supplier class. + If a new supplier should be assigned to a more specific class, select the appropriate class to change the default values. + Any value can be overridden to make it specific to the supplier. However, if many values need to be overridden similarly for multiple suppliers, consider creating a new supplier class. ## Supplier locations A supplier may have multiple locations, each with unique settings. You can add, edit, and view these locations in the [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) window. These locations provide essential supplier information that can be utilised as defaults for purchase orders and supplier payments: + Supplier ledger and expense accounts and appropriate subaccounts + Payment settings and remittance information + Purchasing and shipping-related information + VAT-related information The **main** location is automatically created when you enter the supplier's primary address and contact information in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. The main location always has **MAIN** as its ID, which cannot be modified. Once the main location is created, it is automatically listed and marked as the default location on the **Locations** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. If additional locations have been added to the supplier, you can set another location as the default location: select the location, and click **Set as default** in the table toolbar. The purchase and payment settings specified for the default location are also displayed, respectively, on the **Purchase settings** and **Payment settings** tabs of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. Updating the elements on those tabs also updates appropriate information for the default location in the [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) window. The default location settings are used to populate elements when creating a new location. For a new location, you can make the following selections: + To use the same address and contact information as were specified for the main location, or to enter new information. + To use the purchase and payment settings and general ledger accounts of the default location, or to specify different ones. ## Use of location defaults When creating a new purchase order, invoice, or payment, you need to first select the supplier. + After choosing the supplier, some fields in the window will automatically populate with the supplier's default values, such as the default location and its related purchase or payment settings. + A supplier location's settings contain information like payment method, cash account, VAT zone, VAT registration, shipping settings, and supplier ledger and expense accounts along with their respective subaccounts. + If you pick a location other than the default, the values will update to match the chosen location, and you can modify these values if needed. + When printing payments, the system utilises remittance information and payment settings from the document. + By using supplier defaults to populate elements, data entry becomes more efficient and time-saving due to the automatic application of these default settings.

Related pages

Tasks

 Create a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier ## Before you start To make it easier to create suppliers, you can first create supplier classes and select one as your default. This way the suppliers you create afterwards will already have some default information filled in. See [Create a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class/). To set a supplier class as default, see [Set a supplier class as default](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-a-supplier-class-as-default/). If you do not want to use the default supplier class for the supplier you are creating, you can select a different one on the **General settings** tab, in the section **Financial settings. Visma Net immediately changes the related information.** 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to create a new supplier, and enter the **supplier name**. The next available **supplier number** is automatically added to the new supplier when you save. The default **status** for the new supplier is **active**. 1. [Add information](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier/) on the **General settings** tab. 1. [Add information](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier/) on the **Payment settings** tab. 1. On the **Purchase settings** tab, in the **Default location settings** section, check that the **VAT zone** is correct. 1. Fill in the **corporate ID**. 1. Fill in the **VAT registration ID**. Some countries may use only one of the above, either the corporate ID or the VAT registration ID. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, check or select the GL accounts / subaccounts you want to use for the general ledger transactions for the customer. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Create a customer from a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-customer-from-a-supplier page You can create a customer from supplier with just a few steps. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a customer from a supplier You can create a customer from supplier with just a few steps. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Open the supplier you want to copy to a customer. 1. Click **Actions** - **Extend to customer**. The system will take you to the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window in the customer ledger with appropriate elements filled in. 1. Check the values and click **Save**. Add general information for a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add general information for a supplier ## Before you start [Create a supplier (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the supplier you are creating. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Click the **General settings** tab. 1. In the **Financial settings** section, select the **supplier class**. 1. In the **Main contact** section, fill in the **Attention**, **Email**, and **Phone** fields. 1. In the **Main address** section, add the address information. 1. Select the **terms** for the supplier class. 1. Select the **currency ID** and the other currency settings. 1. Optional: You can set a default action for this supplier in the Invoice inbox. Select one of the following actions: 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Add payment settings for a supplier (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier/) Add payment settings for a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add payment settings for a supplier ## Before you start [Create a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/) [Add general information for a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier/) In some of the steps in this procedure, you only have to check that the information is correct for the supplier you are creating. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. Click the **Payment settings** tab. 1. In the **Payment method** field, select a payment method. 1. In the **Cash account** field, select a bank account. This is the general ledger account you will use to pay the supplier. 1. In the field **Account used for payments**, select the account type. Use the right payment settings for suppliers, whether it is a domestic or an international supplier, together with the correct payment method. If you select **BBAN**, you just need to fill out the bank account number. If you select **IBAN**, fill out the whole IBAN number. In Swedish versions, you can also select **Bankgiro** and **Postgiro**. 1. In the **Default payment ref. no**. field, you can register a payment reference number per customer, to be used on all supplier invoices. This is handy, for example, if you have recurring invoices. If you enter a number in this field, you can see the same reference number in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window, in the field **Payment. ref. no**. 1. In the **Payment instructions** box, double-click in the **Value** column to enter the supplier's account number. For some payment methods, the **Payment instructions** box is not active. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Override Send to Approval as the default action for one supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action-for-one-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Override Send to Approval as the default action for one supplier ## Before you start To handle large amounts of invoices more efficiently, you can send all invoices to Approval as a default action. If nothing is selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, the system will use the Approval license to define the default action for this specific supplier. + If Approval is activated, the default action is **Send to Approval**. For Sweden, if also the pre-booking functionality is activated in Approval, the default action is **Pre-book and Send to Approval**. + If Approval is not activated, the default action is **Release**. You can override these actions defined by the license for one specific supplier, by following the instructions below. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. Find the **Invoice import settings** section. 1. In the **Default action for invoice inbox** drop-down list, select **Send to Approval**. You can also set **Hold** or **Release** as a default actions here. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? You can also override this default action for all suppliers: [Override Send to Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action/). Create a supplier class /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier class 1. Go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Enter the next available **class ID**. If you are unsure of the next available ID, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to open the **Select - Class ID** window. The fields marked with \* are mandatory. 1. In the **Description** field, enter the name or description of your new supplier class. 1. Add all additional information for this specific supplier class. Start on the **General settings** tab, and continue. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Set a supplier class as default /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-a-supplier-class-as-default section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set a supplier class as default 1. Go to the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. 1. Under the **Data entry settings** section in the **Default supplier class ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the supplier class you want to set as default. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you want to make changes to the default supplier class, go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window, select the default class, make your changes, and click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Change the VAT zone for a supplier class /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/change-the-vat-zone-for-a-supplier-class section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the VAT zone for a supplier class 1. Go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. 1. Select the **Class ID** for the class you want to change the VAT zone for. 1. On the **General settings** tab, locate the **Default general settings** section. 1. In the **VAT zone ID** field, select the VAT zone you want to use for the current supplier class. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can override the VAT zone for a specific supplier at any time, even if you have already set a zone for an entire class. To do this, go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window and click on the **Purchase settings** tab. From there, select the desired VAT zone for the specific supplier. Enable supplementary VAT reports /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/enable-supplementary-vat-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Enable supplementary VAT reports 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a tax agency. 1. Click the **Tax agency settings** tab that is now activated. 1. Under the **VAT report settings** section, select the **Update closed VAT periods** check box. For Dutch users, this check box is selected by default. 1. In the **Supplementary VAT amount** field, enter an amount. For Dutch users, this field is set up with 1000 as default value. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Prepare a supplementary VAT report](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-a-supplementary-year-based-vat-report/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Activate RF-1301 reporting for a supplier /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/activate-rf-1301-reporting-for-a-supplier section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Activate RF-1301 reporting for a supplier 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. Select a supplier or enter a new one. 1. On the **General settings** tab, in the **Supplier properties** area, select the **RF-1301** check box. If this is a new supplier, a reminder is displayed, to tell you that you have to enter a corporate ID or national insurance number for the supplier. You will also see that the tab **RF-1301 filter** is added to the **[Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/)** window. 1. Click the **Purchase settings** tab and enter a corporate ID or national insurance number for the supplier. If you enter both, Corporate ID will be the default value. 1. Click the **RF-1301 filters** tab. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add one or more date filters. If you enter a filter, Visma Net includes the suppliers with purchase invoices dated within the dates you have given. You can also have open start or open end filters. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > You can also make a supplier class for the RF-1301 suppliers that you have. See [Create a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class/). View supplier balances /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/view-supplier-balances page In this topic 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # View supplier balances In this topic ## In this topic You can use multiple reports to view supplier balances. This topic describes how to use the following reports and windows: + [Balance by supplier (AP63250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-ap63250s/) report + [Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-currency-ap63300s/) report + [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) window ## Run the Balance by supplier report 1. Go to the [Balance by supplier (AP63250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-ap63250s/). 1. On the **Report parameters** tab, in the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Account summary** To display the balance by supplier account. + **Open documents**: To view all documents with the **Open** status. + **Open + Current period**: To view all documents with the **Open** status, as well as documents of the current period regardless of their status. + **All documents (supplier required)**: To view all the documents of a specific supplier. If you select this option, you must specify a supplier. 1. Select the branch for which you want to view supplier balances. 1. Select the financial period whose date you want to view. 1. To view applied documents, select the **Include applications** check box. 1. Optional: Select a supplier by its ID, or leave the **Supplier no.** field blank to display information on all suppliers. For the **All documents** report format, you must select a supplier. 1. Click **Run report**. The report lists the supplier balance for each account related to the supplier. All the amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## Run the Balance by supplier (currency) report 1. Go to the [Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-currency-ap63300s/) report. 1. In the **Report format** field, select one of the following options: + **Account summary** To display the balance by supplier account. + **Open documents**: To view all documents with the **Open** status. + **Open + Current period**: To view all documents with the **Open** status, as well as documents of the current period regardless of their status. + **All documents (supplier required)**: To view all the documents of a specific supplier. If you select this option, you must select a supplier. 1. Select the financial period you want to run the report for. 1. To view applied documents, select the **Include applications** check box. 1. Optional: Select a supplier, or leave the **Supplier** field blank to display information on all suppliers. For the **All documents** report format, you must select a supplier. 1. Click **Run report**. The report lists the supplier balances in each of the currencies used (including the base currency) for each account related to the supplier. ## Use the Supplier summary window 1. Go to the [Supplier summary (AP401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch for which you want to view the data. 1. Optional: In the **Period** field, select a financial period. If do not select any period, information about all open periods is displayed in the table. 1. Optional: Select a supplier class. If you leave the **Supplier class** field blank, information about suppliers of all classes is displayed in the table. 1. Optional: Select a currency. If the **Currency** field is blank, the data is displayed for all currencies. 1. Optional: If you left the **Currency** field blank, select the **Split by currency** check box to view balances in each currency separately. 1. Optional: Select a supplier account. If you leave the **Supplier account** field left, information on all accounts is displayed. 1. Optional: Select the corresponding supplier subaccount for the Supplier ledger account. 1. Select the **Suppliers with balance only** check box to view suppliers with non-zero balances, or clear the check box to view all suppliers. 1. In the table, view suppliers' outstanding balances and other information that matches the criteria you specified in the top part. Set up mailings for suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-up-mailings-for-suppliers section In Visma Net, the functionality that enables the sending of documents of a specific type by email or by postal mail is referred to as a mailing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up mailings for suppliers In Visma Net, the functionality that enables the sending of documents of a specific type by email or by postal mail is referred to as a mailing. In Visma Net, the functionality that enables the sending of documents of a specific type by email or by postal mail is referred to as a **mailing**. You can configure mailing of documents to suppliers willing to receive paper documents or sending by email to those who are willing to receive electronic versions of documents. To set up such mailings, follow the steps outlined in the following sections. ## Before you begin As a first step, navigate to the [Purchase orders preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window, and click the **Mailing settings** tab. In the **Default sources** area, make sure that the **Active** check box for the PURCHASE ORDER mailing is selected. ## Define mailing settings for a supplier class You can facilitate the process of setting up sending of electronic purchase orders to suppliers by using the mailing settings of supplier classes as the default settings for suppliers of the respective classes. If suppliers of the class are shared among multiple branches of your company, you can set up the mailing of orders differently for different branches. Also, you can configure emails to be sent to authorised employees of your company branches about orders of particular supplier classes. To set up the mailing for a supplier class, perform the following steps: 1. Go to the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. 1. On the **General settings** tab, select the **Send orders by email** check box. 1. On the **Mailing settings** tab, in the **Mailings** area, do the following: 1. Select the **Active** check boxes for the mailings you want to use. 1. For this mailing, specify a default report or template. If needed, select a custom report or another email template to be used for email generation. 1. In the **Recipients** area, take the following steps in defining the types of recipients for the supplier class: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Contact type** field, specify the default contact type for suppliers of the class. Make sure this contact type, too, is active. Mailing settings for the supplier class serve as the default settings for suppliers of the class but can be overridden by the settings for particular suppliers. 1. Optional: If an employee in your company should receive the emails that will be sent to suppliers of this class, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row. In the **Contact type** field, select **Employee**. In the **Contact ID** field, select the particular employee. Make sure this contact is active by selecting the **Active** check box for this row. ## Define mailing settings for a particular supplier You can set up sending specific documents by email to particular suppliers and employees who work with these suppliers. To do this, perform the following steps: 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. On the **Purchase settings** tab, make sure the **Send orders by email** check box is selected. 1. On the **Mailing settings** tab, in the **Mailings** area, do the following: 1. Make sure the mailings which you want to use are active. 1. Specify the default report or the default template. If needed, select a custom report or another template. 1. In the **Recipients** area, review the list of default contact types to receive emails, and add more contacts if needed, taking the following steps for each contact: 1. In the **Contact type** field, specify the type of contact to receive the mailing. (This can be an employee of your company or a supplier contact.) 1. In the **Contact ID** field, select the particular contact of the type. 1. Choose the format of the email (if a report is used) for this particular recipient. 1. Make sure the contact for mailing is active. 1. Specify whether the contact should receive a blind copy (bcc) of the emails that will be generated for this mailing. Track payments to suppliers /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/track-payments-to-suppliers page To easily view a supplier's payment history, use the following windows: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Track payments to suppliers To easily view a supplier's payment history, use the following windows: ## Introduction + [Purchase Invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/): To verify if the invoice is paid and see the payment documents + [Supplier details (AP402000):](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) To view all payments to a supplier + [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) To see whether an invoice has been approved for payment ## Check whether an invoice has been paid 1. Go to the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field of the top part, select **Purchase invoice**. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, select the invoice whose payments you want to check. 1. Check whether the invoice has been paid as follows: + In the **Balance** field, look at the amount to be paid for the invoice. If the amount is zero, the invoice has been paid in full. + On the **Applications** tab, view all payments that have been applied to the invoice. ## View all payments to a supplier 1. Go to the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field of the top part, select the branch for which you want to view prepayments. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier. 1. In the **Period** field, select the financial period for which the payments will be displayed, or leave the field blank to view all payments. 1. Optional: Select the **Include unreleased documents** check box to include the unreleased documents. 1. Optional: Select the **Show all documents** check box to show all documents regardless of their status. 1. Check the payments to the supplier as follows: + In the table, view the list of payments that match the selected criteria. + In the **Balance by documents** field of the top part,check the total amount of payments to the supplier, based on the criteria you have selected. + In the **Current balance** field, look at the total amount of payments to the supplier, as retrieved from the supplier ledger account history records stored in the database. ## See whether an invoice has been approved for payment 1. Go to the [Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s/) window. 1. In the **Selection date** field of the top part, specify the approval date. By default, the system uses the current business date. 1. Select the supplier whose invoices you want to check. 1. Optional: In the top part, specify other filtering criteria to narrow the search results. 1. In the table, look for invoices with the **Open** status that meet the selected criteria. If an invoice is approved for payment, the check box in the unlabelled column will be selected, and the payment's payment date will be visible in the **Payment date** field. Set the financial period end date for the VAT period /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-the-financial-period-end-date-for-the-vat-period section With this setting, the end date of the period of the document will be used for VAT calculation. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set the financial period end date for the VAT period With this setting, the end date of the period of the document will be used for VAT calculation. ## Introduction With this setting, the end date of the period of the document will be used for VAT calculation. Then the VAT will always follow the posted period end date, and the document date will not affect the VAT reporting period. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier no.** field, select a tax agency. The **Tax agency settings** tab appears. 1. On the **Tax agency settings** tab under the **VAT report settings** section, select the **Use the financial period's end date as VAT period, and not the document date** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). **Note**: If you do not select this check box, the document date will be used for VAT calculation. Close a financial period in Supplier ledger /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/close-a-financial-period-in-supplier-ledger page You can only close a financial period if there are no open documents (that is, documents with the On hold or Balanced status) to be posted to it. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close a financial period in Supplier ledger You can only close a financial period if there are no open documents (that is, documents with the On hold or Balanced status) to be posted to it. ## Introduction In Visma Net, transactions cannot be posted to closed financial periods unless the **Allow posting to closed periods** check box in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window is selected. ## Before you proceed You might need to take the following steps before you close a financial period in the Supplier ledger: 1. Make sure all the appropriate recurring documents are generated and recurring transactions are posted in the period to be closed. 1. Make sure there are no open documents in the period to be closed. Use the following steps to review open documents in the Supplier ledger workspace: 1. Go to the [Close financial periods (AP506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ap506000/) window. 1. In the table, select the unlabelled check boxes to specify the financial periods for which you want to review open documents. To select all the displayed active periods for closing, click the unlabelled check box in the header row. 1. Click **Unreleased documents**. The system displays the **Unreleased supplier ledger documents** report. 1. Review the report to find open documents to be posted in the specified period. ## Close a financial period in Supplier ledger 1. Go to the [Close financial periods (AP506000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ap506000/) window. 1. In the table, select the unlabelled check boxes to specify the financial periods you want to close. To select all the displayed active periods for closing, click the unlabelled check box in the header row. 1. Click **Close periods**.

Related pages

Windows

 Supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discounts Maintain supplier discounts - overview /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview section You can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain supplier discounts - overview You can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts offered by your suppliers by maintaining discounts in Visma Net. > [!NOTE] > This functionality is available only if the **Supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. About supplier discounts in Visma Net /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-in-visma-net page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About supplier discounts in Visma Net To go back to the main process, click outside this pop-up window. || |---| |## [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/)| || |## Examples| |[Calculate document-level supplier discounts with tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-document-level-supplier-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts/)| |[Calculate line-level customer discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/)| |[Calculate prorated supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-prorated-supplier-discounts/)| || |## [About Supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/)| |## [About Supplier discounts and series for discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/)| About Supplier discounts and series for discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts page You use this window to define the series for the supplier discount codes that you have set up. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Supplier discounts and series for discounts You use this window to define the series for the supplier discount codes that you have set up. ## Introduction + A **discount series** defines the method used by the system to calculate supplier discounts, depending on the line item's amount or quantity, or the document's total amount. + The discount series consists of a list of break points, where each break point indicates the range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts eligible for a specific discount amount or percentage. + Many suppliers offer discounts that depend on the quantities of items, on the inclusion of specific items, on the document total amounts, or on specific line amounts. ## The stages of defining supplier discounts In Visma Net, you create supplier discounts in the following two stages: 1. In the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, define discount codes for all types of supplier discounts offered by your suppliers. A supplier discount code defines the following characteristics for a discount: + Whether it is unconditional + What types of conditions should be met when you apply it + Whether it is automatic or manual + At which level the discount is applicable (to documents, groups, or lines). For more information, see [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/). 1. In the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, create a discount series for each supplier discount code. Each series should have an effective date and specify a discount type, such as promotional, updatable, simple, or tiered. Multiple series with the same discount can be active simultaneously, provided they apply to non-overlapping conditions. For example, a line-level discount is a conditional discount for items. You can set up series with the same start date but applying to different items. ## About the different discount series Each discount code can have multiple discount series associated with it. Assign a unique identifier to each series. When automatic numbering is enabled for a discount code, the system will automatically generate a series ID for each new series created under that code. By default, the discount code serves as a prefix for the series IDs. You can also choose a different string as a prefix for automatic numbering. For every discount series, provide the following details: + How the discount is tiered: **by amount** (for discount codes of all types) or **by quantity** (only for the line and group discount code types). + How the discount is expressed: as a percentage or as an amount. + Whether the discount is a promotional discount and has an expiration date. + Which conditions apply. The types of conditions are defined by the discount code. For example, if you have decided that the discount code should apply discounts to specific items, you can see the **Items** tab in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. On this tab, you can create a list of items to which each series is applicable. Each discount series has an effective (start) date and will apply only on and after this date. ## Simple and tiered discounts In a series, you can apply a simple discount to any amount or quantity, or use a tiered discount based on item quantities or amounts. To set up tiers for a discount, define break points that establish ranges of amounts or quantities with different applicable discount percentages or amounts. This section provides examples of supplier discount series. For more information on discount amount calculations, see [Calculate document-level discounts with tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-document-level-supplier-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts/) and [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/). ## Discounts that can be updated and promotional discounts A discount series includes either an adjustable discount or a promotional discount. Promotional discounts are temporary price reductions with specified start and end dates. Once the end date passes, the promotional discount is no longer valid. To create a promotional series, select the **Promotional** check box in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. When you **do not** select the **Promotional** check box, it means that series can be updated. They only have the start (effective) date. However, for each series that can be updated, you can have multiple versions: + The active version — the discount that is currently in effect. + The pending version — the discount that will be in effect starting on the pending date. + The last version — the discount that was in effect before the current discount. When updating supplier discounts for a series, you cannot create all versions simultaneously. Instead, input new break amounts (or quantities) as pending amounts (or quantities) and set a pending date as the new effective date. Once the new start date arrives, you can update the current series with these pending values. After updating the series in the **Update discounts** pop-up window found in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, the previously active series version becomes the last version, and the pending version takes its place as the active one.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About types of supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-types-of-supplier-discounts page In Visma Net, you can input and regularly update supplier discounts based on the information provided by each supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About types of supplier discounts In Visma Net, you can input and regularly update supplier discounts based on the information provided by each supplier. ## Introduction Having this information allows you to strategically plan your orders. For example, you can order larger quantities less frequently if the supplier offers tiered discounts, place orders earlier to take advantage of promotional discounts, or include specific items in your orders to receive a substantial group discount. ## Prerequisites Make sure the **Supplier discounts** functionality is included in your license and enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The system automatically applies supplier discounts to each purchase invoice when the document is saved. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, the system applies discounts to purchase orders. ## Types of discounts In Visma Net , there are the following general types of supplier discounts:
Option Description
Line A discount applied to a single document line. This discount can be based on the line amount or quantity and may be expressed as a percentage or a fixed amount. These discounts can be unconditional or apply to specific items, supplier locations, combinations of items and locations, or particular item price classes. Be cautious when using conditions based on item price classes, as suppliers may have different price classes.
Group A discount applicable to multiple lines within the same document. This discount can be unconditional or apply to specific items, supplier locations, item price classes, or a combination of items and locations. Group discounts are applied when the document properties meet the application conditions.
Document A discount that unconditionally applies to the document total.
In the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, you can specify whether for each discount code the discount is unconditional or is based on specific conditions. For conditional discounts, you can select the type of conditions affecting the application of the discount. Then, when you create discount series in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. ## Application of line discounts ## Automatic and manual discounts + The discounts with the **Manual** check box selected in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window will not be applied automatically or selected as the best-available when a user saves the document. + While automatic discounts of all levels are applied when the document is being saved, you can apply a manual discount to a particular document by using the appropriate window, [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) or [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/). + You can apply line-level discounts on the **Document details** tab of the appropriate window once you select the **Manual discount** check box for a particular line and select the discount code of one of the applicable manual discounts. + You can apply manual group discounts and document discounts on the **Discount details** tab. ## Discount series Particular details and particular conditions of application for each discount code are defined by discount series, which you can create by using the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. For each supplier discount code, you can decide whether to use automatic numbering for the series associated with this discount code to be used as a prefix for automatic numbering.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About the order of supplier discount application /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-the-order-of-supplier-discount-application page When a document is saved, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically except for the discounts marked as manual (those for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the order of supplier discount application When a document is saved, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically except for the discounts marked as manual (those for which the Manual discount check box is selected in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window). For more information: [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/). ## Introduction When a document is saved, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically except for the discounts marked as manual (those for which the **Manual discount** check box is selected in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window). This topic provides the details on the order of discount application. ## Order of application for automatic discounts For the automatic discounts, you do not have to specify the order of their application in any way and discounts are always applied in the following order: + Discounts of the **Line** type: When applying discounts to a sales order or invoice, the system checks the discounts for all document lines, and for each line it picks the best discount applicable. + Discounts of the **Group** type: The system checks applicable group discounts and applies all of them. + Discounts of the **Document** type: There can be only one best **Document** discount; that is why **Group** discounts (that apply to multiple lines of the document) are often used as **Document** discounts. The following options (available in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window) affect the order of discount application and the calculation of the discounts: Exclude from discountable amount : By using this option (available for the **Line** discounts), you can exclude the discountable amount of the **Line** discount from the discountable amount for higher-level discounts (group and document). For example: By using this option, you can exclude items with a special 75% clearance discount defined at the line level from the basis for the usual 5% document discount the supplier offers on orders exceeding 2000€. Skip document discount : This option is available for the **Group** discounts. If you design a **Group** discount to be applicable to multiple lines and significantly reduce the document total, select this option to not apply a **Document** discount. ## Interaction between supplier discounts and supplier prices If a particular supplier company informs you about their prices intended for all their customers and their discounts, you can maintain the supplier's prices along with supplier discounts, and you will calculate supplier discounts based on discountable amounts calculated from the prices. If you maintain the prices offered by the supplier specifically to your company, maintain supplier prices by using the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) and the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) windows and do not configure supplier discounts. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in your system, the supplier prices available in the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window will be automatically updated once the supplier prices specified for the "zero" tier (with 0 quantity) have been changed through the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. ## Application of auxiliary manual discounts Manual discounts (discounts with the **Manual** check box selected in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window) are applied when all automatic discounts have been applied. You can specify the manual discount for particular document lines by using the **Document details** tab of the appropriate data entry windows: + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) + [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, and the system will recalculate other related values automatically. ## Automatic and manual discounts The manual discounts are not applied automatically or selected as the best-available on saving the document. You apply such discounts manually to documents in the document entry windows (either the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) or the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window), while automatic discounts of all levels are applied when the document is being saved.In a document, you can apply the manual **Line** discount by selecting the discount code in the **Discount code** column of a particular line on the **Document details** tab. After the code has been selected and the discount has been applied, other discounts are recalculated.To apply the manual **Group** or **Document** discounts, select each manual discount by its code on the **Document details** tab of the appropriate document entry window. If the discount matches by conditions, it is applied. If when adding manual discounts, you change the line quantities, manual discounts are recalculated; they will not be replaced by automatic discounts even if the latter result in greater discount amount. ## Ability to view discount details You can view the details of all the discounts, automatic or manual that were applied to the document (purchase order or invoice) on the **Discount details** tab of the respective data entry windows (listed in the section above). ## Possibility to refresh discounts and prices for existing documents For documents that were **On hold** for some time, you can update the discounts for the document if you know that the prices or discounts were updated or new discounts have been defined in the system. To update the prices and discounts, use the **Recalculate prices and discounts** action in the window toolbars of the respective windows. You also can choose whether to replace manual discounts by automatic discounts to check whether this change results currently in a larger total discount. If you are not satisfied with the result, you can apply the manual discounts. The principles of supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts page In Visma Net, you can maintain supplier discounts so that you can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts offered by your suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # The principles of supplier discounts In Visma Net, you can maintain supplier discounts so that you can effectively plan purchasing and take advantage of discounts offered by your suppliers. ## Overview of discounts ### Types of supplier discounts Enter and regularly update supplier discounts using the information provided by each supplier to better plan your orders. For instance, order larger quantities less often if the supplier offers tiered discounts, place orders earlier to take advantage of promotional discounts, or include specific items in your orders to receive substantial group discounts, rather than placing separate orders for those items. ## Prerequisites Ensure that your license includes the **Supplier discounts** functionality and that it is activated (refer to [Enable or disable supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts/) ). Configure supplier discounts in the **Supplier ledger** workspace. The system will automatically apply the relevant discounts to each purchase order and invoice upon saving. If your company uses the Inventory module, the system applies discounts to purchase orders. ## Stages of configuring supplier discounts 1. For each supplier, define supplier discount codes in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window. Here, you can specify the discount types and their conditions. To minimise errors on purchase orders and invoices, create and use discount codes that closely resemble the ones used by the supplier. 1. In the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, you create discount series for each discount code. ## Types of discounts on the line, group, or document level There are three general types of supplier discounts in Visma Net:
Discount Description
Line-level discounts Line-level discounts apply to individual document lines: These discounts can be calculated based on the line amount or quantity, and can be expressed as percentages or fixed amounts. They can be unconditional, or apply to specific items, certain supplier locations, both particular items and locations, or specific item price classes. Keep in mind that suppliers may use different price classes when setting conditions based on item price classes.
Group-level discounts Group-level discounts are applicable to multiple lines within the same order. These discounts can be unconditional or conditional, based on specific items, supplier locations, a combination of items and locations, or particular item price classes. Group-level discounts are applied when the document properties meet the specified conditions.
Document-level discounts Document-level discounts are applied to the entire document without any restrictions.
In the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, you can define each discount code as either unconditional or conditional. For conditional discounts, you can choose the conditions that determine how the discount is applied. Then, when you create discount series in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window, you can specify particular conditions of the selected type. ## Application methods for line discounts Choose whether to apply line discounts to item prices or item extended prices based on each supplier's preferences. To apply line discounts to item extended prices, refer to [Define supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes/). When creating discount tiers, set the **break amounts** for either line amounts or prices. For examples, see [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/). ## Automatic and manual discounts When creating discount codes in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) windowa and you select the **Manual** check box, the system will not automatically apply the manual discount or choose it as the best available option upon saving the document. Although automatic discounts of all levels are applied when saving the document, you can apply a manual discount to a specific document in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) or [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) windows. On the **Document details** tab within any of these windows, you have the option to apply line-level discounts. To do this, simply select the **Manual discount** check box for a specific line and choose the discount code. Additionally, on the **Discount details** tab, you can apply manual group and document-level discounts. ## Discount series Discount series specify the application details and conditions for each discount code. You can create these series in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. For more information about discount series, see [Series for supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/). Calculate document-level supplier discounts with tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-document-level-supplier-discounts-with-tiers-defined-by-amounts page In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate supplier discounts let you receive the best discount amount on your orders (or purchase invoices, if you do not use the Inventory module), according to the information your system contains about supplier discounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate document-level supplier discounts with tiers defined by amounts In Visma Net, the algorithms used to calculate supplier discounts let you receive the best discount amount on your orders (or purchase invoices, if you do not use the Inventory module), according to the information your system contains about supplier discounts. You enter discount series based on information you get from specific suppliers. When you enter a discount series for a particular supplier discount code, you can specify the same discount for all amounts (quantities), or you can create tiers by specifying break points, and the particular discounts for these tiers. For more information, see [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/), [About supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/), and [Series for supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/about-supplier-discounts-and-series-for-discounts/). The system calculates discounts as if the quantities of items are specified in their base units. Make sure that you convert discount break quantities and quantities of free items correctly for each supplier, if the supplier uses units of measure for these items that differ from the base UoMs in your system. ## Calculation principles **Supplier document-level** discounts are unconditional. You create tiers for them only by break points defined as amounts, while the discount can be defined as a percentage of the document amount or as a fixed amount. When the system processes a purchase order or a purchase invoice, for each discount series, it compares the discountable amount to the break points in the discount series, like this: 1. The document amount is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. 1. The document amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to any break point but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the system deducts the fixed amount specified as the discount for this tier from the document amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the system calculates and deducts the percent (specified for this tier) of the document amount from the document amount. + The system does not perform any further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare, and repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. ### Example 1 If a series for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount corresponding to the appropriate tier from the document total. Suppose that you have specified a series with the following breakpoints: + 1000€: 5% + 2000€: 7% + 5000€: 10% For a document with 900€ total, the discount is zero, while for a document with 2500€, it is 175€, and for a document with total of 9000€, the discount is 900€ ### Example 2 Next, suppose that a series for a document-level discount has tiers defined by amounts, with the discounts expressed as fixed amounts that the system subtracts from the total amount. Furthermore, suppose that you have specified the series with the following break points: + 1000€: 100€ + 2000€: 225€ + 3000€: 350€ For purchase orders with amounts less than 1000€, your company will receive a discount of zero. The discount for an order with a total between 1000€ and 1999.99€ is 100€, the discount on an order between 2000€ and 2999.99€ is 225€, and the discount for an order of 3000€ or more is 350€. ## What is next? [Calculate line-level discounts for tiers defined by amounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts/) Calculate line-level customer discounts for tiers defined by amounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-line-level-customer-discounts-for-tiers-defined-by-amounts page You can define tiers for a line-level discount by amounts or by quantities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate line-level customer discounts for tiers defined by amounts You can define tiers for a line-level discount by amounts or by quantities. ## Introduction The calculation method for line-level discounts depends on whether you want to apply the discount to item costs or to item extended costs. See [Apply discounts to Extended cost or Unit cost](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/apply-discounts-to-extended-cost-or-unit-cost/). ## Apply line discount to extended cost If you want to apply the discounts to the extended cost for a particular supplier, and the tiers are defined by amounts, the line amount is compared to the first break amount. If the amount is less than the first break amount in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. Otherwise, the system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line amount (that is, the extended cost of the item) is compared to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. 1. The line amount is compared to the next break point. If the amount is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the line amount. + If the discount is a percentage, the percent (specified for this tier) of the line amount is calculated and deducted from the line amount. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it has calculated all discount or checked the last break point. ### Example Your company buys an item for 95€. If a series for a line-level discount has tiers defined by amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the system subtracts the discount amount calculated as a percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the extended cost of the item, from the extended price. Let us say that the series is specified with the following break points: + 1000€: 5% + 2000€: 10% + 5000€: 20% For a line with 10 items (the extended cost is 950€), the discount is zero. For a line with 20 items, the discount is 190€. And for a line with a total of 60 items (the extended cost is 5700€), the discount is 1140€. ## Apply line discount to item cost If you, for a specific supplier, want to apply the discounts to item costs, check that the break points defined as amounts can be compared to costs (not to extended costs). The system compares the cost of the line item to the first break point. If the amount is less than the first break point in the series, the discount is zero, and the system does no further comparison. Otherwise, the system calculates discounts like this: 1. The line item's cost is compared to the first break point. If the item cost is less than the first break point in the series, the discount equals zero, and the system does no further comparison. 1. The item cost is compared to the next break point. If the cost is greater than or equal to this break point but less than the next break point or greater than the last break point, the system calculates the discount as follows: + If the discount is a fixed amount, the fixed amount for this tier is deducted from the item cost, and the system recalculates the extended cost. + If the discount is a percentage, the system calculates and deducts the percent (specified for this tier) of the item cost from the item cost. + The system does no further comparison. 1. The system continues to compare; it repeats step 2 until it finds a discount or has checked the last break point. If, for a specific supplier, the discounts should be applied to item costs and a series is broken down by the quantity of the item, the line quantity of the item is compared to the quantities selected as break points, and the system calculates the discount like this: + If the discount is defined as a percentage, the specified percent is deducted from the item cost and then the discounted price is multiplied by the line quantity. + If the discount is defined as a fixed amount, the specified fixed amount is deducted from the item cost and then the discounted price is multiplied by the line quantity. ### Example Your company buys different items that cost 95€, 210€, and 600€. If a series for a line-level discount has tiers defined by the amounts with the discounts expressed as percentages, the discount amount is calculated as the percent (defined for the appropriate tier) of the item price and the system subtracts it from the cost. Suppose that you have specified the series with the following break points: + 1000€: 5% + 2000€: 10% + 5000€: 20% For a line with 10 units of the item priced at 95€, the discount will be zero. For a line with 20 units of the item priced at 210€, the discount will be 2.10€ per unit with the discount for the line at 42€. And for a line with 600€ item, the discount will be 120€ per unit. If you need information on discount calculation for prorated discounts, see [Calculate prorated discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-prorated-supplier-discounts/). Calculate prorated supplier discounts /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/calculate-prorated-supplier-discounts page This example concerns a prorated group-level discount defined for quantity tiers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate prorated supplier discounts This example concerns a prorated group-level discount defined for quantity tiers. ## Introduction It is possible to prorate discount series if you select the **Prorate discounts** check box in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. For prorated discount series, the discount amount (or the quantity of items) is calculated so that your company does not need to split a purchase order to get a greater discount amount or a larger quantity of items. The **Prorate discounts** option is applicable to discount series with discountable quantities as well as with discountable amounts. ### Example The series defines the discount with the following tiers: + 10 units: 1 unit of the item + 20 units: 2 units of the item + 40 units: 3 units of the item To determine the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, using the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount according to the breakpoints used. With prorated discounts, a purchase order for 50 units would yield 4 units of the item, computed as 3 (for 40 units) plus 1 (for 10 units). For an order of 70 units, the discount is calculated as 6 units of the item: 3 as the discount for 40 units, plus 2 as the discount for 20 units, plus 1 as the discount for 10 units. Supplier discount series /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discount series Create discount series (AP205000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series/create-discount-series-ap205000 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create discount series (AP205000) ## Before you start The [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window is only available if you have selected the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. See: [Enable or disable supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts/). You also need to [define supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes/) before you start. 1. Go to the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier you want to set up discount series for. 1. In the **Discount code** field, select the discount code you want to use. 1. In the **Series** field, the default value is NEW. This field is for the ID of the series associated with the supplier discount code. If you've enabled automatic numbering for the discount in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, the system will generate an ID. Otherwise, you need to create and input the first number of the number series manually. 1. Optional: Select the **Active** check box if the series is active. You should not have overlapping time intervals for the same discounts or, if you have, they should apply to different entities. 1. Optional: Select the **Promotional** check box if the series is the supplier's promotional discount. For promotional discount series, you must specify the effective date and the expiration date (the field **Effective date** is displayed if you select **Promotional** ). 1. In the **Description** field, you see the description for the discount code if it was given. You can change this description here. 1. In the **Discount by** field, select the way the discount should be specified for this discount series. Select one of the following options: + **Percent**: The supplier discount is specified by a percentage. + **Amount**: The supplier discount is specified by a fixed amount. + **Free item**: The supplier discount is defined by a specific quantity of certain free items added to an order. You can only use this option for group-level discounts. 1. In the **Break by** field, decide how you want the system to set the break points: + **Quantity**: The range is set by specified quantities. + **Amount**: The range is set by specified amounts. 1. Optional: Select the **Prorate discount** check box if you want the discount to be prorated. > ## More information > > When using **prorated discounts**, the discount amount or the number of free items is calculated by dividing the order into multiple smaller orders, ensuring you receive the maximum possible discount. > > To calculate the discount amount or the number of free items for a quantity that falls between two break points, the system considers the quantity as a combination of the largest possible break point quantities. > > It then calculates the discount amount (or the number of free items) according to the break points used. 1. Based on your selections in steps 7 and 8, as well as any checked boxes in this window, various tabs will appear. You may need to provide additional information within these tabs. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 About Supplier discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes section You use the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window to add, edit, view, and delete the supplier discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Supplier discount codes You use the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window to add, edit, view, and delete the supplier discount codes defined in your company. For more information: [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/). ## Introduction You use the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window to add, edit, view, and delete the supplier discount codes defined in your company. To complete the configuration of supplier discounts, you specify discount series for each discount code in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. See: [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/). ## The order in which Visma Net applies supplier discounts When you save a document, supplier discounts of all levels are applied to the document automatically, except for the discounts marked as manual. ## Automatic discount application order Automatic discounts are applied in the following order, without needing to specify: Line-level : Applied to each line of the document. The system selects the best applicable discount for each line when processing purchase orders or invoices. Group-level : Applied to multiple lines of the document. The system identifies and applies all applicable group discounts. Document-level : Applied to the document's total amount. Only one best document-level discount is applied, which is why group-level discounts are often used as document-level discounts. Several options affect the discount application order and calculation: Exclude from discountable amount : This option, available for line-level discounts, allows you to exclude the line-level discount amount from higher-level discounts (group and document). For example, you can exclude items with a 75% clearance discount from the basis for a 5% document discount on orders over 2000€. Skip document discount : This option, available for group-level discounts, prevents the application of a document-level discount when a group-level discount significantly reduces the document total. ## Understanding the interaction between supplier discounts and prices When a supplier provides prices for all customers along with discounts, you can manage both supplier prices and discounts, calculating the discounts based on the discountable amounts derived from the prices. For prices offered specifically to your company, use the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) and [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) windows to manage supplier prices, without configuring supplier discounts. With volume pricing enabled, the supplier prices in the [Supplier inventory (PO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/supplier-inventory-po201000/) window will automatically update when the "zero" tier prices (with 0 quantity) are changed in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. ## About applying extra manual discounts You can apply manual discounts (without discount codes) when all automatic discounts have been applied. You can specify a manual discount for specific document lines on the **Document details** tab in these windows: + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) + [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) To apply a manual discount, you can enter either a discount percent or a discount amount. The system automatically recalculates other related values. ## About automatic and manual discounts If you have chosen the **Manual** option in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window, the discount will not be automatically applied or considered the best available when saving the document. You can use manual discounts for purposes such as rebates or coupons. While automatic discounts at all levels are applied upon saving the document, you can apply a manual discount to documents in one of the following windows: + [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) + [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) To apply a manual line-level discount to a document, go to the **Document details** tab and select the discount code for the specific line. Once the code is selected and the discount is applied, the system will recalculate any other discounts accordingly. For manual group-level or document-level discounts, navigate to the **Discount details** tab and select each discount code from the table. The system will apply the discount if the conditions match. Note that if you modify line quantities while adding manual discounts, the system will recalculate them, but they will not be replaced by automatic discounts even if those offer a greater discount amount. You can always view the details of all discounts that were applied to a document on the **Discount details** tab in the window mentioned above. ## About refreshing discounts and prices for existing documents If you are aware of updated prices, discounts, or newly defined discounts in the system for documents that have been on hold, you can update the discounts accordingly. To update prices and discounts, select the **Recalculate prices** action in the appropriate windows. Additionally, you can choose to replace manual discounts with automatic discounts to see if this change increases the total discount. If the result is unsatisfactory, you can revert to using manual discounts.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Define supplier discount codes /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define supplier discount codes ## Before you start To complete the configuration of supplier discounts, you specify discount series for each discount code in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. See: [The principles of supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/maintain-supplier-discounts-overview/the-principles-of-supplier-discounts/). This window is only available if you have selected the **Customer and supplier discounts** check box in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. See: [Enable or disable supplier discounts](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-or-disable-supplier-discounts/). 1. Go to the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the supplier you want define discount codes for. 1. On the **Discount codes** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Discount code** field, enter a unique code for the supplier discount. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a brief description of the supplier discount. 1. In the **Discount type** field, choose what the discount will apply to: + **Line** + **Document** + **Group** 1. In the **Applicable to** field, the default is that all options are check-marked, but you can remove or add an option by clicking to the left of it. The available choices are: + **Item**: The system applies the discount if the document includes specific items. + **Item price class**: The discount is applied if the document includes items from a specific item price class. + **Location**: The system applies the discount if the document is associated with a specific supplier location. + **Item and location**: The system applies the discount if the document includes specific items purchased from specific supplier location. + **Unconditional**: The system applies the discount to all documents unconditionally. For a document-level discount, there is only one option: + **Unconditional**: The system applies the discount to all documents without any conditions. 1. Optional: If you want to exclude the supplier discount from automatic searches for the best available discount, select the **Manual** check box. 1. Optional: Select the check box **Exclude from discountable amount** if you want to exclude the line amount from the base amount for any applicable group or document discount. This option is only available for line-level discounts. 1. Optional: If you want to prevent the application of any additional discounts after the supplier discount, select the **Skip document discounts** check box. Note: This option is only available for group discounts. 1. Optional: Select the **Auto numbering** check box if you want to use automatic numbering to generate IDs for series based on this discount code. The discount code will be used as a prefix for generating series IDs by default, but you can specify a string to be used as a template for automatic numbering in the **Last number** column instead. When series IDs are auto-numbered, the **Last number** column displays the last series ID in the series. If you enter a string before creating any series, the system uses it as a template for automatic numbering. You can have up to 10 characters, including digits at the end. The final letter separates the string into a prefix and an auto-incrementing integer. If you do not provide a value, the system uses the discount code as a prefix. 1. Click the **Calculation** tab. 1. In the **Apply line discounts to** drop-down list, choose between: + **Extended cost**: The system applies the discount to the line amount (to the item's extended cost). + **Unit cost**: The system applies the discount to the item's unit cost. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? [Create discount series](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series/create-discount-series-ap205000/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Apply discounts to extended cost or unit cost /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/apply-discounts-to-extended-cost-or-unit-cost section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Apply discounts to extended cost or unit cost 1. Go to the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window. 1. Go to the **Calculation** tab. 1. In the **Apply line discounts to** drop-down list, select **Extended cost** or **Unit cost**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Supplier price lists /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists section Supplier price lists are configured in the Supplier ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier price lists Supplier price lists are configured in the Supplier ledger workspace. ## Introduction When saving a document, the system automatically applies the prices to non-stock items on an invoice. If the Inventory module is enabled, supplier prices are applied to both stock and non-stock items on purchase orders. ## Import of supplier prices In Visma Net, you can import the price lists shared by your suppliers (or enter them manually) for each supplier separately using the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. If the **Volume pricing** functionality is enabled in your system, you can enter or import tiered prices based on the quantities of items purchased from a supplier. ## Promotional supplier prices In Visma Net, you can enter promotional or temporary prices for suppliers with promotions. To enter promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box for each price record in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. Import a promotional price list using the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window and mark all prices as promotional by selecting the **Promotional** check box of the worksheet. ## Volume-dependent supplier prices With **Volume pricing** enabled, enter supplier price tiers in the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window by specifying break quantity, price, and effective date for each tier. ## Price recalculation on documents Before removing a document from **Hold** status, refresh prices by selecting **Recalculate prices** in the **Actions** menu of the respective window toolbar. Manage supplier prices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/manage-supplier-prices page Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for supplier price management: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage supplier prices Visma Net provides the following mechanisms for supplier price management:
Option Description
Default prices Define and maintain the default supplier price for each individual item in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) windows. You can use discounts with these prices.
Supplier prices Implement different pricing strategies. You can create price lists that apply to a supplier class or a particular supplier, promotional price lists, and prices that depend on the quantity of the product.
Supplier price worksheets Use the record list created in the Supplier prices (AP202000) window to modify and mass-calculate prices using supplier price worksheets. You can update the records individually or apply changes to multiple records simultaneously. Additionally, you can compute pending prices for both stock and non-stock items.
> [!NOTE] > If you are using supplier prices and / or supplier price worksheets to maintain your supplier prices, do not use the default prices, and vice versa. Maintain and review supplier prices /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/maintain-and-review-supplier-prices section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Maintain and review supplier prices 1. Go to the [Supplier prices (AP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the supplier for which you want to review purchase price information. 1. In the **Item ID** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the item you want to review purchase price information for. By selecting only a supplier, you can add new items for this supplier. By selecting only an item, you can add new suppliers for this item. By selecting both a supplier and an item, you can add various prices for the specific supplier and item combination. 1. Optional: In the **Item class** field, select the item class you wish to review supplier price information for. Additionally, click **Me** to filter prices entered by you as a product manager, or **My** to filter based on the product work groups you are a member of. 1. Manually define new prices for the items you wish to edit. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar to add a new row to the price list. 1. Click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select a supplier and/or an item, and fill in other information. 1. Optional: To define promotional prices, select the **Promotion** check box for the desired suppliers and items. Enter the promotional price in the **Price** field, and specify the promotion period using the **Effective date** and **Expiration date** fields. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > To add the items and their prices to a price list, click **Create price worksheets**. This will open the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Create a supplier price worksheet /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/create-a-supplier-price-worksheet section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a supplier price worksheet 1. Go to the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. 1. In the window toolbar, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Fill in the **Description** field for the new supplier price worksheet. 1. To add items to the worksheet, you can: + Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar and select the **item ID** you want to add to the worksheet. + Click **Add item** in the table toolbar. In the **Add item to worksheet** pop-up window, select the desired item IDs and click **Add** or **Add and close**. + Click **Copy prices** in the table toolbar. In the pop-up window, you can select the source and destination price type of the items you want to copy to the new price worksheet, and define the effective date of the prices. Click **Copy** to copy. + Click ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) to open the [**File upload**](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/shared-files/import-data-from-file-to-table-task/) dialog box. You can locate and import local files, Excel spreadsheets (.xlsx), and.csv files. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**. Calculate pending supplier prices for items /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/calculate-pending-supplier-prices-for-items section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Calculate pending supplier prices for items 1. Go to the [Supplier price worksheets (AP202010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010/) window. 1. In the **Reference no.** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the price list for which you want to calculate pending prices. 1. In the **Effective date** field, enter a date from which the pending prices will be effective. The date is automatically set to today's date. **Optional**: Select the **Overwrite overlapping prices** option to overwrite any prices with effective dates that overlap with the worksheet's effective dates. 1. Click **Calculate pending prices**. 1. In the pop-up window, select the percentage of the price adjustment in the **% of original price** field. For example: if you want to raise the prices by 10%, enter 110. 1. Select the **price basis** of the adjustment. 1. Click **Update**. 1. Deselect the **Hold** check box. 1. Click **Release**. The pending prices will become effective on the date you entered in the **Effective date** field. > [!NOTE] > If you want to use promotional prices, select the **Promotional** check box and enter the promotion's **expiration date**. Supplier ledger windows /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger windows Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000 page In this window, you can configure the Supplier ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) In this window, you can configure the Supplier ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction Please note that certain settings, like the number series, cannot be modified once you begin using the workspace. ## What to do from this window + [Override Send to Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action/) + [Set Release document from Approval as the default action](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/set-release-document-from-approval-as-the-default-action/) + [Change the default action for the Invoice inbox](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/change-the-default-action-for-the-invoice-inbox/) + [Set up supplier document amount rounding](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/p2p/ap/ap101000-setup-document-rounding-task/) + [Set a supplier class as default](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-a-supplier-class-as-default/) ## The General information tab The general settings for the Supplier ledger workspace consist of posting and retention settings, ageing settings, and additional options for new documents. Furthermore, you can define the number series used for generating identifiers of supplier ledger documents and payments issued in response to supplier documents. You can use different number series for each document type or the same number series for multiple document types. In the latter case, the system gives all documents the same series numbers (identifiers), based on the order in which they were entered or generated, and two successive identifiers may refer to documents of different types. ### The Number series section
Element Description
Batch number series The number series used for batches generated by the Supplier ledger workspace.
Purchase invoice number series The number series used for purchase invoices.
Purchase credit note number series The number series used for purchase credit notes.
Credit adjustment number series The number series used for credit adjustments.
Payment number series The number series used for supplier ledger payments.
Price worksheet number series The number series used for price worksheets.
Inbox rule number series The number series used for Invoice inbox rules.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Post summary when updating the general ledger

When this check box is selected, supplier ledger documents will be posted to the General ledger with summarised row amounts if particular criteria are met.

That is, if multiple rows in a supplier ledger document specify the same account (and subaccount, if any) and branch, then in the general ledger batch, these rows will be combined into one row with the summarised amount.

You can post the summarised transaction amounts to an account (and subaccount) only if both the Post summary when updating the general ledger check box is selected in this window and the Summary option is specified for the account in the Post option column in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.

The general ledger batch can contain multiple documents if the General ledger consolidation functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Automatically post on release When this check box is selected, transactions will be automatically posted to the general ledger once they are released in the Supplier ledger workspace.
Activate migration mode

When this check box is selected, you can release documents in Customer ledger and Supplier ledger (both invoices and payments) without creating a general ledger batch in General ledger. The balance will still be added to the customer or supplier.

The Sales and Purchases workspaces cannot be used.
### The Ageing section You use this section to set up a Supplier ledger ageing schedule. By setting up three ageing periods (each of which is defined by the number of days outstanding or days past due), you can improve cash flow projections, because you can view outstanding supplier ledger documents and payments by ageing categories.
Element Description
Ageing period 1 The maximum number of days outstanding or past due for the document to be included in the first category.
Ageing period 2 The maximum number of days outstanding or past due for the document to be included in the second category. If the value here is greater than the Ageing period 1 value, documents from the first category are not included in the second category.
Ageing period 3 The maximum number of days outstanding or past due for the document to be included in the third category. If the value here is greater than the Ageing period 2 value, documents from the second category are not included in the third category.
### The Invoice inbox settings section
Element Description
Default action for invoice inbox

Here you can select the action that is by default taken when an invoice comes to the Invoice inbox.

The available actions are:

Hold - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Hold.

Release - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Open, if Automatically post on release is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) (this is the default action in Visma Net ).

Send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Balanced which is sent to Approval.

Pre-book - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released and requires an expense reclassification. This status is only used if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated.

Pre-book and send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released, which requires expense reclassification (this status is used only if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated), and which is then sent to Approval.

Exclude from processing - No purchase document is created or processed, it remains in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Move invoice into the next open/active period

Select this check box to stop all posting into Customer ledger and Supplier ledger at a specific date in each month. From this date there should not be any postings in the previous period in these workspaces. If you for some reason receive an invoice late so that the invoice date is in a period that is closed/inactive, it is not possible to process it from the Invoice inbox. In these cases, you can keep the invoice date and change the period to the next open/active period.

It will not be possible to move invoices from one year to another, only within periods in the same accounting year.
Use external item ID When this option is selected, the column External item ID is available in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window as well as option Match item during invoice import in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. It allows the system to do matching of items during invoice import to the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) if the Match item during invoice import option is active on the supplier as well as use external item ID.
Use due date from terms settings Select this check box to set the due date for purchase invoices coming into the Invoice inbox based on the credit term on the supplier, instead of the due date from the XML file.
Override payment date with invoice date for credit notes

When this option is selected and a credit note is received from AutoInvoice, the due/payment date of the credit note will be set to the due date of the invoice.

When this option is not selected, the imported credit notes will have their payment date according to the imported XML file.

When you create a credit note manually, the payment date is always the same as the invoice date.
Supplier validation

When receiving invoices from AutoInvoice in Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), you can select here the details based on which the supplier information can be easily updated, if the invoice includes changed/different information than now registered on the supplier. The options are:

  • Supplier name
  • Org.no and VAT no.
  • Payment information
  • Address
  • Email and web
  • Telephone no.
### The Data entry section
Element Description
Default supplier class ID The supplier class to be used as the default supplier class. When you create a new supplier class by using the Supplier classes (AP201000) window, the settings defined for the class specified here will be inserted in to the appropriate fields. You can change any of these settings.
Combine expense sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the expense subaccount to be used for non-stock items in data entry windows in the Supplier ledger workspace.

To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select a source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

C
The subaccount associated with the company branch
E
The subaccount associated with the employee
I
The subaccount associated with the non-stock item
L
The subaccount associated with the supplier location
P
The subaccount associated with the project. This option is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
T
The subaccount associated with the project task. This option is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For a segment, the characters designating each option are repeated as many times there are characters in the segment.
Hold documents on entry When this check box is selected, new documents will have the On hold status by default.
Use orig. invoice date on payment terms When this check box is selected and the original invoice date of the purchase invoice is changed, the dates in the Due date, Cash discount date, and Pay date fields of the purchase invoice will be calculated based on the original invoice date.
Activate Pay separately from Purchase invoices and Suppliers

When the check box is not selected (the default):

When the check box is selected:
Require approval of invoices before paying

When this check box is selected, approval of invoices is required before invoices can be paid.

This option is available if the Manual approval of purchase invoices is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Enable early payments, no check on invoice date When this check box is selected, you can create payments for the invoices posted to future periods and dates.
Validate document totals on entry When this check box is selected, the Amount field is displayed in the top part of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window (if selected). To save a document with the Balanced status, you must enter the document total in this field after reviewing the document.
Validate VAT totals on entry When this check box is selected, the VAT amount field is displayed in the top part of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window, where you enter the total VAT amount manually in the document.
If the amount is zero, use the application amount When this check box is selected and you save a supplier ledger payment with no payment amount specified in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window, the system automatically specifies a payment amount that is equal to the application amount. If this check box is cleared (the default value), the system will save the payment with zero payment amount if the Hold check box is selected, or report that the document is out of balance if the Hold check box is cleared.
Require supplier reference When this check box is selected, you must fill in the Supplier ref. field in data entry windows in the Supplier ledger, VAT, and Purchases workspaces. This check box also controls the Ext. ref. number field in the Journal vouchers (GL304000) window of the General ledger workspace.
Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number When this check box is selected, it indicates to the system that an error should be generated when a new document is created with a value in the Supplier ref. field that has already been used in the system.
Suggest applications for purchase invoices before release With this setting you can define that the system suggests the automatic application of credit notes and prepayments for purchase invoices.
### The Retainage settings section This functionality is available if the **Retainage support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Mass release of retainage invoices When this check box is selected, all retainage invoices will be automatically released.
Create and release retainage invoices individually When this check box is selected, retainage invoices will be individually created and released, not as an automatic mass operation.
Copy supplier ref. from original invoice to retainage invoice When this check box is selected, the supplier reference of the original invoice will be copied as a reference to the retainage invoice.
Require one project per document When this check box is selected, each document needs to be connected to a project.
### The Write-off section
Element Description
Write-off limit The maximum balance of a document that may be a subject to the selected write-off operation.
Reason code A reason code that defines an account, subaccount and description to be used for writing off balances for supplier invoices. If the reason code has assigned a cash account, you need to change it to a different account in the Reason codes (CS211000) window to allow you to post write-off transactions.
### The VAT recalculation settings section
Element Description
Purchase debit note description The default description to be used for purchase debit notes that are generated for documents that were paid early and that adjust the VAT and taxable amounts.
### The Expense Inbox section This section is shown only if the Expense integration has been activated.
Element Description
VAT category ID A VAT category for the suspense line. This should be a category that does not affect the VAT report.
Suspense account

An account on which the suspense line is registered.

The description of the suspense line shown on the invoice is built up from the external claim ID from Expense, the internal claim ID from Visma Net, and the claim description (example: 12345,75642: Travel to Helsinki).
Suspense subaccount A subaccount to which the suspense line will be registered.
Paid by company account

An account on which the suspense line is registered, when the expense receipt is marked as paid by the company. The description of the suspense line, as displayed on the invoice, consists of several elements: the external claim ID from Expense, the internal claim ID from Visma Net, and the claim description.

For example, a description might appear as follows: “3374700,000263: Travel to Stockholm.”
Paid by company subaccount A subaccount on which the suspense line is registered, when the expense receipt is marked as paid by the company. See also the description for the field above, Paid by company account.
### The Approval settings section
Element Description
Subaccount editing in Approval

You can select the method to be used for editing subaccounts in the document editor in Approval.

The options are:

Segment columns
– Displays a column for each segment of the subaccount. You can select a segment value for each segment by searching in the drop-down list.
Single column
– Displays a single column for a subaccount. You can select a segment value for each segment from the pop-up window.
Release document from Approval When this check box is selected and you send an invoice to Approval and approve it, the invoice comes back from Approval with the status Approved and released.
#### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Override payment date with current date When this check box is selected, the payment date of the invoices is replaced by the current date in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. So the payment is done immediately instead of a future date, regardless of the due date of the invoices.
Always take cash discount When this is activated, discount will be taken also for documents with the cash discount expired. The cash discount amount is calculated using the payment terms associated with the supplier.
Show open cash discount amounts When this is activated, invoices for which only the amount of cash discount is still open will be displayed.
Create one payment with invoices having the same payment date (when not using the Pay separately option)

With this option selected and when selecting several invoices in one payment for one supplier, the due date is considered for each invoice and the earliest due date will be the payment date in AutoPay.

Note

If the Pay separately option is selected, the system will create one payment for each invoice.
Process automatically invoices and credit notes where amount to pay is 0 When a credit note is created with the intention to match the invoice amount, you have to apply the two documents to each other manually. When you activate this option, the system will match and process the invoices and credit notes where the amount to pay equals to zero.
## The Reporting settings tab The **Reporting settings** tab displays a list of predefined mailings for sending purchase orders and other documents to suppliers electronically via email. The mailing settings on this tab serve as the default values for supplier classes, which then become the default values for individual supplier mailings. The current version of Visma Net provides only one mailing for suppliers, the **PURCHASE ORDER** mailing. ### The Default sources table
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique identifier of the mailing.
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report The supplier ledger report to be used by default as the body or attachment of the email, if a report is used rather than an email template.
Notification template

The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing, if a template is used rather than a report.

CAUTION: For each mailing, you can use only one of the options as the means of communication: a report or a template.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no preferences have been specified for a particular recipient in the Suppliers (AP303000) window (for supplier contacts). Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, it indicates that this mailing is active. Emails will be generated only for active mailings.
### The Default recipients table You use the **Default recipients** table, described in the following table, to view and modify the list of default types of recipients for the selected mailing.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails:

Primary
A primary contact of the supplier.
Remittance
A remittance contact of the supplier.
Shipping
A shipping contact of the supplier.
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the documents of specific supplier classes or suppliers, or is otherwise associated with either of them.
Contact ID The specific contact. You can select a particular recipient only if you have selected Employee as the Contact type. The employee, if one is selected, will receive emails on behalf of all suppliers.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent to the recipients of this type. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, it indicates that the contact of this type is active. Only active recipients receive the emails generated for this mailing.
Bcc When this check box is selected, it indicates that the contact of this type will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails.
## The Price/discount settings tab ### The Price maintenance section
Element Description
Supplier price update The method to be used to automatically update supplier prices based on supplier documents.
Load supplier prices by alternative item ID When this check box is selected, you can specify prices in supplier price worksheets by the alternative IDs of items, so that the system will find and populate appropriate item IDs automatically. The option is available if the Advanced Logistics group of features is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
### The Price retention section
Element Description
Retention type

The way the history of prices will be retained. Select one of the following options:

Last price:
The last defined price is kept.
Fixed number of months:
The history of price changes is kept for the number of months specified in the Number of months field. The period is calculated back from the current system date.
Number of months The number of months the history of price changes should be kept. This field is available if the Fixed number of months option is selected in the Retention type field.
### The Discounts section
Element Description
Apply quantity discounts to

The way the system applies discounts defined by quantity.

Select one of the following options:

Document line UoM
The system applies the discounts to the quantity in the document line’s unit of measure (UoM).
Base UoM
The system converts the quantity in the document line’s UoM to the quantity in the base UoM and applies the discounts based on the calculated base quantity.
Approval document history (AP40104S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-history-ap40104s page In this window, you can view the details of any selected purchase document and its approval history. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approval document history (AP40104S) In this window, you can view the details of any selected purchase document and its approval history. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Pending approver The name of the pending approver of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Approver The name of the approver of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Type The type of the document.
Approval status The approval status of the document.
Document status The status of the document.
Supplier The supplier of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Terms The terms of payment of the document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Detail total The total amount of the document excluding VAT.
VAT taxable total The taxable amount of the document in total.
VAT exempt total The exempt amount of the document in total.
VAT total The total amount of VAT on the document.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax on the document.
Balance The total balance of the document.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference of the document.
Amount The total amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount selected for the document.
## The Document history table
Column Description
Approval status The approval status of the document.
Comment The comment entered when approving the document.
Pending approvers The approvers whose approval is still pending.
Approvers The approvers of the document.
Date The date of the approval transaction.
Approval document line history (AP40105S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-document-line-history-ap40105s page In this window, you can view the approval history of any selected purchase document by line. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approval document line history (AP40105S) In this window, you can view the approval history of any selected purchase document by line. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Ref. no. Select the reference number of the purchase document whose line approval history you want to view.
Line number Select the line of the purchase document whose approval history you want to view.
Account The account on the document.
Subaccount The subaccount on the document.
Approval status The approval status of the document.
Only last item per line Select this check box to view the last status per line only.
Detail total The total amount of the document excluding VAT.
VAT taxable total The taxable amount of the document in total.
VAT exempt total The amount of the document that is exempt to VAT.
VAT total The total amount of VAT on the document.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax on the document.
Balance The total balance of the document.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the document.
Amount The total amount of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount selected for the document.
## The Document line history table
Column Description
Line number The number of the document line.
Approval status The approval status of the document line.
Pending approvers The approvers whose approval the document line is pending.
Approvers The approvers assigned to the document line.
Detail total The total amount of the document line excluding VAT.
Account The account on the document line.
Subaccount The subaccount on the document line.
Currency The currency of the document line.
Date The date of the document line.
Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-invoices-approval-ap50200s page You can use this window to approve Supplier ledger documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) You can use this window to approve Supplier ledger documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) for payment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to approve Supplier ledger documents (invoices, adjustments, and prepayments) for payment. Only documents with the **Open** status are displayed on the list. You can select documents for approval using various criteria. If the **Require approval of invoices prior to payment** check box is not selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, supplier ledger documents are automatically approved for payment once they are released, and this window is not needed. ## What to do from this window + [Approve purchase invoices for payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment/) ## The window toolbar
Column Description
Send to Approval Click this button to send the selected lines to Approval.
Send all to Approval Click this button to send all displayed lines to Approval
Cancel Approval request Click this button to cancel the approval request for the selected lines.
Cancel all Approval requests Click this button to cancel the approval request for the all displayed lines.
## The top part
Element Description
Approval status

The status of the document in Approval.

The options are: New, Cancelled, Sent to Approval, Received in Approval, Pending, Rejected, Approved, Active workflow, and Error. View all displays all documents regardless of their status.
Document status

The status of the document itself.

The options are: Balanced, Printed, and Pre-released. View all displays all documents regardless of their status.
Due date less than or equal to The latest due date for the documents to be displayed.
Initial approver The initial approver of the documents to be displayed.
Supplier The supplier of the documents to be displayed.
Show only invoices missing attachments Select this check box to only show documents that are missing attachment (required for approval processing).
## The table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Button Description
Approval history This button redirects you to the Approval document history (AP40104S) window for the selected line.
Approval line history This button redirects you to the Approval document line history (AP40105S) window for the selected line.
Column Description
Type The type of the document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the document.
Approval status The status of the approval process.
Document status The status of the document.
Initial approver The initial approver of the document.
Supplier ref. The external number of the document (the number of the original purchase invoice) included for reference.
Supplier The identifier of the applicable supplier.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Pay date The pay date of the document, which the system assigns to the document on its approval. If the document is approved through this window, the pay date is the date when the document was approved.
Due date The due date of the supplier document.
Cash discount date The date when the cash discount from the supplier is available for the document.
Balance The document’s amount after the cash discount is taken.
Cash discount balance The amount of the cash discount taken.
Currency The currency of the document.
Approval Inbox (AP502010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approval-inbox-ap502010 section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approval Inbox (AP502010) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process The green icon-confirmation icon is displayed in the window toolbar if the operation has completed successfully. The red icon-error icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met. Point to the red icon to view the error message.
Process all Click this to process all messages in the window table.
## The top part
Element Description
Inbox status

If you want to see messages that have a specific status, select one of the following values. The default status is New.

+

  • New - Displays all messages with the status New.
  • Handled - Displays all handled messages.
  • Error - Displays all messages with the status Error.
  • Skipped - Displays all messages that have been skipped.
Payload type
All
Displays messages with all payload types
Invoice
Displays invoice type messages
Time card
Displays time card type messages
Expense
Displays expense type messages
Employee/Supplier The number of the employee or supplier whose messages you want to see.
Ref. no. starts with To find messages with a certain reference number, type the first numbers of the reference.
New The number of new messages with the filter options.
Skipped The number of skipped messages with the filter options.
Error The number of erroneous messages with the filter options.
## The table
Button Description
Payload type The type of the payload, according to the selection in the top part.
Message type The type of the message.
Ref. no. The reference number of the message.
Employee/Supplier The employee or supplier connected with the message.
Created by The user who has created the message.
Inbox status The status of the message in Inbox.
Inbox status reason The reason for the status of the message in Inbox.
Message creation date The date when the message was created. Displayed after failed processing attempts.
Last modified date The date when the message was last modified.
Retry count The number of attempts the system tries to process the message.
Creation date The date when the message was created.
Created by The use who created the message.
Last modified by The user who last modified the message.
Message ID The ID of the message.
Message content The content of the message.
Document version The version of the document.
Document system ID The system ID of the document.

Related pages

Tasks

 Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-purchase-invoices-for-payment-ap502000 page You can use this window to approve supplier documents for payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve purchase invoices for payment (AP502000) You can use this window to approve supplier documents for payment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Only documents with the **Open** status appear on the list. + You can select the documents for approval using various criteria. If the **Require approval of purchase invoices prior to payment** check box is not selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window, documents are automatically approved for payment once they are released, and this window is not needed. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display on the list.
Element Description
Selection date The date of approving invoices for payment.
Supplier class The supplier class for which documents should be displayed. If you select no supplier class, information for all suppliers that meet other selection criteria will be displayed.
Supplier The particular supplier for which documents should be displayed. If you select no supplier, information on all suppliers meeting other selection criteria will be displayed.
Currency The currency of the documents to be approved for payment.
Show approved for payment When this check box is selected, you will see documents that have been approved for payment.
Show not approved for payment When this check box is selected, you will see documents that are not currently approved for payment.
Pay date within x days When this check box is selected, documents will be displayed in the table if they should be paid during the number of days you specify in the unlabelled field.
Due date within x days When this check box is selected, documents will be displayed in the table if they are due in fewer than the number of days you specify in the unlabelled field.
Cash discount expires within x days When this check box is selected, documents will be displayed in the table if their discount expires in fewer than the number of days you specify in the unlabelled field.
Approved for payment A read-only field showing the total amount on documents approved for payment.
Documents total A read-only field showing the total on all documents listed in the window.
## The table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the Selection area.
Column Description
Type The type of the supplier document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the supplier document. Click the link to navigate to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window to display the document.
Description The description provided for the document.
Supplier no. The identifier of the applicable supplier.
Supplier name The supplier’s name.
Supplier bank account The bank account of the supplier.
Pay separately When this check box is selected, the document should be paid for separately.
Payment date The payment date of the document, which the system assigns to the document on its approval. If the document is approved through this window, the payment date is the date when the document was approved.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash discount date The date when the cash discount from the supplier is available for the document.
Balance The amount of the document amount after the cash discount is taken.
Cash discount balance The amount of the cash discount taken.
Currency The currency of the supplier document.
Payment location A supplier location associated with the document.
Payment method The payment method used. Payment methods can be created in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account The cash account selected for the document.
Supplier ref. The external number of the document (the number of the original supplier invoice) included for reference.

Related pages

Tasks

 Batch payments (AP305000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/batch-payments-ap305000 page You can use this window to select a batch of payments for processing and to export the payments to a file by using the export scenario specified for the payment method in the window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch payments (AP305000) You can use this window to select a batch of payments for processing and to export the payments to a file by using the export scenario specified for the payment method in the window. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction > [!NOTE] > You can view and modify outgoing payment batches only in the [Process payments (AP50301S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s/) window on the **Payment status** tab - Details view. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Approve payments in AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/approve-payments-in-autopay/) + [Send outgoing payments to AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-payments-to-autopay/) + [Send outgoing refunds to AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/send-outgoing-refunds-to-autopay/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Send payments Sends the selected payments to the bank.
Re-sign payment Resigns the payments.
Approve in AutoPay Approves the payments in AutoPay and sends them to the bank.
## The top part By using the elements in the top part, you can select a batch of payments and view its details.
Element Description
Batch no. The batch number of the batch of payments. You can select a batch number to view (and act upon) a particular batch.
Status The status of the batch, which the system assigns automatically: On hold, Released, or Posted.
Hold When this check box is selected, the batch is on hold and cannot be exported.
Batch date The date when the batch was created.
Document ref. Any document that holds information about the batch as required by your company’s internal policies.
Cash account The cash account used for payment.
Payment method The payment method associated with the cash account. Only payment methods that allow batch creation appear on the list. Payment methods are defined in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Bank The bank that will process the batch of payments.
Batch serial no. The unique number automatically assigned to the batch.
Description A description of the batch, helping you to identify it.
Batch total The total amount for the batch, calculated as the sum of all payment amounts.
Upload time The time it took to upload the batch.
AutoPay status The status of the batch in AutoPay.
## The Supplier payments table This table contains a list of payment documents added to the batch.
Column Description
Type The type of payment document.
Ref. no. The payment’s reference number, which was automatically generated by the system. Click this number to open the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can view the details of the payment.
Supplier The ID of the supplier specified on the document.
Supplier name The name of the supplier specified on the document.
SWIFT/BIC The SWIFT/BIC number of the supplier.
Supplier bank account The bank account of the supplier specified on the document.
Location The supplier’s location.
Remittance contact The contact person connected with the document.
Payment date The date of payment.
Status The status of payment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Description The description provided for the payment.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment associated with the payment method.
Payment amount The payment amount.
Payment amount (currency) The amount of the payment in currency.
AutoPay status The status of the document in AutoPay.
Used creditor’s BIC/SWIFT The BIC/SWIFT account of the creditor used for payment.
Creditor account used The account of the creditor used for payment.
Change supplier details (AP50107S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/change-supplier-details-ap50107s page Through this window, you can change the details and VAT zone of any selected supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change supplier details (AP50107S) Through this window, you can change the details and VAT zone of any selected supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this to change the VAT zone of the supplier you have selected in the table.
Process all Click this to change the VAT zone of all suppliers that are displayed in the table, according to the selections you make in the top part of the window.
## The top part
Element Description
Supplier class The suppliers included in the supplier class you select here will be displayed in the table part.
Status The suppliers whose status is accordant with the status you select here will be displayed in the table.
VAT zone ID The ID of the VAT zone for the suppliers you want to list in the table.
Change VAT zone Select this check box when you want to change the VAT ID of a supplier/suppliers.
VAT zone The new VAT zone for the selected supplier/suppliers.
## The table
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier whose VAT zone you want to change.
Supplier name The name of the supplier whose VAT zone you want to change.
VAT zone The current VAT zone of the supplier.
Address The address of the supplier.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier.
City The city of the supplier.
Country The country of the supplier.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the supplier.
Location ID The location of the supplier.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters, which would be used to direct the letter to the proper person if the letter is not addressed to any specific person. Inherited from the supplier details in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Phone 1 The phone number of the supplier.
Email The email of the supplier.
Last purchase The date when the last purchase was made from the supplier.
Status The status of the supplier.
Supplier class The supplier class to which the supplier belongs.
Close financial periods (AP506000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/close-financial-periods-ap506000 page You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Supplier ledger workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close financial periods (AP506000) You can use this window to close active financial periods in the Supplier ledger workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can close a financial period in the General ledger workspace only if it has been closed in the Supplier ledger, Customer ledger, Cash management, Inventory, and Fixed assets workspaces. + When you close a given financial period, all preceding active periods will be closed as well (if they have not already been closed). Generally, posting transactions to closed periods is not allowed. To allow posting to closed periods, select the **Allow posting to closed periods** option in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Close a financial period in Supplier ledger](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/close-a-financial-period-in-supplier-ledger/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close periods

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

The green OK icon appears in the window toolbar if the closing operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.
Unreleased documents Opens the All unreleased documents report to display open documents for the period (documents that have the On hold or Balanced status).
Prepare for closing

Opens the Prepare for closing (AP50700S) window.

Initiates the process of closing the selected financial periods.

The green OK icon appears in the window toolbar if the closing operation was completed successfully. The red icon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some necessary conditions were not met.
## The table The table displays all currently active financial periods for the earliest year that has active periods. You can select one or more periods for closing and then click **Close periods**.
Column Description
Period The identifier of the financial period.
Description The description of the financial period.
Active When this check box is selected, the financial period is active.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create batch payments (AP505000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/create-batch-payments-ap505000 page In this window, you select payments by their cash account and payment method in the top part, and view the list of payments that meet the criteria in the table. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create batch payments (AP505000) In this window, you select payments by their cash account and payment method in the top part, and view the list of payments that meet the criteria in the table. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction In this window, you select payments by their cash account and payment method in the top part, and view the list of payments that meet the criteria in the table. You can then process all listed payments or only those you select. ## What to do from this window + [Create batch payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-batch-payments/) + [Create outgoing payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-outgoing-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Generates payments for the selected payment documents, and displays the payments to be printed one by one.
Process all Generates payments for all the listed documents and displays the payments to be printed one by one.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to select payments to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Payment method The method of payment associated with the payments you want to process. Payment methods are created in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account The cash account to be used as a source account for payment.
Currency A read-only field that displays the currency of the cash account.
Next payment ref.

Shows the next available payment reference for the payment method.

The system generates the next reference number as the previous number incremented by 1, but you may type another number.
GL balance A read-only field that shows the balance of the cash account calculated based on the released general ledger transactions.
Available balance A read-only field displaying the balance of the cash account calculated in accordance with the options selected in the Receipts to add to available balances and Disbursements to deduct from available balances sections in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.
Selection total A read-only field whose value is the total amount of the selected payment documents.
Number of payments A read-only field whose value is the total number of selected payment documents.
## The table This table displays a list of payment documents selected by the cash account and payment method specified in the top part.
Column Description
Payment ref. The payment ID, which was automatically generated by the system or manually entered as an external reference when the payment was saved.
Payment date The due date of the payment.
Type The type of the document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment automatically generated by the system, following the number series assigned to the particular document type.
Supplier no. The supplier specified on the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The supplier’s name.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Payment amount The amount after the cash discount was taken.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Payment terms (CS206500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500 page You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment terms (CS206500) You can use this window to define multiple types of payment terms that are commonly used by suppliers in their relations with your company and by your company in its relations with customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Payment terms include the instalment option (one payment or multiple instalments), the payment schedule, and the terms for a cash discount (for only the single instalment option). Also, payment terms can be used as a schedule for overdue charges. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The General information section You use the elements in this area to define a new set of payment terms and its settings, or to select an existing set of terms and view its settings.
Element Description
Terms ID The unique identifier for these payment terms. The alphanumeric string may contain up to 10 characters.
Description A detailed description of the payment terms. This alphanumeric string may contain up to 30 characters.
Visible to

The target audience for which the terms are visible, which can be one of the following:

All
The terms can be assigned to both suppliers and customers.
Suppliers
The terms can be assigned to suppliers only.
Customers
The terms can be assigned to customers only.
Disabled
The terms are removed from the selection lists for both suppliers and customers.
## The Due day settings section
Element Description
Due date type

The method of due date calculation. The following options are available:

Fixed number of days
The payment is due a fixed number of days after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Day of next month
The payment is due on a particular day of the next month; you should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
End of the month
The payment is due at the end of the current month.
End of next month
The payment is due at the end of the next month.
Day of the month
The payment is due on a particular day of the current month. You should also specify the day of the month as Due day 1.
Fixed number of days starting next month
The payment is due a fixed number of days starting the next month after a sale or purchase. You should specify the number of days as Due day 1.
Custom
With this option, you specify two due days that could be used; which due day is to be used depends on the time interval set for the document’s date. For example: You may specify one due day for documents issued in the first part of the month, and the second due day for documents issued in the second part of the month. You use the remaining elements in the Due date settings section to set the due days and their respective date ranges.
Move due date if on the weekend If the due date on the invoice falls onto a weekend (Saturday or Sunday), use the options in the drop-down to calculate it to the Friday before the due date or the Monday after it. With the option Keep the exact date the due date remains unchanged.
Due day 1 The first due day, which is used with certain Due date type options. Specify the number of days if the Fixed number of days option is selected, the day of the month if the Day of next month or Day of the month option is selected, and the first due day if the Custom option is selected.
Day from 1 The start day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 1 The end day of the date range for documents due on the first due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Due day 2 The second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day from 2 The start day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
Day to 2 The end day of the date range for documents due on the second due day; this element is used with the Custom option only.
## The Cash discount settings section In this section, you provide the details of the cash discount included with this set of payment terms. You can specify a cash discount only if the **Single** instalment type is selected in the **Instalments settings** section.
Element Description
Discount type

The method of calculating the cash discount period, which can be one of the following options:

Fixed number of days
If this option is selected, the discount is available a set number of days after the document date. In the Discount day field, you should also specify the number of days.
Day of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available until a particular day in the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the next month.
End of month
When you select this option, the discount is available through the end of the month (that is, the month of the document date).
End of next month
With this option selected, the discount is available through the end of the next month (that is, the month after the document date).
Day of the month
If this option is selected, the discount is available until the particular day of the month when the document was issued. In the Discount day field, you should specify the day of the month.
Fixed number of days starting next month
When you select this option, the discount is available a set number of days starting the next month (that is, the month after the document date). In the Discount day field, you should specify the number of days.
Discount day The number of days or the particular day of the month, depending on the Discount type; this field is unavailable for some options.
Discount (%) The percent of the discount.
Delay days With the amount of days defined here, the cash discount will be considered when registering the payment on the invoice. For example, the cash discount date is set to the 1st of the month, the Delay days field has value 2. You register the payment on the 3rd of the month, and cash discount amount will be used.
## The Instalment settings section By using these elements, you can define how documents should be paid: in a single payment or in multiple instalments. If the amount is due in multiple instalments, you can also specify a percentage and a due date for each instalment; the due date for the first instalment is specified in the **Due day settings** section. Discounts are not available for multiple-instalment payment terms.
Element Description
Instalment type

The type of instalment, which can be one of the following options:

Single
If you select this option, other elements in this section become unavailable. You should also select the due date and other options for the single payment.
Multiple
If you select this option, payment is due in multiple instalments. You should also specify the method, frequency, and schedule of the instalments.
Number of instalments The specific number of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method.
Instalment frequency

The frequency of instalments; this field is unavailable if the Split by percent in table option is selected as the Instalment method. The following options are available:

Weekly
The second instalment will be a week after the first one, and so on.
Monthly
The second instalment will be a month after the first one, and so on.
Semi-monthly
The second instalment will be a half of a month after the first one, and so on.
Instalment method

The method by which the amounts of instalments are calculated. Select one of the following options:

Equal parts
The document total amount (with all the applicable taxes added) is divided into equal parts. The schedule of payments is defined by the due date, instalment frequency, and number of instalments specified.
VAT in the first instalment
The amount of the document (its total before taxes) is divided into equal parts, and the VAT amount is added to the first instalment. The schedule of payments is defined by the instalment frequency and number of instalments specified.
Split by percent in table
The instalment amounts are calculated according to the percentages specified for each instalment in the Instalments schedule table below this section.
## The Instalments schedule table
Column Description
Days The number of days from the due date on which a particular instalment is due. You must use an integer between 0 (due date) and 31.
Percent The percent of a document total. As you add a new instalment, the percent is automatically adjusted to make all instalments total 100 percent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Export batch payments (AP50560S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/export-batch-payments-ap50560s page In this window, you can export the batch payments connected with any selected cash account or batch having not exported payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Export batch payments (AP50560S) In this window, you can export the batch payments connected with any selected cash account or batch having not exported payments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Export batch payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/export-batch-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Export payment Click to export the batch payment selected in the table.
Export all payments Click to export all batch payments displayed in the table.
## The top part
Element Description
Cash account To view batch payments with a certain cash account, select the cash account here.
Batch no. To view the batch payments with a certain batch number, select the batch number here.
## The table
Column Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Cash account The cash account of the payment.
Payment method The payment method of the payment.
Batch date The date of the batch in which the payment is included.
Description The description of the payment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Batch total The total amount of the batch in which the payment is included.
AutoPay status

The status of the payment in AutoPay. The options are:

  • Exported
  • Not exported
  • Export error
  • Pending signing
  • New
  • Cancelled
  • Approved
  • Sending to bank
  • Error sending to bank
  • Accepted by bank
  • Cancelled in bank
  • Rejected by bank
  • Paid
  • Completed
  • Error
  • Unknown response
  • Handled manually
  • Manually created
Generate VAT purchase debit notes (AP504500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-vat-purchase-debit-notes-ap504500 page In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which the system has applied a value-added tax reduced based on cash discounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate VAT purchase debit notes (AP504500) In this window, you can view the list of documents that were paid in full within the cash discount period and to which the system has applied a value-added tax reduced based on cash discounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction For these taxes, in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, VAT has been selected in the **VAT type** field and **Reduces taxable amount on early payment** has been selected in the **Cash discount** field. When you generate the VAT purchase credit notes, the system releases them, applies the cash discount amounts to the appropriate documents, and closes the documents. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Click this to generate a purchase debit note from the selected document.
Process all Click this to generate purchase debit notes from all the documents in the table.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, described in the following table, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display on the list.
Element Description
Date The date of the documents you want to process.
Branch The branch to which the document belongs. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches.
Supplier The supplier connected with the documents you want to process.
Consolidate purchase credit notes by supplier When this is selected, the system creates one consolidated purchase credit note per supplier.
Purchase credit note date When the Consolidate purchase credit notes by supplier check box is selected, you can select the date that the consolidated credit note gets.
Period When the Consolidate purchase credit notes by supplier check box is selected, the consolidated credit note will be created to the period selected here. It has to match the date selected above.
## The table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch to which the document belongs. Select a branch, or leave the field blank to view information about all branches.
Supplier The supplier of the VAT purchase debit note.
Document type The specific type of the document, Purchase invoice or Credit adjustment.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Doc. date The date when the document was created.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The amount of the VAT purchase.
Cash discount The cash discount given for the document.
Payment terms The payment terms used on the document.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the specific payment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Generate recurring transactions (AP504000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/generate-recurring-transactions-ap504000 page This window allows you to execute one or multiple schedules that automate the creation of supplier ledger documents based on predefined templates. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate recurring transactions (AP504000) This window allows you to execute one or multiple schedules that automate the creation of supplier ledger documents based on predefined templates. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + The schedules you want to run are filtered based on the date you specify in the **Execution date** field. + You also need to define the condition that will stop the schedules from running. When you run a schedule, the system uses the original scheduled documents as templates to create similar documents. + For each executed schedule, once the necessary documents have been generated, the system updates the **Last executed** date. + No matter how many times you run the schedule, documents will be generated only as required by the schedule. ## What to do from this window + [Generate a recurring invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-a-recurring-invoice/) + [Generate recurring supplier transactions](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/generate-recurring-supplier-transactions/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run Runs the schedules you have selected (by using the unlabelled check boxes in the table) and generates documents with the Open status.
Run all Runs all schedules in the table.
New schedule Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window, from which you can create a new schedule.
## The top part In this area, you specify the criteria that the system uses for selecting the schedules to be loaded to the table and determining when the schedule executions should be stopped.
Element Description
Execution date The date that the system uses to filter the schedules to be loaded to the table. Schedules with a next execution date that is on or before the date you set here will be included. If you want to see all schedules, leave this field empty. By default, it displays the current business date.
Stop on execution date An option button indicating that the date you specify in the Execution date field will be used as the date when the system stops running the schedules.
Stop after number of executions An option button that allows you to set a limit on how many times the system runs schedules. Specify the desired number of schedule executions in the adjacent field. Once this limit is reached, the system will stop running the schedules automatically.
## The table This table contains the list of active schedules with due dates in the specified date range. Use the check boxes to select schedules for processing.
Column Description
Schedule ID

The schedule’s unique identifier.

Click the number to open the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window as a dialog window to view the details of the selected schedule.
Description The user-defined description of the schedule.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date The expiration date for the schedule.
Executed (times) The number of times the documents attached to the schedule were generated.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule may be executed.
Next execution The date when the documents should be generated next.
Last executed The date when the documents were last generated.
Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s section In this window, you can view your invoices by their status and, for example, view invoice details and update supplier information. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) In this window, you can view your invoices by their status and, for example, view invoice details and update supplier information. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## What to do from this window + [Correct invoices with errors](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/correct-invoices-with-errors/) + [Process new invoices from AutoInvoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/process-new-invoices-from-autoinvoice/) + [Connect a supplier to a blocked invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/connect-a-supplier-to-a-blocked-invoice/) + [Create a new supplier for a blocked invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/create-a-new-supplier-for-a-blocked-invoice/) + [Update supplier details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/update-supplier-details/) + [Rematch invoices with unrecognised supplier details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/rematch-invoices-with-unrecognised-supplier-details/) + [View invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices/) + [View invoice details](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoice-details/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process The green icon-confirmation icon in the window toolbar signifies a successful operation. Conversely, the red icon-error icon indicates that the operation was cancelled due to unmet required conditions. Hover over the red icon to view the error message. Note that this option is unavailable if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.
Process all

Click this to process all documents in the window table.

This option is not available if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.
Inquiries The inquiries connected with this window.
Fix attachments Click this to fix the attachments errors in the selected invoice or invoices. This option is available only if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.
Fix all attachments Click this to fix the attachments errors in all invoices. This option is available only if the selected Inbox status is Attachment errors.
## The top part
Element Description
Branch ID The ID of the branch you want to see supplier documents for.
Inbox status

To see documents having a specific status, select one of the following values. The default status is New.

+

  • New - Displays all documents with the status New.
  • Blocked - Displays documents that come from suppliers who are not registered in Visma Net.
  • Error - Displays all documents with the status Error.
  • Attachment errors - Displays all documents that have attachment errors.
Supplier The name of the supplier you want to see documents for.
Invoice date The invoice date of the document, which you can select from the calendar.
Show only excluded documents When this check box is selected, only excluded documents are displayed in the table.
Please KYC verify the company for receiving invoices from AutoInvoice in the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window.

As of 1.7.2022, all new customers and branches wanting to use AutoInvoice for sending and receiving invoices, will need to sign the KYC verification agreement from AutoInvoice. You will see this message if you have not done the KYC verification yet.

In the AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S) window, the The AutoInvoice setting section, you can verify your company by clicking on the Verify KYC button and filling in a company signatory’s email address. The signatory will receive an email which contains a link and password to access Visma Sign, where the signatory can view and sign the agreement. After completion of the process, your company will be able to use AutoInvoice.
## The table
Button Description
View details Click here to see further details about a specific document in the table. The document opens in the Invoice details window, where you can see its PDF version and also the document details and the approval information.
Create supplier Click here to create a new supplier for the document.
Update supplier Click here to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with changed details from the incoming document.
View rules Click here to view the Invoice inbox rules that are defined to the supplier of the selected invoice. The button opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window with the Inbox rules view.
Ignore supplier validation Click here if you do not want to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with the new information from the incoming document.
Validate manually Click here to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net manually with the new information from the incoming document.
Preview invoice Click here to see how the invoice would look, if it was created with these rules. The invoice will not be actually created.
Column Description
Branch The ID of the company branch.
Edited This check box is selected if the document has been edited.
Origin How the invoice has been imported to Visma Net. The options are Scanned and Electronic.You can change the document type of inbox documents whose origin is scanned.
Action

The processing action planned for the listed documents. The available actions are:

Hold - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Hold.

Release - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Open, if Automatically post on release is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) (this is the default action in Visma Net ).

Send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Balanced which is sent to Approval.

Pre-book - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released and requires an expense reclassification. This status is only used if the Expense reclassification functionality is activated in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Pre-book and send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released, which requires expense reclassification (this status is available if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), and which is then sent to Approval.

Exclude from processing - No purchase document is created or processed, it remains in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Note

You can set default action for every invoice in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window by selecting the desired action in the Default action for invoice inbox field.
Inbox status

The status of the document after arrival or last processing in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Statuses before processing/editing

New
– A new document that has been received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Blocked
A new document received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) from a supplier without a record in Visma Net

Statuses after processing/editing

Sent for approval
– The document was processed and sent to Approval. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) (AP301000).
Validated
The document was processed and validated. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Manually validated
The document was manually validated. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Deleted
– The document was deleted. It is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Error
– When the document was processed, the system returned an error.
Document status

The status of the document. The status of an existing document can be one of the following:

On hold
The document is On hold.
Balanced
The document has the status Balanced.
Voided
View only documents with the status Voided.
Scheduled
The document has the status Scheduled. You can schedule documents in the Purchase invoices (AP301000 window.
Open
The document has the status Open.
Closed
The document has the status Closed.
Printed
The document has the status Printed.
Pre-released
The document has the status Pre-released. Documents get this status if you have clicked Pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Pending approval
The document has the status Pending approval.
Rejected
The document has the status Rejected.
Reserved
The document has the status Reserved.
Supplier no. The supplier specified on the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The supplier’s name on the document processed from the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Imported supplier reference The supplier reference on the document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Invoice no. The invoice number on the document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Buyer’s order no. The order number of the buyer connected with the document.
Supplier contact The supplier contact (name), as imported with the document.
Ref. no. The number that identifies the document in the system, as generated by the system according to the number series assigned to documents of this type in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Currency ID The currency of the document on the line.
Terms ID The unique ID for the payment terms used for the document.
Invoice date The date of the original document from Supplier ledger. You can change the date before the releasing the document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due, in accordance with the due date in the xml file or the supplier’s payment terms (check box Use due date from Terms settings in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000).
Supplier bank account The supplier’s bank account as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Supplier’s bankgiro The supplier’s bankgiro as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Supplier’s Plusgiro acct. The supplier’s Plusgiro account as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Supplier IBAN The supplier’s IBAN number as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the document.
Balance The balance of the document.
Actual balance The actual balance of the document.
Arrival date The arrival date of the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Processing date The processing date of the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Account ID The general ledger account assigned to the supplier or manually entered in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Comment The comment written to the document.
Currency rate The currency rate used for this document.
Description The description of the document.
Doc. type

The type of document on the line. The document types are displayed as three-letter codes in this field, and can be explained as follows:

INV - Invoice

ACR - Credit adjustment

ADR - Purchase credit note

HK - Payment

VCK - Void payment

PPM - Prepayment

PPR - Prepayment request
In edit mode When this check box is marked, the document is in the edit mode.
Initial approver The initial approver of the document as entered in the Invoice details window (the window that is displayed when you click View details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) ).
Credit note

A column that indicates whether the document is a credit note or not. Possible values are:

True - The document is a credit note.

False - the document is not a credit note.
Payment ref. no. The payment reference number as entered on the document in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Rounding diff. The difference between the original document amount (including the VAT amount calculated by the system) and the rounded document amount (including the VAT amount modified by a user for VAT-inclusive items).
Status reason The reason for the Inbox status Error for the document.
Supplier VAT registration ID The supplier’s VAT registration ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier VAT zone The supplier’s VAT zone, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier corporate ID The supplier’s corporate ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier differences status

The status for the update process of possible differences between imported supplier details from the document, and the existing supplier details as registered in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. The possible statuses are:

Supplier is updated
The supplier details have been updated.
Supplier update is required
Click Update supplier to update the supplier’s details.
Supplier update is ignored
The incoming supplier details have been ignored.
Supplier email address The supplier’s email address as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier location The supplier’s location as registered on the Locations tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier’s telephone The supplier’s telephone number as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier web address The address of the supplier’s website, as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Total VAT exempt The document total on the document that is exempt from VAT.
Total VAT taxable The document total on the document that is subject to VAT.
VAT total The total payable VAT amount to be paid for the document.
Attachment errors Here you see the names of the invoice attachments that cannot be imported. Invoices with attachment errors are automatically set to status On hold.
Retry attachment If attachments are missing when an invoice sent from AutoInvoice, you can re-download the attachments when this option is selected.
Attachment retry count The number of times the system tries to re-download the attachments.
Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-overview-ap40106s page In this window, you can view the status of purchase documents in Invoice inbox. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice inbox - overview (AP40106S) In this window, you can view the status of purchase documents in Invoice inbox. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [View invoices in the Invoice inbox - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/invoice-inbox/view-invoices-in-the-invoice-inbox-overview/) ## The top part
Element Description
Branch ID The ID of the branch you want to see purchase documents for.
Inbox status

If you want to see documents that have a specific status, select one of the following values. The default status is New.

View all
Displays documents with all statuses.
New
Displays all documents with the status New.
Blocked
Displays supplier documents that come from a supplier who is not registered in Visma Net.
Sent for Approval
Displays all documents that have been sent to Approval.
Validated
Displays all documents with the status Validated.
Manually validated
Displays all documents that have been manually validated.
Deleted
Displays all documents with the status Deleted.
Error
Displays all documents with the status Error.
Supplier The name of the supplier you want to see supplier documents for.
From date The period from which you want to see documents in this overview.
To date The period until which you want to see documents in this overview.
## The table The columns in the table display information about each of the documents in this window.
Element Description
View details (button) Click View details to see further details about a specific document in the table. The document is opened in the Invoice details window, where you can see its PDF version and also the document details and the approval information.
Update supplier (button) Click this button to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with changed details from the incoming document.
Ignore supplier validation (button) Click this button if you do not want to update the supplier’s details in Visma Net with the new information from the incoming document.
Default column headings
Branch The ID of the company branch whose invoice status you want to view.
Action

The processing action planned for the listed documents. Available actions are:

Hold - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Hold.

Release - Creates a purchase document with the status set to Open, if Automatically post on release is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) (this is the default action in Visma Net ).

Send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Balanced which is sent to Approval.

Pre-book - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released and requires an expense reclassification. This status is only used if the Support for expense reclassification functionality is activated.

Pre-book and send to Approval - Creates a purchase document with the status Pre-released, which requires expense reclassification (this status is available if Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window), and which is then sent to Approval.

Exclude from processing - a purchase document is nor created or processed, it remains in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Origin How the invoice has been imported to Visma Net. The options are Scanned and Electronic.
Inbox status

The status of the document after arrival or last processing in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.

Statuses before processing/editing

New
– a new supplier document that has been received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Blocked
a new supplier document received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) from an supplier without a record in Visma Net

Statuses after processing/editing

Sent to Approval
– The supplier document has been processed and sent to Approval. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Rejected in Approval
The supplier document has been rejected in Approval.
Validated
The supplier document has been processed and validated. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Manually validated
The supplier document has been manually validated. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Deleted
– The supplier document has been deleted. The supplier document is no longer available in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window, but you can view or edit it in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Error
– When the supplier document was processed, the system returned an error.
Approval status

The status of the document in the Approval workflow. The status of an existing document can be one of the following:

View all
View documents with all approval statuses.
New
View documents with the status New.
Cancelled
View documents with the status Cancelled in Approval. This is the status after you have clicked Cancel (the Send to Approval button changes to Cancel when you have sent a document to Approval ).
Sent to Approval
View documents with the status Sent to Approval.
Received in Approval
View documents with the status Received in Approval.
Pending
View documents with the status Pending. This status is displayed when documents are on a valid approval flow and are pending approval.
Rejected
View documents that have been rejected by Approval.
Approved
View documents with the status Approved. This status indicates that the document has been approved and you can now release documents that are ready to be paid. In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can set up automatic release of approved documents.
Active workflow
View documents with the status Active workflow. This status is displayed only during a brief system check, to find out whether the settings for sending documents to Approval are correct
Error
The document encountered an unspecified error. Please try again.
Invoice status

The status of the supplier document. The status of an existing document can be one of the following:

On hold
The document is On hold.
Balanced
The document has the status Balanced.
Voided
View only documents with the status Voided.
Scheduled
The document has the status Scheduled. You can schedule documents in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Open
The document has the status Open.
Closed
The document has the status Closed.
Printed
The document has the status Printed.
Pre-released
The document has the status Pre-released. Documents get this status if you have clicked Pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window
Pending approval
The document has the status Pending approval.
Rejected
The document has the status Rejected.
Reserved
The document has the status Reserved.
Pending printing
The document is pending printing.
Supplier no. The supplier specified on the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The supplier’s name on the purchase document.
Imported supplier reference The supplier reference on the purchase document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Invoice no. The document number on the purchase document, as received in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Supplier contact The supplier contact (name), as imported with the purchase document.
Ref. no. The number that identifies the purchase document in the system, as generated by the system according to the number series assigned to documents of this type in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Currency ID The currency of the document on the line.
Created date The date when the document was created.
Origin is scan When this is marked, the invoice has been scanned into the system.
Scanned invoices: Calculate net amount based on VAT amount When this is marked, the system calculates the net amount of the invoices based on their VAT amount in case the origin of the invoice is scan.
Import header amounts by VAT code When this is marked, the system imports the header amounts of the invoices by their VAT code.
Create invoices with one line for each VAT rate When this is marked, the system does not create an own line for each invoice, but one combined line for invoices with the same VAT rate.
Term ID The unique ID for the payment terms used for the purchase document.
Invoice date The date of the original document from Supplier ledger. You can change the date before releasing the document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due in accordance with the supplier’s payment terms.
Supplier bank account The supplier’s bank account as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, or imported with the supplier document.
Supplier IBAN The supplier’s IBAN number as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window or imported with the purchase document.
Supplier BIC (Swift) The supplier’s BIC (Swift) number as registered in the Payment settings section on the Payment settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window or imported with the purchase document.
Balance The balance of the purchase document after VAT (if inclusive) and the discount.
Total VAT taxable The document total on the purchase document that is subject to VAT.
Total VAT exempt The document total on the purchase document that is exempt from VAT.
Rounding diff. The difference between the original document amount (including the VAT amount calculated by the system) and the rounded document amount (including the VAT amount modified by a user for VAT-inclusive items).
VAT total The total payable VAT amount to be paid for the document.
Initial approver The initial approver of the document as entered in the Invoice details window (the window that is displayed when you click View details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Comment Comment related to approval as entered for the document as entered in the Invoice details window (the window that is displayed when you click View details in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Arrival date The arrival date of the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Processing date The processing date o f the document in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Additional column headings
Account The general ledger account assigned to the supplier or manually entered in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S) window.
Currency rate The currency rate used for this document.
Description A description of the document, as imported with it.
Doc. type

The type of purchase document on the line. The document types are displayed as three-letter codes in this field, and can be explained as follows:

INV - invoice

ACR - Credit adjustment

ADR - Edit adjustment

CHK - Payment

VCK - Void payment

PPM - Prepayment

REF - Refund

PPR - Prepayment request
Credit note

A column that indicates whether the document is a credit note or not. Possible values are:

True - The document is a credit note.

False - The document is not a credit note.
Payment ref. no. The payment reference number as entered on the document in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Status reason The reason for the Inbox status Error for the document.
Supplier VAT registration ID The supplier’s VAT registration ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier corporate ID The supplier’s corporate ID, as registered on the Purchase settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier difference status

The status for the update process of possible differences between imported supplier details from the document, and the existing supplier details as registered in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. Possible statuses are:

  • Supplier is updated - the supplier details have been updated.
  • Supplier update is required - Click Update supplier to update the supplier’s details.
  • Supplier update is ignored - The incoming supplier details have been ignored.
Supplier email address The supplier’s email address as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier phone no. The supplier’s telephone number as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier web address The address of the supplier’s website, as registered on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Attachment errors Here you see the names of the invoice attachments that cannot be imported. Invoices with attachment errors are automatically set to status On hold.
Retry attachment If attachments are missing when an invoice sent from AutoInvoice, you can re-download the attachments when this option is selected.
Attachment retry count The number of times the system tries to re-download the attachments.
Invoice Inbox rules (AP206000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-rules-ap206000 page In this window, you can to create invoice processing rules based on supplier and values from Visma XML. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice Inbox rules (AP206000) In this window, you can to create invoice processing rules based on supplier and values from Visma XML. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction The rules will be applied when processing invoices from Invoice inbox. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window fields
Field Description
Rule ID The ID of the Inbox rule. Define the number series for the rules in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Active When this check box is selected, the rule is active.
Description The description of the rule.
### The Conditions section
Field Description
Branch The branch to which the rule applies. If you leave the field blank, the rule applies to all branches. This field is visible only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier

The supplier to whom the rule applies.

When the supplier has the setting Create invoice with one line for each VAT rate or Import header amounts by VAT code selected, the line level Invoice Inbox rules will not apply and a warning message will be shown.
Source field in invoice The field on the invoice that is used as the source detail when searching for matching invoices for the rule.
Condition The condition that is used on the value of the source field.
Value The value that is searched from the source field of the invoice and interpreted according to the selected condition.
Priority The priority of the rule. If there are overlapping rules, the one with a higher priority will be used.
### The Values in Visma Net section
Field Description
Account The account to which the rule applies.
Subaccount The subaccount to which the rule applies.
Location The location to which the rule applies.
Deferral code The deferral code based on the value in the xml file.
Project The project to which the rule applies.
Project task The project task to which the rule applies.
Initial approver (document level) The initial approver of the invoice on the document level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Initial approver (line level) The initial approver of the invoice on the line level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Manual payments (AP30200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/manual-payments-ap30200s page In this window, you can create outgoing payments for open documents in Supplier ledger. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manual payments (AP30200S) In this window, you can create outgoing payments for open documents in Supplier ledger. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Process several payments](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-several-payments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create payments Click this to create payments from the invoices you have selected in the table part.
Get balance from bank Click this to get the balance of the payments from the bank.
View invoice Click this to view the invoice selected in the table part in the Purchase invoices pop-up window.
## The top part
Element Description
Payment method The payment method used to pay the payment.
Cash account The cash account connected with the payments to process.
Due date The due date of the payment.
Payment date The payment date of the payment.
Financial period The financial period to which the payment belongs.
Show open cash discount amounts Select this check box to show the open cash discount amounts of the payments.
Total eligible payments The total amount of the payments in the table.
Total selected payments The amount of the payments selected in the table.
## The table
Column Description
Payment ref. The payment reference of the payment.
Location The location of the supplier on the payment.
Document type The type of the payment document.
Invoice no. The invoice number of the payment.
Description The description of the payment.
Amount paid The amount paid on the payment.
Cash discount taken The cash discount taken on the payment.
Balance The balance of the payment.
Due date The due date of the payment.
Supplier ref. The supplier’s reference on the payment.
Currency The currency in which the payment is paid.
Post period The period to which the payment is posted.
Supplier The number of the supplier on the payment.
Supplier name The name of the supplier on the payment.
Non-stock items (IN202000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000 page You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Non-stock items (IN202000) You can use this window to create, view, and edit non-stock items. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Non-stock items are not kept in a warehouse, so they are immediately available for purchase when they are ordered. For details on these items, see: [About non-stock item support](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-stock-and-non-stock-items/about-non-stock-item-support/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

Update cost
To update the cost of the selected non-stock item
View restriction groups
To navigate to the Restriction groups by item (IN103020) window, so that you can view or change the restriction groups that have access to the non-stock item.
Change the item ID
To change the ID of the currently selected non-stock item
Inquiries

Provides quick access to inquiry forms as follows:

Sales prices
To open the Sales prices (AR202000) window and view or edit sales prices for the selected non-stock item.
Supplier prices
To open the Supplier prices (AP202000) window and view or edit supplier prices for the selected non-stock item.
## The top part In this area, you can select an item by its ID to view its information, or you can create a record for a new non-stock item.
Element Description
Item ID

The unique alphanumeric identifier of the non-stock item.

The structure of identifiers is defined by the INVENTORY segmented key in the Segment keys (CS202000) window.

Note

At a later time, you can change the non-stock item ID by selecting Change ID on the Actions menu in the toolbar.
Item status

The status of the non-stock item. You can select one of the following options:

Active
Indicates that the item can be used in inventory operations, such as issues and receipts.
No sales
Indicates that the item cannot be sold.
No purchases
Indicates that the item cannot be purchased.
No request
Indicates that the item cannot be used on requisition requests.
Inactive
Indicates that no inventory operations are allowed for the non-stock item.
Marked for deletion
Indicates that the item is marked for deletion. No inventory operations are allowed, but the record will be kept in the database if any inventory transactions were related to it.
Description A brief description of the non-stock item.
Work group The work group that is responsible for the non-stock item.
Product manager The product manager who is responsible for the non-stock item.
## The General information tab On this tab, you can define or change the default settings for a non-stock item. You can also specify its unit conversion rules. ### The Item defaults section By using the elements in the section, you can assign this item to an item class, a posting class, and a price class, and you can specify other default properties.
Element Description
Item class

The item class the item is associated with; only item classes for non-stock items appear on the list for selection.

Item classes, which are used to group stock items and provide default settings for new items of the class, are defined in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Type

The non-stock item type. You can select one of the following options:

Non-stock item
A general type of non-stock items
Labour
A type of non-stock items to be used as labour hour rates.
Service
A type of non-stock items to be used as service fees
Charge
A type of non-stock items that are used as charge rates
Expense
A type of non-stock items that are added to documents to designate specific expenses
Posting class

The posting class the item is associated with.

You can use posting classes to group non-stock items with similar properties and provide default settings used to post inventory transactions related to the items to the general ledger. The posting classes are defined in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.
Is a kit

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a kit.

The components of the kit can be specified by using the Kit specifications (IN209500) window.
Webhook notification

When this check box is selected and saved for an item, you will be notified regarding changes.

The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the item.
VAT category The VAT category of the non-stock item. By default, this is the VAT category specified for the item class to which this item has been assigned. If needed, another VAT category can be selected for the item.
Default warehouse

The warehouse whose settings can be used for this non-stock item on sales orders or purchase orders.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Require receipt

A check box that you select to require that the system create a purchase receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, the system will not generate any inventory transactions for the non-stock item.
Require shipment

A check box you select to require that the system create a sales order receipt for this non-stock item.

If you select this check box, you cannot have the system generate any inventory transactions for this non-stock item.
Complete purchase order line

Choose between:

  • By amount
  • By quantity
Reverse charge item

Select this check box if the non-stock item is a reverse charge item.

Note

This check box is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
External ID

This field is automatically populated if the non-stock item is linked to an external expense type in the Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S) window.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
### The Unit conversion section By using the unit conversion table, you can set up conversion rules between different units of measure used for this item. The unit conversion parameters are specified with respect to the UoM selected as the base unit for the non-stock item. This table is only available if the **Multiple units of measure** functionality in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window is enabled.
Column Description
From unit The unit of measure for which the conversion parameters are specified.
Multiply/divide

The operation to be performed for unit conversion.

You can select the Multiply or Divide option to perform conversions from different units of measure to the UoM specified as the base unit.
Conversion factor The factor to be used for the unit conversion, along with the conversion operation specified in the Multiply/divide column.
To unit The UoM selected as the base unit for the item.
### The Unit of measurement section In this section, you can select the base unit of measure (UoM) for the non-stock item. If the **Multiple units of measure** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can also specify the UoMs to be used as sales and purchase units for the non-stock item, and the conversion rules for these units and other UoMs that can apply to the item (available from the item class). You can select UoMs from the list of UoMs available for the item class or type new UoMs.
Element Description
Base unit The UoM used as the base unit for the non-stock item.
Sales unit

The UoM used as the sales unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Purchase unit

The UoM used as the purchase unit for the non-stock item. The default value (if any) is specified in the Item classes (IN201000) window.

This field appears only if the Multiple units of measure functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Price/cost information tab On this tab, you can view and set the default price and the pending standard cost for the non-stock item in the [Update standard costs (IN502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/update-standard-costs-in502000/) window. ### The Price management section Here you can specify settings related to the management of prices.
Element Description
Price class The item price class associated with the non-stock item. These classes, which are used to group stock or non-stock items with similar price calculation methods, are defined in the Item price classes (IN209000) window.
Price work group The work group responsible for product pricing. Select the pricing work group for the non-stock item.
Price manager The manager responsible for the product pricing.
Subject to commission

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commission should be calculated on the sale of this non-stock item.

The check box is available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Min. mark-up (%) The minimum mark-up percentage defined for this non-stock item.
Mark-up (%) The mark-up percentage to be used for setting the price for the item.
List price The manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP) of this non-stock item.
Default price

The price of the non-stock item.

This price is used as the default price if there are no other prices (from any price list) defined for this item in the Supplier ledger workspace.
### The Standard cost section
Element Description
Pending cost

The standard cost to be assigned to the non-stock item when the costs are updated.

You can type the cost directly into the field.
Pending cost date

The date when the pending cost becomes effective.

You can select the date for a pending cost.
Current cost The current standard cost of the non-stock item.
Effective date The date when the current standard cost became effective.
Last cost The standard cost assigned to the non-stock item before the current standard cost was set.
### The ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section
Element Description
ROT or RUT deductible item Select this check box if the item should be used for ROT or RUT deduction.
ROT Select this option if the work is related to ROT deduction (repairs, conversion, extension).
RUT Select this option if the work is related to RUT deduction (cleaning, maintenance, laundry).
Type

Select one of the following types:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost
Type of work

The following work types are available for RUT:

  • Babysitting
  • Cleaning
  • Cloth maintenance
  • Furniture
  • Gardening
  • IT services
  • Kitchen appliance
  • Laundry
  • Personal care
  • Relocation service
  • Snow job
  • Supervision of housing
  • Transport to sales

The following work types are available for ROT:

  • Bricklaying
  • Construction
  • Drain work
  • Electricity work
  • Glass work
  • Painting
  • Plumbing
## The Supplier details tab This tab contains information about the supplier from which the item is purchased and the supplier's prices for the item.
Column Description
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is active.
Default

This check box indicates (if selected) that the supplier is the default supplier for this item.

Select this check box to mark the supplier that is the main supplier of the item.

When you create a purchase order to purchase an item, the default supplier is selected for this purchase.
Supplier no. The ID of the supplier. Supplier settings are specified in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The name of the supplier from which the item is purchased.
Location

The supplier location from which the item is purchased, which by default is the supplier’s default location. These locations are defined for the supplier in the Supplier locations (AP303010) window.

Note

This column is only displayed if the Account locations functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Purchase unit

The unit of measure in which the item is purchased.

This UoM is specified on the General settings tab of this window.
Supplier item ID The item ID used by the supplier for this item.
Currency ID The currency used by the supplier to charge for the item.
Last supplier price

Read only.

This column shows the last supplier price defined for the item.
## The Cross-reference tab You use the **Cross-reference** tab to maintain cross-references between the item ID of the non-stock item used in your company and the identifiers used by your suppliers and customers for the item.
Column Description
Alt. item ID type

The type of alternate codification used for the item, You can select one of the following options:

Customer part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the customer part number.
Supplier part number
You use this type to maintain the cross-reference between the item ID and the supplier part numbers.
Global
You use this type to maintain the cross-references between the item ID and the global codification.
Barcode
You use this type to specify (or enter it by using a barcode scanner) a bar code for the item ID.
Supplier/customer The supplier or customer (by its ID) that uses the alternative identification for this non-stock item.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the non-stock item as used by the supplier or customer.
Description Any comments applicable to the specified cross-reference.
## The Packaging tab This tab contains information about the measurements of the item.
Element Description
Weight The weight of the item.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used for the weight of the item.
Volume The volume of the item.
Volume UoM The unit of measure used for the item volume.
## The Deferral settings tab You use this tab to specify how deferrals should be performed for this non-stock item when it is sold or purchased. If no deferral code is assigned to the item, no deferrals will be performed, and the revenue or expense will be recognised immediately. If a code is assigned to the item, revenue from its sales will be recognised according to the deferral code. If this non-stock item is a package, also referred to as a multiple delivery arrangement (MDA), specify how the item price can be split into components (separate units of accounting) that use different methods of revenue recognition to comply with revenue recognition regulations in your country. For each component, you can assign an individual deferral code in the **Revenue components** table.
Element Description
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to this non-stock item.

The code specifies how the revenue from the sale of this item will be recognised. The deferral codes are defined in the Deferral codes (DR202000) window.
Default term

The date range defined for deferred revenue recognition (for example, 2 years for a two-year customer support subscription that you sell).

The field is available for editing only if the Flexible by period, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method is selected for the deferral code selected in the Deferral code field.

The maximum value is 10000. Possible time units are year(s), month(s), week(s), and day(s).
Use component subaccounts This check box indicates (if selected) that the component subaccount is used to account for deferred revenue.
Total percentage

The total percentage of the item price as split among components.

This value is calculated automatically as the sum of the percentages assigned to the components if the item is sold as a package and consists of components.

When the item is not a package, the total percentage is set to 100.
### The Revenue components table In this table, you can add detailed information about the item's components to be used for deferrals. Each component can be assigned a specific deferral code and a percentage or fixed amount of the item price that will be used for deferrals when the item is sold.
Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the component of this non-stock item, which is sold as a package.
Sales account The sales account used for this component.
Sales sub. The sales subaccount used for this component.
UoM The unit of measure used for this component.
Quantity The quantity of the specified units for this component of the non-stock item.
Deferral code The deferral code that has been specified for this component.
Default term

The date range defined for the process of the deferred revenue or expense recognition (for example, 6 months for a six-month support license).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days, or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.
Default term UOM

The unit of measure for the default term: year(s), month(s), week(s), or day(s).

This field is available for editing only if the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period method is specified for the deferral code that you have selected in the Deferral code column for this component.
Allocation method

The method used to allocate the document amount between the components. The following options are available:

Percentage
The component price will be computed as the percentage of the total package price. If you select this option, the Percentage column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the percentage defined for this component.
Fixed amount
The component price will be defined as a fixed price. If you select this option, the Fixed amount column becomes available for editing; in it, you need to enter the amount defined for this component.
Residual
This method applies to the non-deferral components. The price for such a component will be defined as the amount that will remain after the system deducts the deferred revenues of the other components from the total package amount.
Fixed amount The fixed amount of the item price assigned to the component if the Fixed amount option is selected in the Allocation method column.
Percentage The percentage of the item price for this component if the Percentage option is selected in the Allocation method column.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab contains information about the default general ledger accounts used to post transactions related to this non-stock item. The specified accounts and subaccounts are mostly used as the sources of options for the posting settings of the item defined by its posting class.
Element Description
Expense accrual account

For a non-stock item, that is a component of a stock kit, this account (of the Expense or Liability type) will be used to accrue the costs (standard costs) of non-stock components in the process of kit assembly, if the option Item is selected in the Use inventory/accrual account from field in the General ledger accounts tab in the Posting classes (IN206000) window.

For a Labour type item, the expense accrual account is used to accrue the cost of labour on projects (the account is credited on release of time cards). The account will be used for time card related transactions if Labour item accrual is selected as the Expense accrual account source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Expense accrual sub.

The subaccount to be used as the default expense accrual subaccount for this non-stock item.

For kit assembly related transactions, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the posting class (the Combine inventory / accrual sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).

For transactions with labour items, this subaccount is one of the sources for selecting segment values for the expense accrual subaccount according to the rule defined by the Expense accrual sub. source setting in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.
Reason code sub The subaccount of the reason code for the item.
Expense account The default expense account to be used for this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this account will be used for transactions with this item as the default expense account if Item is selected in the Use COGS / expense account from field for the posting class of the item.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense EU account The EU expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense account, import The import expense account to be used for this non-stock item.
Expense payroll taxable account

The expense payroll taxable account to be used for this non-stock item.

This field is visible only if Expense Integration is enabled and the non-stock item is of type Expense.
Expense sub. The subaccount to be used by default with the expense account for transactions related to this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default expense subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine COGS / expense sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase accrual account

The liability account to be used for this non-stock item to accrue purchase order item amounts for this item, if the option Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for this item.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.
Purchase accrual sub.

Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class for this item (the Posting classes (IN206000) window), this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.

Note

This element is available only for non-stock items that require a receipt.
Sales account The account to be used as the sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - non-taxable account The account to be used as the non-taxable sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - EU account The account to be used as the EU sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales - export account The account to be used as the export sales account when this non-stock item is sold.
Sales sub. The subaccount to be used by default for transactions recording a sale of this non-stock item. If the Inventory module is enabled in your system, this subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default sales subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine sales sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Purchase price variance account

The account (of the Expense type) to be used as the default purchase price variance account to record purchases of this non-stock item on receipts if Item is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field for the posting class of the item.

The purchase price account is used to record any differences between the extended price on the purchase receipt and the extended price on the purchase invoice (if this item is assigned any of the valuation methods except for the standard cost valuation method).
Purchase price variance sub.

The corresponding subaccount.

This subaccount is used as one of the sources for selecting segment values for the default purchase price variance subaccount defined by the posting class (the Combine purchase price variance sub. from field in the Posting classes (IN206000) window).
Deferral account

The account to be used to hold the deferred amount until it is fully recognised. The account type should be specified as follows:

  • A liability account for a deferral code of the revenue type
  • An asset account for a deferral code of the expense type
Deferral sub. The subaccount to be used with the deferral account.
## The Attributes tab You can use the **Attributes** tab to associate attributes with the non-stock item. You can select each attribute from the list of attributes defined in the system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window. ### The Attributes section
Column Description
Attribute ID The name of the attribute.
Required This check box indicates (if selected) that the attribute value is required for a non-stock item of the class.
Value The value of the attribute.
### The Sales categories section By using this table, you can select the values of the sales categories for the non-stock item. To define the sales categories or view their details, use the [Item sales categories (IN204060)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-sales-categories-in204060/) window.
Column Description
Category The sales category identifier.
### The Image upload section
Element Description
Browse Click the button to locate the image you want to upload.
Upload Click the button to upload selected image.
## The Description tab On this tab, you can create stock item descriptions that includes tables, images, and web links. ## The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for an item, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific item. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-info-from-autopay-ap50550s page In this window, you can view payment details from AutoPay by cash account and upload bank statements. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment info from AutoPay (AP50550S) In this window, you can view payment details from AutoPay by cash account and upload bank statements. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Upload status file Click this button to upload the account summary from the file.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify criteria for the documents you want to display on the list.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account for which you want to view available transactions.
Batch no. The reference number of the batch generated for the transaction.
Show handled error messages Select this check box to show handled error messages in the table.
## The upper table This table displays all the documents that meet the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Batch ref. no. The unique reference number of the batch of payments. You can select a reference number to view (and act upon) a particular batch.
Batch status The AutoPay status of the batch
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment associated with the payment method.
Cash account The cash account used for the payment.
Cash account description The detailed description of the cash account.
Payee The ID of the receiver of the payment.
Payee name The name of the receiver of the payment.
Payment amount The amount of the payment in payment currency.
Payment currency The currency of the payment.
Payment status The payment status for the batch from AutoPay.
Invoice ref. no. The reference number of the purchase document.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period.
Payment date The date of the supplier ledger payment document.
Payment amount in base currency The amount of the payment in the base currency of your company at the valid currency rate for the transaction date.
Orig. workspace The workspace where the batch was generated.
## The lower table
Column Description
Handled Select this check box for payments that have been handled.
Workspace The workspace from which the payment originates.
Batch ref. no. The unique reference number of the batch of payments. You can select a reference number to view (and act upon) a particular batch.
Payment ref. no. The reference number of the payment.
Payment status The payment status for the batch from AutoPay.
Payment amount The payment amount in payment currency.
Payee ID The ID of the receiver of the payment.
Rejection message The message informing why the payment has been rejected.

Related pages

Tasks

 Prepare for closing (AP50700S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/prepare-for-closing-ap50700s page If you want to close a period in the supplier ledger at a specific date in the following period, you can use this window to move documents to another period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare for closing (AP50700S) If you want to close a period in the supplier ledger at a specific date in the following period, you can use this window to move documents to another period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can also move invoices that are pending in Approval. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Move to period Moves the selected documents to the new period selected in the top part, while the invoice date is kept.
Move all to period Moves all documents to the new period selected in the top part, while the invoice date is kept.
## The top part
Element Description
Branch The ID of the branch whose documents are displayed in the table, the current branch by default.
Up to period Select the period up to which you want to move documents to another period.
Supplier class To narrow down the documents displayed in the table, select here a supplier class and the documents of the suppliers included in the class will be displayed.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval.
Move to period The period to which you want to move the selected documents.
Move all to period Move all documents to the specified period.
Include documents On hold If you select this check box, the system will include documents with the status On hold in its search.
## The table
Column Description
Type The type of the document.
Ref. no. The number of the document to which the payment is applied.
Supplier The supplier who received the payment.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Supplier ref. The original reference number of the document or the ID assigned to it by the supplier (for informational purposes).
Status The status of the document.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval.
Date

The date of the original document; by default, it is the current date, which you can change.

The date is used by the system to determine a posting period.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted.
Amount

The amount to be paid for the document. You enter this amount manually.

This amount should be equal to the amount (or to the sum of amounts) shown in the Amount column in the top part of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Currency

The currency of the payment; by default, it is the currency associated with the cash account.

It can be a currency other than the supplier’s default currency if currency overriding is allowed for the supplier account.
Description A description of the document.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process payments (AP50301S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/process-payments-ap50301s section Through this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents by using the payment method associated with the specific cash account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process payments (AP50301S) Through this window, you can pay outstanding supplier documents by using the payment method associated with the specific cash account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + If the **Require approval of invoices before paying** check box in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window is selected, only approved invoices are visible in this window. If the check box is cleared, unapproved invoices will also be displayed. + A pay date is assigned to an invoice automatically according to the **Payment by** value for the supplier on the **Payment settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + The system groups the documents into a single payment for each supplier unless the **Pay separately** option is selected for a supplier; for such suppliers, a separate payment will be generated for each document. ## What to do from this window + [Create a new schedule](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-new-schedule/) + [Fix a payment request with an error](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/fix-a-payment-request-with-an-error/) + [Process payments with deviations](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-payments-with-deviations/) + [Update payment document with document preview](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/update-payment-document-with-document-preview/) + [Edit a supplier during payment processing](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/edit-a-supplier-during-payment-processing/) + [Update payment document with document preview](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/update-payment-document-with-document-preview/) + [Make a non-active AutoPay agreement active](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/make-a-non-active-autopay-agreement-active/) ## The Prepare payments tab On this tab, you can select the documents to be prepared using various filtering options. ### The Deselect suppliers where the credit notes total amount exceeds the invoices total amount button When you click this, the suppliers will be deselected, whose credit notes' total amount exceeds the invoices' total amount. ### The Filters button Click the **Filters** button to open the filtering view. You can filter the documents to be displayed in the **Prepare payments** table by using the following options:
Option Description
Pay up to date

The Prepare payments tab will automatically display the outstanding supplier documents according to their pay date.

The default is the date in the Payment date field on the Financials details tab of the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Supplier Filter the documents to be displayed based on the supplier. Note that only the suppliers with the Active and One-time status are available in the selection window.
Supplier class Filter the documents to be displayed based on the supplier class to which the supplier of the document belongs.
Document currency Filter the documents to be displayed based on their currency.
Discount up to date Filter on the discount date of the documents until which documents will be displayed. If there is no cash discount on the invoice, then the cash discount date = due date.
Payment method Filter the documents to be displayed based on the method of payment associated with the cash account. Only the payment methods are visible, which have the setting Create batch payment selected on the Settings for supplier ledger tab in the Payment methods (CA204000) window.
Cash account Filter the documents to be displayed based on the cash account to be used for payment.
Branch Filter the documents to be displayed based on the branch to which they belong.
Document type

Filter the documents to be displayed based on their document type. The available types are:

  • Purchase invoice:
  • Credit adjustment:
  • Purchase credit note:
  • Prepayment:
Reset filters Click this to reset all filters and to display all documents until the default due date in the table.
Apply filters Click this to apply your selected filters and to view the documents accordant with them in the table.
### The Pay up to date button By default, the date is the current date and the table displays the documents whose due date is this date or earlier. You can change the date by clicking the calendar icon. If you select another date in the **Filters** view, it will be displayed and used here. ### The Refresh button Click this to refresh the window after changes or selections you have made. ### Bulk actions button #### Change payment date To change the payment date for all the selected supplier documents, click this button to open the calendar and select a new payment date.
Button Description
Today Click this to select today’s date.
Change Click this to change the payment of all selected documents to the date you have selected in the calendar.
Cancel Cancel the change of payment date.
#### Change cash account On the **Prepare payments** tab, select the documents for which you want to change cash account. Note that you can only make the change for payments with the same payment method. Select the new cash account from the drop-down with the available cash accounts and click **Change**. ### The Table settings dialog box You can see the number of the documents selected for payment in parenthesis. #### The Display options section
Button Description
Document list Select this to see the documents of all suppliers as individual rows in the table.
Group by supplier

Select this to group the documents of the same supplier in one bundle in the table.

  • The view displays the total amount to pay per supplier next to the supplier name and number of documents.
  • The amounts are shown in the currency of the cash account selected on the document.
  • If the supplier has documents using different cash accounts with different currencies, amounts will be displayed accordingly to the currency of the cash account.
  • To view the details of a supplier with grouped documents, click the supplier name link to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier overview This functionality provides you with a clearer summary of the documents by supplier to track and pay and their overall summary amounts. Activate this view in the table settings options and select Supplier overview.
#### The Row density section
Button Description
AP50301SDensityTight Select this to view the table lines with a tighter line density.
AP50301SLooseDensity Select this to view the table lines with a looser line density.
### The Column setup Check the box before the columns you want to display in the table. You can change the order of the columns by dragging them to a desired position. The active columns are displayed on the top of the list and the inactive ones after them in alphabetical order. ### The More actions drop-down
Button Description
Open AutoPay Click this button to open the AutoPay service where you can approve selected payments.
Export to Excel Click this to export all records to an Excel sheet.
Notification settings Click this to open the notification settings. For more details, see Notifications in processing of payments.
Schedule payments See About the scheduler.
### The table If there are payments with deviations, you see the message "You have x deviations that need your attention." Click the **View deviations** link to see only the deviations in the table. To see all the payments, close the **View only deviations** view by clicking the x in the label.
Column Description
! (Exclamation mark) There is a red exclamation mark in front of the rows with deviations. Hover over it to see the reason(s) for the deviations and how to fix them.
new-select-checkbox Select or deselect all documents, all documents for a supplier, or individual documents.
Branch The branch to which the document is related. This column is available if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Doc. type

The type of the supplier document. The following types are available:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Credit adjustment
  • Purchase credit note
  • Prepayment
Note

See also: Update payment document with document preview.
Ref. no The reference number of the document.
Supplier bank account The bank account of the supplier. Click the link to change the supplier’s bank account in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier ref. The original ID of the document as specified by the supplier.
Payment date

The payment date of the purchase invoice, which is either the due date or the cash discount date for the document, depending on the supplier settings.

Note

In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, there is an option named Override payment date with current date. By selecting this option, you can override the payment date with the current date for all invoices.

This functionality is mainly aimed for the Dutch market.
Currency A read-only field reflecting the currency of the cash account.
Amount to pay The amount to be paid on the document.
Balance The balance of the document.
Priority The priority of the document, normal or high.
Due date The due date of the document.
Notes You can add and edit notes in the pop-up window that opens when you click Add note on a row in this column. The field is integrated with the notes in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Description The description of the document.
Cash account The cash account from which the payment will be issued. When you click the link, the document opens in preview overlay window where you can update the details of the document. For more information, see: Update payment document with document preview.
Pay separately

When this is selected, the document will be paid separately and not with the batch.

Note

With the Create one payment with invoices having the same payment date (when not using the Pay separately option) option selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, and when selecting several invoices in one payment for one supplier, the due date is considered for each invoice and the earliest due date will be the payment date in AutoPay.
Invoice date The date of the invoice.
Supplier no. The supplier to whom the payment will be sent.
Cash discount taken The amount of the cash discount granted by the supplier.
Cash discount balance The total balance of the cash discount.
Invoice amount The amount to be paid on the document.
Cash discount date The day when a cash discount from the supplier is available.
Payment location The payment location of the document, required when sending data to AutoPay.
Payment message The message written to the document for payment.
Payment reporting code The payment reporting code of the document.
SWIFT/BIC The SWIFT/BIC account of the supplier.
Original payment date The payment date of the document based on the document date and term of payment.
Orig. invoice date The original creation date of the invoice.
Payment ref. no. The payment reference number of the document.
Remittance contact The contact person connected with the document.
Charge bearer Specifies which party will pay the charges due for processing of the payment transaction.
Cash discount amount (orig. currency) The cash discount amount available for this document in its original currency.
## The footer of the window
Button Description
x selected of x documents The number of selected documents included according to the selection criteria out of the total number of documents.
Documents per page The number of documents displayed per page.
To be paid The total amount of the documents to be paid in your default currency.
Schedule your payments and save time/Next scheduled payment runs in n hours If no scheduled payment is active, you will receive a reminder to create a schedule. Alternatively, if one or more scheduled payments are active, the message will show the time remaining until the next scheduled payment is due.
Confirm payout Click this to confirm the payment of the selected documents. After clicking this button, you will be are redirected to the Payment status tab. When you hover over the button, you will see a message on the deviations (if any) and their reasons.
## The Balance side panel Here you can see an overview of the balances of the payments to be made. If there are payments in different currencies, you can see their balances by opening the drop-down menu next to the balance amount. You can also see the total number of unpaid payments and their total amount to be paid. ## The Payment status tab On this tab, you can see the status of each payment request after it has been sent to AutoPay. For more details, see [The Payment status tab.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/the-payment-status-tab/) Purchase invoices (AP301000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000 section In this window, you enter supplier documents, such as landed cost invoices, adjustments, and prepayments, and view existing document details. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices (AP301000) In this window, you enter supplier documents, such as landed cost invoices, adjustments, and prepayments, and view existing document details. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Each purchase invoice, adjustment, or prepayment request creates a supplier ledger document of the corresponding type, which includes information about the supplier and their original document, such as the reference number of the original purchase invoice or note. + In addition, you can link invoices to the purchase orders used for ordering goods and to the purchase receipts issued upon receiving the ordered goods. + You can edit invoices, adjustments, and prepayments until they are released. The default status of a new document is determined by the **Hold documents on entry** option in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Enter an invoice in the base currency](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-in-the-base-currency/) + [Correct a purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/correct-a-purchase-invoice/) + [Enter an invoice in the base currency](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-in-the-base-currency/) + [Enter an invoice based on purchase receipts or purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/enter-an-invoice-based-on-purchase-receipts-or-purchase-orders/) + [Pay an individual purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/pay-an-individual-purchase-invoice/) + [Release purchase invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/release-purchase-invoices/) + [Reverse an invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/reverse-an-invoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Pre-book

Pre-books the invoice and records all the expenses specified in the document to the reclassification account specified for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. You can book the pre-booked invoices after the expenses have been reclassified or after selecting specific expense accounts for each detail line.

The button is available only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Release

Releases the document.

You can release pre-booked invoices as long as the financial period is open in Supplier ledger.
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions related to the selected document:

AutoPay payment process
Opens the Process payments (AP50301S) window, where you can create payments from the selected documents.
Manual payments
Opens the Supplier payments (AP302000) window with the invoice displayed on the Documents to apply tab as a line for a new payment.
Reverse
If you reverse a purchase invoice, the system creates a purchase credit note with the same details as in the selected document to reverse it. If you reverse a purchase credit note, the system makes a copy of the document with the Credit adjustment type.
Add to schedule
Navigates to the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window, where you can assign the selected document to a schedule.
Recalculate prices
Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, where you can specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the selected document. See the Recalculate prices dialog box section below.
Supplier refund
Opens the Supplier payments (AP302000) window, where you can create a refund for the adjustment.
Void prepayment
Voids the prepayment.
Reclassify general ledger batch
Opens the Reclassify transactions (GL506000) window, where you can initiate the reclassification process.
Void
Voids the selected invoice if the invoice has the Pre-released status and no payments are applied to the invoice. The action is available only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Update retainage
Opens the Update retainage dialog box where you can update the retainage percent / amount. The action is available only if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Release retainage
Opens the Release retainage dialog box, where you specify the settings of the retainage to be released and then run the process of releasing the invoice. As a result, the retainage invoice is created in the system. The action is available only if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Write-off
Creates a write-off in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window when the remaining balance on the invoice is within the limit set in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Correct invoice
Automatically creates a copy of the original invoice that you can further edit. In the background, when releasing this new invoice, the system will automatically create a purchase credit note for the original invoice and match it against the selected invoice to be corrected. As a note, the original invoice will remain in status Open until the new corrected document is finally released, but will no further be included in the payment process.
Note

You can only correct invoices with the status Open, not connected to a payment, and not including retainage. Remember to save the correction invoice!
Inquiries

Provides the following menu command, which you can click for fast access to the inquiry window:

Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier details (AP402000) window.
Approval document history details
Navigates to the Approval document history (AP40104S) window. Shows you e.g. approvers’ comments on invoices.
Approval document line history details
Navigates to the Approval document line history (AP40105S) window.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

Unreleased transactions (detailed)
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) report.
Supplier register (detailed)
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) report.
Send to Approval Sends the selected document to Approval for approval. When the invoice is sent, you can view the workflow of approving the document on the Approval details tab.
Show files Shows the files connected with the selected document in an own window.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box In the **Actions** drop-down you use this dialog box to specify the options of updating supplier prices and discounts for the invoice.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are calculated. You can select one of the following options:

Current line:
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line.
All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines.
Set current unit prices When this check box is selected, the system will update the item prices with the current prices.
Override manual prices When this check box is selected, the system will update the prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit cost or Ext. cost columns) with the current prices. The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected.
Recalculate discounts When this check box is selected, the system will recalculate the discounts for the current line or for the selected lines. This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Override manual line discounts

When this check box is selected, the system will cancel the manual discounts for the current line or all lines (depending in the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.

This check box is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
OK (button) Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
## The top part Here you can enter a new supplier document or select an existing document for modification.
Element Description
Type

The type of the document. The following types are available:

Purchase invoice
For an invoice issued by the supplier (or service provider) for goods sold or services provided. For details, see: About supplier ledger payment processing.
Credit adjustment
For a document that adjusts the credit amount in a previous document (or multiple documents). For details, see: About credit adjustment processing.
Purchase credit note
For a document that adjusts the debit amount in a previous document (or multiple documents). For details, see: About purchase credit note processing.
Prepayment
For a supplier request for prepayment. For details, see: About prepayment processing. A prepayment also can be created for a purchase order if the order should be paid for in the delivery of goods.
Invoice no. The number that identifies the document in the system, as generated by the system according to the number series assigned to documents of this type in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. For a new document, this field contains an alphanumeric string that indicates that a new number will be generated.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval. Pressing the status opens the Approval document line history (AP40105S) window.
Document status

A read-only field that shows the status of the supplier ledger document:

  • On hold: Indicates that the document is a draft. You can edit it but not release.
  • Balanced: Indicates that the credit and debit totals are equal for the newly created document. The document is assigned with this status when it is taken off hold.
  • Pre-released: Indicates that the entered and released document requires expense reclassification. This status is assigned only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
  • Scheduled: Indicates that the document was attached to a schedule. Scheduled documents are used as templates for generating similar documents, with the dates calculated according to the schedule settings. You can schedule a document if its status is Balanced.
  • Voided: Indicates that the document is no longer used for generating recurring transactions. The system changes the document status from Scheduled to Voided, when you have removed the document from the table on the Document list tab of the Recurring transactions (AP203500) window.

Also, the system changes the document status from Pre-released to Voided, when you have voided a document.

  • Pending Approval: Indicates that the document needs to be approved by responsible approvers.
  • Open: Indicates that the document has been released and cannot be edited. As payments are applied to the document, its balance decreases.
  • Closed: Indicates that the balance of the document is equal to 0.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the status of the document is On hold. Clear the check box to enable the release of the document.

This option is selected by default if you have selected the Hold documents on entry option in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
Date

The date of the original document; by default, it is the current date, which can be changed. The date is used by the system to determine a posting period.

Bookkeeping and VAT reporting are based on this date.
Post period

The period to which the document should be posted; by default, it is the current period. The default period can be changed. The ability to post to closed periods is controlled by the option in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.

For invoices created through the Process VAT report (TX502000) window, periods that are inactive or closed in Supplier ledger are ignored and the VAT invoice will be posted in the financial period corresponding to the VAT period. If you have checked the ability to post to closed periods, closing the General ledger will also be ignored.
Supplier ref.

The document’s original reference number as assigned by the supplier (for informational and payment purposes).

The reference to the document is required if the Require supplier reference option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. This reference should be unique if the Raise an error on duplicate supplier reference number option is selected in the same window.

If the supplier is a tax agency, checking of unique reference is ignored since you should use the same reference for all documents created for the same VAT period / company.
Description Any user-provided description for the document.
Buyer’s order no. The buyer’s order number connected with the document.
Supplier

The supplier referred to in the document.

You are able to change supplier on a document with order lines if the document

  • has the status On hold and is not created from a purchase order.

  • has the status Balanced and is not on Approval flow.

  • has the status Balanced and is not created from a purchase order.
Location

The supplier location associated with the purchase.

This field appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency The currency of the document. You can change the default currency of the supplier if the Enable currency override option is selected in the Supplier classes (AP201000) window for the supplier class of the supplier. To change the currency rate, click the Rate selection button.
Exchange rate

The amount corresponding to the Currency field, and the name of the field is only visible if you hover over the field.

By clicking the field, the Rate selection dialog box opens. See description below.
View base/View currency (button) When you click View base in the Currency column, the amounts will be converted to your base currency, if the currency of the document is other than your base currency. Click View currency again to return to the original view.
Terms The payment terms associated with the supplier (unavailable for prepayments and purchase credit notes).
Payment ref. no The payment reference number of the document.
Orig. invoice date

The original invoice date or the date when the supplier created the invoice.

If the Use orig. invoice date on payment terms option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window:

  • If you change the date in the Date field, the date in the Orig. invoice date, Due date, Cash discount date, and Pay date fields will change accordingly.
  • If you change the date in the Orig. invoice date field, the date in the Due date, Cash discount date, and Pay date fields will change accordingly.

This date does not affect bookkeeping and VAT reporting.
Apply retainage

When this is selected, retainage will be applied on the invoices.

This functionality is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Due date The date when payment for the document is due in accordance with the supplier’s payment terms.
Cash discount date The end date of the cash discount period, which the system calculates by using the supplier’s payment terms.
AutoPay status The status of the document in AutoPay.
Detail total The document total as specified on the Document details tab.
Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will be displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.
VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the tax with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total The total amount of VAT paid in the document.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax calculated for the document, if applicable.
Balance The balance of the document after VAT (if inclusive) and the discount as specified on the tabs below.
Rounding diff.

The difference between the original invoice amount (including the VAT amount calculated by the system) and rounded invoice amount (including the VAT amount modified by a user for VAT-inclusive items).

This field is available only if the Invoice rounding functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window or if the VAT amount was edited for the VAT-inclusive item or items.

If the Invoice rounding functionality is not enabled, this field shows only the VAT amount discrepancy (that is, the difference between the VAT amount calculated by the system and the tax amounts entered by a user manually for the VAT-inclusive items).
Amount

The amount to be paid for the document. You enter this amount manually.

This field is available only if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. If it is not selected, this amount is calculated by the system and displayed only for released documents.
VAT amount

The VAT amount to be paid for the document. You enter this amount manually according to the tax amount specified in the original document.

This field is available only if the Validate document totals on entry check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.

Note

To use the validation function, the Net/gross entry mode functionality has to be enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash discount

The cash discount amount that has been or will be taken in the document, which the system calculates based in the specified payment terms. If a document has the On hold or Balanced status, you can change the amount of the calculated cash discount.

If you change the cash discount amount, the system recalculates the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Calc. on item amount or Calc. on document amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the VAT (TX205000) window.

Changes you make to the cash discount amount do not affect the taxable and VAT amounts of the document if the applied taxes have Calculate on set to Extract from item amount and Cash discount set to Reduces taxable amount in the window.
### The Rate selection dialog box
Element Description
Currency rate type ID The currency rate type specified for the selected currency pair.
Effective date The date on which the currency rate in this row becomes effective.
Currency unit equivalents

View the currency conversion.

Note

It is possible to change the currency rate for an individual invoice here without changing the currency rate type, but the currency rate will restore back to original if this invoice is corrected. Therefore, it is recommended to create a new currency rate instead, which can then be applied to the individual invoice ( See also: Add a currency rate ).
OK (button) Closes the dialog box.
## The Document details tab This tab provides all the details on the document. The original purchase invoice can be a multi-line document, including multiple types of goods sold, services provided, or multiple transactions. A document may contain line items or one summary line; follow your company's internal agreements on entering documents. If taxes are calculated per item, ensure that the document includes all the details available in the original document. To each document line, you can attach a file with a supporting document.
Button Description
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule (DR201500) window and displays the details of the schedule for the selected line of the document (if any different deferral codes were assigned to different lines of the document in the Deferral code column).
Add purchase order receipt Opens the Add purchase order receipt dialog box where you can associate this document with a purchase receipt.
Add purchase order receipt line Opens the Add receipt line dialog box where you can add a line of a purchase receipt.
Add purchase order By clicking this button you can add purchase order items that do not require receipts. These are often non-stock items. In most cases the stock items require receipts and therefore the Add purchase order button is not used to add those items.
Link line

Opens the Link linedialog box where you can link the line selected in the invoice to a same-item line in a released purchase receipt or in a purchase order in the Balanced status, depending on the item settings. The documents whose lines are being linked to the invoice should have the same currency, the same supplier, and the same supplier location. You can link a line to the invoice line which has the same item ID and UoM.

The button is enabled only if the VAT settings option is selected in the VAT calculation mode field on the Financial details tab for the invoice.
Split line

If you want to distribute the costs of a purchase invoice across several accounts or subaccounts in your supplier ledger, you can split the purchase invoice lines.

You can split a parent line and a child line. A parent line is always the first line in a split, and it is also a line that is above a child line in the split hierarchy. When you split a child line, it automatically becomes the parent of the new line. You cannot split a line that has a discount related to it.
Undo split line Press this to undo all actions done by pressing the Split line button. The child line that was created will be deleted and the external cost will be added to the original row.
### The Add purchase order receipt dialog box By using the **Add purchase order receipt** dialog box, you can select a receipt or multiple receipts to add to the invoice. The dialog box includes the following elements. You can narrow the selection of receipts by selecting a specific purchase order.
Element Description
Order no. The ID of a purchase order that you can select to narrow the selection of receipts associated with this order.
Receipt no. The reference number of a purchase receipt that has not yet invoiced items.
Type The type of the receipt.
Supplier The supplier that delivered the goods listed in the receipt.
Location The supplier location from which the goods were delivered. The field is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency The currency of the document on which the goods are invoiced.
Date The date of the receipt.
Total qty. The total quantity of the items received as listed in the receipt.
Total amt. The amount of the receipt.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the items received that has not been invoiced yet.
Balance not yet invoiced The amount of the receipt that has not been invoiced yet.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected receipts to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the invoice.
### The Add purchase order receipt line dialog box By using the **Add receipt line** dialog box, you can select a line or lines of available receipts that you want to add to the invoice. You can narrow the selection of lines by selecting a specific purchase order.
Element Description
Order no. The ID of the purchase order that you can select to narrow the selection of not yet invoiced lines of the receipts associated with this order.
Order type The type of the order.
Receipt no. The ID of the receipt associated with the selected purchase order.
Line no. The number of the purchase receipt line.
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Warehouse The warehouse to which the item was received.
UoM

The unit of measure used for the item.

For items requiring serial or lot numbers, this is the base unit; for other items, it is the purchase unit.
Currency The currency in which the goods were invoiced.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the document on which this document is based.
Receipt qty. The quantity of the item received, in the specified unit of measure.
Amount The amount of the line, calculated as the unit cost multiplied by the receipt quantity.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the line that has not yet been invoiced.
Amount not yet invoiced The amount of the line that has not yet been invoiced.
Line descr. The description of the line as provided in the receipt.
Add purchase order receipt line (button) Adds the selected line to the invoice.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected line to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the data to the invoice.
### The Add purchase order dialog box Use the **Add purchase order** dialog box to add invoice lines with non-stock items from an existing purchase order of the selected supplier to the current invoice. You can only select purchase orders that are not completed or cancelled and have uninvoiced lines with non-stock items. These items must have the **Require receipt** check box cleared in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window.
Element Description
Order no. The order number of the purchase order.
Type The type of the purchase order.
Supplier The supplier of non-stock goods or services.
Location

The supplier location.

The field is available only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Date The date when the purchase order was created.
Currency The currency of the purchase order.
Order total The total of the purchase order.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the items received that has not been invoiced yet.
Amount not yet invoiced The amount of the purchase order that has not been invoiced yet.
Add purchase order (button) Adds the selected purchase orders to the invoice/prepayment.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected purchase orders to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without making additions to the invoice.
### The Link line dialog box By using the **Link line** dialog box, you can link the line selected in the invoice to a line in a released purchase receipt or in a purchase order in the **Balanced** status. For an invoice line with a stock item or non-stock item requiring receipt (for which the **Require receipt** check box is selected in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window), you can select only the lines of released purchase receipts that include the same item with the same item ID and with the same or smaller quantity received in the same currency from the same location of the same supplier. For an invoice line with a non-stock item (for which the **Require receipt** check box is cleared in the window), the dialog box by default displays the lines of open purchase orders that include the same item with the same (or less) quantity of the item received from the same location of the same supplier.
Element Description
Purchase order no. The number of the purchase order or purchase receipt which includes a line with a specific item. Leave the field blank to view more documents.
Warehouse The warehouse to receive the item. Leave the field blank to view more documents.
Item ID The item ID of the item in the selected line of the invoice.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
#### The Selected mode section
Element Description
Purchase order This selection mode is enabled for non-stock items that do not require receipts.
Purchase receipt This selection mode is enabled for stock items and non-stock items that require receipts. Also, you can select this mode if the item is a non-stock item that does not require receipt.
#### The Link line table
Element Description
Order no. The order number of the purchase order.
Type The type of the order.
Receipt no. The receipt number of the purchase receipt.
Supplier ref. The reference number of the original supplier’s document.
Warehouse The warehouse to receive the item.
Currency The currency of the document.
Order qty. The ordered quantity of the item.
Cost The cost of the document line item.
Original cost The original cost of the line if it has been split.
Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of the item from the purchase order or purchase receipt that has not yet been invoiced.
Amount not yet invoiced The amount of the purchase order line that has not yet been invoiced.
Transaction descr. The description of the document line.
Save (button) Links the selected document to the invoice and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Cancels all selections and closes the dialog box without making changes to the invoice.
### The Document details table
Column Description
Item ID The unique ID of the particular item or service delivered by the supplier.
External item ID This field is available if the Use external item ID option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. It allows you to use external item ID in matching of items during invoice import to the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S).
Supplier item ID The supplier’s item ID, if it is different from the item ID.
Transaction descr. Any description relevant to the transaction. An alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.
Quantity The quantity of the items or services of a particular type delivered by the supplier.
UoM The unit of measure for the items.
Unit cost

The unit cost of the item or service received from the supplier.

If you have modified the unit cost once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. To update the unit cost automatically to the current supplier’s price, you can use the Recalculate prices action.
Cost

The extended cost of the item or service, which is the unit price multiplied by the quantity.

If you have modified the extended cost once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. T o recalculate the extended cost automatically (supplier’s price specified for the stock item and multiplied by the quantity), you can use the Recalculate prices action.
Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the discount amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically. The column is available only if the Customer and suppler discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Manual discount

When this check box is selected, the discount has been applied manually.

With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, or you can select a discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application. The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount code

The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line automatically.

The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount series

The ID of a discount series that has been applied to this line.

The column is hidden by default and available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Amount Read-only. The total amount for the specified quantity of items or services of this type (after the discount has been taken).
Account The expense account to be updated by this transaction. By default, it is the account associated with the supplier class. When costs are added it takes account from supplier settings. If you use an item, an expense account from the item will be used.
Description Any description of the account that has been provided.
Expense account The expense account set for the stock item. This is available if the Use Expense accounts check box is selected in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
Description Any description of the account that has been provided.
Subaccount

The corresponding subaccount to be used for invoices and adjustments.

By default, it is composed for a particular item in accordance with the rules defined by the posting class of the item.

If the item has not been assigned to any posting class, the subaccount on an invoice is generated in accordance with the rule defined in the Combine the expense sub. from field in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Project

The project with which the item is associated, or the non-project code if the item is not intended for any project. This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled in your system and integrated with this workspace.

If the account on the line has an account group, the default project (X) will not be suggested and you have to enter a project. Invoices created through the Process VAT report (TX502000) window are ignoring this and will leave project empty if the account has a account group.
Project task The particular task of the selected project. You can select only a task associated with the selected project. This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace.
Non-invoiceable When this check box is selected, this document line is non-invoiceable in the project. This column appears only if the Projects module has been enabled and integrated with this workspace.
Split hierarchy The order on which the lines have been split.
Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the stock item or non-stock item specified in this document line. Upon release of the document, the system generates a deferral schedule (or schedules) based in the settings defined in this deferral code.

You can change the deferral code in this field manually, if needed.

If you change the MDA deferral code (the deferral code that indicates that an item is a package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider the item not to be a package and will ignore its components while generating a deferral schedule. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule for the item based in the settings of the specified non-MDA deferral code.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message.
Original deferral schedule

A read-only column filled in by the system in the purchase credit note documents created by the reversing process. It shows the ID of the deferral schedule associated with the original document (such as a purchase invoice).

If a purchase credit note document is created manually, you can select a deferral schedule to be reversed.

In the original documents, this column remains empty.
VAT category

The VAT category (if applied) for the transaction.

Unless you specify otherwise, it is the default VAT category of the supplier location’s VAT zone. If you select an item from the inventory list, it changes to the VAT category of the item.

If you change the VAT category on a split purchase invoice line, you can only select a category connected with the same VAT % as the parent line.
Purchase type The type of the purchase order linked to the invoice line.
Purchase order number The order number of the purchase order linked to this line of the invoice.
Purchase order line The number of the purchase order line linked to the invoice line.
Purchase order receipt no. The number of the purchase receipt linked to the invoice line.
Purchase order receipt line The line number of the purchase receipt’s line that is linked to this invoice line.
PPV ref. no The reference number of the inventory adjustment document that has been generated for the line item upon the release of the invoice.
PPV doc. type The type of the adjustment document that has been generated for the line item upon the release of the invoice.
Sort order Select the sort order of the table lines.
Status message reply The reply status from an integrated service when sending the document to it (such as AutoPay ). The status can be Approved or Rejected.
Retainage % The percent that is applied to the amount in the Ext. cost column minus the amount in the Discount amount column to calculate the amount to be retained for the line. By default, the system fills in this column with the value specified in the Default retainage percent field on the Retainage tab of the window; you can override this value. This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.
Retainage amount The amount to be retained for the line. The system calculates the amount by applying the retainage percent to the amount in the Ext. cost column minus the amount in the Discount amount column. You can override this value if required; if you do, the system recalculates the retainage percent accordingly. This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the supplier ledger account and subaccount used in the document and the supplier VAT zone. For a released document, the tab also contains a reference to the batch that implements the transactions. If the **Expense reclassification** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the tab provides information about the reclassification account and subaccount that were used for the document (if it was subjected to expense reclassification). ### The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Pre-releasing batch

The reference number of the batch that adjusts the appropriate account balances for the document with the Pre-released status.

This field appears only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the document has or has had the Pre-released status. Batches of this type use the number series assigned to batches that originated in the Supplier ledger module.
Batch no. The number of the batch that adjusts the appropriate account balances for the released document.
Branch The branch associated with the document.
Supplier account The liability account specified in the document.
Supplier subaccount The subaccount used in the document.
Reclassification account

The expense account used to record the expenses pending reclassification.

This field appears only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the document has or has had the Pre-released status.
Reclassification subaccount

The subaccount used to record the expenses pending reclassification.

This field appears only if the Expense reclassification functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and the document has or has had the Pre-released status.
Retainage payable account

The account used to record retained amounts on the invoice.

This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.
Retainage payable sub

The subaccount used to record retained amounts on the invoice.

This column appears only if the Apply retainage check box is selected in the top part of the window.
### The Payment information section
Element Description
Pay separately

When this check box is selected, the document should be paid by a separate payment.

This option appears only if the Pay separately option is selected for the supplier in the Suppliers (AP303000) window and the Activate Pay separately from Purchase invoices and Suppliers check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Approved for payment When this check box is selected, the document has been approved for payment. You can enable option Require approval of invoice before paying in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. The purchase invoice will then not be available inthe Process payments (AP50301S) window, if Approved for payment is not checked for the invoice. You can enable manual approval of purchase invoices the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window to showcase the option Require approval of invoice before paying.
Charge bearer The party that will pay possible expenses connected with the payment.
Priority The priority of the payment.
Payment reporting code The code used to report the payment (Sweden).
Payment message The message connected with the payment.
Pay date

The date when the invoice should be paid.

The date is the difference between the document due date or discount date (depending in the option selected in the Payment by field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window) and the number of days specified in the Payment lead time field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. If the difference is greater than or equal to the document date, then the document date is set as the pay date.
Payment location The supplier location. This field appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in your system.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Cash account The cash account used for the payment.
### The VAT section
Element Description
Supplier VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier, which is specified in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document. Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable tax or taxes.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

The default value is taken from the settings of the supplier selected in the Supplier field.
### The Assigned to section
Element Description
Work group ID A work group from which you can select the employee responsible for the document. By default, this field is empty.
Owner

The employee responsible for the document. By default, the employee linked to a currently logged in user is specified. You can override the default value.

This value defines the expense subaccount to be debited if the EE subaccount mask is specified in the Combine expense sub. from field in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000).
### The Payment details section
Element Description
Account used for payment The account that is used whey paying the document.
Payment instructions The details of the account that is used for payment.
## The VAT details tab This tab, whose elements are filled out automatically when you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), contains information about all VAT applied to the document. If automatic calculation of VAT is configured in your system, the system calculates the applicable VAT for each invoice and adjustment (based in the VAT codes of line items and the supplier VAT zone) and records the VAT amounts to the document.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the document.
Description The description of the VAT ID.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for a specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT.
Deductible VAT rate The percent of deduction that applies to the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.
Expense amount The amount that is deducted from the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.
Include in VAT exempt total If this check box is selected, the amount of the line is included in the VAT exempt total amount of the document.
Reverse VAT If this check box is selected, there is reverse VAT on the line.
Statistical VAT If this check box is selected, there is statistical VAT on the line.
VAT type The description of the VAT type on the line.
Pending VAT If this check box is selected, there is pending VAT on the line.
## The Retainage tab On this tab, you can view information related the retainage applied to the invoice and the list of the retainage invoices related to this invoice. This tab appears only if the **Apply retainage** check box is selected in the top part of the window.
Column Description
Default retainage (%) The default percent of the amount that is retained for each document line. By default, the system fills in this field with the value specified for the supplier in the Retainage (%) field in the Suppliers (AP303000) window. You can override this value.
Total amount The total amount of the invoice, including the retainage amount.
Original retainage The amount to be retained in all lines of the invoice. The original retainage amount is posted by the invoice to the Retainage payable account.
Unreleased retainage The amount that has been retained from the invoice and has not yet been released.
Unpaid retainage The amount that has been retained from the invoice and has not yet been paid.
Paid retainage The total amount paid for the retainage documents related to the invoice.
VAT on retainage The total amount of retained VAT for all lines.
Discount on retainage The total amount for all lines in the Retained discount column on the Discounts tab.
### The table columns
Column Description
Type The type of the document related to the invoice with retainage.
Ref. no The reference number of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Date The date of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Post period The financial period to which the retainage invoice or purchase credit note has been posted.
Status The status of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Amount The amount of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Balance The balance of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note which calculates as the document amount minus payments (or adjustments) applied.
Payment method The default payment method selected in the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
Supplier ref. The reference number that the supplier has assigned to the retainage invoice or purchase credit notet.
Description A description of the retainage invoice or purchase credit note.
## The Applications tab This tab, which appears for open documents, reflects the history of payment applications. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
View payment

The View payment button will open the application of the document connected with the active row in the Supplier payments (AP302000) window.

The button is available for the document types Purchase invoice and Credit adjustment.
Apply automatically Initiates the process of applying available payments to this document.
### Tab columns
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document that was applied to the document.
Invoice no. The number of the document.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid, which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the top part of the window.
Date The date when the payment was applied to the document.
Balance The current balance of the document.
Description A description provided for the payment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
Post period The post period of the payment document.
Payment ref. The payment reference number, which can be a system-generated number or an external reference number (such as a wire transfer number) entered manually on payment creation.
Status The status of the payment document.
## The Landed costs tab This tab appears only if the supplier selected in the top part has the **Landed cost supplier** check box selected in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
View purchase order document Navigates to the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window, which displays the details of the purchase receipt document (of the Receipt or Transfer type) for which these landed costs were added.
View inventory document Navigates to the Adjustments (IN303000) window, which displays the details of the Inventory adjustment document generated for this document. If such an adjustment was not generated for the document, process it by using the Close financial periods (AP506000) window.
Add postponed landed cost Opens the Add postponed landed cost dialog box, which lists landed costs with the Postpone purchase invoice creation check box selected on the Landed costs tab in the Purchase receipts (PO302000) window. In the dialog box, you can select a postponed landed cost (if any) and include it in the invoice.
Landed cost split Opens the Landed cost splits dialog box, where you can add purchase or transfer receipts among which the system should split the amount of the landed cost. Splitting of the amount of a landed cost is not available for the postponed landed costs.
### The table columns
Column Description
Landed cost code

The landed cost code used to describe the specific landed costs incurred for the purchase receipt document of the Receipt or Transfer type. This code is one of the codes associated with the landed cost supplier.

Landed costs can be added by using the Landed cost codes ( PO202000) window.
Description The description provided for the landed cost code.
Amount The amount of landed costs incurred for the goods specified in the purchase receipt. The amount must be greater than zero.
Purchase receipt type The type of the receipt this document is associated with.
Purchase order receipt no. The reference number of the receipt this document is associated with. You can add a purchase or transfer receipt or a receipt line by using the respective ( Add purchase order receipt or Add purchase order receipt line ) button on the Document details tab.
Item ID The item ID of the item in the receipt line for which the landed costs are specified.
Warehouse The warehouse into which the receipt was done.
Location The location into which the receipt was done.
## The Discount details tab This tab is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in your system. The **Discount details** tab has a table that shows the details of the **Group** and **Document** level discounts that were applied to the document.
Column Description
Skip discount When this check box is selected, a Group or Document level discount for the document is cancelled. Selecting the check box updates the total and the line amounts for the document, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Discount code The discount code of the supplier discount applied to the document automatically or manually.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount applied to the document ( Group or Document ).
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the supplier discount shown in this row has been applied manually (from the Group or Document level discounts marked as manual in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window).
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined to be based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is defined to be based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Retained discount The retained discount if retainage is applied on the document.
Discount percent The discount percent if the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Purchase order no The order number of the purchase order.
Purchase order receipt no. The receipt number of the purchase order.
## The Approval details tab This tab is available only if the Approval license is in use. The tab holds information on approvals of the supplier ledger documents.
Column Description
Default document The default document to be shown in approval.
Initial approver The person to first approve the document when sent to approval, disregarding configured workflow.
Update lines Click to update the lines to be approved.
Comment The comment connected with the approval of the payments.
Add attachment Click to open the Upload dialog box. Click Choose file and select the file you want to upload.
## The Inbox details tab This tab is available for invoices that come from the [Invoice Inbox (AP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/invoice-inbox-ap50604s/).
Column Description
Detail total The total amount of the invoice excluding VAT.
Total VAT taxable The total taxable amount of the invoice.
Total VAT exempt The total amount of the invoice excluding VAT.
VAT total The total amount of VAT on the invoice.
With. tax The amount of withholding tax on the invoice.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the invoice.
Balance The total amount of the invoice including VAT.

View details

button

This button opens the Invoice details window where you can preview the invoice and its more specific details.

Note

Any comment you add to an invoice in the Invoice details window will appear on the invoice also in the Process payments (AP50301S) window. AP50604S-ref.htm
Purchase invoices pending payment (AP403000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-pending-payment-ap403000 page You use this window to get summary information about outstanding invoices that have been approved for payment but have not been paid yet. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices pending payment (AP403000) You use this window to get summary information about outstanding invoices that have been approved for payment but have not been paid yet. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process payment Navigates to the Create batch payments (AP505000) window where you can create a payment document.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to define the criteria of the pending invoices you want to view.
Element Description
Cash account The cash account used as a source account. You can select an account or make no selection.
Payment method The payment method of the pending invoices you want to view. You can select any payment method configured in the system or associated with the cash account, if you selected one.
Pay date The current date or any date you select. Documents with an earlier pay date or the same pay date will be displayed.
Currency A read-only field showing the currency of the pending invoices. This field appears only if all the invoices are in the same currency.
Total due A read-only field that displays the total amount of the selected invoices in the base currency if the invoices have different currencies, or in the common currency if all the invoices are in the same currency.
## The Totals table In this table, each listed item is a total on documents that have the same cash account, payment method, and currency, so that you can see how much you should pay from each cash account.
Column Description
Cash account The cash account as a potential source of cash for paying the invoices and other documents. It is the default cash account for the supplier.
Description The description of the cash account.
Payment method The payment method associated with the cash account.
Currency The currency of the group of outstanding payments.
Documents The number of outstanding documents with the same cash account, payment method, and currency.
Amount The total amount on the outstanding documents with this cash account, currency, and payment method.
Overdue documents The number of overdue documents with this cash account, currency, and payment method.
Overdue documents amount The balance of the overdue documents.
Valid discount documents The number of documents that have valid cash discounts on the pay date specified above.
Valid discount amount The total amount of cash discounts available on the pay date.
Lost discount documents The number of documents that have lost cash discounts on the pay date specified above.
Lost discount amount The total amount of discounts lost by the pay date for the group of outstanding documents.
Min. pay date The earliest pay date on the documents.
Max. pay date The latest pay date on the documents.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Purchase invoices - overview (AP40103S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-overview-ap40103s page In this window, you can filter and view the purchase invoices in the system and see more detailed information on the documents on the Details view tab. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices - overview (AP40103S) In this window, you can filter and view the purchase invoices in the system and see more detailed information on the documents on the Details view tab. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The top part
Element Description
Approval status

Select one the values in this field to filter the list on the documents’ status in Approval:

View all
View invoices with all approval statuses.
New
View invoices with the status New.
Cancelled
View invoices with the status Cancelled in Approval. This is the status after you have clicked Cancel (the Send to Approval button changes to Cancel when you have sent a document to Approval ).
Sent to Approval
View invoices with the status Sent to Approval.
Received in Approval
View invoices with the status Received in Approval.
Pending
View invoices with the status Pending. This status is displayed when invoices are on a valid approval flow and are pending approval.
Rejected
View invoices that have been rejected by Approval.
Approved
View invoices with the status Approved. This status indicates that the invoice has been approved and you can now release invoices that are ready to be paid. In the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window, you can set up automatic release of approved invoices.
Active workflow
View invoices with the status Active workflow. This status is displayed only during a brief system check, to find out whether the settings for sending invoices to Approval are correct.
Error
The invoice encountered an unspecified error. Please try again.
Document status

The status of the document in Visma Net

View all
View all documents, regardless of status.
On hold
View only documents with the status On hold.
Balanced
View only documents with the status Balanced.
Voided
View only documents with the status Voided.
Scheduled
View only documents with the status Scheduled. You can schedule invoices in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Open
View only documents with the status Open.
Closed
View only documents with the status Closed.
Printed
View only documents with the status Printed.
Pre-released
View only documents with the status Pre-released. Invoices get this status if you have clicked Pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Pending approval
View only documents with the status Pending approval.
Rejected
View only documents with the status Rejected.
Reserved
View only documents with the status Reserved.
Supplier class The supplier class to which the supplier belongs.
Supplier The supplier’s name.
Currency The currency of the supplier document.
Document type

The type of document. Available types are:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Credit adjustment
  • Purchase credit note
  • Prepayment
Approver The name of the approver of the document.
Initial approver The name of the first approver of the document.
Sender The name of the person who sent the document for approval.
Show details Select this check box to see more information about the documents on the Details view tab.
Overdue documents only Select this check box to see more information about documents that are overdue.
Show closed, scheduled, and voided Select this check box to include documents with these statuses on the Summary view tab.
Show only documents with comments entered in Approval Select this filter to see only the purchase invoices sent to Approval, which have comments.
From due date Select a due date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To due date Select a due date until which you want to see supplier documents.
From cash discount date Select a cash discount date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To cash discount date Select a cash discount date until which you want to see supplier documents.
From pay date Select a pay date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To pay date Select a pay date until which you want to see supplier documents.
From period Select a period from which you want to see supplier documents.
To period Select a period until which you want to see supplier documents.
From document date Select a document date from which you want to see supplier documents.
To document date Select a document date to which you want to see supplier documents.
Detail total Displays the detail total for all documents with the selected criteria.
VAT taxable total Displays the VAT taxable total for all documents with the selected criteria.
VAT exempt total Displays the VAT exempt total for all documents with the selected criteria.
VAT total Displays the VAT total for all documents with the selected criteria.
With. tax Displays the withheld tax (if any) for all documents with the selected criteria.
Balance Displays the balance for all documents with the selected criteria.
Rounding diff. Displays the rounding difference (if any) for the amounts displayed.
Amount Displays the total amount for all documents with the selected criteria.
Cash discount Displays the total cash discount that has been granted (if any) for the documents with the selected criteria.
## The Summary view table The **Summary view** tab lists the results of your selections in the top area and changes to reflect the criteria you select and deselect. For certain selection criteria, the tab changes to a **Detailed view**, to give you more information about the selected range of documents.
Column Description
Approval status

Displays the document’s status in Approval:

New
The document has the status New.
Cancelled
The document has the status Cancelled.
Sent to Approval
The document has the status Sent to Approval.
Received in Approval
The document has the status Received in Approval.
Pending
The document has the status Pending.
Rejected
The document has been rejected by Approval.
Approved
The document has the status Approved.
Active workflow
The document has the status Active workflow.
Error
The document has the status Error.
Document status

Displays the status of the document in Visma Net

On hold
The document has the status On hold.
Balanced
The document has the status Balanced.
Voided
The document has the status Voided.
Scheduled
The document has the status Scheduled.
Open
The document has the status Open.
Closed
The document has the status Closed.
Printed
The document has the status Printed.
Pre-released
The document has the status Pre-released. This status is given to invoices that you pre-book in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Pending approval
The document has the status Pending approval.
Rejected
The document has the status Rejected.
Reserved
The document has the status Reserved.
Documents The number of documents that match the Approval and document status values.
Detail total The total amount of the document excluding VAT.
VAT amount The amount of VAT that is included in the Total incl. VAT.
With. tax amount The amount of withheld tax (if any).
Total incl. VAT The sum of the Detail total and the VAT amount.
Balance The current balance for the document.
Last document date The latest document date of the documents of the respective line.
First due date The first due date set for the document.
Balance (currency) The balance in currency (if any).
Cash discount Any cash discount amount that has been granted.
Detail total (currency) The detail total in currency (if any).
Extended approval status Displays a more detailed status of the document.
First cash discount date The first cash discount date set for the document.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference, if any.
Total incl. VAT (currency) The sum of the Detail total and the VAT amount (if any).
VAT exempt total The total amount that is VAT exempt.
VAT taxable total The total amount that is VAT taxable.
Approval flow Approval flow gives you the picture of the flow and comments that you also see in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window on the Approval details tab.
Comment counter The comment counter shows how many comments there are on the invoice.
Recurring transactions (AP203500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/recurring-transactions-ap203500 page This window allows you to create and manage schedules for recurring supplier ledger documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recurring transactions (AP203500) This window allows you to create and manage schedules for recurring supplier ledger documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction To do this, create a schedule and add one or multiple documents of the following types: **Purchase invoice**, **Purchase credit note**, **Credit adjustment**, and **Prepayment**. Additionally, you can add documents to existing schedules. + You can only schedule documents with the **Balanced** status. Once you assign a document to a schedule, its status changes to **Scheduled**. + A schedule determines the frequency and number of times assigned documents should be generated. The system uses the original documents as templates to create similar documents with updated transaction dates and other details. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a schedule for recurring invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-schedule-for-recurring-invoices/) + [Schedule a recurring invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/schedule-a-recurring-invoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Run now Initiates the process of running a schedule and generating documents according to the schedule.
## The top part In this area, you can create a new schedule and edit or delete any existing schedule.
Element Description
Schedule ID The ID of the schedule. A new schedule gets its unique ID in accordance with the number series assigned to schedules in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Active When this check box is selected, the schedule is active. When the check box is cleared, the schedule cannot be used.
Start date The start date for the schedule.
Expiration date A date that, if set, indicates when the schedule expires. This field is unavailable if the Never expires check box is selected.
Never expires When this check box is selected, no expiration date is set.
Execution limit (times) The maximum number of times the schedule can be executed. This field is unavailable when the No limit check box is selected.
No limit Selecting this check box will continue the schedule indefinitely into future financial periods. Upon selection, the Execution limit field will be unavailable.
Description A description for the schedule.
Last executed A read-only field that displays the date when the documents were last generated. If no documents were generated according to the schedule, the field is unavailable.
Next execution A read-only field that displays the date when the schedule should be executed next, based on the schedule parameters.
Executed (times) A read-only field whose value shows how many times the schedule was executed or how many times the documents were generated. A 0 here indicates that the schedule has not been executed yet and no documents have been generated.
### The Schedule type section The section you see to the right of this section depends on the schedule type you select here.
Element Description
Schedule type

The frequency at which documents should be generated. Click one of the following option buttons, which are described in detail in the next sections:

Daily
The documents will be generated daily or once every x days.
Weekly
The documents will be generated once a week or once every x weeks.
Monthly
The documents will be generated once per month or once every x months.
By financial period
The documents will be generated only once per financial period or once every x financial periods.

Select the schedule type, and then enter the settings specific to the type in the corresponding section.
### The Daily section
Element Description
Every x day(s) A number that specifies the time interval (in days) for document generation. For example: 1 would mean every day and 2 would mean every other day, starting on the start date.
### The Weekly section
Element Description
Every x week(s) A number that specifies the time interval (in weeks) for document generation, with the boxes indicating the day or days of the week when the documents should be generated: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, or Saturday.
### The Monthly section
Element Description
Every x month(s) A number that specifies a time interval (in months) for generating documents. For example: A 3 here would generate the documents every three months. For this schedule type, you should enter a number and select one of the option buttons below this field.
On day

An option button that you select if you want to select a particular day of the month.

If you select this button, you should select the day of the month for the invoice in the adjacent field.
On the nth day of the week

An option button that you can select if you want to select a particular day of the week within the month.

If you select this button, you should also select the ordinal number in the left field that specifies the week in the month, and the day of the week in the right field, for example, 2nd Thursday.
### The By financial period section
Element Description
Every x period(s)

A number that specifies a time interval for document generation, measured in financial periods.

In addition to selecting this number, you should select one of the following option buttons, which determine when documents should be generated.
Start of the financial period An option button that sets the start date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
End of period An option button that sets the end date of the financial period as the day when documents should be generated.
Fixed day of the period

An option button that you use if documents should be generated on a particular day of the financial period.

If you select this button, select the particular day in the field.
## The Document list tab On the **Document list** tab, you can assign one document or multiple documents to the schedule. You can select documents from the list of those with the status **Balanced**. Other columns in the row display the selected document's details.
Column Description
Type The type of the supplier ledger document. The following types of documents can be scheduled: Purchase invoice, Prepayment, Purchase credit note, or Credit adjustment.
Ref. no. The ID of the original document, which is used as a template. Other columns in the row are read-only and display the details of the original document.
Supplier The ID of the supplier whose document is being scheduled.
Supplier name The complete name of the supplier as it appears on the documents.
Status The status of the original document.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the original document.
Currency An identifier of the currency used for the document.
Description A user-defined description for the document.
## The Generated documents tab This tab displays the list of documents generated from this schedule being run.
Column Description
Type The document type that can be one of the following: Purchase invoice, Prepayment, Purchase credit note, or Credit adjustment.
Ref. no. The reference number of the generated document.
Supplier The supplier whose document was generated.
Supplier name The complete name of the supplier as it appears on the documents.
Status The status of the generated document.
Date The date of the transactions.
Post period The financial period to which the generated transactions should be posted.
Amount The amount of the generated document.
Currency The ID of the currency used for the document.
Description The user-defined description of the document.
Release landed costs from purchase invoices (AP506500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-landed-costs-from-purchase-invoices-ap506500 section You can use this window to process landed costs associated with purchase invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release landed costs from purchase invoices (AP506500) You can use this window to process landed costs associated with purchase invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can use this window to process landed costs associated with purchase invoices. As a result of processing, the system generates inventory adjustments to update the costs of the stock items involved. This window shows only documents for which generation of the inventory adjustments failed on the document release. During processing, carefully note any error messages you get and fix the related problems, which generally result from missing accounts. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process

Initiates generation of the inventory adjustments for the selected purchase invoices that include landed cost codes.

The green icon-confirmation icon appears in the window toolbar if the operation has completed successfully. The red icon-erroricon indicates that the operation was cancelled because some required conditions were not met. Point to the red icon to view the error message.
Process all Initiates generation of the inventory adjustments for all listed purchase invoices that include landed cost codes.
## The Documents table This table contains the list of documents that have associated landed cost codes and for which generation of the adjustments failed.
Column Description
Type

The type of document. The available types are:

Purchase invoice
For this type, the initial supplier document will update the supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Credit adjustment
This supplier document will update the supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Payment
This document will update the balances of the cash account and the supplier ledger account by the amount paid to the supplier.
Purchase credit note
This type suggests that the document will update the supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balances.
Supplier refund
This document will update the balances of the cash account and the supplier ledger account by the amount received from the supplier.
Voided refund
This type refers to a voided refund.
Quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Voided quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Prepayment
This refers to a prepayment request or a prepayment itself, depending on the document’s status.
Supplier document no. The reference number of the document.
Date The date of the document.
Currency The document’s currency.
Supplier The ID of the landed cost supplier associated with the document.
Supplier name The landed cost supplier associated with the document, by its name
Location The location of the supplier associated with the document.
Receipt total amt. The total amount of the receipt associated with the purchase document.
Landed cost total The total of the landed costs in the purchase document.

Related pages

Concepts

 Release supplier documents (AP501000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/release-supplier-documents-ap501000 page By using this window, you can view all Supplier ledger documents (purchase invoices, purchase credit notes, credit notes, and prepayments) that are ready to be released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release supplier documents (AP501000) By using this window, you can view all Supplier ledger documents (purchase invoices, purchase credit notes, credit notes, and prepayments) that are ready to be released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can release all the documents or only selected ones. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the supplier documents and payments that you have selected. This action changes the status of the selected documents to Open, and either creates unposted batches or posts the batches directly to the General ledger workspace, depending on whether the Automatically post on release option is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Release all Releases all the supplier documents available on the list. Here, too, whether transactions will be directly posted on release is defined by the Automatically post on release option in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
## The table This table includes the list of all the documents that are not yet released and that have the **Balanced** status.
Column Description
Branch The ID of the branch to which this document is related.
Branch name

The name of the branch to which this document is related.

The column is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Type

The type of the document. The following types are available:

Purchase invoice
For this type, the initial supplier document will update the Supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Credit adjustment
This type of document will update the Supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balance.
Purchase credit note
This type suggests that the document will update the Supplier ledger liability account and the supplier account balances.
Payment
This type of document will update the balances of the cash account and the Supplier ledger account by the amount paid to the supplier.
Voided payment
This type refers to a voided payment.
Prepayment
This type refers to a prepayment request or a prepayment itself, depending on the document’s status.
Supplier refund
This document will update the balances of the cash account and the Supplier ledger account by the amount received from the supplier.
Quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Voided refund
This type refers to a voided refund.
Void quick payment
This document type is currently not supported.
Prepayment request
This type refers to a prepayment request.
Ref. no. The ID of the document. Click the number to navigate to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) or Supplier payments (AP302000) window, depending on the type of the selected document.
Supplier The supplier associated with the document, by its ID.
Supplier name The name of this supplier.
Supplier bank account The bank account to which the purchase invoice will be paid.
Supplier ref. The external number of the document (the number of the original supplier invoice) for reference.
Status The status of the document. You can only release Balanced documents.
Approval status The status of the document in Approval, if it is in use.
Comment The comment written on the document.
Date The date when the document was created.
Due date The due date from the purchase invoice.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted.
Amount The amount of the document.
Currency The currency used for the document.
Description A user-defined description of the document or payment.

Related pages

Tasks

 Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-supplier-ap102010 page In this window, you can view the restriction groups that include a particular supplier account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010) In this window, you can view the restriction groups that include a particular supplier account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction In this window, you can view the restriction groups that include a particular supplier account. You can also change the visibility of the supplier account in the system by including it in other restriction groups or excluding it from groups in which it is currently included. You can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of supplier accounts by using the [Supplier access (AP102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-access-ap102000/) window. ## The top part In this area, you can select the supplier account for which you want to view or edit its membership in restriction groups. You can also view additional information about the selected supplier account.
Element Description
Supplier no. The supplier (by its identifier) whose membership in restriction groups you want to view (and edit, if needed) in the table.
Status Read-only. The status of the selected supplier account, Active or Inactive.
Supplier name Read-only. The name of the selected supplier as it appears on the documents.
## The table In this table, you can view the full list of restriction groups in the system, along with some basic information about each group. The check box in the unlabelled **Included** column is selected for each group that contains the supplier account. You can select and clear these check boxes to change the membership of the supplier account in restriction groups.
Column Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that the restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse.
Supplier access (AP102000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-access-ap102000 page By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of supplier accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or supplier accounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier access (AP102000) By using this window, you can create restriction groups for managing the visibility of supplier accounts to users, or modify existing restriction groups by adding or removing users or supplier accounts. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can also use the [Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/restriction-groups-by-supplier-ap102010/) window to manage the visibility of supplier accounts to users, but you cannot create restriction groups in this window. For more information about restriction groups, see: [About restriction groups in Visma Net](/visma-net-erp/help/access-management/row-level-security/about-restriction-groups-in-visma-net-erp/). ## The top part In this area, you can enter the settings of a new restriction group or select an existing group and edit its settings.
Element Description
Group name The name of the restriction group. You can type a name of a new group or select an existing group.
Description The description of the restriction group. You can type a description if this field is empty or edit an existing description.
Group type The type of the restriction group. You can select one of the following types: A, A inverse, B, or B inverse.
Active

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the restriction group is active. You can clear the check box to make the group inactive, which means that restrictions imposed by the restriction group do not affect the visibility of entities to users.

By default, this check box is selected.
## The Users tab On this tab, you can view the list of users defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Login Read-only. The login of the user.
Full name Read-only. The full name of the user.
Comment Read-only. The additional information that has been specified for the user in the Users (SM201010) window.
## The Suppliers tab On this tab, you can view the list of supplier accounts defined in the system and select those to be included in the restriction group.
Column Description
Supplier no.

The ID of the supplier account.

You can click the supplier number to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window and view the settings of this supplier.
Status Read-only. The status of the supplier account, which can be either Active or Inactive.
Supplier name Read-only. The name of the supplier as it appears on documents.
Supplier classes (AP201000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000 page You can use this window to create supplier classes, which are groups of suppliers with similar properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier classes (AP201000) You can use this window to create supplier classes, which are groups of suppliers with similar properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction Supplier classes make it easier to create supplier accounts in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window: once you assign a new supplier to a specific class, the default accounts and subaccounts from the class, as well as other settings defined for the class, will be inserted into the corresponding elements. To ease the creation of supplier classes, specify an existing supplier class as the default class in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. After you do this, when you create a new supplier class, the elements in this window will be populated with the values from the default supplier class. However, you can overwrite any of these values. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier-class/) + [Change the VAT zone for a supplier class](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/change-the-vat-zone-for-a-supplier-class/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Apply restriction settings to all suppliers Updates the security settings for all suppliers of the class. If you change the default restriction group for the selected supplier class, clicking this button will include all suppliers of the class in the new default restriction group and exclude them from the group previously specified as the default one.
## The top part In this area, you can select a class and view its description, or you can specify this information for a class you are creating.
Element Description
Class ID The unique ID of the class, max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A detailed description of the supplier class.
## The General information tab On this tab, you can view or modify the settings of the selected class. You can specify as few or as many default settings as you like. Changes to the class settings will not affect the already existing records of the suppliers in the class; however, when you create a supplier and fill in the supplier class, the new supplier account gets the most up-to-date class settings. ### The Default general settings section
Element Description
Country The country of the suppliers in this class. By default, it is the country of your company.
VAT zone ID The default VAT zone for the suppliers of the class.
Require VAT zone When this check box is selected, a VAT zone is required for the suppliers in the class. If it is not selected, a VAT zone is optional.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode for the suppliers in the class, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document for a supplier in this class in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

You can override this mode at the supplier, location, or document level.
Default location ID from branch When this check box is selected, the ID of the branch to which the user is currently signed in, is used by default as the ID of the supplier’s main location instead of MAIN (default). This field is available only when the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Default restriction group The restriction group to which newly created suppliers of the class will be assigned by default. To include all existing suppliers of the class in this restriction group, click Apply restriction settings to all suppliers.
Import type The type of import that defines which cost account should be used on purchase orders and invoice lines. The cost account used might differ for Domestic, Domestic exempt VAT, EU, and non-EU suppliers.
Document language The language used on documents (such as purchase orders).
Currency ID The default currency used in operations with the suppliers in this class. By default, your company’s base currency is used.
Enable currency override When this check box is selected, the currency may be overridden for transactions; a currency other than the default currency may be selected for individual documents.
Currency rate type The default currency rate type used in operations with suppliers of this class.
Enable rate override When this check box is selected, the currency rate type may be overridden for transactions and that a currency other than the default currency may be selected for individual documents.
### The Default purchase settings section
Element Description
Shipping terms The shipping terms to be used in relations with the suppliers in the class.
Receipt action

The default action for the suppliers in the class, which will be performed on receipt of purchased goods if the specified conditions are not met. Select one of the following options:

Reject
Receipt of the items will be rejected.
Accept but warn
Receipt of the items will be accepted, but the system will generate a warning for the applicable purchase order line.
Accept
Receipt of the items will be accepted.
Warning when missing VAT registration ID When this check box is selected, you get a warning if you enter a supplier without a VAT registration ID.
Warning when missing corporate ID When this check box is selected, you get a warning if you enter a supplier without a corporate ID.
Warning on duplicate org. and/or VAT number on different supplier When this check box is selected, you get a warning if one of the ID types above has already been used.
Do not allow duplicate supplier When this check box is selected, you get an error message if the number you entered is already in use. You cannot save the information in the window if you have entered duplicate supplier numbers.
### The Approval settings section
Element Description
Approval required before release When this check box is selected, approval of documents is required before you can release them.
### The Default financial and payment settings section
Element Description
Terms The default payment terms for the supplier class. You can create and view terms in the Payment terms (CS206500) window.
Payment method The default payment method for the class.
Cash account The cash account to be used by default for operations with the suppliers in this class.
Payment by The way the suppliers in this class should be paid: by Due date or Discount date.
### The Default supplier properties section
Element Description
Webhook notification When this check box is selected, you can get notified via a Webhook upon an action or a confirmation in Visma Net.
Account used for payment Select here the account that to be used by default for payment for this supplier class.
### The Default print and email settings section
Element Description
Print orders When this check box is selected, purchase orders for suppliers of the class will be printed on release.
Send orders by email When this check box is selected, purchase orders for the suppliers in the class will be emailed on release.
### The Invoice import settings section
Element Description
Match item during import of invoices When this check box is selected and when invoices arrive in Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), Visma Net has a functionality to match items during invoice import. You can set this option on the supplier. To make this work, you must first set the supplier item ID in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window (or, in the Stock items (IN202500) window) and then on the Supplier details tab.
Create invoices with one line for each VAT rate When this check box is selected, the purchase invoice that is created will have only one line per VAT rate. The expected VAT amount is calculated based on the net amount and the VAT code applied to the invoice.
Import header amounts by VAT code When this check box is selected for a supplier and you process an invoice from this supplier in Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), the lines will be disregarded and only the invoice header amounts will be used for creating lines on the purchase invoice. One line will still be created for each VAT category on the invoice.
## The General ledger accounts tab On this tab, you can specify the default general ledger accounts for the supplier class. The following table summarises the elements of this tab.
Element Description
Supplier account The liability account to be used to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the suppliers in this class.
Supplier subaccount The subaccount to be used with the account to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the suppliers in this class.
Expense account The expense account to be used to record transactions with the suppliers in this class.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used to record expenses made to the suppliers in this class.
Expense EU account The EU expense account to be used to record expenses made to the suppliers in this class.
Expense account, import The import expense account to be used to record expenses made to the suppliers in this class.
Expense subaccount The subaccount to be used with the expense account to record transactions with the suppliers in this class.
Discount account The general ledger account to be used to record the amounts of discounts received from the suppliers in this class. The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount subaccount The subaccount to be used to record the amounts of discounts received from the suppliers in this class. The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash discount account The discount account to be used to record cash discount amounts received from the suppliers in this class due to payment terms.
Cash discount sub. The subaccount to be used to record cash discount amounts received from the suppliers in this class.
Prepayment account The account to be used to record prepayments paid to the suppliers in this class.
Prepayment subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used to record prepayments paid to the suppliers in this class.
Reclassification account The account to be used to temporarily record expenses that require reclassification.
Reclassification subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used record expenses requiring reclassification.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used to record transactions that are the result of receipts invoicing.
Purchase accrual subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be used to record transactions that are the result of receipts invoicing.
Unrealised gain account The account to be used to record unrealised gains on transactions with the suppliers in this class. If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window is used.
Unrealised gain sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used to record unrealised gains on transactions with the suppliers in this class. If no subaccount is selected in this column, a subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.
Unrealised loss account The account to be used to record unrealised loss on transactions with the suppliers in this class. If no account is selected in this column, the account specified in the Currencies (CM202000) window is used.
Unrealised loss sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used to record unrealised loss on transactions with the suppliers of this class. If no subaccount is selected in this column, a subaccount will be generated according to the rule specified in the Combine gain/loss sub. from field in the Currency management preferences (CM101000) window.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of supplier attributes associated with the class. You can select an attribute from the list of attributes defined in your system. To add a new attribute, use the [Attributes (CS205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/attributes-cs205000/) window.
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, the attribute is active.
Attribute ID The name of the attribute, which serves as its ID. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A detailed description of the attribute. Max. 50 characters, both numbers and letters.
Sort order A number that represents the order of the attribute for sorting in reports.
Required When this check box is selected, the attribute value is required for all suppliers of the class.
Internal When this check box is selected, this attribute is intended to be used only as internal.
Control type The type of control for the attribute: Text, Combo box, Multi select combo, Lookup, Check box, or Date/time.
Default value The default value of the attribute.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for the suppliers in this class. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents (by email) to suppliers and company employees overseeing operations with suppliers of the class. Mailing settings specified here will be used as default values for mailings configured for particular suppliers. You can select mailings for the supplier class from the list of predefined mailings defined in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window and the [Purchase order preferences (PO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) window. The current version of Visma Net provides only the **PURCHASE ORDER** predefined mailing for suppliers. The **Mailing settings** tab provides default values for mailings to be configured for particular suppliers. Emails for active mailings will be generated and sent to supplier contacts and company employees when a user invokes the action specific to the mailing on an appropriate processing window. Such emails can contain purchase orders in any of the available formats or a personalised email text based on a template. The tab includes the **Mailings** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, which has the list of recipients. In the **Recipients** table, you can specify default types of supplier contacts, not particular contacts. Only employees of your company can be specified as email recipients at the supplier class level. ### The Mailings table By using this table you can view and modify the list of mailings to be available by default for the suppliers in this class. The settings here are used as follows: + To provide default values for mailing settings for the suppliers in this class + To specify the mailings to be used to inform employees of your company, if needed, about changes in the documents of the suppliers in this class
Column Description
Mailing ID The unique ID of the mailing.
Branch The branch for which this mailing is used.
Email account The system email account to be used by default for sending emails for this mailing to the suppliers of the class. If no account is specified, the system account specified in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window will be used.
Report The purchase order or supplier ledger report to be used by default as the email’s body, if a report is used for this mailing. For the mailing, either a report or a template can be specified.
Notification template The email template to be used by default to generate personalised emails for this mailing.
Format The format in which the document (formatted according to the selected report if applicable) will be sent by default if a recipient has no preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, this mailing is active (switched on). Emails will be sent only for active mailings.
### The Recipients table Use the **Recipients** table to view and modify the list of default recipients for mailings. This list is primarily used to provide default contact types for the supplier class; if necessary, you can also specify an employee of your company to receive electronic copies of documents of the suppliers in this class.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive mailings:

Primary
The contact specified as the supplier’s primary contact
Remittance
The contact specified as the supplier’s remittance contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the supplier’s shipping contact
Employee
The employee of your organisation who handles the documents of the suppliers in this class or is otherwise associated with the supplier class
Contact ID The mailing recipient. A particular recipient can be selected only if Employee is specified as the Contact type. This employee, if one has been selected, will receive emails with documents of all the suppliers in this class.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent for recipients of this type by default. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active When this check box is selected, this recipient is active. Only active recipients can receive emails.
Bcc When this check box is selected, the recipient will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails.
Supplier details (AP402000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000 page This window is intended for quick inquiries about a specific supplier's outstanding balance. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier details (AP402000) This window is intended for quick inquiries about a specific supplier's outstanding balance. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can view the balance by financial period and by currency. + If no currency is selected, all amounts are displayed in the base currency. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

Enter new purchase invoice
Navigates to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can enter a new invoice.
Enter new payment
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can enter a new payment.
Pay invoice
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can create a payment for the invoice.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to reports:

Balance by supplier
Navigates to the Balance by supplier (AP63250S) report.
Supplier history
Navigates to the Supplier history (AP652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AP631000) report.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AP631500) report.
Supplier register
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (AP621500) report.
## The top part You use these elements to narrow the information to be displayed.
Element Description
Company

The company of the transactions to be viewed.

By default, it is the current company.
Branch

The branch of the transactions to be viewed.

By default, it is the current branch.
Supplier The supplier of the transactions to be viewed, by its ID.
Period The financial period for which supplier documents will be displayed.
Supplier account The supplier ledger account used in operations with the supplier.
Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Currency The currency of the documents to be included in the list. Leave the field empty to display all documents that meet the other criteria you have selected.
From period The financial period from which closed/voided documents will be displayed.
To period The financial period to which closed/voided documents will be displayed.
Show more details When this check box is selected, there are more columns available in the table part.
Include unreleased documents When this check box is selected, unreleased documents (with the On hold and Balanced statuses) are included in the list.
By financial period When this check box is selected, balances are shown by the financial period of the document transactions. Clear the check box to show balances by documents’ dates. The check box is displayed if a financial period is selected in the Period field.
Balance by documents A read-only field showing the balance calculated for all documents that match the selected criteria, except the closed ones.
Current balance A read-only field indicating the balance for the documents, as retrieved from the supplier ledger account history records stored in the database.
Prepayment balance A read-only field showing the current balance of prepayments made to the supplier or the balance at the end of the selected period.
Balance discrepancy

This read-only field displays any discrepancies in the balance. It shows the difference between the balance calculated by documents and the customer’s current balance. If Unreleased documents are included, the value may be non-zero.

If the value is non-zero in other cases, there may be errors in the database.
Retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage withheld from the supplier documents in the selected branch at the end of the period (if specified) or at the end of the last activity period (if the period is not specified). This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The table This table displays the documents that match the criteria you specified in the top part.
Column Description
Branch The branch of the transactions displayed.
Type The type of the document or payment.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document.
Date The date of the document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Post period The financial period for posting the document transactions.
Status The status of the document.
Currency The currency used in relations with the supplier.
Original amount (currency) The original amount of the document, before cash discount, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
Balance (currency) The amount of the document after the cash discount is taken, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
Cash discount taken (currency) The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
VAT withheld (currency) The amount on VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier, in the currency used in relations with the supplier.
Orig. amount The original amount of the document, before cash discount, in the base currency.
Balance The balance of the document before the cash discount is taken, in the base currency.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken due to prompt payment, in the base currency.
VAT withheld The amount of VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier, in the base currency.
RGOL amount The total amount of realised gain or loss (RGOL) incurred as the result of currency conversions.
Payment method The payment method used if the document is a payment.
Supplier invoice no./payment no. The reference number of the supplier’s original invoice or the payment issued.
Description The description of the document.
Pre-booked This shows if the document has been pre-booked.
Pre-book period The period to which the document is pre-booked.
Pre-releasing batch no. The number of the pre-releasing batch to which the document belongs.
Last batch payment The number of the last batch payment document with a link to it.
Last payment date The date for the last entered payment.
Last payment The number of the last payment document with a link to it.
Currency original retainage The retained amount in the currency of the document. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Unreleased retainage currency The amount of unreleased retainage in the currency of the document. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Original retainage The reference number of the invoice with retainage to which this retainage invoice is related. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retainage invoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document is a retainage invoice. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Related pages

Windows

 Supplier list (AP40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-list-ap40101s page This window lists suppliers by their supplier class and status. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier list (AP40101S) This window lists suppliers by their supplier class and status. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description

View supplier

(button)

 Click View supplier to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window and to take a closer look at the selected supplier.
## The top part
Element Description
Supplier class Select a supplier class if you want to list suppliers of a specific class.
Status

In the Status field, you can filter suppliers according to the status they have in Visma Net:

Active - Lists all active suppliers.

On hold - Lists all suppliers that have the status On hold.

Hold payments - Lists all suppliers that have the status Hold payments.

Inactive - Lists all suppliers that have the status Inactive.

One time - Lists all suppliers that are one-time suppliers.

Credit hold - Lists all suppliers that have the status Credit hold.
## The table columns
Column Description
Supplier The supplier’s ID in the system. To view the details of the supplier, click the referenced ID to open the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Supplier name The supplier’s name.
Address The address of the supplier.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier’s address.
City The city that the supplier’s address belongs to.
Country The country that the supplier’s address belongs to.
Corporate ID The corporate ID of the supplier.
Attention The person in the supplier’s company that you should address correspondence or deliveries to.
Phone 1 The supplier’s telephone number.
Email The supplier’s email address.
Last purchase The last purchase date from this supplier.
Status The supplier’s status. For a description of possible statuses, see the Status field description in the top part.
Supplier class The supplier class that the supplier belongs to (if any).
Suppliers (AP303000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000 page This window enables you to add new suppliers and view the existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Suppliers (AP303000) This window enables you to add new suppliers and view the existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + To create a new supplier, start by selecting a supplier class. This selection automatically applies the default values from the chosen class to various elements. However, you can modify these default settings as required. + If a supplier has only one location, that location will automatically be set as the default. However, if the supplier has multiple locations, you must manually set one as the default location. The settings of the default location will then be used as default values in data entry windows. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-supplier/) + [Create a customer from a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/create-a-customer-from-a-supplier/) + [Add general information for a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-general-information-for-a-supplier/) + [Add payment settings for a supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/add-payment-settings-for-a-supplier/) + [Override Send to Approval as the default action for one supplier](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/override-send-to-approval-as-the-default-action-for-one-supplier/) + [Enable supplementary VAT reports](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/enable-supplementary-vat-reports/) + [Set the financial period end date for the VAT period](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-the-financial-period-end-date-for-the-vat-period/) + [Over ‘Gegevens aanvullen en controleren’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data/) + [About ‘Complete and verify data’](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/online-help/o2c/ar-ap303000-complete-and-verify-data-uk/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Includes the following menu commands you can click to invoke actions:

View customer
Navigates to the Customers (AR303000) window where you can view the customer account of the supplier if the supplier is a customer too.
Enter purchase invoice
Navigates to the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can create a new invoice for the supplier.
Create payment
Navigates to the Supplier payments (AP302000) window where you can create a new payment for the supplier.
Extend to customer
Navigates to the Customers (AR303000) window with appropriate elements filled in, where you can also define this supplier as a customer.
View restriction groups
Navigates to the Restriction groups by supplier (AP102010) window.
Change ID
Displays the Specify new ID dialog box where you can change the ID of the currently selected supplier.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for quick access to inquiry windows:

Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier details (AP402000) window.
Approve purchase invoices for payment
Navigates to the Approve invoices (Approval) (AP50200S) window.
Pay invoices
Navigates to the Process payments (AP50301S) window, depending on which version of the payment processing functionality you are using.
Supplier prices
Navigates to the Supplier prices (AP202100) window, where you can view or edit prices for the selected supplier.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

Balance by supplier
Navigates to the Balance by supplier (AP63250S) report.
Supplier history
Navigates to the Supplier history (AP652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AP631000) report.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AP631500) report.
Document register
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (AP621500) report.
Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier profile (AP655500) report.
## The top part By using the elements in this part, you can create a new supplier account or select an existing account for editing.
Element Description
Supplier no.

The ID of the supplier is defined by the BIZACCT segmented key (or by the SUPPLIER segmented key, which inherits its structure from the BIZACCT key).

At a later time, you can change the supplier number by clicking Change ID in the Actions menu in the window toolbar.
Status

The status of the supplier. Select one of the following options:

Active
The supplier is in use and appears on all selection lists.
On hold
The supplier is temporarily on hold and cannot be used.
Hold payments
Payments cannot be issued for this supplier.
Inactive
The supplier is not available for selection.
One time
This is a one-time supplier, and the supplier becomes inactive when the payments are issued.
Balance A read-only field, which appears if you select an existing supplier, that displays the total balance of all open documents of the supplier excluding the total balance of prepayments.
Supplier name The name of the supplier to appear in the system.
Prepayment balance A read-only field showing the balance of prepayments in the base currency. This field is available if you select an existing supplier.
Retained balance A read-only field showing the balance of retainages in the base currency. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Locale

The locale that defines the language in which this supplier prefers to receive documents.

This field is available if there are multiple active locales in the system.
## The General information tab This tab contains the supplier's main address, contact information, and account settings, such as currency and rates used in relations with the supplier. If you are creating a new supplier, first select its supplier class on this tab; once you do, many of the elements are populated with the class settings. ### The Main address section
Element Description
Address 1 The first line of the supplier address.
Address 2 The second line of the supplier address.
Address 3 The third line of the supplier address.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier. You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the supplier.
Country The country of the supplier.
County The county or province of the supplier.
View on map A button you can click to view the supplier’s location on the map.
### The Main contact section
Element Description
Company name The legal company name of the supplier.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The default email address of the supplier.
Web The website address of the supplier (if any).
Phone 1 The preferred phone number of the supplier organisation.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the supplier organisation.
Fax The fax number of the supplier.
Account ref. An optional text field that can contain a reference to your company’s account number in the supplier’s system.
Parent account The parent supplier’s account, which you can select from the list of existing suppliers. For an independent supplier, make no selection. The value is used solely for informational purposes.
### The Approval settings section
Check box Description
Approval required before release When this check box is selected, purchase orders from this supplier have to be approved before they can be released.
### The Financial settings section This section contains finance-related settings and the **Supplier class** field. When you select a supplier class, many of the window elements are filled in with the default values of the class.
Element Description
Supplier class

The class of the supplier.

When you select a supplier class (which is required), the system fills in various values in this window automatically in accordance with the specified class. You can overwrite these values if needed.
Terms The terms of payment used with the supplier.
Document language The language of the documents to be printed to the suppliers of the class.
Currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier.
Currency rate type The currency rate type used for the supplier.
Enable currency override If you select this check box, you can override the standard currency for the supplier when you register an invoice. If this is not selected, you cannot change the currency on the invoice.
Enable rate override When this check box is selected for the supplier, you can override the standard currency rate type when you register an invoice for the supplier. If it is not selected, you cannot change the currency rate type on the invoice.
Auto load documents

To override the setting for the automatic loading of documents that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window, you can select here how they will be loaded for this supplier in the Process bank transactions (CA306000) window. You can also decide to use the setting that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window.

Use Cash management settings
To use the setting for automatic loading of documents that is set in the Cash management preferences (CA101000) window on the Bank statement settings tab.
First exact doc. amount, then all documents
All documents will be automatically loaded after the ones with exact matching document amount have been loaded.
Document with exact amount
The system searches the documents that have the exact matching amount with the transactions and loads only them.
Disabled
Automatic loading is not in use.
### The Supplier properties section The elements in this section cover special supplier properties, such as whether the supplier is a landed cost supplier or a tax agency.
Element Description
Landed cost supplier When this check box is selected, the supplier is a landed cost supplier, which is a supplier, such as a freight company or a customs duties office, who provides the services associated with a landed cost.
Supplier is tax agency

When this check box is selected, the supplier is a tax agency.

The settings for a tax agency are configured on the Tax agency settings tab, which appears once the check box is selected.

For details, see: About tax agency account setup.
Webhook notification When this check box is selected, you will be notified on changes connected with the supplier. The Webhook notifications tab appears when you select the supplier.
### The Invoice import settings section
Element Description
Ignore validation during import of invoices When this check box is selected, the system will not validate invoices during import.
Match item during import of invoices

When this check box is selected and invoices arrive in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), Visma Net you can match items during invoice import.

To make this work, you also have to first set the supplier item ID in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window (or, in the Stock items (IN202500) window) and then on the Supplier details tab.
Create invoices with one line for each VAT rate

When this check box is selected, the purchase invoice that is created will have only one line per VAT rate. The expected VAT amount is calculated based on the net amount and the VAT code applied to the invoice.

When this setting is selected, the line level Invoice Inbox rules will not apply.
Import header amounts by VAT code

When this check box is selected and you process an invoice from this supplier in the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), the lines will be disregarded and only the invoice header amounts will be used for creating lines on the purchase invoice. One line will still be created for each VAT category on the invoice.

When this setting is selected, the line level Invoice Inbox rules will not apply.
Default action for Inbox invoice

When you get invoices to the Invoice Inbox (AP50604S), you can select here the default action that will be performed for the invoices in the inbox:

  • Hold
  • Release
  • Send to Approval
  • Pre-book
  • Pre-book and send to Approval
  • Exclude from processing
### The Rounding rule settings section
Element Description
Enter rounding amount manually When this check box is selected, you can enter rounding amounts manually.
Rounding rule for invoices

Select the rounding rule you want to use for the purchase invoices of the supplier. Values:

Use currency precision: This is the default value if you have selected Enter rounding amount manually.

Nearest: Rounds to the nearest value defined in the Rounding precision field.

Up: Rounds up to the nearest value defined in the Rounding precision field.

Down: Rounds down to the nearest value defined in the Rounding precision field.
Rounding precision The value you want sums to be rounded closest to, if you are using rounding.
## The Payment settings tab This tab contains the default information for creating payments to the supplier. If the supplier has multiple locations, the information displayed is for the default location. Any modifications made in this tab will update the settings for the default location. > [!NOTE] > When the **Four eyes principle bank details** option is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, new and changed bank details must be approved by another user. ### The Remittance address section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the remittance address is the same as the main address and the elements below are populated with the main address information, specified on the General settings tab.
Address 1 The first line of the remittance address.
Address 2 The second line of the remittance address.
Address 3 The third line of the remittance address.
Postcode

The location’s postcode.

You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The city of the remittance address.
Country The country of the remittance address.
County The county or province of the remittance address.
View on map Click this to view the remittance location on the map.
### The Remittance contact section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the remittance contact information is the same as the main contact information and the elements below display the main contact information.
Company name The name of the supplier’s department (to receive the payments), if it is different from the supplier name.
Attention The attention line, if one is used in your company’s business letters.
Web The remittance contact person’s website address (if any).
Email The remittance contact person’s email address.
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s primary phone number.
Phone 2 The remittance contact person’s additional phone number.
Fax The remittance contact person’s fax number.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Payment method

The default payment method to be used for the supplier. The payment methods available for selection are those associated with the cash account and marked for use in Supplier ledger.

The Payment instructions table (with user-defined columns) appears below if these details were specified for the payment method.

An example on the use of payment methods: To pay an invoice issued in EUR using SEK, use the payment method 04. Utlandsbetalningar.
Cash account The cash account to be used for operations with the supplier.
Charge bearer

The party that will pay possible expenses connected with the payment:

  • Payer
  • Beneficiary:
  • Shared
  • Service level
Account used for payment

The bank account to be used for payments to the supplier:

  • IBAN
  • Bank account
  • Plusgiro
  • Giro
  • FIK
Payment by

An option that defines how to calculate the date by which the supplier should get their payments. You can select one of the following options:

Due date
Select this option to pay a purchase invoice so that its payment can reach the supplier before the invoice due date. The payment’s pay date is defined as the difference between the document due date and the number of days specified in the Payment lead time field.
Discount date
Select this option to pay a purchase invoice so that its payment can reach the supplier when a cash discount is still available. The payment’s pay date is defined as the difference between the document discount date and the number of days specified in the Payment lead time field.
Payment lead time (days)

The number of days required for the payment to be delivered to the supplier.

The specified number is used in calculation of pay date for the supplier ledger documents in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Payment ref. display mask

This is a rule (mask) for how the payment reference number will be displayed.

The rule makes sure that the required format is used in data entry windows.
Default payment ref. no. Allows you to register a default payment reference number to be used on all purchase invoices from this supplier (for example, for recurring invoices).
Pay separately

When this check box is selected, each document should be paid by a separate payment.

If this check box is not selected, documents for this supplier may be paid jointly.

This option appears only if the Activate Pay separately from Purchase invoices and Suppliers check box is selected in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
The **Payment instructions** table provides the instruction details for the payment method used by the supplier, if these details have been configured in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. ## The Purchase settings tab This tab provides the default information required for the processing of purchases, such as the shipping terms, the FOB point, the expense account (to record shipping expenses), and the address and contact information. If the supplier has more than one location, this information is the same as that specified for the default location, and changes on this tab update the appropriate settings of the default location. ### The Shipping address section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the shipper’s address is the same as the main address and the elements below are populated with the main address information specified on the General info tab.
Address 1 The first line of the shipper’s address.
Address 2 The second line of the shipper’s address.
Address 3 The third line of the shipper’s address.
Postcode

The location’s postcode.

You can set up an input validation rule for the country’s postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The shipper’s city.
Country The shipper’s country (by ID).
County The county or province of the shipper’s address.
View on map Click this view the shipper’s location on a map.
### The Shipping contact information section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the shipper’s information is the same as the main company information, and the elements below display the main company information.
Company name The supplier’s shipping department name, if it is different from the supplier’s business name.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The contact person’s email address.
Web The contact person’s website address (if any).
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the shipper’s contact person.
Phone 2 An additional phone number for the contact person.
Fax The fax number for the contact person.
### The Default location settings section
Element Description
Location name The location selected (on the Locations tab) as the default one for the supplier.
Receiving branch The branch of your company that receives goods from this supplier.
VAT zone

The VAT zone of the supplier’s default location.

If the supplier has been converted from a prospect account or extended from a customer account, the supplier’s VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone of the original account.

You can override the default value.

If you change the VAT zone for the supplier, the VAT zone of the corresponding business account with the supplier type is automatically set to the VAT zone of the supplier.
Corporate ID

The supplier’s VAT registration ID associated with the location.

You can set a rule for this ID in the VAT zones (TX206000) window.
National insurance no. The supplier’s national insurance number associated with the location.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document for a selected supplier in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window: Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount in the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount in the document detail line does not include VAT.

You can override this mode at the supplier location, or on document level.
VAT registration ID

The supplier’s VAT registration ID associated with the location.

You can set a rule for this ID in the VAT zones (TX206000) window.
Print orders When this check box is selected, an order from the supplier should be printed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved.
Send orders by email

When this check box is selected, an order from the supplier should be emailed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved.

Emailing the order can be required along with printing it; in this case, printing is done first.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to store the goods from the supplier.

This field appears only if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used by the supplier.
Ship via The carrier used by the supplier.
FOB point The location where respective obligations, costs, and risk involved in the delivery of goods shift from the seller to the buyer.
Lead time (days) The number of days needed for the shipment to reach the specified receiving branch when sent from the supplier.
### The Receipt actions section
Element Description
Min. receipt (%)

The minimum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a smaller quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Larger quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is less than the percentage specified as the Max. receipt (%).
Max. receipt (%)

The maximum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity, required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a larger quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Smaller quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is greater than the percentage specified as the Min. receipt (%).
Receipt threshold (%)

The minimum percentage of the total purchased items that should be received to complete the purchase order.

This setting is used if maximum or minimum percentages are not specified.
Receipt action

The action to be performed on receipt of the purchased goods if the minimum, maximum, or threshold receipt conditions are not satisfied. Select one of the following options:

Reject
Receipt of the applicable items will be rejected.
Accept but warn
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted, but the system will generate a warning for the line.
Accept
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Mode of transportation

0 - Unknown

1 - Transport by sea

2 - Transport by rail

3 - Transport by road

4 - Transport by aeroplane

5 - Consignments by posts

7 - Fixed transport installations

8 - Transport by inland waterway
## The Locations tab This tab is available only if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The **MAIN** location is always automatically created for the supplier when you enter the supplier's main address. You can set a location as inactive or add a new location. Also, you can set a particular location as the supplier's default location. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
Add location Navigates to the Supplier locations (AP303010) window where you can add a new location.
Set as default Sets the selected location as the supplier’s default location. You can select only one location as the default one.
### Tab columns
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, the location is active. If the check box is cleared, the location will not be available for selection when users create supplier ledger documents.
Default When this check box is selected, this has been set as the supplier’s default location. You cannot directly select or clear this check box; when you change the default by selecting a location and using the Set as default action, the appropriate locations’ check boxes are selected or cleared.
Location ID The ID of the location.
Location name A detailed description of the location.
City The city of the supplier location.
Country The country of the supplier location.
County The county or province of the supplier location.
VAT zone The VAT zone associated with the shipping location.
Expense account The expense account to be used to record expenses incurred by the supplier.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount to be used to record expenses incurred by the supplier.
Expense EU account The EU expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense account, import The import expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense account, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account to be used to record expenses incurred by the supplier.
EDI code An ID for the entire electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice
GLN

The global location number.

This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data interchange, used by AutoInvoice
## The Contacts tab This tab displays a table showing the supplier's contact persons and their information. To add a new contact, click **Add contact**. To change any of the details of a particular contact, double-click in its row, which opens the [Contacts (CR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/contacts-cr302000/) window. ### The table columns
Button Description
Add contact Opens the Contacts (CR302000) window as a pop-up where you can enter a new contact.
Column Description
Active When this check box is selected, this person is an active business contact.
Position The position the contact person has in his or her company.
Name The name of the contact person.
City The city of the contact person.
Email The email address of the contact person.
Phone 1 The phone number of the contact person.
## The Invoice Inbox rules tab
Column Description
Priority The priority of the rule among the rules of the supplier.
Rule ID The ID of the rule.
Description The description of the rule.
Active When this check box is selected, the rule is active.
Source field on invoice The field on the invoice that is used as the source detail when searching for matching invoices for the rule.
Condition The condition that is used on the value of the source field.
Value The value that is searched from the source field of the invoice and interpreted according to the selected condition.
Account The account to which the rule applies.
Subaccount The subaccount to which the rule applies.
Project The project to which the rule applies.
Project task The project task to which the rule applies.
Initial approver (document level) The initial approver of the invoice on the document level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Initial approver (line level) The initial approver of the invoice on the line level. If an approver is defined for the rule, the invoice has to be imported with an attachment to the Inbox.
Deferral code The deferral code based on value in the xml file.
Location The location to which the rule applies.
Branch The branch to which the rule applies.
## The Attributes tab This tab contains the list of supplier attributes defined in the associated supplier class. You specify the value of the attributes from the list, if required.
Column Description
Attribute The description of the attribute.
Required When this check box is selected, specifying the attribute value is required.
Value The value of the attribute.
## The Activities tab This tab has a table with the list of activities associated with the supplier. You use this tab to associate particular tasks, events, and other activities with the supplier. ### Tab buttons
Button Description
Add task Opens the Task (CR306020) window where you can create a new task.
Add event Opens the Task (CR306020) window where you can create a new event.
Add email Opens the Send (CR306015) window where you can send an email to the supplier.
Add activity

Contains a menu with options that correspond to the list of available activity types.

By clicking on a menu option, you open the Activity (CR306010) window where you can create an activity of the corresponding type.
### Tab columns
Column Description
Type The type of the activity.
Summary The description provided for the activity.
Status The status of the activity.
Mail status The status of the associated email message (if applicable).
Start date The start date and time of the activity.
Created at The date and time when the activity was created.
Time spent The total time spent on the activity.
Work group The work group the activity is assigned to (if any).
Owner The user name of the user to whom the activity is assigned.
Related entity description The entity that this activity is associated with.
Project The project code connected with the activity.
Project task The project task connected with the activity.
Released When check box is selected, the activity has been released.
## The General ledger accounts tab This tab shows the default general ledger accounts for this supplier. For a new supplier, the accounts and subaccounts displayed on this tab are by default those specified for the supplier class that you have selected on the **General settings** tab; however, you can select other accounts and subaccounts. If the supplier has more than one location, some of these accounts are associated with the default location, and changes on this tab update the appropriate settings of the default location.
Column Description
Supplier account The liability account used to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the supplier.
Supplier ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used with the account to record the balance of supplier ledger transactions related to the supplier.
Expense account The expense account used to record expenses incurred for the supplier.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense EU account The EU expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense account, import The import expense account used to record expenses made to the suppliers of this class.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record expenses incurred for the supplier.
Discount account

The account used to record the discount amounts for discounts received from the supplier.

The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount sub.

The corresponding subaccount used to record the discount amounts for discounts received from the supplier.

The field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash discount account The account used to record the cash discount amounts received from the supplier due to payment terms.
Cash discount sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record the cash discount amounts received from the supplier due to payment terms.
Prepayment account The account used to record the prepayments paid to the supplier.
Prepayment sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record the prepayments paid to the supplier.
Purchase accrual account The liability account to be used to accrue purchase order item amounts for items received from this supplier, if the option Supplier is selected in the Use purchase accrual account from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the items.
Purchase accrual sub. Depending on the rule in the Combine purchase accrual sub. from field in the posting class(es) (the Posting classes (IN206000) window) for the purchase order items received from this supplier, this subaccount can be used as the source for one or more of the segment values of the purchase accrual subaccount to be used with the purchase accrual account.
Reclassification account The account to temporarily record expenses that require reclassification.
Reclassification sub. The corresponding subaccount to temporarily record expenses that require reclassification.
## The Tax agency settings tab This tab only appears if a tax agency is selected as a **Supplier no.** You use this tab to provide tax agency settings. ### The VAT report settings
Element Description
Default VAT period type

The type of VAT period that defines the frequency of reporting VAT to a tax agency.

The following options are available:

Half-months
A VAT report is filed twice a month, on the 15th calendar day and the last day of the month (regardless of the number of days in the month).
Month
A VAT report is filed once a month.
2 months
A VAT report is filed once in two months.
Quarter
A VAT report is filed once a quarter (that is, every three calendar months).
6 months
A VAT report is filed twice a year (that is, every six calendar months).
Year
A VAT report is filed once in a calendar year.
Financial period
A VAT report is filed once a financial period.
Use the financial period’s end date as VAT period, not the document date

If this check box is not selected, it is the document date that is used for calculation of VAT. Note that the VAT periods and the financial periods configured in the system can differ.

If you select the check box, it is the end date of the period on the document that is used for calculation of VAT. Then the VAT will always follow the posted period end date, and the document date will not affect the VAT reporting period.

Example

The periods:

04-2022 - starts on 01 April and ends 30 April 2022

05-2022 - starts on 01 May and ends 31 May 2022

If the document date is 30 April 2022, but the period is set to May. Then the VAT will use the last date in period 5 for the document, which is 31 May.

The date used for the VAT calculation will then be 31.05.2022 - and not 30.04.2021. For the monthly-based VAT report, the system will report it for the VAT period 05-2021.

Select the check box if you want the VAT to always follow the posted period end date.
Update closed VAT periods When this check box is selected, closed VAT periods will be updated with data from new documents associated with the VAT period.
Generate the VAT invoice automatically When this check box is selected, VAT invoiced will be created automatically.
VAT report rounding

The rounding rules to be used to calculate the VAT amount on VAT reports to this tax agency.

You can select one of the following options:

  • Mathematical
  • Ceiling
  • Floor
VAT report precision The decimal precision to be used to calculate the amounts on VAT reports for this tax agency.
Use currency precision When this check box is selected, the decimal precision of the currency selected as this tax agencies’ default currency, will be used for reports.
Supplementary VAT amount The limit when a supplementary report should be sent to the government.
### The EC sales list settings
Element Description
Reporting period EC sales list

The default EC sales list reporting period that will be suggested on the first VAT periods created.

None
No EC sales list is filed.
Monthly
The EC sales list is filed once a month.
Quarterly
The EC sales list is filed once a quarter (that is, every three calendar months).
Monthly and quarterly
The EC sales list is filed both monthly and quarterly.
Yearly
The EC sales list is filed once in a calendar year.
Enable correction for previous months

When this check box is selected, transactions will be split from the previous report periods into separate lines in the report.

If a customer has lines from another report period, they will be reported as correction lines.
EC sales list rounding

The rounding rules to be used to calculate the tax amount on EC sales list reports to this tax agency.

You can select one of the following options:

  • Mathematical
  • Ceiling
  • Floor
EC sales list precision The decimal to be used to calculate the sales amounts on EC sales list reports for this tax agency.
Use currency precision

When this check box is selected, the decimal precision of the currency selected as the basis currency will be used for the EC sales report.

The check box will automatically be selected when the precision is equal to the company precision. A message appears to notify you when this happens.
### The Default VAT accounts
Element Description
VAT payable account

The account to be used as the default VAT payable account for a new VAT created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.

You can overwrite this account on the General ledger accounts tab of the VAT (TX205000) window, if needed.
VAT payable sub. The subaccount to be used as the default VAT payable subaccount when a new VAT is created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT claimable account

The account to be used as the default VAT claimable account for a new VAT created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.

You can overwrite this account on the General ledger accounts tab of the VAT (TX205000) window, if needed.
VAT claimable sub. The subaccount to be used as the default VAT claimable subaccount when a new VAT is created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT expense account

The account to be used as the default tax expense account for a new VAT created for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.

You can overwrite this account on the General ledger accounts tab of the VAT (TX205000) window, if needed.
VAT expense sub. The subaccount to be used as the default tax expense subaccount when you create a VAT for the selected tax agency in the VAT (TX205000) window.
### The Pending VAT settings This section is available only if the **VAT reporting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
VAT recognition method

The method that determines the way the pending VAT associated with the agency are recognised.

The following options are available:

On payments
When this option is selected, VAT is recognised based on payments applied to documents.
On documents
(default): When this option is selected, VAT is recognised based on taxable documents. Payments are not considered in this case.
Input VAT entry ref. no.

An option that determines how the system assigns reference numbers to pending VAT entries generated by the VAT recognition process in the Recognise input VAT (TX503500) window.

The following options are available:

Document ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the original document as the reference number of the VAT entry.
Payment ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the payment as the reference number of the VAT entry.
Manually entered
(default): You enter a number manually.
Output VAT entry ref. no.

An option that determines how the system assigns reference numbers to pending VAT entries generated by the VAT recognition process in the Recognise output VAT window.

The following options are available:

Document ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the original document as the reference number of the VAT entry.
Payment ref. no.
The system uses the reference number of the payment as the reference number of the VAT entry.
VAT invoice no.
The system generates a new number for an entry once the VAT recognition process has completed. The system uses the number series specified in the VAT invoice numbering field in this window.
Manually entered
(default): You enter a number manually.
VAT invoice numbering

The number series that the system uses for reference numbers of the VAT recognition entries. These numbers are shown in the VAT doc. no. column in the Recognise output VAT window.

This field is available only if the VAT invoice no. option is selected in the Output VAT entry ref. no. field.
## The Mailing settings tab The **Mailing settings** tab displays the mailings that are set up for the supplier. Mailings are used to set up sending electronic versions of specific documents to supplier contacts and company employees specified as recipients for the suppliers. By default, mailings selected for the supplier class are listed, but you can select other mailings from the list of mailings defined in the [Purchase order preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-order-preferences-po101000/) and [Supplier ledger preferences](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) windows. For details on setting up mailings for suppliers, see: [Set up mailings for suppliers.](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-up-mailings-for-suppliers/) The tab includes the **Mailings** table, which has the list of mailings, and the **Recipients** table, with the list of recipients. ### The Mailings table
Column Description
Mailing ID The ID of this mailing.
Branch The branch of the organisation on behalf of which the emails will be sent for this mailing.
Email account

The system email account to be used by default for sending this mailing’s emails to the supplier.

If no account is specified, the system account specified for the supplier class will be used.
Report The Purchase order or Supplier ledger report to be used as the email’s body for this mailing, if the mailing uses a report rather than an email template (notification template).
Notification template

The notification template to be used to generate personalised emails for the mailing.

For each mailing, either a report or a template can be specified.
Format

The format in which the document based on the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if no other preferences have been specified for recipients.

Select one of the following options: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active A check box that, if selected, indicates that this mailing is active for this supplier.
Overridden When this check box is not selected, the supplier class mailing will be used as it is.
### The Recipients table
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails for the selected mailing.

Specify one of the following options:

Primary
The contact specified as the supplier’s primary contact
Remittance
The contact specified as the supplier’s remittance contact
Shipping
The contact specified as the supplier’s shipping contact
Employee
The employee of your company who handles the supplier’s documents or is otherwise associated with the supplier
Contact
Any additional contact of the supplier
Contact ID The recipient of the selected type.
Email The email address of this recipient.
Format

The format in which the document (if applicable) will be sent to this recipient.

Select one of the following options: Text, HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active

When this check box is selected, this contact is active.

Only active recipients receive the emails.
Bcc When this check box is selected, this contact will receive blind carbon copies (Bcc) of the emails.
### The Webhook notifications tab This tab is visible for a supplier, if the **Webhook notifications** check box on the **General information** tab is selected and saved for that specific supplier. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Supplier discount codes (AP204000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000 page You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete supplier discount codes defined in your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discount codes (AP204000) You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete supplier discount codes defined in your company. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can use this window to add, edit, view, and delete supplier discount codes defined in your company. To complete the configuration of supplier discounts, specify discount series for each discount code in the [Supplier discounts (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000/) window. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Define supplier discount codes](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/define-supplier-discount-codes/) + [Apply discounts to extended cost or unit cost](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/about-supplier-discount-codes/apply-discounts-to-extended-cost-or-unit-cost/) ## The top part In the top part, you can select a supplier whose discounts you want to configure.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier associated with the discount codes displayed in the window.
## The Discount codes tab This table lists all the discount codes defined in the system for supplier discounts and you can use them to create new discount code series.
Column Description
Discount code The unique code for the supplier discount. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A brief description of the supplier discount. Max. 50 characters, both numbers and letters.
Discount type

The type of the supplier discount, which can be one of the following options:

Line
The discount applies to a document line.
Group
The discount applies to multiple lines in the same document.
Document
The discount applies to the document amount.
Applicable to

The entity to which the discount may be applied. For a Line or Group discount, you can select one of the following options:

Item
The discount is applied if the document includes specific items.
Item price class
The discount is applied if the document includes items from a specific item price class.
Location
The discount is applied if the document is associated with specific supplier location.
Item and location
The discount is applied if the document includes specific items purchased from specific supplier location.
Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally.

For a document-level discount, only one option is available:

Unconditional
The discount is applied to all documents unconditionally.
Manual When this check box is selected, this supplier discount is excluded from automatic searches for the best available discount. You can, however, add manual discounts to a document line or to a document.
Exclude from discountable amount When this check box is selected, the line amount is excluded from the amount that is the base for any applicable Group or Document discount. This option is available for only line-level discounts.
Skip document discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that after this supplier discount has been applied, no other applicable discounts should be applied. This option is available to only Group discounts.
Auto numbering When this check box is selected, automatic numbering is used for generating IDs for series based on this discount code. By default, the discount code will be used as a prefix for generating series IDs, but in the Last number column you can instead specify a string to be used as a template for automatic numbering.
Last number

The last series ID used for a series, if series IDs are auto-numbered.

If you enter a string here before any series is created, the string will be used as a template for automatic numbering. The string may contain up to 10 characters with numbers at the end. The last letter used divides the string into a prefix and the integer to be auto-incremented.

If no value is specified, the discount code will be used as a prefix.
## The Calculation tab This tab provides settings that are used for all discounts of this supplier.
Element Description
Apply line discount to

The way the line discount will be applied. Select one of the following options:

Extended cost
The discount will be applied to the line amount (that is, to the item’s extended cost).
Unit cost
The discount will be applied to the item’s unit cost.
Supplier discounts (AP205000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discounts-ap205000 page You use this window to define the series for supplier discount codes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier discounts (AP205000) You use this window to define the series for supplier discount codes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + A discount series specifies exactly how the supplier discount is calculated, based on the amount or quantity of the line item or on the amount of the document. + A series for a discount includes a list of break points, with each break point specifying the range of line amounts, line quantities, or document amounts that are qualified for the specific discount amount or percentage. This window is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The tabs and options in the window depend on the type of the discount code. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create discount series (AP205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-discounts/supplier-discount-series/create-discount-series-ap205000/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Update discounts Opens the Update discounts dialog box, where you can select pending discount series to update them by their start date (pending date). As a result of update, the current discount amount (or percent) becomes the last discount amount (or percent) and the pending discount amount (or percent) becomes the current discount.
### The Update discounts dialog box You use this dialog box to select discounts by pending date and to process them.
Element Description
Filter date The latest pending date to select discount series for updating.
OK (button) Updates the selected (by date) discounts.
Cancel (button) Cancels your selection and closes the dialog box.
## The top part In the top part, you can select the supplier whose discount you want to configure and the supplier discount code, and then create series for this discount.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose discounts are displayed in the window.
Discount code The code of the supplier discount for which you want to create a new series or view an existing one.
Series The ID of the series defined for the supplier discount code. Max. 10 characters, both numbers and letters. An ID will be generated by the system if automatic numbering is selected for the discount in the Supplier discount codes (AP204000) window.
Active When this check box is selected, the series is active. The active series for the same discount should not have overlapping time intervals or, if they do, they should apply to different entities.
Promotional When this check box is selected, the series is the supplier’s promotional discount. For promotional discount series, specify the effective date and the expiration date ( End date ).
Effective date The date when the series becomes effective; this field appears for promotional discount series only (that is, those for which the Promotional check box is selected).
Expiration date The date when the promotional discount expires. Expiration date is visible for the series if the Promotional check box is selected.
Description A brief description of the series. Max. 30 characters, both numbers and letters.
Discount by

The way the discount is specified for this discount series. You can select one of the following options:

Percent
The supplier discount is specified by a percentage.
Amount
The supplier discount is specified by a fixed amount.
Free item
The supplier discount is defined by a specific quantity of certain free item added to an order. This option is available only for group-level discounts (selected discount code is of the Group type).
Break by

The way the break points for this discount series are specified. Select one of the following options:

Quantity
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified quantities.
Amount
The ranges for the series are formed by the specified amounts.
Prorate discount When this check box is selected, the discount can be prorated. With prorated discounts, the amount of the discount is calculated as if the order is split into multiple orders, so that you can get the largest possible discount. To determine the amount of the discount for a discountable quantity larger than one break point but less than the next break point, the system treats the discountable quantity as a combination of break point quantities, using the largest possible break point quantities. It then calculates the discount amount according to the break points used.
Last update date A read-only field that shows the date when the discount series was last updated. Last update date is visible for only a non-promotional discount series; the system inserts a value if the series has been updated at least once.
## The Discount breakpoints tab You use the **Discount breakpoints** tab to define for a new series the discount tiers according to the options selected in the top part, or to view the details of an existing series. The columns in this table generally depend on the options selected in the **Discount by** and **Break by** fields. ### With Quantity as the break by option If **Quantity** is selected as the **Break by** option, the table has the following columns.
Column Description
Break quantity The quantity of items (break quantity) that starts a new range for a discount level for the currently effective series. Any break quantity should be specified in the base units.
Discount percent The discount percent to be currently used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Discount amount The discount amount to be used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending break quantity The quantity of items (break point) that starts a new range for the pending (not yet effective) series.
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used with the pending break point for the pending series if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending discount amount The amount to be used as the discount for the pending series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break quantity The quantity of item (break point) that started the range for the discount series used before the effective date.
Last discount percent The discount percent used for the break point for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Last discount amount The amount used as the discount for the discount series that was in effect before the effective date.
Effective date The date when the current series became effective.
### With Amount as break by option If **Amount** is selected as the **Break by** option, the table has the following columns.
Column Description
Break amount The line or document amount (break point) that starts the new range for the currently effective series.
Discount amount The discount percent to be used for the amounts that exceed this break amount for the currently effective series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Discount percent The discount percent to be currently used for the quantities that exceed this break quantity if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending break amount The amount (break point) that starts the new range for the pending series (one that is not yet in effect).
Pending discount percent The discount percent to be used for amounts in this range of the pending series if the Percent option is selected as Discount by.
Pending discount amount The discount amount to be used for the amounts in this range of the pending series if the Amount option is selected as Discount by.
Pending date The start date for the pending series.
Last break amount The amount (break point) that started the new range for the previously effective series (the one that was used before the effective date).
Last discount percent The percentage used for the break point in the previously effective series. This column appears if the Percent option is selected in the Discount by field.
Last discount amount The amount used as the discount for the amounts in this range in the previously effective series. This column appears if the Amount option is selected in the Discount by field.
Effective date The date when the current series has became effective.
### With the Promotional check box selected
Column Description
Break amount The line amount (break point) that starts the new amount range for the promotional series if Amount is selected as the Break by option.
Break quantity The quantity (break point) that starts the new quantity range for the promotional series if Quantity is selected as the Break by option.
Discount amount The amount of the discount for this range for the promotional series. This column appears if Amount is selected in the Discount by field.
Discount percent The percent of the discount for this range for the promotional series. This column appears if Percent is selected in the Discount by field.
Free item qty. The quantity of free items to be used as the discount in this amount (quantity) range for this promotional series. This column appears if Free item is selected in the Discount by field.
## The Free items tab The **Free items** tab of the window has a table showing the free items to be added as the discount. This tab appears only if **Free item** is selected in the **Discount by** field.
Element Description
Free item The free item (by its item ID) that is added to orders as the discount for this series.
Pending free item The free item (by its item ID) that will be added to orders as the discount for this series, starting on the date specified in the Pending date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last free item The free item (by its item ID) that had been added to orders as the discount for this series before the date shown in the Last date column on the Discount breakpoints tab.
Last update A read-only field that shows the date when this discount series has been updated last.
## The Items tab The **Items** tab of the window has a table showing the items to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Item** (**Item** or **Location and item**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Item ID The item to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the item.
## The Locations tab The **Locations** tab of the window has a table showing the locations to which the discount series is applicable. This tab appears only if one of the options that includes **Location** (**Location** or **Location and item**) is selected in the **Applicable to** column in the [Supplier discount codes (AP204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-discount-codes-ap204000/) window for this discount code.
Column Description
Location The location to which the series can be applied.
Description The description of the location.
Supplier history summary (AP406000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-history-summary-ap406000 page You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier history summary (AP406000) You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can view current balances or balances by a past period. ## The top part You use these elements to select suppliers that meet particular criteria, such as supplier class or currency of supplier transactions.
Element Description
Company The company whose details you want to view. The default is the current company.
Branch

The branch whose details you want to view.

By default, it is the current branch.
From period The first financial period for inquiry.
To period The last financial period for inquiry.
Include prepayments into YTD balance When this check box is selected, the balance of prepayments will be included in a supplier’s year-to-date balance.
Show suppliers with no changes When this check box is selected, supplier accounts with no changes will be included in the balance history for the selected period.
Company beg. balance The beginning balance of the selected company.
Company purchases total The purchases total of the selected company.
Company payments total The payments total of the selected company.
Company adjustments and discounts total The adjustments and discounts total of the selected company.
Company YTD balance The year-to-date balance of the selected company.
## The table This table lists all the suppliers whose details match the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier.
Supplier account name The supplier name as it appears on the documents.
Branch The branch of the supplier.
Beg. balance The beginning balance of the supplier.
Purchases The balance of the supplier’s purchases.
Payments + prepayments The balance of the supplier’s payments and prepayments.
Adj. and discounts The balance of the supplier’s adjustments and discounts.
Year to date balance The year-to-date balance of the supplier.
Supplier locations (AP303010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010 page In this window, you can add a new location for a particular supplier or view the details of an existing location. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier locations (AP303010) In this window, you can add a new location for a particular supplier or view the details of an existing location. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can open this window directly by navigating to it, or as a pop-up window from the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. + This window is available if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select a supplier and create a new location for it, or select an existing location for editing.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose locations you want to view or add new ones.
Location ID The supplier’s location ID, which you can type. Max. 6 characters, both numbers and letters.
Active When this check box is selected, the location is active and in use. For auditing purposes, locations cannot be removed; if a location is not used, clear the check box to mark the location as inactive.
Location name A name that describes the supplier location. Max. 30 characters, both numbers and letters.
## The General information tab By using the elements on this tab, you can specify the location's contact and address information. ### The Location address section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the location address is the same as the company’s main address, and the elements below are populated with the company’s address.
Address 1 The first line of the address.
Address 2 The second line of the address.
Address 3 The third line of the address.
Postcode

The supplier location’s postcode.

If an input mask has been set for postcodes in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window, type the code to fit this mask.
City The city of the location.
Country The country of the location.
County The county or province of the location.
View on map Click this to view the supplier location on the map.
### The Location contact section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the information for this group of elements is the same as the supplier’s main information, and the elements below it are populated with this information.
Company name The legal business name of the supplier at this location.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Email The default email address of the contact at this location.
Web The website address (if any) of the supplier at this location.
Phone 1 The primary phone number of the location.
Phone 2 An additional phone number of the location.
Fax The default fax number of the location.
### The Location details section
Element Description
VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier location.
Corporate ID The corporate ID connected with the supplier location.
VAT calculation mode

The VAT calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) should be entered in the detail lines of a document for a selected supplier location in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window. Select one of the following options:

VAT settings
The VAT amount for the document is calculated according to the settings of the applicable VAT.
Gross
The amount on the document detail line includes VAT.
Net
The amount on the document detail line does not include VAT.

You can override this mode at the document level.
VAT registration ID

The supplier’s VAT registration ID associated with the location.

You can set an input mask for this ID in the VAT zones (TX206000) window.
Receiving branch The branch of your company that receives goods from this supplier location.
EDI code An ID for the electronic data exchange used by AutoInvoice.
GLN The global location number. This is an internationally standardised location ID used in electronic data exchange, used by AutoInvoice.
Print order When this check box is selected, orders from the supplier at this location will be printed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved.
Email order When this check box is selected, orders from the supplier at this location will be emailed once the Hold check box has been cleared (if no approval is required) or once the order has been approved. Emailing the order can be required along with printing it; in this case, printing is performed first.
### The Shipping instructions section
Element Description
Warehouse

The warehouse to store the goods from the supplier at this location.

This field appears if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used by the supplier at this location.
Ship via The carrier used by the supplier at this location.
FOB point The location where title for the shipment passes from the supplier to your company.
Lead time (days) The number of days needed for the shipment to reach the specified receiving branch when sent from the supplier.
### The Receipt actions section
Element Description
Min. receipt (%)

The minimum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a smaller quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Larger quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is less than the percentage specified as the Max. receipt (%).
Max. receipt (%)

The maximum quantity of the items, expressed as a percentage of the ordered quantity required for the items to be accepted at the warehouse.

If a larger quantity arrives, the items will not be accepted. Smaller quantities are accepted as long as their percentage (of the ordered quantity) is greater than the percentage specified as the Min. receipt (%).
Receipt threshold (%)

The minimum percentage of the total purchased items that should be received to complete the purchase order.

This setting is used if maximum or minimum percentages are not specified.
Receipt action

The action to be performed on receipt of the purchased goods if the minimum, maximum, or threshold receipt conditions are not satisfied. Select one of the following options:

Reject
Receipt of the applicable items will be rejected.
Accept but warn
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted, but the system will generate a warning for the line.
Accept
Receipt of the applicable items will be accepted.
## The Payment settings tab On this tab, you specify the payment settings to be used by default for this supplier location.
Element Description
Same as default location

When this check box is selected, the payment settings to be used for this location are the same as the payment settings used for the default location of this supplier.

If it is not selected, you can specify other payment settings.
### The Remittance address section
Element Description
Same as main

When this check box is selected, the remittance address is the same as the main address.

If this check box is selected, the elements below are populated with the main address information, specified on the General settings tab.
Address 1 The first line of the remittance address.
Address 2 The second line of the remittance address.
Address 3 The third line of the remittance address.
Postcode The location’s postcode. If a rule for postcodes has been set, provide a valid postcode that matches the rule.
City The city of the remittance address.
Country The country of the remittance address.
County The county or province of the remittance address.
View on map Click this to view the supplier’s remittance location on the map.
### The Remittance information section
Element Description
Same as main When this check box is selected, the remittance information for this location is the same as the supplier’s main business information (specified on the General settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window). If this check box is not selected, you can specify different remittance information.
Company name The name of the supplier’s department (which would receive the payments on behalf of this location), if it is different from the supplier name.
Attention The attention line, if used in your company’s business letters.
Email The remittance contact person’s email address.
Web The remittance contact person’s website address (if any).
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s primary phone number.
Phone 2 An additional phone number for the remittance contact person.
Fax Another phone number for the remittance contact person.
### The Payment settings section
Element Description
Payment method The default payment method to be used for the supplier at this location. Payment methods available for selection are marked as Use for suppliers. The Payment instructions area (with user-defined columns) appears below if such details were specified for the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method to be used for operations with the supplier at this location.
Charge bearer

“Charge bearer” is a term used by the banks, to determine who will bear the cost of the bank charges. The available values are also determined by the bank. This is used only if you use AutoPay. If you leave this field blank, the system selects Shared as default. The options are:

  • Payer
  • Beneficiary
  • Shared
  • Service level
Account used for payment The bank account to be used for payments to the supplier.
Payment by

An option that defines when this supplier at this location should get their payments. You can select one of the following options:

Due day
Select this option to pay a supplier invoice so that the payment can reach the supplier before the due date of the invoice. The payment proper date is defined based on the number of days specified as the payment lead time.
Discount day
Select this option to pay a supplier invoice so that the payment can reach the supplier when a cash discount is still available.
Payment lead time (days)

The number of days required for the payment to be delivered to the supplier location.

If the value is non zero, the payment will be issued the specified number of days earlier than the due date or the cash discount date.
Pay separately

When this check box is selected, each supplier document should be paid by a separate payment.

If this check box is not selected, documents for this supplier may be paid jointly.
The Payment instructions area provides the details for the payment method used by the supplier, if these details have been configured in the [Payment methods (CA204000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/payment-methods-ca204000/) window. ## The General ledger accounts tab By using this tab, you can specify the General ledger accounts to be used by default for this location. By selecting the **Same as default location** check box, you can choose to use for this location the same accounts as were specified for the default supplier location.
Element Description
Same as default location When this check box is selected, the general ledger accounts to be used for this location are the same as the accounts used for the default location of this supplier. If it is not selected, you can select other accounts and subaccounts.
Supplier account The liability account used to record the supplier balance associated with the location.
Supplier ledger sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record supplier balance associated with the location.
Expense account The expense account used to record expenses incurred for the supplier at this location.
Expense acct, non-taxable The non-taxable expense account used to record expenses.
Expense EU account The EU expense account used to record expenses.
Expense account, import The import expense account used to record expenses.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record expenses incurred for the supplier.
Discount account The account used to record discounts.
Discount sub. The corresponding subaccount used to record discounts.
Retainage payable account The account used to record the retained amounts on invoices for the supplier location. This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window
Retainage payable sub.

The subaccount used to record the retained amounts on invoices for the supplier location.

This column appears in the table if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window
Supplier payments (AP302000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-payments-ap302000 page In this window, you can create various payment documents, view and edit the details of existing payment documents, and add finance charges applied by the bank for payment processing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier payments (AP302000) In this window, you can create various payment documents, view and edit the details of existing payment documents, and add finance charges applied by the bank for payment processing. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction Furthermore, you can apply a payment document to purchase invoices and adjustments, as well as release the payment document. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier ledger payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/create-a-supplier-ledger-payment/) + [Process one payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/process-one-payment/) + [Void a payment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/void-a-payment/) + [Match a credit note before payment with AutoPay](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-payments/match-a-credit-note-before-payment-with-autopay/) + [Apply a prepayment to invoices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/apply-a-prepayment-to-invoices/) + [Unapply a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/unapply-a-prepayment/) + [Enter a refund for a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/enter-a-refund-for-a-prepayment/) + [Void a prepayment](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/void-a-prepayment/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the payment.
Void Voids or cancels the payment.
Fix general ledger link

This button appears when a link between the payment and the general ledger transaction is missing, and the payment with an incorrect status cannot be modified or deleted. Use this button to fix the missing connection between the payment and the general ledger transaction.

Note: If the payment has an unapplied balance, additional steps are necessary to ensure accurate data:
Get balance from bank Gets the balance of the payments from the bank.
Inquiries

Provides the following menu option:

Supplier details
Navigates to the Supplier details (AP402000) window with the details of the supplier selected for the payment.
Reports

Provides the following menu options:

Unreleased transactions (detailed
Navigates to the Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) report.
Document register (detailed)
Navigates to the Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) report.
Payment register
Navigates to the Payment register (AP622500) report.
## The top part You use this area to specify summary information on a new payment or other document, or to select an existing document.
Element Description
Type

The type of supplier ledger payment document. The following types are available:

Payment
This type designates payments for purchase invoices with the Open status. One payment may be applied to one or multiple invoices.
Purchase credit note
A document of this type may be applied as a payment for purchase invoices and credit notes.
Prepayment
A document of this type represents amounts paid in advance for future purchases or services.
Supplier refund
A payment of this type can directly adjust the cash account, and may be applied to purchase credit notes.
Voided refund:
This type represents a cancelled refund.
Voided payment
This type represents a cancelled payment.
Supplier write-off
A document of this type represents a supplier write-off.
Ref. no. The unique identifier of the supplier ledger document, which is assigned by the system in accordance with the number series specified in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following:

On hold
This status typically applies to draft documents. It is the default status for new documents when the Hold documents on entry option is enabled in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window. A payment with the On hold status cannot have any applied invoices or adjustments. If the payment method requires printing and the payment has not been printed, you cannot remove the hold status from the payment.
Printed
After editing is completed and the payment, if required, has been printed, the status of the payment is changed to Printed. A document with this status can be released.
Open
Indicates that the document is released, but the application amount is less than the payment amount.
Reserved
Indicates that the document was released and then put on hold. A user selected the Hold status for the document with the Open status and the system changed the document status from Open to Reserved. Reserved documents could not be applied to outstanding documents. Clear the Hold check box to release the document from hold.
Closed
Indicates that the document is released and closed (application amount is equal to the payment amount).
Voided
The document has been voided.
Write-off
The document originates from a write-off.
Hold

When this check box is selected, the status of the document is On hold.

This check box is disabled for purchase credit notes.
Date The date when the payment is applied. The default value is the current business date, but you can change the date. This field is disabled for purchase credit notes.
Financial period The financial period of the payment application.
Payment ref.

A payment reference number, which can be a system-generated number or an external reference number entered manually.

The system requires and validates the uniqueness of the entered payment reference number, if all the following conditions are met:

  • The Hold check box of the document is cleared. Otherwise, entering a payment reference number is not required.
  • The Require unique payment ref. check box is selected for the supplier’s payment method in the Payment methods (CA204000) window. Otherwise, the system does not validate the uniqueness of the entered payment reference number.

This field is not available for purchase credit notes.
Supplier The supplier to receive the payment.
Location

The supplier’s location.

Once the supplier is selected, the supplier’s main location is specified here by default.
Payment method

The payment method associated with the supplier.

This field is not available for purchase credit notes.
Cash account

The cash account associated with the payment method.

The value may be changed, but the currency of the cash account should be the same as the one specified in the Currency field.

This field is not available for purchase credit notes.
Currency

The currency of the payment; by default, it is the currency associated with the cash account.

It can be a currency other than the supplier’s default currency if currency overriding is allowed for the supplier account.
Description

A description for the payment. You may use up to 50 alphanumeric characters.

For write-off documents, the description is taken from the reason code.
Payment amount The total payment amount that should be applied to the documents.
Unapplied bal. The balance that has not been applied. This will be a non-zero value if the payment amount is not equal to a document’s total amount.
Application amt. The amount to be applied on the application date.
Finance charges The total on all finance charges applied to this document.
Bank balance The balance of the payment in the bank.
## The Documents to apply tab By using this tab, you can create a list of documents to which the payment should be applied. If you click **Load documents** in the table toolbar, the system adds open purchase credit notes (if any) at the top of the list in addition to invoices and credit adjustments. Documents can also be applied first at a later stage. After the release of the payment document, the details are updated and moved to the **Application history** tab.
Button Description
Load documents

Loads appropriate invoices and adjustments of the supplier.

Any open purchase credit notes will be loaded too and will appear at the top of the list.
Column Description
Document type The type of the document to which the payment should be applied.
Ref. no. The reference number of the supplier ledger document to which the payment should be applied.
Amount paid The amount to be paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Cash discount taken The actual amount of cash discount taken.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if withholding taxes are applicable).
Date Either the date when the supplier ledger document was created or the date of the supplier’s original document.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash discount date The date when a cash discount from the supplier is available.
Cross rate A cross rate that you can optionally specify between the currency of the payment and currency of the original document.
Balance The amount before the discount is taken.
Cash discount balance The difference between the cash discount that was available and the actual amount of cash discount taken.
With. tax balance The difference between the amount of the tax to be withheld and the actual withheld amount (if any withholding taxes are applicable).
Description A description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document should be posted.
Supplier ref. The original reference number of the document or the ID assigned to it by a supplier (for informational purposes).
Reason code A reason code that defines an account, subaccount and description to be used for writing off balances for supplier invoices.
## The Application history tab On this tab, you can view the history of the payment application. The table on the tab is blank until the document is released.
Button Description
Reverse application Reverses the application of payments to invoices or credit adjustments. If the original application involved transactions and changes of statuses and balances of documents, then the reversing generates a reversing batch and changes the statuses and balances of the involved documents.
Column Description
Batch number The ID of the batch that has adjusted the appropriate account balances. When you click this number, the Journal transactions (GL301000) window open, in which you can view the details of the batch.
Doc. type The type of the document to which the payment was applied.
Invoice no. The number of the supplier ledger document to which the payment was applied. By clicking this number, the document details window opens.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected on the window.
Cash discount taken The discount taken during the application on the specified date.
With. tax The amount of tax withheld (if applicable).
Financial period The financial period of payment application.
Date The date when the supplier ledger document was created.
Due date The due date of the purchase invoice.
Cash discount date The day when a discount from the supplier was available.
Balance The amount after the discount was taken.
Cash discount balance The amount of the discount taken.
Description A description of the payment.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document was posted.
Supplier ref. The original reference number of the document or the ID assigned by the supplier (for informational purposes).
VAT adjustment This check box is selected if there is a VAT adjustment connected with the payment.
VAT doc. no Opens the window from which the VAT document connected with the payment originates.
VAT purchase credit note Opens the window from which the VAT purchase credit note connected with the payment originates.
## The Financial details tab This tab contains information about the supplier ledger account and subaccount used in the payment. For a released supplier ledger payment document, the tab also contains a reference to the batch that implements transactions.
Element Description
Batch no. The ID of the batch that adjusts the appropriate account balances when the document is released.
Branch The branch of origin for this payment.
Supplier account/Write-off account

Supplier account: The liability account specified as the default account for the supplier.

Write-off account: The general ledger account to be updated by the transaction amount for transactions marked by the reason code.

If the write-off reason code set in the Supplier ledger preferences has a cash account assigned, you will get an error message when posting write-off transactions. You need to change the account for this reason code to another account.
Supplier ledger sub./Write-off sub.

Supplier ledger subaccount: The default subaccount for the supplier.

Write-off subaccount: The corresponding subaccount to be used with the reason code.
Payment date The date of the supplier ledger payment document.
Period The financial period corresponding to the payment date.
Cleared

When this check box is selected, the payment was cleared in the process of reconciliation.

If a cash account does not require reconciliation (the Requires reconciliation check box is cleared for the account in the Cash accounts (CA202000) window), this check box is selected by default.
Clear date The date when the payment was cleared.
Batch deposit When this check box is selected, the supplier refund should be added to a deposit.
Deposited When this check box is selected, the supplier refund is deposited.
Batch deposit date The date when the batch is deposited.
Batch deposit no. The number of deposited batch.
## The Remittance information tab This tab holds the remittance information used for the payment to the supplier. By default, the elements are populated with location-related information, but they can be overridden if needed. ### The Remittance contact section
Element Description
Override contact When this check box is not selected, the remittance contact information is the same as the contact information specified on the Payment settings tab of the supplier location. If the check box is selected, you can enter other contact information.
Business name The name of the supplier’s department to receive the payment.
Attention The attention line, if used in your company’s business letters
Phone 1 The remittance contact person’s primary phone number.
Email The remittance contact person’s email address.
### Remittance address section
Element Description
Override address When this check box is selected, the remittance address is the same as the location’s remittance address. If it is selected, the elements may be used to enter another address.
Address 1 The first line of the remittance address.
Address 2 The second line of the remittance address.
City The supplier’s city.
Country The supplier’s country.
County The county of the remittance address.
Postcode The location’s postal code.
## The Finance charges tab This tab displays a list of finance charges applied by the bank for payment processing. Finance charges cannot be specified for refunds and purchase credit notes. To add finance charges to a prepayment, specify them on the payment that pays the prepayment request. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Entry type The charge, selected by its entry type ID. You can select the entry type from the list of entry types associated with the cash account.
Description A detailed description of the entry type to be used as a finance charge.
Offset account The account that is used for this finance charge.
Offset subaccount The corresponding subaccount for this finance charge.
Amount The amount of the finance charge.
Supplier prices (AP202000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-prices-ap202000 page This window allows you to add, view, and edit the prices of stock and non-stock items for each supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier prices (AP202000) This window allows you to add, view, and edit the prices of stock and non-stock items for each supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Any changes made will take effect immediately. + Different suppliers may offer different prices for the same item. + You can create a price worksheet that includes all prices for items matching the selected criteria. ## What to do from this window + [Maintain and review supplier prices](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/maintain-and-review-supplier-prices/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Create price worksheet

Navigate to the Supplier price worksheets (AP202010) window to create a price worksheet with all prices that match the selected criteria in the current window. A new worksheet is created by default, with the On hold status and the current business date.

If there are multiple records for the same item with different effective dates in the selection, you must enter a specific date in the Effective as of field to remove duplicates. All records in the worksheet will have the same effective date.
## The top part In the top part, you can choose purchase prices to view and potentially modify based on their supplier, specific item, effective date, and item class. You have the option to display prices for items assigned to your work group (or another specific work group), or only display prices for items assigned to you.
Element Description
Supplier The supplier for which you want to review purchase price information.
Item ID The ID of the item for which you want to review purchase price information.
Item class The item class of the prices of items for which you want to review purchase price information. You can leave the field blank to view information on item prices in all item classes.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price of the item is valid.
Effective as of A date that you select to view or edit prices effective on or after this date.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you can use to select the product manager as follows:

  • Select the Me check box to view the prices of items assigned to you. The field will contain your user name.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another user name to view the prices of items assigned to the user.
  • Leave the check boxes blank to view the prices of the items assigned to all users of the selected product work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the product work group of the product manager of the prices of the items you want to view:

  • Select the My check box to view the prices of the items assigned to your product work group (or to a selected user in the group).
  • Clear the My check box and select a work group to display the prices of items assigned to the product work group (or to a particular product manager).
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the prices of items assigned to all product work groups.
## The table This table shows the prices of items based on your specified criteria. You can view and edit existing items, and add new records.
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier for which you want to review prices.
Supplier name The name of the supplier for which you want to review prices.
Item ID The stock or non-stock item, by its item ID, for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the prices apply.
Promotional When this check box is selected, the item’s price is considered promotional. Promotional prices should have expiration dates, after which they are no longer valid, and may overlap with regular prices.
Break quantity

The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with a specific price.

This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Price The price for the item. You can set any price here and it becomes effective immediately after you have saved.
Currency The currency in which this supplier’s price is specified.
Effective date The date when the price became effective.
Expiration date The date when the price expires.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID of the item.
Supplier price worksheets (AP202010) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-price-worksheets-ap202010 page You can use this window to create supplier-specific price worksheets. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier price worksheets (AP202010) You can use this window to create supplier-specific price worksheets. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + By using a worksheet, you can make changes to prices in bulk. + Prices defined in a worksheet become effective when you release the worksheet; before you release it, you can make edits and save your changes. + You can create a worksheet with promotional prices and set an expiration date for the promotion. You can use also a worksheet to calculate the pending prices for multiple items by using the price basis you specify. + You can populate a worksheet by manually adding new rows, uploading prices from an Excel file, using Visma Net import scenarios, and clicking the **Add item** and **Copy prices** buttons. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a supplier price worksheet](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/create-a-supplier-price-worksheet/) + [Calculate pending supplier prices for items](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-price-lists/calculate-pending-supplier-prices-for-items/) ## The window toolbar The window toolbar includes standard and window-specific buttons.
Button Description
Release

Makes the prices defined in the worksheet effective.

The release process validates records, ensuring that the following criteria are met:

  • Pending prices should be set for all records.

If you do not want to update a price, delete the row from the table.

  • Regular prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure (UoM), and currency may not overlap in time.
  • Promotional prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, UoM, and currency may not overlap in time.

Promotional and regular prices for the same combination of price type, price code, item ID, unit of measure, and currency may overlap each other in time.
## The top part In this part, you can select a price worksheet by its reference number to view its information, or you can create a worksheet.
Element Description
Ref. no.

The reference number of the worksheet in the system; for a new document, the NEW string is displayed, indicating that a new number will be generated when you save the document.

The number series to be used is defined in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Status

The status of the worksheet, which is one of the following:

On hold
Indicates that a user can edit the worksheet but cannot release it. The Hold check box is selected, and you should clear the check box when you are ready to release the worksheet.
Open
Indicates that the worksheet is ready to be released and cannot be edited. The Hold check box is cleared.
Released
Indicates that the prices defined in the worksheet have become effective.
Hold

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the worksheet is a draft.

A worksheet with the Hold status may be edited and cannot be released.
Description A brief description of the worksheet.
Effective date The date when the prices defined in the worksheet become effective.
Promotional A check box that indicates (if selected) that the prices defined in the worksheet are promotional and an expiration date must be specified.
Expiration date

The date when the promotional prices expire.

This field becomes available if the Promotional check box is selected.
Overwrite overlapping prices When this check box is selected, the prices whose effective dates overlap with the effective date of the worksheet will be overwritten by the prices defined in the worksheet.
## The table This table displays the prices for items in the selected worksheet. You can view the existing items, upload the listed items with their pricing information, add items from inventory, or copy the existing list to another currency. For all the listed items, you can manually define new pending prices for all units used for the item, or you can direct the system to perform calculation of new pending prices. ### The table buttons
Button Description
Add item Opens the Add item to worksheet dialog box so that you can load the list of items from the Inventory workspace.
Copy prices Opens the Copy prices dialog box so that you can copy prices from the selection you specify to a new price worksheet for another supplier.
Calculate pending prices Opens the Calculate pending prices dialog box so that you can calculate new pending prices or recalculate (update) pending prices by using the selected price basis.
### The table columns
Column Description
Supplier The supplier, by its ID, for which you want to review the price.
Item ID The ID of the item for which price information is listed.
Description The description of the item.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item. You can select any of the units defined for this item and set a separate price for it.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price is applied for the item.
Break qty. The quantity to define a lower bound for a quantity tier with a specific price. This column appears if the Volume pricing functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Source price The currently effective price. When you add a new record, the value corresponds to the price effective on the date set in the Effective date field of the worksheet. However, when you are adding records by using the Copy prices dialog box, the value depends on the selected source. If there are no prices defined, the base price of the item is displayed.
Pending price The pending price for the item. You can set any price here and it becomes effective immediately after you release the worksheet.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
VAT The VAT whose amount is included in the price.
## The Add item to worksheet dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Add item** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can upload the list of items that match the criteria you have selected, with their current price information from the Inventory workspace. To each added item is assigned the supplier and currency you specify in the dialog box. ### The top part
Column Description
Item The ID of the item.
Item class ID The ID of the class of the items.
Price class ID The ID of the item price class.
Product manager The product manager assigned to this item.
Me When this check box is selected, you use only your own products.
Work group The ID of the product work group.
My When this check box is selected, you use only your own work groups.
Supplier The supplier for whom the item is used.
Currency The currency to be used on the item.
Warehouse The warehouse in which the price is applied for the item.
### The table buttons
Button Description
Add

Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet.

The dialog box stays open so that you can change selection criteria and add more items. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Add and close

Adds the selected items to the currently selected worksheet and closes the dialog box.

The Pending sales price column is blank for all added items.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
### The table columns
Column Description
Item ID The ID of the item.
Item class ID The ID of the class of the items.
Description The description of the item.
Price class ID The ID of the item price class.
Price manager The price manager responsible for the pricing policy.
Work group The ID of the product work group.
Item ID The ID of the item.
Item class description The description of the item class of the item.
Price class description The description of the price class of the item.
## The Copy prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Copy prices** button. By using the dialog box, which includes the following elements, you can add records to the currently selected worksheet by copying items that match the selection criteria and assigning the specified supplier and currency to the copied records. If the source and destination currencies are different, you specify the type and date of the rate to be used for currency conversion. ### The dialog box elements
Element Description
Source supplier The supplier whose items you want to copy.
Source currency The currency of the items you want to copy.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the item prices will be copied.
Effective as of The date that the effective date of the item prices should match.
Promotional price When this check box is selected, the items with promotional prices will be copied.
Destination supplier The supplier to which you want to copy items.
Destination currency

The currency to which you want to copy prices.

If the source and destination currencies are different, you should specify the conversion details in the Currency conversion section.
Warehouse The warehouse to which the item prices will be copied.
Rate type The rate type to be used for currency conversion.
Currency effective date The date when the exchange rate for the destination currency becomes effective.
### The dialog box buttons
Button Description
Copy Copies the selected items, adds the copied items to the currently selected worksheet, and closes the dialog box. The Pending price column is blank for all added items.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding items to the worksheet.
## The Calculate pending prices dialog box This dialog box opens when you click the **Calculate pending prices** button. There you can calculate the new pending prices in the worksheet by using the selected price basis. ### The Price adjustment section In this area, you specify an increase or decrease as a percentage of the basis.
Element Description
% of original price The percentage at which the new pending prices will be calculated by using the selected price basis. By default, this is 100%, which reflects no change. If you specified 98%, the new prices would be 98% of the price selected as basis.
Decimal places The number of places after the decimal point to be shown for prices expressed in the destination currency.
Update with zero price when basis is zero When this check box is selected, the pending price parameter of the price record will be updated with the zero value if the selected price basis for this record is zero.
### The Price basis section
Column Description
Last cost An option that you select to calculate prices based on the items’ last costs.
Average/standard cost An option that you select to calculate prices based on the items’ average/standard costs.
MSRP An option that you select to calculate prices based on the manufacturer’s suggested retail price.
Source price An option that you select to calculate prices based on the values specified in the Source price column.
Pending price An option that you select to recalculate pending prices based on currently pending prices.
Update (button) Updates all pending prices in the currently selected worksheet with the new values.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without updating prices.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Supplier summary (AP401000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-summary-ap401000 page You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier summary (AP401000) You use this window for quick inquiries about suppliers' outstanding balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + You can view current balances or balances by a past period. + If no currency is selected, the system displays information on all documents in the base currency. ## What to do from this window + [Track prepayments to suppliers](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-prepayments/track-prepayments-to-suppliers/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Reports

Provides the following options for fast access to reports:

Balance by supplier
Navigates to the Balance by supplier (AP63250S) report.
Supplier history
Navigates to the Supplier history (AP652000) report.
Aged past due
Navigates to the Aged past due (AP631000) window.
Aged outstanding
Navigates to the Aged outstanding (AP631500) window.
## The top part You use these elements to select suppliers that meet particular criteria, such as supplier class or currency of supplier transactions.
Element Description
Company The company whose information you want to view. The default is the current company.
Branch

The branch whose information you want to view.

By default, it is the current branch.
Period

The financial period for inquiry.

If you make no selection, information about all open periods will be displayed.
Supplier class

The supplier class for inquiry.

If you make no selection, information on all suppliers will be displayed.
Supplier account

The supplier account for inquiry.

If you make no selection, information on all accounts will be displayed.
Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
Currency

The currency of transactions for inquiry.

If you make no selection, all data will be displayed in the base currency.
Split by currency When this check box is selected, the supplier totals will be displayed by currency.
Suppliers with balance only

When this check box is selected, information is displayed only for suppliers with non-zero balances.

Clear the check box to display all the suppliers.
By financial period

When this check box is selected, balances are shown by the financial period of the document transactions.

Clear the check box to show balances by documents’ dates.
Total balance A read-only field showing the total balance of outstanding invoices.
Total prepayments A read-only field showing the total amount of prepayments released to suppliers.
Total retained balance A read-only field showing the total retained balance. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The table This table lists all the suppliers whose details match the criteria you have specified in the top part.
Column Description
Supplier no. The ID of the supplier.
Supplier name The supplier name as it appears on the documents.
Last activity period The most recent period with operations connected with the supplier.
Currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier, by its ID.
Beginning balance (currency)

The outstanding balance at the start of the selected period, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the beginning balance at the start of the last activity period.
Ending balance

The outstanding balance at the end of the selected period, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the ending balance of the last activity period or the currency balance.
Prepayments balance (currency)

The balance of prepayments at the end of the specified period, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the current prepayments balance.
Purchases PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of purchases, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the purchase amount during the last activity period.
Payments PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of payments to the supplier, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the payment amount during the last activity period.
Cash discount taken PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of cash discounts taken, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total amount of cash discount taken during the last activity period.
VAT withheld PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of withholding VAT, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier during the last activity period.
Credit adjustments PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of credit adjustments, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total on credit adjustments during the last activity period.
Purchase credit notes PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of purchase credit notes, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total on purchase credit notes during the last activity period.
Prepayments PTD (currency)

The period-to-date amount of prepayments released to the supplier, in the currency that is used in operations with the supplier.

If no period is selected, it is the total on prepayments during the last activity period.
Beginning balance The beginning balance of the supplier (all currencies).
Ending balance The ending balance of the supplier (all currencies).
Prepayments balance The balance on prepayments.
Purchases PTD

The period-to-date amount of purchases, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the purchase amount during the last activity period.
Payments PTD

The period-to-date amount of payments to the supplier, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the payment amount during the last activity period.
Cash discount taken PTD

The period-to-date amount of cash discounts taken, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total amount of cash discount taken during the last activity period.
VAT withheld PTD

The period-to-date amount of withholding VAT, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total VAT withheld on behalf of the supplier during the last activity period.
Realised gain/loss PTD

The period-to-date amount of realised gains or losses on foreign currency transactions with suppliers, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the realised gain or loss (RGOL) total during the last activity period.
Credit adjustments PTD

The period-to-date amount of credit adjustments, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total on credit adjustments during the last activity period.
Debit adjustments PTD

The period-to-date amount of debit adjustments, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total on purchase credit notes during the last activity period.
Prepayments PTD

The period-to-date amount of prepayments released to the supplier, in the base currency.

If no period is selected, it is the total on prepayments during the last activity period.
Currency beginning retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage in the currency that is used in the operation with the vendor at the start of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the start of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency ending retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage in the currency that is used in the operation with the vendor at the end of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the end of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency retainage withheld PTD The period-to-date retainage withheld on the documents in the selected currency. If no period is selected, it is the retainage withheld during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Currency retainage released PTD The period-to-date retainage amount released on the documents in the selected currency. If no period is selected, it is the retainage released during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Beginning retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage (in the base currency) at the start of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the start of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ending retained balance The total amount of unreleased retainage (in the base currency) at the end of the selected period. If no period is selected, it is the balance at the end of the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retainage withheld PTD The retainage amount (in the base currency) withheld in the specified period. If no period is selected, it is the retainage withheld during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Retainage released PTD The retainage amount (in the base currency) released in the specified period. If no period is selected, it is the retainage released during the last activity period. This field is available if the Retainage support functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier VAT zone deviation (AP40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-vat-zone-deviation-ap40102s page Use this window to track purchase invoices where the VAT zone assigned to the supplier differs from the VAT zone assigned to the supplier's invoices and other purchase documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier VAT zone deviation (AP40102S) Use this window to track purchase invoices where the VAT zone assigned to the supplier differs from the VAT zone assigned to the supplier's invoices and other purchase documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View batch Opens the Journal transactions (GL301000) window where you can view the batch on the invoice with possible deviations.
View document Opens the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window where you can view the purchase document with possible deviations.
View supplier Opens the Suppliers (AP303000) window where you can view the details of the supplier with possible deviations.
## The top part
Element Description
From period The from financial period for the inquiry. If you leave the field blank, information related to all periods will be displayed, depending on the period selected in the To period field.
To period The to financial period for the inquiry. If you leave the field blank, information related to all periods will be displayed depending on the period selected in From period field.
Document type

The document type. The following types are available:

Purchase invoice
For an invoice issued by the supplier (or service provider) for goods sold or services provided
Credit adjustment
For a supplier document that adjusts the credit amount in one or several previous documents.
Purchase credit note
For a supplier document that adjusts the debit amount in one or several previous documents
Prepayment
For a supplier request for prepayment.
Ref. no. The unique identifier of the document.
Include unreleased Select this check box to also show unreleased documents.
## The table
Column Description
Batch no. The number of the batch that updates the appropriate account balances with the amounts of the document transactions on posting. Only released documents have a batch number.
Ref. no The unique identifier of the document.
Type

The type of the document:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Credit adjustment
  • Purchase credit note
  • Prepayment
Supplier The supplier associated with the document.
Supplier name The name of the supplier as it appears on the documents.
Supplier account The liability account specified as the default account for the supplier.
Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount used for the supplier.
Description The description of the batch.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The amount to be paid on the document.
Document VAT zone The description of the document VAT zone.
Supplier VAT zone The description of the supplier’s VAT zone.
VAT total The total VAT amount of the document
Validate supplier balances (AP509900) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/validate-supplier-balances-ap509900 page This window allows you to verify the accuracy of the balances for specific suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Validate supplier balances (AP509900) This window allows you to verify the accuracy of the balances for specific suppliers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This validation process involves recalculating the balances using historical records and comparing them with the balances stored in the database. You should run this process only if there has been a system error resulting in incorrect supplier account balances. You can use the [Supplier details (AP402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-details-ap402000/) window to see if there is any discrepancy between the supplier balance and the total amount of all the released supplier documents. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Recalculates balances for the suppliers you have selected in the list.
Process all Recalculates balances for all the suppliers in the list.
## The top part You use the elements in this part to select the financial period (and, optionally, the supplier class) for which you want to validate supplier balances.
Element Description
Period The financial period for which you want to start validating supplier balances. By default, it is the earliest financial period that is open in Supplier ledger.
Supplier class The supplier class for which you want to validate balances. If you select no supplier class, suppliers of all classes will be displayed.
## The table This table contains the list of suppliers of the selected class (if selected) or of all classes for the selected financial period.
Column Description
Supplier The ID of the supplier. Click the ID to navigate to the Suppliers (AP303000) window to see the details of the selected supplier.
Supplier class The class to which the supplier belongs.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.

Related pages

Windows

 Approve supplier payment details (AP50950S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/approve-supplier-payment-details-ap50950s page You can use this window to approve the supplier payment details or bank accounts, BIC/Swift accounts, and G-accounts of the suppliers on payments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve supplier payment details (AP50950S) You can use this window to approve the supplier payment details or bank accounts, BIC/Swift accounts, and G-accounts of the suppliers on payments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction > [!NOTE] > There is a yellow exclamation mark sign next to the accounts that need approval. This window is available only when the **Four eyes principle bank details** option is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Approve Click this to approve the selected bank account(s) in the table.
Approve all Click this to approve all bank accounts in the table.
## The table This table displays all bank accounts on payments, which are not approved and payments that have no bank account information at all.
Column Description
Files You can view and access attachments available in the Suppliers (AP303000) window for each supplier. By clicking the View link next to the supplier’s name, the attachment will open in a new tab.
Supplier no./Employee no. The identifier of the supplier/employee on the payment.
Supplier name The name of the supplier (employee).
Location ID The location of the supplier.
Country The country of the supplier.
Account used for payment The account that is used on this payment.
IBAN The IBAN account that needs approval.
Bank account The bank account that needs approval.
Giro The giro account that needs approval.
Plusgiro The Plusgiro account that needs approval.
Bankgiro The Bankgiro account that needs approval.
FIK The FIK account that needs approval.
Swift/BIC The Swift/BIC account that needs approval.
G-account The G-account that needs approval.
Comments Any comments regarding the change in the details.
Last modified by The user who has last modified the supplier bank details.
Supplier ledger reports /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier ledger reports Aged outstanding (AP631500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-ap631500 section This report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (AP631500) This report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. + Balances are arranged by days outstanding. + The report can be shown in summary format or in detail format with the documents that created the balance. + The amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier class The supplier class whose suppliers will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business date is selected.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-outstanding-currency-ap631600 section This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged outstanding (currency) (AP631600) This window is available only if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This multi-currency report displays the list of suppliers with outstanding balances. Balances are arranged by days outstanding. The report can be shown in summary format or in detail format with documents that created the balance. The amounts are shown in the currency of the document and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.
Supplier class The supplier class whose suppliers will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Aged past due (AP631000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-ap631000 section This report lists the suppliers with past due balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due (AP631000) This report lists the suppliers with past due balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists the suppliers with past due balances. + Balances are broken down by days past due, based on the ageing periods defined for your company. + All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier class The supplier class whose past due balances will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business date is selected.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Aged past due MC (AP631100) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-past-due-mc-ap631100 section This multi-currency report lists the suppliers with past due balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged past due MC (AP631100) This multi-currency report lists the suppliers with past due balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction + Balances are broken down by days past due, based on the ageing periods defined for your company. + The amounts are shown in the currencies of the documents and in the base currency. This window is available only if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company The company for which balances will be displayed. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Supplier class The supplier class whose balances will be included in the report. Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
Supplier The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information on all suppliers.
Ageing date

The date the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business date is selected.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Aged period sensitive (AP630500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/aged-period-sensitive-ap630500 section This report displays the list of suppliers with past due balances. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Aged period sensitive (AP630500) This report displays the list of suppliers with past due balances. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the list of suppliers with past due balances. + The balances are arranged by days past due on the last day of the specified period. + All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
(default): To view outstanding documents on the selected ageing date.
Summary
To view outstanding balances on the selected ageing date.
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period

The financial period the system will use to calculate the ageing categories for the documents.

By default, the current business period is selected.
Supplier class

The supplier class for which you want to view information.

Select a supplier class from the list of supplier classes, or make no selection to view information on all classes.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance by GL account (AP63200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-gl-account-ap63200s section This report displays the balances of the supplier ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the selected period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by GL account (AP63200S) This report displays the balances of the supplier ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the selected period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the balances of the supplier ledger accounts and activities on the accounts for the selected period. Documents are grouped by account, subaccount, and supplier. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

An indicator of the documents to be reported on. Select one of the following options:

  • Account summary

To view the supplier balance sorted by account.

  • Supplier summary:

To view the supplier balance sorted by supplier.

Open documents
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period grouped by supplier ledger account, subaccount, and supplier account.
Open + current period
To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period grouped by supplier ledger account, subaccount, and supplier account.
Company The company for which you want to view information. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period The financial period for which information will be displayed. Select a financial period from the list of periods, which contains all the periods (including the closed ones). By default, the current financial period is used.
Include applications A check box that you select to include payment applications to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance by supplier (AP63250S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-ap63250s section This report displays the supplier balances for each account related to the supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by supplier (AP63250S) This report displays the supplier balances for each account related to the supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the supplier balances for each account related to the supplier. You can control which documents you view and whether they are matched against payments. All the amounts are shown in the base currency. ## What to do from this window + [View supplier balances](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/view-supplier-balances/) ### Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

An indicator of the documents to be reported on. Select one of the following options:

  • Account summary

To display the balance by supplier by account.

  • Open documents: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
  • Open + current period: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
  • All documents (supplier required): To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a supplier if you select this option.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period

The financial period for which information will be displayed.

You must select a financial period from the list of periods, which contains all the periods (including the closed ones). By default, the current financial period is used.
Supplier

The supplier to be reported on.

Either select a supplier from the list of active suppliers or make no selection to view information about all suppliers.
Include applications A check box that you select to include payment applications to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/balance-by-supplier-currency-ap63300s section This multi-currency report displays the supplier balances in each of the currencies used. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Balance by supplier (currency) (AP63300S) This multi-currency report displays the supplier balances in each of the currencies used. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This multi-currency report displays the supplier balances in each of the currencies used. You can control which documents you view and whether they are matched against payments. Total amounts are also shown in the base currency. This window is available only if the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

An indicator of the documents to be reported on. Select one of the following options:

  • Account summary

To display the balance by supplier account.

  • Open documents: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period.
  • Open + current period: To view the list of documents that are open at the end of the reporting period along with documents posted or closed during the reporting period.
  • All documents (supplier required): To view all documents that have been posted before the end of the reporting period. You must specify a supplier if you select this option.
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current company is selected.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Period

The financial period for which information will be displayed.

You must select a financial period from the list of periods, which contains all the periods (including the closed ones). By default, the current financial period is used.
Supplier

The supplier to be reported on.

Either select a supplier from the list of active suppliers or make no selection to view information about all suppliers.
Include applications A check box that you select to include payment applications to the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Batch register suppliers (AP62050S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/batch-register-suppliers-ap62050s section This report lists all the batches released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register suppliers (AP62050S) This report lists all the batches released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists all the batches released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. Transactions are listed by their date and shown with batch control totals in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Period

The financial period for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Batch register suppliers (detailed) (AP621000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/batch-register-suppliers-detailed-ap621000 section This report displays all the supplier ledger batches, listed by date, posted during the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Batch register suppliers (detailed) (AP621000) This report displays all the supplier ledger batches, listed by date, posted during the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays all the supplier ledger batches, listed by date, posted during the specified financial period. + Batch details include accounts, subaccounts, document reference numbers, and debit and credit amounts. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger The ledger to be reported on.
From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information. By default, the current financial period is used.
Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
Include unposted transactions If you check this box, the report will include transactions that have not been posted.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Cash requirements (AP61200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/cash-requirements-ap61200s section This report shows the cash requirements grouped by pay date and by supplier. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cash requirements (AP61200S) This report shows the cash requirements grouped by pay date and by supplier. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows the cash requirements grouped by pay date and by supplier. The amounts due are calculated for released documents and for documents approved for payment. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Report format

The format of the report. Select one of the following options:

Detailed
To view the list of documents itemised by reference numbers, pay date, due date, supplier, and other details.
Summary
To view the account balances divided by the pay date.
Branch

The branch whose cash requirements you want to view.

You can select a branch, or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash account

The cash account whose cash requirements you want to view.

Select a cash account, or make no selection to display the cash requirements for all cash accounts.
Payment method The payment method whose cash requirements you want to view.
Supplier

The supplier whose cash requirements you want to view.

Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view information about all suppliers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Payment register (AP622500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/payment-register-ap622500 section This report shows the details of the payments (of all types or the selected type) released in the Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Payment register (AP622500) This report shows the details of the payments (of all types or the selected type) released in the Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows the details of the payments (of all types or the selected type) released in the Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. + Payment documents are arranged by type, date, and supplier, to make it easier for you to comprehend larger amounts of data. + Document amounts are shown in the original currencies. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Document type

The document type to be viewed.

Select one of the available types, or make no selection to view payments of all types.
Ref. no.

The reference number of the payment.

Select a specific payment by its reference number, or make no selection to view all payments of the chosen type.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Purchase invoices pending payment (AP611500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/purchase-invoices-pending-payment-ap611500 section This report shows documents that have been approved for payment but not paid. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Purchase invoices pending payment (AP611500) This report shows documents that have been approved for payment but not paid. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows documents that have been approved for payment but not paid. + Documents are listed by cash account, document date, and supplier. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cash account

The cash account for which you want to view information.

Select an account, or make no selection to view information for all cash accounts.
Payment method

The payment method whose documents you want to view.

Select a payment method, or make no selection to view documents of all payment methods.
Supplier

The supplier whose documents you want to view.

You can select a supplier or make no selection to view information for all suppliers.
Report date The date used for this report. By default, the current business date is used.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier documents register (AP621500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-documents-register-ap621500 section This report lists all the documents released in supplier ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected supplier (or all suppliers). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier documents register (AP621500) This report lists all the documents released in supplier ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected supplier (or all suppliers). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists all the documents released in supplier ledger for the specified financial period and for the selected supplier (or all suppliers). + Documents are arranged by type, date, and supplier. + Document amounts are shown in the original currency and in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Document type

The document type to be viewed.

Select one of the available types, or make no selection to view payments of all types.
Supplier

The supplier the report will cover.

Select a supplier, or make no selection to view documents of all suppliers.
Created by The user who created the documents.
Last modified by The user who last modified the documents.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-documents-register-detailed-ap622000 section This report shows the details of the documents released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier documents register (detailed) (AP622000) This report shows the details of the documents released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report shows the details of the documents released in Supplier ledger for the specified financial period. + Documents are arranged by type, date, and supplier. + The details include the batch number and batch transactions. + Document amounts are shown in the original currencies. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch whose balances will be displayed.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The financial period that starts the range of periods for which you want to view information.

The list of periods contains all the periods, including the closed ones. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The financial period that ends the range of periods for which you want to view information.

By default, the current financial period is used.
Document type

The document type to be viewed.

Select one of the available types, or make no selection to view payments of all types.
Ref. no.

The reference number of the payment.

Select a specific payment by its reference number, or make no selection to view all payments of the chosen type.
Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Sent payments (AP61300S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/sent-payments-ap61300s section This report displays the payments for which payment documents need to be printed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sent payments (AP61300S) This report displays the payments for which payment documents need to be printed. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction You can narrow the information by cash account, from and to batch number, and date range. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Cash account The cash account you want to view sent payments for.
From batch number The first batch number of the batch number range that the report will cover.
To batch number The last batch number of the batch number range that the report will cover.
From date The beginning date of the information you want to view.
To date The end date of the information you want to view.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier profile (AP655500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-profile-ap655500 section This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected supplier or all suppliers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier profile (AP655500) This report shows all the details (from the database) of a selected supplier or all suppliers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameter to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Supplier The supplier whose details will be reported, by its ID. Select a supplier, or make no selection to view details of all the suppliers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier history (AP652000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-history-ap652000 section This report displays the supplier's balance history during the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier history (AP652000) This report displays the supplier's balance history during the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to view information. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches. The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period The first financial period for the date range the report will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the report will cover.
Supplier

The supplier the report will cover.

Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view historical information about all suppliers.
Include prepayments into YTD balance When this check box is selected, the balance of prepayments will be included in a supplier’s YTD balance.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier summary (AP65500S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-summary-ap65500s section This report displays the supplier summary of all suppliers in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier summary (AP65500S) This report displays the supplier summary of all suppliers in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier history summary (AP652100) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-history-summary-ap652100 section This report displays a summary of balance history for suppliers whose balance has changed during the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier history summary (AP652100) This report displays a summary of balance history for suppliers whose balance has changed during the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which you want to view information.

The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information. You can select a branch or make no selection to view information on all branches.

The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branchsupport functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period The first financial period for the date range the report will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the report will cover.
Include prepayments into YTD balance When this check box is selected, the balance of prepayments will be included in a supplier’s YTD balance.
Show supplier with no changes When this check box is selected, supplier accounts with no changes will be included in the balance history for the selected period.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Supplier specification (AP65200S) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/supplier-specification-ap65200s section This report displays the supplier's balance specification during the date range you specify. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Supplier specification (AP65200S) This report displays the supplier's balance specification during the date range you specify. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. By default, the current branch is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period The first financial period for the date range the report will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the report will cover.
Supplier no. The supplier the report will cover. Select a supplier from the list of active suppliers, or make no selection to view historical information about all suppliers.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased supplier documents (AP656000) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/unreleased-supplier-documents-ap656000 section By using this report, you can view and print the list of supplier ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased supplier documents (AP656000) By using this report, you can view and print the list of supplier ledger documents that are not yet released in the specified range of financial periods. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
From period The financial period from which you want to view information.
To period The financial period to which you want to view information.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased transactions (AP610700) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-ap610700 section This report lists the supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (AP610700) This report lists the supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report lists the supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. + You can narrow the information by supplier, branch, or both criteria. + Documents are listed by document type, financial period, and document date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company for which you want to view information. You can select a company or make no selection to view information for all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information for all branches. The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period The first financial period of the period range the report will cover. By default, the current financial period is used.
To period The last financial period of the period range the report will cover. The default selection is the financial period.
Supplier The supplier whose documents you want to view. You can select a supplier or make no selection to view information for all suppliers.
Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
Include transactions on hold If you check this box, the report will include transactions that have the Hold status.
Include pre-booked transactions If you check this box, the report will include pre-booked transactions.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) /visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-reports/unreleased-transactions-detailed-ap610500 section This report displays the list of supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Unreleased transactions (detailed) (AP610500) This report displays the list of supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Introduction This report displays the list of supplier ledger documents that have been entered but not released. + Documents are listed by the financial period, the document date, and the supplier on the document. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which you want to view information.

You can select a company or make no selection to view information about all companies. The default selection is the current company.
Branch

The branch for which you want to view information.

You can select a branch or make no selection to view information about all branches. The default selection is the current branch.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
From period

The first financial period of the period range the report will cover.

By default, the current financial period is used.
To period

The last financial period of the period range the report will cover.

The default selection is the financial period.
Document type

The document type the report should cover.

Select a document type to view only a certain type of documents.

Make no selection to view information on documents of all types.
Ref. no.

The reference number of a particular document.

Select a document by its reference number, or make no selection to view all documents.
Created by The user who created a batch whose information you want to view.
Last modified by The user who last modified a batch whose information you want to view.
Include transactions on hold When this check box is selected, transactions that have the Hold status will be included into the report.
Include pre-booked transactions When this check box is selected, transactions that have the Pre-booked status will be included in the report.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Time and expenses /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses section By using the Time and expenses workspace, your company can automate work assignments and labour calculation for contracts and support services. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Time and expenses By using the Time and expenses workspace, your company can automate work assignments and labour calculation for contracts and support services. The Time and expenses workspace integrates with the Supplier ledger, for reimbursing employee expenses, and with the Customer ledger, for invoicing labour and expenses to customers. Using a web browser, employees can submit expense claims, attaching any scanned receipts and supporting documents. Once a claim has been approved, Visma Net creates an invoice in the Supplier ledger to initiate the reimbursement, and generates a customer invoice if expenses were designated as invoiceable to a customer. For more information, see:[Process expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/) The Time and expenses workspace provides a complete audit trail of all employee transactions. After a document is approved and released, users cannot delete or cancel it. To correct mistakes, users must enter a correcting or reversing entry. Visma Net keeps the details of all Time and expenses documents, including information about the user who entered the transaction and the user who modified the record. Set preferences for Time and expense /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/set-preferences-for-time-and-expense section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set preferences for Time and expense 1. Go to the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > The settings below are mandatory. All other settings in this window are optional. In fields that have the ![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) button, you can click the icon to create new values for that field. 1. In the **Expense claim numbering sequence** field, select an existing sequence. 1. In the **Time card numbering sequence** field, select an existing sequence. 1. In the **Combine sales sub. from:** field, press **F3** on your keyboard and select one of the following options: + **C** The subaccount associated with the company location + **E** The subaccount associated with the employee + **I** The subaccount associated with the item used + **L** The subaccount associated with the customer location 1. In the **Combine expense sub. from:** field, press **F3** on your keyboard and select one of the following options: + **C** The subaccount associated with the company location + **E** The subaccount associated with the employee + **I** The subaccount associated with the item used + **L** The subaccount associated with the customer location 1. In the **Regular hours** field, select the earning type that the system should treat as regular hours. 1. In the **Public holidays** field, select the earning type that the system should treat as public holidays. 1. In the **Holidays** field, select the earning type that the should must treat as holidays. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Windows

 About Employees /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/about-employees page In Visma Net, you an maintain the list of employees, set up their access rights in the system to, for example, to register time cards and expense claims. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About Employees In Visma Net, you an maintain the list of employees, set up their access rights in the system to, for example, to register time cards and expense claims. Each employee has a personal employee account with groups of settings. When you create a new employee in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window, you specify an employee class and then the system fills in many of the details with the default values provided by the class. On the **User info** tab, a system administrator can view and edit information about the user account, create a new user account if none exists, activate, enable, disable, or unlock the user account, assign roles to the existing user, and manage the user's password. On the **Employment history** tab you can maintain information about the employee's history of employment in the company. On the **Financial settings** tab you can specify the accounts involved in the recording of employee compensation and payments, the employee's VAT zone, and the payment method to be used by default for compensation payments. The requirements for the hourly rates of the employee are specified on the **Employee cost** tab. The non-stock item of the **Labour** type used as a source of expense accounts for transactions associated with projects or contracts. You can use the **Labour item overrides** tab to define the relationship between an earning type and a labour item. Process expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process expense claims About expense receipts /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-receipts page In Visma Net, an expense receipt is a record reflecting that an employee performed a transaction while working for your organisation, thus incurring certain expenses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About expense receipts In Visma Net, an expense receipt is a record reflecting that an employee performed a transaction while working for your organisation, thus incurring certain expenses. ## Properties of an expense receipt Each receipt can have the following properties: + The expense non-stock item, which defines the financial accounts, the default VAT calculation mode and VAT category, and the unit of measure used for the receipt. If a standard cost is specified for the item, it is used as the default unit cost. Suppose, for example, that your company reimburses expenses that the employee incurs while using a personal vehicle for company purposes. In this case, the non-stock item would represent the mileage, and you can specify the standard rate per mile as the standard cost. > [!NOTE] > The expense subaccount is combined according to the settings specified in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window. + The name of the employee who is claiming the expenses. + The default VAT zone, which is copied from the employee's settings; a user can override the VAT zone in a particular receipt. The overridden VAT zone value can be saved for future use. + The total amount of the receipt, the VAT amount (if applicable), the employee part (that is, the part of the total amount that will not be paid back to the employee), the tip amount (if applicable), and the claim amount (that is, the amount to be reimbursed to the employee, which is calculated by the following rule: **Claim amount** = **Amount** + **VAT total** (if taxes are exclusive) + **Tip amount** – **Employee part** ). + The receipt currency, which can be any currency registered in the system. You can configure new currencies by using the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. + The reference number (optional) specified by the employee, which usually matches the number of the original receipt. + The project or contract, which should be specified if the employee incurred the expenses while working on a particular project or contract. (In this case, the customer associated with the project or contract is filled in automatically.) + The customer, which should be specified if the employee incurred the expenses while working for a particular customer. + The scanned image of the original receipt. + The VAT calculation mode. If the **Net/gross entry mode** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can select whether the amounts that you enter in the expense receipt are VAT-exclusive (gross) or VAT-inclusive (net). ## Access to expense receipts By using the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window, you can enter, view, and edit any of the following expense receipts: + Your own receipts + Receipts of employees in the work groups at lower levels in the company tree than your work group + Receipts that require your approval + Receipts of employees for whom you are an appointed delegate; all delegates of an employee are listed on the **Delegates** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window Also, you can view expense receipts included in the expense claims that require your approval. ## Statuses of an expense receipts In the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window, you can also view the status of the expense receipt, which reflects its processing stage. Typical statuses for expense receipts might include the following: On hold : The receipt is new and has not been submitted for approval yet, or the receipt has been rejected and then put on hold while a user is adjusting it. Open : The receipt is ready to be added to a claim after it has been approved (if approval is required for the receipt) or after it has been submitted for further processing (if approval is not required). Pending approval : The receipt is pending approval. Rejected : The receipt has been rejected. Released : The expense claim associated with the receipt has been released. ## Generation of expense claims Expense receipts with the **Open** status can be claimed selectively or all at once to window Expense claims. When you claim multiple receipts, the window may display multiple claims where receipts will be grouped by their common properties. Receipts that have different employees, branches, or customers are always split into different claims. For more information, see: [Generate expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/generate-expense-claims/) Also, if the **Allow mixed VAT settings in claims** check box is selected in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window, a user can add expense receipts with a different VAT zone or VAT calculation mode (or both) to one claim. When this expense claim is released, the system generates multiple purchase invoices, each of which contains expense receipts with the same VAT zone and VAT calculation mode.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Create an expense receipt /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/create-an-expense-receipt section You can create an expense receipt by using the Expense receipts (EP301010) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an expense receipt You can create an expense receipt by using the Expense receipts (EP301010) window. For more information: [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/). You can create an expense receipt by using the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window. In this window, you can create the following expense receipts: + Your own receipts + The receipts of employees in work groups at lower levels in the company tree than your work group + The receipts of employees for whom you are an appointed delegate; all delegates of a particular employee are listed on the **Delegates** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window 1. Go to the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the top part, specify the following: 1. In the **Date** field, select the date when the receipt was issued. 1. In the **Expense item** field, select the expense non-stock item, which defines the type of the expense. From the settings of this item, the system copies the financial accounts, the default VAT category, the standard cost, and the unit of measure used for the receipt. > [!NOTE] > If the **Net/gross entry mode** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the default VAT calculation mode is also copied from the settings of the selected expense item. 1. In the **Claimed by** field, select the employee who is claiming the expenses. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch that will reimburse the expenses to the employee. 1. On the **Receipt details** tab, in the **Expense details** section, specify the receipt information as follows: 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of the expenses. In the table in the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window, this description will be used as a link the user can click to open the current window and view the details of the receipt. 1. In the **Quantity** field, type the quantity of the expense item that the employee purchased according to the receipt. The quantity is expressed in the unit of measure specified in the **UoM** field, which is the unit specified for the selected non-stock item in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Unit cost** field, manually override the default value (if one exists), which is the standard cost specified for a unit of the expense non-stock item, or specify the amount in the **Amount** field. 1. In the **Employee part** field, type the part of the total amount that will not be reimbursed to the employee (that is, the part for which the employee is responsible). > [!NOTE] > If the amount in the **Amount** field includes VAT, the **Employee part** should also be specified with the VAT included. 1. In the **Currency** field, change the currency to that of the receipt, if necessary. If the currency of the receipt is not yet registered in the system, you can create a new currency by using the [Currencies (CM202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currencies-cm202000/) window. 1. Optional: In the **Ref. no.** field, type the number of the original receipt, which can be used for future reference. 1. In the **Project/contract** field, select the applicable project or contract if the employee incurred the expenses while working on a particular project or contract. 1. In the **Project task** field, select the project task to which the expenses are related. 1. Optional: In the **Expense claim** field, select an existing expense claim with which you want to associate the expense receipt. 1. Optional: In the **VAT info** section, change any of the default VAT settings for the receipt as follows: 1. In the **VAT zone** field, specify the VAT zone that applies to the expense receipt. 1. In the **VAT calculation** field, which is available if the **Net/gross entry mode** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, specify whether the entered amounts are VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive. 1. In the **VAT category** field, select the VAT category for the expense item. 1. In the **Financial details** section, specify the information to classify the receipt as follows: 1. Select the **Invoiceable** check box if a customer should be invoiced for the expense amount. 1. In the **Customer** field, select a customer if the employee incurred the expenses while working for a particular customer. If you have already selected a project or contract in the **Project/contract** field, the system automatically filled in the customer and it cannot be changed. 1. Optional: In the **Image** section, do the following: 1. Click **Browse** to open the file selection window, and select the image of the original receipt. 1. Click **Upload** to attach the image file to the expense receipt record. 1. Optional: On the **VAT details** tab, correct the VAT amounts in the **VAT amount** column. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-claims page By using Visma Net, employees in your company can easily file their claims for reimbursement of expenses, which may include expenditures for travel, accommodations, and freight charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About expense claims By using Visma Net, employees in your company can easily file their claims for reimbursement of expenses, which may include expenditures for travel, accommodations, and freight charges. By using Visma Net, employees in your company can easily file their claims for reimbursement of expenses, which may include expenditures for travel, accommodations, and freight charges. With Visma Net, expense claims can be prepared, approved, and processed in accordance with the process of claim submission adopted by your company. Each expense claim is based on expense receipts that an employee enters into the system. A claim can include any number of receipts, each having its own settings. An employee can enter expense receipts on the fly, submit them for approval, and then, at a convenient time (for instance, the end of the month), claim approved receipts in bulk to generate the corresponding expense claims. As soon as a new claim is generated, the system automatically routes it to the authorised person for approval (and adjustment, if needed). Once the claim is approved, it can be released. When an expense claim is released, the system automatically generates an invoice to reimburse the expenses to the employee. If the employee incurred the expenses while working on a project for a customer, the system also prepares the records for invoicing the customer. In the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, you can access any of the following expense claims: + Your claims + Claims of employees in the work groups at lower levels than your work group in the company tree + Claims of employees for whom you are an appointed delegate + Claims that require your approval + Claims that require approval by employees in the work groups at lower levels in the company tree than your work group In the [Release expense claims (EP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-expense-claims-ep501000/) window, all unreleased claims are listed, but you may not be able to edit or view the details of some claims. In [Approval](https://help.visma.net/dk_en/approval/online-help/mini-tocs/online-help-start-mini-toc.htm), you can approve Visma Net or reject claims assigned to you, to the members of your work group, and to the members of work groups at lower levels than your work group in the company tree. ## Filing of an expense claim You, as an employee, can use one of the following methods of filing an expense claim: + In the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window, enter expense receipts and submit them for approval (if required). When the receipts are approved, you claim them in bulk to automatically generate the corresponding expense claims. ( [Generate expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/generate-expense-claims/) ) For more information, see: + By using the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, create a new claim, and then add any number of receipts to the created claim or add lines directly to the claim by using the table on the **Expense claim details** tab. You can add receipts to a claim only if it has the **On hold** status. If the **Allow mixed VAT settings in claims** check box is selected in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window, expense receipts with different VAT zones or VAT calculation modes (or both) can be processed within one expense claim. If the check box is cleared, all expense receipts added to one expense claim must have the same VAT settings. If the **Hold expense claims on entry** check box in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window is selected, all new expense claims have the **On hold** status, indicating that they are drafts that can be adjusted, if necessary. You need to check the details of every claim before submitting it for approval; you can submit an expense claim for approval only if all included receipts have the **Open** status. If the **Hold expense claims on entry** check box is cleared, each newly created expense claim is automatically submitted for approval and the status of the claim is set to **Pending approval** (if approval is required) or **Approved** (if no approval is required). For expenses that require documentation by your company policy, you can attach to each receipt a scanned receipt or other document that confirms your expenses. ## Properties of an expense claim In Visma Net, an expense claim has the following properties: + The unique reference number, which the system assigns based on the number series specified for claims in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window. + The date when the claim is created; this date determines the post period of the invoice generated by the claim release unless a particular post period is specified for the claim in the **Post to period** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window, which is available if the claim has the **Pending approval** or **Approved** status. + The total amount of the claim, which is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the **Amount in claim curr.** column for all the lines specified for the claim. + The employee part of the total amount, which is not paid back to the employee in accordance with the company policy. + The taxable and VAT amount for the expense claim. You can review the summary information on applicable VAT on the **VAT details** tab of the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window, or you can view information for an expense claim line by clicking the link in the **VAT amount** column on the **Expense claim details** tab. + The currency in which the claim will be reimbursed to the employee; the claim currency may differ from the currency of the included receipts. By default, the claim currency matches the currency specified as the default for the employee, but it can be changed if currency override is enabled for the employee in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. The customer (if applicable), which can also be specified for an individual line. The customer specified in the top part of the claim is the default customer for claim lines; it can be overridden for each line unless a project is specified for the line and the customer is associated with this project. When the **Invoiceable** check box is selected for a particular line, the customer will be invoiced for the expense in the amount returned to the employee. + The branch that will reimburse the expenses to the employee. + The department of the employee, which can affect who approves the claim. You can set up assignment rules for claim approval whereby claims from different departments may be approved by different persons. + The VAT zone and VAT calculation mode. If the **Net/gross entry mode** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can select whether the amounts in the expense claim are VAT-exclusive (net) or VAT-inclusive (gross). ## Statuses of an expense claim In the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, you can also view the claim's status, which reflects its processing stage. Typical statuses for expense claims might include the following: On hold : The claim is a draft and cannot be released. Pending approval : The claim is pending approval. Approved : The claim is either approved or requires no approval. Rejected : The claim is rejected. Released : A purchase invoice has been generated based on the claim.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About processing expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-processing-expense-claims page By using Visma Net, employees of your company can easily file their claims for reimbursement of expenses, which may include expenditures for travel, accommodations, and freight charges. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing expense claims By using Visma Net, employees of your company can easily file their claims for reimbursement of expenses, which may include expenditures for travel, accommodations, and freight charges. By using Visma Net, employees of your company can easily file their claims for reimbursement of expenses, which may include expenditures for travel, accommodations, and freight charges. With Visma Net, expense claims can be prepared, approved, and processed in accordance with the process of claim submission adopted by your company. Each expense claim is based on expense receipts that an employee enters into the system. A claim can include any number of receipts, each having its own settings. An employee can enter expense receipts on the fly, submit them for approval, and then, at a convenient time (for instance, the end of the month), claim approved receipts in bulk to generate the corresponding expense claims. As soon as a new claim is generated, the system automatically routes it to the authorised person for approval (and adjustment, if needed). Once the claim is approved, it can be released. When an expense claim is released, the system automatically generates an invoice to reimburse the expenses to the employee. If the employee incurred the expenses while working on a project for a customer, the system also prepares the records for invoicing the customer. Create an expense claim /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/create-an-expense-claim section You can create an expense claim by using the Expense claims (EP301030) window as a starting point. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an expense claim You can create an expense claim by using the Expense claims (EP301030) window as a starting point. For more information: [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/). You can create an expense claim by using the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window as a starting point. From there, you can add a new claim in the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window. In this window, you can enter the following expense claims: + Your own claims + The claims of employees in the work groups at lower levels in the company tree than your work group + The claims of employees for whom you are an appointed delegate; all delegates of a particular employee are listed on the **Delegates** tab of the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window 1. Go to the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). The system navigates to the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window so that you can enter a new expense claim. 1. In the top part, specify the claim information as follows: 1. In the **Description** field, type a brief description of the claim. 1. In the **Claimed by** field, select the employee who is claiming the expenses. 1. In the **Currency** field, change the currency if the employee should be reimbursed in a different currency. 1. Optional: In the **Customer** field, select a customer if the employee incurred the expenses while working for a particular customer. If you add expense claim lines directly on the **Expense claim details** tab, this customer will be automatically specified for each new line. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. To add expense claim lines, on the **Expense claim details** tab, do one of the following: + If you need to enter a new expense receipt that will be added to the claim, click **Add new receipt** in the table toolbar to open the [Expense receipt (EP301020)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipt-ep301020/) window, and then enter the expense receipt. [Create an expense receipt](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/create-an-expense-receipt/) For more information, see: + If you need to add existing expense receipts to the claim, click in the table toolbar to open the **Add receipts** dialog box; select one or more existing receipts, and then click **Add** to add them to the claim. + If you want to add lines directly to the claim, click on the first empty row in the table and fill in the appropriate columns. 1. Optional: If you need to correct the VAT or taxable amounts in the expense claim, either edit (in the [Expense receipt (EP301020)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipt-ep301020/) window) the individual receipts included in the claim, or click the link in the **VAT amount** column for the needed line on the **Expense claim details** tab, and modify the amounts in the **Document VAT** dialog box, which opens. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Generate expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/generate-expense-claims page The system automatically generates expense claims when you claim expense receipts by using the Expense receipts (EP301010) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Generate expense claims The system automatically generates expense claims when you claim expense receipts by using the Expense receipts (EP301010) window. For more information: [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/). The system automatically generates expense claims when you claim expense receipts by using the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window. When you claim multiple receipts, multiple claims may be generated, each including receipts with common properties. The system always generates different claims for receipts that have different employees, branches, or customers. 1. Go to the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window. 1. Select the **To be claimed** filter tab to view only unclaimed receipts that have the **Open** status. 1. Do one of the following: + To claim only particular expense receipts, in the unlabelled column, select the check boxes for the receipts that you want to claim, and then click **Claim** in the window toolbar. + To claim all listed expense receipts, click **Claim all** in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About expense claim approval /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-claim-approval page In Approval you can configure approval workflows based on different rules for approving expense claims by: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About expense claim approval In Approval you can configure approval workflows based on different rules for approving expense claims by: + List of approvers + Any approver with this cost unit role + The department manager + The project manager + Any approver with this project unit role If the company has a Approval license, an expense claim with the submitted status can be assigned to an authorised employee for approval. A claim cannot be sent to approval if it includes any receipt with the **On hold** status. Make sure that no receipts have the **On hold** status before submitting the claim. For more information, see: [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) Once the expense claim is sent to approval, its approval status changes to **Sent to Approval**, and when it reaches Approval its status changes to **Pending**. ## Approval or rejection of expense claims Expense claims can be approved or rejected in Approval, which is available only if the company has a Approval license. If you have access to Approval, you can view claims in accordance with the rules applied to all documents listed in this window (that is, you can view the expense claims assigned to you). You can approve multiple selected expense claims at once by clicking the **Approve selected** button, or you can approve only a particular claim by clicking the **Approve** icon on the line. It is also possible to reject an expense claim. For more information, see: [Approve or reject expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/approve-or-reject-expense-claims/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Approve or reject expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/approve-or-reject-expense-claims page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve or reject expense claims ## Before you proceed 1. Make sure that an approval workflow is configured in Approval. 1. Make sure that no receipts have the **On hold** status before submitting the claim. > [!NOTE] > A claim cannot be sent to approval if it includes any receipt with the **On hold** status. Make sure that no receipts have the **On hold** status before submitting the claim. For more information, see: [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) ## Approve an individual expense claim 1. Go to the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window. 1. In the top part, clear the **Employee** field to see the full list of the expense claims that you are allowed to access. 1. Click the link in the **Reference no.** column for the expense claim that you want to approve. This brings up the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, where you can view the details of the claim. 1. If you accept the details of the expense claim, click **Send to Approval** in the window toolbar. Once the expense claim is sent to approval, its approval status changes to **Sent to Approval**, and when it reaches Approval its status changes to **Pending**. 1. Go to Approval, identify the expense claim in the **My Tasks** tab, and then click the **Approve** icon on the line. Once an expense claim is approved, its approval status changes to **Approved** (in Visma Net ) and it can be released. For more information, see: [Release expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/release-expense-claims/) ## Approve multiple expense claims 1. Go to the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window. 1. In the top part, clear the **Employee** field to see the full list of the expense claims that you are allowed to access. 1. Click the link in the **Reference no.** column for the expense claim that you want to approve. This brings up the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, where you can view the details of the claim. 1. If you accept the details of the expense claim, click **Send to Approval** in the window toolbar. Once the expense claim is sent to approval, its approval status changes to **Sent to Approval**, and when it reaches Approval its status changes to **Pending**. 1. Repeat step 1 - 4 for each expense claim to be sent to approval. 1. Go to Approval, and identify the expense claims in the **My Tasks** tab. 1. Select multiple expense claims at once, and then click **Approve selected**. Once an expense claim is approved, its approval status changes to **Approved** (in Visma Net ) and it can be released. For more information, see: [Release expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/release-expense-claims/) ## Reject an individual expense claim If an expense claim contains incorrect data or for some other reason needs rejection, it is possible to reject the claim from Approval. 1. Go to Approval, identify the expense claim in the **My Tasks** tab, and then click the **Reject** icon on the line. 1. Specify a rejection reason in the appearing **Reject** pop-up dialog box, and then click **OK**. > [!NOTE] > Once an expense claim is rejected, its approval status changes to **Rejected** (in Visma Net ) and it cannot be released. To release it, you need to make the relevant corrections and repeat the approval process.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 About expense claim release /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-claim-release page You can release approved expense claims by using the following methods: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About expense claim release You can release approved expense claims by using the following methods: + In the [Release expense claims (EP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-expense-claims-ep501000/) window, release all listed claims at once by clicking **Release all** on the window toolbar, or release only particular claims by selecting the unlabelled check boxes for those claims and then clicking **Release**. + In the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, select the reference number of the approved expense claim that you want to release, which brings up the claim details. Then you can use the **Release** action on the window toolbar to release the claim. When you release an expense claim, the system generates a Supplier ledger invoice to reimburse the employee. If the financial period specified for the claim in the **Post to period** field on the **Financial details** tab of the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window is closed in Supplier ledger and posting to closed periods is not allowed, you need to specify an open period to be able to release the expense claim, or an error occurs during the release. The system posts the resulting invoice to the selected period, which is also copied to the **Post period** field in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window for the invoice. If the employee incurred the expenses while working on a project for a customer, you can invoice the customer by using the [Invoice expense claims (EP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/invoice-expense-claims-ep502000/) window. In this case, the system generates an invoice for the customer in the same amount as the invoice for employee reimbursement. In the [Invoice expense claims (EP502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/invoice-expense-claims-ep502000/) window, each record relates to a single customer; thus, all not yet invoiced claim lines marked as invoiceable will be included in one invoice. The system will automatically release Supplier ledger and Customer ledger invoices from the Time and expenses workspace if the **Automatically release supplier ledger documents** and **Automatically release customer ledger documents** check boxes, respectively, are selected in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window. The system automatically releases supplier ledger invoices if the **Automatically release supplier ledger documents** check box is selected in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window even if the approval workflow functionality is activated for supplier ledger documents on the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window (the **Require approval** check box is selected). Also, the resulting transactions can be automatically posted to the General ledger workspace if the **Automatically post on release** check box is selected in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window or the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/release-expense-claims page In Visma Net, you can release expense claims in one of the following ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release expense claims In Visma Net, you can release expense claims in one of the following ways: + One individual claim at a time: Use the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window as a starting point. + Multiple claims at once: Use the [Release expense claims (EP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-expense-claims-ep501000/) window. You can release only the expense claims that have the **Approved** status. ## Release an individual expense claim 1. Go to the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window. 1. Select the **Approved** filter tab to view only the claims that have been approved and are ready to be released. 1. Locate the expense claim that you want to release, and then click the link in the **Reference no.** field, which brings up the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, where you can view the details of the claim. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Actions** > **Release**. ## Release multiple expense claims 1. Go to the [Release expense claims (EP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-expense-claims-ep501000/) window. 1. Do one of the following: + To release only certain expense claims, in the unlabelled column, select the check boxes for the claims that you want to release, and then click **Release** in the window toolbar. + To release all listed expense claims, click **Release all** in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/release-expense-claims-2 page In Visma Net, you can release expense claims in one of the following ways: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release expense claims In Visma Net, you can release expense claims in one of the following ways: + One individual claim at a time: Use the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window as a starting point. + Multiple claims at once: Use the [Release expense claims (EP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-expense-claims-ep501000/) window. You can release only the expense claims that have the **Approved** status. ## Release an individual expense claim 1. Go to the [Expense claims (EP301030)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030/) window. 1. Select the **Approved** filter tab to view only the claims that have been approved and are ready to be released. 1. Locate the expense claim that you want to release, and then click the link in the **Reference no.** field, which brings up the [Expense claim (EP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000/) window, where you can view the details of the claim. 1. In the window toolbar, click **Actions** - **Release**. ## Release multiple expense claims 1. Go to the [Release expense claims (EP501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-expense-claims-ep501000/) window. 1. Do one of the following: + To release only certain expense claims, in the unlabelled column, select the check boxes for the claims that you want to release, and then click **Release** in the window toolbar. + To release all listed expense claims, click **Release all** in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Invoice expense claims /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/invoice-expense-claims page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice expense claims 1. To invoice specific expense claims, select the check box in front of the expense claims you want to invoice. 1. Click **Process**. The status of released expense claims changes to **Invoiced**. > [!NOTE] > To invoice all expense claim displayed in the table, you do not have to select them, just click **Process all**.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 Approve expense receipts /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/approve-expense-receipts page After an expense receipt has been taken off hold, it might require approval. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Approve expense receipts After an expense receipt has been taken off hold, it might require approval. You can approve a receipt by using one of the following windows: + [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) You use this window as a starting point from which you can open each individual expense receipt that you want to approve in the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window and view its details. By using this method, you can also reject each expense receipt. ## Approve an individual expense receipt 1. Go to the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window. 1. In the top part, clear the **Employee** field to see the full list of the expense receipts that you are allowed to access. 1. Select the **Pending approval** filter tab. 1. Click the link in the **Description** column for the expense receipt you want to approve, which brings up the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window with the details of the receipt. 1. If you accept the details of the expense receipt, click **Actions** - **Approve** in the window toolbar. ## Approve multiple expense receipts 1. Go to Approval. 1. Do one of the following: + If you want to approve expense receipts assigned to you, select the **My approvals** filter tab. + If you want to approve expense receipts assigned to you and to the members of your work group, select the **My work group's approvals** filter tab. + If you want to approve expense receipts assigned to you, to the members of your work group, and to the members of the work groups at a lower level in the company tree than your work group, select the **All records** filter tab. 1. Click the header of the **Type** column, and configure the filter so that only expense receipts are listed on the tab. 1. Do one of the following: + To approve only certain expense receipts, in the unlabelled column, select the check boxes for the receipts that you want to approve, and then click **Approve** in the window toolbar. + To approve all listed expense receipts, click **Approve all** in the window toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reporting of time /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time section Visma Net provides time reporting capabilities that you can use in the following instances: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reporting of time Visma Net provides time reporting capabilities that you can use in the following instances: + You want to track the time employees spend on individual activities to facilitate the calculation of costs and prices for particular projects and customer services. Employees can use time activities or activities for which employees must report the time that they have spent on them. To enable time activities in the system, you need to enable the **Time reporting on activity** functionality. + You want to track the time employees spend on various activities each week in order to facilitate payroll calculations. For each employee whose time should be reported, you need to select the **Time card is required** check box in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. A time card is a weekly report on the time spent by the employee on activities. If the **Time reporting on activity** functionality is enabled for your company, you can report working hours by using time cards in combination with time activities. For more information, see: [About time cards](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/about-time-cards/) Create an employee /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/create-an-employee section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create an employee 1. Go to the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. On the **General settings** tab, enter at least the last name and the e-mail address of the employee. 1. In the **Employee settings** section, in the **Employee class** field, select the **Employee class** for the employee. The **Branch** field is automatically filled in. 1. In the **Department** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) and select the department of the employee. 1. Fill in any relevant information on the other tabs, for example an account number for the employee on the **Financial settings** tab, and the cost of the employee on the **Employee cost** tab. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You will now get an **Employee ID** for the employee.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create employee classes /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/create-employee-classes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create employee classes 1. Go to the [Employee classes (EP202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employee-classes-ep202000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Class ID** field, enter the ID of the new class. The ID can be alphanumeric have a maximum length of 9 characters. 1. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the class. 1. Go to the **General settings** tab. 1. In the **Cash discount account** field, enter the account you want to use for the class. 1. In the **Cash discount subaccount** field, enter the subaccount you want to use for the class. The remaining fields are optional. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The new employee class is now created. To create another class, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) When you change a setting for a class, this setting will only change for the new employees you create. It will not change for the existing employees in the class.

Related pages

Windows

 Add an employee cost /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/add-an-employee-cost section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add an employee cost 1. Go to the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. 1. Go to the **Employee cost** tab. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new row to the upper table. 1. In the **Effective date** field, select the date from which the type of the employment will be effective for the active employee. 1. In the **Type of employment** field, select the type of employment you want to add for the employee. 1. Fill in the rest of the details in the table. > [!NOTE] > If the selected type of employment is **Hourly**, you cannot define an annual salary amount for the employee. ## Optional step In the **Overrides** table, you can define project-specific information for the employee.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 About time cards /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/about-time-cards page To assist with invoicing, calculation of payroll, and estimation of project costs, Visma Net provides time card functionality. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About time cards To assist with invoicing, calculation of payroll, and estimation of project costs, Visma Net provides time card functionality. To assist with invoicing, calculation of payroll, and estimation of project costs, Visma Net provides time card functionality. A time card is a weekly report on time spent on each activity. By using the [Employee time card (EP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000/) window, employees can enter new time cards or view, edit, or release existing time cards. ## Enabling time cards Time cards are available in Visma Net only if the **Advanced financials** check box is selected in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. By default, employees are not required to fill in time cards. However, if time cards are mandatory in your company, you can make them required on a per-employee basis by selecting the **Time card is required** check box in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. Time cards are always generated successively, which means that you cannot generate a successive time card for a particular week if no time card has been generated for the preceding week. Suppose that the latest time card was generated for an employee a considerable time ago, and now you want to resume the generation of time cards for this employee, but you don't need any time cards for the intervening time interval. To generate multiple empty time cards for the intervening time interval, you can select the employee in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window and then, on the **Employment history** tab, click **Generate time cards** on the table toolbar. ## Accessing time cards In the [Employee time card (EP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000/) window, you can create, view, or adjust any of the following time cards: + Your time cards + Time cards of the employees for whom you are an appointed delegate + Time cards of the employees who report to you + Time cards assigned to you for approval + Time cards of employees in the work groups at lower levels in the company tree than your work group ## Processing time cards As a rule, each time card passes through several stages, which might include preparation, approval, and release. The processing stage of a time card is indicated by its status. ## Preparing time cards When preparing a time card, an employee reports work time by creating separate records for the following types of activities: + Those associated with different projects or project tasks + Those related to different earning types + Those that are invoiceable and those that are not invoiceable ## Approving time cards A time card cannot be released until it has been approved (if approval is required). If you are an approver, you can approve time cards by using the [Employee time card (EP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000/) window. ## Using corrective time cards If a released time card doesn't reflect the actual time that the employee spent on activities during the week (for example, if the employee reported 40 hours instead of actual 45 hours), the employee can create a corrective time card by opening the released time card in the [Employee time card (EP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000/) window and clicking **Actions** > **Correct** in the window toolbar. The data from the original time card is copied to the corrective time card, which has **Correction** in the **Type** field and the reference number of the original time card in the **Orig. reg. no.** read-only field. The employee can adjust the data of the corrective time card as needed before submitting it for approval (if required). After that, the original time card, because it has been replaced by the corrective time card, is no longer available in the [Employee time cards (EP406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-cards-ep406000/) inquiry window. When the corrective time card is released, new transactions are generated for only the difference in the reported hours on this card as compared to the original time card. A released corrective time card can also be corrected. ## Combining time cards and time activities In Visma Net, an employee can report working hours by using time cards in combination with time activities. The reported data from a time activity instantly becomes available in one of the employee's time cards. In the [Employee time card (EP305000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000/) window, the employee can view details of all time activities associated with a particular time card. A time card can be approved only if all the activities associated with the time card have been approved. When the time card is released, the associated activities are released automatically. An activity cannot be released on its own if it is associated with a time card. A project transaction may be created during time card release if any of the activities included in the time card is associated with a project. Such transactions can be used for tracking the project costs. For more information about project cost tracking, see: [About project budgets](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/manage-project-budgets/about-project-budgets/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create employee time cards /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/create-employee-time-cards section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create employee time cards 1. Go to the [Employee time cards (EP406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-cards-ep406000/) window. 1. In the **Employee** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select the employee for whom you want to create a new time card. The ID of the currently logged in employee is the default. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new employee time card. This opens a new window. 1. In the **Week** field, enter the week number for which you want to create a time card. > [!NOTE] > You can only enter a new time card when the previous time card has been released. 1. In the **Status** field, select the status of the card. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). You can now start entering the worked hours of the employee into the appropriate fields on the time card. To view and edit the existing time cards, you can sort them by their status with the help of the status tabs.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release time cards /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/release-time-cards page If you have selected to automatically release documents in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window, time cards will be released automatically once approved. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release time cards If you have selected to automatically release documents in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window, time cards will be released automatically once approved. For more information: [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/). If you have not selected this setting, you must release time cards manually. 1. Go to the [Release time cards (EP505010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-time-cards-ep505010/) window. 1. Select the check box to the left of the relevant time card. 1. Click **Release**. The updated balance will be displayed on the **Balance** tab in the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If you want to release all time cards, you do not have to select them, just click **Release all**.

Related pages

Windows

 Register time on a project /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/register-time-on-a-project section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Register time on a project 1. Go to the [Employee time cards (EP406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-cards-ep406000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to start a new time card. 1. On the **Summary** tab, enter a line for the project and task(s) you created. Make sure that you register the hours on the right project and task. 1. Once done, click **Actions**, and select **Submit**, or select **Send to Approval**, if your company uses Approval. > [!NOTE] > The transaction is only visible in the project balance after a time card has been released. ## Correct a time card If you discover errors in a time card, you can correct it as follows: 1. Go to the [Employee time cards (EP406000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-cards-ep406000/) window. 1. Double-click the incorrect time card. The detailed time card is displayed. 1. Click **Actions** and select **Correct**. > [!NOTE] > You can only correct time cards with the **Released** status. 1. On the **Details** tab, make your corrections. 1. Click **Save and close**. 1. Click **Actions** and select **Submit** or **Send to Approval**. The system automatically calculates the difference between the original time card and the correction, and assigns a new reference number to the corrected time card.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Time and expenses windows /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Time and expenses windows Invoice expense claims (EP502000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/invoice-expense-claims-ep502000 page This window lists all the expense claims that have the Approved status. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice expense claims (EP502000) This window lists all the expense claims that have the Approved status. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can invoice either all claims or only selected ones. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Generates invoices for the customers you have selected in the table in the amounts paid to the employees for the post period, and changes the status of the processed claims to Closed.
Process all Generates invoices for all customers listed in the table in the amounts paid to the employees during the post period, and changes the status of the processed claims to Closed.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select the expense claims to be listed by specifying the latest date and the customer or the customer class. Also, you can specify the date on the invoices and the post period to be used for those invoices.
Element Description
Invoice date The date on the invoice charging the customer.
Post period The financial period to post the invoice.
Load claims up to The latest date on the claims to be invoiced to customers.
Customer class The customer class whose customer will be invoiced. You can leave the field blank to view data on customers of all classes.
Customer The customer to be invoiced. You can leave the field blank to view data on all customers.
## The table This area of the window contains the list of customers that can be invoiced for the expense claims, based on the criteria you have selected in the top part.
Element Description
Customer class The customer class of the customer to be charged.
Customer no. The number of the customer to be invoiced.
Customer name The name of the customer to be invoiced.
Location The location of the customer associated with the claim.
Location name The name of the customer location associated with the claim.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Type of hours (EP102000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/type-of-hours-ep102000 page You use this window to add, view, edit, or delete types of hours that can be used in time cards and time activities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Type of hours (EP102000) You use this window to add, view, edit, or delete types of hours that can be used in time cards and time activities. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to add, view, edit, or delete types of hours that can be used in time cards and time activities. > [!NOTE] > You cannot delete types of hours associated with the required time reporting settings that you specify in the [Time and expenses preferences (EP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000/) window. ## The table
Element Description
Code The unique identifier of the type of hour.
Description The brief description of the type of hour.
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the type of hours is activated in the system and can be used.
Overtime A check box that indicates (if selected) that the type of hour is treated as overtime.
Multiplier The value by which the employee cost for this type of hour is multiplied when the time activity is released. You can edit the value only if the Overtime check box is selected.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the type of hour is treated as invoiceable by default, but activities that have this type of hour can be manually marked as not invoiceable.
Default project code The project automatically associated with any time activity of this type of hour created in the Time and expenses workspace.
Default task The project task automatically associated with any time activity of this type of hour created in the Time and expenses workspace.
Exclude from calculation Used to exclude Type of hours used in time cards from the calculation of invoiceable ratio for the Time card details per employee report.
Employee time activities (EP307000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-activities-ep307000 page You use this window to view or enter time activities. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Employee time activities (EP307000) You use this window to view or enter time activities. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new time activity or to select the existing time activities to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Employee The name of the employee whose time activities you want to view.
From week The start week of the date range for which you want to view the time activities.
Until week The end date of the date range for which you want to view the time activities.
Project

The project for which you want to list the time activities.

The field is available if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The project task for which you want to list the time activities.

The field is available if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Include all rejected

A check box that indicates (if selected) that you want to view all time activities, including rejected ones. If the check box is cleared, the list will include all activities except for rejected ones.

By default, this check box is selected.

The field is available if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Element Description
Time spent The regular work hours spent by the employee on the time activities listed in the table.
Invoiceable The invoiceable work hours spent by the employee on the time activities listed in the table.
Element Description
Time spent The overtime spent by the employee on the time activities listed in the table.
Invoiceable The invoiceable overtime spent by the employee on the time activities listed in the table.
Element Description
Time spent The total working time (regular and overtime) spent by the employee on the time activities listed in the table.
Billable The total invoiceable working time (regular and overtime) spent by the employee on the time activities listed in the table.
## The table This table includes the detailed information about the time activities that meet the specified selection criteria.
Button Description
View

Opens in a pop-up window the Activity (CR306010) window with the details of the selected activity, which you can adjust if the activity has the Open or Cancelled status.

This action is applicable only to the time activities created through the Activity (CR306010) window.
Column Description
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the time activity is on hold. Leave the check box cleared to make the time activity available for approval, if approval is required.
Approval status

The status of the time activity record. The following statuses are possible:

Pending approval
The time activity is waiting for approval by the authorised person.
Complete
The time activity has been either approved by the authorised person or accepted without approval.
Rejected
The time activity has been rejected by the authorised person. A warning appears for the rejected record.
Cancelled
The time activity has been cancelled.
Released
The time activity has been released.
Date

The date of the time activity.

The default date is defined by the Default date in time cards setting on the General settings tab of the Employee classes (EP202000) window.
Start time The time when the time activity was created.
Earning type The type of the work time spent by the employee.
Job code

The ID of a particular job that determines payroll rates.

The column is available if the Payroll functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Shift Code

The ID of a particular shift worked by the employee.

Employees can receive a premium on their normal wages depending on the work shift.

The column is available if the Multiple work shifts functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Task

The task activity associated with the time activity.

Only tasks that belong to the selected employee are available for selection.
Project

The project associated with the time activity.

The column is available if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The project task associated with the time activity.

The column is available if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cost code

The cost code with which this activity is associated to track project costs and revenue.

The column is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Contract

The contract associated with the time activity, which allows invoicing time activities directly through contracts without using the Customer management functionality.

The column is available if the Customer management functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Appointment no.

The appointment associated with the activity.

The column is available if the Service management functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer no.

The customer associated with the appointment.

The column is available if the Service management functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Employee line ref.

The line reference number of the service assigned to the appointment.

The column is available if the Service management functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Service

The service that the employee has performed during the appointment.

The column is available if the Service management functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Time spent The time the employee spent on the time activity.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) to indicate that the work hours are invoiceable.
Invoiceable time The invoiceable time for the time activity.
Description The description of the time activity.
Approver A person authorised to approve the time activity. The project manager assigned to the related project can also approve the activity.
Time card ref. The time card associated with the time activity. If this column is empty, the time activity is not yet included in any time card.
Case ID The identifier of the case associated with the time activity.
Contract ID The identifier of the contract associated with the case to which this time activity was added.
Employee time card (EP305000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-card-ep305000 page You use this window to enter new time cards or adjust existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Employee time card (EP305000) You use this window to enter new time cards or adjust existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to enter new time cards or adjust existing ones. Each time card should span a one-week period, and a new time card can be entered only when the previous time card has been released. For more information about time cards, see: [About time cards](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/about-time-cards/) ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Release: Releases the time card. As a result of this menu command being invoked, the status of the time card changes to Released.

This action is available if the time card has the Approved status.

  • Approve: Approves the time card. As a result of this menu command being invoked, the status of the time card changes to Approved.

This action is available if the Approval workflow functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and if the time card has the Pending approval status.

  • Reject: Rejects the time card. As a result of this menu command being invoked, the status of the time card changes to Rejected.

This action is available if the Approval workflow functionality is enabled in your system in the window, and if the time card has the Pending approval status.

  • Correct: Updates the released time card. As a result of this menu command being invoked, a new time card of the Correction type is created. The new time card has the On hold status.

This action is available if the time card has the Released status.

  • Submit: Submits the time card for approval. As a result of this menu command being invoked, the status of the time card changes to Pending approval.

This action is available if the time card has the On hold status. If the Time reporting on activity functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, you cannot submit a time card for approval unless all the activities included in the time card have been approved (if required).

  • Put on hold: Puts the time card on hold so it can be adjusted. As a result of this menu command being invoked, the status of the time card changes to On hold.

This action is available if the time card has the Pending approval, Approved, or Rejected status.
View transactions

Opens the Project transactions (PM304000) window, where you can view the list of project transactions that have been created as a result of time cards being released.

This button is available if the time card has the Released status.
## The top part You use the elements in this area to create a new time card or to select an existing time card to view (and edit, if needed) its properties.
Element Description
Ref no. The unique reference number of the time card, which Visma Net automatically assigns according to the numbering sequence specified as the Time card numbering sequence in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.
Status

The status of the time card, which is set by the system and can be one of the following options:

On hold
The time card is a draft and cannot be released.
Pending approval
The time card has been completed and is ready for approval.
Approved
The time card has been approved.
Rejected
The time card has been rejected.
Released
The time card has been released. If any of the activities from the time card are associated with a specific project, at least one transaction will be generated in the Projects module.
Week The week for which the time card has been created.
Employee The name of the employee whose time card is currently open.
Type

The type of the time card. The following options are available:

Normal
A regular time card
Correction
A corrective time card, which is a time card that updates a released time card
Orig. ref. no.

The reference number of the time card being corrected.

This field is filled in only when Correction is specified in the Type field.
### The Regular section
Element Description
Time spent

The work hours spent by the employee during the week on activities with the Regular hours earning type.

Visma Net handles validation of this amount based on the Regular hours validation setting for the employee in the Employees (EP203000) window.
Invoiceable The invoiceable work hours spent by the employee during the week.
### Overtime section
Element Description
Time spent The work hours spent by the employee during the week on activities with the Overtime earning type.
Invoiceable The invoiceable overtime spent by the employee during the week.
### The Total section
Element Description
Time spent The total working time (regular and overtime) for the week.
Invoiceable The total invoiceable working time (regular and overtime) for the week.
## The Summary tab This tab includes the information on the work hours the employee has spent on specific projects and project tasks broken down by the days of the week.
Element Description
Preload from tasks Opens the Preload from tasks dialog box, where all available tasks are listed. In this dialog box, you can create summary rows with the Type of hour, Project, and Project task values preloaded from the tasks that you select.
Preload from previous time card Copies the data from the time card for the previous week.
Preload holidays

Adds to the table a new row with the holiday earning type specified in the Earning type column and the 8 value in the column of the weekday that is a holiday.

By default, the Project column includes the non-project code, but you can change the value before releasing the time card.
Normalise time card

Adds to the table a new row that completes the number of regular work hours for the week. The missing regular work hours are added starting from Monday.

For instance, if the employee is required to work 40 regular hours per week and the time card includes only 30 regular work hours, when you click this button, the system adds a new row with 8 in the Mon. column and 2 in the Tue. column.
Column Description
Earning type The type of the work time spent by the employee.
Job code

The ID of the particular job that determines payroll rates.

This column is available only if the Payroll functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Shift code

The ID of the particular shift worked by the employee.

Employees can receive a premium on their normal wages depending on the work shift.

This column is available only if the Multiple work shifts functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Task ID The task activity associated with the time activity. Only tasks that belong to the selected employee are available for selection.
Project

The project that the employee worked on.

This column is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The project task that the employee worked on. Cancelled project tasks cannot be used in time cards.

This column is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Cost code

The cost code with which this record is associated to track project costs and revenue.

The field is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Mon The work time reported for Monday, including overtime.
Tue The work time reported for Tuesday, including overtime.
Wed The work time reported for Wednesday, including overtime.
Thu The work time reported for Thursday, including overtime.
Fri The work time reported for Friday, including overtime.
Sat The work time reported for Saturday, including overtime.
Sun The work time reported for Sunday, including overtime.
Time spent The work time (regular and overtime) that the employee spent on the project and task during the week.
Invoiceable A check box that you select to indicate that these work hours are invoiceable.
Description The description of the reported work hours.
Approval status

The approval status, which indicates whether the summary row requires approval and, if it does, what the current state of approval is. The following options are available:

Not required
Approval is not required for the activities in the summary row.
Approved
All activities in the summary row have been approved.
Rejected
All activities in the summary row have been rejected.
Partially
The summary row includes both approved and rejected activities.
Pending
At least one activity included in the summary row is neither approved nor rejected yet.
Approver The ID of the person authorised to approve the activity, if approval is required. This is either the approver of the project task or, if no approver is assigned to the project task, the project manager.
### The Preload from tasks dialog box You can use this dialog box to select the tasks based on which a summary row will be created with the **Earning type**, **Project**, and **Project task** values preloaded from these tasks. The dialog box includes the following elements:
Element Description
ID The identifier of the task.
Summary A summary of the task.
Project The project associated with this task (or the non-project code indicating that this task is not associated with any project defined to Visma Net.
Project task The particular project task with which this task is associated.
Preload from tasks (button) Creates summary rows based on the selected tasks.
Cancel (button) Discards any task selections and closes the dialog box.
## The Details tab This tab includes the detailed information on the work hours the employee has spent on various activities that may be associated with particular projects and project tasks. Cancelled activities are not listed on this tab. If any of the listed activities is associated with a project that has the **Restrict employees** check box selected on the **General settings** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window, an error may occur during the processing of the time card if the selected employee is not included in the list of employees on the **Employees** tab of the [Projects (PM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/project-accounting-windows/projects-pm301000/) window for the related project; if that is the case, the employee has to be added to the list of employees for the time card to be available for release (and after the time card has been released, the employee may be removed from the list again). If you delete a detail row in a time card, the corresponding activity is deleted from the system.
Element Description
Add activity Opens the Activity (CR306010) window, which you can use to create a new activity. After adding a new activity, you can report in the time card any work hours spent on that activity.
View Opens in a pop-up window the Activity (CR306010) window with the details of the selected activity, which you can adjust if the activity has the Open or Cancelled status. This action is applicable only to the time activities created through the Activity (CR306010) window.
Date

The date of the record.

The default date is defined by the Default date in time cards setting on the General settings tab of the Employee classes (EP202000) window.
Type of hour The type of work time spent by the employee.
Job code This column is only available if the Payroll functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Shift code This column is only available if the Multiple work shifts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Task The task associated with the worked hours
Project The project with which the worked hours are associated. This column is only available if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project description The description of the project.
Project task The project task associated with the worked hours. This column is only available if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task description The description of the project task.
Appointment no. This column is only available if the Service management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer no. This column is only available if the Service management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Employee line ref. This column is only available if the Service management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Service This column is only available if the Service management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Time This column is only available if the Service management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Time spent The time the employee spent on the project and task.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the work hours are by an authorised person.
Invoiceable time The invoiceable time for the employee.
Invoiceable OT The invoiceable overtime for the employee.
Summary The description of the record.
RH The regular work time the employee spent on the project and task.
OT The overtime the employee spent on the project and task.
OT mult. The value by which the employee cost for this earning type is multiplied when the time activity is released.
Approval status The value by which the employee cost for this earning type is multiplied when the time activity is released.
Day

The status of the time activity record, which is one of the following:

Pending approval
The time activity requires approval by an authorised person.
Completed
The time activity has either been approved by an authorised person or accepted without approval.
Rejected
The time activity has been rejected by an authorised person; a warning appears for the rejected record.
Cancelled
The time activity has been cancelled.
Released
The time activity has been released.
Case ID The ID of the case associated with the activity.
Contract ID The ID of the contract associated with the activity.
## The Materials tab
Element Description
Project

The project on which the material has been used.

This column is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The project task on which the material has been used. Cancelled project tasks cannot be used in time cards.

This column is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Item ID The ID of the material in the Inventory workspace.
Description The description of the material.
UoM The unit of measure used for the material.
Mon. The quantity of the material used on Monday.
Tue. The quantity of the material used on Tuesday.
Wed. The quantity of the material used on Wednesday.
Thu. The quantity of the material used on Thursday.
Fri. The quantity of the material used on Friday.
Sat. The quantity of the material used on Saturday.
Sun. The quantity of the material used on Sunday.
Total qty. The total quantity of the material that was used.
Employee time cards (EP406000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/employee-time-cards-ep406000 page In this window, you can enter new employee time cards or view (and edit, if needed) existing ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Employee time cards (EP406000) In this window, you can enter new employee time cards or view (and edit, if needed) existing ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can enter new employee time cards or view (and edit, if needed) existing ones. You can also create a customized filter tab based on the fields presented in the table. A time card is a document that an employee uses to record the weekly work hours and overtime hours spent by this employee on a project. ## The top part Use the elements in this area to select the employee whose time cards you want to manage.
Element Description
Employee The identifier of the employee whose time cards you want to manage. The ID of the currently signed-in employee is selected by default. You can also select an employee in a work group below your work group in the company tree.
## The table Each tab created displays a table showing a list of time cards that belong to the selected employee.
Column Description
Employee The identifier of the employee whose time card is listed in the table.
Employee name The name of the employee whose time card is listed in the table.
Week The week for which the time card was created.
Status The status of the time card, which can be one of the following options: On hold, Submitted or Released.
Approval status

The approval status of the time card which can be one of the following options: New, Sent to Approval, Pending, Cancelled, Approved, or Rejected.

The approval status is available only if Approval Integration is active.
Comments Shows comments entered on the time card.
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the time card.
Time spent The work hours spent by the employee during the week on activities with the Regular hours earning type.
Overtime spent The work hours spent by the employee during the week on activities with the Overtime earning type.
Total time spent The total working time ( regular and overtime ) for the week.
Invoiceable The invoiceable work hours spent by the employee during the week.
Invoiceable overtime The invoiceable overtime spent by the employee during the week.
Total invoiceable The total invoiceable working time ( regular and overtime ) for the week.
Invoicing ratio The ratio of the total invoiceable time to the total working time in per cent.
Start date week The starting date of the week as defined in the calender.
## The Table filter tabs The time cards are listed on a default set of filter tabs (All records and Active), each with a table that displays records filtered by their status. You can also create a customized filter tab based on the fields presented in the table. In these tables, the time cards that belong to the employee selected in the **Employee** field in the top part are displayed; if the **Employee** field is empty, all time cards to which you have access are displayed. For more information about time cards, see: [About time cards](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/reporting-of-time/about-time-cards/)
Filter Description
All records Displays the complete list of employee time cards, regardless of their status.
On hold Displays only the time cards that have the On hold status.
Pending approval Displays only the time cards that have the Pending approval status.
Approved Displays only the time cards that have the Approved status.
Rejected Displays only the time cards that have the Rejected status.
Completed Displays only the time cards that have the Approved or Released status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Expense claim (EP301000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-ep301000 page In this window, you can specify the details of a new expense claim. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense claim (EP301000) In this window, you can specify the details of a new expense claim. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can specify the details of a new expense claim. Also, you can use this window to view or edit the details of an existing expense claim. For more information about expense claims, see: [About expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-claims/) ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click to invoke actions:

  • Release: Releases the claim; as a result, the system automatically generates an invoice to reimburse the expenses to the employee. If the claim contains invoiceable lines, the system also prepares records for invoicing the customer. When you use this action, the system changes the status of the claim to Released. If the related financial period is closed in Supplier ledger and posting to closed periods is not allowed, you can specify in the Post to period field on the Financial details tab of this form the open period to which the resulting invoice should be posted.

For more information, see: About expense claim release

  • Approve: Approves the claim; it can then be released. When you select this action, the system changes the status of the claim to Approved.

For more information, see: About expense claim approval

  • Reject: Rejects the claim; an employee can then put the claim on hold, make all necessary adjustments, and submit it for approval again. When you select this action, the system changes the status of the claim to Rejected.
  • Submit: Submits the claim for approval. This action is available only if the claim has the On hold status. When you select this action, the system changes the status of the claim to Pending approval (if approval is required) or Approved (if no approval is required).

For more information, see: About expense claim approval

  • Put on hold: Gives the claim the On hold status, so that you can further adjust the claim before submitting it for approval. You can use this action after a claim has been rejected.
Report
  • Print expense claim:
  • Print detailed expense claim Prints a report that contains all details of the claim.
## The top part You can use the elements in this area to create a new claim or to select an existing claim.
Element Description
Ref. no. The unique reference number of the expense claim document, which the system assigns based on the number series specified for claims in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.
Status

The current status of the expense claim, which is set by the system and can be one of the following options:

On hold
The claim is a draft and cannot be released.
Pending approval
The claim is in the approval process. If the claim is approved, the status changes to Approved.
Approved
The claim has been approved.
Rejected
The claim has been rejected by the approver.
Released
The claim has been released and then a purchase invoice in the employee’s name has been generated.
Date The date when the claim was entered.
Approval date The date when the claim was approved.
Approval status
Description A description of the claim.
External id

This field is automatically populated if the non-stock item is linked to an external expense type in the Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S) window.

Note

This field is only displayed if the Type is Expense and the Expense Integration functionality in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window is enabled.
Claimed by

The employee who is claiming the expenses.

When the claim is released, a purchase invoice will be generated to this employee.
Currency The currency of the claim.
Department ID The department associated with the expense claim.
Customer

The applicable customer, which should be specified if the employee has incurred the expenses while working for a particular customer.

If a contract or project is selected (in the Contract/project column of the Expense details tab), the customer associated with this contract or project is automatically filled in and this field becomes read-only.
Location The company location associated with the claim.
Claim total The total amount of the claim, which is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Claim amount column for all the lines specified for the claim, with taxes applied.
VAT taxable total

The document total that is subject to VAT.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. The VAT taxable amount is displayed in this field only if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable tax in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.
VAT exempt total

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.

This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT total The total amount of taxes calculated on the expense receipts that are included in the expense claim.
## The Expense claim details tab This tab has a table in which you can specify or view the details of the selected claim.
Element Description
Add new receipt Opens the Expense receipt (EP301020) window, where you can enter a new expense receipt, which will be included in this expense claim immediately after you save the changes.
Add receipts Opens the Add receipts dialog box, where you can select unclaimed receipts to be included in the claim.
Show comments history
### The Add receipts dialog box
Element Description
Date The date of the expense receipt.
Ref. no. The reference number of the expense receipt.
Claimed by The name of the employee who is claiming the expenses on the expense receipt.
Branch The company branch that will incur the expenses.
Description The expense description, which is displayed as a link. You can click the link to open the receipt in the Expense receipt (EP301020) window, where you can view and edit its details.
Claim amount The part of the total amount of the receipt to be reimbursed to the employee.
Currency The currency of the expense receipt.
Status The status of the expense receipt. Only receipts with the Open, On hold, or Pending approval status can be added to an expense claim.
Add (button) Adds the selected expense receipts to the claim.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected expense receipts to the claim and closes the dialog box.
Close (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the selected expense receipts (if any) to the claim.
### The Document taxes dialog box
Element Description
Tax discrepancy

The discrepancy between the VAT amounts calculated by the system and the amounts entered in the VAT amount column (for VAT-inclusive items).

The discrepancy should not exceed the rounding limit specified in the Rounding limit field in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
VAT ID The identifier of the specific tax applicable to the expense item specified in the expense receipt.
Tax rate The tax rate used for calculating the tax.
Taxable amount The taxable amount used for calculating a specific tax.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific tax.
Deductible tax rate The percent of deduction that applies to the VAT amount paid for specific purchases.
Expense amount Non-deductible VAT amount that is recorded as expenses.
### The table
Element Description
Date The date when the expense was incurred.
Ref. no. The identifier of the transaction.
Expense item The expense identifier, if an expense of this type is listed as a non-stock item.
Description A description of the transaction, which you manually enter for each line of expense.
Quantity The quantity of this expense item.
UoM The unit of measure in which the quantity is shown.
Unit cost The cost of a unit of the item.
Amount The total amount paid for the expense item in the specified quantity.
VAT amount The total VAT amount that is applicable to the expense receipt specified in the expense claim line.
Employee part The part of the total amount that will not be paid back to the employee. The amount depends on the company policy.
Tip amount

The amount of non-taxable tips that will not be included in the tax base of the receipt.

Tips will be included in purchase invoices or sales invoices (if the receipt is invoiceable) as separate document lines for the non-stock item specified in the Non-taxable tip item field on the General settings tab of the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.

This column is available only if the Non-taxable tip item field in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window is not empty.
Claim amount The amount claimed by the employee, which is calculated as the total claim amount minus the employee part.
Currency The currency of the expense receipt. However, if you enter a claim line directly, the currency value is read-only and the same as the claim currency.
Amount in claim curr. The amount claimed by the employee, which is expressed in the currency of the expense claim.
Status The status of the expense receipt, which can be one of the following: On Hold, Open, Pending approval, Released, or Rejected.
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the claim amount (the total amount minus the employee’s part) is invoiceable to the customer.
Project/contract

The project or customer contract associated with the expense claim, if the work performed was for a project or contract.

You can select a project only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project description
Project task

The task associated with the project.

This field is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task description
Customer

The customer, which should be specified if the employee incurred the expenses while working for a particular customer.

If a contract or project is selected, the customer associated with this contract or project is automatically filled in and the field becomes read-only.
Location The identifier of the customer location associated with the expense, which may have a default value set to the customer location associated with the project or contract if a project or contract has been specified for this details line in the Project/contract column.
Expense account The expense account to which the system should record the part of the expense to be paid back to the employee.
Expense sub. The corresponding subaccount the system uses to record the part of the expense to be paid back to the employee.
Sales account

The sales account to which the system should record the part of the amount to charge the customer for.

If the Invoiceable check box is selected for this detail line, the sales account specified for the expense non-stock item is automatically filled in and the box becomes read-only.
Sales sub.

The corresponding subaccount the system uses to record the amount to charge the customer for.

If the Invoiceable check box is selected for this detail line, the sales subaccount specified for the expense non-stock item is automatically filled in and the box becomes read-only.
VAT category The VAT category associated with the expense receipt selected in the expense claim line.
Ref. no. customers
Pending approver
Approval status
Last approval comment
Paid by Employee or Company. The selected value affects which suspense account from Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) the system will use when releasing the expense claim.This is a snippet
Net amount
Ref. no. suppliers
VAT calculate mode
VAT zone
## The VAT details tab This tab has a table that holds summary VAT information about the taxes that are applicable to the receipts that are included in the claim. The VAT information on this tab cannot be edited. To correct the VAT information in the claim, you should edit the individual expense receipts included in the claim.
Element Description
VAT discrepancy

The total discrepancy amount between the VAT amounts calculated by the system and the amounts entered in the VAT amount column (for VAT-inclusive items) for all receipts included in the claim.

The discrepancy should not exceed the rounding limit specified in the Rounding limit field in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
VAT ID The identifier of the VAT that is applied to one expense receipt or multiple expense receipts included in the claim.
Tax rate The tax rate for the specific tax.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for a specific tax calculated for the expense receipts included in the claim.
VAT amount The amount of VAT charged for the expense receipts to be claimed.
Deductible Tax rate The percent of the deduction that applies to the tax amount paid.
Expense amount The non-deductible VAT amount that is recorded as expenses.
## The Financial details tab This tab provides information about the documents generated as a result of processing the claim. ### The Link to Supplier ledger section
Element Description
Branch The branch of the employee who is the owner of this claim.
Post to period

The period to which the purchase document should be posted. You select an open period before releasing the expense claim if all of the following conditions are met:

The selected period is copied to the Post period field in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window for the supplier ledger document created upon the release of the expense claim.

You can edit this setting only after the expense claim has been submitted for approval.
### The table This table lists the documents that have been generated when the expense claim was processed.
Element Description
Type The type of the related document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the related document.
Amount The total amount of the document.
VAT zone The VAT zone specified in the document.
VAT calculation mode The VAT calculation mode specified in the document.
Status The current status of the document.
### The Default VAT information section
Element Description
VAT zone

The VAT zone specified for the expense claim. By default, for newly created claims, this is the VAT zone of the employee claiming the expenses (which is specified in the VAT zone field on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window); for expense claims created from the expense receipts, the VAT zone is copied from the expense receipt.

The employee VAT zone can be overridden in the claim and this overridden zone can be saved and used as the default VAT zone in expense claims and receipts.

The VAT zone specified in this box provides the default value for the expense receipts created from the claim. If the Allow mixed VAT settings check box is selected in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window, a user can combine receipts with different VAT zones into one expense claim.
VAT calculation mode

The tax calculation mode, which defines which amounts (tax-inclusive or tax-exclusive) should be entered in the expense receipt lines for the selected expense item in the Expense receipt (EP301020) window:

VAT settings
The tax amounts in the expense claim lines are calculated according to the settings of the applicable tax or taxes.
Gross
The amounts in the expense claim lines include taxes.
Net
The amounts in the expense claim lines do not include taxes.

In newly created expense claims, the default value specified in this field is Tax settings. In an expense claim created from an expense receipt, the default value is copied from this expense receipt.

If the Allow mixed VAT settings check box is selected in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window, you can combine receipts with different tax calculation modes to one expense claim.

This box appears only if the Net/gross entry mode functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
## The Approval details tab This tab holds information on approvals of the claim.
Element Description
Approver The user who is assigned to approve the claim.
Approver name The name of the user who is assigned to approve the claim.
Approved by The identifier of the user who actually approved the claim.
Employee name The name of the user who approved the claim.
Date The date of the approval.
Status The approval status of the claim, which can be Pending, Approved, or Rejected.
Work group The work group of the approver.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Expense claims (EP301030) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claims-ep301030 page On this window, you can view lists of existing expense claims and submit them for approval. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense claims (EP301030) On this window, you can view lists of existing expense claims and submit them for approval. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. On this window, you can view lists of existing expense claims and submit them for approval. You can also use this window as a starting point to enter new expense receipts or edit exiting ones. Employees use expense claims to claim expenses that they have incurred while performing some work for their organisation. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Submit

Submits the selected claim for approval. When you invoke this action, the system changes the status of the claim to Pending Approval (if approval is required) or Open (if no approval is required).

You can use this action with claims that have the On hold status.

For more information, see: About expense claim approval
## The top part You use the element in this area to select the employee whose claims you want to manage.
Element Description
Employee

The identifier of the employee whose claims you want to manage.

The ID of the currently signed-in employee is selected by default. You can also select an employee for whom you are an appointed delegate, or an employee in a work group at a lower level in the company tree than your work group.
## The table The table on each tab displays a list of expense claims that belong to the selected employee.
Column Description
Date The date when the claim was entered.
Re. no. The unique reference number of the expense claim document, which the system assigns based on the number series specified for claims in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.
Status

The current status of the expense claim, which is set by the system and can be one of the following options:

On hold
The claim is a draft and cannot be released.
Pending approval
An authorised user needs to approve the claim. When the claim is approved, the status changes to Approved.
Approved
The claim has been approved.
Rejected
The claim has not been approved.
Released
The claim has been approved and then an Supplier ledger invoice in the employee’s name has been generated.
Description The description specified for the claim.
Claim total The total amount of the claim, which is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Claim amount column for all the lines specified for the claim, with taxes applied.
Currency The currency of the claim.
Claimed by

The employee who is claiming the expense.

If the claim is released, an Supplier ledger invoice will be generated to this employee.
Created by The name of the user who created the expense claim.
Department ID The department associated with the expense claim.
Approval date The date when the claim was approved.
## The Table filter tabs The expense claims are listed on a default set of filter tabs, each with a table that displays records filtered by their status. In these tables, the claims that belong to the employee selected in the **Employee** field in the top part are displayed; if the **Employee** field is empty, all claims to which you have access are displayed (see: [About expense claims](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-claims/) for details about access to expense claims).
Filter Description
All records Displays the complete list of expense claims, regardless of their status.
On hold Displays only the claims that have the On hold status.
Pending approval Displays only the claims that have the Pending approval status.
Approved Displays only the claims that have the Approved status.
Rejected Displays only the claims that have the Rejected status.
Completed Displays only the claims that have the Released status.
Expense claim status (EP40460S) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-claim-status-ep40460s page There are only standards icons in the toolbar. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense claim status (EP40460S) There are only standards icons in the toolbar. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part There are only standards icons in the toolbar.
Element Description
Employee The identifier of the employee to whom the expense claim is related.
Department The department of the employee to whom the expense claim is related.
Approval status

The status of the expense claim. Available statuses are:

New: the expense claim is newly created and not processed yet.

Cancelled: the expense claim has been cancelled.

Sent to Approval: the expense claim has been sent to Approval.

Pending: the expense claim is pending approval.

Rejected: the expense claim has been rejected.

Approved: the expense claim has been approved.

Error: an error occurred when the system tried to send the expense claim to Approval.
From date The date from which you want to see the expense claims.
To date The date to which you want to see the expense claims.
Project manager The project manager to whom the expense claim is related.
Customer The customer to which the expense claim is related.
From project The first project to which the expense claim is related.
To project The last project to which the expense claim is related.
Approved sum The approved sum of the expense claim.
Rejected sum The rejected sum of the expense claim.
Pending sum The pending sum of the expense claim.
Claim total The total amount of the expense claim.
Sum on hold The sum on hold on the expense claim.
Submitted sum The submitted sum on the expense claim.
Released sum The released sum on the expense claim.
## The table
Element Description
Date The date of the expense claim.
Ref. no. The reference number of the expense claim.
Description The description of the expense claim.
Status The status of the expense claim.
Approval status The Approval status of the expense claim.
Claimed by The name of the employee claiming the expenses.
Department ID The department of the employee to whom the expense claim is related.
Claim total The total amount of the expense claim.
Currency The currency of the expense claim.
Sum on hold The sum on hold on the expense claim.
Submitted sum The submitted sum on the expense claim.
Released sum The released sum on the expense claim.
Approved sum The approved sum of the expense claim.
Rejected sum The rejected sum of the expense claim.
Pending sum The pending sum of the expense claim.
Pending approver The user whose approval is required.
Expense receipt (EP301020) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipt-ep301020 section In this window, you can specify the details of a new expense receipt. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense receipt (EP301020) In this window, you can specify the details of a new expense receipt. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also use this window to view or edit the details of an existing expense receipt. An expense receipt is a document that confirms the expenses that you as an employee have incurred while you performed work for your organisation. This window is only available when you click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the [Expense receipts (EP301010)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010/) window, or if you open an expense receipt from the list to edit it. For information about expense receipts, see: [About expense receipts](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-receipts/) ## The top part You use the elements on this tab to create a new receipt or to select one of the existing receipts.
Element Description
Receipt ID The identifier of the receipt record in the system, which the system assigns automatically when you save a newly entered receipt.
Date The date of the receipt. By default, the current business date is used when a new receipt is created.
Expense item The non-stock item of the expense, which determines the financial accounts, the default VAT category, and the unit of measure used for the receipt.
Claimed by The name of the employee who is claiming the expenses.
Branch

The company branch that will incur the expenses.

If multiple expense receipts associated with different branches are added to one expense claim, the branch specified for the claim on the Financial details tab of the Expense claim (EP301000) window will reimburse the expenses and the branches specified in this field for the receipts will incur the expenses.
Status

The status of the receipt, which is set by the system and can be one of the following:

On hold
The receipt is new and has not been submitted for approval yet, or the receipt has been rejected and then put on hold while a user is adjusting it.
Open
The receipt is ready to be added to a claim after it has been approved (if approval is required for the receipt) or after it has been submitted for further processing (if approval is not required).
Pending approval
The receipt is pending approval.
Rejected
The receipt has been rejected.
Released
The expense claim associated with the receipt has been released.
Claim amount The amount to be reimbursed to the employee, which is calculated by the following rule: Claim amount = Amount + VAT total (if VAT is exclusive) + Tip amount – Employee part.
VAT total The total amount of VAT or taxes calculated for the expense receipt.
## The Receipt details tab You use the elements on this tab to view or edit the details of the receipt. ### The Expense details section
Element Description
Description The description of the expense.
Quantity The quantity of the expense item that the employee purchased according to the receipt. The quantity is expressed in the units of measure specified for the selected expense non-stock item.
Unit cost The cost of one unit of the expense item. If a standard cost is specified for the expense non-stock item, it is used as the default unit cost.
Amount The total amount of the receipt (for VAT-inclusive taxes), or the total amount before taxes (for VAT-exclusive taxes).
UoM The unit of measure of the expense item.
Employee part

The part of the total amount that will not be paid back to the employee.

If the Amount is VAT-inclusive, the Employee part should include VAT as well.
Tip amount

The amount of non-taxable tips that will not be included in the tax base of the receipt.

Tips will be included in purchase or sales invoices (if the receipt is invoiceable) as separate document lines for the non-stock item specified in the Non-taxable tip item field on the General settings tab of the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.

This field is available only if the Non-taxable tip item field in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.
Currency

The receipt currency, which can be any currency registered in the system. New currencies may be registered in the Currencies (CM202000) window. To change the currency rate, click the Rate selection button.

By default, the receipt currency is the currency specified as the default for the employee.
Ref. no. The reference number, which usually matches the number of the original receipt.
Project/contract

The project or contract, which should be specified if the employee incurred the expenses while working on a particular project or contract.

You can select a project or contract only if the Project accounting or Contract management functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Project task

The project task to which the expenses are related.

This field is available only if the Project accounting functionality is enabled in functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expense claim

The expense claim with which the expense receipt is associated. This setting cannot be edited if the receipt is included in a claim that has the Pending approval, Approved, or Released status.

If the receipt has the Rejected status, it cannot be included in any claim (that is, the list of available expense claims is empty for this receipt).
Expense claim status

The current status of the associated expense claim, which can be one of the following options:

On hold
The claim is a draft. This claim may include receipts with any status except Released.
Pending approval
The claim is in the approval process. This claim may include receipts with only the Open status.
Approved
The claim has been approved. This claim may include receipts with only the Open status.
Rejected
The claim has not been approved. This claim may include receipts with only the Open status.
Released
The claim has been released. This claim may include receipts with only the Released status.
### The Expense classification section This section specifies expense classification information.
Element Description
Paid by Employee or Company. The selected value affects which suspense account from Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) the system will use when releasing the expense claim.This is a snippet
### The VAT info section This section specifies the tax settings that apply to an expense receipt.
Element Description
VAT zone

The VAT zone that applies to the expense receipt. By default, this is the VAT zone of the employee specified in the Claimed by field of the top part. (The VAT zone of an employee is specified in the VAT zone field on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.)

If you change the default VAT zone inserted in this field, the system asks whether you want to save the new value as the default VAT zone for expense receipts.
VAT calculation mode

The tax calculation mode, which defines which amounts (VAT-inclusive or VAT-exclusive) are specified in the expense receipt:

Gross
The Unit cost, Amount, and Employee part in the expense receipt include the VAT amount.
Net
The Unit cost, Amount, and Employee part in the expense receipt do not include the VAT amount.
VAT settings
The system calculates the tax amount in the expense receipt according to the settings of the applicable tax or taxes.

The default value of this setting is the value specified for the selected expense item.

This field appears only if the Net/gross entry mode functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
VAT category The tax category for the expense receipt. By default, this is the VAT category specified for the selected expense item in the Stock items (IN202500) window.
### The Financial details section The settings in this section are editable for an expense receipt with the **On hold**, **Open**, or **Pending approval** status or for an expense receipt included in a claim that can be modified (that is, when the claim has the **On hold** status).
Element Description
Invoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the customer should be invoiced for the claim amount. You can use the Invoice expense claims (EP502000) window to invoice the customer if no project is specified.
Customer

The customer, which should be specified if the employee incurred the expenses while working for a particular customer.

If a contract or project is selected, the customer associated with this contract or project is automatically filled in and the field becomes read-only.
Location The location of the customer related to the expenses.
Cost code

The cost code with which this record is associated to track project costs and revenue.

The field is available if the Cost code functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Expense account The expense account to which the system records the part of the expense to be paid back to the employee.
Expense sub.

The corresponding subaccount the system uses to record the part of the expense to be paid back to the employee.

The segments of the expense subaccount are combined according to the settings specified in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.
Sales account

The sales account to which the system records the part of the amount to charge the customer for.

If the Invoiceable check box is selected, the sales account specified for the expense non-stock item is filled in by default.
Sales sub.

The corresponding subaccount the system uses to record the amount to charge the customer for.

If the Invoiceable check box is selected, the sales subaccount specified for the expense non-stock item is filled in by default.

The segments of the sales subaccount are combined according to the settings specified in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window.
### Image
Element Description
Browse Opens the file selection window, where you can select an image to upload.
Upload Uploads the selected image to the system.
## The VAT details tab This tab shows the taxes that apply to the expense receipt and the discrepancy between the calculated tax amounts and the VAT amounts a user entered on this tab.
Element Description
VAT discrepancy

The discrepancy between the VAT amounts calculated by the system and the VAT amounts entered in the VAT amount column (for tax-inclusive items).

The discrepancy should not exceed the rounding limit specified in the Rounding limit field in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window.
VAT ID The ID of the VAT applied to the expense receipt.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the tax.
Taxable amount The taxable amount used for calculating the VAT.
VAT amount The calculated VAT amount for the specific VAT.
Deductible VAT rate The percent of deduction that applies to the VAT amount paid.
Expense amount Non-deductible VAT amount that is recorded as expenses.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Expense receipts (EP301010) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipts-ep301010 page In this window, you can view filtered lists of expense receipts or generate expense claims that include all listed receipts or only those you select. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense receipts (EP301010) In this window, you can view filtered lists of expense receipts or generate expense claims that include all listed receipts or only those you select. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view filtered lists of expense receipts or generate expense claims that include all listed receipts or only those you select. You can also use this window as a starting point to enter new expense receipts or edit exiting ones. An expense receipt is a document that confirms the expenses that you as an employee have incurred while performing some work for your organisation. You may claim all or part of the amount of an expense. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Claim

Generates one expense claim or multiple claims in which the selected receipts (that is, those for which the unlabelled check box is selected) are included. Receipts with only the Open status can be claimed.

When you select multiple receipts, multiple claims may be generated, each including receipts with common properties. The system always generates different claims for receipts that have different employees, branches, or customers. You can then view and work with the generated expense claims in the Expense claims (EP301030) window.
Claim all Generates one expense claim or multiple claims that include all receipts with the Open status listed on the current filter tab.
## The top part You use the element in this area to select the employee whose expense receipts you want to manage.
Element Description
Employee The identifier of the employee whose expense receipts you want to manage. The ID of the currently signed-in employee is selected by default. You can also select an employee for whom you are an appointed delegate, or an employee in a work group at a lower level in the company tree than your work group.
## The table The table on each tab displays a list of expense receipts that belong to you (and to other employees, if you have been appointed as their delegate).
Element Description
Date The date of the expense receipt.
Status The status of the receipt, which can be On hold, Open, Pending approval, Rejected, or Released.
Description The expense description, which is displayed as a link. You can click the link to open the receipt in the Expense receipt (EP301020) window, where you can view and edit its details.
Ref. no. The reference number, which usually matches the number of the original receipt.
Claim amount The part of the total amount to be reimbursed to the employee.
Currency The currency of the expense receipt.
Expense claim ref. no. The reference number of the expense claim (if any) with which the receipt is associated.
Claimed by The name of the employee who is claiming the expenses.
Created by The ID of the employee who registered the receipt.
All records Displays the complete list of expense receipts, regardless of their status.
On hold Displays only the receipts that have the On hold status.
Pending approval Displays only the receipts that have the Pending approval status.
To be claimed Displays only the unclaimed receipts that have the Open status.
Rejected Displays only the receipts that have the Rejected status.
Completed Displays only the receipts that have the Released status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-receipt-inbox-ep50605s page This window is visible if you have: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S) This window is visible if you have: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + Activated the Expense integration option in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window + The Project accounting license + Clicked the **Claim Details** button in the [Expense inbox (EP50604S)](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-inbox-ep50604s/) window ## The top part
Element Description
External claim ID The ID of the external claim connected with the expense claim.
Internal ref. no The number of the claim in Visma Net.
Description The description of the expense claim.
Claim date The date when the expense claim was created.
Employee ID The ID of the employee to whom the expense claim belongs.
Department The department of the employee.
Total amount The total amount of the expense claim including VAT.
## The table toolbar
Button Description
Link expense item Click this to link the external expense type to an internal expense item.
## The table
Column Description
External expense type ID The ID of the external expense type.
Description The description of the expense receipt.
Internal expense item ID The ID of the internal expense item.
Project ID The ID of the project.
Project description The description of the project.
Project task ID The ID of the project task.
Project task description The description of the project task.
Reinvoiceable A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line amount is invoiceable to the customer.
VAT category ID The VAT category associated with the expense item selected in the expense claim line.
VAT zone ID The VAT zone that applies to the expense receipt. By default, this is the VAT zone of the employee specified in the Claimed by field of the top part. The VAT zone of an employee is specified in the VAT zone field on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window.
Quantity The quantity of this expense item.
UOM The unit of measure in which the quantity is shown.
Amount The total amount paid for the expense item in the specified quantity.
Total excl. VAT amount The amount calculated on the receipt level that is excluding VAT amount.
Total VAT exempt The amount calculated on the receipt level that is exempt from VAT.
VAT amount The total VAT amount that is applicable to the expense receipt specified in the expense claim line.
Currency The currency used on the expense receipt claim.
Account ID The expense account to which the system should record the part of the expense to be paid back to the employee.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount the system uses to record the part of the expense to be paid back to the employee.
Customer no. The number of the customer to whom the expense receipt belongs.
Customer name The name of the customer to whom the expense receipt belongs.
Location ID The ID of the customer location.
Location name The name of the customer location.
Paid by Employee or Company. The selected value affects which suspense account from Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) the system will use when releasing the expense claim.This is a snippet

Related pages

Windows

 Missing time cards (EP40480S) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/missing-time-cards-ep40480s page This inquiry shows missing time cards per week for each employee. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Missing time cards (EP40480S) This inquiry shows missing time cards per week for each employee. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This inquiry shows missing time cards per week for each employee. The weeks displayed start from the day the employee started working in your company. You can filter on employee, department, from week and to week. The inquiry gives you the total of missing time cards, and any filter you set will be taken in to account. ## The top part
Element Description
Employee The name of the employee.
Department The name of the employee’s department.
From week The week from which you want to search for employee time cards. The default week is the week that the employee started working.
To week The week to which you want to inquire about employee time cards.
Missing time cards total Shows the total number of time cards missing, for all employees displayed. Any filter you set is taken into account.
## The table
Element Description
Employee ID The employee’s ID.
Employee name The employee’s name.
Week The week number that the missing time card is displayed for.
Department The department where the employee works.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release expense claims (EP501000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-expense-claims-ep501000 page This window lists all the expense claims that are ready for release. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release expense claims (EP501000) This window lists all the expense claims that are ready for release. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can release either all claims or only selected ones. For more information about releasing expense claims, see: [About expense claim release](/visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/process-expense-claims/about-expense-claim-release/) ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Release Releases the claims you have selected in the table and changes their status to Released.
Release all Releases all the claims listed in the table and changes their status to Released.
## The table The table lists the claims that are ready for release.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the claim from the expense claim number series.
Status The status of the claim.
Date The date of the claim.
Currency The currency of the claim.
Control amount The control amount of the claim.
Claimed by The ID of the employee who claimed the expense.
Employee name The name of the employee claimed the expense.
Department ID The department to which the employee belongs.
Branch The branch where the employee works.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Expense inbox (EP50604S) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/expense-inbox-ep50604s page This window is visible if you have: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense inbox (EP50604S) This window is visible if you have: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. + Activated the Expense integration option in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window + The Project accounting license ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Process Processes the expense claims you have selected in the table.
Process all Processes all expense claims in the table.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can select the expense claims to be listed.
Element Description
Branch ID The ID of the branch to which the expense claims belong that will be displayed in the table. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000).
Inbox status The status of the expense claims you want to view: Error, Blocked, or New.
Employee The employee whose expense claims will be displayed in the table. You can leave the field blank to view data on all employees.
Claim date The date when the expense claim was created.
Customer The customer whose expense claims will be displayed in the table. You can leave the field blank to view data on all customers.
## The table toolbar
Button Description
Link employee Click this to link an employee to the selected expense claim.
Claim details Displays the details of the expense claim in a new window Expense receipt inbox (EP50605S).
Validate manually Click this to validate the selected expense claim manually.
Hide/unhide An expense claim in status Error can be hidden from the inbox by selecting the claim and then clicking the Hide/Unhide button. The claim is then moved to a new status, Hidden. At the moment you can hide the claims one by one. You can always restore the claim to status Error by selecting the claim and clicking the Hide/Unhide button.
## The table
Column Description
Branch The ID of the branch to which the expense claims belong.
Status The Inbox status of the expense claim, selected in the top part.
Status reason The reason for the claim status.
External claim ID The ID of the external claim connected with the expense claim.
Internal ref. no The number of the claim in Visma Net.
Claim date The date when the expense claim was created.
Description The description of the expense claim.
Document status The status of the expense claim
Employee ID The ID of the employee to whom the expense claim belongs.
Employee name The name of the employee to whom the expense claim belongs.
Customer The customer whose employee has created the expense claim.
Customer location The customer location from the project.
Paid date The payment date from the expense claim.
Processing date The date when the expense claim was processed.
Total VAT The sum of all VAT amounts calculated on the receipt level.
Total VAT exempt The sum of all total VAT exempt amounts calculated on the receipt level.
Total excl. VAT amount The sum of all total excl. VAT amounts calculated on the receipt level.
Total amount The total amount of the expense claim including VAT.
Currency The currency used on the expense claim.
Department The department of the employee.

Related pages

Windows

 Release time cards (EP505010) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/release-time-cards-ep505010 page This window lists all time cards that are ready for release. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release time cards (EP505010) This window lists all time cards that are ready for release. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window lists all time cards that are ready for release. You can release either selected time cards or all of them. After successful completion of the release, the system changes the status of the processed time cards to **Released**. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the time cards you have selected in the table and changes their status to Released.
Release all Releases all the time cards listed in the table and changes their status to Released.
## The table This area of the window contains the list of time cards that are ready to be released.
Column Description
Ref. no. The time card reference number, as assigned by the number series specified in the Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) window as the Time card sequence.
Employee The identifier of the employee.
Employee name The name of the employee.
Week The week of the time card.
Time spent The number of regular work hours spent by the employee according to the time card.
Overtime spent The total overtime spent by the employee according to the time card.
Total time spent The total time spent by the employee according to the time card.
Invoiceable The invoiceable regular work hours spent by the employee according to the time card.
Invoiceable overtime The invoiceable overtime spent by the employee according to the time card.
Total invoiceable The total of invoiceable hours spent by the employee according to the time card.
Approved by The ID of the employee who approved the time card.
Approver name The name of the employee who approved the time card.
Approve date The date when the time card was approved.

Related pages

Tasks

 Time analysis per department (EP40470S) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-analysis-per-department-ep40470s page With this inquiry, you can compare the actual invoicing ratio with the target ratio, which you set in the Employees (EP203000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Time analysis per department (EP40470S) With this inquiry, you can compare the actual invoicing ratio with the target ratio, which you set in the Employees (EP203000) window. For more information: [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With this inquiry, you can compare the actual invoicing ratio with the target ratio, which you set in the [Employees (EP203000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/employees-ep203000/) window. For each time card, you will see the information of the number of hours registered as regular hours, overtime, public holidays and vacations, as well as the invoicing ratio and target ratio. You can filter on department, from week, until week, Approval status, time card, and labour item. With these filters, you get the sum for the total time spent and the invoiceable ratio and target ratio for the displayed time cards. ## The top part There are only standards icons in the toolbar.
Element Description
Department The name of the department.
From week The week from which you want to see the time spent.
Until week The week to which you want to see the time spent.
Approval status

The status of the time card. Available statuses are:

New: the time card is newly created and not processed yet.

Cancelled: the time card has been cancelled.

Sent to Approval: the time card has been sent to Approval.

Pending: the time card is pending approval.

Rejected: the time card has been rejected.

Approved: the time card has been approved.

Error: an error occurred when the system tried to send the time card to Approval.
Time card Select the time card you want to filter the results on.
Labour item Select the labour item you want to filter the results on.
Total time spent The summarised time worked for the results displayed.
Invoiceable ratio % The percentage of regular hours per week, compared to the invoiceable hours registered in the time card. You set the invoiceable hours in the Employees (EP203000) window, on the Employee cost tab.
Target ratio % The percentage of invoiceable hours you expect of the employee. You set the target ratio in the Employees (EP203000) window, on the General settings tab.
## The table
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the time card.
Employee The employee’s ID.
Employee name The employee’s name.
Department The department where the employee works.
Labour item The labour item the item was registered on.
Approval status The Approval status or the time card.
Total time spent The sum of hour worked.
Invoiceable ratio % The percentage of regular hours per week, compared to the invoiceable hours registered in the time card.
Target ratio in % The percentage of invoiceable hours for the employee.
Overtime spent The number of hours worked as overtime.
Regular hours The number of regular hours worked.
Public holidays The number of public holidays in the selected period.
Vacations The time registered as vacation in the selected period.

Related pages

Windows

 Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-and-expenses-preferences-ep101000 page You use this window to configure the Time and expenses workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Time and expenses preferences (EP101000) You use this window to configure the Time and expenses workspace. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to configure the Time and expenses workspace. The settings of the workspace include the number series assigned to expense claims and time cards to be used to assign expense claims and time cards for approval. ## General information tab The general settings for the Time and expenses workspace include default options that affect claim and document processing. ### The Number series section
Element Description
Expense claim number series The number series used to automatically assign numbers to expense claim documents as they are created.
Time card number series The number series used to automatically assign numbers to time cards as they are created.
### The Pending approval notification section
Element Description
Expense claim notification

The notification template that the system uses to generate notification emails for employees that approve expense claims.

An employee receives an approval notification when an expense claim requires approval from this employee. You can select a predefined notification template or use the Notification templates (SM204003) window to create a new notification template.

For more information, see: About expense claim approval
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically release customer documents

If you select this check box, customer documents generated through the Time and expenses workspace (for instance, invoices generated on expense claim release) are released automatically.

If the check box is cleared, the supplier documents can be released only manually in the Customer ledger workspace.

For more information, see: Process customer ledger documents - overview
Automatically release supplier documents

If you select this check box, the supplier documents generated through the Time and expenses workspace (for instance, invoices generated on expense claim release) are released automatically.

If the check box is cleared, the supplier documents can be released only manually in the Supplier ledger workspace.
Automatically release project documents

If you select this check box, the project transactions generated through the Time and expenses workspace are released automatically.

If the check box is cleared, the project transactions can be released only manually in the Projects workspace.
### The Note and file handling section
Element Description
Copy notes to customer documents If you select this check box, the system will copy the notes attached to the expense receipts to the related customer documents, after the expense claim is released.
Copy files to customer documents If you select this check box, the system will copy the files attached to the expense receipts to the related customer documents, after the expense claim is released.
Copy notes to supplier documents If you select this check box, the system will copy the notes attached to an expense claim and its detail lines to the related supplier documents, after the expense claim is released.
Copy files to supplier documents If you select this check box, the system will copy the files attached to an expense claim and its detail lines to the related supplier documents, after the expense claim is released.
Copy notes to project documents

If you select this check box, the system will copy the notes attached to the expense receipts to the related project or contract transactions (if generated), after the expense claim is released.

Note

The notes attached to an activity associated with a project, should be copied to the related project transactions, after the activity is released.
Copy files to project documents

If you select this check box, the system will copy the files attached to the expense receipts to the related project or contract transactions (if generated), after the expense claim is released.

Note

The files attached to an activity associated with a project, should be copied to the related project transactions, after the activity is released.
### The Expense claim settings section By using the **Combine sales sub. from** and **Combine expense sub. from** settings, you can define rules for specifying subaccounts on data entry forms by combining segment values from the subaccounts assigned to the entities involved: company location, customer location, employee, or item.
Element Description
Combine sales sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the sales subaccount to be used on data entry forms in the Time and expenses workspace.

To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which can be one of the following options:

  • C: The subaccount associated with the company location
  • E: The subaccount associated with the employee
  • I: The subaccount associated with the item
  • L: The subaccount associated with the customer location
  • P: The subaccount associated with the project.
  • This option is available only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
  • T: The subaccount associated with the project task.
  • This option is available only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For a segment, the character designating each option is repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Combine expense sub. from

The subaccount mask that defines the rule of selecting segment values for the expense subaccount to be used on data entry forms in the Time and expenses workspace.

To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which can be one of the following options:

  • C: The subaccount associated with the company location
  • E: The subaccount associated with the employee
  • I: The subaccount associated with the item
  • L: The subaccount associated with the customer location
  • P: The subaccount associated with the project.
  • This option is available only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
  • T: The subaccount associated with the project task.
  • This option is available only if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

For a segment, the character designating each option is repeated as many times as there are characters in the segment.
Non-taxable tip item

The non-stock item that defines non-taxable tips that may be included in purchase and sales invoices as separate document lines.

If a non-stock item is selected in this field, the Tip amount field appears on the Receipt details tab of the Expense receipt (EP301020) window and the Tip amount column appears on the Expense claim details tab of the Expense claim (EP301000) window so users can claim non-taxable tip amounts.

The selected non-stock item must be associated with a VAT category that includes only taxes with zero rates or no taxes at all.
Use receipt accounts for tips

If you select this check box, the following settings on the Receipt details tab of the Expense receipt (EP301020) window are used as the source of the account and subaccount (if subaccounts are in use) to which tip amounts are posted:

  • For purchase invoices, the account and subaccount specified in the Expense account and Expense subaccount fields
  • For sales invoices, the account and subaccount specified in the Sales account and Sales subaccount fields

If the check box is cleared, the following occurs:

  • For purchase invoices, tip amounts are posted to the expense account specified for the tip item, which is selected in the Non-taxable tip item field above, and to the subaccount combined based on the mask specified in the Combine expense sub. from field above, with the tip item used as the source of values for I segments.
  • For sales invoices, tip amounts are posted to the sales account specified for the tip item selected in the Non-taxable tip item field above and to the subaccount combined based on the mask specified in the Combine sales sub. from field above, with the tip item used as the source of values for I segments.

This check box is available only if a non-stock item is selected in the Non-taxable tip item field.
Hold expense claims on entry If you select this check box, a newly created expense claim will have the On hold status by default.
Allow mixed tax settings in claims

If you select this check box, expense receipts with different tax settings (that is, different VAT zones, tax calculation modes, or both) can be processed within one expense claim.

On release of this expense claim, the system generates multiple supplier invoices, each of which contains expense receipts with the same VAT zone and tax calculation mode. If the check box is cleared, the expense claim can include only the expense receipts with the same VAT zone and tax calculation mode specified.
### The Time reporting settings section
Element Description
Require time on activity If you select this check box, the start time is displayed for activities in the Date field in the Activities (EP404300) window.
Default time activity type The type assigned to a time activity when a user creates the activity.
Min. invoiceable time

The minimum time, in minutes, that is included in the invoice when a user runs invoicing for time card or time activity.

For instance: If the value of this setting is 15 (minutes) and the duration of your time activity is 5 minutes, the system will still invoice for 15 minutes.
Regular hours The earning type that the system must treat as regular hours.
Public holidays The earning type that the system must treat as holiday hours.
Holidays The earning type that the system must treat as vacation hours.
Post to off-balance account group

If you select this check box, the transactions originating in the Time and expenses workspace should update the balances of an Off-balance account group or the balances of General ledger accounts.

If this check box is selected, the transactions do not update the General ledger.
Off-balance account group The account group of the Off-balance type to be used to post transactions originating in the Time and expenses workspace.
### The Week settings section
Element Description
Custom week configuration If you select this check box, custom weeks can be configured on the Custom week settings tab.
First day of week The day to be used as the first working day for custom weeks.
## The Approval section
Element Description
Release time card from Approval If you select this check box, the system releases the time sheet from Approval.
Release expenses from Approval If you select this check box, the system releases the expenses from Approval.
Turn off Approval flow for the time cards If you select this check box, the system will not use Approval for time card.
## Custom week settings tab This tab appears only if the **Custom week configuration** check box is selected on the **General settings** tab. On this tab, you can configure the custom weeks for use with time cards. You click the **Generate weeks** button to configure the weeks and to generate the configured custom weeks. Custom weeks are generated according to the following rules: + For a date range that already holds time cards or activities, weeks remain as they were to avoid contradiction between the new numbers for custom weeks and the numbers of the weeks to which existing time cards or activities refer. + For a date range that starts after the latest existing time card or activity, weeks are created in accordance with your settings specified in the **Generate Weeks** dialog box. Custom weeks cannot include more than 7 days. For example: Suppose that an organisation has a financial year based on weeks that start on Monday. The organisation files reports on the 15th day of each month, and in January, it falls on Wednesday. The week used for time cards should end on January 15, and the week will include 3 days. The next week will start on January 16 and will last 4 days. The 3 weeks following the next week will be full calendar weeks. The week that includes February 15 will also be cut into two weeks. ### The top part
Element Description
Year The year for which the list of custom weeks is displayed in the table below.
Generate weeks (button) A button that you click to bring up the Generate weeks dialog box, which you can use to define these weeks and to generate them.
### The table This table displays the generated custom weeks. You can only edit them by starting at the last listed week and working backwards.
Column Description
Number The number of the generated week in the selected year.
Active A check box that indicates that the week is active and available for selection on the data entry forms.
Start The start date of the week.
End The end date of the week.
Full week A check box that indicates whether the custom week is a full calendar week (that is, if it includes 7 days).
### The Generate weeks dialog box
Element Description
From date The date that starts the date range for which the custom weeks will be defined and generated.
Until date The date that ends the date range for which the custom weeks will be defined and generated.
Cut-off day one

The type of the first day within the reporting period that divides the corresponding week into two weeks. You can select one of the following options:

None
There is no such day.
Fixed day of month
The particular day is specified in the Day one field.
End of month
The day that divides the week is the last day of the month.
Day one The particular day of the month that ends the week; this field is available only if Fixed day of month is selected in the Cut-off day one field.
Cut-off day two

The type of the second day within the reporting period that divides the corresponding week into two weeks; this field is available only if Fixed day of month is selected in the Cut-off day one field. You can select one of the following options:

None
There is no such day.
Fixed day of month
The particular day is specified in the Day two field.
End of month
The day that divides the week is the last day of the month.
Day two The particular day of the month that ends the week; this field is available only if the Fixed day of month is selected in the Cut-off day two field.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Time card status (EP40450S) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-windows/time-card-status-ep40450s page Each tab created displays a table showing a list of time cards that belong to the selected employee. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Time card status (EP40450S) Each tab created displays a table showing a list of time cards that belong to the selected employee. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The table Each tab created displays a table showing a list of time cards that belong to the selected employee.
Column Description
Employee The identifier of the employee to whom the time card is related.
Department The department of the employee to whom the time card is related.
Approval status

The approval status of the time card which can be one of the following options: New, Sent to Approval, Pending, Cancelled, Approved, or Rejected.

The approval status is available only if Approval Integration is active.
From week The week from which the time cards will be listed.
Until week The week until which the time cards will be listed.
Project manager The project manager to whom the time card is related.
Customer The customer to which the time card is related.
From project The first project to which the time card is related.
To project The last project to which the time card is related.
Time approved The registered time that is pending approval.
Rejected time The registered time that has been rejected.
Pending time The registered time that is pending approval.
Total time spent The total working time ( regular and overtime ) for the week.
Time on hold The registered time that is on hold.
Submitted time The registered time that has been submitted to payment.
Released time The registered time that has been released.
## The table The table lists the time cards and their statuses according to the selections you have made in the top part.
Element Description
Ref. no. The reference number of the time card.
Week The week for which the time card has registered time.
Status The status of the time card.
Approval status

The approval status of the time card which can be one of the following options: New, Sent to Approval, Pending, Cancelled, Approved, or Rejected.

The approval status is available only if Approval Integration is active.
Employee The identifier of the employee to whom the time card is related.
Employee name The name of the employee to whom the time card is related.
Department The department of the employee to whom the time card is related.
Total time spent The total working time ( regular and overtime ) for the week.
Time on hold The registered time that is on hold.
Submitted time The registered time that has been submitted to payment.
Released time The registered time that has been released.
Time approved The registered time that has been approved.
Rejected time The registered time that has been rejected.
Pending time The registered time that is pending approval.
Pending approver The approver whose approval is pending.
Time and expenses reports /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-reports section With the reports available for the Time and expenses workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about expense claims, review the data, and track expense claims for different branches, departments, and employees. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Time and expenses reports With the reports available for the Time and expenses workspace, you can promptly get detailed information about expense claims, review the data, and track expense claims for different branches, departments, and employees. Because the Time and expenses workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. You can use flexible selection options and data links to easily drill down from a financial report to any supporting details. Time and expenses reports are generated by user request. They run on only those accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. Expense claim details (EP613000) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-reports/expense-claim-details-ep613000 section This report displays details on expense receipts grouped by expense claims. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense claim details (EP613000) This report displays details on expense receipts grouped by expense claims. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays details on expense receipts grouped by expense claims. All amounts in the report are displayed in the base currency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which you want to view data.

By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch for which you want to view data.
Start date

The date that starts the date range for which you want to view data.

By default, the current business date is selected.
End date

The date that ends the date range for which you want to view data.

By default, the current business date is selected.
Employee The employee for whom you want to view data.
Expense ID The ID of the expense item for which you want to view data.
Include unreleased A check box that indicates (if selected) that all expense claims that match the specified criteria will be included in the report, regardless of their status.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Expense claim details by department (EP614010) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-reports/expense-claim-details-by-department-ep614010 section This report displays information about claimed expenses grouped by department. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense claim details by department (EP614010) This report displays information about claimed expenses grouped by department. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about claimed expenses grouped by department. The format of the displayed data depends on the **Format** parameter. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format

The format of the report, which can be one of the following options:

By department
To view the list of claimed expenses grouped by department
By department and expense ID
To view the list of claimed expenses grouped by department and broken down by expense item
Company

The company for which you want to view data.

By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch for which you want to view data.
Start date

The date that starts the date range for which you want to view data.

By default, the current business date is selected.
End date

The date that ends the date range for which you want to view data.

By default, the current business date is selected.
Department The department for which you want to view data.
Employee The employee for whom you want to view data.
Expense ID The ID of the expense item for which you want to view data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Expense claim details by employee (EP614020) /visma-net-erp/help/time-and-expenses/time-and-expenses-reports/expense-claim-details-by-employee-ep614020 section This report displays information about claimed expenses grouped by employee. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Expense claim details by employee (EP614020) This report displays information about claimed expenses grouped by employee. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information about claimed expenses grouped by employee. The format of the displayed data depends on the **Format** parameter. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Format

The format of the report, which can be one of the following options:

By employee
To view the list of claimed expenses grouped by employee
By employee and expense ID
To view the list of claimed expenses grouped by employee and broken down by expense item
Company

The company for which you want to view data.

By default, the current company is selected.
Branch The branch for which you want to view data.
Start date

The date that starts the date range for which you want to view data.

By default, the current business date is selected.
End date

The date that ends the date range for which you want to view data.

By default, the current business date is selected.
Department The department for which you want to view data.
Employee The employee for whom you want to view data.
Expense ID The ID of the expense item for which you want to view data.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 VAT /visma-net-erp/help/vat section The process of setting up the VAT calculation along with configuring the VAT reporting functionality is described extensively in other topics in this help. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT The process of setting up the VAT calculation along with configuring the VAT reporting functionality is described extensively in other topics in this help. The VAT workspace provides functionality for automatic calculation of VAT amounts on each invoice and other similar document created in Visma Net. To set up the VAT calculation in the documents across the system, you should create all required taxes with their effective rates along with other VAT-related entities, such as VAT zones and VAT categories, and then associate these entities with appropriate elements of other Visma Net workspaces involved in the calculation process. ## VAT calculation You can calculate taxes in Visma Net by using different methods. You can set up an appropriate VAT calculation method, including calculating the VAT amount based on the total document amount or for each item listed in the document, or excluding the VAT amount from the product price specified in the document. For details, see: [Set up VAT calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation/set-up-vat-calculation/). ## VAT zones and categories In Visma Net, a VAT zone is a group of taxes levied on a particular geographical location for all goods and services that may be sold or purchased by your company. You create VAT zones by using the [VAT zones (TX206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-zones-tx206000/) window for all locations of your customers and suppliers and add appropriate taxes to these VAT zones. For VAT-exempt customers (for example, those with reseller permits), you can create the VAT zones with zero-rated taxes. Thus, the VAT amount in the document will be calculated basing on the tax, which corresponds to the location of the customer or supplier as well as on the type of the services or goods mentioned in the document (for example, in the invoice), for which, in turn, you should also create and assign a **VAT category**. ## Tax agencies In Visma Net, you can configure a VAT report for a particular tax agency and set up automatic accumulation of appropriate VAT amounts in the VAT report. For each tax agency, you can define specific reporting settings, such as the reporting period or the rounding rules. ## VAT reporting The structure and content of the VAT report is prescribed by each particular tax collection agency and can be filed in a paper or electronic form. Usually, such form contains a number of fields that require the VAT amounts and/or taxable amounts to be entered. In Visma Net, the VAT report is represented as a table where the fields are represented as the lines. You can configure a VAT report with required lines, and set up automatic accumulation of VAT amounts and taxable amounts in the appropriate lines. The preparation of a VAT report includes the following steps: preparing a VAT report for a required reporting period, and closing the reporting period. You can adjust the net VAT amount in the VAT report by creating the VAT adjustment document manually, or create another revision of the VAT report for the closed reporting period. For details, see: [VAT report preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/about-vat-report-preparation/). ## EC sales list The EC sales list is a supplementary reporting requirement for companies selling across the European union borders. It is used when reporting VAT on sales and.can be filed in a paper or electronic form. The EC Sales List contains information on sales and transfers of goods and services to VAT registered companies in other EU countries. For more information, go to your tax agency's website. The preparation of the EC sales list includes the following steps: preparing the VAT report (only the first time you create a EC sales list), creating the EC sales list for the set reporting period, modifying any transactions if needed, and finally sending the list to the tax agency. About VAT settings /visma-net-erp/help/vat/about-vat-settings page When you create a VAT rate in the system, you have to specify the settings that the system uses to calculate the VAT amount and the taxable amount (that is, the tax base) in the documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT settings When you create a VAT rate in the system, you have to specify the settings that the system uses to calculate the VAT amount and the taxable amount (that is, the tax base) in the documents. When you create a VAT rate in the system, you have to specify the settings that the system uses to calculate the VAT amount and the taxable amount (that is, the tax base) in the documents. You configure a VAT by using the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. Depending on the type of the VAT, you can specify different settings. Most of these settings and their use are described in detail below. ## Defining the method of calculating the VAT amount Different taxes may require different methods of calculation. You can select the appropriate option in the **Calculate on** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. The following options are available: Extract from item amount : The VAT is already included in the item price. The system extracts the VAT amount from the item amount according to the VAT rate that you specify. Item amount : The VAT amount is calculated on a per-item basis; that is, the VAT is applied to each line in the document. Document amount : The VAT amount is calculated on a per-document basis. That is, the document total amount is used for VAT calculation. Item + VAT amount : The VAT amount is calculated by using as the tax base the sum of the item amounts and the VAT amount. Document + VAT amount : The VAT amount is calculated by using as the tax base the sum of the document amount and the VAT amount. Consider an example in which the different VAT calculation methods are used. Imagine that the document contains 100 items, each priced at €10, and the VAT rate is 8.25%: + With the per-document method, the tax base (total amount of the document) would be 100 items x €.10= €.1000. Then the VAT amount would be €1000 x.0825 = €82.5. + With the per-item method, the VAT amount per item would be €10 x.0825 = €0.825, which rounds to €0.83. Then the total VAT amount would be €0.83 x 100 items = €83. As you can see, using different methods of VAT calculation for the same documents may cause discrepancies in the document totals due to rounding. Thus, you need to choose the calculation method that best suits your needs. ## Defining how cash discounts are applied In the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, you can specify the method of calculating the taxable amount if a cash discount is applied to the document. You can select one of the following options: > [!NOTE] > A cash discount can be applied to a document only within the cash discount period. The end date of the cash discount period is specified in the **Cash discount date** field in the invoice (or the similar document). This date is defined by the system according to the specified payment terms. Reduces taxable amount : The system deducts the discount amount from the document amount before VAT calculation. Thus, the VAT amount is calculated based on the discounted taxable amount. For example: Assume that the price of the one purchased item is 100€, the VAT rate is 10%, and the cash discount is 20%. In this case, the taxable amount is decreased by the discount amount and is equal to €100 (price) - €20 (discount) = €80. Thus, the VAT amount is €8. The document amount is equal to the product price plus the discounted VAT amount: €100 (price) + 8€ (VAT amount) = €108. Does not affect taxable amount : (selected by default): The discount amount doesn’t affect the taxable amount. That is, the base for VAT calculation is the same as the base for discount calculation. As in the previous example, consider a price of €100, a discount of 20%, and a VAT of 10%. Because the taxable amount is not affected by the discount, it is €100. The VAT amount is €10. Thus, the document amount is €110. Reduces taxable amount on early payment : . The system recalculates the taxable amount in the document if the full payment has been received within the cash discount period. The documents that have been fully paid within the cash discount period are listed in the [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) window. In this window, you can generate credit notes that will be automatically applied to the corresponding documents upon release. ## Updating the VAT rate If the rate of a particular VAT is going to be changed in the future, you can specify in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window the new VAT rate and the date from which it will be effective. To do that, you should add a new row to the table on the **VAT schedule** tab and specify its settings. ## Defining the minimum and maximum taxable amounts For each row of the table on the **VAT schedule** tab of the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, you can define the minimum and maximum taxable amount for each VAT in the corresponding columns. + If a minimum amount is specified in the **Min. taxable amount** column, the VAT rate of 0 will be applied to amounts less than the specified minimum. + If a maximum amount is specified in the **Max. taxable amount** column, the VAT rate of 0 will be applied to amounts greater than the specified maximum. In all other cases, VAT is calculated by using the specified rate. ## Defining the reporting group If you plan to use the built-in VAT reporting functionality in Visma Net, you should select the reporting group that you have created for the tax agency specified in the **Tax agency ID** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window If you do not plan to use the built-in VAT reporting functionality, specify one of the predefined reporting groups ( **input** or **output** ) in the **Reporting group** column on the **VAT schedule** tab of this window. Set up calculation /visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation section In Visma Net, the system automatically performs VAT calculation in the documents (such as supplier or customer invoices) once a user has configured all Visma Net entities involved in this process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up calculation In Visma Net, the system automatically performs VAT calculation in the documents (such as supplier or customer invoices) once a user has configured all Visma Net entities involved in this process. The system calculates taxes based on the following details specified in the document: + The supplier or customer + The item ID + The quantity of items + The unit cost of each item The system calculates the VAT and taxable amounts by using the settings of each VAT that corresponds to both the VAT category of the specified item ID and the VAT zone of the selected supplier or customer. The system calculates the VAT and taxable amounts for each line of the document or for the total document amount, depending on the settings of the applied VAT (for details, see: [About VAT settings](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/about-vat-settings/) ). The VAT amount is entered in the corresponding field of the invoice: **VAT taxable total**, **VAT exempt total**, or **VAT total**, depending on the VAT applied to the document. After you have released the document, the system creates the corresponding general ledger batch and records these amounts to the appropriate general ledger accounts. Visma Net gives you the ability to create VAT reports. If your company plans to create VAT reports by using Visma Net, you should configure a VAT report for each tax collection agency to which the taxes have to be reported. When you have configured a VAT report and set up all required relations (see: [Set up VAT calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation/set-up-vat-calculation/) ), you can prepare the VAT report by clicking one button. You should set up the reporting periods and some report properties individually for each tax agency account. (In Visma Net, a tax agency is defined as a supplier.) All the required VAT and taxable amounts will be collected in the VAT report as each taxable document is released in the system. Set up VAT calculation /visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation/set-up-vat-calculation page You should complete the following configuration steps to make the system to calculate VAT amounts in the documents that users create: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up VAT calculation You should complete the following configuration steps to make the system to calculate VAT amounts in the documents that users create: 1. Create separate VAT rates if the rate of a particular VAT varies depending on the geographical location or the category of goods or services (for example, taxable or VAT-exempt). 1. Create all required VAT categories, considering all the products and services your company sells or purchases. Add the appropriate VAT rates to each VAT category. 1. Create all required VAT zones, considering all the geographical locations of your customers and suppliers, and add the appropriate VAT rates to each VAT zone. 1. Specify the appropriate VAT category for each stock or non-stock item on the **General settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) or [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window, respectively. > [!NOTE] > You can create new stock or non-stock items and specify the VAT category during their creation. You can also change the VAT category for an existing stock or non-stock items if any default VAT categories were specified during their creation. 1. Specify the VAT zone for each supplier on the **Purchase settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, and for each existing customer on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. 1. If you use different VAT categories for different customers, customer locations, and suppliers, set the appropriate export type per customer location or customer class, and import type per supplier class. Continue to Step 7. 1. In the item classes, specify the VAT categories associated with the export and import types. [About suggested VAT categories](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/). For more information, see: After you have performed these steps, Visma Net will automatically calculate VAT for each invoice or similar document in the system. About prerequisites and preparation /visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation/about-prerequisites-and-preparation page To set up the VAT calculation process in Visma Net, you have to configure all required VAT-related entities and link them to one another. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About prerequisites and preparation To set up the VAT calculation process in Visma Net, you have to configure all required VAT-related entities and link them to one another. > [!NOTE] > The General ledger workspace must be configured before you configure the VAT workspace. ## VAT You should create all VAT rates that your company uses. The settings for each VAT include the VAT rate, the VAT calculation method, the VAT validity period (if any), and other required parameters. ## VAT zones You should create all needed VAT zones and include the VAT rates applied in the corresponding location in each VAT zone. You then associate an appropriate VAT zone with each of your suppliers and customers according to their locations. ## VAT categories You should create the needed VAT categories for all goods or services (which are represented as stock items and non-stock items in Visma Net ) that your company sells or purchases. For each VAT category, you should add all VAT rates that are applied to the corresponding category of goods and services in all geographical locations where your company conducts business. ## Tax agency For each tax agency to which you will submit VAT reports, you should create a supplier account in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window with the **Supplier is tax agency** check box selected. The entities that you have configured in the VAT workspace should be linked with the following entities, which you create in other Visma Net workspaces (or add VAT-specific information for the entities if they have already been created): ## Stock items and non-stock items To calculate VAT amounts in the documents in which you specify item IDs, create stock items (for goods) and non-stock items (for services) and associate each item with the appropriate VAT category. The initial VAT category on customer documents is based on the VAT category on the item class in combination with the customer location's export type. For more information, see: [About suggested VAT categories](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/). The VAT category defines the VAT rates that can be applied to this stock or non-stock item. ## Supplier and customer accounts You should create needed suppliers in the Supplier ledger workspace and customers in the Customer ledger workspace if they don't already exist. Depending on the geographical location of the sale or purchase transaction, different VAT rates can be applied to the document. To define which VAT rates are applied in the location of your supplier or customer, you should assign the appropriate VAT zone to each new or existing supplier and customer. If you define an export type on a customer location or customer class, this will be used for defining VAT rates for customer document lines with item IDs, see also [About export types](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/manage-customers/about-export-types/) and [About suggested VAT categories](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories/). Once these entities are configured, the system will calculate VAT amounts when a user enters a document in the system. The system does this by applying the particular VAT or taxes determined by the system according to the location of the selected customer or supplier and the line items specified in the document. Manage taxes /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage taxes About VAT settings /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/about-vat-settings page When you create a VAT rate in the system, you have to specify the settings that the system uses to calculate the VAT amount and the taxable amount (that is, the tax base) in the documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT settings When you create a VAT rate in the system, you have to specify the settings that the system uses to calculate the VAT amount and the taxable amount (that is, the tax base) in the documents. When you create a VAT rate in the system, you have to specify the settings that the system uses to calculate the VAT amount and the taxable amount (that is, the tax base) in the documents. You configure a VAT by using the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. Depending on the type of the VAT, you can specify different settings. Most of these settings and their use are described in detail below. ## Defining the method of calculating the VAT amount Different taxes may require different methods of calculation. You can select the appropriate option in the **Calculate on** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. The following options are available: Extract from item amount : The VAT is already included in the item price. The system extracts the VAT amount from the item amount according to the VAT rate that you specify. Item amount : The VAT amount is calculated on a per-item basis; that is, the VAT is applied to each line in the document. Document amount : The VAT amount is calculated on a per-document basis. That is, the document total amount is used for VAT calculation. Item + VAT amount : The VAT amount is calculated by using as the tax base the sum of the item amounts and the VAT amount. Document + VAT amount : The VAT amount is calculated by using as the tax base the sum of the document amount and the VAT amount. Consider an example in which the different VAT calculation methods are used. Imagine that the document contains 100 items, each priced at €10, and the VAT rate is 8.25%: + With the per-document method, the tax base (total amount of the document) would be 100 items x €.10= €.1000. Then the VAT amount would be €1000 x.0825 = €82.5. + With the per-item method, the VAT amount per item would be €10 x.0825 = €0.825, which rounds to €0.83. Then the total VAT amount would be €0.83 x 100 items = €83. As you can see, using different methods of VAT calculation for the same documents may cause discrepancies in the document totals due to rounding. Thus, you need to choose the calculation method that best suits your needs. ## Defining how cash discounts are applied In the **Cash discount** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, you can specify the method of calculating the taxable amount if a cash discount is applied to the document. You can select one of the following options: > [!NOTE] > A cash discount can be applied to a document only within the cash discount period. The end date of the cash discount period is specified in the **Cash discount date** field in the invoice (or the similar document). This date is defined by the system according to the specified payment terms. Reduces taxable amount : The system deducts the discount amount from the document amount before VAT calculation. Thus, the VAT amount is calculated based on the discounted taxable amount. For example: Assume that the price of the one purchased item is 100€, the VAT rate is 10%, and the cash discount is 20%. In this case, the taxable amount is decreased by the discount amount and is equal to €100 (price) - €20 (discount) = €80. Thus, the VAT amount is €8. The document amount is equal to the product price plus the discounted VAT amount: €100 (price) + 8€ (VAT amount) = €108. Does not affect taxable amount : (selected by default): The discount amount doesn’t affect the taxable amount. That is, the base for VAT calculation is the same as the base for discount calculation. As in the previous example, consider a price of €100, a discount of 20%, and a VAT of 10%. Because the taxable amount is not affected by the discount, it is €100. The VAT amount is €10. Thus, the document amount is €110. Reduces taxable amount on early payment : . The system recalculates the taxable amount in the document if the full payment has been received within the cash discount period. The documents that have been fully paid within the cash discount period are listed in the [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) window. In this window, you can generate credit notes that will be automatically applied to the corresponding documents upon release. ## Updating the VAT rate If the rate of a particular VAT is going to be changed in the future, you can specify in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window the new VAT rate and the date from which it will be effective. To do that, you should add a new row to the table on the **VAT schedule** tab and specify its settings. ## Defining the minimum and maximum taxable amounts For each row of the table on the **VAT schedule** tab of the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, you can define the minimum and maximum taxable amount for each VAT in the corresponding columns. + If a minimum amount is specified in the **Min. taxable amount** column, the VAT rate of 0 will be applied to amounts less than the specified minimum. + If a maximum amount is specified in the **Max. taxable amount** column, the VAT rate of 0 will be applied to amounts greater than the specified maximum. In all other cases, VAT is calculated by using the specified rate. ## Defining the reporting group If you plan to use the built-in VAT reporting functionality in Visma Net, you should select the reporting group that you have created for the tax agency specified in the **Tax agency ID** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window If you do not plan to use the built-in VAT reporting functionality, specify one of the predefined reporting groups ( **input** or **output** ) in the **Reporting group** column on the **VAT schedule** tab of this window. Create a VAT /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/create-a-vat section Make sure that the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a VAT Make sure that the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). ## Before you proceed ## Create a VAT 1. Go to the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. On the **VAT settings** tab of the top part, proceed as follows: 1. In the **VAT ID** field, type the unique identifier for the tax. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, type a description of the VAT, so you can easily identify it in the list. 1. In the **VAT type** field, select **VAT**. 1. In the **Calculate on** field, select one of the following calculation methods for the VAT, described fully in [Set up VAT calculation:](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation/set-up-vat-calculation/) + **Extract from item amount** + **Item amount** + **Item + VAT amount** + **Document amount** + **Document + VAT amount** 1. In the **Cash discount** field, select one of the following methods of calculating the VAT amount if a cash discount is applied to the document: + **Reduces taxable amount** + **Reduces taxable amount on early payment** + **Does not affect taxable amount** 1. Optional: In the **Tax agency ID** field, select the tax agency to which you will report the VAT. Leave the field blank if you have not configured a tax agency account yet, or do not plan to prepare a VAT report in Visma Net. 1. Optional: In the **Not valid after** field, specify the last date the VAT is effective. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab of the top part, do as follows: 1. In the **VAT payable account** field, select the general ledger account to accumulate VAT amounts to be paid to the applicable tax agency. > [!NOTE] > By default, the liability account associated with the specified tax agency is inserted, but it can be overwritten. 1. In the **VAT payable subaccount** field, enter the number of the corresponding subaccount. 1. In the **VAT claimable account** field, select a general ledger account to accumulate the VAT amounts to be claimed from the applicable tax agency. 1. In the **VAT claimable subaccount** field, enter the number of the corresponding subaccount. 1. On the **VAT schedule** tab of the details area, do as follows: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Start date** field, specify the date when the VAT becomes effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify the rate of the output tax. 1. Optional: In the **Min. taxable amount** field, specify the minimum taxable amount for which this VAT rate is applicable. If a minimum amount is specified, the VAT rate is 0 on amounts less than the specified minimum. 1. Optional: In the **Max. taxable amount** field, specify the maximum taxable amount for which this VAT rate is applicable. If a maximum amount is specified, the VAT rate is 0 on amounts greater than the specified maximum. > [!NOTE] > The **Min. taxable amount** and **Max. taxable amount** fields are unavailable if the **Extract from item amount** option is selected in the **Calculate on** field. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, specify the **Output** reporting group for the output tax. The specific reporting group is available only if the tax agency is selected in the top part. If the tax agency is not selected or you have not configured reporting groups for the tax agency, select the **Default output group**. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Start date** field, specify the date when the VAT becomes effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify the rate of the input tax. 1. Optional: In the **Min. taxable amount** and **Max. taxable amount** fields, specify the corresponding amounts, if needed. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, specify the **Input** reporting group for the input tax. If the tax agency is not specified, select the **Default input group**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The general VAT is created in the system. Now, set up VAT calculation across the system. ## Create a deductible VAT 1. Repeat steps 1-4 of the procedure in the previous section. 1. On the **VAT settings** tab, select the **Deductible VAT** check box. 1. On the **VAT schedule** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Start date** field, specify the date when the VAT becomes effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify the rate of the VAT that generally applies to specific purchases. 1. In the **Deductible VAT rate** field, specify the percentage of deduction that applies to the VAT amounts paid to the supplier on the specific purchases. 1. Optional: In the **Min. taxable amount** and **Max. taxable amount** fields, specify the corresponding amounts, if needed. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the **input** reporting group that was defined for the tax agency and was intended for this VAT. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The deductible VAT is created in the system. Now, set up VAT calculation across the system. ## Create a reverse-charge VAT > [!NOTE] > To configure automatic calculation of the **Reverse-charge VAT**, you need to create two VAT types by using the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window: a general-type VAT and a tax of the Reverse VAT type. 1. Repeat steps 1-4 of the procedure in the first section of this topic. 1. On the **VAT settings** tab, select the **Reverse VAT** check box. 1. On the **VAT schedule** tab, click **Add row** on the table toolbar. 1. In the **Start date** field, specify the date when the tax becomes effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify the same rate as for the direct VAT. 1. Optional: In the **Min. taxable amount** and **Max. taxable amount** fields, specify the corresponding amounts, if needed. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the **output** reporting group that was defined for the tax agency and was intended for this VAT. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The reverse-charge VAT is created in the system. For a correct calculation of the reverse VAT, create a general VAT with the same VAT rate. ## Create an exempt VAT 1. Repeat steps 1-4 of the procedure **Create a general value-added tax**. 1. On the **VAT settings** tab, select the **Include in VAT exempt total** check box, so the taxable amount that is exempt from paying the VAT will be displayed in the **VAT exempt total** field in the documents, such as invoices. 1. On the **VAT schedule** tab, click **Add row** in the table toolbar. 1. In the **Start date** field, specify the date when the VAT becomes effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify a rate of zero for the output tax. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the **output** reporting group that was defined for the tax agency and was intended for this VAT. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify a rate of zero for the input tax. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the **input** reporting group that was defined for the tax agency and was intended for this VAT. 1. Optional: In the **Min. taxable amount** and **Max. taxable amount** fields, specify the corresponding amounts, if needed. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The exempt modification of VAT tax is created in the system. Now you need to set up VAT calculation across the system. ## Create a statistical VAT 1. Repeat the steps 1-4 of the procedure in the first section of this topic, **Create a general value-added tax**. 1. On the **VAT settings** tab, select the **Statistical VAT** check box. 1. On the **VAT schedule** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Start date** field, specify the date when the VAT becomes effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify a rate of 0 for the output VAT. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the **output** reporting group that was defined for the tax agency and was intended for this VAT. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify a rate of zero for the input VAT. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the **input** reporting group that was defined for the tax agency and was intended for this VAT. 1. Optional: In the **Min. taxable amount** and **Max. taxable amount** fields, specify the corresponding amounts, if needed. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The statistical VAT tax is created in the system. Now you need to set up VAT calculation across the system. ## Create a pending VAT 1. Repeat steps 1-3 of the procedure in the first section of this topic, **Create a general value-added tax**. 1. On the **VAT settings** tab, select the **Deductible VAT** check box. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, perform the following instructions: 1. In the **VAT payable account** field, select the general ledger account to accumulate VAT amounts to be paid to the applicable tax agency. > [!NOTE] > By default, the liability account associated with the specified tax agency is inserted, but it can be overwritten. 1. In the **Tax claimable account** field, select the general ledger account to accumulate VAT amounts to be claimed from the applicable tax agency. 1. In the **Pending VAT payable account** field, specify the general ledger account to accumulate pending VAT amounts to be paid to the applicable tax agency. 1. In the **Pending VAT claimable account** field, specify the general ledger account to accumulate pending VAT amounts to be claimed from the applicable tax agency. 1. On the **VAT schedule** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Start date** field, specify the date when the VAT becomes effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** field, specify the rate of the VAT that generally applies to specific purchases. 1. In the **Deductible VAT rate** field, specify the percentage of deduction that applies to the VAT amounts paid to the supplier on these specific purchases. 1. Optional: In the **Min. taxable amount** and **Max. taxable amount** fields, specify the corresponding amounts, if needed. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the **input** reporting group that was defined for the tax agency and was intended for this VAT. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The pending modification of VAT tax is created in the system. Now you need to set up VAT calculation across the system. Create a new VAT rate /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/create-a-new-vat-rate section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a new VAT rate 1. Go to the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. 1. In the **VAT ID** field, select the VAT rate that you want to change. Depending on which VAT you select, one entry per reporting group is displayed on the **VAT schedule** tab. 1. On the **VAT schedule** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) to add a new line. 1. In the **Start date** column, enter the date from which you want the new rate to be effective. 1. In the **VAT rate** column, enter the new rate. 1. In the **Reporting group** column, select the same reporting group as the old VAT. 1. If the selected VAT had several lines in the table, repeat steps 2 through 5. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## What is next? You now have to decide how you want to report the VAT and set the preferences for that: [Set the financial period end date for the VAT period](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/set-the-financial-period-end-date-for-the-vat-period/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Post non-deductible VAT to the same expense account as the purchase invoice amount /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/post-non-deductible-vat-to-the-same-expense-account-as-the-purchase-invoice-amount section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Post non-deductible VAT to the same expense account as the purchase invoice amount ## Before you start [Create a new VAT rate](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/create-a-new-vat-rate/) To post VAT expenses to a VAT expense account, see [Post non-deductible VAT to a VAT expense account](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/post-non-deductible-vat-to-a-vat-expense-account/). 1. Go to the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. 1. In the **VAT ID** field, select the VAT rate you want to use. 1. Select the **Partially deductible VAT** check box. 1. Click the **General ledger accounts** tab. By default, the **Use VAT expense account** check box is selected. 1. Deselect the **Use VAT expense account** check box. You see that the **VAT expense account** and the **VAT expense subaccount** fields become unavailable. Next time you create a purchase invoice, the non-deductible VAT you specify on the lines will be posted to the same expense account as the amount on the lines in the purchase document. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Post non-deductible VAT to a VAT expense account /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/post-non-deductible-vat-to-a-vat-expense-account section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Post non-deductible VAT to a VAT expense account ## Before you start [Create a new VAT rate](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/create-a-new-vat-rate/) In Visma Net the default setting is that you post non-deductible VAT amounts to a VAT expense account. To post VAT expenses to the same general ledger account as the amount of a specific purchase invoice, see [Post non-deductible VAT to the same expense account as the purchase invoice amount](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/post-non-deductible-vat-to-the-same-expense-account-as-the-purchase-invoice-amount/). 1. Go to the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. 1. In the **VAT ID** field, select the VAT rate you want to use. 1. Select the **Partially deductible VAT** check box. 1. Click the **General ledger accounts** tab. The check box **Use VAT expense account** is selected by default. 1. In the **VAT expense account** field, select the expense account you want to use. 1. In the **VAT expense subaccount** field, press **F3** to select the subaccount associated with the account in step 5, or to select 0 (Default/None). Next time you create a purchase invoice, the non-deductible VAT you specify on the lines, will be posted to the given VAT expense account. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Manage VAT zones and categories /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-zones-and-categories section In Visma Net, a VAT zone is a group of taxes levied on a particular geographical location for all goods and services that may be sold or purchased by your company. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage VAT zones and categories In Visma Net, a VAT zone is a group of taxes levied on a particular geographical location for all goods and services that may be sold or purchased by your company. In Visma Net, a VAT zone is a group of taxes levied on a particular geographical location for all goods and services that may be sold or purchased by your company. You create VAT zones by using the [VAT zones (TX206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-zones-tx206000/) window for all locations of your customers and suppliers and add appropriate taxes to these VAT zones. For VAT-exempt customers (for example, those with reseller permits), you can create the VAT zones with zero-rated taxes. Thus, the VAT amount in the document will be calculated basing on the tax, which corresponds to the location of the customer or supplier as well as on the type of the services or goods mentioned in the document (for example, in the invoice), for which, in turn, you should also create and assign a **VAT category**. A VAT category is a group of VAT rates that are levied for selling or purchasing particular goods or services in all locations of your suppliers and customers. You create a VAT category and associate it with the appropriate goods and services, which are defined as stock and non-stock items in Visma Net. The VAT rates of a particular VAT category will be used for calculating VAT amounts in the documents in which the corresponding stock or non-stock items are specified. However, not all VAT rates included in the VAT category specified for an item will be applied to a particular invoice that includes the item. The VAT rates that are not levied in the VAT zone of the supplier or customer specified in the document will be excluded. Thus, only the VAT rates included both in the VAT category of the stock or non-stock item and in the VAT zone of the supplier or customer will be used for VAT amount calculation. Create a VAT zone /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-zones-and-categories/create-a-vat-zone section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a VAT zone ## Before you proceed Before you create a VAT zone, make sure that all required VAT rates (that is, those to be added to the VAT zone) have been created in the system. 1. Go to the [VAT zones (TX206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-zones-tx206000/) window. 1. In the **VAT zone ID** field, enter the unique ID for the VAT zone being created. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a clear and detailed description of the zone. 1. Optional: In the **Default VAT category** field, select the default VAT category for the VAT zone. If the VAT category is not specified in the document (for example: in the invoice), the system determines the VAT zone of the supplier or customer and uses the VAT category specified here for tax calculation. 1. On the **Applicable VAT** tab, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). In the **VAT ID** column, select a VAT for the VAT zone being created. (The system fills in the other columns of the row automatically once you select the VAT.) Repeat this step for each VAT that you want to add. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The VAT zone is now created in the system. Now you can set this zone for a customer on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window or for a supplier on the **Purchase settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. Create a VAT category /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-zones-and-categories/create-a-vat-category section Before you create a VAT category, make sure that all required VAT rates (that is, those to be added to the VAT category) have been created in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a VAT category Before you create a VAT category, make sure that all required VAT rates (that is, those to be added to the VAT category) have been created in the system. ## Before you proceed Before you create a VAT category, make sure that all required VAT rates (that is, those to be added to the VAT category) have been created in the system. 1. Go to the [VAT categories (TX205500)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-categories-tx205500/) window. 1. In the **VAT category ID** field, enter the unique ID for the VAT category being created. 1. Optional: In the **Description** field, enter a clear and detailed description of the VAT category. 1. Optional: Select the **Active** check box to activate this VAT category in the system, so you can assign this VAT category to a stock item on the **General settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and a non-stock item the **General settings** tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. If this check box is cleared, the VAT category is not available for selection. 1. In the table, add a row. In the **VAT ID** column, select a tax that you want to assign to the VAT category being created. (The system fills in the other columns of the row automatically once you select the VAT.) Repeat this step for each tax that you want to add. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The VAT category is now created in the system. Now you can specify this VAT category for each existing stock item on the **General settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window and for each existing non-stock item on this tab of the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) window. Manage tax agencies /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-tax-agencies section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage tax agencies About tax agency account setup /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-tax-agencies/about-tax-agency-account-setup page You can configure a tax agency account in Visma Net to cover either of the following purposes: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About tax agency account setup You can configure a tax agency account in Visma Net to cover either of the following purposes: + You want to set up tax reporting for the tax agency. For such an agency, you configure an appropriate tax report and set up automatic accumulation of tax amounts in the tax report. + You want to pay taxes directly to the tax agency. (For certain taxes, such as the customs duties on imported goods, instead of filing tax reports, you must pay the taxes directly to the tax agency.) In this case, you need to create the tax invoices by using the [VAT invoices and adjustments (TX303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-invoices-and-adjustments-tx303000/) window, and then pay the invoiceable amounts to the supplier (tax agency). The following sections of this topic describe how you establish the general settings for a tax agency and how you set up a tax agency for each of the cases described above. ## Defining tax agency account In Visma Net, you define a tax agency as a supplier (because you make payments to it) by using the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. In this window, you specify the supplier as a tax agency by selecting the **Supplier is tax agency** check box, which causes the **Tax agency settings** tab to appear in the window. On this tab, you should specify the specific settings for the tax agency. To ease data entry when a new tax agency is created, you can create a **supplier class** that is designed for tax agency accounts. When you create a new tax agency, you select this class, and the system fills in the settings you have established for it, such as the country, the terms of payment, and the General ledger accounts. You can overwrite the default values for a particular tax agency, if needed. ## Setting up a tax agency for tax reporting For each tax agency to which you will report taxes, you specify the following tax report-related parameters on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window: ### Reporting period type You can specify the reporting period (**Semi-monthly**, **Monthly**, **Once in two months**, **Quarterly**, **Semi-annually**, **Yearly**, or **By financial period**). You can change the period type after all the year's reporting periods are closed. ### General ledger accounts You can specify the following General ledger accounts, which will be used for keeping all tax-related payments: Tax payable account : This account accumulates the tax amounts that should be paid to a tax agency. (For example: Tax amounts resulting from sales that are subject to sales tax.) Tax claimable account : This account accumulates the tax amounts that should be claimed from a tax agency. (For example: Tax amounts resulting from purchases that are subject to VAT.) Tax expense account : This account accumulates the tax-related expenses. (For example: Tax amounts resulting from purchases that are subject to use tax.) ### Start date of tax year You can specify the date when the tax year should start for the selected tax agency. If the tax year is already configured for the tax agency, you can change the start date of the next tax year, so that the current tax year will be shorten. To change the start date, you should select the required date from the list. Thus, your current tax year will end one day before the specified date. For example: Suppose that the tax year currently configured in your system ends on 31.12.2020 and that you specify the start date of the next tax year as 1.8.2020. After you save this change, your current tax year will end on 31.7.2020, and will consist of seven periods. ### Tax report precision You can specify the maximum number (0 through 9) of decimal places in the values (tax amounts and taxable amounts) gathered in the VAT report lines. You can instead use the decimal precision of the reporting currency by selecting the **Use currency precision** check box (which makes the **Tax report precision** field unavailable). ### Tax report rounding You can specify the rounding rule for adjusting the values gathered in the tax report, so they will be rounded to the number of decimal places according to the defined precision. To do this, select one of the following options: **Mathematical**, **Ceiling**, or **Floor**. After you have specified and saved the settings on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window, you configure the VAT reporting functionality for the tax agency by completing the following tasks: 1. In the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, configure a VAT report for a particular tax agency. 1. In the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, create all taxes applied by this tax agency with their effective rates and effective dates (if you haven't already created these taxes). For each of these taxes, select the tax agency account in the **Tax agency ID** field (on the **Tax settings** tab). 1. Set up the tax calculation. For details, see: [Set up VAT calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation/set-up-vat-calculation/). Thus, the tax report configured for a specific tax agency will accumulate only the taxes defined for that tax agency. ## Setting up a tax agency for direct payment of taxes For each tax agency for which you will pay the taxes directly, you need to configure this functionality by completing the following tasks: 1. In the [Payment terms (CS206500)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/payment-terms-cs206500/) window, create the payment terms for the tax agency (if these terms have not already been created), and specify them for the tax agency on the **General settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, create required taxes and select the **Enter from VAT invoice** check box for each tax. 1. Set up the tax calculation. For details, see: [About prerequisites and preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/set-up-calculation/about-prerequisites-and-preparation/). To pay the tax to the tax agency, you need to create a VAT invoice by using the [VAT invoices and adjustments (TX303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-invoices-and-adjustments-tx303000/) window, and pay it. Set up a tax agency /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-tax-agencies/set-up-a-tax-agency section Before you create a tax agency account, you can create a supplier class for tax agency accounts by using the Supplier classes (AP201000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Set up a tax agency Before you create a tax agency account, you can create a supplier class for tax agency accounts by using the Supplier classes (AP201000) window. For more information: [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/). Before you create a tax agency account, you can create a supplier class for tax agency accounts by using the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. You can perform this optional step if such a class has not already been defined and if you want to speed the process of defining tax agencies with similar properties. 1. Go to the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. 1. In the **Supplier no.** field, enter the unique identifier to be used for the tax agency account being created. 1. In the **Supplier name** field, enter the name of the tax agency. 1. In the **Status** field, leave **Active** so that the account will be available for selection. 1. On the **General settings** tab, specify the following settings: 1. In the **Supplier properties** section, select the **Supplier is tax agency** check box. The **Tax agency settings** tab appears in the window. 1. Optional: In the **Financial settings** section, select the supplier class for a tax agency (if you have created such a class). If you select such a class, the system fills in the common properties of the tax agency accounts. Otherwise, the default supplier class is specified. 1. If this is an agency to which you will be paying taxes directly, in the **Terms** field, specify the terms of payment for the tax agency. 1. On the **General ledger accounts** tab, specify the expense account and cash discount account (and corresponding subaccounts); otherwise, the tax agency account cannot be saved in the system. 1. If you are creating a tax agency for which taxes will be paid directly, on the **Payment settings** tab, in the **Default payment settings** section, perform the following instructions: 1. In the **Payment method** field, specify the method of paying the taxes to the tax agency. 1. In the **Cash account** field, specify the cash account to be used for operations with the tax agency. 1. In the **Payment by** field, select **Due date**. The **Discount date** option is not applicable for a tax agency account. 1. On the **Tax agency settings** tab, do the following: 1. In the **Reporting period type** field, specify the period of tax reporting prescribed by the tax agency. The following options are available: **Semi-monthly**, **Monthly**, **Once in two months**, **Quarterly**, **Semi-annually**, **Yearly**, and **By financial period**. 1. Optional: Select the **Use financial period end date to report tax** check box, if you need to report taxes to the tax period to which the end date of the financial period of corresponding document belongs. Otherwise, the taxes will be reported to the tax period to which the date of a document belongs. 1. Optional: Select the **Set start date of tax year** check box, if you need to specify manually the date when the tax year should start. The **Set start date of tax year** field will appear. If you do not set up the start date manually, the system uses January 1 as the start date of the tax year for the tax agency. 1. In the **Set start date of tax year** field, specify the required start date of the tax year for this tax agency. For the tax agency, for which the tax year is already configured in your system, you can change the start date of the next tax year by selecting the required date from the list. In this case, the current tax year will end one day before the specified date. 1. Optional: In the **Tax payable account** field, specify the account to accumulate the tax amounts that have to be paid to the tax agency. 1. Optional: In the **Tax claimable account** field, specify the account to accumulate the tax amounts that have to be claimed from the tax agency. 1. Optional: In the **Tax expense account** field, specify the account to accumulate the tax amounts calculated based on the use taxes or the deductible value-added taxes (which are considered expenses for the company) that have to be paid to the tax agency. 1. In the **Tax report rounding** field, select the rounding rule to be used to calculate the tax amount on tax reports to this tax agency. The following options are available: **Mathematical**, **Ceiling**, and **Floor**. 1. In the **Tax report precision** field, enter the numeric value that specifies the maximum number of decimal places in the values in tax reports. 1. Optional: If you want to leave the decimal precision of the reporting currency, select the **Use currency precision** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The tax agency account is created and active. Parent topic: [About tax agency account setup](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-tax-agencies/about-tax-agency-account-setup/) Create a VAT invoice /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-tax-agencies/create-a-vat-invoice section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a VAT invoice 1. Go to the [VAT invoices and adjustments (TX303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-invoices-and-adjustments-tx303000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select **Purchase invoice**. 1. In the **Supplier** field, select the tax agency on whose behalf you are creating the invoice and to which you need to make the payment. The system inserts the default values (those that are specified for the selected tax agency account) in the corresponding fields ( **Location**, **Currency**, **Terms**, and **Due date** ). Change any of these values, if needed. 1. In the **Supplier ref.** field, specify the number the supplier has assigned to the document. > [!NOTE] > This field can be mandatory or optional, depending on whether the **Require supplier reference** check box is selected in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window. If it is mandatory but you do not have the number of the supplier's document, for example, when you pay in advance and have not received the document from the supplier yet, you can enter any number in this field. 1. On the **Apply VAT to** tab, add the documents to apply the tax to as follows: 1. On the table toolbar, click **Add documents**. The **Add documents** dialog box opens. 1. In the **VAT ID** field, select the tax that you need to apply to the document. Only the taxes with the **Enter from VAT invoice** check box selected in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window are available for selection. 1. In the list of documents that appear in the table (in the lower part of the **Add documents** dialog box), select the unlabelled check box for the document or documents to which you want to apply the tax. 1. Click **Add and close**. The documents appear in the invoice, the tax amount is calculated automatically, and the dialog box is closed. 1. In the **VAT zone** column, specify the VAT zone of the supplier for each added document (row). 1. In the top area of the window, enter the tax amount into the **Amount** field. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box. The status of the invoice should change to **Balanced**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The VAT invoice is created and saved in the system. Parent topic: [About tax agency account setup](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-tax-agencies/about-tax-agency-account-setup/) Configure VAT reports /visma-net-erp/help/vat/configure-vat-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure VAT reports About VAT report configuration /visma-net-erp/help/vat/configure-vat-reports/about-vat-report-configuration page A VAT report 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT report configuration A VAT report + is a document that contains the VAT information related to your business. + must be filed to a respective tax agency once per reporting period. + is usually set up in a worksheet format that is determined by the particular tax agency. In Visma Net, you can configure the content elements of the VAT report based on the report window provided by the responsible tax agency, and define the rules for automatically filling the VAT report by appropriate values. You can configure a VAT report in Visma Net to set up the processes of accumulating taxes and preparing the VAT report when it comes due. To configure a VAT report, you should use as a template a blank VAT report window from the particular VAT collection agency, and create a similar window in Visma Net. > [!NOTE] > You can reconfigure the VAT report before the VAT report has been prepared (in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window) for the first reporting period. Once the first VAT report is prepared, you cannot reconfigure the VAT report structure. ## VAT report configuration process In Visma Net, a VAT report is represented as a table. Each row of the table holds a accumulated VAT amount or taxable amount calculated on sales or purchases that occurred during the VAT reporting period, or a sum or difference of these amounts. The number of lines in a particular VAT report may vary depending on the number of taxes you need to report. To start the VAT report configuration process, you create the required lines in the report by using the **Report lines** tab of the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, and specify the type of the amount that should be accumulated in each line (a VAT amount or a taxable amount). The number of the lines is prescribed by the VAT report template from the applicable tax agency. But you can create additional lines in the VAT report for your personal purposes, for example, to accumulate some VAT amounts that should not be reported to the tax agency but that supervisors want to see. In that case, you create the line and select the **Hide report line** check box for that line, so the amount will be accumulated in that line, but the line itself will be excluded from the VAT report during its generation. After you have created the required lines for the VAT report, you need to create a **reporting group** or multiple reporting groups by using the **Reporting groups** tab. A **reporting group** is a Visma Net entity that combines one report line or multiple report lines (which you add into the group later) and acts as a link between a particular VAT and these report lines. Thus, the VAT amounts and taxable amounts calculated based on this VAT in all sales or purchase documents update the lines included in the reporting group. Later, you will specify a reporting group or multiple reporting groups for each VAT. A reporting group can have one of the following types: + An **Output** group is specified for a VAT that must be paid to a tax agency. + An **Input** group is specified for a VAT that can be claimed from a tax agency. The type of reporting group you specify for a VAT depends on the type of the particular tax. You specify the type of reporting group by using the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window as follows: + For **VAT**, define an **input** reporting group for VAT amounts calculated on purchase invoices and adjustments that should be claimed from the tax agency, and an **output** reporting group for VAT amounts calculated on sales invoices and notes that should be paid to the tax agency. You can create multiple reporting groups of the same type and associate each tax in the system with a particular reporting group. Alternatively, you can create just one reporting group of each type (one **input** reporting group and one **output** reporting group) and associate multiple taxes with the same reporting group to accumulate the total VAT amount and total taxable amount for a reporting period. Your selected approach depends on the requirements of the tax agency and your needs. Once you have configured the elements of the VAT report (the report lines and reporting groups), you need to add report lines to each reporting group you have created, and then to associate each VAT in the system with the appropriate reporting group, so that the taxes will be associated with the reporting groups, which in turn are related to some report lines. Thus, the VAT amounts will be accumulated in the specific lines of the VAT report. Perform these configuration tasks: 1. By using the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window, add the required report lines to each reporting group. To do this, select the tax agency account for which the VAT report is configured and the reporting group to which you need to add the report lines. After that, add the appropriate lines into the group by clicking the **Add row** button in the table toolbar. > [!NOTE] > Make sure you have added the correct report lines into the particular reporting group to prevent distributing VAT amounts or taxable amounts into the wrong lines. 1. By using the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, associate each VAT in the system with the reporting group that contains report lines that should be updated by amounts calculated based on this VAT. To do this, select the VAT in the **VAT ID** field, and specify the reporting group in the **Reporting group** column on the **VAT schedule** tab. ## General steps of VAT report configuration In summary, the following general steps have to be performed when you set up a VAT report in Visma Net: 1. In the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, start configuring the VAT report by creating the required lines that the VAT report should include. For each line, specify the type of amount to be accumulated (VAT amount or taxable amount). 1. On the **Reporting groups** tab of the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, create reporting groups to combine report lines to be updated by the amounts (VAT or taxable) calculated based on the specific VAT. Add the required lines into each reporting group by using the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window. 1. In the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, specify the reporting group (or groups) for each VAT, so that the VAT amounts and taxable amounts calculated based on that VAT will be automatically accumulated in the report lines combined by the specified reporting group. ## The aggregate report line and the calculation rule column In the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, when you select a tax agency, the VAT report configured for the selected tax agency opens. On the **Report lines** tab, in the **Calc. rule** column, the system can show the formula such as "2+4" in the report line that has been configured as an aggregate line. It means, that the amounts that update the 2nd line and the amounts that update the 4th line are also update this line (which, in this topic, we call the aggregate line for the recognition). The numbers in this formula mean the order numbers of the lines in the VAT report. The line numbers are determined and inserted by the system automatically according to the settings, which you have specified in the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window (in which you have specified the report lines that should be updated by the respective reporting group that, in its turn, is associated with a particular VAT). Consider an example in which the system determines the calculation rule and inserts it into the corresponding line. Suppose that you have created five lines in the VAT report on the **Report lines** tab of the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window: 1. VAT amount (sales VAT) 1. Taxable amount (sales VAT) 1. VAT amount (use VAT) 1. Taxable amount (use VAT) 1. Total VAT amount (sales VAT and use VAT) Then suppose that you have created two reporting groups: one reporting group for a sales VAT, and one reporting group for a use VAT. In the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window, you specify which report lines should be updated by which taxes by using reporting groups as follows: 1. The output reporting group associated with the sales VAT should update lines 1 and 5; the sales VAT amount is collected in a separate line and in the total VAT amount line. 1. The output reporting group associated with the use VAT should update lines 3 and 5; the use VAT amount is collected in a separate line and in the total VAT amount line. > [!NOTE] > Ignore the taxable amount lines here because the calculation rule is the same for them. Here, you can see that line number 5 should be updated by the same amounts as the lines1 and 3. As a result, on the **Reporting line** tab in the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, the following formula will appear in the **Calc. rule** column in the line number 5: **1+3**. You can set up a more complicated configuration when the aggregate report line will accumulate multiple amounts, which at the same time update other lines of the VAT report. ## VAT reporting period For each supplier (tax agency), you can specify a particular frequency of VAT report preparation by selecting an appropriate option in the **Reporting period type** field on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window; it can be **Semi-monthly**, **Monthly**, **Once in two months**, **Quarterly**, **Semi-annually**, **Yearly**, or **By financial period**. The selected reporting period type determines the VAT reporting periods defined for the tax agency. You can view these VAT periods while preparing a VAT report in the **Reporting period** field in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window. You can prepare at least one VAT report for each VAT reporting period depending on whether the **Update closed reporting periods** check box is selected for the tax agency in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window or not. ## Report lines itemised by VAT zones In the VAT report, you can configure the report lines to be itemised by VAT zones. That is, the amount accumulated in the particular line will be split by VAT zones, with a separate line shown for each involved VAT zone. To configure the report line in this way, select the **Detail by VAT zones** check box for the required line on the **Report lines** tab of the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window. To view report lines that are split by VAT zones, select the **Show VAT zones** check box in the top part of this window. As a result, the VAT report that you prepare in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window will contain the lines with the corresponding amounts itemised by VAT zones. You can also configure report lines that show amounts related to a particular VAT zone. To do this, on the **Report lines** tab in the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, select the required VAT zone in the **VAT zone ID** column for the required report line or lines. As a result, an appropriate VAT or taxable amount calculated in sales or purchase documents related to a selected VAT zone will update this report line. ## Report currency If the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can specify a particular currency for a tax agency (which is defined in the system as a supplier) in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. This currency will be used for creating a VAT report for this tax agency. If the currency of a VAT report (which is the currency of the tax agency) is different from the currency of a document subjected to specific VAT, the system uses the exchange rate between these currencies of the type assigned to the tax agency effective on the date of the document. You can enter the exchange rates that might be needed for VAT reports by using the [Currency rates (CM301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/currency-management/currency-management-windows/currency-rates-cm301000/) window. ## Purchase invoice on release of a VAT report You use the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window to release the prepared VAT report. You can set up the system to generate a purchase invoice on release of the VAT report. The purchase invoice will contain the total VAT amount that you must pay to the tax agency for the selected reporting period. To set up the system to generate a purchase invoice while releasing a VAT report, in the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, you need to configure the line that accumulates the appropriate VAT amounts, and select the **Net** check box in that line. Once a VAT report is released, the system generates a purchase invoice, which appears on the **Supplier ledger documents** tab of the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. To open and view the invoice, you need to click its number in the **Ref. no.** column. If you have posted any documents to a closed reporting period for which you have already released a VAT report, you can prepare a revision of the VAT report for the closed reporting period. The functionality of updating a closed reporting periods is available if the **Update closed reporting periods** check box is selected for the tax agency on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. Once you have prepared and released a VAT report for the closed reporting period, the system generates another purchase invoice, which appears on the **Supplier ledger documents** tab of the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. Configure a VAT report /visma-net-erp/help/vat/configure-vat-reports/configure-a-vat-report section You use the Reporting settings (TX205100) window to configure the content of a VAT report, and to specify the rules of accumulating the data in the report lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a VAT report You use the Reporting settings (TX205100) window to configure the content of a VAT report, and to specify the rules of accumulating the data in the report lines. For more information: [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/). ## Before you proceed Before you configure the VAT report, make sure that: + The tax agency account has been properly defined. + All required taxes (that is, those to be reported on) have been created in the system. ## Configure a VAT report 1. Go to the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window. 1. In the **Tax agency ID** field, select the tax agency account for which you want to configure a VAT report. 1. On the **Report lines** tab, do the following for each line of the VAT report that you want to create: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Update with** column, select the type of amount that should be accumulated in the line, **VAT amount** or **Taxable amount**. 1. In the **Update rule** column, select the rule that indicates how transactions related to sales or purchases should update the amount in this line. The following options are available: + **+Output–Input**: Select this rule if you need to accumulate the difference between the VAT amount or taxable amount that should be paid to the tax agency and the amount that should be claimed from a tax agency. + **+Input–Output**: Select this rule if you need to accumulate the difference between the VAT amount or taxable amount that should be claimed from a tax agency and the VAT amount or taxable amount that should be paid to the tax agency. 1. Optional: In the **Description** column, enter a clear description of the amount accumulated in this line. 1. Optional: In the **VAT zone ID** column, select a VAT zone if you want the VAT amount or taxable amount in the line to correspond to the selected VAT zone only. 1. Optional: Select the **Detail by VAT zones** check box in the line to generate the detail lines that display a VAT amount or taxable amount of this line for each of the possible VAT zones. (For example: The VAT amount on sales for the period will be divided into multiple amounts that correspond to the zones of sales.) > [!NOTE] > To view these detail lines, you need to select the **Show VAT zones** check box in the selection area of this window. 1. Optional: Select the **Net tax** check box if you want the system to generate the invoice upon release of the VAT report. > [!NOTE] > This line will be updated when a VAT adjustment document is released for an open VAT reporting period. 1. Optional: If you have configured this line to accumulate an amount just for test or control purposes but need to exclude it from the VAT report during its generation, select the **Hide report line** check box. 1. Optional: If you want to create your own numeration of the lines in the report window, enter the appropriate number into the **VAT field number** column. 1. On the **Reporting groups** tab, create each reporting group as follows: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. In the **Name** column, enter an appropriate name for the reporting group being created. 1. In the **Group type** column, select one of the following types of reporting group: + **Output**. For taxes payable to a tax agency + **Input**. For taxes claimable from a tax agency 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). The VAT report is configured for the specified tax agency. ## Configure a reporting group Now you need to link all the created entities to one another as follows: 1. Add appropriate report lines to each reporting group by using the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window in the following way: 1. Go to the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window. 1. In the **Tax agency ID** field, select the tax agency for which a VAT report is to be configured. 1. In the **Reporting group** field, select the reporting group into which you need to add the report lines. 1. In the table toolbar, click **Add row**, and in the **Report line** column, select the appropriate line from the list. Repeat this step for each required line. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Associate a reporting group with a particular VAT entity by using the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window in the following way: 1. Go to the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. 1. In the **VAT ID** field of the **VAT settings** tab, select the **VAT**. 1. On the **VAT schedule** in the **Reporting group** column, select the appropriate reporting group from the list of available groups. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Perform the following tasks: 1. Add report lines with a reporting group. In the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window, select a tax agency, select a reporting group, and in the table, add the lines of the VAT report that should be updated by the specified reporting group. 1. For each VAT, open the VAT in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window, and in the **VAT schedule** tab, associate the VAT with the appropriate reporting group. Therefore, this VAT (that is, the VAT amount and taxable amount calculated in the sales or purchase document) will be distributed into the lines of the VAT report specified in this reporting group. Now the VAT report configuration process is completed, and you can prepare a VAT report for an open reporting period. You can reconfigure the VAT report settings right before preparing a VAT report. Manage VAT reports /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage VAT reports About VAT report preparation /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/about-vat-report-preparation page In Visma Net, you can prepare a VAT report for a particular tax agency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT report preparation In Visma Net, you can prepare a VAT report for a particular tax agency. In Visma Net, you can prepare a VAT report for a particular tax agency. A VAT report can be prepared either for an open reporting period, or for a closed reporting period if the **Update closed reporting periods** check box is selected for a tax agency on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. The frequency of preparing VAT reports depends on the setting that you specify for a tax agency in the **Reporting period type** field in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. If your company contains multiple branches, you prepare a VAT report for each particular branch. Once you have prepared VAT reports for all your branches, you can release a VAT report for each required branch and close corresponding reporting period. The sections below describe the processes of creating VAT reports for open reporting periods and for closed reporting periods. ## Preparing a VAT report for an open reporting period To prepare a VAT report for an open reporting period, in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window, you should select the required branch (if any), the tax agency and an open reporting period. > [!NOTE] > All previous reporting periods should be closed. The VAT report structure that was previously configured for the selected tax agency appears with the numeric values (VAT amounts and taxable amounts) in its lines. The system has recorded these values to the VAT report “on the fly” each time a user has entered any taxable document into the system. To process VAT report preparation, you need to click **Prepare VAT report** in the window toolbar. Visma Net checks to be sure that all the VAT report entities were configured correctly, and if no errors have occurred, prepares the VAT report and opens the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. ## Preparing a VAT report for a closed reporting period You can prepare another revision of the VAT report for a closed reporting period, for which a VAT report has already been prepared (or multiple reports have been prepared). This functionality is available for tax agencies for which the **Update closed reporting periods** check box is selected on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. To prepare a VAT report for a closed reporting period, in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window, select the required branch (if any), the tax agency, and the required closed reporting period. If new transactions were posted in the selected period, the **Prepare VAT report** button becomes available in the window toolbar. When you click this button, the VAT report will be prepared and the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window will open, in which you can release the VAT report. ## VAT report revisions When you have prepared a VAT report for a closed reporting period, the revision number of this VAT report changes (it is incremented by 1) in the **Revision ID** field in the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. You can view each particular revision of the VAT report by selecting the required revision number in this field: + If you clear the **Show differences** check box next to the **Revision** field, the VAT report shows the amounts (VAT and taxable) taken from the documents posted since the beginning of the VAT reporting period (since the initial VAT report revision) till the selected revision of the VAT report. + If you select the **Show difference** check box, the VAT report shows the amounts taken from the documents posted between the selected revision and the previous revision of the VAT report. You can prepare as many revisions of the VAT report for the same (closed) reporting period as needed (for example, you can do it each time any documents are posted to the closed VAT period). About VAT report release /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/about-vat-report-release page Once you prepare the VAT report in the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window, the Process VAT report (TX502000) window automatically opens. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT report release Once you prepare the VAT report in the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window, the Process VAT report (TX502000) window automatically opens. For more information: [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/), [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/). Once you prepare the VAT report in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window, the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window automatically opens. In the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window, you can release the VAT report for the selected branch, reporting period, and tax agency by clicking**Close period**in the window toolbar. When the report is released, the system closes the selected reporting period. Depending on the settings in your system, it can also generate a purchase invoice with the VAT amount to be paid to the selected tax agency, as described below. > [!NOTE] > The VAT report cannot be released and the VAT period cannot be closed, if there is an unreleased VAT adjustment in the selected VAT period. ## Supplier ledger documents generated on release of the VAT report You can set up the system to generate a purchase invoice once the VAT report is released. The purchase invoice will contain the total VAT amount that you must pay to the tax agency for the selected reporting period according to the released VAT report. After the VAT report is released, the corresponding purchase invoice appears in the table on the **Supplier documents** tab in the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. To set up the system to generate a purchase invoice while releasing a VAT report, in the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window, you need to configure a reporting line that accumulates appropriate VAT amount, and select the **Net VAT** check box for that line. Only if this check box is selected, the system will generate purchase invoices when a VAT report is released. If you prepare and release a VAT report for a closed reporting period (that is, for a period for which the VAT report has been already released, the system will generate another purchase invoice according to this revision of the VAT report. This purchase invoice will be listed on the **Supplier documents** tab in this window (in addition to the purchase invoice generated by the previous release). Each purchase invoice will contain an amount of a particular VAT report revision. About operations with VAT reports /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/about-operations-with-vat-reports page Once you prepare the VAT report in the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window, the Process VAT report (TX502000) window opens. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About operations with VAT reports Once you prepare the VAT report in the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window, the Process VAT report (TX502000) window opens. For more information: [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/), [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/). Before you release the VAT report (which closes the corresponding financial period and generates the appropriate purchase invoice, as described in [About VAT report release](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/about-vat-report-release/) ), you can perform the following operations with the VAT report: + Adjusting the amounts shown in the VAT report + Voiding the VAT report + Viewing the details of the VAT report + Viewing different revisions of the VAT reports (if any) These operations are described in detail in the sections below in this topic. ## Adjusting the VAT report You can create a VAT adjustment document manually to adjust the appropriate VAT and taxable amounts in the prepared VAT report. In the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window, click **Adjust VAT**, the [VAT adjustments (TX301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-adjustments-tx301000/)window opens or open the [VAT adjustments (TX301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-adjustments-tx301000/)window manually by clicking **VAT adjustments** in the navigation menu. In the [VAT adjustments (TX301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-adjustments-tx301000/) window, in the **Type** field, you can select one the following types of the adjustment document to be created: Adjust output : With this type of the document, you can adjust the VAT and taxable amounts for the VAT, for which the **Output** reporting group is configured in the system (for example, the sales VAT). Once you have selected this type, you should select an appropriate VAT in the **VAT ID** field on the **Documents details** tab, and then enter the required amounts in the **Taxable amount** and **VAT amount** fields. You can enter either positive or negative amounts depending on whether you need to increase or reduce the corresponding VAT and taxable amounts in the VAT report. Adjust input : With this type, you can adjust the VAT and taxable amounts for the taxes, for which the **Input** reporting group is configured in the system (for example, VAT). Once you have selected this type, you should select an appropriate VAT in the **VAT ID** field on the **Documents details** tab, and then enter the required amounts in the **Taxable amount** and **VAT amount** fields. You can enter either positive or negative amounts depending on whether you need to increase or reduce the corresponding VAT and taxable amounts in the VAT report. Once you create and save VAT adjustment documents, the system generates general ledger batch that updates a VAT payable (or VAT claimable) account and expense account assigned to the supplier (tax agency). The values in the report lines change automatically. ## Voiding the VAT report You can void a prepared VAT report if there are new transactions in the selected reporting period that you want to add to the VAT report. You void a VAT report by clicking **Void report** in the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. When you do, the system changes the status for the corresponding reporting period from **Prepared** to **Open**, and opens the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window, in which you can prepare another VAT report for the selected reporting period. If your company consists of multiple branches, you void a VAT report for a selected branch only. Then, you can release VAT reports for company branches and close the reporting period only when you prepare again the voided VAT report for a selected branch. If you void a VAT report in the reporting period in which released VAT adjustments exist, these VAT adjustments will not be included in another VAT report that you will later prepare for this VAT period. These VAT adjustments will only be included in the VAT report of the next VAT period. ## Viewing released VAT reports You can view the VAT report of any tax agency for the specified closed or prepared VAT reporting period in the following ways: + In the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. In this window, the VAT report is displayed in the table with the filled report lines. + By running the VAT summary report in the [VAT summary (TX62100S) report](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-summary-tx62100s/) window. In this window, the report lists the report lines and their respective amounts. + By running the VAT details report in the [VAT details (TX62051S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-details-tx62051s/) window. In this window, the report lists the report lines with the respective amounts and the reference numbers of the documents from which these amounts were taken. ## Viewing the documents used for VAT reports You can view the documents whose amounts were accumulated in the VAT report by using the [VAT report details (TX502010)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-report-details-tx502010/)window. In this window, you need to select the tax agency for which the VAT report has been created, the required VAT reporting period, and any line of the VAT report for which you need to view the details. After that, the list of documents meeting the selected criteria appears in the table. To open the window that shows one of these documents, click the reference number of the document in the **Ref. no.** column. ## Viewing the details of different VAT report revisions In the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window, you can view the details of different revisions of the VAT report that have been prepared for the same reporting period.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Prepare a VAT report for an open reporting period /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-a-vat-report-for-an-open-reporting-period page You use the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window to generate a VAT report for a specified tax agency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare a VAT report for an open reporting period You use the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window to generate a VAT report for a specified tax agency. For more information: [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/). 1. Go to the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch on behalf of which the VAT report will be prepared. > [!NOTE] > This field is available only if the **Multi-branch support** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. In the **Tax agency ID** field, select the tax agency account for which you prepare the VAT report. 1. In the **Reporting period** field, select the open VAT period you want to prepare the VAT report for. The previous reporting period should be closed. You can prepare a VAT report for a closed reporting period if the **Update closed reporting periods** check box is selected for a tax agency account. For details, see: [Prepare VAT report for closing VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-vat-report-for-closing-vat-periods/). 1. In the window toolbar, click **Prepare VAT report**. As a result of these steps, the system prepares the VAT report for the specified tax agency and automatically opens the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. In this window, you can release the VAT report and close the reporting period. **Parent topic:** [About VAT report preparation](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/about-vat-report-preparation/) Prepare VAT report for closing VAT periods /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-vat-report-for-closing-vat-periods page Before sending your VAT report to the authorities, you need to prepare the respective VAT period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare VAT report for closing VAT periods Before sending your VAT report to the authorities, you need to prepare the respective VAT period. ## Before you start The VAT authority supplier must have a bank account or an IBAN before you can close the VAT report period. This is normally done during the first time installation. In Norway, before you can send the report to the tax authorities, you need to register Visma Net as accounting program in Altinn with a code and a password. This has to be entered in the AutoReport service, and you are told to register this first time or until you have done it in AutoReport. In the Netherlands, before you can send the report to the tax authorities, you must upload a client and server certificate in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. 1. Go to the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window. 1. Select your **Tax agency**. 1. Select the **Reporting period**. 1. Click **Prepare VAT report**. You are now navigated to the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. ## What is next? [Process and close VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/process-and-close-vat-periods/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare a supplementary year based VAT report /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-a-supplementary-year-based-vat-report page To send to the tax authorities a supplementary VAT report for the entire year, you need you need to close the respective VAT period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare a supplementary year based VAT report To send to the tax authorities a supplementary VAT report for the entire year, you need you need to close the respective VAT period. ## Before you start 1. [Enable supplementary VAT reports](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/suppliers/enable-supplementary-vat-reports/) 1. To send a supplementary VAT report for the entire year to the tax authorities, close the respective VAT periods: [Process and close VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/process-and-close-vat-periods/) 1. Go to the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window. 1. Select your **Tax agency**. 1. In the **Reporting period** field, select the open period you want to report. The **Status** field indicates if the period is open. 1. Select the **Enable transactions from previous periods** check box. 1. Click **Prepare VAT report**. You are now navigated to the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. 1. Follow the steps here: [Prepare VAT report for closing VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-vat-report-for-closing-vat-periods/). 1. Go back to the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window. 1. In the **Reporting period** field, select the same period that you selected in step 3. The **Status** field states that the period is **Closed**. 1. Deselect the **Enable transaction from previous periods** check box. 1. Click **Prepare VAT report**. You are again navigated to the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. > [!NOTE] > For the Netherlands, if the additional amount is >1000, you will get the error message **One or more VAT transactions from previous periods will be reported in the current period. The VAT amount for these periods is {0} and the limit is {1}. A supplementary report is required. Select the previous period to report the supplementary report. Click View VAT periods for more details.** ## What is next? [Process and send a supplementary year based VAT report](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/process-and-send-a-supplementary-year-based-vat-report/)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Reconcile VAT and the general ledger /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/reconcile-vat-and-the-general-ledger page If there are unreleased transactions with a VAT ID in the system, you will get a warning when you are preparing the VAT report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reconcile VAT and the general ledger If there are unreleased transactions with a VAT ID in the system, you will get a warning when you are preparing the VAT report. 1. Go to the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window. 1. Click **Unreleased documents** to run the report in the window. > [!NOTE] > You can also run an inquiry from the [VAT account control details (TX40400S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-account-control-details-tx40400s/) window, or a report from the [VAT specification (TX62050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-specification-tx62050s/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Prepare an RF-1301 report /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-an-rf-1301-report page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare an RF-1301 report 1. Go to the [Prepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-rf-1301-report-tx50200s/) window. 1. In the **Reporting year** drop-down list, select the reporting year you want to get purchase invoices for. If you have created filters in step 2 of the work process, the results you get when you generate the report, will reflect the filters you have given. 1. Click **Generate**. The status is **Open**. In the table, you see the suppliers that you have to report invoices for. 1. Optional: Click any of the amount links in the fields **Original service/labour amount**, **Service/labour amount**, or **Total amount** to see the details of the purchase invoices in the **RF-1301 report details** window. You can also click the **View report details** button. To open the individual invoice, click the invoice reference number. 1. Click **Prepare to send**. The report's status is changed to **Prepared**. The [Release RF-1301 report (TX50700S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/release-rf-1301-report-tx50700s/) window is displayed. > [!NOTE] > that it is the amount in the **Service/labour amount** column that is reported to the government, not the figure in the **Total amount** column. ## What is next? [Release an RF-1301 report](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/process-an-rf-1301-report/)

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Process an RF-1301 report /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/process-an-rf-1301-report page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process an RF-1301 report ## Release RF-1301 report 1. The report you prepared is displayed in the [Release RF-1301 report (TX50700S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/release-rf-1301-report-tx50700s/) window. 1. To send the report, click **Send**. The status changes from **Open** to **Sent to AutoReport**. If you get a message that the report has not been received by AutoReport, you can wait a few minutes and then click **Resend**. You can only report positive or zero values to the government. Negative amounts will not be sent. Your reporting is done by calendar year, not by financial year. ## Void a report You can choose to void the report you have prepared, for example, if you have more purchase invoices that should be included in the report. 1. Click **Void report**. The [Prepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-rf-1301-report-tx50200s/) window is displayed again, so you can generate a new report.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Report cross-year debit adjustments /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/report-cross-year-debit-adjustments page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Report cross-year debit adjustments ## Before you start When you receive a credit note that is linked to one or more invoices within the current reporting year, you will need to manually specify how much of the credited amount is allocated to system and/or labour for that reporting year. The example below shows you how to report purchase credit notes that cross years. In the example, 2020 is the reporting year and 2021 the year when you are going to deliver the report. 1. Go to the [Prepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-rf-1301-report-tx50200s/) window. 1. Prepare the report according to the steps in [Prepare an RF-1301 report](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-an-rf-1301-report/). 1. Click **View report details** to correct the amount for a purchase credit note. The **RF-1301 report details** window is displayed. 1. Look for the credit note you want to adjust the amount for. > [!NOTE] > Use the document data/year to see all documents with a different year than reporting year. 1. In the **Service/labour amount** column of the credit note, you see that the amount on the purchase credit note is zero. You must now enter which part of the amount in the credit note is service and/or labour. Change the amount to the correct amount. **Important:** A purchase credit note which crosses the boundary of a year will be visible in both the year of the purchase credit note and the year of all connected invoices. > [!NOTE] > When you report for 2021, you must also adjust the service/labour amount that is applicable for 2021. ## What is next? For information on how to connect a purchase credit note to a purchase invoice, see [Create a purchase credit note for a purchase invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/process-purchase-invoices/create-a-purchase-credit-note-for-an-existing-purchase-invoice/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

 Create a VAT adjustment document /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/create-a-vat-adjustment-document section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a VAT adjustment document 1. Go to the [VAT adjustments (TX301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-adjustments-tx301000/) window. 1. In the **Type** field, select the type of the document that you want to create: + **Adjust output**: Select this type of the document if you need to adjust the VAT amount and the taxable amount of the VAT with the **output** reporting group specified. + **Adjust input**: Select this type of the document if you need to adjust the VAT amount and the taxable amount of the VAT of the **input** reporting group specified. 1. In the **Tax agency** field, select the tax agency which VAT report you need to update. 1. In the **reporting period** field, select the reporting period for which you are adjusting the VAT report. By default, the only periods available are those for which the VAT reports in the system are prepared (that is, they have the **Prepared** status). 1. In the **Description** field, enter a clear description of the document that is being prepared. 1. On the **Document details** tab, click **Add row**. 1. In the **VAT ID** column, select the required VAT. The system automatically enters the VAT rate, account and subaccount (if any) based on it. You can edit these settings manually, if needed. 1. In the **Taxable amount** column, enter the amount by which the taxable amount (of the specified VAT) should be adjusted in the VAT report. Enter either a positive value to increase the taxable amount in the VAT report, or a negative value to reduce the taxable amount in the VAT report. 1. Optional: In the **VAT amount** column, you can manually edit the VAT amount calculated by the system. 1. In the **VAT zone** field, select the appropriate VAT zone. 1. In the top part, in the **Amount** field, enter the control VAT amount, which should be equal to the amount specified in the **VAT amount** column. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box. The status should change to **Balanced**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) in the window toolbar. The document is saved and you can see its number in the **Ref. no.** field. 1. Click **Release** in the window toolbar. The document is released. On the **Financial details** tab, you can find the batch number of the released document. You can click the number and see the details of the document. As a result of these steps, the values (the VAT amount and taxable amount of the corresponding VAT) are adjusted in the VAT report for the specified reporting period in the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. Release a VAT report /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/release-a-vat-report page Release a VAT report for a specified tax agency and to close corresponding reporting period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release a VAT report Release a VAT report for a specified tax agency and to close corresponding reporting period. ## Before you start If you need to release a VAT report for a closed reporting period, ensure that the **Update closed VAT periods** check box is selected for the tax agency on the **Tax agency settings** tab in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. > [!NOTE] > You need to select an tax agency in the **Supplier no.** field to make the **Tax agency settings** tab active. 1. Go to the [Process VAT report (TX502000](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) [tx502000-ref.html](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If you have been navigated to this window automatically, go to step 5. 1. In the **Company** field, select the required compnay. This field is available only if the **Multi-branch support** check box is selected functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Optional: In the Branch field, select the required branch. This field is available only if the **Multi-branch support** check box is selected functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In addition, the **File tax by branch** must be selected on the **Company** or else it is hidden. 1. In the **Tax agency** field, select the tax agency for which the VAT report has been prepared. 1. In the **Reporting period** field, select the reporting period that the VAT report covers. 1. Click **Close period**, to release the VAT report and close the reporting period, in the window toolbar,. With the release of the VAT report, the system closes the corresponding reporting period and generates a purchase invoice that appears on the on the **Supplier documents** tab. The purchase invoice contains the total VAT amount that you must pay to the tax agency specified in the VAT report. > [!NOTE] > > [!NOTE] > > A purchase invoice is generated only if this functionality is configured in your system. Or if an appropriate row is properly configured and the **Net VAT** check box is selected for this row on the **Report lines** tab in the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process and close VAT periods /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/process-and-close-vat-periods page These instructions show you how to close the VAT period for the prepared period and how to send the report to the authorities after the closing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process and close VAT periods These instructions show you how to close the VAT period for the prepared period and how to send the report to the authorities after the closing. If you have selected and enabled the **Multi-branch support** check box in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window you have to close each company separately. Note that as long as the financial periods within a closed VAT period are open, you can still post transactions with VAT in these financial periods. When the tax report for that period is prepared and released, the transactions you enter in these periods will be included in the next VAT period. ## Before you start 1. Go to the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window, or you are navigated automatically by the system to this window. 1. Click **Close period**. 1. Click **Send**. Depending on the country and settings, you can now send the report electronically. 1. Your tax agency may now ask you for authentication: Enter all required access data and confirm the sending. In some countries, you have to upload the newly created file and send it directly to the tax authorities. > [!NOTE] > You can re-run the report in case you need to add postings later. Note: You can also divide this process into two steps: + First, [Prepare VAT report for closing VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/prepare-vat-report-for-closing-vat-periods/) and then click **Closed period** in this window. + At a later time, send the VAT report to the tax authorities by re-entering this process in this window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Process and send a supplementary year based VAT report /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/process-and-send-a-supplementary-year-based-vat-report page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process and send a supplementary year based VAT report ## Before you start ### Preconditions regarding the tax authorities The VAT authority supplier must have a bank account or an IBAN before you can close the VAT report period. This is normally done during the first time installation. In Norway, before you can send the report to the tax authorities, you need to register Visma Net as accounting program in Altinn with a code and a password. This has to be entered in the AutoReport service, and you are told to register this first time or until you have done it in AutoReport. In the Netherlands, before you can send the report to the tax authorities, you must upload a client and server certificate in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. 1. Go to the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window, or you are navigated automatically by the system to this window. 1. Check that the **Report type** is **Supplementary report**. 1. Check that **First reporting period** field shows the first period where it is data to report. 1. On the **Details** tab, check that the summary lines reflect the report. 1. Check that the **New total amount** is the same amount as in step 4. 1. Click **Close period**. 1. Click **Send**. Depending on the country and settings, you can now send the report electronically. 1. Your tax agency may now ask you for authentication: Enter all required access data and confirm the sending. In some countries, you have to upload the now created file and send it directly to the tax authorities. > [!NOTE] > You can re-run the report in case you need to add postings later.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Manage VAT periods /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage VAT periods Manage VAT periods /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/manage-vat-periods page An organisation may consist of a number of branches, each with a certain level of autonomy. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage VAT periods An organisation may consist of a number of branches, each with a certain level of autonomy. Each branch can be a separate legal entity, but they all are organised within the same tenant account in Visma Net. These branches may have different durations of VAT periods and even different durations of tax years. Thus, sometimes for a particular branch, you may need to do one of the following: + Set up an individual VAT period duration + Change the VAT period duration for particular reasons (for example, the branch income has changed, so the tax periods have changed from a month to a quarter) + Configure a short tax year In Visma Net, you can configure a tax year for each branch and tax agency combination individually, specify the particular VAT period type, and set up a short tax year. Each branch can prepare, void, and release its own VAT reports and close the branch's own VAT periods separately from one another. The topics of this chapter describe the setup and maintenance of a tax year in Visma Net. ## Topics + [About the setup and maintenance of VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/about-the-setup-and-maintenance-of-vat-periods/) + [Configure a tax year](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/configure-a-tax-year/) About the setup and maintenance of VAT periods /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/about-the-setup-and-maintenance-of-vat-periods section You configure a tax year structure for each particular combination of the branch and tax agency by using the VAT periods (TX207000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About the setup and maintenance of VAT periods You configure a tax year structure for each particular combination of the branch and tax agency by using the VAT periods (TX207000) window. For more information: [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/). ## Setting up VAT periods In the [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/) window, you can set up VAT periods for the selected branch and tax agency. The duration of these VAT periods may differ from the default VAT period type specified for a tax agency in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. To set up VAT periods, in the **Branch** and **Tax agency** fields in the top part of the [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/) window, you select the required branch and tax agency. In the **Tax year** field, specify the tax year for which you are going to configure the periods. Then in the **VAT period type** field, select the required type of a VAT period. Once you select a VAT period type, the system displays the list of VAT periods in the table on the window. > [!NOTE] > You can change the VAT period type only if all of the periods of the selected year have the **Open** status. To complete the process of setting up periods, click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) in the window toolbar. > [!NOTE] > By default, a legal entity has a tax year that starts on January 1, has a duration of one calendar year, and has the period duration specified for the tax agency in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. If you do not need to modify these default settings, you can proceed with tax report preparation without performing any additional configuration in the [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/) window. ## Viewing VAT periods On the [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/) window, you can select the needed branch, tax agency, and tax year in the top part. Once you do, the system displays the list of VAT periods in the table, so that you can review VAT periods and their statuses for the current tax year and or a past tax year. In the table, you can also view the net VAT amounts for the closed VAT periods. ## Shortening a tax year In Visma Net, you can configure a short tax year or a tax year of a duration that is less than 12 month. In the [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/) window, once you select the required combination of the branch and tax agency, you select a needed tax year in the **Tax year** field, and, next to this field, you select the **Short tax year** check box. Once you do, the **Add period** and **Delete period** buttons become available on the table toolbar, so that you can delete and add periods as needed. You save this modified tax year configuration by clicking ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png) in the window toolbar. > [!NOTE] > Only a tax year for which all periods have the **Open** status can be shortened. ## Specifying the default VAT period type The default VAT period type is specified for each tax agency in the **Default VAT period type** field on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. The system uses this VAT period by default for each newly added branch. You can override this setting for a particular tax agency and branch by using the [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/) window. ### Parent topic [Manage VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/manage-vat-periods/) ### Related tasks [Configure a tax year](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/configure-a-tax-year/) Configure a tax year /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/configure-a-tax-year section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a tax year 1. Go to the [VAT periods (TX207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000/) window. 1. In the **Branch** field, select the branch, for which you want to set up VAT periods. 1. In the **Tax agency** field, select the tax agency whose VAT periods you want to set up. 1. In the **Tax year** field, select the tax year for which you want to set up VAT periods. 1. Optional: Select the **Short tax year** check box to set up periods for a tax year that is shorter than the calendar one. Once you select this check box, the **Delete period** and **Add period** buttons will be available in the table toolbar so you can delete and add periods in the table. 1. Optional: In the **Start date** field (which is available for editing only if there are no tax years in the system for the selected branch and tax agency), select the first day of the tax year. 1. In the **VAT period type** field, select the type, which defines the duration of the VAT periods. The available values are **Half a month**, **Month**, **Two months**, **Quarter**, **Half a year**, **Year**, and **Financial period**. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). Parent topic: [Manage VAT periods](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/manage-vat-periods/) Close the last VAT period /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-periods/close-the-last-vat-period section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Close the last VAT period To go back to the main process, click outside this pop-up window. ## Before you start Before you close the last financial period of a financial year, you must close the last VAT period of the financial year. If your company's financial year does not start with the calendar year, make sure you only close the VAT periods belonging to this financial year. The process described below has two parts: 1. In step 1-3 you prepare the VAT report. 1. In step 4-6 you close the VAT period and send the report. It is possible to complete part 1 first and have another person complete part 2 at another time. In that case, the person who completes part 2 needs to re-enter via the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) report. 1. Go to [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/). 1. In the **Tax agency** field, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) to select one. 1. Fill in the **Reporting period**. 1. Click **Prepare VAT report**. You are now forwarded to the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. 1. Click **Close period**. 1. Click **Send**. Depending on country and settings, you can now send the report electronically. 1. Your tax agency may now ask you for authentication: Enter all required access data and confirm the sending. In some countries you have to upload the now created file and send it directly to the tax authorities. The report is now sent to the tax authorities. Depending on your settings, you can re-run the report in case you need to add postings later. Manage taxable documents /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage taxable documents About VAT amount validation in documents /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents/about-vat-amount-validation-in-documents page Visma Net provides you with the functionality of validating the VAT amounts in supplier documents that you enter into the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT amount validation in documents Visma Net provides you with the functionality of validating the VAT amounts in supplier documents that you enter into the system. Visma Net provides you with the functionality of validating the VAT amounts in supplier documents that you enter into the system. To make the system to validate the VAT amount in a document, you need to enter the control VAT amount in the **'VAT amount** field while adding a document on a document entry window. > [!NOTE] > The system validates the VAT amount that you have specified in a document only if the **Net/gross entry mode** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. To make the **VAT amount** field available in the top part of the document entry window, you need to select the **Validate VAT totals on entry** check box in the preferences window of the corresponding workspace: + The [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window: To make the VAT amount validation field available in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. + The [Cash management preferences (CA101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/cash-management-preferences-ca101000/) window: To make the VAT amount validation field available in the [Transactions (CA304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/cash-management/cash-management-windows/transactions-ca304000/) window. With this check box selected, after you have added all the required detail lines in a document, the system will compute the VAT amount according to the tax settings applicable to a document and validate this amount against the VAT amount specified in the validation field. If there is a discrepancy between the VAT amount that you have entered in the **VAT amount** field and the VAT amount computed by the system (that is shown in the **VAT amount column** on the **VAT details** tab), the system does not allow you to process the document until you correct the VAT amount. In that case, you correct the VAT amount manually on the **VAT details** tab. ## VAT amount discrepancies Some discrepancies can appear between the VAT amount computed by the system on the document entry window and the VAT amount specified in the original supplier document. These discrepancies may be caused due to rounding differences, for example, when the VAT amount of the original document was calculated in another system in which the rounding rules are set up differently. The discrepancies can be minor differences in decimals, but nevertheless they should be corrected. If any discrepancy arises and the system shows the corresponding error, you manually correct the VAT amount in the **VAT amount** column of the **VAT details** tab so that it matches the VAT amount of the supplier document. In that case, if the **Net** VAT calculation method has been applied, all the amounts in the document will be exactly the same as in the source document (after you correct the VAT amount manually) and the document will be balanced. If the **Gross** VAT calculation method has been applied, the taxable amounts used by the system for VAT amount calculation can differ slightly from the taxable amounts used for the original document. In that case, the discrepancy (the amount of the difference) that has occurred will be accounted and posted to the corresponding general ledger account. Thus, as a result, the document will contain exactly the same amounts as the source document, but the amount that has appeared due to rounding differences, will be accounted on the respective general ledger account: In that case, the general ledger transaction will look as shown in the following example: |Account|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---| |Supplier ledger account|Total amount|| |Expense account (Line 1)|Amount1|| |Expense account (Line 2)|Amount2|| |Tax payable account|VAT amount|| |Rounding gain/Loss account|Discrepancy amount (the difference due to the rounding amount)|| To account for the discrepancy amount, you need to specify the maximum amount of the difference that can appear due to rounding in the **Rounding limit** field in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/)window. The system will validate this amount against the discrepancy amount, and if the discrepancy amount does not exceed the limit, the discrepancy amount will be posted to the general ledger accounts specified in the **Rounding gain account/subaccount** field or the **Rounding loss account/subaccount** field in the [General ledger preferences (GL102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/general-ledger-preferences-gl102000/)window. ## VAT exclusive and VAT inclusive amounts in document detail lines Before entering amounts in the detail lines of a document that you enter into the system, you must consider the type of amounts specified in the original supplier document. Depending on the business requirements of the applicable supplier, a document can contain in its detail lines amounts that are either VAT inclusive (net) or VAT exclusive (gross). In Visma Net, you need to specify the VAT calculation mode that the system should use during the validation process. The selected mode defines how the system will compute the VAT and taxable amounts for the document. You select the required mode in the **VAT calculation mode** field (which can be found on several windows, as described below), in which the following options are available: Gross : Select this option if the amounts in the document detail lines include applicable taxes. Net : Select this option if the amounts in the document detail lines do not include taxes. Tax settings : Select this option if the standard tax settings should be applied to the document. This option is used if a tax with one of the following tax calculation methods selected in the **Calculate on** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window is applied to the document: **Calc. on item + VAT amount**, **Calc. on document amount**, and **Calc. on document + VAT amount**. > [!NOTE] > You can specify the **Gross** or **Net** VAT calculation mode only if item-level taxes are applicable to the document or those that have the **Calc. on item amount** option or the **Extract from item amount** option selected in the **Calculate on** field in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. The **VAT calculation mode** field is specified on the following levels by using the appropriate windows: **Document**: You select the appropriate option on the **Financial details** tab of the document entry window. This option will be applied for computing tax and taxable amounts in this document. By default, the system fills in this field with the option specified for the supplier location (if applicable) or supplier that you specify for the document, but you can override the default option. **Supplier location** (if applicable): You select the appropriate option on the **General settings** tab of the [Supplier locations (AP303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-locations-ap303010/) window. (By default, the system fills in this field with the option specified for the supplier, but you can override this option.) This setting will be applied by default to all documents in which you select this supplier location, but it can be changed for each document. **Supplier**: You select the appropriate option on the **Purchase settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. (By default, the system fills in this field with the option specified for the supplier class, but you can override this option.) This setting will be applied by default to all documents created for this supplier (if the option is not changed at the supplier location or document level). **Supplier class**: You select the appropriate option on the **General settings** tab of the [Supplier classes (AP201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-classes-ap201000/) window. This setting will be applied by default to all documents created for the suppliers of this supplier class (if the option is not changed at the supplier, supplier location, or document level). > [!NOTE] > If the VAT zone of a supplier contains a withholding tax, the system automatically sets the VAT calculation mode to **Gross** and makes the **VAT calculation mode** field unavailable for editing. > [!NOTE] > If the VAT zone of a supplier contains a use tax, the system automatically sets the VAT calculation mode to **Net** in documents, and makes the **VAT calculation mode** field unavailable for editing. ## One-line document and multi-line document To speed the process of entering data on a document entry window, the system suggests a possible amount in each line that you add. For example: When you add the first line, the system automatically inserts in the **Ext. cost** column of the line the amount that you have entered in the amount validation field in the top part of the document entry window. > [!NOTE] > You can enable the amount validation functionality for the document by selecting the corresponding check box in the workspace preferences window (for example, the **Validate document totals on entry** in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/) window). This functionality allows the system to validate the amount that you enter in the amount validation field of the document entry window (for example, in the **Amount** field in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window). The name of the check box that activates this functionality and the name of the validation field in the document entry window can differ depending on the document and the workspace. The suggested amount is exactly the same as the control amount you have entered (if the **Gross** VAT calculation mode is specified for a document), or this amount is recalculated according to the rate of the applied tax or taxes or the amount minus the applicable VAT amounts (if the **Net** VAT calculation mode is specified). You leave the **ext. cost** amount as it is if the document has only one line. If the document has multiple lines, you manually correct the first **ext. cost** amount in the document entry window based on the amount specified in the first line of your source document. When you add the second detail line, the system suggests the residual amount (the difference between the total document amount and the amount that you have specified in the first line) in the **Ext. cost** column of the second line; correct this amount if needed. The process proceeds similarly for any additional lines that you need to add. You can leave the suggested amount or correct it. > [!NOTE] > If you do not want the system to suggest residual amounts while you add the detail lines, do not fill in the amount validation field until you have added all required detail lines to the document. After you have added all required detail lines to the document entry window, the system compares the VAT amount (or amounts) computed on the **VAT details** tab to the control value you have entered in the **VAT amount****validation** field of the window. The document is balanced if the VAT amounts are the same; the system generates an error if there is any discrepancy. About VAT calculated for documents with cash discounts /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents/about-vat-calculated-for-documents-with-cash-discounts page To meet the requirements of European value-added tax (VAT) legislation on discounts for early payments (also known as prompt payment discounts, or cash discounts in Visma Net ), in documents (such as invoices) for which the full payment has been received within the cash discount period, the VAT amount must be calculated based on the discounted taxable amount. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About VAT calculated for documents with cash discounts To meet the requirements of European value-added tax (VAT) legislation on discounts for early payments (also known as prompt payment discounts, or cash discounts in Visma Net ), in documents (such as invoices) for which the full payment has been received within the cash discount period, the VAT amount must be calculated based on the discounted taxable amount. To meet the requirements of European value-added tax (VAT) legislation on discounts for early payments (also known as **prompt payment discounts**, or **cash discounts** in Visma Net), in documents (such as invoices) for which the full payment has been received within the cash discount period, the VAT amount must be calculated based on the discounted taxable amount. If the payment is received after the cash discount period, the VAT amount is calculated based on the non-discounted taxable amount of a document. Thus, VAT is to be calculated based on the payment that was actually received by the supplier; as a result, the customer recovers the amount of VAT that has been actually paid. ## How it works in Visma Net > [!NOTE] > This functionality is available only if the **VAT reporting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In Visma Net, when you initially enter a document (such as an invoice), the system shows the VAT amount calculated on the full document amount, because when you enter an invoice, you do not know whether the discount will be taken. However, in the invoice, you specify the appropriate cash discount terms (in the **Terms** field), so the system calculates the discounted taxable amount and tax amount that can be applied if the terms are met. You can view these discounted amounts (**VAT on discounted price** and **Discounted taxable total**) in the **Cash discount info** section on the **Financial details** tab of the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. If the invoice is fully paid within the cash discount period or if the **Payment** for the invoice is released in the [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window, the cash discount is to be applied to that invoice. In this case, the system leaves the status of the invoice as **Open** and makes its balance equal to the appropriate cash discount amount (which has been specified in the **Cash discount** field). This invoice appears in the list of documents in the [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) window. In this window, you should generate the credit note for the invoice in which the corresponding cash discount amount is specified. This credit note will be automatically applied to the invoice, and after that, this invoice will be **Closed**. > [!NOTE] > After you have generated a credit note, the invoice will be closed automatically only if the **Automatically release credit notes** check box is selected in the **VAT recalculation settings** section in the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window. Otherwise, you need to release the credit note in the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window manually. ## Configuring a VAT used for documents that are paid early If a VAT applies to your company and your company offers cash discounts to documents for which the payment is made in time to qualify for the discount, then you need to configure the appropriate VAT in the system. You configure the tax of the **VAT** type in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window and select the **Reduce taxable amount on early payment** option in the **Cash discount** field. Later, if a document with this tax applied is paid in full before the cash discount date specified in the invoice (**Cash discount date**), you will be able to generate a credit note to adjust the VAT and taxable amounts of the invoice. ## Generating credit notes In the [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) window, you can view the list of the documents for which the full payment has been made before the final date of the cash discount period. In this window, you can process the generation of a credit note or credit notes (for a document or documents that you select) or credit notes (for all listed documents) by clicking **Process** or **Process all**, respectively. Depending on whether you clear or select the **Consolidate credit notes by customer** check box in the [Generate VAT on cash discount (AR504500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/generate-vat-on-cash-discount-ar504500/) window before processing, you can generate a credit note for each particular document or one credit note for a group of documents with similar properties, such as branch, customer, customer location, currency, customer account (and customer subaccount, if applicable), and VAT zone. ## Setting up the automatic release of credit notes Generated credit notes can be released automatically by the system if you select the **Automatically release credit notes** check box in the **VAT recalculation settings** section in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. > [!NOTE] > If the **Automatically release credit notes** check box is cleared in your system, check that all generated credit notes are released in the [Release customer documents (AR501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/release-customer-documents-ar501000/) window, because the system closes the document automatically only after the corresponding credit note is released. Related tasks [Create a value-added tax](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/create-a-vat/) Related reference [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) Recognition of pending VAT - overview /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents/recognition-of-pending-vat-overview page In the VAT (TX205000) window of Visma Net, you can configure a value-added tax (VAT) of the Pending type to be applied to those documents whose VAT amounts should be recognised after the document has been released. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Recognition of pending VAT - overview In the VAT (TX205000) window of Visma Net, you can configure a value-added tax (VAT) of the Pending type to be applied to those documents whose VAT amounts should be recognised after the document has been released. For more information: [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/). In the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window of Visma Net, you can configure a value-added tax (VAT) of the **Pending** type to be applied to those documents whose VAT amounts should be recognised after the document has been released. Once a document that is subject to a **Pending** VAT is released, the system records its VAT amount to an intermediate account (such as the Pending tax payable account or the Pending tax claimable account), where the VAT amount is kept until a user initiates the process of recognising the taxes. When you run the recognition process, the system generates a general ledger transaction that moves the VAT amount from the intermediate (pending) account to the actual Tax payable or Tax claimable account. > [!NOTE] > The VAT amounts recorded to the pending accounts are not included in the VAT report. Only when the recognition of taxes is performed does the system include the corresponding VAT information in the VAT report of the appropriate period. The functionality related to value-added taxes is available only if the **VAT reporting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## VAT recognition methods In Visma Net, you can use either of the following methods of recognising the pending value-added taxes: On documents : With this recognition method, the total VAT amount of a document can be recognised on any needed date. The system does not take into account payments in this case. You load the released documents with the pending VAT applied in the [Recognise input VAT (TX503500)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-input-vat-tx503500/) window or the [Recognise output VAT (TX503000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-output-vat-tx503000/) window, and then initiate the recognition process. On payments : With this recognition method, the VAT amount is recognised only when a payment is applied to a document. The VAT amount can be recognised fully or partially, depending on whether the applied payment fully or partially covers the document amount. The partial VAT amount to be recognised, if applicable, is calculated proportionally to the payment applied to a document. You load the released applications in the [Recognise input VAT (TX503500)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-input-vat-tx503500/) window or the [Recognise output VAT (TX503000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-output-vat-tx503000/) window, and then initiate the recognition process for one application or multiple applications. Each VAT amount is recognised on the date when the payment has been applied to document. ## Setup of recognition methods To set up the recognition process, you specify the appropriate recognition method for each required tax agency on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. In the **VAT recognition method** field, you select either **On documents** or **On payments**. Before you initiate the VAT recognition processin the [Recognise input VAT (TX503500)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-input-vat-tx503500/) window or the [Recognise output VAT (TX503000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-output-vat-tx503000/) window, you select a tax agency in the **Tax agency** field. The system inserts the recognition method of the selected tax agency in the **VAT recognition method** field. If needed, you can change the recognition method manually before you run the recognition process. The next topics describe initiating of the VAT recognition process for both of these methods in detail. About recognising the pending VAT on documents /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents/about-recognising-the-pending-vat-on-documents page By using the On documents VAT recognition method, you recognise VAT amounts calculated in the unpaid documents that are subject to pending VAT. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About recognising the pending VAT on documents By using the On documents VAT recognition method, you recognise VAT amounts calculated in the unpaid documents that are subject to pending VAT. By using the **On documents** VAT recognition method, you recognise VAT amounts calculated in the unpaid documents that are subject to pending VAT. You can initiate the recognition process by using any needed date. ## Initiation of the VAT recognition process You initiate the process of recognising the pending VAT the [Recognise input VAT (TX503500)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-input-vat-tx503500/) window or the [Recognise output VAT (TX503000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-output-vat-tx503000/) window, depending on whether input or output taxes should be recognised. In one of these windows, you specify the following selection criteria, which the system uses to load the documents: Date : The documents with a date earlier than or the same as the specified date are loaded. By default, the current business date is specified. To load the documents with any date to the window, clear this field. Branch : The branch from which documents are loaded. Tax agency : The tax agency that is associated with the VAT of the **Pending** type to be processed. VAT ID : The VAT code that was used for calculating the VAT amounts to be recognised by the process. Only the VAT codes associated with the selected tax agency are available for selection. You can leave this field empty, so that the documents subject to all available pending taxes associated with the agency will be loaded. In the top part, you should also make sure the **VAT recognition method** is **On documents**. By default, the option specified for the tax agency you have selected is shown. Once the documents are loaded to the table, you select one item or multiple items in the list, and initiate the process by clicking **Process** in the window toolbar. (To process all listed items, you click **Process all**.) > [!NOTE] > For each document to be processed, the **VAT doc. no.** value should be specified in the table. This number is either inserted by the system automatically or entered by a user manually, depending on the option specified for the tax agency in the **Input VAT entry ref. no.** or **Output VAT entry ref. no.** field on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. When you run the process of recognising the pending VAT, the system generates a general ledger batch (or multiple batches) to move the VAT amounts from the pending accounts to the actual VAT payable (or VAT claimable) accounts. ## Example of general ledger transactions generated when pending VAT is processed This section provides an example of the general ledger transactions that the system generates when it processes a customer invoice that is subject to pending VAT. Suppose your company issues a €1000 invoice dated 01.01.2020 for services. The services are subject to a 7% VAT. When this invoice is released in the system, the system creates the following entries in the General ledger. |**Account**|Date|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Customer ledger|01.01.2020|1070|-| |Sales (as an example)|01.01.2020|-|1000| |Pending VAT payable|01.01.2020|-|70| On 01.31.2020, you run the VAT recognition process. The system generates the following general ledger transactions once the VAT recognition is completed. |**Account**|Date|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Pending VAT payable|01/31/2020|70|-| |VAT payable|01/31/2020|-|70| You can view the generated general ledger transactions in the [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/) window by using the **Batch number** link available in the table. > [!NOTE] > You specify the Pending VAT payable account and the VAT payable account (as well as the Pending VAT claimable account and the VAT claimable account) for each particular VAT code on the **General ledger accounts** tab of the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. The amounts posted to the VAT payable or VAT claimable account will be included in the VAT report, which you create in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window. Parent topic: [Recognition of pending VAT - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents/recognition-of-pending-vat-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 About recognising the pending VAT on payments /visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents/about-recognising-the-pending-vat-on-payments page In certain countries, there are legal requirements that VAT must be recognised, accrued, and included in the VAT report at the time of payment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About recognising the pending VAT on payments In certain countries, there are legal requirements that VAT must be recognised, accrued, and included in the VAT report at the time of payment. To satisfy these requirements, in Visma Net, you can use the **On payment** VAT recognition method. With this method, you recognise VAT amounts based on the payments applied to documents, so the VAT amount of a document is recognised on the date when the payment was applied to that document. You can recognise the VAT amount fully or partially, depending on whether the payments completely or partially cover the amount of the document. If the document is paid partially, the VAT amount to be recognised is calculated proportionally to the applied payment. ## Initiation of the VAT recognition process You initiate the process of recognising the pending VAT in the [Recognise input VAT (TX503500)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-input-vat-tx503500/) window or the [Recognise output VAT (TX503000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-output-vat-tx503000/) window, depending on whether input or output VAT should be recognised. In one of these windows, you specify the following selection criteria, which the system uses to load applications to the table: Date : Applications with a date earlier than or the same as the specified date are loaded. By default, the current business date is specified. To load the applications with any date to the window, clear this field. Branch : The branch for which documents (such as supplier invoices) are paid. Tax agency : The tax agency that is associated with the VAT to be processed. VAT ID : The VAT code that was used for calculating the VAT amounts to be recognised by the process. Only the VAT codes associated with the selected tax agency are available for selection. You can leave this field empty, so that the documents subject to all available pending VAT associated with the agency will be loaded. In the top part, you should also make sure the **VAT recognition method** is **On payments**. By default, the option specified for the tax agency you have selected is shown. Once the applications are loaded to the table, you select one item or multiple items in the list, and initiate the process by clicking **Process** in the window toolbar. (To process all listed items, you click **Process all**.) > [!NOTE] > If you have reversed a payment application (a payment applied to a document subject to pending VAT), you have to process the application reversal in the [Recognise input VAT (TX503500)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-input-vat-tx503500/) window or the [Recognise output VAT (TX503000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-windows/recognise-output-vat-tx503000/) window. When you run the process of recognising the pending VAT, the system generates a general ledger batch (or multiple batches) to move the VAT amounts from the pending accounts to the actual VAT payable (or VAT claimable) accounts. If only partial payment has been applied to a listed document, the system calculates the amount of the VAT to be recognised proportionally to the payment that was applied to document amount. ## Example of general ledger transactions generated when partial payment has been applied This section provides an example of the general ledger transactions that the system generates when a partial payment has been applied and recognised. Suppose your company issues a €1000 invoice dated 01.01.2020 for services. The services are subject to a 7% VAT, which should be recognised after the payment is received. When this invoice is recorded in the system, the system creates the following entries in the General ledger. |**Account**|Date|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Customer ledger|01.01.2020|1070|-| |Pending VAT payable|01.01.2020|-|70| |Services|01.01.2020|-|1000| On 20.1.2020, the customer pays €535, which is half of the amount it must pay for the services plus the €35 VAT amount (7% of €500). This VAT amount must be recognised and posted to the General ledger once this payment is processed. As a result, the system creates the following entries in the General ledger. |**Account**|Date|Debit|Credit| |---|---|---|---| |Pending VAT payable|20.1.2020|35|-| |VAT payable|20.1.2020|35|| The VAT report that is generated at the end of the period, on 31.1.2020, will include €35 of output VAT and €535 of taxable sales. > [!NOTE] > If the **Multi-currency accounting** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system generates recognition entries in the currency of the document being paid by using the document's exchange rate. Parent topic: [Recognition of pending VAT - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxable-documents/recognition-of-pending-vat-overview/)

Related pages

Concepts

 VAT windows /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT windows AutoReport status (TX50500S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/autoreport-status-tx50500s page In this window, you can get an overview of the statuses of the reports that have been sent to AutoReport. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # AutoReport status (TX50500S) In this window, you can get an overview of the statuses of the reports that have been sent to AutoReport. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also see updates in the reports if the portal sends this to AutoReport.The statuses are taken from AutoReport. ## The top part
Element Description
Company

The company whose VAT report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch whose VAT report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) (CS100000) window.

Also, the company must have the organisation type With branches requiring balancing and the File tax by branches selected.
Tax agency ID The ID and name of the tax agency.
Report ID The ID of the AutoReport.
Report type

The type of the report:

  • VAT
  • EC sales list
  • SAF-T
From reporting period

The first period to be reported on (VAT period).

You must select Tax agency ID to be able to select a period here.
To reporting period

The last period to be reported on (VAT period).

You must select Tax agency ID to be able to select a period here.
Revision ID

The revision number of the report.

The revision number changes each time you prepare a report for a closed reporting period.
## The table This table shows the information on the reports that you have selected in the top part.
Column Description
Unlabelled column There is a green tick icon on lines that have the status Accepted by government and a red icon for all error statuses. Lines with other statuses do not have any tick icon.
Branch

The branch for which the VAT report is sent.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) (CS100000) window.

Also, the company must have the organisation type With branches requiring balancing and the File tax by branches selected.
Company The company for which the VAT report is sent. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) (CS100000) window.
Tax agency ID The ID of the tax agency.
VAT reporting period The reporting period the VAT report covers.
Revision ID The revision number of the report. The revision number changes each time you prepare a report for a closed reporting period.
Start date The start date of the selected period.
End date The end date of the selected period.
Username The Visma Net user who sent the report to AutoReport.
Report type

The type of the report:

  • VAT
  • EC sales list
  • SAF-T
Created Date when the report was created.
Last change Date of the latest status update.
AutoReport status

Status received from AutoReport.

  • AutoReport acknowledged
  • Received
  • Sent
  • Log on error
  • Upload error
  • Invalid report
  • Processing failed
  • Sending
  • Rejected by government
  • Report ready for download
  • AutoReport failure
  • Forwarded to PinkWeb (NL)
  • Error forwarding to PinkWeb (NL
  • Report validated (NO)
  • Error validating report (NO)
Status message Explanatory status message from AutoReport or to the Tax authority.
Show difference The information in this column depends on a check box with the same name in processing windows for revision versions of the report, for example, the Process VAT report (TX502000) window.
Altinn report type This column defines the type of report for classification in Altinn: Main report; Additional report, correction report.
Comments Comments inserted in the comment field in the report processing window (e.g. the VAT report window).
Due date The due date of the payment to the tax authorities.
First VAT reporting period If the VAT report contains supplementary amounts from previous VAT periods, the first period for the supplementary values are shown here.
KID number The payment reference number for payment to tax authorities.
Amount due The amount payable to (or from) to the Norwegian and the Dutch tax authorities.
To bank account The tax authority’s account number for VAT payments.
Bank account The company’s account number used for VAT payments.
General ledger transactions with VAT (TX40500S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/general-ledger-transactions-with-vat-tx40500s page This window shows a details summary per account of all general ledger transactions with VAT information for each account that has a link to a document containing VAT. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # General ledger transactions with VAT (TX40500S) This window shows a details summary per account of all general ledger transactions with VAT information for each account that has a link to a document containing VAT. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Note! If you have selected the **Post summary when updating the general ledger** check box on the **General information** tab in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) or the [Inventory preferences (IN101000](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) windows, the VAT information will be missing because the general ledger transactions are missing the link to the original document line containing the VAT information. ## The top part
Element Description
Company The company to whose general ledger the transactions belong. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch to whose general ledger the transactions belong. You will only see branches for the selected company.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Ledger Only ledgers with ledger type Actual are valid.
From period The financial period from which the transactions are posted. This field is mandatory.
To period The financial period to which the transactions are posted. This field is mandatory.
Subaccount Filtering for the subaccount. It is not possible to filter on separate segments in this inquiry.
Workspace The drop-down with the different workspaces.
Transaction type The drop-down with all transactions types.
From VAT period

The filter for from VAT period and will limit to show only transactions that have been processed by VAT report.

If from VAT period is used, you have to select to VAT period.
To VAT period

The filter for to VAT period and will limit to show only transactions that have been processed by VAT report.

If to VAT period is used, you have to select from VAT period.
If the check box is selected, unreleased transactions will be included in the result.
From account

The filter for from account.

If from account is selected, you have to select to account.
To account

The filter for to account.

If to account is selected, you have to select from account.
From date The filter for from date that will filter on transaction date.
To date The filter for to date that will filter on transaction date.
## The table This table lists the reporting lines with the amounts for the period.
Column Description
Company The company ID is only visible if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch The branch ID is only visible if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Account The general ledger account for the line.
Account name The name of the account.
Account type

One of the following account types:

  • Asset
  • Liability
  • Income
  • Expense
Batch no. The batch number for posting.
Calculated VAT rate (%) The calculated tax rate based on taxable amount and VAT amount.
Credit amount The posted amount of credit.
Currency The currency ISO code for the transaction.
Customer/supplier The name of the customer or the supplier from the Customer no./Supplier no. column
Customer no./Supplier no.

The customer or the supplier number.

Only for the supplier ledger or the customer ledger account.
Debit amount The posted amount of debit.
Deductible VAT rate Shows the deductible VAT rate. Normally it is 100%, but if the rate is a partially deductible rate, this will show the rate that is the base for the taxable amount.
Expense amount Shows the deductible VAT rate. Normally it is 100%, but if the rate is a partially deductible rate, this will show the rate that is the base for the Taxable amount.
Financial period ID The financial period.
Internal record ID The calculated ID used in the SAF-T report.
Ledger The ledger for the posting
Line no. The line number in the Batch.
Line type

Line types from Purchase orders:

DN
= Description
GI
= Goods for warehouse
GM
= Goods for manufacturing
GP
= Goods for drop-ship
GR
= Goods for replenishment
GS
= Goods for sales order
MC
= Misc. charges
NM
= Non-stock for manufacturing
NO
= Non-stock for sales order
NP
= Non-stock for drop-ship
NS
= Non-stock
SV
= Service

Line types from Sales orders:

DS
= Discount
FR
= Freight
GN
= Non-stock
MI
= Misc. charge
RA
= Reallocation
Original taxable amount This show the VAT amount for the whole document for this VAT ID.
Posted This means that the status is Posted.
Period The financial period.
Project The project number.
Posted credit amount in currency The posted amount credit in currency.
Posted debit amount in currency The posted amount debit in currency.
Posted VAT amount The posted VAT amount for the transactions.
Record ID Same as Internal ID.

Voucher

no

 The document number or the voucher number for the transaction.
Released Checked if the transaction is released.
Revision ID The Revision ID of the VAT report.
Subaccount The subaccount for the transaction.
Subaccount description The description for the Subaccount. You can maintain it in the Subaccounts window.
Sum post The status if the post is a sum post, as the supplier or supplier accounts.
Taxable amount The taxable amount in currency.
Total taxable amount The total taxable amount for the document for this VAT ID.
Total VAT amount The total VAT amount for the document for this VAT ID.
Transaction class

The transaction classes:

B
= Write-off
C
= Consolidation
D
= Discount
S
= Shipped not invoiced
E
= Retainage withheld
F
= Retainage released
G
= Unrealized and revaluation GOL
N
= Normal
P
= Payment
R
= Realised and rounding GOL
T
= VAT
U
= Charge
W
= Withholding VAT
Transaction date The date of the transaction.
Transaction description The transaction description from the batch line.
Transaction period The transaction period.
Transaction type ID This is the original transaction type or document type for the transaction type.
Transaction line no. The line number from the original document.
Transaction type The transaction/document type of the voucher.
VAT amount The VAT amount for this transaction.
VAT amount in the currency The VAT amount for this transaction in currency.
VAT bucket ID The VAT bucket ID that is the number of the tax report group.
VAT category description The description of the VAT category.
VAT category ID The VAT category for the transaction.
VAT ID The VAT ID for the transaction.
VAT period The VAT reporting period.
VAT rate % The VAT rate for the VAT ID.
Tax agency The name for the tax agency
Tax agency ID The tax agency supplier.
VAT transaction type The transaction/document type for the VAT transaction.
VAT zone ID The VAT zone of the transaction.
Workspace The origin workspace of the transaction.
Prepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-rf-1301-report-tx50200s section You use this window to prepare the RF-1301 report for a selected tax agency for the specified Self employee reporting year. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S) You use this window to prepare the RF-1301 report for a selected tax agency for the specified Self employee reporting year. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to prepare the RF-1301 report for a selected tax agency for the specified Self employee reporting year. You are not allowed to report the current year. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Generate

This generates values for this report.

If some suppliers are missing, you can change the settings on the supplier and generate again.
Prepare to send Click to navigate to the Release RF-1301 report (TX50700S) window.
View report details

Click to open the details for the selected row in the report and shows the documents included in this report.

Here you can make changes to the amount that will be reported if you have used a wrong Item type and you need to move from normal item to Labour or Service.
## The top part You use the elements in the area to select the branch, tax agency, and VAT period for the report to be released.
Element Description
Company

The company whose RF-1301 report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch whose RF-1301 report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

The Company type on the company for the branch must be With branches requiring balancing and the check box File tax by branch selected on the Organisation detail tab.
Tax agency The name of the tax agency for which you prepare the VAT report.
Reporting year

The year for the report.

This report is only sent once a year and you cannot select the current year. That will be available when the date passes 31. December.
Revision

The revision number of the RF-1301 report.

The revision number changes each time you prepare a report if the previous one has been prepared and sent.
## The Contact settings section
Element Description
Name

The name of the responsible person.

The name is selected when you prepare the report and is read-only.
Phone no.

The responsible person’s phone number.

The name is selected when you prepare the report and is read-only.
Notifications by email to

The responsible person’s email address for the notification from Altinn.

The email is selected when you prepare the report and is read-only.
Notifications by SMS to

The responsible person’s mobile phone number where you can get a notification from Altinn.

The notification mobile phone is selected when you prepare the report and is read-only.
## The table
Column Description
Supplier The supplier number for the company or person you are reporting.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Corporate ID The corporate ID for the supplier.
NI number The national insurance number, if the supplier does not have a corporate ID.
Original service/labour amount

The original amount that will be reported from the invoices and credit notes.

If you double-click on the amount, it will open the RF-1301 report details dialog window. In this window, you can view all invoices and credit notes related to the selected supplier. In the Service/labour amount you can make corrections if the invoice has the wrong type of Items that is not reported as service or labour. Saving these changes will update the reported amount accordingly.
Service/labour amount The amount that will be reported.
Total amount

The total amount for the supplier service/labour and others.

This amount will not be sent but should be used to review the total for the supplier.
## The RF-1301 report details dialog window
Column Description
Branch The branch number selected for the report.
Doc. type

The type of document:

  • Purchase invoice
  • Credit note
Ref. no.

The reference number of the purchase invoice or the credit note.

By clicking the number you can drill down to the view the specific document.
Supplier The table cell contains no information.
Corporate ID The table cell contains no information.
NI number The table cell contains no information.
Original service/labour amount The original amount that will be reported from the invoices/credit notes.
Service/labour amount

The amount that will be reported.

You can make corrections if the purchase invoice has the wrong type of Items that is not reported as Service or Labour.

By closing the dialog window, the corrected amount will appear in the corresponding table cell in the main table.

Save the changes by clicking icon-save in the window’s toolbar and this will change the amount that will be reported.
Total amount

The total amount for the supplier service/labour and others.

This amount will not be sent but should be used to review the total for the supplier.

Related pages

Tasks

 Prepare VAT report (TX501000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000 page You use this window to prepare a VAT report that is intended for a specific tax agency and spans a particular VAT reporting period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Prepare VAT report (TX501000) You use this window to prepare a VAT report that is intended for a specific tax agency and spans a particular VAT reporting period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > If your company has multiple companies, you prepare a VAT report for each company. Once the VAT reports are prepared for all companies, you can release them in the [Process VAT report (TX502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000/) window. If you have set the **File VAT by branches** for the company in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window, you have to prepare all branches before you can release the VAT report ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Prepare VAT report Generates a VAT report for the selected tax agency for the specified reporting period, and generates the reporting periods for a new calendar year if there is at least one taxable document in this year.
View VAT periods Directs you to the VAT periods (TX207000) window to view more details.
Unreleased documents Generates a VAT report for all unreleased documents from the general ledger, supplier, customer, cash account, and inventory.
Inquiries

Select one of the following inquiries windows from the button’s drop-down:
## The top part You use the elements in the area to select a branch (one of the consolidation branches), tax agency, and VAT period for which reporting lines will be displayed.
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required company from the list. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch If the setting File VAT by branches is set for the company, you have to select which branch to prepare.
Tax agency The ID and name of the tax agency for which the VAT report is intended. In Visma Net, tax authorities are defined as suppliers. The suggested tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Reporting period The reporting period (VAT period) you want to use.
Status Informs the status of the report.
From The start date of the chosen period.
To The end date of the period you have selected.
Exclude transactions from previous periods By selecting this check box you will exclude transactions from previous periods, and only process transactions from the selected period. This is used when you want to report the documents from previous period as a supplementary report. Select this when you prepare the period for the first time which will be Revision 1 and close this revision in the Process VAT report (TX502000). Then add the previous document to the same period, which will be revision 2 and which will include these as supplementary value.
## The table This table lists the reporting lines with the amounts for the period. Select the **Hide rows with no amount** check box to display only rows with VAT transactions.
Column Description
Report line The report line defined for the tax agency report.
Description The description of the report line.
Amount The VAT amount accumulated for the report line.
VAT box number This contains the code used in the electronic report to the government. Lines without a code will not be included in the report.
From VAT period The first the VAT period to report from.
Report line no. This is the line number that is created by the system.
To VAT period The end of the VAT period to report from.
Sort order Here you can enter a value that is used to sort the report lines in the windows Prepare VAT report (TX501000) and Process VAT report (TX502000).
VAT zone ID This is used if the values should be used for only one VAT zone. It is not used in standard reports.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 Release RF-1301 report (TX50700S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/release-rf-1301-report-tx50700s page You use this window to release the RF-1301 report prepared for a selected tax agency for the specified Self employee reporting year. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Release RF-1301 report (TX50700S) You use this window to release the RF-1301 report prepared for a selected tax agency for the specified Self employee reporting year. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to release the RF-1301 report prepared for a selected tax agency for the specified Self employee reporting year. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Send Send the report to the tax agency. The Send button is active, if the report is not yet to sent to the authorities.
Resend

Resend the report if the report has been sent, but due to some reason, you need to resend this revision.

The Resend button is active if the selected revision has been sent to the authorities.
Void report This will remove values for the report and a new prepare report have to be done.
View report details This opens the details for the selected row in the report and shows the documents included in this report.
## The top part You use the elements in the area to select the branch, tax agency, and VAT period for the report to be released.
Element Description
Company

The company whose RF-1301 report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch

The branch whose RF-1301 report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

The company type of the company for the branch must be With branches requiring balancing and the check box File tax by branch selected on the Organisation detail tab.
Tax agency The name of the tax agency for Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) which you prepare the VAT report.
Reporting year

The year for the report.

This report is only sent once a year.
Revision

The revision number of the RF-1301 report.

The revision number changes each time you prepare a report, with each revision.
Status message reply

This column is visible when you get a reply message from AutoReport.

It contains confirmation or error messages.

  • AutoReport acknowledged
  • Received
  • Sent
  • Log on error
  • Upload error
  • Invalid report
  • Processing failed
  • Sending
  • Rejected by government
  • Report ready for download
  • AutoReport failure
  • Error forwarding to PinkWeb (NL):
  • Forwarded to PinkWeb (NL)
## The Contact settings section
Element Description
Name

The name of the responsible person.

The contact information is retrieved from the Altinn settings tab in the Branches (CS102000) window if it is a multi-branch with File tax by branch. Or else, the information is retrieved from the Altinn tab in theOrganisations (CS101500) window.

You can override this information in the Pepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S) window by generating a report. This action will make the fields in the Contact settings section active for editing.
Phone no.

The responsible person’s phone number.

The contact information is retrieved from the Altinn settings tab in the Branches (CS102000) window if it is a multi-branch with File tax by branch. Otherwise, the information is retrieved from the Altinn tab in theOrganisations (CS101500) window.

You can override this information in the Prepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S) window by generating a report. This action will make the fields in the Contact settings section active for editing.
Notifications by email to

The responsible person’s email address for the notification from Altinn.

The contact information is retrieved from the Altinn settings tab in the Branches (CS102000) window if it is a multi-branch with File tax by branch. Otherwise, the information is retrieved from the Altinn tab in theOrganisations (CS101500) window.

You can override this information in the Pepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S) window by generating a report. This action will make the fields in the Contact settings section active for editing.
Notifications by SMS to

The responsible person’s mobile phone number where you can get a notification from Altinn.

The contact information is retrieved from the Altinn settings tab in the Branches (CS102000) window if it is a multi-branch with File tax by branch. Otherwise, the information is retrieved from the Altinn tab in theOrganisations (CS101500) window.

You can override this information in the Pepare RF-1301 report (TX50200S) window by generating a report. This action will make the fields in the Contact settings section active for editing.
## The table
Column Description
Supplier The supplier number for the company or person you are reporting.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Corporate ID The corporate ID for the supplier.
NI number The National insurance number, if the supplier does not have a corporate ID.
Service/labour amount The amount that will be reported.
Process VAT report (TX502000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/process-vat-report-tx502000 page You use this window to process a VAT report prepared for a selected tax agency for the specified VAT reporting period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process VAT report (TX502000) You use this window to process a VAT report prepared for a selected tax agency for the specified VAT reporting period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to process a VAT report prepared for a selected tax agency for the specified VAT reporting period. You can close the VAT reporting period that you have prepared in the [Prepare VAT report (TX501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/prepare-vat-report-tx501000/) window and generate a purchase invoice intended for the selected tax agency. The supplier invoice contains the net VAT amount that must be reported to the tax agency. You can turn off the creation of the generation of purchase invoice on the **Tax agency settings** tab on the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. If any documents were posted to the closed reporting period, you can create a new revision of the report with the appropriate VAT adjustment automatically generated. You can specify whether the particular tax agency allows posting to closed reporting periods on the **Tax agency settings** tab of the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. After closing the VAT period you can send/resend the VAT report to AutoReport where it will be authenticated and uploaded to the government. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Close period Close the selected reporting period to process / release the report. Note: In a company having the File VAT by branches selected, all branches must be prepared before you can close.
Send Send the VAT report to the tax agency after you have closed it. The Send button is active if the selected revision is closed but not yet sent to the authorities.
Resend

Resend the VAT report to the tax authorities if you have corrected the report in the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window and need to send it to the tax authorities again.

The Resend button is active if the selected revision has been sent to the authorities.
Validate Sends the VAT report for validation at the tax agency without sending it.
Actions

Two actions are available:

Adjust VAT
Navigates to the VAT adjustments (TX301000) window, where you can create a VAT adjustment document that adjusts the VAT and the taxable amount of the specified VAT in the prepared VAT report. For details, see: About operations with VAT reports.

  • Void report Voids a VAT report that has the Prepared status, and opens the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) with the corresponding reporting period. If the Update closed reporting periods check box is selected in the Suppliers (AP303000) ../p2p/AP/AP303000-ref.html window, the reporting period remains closed once you have voided a VAT report. In that case, you can update a closed period with data from new documents, void a VAT report and prepare a new one.

    Note

    If your company consists of multiple branches, you can void a VAT report for the selected branch only. Once you have prepared the voided VAT report again, you can release VAT reports for company branches.
Inquiries

From the button’s drop-down you can select two reports, which will give you further details on your VAT reporting:
Reports

Two reports are available:

Print VAT report.
This makes it easier to print the report that is closed or selected in the window. The report that will be printed depends on the country of the company.
Download XML file
This will create a copy of the XML file that are sent to AutoReport and are mostly used for support purpose.
## The top part You use the elements in the area to select the branch, tax agency, and VAT period for the report to be released.
Element Description
Company

The company whose VAT report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch

The branch whose VAT report will be released.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

The Company type must be With branches requiring balancing and the check box File tax by branch checked.
Tax agency The ID and name of the tax agency for which the VAT report is intended. Select a tax agency from the list of agencies available in the system. In Visma Net, tax authorities are defined as suppliers. The suggested tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Reporting period The VAT reporting period the report covers.
Report status The status of the report.
Revision

The revision number of the VAT report. The revision number changes each time you prepare a VAT report for a closed reporting period. With each revision, a new purchase invoice is generated automatically and is listed on the Supplier documents tab.

Note

You can generate updated VAT reports for closed reporting periods if this functionality is enabled for the tax agency on the Tax agency settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Show differences

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the amounts shown in the table on the Details tab are taken from documents posted between the VAT report revision selected in the Revision field and the previous revision of the VAT report. That is, these are the amounts that indicate the difference between the revisions of the VAT report.

This check box is available only for revision 2 and higher.
From Read-only. The start date of the selected period.
To Read-only. The end date of the selected period. This date will be used as date on the tax document created on the tax agency.
Due date

The due date is suggested based on the payment terms of the tax agency.

You can overwrite the date before you close the report. It will be used on the invoices and credit notes that are created.
Report type

The report type for the VAT report.

Main report
Used the first time the report is sent. It will also replace the previous report.

The report type for the VAT report.

Main report
Used for revision 1 or if you have created more that one revision, but not sent any previous revisions.
Supplementary report
Can only be used for revision 2 or higher and is used if you have corrections to the previous report.
Replacement reason

If the revision is 2 or higher you have to select a replacement reason for the report that will be sent to the tax authority:

  • 332 - Calculation error/typing error
  • 333 - Guidance received during tax audit
  • 334 - Change in legal practice
  • 335 - Error in interpreting tax law
Report status

The status of the VAT report.

Prepared
The report has been prepared but not yet sent to the tax authorities.
Closed
The report has been sent to the tax authorities and is closed.
Status message reply

Select from the drop-down list one of the report’s Reply status messages:

  • AutoReport acknowledged
  • Received
  • Sent
  • Log on error
  • Upload error
  • Invalid report
  • Processing failed
  • Sending
  • Rejected by government
  • Report ready for download
  • AutoReport failure
  • Error forwarding to PinkWeb (NL
  • Forwarded to PinkWeb (NL)
Payment ref. no. Read-only. The payment reference number is generated based on the corporate ID from the branch, the reporting period type from the tax agency and the Reporting period. If the value is wrong you must correct the value in the created invoice or credit note. If the VAT registration ID is wrong you get a warning: The VAT registration ID has the wrong format. Generating the payment reference number failed.
Current bank account Shows the current bank account The current bank account or IBAN from the Payment settings tab in Company. This is used by the tax authority to pay a claim to the company. If File tax by branch is selected on the company the the bank account is from the branch
Current BIC (Swift) The BIC (swift) for the current bank account if IBAN is used from the Payment settings tab in Company. If File tax by branch is selected for the company, the BIC (swift) is from the branch.
New bank account If you want to change the bank account that you want the government to use if you have a claim, you can enter this here. The new bank account will be sent and updated in Altinn.
New BIC (Swift) If you enter an IBAN in the New bank account field, you have to enter the SWIFT/BIC for this account.
Telephone The telephone number of the reporter’s contact person. This is automatically filled out based on information entered for the company. If File tax by branch is selected for the company, it is based on the information entered for the branch.
Contact name The name of the reporter’s contact person. If File tax by branch is selected for the company, it is based on the information entered for the branch.
Email address The email address of the user sending the report. Suggests the email address entered in the AutoReport settings tab in the Organisations (CS101500) window. If the field is empty or you want to change the email address, you will see the message: Do you want to save (new email) as your default email address(set in the Organisation window) for reports sent to AutoReport?
New total amount When there is a report with revision 2 or higher and you select the report type Supplementary report this field shows the new total amount based on the detail line having the net VAT set.
Old total amount Calculates the value from the previous revision. The amount can be changed and will affect the total to be paid/reclaimed. Changes will be saved.
Total to be paid/reclaimed Calculated based on New total amount minus Old total amount.
Note to tax agency

Enter comments to the tax authority of any derivation or information regarding the report if necessary.

Read only: For revision 2 or higher the field will show what is being corrected.
Report transfer status Visible after the report has been validated or sent. The status from AutoReport or the tax authority of the sent report
Report transfer date Visible after the report has been validated or sent. The date and time for when the sent and received status.
Report transfer message Visible after the report has been validated or sent. Message sent from AutoReport or the tax authority
## The Details tab This tab shows the lines included in the prepared VAT report. The lines contain particular amounts (VAT and taxable) accumulated according to the taxable documents during the selected reporting period. Select the **Hide rows with no amount** check box to only view rows with VAT transactions.
Column Description
Report line order A report line defined for the tax agency report.
Description

The description of the report line.

It can be maintained in the Reporting settings (TX205100) window.
Amount

The accumulated amount (VAT or taxable) for the report line in the default currency for the reporting groups that are defined to report this line.

You can maintain it in the Reporting settings (TX205100) window.
VAT box number

This contains the code used in the electronic report to the government. The lines without a code will not be included in the report.

Note: These codes must correspond with the authorities coding for VAT reports.
From VAT period The first VAT period to report from.
Report line no. This is the line number that is created by the system.
To VAT period The last VAT period to report from.
Sort order Here you can enter a value that is used to sort the report lines in the windows Prepare VAT report (TX501000) and Process VAT report (TX502000).
VAT zone ID This is used if the values should be used only for one VAT zone. It is not in use in standard reports.
## The Supplier documents tab This tab shows any supplier documents (of the **Invoice** or **Purchase credit note** types) created by the system when the VAT report was released for the selected reporting period. In addition, it shows all invoices created manually in the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window for the tax agency with date corresponding to the from and to date for the VAT period. The manually created invoices will have an empty VAT revision. This supplier document contains the total VAT amount that you have to pay to the tax agency. This VAT amount is taken from the **Net VAT** row of the VAT report (the row for which the **Net VAT** check box is selected in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window; all VAT amounts are accumulated in this row. For details, see: [About VAT report configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/configure-vat-reports/about-vat-report-configuration/). > [!NOTE] > The system generates this supplier document and displays it on the **Supplier documents** tab only if the **Net VAT** row is configured in the VAT report and **Generate the VAT invoice automatically** is checked on the **Tax agency supplier** tab. If you have documents posted to a closed reporting period, you can prepare and release the updated VAT report for that period. This functionality is available only if the **Update closed VAT periods** check box is selected for the tax agency on the **Tax agency settings** tab in the [Suppliers (AP303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/suppliers-ap303000/) window. Once the updated VAT report is released, another supplier document is generated and listed on the **Supplier documents** tab in addition to the previous supplier document. For details, see: [About VAT report release](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-vat-reports/about-vat-report-release/).
Column Description
Branch

The branch that is responsible for paying the supplier document.

This column is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Type

The type of the accounts payable document:

Purchase invoice
, is created if the company have to pay VAT
Purchase credit note
, is created if the company has VAT to be paid back from the authorities.
Invoice no.

The number that identifies the supplier document in the system.

This Invoice no. is generated according to the numbering series assigned to the documents of the corresponding type in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.

If you click this number, the document opens in a separate window.
Date The last date of the VAT reporting period.
Due date The due date depends on the payment terms defined on the General settings tab in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.
Post period The period to which the selected document has been posted.
Supplier The supplier (which is the tax agency) the supplier document is referred to.
Currency The currency of the supplier document.
Amount The amount of the supplier document.
Balance The balance of the selected supplier document.
Status

The status of the selected supplier document.

Open
The document has not been paid.
Closed
The document has been paid or matched.

For details, see the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
VAT revision

The revision ID of the supplier document.

The supplier document is created in the process after the Close period button is clicked.

Documents with empty revision are created manually in the Purchase invoices (AP301000) window.
Supplier ref. This column is updated with the payment reference number from the VAT report when the invoice is created by the Process VAT report window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

 Reporting groups (TX205200) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200 page In this window, you can view and edit reporting groups created for a particular tax agency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reporting groups (TX205200) In this window, you can view and edit reporting groups created for a particular tax agency. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can view and edit reporting groups created for a particular tax agency. You can add or delete report lines that should be updated by the VAT associated with selected reporting group. You associate the reporting groups with the particular taxes by using the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. Report lines were initially defined in the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window. ## The top part You use the elements in this area to select the tax agency and reporting group.
Element Description
Tax agency The tax agency for which you want to configure or modify the VAT report groups. The default tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Reporting group The group by its name.
Group type

Read-only. The group type, which is one of the following:

Input
This type of group is used for VAT included in the purchase price (that can be claimed from a tax agency).
Output
This type of group is used for VAT included in the sales price.
## The table This table contains the list of those report lines configured for the tax agency that are updated by the reporting group specified in the top part.
Column Description
Report line The report line to be updated by the tax associated with the selected reporting group. Select the value from the list of the report lines configured for the tax agency.
Update with The type of the amount to be accumulated in the selected report line. This amount is initially set in the Reporting settings (TX205100) window: VAT amount or Taxable amount.
Update rule

The rule of updating the report line. Two options are available:

  • Output – input

: The difference between the VAT amounts or taxable amounts (depending on the Update with option selected) of the VAT for which the appropriate Output and Input groups are specified. This rule can be also defined only for the Output type groups and for the Input type groups. If it is defined for the Input type groups, the line will contain the amount with the minus sign.

  • Input – output

: The difference between the VAT amounts or taxable amounts (depending on the Update with option selected) of the tax for which the appropriate Input and Output groups are specified. It can be also defined only for the Input type groups and for the Output type groups. If it is defined for the Output type groups, the line will contain the amount with the minus sign.
Reporting settings (TX205100) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100 page In this window, you can configure the elements of a VAT report that are required to set up the accumulation of the appropriate VAT and taxable amounts in the VAT report. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reporting settings (TX205100) In this window, you can configure the elements of a VAT report that are required to set up the accumulation of the appropriate VAT and taxable amounts in the VAT report. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can configure the elements of a VAT report that are required to set up the accumulation of the appropriate VAT and taxable amounts in the VAT report. Do the configuration as follows: 1. On the **Report lines** tab, configure the required report lines. The VAT report is represented as a table in Visma Net, so you should create the required number of rows, referred to as **report lines** in Visma Net, in which the appropriate values (VAT or taxable amounts) will be recorded. > [!NOTE] > In the original VAT report window, the report lines are represented as fields that should be filled with appropriate amounts manually. 1. On the **Reporting groups** tab, create the required reporting groups. A reporting group is an entity that will act as a link between a particular VAT and particular lines of the VAT report. To each reporting group, you will later add the appropriate report lines in the [Reporting groups (TX205200)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-groups-tx205200/) window, and then assign each reporting group to the appropriate VAT in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. Thus, VAT and taxable amounts calculated in documents based on a particular VAT will be recorded by the system "on the fly" to the appropriate lines of the VAT report. You need to create at least one output reporting group for the VAT to be paid to the tax agency, and at least one input reporting group for the VAT to be claimed from the tax agency. For details, see: [About VAT report configuration](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/configure-vat-reports/about-vat-report-configuration/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Reload VAT zones

Initiates the process of regenerating the lines itemised by VAT zones in the VAT report.

Use this functionality if you have created new VAT zones after configuring a VAT report with the lines detailed by VAT zone. As a result, the report lines for newly created VAT zones will be added to the VAT report.

Note

Use this operation if you have configured the report with lines itemised by VAT zones (that is, if the Detail by VAT zones check box is selected for any line in the table).
## The top part In this area, select the tax agency for which you want to configure or modify the VAT report. In Visma Net, tax agencies or authorities are defined as suppliers.
Element Description
Tax agency The tax agency for which you want to configure or modify the VAT report. The default tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Show VAT zones

A check box that you select to view the VAT zones included in the VAT report.

The VAT zones are shown only if the Detail by VAT zones check box is selected for a required report line.

If you have created new VAT zones after configuring a VAT report with the lines detailed by VAT zone, you need to regenerate the lines in the VAT report by using the Reload VAT zones button. Otherwise, the newly created VAT zones will not be added to the configured VAT report.
## The Report lines tab This tab lists the report lines configured for the VAT report and their settings.
Column Description
Report line The number representing the order of the report line. These system-generated numbers are assigned as you add new lines.
Description A detailed description of the report line. This can be an alphanumeric string of up to 60 characters.
Update with An indicator of whether the amount that will be used to update the line is a VAT amount or Taxable amount.
Update rule

The rule of updating the report line. Two options are available:

  • Output – Input

: The difference between the VAT amounts or taxable amounts (depending on the Update with option selected) of the VAT for which the appropriate Output and Input groups are specified. This rule can also be defined only for Output and Input groups. If it is defined for groups with the Input type, the line will contain an amount with the minus sign (that is, a negative amount).

  • Input – Output

: The difference between the VAT amounts or taxable amounts (depending on the Update with option selected) of the VAT for which the appropriate Input and Output groups are specified. It can also be defined only for Input and Output type groups. If it is defined for groups with the Output type, the line will contain an amount with the minus sign (that is, a negative amount).
VAT zone ID

The VAT zone that includes the list of taxes.

Only the VAT or taxable amounts calculated based on the taxes included in the selected VAT zone will be accumulated in this line.
Detail by VAT zones

A check box that initiates (if selected) the process of generating the report lines itemised by the VAT zones.

That is, the line in which this check box is selected will be split into multiple lines for each VAT zone created in the system. Later, when you prepare the VAT report in the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window, the appropriate VAT or taxable amount will be split by VAT zones and shown in separate lines.

You can view the lines detailed by VAT zone by selecting the Show VAT zones check box in the selection area of this window.
Net VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line shows the net VAT amount.

Only one line for each report can be selected as containing the net amount. If no report line is specified as the net VAT, no invoice will be generated upon release of the VAT report. VAT adjustment amounts entered for the open VAT period adjust the net VAT.
Hide report line A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line will not be included in the VAT report during its generation.
VAT field number The number of the corresponding field of the original report window.
Calculate rule

The numbers of the report lines whose amounts will be used for calculating the amount in this line.

This field is filled in by the system automatically if it is an aggregate line and the appropriate settings are specified.
## The Reporting groups tab On this tab, you can create reporting groups for accumulating input and output VAT amounts for various taxes to be included in the VAT report. When the reporting groups are created, associate them with the specific taxes in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window.
Button Description
Group Details Opens the Reporting groups (TX205200) window for the selected group where you can edit the group settings.
Column Description
Name The name of the reporting group or a description. An alphanumeric string of up to 60 characters may be used.
Group type The type of the reporting group, Input or Output.
VAT (TX205000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000 page You use this window to define all the VAT rates related to your business. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT (TX205000) You use this window to define all the VAT rates related to your business. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to define all the VAT rates related to your business. Each VAT rate is reported to a specific tax agency and is paid to or claimed from the agency. For details, see: [About VAT settings](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/manage-taxes/about-vat-settings/). The definition of the VAT includes such settings as the following: + The VAT rate used to calculate the VAT amount + The method of VAT amount calculation + The date when the VAT becomes effective or after which the VAT is not valid + The general ledger accounts to which the calculated VAT amounts should be posted On the tabs in this window, you can view VAT categories and VAT zones that include the VAT, and easily exclude a particular VAT from VAT categories or zones. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The VAT settings tab On this tab, you can select a VAT to view its details, or you can create a new VAT.
Element Description
VAT ID

The unique ID of the VAT.

You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters.
Description

A detailed description of the VAT.

You can use an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters.
VAT type

The type of VAT.

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
Partially deductible VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a deductible value-added VAT.

You configure this type of the VAT if your company is allowed to deduct some part of the VAT paid to a supplier from your own VAT liability to the government.

This check box is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Reverse VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.

A reverse VAT is a type of VAT used in some countries of the European Union (EU).

When this type of VAT is applied to a company that supplies goods or services to other EU countries, the liability of the reporting VAT is reversed and goes to the customer rather than to the supplier.

This check box is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Statistical VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the VAT on documents will be calculated only for statistical purposes or will be reported only but not actually paid.

This check box is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Pending VAT

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the VAT that should be calculated in documents, but should not be recorded to the VAT report until the VAT invoice is received.

Later the VAT of the pending type can be converted into a general VAT in the Recognise input VAT (TX503500) or the Recognise output VAT (TX503000) windows.

This check box is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Enter from VAT invoice

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT should be calculated for documents only if the documents are added to a VAT invoice or VAT adjustment.

VAT invoices and adjustments are created in the VAT invoices and adjustments (TX303000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Include in VAT exempt total

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this value-added VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.

The calculated amount will be displayed in the VAT exempt total field in the documents (such as invoices).

This check box is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Include in VAT taxable total

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the VAT taxable amount should appear in the VAT taxable total field in the documents (such as invoices).

Note

If a document contains multiple transactions (lines) with different taxes applied on each line and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total box of the document.

Clear this check box if you do not want the system to insert the taxable amount calculated based on this VAT into the VAT taxable total field of the documents.

This check box is available only if the VAT reporting check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Calculate on

The method of calculating the tax amount, which is one of the following options:

Extract from item amount
The VAT amount is included in item amounts and will be extracted from the item amount.
Item amount
The VAT amount is not included in item amounts and will be added to the tax amount as first-level VAT.
Item and VAT amount
This VAT is a second-level VAT calculated on item amounts and the amounts of the first-level taxes.
Document amount
This VAT is a first-level VAT calculated on the document amount, not on a per-line basis. This VAT is calculated on the sum of line amounts of all the items with the same VAT applicable).
Document and VAT amount
This VAT is a second-level VAT calculated on the document amount and the amount of the first-level VAT.

The second-level will not include VAT amount for VAT ID’s that has the settings Exclude from VAT on VAT.
Cash discount

The method of calculating the tax base amount if a cash discount is applied. One of the following options can be selected:

  • Reduces VAT amount: The taxable amount is decreased by the cash discount. The VAT amount is calculated on the document total amount minus the cash discount.

  • Does not affect VAT amount (default option): VAT is calculated on the document total whether the cash discount is applicable or not.

  • Reduces VAT amount on early payment: The system will adjust the taxable amount (by using the credit note) if the final payment has been received within the cash discount period (that is, before the Cash discount date specified in the invoice). For details, see: About VAT calculated for documents with cash discounts.

    Note

    This option is available for a VAT type of tax only (that is, a tax for which the VAT option is selected in the VAT type field).
Exclude from VAT on VAT calculation

A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a first-level VAT.

With this check box selected, for calculating the second-level VAT amount in a document, the system uses the same tax base (taxable amount) that was used for calculating the first-level VAT amount. That is, the system excludes the first-level VAT amount from the tax base used for calculating the second-level tax amount.

If this check box is cleared, the system uses the first-level taxable amount plus the first-level VAT amount as the tax base for calculating the second-level VAT amount.

For details, see: About VAT settings.
Tax agency

The name of the tax agency to receive the VAT.

In Visma Net, tax agencies (as well other taxing authorities) are defined as suppliers. Select a supplier account from the list of accounts that are tax agencies, or leave the field blank.
Not valid after The date after which the VAT is not effective.
EU report code

The EU reporting code for the VAT.

  • Sales of goods
  • Triangulation
  • Sales of services

Only used in the Intrastat report.
Default non-stock item

The default non-stock item for the VAT ID.

Only used in the AutoReport integration.
PEPPOL VAT category

Only used in PEPPOL export/import.

AE
Vat Reverse Charge Code specifying that the standard VAT rate is levied from the invoice.
E
Exempt from Tax Code specifying that taxes are not applicable.
G
Free export item, VAT not charged Code specifying that the item is free export and taxes are not charged.
K
VAT exempt for EEA intra-community supply of goods and services A tax category code indicating the item is VAT exempt due to an intra-community supply in the European Economic Area.
L
the Canary Islands general indirect tax The Impuesto General Indirecto Canario (IGIC) is an indirect tax levied on goods and services supplied in the Canary Islands (Spain) by traders and professionals, as well as on import of goods.
M
The Impuesto General Indirecto Canario (IGIC) is an indirect tax levied on goods and services supplied in the Canary Islands (Spain) by traders and professionals, as well as on import of goods. The Impuesto sobre la Producción, los Servicios y la Importación (IPSI) is an indirect municipal tax, levied on the production, processing and import of all kinds of movable tangible property, the supply of services and the transfer of immovable property located in the cities of Ceuta and Melilla.
O
Services outside the scope of tax Code specifying that taxes are not applicable to the services.
S
Standard rate Code specifying the standard rate.
Z
Zero-rated goods Code specifying that the goods are at a zero rate.
Visma XML VAT type

The VAT type to be used in Visma XML files when exporting to AutoInvoice.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
## The General ledger accounts tab You use this tab to specify the accounts to be used for this VAT.
Element Description
VAT payable account

The liability account that accumulates the VAT amounts to be paid to a tax agency for the VAT reporting period.

By default, the account is associated with the tax agency but can be overwritten.

Mandatory for all VAT types.
VAT payable subaccount

The corresponding VAT payable subaccount.

This check box is available only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Mandatory for all VAT types.
VAT claimable account

The account that accumulates the VAT amounts to be claimed from the tax agency for the VAT reporting period.

By default, the account is the one associated with the tax agency, but the default account can be overwritten.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
VAT claimable subaccount

The corresponding tax claimable subaccount.

This check box is available only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
Use VAT expense account

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the VAT expense account field (and the VAT expense subaccount field, if applicable) is available for editing. In these fields, you specify the expense account (and subaccount, if applicable) to which the system will record the non-deductible VAT amounts.

If this check box is cleared, the VAT expense account field (and the VAT expense subaccount field, if applicable) is not available, and the non-deductible VAT amounts are recorded by the system to the expense account specified in the document.

This check box is available only if the Partially deductible VAT check box is selected for a tax of the VAT type on the VAT settings tab.

Only available for VAT type VAT.
VAT expense account

The expense account that is used to record either the VAT amounts of the Use VAT or the non-deductible VAT amounts of the deductible value-added tax.

For the deductible VAT, this field is available for editing only if the Use VAT expense account check box is selected.

Only available for VAT types: VAT and Use.
VAT expense subaccount

The corresponding expense subaccount.

This check box is available only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT types: VAT and Use.
Pending VAT payable account

The liability account that accumulates the amount of taxes to be paid to a tax agency for the pending VAT.

Only available for VAT type VAT and when the Pending VAT check box is selected.
Pending VAT payable subaccount

The corresponding tax payable pending subaccount.

This check box is available only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT and when the Pending VAT check box is selected.
Pending VAT claimable account

The account that accumulates VAT amounts to be claimed from the tax agency for the pending VAT.

Only available for VAT type VAT and when the Pending VAT check box is selected.
Pending VAT claimable subaccount

The corresponding VAT claimable pending subaccount.

This check box is available only if the Subaccounts check box is selected and enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Only available for VAT type VAT and when the Pending VAT check box is selected.
## The VAT schedule tab This tab contains information about the schedule of the VAT, as well as its rate, minimum and maximum taxable amount, and reporting group.
Column Description
Start date

The date when the VAT at the rate in the current row becomes effective.

If the rate for the VAT changes in the future, add a row to this table and specify a start date for a new rate.
VAT rate The VAT rate (%) that is used to calculate the VAT amount.
Deductible VAT rate

The VAT rate (%) that is used to calculate the amount deductible from the output VAT.

This column appears only if the Deductible VAT check box is selected for the VAT.
Min. taxable amount

The minimum taxable amount for which this rate is applicable.

No minimum will be set if you type 0.
Max. taxable amount

The maximum taxable amount for which this rate applies.

No maximum will be set if you type 0.

If both minimum and maximum amounts (greater than 0) are set, the maximum amount should be greater than the minimum amount.
Reporting group

The reporting group for the VAT.

The reporting groups available for selection are defined for the tax agency in the Reporting settings (TX205100) window.

If no tax agency is specified for the VAT, you can select from the default input or default output reporting groups.
Group type The type of the reporting group.
## The Categories tab This tab displays the VAT categories in which the VAT is included.
Column Description
VAT category The VAT code in which the VAT is included.
Exclude listed taxes A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT should be excluded from calculation when used with the specified category.
Description The detailed description of the VAT category.
## The Zones tab This tab has a table showing the VAT zones that include the VAT.
Column Description
VAT zone ID A VAT zone that includes the VAT.
Default VAT category The default VAT category assigned to the VAT zone.
Description The detailed description of the VAT zone.
## The Document text tab This tab has a table showing the document text. These are texts that are printed on documents or exported to AutoInvoice and the SAF-T reports (Partly deductable).
Column Description
Language

The localised reports will follow the language of the document text from this window.

For example, the Finnish invoice form will take the language fi-FI from the document text.

The reports that are not localised will take the language from the Document language field on the General information tab in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Document text This field is where you enter your document text for your report.
Electronic text

The electronic text used when invoices are sent to AutoInvoice.

If this field is empty, the text in the Document text field will be used.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

 VAT account control details (TX40400S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-account-control-details-tx40400s page This window shows a summary per account of all general ledger transactions with VAT information for each account that has a link to a document containing VAT. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT account control details (TX40400S) This window shows a summary per account of all general ledger transactions with VAT information for each account that has a link to a document containing VAT. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Note! If you have selected the **Post summary when updating the general ledger** check box on the **General information** tab in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) or the [Inventory preferences (IN101000](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) windows, the VAT information will be missing because the general ledger transactions are missing the link to the original document line containing the VAT information. ## The top part
Element Description
Company The company whose general ledger transactions belong to. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Branch

The branch whose general ledger transactions belongs to. You will only see branches for the selected Company.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Tax agency The tax agency the transactions are reported to. The suggested tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Reporting period

The reporting period for which you want to view VAT account control details. You only see closed and prepared periods here.

When filled out, the From and To period will be filled out with the corresponding periods based on the reporting periods’ start and end date. The Include transactions without VAT period check box will become enabled.
From period The start of the period range for which you want to view VAT account control details. This column in mandatory.
To period The end of the period range for which you want to view VAT account control details. This column in mandatory.
Type

Select one of the following types:

  • Asset
  • Liability
  • Income
  • Expense
General ledger account no. In the field, select a specific Account.
VAT ID Select a specific VAT ID
Transaction type Select a specific transaction type, for example, Sales invoices, Purchase invoices etc.
Include transactions without VAT period If this check box becomes available once you enter a reporting period. If this check box is selected, the transactions that are not processed by the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) and the Process VAT report (TX502000) windows are shown.
Include unposted transactions If this check box is selected, the unreleased transactions will be included.
Show only VAT deviations If this check box is selected, only the transactions where VAT rate and calculated VAT rate are different will show
### The Total amount section
Element Description
Posted amount debit Posted amount debit for selected transactions
Posted amount credit Posted amount credit for selected transactions
Taxable amount The taxable amount for selected transactions
VAT amount The calculated VAT rate for selected transactions.
VAT rate % The VAT rate from the VAT ID.
## The table This table lists the reporting lines with the amounts for the period.
Column Description
Branch ID The Branch ID is only visible if the Multi-branch support check box is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Transaction type The transaction type, such as Invoice, Credit note, Payment and so forth.
Account The account number.
Transaction description A description of the transaction or any comments relevant to the transaction.
VAT account If the account is a VAT account, then this is checked.
Posted amount debit The posted amount debit.
Posted amount credit The posted amount debit.
Taxable amount The taxable amount in currency.
Currency The currency for the transaction.
Exchange rate The exchange rate for the transaction.
Posted debit amount in currency The posted amount debit in currency.
Posted credit amount in currency The posted amount credit in currency.
Taxable amount The taxable amount in currency.
VAT ID The VAT ID for the transaction.
Trans. date The transaction date.
VAT category ID The VAT category for the transaction.
VAT rate % The VAT rate for the VAT ID.
Posted VAT amount The posted VAT amount for the transactions
Calculated VAT rate (%) This calculates the VAT rate based on the Taxable amount and the VAT amount.
Ref. no. The document number or the voucher number for the transaction.
Batch no. The batch number for posting.
VAT supplier ID The tax agency supplier.
Reporting group The VAT reporting group where it appears in the VAT report.
Reporting group name The VAT reporting group name.
VAT zone ID The VAT zone of the transaction.
Revision ID The revision ID of the VAT report.
Deductible VAT rate Shows the deductible VAT rate. Normally it is 100%, but if the rate has partly deductible rate this will show the rate that is base for the Taxable amount.
Expense amount Shows the deductible VAT rate. Normally it is 100%, but if the rate has partly deductible rate this will show the rate that is base for the Taxable amount.
Original VAT amount This show the VAT amount for the whole document for this VAT ID.
Post period The posted period.
Posted Status for posted.
Released Status for released.
Subaccount The subaccount for the transaction.
Sum post The status if the post is a sum post, as the supplier or supplier accounts.
Trans. class

The transaction classes:

  • N = Normal
  • T = Tax
Trans. period The transaction period.
VAT period ID The VAT reporting period.
Workspace The origin workspace of the transaction.
Parent topic: [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) VAT account control summary (TX40300S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-account-control-summary-tx40300s page This window shows a summary per account of all general ledger transactions with VAT information for each account that has a link to a document containing VAT. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT account control summary (TX40300S) This window shows a summary per account of all general ledger transactions with VAT information for each account that has a link to a document containing VAT. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. Note! If you have selected the **Post summary when updating the general ledger** check box on the **General information** tab in the [Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/supplier-ledger-preferences-ap101000/), the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) or the [Inventory preferences (IN101000](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) windows, the VAT information will be missing because the general ledger transactions are missing the link to the original document line containing the VAT information. The top part is used to filter transactions. ## The top part
Element Description
Company

The company to whose general ledger the transactions belong.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch

The branch to whose general ledger the transactions belong. You will only see branches for the selected company.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support check box is selected the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Tax agency The tax agency to which the transactions are reported. The suggested tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Reporting period The VAT period from which the transactions are reported. You only see closed and prepared period here.
From period The financial period from which the transactions are posted.
To period The financial period until which the transactions are posted.
General ledger account no. Select a specific account.
VAT ID Select a specific VAT ID.
Transaction type From the drop-down, you select a specific transaction type, for example, Sales invoices, Purchase invoices etc.
Include transactions without VAT period If this check box is selected, the transactions that are not processed by the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) and the Process VAT report (TX502000) windows are shown.
Include unposted transactions If this check box is selected, the unreleased transactions will be included.
Show only VAT deviations If this check box is selected, only the transactions where the VAT rate and the calculated VAT rate are different will show.
### The Total amount section
Element Description
Posted amount debit The posted amount debit for selected transactions.
Posted amount credit The posted amount credit for selected transactions.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for selected transactions.
VAT amount The calculated VAT rate for selected transactions.
VAT rate % The VAT rate from the VAT ID.
## The table This table lists the reporting lines with the amounts for the period.
Column Description
Branch ID The Branch ID is only visible if the Multi-branch support check box is selected in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Transaction type The transaction type, such as Invoice, Credit note, Payment and so forth.
Account The account number.
Description The description from the transactions.
VAT account If the account is the VAT account then this is checked.
Posted amount debit The posted amount debit.
Posted amount credit The posted amount debit.
Taxable amount The taxable amount.
VAT ID The VAT ID for the transactions.
VAT category ID The VAT category for the transactions.
VAT rate % The VAT rate for the VAT ID.
Posted VAT amount The VAT rate for the VAT ID.
Calculated VAT rate (%) This calculates the VAT rate based on the taxable amount and VAT amount.
Post period The posted period.
Trans. period The transaction period based on the document date.
VAT period ID The VAT period the transaction was reported.
Deductible VAT rate Shows the deductible VAT rate. Normally it is 100%, but if the rate has partly deductible rate this will show the rate that is base for the taxable amount.
Expense amount Shows the deductible VAT rate. Normally it is 100%, but if the rate has partly deductible rate this will show the rate that is base for the taxable amount.
Workspace The workspace the transactions are created from.
Original VAT amount This show the VAT amount for the whole document for this VAT ID.
Parent topic: [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) VAT adjustments (TX301000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-adjustments-tx301000 page You can use this window to create a VAT adjustment document that will adjust the required VAT and taxable amounts in the prepared VAT report for the selected tax agency and selected VAT reporting period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT adjustments (TX301000) You can use this window to create a VAT adjustment document that will adjust the required VAT and taxable amounts in the prepared VAT report for the selected tax agency and selected VAT reporting period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create a VAT adjustment document that will adjust the required VAT and taxable amounts in the prepared VAT report for the selected tax agency and selected VAT reporting period. The adjustment amount will decrease or increase the amounts of the appropriate report lines as well as the amount of the report line selected as the **Net VAT** in the [Reporting settings (TX205100)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/reporting-settings-tx205100/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Release Releases the VAT adjustment and generates a batch of transactions.
Reverse Reverses the VAT adjustment, and the reversal transactions are generated for all released transactions associated with this VAT adjustment and posted to the same book as the original VAT adjustment.
## The top part Here, you can specify the VAT period, tax agency, and type for a new VAT adjustment. Also, you can select an existing VAT adjustment by its reference number and view its details.
Element Description
Type

The type of tax adjustment document that can be one of the following:

Adjust VAT on sales
The document that adjusts VAT and taxable amounts of the VAT associated with the input reporting group (the VAT amount that can be claimed from the tax agency).
Adjust VAT on purchases
The document that adjusts VAT and taxable amounts of the VAT associated with the output reporting group (the VAT amount that must be paid to the tax agency).
Ref. no.

The unique ID used for the VAT adjustment.

The system generates this number according to the numbering series assigned to the supplier invoices in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Status The status of the VAT adjustment.
Hold When selected, this adjustment has the status On hold and cannot be released.
Company The company branch associated with the VAT adjustment.
Branch The branch associated with the VAT adjustment.
Tax agency The ID and name of the tax agency for which the VAT report is intended. Select a tax agency from the list of agencies available in the system. The suggested tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
reporting period The VAT reporting period to which the VAT adjustment is posted. Only open VAT periods are available for selection.
Date

The date of the VAT adjustment document.

The system inserts an appropriate date by default depending on the Use period end date to report VAT check box setting specified for the selected tax agency on the Tax agency settings tab of the Suppliers (AP303000) window:

  • If the Use period end date to report VAT check box is cleared, the end date of the VAT period (that you specify in this window) will be used.
  • If the Use period end date to report VAT check box is selected, the end date of the last financial period covered by the VAT period (that you select in this window) is used. Note that if this date is later than the end date of the selected VAT period, the current system business date will be used.
Description A detailed description for the VAT adjustment. An alphanumeric string of up to 60 characters.
Currency The currency of the adjustment.
View base

If you use foreign currency, it is possible to view the amounts in your base currency or local currency:

Click View base and the amounts will be converted to your base currency and the text will be displayed as your base currency.

Click View currency to return to the original view.
Balance A read-only field that displays the adjustment control amount, which should be equal to both the total amount and the sum of VAT amounts calculated for the list.
Amount The total amount of all taxes listed in the adjustment.
## The Document details tab On this tab, you can create a list of VAT details for the new VAT adjustment or view the VAT details of an existing VAT adjustment.
Column Description
VAT ID The VAT to be affected by the adjustment.
VAT rate The rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The amount used as the base for VAT calculation.
VAT amount The VAT amount calculated for the specified taxable amount or entered manually.
VAT zone The VAT zone of the VAT to be adjusted.
Account

The account correlated with the VAT.

For a VAT-increasing adjustment, by default, the account is the VAT payable account specified for the VAT. For a VAT-decreasing adjustment, by default, the account is the VAT claimable account specified for the VAT. You can select another account if needed.
Sub. ID The corresponding subaccount.
Description The description of the VAT adjustment reason for a particular line of the VAT adjustment document.
## The Financial details tab On this tab, you can take the following actions: + For a new VAT adjustment, select an expense account to record the adjustment. + For an existing VAT adjustment, view the batch that contains the required transactions.
Element Description
Batch no. The number of the batch generated on the adjustment release to implement the adjustment transactions.
Post period The financial period when the adjustment document was posted.
Adjustment account

The expense account where the adjustment is recorded.

By default, it is the tax agency supplier expense account. You can select another account if needed.
Subaccount adjustments The corresponding subaccount.
Orig. ref. no. If an adjustment is reversed this column contains the Ref. no which it was reversed from.
VAT categories (TX205500) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-categories-tx205500 page You can use this window to create VAT categories, or to view or edit existing VAT categories. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT categories (TX205500) You can use this window to create VAT categories, or to view or edit existing VAT categories. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to create VAT categories, or to view or edit existing VAT categories. A VAT category groups the taxes that are applied to products or services of the same type. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Here, you can specify an identifier and description for a new VAT category, or select an existing category to view or edit its details.
Element Description
VAT category ID The unique ID of the VAT category. An alphanumeric string of up to six characters.
Description A detailed description of the category.
Active When selected, this VAT category is active.
Exclude listed taxes When selected, this VAT category should exclude the listed taxes from VAT zones.
Standard VAT code The standard VAT code to be used on documents.
VAT type

The type of VAT, which defines how it is processed.

The following options are available: Sales, Purchase, and Both.
## The table This table contains the list of individual taxes for the VAT category. These taxes are generally included unless the **Exclude listed taxes** check box is selected for the category.
Column Description
VAT ID

The ID of the VAT included in the category.

Once you select a VAT by its ID, the other columns of the row are filled in.
Description The detailed description of the VAT item.
VAT type

The type of VAT, which defines how it is processed.

The following options are available: Sales, Purchase, and Both.
Calculate on

The way the VAT amount is calculated, which can be one of the following:

Extract from item amount
The VAT amount is included in item amounts and should be extracted.
Document amount
This is a first-level VAT calculated on the document amount, not on a per-item basis.
Document and VAT amount
This is a second-level VAT calculated on the document amount and the amount of the first-level VAT.
Cash discount

The method of calculating the taxable amount if a discount is applied (based on the payment terms). It can be one of the following:

Reduces VAT amount
The discount is taken on the total amount calculated for the document. The VAT amount is decreased by the discount.
Does not affect VAT amount
The discount is taken on the document total, but the VAT is also calculated on the document total. The VAT amount is not affected by the discount.
VAT invoices and adjustments (TX303000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-invoices-and-adjustments-tx303000 page You can use this window to enter VAT invoices or VAT adjustments. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT invoices and adjustments (TX303000) You can use this window to enter VAT invoices or VAT adjustments. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to enter VAT invoices or VAT adjustments. Documents of these types are used for VAT that are paid directly to tax agencies or other suppliers that are authorised to collect specific taxes, such as custom duties on imported goods. You can apply only the taxes with the **Enter from VAT invoice** check box selected in the [VAT (TX205000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/) window. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Pre-book Pre-books the invoice.
Release Releases the VAT invoice or VAT adjustment and generates a batch of transactions.
Correct invoice Click this to correct the selected invoice.
Send to Approval Sends the invoice to Approval for approval.
Show files Shows the files attached to the invoice.
Add attachment Click to add an attachment to the invoice.
View details Shows the details of the invoice.
Update lines Updates the lines of the invoice.
Undo split line Undoes all actions done by pressing Split line button. The row is deleted and the extended cost is added to the original row. This way the document is always balanced. In case of multiple lines split, the undo action will always add the row selected for undo to the parent and the rest of the rows will change their hierarchy one level up.
Split line Creates an additional row (child) linked to the original row (parent). You can also split an additional row created, so a child can become parent for another child/children.
## The top part By using the elements in this area, you can specify various information about a new VAT invoice or adjustment, such as the date, the post period, the supplier number of the taxing authority, and the currency of taxes (if it is different from the base currency). Also, you can select an existing tax invoice or adjustment by its reference number and view its details.
Element Description
Type

The type of VAT document.

The following options are available: Purchase invoice, Credit adjustment, or Purchases credit note.
Invoice no.

The unique ID assigned to the tax invoice or VAT adjustment.

The system generates this number according to the numbering series assigned to the supplier invoices in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Document status The status of the VAT document.
Hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT document has a status of On hold and cannot be released.
Date The date of the VAT document.
Post period A financial period to post the VAT document.
Supplier ref. The reference number assigned to the document by the supplier (taxing authority).
Supplier The ID of the taxing authority (the tax agency or other supplier authorised to collect specific taxes).
Location The location of the supplier associated with the VAT document.
Currency The currency of the VAT document.
Terms The terms used in relations with the supplier that is the taxing authority.
Due date The due date of the document according to the terms.
Cash disc. date The last date when a cash discount is available according to the terms.
Description A detailed description for the VAT invoice or VAT adjustment. An alphanumeric string of up to 60 characters may be used.
VAT total The total VAT amount to be paid.
Balance The balance of the document after payment application.
Cash discount The cash discount amount available for this document.
## The Apply VAT to tab By using this tab, you can select invoices and adjustments to apply specific taxes to these documents. To add documents to the list, click **Add documents** in the table toolbar and select a VAT, and the system displays the documents to which the VAT can be applied. Only documents with no such VAT applied are available for selection. If you have to create a VAT adjustment and include the documents for which this VAT had already been calculated, you must manually enter each document's reference number.
Button Description
Add documents Opens the Add documents dialog box, which you use to select a tax and to view (and, optionally, select) the documents to which the tax can be applied.
Column Description
Orig. trans. type The type of the document added to the VAT invoice or adjustment.
Orig. doc. number The reference number of the original document.
VAT ID The VAT to be applied to the document.
VAT rate The rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The amount used as a base for VAT calculation.
VAT amount The VAT amount that has been calculated for the specified taxable amount or entered manually.
VAT zone The VAT zone of the supplier.
Account The account associated with the VAT.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
The Add documents dialog box
Element / Button Description
VAT ID The VAT to be applied to the documents.
Supplier The supplier from which the purchases are subjected to the VAT; leave the field blank to view documents related to various suppliers.
Supplier ref. The particular document, by the reference number the supplier assigned to it.
From date The date that starts the date range.
Date to The date that ends the date range.
Columns Description
Type

The type of tax document.

The following options are available: Purchase invoice, Credit adjustment, or Purchases credit note.
Invoice no.

The unique ID assigned to the document.

The system generates this number according to the numbering sequence assigned to the supplier invoices in the Supplier ledger preferences (AP101000) window.
Supplier ref. The reference number assigned to the document by the supplier.
Date The date of the document.
Supplier The ID of the supplier.
Supplier name The name of the supplier.
Location The location of the supplier associated with the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Amount The amount of the document.
Balance The balance of the document after payment application.
Due date The due date of the document according to the terms.
Description A detailed description for the document. An alphanumeric string of up to 60 characters may be used.
Add (button) Adds the selected documents to the list on the Apply VAT to tab and keeps the dialog box open so you can select more documents.
Add and close (button) Adds the selected documents to the list on the Apply VAT to tab and closes the dialog box.
Cancel (button) Closes the dialog box without adding the selected documents.
## The Financial details tab On this tab, you can enter or view the financial details of the tax document. The Link to general ledger section
Element Description
Batch no. The number of the batch generated on the VAT document.
Branch The branch associated with the VAT invoice or adjustment.
Supplier account The supplier account of the supplier that is the taxing authority.
Supplier subaccount The corresponding subaccount.
The Payment information section
Element Description
Approved for payment A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT document was approved for payment.
Payment date The pay date for this document, as assigned during approval.
Payment location The location of the tax agency.
Payment method The payment method to be used to pay for this VAT document.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
## The Applications tab This tab shows you the payments that were applied to the VAT document.
Button Description
Apply automatically Performs the application of the appropriate payments, if there are any.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of the payment document.
Reference no.

The number of the payment document.

If you click this number, the Customer payments (AR302000) window opens, in which you can view the details of the payment.
Amount paid The amount paid for the VAT document on the payment document.
Payment date The date of the payment document.
Balance The balance of the payment document.
Description The description provided for the payment document.
Currency The currency of the payment document.
Period The financial period to post the payment.
Payment ref. The payment reference number.
Status The status of the payment document.
VAT periods (TX207000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-periods-tx207000 page In this window, you can configure a tax year structure for each particular combination of the company (branch) and tax agency, review VAT periods and their statuses for the current and past tax years, view net VAT amounts for prepared and closed periods, and shorten the duration of a tax year. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT periods (TX207000) In this window, you can configure a tax year structure for each particular combination of the company (branch) and tax agency, review VAT periods and their statuses for the current and past tax years, view net VAT amounts for prepared and closed periods, and shorten the duration of a tax year. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Element Description
Actions

Provides the following menu commands:

Prepare VAT report
Opens the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window, in which you can prepare a VAT report for the selected branch and tax agency.
Release VAT report
Opens the Process VAT report (TX502000) window, in which you can release a VAT report prepared for the selected branch and tax agency.
Reopen VAT period
Reopens the selected VAT period. This will set the VAT period to Prepared and you can void or make adjustments to the report. The tax agency invoice previously created will not be reversed, a new invoice will be created when closing the period again unless you turn this functionality off on the tax agency temporarily. The report has to be sent to the tax authority again. Note: It is only possible to reopen a closed period. If the financial accounting year for the selected VAT period is closed, you cannot reopen the period and you will receive the message: The accounting year YYYY is closed for VAT period PP-YYYY. The VAT period can not be reopened. If you have any prepared VAT periods, you cannot reopen any periods and you receive the message: VAT period 03-2022 is prepared. The VAT period 02-2022 can not be reopened. If the VAT period is open, you will receive the message: Only closed VAT periods can be reopened.
Reports

Provides the following menu commands, which you can click for fast access to reports:

VAT summary
Navigates to the VAT summary (TX62100S) report for the selected branch, tax agency, and VAT period.
VAT details
Navigates to the VAT details (TX62051S) report for the selected branch, tax agency, and VAT period.
## The top part In the top part, you can select a branch, a tax agency, and various tax year settings to configure a tax year structure.
Element Description
Company The company for which VAT periods are shown in the table (in respect of the selected tax agency).
Tax agency The tax agency for which VAT periods are shown in the table (in respect of the selected branch). Select a tax agency from the list of agencies available in the system. The suggested tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Tax year

The tax year for which VAT periods are displayed in the table, which you select from the list of the years available for the selected branch and tax agency. By default, the current tax year is selected.

If no tax years exist in the system for the selected branch and tax agency, by default, the system uses the tax year of the earliest taxable document. If no tax year and no taxable documents exist, the system uses the year of the current business date.
Short tax year

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the tax year is short. By default, this check box is cleared.

If this check box is selected, the Delete period and Add period buttons become available in the table toolbar. This check box is available only if all VAT periods of the tax year have the Open status.
Start date

The first day of the tax year selected in the Tax year field.

This date is available for editing only if there are no tax years in the system for the selected branch and tax agency. Otherwise, it is an informational setting.
VAT period type

The VAT period type, which defines the VAT period duration for the selected tax year. If you change the type of VAT period in this field and save your changes, the system updates the list of VAT periods in the table.

This setting is available for editing only if all of the periods of the selected tax year have the Open status.

Note

If you change the VAT period type for a short tax year, the system will restore the length of the tax year to a full calendar year and will clear the Short tax year check box. If you need to change the VAT period type when some periods have been processed, select the Change tax report type check box.
Change VAT period type

A check box which makes it possible to change the VAT period type.

If the check box is selected, the VAT period type will be available and you can change to a different type, and the VAT periods will be recalculated for the open periods.

Changing from quarterly to monthly will change all the open quarters to monthly.

Changing from monthly to quarterly will change the open months 3 by 3 so if you have closed/prepared period 04 April you will have period 05 May and 06 June then 07 as July to September and 08 as October to December.

Note: If the remaining periods are less than wanted type, you can not change the type and you will get the error Remaining open periods does not match the VAT period type. Your selected type will be deleted. If you have created the next VAT year, this will be deleted so you can create it with the new settings. You will receive the message: Because the end date of the tax year has been changed, the subsequent tax years will be deleted. Please review and modify the next tax year settings if required.
EC sales list reporting period

The EC sales list reporting period defined on the tax agency in the Suppliers (AP303000) window.

This can be changed here if a different period interval is wanted.
## The table This table contains the list of VAT periods of the selected branch, tax agency, and tax year.
Button Description
+ ( Add period )

In the table, adds a new VAT period after the last one in the table.

This button is available only if the Short tax year check box is selected in the top part of the current window.
x ( Delete period )

In the table, deletes the last period of the year if its status is Open.

This button is available only if the Short tax year check box is selected in the top part of the current window.
Column Description
VAT period The number of the VAT period.
Start date The start date of the VAT period.
End date The end date of the VAT period.
Status The current status of the VAT period.
Net VAT amount The amount accumulated in the line for which the Net VAT check box is selected on the Report lines tab of the Reporting settings (TX205100) window. When you click the amount, the system navigates to the VAT report details (TX502010) window, which displays the data for the selected branch, tax agency, and VAT period.
Unreleased net VAT amount

The not prepared amount accumulated in the line for which the Net VAT check box is selected on the Report lines tab of the Reporting settings (TX205100) window.

When you click the amount, the system navigates to the Prepare VAT report (TX501000) window, where you can view the data for the selected branch, tax agency and VAT period.

Unreleased documents are not included in this amount.
VAT report details (TX502010) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-report-details-tx502010 page You can use this window to view the details of prepared VAT reports for an open or closed VAT period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT report details (TX502010) You can use this window to view the details of prepared VAT reports for an open or closed VAT period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window to view the details of prepared VAT reports for an open or closed VAT period. You can view taxable and VAT amounts by the report line and drill down to the original documents. The resulting amounts are always shown for the last revision of the report if there are multiple revisions. ## The top part In this area, you can select a tax agency and VAT period to view the details of the prepared report.
Element Description
Branch

The branch for which the VAT report has been prepared.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Tax agency The ID and name of the tax agency for which the VAT report is intended. Select a tax agency from the list of agencies available in the system. In Visma Net, tax authorities are defined as suppliers. The suggested tax agency can be defined on the VAT information tab in the Organisations (CS101500) or Branches (CS102000) windows.
Reporting period The reporting period you are interested in.
From Read-only. The start date of the selected period.
To Read-only. The end date of the selected period.
Report line The report line selected by its identifier.
### The Sum selected rows section
Element Description
Taxable amount The summary of Taxable amount for rows being checked as selected in the details.
VAT amount The summary of the VAT amount for rows being checked as selected in the details.
VAT rate The calculated VAT rate based on the Taxable amount and the VAT amount for checked rows.
### The Total sum section
Element Description
Taxable amount The summary of Taxable amount for all rows.
VAT amount The summary of VAT amount for all rows.
VAT rate Calculated VAT rate based on Taxable amount and VAT amount.
## The table This table contains the list of documents that contributed to the report line.
Column Description
Branch The branch in which the document was created.
Module The workspace in which the document was created.
Trans. type The type of document or transaction.
Ref. no. The reference number identifying the document or transaction.
Batch no. The number of the batch of documents.
Trans. date The date of the document or transaction.
VAT ID The ID of the VAT calculated on the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for VAT calculation.
Deductible VAT rate

The percent of deduction that applies to the VAT amount paid to the supplier for specific purchases.

The deducted VAT amount (calculated based on this percent) can be claimed from the tax agency.

Appears if the deductible VAT is applied.
Report taxable amount Taxable amount for the document for selected report line.
Report VAT amount VAT amount for the document for selected report line.
Account ID The business account associated with the transaction, by its ID.
Account name The name of the business account associated with the transaction.
Calculated VAT rate The VAT rate of the document.
Revision ID This is VAT revision. You can run a VAT report, and later you run a new version. Each version gets a new Revision ID. If you have you Revision ID 1, you have only processed once. If you have higher numbers you have processed the VAT report for this period more than once.
VAT zones (TX206000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-zones-tx206000 page In this window, you can create, view, and modify VAT zones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT zones (TX206000) In this window, you can create, view, and modify VAT zones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create, view, and modify VAT zones. A VAT zone combines the VAT rates that are effective in a particular territory. The VAT zones are usually defined according to the locations of the suppliers or customers. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Here, you can specify details for a new VAT zone or view or edit the list of individual VAT rates and post codes.
Element Description
VAT zone ID The unique ID for a zone, which is up to six alphanumeric characters.
Description A more detailed description of the zone.
Default VAT category

Optional.

The default VAT category for the VAT zone. If a VAT category is not defined in the document, the VAT category specified here will be used by default for a VAT zone.
Manual VAT entry Activate this to enable the manual VAT entry mode. To use it, you also need a VAT zone for manual VAT and assign it to a supplier.
## The Applicable VAT tab On this tab, you can create a list of VAT items for a new VAT zone, or you can view and edit this list for an existing zone.
Column Description
VAT ID

The unique ID of the VAT item.

Other columns in the row will display information about the selected VAT.
Description The description of the selected VAT.
VAT type The type of VAT.
Calculate on

The method of calculating the VAT amount, which is one of the following:

Extract from item amount
The VAT amount is included in item amounts and should be extracted.
Item amount
This is a first-level VAT calculated on item amounts.
Item and VAT amount
This is a second-level VAT calculated on item amounts and the amounts of the first-level-taxes.
Document amount
This is a first-level VAT calculated on the document amount, not on a per-item basis.
Document and VAT amount
This is a second-level VAT calculated on the document amount and the amount of the first-level VAT.
Cash discount

The method of calculating the taxable amount if a discount is applied (based on the payment terms), which is one of the following options:

  • Reduces VAT amount: The discount is taken on the total amount calculated for the document. The taxable amount is decreased by the discount.
  • Reduces taxable amount on early payment
  • Does not affect VAT amount (default option): The discount is taken on the document total, but the tax is also calculated on the document total. The taxable amount is not affected by the discount.
## The Postcodes tab On this tab, you can specify the postcodes of the VAT zone, with appropriate ranges of add-on codes for the selected VAT zone.
Column Description
Postcode The postcode associated with this VAT zone.
Postcode +4 (min.) The add-on code (for the postcode) that starts the range of add-on codes associated with this VAT zone.
Postcode +4 (max.) The add-on code (for the postcode) that ends the range of add-on codes associated with this VAT zone.
VAT reports /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT reports VAT reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview page By using the reports for the VAT workspace, you can view key VAT-related information. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT reports - overview By using the reports for the VAT workspace, you can view key VAT-related information. > [!NOTE] > Because the VAT reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## VAT reports The VAT workspace includes the following reports: ### Balance + [VAT summary (TX62100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-summary-tx62100s/): For the selected tax agency and VAT period, displays the report lines and the respective amounts. + [VAT details (TX62051S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-details-tx62051s/): For the selected tax agency and VAT period, displays the report lines and the supporting documents for each line. + [VAT specification (TX62050S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-specification-tx62050s/) + [VAT summary by general ledger account by period (TX622000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-summary-by-general-ledger-account-by-period-tx622000/): For the selected tax agency and tax period, lists totals of taxable transactions by account and by VAT. + [VAT details by general ledger account by period (TX621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-details-by-general-ledger-account-by-period-tx621500/): Displays VAT information for the selected tax agency, grouped by general ledger account and by VAT. Transactions are listed by transaction date. + [VAT summary by general ledger account by date (TX623000)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-summary-by-general-ledger-account-by-date-tx623000/) + [VAT details by general ledger account by date (TX622500)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-details-by-general-ledger-account-by-date-tx622500/): For the selected tax agency, displays taxable transactions, grouped by general ledger account-subaccount pair, VAT, and workspace. + ### Window + [VAT report, Dutch (TX62105S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-report-dutch-tx62105s/): The VAT report depending on the country of the company. + [VAT report, Finnish (TX62102S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-report-finnish-tx62102s/): The VAT report depending on the country of the company. + [VAT report, Norwegian (TX62104S)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-report-norwegian-tx62104s/): The VAT report depending on the country of the company. + [VAT report, Swedish (TX62108S)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-report-swedish-tx62108s/): The VAT report depending on the country of the company. SAF-T report (TX50600S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/saf-t-report-tx50600s page The purpose of this report is to report accounting figures to the government in a standardised format. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # SAF-T report (TX50600S) The purpose of this report is to report accounting figures to the government in a standardised format. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Before you start Before you can send or download a SAF-T file, you must go to the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window, to enter some information for the report. On the tab **Altinn settings**, enter: + contact person, **Name** + phone number, **Telephone** + email address, **Notifications by email to** and + reference number (provided by the government when the report is due) All used **VAT categories** needs to contain **Standard VAT code**. All **Accounts** must contain a **Standard account code**. Depending on the **Organisation type** and if **File VAT by branch** is selected, you have to go to the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. ## The top part
Button Description
Send report

Click this button to create the report according to the filter and selections made, and send it to the Government portal (Altinn) as a zipped file.

The system will not validate the file during this process, and the Government will contact you regarding the result.

Note

If the size of the file exceeds 200 MB, you will see a warning and the file will not be sent. Reduce the size by sending fewer periods. You can, for example, send the first half year and then the second half year, or you can divide it into quarters or one for every month.

Note

Altinn will validate the report file when you upload it. When you see a status similar to “Altinn archive number: AR3833490 Report was sent successfully to the government” it means that the report has passed the XML validation. You will not get any other information about the status in Visma Net, but you can log on to Altinn to see future status changes.

Note

The system does an internal validation according to the XML schema, to make sure it follows the minimum requirements. Some columns can be longer than what the schema allows and will then be truncated to avoid errors.

If this button is disabled, it is because one or all of the fields are empty in the SAF-T report information section on the Altinn settings tab in the Organisations (CS101500) window. This information is mandatory in the report.

If you click Download file, you can create the report and download it to your computer. Use this method if you want to send the report to your accounting auditor or export it to another system. The file is automatically zipped to reduce the size of the file that is stored on your disk.
Account details This button opens the Account details (GL404000) window with the selected account and from/to period. If you have selected another tab than Accounts no action happens.
VAT account control details Click this button to open the VAT account control details (TX40400S) window in a dialog box. The system displays details filtered on the from and to periods, and the account number. You can also include transactions without a VAT period.
General ledger transactions with VAT Clicking this button opens the General ledger transactions with VAT (TX40500S) pop-up window.
Field Description
Company The company that is reporting the SAF-T. The company is only displayed if you have a multi-branch company.
Branch If you have set the File VAT by branch on a Company you must select a branch before you can download or send the report.
Tax agency This filters the VAT codes in the file. It will select this from the Company / Branch - Standard tax agency or the first tax agency available.
From period The fields From and To period let you filter the results on the selected financial period(s). The results are displayed on the Accounts tab and then reported.
To period

The fields From and To period let you filter the results on the selected financial period(s). The results are displayed on the Accounts tab and then reported.

Note! The Closing balance on the Accounts tab will be wrong if the financial year is crossed, and you will not be able to send a report if you select a to period that cross a financial year.
Report status The Report status field is normally empty, but if you have sent or created a report for that period before, it displays the status of the previous report.
Contact person

The contact person in your company, that the government may contact. This field is mandatory. You enter and maintain this information on the Altinn settings tab in the Branches (CS102000) window.

Unless you have selected With branches requiring balancing as the Organisation type and the File VAT by branches check box in the same window, then you have to enter this information in the Branches (CS102000) window.

For companies with a different country then NO - Norway, the contact person is coming from Attention in Company/Branch - Organisation details.
Email The email address of contact person in your company, that the government may contact. This field is mandatory. You enter and maintain this information on the Altinn settings tab in the Branches (CS102000) window.
Phone no.

The telephone number of the contact person in your company, that the government may contact. This field is mandatory. You enter and maintain this information on the Altinn settings tab in the Branches (CS102000) window.

For companies with a different country then NO - Norway, the phone no. is coming from Phone no in Company/Branch - Organisation details.
Reference no.

The government’s reference number for the report. The reference number is mandatory when you send the report to Altinn. The number is given by the authority when they request this report.

For companies with a different country then NO - Norway the Reference no. is not available.
Include customers

If you select this check box, the system will add the Customers tab to the window, which displays all customers that will be sent as a customer segment together with the accounting transactions.

The Show only customer/supplier with missing postcode and/or city check box appears in this section.
Include suppliers

If you select this check box, the system will add the Suppliers tab to the window, which displays all suppliers that will be sent as a supplier segment together with the accounting transactions.

The Show only customer/supplier with missing postcode and/or city check box appears in this section.
Include subaccounts If you select this check box, the system will add the Subaccounts tab to the window, which displays all subaccounts that will be sent as analysis types together with the accounting transactions.
Include projects If you select this check box, the system exports the projects with the analysis type ‘P ’ and the description Project with the accounting transactions.
Include Company name and period in the file name If you select this check box, the Company name and the selected Period will be added as part of the file name when downloading the report. This check-box is selected as the default for all countries exempt from NO - Norway.
Text box

Missing Public code 1:

For Norway and Denmark: If any accounts are missing the Public code 1, you will get a message in this text box that Public code 1 is missing on accounts.

The accounts missing the code will have a warning in the Account tab and on the accounts where Standard account id and Category grouping are missing. You have to update the accounts with the correct code. You cannot send or download the file if this is missing.

For other countries, the system uses the Public code 1 if filled in, or it will use the Account no.

Missing Standard VAT code:

For Norway and Denmark: If any of the VAT categories are missing Standard VAT code, you will get a message in this text box that Standard VAT code is missing, and you have to update the VAT category.

Balanced or unposted batches: If you have Batches that are not posted in the selected period, you will get a message in this text box that there are balanced or unposted batches in the system. You have to update, delete or move them to a later period before you can Send the report. Use the Release transactions (GL501000) or Post transactions (GL502000) window to post these.
## The Accounts tab The **Accounts** tab displays all accounts that have a transaction in the selected period, with a opening and closing balance.
Element Description
Account The account number of the account. If you click the link, the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window is displayed in a dialog box. The standard account number displays the selected number of digits, which you have defined as public account codes in the General ledger preferences (GL102000) window. The system selects the number of digits from the account no. from left. In Norway, the most common number is four digits, but you can also use two.
Account type The type of account, for example, GL for a general ledger account.
Account description The description of the type of account.
Standard account

This field is mandatory for Norway and Denmark. You will get a warning message if this is missing in your Chart of account.

Check and set the correct Standard account in the column Public code 1 in the Chart of accounts (GL202500) window.

It uses the Account no for other countries if the Public code is missing.

The Standard account code can be maintained in the window Public codes (CS20501S).
Grouping category For Norway and Denmark the values are defined in Public codes (CS20501S), Grouping category tab, and the text is defined by the government. For other countries, use the Account class if Public code 1 is missing
Grouping code

The Grouping code is the type of account from the chart of accounts, for example

Asset
,
Liability
,
Income
or
Expense
.

This information is not exported in the downloaded file, nor sent to the authorities.
Account creation date The date the account was created.
Opening balance The opening balance of the account.
Closing balance The closing balance of the account.
## The Customers tab The **Customers** tab displays all customers that have a transaction in the selected period, with a beginning and ending balance. > [!NOTE] > The postcode and the city are not mandatory, but it is preferred that add them. You will get a message if you have not added them.
Element Description
Customer no. If you click the link in the Customer no. field, the system displays a dialog box with the Customers (AR303000) window, where you can see further details about the customer.
Name The name of the customer.
Postcode The postcode of the customer’s address.
City The name of the place or city connected to the customer’s postcode.
Corporate ID The corporate ID or the VAT registration number of the customer.
Account no. The account number of the account.
Beginning balance The customer’s balance at the outset of the period selected in the top part of the window.
Ending balance The customer’s balance at the end of the period selected in the top part of the window.
## The Suppliers tab The **Suppliers** tab displays all suppliers that have a transaction in the selected period, with a beginning and ending balance. > [!NOTE] > The postcode and the city are not mandatory, but it is preferred that add them. You will receive a message if you have not added them.
Element Description
Supplier no. If you click the link in the Supplier no. field, the system displays a dialog box with the Suppliers window, where you can see further details about the supplier.
Name The name of the supplier.
Postcode The postcode of the supplier’s address.
City The name of the place or city connected to the supplier’s postcode.
Corporate ID The corporate ID or the VAT registration number of the supplier.
Account no. The account number of the account.
Beginning balance The supplier’s balance at the outset of the period selected in the top part of the window.
Ending balance The supplier’s balance at the end of the period selected in the top part of the window.
## The Subaccounts tab The **Subaccounts** tab displays the subaccount segments of the account of the branch. You can select which segments you want to export by selecting or deselecting each segment in the list.
Element Description
Export If you select this check box, you indicate that you want to export this subaccount.
Segment ID The subaccount segment ID for export is SUB1, SUB2, etc. You can change the subaccount segment ID and give it another name before you export it.
Segment description The description of the subaccount segment.
Segment ID exported

The name of the ID as you want it to be displayed after export. You can overwrite the text in this field. The system stores the values that you use for subaccounts.

The codes ‘B’ and ‘GL’ are reserved for voucher and general ledger transactions. If you also export project-related segments, you cannot use the segment ID ‘P’, which is reserved for Projects. Examples of codes that you can use, are ‘A’ for Department (avdeling) and ‘E’ for Employee (ansatt).
Description exported The description of the ID as you want it to be displayed after export. You can overwrite the text in this field.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

 VAT details (TX62051S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-details-tx62051s section You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT details (TX62051S) You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. Select the required company from the list.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Tax agency ID

The tax agency to be reported.

Select a tax agency, or leave this field empty to view information on all tax agencies.
Reporting period

The reporting period the report will cover.

Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all closed or prepared VAT periods.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) VAT details by general ledger account by date (TX622500) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-details-by-general-ledger-account-by-date-tx622500 section This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency, grouped by general ledger account and by VAT. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT details by general ledger account by date (TX622500) This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency, grouped by general ledger account and by VAT. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency, grouped by general ledger account and by VAT. Transactions are listed by VAT period. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company The company for which the report will be prepared. Select the required company from the list. By default, the current company is selected. This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch

The branch for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required branch from the list. By default, the current branch is selected.
From date The start date of the date range for which you want to view VAT information.
To date The end date of the date range for which you want to view VAT information.
Tax agency The tax agency for which VAT information will be displayed. Select a tax agency, or leave this field empty to view information on all tax agencies.
VAT The VAT for which you want to view information. Select a VAT, or leave the field blank to view information on all VAT rates associated with the tax agency.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) VAT details by general ledger account by period (TX621500) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-details-by-general-ledger-account-by-period-tx621500 section This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency, grouped by general ledger account and by VAT. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT details by general ledger account by period (TX621500) This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency, grouped by general ledger account and by VAT. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency, grouped by general ledger account and by VAT. Transactions are listed by VAT period. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. Select the required company from the list.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch

The branch for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required branch from the list. By default, the current branch is selected.
Tax agency The tax agency to be reported. Select a tax agency, or leave this field empty to view information on all tax agencies.
VAT period The reporting period the report will cover. Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all closed or prepared VAT periods.
VAT The VAT (by its ID) for which you want to view information. Select a VAT, or leave the field blank to view information on all taxes associated with the tax agency.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) VAT report, Norwegian (TX62104S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-report-norwegian-tx62104s section You use this window to create a report for a selected tax agency and VAT period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT report, Norwegian (TX62104S) You use this window to create a report for a selected tax agency and VAT period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. The report displays the report lines with the summary for each line. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Tax agency The tax agency to be reported.
Reporting period The reporting period to be reported.
From revision ID

The revision number of the VAT report.

It changes each time you prepare a VAT report for a closed reporting period. With each revision, a new purchase invoice is generated automatically and is listed on the Supplier documents tab.

You can generate updated VAT reports for closed reporting periods if this functionality is enabled. The Update closed VAT periods check box is located in the Suppliers (AP303000) window on the Tax agency settings tab.

Select which revision number you want your VAT report to start from. If you leave the field empty the report will start with revision 1.
To revision ID

The revision number of the VAT report.

It changes each time you prepare a VAT report for a closed reporting period. With each revision, a new purchase invoice is generated automatically and is listed on the Supplier documents tab.

You can generate updated VAT reports for closed reporting periods if this functionality is enabled. The Update closed VAT periods check box is located in the Suppliers (AP303000) window, on the Tax agency settings tab.

Select which revision number you want your VAT report to end at. If you leave the field empty it will report up to the last revision.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) VAT summary (TX62100S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-summary-tx62100s section In this window, you can prepare a report that shows the summary VAT information for the specified closed or prepared VAT reporting period for the selected tax agency. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT summary (TX62100S) In this window, you can prepare a report that shows the summary VAT information for the specified closed or prepared VAT reporting period for the selected tax agency. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can prepare a report that shows the summary VAT information for the specified closed or prepared VAT reporting period for the selected tax agency. The report lists the VAT report lines with their respective amounts. The report uses the currency of the tax agency. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. Select the required company from the list.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Tax agency The tax agency to be reported. Select a tax agency, or leave this field empty to view information on all tax agencies.
VAT period The reporting period the report will cover. Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all closed or prepared VAT periods.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) VAT summary by general ledger account by date (TX623000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-summary-by-general-ledger-account-by-date-tx623000 section This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency and time interval. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT summary by general ledger account by date (TX623000) This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency and time interval. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays VAT information for the selected tax agency and time interval. Transactions are listed by general ledger account, VAT, workspace, and date. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required company from the list. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch

The branch for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required branch from the list. By default, the current branch is selected.
From date The start date of the date range for which you want to view VAT information.
To date The end date of the date range for which you want to view VAT information.
Tax agency

The tax agency for which VAT information will be displayed.

Select a tax agency, or leave this field empty to view information on all tax agencies.
VAT

The VAT for which you want to view information.

Select a VAT, or leave the field blank to view information on all VAT rates associated with the tax agency.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) VAT summary by general ledger account by period (TX622000) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-summary-by-general-ledger-account-by-period-tx622000 section By using this report, you can select a tax agency, specify a closed or prepared VAT period, and view the taxable and VAT amounts by general ledger account. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT summary by general ledger account by period (TX622000) By using this report, you can select a tax agency, specify a closed or prepared VAT period, and view the taxable and VAT amounts by general ledger account. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared. Select the required company from the list.

By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) ../shared-files/cs100000-ref.html window.
Branch

The branch for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required branch from the list. By default, the current branch is selected.
Tax agency The tax agency to be reported. Select a tax agency, or leave this field empty to view information on all tax agencies.
VAT period The reporting period the report will cover. Select a period, or leave the field blank to view information on all closed or prepared VAT periods.
VAT The VAT (by its ID) for which you want to view information. Select a VAT, or leave the field blank to view information on all taxes associated with the tax agency.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) VAT specification (TX62050S) /visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-specification-tx62050s section You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # VAT specification (TX62050S) You use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Report parameters
Element Description
Company

The company for which the report will be prepared.

Select the required company from the list. By default, the current company is selected.

This field is available only if the Multi-branch support functionality is enabled in your system in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Tax agency

The tax agency to be reported.

Select a tax agency, or leave this field empty to view information on all tax agencies.
From period The start date of the period range for which you want to view VAT specification.
To period The end date of the period range for which you want to view VAT specification.
From VAT period The start date of the VAT period range for which you want to view VAT specification.
To VAT period The end date of the VAT period range for which you want to view VAT specification.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} Parent topic: [Reports - overview](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-reports/vat-reports-overview/) [tx205000-ref.html](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-tx205000/)